Digital Ricoeur - JStor
Search Term: time
Book Results: 5660
Journal Results: 1087
CHAPTER 7 Purple Silk and Black Cotton: from:
Exploring Jesuit Distinctiveness
Author(s) D’Ortia Linda Zampol
Abstract: On September 10, 1573, Francisco Cabral (1533–1609), superior of the Jesuit mission in Japan, informed the superior general in Rome (Francisco de Borja [1510–72], who had already died by that time) that the ship of Visitor Gonçalo Álvares (1527–73) had sunk in front of the port of Nagasaki, with immense loss of lives and funds. At least the state of the Japanese mission was finally acceptable:
1 Problems of Interpretation: from:
The Political Style of Conspiracy
Abstract: Conspiracy, the secret cooperation for the achievement of some base design, has been a frequently recurring topic of political discussions since ancient times. But it has been the turbulent history of the United States that has provided the most fertile ground for conspiracy discourse. From the time of the Revolution to the present day, conspiracy discourse—that is, linguistic and symbolic practices and artifacts revolving around themes, claims, or accusations of conspiracy—has pervaded diverse forums and genres of American political discourse. For many critics and commentators, the ubiquity of conspiracy theories in American history and the increasing appeal of
3 Charles Sumner’s “Crime Against Kansas”: from:
The Political Style of Conspiracy
Abstract: Charles Sumner was a latecomer to politics. While he had established a reputation as a philanthropist and reformer in the 1830s and early 1840s, he was not politically active until the Texas annexation controversy of the mid-1840s. As is evident by his July 4, 1845, oration, ʺThe True Grandeur of Nations,ʺ Sumnerʹs sudden entrance into politics was inspired largely by his pacifism and his belief that the measure to annex Texas was the work of the slave power and designed to expand slavery westward. At the time, Massachusetts Whigs in Congress were themselves engaged in a vigorous opposition to annexation
Chapter Two The Fundamentals of Revival from:
Superchurch
Abstract: Revival speech is the foundation of Fundamentalist politics. At the heart of Fundamentalist efforts to remake the public—from abolition and temperance to contemporary struggles against abortion and environmentalism—is a desire to make a world in which the gospel message can be propagated and in which people will be more receptive to revivalist persuasion. For much of Christian history it was assumed that this transformation could only come “in the fullness of time,” which had been preordained by God, but Fundamentalist counterpublicity derives from an emerging belief in the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries that human actions could affect God’s
Chapter Two The Fundamentals of Revival from:
Superchurch
Abstract: Revival speech is the foundation of Fundamentalist politics. At the heart of Fundamentalist efforts to remake the public—from abolition and temperance to contemporary struggles against abortion and environmentalism—is a desire to make a world in which the gospel message can be propagated and in which people will be more receptive to revivalist persuasion. For much of Christian history it was assumed that this transformation could only come “in the fullness of time,” which had been preordained by God, but Fundamentalist counterpublicity derives from an emerging belief in the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries that human actions could affect God’s
Hartsdale Pet Cemetery from:
Mourning Animals
Author(s) MARGULIES LIZA WALLIS
Abstract: Despite living most of my life within a fifteen-minute drive of the country’s oldest pet cemetery, it wasn’t until a brisk late-winter afternoon that I visited there for the first time. I had just said a final goodbye to my bonhomous black lab, Ben, and brought him to the crematory on the grounds of the cemetery. The arrestingly cheerful woman behind the desk invited me to walk around the place while he was being cremated. She said it would take roughly two hours. In the end I would leave with a container of ashes.
All the World and a Little Bit More: from:
Mourning Animals
Author(s) PRĘGOWSKI MICHAŁ PIOTR
Abstract: Burying companion animals had been practiced by humans as early as 16,500 years BP, as recent archeological findings from the Epipaleolithic cemetery of Uyun al-Hammam suggest.¹ During the Early Neolithic (ca. 8000 BP) the burials of dogs who accompanied hunter-gatherers were already common.² Despite having a significant history, mortuary practices related to companion animals gained social significance not so long ago—in the nineteenth century, following industrialization, urbanization, as well as the rise of the middle class. At that time, purebred dogs ceased to dwell mostly in upper-class estates and became a fixture in the confined spaces of European and
On Cats and Contradictions: from:
Mourning Animals
Author(s) TIPPER BECKY
Abstract: We live among nonhuman animals. Even in cities and suburbs, spaces seemingly dominated and shaped by human intent, animals inhabit our homes and gardens (sometimes by invitation and sometimes not); their tracks and trails intersect with ours; their lives touch our own. For more than a year, I researched these ordinary encounters between the species. I focused on a neighborhood in a northern English city, and (following in a tradition of interpretive sociology) I employed an ethnographic approach to explore the ways that people made sense of their everyday engagements with the creatures who shared their neighborhood.¹
Another Death from:
Mourning Animals
Author(s) KISIEL EMMA
Abstract: The question of whether or not humans mourn animals is present in all of my photographic work. This theme emerged in my art when I began looking closely at dead animals and making images of roadkill animals, photographing flower and stone memorials I built around their bodies. My recent project, “Another Death,” portrays museum taxidermic animals that have suffered another kind of death after their initial demise. Frozen in time, they are presented either in the throes of death at another creature’s hand or in a limp resting pose, having just passed. Moments like these appear frequently in natural history
Mourning the Mundane: from:
Mourning Animals
Author(s) MONAHAN LINDA
Abstract: I forced myself to look. Turned away from approaching traffic, but visible in profile as my car crawled to a stop was the bloodied face of a fawn. The young deer must have been killed a few days ago as skin was still largely intact, but exposed wounds were black with rot. In that time, tens of thousands of drivers and even more passengers would have passed his or her body. How many noticed? How many had time to take note of the species, possible age, and likely circumstances of the killing? And how many felt compelled to mourn the
Beyond Coping: from:
Mourning Animals
Author(s) AUSTIN JESSICA
Abstract: Animal shelter employees face each day with the possibility of inhabiting antithetical roles: the caretaker, charged with ensuring the safety and well-being of the wards in their custody; and the executioner, overseer of these same animals’ untimely deaths. With shelter euthanasia estimates reaching three million adoptable animals per year, shelter workers shoulder a considerable burden of grief, resulting in stress and manifesting in depression and even physical complaints, such as sleep disturbance and headaches.¹ While several authors describe coping mechanisms for those whose work involves death, both in general and specifically tailored toward shelter employees, little is written about how
Grieving at a Distance from:
Mourning Animals
Author(s) PRIBAC TEYA BROOKS
Abstract: It is not often that, in the daily inundation of concise and carefully selected wordings accompanying images, jointly aiming at bringing the attention of the current-time ever-distracted and ever-rushing viewer to focus on some important plight or another, a verbal-image combination—an Internet meme—strikes me so powerfully as to remain with me for years, possibly forever. This was the case, however, with the photograph of a calf, removed from the mother far too young and placed in a barren crate with barely enough room to move. The calf is looking directly into the camera with pleadingly confused eyes. The
Who Is It Acceptable to Grieve? from:
Mourning Animals
Author(s) MCARTHUR JO-ANNE
Abstract: We grieve our companion animals when they die. Those with whom we share our homes, even our food and our beds. They are dogs, cats, sometimes rodents and winged creatures, sometimes horses or potbellied pigs.
Book Title: Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy-The Living Art of Michael C. Leff
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Author(s): Henry David
Abstract: What distinguishes the study of rhetoric from other pursuits in the liberal arts? From what realms of human existence and expression, of human history, does such study draw its defining character? What, in the end, should be the purposes of rhetorical inquiry? And amid so many competing accounts of discourse, power, and judgment in the contemporary world, how might scholars achieve these purposes through the attitudes and strategies that animate their work?
Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy: The Living Art of Michael C. Leffoffers answers to these questions by introducing the central insights of one of the most innovative and prolific rhetoricians of the twentieth century, Michael C. Leff. This volume charts Leff 's decades-long development as a scholar, revealing both the variety of topics and the approach that marked his oeuvre, as well as his long-standing critique of the disciplinary assumptions of classical, Hellenistic, renaissance, modern, and postmodern rhetoric.Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy includes a synoptic introduction to the evolution of Leff 's thought from his time as a graduate student in the late 1960s to his death in 2010, as well as specific commentary on twenty-four of his most illuminating essays and lectures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/j.ctt1d10hh7
[PART 1. Introduction] from:
Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: Readers in search of an entry point into Michael C. Leff’s signature talent for weaving histories of rhetoric together with theoretical innovations attuned to the present will want to start with “Tradition and Agency in Humanistic Rhetoric.” For Leff, the standard opposition of individual agency to collective tradition had to be reconfigured and rethought for rhetoric’s intelligibility to break through the grid of modernist and postmodernist attitudes towards language, culture, and power. Leff notes how in both ancient and modern times rhetoricians have been taxed with not being independent agents but merely mouthpieces for popular and received opinion. And yet,
[PART 3. Introduction] from:
Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: What Leff at times also deemed “textual analysis” and “textual criticism,” close reading was cultivated across the expanse of his theoretical, historiographical, and critical work
Book Title: Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy-The Living Art of Michael C. Leff
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Author(s): Henry David
Abstract: What distinguishes the study of rhetoric from other pursuits in the liberal arts? From what realms of human existence and expression, of human history, does such study draw its defining character? What, in the end, should be the purposes of rhetorical inquiry? And amid so many competing accounts of discourse, power, and judgment in the contemporary world, how might scholars achieve these purposes through the attitudes and strategies that animate their work?
Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy: The Living Art of Michael C. Leffoffers answers to these questions by introducing the central insights of one of the most innovative and prolific rhetoricians of the twentieth century, Michael C. Leff. This volume charts Leff 's decades-long development as a scholar, revealing both the variety of topics and the approach that marked his oeuvre, as well as his long-standing critique of the disciplinary assumptions of classical, Hellenistic, renaissance, modern, and postmodern rhetoric.Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy includes a synoptic introduction to the evolution of Leff 's thought from his time as a graduate student in the late 1960s to his death in 2010, as well as specific commentary on twenty-four of his most illuminating essays and lectures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/j.ctt1d10hh7
[PART 1. Introduction] from:
Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: Readers in search of an entry point into Michael C. Leff’s signature talent for weaving histories of rhetoric together with theoretical innovations attuned to the present will want to start with “Tradition and Agency in Humanistic Rhetoric.” For Leff, the standard opposition of individual agency to collective tradition had to be reconfigured and rethought for rhetoric’s intelligibility to break through the grid of modernist and postmodernist attitudes towards language, culture, and power. Leff notes how in both ancient and modern times rhetoricians have been taxed with not being independent agents but merely mouthpieces for popular and received opinion. And yet,
[PART 3. Introduction] from:
Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: What Leff at times also deemed “textual analysis” and “textual criticism,” close reading was cultivated across the expanse of his theoretical, historiographical, and critical work
Book Title: Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy-The Living Art of Michael C. Leff
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Author(s): Henry David
Abstract: What distinguishes the study of rhetoric from other pursuits in the liberal arts? From what realms of human existence and expression, of human history, does such study draw its defining character? What, in the end, should be the purposes of rhetorical inquiry? And amid so many competing accounts of discourse, power, and judgment in the contemporary world, how might scholars achieve these purposes through the attitudes and strategies that animate their work?
Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy: The Living Art of Michael C. Leffoffers answers to these questions by introducing the central insights of one of the most innovative and prolific rhetoricians of the twentieth century, Michael C. Leff. This volume charts Leff 's decades-long development as a scholar, revealing both the variety of topics and the approach that marked his oeuvre, as well as his long-standing critique of the disciplinary assumptions of classical, Hellenistic, renaissance, modern, and postmodern rhetoric.Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy includes a synoptic introduction to the evolution of Leff 's thought from his time as a graduate student in the late 1960s to his death in 2010, as well as specific commentary on twenty-four of his most illuminating essays and lectures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/j.ctt1d10hh7
[PART 1. Introduction] from:
Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: Readers in search of an entry point into Michael C. Leff’s signature talent for weaving histories of rhetoric together with theoretical innovations attuned to the present will want to start with “Tradition and Agency in Humanistic Rhetoric.” For Leff, the standard opposition of individual agency to collective tradition had to be reconfigured and rethought for rhetoric’s intelligibility to break through the grid of modernist and postmodernist attitudes towards language, culture, and power. Leff notes how in both ancient and modern times rhetoricians have been taxed with not being independent agents but merely mouthpieces for popular and received opinion. And yet,
[PART 3. Introduction] from:
Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: What Leff at times also deemed “textual analysis” and “textual criticism,” close reading was cultivated across the expanse of his theoretical, historiographical, and critical work
Book Title: Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy-The Living Art of Michael C. Leff
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Author(s): Henry David
Abstract: What distinguishes the study of rhetoric from other pursuits in the liberal arts? From what realms of human existence and expression, of human history, does such study draw its defining character? What, in the end, should be the purposes of rhetorical inquiry? And amid so many competing accounts of discourse, power, and judgment in the contemporary world, how might scholars achieve these purposes through the attitudes and strategies that animate their work?
Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy: The Living Art of Michael C. Leffoffers answers to these questions by introducing the central insights of one of the most innovative and prolific rhetoricians of the twentieth century, Michael C. Leff. This volume charts Leff 's decades-long development as a scholar, revealing both the variety of topics and the approach that marked his oeuvre, as well as his long-standing critique of the disciplinary assumptions of classical, Hellenistic, renaissance, modern, and postmodern rhetoric.Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy includes a synoptic introduction to the evolution of Leff 's thought from his time as a graduate student in the late 1960s to his death in 2010, as well as specific commentary on twenty-four of his most illuminating essays and lectures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/j.ctt1d10hh7
[PART 1. Introduction] from:
Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: Readers in search of an entry point into Michael C. Leff’s signature talent for weaving histories of rhetoric together with theoretical innovations attuned to the present will want to start with “Tradition and Agency in Humanistic Rhetoric.” For Leff, the standard opposition of individual agency to collective tradition had to be reconfigured and rethought for rhetoric’s intelligibility to break through the grid of modernist and postmodernist attitudes towards language, culture, and power. Leff notes how in both ancient and modern times rhetoricians have been taxed with not being independent agents but merely mouthpieces for popular and received opinion. And yet,
[PART 3. Introduction] from:
Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: What Leff at times also deemed “textual analysis” and “textual criticism,” close reading was cultivated across the expanse of his theoretical, historiographical, and critical work
Book Title: Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy-The Living Art of Michael C. Leff
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Author(s): Henry David
Abstract: What distinguishes the study of rhetoric from other pursuits in the liberal arts? From what realms of human existence and expression, of human history, does such study draw its defining character? What, in the end, should be the purposes of rhetorical inquiry? And amid so many competing accounts of discourse, power, and judgment in the contemporary world, how might scholars achieve these purposes through the attitudes and strategies that animate their work?
Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy: The Living Art of Michael C. Leffoffers answers to these questions by introducing the central insights of one of the most innovative and prolific rhetoricians of the twentieth century, Michael C. Leff. This volume charts Leff 's decades-long development as a scholar, revealing both the variety of topics and the approach that marked his oeuvre, as well as his long-standing critique of the disciplinary assumptions of classical, Hellenistic, renaissance, modern, and postmodern rhetoric.Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy includes a synoptic introduction to the evolution of Leff 's thought from his time as a graduate student in the late 1960s to his death in 2010, as well as specific commentary on twenty-four of his most illuminating essays and lectures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/j.ctt1d10hh7
[PART 1. Introduction] from:
Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: Readers in search of an entry point into Michael C. Leff’s signature talent for weaving histories of rhetoric together with theoretical innovations attuned to the present will want to start with “Tradition and Agency in Humanistic Rhetoric.” For Leff, the standard opposition of individual agency to collective tradition had to be reconfigured and rethought for rhetoric’s intelligibility to break through the grid of modernist and postmodernist attitudes towards language, culture, and power. Leff notes how in both ancient and modern times rhetoricians have been taxed with not being independent agents but merely mouthpieces for popular and received opinion. And yet,
[PART 3. Introduction] from:
Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: What Leff at times also deemed “textual analysis” and “textual criticism,” close reading was cultivated across the expanse of his theoretical, historiographical, and critical work
Book Title: Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy-The Living Art of Michael C. Leff
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Author(s): Henry David
Abstract: What distinguishes the study of rhetoric from other pursuits in the liberal arts? From what realms of human existence and expression, of human history, does such study draw its defining character? What, in the end, should be the purposes of rhetorical inquiry? And amid so many competing accounts of discourse, power, and judgment in the contemporary world, how might scholars achieve these purposes through the attitudes and strategies that animate their work?
Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy: The Living Art of Michael C. Leffoffers answers to these questions by introducing the central insights of one of the most innovative and prolific rhetoricians of the twentieth century, Michael C. Leff. This volume charts Leff 's decades-long development as a scholar, revealing both the variety of topics and the approach that marked his oeuvre, as well as his long-standing critique of the disciplinary assumptions of classical, Hellenistic, renaissance, modern, and postmodern rhetoric.Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy includes a synoptic introduction to the evolution of Leff 's thought from his time as a graduate student in the late 1960s to his death in 2010, as well as specific commentary on twenty-four of his most illuminating essays and lectures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/j.ctt1d10hh7
[PART 1. Introduction] from:
Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: Readers in search of an entry point into Michael C. Leff’s signature talent for weaving histories of rhetoric together with theoretical innovations attuned to the present will want to start with “Tradition and Agency in Humanistic Rhetoric.” For Leff, the standard opposition of individual agency to collective tradition had to be reconfigured and rethought for rhetoric’s intelligibility to break through the grid of modernist and postmodernist attitudes towards language, culture, and power. Leff notes how in both ancient and modern times rhetoricians have been taxed with not being independent agents but merely mouthpieces for popular and received opinion. And yet,
[PART 3. Introduction] from:
Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: What Leff at times also deemed “textual analysis” and “textual criticism,” close reading was cultivated across the expanse of his theoretical, historiographical, and critical work
Book Title: Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy-The Living Art of Michael C. Leff
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Author(s): Henry David
Abstract: What distinguishes the study of rhetoric from other pursuits in the liberal arts? From what realms of human existence and expression, of human history, does such study draw its defining character? What, in the end, should be the purposes of rhetorical inquiry? And amid so many competing accounts of discourse, power, and judgment in the contemporary world, how might scholars achieve these purposes through the attitudes and strategies that animate their work?
Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy: The Living Art of Michael C. Leffoffers answers to these questions by introducing the central insights of one of the most innovative and prolific rhetoricians of the twentieth century, Michael C. Leff. This volume charts Leff 's decades-long development as a scholar, revealing both the variety of topics and the approach that marked his oeuvre, as well as his long-standing critique of the disciplinary assumptions of classical, Hellenistic, renaissance, modern, and postmodern rhetoric.Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy includes a synoptic introduction to the evolution of Leff 's thought from his time as a graduate student in the late 1960s to his death in 2010, as well as specific commentary on twenty-four of his most illuminating essays and lectures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/j.ctt1d10hh7
[PART 1. Introduction] from:
Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: Readers in search of an entry point into Michael C. Leff’s signature talent for weaving histories of rhetoric together with theoretical innovations attuned to the present will want to start with “Tradition and Agency in Humanistic Rhetoric.” For Leff, the standard opposition of individual agency to collective tradition had to be reconfigured and rethought for rhetoric’s intelligibility to break through the grid of modernist and postmodernist attitudes towards language, culture, and power. Leff notes how in both ancient and modern times rhetoricians have been taxed with not being independent agents but merely mouthpieces for popular and received opinion. And yet,
[PART 3. Introduction] from:
Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: What Leff at times also deemed “textual analysis” and “textual criticism,” close reading was cultivated across the expanse of his theoretical, historiographical, and critical work
CHAPTER FIVE Recognizing Americans through Scouting from:
To Become an American
Abstract: In her 1918 handbook on the management of girls’ clubs, Helen Ferris suggested methods for forming clubs among immigrant girls. She directed readers, presumably club leaders and members, to find a “foreign girl” with whom you may “get acquainted with most easily.”¹ Ferris continued: “Ask her to introduce you to other foreign girls who she thinks would like to make the summer useful by learning more about America, by learning how to do something, and by having good times.”² For Ferris, girls’ clubs aided the acculturation of the “foreign girl” to the American way of life. Ferris was not alone
CHAPTER SIX The Paradox of Americanization from:
To Become an American
Abstract: After the armistice, a number of legislative and other endeavors increased Americanization initiatives. In New York, Governor Al Smith composed a Reconstruction Commission to shepherd the state through the postwar period. One of the proposals included in reconstruction enlarged funding and opportunities for Americanization. Proponents, progressive state legislators Abram Elkus and Felix Adler, sought to Americanize the least educated residents of the state. Their Americanization plans remained in keeping with the emotional nationalism of wartime programs. As they wrote in 1919,
CHAPTER FIVE Recognizing Americans through Scouting from:
To Become an American
Abstract: In her 1918 handbook on the management of girls’ clubs, Helen Ferris suggested methods for forming clubs among immigrant girls. She directed readers, presumably club leaders and members, to find a “foreign girl” with whom you may “get acquainted with most easily.”¹ Ferris continued: “Ask her to introduce you to other foreign girls who she thinks would like to make the summer useful by learning more about America, by learning how to do something, and by having good times.”² For Ferris, girls’ clubs aided the acculturation of the “foreign girl” to the American way of life. Ferris was not alone
CHAPTER SIX The Paradox of Americanization from:
To Become an American
Abstract: After the armistice, a number of legislative and other endeavors increased Americanization initiatives. In New York, Governor Al Smith composed a Reconstruction Commission to shepherd the state through the postwar period. One of the proposals included in reconstruction enlarged funding and opportunities for Americanization. Proponents, progressive state legislators Abram Elkus and Felix Adler, sought to Americanize the least educated residents of the state. Their Americanization plans remained in keeping with the emotional nationalism of wartime programs. As they wrote in 1919,
The Roots of Violence: from:
Mimetic Theory and World Religions
Author(s) von Rospatt Alexander
Abstract: René Girard’s complex and sophisticated theory of sacrifice offers insights into the workings of human society that transcend culture and time and, while privileging Christianity and modernity, claim a certain universality. This invites scholars of other cultures and religions to consider the applicability of Girardian thought to their own fields of study. As scholars of Buddhism we take up this challenge by bringing Buddhism into conversation with Girard. Instead of concentrating on a particular text (Schlieter 2009) or genre (Hahn 2009) or practice (Arifuku 2009), we aim for a more comprehensive and general engagement with Girard by suggesting how Buddhism
The Self in Crisis from:
Intellectual Sacrifice and Other Mimetic Paradoxes
Abstract: Research work in the humanities in general, and in philosophy in particular, is today looked at with a certain degree of suspicion, for various, and sometimes even opposed, reasons. On one hand, work on subtle epistemological questions and/or historical analysis of the thought of past philosophers is regarded as a navel-gazing activity, otiose at best, wasteful at worst. On the other hand, when philosophy and intellectual analysis come to focus on popular culture phenomena, such as comics, movies, and TV programs, they are regarded as trivializing ideas and as committing themselves to marginal and eventually unimportant work. One possible solution
Hermeneutic Mimetic Theory from:
Intellectual Sacrifice and Other Mimetic Paradoxes
Abstract: In everyday language, the term “paradox” is used to refer to any claim or argument that contrasts with what is usually considered obvious. In a more specific and philosophical sense, a paradox is a claim or an argument that develops from apparently true premises and leads to a seemingly absurd (self-contradictory or logically unacceptable) conclusion. The term is also sometimes used in the context of religion to refer to a form of fideism professing a religious belief even when, or precisely because, that belief defies reason (as paradigmatically expressed by Tertullian’s
Credo quia absurdum). And then there is at least
The Self in Crisis from:
Intellectual Sacrifice and Other Mimetic Paradoxes
Abstract: Research work in the humanities in general, and in philosophy in particular, is today looked at with a certain degree of suspicion, for various, and sometimes even opposed, reasons. On one hand, work on subtle epistemological questions and/or historical analysis of the thought of past philosophers is regarded as a navel-gazing activity, otiose at best, wasteful at worst. On the other hand, when philosophy and intellectual analysis come to focus on popular culture phenomena, such as comics, movies, and TV programs, they are regarded as trivializing ideas and as committing themselves to marginal and eventually unimportant work. One possible solution
Hermeneutic Mimetic Theory from:
Intellectual Sacrifice and Other Mimetic Paradoxes
Abstract: In everyday language, the term “paradox” is used to refer to any claim or argument that contrasts with what is usually considered obvious. In a more specific and philosophical sense, a paradox is a claim or an argument that develops from apparently true premises and leads to a seemingly absurd (self-contradictory or logically unacceptable) conclusion. The term is also sometimes used in the context of religion to refer to a form of fideism professing a religious belief even when, or precisely because, that belief defies reason (as paradigmatically expressed by Tertullian’s
Credo quia absurdum). And then there is at least
The Self in Crisis from:
Intellectual Sacrifice and Other Mimetic Paradoxes
Abstract: Research work in the humanities in general, and in philosophy in particular, is today looked at with a certain degree of suspicion, for various, and sometimes even opposed, reasons. On one hand, work on subtle epistemological questions and/or historical analysis of the thought of past philosophers is regarded as a navel-gazing activity, otiose at best, wasteful at worst. On the other hand, when philosophy and intellectual analysis come to focus on popular culture phenomena, such as comics, movies, and TV programs, they are regarded as trivializing ideas and as committing themselves to marginal and eventually unimportant work. One possible solution
Hermeneutic Mimetic Theory from:
Intellectual Sacrifice and Other Mimetic Paradoxes
Abstract: In everyday language, the term “paradox” is used to refer to any claim or argument that contrasts with what is usually considered obvious. In a more specific and philosophical sense, a paradox is a claim or an argument that develops from apparently true premises and leads to a seemingly absurd (self-contradictory or logically unacceptable) conclusion. The term is also sometimes used in the context of religion to refer to a form of fideism professing a religious belief even when, or precisely because, that belief defies reason (as paradigmatically expressed by Tertullian’s
Credo quia absurdum). And then there is at least
The Self in Crisis from:
Intellectual Sacrifice and Other Mimetic Paradoxes
Abstract: Research work in the humanities in general, and in philosophy in particular, is today looked at with a certain degree of suspicion, for various, and sometimes even opposed, reasons. On one hand, work on subtle epistemological questions and/or historical analysis of the thought of past philosophers is regarded as a navel-gazing activity, otiose at best, wasteful at worst. On the other hand, when philosophy and intellectual analysis come to focus on popular culture phenomena, such as comics, movies, and TV programs, they are regarded as trivializing ideas and as committing themselves to marginal and eventually unimportant work. One possible solution
Hermeneutic Mimetic Theory from:
Intellectual Sacrifice and Other Mimetic Paradoxes
Abstract: In everyday language, the term “paradox” is used to refer to any claim or argument that contrasts with what is usually considered obvious. In a more specific and philosophical sense, a paradox is a claim or an argument that develops from apparently true premises and leads to a seemingly absurd (self-contradictory or logically unacceptable) conclusion. The term is also sometimes used in the context of religion to refer to a form of fideism professing a religious belief even when, or precisely because, that belief defies reason (as paradigmatically expressed by Tertullian’s
Credo quia absurdum). And then there is at least
CHAPTER 1 The Eyes of a Parricide from:
Intimate Domain
Abstract: According to Girard, an exploration of Proust’s
In Search of Lost Timeshould not begin with the novel; rather, it should commence with reflection on a newspaper essay by Proust titled “Filial Sentiments of a Parricide.”¹ Girard argues that this essay constitutes a transformative moment for Proust, providing an occasion for him to break through the strictures of metaphysical desire that have mired him in ontological illness. Girard contends that, in the aftermath of writing this essay, Proust is newly able to identify with others in a nonrivalrous way. Further, Girard submits that insights Proust attains from the essay provide
PRELUDE. from:
Intimate Domain
Abstract: Antigoneis a timeless story about the vicissitudes of sibling relationships.
Book Title: Post-Realism-The Rhetorical Turn in International Relations
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Author(s): Hariman Robert
Abstract: Beer and Hariman provide a coherent set of essays that trace and challenge the tradition of realism which has dominated the thinking of academics and practitioners alike. These timely essays set out a systematic investigation of the major realist writers of the Post- War era, the foundational concepts of international politics, and representative case studies of political discourse.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/j.ctt7zt5q8
Henry Kissinger: from:
Post-Realism
Author(s) Hariman Robert
Abstract: One consequence of realism being deeply embedded in Western culture is that it can operate effectively in fragments. The entire code can be activated any time we are reminded, e.g., that people are by nature self-interested, that law is useless without enforcement, or that testaments of common ideals are mere rhetoric. As we accept these and similar nostrums, we enter a world of states competing for power, experts capable of calculating advantages, and idealists and other amateurs counseling folly. As these beliefs cohere, they shape our attitudes, our sensitivities (or lack of them), and our political identity.
Reinhold Niebuhr and the Rhetoric of Christian Realism from:
Post-Realism
Author(s) Aune James Arnt
Abstract: It is very difficult for an academic audience at the end of the twentieth century to imagine a time when the college preaching circuit was a way for theologians to influence large numbers of students and make a good income, or a time when listening to preaching was at least an occasional experience even for secular intellectuals. Religion remains an important legitimating device for the Republican Party and for what remains of the civil rights movement among African Americans, but religious symbols and themes—the sin of national pride, the tension between the
civitas deiandcivitas terrena—have been
Hans J. Morgenthau In Defense of the National Interest: from:
Post-Realism
Author(s) Goodnight G. Thomas
Abstract: The dramatic ending of the Second World War—the obliteration of Hiroshima and Nagasaki, the revelation of the holocaust, the establishment of the United Nations, and the transformation of the Soviet Union from wartime ally to global competitor—challenged prevailing precepts and practices of international relations. Abjuring the traditional language of diplomacy, elite and public policy discourses of the 1940s were spoken within the horizons of global necessities and apocalyptic fears. A Soviet atomic test in 1949 yet again disrupted the contexts of international relations. “In truth, the first atomic explosion on Russian soil has shattered American foreign policy as
[III Introduction] from:
Post-Realism
Abstract: One rewrites in order to improve a text. Sometimes the result is thought to be the better expression of an original meaning; at other times, it extends the idea in a new direction. In any case, textual revision is a process characterized by imperfection, change, negotiation, and fallibility. Traditionally, realism has seemed to be above this process: One identifies the relations of power or suffers the consequences. This attitude is reflected in the standard invocation of the classics of realism, which are seen as equivalent statements of a core doctrine of universal truths. From Thucydides to Machiavelli to Morgenthau, there
Strategic Intelligence and Discursive Realities from:
Post-Realism
Author(s) Hariman Robert
Abstract: The realist is right about one thing: Much of the time, international politics boils down to strategy. The calculation of advantage in the game of nations is the first condition, the final necessity, and—not to be underestimated—the continuing attraction for those who presume to be players. Therefore, it is not enough for post-realists to articulate a broader conception of scientific inquiry; if we are to move beyond realism, we shall have to provide decision makers with better instruments for strategic analysis. It may seem that these two objectives are mutually contradictory. For example, the post-realist perspective exemplifies the
Book Title: The Genesis of Desire- Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Author(s): Webb Eugene
Abstract: We seem to be abandoning the codes that told previous generations who they should love. But now that many of us are free to choose whoever we want, nothing is less certain. The proliferation of divorces and separations reveal a dynamic we would rather not see: others sometimes reject us as passionately as we are attracted to them.Our desire makes us sick. The throes of rivalry are at the heart of our attraction to one another. This is the central thesis of Jean-Michel Oughourlian's
The Genesis of Desire, where the war of the sexes is finally given a scientific explanation. The discovery of mirror neurons corroborates his ideas, clarifying the phenomena of empathy and the mechanisms of violent reciprocity.How can a couple be saved when they have declared war on one another? By helping them realize that desire originates not in the self but in the other. There are strategies that can help, which Dr. Oughourlian has prescribed successfully to his patients. This work, alternating between case studies and more theoretical statements, convincingly defends the possibility that breakups need not be permanent.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/j.ctt7zt5s7
CHAPTER 4 The Clinical Analysis of Rivalry from:
The Genesis of Desire
Abstract: Sometimes, however, the model remains
3 The Birth of the Symbolic Systems of Labor and Revisionist Zionism from:
Shared Land/Conflicting Identity
Abstract: Most symbol systems are created like a seabed through a process of sedimentation. The new symbol system simply develops over time from the old one. Thus, the symbolic system of American conservatism in the 1990s clearly has evolved from an earlier conservative perspective. In other cases, however, a new symbol system may be created in response to a strong exigency, a perceived crisis. In that circumstance, the failure of the existing system to solve the crisis leads to the development of a new (often revolutionary) system of rhetoric/ideology/myth.
7 Discerning Professional Journalism: from:
Christianity and the Mass Media in America
Abstract: In 1996
Todayshow host Bryant Gumble interviewed former U.S. president Jimmy Carter about his new autobiography. Gumble asked Carter the following question: ʺYou write that you prayed more during your four years in office than basically at any time in your life, and yet I think itʹs fair to say, and I hope this doesnʹt sound too harsh … you are consistently reviewed as one of the more ineffective Presidents of modern times. What do you think, if anything, that says about the power of prayer?ʺ¹
René et moi from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Gans Eric
Abstract: Since the time of Durkheim and Freud, the collective scene of human culture, with its tensions and constraints,
My Encounter with René Girard from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Bandera Cesáreo
Abstract: It happened in the town of East Aurora, in Western New York, where René lived at the time. We had just finished lunch, and he was talking passionately about his work. “I’m convinced,” he said, “I can explain the passage from animal to man.” I will never forget it. My reaction was a bit nervous. I think I told him, only half jokingly, that he should not say such things in public. People might think he was going a little over the edge. But I was impressed by the sheer intellectual power and the scope of what he was explaining
Detour and Sacrifice: from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Dupuy Jean-Pierre
Abstract: I first came across René Girard’s work in 1975. The director of the influential journal Esprit, Jean-Marie Domenach, urged me that year to read
La violence et le sacré.¹ That book represented in his opinion a major breakthrough in the social sciences, and Esprit was playing a major role in publicizing it. I read it reluctantly, as I was at the time still under the spell of the thinking of Ivan Illich, a major social critic with whom I had just collaborated in the writing of his bookMedical Nemesis.² I was impressed but not especially moved by my reading
Already from the Beginning from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Dumouchel Paul
Abstract: I first read René Girard when I was an undergraduate philosophy student, twenty-one or twenty-two years old. I bought
La Violence et sacréin Canada during the summer of what must have been 1972 or 1973. At that time, I worked evening shifts (from 4:00 PM to midnight) on a summer job in a shelter for street kids, mainly young addicts and victims of family violence. I read the book in early September on the plane that brought me back to France and on the train between Paris and Aix-en-Provence where I was studying. I could not put it down.
Literature, Myth, and Prophecy: from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Goodhart Sandor
Abstract: Will these years since World War II prove to have been a turning point? Will historians look back upon this moment and observe that the wartime violence—the Holocaust, Hiroshima and Nagasaki, the day-to-day combat of the war itself (as well as the violence that followed it in Biafra, in Rwanda, and in the killing fields of Pol Pot)—was so great, so horrific, that we finally devised a way to end it? Or will this period that has seemed so momentous to us—to those of us born after the war—turn out to be but a lull in
Girard, Buddhism, and the Psychology of Desire from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Webb Eugene
Abstract: I have been asked to contribute a brief discussion of René Girard’s psychological thought, with some reference to the ways it has contributed to my work in my own areas of interest. My last published volume was a study of French psychological thought that focused extensively on Girard and tried to place him in the context of the Freudian influence in France from the time of Jacques Lacan.¹ Since then I have continued to be interested in the ways in which psychological development may influence or be influenced by patterns of religious thinking. My academic career has spanned several fields,
Breakout from the Belly of the Beast from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Hamerton-Kelly Robert
Abstract: We are asked to tell how “the encounter with his [Girard’s] work has changed your own work,” how it changed the way we do things in all the contexts about which we are willing to write. My encounter with Girard had a great impact on me and I shall try to tell of it in three contexts: general experience (anthropology), biblical interpretation (hermeneutic), and pastoral work (psychology and sociology). Our mandate means that my remarks will perforce be unusually personal; nevertheless, I shall try to stay out of the swamp of sentimentality and off the mountaintop of self-attested success. There
Drawn into Conversion: from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Palaver Wolfgang
Abstract: There were surely several circumstances in my life that prepared me to become interested in mimetic theory while I was studying theology at the University of Innsbruck in Austria. First, I have maintained a long ongoing interest in anthropology. During my time in high school, I was already starting to read books about foreign cultures (both modern and premodern) and even seriously thinking about becoming an anthropologist. Second, I was also very much in love with literature and therefore starting to study German language and literature, in addition to theology. My political involvement in the peace movement of the early
Things Still Hidden . . . from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Bartlett Anthony
Abstract: We would have to wait just a little to see these features of the parable converge with fact—a new millennium, a new world order. In the meantime, however, in that same storied year, literature and history came together for me at a level more truthful even than Orwell’s masterpiece. Another book fell into my hands, one that established a
Mimetic Theory and Christian Theology in the Twenty-first Century from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Hardin Michael E.
Abstract: In 1944, from his prison cell at Tegel, Dietrich Bonhoeffer wondered whether Christianity had in fact outlived its usefulness as a religion.¹ His sentiments have been echoed in the subsequent half-century since, particularly with the rise of the postmodern climate. It would not be difficult to multiply logarithmically these critiques of Christianity. That there has been an expulsion of things Christian from the academy there is no doubt; more notably, it is paralleled in the expulsion of Jesus from the Christian churches.
René Girard’s Hermeneutic: from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Graham Tyler
Abstract: I discovered Girard during my junior year at Stanford University, in the spring of 1994. At that time, my primary intellectual worldview was typical of the literary theoretical climate of the day: deconstruction. Not well schooled in the work of Derrida and others engaged in that mode of criticism, I was easily led to believe that infinite interpretations (and, thus, no one true interpretation) of a text were always possible. I read
Deceit, Desire, and the Novel¹ at the end of the summer, and I still recall the effect of Girard’s description of Don Quixote on the first page: the
René et moi from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Gans Eric
Abstract: Since the time of Durkheim and Freud, the collective scene of human culture, with its tensions and constraints,
My Encounter with René Girard from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Bandera Cesáreo
Abstract: It happened in the town of East Aurora, in Western New York, where René lived at the time. We had just finished lunch, and he was talking passionately about his work. “I’m convinced,” he said, “I can explain the passage from animal to man.” I will never forget it. My reaction was a bit nervous. I think I told him, only half jokingly, that he should not say such things in public. People might think he was going a little over the edge. But I was impressed by the sheer intellectual power and the scope of what he was explaining
Detour and Sacrifice: from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Dupuy Jean-Pierre
Abstract: I first came across René Girard’s work in 1975. The director of the influential journal Esprit, Jean-Marie Domenach, urged me that year to read
La violence et le sacré.¹ That book represented in his opinion a major breakthrough in the social sciences, and Esprit was playing a major role in publicizing it. I read it reluctantly, as I was at the time still under the spell of the thinking of Ivan Illich, a major social critic with whom I had just collaborated in the writing of his bookMedical Nemesis.² I was impressed but not especially moved by my reading
Already from the Beginning from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Dumouchel Paul
Abstract: I first read René Girard when I was an undergraduate philosophy student, twenty-one or twenty-two years old. I bought
La Violence et sacréin Canada during the summer of what must have been 1972 or 1973. At that time, I worked evening shifts (from 4:00 PM to midnight) on a summer job in a shelter for street kids, mainly young addicts and victims of family violence. I read the book in early September on the plane that brought me back to France and on the train between Paris and Aix-en-Provence where I was studying. I could not put it down.
Literature, Myth, and Prophecy: from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Goodhart Sandor
Abstract: Will these years since World War II prove to have been a turning point? Will historians look back upon this moment and observe that the wartime violence—the Holocaust, Hiroshima and Nagasaki, the day-to-day combat of the war itself (as well as the violence that followed it in Biafra, in Rwanda, and in the killing fields of Pol Pot)—was so great, so horrific, that we finally devised a way to end it? Or will this period that has seemed so momentous to us—to those of us born after the war—turn out to be but a lull in
Girard, Buddhism, and the Psychology of Desire from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Webb Eugene
Abstract: I have been asked to contribute a brief discussion of René Girard’s psychological thought, with some reference to the ways it has contributed to my work in my own areas of interest. My last published volume was a study of French psychological thought that focused extensively on Girard and tried to place him in the context of the Freudian influence in France from the time of Jacques Lacan.¹ Since then I have continued to be interested in the ways in which psychological development may influence or be influenced by patterns of religious thinking. My academic career has spanned several fields,
Breakout from the Belly of the Beast from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Hamerton-Kelly Robert
Abstract: We are asked to tell how “the encounter with his [Girard’s] work has changed your own work,” how it changed the way we do things in all the contexts about which we are willing to write. My encounter with Girard had a great impact on me and I shall try to tell of it in three contexts: general experience (anthropology), biblical interpretation (hermeneutic), and pastoral work (psychology and sociology). Our mandate means that my remarks will perforce be unusually personal; nevertheless, I shall try to stay out of the swamp of sentimentality and off the mountaintop of self-attested success. There
Drawn into Conversion: from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Palaver Wolfgang
Abstract: There were surely several circumstances in my life that prepared me to become interested in mimetic theory while I was studying theology at the University of Innsbruck in Austria. First, I have maintained a long ongoing interest in anthropology. During my time in high school, I was already starting to read books about foreign cultures (both modern and premodern) and even seriously thinking about becoming an anthropologist. Second, I was also very much in love with literature and therefore starting to study German language and literature, in addition to theology. My political involvement in the peace movement of the early
Things Still Hidden . . . from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Bartlett Anthony
Abstract: We would have to wait just a little to see these features of the parable converge with fact—a new millennium, a new world order. In the meantime, however, in that same storied year, literature and history came together for me at a level more truthful even than Orwell’s masterpiece. Another book fell into my hands, one that established a
Mimetic Theory and Christian Theology in the Twenty-first Century from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Hardin Michael E.
Abstract: In 1944, from his prison cell at Tegel, Dietrich Bonhoeffer wondered whether Christianity had in fact outlived its usefulness as a religion.¹ His sentiments have been echoed in the subsequent half-century since, particularly with the rise of the postmodern climate. It would not be difficult to multiply logarithmically these critiques of Christianity. That there has been an expulsion of things Christian from the academy there is no doubt; more notably, it is paralleled in the expulsion of Jesus from the Christian churches.
René Girard’s Hermeneutic: from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Graham Tyler
Abstract: I discovered Girard during my junior year at Stanford University, in the spring of 1994. At that time, my primary intellectual worldview was typical of the literary theoretical climate of the day: deconstruction. Not well schooled in the work of Derrida and others engaged in that mode of criticism, I was easily led to believe that infinite interpretations (and, thus, no one true interpretation) of a text were always possible. I read
Deceit, Desire, and the Novel¹ at the end of the summer, and I still recall the effect of Girard’s description of Don Quixote on the first page: the
René et moi from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Gans Eric
Abstract: Since the time of Durkheim and Freud, the collective scene of human culture, with its tensions and constraints,
My Encounter with René Girard from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Bandera Cesáreo
Abstract: It happened in the town of East Aurora, in Western New York, where René lived at the time. We had just finished lunch, and he was talking passionately about his work. “I’m convinced,” he said, “I can explain the passage from animal to man.” I will never forget it. My reaction was a bit nervous. I think I told him, only half jokingly, that he should not say such things in public. People might think he was going a little over the edge. But I was impressed by the sheer intellectual power and the scope of what he was explaining
Detour and Sacrifice: from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Dupuy Jean-Pierre
Abstract: I first came across René Girard’s work in 1975. The director of the influential journal Esprit, Jean-Marie Domenach, urged me that year to read
La violence et le sacré.¹ That book represented in his opinion a major breakthrough in the social sciences, and Esprit was playing a major role in publicizing it. I read it reluctantly, as I was at the time still under the spell of the thinking of Ivan Illich, a major social critic with whom I had just collaborated in the writing of his bookMedical Nemesis.² I was impressed but not especially moved by my reading
Already from the Beginning from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Dumouchel Paul
Abstract: I first read René Girard when I was an undergraduate philosophy student, twenty-one or twenty-two years old. I bought
La Violence et sacréin Canada during the summer of what must have been 1972 or 1973. At that time, I worked evening shifts (from 4:00 PM to midnight) on a summer job in a shelter for street kids, mainly young addicts and victims of family violence. I read the book in early September on the plane that brought me back to France and on the train between Paris and Aix-en-Provence where I was studying. I could not put it down.
Literature, Myth, and Prophecy: from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Goodhart Sandor
Abstract: Will these years since World War II prove to have been a turning point? Will historians look back upon this moment and observe that the wartime violence—the Holocaust, Hiroshima and Nagasaki, the day-to-day combat of the war itself (as well as the violence that followed it in Biafra, in Rwanda, and in the killing fields of Pol Pot)—was so great, so horrific, that we finally devised a way to end it? Or will this period that has seemed so momentous to us—to those of us born after the war—turn out to be but a lull in
Girard, Buddhism, and the Psychology of Desire from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Webb Eugene
Abstract: I have been asked to contribute a brief discussion of René Girard’s psychological thought, with some reference to the ways it has contributed to my work in my own areas of interest. My last published volume was a study of French psychological thought that focused extensively on Girard and tried to place him in the context of the Freudian influence in France from the time of Jacques Lacan.¹ Since then I have continued to be interested in the ways in which psychological development may influence or be influenced by patterns of religious thinking. My academic career has spanned several fields,
Breakout from the Belly of the Beast from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Hamerton-Kelly Robert
Abstract: We are asked to tell how “the encounter with his [Girard’s] work has changed your own work,” how it changed the way we do things in all the contexts about which we are willing to write. My encounter with Girard had a great impact on me and I shall try to tell of it in three contexts: general experience (anthropology), biblical interpretation (hermeneutic), and pastoral work (psychology and sociology). Our mandate means that my remarks will perforce be unusually personal; nevertheless, I shall try to stay out of the swamp of sentimentality and off the mountaintop of self-attested success. There
Drawn into Conversion: from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Palaver Wolfgang
Abstract: There were surely several circumstances in my life that prepared me to become interested in mimetic theory while I was studying theology at the University of Innsbruck in Austria. First, I have maintained a long ongoing interest in anthropology. During my time in high school, I was already starting to read books about foreign cultures (both modern and premodern) and even seriously thinking about becoming an anthropologist. Second, I was also very much in love with literature and therefore starting to study German language and literature, in addition to theology. My political involvement in the peace movement of the early
Things Still Hidden . . . from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Bartlett Anthony
Abstract: We would have to wait just a little to see these features of the parable converge with fact—a new millennium, a new world order. In the meantime, however, in that same storied year, literature and history came together for me at a level more truthful even than Orwell’s masterpiece. Another book fell into my hands, one that established a
Mimetic Theory and Christian Theology in the Twenty-first Century from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Hardin Michael E.
Abstract: In 1944, from his prison cell at Tegel, Dietrich Bonhoeffer wondered whether Christianity had in fact outlived its usefulness as a religion.¹ His sentiments have been echoed in the subsequent half-century since, particularly with the rise of the postmodern climate. It would not be difficult to multiply logarithmically these critiques of Christianity. That there has been an expulsion of things Christian from the academy there is no doubt; more notably, it is paralleled in the expulsion of Jesus from the Christian churches.
René Girard’s Hermeneutic: from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Graham Tyler
Abstract: I discovered Girard during my junior year at Stanford University, in the spring of 1994. At that time, my primary intellectual worldview was typical of the literary theoretical climate of the day: deconstruction. Not well schooled in the work of Derrida and others engaged in that mode of criticism, I was easily led to believe that infinite interpretations (and, thus, no one true interpretation) of a text were always possible. I read
Deceit, Desire, and the Novel¹ at the end of the summer, and I still recall the effect of Girard’s description of Don Quixote on the first page: the
INTRODUCTION. from:
Executing Democracy
Abstract: Thus the news from Andrew Bradford’s
American Weekly Mercuryon 7 July 1737. The second regularly published newspaper in the New World and the most important newspaper in Philadelphia at the time, theAmerican Weekly Mercuryoffers a window into the complicated choices of colonial life. The block of text quoted above appears on page 3, immediately above notices of ships having arrived from and departed for Jamaica, Boston, Cadiz, Barbados, and Bristol; it is three short blocks of text removed from an advertisement for Archibald Cummings’sThe Danger of Breaking Christian Unity: In Two Sermons Preached at Christ’s Church,
CONCLUSION. from:
Executing Democracy
Abstract: A hard-drinking Irishman who emigrated to Philadelphia in 1783, John M’Kean was a notorious wife beater. He apparently hit his wife daily, sometimes for no reason, sometimes for trifling reasons, sometimes just because he was drunk and was in the habit. One wonders what his neighbors were doing during these constant batterings; nonetheless, when he finally killed his wife and was hanged for it, one observer ventured that “the safety of society requires it.” But it would seem that
societywas not threatened, just hiswife—which means that some intervention was needed before, not after, she was beaten to
CHAPTER 7 Multiple Realities: from:
Nosotros
Abstract: In this chapter, I continue to explore the question of what constitutes a convict, a
veterano,as defined by a group of Chicanos in a maximum-security prison in the Southwest. This chapter shows, more than anything, some of the tensions that arise in the prison. How do men deal with the tensions that build up between them? The larger question is, How doveteranosexercise leadership in a prison? To take a leadership role is to take a position that pits one against the guards and prison security. Other questions include: How do men do time? And how do they
CHAPTER 7 Multiple Realities: from:
Nosotros
Abstract: In this chapter, I continue to explore the question of what constitutes a convict, a
veterano,as defined by a group of Chicanos in a maximum-security prison in the Southwest. This chapter shows, more than anything, some of the tensions that arise in the prison. How do men deal with the tensions that build up between them? The larger question is, How doveteranosexercise leadership in a prison? To take a leadership role is to take a position that pits one against the guards and prison security. Other questions include: How do men do time? And how do they
4 TRUITT IN TOKYO (1964–1967) from:
Memory Work
Abstract: Truitt had breakthroughs in Tokyo, but they were hard won. Despite the professional recognition that Truitt achieved while she lived in Japan from 1964 to 1967, it was a time of deep isolation, sadness, and frustration with her studio practice. At the turn of the 1970s, Truitt looked back on the sculptures she made in Japan and found them “simply intelligent,” “lifeless,” and inconsistent with the conceptual thrust of her work since First — and in December 1971, she had the majority of these Japanese works destroyed, nineteen sculptures in all.¹ Yet, despite this iconoclasm, after Truitt returned to the United
Book Title: The Red Sea-In Search of Lost Space
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Wick Alexis
Abstract: The Red Sea has, from time immemorial, been one of the world's most navigated spaces, in the pursuit of trade, pilgrimage and conquest. Yet this multidimensional history remains largely unrevealed by its successive protagonists. Intrigued by the absence of a holistic portrayal of this body of water and inspired by Fernand Braudel's famous work on the Mediterranean, this book brings alive a dynamic Red Sea world across time, revealing the particular features of a unique historical actor. In capturing this heretofore lost space, it also presents a critical, conceptual history of the sea, leading the reader into the heart of Eurocentrism. The Sea, it is shown, is a vital element of the modern philosophy of history.Alexis Wick is not satisfied with this inclusion of the Red Sea into history and attendant critique of Eurocentrism. Contrapuntally, he explores how the world and the sea were imagined differently before imperial European hegemony. Searching for the lost space of Ottoman visions of the sea,
The Red Seamakes a deeper argument about the discipline of history and the historian's craft.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt19633g6
THREE Self-Portrait of the Ottoman Red Sea, June 21, 1777 from:
The Red Sea
Abstract: IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE APPROACH that sees space, not as the foundational objective setting for the unraveling of time, but rather as a multitude of discursively constituted and lived places and landscapes, each with a poetics, a history, and a sense of its own, this chapter affirms the potentiality of alternative geohistorical compositions, governed by a different grammar than that of objective space and time.¹ If the Red Sea was invented only in the early nineteenth century as a scientific object, and if Ottoman public discourse did not frame the area in terms of that category before the 1850s, then
CONCLUSION. from:
The Red Sea
Abstract: AT THE HEART OF THIS book is a basic question that has heretofore largely eluded serious attention: How does history make its subject? Clearly, not all subjects are deemed historical at all times—that much has been clear from the beginnings of the discipline. What is required, then, for a particular object to become a proper subject of history? And what are the implications of such constraints for the history that is being written? In other words, what this book explores is the
rigginginvolved in the safe sailing of the historian’scraft, that is, as per the Merriam-Webster definitions
Book Title: The Thought of Music- Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Kramer Lawrence
Abstract: What, exactly, is knowledge of music? And what does it tell us about humanistic knowledge in general?
The Thought of Musicgrapples directly with these fundamental questions-questions especially compelling at a time when humanistic knowledge is enmeshed in debates about its character and future. In this third volume in a trilogy on musical understanding that includesInterpreting MusicandExpression and Truth, Lawrence Kramer seeks answers in both thoughtaboutmusic and thoughtinmusic-thinking in tones. He skillfully assesses musical scholarship in the aftermath of critical musicology and musical hermeneutics and in view of more recent concerns with embodiment, affect, and performance. This authoritative and timely work challenges the prevailing conceptions of every topic it addresses: language, context, and culture; pleasure and performance; and, through music, the foundations of understanding in the humanities.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt19cc225
THREE The Ineffable and How (Not) to Say It from:
The Thought of Music
Abstract: Musicology is now well into its second revolution in as many decades. So it seems, at any rate, from a North American perspective. When the 1990s ushered in critical musicology, the so-called New Musicology, with its cultural and hermeneutic interests, the more introverted vocabularies that had long set the terms of musical understanding began to break down. Talk about music took on forms previously limited or prohibited; it made sense in terms that would formerly have been spurned as nonsense. The old vocabularies were sometimes put to new uses and sometimes put in the attic. Music thus entered the world,
Book Title: The Thought of Music- Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Kramer Lawrence
Abstract: What, exactly, is knowledge of music? And what does it tell us about humanistic knowledge in general?
The Thought of Musicgrapples directly with these fundamental questions-questions especially compelling at a time when humanistic knowledge is enmeshed in debates about its character and future. In this third volume in a trilogy on musical understanding that includesInterpreting MusicandExpression and Truth, Lawrence Kramer seeks answers in both thoughtaboutmusic and thoughtinmusic-thinking in tones. He skillfully assesses musical scholarship in the aftermath of critical musicology and musical hermeneutics and in view of more recent concerns with embodiment, affect, and performance. This authoritative and timely work challenges the prevailing conceptions of every topic it addresses: language, context, and culture; pleasure and performance; and, through music, the foundations of understanding in the humanities.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt19cc225
THREE The Ineffable and How (Not) to Say It from:
The Thought of Music
Abstract: Musicology is now well into its second revolution in as many decades. So it seems, at any rate, from a North American perspective. When the 1990s ushered in critical musicology, the so-called New Musicology, with its cultural and hermeneutic interests, the more introverted vocabularies that had long set the terms of musical understanding began to break down. Talk about music took on forms previously limited or prohibited; it made sense in terms that would formerly have been spurned as nonsense. The old vocabularies were sometimes put to new uses and sometimes put in the attic. Music thus entered the world,
Book Title: The Thought of Music- Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Kramer Lawrence
Abstract: What, exactly, is knowledge of music? And what does it tell us about humanistic knowledge in general?
The Thought of Musicgrapples directly with these fundamental questions-questions especially compelling at a time when humanistic knowledge is enmeshed in debates about its character and future. In this third volume in a trilogy on musical understanding that includesInterpreting MusicandExpression and Truth, Lawrence Kramer seeks answers in both thoughtaboutmusic and thoughtinmusic-thinking in tones. He skillfully assesses musical scholarship in the aftermath of critical musicology and musical hermeneutics and in view of more recent concerns with embodiment, affect, and performance. This authoritative and timely work challenges the prevailing conceptions of every topic it addresses: language, context, and culture; pleasure and performance; and, through music, the foundations of understanding in the humanities.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt19cc225
THREE The Ineffable and How (Not) to Say It from:
The Thought of Music
Abstract: Musicology is now well into its second revolution in as many decades. So it seems, at any rate, from a North American perspective. When the 1990s ushered in critical musicology, the so-called New Musicology, with its cultural and hermeneutic interests, the more introverted vocabularies that had long set the terms of musical understanding began to break down. Talk about music took on forms previously limited or prohibited; it made sense in terms that would formerly have been spurned as nonsense. The old vocabularies were sometimes put to new uses and sometimes put in the attic. Music thus entered the world,
Book Title: Symposium of the Whole-A Range of Discourse Toward an Ethnopoetics
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Rothenberg Diane
Abstract: Symposium of the Wholetraces a discourse on poetry and culture that has profoundly influenced the art of our time, with precedents going back two centuries and more. Beginning with a reassertion of the complexity of poetry among peoples long labeled "primitive" and "savage," many recent poets have sought to base a new poetics over the fullest range of human cultures. The attempt to define an ethnopoetics has been significantly connected with the most experimental and future-directed side of Romantic and modern poetry, both in the Western world and, increasingly, outside it. As a visionary poetics and as a politics, this complex redefinition of cultural and intellectual values has involved a rarely acknowledged collaboration between poets and scholars, who together have challenged the narrow view of literature that has excluded so many traditions.In this gathering, the Rothenbergs follow the idea of an ethnopoetics from predecessors such as Vico, Blake, Thoreau, and Tzara to more recent essays and manifestos by poets and social thinkers such as Olson, Eliade, Snyder, Turner, and Baraka. The themes range widely, from the divergence of oral and written cultures to the shaman as proto-poet and the reemergence of suppressed and rejected forms and images: the goddess, the trickster, and the "human universe." The book's three ethnographic sections demonstrate how various poetries are structured and composed, how they reflect meaning and worldview, and how they are performed in cultures where all art may be thought of as art-in-motion.Among the poetries discussed are the language of magic; West African drum language and poetry; the Huichol Indian language of reversals; chance operations in African divination poetry; picture-writings and action-writings from Australia and Africa; and American Indian sacred-clown dramas and traditional trickster narratives. The cumulative effect is a new reading of the poetic past and present-in the editors' words, "a changed paradigm of what poetry was or now could come to be."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1bmzkq4
From a Correspondence on Ossian and the Songs of Ancient Peoples from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) HERDER JOHANN GOTTFRIED
Abstract: With Herder we get the outlines for an actual and still viable ethnopoetics—a concept of poetry ʺemancipated from rationalist or Christian context and strictures, opening to world horizons, the dimension of time and cultural relativism, and deepening its meaning as a profound mode of truthʺ (Feldman, Modern Mythology, p. 225). But the universal poetics Herder creates has a new and strict regard for cultural autonomies and particularities—allowing the reentry of the outcast European (ʺfolkʺ) past and the more distant poetries of peoples then falling to European domination. Herderʹs Volkslieder (1778) is a first anthology with ethnopoetic scope: ʺnot
Paideuma from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) FROBENIUS LEO
Abstract: One of the first Westerners to recognize the actual achievement of traditional African art, Frobenius (1873–1938) spent many years in Africa, gathered and translated African oral traditions, and founded the Institute for Cultural Morphology in Frankfurt as a repository for (largely facsimiles of) prehistoric and African paintings and engravings. He was, in anthropological terms, a leading German diffusionist who advocated a complex, multifactorial approach to the analysis of cultural transmission, but in British and American anthropology, for example, his reputation is by now minimal. At the same time, he has profoundly influenced at least two major and largely unrelated
Plato and the Definition of the Primitive from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) DIAMOND STANLEY
Abstract: At the heart of Diamondʹs engaged and committed anthropology is the image of a ʺsearch for the primitiveʺ—as ʺan attempt to define a primary human potential,ʺ to transcend thereby the ʺprimitive-civilized dichotomyʺ that he traces back to the origins of the political state, with its antagonism to ambivalence and to the concrete instance in favor of a ʺPlatonic abstraction, the essence of civilized modalities of thoughtʺ (Compare Olsonʹs ʺwe have lived long in a generalizing time,ʺ p. 63, above.) More than any contemporary anthropologist of note, with the possible exception of Victor Turner, Diamond insists on an internalized poetics
Pre-Face to Technicians of the Sacred from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) ROTHENBERG JEROME
Abstract: ʺTherefore, in outline: (1) the traditions in question add to any reconsideration of poetry as ʹvisionʹ & ʹcommunionʹ a series of authentic instances (historical & cultural) in which such functions were realized; (2) they provide the idea of the oral & mythic as self-corrective tellings, & the evidence of how it works; (3) they give a functional dimension to ʹmeaningʹ or ʹsignificanceʹ in the poetic act: the evidence that even apparently minimal forms may have a great complexity of function (ʹthe smallest things can turn you onʹ—P. Blackburn) … but at the same time, an expanded notion of alternative poetic & linguistic structures; (4)
Speech and Image: from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) SENGHOR LÉOPOLD SÉDAR
Abstract: Emerging from the Negritude movement of the 1930s (see above, p. 52), Senghor became the first and long-reigning president of Senegal from the time of its independence in 1960. His poetics drew from a base in African oral tradition, illuminated by and in turn illuminating the explorations of European Surrealism, etc. For the ʺsurreal imageʺ per se, the reader might turn to Pierre Reverdyʹs classic ʺdefinition,ʺ circa 1918, often cited by the French Surrealists:
The Divination Poetry of Ifa from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) FINNEGAN RUTH
Abstract: Though divination as such has had minimal impact on contemporary poetry, the underpinnings of divination in systematic chance procedures relate closely to processes used by experimental poets and artists, from the Dada work of Duchamp, Arp, and Tzara to its fuller development by Jackson Mac Low and John Cage. For this, the traditional system most drawn from is that of the Chinese I Ching, as modified by Carl Jungʹs speculation on ʺsynchronicity,ʺ the ʺacausal connectionsʺ between things happening at the same time (Wilhelm/Baynes 1950). But itʹs in the widespread African practices that we find a still actively creative, large, and
The Fertilizing Word from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) GRIAULE MARCEL
Abstract: The conversations between Ogotemmêli, an elder of the Dogon in the Western Sudan, and the ethnographer, Marcel Griaule, took place over thirty-three successive days in October 1946. During that time, according to Griaule, Ogotemmêli ʺlaid bare the framework of a world system: … a cosmogony as rich as that of Hesiod, poet of a dead world, and a metaphysics that has the advantage of being expressed in a thousand rites and actions in the life of a multitude of living beingsʺ (1965: 3). That ʺsystemʺ—or the part of it presented to Griaule—sets up a vast web of correspondences
On the Psychology of the Trickster Figure from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) JUNG CARL G.
Abstract: Few myths have so wide a distribution as the one known by the name of The Trickster…. Among the North American Indians, Trickster is at one and the same time creator and destroyer, giver and negator, he who dupes the others and who is always
The Return of the Symbol from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) ELIADE MIRCEA
Abstract: The surprising popularity of psychoanalysis has made the fortunes of certain key-words: image, symbol and symbolism have now become current coin. At the same time, systematic research devoted to the mechanisms of “primitive mentality” has revealed the importance of symbolism in archaic thinking and also the fundamental part it plays in the life of any and every primitive society. The obsolescence of “scientism” in philosophy, the revival of interest in religion since the first world war, many poetic developments and, above all, the researches of
Total Translation: from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) ROTHENBERG JEROME
Abstract: At the time o f this writing (1969), the other key works toward
The Man Made of Words from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) MOMADAY N. SCOTT
Abstract: When I was a child, my father told me the story of the arrowmaker; and he told it to me many times, for I fell in love with it. I have no memory that
Neo-HooDoo Manifesto/The Neo-HooDoo Aesthetic from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) REED ISHMAEL
Abstract: Ishmael Reed has long been a prolific and active poet and novelist, whose language and concerns reflect the particular and universal poles of a genuine ethnopoetics. As editor of the influential magazine, YʹBird,and as a founder (with Bob Callahan, Frank Chin, Victor Hernandez Cruz, David Meltzer, and Simon Ortiz) of the San Francisco-based Before Columbus Foundation, he writes: ʺWe welcome a time in history when ʹAmericanʹ is no longer interchangeable with rudeness, grossness and provincialism, but has begun to stand for a society where all of the cultures of the world may co-exist and in which cultural exchange is
Talking to Discover from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) ANTIN DAVID
Abstract: As an early participant in the ethnopoetic discussion, David Antin has explored a radically ʺnewʺ source for poetry in speech and discourse. This has involved, as here, a tension with the idea of poetryʹs origins in song, and an intensification, touched on in the pieces that follow and elsewhere in this book, of the old dichotomy between the oral and the written. Antinʹs own poetry over the last decade has taken a form sometimes indistinguishable from ʺtalkingʺ per se, culminating in an ongoing series of written and elaborated poem-transcriptions. (See below, p. 469.) His principal works in this genre are
Book Title: Symposium of the Whole-A Range of Discourse Toward an Ethnopoetics
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Rothenberg Diane
Abstract: Symposium of the Wholetraces a discourse on poetry and culture that has profoundly influenced the art of our time, with precedents going back two centuries and more. Beginning with a reassertion of the complexity of poetry among peoples long labeled "primitive" and "savage," many recent poets have sought to base a new poetics over the fullest range of human cultures. The attempt to define an ethnopoetics has been significantly connected with the most experimental and future-directed side of Romantic and modern poetry, both in the Western world and, increasingly, outside it. As a visionary poetics and as a politics, this complex redefinition of cultural and intellectual values has involved a rarely acknowledged collaboration between poets and scholars, who together have challenged the narrow view of literature that has excluded so many traditions.In this gathering, the Rothenbergs follow the idea of an ethnopoetics from predecessors such as Vico, Blake, Thoreau, and Tzara to more recent essays and manifestos by poets and social thinkers such as Olson, Eliade, Snyder, Turner, and Baraka. The themes range widely, from the divergence of oral and written cultures to the shaman as proto-poet and the reemergence of suppressed and rejected forms and images: the goddess, the trickster, and the "human universe." The book's three ethnographic sections demonstrate how various poetries are structured and composed, how they reflect meaning and worldview, and how they are performed in cultures where all art may be thought of as art-in-motion.Among the poetries discussed are the language of magic; West African drum language and poetry; the Huichol Indian language of reversals; chance operations in African divination poetry; picture-writings and action-writings from Australia and Africa; and American Indian sacred-clown dramas and traditional trickster narratives. The cumulative effect is a new reading of the poetic past and present-in the editors' words, "a changed paradigm of what poetry was or now could come to be."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1bmzkq4
From a Correspondence on Ossian and the Songs of Ancient Peoples from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) HERDER JOHANN GOTTFRIED
Abstract: With Herder we get the outlines for an actual and still viable ethnopoetics—a concept of poetry ʺemancipated from rationalist or Christian context and strictures, opening to world horizons, the dimension of time and cultural relativism, and deepening its meaning as a profound mode of truthʺ (Feldman, Modern Mythology, p. 225). But the universal poetics Herder creates has a new and strict regard for cultural autonomies and particularities—allowing the reentry of the outcast European (ʺfolkʺ) past and the more distant poetries of peoples then falling to European domination. Herderʹs Volkslieder (1778) is a first anthology with ethnopoetic scope: ʺnot
Paideuma from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) FROBENIUS LEO
Abstract: One of the first Westerners to recognize the actual achievement of traditional African art, Frobenius (1873–1938) spent many years in Africa, gathered and translated African oral traditions, and founded the Institute for Cultural Morphology in Frankfurt as a repository for (largely facsimiles of) prehistoric and African paintings and engravings. He was, in anthropological terms, a leading German diffusionist who advocated a complex, multifactorial approach to the analysis of cultural transmission, but in British and American anthropology, for example, his reputation is by now minimal. At the same time, he has profoundly influenced at least two major and largely unrelated
Plato and the Definition of the Primitive from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) DIAMOND STANLEY
Abstract: At the heart of Diamondʹs engaged and committed anthropology is the image of a ʺsearch for the primitiveʺ—as ʺan attempt to define a primary human potential,ʺ to transcend thereby the ʺprimitive-civilized dichotomyʺ that he traces back to the origins of the political state, with its antagonism to ambivalence and to the concrete instance in favor of a ʺPlatonic abstraction, the essence of civilized modalities of thoughtʺ (Compare Olsonʹs ʺwe have lived long in a generalizing time,ʺ p. 63, above.) More than any contemporary anthropologist of note, with the possible exception of Victor Turner, Diamond insists on an internalized poetics
Pre-Face to Technicians of the Sacred from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) ROTHENBERG JEROME
Abstract: ʺTherefore, in outline: (1) the traditions in question add to any reconsideration of poetry as ʹvisionʹ & ʹcommunionʹ a series of authentic instances (historical & cultural) in which such functions were realized; (2) they provide the idea of the oral & mythic as self-corrective tellings, & the evidence of how it works; (3) they give a functional dimension to ʹmeaningʹ or ʹsignificanceʹ in the poetic act: the evidence that even apparently minimal forms may have a great complexity of function (ʹthe smallest things can turn you onʹ—P. Blackburn) … but at the same time, an expanded notion of alternative poetic & linguistic structures; (4)
Speech and Image: from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) SENGHOR LÉOPOLD SÉDAR
Abstract: Emerging from the Negritude movement of the 1930s (see above, p. 52), Senghor became the first and long-reigning president of Senegal from the time of its independence in 1960. His poetics drew from a base in African oral tradition, illuminated by and in turn illuminating the explorations of European Surrealism, etc. For the ʺsurreal imageʺ per se, the reader might turn to Pierre Reverdyʹs classic ʺdefinition,ʺ circa 1918, often cited by the French Surrealists:
The Divination Poetry of Ifa from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) FINNEGAN RUTH
Abstract: Though divination as such has had minimal impact on contemporary poetry, the underpinnings of divination in systematic chance procedures relate closely to processes used by experimental poets and artists, from the Dada work of Duchamp, Arp, and Tzara to its fuller development by Jackson Mac Low and John Cage. For this, the traditional system most drawn from is that of the Chinese I Ching, as modified by Carl Jungʹs speculation on ʺsynchronicity,ʺ the ʺacausal connectionsʺ between things happening at the same time (Wilhelm/Baynes 1950). But itʹs in the widespread African practices that we find a still actively creative, large, and
The Fertilizing Word from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) GRIAULE MARCEL
Abstract: The conversations between Ogotemmêli, an elder of the Dogon in the Western Sudan, and the ethnographer, Marcel Griaule, took place over thirty-three successive days in October 1946. During that time, according to Griaule, Ogotemmêli ʺlaid bare the framework of a world system: … a cosmogony as rich as that of Hesiod, poet of a dead world, and a metaphysics that has the advantage of being expressed in a thousand rites and actions in the life of a multitude of living beingsʺ (1965: 3). That ʺsystemʺ—or the part of it presented to Griaule—sets up a vast web of correspondences
On the Psychology of the Trickster Figure from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) JUNG CARL G.
Abstract: Few myths have so wide a distribution as the one known by the name of The Trickster…. Among the North American Indians, Trickster is at one and the same time creator and destroyer, giver and negator, he who dupes the others and who is always
The Return of the Symbol from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) ELIADE MIRCEA
Abstract: The surprising popularity of psychoanalysis has made the fortunes of certain key-words: image, symbol and symbolism have now become current coin. At the same time, systematic research devoted to the mechanisms of “primitive mentality” has revealed the importance of symbolism in archaic thinking and also the fundamental part it plays in the life of any and every primitive society. The obsolescence of “scientism” in philosophy, the revival of interest in religion since the first world war, many poetic developments and, above all, the researches of
Total Translation: from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) ROTHENBERG JEROME
Abstract: At the time o f this writing (1969), the other key works toward
The Man Made of Words from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) MOMADAY N. SCOTT
Abstract: When I was a child, my father told me the story of the arrowmaker; and he told it to me many times, for I fell in love with it. I have no memory that
Neo-HooDoo Manifesto/The Neo-HooDoo Aesthetic from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) REED ISHMAEL
Abstract: Ishmael Reed has long been a prolific and active poet and novelist, whose language and concerns reflect the particular and universal poles of a genuine ethnopoetics. As editor of the influential magazine, YʹBird,and as a founder (with Bob Callahan, Frank Chin, Victor Hernandez Cruz, David Meltzer, and Simon Ortiz) of the San Francisco-based Before Columbus Foundation, he writes: ʺWe welcome a time in history when ʹAmericanʹ is no longer interchangeable with rudeness, grossness and provincialism, but has begun to stand for a society where all of the cultures of the world may co-exist and in which cultural exchange is
Talking to Discover from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) ANTIN DAVID
Abstract: As an early participant in the ethnopoetic discussion, David Antin has explored a radically ʺnewʺ source for poetry in speech and discourse. This has involved, as here, a tension with the idea of poetryʹs origins in song, and an intensification, touched on in the pieces that follow and elsewhere in this book, of the old dichotomy between the oral and the written. Antinʹs own poetry over the last decade has taken a form sometimes indistinguishable from ʺtalkingʺ per se, culminating in an ongoing series of written and elaborated poem-transcriptions. (See below, p. 469.) His principal works in this genre are
Book Title: Symposium of the Whole-A Range of Discourse Toward an Ethnopoetics
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Rothenberg Diane
Abstract: Symposium of the Wholetraces a discourse on poetry and culture that has profoundly influenced the art of our time, with precedents going back two centuries and more. Beginning with a reassertion of the complexity of poetry among peoples long labeled "primitive" and "savage," many recent poets have sought to base a new poetics over the fullest range of human cultures. The attempt to define an ethnopoetics has been significantly connected with the most experimental and future-directed side of Romantic and modern poetry, both in the Western world and, increasingly, outside it. As a visionary poetics and as a politics, this complex redefinition of cultural and intellectual values has involved a rarely acknowledged collaboration between poets and scholars, who together have challenged the narrow view of literature that has excluded so many traditions.In this gathering, the Rothenbergs follow the idea of an ethnopoetics from predecessors such as Vico, Blake, Thoreau, and Tzara to more recent essays and manifestos by poets and social thinkers such as Olson, Eliade, Snyder, Turner, and Baraka. The themes range widely, from the divergence of oral and written cultures to the shaman as proto-poet and the reemergence of suppressed and rejected forms and images: the goddess, the trickster, and the "human universe." The book's three ethnographic sections demonstrate how various poetries are structured and composed, how they reflect meaning and worldview, and how they are performed in cultures where all art may be thought of as art-in-motion.Among the poetries discussed are the language of magic; West African drum language and poetry; the Huichol Indian language of reversals; chance operations in African divination poetry; picture-writings and action-writings from Australia and Africa; and American Indian sacred-clown dramas and traditional trickster narratives. The cumulative effect is a new reading of the poetic past and present-in the editors' words, "a changed paradigm of what poetry was or now could come to be."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1bmzkq4
From a Correspondence on Ossian and the Songs of Ancient Peoples from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) HERDER JOHANN GOTTFRIED
Abstract: With Herder we get the outlines for an actual and still viable ethnopoetics—a concept of poetry ʺemancipated from rationalist or Christian context and strictures, opening to world horizons, the dimension of time and cultural relativism, and deepening its meaning as a profound mode of truthʺ (Feldman, Modern Mythology, p. 225). But the universal poetics Herder creates has a new and strict regard for cultural autonomies and particularities—allowing the reentry of the outcast European (ʺfolkʺ) past and the more distant poetries of peoples then falling to European domination. Herderʹs Volkslieder (1778) is a first anthology with ethnopoetic scope: ʺnot
Paideuma from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) FROBENIUS LEO
Abstract: One of the first Westerners to recognize the actual achievement of traditional African art, Frobenius (1873–1938) spent many years in Africa, gathered and translated African oral traditions, and founded the Institute for Cultural Morphology in Frankfurt as a repository for (largely facsimiles of) prehistoric and African paintings and engravings. He was, in anthropological terms, a leading German diffusionist who advocated a complex, multifactorial approach to the analysis of cultural transmission, but in British and American anthropology, for example, his reputation is by now minimal. At the same time, he has profoundly influenced at least two major and largely unrelated
Plato and the Definition of the Primitive from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) DIAMOND STANLEY
Abstract: At the heart of Diamondʹs engaged and committed anthropology is the image of a ʺsearch for the primitiveʺ—as ʺan attempt to define a primary human potential,ʺ to transcend thereby the ʺprimitive-civilized dichotomyʺ that he traces back to the origins of the political state, with its antagonism to ambivalence and to the concrete instance in favor of a ʺPlatonic abstraction, the essence of civilized modalities of thoughtʺ (Compare Olsonʹs ʺwe have lived long in a generalizing time,ʺ p. 63, above.) More than any contemporary anthropologist of note, with the possible exception of Victor Turner, Diamond insists on an internalized poetics
Pre-Face to Technicians of the Sacred from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) ROTHENBERG JEROME
Abstract: ʺTherefore, in outline: (1) the traditions in question add to any reconsideration of poetry as ʹvisionʹ & ʹcommunionʹ a series of authentic instances (historical & cultural) in which such functions were realized; (2) they provide the idea of the oral & mythic as self-corrective tellings, & the evidence of how it works; (3) they give a functional dimension to ʹmeaningʹ or ʹsignificanceʹ in the poetic act: the evidence that even apparently minimal forms may have a great complexity of function (ʹthe smallest things can turn you onʹ—P. Blackburn) … but at the same time, an expanded notion of alternative poetic & linguistic structures; (4)
Speech and Image: from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) SENGHOR LÉOPOLD SÉDAR
Abstract: Emerging from the Negritude movement of the 1930s (see above, p. 52), Senghor became the first and long-reigning president of Senegal from the time of its independence in 1960. His poetics drew from a base in African oral tradition, illuminated by and in turn illuminating the explorations of European Surrealism, etc. For the ʺsurreal imageʺ per se, the reader might turn to Pierre Reverdyʹs classic ʺdefinition,ʺ circa 1918, often cited by the French Surrealists:
The Divination Poetry of Ifa from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) FINNEGAN RUTH
Abstract: Though divination as such has had minimal impact on contemporary poetry, the underpinnings of divination in systematic chance procedures relate closely to processes used by experimental poets and artists, from the Dada work of Duchamp, Arp, and Tzara to its fuller development by Jackson Mac Low and John Cage. For this, the traditional system most drawn from is that of the Chinese I Ching, as modified by Carl Jungʹs speculation on ʺsynchronicity,ʺ the ʺacausal connectionsʺ between things happening at the same time (Wilhelm/Baynes 1950). But itʹs in the widespread African practices that we find a still actively creative, large, and
The Fertilizing Word from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) GRIAULE MARCEL
Abstract: The conversations between Ogotemmêli, an elder of the Dogon in the Western Sudan, and the ethnographer, Marcel Griaule, took place over thirty-three successive days in October 1946. During that time, according to Griaule, Ogotemmêli ʺlaid bare the framework of a world system: … a cosmogony as rich as that of Hesiod, poet of a dead world, and a metaphysics that has the advantage of being expressed in a thousand rites and actions in the life of a multitude of living beingsʺ (1965: 3). That ʺsystemʺ—or the part of it presented to Griaule—sets up a vast web of correspondences
On the Psychology of the Trickster Figure from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) JUNG CARL G.
Abstract: Few myths have so wide a distribution as the one known by the name of The Trickster…. Among the North American Indians, Trickster is at one and the same time creator and destroyer, giver and negator, he who dupes the others and who is always
The Return of the Symbol from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) ELIADE MIRCEA
Abstract: The surprising popularity of psychoanalysis has made the fortunes of certain key-words: image, symbol and symbolism have now become current coin. At the same time, systematic research devoted to the mechanisms of “primitive mentality” has revealed the importance of symbolism in archaic thinking and also the fundamental part it plays in the life of any and every primitive society. The obsolescence of “scientism” in philosophy, the revival of interest in religion since the first world war, many poetic developments and, above all, the researches of
Total Translation: from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) ROTHENBERG JEROME
Abstract: At the time o f this writing (1969), the other key works toward
The Man Made of Words from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) MOMADAY N. SCOTT
Abstract: When I was a child, my father told me the story of the arrowmaker; and he told it to me many times, for I fell in love with it. I have no memory that
Neo-HooDoo Manifesto/The Neo-HooDoo Aesthetic from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) REED ISHMAEL
Abstract: Ishmael Reed has long been a prolific and active poet and novelist, whose language and concerns reflect the particular and universal poles of a genuine ethnopoetics. As editor of the influential magazine, YʹBird,and as a founder (with Bob Callahan, Frank Chin, Victor Hernandez Cruz, David Meltzer, and Simon Ortiz) of the San Francisco-based Before Columbus Foundation, he writes: ʺWe welcome a time in history when ʹAmericanʹ is no longer interchangeable with rudeness, grossness and provincialism, but has begun to stand for a society where all of the cultures of the world may co-exist and in which cultural exchange is
Talking to Discover from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) ANTIN DAVID
Abstract: As an early participant in the ethnopoetic discussion, David Antin has explored a radically ʺnewʺ source for poetry in speech and discourse. This has involved, as here, a tension with the idea of poetryʹs origins in song, and an intensification, touched on in the pieces that follow and elsewhere in this book, of the old dichotomy between the oral and the written. Antinʹs own poetry over the last decade has taken a form sometimes indistinguishable from ʺtalkingʺ per se, culminating in an ongoing series of written and elaborated poem-transcriptions. (See below, p. 469.) His principal works in this genre are
2 Two Cities, Two Systems, Similar Problems: from:
A Dream Denied
Abstract: In the fall of 2009, when I visited the Cook County Juvenile Temporary Detention Center (JTDC) in Chicago for the first time, I was not sure what to expect. I had read about the abuse, overcrowding, and unsanitary conditions that led to an ACLU lawsuit filed against the center in the late 1990s. Would I see teenagers living in filth under deplorable circumstances, or had conditions truly improved since Earl Dunlap, a widely respected juvenile justice reformer, took over the JTDC as transitional administrator in 2007?
3 Too Little Too Late: from:
A Dream Denied
Abstract: I met Demetrius at the Healy North Alternative School in July 2010, when he was fifteen years old. He was on probation for armed robbery and had violated his home confinement. Rather than being held at the JTDC, he was sent to the Saura Center. Over the course of the two years I met with Demetrius, he was held once at the Saura Center and three times at the JTDC. Twice he was committed to St. Charles, a juvenile prison outside Chicago. During the summer of 2011, Demetrius was shot seven times in the legs. He was released from the
Coda: from:
Listening for the Secret
Abstract: Was it all just a ʺsunshine daydreamʺ? The world at large kept on with its usual business of ʺwar, kidnappings, crimes,ʺ as Bill Graham had said when introducing the band (above, Introduction), while the Grateful Dead played on, listening for secrets and searching for sounds as Robert M. Petersenʹs lyrics for ʺUnbroken Chainʺ describe, or Bob Weir proclaiming the ʺsunshine daydreamʺ of ʺSugar Magnolia.ʺ Maybe it was just a daydream—but if so, then it was one that lasted for an unusually long stretch of time. And apparently that daydream was real enough to create believers in that promise of
Book Title: i never knew what time it was- Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): antin david
Abstract: In this series of intricately related texts, internationally known poet, critic, and performance artist David Antin explores the experience of time—how it's felt, remembered, and recounted. These free-form talk pieces—sometimes called talk poems or simply talks—began as improvisations at museums, universities, and poetry centers where Antin was invited to come and think out loud. Serious and playful, they move rapidly from keen analysis to powerful storytelling to passages of pure comedy, as they range kaleidoscopically across Antin's experiences: in the New York City of his childhood and youth, the Eastern Europe of family and friends, and the New York and Southern California of his art and literary career. The author's analysis and abrasive comedy have been described as a mix of Lenny Bruce and Ludwig Wittgenstein, his commitment to verbal invention and narrative as a fusion of Mark Twain and Gertrude Stein. Taken together, these pieces provide a rich oral history of and critical context for the evolution of the California art scene from the 1960s onward.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1pn5gq
the theory and practice of postmodernism from:
i never knew what time it was
Abstract: we had an old mattress wed had it for years and the salesman wed bought it from had assured us it would last us a lifetime and it was getting older and lumpy or lumpy in some places and hollowed out in others and i just assumed it was part of a normal process of aging it was getting older we were getting older and wed get used to it but eleanor has
california—the nervous camel from:
i never knew what time it was
Abstract: but ive been living here for a long time i came to california back in 1968 after staying away from california for a long time
talking at blérancourt from:
i never knew what time it was
Abstract: someone asked me once a simple question an absurdly simple question and i gave an absurdly simple answer whats an artist he asked and i said somebody who does the best he can by now ive said this so many times ive begun to believe it because when you think about it there are very few people in this world that do the best they can
i never knew what time it was from:
i never knew what time it was
Abstract: you probably wonder why i gave this title to a piece since im generally known for not knowing precisely what im going to talk about my titling has often been accomplished by other people calling my talk something ahead of time and i say that sounds interesting maybe ill talk about it but this time i knew i was going to share a program with eleanor and its very rare for me to be on a program with eleanor who i know very well ive watched her perform so many times but one of the things i know best about
time on my hands from:
i never knew what time it was
Abstract: in fact the whole idea of coming and talking at ten in the morning was already committed to an engagement with time since i was coming from san diego to talk at ten in the morning and ten in the morning is quite early to make a trip up to mcbean parkway when youre coming from san diego it used to be faster to come to mcbean parkway and then it was slower to get to mcbean parkway and then it got
what happened to walter? from:
i never knew what time it was
Abstract: now ive thought about it a number of times which already suggests there is such a thing but its an old problem that goes back a very long time in european thought if you consider turkey
Book Title: Alef, Mem, Tau-Kabbalistic Musings on Time, Truth, and Death
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Wolfson Elliot R.
Abstract: This highly original, provocative, and poetic work explores the nexus of time, truth, and death in the symbolic world of medieval kabbalah. Demonstrating that the historical and theoretical relationship between kabbalah and western philosophy is far more intimate and extensive than any previous scholar has ever suggested, Elliot R. Wolfson draws an extraordinary range of thinkers such as Frederic Jameson, Martin Heidegger, Franz Rosenzweig, William Blake, Julia Kristeva, Friedrich Schelling, and a host of kabbalistic figures into deep conversation with one another.
Alef, Mem, Taualso discusses Islamic mysticism and Buddhist thought in relation to the Jewish esoteric tradition as it opens the possibility of a temporal triumph of temporality and the conquering of time through time. The framework for Wolfson's examination is the rabbinic teaching that the wordemet,"truth," comprises the first, middle, and last letters of the Hebrew alphabet,alef, mem,andtau,which serve, in turn, as semiotic signposts for the three tenses of time-past, present, and future. By heeding the letters ofemetwe discern the truth of time manifestly concealed in the time of truth, the beginning that cannot begin if it is to be the beginning, the middle that re/marks the place of origin and destiny, and the end that is the figuration of the impossible disclosing the impossibility of figuration, the finitude of death that facilitates the possibility of rebirth. The time of death does not mark the death of time, but time immortal, the moment of truth that bestows on the truth of the moment an endless beginning of a beginningless end, the truth of death encountered incessantly in retracing steps of time yet to be taken-between, before, beyond.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1pn5mn
1 THINKING TIME / HERMENEUTIC SUPPOSITIONS from:
Alef, Mem, Tau
Abstract: In my time, many a time, I have heard myself and others speak of a
lifetime. This compound dis/plays the juxtaposition of life and time so elemental to our way of being in the world: what most impresses our thinking about the life-that-is-passing is the passing-that-is-life, a passing that lies at the root of our rootlessness. We are perpetually cast in the mold of temporal beings, always, it seems, being in time for the time being. Time flies, runs, flees, passes too quickly, too slowly, and yet at the end of day—invariably the beginning of night—the question persists:
2 LINEAR CIRCULARITY / (A)TEMPORAL POETICS from:
Alef, Mem, Tau
Abstract: Time, like other facets of phenomenal experience, has played a critical role in the history of world religions.¹ In Judaism specifically, numerous opinions, spanning many centuries, geographical localities, intellectual influences, and literary genres, have been expressed about time. Accordingly, I make no attempt here to provide a comprehensive overview of the understanding of time in the variegated history of Judaism.² I do take the liberty, however, of making two observations, the generality of which will foster rather than eschew specific historical analyses. First, it is not viable to depict temporality in opposition to or separate from spatiality in Judaism, let
CONCLUSION from:
Alef, Mem, Tau
Abstract: The precise turn of thought charted in this book opens the possibility of a temporal triumph of temporality, the conquering of time through time.¹ In an effort to pave the way to this possibility, I have explored the nexus of time, truth, and death as it emerges hermeneutically from the symbolic world of medieval kabbalah. I have not adhered to the familiar methodology adopted by scholars of Jewish mysticism, focusing on a particular historical period or individual personality; I have organized my thoughts instead around the letters
alef, mem, andtau, the consonants of the wordemet, “truth,” which stand
Book Title: Lectura Dantis-Purgatorio, A Canto-by-Canto Commentary
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): ROSS CHARLES
Abstract: This new critical volume, the second to appear in the three-volume
Lectura Dantis,contains expert, focused commentary on thePurgatorioby thirty-three international scholars, each of whom presents to the nonspecialist reader one of the cantos of the transitional middle cantica of Dante's unique Christian epic. The cast of characters is as colorful as before, although this time most of them are headed for salvation. The canto-by-canto commentary allows each contributor his or her individual voice and results in a deeper, richer awareness of Dante's timeless aspirations and achievements.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1pn7mj
CANTO III The Sheepfold of the Excommunicates from:
Lectura Dantis
Author(s) KIRKPATRICK ROBIN
Abstract: In the concluding moments of Canto III, a figure appears who, while initially unidentified, is described by Dante with characteristic precision: “he was fair-haired and handsome and his aspect / was noble” (107–108). With an uncanny exactitude of attention, the figure before us is said to carry still on his body the physical scars of the battle in which his time on earth was ended. His brow is cleft: “but one eyebrow had been cleft” (108); and before he names himself the penitent displays a wound “high on his chest” (111). This figure, as one learns at line 112,
CANTO IV The Lute Maker from:
Lectura Dantis
Author(s) Ross Charles
Abstract: It would perhaps seem a little superfluous to pause long over a figure as much discussed as Belacqua or to try to offer a new reading of the forty verses at the end of Canto IV where he appears, given the attention that has been paid to him by such luminaries as Bosco, Petrocchi, Fallani, Romagnoli, and Chiari. An anecdote by the Anonymous Florentine is the archetype behind all the variations that appear throughout the fourteenth century and after, even into our own time:
CANTO X The Art of God from:
Lectura Dantis
Author(s) Ross Charles
Abstract: Canto X begins the great cycle of penitence and education that characterizes Purgatory proper. The souls in Purgatory follow the order of the seven mortal sins as defined by Christian doctrine. They traverse the seven circles of the mountain, pausing in each circle, for a time, according to their inclination toward each sin that has remained in them after their life on earth. They are not punished for any specific crimes they may have committed, as happens in Dante’s Hell. Instead, at each stage of Purgatory, penitence regularly consists of a meditation and a
contrapasso(a punishment suited to the
CANTO XI Gone with the Wind from:
Lectura Dantis
Author(s) OLDCORN ANTHONY
Abstract: Sandwiched between two descriptive cantos, in which there are remarkably few lines of actual dialogue and in which the foregrounded speech is the increasingly complex virtual (or visual) discourse (“speech made visible,” X , 94) evoked by the attitudes of the figures in relief (in the most complex of these trompe l’oeil—or is it
trompe l’oreille?—dialogues, the sculpted stances of the emperor Trajan and the supplicant widow are read as an extended exchange in which each of the two participants speaks no less than three times), Canto XI, the second of the three cantos dedicated to the sin
CANTO XX Hugh Capet and the Avarice of Kings from:
Lectura Dantis
Author(s) MOLETA VINCENT
Abstract: The subject of Canto XX is avarice, for Dante the most detestable of vices. Avarice—in this case the collective avarice of the kings of France, who in the poet’s lifetime thwarted the election of an emperor and effectively subjugated the papacy—destroys the ordered fabric of life, and the canto is notable for an impassioned speech delivered by a shade, Hugh Capet, who is a mouthpiece for the poet’s anti-gallicism. Canto XX is virtually devoid of lyricism, as befits the gravity of the vice, and it can be seen to fall into three parts, with a sustained central speech
CANTO XXVII At the Threshold of Freedom from:
Lectura Dantis
Author(s) CAMBON GLAUCO
Abstract: When Mario Sansone stated that Canto XXVII functions as a narrative pause between two climactic sequences (the rise through the three richly populated last cornices of the purgatorial mountain and the meeting with Matilda and Beatrice in the Terrestrial Paradise), he certainly did not mean to reduce Canto XXVII to merely a link lacking a poetical strength of its own. In fact, Sansone has added that the pauselike quality or narrative suspension following the poignant voice of Arnaut Daniel in the refining fire and foreshadowing the apparition of Matilda in the place of perennial springtime is counterpointed by an “ascending
Book Title: The Cosmic Time of Empire-Modern Britain and World Literature
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Barrows Adam
Abstract: Combining original historical research with literary analysis, Adam Barrows takes a provocative look at the creation of world standard time in 1884 and rethinks the significance of this remarkable moment in modernism for both the processes of imperialism and for modern literature. As representatives from twenty-four nations argued over adopting the Prime Meridian, and thereby measuring time in relation to Greenwich, England, writers began experimenting with new ways of representing human temporality. Barrows finds this experimentation in works as varied as Victorian adventure novels, high modernist texts, and South Asian novels—including the work of James Joyce, Virginia Woolf, H. Rider Haggard, Bram Stoker, Rudyard Kipling, and Joseph Conrad. Demonstrating the investment of modernist writing in the problems of geopolitics and in the public discourse of time, Barrows argues that it is possible, and productive, to rethink the politics of modernism through the politics of time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1pn7rg
Introduction: from:
The Cosmic Time of Empire
Abstract: A concern with time is intrinsic to the internal logic of modernity. “More than anything else,” Zygmunt Bauman writes, modernity is the “history of time: the time when time has history” (“Time and Space Reunited,” 172). Radically breaking with the authority and legitimacy of the past, modernity offers a totalizing vision of progress toward an illimitable future.¹ Its universal narrative of irrepressible global development presupposes a uniform scale of spatial and temporal measurement. In this context the legislative creation of world standard time at the International Prime Meridian Conference of 1884 stands as a signal moment in the history of
CHAPTER 1 Standard Time, Greenwich, and the Cosmopolitan Clock from:
The Cosmic Time of Empire
Abstract: One of the “hallmarks of modernity,” writes Henri Lefebvre in his 1974 study,
The Production of Space,is its “expulsion” or “erasure” of time. Inscribed in spaces and in social relationships in the premodern, time in modernity is subordinated to the economic and expelled from the political. In deliberately violent imagery Lefebvre writes that time in modernity “has been murdered by society” (96). If this separation of time from space was so dramatic and violent, why, Lefebvre wonders, did it not cause an “outcry”? How did it become “part and parcel of social norms”? “How many lies have their roots”
CHAPTER 2 “Turning From the Shadows That Follow Us”: from:
The Cosmic Time of Empire
Abstract: The 1884 Washington conference did not demonstrate the global consensus on universal civil time that Sandford Fleming and his apostles had hoped it might. Despite Fleming’s lofty rhetoric of cosmopolitan time for all purposes on earth, European delegates, as we have seen, were quick to keep separate the issues of cartographic longitude and universal civil time. The American delegates, Rodgers and Rutherford, diplomatically insisted in their concluding remarks that each government would have complete latitude over what uses, if any, it would make of a Greenwich-based civil time. For Fleming this capitulatory language was deeply frustrating. If the global map
CHAPTER 3 At the Limits of Imperial Time; or, Dracula Must Die! from:
The Cosmic Time of Empire
Abstract: The 1884 Berlin and Prime Meridian Conferences eliminated material and conceptual barriers against spatiotemporal globalization. Setting the protocols for imperial rivalry in West Africa and beyond, the Berlin Conference would enable the Western powers to fill in with their imperial colors the “white patch” of Africa, which Conrad’s Marlow describes as having been a “blank space of delightful mystery” before it was “filled . . . with rivers and lakes and names” (
Heart of Darkness,142). The Prime Meridian Conference would simultaneously unify the diverse temporalities of the world, ensuring that one could never lose the proper Greenwich time, no
CHAPTER 4 “The Shortcomings of Timetables”: from:
The Cosmic Time of Empire
Abstract: In chapter 3 I described how Bram Stoker’s
Draculaenlisted global standard time both at the level of plot, with Mina Harker’s and the Count’s competing mastery of timetables, and also as a principle of narrative structure, with discrepant time lines from various media synchronized into a uniform typewritten narrative. For Stoker standard time served a double function: it preserved England’s ontological purity by excising the temporally untranslatable, and it provided a model for a total narrative, able to assimilate various classes, nations, and dialects (spoken by the multinational vampire hunters) as well as various media. Modernist texts attack standard
CHAPTER 5 “A Few Hours Wrong”: from:
The Cosmic Time of Empire
Abstract: Saleem Sinai’s observation on time in India, near the beginning of Salman Rushdie’s
Midnight’s Children(1981), provocatively links cross-cultural temporal difference with uneven modernization and linguistic variance. Saleem cannot decide whether the difference between Indian and English time is simply a technical glitch in the Bombay power supply, correctible by a more even and equitable distribution of electric current, or whether it rests on a more fundamental cultural distance written into the very vocabulary and syntax of Hindi. His indecision is emblematic of a central crisis in the treatment of time in the Indian novel in English. Is there an
CONCLUSION: from:
The Cosmic Time of Empire
Abstract: What is the value of resuscitating a temporal politics of modernism, as this book has attempted to do? If, as I have suggested, modernism represented a crucial stage in the history of the suppression of temporal politics because it alternately engaged in that suppression and resisted it, what can we learn from modernism about the political constitution of time in the age of GPS and instantaneity? My argument has been that we can draw from modernist temporality a model for a politicized time that is neither subsumed under global standard time’s uniformity nor retracted into a psychical, fluid interiority. Somewhere
8 AMBIVALENT INQUIRY: from:
Postcolonial Disorders
Author(s) Eaton David
Abstract: Field research in the Republic of Congo (hereafter “Congo”) revealed to me some of the contradictions these situations engendered in the years leading to the country’s devastating civil war of 1997. The volubility of modern medicine about the epidemic in the country during this time, especially in its capital, Brazzaville,
14 POSTCOLONIALITY AS THE AFTERMATH OF TERROR AMONG VIETNAMESE REFUGEES from:
Postcolonial Disorders
Author(s) Hollifield Michael
Abstract: In this chapter we examine the problem of subjectivity as a transformation of lived experience in the wake of civil warfare and formation of the postcolonial nation-state. The specific terms of subjective alteration—collectively imprinted as a clash of political ethos¹ and personally imprinted as a shattering of identity and sentiment—are considered in relation to a culturally produced anguish in the aftermath of a conflict. Our ethnographic illustration of this process is the well-known case of the Socialist Republic of Vietnam.² Prior to this political formation in 1975, multiparty warfare was waged throughout a fractured nation, as anticommunist armies
4 Meaning from:
Interpreting Music
Abstract: What was The New Musicology? I use the past tense because the conceptual transformation that overtook musical scholarship during the 1990s had become more or less normative by the time the decade ended. The process unfolded almost too neatly along the classic lines described in Thomas Kuhn’s
The Structure of Scientific Revolutions:a set of established conceptual protocols underwent a rapid collapse, others that would once have been dismissed as untenable replaced them, and then, after a period of ferment and controversy, the emergent protocols crystallized, perhaps with a certain loss of energy, into a new “normal science.” By 2002
8 Deconstruction from:
Interpreting Music
Abstract: “How,” asks the title of a well-known essay by Rose Subotnik, “Could Chopin’s A Major Prelude Be Deconstructed”?¹ Just how to take this question depends a great deal on how one inflects it, apart from certain ambiguities (we will not escape them) that bedevil the casual use of the terms
deconstructanddeconstruction. The opening wordscouldsuggest either a scandalized “Howcouldyou!” or a keen “How could [that is, how might] you?” the one marking a sense of dangerous innovation still in the air at the time the essay was written, the other sensing an exciting opportunity to
12 Classical from:
Interpreting Music
Abstract: Once upon a time these were easy questions; now they’re not. To help see what’s changed I propose a bit of time travel to an unlikely destination, Billy Wilder’s 1946 movie
The Lost Weekend. The title added a phrase to the language: the lost weekend is a monumental bender. The movie opens as Don Birnam (Ray Milland), a failed writer and an alcoholic, is packing for a long weekend in the country to celebrate having dried out. But he has not dried out at all, and his mind is on a
16 Musicology from:
Interpreting Music
Abstract: Not so long ago the question would never have come up. Musicology was self-validating. It was grounded in a fixed conception of Western identity that it also helped perpetuate. Like the music it studied, primarily Western art music, it served the values of the humanistic tradition embodied in both the modern university and the high culture of a great civilization. It accumulated knowledge for deposit in a stable cultural archive that could support continuities of practice and understanding across time. It often debated its methods but rarely critiqued or interpreted the uses to which
CHAPTER 7 Two Lives, Five Years Later from:
Reason to Believe
Abstract: Chapter 6 provided a relational analysis of Evangelical conversion based on a comparable sample of Evangelical and non-Evangelical men. The relatively large size of this sample allowed me to render the variety of relational situations that facilitate or prevent Evangelical conversion. Here I want to look more deeply into these issues by focusing on two cases: Augusto and Ugeth. Each was in my original sample: Augusto was one of my non-Evangelical respondents; Ugeth was one of my Evangelical informants from the first days of my research. I reinterviewed each two more times, five and six years after our original interview.
CHAPTER 5 How Much Home Does a Person Need? from:
Between One and One Another
Abstract: At the heart of contemporary anthropology lies a dilemma: How can we do justice to what is at stake for people in their “local moral worlds”¹ and
at the same timestrive to broaden our analytical horizons to encompass the general and global conditions of human life on earth? This dilemma is at once methodological and empirical. As Michael Herzfeld has shown,² the discursive tension between a localizing ethnographic gaze and a generalizing theoretical perspective echoes the social and political tensions between societies at the margins of the modern nation-state and the centralized, bureaucratized structures of the state. Moreover, there
CHAPTER 9 Objects in Mirror Are Closer Than They Appear from:
Between One and One Another
Abstract: In 1999 the anthropologist Galina Lindquist returned to Moscow after ten years away. She walked around the city as a revenant, finding it familiar yet utterly strange. This was not only because she had changed; Russia itself was no longer the country she had known during the years of perestroika. The late 1980s had been a time of jubilant expectation; the despised Soviet
sistemahad collapsed, you could buy books in subway kiosks that only recently you could have been sent to the Gulag for possessing, and you were ostensibly free. Ten years later, this mood of abundant possibility had
CHAPTER 12 Reading Siddhartha to Freya at Forest Lake from:
Between One and One Another
Abstract: It was the summer before our daughter, Freya, began high school, and my wife and I had rented a cabin at Forest Lake. Freya brought Hermann Hesse’s
Siddharthaalong. She was obliged to read the book before her first week of classes but was finding it hard going. The prose was tautologous and inelegant, the philosophy obtuse, and it was only a matter of time before she asked if I could read it to her and explain what it was about. And so we sat on the porch together in the evening, as a ruby-throated hummingbird flickered at the nectar-filled
CHAPTER 5 How Much Home Does a Person Need? from:
Between One and One Another
Abstract: At the heart of contemporary anthropology lies a dilemma: How can we do justice to what is at stake for people in their “local moral worlds”¹ and
at the same timestrive to broaden our analytical horizons to encompass the general and global conditions of human life on earth? This dilemma is at once methodological and empirical. As Michael Herzfeld has shown,² the discursive tension between a localizing ethnographic gaze and a generalizing theoretical perspective echoes the social and political tensions between societies at the margins of the modern nation-state and the centralized, bureaucratized structures of the state. Moreover, there
CHAPTER 9 Objects in Mirror Are Closer Than They Appear from:
Between One and One Another
Abstract: In 1999 the anthropologist Galina Lindquist returned to Moscow after ten years away. She walked around the city as a revenant, finding it familiar yet utterly strange. This was not only because she had changed; Russia itself was no longer the country she had known during the years of perestroika. The late 1980s had been a time of jubilant expectation; the despised Soviet
sistemahad collapsed, you could buy books in subway kiosks that only recently you could have been sent to the Gulag for possessing, and you were ostensibly free. Ten years later, this mood of abundant possibility had
CHAPTER 12 Reading Siddhartha to Freya at Forest Lake from:
Between One and One Another
Abstract: It was the summer before our daughter, Freya, began high school, and my wife and I had rented a cabin at Forest Lake. Freya brought Hermann Hesse’s
Siddharthaalong. She was obliged to read the book before her first week of classes but was finding it hard going. The prose was tautologous and inelegant, the philosophy obtuse, and it was only a matter of time before she asked if I could read it to her and explain what it was about. And so we sat on the porch together in the evening, as a ruby-throated hummingbird flickered at the nectar-filled
CHAPTER 5 How Much Home Does a Person Need? from:
Between One and One Another
Abstract: At the heart of contemporary anthropology lies a dilemma: How can we do justice to what is at stake for people in their “local moral worlds”¹ and
at the same timestrive to broaden our analytical horizons to encompass the general and global conditions of human life on earth? This dilemma is at once methodological and empirical. As Michael Herzfeld has shown,² the discursive tension between a localizing ethnographic gaze and a generalizing theoretical perspective echoes the social and political tensions between societies at the margins of the modern nation-state and the centralized, bureaucratized structures of the state. Moreover, there
CHAPTER 9 Objects in Mirror Are Closer Than They Appear from:
Between One and One Another
Abstract: In 1999 the anthropologist Galina Lindquist returned to Moscow after ten years away. She walked around the city as a revenant, finding it familiar yet utterly strange. This was not only because she had changed; Russia itself was no longer the country she had known during the years of perestroika. The late 1980s had been a time of jubilant expectation; the despised Soviet
sistemahad collapsed, you could buy books in subway kiosks that only recently you could have been sent to the Gulag for possessing, and you were ostensibly free. Ten years later, this mood of abundant possibility had
CHAPTER 12 Reading Siddhartha to Freya at Forest Lake from:
Between One and One Another
Abstract: It was the summer before our daughter, Freya, began high school, and my wife and I had rented a cabin at Forest Lake. Freya brought Hermann Hesse’s
Siddharthaalong. She was obliged to read the book before her first week of classes but was finding it hard going. The prose was tautologous and inelegant, the philosophy obtuse, and it was only a matter of time before she asked if I could read it to her and explain what it was about. And so we sat on the porch together in the evening, as a ruby-throated hummingbird flickered at the nectar-filled
[PART I Introduction] from:
Subjectivity
Abstract: Subjectivity is a ″vanishing subject,″ writes Amélie Oksenberg Rorty in this book′s opening chapter. As she traces the history of some of the philosophical insights that have shaped current understandings of subjectivity and the subject, Rorty finds not a progression but various contested movements and fragmentary meanings. Self-awareness has a different philosophical trajectory than individuated perception does; scholars have emphasized a diachronically unified persona and, at times, posed it against a synchronically unified persona; the meanings of emotions, the body, social interactions, and suffering as subjectivity have all been areas of contestation. For example, according to Rorty, ″Where Aristotle finds
1 The Vanishing Subject: from:
Subjectivity
Author(s) RORTY AMÉLIE OKSENBERG
Abstract: Augustine says, ″What then is time? If no one asks me, I know; if I want to explain it, I do not know. And yet I know″ (
Confessions, 11. 14). Augustine introduces his perplexity by noting that though the present is evanescent, and neither time past nor time future exists, he can nevertheless tell the time of day and correct himself if he finds he is mistaken. We can echo Augustine′s dilemma in speaking about subjectivity. And indeed time and subjectivity are connected: if no one asks us, we are confident that our experience is ours. But the moment we
13 ″To Be Freed from the Infirmity of (the) Age″: from:
Subjectivity
Author(s) KRAKAUER ERIC L.
Abstract: Ms. A is a seventy-five-year-old woman with multiple chronic medical problems related to her long history of diabetes mellitus, hypertension, and smoking. She had two myocardial infarctions that resulted in congestive heart failure. She also has a history of chronic renal failure, emphysema, chronic foot pain, and mild dementia that probably was the result of several small strokes. A working class, Protestant widow, Ms. A had lived in a retirement home for the past few years, where she required some assistance with her activities of daily living. She had worked intermittently at part-time jobs as a housekeeper and waitress, had
Epilogue: from:
Subjectivity
Author(s) FISCHER MICHAEL M. J.
Abstract: The
political subjectof moral sentiment or public solidarity: Durkheim′s
[PART I Introduction] from:
Subjectivity
Abstract: Subjectivity is a ″vanishing subject,″ writes Amélie Oksenberg Rorty in this book′s opening chapter. As she traces the history of some of the philosophical insights that have shaped current understandings of subjectivity and the subject, Rorty finds not a progression but various contested movements and fragmentary meanings. Self-awareness has a different philosophical trajectory than individuated perception does; scholars have emphasized a diachronically unified persona and, at times, posed it against a synchronically unified persona; the meanings of emotions, the body, social interactions, and suffering as subjectivity have all been areas of contestation. For example, according to Rorty, ″Where Aristotle finds
1 The Vanishing Subject: from:
Subjectivity
Author(s) RORTY AMÉLIE OKSENBERG
Abstract: Augustine says, ″What then is time? If no one asks me, I know; if I want to explain it, I do not know. And yet I know″ (
Confessions, 11. 14). Augustine introduces his perplexity by noting that though the present is evanescent, and neither time past nor time future exists, he can nevertheless tell the time of day and correct himself if he finds he is mistaken. We can echo Augustine′s dilemma in speaking about subjectivity. And indeed time and subjectivity are connected: if no one asks us, we are confident that our experience is ours. But the moment we
13 ″To Be Freed from the Infirmity of (the) Age″: from:
Subjectivity
Author(s) KRAKAUER ERIC L.
Abstract: Ms. A is a seventy-five-year-old woman with multiple chronic medical problems related to her long history of diabetes mellitus, hypertension, and smoking. She had two myocardial infarctions that resulted in congestive heart failure. She also has a history of chronic renal failure, emphysema, chronic foot pain, and mild dementia that probably was the result of several small strokes. A working class, Protestant widow, Ms. A had lived in a retirement home for the past few years, where she required some assistance with her activities of daily living. She had worked intermittently at part-time jobs as a housekeeper and waitress, had
Epilogue: from:
Subjectivity
Author(s) FISCHER MICHAEL M. J.
Abstract: The
political subjectof moral sentiment or public solidarity: Durkheim′s
[PART I Introduction] from:
Subjectivity
Abstract: Subjectivity is a ″vanishing subject,″ writes Amélie Oksenberg Rorty in this book′s opening chapter. As she traces the history of some of the philosophical insights that have shaped current understandings of subjectivity and the subject, Rorty finds not a progression but various contested movements and fragmentary meanings. Self-awareness has a different philosophical trajectory than individuated perception does; scholars have emphasized a diachronically unified persona and, at times, posed it against a synchronically unified persona; the meanings of emotions, the body, social interactions, and suffering as subjectivity have all been areas of contestation. For example, according to Rorty, ″Where Aristotle finds
1 The Vanishing Subject: from:
Subjectivity
Author(s) RORTY AMÉLIE OKSENBERG
Abstract: Augustine says, ″What then is time? If no one asks me, I know; if I want to explain it, I do not know. And yet I know″ (
Confessions, 11. 14). Augustine introduces his perplexity by noting that though the present is evanescent, and neither time past nor time future exists, he can nevertheless tell the time of day and correct himself if he finds he is mistaken. We can echo Augustine′s dilemma in speaking about subjectivity. And indeed time and subjectivity are connected: if no one asks us, we are confident that our experience is ours. But the moment we
13 ″To Be Freed from the Infirmity of (the) Age″: from:
Subjectivity
Author(s) KRAKAUER ERIC L.
Abstract: Ms. A is a seventy-five-year-old woman with multiple chronic medical problems related to her long history of diabetes mellitus, hypertension, and smoking. She had two myocardial infarctions that resulted in congestive heart failure. She also has a history of chronic renal failure, emphysema, chronic foot pain, and mild dementia that probably was the result of several small strokes. A working class, Protestant widow, Ms. A had lived in a retirement home for the past few years, where she required some assistance with her activities of daily living. She had worked intermittently at part-time jobs as a housekeeper and waitress, had
Epilogue: from:
Subjectivity
Author(s) FISCHER MICHAEL M. J.
Abstract: The
political subjectof moral sentiment or public solidarity: Durkheim′s
CHAPTER TWELVE Comparative and Connective Vernacularization from:
The Language of the Gods in the World of Men
Abstract: Brief and selective as it is, the foregoing sketch of some key moments in the historical transformation of literary culture and power in western Europe should suffice to point up some of the extraordinary parallels with contemporaneous developments in southern Asia. The great innovation that was to enduringly change these two worlds occurred during the first five centuries of the second millennium, and it shows a remarkably consistent morphology. (Other apparent moments of vernacularization outside of this time period are either problematic in their history, as in Tamil country in the early first millennium, or entirely divergent in their literary-cultural
CHAPTER FOURTEEN Indigenism and Other Culture-Power Concepts of Modernity from:
The Language of the Gods in the World of Men
Abstract: One particular mode of theorizing and explaining culture implicitly rejects, or is entirely indifferent to, both culture’s evolutionary development and its purely instrumental contribution to power. Instead, culture is viewed as something just there, and as ever self-identical. It is considered outside the flux of time, whether natural or political, or else endowed with so deep a history as to appear forever beyond time. And its stance in relationship to power is presumed to be almost one of consanguinity, certainly not that of an object to be deployed at the will of power.
4 THE BUDDHIST ASCESIS from:
Imagining Karma
Abstract: In chapter 3 I showed how religious innovations are constrained within the limits of prior structures of thought. At the same time I also wanted to give agency and creative capacity to religious innovators, but I was constrained by the imprisoning frames imposed by prior scholarship and my own preconceptions. Although poorly documented, creativity and cultural innovativeness are found in small-scale societies—we know this from the early work of Paul Radin, the lives of prophets like Handsome Lake and, of course, the famed Ogotommeli.¹ When we move to Greece in chapter 5, we will find scholarly constructions of the
3 What My Fingers Knew: from:
Carnal Thoughts
Abstract: Nearly every time I read a movie review in a newspaper or popular magazine, I am struck by the gap that exists between our actual
experienceof the cinema and thetheorythat we academic film scholars construct to explain it—or perhaps, more aptly, to explain it away. Take, for example, several descriptions in the popular press of Jane Campion’sThe Piano(1993): “What impresses most is the tactile force of the images. The salt air can almost be tasted, the wind’s furious bite felt.”¹ The film is “[a]n unremittingly sensuous experience of music and fabric, of mud and
4 The Expanded Gaze in Contracted Space: from:
Carnal Thoughts
Abstract: This chapter is about the existential possibilities and contradictions that mark our “gaze” at the world and others—and, more particularly, about these possibilities and contradictions as they have been materially embodied and dramatized in the cinematic vision of the great Polish director, Krzysztof Kieslowski. But this chapter is also about something more—namely, the ambiguous nature of the empirically concrete happenstance to which we, as objective and sensible beings, are always subject. As we—and our gazes—are materially embodied in the space-time of the world with other objective beings and things, we are engaged in incalculable encounters whose
7 Beating the Meat/Surviving the Text, or How to Get Out of the Century Alive from:
Carnal Thoughts
Abstract: Some time ago, in an issue of
Science-Fiction Studies, I had occasion to rip into Jean Baudrillard’s body—both his lived body and his techno-body and the insurmountable, unthought, and thoughtless gap between them.¹ The journal had published an English translation of two of the French theorist-critic’s short essays on science fiction and technoculture,² one of them celebratingCrash, an extraordinary novel written by J. G. Ballard, first published in 1973, with a significant author’s introduction added in 1974 that was carried forward in subsequent editions.³ My anger at Baudrillard arose from what seemed his willful misreading of a work
3 What My Fingers Knew: from:
Carnal Thoughts
Abstract: Nearly every time I read a movie review in a newspaper or popular magazine, I am struck by the gap that exists between our actual
experienceof the cinema and thetheorythat we academic film scholars construct to explain it—or perhaps, more aptly, to explain it away. Take, for example, several descriptions in the popular press of Jane Campion’sThe Piano(1993): “What impresses most is the tactile force of the images. The salt air can almost be tasted, the wind’s furious bite felt.”¹ The film is “[a]n unremittingly sensuous experience of music and fabric, of mud and
4 The Expanded Gaze in Contracted Space: from:
Carnal Thoughts
Abstract: This chapter is about the existential possibilities and contradictions that mark our “gaze” at the world and others—and, more particularly, about these possibilities and contradictions as they have been materially embodied and dramatized in the cinematic vision of the great Polish director, Krzysztof Kieslowski. But this chapter is also about something more—namely, the ambiguous nature of the empirically concrete happenstance to which we, as objective and sensible beings, are always subject. As we—and our gazes—are materially embodied in the space-time of the world with other objective beings and things, we are engaged in incalculable encounters whose
7 Beating the Meat/Surviving the Text, or How to Get Out of the Century Alive from:
Carnal Thoughts
Abstract: Some time ago, in an issue of
Science-Fiction Studies, I had occasion to rip into Jean Baudrillard’s body—both his lived body and his techno-body and the insurmountable, unthought, and thoughtless gap between them.¹ The journal had published an English translation of two of the French theorist-critic’s short essays on science fiction and technoculture,² one of them celebratingCrash, an extraordinary novel written by J. G. Ballard, first published in 1973, with a significant author’s introduction added in 1974 that was carried forward in subsequent editions.³ My anger at Baudrillard arose from what seemed his willful misreading of a work
Foreword from:
After the Massacre
Author(s) Faust Drew
Abstract: To whom do the dead belong? And how must they be claimed? War produces unnatural death, deaths that occur out of place—away from home and kin—and deaths that occur out of time, to the young and strong. Modern war kills more noncombatants than soldiers; death strikes outside the rules meant to contain and rationalize the violence of war. The nations that are war’s agents claim the dead for political purposes and ideologies, wrenching them away from family and leaving deep wounds, turning them into instruments rather than agents of history. Religious tradition is subordinated or expropriated by state
CHAPTER 3 A Generation Afterward from:
After the Massacre
Abstract: In Vietnam, household death-commemoration rites are a rich store of historical evidence. Numerous incidents from past wars are faithfully recorded in these rites, even though the archives and monuments may carry no trace of these incidents. On several occasions, including in the late 1980s and again in the late 1990s, village administrations in the provinces of Quang Nam and Quang Ngai collaborated with researchers from the provincial Communist Party on a survey of wartime casualties. They uncovered many previously unknown incidents, but these surveys left out as many cases as they revealed. People tended to report only the incidents of
CHAPTER 5 Heroes and Ancestors from:
After the Massacre
Abstract: Ancestors and ghosts are not the only categories of death found in Vietnamese domestic ritual space. In traditional times, these two categories might have been sufficient for conceptually organizing the cosmological mirror of the living world. The rise of the modern nation-state, however, has added a novel category of death to the traditional cosmology of death. Called
liet siin Vietnamese, it refers to the heroic death of fallen soldiers who sacrificed their lives for the sacred purpose of protecting the nation. Historians suggest that the institutionalized commemoration of this category constitutes the core of “modern national memory.”¹ In western
Chapter 3 Racial Mystique: from:
Jewish Identities
Abstract: Physical anthropologist Ashley Montagu (1905–99) started his 1942 study on race by calling his subject one of the greatest and most tragic errors of his time.¹ As a scientist, Montagu felt the need to disprove scientifically what he considered “man’s most dangerous myth.” By 1942 the dangers of racial theories had become obvious in Nazi Germany, where racial dogmas were exploited to justify genocide. After World War II racial thinking became taboo in Europe. Replaced by “ethnicity” or banned altogether, the word
raceseems to have disappeared from discussions of European history, culture, and the arts after the war.
Chapter 9 A Taste for “the Things of Heaven”: from:
Jewish Identities
Abstract: Among Schoenberg’s papers is an obituary of French painter, illustrator, and writer Adolphe Willette (1857–1926) from the
Berliner Tageblattwith the composer’s notes in the margin. “I am rising higher and higher,” Willette was reported to have said on his deathbed with an expression of profound happiness. “Now I am ascending straight up, always up, continuously without stopping, quick as an arrow—straight to Paradise.”¹ Willette had a peaceful exit from the world, strikingly dissimilar from the violent departure of Richard Gerstl, whose death remained an open wound for Schoenberg, his one-time friend and disciple.² Willette’s death, in contrast,
1 The Two Faces of Humanism: from:
A Usable Past
Abstract: Recent emphasis, stemming primarily from the work of P. O. Kristeller, on the central importance of rhetoric for Renaissance humanism, has enabled us to understand the underlying unity of a singularly complex movement; and it has proved singularly fruitful for Renaissance scholarship. At the same time, since this approach depends on the identification of a kind of lowest common denominator for humanism, it may also have the unintended effect of reducing our perception of its rich variety and thus of limiting our grasp of its historical significance. I should like, accordingly, to begin with Kristeller’s fundamental insight, but then to
2 Changing Assumptions in Later Renaissance Culture from:
A Usable Past
Abstract: The familiar notion of a “later” Renaissance immediately presents itself as an innocent effort at chronological arrangement, as a convenience for determining relationships in time. But of course it is much more. It calls upon us to distinguish the differing characteristics of successive moments, to trace a process of development from inception to maturity and possibly on to decline; and it introduces the complicated problem of the relations between Italy and the Northern Renaissance.¹ It is thus closely connected with one of the most fruitful tendencies in all aspects of modern Renaissance scholarship: the effort to distinguish stages in a
6 Anxiety and the Formation of Early Modern Culture from:
A Usable Past
Abstract: All men may be anxious; but it is commonly observed that some are more anxious than others, both individually and in groups. It is widely believed, for example, that our own age is a time of peculiar anxiety.¹ But though this impression may derive less from the considered views of professional historians than from the general distress of the later twentieth century, it is obviously a historical judgment; it implies that various moments in the past can be contrasted in terms of the degree of anxiety they exhibit.
8 Postel and the Significance of Renaissance Cabalism from:
A Usable Past
Abstract: One of the most extraordinary and yet obscure currents in the intellectual history of the Renaissance was the interest of Christian thinkers in the Jewish cabala. This concern extended from Pico’s attempt to absorb cabala into a Christian synthesis of universal knowledge at the end of the fifteenth century well into the seventeenth, and included writers and scholars from every major European country. Yet, in spite of the wide distribution of cabalistic interest in both time and space, the problem of explaining the movement, in the sense of relating it to the general concerns of its historical setting, has not
17 Models of the Educated Man from:
A Usable Past
Abstract: Those of us who are troubled by the confusion in contemporary education, perhaps especially if we continue to believe in a liberal or general education, are sometimes tempted to look to the past for guidance. But the lessons of history are rarely unambiguous. For one thing, its messages are various. Like Scripture, it can generally be made to support what we want it to support; and in the case of education, the Western cultural tradition incorporates not just one but a whole scries of educational ideals, which rest on quite different assumptions and point in different directions. Beyond this, however,
18 Socrates and the Confusion of the Humanities from:
A Usable Past
Abstract: The impression that the humanities are now in special trouble—perhaps even, as we sometimes say, in a “crisis”—is widespread among teachers in the traditional humanistic disciplines, and it is doubtless true that we have immediate grounds for concern. After a period of remarkable expansion and exuberance in higher education, when there were students enough for us all, enrollments are declining; and students, worried about the future, seem to be drifting into programs better designed to prepare them for jobs than anything we have to offer. This essay is directed, however, not to this immediately distressing situation, but to
FOUR The Limits of Autonomy from:
The Maternal Factor
Abstract: In this chapter, I will look at autonomy from several angles. First, I’ll consider the familiar social/political idea of autonomy as individual independence, or self-sufficiency. Second, I will spend some time on the influential Kantian concept of the autonomous will and some significant critiques of that concept. Third, having rejected important facets of both previously discussed concepts of autonomy, I’ll explore a possibility compatible with care ethics—that of limited autonomy conceived as choice and responsibility within a certain span of control. Finally, I’ll discuss the connection of critical thinking to what might be called intelligent heteronomy.
SIX Emotions and Reason from:
The Maternal Factor
Abstract: In the last chapter, I attempted to distinguish care ethics from Confucianism, Christian agape, and more generally virtue ethics. Now we must look at the school of moral theory often thought to be the philosophical forebear of care ethics—moral sentimentalism. Michael Slote, in explaining the possibility of a care ethics more widely applicable than that described in feminist philosophy, remarks: “The ethics of care is historically rooted in the moral sentimentalism of Shaftesbury, Hutcheson, Hume, and Adam Smith, all of whom were men.”¹ And Annette Baier has suggested that David Hume might be considered “the woman’s philosopher.”² There is
NINE Convergence from:
The Maternal Factor
Abstract: Throughout this book, I’ve been exploring caring, morality, and the development of an ethic of care from their roots in maternal instinct. However, I have not claimed that there is only one evolutionary path to morality. Morality has long been defined by some in terms of God’s word. Obviously, there is also the well-known and well-trodden path from original self-interest. Men have learned that fairness and cooperation often increase their own chances of survival, and that train of thought has led to elaborate (and sometimes competing) systems of moral thought. I have argued that these traditional systems frequently go too
Chapter 3 On the Coherence of Hermeneutics and Ethics: from:
Gadamer’s Repercussions
Author(s) BRUNS GERALD L.
Abstract: My purpose in what follows is to take up the relation of hermeneutics and ethics as it emerges in a post-Heideggerian philosophical context. In terms of proper names this means giving an account of the conceptual symmetries and differences between Gadamer’s philosophical hermeneutics and Emmanuel Levinas’s ethical theory, which is sometimes called an ethics of alterity or of responsibility, in order to contrast it with subject-centered theories that emphasize thinking and acting in accord with rules, principles, duties, codes, beliefs, teachings, communities, theories of the right and the good, and so on, where to be in accord with such things,
Chapter 14 Salutations: from:
Gadamer’s Repercussions
Author(s) WAITE GEOFF
Abstract: With her promotion of “mediation,” “dialogue,” and “moderation,” Catherine H. Zuckert is to be saluted for her triumphant response to the essays of Orozco and Waite, a response that could be used as a textbook case for careful study, not necessarily for its specific object of analysis (needless to say), but for its overall and well-nigh seamless hermeneutic approach and rhetorical technique. Any momentary appearance to the contrary, this concession is ultimately
notmeant ironically. Certainly Zuckert’s response has the virtue of exemplifying the temper of our times. This is to say that it not only could be read with
Chapter 3 On the Coherence of Hermeneutics and Ethics: from:
Gadamer’s Repercussions
Author(s) BRUNS GERALD L.
Abstract: My purpose in what follows is to take up the relation of hermeneutics and ethics as it emerges in a post-Heideggerian philosophical context. In terms of proper names this means giving an account of the conceptual symmetries and differences between Gadamer’s philosophical hermeneutics and Emmanuel Levinas’s ethical theory, which is sometimes called an ethics of alterity or of responsibility, in order to contrast it with subject-centered theories that emphasize thinking and acting in accord with rules, principles, duties, codes, beliefs, teachings, communities, theories of the right and the good, and so on, where to be in accord with such things,
Chapter 14 Salutations: from:
Gadamer’s Repercussions
Author(s) WAITE GEOFF
Abstract: With her promotion of “mediation,” “dialogue,” and “moderation,” Catherine H. Zuckert is to be saluted for her triumphant response to the essays of Orozco and Waite, a response that could be used as a textbook case for careful study, not necessarily for its specific object of analysis (needless to say), but for its overall and well-nigh seamless hermeneutic approach and rhetorical technique. Any momentary appearance to the contrary, this concession is ultimately
notmeant ironically. Certainly Zuckert’s response has the virtue of exemplifying the temper of our times. This is to say that it not only could be read with
TWO The Early Days of Johane Masowe from:
A Problem of Presence
Abstract: IN 1932 SHONIWA PETER MASEDZA was working for a shoemaker near Salisbury. Shoniwa had come from his home in Makoni, near the border with Portuguese East Africa, in the late 1920s. He had held a number of odd jobs in and around the capital: driving wagons, working as a “garden boy,” apprenticing with a carpenter. Just after starting with the shoemaker, sometime around May 1932, Shoniwa fell ill, suffering from “severe pains in the head.” He lost his speech for four months and was “unable to walk about.” During his sickness, he studied the Bible “continuously.” He dreamed that he
THREE The Question of Leadership: from:
A Problem of Presence
Abstract: “I HAVE NO IDEA WHAT Johane Masowe looked like,” said Madzimai Tsitsi. Lazarus and I had been interviewing Tsitsi and her husband, Madzibaba Zechariah, for about an hour when she hit on this point. We had been asking the couple about the church’s history, something we routinely did in our interviews and conversations.
Church historyis a term the apostolics often use. Not every apostolic claims to know much about it, but most profess an interest in it. Congregants learn about church history from the people who have been around—the “old-timers” in a congregation, as they call them. Old-timers
FIVE Listening for the True Bible: from:
A Problem of Presence
Abstract: I WAS TOLD THAT BEING an apostolic is a “full-time thing.” Th is saying picks up on the commitment Shimmer highlighted in his conversion narrative: one cannot be half Christian and half outside. An apostolic should maintain his or her commitment at all times and in all places. The language of commitment is indeed a common feature of the apostolics’ discourse (if not always practice). One of their worries, for example, is the “Sunday Christian”—someone who seems to forget what the Word entails during the rest of the week. The concept of mutemo plays a crucial role in the
SEVEN The Substance of Healing from:
A Problem of Presence
Abstract: TO WHAT EXTENT CAN RELIGION be given over to a project of immateriality? In 2003 the Victoria and Albert Museum in London mounted an exhibition,
Gothic: Art for England,that provided something of an answer. One of the pieces in the show was a defaced church panel. Sometime in the sixteenth century the image on the panel had been scratched out. A verse from the Bible had been written in its place. Th e panel was an artifact of the Reformation; the Word had been used to destroy the evidence of Catholic idolatry. But if some English iconoclast had indeed
TWO The Early Days of Johane Masowe from:
A Problem of Presence
Abstract: IN 1932 SHONIWA PETER MASEDZA was working for a shoemaker near Salisbury. Shoniwa had come from his home in Makoni, near the border with Portuguese East Africa, in the late 1920s. He had held a number of odd jobs in and around the capital: driving wagons, working as a “garden boy,” apprenticing with a carpenter. Just after starting with the shoemaker, sometime around May 1932, Shoniwa fell ill, suffering from “severe pains in the head.” He lost his speech for four months and was “unable to walk about.” During his sickness, he studied the Bible “continuously.” He dreamed that he
THREE The Question of Leadership: from:
A Problem of Presence
Abstract: “I HAVE NO IDEA WHAT Johane Masowe looked like,” said Madzimai Tsitsi. Lazarus and I had been interviewing Tsitsi and her husband, Madzibaba Zechariah, for about an hour when she hit on this point. We had been asking the couple about the church’s history, something we routinely did in our interviews and conversations.
Church historyis a term the apostolics often use. Not every apostolic claims to know much about it, but most profess an interest in it. Congregants learn about church history from the people who have been around—the “old-timers” in a congregation, as they call them. Old-timers
FIVE Listening for the True Bible: from:
A Problem of Presence
Abstract: I WAS TOLD THAT BEING an apostolic is a “full-time thing.” Th is saying picks up on the commitment Shimmer highlighted in his conversion narrative: one cannot be half Christian and half outside. An apostolic should maintain his or her commitment at all times and in all places. The language of commitment is indeed a common feature of the apostolics’ discourse (if not always practice). One of their worries, for example, is the “Sunday Christian”—someone who seems to forget what the Word entails during the rest of the week. The concept of mutemo plays a crucial role in the
SEVEN The Substance of Healing from:
A Problem of Presence
Abstract: TO WHAT EXTENT CAN RELIGION be given over to a project of immateriality? In 2003 the Victoria and Albert Museum in London mounted an exhibition,
Gothic: Art for England,that provided something of an answer. One of the pieces in the show was a defaced church panel. Sometime in the sixteenth century the image on the panel had been scratched out. A verse from the Bible had been written in its place. Th e panel was an artifact of the Reformation; the Word had been used to destroy the evidence of Catholic idolatry. But if some English iconoclast had indeed
SIX Encounter and Suspicion in Tanzania from:
Being There
Author(s) Moore Sally Falk
Abstract: My fieldwork in Tanzania extended over many years, from 1968 to 1993. It was intermittent: a few months at a time, and then an interval of months, or a year or two, and then another visit. The reflexive remarks that follow are retrospective and selective. There are too many stories to tell.
Introduction from:
Little India
Abstract: In February 1999, two months after I had left Mauritius, having concluded my main dissertation fieldwork, riots erupted on the island for the first time since 1968. The popular singer Kaya had died under suspicious circumstances in police custody, where he had been held on drug charges. Kaya was a member of the Creole ethnic community of Mauritius, most of whom trace their ancestry to African and Malagasy slaves. After the news of Kaya’s death in the central police headquarters of Port Louis became known, protesters took to the streets in suburbs of the capital, attacking police stations and other
Book Title: Cannibal Talk-The Man-Eating Myth and Human Sacrifice in the South Seas
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Obeyesekere Gananath
Abstract: In this radical reexamination of the notion of cannibalism, Gananath Obeyesekere offers a fascinating and convincing argument that cannibalism is mostly "cannibal talk," a discourse on the Other engaged in by both indigenous peoples and colonial intruders that results in sometimes funny and sometimes deadly cultural misunderstandings. Turning his keen intelligence to Polynesian societies in the early periods of European contact and colonization, Obeyesekere deconstructs Western eyewitness accounts, carefully examining their origins and treating them as a species of fiction writing and seamen's yarns. Cannibalism is less a social or cultural fact than a mythic representation of European writing that reflects much more the realities of European societies and their fascination with the practice of cannibalism, he argues. And while very limited forms of cannibalism might have occurred in Polynesian societies, they were largely in connection with human sacrifice and carried out by a select community in well-defined sacramental rituals.
Cannibal Talkconsiders how the colonial intrusion produced a complex self-fulfilling prophecy whereby the fantasy of cannibalism became a reality as natives on occasion began to eat both Europeans and their own enemies in acts of "conspicuous anthropophagy."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1ppn6j
FOUR Savage Indignation: from:
Cannibal Talk
Abstract: In several of the discourses mentioned in the previous chapters it seems that what is parody for the Maori is deadly serious for his Other, the European.¹ Sometimes the humor is shared by both sides as in the second voyage when Cook reported of his curio-hungry sailors: “It was astonishing to see with what eagerness everyone catched at every thing they saw, it even went so far as to become the ridicule of the Natives by offering pieces of sticks stones and what not to exchange, one waggish Boy took a piece of human excrement on a stick and hild
II Middle Platonism and the Interaction of Interpretive Traditions from:
Homer the Theologian
Abstract: The tradition of mystical allegorical commentary on Homer has survived in substantial form only in the writings of the Neoplatonists, but evidence from the first two and a half centuries of the Christian era—before the great synthesis of Plotinus, which marks the beginning of Neoplatonism proper—indicates that this period was a crucial one in the development of that tradition. Félix Buffière’s insistence on the second century as the time of the birth of mystical allegory needs qualification, as the discussion of the role of the Pythagoreans has suggested, but this does not alter the fact that Numenius and
AFTERWORD from:
Homer the Theologian
Abstract: What has been elaborated here is the history of perhaps the most powerful and enduring of the “strong misreadings” (to use Harold Bloom’s term) that make up our cultural heritage. I have avoided any attempt to hold that reading of Homer up against others, to affirm or to deny it, beyond occasional observations on analogies between these ancient interpretive critics and those of our own time. My reticence on this score reveals an implicit model of reading with similarities to Bloom’s, and no doubt in part derivative from it. Beyond his definition of the poles of interpretation as strong and
ONE Erecting the Fence: from:
Tales of the Neighborhood
Abstract: This short book seeks to explore the ways in which we can learn something about the relationship between literature and reality in Late Antique Jewish culture by reading the texts that we call Rabbinic literature, the Talmud and the Midrash. The discussion will evolve specifically in terms of narratives told in Hebrew and Aramaic, mostly in the Galilee, sometime between the years 150 and 500 C.E.
FIVE Between Us: from:
Tales of the Neighborhood
Abstract: The tales of the neighborhood that have been the focus of this book tell about the “neighborhood” of the Galilee in the first half of the first millennium of the Common Era. This neighborhood was at the time the birthing-ground for major religious and cultural formations that would prove consequential for many groups and peoples on a number of continents. Our entry into this milieu through the concept of a neighborhood has stressed small-scale processes, such as human relations and everyday life, rather than the major events of the period. The way religion and concrete details of reality are interwoven
CHAPTER 8 Ultranational Nature: from:
Reconfiguring Modernity
Abstract: By the 1930s, nature had been wrapped in the mantle of Japanese culture and was fully deployed once more in the political arena. It was no longer, as it was in the 1890s, a suspect concept in governmental documents, but instead had become a mainstay of national, indeed ultranational, ideology. This chapter begins by describing the ultranational nature of wartime Japan and then traces the origins of this concept to the decade after the Russo-Japanese War, when culture, politics, nation, and nature were welded together in a new way.
CHAPTER 9 Conclusion: from:
Reconfiguring Modernity
Abstract: In the first chapter, I posed two possible relationships between nature and modernity: one antithetical, the other cosmopological. It is now time to review these models and to ask how foregrounding the concept of nature has provided an alternative perspective on Japan’s place in what Maruyama, Weber, and so many others recognized as the problematic universal history of modernity.¹
3 The Cultural Turn from:
Studying Global Pentecostalism
Author(s) Bergunder Michael
Abstract: “Cultural studies” and similar designations mark a diverse field of related theoretical approaches, sometimes labeled “cultural turn,” that have deeply influenced the humanities and social sciences in the past three decades.¹ In general, studies on Pentecostal and Charismatic movements have not taken up these approaches in their research design, despite notable exceptions² and occasional reference in anthropological studies,³ as well as in reflections by Pentecostal and Charismatic theologians themselves.⁴ Nevertheless, it is worth taking a closer look at these approaches, because some of the pressing issues in the current research on Pentecostalism are reflected therein.
13 Practical Theology from:
Studying Global Pentecostalism
Author(s) Cartledge Mark J.
Abstract: The discipline of practical theology is one that appears to be in constant redefinition in recent times, although there might at last be some consensus emerging. It was once regarded as the crown of theological study, placed toward the end of theological education for the ordained ministry. At this point in the process all the necessary “tips and hints” were added under the rubric
pastoralia.In this context it was closely aligned with education for ministry and by extension church education in a broader sense. Thus would-be clergy learned how to preach, lead worship, conduct pastoral conversations with the insights
14 Ecumenism from:
Studying Global Pentecostalism
Author(s) Robeck Cecil M.
Abstract: Ecumenism is a topic that many Pentecostals find difficult to discuss. This is in part because most Pentecostals know very little about the subject, often just enough to condemn it. When asked why they are opposed to ecumenism, their responses are often anecdotal. Sometimes these anecdotes include personal experiences they have had, but more often than not they are stories they have received, stories passed on from pastor to parishioner, from parent to child, or from friend to friend. Generally there has been little or no attempt to assess their validity or to ask what events might lay behind such
Book Title: Late Godard and the Possibilities of Cinema- Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Morgan Daniel
Abstract: With
Late Godard and the Possibilities of Cinema, Daniel Morgan makes a significant contribution to scholarship on Jean-Luc Godard, especially his films and videos since the late 1980s, some of the most notoriously difficult works in contemporary cinema. Through detailed analyses of extended sequences, technical innovations, and formal experiments, Morgan provides an original interpretation of a series of several internally related films-Soigne ta droite(Keep Your Right Up, 1987),Nouvelle vague(New Wave, 1990), andAllemagne 90 neuf zéro(Germany 90 Nine Zero, 1991)-and the monumental late video work,Histoire(s) du cinéma(1988-1998). Taking up a range of topics, including the role of nature and natural beauty, the relation between history and cinema, and the interactions between film and video, the book provides a distinctive account of the cinematic and intellectual ambitions of Godard's late work. At the same time,Late Godard and the Possibilities of Cinemaprovides a new direction for the fields of film and philosophy by drawing on the idealist and romantic tradition of philosophical aesthetics, which rarely finds an articulation within film studies. In using the tradition of aesthetics to illuminate Godard's late films and videos, Morgan shows that these works transform the basic terms and categories of aesthetics in and for the cinema.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1ppvj2
3 Politics by Other Means from:
Late Godard and the Possibilities of Cinema
Abstract: In the previous chapter, I argued that
Soigne ta droiteandNouvelle vagueexplicitly move away from the treatment of nature in Godard’s films of the early 1980s. Against an aesthetic based on the sublime, Godard gives a normative argument inSoigne ta droitefor a move to the register of the beautiful, the mundane, and the ordinary. WithNouvelle vague, Godard uses the trope of the garden to show the natural world as inextricably caught up in the human and the historical; at the same time, he situates the category of the miraculous within the natural world as a
5 Finhās of Medina: from:
Fighting Words
Author(s) Sells Michael A.
Abstract: Group names are inevitable. We cannot live without them. But we do not find it easy to live peacefully with them. A group name occupies an ambiguous zone between generalization and specification. Take the expression, which I invent for the purposes of illustration, “the Alberians carried out a crime against humanity.” The group name designates a group and does not make any exceptions to the group designation. If found in a newspaper or history book, it might refer to a particular army or irregular militia unit that carried out a particular crime at a particular time and place, but which
Book Title: Rifle Reports-A Story of Indonesian Independence
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Steedly Mary Margaret
Abstract: On August 17, 1945, Indonesia proclaimed its independence from Dutch colonial rule. Five years later, the Republic of Indonesia was recognized as a unified, sovereign state. The period in between was a time of aspiration, mobilization, and violence, in which nationalists fought to expel the Dutch while also trying to come to grips with the meaning of "independence."
Rifle Reportsis an ethnographic history of this extraordinary time as it was experienced on the outskirts of the nation among Karo Batak villagers in the rural highlands of North Sumatra. Based on extensive interviews and conversations with Karo veterans,Rifle Reportsinterweaves personal and family memories, songs and stories, memoirs and local histories, photographs and monuments, to trace the variously tangled and perhaps incompletely understood ways that Karo women and men contributed to the founding of the Indonesian nation. The routes they followed are divergent, difficult, sometimes wavering, and rarely obvious, but they are clearly marked with the signs of gender. This innovative historical study of nationalism and decolonization is an anthropological exploration of the gendering of wartime experience, as well as an inquiry into the work of storytelling as memory practice and ethnographic genre.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt2jcbst
INTRODUCTION: from:
Rifle Reports
Abstract: Each year on August 17 the highland town of Kabanjahé, like every other district seat in Indonesia, celebrates the proclamation of national independence. Banners, billboards, and strings of electric lights decorate the broad main streets.
Perjuangan(struggle) andMerdeka!(independence), the keywords of nationalist mobilization, appear everywhere, from cigarette advertisements to T-shirts. Freshly painted gateways at the entrances of side streets and public buildings mark off national time in red-stenciled numerals: on the left side, 17–8-45, the date of the independence proclamation, and on the right, 17–8 of the present year (figure 1). Schoolchildren begin practicing their parade
CHAPTER 1 The Golden Bridge from:
Rifle Reports
Abstract: The image of independence as a golden bridge to the future can be found several times in Sukarno’s political writings. It first appeared in his 1933 speech “Mentjapai Indonesia Merdeka” (Achieving an Independent Indonesia), quoted in the epigraph above, but nowhere was it more significant than in his famous “Birth of the Pancasila” speech, of June 1, 1945.¹ Speaking to a committee of Japanese officials, Javanese aristocrats, and elite nationalist politicians who had been convened to explore the possibility of Indonesian national independence, he argued that political independence must precede rather than follow from the resolution of such “petty issues”
CHAPTER 2 Buried Guns from:
Rifle Reports
Abstract: It was nearly dark by the time we arrived in Kuta Bangun, a midsized village in the central region of the Karo plateau. Even without the banner we couldn’t have missed the place. It was bustling with the kind of activity that signaled a ceremony, and the shoulder of the road was lined with city cars: low-slung Toyota sedans and Daihatsu Charades, SUVs and Land Rovers with government license plates. The funeral announcement
CHAPTER 4 Eager Girls from:
Rifle Reports
Abstract: In April 1946 Rakutta Berahmana was appointed head of the republic’s civilian government for the Karo district, with the newly created Javanese title of
bupati. This is how his family found out about it. His wife, Nandé Berah, was staying with her in-laws in the village of Limang at the time. “All we knew,” she said, “was that he was spending a lot of time in Kabanjahé.” It was her maternal aunt Nandé Tékén who brought the news when she came to help with the rice harvest. “Oh, Nandé Berah,” the old lady announced breathlessly (in Nandé Berah’s laughing rendition),
CHAPTER 6 Letting Loose the Water Buffaloes from:
Rifle Reports
Abstract: “Every war is ironic,” writes Paul Fussell in
The Great War and Modern Memory, “because every war is worse than expected” (1975:7). The incommensurability of means and ends, the “dynamics of hope abridged,” the disjuncture of optimism before and despair afterward, the “benign ignorance” of those at home and the horrible recognitions of those who fought, the frailty of human flesh and the deadly power of metal and machinery—all these are figures of a tragic irony that, according to Fussell, has come to be “an inseparable element of the general vision of war in our time” (35). It is
CHAPTER 7 The Memory Artist from:
Rifle Reports
Abstract: News from afar sometimes seems to bear an uncanny resemblance to one’s own remembered past. This is not because of the banal redundancy of events but because of memory’s interpretive reach and its inclination to refurbish itself in contemporary designs and novel images. In 1994, when I was collecting these stories, horrifying pictures of ethnic violence from around the world seemed to appear nightly on the television news. In central Africa, roadways were filled with thousands of starving, desperate people traveling toward unknown destinations. This made a big impression on my Karo informants. “That’s exactly how it was here,” they
1 Avoiding the Void: from:
The Fate of Place
Abstract: Following Nietzsche’s admonition, in
The Genealogy of Morals,that “man would sooner have the void for his purpose than be void of purpose,”¹ there is an area of human experience in which, indeed, the void plays a constitutive and recognized role. This occurs in theories of creation that concern themselves with how things came into being in the first place. “In the first place”: a quite problematic posit. For if there is a cosmic moment in which nothingsyet exist, it would seem thatplacescould not exist at that “time” either. Although places are not things in any
Interlude from:
The Fate of Place
Abstract: In Part I we witnessed a development—or, more in keeping with Aristotle's thinking, an “envelopment”—of remarkable scope. The scope is impressive not just in terms of time (a period of approximately two thousand years) but also in terms of theme: all the way from
muthostologos.Yet Plato’sTimaeuscombines both of these latter extremes in a single text: hence its position in the middle of Part I, flanked on one side by imaginative mythicoreligious accounts of creation and on the other side by Aristotle’s sober descriptions. Nevertheless, this progression in time and theme is no simple
Interim from:
The Fate of Place
Abstract: Descending from its position as a supreme term within Aristotle’s protophenomenological physics, place barely survived discussion by the end of seventeenth century. By the end of the eighteenth century, it vanished altogether from serious theoretical discourse in physics and philosophy. At moment, we can say of place what Aristotle believes has to be said of time: “It either is not at all or [only] scarcely and dimly” (
Physics217b34). How this radical dissolution and disappearance of place occurred—how place ceded place fully to space in the course of just two centuries—is the subject of the next four chapters,
3 Being Correctly Christian: from:
Controlling Contested Places
Abstract: In fourth-century Antioch religious communities overlapped: Christianity and traditional temple cult sometimes competed for venues, such as at the martyrion of Babylas in Daphne; some Christians shared with Jews a respect for Jewish scripture and local synagogues; and Christians competed among themselves for control over the city’s churches. In the face of the multilayered and highly politicized significance of so many local places, Christian leaders such as John Chrysostom, in the vocabulary of modern geographers, named these complex intersections as places of clearly negative or positive value in an attempt to construct and spread a particular religious orthodoxy. Antioch in
6 Helplessness: from:
Women and Evil
Abstract: Sometimes individuals or groups deliberately or carelessly cause physical or psychic pain to others. This is moral evil—harm that individuals inflict on other human beings. We can prevent such evil, and it is one task of moral education to do so. Much of the pain that surrounds us does not stem from the intentions of particular moral agents, however, but seems to be the result of our customs and social structures. Evils thus induced are hard to see as preventable. Indeed they often go unidentified for long periods of time. When sensitive people finally see and name them, they
6 Helplessness: from:
Women and Evil
Abstract: Sometimes individuals or groups deliberately or carelessly cause physical or psychic pain to others. This is moral evil—harm that individuals inflict on other human beings. We can prevent such evil, and it is one task of moral education to do so. Much of the pain that surrounds us does not stem from the intentions of particular moral agents, however, but seems to be the result of our customs and social structures. Evils thus induced are hard to see as preventable. Indeed they often go unidentified for long periods of time. When sensitive people finally see and name them, they
Roberto from:
The Wherewithal of Life
Abstract: A COUPLE OF MONTHS AFTER my conversations in Copenhagen with Emmanuel, I was sitting in an espresso bar in Boston’s North End, killing time before attending a ceremony at Faneuil Hall, where I would take an oath of allegiance, receive my certificate of naturalization, and “enjoy my new life as a United States citizen.” My mind, however, was not on the day ahead, but on Emmanuel’s story and the opening lines of Woody Guthrie’s “Talking Columbia,” where he describes watching the boats entering and leaving Bonneville lock and
Postscript from:
The Wherewithal of Life
Abstract: JOAN DIDION ONCE WROTE, “We tell ourselves stories in order to live.”¹ Our stories provide us with parsimonious, coherent, and uncomplicated versions of events that have overwhelmed us. They offer the consoling illusion that even if we do not always have a hand in determining the course of our lives, a hidden hand is guiding our destiny from behind the scenes. In the opening of his autobiographical novel
Look Homeward, Angel,Thomas Wolfe imagines a thread of fated connections that transcend time and memory: “Each of us is all the sums he has not counted: subtract us into nakedness and
Roberto from:
The Wherewithal of Life
Abstract: A COUPLE OF MONTHS AFTER my conversations in Copenhagen with Emmanuel, I was sitting in an espresso bar in Boston’s North End, killing time before attending a ceremony at Faneuil Hall, where I would take an oath of allegiance, receive my certificate of naturalization, and “enjoy my new life as a United States citizen.” My mind, however, was not on the day ahead, but on Emmanuel’s story and the opening lines of Woody Guthrie’s “Talking Columbia,” where he describes watching the boats entering and leaving Bonneville lock and
Postscript from:
The Wherewithal of Life
Abstract: JOAN DIDION ONCE WROTE, “We tell ourselves stories in order to live.”¹ Our stories provide us with parsimonious, coherent, and uncomplicated versions of events that have overwhelmed us. They offer the consoling illusion that even if we do not always have a hand in determining the course of our lives, a hidden hand is guiding our destiny from behind the scenes. In the opening of his autobiographical novel
Look Homeward, Angel,Thomas Wolfe imagines a thread of fated connections that transcend time and memory: “Each of us is all the sums he has not counted: subtract us into nakedness and
Roberto from:
The Wherewithal of Life
Abstract: A COUPLE OF MONTHS AFTER my conversations in Copenhagen with Emmanuel, I was sitting in an espresso bar in Boston’s North End, killing time before attending a ceremony at Faneuil Hall, where I would take an oath of allegiance, receive my certificate of naturalization, and “enjoy my new life as a United States citizen.” My mind, however, was not on the day ahead, but on Emmanuel’s story and the opening lines of Woody Guthrie’s “Talking Columbia,” where he describes watching the boats entering and leaving Bonneville lock and
Postscript from:
The Wherewithal of Life
Abstract: JOAN DIDION ONCE WROTE, “We tell ourselves stories in order to live.”¹ Our stories provide us with parsimonious, coherent, and uncomplicated versions of events that have overwhelmed us. They offer the consoling illusion that even if we do not always have a hand in determining the course of our lives, a hidden hand is guiding our destiny from behind the scenes. In the opening of his autobiographical novel
Look Homeward, Angel,Thomas Wolfe imagines a thread of fated connections that transcend time and memory: “Each of us is all the sums he has not counted: subtract us into nakedness and
Foreword and Acknowledgements from:
Explorations and Encounters in French
Abstract: 1996 saw the World Congress of the Fédération Internationale des Professeurs de Français (FIPF) in Tokyo. At that time, the South Australian French Teachers Association was a member of the FIPF. Although SAFTA only
Explorations and Encounters: from:
Explorations and Encounters in French
Author(s) MROWA-HOPKINS COLETTE
Abstract: The theme of exploration requires little explanation in terms of its relevance to the constant strivings of human life and, by extension, to the activities of learning and scholarship; indeed, with its corollary of the journey, it underlines, as do writings since time immemorial, including many a school motto, the intimate relationship between seeking and discovering; striving and finding; quest and knowledge. The title of this volume —
Explorations and Encounters in French— can therefore be seen as self-evident, announcing as it does its essentially investigative nature and its position within a field of study. However, if the title
The Inaugural Frank Horner Lecture from:
Explorations and Encounters in French
Abstract: When Frank Horner passed away in July 2004, it was at a time of renewed research interest both in the early French exploration of Australia and the achievements of the Baudin expedition, the very interest that he had been so influential in awakening. In July 2006, when planning a major series of public lectures to coincide with the three conferences of French language and culture that were to take place at the University of Adelaide, the organizers, in consultation with Frank’s family, considered this an opportune moment to pay homage to his pioneering work by inaugurating a series of scholarly
Visions and Revisions: from:
Explorations and Encounters in French
Author(s) TOOHEY ALICIA
Abstract: The approach to language teaching and learning known as intercultural language learning (IcLL) has had an undeniable influence in Australia in recent times. Associated with names such as Zarate, Kramsch, Byram, and, closer to home, Crozet and Liddicoat, it represents a turn away from the attempt to produce ersatz native speakers through institutionalized language learning and places greater emphasis on learners’ abilities to apprehend the particularities of their own culture as exposed through comparison with other cultures (see Byram et al. 2001: 5). As pointed out by Harbon and Browett, the status of IcLL “as a curriculum imperative” (2006: 28)
1 Compulsory History: from:
Whose History?
Abstract: The Australian Curriculum Assessment and Reporting Authority (ACARA), through a rolling program, has been mandating the teaching of History in Australian schools. However, this comes at a time when students’ interest in studying History in schools is at a low ebb. While I will pursue these topics later in this chapter, here I address the issues associated with having Australian History students engage with historical novels.
4 Defining the Historical Novel from:
Whose History?
Abstract: To be deemed historical (in our sense), a novel must have been written at least fifty years after the events described, or have been written by someone who was not alive at the time of
8 Alternate Histories in the Classroom from:
Whose History?
Abstract: The recent publication of Nicholas Hasluck’s
Dismissal(2011) is timely in these regards. Alternate histories are usually set amidst the great events of world history — Napoleon, Hitler and Nazism, and so on. Indeed, as Croome (2011) has stated, in what might amount to a throwaway line, alternate history is ‘a genre often undermined in Australia by the sense that
9 ‘Caught in time’s cruel machinery’: from:
Whose History?
Abstract: As Chapter 4 showed, the UK-based Historical Novel Society (n.d.) defined historical novels to include time-slip novels. Apart from being arguably a legitimate member of the genre, there are excellent commercial reasons for this. Walk through many
10 Whose History? from:
Whose History?
Abstract: Alert students will often tell teachers and university lecturers that there is sometimes a significant discrepancy between the same historical characters, settings or incidents in historical fiction and nonfiction. An illustration of this point arises with hugely successful author Bryce Courtenay’s work of historical fiction,
The Potato Factory(1995), and a subsequent work of nonfiction, which sought to put the record straight on Isaac (Ikey) Solomon, one of the principal characters in Courtenay’s novel. Judith Sackville-O’Donnell, a Melbourne author, challenged Courtenay’s depiction of Ikey Solomon, who was also believed to be the model for Charles Dickens’s fictional villain Fagin.
3 An artist in the making: from:
Framing French Culture
Author(s) West-Sooby John
Abstract: The link between scientific discovery and empire building was never more evident than in the latter decades of the eighteenth century. During that time, as Mary Louise Pratt has noted, the 'international scientific expedition' became 'one of Europe's proudest and most conspicuous instruments of expansion'.¹ For Pratt, this period coincided with the emergence of a new version of Europe's 'planetary consciousness' — one which was characterised by 'the construction of global-scale meaning through the descriptive apparatuses of natural history'.²
5 The Artwork of the Baudin expedition to Australia (1800-1804): from:
Framing French Culture
Author(s) Southwood Jane
Abstract: The 1802 portrait by French artist Nicolas-Martin Petit (1777-1804) of a young woman from Bruny Island (Figure 5.1), Tasmania — or Van Diemen's land, as it was known at the time — is the subject of the following discussion. Petit's portrait³ of Arra-Maïda, as she was called, which he painted during the 1800-04 French expedition to Australia (
Terra AustralisorLes Terres australes) under the command of Post-Captain Nicolas Baudin⁴, gives fascinating insights into these first encounters of expedition members with Indigenous Tasmanians before colonisation and the subsequent decimation of the group.
1.2 The Natural Sciences and the Humanities in the Seventeenth Century: from:
The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Cohen H. Floris
Abstract: When scientists in our day meddle with the humanities, the outcomes are not always uplifting. Sometimes they are, as when art historians and chemists supplement each other’s expertise quite nicely in establishing or disproving the authenticity of some famous painting. In my own discipline, the history of science, the contributions scientists make are rarely so productive, unless (as, for instance, with Thomas Kuhn) they turn themselves into professional historians. Professional scientists with a layman’s interest in history certainly tend to display a deep-seated emotional involvement in past manifestations of their own present-day concerns. But the flip side of their praiseworthy
3.1 A Domestic Culture: from:
The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Tollebeek Jo
Abstract: Like many Italian historians, I am a commuter. The saying that every Italian academic carries a train timetable could not be truer. The conversations which take place on Eurostars turn out to be a sort of extension of faculty or department meetings and […] this is usually the right time not only to complain about the new reforms and shortage of money but also to discuss a new book or a project. […]
3.2 History Made More Scholarly and Also More Popular: from:
The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Mathijsen Marita
Abstract: The Game of the Goose (
Ganzenbord) is the name of a traditional game with dice and pawns still played by many a Dutch family. Its popularity goes back to the Dutch Golden Age. You throw dice to get from field 1 to the winning field 63. Along the way you surmount various obstacles – a pit, a thorn bush, or a churchyard may throw you back or get you stuck until somebody else’s pawn lands in the same field, thus setting you free again. Some other fields assist your advance, e.g., you may throw a second time and thus keep
3.3 The Professionalization of the Historical Discipline: from:
The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Ottner Christine
Abstract: Scholarly periodicals are important pacemakers and trendsetters in the process of academic professionalization and institutionalization: they not only reflect developments within scientific disciplines or their relationship to other scientific fields, they also influence such developments decisively by way of an active editorial policy.¹ Already in the course of the eighteenth century many journals dealing with ‘historical’ issues had been founded, i.e., treating genealogical, numismatic, and statistical contents.² Most of them were media of education which intended to spread and discuss established ideas within a circle of educated readers.³ At that time and also during the early years of the nineteenth
5.2 Scientification and Popularization in the Historiography of World Literature, 1850-1950: from:
The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) van Kalmthout Ton
Abstract: In Europe, interest in other cultures had began to grow in the course of the eighteenth century, a development connected with the expansion of the notion of ‘culture’ at the time. Formerly, it had been used
8.1 The Making of Oriental Studies: from:
The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Naumann Katja
Abstract: While some disciplines of the humanities struggle with a seemingly waning attention, both within academia as well as at the interface with politics and society, the opposite is the case for the fields falling under the rubric of regional studies or Oriental studies. There are increasing efforts to come to terms with its past, including its intellectual shape, its institutional position, and its political baggage. Likewise, new visions of Oriental studies are drafted that better suit the needs of our time. Although much ink has been spilled over the challenges of the latter attempt, less has been done on the
10.1 Making the Humanities Scientific: from:
The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Ierna Carlo
Abstract: During the nineteenth century we witness an extraordinary progress and increasing specialization in the natural sciences as well as the growth and professionalization of universities in Germany.¹ At the same time, after the deaths of Goethe and Hegel, the epoch of Romanticism and German Idealism had come to an end.² While the sciences diversified and emancipated from their philosophical past, philosophy itself fragmented into competing schools and currents,³ and in many respects, precipitated into an existential crisis.⁴ For a long time in the mainstream historiography of philosophy the nineteenth century was considered to harbor only epigones or predecessors.⁵ However, there
12.1 The Making and Persisting of Modern German Humanities: from:
The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Hamann Julian
Abstract: The foundation for the autonomy of the modern humanities’ disciplines was formulated by Kant. He claimed that liberal arts constitute the very core of academic purity precisely because of their autonomy from any societal purpose. Declaring that ‘our age is the age of criticism’,¹ Kant at the same time wants
12.2 Critique and Theory in the History of the Modern Humanities from:
The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Jay Paul
Abstract: What role has poststructuralist literary, critical, and cultural theory played in the making of the humanities, particularly in the period between 1968 and the present, and what role should theory have going forward as we come to terms with the corporatization of higher education, with its stress on practical skills, vocational training, and on measuring concrete learning outcomes? Exploring these questions requires confronting – and linking – two key issues currently at the core of sometimes-fierce debates about the humanities in the West, and particularly in the US.
Book Title: In Defense of Doctrine-Evangelicalism, Theology, and Scripture
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Putman Rhyne R.
Abstract: Questions surrounding the relationship of Scripture and doctrine are legion within the Protestant tradition. How can doctrine develop over time and maintain fidelity to the sacred text, especially for communities who cling to the Reformation principle of sola scriptura? Does not an appeal to contemporary, constructive theology belie commonly held Protestant and Evangelical convictions about the sufficiency of Scripture? Does admission and acceptance of doctrinal development result in a kind of reality-denying theological relativism? And in what way can a growing, postcanonical tradition maintain a sense of continuity with the faith of the New Testament? This study is an apologetic for the ongoing, constructive theological task in Protestant and Evangelical traditions. It suggests that doctrinal development can be explained as a hermeneutical phenomenon and that insights from hermeneutical philosophy and the philosophy of language can aid theologians in constructing explanatory theses for particular theological problems associated with the facts of doctrinal development, namely, questions related to textual authority, reality depiction, and theological identity. Joining the recent call to theological interpretation of Scripture, Putman provides a constructive model that forwards a descriptive and normative pattern for reading Scripture and theological tradition together.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt12878jm
5 Interpretive Authority and Doctrinal Development from:
In Defense of Doctrine
Abstract: By whose “authority” does the church develop doctrine? What guide can aid in differentiating between positive developments and doctrinal distortions? By whose rule can we draw the line between orthodoxy and heterodoxy? The construction of doctrine in the broader Christian tradition and in systematic theology is a complex operation that involves many people over a great span of time with many disciplinary specialties and pastoral concerns. Naturalist interpretations of religion chalk all of these processes up to socio-cultural or bio-cultural factors. These are undirected by external forces and products of a human culture, a building of gods in the images
7 Development and Continuity from:
In Defense of Doctrine
Abstract: The most critical issue for any model of doctrinal development is the question of doctrinal continuity. Can doctrines
develop, grow, orprogresswithout compromising their fidelity to “the faith once delivered unto the saints” (Jude 3)? Can there be maintained identity between New Testament teachings and later doctrinal formulations that utilize very different conceptual frameworks? Most importantly, if doctrines do in fact develop over time through expansion, contextualization, and critical correction, how can the faith communities that develop and reformulate doctrines claim to be part of the same broad Christian tradition?
Book Title: In Defense of Doctrine-Evangelicalism, Theology, and Scripture
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Putman Rhyne R.
Abstract: Questions surrounding the relationship of Scripture and doctrine are legion within the Protestant tradition. How can doctrine develop over time and maintain fidelity to the sacred text, especially for communities who cling to the Reformation principle of sola scriptura? Does not an appeal to contemporary, constructive theology belie commonly held Protestant and Evangelical convictions about the sufficiency of Scripture? Does admission and acceptance of doctrinal development result in a kind of reality-denying theological relativism? And in what way can a growing, postcanonical tradition maintain a sense of continuity with the faith of the New Testament? This study is an apologetic for the ongoing, constructive theological task in Protestant and Evangelical traditions. It suggests that doctrinal development can be explained as a hermeneutical phenomenon and that insights from hermeneutical philosophy and the philosophy of language can aid theologians in constructing explanatory theses for particular theological problems associated with the facts of doctrinal development, namely, questions related to textual authority, reality depiction, and theological identity. Joining the recent call to theological interpretation of Scripture, Putman provides a constructive model that forwards a descriptive and normative pattern for reading Scripture and theological tradition together.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt12878jm
5 Interpretive Authority and Doctrinal Development from:
In Defense of Doctrine
Abstract: By whose “authority” does the church develop doctrine? What guide can aid in differentiating between positive developments and doctrinal distortions? By whose rule can we draw the line between orthodoxy and heterodoxy? The construction of doctrine in the broader Christian tradition and in systematic theology is a complex operation that involves many people over a great span of time with many disciplinary specialties and pastoral concerns. Naturalist interpretations of religion chalk all of these processes up to socio-cultural or bio-cultural factors. These are undirected by external forces and products of a human culture, a building of gods in the images
7 Development and Continuity from:
In Defense of Doctrine
Abstract: The most critical issue for any model of doctrinal development is the question of doctrinal continuity. Can doctrines
develop, grow, orprogresswithout compromising their fidelity to “the faith once delivered unto the saints” (Jude 3)? Can there be maintained identity between New Testament teachings and later doctrinal formulations that utilize very different conceptual frameworks? Most importantly, if doctrines do in fact develop over time through expansion, contextualization, and critical correction, how can the faith communities that develop and reformulate doctrines claim to be part of the same broad Christian tradition?
Book Title: In Defense of Doctrine-Evangelicalism, Theology, and Scripture
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Putman Rhyne R.
Abstract: Questions surrounding the relationship of Scripture and doctrine are legion within the Protestant tradition. How can doctrine develop over time and maintain fidelity to the sacred text, especially for communities who cling to the Reformation principle of sola scriptura? Does not an appeal to contemporary, constructive theology belie commonly held Protestant and Evangelical convictions about the sufficiency of Scripture? Does admission and acceptance of doctrinal development result in a kind of reality-denying theological relativism? And in what way can a growing, postcanonical tradition maintain a sense of continuity with the faith of the New Testament? This study is an apologetic for the ongoing, constructive theological task in Protestant and Evangelical traditions. It suggests that doctrinal development can be explained as a hermeneutical phenomenon and that insights from hermeneutical philosophy and the philosophy of language can aid theologians in constructing explanatory theses for particular theological problems associated with the facts of doctrinal development, namely, questions related to textual authority, reality depiction, and theological identity. Joining the recent call to theological interpretation of Scripture, Putman provides a constructive model that forwards a descriptive and normative pattern for reading Scripture and theological tradition together.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt12878jm
5 Interpretive Authority and Doctrinal Development from:
In Defense of Doctrine
Abstract: By whose “authority” does the church develop doctrine? What guide can aid in differentiating between positive developments and doctrinal distortions? By whose rule can we draw the line between orthodoxy and heterodoxy? The construction of doctrine in the broader Christian tradition and in systematic theology is a complex operation that involves many people over a great span of time with many disciplinary specialties and pastoral concerns. Naturalist interpretations of religion chalk all of these processes up to socio-cultural or bio-cultural factors. These are undirected by external forces and products of a human culture, a building of gods in the images
7 Development and Continuity from:
In Defense of Doctrine
Abstract: The most critical issue for any model of doctrinal development is the question of doctrinal continuity. Can doctrines
develop, grow, orprogresswithout compromising their fidelity to “the faith once delivered unto the saints” (Jude 3)? Can there be maintained identity between New Testament teachings and later doctrinal formulations that utilize very different conceptual frameworks? Most importantly, if doctrines do in fact develop over time through expansion, contextualization, and critical correction, how can the faith communities that develop and reformulate doctrines claim to be part of the same broad Christian tradition?
Book Title: In Defense of Doctrine-Evangelicalism, Theology, and Scripture
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Putman Rhyne R.
Abstract: Questions surrounding the relationship of Scripture and doctrine are legion within the Protestant tradition. How can doctrine develop over time and maintain fidelity to the sacred text, especially for communities who cling to the Reformation principle of sola scriptura? Does not an appeal to contemporary, constructive theology belie commonly held Protestant and Evangelical convictions about the sufficiency of Scripture? Does admission and acceptance of doctrinal development result in a kind of reality-denying theological relativism? And in what way can a growing, postcanonical tradition maintain a sense of continuity with the faith of the New Testament? This study is an apologetic for the ongoing, constructive theological task in Protestant and Evangelical traditions. It suggests that doctrinal development can be explained as a hermeneutical phenomenon and that insights from hermeneutical philosophy and the philosophy of language can aid theologians in constructing explanatory theses for particular theological problems associated with the facts of doctrinal development, namely, questions related to textual authority, reality depiction, and theological identity. Joining the recent call to theological interpretation of Scripture, Putman provides a constructive model that forwards a descriptive and normative pattern for reading Scripture and theological tradition together.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt12878jm
5 Interpretive Authority and Doctrinal Development from:
In Defense of Doctrine
Abstract: By whose “authority” does the church develop doctrine? What guide can aid in differentiating between positive developments and doctrinal distortions? By whose rule can we draw the line between orthodoxy and heterodoxy? The construction of doctrine in the broader Christian tradition and in systematic theology is a complex operation that involves many people over a great span of time with many disciplinary specialties and pastoral concerns. Naturalist interpretations of religion chalk all of these processes up to socio-cultural or bio-cultural factors. These are undirected by external forces and products of a human culture, a building of gods in the images
7 Development and Continuity from:
In Defense of Doctrine
Abstract: The most critical issue for any model of doctrinal development is the question of doctrinal continuity. Can doctrines
develop, grow, orprogresswithout compromising their fidelity to “the faith once delivered unto the saints” (Jude 3)? Can there be maintained identity between New Testament teachings and later doctrinal formulations that utilize very different conceptual frameworks? Most importantly, if doctrines do in fact develop over time through expansion, contextualization, and critical correction, how can the faith communities that develop and reformulate doctrines claim to be part of the same broad Christian tradition?
Book Title: In Defense of Doctrine-Evangelicalism, Theology, and Scripture
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Putman Rhyne R.
Abstract: Questions surrounding the relationship of Scripture and doctrine are legion within the Protestant tradition. How can doctrine develop over time and maintain fidelity to the sacred text, especially for communities who cling to the Reformation principle of sola scriptura? Does not an appeal to contemporary, constructive theology belie commonly held Protestant and Evangelical convictions about the sufficiency of Scripture? Does admission and acceptance of doctrinal development result in a kind of reality-denying theological relativism? And in what way can a growing, postcanonical tradition maintain a sense of continuity with the faith of the New Testament? This study is an apologetic for the ongoing, constructive theological task in Protestant and Evangelical traditions. It suggests that doctrinal development can be explained as a hermeneutical phenomenon and that insights from hermeneutical philosophy and the philosophy of language can aid theologians in constructing explanatory theses for particular theological problems associated with the facts of doctrinal development, namely, questions related to textual authority, reality depiction, and theological identity. Joining the recent call to theological interpretation of Scripture, Putman provides a constructive model that forwards a descriptive and normative pattern for reading Scripture and theological tradition together.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt12878jm
5 Interpretive Authority and Doctrinal Development from:
In Defense of Doctrine
Abstract: By whose “authority” does the church develop doctrine? What guide can aid in differentiating between positive developments and doctrinal distortions? By whose rule can we draw the line between orthodoxy and heterodoxy? The construction of doctrine in the broader Christian tradition and in systematic theology is a complex operation that involves many people over a great span of time with many disciplinary specialties and pastoral concerns. Naturalist interpretations of religion chalk all of these processes up to socio-cultural or bio-cultural factors. These are undirected by external forces and products of a human culture, a building of gods in the images
7 Development and Continuity from:
In Defense of Doctrine
Abstract: The most critical issue for any model of doctrinal development is the question of doctrinal continuity. Can doctrines
develop, grow, orprogresswithout compromising their fidelity to “the faith once delivered unto the saints” (Jude 3)? Can there be maintained identity between New Testament teachings and later doctrinal formulations that utilize very different conceptual frameworks? Most importantly, if doctrines do in fact develop over time through expansion, contextualization, and critical correction, how can the faith communities that develop and reformulate doctrines claim to be part of the same broad Christian tradition?
Book Title: In Defense of Doctrine-Evangelicalism, Theology, and Scripture
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Putman Rhyne R.
Abstract: Questions surrounding the relationship of Scripture and doctrine are legion within the Protestant tradition. How can doctrine develop over time and maintain fidelity to the sacred text, especially for communities who cling to the Reformation principle of sola scriptura? Does not an appeal to contemporary, constructive theology belie commonly held Protestant and Evangelical convictions about the sufficiency of Scripture? Does admission and acceptance of doctrinal development result in a kind of reality-denying theological relativism? And in what way can a growing, postcanonical tradition maintain a sense of continuity with the faith of the New Testament? This study is an apologetic for the ongoing, constructive theological task in Protestant and Evangelical traditions. It suggests that doctrinal development can be explained as a hermeneutical phenomenon and that insights from hermeneutical philosophy and the philosophy of language can aid theologians in constructing explanatory theses for particular theological problems associated with the facts of doctrinal development, namely, questions related to textual authority, reality depiction, and theological identity. Joining the recent call to theological interpretation of Scripture, Putman provides a constructive model that forwards a descriptive and normative pattern for reading Scripture and theological tradition together.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt12878jm
5 Interpretive Authority and Doctrinal Development from:
In Defense of Doctrine
Abstract: By whose “authority” does the church develop doctrine? What guide can aid in differentiating between positive developments and doctrinal distortions? By whose rule can we draw the line between orthodoxy and heterodoxy? The construction of doctrine in the broader Christian tradition and in systematic theology is a complex operation that involves many people over a great span of time with many disciplinary specialties and pastoral concerns. Naturalist interpretations of religion chalk all of these processes up to socio-cultural or bio-cultural factors. These are undirected by external forces and products of a human culture, a building of gods in the images
7 Development and Continuity from:
In Defense of Doctrine
Abstract: The most critical issue for any model of doctrinal development is the question of doctrinal continuity. Can doctrines
develop, grow, orprogresswithout compromising their fidelity to “the faith once delivered unto the saints” (Jude 3)? Can there be maintained identity between New Testament teachings and later doctrinal formulations that utilize very different conceptual frameworks? Most importantly, if doctrines do in fact develop over time through expansion, contextualization, and critical correction, how can the faith communities that develop and reformulate doctrines claim to be part of the same broad Christian tradition?
Book Title: In Defense of Doctrine-Evangelicalism, Theology, and Scripture
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Putman Rhyne R.
Abstract: Questions surrounding the relationship of Scripture and doctrine are legion within the Protestant tradition. How can doctrine develop over time and maintain fidelity to the sacred text, especially for communities who cling to the Reformation principle of sola scriptura? Does not an appeal to contemporary, constructive theology belie commonly held Protestant and Evangelical convictions about the sufficiency of Scripture? Does admission and acceptance of doctrinal development result in a kind of reality-denying theological relativism? And in what way can a growing, postcanonical tradition maintain a sense of continuity with the faith of the New Testament? This study is an apologetic for the ongoing, constructive theological task in Protestant and Evangelical traditions. It suggests that doctrinal development can be explained as a hermeneutical phenomenon and that insights from hermeneutical philosophy and the philosophy of language can aid theologians in constructing explanatory theses for particular theological problems associated with the facts of doctrinal development, namely, questions related to textual authority, reality depiction, and theological identity. Joining the recent call to theological interpretation of Scripture, Putman provides a constructive model that forwards a descriptive and normative pattern for reading Scripture and theological tradition together.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt12878jm
5 Interpretive Authority and Doctrinal Development from:
In Defense of Doctrine
Abstract: By whose “authority” does the church develop doctrine? What guide can aid in differentiating between positive developments and doctrinal distortions? By whose rule can we draw the line between orthodoxy and heterodoxy? The construction of doctrine in the broader Christian tradition and in systematic theology is a complex operation that involves many people over a great span of time with many disciplinary specialties and pastoral concerns. Naturalist interpretations of religion chalk all of these processes up to socio-cultural or bio-cultural factors. These are undirected by external forces and products of a human culture, a building of gods in the images
7 Development and Continuity from:
In Defense of Doctrine
Abstract: The most critical issue for any model of doctrinal development is the question of doctrinal continuity. Can doctrines
develop, grow, orprogresswithout compromising their fidelity to “the faith once delivered unto the saints” (Jude 3)? Can there be maintained identity between New Testament teachings and later doctrinal formulations that utilize very different conceptual frameworks? Most importantly, if doctrines do in fact develop over time through expansion, contextualization, and critical correction, how can the faith communities that develop and reformulate doctrines claim to be part of the same broad Christian tradition?
8 Eschatological Existence and Existentialist Translation from:
The Mission of Demythologizing
Abstract: We noted in the previous chapter Bultmann’s claim that radical demythologizing is “the consistent application [of the doctrine of justification by faith alone] to the field of knowledge.”² This application has both a negative and a positive dimension. Negatively it is criticism of objectifying thinking within the
Weltbildof mythology, which I suggest we can restate ascriticism of constantinianism. Demythologizing is a critical epistemology in the sense that it subverts every attempt to interpret the kerygma in the form of aWeltanschauung. It is thus an antimythological and antimetaphysical—i.e., deconstantinizing—hermeneutic.
Book Title: Writing Theologically- Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Barreto Eric D.
Abstract: Of course, by writing we refer to the kinds of reflections, essays, and exams students will have to complete in the seminary classroom. But writing also encompasses the many modes of communication and self-discovery that creative expression can unlock. Writing Theologically introduces writing not just as an academic exercise but as a way for students to communicate the good news in rapidly changing contexts, as well as to discover and craft their own sense of vocation and identity. Most important will be guiding students to how they might begin to claim and hone a distinctive theological voice that is particularly attuned to the contexts of writer and audience alike. In a collection of brief, readable essays, this volume, edited by Eric D. Barreto, emphasizes the vital skills, practices, and values involved in writing theologically. That is, how might students prepare themselves to communicate effectively and creatively, clearly and beautifully, the insights they gather during their time in seminary? Each contribution includes practical advice about best practices in writing theologically; however, the book also stresses why writing is vital in the self-understanding of the minister, as well as her or his public communication of the good news.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt12878rq
4 Writing Briefly from:
Writing Theologically
Author(s) Smith Shively T. J.
Abstract: Who doesn’t want to speak with force and energy? As seminarians, I suspect you, like Quintilian, want to preach, teach, and write with impact
andvigor. Quintilian was a first-century Roman rhetorician who lived in Rome during the time the New Testament writings were being composed and the Christian movement emerging. He gained notoriety for his moving speeches and written rhetorical guidelines. Yet, even he had to admit the truth: force and energy come with practice.
8 Writing Purposefully from:
Writing Theologically
Author(s) Sharp Melinda A. McGarrah
Abstract: Writing purposefully is sacred communication that engages human experiences, addresses communities across time, and dares to bring voice to the mysteries of divine presence. Writing purposefully articulates theological claims even while discerning and perhaps challenging them. It is your responsibility and yours alone to write with purpose about your most deeply held convictions. However, this does not mean you are alone.¹
Book Title: Power and Politics in the Book of Judges-Men and Women of Valor
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Yoder John C.
Abstract: Power and Politics in the Book of Judges studies political culture and behavior in premonarchic Israel, focusing on the protagonists in the book of Judges. Although the sixth-century BCE Deuteronomistic editor portrayed them as moral champions and called them “judges,” the original bardic storytellers and the men and women of valor themselves were preoccupied with the problem of gaining and maintaining political power. These “mighty ones” were ambitious, at times ruthless; they might be labeled chiefs, strongmen, or even warlords in today’s world. John C. Yoder considers the variety of strategies the men and women of valor used to gain and consolidate their power, including the use of violence, the redistribution of patronage, and the control of the labor and reproductive capacity of subordinates. They relied heavily, however, on other strategies that did not deplete their wealth or require the constant exercise of force: mobilizing and dispensing indigenous knowledge, cultivating a reputation for reliability and honor, and positioning themselves as skillful mediators between the realms of earth and heaven, using their association with YHWH to advance their political, economic, or military agenda.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt12878ws
6 Conclusions and Reflections from:
Power and Politics in the Book of Judges
Abstract: Neglected by secular scholars because of its religious content, reshaped by people of faith because its protagonists are morally offensive, and avoided by individuals committed to nonviolence because of its brutality, the book of Judges deserves to be taken more seriously. No other book in the Hebrew Bible mirrors the entire span of Israel’s history as authentically as Judges. The main body of the book is a collection of premonarchic tales celebrating heroic champions, who competed for power in turbulent times. The book’s sixth-century version reflects the tension between the priestly Deuteronomic reformers and the Deuteronomistic defenders of royal power.¹
Foreword from:
Sin Boldly!
Author(s) Marty Martin E.
Abstract: While this book is not only for those who are Christian or those who are not and may never be Lutheran, it would be a waste of your time and it would blur the theme if I did not introduce Martin Luther in this first paragraph.
9 Scapegoats and Broken Souls from:
Sin Boldly!
Abstract: Unconsciously or semiconsciously, we draw a line between good and evil, between what is just and what is unjust. And we place ourselves on the good side of the line, on the just side of the line. Sometimes this
15 Sanctification by Grace from:
Sin Boldly!
Abstract: We all know atheists and agnostics who exhibit personal integrity and even give time and money to charity. It appears that their inclination to perform good works is built in to their common humanity, not dependent on their religious affiliation or even religious beliefs.
Foreword from:
Sin Boldly!
Author(s) Marty Martin E.
Abstract: While this book is not only for those who are Christian or those who are not and may never be Lutheran, it would be a waste of your time and it would blur the theme if I did not introduce Martin Luther in this first paragraph.
9 Scapegoats and Broken Souls from:
Sin Boldly!
Abstract: Unconsciously or semiconsciously, we draw a line between good and evil, between what is just and what is unjust. And we place ourselves on the good side of the line, on the just side of the line. Sometimes this
15 Sanctification by Grace from:
Sin Boldly!
Abstract: We all know atheists and agnostics who exhibit personal integrity and even give time and money to charity. It appears that their inclination to perform good works is built in to their common humanity, not dependent on their religious affiliation or even religious beliefs.
Book Title: Lyric Apocalypse: Milton, Marvell, and the Nature of Events- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Netzley Ryan
Abstract: What's new about the apocalypse? Revelation does not allow us to look back after the end and enumerate pivotal turning points. It happens in an immediate encounter with the transformatively new. John Milton's and Andrew Marvell's lyrics attempt to render the experience of such an apocalyptic change in the present. In this respect they take seriously the Reformation's insistence that eschatology is a historical phenomenon. Yet these poets are also reacting to the Regicide, and, as a result, their works explore very modern questions about the nature of events, what it means for a significant historical occasion to happen. Lyric Apocalypse argues that Milton's and Marvell's lyrics challenge any retrospective understanding of events, including one built on a theory of revolution. Instead, these poems show that there is no "after" to the apocalypse, that if we are going to talk about change, we should do so in the present, when there is still time to do something about it. For both of these poets, lyric becomes a way to imagine an apocalyptic event that would be both hopeful and new.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1287fr4
CHAPTER 3 Blaise Pascal, Henry Darger, and the Book in Hand from:
To Make the Hands Impure: Art, Ethical Adventure, the Difficult and the Holy
Abstract: Late at night on November 23–24, 1654, in his chambers on the rue des Francs-Bourgeois Saint-Michel, Blaise Pascal experienced something momentous. A spiritual ecstasy, a dream-vision, a psychotic episode, a premonition of his own mortality: one or all these things, Pascal’s
Nuit de feumarked his so-called “second conversion,” which was to be dramatic and lasting for his association with the Jansenists of Port Royal. Materially, it impressed itself upon him threefold. First, he transcribed the experience in a single page of fervent and ciphered prose; an elliptical fusion of his own rapturous sentiments and scriptural allusions from the
CHAPTER 3 Blaise Pascal, Henry Darger, and the Book in Hand from:
To Make the Hands Impure: Art, Ethical Adventure, the Difficult and the Holy
Abstract: Late at night on November 23–24, 1654, in his chambers on the rue des Francs-Bourgeois Saint-Michel, Blaise Pascal experienced something momentous. A spiritual ecstasy, a dream-vision, a psychotic episode, a premonition of his own mortality: one or all these things, Pascal’s
Nuit de feumarked his so-called “second conversion,” which was to be dramatic and lasting for his association with the Jansenists of Port Royal. Materially, it impressed itself upon him threefold. First, he transcribed the experience in a single page of fervent and ciphered prose; an elliptical fusion of his own rapturous sentiments and scriptural allusions from the
CHAPTER 3 Blaise Pascal, Henry Darger, and the Book in Hand from:
To Make the Hands Impure: Art, Ethical Adventure, the Difficult and the Holy
Abstract: Late at night on November 23–24, 1654, in his chambers on the rue des Francs-Bourgeois Saint-Michel, Blaise Pascal experienced something momentous. A spiritual ecstasy, a dream-vision, a psychotic episode, a premonition of his own mortality: one or all these things, Pascal’s
Nuit de feumarked his so-called “second conversion,” which was to be dramatic and lasting for his association with the Jansenists of Port Royal. Materially, it impressed itself upon him threefold. First, he transcribed the experience in a single page of fervent and ciphered prose; an elliptical fusion of his own rapturous sentiments and scriptural allusions from the
NINE Metaphor and Metonymy in the Middle Ages: from:
Figures of a Changing World: Metaphor and the Emergence of Modern Culture
Abstract: The time is the late Middle Ages. The texts that follow illustrate the kinds of historical constraint that impose themselves on the characterization and valuation of our two rhetorical figures. The first passage, a famous anonymous jingle, states in popular form the theory of fourfold interpretation that guides much symbolic practice during the Christian Middle Ages, and the second passage is an equally famous but sophisticated justification of the theory:
Theism and Atheism at Play from:
The Trace of God: Derrida and Religion
Author(s) BARING EDWARD
Abstract: There was no religious turn. Many of the papers in this volume focus on texts from the 1990s. It was at this time that Derrida turned the formidable arsenal of a deconstructive methodology to questions of faith, messianism, and negative theology. The concentration on this period has led to an assumption that what one can loosely call “deconstruction” developed elsewhere for different purposes and was only belatedly applied to religious questions and theology. In this narrative religion was the newfound passion of a middle-aged man.
Called to Bear Witness: from:
The Trace of God: Derrida and Religion
Author(s) NORTON ANNE
Abstract: Derrida meets Islam in a magic, ghostly,
geistlicheplace. This is a place where the desert meets the ocean, a place of “intimate immensity.”¹ This is a place of returning without departing, a place of memory. This is a timeless place belonging to the past and the future—and to a past that might have been but was not and a future that is not yet. One might also name these, as Derrida did in “Faith and Knowledge,” “the island, the Promised land, the desert. Three aporetic places: with no way out or any assured path, without itinerary or point
Habermas, Derrida, and the Question of Religion from:
The Trace of God: Derrida and Religion
Author(s) GORDON PETER E.
Abstract: In the history of religion the arrival of the millennium is often imagined as the έσχατον, an end of history or “end-time” that brings an apocalyptic and ultimate answer to all human questions. But the perennial quarrel between religion and philosophy can hardly be illustrated with greater force than by recalling that for Socrates the practice of philosophy remains forever marked by άπορεία. It is a mode of critical interrogation or
maieuticsthat is always incomplete, and that must forever exceed or undo any ideal of plenitude. In this sense, although its detractors consign philosophy to the ostensibly unworldly realm
11 Conclusion: from:
Ostension
Abstract: “Has philosophy lost contact with people?” wondered Quine in a 1979
Newsdaycolumn. He was responding to Mortimer Adler, an Aristotelian and Great Books enthusiast, who maintained that professional philosophy no longer appealed to the general literate public. Quine acknowledges that the menu of philosophy has become exotic, and only connoisseurs will appreciate its offerings today. But Quine takes umbrage at the suggestion that this specialization should be taken as a shortcoming. It rather constitutes philosophy’s maturation into a scientific discipline. The linguistic turn had the great merit of undermining modern introspective notions, which proved inadequate for accounting for our
Myth and History in Daniel 8: from:
Myth and Scripture
Author(s) Willis Amy C. Merrill
Abstract: In an essay exploring the often antagonistic relationship that scholars have imposed between myth and history, Elie Wiesel (1980, 20–21) tells the story of his encounter with an old Hasidic rabbi, his former teacher, sometime after the Holocaust.
Myth and History in Daniel 8: from:
Myth and Scripture
Author(s) Willis Amy C. Merrill
Abstract: In an essay exploring the often antagonistic relationship that scholars have imposed between myth and history, Elie Wiesel (1980, 20–21) tells the story of his encounter with an old Hasidic rabbi, his former teacher, sometime after the Holocaust.
Myth and History in Daniel 8: from:
Myth and Scripture
Author(s) Willis Amy C. Merrill
Abstract: In an essay exploring the often antagonistic relationship that scholars have imposed between myth and history, Elie Wiesel (1980, 20–21) tells the story of his encounter with an old Hasidic rabbi, his former teacher, sometime after the Holocaust.
Myth and History in Daniel 8: from:
Myth and Scripture
Author(s) Willis Amy C. Merrill
Abstract: In an essay exploring the often antagonistic relationship that scholars have imposed between myth and history, Elie Wiesel (1980, 20–21) tells the story of his encounter with an old Hasidic rabbi, his former teacher, sometime after the Holocaust.
Where There’s Smoke, There’s Fire: from:
Memory and Identity in Ancient Judaism and Early Christianity
Author(s) Schwartz Barry
Abstract: Late Second Temple period scholarship is premised on the belief that Jews of the time thought about the past differently from the way we do. Their knowledge was rooted in traditional legends and communal bonds; ours is data-driven, self-critical, and context-free. Both statements—history is subjective and situation-dependent, and history is objective and situation-transcendent—provoke ambivalence because both are partly but not absolutely true. The problem begins when this ambivalence inhibits us from applying the findings of modern research to instances of ancient memory, for these findings often tell us what it means to “remember,” help us dissect the complex
Selective Recall and Ghost Memories: from:
Memory and Identity in Ancient Judaism and Early Christianity
Author(s) Newsom Carol A.
Abstract: Biblical studies has long been concerned with aspects of what is now called “cultural memory,” especially in the form of a preoccupation with tradition history.¹ Yet even though the major theorists of tradition history were active at the same time that Maurice Halbwachs and Aby Warburg were developing their ideas about cultural memory in society and art, there is no evidence of intellectual cross-fertilization. More recently, the debates over historiography in biblical studies in the 1990s raised in an acute fashion issues relating to the preservation of reliable data in the historical narratives of the Bible versus the invention of
Old Memories, New Identities: from:
Memory and Identity in Ancient Judaism and Early Christianity
Author(s) Langille Tim
Abstract: As communities continue to shape and reshape their collective memories, new events and information are constantly combined and integrated with previous knowledge to form flexible mental schemas. Representation of trauma and construction of collective identity are facilitated by these flexible, preexisting schemas. Memories of events run back and forth in time, from past to present and vice-versa, as more recent events and figures are associated with earlier ones (Schwartz 1991, 222, 233–34; van der Kolk and van der Hart 1995, 171; Yerushalmi 1996). The shattering and disruptive experiences of trauma are processed and represented through already-existing mnemonic and narrative
Where There’s Smoke, There’s Fire: from:
Memory and Identity in Ancient Judaism and Early Christianity
Author(s) Schwartz Barry
Abstract: Late Second Temple period scholarship is premised on the belief that Jews of the time thought about the past differently from the way we do. Their knowledge was rooted in traditional legends and communal bonds; ours is data-driven, self-critical, and context-free. Both statements—history is subjective and situation-dependent, and history is objective and situation-transcendent—provoke ambivalence because both are partly but not absolutely true. The problem begins when this ambivalence inhibits us from applying the findings of modern research to instances of ancient memory, for these findings often tell us what it means to “remember,” help us dissect the complex
Selective Recall and Ghost Memories: from:
Memory and Identity in Ancient Judaism and Early Christianity
Author(s) Newsom Carol A.
Abstract: Biblical studies has long been concerned with aspects of what is now called “cultural memory,” especially in the form of a preoccupation with tradition history.¹ Yet even though the major theorists of tradition history were active at the same time that Maurice Halbwachs and Aby Warburg were developing their ideas about cultural memory in society and art, there is no evidence of intellectual cross-fertilization. More recently, the debates over historiography in biblical studies in the 1990s raised in an acute fashion issues relating to the preservation of reliable data in the historical narratives of the Bible versus the invention of
Old Memories, New Identities: from:
Memory and Identity in Ancient Judaism and Early Christianity
Author(s) Langille Tim
Abstract: As communities continue to shape and reshape their collective memories, new events and information are constantly combined and integrated with previous knowledge to form flexible mental schemas. Representation of trauma and construction of collective identity are facilitated by these flexible, preexisting schemas. Memories of events run back and forth in time, from past to present and vice-versa, as more recent events and figures are associated with earlier ones (Schwartz 1991, 222, 233–34; van der Kolk and van der Hart 1995, 171; Yerushalmi 1996). The shattering and disruptive experiences of trauma are processed and represented through already-existing mnemonic and narrative
Where There’s Smoke, There’s Fire: from:
Memory and Identity in Ancient Judaism and Early Christianity
Author(s) Schwartz Barry
Abstract: Late Second Temple period scholarship is premised on the belief that Jews of the time thought about the past differently from the way we do. Their knowledge was rooted in traditional legends and communal bonds; ours is data-driven, self-critical, and context-free. Both statements—history is subjective and situation-dependent, and history is objective and situation-transcendent—provoke ambivalence because both are partly but not absolutely true. The problem begins when this ambivalence inhibits us from applying the findings of modern research to instances of ancient memory, for these findings often tell us what it means to “remember,” help us dissect the complex
Selective Recall and Ghost Memories: from:
Memory and Identity in Ancient Judaism and Early Christianity
Author(s) Newsom Carol A.
Abstract: Biblical studies has long been concerned with aspects of what is now called “cultural memory,” especially in the form of a preoccupation with tradition history.¹ Yet even though the major theorists of tradition history were active at the same time that Maurice Halbwachs and Aby Warburg were developing their ideas about cultural memory in society and art, there is no evidence of intellectual cross-fertilization. More recently, the debates over historiography in biblical studies in the 1990s raised in an acute fashion issues relating to the preservation of reliable data in the historical narratives of the Bible versus the invention of
Old Memories, New Identities: from:
Memory and Identity in Ancient Judaism and Early Christianity
Author(s) Langille Tim
Abstract: As communities continue to shape and reshape their collective memories, new events and information are constantly combined and integrated with previous knowledge to form flexible mental schemas. Representation of trauma and construction of collective identity are facilitated by these flexible, preexisting schemas. Memories of events run back and forth in time, from past to present and vice-versa, as more recent events and figures are associated with earlier ones (Schwartz 1991, 222, 233–34; van der Kolk and van der Hart 1995, 171; Yerushalmi 1996). The shattering and disruptive experiences of trauma are processed and represented through already-existing mnemonic and narrative
Where There’s Smoke, There’s Fire: from:
Memory and Identity in Ancient Judaism and Early Christianity
Author(s) Schwartz Barry
Abstract: Late Second Temple period scholarship is premised on the belief that Jews of the time thought about the past differently from the way we do. Their knowledge was rooted in traditional legends and communal bonds; ours is data-driven, self-critical, and context-free. Both statements—history is subjective and situation-dependent, and history is objective and situation-transcendent—provoke ambivalence because both are partly but not absolutely true. The problem begins when this ambivalence inhibits us from applying the findings of modern research to instances of ancient memory, for these findings often tell us what it means to “remember,” help us dissect the complex
Selective Recall and Ghost Memories: from:
Memory and Identity in Ancient Judaism and Early Christianity
Author(s) Newsom Carol A.
Abstract: Biblical studies has long been concerned with aspects of what is now called “cultural memory,” especially in the form of a preoccupation with tradition history.¹ Yet even though the major theorists of tradition history were active at the same time that Maurice Halbwachs and Aby Warburg were developing their ideas about cultural memory in society and art, there is no evidence of intellectual cross-fertilization. More recently, the debates over historiography in biblical studies in the 1990s raised in an acute fashion issues relating to the preservation of reliable data in the historical narratives of the Bible versus the invention of
Old Memories, New Identities: from:
Memory and Identity in Ancient Judaism and Early Christianity
Author(s) Langille Tim
Abstract: As communities continue to shape and reshape their collective memories, new events and information are constantly combined and integrated with previous knowledge to form flexible mental schemas. Representation of trauma and construction of collective identity are facilitated by these flexible, preexisting schemas. Memories of events run back and forth in time, from past to present and vice-versa, as more recent events and figures are associated with earlier ones (Schwartz 1991, 222, 233–34; van der Kolk and van der Hart 1995, 171; Yerushalmi 1996). The shattering and disruptive experiences of trauma are processed and represented through already-existing mnemonic and narrative
Marey and the Synthesis of Movement from:
Cine-Dispositives
Author(s) Tortajada Maria
Abstract: “Cinema is the moving image”: the idea, which has become a commonplace, coalesced around 1900 as photography was being referred to as the still image. The opposition between photography and cinema made it possible throughout the twentieth century, and to this day, to assign distinct tasks in the representation of reality to each of these emblematic dispositives of modernity. Still, the association still/moving also structured the cinematographic dispositive as such as early as the late nineteenth century. Indeed, photography was not the other of cinema at the time, but a means used by “cinema” in its chronophotographic stage to reconstitute
Notes on the Bergsonian Cinematograph from:
Cine-Dispositives
Author(s) During Elie
Abstract: We know how Gilles Deleuze turned the commonplace inside out: Bergson, so it went, had “missed” cinema, contenting himself with a critique of its dispositive – the mechanism of the projecting device called the “cinematograph,” to be specific. Before the critique of the “cinematographic illusion,” developed for the most part in 1907 in
Creative Evolution,¹ there was indeed the doctrine of real movement, whose touchstone was the pure perception of movement as an act or progression rather than as a relation distributed in the spatial order. Movement unfolds in time, not in space. This bold thesis, exposed inMatter and Memory,
The “Dispositive Effect” in Film Narrative from:
Cine-Dispositives
Author(s) Ortel Philippe
Abstract: Like the idea of structure, the notion of the “dispositif” does not pertain to a single level of analysis: it applies to specific objects, such as the mechanism of a watch, but also to large ensembles, as in Foucault’s work, where it came to substitute for the episteme in the late 1970s. By contrast to the episteme, focused too narrowly on the utterances produced by a society, Foucault’s
dispositifrefers more widely to the totality of discourses, social practices, technical inventions, architectural creations instituting, at a given time, the partition between the true and the false in the domain of
Reality Television as Dispositive: from:
Cine-Dispositives
Author(s) Bouchez Charlotte
Abstract: While scholars are sometimes confronted with the ignorance of their interlocutors about their field of research, anyone who has ambitions to work on “reality TV” is in exactly the opposite situation. The mere mention of the term conjures up an impression of self-evidence, as reality television does not immediately appear to be complex subject matter. Still, a simple look at the phenomenon already reveals a variety of objects. Starting from a study carried out on reality television in French-speaking Switzerland,¹ this study questions how the term “reality television programming” has come to make sense within social exchange and examines the
1 Folklore, Film, and Video: from:
Documenting Ourselves
Abstract: The folklore documentaryis ubiquitous. In a world bombarded by visual images, most of us have become not only receivers of the image but its manipulators as well. We take photographs, produce home movies, and shoot videotape of life’s events. Often, these visual documents represent the realm of folklore: they record such events as birthday parties, weddings, ethnic gatherings, and religious occasions. At the same time, the films and videos we create reveal much about ustous and others.¹ As a folklorist, filmmaker, and videographer, I believe the use of film and video becomes a reflexive process of interpreting
6 Structure Shifts and Style: from:
Documenting Ourselves
Abstract: Effective folklore films provide a sense of involvement in the event for the audience by following the actual structure of the processes of narrating, singing, ceremony, dancing, playing, and similar events and conveying them as holistically as possible through myriad styles. How one chooses to present folklore shifts as a result of one’s growth as a filmmaker at the same time as one’s attitudes about film and technique shift. A look at my own work quickly reminds me how filmmakers change not only what they choose to shoot but how they do so. Filmmakers are not the only ones who
Prologue from:
The Shriek of Silence
Abstract: “And it came to pass in those days that terror denied all languages and frontiers” (Wiesel,
Six Days5). For those were days invaded by night, the days of the reign of the Kingdom of Night. They are days that haunt and harrow all subsequent days, words, and deeds, cutting through the frontiers of language and meaning that might once have divided light from darkness. Terror has undone time and with it that being that once inhabited the heart of human being, the being of the word. “There is no peace for the darkened valleys,” Amos Oz has said, “something
6 The Resurrection of the Self from:
The Shriek of Silence
Abstract: Elie Wiesel has written, “It is not given to man to begin; that privilege is God’s alone. But it is given to man to begin again—and he does so every time he chooses to defy death and side with. the living” (
Messengers32). Many commonly view art as a kind of hubris, whereby a mere mortal assumes or unsurps the role of the Creator to call a world into being. Such a view cannot apply to the Holocaust novel. There the mortal does not create but re-creates; there the author does not begin but begins again. “My purpose and the
Book Title: Passage to the Center-Imagination and the Sacred in the Poetry of Seamus Heaney
Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): Tobin Daniel
Abstract: Nobel Laureate Seamus Heaney, author of nine collections of poetry and three volumes of influential essays, is regarded by many as the greatest Irish poet since Yeats.
Passage to the Centeris the most comprehensive critical treatment to date on Heaney's poetry and the first to study Heaney's body of work up toSeeing ThingsandThe Spirit Level. It is also the first to examine the poems from the perspective of religion, one of Heaney's guiding preoccupations. According to Tobin, the growth of Heaney's poetry may be charted through the recurrent figure of "the center," a key image in the relationship that evolved over time between the poet and his inherited place, an evolution that involved the continual re-evaluation and re-vision of imaginative boundaries. In a way that previous studies have not, Tobin's work examines Heaney's poetry in the context of modernist and postmodernist concerns about the desacralizing of civilization and provides a challenging engagement with the work of a living master.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt130jbjp
8 Parables of Perfected Vision: from:
Passage to the Center
Abstract: “Without needing to be theoretically instructed, consciousness quickly realizes that it is the site of variously contending discourses,” Heaney remarked in
Crediting Poetry(13). Within the context of his Nobel lecture, Seamus Heaney’s observation reminds the reader that even the apparent innocence of childhood is in fact nothing less than a school “for the complexities of his adult predicament.” In a profound sense, Heaney’s insight at once harkens back to the narrow limits of his first world, as well as the nexus of forces that constitutes its ground. At the same time, it illuminates Heaney’s artistic passage beyond his home,
Afterword from:
Passage to the Center
Abstract: Throughout these pages I have interpreted Heaney’s poetry as a quest for self-definition, a rite of passage. Within this rite, the problem of identity emerges through the poet’s explorations of his personal history, a history that in time is set against the wider historical horizon of Heaney’s cultural past. Paradoxically, what gives his work continuity is his willingness to face discontinuity over again with each return to the source. Still, Heaney’s reliance on what has been called disparagingly a poetic of identity would appear to confirm Anthony Easthope’s criticism that Heaney’s poetry is “resolutely premodernist in its commitment to a
2 FRANCISCO BRINES: from:
Poetry Of Discovery
Abstract: The work of Francisco Brines exemplifies some of the main features of Spanish poetry in the 1960s. Meditative and philosophical, often centered on the themes of time and death and on the reactions that these evoke, Brines’s poetry is also marked by the very careful and artistic use of seemingly ordinary language. Critics have observed the symbolic nature of his work and its way of giving impact to seemingly common vignettes and expressions by juxtapositions, superpositions, and linguistic devices.¹
7 JAIME GIL DE BIEDMA: from:
Poetry Of Discovery
Abstract: Jaime Gil de Biedma’s poems come across on first reading as clear and “realistic.” Many of them comprise detailed evocations of specific episodes, narrated by a first-person speaker who gives commentaries and conclusions. Quite often these commentaries offer philosophic insights; at times, especially in the later books, they contain social or political ideas. All of this has led some critics to characterize Gil de Biedma as a realistic poet proccupied with ethical and social issues.¹ The very clarity of his work has caused readers to miss its depth and originality.
Book Title: Whistling in the Dark-Memory and Culture in Wartime London
Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): Freedman Jean R.
Abstract: By exploring the differences between wartime documentation and postwar memory, oral and written artifacts, and the voices of the powerful and the obscure, Freedman illuminates the complex interactions between myth and history. She concludes that there are as many interpretations of what really happened during Britain's finest hour as there are people who remember it.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt130jmtp
4 Time Long Past: from:
Whistling in the Dark
Abstract: Stories about wartime London are to this day an important component of British cultural and national identity Told with relish to tourists, scholars, and bored or fascinated grandchildren, these stories are ways of keeping the past alive and of asserting one’s own place in a crucial historical epoch. They are also the precious cultural capital of the generation that experienced the war. The many small stories told by the much-touted “ordinary people” of wartime London flow into the master narratives of European history; enriching them, enlivening them, and occasionally colliding with them. Even before the war’s end, people realized how
Introduction to Part One from:
God--The World's Future
Abstract: Systematic theology explicates the content of Christian belief, often by expanding the trinitarian structure found in the Apostles’ and Nicene Creeds. This content is normally termed
doctrine. The doctrinal content sits in the center, usually preceded by a section onmethodologyand followed by a discussion ofethics. The section on methodology consists of a prolegomenon that is occasionally called “foundations” or “fundamental theology.” The discussion of ethics, which sometimes appears in a work separate from the systematic theology itself, attempts to discern what conduct should flow from doctrinal belief.
5 Becoming Human and Unbecoming Evil from:
God--The World's Future
Abstract: The whole of creation history includes, among other things, human history. Perhaps the emerging field of Big History is the closest secular counterpart to the theologian’s creation history. Within the cosmic hsitory of creation, systematic theologians commonly include an anthropology—an explication of what is human—in their explication of Christian doctrine. Sometimes the anthropology appears between expositions of the First and Second Articles of the creeds—that is, between explications of God as Father and God as Son. The sorry state of the human condition explains why the good creation is in need of redemption. So theological anthropology fits
6 The Person and Work of Jesus Christ from:
God--The World's Future
Abstract: The story of Jesus is significant because of who Jesus was and because of what he accomplished. Ordinarily, the word
Christologyrefers to who he was and is, and the wordsoteriologyrefers to what he did and does. Sometimes the wordChristologyrefers to both.
11 Eschatology from:
God--The World's Future
Abstract: Salvation is already present to us in faith. It is present in faith, but not in experience—at least not in uninterrupted, continual, plenary, uncontradictable experience. Faith is under continual attack by temptation from within and suffering from without, due to the warfare between the two aeons, due to the conflict between the present and the future. Beatitudinal living is living between the times: we both have and await the blessings that Christ has wrought. We live out of the power of salvation that dwells within our hearts while yet awaiting salvation to come in its fullness. We express the
13 Astrotheology from:
God--The World's Future
Abstract: How large is the
oikoumene? How large is God’s creation? Is Planet Earth large enough? Our Planet Earth does not exist in isolation; its life-giving generativity is due to the network of relationships it shares with the sun, the moon, the Milky Way Galaxy of 200 to 400 billion stars, and the entire cosmos of 100 or more billion galaxies. Could God’s creation be any smaller than the totality of what is? Is it time for theologians to place our ecosphere within the context of the cosmosphere?
Introduction to Part One from:
God--The World's Future
Abstract: Systematic theology explicates the content of Christian belief, often by expanding the trinitarian structure found in the Apostles’ and Nicene Creeds. This content is normally termed
doctrine. The doctrinal content sits in the center, usually preceded by a section onmethodologyand followed by a discussion ofethics. The section on methodology consists of a prolegomenon that is occasionally called “foundations” or “fundamental theology.” The discussion of ethics, which sometimes appears in a work separate from the systematic theology itself, attempts to discern what conduct should flow from doctrinal belief.
5 Becoming Human and Unbecoming Evil from:
God--The World's Future
Abstract: The whole of creation history includes, among other things, human history. Perhaps the emerging field of Big History is the closest secular counterpart to the theologian’s creation history. Within the cosmic hsitory of creation, systematic theologians commonly include an anthropology—an explication of what is human—in their explication of Christian doctrine. Sometimes the anthropology appears between expositions of the First and Second Articles of the creeds—that is, between explications of God as Father and God as Son. The sorry state of the human condition explains why the good creation is in need of redemption. So theological anthropology fits
6 The Person and Work of Jesus Christ from:
God--The World's Future
Abstract: The story of Jesus is significant because of who Jesus was and because of what he accomplished. Ordinarily, the word
Christologyrefers to who he was and is, and the wordsoteriologyrefers to what he did and does. Sometimes the wordChristologyrefers to both.
11 Eschatology from:
God--The World's Future
Abstract: Salvation is already present to us in faith. It is present in faith, but not in experience—at least not in uninterrupted, continual, plenary, uncontradictable experience. Faith is under continual attack by temptation from within and suffering from without, due to the warfare between the two aeons, due to the conflict between the present and the future. Beatitudinal living is living between the times: we both have and await the blessings that Christ has wrought. We live out of the power of salvation that dwells within our hearts while yet awaiting salvation to come in its fullness. We express the
13 Astrotheology from:
God--The World's Future
Abstract: How large is the
oikoumene? How large is God’s creation? Is Planet Earth large enough? Our Planet Earth does not exist in isolation; its life-giving generativity is due to the network of relationships it shares with the sun, the moon, the Milky Way Galaxy of 200 to 400 billion stars, and the entire cosmos of 100 or more billion galaxies. Could God’s creation be any smaller than the totality of what is? Is it time for theologians to place our ecosphere within the context of the cosmosphere?
Introduction to Part One from:
God--The World's Future
Abstract: Systematic theology explicates the content of Christian belief, often by expanding the trinitarian structure found in the Apostles’ and Nicene Creeds. This content is normally termed
doctrine. The doctrinal content sits in the center, usually preceded by a section onmethodologyand followed by a discussion ofethics. The section on methodology consists of a prolegomenon that is occasionally called “foundations” or “fundamental theology.” The discussion of ethics, which sometimes appears in a work separate from the systematic theology itself, attempts to discern what conduct should flow from doctrinal belief.
5 Becoming Human and Unbecoming Evil from:
God--The World's Future
Abstract: The whole of creation history includes, among other things, human history. Perhaps the emerging field of Big History is the closest secular counterpart to the theologian’s creation history. Within the cosmic hsitory of creation, systematic theologians commonly include an anthropology—an explication of what is human—in their explication of Christian doctrine. Sometimes the anthropology appears between expositions of the First and Second Articles of the creeds—that is, between explications of God as Father and God as Son. The sorry state of the human condition explains why the good creation is in need of redemption. So theological anthropology fits
6 The Person and Work of Jesus Christ from:
God--The World's Future
Abstract: The story of Jesus is significant because of who Jesus was and because of what he accomplished. Ordinarily, the word
Christologyrefers to who he was and is, and the wordsoteriologyrefers to what he did and does. Sometimes the wordChristologyrefers to both.
11 Eschatology from:
God--The World's Future
Abstract: Salvation is already present to us in faith. It is present in faith, but not in experience—at least not in uninterrupted, continual, plenary, uncontradictable experience. Faith is under continual attack by temptation from within and suffering from without, due to the warfare between the two aeons, due to the conflict between the present and the future. Beatitudinal living is living between the times: we both have and await the blessings that Christ has wrought. We live out of the power of salvation that dwells within our hearts while yet awaiting salvation to come in its fullness. We express the
13 Astrotheology from:
God--The World's Future
Abstract: How large is the
oikoumene? How large is God’s creation? Is Planet Earth large enough? Our Planet Earth does not exist in isolation; its life-giving generativity is due to the network of relationships it shares with the sun, the moon, the Milky Way Galaxy of 200 to 400 billion stars, and the entire cosmos of 100 or more billion galaxies. Could God’s creation be any smaller than the totality of what is? Is it time for theologians to place our ecosphere within the context of the cosmosphere?
1 Canon and the Educational Repertoire from:
The Creative Word
Abstract: Every community that wants to last beyond a single generation must concern itself with education. Education has to do with the maintenance of a community through the generations. This maintenance must assure enough continuity of vision, value, and perception so that the community sustains its self-identity. At the same time, such maintenance must assure enough freedom and novelty so that the community can survive in and be pertinent to new circumstances.¹ Thus, education must attend to processes of both continuity and discontinuity in order to avoid fossilizing into irrelevance on the one hand, and relativizing into disappearance on the other
1 Canon and the Educational Repertoire from:
The Creative Word
Abstract: Every community that wants to last beyond a single generation must concern itself with education. Education has to do with the maintenance of a community through the generations. This maintenance must assure enough continuity of vision, value, and perception so that the community sustains its self-identity. At the same time, such maintenance must assure enough freedom and novelty so that the community can survive in and be pertinent to new circumstances.¹ Thus, education must attend to processes of both continuity and discontinuity in order to avoid fossilizing into irrelevance on the one hand, and relativizing into disappearance on the other
1 Canon and the Educational Repertoire from:
The Creative Word
Abstract: Every community that wants to last beyond a single generation must concern itself with education. Education has to do with the maintenance of a community through the generations. This maintenance must assure enough continuity of vision, value, and perception so that the community sustains its self-identity. At the same time, such maintenance must assure enough freedom and novelty so that the community can survive in and be pertinent to new circumstances.¹ Thus, education must attend to processes of both continuity and discontinuity in order to avoid fossilizing into irrelevance on the one hand, and relativizing into disappearance on the other
Book Title: Metaphor and the Ancient Novel- Publisher: Barkhuis
Author(s): Frangoulidis Stavros
Abstract: This thematic fourth Supplementum to Ancient Narrative, entitled Metaphor and the Ancient Novel, is a collection of revised versions of papers originally read at the Second Rethymnon International Conference on the Ancient Novel (RICAN 2) under the same title, held at the University of Crete, Rethymnon, on May 19-20, 2003.Though research into metaphor has reached staggering proportions over the past twenty-five years, this is the first volume dedicated entirely to the subject of metaphor in relation to the ancient novel. Not every contributor takes into account theoretical discussions of metaphor, but the usefulness of every single paper lies in the fact that they explore actual texts while sometimes theorists tend to work out of context.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13wwxsr
Greek novel and the ritual of life: from:
Metaphor and the Ancient Novel
Author(s) Dowden Ken
Abstract: Nothing is less persuasive than alleging that novels are ‘allegorical’ in a modern age of sophisticated literary criticism. Yet it is perhaps time that we saw where a modern sense of allegory might fit in the kaleidoscope of approaches to the meaning, or effect, or characteristic methods of operation, of literary text.
Metaphor and politics in John Barclay’s Argenis (1621) from:
Metaphor and the Ancient Novel
Author(s) Connors Catherine
Abstract: On May 25, 2001, an article appeared in
The New York Timesunder the headline: ‘Is Baghdad’s tiger a literary lion?’¹ It discussed the publication in Iraq of a novel in Arabic titledZabibah wal Malik, Zabibah and the King. The novel was published anonymously, but its author was said to be Saddam Hussein (or at least, indications were that he wanted to be known as its author). Set in pre-Christian times in what is now northern Iraq, the novel tells the allegorical story of Zabibah, an everywoman who stands for the Iraqi people, her cruel husband, who stands for
Book Title: Metaphor and the Ancient Novel- Publisher: Barkhuis
Author(s): Frangoulidis Stavros
Abstract: This thematic fourth Supplementum to Ancient Narrative, entitled Metaphor and the Ancient Novel, is a collection of revised versions of papers originally read at the Second Rethymnon International Conference on the Ancient Novel (RICAN 2) under the same title, held at the University of Crete, Rethymnon, on May 19-20, 2003.Though research into metaphor has reached staggering proportions over the past twenty-five years, this is the first volume dedicated entirely to the subject of metaphor in relation to the ancient novel. Not every contributor takes into account theoretical discussions of metaphor, but the usefulness of every single paper lies in the fact that they explore actual texts while sometimes theorists tend to work out of context.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13wwxsr
Greek novel and the ritual of life: from:
Metaphor and the Ancient Novel
Author(s) Dowden Ken
Abstract: Nothing is less persuasive than alleging that novels are ‘allegorical’ in a modern age of sophisticated literary criticism. Yet it is perhaps time that we saw where a modern sense of allegory might fit in the kaleidoscope of approaches to the meaning, or effect, or characteristic methods of operation, of literary text.
Metaphor and politics in John Barclay’s Argenis (1621) from:
Metaphor and the Ancient Novel
Author(s) Connors Catherine
Abstract: On May 25, 2001, an article appeared in
The New York Timesunder the headline: ‘Is Baghdad’s tiger a literary lion?’¹ It discussed the publication in Iraq of a novel in Arabic titledZabibah wal Malik, Zabibah and the King. The novel was published anonymously, but its author was said to be Saddam Hussein (or at least, indications were that he wanted to be known as its author). Set in pre-Christian times in what is now northern Iraq, the novel tells the allegorical story of Zabibah, an everywoman who stands for the Iraqi people, her cruel husband, who stands for
7 The Nature of Otherness from:
Aspects of Alterity: Levinas, Marcel, and the Contemporary Debate
Abstract: The title of this work promises more than a confrontation between the philosophies of Emmanuel Levinas and Gabriel Marcel, and the time has come to make good on that promise. The comparison of Levinas and Marcel has, to be sure, been interesting in terms of addressing the perplexing incompatibility of two philosophers who are in many ways quite similar. Moreover, tracing the development of these divergent accounts of otherness to the theological soil in which they are rooted is significant both in terms of understanding Levinas and Marcel, and in terms of a broader grasp of the way in which
7 The Nature of Otherness from:
Aspects of Alterity: Levinas, Marcel, and the Contemporary Debate
Abstract: The title of this work promises more than a confrontation between the philosophies of Emmanuel Levinas and Gabriel Marcel, and the time has come to make good on that promise. The comparison of Levinas and Marcel has, to be sure, been interesting in terms of addressing the perplexing incompatibility of two philosophers who are in many ways quite similar. Moreover, tracing the development of these divergent accounts of otherness to the theological soil in which they are rooted is significant both in terms of understanding Levinas and Marcel, and in terms of a broader grasp of the way in which
7 The Nature of Otherness from:
Aspects of Alterity: Levinas, Marcel, and the Contemporary Debate
Abstract: The title of this work promises more than a confrontation between the philosophies of Emmanuel Levinas and Gabriel Marcel, and the time has come to make good on that promise. The comparison of Levinas and Marcel has, to be sure, been interesting in terms of addressing the perplexing incompatibility of two philosophers who are in many ways quite similar. Moreover, tracing the development of these divergent accounts of otherness to the theological soil in which they are rooted is significant both in terms of understanding Levinas and Marcel, and in terms of a broader grasp of the way in which
7 The Nature of Otherness from:
Aspects of Alterity: Levinas, Marcel, and the Contemporary Debate
Abstract: The title of this work promises more than a confrontation between the philosophies of Emmanuel Levinas and Gabriel Marcel, and the time has come to make good on that promise. The comparison of Levinas and Marcel has, to be sure, been interesting in terms of addressing the perplexing incompatibility of two philosophers who are in many ways quite similar. Moreover, tracing the development of these divergent accounts of otherness to the theological soil in which they are rooted is significant both in terms of understanding Levinas and Marcel, and in terms of a broader grasp of the way in which
7 The Nature of Otherness from:
Aspects of Alterity: Levinas, Marcel, and the Contemporary Debate
Abstract: The title of this work promises more than a confrontation between the philosophies of Emmanuel Levinas and Gabriel Marcel, and the time has come to make good on that promise. The comparison of Levinas and Marcel has, to be sure, been interesting in terms of addressing the perplexing incompatibility of two philosophers who are in many ways quite similar. Moreover, tracing the development of these divergent accounts of otherness to the theological soil in which they are rooted is significant both in terms of understanding Levinas and Marcel, and in terms of a broader grasp of the way in which
2 Suffering and Peace from:
Tastes of the Divine: Hindu and Christian Theologies of Emotion
Abstract: In the work of Jyoti Sahi, a contemporary Indian Christian artist who resides near Bangalore, the peaceful sentiment has a special place among the
rasas. Much of Sahi’s work explores the interplay of opposites in relation to Indian culture and religion. His bookThe Child and the Serpent, for example, looks for symbols of unconscious structures (the serpent) and their birth into consciousness (the child). His use of Jungian psychology grounds his keen interest in Hindu art and mythology in pre-Aryan themes and rituals, so that he draws inspiration both from high Sanskritic culture and from Dalit and Tribal folk
4 A Dilemma of Feeling from:
Tastes of the Divine: Hindu and Christian Theologies of Emotion
Abstract: Like Rūpa Gosvāmin, the medieval Christian theologian Bernard of Clairvaux (1090–1153) elevates love over all other emotions in the devotional life. He finds ample material for the devotional sentiment of love in the biblical Song of Songs. He writes no fewer than eighty-six sermons on the first chapters of this short book of Hebrew wisdom literature, which consists of a series of poetic exchanges between two lovers. Bernard ranks “reverence” and its attendant emotions of “horror or stupor or fear or wonder” (characteristic of
śāntain Rūpa’s system) far below the intimacy of love (Serm. 83.3).¹ For him, nuptial
Impossible Confessions from:
Material Spirit: Religion and Literature Intranscendent
Author(s) MACKENDRICK KARMEN
Abstract: In a roundtable presentation from 1944, published under the title “Discussion on Sin,” Georges Bataille levels against Christianity the harshest possible condemnation: he declares it boring. As regards most of both Christian practice and doctrine, this criticism holds up pretty well. But there have always been other strains in Christianity, as Bataille himself sometimes acknowledges—when he isn’t declaring himself purely hostile to all its versions¹—and some of those strains have been interesting in very Bataillean ways—cruel, sacrificial, or perverse. Indeed, it is a Christian priest (well, a Jesuit) who declares in the discussion, “For me, spiritual comfort
Introduction: from:
The Catholic Studies Reader
Author(s) McGUINNESS MARGARET M.
Abstract: Margaret McGuinness was a graduate student at Union Theological Seminary (New York) when Father James J. Hennesey’s
A History of the Roman Catholic Community in the United Stateswas published in 1981, even as James Fisher was studying American cultural history down the New Jersey Turnpike at Rutgers. Although other scholars, including Notre Dame’s Philip Gleason and Jay Dolan, were also writing about American Catholicism at this time, McGuinness’s church history classes were paying very little attention to their work, focusing primarily on the U.S. Protestant experience. Hennesey’s book convinced her that American Catholicism was a vital part of the
3 Passing on the Faith: from:
The Catholic Studies Reader
Author(s) YOCUM SANDRA
Abstract: How to pass on “the faith”? We certainly are not the first generation—and I hope not the last—to ask this question. One can find evidence of such concerns, sometimes oblique, other times explicit, in Paul’s letters, among the earliest extant Christian writings. A host of difficult questions came early to those communities that the first apostles founded. What does it mean to believe in the name of Jesus Christ, the one who was crucified, the cruelest, the most despised, the most shocking form of empire-orchestrated execution? What does it mean to believe in the one whose tomb was
6 A Definition of Catholic: from:
The Catholic Studies Reader
Author(s) FLETCHER JEANNINE HILL
Abstract: Catholic Studies emerges in the North American context precisely at a time when the boundaries for identifying “Catholic” are contested. Under conditions of globalization when persons shift in and out of a variety of local and transnational affiliations, the identifier is not as clear as perhaps it once was. In earlier periods, in so-called Catholic countries, the category “Catholic” encompassed the whole of society and the definition was bound up with national and ethnic identities. In non-Catholic Christian contexts, such as in the United States, where identity was constructed “over-against” the dominant ethos, the category “Catholic” was identifiable in contrast
6 The Reason of the Gift from:
Givenness and God: Questions of Jean-Luc Marion
Author(s) de Warren Nicolas
Abstract: We give without account. We give without accounting, in every sense of the word. First, because we give
without ceasing. We give in the same way we breathe, every moment, in every circumstance, from morning until evening. Not a single day passes without our having given, in one form or another, something to someone, even if we rarely, if ever, “give everything.”¹ Also, we give without keeping account,without measure, because giving implies that one gives at a loss, or at least without taking into account either one’s time or one’s efforts: one simply does not keep account of what
INTRODUCTION from:
Veiled Desires: Intimate Portrayals of Nuns in Postwar Anglo-American Film
Abstract: If anyone has suffered from typecasting, it is the cinematic nun. Enveloped in a religious veil and habit that show her only in part and are barriers to imagining her as a whole person, she has been vulnerable to stereotypes that complete the visual process of fragmenting her on-screen.¹ Whether these stereotypes trivialize, sentimentalize, or sanctify her, represent her seriously or sensationally, the result is the same.² She has seldom been seen as a totality of mind-body-heart-spirit, rarely been the subject of comprehensive inter-disciplinary analysis, and never been the subject of full-length study. Instead, the screen nun has often become
5 SACRED DESIRES: from:
Veiled Desires: Intimate Portrayals of Nuns in Postwar Anglo-American Film
Abstract: Reflecting on the effect that the Second Vatican Council had on American Catholic nuns in the 1960s, distinguished Benedictine leader and religious writer Sister Joan Chittister remarked that this decade of unprecedented change and renewal “was wonderful and it was terrible. It started with hope and excitement and ended in a lot of bitterness and difficulty for a long time.” Chittister had joined a community with the characteristics that Maria projects so unforgettably in
The Sound of Music—“high energy, high love” and “a lot of joy” (Rogers 1996: 295–6). She became a postulant in the early fifties at
INTRODUCTION from:
Veiled Desires: Intimate Portrayals of Nuns in Postwar Anglo-American Film
Abstract: If anyone has suffered from typecasting, it is the cinematic nun. Enveloped in a religious veil and habit that show her only in part and are barriers to imagining her as a whole person, she has been vulnerable to stereotypes that complete the visual process of fragmenting her on-screen.¹ Whether these stereotypes trivialize, sentimentalize, or sanctify her, represent her seriously or sensationally, the result is the same.² She has seldom been seen as a totality of mind-body-heart-spirit, rarely been the subject of comprehensive inter-disciplinary analysis, and never been the subject of full-length study. Instead, the screen nun has often become
5 SACRED DESIRES: from:
Veiled Desires: Intimate Portrayals of Nuns in Postwar Anglo-American Film
Abstract: Reflecting on the effect that the Second Vatican Council had on American Catholic nuns in the 1960s, distinguished Benedictine leader and religious writer Sister Joan Chittister remarked that this decade of unprecedented change and renewal “was wonderful and it was terrible. It started with hope and excitement and ended in a lot of bitterness and difficulty for a long time.” Chittister had joined a community with the characteristics that Maria projects so unforgettably in
The Sound of Music—“high energy, high love” and “a lot of joy” (Rogers 1996: 295–6). She became a postulant in the early fifties at
17 Proslogion from:
The Phenomenology of Prayer
Author(s) GOODCHILD PHILIP
Abstract: Up now, slight man! Flee, for a little while, thy occupations; hide thyself, for a time, from thy disturbing thoughts. Cast aside, now, thy burdensome cares, and put away thy toilsome business. Yield room for some little time to God; and rest for a little time in him. Enter the inner chamber of thy mind; shut out all thoughts save that of God, and such as can aid thee in seeking him; close thy door and seek him. Speak now, my whole heart! Speak now to God, saying, I seek thy face; thy face, Lord,
Taking the Wager of/on Love: from:
Gazing Through a Prism Darkly: Reflections on Merold Westphal's Hermeneutical Epistemology
Author(s) OLTHUIS JAMES H.
Abstract: In her prologue to
i love to you,¹ Luce Irigaray tells of the “miracle” (7) that happened when a debate with a man surprisingly turned into a “meeting with the other, the different” in the between, in “mutual respect.” “We were two: a man and a woman speaking in accordance with our identity, our conscience, our cultural heritage, and even our sensibility” (9). Since that time, more than ever, Irigaray has been an avid “political militant for the impossible, which is not to say a utopian.” Rather, in Derridean fashion, she wants “what is yet to be as the only
Taking the Wager of/on Love: from:
Gazing Through a Prism Darkly: Reflections on Merold Westphal's Hermeneutical Epistemology
Author(s) OLTHUIS JAMES H.
Abstract: In her prologue to
i love to you,¹ Luce Irigaray tells of the “miracle” (7) that happened when a debate with a man surprisingly turned into a “meeting with the other, the different” in the between, in “mutual respect.” “We were two: a man and a woman speaking in accordance with our identity, our conscience, our cultural heritage, and even our sensibility” (9). Since that time, more than ever, Irigaray has been an avid “political militant for the impossible, which is not to say a utopian.” Rather, in Derridean fashion, she wants “what is yet to be as the only
Taking the Wager of/on Love: from:
Gazing Through a Prism Darkly: Reflections on Merold Westphal's Hermeneutical Epistemology
Author(s) OLTHUIS JAMES H.
Abstract: In her prologue to
i love to you,¹ Luce Irigaray tells of the “miracle” (7) that happened when a debate with a man surprisingly turned into a “meeting with the other, the different” in the between, in “mutual respect.” “We were two: a man and a woman speaking in accordance with our identity, our conscience, our cultural heritage, and even our sensibility” (9). Since that time, more than ever, Irigaray has been an avid “political militant for the impossible, which is not to say a utopian.” Rather, in Derridean fashion, she wants “what is yet to be as the only
Book Title: Bruno Latour in Pieces: An Intellectual Biography- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Custance Gloria
Abstract: Bruno Latour stirs things up. Latour began as a lover of science and technology, co-founder of actor-network theory, and philosopher of a modernity that had "never been modern." In the meantime he is regarded not just as one of the most intelligent and also popular exponents of science studies but also as a major innovator of the social sciences, an exemplary wanderer who walks the line between the sciences and the humanities. This book provides the first comprehensive overview of the Latourian oeuvre, from his early anthropological studies in Abidjan (Ivory Coast), to influential books like Laboratory Life and Science in Action, and his most recent reflections on an empirical metaphysics of "modes of existence." In the course of this enquiry it becomes clear that the basic problem to which Latour's work responds is that of social tradition, the transmission of experience and knowledge. What this empirical philosopher constantly grapples with is the complex relationship of knowledge, time, and culture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x00jv
ONE Exegesis and Ethnology from:
Bruno Latour in Pieces: An Intellectual Biography
Abstract: Beaune is one of France’s most famous and important wine centers. The small city in Burgundy is also the birthplace of two important scientists: in 1746 the mathematician Gaspard Monge, and in 1830 the physiologist Étienne-Jules Marey. Unsurprisingly for this region of the world, wine is one of the connecting links between Monge and Marey. Both scientists came from families of winegrowers and wine merchants—the two families had actually joined forces for a time in the late eighteenth century. And even the scientific work of these two sons of Beaune was associated: although their subjects could not have been
CHAPTER 3 Personalism and the Natural Roots of Morality from:
Questioning the Human: Toward a Theological Anthropology for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) De Tavernier Johan
Abstract: The debate about the relevance of biology for ethics dates back to the time of Aristotle. In premodern theologies, nature and personhood have mainly been considered as two complementary notions. On the one hand, the human person was presented as a unique realization of nature; on the other, the human person fulfilled the assumptions that nature had given to him or her by virtue of his or her free will and the possibility for free choice. In other words, nature opens the possibility for free and responsible action. Since Darwin’s
The Descent of Man(1871), the question of the relevance
CHAPTER 5 Neuroscience, Self, and Jesus Christ from:
Questioning the Human: Toward a Theological Anthropology for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Davies Oliver
Abstract: Change in science involves a change in the way we understand materiality and the world around us. Since we ourselves are material as well as mind, what we
think, or authoritatively hold, matter to be is significant for our own self-understanding. More than that, the introduction of the new science into our own embodied space, through new technologies, can even change our “contact” with the world: how we are in the world as self-aware creatures who are both mind and body at the same time. For anyone who doubts the potential of scientific advances to shape our humanity, it would
CHAPTER 8 Difference, Body, and Race from:
Questioning the Human: Toward a Theological Anthropology for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Gonzalez Michelle A.
Abstract: The nature of humanity, our relationship with each other, and our relationship with the sacred is the starting point for reflections on theological anthropology. For centuries Christians have wrestled with defining what makes us particular in light of our humanity yet at the same time interconnected with God’s creation. Musings on this subject range from abstract philosophical speculation, to dialogue with the natural sciences, to a serious consideration of the diversity and complexity of the embodied human condition. Within systematic theology, the study of what it means to be human, created in the image and likeness of God, falls under
CHAPTER 9 Public Theology: from:
Questioning the Human: Toward a Theological Anthropology for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Carbine Rosemary P.
Abstract: Public theology is sometimes defined by the praxis of doing theology for the differing audiences, communities of accountability, or publics of the church, academy, and society that theologians address.¹ At other times, public theology is characterized by the method used to reach those audiences, either by making religious claims more intelligible to wider society via shared norms and practices of rational public discourse or by relying on religious institutions to shape and equip persons with virtues for participating in political discourse.² And, at other times, public theology is determined by the goal of integrating theology and ethics into the discursive
Turtles All The Way Down?: from:
Questioning the Human: Toward a Theological Anthropology for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Kirchhoffer David G.
Abstract: In this book various scholars explore the new challenges for theological anthropology. They make clear that the developments of the past fifty years in various fields of endeavor should be seen as an invitation, if not indeed as an urgent injunction, “to open our eyes to new ways of being human” (Julie Clague).¹ At the same time, we need to heed the postmodern warning regarding the dangers of engaging in what Henri-Jérôme Gagey called a “giant discourse,” whereby, in our attempt to unite languages into a single coherent understanding of the human person, we end up building a tower of
CHAPTER 3 Personalism and the Natural Roots of Morality from:
Questioning the Human: Toward a Theological Anthropology for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) De Tavernier Johan
Abstract: The debate about the relevance of biology for ethics dates back to the time of Aristotle. In premodern theologies, nature and personhood have mainly been considered as two complementary notions. On the one hand, the human person was presented as a unique realization of nature; on the other, the human person fulfilled the assumptions that nature had given to him or her by virtue of his or her free will and the possibility for free choice. In other words, nature opens the possibility for free and responsible action. Since Darwin’s
The Descent of Man(1871), the question of the relevance
CHAPTER 5 Neuroscience, Self, and Jesus Christ from:
Questioning the Human: Toward a Theological Anthropology for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Davies Oliver
Abstract: Change in science involves a change in the way we understand materiality and the world around us. Since we ourselves are material as well as mind, what we
think, or authoritatively hold, matter to be is significant for our own self-understanding. More than that, the introduction of the new science into our own embodied space, through new technologies, can even change our “contact” with the world: how we are in the world as self-aware creatures who are both mind and body at the same time. For anyone who doubts the potential of scientific advances to shape our humanity, it would
CHAPTER 8 Difference, Body, and Race from:
Questioning the Human: Toward a Theological Anthropology for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Gonzalez Michelle A.
Abstract: The nature of humanity, our relationship with each other, and our relationship with the sacred is the starting point for reflections on theological anthropology. For centuries Christians have wrestled with defining what makes us particular in light of our humanity yet at the same time interconnected with God’s creation. Musings on this subject range from abstract philosophical speculation, to dialogue with the natural sciences, to a serious consideration of the diversity and complexity of the embodied human condition. Within systematic theology, the study of what it means to be human, created in the image and likeness of God, falls under
CHAPTER 9 Public Theology: from:
Questioning the Human: Toward a Theological Anthropology for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Carbine Rosemary P.
Abstract: Public theology is sometimes defined by the praxis of doing theology for the differing audiences, communities of accountability, or publics of the church, academy, and society that theologians address.¹ At other times, public theology is characterized by the method used to reach those audiences, either by making religious claims more intelligible to wider society via shared norms and practices of rational public discourse or by relying on religious institutions to shape and equip persons with virtues for participating in political discourse.² And, at other times, public theology is determined by the goal of integrating theology and ethics into the discursive
Turtles All The Way Down?: from:
Questioning the Human: Toward a Theological Anthropology for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Kirchhoffer David G.
Abstract: In this book various scholars explore the new challenges for theological anthropology. They make clear that the developments of the past fifty years in various fields of endeavor should be seen as an invitation, if not indeed as an urgent injunction, “to open our eyes to new ways of being human” (Julie Clague).¹ At the same time, we need to heed the postmodern warning regarding the dangers of engaging in what Henri-Jérôme Gagey called a “giant discourse,” whereby, in our attempt to unite languages into a single coherent understanding of the human person, we end up building a tower of
Introduction: from:
Structures of Appearing: Allegory and the Work of Literature
Abstract: There is general agreement that the term
allegoryrefers to a way of saying or showing one thing and meaning another. This very definition reveals the particular phenomenology of allegory, an artistic or poetic structure in which some “other thing” appears in the “thing appearing” without being the same thing. Allegory can be defined more specifically as “the appearance of one thing in another thing which it is not.” Traditionally understood as a structure of meaning, allegory has a limited range, and critics of this mode are correct that it can be a facile, if at times fascinating, signifying structure.
2 A Phenomenological Reduction: from:
Structures of Appearing: Allegory and the Work of Literature
Abstract: As a trope,
allegoriaseems to have appeared either at the beginning of the Common Era or a few centuries prior to that time.² The first known use of allegorical interpretation was also near the beginning of the Common Era, although the technique had been applied to the Homeric poems at least as early as the sixth century BCE, under the rubrichyponoia(Whitman,Allegory265). At the end of the fourth century CE, allegory became particularly Christian, both as a trope and as an interpretive device. Augustine developed the Christian allegorical form of typology, and the poet Prudentius composed
4 The Allegorical Structure of Phenomenology of Spirit from:
Structures of Appearing: Allegory and the Work of Literature
Abstract: The name of Hegel is a mighty invocation for philosophy. A model of rigor, and from start to finish grounded in
Wissenschaft(science), Hegel’s philosophy has infiltrated far corners of the globe. Although often disputed, Hegel’s judgments are not easily dismissed. Nonetheless, as Paul de Man astutely observed about Hegel’s influence, “Few thinkers have so many disciples who never read a word of their master’s writings” (“Sign and Symbol” 93).³ Early in his career, Karl Marx expressed a similar sentiment with regard to the Young Hegelians of his time. Hegelians have used Hegel with great effect, often, as Marx observed
5 Reconsidering Allegory and Symbol: from:
Structures of Appearing: Allegory and the Work of Literature
Abstract: In the “Epistemo-Critical Prologue” to
The Origin of the German Tragic Drama, Benjamin establishes allegory in a realm out of the reach of aesthetics and idealism. Allegory is characterized by violence and is not at all beautiful, admittedly lacking “all ‘symbolic’ freedom of expression, all classical proportion, all humanity” (166;Der Ursprung des deutschen Trauerspiels145). Any time allegory is subjected to the critical palate of philosophical taste, it will seem a bitter alternative to beauty. However, by discrediting the presumed authority of aesthetics (the beautiful) and idealism (the symbolic determination of the object as a reflection of the object
4 Appropriating Postmodernism from:
Overcoming Onto-Theology: Toward a Postmodern Christian Faith
Abstract: Once upon a time, not yesterday, but not so very long ago, I’m told, there was a minister in the Reformed tradition whose sermons all had three points. In itself that is not unusual, but in this case they were the same three points, regardless of the text. Each text was expounded in terms of (1) what it said against the Arminians, (2) what it said against the papists, and (3) what it said against the modernists.
12 Faith As the Overcoming of Ontological Xenophobia from:
Overcoming Onto-Theology: Toward a Postmodern Christian Faith
Abstract: “My Pa can lick your Pa!” Thus, once upon a time, did aspiring machismo seek vicarious victory over its enemies.
4 Appropriating Postmodernism from:
Overcoming Onto-Theology: Toward a Postmodern Christian Faith
Abstract: Once upon a time, not yesterday, but not so very long ago, I’m told, there was a minister in the Reformed tradition whose sermons all had three points. In itself that is not unusual, but in this case they were the same three points, regardless of the text. Each text was expounded in terms of (1) what it said against the Arminians, (2) what it said against the papists, and (3) what it said against the modernists.
12 Faith As the Overcoming of Ontological Xenophobia from:
Overcoming Onto-Theology: Toward a Postmodern Christian Faith
Abstract: “My Pa can lick your Pa!” Thus, once upon a time, did aspiring machismo seek vicarious victory over its enemies.
4 Appropriating Postmodernism from:
Overcoming Onto-Theology: Toward a Postmodern Christian Faith
Abstract: Once upon a time, not yesterday, but not so very long ago, I’m told, there was a minister in the Reformed tradition whose sermons all had three points. In itself that is not unusual, but in this case they were the same three points, regardless of the text. Each text was expounded in terms of (1) what it said against the Arminians, (2) what it said against the papists, and (3) what it said against the modernists.
12 Faith As the Overcoming of Ontological Xenophobia from:
Overcoming Onto-Theology: Toward a Postmodern Christian Faith
Abstract: “My Pa can lick your Pa!” Thus, once upon a time, did aspiring machismo seek vicarious victory over its enemies.
4 Appropriating Postmodernism from:
Overcoming Onto-Theology: Toward a Postmodern Christian Faith
Abstract: Once upon a time, not yesterday, but not so very long ago, I’m told, there was a minister in the Reformed tradition whose sermons all had three points. In itself that is not unusual, but in this case they were the same three points, regardless of the text. Each text was expounded in terms of (1) what it said against the Arminians, (2) what it said against the papists, and (3) what it said against the modernists.
12 Faith As the Overcoming of Ontological Xenophobia from:
Overcoming Onto-Theology: Toward a Postmodern Christian Faith
Abstract: “My Pa can lick your Pa!” Thus, once upon a time, did aspiring machismo seek vicarious victory over its enemies.
Book Title: Language, Eros, Being: Kabbalistic Hermeneutics and Poetic Imagination- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): WOLFSON ELLIOT R.
Abstract: This long-awaited, magisterial study-an unparalleled blend of philosophy, poetry, and philology-draws on theories of sexuality, phenomenology, comparative religion, philological writings on Kabbalah, Russian formalism, Wittgenstein, Rosenzweig, William Blake, and the very physics of the time-space continuum to establish what will surely be a highwater mark in work on Kabbalah. Not only a study of texts, Language, Eros, Being is perhaps the fullest confrontation of the body in Jewish studies, if not in religious studies as a whole.Elliot R. Wolfson explores the complex gender symbolism that permeates Kabbalistic literature. Focusing on the nexus of asceticism and eroticism, he seeks to define the role of symbolic and poetically charged language in the erotically configured visionary imagination of the medieval Kabbalists. He demonstrates that the traditional Kabbalistic view of gender was a monolithic and androcentric one, in which the feminine was conceived as being derived from the masculine. He does not shrink from the negative implications of this doctrine, but seeks to make an honest acknowledgment of it as the first step toward the redemption of an ancient wisdom.Comparisons with other mystical traditions-including those in Christianity, Buddhism, and Islam-are a remarkable feature throughout the book. They will make it important well beyond Jewish studies, indeed, a must for historians of comparative religion, in particular of comparative mysticism.Praise for Elliot R. Wolfson:Through a Speculum That Shines is an important and provocative contribution to the study of Jewish mysticism by one of the major scholars now working in this field.-Speculum
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x01nw
Epilogue from:
Language, Eros, Being: Kabbalistic Hermeneutics and Poetic Imagination
Abstract: The sway of thought, like the trajectory of time at once circular and linear, seems always to lead one back to where one has not been, retracing steps yet to be imprinted. In this book, I have once again labored long in the orchard of kabbalistic texts to articulate philosophically the poetic imagination and hermeneutic orientation of the medieval Jewish esoteric lore. In great measure, my effort herein, reflective of my scholarly project since I began graduate school in 1980, has been impelled by a keen sense that kabbalah—not to speak of the spiritual comportment of Judaism more generally—
CHAPTER 4 The Late Derrida from:
For Derrida
Abstract: Derrida is always late,
en retard, the late Derrida. This is not because he was habitually late for appointments, lunch engagements, or seminars. Far from it. He was even compulsively ahead of time, always a few minutes early. Nevertheless, Derrida was always late, always behind time, until the end. A good thing too. I promise sooner or later to show why.
CHAPTER 10 Derrida’s Politics of Autoimmunity from:
For Derrida
Abstract: This chapter was first drafted for a conference at the University of Florida in Gainesville, held from October 9 to October 11, 2006. Some of the first part of the chapter is “time sensitive,” as one says. It describes the political situation in the United States as it was in the fall of 2006. A lot of water has flowed over the dam since then. Some interpolations added since then bring the chapter up to date at least to the time of the interpolations.
Book Title: Crediting God: Sovereignty and Religion in the Age of Global Capitalism- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Vatter Miguel
Abstract: Tocqueville suggested that the people reign in the American political world like God over the universe.This intuition anticipates the crisis in the secularization paradigm that has brought theology back as a fundamental part of sociological and political analysis. It has become more difficult to believe that humanity's progress necessarily leads to atheism, or that it is possible to translate all that is good about religion into reasonable terms acceptable in principle by all, believers as well as nonbelievers. And yet, the spread of Enlightenment values, of an independent public sphere, and of alternative projects of modernitycontinues unabated and is by no means the antithesis of the renewed vigor of religious beliefs.The essays in this book shed interdisciplinary and multicultural light on a hypothesis that helps to account for such an unexpected convergence of enlightenment and religion in our times: Religion has reentered the public sphere because it puts into question the relation between God and the concept of political sovereignty.In the first part, Religion and Polity-Building,new perspectives are brought to bear on the tension-ridden connection between theophany and state-building from the perspective of world religions. Globalized, neo-liberal capitalism has been another crucial factor in loosening the bond between God and the state, as the essays in the second part, The End of the Saeculum and Global Capitalism,show.The essays in the third part, Questioning Sovereignty: Law and Justice,are dedicated to a critique of the premises of political theology, starting from the possibility of a prior, perhaps deeper relation between democracy and theocracy. The book concludes with three innovative essays dedicated to examining Tocqueville in order to think the Religion of Democracybeyond the idea of civil religion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x026n
CHAPTER 7 All Nightmares Back: from:
Crediting God: Sovereignty and Religion in the Age of Global Capitalism
Author(s) Brunkhorst Hauke
Abstract: Modern capitalism in the 1960 s and 1970 s was called late capitalism, and this index of time—the word “late”—implied that modern capitalism, with free markets of labor, real estate, and money, had come to an end. Its final decay was supposed to be only a question of time, political power, and successful regime change. During the 1960 s and 1970 s, the leftist alternative seemed to be clear and present. The variety of socialist alternatives was overwhelming: Grassroots democracy, democratization of the economy, a strong social welfare state, state or market socialism, but socialism (or social democracy)
CHAPTER 9 “The War Has Not Ended”: from:
Crediting God: Sovereignty and Religion in the Age of Global Capitalism
Author(s) Balke Friedrich
Abstract: Thomas Hobbes’s political philosophy is based on a paradox: Hobbes, one could say, gives too much and too little to the state at the same time. He can thus be seen in the tradition of Leo Strauss, as the father of liberalism, but also, from a liberal perspective, he is dismissed as the guardian of state absolutism. Hobbes stresses the absoluteness of state power, being the sovereign, that is highest, not surmountable power, so strong that he denies to the subjects aligned with each other in the person of the Leviathan every right to defy a sovereign decision or to
CHAPTER 12 Drawing—the Single Trait: from:
Crediting God: Sovereignty and Religion in the Age of Global Capitalism
Author(s) Weber Samuel
Abstract: Politics, in its theory and even more in its practice, has always tended to subordinate the singular to the general, generally by equating it with the particular, which, qua “part,” already implies its dependency upon and subservience to a “whole.” At the same time—a “time” that is first of all that of Western “modernity,” here defined as the period ushered in by the Reformation, the ensuing Wars of Religion and the Treaty of Westphalia (1648) and extending until today, “postmodernism” notwithstanding—theoreticians of “liberal democracy” have sought to legitimate the institution in which the Whole materializes itself politically—either
Book Title: Regard for the Other: Autothanatography in Rousseau, De Quincey, Baudelaire, and Wilde- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Burt E. S.
Abstract: Although much has been written on autobiography, the same cannot be said of autothanatography, the writing of one's death. This study starts from the deconstructive premise that autobiography is aporetic, not or not only a matter of a subject strategizing with language to produce an exemplary identity but a matter also of its responding to an exorbitant call to write its death. The I-dominated representations of particular others and of the privileged other to whom a work is addressed, must therefore be set against an alterity plaguing the I from within or shadowing it from without. This alterity makes itself known in writing as the potential of the text to carry messages that remain secret to the confessing subject. Anticipation of the potential for the confessional text to say what Augustine calls the secret I do not know,the secret of death, engages the autothanatographical subject in a dynamic, inventive, and open-ended process of identification. The subject presented in these texts is not one that has already evolved an interior life that it seeks to reveal to others, but one that speaks to us as still in process. Through its exorbitant response, it gives intimations of an interiority and an ethical existence to come. Baudelaire emerges as a central figure for this understanding of autobiography as autothanatography through his critique of the narcissism of a certain Rousseau, his translation of De Quincey's confessions, with their vertiginously ungrounded subject-in-construction, his artistic practice of self-conscious, thorough-going doubleness, and his service to Wilde as model for an aporetic secrecy. The author discusses the interruption of narrative that must be central to the writing of one's death and addresses the I's dealings with the aporias of such structuring principles as secrecy, Levinasian hospitality, or interiorization as translation. The book makes a strong intervention in the debate over one of the most-read genres of our time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x02w0
CHAPTER 2 Regard for the Other: from:
Regard for the Other: Autothanatography in Rousseau, De Quincey, Baudelaire, and Wilde
Abstract: One difference between shame and embarrassment in Rousseau can be stated quite simply. Shame is a passion productive of discourse. The confessing done under its aegis seems marvelously able to serve as an action of which to be ashamed, and so to provoke more confession. Embarrassment, on the other hand, is tonguetied, an anacoluthon in the grammar of feelings. Where, under influence of timidity, Rousseau manages to blurt something out nonetheless, the effect is not to end the silence but most often to prolong it, rendering the hapless speaker even more incapable of timely speech. The blurted phrase is less
Book Title: Human Rights, Inc.: The World Novel, Narrative Form, and International Law- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): SLAUGHTER JOSEPH R.
Abstract: In this timely study of the historical, ideological, and formal interdependencies of the novel and human rights, Joseph Slaughter demonstrates that the twentieth-century rise of world literatureand international human rights law are related phenomena. Slaughter argues that international law shares with the modern novel a particular conception of the human individual. The Bildungsroman, the novel of coming of age, fills out this image, offering a conceptual vocabulary, a humanist social vision, and a narrative grammar for what the Universal Declaration of Human Rights and early literary theorists both call the free and full development of the human personality. Revising our received understanding of the relationship between law and literature, Slaughter suggests that this narrative form has acted as a cultural surrogate for the weak executive authority of international law, naturalizing the assumptions and conditions that make human rights appear commonsensical. As a kind of novelistic correlative to human rights law, the Bildungsroman has thus been doing some of the sociocultural work of enforcement that the law cannot do for itself. This analysis of the cultural work of law and of the social work of literature challenges traditional Eurocentric histories of both international law and the dissemination of the novel. Taking his point of departure in Goethe's Wilhelm Meister, Slaughter focuses on recent postcolonial versions of the coming-of-age story to show how the promise of human rights becomes legible in narrative and how the novel and the law are complicit in contemporary projects of globalization: in colonialism, neoimperalism, humanitarianism, and the spread of multinational consumer capitalism.Slaughter raises important practical and ethical questions that we must confront in advocating for human rights and reading world literature-imperatives that, today more than ever, are intertwined.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x031j
Book Title: Human Rights, Inc.: The World Novel, Narrative Form, and International Law- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): SLAUGHTER JOSEPH R.
Abstract: In this timely study of the historical, ideological, and formal interdependencies of the novel and human rights, Joseph Slaughter demonstrates that the twentieth-century rise of world literatureand international human rights law are related phenomena. Slaughter argues that international law shares with the modern novel a particular conception of the human individual. The Bildungsroman, the novel of coming of age, fills out this image, offering a conceptual vocabulary, a humanist social vision, and a narrative grammar for what the Universal Declaration of Human Rights and early literary theorists both call the free and full development of the human personality. Revising our received understanding of the relationship between law and literature, Slaughter suggests that this narrative form has acted as a cultural surrogate for the weak executive authority of international law, naturalizing the assumptions and conditions that make human rights appear commonsensical. As a kind of novelistic correlative to human rights law, the Bildungsroman has thus been doing some of the sociocultural work of enforcement that the law cannot do for itself. This analysis of the cultural work of law and of the social work of literature challenges traditional Eurocentric histories of both international law and the dissemination of the novel. Taking his point of departure in Goethe's Wilhelm Meister, Slaughter focuses on recent postcolonial versions of the coming-of-age story to show how the promise of human rights becomes legible in narrative and how the novel and the law are complicit in contemporary projects of globalization: in colonialism, neoimperalism, humanitarianism, and the spread of multinational consumer capitalism.Slaughter raises important practical and ethical questions that we must confront in advocating for human rights and reading world literature-imperatives that, today more than ever, are intertwined.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x031j
Book Title: Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): WYSCHOGROD EDITH
Abstract: Exploring the risks, ambiguities, and unstable conceptual worlds of contemporary thought, Crossover Queries brings together the wide-ranging writings, across twenty years, of one of our most important philosophers.Ranging from twentieth-century European philosophy-the thought of Heidegger, Foucault, Derrida, Levinas, Janicaud, and others-to novels and artworks, music and dance, from traditional Jewish thought to Jain andBuddhist metaphysics, Wyschogrod's work opens radically new vistas while remaining mindful that the philosopher stands within and is responsible to a philosophical legacy conditioned by the negative.Rather than point to a Hegelian dialectic of overcoming negation or to a postmetaphysical exhaustion, Wyschogrod treats negative moments as opening novel spaces for thought. She probes both the desire for God and an ethics grounded in the interests of the other person, seeing these as moments both of crossing over and of negation. Alert to the catastrophes that have marked our times, she exposes the underlying logical structures of nihilatory forces that have been exerted to exterminate whole peoples. Analyzing the negationsof biological research and cultural images of mechanized and robotic bodies, she shows how they contest the body as lived in ordinary experience.Crossover Queries brings together important essays on a remarkable range of topics by one of our most insightful cultural critics. Commenting on philosophical and theological issues that have shaped the recent past as well as scientific and technological questions that will preoccupy us in the near future, Wyschogrod consistently alerts us to the urgency of problems whose importance few recognize. To avoid the challenge these essays pose is to avoid responsibility for a future that appears to be increasingly fragile.-Mark C. Taylor, Columbia University
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0385
16 Memory, History, Revelation: from:
Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Abstract: A piece of historical writing is often thought of as a narrative interpreting the times of those who can themselves no longer depict the epoch in which they lived and moved and had their being. The subjects of this story are no longer here to attest to their era’s culture, economy, institutions, politics, and way of life, whether to praise or to excoriate them. The historian is challenged to configure for the living the lives and times of dead others, making inferences from the clues that are trusted by the profession: archives, artifacts, and transmitted traditions. What remains unstated in
30 The Mathematical Model in Plato and Some Surrogates in a Jain Theory of Knowledge from:
Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Abstract: One of the generative questions in Benjamin Nelson’s late work was: What accounts for the breakthrough insights that permit the reduction of all quality to quantity, the proclaiming of a mathematical reality behind the experiential immediacies of experience and the affirmation of a homogeneous time and space throughout the universe, insights that characterize Western science? It is a question that exercise both Nelson and Joseph Needham; both consider it from an intercivilizational perspective. To put the matter in Needham’s terms: “What was it that happened in Renaissance Europe when mathematics and science joined in a combination qualitatively new and destined
Book Title: Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): WYSCHOGROD EDITH
Abstract: Exploring the risks, ambiguities, and unstable conceptual worlds of contemporary thought, Crossover Queries brings together the wide-ranging writings, across twenty years, of one of our most important philosophers.Ranging from twentieth-century European philosophy-the thought of Heidegger, Foucault, Derrida, Levinas, Janicaud, and others-to novels and artworks, music and dance, from traditional Jewish thought to Jain andBuddhist metaphysics, Wyschogrod's work opens radically new vistas while remaining mindful that the philosopher stands within and is responsible to a philosophical legacy conditioned by the negative.Rather than point to a Hegelian dialectic of overcoming negation or to a postmetaphysical exhaustion, Wyschogrod treats negative moments as opening novel spaces for thought. She probes both the desire for God and an ethics grounded in the interests of the other person, seeing these as moments both of crossing over and of negation. Alert to the catastrophes that have marked our times, she exposes the underlying logical structures of nihilatory forces that have been exerted to exterminate whole peoples. Analyzing the negationsof biological research and cultural images of mechanized and robotic bodies, she shows how they contest the body as lived in ordinary experience.Crossover Queries brings together important essays on a remarkable range of topics by one of our most insightful cultural critics. Commenting on philosophical and theological issues that have shaped the recent past as well as scientific and technological questions that will preoccupy us in the near future, Wyschogrod consistently alerts us to the urgency of problems whose importance few recognize. To avoid the challenge these essays pose is to avoid responsibility for a future that appears to be increasingly fragile.-Mark C. Taylor, Columbia University
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0385
16 Memory, History, Revelation: from:
Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Abstract: A piece of historical writing is often thought of as a narrative interpreting the times of those who can themselves no longer depict the epoch in which they lived and moved and had their being. The subjects of this story are no longer here to attest to their era’s culture, economy, institutions, politics, and way of life, whether to praise or to excoriate them. The historian is challenged to configure for the living the lives and times of dead others, making inferences from the clues that are trusted by the profession: archives, artifacts, and transmitted traditions. What remains unstated in
30 The Mathematical Model in Plato and Some Surrogates in a Jain Theory of Knowledge from:
Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Abstract: One of the generative questions in Benjamin Nelson’s late work was: What accounts for the breakthrough insights that permit the reduction of all quality to quantity, the proclaiming of a mathematical reality behind the experiential immediacies of experience and the affirmation of a homogeneous time and space throughout the universe, insights that characterize Western science? It is a question that exercise both Nelson and Joseph Needham; both consider it from an intercivilizational perspective. To put the matter in Needham’s terms: “What was it that happened in Renaissance Europe when mathematics and science joined in a combination qualitatively new and destined
1 On Sublimation from:
Interstices of the Sublime: Theology and Psychoanalytic Theory
Abstract: Amid the multitudinous variety of historical, ethnographic, and cultural studies taking place within the academy, one can detect a certain crisis or at least confusion regarding theoretical discourse about religion. This confusion refers to the felt discord among heterogeneous languages and incommensurable modes of description and questioning. Such languages include traditional theology, analytic philosophy of religion, hermeneutics and other symbolic-semiotic languages, methodological approaches to the history of religions, and various forms of postmodernism. This confusion is felt at the same time as religion is being taken up by many philosophers and theorists as an important topic for understanding, in part
4 Foreclosing God from:
Interstices of the Sublime: Theology and Psychoanalytic Theory
Abstract: Despite his explicit separation of the concepts of God and Being, Martin Heidegger, in his later philosophy, treats them with a certain structural similarity.¹ That is, both God and Being lie beyond the calculating attempts to possess and wield them by a technological society bent on mastery. At the same time, however, this very technological epoch is a determination of Being, or in the
Beiträge zur Philosophie, a result of the “flight of the last God.”² TheBeiträge, unpublished until 1989, lays out a foundation for Heidegger’s later thought, and provides the connection upon which the “turning” (Kehre) fromDasein
5 Anxiety and the S(ub)lime Body of God from:
Interstices of the Sublime: Theology and Psychoanalytic Theory
Abstract: In his early career, Freud understood anxiety as a response to repression, but in a later work he reversed himself, arguing that anxiety is primary. In this chapter I argue that anxiety is fundamentally related to the body as well as to
jouissance, which refers to a fascination with the process of expelling body to create a subject orcogito. This bodily remainder, which sometimes takes the form of slime, generates enormous anxiety, at the individual, social, and theological levels. Following Lacan’s formulas of sexuation distinguishing between the exception (man) and the not-all (woman), Slavoj Žižek applies this distinction to
7 Ages of the World and Creation ex Nihilo, Part II from:
Interstices of the Sublime: Theology and Psychoanalytic Theory
Abstract: An account of Tillich’s significance for contemporary theology, as well as the discussion of Tillich’s appropriation of Schelling in the
Systematic Theologyin chapter 6, serves as background for the consideration of Žižek’s interpretation of Schelling in this chapter. At the conclusion of this chapter I will reconsider Tillich’s understanding of creation in relation to Lacan’s discussion of creation inThe Ethics of Psychoanalysis, in which creationex nihilorefers explicitly to the creation of a signifier. In the meantime, Žižek’s psychoanalytic reading of Schelling will be explicated and critiqued. On the one hand, Žižek provides an exciting interpretation that
10 Processing the Real from:
Interstices of the Sublime: Theology and Psychoanalytic Theory
Abstract: In the last chapter I discussed Lacan’s
Seminar XXas an attempt to express the Real that lies at the limit of language. I acknowledged the broadly Platonic aspect of Lacan’s thought, which becomes more explicit in the work of Alain Badiou. At the same time, my reading ofBenito Cerenois also a critique of Badiou’s Platonism, or at least an effort to complicate the limit of language in a profound way. In chapter 8 I discussed Lacan’s critique of Aristotelian utilitarianism; that is, an understanding of Aristotle’sNicomachean Ethicsthat privileges goods, or the Good, especially as it
Conclusion from:
Interstices of the Sublime: Theology and Psychoanalytic Theory
Abstract: The problem of thinking is a problem of sublimation. To have language, meaning, and thereby religion, science, culture, and art, there must be sublimation in a broad sense. This book has traced some of the intricacies of sublimation through psychoanalytic theory as it impresses upon theology. Sublimation means that meaning is not direct and unmediated but consists of a detour. At the same time, my readings of theology, continental philosophy, and psychoanalytic theory suggest that sublimation is not an elevation above a material reality. In chapter 1, I appealed to Deleuze to question the two-level model of reality that sublimation
1 On Sublimation from:
Interstices of the Sublime: Theology and Psychoanalytic Theory
Abstract: Amid the multitudinous variety of historical, ethnographic, and cultural studies taking place within the academy, one can detect a certain crisis or at least confusion regarding theoretical discourse about religion. This confusion refers to the felt discord among heterogeneous languages and incommensurable modes of description and questioning. Such languages include traditional theology, analytic philosophy of religion, hermeneutics and other symbolic-semiotic languages, methodological approaches to the history of religions, and various forms of postmodernism. This confusion is felt at the same time as religion is being taken up by many philosophers and theorists as an important topic for understanding, in part
4 Foreclosing God from:
Interstices of the Sublime: Theology and Psychoanalytic Theory
Abstract: Despite his explicit separation of the concepts of God and Being, Martin Heidegger, in his later philosophy, treats them with a certain structural similarity.¹ That is, both God and Being lie beyond the calculating attempts to possess and wield them by a technological society bent on mastery. At the same time, however, this very technological epoch is a determination of Being, or in the
Beiträge zur Philosophie, a result of the “flight of the last God.”² TheBeiträge, unpublished until 1989, lays out a foundation for Heidegger’s later thought, and provides the connection upon which the “turning” (Kehre) fromDasein
5 Anxiety and the S(ub)lime Body of God from:
Interstices of the Sublime: Theology and Psychoanalytic Theory
Abstract: In his early career, Freud understood anxiety as a response to repression, but in a later work he reversed himself, arguing that anxiety is primary. In this chapter I argue that anxiety is fundamentally related to the body as well as to
jouissance, which refers to a fascination with the process of expelling body to create a subject orcogito. This bodily remainder, which sometimes takes the form of slime, generates enormous anxiety, at the individual, social, and theological levels. Following Lacan’s formulas of sexuation distinguishing between the exception (man) and the not-all (woman), Slavoj Žižek applies this distinction to
7 Ages of the World and Creation ex Nihilo, Part II from:
Interstices of the Sublime: Theology and Psychoanalytic Theory
Abstract: An account of Tillich’s significance for contemporary theology, as well as the discussion of Tillich’s appropriation of Schelling in the
Systematic Theologyin chapter 6, serves as background for the consideration of Žižek’s interpretation of Schelling in this chapter. At the conclusion of this chapter I will reconsider Tillich’s understanding of creation in relation to Lacan’s discussion of creation inThe Ethics of Psychoanalysis, in which creationex nihilorefers explicitly to the creation of a signifier. In the meantime, Žižek’s psychoanalytic reading of Schelling will be explicated and critiqued. On the one hand, Žižek provides an exciting interpretation that
10 Processing the Real from:
Interstices of the Sublime: Theology and Psychoanalytic Theory
Abstract: In the last chapter I discussed Lacan’s
Seminar XXas an attempt to express the Real that lies at the limit of language. I acknowledged the broadly Platonic aspect of Lacan’s thought, which becomes more explicit in the work of Alain Badiou. At the same time, my reading ofBenito Cerenois also a critique of Badiou’s Platonism, or at least an effort to complicate the limit of language in a profound way. In chapter 8 I discussed Lacan’s critique of Aristotelian utilitarianism; that is, an understanding of Aristotle’sNicomachean Ethicsthat privileges goods, or the Good, especially as it
Conclusion from:
Interstices of the Sublime: Theology and Psychoanalytic Theory
Abstract: The problem of thinking is a problem of sublimation. To have language, meaning, and thereby religion, science, culture, and art, there must be sublimation in a broad sense. This book has traced some of the intricacies of sublimation through psychoanalytic theory as it impresses upon theology. Sublimation means that meaning is not direct and unmediated but consists of a detour. At the same time, my readings of theology, continental philosophy, and psychoanalytic theory suggest that sublimation is not an elevation above a material reality. In chapter 1, I appealed to Deleuze to question the two-level model of reality that sublimation
Kenotic Overflow and Temporal Transcendence: from:
Saintly Influence: Edith Wyschogrod and the Possibilities of Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) WOLFSON ELLIOT R.
Abstract: In a number of previously published studies, I have explored the phenomenon of time in kabbalistic literature from various perspectives.¹ Needless to say, the permutations of this theme that may be gleaned from this variegated corpus are complex and multifaceted. Without denying that any attempt to represent the kabbalah as monolithic is prone to criticism, it seems to me nonetheless legitimate from the perspective of both the kabbalists’ own hermeneutical practices and contemporary theoretical models to offer generalizations that are based on a plethora of specific textual sources. With regard to the notion of time, I am prepared to say
Kenotic Overflow and Temporal Transcendence: from:
Saintly Influence: Edith Wyschogrod and the Possibilities of Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) WOLFSON ELLIOT R.
Abstract: In a number of previously published studies, I have explored the phenomenon of time in kabbalistic literature from various perspectives.¹ Needless to say, the permutations of this theme that may be gleaned from this variegated corpus are complex and multifaceted. Without denying that any attempt to represent the kabbalah as monolithic is prone to criticism, it seems to me nonetheless legitimate from the perspective of both the kabbalists’ own hermeneutical practices and contemporary theoretical models to offer generalizations that are based on a plethora of specific textual sources. With regard to the notion of time, I am prepared to say
Kenotic Overflow and Temporal Transcendence: from:
Saintly Influence: Edith Wyschogrod and the Possibilities of Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) WOLFSON ELLIOT R.
Abstract: In a number of previously published studies, I have explored the phenomenon of time in kabbalistic literature from various perspectives.¹ Needless to say, the permutations of this theme that may be gleaned from this variegated corpus are complex and multifaceted. Without denying that any attempt to represent the kabbalah as monolithic is prone to criticism, it seems to me nonetheless legitimate from the perspective of both the kabbalists’ own hermeneutical practices and contemporary theoretical models to offer generalizations that are based on a plethora of specific textual sources. With regard to the notion of time, I am prepared to say
Digital Bodies and the Transformation of the Flesh from:
Toward a Theology of Eros: Transfiguring Passion at the Limits of Discipline
Author(s) BRIGGS SHEILA
Abstract: Bodies have always been the subjects of representation, sometimes written about in texts but more often carved in stone or painted on walls. Such images constitute a central feature of the visual culture from which most people in most historical periods have derived their knowledge of how the body is ordered in their society. As postmodern theories constantly remind us, the order of the body is also the political, social, economic, religious, and sexual order of a society. The discursive body has so devoured the flesh that the sensuality of the body is endlessly evoked only to be embalmed in
Praying Is Joying: from:
Toward a Theology of Eros: Transfiguring Passion at the Limits of Discipline
Author(s) BURRUS VIRGINIA
Abstract: “Happy the spirit [
nous] which attains to total insensibility at prayer,” exults Evagrius of Pontus in hisChapters on Prayer(120).¹ TheChapters,like so many ancient texts, comes wrapped in the envelope of a personal letter (though we no longer know the name of Evagrius’s addressee). A response to another letter, it begins suspensefullyin medias res—in the midst of an epistolary exchange between friends and also in the midst of a charged moment for Evagrius himself. “It was so characteristic of you to get a letter to me just at a time when I was aflame with
Carthage Didn’t Burn Hot Enough: from:
Toward a Theology of Eros: Transfiguring Passion at the Limits of Discipline
Author(s) MACKENDRICK KARMEN
Abstract: At the opening of Book 3 of Saint Augustine’s
Confessions, the author enters into young adulthood and into the city of Carthage, where all about him famously simmers a burning cauldron of unholy loves. Yet the ultimate object of his desire, in these years when he indulges in theater and prays for chastity to come at some more convenient time, is neither theatrical nor narrowly sexual—nor is it God, who might have been the reader’s first suspicion. “I was in love with love,” Augustine writes, though he adds that he is a bit confused about what “love” might mean.
Lyrical Theology: from:
Toward a Theology of Eros: Transfiguring Passion at the Limits of Discipline
Author(s) LINAFELT TOD
Abstract: The statement by T.S. Eliot with which I begin is not without its problems, the most obvious of them the difficulty of actually defining “poetry.” Yet it seems worth sticking with Eliot’s formulation for the time being, inasmuch as too often the fact that the Song of Songs is poetry—and not another thing—seems to be forgotten by interpreters, or at least neglected. What would it mean to consider the Song of Songs as poetry? And further, what
kindof poetry do we find in the Song of Songs? What are the “other things” that it ought not to
Suffering Eros and Textual Incarnation: from:
Toward a Theology of Eros: Transfiguring Passion at the Limits of Discipline
Author(s) WOLFSON ELLIOT R.
Abstract: FLASH—instant of time or of dream without time; inordinately swollen atoms of a bond, a vision, a shiver, a yet formless, unnamable embryo. Epiphanies. Photos of what is not yet visible and that language necessarily skims over from afar, allusively. Words that are always too distant, too abstract for this underground swarming of seconds, folding in unimaginable spaces. Writing them down is an ordeal of discourse, like love. What is loving, for a woman, the
Afterword: from:
Toward a Theology of Eros: Transfiguring Passion at the Limits of Discipline
Author(s) KELLER CATHERINE
Abstract: So many loves. A time of depletion after excess. Afterward—is it the lull of exhaustion or satisfaction, disappointment or fulfillment, detumescence or engorgement? Or some uneasy incompletion? The seduction has been attempted, we may be falling in love or out, getting up or going down, ascending, descending or just turning, oh, God. An afterword comes too late, or too soon; the double entendres are dissipating, the flesh has confessed, the closet is open, the book is closing, and still we may not have figured it out. “It” almost came, is still to come, may have come and gone already.
1 For the First Time from:
Sounding/Silence: Martin Heidegger at the Limits of Poetics
Abstract: In the introductory remarks to his lecture series on Friedrich Hölderlin’s late hymns “Germanien” and “Der Rhein,” the first he gave on Hölderlin’s poetry, Heidegger discusses the opening lines of “Germanien” and their form: “The form of the poem provides no particular difficulties. The meter does not follow the model of any conventional genre. A poem without meter and rhyme is nevertheless not really a poem at all, not poetry, prose rather…. [A]nd yet, [a] common, precise, prosaic ‘For’ [
Denn], sounds, as though spoken for the first time, and this apparent prose of the whole poem is more poetic than
4 Reading Heidegger Reading from:
Sounding/Silence: Martin Heidegger at the Limits of Poetics
Abstract: Ever since Max Kommerell described an essay of Heidegger’s on Hölderlin’s “Andenken” as “a productive train-wreck” (
ein productives Eisenbahn-Unglück),¹ Heidegger’s readings of poetry have been subject to a critical skepticism bordering at times on outrage. To an extent this is unsurprising and even, one feels—in the light of his contempt for “the history of literature and aesthetics” (EHP 21/7)—solicited. Yet the surfeit of commentary on Heidegger as a “train-wreck” exegete risks occluding the other term in Kommerell’s oxymoron, or the possibility that the two are interlinked: that as the reading is, as it were, derailed, it opens on
8 Jean-Yves Lacoste: from:
Postmodern Apologetics?: Arguments for God in Contemporary Philosophy
Abstract: Jean-Yves Lacoste is a French philosopher and theologian, currently affiliated with the University of Cambridge in England. He is chief editor of the
Critical Dictionary of Theology(2004). Lacoste is strongly influenced by Heidegger, although at times also quite critical of him. His phenomenological interest is focused on liturgy and beauty, although his style of presentation is rather different from that of Chrétien who writes on some similar topics. His books includeExperience and the Absolute: Disputed Questions on the Humanity of Man, a book on art (Le Monde et l’absence de l’oeuvre), and two collections that include many articles
8 Jean-Yves Lacoste: from:
Postmodern Apologetics?: Arguments for God in Contemporary Philosophy
Abstract: Jean-Yves Lacoste is a French philosopher and theologian, currently affiliated with the University of Cambridge in England. He is chief editor of the
Critical Dictionary of Theology(2004). Lacoste is strongly influenced by Heidegger, although at times also quite critical of him. His phenomenological interest is focused on liturgy and beauty, although his style of presentation is rather different from that of Chrétien who writes on some similar topics. His books includeExperience and the Absolute: Disputed Questions on the Humanity of Man, a book on art (Le Monde et l’absence de l’oeuvre), and two collections that include many articles
8 Jean-Yves Lacoste: from:
Postmodern Apologetics?: Arguments for God in Contemporary Philosophy
Abstract: Jean-Yves Lacoste is a French philosopher and theologian, currently affiliated with the University of Cambridge in England. He is chief editor of the
Critical Dictionary of Theology(2004). Lacoste is strongly influenced by Heidegger, although at times also quite critical of him. His phenomenological interest is focused on liturgy and beauty, although his style of presentation is rather different from that of Chrétien who writes on some similar topics. His books includeExperience and the Absolute: Disputed Questions on the Humanity of Man, a book on art (Le Monde et l’absence de l’oeuvre), and two collections that include many articles
8 Jean-Yves Lacoste: from:
Postmodern Apologetics?: Arguments for God in Contemporary Philosophy
Abstract: Jean-Yves Lacoste is a French philosopher and theologian, currently affiliated with the University of Cambridge in England. He is chief editor of the
Critical Dictionary of Theology(2004). Lacoste is strongly influenced by Heidegger, although at times also quite critical of him. His phenomenological interest is focused on liturgy and beauty, although his style of presentation is rather different from that of Chrétien who writes on some similar topics. His books includeExperience and the Absolute: Disputed Questions on the Humanity of Man, a book on art (Le Monde et l’absence de l’oeuvre), and two collections that include many articles
CHAPTER 2 Morrow’s Ants: from:
Interpreting Nature: The Emerging Field of Environmental Hermeneutics
Author(s) Smith Mick
Abstract: In 1975 Edward Hyams, novelist, gardener, broadcaster, anarchist, and a long-time advocate of the need for agriculturally sustainable societies, wrote a political novel,
Morrow’s Ants.¹ It tells the story of billionaire businessman Graham Morrow’s attempt to build a futuristic city modeled on his intensive study of ant colonies.² The Hive, a massive, largely underground, complex powered by tidal and nuclear energy, will house and feed two hundred thousand people in an entirely self-sustaining manner. But this development, as his opponent (the embittered revolutionary Evans), suggests, comes with a price—the loss of individual liberty, freedom, and creativity. It is “designed
CHAPTER 12 Memory, Imagination, and the Hermeneutics of Place from:
Interpreting Nature: The Emerging Field of Environmental Hermeneutics
Author(s) Clingerman Forrest
Abstract: Humans are creatures of the present, and the places that we inhabit oftentimes abet an emphasis on presence. For example, much of our daily interaction occurs in spaces that offer little to discriminate the times of day or season. Artificial lights, heating, air conditioning, walls, and doors maintain a continuous backdrop and regulate the experience of embodiment in space as days and weeks move into the past. Yet we might still find ways to break through mere geometric space, through the anonymity of these situations. In the materiality of these environments, there are fractures and idiosyncrasies that beckon us to
CHAPTER 2 Morrow’s Ants: from:
Interpreting Nature: The Emerging Field of Environmental Hermeneutics
Author(s) Smith Mick
Abstract: In 1975 Edward Hyams, novelist, gardener, broadcaster, anarchist, and a long-time advocate of the need for agriculturally sustainable societies, wrote a political novel,
Morrow’s Ants.¹ It tells the story of billionaire businessman Graham Morrow’s attempt to build a futuristic city modeled on his intensive study of ant colonies.² The Hive, a massive, largely underground, complex powered by tidal and nuclear energy, will house and feed two hundred thousand people in an entirely self-sustaining manner. But this development, as his opponent (the embittered revolutionary Evans), suggests, comes with a price—the loss of individual liberty, freedom, and creativity. It is “designed
CHAPTER 12 Memory, Imagination, and the Hermeneutics of Place from:
Interpreting Nature: The Emerging Field of Environmental Hermeneutics
Author(s) Clingerman Forrest
Abstract: Humans are creatures of the present, and the places that we inhabit oftentimes abet an emphasis on presence. For example, much of our daily interaction occurs in spaces that offer little to discriminate the times of day or season. Artificial lights, heating, air conditioning, walls, and doors maintain a continuous backdrop and regulate the experience of embodiment in space as days and weeks move into the past. Yet we might still find ways to break through mere geometric space, through the anonymity of these situations. In the materiality of these environments, there are fractures and idiosyncrasies that beckon us to
CHAPTER 2 Morrow’s Ants: from:
Interpreting Nature: The Emerging Field of Environmental Hermeneutics
Author(s) Smith Mick
Abstract: In 1975 Edward Hyams, novelist, gardener, broadcaster, anarchist, and a long-time advocate of the need for agriculturally sustainable societies, wrote a political novel,
Morrow’s Ants.¹ It tells the story of billionaire businessman Graham Morrow’s attempt to build a futuristic city modeled on his intensive study of ant colonies.² The Hive, a massive, largely underground, complex powered by tidal and nuclear energy, will house and feed two hundred thousand people in an entirely self-sustaining manner. But this development, as his opponent (the embittered revolutionary Evans), suggests, comes with a price—the loss of individual liberty, freedom, and creativity. It is “designed
CHAPTER 12 Memory, Imagination, and the Hermeneutics of Place from:
Interpreting Nature: The Emerging Field of Environmental Hermeneutics
Author(s) Clingerman Forrest
Abstract: Humans are creatures of the present, and the places that we inhabit oftentimes abet an emphasis on presence. For example, much of our daily interaction occurs in spaces that offer little to discriminate the times of day or season. Artificial lights, heating, air conditioning, walls, and doors maintain a continuous backdrop and regulate the experience of embodiment in space as days and weeks move into the past. Yet we might still find ways to break through mere geometric space, through the anonymity of these situations. In the materiality of these environments, there are fractures and idiosyncrasies that beckon us to
CHAPTER 2 Morrow’s Ants: from:
Interpreting Nature: The Emerging Field of Environmental Hermeneutics
Author(s) Smith Mick
Abstract: In 1975 Edward Hyams, novelist, gardener, broadcaster, anarchist, and a long-time advocate of the need for agriculturally sustainable societies, wrote a political novel,
Morrow’s Ants.¹ It tells the story of billionaire businessman Graham Morrow’s attempt to build a futuristic city modeled on his intensive study of ant colonies.² The Hive, a massive, largely underground, complex powered by tidal and nuclear energy, will house and feed two hundred thousand people in an entirely self-sustaining manner. But this development, as his opponent (the embittered revolutionary Evans), suggests, comes with a price—the loss of individual liberty, freedom, and creativity. It is “designed
CHAPTER 12 Memory, Imagination, and the Hermeneutics of Place from:
Interpreting Nature: The Emerging Field of Environmental Hermeneutics
Author(s) Clingerman Forrest
Abstract: Humans are creatures of the present, and the places that we inhabit oftentimes abet an emphasis on presence. For example, much of our daily interaction occurs in spaces that offer little to discriminate the times of day or season. Artificial lights, heating, air conditioning, walls, and doors maintain a continuous backdrop and regulate the experience of embodiment in space as days and weeks move into the past. Yet we might still find ways to break through mere geometric space, through the anonymity of these situations. In the materiality of these environments, there are fractures and idiosyncrasies that beckon us to
CHAPTER 2 Morrow’s Ants: from:
Interpreting Nature: The Emerging Field of Environmental Hermeneutics
Author(s) Smith Mick
Abstract: In 1975 Edward Hyams, novelist, gardener, broadcaster, anarchist, and a long-time advocate of the need for agriculturally sustainable societies, wrote a political novel,
Morrow’s Ants.¹ It tells the story of billionaire businessman Graham Morrow’s attempt to build a futuristic city modeled on his intensive study of ant colonies.² The Hive, a massive, largely underground, complex powered by tidal and nuclear energy, will house and feed two hundred thousand people in an entirely self-sustaining manner. But this development, as his opponent (the embittered revolutionary Evans), suggests, comes with a price—the loss of individual liberty, freedom, and creativity. It is “designed
CHAPTER 12 Memory, Imagination, and the Hermeneutics of Place from:
Interpreting Nature: The Emerging Field of Environmental Hermeneutics
Author(s) Clingerman Forrest
Abstract: Humans are creatures of the present, and the places that we inhabit oftentimes abet an emphasis on presence. For example, much of our daily interaction occurs in spaces that offer little to discriminate the times of day or season. Artificial lights, heating, air conditioning, walls, and doors maintain a continuous backdrop and regulate the experience of embodiment in space as days and weeks move into the past. Yet we might still find ways to break through mere geometric space, through the anonymity of these situations. In the materiality of these environments, there are fractures and idiosyncrasies that beckon us to
CHAPTER 2 Morrow’s Ants: from:
Interpreting Nature: The Emerging Field of Environmental Hermeneutics
Author(s) Smith Mick
Abstract: In 1975 Edward Hyams, novelist, gardener, broadcaster, anarchist, and a long-time advocate of the need for agriculturally sustainable societies, wrote a political novel,
Morrow’s Ants.¹ It tells the story of billionaire businessman Graham Morrow’s attempt to build a futuristic city modeled on his intensive study of ant colonies.² The Hive, a massive, largely underground, complex powered by tidal and nuclear energy, will house and feed two hundred thousand people in an entirely self-sustaining manner. But this development, as his opponent (the embittered revolutionary Evans), suggests, comes with a price—the loss of individual liberty, freedom, and creativity. It is “designed
CHAPTER 12 Memory, Imagination, and the Hermeneutics of Place from:
Interpreting Nature: The Emerging Field of Environmental Hermeneutics
Author(s) Clingerman Forrest
Abstract: Humans are creatures of the present, and the places that we inhabit oftentimes abet an emphasis on presence. For example, much of our daily interaction occurs in spaces that offer little to discriminate the times of day or season. Artificial lights, heating, air conditioning, walls, and doors maintain a continuous backdrop and regulate the experience of embodiment in space as days and weeks move into the past. Yet we might still find ways to break through mere geometric space, through the anonymity of these situations. In the materiality of these environments, there are fractures and idiosyncrasies that beckon us to
Book Title: Finding God in All Things: Celebrating Bernard Lonergan, John Courtney Murray, and Karl Rahner- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Stagaman David
Abstract: Three of the most influential Catholic theologians of the twentieth century-Bernard Lonergan, John Courtney Murray, and Karl Rahner-were all born in 1904, at the height of the Church's most militant rhetoric against all things modern. In this culture of suspicion, Lonergan, Murray, and Rahner grew in faith to join the Society of Jesus and struggled with the burden of antimodernist policies in their formation. By the time of their mature work in the 1950s and 1960s, they had helped to redefine the critical dialogue between modern thought and contemporary Catholic theology. After the dtente of the Second Vatican Council, they brought Catholic tradition into closer relationship to modern philosophy, history, and politics. Written by leading scholars, friends, and family members, these original essays celebrate the legacies of Lonergan, Murray, and Rahner after a century of theological development. Offering a broad range of perspectives on their lives and works, the essays blend personal and anecdotal accounts with incisive critical appraisals. Together, they offer an accessible introduction to the distinctive character of three great thinkers and how their work shapes the way Catholics think and talk about God, Church, and State.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x04wz
1. Introduction from:
Finding God in All Things: Celebrating Bernard Lonergan, John Courtney Murray, and Karl Rahner
Author(s) Bosco Mark
Abstract: The above sentiments of the Second Vatican Council’s
Pastoral Constitution on the Church in the Modern Worldcapture a transitional moment in the Catholic Church’s attitude in its relationship with modernity. This shift is seen most remarkably in the language of the Council, what Jesuit historian John W. O’Malley notes is a change from “the rhetoric of reproach” so prevalent in documents from previous church councils to an embrace of the “rhetoric of affirmation and invitation.” The rhetorical change in attitude that permeates the Council documents was matched by a new formulation of the Church’s consciousness of itself since the
5. Lonergan’s Jaw from:
Finding God in All Things: Celebrating Bernard Lonergan, John Courtney Murray, and Karl Rahner
Author(s) Haughey John C.
Abstract: Bernard Lonergan, who lived from 1904 to 1984, would have been delighted to become aware of the scientific discoveries that have occurred in our times. He remains a favorite mentor of mine, and when I indulge my amateur’s interest in science I turn to him, not because he was a scientist, but because he gives me a way of looking at these new realities with a worldview that makes room for them, however unexpected or disconcerting they might be.
Book Title: Translating Investments: Metaphor and the Dynamics of Cultural Change in Tudor-Stuart England- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Anderson Judith H.
Abstract: The title Translating Investments, a manifold pun, refers to metaphor and clothing, authority and interest, and trading and finance. Translation, Latin translatio, is historically a name for metaphor, and investment, etymologically a reference to clothing, participates both in the complex symbolism of early modern dress and in the cloth trade of the period. In this original and wide-ranging book, Judith Anderson studies the functioning of metaphor as a constructive force within language, religious doctrine and politics, literature, rhetoric, and economics during the reigns of the Tudors and early Stuarts. Invoking a provocative metaphorical concept from Andy Clark's version of cognitive science, she construes metaphor itself as a form of scaffolding fundamental to human culture. A more traditional and controversial conception of such scaffolding is known as sublation-Hegel's Aufhebung, or raising,as the philosophers Jacques Derrida and Paul Ricoeur have understood this term. Metaphor is the agent of raising, or sublation, and sublation is inseparable from the productive life of metaphor, as distinct in its death in code or clich. At the same time, metaphor embodies the sense both of partial loss and of continuity, or preservation, also conveyed by the term Aufhebung. Anderson's study is simultaneously critical and historical. History and the theory are shown to be mutually enlightening, as are a wide variety of early modern texts and their specific cultural contexts. From beginning to end, this study touches the present, engaging questions about language, rhetoric, and reading within post-structuralism and neo-cognitivism. It highlights connections between intellectual problems active in our own culture and those evident in the earlier texts, controversies, and crises Anderson analyzes. In this way, the study is bifocal, like metaphor itself. While Anderson's overarching concern is with metaphor as a creative exchange, a source of code-breaking conceptual power, each of her chapters focuses on a different but related issue and cultural sector. Foci include the basic conditions of linguistic meaning in the early modern period, instantiated by Shakespeare's plays and related to modern theories of metaphor; the role of metaphor in the words of eucharistic institution under Archbishop Cranmer; the play of metaphor and metonymy in the writings of Luther, Zwingli, and Calvin and in John Donne's Devotions; the manipulation of these two tropes in the politics of the controversy over ecclesiastical vestments and in its treatment by John Foxe; the abuse of figuration in the house of Edmund Spenser's Busirane, where catachresis, an extreme form of metaphor, is the trope du jour; the conception of metaphor in the Roman rhetorics and their legacy in the sixteenth century; and the concept of exchange in the economic writing of Gerrard de Malynes, merchant and metaphorist in the reigns of Elizabeth and James. What emerges at the end of this book is a heightened critical sense of the dynamic of metaphor in cultural history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x05b5
7. Catachresis and Metaphor: from:
Translating Investments: Metaphor and the Dynamics of Cultural Change in Tudor-Stuart England
Abstract: Twice in recent chapters, I have invoked Richard Lanham’s definition of catachresis as a wrenching of metaphor or an extravagant use of it, in any case, as a violent (mis)use of language. Qualifying Lanham’s definition, I have also observed the appreciation of traditional rhetoric for the necessity, and not merely the extravagance, of catachresis in the absence of any other suitable words. Lanham’s definition is a cogent synthesis abstracted from classical and Renaissance sources, and I have annotated it as such, along with reference to Patricia Parker’s provocative analysis of definitions of metaphor and catachresis from classical times to the
Book Title: Translating Investments: Metaphor and the Dynamics of Cultural Change in Tudor-Stuart England- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Anderson Judith H.
Abstract: The title Translating Investments, a manifold pun, refers to metaphor and clothing, authority and interest, and trading and finance. Translation, Latin translatio, is historically a name for metaphor, and investment, etymologically a reference to clothing, participates both in the complex symbolism of early modern dress and in the cloth trade of the period. In this original and wide-ranging book, Judith Anderson studies the functioning of metaphor as a constructive force within language, religious doctrine and politics, literature, rhetoric, and economics during the reigns of the Tudors and early Stuarts. Invoking a provocative metaphorical concept from Andy Clark's version of cognitive science, she construes metaphor itself as a form of scaffolding fundamental to human culture. A more traditional and controversial conception of such scaffolding is known as sublation-Hegel's Aufhebung, or raising,as the philosophers Jacques Derrida and Paul Ricoeur have understood this term. Metaphor is the agent of raising, or sublation, and sublation is inseparable from the productive life of metaphor, as distinct in its death in code or clich. At the same time, metaphor embodies the sense both of partial loss and of continuity, or preservation, also conveyed by the term Aufhebung. Anderson's study is simultaneously critical and historical. History and the theory are shown to be mutually enlightening, as are a wide variety of early modern texts and their specific cultural contexts. From beginning to end, this study touches the present, engaging questions about language, rhetoric, and reading within post-structuralism and neo-cognitivism. It highlights connections between intellectual problems active in our own culture and those evident in the earlier texts, controversies, and crises Anderson analyzes. In this way, the study is bifocal, like metaphor itself. While Anderson's overarching concern is with metaphor as a creative exchange, a source of code-breaking conceptual power, each of her chapters focuses on a different but related issue and cultural sector. Foci include the basic conditions of linguistic meaning in the early modern period, instantiated by Shakespeare's plays and related to modern theories of metaphor; the role of metaphor in the words of eucharistic institution under Archbishop Cranmer; the play of metaphor and metonymy in the writings of Luther, Zwingli, and Calvin and in John Donne's Devotions; the manipulation of these two tropes in the politics of the controversy over ecclesiastical vestments and in its treatment by John Foxe; the abuse of figuration in the house of Edmund Spenser's Busirane, where catachresis, an extreme form of metaphor, is the trope du jour; the conception of metaphor in the Roman rhetorics and their legacy in the sixteenth century; and the concept of exchange in the economic writing of Gerrard de Malynes, merchant and metaphorist in the reigns of Elizabeth and James. What emerges at the end of this book is a heightened critical sense of the dynamic of metaphor in cultural history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x05b5
7. Catachresis and Metaphor: from:
Translating Investments: Metaphor and the Dynamics of Cultural Change in Tudor-Stuart England
Abstract: Twice in recent chapters, I have invoked Richard Lanham’s definition of catachresis as a wrenching of metaphor or an extravagant use of it, in any case, as a violent (mis)use of language. Qualifying Lanham’s definition, I have also observed the appreciation of traditional rhetoric for the necessity, and not merely the extravagance, of catachresis in the absence of any other suitable words. Lanham’s definition is a cogent synthesis abstracted from classical and Renaissance sources, and I have annotated it as such, along with reference to Patricia Parker’s provocative analysis of definitions of metaphor and catachresis from classical times to the
Book Title: Translating Investments: Metaphor and the Dynamics of Cultural Change in Tudor-Stuart England- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Anderson Judith H.
Abstract: The title Translating Investments, a manifold pun, refers to metaphor and clothing, authority and interest, and trading and finance. Translation, Latin translatio, is historically a name for metaphor, and investment, etymologically a reference to clothing, participates both in the complex symbolism of early modern dress and in the cloth trade of the period. In this original and wide-ranging book, Judith Anderson studies the functioning of metaphor as a constructive force within language, religious doctrine and politics, literature, rhetoric, and economics during the reigns of the Tudors and early Stuarts. Invoking a provocative metaphorical concept from Andy Clark's version of cognitive science, she construes metaphor itself as a form of scaffolding fundamental to human culture. A more traditional and controversial conception of such scaffolding is known as sublation-Hegel's Aufhebung, or raising,as the philosophers Jacques Derrida and Paul Ricoeur have understood this term. Metaphor is the agent of raising, or sublation, and sublation is inseparable from the productive life of metaphor, as distinct in its death in code or clich. At the same time, metaphor embodies the sense both of partial loss and of continuity, or preservation, also conveyed by the term Aufhebung. Anderson's study is simultaneously critical and historical. History and the theory are shown to be mutually enlightening, as are a wide variety of early modern texts and their specific cultural contexts. From beginning to end, this study touches the present, engaging questions about language, rhetoric, and reading within post-structuralism and neo-cognitivism. It highlights connections between intellectual problems active in our own culture and those evident in the earlier texts, controversies, and crises Anderson analyzes. In this way, the study is bifocal, like metaphor itself. While Anderson's overarching concern is with metaphor as a creative exchange, a source of code-breaking conceptual power, each of her chapters focuses on a different but related issue and cultural sector. Foci include the basic conditions of linguistic meaning in the early modern period, instantiated by Shakespeare's plays and related to modern theories of metaphor; the role of metaphor in the words of eucharistic institution under Archbishop Cranmer; the play of metaphor and metonymy in the writings of Luther, Zwingli, and Calvin and in John Donne's Devotions; the manipulation of these two tropes in the politics of the controversy over ecclesiastical vestments and in its treatment by John Foxe; the abuse of figuration in the house of Edmund Spenser's Busirane, where catachresis, an extreme form of metaphor, is the trope du jour; the conception of metaphor in the Roman rhetorics and their legacy in the sixteenth century; and the concept of exchange in the economic writing of Gerrard de Malynes, merchant and metaphorist in the reigns of Elizabeth and James. What emerges at the end of this book is a heightened critical sense of the dynamic of metaphor in cultural history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x05b5
7. Catachresis and Metaphor: from:
Translating Investments: Metaphor and the Dynamics of Cultural Change in Tudor-Stuart England
Abstract: Twice in recent chapters, I have invoked Richard Lanham’s definition of catachresis as a wrenching of metaphor or an extravagant use of it, in any case, as a violent (mis)use of language. Qualifying Lanham’s definition, I have also observed the appreciation of traditional rhetoric for the necessity, and not merely the extravagance, of catachresis in the absence of any other suitable words. Lanham’s definition is a cogent synthesis abstracted from classical and Renaissance sources, and I have annotated it as such, along with reference to Patricia Parker’s provocative analysis of definitions of metaphor and catachresis from classical times to the
Book Title: Translating Investments: Metaphor and the Dynamics of Cultural Change in Tudor-Stuart England- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Anderson Judith H.
Abstract: The title Translating Investments, a manifold pun, refers to metaphor and clothing, authority and interest, and trading and finance. Translation, Latin translatio, is historically a name for metaphor, and investment, etymologically a reference to clothing, participates both in the complex symbolism of early modern dress and in the cloth trade of the period. In this original and wide-ranging book, Judith Anderson studies the functioning of metaphor as a constructive force within language, religious doctrine and politics, literature, rhetoric, and economics during the reigns of the Tudors and early Stuarts. Invoking a provocative metaphorical concept from Andy Clark's version of cognitive science, she construes metaphor itself as a form of scaffolding fundamental to human culture. A more traditional and controversial conception of such scaffolding is known as sublation-Hegel's Aufhebung, or raising,as the philosophers Jacques Derrida and Paul Ricoeur have understood this term. Metaphor is the agent of raising, or sublation, and sublation is inseparable from the productive life of metaphor, as distinct in its death in code or clich. At the same time, metaphor embodies the sense both of partial loss and of continuity, or preservation, also conveyed by the term Aufhebung. Anderson's study is simultaneously critical and historical. History and the theory are shown to be mutually enlightening, as are a wide variety of early modern texts and their specific cultural contexts. From beginning to end, this study touches the present, engaging questions about language, rhetoric, and reading within post-structuralism and neo-cognitivism. It highlights connections between intellectual problems active in our own culture and those evident in the earlier texts, controversies, and crises Anderson analyzes. In this way, the study is bifocal, like metaphor itself. While Anderson's overarching concern is with metaphor as a creative exchange, a source of code-breaking conceptual power, each of her chapters focuses on a different but related issue and cultural sector. Foci include the basic conditions of linguistic meaning in the early modern period, instantiated by Shakespeare's plays and related to modern theories of metaphor; the role of metaphor in the words of eucharistic institution under Archbishop Cranmer; the play of metaphor and metonymy in the writings of Luther, Zwingli, and Calvin and in John Donne's Devotions; the manipulation of these two tropes in the politics of the controversy over ecclesiastical vestments and in its treatment by John Foxe; the abuse of figuration in the house of Edmund Spenser's Busirane, where catachresis, an extreme form of metaphor, is the trope du jour; the conception of metaphor in the Roman rhetorics and their legacy in the sixteenth century; and the concept of exchange in the economic writing of Gerrard de Malynes, merchant and metaphorist in the reigns of Elizabeth and James. What emerges at the end of this book is a heightened critical sense of the dynamic of metaphor in cultural history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x05b5
7. Catachresis and Metaphor: from:
Translating Investments: Metaphor and the Dynamics of Cultural Change in Tudor-Stuart England
Abstract: Twice in recent chapters, I have invoked Richard Lanham’s definition of catachresis as a wrenching of metaphor or an extravagant use of it, in any case, as a violent (mis)use of language. Qualifying Lanham’s definition, I have also observed the appreciation of traditional rhetoric for the necessity, and not merely the extravagance, of catachresis in the absence of any other suitable words. Lanham’s definition is a cogent synthesis abstracted from classical and Renaissance sources, and I have annotated it as such, along with reference to Patricia Parker’s provocative analysis of definitions of metaphor and catachresis from classical times to the
Book Title: Translating Investments: Metaphor and the Dynamics of Cultural Change in Tudor-Stuart England- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Anderson Judith H.
Abstract: The title Translating Investments, a manifold pun, refers to metaphor and clothing, authority and interest, and trading and finance. Translation, Latin translatio, is historically a name for metaphor, and investment, etymologically a reference to clothing, participates both in the complex symbolism of early modern dress and in the cloth trade of the period. In this original and wide-ranging book, Judith Anderson studies the functioning of metaphor as a constructive force within language, religious doctrine and politics, literature, rhetoric, and economics during the reigns of the Tudors and early Stuarts. Invoking a provocative metaphorical concept from Andy Clark's version of cognitive science, she construes metaphor itself as a form of scaffolding fundamental to human culture. A more traditional and controversial conception of such scaffolding is known as sublation-Hegel's Aufhebung, or raising,as the philosophers Jacques Derrida and Paul Ricoeur have understood this term. Metaphor is the agent of raising, or sublation, and sublation is inseparable from the productive life of metaphor, as distinct in its death in code or clich. At the same time, metaphor embodies the sense both of partial loss and of continuity, or preservation, also conveyed by the term Aufhebung. Anderson's study is simultaneously critical and historical. History and the theory are shown to be mutually enlightening, as are a wide variety of early modern texts and their specific cultural contexts. From beginning to end, this study touches the present, engaging questions about language, rhetoric, and reading within post-structuralism and neo-cognitivism. It highlights connections between intellectual problems active in our own culture and those evident in the earlier texts, controversies, and crises Anderson analyzes. In this way, the study is bifocal, like metaphor itself. While Anderson's overarching concern is with metaphor as a creative exchange, a source of code-breaking conceptual power, each of her chapters focuses on a different but related issue and cultural sector. Foci include the basic conditions of linguistic meaning in the early modern period, instantiated by Shakespeare's plays and related to modern theories of metaphor; the role of metaphor in the words of eucharistic institution under Archbishop Cranmer; the play of metaphor and metonymy in the writings of Luther, Zwingli, and Calvin and in John Donne's Devotions; the manipulation of these two tropes in the politics of the controversy over ecclesiastical vestments and in its treatment by John Foxe; the abuse of figuration in the house of Edmund Spenser's Busirane, where catachresis, an extreme form of metaphor, is the trope du jour; the conception of metaphor in the Roman rhetorics and their legacy in the sixteenth century; and the concept of exchange in the economic writing of Gerrard de Malynes, merchant and metaphorist in the reigns of Elizabeth and James. What emerges at the end of this book is a heightened critical sense of the dynamic of metaphor in cultural history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x05b5
7. Catachresis and Metaphor: from:
Translating Investments: Metaphor and the Dynamics of Cultural Change in Tudor-Stuart England
Abstract: Twice in recent chapters, I have invoked Richard Lanham’s definition of catachresis as a wrenching of metaphor or an extravagant use of it, in any case, as a violent (mis)use of language. Qualifying Lanham’s definition, I have also observed the appreciation of traditional rhetoric for the necessity, and not merely the extravagance, of catachresis in the absence of any other suitable words. Lanham’s definition is a cogent synthesis abstracted from classical and Renaissance sources, and I have annotated it as such, along with reference to Patricia Parker’s provocative analysis of definitions of metaphor and catachresis from classical times to the
Ethics of the Infinite from:
Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) Levinas Emmanuel
Abstract: El: Apart from the great masters of the history of philosophy—in particular Plato, Descartes, and Kant—the first contemporary influence on my own thinking was Bergson. In 1925, in Strasbourg University, Bergson was being hailed as France’s leading thinker. For example, [Maurice] Blondel, one of his Strasbourg disciples, developed a specifically Bergsonian psychology quite hostile to Freud—a hostility which made a deep and lasting impression on me. Moreover, Bergson’s theory of time as concrete duration
(la durée concrète)is, I
Strangers to Ourselves: from:
Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) Kristeva Julia
Abstract: Jk: I consider myself a cosmopolitan. I was lucky in my childhood to learn French at an early stage. My parents sent me to a French preschool in Sofia run by Dominican nuns: it was an offshoot of the Jesuit college in Constantinople. So I started French before my Bulgarian studies. Then those ladies were accused of spying and expelled from Bulgaria. Their work was taken over by the French Alliance. So I learnt French at the same time as Bulgarian, and my entry into French culture was somehow a
What Is Just? from:
Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) Kearney Richard
Abstract: J-fl:
La phénoménologiewas a homage to the thought of Merleau-Ponty: a meditation on the body, on sensible experience and, therefore—in contradistinction to Hegel, Husserl, [John-Paul] Sartre—on the “aesthetic” dimension which unfolds beneath the phenomena of consciousness. I was also reading at this time what was available of Heidegger’s work. The little book on
Between Being and God from:
Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) O’MURCHADHA FELIX
Abstract: Rk: My first sortie into the God debate was during my time as a doctoral student with Paul Ricœur in Paris in the late 1970s. I was participating in Ricœur’s seminar on hermeneutics and phenomenology,
Ethics of the Infinite from:
Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) Levinas Emmanuel
Abstract: El: Apart from the great masters of the history of philosophy—in particular Plato, Descartes, and Kant—the first contemporary influence on my own thinking was Bergson. In 1925, in Strasbourg University, Bergson was being hailed as France’s leading thinker. For example, [Maurice] Blondel, one of his Strasbourg disciples, developed a specifically Bergsonian psychology quite hostile to Freud—a hostility which made a deep and lasting impression on me. Moreover, Bergson’s theory of time as concrete duration
(la durée concrète)is, I
Strangers to Ourselves: from:
Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) Kristeva Julia
Abstract: Jk: I consider myself a cosmopolitan. I was lucky in my childhood to learn French at an early stage. My parents sent me to a French preschool in Sofia run by Dominican nuns: it was an offshoot of the Jesuit college in Constantinople. So I started French before my Bulgarian studies. Then those ladies were accused of spying and expelled from Bulgaria. Their work was taken over by the French Alliance. So I learnt French at the same time as Bulgarian, and my entry into French culture was somehow a
What Is Just? from:
Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) Kearney Richard
Abstract: J-fl:
La phénoménologiewas a homage to the thought of Merleau-Ponty: a meditation on the body, on sensible experience and, therefore—in contradistinction to Hegel, Husserl, [John-Paul] Sartre—on the “aesthetic” dimension which unfolds beneath the phenomena of consciousness. I was also reading at this time what was available of Heidegger’s work. The little book on
Between Being and God from:
Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) O’MURCHADHA FELIX
Abstract: Rk: My first sortie into the God debate was during my time as a doctoral student with Paul Ricœur in Paris in the late 1970s. I was participating in Ricœur’s seminar on hermeneutics and phenomenology,
Ethics of the Infinite from:
Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) Levinas Emmanuel
Abstract: El: Apart from the great masters of the history of philosophy—in particular Plato, Descartes, and Kant—the first contemporary influence on my own thinking was Bergson. In 1925, in Strasbourg University, Bergson was being hailed as France’s leading thinker. For example, [Maurice] Blondel, one of his Strasbourg disciples, developed a specifically Bergsonian psychology quite hostile to Freud—a hostility which made a deep and lasting impression on me. Moreover, Bergson’s theory of time as concrete duration
(la durée concrète)is, I
Strangers to Ourselves: from:
Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) Kristeva Julia
Abstract: Jk: I consider myself a cosmopolitan. I was lucky in my childhood to learn French at an early stage. My parents sent me to a French preschool in Sofia run by Dominican nuns: it was an offshoot of the Jesuit college in Constantinople. So I started French before my Bulgarian studies. Then those ladies were accused of spying and expelled from Bulgaria. Their work was taken over by the French Alliance. So I learnt French at the same time as Bulgarian, and my entry into French culture was somehow a
What Is Just? from:
Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) Kearney Richard
Abstract: J-fl:
La phénoménologiewas a homage to the thought of Merleau-Ponty: a meditation on the body, on sensible experience and, therefore—in contradistinction to Hegel, Husserl, [John-Paul] Sartre—on the “aesthetic” dimension which unfolds beneath the phenomena of consciousness. I was also reading at this time what was available of Heidegger’s work. The little book on
Between Being and God from:
Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) O’MURCHADHA FELIX
Abstract: Rk: My first sortie into the God debate was during my time as a doctoral student with Paul Ricœur in Paris in the late 1970s. I was participating in Ricœur’s seminar on hermeneutics and phenomenology,
Ethics of the Infinite from:
Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) Levinas Emmanuel
Abstract: El: Apart from the great masters of the history of philosophy—in particular Plato, Descartes, and Kant—the first contemporary influence on my own thinking was Bergson. In 1925, in Strasbourg University, Bergson was being hailed as France’s leading thinker. For example, [Maurice] Blondel, one of his Strasbourg disciples, developed a specifically Bergsonian psychology quite hostile to Freud—a hostility which made a deep and lasting impression on me. Moreover, Bergson’s theory of time as concrete duration
(la durée concrète)is, I
Strangers to Ourselves: from:
Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) Kristeva Julia
Abstract: Jk: I consider myself a cosmopolitan. I was lucky in my childhood to learn French at an early stage. My parents sent me to a French preschool in Sofia run by Dominican nuns: it was an offshoot of the Jesuit college in Constantinople. So I started French before my Bulgarian studies. Then those ladies were accused of spying and expelled from Bulgaria. Their work was taken over by the French Alliance. So I learnt French at the same time as Bulgarian, and my entry into French culture was somehow a
What Is Just? from:
Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) Kearney Richard
Abstract: J-fl:
La phénoménologiewas a homage to the thought of Merleau-Ponty: a meditation on the body, on sensible experience and, therefore—in contradistinction to Hegel, Husserl, [John-Paul] Sartre—on the “aesthetic” dimension which unfolds beneath the phenomena of consciousness. I was also reading at this time what was available of Heidegger’s work. The little book on
Between Being and God from:
Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) O’MURCHADHA FELIX
Abstract: Rk: My first sortie into the God debate was during my time as a doctoral student with Paul Ricœur in Paris in the late 1970s. I was participating in Ricœur’s seminar on hermeneutics and phenomenology,
Ethics of the Infinite from:
Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) Levinas Emmanuel
Abstract: El: Apart from the great masters of the history of philosophy—in particular Plato, Descartes, and Kant—the first contemporary influence on my own thinking was Bergson. In 1925, in Strasbourg University, Bergson was being hailed as France’s leading thinker. For example, [Maurice] Blondel, one of his Strasbourg disciples, developed a specifically Bergsonian psychology quite hostile to Freud—a hostility which made a deep and lasting impression on me. Moreover, Bergson’s theory of time as concrete duration
(la durée concrète)is, I
Strangers to Ourselves: from:
Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) Kristeva Julia
Abstract: Jk: I consider myself a cosmopolitan. I was lucky in my childhood to learn French at an early stage. My parents sent me to a French preschool in Sofia run by Dominican nuns: it was an offshoot of the Jesuit college in Constantinople. So I started French before my Bulgarian studies. Then those ladies were accused of spying and expelled from Bulgaria. Their work was taken over by the French Alliance. So I learnt French at the same time as Bulgarian, and my entry into French culture was somehow a
What Is Just? from:
Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) Kearney Richard
Abstract: J-fl:
La phénoménologiewas a homage to the thought of Merleau-Ponty: a meditation on the body, on sensible experience and, therefore—in contradistinction to Hegel, Husserl, [John-Paul] Sartre—on the “aesthetic” dimension which unfolds beneath the phenomena of consciousness. I was also reading at this time what was available of Heidegger’s work. The little book on
Between Being and God from:
Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) O’MURCHADHA FELIX
Abstract: Rk: My first sortie into the God debate was during my time as a doctoral student with Paul Ricœur in Paris in the late 1970s. I was participating in Ricœur’s seminar on hermeneutics and phenomenology,
4 Jean Grenier and the “Spirit of Orthodoxy” from:
God's Mirror: Renewal and Engagement in French Catholic Intellectual Culture in the Mid-Twentieth Century
Author(s) Garfitt Toby
Abstract: In his studies of the major French literary periodical, the
Nouvelle revue française(NRF), in the years leading up to the Second World War, Martyn Cornick has traced how “Jean Paulhan edited theNRFso as to prolong and develop its literary reputation, at the same time as taking calculated risks to ‘shock the bourgeois’ among its readership.”¹ He draws attention to the remarkable way Paulhan, as general editor, “balanced the review, aesthetically as well as politically, around a centre of gravity that is identifiably radical-republican and liberal,” showing how he aimed to place theNRF“at the centre of
“ALL THAT YOU SAY, I WILL DO”: from:
Scrolls of Love: Ruth and the Song of Songs
Author(s) Davis Ellen F.
Abstract: The first words of Ruth: “In the days when the judges were judging, there was a famine in the land.” “The days when the judges were judging”—if you have read the seventh book of the Bible, then you know that it was a time of political chaos, with Philistine enemies pressing hard on Israel’s flank, and the “national leadership” (if you can call it that) worse than a bad joke. Yes, early on there was Deborah, a great judge, but things deteriorated pretty steadily after that. By the end of the period of the book of Judges, when our
BEGINNING WITH RUTH: from:
Scrolls of Love: Ruth and the Song of Songs
Author(s) Davis Ellen F.
Abstract: The first and altogether the most important thing I have to say about preparing my annotated translation of the book of Ruth is that I did not do it alone.¹ I did it with my first-year Hebrew students. Reading Ruth with beginning Hebrew students while I was, for the first time, preparing a translation for publication turned out to be a stroke of holy luck. The translation is substantially different and better because we were beginning together. As it turned out, I needed reading partners for the counterintuitive reason that the Hebrew of Ruth is so easy to read. In
DARK LADIES AND REDEMPTIVE COMPASSION: from:
Scrolls of Love: Ruth and the Song of Songs
Author(s) Polen Nehemia
Abstract: Jewish tradition celebrates Shavuot as the festival of the Giving of the Torah, the anniversary of the time when, fifty days after the Exodus, God came down on Mount Sinai and spoke the Decalogue (the “Ten Commandments”) to Israel. So it is that every year synagogue congregations take out the Torah scroll from the Holy Ark, place it on the reading table, and read from Exodus 19–20 as a public reenactment of that ancient covenantal proclamation. But just before that happens, another, much smaller scroll is opened and read: the scroll of Ruth.¹
“I AM BLACK AND BEAUTIFUL” from:
Scrolls of Love: Ruth and the Song of Songs
Author(s) LaCocque André
Abstract: In
Romance, She Wrote: A Hermeneutical Essay on Song of Songs,¹ I argue that the Song contains erotic descriptions that neither ask for nor require justification. In vivid contrast to the prophetic writings, in which eros is employed only in condemnation, it affirms, even revels in, sensual life. In fact, the Song’s eroticism is deliberately subversive in its challenge to the institutions of the Hellenistic era (ca. 333–175 bce), the probable time of its composition. I take it that the book’s author is a woman and that this female authorship adds to its polemical celebration of “free” love, that
READING THE SONG ICONOGRAPHICALLY from:
Scrolls of Love: Ruth and the Song of Songs
Author(s) Davis Ellen F.
Abstract: Among the most important questions for biblical interpreters to ask is the question of genre:
As whatare we to read this text? In the modern period, it was Hermann Gunkel who brought that question to the fore. As he demonstrated, the issue confronts us as soon as the opening pages of Genesis.¹ Do we read this as history (cum science) or as myth, as something that happened at a certain time—history, or as (citing the description of myth offered by the Roman historian Sallust) “something that happens over and over again”?
INTRADIVINE ROMANCE: from:
Scrolls of Love: Ruth and the Song of Songs
Author(s) Green Arthur
Abstract: The Zohar is the great medieval Jewish compendium of mysticism, myth, and esoteric teaching. It may be considered the greatest work of Jewish literary imagination in the Middle Ages. Surely it constitutes one of the most important bodies of religious texts of all times and places. It is also a lush garden of sacred eros, filled to overflowing with luxurious plantings of love between master and disciples, among the mystical companions themselves, between the souls of Israel and the
shekhinah, God’s lovely bride, but most of all between the male and female elements that together make up the Godhead. Revered
IN THE ABSENCE OF LOVE from:
Scrolls of Love: Ruth and the Song of Songs
Author(s) Walsh Carey Ellen
Abstract: As is true of no other Scripture, I find myself compelled to return to the Song of Songs time and again. A return to a text as rich as this one can only be stimulating, for rereading is its own reward. And yet, coming back to the Song brings me something more—an infusion of joy. In afterlife, the Song has a formidable presence: It lingers in the present, gathering up the past of its origins and thus ensuring its own future. The Song is robustly alive in every rereading.
SONG? SONGS? WHOSE SONG?: from:
Scrolls of Love: Ruth and the Song of Songs
Author(s) Fontaine Carole R.
Abstract: As a classically trained biblical scholar suspicious of the current penchant for autobiographical criticism, with its elevation of the interpreter to the level of the text, it is with chagrin that I find myself embarking here on this kind of essay—and for the
secondtime, no less.¹ Yet despite my scruples, it strikes me as important to reflect on how and why one comes to any reading, be it radical or otherwise. After all, we read in company, and when we read in good company, our readings grow and change, though never so as to
CHAPTER 4 Memoirs and Meaning from:
Believing Scholars: Ten Catholic Intellectuals
Author(s) CONWAY JILL KER
Abstract: My Christian faith has certainly led me to my interest in the moral and spiritual dimensions of the journey in time we all make, and since my intellectual bent is literary, I have focused my attention
CHAPTER 6 Catholicism and Human Rights from:
Believing Scholars: Ten Catholic Intellectuals
Author(s) GLENDON MARY ANN
Abstract: I am deeply honored to have been chosen for this year’s Marianist Award. And I was delighted when Father Heft told me I could give this lecture on any aspect of my work, so long as I included a discussion of how my faith has affected my scholarship and how my scholarship has affected my faith. At the time, that sounded like an easy assignment, since it was the experience of representing the Holy See at a United Nations conference that led to the book I have just completed—a history of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights of 1948,
CHAPTER 8 My Life as a “Woman”: from:
Believing Scholars: Ten Catholic Intellectuals
Author(s) STEINFELS MARGARET O’BRIEN
Abstract: The history of our time is a history of change, really of revolutionary change. Revolutions in the sciences, in weaponry, in international relations, in agriculture, in cooking, in relations between men and women, in gender identity, in child rearing. The essential measures of our earthly existence, time and space, we understand in far more complex ways that we did even twenty years ago. Furthermore, all such changes themselves become the springboard for ever greater change, what the British sociologist Anthony Giddens calls “institutional reflexivity.” By that he means “the regularized use of knowledge about circumstances of social life as a
CHAPTER 10 The Faith of a Theologian from:
Believing Scholars: Ten Catholic Intellectuals
Author(s) DULLES AVERY CARDINAL
Abstract: In the letter inviting me to accept the Marianist Award for the year 2004, your president, Dr. Curran, suggested that I might take the occasion to speak of the relationship of faith to my own scholarly work. The proposal immediately captured my fancy since faith and theology have been, so to speak, the two poles of my existence. The subject, besides, has considerable importance for our time and place, because many of the difficulties we experience in Church and society are due to the impoverishment of faith or to theology that is not in harmony with faith.
CHAPTER 4 Memoirs and Meaning from:
Believing Scholars: Ten Catholic Intellectuals
Author(s) CONWAY JILL KER
Abstract: My Christian faith has certainly led me to my interest in the moral and spiritual dimensions of the journey in time we all make, and since my intellectual bent is literary, I have focused my attention
CHAPTER 6 Catholicism and Human Rights from:
Believing Scholars: Ten Catholic Intellectuals
Author(s) GLENDON MARY ANN
Abstract: I am deeply honored to have been chosen for this year’s Marianist Award. And I was delighted when Father Heft told me I could give this lecture on any aspect of my work, so long as I included a discussion of how my faith has affected my scholarship and how my scholarship has affected my faith. At the time, that sounded like an easy assignment, since it was the experience of representing the Holy See at a United Nations conference that led to the book I have just completed—a history of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights of 1948,
CHAPTER 8 My Life as a “Woman”: from:
Believing Scholars: Ten Catholic Intellectuals
Author(s) STEINFELS MARGARET O’BRIEN
Abstract: The history of our time is a history of change, really of revolutionary change. Revolutions in the sciences, in weaponry, in international relations, in agriculture, in cooking, in relations between men and women, in gender identity, in child rearing. The essential measures of our earthly existence, time and space, we understand in far more complex ways that we did even twenty years ago. Furthermore, all such changes themselves become the springboard for ever greater change, what the British sociologist Anthony Giddens calls “institutional reflexivity.” By that he means “the regularized use of knowledge about circumstances of social life as a
CHAPTER 10 The Faith of a Theologian from:
Believing Scholars: Ten Catholic Intellectuals
Author(s) DULLES AVERY CARDINAL
Abstract: In the letter inviting me to accept the Marianist Award for the year 2004, your president, Dr. Curran, suggested that I might take the occasion to speak of the relationship of faith to my own scholarly work. The proposal immediately captured my fancy since faith and theology have been, so to speak, the two poles of my existence. The subject, besides, has considerable importance for our time and place, because many of the difficulties we experience in Church and society are due to the impoverishment of faith or to theology that is not in harmony with faith.
3 “A World Split Open”?: from:
The Experience of God: A Postmodern Response
Author(s) CULP KRISTINE A.
Abstract: If a woman told the truth about her life, “the world would split open,” the poet Muriel Rukeyser observed.¹ This was gospel for the earliest feminist theologians. Mary Daly gave this now classic explanation, “In hearing and naming ourselves out of the depths, women are naming toward God.”² Or, to paraphrase the playwright Ntozake Shange, as feminist theologians working in the late 1970s and ’80s sometimes did, women found God in themselves and “loved her fiercely.”³ When women told what they had undergone, what had sustained them, oppressed them, and set them free, how they had endured and survived, what
10 Schools for Scandal: from:
The Experience of God: A Postmodern Response
Author(s) HUGHES KEVIN L.
Abstract: Perhaps I can only begin where Michael Purcell does, with his presuppositions. He begins with the assertion that “Human life is meaningful … we are entered into a ‘world’ in which there is already meaning.” His second assertion is that this same life, the meaning of which we find ourselves already “in the middest,” can seem evacuated of meaning. What stands between the “world” of the first and the “appearance” of the second, I wonder? In other words, if to us the world from time to time “seems evacuated,” then is the problem one of perception (what it seems) or
Politics and Finitude: from:
Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) Pranger M. B.
Abstract: If, generally speaking, readers’ and writers’ attitudes toward the autobiographical genre can be characterized as naïve in that they take for granted the sincerity of the author, it is even harder for historians to be professionally effective without taking their products to be authentic reflections of time. There is a sense, however, in which histories of the state, histories of the church, and, indeed, histories of great institutions at large are so many contradictions in terms, at least if state and church are taken—as they are bound to be—to be bodies whose temporal existence transcends the moment, to
Saint John: from:
Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) Scherer Matthew
Abstract: JOHN RAWLS IS A SAINT. In the words of Amy Gutmann, who remarked, when delivering his eulogy, that she felt “privileged to have lived in his time,” Rawls was “saintly as well as wise.”¹ Within certain communities of political theorists, such sentiment appears to be widespread, as is evident from expressions of personal admiration in the wake of Rawls’s death. The general fact of this sentiment presents a number of problems, not only for a highly private man who by all accounts went to great lengths to avoid celebrity, let alone sainthood, but also for secular liberals who share in
Politics and Finitude: from:
Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) Pranger M. B.
Abstract: If, generally speaking, readers’ and writers’ attitudes toward the autobiographical genre can be characterized as naïve in that they take for granted the sincerity of the author, it is even harder for historians to be professionally effective without taking their products to be authentic reflections of time. There is a sense, however, in which histories of the state, histories of the church, and, indeed, histories of great institutions at large are so many contradictions in terms, at least if state and church are taken—as they are bound to be—to be bodies whose temporal existence transcends the moment, to
Saint John: from:
Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) Scherer Matthew
Abstract: JOHN RAWLS IS A SAINT. In the words of Amy Gutmann, who remarked, when delivering his eulogy, that she felt “privileged to have lived in his time,” Rawls was “saintly as well as wise.”¹ Within certain communities of political theorists, such sentiment appears to be widespread, as is evident from expressions of personal admiration in the wake of Rawls’s death. The general fact of this sentiment presents a number of problems, not only for a highly private man who by all accounts went to great lengths to avoid celebrity, let alone sainthood, but also for secular liberals who share in
Politics and Finitude: from:
Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) Pranger M. B.
Abstract: If, generally speaking, readers’ and writers’ attitudes toward the autobiographical genre can be characterized as naïve in that they take for granted the sincerity of the author, it is even harder for historians to be professionally effective without taking their products to be authentic reflections of time. There is a sense, however, in which histories of the state, histories of the church, and, indeed, histories of great institutions at large are so many contradictions in terms, at least if state and church are taken—as they are bound to be—to be bodies whose temporal existence transcends the moment, to
Saint John: from:
Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) Scherer Matthew
Abstract: JOHN RAWLS IS A SAINT. In the words of Amy Gutmann, who remarked, when delivering his eulogy, that she felt “privileged to have lived in his time,” Rawls was “saintly as well as wise.”¹ Within certain communities of political theorists, such sentiment appears to be widespread, as is evident from expressions of personal admiration in the wake of Rawls’s death. The general fact of this sentiment presents a number of problems, not only for a highly private man who by all accounts went to great lengths to avoid celebrity, let alone sainthood, but also for secular liberals who share in
1 The Place of Metaphor from:
Between Chora and the Good: Metaphor's Metaphysical Neighborhood
Abstract: Metaphor, that old, anarchical alchemist, transmutes belief into truth, illusion into reality, ignorance into knowledge—only then to turn around and do the opposite. How? She lets unsociable differences cross over to dwell with and interpret one another in order to reveal unsuspected identities—fictional, real, and virtual.¹ Water is one thing, electricity is another; but when Faraday crossed them and saw electricity through hydraulics, a new science was born. Electricity isn’t a fluid and does not flow, yet its dynamics are formally the same as those of water. Sometimes what is seen is an artifact of the metaphor. Waves
10 Elementals from:
Between Chora and the Good: Metaphor's Metaphysical Neighborhood
Abstract: If Rilke, Hölderlin, George, and Trakl are among the poets who set truth to work for Heidegger, something like this happened for me through an obscure Byzantine icon representing the Virgin Mary as the
Zoodochus Pegeand another calling her “the place of the placeless.” In her welcome, “matter shows itself for the first time in its materiality.”² Llewelyn has it that “maternity is the mother of materiality because it is the in-vention of the other … a pre-naissance of pre-nature.”³
11 Time’s Arrow from:
Between Chora and the Good: Metaphor's Metaphysical Neighborhood
Abstract: In 1910s and early 1920s Whitehead provided a phenomenological basis for the principles of natural knowledge and an alternative to Einstein;¹ but in his cosmology, process is being and the phenomenological concern seemingly disappeared. What appears for the first time in the later work, however, is an assimilation of force and affectivity that was based on an interpretation of the Platonic matrix as diversified by vectors, which can be read as both physical forces and phenomenological affects. Derrida used the same interpretative freedom to gain an important insight into
choraas loci ofdifférancein the general text. It also
12 The Originary from:
Between Chora and the Good: Metaphor's Metaphysical Neighborhood
Abstract: Let’s begin by asking ourselves, what do
wemean by time? No doubt, many different things, but chief among these is that time is mine, what I am in my innermost self. What is it? We share Augustine’s dilemma; he knew what time was until asked. What is this time that is mine and yours alone, the time we are caught up in, never have enough of, cannot endure, and can lend or give to others? Then there is the time clocks keep that ticks away inexorably, indifferent to our moods and the occupants of its now, its before and
1 The Place of Metaphor from:
Between Chora and the Good: Metaphor's Metaphysical Neighborhood
Abstract: Metaphor, that old, anarchical alchemist, transmutes belief into truth, illusion into reality, ignorance into knowledge—only then to turn around and do the opposite. How? She lets unsociable differences cross over to dwell with and interpret one another in order to reveal unsuspected identities—fictional, real, and virtual.¹ Water is one thing, electricity is another; but when Faraday crossed them and saw electricity through hydraulics, a new science was born. Electricity isn’t a fluid and does not flow, yet its dynamics are formally the same as those of water. Sometimes what is seen is an artifact of the metaphor. Waves
10 Elementals from:
Between Chora and the Good: Metaphor's Metaphysical Neighborhood
Abstract: If Rilke, Hölderlin, George, and Trakl are among the poets who set truth to work for Heidegger, something like this happened for me through an obscure Byzantine icon representing the Virgin Mary as the
Zoodochus Pegeand another calling her “the place of the placeless.” In her welcome, “matter shows itself for the first time in its materiality.”² Llewelyn has it that “maternity is the mother of materiality because it is the in-vention of the other … a pre-naissance of pre-nature.”³
11 Time’s Arrow from:
Between Chora and the Good: Metaphor's Metaphysical Neighborhood
Abstract: In 1910s and early 1920s Whitehead provided a phenomenological basis for the principles of natural knowledge and an alternative to Einstein;¹ but in his cosmology, process is being and the phenomenological concern seemingly disappeared. What appears for the first time in the later work, however, is an assimilation of force and affectivity that was based on an interpretation of the Platonic matrix as diversified by vectors, which can be read as both physical forces and phenomenological affects. Derrida used the same interpretative freedom to gain an important insight into
choraas loci ofdifférancein the general text. It also
12 The Originary from:
Between Chora and the Good: Metaphor's Metaphysical Neighborhood
Abstract: Let’s begin by asking ourselves, what do
wemean by time? No doubt, many different things, but chief among these is that time is mine, what I am in my innermost self. What is it? We share Augustine’s dilemma; he knew what time was until asked. What is this time that is mine and yours alone, the time we are caught up in, never have enough of, cannot endure, and can lend or give to others? Then there is the time clocks keep that ticks away inexorably, indifferent to our moods and the occupants of its now, its before and
1 The Place of Metaphor from:
Between Chora and the Good: Metaphor's Metaphysical Neighborhood
Abstract: Metaphor, that old, anarchical alchemist, transmutes belief into truth, illusion into reality, ignorance into knowledge—only then to turn around and do the opposite. How? She lets unsociable differences cross over to dwell with and interpret one another in order to reveal unsuspected identities—fictional, real, and virtual.¹ Water is one thing, electricity is another; but when Faraday crossed them and saw electricity through hydraulics, a new science was born. Electricity isn’t a fluid and does not flow, yet its dynamics are formally the same as those of water. Sometimes what is seen is an artifact of the metaphor. Waves
10 Elementals from:
Between Chora and the Good: Metaphor's Metaphysical Neighborhood
Abstract: If Rilke, Hölderlin, George, and Trakl are among the poets who set truth to work for Heidegger, something like this happened for me through an obscure Byzantine icon representing the Virgin Mary as the
Zoodochus Pegeand another calling her “the place of the placeless.” In her welcome, “matter shows itself for the first time in its materiality.”² Llewelyn has it that “maternity is the mother of materiality because it is the in-vention of the other … a pre-naissance of pre-nature.”³
11 Time’s Arrow from:
Between Chora and the Good: Metaphor's Metaphysical Neighborhood
Abstract: In 1910s and early 1920s Whitehead provided a phenomenological basis for the principles of natural knowledge and an alternative to Einstein;¹ but in his cosmology, process is being and the phenomenological concern seemingly disappeared. What appears for the first time in the later work, however, is an assimilation of force and affectivity that was based on an interpretation of the Platonic matrix as diversified by vectors, which can be read as both physical forces and phenomenological affects. Derrida used the same interpretative freedom to gain an important insight into
choraas loci ofdifférancein the general text. It also
12 The Originary from:
Between Chora and the Good: Metaphor's Metaphysical Neighborhood
Abstract: Let’s begin by asking ourselves, what do
wemean by time? No doubt, many different things, but chief among these is that time is mine, what I am in my innermost self. What is it? We share Augustine’s dilemma; he knew what time was until asked. What is this time that is mine and yours alone, the time we are caught up in, never have enough of, cannot endure, and can lend or give to others? Then there is the time clocks keep that ticks away inexorably, indifferent to our moods and the occupants of its now, its before and
Is Moralistic Therapeutic Deism the New Religion of American Youth? from:
Passing on the Faith: Transforming Traditions for the Next Generation of Jews, Christians, and Muslims
Author(s) Smith Christian
Abstract: All human communities face the general challenge of social reproduction—that is, socializing subsequent generations to carry on community identities and practices. Meeting this challenge successfully requires effective practices of socialization, identity formation, role modeling, intergenerational transference of authority, and so on. Many other factors, however, typically play into the success or breakdown of social reproduction, including competing institutional demands and changing social environmental conditions that make passing on a collective way of life over time more or less difficult. Religious communities are only one among many types of human communities that face this general challenge of reproducing themselves in
A Spiritual Crossroads of Europe: from:
Passing on the Faith: Transforming Traditions for the Next Generation of Jews, Christians, and Muslims
Abstract: I stand before you today with a mixture of gratitude and apprehension. Gratitude, because the organizers of this conference saw fit to include the Taizé Community in their program, ostensibly as a “model that retain[s] religious traditions in non-reductive ways while at the same time bridging in an open and dialogical way the ever-increasing religious pluralism of the contemporary world.” It is quite something to be considered, even remotely, such a model. So on behalf of my community I thank the organizers for this show of confidence in the life we have been attempting to live for the past sixty-plus
Introduction: from:
Vladimir Jankelevitch: The Time of Forgiveness
Abstract: There is a time of forgiveness. Such a time may arise when the acuteness of the pain stemming from a personal or moral injury has abated, when a relationship that is dear outweighs the hurt of an offense, or when a decision is made to put an end to the cycles of violence and revenge. In a grammatical analogy, forgiveness may be said to be like a period, marking an end—an end to feelings of rancor and resentment toward another. This pointed end gives way to a new beginning, and ideally, this new beginning allows for extraordinarily simple that
3 The Temporality of Human Existence and Action from:
Vladimir Jankelevitch: The Time of Forgiveness
Abstract: Irreversibility, irrevocability, and imprescriptibility relate to each other as the natural to the ethical to the legal. In a sense, these terms represent a progression of an idea, moving from one category to another, sharpening and narrowing its scope in the procession from nature to ethics to the legal and juridical domains. The idea driving these notions is that of time or, more precisely, the temporal constitution of human affairs. Temporality forms the core of each of these terms individually and in their interrelation. Time is irreversible and subjects all things to its one-way directedness; free will and action take
4 Translating Resentment from:
Vladimir Jankelevitch: The Time of Forgiveness
Abstract: For Vladimir Jankélévitch, the protest against forgetting that which is irrevocable is not merely an intellectual endeavor. It entails the emotive and passionate task of justice itself. Consequently, at the limits of passion, he conceives this protest as a duty to both values and to the individuals. Values, according to Jankélévitch, are not simply to be conceded with the cold eye of rationality; they rather form the lifeblood of ethical-emotional life. His assessment of ressentiment therefore shows that the ethical life is not dispassionate. To the contrary, justice, he explains, must be a love of justice and must include a
5 The Inexcusable and the Unforgivable from:
Vladimir Jankelevitch: The Time of Forgiveness
Abstract: What can be excused need not be forgiven. The excuse excuses the excusable because the excuse, according to Vladimir Jankélévitch, is of the order of reason and understanding. What can be excused has grounds for excuse. Conversely, what is inexcusable exceeds the parameters of understanding and surpasses the contextualization of the misdeed. As Jankélévitch claims, sometimes a misdeed is performed as a cry for help, a cry to be understood, or even as a cry to be loved. He therefore encourages us to try to understand as much as we can understand, but he is also insistent that there are
Introduction: from:
Vladimir Jankelevitch: The Time of Forgiveness
Abstract: There is a time of forgiveness. Such a time may arise when the acuteness of the pain stemming from a personal or moral injury has abated, when a relationship that is dear outweighs the hurt of an offense, or when a decision is made to put an end to the cycles of violence and revenge. In a grammatical analogy, forgiveness may be said to be like a period, marking an end—an end to feelings of rancor and resentment toward another. This pointed end gives way to a new beginning, and ideally, this new beginning allows for extraordinarily simple that
3 The Temporality of Human Existence and Action from:
Vladimir Jankelevitch: The Time of Forgiveness
Abstract: Irreversibility, irrevocability, and imprescriptibility relate to each other as the natural to the ethical to the legal. In a sense, these terms represent a progression of an idea, moving from one category to another, sharpening and narrowing its scope in the procession from nature to ethics to the legal and juridical domains. The idea driving these notions is that of time or, more precisely, the temporal constitution of human affairs. Temporality forms the core of each of these terms individually and in their interrelation. Time is irreversible and subjects all things to its one-way directedness; free will and action take
4 Translating Resentment from:
Vladimir Jankelevitch: The Time of Forgiveness
Abstract: For Vladimir Jankélévitch, the protest against forgetting that which is irrevocable is not merely an intellectual endeavor. It entails the emotive and passionate task of justice itself. Consequently, at the limits of passion, he conceives this protest as a duty to both values and to the individuals. Values, according to Jankélévitch, are not simply to be conceded with the cold eye of rationality; they rather form the lifeblood of ethical-emotional life. His assessment of ressentiment therefore shows that the ethical life is not dispassionate. To the contrary, justice, he explains, must be a love of justice and must include a
5 The Inexcusable and the Unforgivable from:
Vladimir Jankelevitch: The Time of Forgiveness
Abstract: What can be excused need not be forgiven. The excuse excuses the excusable because the excuse, according to Vladimir Jankélévitch, is of the order of reason and understanding. What can be excused has grounds for excuse. Conversely, what is inexcusable exceeds the parameters of understanding and surpasses the contextualization of the misdeed. As Jankélévitch claims, sometimes a misdeed is performed as a cry for help, a cry to be understood, or even as a cry to be loved. He therefore encourages us to try to understand as much as we can understand, but he is also insistent that there are
Introduction: from:
Vladimir Jankelevitch: The Time of Forgiveness
Abstract: There is a time of forgiveness. Such a time may arise when the acuteness of the pain stemming from a personal or moral injury has abated, when a relationship that is dear outweighs the hurt of an offense, or when a decision is made to put an end to the cycles of violence and revenge. In a grammatical analogy, forgiveness may be said to be like a period, marking an end—an end to feelings of rancor and resentment toward another. This pointed end gives way to a new beginning, and ideally, this new beginning allows for extraordinarily simple that
3 The Temporality of Human Existence and Action from:
Vladimir Jankelevitch: The Time of Forgiveness
Abstract: Irreversibility, irrevocability, and imprescriptibility relate to each other as the natural to the ethical to the legal. In a sense, these terms represent a progression of an idea, moving from one category to another, sharpening and narrowing its scope in the procession from nature to ethics to the legal and juridical domains. The idea driving these notions is that of time or, more precisely, the temporal constitution of human affairs. Temporality forms the core of each of these terms individually and in their interrelation. Time is irreversible and subjects all things to its one-way directedness; free will and action take
4 Translating Resentment from:
Vladimir Jankelevitch: The Time of Forgiveness
Abstract: For Vladimir Jankélévitch, the protest against forgetting that which is irrevocable is not merely an intellectual endeavor. It entails the emotive and passionate task of justice itself. Consequently, at the limits of passion, he conceives this protest as a duty to both values and to the individuals. Values, according to Jankélévitch, are not simply to be conceded with the cold eye of rationality; they rather form the lifeblood of ethical-emotional life. His assessment of ressentiment therefore shows that the ethical life is not dispassionate. To the contrary, justice, he explains, must be a love of justice and must include a
5 The Inexcusable and the Unforgivable from:
Vladimir Jankelevitch: The Time of Forgiveness
Abstract: What can be excused need not be forgiven. The excuse excuses the excusable because the excuse, according to Vladimir Jankélévitch, is of the order of reason and understanding. What can be excused has grounds for excuse. Conversely, what is inexcusable exceeds the parameters of understanding and surpasses the contextualization of the misdeed. As Jankélévitch claims, sometimes a misdeed is performed as a cry for help, a cry to be understood, or even as a cry to be loved. He therefore encourages us to try to understand as much as we can understand, but he is also insistent that there are
Introduction: from:
Vladimir Jankelevitch: The Time of Forgiveness
Abstract: There is a time of forgiveness. Such a time may arise when the acuteness of the pain stemming from a personal or moral injury has abated, when a relationship that is dear outweighs the hurt of an offense, or when a decision is made to put an end to the cycles of violence and revenge. In a grammatical analogy, forgiveness may be said to be like a period, marking an end—an end to feelings of rancor and resentment toward another. This pointed end gives way to a new beginning, and ideally, this new beginning allows for extraordinarily simple that
3 The Temporality of Human Existence and Action from:
Vladimir Jankelevitch: The Time of Forgiveness
Abstract: Irreversibility, irrevocability, and imprescriptibility relate to each other as the natural to the ethical to the legal. In a sense, these terms represent a progression of an idea, moving from one category to another, sharpening and narrowing its scope in the procession from nature to ethics to the legal and juridical domains. The idea driving these notions is that of time or, more precisely, the temporal constitution of human affairs. Temporality forms the core of each of these terms individually and in their interrelation. Time is irreversible and subjects all things to its one-way directedness; free will and action take
4 Translating Resentment from:
Vladimir Jankelevitch: The Time of Forgiveness
Abstract: For Vladimir Jankélévitch, the protest against forgetting that which is irrevocable is not merely an intellectual endeavor. It entails the emotive and passionate task of justice itself. Consequently, at the limits of passion, he conceives this protest as a duty to both values and to the individuals. Values, according to Jankélévitch, are not simply to be conceded with the cold eye of rationality; they rather form the lifeblood of ethical-emotional life. His assessment of ressentiment therefore shows that the ethical life is not dispassionate. To the contrary, justice, he explains, must be a love of justice and must include a
5 The Inexcusable and the Unforgivable from:
Vladimir Jankelevitch: The Time of Forgiveness
Abstract: What can be excused need not be forgiven. The excuse excuses the excusable because the excuse, according to Vladimir Jankélévitch, is of the order of reason and understanding. What can be excused has grounds for excuse. Conversely, what is inexcusable exceeds the parameters of understanding and surpasses the contextualization of the misdeed. As Jankélévitch claims, sometimes a misdeed is performed as a cry for help, a cry to be understood, or even as a cry to be loved. He therefore encourages us to try to understand as much as we can understand, but he is also insistent that there are
Book Title: The Architecture of Concepts: The Historical Formation of Human Rights- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): de Bolla Peter
Abstract: The Architecture of Concepts proposes a radically new way of understanding the history of ideas. Taking as its example human rights, it develops a distinctive kind of conceptual analysis that enables us to see with precision how the concept of human rights was formed in the eighteenth century. The first chapter outlines an innovative account of concepts as cultural entities. The second develops an original methodology for recovering the historical formation of the concept of human rights based on data extracted from digital archives. This enables us to track the construction of conceptual architectures over time. Having established the architecture of the concept of human rights, the book then examines two key moments in its historical formation: the First Continental Congress in 1775 and the publication of Tom Paine's Rights of Man in 1792. Arguing that we have yet to fully understand or appreciate the consequences of the eighteenth-century invention of the concept "rights of man," the final chapter addresses our problematic contemporary attempts to leverage human rights as the most efficacious way of achieving universal equality
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x06zz
CHAPTER 2 “… the Fundamental Rights and Liberties of Mankind …”: from:
The Architecture of Concepts: The Historical Formation of Human Rights
Abstract: It is, by now, almost a commonplace to state that “human rights” were invented in the eighteenth century.¹ Although it is not immediately clear what it might mean to say that a concept was “invented” at a particular moment in time (or over a particular stretch of time, say the eighteenth century), I shall leave this hanging since I want to begin with a more simple-minded examination of the validity of this statement.² If one searches the database of eighteenth-century printed materials in English (ECCO) for use of the term
human rights, one finds that the century was almost entirely
Epiphanies of the Everyday: from:
After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: What if we were to return to epiphanies of the everyday? What if we could come back to the end (
eschaton) in the here and now? Back to that end after the end of time that addresses us in each instant? What if we could rediscover ourselves again face-to-face with the infinite in the infinitesimal? Touch the sacred enfolded in the seeds of ordinary things?
Toward a Fourth Reduction? from:
After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) MANOUSSAKIS JOHN PANTELEIMON
Abstract: In this essay we attempt a redefining of the phenomenological method as this has been developed mainly through three “reductions”¹ represented by three thinkers whose work advanced phenomenological research in novel ways: Edmund Husserl, Martin Heidegger, and Jean-Luc Marion. Our rehearsal of the phenomenological tradition aims at formulating a set of controversial questions: Is it, perhaps, time for a
fourthreduction that would better serve the sensibilities of the so-called phenomenology of the apparent? And if so, what might be its guiding principles, its ways of operating, its scope and aim? Such a fourth reduction, we believe, would not seek
Kearney’s Wager from:
After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) BURKE PATRICK
Abstract: In a 1991 essay, Dominique Janicaud lamented a “turn” in recent French phenomenology “toward the theological,” toward the question of the nature of postmetaphysical divinity. In 1984, Richard Kearney had published
Poétique du Possible: Phénoménologie Herméneutique de la Figuration, in which he had already mapped a new eschatological hermeneutics of God as possibility in critical comparison with Heidegger’s ontological hermeneutics of being asVermögend-Mögende. Kearney continues to situate his own work within this turn, arguing that the dialogue between postmodern philosophy and religion is “one of the most burning intellectual tasks of our time.” InThe God Who May Be,
Epiphanies of the Everyday: from:
After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: What if we were to return to epiphanies of the everyday? What if we could come back to the end (
eschaton) in the here and now? Back to that end after the end of time that addresses us in each instant? What if we could rediscover ourselves again face-to-face with the infinite in the infinitesimal? Touch the sacred enfolded in the seeds of ordinary things?
Toward a Fourth Reduction? from:
After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) MANOUSSAKIS JOHN PANTELEIMON
Abstract: In this essay we attempt a redefining of the phenomenological method as this has been developed mainly through three “reductions”¹ represented by three thinkers whose work advanced phenomenological research in novel ways: Edmund Husserl, Martin Heidegger, and Jean-Luc Marion. Our rehearsal of the phenomenological tradition aims at formulating a set of controversial questions: Is it, perhaps, time for a
fourthreduction that would better serve the sensibilities of the so-called phenomenology of the apparent? And if so, what might be its guiding principles, its ways of operating, its scope and aim? Such a fourth reduction, we believe, would not seek
Kearney’s Wager from:
After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) BURKE PATRICK
Abstract: In a 1991 essay, Dominique Janicaud lamented a “turn” in recent French phenomenology “toward the theological,” toward the question of the nature of postmetaphysical divinity. In 1984, Richard Kearney had published
Poétique du Possible: Phénoménologie Herméneutique de la Figuration, in which he had already mapped a new eschatological hermeneutics of God as possibility in critical comparison with Heidegger’s ontological hermeneutics of being asVermögend-Mögende. Kearney continues to situate his own work within this turn, arguing that the dialogue between postmodern philosophy and religion is “one of the most burning intellectual tasks of our time.” InThe God Who May Be,
Epiphanies of the Everyday: from:
After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: What if we were to return to epiphanies of the everyday? What if we could come back to the end (
eschaton) in the here and now? Back to that end after the end of time that addresses us in each instant? What if we could rediscover ourselves again face-to-face with the infinite in the infinitesimal? Touch the sacred enfolded in the seeds of ordinary things?
Toward a Fourth Reduction? from:
After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) MANOUSSAKIS JOHN PANTELEIMON
Abstract: In this essay we attempt a redefining of the phenomenological method as this has been developed mainly through three “reductions”¹ represented by three thinkers whose work advanced phenomenological research in novel ways: Edmund Husserl, Martin Heidegger, and Jean-Luc Marion. Our rehearsal of the phenomenological tradition aims at formulating a set of controversial questions: Is it, perhaps, time for a
fourthreduction that would better serve the sensibilities of the so-called phenomenology of the apparent? And if so, what might be its guiding principles, its ways of operating, its scope and aim? Such a fourth reduction, we believe, would not seek
Kearney’s Wager from:
After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) BURKE PATRICK
Abstract: In a 1991 essay, Dominique Janicaud lamented a “turn” in recent French phenomenology “toward the theological,” toward the question of the nature of postmetaphysical divinity. In 1984, Richard Kearney had published
Poétique du Possible: Phénoménologie Herméneutique de la Figuration, in which he had already mapped a new eschatological hermeneutics of God as possibility in critical comparison with Heidegger’s ontological hermeneutics of being asVermögend-Mögende. Kearney continues to situate his own work within this turn, arguing that the dialogue between postmodern philosophy and religion is “one of the most burning intellectual tasks of our time.” InThe God Who May Be,
Epiphanies of the Everyday: from:
After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: What if we were to return to epiphanies of the everyday? What if we could come back to the end (
eschaton) in the here and now? Back to that end after the end of time that addresses us in each instant? What if we could rediscover ourselves again face-to-face with the infinite in the infinitesimal? Touch the sacred enfolded in the seeds of ordinary things?
Toward a Fourth Reduction? from:
After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) MANOUSSAKIS JOHN PANTELEIMON
Abstract: In this essay we attempt a redefining of the phenomenological method as this has been developed mainly through three “reductions”¹ represented by three thinkers whose work advanced phenomenological research in novel ways: Edmund Husserl, Martin Heidegger, and Jean-Luc Marion. Our rehearsal of the phenomenological tradition aims at formulating a set of controversial questions: Is it, perhaps, time for a
fourthreduction that would better serve the sensibilities of the so-called phenomenology of the apparent? And if so, what might be its guiding principles, its ways of operating, its scope and aim? Such a fourth reduction, we believe, would not seek
Kearney’s Wager from:
After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) BURKE PATRICK
Abstract: In a 1991 essay, Dominique Janicaud lamented a “turn” in recent French phenomenology “toward the theological,” toward the question of the nature of postmetaphysical divinity. In 1984, Richard Kearney had published
Poétique du Possible: Phénoménologie Herméneutique de la Figuration, in which he had already mapped a new eschatological hermeneutics of God as possibility in critical comparison with Heidegger’s ontological hermeneutics of being asVermögend-Mögende. Kearney continues to situate his own work within this turn, arguing that the dialogue between postmodern philosophy and religion is “one of the most burning intellectual tasks of our time.” InThe God Who May Be,
Epiphanies of the Everyday: from:
After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: What if we were to return to epiphanies of the everyday? What if we could come back to the end (
eschaton) in the here and now? Back to that end after the end of time that addresses us in each instant? What if we could rediscover ourselves again face-to-face with the infinite in the infinitesimal? Touch the sacred enfolded in the seeds of ordinary things?
Toward a Fourth Reduction? from:
After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) MANOUSSAKIS JOHN PANTELEIMON
Abstract: In this essay we attempt a redefining of the phenomenological method as this has been developed mainly through three “reductions”¹ represented by three thinkers whose work advanced phenomenological research in novel ways: Edmund Husserl, Martin Heidegger, and Jean-Luc Marion. Our rehearsal of the phenomenological tradition aims at formulating a set of controversial questions: Is it, perhaps, time for a
fourthreduction that would better serve the sensibilities of the so-called phenomenology of the apparent? And if so, what might be its guiding principles, its ways of operating, its scope and aim? Such a fourth reduction, we believe, would not seek
Kearney’s Wager from:
After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) BURKE PATRICK
Abstract: In a 1991 essay, Dominique Janicaud lamented a “turn” in recent French phenomenology “toward the theological,” toward the question of the nature of postmetaphysical divinity. In 1984, Richard Kearney had published
Poétique du Possible: Phénoménologie Herméneutique de la Figuration, in which he had already mapped a new eschatological hermeneutics of God as possibility in critical comparison with Heidegger’s ontological hermeneutics of being asVermögend-Mögende. Kearney continues to situate his own work within this turn, arguing that the dialogue between postmodern philosophy and religion is “one of the most burning intellectual tasks of our time.” InThe God Who May Be,
Epiphanies of the Everyday: from:
After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: What if we were to return to epiphanies of the everyday? What if we could come back to the end (
eschaton) in the here and now? Back to that end after the end of time that addresses us in each instant? What if we could rediscover ourselves again face-to-face with the infinite in the infinitesimal? Touch the sacred enfolded in the seeds of ordinary things?
Toward a Fourth Reduction? from:
After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) MANOUSSAKIS JOHN PANTELEIMON
Abstract: In this essay we attempt a redefining of the phenomenological method as this has been developed mainly through three “reductions”¹ represented by three thinkers whose work advanced phenomenological research in novel ways: Edmund Husserl, Martin Heidegger, and Jean-Luc Marion. Our rehearsal of the phenomenological tradition aims at formulating a set of controversial questions: Is it, perhaps, time for a
fourthreduction that would better serve the sensibilities of the so-called phenomenology of the apparent? And if so, what might be its guiding principles, its ways of operating, its scope and aim? Such a fourth reduction, we believe, would not seek
Kearney’s Wager from:
After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) BURKE PATRICK
Abstract: In a 1991 essay, Dominique Janicaud lamented a “turn” in recent French phenomenology “toward the theological,” toward the question of the nature of postmetaphysical divinity. In 1984, Richard Kearney had published
Poétique du Possible: Phénoménologie Herméneutique de la Figuration, in which he had already mapped a new eschatological hermeneutics of God as possibility in critical comparison with Heidegger’s ontological hermeneutics of being asVermögend-Mögende. Kearney continues to situate his own work within this turn, arguing that the dialogue between postmodern philosophy and religion is “one of the most burning intellectual tasks of our time.” InThe God Who May Be,
Epiphanies of the Everyday: from:
After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: What if we were to return to epiphanies of the everyday? What if we could come back to the end (
eschaton) in the here and now? Back to that end after the end of time that addresses us in each instant? What if we could rediscover ourselves again face-to-face with the infinite in the infinitesimal? Touch the sacred enfolded in the seeds of ordinary things?
Toward a Fourth Reduction? from:
After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) MANOUSSAKIS JOHN PANTELEIMON
Abstract: In this essay we attempt a redefining of the phenomenological method as this has been developed mainly through three “reductions”¹ represented by three thinkers whose work advanced phenomenological research in novel ways: Edmund Husserl, Martin Heidegger, and Jean-Luc Marion. Our rehearsal of the phenomenological tradition aims at formulating a set of controversial questions: Is it, perhaps, time for a
fourthreduction that would better serve the sensibilities of the so-called phenomenology of the apparent? And if so, what might be its guiding principles, its ways of operating, its scope and aim? Such a fourth reduction, we believe, would not seek
Kearney’s Wager from:
After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) BURKE PATRICK
Abstract: In a 1991 essay, Dominique Janicaud lamented a “turn” in recent French phenomenology “toward the theological,” toward the question of the nature of postmetaphysical divinity. In 1984, Richard Kearney had published
Poétique du Possible: Phénoménologie Herméneutique de la Figuration, in which he had already mapped a new eschatological hermeneutics of God as possibility in critical comparison with Heidegger’s ontological hermeneutics of being asVermögend-Mögende. Kearney continues to situate his own work within this turn, arguing that the dialogue between postmodern philosophy and religion is “one of the most burning intellectual tasks of our time.” InThe God Who May Be,
Epiphanies of the Everyday: from:
After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: What if we were to return to epiphanies of the everyday? What if we could come back to the end (
eschaton) in the here and now? Back to that end after the end of time that addresses us in each instant? What if we could rediscover ourselves again face-to-face with the infinite in the infinitesimal? Touch the sacred enfolded in the seeds of ordinary things?
Toward a Fourth Reduction? from:
After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) MANOUSSAKIS JOHN PANTELEIMON
Abstract: In this essay we attempt a redefining of the phenomenological method as this has been developed mainly through three “reductions”¹ represented by three thinkers whose work advanced phenomenological research in novel ways: Edmund Husserl, Martin Heidegger, and Jean-Luc Marion. Our rehearsal of the phenomenological tradition aims at formulating a set of controversial questions: Is it, perhaps, time for a
fourthreduction that would better serve the sensibilities of the so-called phenomenology of the apparent? And if so, what might be its guiding principles, its ways of operating, its scope and aim? Such a fourth reduction, we believe, would not seek
Kearney’s Wager from:
After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) BURKE PATRICK
Abstract: In a 1991 essay, Dominique Janicaud lamented a “turn” in recent French phenomenology “toward the theological,” toward the question of the nature of postmetaphysical divinity. In 1984, Richard Kearney had published
Poétique du Possible: Phénoménologie Herméneutique de la Figuration, in which he had already mapped a new eschatological hermeneutics of God as possibility in critical comparison with Heidegger’s ontological hermeneutics of being asVermögend-Mögende. Kearney continues to situate his own work within this turn, arguing that the dialogue between postmodern philosophy and religion is “one of the most burning intellectual tasks of our time.” InThe God Who May Be,
Epiphanies of the Everyday: from:
After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: What if we were to return to epiphanies of the everyday? What if we could come back to the end (
eschaton) in the here and now? Back to that end after the end of time that addresses us in each instant? What if we could rediscover ourselves again face-to-face with the infinite in the infinitesimal? Touch the sacred enfolded in the seeds of ordinary things?
Toward a Fourth Reduction? from:
After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) MANOUSSAKIS JOHN PANTELEIMON
Abstract: In this essay we attempt a redefining of the phenomenological method as this has been developed mainly through three “reductions”¹ represented by three thinkers whose work advanced phenomenological research in novel ways: Edmund Husserl, Martin Heidegger, and Jean-Luc Marion. Our rehearsal of the phenomenological tradition aims at formulating a set of controversial questions: Is it, perhaps, time for a
fourthreduction that would better serve the sensibilities of the so-called phenomenology of the apparent? And if so, what might be its guiding principles, its ways of operating, its scope and aim? Such a fourth reduction, we believe, would not seek
Kearney’s Wager from:
After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) BURKE PATRICK
Abstract: In a 1991 essay, Dominique Janicaud lamented a “turn” in recent French phenomenology “toward the theological,” toward the question of the nature of postmetaphysical divinity. In 1984, Richard Kearney had published
Poétique du Possible: Phénoménologie Herméneutique de la Figuration, in which he had already mapped a new eschatological hermeneutics of God as possibility in critical comparison with Heidegger’s ontological hermeneutics of being asVermögend-Mögende. Kearney continues to situate his own work within this turn, arguing that the dialogue between postmodern philosophy and religion is “one of the most burning intellectual tasks of our time.” InThe God Who May Be,
SEVEN RACE, CULTURE, AND PLURALISM: from:
The Relevance of Royce
Author(s) Pratt Scott L.
Abstract: In
The Wretched of the Earth, Frantz Fanon describes the state of oppression in a colonized land as one “obedient to the rules of pure Aristotelian logic.” Here the natives—the original people of the land—and the settlers—the colonizers who now control the land—“follow the principle of reciprocal exclusivity. No conciliation is possible” because the exclusion affirms the settlers and rejects the natives (Fanon,Wretched, 38–39). “At times,” he says, “this Manichaeism goes to its logical conclusion and dehumanizes the native, or to speak plainly, it turns him into an animal” (42). In this land, “The
NINE RACISM, RACE, AND JOSIAH ROYCE: from:
The Relevance of Royce
Author(s) Kegley Jacquelyn Ann K.
Abstract: Josiah Royce, like other American philosophers of the first decade of the twentieth century, stressed the importance of philosophy for human affairs.¹ Royce argued ethics grounded all philosophy² and, like William James and John Dewey, he believed that one of philosophy’s tasks was to clarify social issues and to facilitate formulation of effective solutions to personal and social problems. One of the critical problems of his time was racial conflict, a problem that continues to be critical in our time. In 1908, Royce published a book called
Race Questions, Provincialism and Other American Problems,³ which contains among its essays one
TWELVE ROYCE’S RELEVANCE FOR INTRAFAITH DIALOGUE from:
The Relevance of Royce
Author(s) Oppenheim Frank M.
Abstract: Warm-up pitches can help us start.¹ I write in this paper as a philosopher of religion examining statements Royce made about intrafaith relationships. I use the term “intrafaith” to indicate the interpersonal relations between members of the world religions—Christians, Jews, Muslims, Hindus, Buddhists, etc.² Then, too, in 1912 what Royce did
notknow about “the historical Jesus” contrasts sharply with today’s far more nuanced and subtle treatment of that topic. In addition, Royce used the term “Christian” in two senses, each determinable from its context. Sometimes he spoke of “Christian” in the narrow sense of a person baptized with
Book Title: Committing the Future to Memory: History, Experience, Trauma- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Clift Sarah
Abstract: Whereas historical determinacy conceives the past as a complex and unstable network of causalities, this book asks how history can be related to a more radical future. To pose that question, it does not reject determinacy outright but rather seeks to explore how it works. In examining what it means to be "determined" by history, it also asks what kind of openings there might be in our encounters with history for interruptions, re-readings, and re-writings. Engaging texts spanning multiple genres and several centuries from John Locke to Maurice Blanchot, from Hegel to Benjamin Clift looks at experiences of time that exceed the historical narration of experiences said to have occurred in time. She focuses on the co-existence of multiple temporalities and opens up the quintessentially modern notion of historical succession to other possibilities. The alternatives she draws out include the mediations of language and narration, temporal leaps, oscillations and blockages, and the role played by contingency in representation. She argues that such alternatives compel us to reassess the ways we understand history and identity in a traumatic, or indeed in a post-traumatic, age.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x07vw
CHAPTER FOUR Speculating on the Past, the Impact of the Present: from:
Committing the Future to Memory: History, Experience, Trauma
Abstract: To argue for a rigorous reading of the “end” of historical time in Hegel is, in some sense, the condition for thinking the experience of narrative time in a mode other than that of the simple linearity of continuous progression. In Chapter 3, we demonstrated how Hegel’s complex mode of narrating the pastness of “art in its highest determination” generates an understanding of past and future that goes beyond the notion of two distinct moments on a temporal continuum and conceives narrative temporality in terms of how an aspect of futurity is at work in it, not as a horizon
PREAMBLE II Descartes Needs Rereading from:
Reading Descartes Otherwise: Blind, Mad, Dreamy, and Bad
Abstract: My mind seems to have been actively suspended by certain constantly slippery gaps and cinematic interplays between the memory of my own first unschooled encounter with Descartes, the shock of the
Meditations(1641) on the one hand, and the usual scholarly scenes of interpretation, or scholastic “filters” around that philosophical time bomb, on the other. As John Carriero put it,
Book Title: Thinking Through the Imagination: Aesthetics in Human Cognition- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Jones Jude
Abstract: Use your imagination! The demand is as important as it is confusing. What is the imagination? What is its value? Where does it come from? And where is it going in a time when even the obscene seems overdone and passe? This book takes up these questions and argues for the centrality of imagination in human cognition. It traces the development of the imagination in Kant's critical philosophy (particularly the Critique of Aesthetic Judgment) and claims that the insights of Kantian aesthetic theory, especially concerning the nature of creativity, common sense, and genius, influenced the development of nineteenth-century American philosophy. The book identifies the central role of the imagination in the philosophy of Peirce, a role often overlooked in analytic treatments of his thought. The final chapters pursue the observation made by Kant and Peirce that imaginative genius is a type of natural gift (ingenium) and must in some way be continuous with the creative force of nature. It makes this final turn by way of contemporary studies of metaphor, embodied cognition, and cognitive neuroscience.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0b4g
SIX ONTOLOGY AND IMAGINATION: from:
Thinking Through the Imagination: Aesthetics in Human Cognition
Abstract: During the 1880s, Peirce employed the triadic nature of thought to ground his budding cosmology. As Karl-Otto Apel suggests, it was during this time (particularly in 1885) that Peirce developed a “metaphysics of evolution.”¹ Peirce’s attempt to expose a continuous relation among the three aspects of human thought becomes a desire to unify three realms of being. He comes to reassert the necessary connection between epistemology and ontology. Just as Kant’s discussion of imagination and reflective judgment in 1792 leads him to speculate on the topics of time and purposive nature, Peirce’s examination of the triadic character of logic and
IMMUNITARY DEMOCRACY from:
Terms of the Political: Community, Immunity, Biopolitics
Abstract: Does the term
communityrefer to democracy? Might it, or is it too profoundly rooted in the conceptual lexicon of the romantic, authoritarian, and racist Right? This question, first posed in the context of American neocommunitarianism, is emerging once again in Europe, above all in France and Italy, as we venture a new thought about community. This question is not only legitimate but in certain ways quite unavoidable at a time when democratic culture is interrogating its own theoretical mandates and its own future. However, this doesn’t change the fact that the question is incorrect in its very formulation, or
NAZISM AND US from:
Terms of the Political: Community, Immunity, Biopolitics
Abstract: 1933–2003. Is it legitimate to turn once again to the question of Nazism seventy years after it took power? The answer, I believe, can only be yes: not just because forgetting Nazism would represent an unbearable offense for its victims but also because, despite an ever increasing body of literature, something about Nazism remains in the dark, something that touches us. What might it be? What links us invisibly to what we point to as the most tragic political catastrophe of our time, and perhaps of all time? My own sense is that this thing that both troubles and
Conclusion: from:
Cathedrals of Bone: The Role of the Body in Contemporary Catholic Literature
Abstract: In a collection of poems from her book
Decreation, the Canadian Catholic poet and essayist Anne Carson reflects on time spent with her elderly mother, who suffers from both an aging body and mind. In the course of fourteen pieces that constitute the opening pages of Carson’s complex text, the poet’s mother appears in various guises: from a woman who worries about running up the bill on long-distance phone calls to one who no longer remembers to pick up the phone at all; from a bedridden lady “gripping a glow-in-the-dark rosary” to a frail body looking for all the world
8 The Null Basis-Being of a Nullity, Or Between Two Nothings: from:
Phenomenologies of the Stranger: Between Hostility and Hospitality
Author(s) CRITCHLEY SIMON
Abstract: At times, reading a classical philosophical text is like watching an ice floe break up during global warming. The compacted cold assurance of a coherent system begins to become liquid and great conceptual pieces break off before your eyes and begin to float free on the sea. To be a reader is to try and either keep one’s footing as the ice breaks up, or to fall in the icy water and drown.
4 Becoming Real—with Style from:
Styles of Piety: Practicing Philosophy after the Death of God
Author(s) Westphal Merold
Abstract: I have not been able to determine from which seminary the Skin Horse has his degree, or at what divinity school he teaches. A thorough check reveals that the American Academy of Religion, for all the great diversity of its offerings, has never devoted a session to his thought. But surely he is one of the leading theologians of our time. He knows that, if the ultimate explanation of our being here is a blind evolutionary process, all it would take to be real would be to show up on the scene (Dasein, perhaps). But if we are made, if
6 How Does Philosophy Become What It Is? from:
Styles of Piety: Practicing Philosophy after the Death of God
Author(s) Statler Matthew
Abstract: According to Aristotle’s
Metaphysics, the most distinctly unfunny thing about philosophy is the principle of noncontradiction. Indeed, we are encouraged as philosophers to respect this most serious and fundamental principle, namely, that “the same thing cannot at the same time and in the same respect both belong and not belong to the same object.”¹ Aristotle certainly refuses to take the matter lightly, providing eight different proofs and maintaining that the principle holds as a law with absolute psychological as well as ontological governance. With regard to the psychological application of the law, Aristotle insists that our thought and our actions
8 Tragic Dislocations: from:
Styles of Piety: Practicing Philosophy after the Death of God
Author(s) Chanter Tina
Abstract: Where to begin? In which time, or what place? With modernity or antiquity? And would there be a difference? Is it certain that there would be anywhere for me to begin beyond the tomb, the cave, the womb that suffocates Antigone? Would it be possible to start from anywhere other than the feminine, rather than the masculine? Or would it be possible to start from anywhere other than the masculine? I will try to remain here in the interval between: between the particular and the universal, the feminine and the masculine, the spirit and the law, the private and the
10 The Prayers and Tears of Jacques Derrida from:
Styles of Piety: Practicing Philosophy after the Death of God
Author(s) Caputo John D.
Abstract: In his notebooks of 1976, Jacques Derrida proposes to himself the task of describing his broken covenant with Judaism in a work that would “leave nothing, if possible, in the dark of what related me to Judaism, alliance [
alliance, covenant; Hebrew:berit] broken in every respect.”¹ For Derrida is Jewish without being Jewish, Jewish sans Judaism, married outside Judaism, hissonsuncircumcised, he an atheist. Of this broken covenant, this breach of analliancethat stretches “throughout thousands of years of Judaism,” he says—now the time has changed to 1989 and this note has been stitched into “Circumfession”—“that’s
14 Laughing, Praying, Weeping before God: from:
Styles of Piety: Practicing Philosophy after the Death of God
Author(s) Caputo John D.
Abstract: I work my way through things by writing. So, whenever I read what others have written about my work, whenever what I have written is read back to me by others—never, of course, without a gloss—it is as if the inert pages of books and journals have come to life and begun to talk back to me (and sometimes even to bite back). It is as if something that is structurally private, written in solitude, my most secret thoughts, meant only for me and God—like Augustine confessing to God in writing, “
cur confitemur deo scienti,” (Why do
4 Becoming Real—with Style from:
Styles of Piety: Practicing Philosophy after the Death of God
Author(s) Westphal Merold
Abstract: I have not been able to determine from which seminary the Skin Horse has his degree, or at what divinity school he teaches. A thorough check reveals that the American Academy of Religion, for all the great diversity of its offerings, has never devoted a session to his thought. But surely he is one of the leading theologians of our time. He knows that, if the ultimate explanation of our being here is a blind evolutionary process, all it would take to be real would be to show up on the scene (Dasein, perhaps). But if we are made, if
6 How Does Philosophy Become What It Is? from:
Styles of Piety: Practicing Philosophy after the Death of God
Author(s) Statler Matthew
Abstract: According to Aristotle’s
Metaphysics, the most distinctly unfunny thing about philosophy is the principle of noncontradiction. Indeed, we are encouraged as philosophers to respect this most serious and fundamental principle, namely, that “the same thing cannot at the same time and in the same respect both belong and not belong to the same object.”¹ Aristotle certainly refuses to take the matter lightly, providing eight different proofs and maintaining that the principle holds as a law with absolute psychological as well as ontological governance. With regard to the psychological application of the law, Aristotle insists that our thought and our actions
8 Tragic Dislocations: from:
Styles of Piety: Practicing Philosophy after the Death of God
Author(s) Chanter Tina
Abstract: Where to begin? In which time, or what place? With modernity or antiquity? And would there be a difference? Is it certain that there would be anywhere for me to begin beyond the tomb, the cave, the womb that suffocates Antigone? Would it be possible to start from anywhere other than the feminine, rather than the masculine? Or would it be possible to start from anywhere other than the masculine? I will try to remain here in the interval between: between the particular and the universal, the feminine and the masculine, the spirit and the law, the private and the
10 The Prayers and Tears of Jacques Derrida from:
Styles of Piety: Practicing Philosophy after the Death of God
Author(s) Caputo John D.
Abstract: In his notebooks of 1976, Jacques Derrida proposes to himself the task of describing his broken covenant with Judaism in a work that would “leave nothing, if possible, in the dark of what related me to Judaism, alliance [
alliance, covenant; Hebrew:berit] broken in every respect.”¹ For Derrida is Jewish without being Jewish, Jewish sans Judaism, married outside Judaism, hissonsuncircumcised, he an atheist. Of this broken covenant, this breach of analliancethat stretches “throughout thousands of years of Judaism,” he says—now the time has changed to 1989 and this note has been stitched into “Circumfession”—“that’s
14 Laughing, Praying, Weeping before God: from:
Styles of Piety: Practicing Philosophy after the Death of God
Author(s) Caputo John D.
Abstract: I work my way through things by writing. So, whenever I read what others have written about my work, whenever what I have written is read back to me by others—never, of course, without a gloss—it is as if the inert pages of books and journals have come to life and begun to talk back to me (and sometimes even to bite back). It is as if something that is structurally private, written in solitude, my most secret thoughts, meant only for me and God—like Augustine confessing to God in writing, “
cur confitemur deo scienti,” (Why do
CHAPTER 1 Breakdown: from:
The Tears of Sovereignty: Perspectives of Power in Renaissance Drama
Abstract: “Theory must move among the events,” Machiavelli writes in a 1503 letter to Piero Soderini. Ten years later, he writes to Soderini again: “… that man is fortunate who harmonizes his procedure with his time, but on the contrary he is not fortunate who in his actions is out of harmony with his time and with the type of its affairs.” The question of time, in relation to sovereignty, is one of Machiavelli’s central preoccupations, and it stayed with him throughout his work. As the philosopher Antonio Negri has shown, time and theory move together in Machiavelli’s thought, particularly in
CHAPTER 5 Return: from:
The Tears of Sovereignty: Perspectives of Power in Renaissance Drama
Abstract: The representational shift, into the allegorical figures of the cipher and the image (
cifras y estampas) staged inLife Is a Dream, appears to provide us with one form of an ending. By the time we arrive at Calderón’s dream play, the effects of sovereignty’s rupture from the King’s body, staged in Shakespeare’sRichard II, could be said to be complete. Sovereignty, inLife Is a Dream, no longer speaks through—at least the human—body at all. Nor does it even seem to require the law, or that the bodies subject to its force signify its presence, as in
CHAPTER 1 Breakdown: from:
The Tears of Sovereignty: Perspectives of Power in Renaissance Drama
Abstract: “Theory must move among the events,” Machiavelli writes in a 1503 letter to Piero Soderini. Ten years later, he writes to Soderini again: “… that man is fortunate who harmonizes his procedure with his time, but on the contrary he is not fortunate who in his actions is out of harmony with his time and with the type of its affairs.” The question of time, in relation to sovereignty, is one of Machiavelli’s central preoccupations, and it stayed with him throughout his work. As the philosopher Antonio Negri has shown, time and theory move together in Machiavelli’s thought, particularly in
CHAPTER 5 Return: from:
The Tears of Sovereignty: Perspectives of Power in Renaissance Drama
Abstract: The representational shift, into the allegorical figures of the cipher and the image (
cifras y estampas) staged inLife Is a Dream, appears to provide us with one form of an ending. By the time we arrive at Calderón’s dream play, the effects of sovereignty’s rupture from the King’s body, staged in Shakespeare’sRichard II, could be said to be complete. Sovereignty, inLife Is a Dream, no longer speaks through—at least the human—body at all. Nor does it even seem to require the law, or that the bodies subject to its force signify its presence, as in
CHAPTER 1 Breakdown: from:
The Tears of Sovereignty: Perspectives of Power in Renaissance Drama
Abstract: “Theory must move among the events,” Machiavelli writes in a 1503 letter to Piero Soderini. Ten years later, he writes to Soderini again: “… that man is fortunate who harmonizes his procedure with his time, but on the contrary he is not fortunate who in his actions is out of harmony with his time and with the type of its affairs.” The question of time, in relation to sovereignty, is one of Machiavelli’s central preoccupations, and it stayed with him throughout his work. As the philosopher Antonio Negri has shown, time and theory move together in Machiavelli’s thought, particularly in
CHAPTER 5 Return: from:
The Tears of Sovereignty: Perspectives of Power in Renaissance Drama
Abstract: The representational shift, into the allegorical figures of the cipher and the image (
cifras y estampas) staged inLife Is a Dream, appears to provide us with one form of an ending. By the time we arrive at Calderón’s dream play, the effects of sovereignty’s rupture from the King’s body, staged in Shakespeare’sRichard II, could be said to be complete. Sovereignty, inLife Is a Dream, no longer speaks through—at least the human—body at all. Nor does it even seem to require the law, or that the bodies subject to its force signify its presence, as in
INTRODUCTION: from:
Labors of Imagination: Aesthetics and Political Economy from Kant to Althusser
Abstract: Contemporary literary criticism is guided by the belief that a human act is best understood by considering the space and time in which it emerges. This idea is powerful in its simplicity, appealing to the notion that more background information is always better. It is less clear whether the assumption of a fundamental connection, if not an outright identity, between origin and purpose is sound for all social or aesthetic phenomena. Can and must the study of
textsproceed by situating them in their cultural and historicalcontexts? If we want to read a nineteenth-century novel, we may take it
THREE On the Poetics and Politics of Voice from:
Labors of Imagination: Aesthetics and Political Economy from Kant to Althusser
Abstract: The vision of the self that emerges from Kleist’s reading of Kantian ethics differs sharply from the figure of specular self-determination generally associated with Idealist thought. In forcing us to reconsider the assumption that language can be a medium of rational activity, Kleist seems to part company from those inheritors of Kant who accord ultimate primacy to the authority of reason. At the same time, one could argue that Kleist shares with both Kant and the Idealists a sense of the volatile power of literary language and a more general concern with the historical dimensions of artistic creation. It is
FOUR Economics Beyond Interest from:
Labors of Imagination: Aesthetics and Political Economy from Kant to Althusser
Abstract: The last fifteen years have seen an explosion of interest in Adam Smith. In addition to the fact that the success of capitalism is often celebrated in his name, his oeuvre is increasingly heralded as the key to understanding the relations between politics, aesthetics, and economics in the eighteenth century. As research on Smith has moved beyond
The Wealth of NationsandThe Theory of Moral Sentimentsto include his writings on jurisprudence, belles lettres, and even astronomy, it is often suggested that his work is a unique example of an interdisciplinary thought attentive to the demands of both metaphysics
1. Chaucer’s and Spenser’s Reflexive Narrators from:
Reading the Allegorical Intertext: Chaucer, Spenser, Shakespeare, Milton
Abstract: Reports of the “death of the author” in the closing decades of the twentieth century nowadays appear to have been greatly exaggerated. His (sometimes her) presumed demise, to be sure, was strategically useful, not merely in renewing the formalist critique of the intentional fallacy, but also in laying to rest the naive assumption of a unified, autonomous self essentially apart from history and in full control of the unconscious. Arguably, however, it was also misleading and even dangerous, since it tended to trivialize agency, accountability, and any responsibility to history that really matters. In its stead, I have preferred to
10. The Antiquities of Fairyland and Ireland from:
Reading the Allegorical Intertext: Chaucer, Spenser, Shakespeare, Milton
Abstract: In our century the words
antiqueandantiquitynormally have a resonance different from what they had for late sixteenth-century readers of Spenser’sFaerie Queene. For us, these words suggest not only age but also antiquation. They signal both the distance of time and that of obsolescence: while something “antique” might be valuable or quaint or interesting, it is not essentially practical or even very useful. This sense of antiquation, which registers a lack of functional relevance, is not unknown to the late sixteenth century or to Spenser, but it is novel and rare rather than usual and standard. It
1. Chaucer’s and Spenser’s Reflexive Narrators from:
Reading the Allegorical Intertext: Chaucer, Spenser, Shakespeare, Milton
Abstract: Reports of the “death of the author” in the closing decades of the twentieth century nowadays appear to have been greatly exaggerated. His (sometimes her) presumed demise, to be sure, was strategically useful, not merely in renewing the formalist critique of the intentional fallacy, but also in laying to rest the naive assumption of a unified, autonomous self essentially apart from history and in full control of the unconscious. Arguably, however, it was also misleading and even dangerous, since it tended to trivialize agency, accountability, and any responsibility to history that really matters. In its stead, I have preferred to
10. The Antiquities of Fairyland and Ireland from:
Reading the Allegorical Intertext: Chaucer, Spenser, Shakespeare, Milton
Abstract: In our century the words
antiqueandantiquitynormally have a resonance different from what they had for late sixteenth-century readers of Spenser’sFaerie Queene. For us, these words suggest not only age but also antiquation. They signal both the distance of time and that of obsolescence: while something “antique” might be valuable or quaint or interesting, it is not essentially practical or even very useful. This sense of antiquation, which registers a lack of functional relevance, is not unknown to the late sixteenth century or to Spenser, but it is novel and rare rather than usual and standard. It
Book Title: Written Voices, Spoken Signs-Tradition, Performance, and the Epic Text
Publisher: Harvard University Press
Author(s): KAHANE AHUVIA
Abstract: These innovative essays by leading scholars of Homer, oral poetics, and epic invite us to rethink some key concepts for an understanding of traditional epic poetry. Egbert Bakker examines the epic performer's use of time and tense in recounting a past that is alive. Tackling the question of full-length performance of the monumental
Iliad, Andrew Ford considers the extent to which the work was perceived as a coherent whole in the archaic age. John Miles Foley addresses questions about spoken signs and the process of reference in epic discourse, and Ahuvia Kahane studies rhythm as a semantic factor in the Homeric performance. Richard Martin suggests a new range of performance functions for the Homeric simile. And Gregory Nagy establishes the importance of one feature of epic language, the ellipsis. These six essays centered on Homer engage with fundamental issues that are addressed by three essays primarily concerned with medieval epic: those by Franz Bäuml on the concept of fact; by Wulf Oesterreicher on types of orality; and by Ursula Schaefer on written and spoken media. In their Introduction the editors highlight the underlying approach and viewpoints of this collaborative volume.Reviews of this book:"Despite its wide range of topics and approaches, the volume has a clear thematic focus. All contributors seek to leave behind the more formal concerns of past generations of scholars and aim instead at an understanding of orality as that which is (conceptually or actually) close, immediate, or performed. In their joint search for the new picture, classicists, linguists, and medievalists discover a range of different 'oralities'."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0fd2
CHAPTER 4 The Inland Ship: from:
Written Voices, Spoken Signs
Abstract: The time seems to be passing when the Parry-Lord theory that Homer’s epics were composed in oral performances was thought to be incompatible with the high artistic quality of our
Iliadand Odyssey. Recent studies of oral formulaic language, as represented elsewhere in this volume, have shown it to be capable of many subtly expressive effects and structural patternings.¹ But if we are approaching a time when it will make little difference whether the Homeric poems were composed orally or not (Martin 1989: 1), another, and older, question becomes more pressing: how could such large-scale poems as the Homeric epics
CHAPTER 5 Hexameter Progression and the Homeric Hero’s Solitary State from:
Written Voices, Spoken Signs
Author(s) KAHANE AHUVIA
Abstract: The poetry of Homer as we have it today is a highly
textualizedverbal artifact. In other words, we come into immediate contact with theIliadandOdysseyas fixed sets of graphic symbols that are independent of any particular performance event, rather than as time-bound sequences of sounds that are unique to their performance context. Many aspects of thistextare indeed unchanging regardless of whether we speak out, or hear the poems, or read them silently. At the same time, we are increasingly aware of what we might call thenontextualaspects of Homer, that is, of the
6 “Maybe It’s Time for a Little History Lesson Here”: from:
Drawing New Color Lines
Author(s) Ford Stacilee
Abstract: Over the past several years many undergraduate students have come to rely more readily on various graphic narrative-type representations of history. The “cartoonification” of multiple interpretations of the past has become a way for them to distill large amounts of information into “chewable bites” as well as to help them remember facts and ideas that they might forget without a visual reminder of meanings. Texts ranging from
America: A Cartoon History,Addicted to War: Why the U.S. Can’t Kick Militarism, andUnderstanding Postfeminism(and a host of general histories focusing on various events and time periods) are used not only
15 Conveying New Material Realities: from:
Drawing New Color Lines
Author(s) Zhao Shan Mu
Abstract: In the 2011 film
The Green Hornet, starring Taiwanese pop star Jay Chou as Kato, there is a short scene depicting Kato’s apartment as he watches the television. The décor of his apartment is clearly visible: a Chinese decorative knot, ink brush calligraphy, and a miniature terracotta warrior. By contrast, in the award winning graphic novelAmerican Born Chineseby Gene Luen Yang, the narrative streams set in contemporary times feature very little décor that would qualify as “Chinese” in the same way; instead, it features items such as Transformers toys and bubble tea. Instead of reflecting the everyday practices
6 “Maybe It’s Time for a Little History Lesson Here”: from:
Drawing New Color Lines
Author(s) Ford Stacilee
Abstract: Over the past several years many undergraduate students have come to rely more readily on various graphic narrative-type representations of history. The “cartoonification” of multiple interpretations of the past has become a way for them to distill large amounts of information into “chewable bites” as well as to help them remember facts and ideas that they might forget without a visual reminder of meanings. Texts ranging from
America: A Cartoon History,Addicted to War: Why the U.S. Can’t Kick Militarism, andUnderstanding Postfeminism(and a host of general histories focusing on various events and time periods) are used not only
15 Conveying New Material Realities: from:
Drawing New Color Lines
Author(s) Zhao Shan Mu
Abstract: In the 2011 film
The Green Hornet, starring Taiwanese pop star Jay Chou as Kato, there is a short scene depicting Kato’s apartment as he watches the television. The décor of his apartment is clearly visible: a Chinese decorative knot, ink brush calligraphy, and a miniature terracotta warrior. By contrast, in the award winning graphic novelAmerican Born Chineseby Gene Luen Yang, the narrative streams set in contemporary times feature very little décor that would qualify as “Chinese” in the same way; instead, it features items such as Transformers toys and bubble tea. Instead of reflecting the everyday practices
Chapter One MUSIC’S VOICES from:
Unsung Voices: Opera and Musical Narrative in the Nineteenth Century
Abstract: Nilakantha(avec beaucoup de sentiment):
Chapter Two WHAT THE SORCERER SAID from:
Unsung Voices: Opera and Musical Narrative in the Nineteenth Century
Abstract: Paul Dukas’s symphonic scherzo
L’apprenti sorcier(The Sorcerer’s Apprentice, 1893) is an eventful work—so lively, in fact, that it rattles the cage constructed of assumptions about musical narration. I shall argue thatThe Sorcerer’s Apprenticeallows a single instance of narrating. As a way into an interpretation of that sound, however, we should remember another moment, a strange passage at the midpoint of the piece, at which its entire musical progress comes to a full stop. There is a silence, and the piece begins to regenerate itself, by repeating again and again, far too many times, first a note,
Chapter Three CHERUBINO UNCOVERED: from:
Unsung Voices: Opera and Musical Narrative in the Nineteenth Century
Abstract: Is operatic narration in fact an interlude of tedium, and, as such, a time during which one’s thoughts are free to depart elsewhere? If so, perhaps this is not
Chapter Four MAHLER’S DEAFNESS: from:
Unsung Voices: Opera and Musical Narrative in the Nineteenth Century
Abstract: In opera, the characters pacing the stage often suffer from deafness; they do not
hearthe music that is the ambient fluid of their music-drowned world. This is one of the genre’s most fundamental illusions: we see before us something whose fantastic aspect is obvious, since the scenes we witness pass to music. At the same time, however, opera stages recognizably human situations, and these possess an inherent “realism” that demands a special and complex understanding of the music we hear. We must generally assume, in short, that this music is not produced by or within the stage-world, but emanates
Book Title: Edgar Allen Poe: A Phenomenological View- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): HALLIBURTON DAVID
Abstract: The book begins with a methodological chapter that sets out the assumptions and procedures of the approach. This is followed by analyses of Poe's major works, exploring such special problems as Poe's treatment of the material world, including technology; the interrelation of body and consciousness; poetic voice; attitudes toward women; and the will to affirmation, plenitude, and unity. The center of interest is neither Poe's biography nor environment but always the meaning of Poe's words. Because these works are shaped by a single imagination and because they are experienced in time, as a process, each work has its own "way of going." The aim of the interpretation is to find this way and go along with it; to live each work dynamically, as it "happens," while tracing its interaction with other works.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x1373
1 FOREWORD from:
Edgar Allen Poe: A Phenomenological View
Abstract: The reader will have gathered, from the epigraphs that head this study, that its orientation is mainly European and phenomenological. The study derives, however, from American and traditional sources as well, and is therefore, in another sense, a work of synthesis. Each point deserves to be amplified, and the best way to do this, it seems to me, is to take them up one at a time. I have accordingly divided the preliminary section of the book into two parts: a methodological introduction, which clarifies phenomenological assumptions and procedures, and this foreword, which will attempt to explain the background of
5 THE DIALOGUES AND EUREKA from:
Edgar Allen Poe: A Phenomenological View
Abstract: In a space beyond earthly space, in a time beyond earthly time, two beings speak. One is already an inhabitant of this transcendent realm of novelty called Aidenn (IV, 2, 8); the other has just arrived. The dialogue starts at this point because the moment initiates, literally, a new beginning. If the tales take place on this side of the gulf beyond, the “metaphysical dialogues,” as Ransome aptly terms them, take place on the other side—in a site that is beyond the gulf beyond.¹
Book Title: Edgar Allen Poe: A Phenomenological View- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): HALLIBURTON DAVID
Abstract: The book begins with a methodological chapter that sets out the assumptions and procedures of the approach. This is followed by analyses of Poe's major works, exploring such special problems as Poe's treatment of the material world, including technology; the interrelation of body and consciousness; poetic voice; attitudes toward women; and the will to affirmation, plenitude, and unity. The center of interest is neither Poe's biography nor environment but always the meaning of Poe's words. Because these works are shaped by a single imagination and because they are experienced in time, as a process, each work has its own "way of going." The aim of the interpretation is to find this way and go along with it; to live each work dynamically, as it "happens," while tracing its interaction with other works.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x1373
1 FOREWORD from:
Edgar Allen Poe: A Phenomenological View
Abstract: The reader will have gathered, from the epigraphs that head this study, that its orientation is mainly European and phenomenological. The study derives, however, from American and traditional sources as well, and is therefore, in another sense, a work of synthesis. Each point deserves to be amplified, and the best way to do this, it seems to me, is to take them up one at a time. I have accordingly divided the preliminary section of the book into two parts: a methodological introduction, which clarifies phenomenological assumptions and procedures, and this foreword, which will attempt to explain the background of
5 THE DIALOGUES AND EUREKA from:
Edgar Allen Poe: A Phenomenological View
Abstract: In a space beyond earthly space, in a time beyond earthly time, two beings speak. One is already an inhabitant of this transcendent realm of novelty called Aidenn (IV, 2, 8); the other has just arrived. The dialogue starts at this point because the moment initiates, literally, a new beginning. If the tales take place on this side of the gulf beyond, the “metaphysical dialogues,” as Ransome aptly terms them, take place on the other side—in a site that is beyond the gulf beyond.¹
Jaspers’ Life and Writings from:
Karl Jaspers: An Introduction to His Philosophy
Abstract: His father, who descended from many generations of farmers and merchants, studied law and, after serving for some years as high constable of the district, became director of a bank. His mother came from a family of farmers that had occupied a nearby region for hundreds of years. Here, near the North Sea, he spent his boyhood with his parents—and at times
Jaspers’ Life and Writings from:
Karl Jaspers: An Introduction to His Philosophy
Abstract: His father, who descended from many generations of farmers and merchants, studied law and, after serving for some years as high constable of the district, became director of a bank. His mother came from a family of farmers that had occupied a nearby region for hundreds of years. Here, near the North Sea, he spent his boyhood with his parents—and at times
Chapter 1 The Problem: from:
Dostoevsky and the Novel
Abstract: Russia is always being discovered, or at least since the sixteenth century, when disputes arose in Europe as to whether von Herberstein or Sir Richard Chancellor could claim the honor of what Hakluyt was to call “the strange and wonderful discovery of Russia.” For Milton in the seventeenth century and Voltaire in the eighteenth, Russia was still resistant to symmetrical English or French models of time and space, linear history, and binary (occident/orient) geography. One of the reasons Westerners still find it difficult to classify Russia is that the Russians themselves have never been quite sure where and when they
Chapter 5 The Biography of Legion: from:
Dostoevsky and the Novel
Abstract: The Idiotends in a Swiss asylum;The Possessed,Dostoevsky’s next novel, concludes with two notes from that already dead citizen of the canton of Uri, Nicholas Stavrogin. Silence of madness, silence of suicide—so end novels that take their shape from characters unable to find coherent stories for themselves. The discontinuity of identity is in both cases dramatized as a temporal rupture, but a different kind of cutoff in time defines the conditions of each dilemma.
Chapter 6 The Either/Or of Duels and Dreams: from:
Dostoevsky and the Novel
Abstract: A Gentle Creaturewould at first glance appear to be stitched together from all the most frequently recurring Dostoevskian clichés. It is told in the first person by a man keeping vigil beside the body of his dead wife. She is to be buried in the morning, but in the meantime the narrator meditates on the meaning of her death. He is a former officer, who, having refused to fight a duel, leaves the army in disgrace, vowing revenge on society. A self-confessed dreamer, he becomes a pawnbroker sustained by the vision of acquiring thirty thousand rubles so that he
Introduction from:
New Perspectives in German Literary Criticism: A Collection of Essays
Author(s) LANCE VICTOR
Abstract: The essays contained in this volume are contributions to that intense and self-conscious assessment of the perspectives, resources, and terms by which contemporary literary criticism has sought to justify its validity, its function, and its historical legitimacy. If literature itself seems in our time to have lost its innocence, if neither its subjective nor its objective character is self-evident but demands of its readers a sharp awareness of its modality, it has by this challenge called forth a breathtaking variety of systems of critical discourse; indeed, it has created a pre-eminence of theoretical consciousness that may tend, at times, to
Art and Philosophy of Art Today: from:
New Perspectives in German Literary Criticism: A Collection of Essays
Author(s) HENRICH DIETER
Abstract: At the present time there is only a loose connection between the philosophical discipline of esthetics and efforts to diagnose the condition of the arts today. The assumption would hardly be disputed that art and philosophical theory move forward in such a way as to permit their situation of the moment to be reciprocally illustrated and interpreted; nevertheless, scarcely any effort has been made to test the circumference and limits of this presupposition.
Syntax and Obscurity in Poetry: from:
New Perspectives in German Literary Criticism: A Collection of Essays
Author(s) STEMPEL WOLF-DIETER
Abstract: “Guerre à la rhétorique et paix à la syntaxe!” With this warcry Victor Hugo declared, in his oft-quoted Réponse
á un acte d’accusation(1854), donning the mantle of a romantic Malherbe (“Alors . . . je vins . . .”) that he had brought about a “quatre-vingt-treize” in French literature. Concerning the nature of his campaign against rhetoric, Hugo tells us two things: at his very appearance, he says, all metaphors fled in terror to hide beneath the robes of the “Academie, aieule et douairiere”; but at the same time he lets us know, as so often in his lyrical
Coleridge, Baudelaire, and Modernist Poetics from:
New Perspectives in German Literary Criticism: A Collection of Essays
Author(s) ABRAMS M. H.
Abstract: I have been asked to say something about Coleridge, both as a representative Romantic critic of poetry and in relation to Symbolist and Modernist theories of poetry. An intimidating assignment! Yet clearly pertinent to the topic of this conference,* and timely as well. Although on the continent Coleridge as a critic has been important mainly to scholars, in England and America he has played not only a prominent, but a double, role, as both villain and hero of the major literary movements of the last half-century. By participating in post-Kantian intellectual currents Coleridge, more than any English writer of his
On the Importance of the Theory of the Unconscious for a Theory of No Longer Fine Art from:
New Perspectives in German Literary Criticism: A Collection of Essays
Author(s) MARQUARD ODO
Abstract: 1. The following is an obituary to the living: Art, says Hegel in his lecture on esthetics, is “nach der Seite ihrer hochsten Bestimmung fur uns ein Vergangenes” (on the side of its highest definition something past for us).¹ Perhaps Hegel was right; if so, then the time is ripe—indeed, overripe—for acceptance of the thesis that art and its theory, known since 1750 as “esthetics,” from now on has no place in philosophy. “Nach der Seite ihrer hochsten Bestimmung,” esthetics are a thing of the past. Undoubtedly—even from an unHegelian point of view—Hegel was right: for
I The Historical Turn in Contemporary Philosophy from:
Interpreting Modern Philosophy
Abstract: In every creative field, but perhaps especially in philosophy, we tend to use the term “contemporary” not only in a eulogistic way but also as expressing our relief at escaping the burden of the past. The term often conveys the sense of crossing a territorial border and cutting off a bridge behind ourselves, a bridge that would have permitted the great dead philosophers to count for too much in our present inquiries. We sometimes feel that their presence would be overbearing and would inhibit our own efforts at innovation and argument. Not a historical sense of perspective but a liberation
III The Art of Historical Questioning from:
Interpreting Modern Philosophy
Abstract: Anyone working in a historical discipline experiences within himself, at certain times, a sympathetic reverberation of Stephen Dedalus’s cry that history is a nightmare from which he must awake. This feeling of suffocation steals over the philosopher when he attends to the long tradition of texts and studies in his field. Then, the history of philosophy seems to be an externally imposed and pressing structure, controlled entirely by lines of investigation laid out in the far distant past and extending into one’s present activity only in order to cramp and discourage the creative mind. This is indeed a nightmarish view
IV The Interpreting Present from:
Interpreting Modern Philosophy
Abstract: We sometimes imagine the history of philosophy as being a Janus-faced colossus.¹ One of its legs is firmly planted in times past and the other in the present, just as one face is pointed resolutely toward the sources and the other toward contemporary discussion. This metaphor serves a good purpose in suggesting the wide diversity of materials and comparative questions which fall within the historian’s responsibility. But it blurs over the ground of their “interface” or communicative union, and hence it cannot ward off the tendency to introduce a neat split, down the middle, between man’s historical interests looking to
I The Historical Turn in Contemporary Philosophy from:
Interpreting Modern Philosophy
Abstract: In every creative field, but perhaps especially in philosophy, we tend to use the term “contemporary” not only in a eulogistic way but also as expressing our relief at escaping the burden of the past. The term often conveys the sense of crossing a territorial border and cutting off a bridge behind ourselves, a bridge that would have permitted the great dead philosophers to count for too much in our present inquiries. We sometimes feel that their presence would be overbearing and would inhibit our own efforts at innovation and argument. Not a historical sense of perspective but a liberation
III The Art of Historical Questioning from:
Interpreting Modern Philosophy
Abstract: Anyone working in a historical discipline experiences within himself, at certain times, a sympathetic reverberation of Stephen Dedalus’s cry that history is a nightmare from which he must awake. This feeling of suffocation steals over the philosopher when he attends to the long tradition of texts and studies in his field. Then, the history of philosophy seems to be an externally imposed and pressing structure, controlled entirely by lines of investigation laid out in the far distant past and extending into one’s present activity only in order to cramp and discourage the creative mind. This is indeed a nightmarish view
IV The Interpreting Present from:
Interpreting Modern Philosophy
Abstract: We sometimes imagine the history of philosophy as being a Janus-faced colossus.¹ One of its legs is firmly planted in times past and the other in the present, just as one face is pointed resolutely toward the sources and the other toward contemporary discussion. This metaphor serves a good purpose in suggesting the wide diversity of materials and comparative questions which fall within the historian’s responsibility. But it blurs over the ground of their “interface” or communicative union, and hence it cannot ward off the tendency to introduce a neat split, down the middle, between man’s historical interests looking to
CHAPTER 8 America as “Eventing” from:
Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: Before the sense of human presence and its mystery, the continent evaporates, yet also coalesces, regroups into places and times felt, seen, realized—the land itself a presence, a mystery. Faulkner’s imaginative relation to space is much like that of the Hopi Indians defined by Benjamin Lee Whorf in his essay “Time, Space, and Language.” To the Hopis reality is viewed in terms of events (or “eventing”), both objective and subjective. They know no imaginary space, only the actuality, in contrast with the space-concepts of the “English” mind.
CHAPTER 16 Bottom Being from:
Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: The man of character cannot fail at anything he does since he has chosen to fulfill his natural birthright of joy. “I am
Defeatedall the time,” Emerson assures himself in his journal of 1842, “yet to Victory I am born” (VIII, 228). Life is a battle that mankind is meant to win, Thoreau writes on March 21, 1853. “Despair and postponement are cowardice and defeat. Men were born to succeed, not to fail.” Of course, various moods may run through the same man, as Thoreau notes on November 4, 1851. He may contain “dark and muddy pools,” but higher
CHAPTER 8 America as “Eventing” from:
Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: Before the sense of human presence and its mystery, the continent evaporates, yet also coalesces, regroups into places and times felt, seen, realized—the land itself a presence, a mystery. Faulkner’s imaginative relation to space is much like that of the Hopi Indians defined by Benjamin Lee Whorf in his essay “Time, Space, and Language.” To the Hopis reality is viewed in terms of events (or “eventing”), both objective and subjective. They know no imaginary space, only the actuality, in contrast with the space-concepts of the “English” mind.
CHAPTER 16 Bottom Being from:
Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: The man of character cannot fail at anything he does since he has chosen to fulfill his natural birthright of joy. “I am
Defeatedall the time,” Emerson assures himself in his journal of 1842, “yet to Victory I am born” (VIII, 228). Life is a battle that mankind is meant to win, Thoreau writes on March 21, 1853. “Despair and postponement are cowardice and defeat. Men were born to succeed, not to fail.” Of course, various moods may run through the same man, as Thoreau notes on November 4, 1851. He may contain “dark and muddy pools,” but higher
CHAPTER 8 America as “Eventing” from:
Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: Before the sense of human presence and its mystery, the continent evaporates, yet also coalesces, regroups into places and times felt, seen, realized—the land itself a presence, a mystery. Faulkner’s imaginative relation to space is much like that of the Hopi Indians defined by Benjamin Lee Whorf in his essay “Time, Space, and Language.” To the Hopis reality is viewed in terms of events (or “eventing”), both objective and subjective. They know no imaginary space, only the actuality, in contrast with the space-concepts of the “English” mind.
CHAPTER 16 Bottom Being from:
Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: The man of character cannot fail at anything he does since he has chosen to fulfill his natural birthright of joy. “I am
Defeatedall the time,” Emerson assures himself in his journal of 1842, “yet to Victory I am born” (VIII, 228). Life is a battle that mankind is meant to win, Thoreau writes on March 21, 1853. “Despair and postponement are cowardice and defeat. Men were born to succeed, not to fail.” Of course, various moods may run through the same man, as Thoreau notes on November 4, 1851. He may contain “dark and muddy pools,” but higher
CHAPTER 8 America as “Eventing” from:
Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: Before the sense of human presence and its mystery, the continent evaporates, yet also coalesces, regroups into places and times felt, seen, realized—the land itself a presence, a mystery. Faulkner’s imaginative relation to space is much like that of the Hopi Indians defined by Benjamin Lee Whorf in his essay “Time, Space, and Language.” To the Hopis reality is viewed in terms of events (or “eventing”), both objective and subjective. They know no imaginary space, only the actuality, in contrast with the space-concepts of the “English” mind.
CHAPTER 16 Bottom Being from:
Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: The man of character cannot fail at anything he does since he has chosen to fulfill his natural birthright of joy. “I am
Defeatedall the time,” Emerson assures himself in his journal of 1842, “yet to Victory I am born” (VIII, 228). Life is a battle that mankind is meant to win, Thoreau writes on March 21, 1853. “Despair and postponement are cowardice and defeat. Men were born to succeed, not to fail.” Of course, various moods may run through the same man, as Thoreau notes on November 4, 1851. He may contain “dark and muddy pools,” but higher
CHAPTER 8 America as “Eventing” from:
Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: Before the sense of human presence and its mystery, the continent evaporates, yet also coalesces, regroups into places and times felt, seen, realized—the land itself a presence, a mystery. Faulkner’s imaginative relation to space is much like that of the Hopi Indians defined by Benjamin Lee Whorf in his essay “Time, Space, and Language.” To the Hopis reality is viewed in terms of events (or “eventing”), both objective and subjective. They know no imaginary space, only the actuality, in contrast with the space-concepts of the “English” mind.
CHAPTER 16 Bottom Being from:
Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: The man of character cannot fail at anything he does since he has chosen to fulfill his natural birthright of joy. “I am
Defeatedall the time,” Emerson assures himself in his journal of 1842, “yet to Victory I am born” (VIII, 228). Life is a battle that mankind is meant to win, Thoreau writes on March 21, 1853. “Despair and postponement are cowardice and defeat. Men were born to succeed, not to fail.” Of course, various moods may run through the same man, as Thoreau notes on November 4, 1851. He may contain “dark and muddy pools,” but higher
CHAPTER 8 America as “Eventing” from:
Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: Before the sense of human presence and its mystery, the continent evaporates, yet also coalesces, regroups into places and times felt, seen, realized—the land itself a presence, a mystery. Faulkner’s imaginative relation to space is much like that of the Hopi Indians defined by Benjamin Lee Whorf in his essay “Time, Space, and Language.” To the Hopis reality is viewed in terms of events (or “eventing”), both objective and subjective. They know no imaginary space, only the actuality, in contrast with the space-concepts of the “English” mind.
CHAPTER 16 Bottom Being from:
Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: The man of character cannot fail at anything he does since he has chosen to fulfill his natural birthright of joy. “I am
Defeatedall the time,” Emerson assures himself in his journal of 1842, “yet to Victory I am born” (VIII, 228). Life is a battle that mankind is meant to win, Thoreau writes on March 21, 1853. “Despair and postponement are cowardice and defeat. Men were born to succeed, not to fail.” Of course, various moods may run through the same man, as Thoreau notes on November 4, 1851. He may contain “dark and muddy pools,” but higher
CHAPTER 8 America as “Eventing” from:
Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: Before the sense of human presence and its mystery, the continent evaporates, yet also coalesces, regroups into places and times felt, seen, realized—the land itself a presence, a mystery. Faulkner’s imaginative relation to space is much like that of the Hopi Indians defined by Benjamin Lee Whorf in his essay “Time, Space, and Language.” To the Hopis reality is viewed in terms of events (or “eventing”), both objective and subjective. They know no imaginary space, only the actuality, in contrast with the space-concepts of the “English” mind.
CHAPTER 16 Bottom Being from:
Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: The man of character cannot fail at anything he does since he has chosen to fulfill his natural birthright of joy. “I am
Defeatedall the time,” Emerson assures himself in his journal of 1842, “yet to Victory I am born” (VIII, 228). Life is a battle that mankind is meant to win, Thoreau writes on March 21, 1853. “Despair and postponement are cowardice and defeat. Men were born to succeed, not to fail.” Of course, various moods may run through the same man, as Thoreau notes on November 4, 1851. He may contain “dark and muddy pools,” but higher
CHAPTER 8 America as “Eventing” from:
Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: Before the sense of human presence and its mystery, the continent evaporates, yet also coalesces, regroups into places and times felt, seen, realized—the land itself a presence, a mystery. Faulkner’s imaginative relation to space is much like that of the Hopi Indians defined by Benjamin Lee Whorf in his essay “Time, Space, and Language.” To the Hopis reality is viewed in terms of events (or “eventing”), both objective and subjective. They know no imaginary space, only the actuality, in contrast with the space-concepts of the “English” mind.
CHAPTER 16 Bottom Being from:
Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: The man of character cannot fail at anything he does since he has chosen to fulfill his natural birthright of joy. “I am
Defeatedall the time,” Emerson assures himself in his journal of 1842, “yet to Victory I am born” (VIII, 228). Life is a battle that mankind is meant to win, Thoreau writes on March 21, 1853. “Despair and postponement are cowardice and defeat. Men were born to succeed, not to fail.” Of course, various moods may run through the same man, as Thoreau notes on November 4, 1851. He may contain “dark and muddy pools,” but higher
9 Moral Equivalents from:
Value and Values
Author(s) Higgins Kathleen M.
Abstract: In his essay “The Moral Equivalent of War” (1910), William James observes that despite its obvious destructiveness, war has long had its defenders, who stress the important role that war time military service has traditionally served in developing discipline, toughness, and character in young men. Although himself motivated by the desire for a peaceful world, James concedes that “militarism is the great preserver of our ideals of hardihood, and human life with no use for hardihood would be contemptible.”¹ Given the harms that come from war, he argues that we need a “moral equivalent” of war, a nonviolent alternative to
13 The Responsible Society as Social Harmony: from:
Value and Values
Author(s) Smid Robert
Abstract: The question of what would constitute a “Confucian” economics for the twenty-first century is a decidedly unsettled one. Drawing back to the places and times in which the Confucian tradition held significant sway over such questions, it is fair to say that it resulted in nothing much like the two economic systems—communism and capitalism—that have dominated the twentieth century (any minor similarities notwithstanding). At the same time, however, the powerful influence of these two systems requires that any consideration of new economic directions, Confucian or otherwise, proceed in conversation with at least one—or, ideally, both—of these
20 Three-Level Eco-Humanism in Japanese Confucianism: from:
Value and Values
Author(s) Yamauchi T.
Abstract: The scholars quoted here are referring to Edo-period Japan (1603–1867), a time when people valued and enriched the natural environment, and, thereby, a green, sustainable society nourished about 30 million people in small island communities. In today’s Japan a so-called scientific technologic culture has become bloated and the cause of deterioration of the natural environment. The secret of Edo Japan’s success in achieving and maintaining sustainability for more than three hundred years is, I think, in its environmental policies. Those policies were based on an
eco-holistic environmental ethics,which had its source in Japanese Confucianism. There have been attempts
24 What Is It Like to Be a Moral Being? from:
Value and Values
Author(s) Chatterjee Amita
Abstract: I am sleeping soundly. I wake up, open my eyes, and find myself in a big building with innumerable rooms set up with gaming tables. I cannot leave this building without playing and winning some of the games, but all the games are unknown to me. I approach one of the tables where people are already playing. I watch the players and try to guess the rules. After a time, I join the play, making very tentative moves. Other players at the table are also watchful. They are wary because they do not know me or the level of my
Book Title: Gender and Nation in Meiji Japan-Modernity, Loss, and the Doing of History
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): Karlin Jason G.
Abstract: Gender and Nation in Meiji Japan is a historical analysis of the discourses of nostalgia in late nineteenth- and early twentieth-century Japan. Through an analysis of the experience of rapid social change in Japan’s modernization, it argues that fads (ryūkō) and the desires they express are central to understanding Japanese modernity, conceptions of gender, and discourses of nationalism. In doing so, the author uncovers the myth of eternal return that lurks below the surface of Japanese history as an expression of the desire to find meaning amid the chaos and alienation of modern times. The Meiji period (1868–1912) was one of rapid change that hastened the process of forgetting: The state’s aggressive program of modernization required the repression of history and memory. However, repression merely produced new forms of desire seeking a return to the past, with the result that competing or alternative conceptions of the nation haunted the history of modern Japan. Rooted in the belief that the nation was a natural and organic entity that predated the rational, modern state, such conceptions often were responses to modernity that envisioned the nation in opposition to the modern state. What these visions of the nation shared was the ironic desire to overcome the modern condition by seeking the timeless past. While the condition of their repression was often linked to the modernizing policies of the Meiji state, the means for imagining the nation in opposition to the state required the construction of new symbols that claimed the authority of history and appealed to a rearticulated tradition. Through the idiom of gender and nation, new reified representations of continuity, timelessness, and history were fashioned to compensate for the unmooring of inherited practices from the shared locales of everyday life. This book examines the intellectual, social, and cultural factors that contributed to the rapid spread of Western tastes and styles, along with the backlash against Westernization that was expressed as a longing for the past. By focusing on the expressions of these desires in popular culture and media texts, it reveals how the conflation of mother, countryside, everyday life, and history structured representations to naturalize ideologies of gender and nationalism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x1k9w
INTRODUCTION from:
Gender and Nation in Meiji Japan
Abstract: After an initial period of euphoria, the establishment of the Meiji state in 1868 gave way to the sentiment that the revolution was a betrayal. At the root of this sense of betrayal was the contradiction between the elitism of the Meiji oligarchy and the expectation of popular political participation. E. H. Norman described the Meiji Restoration as an “incomplete revolution” owing to the persistence of “feudal remnants” that enabled the ruling class to manipulate the masses through traditional appeals.¹ In general, the susceptibility of the masses to manipulation by the state has been central to interpretations of the failure
CHAPTER 3 The Aestheticization of Everyday Life: from:
Gender and Nation in Meiji Japan
Abstract: The Meiji period was a time of intense social and cultural transformation. The acceleration of history and endless renewal of fashion created a sense of disjuncture and difference that allowed Meiji Japan to imagine itself as the victim of a deformative process of cultural loss and foreign invasion. Fashion is above all else a ritual of forgetting that celebrates novelty and obliviousness to the past.¹ Pierre Nora argues that a memorial consciousness emerges under just such conditions wherein society becomes deeply absorbed in its own transformation and renewal. According to Nora, this condition is “one that inherently values the new
CONCLUSION from:
Gender and Nation in Meiji Japan
Abstract: I began this book by considering how the Meiji Restoration had nurtured the sentiment that the revolution was incomplete. The calls to action that adhered around the notion of the “incomplete Restoration” in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries were (re)productive of the myth of the Meiji Restoration. For both the state and its critics, revolutionary action was legitimized by invoking the Restoration: the state pursued the modernization of all aspects of social life, denouncing customs and practices incompatible with its ideology of progress as backward and barbarous, while its opponents condemned the state for its decadence and superficiality arising from
1 Origins of Protestantism and Tonghak in Late Chosŏn Korea from:
Building a Heaven on Earth
Abstract: Before being executed in 1864, Ch’oe Che-u, the founder of Tonghak, described the state of people’s affairs in Korea by declaring that “people’s minds were all confused and they did not know what to do.”¹ Many Koreans at that time attributed their “confused” conditions to the weakening of the Confucian political order. In large part, the breakdown of the Confucian order stemmed from the gradual decline of the Chosŏn state (1392–1910) during the nineteenth century, a period when the government showed signs of failing to live up to its role as the benevolent Confucian leader that provided for the
All That “Below-the-Surface Stuff”: from:
The Worlds of Carol Shields
Author(s) Howells Coral Ann
Abstract: In her last interview with Eleanor Wachtel in 2002 Carol Shields spoke about the double dynamic of her life, about how “we have to use the time we’ve got to . . . get some words on paper and have lots of conversations with lots of people. I think that’s very important—connecting and having conversations, that’s a huge part of my life. Being interested” (Wachtel 179). Carol talks about language, speech, and writing in the same breath: as a writer she’s interested “in the way the language comes out and goes onto the page, how you can give it
Bio-Critical Afterlives: from:
The Worlds of Carol Shields
Author(s) Sugars Cynthia
Abstract: Some time in the early 1970s, Carol Shields, then a master of arts student at the University of Ottawa, sat in the audience at one of the university’s Canadian Literature symposia, the very same symposium series that hosted a conference dedicated to the work of Carol Shields in 2012. Given the strange reflexivity of this coincidence, it is worth noting that Shields directly commented on the symposia and the debates about literary tradition and influence that they helped to foster. Registered as a master’s student in the university’s English Department from 1969 to 1975, and working under the supervision of
Male-Pattern Bewilderment in Larry’s Party from:
The Worlds of Carol Shields
Author(s) Van Rys John
Abstract: In the winter and spring of 1997, in a June 2 meeting, and through a January 1998 email exchange, Donna Krolik Hollenberg conducted an extended interview with Carol Shields. That timeframe coincides with Shields’s finishing, publishing, and promoting her novel
Larry’s Party.In the interview, Shields confides, “I’ve always been interested in history—what it is, who gets to write it, and what it’s for” (341). In other words, one force that lies behind her fiction is the complexity of history—the various understandings of history, its authoring, and its uses. “I know,” she goes on to explain, “as everyone
Cool Empathy in the Short Fiction of Carol Shields from:
The Worlds of Carol Shields
Author(s) Rose Marilyn
Abstract: In reviewing Carol Shields’s short story collection
Various Miracles(1985),New York Timesbook reviewer Josh Rubins refers to her “serious whimsy,” a “fragile amalgam that . . . is sometimes surprisingly powerful as well as highly engaging. (11)” He notes the way that some of Shields’s “tiny fictions” have “sizable impact” and observes that her stories are somehow “disarming,” and pull “the reader inside her reckless imagination before the usual resistances can take shape.” He concedes that not all of her stories are equally successful: some are merely droll or seem to strain for effect. The best, however, exhibit
The Voices of Carol Shields from:
The Worlds of Carol Shields
Author(s) Clark Joan
Abstract: Carol Shields and I met thirty-six years ago when we were flying to Japan where our husbands were attending a Geotechnical Engineering Conference. An hour out of Vancouver, Don Shields suggested he and I change seats, and Carol and I talked pretty well non-stop across the Pacific. We began by talking about our work: at the time Carol had published two novels, two books of poetry, and short stories; I had published two children’s novels, poetry, and short stories. From there we moved onto other writers and their books, discussing those we admired, those we dismissed in the reckless way
Carol Shields from:
The Worlds of Carol Shields
Author(s) Levin Martin
Abstract: The first time I met, or perhaps encountered is the better word, Carol Shields was in 1994, on assignment for the now-defunct
Canadian Imperial Oil Review.I sense barely repressed laughter, but, despite its less than trippingly literary name and provenance, theReviewwas a wellmade quarterly magazine, as interested in Canadian culture as it was in Canadian oil.
4. Playful computer interaction from:
Playful Identities
Author(s) Cermak-Sassenrath Daniel
Abstract: For a long time the computer was a tool for experts, inaccessible and also prohibitively expensive for private users. This changed in the mid-1980s. The increasingly widespread use of the computer and the growing experience of its users have since led to a new kind of interaction. In many cases the computer is no longer seen as a machine with which well-planned, methodical, or repetitive tasks are conducted. The interaction¹ with it is now perceived as an open-ended process characterized by creative, explorative, goal-oriented, and challenging activities. Connected with this process is self-directed learning, experimental tinkering around, and the self-gambling
6. Breaking reality: from:
Playful Identities
Author(s) Glas René
Abstract: These song lyric lines accompanied a badge I earned in February 2010 while using
Foursquareon my mobile phone. This location-based social network service, created by Dennis Crowley and Naveen Selvadurai and launched in 2009, offers its users the opportunity to check in at real-world venues, earning rewards (like badges) in the process. The badge I was rewarded, appropriately called “I’m on a Boat!”, is the reward for the first time you actually check in on a boat in real life.
9. The playful use of mobile phones and its link to social cohesion from:
Playful Identities
Author(s) Ling Rich
Abstract: This chapter will examine how people’s playful use of the mobile phone supports social cohesion. It is true that there are a variety of ways that we use mobile telephones. We can use them to tell time, take pictures, listen to music, keep our appointment calendar, and note down memos. On advanced phones we can surf the web, sign up to play commercial multiplayer games, find directions, and sign in on social network sites. Among all these flashy applications it is important to remember that we can also talk to and text one another. Indeed it is these last functions
12. Play (for) time from:
Playful Identities
Author(s) Crogan Patrick
Abstract: Through their deployment of interactivity, virtualization, and simulation, video games are prime examples of the contemporary form of what philosopher of technology Bernard Stiegler has termed the “industrial temporal object” (2009, 241). This is his term for mass produced media works designed to provide experiences that unfold over time through the user’s provision of his/her conscious attention. From the phonograph’s replaying of musical performances, to editing together film shots and the compilation of longer sequences of experience in television scheduling, to the design of systems for user-configured perceptions in newer media forms, industrial temporal objects have played an increasingly significant
4. Playful computer interaction from:
Playful Identities
Author(s) Cermak-Sassenrath Daniel
Abstract: For a long time the computer was a tool for experts, inaccessible and also prohibitively expensive for private users. This changed in the mid-1980s. The increasingly widespread use of the computer and the growing experience of its users have since led to a new kind of interaction. In many cases the computer is no longer seen as a machine with which well-planned, methodical, or repetitive tasks are conducted. The interaction¹ with it is now perceived as an open-ended process characterized by creative, explorative, goal-oriented, and challenging activities. Connected with this process is self-directed learning, experimental tinkering around, and the self-gambling
6. Breaking reality: from:
Playful Identities
Author(s) Glas René
Abstract: These song lyric lines accompanied a badge I earned in February 2010 while using
Foursquareon my mobile phone. This location-based social network service, created by Dennis Crowley and Naveen Selvadurai and launched in 2009, offers its users the opportunity to check in at real-world venues, earning rewards (like badges) in the process. The badge I was rewarded, appropriately called “I’m on a Boat!”, is the reward for the first time you actually check in on a boat in real life.
9. The playful use of mobile phones and its link to social cohesion from:
Playful Identities
Author(s) Ling Rich
Abstract: This chapter will examine how people’s playful use of the mobile phone supports social cohesion. It is true that there are a variety of ways that we use mobile telephones. We can use them to tell time, take pictures, listen to music, keep our appointment calendar, and note down memos. On advanced phones we can surf the web, sign up to play commercial multiplayer games, find directions, and sign in on social network sites. Among all these flashy applications it is important to remember that we can also talk to and text one another. Indeed it is these last functions
12. Play (for) time from:
Playful Identities
Author(s) Crogan Patrick
Abstract: Through their deployment of interactivity, virtualization, and simulation, video games are prime examples of the contemporary form of what philosopher of technology Bernard Stiegler has termed the “industrial temporal object” (2009, 241). This is his term for mass produced media works designed to provide experiences that unfold over time through the user’s provision of his/her conscious attention. From the phonograph’s replaying of musical performances, to editing together film shots and the compilation of longer sequences of experience in television scheduling, to the design of systems for user-configured perceptions in newer media forms, industrial temporal objects have played an increasingly significant
4. Playful computer interaction from:
Playful Identities
Author(s) Cermak-Sassenrath Daniel
Abstract: For a long time the computer was a tool for experts, inaccessible and also prohibitively expensive for private users. This changed in the mid-1980s. The increasingly widespread use of the computer and the growing experience of its users have since led to a new kind of interaction. In many cases the computer is no longer seen as a machine with which well-planned, methodical, or repetitive tasks are conducted. The interaction¹ with it is now perceived as an open-ended process characterized by creative, explorative, goal-oriented, and challenging activities. Connected with this process is self-directed learning, experimental tinkering around, and the self-gambling
6. Breaking reality: from:
Playful Identities
Author(s) Glas René
Abstract: These song lyric lines accompanied a badge I earned in February 2010 while using
Foursquareon my mobile phone. This location-based social network service, created by Dennis Crowley and Naveen Selvadurai and launched in 2009, offers its users the opportunity to check in at real-world venues, earning rewards (like badges) in the process. The badge I was rewarded, appropriately called “I’m on a Boat!”, is the reward for the first time you actually check in on a boat in real life.
9. The playful use of mobile phones and its link to social cohesion from:
Playful Identities
Author(s) Ling Rich
Abstract: This chapter will examine how people’s playful use of the mobile phone supports social cohesion. It is true that there are a variety of ways that we use mobile telephones. We can use them to tell time, take pictures, listen to music, keep our appointment calendar, and note down memos. On advanced phones we can surf the web, sign up to play commercial multiplayer games, find directions, and sign in on social network sites. Among all these flashy applications it is important to remember that we can also talk to and text one another. Indeed it is these last functions
12. Play (for) time from:
Playful Identities
Author(s) Crogan Patrick
Abstract: Through their deployment of interactivity, virtualization, and simulation, video games are prime examples of the contemporary form of what philosopher of technology Bernard Stiegler has termed the “industrial temporal object” (2009, 241). This is his term for mass produced media works designed to provide experiences that unfold over time through the user’s provision of his/her conscious attention. From the phonograph’s replaying of musical performances, to editing together film shots and the compilation of longer sequences of experience in television scheduling, to the design of systems for user-configured perceptions in newer media forms, industrial temporal objects have played an increasingly significant
3. Ruins and (Un)forgetfulness: from:
Muscially Sublime: Indeterminacy, Infinity, Irresolvability
Abstract: In “Nietzsche, Genealogy, History,” Michel Foucault (re)introduced a concept in philosophy and the writing of history that he had derived from Friedrich Nietzsche: genealogy.¹ Foucault presented this concept as a history-writing against the grain insofar as it no longer starts from timeless values and realities lying in wait behind the stories of the past. Genealogy, for Foucault, was no longer naïve, in that it no longer searched for the pure origin of things but rather showed how such origins were constituted out of incoherent fragments, accidents, errors, and failings. Insofar as genealogy had to do with
descent, this was a
2. Five Times Breakthrough from:
The Reinvention of Religious Music: Olivier Messiaen's Breakthrough Toward the Beyond
Abstract: The first chapter mapped the “program” of Messiaen and exploring the theoretical possibilities that he discerned for putting it to practice. Now it is time to turn to the question of how he endeavored to realize these possibilities. What does it look like in practice, this “glistening music” of soundcolor, dazzlement, and breakthrough? How does Messiaen actually compose this music of
éblouissement? What is it that makes music and religion relate so intimately to one another? Several levels come into view. What chords and colors exactly come into play? How does Messiaen use them? Are there perhaps any other musical
Book Title: Dis-Enclosure: The Deconstruction of Christianity- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Smith Michael B.
Abstract: This book is a profound and eagerly anticipated investigation into what is left of a monotheistic religious spirit-notably, a minimalist faith that is neither confessional nor credulous. Articulating this faith as works and as an objectless hope, Nancy deconstructs Christianity in search of the historical and reflective conditions that provided its initial energy. Working through Blanchot and Nietzsche, re-reading Heidegger and Derrida, Nancy turns to the Epistle of Saint James rather than those of Saint Paul, discerning in it the primitive essence of Christianity as hope. The religion that provided the exit from religion,as he terms Christianity, consists in the announcement of an end. It is the announcement that counts, however, rather than any finality. In this announcement there is a proximity to others and to what was once called parousia. But parousia is no longer presence; it is no longer the return of the Messiah. Rather, it is what is near us and does not cease to open and to close, a presence deferred yet imminent.In a demystified age where we are left with a vision of a self-enclosed world-in which humans are no longer mortals facing an immortal being, but entities whose lives are accompanied by the time of their own decline-parousia stands as a question. Can we venture the risk of a decentered perspective, such that the meaning of the world can be found both inside and outside, within and without our so-immanent world?The deconstruction of Christianity that Nancy proposes is neither a game nor a strategy. It is an invitation to imagine a strange faith that enacts the inadequation of life to itself. Our lives overflow the self-contained boundaries of their biological and sociological interpretations. Out of this excess, wells up a fragile, overlooked meaning that is beyond both confessionalism and humanism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14bs028
A Faith That Is Nothing at All from:
Dis-Enclosure: The Deconstruction of Christianity
Author(s) Bergo Bettina
Abstract: Among his singular characteristics, Gérard Granel presents a singularity more singular than others: that of being one of the very rare contemporary philosophers, if not the only one, to have affirmed, for a time, his belonging to the Catholic confession and Church—this while practicing a philosophy clearly tied, on the one hand, to Heidegger and, on the other, to Marx. Broadly speaking, we could say that he is one of the few, if not the only one, to have held together without confusion a religious faith and his engagement in philosophy (no “Christian philosophy,” here, to the contrary!). He
Verbum caro factum from:
Dis-Enclosure: The Deconstruction of Christianity
Author(s) Smith Michael B.
Abstract: For the time of a brief note, for the moment, let us analyze this central proposition of Christianity:
verbum caro factum est(in Greek and in the Gospel of John:logos sarx egeneto). That is the formula of the “incarnation” by which God makes himself man, and that humanity of God is indeed the decisive trait of Christianity, and through it a determinative trait for the whole of Western culture—including the heart of its “humanism,” which it marks indelibly, or may even be its basis (in return for a “divinization” of man—to stick to a short summary treatment).
“Prayer Demythified” from:
Dis-Enclosure: The Deconstruction of Christianity
Author(s) Smith Michael B.
Abstract: Who can require of the present time a prayer, and of us, the godless who live this time as our own? It’s not surprising it should be a poet who dares to do so, or dares at least to ask what such a prayer, if there is such a thing, could be.
Book Title: Missing Link-The Evolution of Metaphor and the Metaphor of Evolution
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): DONALDSON JEFFERY
Abstract: We look for missing links in the sciences and humanities, but the essential missing link - metaphor - is always in front of us. In Missing Link, Jeffery Donaldson unites literary criticism and evolutionary and cognitive science to show how metaphor has been with us since the beginning of time as a seed in the nature of things. With examples from centuries of poets, critics, philosophers, and scientists, he details how metaphor is a chemistry, an exchange of energies forming and dissolving, and an openness in the spaces between things. He considers the ways in which DNA learns how to liken things that have been, how mutation makes errors and then tries them on, and how evolution is hypothesis - nature's way of "thinking more." The mind is a matrix of relations: neural synapses cascade into ever-changing pathways and patterns. Metaphor is the substance of things hoped for, the evidence of things not seen. It is the unbroken thread between matter and spirit. Whether offering analysis of a turn of phrase or chemical reaction, Missing Link presents a vision of literature that is also a vision of the cosmos, and vice versa. It enters the debate between evolution and religion, and challenges scientists, literary theorists, and religious advocates to rethink the relations between their disciplines.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14bs0fz
2 “Peyne and Wo”: from:
Missing Link
Abstract: Metaphor is often seen as lower fruit on the language tree. We have a pretty confident sense of its use and place among our core language tools. When it comes to using words for getting at truths, metaphor is the handy gadget for special uses. It is like the angled ratchet attachment that helps you get at fasteners in hard-to-reach places: too delicate and unwieldy for those tough, straight-forward bolts that we spend most of our time wrestling with. This attitude is strongest among disciplines in which language is a necessary but sometimes frustrating instrument of communication, and where any
3 Chemistry: from:
Missing Link
Abstract: “In our beginning is our end” (
Complete, 177). T.S. Eliot’s Alpha-and-Omega shell game is sometimes used as a first salvo in long arguments; it makes my case succinctly, so I’m pressing it into service again. Whatever end we human beings currently represent as evolved metaphoric thinkers is already present and active in whatever beginning the Big Bang represents for our universe. The launching of the metaphoric initiative and the launching of the universe are one and the same event. They consist of the same fabric, a material condition and a pattern of behaviour, a content and a form, as one.
5 Graceful Errors: from:
Missing Link
Abstract: For decades, Richard Wilbur’s poem “Mind” has been admired by both literary critics and thinkers in a variety of fields. Wilbur is one of those poets who develops a poem’s evocative potential by embodying the subject in the poem’s procedures. Here he offers a scene where a mind flits playfully about inside a world of stony recalcitrance. At the same time he
plays witha metaphor (the very one that says “the mind is like some bat”), and lets it flit about within the confines of three constrained stanzas, until it comes to the point where it “turns” to examine
13 Spirit and Its Metaphoric Environment from:
Missing Link
Abstract: Our symbolic thinker, human being, has set out to design a world that gives it survival advantage. Thinking ahead, testing and deliberating, it has striven to build and inhabit a world that, it would hope, makes sense. The thick cream of its society has been whipped into myriad shapes that stand on their own. At the same time, that most characteristic of human being’s talents, its prowess for symbolic thinking, has evolved a domain unique to itself, where the symbol as symbol has come to the fore, where hypothetical thinking has become a survival-enhancing end in its own right, as
Book Title: Missing Link-The Evolution of Metaphor and the Metaphor of Evolution
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): DONALDSON JEFFERY
Abstract: We look for missing links in the sciences and humanities, but the essential missing link - metaphor - is always in front of us. In Missing Link, Jeffery Donaldson unites literary criticism and evolutionary and cognitive science to show how metaphor has been with us since the beginning of time as a seed in the nature of things. With examples from centuries of poets, critics, philosophers, and scientists, he details how metaphor is a chemistry, an exchange of energies forming and dissolving, and an openness in the spaces between things. He considers the ways in which DNA learns how to liken things that have been, how mutation makes errors and then tries them on, and how evolution is hypothesis - nature's way of "thinking more." The mind is a matrix of relations: neural synapses cascade into ever-changing pathways and patterns. Metaphor is the substance of things hoped for, the evidence of things not seen. It is the unbroken thread between matter and spirit. Whether offering analysis of a turn of phrase or chemical reaction, Missing Link presents a vision of literature that is also a vision of the cosmos, and vice versa. It enters the debate between evolution and religion, and challenges scientists, literary theorists, and religious advocates to rethink the relations between their disciplines.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14bs0fz
2 “Peyne and Wo”: from:
Missing Link
Abstract: Metaphor is often seen as lower fruit on the language tree. We have a pretty confident sense of its use and place among our core language tools. When it comes to using words for getting at truths, metaphor is the handy gadget for special uses. It is like the angled ratchet attachment that helps you get at fasteners in hard-to-reach places: too delicate and unwieldy for those tough, straight-forward bolts that we spend most of our time wrestling with. This attitude is strongest among disciplines in which language is a necessary but sometimes frustrating instrument of communication, and where any
3 Chemistry: from:
Missing Link
Abstract: “In our beginning is our end” (
Complete, 177). T.S. Eliot’s Alpha-and-Omega shell game is sometimes used as a first salvo in long arguments; it makes my case succinctly, so I’m pressing it into service again. Whatever end we human beings currently represent as evolved metaphoric thinkers is already present and active in whatever beginning the Big Bang represents for our universe. The launching of the metaphoric initiative and the launching of the universe are one and the same event. They consist of the same fabric, a material condition and a pattern of behaviour, a content and a form, as one.
5 Graceful Errors: from:
Missing Link
Abstract: For decades, Richard Wilbur’s poem “Mind” has been admired by both literary critics and thinkers in a variety of fields. Wilbur is one of those poets who develops a poem’s evocative potential by embodying the subject in the poem’s procedures. Here he offers a scene where a mind flits playfully about inside a world of stony recalcitrance. At the same time he
plays witha metaphor (the very one that says “the mind is like some bat”), and lets it flit about within the confines of three constrained stanzas, until it comes to the point where it “turns” to examine
13 Spirit and Its Metaphoric Environment from:
Missing Link
Abstract: Our symbolic thinker, human being, has set out to design a world that gives it survival advantage. Thinking ahead, testing and deliberating, it has striven to build and inhabit a world that, it would hope, makes sense. The thick cream of its society has been whipped into myriad shapes that stand on their own. At the same time, that most characteristic of human being’s talents, its prowess for symbolic thinking, has evolved a domain unique to itself, where the symbol as symbol has come to the fore, where hypothetical thinking has become a survival-enhancing end in its own right, as
Book Title: Missing Link-The Evolution of Metaphor and the Metaphor of Evolution
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): DONALDSON JEFFERY
Abstract: We look for missing links in the sciences and humanities, but the essential missing link - metaphor - is always in front of us. In Missing Link, Jeffery Donaldson unites literary criticism and evolutionary and cognitive science to show how metaphor has been with us since the beginning of time as a seed in the nature of things. With examples from centuries of poets, critics, philosophers, and scientists, he details how metaphor is a chemistry, an exchange of energies forming and dissolving, and an openness in the spaces between things. He considers the ways in which DNA learns how to liken things that have been, how mutation makes errors and then tries them on, and how evolution is hypothesis - nature's way of "thinking more." The mind is a matrix of relations: neural synapses cascade into ever-changing pathways and patterns. Metaphor is the substance of things hoped for, the evidence of things not seen. It is the unbroken thread between matter and spirit. Whether offering analysis of a turn of phrase or chemical reaction, Missing Link presents a vision of literature that is also a vision of the cosmos, and vice versa. It enters the debate between evolution and religion, and challenges scientists, literary theorists, and religious advocates to rethink the relations between their disciplines.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14bs0fz
2 “Peyne and Wo”: from:
Missing Link
Abstract: Metaphor is often seen as lower fruit on the language tree. We have a pretty confident sense of its use and place among our core language tools. When it comes to using words for getting at truths, metaphor is the handy gadget for special uses. It is like the angled ratchet attachment that helps you get at fasteners in hard-to-reach places: too delicate and unwieldy for those tough, straight-forward bolts that we spend most of our time wrestling with. This attitude is strongest among disciplines in which language is a necessary but sometimes frustrating instrument of communication, and where any
3 Chemistry: from:
Missing Link
Abstract: “In our beginning is our end” (
Complete, 177). T.S. Eliot’s Alpha-and-Omega shell game is sometimes used as a first salvo in long arguments; it makes my case succinctly, so I’m pressing it into service again. Whatever end we human beings currently represent as evolved metaphoric thinkers is already present and active in whatever beginning the Big Bang represents for our universe. The launching of the metaphoric initiative and the launching of the universe are one and the same event. They consist of the same fabric, a material condition and a pattern of behaviour, a content and a form, as one.
5 Graceful Errors: from:
Missing Link
Abstract: For decades, Richard Wilbur’s poem “Mind” has been admired by both literary critics and thinkers in a variety of fields. Wilbur is one of those poets who develops a poem’s evocative potential by embodying the subject in the poem’s procedures. Here he offers a scene where a mind flits playfully about inside a world of stony recalcitrance. At the same time he
plays witha metaphor (the very one that says “the mind is like some bat”), and lets it flit about within the confines of three constrained stanzas, until it comes to the point where it “turns” to examine
13 Spirit and Its Metaphoric Environment from:
Missing Link
Abstract: Our symbolic thinker, human being, has set out to design a world that gives it survival advantage. Thinking ahead, testing and deliberating, it has striven to build and inhabit a world that, it would hope, makes sense. The thick cream of its society has been whipped into myriad shapes that stand on their own. At the same time, that most characteristic of human being’s talents, its prowess for symbolic thinking, has evolved a domain unique to itself, where the symbol as symbol has come to the fore, where hypothetical thinking has become a survival-enhancing end in its own right, as
Book Title: Missing Link-The Evolution of Metaphor and the Metaphor of Evolution
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): DONALDSON JEFFERY
Abstract: We look for missing links in the sciences and humanities, but the essential missing link - metaphor - is always in front of us. In Missing Link, Jeffery Donaldson unites literary criticism and evolutionary and cognitive science to show how metaphor has been with us since the beginning of time as a seed in the nature of things. With examples from centuries of poets, critics, philosophers, and scientists, he details how metaphor is a chemistry, an exchange of energies forming and dissolving, and an openness in the spaces between things. He considers the ways in which DNA learns how to liken things that have been, how mutation makes errors and then tries them on, and how evolution is hypothesis - nature's way of "thinking more." The mind is a matrix of relations: neural synapses cascade into ever-changing pathways and patterns. Metaphor is the substance of things hoped for, the evidence of things not seen. It is the unbroken thread between matter and spirit. Whether offering analysis of a turn of phrase or chemical reaction, Missing Link presents a vision of literature that is also a vision of the cosmos, and vice versa. It enters the debate between evolution and religion, and challenges scientists, literary theorists, and religious advocates to rethink the relations between their disciplines.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14bs0fz
2 “Peyne and Wo”: from:
Missing Link
Abstract: Metaphor is often seen as lower fruit on the language tree. We have a pretty confident sense of its use and place among our core language tools. When it comes to using words for getting at truths, metaphor is the handy gadget for special uses. It is like the angled ratchet attachment that helps you get at fasteners in hard-to-reach places: too delicate and unwieldy for those tough, straight-forward bolts that we spend most of our time wrestling with. This attitude is strongest among disciplines in which language is a necessary but sometimes frustrating instrument of communication, and where any
3 Chemistry: from:
Missing Link
Abstract: “In our beginning is our end” (
Complete, 177). T.S. Eliot’s Alpha-and-Omega shell game is sometimes used as a first salvo in long arguments; it makes my case succinctly, so I’m pressing it into service again. Whatever end we human beings currently represent as evolved metaphoric thinkers is already present and active in whatever beginning the Big Bang represents for our universe. The launching of the metaphoric initiative and the launching of the universe are one and the same event. They consist of the same fabric, a material condition and a pattern of behaviour, a content and a form, as one.
5 Graceful Errors: from:
Missing Link
Abstract: For decades, Richard Wilbur’s poem “Mind” has been admired by both literary critics and thinkers in a variety of fields. Wilbur is one of those poets who develops a poem’s evocative potential by embodying the subject in the poem’s procedures. Here he offers a scene where a mind flits playfully about inside a world of stony recalcitrance. At the same time he
plays witha metaphor (the very one that says “the mind is like some bat”), and lets it flit about within the confines of three constrained stanzas, until it comes to the point where it “turns” to examine
13 Spirit and Its Metaphoric Environment from:
Missing Link
Abstract: Our symbolic thinker, human being, has set out to design a world that gives it survival advantage. Thinking ahead, testing and deliberating, it has striven to build and inhabit a world that, it would hope, makes sense. The thick cream of its society has been whipped into myriad shapes that stand on their own. At the same time, that most characteristic of human being’s talents, its prowess for symbolic thinking, has evolved a domain unique to itself, where the symbol as symbol has come to the fore, where hypothetical thinking has become a survival-enhancing end in its own right, as
Book Title: Missing Link-The Evolution of Metaphor and the Metaphor of Evolution
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): DONALDSON JEFFERY
Abstract: We look for missing links in the sciences and humanities, but the essential missing link - metaphor - is always in front of us. In Missing Link, Jeffery Donaldson unites literary criticism and evolutionary and cognitive science to show how metaphor has been with us since the beginning of time as a seed in the nature of things. With examples from centuries of poets, critics, philosophers, and scientists, he details how metaphor is a chemistry, an exchange of energies forming and dissolving, and an openness in the spaces between things. He considers the ways in which DNA learns how to liken things that have been, how mutation makes errors and then tries them on, and how evolution is hypothesis - nature's way of "thinking more." The mind is a matrix of relations: neural synapses cascade into ever-changing pathways and patterns. Metaphor is the substance of things hoped for, the evidence of things not seen. It is the unbroken thread between matter and spirit. Whether offering analysis of a turn of phrase or chemical reaction, Missing Link presents a vision of literature that is also a vision of the cosmos, and vice versa. It enters the debate between evolution and religion, and challenges scientists, literary theorists, and religious advocates to rethink the relations between their disciplines.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14bs0fz
2 “Peyne and Wo”: from:
Missing Link
Abstract: Metaphor is often seen as lower fruit on the language tree. We have a pretty confident sense of its use and place among our core language tools. When it comes to using words for getting at truths, metaphor is the handy gadget for special uses. It is like the angled ratchet attachment that helps you get at fasteners in hard-to-reach places: too delicate and unwieldy for those tough, straight-forward bolts that we spend most of our time wrestling with. This attitude is strongest among disciplines in which language is a necessary but sometimes frustrating instrument of communication, and where any
3 Chemistry: from:
Missing Link
Abstract: “In our beginning is our end” (
Complete, 177). T.S. Eliot’s Alpha-and-Omega shell game is sometimes used as a first salvo in long arguments; it makes my case succinctly, so I’m pressing it into service again. Whatever end we human beings currently represent as evolved metaphoric thinkers is already present and active in whatever beginning the Big Bang represents for our universe. The launching of the metaphoric initiative and the launching of the universe are one and the same event. They consist of the same fabric, a material condition and a pattern of behaviour, a content and a form, as one.
5 Graceful Errors: from:
Missing Link
Abstract: For decades, Richard Wilbur’s poem “Mind” has been admired by both literary critics and thinkers in a variety of fields. Wilbur is one of those poets who develops a poem’s evocative potential by embodying the subject in the poem’s procedures. Here he offers a scene where a mind flits playfully about inside a world of stony recalcitrance. At the same time he
plays witha metaphor (the very one that says “the mind is like some bat”), and lets it flit about within the confines of three constrained stanzas, until it comes to the point where it “turns” to examine
13 Spirit and Its Metaphoric Environment from:
Missing Link
Abstract: Our symbolic thinker, human being, has set out to design a world that gives it survival advantage. Thinking ahead, testing and deliberating, it has striven to build and inhabit a world that, it would hope, makes sense. The thick cream of its society has been whipped into myriad shapes that stand on their own. At the same time, that most characteristic of human being’s talents, its prowess for symbolic thinking, has evolved a domain unique to itself, where the symbol as symbol has come to the fore, where hypothetical thinking has become a survival-enhancing end in its own right, as
Book Title: Missing Link-The Evolution of Metaphor and the Metaphor of Evolution
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): DONALDSON JEFFERY
Abstract: We look for missing links in the sciences and humanities, but the essential missing link - metaphor - is always in front of us. In Missing Link, Jeffery Donaldson unites literary criticism and evolutionary and cognitive science to show how metaphor has been with us since the beginning of time as a seed in the nature of things. With examples from centuries of poets, critics, philosophers, and scientists, he details how metaphor is a chemistry, an exchange of energies forming and dissolving, and an openness in the spaces between things. He considers the ways in which DNA learns how to liken things that have been, how mutation makes errors and then tries them on, and how evolution is hypothesis - nature's way of "thinking more." The mind is a matrix of relations: neural synapses cascade into ever-changing pathways and patterns. Metaphor is the substance of things hoped for, the evidence of things not seen. It is the unbroken thread between matter and spirit. Whether offering analysis of a turn of phrase or chemical reaction, Missing Link presents a vision of literature that is also a vision of the cosmos, and vice versa. It enters the debate between evolution and religion, and challenges scientists, literary theorists, and religious advocates to rethink the relations between their disciplines.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14bs0fz
2 “Peyne and Wo”: from:
Missing Link
Abstract: Metaphor is often seen as lower fruit on the language tree. We have a pretty confident sense of its use and place among our core language tools. When it comes to using words for getting at truths, metaphor is the handy gadget for special uses. It is like the angled ratchet attachment that helps you get at fasteners in hard-to-reach places: too delicate and unwieldy for those tough, straight-forward bolts that we spend most of our time wrestling with. This attitude is strongest among disciplines in which language is a necessary but sometimes frustrating instrument of communication, and where any
3 Chemistry: from:
Missing Link
Abstract: “In our beginning is our end” (
Complete, 177). T.S. Eliot’s Alpha-and-Omega shell game is sometimes used as a first salvo in long arguments; it makes my case succinctly, so I’m pressing it into service again. Whatever end we human beings currently represent as evolved metaphoric thinkers is already present and active in whatever beginning the Big Bang represents for our universe. The launching of the metaphoric initiative and the launching of the universe are one and the same event. They consist of the same fabric, a material condition and a pattern of behaviour, a content and a form, as one.
5 Graceful Errors: from:
Missing Link
Abstract: For decades, Richard Wilbur’s poem “Mind” has been admired by both literary critics and thinkers in a variety of fields. Wilbur is one of those poets who develops a poem’s evocative potential by embodying the subject in the poem’s procedures. Here he offers a scene where a mind flits playfully about inside a world of stony recalcitrance. At the same time he
plays witha metaphor (the very one that says “the mind is like some bat”), and lets it flit about within the confines of three constrained stanzas, until it comes to the point where it “turns” to examine
13 Spirit and Its Metaphoric Environment from:
Missing Link
Abstract: Our symbolic thinker, human being, has set out to design a world that gives it survival advantage. Thinking ahead, testing and deliberating, it has striven to build and inhabit a world that, it would hope, makes sense. The thick cream of its society has been whipped into myriad shapes that stand on their own. At the same time, that most characteristic of human being’s talents, its prowess for symbolic thinking, has evolved a domain unique to itself, where the symbol as symbol has come to the fore, where hypothetical thinking has become a survival-enhancing end in its own right, as
Foreword from:
Resentment's Virtue
Author(s) Murphy Jeffrie G.
Abstract: We live in a time in which the virtue of forgiveness (conceived as transcending certain resentments) risks becoming distorted and cheapened by various movements that advocate it in a hasty and uncritical way. Selective and considered forgiveness may indeed reveal virtue in victims of wrongdoing, may legitimately free those victims from being consumed by unhealthy resentments, and may aid in restoring relations that are worth restoring. None of this, however, shows that forgiveness is always a virtue, that all resentments are unhealthy, and that all relationships are worth restoring. Some wrongs and some perpetrators of those wrongs may be unforgivable,
8 Opening Moves from:
Resentment's Virtue
Abstract: Thus, Améry opens the essay on his
ressentimentsby placing himself in the position of the deviant and distrustful victim. The country he travels is “a delight to the world”; it “offers the world an example not only of economic prosperity but also of democratic stability and political moderation” (1999: 62). And then there is this lonely “I” who cannot join the popular perspective and whose memories of the Nazi past of the country and its inhabitants make him unable to travel the present without ruminating about its relationship to and possibly hidden affinity with the past. Different attitudes to
9 Facing the Irreversible from:
Resentment's Virtue
Abstract: [I]t did not escape me that
ressentimentis not only an unnatural but also a logically inconsistent condition [Zustand]. It nails every one of us onto the cross of his ruined past. Absurdly, it demands that the irreversible be turned around, that the event be undone.Ressentimentblocks the exit to
10 Restoring Coexistence from:
Resentment's Virtue
Abstract: The
Zustandpassage ends by noting theressentiment-ful victim’s inability to “join in the unisonous [sic] peace chorus all around him, which cheerfully proposes: not backward let us look but forward, to a better, common future!” (Améry 1999:69). The call to let bygones be bygones is just one of several forms of moving on that Améry refuses. Mentioning it brings Améry to comment on another proposal that both victims and torturers ought to “internalize” their suffering and guilt and “bear it in emotional asceticism” (69). Améry neither can nor wants to accept this call for a silent overcoming of the
11 Guilt and Responsibility from:
Resentment's Virtue
Abstract: At an earlier point in the essay, Améry accepts the obligation to clarify his
ressentiments“for those against whom they are directed” (1999:67). But against whomareAméry’sressentimentsdirected, and are the implicit expectations and notions of guilt and responsibility themselves morally justifiable? Reading through the essay, one is presented with an international collection of resented individuals and groups: a SS-man Wajs from Belgium, a South German businessman, the philosopher Gabriel Marcel, the publicist André Neher, SS-men, Kapos, German bystanders, “former fellows in battle,” and even “the world, which forgives and forgets.” In addition, he mentions several individuals for
12 Wishful Thinking? from:
Resentment's Virtue
Abstract: Améry defends both the refusal to let time heal all wounds and the refusal to forgive or forget as being the right and privilege of the moral person. He characterizes his unwillingness to move on or to let go of his
ressentimentsas a display of personal moral virtue, rather than as a failure to be condemned or treated. In fact, he ties the special kind ofressentimentharbored by the survivor of the Holocaust to different kinds of virtues and values: a protest against forgetfulness and shallow conciliatoriness, a struggle to regain dignity; an acute sense of the inexpiable
13 A Multifarious Reception from:
Resentment's Virtue
Abstract: It is easy to agree that Améry’s “
Ressentiments” is a controversial upside-down perspective on ressentiment, resentment, forgiveness, reconciliation, and the ways in which they relate to one another. In a letter written on November 24, 1965, Améry informs the South German radio station that was broadcasting the essays that a fourth essay entitled “Ressentiments” was on its way. It is, writes Améry, “starker Tobak (tough stuff)—hopefully not too tough for your listeners. It’s just that such an essay could either be written in all honesty, or it could not be written at all” (cited in Heidelberger-Leonard 2004:123, trans. Claudia
Foreword from:
Resentment's Virtue
Author(s) Murphy Jeffrie G.
Abstract: We live in a time in which the virtue of forgiveness (conceived as transcending certain resentments) risks becoming distorted and cheapened by various movements that advocate it in a hasty and uncritical way. Selective and considered forgiveness may indeed reveal virtue in victims of wrongdoing, may legitimately free those victims from being consumed by unhealthy resentments, and may aid in restoring relations that are worth restoring. None of this, however, shows that forgiveness is always a virtue, that all resentments are unhealthy, and that all relationships are worth restoring. Some wrongs and some perpetrators of those wrongs may be unforgivable,
8 Opening Moves from:
Resentment's Virtue
Abstract: Thus, Améry opens the essay on his
ressentimentsby placing himself in the position of the deviant and distrustful victim. The country he travels is “a delight to the world”; it “offers the world an example not only of economic prosperity but also of democratic stability and political moderation” (1999: 62). And then there is this lonely “I” who cannot join the popular perspective and whose memories of the Nazi past of the country and its inhabitants make him unable to travel the present without ruminating about its relationship to and possibly hidden affinity with the past. Different attitudes to
9 Facing the Irreversible from:
Resentment's Virtue
Abstract: [I]t did not escape me that
ressentimentis not only an unnatural but also a logically inconsistent condition [Zustand]. It nails every one of us onto the cross of his ruined past. Absurdly, it demands that the irreversible be turned around, that the event be undone.Ressentimentblocks the exit to
10 Restoring Coexistence from:
Resentment's Virtue
Abstract: The
Zustandpassage ends by noting theressentiment-ful victim’s inability to “join in the unisonous [sic] peace chorus all around him, which cheerfully proposes: not backward let us look but forward, to a better, common future!” (Améry 1999:69). The call to let bygones be bygones is just one of several forms of moving on that Améry refuses. Mentioning it brings Améry to comment on another proposal that both victims and torturers ought to “internalize” their suffering and guilt and “bear it in emotional asceticism” (69). Améry neither can nor wants to accept this call for a silent overcoming of the
11 Guilt and Responsibility from:
Resentment's Virtue
Abstract: At an earlier point in the essay, Améry accepts the obligation to clarify his
ressentiments“for those against whom they are directed” (1999:67). But against whomareAméry’sressentimentsdirected, and are the implicit expectations and notions of guilt and responsibility themselves morally justifiable? Reading through the essay, one is presented with an international collection of resented individuals and groups: a SS-man Wajs from Belgium, a South German businessman, the philosopher Gabriel Marcel, the publicist André Neher, SS-men, Kapos, German bystanders, “former fellows in battle,” and even “the world, which forgives and forgets.” In addition, he mentions several individuals for
12 Wishful Thinking? from:
Resentment's Virtue
Abstract: Améry defends both the refusal to let time heal all wounds and the refusal to forgive or forget as being the right and privilege of the moral person. He characterizes his unwillingness to move on or to let go of his
ressentimentsas a display of personal moral virtue, rather than as a failure to be condemned or treated. In fact, he ties the special kind ofressentimentharbored by the survivor of the Holocaust to different kinds of virtues and values: a protest against forgetfulness and shallow conciliatoriness, a struggle to regain dignity; an acute sense of the inexpiable
13 A Multifarious Reception from:
Resentment's Virtue
Abstract: It is easy to agree that Améry’s “
Ressentiments” is a controversial upside-down perspective on ressentiment, resentment, forgiveness, reconciliation, and the ways in which they relate to one another. In a letter written on November 24, 1965, Améry informs the South German radio station that was broadcasting the essays that a fourth essay entitled “Ressentiments” was on its way. It is, writes Améry, “starker Tobak (tough stuff)—hopefully not too tough for your listeners. It’s just that such an essay could either be written in all honesty, or it could not be written at all” (cited in Heidelberger-Leonard 2004:123, trans. Claudia
Foreword from:
Resentment's Virtue
Author(s) Murphy Jeffrie G.
Abstract: We live in a time in which the virtue of forgiveness (conceived as transcending certain resentments) risks becoming distorted and cheapened by various movements that advocate it in a hasty and uncritical way. Selective and considered forgiveness may indeed reveal virtue in victims of wrongdoing, may legitimately free those victims from being consumed by unhealthy resentments, and may aid in restoring relations that are worth restoring. None of this, however, shows that forgiveness is always a virtue, that all resentments are unhealthy, and that all relationships are worth restoring. Some wrongs and some perpetrators of those wrongs may be unforgivable,
8 Opening Moves from:
Resentment's Virtue
Abstract: Thus, Améry opens the essay on his
ressentimentsby placing himself in the position of the deviant and distrustful victim. The country he travels is “a delight to the world”; it “offers the world an example not only of economic prosperity but also of democratic stability and political moderation” (1999: 62). And then there is this lonely “I” who cannot join the popular perspective and whose memories of the Nazi past of the country and its inhabitants make him unable to travel the present without ruminating about its relationship to and possibly hidden affinity with the past. Different attitudes to
9 Facing the Irreversible from:
Resentment's Virtue
Abstract: [I]t did not escape me that
ressentimentis not only an unnatural but also a logically inconsistent condition [Zustand]. It nails every one of us onto the cross of his ruined past. Absurdly, it demands that the irreversible be turned around, that the event be undone.Ressentimentblocks the exit to
10 Restoring Coexistence from:
Resentment's Virtue
Abstract: The
Zustandpassage ends by noting theressentiment-ful victim’s inability to “join in the unisonous [sic] peace chorus all around him, which cheerfully proposes: not backward let us look but forward, to a better, common future!” (Améry 1999:69). The call to let bygones be bygones is just one of several forms of moving on that Améry refuses. Mentioning it brings Améry to comment on another proposal that both victims and torturers ought to “internalize” their suffering and guilt and “bear it in emotional asceticism” (69). Améry neither can nor wants to accept this call for a silent overcoming of the
11 Guilt and Responsibility from:
Resentment's Virtue
Abstract: At an earlier point in the essay, Améry accepts the obligation to clarify his
ressentiments“for those against whom they are directed” (1999:67). But against whomareAméry’sressentimentsdirected, and are the implicit expectations and notions of guilt and responsibility themselves morally justifiable? Reading through the essay, one is presented with an international collection of resented individuals and groups: a SS-man Wajs from Belgium, a South German businessman, the philosopher Gabriel Marcel, the publicist André Neher, SS-men, Kapos, German bystanders, “former fellows in battle,” and even “the world, which forgives and forgets.” In addition, he mentions several individuals for
12 Wishful Thinking? from:
Resentment's Virtue
Abstract: Améry defends both the refusal to let time heal all wounds and the refusal to forgive or forget as being the right and privilege of the moral person. He characterizes his unwillingness to move on or to let go of his
ressentimentsas a display of personal moral virtue, rather than as a failure to be condemned or treated. In fact, he ties the special kind ofressentimentharbored by the survivor of the Holocaust to different kinds of virtues and values: a protest against forgetfulness and shallow conciliatoriness, a struggle to regain dignity; an acute sense of the inexpiable
13 A Multifarious Reception from:
Resentment's Virtue
Abstract: It is easy to agree that Améry’s “
Ressentiments” is a controversial upside-down perspective on ressentiment, resentment, forgiveness, reconciliation, and the ways in which they relate to one another. In a letter written on November 24, 1965, Améry informs the South German radio station that was broadcasting the essays that a fourth essay entitled “Ressentiments” was on its way. It is, writes Améry, “starker Tobak (tough stuff)—hopefully not too tough for your listeners. It’s just that such an essay could either be written in all honesty, or it could not be written at all” (cited in Heidelberger-Leonard 2004:123, trans. Claudia
Book Title: Intention Interpretation- Publisher: Temple University Press
Author(s): ISEMINGER GARY
Abstract: "...an excellent and comprehensive discussion of a debate that was initiated in this century in William Wimsatt's and Monroe C. Beardsley's influential article 'The Intentional Fallacy.'...this is a splendidly conceived and very useful collection of essays. Readers will want to take issue with the arguments of individual authors, but this is to be expected in a volume at the cutting edge of a fertile philosophical controversy." --David Novitz, The Philosophical Quarterly "What is the connection, if any, between the author's intentions in (while) writing a work of literature and the truth (acceptability, validity) of interpretive statements about it?" With this question, Gary Isminger introduces a literary debate that has been waged for the past four decades and is addressed by philosophers and literary theorists in Intention and Interpretation. Thirteen essays discuss the role of appeals to the author's intention in interpreting works of literature. A well-known argument by E.D. Hirsch serves as the basic text, in which he defends the appeal to the author's intention against Wimsatt and Beardsley's claim that such an appeal involved "the intentional fallacy." The essays, mostly commissioned by the editor, explore the presuppositions and consequences of arguing for the importance of the author's intentions in the way Hirsch does. Connections emerge between this issue and many fundamental issues in metaphysics and the philosophy of mind as well as in aesthetics. The (old) "New Criticism" and current Post-Structuralism tend to agree in disenfranchising the author, and many people now are disinclined even to consider the alternative. Hirsch demurs, and arguments like his deserve the careful attention, both from critics and sympathizers, that they receive here. Literary scholars and philosophers who are sympathetic to Continental as well as to Anglo-American styles of philosophy are among the contributors. "This is a timely book appearing as it does when postmodernist views of the death of the author are disappearing quickly from the scene. As a collection it exemplifies the best work that is being done on this problem at the moment, and it will no doubt inspire further debate." --The Journal of Aesthetics and Art Criticism "[T]his volume contains important articles illuminating the central debate over the role and relevance of authorial intentions in literary interoperation." --British Journal of Aesthetics
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14bs87q
9 Intention and Interpretation: from:
Intention Interpretation
Author(s) KRAUSZ MICHAEL
Abstract: The Author. To which author shall we address ourselves? The historical author? The reconstituted author? A postulated author? The work may have been produced over an extended period of time. perhaps in interrupted stages. Are we to assume that the author is
Book Title: Italian Irish Filmmakers- Publisher: Temple University Press
Author(s): Lourdeaux Lee
Abstract: "This penetrating study examines how these filmmakers confronted their cultural heritage and used it as a counterpoint to their depiction of mainstream America." --American Cinematographer In this unique film history, Lee Lourdeaux traces the impact of Irish and Italian cultures on four major American directors and their work. Defining the core values and tensions within each culture, and especially focusing on the influence of American Catholicism, he presents John Ford, Frank Capra, Francis Coppola, and Martin Scorsese as ethnic Americans and film artists. Lourdeaux shows each filmmaker on set with writers and actors, learning to bypass stereotypes in order to develop a shrewd reciprocal assimilation between his ethnic background and Anglo America. Beginning with D. W. Griffith's depiction of Irish and Italian immigrants, the author discusses Hollywood's stereotypical portrayals of ethnic priests, cops, politicians, and gangsters, as well as their surface acculturation in the movies of the 1920s. By the decade's end, John Ford was using all-American stories to embody the basic myths and tensions of Irish-American life. In his later westerns and foreign films, he tried to understand both Irish political strife and the key figures of Irish liturgy. Frank Capra pitted Italian family values against the Anglo success ethic, turning out social comedies about oppressed little people. Several decades later, Martin Scorsese and Francis Coppola were highly critical of their religio-ethnic heritage, though they gradually discovered that to outline its weaknesses, like the blind pursuit of success, was to fashion a critical mirror of mainstream America. Lourdeaux discusses a number of recent films by Coppola and by Scorsese that have not yet been analyzed in any book. And, in the chapter on Scorsese, a personal interview with the director reveals how his ethnic childhood shaped his work in film. Examining the conflicts within American culture, Lourdeaux shows how the filmmakers themselves had to confront the self-destructive aspects of their ethnic background, not only to accommodate WASP audiences but to better understand their own heritage. He also observes that ethnicity is a strong draw at the box office, as in The Godfather, because it creates a sense of the Other who can both be admired and at the same time ridiculed. Illustrated with scenes of the movies discussed, this fascinating film history tells how four of America's most famous filmmakers assimilated their ethnic backgrounds on set and on screen. "Mr. Lourdeaux walks a tricky path in analyzing the films of each [director]: avoiding the trap of excessively detailing their lives and many films, while steering clear of ethnic stereotyping. Those interested in ethnic influences on outstanding persons or in the production of films by four of the best will find the book enjoyable." --The Baltimore Sun "This is an invaluable book because it arouses critical awareness of the ethnicity underlying many Hollywood movies that might otherwise appear merely to represent American archetypes." --Journal of American Studies "A valuable addition to the literature on ethnic identity in film. The insights Lourdeaux offers into major figures like Griffith, Ford, Capra, Coppola, and Scorsese contribute significantly to our understanding of their films." --Virginia Wright Wexman, University of Illinois at Chicago "For a number of years now, church historians have been giving us an account of American Catholicism that is much richer and more varied than the older institutional accounts of the Catholic Church ever let on. In this comprehensive and insightful study, Lee Lourdeaux shows us how much the ethnic movies of directors like Ford and Capra, Coppola and Scorsese have to teach us as well about Irish- and Italian-Catholic mores and instincts." --John B. Breslin, S.J., Director "A wonderfully sensitive, intelligent study of the complex issue of how the Catholic imagination works in the creative personalities of those raised in the Catholic heritage." --Andrew M. Greeley
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14bsx1s
CHAPTER 3 John Ford and the Landscapes of Irish America from:
Italian Irish Filmmakers
Abstract: [Ford] is the spiritual descendant of D. W. Griffith. Like Griffith, Ford’s values are traditional and sentimental: the pure woman, the home, the family, law, decency, democracy. Like Griffith—and like the two other important Roman Catholic directors of the studio era, Frank Capra and Leo McCarey—Ford was a populist who praised the little people and the institutions that protected the little people while he damned those who selfishly twisted the system to grab money and power. (1981,
3 American Hegemony and the New Geography of Power from:
Hegemony
Abstract: In mainstream theories of world politics, the workings of political power are usually seen as a historical constant. They share the view expressed so clearly by Paul Ricoeur that “power does not have much of a history.”¹ At the same time, political power is overwhelmingly associated with “the modern state,” to which all states are supposed to correspond, but which is usually a version of France, England, or the United States regarded as a unitary actor equivalent to an individual person. Political power is envisioned in terms of units of territorial sovereignty (at least for the so-called Great Powers) that
6 Globalizing American Hegemony from:
Hegemony
Abstract: “Globalization” is one of the premier buzz words of the early twenty-first century. In its most general usage it refers to the idea of a world increasingly stretched, shrunk, connected, interwoven, integrated, interdependent, or less territorially divided economically and culturally among national states. It is most frequently seen as an economic-technological process of time-space compression, as a social modernization of increased cultural homogeneity previously national in character scaled up to the world as a whole, or as shorthand for the practices of economic liberalism spontaneously adopted by governments the world over.¹ I do not want to deny the truth in
7 The New Global Economy from:
Hegemony
Abstract: In recent studies of the world economy invoking the impact of globalization, the idea of “time-space compression” or its equivalents have dominated discussion among geographers and many others.¹ This idea postulates that revolutionary changes in communication and transportation technologies are producing a new global economy. In this chapter I challenge the adequacy of this idea for understanding the course of the contemporary world economy and the new uneven development it is producing. In its place I argue for the importance of the geopolitical role of the United States and the vision of world economic order—
transnational liberalism—which, post–1970s,
Book Title: The Roots Of Thinking- Publisher: Temple University Press
Author(s): Sheets-Johnstone Maxine
Abstract: "A significant contribution to the study of early humans, this book is a philosophical anthropology.... it makes genuinely novel, and highly persuasive, claims within the field itself." --David Depew In this ground-breaking interdisciplinary study about conceptual origins, Maxine Sheets-Johnstone shows that there is an indissoluble bond between hominid thinking and hominid evolution, a bond cemented by the living body. Her thesis is concretely illustrated in eight paleoanthropological case studies ranging from tool-using/tool-making to counting, sexuality, representation, language, death, and cave art. In each case, evidence is brought forward that shows how thinking is modeled on the body-specifically, how concepts are generated by animate form and the tactile-kinesthetic experience. Later chapters critically examine key theoretical and methodological issues posed by the thesis, Sheets-Johnstone demonstrates in detail how and why a corporeal turn in philosophy and the human sciences can yield insights no less extraordinary than those produced by the linguistic turn. In confronting the currently popular doctrine of cultural relativism and the classic Western metaphysical dualism of mind and body, she shows how pan-cultural invariants of human bodily life have been discounted and how the body itself has not been given its due. By a precise exposition of how a full-scale hermeneutics and a genetic phenomenology may be carried out with respect to conceptual origins, she shows how methodological issues are successfully resolved. "Ranging across the humanities and sciences, this thoroughly original book challenges both traditional metaphysics and contemporary cultural relativism. In their place, it persuasively develops a phenomenonological, tactile-kinesthetic account of the origins of thinking. This philosophical anthropology could not be more timely. It replaces the 'linguistic turn' with a promising new 'corporeal turn.'" --John J. Stuhr, University of Oregon "This work takes a much-needed stand in the inter-disciplinary field of philosophical anthropology. Sheets-Johnstone is well-read in the history of philosophy and in contemporary anthropology. The point of view she offers is inventive, insightful, well-established, and fruitful." --Thomas M. Alexander, Southern Illinois University at Carbondale
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14bt5v1
7 Hominid Bipedality and Sexual Selection Theory from:
The Roots Of Thinking
Abstract: Eberhard’s evidence for sexual selection through female choice of male genitalia¹ accords closely with Darwin’s original and preeminent concern with morphological aspects of sexual selection. Given the ambient Victorian culture of his time, it is not surprising that Darwin himself did not remark openly and directly upon male primate genitalia.² His cryptic and oblique references to “naked parts … oddly situated,” to “a part confined to the male sex,” or to “large surfaces at the posterior end of the body,”³ all belie his usual descriptive precision and clarity. Eberhard’s thesis that male genitalia function as “ ’internal Courtship’ devices,”⁴ that
Book Title: The Roots Of Thinking- Publisher: Temple University Press
Author(s): Sheets-Johnstone Maxine
Abstract: "A significant contribution to the study of early humans, this book is a philosophical anthropology.... it makes genuinely novel, and highly persuasive, claims within the field itself." --David Depew In this ground-breaking interdisciplinary study about conceptual origins, Maxine Sheets-Johnstone shows that there is an indissoluble bond between hominid thinking and hominid evolution, a bond cemented by the living body. Her thesis is concretely illustrated in eight paleoanthropological case studies ranging from tool-using/tool-making to counting, sexuality, representation, language, death, and cave art. In each case, evidence is brought forward that shows how thinking is modeled on the body-specifically, how concepts are generated by animate form and the tactile-kinesthetic experience. Later chapters critically examine key theoretical and methodological issues posed by the thesis, Sheets-Johnstone demonstrates in detail how and why a corporeal turn in philosophy and the human sciences can yield insights no less extraordinary than those produced by the linguistic turn. In confronting the currently popular doctrine of cultural relativism and the classic Western metaphysical dualism of mind and body, she shows how pan-cultural invariants of human bodily life have been discounted and how the body itself has not been given its due. By a precise exposition of how a full-scale hermeneutics and a genetic phenomenology may be carried out with respect to conceptual origins, she shows how methodological issues are successfully resolved. "Ranging across the humanities and sciences, this thoroughly original book challenges both traditional metaphysics and contemporary cultural relativism. In their place, it persuasively develops a phenomenonological, tactile-kinesthetic account of the origins of thinking. This philosophical anthropology could not be more timely. It replaces the 'linguistic turn' with a promising new 'corporeal turn.'" --John J. Stuhr, University of Oregon "This work takes a much-needed stand in the inter-disciplinary field of philosophical anthropology. Sheets-Johnstone is well-read in the history of philosophy and in contemporary anthropology. The point of view she offers is inventive, insightful, well-established, and fruitful." --Thomas M. Alexander, Southern Illinois University at Carbondale
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14bt5v1
7 Hominid Bipedality and Sexual Selection Theory from:
The Roots Of Thinking
Abstract: Eberhard’s evidence for sexual selection through female choice of male genitalia¹ accords closely with Darwin’s original and preeminent concern with morphological aspects of sexual selection. Given the ambient Victorian culture of his time, it is not surprising that Darwin himself did not remark openly and directly upon male primate genitalia.² His cryptic and oblique references to “naked parts … oddly situated,” to “a part confined to the male sex,” or to “large surfaces at the posterior end of the body,”³ all belie his usual descriptive precision and clarity. Eberhard’s thesis that male genitalia function as “ ’internal Courtship’ devices,”⁴ that
5 Discussion and the Varieties of Authority from:
Studies in Philosophy for Children
Author(s) Reed Ronald F.
Abstract: CHAPTER NINE OF
Harry Stottlemeier’s Discoveryis interesting for several reasons. First, by the ninth chapter the children have had a good deal of time to talk and to reflect on the nature of their talk. They are beginning to realize that the discussion patterns that they fall into when they talk about the subjects that occupy their attention in Chapters One through Eight may be qualitatively distinct from other sorts of discussion patterns.¹ That realization, of course, is inchoate, but, as evidence to support the claim that such a realization is beginning, one need only point to the last
6 Women, Children, and the Evolution of Philosophy for Children from:
Studies in Philosophy for Children
Author(s) Sharp Ann Margaret
Abstract: THERE IS SOMETHING wonderful, yet shocking, about waking up one morning and finding yourself in the midst of feminism in philosophy and Philosophy for Children. It seems like such a short time ago that both concepts were not only unheard of in professional philosophical circles but not even considered as possibilities in education. I remember myself in my freshman year at a Catholic girls’ high school. It was spring, and the nuns had told us that we would have a five-day retreat. Speakers (priests) would come to lecture us in the mornings, while the afternoons would be reserved for reflection
7 Discovering Yourself a Person from:
Studies in Philosophy for Children
Author(s) Sharp Ann Margaret
Abstract: However, I wonder how many teachers have analyzed with their students the concepts that underlie the chapter and which, at one time or another,
11 The Development of Reasoning in Children through Community of Inquiry from:
Studies in Philosophy for Children
Author(s) Thomas John C.
Abstract: JEAN PIAGET must be counted among the most influential scientists of our time. Were it not for his work, the field of developmental psychology and our understanding of the child would be far different. His theories and his experimental results have inspired a generation of admirers who have attempted to advance the field of study he pioneered. Even those who arrive at a different conception of the child often are able to do so only because of Piaget’s contribution to that understanding. Yet his conclusions are not without problems, nor have they gone unchallenged. The Philosophy for Children program is
18 A Letter to a Novice Teacher: from:
Studies in Philosophy for Children
Author(s) Sharp Ann Margaret
Abstract: Yes, you are right. I have taught
Harryfor many years to elementary students, college students, and teachers. There have been times, to be honest, when I have thought that if I heard the first chapter ofHarryread one more time I would
Program Notes from:
The Strange Music of Social Life
Author(s) Stowe John Chappell
Abstract: On January 2, 2007, an e-mail popped into my in-box from Ann Goetting. “An Invitation,” the subject line read. At the time, Ann was editor of the journal
Humanity and Society.She had enjoyed a book of mine about sustainable farmers, which her journal was reviewing. “I just want you to know that I would welcome a submission from you,” she kindly wrote. Sweet.
1 Strange Music: from:
The Strange Music of Social Life
Author(s) BELL MICHAEL M.
Abstract: Call me a sentimentalist, but I love Tchaikovsky’s
The Nutcracker.One of my favorite moments in it is the harp solo that immediately precedes the “Waltz of the Flowers.” Here, a waterfall of lush arpeggios holds the ear back for a moment, building anticipation for the great tune that follows, which I am listening to as I write these lines. This wash of notes is one of the best-known passages of the harp literature. But nevertheless it must be regarded as a musical curiosity—and, as I will come to, a sociological one as well. As everyone knows, the first
6 Why I Like Contemporary Classical Music and Contemporary Sociological Theory: from:
The Strange Music of Social Life
Author(s) KHAN SHAMUS
Abstract: I had never heard of classical music’s first principle until I read Michael Bell’s paper (that principle is “Do what you are told”). In fact, as a violinist, what immediately popped into my head as a “first principle” was “Play in tune!” This is exactly what I was told the first time I ever played for the pedagogue Dorothy DeLay (to be more accurate, I was told, “Sugarplum, you need to work on your intonation”). So I started to ask musicians I know—some known, some working on becoming so, and some just working—“What is the first principle of
Book Title: A Moral Military- Publisher: Temple University Press
Author(s): Axinn Sidney
Abstract: With revisions and expansions throughout, including a new chapter on torture,
A Moral Militaryis an essential guide on the nature of war during a time when the limits of acceptable behavior are being stretched in new directions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14btf9m
5 Prisoners of War from:
A Moral Military
Abstract: Few of the customs of war have undergone greater changes than those relating to the treatment of prisoners. In ancient times captured soldiers
9 The Dirty-Hands Theory of Command from:
A Moral Military
Abstract: If we take our subject seriously, the theory of leadership known as “dirty hands” must be considered. Without this theory, a discussion of military morality would seem unreal. Briefly, the theory holds that in order to govern an institution, one must sometimes do things that are immoral. To act properly as a mayor of a city, a chief of a police department, a head of a large corporation, or a commander of an engaged military unit, one must have morally dirty hands. Further, this theory insists, we do not want leaders who are so concerned with their own personal morality
5 1916 and Irish Republicanism: from:
Towards Commemoration: Ireland in war in revolution 1912-1923
Author(s) McGarry Fearghal
Abstract: By exploring the question of what republicanism meant to the rebels of 1916, before the Rising became burdened by the weight of its own myth, this chapter seeks to identify some connections between the history of an event and its commemoration. It emphasises how unpredictable the Rising’s success in creating popular support for republicanism was, and argues that this contingent outcome was largely a product of its wartime context. Although the Rising is now synonymous with republicanism, its ideological significance was less apparent at the time: many rebels fought for Irish freedom rather than a republic. The implications of this
6 Ireland and the Wars After the War, 1917–23 from:
Towards Commemoration: Ireland in war in revolution 1912-1923
Author(s) Horne John
Abstract: What happens if we enlarge the time frame of the Great War? European and world politics were militarised well before the war. In both Ireland and the Balkans, the violence that fed directly into the war started in 1912–13, as William Mulligan has shown in chapter 1. Continued militarisation of politics and far worse violence prolonged the fighting beyond 1918. In fact, the Great War was the epicentre of a larger cycle of conflict that did not finish until 1923, with the end of the war between Greece and Turkey, the resolution of the crisis over German reparations—which
8 Church of Ireland Great War Remembrance in the South of Ireland: from:
Towards Commemoration: Ireland in war in revolution 1912-1923
Author(s) Jones Heather
Abstract: It is 1987 and I am nine years old. My mother is preparing Sunday lunch in our home in a Dublin suburb, after our Remembrance Sunday service. We are not long home; I still have my poppy. On the radio the news is on. My mother suddenly turns to me, shock pale, and says, ‘There’s been a big bomb in Enniskillen.’ We listen to the news. Other people, wearing poppies like me, have been blown up and killed. I realise for the first time that remembrance can be dangerous. A Dublin Protestant child, I start to understand that, in the
5 1916 and Irish Republicanism: from:
Towards Commemoration: Ireland in war in revolution 1912-1923
Author(s) McGarry Fearghal
Abstract: By exploring the question of what republicanism meant to the rebels of 1916, before the Rising became burdened by the weight of its own myth, this chapter seeks to identify some connections between the history of an event and its commemoration. It emphasises how unpredictable the Rising’s success in creating popular support for republicanism was, and argues that this contingent outcome was largely a product of its wartime context. Although the Rising is now synonymous with republicanism, its ideological significance was less apparent at the time: many rebels fought for Irish freedom rather than a republic. The implications of this
6 Ireland and the Wars After the War, 1917–23 from:
Towards Commemoration: Ireland in war in revolution 1912-1923
Author(s) Horne John
Abstract: What happens if we enlarge the time frame of the Great War? European and world politics were militarised well before the war. In both Ireland and the Balkans, the violence that fed directly into the war started in 1912–13, as William Mulligan has shown in chapter 1. Continued militarisation of politics and far worse violence prolonged the fighting beyond 1918. In fact, the Great War was the epicentre of a larger cycle of conflict that did not finish until 1923, with the end of the war between Greece and Turkey, the resolution of the crisis over German reparations—which
8 Church of Ireland Great War Remembrance in the South of Ireland: from:
Towards Commemoration: Ireland in war in revolution 1912-1923
Author(s) Jones Heather
Abstract: It is 1987 and I am nine years old. My mother is preparing Sunday lunch in our home in a Dublin suburb, after our Remembrance Sunday service. We are not long home; I still have my poppy. On the radio the news is on. My mother suddenly turns to me, shock pale, and says, ‘There’s been a big bomb in Enniskillen.’ We listen to the news. Other people, wearing poppies like me, have been blown up and killed. I realise for the first time that remembrance can be dangerous. A Dublin Protestant child, I start to understand that, in the
7 Recapitulation and Recontextualization: from:
Meaning and Context in the Thanksgiving Hymns
Abstract: The heterogeneous character of the collection must be explained. The prevailing idea that some compositions basically expressed leadership issues whereas others expressed the sentiments of ordinary community members has not been very helpful. on the contrary, this
Chapter Four The Fisherman from:
Huihui
Author(s) Puleloa Michael
Abstract: When Auntie Girlie, a longtime community leader and the facilitator of this meeting, begins her PowerPoint slideshow, she says the plans are to extend the
Chapter Eight let’s pull in our nets from:
Huihui
Author(s) Anderson Jean
Abstract: We are the ones who clear the way for futures for memories the path is thickly-grown sometimes dark
Chapter Fourteen “I Lina‘la‘ Tataotao Ta‘lo”: from:
Huihui
Author(s) Perez Craig Santos
Abstract: My family migrated from Guåhan (Guam) to California in 1995, when I was a sophomore in high school. One of the reasons my parents decided to move was so that I could be better prepared to succeed in a “mainland” university. While I was excited about continuing my education, I had no idea how my family could afford college. After expressing this concern to my new high school counselor, he suggested I attend the Army recruiter’s presentation during the time when college recruiters visited our campus.
Introduction: from:
Joy and Human Flourishing
Author(s) Crisp Justin E.
Abstract: Why joy—and why now? It is perhaps counterintuitive for joy to occupy a central place in a Christian theology, or at least in a theology capable of taking seriously the state of the world in which we live. Have not the masters of suspicion sufficiently warned theologians away from commending religious sentiments that, in their spiritual purity, distract their subjects from the material situation of life and issue in a total flight from the world? Did not the manifold tragedies of the mid-twentieth century disabuse theologians once and for all of their Pollyanna-ish penchant for progress, their sure confidence
1 Christianity: from:
Joy and Human Flourishing
Author(s) Moltmann Jürgen
Abstract: My question at that time was this: How can we laugh and rejoice,
5 Calling and Compassion: from:
Joy and Human Flourishing
Author(s) Moschella Mary Clark
Abstract: The field of pastoral theology and care has been conceptualized as a form of religious response to human suffering. It is said that our research begins “at the point where human suffering evokes or calls for a religious response and sometimes at the point where a religious response is given and/or experienced.”¹ In light of this widely shared understanding, it is not surprising that, with a few important exceptions,² joy is as understudied in this field as it is in the other theological disciplines represented in this volume. Given the power and pull of experiences of suffering that call forth
Foreword from:
Foundational Theology
Author(s) Ormerod Neil
Abstract: While the initial seeds for this work go back to my own doctoral thesis,¹ the more proximate cause for the project was a celebratory dinner in which I happened to be sitting next to the eminent Australian theologian, and recognized authority on fundamental theology, Gerald O’Collins. Though we were both aware of one another’s work (who could not be aware of his work!), it was the first time we had met, and Gerald began talking about his recently published book on fundamental theology,
Rethinking Fundamental Theology. He noted that in this book he mentions Lonergan at the beginning and end
8 Heuristic Anticipation of Doctrines from:
Foundational Theology
Abstract: The task of foundations is not to preempt doctrines, but at the same time, sound foundations provide heuristic anticipations of doctrines, especially as these foundations emerge out of dialectical conflicts of interpretations of the history of doctrinal development. Without actually coming to the point of making a judgment, one can argue for the congruence of foundational categories with key doctrines such as Trinity, Incarnation, and Church. Many of the questions about the reasonableness of central doctrines are taken up in traditional fundamental theology, but in the form of apologetics and emphasizing credibility. Here, the goal is more modest, to show
10 Theological Method from:
Foundational Theology
Abstract: The overall aim of this book has been the development of theological foundations, a task conceived as a specialization or stage within a functionally differentiated and collaborative theological method. However, to this point, we have said little to explain the nature of that theological method, though it has functioned throughout this book. Elements of this method appear in (later) chapters where we distinguish the task of foundations from doctrines and systematics. Now it is time to make that method more explicit. Our method distinguishes eight interrelated theological tasks, each of which makes a distinct contribution to the theological project. Following
Foreword from:
Foundational Theology
Author(s) Ormerod Neil
Abstract: While the initial seeds for this work go back to my own doctoral thesis,¹ the more proximate cause for the project was a celebratory dinner in which I happened to be sitting next to the eminent Australian theologian, and recognized authority on fundamental theology, Gerald O’Collins. Though we were both aware of one another’s work (who could not be aware of his work!), it was the first time we had met, and Gerald began talking about his recently published book on fundamental theology,
Rethinking Fundamental Theology. He noted that in this book he mentions Lonergan at the beginning and end
8 Heuristic Anticipation of Doctrines from:
Foundational Theology
Abstract: The task of foundations is not to preempt doctrines, but at the same time, sound foundations provide heuristic anticipations of doctrines, especially as these foundations emerge out of dialectical conflicts of interpretations of the history of doctrinal development. Without actually coming to the point of making a judgment, one can argue for the congruence of foundational categories with key doctrines such as Trinity, Incarnation, and Church. Many of the questions about the reasonableness of central doctrines are taken up in traditional fundamental theology, but in the form of apologetics and emphasizing credibility. Here, the goal is more modest, to show
10 Theological Method from:
Foundational Theology
Abstract: The overall aim of this book has been the development of theological foundations, a task conceived as a specialization or stage within a functionally differentiated and collaborative theological method. However, to this point, we have said little to explain the nature of that theological method, though it has functioned throughout this book. Elements of this method appear in (later) chapters where we distinguish the task of foundations from doctrines and systematics. Now it is time to make that method more explicit. Our method distinguishes eight interrelated theological tasks, each of which makes a distinct contribution to the theological project. Following
Foreword from:
Foundational Theology
Author(s) Ormerod Neil
Abstract: While the initial seeds for this work go back to my own doctoral thesis,¹ the more proximate cause for the project was a celebratory dinner in which I happened to be sitting next to the eminent Australian theologian, and recognized authority on fundamental theology, Gerald O’Collins. Though we were both aware of one another’s work (who could not be aware of his work!), it was the first time we had met, and Gerald began talking about his recently published book on fundamental theology,
Rethinking Fundamental Theology. He noted that in this book he mentions Lonergan at the beginning and end
8 Heuristic Anticipation of Doctrines from:
Foundational Theology
Abstract: The task of foundations is not to preempt doctrines, but at the same time, sound foundations provide heuristic anticipations of doctrines, especially as these foundations emerge out of dialectical conflicts of interpretations of the history of doctrinal development. Without actually coming to the point of making a judgment, one can argue for the congruence of foundational categories with key doctrines such as Trinity, Incarnation, and Church. Many of the questions about the reasonableness of central doctrines are taken up in traditional fundamental theology, but in the form of apologetics and emphasizing credibility. Here, the goal is more modest, to show
10 Theological Method from:
Foundational Theology
Abstract: The overall aim of this book has been the development of theological foundations, a task conceived as a specialization or stage within a functionally differentiated and collaborative theological method. However, to this point, we have said little to explain the nature of that theological method, though it has functioned throughout this book. Elements of this method appear in (later) chapters where we distinguish the task of foundations from doctrines and systematics. Now it is time to make that method more explicit. Our method distinguishes eight interrelated theological tasks, each of which makes a distinct contribution to the theological project. Following
2 Understanding the Parables over the Past Century: from:
Puzzling the Parables of Jesus
Abstract: As was demonstrated in the last chapter, the parables of Jesus are texts that can be considered from three different perspectives. First, they are historical texts that arose in a particular time and cultural space and that are part of a history of tradition. Second, they are fictional texts that have a typical form and poetic style and that use literary devices. Third, they are texts notably addressed to their recipients, their hearers and readers, in order to evoke a process of thinking and rethinking that ultimately leads to deeper insights and even corresponding (re-)action. In order to understand parables,
2 Understanding the Parables over the Past Century: from:
Puzzling the Parables of Jesus
Abstract: As was demonstrated in the last chapter, the parables of Jesus are texts that can be considered from three different perspectives. First, they are historical texts that arose in a particular time and cultural space and that are part of a history of tradition. Second, they are fictional texts that have a typical form and poetic style and that use literary devices. Third, they are texts notably addressed to their recipients, their hearers and readers, in order to evoke a process of thinking and rethinking that ultimately leads to deeper insights and even corresponding (re-)action. In order to understand parables,
2 Understanding the Parables over the Past Century: from:
Puzzling the Parables of Jesus
Abstract: As was demonstrated in the last chapter, the parables of Jesus are texts that can be considered from three different perspectives. First, they are historical texts that arose in a particular time and cultural space and that are part of a history of tradition. Second, they are fictional texts that have a typical form and poetic style and that use literary devices. Third, they are texts notably addressed to their recipients, their hearers and readers, in order to evoke a process of thinking and rethinking that ultimately leads to deeper insights and even corresponding (re-)action. In order to understand parables,
2 Understanding the Parables over the Past Century: from:
Puzzling the Parables of Jesus
Abstract: As was demonstrated in the last chapter, the parables of Jesus are texts that can be considered from three different perspectives. First, they are historical texts that arose in a particular time and cultural space and that are part of a history of tradition. Second, they are fictional texts that have a typical form and poetic style and that use literary devices. Third, they are texts notably addressed to their recipients, their hearers and readers, in order to evoke a process of thinking and rethinking that ultimately leads to deeper insights and even corresponding (re-)action. In order to understand parables,
3 Abba Says, “Drop the G” from:
The Homebrewed Christianity Guide to Jesus
Abstract: I remember the first time I talked to someone who really had no clue about Jesus—she knew nothing about him beyond his birth story, death story, and accompanying holidays. Her name was Angela, and she was a college sophomore sent to interview a minister from the religion she was least attracted to. That’s probably not how it was written in the syllabus, but it definitely made for a conversation I wasn’t going to pass up.
Introduction from:
Citizenship in Heaven and on Earth
Abstract: In order to get a sense of the multifaceted nature of Karl Barth’s ethics, one thing to do is to conjure up before the inner eye images that western societies commonly associate with a long interval of the twentieth century such as the years between 1932 and 1967. This was the time it took Barth to publish his multi-volume
Church Dogmatics (CD),¹ which comprises both theology and ethics. Moreover, the various social, ecclesial and political contexts of his work are reflected in the fact that the critical edition of Barth’s works includes five volumes of individual smaller texts, written for
3 The Ethics of the Doctrine of Creation in Church Dogmatics III/4 from:
Citizenship in Heaven and on Earth
Abstract: The discussion of
CDII/2, chapter 8 detected a significant contradiction between ethical actualism on the one hand and the priority of the gospel over the law or the doctrine of election on the other. The ensuing volumes ofCDIII deal with the doctrine of creation. The subvolume discussing the ethical aspects of the doctrine of creation,CDIII/4, discusses those ethical questions that arise with regard to God’s work as Creator. In part, Barth explicitly retains the actualistic concept of ethics, especially at the beginning. Yet at the same time, he engages in the discussion of empirical phenomena,
9 The Wisdom in God’s Foolishness: from:
The Wisdom and Foolishness of God
Author(s) Hay Andrew R.
Abstract: The significance of Karl Barth’s exposition of 1 Corinthians in
The Resurrection of the Dead(Die Auferstehung der Toten; hereafterAT)¹ cannot be overlooked. The lectures comprisingATwere given in the summer semester of 1923, alongside those onDie Theologie der reformierten Bekenntnisschriften(The Theology of the Reformed Confessions).² As usual, however, Barth overextended himself for the series on the Reformed confessions, and found himself short of time in his 1 Corinthians lectures. But Barth still considered that what he had discovered over the hurried course of the lectures merited broader distribution, and they were published the year after
1 The invention of the self from:
Resisting history
Abstract: There are moments when the pursuit of history can seem truly unnerving. Sometimes that past which was meant to ground our ideas and conceptions gives way and reveals something stranger, alien and uncanny. Although such episodes are rare events in most historians’ lives, they form a recurring motif in fantastic literature, where they are widely associated with the breakdown of identity and personality. Stories of historians driven to madness and despair when their narratives are confounded recur repeatedly in novels, from Mary Ward’s
Robert Elsmereand the ghost stories of M. R. James to the works of modern authors such
Book Title: Acceptable words-Essays on the poetry of Geoffrey Hill
Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): WAINWRIGHT JEFFREY
Abstract: Geoffrey Hill has said that some great poetry 'recognises that words fail us'. These essays explore Hill's struggle over fifty years with the recalcitrance of language. This book seeks to show how all his work is marked by the quest for the right pitch of utterance whether it is sorrowing, angry, satiric or erotic. It shows how Hill's words are never lightly 'acceptable' but an ethical act, how he seeks out words he can stand by - words that are 'getting it right'. This book is the most comprehensive and up-to-date critical work on Geoffrey Hill so far, covering all his work up to ‘Scenes from Comus’ (2005), as well as some poems yet to appear in book form. It aims to contribute something to the understanding of his poetry among those who have followed it for many years and students and other readers encountering this major poet for the first time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155j67x
1 ‘Acceptable words’ from:
Acceptable words
Abstract: The first wonder of poetry lies in the immediate effects of language. How words are drawn from the myriad, their particular sounds heard and then associated by rhythm, and sometimes their visual appearance, constitutes the primary pleasure and amazement of verse. However great the repayments of re-reading and research might be, the experience of sensing the extraordinary in this dimension of language persists. It is the quality which led Milton in his pamphlet
Of Educationto identify poetry as ‘more simple sensuous and passionate’ than logic and rhetoric, not to exalt it above the philosophical arts but to insist upon
10 ‘In wintry solstice like the shorten’d light’: from:
Acceptable words
Abstract: This is the first stanza of John Milton’s ‘The Passion’, a poem he probably began and abandoned in 1630 (
Complete Shorter Poemsp. 119).¹ The penultimate line, as ‘In Wintry solstice like the shorten’d light’, recurs in Geoffrey Hill’sScenes from Comus, including in the very last lines of the work. The whole three-part sequence is timed close to this solstice, poised on the edge of ‘dark and long out-living night’: ‘over your / left shoulder or mine | absolute night comes / high-stalking after us’ (2.80).² Milton’s lines also point to another major preoccupation of Hill’s poem, music. As
The new aestheticism: from:
The new aestheticism
Author(s) Malpas Simon
Abstract: The very notion of the ‘aesthetic’ could be said to have fallen victim to the success of recent developments within literary theory. Undergraduates now pause before rehearsing complacent aesthetic verities concerning truth, meaning and value, verities that used to pass at one time for literary criticism. The rise of critical theory in disciplines across the humanities during the 1980s and 1990s has all but swept aesthetics from the map – and, some would argue, rightly so. Critical theory, of whatever variety, presented a fundamental challenge to the image of the old-style academic aesthete sitting in his (and it was always
10 Melancholy as form: from:
The new aestheticism
Author(s) Bernstein Jay
Abstract: We can date the end of the novel precisely: the last novel ever written was Flaubert’s
Sentimental Education, published in 1869. It is sometimes said that Flaubert’s work inaugurates the waning of theBildungsromanand the inauguration of the novel of disillusionment. But that says too little. Can there be aromanwithout theBildung?The unifying biographical form of the classical novel, paralleling the ambitions and trajectory of secularising modernity, chartered the formation, education, quest and achievement of identity and worldliness of its bourgeois heroes and heroines. What was previously narrative and adventure becomes in Flaubert a stutter, every
The new aestheticism: from:
The new aestheticism
Author(s) Malpas Simon
Abstract: The very notion of the ‘aesthetic’ could be said to have fallen victim to the success of recent developments within literary theory. Undergraduates now pause before rehearsing complacent aesthetic verities concerning truth, meaning and value, verities that used to pass at one time for literary criticism. The rise of critical theory in disciplines across the humanities during the 1980s and 1990s has all but swept aesthetics from the map – and, some would argue, rightly so. Critical theory, of whatever variety, presented a fundamental challenge to the image of the old-style academic aesthete sitting in his (and it was always
10 Melancholy as form: from:
The new aestheticism
Author(s) Bernstein Jay
Abstract: We can date the end of the novel precisely: the last novel ever written was Flaubert’s
Sentimental Education, published in 1869. It is sometimes said that Flaubert’s work inaugurates the waning of theBildungsromanand the inauguration of the novel of disillusionment. But that says too little. Can there be aromanwithout theBildung?The unifying biographical form of the classical novel, paralleling the ambitions and trajectory of secularising modernity, chartered the formation, education, quest and achievement of identity and worldliness of its bourgeois heroes and heroines. What was previously narrative and adventure becomes in Flaubert a stutter, every
Book Title: Douglas Coupland- Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): Tate Andrew
Abstract: This book is the first full-length study of Douglas Coupland, one of the twenty-first century’s most innovative and influential novelists. The study explores the prolific first decade and a half of Coupland’s career, from Generation X: Tales for an Accelerated Culture (1991) to JPod (2006), a period in which he published ten novels and four significant volumes of non-fiction. Emerging in the last decade of the twentieth century - amidst the absurd contradictions of instantaneous global communication and acute poverty - Coupland’s novels, short stories, essays and visual art have intervened in specifically contemporary debates regarding authenticity, artifice and art. This book explores Coupland’s response, in ground-breaking novels such as Microserfs, Girlfriend in a Coma and Miss Wyoming, to some of the most pressing issues of our times. Designed for students, researchers and general readers alike, the study is structured around thematically focused chapters that consider Coupland’s engagement with narrative, consumer culture, space, religion and ideas of the future.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155j7p4
3 ‘I am not a target market’: from:
Douglas Coupland
Abstract: Douglas Coupland is captivated by rubbish, its possible uses and its plural connotations. Motifs of household garbage, environmental pollution and technological junk are everywhere in his fiction and visual art – the substance of his work is frequently constructed from broken things, forgotten concepts, obsolete inventions and the many ‘time-expired’, disposable items that we routinely ditch. In his ‘Canada House’ exhibition (2003; 2004–5), for example, a number of sculptures incorporate salvaged odds and ends – discarded tin cans, plastic bottles, food packaging, shreds of clothing, broken buoys and the assorted, shop-worn treasures of the tenacious beachcomber – all of which are redeployed
1 Marlow: from:
Conrad's Marlow
Abstract: He has often been seen as Conrad’s autobiographical alter ego, since his narratives are based on Conrad’s own experiences in the ill-fated
Palestine(‘Youth’) or in the Congo (‘Heart of Darkness’). At the same time, Conrad and Marlow differ fundamentally in their ethnic background (Marlow is an Englishman, without Slavic origins) and their marital status (Marlow never marries, and becomes increasingly misogynist).¹
1 Marlow: from:
Conrad's Marlow
Abstract: He has often been seen as Conrad’s autobiographical alter ego, since his narratives are based on Conrad’s own experiences in the ill-fated
Palestine(‘Youth’) or in the Congo (‘Heart of Darkness’). At the same time, Conrad and Marlow differ fundamentally in their ethnic background (Marlow is an Englishman, without Slavic origins) and their marital status (Marlow never marries, and becomes increasingly misogynist).¹
1 Marlow: from:
Conrad's Marlow
Abstract: He has often been seen as Conrad’s autobiographical alter ego, since his narratives are based on Conrad’s own experiences in the ill-fated
Palestine(‘Youth’) or in the Congo (‘Heart of Darkness’). At the same time, Conrad and Marlow differ fundamentally in their ethnic background (Marlow is an Englishman, without Slavic origins) and their marital status (Marlow never marries, and becomes increasingly misogynist).¹
CHAPTER 3 Hélène Cixousʹ subject of love from:
The subject of love
Abstract: In an interview in 1996 with Hélène Cixous, Kathleen O’Grady broke something of a critical silence regarding the subject of Cixous’ relationship to religion. To the question of her personal relation to God, Cixous describes herself as ‘religiously atheistic’ (O’Grady, 1996–97). The statements that frame this disclosure, however, provide a context in which to read just what it is that she is implicitly distancing herself from and, more importantly, what it might be within religious discourses with which in practice she aligns herself. In the preceding sentence she said of God something she has said many times throughout her
Conclusion from:
The subject of love
Abstract: Question of the time of mourning: I do not cry in advance – I do not precede – Feeling of grace stronger than everything with me – In the combat between joy and mourning. (Cixous in Cixous and Calle-Gruber, 1997: 98)
3 Foucault and the ethics of subjectivity from:
The structure of modern cultural theory
Abstract: Michel Foucault wrote next to nothing specifically about the concept of culture, did not publish too much about art and barely addressed in a direct way the specific issue of creativity. He is sometimes assumed to be a postmodernist, and something of a pessimistic one. This chapter will argue that, to the contrary, Foucault was a modernist and that his work, especially in its late period, was saturated with the question of aesthetics – and, for that matter, with that of creativity – which, for him, was part of a bigger question than the issue of the socalled status of ‘ art’
5 Hegel: from:
Aesthetics and subjectivity
Abstract: Hegel’s work has come in recent years to exemplify many of the choices facing contemporary philosophy. The changed status of Hegel can, though, seem rather odd, given the labyrinthine nature of his texts, the huge divergences between his interpreters from his own time until today, and the fact that some of the philosophers who now invoke him come from an analytical tradition noted for its insistence on a clarity not always encountered in Hegel himself. Even contemporary interpreters range between those who still pursue his grand aims by trying to show how he offers a systematic answer to the major
8 Conclusion from:
Britain and Africa Under Blair
Abstract: I began this book with the idea that New Labour’s approach to Africa represented something different from foreign policy as usual. This position has often appeared difficult to defend: realist interpretations, those who pointed out the self-promotion or self-justification of politicians, and the sometimes justifiable charges of hypocrisy, all throw up compelling alternative explanations. None of these can be totally dismissed. There have been occasions on which British interests have been put before African welfare: the sale of a military air traffic system to Tanzania, and the tacit support for Ethiopian incursions into Somalia, for example. More common are examples
Book Title: Shakespeare and Spenser-Attractive opposites
Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): LETHBRIDGE J. B.
Abstract: "Shakespeare and Spenser: Attractive Opposites" is a much-needed volume that brings together ten original papers by the experts, on the relations between Spenser and Shakespeare. There has been much noteworthy work on the linguistic borrowings of Shakespeare from Spenser, but the subject has never before been treated systematically, and the linguistic borrowings lead to broader-scale borrowings and influences which are treated here. An additional feature of the book is that for the first time a large bibliography of previous work is offered which will be of the greatest help to those who follow up the opportunities offered by this collection. "Shakespeare and Spenser: Attractive Opposites" presents new approaches, heralding a resurgence of interest in the relations between two of the greatest Renaissance English poets to a wider scholarly group and in a more systematic manner than before. This will be of interest to Students and academics interested in Renaissance literature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155jd1q
Book Title: Time and world politics-Thinking the present
Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): Hutchings Kimberly
Abstract: This book offers the first authoritative guide to assumptions about time in theories of contemporary world politics. It demonstrates how predominant theories of the international or global ‘present’ are affected by temporal assumptions, grounded in western political thought, that fundamentally shape what we can and cannot know about world politics today. The first part of the book traces the philosophical roots of assumptions about time in contemporary political theory. The second part examines contemporary theories of world politics, including liberal and realist International Relations theories and the work of Habermas, Hardt and Negri, Virilio and Agamben. In each case, it is argued, assumptions about political time ensure the identification of the particular temporality of western experience with the political temporality of the world as such and put the theorist in the unsustainable position of holding the key to the direction of world history. In the final chapter, the book draws on postcolonial and feminist thinking, and the philosophical accounts of political time in the work of Derrida and Deleuze, to develop a new ‘untimely’ way of thinking about time in world politics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155jdgf
1 Introduction to the question of world-political time from:
Time and world politics
Abstract: IN
The Critique of Pure Reason, Kant argued that our grasp of the world is inescapably structured through space and time. In other words, whether we like it or not, our experience of any object is always located in a spatial field and temporal duration, conceived in Newtonian terms. The novelty of Kant’s argument was that he effectively bracketed the question of the ontological status of space and time, thus evading long-standing philosophical problems, such as those inherent in Zeno’s paradox of the arrow.¹ Instead Kant focused on demonstrating that they (space and time) are transcendental conditions of sensible experience
2 From fortune to history from:
Time and world politics
Abstract: CHAPTER 1 pointed to the ways in which accounts of world politics embody temporal narratives of repetition, progress and decline. The aim of this chapter is to deepen our understanding of the conditions of possibility of these temporal framings and the role that they play as resources for thought in the western social scientific imagination. In order to do this, I will highlight some of the contrasts and connections between neo-classical, Christian and secular historicist configurations of world, politics and time in European thought between the sixteenth and the nineteenth centuries. What follows is not an attempt to account for
3 Against historicism from:
Time and world politics
Abstract: THIS chapter examines accounts of political time that are premised on the critique of philosophy of history and historicism. We will begin by looking briefly at two thinkers at the end of the nineteenth century who offered alternatives to the conflation of
kairosandchronosin historicist and scientific accounts of time, Nietzsche and Bergson. This then sets the scene for exploring ways in which the assumptions and implications of historicism, in particular Marxist versions of historicism, have been challenged by the following thinkers: Arendt, Benjamin, Derrida and Deleuze. The arguments of these thinkers differ, but they all involve rejecting
4 Prophecies and predictions from:
Time and world politics
Abstract: IN the previous two chapters we have been exploring philosophical accounts of political time. In this and subsequent chapters we examine readings of contemporary world politics and the different ways in which they rely on and reproduce configurations of the relation between
chronosandkairosin their accounts of the world-political present. In this chapter our focus is on interpretations of the nature and direction of world politics after the Cold War, including the popular ‘end of history’ and ‘clash of civilisations’ narratives offered by Fukuyama and Huntington, and responses from the social science of International Relations during the 1990s.
5 Time for democracy from:
Time and world politics
Abstract: IN the previous chapter I argued that ‘scientific’ attempts to diagnose the post-1989 times of world politics, in spite of their explicit rejection of historicism, nevertheless depended on
kairoticmeta-narratives of political temporality. The familiar ghost of philosophical history, in which the scholar’s task is both to identify the ‘real’ mechanisms underlying historical development and to intervene, or enable intervention, positively in relation to time – to workwithoragainsttime – continued to be present. One of the reasons why post-Popperian social science ostensibly rejected historicism was because it was argued that historicism was normatively driven and incapable
6 Apocalyptic times from:
Time and world politics
Abstract: CHAPTERS 4 and 5 explored assumptions about the temporality of world politics at work in different bodies of literature, seeking to explain, understand and prescribe for the
presenttimes of world politics in the late twentieth and early twenty-first centuries. In all cases, it was clear that predominant voices in the social science of international politics, in post-Kantian theories of cosmopolitan democracy and in post-Marxist accounts of ‘empire’ and ‘multitude’ relied upon accounts of the relation betweenchronosandkairosthat echoed arguments previously encountered in Chapter 2. Rejecting Fukuyama and Huntington, and following Popper, International Relations scholars, both liberal
7 Thinking the present from:
Time and world politics
Abstract: THE previous three chapters have explored different approaches to thinking the ‘present’ of world politics. In every case, the diagnoses of, and prescriptions for, the current ‘times’ of world politics depended on assumptions about world-political temporality in which different conceptions of
chronosandkairos, and the relation between them, were embedded. All of the theories of contemporary world politics with which we have been concerned developed from two sets of assumptions: one about time as the ground for knowledge claims about world politics, and another concerning claims about the sources of agency and change within the world-political present. The aims
5 Motherhood and the household: from:
Mothers and meaning on the early modern English stage
Abstract: Domestic tragedies and city comedies do not adapt existing literary narratives, but emerge out of an engagement with contemporary circumstances and, in the case of domestic tragedies, often represent real events. They are not situated in some imagined other place, but in locations and spaces familiar to members of a contemporary audience with whose social world they are likely to engage. These plays emerge in the period between 1590 and the second decade of the seventeenth century at a time when the commercial theatre had, says Catherine Richardson, ‘grown immeasurably in confidence’ and embedded itself into its local environs so
4 Globalisation and conflict: from:
Contemporary Violence
Abstract: It may be argued that one of the defining features of contemporary world politics has been the alleged resurgence of insecurity as a source of different forms of war.¹ The end of the Cold War thus led to a reconsideration of questions of meaning in IR, alongside a broader set of debates about ‘asymmetrical’, ‘fourth generation’ and ‘irregular warfare’. At around the same time the Gulf War issued in a consideration about the role of technology, gesturing toward a form of state-to-state conflict shaped by air-power and list-based targeting. However in the years immediately after the Gulf War, US strategy
4 Globalisation and conflict: from:
Contemporary Violence
Abstract: It may be argued that one of the defining features of contemporary world politics has been the alleged resurgence of insecurity as a source of different forms of war.¹ The end of the Cold War thus led to a reconsideration of questions of meaning in IR, alongside a broader set of debates about ‘asymmetrical’, ‘fourth generation’ and ‘irregular warfare’. At around the same time the Gulf War issued in a consideration about the role of technology, gesturing toward a form of state-to-state conflict shaped by air-power and list-based targeting. However in the years immediately after the Gulf War, US strategy
4 Globalisation and conflict: from:
Contemporary Violence
Abstract: It may be argued that one of the defining features of contemporary world politics has been the alleged resurgence of insecurity as a source of different forms of war.¹ The end of the Cold War thus led to a reconsideration of questions of meaning in IR, alongside a broader set of debates about ‘asymmetrical’, ‘fourth generation’ and ‘irregular warfare’. At around the same time the Gulf War issued in a consideration about the role of technology, gesturing toward a form of state-to-state conflict shaped by air-power and list-based targeting. However in the years immediately after the Gulf War, US strategy
Book Title: The arc and the machine-Narrative and new media
Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): Bassett Caroline
Abstract: The Arc and the machine is a timely and original defence of narrative in an age of information. Stressing interpretation and experience alongside affect and sensation it convincingly argues that narrative is key to contemporary forms of cultural production and to the practice of contemporary life. Re-appraising the prospects for narrative in the digital age, it insists on the centrality of narrative to informational culture and provokes a critical re-appraisal of how innovations in information technology as a material cultural form can be understood and assessed. The book offers a careful exploration of narrative theory, a sophisticated critique of techno-cultural writing, and a series of tightly focused case studies. All of which point the way to a restoration of a critical - rather than celebratory approaches - to new media. The scope and range of this book is broad, its argumentation careful and exacting, and its conclusions exciting.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155jg5r
Book Title: The arc and the machine-Narrative and new media
Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): Bassett Caroline
Abstract: The Arc and the machine is a timely and original defence of narrative in an age of information. Stressing interpretation and experience alongside affect and sensation it convincingly argues that narrative is key to contemporary forms of cultural production and to the practice of contemporary life. Re-appraising the prospects for narrative in the digital age, it insists on the centrality of narrative to informational culture and provokes a critical re-appraisal of how innovations in information technology as a material cultural form can be understood and assessed. The book offers a careful exploration of narrative theory, a sophisticated critique of techno-cultural writing, and a series of tightly focused case studies. All of which point the way to a restoration of a critical - rather than celebratory approaches - to new media. The scope and range of this book is broad, its argumentation careful and exacting, and its conclusions exciting.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155jg5r
1 HISTORY AND HISTORIOGRAPHY from:
Rhetoric and the Writing of History, 400-1500
Abstract: The writing of history in the Middle Ages cannot be reduced to one single formula or definition. Instead, it straddled a huge variety of genres, covering – and often combining – world chronicles, annals, histories of communities, deeds of individuals, hagiographies, biographies, autobiographies and epic poems.¹ Medieval historiography therefore does not correspond to any fixed genre, in terms of either its form or its style – it could be written in prose, in verse or sometimes as both; it could be sung as a
chanson de geste; it could be sculpted or painted or presented in tableaux; in the case of the ‘estorie’
Introduction from:
Women’s writing in contemporary France
Author(s) WORTON MICHAEL
Abstract: The 1990s proved to be an exciting period for women’s writing in France. It was a decade in which publishers and the media celebrated a ‘new generation’ of writers, and writing produced by women assumed its place at the forefront of what is new – and sometimes controversial – on the French literary scene. Paperback publishers J’ai lu and Pocket both launched new series (
Nouvelle générationandNouvelles voixrespectively) devoted to new names, among them many new women authors. Thus, a wide-ranging readership was introduced to the work of writers such as Christine Angot, Virginie Despentes, Linda Lê and Lorette Nobécourt
4 Lost and found: from:
Women’s writing in contemporary France
Author(s) RYE GILL
Abstract: In 1998 Paule Constant won the Prix Goncourt for her seventh novel
Confidence pour confidenceto much controversy. Her novels had been shortlisted for the Goncourt several times before, and she had gained many other literary prizes. However, press coverage was generally of the opinion that, although the most prestigious French literary prize was long overdue to her,Confidence pour confidenceitself was not especially deserving of that glory. The controversial reception afforded this novel relates primarily to its subject matter: set in contemporary Kansas, USA, it portrays a group of middle-aged women the morning after a feminist conference. Described
7 ‘On ne s’entendait plus et c’était parfait ainsi’ (They could no longer hear each other and it was just fine that way): from:
Women’s writing in contemporary France
Author(s) STACEY SARAH ALYN
Abstract: In the first three of the four novels Agnès Desarthe has published at the time of writing –
Quelques minutes de bonheur absolu(1993),Un secret sans importance(1996),Cinq photos de ma femme(1998) andLes Bonnes Intentions(2000) – the binary opposition understanding–misunderstanding stands out as a central issue, particularly with regard to identity. What emerges is a relentless impulse on the part of the characters to be understood and to understand, or, more precisely, to be defined by, and to define, the other in absolutist terms. However, their dependence upon what are shown to be society’s generally accepted,
11 Experiment and experience in the phototextual projects of Sophie Calle from:
Women’s writing in contemporary France
Author(s) GRATTON JOHNNIE
Abstract: Born in 1953, Sophie Calle is both a writer and a photographer, and rarely one without the other. This double focus is accommodated in two main forms. The first, and the one that usually appears first, is the installation exhibited in an art gallery or museum, where photos hung at eye level or sometimes simply leaning against a wall are juxtaposed with framed printed texts. But Calle has also found a rewarding outlet in the form of book publications based on the same kind of text–photo juxtaposition – and, given the scope and objectives of this particular volume of essays,
2 The nightmare of the local: from:
Jonathan Lethem
Abstract: Amnesia is a kind of immobility. To obliterate connections between past and present is to preclude the possibility of movement or change in the future, to condemn oneself to the anaesthetised drudgery of the endless present. It is appropriate, then, that Jonathan Lethem so often employs spatial metaphors in his interrogations of the condition of American amnesia. In
Amnesia Moon(1995), which collides the road narrative with dystopian science fiction, the road performs this metaphorical function. Mikhail Bakhtin cites the road as an example of a literary chronotope, something he defines as ‘the primary means for materializing time in space
4 Far away, so close: from:
Jonathan Lethem
Abstract: So far it has been argued that there is a high degree of correspondence between form and content in Lethem’s work, and that the genre decisions he makes are integral to his view of the world as a series of semi-imagined subcultural groupings or, to reprise Rick Altman’s term,
‘constellated communities’(Altman, 1999: 161). In the eccentric family unit formed at the end ofAmnesia Moonand in Alice Coombs’ parallel campus world, one sees a yearning for workable mini-utopias congruent with the implicit (and sometimes explicit) ties formed between readers of genre fiction. Genres reflect, initiate and are complex
5 ʹWe learned to tell our story walkingʹ: from:
Jonathan Lethem
Abstract: In interview, Jonathan Lethem has repeatedly evoked the idea of ‘dreaming his way back’ to the borough of his birth. His tendency to divide his time between Brooklyn and other places such as Toronto or Maine he explains like this: ‘Dreaming my way back to Brooklyn seems to be a necessary part of loving it for me – continuing to also love it from afar’ (Birnbaum, 2004). Elsewhere, in ‘Patchwork Planet: Notes for a Prehistory of the Gentrification of Gowanus’, he remarks: ‘In the neighborhood of Gowanus, Boerum Hill, I’m forever a child’ (www.jonathanlethem.com). It is true that Lethem’s three
Conclusion from:
Jonathan Lethem
Abstract: Anyone who has read ‘Five Fucks’, ‘Sleepy People’ (both 1996) or
This Shape We’re Inmight find it surprising that Lethem claims to be an ‘extremely traditional writer’ (Personal Interview, 2009). He is ‘so devoted to the traditional means’ of ‘scenes and characters and dialogue and paragraph and plot’ and although he sometimes makes ‘intertextual jokes’, he believes there is nothing in his work to ‘threaten anyone short of the mandarins who just don’t want the Fantastic Four ever to be mentioned inside a novel’ (Personal Interview, 2009). Citing as a specific example the insertion of the ‘Liner Note’ into
17 Postmodern Scripture from:
Christian Theologies of Scripture
Author(s) Loughlin Gerard
Abstract: Postmodernism—the arrival of the “future now”—is already past. It is history. The postmodern may be what comes after (
post) the present, the now (modus), but people are already seeking what comes after the postmodern, while others who once used the term have given up on it because it is so unhelpful. At one level, of course, talk of the postmodern was just a way of indicating the “up to date,” the newer than new. But at a more serious level it indicated something about modern times, about those characteristics of modernity that have become so intense that they
6 Jesus and Moses from:
Jesus the Central Jew
Abstract: This book seeks to understand what can be retrieved of the historical Jesus; this does not always jibe with what the gospel writers thought of him. At no point, for instance, does Jesus claim to be Moses redivivus. However, the gospel brings Moses and Jesus together, and clearly the conjunction of the two imposed itself on the disciples. Sometimes texts are rather subtle and the name of Moses does not necessarily appear in them, although he serves as a model. With Paul Achtemeier, mention must be made of Jesus’s feeding of the five thousand, in parallel with the manna in
15 The Great Cry of Jesus on the Cross from:
Jesus the Central Jew
Abstract: Jesus is reported to have uttered several cries while being crucified. One of them is especially memorable. Jesus quotes in Aramaic—the vernacular language of the Jews of Palestine at that time—Ps 22:1, “My God, my God, why have you forsaken me?” (
eloi, eloi, lemah savakthani; in Hebrew,eli, eli, lamah ‘azavthani).² These moving words are fraught with their own set of problems, starting with the hard-to-believe note that the crowd thought Jesus was calling the prophet Elijah.³
16 Jesus and the Resurrection from:
Jesus the Central Jew
Abstract: A number of texts in the Scriptures present death as irremediable (see Pss 49:20; 88:9; Job 7:9–10; 14:7–22), but for Dan 12 and the “intertestamental” literature, faith in resurrection is a certainty (see 1 Enoch 51:1; 92:3–5; 2 Macc 7; 14:46; Wis. Sol. 2–4; 4 Ezra 7:32). In Jesus’s time, most Jews believed in the resurrection of the dead. Mark 12:18–27 (// Luke 20:27–38) reports Jesus’s rebuke of the Sadducees about this issue.¹ The entire New Testament presupposes Jesus’s resurrection. The gospel shows the disciples unanimously believing that Jesus, their Master, is alive and
Form versus Function: from:
Abiding Words
Author(s) Schuchard Bruce G.
Abstract: In 1985, Maarten Menken’s essay “The Quotation from Isa 40,3 in John 1,23”¹ signaled an important development in the direction of the work being done at the time to characterize the form of the explicit Old Testament citations in the Gospel of John.² Over a roughly ten-year time span, Menken continued to publish one after another article devoted to a focused treatment of each of the Gospel’s citations³ until, in 1996, his book
Old Testament Quotations in the Fourth Gospel: Studies in Textual Formrepublished the revised sum of his previous work, adding to it an introduction, a conclusion, and
ECONOMÍA POLÍTICA, INDEPENDENCIAS Y PROYECTOS DE NACIÓN EN NUEVA GRANADA DURANTE EL SIGLO XIX from:
Conmemoraciones y crisis
Author(s) Salazar Adolfo León Maya
Abstract: En los clásicos de la economía política se consolida una representación social de la producción de la riqueza como asunto nacional y de estado¹. Lo que la economía clásica pone en el centro de las preocupaciones intelectuales son aspectos propios de la vida social y política, de allí que en la economía política, el nuevo saber surgido entre los siglos XVII y XVIII, converjan ampliamente las teorías y filosofías políticas liberales en dimensión secular, racionalista, antimetafísica, laica y empírica.
3 Policing Mulids and Their Meaning from:
Cairo Contested
Author(s) Schielke Samuli
Abstract: A
mulid(plural,mawalid) is a saint’s festival. It is illustrative of the various ways a festivity and a city come together, at times mingling and at times in conflict. This chapter looks more closely at the mulid of Sayyida Nafisa, one of Cairo’s major festive events (See map 1).² The festivity takes place in and around the mosque of Sayyida Nafisa in a quarter named after its patron saint. Part of Khalifa district, the quarter of Sayyida Nafisa is a ‘popular area’ (hayy sha‘bi) at the edge of the old city of Cairo and the southern cemetery, old and
8 Extract from a Diary: from:
Cairo Contested
Author(s) Ibrahim Kareem
Abstract: “This is unbelievable!” I said, astonished to see this beautiful building for the first time. Meanwhile he, a British expert who used to work in Historic Cairo, looked at me out of the corner of his eyes, somehow proud of the fact that he knew something about my city that I did not. I must admit that it was shocking for me to discover this highly refined building a few steps off al-Dab al-Ahmar Street, very close to the well-known Bab Zuwayla, the southern gate of Historic Cairo. Despite the fact that I have been through this area hundreds of
Book Title: Tropical Apocalypse-Haiti and the Caribbean End Times
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): Munro Martin
Abstract: In
Tropical Apocalypse,Martin Munro argues that since the earliest days of European colonization, Caribbean-and especially Haitian-history has been shaped by apocalyptic events so that the region has, in effect, been living for centuries in an end time without end. By engaging with the contemporary apocalyptic turn in Caribbean studies and lived reality, he not only provides important historical contextualization for a general understanding of apocalypse in the region but also offers an account of the state of Haitian society and culture in the decades before the 2010 earthquake. Inherently interdisciplinary, his work ranges widely through Caribbean and Haitian thought, historiography, political discourse, literature, film, religion, and ecocriticism in its exploration of whether culture in these various forms can shape the future of a country.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt15r3x8s
4 Religion, Nature, and the Apocalypse from:
Tropical Apocalypse
Abstract: In
Failles,Yanick Lahens’s first book published after the earthquake of 2010, the author writes of seeing her husband after he returns from town on the evening of January 12, announcing that he has seen the apocalypse. This statement makes Lahens think immediately of her use of the same word in her last novel,La couleur de l’aube. She had hesitated, she says, before using the word, striking it out three times before finally writing: “The Apocalypse has already taken place many times on this island” (27). The word had remained with her well after the publication of the novel,
Conclusion from:
Tropical Apocalypse
Abstract: The Caribbean is a space defined by and conceptually inscribed in time: pre- and post-Columbian; colonial and postcolonial; pre- and post-emancipation; pre- and postrevolutionary; pre- and post-independence; and in Haiti’s case, pre- and post-occupation, pre- and post-Duvalier, and now perhaps, pre- and post-earthquake. In each case there is a radical and violent irruption in time that is not erased by the apparent movement into the “post-” period, but which instead continues to define time like an inescapable shadow so that any sense of a future truly liberated from the past (however that may be conceived of) remains hanging, suspended, in
1 Landscape Biographies: from:
Landscape Biographies
Author(s) Renes Johannes
Abstract: As an essential part of human life worlds, landscapes have the potential to absorb something of people’s lives, works and thoughts. But landscapes also shape their own life histories on different timescales, imprinted by human existence, affecting personal lives and transcending individual human life cycles. This combination of reciprocity and distinctness creates a strong but complex intertwining of personhood and place – an intertwining which most people become aware of during their own lifetime. It comes as no surprise, therefore, that the ‘co-scripting’ of landscapes and people figures prominently in literature, autobiographies and academic research, as well as in our
3 Biographies of Biotopes from:
Landscape Biographies
Author(s) Kolen Jan
Abstract: Even more so than the large urban networks of our time, the natural landscapes of the prehistoric past appear to have been anonymous entities, largely devoid of humans and lacking individual authorship. However, on closer inspection, even the most ‘anonymous’, ‘natural’ and ‘original’ of landscapes bears the imprint of human authorship and personal identity, not only in terms of past human presence and practices, but also in terms of aesthetic experiences, retrospective vision, scientific interpretation and naturalist engagement. For this reason, this chapter explores the possibilities of a biographical approach to places and landscapes that we conventionally experience as natural.
6 Places That Matter from:
Landscape Biographies
Author(s) Papmehl-Dufay Ludvig
Abstract: My wife and I recently bought a house. It is not a new one, it is nearly 120 years old and has been inhabited by farmers all of this time. It was built in 1892 on the remains of two older houses that were destroyed in a fire that same year. From people in the neighbourhood we have learned some details about people who resided in the house before we bought it, and through findings within the four walls we have come in close ‘contact’ with specific events in the history of the house, such as the covering of old
7 What Future for the Life-History Approach to Prehistoric Monuments in the Landscape? from:
Landscape Biographies
Author(s) Holtorf Cornelius
Abstract: Although things are not living beings, in a metaphorical sense they can be considered to have lives. Things are made; they often do something; and over time many things move from place to place. Their meanings and functions change in different contexts. As time goes by things age and eventually they end up at a final resting place where they gradually disintegrate. Things can reach very different ages, from a few minutes to many millennia, but once dead only very few are brought back, for example as antiques or collectables, and given additional meanings in a new life. Accounts of
14 Post-Industrial Coal-Mining Landscapes and the Evolution of Mining Memory from:
Landscape Biographies
Author(s) van Veldhoven Felix
Abstract: The landscape tells – or rather is – a story. It enfolds the lives and times of predecessors who, over the generations, have moved around in it and played their part in its formation. To perceive the landscape is therefore to carry out an act of remembrance, and remembering is not so much a matter of calling up an internal image, stored in the mind, as of engaging perceptually with an environment that is itself pregnant with the past (Ingold, 1993, p. 152).
15 Fatal Attraction from:
Landscape Biographies
Author(s) van der Laarse Rob
Abstract: Landscape and heritage form a strong couple in European culture. Since the Renaissance landscapes have been perceived as ‘art’ and valuated by scenic qualities, represented in painting and reproduced through design and architecture. This connoisseurship is still a basic assumption of heritage conservation and tourism, working under the fetish of authenticity by singling out aesthetic styles and iconic periods. Although recent biographical approaches to historical landscapes have opposed this reductionism by stressing long-term development, the landscape/mindscape nexus can – in my view – not be grasped by the prevailing metaphor of an archaeological layering of time. Alternatively, a more dynamic
11 René Cassin and the Alliance Israélite Universelle: from:
Post-Holocaust France and the Jews, 1945-1955
Author(s) WINTER JAY
Abstract: I will bypass the story of his wartime role as the
Introduction: from:
Narrative Criminology
Author(s) SANDBERG SVEINUNG
Abstract: Narratives are central to human existence. By constructing our lives as stories, we forge connections among experiences, actions, and aspirations. We know ourselves as
oneover time—one consistent moral actor or one unified group of moral actors—however numerous or varied the cultural story elements that we access and integrate into our self-stories. Our self-stories condition what we will do tomorrow because whatever tomorrow brings, our responses must somehow cohere with the storied identity generated thus far. Criminologists have made ample use of offenders’ narratives, mainly, albeit not exclusively, as vehicles for data on the factors that promote criminal
Introduction: from:
Narrative Criminology
Author(s) SANDBERG SVEINUNG
Abstract: Narratives are central to human existence. By constructing our lives as stories, we forge connections among experiences, actions, and aspirations. We know ourselves as
oneover time—one consistent moral actor or one unified group of moral actors—however numerous or varied the cultural story elements that we access and integrate into our self-stories. Our self-stories condition what we will do tomorrow because whatever tomorrow brings, our responses must somehow cohere with the storied identity generated thus far. Criminologists have made ample use of offenders’ narratives, mainly, albeit not exclusively, as vehicles for data on the factors that promote criminal
Book Title: The Secret Life of Stories-From Don Quixote to Harry Potter, How Understanding Intellectual Disability Transforms the Way We Read
Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Bérubé Michael
Abstract: In
The Secret Life of Stories, Michael Bérubé tells a dramatically different tale, in a compelling account of how an understanding of intellectual disability can transform our understanding of narrative. Instead of focusing on characters with disabilities, he shows how ideas about intellectual disability inform an astonishingly wide array of narrative strategies, providing a new and startling way of thinking through questions of time, self-reflexivity, and motive in the experience of reading. Interweaving his own stories with readings of such texts as Faulkner'sThe Sound and the Fury, Haddon'sThe Curious Incident of the Dog in the Night-Time, Kingston'sThe Woman Warrior, and Philip K. Dick'sMartian Time-Slip, Bérubé puts his theory into practice, stretching the purview of the study of literature and the role of disability studies within it. Armed only with the tools of close reading, Bérubé demonstrates the immensely generative possibilities in the ways disability is deployed within fiction, finding in them powerful meditations on what it means to be a social being, a sentient creature with an awareness of mortality and causality-and sentience itself. Persuasive and witty, Michael Bérubé engages Harry Potter fans and scholars of literature alike. For all readers,The Secret Life of Storieswill fundamentally change the way we think about the way we read.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt15zc6mw
Book Title: The Secret Life of Stories-From Don Quixote to Harry Potter, How Understanding Intellectual Disability Transforms the Way We Read
Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Bérubé Michael
Abstract: In
The Secret Life of Stories, Michael Bérubé tells a dramatically different tale, in a compelling account of how an understanding of intellectual disability can transform our understanding of narrative. Instead of focusing on characters with disabilities, he shows how ideas about intellectual disability inform an astonishingly wide array of narrative strategies, providing a new and startling way of thinking through questions of time, self-reflexivity, and motive in the experience of reading. Interweaving his own stories with readings of such texts as Faulkner'sThe Sound and the Fury, Haddon'sThe Curious Incident of the Dog in the Night-Time, Kingston'sThe Woman Warrior, and Philip K. Dick'sMartian Time-Slip, Bérubé puts his theory into practice, stretching the purview of the study of literature and the role of disability studies within it. Armed only with the tools of close reading, Bérubé demonstrates the immensely generative possibilities in the ways disability is deployed within fiction, finding in them powerful meditations on what it means to be a social being, a sentient creature with an awareness of mortality and causality-and sentience itself. Persuasive and witty, Michael Bérubé engages Harry Potter fans and scholars of literature alike. For all readers,The Secret Life of Storieswill fundamentally change the way we think about the way we read.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt15zc6mw
Book Title: A Godly Humanism-Clarifying the Hope That Lies Within
Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Author(s): George Francis Cardinal
Abstract: For Francis Cardinal George, the Catholic Church is not a movement, built around ideas, but a communion, built around relationships. In A Godly Humanism, he shares his understanding of the Church in lively, compelling prose, presenting a way to understand and appreciate the relationships of God to human beings and of human beings to one another. These loving relationships are continually made present to us in and through the Church, from the time of Jesus' first disciples down to our own day. We are introduced to how the spiritual and intellectual life of Christians, aided in every generation by the Holy Spirit working through the Apostles and their successors, resist the danger of splitting apart from one another. Though they take different outward forms at different times, both wisdom and holiness are made possible for every Christian of every station of life. Sign-posting his conversation by the milestones of his own spiritual and intellectual journey, Cardinal George invites us to view the Church and her history in ways that go beyond the categories of politics - through which we find merely human initiative, contrivance, and adjustment - and rather to see the initiative as God's first and foremost. God is the non-stop giver, we are non-stop recipients of his gifts, and the recent popes, no less than the Father of the Church, have made every effort to make us aware of the graces - that is, of the unearned benefits - that God confers on us as Catholics, as Christians, as believers, and simply as human persons. Pope Francis, he reminds us, contrasts human planning with God's providence, and this book is at once an exposition of that providence and a personal response of gratitude for the way it has operated in one man's life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt15zc91j
CHAPTER 2 An Integrated Life from:
A Godly Humanism
Abstract: The catholic intellectual tradition begins with Catholics who become intellectuals or intellectuals who become disciples of Christ in his body the Church. But because both discipleship and the intellectual life are universal in scope, the life and worth of Catholic intellectuals is lived in the Church and in society at large. The institutionalization of that conversation between the human intellect and the faith that comes to us from the apostles began with the conversion of philosophers in ancient Rome and moved, over the centuries, from their schools and their coteries of disciples to the monastic schools during feudal times, then,
CHAPTER 4 A Christian Intellectual in a Post-Christian Society from:
A Godly Humanism
Abstract: Our sense of what it means to be free in public life in modern times was set forth in the Treaty of Westphalia in 1648. In the German city of Cologne, there’s a small church right next to the famous cathedral. The church’s chapel is dedicated to St. Stephen and is under the pastoral care of the Dominican friars. It houses the tomb of St. Albert the Great. Albert was not originally buried there, and when they moved his body from its former grave, they opened his casket and found still-very-well-preserved vestments, most of his crozier, and his bones. Being
CHAPTER 5 A Christian Intellectual and the Moral Life from:
A Godly Humanism
Abstract: It is commonplace to note that, since the years of the Second Vatican Council, our world has changed culturally, morally, politically, ecclesiastically. At the close of the Council, there was not a single country outside the totalitarian world in which abortion on demand was licit. The great ideological battles of the time took place between the still vigorous Communist world and the Western democracies. Soviet premier Khrushchev threatened in 1956 that the economic machine of the Soviet Union would “bury” the West—and many Western intellectuals continued to believe that the Marxist-Leninist organization of the state offered the best hope
CONTEXT from:
Experiencing Scripture
Abstract: In the time of ancient Israel, it was
ISRAEL: from:
Experiencing Scripture
Abstract: Exodus 14, the text of Israel’s deliverance at the Sea of Reeds is very different from either Genesis 12 or Genesis 17. The different genres of Genesis 12 (speech, journey, anecdote) are not present. The sustained divine monologue of Genesis 17 does not recur. Instead, the text is in the form of a report of what happened when the fleeing Israelites were delivered from the pursuing Egyptian force. The paradox has not escaped later rabbis: deliverance for the Israelites means destruction for the Egyptians. In the midst of disturbance, deliverance brings joy; in times of tranquillity, destruction brings pain.
Book Title: The Church in China- Publisher: ATF Press
Author(s): Rule Paul
Abstract: China has been a challenge to Christianity since the beginning of modern times, and it remains so today. Here is a great civilisation comprising a quarter of humankind, yet largely untouched by Christian values and beliefs. Any theological evaluation of the state of world Christianity that does not take China into account is impoverished and radically incomplete.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt163t8f4
Introduction from:
The Church in China
Author(s) Rule Paul
Abstract: China has been a challenge to Christianity since the beginning of modern times and it remains so today. Here is a great civilisation comprising a quarter of humankind, yet largely untouched by Christian values and beliefs. Any theological evaluation of the state of world Christianity that does not take China into account is impoverished and radically incomplete.
The Church and its Ministries from:
From North to South
Author(s) Darragh Neil
Abstract: Schillebeeckx was acutely aware in his later writings of the different circumstances that shape people’s faith and theology. He was aware too that this diversity of cultures and politics was particularly urgent for the world of his time. He uses the word ‘situation’ as a term that stands over against ‘tradition’. ‘Situation’ then refers to the cultural, social and existential context of the people to whom the gospel is proclaimed here and now, the concrete situation in which the tradition of faith is handed on by Christians to new generations.¹
Same-Sex Marriage, the Australian Christian Lobby, and the Politicisation of Dietrich Bonhoeffer from:
The Bonhoeffer Legacy
Author(s) Lindsay Mark
Abstract: In October 2006, the then Australian Opposition Leader Kevin Rudd wrote an article for
The Monthlyin which he brought Dietrich Bonhoeffer briefly into the Australian public political consciousness. Rudd, who at the time was spruiking his credentials for the prime ministership through various social media and popular television shows like Channel 7’ sSunrise, wrote that Bonhoeffer was ‘without doubt the man I admire most in the history of the twentieth century’.¹ While Rudd’s own Christian faith was no secret, this was surely a strange and risky identification to make for someone who was seeking the highest office in
Bonhoeffer and the Yoke of Discipleship in Contemporary Australia from:
The Bonhoeffer Legacy
Author(s) Schild Maurice
Abstract: This paper touches on dynamic constitutive dimensions of Bonhoeffer’s life as a twentieth century Christian and disciple. In so doing it discerns the actuality of discipleship in his life and death as being integral to his legacy for those who follow. In his case the call of the Master meant a particular journey and its culmination in martyrdom; but the call is to Christians of every time and place to accompany the Christ who died. The paper is therefore unapologetic about linking Bonhoeffer and his witness with the challenges which face believers living among the cultural modes and religious ambivalences
‘Hospitality’ at the End of Religion from:
The Bonhoeffer Legacy
Author(s) McDowell John C
Abstract: So much has been written about the theologian from central Europe Dietrich Bonhoeffer as prophet, martyr, priest, that one of the challenges is to find something new and interesting to say about him. Too much passes the lips of hagiographers again to be in any way valuable in its right, slipping into an overextending of his life and work in what one might well call a hagiographic hubris – even a hagiographic hamartia. For too much writing he is made banal and sentimental, tamed by the emotivism that surrounds talk of him as something of a heroic white knight who rides
Bonhoeffer and the Politics of the Divine from:
The Bonhoeffer Legacy
Author(s) Brady Veronica
Abstract: ‘Render to Caesar the things that are Caesar’s and to God the things that are God’s.’ We all know the saying but history tells us how ambiguous it is. Like it or not, we all inhabit the City of Man. The cross, however, insists on the tension, sometimes an apparent antagonism, which exists between it and the reign of God. Bonhoeffer was profoundly aware of it: ‘God lets himself be pushed out of the world on to the cross’, he wrote, going on to argue therefore that ‘we cannot be honest unless we recognize that we have to live in
Same-Sex Marriage, the Australian Christian Lobby, and the Politicisation of Dietrich Bonhoeffer from:
The Bonhoeffer Legacy
Author(s) Lindsay Mark
Abstract: In October 2006, the then Australian Opposition Leader Kevin Rudd wrote an article for
The Monthlyin which he brought Dietrich Bonhoeffer briefly into the Australian public political consciousness. Rudd, who at the time was spruiking his credentials for the prime ministership through various social media and popular television shows like Channel 7’ sSunrise, wrote that Bonhoeffer was ‘without doubt the man I admire most in the history of the twentieth century’.¹ While Rudd’s own Christian faith was no secret, this was surely a strange and risky identification to make for someone who was seeking the highest office in
Bonhoeffer and the Yoke of Discipleship in Contemporary Australia from:
The Bonhoeffer Legacy
Author(s) Schild Maurice
Abstract: This paper touches on dynamic constitutive dimensions of Bonhoeffer’s life as a twentieth century Christian and disciple. In so doing it discerns the actuality of discipleship in his life and death as being integral to his legacy for those who follow. In his case the call of the Master meant a particular journey and its culmination in martyrdom; but the call is to Christians of every time and place to accompany the Christ who died. The paper is therefore unapologetic about linking Bonhoeffer and his witness with the challenges which face believers living among the cultural modes and religious ambivalences
‘Hospitality’ at the End of Religion from:
The Bonhoeffer Legacy
Author(s) McDowell John C
Abstract: So much has been written about the theologian from central Europe Dietrich Bonhoeffer as prophet, martyr, priest, that one of the challenges is to find something new and interesting to say about him. Too much passes the lips of hagiographers again to be in any way valuable in its right, slipping into an overextending of his life and work in what one might well call a hagiographic hubris – even a hagiographic hamartia. For too much writing he is made banal and sentimental, tamed by the emotivism that surrounds talk of him as something of a heroic white knight who rides
Bonhoeffer and the Politics of the Divine from:
The Bonhoeffer Legacy
Author(s) Brady Veronica
Abstract: ‘Render to Caesar the things that are Caesar’s and to God the things that are God’s.’ We all know the saying but history tells us how ambiguous it is. Like it or not, we all inhabit the City of Man. The cross, however, insists on the tension, sometimes an apparent antagonism, which exists between it and the reign of God. Bonhoeffer was profoundly aware of it: ‘God lets himself be pushed out of the world on to the cross’, he wrote, going on to argue therefore that ‘we cannot be honest unless we recognize that we have to live in
Chapter Eight Agents of ‘The Politics of Mysticism’ and the ‘Mysticism of olitics’: from:
Between the 'Mysticism of Politics' and the 'Politics of Mysticism'
Abstract: In the exploration of the emergence of a ‘mysticism of politics’ and a ‘politics of mysticism’ through developments in the nineteenth century a number of conclusions were suggested. It was proposed that the ‘mysticism of politics’ appears to gain currency precisely at times of political and social innovation in which there exists the experience of the potential of human agency according to an evangelical vision. Secondly, it was suggested that in a modern, liberal society in which it discovers itself as one voice amongst others the Church will tend towards a ‘politics of mysticism’ for social identity. In this sense,
Chapter Eight Agents of ‘The Politics of Mysticism’ and the ‘Mysticism of olitics’: from:
Between the 'Mysticism of Politics' and the 'Politics of Mysticism'
Abstract: In the exploration of the emergence of a ‘mysticism of politics’ and a ‘politics of mysticism’ through developments in the nineteenth century a number of conclusions were suggested. It was proposed that the ‘mysticism of politics’ appears to gain currency precisely at times of political and social innovation in which there exists the experience of the potential of human agency according to an evangelical vision. Secondly, it was suggested that in a modern, liberal society in which it discovers itself as one voice amongst others the Church will tend towards a ‘politics of mysticism’ for social identity. In this sense,
Book Title: God's Word and the Church's Council-Vaticann II and Divine Revelation
Publisher: ATF Press
Author(s): Monaghan Christopher
Abstract: The publication of the Vatican II document on Divine Revelation (Dei Verbum) was an exciting and challenging moment for the Church. While honouring the tradition, it also marked a quite dramatic development in the Church’s attitude to modern critical analysis of the Bible and encouraged study and reflection on it by all members of the Church. The golden jubilee of its publication is a timely moment for a book such as this. It contains essays on various aspects of Dei Verbum by authors from around the world. They write from the perspective of their respective disciplines of biblical studies, patristics, theology, liturgy, philosophy, and communications media. They situate the document within the Jewish-Christian tradition, assess its reception since Vatican II, and its implications for the future.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt163t8zw
Foreword from:
God's Word and the Church's Council
Author(s) Coleridge Mark
Abstract: Christians are sometimes included among the People of the Book. This is not quite true, or at least it is not true of Christians in the way it is of Jews and Muslims. Christianity takes the Bible very seriously, but that does not make it a religion of the Book. However important the Bible may be for Christians, it does not have the same status for them as the Tanak does for Judaism or the Koran for Islam. This is because Christianity is a religion of the Word rather than the Book. The figure of Jesus crucified and risen occupies
Introduction from:
God's Word and the Church's Council
Author(s) Monaghan Christopher
Abstract: The fiftieth anniversary of the Second Vatican Council’s Dogmatic Constitution on Divine Revelation (
Dei Verbum) is an opportune time to look back and to look forward: to see what it achieved and how it has contributed to the life of the post-conciliar Church. This volume provides critical reflections on these aspects ofDei Verbumby authors from around the world. In inviting their contributions a primary aim has been to see how the Council took up the challenge of the interpretation and use of the Bible in the modern world and the course it chartered for the future. The authors
2 Vatican II and ‘The Study of the Sacred Page’ as ‘The Soul of Theology’ (Dei Verbum 24) from:
God's Word and the Church's Council
Author(s) Moloney Francis J
Abstract: Among the many challenging developments that emerged from the Second Vatican Council, the Dogmatic Constitution on Divine Revelation,
Dei Verbum(henceforthDV), one of the last documents to be promulgated by Paul VI at the close of the Council on 18 November 1965, has an important place. The document is the result of a tortured history that ran across all sittings of the Council. It began with the rejection of the schema from the preparatory commission,De Fontibus Revelationis, in November 1962.¹ The subsequent discussion, sometimes bitter, at the Council and in the commissions and working parties, led to a
4 ‘I handed on to you . . . what I also received’ (1 Cor 15:3) from:
God's Word and the Church's Council
Author(s) Bergant Dianne
Abstract: ‘The living Tradition is essential for enabling the Church to grow through time in the understanding of the truth revealed in the Scriptures.’¹ These words from the Post-Synodal Apostolic Exhortation of Benedict XVI throw light on the relationship between Scripture and Tradition as understood by the Roman Catholic Church. It speaks of the revelatory character of the Scriptures, and of the Tradition as being living and dynamic as it opens the Church to the revelation of God. However, within the broader Christian Church, the relationship between Scripture and Tradition has been a source of contention and, despite the strides that
6 Dei Verbum: from:
God's Word and the Church's Council
Author(s) Campbell Antony F
Abstract: The invitation offered by the fiftieth anniversary of a Council document is a marvellous opportunity to look at the nature of an ecumenical council (such as Vatican II) and the nature of its documents. The nature of neither can be taken for granted. In days gone by, Council documents culminated in a series of propositions, each ending with ‘anathema sit’—let any person holding this view be considered anathema, an outsider. Vatican II did not do this. At the earlier Councils, it was probably felt that the anathema would hold its force for all time. The passage of time would
7 Dei Verbum and the Witness of Creation: from:
God's Word and the Church's Council
Author(s) Turner Marie
Abstract: In recent times, biblical interpreters have drawn on a range of interpretive approaches in order to ensure that the biblical text ‘may not simply be a word from the past, but a living and timely word’.¹ Among the more recent approaches have been ecological readings, which have arisen as a response to the ecological crisis and as a result of a growing sense of responsibility among biblical scholars and theologians towards God’s creation. The Old Testament book of Ecclesiastes (or Qoheleth) has evoked many conflicting responses over the centuries, mainly because of its recurring refrain of ‘vanity of vanities’ or
12 Dei Verbum and the Philosophy of Hans-Georg Gadamer from:
God's Word and the Church's Council
Author(s) Owens John F
Abstract: The relation between
Dei Verbum (DV) and the philosophy of Hans-Georg Gadamer can be discerned in a contrast that is drawn in a key paragraph in whichDVaddresses the question of interpretation. The paragraph begins by endorsing use of the historical-critical method, recommending attention to what the authors of the sacred texts originally meant, the literary forms they used, customary patterns of expression which prevailed at the time of composition, and so on. But the Council fathers add a qualifying paragraph, insisting that the scholarly enterprise should keep in mind ‘the content and unity of the whole of Scripture’,
Chapter Thirteen Unfinished Emmaus Journey: from:
In-Between God
Abstract: We live in a pressured, fractious and often violent world. We are all too familiar with the effects of disintegration in our personal lives and in wider society. As a result we seek peace and integration but it often remains a puzzle to us why such things seem so elusive or beyond our capabilities. We wonder whether we lack the patience and strength to craft a way forward, to remain on task and see something through to its conclusion. We are too aware at times that we lack the resilience required for the pursuit of peace and harmony; and for
Chapter Thirteen Unfinished Emmaus Journey: from:
In-Between God
Abstract: We live in a pressured, fractious and often violent world. We are all too familiar with the effects of disintegration in our personal lives and in wider society. As a result we seek peace and integration but it often remains a puzzle to us why such things seem so elusive or beyond our capabilities. We wonder whether we lack the patience and strength to craft a way forward, to remain on task and see something through to its conclusion. We are too aware at times that we lack the resilience required for the pursuit of peace and harmony; and for
Partnering the Waters in Luke 8:22–25 from:
Water
Author(s) Elvey Anne
Abstract: In recent years the predictions of climatologists that climate change is likely to prompt an increased frequency of extreme weather events seem to have been borne out in the experience of Australians. On Saturday 7 February 2009, fuelled by extreme heat and years of drought, fires swept through forests and towns to the north and east of Melbourne, Australia. In fires too fierce to fight and too swift to outrun, just over 170 people lost their lives; whole towns such as Marysville were destroyed, and countless native and domestic animals died or were injured. Around the same time, parts of
Book Title: Child Sexual Abuse, Society, and the Future of the Church- Publisher: ATF Press
Author(s): Regan Hilary D
Abstract: In November 2012 the Australian federal government announced the establishment of a ‘Royal Commission into Institutional Responses to Child Sexual Abuse’. This Royal Commission was set up after many years of reports of sexual abuse in Australia within religious institutions of various Christian churches, some state government inquiries and in the context of inquiries in other countries, most notably Ireland. The Royal Commission began its first hearing in April 2013. It has been forecast that the Commission will be hearing submissions for a number of years from witnesses, both from those who ask to speak to the Royal Commissioners and from those who will be asked to appear before the Commission. At the same time as the establishment of the Royal Commission, the Catholic Church in Australia established a Truth, Justice and healing Council to oversee the Catholic Church’s engagement with the Royal Commission. This collection brings together essays from biblical scholars, a church historian, theologians, ministers of religion from a number of churches, lawyers and a psychologist. They each address the issues of sexual abuse, society and the church in the context of the Australian inquiries. The volume ends with an overview of the processes engaged with by the Catholic Church and the State in the Republic of Ireland and reactions to these inquiries. The volume of essays considers sexual abuse from the perspective of the victims. What is to be done about the mess we are in over clerical sexual abuse? That question is puzzling concerned people today. This diverse collection offers them profitable reading, wherever they are coming from. It has enough useful suggestions and ideas to stimulate the calm, intelligent discussion now demanded by our communities.’ Edmund Campion, Australian Catholic University.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt163t9qr
Sexuality and the Clerical Life from:
Child Sexual Abuse, Society, and the Future of the Church
Author(s) Geraghty Chris
Abstract: Some little time ago I put myself on a training regime to toughen my ageing body to attempt a second walk on the Camino through France and over the border into Spain, on the ancient pilgrim track to Santiago de Compostella. With my friend Max, I took the train from Central Station, up the mountains outside of Sydney, past the little township where I had spent my youth in the seminary, to the railway station at Wentworth Falls, where we walked the narrow paths, climbing up and down hundreds of uneven steps. It was tough going but the scenery was
Dysfunctional Church Stares into the Abuse Abyss from:
Child Sexual Abuse, Society, and the Future of the Church
Author(s) Kelly Michael
Abstract: This time in the Church in Australia is tragic. The intervention by Cardinal Pell in mid-November, 2012, following the announcement by the Australian Prime Minister, Julia Gillard, of a Royal Commission into child sex abuse
The Space for Religion in Australian Society: from:
Child Sexual Abuse, Society, and the Future of the Church
Author(s) Babie Paul
Abstract: The 2012 establishment of the Australian Royal Commission into Institutional Responses to Child Sexual Abuse (‘the Royal Commission’)¹ focuses, for the first time, national attention on the ways in which religious organisations have dealt with matters that involve their interaction with the broader Australian society and its legal structures. The concern, seemingly well-founded, which lies behind the establishment of the Royal Commission, is that many religious organisations acted in ways which at best ignored and at worst actively sought to circumvent and pervert the operation of the law related to the abuse of children and others at the hands of
Introduction from:
Hermeneutics, Intertextuality and the Contemporary Meaning of Scripture
Author(s) Petersen Paul B
Abstract: More than 110 scholars, ministers, and administrators convened at Avondale College in Cooranbong, Australia, in the summer of 2003 for the first Bible Conference of its kind for a long time. They were there at the invitation of the South Pacific Division of the Seventh-day Adventist Church, and for many of the participants this was the first such conference ever. A word of gratitude is to be extended to the leadership of the Division, in particular Pastor Laurie Evans and Dr Barry Oliver, who had the vision and provided the funding for this and subsequent conferences.
The Use of Scripture in Cross Cultural Context from:
Hermeneutics, Intertextuality and the Contemporary Meaning of Scripture
Author(s) Darius Matupit
Abstract: In the past God spoke to our forefathers through prophets at many times and in various ways, but in these last days he has spoken to us by his Son, whom he appointed heir of all things, and through whom he made the universe.¹
Hermeneutics of Parable Interpretation in Ellen White Compared to Those of Archbishop Trench from:
Hermeneutics, Intertextuality and the Contemporary Meaning of Scripture
Author(s) McIver Robert K
Abstract: It is probably an exaggeration to date the interpretation of parables BJ and AJ—before Jülicher’ and ‘after Jülicher’—but only a slight one. From the second to the nineteenth centuries there was one dominant way to expound parables, that of allegory.¹ Jülicher’s work and publications changed that. His decisive contribution was to gather all previous comment on each of the parables, almost all of them allegorical in nature. An allegorical approach to a particular parable may well have had persuasive force when it was given, whether during the time of the church Fathers or during the Reformation. However, changing
Introduction from:
Opening the Bible
Abstract: The beauty of a volume like this for someone like myself, whether collected essays or selected writings, is to see the struggle unfolding over a lifetime with fundamental issues of Christian faith and issues of the Older Testament, driven by the pressure of the biblical text.¹ Perhaps the younger me is best characterised by the reaction of the assembled students of the United Faculty of Theology to my selfdescription as a ‘simple Bible Christian’, a statement that was greeted with a wave of spontaneous laughter. Apparently students were not convinced; but I was sincere. I certainly held to the Bible
Synchrony and the Storyteller from:
Opening the Bible
Abstract: As recently as some thirty years ago, an influential scholar, a member of the western biblical establishment, published comments suggesting a redactor might have ‘mindlessly mutilated’ a text and referring to ‘the more or less mechanical piecework of a redactor’. Such remarks may betray what Robert Polzin has pilloried as a view of ancient editing involving the ‘damned hands’ of ‘inept redactors’.¹ Where this view exists, any attempt at serious synchronic study would be dishonest and a waste of time. I fear that it has been around for a long time and in some quarters has not yet vanished. When
Pentateuch Beyond Sources: from:
Opening the Bible
Abstract: For some time now there has been controversy surrounding the academic understanding of the Pentateuch (Genesis to Deuteronomy) which for a couple of centuries or more has been dominated by the Documentary Hypothesis. In the intensity of study exploring specific texts and seeking some kind of consensus as to what might replace the Documentary Hypothesis, two factors have remained constant.¹ First, the widespread availability of biblical text is taken for granted. Second, concepts central to the hypothesis have been retained.
The Nature of Biblical Narrative from:
Opening the Bible
Abstract: Something of a paradigm shift has been in the making for a while in biblical studies. A future shape has yet to jell. The old historical-critical analysis has not been generating new life for a long time.¹ Other approaches have not so far struck lasting root. The interaction of developmental (cf diachronic) reading and interpretational (cf synchronic) reading is under way, but far from any agreed integration. A resolution of tensions between critical and literary approaches is still to be achieved. The factors involved in any shift are complex; among them, the often competing needs of faith communities, university communities,
Women Storytellers in Ancient Israel from:
Opening the Bible
Abstract: Something of a paradigm shift has been in the making for a while in biblical studies. A future shape has yet to jell. The old historicalcritical analysis has not been generating new life for a long time.¹ Other approaches have not so far struck lasting root. The interaction of developmental (cf diachronic) reading and interpretational (cf synchronic) reading is under way, but far from any agreed integration. A resolution of tensions between critical and literary approaches is still on the far horizon. The factors involved in any shift are complex; among them, the often competing needs of faith communities, universities,
Child Sacrifice and God Wrestling: from:
Opening the Bible
Abstract: The two most outrageous stories in the Bible have to be what Christians call the sacrifice of Isaac (in Jewish tradition: the binding of Isaac) and Jacob’s wrestling with God all night at the Jabbok. In a recent novel, a son asks his father, ‘Daddy, if God ordered it would you sacrifice me?’ The father replied, ‘No. For the first time in my life I would disobey God’. The son and his father were talking about historic time, this life, here and now. The son asked his question in historic time. Of course the father could only say, ‘I would
Rethinking Revelation: from:
Opening the Bible
Abstract: With the exception of some solidly conservative biblical scholarship, the assumption is widely accepted that the present text of the Pentateuch in its final form came together in post–exilic Israel. If most of the priestly writing (P) is situated around the time of Israel’s exile (587–538), it is clear enough that the final form of the Pentateuch has to be later. It should also be clear that the final form of the Pentateuch was not compiled in terms of the age of the texts concerned, but in terms of the chronology of their contents. The first chapter of
St Ignatius Loyola and God’s Unconditional Love from:
Opening the Bible
Abstract: How can we say God loves us? What does it mean to use that language? The fine tissue of the life of spirit needs constant attention and regular revising of its language to express what is sometimes so faintly felt, so easily swamped, and yet is at the core of human life. We need words that move us, words of wonder, words of wisdom. It can happen, though, that what sounds right at one moment may have implications that in the long term are not right. Love is one of those words that touches deeply. The need has been in
Dei Verbum: from:
Opening the Bible
Abstract: The invitation offered by the fiftieth anniversary of a Council document is a marvellous opportunity to look at the nature of an ecumenical council (such as Vatican II) and the nature of its documents. The nature of neither can be taken for granted. In days gone by, Council documents culminated in a series of propositions, each ending with ‘anathema sit’,—let any person holding this view be considered anathema, an outsider. Vatican II did not do this. At the earlier Councils, it was probably felt that the anathema would hold its force for all time. The passage of time would
POINT OF DEPARTURE from:
Thou Shalt Not Kill: A Political and Theological Dialogue
Abstract: Whosoever destroys one man is counted by Scripture as though he had destroyed the whole world. This is also true of Cain who killed Abel, his brother, as it is written in the Scripture:
The voice of thy brother’s blood crieth unto Me(Genesis 4.10). Though he may shed the blood (dm) of only a single person, the text uses the plural:dmym(“bloods”). This teaches us that the blood of Abel’s children, and his children’s children, and all the descendants destined to come forth from him until the end of time—all of them stood crying out before the
IN THE BEGINNING from:
Thou Shalt Not Kill: A Political and Theological Dialogue
Abstract: The problem of the double beginning of the human race is one of the many problems for interpretation posed by the account of Genesis. Born not of woman but created by God on the sixth day, Adam and Eve live in the Garden of Eden in a state that knows no sorrow, no toil, and, above all, no death. Already freed from the human condition of being born an infant, Edenic humanity is also missing the fundamental characteristic recognized as human by nearly all cultures: mortality. As in ancient Greece, in the prehistoric time before Pandora’s box was opened, there
Foreword: from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Daeninckx Didier
Abstract: One often recalls one’s “first love.” Without the eternal emotions to which it gives life, whole swaths of our culture would fall: song would practically disappear, poetry would be but a shadow of itself, miles of film would become obsolete, thousands of actors would be without lines to repeat, without secrets to tell, instruments would abandon the symphony, the ballerina would remain backstage, and white gouache would replace every nuance of color on the painter’s palette. We speak less of another, and yet just as decisive, just as earth-shattering “first time,” the shade of which could be defined through its
11 To Civilize: from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Blanchard Pascal
Abstract: The Other is a recurring anthropological figure in every field of social science. On the one hand, because figures of exteriority are the mirrors through which the substance and borders of collective identities are formed, transformed, firmed up, and reaffirmed.¹ The Other is endowed with “characteristics” that vary with the times, but that always fall between two poles: stigmatization and desire. On the other hand, figures of the Other play an invaluable part since they are the motors of all forms of social mobilization and are called upon and instrumentalized to inaugurate or consolidate networks of sociability, to structure or
18 Promotion: from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Lemaire Sandrine
Abstract: Logically, the production of the most dramatic forms of propaganda began to wane after the International Colonial Exposition of 1931—an event that corresponded with the height of Republican financial, material, and human propaganda on the colonies. Indeed, this had been a one-time event designed to spark interest, an interest that subsequently facilitated subtler forms of propaganda. This alternative form of propaganda, deep and sustained, indoctrinated the general public over the long term. After the colonial apogee of the 1930s, the Republic began to promote imperial ideology through its Bureau of Official Propaganda, which drew upon scholarly publications and other
Foreword: from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Waberi Abdourahman A.
Abstract: Vacation is a time of idleness, of
flânerieand light reading (even mindless newspapers are an ordeal), of collective and simple expression:
29 Crime: from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Einaudi Jean-Luc
Abstract: Over the course of imperial history, colonial violence in France has been primarily anti-Algerian. This can in part be explained by the scale of Algerian immigration to the metropole. Officially, more than 250,000 Algerians were living in France in the early 1950s, mainly in greater Paris, though also in the northeast and in the cities of Marseille and lyon. Most were factory workers and unskilled laborers who worked in the metalworking or chemical industries, in construction, public works, and mines. Also, of course, many were unemployed. Another reason for anti-Algerian sentiment was the fact that this labor immigration was organized
35 The Difficult Art of Exhibiting the Colonies from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Aldrich Robert
Abstract: Collecting and colonizing went hand in hand from the early days of European discovery and takeover of overseas domains. The first explorers, adventurers, and traveling scientists as well as the conquerors planting the flags of their nations over faraway lands acquired and returned to Europe with hundreds of thousands of exotic objects.¹ At a later stage, institutions involved in imperialist expansion—government ministries, the army and navy, geographic societies, religious orders—established collections in order systematically to exhibit ethnographic, artistic, and natural specimens from little-known places. These collections were constituted according to widely varying policies and perspectives, depending upon time
Foreword: from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Etienne Bruno
Abstract: In these troubled times when the question of memorial laws triggers emotional and polemic responses and when a president of the Republic (in this case Jacques Chirac) reclaimed the term “Civilization,” it seems legitimate to examine the anamnesis of a process that for too long has been buried in our subconscious as a result of amnesty laws and our collective amnesia. This process has its origins in our connection to those colonies that, during two centuries, marked our history, and that are today imprinted on all aspects of French society through the multiple legacies of
colonial culture.The social relations
36 Trouble in the Republic: from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Vergès Françoise
Abstract: I am less concerned with untangling the relationship between collective and personal memories, or between memory and history, than with showing once more the reticence on the part of the French academic “ nomenclature” to integrate the colony into discussions, notably, at a time of public debate on the slave trade, slavery, and colonialism. Critical and negative reactions have abounded with respect to what have often been considered poor “ group” manners, namely, the demand to be considered equal among equals. They were asked to be patient, to become civilized, to calmly wait at France’s door for the invitation to
38 The Army and the Construction of Immigration as a Threat (1961–2006) from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Rigouste Mathieu
Abstract: The army is far from being “
une grande muette.”¹ It communicates a lot, sometimes even on activities it presents as “secret,” and regularly generates reports on “threats”² and how to handle them, which are then disseminated as widely as possible throughout various networks. French military doctrine counts as part of its mission of national defense and the promotion of a “spirit of Defense” within the “collective consciousness.”³ In fact, it operates from the assumption that if the “national body” is to be able to defend itself in case of aggression, it must be mentally healthy, thus perfectly aware of potential
44 From Colonial Stereotypes to the Postcolonial Gaze: from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Wolton Dominique
Abstract: There exists no communication without a representation of the Other, because the Other is never a “reality,” but a virtuality. Admittedly, this virtuality was able to acquire the (illusory) image of a “reality” in the colonial space, because the colonized Other had a status, actually a nonstatus, that was relatively coherent within the dominant colonial stereotype. This means that some people were able to believe in a “real” connection between the image and the figure, making in some way a “being” out of this virtuality, that of the native. In our own postcolonial times, this vision admittedly persists, but not
45 Postcolonial Cinema, Song, and Literature: from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Ruscio Alain
Abstract: In 1962, a young, slightly chubby
pied-noir,still quite clumsy in front of the cameras, sang for the first time on French television: “I have left my country / I have left my home / My life, my sad life / Drags on without reason.” This was of course Enrico Macias. France had just exited—at last—a cycle of wars that had started in May 1940, and was entering a new era with this ballad from overseas. At the apex of the Empire, then during the wars of decolonization, artists—movie directors, artists, writers, singers—had often linked their
Foreword: from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Daeninckx Didier
Abstract: One often recalls one’s “first love.” Without the eternal emotions to which it gives life, whole swaths of our culture would fall: song would practically disappear, poetry would be but a shadow of itself, miles of film would become obsolete, thousands of actors would be without lines to repeat, without secrets to tell, instruments would abandon the symphony, the ballerina would remain backstage, and white gouache would replace every nuance of color on the painter’s palette. We speak less of another, and yet just as decisive, just as earth-shattering “first time,” the shade of which could be defined through its
11 To Civilize: from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Blanchard Pascal
Abstract: The Other is a recurring anthropological figure in every field of social science. On the one hand, because figures of exteriority are the mirrors through which the substance and borders of collective identities are formed, transformed, firmed up, and reaffirmed.¹ The Other is endowed with “characteristics” that vary with the times, but that always fall between two poles: stigmatization and desire. On the other hand, figures of the Other play an invaluable part since they are the motors of all forms of social mobilization and are called upon and instrumentalized to inaugurate or consolidate networks of sociability, to structure or
18 Promotion: from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Lemaire Sandrine
Abstract: Logically, the production of the most dramatic forms of propaganda began to wane after the International Colonial Exposition of 1931—an event that corresponded with the height of Republican financial, material, and human propaganda on the colonies. Indeed, this had been a one-time event designed to spark interest, an interest that subsequently facilitated subtler forms of propaganda. This alternative form of propaganda, deep and sustained, indoctrinated the general public over the long term. After the colonial apogee of the 1930s, the Republic began to promote imperial ideology through its Bureau of Official Propaganda, which drew upon scholarly publications and other
Foreword: from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Waberi Abdourahman A.
Abstract: Vacation is a time of idleness, of
flânerieand light reading (even mindless newspapers are an ordeal), of collective and simple expression:
29 Crime: from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Einaudi Jean-Luc
Abstract: Over the course of imperial history, colonial violence in France has been primarily anti-Algerian. This can in part be explained by the scale of Algerian immigration to the metropole. Officially, more than 250,000 Algerians were living in France in the early 1950s, mainly in greater Paris, though also in the northeast and in the cities of Marseille and lyon. Most were factory workers and unskilled laborers who worked in the metalworking or chemical industries, in construction, public works, and mines. Also, of course, many were unemployed. Another reason for anti-Algerian sentiment was the fact that this labor immigration was organized
35 The Difficult Art of Exhibiting the Colonies from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Aldrich Robert
Abstract: Collecting and colonizing went hand in hand from the early days of European discovery and takeover of overseas domains. The first explorers, adventurers, and traveling scientists as well as the conquerors planting the flags of their nations over faraway lands acquired and returned to Europe with hundreds of thousands of exotic objects.¹ At a later stage, institutions involved in imperialist expansion—government ministries, the army and navy, geographic societies, religious orders—established collections in order systematically to exhibit ethnographic, artistic, and natural specimens from little-known places. These collections were constituted according to widely varying policies and perspectives, depending upon time
Foreword: from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Etienne Bruno
Abstract: In these troubled times when the question of memorial laws triggers emotional and polemic responses and when a president of the Republic (in this case Jacques Chirac) reclaimed the term “Civilization,” it seems legitimate to examine the anamnesis of a process that for too long has been buried in our subconscious as a result of amnesty laws and our collective amnesia. This process has its origins in our connection to those colonies that, during two centuries, marked our history, and that are today imprinted on all aspects of French society through the multiple legacies of
colonial culture.The social relations
36 Trouble in the Republic: from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Vergès Françoise
Abstract: I am less concerned with untangling the relationship between collective and personal memories, or between memory and history, than with showing once more the reticence on the part of the French academic “ nomenclature” to integrate the colony into discussions, notably, at a time of public debate on the slave trade, slavery, and colonialism. Critical and negative reactions have abounded with respect to what have often been considered poor “ group” manners, namely, the demand to be considered equal among equals. They were asked to be patient, to become civilized, to calmly wait at France’s door for the invitation to
38 The Army and the Construction of Immigration as a Threat (1961–2006) from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Rigouste Mathieu
Abstract: The army is far from being “
une grande muette.”¹ It communicates a lot, sometimes even on activities it presents as “secret,” and regularly generates reports on “threats”² and how to handle them, which are then disseminated as widely as possible throughout various networks. French military doctrine counts as part of its mission of national defense and the promotion of a “spirit of Defense” within the “collective consciousness.”³ In fact, it operates from the assumption that if the “national body” is to be able to defend itself in case of aggression, it must be mentally healthy, thus perfectly aware of potential
44 From Colonial Stereotypes to the Postcolonial Gaze: from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Wolton Dominique
Abstract: There exists no communication without a representation of the Other, because the Other is never a “reality,” but a virtuality. Admittedly, this virtuality was able to acquire the (illusory) image of a “reality” in the colonial space, because the colonized Other had a status, actually a nonstatus, that was relatively coherent within the dominant colonial stereotype. This means that some people were able to believe in a “real” connection between the image and the figure, making in some way a “being” out of this virtuality, that of the native. In our own postcolonial times, this vision admittedly persists, but not
45 Postcolonial Cinema, Song, and Literature: from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Ruscio Alain
Abstract: In 1962, a young, slightly chubby
pied-noir,still quite clumsy in front of the cameras, sang for the first time on French television: “I have left my country / I have left my home / My life, my sad life / Drags on without reason.” This was of course Enrico Macias. France had just exited—at last—a cycle of wars that had started in May 1940, and was entering a new era with this ballad from overseas. At the apex of the Empire, then during the wars of decolonization, artists—movie directors, artists, writers, singers—had often linked their
3 On Faith, the Maternal, and Postmodernism from:
The Future of Continental Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Mooney Edward F.
Abstract: We know our futures from our adopted pasts. The Ur-text for Continental philosophy of religion is penned by the elusive Johannes de Silentio, sometime freelancer in the employ of Søren Kierkegaard, in 1843 in the Danish market town, Copenhagen. Surprisingly, the first really
intelligiblefigure of faith inFear and Tremblingis not the grotesque, or shall we say, monstrous father who binds Isaac at God’s command, but an unassuming mother weaning her child. De Silentio announces that his approach will employ resources both “dialectical” and “lyrical,” both philosophical and poetic. In the event, however, even these rival measures do
14 On Reading—Catherine Malabou from:
The Future of Continental Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Johnson Randall
Abstract: For the most part, it seems that we approach reading as if it were neutral in all valences of any consequence: language or other sign indicators on the screen or page are touched, usually by vision, and then processed by the synaptic workings of the brain for the purpose of transfer of information. And often all of this happens without awareness, even at times the very choice of what we read. Here, there is
pure—and isn’t thistheideological word par excellence that slips its way into speculative idealisms, scientific empiricisms, and even materialisms of the real—form of
15 Necessity as Virtue: from:
The Future of Continental Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Robbins Jeffrey W.
Abstract: In his “Circumscription of the Topic” from
The Varieties of Religious Experience,William James famously defined the religious sentiment as making “easy and felicitous what in any case is necessary.”¹ To James, it was this total and joyous acceptance of the universe that stood out as the most distinguishing characteristic of religious experience. Far from the dour or legalizing portrait of religion, James insisted it was by religious people’s genuine good cheer that religion separates itself from both stoicism and bare morality. “More than a difference of doctrine,” James insists; “rather [it is] a difference of emotional mood that parts
18 Prolegomenon to Thinking the Reject for the Future of Continental Philosophy of Religion from:
The Future of Continental Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Goh Irving
Abstract: In seeking to outline a future of Continental philosophy of religion, as is the objective of this volume, perhaps we first need to trace the trajectory of the future of Continental philosophy itself. It could be said that the latter endeavor had already been put in place by Jean-Luc Nancy sometime in 1986, when he posed the question of
qui vient après le sujet,or “who comes after the subject,” a question coming in the wake of the dissolution, or the putting to death, of thesubjectby Continental philosophy since the late 1960s. What Nancy’s question implies is that
19 Entropy from:
The Future of Continental Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Crockett Clayton
Abstract: If someone points out to you that your pet theory of the universe is in disagreement with Maxwell’s equations—then so much the worse for Maxwell’s equations. If it is found to be contradicted by observation—well, these experimenters do bungle things sometimes. But if your theory is found to be against the second law of thermodynamics I can give you no hope; there is nothing for it but to collapse in deepest humiliation.¹
3 On Faith, the Maternal, and Postmodernism from:
The Future of Continental Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Mooney Edward F.
Abstract: We know our futures from our adopted pasts. The Ur-text for Continental philosophy of religion is penned by the elusive Johannes de Silentio, sometime freelancer in the employ of Søren Kierkegaard, in 1843 in the Danish market town, Copenhagen. Surprisingly, the first really
intelligiblefigure of faith inFear and Tremblingis not the grotesque, or shall we say, monstrous father who binds Isaac at God’s command, but an unassuming mother weaning her child. De Silentio announces that his approach will employ resources both “dialectical” and “lyrical,” both philosophical and poetic. In the event, however, even these rival measures do
14 On Reading—Catherine Malabou from:
The Future of Continental Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Johnson Randall
Abstract: For the most part, it seems that we approach reading as if it were neutral in all valences of any consequence: language or other sign indicators on the screen or page are touched, usually by vision, and then processed by the synaptic workings of the brain for the purpose of transfer of information. And often all of this happens without awareness, even at times the very choice of what we read. Here, there is
pure—and isn’t thistheideological word par excellence that slips its way into speculative idealisms, scientific empiricisms, and even materialisms of the real—form of
15 Necessity as Virtue: from:
The Future of Continental Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Robbins Jeffrey W.
Abstract: In his “Circumscription of the Topic” from
The Varieties of Religious Experience,William James famously defined the religious sentiment as making “easy and felicitous what in any case is necessary.”¹ To James, it was this total and joyous acceptance of the universe that stood out as the most distinguishing characteristic of religious experience. Far from the dour or legalizing portrait of religion, James insisted it was by religious people’s genuine good cheer that religion separates itself from both stoicism and bare morality. “More than a difference of doctrine,” James insists; “rather [it is] a difference of emotional mood that parts
18 Prolegomenon to Thinking the Reject for the Future of Continental Philosophy of Religion from:
The Future of Continental Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Goh Irving
Abstract: In seeking to outline a future of Continental philosophy of religion, as is the objective of this volume, perhaps we first need to trace the trajectory of the future of Continental philosophy itself. It could be said that the latter endeavor had already been put in place by Jean-Luc Nancy sometime in 1986, when he posed the question of
qui vient après le sujet,or “who comes after the subject,” a question coming in the wake of the dissolution, or the putting to death, of thesubjectby Continental philosophy since the late 1960s. What Nancy’s question implies is that
19 Entropy from:
The Future of Continental Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Crockett Clayton
Abstract: If someone points out to you that your pet theory of the universe is in disagreement with Maxwell’s equations—then so much the worse for Maxwell’s equations. If it is found to be contradicted by observation—well, these experimenters do bungle things sometimes. But if your theory is found to be against the second law of thermodynamics I can give you no hope; there is nothing for it but to collapse in deepest humiliation.¹
3 Thinking about Class and Status in Morocco from:
Encountering Morocco
Author(s) McMURRAY DAVID A.
Abstract: A barber worked directly across the street from the front door of our apartment in the late 1980s in Nador, a gritty boomtown in the Berber north that was exploding with the repatriated wealth of emigrants away in Europe as well as the revenues from goods smuggled in from Spain and hash smuggled out of Morocco.¹ The barber’s shop was decorated with posters of stylish men, all of them models advertising various hair care products. He had hired another barber—a poorer man, judging by his attire—to help out during busy times, such as early evening hours and Fridays.
8 Shortcomings of a Reflexive Tool Kit; or, Memoir of an Undutiful Daughter from:
Encountering Morocco
Author(s) BARGACH JAMILA
Abstract: Bougainvilleas of multiple colors—burgundy, yellow, rose, and white—draped the walls of what seemed to be a timeless corner villa and separated it from the small streets paved with a puzzle, hard bricks that made a funny buzzing sound when cars drove on them. Past imposing metal doors, a tiny cemented walkway led up the stairs to the inside of this art-deco villa where there was practically no garden, except for the branches of the bougainvilleas shooting outside. This was the main headquarters of the nongovernmental organization (NGO) Solidarité Féminine, SolFem for short. The villa had been built around
9 Reflecting on Moroccan Encounters: from:
Encountering Morocco
Author(s) KAPCHAN DEBORAH
Abstract: I encountered Morocco when I was twenty-four years old. It was, in a sense, an accidental or at least a serendipitous encounter—but then again, it may have been fate. Before leaving New York in 1981, I was in music school studying flute performance. I was working on my second BA, begun after my graduation from the English Department at New York University (with a minor in French literature), and although I was feeling too old to be a freshman for a second time, I didn’t know what else to do. My only directive was a tired but workable cliché:
10 The Power of Babies from:
Encountering Morocco
Author(s) CRAWFORD DAVID
Abstract: Children are of obvious importance to farmers in the High Atlas Mountains of Morocco, as the main source of farm labor and as a preeminent cultural value. Villagers expect to have children, pity those who do not, ask about having them, pray to have them, and consider any equivocation about the desirability of parenthood to be a weird misunderstanding or a form of mental illness. For most of my time in Morocco, I was a researcher without children, so I existed in kind of bizarre, liminal state. I had the material resources and apparent capabilities of a man, but I
11 Afterword: from:
Encountering Morocco
Author(s) DWYER KEVIN
Abstract: The essays in this volume address topics that, for a long time, were present only at the margins of academic anthropological discourse, if they appeared at all. Issues like the anthropologist’s “identity”—the implications of the anthropologist’s origins and how anthropologists construct themselves in the field; the attractions and perils of friendship; the impact of the anthropologist’s family on fieldwork; suspicion of and hostility toward the anthropologist and competition between the anthropologist and others in the field; the tensions among the many aspects of an anthropologist’s humanity, and between the roles of researcher and judge, between “scientific” observation and judgmental
Book Title: Visual Culture in the Modern Middle East-Rhetoric of the Image
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): HAUGBOLLE SUNE
Abstract: This timely book examines the power and role of the image in modern Middle Eastern societies. The essays explore the role and function of image making to highlight the ways in which the images "speak" and what visual languages mean for the construction of Islamic subjectivities, the distribution of power, and the formation of identity and belonging. Visual Culture in the Modern Middle East addresses aspects of the visual in the Islamic world, including the presentation of Islam on television; on the internet and other digital media; in banners, posters, murals, and graffiti; and in the satirical press, cartoons, and children's books.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16gh950
FOUR Love and Violence from:
Degrees of Givenness
Abstract: The lover “declares his love as one declares war” (EP, 79; PE, 129). So insists Marion repeatedly in his investigation into the nature of the erotic phenomenon. War, of course, is here “only” a metaphor illustrating the absolute commitment of the lover. Yet the fact that this analogy is used several times throughout
The Erotic Phenomenonseems to indicate that it is not insignificant. Rather, it points to a problematic aspect of Marion’s treatment of eros, namely the extreme—if not almost militant—character of this love. And the careful reader finds the connotations of absoluteness exacerbated by another subtheme,
3 Convergent Suspicions from:
Law and the Public Sphere in Africa
Abstract: Palabreexorcises, channels, and sometimes authorizes the use of social violence. Its function is to stage public confrontation, a spectacle in which the self grapples with its other. And yet, there are institutions in Africa competing equally withpalabrein the project of reducing alterity. These include traditional powers, colonization, singleparties, and the false pluralism of present-day regimes.
Rationalities and Legal Processes in Africa from:
Law and the Public Sphere in Africa
Author(s) Burrell Jean
Abstract: Taking together place, time, and manner, it would be possible to describe “the encounter” as comprising at least six modes: fragility, temporality, activity, integrity, causality, and disparity.
3 Convergent Suspicions from:
Law and the Public Sphere in Africa
Abstract: Palabreexorcises, channels, and sometimes authorizes the use of social violence. Its function is to stage public confrontation, a spectacle in which the self grapples with its other. And yet, there are institutions in Africa competing equally withpalabrein the project of reducing alterity. These include traditional powers, colonization, singleparties, and the false pluralism of present-day regimes.
Rationalities and Legal Processes in Africa from:
Law and the Public Sphere in Africa
Author(s) Burrell Jean
Abstract: Taking together place, time, and manner, it would be possible to describe “the encounter” as comprising at least six modes: fragility, temporality, activity, integrity, causality, and disparity.
3. Christian Hate: from:
Kierkegaard and Death
Author(s) Buben Adam
Abstract: Should Søren Kierkegaard be listed among Christian apologists such as Anselm, Thomas Aquinas, or even Blaise Pascal? Focusing on his connections to Pascal, twentieth-century scholars Denzil G. M. Patrick and José Raimundo Maia Neto claim that Kierkegaard is, in fact, engaged in the same sort of project.¹ Kierkegaard himself seems to lend support to these claims when he states, “I have never broken with Christianity … from the time it was possible to speak of the application of my powers, I had firmly resolved to employ everything to defend it, or in any case to present it in its true
3. Christian Hate: from:
Kierkegaard and Death
Author(s) Buben Adam
Abstract: Should Søren Kierkegaard be listed among Christian apologists such as Anselm, Thomas Aquinas, or even Blaise Pascal? Focusing on his connections to Pascal, twentieth-century scholars Denzil G. M. Patrick and José Raimundo Maia Neto claim that Kierkegaard is, in fact, engaged in the same sort of project.¹ Kierkegaard himself seems to lend support to these claims when he states, “I have never broken with Christianity … from the time it was possible to speak of the application of my powers, I had firmly resolved to employ everything to defend it, or in any case to present it in its true
3. Christian Hate: from:
Kierkegaard and Death
Author(s) Buben Adam
Abstract: Should Søren Kierkegaard be listed among Christian apologists such as Anselm, Thomas Aquinas, or even Blaise Pascal? Focusing on his connections to Pascal, twentieth-century scholars Denzil G. M. Patrick and José Raimundo Maia Neto claim that Kierkegaard is, in fact, engaged in the same sort of project.¹ Kierkegaard himself seems to lend support to these claims when he states, “I have never broken with Christianity … from the time it was possible to speak of the application of my powers, I had firmly resolved to employ everything to defend it, or in any case to present it in its true
3 Sacred Suffering: from:
Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Throop C. Jason
Abstract: In anthropology, the sacred has long been viewed as a unique register of human existence that is at times intimately associated with human suffering in its various forms and manifestations. Often enfolded within such orientations to the potential sacredness of human suffering are associated moral experiences and ethical concerns. Whether understood in the context of painful rituals of initiation, in the light of pain-induced transformations in consciousness, in the context of particular salvational orientations to loss, illness, human finitude, and death, or in the tendency to view suffering as a means of sacrificing one’s own desires for the benefit of
5 Beneath the Horizon: from:
Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Downey Greg
Abstract: Conducting ethnographic research on sports, one encounters individuals who almost seem to transcend the boundaries of human capacity. Arguably, one of the thrills of athletic spectatorship is to witness skills and physical abilities honed to such an exceptional degree that an athlete’s performance beggars normal imagination, at once humbling us and at the same time thrilling. For an anthropological discussion of phenomenology, these kinds of people—agents operating at a level of efficacy beyond what is normally possible—offer an opportunity to interrogate the variation of human experience.
7 Experiencing Self-Abstraction: from:
Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Fisher Daniel
Abstract: This chapter draws on fieldwork in an Aboriginal Australian urban radio station in order to explore some experiential aspects of vocal cultural production and the forms of mediatized self-abstraction it entails. I focus on the ways that technical features of media production and the institutional life of media in contemporary Indigenous Australia come together to make perception available for problematization in the studio. At 4AAA, a large, Indigenous-run country music station with a broad and at times national audience, young Indigenous media trainees take on the task of representing Aboriginal Australia to itself, and their experience of learning to perform
9 Seared with Reality: from:
Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Desjarlais Robert
Abstract: While traveling in the Yolmo region of north central Nepal in the summer of 2011, visiting with families I have known for some time now, I grew fond of a small, blue stool. The family I was staying with kept this bench, a foot and a half or so tall, toward the back of their household, close to a washroom and a work table. The sides and four
Afterword from:
Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Jackson Michael
Abstract: At the time that I wrote my introduction to
Things as They Arein 1994, very few anthropologists drew methodically on phenomenology in their work, although many explored and exemplified, in their approaches to ethnographic research and writing, key phenomenological themes, such as embodiment, lived experience, inter subjectivity, the sensorium, space and place, and critical events. Today, as the present volume attests, a significant number of anthropologists are not only engaging creatively with phenomenology, but subjecting the philo sophical insights of Husserl, Heidegger, Merleau-Ponty, Arendt, Derrida, Levinas, and Sartre to empirical tests in a variety of contemporary settings, thereby revising,
3 Sacred Suffering: from:
Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Throop C. Jason
Abstract: In anthropology, the sacred has long been viewed as a unique register of human existence that is at times intimately associated with human suffering in its various forms and manifestations. Often enfolded within such orientations to the potential sacredness of human suffering are associated moral experiences and ethical concerns. Whether understood in the context of painful rituals of initiation, in the light of pain-induced transformations in consciousness, in the context of particular salvational orientations to loss, illness, human finitude, and death, or in the tendency to view suffering as a means of sacrificing one’s own desires for the benefit of
5 Beneath the Horizon: from:
Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Downey Greg
Abstract: Conducting ethnographic research on sports, one encounters individuals who almost seem to transcend the boundaries of human capacity. Arguably, one of the thrills of athletic spectatorship is to witness skills and physical abilities honed to such an exceptional degree that an athlete’s performance beggars normal imagination, at once humbling us and at the same time thrilling. For an anthropological discussion of phenomenology, these kinds of people—agents operating at a level of efficacy beyond what is normally possible—offer an opportunity to interrogate the variation of human experience.
7 Experiencing Self-Abstraction: from:
Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Fisher Daniel
Abstract: This chapter draws on fieldwork in an Aboriginal Australian urban radio station in order to explore some experiential aspects of vocal cultural production and the forms of mediatized self-abstraction it entails. I focus on the ways that technical features of media production and the institutional life of media in contemporary Indigenous Australia come together to make perception available for problematization in the studio. At 4AAA, a large, Indigenous-run country music station with a broad and at times national audience, young Indigenous media trainees take on the task of representing Aboriginal Australia to itself, and their experience of learning to perform
9 Seared with Reality: from:
Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Desjarlais Robert
Abstract: While traveling in the Yolmo region of north central Nepal in the summer of 2011, visiting with families I have known for some time now, I grew fond of a small, blue stool. The family I was staying with kept this bench, a foot and a half or so tall, toward the back of their household, close to a washroom and a work table. The sides and four
Afterword from:
Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Jackson Michael
Abstract: At the time that I wrote my introduction to
Things as They Arein 1994, very few anthropologists drew methodically on phenomenology in their work, although many explored and exemplified, in their approaches to ethnographic research and writing, key phenomenological themes, such as embodiment, lived experience, inter subjectivity, the sensorium, space and place, and critical events. Today, as the present volume attests, a significant number of anthropologists are not only engaging creatively with phenomenology, but subjecting the philo sophical insights of Husserl, Heidegger, Merleau-Ponty, Arendt, Derrida, Levinas, and Sartre to empirical tests in a variety of contemporary settings, thereby revising,
3 Sacred Suffering: from:
Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Throop C. Jason
Abstract: In anthropology, the sacred has long been viewed as a unique register of human existence that is at times intimately associated with human suffering in its various forms and manifestations. Often enfolded within such orientations to the potential sacredness of human suffering are associated moral experiences and ethical concerns. Whether understood in the context of painful rituals of initiation, in the light of pain-induced transformations in consciousness, in the context of particular salvational orientations to loss, illness, human finitude, and death, or in the tendency to view suffering as a means of sacrificing one’s own desires for the benefit of
5 Beneath the Horizon: from:
Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Downey Greg
Abstract: Conducting ethnographic research on sports, one encounters individuals who almost seem to transcend the boundaries of human capacity. Arguably, one of the thrills of athletic spectatorship is to witness skills and physical abilities honed to such an exceptional degree that an athlete’s performance beggars normal imagination, at once humbling us and at the same time thrilling. For an anthropological discussion of phenomenology, these kinds of people—agents operating at a level of efficacy beyond what is normally possible—offer an opportunity to interrogate the variation of human experience.
7 Experiencing Self-Abstraction: from:
Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Fisher Daniel
Abstract: This chapter draws on fieldwork in an Aboriginal Australian urban radio station in order to explore some experiential aspects of vocal cultural production and the forms of mediatized self-abstraction it entails. I focus on the ways that technical features of media production and the institutional life of media in contemporary Indigenous Australia come together to make perception available for problematization in the studio. At 4AAA, a large, Indigenous-run country music station with a broad and at times national audience, young Indigenous media trainees take on the task of representing Aboriginal Australia to itself, and their experience of learning to perform
9 Seared with Reality: from:
Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Desjarlais Robert
Abstract: While traveling in the Yolmo region of north central Nepal in the summer of 2011, visiting with families I have known for some time now, I grew fond of a small, blue stool. The family I was staying with kept this bench, a foot and a half or so tall, toward the back of their household, close to a washroom and a work table. The sides and four
Afterword from:
Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Jackson Michael
Abstract: At the time that I wrote my introduction to
Things as They Arein 1994, very few anthropologists drew methodically on phenomenology in their work, although many explored and exemplified, in their approaches to ethnographic research and writing, key phenomenological themes, such as embodiment, lived experience, inter subjectivity, the sensorium, space and place, and critical events. Today, as the present volume attests, a significant number of anthropologists are not only engaging creatively with phenomenology, but subjecting the philo sophical insights of Husserl, Heidegger, Merleau-Ponty, Arendt, Derrida, Levinas, and Sartre to empirical tests in a variety of contemporary settings, thereby revising,
3 Sacred Suffering: from:
Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Throop C. Jason
Abstract: In anthropology, the sacred has long been viewed as a unique register of human existence that is at times intimately associated with human suffering in its various forms and manifestations. Often enfolded within such orientations to the potential sacredness of human suffering are associated moral experiences and ethical concerns. Whether understood in the context of painful rituals of initiation, in the light of pain-induced transformations in consciousness, in the context of particular salvational orientations to loss, illness, human finitude, and death, or in the tendency to view suffering as a means of sacrificing one’s own desires for the benefit of
5 Beneath the Horizon: from:
Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Downey Greg
Abstract: Conducting ethnographic research on sports, one encounters individuals who almost seem to transcend the boundaries of human capacity. Arguably, one of the thrills of athletic spectatorship is to witness skills and physical abilities honed to such an exceptional degree that an athlete’s performance beggars normal imagination, at once humbling us and at the same time thrilling. For an anthropological discussion of phenomenology, these kinds of people—agents operating at a level of efficacy beyond what is normally possible—offer an opportunity to interrogate the variation of human experience.
7 Experiencing Self-Abstraction: from:
Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Fisher Daniel
Abstract: This chapter draws on fieldwork in an Aboriginal Australian urban radio station in order to explore some experiential aspects of vocal cultural production and the forms of mediatized self-abstraction it entails. I focus on the ways that technical features of media production and the institutional life of media in contemporary Indigenous Australia come together to make perception available for problematization in the studio. At 4AAA, a large, Indigenous-run country music station with a broad and at times national audience, young Indigenous media trainees take on the task of representing Aboriginal Australia to itself, and their experience of learning to perform
9 Seared with Reality: from:
Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Desjarlais Robert
Abstract: While traveling in the Yolmo region of north central Nepal in the summer of 2011, visiting with families I have known for some time now, I grew fond of a small, blue stool. The family I was staying with kept this bench, a foot and a half or so tall, toward the back of their household, close to a washroom and a work table. The sides and four
Afterword from:
Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Jackson Michael
Abstract: At the time that I wrote my introduction to
Things as They Arein 1994, very few anthropologists drew methodically on phenomenology in their work, although many explored and exemplified, in their approaches to ethnographic research and writing, key phenomenological themes, such as embodiment, lived experience, inter subjectivity, the sensorium, space and place, and critical events. Today, as the present volume attests, a significant number of anthropologists are not only engaging creatively with phenomenology, but subjecting the philo sophical insights of Husserl, Heidegger, Merleau-Ponty, Arendt, Derrida, Levinas, and Sartre to empirical tests in a variety of contemporary settings, thereby revising,
3 Sacred Suffering: from:
Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Throop C. Jason
Abstract: In anthropology, the sacred has long been viewed as a unique register of human existence that is at times intimately associated with human suffering in its various forms and manifestations. Often enfolded within such orientations to the potential sacredness of human suffering are associated moral experiences and ethical concerns. Whether understood in the context of painful rituals of initiation, in the light of pain-induced transformations in consciousness, in the context of particular salvational orientations to loss, illness, human finitude, and death, or in the tendency to view suffering as a means of sacrificing one’s own desires for the benefit of
5 Beneath the Horizon: from:
Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Downey Greg
Abstract: Conducting ethnographic research on sports, one encounters individuals who almost seem to transcend the boundaries of human capacity. Arguably, one of the thrills of athletic spectatorship is to witness skills and physical abilities honed to such an exceptional degree that an athlete’s performance beggars normal imagination, at once humbling us and at the same time thrilling. For an anthropological discussion of phenomenology, these kinds of people—agents operating at a level of efficacy beyond what is normally possible—offer an opportunity to interrogate the variation of human experience.
7 Experiencing Self-Abstraction: from:
Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Fisher Daniel
Abstract: This chapter draws on fieldwork in an Aboriginal Australian urban radio station in order to explore some experiential aspects of vocal cultural production and the forms of mediatized self-abstraction it entails. I focus on the ways that technical features of media production and the institutional life of media in contemporary Indigenous Australia come together to make perception available for problematization in the studio. At 4AAA, a large, Indigenous-run country music station with a broad and at times national audience, young Indigenous media trainees take on the task of representing Aboriginal Australia to itself, and their experience of learning to perform
9 Seared with Reality: from:
Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Desjarlais Robert
Abstract: While traveling in the Yolmo region of north central Nepal in the summer of 2011, visiting with families I have known for some time now, I grew fond of a small, blue stool. The family I was staying with kept this bench, a foot and a half or so tall, toward the back of their household, close to a washroom and a work table. The sides and four
Afterword from:
Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Jackson Michael
Abstract: At the time that I wrote my introduction to
Things as They Arein 1994, very few anthropologists drew methodically on phenomenology in their work, although many explored and exemplified, in their approaches to ethnographic research and writing, key phenomenological themes, such as embodiment, lived experience, inter subjectivity, the sensorium, space and place, and critical events. Today, as the present volume attests, a significant number of anthropologists are not only engaging creatively with phenomenology, but subjecting the philo sophical insights of Husserl, Heidegger, Merleau-Ponty, Arendt, Derrida, Levinas, and Sartre to empirical tests in a variety of contemporary settings, thereby revising,
3 Sacred Suffering: from:
Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Throop C. Jason
Abstract: In anthropology, the sacred has long been viewed as a unique register of human existence that is at times intimately associated with human suffering in its various forms and manifestations. Often enfolded within such orientations to the potential sacredness of human suffering are associated moral experiences and ethical concerns. Whether understood in the context of painful rituals of initiation, in the light of pain-induced transformations in consciousness, in the context of particular salvational orientations to loss, illness, human finitude, and death, or in the tendency to view suffering as a means of sacrificing one’s own desires for the benefit of
5 Beneath the Horizon: from:
Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Downey Greg
Abstract: Conducting ethnographic research on sports, one encounters individuals who almost seem to transcend the boundaries of human capacity. Arguably, one of the thrills of athletic spectatorship is to witness skills and physical abilities honed to such an exceptional degree that an athlete’s performance beggars normal imagination, at once humbling us and at the same time thrilling. For an anthropological discussion of phenomenology, these kinds of people—agents operating at a level of efficacy beyond what is normally possible—offer an opportunity to interrogate the variation of human experience.
7 Experiencing Self-Abstraction: from:
Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Fisher Daniel
Abstract: This chapter draws on fieldwork in an Aboriginal Australian urban radio station in order to explore some experiential aspects of vocal cultural production and the forms of mediatized self-abstraction it entails. I focus on the ways that technical features of media production and the institutional life of media in contemporary Indigenous Australia come together to make perception available for problematization in the studio. At 4AAA, a large, Indigenous-run country music station with a broad and at times national audience, young Indigenous media trainees take on the task of representing Aboriginal Australia to itself, and their experience of learning to perform
9 Seared with Reality: from:
Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Desjarlais Robert
Abstract: While traveling in the Yolmo region of north central Nepal in the summer of 2011, visiting with families I have known for some time now, I grew fond of a small, blue stool. The family I was staying with kept this bench, a foot and a half or so tall, toward the back of their household, close to a washroom and a work table. The sides and four
Afterword from:
Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Jackson Michael
Abstract: At the time that I wrote my introduction to
Things as They Arein 1994, very few anthropologists drew methodically on phenomenology in their work, although many explored and exemplified, in their approaches to ethnographic research and writing, key phenomenological themes, such as embodiment, lived experience, inter subjectivity, the sensorium, space and place, and critical events. Today, as the present volume attests, a significant number of anthropologists are not only engaging creatively with phenomenology, but subjecting the philo sophical insights of Husserl, Heidegger, Merleau-Ponty, Arendt, Derrida, Levinas, and Sartre to empirical tests in a variety of contemporary settings, thereby revising,
TEN Ecosophy, Sophophily, and Philotheria from:
The Rigor of a Certain Inhumanity
Abstract: Once upon a time I took part in a trek along a network of valleys to the base camp of the 1970 British expedition to the south summit of Annapurna in the Himalayas. Although our final destination was merely the edge of the Hiunchuli glacier, our sirdar Yong Tenzing acceded to my request that I might proceed on my own to a cairn a little higher up. On top of the cairn was a Norwegian 10-
ørecoin. Had this been placed there, I mused, by the philosopher and mountaineer Arne Naess with some of whose writings I was familiar? If
TEN Ecosophy, Sophophily, and Philotheria from:
The Rigor of a Certain Inhumanity
Abstract: Once upon a time I took part in a trek along a network of valleys to the base camp of the 1970 British expedition to the south summit of Annapurna in the Himalayas. Although our final destination was merely the edge of the Hiunchuli glacier, our sirdar Yong Tenzing acceded to my request that I might proceed on my own to a cairn a little higher up. On top of the cairn was a Norwegian 10-
ørecoin. Had this been placed there, I mused, by the philosopher and mountaineer Arne Naess with some of whose writings I was familiar? If
2 ‘Reality’ effects in computer animation from:
A Reader In Animation Studies
Author(s) Manovich Lev
Abstract: Giotto’s miracle lay in being able to produce for the first time on a flat surface three-dimensional forms, which the French could achieve only in sculpture. For the first time since antiquity a painter
5 Narrative strategies for resistance and protest in Eastern European animation from:
A Reader In Animation Studies
Author(s) Moritz William
Abstract: Soviet Russia’s domination of Eastern European countries for over 40years (from the fall of the ‘Iron Curtain’ around 1947 until the ‘Glasnost’ of about 1990) brought mixed blessings for animation. On the one hand, Soviet policy favoured cinema as an essential, powerful popular art form and maintained busy animation studios not only for each country but also for distinct ethnic groups; animators were often tenured civil servants with guaranteed full-time employment making not only theatrical cartoons but also public service and educational animation, children’s films of folk culture and titles and special effects for features. On the other hand, soviet
21 Norm Ferguson and the Latin American films of Walt Disney from:
A Reader In Animation Studies
Author(s) Kaufman J.B.
Abstract: One of the most unusual chapters in the history of the Walt Disney studio began in 1941, when Disney was approached by the United States government to make a goodwill tour of South America. The United States had not officially entered World War II at that time, but the government noted with some concern a growing Nazi influence in South America and was seeking to counter that influence by promoting friendly ties between the Americas. Disney did make the trip, along with a group of his artists, and thus began a chain of events which eventually produced two feature-length pictures,
ONE Modernism and Religion from:
Stanley Cavell, Religion, and Continental Philosophy
Abstract: Right from his entrance on the philosophical scene in the late 1960s, Stanley Cavell has insisted that philosophy is confronted with the same cultural problems, burdens, and commitments—collectively known as modernism—that confront art. From some moment during the nineteenth century, artistic conventions for representation and composition no longer seemed to be adequate bearers of contemporary expression; along with the corrosion of the given framework of conventions, the stable relation between artist and audience also became more fragile, at times broken. As Cavell sees it, this situation is mirrored in philosophy: after Kierkegaard, Nietzsche, and Wittgenstein, there is no
SEVEN Forgiveness and Passivity from:
Stanley Cavell, Religion, and Continental Philosophy
Abstract: In the previous three chapters, I have attempted to outline what I have sometimes called an anthropology of finitude. The basic findings seemed less than cheerful, such that we are finite and mortal and yet revolt against our conditions (chapter 4), that we are vulnerable to tragic consequences because we speak and act in ways that outrun our previews (chapter 5), and that we, confronted with the otherness of the other, harbor violent impulses (chapter 6). If one holds these considerations together, one reaches a reasonable backdrop of what makes forgiveness important to human affairs—that is, why humans stand
CONCLUSION: from:
Stanley Cavell, Religion, and Continental Philosophy
Abstract: In this book I have tried to elaborate the analogies and overlappings between Cavell’s philosophy and his religious perspective, either expressed philosophically or theologically. If such an undertaking might be deemed risky, it is because of Cavell’s own repeated resistance toward certain Christian depictions of the human state as helpless, fixed, awaiting supernatural aid, pursuing untimely theologizing, and the like. This resistance has been emphasized by his commentators and has often been taken as Cavell’s prevalent attitude. Especially in chapter 1 but also in the subsequent chapters, I have tried to oppose such interpretations—not because they are wrong (indeed,
ONE Modernism and Religion from:
Stanley Cavell, Religion, and Continental Philosophy
Abstract: Right from his entrance on the philosophical scene in the late 1960s, Stanley Cavell has insisted that philosophy is confronted with the same cultural problems, burdens, and commitments—collectively known as modernism—that confront art. From some moment during the nineteenth century, artistic conventions for representation and composition no longer seemed to be adequate bearers of contemporary expression; along with the corrosion of the given framework of conventions, the stable relation between artist and audience also became more fragile, at times broken. As Cavell sees it, this situation is mirrored in philosophy: after Kierkegaard, Nietzsche, and Wittgenstein, there is no
SEVEN Forgiveness and Passivity from:
Stanley Cavell, Religion, and Continental Philosophy
Abstract: In the previous three chapters, I have attempted to outline what I have sometimes called an anthropology of finitude. The basic findings seemed less than cheerful, such that we are finite and mortal and yet revolt against our conditions (chapter 4), that we are vulnerable to tragic consequences because we speak and act in ways that outrun our previews (chapter 5), and that we, confronted with the otherness of the other, harbor violent impulses (chapter 6). If one holds these considerations together, one reaches a reasonable backdrop of what makes forgiveness important to human affairs—that is, why humans stand
CONCLUSION: from:
Stanley Cavell, Religion, and Continental Philosophy
Abstract: In this book I have tried to elaborate the analogies and overlappings between Cavell’s philosophy and his religious perspective, either expressed philosophically or theologically. If such an undertaking might be deemed risky, it is because of Cavell’s own repeated resistance toward certain Christian depictions of the human state as helpless, fixed, awaiting supernatural aid, pursuing untimely theologizing, and the like. This resistance has been emphasized by his commentators and has often been taken as Cavell’s prevalent attitude. Especially in chapter 1 but also in the subsequent chapters, I have tried to oppose such interpretations—not because they are wrong (indeed,
ONE Modernism and Religion from:
Stanley Cavell, Religion, and Continental Philosophy
Abstract: Right from his entrance on the philosophical scene in the late 1960s, Stanley Cavell has insisted that philosophy is confronted with the same cultural problems, burdens, and commitments—collectively known as modernism—that confront art. From some moment during the nineteenth century, artistic conventions for representation and composition no longer seemed to be adequate bearers of contemporary expression; along with the corrosion of the given framework of conventions, the stable relation between artist and audience also became more fragile, at times broken. As Cavell sees it, this situation is mirrored in philosophy: after Kierkegaard, Nietzsche, and Wittgenstein, there is no
SEVEN Forgiveness and Passivity from:
Stanley Cavell, Religion, and Continental Philosophy
Abstract: In the previous three chapters, I have attempted to outline what I have sometimes called an anthropology of finitude. The basic findings seemed less than cheerful, such that we are finite and mortal and yet revolt against our conditions (chapter 4), that we are vulnerable to tragic consequences because we speak and act in ways that outrun our previews (chapter 5), and that we, confronted with the otherness of the other, harbor violent impulses (chapter 6). If one holds these considerations together, one reaches a reasonable backdrop of what makes forgiveness important to human affairs—that is, why humans stand
CONCLUSION: from:
Stanley Cavell, Religion, and Continental Philosophy
Abstract: In this book I have tried to elaborate the analogies and overlappings between Cavell’s philosophy and his religious perspective, either expressed philosophically or theologically. If such an undertaking might be deemed risky, it is because of Cavell’s own repeated resistance toward certain Christian depictions of the human state as helpless, fixed, awaiting supernatural aid, pursuing untimely theologizing, and the like. This resistance has been emphasized by his commentators and has often been taken as Cavell’s prevalent attitude. Especially in chapter 1 but also in the subsequent chapters, I have tried to oppose such interpretations—not because they are wrong (indeed,
8 The Horizon of Dialogue from:
Gadamer
Abstract: When Gadamer wrote the last part of
Truth and Method,language had not yet reached the leading role on the philosophical stage that it would later come to have. The “linguistic turn” of the twentieth century, the point at which the most varied of philosophical currents run together, had not yet occurred. These currents go from logical positivism to Wittgenstein, from american pragmatism to structuralism and psychoanalysis, from heidegger to the transcendental pragmatism of apel and habermas, from merleau-Ponty to derrida’s deconstruction. Philosophical hermeneutics contributes as well. But at that time even Gadamer could not imagine that his “turn”—the
Book Title: Philosophy, Feminism, and Faith- Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): BOWER MARYA
Abstract: "The stories are powerful, sometimes heart-rending, sometimes lyrical, but always deeply personal. And there is some very good philosophizing as part of the bargain." -Merold Westphal
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16gzdbv
SEVEN Into the Crucible: from:
Philosophy, Feminism, and Faith
Author(s) SCOTT JACQUELINE
Abstract: I think of philosophy, feminism, and Judaism as communities to which I belong because I have made commitments to them, but also because they have made investments in me. It is less the case that I chose to join them, and more accurate to say that they chose me. The relationship I have with them is often frustrating, and yet generally enlightening. They are the burden I “can neither bear nor throw off.”¹ At the same time, they are integral to my identity, and so perhaps, “burden” is entirely too strong a word. As with my race, there are times
FIFTEEN On Being a Christian Philosopher and Not a Feminist from:
Philosophy, Feminism, and Faith
Author(s) BOTHA M. ELAINE
Abstract: I recall vividly the utter astonishment of a fellow traveler on a flight from New York to San Francisco, when she discovered that I claimed to be a believer, a philosopher, and a teacher of Christian philosophy at a Christian university in South Africa. In her perception, the mix of womanhood, philosophy, and religion seemed incongruous, not to mention the even stranger notion of a woman claiming to teach Christian philosophy at a Christian university in a country with a political reputation which at the time certainly raised questions about the authenticity of Christianity. In her mind none of this
Book Title: Philosophy, Feminism, and Faith- Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): BOWER MARYA
Abstract: "The stories are powerful, sometimes heart-rending, sometimes lyrical, but always deeply personal. And there is some very good philosophizing as part of the bargain." -Merold Westphal
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16gzdbv
SEVEN Into the Crucible: from:
Philosophy, Feminism, and Faith
Author(s) SCOTT JACQUELINE
Abstract: I think of philosophy, feminism, and Judaism as communities to which I belong because I have made commitments to them, but also because they have made investments in me. It is less the case that I chose to join them, and more accurate to say that they chose me. The relationship I have with them is often frustrating, and yet generally enlightening. They are the burden I “can neither bear nor throw off.”¹ At the same time, they are integral to my identity, and so perhaps, “burden” is entirely too strong a word. As with my race, there are times
FIFTEEN On Being a Christian Philosopher and Not a Feminist from:
Philosophy, Feminism, and Faith
Author(s) BOTHA M. ELAINE
Abstract: I recall vividly the utter astonishment of a fellow traveler on a flight from New York to San Francisco, when she discovered that I claimed to be a believer, a philosopher, and a teacher of Christian philosophy at a Christian university in South Africa. In her perception, the mix of womanhood, philosophy, and religion seemed incongruous, not to mention the even stranger notion of a woman claiming to teach Christian philosophy at a Christian university in a country with a political reputation which at the time certainly raised questions about the authenticity of Christianity. In her mind none of this
Book Title: The Year's Work at the Zombie Research Center- Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): JAFFE AARON
Abstract: They have stalked the horizons of our culture, wreaked havoc on moribund concepts of dead and not dead, threatened our sense of identity, and endangered our personal safety. Now zombies have emerged from the lurking shadows of society's fringes to wander the sacred halls of the academy, feasting on tender minds and hurling rot across our intellectual landscape. It is time to unite in common cause, to shore up defenses, firm up critical and analytical resources, and fortify crumbling lines of inquiry. Responding to this call, Brain Workers from the Zombie Research Center poke and prod the rotting corpus of zombie culture trying to make sense of cult classics and the unstoppable growth of new and even more disturbing work. They exhume "zombie theory" and decaying historical documents from America, Europe, and the Caribbean in order to unearth the zombie world and arm readers with the brain tools necessary for everyday survival. Readers will see that zombie culture today "lives" in shapes as mutable as a zombie horde-and is often just as violent.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16gzg4q
5 Zombie Health Care from:
The Year's Work at the Zombie Research Center
Author(s) SHAPIRO STEPHEN
Abstract: “Wildfire,” the fifth episode of AMC’s
The Walking Dead’s first season, shows a crisis many Americans are currently facing.¹ In the aftermath of a zombie attack, the human survivors must prevent their killed loved ones from returning as zombies. One woman, Carol, refuses to let the group’s men take responsibility for “decraniating” her prone life partner. “He’s my husband,” she says before splattering his gray matter onto the viewing lens. The scene cuts to another woman, Andrea, cradling her dead sister and waiting for the first sign of reanimation. Over a soundtrack of sentimentalized music, Andrea mournfully says, “Amy. Amy.
8 Zombie Race from:
The Year's Work at the Zombie Research Center
Author(s) COMENTALE EDWARD P.
Abstract: It lags, behind itself, drags itself, before itself, somewhere in back of you, in front of you, over your shoulder—always where it is not.
Shhh-thump.Its second beat is scarier than the first, not just because it is louder, closer, but because it recalls the first. The monster is always in two—two spaces, two times. It
14 Zombie Cocktails from:
The Year's Work at the Zombie Research Center
Author(s) SCHNEIDER STEPHEN
Abstract: When Betsy Connell, female lead in Jacques Tourneur’s
I Walked with a Zombie(1943), confesses that is she isn’t in fact familiar with zombies, her interlocutor, Dr. Maxwell, first tells her that she is dealing with “a ghost, the living dead” and then informs her more cheerfully that the Zombie is also a drink, at which point Betsy finds herself on more familiar territory. “I tried one once,” she says, “but there wasn’t anything dead about it.” Uttered in 1943 at the height of Hollywood’s tiki craze, these lines are no doubt an inside joke. By this time, actors and
Afterword: from:
The Year's Work at the Zombie Research Center
Author(s) NEALON JEFFREY T.
Abstract: There are of course myriad—sometimes conflicting, always compelling—answers to that question on offer in this volume, and likewise within the wider scholarly zombie archive, but almost all
Book Title: Material Feminisms- Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Hekman Susan
Abstract: Harnessing the energy of provocative theories generated by recent understandings of the human body, the natural world, and the material world, Material Feminisms presents an entirely new way for feminists to conceive of the question of materiality. In lively and timely essays, an international group of feminist thinkers challenges the assumptions and norms that have previously defined studies about the body. These wide-ranging essays grapple with topics such as the material reality of race, the significance of sexual difference, the impact of disability experience, and the complex interaction between nature and culture in traumatic events such as Hurricane Katrina. By insisting on the importance of materiality, this volume breaks new ground in philosophy, feminist theory, cultural studies, science studies, and other fields where the body and nature collide.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16gzgqh
2 The Hermeneutics of the Self from:
A Philosophical Anthropology of the Cross
Abstract: In Book XI of his
Confessions, Augustine records his perplexity over the nature of time. What is it? We talk about it all the time in our everyday conversations, as if we know what it is. “What then is time? Provided that no one asks me, I know. If I want to explain it to an inquirer, I do not know.”¹ Something similar is true about the self: in late modern Western culture, we talk about selves—and “the self”—all the time. In the natural attitude the idea of the self seems fairly unproblematic, yet if we stop and ask
8 The Call to Responsibility from:
A Philosophical Anthropology of the Cross
Abstract: As a result of the preceding chapter, we can see how the category of the penultimate allows us to affirm human capability yet also discern the limits of human capability and avoid a synergistic confusion of divine and human agency. The ultimate word is pronounced from beyond the self and its immanent possibilities and capacities, but within the horizon of the penultimate the self is
homo capax. We can therefore identify the capacities that Ricoeur discusses in his phenomenology ofl’homme capable—speaking, acting, narrating, and assuming responsibility—as penultimate capacities. If time permitted it would be worthwhile to examine
2 The Hermeneutics of the Self from:
A Philosophical Anthropology of the Cross
Abstract: In Book XI of his
Confessions, Augustine records his perplexity over the nature of time. What is it? We talk about it all the time in our everyday conversations, as if we know what it is. “What then is time? Provided that no one asks me, I know. If I want to explain it to an inquirer, I do not know.”¹ Something similar is true about the self: in late modern Western culture, we talk about selves—and “the self”—all the time. In the natural attitude the idea of the self seems fairly unproblematic, yet if we stop and ask
8 The Call to Responsibility from:
A Philosophical Anthropology of the Cross
Abstract: As a result of the preceding chapter, we can see how the category of the penultimate allows us to affirm human capability yet also discern the limits of human capability and avoid a synergistic confusion of divine and human agency. The ultimate word is pronounced from beyond the self and its immanent possibilities and capacities, but within the horizon of the penultimate the self is
homo capax. We can therefore identify the capacities that Ricoeur discusses in his phenomenology ofl’homme capable—speaking, acting, narrating, and assuming responsibility—as penultimate capacities. If time permitted it would be worthwhile to examine
2 The Hermeneutics of the Self from:
A Philosophical Anthropology of the Cross
Abstract: In Book XI of his
Confessions, Augustine records his perplexity over the nature of time. What is it? We talk about it all the time in our everyday conversations, as if we know what it is. “What then is time? Provided that no one asks me, I know. If I want to explain it to an inquirer, I do not know.”¹ Something similar is true about the self: in late modern Western culture, we talk about selves—and “the self”—all the time. In the natural attitude the idea of the self seems fairly unproblematic, yet if we stop and ask
8 The Call to Responsibility from:
A Philosophical Anthropology of the Cross
Abstract: As a result of the preceding chapter, we can see how the category of the penultimate allows us to affirm human capability yet also discern the limits of human capability and avoid a synergistic confusion of divine and human agency. The ultimate word is pronounced from beyond the self and its immanent possibilities and capacities, but within the horizon of the penultimate the self is
homo capax. We can therefore identify the capacities that Ricoeur discusses in his phenomenology ofl’homme capable—speaking, acting, narrating, and assuming responsibility—as penultimate capacities. If time permitted it would be worthwhile to examine
2 The Hermeneutics of the Self from:
A Philosophical Anthropology of the Cross
Abstract: In Book XI of his
Confessions, Augustine records his perplexity over the nature of time. What is it? We talk about it all the time in our everyday conversations, as if we know what it is. “What then is time? Provided that no one asks me, I know. If I want to explain it to an inquirer, I do not know.”¹ Something similar is true about the self: in late modern Western culture, we talk about selves—and “the self”—all the time. In the natural attitude the idea of the self seems fairly unproblematic, yet if we stop and ask
8 The Call to Responsibility from:
A Philosophical Anthropology of the Cross
Abstract: As a result of the preceding chapter, we can see how the category of the penultimate allows us to affirm human capability yet also discern the limits of human capability and avoid a synergistic confusion of divine and human agency. The ultimate word is pronounced from beyond the self and its immanent possibilities and capacities, but within the horizon of the penultimate the self is
homo capax. We can therefore identify the capacities that Ricoeur discusses in his phenomenology ofl’homme capable—speaking, acting, narrating, and assuming responsibility—as penultimate capacities. If time permitted it would be worthwhile to examine
2 The Hermeneutics of the Self from:
A Philosophical Anthropology of the Cross
Abstract: In Book XI of his
Confessions, Augustine records his perplexity over the nature of time. What is it? We talk about it all the time in our everyday conversations, as if we know what it is. “What then is time? Provided that no one asks me, I know. If I want to explain it to an inquirer, I do not know.”¹ Something similar is true about the self: in late modern Western culture, we talk about selves—and “the self”—all the time. In the natural attitude the idea of the self seems fairly unproblematic, yet if we stop and ask
8 The Call to Responsibility from:
A Philosophical Anthropology of the Cross
Abstract: As a result of the preceding chapter, we can see how the category of the penultimate allows us to affirm human capability yet also discern the limits of human capability and avoid a synergistic confusion of divine and human agency. The ultimate word is pronounced from beyond the self and its immanent possibilities and capacities, but within the horizon of the penultimate the self is
homo capax. We can therefore identify the capacities that Ricoeur discusses in his phenomenology ofl’homme capable—speaking, acting, narrating, and assuming responsibility—as penultimate capacities. If time permitted it would be worthwhile to examine
2 The Hermeneutics of the Self from:
A Philosophical Anthropology of the Cross
Abstract: In Book XI of his
Confessions, Augustine records his perplexity over the nature of time. What is it? We talk about it all the time in our everyday conversations, as if we know what it is. “What then is time? Provided that no one asks me, I know. If I want to explain it to an inquirer, I do not know.”¹ Something similar is true about the self: in late modern Western culture, we talk about selves—and “the self”—all the time. In the natural attitude the idea of the self seems fairly unproblematic, yet if we stop and ask
8 The Call to Responsibility from:
A Philosophical Anthropology of the Cross
Abstract: As a result of the preceding chapter, we can see how the category of the penultimate allows us to affirm human capability yet also discern the limits of human capability and avoid a synergistic confusion of divine and human agency. The ultimate word is pronounced from beyond the self and its immanent possibilities and capacities, but within the horizon of the penultimate the self is
homo capax. We can therefore identify the capacities that Ricoeur discusses in his phenomenology ofl’homme capable—speaking, acting, narrating, and assuming responsibility—as penultimate capacities. If time permitted it would be worthwhile to examine
2 The Hermeneutics of the Self from:
A Philosophical Anthropology of the Cross
Abstract: In Book XI of his
Confessions, Augustine records his perplexity over the nature of time. What is it? We talk about it all the time in our everyday conversations, as if we know what it is. “What then is time? Provided that no one asks me, I know. If I want to explain it to an inquirer, I do not know.”¹ Something similar is true about the self: in late modern Western culture, we talk about selves—and “the self”—all the time. In the natural attitude the idea of the self seems fairly unproblematic, yet if we stop and ask
8 The Call to Responsibility from:
A Philosophical Anthropology of the Cross
Abstract: As a result of the preceding chapter, we can see how the category of the penultimate allows us to affirm human capability yet also discern the limits of human capability and avoid a synergistic confusion of divine and human agency. The ultimate word is pronounced from beyond the self and its immanent possibilities and capacities, but within the horizon of the penultimate the self is
homo capax. We can therefore identify the capacities that Ricoeur discusses in his phenomenology ofl’homme capable—speaking, acting, narrating, and assuming responsibility—as penultimate capacities. If time permitted it would be worthwhile to examine
EIGHT THE INSISTENCE OF THE WORLD: from:
The Insistence of God
Abstract: We promised at the start to honor the animals of Jesus, and now we must make good on that promise, this time by honoring the animal that Jesus is, the animal that I am following (
je suis),¹ whose animal needs were recognized by Martha. Indeed it is time to honor the history of the animals that we all are and are following, which I have emblematically called Martha’s world, the world to which we all belong in the most deeply material sense. Yet, despite our pledge to follow the animals of Jesus, we have in truth been focused almost exclusively
Epilogue: from:
What Is Fiction For?
Abstract: Part of my purpose in this book, as set out in chapter 1, has been to defend academic literary studies as a cornerstone of the humanities. That can hardly be done unless it can be shown that some works of literature are more worth studying than others, because they are
better as literaturethan others. Why, otherwise, spend time and energy discussing Shakespeare or Sterne with students; why allocate the funds to support the departments, the journals, and the postgraduate research that constitute the essential infrastructure of such teaching if those students’ time might as well be spent in the
Epilogue: from:
What Is Fiction For?
Abstract: Part of my purpose in this book, as set out in chapter 1, has been to defend academic literary studies as a cornerstone of the humanities. That can hardly be done unless it can be shown that some works of literature are more worth studying than others, because they are
better as literaturethan others. Why, otherwise, spend time and energy discussing Shakespeare or Sterne with students; why allocate the funds to support the departments, the journals, and the postgraduate research that constitute the essential infrastructure of such teaching if those students’ time might as well be spent in the
Epilogue: from:
What Is Fiction For?
Abstract: Part of my purpose in this book, as set out in chapter 1, has been to defend academic literary studies as a cornerstone of the humanities. That can hardly be done unless it can be shown that some works of literature are more worth studying than others, because they are
better as literaturethan others. Why, otherwise, spend time and energy discussing Shakespeare or Sterne with students; why allocate the funds to support the departments, the journals, and the postgraduate research that constitute the essential infrastructure of such teaching if those students’ time might as well be spent in the
9 Thinking in Remarkable Distinctness: from:
Latin American Philosophy from Identity to Radical Exteriority
Abstract: These opening words from Walter Mignolo’s essay “Decolonial Thought: Detachment and Opening (A Manifesto)” capture the fluid and disseminating movement from which and toward which the thought of Dussel, Quijano, and Castro-Gómez have led us.¹ In light of the previous chapters, we are faced with the challenge to think in other ways than those sustained by instrumental rationalism and the coloniality of power, knowledge, and time. In this chapter I first reintroduce the idea of hybrid thinking in Castro-Gómez in order to set up and gain access to the relevance and impact of three contemporary Latin American philosophers. These thinkers
9 Thinking in Remarkable Distinctness: from:
Latin American Philosophy from Identity to Radical Exteriority
Abstract: These opening words from Walter Mignolo’s essay “Decolonial Thought: Detachment and Opening (A Manifesto)” capture the fluid and disseminating movement from which and toward which the thought of Dussel, Quijano, and Castro-Gómez have led us.¹ In light of the previous chapters, we are faced with the challenge to think in other ways than those sustained by instrumental rationalism and the coloniality of power, knowledge, and time. In this chapter I first reintroduce the idea of hybrid thinking in Castro-Gómez in order to set up and gain access to the relevance and impact of three contemporary Latin American philosophers. These thinkers
3 Creative Matter and Creative Mind: from:
Material Ecocriticism
Author(s) Zapf Hubert
Abstract: I would like to focus in my chapter on the question of creativity, which after long neglect in literary and cultural studies is reemerging on the agenda of scholarship, especially within recent directions of ecocriticism. For a long time, the concept of creativity appeared to be inextricably bound up with a notion of radical individualism and of the quasi-godlike creative genius of the human mind, which seemed to represent a classic case of an anthropocentric metaphysics. In ecocritical perspective, however, creativity is beginning to newly move into the focus of attention not alone as an exclusionary feature of human culture
TWO The Semiotics of Culture and the Diagnostics of Criticism: from:
Ideas to Live For
Abstract: In an essay in progress at the time of his death, Lionel Trilling initiated an unusually fruitful dialogue with the social and cultural anthropologist Clifford Geertz.⁵ The ostensible reason for Trilling’s interest in Geertz’s work was the way it confirmed certain suspicions Trilling had come to entertain about the traditional assumptions of humanistic scholarship as a result of a course he had recently taught on Jane Austen. However, the substance of his own unfinished meditation, together with Geertz’s subsequent response, possesses a critical importance that far transcends the particular circumstances of their origin.⁶ By setting the discussion of literary as
NINE The Transcivilizational, the Intercivilizational, and the Human: from:
Ideas to Live For
Abstract: In a world where traditional international rules have sometimes proved inadequate, recent interest in the notion of “legitimacy” as a complementary source of legal authority has raised a number of issues—legal, moral, and what some would call “ontological.”⁴ These issues came to the fore most dramatically, though not for the first time, during the Kosovo War of 1999, when in the face of grave and intolerable human rights abuses it became necessary to override legal protections against intervention into the activities of sovereign states. These questions were soon to become still more urgent and vexed when “legitimacy” was employed
TWO The Semiotics of Culture and the Diagnostics of Criticism: from:
Ideas to Live For
Abstract: In an essay in progress at the time of his death, Lionel Trilling initiated an unusually fruitful dialogue with the social and cultural anthropologist Clifford Geertz.⁵ The ostensible reason for Trilling’s interest in Geertz’s work was the way it confirmed certain suspicions Trilling had come to entertain about the traditional assumptions of humanistic scholarship as a result of a course he had recently taught on Jane Austen. However, the substance of his own unfinished meditation, together with Geertz’s subsequent response, possesses a critical importance that far transcends the particular circumstances of their origin.⁶ By setting the discussion of literary as
NINE The Transcivilizational, the Intercivilizational, and the Human: from:
Ideas to Live For
Abstract: In a world where traditional international rules have sometimes proved inadequate, recent interest in the notion of “legitimacy” as a complementary source of legal authority has raised a number of issues—legal, moral, and what some would call “ontological.”⁴ These issues came to the fore most dramatically, though not for the first time, during the Kosovo War of 1999, when in the face of grave and intolerable human rights abuses it became necessary to override legal protections against intervention into the activities of sovereign states. These questions were soon to become still more urgent and vexed when “legitimacy” was employed
TWO The Semiotics of Culture and the Diagnostics of Criticism: from:
Ideas to Live For
Abstract: In an essay in progress at the time of his death, Lionel Trilling initiated an unusually fruitful dialogue with the social and cultural anthropologist Clifford Geertz.⁵ The ostensible reason for Trilling’s interest in Geertz’s work was the way it confirmed certain suspicions Trilling had come to entertain about the traditional assumptions of humanistic scholarship as a result of a course he had recently taught on Jane Austen. However, the substance of his own unfinished meditation, together with Geertz’s subsequent response, possesses a critical importance that far transcends the particular circumstances of their origin.⁶ By setting the discussion of literary as
NINE The Transcivilizational, the Intercivilizational, and the Human: from:
Ideas to Live For
Abstract: In a world where traditional international rules have sometimes proved inadequate, recent interest in the notion of “legitimacy” as a complementary source of legal authority has raised a number of issues—legal, moral, and what some would call “ontological.”⁴ These issues came to the fore most dramatically, though not for the first time, during the Kosovo War of 1999, when in the face of grave and intolerable human rights abuses it became necessary to override legal protections against intervention into the activities of sovereign states. These questions were soon to become still more urgent and vexed when “legitimacy” was employed
1 Explication: from:
The Cruelest of All Mothers: Marie de l'Incarnation, Motherhood, and Christian Tradition
Abstract: It’s hard to describe what it feels like to be told that there’s something wrong with your baby. Bobby and I had been worried for a while about Aggie. She was only four months old, but she wasn’t moving out of the newborn stage at the same pace that our three boys had. She rarely smiled. Her head was wobbly. And she still slept all the time. But I had been told that all babies develop at different rates, that girls are different, that—don’t worry—by six months she’ll blossom. So when Bobby and I brought Aggie in for
1 Reflections on Heraclitus from:
The Beautiful, The True and the Good
Abstract: The work of Heraclitus, unlike the work of Plato or Aristotle, has come down to us only in fragments preserved in various ancient sources that cited his work. As Charles Kahn has pointed out, every age has “projected its own meaning and its own preoccupations onto the text of Heraclitus.”¹ His fragments have had a peculiar attraction in modern times. Hegel said that there was not a single fragment (or “proposition”) that had not found a place in his System.² Nietzsche drew deeply from them. He claimed that “what he (Heraclitus) saw, the teaching of
law in becomingand of
8 The Heart in/of Augustine’s Confessions: from:
The Beautiful, The True and the Good
Abstract: The notion of
cor, the heart, lies at the heart of Augustine’s thought. It appears some 2,262 times in his works and some seventy-five times in hisConfessions. It is its function in the latter work that I will examine in this chapter.
10 Kant’s “Antinomic” Aesthetics from:
The Beautiful, The True and the Good
Abstract: Even a cursory glance at Kant’s thought indicates that it revolves around “antinomies,” literally “contrary laws” or the clash of different modes of legislation. In the
Critique of Pure Reason, we find the famouscosmological antinomiessetting the empirical against the rational: the limited or unlimited character of time, the divisible or indivisible character of the basic constituents of things, freedom or the laws of nature, and necessity or contingency as the basis of things.¹ In theCritique of Practical Reason, the rational nature, governed by duty, is set over against the animal nature of inclination, duty against happiness, deontology
14 Monasticism, Eternity, and the Heart: from:
The Beautiful, The True and the Good
Abstract: There is a sense in which Hegel summed up the philosophic tradition. And he did so by focusing attention upon the eternal encompassment present in life itself. Nietzsche carried on that movement “to install eternity in time.” In both cases, the enemy was monasticism, whose focus on eternity beyond this life led to a genuine contempt for this life. Dostoevsky was sensitive to both sides in this encounter: ancient monasticism and the Hegel-Nietzsche attack on it. In his
Brothers Karamazov, he realized a kind ofAufhebungof the antinomies in the figures of Fr. Zosima and his protégé, Alyosha Karamazov.
20 Buber’s Use of Oriental Themes from:
The Beautiful, The True and the Good
Abstract: In the East and in the West today, religious and philosophical traditions seem to be in a rapid state of decay brought about by the geometrical increase in the It-World of scientific and technical mastery that emerged out of the West since the time of the Renaissance. If such an It-World seemed overpowering in 1923 when Buber’s classic
I and Thouappeared, it has moved light-years beyond since then in its industrial-scientific component and in the social regimentation connected therewith.¹
1 Reflections on Heraclitus from:
The Beautiful, The True and the Good
Abstract: The work of Heraclitus, unlike the work of Plato or Aristotle, has come down to us only in fragments preserved in various ancient sources that cited his work. As Charles Kahn has pointed out, every age has “projected its own meaning and its own preoccupations onto the text of Heraclitus.”¹ His fragments have had a peculiar attraction in modern times. Hegel said that there was not a single fragment (or “proposition”) that had not found a place in his System.² Nietzsche drew deeply from them. He claimed that “what he (Heraclitus) saw, the teaching of
law in becomingand of
8 The Heart in/of Augustine’s Confessions: from:
The Beautiful, The True and the Good
Abstract: The notion of
cor, the heart, lies at the heart of Augustine’s thought. It appears some 2,262 times in his works and some seventy-five times in hisConfessions. It is its function in the latter work that I will examine in this chapter.
10 Kant’s “Antinomic” Aesthetics from:
The Beautiful, The True and the Good
Abstract: Even a cursory glance at Kant’s thought indicates that it revolves around “antinomies,” literally “contrary laws” or the clash of different modes of legislation. In the
Critique of Pure Reason, we find the famouscosmological antinomiessetting the empirical against the rational: the limited or unlimited character of time, the divisible or indivisible character of the basic constituents of things, freedom or the laws of nature, and necessity or contingency as the basis of things.¹ In theCritique of Practical Reason, the rational nature, governed by duty, is set over against the animal nature of inclination, duty against happiness, deontology
14 Monasticism, Eternity, and the Heart: from:
The Beautiful, The True and the Good
Abstract: There is a sense in which Hegel summed up the philosophic tradition. And he did so by focusing attention upon the eternal encompassment present in life itself. Nietzsche carried on that movement “to install eternity in time.” In both cases, the enemy was monasticism, whose focus on eternity beyond this life led to a genuine contempt for this life. Dostoevsky was sensitive to both sides in this encounter: ancient monasticism and the Hegel-Nietzsche attack on it. In his
Brothers Karamazov, he realized a kind ofAufhebungof the antinomies in the figures of Fr. Zosima and his protégé, Alyosha Karamazov.
20 Buber’s Use of Oriental Themes from:
The Beautiful, The True and the Good
Abstract: In the East and in the West today, religious and philosophical traditions seem to be in a rapid state of decay brought about by the geometrical increase in the It-World of scientific and technical mastery that emerged out of the West since the time of the Renaissance. If such an It-World seemed overpowering in 1923 when Buber’s classic
I and Thouappeared, it has moved light-years beyond since then in its industrial-scientific component and in the social regimentation connected therewith.¹
1 Reflections on Heraclitus from:
The Beautiful, The True and the Good
Abstract: The work of Heraclitus, unlike the work of Plato or Aristotle, has come down to us only in fragments preserved in various ancient sources that cited his work. As Charles Kahn has pointed out, every age has “projected its own meaning and its own preoccupations onto the text of Heraclitus.”¹ His fragments have had a peculiar attraction in modern times. Hegel said that there was not a single fragment (or “proposition”) that had not found a place in his System.² Nietzsche drew deeply from them. He claimed that “what he (Heraclitus) saw, the teaching of
law in becomingand of
8 The Heart in/of Augustine’s Confessions: from:
The Beautiful, The True and the Good
Abstract: The notion of
cor, the heart, lies at the heart of Augustine’s thought. It appears some 2,262 times in his works and some seventy-five times in hisConfessions. It is its function in the latter work that I will examine in this chapter.
10 Kant’s “Antinomic” Aesthetics from:
The Beautiful, The True and the Good
Abstract: Even a cursory glance at Kant’s thought indicates that it revolves around “antinomies,” literally “contrary laws” or the clash of different modes of legislation. In the
Critique of Pure Reason, we find the famouscosmological antinomiessetting the empirical against the rational: the limited or unlimited character of time, the divisible or indivisible character of the basic constituents of things, freedom or the laws of nature, and necessity or contingency as the basis of things.¹ In theCritique of Practical Reason, the rational nature, governed by duty, is set over against the animal nature of inclination, duty against happiness, deontology
14 Monasticism, Eternity, and the Heart: from:
The Beautiful, The True and the Good
Abstract: There is a sense in which Hegel summed up the philosophic tradition. And he did so by focusing attention upon the eternal encompassment present in life itself. Nietzsche carried on that movement “to install eternity in time.” In both cases, the enemy was monasticism, whose focus on eternity beyond this life led to a genuine contempt for this life. Dostoevsky was sensitive to both sides in this encounter: ancient monasticism and the Hegel-Nietzsche attack on it. In his
Brothers Karamazov, he realized a kind ofAufhebungof the antinomies in the figures of Fr. Zosima and his protégé, Alyosha Karamazov.
20 Buber’s Use of Oriental Themes from:
The Beautiful, The True and the Good
Abstract: In the East and in the West today, religious and philosophical traditions seem to be in a rapid state of decay brought about by the geometrical increase in the It-World of scientific and technical mastery that emerged out of the West since the time of the Renaissance. If such an It-World seemed overpowering in 1923 when Buber’s classic
I and Thouappeared, it has moved light-years beyond since then in its industrial-scientific component and in the social regimentation connected therewith.¹
1 The Ontology of the Hypostatic Union from:
The Incarnate Lord
Abstract: The first part of this book is concerned with the mystery of the incarnation. What does it mean, from a Thomistic point of view, to hold that God the Word, the second person of the Trinity, became man and lived a true, human life in a historical place and time? To ask this question is to touch upon a significant theological topic: the ontology of the hypostatic union. What is the union of God and man that takes place
in the very personof the Word? What does it mean to say that God the Word subsists personally as a
2 The Human Nature and Grace of Christ from:
The Incarnate Lord
Abstract: The most contested affirmation regarding Jesus of Nazareth pertains to his divinity. It is the case, however, that the traditional affirmation of the perfect humanity of Jesus is also utterly controversial in modern theology. In one sense, this is simply because it is inherently controversial to affirm that there exists a real “essence” of human nature that God could assume. The subjacent question is philosophical: can we speak about perennial natures present in things in general and in human beings in particular down through time, and if so, how is it the case? In another sense, the controversial character of
CONCLUSION: from:
The Incarnate Lord
Abstract: In the wake of the Second Vatican Council, Catholic theology embraced a primarily historical model of theological exploration. Topics such as Christology, the eucharist, and grace were treated by way of a chronological investigation: from the New Testament to the fathers, from the scholastic age to the early modern debates, terminating in a consideration of the
status quaestionisof the subject within modern and contemporary theology. This approach represents the still standard model one encounters in virtually any theology textbook in our time. Chronology determines content.
At the Court of the High Priest: from:
John, Jesus, and History, Volume 2
Author(s) Bond Helen K.
Abstract: Despite a general preference for the Synoptic Gospels, several features of John’s narrative have often commanded a certain historical respect: the lengthier ministry and its wider geographical location, the more complex relationship between Jesus and John the Baptist, the date of the crucifixion, and the passage that concerns us now—John’s Jewish interrogation of Jesus (Smith 1993, 252–67). C. H. Dodd argued in 1963 that John’s “account of the interrogation is drawn from some source, almost certainly oral, which was well informed about the situation at the time, and had contact with the Jewish tradition about the trial and
Book Title: Speak Thus-Christian Language in Church and World
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Hovey Craig R.
Abstract: In its various forms, speech is absolutely integral to the Christian mission. The gospel is a message, news that must be passed on if it is to be known by others. Nevertheless, the reality of God cannot be exhausted by Christian knowledge and Christian knowledge cannot be exhausted by our words. All the while, the philosophy of modernity has left Christianity an impoverished inheritance within which to think these things. In Speak Thus, Craig Hovey explores the possibilities and limits of Christian speaking. At times ethical, epistemological, and metaphysical, these essays go to the heart of what it means to be the church today. In practice, the Christian life often has a linguistic shape that surprisingly implicates and reveals the commitments of people like those who care for the sick or those who respond as peacemakers in the face of violence. Because learning to speak one way as opposed to another is a skill that must be learned, Christian speakers are also guides who bear witness to the importance of churches for passing on a felicity with Christian ways of speaking. Through constructive engagements with interlocutors like Ludwig Wittgenstein, George Lindbeck, Jeffrey Stout, Stanley Hauerwas, John Howard Yoder, Thomas Aquinas, and the theology of Radical Orthodoxy, Hovey offers a challenging vision of the church'able to speak with a confidence that only comes from a deep attentiveness to its own limitations while able to speak prophetically in a world weary of words.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16wdm5z
INTRODUCTION from:
Speak Thus
Abstract: The theme that unites these essays is speech. It is a theme that is woven in different ways (and in admittedly more and less obvious ways) throughout what follows. I have brought together these writings hoping that they will prove useful for students and practitioners of theology and ethics who are looking for a display of the difference Christian ways of speaking make to the ongoing life of the church in our time.
CHAPTER 8 How Free Are We? from:
Speak Thus
Abstract: In modern times, there is almost nothing better we can think of than being free. Just think about the freedom of choice. What could be better than the ability to choose freely? Nothing. In fact, choice has become
CHAPTER 9 Basking and Speaking in Ordinary Time from:
Speak Thus
Abstract: Some people never can escape from the academic calendar. For them, it is fall rather than spring that is full of new beginnings. Spring is the time to finish things up. And for them, summer is not just a time of activity in the sun, but also a time of waiting. The academic calendar has a great pause for a few months in the summer, and for those who live by it, it can even come to feel like a bore after a while.
2 ‘The Scripture moveth us in sundry places’: from:
The Renaissance of emotion
Author(s) Bagchi David
Abstract: In 1549, when the
Book of Common Prayerwas first published, the people of the West Country rose up against it. ‘We will not receive the new service’, they protested to the young Edward VI, ‘because it is but like a Christmas game’.¹ Seven thousand Cornish rebels were prepared to fight and to die for this conviction. But less than a century later, on the eve of the Civil War, the people of Cornwall issued another set of demands to another king. This time, they petitioned Charles I in near bibliolatrous terms ‘to eternize (as far as in you lies)
Alter/native Democracies: from:
Democracy, Culture, Catholicism: Voices from Four Continents
Author(s) Hermansen Marcia
Abstract: In June 2009, Pope Benedict XVI issued an encyclical letter entitled
Caritas in veritate. This letter was directed to Christians and all those interested in seriously engaging questions regarding democracy, justice, and development in the modern world. The pontiff concluded by stating that in our times democracy offers the best political system for providing justice and freedom.¹
[Introduction] from:
Democracy, Culture, Catholicism: Voices from Four Continents
Abstract: Of the four countries represented in this book, Peru is the most predominantly Catholic. What this means is that Peru represents some of the most established, yet complex, sets of relationships between democracy, culture, and Catholicism surveyed in this book. The Church’s presence is seen and felt on all social and political levels. This means that the Catholic Church has, at one time or another, stood alongside opposing forces in Peru’s continuing process of social and political democratization. The themes that run throughout the chapters in this section are the themes of power and authority: Who has it? Who should
Access to Information: from:
Democracy, Culture, Catholicism: Voices from Four Continents
Author(s) Sullivan Barry
Abstract: No government can operate entirely in the round. Some amount of secrecy is both necessary and inevitable.¹ But secrecy is fundamentally an affront to representative democracy, and it always exacts a cost. Secrecy engenders distrust, frustrates accountability, encourages arbitrary action, compromises the value of citizen participation, and disrespects human dignity. Secrecy also adds to the sense that government is distant and unresponsive. Institutions practice secrecy at their peril, yet many yield to its siren song. Institutions practice secrecy to various degrees and for various reasons: sometimes leaders or others have something terrible to hide, but often it simply seems easier
7 Conclusions, Romans, and a Look Ahead from:
Keeping the Feast
Abstract: In the late 1920s the American philanthropist Charles R. Crane made a trip to Russia on which he was exposed for the first time to the sound of the ringing of Russian church bells. Russian bells are neither made nor rung like
7 Conclusions, Romans, and a Look Ahead from:
Keeping the Feast
Abstract: In the late 1920s the American philanthropist Charles R. Crane made a trip to Russia on which he was exposed for the first time to the sound of the ringing of Russian church bells. Russian bells are neither made nor rung like
Book Title: Video Games Around the World- Publisher: The MIT Press
Author(s): IWATANI TORU
Abstract: Video games have become a global industry, and their history spans dozens of national industries where foreign imports compete with domestic productions, legitimate industry contends with piracy, and national identity faces the global marketplace. This volume describes video game history and culture across every continent, with essays covering areas as disparate and far-flung as Argentina and Thailand, Hungary and Indonesia, Iran and Ireland. Most of the essays are written by natives of the countries they discuss, many of them game designers and founders of game companies, offering distinctively firsthand perspectives. Some of these national histories appear for the first time in English, and some for the first time in any language.Readers will learn, for example, about the rapid growth of mobile games in Africa; how a meat-packing company held the rights to import the Atari VCS 2600 into Mexico; and how the Indonesian MMORPG
Nusantara Onlinereflects that country's cultural history and folklore. Every country or region's unique conditions provide the context that shapes its national industry; for example, the long history of computer science in the United Kingdom and Scandinavia, the problems of piracy in China, the PC Bangs of South Korea, or the Dutch industry's emphasis on serious games. As these essays demonstrate, local innovation and diversification thrive alongside productions and corporations with global aspirations.Africa • Arab World • Argentina • Australia • Austria • Brazil • Canada • China • Colombia • Czech Republic • Finland • France • Germany • Hong Kong • Hungary • India • Indonesia • Iran • Ireland • Italy • Japan • Mexico • The Netherlands • New Zealand • Peru • Poland • Portugal • Russia • Scandinavia • Singapore • South Korea • Spain • Switzerland • Thailand • Turkey • United Kingdom • United States of America • Uruguay • Venezuela
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt17kk7tc
AUSTRIA from:
Video Games Around the World
Author(s) Rosenstingl Herbert
Abstract: In 2005, at its peak, the Rockstar Games subsidiary Rockstar Vienna was one of the biggest game development studios in Germany and Austria, with over one hundred employees. In the late 1990s, the Austrian game developer Max Design surprised the games market by selling over two million copies of
Anno 1602(1998), but Rockstar Vienna’s establishment heralded a new era of game development in Austria. At this point in time, the future of Austrian video game development seemed bright. Together with other Austrian game development studios such as JoWooD (established in 1989), Pixlers Entertainment (1991), Greentube (1998), Sproing (2001), Xendex
INDIA from:
Video Games Around the World
Author(s) Mukherjee Souvik
Abstract: India is the sleeping giant of the video game world. Recent developments in the industry and the entry of new gaming consoles, however, mark a significant shift in the culture and reception of video games. As game designer Ernest Adams comments, “India has the talent, the resources, and the attitudes required to become a major player in this industry. All [they are] lacking is experience, and that will come with training and time” (Adams 2009). Adams’s optimism is echoed by Thomas Friedman in
The World Is Flatwith the warning, “So today India is ahead, but it has to work
IRAN from:
Video Games Around the World
Author(s) Ahmadi Ahmad
Abstract: A roaring flood of video games from the Western world reached Iran when its first generation arrived during the Iran-Iraq War in the early 1980s. The Atari VCS 2600 was among the first generation of game consoles that officially entered Iran, and
Pac-Man, Pitfall, andMissile Commandwere some of the best-selling games at that time. When the war’s status was “white” and the ominous “red” alarm was off, groups of children found opportunities to sit in front of the TV and shook their new black-and-gray joysticks up and down, taking turns and sometimes even fighting over them.¹ Now, after
PERU from:
Video Games Around the World
Author(s) Nakasone Arturo
Abstract: The adoption and expansion of video games in Peru has been relatively slow, mainly due to the hard economic situation the country was going through during much of the 1980s and the first half of the 1990s. Video game history in Peru basically starts with the introduction of arcade machines during the beginning of the 1980s. At that time, a small number of businesses appeared, ranging from medium-sized arcade game centers, which deployed tens of machines, to small stores that had just a handful of them. The majority of arcade machines was provided by Japanese manufacturers such as Namco, Konami,
THAILAND from:
Video Games Around the World
Author(s) Soranastaporn Songsri
Abstract: Video games (sometimes called “VDO games” in Thailand) are popular and attract massive numbers of players around the world. Thai players engage console games, computer games, online games, and handheld games, and many organizations and companies are involved in video games in Thailand, yet there are few studies on the subject. Therefore, this chapter will describe the history of video games, the current situation of video games, and explain the behavior of video game players in Thailand. The population in this study included four groups who are involved in video games, including e-learning, animation and computer graphics, movie production companies,
TURKEY from:
Video Games Around the World
Author(s) Cagiltay Kursat
Abstract: Turkish people may have encountered computer games later than many Westerners, but they have wasted no time catching up. The modern Turkish game industry is one of the most rapidly growing markets in the world (Newzoo 2012). Thus, almost all game hardware producers and major game development companies have been paying special attention to Turkey. The average game playing durations, habits, and preferences of Turkish survey respondents are similar to those of developed countries (Karakus, İnal, and Cagiltay 2008; Durdu, Tüfekçi, and Cagiltay 2005). In the area of game development, however, Turkey remains far behind; no game hardware development activity
UNITED STATES OF AMERICA from:
Video Games Around the World
Author(s) Wolf Mark J. P.
Abstract: As the birthplace of video games and a major producer of them, the United States of America is the location of much of video game history, which is often covered in detail when the history of video games is recounted. Since this history is too extensive to cover adequately in a few thousand words and has already appeared a number of times (many book-length histories of video games center on the United States), this chapter will be different from the others in this collection in that it will focus specifically on the way US history shaped and influenced its video
Book Title: Luther and Liberation-A Latin American Perspective
Publisher: Augsburg Fortres
Author(s): Altmann Walter
Abstract: With the approach of the 500th anniversary of Martin Luther’s inauguration of the Protestant Reformation and the burgeoning dialogue between Catholics and Lutherans opened under Pope Francis, this new edition of Walter Altmann’s Luther and Liberation is timely and relevant. Luther and Liberation recovers the liberating and revolutionary impact of Luther’s theology, read afresh from the perspective of the Latin American context. Altmann provides a much-needed reassessment of Luther’s significance today through a direct engagement of Luther’s historical situation with an eye keenly situated on the deeply contextual situation of the contemporary reader, giving a localized reading from the author’s own experience in Latin America. The work examines with fresh vigor Luther’s central theological commitments, such as his doctrine of God, Christology, justification, hermeneutics, and ecclesiology, and his forays into economics, politics, education, violence, and war. This new edition greatly expands the original text with fresh scholarship and updated sources, footnotes, and bibliography, and contains several additional new chapters on Luther’s doctrine of God, theology of the sacraments, his controversial perspective on the Jews, and a new comparative account with the Latin American liberation theology tradition.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt17mcsdm
1 Luther at the Crossroads Between the Old and the New from:
Luther and Liberation
Abstract: The Reformation originated in the action of the Augustinian monk Martin Luther (1483-1546). Luther’s outstanding importance in his own time and his relevance still today are too obvious to ignore. However, nothing is more inappropriate for Luther than to simply celebrate him.¹ For “What is Luther?” asked Luther in 1522, describing himself as “poor and stinking maggot fodder,” and his name as “wretched,” so that no one should call themselves “Lutheran,” but simply “Christian.” In any case, “Neither was I crucified for anyone.”²
3 In the Cross of Christ, Victory over All Evil from:
Luther and Liberation
Abstract: As we have seen, the Reformation of Luther occurred in a time of profound transition.¹ Feudalism gave way to the first forms of mercantile capitalism. Absolute
12 War from:
Luther and Liberation
Abstract: The situation to which this writing of 1529 responds is very clear. At the time of writing, the Ottoman Turkish forces were besieging Vienna and threatened to take all of Europe. At the time of its publication, the resistance had managed to break the siege. However, while writing, Luther thought that Vienna was falling and his feeling was that the threat to Europe was extremely dramatic and real.
15 What Did Luther Want, in the End? from:
Luther and Liberation
Abstract: Luther seems to have many faces—in part, for external reasons. He lived in a turbulent time of profound transformations in all sectors: in culture, economy, social and political order, religion, and in morality. Luther never had the privilege or the misfortune of being able to reflect with an inner or outer distance on the historical process in upheaval. Not only was he forced to think, speak, and act in the middle of events; the facts themselves, so to speak, rained down on him, while others barreled him over. Generally, however, he retained a peculiar and surprising freedom of belief
2 In Praise of the Moral Imagination from:
Divination’s Grasp
Abstract: The moral imagination encounters a powerful challenge in wisdom divination. It is at once visual, tactile, and verbal—to draw on an oral archive of archaic praise poetry and to make small things—the divinatory lots—speak with much moral significance about elusive and often ill-defined concerns. Many images are brought to bear with the poetry and the lots; the juxtapositions are sometimes paradoxical, not easily fused together. Yet there is a promise of getting wise guidance from an expert—the experienced diviner. What a diviner and his clients seek to grasp escapes ordinary knowledge—it concerns the occult in
4 Poetics and Archives from:
Divination’s Grasp
Abstract: In this chapter, my approach turns to a more integrated, formal analysis. The need for this move comes from a comparative interest. Across considerable time, distance, and much cultural difference in southern Africa, a remarkable family of resemblances prevails in classic wisdom divination, in its poetry and its imaginative interpretation by diviners. What is very broadly shared is a common framework, similar standards of significance, like stereotypes, archetypes and imagery, roughly the same sociologic of patriarchy and male dominance.
6 Cosmic and Personal Understandings: from:
Divination’s Grasp
Abstract: Accounts of collaboration between diviners, of how they hear a séance together or cooperate and not merely compete, are rare in our literature. Instead, conventional wisdom reflects the diviners’ awareness of rivalry, heightened by their clients’ own “jockeying” and “shopping” for a self-interested outcome in the “politics of divination.” Clients do go back and forth from one diviner to another, including Christians using the Bible or with inspiration from the Holy Spirit (Werbner 2011a, chapter 5). Clients turn to distant diviners, not merely for a special occasion or a crisis, but sometimes routinely to one local diviner one day, and
1 POLITICAL EVIL: from:
Evil in Africa
Author(s) SILVA SÓNIA
Abstract: Depending on route, the concept of evil can take us in two different directions: morality or ontology. In the first direction, evil is part of morality, being oftentimes interchangeable with bad. In Martin Southwold’s words (1985, 131), this is evil in the
14 THE GENDER OF EVIL: from:
Evil in Africa
Author(s) HODGSON DOROTHY L.
Abstract: Although there is an emerging scholarship in anthropology on evil (e.g., Parkin 1985a)—its symbolism, manifestations, associations, and changes over time—few scholars have explored whether gender shapes experiences and expressions of evil, and if so how. Women and men appear as agents or victims of evil acts or forces, whether as intentionally negligent mothers (Parkin 1985c) or witches (van Beek 1994), but there has been little systematic effort to analyze what evil acts, beings or forces may tell us about gender relations, or, conversely, how a gender analysis may complicate our understandings of evil. But if, as David Parkin
Foreword from:
A Tolerant Nation?
Author(s) Gething Vaughan
Abstract: I am very pleased to be able to write a foreword to the updated version of this pioneering book of essays. When the first edition was published over a decade ago it was the first publication of its kind to document and debate in a sustained way the contribution of black and ethnic minority groups to the history, culture and modern society of Wales. It was the first overview of around 200 years of ethnic diversity in the country and it demonstrated the significance of that diversity for modern society. At the time of its publication devolution was still in
2 Slaughter and Salvation: from:
A Tolerant Nation?
Author(s) AARON JANE
Abstract: Two centuries ago, on 19 October 1816, a young Welsh woman barely seventeen years of age embarked on the good ship
Alacritybound on a great adventure. Ann Jones from Llanidloes had married Evan Evans from Llanrwst just a fortnight previously, and she now set sail with her new husband for the Cape of Good Hope, which at that time was part of Britain’s most recently established colony. Motivated by the need to secure for the merchant ships of the East India Company a safe resting place on the sea route to India, the British Crown, after a series of
12 ‘This is the place we are calling home’: from:
A Tolerant Nation?
Author(s) PAYSON ALIDA
Abstract: The 1999 Immigration and Asylum Act, following closely on devolution, ‘marked not only a sea-change for British asylum policy but also … for Wales’ and for people seeking sanctuary here.¹ The Act, one in a series of Acts from 1993 to 2009 to redraft asylum policy, is understood principally to have transformed the number and diversity of sanctuary seekers in Wales. For the first time, as part of a policy of ‘no-choice dispersal’, the United Kingdom Government ordered asylum applicants receiving housing support to move to housing sites across Britain, including to Cardiff, Newport, Swansea and Wrexham.² While Wales has
Book Title: Time-A Vocabulary of the Present
Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Elias Amy J.
Abstract: Featuring twenty essays that reveal what we talk about when we talk about time today, especially in the areas of history, measurement, and culture, each essay pairs two keywords to explore the tension and nuances between them, from "past/future" and "anticipation/unexpected" to "extinction/adaptation" and "serial/simultaneous." Moving beyond the truisms of postmodernism, the collection newly theorizes the meanings of temporality in relationship to aesthetic, cultural, technological, and economic developments in the postwar period. This book thus assumes that time-not space, as the postmoderns had it-is central to the contemporary period, and that through it we can come to terms with what contemporaneity can be for human beings caught up in the historical present. In the end,
Timereveals that the present is a cultural matrix in which overlapping temporalities condition and compete for our attention. Thus each pair of terms presents two temporalities, yielding a generative account of the time, or times, in which we live.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18040s0
Introduction: from:
Time
Author(s) ELIAS AMY J.
Abstract: Time eludes us. Since Aristotle and Augustine posed their paradoxical questions about time to the Western world in the
Physicsand theConfessionsrespectively, we have been trying to determine what it is that we talk about when we talk about time. The terms “past,” “present,” and “future” seem too static, too thin to express our full experience of temporality. They capture neither our sense of the ephemerality of the instant nor our anxieties about the long unfurlings of time that exceed human lifespans and comprehension: geological time, evolutionary time, the time of climate change, or the time of the
1 Past / Future from:
Time
Author(s) ELIAS AMY J.
Abstract: Much theoretical ink has been spilled about the “presentism” of post-WWII globalized societies and the loss of history that accompanies it. This presentism has been attributed to a traumatized Western collective consciousness confronting WWII as an “event” unprecedented in its history; to the time of the Spectacle that reduces the past to advertising slogans and depoliticized images of material desire; to finance capitalism’s acceleration of time and eradication of spatial distance as it creates a technologized world economy; or to the speed of “real time” technology that makes impossible both deliberation and historical depth. It seems that we may be
5 Anticipation / Unexpected from:
Time
Author(s) CURRIE MARK
Abstract: “Anticipation” and “unexpected” provide us with headings under which to organize and think about the valences of keywords that have taken hold recently in humanities discourses. I am thinking about words such as these: invention, inventiveness, advent,
arrivant, event, eruption, irruption, emergence, singularity, unforeseeability, unpredictability, uncertainty, the untimely, and the messianic. Most of these terms have straightforward denotations in everyday life, yet at the same time they have specialized contexts in philosophy and theory. We know, for example, what an event is, and yet we recognize that “we” and “us” also designate specialist communities in sentences such as these: “Indeed
6 Clock / Lived from:
Time
Author(s) CANALES JIMENA
Abstract: The solution appeared simple enough, and by all accounts the new system matched better with “time
7 Synchronic / Anachronic from:
Time
Author(s) FREEMAN ELIZABETH
Abstract: The terms “synchronic” and “anachronic” look symmetrical and antonymic to the eye. Both are forms of
chronos, time. But even their prefixes suggest that they are not simple opposites. The Greeksyn-means “together” or “with,” such that synchrony, “with time,” is a matter of rhythm. And the Greekana-does not mean “apart” or “without.” Instead it means “back” or “against,” such that anachrony, “back in time,” is a matter of propulsion and sequence. Thus the opposite of synchrony is not anachrony but asynchrony, “no-time” or “without-time.” And the opposite of anachrony (or at least of anachronism, the misplacement of an
8 Human / Planetary from:
Time
Author(s) HOUSER HEATHER
Abstract: After exploring the landscapes and histories of the Lake Superior region, poet Lorine Niedecker announces in a letter to Cid Corman, “I’m going into a kind of retreat so far as time (going to be geologic time from now on!) is concerned.”¹ Writing in 1966, at the dawn of so-called modern environmentalism,² she wishes to break through the dam separating the human and the planetary. Conceptual silos enclose these domains despite the obvious fact that (for now) being human requires being of planet Earth. Niedecker’s project of geologic timekeeping names time as one of the categories of thought that has
9 Serial / Simultaneous from:
Time
Author(s) GARDNER JARED
Abstract: 1905 is famously Albert Einstein’s
annus mirabilis, the year in which the patent office worker wrote a series of papers that would change forever the way in which physicists understood the universe, especially how time and its navigation would be reimagined in the twentieth century. After centuries of Newtonian physics, time was no longer absolute, nor was it any longer separate from the three dimensions that defined space. Einstein’s special theory of relativity highlighted the paradoxical relationship between two seemingly contradictory models of time:seriality, as the model that corresponds with how we experience time; andsimultaneity, as the model
11 Labor / Leisure from:
Time
Author(s) ANABLE AUBREY
Abstract: In 1930, the economist John Maynard Keynes predicted that by 2030 the wealth created by new technologies would bring about an era of universal leisure.¹ We can safely say that Keynes’s prediction was way off the mark.² In the West, the postwar transformations of work—from the computerization of factories and offices to the outsourcing of manufacturing jobs to the global south—have changed the labor landscape dramatically since 1930. Still, labor, not leisure, structures the vast majority of people’s time. Labor—a word that names both the kind of remunerated work that we do and also how that work
12 Real / Quality from:
Time
Author(s) MCGURL MARK
Abstract: Among the handful of time concepts that can be said to be original to the postwar period, two are prominent enough to lay claim to decisive significance for our understanding of the historical specificity of the present. The terms “real time” and “quality time” bob near the surface of contemporary life, too compact to count as clichés but too inflated with surplus meaning to be considered simply as keywords. As distinct modifications of a more basic (and yet notoriously mysterious) noun, each emerges from a relatively specialized postwar discourse and begins to circulate promiscuously in the realm of everyday American
13 Aesthetic / Prosthetic from:
Time
Author(s) MATZ JESSE
Abstract: Wired to a tank lies the mutilated corpse of Captain Colter Stevens, an army pilot killed in action in Afghanistan. His body is gone below the ribcage. But his brain lives still, patched into a computer system with a vital purpose: time travel. Sent into the past for information about a terrorist attack, Stevens ultimately saves Chicago from a massive dirty bomb. That such a radically disabled body could have such ability—to travel in time, to save a city—is the central premise of Duncan Jones’s 2011 film
Source Code.¹ The film demonstrates a remarkable form of prosthesis by
14 Analepsis / Prolepsis from:
Time
Author(s) PHELAN JAMES
Abstract: Analepsis and prolepsis are rough synonyms for flashback and flashforward. They were proposed by Gérard Genette as part of his theoretical and interpretive analysis of Marcel Proust’s
À la recherche du temps perdu, but they have since proved to be extremely valuable for thinking about the nature of narrative.¹ Observers of the “narrative turn,” the burgeoning interest across multiple disciplines in the explanatory power of stories, often explain its emergence by noting that narrative is, in the emphatic words of H. Porter Abbott, “the principal way in which our species organizes its understanding of time.”² Paul Ricoeur makes a similar
15 Embodied / Disembodied from:
Time
Author(s) STEPHENS SANDRA
Abstract: As a viewer rolls the trackball over a particular person in the video, that person freezes, while at the same time a reflection of him or her (a semitransparent, ghostlike image) continues on its original trajectory, moving along with the other people in the scene (see figure 15.3).
16 Theological / Worldly from:
Time
Author(s) HAUERWAS STANLEY
Abstract: Christianity is a faith that roots, in time, those who would be Christian. But those same Christians are bound by those temporal roots, haunted by the knowledge that they cannot escape time. I want to explore that paradox in an effort to make what I hope will be some useful observations about how Christians understand, as well as tell, time by briefly examining time as God’s time (theological time), time as the secular time of modernity (worldly time), and the time of lived reality for the Christian, which mediates these other senses of time and imbricates them in one another
19 Transmission / Influence from:
Time
Author(s) HAIDU RACHEL
Abstract: The time of artistic influence is
pastin a manner that reveals the schisms and anxieties of academia itself. On the one hand, “influence” is a term that has been out of fashion for more than forty years in humanistic disciplines touched by theory; on the other hand, it persists as a principle of thought, abandoned but still lurking, something we might wish to unthink but instead find ourselves actively repressing. We might repudiate, disavow, or just ignore it, but influence is still part of our consciousness, often part of the way we define what we study as objects in
Book Title: Time-A Vocabulary of the Present
Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Elias Amy J.
Abstract: Featuring twenty essays that reveal what we talk about when we talk about time today, especially in the areas of history, measurement, and culture, each essay pairs two keywords to explore the tension and nuances between them, from "past/future" and "anticipation/unexpected" to "extinction/adaptation" and "serial/simultaneous." Moving beyond the truisms of postmodernism, the collection newly theorizes the meanings of temporality in relationship to aesthetic, cultural, technological, and economic developments in the postwar period. This book thus assumes that time-not space, as the postmoderns had it-is central to the contemporary period, and that through it we can come to terms with what contemporaneity can be for human beings caught up in the historical present. In the end,
Timereveals that the present is a cultural matrix in which overlapping temporalities condition and compete for our attention. Thus each pair of terms presents two temporalities, yielding a generative account of the time, or times, in which we live.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18040s0
Introduction: from:
Time
Author(s) ELIAS AMY J.
Abstract: Time eludes us. Since Aristotle and Augustine posed their paradoxical questions about time to the Western world in the
Physicsand theConfessionsrespectively, we have been trying to determine what it is that we talk about when we talk about time. The terms “past,” “present,” and “future” seem too static, too thin to express our full experience of temporality. They capture neither our sense of the ephemerality of the instant nor our anxieties about the long unfurlings of time that exceed human lifespans and comprehension: geological time, evolutionary time, the time of climate change, or the time of the
1 Past / Future from:
Time
Author(s) ELIAS AMY J.
Abstract: Much theoretical ink has been spilled about the “presentism” of post-WWII globalized societies and the loss of history that accompanies it. This presentism has been attributed to a traumatized Western collective consciousness confronting WWII as an “event” unprecedented in its history; to the time of the Spectacle that reduces the past to advertising slogans and depoliticized images of material desire; to finance capitalism’s acceleration of time and eradication of spatial distance as it creates a technologized world economy; or to the speed of “real time” technology that makes impossible both deliberation and historical depth. It seems that we may be
5 Anticipation / Unexpected from:
Time
Author(s) CURRIE MARK
Abstract: “Anticipation” and “unexpected” provide us with headings under which to organize and think about the valences of keywords that have taken hold recently in humanities discourses. I am thinking about words such as these: invention, inventiveness, advent,
arrivant, event, eruption, irruption, emergence, singularity, unforeseeability, unpredictability, uncertainty, the untimely, and the messianic. Most of these terms have straightforward denotations in everyday life, yet at the same time they have specialized contexts in philosophy and theory. We know, for example, what an event is, and yet we recognize that “we” and “us” also designate specialist communities in sentences such as these: “Indeed
6 Clock / Lived from:
Time
Author(s) CANALES JIMENA
Abstract: The solution appeared simple enough, and by all accounts the new system matched better with “time
7 Synchronic / Anachronic from:
Time
Author(s) FREEMAN ELIZABETH
Abstract: The terms “synchronic” and “anachronic” look symmetrical and antonymic to the eye. Both are forms of
chronos, time. But even their prefixes suggest that they are not simple opposites. The Greeksyn-means “together” or “with,” such that synchrony, “with time,” is a matter of rhythm. And the Greekana-does not mean “apart” or “without.” Instead it means “back” or “against,” such that anachrony, “back in time,” is a matter of propulsion and sequence. Thus the opposite of synchrony is not anachrony but asynchrony, “no-time” or “without-time.” And the opposite of anachrony (or at least of anachronism, the misplacement of an
8 Human / Planetary from:
Time
Author(s) HOUSER HEATHER
Abstract: After exploring the landscapes and histories of the Lake Superior region, poet Lorine Niedecker announces in a letter to Cid Corman, “I’m going into a kind of retreat so far as time (going to be geologic time from now on!) is concerned.”¹ Writing in 1966, at the dawn of so-called modern environmentalism,² she wishes to break through the dam separating the human and the planetary. Conceptual silos enclose these domains despite the obvious fact that (for now) being human requires being of planet Earth. Niedecker’s project of geologic timekeeping names time as one of the categories of thought that has
9 Serial / Simultaneous from:
Time
Author(s) GARDNER JARED
Abstract: 1905 is famously Albert Einstein’s
annus mirabilis, the year in which the patent office worker wrote a series of papers that would change forever the way in which physicists understood the universe, especially how time and its navigation would be reimagined in the twentieth century. After centuries of Newtonian physics, time was no longer absolute, nor was it any longer separate from the three dimensions that defined space. Einstein’s special theory of relativity highlighted the paradoxical relationship between two seemingly contradictory models of time:seriality, as the model that corresponds with how we experience time; andsimultaneity, as the model
11 Labor / Leisure from:
Time
Author(s) ANABLE AUBREY
Abstract: In 1930, the economist John Maynard Keynes predicted that by 2030 the wealth created by new technologies would bring about an era of universal leisure.¹ We can safely say that Keynes’s prediction was way off the mark.² In the West, the postwar transformations of work—from the computerization of factories and offices to the outsourcing of manufacturing jobs to the global south—have changed the labor landscape dramatically since 1930. Still, labor, not leisure, structures the vast majority of people’s time. Labor—a word that names both the kind of remunerated work that we do and also how that work
12 Real / Quality from:
Time
Author(s) MCGURL MARK
Abstract: Among the handful of time concepts that can be said to be original to the postwar period, two are prominent enough to lay claim to decisive significance for our understanding of the historical specificity of the present. The terms “real time” and “quality time” bob near the surface of contemporary life, too compact to count as clichés but too inflated with surplus meaning to be considered simply as keywords. As distinct modifications of a more basic (and yet notoriously mysterious) noun, each emerges from a relatively specialized postwar discourse and begins to circulate promiscuously in the realm of everyday American
13 Aesthetic / Prosthetic from:
Time
Author(s) MATZ JESSE
Abstract: Wired to a tank lies the mutilated corpse of Captain Colter Stevens, an army pilot killed in action in Afghanistan. His body is gone below the ribcage. But his brain lives still, patched into a computer system with a vital purpose: time travel. Sent into the past for information about a terrorist attack, Stevens ultimately saves Chicago from a massive dirty bomb. That such a radically disabled body could have such ability—to travel in time, to save a city—is the central premise of Duncan Jones’s 2011 film
Source Code.¹ The film demonstrates a remarkable form of prosthesis by
14 Analepsis / Prolepsis from:
Time
Author(s) PHELAN JAMES
Abstract: Analepsis and prolepsis are rough synonyms for flashback and flashforward. They were proposed by Gérard Genette as part of his theoretical and interpretive analysis of Marcel Proust’s
À la recherche du temps perdu, but they have since proved to be extremely valuable for thinking about the nature of narrative.¹ Observers of the “narrative turn,” the burgeoning interest across multiple disciplines in the explanatory power of stories, often explain its emergence by noting that narrative is, in the emphatic words of H. Porter Abbott, “the principal way in which our species organizes its understanding of time.”² Paul Ricoeur makes a similar
15 Embodied / Disembodied from:
Time
Author(s) STEPHENS SANDRA
Abstract: As a viewer rolls the trackball over a particular person in the video, that person freezes, while at the same time a reflection of him or her (a semitransparent, ghostlike image) continues on its original trajectory, moving along with the other people in the scene (see figure 15.3).
16 Theological / Worldly from:
Time
Author(s) HAUERWAS STANLEY
Abstract: Christianity is a faith that roots, in time, those who would be Christian. But those same Christians are bound by those temporal roots, haunted by the knowledge that they cannot escape time. I want to explore that paradox in an effort to make what I hope will be some useful observations about how Christians understand, as well as tell, time by briefly examining time as God’s time (theological time), time as the secular time of modernity (worldly time), and the time of lived reality for the Christian, which mediates these other senses of time and imbricates them in one another
19 Transmission / Influence from:
Time
Author(s) HAIDU RACHEL
Abstract: The time of artistic influence is
pastin a manner that reveals the schisms and anxieties of academia itself. On the one hand, “influence” is a term that has been out of fashion for more than forty years in humanistic disciplines touched by theory; on the other hand, it persists as a principle of thought, abandoned but still lurking, something we might wish to unthink but instead find ourselves actively repressing. We might repudiate, disavow, or just ignore it, but influence is still part of our consciousness, often part of the way we define what we study as objects in
Book Title: Time-A Vocabulary of the Present
Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Elias Amy J.
Abstract: Featuring twenty essays that reveal what we talk about when we talk about time today, especially in the areas of history, measurement, and culture, each essay pairs two keywords to explore the tension and nuances between them, from "past/future" and "anticipation/unexpected" to "extinction/adaptation" and "serial/simultaneous." Moving beyond the truisms of postmodernism, the collection newly theorizes the meanings of temporality in relationship to aesthetic, cultural, technological, and economic developments in the postwar period. This book thus assumes that time-not space, as the postmoderns had it-is central to the contemporary period, and that through it we can come to terms with what contemporaneity can be for human beings caught up in the historical present. In the end,
Timereveals that the present is a cultural matrix in which overlapping temporalities condition and compete for our attention. Thus each pair of terms presents two temporalities, yielding a generative account of the time, or times, in which we live.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18040s0
Introduction: from:
Time
Author(s) ELIAS AMY J.
Abstract: Time eludes us. Since Aristotle and Augustine posed their paradoxical questions about time to the Western world in the
Physicsand theConfessionsrespectively, we have been trying to determine what it is that we talk about when we talk about time. The terms “past,” “present,” and “future” seem too static, too thin to express our full experience of temporality. They capture neither our sense of the ephemerality of the instant nor our anxieties about the long unfurlings of time that exceed human lifespans and comprehension: geological time, evolutionary time, the time of climate change, or the time of the
1 Past / Future from:
Time
Author(s) ELIAS AMY J.
Abstract: Much theoretical ink has been spilled about the “presentism” of post-WWII globalized societies and the loss of history that accompanies it. This presentism has been attributed to a traumatized Western collective consciousness confronting WWII as an “event” unprecedented in its history; to the time of the Spectacle that reduces the past to advertising slogans and depoliticized images of material desire; to finance capitalism’s acceleration of time and eradication of spatial distance as it creates a technologized world economy; or to the speed of “real time” technology that makes impossible both deliberation and historical depth. It seems that we may be
5 Anticipation / Unexpected from:
Time
Author(s) CURRIE MARK
Abstract: “Anticipation” and “unexpected” provide us with headings under which to organize and think about the valences of keywords that have taken hold recently in humanities discourses. I am thinking about words such as these: invention, inventiveness, advent,
arrivant, event, eruption, irruption, emergence, singularity, unforeseeability, unpredictability, uncertainty, the untimely, and the messianic. Most of these terms have straightforward denotations in everyday life, yet at the same time they have specialized contexts in philosophy and theory. We know, for example, what an event is, and yet we recognize that “we” and “us” also designate specialist communities in sentences such as these: “Indeed
6 Clock / Lived from:
Time
Author(s) CANALES JIMENA
Abstract: The solution appeared simple enough, and by all accounts the new system matched better with “time
7 Synchronic / Anachronic from:
Time
Author(s) FREEMAN ELIZABETH
Abstract: The terms “synchronic” and “anachronic” look symmetrical and antonymic to the eye. Both are forms of
chronos, time. But even their prefixes suggest that they are not simple opposites. The Greeksyn-means “together” or “with,” such that synchrony, “with time,” is a matter of rhythm. And the Greekana-does not mean “apart” or “without.” Instead it means “back” or “against,” such that anachrony, “back in time,” is a matter of propulsion and sequence. Thus the opposite of synchrony is not anachrony but asynchrony, “no-time” or “without-time.” And the opposite of anachrony (or at least of anachronism, the misplacement of an
8 Human / Planetary from:
Time
Author(s) HOUSER HEATHER
Abstract: After exploring the landscapes and histories of the Lake Superior region, poet Lorine Niedecker announces in a letter to Cid Corman, “I’m going into a kind of retreat so far as time (going to be geologic time from now on!) is concerned.”¹ Writing in 1966, at the dawn of so-called modern environmentalism,² she wishes to break through the dam separating the human and the planetary. Conceptual silos enclose these domains despite the obvious fact that (for now) being human requires being of planet Earth. Niedecker’s project of geologic timekeeping names time as one of the categories of thought that has
9 Serial / Simultaneous from:
Time
Author(s) GARDNER JARED
Abstract: 1905 is famously Albert Einstein’s
annus mirabilis, the year in which the patent office worker wrote a series of papers that would change forever the way in which physicists understood the universe, especially how time and its navigation would be reimagined in the twentieth century. After centuries of Newtonian physics, time was no longer absolute, nor was it any longer separate from the three dimensions that defined space. Einstein’s special theory of relativity highlighted the paradoxical relationship between two seemingly contradictory models of time:seriality, as the model that corresponds with how we experience time; andsimultaneity, as the model
11 Labor / Leisure from:
Time
Author(s) ANABLE AUBREY
Abstract: In 1930, the economist John Maynard Keynes predicted that by 2030 the wealth created by new technologies would bring about an era of universal leisure.¹ We can safely say that Keynes’s prediction was way off the mark.² In the West, the postwar transformations of work—from the computerization of factories and offices to the outsourcing of manufacturing jobs to the global south—have changed the labor landscape dramatically since 1930. Still, labor, not leisure, structures the vast majority of people’s time. Labor—a word that names both the kind of remunerated work that we do and also how that work
12 Real / Quality from:
Time
Author(s) MCGURL MARK
Abstract: Among the handful of time concepts that can be said to be original to the postwar period, two are prominent enough to lay claim to decisive significance for our understanding of the historical specificity of the present. The terms “real time” and “quality time” bob near the surface of contemporary life, too compact to count as clichés but too inflated with surplus meaning to be considered simply as keywords. As distinct modifications of a more basic (and yet notoriously mysterious) noun, each emerges from a relatively specialized postwar discourse and begins to circulate promiscuously in the realm of everyday American
13 Aesthetic / Prosthetic from:
Time
Author(s) MATZ JESSE
Abstract: Wired to a tank lies the mutilated corpse of Captain Colter Stevens, an army pilot killed in action in Afghanistan. His body is gone below the ribcage. But his brain lives still, patched into a computer system with a vital purpose: time travel. Sent into the past for information about a terrorist attack, Stevens ultimately saves Chicago from a massive dirty bomb. That such a radically disabled body could have such ability—to travel in time, to save a city—is the central premise of Duncan Jones’s 2011 film
Source Code.¹ The film demonstrates a remarkable form of prosthesis by
14 Analepsis / Prolepsis from:
Time
Author(s) PHELAN JAMES
Abstract: Analepsis and prolepsis are rough synonyms for flashback and flashforward. They were proposed by Gérard Genette as part of his theoretical and interpretive analysis of Marcel Proust’s
À la recherche du temps perdu, but they have since proved to be extremely valuable for thinking about the nature of narrative.¹ Observers of the “narrative turn,” the burgeoning interest across multiple disciplines in the explanatory power of stories, often explain its emergence by noting that narrative is, in the emphatic words of H. Porter Abbott, “the principal way in which our species organizes its understanding of time.”² Paul Ricoeur makes a similar
15 Embodied / Disembodied from:
Time
Author(s) STEPHENS SANDRA
Abstract: As a viewer rolls the trackball over a particular person in the video, that person freezes, while at the same time a reflection of him or her (a semitransparent, ghostlike image) continues on its original trajectory, moving along with the other people in the scene (see figure 15.3).
16 Theological / Worldly from:
Time
Author(s) HAUERWAS STANLEY
Abstract: Christianity is a faith that roots, in time, those who would be Christian. But those same Christians are bound by those temporal roots, haunted by the knowledge that they cannot escape time. I want to explore that paradox in an effort to make what I hope will be some useful observations about how Christians understand, as well as tell, time by briefly examining time as God’s time (theological time), time as the secular time of modernity (worldly time), and the time of lived reality for the Christian, which mediates these other senses of time and imbricates them in one another
19 Transmission / Influence from:
Time
Author(s) HAIDU RACHEL
Abstract: The time of artistic influence is
pastin a manner that reveals the schisms and anxieties of academia itself. On the one hand, “influence” is a term that has been out of fashion for more than forty years in humanistic disciplines touched by theory; on the other hand, it persists as a principle of thought, abandoned but still lurking, something we might wish to unthink but instead find ourselves actively repressing. We might repudiate, disavow, or just ignore it, but influence is still part of our consciousness, often part of the way we define what we study as objects in
Book Title: Time-A Vocabulary of the Present
Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Elias Amy J.
Abstract: Featuring twenty essays that reveal what we talk about when we talk about time today, especially in the areas of history, measurement, and culture, each essay pairs two keywords to explore the tension and nuances between them, from "past/future" and "anticipation/unexpected" to "extinction/adaptation" and "serial/simultaneous." Moving beyond the truisms of postmodernism, the collection newly theorizes the meanings of temporality in relationship to aesthetic, cultural, technological, and economic developments in the postwar period. This book thus assumes that time-not space, as the postmoderns had it-is central to the contemporary period, and that through it we can come to terms with what contemporaneity can be for human beings caught up in the historical present. In the end,
Timereveals that the present is a cultural matrix in which overlapping temporalities condition and compete for our attention. Thus each pair of terms presents two temporalities, yielding a generative account of the time, or times, in which we live.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18040s0
Introduction: from:
Time
Author(s) ELIAS AMY J.
Abstract: Time eludes us. Since Aristotle and Augustine posed their paradoxical questions about time to the Western world in the
Physicsand theConfessionsrespectively, we have been trying to determine what it is that we talk about when we talk about time. The terms “past,” “present,” and “future” seem too static, too thin to express our full experience of temporality. They capture neither our sense of the ephemerality of the instant nor our anxieties about the long unfurlings of time that exceed human lifespans and comprehension: geological time, evolutionary time, the time of climate change, or the time of the
1 Past / Future from:
Time
Author(s) ELIAS AMY J.
Abstract: Much theoretical ink has been spilled about the “presentism” of post-WWII globalized societies and the loss of history that accompanies it. This presentism has been attributed to a traumatized Western collective consciousness confronting WWII as an “event” unprecedented in its history; to the time of the Spectacle that reduces the past to advertising slogans and depoliticized images of material desire; to finance capitalism’s acceleration of time and eradication of spatial distance as it creates a technologized world economy; or to the speed of “real time” technology that makes impossible both deliberation and historical depth. It seems that we may be
5 Anticipation / Unexpected from:
Time
Author(s) CURRIE MARK
Abstract: “Anticipation” and “unexpected” provide us with headings under which to organize and think about the valences of keywords that have taken hold recently in humanities discourses. I am thinking about words such as these: invention, inventiveness, advent,
arrivant, event, eruption, irruption, emergence, singularity, unforeseeability, unpredictability, uncertainty, the untimely, and the messianic. Most of these terms have straightforward denotations in everyday life, yet at the same time they have specialized contexts in philosophy and theory. We know, for example, what an event is, and yet we recognize that “we” and “us” also designate specialist communities in sentences such as these: “Indeed
6 Clock / Lived from:
Time
Author(s) CANALES JIMENA
Abstract: The solution appeared simple enough, and by all accounts the new system matched better with “time
7 Synchronic / Anachronic from:
Time
Author(s) FREEMAN ELIZABETH
Abstract: The terms “synchronic” and “anachronic” look symmetrical and antonymic to the eye. Both are forms of
chronos, time. But even their prefixes suggest that they are not simple opposites. The Greeksyn-means “together” or “with,” such that synchrony, “with time,” is a matter of rhythm. And the Greekana-does not mean “apart” or “without.” Instead it means “back” or “against,” such that anachrony, “back in time,” is a matter of propulsion and sequence. Thus the opposite of synchrony is not anachrony but asynchrony, “no-time” or “without-time.” And the opposite of anachrony (or at least of anachronism, the misplacement of an
8 Human / Planetary from:
Time
Author(s) HOUSER HEATHER
Abstract: After exploring the landscapes and histories of the Lake Superior region, poet Lorine Niedecker announces in a letter to Cid Corman, “I’m going into a kind of retreat so far as time (going to be geologic time from now on!) is concerned.”¹ Writing in 1966, at the dawn of so-called modern environmentalism,² she wishes to break through the dam separating the human and the planetary. Conceptual silos enclose these domains despite the obvious fact that (for now) being human requires being of planet Earth. Niedecker’s project of geologic timekeeping names time as one of the categories of thought that has
9 Serial / Simultaneous from:
Time
Author(s) GARDNER JARED
Abstract: 1905 is famously Albert Einstein’s
annus mirabilis, the year in which the patent office worker wrote a series of papers that would change forever the way in which physicists understood the universe, especially how time and its navigation would be reimagined in the twentieth century. After centuries of Newtonian physics, time was no longer absolute, nor was it any longer separate from the three dimensions that defined space. Einstein’s special theory of relativity highlighted the paradoxical relationship between two seemingly contradictory models of time:seriality, as the model that corresponds with how we experience time; andsimultaneity, as the model
11 Labor / Leisure from:
Time
Author(s) ANABLE AUBREY
Abstract: In 1930, the economist John Maynard Keynes predicted that by 2030 the wealth created by new technologies would bring about an era of universal leisure.¹ We can safely say that Keynes’s prediction was way off the mark.² In the West, the postwar transformations of work—from the computerization of factories and offices to the outsourcing of manufacturing jobs to the global south—have changed the labor landscape dramatically since 1930. Still, labor, not leisure, structures the vast majority of people’s time. Labor—a word that names both the kind of remunerated work that we do and also how that work
12 Real / Quality from:
Time
Author(s) MCGURL MARK
Abstract: Among the handful of time concepts that can be said to be original to the postwar period, two are prominent enough to lay claim to decisive significance for our understanding of the historical specificity of the present. The terms “real time” and “quality time” bob near the surface of contemporary life, too compact to count as clichés but too inflated with surplus meaning to be considered simply as keywords. As distinct modifications of a more basic (and yet notoriously mysterious) noun, each emerges from a relatively specialized postwar discourse and begins to circulate promiscuously in the realm of everyday American
13 Aesthetic / Prosthetic from:
Time
Author(s) MATZ JESSE
Abstract: Wired to a tank lies the mutilated corpse of Captain Colter Stevens, an army pilot killed in action in Afghanistan. His body is gone below the ribcage. But his brain lives still, patched into a computer system with a vital purpose: time travel. Sent into the past for information about a terrorist attack, Stevens ultimately saves Chicago from a massive dirty bomb. That such a radically disabled body could have such ability—to travel in time, to save a city—is the central premise of Duncan Jones’s 2011 film
Source Code.¹ The film demonstrates a remarkable form of prosthesis by
14 Analepsis / Prolepsis from:
Time
Author(s) PHELAN JAMES
Abstract: Analepsis and prolepsis are rough synonyms for flashback and flashforward. They were proposed by Gérard Genette as part of his theoretical and interpretive analysis of Marcel Proust’s
À la recherche du temps perdu, but they have since proved to be extremely valuable for thinking about the nature of narrative.¹ Observers of the “narrative turn,” the burgeoning interest across multiple disciplines in the explanatory power of stories, often explain its emergence by noting that narrative is, in the emphatic words of H. Porter Abbott, “the principal way in which our species organizes its understanding of time.”² Paul Ricoeur makes a similar
15 Embodied / Disembodied from:
Time
Author(s) STEPHENS SANDRA
Abstract: As a viewer rolls the trackball over a particular person in the video, that person freezes, while at the same time a reflection of him or her (a semitransparent, ghostlike image) continues on its original trajectory, moving along with the other people in the scene (see figure 15.3).
16 Theological / Worldly from:
Time
Author(s) HAUERWAS STANLEY
Abstract: Christianity is a faith that roots, in time, those who would be Christian. But those same Christians are bound by those temporal roots, haunted by the knowledge that they cannot escape time. I want to explore that paradox in an effort to make what I hope will be some useful observations about how Christians understand, as well as tell, time by briefly examining time as God’s time (theological time), time as the secular time of modernity (worldly time), and the time of lived reality for the Christian, which mediates these other senses of time and imbricates them in one another
19 Transmission / Influence from:
Time
Author(s) HAIDU RACHEL
Abstract: The time of artistic influence is
pastin a manner that reveals the schisms and anxieties of academia itself. On the one hand, “influence” is a term that has been out of fashion for more than forty years in humanistic disciplines touched by theory; on the other hand, it persists as a principle of thought, abandoned but still lurking, something we might wish to unthink but instead find ourselves actively repressing. We might repudiate, disavow, or just ignore it, but influence is still part of our consciousness, often part of the way we define what we study as objects in
Book Title: Time-A Vocabulary of the Present
Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Elias Amy J.
Abstract: Featuring twenty essays that reveal what we talk about when we talk about time today, especially in the areas of history, measurement, and culture, each essay pairs two keywords to explore the tension and nuances between them, from "past/future" and "anticipation/unexpected" to "extinction/adaptation" and "serial/simultaneous." Moving beyond the truisms of postmodernism, the collection newly theorizes the meanings of temporality in relationship to aesthetic, cultural, technological, and economic developments in the postwar period. This book thus assumes that time-not space, as the postmoderns had it-is central to the contemporary period, and that through it we can come to terms with what contemporaneity can be for human beings caught up in the historical present. In the end,
Timereveals that the present is a cultural matrix in which overlapping temporalities condition and compete for our attention. Thus each pair of terms presents two temporalities, yielding a generative account of the time, or times, in which we live.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18040s0
Introduction: from:
Time
Author(s) ELIAS AMY J.
Abstract: Time eludes us. Since Aristotle and Augustine posed their paradoxical questions about time to the Western world in the
Physicsand theConfessionsrespectively, we have been trying to determine what it is that we talk about when we talk about time. The terms “past,” “present,” and “future” seem too static, too thin to express our full experience of temporality. They capture neither our sense of the ephemerality of the instant nor our anxieties about the long unfurlings of time that exceed human lifespans and comprehension: geological time, evolutionary time, the time of climate change, or the time of the
1 Past / Future from:
Time
Author(s) ELIAS AMY J.
Abstract: Much theoretical ink has been spilled about the “presentism” of post-WWII globalized societies and the loss of history that accompanies it. This presentism has been attributed to a traumatized Western collective consciousness confronting WWII as an “event” unprecedented in its history; to the time of the Spectacle that reduces the past to advertising slogans and depoliticized images of material desire; to finance capitalism’s acceleration of time and eradication of spatial distance as it creates a technologized world economy; or to the speed of “real time” technology that makes impossible both deliberation and historical depth. It seems that we may be
5 Anticipation / Unexpected from:
Time
Author(s) CURRIE MARK
Abstract: “Anticipation” and “unexpected” provide us with headings under which to organize and think about the valences of keywords that have taken hold recently in humanities discourses. I am thinking about words such as these: invention, inventiveness, advent,
arrivant, event, eruption, irruption, emergence, singularity, unforeseeability, unpredictability, uncertainty, the untimely, and the messianic. Most of these terms have straightforward denotations in everyday life, yet at the same time they have specialized contexts in philosophy and theory. We know, for example, what an event is, and yet we recognize that “we” and “us” also designate specialist communities in sentences such as these: “Indeed
6 Clock / Lived from:
Time
Author(s) CANALES JIMENA
Abstract: The solution appeared simple enough, and by all accounts the new system matched better with “time
7 Synchronic / Anachronic from:
Time
Author(s) FREEMAN ELIZABETH
Abstract: The terms “synchronic” and “anachronic” look symmetrical and antonymic to the eye. Both are forms of
chronos, time. But even their prefixes suggest that they are not simple opposites. The Greeksyn-means “together” or “with,” such that synchrony, “with time,” is a matter of rhythm. And the Greekana-does not mean “apart” or “without.” Instead it means “back” or “against,” such that anachrony, “back in time,” is a matter of propulsion and sequence. Thus the opposite of synchrony is not anachrony but asynchrony, “no-time” or “without-time.” And the opposite of anachrony (or at least of anachronism, the misplacement of an
8 Human / Planetary from:
Time
Author(s) HOUSER HEATHER
Abstract: After exploring the landscapes and histories of the Lake Superior region, poet Lorine Niedecker announces in a letter to Cid Corman, “I’m going into a kind of retreat so far as time (going to be geologic time from now on!) is concerned.”¹ Writing in 1966, at the dawn of so-called modern environmentalism,² she wishes to break through the dam separating the human and the planetary. Conceptual silos enclose these domains despite the obvious fact that (for now) being human requires being of planet Earth. Niedecker’s project of geologic timekeeping names time as one of the categories of thought that has
9 Serial / Simultaneous from:
Time
Author(s) GARDNER JARED
Abstract: 1905 is famously Albert Einstein’s
annus mirabilis, the year in which the patent office worker wrote a series of papers that would change forever the way in which physicists understood the universe, especially how time and its navigation would be reimagined in the twentieth century. After centuries of Newtonian physics, time was no longer absolute, nor was it any longer separate from the three dimensions that defined space. Einstein’s special theory of relativity highlighted the paradoxical relationship between two seemingly contradictory models of time:seriality, as the model that corresponds with how we experience time; andsimultaneity, as the model
11 Labor / Leisure from:
Time
Author(s) ANABLE AUBREY
Abstract: In 1930, the economist John Maynard Keynes predicted that by 2030 the wealth created by new technologies would bring about an era of universal leisure.¹ We can safely say that Keynes’s prediction was way off the mark.² In the West, the postwar transformations of work—from the computerization of factories and offices to the outsourcing of manufacturing jobs to the global south—have changed the labor landscape dramatically since 1930. Still, labor, not leisure, structures the vast majority of people’s time. Labor—a word that names both the kind of remunerated work that we do and also how that work
12 Real / Quality from:
Time
Author(s) MCGURL MARK
Abstract: Among the handful of time concepts that can be said to be original to the postwar period, two are prominent enough to lay claim to decisive significance for our understanding of the historical specificity of the present. The terms “real time” and “quality time” bob near the surface of contemporary life, too compact to count as clichés but too inflated with surplus meaning to be considered simply as keywords. As distinct modifications of a more basic (and yet notoriously mysterious) noun, each emerges from a relatively specialized postwar discourse and begins to circulate promiscuously in the realm of everyday American
13 Aesthetic / Prosthetic from:
Time
Author(s) MATZ JESSE
Abstract: Wired to a tank lies the mutilated corpse of Captain Colter Stevens, an army pilot killed in action in Afghanistan. His body is gone below the ribcage. But his brain lives still, patched into a computer system with a vital purpose: time travel. Sent into the past for information about a terrorist attack, Stevens ultimately saves Chicago from a massive dirty bomb. That such a radically disabled body could have such ability—to travel in time, to save a city—is the central premise of Duncan Jones’s 2011 film
Source Code.¹ The film demonstrates a remarkable form of prosthesis by
14 Analepsis / Prolepsis from:
Time
Author(s) PHELAN JAMES
Abstract: Analepsis and prolepsis are rough synonyms for flashback and flashforward. They were proposed by Gérard Genette as part of his theoretical and interpretive analysis of Marcel Proust’s
À la recherche du temps perdu, but they have since proved to be extremely valuable for thinking about the nature of narrative.¹ Observers of the “narrative turn,” the burgeoning interest across multiple disciplines in the explanatory power of stories, often explain its emergence by noting that narrative is, in the emphatic words of H. Porter Abbott, “the principal way in which our species organizes its understanding of time.”² Paul Ricoeur makes a similar
15 Embodied / Disembodied from:
Time
Author(s) STEPHENS SANDRA
Abstract: As a viewer rolls the trackball over a particular person in the video, that person freezes, while at the same time a reflection of him or her (a semitransparent, ghostlike image) continues on its original trajectory, moving along with the other people in the scene (see figure 15.3).
16 Theological / Worldly from:
Time
Author(s) HAUERWAS STANLEY
Abstract: Christianity is a faith that roots, in time, those who would be Christian. But those same Christians are bound by those temporal roots, haunted by the knowledge that they cannot escape time. I want to explore that paradox in an effort to make what I hope will be some useful observations about how Christians understand, as well as tell, time by briefly examining time as God’s time (theological time), time as the secular time of modernity (worldly time), and the time of lived reality for the Christian, which mediates these other senses of time and imbricates them in one another
19 Transmission / Influence from:
Time
Author(s) HAIDU RACHEL
Abstract: The time of artistic influence is
pastin a manner that reveals the schisms and anxieties of academia itself. On the one hand, “influence” is a term that has been out of fashion for more than forty years in humanistic disciplines touched by theory; on the other hand, it persists as a principle of thought, abandoned but still lurking, something we might wish to unthink but instead find ourselves actively repressing. We might repudiate, disavow, or just ignore it, but influence is still part of our consciousness, often part of the way we define what we study as objects in
2 Trauma Is as Trauma Does: from:
Critical Trauma Studies
Author(s) STEVENS MAURICE E.
Abstract: I love stories and storytelling, and I love that feeling of being in the presence of a good storyteller. I’m sure you’ve experienced it. That sense of being spoken to, being spoken of, reflecting or laughing individually and feeling part of something else, something beyond your individuality, your subjectivity. I am fascinated with narratives, too. Sometimes they contain stories, sometimes not, but I have long been interested in how narratives of individual and communal “self-hood” provide us with ideas about who we are, or think we are, and present us with visions of our place in the cosmos, in history,
10 Body Animations (or, Lullaby for Fallujah): from:
Critical Trauma Studies
Author(s) ORR JACKIE
Abstract: What can live performance become when reinscribed for the page? How does a writing voice (without breath) generate the embodied animations, and invite the intimate architextures, of the timespace of performance? Torn from the “real time” of its never fully real staging, performance struggles to reenact on the page its peculiar obsession: to inhabit the magical, archaic economies of possession and dispossession. Hands empty. Hands full. Empty. Repeat. If trauma often vibrates at the collective edge of live performance, then where does trauma dwell when the performative text is held in your hands, alone? How does trauma’s body transform when
La musique au second degré: from:
Music, Analysis, Experience
Author(s) de Castro Paulo F.
Abstract: The concept of intertextuality was originally developed in the context of poststructuralist literary theory by Julia Kristeva, who introduced the term (ca. 1966) in the wake of her engagement with Mikhail Bakhtin’s notion of dialogism. At around the same time, in
L’archéologie du savoir, Michel Foucault was writing about the open borders of the book and the way every book is caught up in a system of references to other books (or texts), comparing it to a node within a network (Foucault, 1969, p. 34). The termintertextuality, quickly seized upon and given wide currency by Roland Barthes among other
The Ability of Tonality Recognition as One of Human-Specific Adaptations from:
Music, Analysis, Experience
Author(s) Podlipniak Piotr
Abstract: Tonality is understood by musicologists and musicians in many different, often mutually exclusive senses. Sometimes it is regarded as a distinctive characteristic of solely Western music (e.g. Dahlhaus, 1988), but sometimes this understanding is applied to the features of non-Western music too (e.g. Krumhansl, 1990). Even as a term restricted to the features of Western music it is assigned a variety of meanings such as an aspect of melodic relations (Thomson, 1999) or an exclusive trait of harmonic organization (Lowinsky, 1990). Also in the psychological sense,
tonalityis defined by scholars both as the hierarchical arrangements of pitch phenomena in
“What Kind of Genre Do You Think We Are?” from:
Music, Analysis, Experience
Author(s) Marino Gabriele
Abstract: While single genre histories have been quite explored (e.g., Charlton, 1994; Borthwick & Moy, 2004; F. Fabbri, 2008), the notion of
musical genreis not very much studied in itself, as a theoretical entity (cf. F. Fabbri, 1982, 2012; Hamm, 1994; Moore, 2001; Marx, 2008). This is not that surprising, as it is a crucial notion (possibly, the highest level of abstraction we can deal with as we talk about music), but, at the same time, a very ambiguous one.¹
Melodic Forces and Agential Energies: from:
Music, Analysis, Experience
Author(s) Hatten Robert S.
Abstract: Melody is not merely a sequence of pitches in a certain rhythm often found in the upper voice. When we hear, and follow, the melody of a tonal composition, we are experiencing an emergent quality that I call
melos, which I define as theforegrounded and continuous expressive focus associated with the principal musical discourse of a virtual human agent. Following themelosmay lead us from one voice-leading to another, and even from one line in the texture to another, regardless of register (Pierce, 2007, pp. 46-49) or even timbre (Webern’sKlangfarbenmelodie).Melosmay at times be enhanced or
Book Title: Mestizaje and Globalization-Transformations of Identity and Power
Publisher: University of Arizona Press
Author(s): YOUNG PHILIP D.
Abstract: The Spanish word
mestizajedoes not easily translate into English. Its meaning and significance have been debated for centuries since colonization by European powers began. Its simplest definition is "mixing." As long as the term has been employed, norms and ideas about racial and cultural relations in the Americas have been imagined, imposed, questioned, rejected, and given new meaning.Mestizaje and Globalizationpresents perspectives on the underlying transformation of identity and power associated with the term during times of great change in the Americas. The volume offers a comprehensive and empirically diverse collection of insights concerning mestizaje's complex relationship with indigeneity, the politics of ethnic identity, transnational social movements, the aesthetic of cultural production, development policies, and capitalist globalization, with particular attention to cases in Latin America and the United States.Beyond the narrow and often inadequate meaning of mestizaje as biological and racial mixing, the concept deserves an innovative theoretical consideration due to its multidimensional, multifaceted character and its resilience as an ideological construct. The contributors argue that historical analyses of mestizaje do not sufficiently understand contemporary ways that racism, ethnic discrimination, and social injustice intermingle with current discourse and practice of cultural recognition and multiculturalism in the Americas.Mestizaje and Globalizationcontributes to an emerging multidisciplinary effort to explore how identities are imposed, negotiated, and reconstructed. The chapter authors clearly set forth the issues and obstacles that Indigenous peoples and subjugated minorities face, as well as the strategies they have employed to gain empowerment in the face of globalization.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt183gxvs
Introduction to Key Concepts from:
Mestizaje and Globalization
Author(s) YOUNG PHILIP D.
Abstract: Among their traditional beliefs, Quechua and Aymara peoples of the Andes hold the concept of
pachakuti, “literally, the turning about of the times … a change of direction” (Delgado-P. 1994, 77), as a turning or reversal of the world (Skar 1994). The Andeans view the pachakuti as a process that does not necessarily take place in a brief span of time but rather builds to a point of climax, of rapid, profound sociocultural change and the emergence of a new world order that has lasting consequences far into the future. Related in Andean Indigenous belief to a world turning or
CHAPTER ONE The Revolutionary Encounter from:
Mestizaje and Globalization
Author(s) WIRTH REX
Abstract: People have been living in the Valley of Mexico for a very long time. The cities of the valley have ranked among the top ten in population in the world since the time of the Roman Empire. Today, Mexico City is one the largest cities in the world. This is a phenomenal comeback because only five hundred years ago the valley suffered catastrophic depopulation as a result of the Spanish Conquest.
CHAPTER FOUR Born Indigenous, Growing Up Mestizos: from:
Mestizaje and Globalization
Author(s) ARREDONDO MARIELLA I.
Abstract: The city of Arequipa, Peru’s second largest, has experienced rapid growth due to migration from surrounding rural highland areas. In the past thirty years, Arequipa has seen its population increase by over four hundred thousand inhabitants. Recent population shifts are changing the perception long-time Arequipeños have of their city. Throughout Peru’s republican history, the city has long been represented, from within and without, as a place of diverse racial and ethnic mixing, and it has been characterized as possessing a strong regionalist and unique mestizo culture. Mestizo refers to racial/ethnic/cultural mixing as a category of identity which can refer both
CHAPTER FIVE Questioning the Nation: from:
Mestizaje and Globalization
Author(s) VIEIRA PAULO ALBERTO DOS SANTOS
Abstract: Affirmative action policies have existed in Brazil for some time. Between the 1940s and 1980s, Brazilian society tolerated policies of this nature, including a quota system, without major criticism. National legislation promulgated affirmative action policies which extended to the labor market and public universities.¹ From this perspective, there is nothing new in the use of mechanisms that promote equality. However, the situation changed when these policies were specifically extended to the black population. Since its implementation in 2002 in the public universities of Rio de Janeiro state, the system of quotas for black students has been heavily criticized vis-à-vis the
CHAPTER SEVEN The Door to the Future: from:
Mestizaje and Globalization
Author(s) WHITEMAN JENNIFER
Abstract: The Cheyenne Sun Dance is a time of personal, community, and earthly renewal. It is a time of harmony and self-sacrifice. Each summer, hundreds of Cheyenne men and women take part in this very sacred and ancient ceremony (fig. 7.1). Families come together and partake in communal living, and for a brief moment, time and space expand beyond the limits of our reality. Ultimately, the Sun Dance is the constant that keeps the Cheyenne tethered to the past, the present, and the future; indeed, the Sun Dance is the door to adaptation and survival.
7 Questioning Authority from:
A History of Anthropology
Abstract: The Cuban missile crisis, the Berlin Wall, the civil rights movement, the Prague spring; hippies in Haight-Ashbury, student riots in Paris; the Beatles, the Moon landing, Kennedy’s assassination, the Vietnam War – all this is emblematic of the ‘Sixties’, as the time is known in the West. But the radical political climate to which these events contributed did not come to bloom before the end of the decade, and belongs, strictly speaking, to the ten years
following1968. Certainly this was true in academia, where students shout their slogans but tenured professors remain as the years go by. Anthropologists, always
7 Questioning Authority from:
A History of Anthropology
Abstract: The Cuban missile crisis, the Berlin Wall, the civil rights movement, the Prague spring; hippies in Haight-Ashbury, student riots in Paris; the Beatles, the Moon landing, Kennedy’s assassination, the Vietnam War – all this is emblematic of the ‘Sixties’, as the time is known in the West. But the radical political climate to which these events contributed did not come to bloom before the end of the decade, and belongs, strictly speaking, to the ten years
following1968. Certainly this was true in academia, where students shout their slogans but tenured professors remain as the years go by. Anthropologists, always
6 Person and Society from:
Small Places, Large Issues
Abstract: The person is a social product, but society is at the same time created by acting persons. In the previous chapters, this apparent paradox has been illustrated in several ways. It has also been made clear that there will always be some aspects of society which change and some aspects which remain the same, if we look at the entire system over an extended period. Put differently, one might say that different parts of a society change at different speeds. In this chapter, we draw some theoretical lessons from these themes, and also propose a model of the relationship between
19 Anthropology and the Paradoxes of Globalisation from:
Small Places, Large Issues
Abstract: An anecdote is told about a tribe of transhumant camel nomads in North Africa, whose annual migration had taken place in March since the dawn of time. Recently their migration was several months delayed. The reason was that they did not want to miss the final episodes of
Dallas.
2 Visual Practice and the Secure Regime from:
Border Watch
Abstract: Ed Davies was a long-serving officer at Locksdon. He had joined the Prison Service after serving in the army, like many of his colleagues, and he had been content to stay as a normal grade officer rather than ‘going for promotion’ and ‘joining management’, despite his experience. Ed was popular with his colleagues but he was known to be temperamental: sometimes he was talkative and humorous, sometimes he was remote and unapproachable. There were rumours of problems at home, depression perhaps. Ed appeared to be particularly affected by the working environment at Locksdon, which he summed up as having ‘everyone
2 Editing Anthropology: from:
Anthropology's World
Abstract: Writing—writing anthropology, writing culture—has drawn a fair amount of attention and comment among anthropologists for some time now.¹ While otherwise the travails and the heroism of field work have been the obvious focus, it is true that only through writing (or some comparable communicative technology) does the anthropologist contribute to a shared body of scholarship and knowledge. Until, or unless, he or she “writes up,” the field worker is not really an ethnographer, only someone indulging in a kind of deep tourism. In writing, the anthropologist takes on a complicated task, trying to do justice to the people
7 Before and After: from:
Anthropology's World
Abstract: Anthropology at present has an uneven, and largely rather forgetful, relationship to its past.¹ Opinions are divided, of course, on what disciplines should do with their histories. In the view of some, one should honor the accumulation of knowledge and insights through time, and venerate the ancestors—latecomers reach higher only by climbing on the shoulders of giants. Others argue that disciplines will only progress by learning to ignore the forerunners.
1 The Subjectivity of Poverty from:
Blaming the Victim
Abstract: Poverty is arguably the most important single issue in the global news agenda, but at the same time one of the most neglected ones. According to the United Nations’ report
Rethinking Poverty.Report on the World Social Situation 2010, ‘global levels of poverty have changed very little over the past two decades’ (2009: 31), while most experts doubt that more than a handful of countries will achieve the targets set in the Millennium Development Goals (Elliot 2011: 43). Despite this, most of the mainstream news media in the West either ignore the subject altogether or seem wedded to the positivist
11 The Guru and the Conjurer from:
Fredrik Barth
Abstract: Bali was not an obvious next stop in Barth’s life as an ethnographer. While he would have liked to go to Vanuatu, Bali had been Wikan’s preference. One reason for Barth’s initial doubt was the fact that Bali had been studied by good anthropologists previously. Margaret Mead and Gregory Bateson had been there in the 1940s, Clifford Geertz in the 1960s. The British anthropologist Mark Hobart was about to devote a lifetime of study to Bali. And there were others. Barth sensed that others had already been there and taken the prime cuts.
Book Title: Mexico in Verse-A History of Music, Rhyme, and Power
Publisher: University of Arizona Press
Author(s): BEEZLEY WILLIAM H.
Abstract: The history of Mexico is spoken in the voice of ordinary people. In rhymed verse and mariachi song, in letters of romance and whispered words in the cantina, the heart and soul of a nation is revealed in all its intimacy and authenticity.
Mexico in Verse, edited by Stephen Neufeld and Michael Matthews, examines Mexican history through its poetry and music, the spoken and the written word.Focusing on modern Mexico, from 1840 to the 1980s, this volume examines the cultural venues in which people articulated their understanding of the social, political, and economic change they witnessed taking place during times of tremendous upheaval, such as the Mexican-American War, the Porfiriato, and the Mexican Revolution. The words of diverse peoples-people of the street, of the field, of the cantinas-reveal the development of the modern nation. Neufeld and Matthews have chosen sources so far unexplored by Mexicanist scholars in order to investigate the ways that individuals interpreted-whether resisting or reinforcing-official narratives about formative historical moments.The contributors offer new research that reveals how different social groups interpreted and understood the Mexican experience. The collected essays cover a wide range of topics: military life, railroad accidents, religious upheaval, children's literature, alcohol consumption, and the 1985 earthquake. Each chapter provides a translated song or poem that encourages readers to participate in the interpretive practice of historical research and cultural scholarship. In this regard,Mexico in Verseserves both as a volume of collected essays and as a classroom-ready primary document reader.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt183p8n6
CHAPTER SEVEN “That Mariachi Band and That Tequila”: from:
Mexico in Verse
Author(s) Toxqui Áurea
Abstract: From the late 1930s to the 1950s, Mexican cinema experienced its greatest era, known as the Golden Age. Many factors made possible the development of a truly national cinema at the time. For experts focusing on economics and politics, World War II was a catalyst. For those highlighting cultural and social reasons, the people involved in the movie industry were responsible for this blossoming. However, for the common Mexican and Latin American aficionado, the music, songs, and performers were the key element of the films produced. Many melodramas and comedy movies used popular music to emphasize their drama and romance,
Conclusion from:
Mexico in Verse
Abstract: For centuries scholars took this work more or less at face value. Here, they asserted, was lyrical proof of colonial optimism, pride, and potential. Contemporaries knew better. Close interpretations of the political and social context of the time now offer us a different reading from the tradition of Balbuena as lauding greatness. The tract, it seems, reflected
[PART II Introduction] from:
Community, Cosmopolitanism and the Problem of Human Commonality
Author(s) Rapport Nigel
Abstract: What kind of human life does cosmopolitanism envisage? Three key words are movement, voluntarism and fulfilment. Cosmopolitanism envisages the evolution of individual identity, voluntary membership in any number of social and cultural clubs at any one time and
8 Cosmopolitan Planning: from:
Community, Cosmopolitanism and the Problem of Human Commonality
Abstract: In his obituary of Ernest Gellner (1925–1996), Tom Nairn (1996) suggests that Gellner’s first academic appointment, a Demonstratorship in Moral Philosophy at Edinburgh University between 1947 and 1949, may have had a formative influence upon him. Not only did Gellner become aware of how a geographical periphery could be a centre of civilization (
polisvis-à-viscosmos) but also how the Scottish Enlightenment idea of a civil society – of ‘society’ as distinct from ‘culture’ – could be rehabilitated so as to illuminate contemporary conditions of political liberty. This then gave onto a lifetime’s deliberations on the rise of nationalism
9 Epilogue: from:
Community, Cosmopolitanism and the Problem of Human Commonality
Abstract: I have wanted to identify a cosmopolitan space which
Anyonemight occupy. To do so, the three chapters above have traversed a spectrum suggested by Kluckhohn and Murray (1953: 54–56) at the outset:Anyoneis ‘in certain respects, (a) like all other men, (b) like some other men, (c) like no other man’. In ‘Cosmopolitan Living’,Anyoneappeared as aLuftmenschor global guest who might lodge an individual quest for personal truth or authenticity in the time and the dimensions of his or own unique life. In ‘Cosmopolitan Learning’,Anyonepassed through the pedagogic company of certain significant
3. STRANGERS IN THE PARK: from:
Cities of Affluence and Anger
Abstract: In an essay on Oxford Street, the longtime center of London’s gaudy, cut-price shopping district, Virginia Woolf casually remarks that “the charm of modern London is that it is not built to last; it is built to pass.” Woolf surprisingly chooses Oxford Street, rather than one of London’s innumerable historic sites, as an emblem of the capital precisely because it foregrounds the transitory qualities of modern urban life. London’s historic houses and monuments, bestowed on the city by aristocratic patrons, “required the illusion of permanence.” By contrast, Woolf delights in the ephemerality of the city’s tacky, cacophonous, ostentatious retail industry
The Economic Situation of the Philippian Christians from:
The People beside Paul
Author(s) Oakes Peter
Abstract: Texts give us access not only to their author’s message but also, with varying degrees of clarity, to historical evidence on a wide range of subjects: evidence of linguistic usage at the time of the text; evidence of cultural reference points and their significance; evidence of social structures, practices, and norms; and evidence of events and people. In the case of Philippians, we learn some significant points about the community of people to whom Paul is writing. Understanding these people is important in itself, as the present volume argues. It also helps our understanding of what the letter means. Seriously
Response from:
The People beside Paul
Author(s) Wire Antoinette Clark
Abstract: Angela Standhartinger’s and Joseph A. Marchal’s essays can be seen as parallel studies in that they focus on a particular, radically disadvantaged group in the society of the time and place of Paul’s Philippian letter, Standhartinger on the imprisoned and Marchal on the enslaved (although Marchal sets out to consider women as well as slaves, it is the enslaved or freed of both genders that get his attention). The parallel between the two chapters extends to the fact that each group is a victim of social structures and practices. They are
imprisoned,enslaved, and should be described that way. What
11 Cultural Studies, in Theory from:
Interrogating Cultural Studies
Author(s) Mowitt John
Abstract: I should begin by emphasising that the concept of position is one that has interested me for quite some time. I have written about it both in relation to Fanon and the critique of Eurocentrism, and also in relation to trauma studies. For this reason I fear that I may, almost without thinking, make more of this question, its terms, than might otherwise be necessary. Let’s hope that this helps to answer rather than avoid the question.
13 What Can Cultural Studies Do? from:
Interrogating Cultural Studies
Author(s) Connor Steven
Abstract: For some time, I have found or at least taken myself to be at odds with what seem to have become the norms and assumptions of cultural studies, as opposed to cultural study. Since I have never been employed in a Department of Cultural Studies, nor had responsibility for sustaining collective belief on a large scale that cultural studies was what I was primarily engaged with, it has been easy for me to maintain a very loose and irresponsible relation with cultural studies. This can be a pleasant and invigorating sensation. Cultural studies seems to me to have produced its
14 Responses from:
Interrogating Cultural Studies
Author(s) Docherty Thomas
Abstract: In all that follows, I shall make a distinction between ‘cultural studies’ on the one hand, and ‘the study of culture’ on the other. In making such a distinction, I aim to distance myself and my work, such as it has been, from ‘cultural studies’ while at the same time identifying myself as one who studies not merely or not only literature but also what used to be called the ‘histories of ideas’, philosophy, the histories of everyday conditions of living, the other arts, and so on.
Book Title: Forbidden Fictions-Pornography and Censorship in Twentieth-Century French Literature
Publisher: Pluto Press
Author(s): Phillips John
Abstract: ‘Phillips discusses texts by Apollinaire, Pierre Loüys, Georges Bataille, Pauline Réage, Alain Robbe-Grillet, Tony Duvert, Elizabeth Barillé and Marie Darrieussecq, engaging in different levels of critical analysis so as to emphasize intertextual and parodic elements in one case, or points of possible identification in another.’ TLS French culture has long been perceived by the English-speaking reader as somehow more ‘erotic’ than its Anglo-Saxon equivalent. Forbidden Fictions is the first English-language study devoted exclusively to the wide spectrum of French literary pornography in the twentieth century. John Phillips provides a broad history of the genre and the associated moral and political issues. Among the texts examined in detail – all selected for their literary or sociopolitical importance – are landmark works by Apollinaire, Louÿs, Bataille, Réage, Robbe-Grillet, Arsan, and Duvert. Phillips challenges current politically correct trends in literary criticism and stereotyped censoring discourses about pornography to provide a new reading of each text and to illustrate the genre’s potential for social subversion. Forbidden Fictions addresses the most controversial issues of contemporary sexual politics, such as objectification, sadomasochism, homoeroticism and paedophilia, with particular emphasis on the feminist debate on pornography. In the light of current controversy over the control of pornography, this is a timely and scholarly review of the ethical, moral and social arguments surrounding the censorship of sexually explicit material.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18fs6m6
5 ‘O, Really!’: from:
Forbidden Fictions
Abstract: In a piece in
The New Yorkerin August 1994, the writer and literary journalist, John de St. Jorre gave a detailed account of an interview with Dominique Aury, writer, translator and critic, in which Aury revealed that she and Pauline Réage are one and the same. In other words, Dominique Aury is the pseudonymous author ofHistoire d’O, the first published novel of modern times to be both explicitly erotic and written by a woman. One of the greatest literary enigmas of the postwar years had finally been resolved.¹
6 Emmanuelle and the Sexual Liberation of Women from:
Forbidden Fictions
Abstract: Emmanuelle Arsan’s first novel,
Emmanuelle, was published secretly in 1959 by Eric Losfeld in Paris, at a time of renewed public interest in erotic writing. Recent court cases in France had led to the unbanning of works by Henry Miller, Boris Vian and the Marquis de Sade. At the same time, the 1950s had seen the illicit and usually anonymous publication of many new erotic novels. In particular, Pauline Réage’sHistoire d’O(1954), Vladimir Nabokov’sLolita(1955) and Jean de Berg’sL’Image(1956); all of these, in their different ways, had prepared the ‘cultured’ French reader for the more explicit
7 Progressive Slidings of Identity: from:
Forbidden Fictions
Abstract: The
nouveau romanor New Novel is a term coined in the 1950s by Alain Robbe-Grillet himself to denote his own work and that of a number of other writers, principally Nathalie Sarraute, Claude Simon, Michel Butor, Robert Pinget, Samuel Beckett and, initially at least, Marguerite Duras, all of whom were published by Les Éditions de Minuit, and who shared a rejection of the traditional novel’s approach to plot, characterisation and form, and so were considered experimental and avant-garde. As John de St. Jorre says of William Burroughs’sNaked Lunch, however, most New Novels remain difficult and at times inaccessible
1 Changing Transatlantic Contexts and Contours: from:
Ireland Beyond Boundaries
Author(s) Mahony Christina Hunt
Abstract: The special relationship that exists between Ireland and the United States has been the subject of much rhetoric, especially since the founding of the Irish state. This link is rehearsed at appropriate intervals, usually at times of political or emotional significance, such as President John F. Kennedy’s 1963 visit to Ireland or the signing of the Good Friday Agreement in 1998. The perception in Ireland of Irish political clout in America has always been somewhat distorted, however, and cannot compare with the special relationship between the US and Britain. Irish clout is also asserted in the social and cultural realm,
7 Forty Shades of Grey?: from:
Ireland Beyond Boundaries
Author(s) Daly Mary E.
Abstract: Historians place considerable value on the perspective given by the passing of time, so there are obvious difficulties in trying to assess major developments in the writing of modern Irish history over the past 15 to 20 years. But having entered this caveat, there are some trends that can be identified, including a significant expansion in the number of books and articles; greater diversity in research topics; increased specialisation and the concomitant emergence of historiographical debates that are accessible only to experts in particular fields; an end to the belief that it is possible to arrive at an objective –
11 Placing Geography in Irish Studies: from:
Ireland Beyond Boundaries
Author(s) Harte Liam
Abstract: The cultural turn of the late 1980s had great ramifications for the practice of social and cultural geography. Freshly invigorated by postmodern and poststructuralist ideas, geographers set about challenging traditional approaches and methodologies within the discipline and the neglect of geographical perspectives in other fields. The critical human geography that began to take shape announced the interpretive significance of space and the arrival of ‘a new animating polemic on the theoretical and political agenda, one which rings with significantly different ways of seeing time and space together, the interplay of history and geography’ (Soja, 1989: 11). As space became a
10 ESCAPING CULTURES: from:
Locating Cultural Creativity
Author(s) Parkin David
Abstract: I take the paradox to be globally widespread. Consumers or, more commonly, spectators of others’ consumerism, see commodities replaced one after another by new ones. Yet, despite being new, each such commodity may sometimes be regarded as representing tradition and as having originated from inside the society rather than having been imported or affected by external influences. For example, local artists and craftsmen may think they know what foreign tourists want, but in fact find that their art works are bought by local people as much as and even more than by outsiders. This unexpected outcome is not always something
CHAPTER 5 The Oresteia in the Odyssey (1946) from:
Persistent Forms: Explorations in Historical Poetics
Author(s) FREIDENBERG OLGA
Abstract: The story of Agamemnon is told in the
Odysseytwelve times. First it is recounted by Zeus (1.29). In spite of the prophecy, Aegisthus married the spouse of the Atrides, whom he then murdered upon his return home; Aegisthus neglected the gods’ advice and Orestes’ revenge—and had to pay for everything. Athena is more succinct (1.298). She only reminds [Telemachus] of the glory of Orestes, who killed the deceitful “father- slayer.” Nestor (3.197) at first only mentions the return of the Atrides, the murder, and Orestes’ revenge. In almost the same words, Athena again speaks about the same events
CHAPTER 7 A Remnant Poetics: from:
Persistent Forms: Explorations in Historical Poetics
Author(s) KUNICHIKA MICHAEL
Abstract: One needed to know little about Vshchizh, a settlement located in the southeast of Russia. It was situated on the right bank of the Desna river; the nearest city was Briansk; it was razed by Mongols sometime in the thirteenth century; and not far from it was a complex of kurgans, or burial mounds, which archaeologists had begun excavating in the 1840s.¹ These were some of the few facts recorded in the entry “Vshchizh” in the 1896 Brokgauz-Efron encyclopedia, which designated it an “insignificant settlement.”² Although condemned to insignificance, Vshchizh does possess some value for Russian literary history because two
CHAPTER 11 Breakfast at Dawn: from:
Persistent Forms: Explorations in Historical Poetics
Author(s) VINITSKY ILYA
Abstract: As the authors of the introduction to this volume observe, one of the goals of Veselovsky’s historical poetics dealt with uncovering “the ways in which literary practices constitute[d] historical experience by perpetuating conceptual, emotional, and behavioral schemata across space and time.”³ In this context, the ill-famed “age of Sensibility” in Russia⁴ presented a special interest for Veselovsky. In his classical book on Vasily Zhukovsky’s life and work, eloquently subtitled
The Poetry of Sentiment and of the “Heart’s Imagination”(1903; published in 1904), the scholar posed an intriguing question of how the Western literary modes of sentimentality were absorbed by a
CHAPTER 13 Satire (1940), for the Literary Encyclopedia from:
Persistent Forms: Explorations in Historical Poetics
Author(s) BAKHTIN MIKHAIL
Abstract: 1) a specific, small- scale lyrico- epic genre that formed and developed on Roman soil (Naevius, Ennius, Lucilius, Horace, Persius, Juvenal) and was resurrected in modern times by the neoclassicists (the satires of Mathurin Régnier, Boileau, Kantemir et al.).
4. The Place of the Present: from:
Practicing the City: Early Modern London on Stage
Abstract: London city comedies catered to the moment and to an increasingly consumerist public—“fit for the times and the termers,” Thomas Middleton quipped to readers of
The Roaring Girl(1611), slyly retailing his own as well as the city’s investments in the contemporary scene.¹ Famous for the notoriety of its title character,The Roaring Girlpushes these investments far beyond those of the other plays in this study. Not only do Middleton and Dekker track the close encounters of London’s population across a vividly drawn cityscape, but they take the novel step of impersonating a recognizable local figure on stage,
Book Title: Memory, Narrative and the Great War-Rifleman Patrick MacGill and the Construction of Wartime Experience
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): Taylor David
Abstract: Memory, Narrative and the Great War provides a detailed examination of the varied and complex war writings of a relatively marginal figure, Patrick MacGill, within a general framework of our current pre-occupation with blood, mud and suffering. In particular, it seeks to explain how his interpretation of war shifted from the heroic wartime autobiographical trilogy, with its emphasis on 'the romance of the rifleman' to the pessimistic and guilt-ridden interpretations in his post-war novel, Fear!, and play, Suspense. Through an exploration of the way in which war-time experiences were remembered (and re-remembered) and retold in strikingly different narratives, and using insights from cognitive psychology, it is argued that there is no contradiction between these two seemingly opposing views. Instead it is argued that, given the present orientation and problem-solving nature of both memory and narrative, the different interpretations are both 'true' in the sense that they throw light on the ongoing way in which MacGill came to terms with his experiences of war. This in turn has implications for broader interpretations of the Great War, which has increasingly be seen in terms of futile suffering, not least because of the eloquent testimony of ex-Great War soldiers, reflecting on their experiences many years after the event. Without suggesting that such testimony is invalid, it is argued that this is one view but not the only view of the war. Rather wartime memory and narrative is more akin to an ever-changing kaleidoscope, in which pieces of memory take on different (but equally valid) shapes as they are shaken with the passing of time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18mbc8p
CHAPTER 3 Sources: from:
Memory, Narrative and the Great War
Abstract: The volume of material relating to the soldiers’ experience of the Great War is truly astounding. It has grown dramatically in the last few decades and shows little sign of diminishing. Indeed, with the centenary of the outbreak of the war only two years away (at the time of writing), there is every likelihood that there will be a further upsurge, not least from those interested in family history for whom ‘grandfather’s war’ (and increasingly ‘great-grandfather’s war’) remains a matter of central interest. It would be hypocritical to bemoan such a wealth of material but, putting aside the practical problems
CHAPTER 4 At the Front: from:
Memory, Narrative and the Great War
Abstract: Following the outbreak of war Patrick MacGill enlisted in the London Irish Rifles, the 18th battalion of the London Regiment. A young adult in his mid-20s, he brought with him experiences and values that would influence his recollection of wartime experiences. He already had a life narrative that would shape his responses but that in turn would be challenged and changed by the new experiences of being a soldier on active service in France. But what sort of man was he as he entered army life? What values did he espouse? How did he define himself as a man? How
CHAPTER 5 Writing the War from the Home Front from:
Memory, Narrative and the Great War
Abstract: MacGill returned to England in September 1915 and spent time ‘all dressed in blighty blue’ in the first Birmingham War Hospital at Ruberry Hill.¹ In the following month he contributed to
The Timesfund-raising publicationRed Cross Story Bookand by February 1916 he was fit enough to appear in London Irish Rifles uniform at fund-raising evenings in London during which his wife read from his ‘Story of Loos’, which was to become a central part ofThe Great Push.His commitment to the war was reflected inThe Red Horizonwhich opened simply:
CHAPTER 6 The War in Retrospect from:
Memory, Narrative and the Great War
Abstract: The ending of hostilities in November 1918, while welcome in obvious ways, created a problem for MacGill and highlighted other difficulties in his life. Like others who had served during the war, he had to make the complex and problematic adjustment to civilian life, which included a further reassessment of the war and his role therein. The war had undoubtedly provided him with a focus and sense of purpose, notwithstanding his changing relationship with and responses to the conflict, and his wartime writings had added to the reputation as a realist writer that he had gained following the publication of
CONCLUSION: from:
Memory, Narrative and the Great War
Abstract: At the time of writing the centenary of the outbreak of the Great War is rapidly approaching. Notwithstanding the often tumultuous events of the twentieth century, the war still enjoys a unique status as a watershed in modern British history, and interest in it shows no sign of abating. On the contrary, not least as a result of the continuing growth in family history, interest in grandfather’s war and great-grandfather’s war ensures that it lives on in contemporary society. And yet the Great War has become a part of history in the sense that the passing of the last men
Book Title: Leaving the North-Migration and Memory, Northern Ireland 1921–2011
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): Trew Johanne Devlin
Abstract: Leaving the North is the first book that provides a comprehensive survey of Northern Ireland migration since 1921. Based largely on the personal memories of emigrants who left Northern Ireland from the 1920s to the 2000s, approximately half of whom eventually returned, the book traces their multigenerational experiences of leaving Northern Ireland and adapting to life abroad, with some later returning to a society still mired in conflict. Contextualised by a review of the statistical and policy record, the emigrants’ stories reveal that contrary to its well-worn image as an inward-looking place – 'such narrow ground' – Northern Ireland has a rather dynamic migration history, demonstrating that its people have long been looking outward as well as inward, well connected with the wider world. But how many departed and where did they go? And what of the Northern Ireland Diaspora? How has the view of the ‘troubled’ homeland from abroad, especially among expatriates, contributed to progress along the road to peace? In addressing these questions, the book treats the relationship between migration, sectarianism and conflict, immigration and racism, repatriation and the Peace Process, with particular attention to the experience of Northern Ireland migrants in the two principal receiving societies – Britain and Canada. With the emigration of young people once again on the increase due to the economic downturn, it is perhaps timely to learn from the experiences of the people who have been ‘leaving the North’ over many decades; not only to acknowledge their departure but in the hope that we might better understand the challenges and opportunities that migration and Diaspora can present.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18mbcf8
Chapter 5 ‘Doubly invisible’: from:
Leaving the North
Abstract: February 2010. I receive a lovely card from Aimie, an elderly informant from Belfast who has lived in England since 1946. She writes, ‘I am losing my sight. No more lovely books and poetry … I will never be able to go home again but have happy memories … these memories help to sustain us at sad times.’ My own vision blurs with tears for Aimie is a woman who loves literature, poetry especially, and reading has been the only way over the past few years that she has been able to ‘travel’ home. Her words bring me back to
Chapter 2 Eccentric cities and citytexts: from:
EccentriCities: Writing in the margins of Modernism
Abstract: Lines linking eccentric cities bend through space and time – stretching between St. Petersburg and Rio de Janeiro by curving through and around a European centre and a Eurocentric history. Until recently, these cities were connected only occasionally by actual contact, more consistently by concentric ripples of modern history. They were linked directly by Portuguese navigators, sailors, soldiers and merchants who headed southeast and southwest to establish Portugal’s portals into Old and New Worlds and to secure its hold on empire, but also sailed northeast with goods and skills that helped build Peter the Great’s naval power and port city, Russia’s
4 INTRODUCTION: from:
The Trouble with Community
Abstract: In his discussion on the best possible relationship between science and non-science (in which he included religion and the arts), Friedrich Nietzsche decided on the image of human beings having ‘a double brain’: a brain with two chambers lying next to one another, as it were, separable and self-contained, and experiencing different things without confusion (1994: 154). An experience of both science and non-science was necessary for human health, Nietzsche deemed, but at the same time the two had to be kept apart. Non-science inspired and was the source of human strength, while science was the source of truth, direction
4 INTRODUCTION: from:
The Trouble with Community
Abstract: In his discussion on the best possible relationship between science and non-science (in which he included religion and the arts), Friedrich Nietzsche decided on the image of human beings having ‘a double brain’: a brain with two chambers lying next to one another, as it were, separable and self-contained, and experiencing different things without confusion (1994: 154). An experience of both science and non-science was necessary for human health, Nietzsche deemed, but at the same time the two had to be kept apart. Non-science inspired and was the source of human strength, while science was the source of truth, direction
Book Title: Pierre Bourdieu-A Critical Introduction
Publisher: Pluto Press
Author(s): Reader Keith
Abstract: 'This beautifully written and lucidly argued study is the most persuasive account of Bourdieu's work yet to be published. Lane illuminates much that can puzzle a foreign readership by expertly situating Bourdieu within a French context. At the same time he points to those aspects of Bourdieu's writing which are of particular relevance to contemporary debates on questions of citizenship and globalization. He gives a fascinating account of Bourdieu's astonishingly prescient analyses of the impact of the expansion of higher education, the influence of the mass media, the growth of the culture industries, and the changing nature of political and social elites, not just in France, but in the western world.' Professor Jill Forbes, Queen Mary and Westfield, University of London
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18mvnzm
CHAPTER 1 Peasants into Revolutionaries? from:
Pierre Bourdieu
Abstract: The broad details of Pierre Bourdieu’s background and early intellectual career have been well documented, both in existing critical studies and in interviews. He was born in 1930, the son of a postman in a peasant community in the Béarn in the French Pyrenees. Having passed through the
classes préparatoiresat the renowned Lycée Louis-le-Grand in Paris, he entered the elite École normale supérieure to study for anagrégationin philosophy, perhaps the most prestigious academic qualification in France at that time. Bourdieu obtained hisagrégationin 1954 but, frustrated by the abstract tenor of academic philosophy, he abandoned his
CHAPTER 1 Definition and Conceptual History of Truth Commissions: from:
Truth Commissions
Abstract: Few ideas have gained as much international attention in such a short time span as the concept of the
truth commission. Successful and failed initiatives to set up ad hoc panels called “truth commissions” to investigate patterns of human rights violations abound. In addition, in some countries single incidents of violence have led to calls for a commission when the facts about the event remained in the dark for decades. Two examples that come to mind are the 1985 siege and fire in Colombia’s Palace of Justice¹ and the 1994 bombing of the Israeli-Argentine Mutual Association in Buenos Aires.² Perhaps
Book Title: Bible and Transformation-The Promise of Intercultural Bible Reading
Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Dyk Janet
Abstract: Engage the delightful and inspiring, sometimes rough and rocky road to inclusive and transformative Bible reading
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18z4h3g
6 Growing Together: from:
Bible and Transformation
Author(s) Kahl Werner
Abstract: About one hundred years ago, in 1906, at Azusa Street Mission in Los Angeles, Christians at the margins of power shared the overpowering experience of celebrating the presence of God together as one people, in spite of the ideology of racial segregation so prominent in the United States at that time. This became one of the birthplaces of modern Pentecostalism. One chronicler of the movement, Frank Bartleman, captured that experience in the following words: “The colour line was washed away in the blood (of Jesus)” (1925, 54). The believers saw the Spirit of God at work. The phenomenon of “speaking
12 “We Are All Tamar”: from:
Bible and Transformation
Author(s) Ejiogu Godian
Abstract: The title of this essay might seem strange for a Bible story that happened hundreds of years ago in the Middle East, with no connection to India at the time. I chose the title because of the contemporaneity of this story in worldwide news. At the time we were reading this story (2012), a twenty-three-year-old lady in India was raped and died. It could be that raping a lady without any consequences for the offender was normal at the time of Tamar. In present-day India, the justice system takes little or no action, just like King David in the case
13 Stories Are Close, Reports Are Far: from:
Bible and Transformation
Author(s) Tanja Luc
Abstract: Intercultural Bible reading assumes that one is able to see through the eyes of the other. The core question of the project regards what happens when small groups of readers of biblical texts from sometimes radically different contexts read the same Bible story and get involved in a dialogue about its meaning. Differing contexts are present not only in different countries but even among groups within the same city. In the present account, people familiar with living on the street were paired with a group of highly educated young Christians. These two groups from the same city, but with contexts
22 The Complex Role of Views on the Bible in Intercultural Encounters (A Dialogue among Cuba, Colombia, Ghana, and the Netherlands) from:
Bible and Transformation
Author(s) Snoek Hans
Abstract: In the past fifteen years a small miracle has happened: dozens of reading groups, thousands of miles apart, have read the same Bible text and corresponded with one another about it. This gives the impression that the Bible is a universal book that, despite differences in cultures and beliefs, can stimulate readers to look at a text differently. Although the success of the project of intercultural Bible reading has been surprising, it would be too simple to state that the exchanges have always led to transformation. Sometimes the distance between groups was too great, which showed up in traces of
Book Title: Bible and Transformation-The Promise of Intercultural Bible Reading
Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Dyk Janet
Abstract: Engage the delightful and inspiring, sometimes rough and rocky road to inclusive and transformative Bible reading
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18z4h3g
6 Growing Together: from:
Bible and Transformation
Author(s) Kahl Werner
Abstract: About one hundred years ago, in 1906, at Azusa Street Mission in Los Angeles, Christians at the margins of power shared the overpowering experience of celebrating the presence of God together as one people, in spite of the ideology of racial segregation so prominent in the United States at that time. This became one of the birthplaces of modern Pentecostalism. One chronicler of the movement, Frank Bartleman, captured that experience in the following words: “The colour line was washed away in the blood (of Jesus)” (1925, 54). The believers saw the Spirit of God at work. The phenomenon of “speaking
12 “We Are All Tamar”: from:
Bible and Transformation
Author(s) Ejiogu Godian
Abstract: The title of this essay might seem strange for a Bible story that happened hundreds of years ago in the Middle East, with no connection to India at the time. I chose the title because of the contemporaneity of this story in worldwide news. At the time we were reading this story (2012), a twenty-three-year-old lady in India was raped and died. It could be that raping a lady without any consequences for the offender was normal at the time of Tamar. In present-day India, the justice system takes little or no action, just like King David in the case
13 Stories Are Close, Reports Are Far: from:
Bible and Transformation
Author(s) Tanja Luc
Abstract: Intercultural Bible reading assumes that one is able to see through the eyes of the other. The core question of the project regards what happens when small groups of readers of biblical texts from sometimes radically different contexts read the same Bible story and get involved in a dialogue about its meaning. Differing contexts are present not only in different countries but even among groups within the same city. In the present account, people familiar with living on the street were paired with a group of highly educated young Christians. These two groups from the same city, but with contexts
22 The Complex Role of Views on the Bible in Intercultural Encounters (A Dialogue among Cuba, Colombia, Ghana, and the Netherlands) from:
Bible and Transformation
Author(s) Snoek Hans
Abstract: In the past fifteen years a small miracle has happened: dozens of reading groups, thousands of miles apart, have read the same Bible text and corresponded with one another about it. This gives the impression that the Bible is a universal book that, despite differences in cultures and beliefs, can stimulate readers to look at a text differently. Although the success of the project of intercultural Bible reading has been surprising, it would be too simple to state that the exchanges have always led to transformation. Sometimes the distance between groups was too great, which showed up in traces of
Book Title: Bible and Transformation-The Promise of Intercultural Bible Reading
Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Dyk Janet
Abstract: Engage the delightful and inspiring, sometimes rough and rocky road to inclusive and transformative Bible reading
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18z4h3g
6 Growing Together: from:
Bible and Transformation
Author(s) Kahl Werner
Abstract: About one hundred years ago, in 1906, at Azusa Street Mission in Los Angeles, Christians at the margins of power shared the overpowering experience of celebrating the presence of God together as one people, in spite of the ideology of racial segregation so prominent in the United States at that time. This became one of the birthplaces of modern Pentecostalism. One chronicler of the movement, Frank Bartleman, captured that experience in the following words: “The colour line was washed away in the blood (of Jesus)” (1925, 54). The believers saw the Spirit of God at work. The phenomenon of “speaking
12 “We Are All Tamar”: from:
Bible and Transformation
Author(s) Ejiogu Godian
Abstract: The title of this essay might seem strange for a Bible story that happened hundreds of years ago in the Middle East, with no connection to India at the time. I chose the title because of the contemporaneity of this story in worldwide news. At the time we were reading this story (2012), a twenty-three-year-old lady in India was raped and died. It could be that raping a lady without any consequences for the offender was normal at the time of Tamar. In present-day India, the justice system takes little or no action, just like King David in the case
13 Stories Are Close, Reports Are Far: from:
Bible and Transformation
Author(s) Tanja Luc
Abstract: Intercultural Bible reading assumes that one is able to see through the eyes of the other. The core question of the project regards what happens when small groups of readers of biblical texts from sometimes radically different contexts read the same Bible story and get involved in a dialogue about its meaning. Differing contexts are present not only in different countries but even among groups within the same city. In the present account, people familiar with living on the street were paired with a group of highly educated young Christians. These two groups from the same city, but with contexts
22 The Complex Role of Views on the Bible in Intercultural Encounters (A Dialogue among Cuba, Colombia, Ghana, and the Netherlands) from:
Bible and Transformation
Author(s) Snoek Hans
Abstract: In the past fifteen years a small miracle has happened: dozens of reading groups, thousands of miles apart, have read the same Bible text and corresponded with one another about it. This gives the impression that the Bible is a universal book that, despite differences in cultures and beliefs, can stimulate readers to look at a text differently. Although the success of the project of intercultural Bible reading has been surprising, it would be too simple to state that the exchanges have always led to transformation. Sometimes the distance between groups was too great, which showed up in traces of
Book Title: Bible and Transformation-The Promise of Intercultural Bible Reading
Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Dyk Janet
Abstract: Engage the delightful and inspiring, sometimes rough and rocky road to inclusive and transformative Bible reading
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18z4h3g
6 Growing Together: from:
Bible and Transformation
Author(s) Kahl Werner
Abstract: About one hundred years ago, in 1906, at Azusa Street Mission in Los Angeles, Christians at the margins of power shared the overpowering experience of celebrating the presence of God together as one people, in spite of the ideology of racial segregation so prominent in the United States at that time. This became one of the birthplaces of modern Pentecostalism. One chronicler of the movement, Frank Bartleman, captured that experience in the following words: “The colour line was washed away in the blood (of Jesus)” (1925, 54). The believers saw the Spirit of God at work. The phenomenon of “speaking
12 “We Are All Tamar”: from:
Bible and Transformation
Author(s) Ejiogu Godian
Abstract: The title of this essay might seem strange for a Bible story that happened hundreds of years ago in the Middle East, with no connection to India at the time. I chose the title because of the contemporaneity of this story in worldwide news. At the time we were reading this story (2012), a twenty-three-year-old lady in India was raped and died. It could be that raping a lady without any consequences for the offender was normal at the time of Tamar. In present-day India, the justice system takes little or no action, just like King David in the case
13 Stories Are Close, Reports Are Far: from:
Bible and Transformation
Author(s) Tanja Luc
Abstract: Intercultural Bible reading assumes that one is able to see through the eyes of the other. The core question of the project regards what happens when small groups of readers of biblical texts from sometimes radically different contexts read the same Bible story and get involved in a dialogue about its meaning. Differing contexts are present not only in different countries but even among groups within the same city. In the present account, people familiar with living on the street were paired with a group of highly educated young Christians. These two groups from the same city, but with contexts
22 The Complex Role of Views on the Bible in Intercultural Encounters (A Dialogue among Cuba, Colombia, Ghana, and the Netherlands) from:
Bible and Transformation
Author(s) Snoek Hans
Abstract: In the past fifteen years a small miracle has happened: dozens of reading groups, thousands of miles apart, have read the same Bible text and corresponded with one another about it. This gives the impression that the Bible is a universal book that, despite differences in cultures and beliefs, can stimulate readers to look at a text differently. Although the success of the project of intercultural Bible reading has been surprising, it would be too simple to state that the exchanges have always led to transformation. Sometimes the distance between groups was too great, which showed up in traces of
[BOX II Introduction] from:
The Year's Work in the Oddball Archive
Abstract: Tinkerers or pundits, visionaries or eccentrics, oddballs sometimes make their own archives. Surprisingly, the archives of some of history’s most anomalous figures are rarely themselves anomalous but instead come to appear exemplary because their organizing figures have emerged in some way from the pack. Oddball personae collect followings; their followers, in turn, are often the ones left in charge of collecting the oddballs’ life’s work, their leavings. The Kinsey archives, no less than the papers of the Marquis de Sade or the drawings of Adolf Wölfli, may now be managed by professional librarians, but they were once gathered and conserved
4 “MARCUSE’S UNREASON: THE BIOLOGY OF REVOLUTION” from:
The Year's Work in the Oddball Archive
Author(s) Blyn Robin
Abstract: “We can use the word revolution again for the first time in many years,” Douglass Kellner declared in October 2011.¹ The scene was not Tahrir Square or the streets of Tunis. Nor was it Zuccotti Park. Rather, Kellner was speaking at the University of Pennsylvania, at the Fourth Biennial Conference of the International Herbert Marcuse Society. It was clearly a moment for Kellner and his audience to savor; together, the Arab Spring and Occupy protests of 2011 seemed to vindicate the very idea of revolution and with it the work of a philosopher variously dismissed as impractical, irrational, irrelevant, and
[BOX III Introduction] from:
The Year's Work in the Oddball Archive
Abstract: All archives promise – and ineluctably fail – to offer a bulwark against the passage of time. In their task of making up for lost memory – that is, for the loss of ways of thinking, as well as for the passing of successive eras – archives carry out their functions incompletely. Archives mark what has been lost in their preservation of remnants that remain incomplete in what we imagine to be their testimony to a much fuller moment. Can we think of archives as time machines that bring us into direct contact with the documents and relics of a forgotten age? Or do
8 “MODERNIST HETEROCHRONY, EVOLUTIONARY BIOLOGY, AND THE CHIMERA OF TIME” from:
The Year's Work in the Oddball Archive
Author(s) Tung Charles M.
Abstract: Spencer Wells, in his PBS documentary
Journey of Man,claims that there is “a time machine hidden in our genes.”¹ This Wells, unrelated to the literary figure H.G. Wells (at least in the short term), is the genetic anthropologist in charge of the Genographic Project, an international study funded byNational Geographicand IBM that traces individual Y-chromosomes from all corners of the earth back to a recognizably “modern” human leaving Africa around sixty thousand years ago. The time travel central to Wells’s research is guided by two-hundred-dollar self-testing kits, tracking devices sold in large part to ancestry-obsessed Americans, and,
Introductions from:
Medium, Messenger, Transmission
Abstract: (1) The medium will not be theorized as a means or an instrument but rather as a
middleand amediator. In light of this mediating function, the ‘transmission perspective’ and the ‘postal principle’ will be explored by investigating whether ‘transmission’ is definable in a way that at the same time reveals how media affect and shape what they transmit. The original scope of medial effectiveness will also be reconstructed as aperceptual relationand aletting-appear(Erscheinenlassen), in which the communicative
Test Case from:
Medium, Messenger, Transmission
Abstract: I have not yet provided an example of a phenomenon that can unproblematically be identified as a medium or demonstrated how the messenger and transmission perspective I have developed actually brings to light
newaspects of this phenomenon. There are two additional requirements that would – ideally – be satisfied by such a test case: It should be a medium that cuts across different times, that is not rooted in only one respectable tradition, but rather that provides a context in which the changes associated with the development of information technologies and digitalization can also be reflected and studied. Furthermore,
Book Title: Timing Canada-The Shifting Politics of Time in Canadian Literary Culture
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): Huebener Paul
Abstract: From punch clocks to prison sentences, from immigration waiting periods to controversial time-zone boundaries, from Indigenous grave markers that count time in centuries rather than years, to the fact that free time is shrinking faster for women than for men - time shapes the fabric of Canadian society every day, but in ways that are not always visible or logical. In Timing Canada, Paul Huebener draws from cultural history, time-use surveys, political statements, literature, and visual art to craft a detailed understanding of how time operates as a form of power in Canada. Time enables everything we do - as Margaret Atwood writes, "without it we can't live." However, time also disempowers us, divides us, and escapes our control. Huebener transforms our understanding of temporal power and possibility by using examples from Canadian and Indigenous authors - including Jeannette Armstrong, Joseph Boyden, Dionne Brand, Timothy Findley, Lucy Maud Montgomery, Gabrielle Roy, and many others - who witness, question, dismantle, and reconstruct the functioning of time in their works. As the first comprehensive study of the cultural politics of time in Canada, Timing Canada develops foundational principles of critical time studies and everyday temporal literacy, and demonstrates how time functions broadly as a tool of power, privilege, and imagination within a multicultural and multi-temporal nation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1970584
1 Canadian Time: from:
Timing Canada
Abstract: This chapter examines a range of significant developments and representative events in Canadian culture and history in order to develop an understanding of how time has been constructed socially as a form of power within the nation. In the course of building such an understanding, several conclusions come to light. Normative structures of time such as clock time, the Gregorian calendar system, and the linear notion of progress intertwine with powerful social emphases on punctuality, productivity, acceleration, temporal universality, and particular forms of temporal framing through which shorter durations are often seen as more real than longer durations, and through
3 Reading Time and Social Relations Critically from:
Timing Canada
Abstract: “Over the millennia,” writes Christopher Dewdney, “our penchant for technology and abstract thought has helped us to construct an empire of time, a chronological culture within which our lives are scheduled and measured out.”³ While Dewdney’s reference to “our” chronological culture appears to reflect a singular social entity, his use of the phrase “empire of time” also hints at the unequal and divisive nature of normative temporality; like all empires, an empire of time inevitably contains deeply entrenched biases and power divisions. I have discussed some of the ways in which human culture colonizes time, and in particular the ways
4 Imagining Indigenous Temporalities from:
Timing Canada
Abstract: The Circle is at the centre of our Aboriginal thinking … We believe that the day, the lunar month, the year, even human life itself, are circular phenomena, and that there are cycles of many years, representing the circular reality. We also believe that all circular phenomena have four parts, or movements: spring, summer, fall and winter; morning, noon hour, evening and nighttime; infancy, youth, maturity and old
5 Disrupting and Remaking Constructions of Time from:
Timing Canada
Abstract: By now it has become apparent that literary texts have often sought not only to witness and represent temporal power relations, but also to question, test, and reshape the relationships between time, power, and everyday life. From the leap of faith that Panych’s unnamed man takes in order to escape his confinement in the days of the week, to Margaret Sweatman’s critique of the concentration of temporal power in the hands of the elite, to Jeannette Armstrong’s and Thomas King’s reshaping of Western narrative temporal sequence – literature and art have demonstrated a profound ability to articulate the often invisible
CONCLUSION: from:
Timing Canada
Abstract: Like so many articulations of temporality, this book remains inevitably provisional. There will always be more to learn from the particular ways in which experiences of time are tied, for instance, to spatial regions of human activity or to the ecological and geological matrices of the natural world. Rather than accounting for every possible model of time within Canada, though, my goals here have been to offer a framework for understanding the major cultural structures of time that have taken hold in the nation; to articulate the ways in which social patterns that may appear unconnected to temporality can in
Book Title: Timing Canada-The Shifting Politics of Time in Canadian Literary Culture
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): Huebener Paul
Abstract: From punch clocks to prison sentences, from immigration waiting periods to controversial time-zone boundaries, from Indigenous grave markers that count time in centuries rather than years, to the fact that free time is shrinking faster for women than for men - time shapes the fabric of Canadian society every day, but in ways that are not always visible or logical. In Timing Canada, Paul Huebener draws from cultural history, time-use surveys, political statements, literature, and visual art to craft a detailed understanding of how time operates as a form of power in Canada. Time enables everything we do - as Margaret Atwood writes, "without it we can't live." However, time also disempowers us, divides us, and escapes our control. Huebener transforms our understanding of temporal power and possibility by using examples from Canadian and Indigenous authors - including Jeannette Armstrong, Joseph Boyden, Dionne Brand, Timothy Findley, Lucy Maud Montgomery, Gabrielle Roy, and many others - who witness, question, dismantle, and reconstruct the functioning of time in their works. As the first comprehensive study of the cultural politics of time in Canada, Timing Canada develops foundational principles of critical time studies and everyday temporal literacy, and demonstrates how time functions broadly as a tool of power, privilege, and imagination within a multicultural and multi-temporal nation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1970584
1 Canadian Time: from:
Timing Canada
Abstract: This chapter examines a range of significant developments and representative events in Canadian culture and history in order to develop an understanding of how time has been constructed socially as a form of power within the nation. In the course of building such an understanding, several conclusions come to light. Normative structures of time such as clock time, the Gregorian calendar system, and the linear notion of progress intertwine with powerful social emphases on punctuality, productivity, acceleration, temporal universality, and particular forms of temporal framing through which shorter durations are often seen as more real than longer durations, and through
3 Reading Time and Social Relations Critically from:
Timing Canada
Abstract: “Over the millennia,” writes Christopher Dewdney, “our penchant for technology and abstract thought has helped us to construct an empire of time, a chronological culture within which our lives are scheduled and measured out.”³ While Dewdney’s reference to “our” chronological culture appears to reflect a singular social entity, his use of the phrase “empire of time” also hints at the unequal and divisive nature of normative temporality; like all empires, an empire of time inevitably contains deeply entrenched biases and power divisions. I have discussed some of the ways in which human culture colonizes time, and in particular the ways
4 Imagining Indigenous Temporalities from:
Timing Canada
Abstract: The Circle is at the centre of our Aboriginal thinking … We believe that the day, the lunar month, the year, even human life itself, are circular phenomena, and that there are cycles of many years, representing the circular reality. We also believe that all circular phenomena have four parts, or movements: spring, summer, fall and winter; morning, noon hour, evening and nighttime; infancy, youth, maturity and old
5 Disrupting and Remaking Constructions of Time from:
Timing Canada
Abstract: By now it has become apparent that literary texts have often sought not only to witness and represent temporal power relations, but also to question, test, and reshape the relationships between time, power, and everyday life. From the leap of faith that Panych’s unnamed man takes in order to escape his confinement in the days of the week, to Margaret Sweatman’s critique of the concentration of temporal power in the hands of the elite, to Jeannette Armstrong’s and Thomas King’s reshaping of Western narrative temporal sequence – literature and art have demonstrated a profound ability to articulate the often invisible
CONCLUSION: from:
Timing Canada
Abstract: Like so many articulations of temporality, this book remains inevitably provisional. There will always be more to learn from the particular ways in which experiences of time are tied, for instance, to spatial regions of human activity or to the ecological and geological matrices of the natural world. Rather than accounting for every possible model of time within Canada, though, my goals here have been to offer a framework for understanding the major cultural structures of time that have taken hold in the nation; to articulate the ways in which social patterns that may appear unconnected to temporality can in
Book Title: Timing Canada-The Shifting Politics of Time in Canadian Literary Culture
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): Huebener Paul
Abstract: From punch clocks to prison sentences, from immigration waiting periods to controversial time-zone boundaries, from Indigenous grave markers that count time in centuries rather than years, to the fact that free time is shrinking faster for women than for men - time shapes the fabric of Canadian society every day, but in ways that are not always visible or logical. In Timing Canada, Paul Huebener draws from cultural history, time-use surveys, political statements, literature, and visual art to craft a detailed understanding of how time operates as a form of power in Canada. Time enables everything we do - as Margaret Atwood writes, "without it we can't live." However, time also disempowers us, divides us, and escapes our control. Huebener transforms our understanding of temporal power and possibility by using examples from Canadian and Indigenous authors - including Jeannette Armstrong, Joseph Boyden, Dionne Brand, Timothy Findley, Lucy Maud Montgomery, Gabrielle Roy, and many others - who witness, question, dismantle, and reconstruct the functioning of time in their works. As the first comprehensive study of the cultural politics of time in Canada, Timing Canada develops foundational principles of critical time studies and everyday temporal literacy, and demonstrates how time functions broadly as a tool of power, privilege, and imagination within a multicultural and multi-temporal nation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1970584
1 Canadian Time: from:
Timing Canada
Abstract: This chapter examines a range of significant developments and representative events in Canadian culture and history in order to develop an understanding of how time has been constructed socially as a form of power within the nation. In the course of building such an understanding, several conclusions come to light. Normative structures of time such as clock time, the Gregorian calendar system, and the linear notion of progress intertwine with powerful social emphases on punctuality, productivity, acceleration, temporal universality, and particular forms of temporal framing through which shorter durations are often seen as more real than longer durations, and through
3 Reading Time and Social Relations Critically from:
Timing Canada
Abstract: “Over the millennia,” writes Christopher Dewdney, “our penchant for technology and abstract thought has helped us to construct an empire of time, a chronological culture within which our lives are scheduled and measured out.”³ While Dewdney’s reference to “our” chronological culture appears to reflect a singular social entity, his use of the phrase “empire of time” also hints at the unequal and divisive nature of normative temporality; like all empires, an empire of time inevitably contains deeply entrenched biases and power divisions. I have discussed some of the ways in which human culture colonizes time, and in particular the ways
4 Imagining Indigenous Temporalities from:
Timing Canada
Abstract: The Circle is at the centre of our Aboriginal thinking … We believe that the day, the lunar month, the year, even human life itself, are circular phenomena, and that there are cycles of many years, representing the circular reality. We also believe that all circular phenomena have four parts, or movements: spring, summer, fall and winter; morning, noon hour, evening and nighttime; infancy, youth, maturity and old
5 Disrupting and Remaking Constructions of Time from:
Timing Canada
Abstract: By now it has become apparent that literary texts have often sought not only to witness and represent temporal power relations, but also to question, test, and reshape the relationships between time, power, and everyday life. From the leap of faith that Panych’s unnamed man takes in order to escape his confinement in the days of the week, to Margaret Sweatman’s critique of the concentration of temporal power in the hands of the elite, to Jeannette Armstrong’s and Thomas King’s reshaping of Western narrative temporal sequence – literature and art have demonstrated a profound ability to articulate the often invisible
CONCLUSION: from:
Timing Canada
Abstract: Like so many articulations of temporality, this book remains inevitably provisional. There will always be more to learn from the particular ways in which experiences of time are tied, for instance, to spatial regions of human activity or to the ecological and geological matrices of the natural world. Rather than accounting for every possible model of time within Canada, though, my goals here have been to offer a framework for understanding the major cultural structures of time that have taken hold in the nation; to articulate the ways in which social patterns that may appear unconnected to temporality can in
Afterword from:
Our Bodies Are Selves
Abstract: We began by saying that this book would offer no comprehensive, conceptually spelled out view of the body, and we kept that promise. Rather we have offered a series of
takeson the body—from different angles, caught up in a variety of movements, simple and complex, straightforward and yet at the same time defying comprehension. These takes need follow no particular order—you can dip into the book at any chapter.
1 Monumentality and Contemporaneity in the Work of Tarkovsky, Goldsworthy, and Zumthor from:
Chora 7
Author(s) Bordeleau Anne
Abstract: SPEED, INNOVATION, AND CHANGE are the catchwords of our modern world, and the appeal of the ephemeral over the durable affects our conception of architecture. In projects such as
Uchroniaby Arne Quinze, in the celebration of the ephemeral surface, and in the growing fascination with responsive systems, architects approach the contemporary by identifying it with what resides within time’s flow. Embracing this shift from the monumental to the contemporary, architects today have a propensity to acclaim the timely over the timeless – and yet, to use the words of Paul Ricoeur, architecture always materializes as a “temporary victory over the
8 Silence and Communal Ritual in an Athonian Coenobitic Monastery from:
Chora 7
Author(s) Kakalis Christos
Abstract: THIS ESSAY STUDIES conditions of silence in the Gregoriou monastery at Mount Athos, a mountainous peninsula in northeastern Greece, a unesco World Heritage Site since 1988, and one of the most important contemporary pilgrimage sites. My fieldwork there in 2010–12, supported by secondary sources, notes how the community faces challenges to preserve the silence that is needed for its ascetic meditation.¹ The entire monastery is not silent at all times. Rituals performed by the eighty monks sometimes occur in the open spaces, temporarily breaking the silence with planned religious messages. Meanwhile, visitors often intrude on the monastery’s religious atmosphere.
15 Chōra before Plato: from:
Chora 7
Author(s) Landrum Lisa
Abstract: THIS ESSAY INITIATES a new approach to the architectural interpretation of
chōraby considering the pre-philosophical meanings ofchōraas an inhabited “region” or “land,” and by drawing attention to certain situationally transformative scenes from Athenian drama in whichchōraappears in the script. Through this approach, I intend to reveal the relatively ordinary meanings ofchōrafrom the time just before Plato recast it, inTimaeus, as a highly enigmatic entity fundamental to cosmological formation and human making. Unfortunately, Jacques Derrida, whose philosophy of deconstruction influenced architectural theory in the 1980s and 1990s, generally ignored and even dismissed the
1 Monumentality and Contemporaneity in the Work of Tarkovsky, Goldsworthy, and Zumthor from:
Chora 7
Author(s) Bordeleau Anne
Abstract: SPEED, INNOVATION, AND CHANGE are the catchwords of our modern world, and the appeal of the ephemeral over the durable affects our conception of architecture. In projects such as
Uchroniaby Arne Quinze, in the celebration of the ephemeral surface, and in the growing fascination with responsive systems, architects approach the contemporary by identifying it with what resides within time’s flow. Embracing this shift from the monumental to the contemporary, architects today have a propensity to acclaim the timely over the timeless – and yet, to use the words of Paul Ricoeur, architecture always materializes as a “temporary victory over the
8 Silence and Communal Ritual in an Athonian Coenobitic Monastery from:
Chora 7
Author(s) Kakalis Christos
Abstract: THIS ESSAY STUDIES conditions of silence in the Gregoriou monastery at Mount Athos, a mountainous peninsula in northeastern Greece, a unesco World Heritage Site since 1988, and one of the most important contemporary pilgrimage sites. My fieldwork there in 2010–12, supported by secondary sources, notes how the community faces challenges to preserve the silence that is needed for its ascetic meditation.¹ The entire monastery is not silent at all times. Rituals performed by the eighty monks sometimes occur in the open spaces, temporarily breaking the silence with planned religious messages. Meanwhile, visitors often intrude on the monastery’s religious atmosphere.
15 Chōra before Plato: from:
Chora 7
Author(s) Landrum Lisa
Abstract: THIS ESSAY INITIATES a new approach to the architectural interpretation of
chōraby considering the pre-philosophical meanings ofchōraas an inhabited “region” or “land,” and by drawing attention to certain situationally transformative scenes from Athenian drama in whichchōraappears in the script. Through this approach, I intend to reveal the relatively ordinary meanings ofchōrafrom the time just before Plato recast it, inTimaeus, as a highly enigmatic entity fundamental to cosmological formation and human making. Unfortunately, Jacques Derrida, whose philosophy of deconstruction influenced architectural theory in the 1980s and 1990s, generally ignored and even dismissed the
1 Monumentality and Contemporaneity in the Work of Tarkovsky, Goldsworthy, and Zumthor from:
Chora 7
Author(s) Bordeleau Anne
Abstract: SPEED, INNOVATION, AND CHANGE are the catchwords of our modern world, and the appeal of the ephemeral over the durable affects our conception of architecture. In projects such as
Uchroniaby Arne Quinze, in the celebration of the ephemeral surface, and in the growing fascination with responsive systems, architects approach the contemporary by identifying it with what resides within time’s flow. Embracing this shift from the monumental to the contemporary, architects today have a propensity to acclaim the timely over the timeless – and yet, to use the words of Paul Ricoeur, architecture always materializes as a “temporary victory over the
8 Silence and Communal Ritual in an Athonian Coenobitic Monastery from:
Chora 7
Author(s) Kakalis Christos
Abstract: THIS ESSAY STUDIES conditions of silence in the Gregoriou monastery at Mount Athos, a mountainous peninsula in northeastern Greece, a unesco World Heritage Site since 1988, and one of the most important contemporary pilgrimage sites. My fieldwork there in 2010–12, supported by secondary sources, notes how the community faces challenges to preserve the silence that is needed for its ascetic meditation.¹ The entire monastery is not silent at all times. Rituals performed by the eighty monks sometimes occur in the open spaces, temporarily breaking the silence with planned religious messages. Meanwhile, visitors often intrude on the monastery’s religious atmosphere.
15 Chōra before Plato: from:
Chora 7
Author(s) Landrum Lisa
Abstract: THIS ESSAY INITIATES a new approach to the architectural interpretation of
chōraby considering the pre-philosophical meanings ofchōraas an inhabited “region” or “land,” and by drawing attention to certain situationally transformative scenes from Athenian drama in whichchōraappears in the script. Through this approach, I intend to reveal the relatively ordinary meanings ofchōrafrom the time just before Plato recast it, inTimaeus, as a highly enigmatic entity fundamental to cosmological formation and human making. Unfortunately, Jacques Derrida, whose philosophy of deconstruction influenced architectural theory in the 1980s and 1990s, generally ignored and even dismissed the
1 Performance and the Expansion of Personhood in Marissa Chibas’s Daughter of a Cuban Revolutionary from:
Performance and Personhood in Caribbean Literature
Abstract: The task of this book is to think through how Caribbean textual representations of performance broaden understandings of personhood. To explore how the genre of performance specifically can intercede in definitions of personhood, this chapter offers a performance analysis of Marissa Chibas’s 2007 one-woman play
Daughter of a Cuban Revolutionary. Throughout the play, Chibas performs much of the “backstage” work—such as establishing the scene’s time and place, or getting in and out of character—and exposes otherwise unseen labor. In so doing,Daughterdemonstrates how the means of creating theater give us a point of entry into redefining personhood.
4 Staceyann Chin and Zoé Valdés: from:
Performance and Personhood in Caribbean Literature
Abstract: Can a dance circle exist without the copresence of persons to form it? Just as the dark and densely textured spaces examined in chapter 3 stretch the concept of the dance circle to include spaces where performer and audience are not configured in a literal circle, this chapter looks to social media interactions for examples of the circle’s permissive protection. Here, the dance circle stretches to sites where moving bodies are separated by time and space but are connected by digital networks. I analyze the online presence and interactive literary engagements of two Caribbean writers, Zoé Valdés and Staceyann Chin,
Coda from:
Performance and Personhood in Caribbean Literature
Abstract: Performance and Personhood in Caribbean Literatureis about Fanon’sdamnésand how social performance can function as a site for rehearsing self-possession. The texts examined here underscore the socioeconomic conditions and philosophical grounds that have led to their protagonists’ exclusion from the body politic. They also highlight the interruptions to those conditions in the moments to which I have turned our attention, the ekphrastic descriptions of performance events that break from the plots of the texts in order to inform them. In the breaks, they depict the spaces where the distended time of performance both ruptures and extends the present
1. The Play of Temporalities; or, The Reported Dream of Guillaume de Lorris from:
Rethinking the "Romance of the Rose"
Author(s) Baumgartner Emmanuèle
Abstract: In the three volumes of
Time and Narrative, Paul Ricoeur has presented a philosophical summa, a comprehensive body of thought, that comes at an opportune moment to remind literary specialists of a long-recognized but still underexploited phenomenon: the essential link between narrative, historical or fictional, and time.¹ For Ricoeur has shown how narrative—in his words, that “guardian of time”—is the privileged medium by which the writer shapes, and the reader reshapes, “our confused, unformed, and at the limit mute temporal experience”;² and how it permits us to delimit more accurately, if perhaps not fully to master, the “mystery
3. From Rhyme to Reason: from:
Rethinking the "Romance of the Rose"
Author(s) Poirion Daniel
Abstract: Fascinated by the mirror in the “fountain of Narcissus,” critics compete in ingenious attempts to unveil its philosophical implications. The
Romance of the Rosehas thus become a key text for the definition of unhappy self-consciousness. However, this medieval poem teaches us at the same time how to turn away from contemplating an empty consciousness in order to examine those things without which consciousness is nothing: the “malady” induced by analyzing subjectivity should be healed by a healthy dose of objectivity. That which Guillaume de Lorris’s text suggests, Jean de Meun’s demonstrates explicitly, by multiplying references to concrete objects within
5. Language and Dismemberment: from:
Rethinking the "Romance of the Rose"
Author(s) Hult David F.
Abstract: Virtually from the time of its composition in the late thirteenth century, Jean de Meun’s continuation of the
Romance of the Rosehas been an object of controversy: its wit and its style have been celebrated; some of its more adventurous moral or social views have been condemned. The epistolary exchange in which Christine de Pizan participated was the first extended realization of such debates, but this exchange was itself preceded by evidence we can glean from literary works modeling themselves on theRoseallegory as well as from scribal manipulation of the text itself.¹ While the plethora of manuscripts
8. Authors, Scribes, Remanieurs: from:
Rethinking the "Romance of the Rose"
Author(s) Huot Sylvia
Abstract: The [
Romance of the Rose] was no sooner written than it was rewritten; and the process of revision andremaniementcontinued throughout the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries.¹ The poem was abridged, expanded through the addition of interpolations, and altered through a combination of deletions and additions. A study of the manuscript tradition reveals that scribes sometimes worked from two or more sources at once; in this way the interpolations of a given remaniement found their way into the manuscript tradition, in some cases showing up in manuscripts of several different families. Scribes also introduced more modest changes in the text,
Introduction from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: Once upon a time, a poor Swabian child was born in a little village east of the Black Forest. By the sheer force of his intellect and the tenacity of his own efforts, he became world-famous and conquered the intelligentsia of the “hereditary enemy,” France. How was Heidegger able to occupy, for more than half a century, the privileged position of being a fashionable philosopher, a
maître à penserin the intellectual and cultural capital of Paris? Some Americans have posed the question more bluntly: how could minds as acute and intelligent as those of the great French intellectuals, from
1 First Crossings of the Rhine from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: Heidegger’s sudden celebrity following the publication of
Sein und Zeitin 1927 did not go completely unnoticed in Paris, which was at the time, even more than today, the intellectual capital of Europe, and probably of the world. But to know a name is one thing; to enter into a thinker’s thought is another. While Heidegger’s masterpiece had to wait nearly sixty years before being translated in its entirety into French, reports and publications establish that distinguished university professors like Léon Brunschvicg and Xavier Léon quickly recognized, in this case, that a philosophical event had taken place in Germany.
3 Postwar Fascinations from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: It is not surprising that Liberation was not solely political, but cultural as well, and that the Sartre bomb was not the only one to explode at the time of an intense intellectual turmoil, amidst a joyous confusion. Sartre himself noted and deplored that existentialism, transformed into a fashion, became a word that “has been so stretched and has taken on so broad a meaning, that it no longer means anything at all.”¹ Existentialism had almost become a slogan, whose meaning was no longer clear. “At St. Germain des Prés, the language of that time was taking shape and so
9 The Letter and the Spirit from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: Following a sixty-year delay after the original publication of
Sein und Zeit, two complete French translations ofSein und Zeitfinally appeared in 1985 and 1986. How could this not be surprising? As far as the delay itself is concerned, it was rooted in (but not completely justified by) a series of coincidences. We have seen that Corbin’s volume was the only thing available at that time; later, the war and Liberation were not conducive to long-drawn-out work; the Louvain pair of de Waehlens and Boehm translated the first forty-four paragraphs incredibly slowly and finally published them with Gallimard in
Conclusion from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: With respect to the certainties, what has inspired us from the very beginning has been confirmed: the omnipresence in France of the influence, direct or indirect, of Heidegger’s thought and work. Apart from the mathematical sciences and life and earth sciences, there is hardly any sector of knowledge or intellectual activity that has not been positively or negatively affected by that thought, at times marginally, often
Jacques Derrida: from:
Heidegger in France
Author(s) Derrida Jacques
Abstract: I think it was probably in
hypokhâgneand not in my high school philosophy class. I was in the philosophy class during 1947–48 and it doesn’t seem to me that Heidegger’s name had been mentioned at that time. Inhypokhâgne, I amsureof having heard his name in lectures. I had a rather remarkablehypokhâgneteacher, Jan Czarneki: he gave lectures on the history of philosophy that were very synthetic and precise, in which he covered everything, from the pre-Socratics to modernity; I remember having heard
Philippe Lacoue-Labarthe: from:
Heidegger in France
Author(s) Lacoue-Labarthe Philippe
Abstract: The first time that I read Heidegger must have been at the end of my
hypokhâgneat Le Mans. I had a charming professor of philosophy, but he was not a philosopher. I had above all benefited from the teaching of a professor of French literature, Gérard Genette. The following year I left Le Mans, reluctantly, at the same time that Derrida was appointed to teach inhypokhâgne… Consequently, I never had the opportunity to be Derrida’s student. Genette and I corresponded, and during that summer Heidegger’s name had come
Introduction from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: Once upon a time, a poor Swabian child was born in a little village east of the Black Forest. By the sheer force of his intellect and the tenacity of his own efforts, he became world-famous and conquered the intelligentsia of the “hereditary enemy,” France. How was Heidegger able to occupy, for more than half a century, the privileged position of being a fashionable philosopher, a
maître à penserin the intellectual and cultural capital of Paris? Some Americans have posed the question more bluntly: how could minds as acute and intelligent as those of the great French intellectuals, from
1 First Crossings of the Rhine from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: Heidegger’s sudden celebrity following the publication of
Sein und Zeitin 1927 did not go completely unnoticed in Paris, which was at the time, even more than today, the intellectual capital of Europe, and probably of the world. But to know a name is one thing; to enter into a thinker’s thought is another. While Heidegger’s masterpiece had to wait nearly sixty years before being translated in its entirety into French, reports and publications establish that distinguished university professors like Léon Brunschvicg and Xavier Léon quickly recognized, in this case, that a philosophical event had taken place in Germany.
3 Postwar Fascinations from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: It is not surprising that Liberation was not solely political, but cultural as well, and that the Sartre bomb was not the only one to explode at the time of an intense intellectual turmoil, amidst a joyous confusion. Sartre himself noted and deplored that existentialism, transformed into a fashion, became a word that “has been so stretched and has taken on so broad a meaning, that it no longer means anything at all.”¹ Existentialism had almost become a slogan, whose meaning was no longer clear. “At St. Germain des Prés, the language of that time was taking shape and so
9 The Letter and the Spirit from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: Following a sixty-year delay after the original publication of
Sein und Zeit, two complete French translations ofSein und Zeitfinally appeared in 1985 and 1986. How could this not be surprising? As far as the delay itself is concerned, it was rooted in (but not completely justified by) a series of coincidences. We have seen that Corbin’s volume was the only thing available at that time; later, the war and Liberation were not conducive to long-drawn-out work; the Louvain pair of de Waehlens and Boehm translated the first forty-four paragraphs incredibly slowly and finally published them with Gallimard in
Conclusion from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: With respect to the certainties, what has inspired us from the very beginning has been confirmed: the omnipresence in France of the influence, direct or indirect, of Heidegger’s thought and work. Apart from the mathematical sciences and life and earth sciences, there is hardly any sector of knowledge or intellectual activity that has not been positively or negatively affected by that thought, at times marginally, often
Jacques Derrida: from:
Heidegger in France
Author(s) Derrida Jacques
Abstract: I think it was probably in
hypokhâgneand not in my high school philosophy class. I was in the philosophy class during 1947–48 and it doesn’t seem to me that Heidegger’s name had been mentioned at that time. Inhypokhâgne, I amsureof having heard his name in lectures. I had a rather remarkablehypokhâgneteacher, Jan Czarneki: he gave lectures on the history of philosophy that were very synthetic and precise, in which he covered everything, from the pre-Socratics to modernity; I remember having heard
Philippe Lacoue-Labarthe: from:
Heidegger in France
Author(s) Lacoue-Labarthe Philippe
Abstract: The first time that I read Heidegger must have been at the end of my
hypokhâgneat Le Mans. I had a charming professor of philosophy, but he was not a philosopher. I had above all benefited from the teaching of a professor of French literature, Gérard Genette. The following year I left Le Mans, reluctantly, at the same time that Derrida was appointed to teach inhypokhâgne… Consequently, I never had the opportunity to be Derrida’s student. Genette and I corresponded, and during that summer Heidegger’s name had come
Introduction from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: Once upon a time, a poor Swabian child was born in a little village east of the Black Forest. By the sheer force of his intellect and the tenacity of his own efforts, he became world-famous and conquered the intelligentsia of the “hereditary enemy,” France. How was Heidegger able to occupy, for more than half a century, the privileged position of being a fashionable philosopher, a
maître à penserin the intellectual and cultural capital of Paris? Some Americans have posed the question more bluntly: how could minds as acute and intelligent as those of the great French intellectuals, from
1 First Crossings of the Rhine from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: Heidegger’s sudden celebrity following the publication of
Sein und Zeitin 1927 did not go completely unnoticed in Paris, which was at the time, even more than today, the intellectual capital of Europe, and probably of the world. But to know a name is one thing; to enter into a thinker’s thought is another. While Heidegger’s masterpiece had to wait nearly sixty years before being translated in its entirety into French, reports and publications establish that distinguished university professors like Léon Brunschvicg and Xavier Léon quickly recognized, in this case, that a philosophical event had taken place in Germany.
3 Postwar Fascinations from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: It is not surprising that Liberation was not solely political, but cultural as well, and that the Sartre bomb was not the only one to explode at the time of an intense intellectual turmoil, amidst a joyous confusion. Sartre himself noted and deplored that existentialism, transformed into a fashion, became a word that “has been so stretched and has taken on so broad a meaning, that it no longer means anything at all.”¹ Existentialism had almost become a slogan, whose meaning was no longer clear. “At St. Germain des Prés, the language of that time was taking shape and so
9 The Letter and the Spirit from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: Following a sixty-year delay after the original publication of
Sein und Zeit, two complete French translations ofSein und Zeitfinally appeared in 1985 and 1986. How could this not be surprising? As far as the delay itself is concerned, it was rooted in (but not completely justified by) a series of coincidences. We have seen that Corbin’s volume was the only thing available at that time; later, the war and Liberation were not conducive to long-drawn-out work; the Louvain pair of de Waehlens and Boehm translated the first forty-four paragraphs incredibly slowly and finally published them with Gallimard in
Conclusion from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: With respect to the certainties, what has inspired us from the very beginning has been confirmed: the omnipresence in France of the influence, direct or indirect, of Heidegger’s thought and work. Apart from the mathematical sciences and life and earth sciences, there is hardly any sector of knowledge or intellectual activity that has not been positively or negatively affected by that thought, at times marginally, often
Jacques Derrida: from:
Heidegger in France
Author(s) Derrida Jacques
Abstract: I think it was probably in
hypokhâgneand not in my high school philosophy class. I was in the philosophy class during 1947–48 and it doesn’t seem to me that Heidegger’s name had been mentioned at that time. Inhypokhâgne, I amsureof having heard his name in lectures. I had a rather remarkablehypokhâgneteacher, Jan Czarneki: he gave lectures on the history of philosophy that were very synthetic and precise, in which he covered everything, from the pre-Socratics to modernity; I remember having heard
Philippe Lacoue-Labarthe: from:
Heidegger in France
Author(s) Lacoue-Labarthe Philippe
Abstract: The first time that I read Heidegger must have been at the end of my
hypokhâgneat Le Mans. I had a charming professor of philosophy, but he was not a philosopher. I had above all benefited from the teaching of a professor of French literature, Gérard Genette. The following year I left Le Mans, reluctantly, at the same time that Derrida was appointed to teach inhypokhâgne… Consequently, I never had the opportunity to be Derrida’s student. Genette and I corresponded, and during that summer Heidegger’s name had come
Introduction from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: Once upon a time, a poor Swabian child was born in a little village east of the Black Forest. By the sheer force of his intellect and the tenacity of his own efforts, he became world-famous and conquered the intelligentsia of the “hereditary enemy,” France. How was Heidegger able to occupy, for more than half a century, the privileged position of being a fashionable philosopher, a
maître à penserin the intellectual and cultural capital of Paris? Some Americans have posed the question more bluntly: how could minds as acute and intelligent as those of the great French intellectuals, from
1 First Crossings of the Rhine from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: Heidegger’s sudden celebrity following the publication of
Sein und Zeitin 1927 did not go completely unnoticed in Paris, which was at the time, even more than today, the intellectual capital of Europe, and probably of the world. But to know a name is one thing; to enter into a thinker’s thought is another. While Heidegger’s masterpiece had to wait nearly sixty years before being translated in its entirety into French, reports and publications establish that distinguished university professors like Léon Brunschvicg and Xavier Léon quickly recognized, in this case, that a philosophical event had taken place in Germany.
3 Postwar Fascinations from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: It is not surprising that Liberation was not solely political, but cultural as well, and that the Sartre bomb was not the only one to explode at the time of an intense intellectual turmoil, amidst a joyous confusion. Sartre himself noted and deplored that existentialism, transformed into a fashion, became a word that “has been so stretched and has taken on so broad a meaning, that it no longer means anything at all.”¹ Existentialism had almost become a slogan, whose meaning was no longer clear. “At St. Germain des Prés, the language of that time was taking shape and so
9 The Letter and the Spirit from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: Following a sixty-year delay after the original publication of
Sein und Zeit, two complete French translations ofSein und Zeitfinally appeared in 1985 and 1986. How could this not be surprising? As far as the delay itself is concerned, it was rooted in (but not completely justified by) a series of coincidences. We have seen that Corbin’s volume was the only thing available at that time; later, the war and Liberation were not conducive to long-drawn-out work; the Louvain pair of de Waehlens and Boehm translated the first forty-four paragraphs incredibly slowly and finally published them with Gallimard in
Conclusion from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: With respect to the certainties, what has inspired us from the very beginning has been confirmed: the omnipresence in France of the influence, direct or indirect, of Heidegger’s thought and work. Apart from the mathematical sciences and life and earth sciences, there is hardly any sector of knowledge or intellectual activity that has not been positively or negatively affected by that thought, at times marginally, often
Jacques Derrida: from:
Heidegger in France
Author(s) Derrida Jacques
Abstract: I think it was probably in
hypokhâgneand not in my high school philosophy class. I was in the philosophy class during 1947–48 and it doesn’t seem to me that Heidegger’s name had been mentioned at that time. Inhypokhâgne, I amsureof having heard his name in lectures. I had a rather remarkablehypokhâgneteacher, Jan Czarneki: he gave lectures on the history of philosophy that were very synthetic and precise, in which he covered everything, from the pre-Socratics to modernity; I remember having heard
Philippe Lacoue-Labarthe: from:
Heidegger in France
Author(s) Lacoue-Labarthe Philippe
Abstract: The first time that I read Heidegger must have been at the end of my
hypokhâgneat Le Mans. I had a charming professor of philosophy, but he was not a philosopher. I had above all benefited from the teaching of a professor of French literature, Gérard Genette. The following year I left Le Mans, reluctantly, at the same time that Derrida was appointed to teach inhypokhâgne… Consequently, I never had the opportunity to be Derrida’s student. Genette and I corresponded, and during that summer Heidegger’s name had come
Introduction from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: Once upon a time, a poor Swabian child was born in a little village east of the Black Forest. By the sheer force of his intellect and the tenacity of his own efforts, he became world-famous and conquered the intelligentsia of the “hereditary enemy,” France. How was Heidegger able to occupy, for more than half a century, the privileged position of being a fashionable philosopher, a
maître à penserin the intellectual and cultural capital of Paris? Some Americans have posed the question more bluntly: how could minds as acute and intelligent as those of the great French intellectuals, from
1 First Crossings of the Rhine from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: Heidegger’s sudden celebrity following the publication of
Sein und Zeitin 1927 did not go completely unnoticed in Paris, which was at the time, even more than today, the intellectual capital of Europe, and probably of the world. But to know a name is one thing; to enter into a thinker’s thought is another. While Heidegger’s masterpiece had to wait nearly sixty years before being translated in its entirety into French, reports and publications establish that distinguished university professors like Léon Brunschvicg and Xavier Léon quickly recognized, in this case, that a philosophical event had taken place in Germany.
3 Postwar Fascinations from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: It is not surprising that Liberation was not solely political, but cultural as well, and that the Sartre bomb was not the only one to explode at the time of an intense intellectual turmoil, amidst a joyous confusion. Sartre himself noted and deplored that existentialism, transformed into a fashion, became a word that “has been so stretched and has taken on so broad a meaning, that it no longer means anything at all.”¹ Existentialism had almost become a slogan, whose meaning was no longer clear. “At St. Germain des Prés, the language of that time was taking shape and so
9 The Letter and the Spirit from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: Following a sixty-year delay after the original publication of
Sein und Zeit, two complete French translations ofSein und Zeitfinally appeared in 1985 and 1986. How could this not be surprising? As far as the delay itself is concerned, it was rooted in (but not completely justified by) a series of coincidences. We have seen that Corbin’s volume was the only thing available at that time; later, the war and Liberation were not conducive to long-drawn-out work; the Louvain pair of de Waehlens and Boehm translated the first forty-four paragraphs incredibly slowly and finally published them with Gallimard in
Conclusion from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: With respect to the certainties, what has inspired us from the very beginning has been confirmed: the omnipresence in France of the influence, direct or indirect, of Heidegger’s thought and work. Apart from the mathematical sciences and life and earth sciences, there is hardly any sector of knowledge or intellectual activity that has not been positively or negatively affected by that thought, at times marginally, often
Jacques Derrida: from:
Heidegger in France
Author(s) Derrida Jacques
Abstract: I think it was probably in
hypokhâgneand not in my high school philosophy class. I was in the philosophy class during 1947–48 and it doesn’t seem to me that Heidegger’s name had been mentioned at that time. Inhypokhâgne, I amsureof having heard his name in lectures. I had a rather remarkablehypokhâgneteacher, Jan Czarneki: he gave lectures on the history of philosophy that were very synthetic and precise, in which he covered everything, from the pre-Socratics to modernity; I remember having heard
Philippe Lacoue-Labarthe: from:
Heidegger in France
Author(s) Lacoue-Labarthe Philippe
Abstract: The first time that I read Heidegger must have been at the end of my
hypokhâgneat Le Mans. I had a charming professor of philosophy, but he was not a philosopher. I had above all benefited from the teaching of a professor of French literature, Gérard Genette. The following year I left Le Mans, reluctantly, at the same time that Derrida was appointed to teach inhypokhâgne… Consequently, I never had the opportunity to be Derrida’s student. Genette and I corresponded, and during that summer Heidegger’s name had come
Introduction from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: Once upon a time, a poor Swabian child was born in a little village east of the Black Forest. By the sheer force of his intellect and the tenacity of his own efforts, he became world-famous and conquered the intelligentsia of the “hereditary enemy,” France. How was Heidegger able to occupy, for more than half a century, the privileged position of being a fashionable philosopher, a
maître à penserin the intellectual and cultural capital of Paris? Some Americans have posed the question more bluntly: how could minds as acute and intelligent as those of the great French intellectuals, from
1 First Crossings of the Rhine from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: Heidegger’s sudden celebrity following the publication of
Sein und Zeitin 1927 did not go completely unnoticed in Paris, which was at the time, even more than today, the intellectual capital of Europe, and probably of the world. But to know a name is one thing; to enter into a thinker’s thought is another. While Heidegger’s masterpiece had to wait nearly sixty years before being translated in its entirety into French, reports and publications establish that distinguished university professors like Léon Brunschvicg and Xavier Léon quickly recognized, in this case, that a philosophical event had taken place in Germany.
3 Postwar Fascinations from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: It is not surprising that Liberation was not solely political, but cultural as well, and that the Sartre bomb was not the only one to explode at the time of an intense intellectual turmoil, amidst a joyous confusion. Sartre himself noted and deplored that existentialism, transformed into a fashion, became a word that “has been so stretched and has taken on so broad a meaning, that it no longer means anything at all.”¹ Existentialism had almost become a slogan, whose meaning was no longer clear. “At St. Germain des Prés, the language of that time was taking shape and so
9 The Letter and the Spirit from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: Following a sixty-year delay after the original publication of
Sein und Zeit, two complete French translations ofSein und Zeitfinally appeared in 1985 and 1986. How could this not be surprising? As far as the delay itself is concerned, it was rooted in (but not completely justified by) a series of coincidences. We have seen that Corbin’s volume was the only thing available at that time; later, the war and Liberation were not conducive to long-drawn-out work; the Louvain pair of de Waehlens and Boehm translated the first forty-four paragraphs incredibly slowly and finally published them with Gallimard in
Conclusion from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: With respect to the certainties, what has inspired us from the very beginning has been confirmed: the omnipresence in France of the influence, direct or indirect, of Heidegger’s thought and work. Apart from the mathematical sciences and life and earth sciences, there is hardly any sector of knowledge or intellectual activity that has not been positively or negatively affected by that thought, at times marginally, often
Jacques Derrida: from:
Heidegger in France
Author(s) Derrida Jacques
Abstract: I think it was probably in
hypokhâgneand not in my high school philosophy class. I was in the philosophy class during 1947–48 and it doesn’t seem to me that Heidegger’s name had been mentioned at that time. Inhypokhâgne, I amsureof having heard his name in lectures. I had a rather remarkablehypokhâgneteacher, Jan Czarneki: he gave lectures on the history of philosophy that were very synthetic and precise, in which he covered everything, from the pre-Socratics to modernity; I remember having heard
Philippe Lacoue-Labarthe: from:
Heidegger in France
Author(s) Lacoue-Labarthe Philippe
Abstract: The first time that I read Heidegger must have been at the end of my
hypokhâgneat Le Mans. I had a charming professor of philosophy, but he was not a philosopher. I had above all benefited from the teaching of a professor of French literature, Gérard Genette. The following year I left Le Mans, reluctantly, at the same time that Derrida was appointed to teach inhypokhâgne… Consequently, I never had the opportunity to be Derrida’s student. Genette and I corresponded, and during that summer Heidegger’s name had come
Introduction from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: Once upon a time, a poor Swabian child was born in a little village east of the Black Forest. By the sheer force of his intellect and the tenacity of his own efforts, he became world-famous and conquered the intelligentsia of the “hereditary enemy,” France. How was Heidegger able to occupy, for more than half a century, the privileged position of being a fashionable philosopher, a
maître à penserin the intellectual and cultural capital of Paris? Some Americans have posed the question more bluntly: how could minds as acute and intelligent as those of the great French intellectuals, from
1 First Crossings of the Rhine from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: Heidegger’s sudden celebrity following the publication of
Sein und Zeitin 1927 did not go completely unnoticed in Paris, which was at the time, even more than today, the intellectual capital of Europe, and probably of the world. But to know a name is one thing; to enter into a thinker’s thought is another. While Heidegger’s masterpiece had to wait nearly sixty years before being translated in its entirety into French, reports and publications establish that distinguished university professors like Léon Brunschvicg and Xavier Léon quickly recognized, in this case, that a philosophical event had taken place in Germany.
3 Postwar Fascinations from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: It is not surprising that Liberation was not solely political, but cultural as well, and that the Sartre bomb was not the only one to explode at the time of an intense intellectual turmoil, amidst a joyous confusion. Sartre himself noted and deplored that existentialism, transformed into a fashion, became a word that “has been so stretched and has taken on so broad a meaning, that it no longer means anything at all.”¹ Existentialism had almost become a slogan, whose meaning was no longer clear. “At St. Germain des Prés, the language of that time was taking shape and so
9 The Letter and the Spirit from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: Following a sixty-year delay after the original publication of
Sein und Zeit, two complete French translations ofSein und Zeitfinally appeared in 1985 and 1986. How could this not be surprising? As far as the delay itself is concerned, it was rooted in (but not completely justified by) a series of coincidences. We have seen that Corbin’s volume was the only thing available at that time; later, the war and Liberation were not conducive to long-drawn-out work; the Louvain pair of de Waehlens and Boehm translated the first forty-four paragraphs incredibly slowly and finally published them with Gallimard in
Conclusion from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: With respect to the certainties, what has inspired us from the very beginning has been confirmed: the omnipresence in France of the influence, direct or indirect, of Heidegger’s thought and work. Apart from the mathematical sciences and life and earth sciences, there is hardly any sector of knowledge or intellectual activity that has not been positively or negatively affected by that thought, at times marginally, often
Jacques Derrida: from:
Heidegger in France
Author(s) Derrida Jacques
Abstract: I think it was probably in
hypokhâgneand not in my high school philosophy class. I was in the philosophy class during 1947–48 and it doesn’t seem to me that Heidegger’s name had been mentioned at that time. Inhypokhâgne, I amsureof having heard his name in lectures. I had a rather remarkablehypokhâgneteacher, Jan Czarneki: he gave lectures on the history of philosophy that were very synthetic and precise, in which he covered everything, from the pre-Socratics to modernity; I remember having heard
Philippe Lacoue-Labarthe: from:
Heidegger in France
Author(s) Lacoue-Labarthe Philippe
Abstract: The first time that I read Heidegger must have been at the end of my
hypokhâgneat Le Mans. I had a charming professor of philosophy, but he was not a philosopher. I had above all benefited from the teaching of a professor of French literature, Gérard Genette. The following year I left Le Mans, reluctantly, at the same time that Derrida was appointed to teach inhypokhâgne… Consequently, I never had the opportunity to be Derrida’s student. Genette and I corresponded, and during that summer Heidegger’s name had come
1 Irenaeus of Lyons from:
Lex Crucis
Abstract: The year 177 AD saw a wave of persecution break over the Christian churches at Vienne and Lyons in southeastern France. Someone at the time wrote a letter describing the trials of these communities to their sister churches in Asia Minor; the fourth-century historian Eusebius of Caesarea has preserved a large part of this letter for us.¹ It depicts in vivid detail the mob fury that fell upon Christians old and young, women and men alike, as well as the imprisonment, torture, and executions which followed. Among those to perish was the ninety-year-old bishop of Lyons, Pothinus.
2 A Spirit-Driven Theology of Preaching from:
Ways of the Word
Author(s) Powery Luke A.
Abstract: During my first year in seminary, on a particular weekday in Princeton Seminary’s Miller Chapel—essentially a Presbyterian meetinghouse built for worship in 1834—the preacher spoke of the Spirit as if she was his best friend and closest confidante. This seniorclass student began to preach and as he proclaimed, he interjected the phrase, “Help me, Holy Ghost!” One time. Two times. Three times—and then I lost count of how many times he said, “Help me, Holy Ghost!” Maybe he was praying for himself in the moment because he realized the sermon wasn’t going over too well in this
9 Preaching and Technology from:
Ways of the Word
Author(s) Powery Luke A.
Abstract: In the previous chapter, we learned how the Word became flesh in Jesus Christ and the ways in which this deepens our understanding of the role of the human body in preaching. While this is true, it is also obvious that in this digital age, some may assert that the Word has also now become digital. One cannot deny technology’s pervasive presence in society, including the church and its preaching. The fact of technology and its use will not be disappearing anytime soon; thus, this chapter will explore what it means to engage technologies in preaching and some of the
6 Overcoming Ethical Abstraction: from:
Engaging Bonhoeffer
Author(s) de Graaff Guido
Abstract: It appears there is little scope for establishing the true nature and extent of Bonhoeffer’s influence on Hauerwas since there are few places where the latter explicitly engages with the former. In Hauerwas’s recent memoir,
Hannah’s Child(2010), Bonhoeffer is barely mentioned; Karl Barth and John Howard Yoder, by contrast, are credited several times for shaping his thinking.¹ Indeed, Bonhoeffer’s name does not appear even once in Hauerwas’s seminal workThe Peaceable Kingdom(1983)—not even in the section entitled “On What I Owe to Whom” at the beginning of the book.²
12 Dietrich Bonhoeffer and Gerhard Ebeling: from:
Engaging Bonhoeffer
Author(s) Frick Peter
Abstract: Dietrich Bonhoeffer met Gerhard Ebeling, a fellow Berliner, for the first time at the underground Finkenwalde Seminary of the Confessing Church during the fourth theological course in the winter of 1936–37. It took Bonhoeffer very little time to realize that Ebeling was an exceptionally gifted theological thinker; it is fair to say that Bonhoeffer discovered the theological genius in Ebeling. On his own initiative, Bonhoeffer wrote to Martin Albertz, superintendent of the Confessing Church responsible for theological education, to recommend Ebeling for further theological education, stating: “I consider him to be an extraordinarily gifted and capable scholar and theologian…
Foreword from:
Quiet Powers of the Possible: Interviews in Contemporary French Phenomenology
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: The title of this work comes from a closing line in Heidegger’s
Being and Time. He is speaking of the future of phenomenology as a promise of things to come—a sentiment already anticipated in an opening claim of the book: “In phenomenology possibility stands higher than actuality.”¹ For Heidegger this spelled a revolutionary reversal of the old metaphysical paradigm of being as presence, substance, and act and a radical openness to new kinds of questioning.
The Phenomenology of Givenness from:
Quiet Powers of the Possible: Interviews in Contemporary French Phenomenology
Author(s) MARION JEAN-LUC
Abstract: I was studying history, French literature, Latin, Greek, and so on in the
classe préparatoirefor the École normale supérieure’s compulsory admissions exam. At that time, my “major,” so to speak, was, in fact, French literature. So when I was admitted to the École Normale my initial plan was to study literature. And for two years—I was very fortunate but not aware of how fortunate I was—I had Jean Beaufret as my teacher, one of Heidegger’s closest friends. He was very
The Fundamental Concepts of Phenomenology from:
Quiet Powers of the Possible: Interviews in Contemporary French Phenomenology
Author(s) ROMANO CLAUDE
Abstract: It seems to me that one could diagnose a current crisis in philosophy that echoes Husserl’s statement at the beginning of the last century. On one side, the positivist paradigm that prevailed for a long time in the Anglophone philosophy of language, in the wake of a certain reading of the
Tractatusand the work of the Vienna Circle, has reached exhaustion: not only the idea of a
Attempting to Think Beyond Subjectivity from:
Quiet Powers of the Possible: Interviews in Contemporary French Phenomenology
Author(s) CHRÉTIEN JEAN-LOUIS
Abstract: The life of the mind is composed entirely of encounters, of having to report them and to be accountable to them [
d’avoir à y répondre, comme à en répondre]—up to our very last breath, where only our formation is interrupted, which does not form us for time alone. But for this we need a language or
Foreword from:
Quiet Powers of the Possible: Interviews in Contemporary French Phenomenology
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: The title of this work comes from a closing line in Heidegger’s
Being and Time. He is speaking of the future of phenomenology as a promise of things to come—a sentiment already anticipated in an opening claim of the book: “In phenomenology possibility stands higher than actuality.”¹ For Heidegger this spelled a revolutionary reversal of the old metaphysical paradigm of being as presence, substance, and act and a radical openness to new kinds of questioning.
The Phenomenology of Givenness from:
Quiet Powers of the Possible: Interviews in Contemporary French Phenomenology
Author(s) MARION JEAN-LUC
Abstract: I was studying history, French literature, Latin, Greek, and so on in the
classe préparatoirefor the École normale supérieure’s compulsory admissions exam. At that time, my “major,” so to speak, was, in fact, French literature. So when I was admitted to the École Normale my initial plan was to study literature. And for two years—I was very fortunate but not aware of how fortunate I was—I had Jean Beaufret as my teacher, one of Heidegger’s closest friends. He was very
The Fundamental Concepts of Phenomenology from:
Quiet Powers of the Possible: Interviews in Contemporary French Phenomenology
Author(s) ROMANO CLAUDE
Abstract: It seems to me that one could diagnose a current crisis in philosophy that echoes Husserl’s statement at the beginning of the last century. On one side, the positivist paradigm that prevailed for a long time in the Anglophone philosophy of language, in the wake of a certain reading of the
Tractatusand the work of the Vienna Circle, has reached exhaustion: not only the idea of a
Attempting to Think Beyond Subjectivity from:
Quiet Powers of the Possible: Interviews in Contemporary French Phenomenology
Author(s) CHRÉTIEN JEAN-LOUIS
Abstract: The life of the mind is composed entirely of encounters, of having to report them and to be accountable to them [
d’avoir à y répondre, comme à en répondre]—up to our very last breath, where only our formation is interrupted, which does not form us for time alone. But for this we need a language or
Foreword from:
Quiet Powers of the Possible: Interviews in Contemporary French Phenomenology
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: The title of this work comes from a closing line in Heidegger’s
Being and Time. He is speaking of the future of phenomenology as a promise of things to come—a sentiment already anticipated in an opening claim of the book: “In phenomenology possibility stands higher than actuality.”¹ For Heidegger this spelled a revolutionary reversal of the old metaphysical paradigm of being as presence, substance, and act and a radical openness to new kinds of questioning.
The Phenomenology of Givenness from:
Quiet Powers of the Possible: Interviews in Contemporary French Phenomenology
Author(s) MARION JEAN-LUC
Abstract: I was studying history, French literature, Latin, Greek, and so on in the
classe préparatoirefor the École normale supérieure’s compulsory admissions exam. At that time, my “major,” so to speak, was, in fact, French literature. So when I was admitted to the École Normale my initial plan was to study literature. And for two years—I was very fortunate but not aware of how fortunate I was—I had Jean Beaufret as my teacher, one of Heidegger’s closest friends. He was very
The Fundamental Concepts of Phenomenology from:
Quiet Powers of the Possible: Interviews in Contemporary French Phenomenology
Author(s) ROMANO CLAUDE
Abstract: It seems to me that one could diagnose a current crisis in philosophy that echoes Husserl’s statement at the beginning of the last century. On one side, the positivist paradigm that prevailed for a long time in the Anglophone philosophy of language, in the wake of a certain reading of the
Tractatusand the work of the Vienna Circle, has reached exhaustion: not only the idea of a
Attempting to Think Beyond Subjectivity from:
Quiet Powers of the Possible: Interviews in Contemporary French Phenomenology
Author(s) CHRÉTIEN JEAN-LOUIS
Abstract: The life of the mind is composed entirely of encounters, of having to report them and to be accountable to them [
d’avoir à y répondre, comme à en répondre]—up to our very last breath, where only our formation is interrupted, which does not form us for time alone. But for this we need a language or
Foreword from:
Quiet Powers of the Possible: Interviews in Contemporary French Phenomenology
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: The title of this work comes from a closing line in Heidegger’s
Being and Time. He is speaking of the future of phenomenology as a promise of things to come—a sentiment already anticipated in an opening claim of the book: “In phenomenology possibility stands higher than actuality.”¹ For Heidegger this spelled a revolutionary reversal of the old metaphysical paradigm of being as presence, substance, and act and a radical openness to new kinds of questioning.
The Phenomenology of Givenness from:
Quiet Powers of the Possible: Interviews in Contemporary French Phenomenology
Author(s) MARION JEAN-LUC
Abstract: I was studying history, French literature, Latin, Greek, and so on in the
classe préparatoirefor the École normale supérieure’s compulsory admissions exam. At that time, my “major,” so to speak, was, in fact, French literature. So when I was admitted to the École Normale my initial plan was to study literature. And for two years—I was very fortunate but not aware of how fortunate I was—I had Jean Beaufret as my teacher, one of Heidegger’s closest friends. He was very
The Fundamental Concepts of Phenomenology from:
Quiet Powers of the Possible: Interviews in Contemporary French Phenomenology
Author(s) ROMANO CLAUDE
Abstract: It seems to me that one could diagnose a current crisis in philosophy that echoes Husserl’s statement at the beginning of the last century. On one side, the positivist paradigm that prevailed for a long time in the Anglophone philosophy of language, in the wake of a certain reading of the
Tractatusand the work of the Vienna Circle, has reached exhaustion: not only the idea of a
Attempting to Think Beyond Subjectivity from:
Quiet Powers of the Possible: Interviews in Contemporary French Phenomenology
Author(s) CHRÉTIEN JEAN-LOUIS
Abstract: The life of the mind is composed entirely of encounters, of having to report them and to be accountable to them [
d’avoir à y répondre, comme à en répondre]—up to our very last breath, where only our formation is interrupted, which does not form us for time alone. But for this we need a language or
Foreword from:
Quiet Powers of the Possible: Interviews in Contemporary French Phenomenology
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: The title of this work comes from a closing line in Heidegger’s
Being and Time. He is speaking of the future of phenomenology as a promise of things to come—a sentiment already anticipated in an opening claim of the book: “In phenomenology possibility stands higher than actuality.”¹ For Heidegger this spelled a revolutionary reversal of the old metaphysical paradigm of being as presence, substance, and act and a radical openness to new kinds of questioning.
The Phenomenology of Givenness from:
Quiet Powers of the Possible: Interviews in Contemporary French Phenomenology
Author(s) MARION JEAN-LUC
Abstract: I was studying history, French literature, Latin, Greek, and so on in the
classe préparatoirefor the École normale supérieure’s compulsory admissions exam. At that time, my “major,” so to speak, was, in fact, French literature. So when I was admitted to the École Normale my initial plan was to study literature. And for two years—I was very fortunate but not aware of how fortunate I was—I had Jean Beaufret as my teacher, one of Heidegger’s closest friends. He was very
The Fundamental Concepts of Phenomenology from:
Quiet Powers of the Possible: Interviews in Contemporary French Phenomenology
Author(s) ROMANO CLAUDE
Abstract: It seems to me that one could diagnose a current crisis in philosophy that echoes Husserl’s statement at the beginning of the last century. On one side, the positivist paradigm that prevailed for a long time in the Anglophone philosophy of language, in the wake of a certain reading of the
Tractatusand the work of the Vienna Circle, has reached exhaustion: not only the idea of a
Attempting to Think Beyond Subjectivity from:
Quiet Powers of the Possible: Interviews in Contemporary French Phenomenology
Author(s) CHRÉTIEN JEAN-LOUIS
Abstract: The life of the mind is composed entirely of encounters, of having to report them and to be accountable to them [
d’avoir à y répondre, comme à en répondre]—up to our very last breath, where only our formation is interrupted, which does not form us for time alone. But for this we need a language or
Book Title: The Varieties of Transcendence: Pragmatism and the Theory of Religion- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Jones Jude
Abstract: The Varieties of Transcendence traces American pragmatist thought on religion and its relevance for theorizing religion today. The volume establishes pragmatist concepts of religious individualization as powerful alternatives to the more common secularization discourse. In stressing the importance of Josiah Royce's work, it emphasizes religious individualism's compatibility with community. At the same time, by covering all of the major classical pragmatist theories of religion, it shows their kinship and common focus on the interrelation between the challenges of contingency and the semiotic significance of transcendence.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt19rm9gf
RELIGIOUS EXPERIENCE AND ITS INTERPRETATION: from:
The Varieties of Transcendence: Pragmatism and the Theory of Religion
Author(s) Joas Hans
Abstract: The pragmatist theory of religion has two very different roots. One of them indubitably lies in the foundation of an empirical psychology of religion developed by William James in his 1902 masterpiece
The Varieties of Religious Experience.¹ James was a brilliant writer—I am sometimes tempted to say even more brilliant than his brother, the great novelist Henry James—and his book, although more than one hundred years old, has not lost its original freshness and, at least in the English-speaking world, has become a true classic, even for the wider public. To characterize it as a mere contribution to
PRAGMATIC OR PRAGMATIST / PRAGMATICIST PHILOSOPHY OF RELIGION? from:
The Varieties of Transcendence: Pragmatism and the Theory of Religion
Author(s) Deuser Hermann
Abstract: As a theory of action, classical pragmatism—founded by the scientifically trained philosophers Charles S. Peirce and William James in New England—is also always a philosophy of religion. Human experience is not (as in the German tradition) divided according to practical experience, on the one hand, and scientific empiricism, on the other. Instead, it is precisely the interplay of belief in relation to action that explains our everyday behavior as much as the scientific method and religious experience. While different conceptions of god have inevitably resulted from the latter over time, the images, narratives, and symbols are nonetheless comparable.
Chapter 1 Turn It Up: from:
Turns of Event
Author(s) SANBORN GEOFFREY
Abstract: I will begin with two accounts of beginnings. The first is from Elizabeth Grosz’s
The Nick of Time: Politics, Evolution, and the Untimely:
Chapter 6 The Geopolitics and Tropologies of the American Turn from:
Turns of Event
Author(s) ALLEWAERT MONIQUE
Abstract: A turn suggests a change in direction that might be rendered as a curved line that stops short of a full circling.
A turndoes not entail a completed action in time, as the governing metaphor ofrevolutionused by older Americanist scholarship tended to suggest . Figuring the turn as a curved line gives it a geometry, which implies at least an abstract temporality and spatiality but does not anchor the turn in a specific geography. And while it offers the possibility of movement, which implies temporality, it implies no teleology. In short, the metaphor of the turn evokes
CHAPTER 1 Messages Sent, Messages Received? from:
Local Church, Global Church
Author(s) Edwards Lisa M.
Abstract: By the middle of the nineteenth century, the Catholic Church faced serious challenges from competing ideologies, including Protestantism, liberalism, Marxism, and anarchism. These new ideas and actors posed a real threat to the Catholic Church’s privileges and moral influence in Latin America. Throughout the region, these challenges often took the form of debates over freedom of religion, the role of religion in state educational systems, civil marriage, and secular cemeteries. They were exacerbated by the proliferation of secular, and sometimes even overtly anti-Catholic, political parties. As an institution, the church had to revise its previous strategy of either condemning or
CHAPTER 9 The Antigonish Movement of Canada and Latin America: from:
Local Church, Global Church
Author(s) LeGrand Catherine C.
Abstract: Throughout Latin America during the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, Catholics drew inspiration from political and social movements, as well as philosophical inquiries, from the rest of the Catholic world. Latin American Catholic activists sought to implement these foreign practices while, at the same time, adapting them and improvising changes that would make more sense in the local context. One of the most successful examples of this transnational interchange and adaptation occurred between Latin American Catholic activists and a little known but highly influential social movement in the Catholic Scots-Irish region of eastern Nova Scotia.
Book Title: Husserl's Missing Technologies- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): IHDE DON
Abstract: Husserl's Missing Technologies looks at the early-twentieth-century "classical" phenomenology of Edmund Husserl, both in the light of the philosophy of science of his time, and retrospectively at his philosophy from a contemporary "postphenomenology." Of central interest are his infrequent comments upon technologies and especially scientific instruments such as the telescope and microscope. Together with his analysis of Husserl, Don Ihde ventures through the recent history of technologies of science, reading and writing, and science praxis, calling for modifications to phenomenology by converging it with pragmatism. This fruitful hybridization emphasizes human-technology interrelationships, the role of embodiment and bodily skills, and the inherent multistability of technologies. In a radical argument, Ihde contends that philosophies, in the same way that various technologies contain an ever-shortening obsolescence, ought to have contingent use-lives.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt19x3jd4
7 From Phenomenology to Postphenomenology from:
Husserl's Missing Technologies
Abstract: The act of naming frequently follows somewhat behind the thing or process to be named. That was clearly the case with both science and technology. If early modern science began, as the standard view has it, in the seventeenth century, it was not until 1833 that it was named
scienceby William Whewell. Earlier the most frequent name wasnatural philosophy. Similarly, technology for a long time, even after the Industrial Revolution, was called a product of the industrial arts, or simplymachines, or products of engineering. Historians of technology, including Thomas Hughes and David Nye, point out that technology
Book Title: Husserl's Missing Technologies- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): IHDE DON
Abstract: Husserl's Missing Technologies looks at the early-twentieth-century "classical" phenomenology of Edmund Husserl, both in the light of the philosophy of science of his time, and retrospectively at his philosophy from a contemporary "postphenomenology." Of central interest are his infrequent comments upon technologies and especially scientific instruments such as the telescope and microscope. Together with his analysis of Husserl, Don Ihde ventures through the recent history of technologies of science, reading and writing, and science praxis, calling for modifications to phenomenology by converging it with pragmatism. This fruitful hybridization emphasizes human-technology interrelationships, the role of embodiment and bodily skills, and the inherent multistability of technologies. In a radical argument, Ihde contends that philosophies, in the same way that various technologies contain an ever-shortening obsolescence, ought to have contingent use-lives.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt19x3jd4
7 From Phenomenology to Postphenomenology from:
Husserl's Missing Technologies
Abstract: The act of naming frequently follows somewhat behind the thing or process to be named. That was clearly the case with both science and technology. If early modern science began, as the standard view has it, in the seventeenth century, it was not until 1833 that it was named
scienceby William Whewell. Earlier the most frequent name wasnatural philosophy. Similarly, technology for a long time, even after the Industrial Revolution, was called a product of the industrial arts, or simplymachines, or products of engineering. Historians of technology, including Thomas Hughes and David Nye, point out that technology
Book Title: Husserl's Missing Technologies- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): IHDE DON
Abstract: Husserl's Missing Technologies looks at the early-twentieth-century "classical" phenomenology of Edmund Husserl, both in the light of the philosophy of science of his time, and retrospectively at his philosophy from a contemporary "postphenomenology." Of central interest are his infrequent comments upon technologies and especially scientific instruments such as the telescope and microscope. Together with his analysis of Husserl, Don Ihde ventures through the recent history of technologies of science, reading and writing, and science praxis, calling for modifications to phenomenology by converging it with pragmatism. This fruitful hybridization emphasizes human-technology interrelationships, the role of embodiment and bodily skills, and the inherent multistability of technologies. In a radical argument, Ihde contends that philosophies, in the same way that various technologies contain an ever-shortening obsolescence, ought to have contingent use-lives.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt19x3jd4
7 From Phenomenology to Postphenomenology from:
Husserl's Missing Technologies
Abstract: The act of naming frequently follows somewhat behind the thing or process to be named. That was clearly the case with both science and technology. If early modern science began, as the standard view has it, in the seventeenth century, it was not until 1833 that it was named
scienceby William Whewell. Earlier the most frequent name wasnatural philosophy. Similarly, technology for a long time, even after the Industrial Revolution, was called a product of the industrial arts, or simplymachines, or products of engineering. Historians of technology, including Thomas Hughes and David Nye, point out that technology
4 “. . . the Lord encountered him and sought to kill him” Marilyn McCord Adams: from:
Horror and Its Aftermath
Abstract: If anxiety is an aspect of human experience that testifies to a darkness we sense threatening to envelop us—just over the horizon, perhaps, or crouching under the bed (biding its time), the worst moments are those when one’s inchoate (one hopes, sometimes in vain, irrational) fears become real, are concretized in external experience. At these junctures, the most profound manifestation of human darkness is evidenced in the horror that touches on human life, even on the happiest lives, to some degree, and that at its worst would seem to destroy all possibility of hope. The effects of infant failure
Introduction from:
Radical Theology
Abstract: This book is a contribution to hermeneutical theology in the twenty-first century. It offers a critical analysis of this important movement within twentieth-century Protestant theology. The purpose of the analysis is not to assign this movement a place within the history of theology, thus consigning it to the past as theology moves on to face changing issues and new challenges. Rather, it is to make its concerns understandable and to point out their validity for the present. Hermeneutical theology in all of its versions has never attempted to adapt to the trends and fashionable topics of the time, but has
1 Hermeneutical Theology from:
Radical Theology
Abstract: Everything has its time. Hermeneutical theology had its time—in the 1960s, 1970s, and 1980s. That is a significant duration. In contrast to some other theological movements, it did not simply remain an announcement and an agenda; it actually has a history that is worth remembering. But does it have a present that is worth mentioning? Or any future at all? Are there reasons to continue that which students of Rudolf Bultmann such as Ernst Fuchs, Gerhard Ebeling, and Eberhard Jüngel—and their own students—began two or three generations ago? And what would there be to continue, if one
2 Trends within Twentieth-Century Hermeneutics from:
Radical Theology
Abstract: We can understand, and sometimes we actually do. Yet we do not always understand, and we do not need to understand all the time in order to live our lives. Much of what we do in our shared worlds of meaning is governed by daily routines that we perform without understanding what they are
Introduction from:
Radical Theology
Abstract: This book is a contribution to hermeneutical theology in the twenty-first century. It offers a critical analysis of this important movement within twentieth-century Protestant theology. The purpose of the analysis is not to assign this movement a place within the history of theology, thus consigning it to the past as theology moves on to face changing issues and new challenges. Rather, it is to make its concerns understandable and to point out their validity for the present. Hermeneutical theology in all of its versions has never attempted to adapt to the trends and fashionable topics of the time, but has
1 Hermeneutical Theology from:
Radical Theology
Abstract: Everything has its time. Hermeneutical theology had its time—in the 1960s, 1970s, and 1980s. That is a significant duration. In contrast to some other theological movements, it did not simply remain an announcement and an agenda; it actually has a history that is worth remembering. But does it have a present that is worth mentioning? Or any future at all? Are there reasons to continue that which students of Rudolf Bultmann such as Ernst Fuchs, Gerhard Ebeling, and Eberhard Jüngel—and their own students—began two or three generations ago? And what would there be to continue, if one
2 Trends within Twentieth-Century Hermeneutics from:
Radical Theology
Abstract: We can understand, and sometimes we actually do. Yet we do not always understand, and we do not need to understand all the time in order to live our lives. Much of what we do in our shared worlds of meaning is governed by daily routines that we perform without understanding what they are
Conclusion from:
Exodus and Resurrection
Abstract: Sustained engagement with Jenson’s thinking has issued in deep admiration for the integration of his “system” and his astonishing blend of concision and penetration. This book has sought to bring into relief a thread that undulates throughout his system. At times this thread, the God of Israel, is a prominent identification in Jenson’s formulations, and at other times the identification is below the surface. Even so, it is never absent. I have argued that Jenson’s attention to the centrality of God’s identity as the God of Israel permeates his theology, and its profound importance for Christian theology is convincingly developed
Postscript: from:
Into the Far Country
Abstract: The question I posed at the beginning of this book was whether or not Barth’s construction of subjectivity is Kantian, and what the theological consequence of the answer might be. Bruce McCormack maintains that Barth was attempting to be “orthodox under the conditions of modernity,” meaning Barth arrives at an armistice with Kantian epistemics—indeed, with the turn to the subject—while at the same time finding noetic space for revelatory encounter in a christologically grounded dialectical relation between veiling and unveiling. At this stage my argument with McCormack is over, and I do not wish to cover this ground
Book Title: Theology in the Flesh-How Embodiment and Culture Shape the Way We Think about Truth, Morality, and God
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress
Author(s): Sanders John
Abstract: Metaphors and other mental tools are used to reason (not just speak) about God, salvation, truth, and morality. Figurative language structures our theological and moral reasoning in powerful ways. This book uses an approach known as cognitive linguistics to explore the incredibly rich ways our conceptual tools, derived from embodied life and culture, shape the way we understand Christian teachings and practices. The cognitive revolution has generated amazing insights into how human minds make sense of the world. This book applies these insights to the ways Christians think about topics such as God, justice, sin, and salvation. It shows that Christians often share a set of very general ideas but disagree on what the Bible means or the moral stances we should take. It explains why Christians often develop a number of appropriate but sometimes incompatible ways to understand the Bible and various doctrines. It assists Christians in understanding those with whom they disagree. Hopefully, simply better understanding how and why people think the way they do will foster better dialogue and greater humility.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1b3t7k7
2 From Embodiment to Mental Models from:
Theology in the Flesh
Abstract: The recent revolution in cognitive science has investigated how human minds make sense of our experience, uncovering the ways we find meaning in everything from various shapes to blinking lights. Cognitive linguistics is part of this revolutionary discovery. The study of cognitive linguistics began in the 1970s and is an influential approach to meaning construction used by an international body of scholars.¹ Cognitive linguistics examines how we think about the entire range of human experience, including causation, motion, time, relationships, entities, and emotions.² The research is interdisciplinary in nature, involving fields such as psychology, anthropology, neuroscience, philosophy, sign language, and
3 Metaphors and Other Conceptual Structures from:
Theology in the Flesh
Abstract: Concepts such as balance and containment are fundamental to our thinking. Politicians speak of a “balanced approach” to government revenues and spending. We speak of balanced personalities, the balance of power, balance of viewpoints represented, the balance of justice, and so on. Containers have an interior and exterior, such that what is inside the container is separated from what is outside. We apply the conceptual structure of containment to notions such as time
4 Truth from:
Theology in the Flesh
Abstract: Truth is an important concept for humans and cognitive linguistics helps us think about various aspects of truth discussed in theology and philosophy. The following discussion consists of four sections: (1) the range of meanings of truth, (2) the importance of human embodiment for understanding truth, (3) the meaning of objective truth or truth from God’s perspective, and (4) an examination of panhuman truth, with a special focus on concepts of time.
Foreword from:
The Mutual Cultivation of Self and Things
Author(s) MOELLER HANS-GEORG
Abstract: Yang Guorong is one of the most creative and prominent Chinese philosophers of our time. He is a truly “Chinese” philosopher not because of his citizenship, ethnicity, or workplace, but because of the nature of his work. Yang makes ample use of the complete range of sources provided by the Chinese philosophical tradition, including all its periods and all its schools (in addition to his reliance on the Western philosophical canon). Thus to call him, for example, a “Confucian” would not do justice to the breadth of his approach. More important, however, Yang is also truly a “philosopher,” because he
L’Histoire interrogée from:
Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Rubino Gianfranco
Abstract: I. Le rapport du roman français contemporain à l’Histoire, qui est l’objet du présent volume, se poursuit depuis une bonne trentaine d’années avec une régularité remarquable, tout en ne représentant qu’une parmi les tendances de la littérature d’aujourd’hui, qu’on est loin de vouloir surestimer. Les récits qui développent cette relation sont en principe caractérisés par un regard rétrospectif tourné vers le passé, même si, comme le remarque André Peyronie dans le collectif Le
Romanesque et l’historique, « on trouve […] nombre de romans dont l’action est située dans la contemporanéité de leur auteur, mais qui prennent fortement en compte la
La conscription fictionnelle des témoins, ou l’istoricisation du roman contemporain from:
Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Bouju Emmanuel
Abstract: On se rappelle sans doute la forte (et légitime) polémique que la publication de
Jan Karskide Yannick Haenel¹ a suscitée il y a quelques années². Dans cette polémique, le reproche de falsification historique (concernant principalement l’entretien de Karski avec Roosevelt et l’arrière-plan idéologique de cet entretien) demeurait secondaire – le roman ne contrevenant pas frontalement aux acquis de l’historiographie sur le processus génocidaire : l’essentiel reposait sur le geste spectaculaire d’une usurpation d’identité (pas n’importe laquelle), et plus précisément dans le geste ventriloque de l’usurpation d’une voix. S’inscrivant dans le cadre de ce que je propose d’appeler “le roman istorique”³
Michon, Fleischer, Deville: from:
Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Vray Jean-Bernard
Abstract: J’entends par Terreur celle, à laquelle on se réfère par la majuscule, qui exerça en France du 10 août au 20 septembre 1792 (première Terreur) puis du 5 septembre 1793 jusqu’au 28 juillet un « mécanisme à relance indéfinie »⁵, et en laquelle Pierre Michon voit « l’ultime vérité de la Révolution »⁶. Elle met
La révolution du désir pendant Mai 68: from:
Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Tamassia Paolo
Abstract: Observateur pénétrant ou, selon certains, dissecteur cynique de l’âge contemporain, Michel Houellebecq estime nécessaire un regard historique rétrospectif pour comprendre le présent. L’un des axes principaux de son oeuvre romanesque vise à répondre à une question fondamentale : pourquoi en est-on arrivé à la situation présente ? Situation jugée catastrophique et sans issue. C’est la question que se posent plusieurs personnages des
Particules élémentaires¹, roman dont il s’agit dans cette étude. Si Houellebecq n’est pas le seul auteur contemporain qui se tourne vers le passé afin de comprendre l’état actuel des choses, plus rares sont les écrivains qui esquissent dans
L’Histoire interrogée from:
Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Rubino Gianfranco
Abstract: I. Le rapport du roman français contemporain à l’Histoire, qui est l’objet du présent volume, se poursuit depuis une bonne trentaine d’années avec une régularité remarquable, tout en ne représentant qu’une parmi les tendances de la littérature d’aujourd’hui, qu’on est loin de vouloir surestimer. Les récits qui développent cette relation sont en principe caractérisés par un regard rétrospectif tourné vers le passé, même si, comme le remarque André Peyronie dans le collectif Le
Romanesque et l’historique, « on trouve […] nombre de romans dont l’action est située dans la contemporanéité de leur auteur, mais qui prennent fortement en compte la
La conscription fictionnelle des témoins, ou l’istoricisation du roman contemporain from:
Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Bouju Emmanuel
Abstract: On se rappelle sans doute la forte (et légitime) polémique que la publication de
Jan Karskide Yannick Haenel¹ a suscitée il y a quelques années². Dans cette polémique, le reproche de falsification historique (concernant principalement l’entretien de Karski avec Roosevelt et l’arrière-plan idéologique de cet entretien) demeurait secondaire – le roman ne contrevenant pas frontalement aux acquis de l’historiographie sur le processus génocidaire : l’essentiel reposait sur le geste spectaculaire d’une usurpation d’identité (pas n’importe laquelle), et plus précisément dans le geste ventriloque de l’usurpation d’une voix. S’inscrivant dans le cadre de ce que je propose d’appeler “le roman istorique”³
Michon, Fleischer, Deville: from:
Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Vray Jean-Bernard
Abstract: J’entends par Terreur celle, à laquelle on se réfère par la majuscule, qui exerça en France du 10 août au 20 septembre 1792 (première Terreur) puis du 5 septembre 1793 jusqu’au 28 juillet un « mécanisme à relance indéfinie »⁵, et en laquelle Pierre Michon voit « l’ultime vérité de la Révolution »⁶. Elle met
La révolution du désir pendant Mai 68: from:
Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Tamassia Paolo
Abstract: Observateur pénétrant ou, selon certains, dissecteur cynique de l’âge contemporain, Michel Houellebecq estime nécessaire un regard historique rétrospectif pour comprendre le présent. L’un des axes principaux de son oeuvre romanesque vise à répondre à une question fondamentale : pourquoi en est-on arrivé à la situation présente ? Situation jugée catastrophique et sans issue. C’est la question que se posent plusieurs personnages des
Particules élémentaires¹, roman dont il s’agit dans cette étude. Si Houellebecq n’est pas le seul auteur contemporain qui se tourne vers le passé afin de comprendre l’état actuel des choses, plus rares sont les écrivains qui esquissent dans
L’Histoire interrogée from:
Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Rubino Gianfranco
Abstract: I. Le rapport du roman français contemporain à l’Histoire, qui est l’objet du présent volume, se poursuit depuis une bonne trentaine d’années avec une régularité remarquable, tout en ne représentant qu’une parmi les tendances de la littérature d’aujourd’hui, qu’on est loin de vouloir surestimer. Les récits qui développent cette relation sont en principe caractérisés par un regard rétrospectif tourné vers le passé, même si, comme le remarque André Peyronie dans le collectif Le
Romanesque et l’historique, « on trouve […] nombre de romans dont l’action est située dans la contemporanéité de leur auteur, mais qui prennent fortement en compte la
La conscription fictionnelle des témoins, ou l’istoricisation du roman contemporain from:
Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Bouju Emmanuel
Abstract: On se rappelle sans doute la forte (et légitime) polémique que la publication de
Jan Karskide Yannick Haenel¹ a suscitée il y a quelques années². Dans cette polémique, le reproche de falsification historique (concernant principalement l’entretien de Karski avec Roosevelt et l’arrière-plan idéologique de cet entretien) demeurait secondaire – le roman ne contrevenant pas frontalement aux acquis de l’historiographie sur le processus génocidaire : l’essentiel reposait sur le geste spectaculaire d’une usurpation d’identité (pas n’importe laquelle), et plus précisément dans le geste ventriloque de l’usurpation d’une voix. S’inscrivant dans le cadre de ce que je propose d’appeler “le roman istorique”³
Michon, Fleischer, Deville: from:
Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Vray Jean-Bernard
Abstract: J’entends par Terreur celle, à laquelle on se réfère par la majuscule, qui exerça en France du 10 août au 20 septembre 1792 (première Terreur) puis du 5 septembre 1793 jusqu’au 28 juillet un « mécanisme à relance indéfinie »⁵, et en laquelle Pierre Michon voit « l’ultime vérité de la Révolution »⁶. Elle met
La révolution du désir pendant Mai 68: from:
Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Tamassia Paolo
Abstract: Observateur pénétrant ou, selon certains, dissecteur cynique de l’âge contemporain, Michel Houellebecq estime nécessaire un regard historique rétrospectif pour comprendre le présent. L’un des axes principaux de son oeuvre romanesque vise à répondre à une question fondamentale : pourquoi en est-on arrivé à la situation présente ? Situation jugée catastrophique et sans issue. C’est la question que se posent plusieurs personnages des
Particules élémentaires¹, roman dont il s’agit dans cette étude. Si Houellebecq n’est pas le seul auteur contemporain qui se tourne vers le passé afin de comprendre l’état actuel des choses, plus rares sont les écrivains qui esquissent dans
L’Histoire interrogée from:
Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Rubino Gianfranco
Abstract: I. Le rapport du roman français contemporain à l’Histoire, qui est l’objet du présent volume, se poursuit depuis une bonne trentaine d’années avec une régularité remarquable, tout en ne représentant qu’une parmi les tendances de la littérature d’aujourd’hui, qu’on est loin de vouloir surestimer. Les récits qui développent cette relation sont en principe caractérisés par un regard rétrospectif tourné vers le passé, même si, comme le remarque André Peyronie dans le collectif Le
Romanesque et l’historique, « on trouve […] nombre de romans dont l’action est située dans la contemporanéité de leur auteur, mais qui prennent fortement en compte la
La conscription fictionnelle des témoins, ou l’istoricisation du roman contemporain from:
Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Bouju Emmanuel
Abstract: On se rappelle sans doute la forte (et légitime) polémique que la publication de
Jan Karskide Yannick Haenel¹ a suscitée il y a quelques années². Dans cette polémique, le reproche de falsification historique (concernant principalement l’entretien de Karski avec Roosevelt et l’arrière-plan idéologique de cet entretien) demeurait secondaire – le roman ne contrevenant pas frontalement aux acquis de l’historiographie sur le processus génocidaire : l’essentiel reposait sur le geste spectaculaire d’une usurpation d’identité (pas n’importe laquelle), et plus précisément dans le geste ventriloque de l’usurpation d’une voix. S’inscrivant dans le cadre de ce que je propose d’appeler “le roman istorique”³
Michon, Fleischer, Deville: from:
Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Vray Jean-Bernard
Abstract: J’entends par Terreur celle, à laquelle on se réfère par la majuscule, qui exerça en France du 10 août au 20 septembre 1792 (première Terreur) puis du 5 septembre 1793 jusqu’au 28 juillet un « mécanisme à relance indéfinie »⁵, et en laquelle Pierre Michon voit « l’ultime vérité de la Révolution »⁶. Elle met
La révolution du désir pendant Mai 68: from:
Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Tamassia Paolo
Abstract: Observateur pénétrant ou, selon certains, dissecteur cynique de l’âge contemporain, Michel Houellebecq estime nécessaire un regard historique rétrospectif pour comprendre le présent. L’un des axes principaux de son oeuvre romanesque vise à répondre à une question fondamentale : pourquoi en est-on arrivé à la situation présente ? Situation jugée catastrophique et sans issue. C’est la question que se posent plusieurs personnages des
Particules élémentaires¹, roman dont il s’agit dans cette étude. Si Houellebecq n’est pas le seul auteur contemporain qui se tourne vers le passé afin de comprendre l’état actuel des choses, plus rares sont les écrivains qui esquissent dans
L’Histoire interrogée from:
Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Rubino Gianfranco
Abstract: I. Le rapport du roman français contemporain à l’Histoire, qui est l’objet du présent volume, se poursuit depuis une bonne trentaine d’années avec une régularité remarquable, tout en ne représentant qu’une parmi les tendances de la littérature d’aujourd’hui, qu’on est loin de vouloir surestimer. Les récits qui développent cette relation sont en principe caractérisés par un regard rétrospectif tourné vers le passé, même si, comme le remarque André Peyronie dans le collectif Le
Romanesque et l’historique, « on trouve […] nombre de romans dont l’action est située dans la contemporanéité de leur auteur, mais qui prennent fortement en compte la
La conscription fictionnelle des témoins, ou l’istoricisation du roman contemporain from:
Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Bouju Emmanuel
Abstract: On se rappelle sans doute la forte (et légitime) polémique que la publication de
Jan Karskide Yannick Haenel¹ a suscitée il y a quelques années². Dans cette polémique, le reproche de falsification historique (concernant principalement l’entretien de Karski avec Roosevelt et l’arrière-plan idéologique de cet entretien) demeurait secondaire – le roman ne contrevenant pas frontalement aux acquis de l’historiographie sur le processus génocidaire : l’essentiel reposait sur le geste spectaculaire d’une usurpation d’identité (pas n’importe laquelle), et plus précisément dans le geste ventriloque de l’usurpation d’une voix. S’inscrivant dans le cadre de ce que je propose d’appeler “le roman istorique”³
Michon, Fleischer, Deville: from:
Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Vray Jean-Bernard
Abstract: J’entends par Terreur celle, à laquelle on se réfère par la majuscule, qui exerça en France du 10 août au 20 septembre 1792 (première Terreur) puis du 5 septembre 1793 jusqu’au 28 juillet un « mécanisme à relance indéfinie »⁵, et en laquelle Pierre Michon voit « l’ultime vérité de la Révolution »⁶. Elle met
La révolution du désir pendant Mai 68: from:
Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Tamassia Paolo
Abstract: Observateur pénétrant ou, selon certains, dissecteur cynique de l’âge contemporain, Michel Houellebecq estime nécessaire un regard historique rétrospectif pour comprendre le présent. L’un des axes principaux de son oeuvre romanesque vise à répondre à une question fondamentale : pourquoi en est-on arrivé à la situation présente ? Situation jugée catastrophique et sans issue. C’est la question que se posent plusieurs personnages des
Particules élémentaires¹, roman dont il s’agit dans cette étude. Si Houellebecq n’est pas le seul auteur contemporain qui se tourne vers le passé afin de comprendre l’état actuel des choses, plus rares sont les écrivains qui esquissent dans
L’Histoire interrogée from:
Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Rubino Gianfranco
Abstract: I. Le rapport du roman français contemporain à l’Histoire, qui est l’objet du présent volume, se poursuit depuis une bonne trentaine d’années avec une régularité remarquable, tout en ne représentant qu’une parmi les tendances de la littérature d’aujourd’hui, qu’on est loin de vouloir surestimer. Les récits qui développent cette relation sont en principe caractérisés par un regard rétrospectif tourné vers le passé, même si, comme le remarque André Peyronie dans le collectif Le
Romanesque et l’historique, « on trouve […] nombre de romans dont l’action est située dans la contemporanéité de leur auteur, mais qui prennent fortement en compte la
La conscription fictionnelle des témoins, ou l’istoricisation du roman contemporain from:
Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Bouju Emmanuel
Abstract: On se rappelle sans doute la forte (et légitime) polémique que la publication de
Jan Karskide Yannick Haenel¹ a suscitée il y a quelques années². Dans cette polémique, le reproche de falsification historique (concernant principalement l’entretien de Karski avec Roosevelt et l’arrière-plan idéologique de cet entretien) demeurait secondaire – le roman ne contrevenant pas frontalement aux acquis de l’historiographie sur le processus génocidaire : l’essentiel reposait sur le geste spectaculaire d’une usurpation d’identité (pas n’importe laquelle), et plus précisément dans le geste ventriloque de l’usurpation d’une voix. S’inscrivant dans le cadre de ce que je propose d’appeler “le roman istorique”³
Michon, Fleischer, Deville: from:
Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Vray Jean-Bernard
Abstract: J’entends par Terreur celle, à laquelle on se réfère par la majuscule, qui exerça en France du 10 août au 20 septembre 1792 (première Terreur) puis du 5 septembre 1793 jusqu’au 28 juillet un « mécanisme à relance indéfinie »⁵, et en laquelle Pierre Michon voit « l’ultime vérité de la Révolution »⁶. Elle met
La révolution du désir pendant Mai 68: from:
Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Tamassia Paolo
Abstract: Observateur pénétrant ou, selon certains, dissecteur cynique de l’âge contemporain, Michel Houellebecq estime nécessaire un regard historique rétrospectif pour comprendre le présent. L’un des axes principaux de son oeuvre romanesque vise à répondre à une question fondamentale : pourquoi en est-on arrivé à la situation présente ? Situation jugée catastrophique et sans issue. C’est la question que se posent plusieurs personnages des
Particules élémentaires¹, roman dont il s’agit dans cette étude. Si Houellebecq n’est pas le seul auteur contemporain qui se tourne vers le passé afin de comprendre l’état actuel des choses, plus rares sont les écrivains qui esquissent dans
L’Histoire interrogée from:
Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Rubino Gianfranco
Abstract: I. Le rapport du roman français contemporain à l’Histoire, qui est l’objet du présent volume, se poursuit depuis une bonne trentaine d’années avec une régularité remarquable, tout en ne représentant qu’une parmi les tendances de la littérature d’aujourd’hui, qu’on est loin de vouloir surestimer. Les récits qui développent cette relation sont en principe caractérisés par un regard rétrospectif tourné vers le passé, même si, comme le remarque André Peyronie dans le collectif Le
Romanesque et l’historique, « on trouve […] nombre de romans dont l’action est située dans la contemporanéité de leur auteur, mais qui prennent fortement en compte la
La conscription fictionnelle des témoins, ou l’istoricisation du roman contemporain from:
Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Bouju Emmanuel
Abstract: On se rappelle sans doute la forte (et légitime) polémique que la publication de
Jan Karskide Yannick Haenel¹ a suscitée il y a quelques années². Dans cette polémique, le reproche de falsification historique (concernant principalement l’entretien de Karski avec Roosevelt et l’arrière-plan idéologique de cet entretien) demeurait secondaire – le roman ne contrevenant pas frontalement aux acquis de l’historiographie sur le processus génocidaire : l’essentiel reposait sur le geste spectaculaire d’une usurpation d’identité (pas n’importe laquelle), et plus précisément dans le geste ventriloque de l’usurpation d’une voix. S’inscrivant dans le cadre de ce que je propose d’appeler “le roman istorique”³
Michon, Fleischer, Deville: from:
Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Vray Jean-Bernard
Abstract: J’entends par Terreur celle, à laquelle on se réfère par la majuscule, qui exerça en France du 10 août au 20 septembre 1792 (première Terreur) puis du 5 septembre 1793 jusqu’au 28 juillet un « mécanisme à relance indéfinie »⁵, et en laquelle Pierre Michon voit « l’ultime vérité de la Révolution »⁶. Elle met
La révolution du désir pendant Mai 68: from:
Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Tamassia Paolo
Abstract: Observateur pénétrant ou, selon certains, dissecteur cynique de l’âge contemporain, Michel Houellebecq estime nécessaire un regard historique rétrospectif pour comprendre le présent. L’un des axes principaux de son oeuvre romanesque vise à répondre à une question fondamentale : pourquoi en est-on arrivé à la situation présente ? Situation jugée catastrophique et sans issue. C’est la question que se posent plusieurs personnages des
Particules élémentaires¹, roman dont il s’agit dans cette étude. Si Houellebecq n’est pas le seul auteur contemporain qui se tourne vers le passé afin de comprendre l’état actuel des choses, plus rares sont les écrivains qui esquissent dans
Book Title: Il ritorno dei sentimenti- Publisher: Quodlibet
Author(s): Majorano Matteo
Abstract: Un “fantasma" sembra aggirarsi nella letteratura francese a partire dagli anni Cinquanta del Novecento e pare destinato a rimanere tale per mezzo secolo, con una latente e, poi, dagli anni Ottanta, con una più riconoscibile capacità di produrre nuove forme o nuovi contesti letterari. Il “fantasma dei sentimenti" da tempo attraversa inquieto le pagine della narrativa, finzionale o autofinzionale, di Francia. Alcuni potrebbero, d’altronde, ipotizzare che questo “spettro" sia stato una presenza attiva, un fermento vitale, seppure dapprima minoritario, sotterraneo e sommesso (ma, forse, neppure troppo clandestino), anche nel periodo più ostile all’espressione in letteratura dei sentimenti. L’inversione di tendenza, nel romanzo francese di questo primo decennio del XXI secolo, appare sempre più netta e riconoscibile e finanche, talvolta, egemonica, se non eccessiva, come spesso succede, quando l’albero è stato troppo piegato, in precedenza, con corde cerebrali e funi ideologiche, nella direzione opposta a quella genetica e costitutiva della scrittura. Quando, come e perché è iniziata questa “riapparizione" dei sentimenti nel romanzo? In quali esperienze significative di scrittura si è espressa e quali sono le varianti narrative che si sono imposte? Quali sono i rischi che il romanzo francese contemporaneo corre quando la ricerca e l’espressione dei sentimenti si fa, come accade oggi, in maniera tumultuosa e incontrollata, con una forte esigenza di originalità che ne temperi i rischi insiti nel sentimentalismo? È possibile una letteratura dell’equilibrio, una letteratura che possa vivere senza l’eccesso, una letteratura senza esasperazione, o per dirla diversamente uno spazio letterario liberato da questa eredità e, dunque, propositivo? Perché il sentimento, anche quello più esacerbato, resta anche un punto di equilibrio tra la leggerezza dell’emozione e la gravità della passione, che porta pure lo stesso nome.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1b7x7mr
La forza discreta dei sentimenti from:
Il ritorno dei sentimenti
Author(s) Majorano Matteo
Abstract: Quale spazio hanno effettivamente i sentimenti nella letteratura francese attuale? In che misura i sentimenti sono presenti e in che modo, qualora lo siano, hanno modificato la scrittura contemporanea d’Oltralpe?
La force discrète des sentiments from:
Il ritorno dei sentimenti
Author(s) Majorano Matteo
Abstract: Quel espace ont en effet les sentiments dans la littérature française actuelle? Dans quelle mesure sont-ils présents et, dans ce cas, de quelle manière ont-ils modifié l’écriture contemporaine transalpine?
L’adieu aux larmes from:
Il ritorno dei sentimenti
Author(s) Adam Philippe
Abstract: Il m’arrive encore bien plus souvent de n’éprouver que des sentiments d’agacement absurdes
Comment composer ses états d’âme? from:
Il ritorno dei sentimenti
Author(s) Senges Pierre
Abstract: Comme beaucoup de lecteurs, comme beaucoup d’entre vous sans doute, j’ai été émerveillé par les conférences, dites
conférences américaines, composées et prononcées par Italo Calvino en 1985 à l’université de Harvard. Émerveillement signifie dans les circonstances un plaisir intellectuel et physique, la certitude de parcourir des chemins familiers, d’un livre à l’autre et d’une bibliothèque à l’autre, mais aussi de confronter notre ignorance privée à des noms à peine connus et à des citations tirées d’un chapeau. Le plaisir est aussi un pressentiment s’il consiste à anticiper la lecture et à deviner le plus précisément possible le contenu des conférences
C. Oster, sentimentale per vocazione from:
Il ritorno dei sentimenti
Author(s) Pepe Salvatore
Abstract: Se è vero che la narrativa (diversamente da altre arti, basti pensare alle commedie hollywoodiane degli anni Trenta, Quaranta e Cinquanta, da Lubitsch a Capra, da Wilder a Edwards) ci ha abituato alla trattazione di sentimenti scellerati e impossibili, drammatici e distruttivi, violenti e mortali, Christian Oster ha saputo, come pochi altri autori contemporanei, descrivere il sentimento nelle sue varianti comiche e grottesche, incoerenti e “leggere” – ma non per questo meno incisive –, non tanto per le vicende narrate, in partenza sempre piuttosto cupe, quanto per la scrittura che le sottende. Dal suo primo romanzo,
Volleyball¹,del 1989, all’ultimoRoul²
C. Angot: from:
Il ritorno dei sentimenti
Author(s) Soldo Mariella
Abstract: Come cambia la scrittura dell’autrice nel corso del tempo? Soprattutto, come la struttura dei romanzi e lo stile condizionano l’elaborazione dei sentimenti? E, di conseguenza, l’evoluzione
Sentimenti di scarto. V. Ravalec o dell’esclusione. from:
Il ritorno dei sentimenti
Author(s) Falco Giusi Alessandra
Abstract: Se si pensa al margine, viene in mente l’immagine di una linea, di un bordo sottile che dà forma e chiude, una sorta di con-fine delimitato e al di là del quale non è opportuno né prudente andare. Una volta superata quella soglia, infatti, ci attende il segno dell’esclusione, con tutto il bagaglio di sentimenti contrastanti – e, qualche volta, condizionati dal politicamente corretto – che la parola si trascina dietro. Si diventa “marginali” come possono essere soltanto quelli che hanno fatto un passo all’interno del margine, o, perlomeno, in quello spazio che è solito essere identificato in questa maniera.
Disegnare i sentimenti: from:
Il ritorno dei sentimenti
Author(s) Rota Valerio
Abstract: Il romanzo grafico è indubbiamente un dominio delle letterature disegnate¹ che dedica ampio spazio ai sentimenti. I toni intimisti, le ambientazioni suburbane, la predilezione per le narrazioni e le interazioni di gente comune che lo hanno contraddistinto sin dalle sue origini (basti pensare al carattere delle tante opere di Will Eisner, passando per
Mausdi Art Spiegelman, fino ad arrivare ai più recenti lavori di Craig Thompson, Chester Brown, Daniel Clowes ed altri) costituiscono un terreno fertile per una “messa in scena delle passioni”.
Chapter III Not all things are destined for transience from:
Grand Hotel Abyss
Abstract: Let us dwell for a moment on the suggestive closing lines of the preceding chapter: the transformation of individualities into political subjects implies their having the ability to convert subjective gestures into manifestations of a trans-individual multiplicity of desires. Were that to be the case, political subjects could conceivable attain a historical density of such great proportions within social struggles that they would in effect become modes for the actualization of a past never entirely gone, and, subsequently, points of contact for experiences scattered throughout time. This is unequivocally grasped by Walter Benjamin, as evidenced in the following statement: History
Chapter VII Our time unlocks a multiplicity in each desire from:
Grand Hotel Abyss
Abstract: In Chapter III, we have seen how a proper conception of negativity demanded that any syntheses conducted within time be conceived in terms of
Introduction from:
Moments of Silence
Author(s) VATANABADI SHOULEH
Abstract: The term “Gulf War” never achieved an equivalent level of media saturation and buzzword ubiquity when employed to refer to the 2003 invasion of Iraq and subsequent events as it had a decade prior, when it referred to Operation Desert Storm and irrevocably conjured a certain set of wartime “documentary” images (Apache gun camera footage, Tomahawk missile launches) that Jean Baudrillard famously called an “atrocity masquerading as a war,” war’s simulacra.¹ What the terminology of the 2003 war did achieve, however, was the anointing of the 1990–1991 war as “First Gulf War,” a title hitherto held by the Iran-Iraq
1 Narratives of Borders and Beyond from:
Moments of Silence
Author(s) VATANABADI SHOULEH
Abstract: In a previous piece I wrote on the Iran-Iraq War (1980–1989)¹ I argued for the necessity of looking at this event not as an isolated moment fixed in time but as an experience within the continuum of temporality as formulated by Walter Benjamin, to point to the shifting and fluidity of times that connected the Iran-Iraq War with the U.S. invasion of Iraq. My argument in that paper also included the usefulness of cultural texts both literal and visual in narrating the experience of war as “a collective experience to which even the deepest shock of every individual experience
3 Treacherous Memory: from:
Moments of Silence
Author(s) RASTEGAR KAMRAN
Abstract: Questions of ideological dedication are perhaps most fraught within the context of war. Memory discourse, in particular on the memory of war and its traumas, is often a legitimating instrument in the contest to elaborate who serves as hero and who as traitor during the war and afterward. In post-revolutionary Iran, the onset of the Iran-Iraq War allowed for the articulation of new if shifting parameters for ideological commitment and heroism, as well as treachery or cowardice. The evolution of the “sacred defense” concept allowed for the most articulate elaboration of these binaries, and wartime and postwar cultural producers, bureaucrats,
12 Narratives of Silence: from:
Moments of Silence
Author(s) KHORRAMI MOHAMMAD MEHDI
Abstract: In a letter to F. Scott Fitzgerald, Ernest Hemingway called war “the writer’s best subject.” Hemingway justified this description by saying that “[War] groups the maximum of material and speeds up the action and brings out all sorts of stuff that normally you have to wait a lifetime to get.”¹ Keeping in mind the notion of dramatic license, he was probably right. And considering the fact that in the past few centuries the Persian literary tradition has had many chances to experience this “best subject,” it is reasonable to expect that many great works of Persian war literature have been
Book Title: Nowhere in the Middle Ages- Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): LOCHRIE KARMA
Abstract: Drawing on a range of contemporary scholarship on utopianism and a broad premodern archive, Lochrie charts variant utopian strains in medieval literature and philosophy that diverge from More's work and at the same time plot uncanny connections with it. Examining works such as Macrobius's fifth-century
Commentary on the Dream of Scipio,Mandeville's Travels, and William Langland'sPiers Plowman, she finds evidence of a number of utopian drives, including the rejection of European centrality, a desire for more egalitarian politics, and a rethinking of the division between animals and humans.Nowhere in the Middle Agesinsists on the relevance and transformative potential of medieval utopias for More's work and positions the sixteenth-century text as one alternative in a broader historical phenomenon of utopian thinking. Tracing medieval utopianisms forward in literary history to reveal their influences on early modern and modern literature and philosophy, Lochrie demonstrates that looking backward, we might extend future horizons of utopian thinking.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1bmzkpm
CHAPTER 1 Nowhere Earth: from:
Nowhere in the Middle Ages
Abstract: This story of utopia begins in reverie and cosmography. The last chapter of Cicero’s treatise,
De republica, recounts Scipio Africanus’s dream that he is transported from his native Rome and earth to the heavenly spheres. From this interstellar perch he is transported again, only this time, affectively, by wonder at the grandeur of the heavenly spheres and shame at the comparative meanness of earth and diminution of Rome’s imperial reach. Scipio’s humility becomes the prerequisite for the text’s meditation on a world dedicated to justice and service of the commonwealth. Johannes Kepler, too, in hisSomnium, sive astronomia lunae, Dream,
CHAPTER 2 Somewhere in the Middle Ages: from:
Nowhere in the Middle Ages
Abstract: “Everyone living at the end of the Middle Ages had heard of Cokaygne at one time or another,” writes Herman Pleij about the Dutch tradition of the Land of Cokaygne.¹ If this is true, medieval Europeans would have known it by its different names, “Cokaygne” (British Isles), “Bengodi” (Italy), “Cucagna” (France) “Jauja” (Spain), “Schlaraffenland” (Germany), and “Luilekkerland” (the Netherlands). With respect to the utopian tradition, however, as A. L. Morton, the Marxist scholar of English utopianism, wrote, the Land of Cokaygne survives “as an almost secret tradition under the surface, while the mainstream of utopian thought passed through other channels.”²
CHAPTER 3 Provincializing Medieval Europe: from:
Nowhere in the Middle Ages
Abstract: The world of John Mandeville is far removed from the land of Cokaygne’s island paradise except insofar as it provides a narrative account of his travels to distant and fabulous places. Its utopianism, oddly enough, has more in common with the
Dream of Scipioand Macrobius’sCommentarythan it does with theLand of Cokaygne, because of its cosmopolitanism, which bears a kinship with that “geography of reduced significance” in the dream. Mandeville’s cosmopolitanism shares with Cicero’s text and Macrobius’s commentary the desire to dismantle the geopolitical “centrisms” of their times, if you will—of Rome in Scipio’s dream and
CHAPTER 5 Reading Forward: from:
Nowhere in the Middle Ages
Abstract: Utopia, for all its playful allusiveness to “no-place,” comes from someplace, or rather from some places and not others. Like the chimerical centaur, it is a complex idea composed of an assemblage of other ideas and, at the same time, it engages with and responds to historical realities. But it is also entirely new, and the fact that Thomas More coined a self-canceling name for the island and the political idea associated with it tends to function somewhat like King Utopus’s moat, cordoning off that idea from the continent from which it might have come, either directly or indirectly. The
Introduction from:
Crossing the Rubicon: The Borderlands of Philosophy and Theology
Author(s) FARLEY MATTHEW
Abstract: In June of 2013, I went to Paris to study
Passer le Rubiconwith Emmanuel Falque (there was at that time no English translation—a want that Reuben Shank here patiently redresses). Gladly, we held many of our conferences in the environs of Jardin du Luxembourg at theCafé Doucet, cornerwise from the L’institut catholique de Paris, where Falque was, at the time, Dean of Philosophy. In one of those meetings over a Kronenbourg, Falque impressed upon me his respect for the integrity of the unbeliever. After all, the unbeliever these days, Falque explained, is no longer Dante’s contemptuous Farinata,
1 Is Hermeneutics Fundamental? from:
Crossing the Rubicon: The Borderlands of Philosophy and Theology
Abstract: In this crossing of the Rubicon, the trumpets first sound in homage to Ricoeur. Yet I will conclude with an accepted and even affirmed gap between his hermeneutics and the approach advanced here. Any tribute to a master must refl ect his greatness as well as his limitations, at least in the context of a legacy to be both received and transformed. Of course, one could proceed with pure and simple repetition. Ricoeur’s concept of distanciation, however, may be productive at this juncture, prompting the declaration that the times have changed and that one must orient oneself anew. After all,the
3 Always Believing from:
Crossing the Rubicon: The Borderlands of Philosophy and Theology
Abstract: It was necessary to interpret (Part I). It is now time to decide (Part II). The hermeneutic
of the body and the voice, which I have named Catholic, opens unto “a phenomenology of believing” that grounds it. Where hermeneutics drew outmeaning, albeit anchored in the body rather than in the text, phenomenology describes amodeof being-there rooted in believing. The experience of being-there and believing sends us back first to a human community. As we just underlined, ecclesiality opens a space for the Eucharistically incorporated voice, which gives a concrete body to the body—the church—empowered by the force
5 “Tiling” and Conversion from:
Crossing the Rubicon: The Borderlands of Philosophy and Theology
Abstract: The pathway from hermeneutics in Part I to belief in Part II, or from interpreting to deciding, opened a space for a philosophy of religious experience that was not content with a philosophy of religion. The importance of the kerygma calls for the rediscovery or reestablishment of an act of philosophizing, as proved by Pascal and Kierkegaard in their day, for which the experience of believing is not dismissed as a matter of course. In this Part III, the time has come to formalize what this essay on the boundaries between philosophy and theology truly aims to express from the
6 Finally Theology from:
Crossing the Rubicon: The Borderlands of Philosophy and Theology
Abstract: “Finally theology.” A theologian should utter this phrase—not a philosopher. One could fear that the great crossing fi nally had no other goal than to push us across the ford, as if the crossing of the Rubicon signified only the time of an Iliad without an Odyssey. Yet my principal thesis is that the two-way journey, there and back again with a definite return, is necessary to give each riverbank its specificity. I am first of all a philosopher and want to remain one. I am all the more committed to remaining a philosopher after having engaged in a
Introduction from:
Crossing the Rubicon: The Borderlands of Philosophy and Theology
Author(s) FARLEY MATTHEW
Abstract: In June of 2013, I went to Paris to study
Passer le Rubiconwith Emmanuel Falque (there was at that time no English translation—a want that Reuben Shank here patiently redresses). Gladly, we held many of our conferences in the environs of Jardin du Luxembourg at theCafé Doucet, cornerwise from the L’institut catholique de Paris, where Falque was, at the time, Dean of Philosophy. In one of those meetings over a Kronenbourg, Falque impressed upon me his respect for the integrity of the unbeliever. After all, the unbeliever these days, Falque explained, is no longer Dante’s contemptuous Farinata,
1 Is Hermeneutics Fundamental? from:
Crossing the Rubicon: The Borderlands of Philosophy and Theology
Abstract: In this crossing of the Rubicon, the trumpets first sound in homage to Ricoeur. Yet I will conclude with an accepted and even affirmed gap between his hermeneutics and the approach advanced here. Any tribute to a master must refl ect his greatness as well as his limitations, at least in the context of a legacy to be both received and transformed. Of course, one could proceed with pure and simple repetition. Ricoeur’s concept of distanciation, however, may be productive at this juncture, prompting the declaration that the times have changed and that one must orient oneself anew. After all,the
3 Always Believing from:
Crossing the Rubicon: The Borderlands of Philosophy and Theology
Abstract: It was necessary to interpret (Part I). It is now time to decide (Part II). The hermeneutic
of the body and the voice, which I have named Catholic, opens unto “a phenomenology of believing” that grounds it. Where hermeneutics drew outmeaning, albeit anchored in the body rather than in the text, phenomenology describes amodeof being-there rooted in believing. The experience of being-there and believing sends us back first to a human community. As we just underlined, ecclesiality opens a space for the Eucharistically incorporated voice, which gives a concrete body to the body—the church—empowered by the force
5 “Tiling” and Conversion from:
Crossing the Rubicon: The Borderlands of Philosophy and Theology
Abstract: The pathway from hermeneutics in Part I to belief in Part II, or from interpreting to deciding, opened a space for a philosophy of religious experience that was not content with a philosophy of religion. The importance of the kerygma calls for the rediscovery or reestablishment of an act of philosophizing, as proved by Pascal and Kierkegaard in their day, for which the experience of believing is not dismissed as a matter of course. In this Part III, the time has come to formalize what this essay on the boundaries between philosophy and theology truly aims to express from the
6 Finally Theology from:
Crossing the Rubicon: The Borderlands of Philosophy and Theology
Abstract: “Finally theology.” A theologian should utter this phrase—not a philosopher. One could fear that the great crossing fi nally had no other goal than to push us across the ford, as if the crossing of the Rubicon signified only the time of an Iliad without an Odyssey. Yet my principal thesis is that the two-way journey, there and back again with a definite return, is necessary to give each riverbank its specificity. I am first of all a philosopher and want to remain one. I am all the more committed to remaining a philosopher after having engaged in a
Introduction from:
Crossing the Rubicon: The Borderlands of Philosophy and Theology
Author(s) FARLEY MATTHEW
Abstract: In June of 2013, I went to Paris to study
Passer le Rubiconwith Emmanuel Falque (there was at that time no English translation—a want that Reuben Shank here patiently redresses). Gladly, we held many of our conferences in the environs of Jardin du Luxembourg at theCafé Doucet, cornerwise from the L’institut catholique de Paris, where Falque was, at the time, Dean of Philosophy. In one of those meetings over a Kronenbourg, Falque impressed upon me his respect for the integrity of the unbeliever. After all, the unbeliever these days, Falque explained, is no longer Dante’s contemptuous Farinata,
1 Is Hermeneutics Fundamental? from:
Crossing the Rubicon: The Borderlands of Philosophy and Theology
Abstract: In this crossing of the Rubicon, the trumpets first sound in homage to Ricoeur. Yet I will conclude with an accepted and even affirmed gap between his hermeneutics and the approach advanced here. Any tribute to a master must refl ect his greatness as well as his limitations, at least in the context of a legacy to be both received and transformed. Of course, one could proceed with pure and simple repetition. Ricoeur’s concept of distanciation, however, may be productive at this juncture, prompting the declaration that the times have changed and that one must orient oneself anew. After all,the
3 Always Believing from:
Crossing the Rubicon: The Borderlands of Philosophy and Theology
Abstract: It was necessary to interpret (Part I). It is now time to decide (Part II). The hermeneutic
of the body and the voice, which I have named Catholic, opens unto “a phenomenology of believing” that grounds it. Where hermeneutics drew outmeaning, albeit anchored in the body rather than in the text, phenomenology describes amodeof being-there rooted in believing. The experience of being-there and believing sends us back first to a human community. As we just underlined, ecclesiality opens a space for the Eucharistically incorporated voice, which gives a concrete body to the body—the church—empowered by the force
5 “Tiling” and Conversion from:
Crossing the Rubicon: The Borderlands of Philosophy and Theology
Abstract: The pathway from hermeneutics in Part I to belief in Part II, or from interpreting to deciding, opened a space for a philosophy of religious experience that was not content with a philosophy of religion. The importance of the kerygma calls for the rediscovery or reestablishment of an act of philosophizing, as proved by Pascal and Kierkegaard in their day, for which the experience of believing is not dismissed as a matter of course. In this Part III, the time has come to formalize what this essay on the boundaries between philosophy and theology truly aims to express from the
6 Finally Theology from:
Crossing the Rubicon: The Borderlands of Philosophy and Theology
Abstract: “Finally theology.” A theologian should utter this phrase—not a philosopher. One could fear that the great crossing fi nally had no other goal than to push us across the ford, as if the crossing of the Rubicon signified only the time of an Iliad without an Odyssey. Yet my principal thesis is that the two-way journey, there and back again with a definite return, is necessary to give each riverbank its specificity. I am first of all a philosopher and want to remain one. I am all the more committed to remaining a philosopher after having engaged in a
Benjamin’s Natural Theology from:
Walter Benjamin and Theology
Author(s) CAYGILL HOWARD
Abstract: One of Benjamin’s more unexpected citations can be found in his letter to his friend Gershom Scholem, dated Paris June 12, 1938. As far as I am aware it is the only time that he cites at length from a Gifford Lecture, the distinguished series founded in 1888 and intended “to promote and diffuse the study of natural philosophy in the widest sense of the term—in other words, the knowledge of God.” I am referring to the citation from Arthur Stanley Eddington’s influential presentation of the revolutionary advances in early twentieth century cosmology (the theory of relativity and subatomic
Walter Benjamin and Christian Critical Ethics—A Comment from:
Walter Benjamin and Theology
Author(s) HAKER HILLE
Abstract: As enigmatic as it is at times, Walter Benjamin’s retrieval of Jewish theological language has perhaps done more for postwar German Christian theology than it could do for itself after the Holocaust, even though, admittedly, only a few theologians marked the Holocaust as a radical rupture of their tradition.¹ My reading of Benjamin engages specifically with two texts: “Critique of Violence” and “Theological-Political Fragment.”² I will demonstrate how an analysis sensitive to theological concepts may further inform a reading of Benjamin’s essays, before turning to Johann Baptist Metz’s reinterpretation of Christian theology as a new political theology. By linking the
Book Title: The Adventures of Jonathan Dennis-Bicultural Film Archiving Practice in Aotearoa New Zealand
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Kelly Emma Jean
Abstract: Jonathan Dennis (1953-2002), was the creative and talented founding director of the New Zealand Film Archive. As a Pakeha (non-Maori/indigenous New Zealander) with a strong sense of social justice, Dennis became a conduit for tension and debate over the preservation and presentation of indigenous and non-indigenous film archival materials from the time the Archive opened in 1981. His work resulted in a film archive and curatorship practice which differed significantly from that of the North American and European archives he originally sought to emulate. He supported a philosophical shift in archival practice by engaging indigenous peoples in developing creative and innovative exhibitions from the 1980s until his death, recognizing that much of the expertise required to work with archival materials rested with the communities outside archival walls. This book presents new interviews gathered by the author, as well as an examination of existing interviews, films and broadcasts about and with Jonathan Dennis, to consider the narrative of a life and work in relation to film archiving.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1bmzn6b
Chapter 2 The practice of the archive from:
The Adventures of Jonathan Dennis
Abstract: The cultural practice of archiving physical materials in dedicated institutions emerges from European museums and libraries and is adapted by film archives, which over time have developed their own styles most appropriate to the media which they house. In examining the literature on the physical archive it becomes quickly apparent that at times the pragmatic everyday aspects of archiving can seem very far removed from the more philosophical discussion, and that archivists may be under-resourced and overworked to the point where they take for granted the perspectives which ingrain their practice. The divide between the everyday work and the philosophical
Chapter 3 Jonathan SpencerDennis and the early years from:
The Adventures of Jonathan Dennis
Abstract: Barry Barclay described Jonathan Dennis’ work and his “stumbling prescience back in the first years …” which “… showed, at least in film archive circles, certainly in this country and perhaps internationally too, how he was much ahead of his time” (Barclay, 2005 p. 107). Conal McCarthy’s text,
Museums and Māori: Heritage Professionals Indigenous Collections Current Practice(2011) also briefly commented on Dennis’ work during the early 1980s which he said “demonstrated through an active public programme and community outreach how a small cultural organisation such as the archive could begin to take on board Māori values and practices” (McCarthy
Book Title: Moving Images-From Edison to the Webcam
Publisher: John Libbey Publishing
Author(s): Widding Astrid Söderbergh
Abstract: The 17 previously unpublished essays in Moving Images represent the best of current research in the history of this field. They make a timely and stimulating contribution to debates concerning the impact of new media on the history of cinema.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1bmzn7v
Video Pleasure and Narrative Cinema: from:
Moving Images
Author(s) Buckland Warren
Abstract: Jerome Bruner reminds us that narrative is not a contingent, optional dimension of society, but is an essential, ecologically necessary structure with which individuals make sense of social complexity.² We do not need to subscribe to ontological structuralism – which argues that narrative is a timeless structure that transcends society – to accept this level-headed reminder. In the process of structuring social experience, narrative necessarily reinvents itself in each epoch, offering an historically specific experience. Fredric Jameson’s analysis of the novels of Balzac and Conrad is exemplary in this respect. Jameson identifies in the narrative narrative
The Interactive Filmmaker’s Challenge from:
Moving Images
Author(s) Hales Christopher
Abstract: The earliest cinema of Méliès and Lumière has more than once been likened to the current state-of-the-art interactive ‘new media’, and more specifically to non-linear interactive movies. Implicit in this observation is the fact that the sophistication of interactive movie language is awaiting the passage of time and the development of technology before it matures. It has been frequently noted that computers are still waiting for the first great visionary genius to take us into a new dimension.
2 Nationalizing attractions from:
Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) Auerbach Jonathan
Abstract: Like most of us, I manage to wear more than one academic hat, having been trained in literary analysis, which I continue to pursue, along with my research in early cinema for the past decade or so, with American studies serving as something like a bridge between these two very different modes of representation, the verbal and the visual. Given the pressure to be “interdisciplinary” (whatever that means, exactly), I tried at first to combine these two interests, but have since learned the hard way that it is sometimes best to keep your hats separate. Attempting to import key operational
7 Living Canada: from:
Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) Keil Charlie
Abstract: Distinctively in the Western world, Canada’s identity as a nation was forged at the same moment as technologies of mechanized reproduction became prevalent. Early cinema, indeed, assumed a privileged place in defining Canada to its inhabitants and to the larger world. No set of texts reinforces cinema’s role in the formative nation-building exercise more clearly than the changing program of film series known as
Living Canada, first exhibited in 1903. Living Canada offers a revealing example of the ways in which film was employed to envision and give form to concepts of nation at that crucial time before World War
14 Fights of Nations and national fights from:
Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) Mayer David
Abstract: My subject, a brief film shot for American Mutoscope & Biograph (AM&B) by Billy Bitzer, initially attracted me because four of the six episodes are cleverly choreographed variety stage acts – i.e. theatrical vaudeville sketches – restaged for the camera. Each sketch is undeniably abridged, but not otherwise altered: filmed straight-on in what appear to be single takes, the camera set-ups and lighting (or exposures) sometimes differ for different episodes. As a theater historian aware of how many scraps of the Victorian theater – narratives, genres, staging, effects – can be recovered from early film, I scour these films for evidential remnants, and Fights
15 Japan on American screens, 1908–1915 from:
Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) Waller Gregory A.
Abstract: Japan invaded the United States sometime in May 1910. Or at least that is what a
Moving Picture Worldeditorial claimed in its 28 May 1910 issue, as it contemplated a forthcoming release entitled,Love of Chrysanthemum.Moving Picture Worldreadily identified this Vitagraph film as yet one more refashioning ofMadame Butterfly, that is, a contemporary story in which an ill-fated, cross-cultural and inter-racial romance between a Japanese woman and an American man ends with her suicide. For this preeminent American trade magazine, the “Japanese Invasion” was not literally a matter of spies, immigrants, or imported goods, and not
16 Nationalist film-going without Canadian-made films? from:
Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) Moore Paul S.
Abstract: In urban, English Canada, the First World War was a significant marker of Canadian independence, maturing into a nation after British colonial adolescence. In defense of the British motherland, Canada found its national pride. This is especially applicable to Ontario, where stalwart Loyalist patriotism and a remarkable volunteerism signaled how Toronto would eventually eclipse Montreal culturally, industrially and economically as the national metropolis, having already done so in fact in the war effort.¹ But a Toronto-centric Canadian nation would never have that metropolis as a sentimental focus, neither as the heartland of a folk or an avant-garde culture, nor even
21 Spanish lecturers and their relations with the national from:
Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) Sánchez-Salas Daniel
Abstract: This essay addresses the question of how the concept of the national provides a context for the work of the Spanish lecturer in early cinema. As is well known, previous studies have always stressed that the film lecturer was responsible for mediating between the screen and viewers, for whom, at least in the beginning, moving pictures were something strange.¹ Also we should not forget that he was dealing with a specific public, determined not only by the period of time, but also by the location. Generally, histories of early cinema have analysed film lecturing from a local perspective. In the
28 European melodramas and World War I: from:
Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) Andrin Muriel
Abstract: The present essay is an attempt to set the bases for a theory of trans-national identity based on philosopher Paul Ricoeur’s discussion of
mimesisin his seminal three-volume collection of essays,Time and Narrative.¹ Having re-read Ricoeur on several occasions, we have come to the conclusion that his discussion of the dichotomynarrated time/historical time, which draws on Aristotle, quite surprisingly fits the contents and style of several European films from the early 1910s.
Chapter 9 French Foreign and Defence Policy: from:
The French Exception
Author(s) Bryant Janet
Abstract: This chapter examines the notion of exceptionalism in the context of French foreign and defence policy in the Fifth Republic. The idea that France is exceptional in this area of policy has been characterised by the plethora of adjectives such as different, unusual, unconventional, distinctive and sometimes even maverick, that are often used when describing French actions. To what extent does it really make sense to talk about French exceptionalism in foreign and defence policy? Might it be argued, rather, that this term is particularly difficult to apply to an area of ‘high’ policy where every state will be seeking
Book Title: Narration, Identity, and Historical Consciousness- Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Straub Jürgen
Abstract: A generally acknowledged characteristic of modern life, namely the temporalization of experience, inextricable from our intensified experience of contingency and difference, has until now remained largely outside psychology's purview. Wherever questions about the development, structure, and function of the concept of time have been posed - for example by Piaget and other founders of genetic structuralism - they have been concerned predominantly with concepts of "physical", chronometrical time, and related concepts (e.g., "velocity"). All the contributions to the present volume attempt to close this gap. A larger number are especially interested in the narration of stories. Overviews of the relevant literature, as well as empirical case studies, appear alongside theoretical and methodological reflections. Most contributions refer to specifically historical phenomena and meaning-constructions. Some touch on the subjects of biographical memory and biographical constructions of reality. Of all the various affinities between the contributions collected here, the most important is their consistent attention to issues of the constitution and representation of temporal experience.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1btbw85
CHAPTER 6 The Concept of Time and the Faculty of Judgment in the Ontogenesis of Historical Consciousness from:
Narration, Identity, and Historical Consciousness
Author(s) Brumlik Micha
Abstract: Historical consciousness originally appeared in human beings, from both the phylogenetic and the ontogenetic perspective, as narrative consciousness. Even myths and cosmologies embedded in a cyclical conception of time require narratives, accounts of things, actions, and events connected with adverbial particles such as “before” and “after,” “later” and “earlier,” “in the beginning” and “in the end.”
Book Title: Narration, Identity, and Historical Consciousness- Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Straub Jürgen
Abstract: A generally acknowledged characteristic of modern life, namely the temporalization of experience, inextricable from our intensified experience of contingency and difference, has until now remained largely outside psychology's purview. Wherever questions about the development, structure, and function of the concept of time have been posed - for example by Piaget and other founders of genetic structuralism - they have been concerned predominantly with concepts of "physical", chronometrical time, and related concepts (e.g., "velocity"). All the contributions to the present volume attempt to close this gap. A larger number are especially interested in the narration of stories. Overviews of the relevant literature, as well as empirical case studies, appear alongside theoretical and methodological reflections. Most contributions refer to specifically historical phenomena and meaning-constructions. Some touch on the subjects of biographical memory and biographical constructions of reality. Of all the various affinities between the contributions collected here, the most important is their consistent attention to issues of the constitution and representation of temporal experience.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1btbw85
CHAPTER 6 The Concept of Time and the Faculty of Judgment in the Ontogenesis of Historical Consciousness from:
Narration, Identity, and Historical Consciousness
Author(s) Brumlik Micha
Abstract: Historical consciousness originally appeared in human beings, from both the phylogenetic and the ontogenetic perspective, as narrative consciousness. Even myths and cosmologies embedded in a cyclical conception of time require narratives, accounts of things, actions, and events connected with adverbial particles such as “before” and “after,” “later” and “earlier,” “in the beginning” and “in the end.”
Book Title: Narration, Identity, and Historical Consciousness- Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Straub Jürgen
Abstract: A generally acknowledged characteristic of modern life, namely the temporalization of experience, inextricable from our intensified experience of contingency and difference, has until now remained largely outside psychology's purview. Wherever questions about the development, structure, and function of the concept of time have been posed - for example by Piaget and other founders of genetic structuralism - they have been concerned predominantly with concepts of "physical", chronometrical time, and related concepts (e.g., "velocity"). All the contributions to the present volume attempt to close this gap. A larger number are especially interested in the narration of stories. Overviews of the relevant literature, as well as empirical case studies, appear alongside theoretical and methodological reflections. Most contributions refer to specifically historical phenomena and meaning-constructions. Some touch on the subjects of biographical memory and biographical constructions of reality. Of all the various affinities between the contributions collected here, the most important is their consistent attention to issues of the constitution and representation of temporal experience.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1btbw85
CHAPTER 6 The Concept of Time and the Faculty of Judgment in the Ontogenesis of Historical Consciousness from:
Narration, Identity, and Historical Consciousness
Author(s) Brumlik Micha
Abstract: Historical consciousness originally appeared in human beings, from both the phylogenetic and the ontogenetic perspective, as narrative consciousness. Even myths and cosmologies embedded in a cyclical conception of time require narratives, accounts of things, actions, and events connected with adverbial particles such as “before” and “after,” “later” and “earlier,” “in the beginning” and “in the end.”
Book Title: Sartre Against Stalinism- Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Birchall Ian H.
Abstract: Most critics of the political evolution of Jean-Paul Sartre have laid emphasis on his allegedly sympathetic and uncritical attitude to Stalinist Communism due, to a large extent, to their equation of Marxism with Stalinism. It is true that Sartre was guilty of many serious misjudgements with regard to the USSR and the French Communist Party. But his relationship with the Marxist Left was much more complex and co tradictory than most accounts admit. This book offers a political defence of Sartre and shows how, from a relatively apolitical stance in the 1930s, Sartre became increasingly involved in the politics of the Left; though he always distrusted Stalinism, he was sometimes driven to ally himself with it because of the force of its argument.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1btbwzh
Chapter One Microhistorical Anthropology: from:
Critical Junctions
Author(s) Handelman Don
Abstract: The relationship between anthropology and history is one of inequality. This is no less so for the relationship between anthropology and microhistory. History, one of the noble disciplines in the “history” of Western thought, has as an emblem the muse, Clio. Anthropology has anyone who at times is everyone, at times someone, so often nameless and unvoiced. In their relationship, anthropology is the junior partner, a Johnny-come-lately to the professional telling of pastness within intellectual worlds whose denizens believe in the existence and importance of the time-depths of history, probably since these also are perceived as the sources of knowledge.
Chapter Five “Bare Legs Like Ice”: from:
Critical Junctions
Author(s) Kalb Don
Abstract: Few serious social researchers would deny the inescapability of pondering the conundrum of class—a conundrum because, while steadily contested, politically compromised, and conceptually inflated, the unsettling suspicion keeps surfacing that class involves inequality, power, culture, exploitation, accumulation, struggle and action, being in history and the making of history, being in place and the making of space, all in the same moment. Class, power, time, and space together form a huge program that has haunted social inquiry since Marx. Disciplined social science, on the other hand, has been a recurrent escape from its embrace, and understandably so, since it is
Book Title: Recollections of France-Memories, Identities and Heritage in Contemporary France
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Picard Jeanine
Abstract: Since the 1980s, France has experienced a vigorous revival of interest in its past and cultural heritage. This has been expressed as part of a movement of remembering through museums and festivals as well as via elaborate commemorations, most notably those held to celebrate the bi-centenary of the Revolution in 1989 and can be interpreted as part of a re-examinaton of what it means to be French in the context of ongoing Europeanization. This study brings together scholars from multidisciplinary backgrounds and engages them in debate with professionals from France, who are working in the fields of museology, heritage and cultural production. Addressing subjects such as war and memory, gastronomy and regional identity, maritime culture and urban societies, they throw fresh light on the process by which France has been conceptualized and packaged as a cultural object.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1btbxwz
1 RECONSTRUCTING THE PAST: from:
Recollections of France
Author(s) Jenkins Brian
Abstract: For a long time the writing of French history was profoundly influenced by what are now referred to as ‘grand narratives’, which structured our perceptions of the national past. The concern to tell a convincing and coherent story, to make history intelligible and relevant to the present, led historians from a variety of schools and disciplines to focus on the
longue durée, to seek out the underlying processes of change, often linked to notions of social progress, and to invest history with an inherent and unfolding logic.
2 RECALLING THE PAST AND RECREATING IT: from:
Recollections of France
Author(s) Reynolds Siân
Abstract: Is it true, as Pierre Nora claimed in 1984, that memory becomes precious just when it vanishes? ‘On ne parle tant de mémoire que parce qu’il n’y en a plus’. What he seems to mean is not that individuals have forgotten their own past, but that collective repositories of memory – such as the French
paysans– have been destroyed or scattered by devastating and rapid change in recent times. Memory as something magical, often tied to physical objects, rituals or sensations, can be contrasted as it is by Nora, with history, which implies critical reflection: memory is poetry, history
4 PUBLIC HISTORY AND THE ‘HISTORIAL’ PROJECT, 1986–1998 from:
Recollections of France
Author(s) Winter Jay
Abstract: My subject is public history, history outside the academy, linking historians to the broad population interested – sometimes passionately interested – in historical inquiry. Public history is defined by this extension of the domain within which the scholar operates. The audience for historical literature defines the discipline as much as the professional credentials of the practitioner. Public history is thus an attempt to flee from the increasing specialisation and decreasing readership of professional academic work, both in journals and in monograph form. It is also a recognition that historical scholarship is intrinsically tied to concepts of educating the public, and
6 CONSTRUCTION OF A BRETON MARITIME HERITAGE: from:
Recollections of France
Author(s) Péron Françoise
Abstract: It is fairly common in France to speculate as to why it has taken such a long time to recognise the importance of preserving and promoting the heritage linked to France’s maritime past. This slow awakening applies to harbours and quaysides, rope-works, military dockyards as well as merchant craft, naval vessels and fishing fleets. The French, compared to the British or the Dutch, have in the past shown only a sporadic interest in the 4,500 kilometres of coastline which circumscribe their metropolitan territory. For the French, their country has been first and foremost a land mass: its coastal regions were
7 HERITAGE AND HISTORY: from:
Recollections of France
Author(s) Chappé François
Abstract: By definition, and this is the only definition possible, heritage is a human activity with a universal application in time
8 HIDDEN REEFS: from:
Recollections of France
Author(s) Picard Jeanine
Abstract: It may seem paradoxical to select a failed venture in a small Breton coastal town as an illustration of the enthusiasm felt by the French for maritime heritage at the present time. Yet the present case study seeks to illustrate some of the dangers, shortcomings and excesses related to maritime heritage, already highlighted by Françoise Péron (see Chapter 6) and by François Chappé (Chapter 7). This chapter examines the conflicts and contradictions which arose between interested parties in the political, economic, cultural and social fields when a new heritage structure was hurriedly set up in the 1990s in Douarnenez. We
10 A MARKET CULTURE: from:
Recollections of France
Author(s) Marchenay Philippe
Abstract: There is no better example of the interaction between the heritage movement and the socio-economic interests of modern French agriculture than that of the so-called
produits de terroir. The termproduits de terroiritself is notoriously difficult to define, but it is perhaps best described as traditional ‘local agricultural products and foodstuffs’ (English official rendering) whose qualities cross time and space and are anchored in a specific place and history. Products such asEpoisses de Bourgogneorfoie grasare defined by the fact that they depend on the shared savoir-faire of a given community and its culture. These products,
12 FAST FORWARD TO THE FUTURE? from:
Recollections of France
Author(s) Milner Susan
Abstract: The task of defining urban identities seems to be more necessary than ever at a time of massive socio-economic upheaval and residential mobility, and as the relationship between the local, national (itself undergoing redefinition) and international is changing. There are important political, economic and social reasons for defining specific urban identities. The political reasons relate to successive urban regeneration initiatives since the early 1980s as well as decentralisation laws dating from the same period. Economic regeneration has a marked regional and local aspect, particularly since decentralisation, as mayors compete for business location and state funding on the basis of local
Book Title: Recollections of France-Memories, Identities and Heritage in Contemporary France
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Picard Jeanine
Abstract: Since the 1980s, France has experienced a vigorous revival of interest in its past and cultural heritage. This has been expressed as part of a movement of remembering through museums and festivals as well as via elaborate commemorations, most notably those held to celebrate the bi-centenary of the Revolution in 1989 and can be interpreted as part of a re-examinaton of what it means to be French in the context of ongoing Europeanization. This study brings together scholars from multidisciplinary backgrounds and engages them in debate with professionals from France, who are working in the fields of museology, heritage and cultural production. Addressing subjects such as war and memory, gastronomy and regional identity, maritime culture and urban societies, they throw fresh light on the process by which France has been conceptualized and packaged as a cultural object.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1btbxwz
1 RECONSTRUCTING THE PAST: from:
Recollections of France
Author(s) Jenkins Brian
Abstract: For a long time the writing of French history was profoundly influenced by what are now referred to as ‘grand narratives’, which structured our perceptions of the national past. The concern to tell a convincing and coherent story, to make history intelligible and relevant to the present, led historians from a variety of schools and disciplines to focus on the
longue durée, to seek out the underlying processes of change, often linked to notions of social progress, and to invest history with an inherent and unfolding logic.
2 RECALLING THE PAST AND RECREATING IT: from:
Recollections of France
Author(s) Reynolds Siân
Abstract: Is it true, as Pierre Nora claimed in 1984, that memory becomes precious just when it vanishes? ‘On ne parle tant de mémoire que parce qu’il n’y en a plus’. What he seems to mean is not that individuals have forgotten their own past, but that collective repositories of memory – such as the French
paysans– have been destroyed or scattered by devastating and rapid change in recent times. Memory as something magical, often tied to physical objects, rituals or sensations, can be contrasted as it is by Nora, with history, which implies critical reflection: memory is poetry, history
4 PUBLIC HISTORY AND THE ‘HISTORIAL’ PROJECT, 1986–1998 from:
Recollections of France
Author(s) Winter Jay
Abstract: My subject is public history, history outside the academy, linking historians to the broad population interested – sometimes passionately interested – in historical inquiry. Public history is defined by this extension of the domain within which the scholar operates. The audience for historical literature defines the discipline as much as the professional credentials of the practitioner. Public history is thus an attempt to flee from the increasing specialisation and decreasing readership of professional academic work, both in journals and in monograph form. It is also a recognition that historical scholarship is intrinsically tied to concepts of educating the public, and
6 CONSTRUCTION OF A BRETON MARITIME HERITAGE: from:
Recollections of France
Author(s) Péron Françoise
Abstract: It is fairly common in France to speculate as to why it has taken such a long time to recognise the importance of preserving and promoting the heritage linked to France’s maritime past. This slow awakening applies to harbours and quaysides, rope-works, military dockyards as well as merchant craft, naval vessels and fishing fleets. The French, compared to the British or the Dutch, have in the past shown only a sporadic interest in the 4,500 kilometres of coastline which circumscribe their metropolitan territory. For the French, their country has been first and foremost a land mass: its coastal regions were
7 HERITAGE AND HISTORY: from:
Recollections of France
Author(s) Chappé François
Abstract: By definition, and this is the only definition possible, heritage is a human activity with a universal application in time
8 HIDDEN REEFS: from:
Recollections of France
Author(s) Picard Jeanine
Abstract: It may seem paradoxical to select a failed venture in a small Breton coastal town as an illustration of the enthusiasm felt by the French for maritime heritage at the present time. Yet the present case study seeks to illustrate some of the dangers, shortcomings and excesses related to maritime heritage, already highlighted by Françoise Péron (see Chapter 6) and by François Chappé (Chapter 7). This chapter examines the conflicts and contradictions which arose between interested parties in the political, economic, cultural and social fields when a new heritage structure was hurriedly set up in the 1990s in Douarnenez. We
10 A MARKET CULTURE: from:
Recollections of France
Author(s) Marchenay Philippe
Abstract: There is no better example of the interaction between the heritage movement and the socio-economic interests of modern French agriculture than that of the so-called
produits de terroir. The termproduits de terroiritself is notoriously difficult to define, but it is perhaps best described as traditional ‘local agricultural products and foodstuffs’ (English official rendering) whose qualities cross time and space and are anchored in a specific place and history. Products such asEpoisses de Bourgogneorfoie grasare defined by the fact that they depend on the shared savoir-faire of a given community and its culture. These products,
12 FAST FORWARD TO THE FUTURE? from:
Recollections of France
Author(s) Milner Susan
Abstract: The task of defining urban identities seems to be more necessary than ever at a time of massive socio-economic upheaval and residential mobility, and as the relationship between the local, national (itself undergoing redefinition) and international is changing. There are important political, economic and social reasons for defining specific urban identities. The political reasons relate to successive urban regeneration initiatives since the early 1980s as well as decentralisation laws dating from the same period. Economic regeneration has a marked regional and local aspect, particularly since decentralisation, as mayors compete for business location and state funding on the basis of local
Introduction from:
Identities
Author(s) Friese Heidrun
Abstract: The notion ‘identity’ opens towards a variety of questions. Derived from ‘
idem,’ the word’s semantic field ranges from ‘the sameness of a person or thing at all times or in all circumstances; the condition or fact that a person or thing is itself and not something else; individually, personally’ to its use in logic and mathematics and asks the question, how something can remain the same despite time and inevitable change. The word addresses at the same time the ‘condition’ and the ‘fact’ of remaining the same person throughout the various phases of existence. It underlines the ‘continuity of the
Chapter 6 Constructions of Cultural Identity and Problems of Translation from:
Identities
Author(s) Shimada Shingo
Abstract: The revival of interest in cultural identity, now a key issue in world politics and likely to remain so for some time, is an outcome of the end of the so-called Cold War. The Cold War order that had defined world politics and had assumed economic and political bipolarity is no longer dominant. ‘Culture’ has been rediscovered in an effort to explain obvious differences between states (Huntington, 1993). However, in view of the seemingly endless conflicts in many parts of the world it is increasingly doubtful whether we can justly understand and interpret conflicting realities on the basis of our
Chapter 7 The Performance of Hysteria from:
Identities
Author(s) Bronfen Elisabeth
Abstract: ‘
Je est un autre’ (‘I is an other’) wrote Arthur Rimbaud in 1871, at a time when this statement may still have been understood as a provocation. Ever since the dawn of the postmodern era, however, we are constantly offered new theoretical arguments to persuade us of the plurality and the frailness of the I. It is commonplace nowadays to talk of the individual as a representational construct that is conditioned, manufactured and manipulated by language, images and society, a construct that can even be artificially portrayed. The subject, so the argument runs, emerges precisely because it issubjectedto
Chapter 8 The ‘Jewess Pallas Athena’: from:
Identities
Author(s) Hahn Barbara
Abstract: When all had been destroyed, demolished and obliterated, a voice began to speak: ‘Mother Rahel / weeps no longer. Hauled over / all the weeped things’—a poem of Paul Celan’s from the cycle
Fadensonnenof 1968 (1990: 202). Rahel weeps no longer; no one is there who could mourn as Rahel mourned her children. ‘No longer’—a dominant temporal dimension in Celan’s poetry, an uncanny time, without relation to the present moment. It is past, unalterable, and related to a site that also no longer exists. ‘Rübergetragen / alles Geweinte’—’Hauled over /all the weeped things’—to another place,
Chapter 9 Collective Identity as a Dual Discursive Construction: from:
Identities
Author(s) Baumann Gerd
Abstract: There is consensus among historians and social scientists that collective identities can undergo thorough and sometimes radical processes of redefinition. Such changes of self-definition have been observed most clearly among populations that have located themselves in new historical contexts by long-distance migration and diasporic settlement. So much is clear, yet this consensus raises a tricky theoretical question. How is it possible that the same social agents can reaffirm putatively ancient ethnic or cultural cleavages in some situations, but can construct new identities and alternative or hybrid cultural forms in others? The answer I shall propose understands cultural identities as discursive
Chapter 11 Identity as Progress – The Longevity of Nationalism from:
Identities
Author(s) Geulen Christian
Abstract: It has become almost obligatory in recent work on the history of nationalism to insist that this very history has not and, for the time being, will not come to an end. History continues in the conflicts in Eastern Europe, in the Western revival of the nation as an acknowledged cultural category, and also in the ethnic con-flicts of postcolonial societies. Such observations presuppose that nationalism exists as such and that it possesses one single history, despite all evident differences. In contradistinction to phenomena such as Imperialism, Communism or National Socialism, which appear to be fixed in time and space,
Chapter 12 Culture and History in Comparative Fundamentalism from:
Identities
Author(s) Sivan Emanuel
Abstract: Over the last two decades or so, a thriving cottage industry has developed dealing with the origins and genesis of fundamentalist movements around the globe. Yet the scholars, policy analysts and intelligence experts involved in this huge effort had precious little to say about why such movements survive, and even flourish at times. After all, the odds are pretty much against them, as evidenced by the fact that the membership turnover rate is high. The stringent behavioural requirements, typical of fundamentalist groups, stand in stark contrast to the anything-goes, hedonistic, open society around them. One can just pick up one’s
Chapter 1 From Fellow-Traveling to Revisionism: from:
French Intellectuals Against the Left
Abstract: The experience of war and occupation profoundly shaped the politics of French intellectuals in the years after the Liberation. The sacrifices and suffering of the war years created a popular “expectation of justice”¹ and a desire for radical social and political change among intellectuals. The wartime division of friend and enemy, resistor and Nazi, between whom no middle ground was possible, brought intellectuals into a Manichean world in which refusal to choose sides became a choice for an intolerable status quo. Political violence and historicist ideas of political justice gained legitimacy following the violence of the Occupation and the vindication
Chapter 5 Antitotalitarianism Triumphant: from:
French Intellectuals Against the Left
Abstract: The new philosophers’ critiques of the politics and ideology of the Left were, even in their exaggeration, timely. New philosophy entered the spotlight in French
Chapter 10 Strange Fruit: from:
Beyond Rationalism
Author(s) Feldman Allen
Abstract: At no other time more than in the present day has individual, social and institutional memory come under such concerted pressure, critique and exposure as a fragile foundation for truth and facticity. This current reluctance to authenticate social memory is intimately tied to well-known postmodernist depredations, which profoundly disenchanted the authority of tradition and authenticity, and emptied core institutionalised myths of their temporal and semantic continuity. As institutionalised memory fails to provide overarching master narratives that can win cultural consent, it has also become increasingly disjunctive with previously unnarratable history and experience. Consider the synchronic fictions of recent ethno-histories, the
Chapter 10 Strange Fruit: from:
Beyond Rationalism
Author(s) Feldman Allen
Abstract: At no other time more than in the present day has individual, social and institutional memory come under such concerted pressure, critique and exposure as a fragile foundation for truth and facticity. This current reluctance to authenticate social memory is intimately tied to well-known postmodernist depredations, which profoundly disenchanted the authority of tradition and authenticity, and emptied core institutionalised myths of their temporal and semantic continuity. As institutionalised memory fails to provide overarching master narratives that can win cultural consent, it has also become increasingly disjunctive with previously unnarratable history and experience. Consider the synchronic fictions of recent ethno-histories, the
1 Changing Cultures, Changing Rooms: from:
Identity and Networks
Author(s) Macdonald Sharon
Abstract: Moving across and between cultures is at the heart of anthropology. Ethnography is an inherently mobile enterprise, involving the ethnographer literally moving across space, over time, and between the relatively familiar and unfamiliar. Although the idea of ‘multi-sited fieldwork’ has become fashionable recently, good anthropology has always entailed a degree of multi-sitedness, even if some of those sites might be called ‘home’ and some might be encountered vicariously. Good anthropological training entails learning about many peoples and parts of the world and going to seminars beyond geographical specialisms. The themed seminar and the edited collection, in which scholars are brought
4 Making Sense of the Past: from:
Identity and Networks
Author(s) Webber Jonathan
Abstract: Making sense of the past ranks among the key intellectual activities of any society and indeed of any individual. Not only must we learn to select those social and personal events with which we have had direct or indirect experience, make connections between these events, smooth out inconsistencies, establish meanings, construct narratives, mask out uncertainties, and develop an aesthetic appreciation of our historical understanding of things; we also seem to be able to do it all the time. We know how to adapt previous interpretations to suit new circumstances, and we are capable of remodelling our memories of the past
Circumstance, Personality, and Anthropology from:
Identity and Networks
Author(s) Dragadze Tamara
Abstract: In the beginning there was turmoil in our Oxford Institute of Social Anthropology the year the Women’s Seminar was born, partly because of a controversial appointment and partly because of the cold weather. In this ‘winter of discontent’ with power shortages, some of us had to bring blankets to our seminars. And there was also the curious Friday Seminar, bringing staff and postgraduate students together. At a time when Wendy James was the only female don as far as the eye could see in our Institute, and when a professor at St Antony’s could say to me in the Common
Shirley in My Mind from:
Identity and Networks
Author(s) Kubica Grażyna
Abstract: I met Shirley Ardener for the first time in spring 1986, during a ceremonial dinner at St John’s College, Oxford. I had come from the Jagiellonian University, Cracow, and had received a grant from the Oxford Colleges Hospitality Scheme for Polish Scholars and was therefore able to spend some time in this magnificent place. St John’s contributed to the Scheme by having one person each month. I was thus a piece of the ‘Polish sausage’, to quote Edwin Ardener’s fine turn of phrase. Shirley struck me aesthetically as delightfully eccentric: no make-up, just a dash of red lipstick to mark
Titi ikoli in the Academy from:
Identity and Networks
Author(s) Macdonald Sharon
Abstract: Among so many engaging memories of Shirley, one that especially stands out for me is her performance at the Decennial Conference of the Association of Social Anthropologists (ASA), which was held in Cambridge in 1983. I was myself a novice anthropologist at this time, having just completed a year of postgraduate anthropology at Oxford, though I had already had the opportunity to get to know Shirley and maybe shouldn’t have been as surprised by her as I was. As an undergraduate, I was partly taught by Shirley and remember being disconcerted at our first meeting at how swiftly she honed
Her Powers of Persuasion from:
Identity and Networks
Author(s) Moore Fiona
Abstract: I first knew Shirley Ardener as a name in textbooks, in the sections on Africa and on gender studies, and so meeting her for the first time in 1997 was an overwhelming experience. Given that she was such a well-known figure, how could I not agree to her polite request to attend the seminars on Gender and Tourism at Queen Elizabeth House, even though my research interests lay very much in the opposite direction? In doing so, I learned quickly that any seminar series organised by Shirley is sure to have something of interest for any researcher regardless of their
Returning to ‘The Mountain’ from:
Identity and Networks
Author(s) Geschiere Peter
Abstract: In 1995, my colleague Piet Konings and I arranged for Shirley’s return to Cameroon after more than twenty years. It did not take much persuasion to get her back. Clearly she felt it was time to revisit Buea, where she and Edwin had done so much ethnographic work beginning in the 1950s. The occasion was a conference Piet and I organised with Paul Nkwi, then at the Ministry of Scientific Research in Yaoundé. We were delighted that Shirley had agreed to attend, thus returning to Cameroon after so long.
Book Title: Critical White Studies- Publisher: Temple University Press
Author(s): Stefancic Jean
Abstract: No longer content with accepting whiteness as the norm, critical scholars have turned their attention to whiteness itself. In
Critical White Studies: Looking Behind the Mirror, numerous thinkers, including Toni Morrison, Eric Foner, Peggy McIntosh, Andrew Hacker, Ruth Frankenberg, John Howard Griffin, David Roediger, Kathleen Heal Cleaver, Noel Ignatiev, Cherrie Moraga, and Reginald Horsman, attack such questions as:*How was whiteness invented, and why?*How has the category whiteness changed over time?*Why did some immigrant groups, such as the Irish and Jews, start out as nonwhite and later became white?*Can some individual people be both white and nonwhite at different times, and what does it mean to "pass for white"?*At what point does pride in being white cross the line into white power or white supremacy?*What can whites concerned over racial inequity or white privilege do about it?Science and pseudoscience are presented side by side to demonstrate how our views on whiteness often reflect preconception, not fact. For example, most scientists hold that race is not a valid scientific category -- genetic differences between races are insignificant compared to those within them. Yet, the "one drop" rule, whereby those with any nonwhite heritage are classified as nonwhite, persists even today. As the bell curve controversy shows, race concepts die hard, especially when power and prestige lie behind them.A sweeping portrait of the emerging field of whiteness studies,Critical White Studiespresents, for the first time, the best work from sociology, law, history, cultural studies, and literature. Delgado and Stefancic expressly offer critical white studies as the next step in critical race theory. In focusing on whiteness, not only do they ask nonwhites to investigate more closely for what it means for others to be white, but also they invite whites to examine themselves more searchingly and to "look behind the mirror."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1bw1kc5
8 Growing Up White in America? from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) GROVER BONNIE KAE
Abstract: White is transparent. That’s the point of being the dominant race. Sure, the whiteness is there, but you never think of it. If you’re white, you never
haveto think of it. Sometimes when folks make a point of thinking of it, some (not all) of them run the risk of being either sappy
12 Ignoble Savages from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) D’SOUZA DINESH
Abstract: For the Europeans who first voyaged abroad, much of the rest of the world came as a shock for which they were poorly prepared. Early modern accounts, such as Richard Hakluyt’s sixteenth century
Principal Navigationsor Samuel Purchas’s seventeenth centuryPurchas His PilgrimageandHakluytus Posthumus, convey the stupefaction of the Europeans who encountered distant and unfamiliar peoples. Europeans who were even then making a transition into the modern era found themselves genuinely amazed and horrified at other cultures which appeared virtually static, confined from time immemorial in the nomadic or the agrarian stage. The consequence was that many Europeans
15 Transparently White Subjective Decisionmaking: from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) FLAGG BARBARA J.
Abstract: Goodson, Badwin & Indiff is a major accounting firm employing more than five hundred persons nationwide. Among its twenty black accountants is Yvonne Taylor, who at the time this story begins was thirty-one years old and poised to become the first black regional supervisor in the firm’s history. Yvonne attended Princeton University and received an M.B.A. from the Kellogg Graduate School of Management at Northwestern University. While employed at Goodson, she was highly successful in attracting new clients, especially from the black business community. In all other respects her performance at the firm was regarded as exemplary.
18 Racial Reflections: from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) SUH SUNG-HEE
Abstract: Over time, beliefs in white dominance, reinforced by policies subordinating black interests to those of whites, have led to an unrecognized, but no less viable, property right in whiteness. In challenging the legality of racial segregation in the late nineteenth century, the plaintiff in
Plessy v. Ferguson
20 The Quest for Freedom in the Post-Brown South: from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) DOUGLAS DAVISON M.
Abstract: In their response to the civil rights movement of the 1960s, moderate southern communities differed from their recalcitrant counterparts in at least one significant aspect. These communities understood that white self-interest demanded a certain degree of accommodation to integration demands. Thus, in many moderate southern cities, white elites, especially business leaders, played critical roles in facilitating limited racial integration as a means of preserving a strong business environment. At the same time, this need to appear racially moderate provided the black community with an important opportunity to challenge racial segregation that activists successfully exploited in many southern communities.
21 “Soulmaning”: from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) WRIGHT LUTHER
Abstract: Philip and Paul Malone, twin brothers from Boston, applied to be firefighters in 1975, but were not hired because of low civil service test scores. The brothers reapplied in 1977, changing their racial classifications from “white” to “black”¹ Due to a court mandate requiring Boston to hire more minority firefighters and police,² the Malones were hired in 1978, even though their test scores remained the same. Had the Malones listed their race as white in 1977, they most likely would have been denied employment a second time. In 1988, ten years after being hired, the Malone brothers’ racial classifications were
24 The Invention of Race: from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) OAKES JAMES
Abstract: When Winthrop Jordan’s
White Over Blackwas published in 1968, big reviews came out right away, followed by big prizes. Everyone noticed; everyone raved. Yet for all its monumental proportions, the book cast a curiously slender historiographical shadow. Jordan’s work did not become the centerpiece of a long and fruitful scholarly debate. It sits on our shelves, the proverbial book we read in graduate school. It was Jordan’s singular misfortune to produce a history of racial attitudes at the same time that Americans were beginning to look beyond racism to the political and economic sources of social inequality. The “real”
26 The Antidemocratic Power of Whiteness from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) CLEAVER KATHLEEN NEAL
Abstract: Like the formally neutral concept of “civil rights,” “race” usually makes one think of blacks. To link the idea of race with the social construct of whiteness is uncommon. As a rule, white Americans no longer see race in relation to their own identity, and genuinely believe that racism poses a problem for “others.” A widespread failure to acknowledge that whiteness conveys internal meanings at the same time it fulfills anti-black functions helps frustrate programs that seek to eliminate racism’s pernicious legacy.¹ Thus,
The Wages of Whiteness, a sophisticated analysis of the significance of racism in the formation of the
49 Racial Construction and Women as Differentiated Actors from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) MAHONEY MARTHA R.
Abstract: What is race? A social construct, a concept having no natural truth, no truth separate from historical development, and possibly no truth comprehensible apart from domination. The term has meant different things in this country over time; and its social and cultural meanings continue to change within our own time. In law as well as elsewhere in society the term “race” has been used to stand for several different concepts. Even the Supreme Court, when faced with the question, had to recognize that “race” was a contingent category that shifted over time.¹
53 Reflections on Whiteness: from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) WILDMAN STEPHANIE M.
Abstract: Imagine that a plane crashes, and in the wreckage we discover a book. Nothing on its cover gives any indication of its contents. But when we open it up, it reveals all the secrets of how to behave as if you rule the world. Suddenly we have an explanation for why so many of them seem to behave the same way and also why they just don’t get it: This handbook teaches them all how to be who they are and makes them so they can’t hear us or see us, so much of the time. These are the rules
70 Black Like Me from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) GRIFFIN JOHN HOWARD
Abstract: The doctor, well-disposed, gave me many warnings about the dangers of this project in so far as my contact with Negroes was concerned. Now that he had had time to think, he was beginning to doubt the wisdom of
74 What Does a White Woman Look Like? from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) FRANKE KATHERINE M.
Abstract: In significant ways, legal texts produce a narrative of national identity. They weave stories about who we are, what we are committed to, and what we expect of one another, individually and collectively. Certain foundational fictions, like “We the People,” provide the glue that over time binds a people to its past and to one another as a nation. But should law play the same role with respect to other aspects of human identity? I think not. Current debates surrounding affirmative action, congressional redistricting, the Million Man March, and the appointment of Clarence Thomas to the Supreme Court all represent
75 La Guera from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) MORAGA CHERRIE
Abstract: I am the very well-educated daughter of a woman who, by the standards in this country, would be considered largely illiterate. My mother was born in Santa Paula, Southern California, at a time when much of the central valley there was still farm land. Nearly thirty-five years later, in 1948, she was the only daughter of six to marry an anglo, my father.
76 Notes of a White Black Woman from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) SCALES-TRENT JUDY
Abstract: We Americans have been talking about race for a long time. It is a constant theme in our lives and in our common language. Although the specific topic changes over the years—varying all the way from fugitive slave laws to affirmative action—the theme remains. Ideas about race lie at the core of the American character and the American dream.
78 A Review of Life on the Color Line from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) SHANE PETER M.
Abstract: In 1954, at the age of ten, Greg Williams took an unforgettable journey to Muncie, Indiana. Until that time, Greg and his younger brother Mike had lived in Virginia as white children. Their mother was white, and their father (then called Tony, later Buster) told everyone that he was Italian. But when the marriage broke up and Tony’s financial ventures failed, he pushed Greg’s life over the color line. He moved the boys to the black section of Muncie, where he had been raised. “In Virginia you were white boys,” he told Greg and Mike. “In Indiana you’re going to
80 The Misleading Abstractions of Social Scientists from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) KAGAN JEROME
Abstract: Five-month-old infants who stare at surprising events for a long time, 5-year-old children with large vocabularies, and 50-year-old adults who invent new computer programs are all described as intelligent. The use of the same adjective implies that the same process is operating in all three situations. But we have no good evidence to support the idea that the psychological processes that produce an attentive infant are the same as those that produce a creative computer programmer. Moreover, a small number of psychologists—including J. P. Guilford, Howard Gardner, and Robert Sternberg—have argued persuasively against the usefulness of the notion
92 Hatelines: from:
Critical White Studies
Abstract: In other good news, that old crone, Mother Teresa. fell and broke her collarbone. Mother Teresa wastes her time in India fishing mud babies out
95 The American Neo-Nazi Movement Today from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) LANGER ELINOR
Abstract: In writing about a subject that carries with it the automatic weight of its association with Nazi Germany, I find myself … suspended between caution and alarm. Especially about a movement as underreported as this one, you do not write, in the first place, merely to observe “This too will pass away”; you write to sound an alert. At the same time, you know that the tests of time are different and that historians of another generation will consider the evidence and say either that it was all simply part of another “Brown Scare” in which people, as usual, lost
105 “Was Blind, but Now I See”: from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) FLAGG BARBARA J.
Abstract: The most striking characteristic of whites’ consciousness of whiteness is that most of the time we don’t have any. I call this the
transparencyphenomenon: the tendency of whites not to think about whiteness, or about norms, behaviors, experiences, or perspectives that are white-specific. Transparency often is the mechanism through which white decisionmakers who disavow white supremacy impose white norms on blacks. [See also Chapters 15, 35, and 97. Ed.] Transparency operates to require black assimilation even when pluralism is the articulated goal; it affords substantial advantages to whites over blacks even when decisionmakers intend to effect substantive racial justice.
107 Resisting Racisms, Eliminating Exclusions: from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) GOLDBERG DAVID THEO
Abstract: Resistance to racisms consists in vigorously contending and disputing exclusionary values, norms, institutions, and practices, as well as assertively articulating open-ended specifications and means for an incorporative politics. Where racisms are openly and volubly expressed, it is likely a matter of time before a more or less organized resistance by its objects, often in alliance with other antiracists, will arise in response; witness the emergence of resistance to slavery in the United States, to the destruction of indigenous people on all continents, to the [Nazis and their allies in Europe and to]
apartheidin South Africa, to David Duke in
114 White Out from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) WILKINS ROGER
Abstract: I live on a street in Washington, D.C., where the Speaker of the House, senators, congressmen, and a couple of Supreme Court justices also live. A few blocks away are two large public-housing projects. The Safeway where we all shop may be the most racially and economically integrated supermarket in America. Public servants with big titles shop alongside people who buy their staples with food stamps. And a couple of times a year there are street murders a half-mile away.
The Golden Rule and Forgiveness from:
A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) FIASSE GAËLLE
Abstract: As is well known, Ricoeur seeks to counter the egological tendencies of philosophies of the subject. With the emphasis he puts on the role of the other, in ethics he belongs to the group of thinkers concerned with otherness within the sphere of ethical thought. But at the same time, he also takes into consideration the excessive weight that this other places on the self. Raising doubts about Emmanuel Levinas’s philosophy, while maintaining his admiration of the latter’s hyperboles, Ricoeur wishes to underline the definitive aspect of receptivity when encountering the other.¹ There is no “you” without an “I” who
Preserving the Eidetic Moment: from:
A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) RASMUSSEN DAVID
Abstract: My original encounter with the person and the work of Paul Ricoeur began with an attempt to appropriate his thought for the retrieval of the symbolic. This led to a concern with what I called
mythic-symboliclanguage correlated with anthropological considerations about the nature of the human, subjectivity, the self—stemming from hisPhilosophy of the Will. At that time I had been meeting once a week with the Romanian phenomenologist of religion Mircea Eliade to discuss his work in general, which I wanted to write about. I had told Eliade that I was not particularly interested in his classes;
The Golden Rule and Forgiveness from:
A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) FIASSE GAËLLE
Abstract: As is well known, Ricoeur seeks to counter the egological tendencies of philosophies of the subject. With the emphasis he puts on the role of the other, in ethics he belongs to the group of thinkers concerned with otherness within the sphere of ethical thought. But at the same time, he also takes into consideration the excessive weight that this other places on the self. Raising doubts about Emmanuel Levinas’s philosophy, while maintaining his admiration of the latter’s hyperboles, Ricoeur wishes to underline the definitive aspect of receptivity when encountering the other.¹ There is no “you” without an “I” who
Preserving the Eidetic Moment: from:
A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) RASMUSSEN DAVID
Abstract: My original encounter with the person and the work of Paul Ricoeur began with an attempt to appropriate his thought for the retrieval of the symbolic. This led to a concern with what I called
mythic-symboliclanguage correlated with anthropological considerations about the nature of the human, subjectivity, the self—stemming from hisPhilosophy of the Will. At that time I had been meeting once a week with the Romanian phenomenologist of religion Mircea Eliade to discuss his work in general, which I wanted to write about. I had told Eliade that I was not particularly interested in his classes;
The Golden Rule and Forgiveness from:
A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) FIASSE GAËLLE
Abstract: As is well known, Ricoeur seeks to counter the egological tendencies of philosophies of the subject. With the emphasis he puts on the role of the other, in ethics he belongs to the group of thinkers concerned with otherness within the sphere of ethical thought. But at the same time, he also takes into consideration the excessive weight that this other places on the self. Raising doubts about Emmanuel Levinas’s philosophy, while maintaining his admiration of the latter’s hyperboles, Ricoeur wishes to underline the definitive aspect of receptivity when encountering the other.¹ There is no “you” without an “I” who
Preserving the Eidetic Moment: from:
A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) RASMUSSEN DAVID
Abstract: My original encounter with the person and the work of Paul Ricoeur began with an attempt to appropriate his thought for the retrieval of the symbolic. This led to a concern with what I called
mythic-symboliclanguage correlated with anthropological considerations about the nature of the human, subjectivity, the self—stemming from hisPhilosophy of the Will. At that time I had been meeting once a week with the Romanian phenomenologist of religion Mircea Eliade to discuss his work in general, which I wanted to write about. I had told Eliade that I was not particularly interested in his classes;
The Golden Rule and Forgiveness from:
A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) FIASSE GAËLLE
Abstract: As is well known, Ricoeur seeks to counter the egological tendencies of philosophies of the subject. With the emphasis he puts on the role of the other, in ethics he belongs to the group of thinkers concerned with otherness within the sphere of ethical thought. But at the same time, he also takes into consideration the excessive weight that this other places on the self. Raising doubts about Emmanuel Levinas’s philosophy, while maintaining his admiration of the latter’s hyperboles, Ricoeur wishes to underline the definitive aspect of receptivity when encountering the other.¹ There is no “you” without an “I” who
Preserving the Eidetic Moment: from:
A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) RASMUSSEN DAVID
Abstract: My original encounter with the person and the work of Paul Ricoeur began with an attempt to appropriate his thought for the retrieval of the symbolic. This led to a concern with what I called
mythic-symboliclanguage correlated with anthropological considerations about the nature of the human, subjectivity, the self—stemming from hisPhilosophy of the Will. At that time I had been meeting once a week with the Romanian phenomenologist of religion Mircea Eliade to discuss his work in general, which I wanted to write about. I had told Eliade that I was not particularly interested in his classes;
The Golden Rule and Forgiveness from:
A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) FIASSE GAËLLE
Abstract: As is well known, Ricoeur seeks to counter the egological tendencies of philosophies of the subject. With the emphasis he puts on the role of the other, in ethics he belongs to the group of thinkers concerned with otherness within the sphere of ethical thought. But at the same time, he also takes into consideration the excessive weight that this other places on the self. Raising doubts about Emmanuel Levinas’s philosophy, while maintaining his admiration of the latter’s hyperboles, Ricoeur wishes to underline the definitive aspect of receptivity when encountering the other.¹ There is no “you” without an “I” who
Preserving the Eidetic Moment: from:
A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) RASMUSSEN DAVID
Abstract: My original encounter with the person and the work of Paul Ricoeur began with an attempt to appropriate his thought for the retrieval of the symbolic. This led to a concern with what I called
mythic-symboliclanguage correlated with anthropological considerations about the nature of the human, subjectivity, the self—stemming from hisPhilosophy of the Will. At that time I had been meeting once a week with the Romanian phenomenologist of religion Mircea Eliade to discuss his work in general, which I wanted to write about. I had told Eliade that I was not particularly interested in his classes;
The Golden Rule and Forgiveness from:
A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) FIASSE GAËLLE
Abstract: As is well known, Ricoeur seeks to counter the egological tendencies of philosophies of the subject. With the emphasis he puts on the role of the other, in ethics he belongs to the group of thinkers concerned with otherness within the sphere of ethical thought. But at the same time, he also takes into consideration the excessive weight that this other places on the self. Raising doubts about Emmanuel Levinas’s philosophy, while maintaining his admiration of the latter’s hyperboles, Ricoeur wishes to underline the definitive aspect of receptivity when encountering the other.¹ There is no “you” without an “I” who
Preserving the Eidetic Moment: from:
A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) RASMUSSEN DAVID
Abstract: My original encounter with the person and the work of Paul Ricoeur began with an attempt to appropriate his thought for the retrieval of the symbolic. This led to a concern with what I called
mythic-symboliclanguage correlated with anthropological considerations about the nature of the human, subjectivity, the self—stemming from hisPhilosophy of the Will. At that time I had been meeting once a week with the Romanian phenomenologist of religion Mircea Eliade to discuss his work in general, which I wanted to write about. I had told Eliade that I was not particularly interested in his classes;
The Golden Rule and Forgiveness from:
A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) FIASSE GAËLLE
Abstract: As is well known, Ricoeur seeks to counter the egological tendencies of philosophies of the subject. With the emphasis he puts on the role of the other, in ethics he belongs to the group of thinkers concerned with otherness within the sphere of ethical thought. But at the same time, he also takes into consideration the excessive weight that this other places on the self. Raising doubts about Emmanuel Levinas’s philosophy, while maintaining his admiration of the latter’s hyperboles, Ricoeur wishes to underline the definitive aspect of receptivity when encountering the other.¹ There is no “you” without an “I” who
Preserving the Eidetic Moment: from:
A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) RASMUSSEN DAVID
Abstract: My original encounter with the person and the work of Paul Ricoeur began with an attempt to appropriate his thought for the retrieval of the symbolic. This led to a concern with what I called
mythic-symboliclanguage correlated with anthropological considerations about the nature of the human, subjectivity, the self—stemming from hisPhilosophy of the Will. At that time I had been meeting once a week with the Romanian phenomenologist of religion Mircea Eliade to discuss his work in general, which I wanted to write about. I had told Eliade that I was not particularly interested in his classes;
The Golden Rule and Forgiveness from:
A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) FIASSE GAËLLE
Abstract: As is well known, Ricoeur seeks to counter the egological tendencies of philosophies of the subject. With the emphasis he puts on the role of the other, in ethics he belongs to the group of thinkers concerned with otherness within the sphere of ethical thought. But at the same time, he also takes into consideration the excessive weight that this other places on the self. Raising doubts about Emmanuel Levinas’s philosophy, while maintaining his admiration of the latter’s hyperboles, Ricoeur wishes to underline the definitive aspect of receptivity when encountering the other.¹ There is no “you” without an “I” who
Preserving the Eidetic Moment: from:
A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) RASMUSSEN DAVID
Abstract: My original encounter with the person and the work of Paul Ricoeur began with an attempt to appropriate his thought for the retrieval of the symbolic. This led to a concern with what I called
mythic-symboliclanguage correlated with anthropological considerations about the nature of the human, subjectivity, the self—stemming from hisPhilosophy of the Will. At that time I had been meeting once a week with the Romanian phenomenologist of religion Mircea Eliade to discuss his work in general, which I wanted to write about. I had told Eliade that I was not particularly interested in his classes;
The Golden Rule and Forgiveness from:
A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) FIASSE GAËLLE
Abstract: As is well known, Ricoeur seeks to counter the egological tendencies of philosophies of the subject. With the emphasis he puts on the role of the other, in ethics he belongs to the group of thinkers concerned with otherness within the sphere of ethical thought. But at the same time, he also takes into consideration the excessive weight that this other places on the self. Raising doubts about Emmanuel Levinas’s philosophy, while maintaining his admiration of the latter’s hyperboles, Ricoeur wishes to underline the definitive aspect of receptivity when encountering the other.¹ There is no “you” without an “I” who
Preserving the Eidetic Moment: from:
A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) RASMUSSEN DAVID
Abstract: My original encounter with the person and the work of Paul Ricoeur began with an attempt to appropriate his thought for the retrieval of the symbolic. This led to a concern with what I called
mythic-symboliclanguage correlated with anthropological considerations about the nature of the human, subjectivity, the self—stemming from hisPhilosophy of the Will. At that time I had been meeting once a week with the Romanian phenomenologist of religion Mircea Eliade to discuss his work in general, which I wanted to write about. I had told Eliade that I was not particularly interested in his classes;
The Golden Rule and Forgiveness from:
A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) FIASSE GAËLLE
Abstract: As is well known, Ricoeur seeks to counter the egological tendencies of philosophies of the subject. With the emphasis he puts on the role of the other, in ethics he belongs to the group of thinkers concerned with otherness within the sphere of ethical thought. But at the same time, he also takes into consideration the excessive weight that this other places on the self. Raising doubts about Emmanuel Levinas’s philosophy, while maintaining his admiration of the latter’s hyperboles, Ricoeur wishes to underline the definitive aspect of receptivity when encountering the other.¹ There is no “you” without an “I” who
Preserving the Eidetic Moment: from:
A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) RASMUSSEN DAVID
Abstract: My original encounter with the person and the work of Paul Ricoeur began with an attempt to appropriate his thought for the retrieval of the symbolic. This led to a concern with what I called
mythic-symboliclanguage correlated with anthropological considerations about the nature of the human, subjectivity, the self—stemming from hisPhilosophy of the Will. At that time I had been meeting once a week with the Romanian phenomenologist of religion Mircea Eliade to discuss his work in general, which I wanted to write about. I had told Eliade that I was not particularly interested in his classes;
The Golden Rule and Forgiveness from:
A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) FIASSE GAËLLE
Abstract: As is well known, Ricoeur seeks to counter the egological tendencies of philosophies of the subject. With the emphasis he puts on the role of the other, in ethics he belongs to the group of thinkers concerned with otherness within the sphere of ethical thought. But at the same time, he also takes into consideration the excessive weight that this other places on the self. Raising doubts about Emmanuel Levinas’s philosophy, while maintaining his admiration of the latter’s hyperboles, Ricoeur wishes to underline the definitive aspect of receptivity when encountering the other.¹ There is no “you” without an “I” who
Preserving the Eidetic Moment: from:
A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) RASMUSSEN DAVID
Abstract: My original encounter with the person and the work of Paul Ricoeur began with an attempt to appropriate his thought for the retrieval of the symbolic. This led to a concern with what I called
mythic-symboliclanguage correlated with anthropological considerations about the nature of the human, subjectivity, the self—stemming from hisPhilosophy of the Will. At that time I had been meeting once a week with the Romanian phenomenologist of religion Mircea Eliade to discuss his work in general, which I wanted to write about. I had told Eliade that I was not particularly interested in his classes;
The Golden Rule and Forgiveness from:
A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) FIASSE GAËLLE
Abstract: As is well known, Ricoeur seeks to counter the egological tendencies of philosophies of the subject. With the emphasis he puts on the role of the other, in ethics he belongs to the group of thinkers concerned with otherness within the sphere of ethical thought. But at the same time, he also takes into consideration the excessive weight that this other places on the self. Raising doubts about Emmanuel Levinas’s philosophy, while maintaining his admiration of the latter’s hyperboles, Ricoeur wishes to underline the definitive aspect of receptivity when encountering the other.¹ There is no “you” without an “I” who
Preserving the Eidetic Moment: from:
A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) RASMUSSEN DAVID
Abstract: My original encounter with the person and the work of Paul Ricoeur began with an attempt to appropriate his thought for the retrieval of the symbolic. This led to a concern with what I called
mythic-symboliclanguage correlated with anthropological considerations about the nature of the human, subjectivity, the self—stemming from hisPhilosophy of the Will. At that time I had been meeting once a week with the Romanian phenomenologist of religion Mircea Eliade to discuss his work in general, which I wanted to write about. I had told Eliade that I was not particularly interested in his classes;
The Golden Rule and Forgiveness from:
A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) FIASSE GAËLLE
Abstract: As is well known, Ricoeur seeks to counter the egological tendencies of philosophies of the subject. With the emphasis he puts on the role of the other, in ethics he belongs to the group of thinkers concerned with otherness within the sphere of ethical thought. But at the same time, he also takes into consideration the excessive weight that this other places on the self. Raising doubts about Emmanuel Levinas’s philosophy, while maintaining his admiration of the latter’s hyperboles, Ricoeur wishes to underline the definitive aspect of receptivity when encountering the other.¹ There is no “you” without an “I” who
Preserving the Eidetic Moment: from:
A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) RASMUSSEN DAVID
Abstract: My original encounter with the person and the work of Paul Ricoeur began with an attempt to appropriate his thought for the retrieval of the symbolic. This led to a concern with what I called
mythic-symboliclanguage correlated with anthropological considerations about the nature of the human, subjectivity, the self—stemming from hisPhilosophy of the Will. At that time I had been meeting once a week with the Romanian phenomenologist of religion Mircea Eliade to discuss his work in general, which I wanted to write about. I had told Eliade that I was not particularly interested in his classes;
Book Title: Religion: Beyond a Concept- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): de VRIES HENT
Abstract: What do we talk about when we talk about religion? Is it an array of empirical facts about historical human civilizations? Or is religion what is in essence unpredictable-perhaps the very emergence of the new? In what ways are the legacies of religion-its powers, words, things, and gestures-reconfiguring themselves as the elementary forms of life in the twenty-first century?Given the Latin roots of the word religion and its historical Christian uses, what sense, if any, does it make to talk about religionin other traditions? Where might we look for common elements that would enable us to do so? Has religion as an overarching concept lost all its currency, or does it ineluctably return-sometimes in unexpected ways-the moment we attempt to do without it? This book explores the difficulties and double binds that arise when we ask What is religion? Offering a marvelously rich and diverse array of perspectives, it begins the task of rethinking religionand religious studiesin a contemporary world. Opening essays on the question What is religion?are followed by clusters exploring the relationships among religion, theology, and philosophy and the links between religion, politics, and law. Pedagogy is the focus of the following section. Religion is then examined in particular contexts, from classical times to the present Pentacostal revival, leading into an especially rich set of essays on religion, materiality, and mediatization. The final section grapples with the ever-changing forms that religionis taking, such as spirituality movements and responses to the ecological crisis.Featuring the work of leading scholars from a wide array of disciplines, traditions, and cultures, Religion: Beyond a Concept will help set the agenda for religious studies for years to come. It is the first of five volumes in a collection entitled The Future of the Religious Past, the fruit of a major international research initiative funded by the Netherlands Organization for Scientific Research.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c5chhf
The Christian Invention of Judaism: from:
Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Boyarin Daniel
Abstract: It seems highly significant that there is no word in premodern Jewish parlance that means “Judaism.” When the term
Ioudaismosappears in non-Christian Jewish writing, to my knowledge only in II Maccabees, it doesn’t mean Judaism, the religion, but the entire complex of loyalties and practices that mark off the people of Israel; after that, it is used as the name of the Jewish religion only by writers who do not identify themselves with and by that name at all, until, it would seem, well into the nineteenth century.¹ It might seem, then, that Judaism has not, until some time
Religion as Memory: from:
Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Farhat John A.
Abstract: Until the end of the 1960s, the sociology of religion was governed by one principal objective: namely, that of illuminating and analyzing the structural connection between the rise of modernity and the cultural and social repression of religion. The readings of the founding fathers of the discipline, dominant up to that time, furnished the theoretical underpinnings for this program: Marx, Durkheim, and Weber have certainly developed radically different approaches to the structures and functions of society, but each has, in his own way, contributed to establishing that the process of rationalization characterizing the advance of modernity is identical to the
From French Algeria to Jerusalem: from:
Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Atlan Henri
Abstract: I grew up in Algeria before and during the Second World War, at a time when Algeria was part of France. Approximately one million French people had been living there for several generations, next to eight to nine million Arab and Berber people, who were treated as second-class citizens. The fifty to one hundred thousand indigenous Jews were granted French citizenship collectively by a special law at the end of the nineteenth century. Thanks to this law, my father and mother were already born French. This was highly appreciated not only because of the rights granted by French citizenship but
Inheriting the Wound: from:
Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Szafraniec Asja
Abstract: Contemporary philosophy has many times disavowed any relationship with religion, yet it remains strangely committed to a distinctly religious vocabulary. Stanley Cavell’s work bears traces of such problematic engagement with religion, entwined as it is in the vocabulary of faith, sacrifice, redemption, incarnation, conversion, and confession. While Cavell’s engagement with religion is not of a straightforwardly affirmative kind, we can’t call it straightforwardly dismissive, either. Rather, we could perhaps speak about a transformation, a “transfiguration” (to use his own vocabulary) of religion taking place in his work.
After Theism from:
Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Adriaanse H. J.
Abstract: The conviction underlying the present essay is that theism in its traditional form has lost its credibility. Convictions, it is sometimes argued, are the sort of things you have or you don’t have. I think this is not quite right; reasons can be brought forward even for convictions, though these reasons cannot be considered as the premises from which the conviction necessarily follows as a conclusion. I shall mention three of the reasons for abandoning theism.
Renewing Time: from:
Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Versteeg Peter
Abstract: Religions create and inhabit their own time to avoid
Neutralizing Religion; or, What Is the Opposite of “Faith-based”? from:
Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Sullivan Winnifred Fallers
Abstract: The Center for Studies in Criminal Justice at the University of Chicago Law School held a two-day conference in May 2001 entitled “Faith-Based Initiatives and Urban Policy.”¹ The principal focus of the conference was the then relatively new use of private “faith-based” social service agencies in addressing the needs of the urban poor. Could churches replace or supplement government agencies by delivering social services in a more effective manner? Speakers and participants were largely expert in sociology or criminal justice. None were in religious studies, however loosely defined. From time to time, the question would surface as to exactly what
Toward a Politics of Singularity: from:
Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Weber Samuel
Abstract: And thus I have brought to an end my Discourse of Civil and Ecclesiastical Government, occasioned by the disorders of the present time, without partiality, without application, and without other design than to set before men’s eyes the mutual relation between
protection and obedience; of which the condition
Can Television Mediate Religious Experience? from:
Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Zito Angela
Abstract: American prime-time television has recently seen a number of programs that deal with spiritual issues from various perspectives.¹ These wildly successful primetime dramas have included the much-older
Highway to Heavenand its successorTouched by an Angel(both featuring angels on earthly missions among ordinary people),Buffy, the Vampire Slayer, popular among young people for its heroine who secretly fights against evil spirits, and science-fiction shows likeThe X-files, which had the FBI investigating strange phenomena from alien spaceships to extrasensory perception.² These shows raise interesting questions about “theology and its publics” in the U. S. context. What form does
Intimate Exteriorities: from:
Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) van Maas Sander
Abstract: It is not a rare phenomenon today to find a concert hall—that bourgeois temple of the cult of Art—filled with religious music. This may not seem surprising, since soon after its invention in the eighteenth century the concert hall became a location for the performance of religious repertoires. The times have changed, however, and the position of religion today can hardly be compared with the one it occupied centuries ago. The presence of religion in classical music performances today is mostly historical in character, such as, for instance, when Handel’s oratorios are played, or Mozart’s
Requiem.
Book Title: Religion: Beyond a Concept- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): de VRIES HENT
Abstract: What do we talk about when we talk about religion? Is it an array of empirical facts about historical human civilizations? Or is religion what is in essence unpredictable-perhaps the very emergence of the new? In what ways are the legacies of religion-its powers, words, things, and gestures-reconfiguring themselves as the elementary forms of life in the twenty-first century?Given the Latin roots of the word religion and its historical Christian uses, what sense, if any, does it make to talk about religionin other traditions? Where might we look for common elements that would enable us to do so? Has religion as an overarching concept lost all its currency, or does it ineluctably return-sometimes in unexpected ways-the moment we attempt to do without it? This book explores the difficulties and double binds that arise when we ask What is religion? Offering a marvelously rich and diverse array of perspectives, it begins the task of rethinking religionand religious studiesin a contemporary world. Opening essays on the question What is religion?are followed by clusters exploring the relationships among religion, theology, and philosophy and the links between religion, politics, and law. Pedagogy is the focus of the following section. Religion is then examined in particular contexts, from classical times to the present Pentacostal revival, leading into an especially rich set of essays on religion, materiality, and mediatization. The final section grapples with the ever-changing forms that religionis taking, such as spirituality movements and responses to the ecological crisis.Featuring the work of leading scholars from a wide array of disciplines, traditions, and cultures, Religion: Beyond a Concept will help set the agenda for religious studies for years to come. It is the first of five volumes in a collection entitled The Future of the Religious Past, the fruit of a major international research initiative funded by the Netherlands Organization for Scientific Research.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c5chhf
The Christian Invention of Judaism: from:
Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Boyarin Daniel
Abstract: It seems highly significant that there is no word in premodern Jewish parlance that means “Judaism.” When the term
Ioudaismosappears in non-Christian Jewish writing, to my knowledge only in II Maccabees, it doesn’t mean Judaism, the religion, but the entire complex of loyalties and practices that mark off the people of Israel; after that, it is used as the name of the Jewish religion only by writers who do not identify themselves with and by that name at all, until, it would seem, well into the nineteenth century.¹ It might seem, then, that Judaism has not, until some time
Religion as Memory: from:
Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Farhat John A.
Abstract: Until the end of the 1960s, the sociology of religion was governed by one principal objective: namely, that of illuminating and analyzing the structural connection between the rise of modernity and the cultural and social repression of religion. The readings of the founding fathers of the discipline, dominant up to that time, furnished the theoretical underpinnings for this program: Marx, Durkheim, and Weber have certainly developed radically different approaches to the structures and functions of society, but each has, in his own way, contributed to establishing that the process of rationalization characterizing the advance of modernity is identical to the
From French Algeria to Jerusalem: from:
Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Atlan Henri
Abstract: I grew up in Algeria before and during the Second World War, at a time when Algeria was part of France. Approximately one million French people had been living there for several generations, next to eight to nine million Arab and Berber people, who were treated as second-class citizens. The fifty to one hundred thousand indigenous Jews were granted French citizenship collectively by a special law at the end of the nineteenth century. Thanks to this law, my father and mother were already born French. This was highly appreciated not only because of the rights granted by French citizenship but
Inheriting the Wound: from:
Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Szafraniec Asja
Abstract: Contemporary philosophy has many times disavowed any relationship with religion, yet it remains strangely committed to a distinctly religious vocabulary. Stanley Cavell’s work bears traces of such problematic engagement with religion, entwined as it is in the vocabulary of faith, sacrifice, redemption, incarnation, conversion, and confession. While Cavell’s engagement with religion is not of a straightforwardly affirmative kind, we can’t call it straightforwardly dismissive, either. Rather, we could perhaps speak about a transformation, a “transfiguration” (to use his own vocabulary) of religion taking place in his work.
After Theism from:
Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Adriaanse H. J.
Abstract: The conviction underlying the present essay is that theism in its traditional form has lost its credibility. Convictions, it is sometimes argued, are the sort of things you have or you don’t have. I think this is not quite right; reasons can be brought forward even for convictions, though these reasons cannot be considered as the premises from which the conviction necessarily follows as a conclusion. I shall mention three of the reasons for abandoning theism.
Renewing Time: from:
Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Versteeg Peter
Abstract: Religions create and inhabit their own time to avoid
Neutralizing Religion; or, What Is the Opposite of “Faith-based”? from:
Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Sullivan Winnifred Fallers
Abstract: The Center for Studies in Criminal Justice at the University of Chicago Law School held a two-day conference in May 2001 entitled “Faith-Based Initiatives and Urban Policy.”¹ The principal focus of the conference was the then relatively new use of private “faith-based” social service agencies in addressing the needs of the urban poor. Could churches replace or supplement government agencies by delivering social services in a more effective manner? Speakers and participants were largely expert in sociology or criminal justice. None were in religious studies, however loosely defined. From time to time, the question would surface as to exactly what
Toward a Politics of Singularity: from:
Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Weber Samuel
Abstract: And thus I have brought to an end my Discourse of Civil and Ecclesiastical Government, occasioned by the disorders of the present time, without partiality, without application, and without other design than to set before men’s eyes the mutual relation between
protection and obedience; of which the condition
Can Television Mediate Religious Experience? from:
Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Zito Angela
Abstract: American prime-time television has recently seen a number of programs that deal with spiritual issues from various perspectives.¹ These wildly successful primetime dramas have included the much-older
Highway to Heavenand its successorTouched by an Angel(both featuring angels on earthly missions among ordinary people),Buffy, the Vampire Slayer, popular among young people for its heroine who secretly fights against evil spirits, and science-fiction shows likeThe X-files, which had the FBI investigating strange phenomena from alien spaceships to extrasensory perception.² These shows raise interesting questions about “theology and its publics” in the U. S. context. What form does
Intimate Exteriorities: from:
Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) van Maas Sander
Abstract: It is not a rare phenomenon today to find a concert hall—that bourgeois temple of the cult of Art—filled with religious music. This may not seem surprising, since soon after its invention in the eighteenth century the concert hall became a location for the performance of religious repertoires. The times have changed, however, and the position of religion today can hardly be compared with the one it occupied centuries ago. The presence of religion in classical music performances today is mostly historical in character, such as, for instance, when Handel’s oratorios are played, or Mozart’s
Requiem.
CHAPTER SEVEN Too Late, My Brothers from:
Death's Following: Mediocrity, Dirtiness, Adulthood, Literature
Abstract: The wrong place to begin this chapter is with an account of daydreaming through a Daniel Barenboim recital at Symphony Hall in Boston. Perhaps because Barenboim’s playing was routine that evening, I found myself recollecting a concert there forty years prior: the Limeliters, a folk group popular at the dispersal of the fifties and the gathering of the sixties, had been performing. I could, at the Barenboim concert, only vaguely recall roly-poly Glenn Yarbrough, an Irish tenor whose lovely voice sounded to me enough like falsetto to be embarrassing at the time. A more vivid memory was Alex Hassilev, somehow
CHAPTER EIGHT Re: from:
Death's Following: Mediocrity, Dirtiness, Adulthood, Literature
Abstract: On February 29, 1960, when I was exactly, by way of a rare half-birthday, eight-and-a-half, my father, Gerald Limon, was finally killed by an aneurysm, not yet thirty-nine. He had fainted in his car outside his factory, had improved daily for about a week, and died. Family policy, pretty strictly adhered to, was never to discuss him, either his life or death, again. Some time after his death, maybe a month or two, my mother asked me if I had any questions about it. None came to mind. She thought perhaps I had worried that I might die in the
Book Title: Irony on Occasion: From Schlegel and Kierkegaard to Derrida and de Man- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Newmark Kevin
Abstract: What is it about irony--as an object of serious philosophical reflection and a literary technique of considerable elasticity--that makes it an occasion for endless critical debate? This book responds to this question by focusing on several key moments in German Romanticism and its afterlife in twentieth-century French thought and writing. It includes chapters on Friedrich Schlegel, Soren Kierkegaard, Friedrich Nietzsche, Thomas Mann, Jean Paulhan, Maurice Blanchot, Jacques Derrida, and Paul de Man. A coda traces the way unresolved tensions inherited from Romanticism resurface in a novelist like J. M. Coetzee. But this book is neither a historical nor a thematic study of irony. To the degree that irony initiates a deflection of meaning, it also entails a divergence from historical and thematic models of understanding. The book therefore aims to respect irony's digressive force by allowing it to emerge from questions that sometimes have little or nothing to do with the ostensible topic of irony. For if irony is the possibility that whatever is being said does not coincide fully with whatever is being meant, then there is no guarantee that the most legitimate approach to the problem would proceed directly to those places where "irony" is named, described, or presumed to reside. Rather than providing a history of irony, then, this book examines particular occasions of ironic disruption. It thus offers an alternative model for conceiving of historical occurrences and their potential for acquiring meaning.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c5cht3
Book Title: Irony on Occasion: From Schlegel and Kierkegaard to Derrida and de Man- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Newmark Kevin
Abstract: What is it about irony--as an object of serious philosophical reflection and a literary technique of considerable elasticity--that makes it an occasion for endless critical debate? This book responds to this question by focusing on several key moments in German Romanticism and its afterlife in twentieth-century French thought and writing. It includes chapters on Friedrich Schlegel, Soren Kierkegaard, Friedrich Nietzsche, Thomas Mann, Jean Paulhan, Maurice Blanchot, Jacques Derrida, and Paul de Man. A coda traces the way unresolved tensions inherited from Romanticism resurface in a novelist like J. M. Coetzee. But this book is neither a historical nor a thematic study of irony. To the degree that irony initiates a deflection of meaning, it also entails a divergence from historical and thematic models of understanding. The book therefore aims to respect irony's digressive force by allowing it to emerge from questions that sometimes have little or nothing to do with the ostensible topic of irony. For if irony is the possibility that whatever is being said does not coincide fully with whatever is being meant, then there is no guarantee that the most legitimate approach to the problem would proceed directly to those places where "irony" is named, described, or presumed to reside. Rather than providing a history of irony, then, this book examines particular occasions of ironic disruption. It thus offers an alternative model for conceiving of historical occurrences and their potential for acquiring meaning.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c5cht3
5 A Tragedy and a Dream: from:
Carnal Hermeneutics
Author(s) KRISTEVA JULIA
Abstract: The financial, economic, and political crisis that is spreading throughout Europe and the world today is showing itself to be an existential crisis in which we are lacking a new humanism. “New humanism” is humanism that is capable of recognizing its source in Christian humanism and its debt towards this tradition, notably Catholic, and at the same time taking account of new disciplines at the heart of new historic and social conditions.
10 Touched by Touching from:
Carnal Hermeneutics
Author(s) WOOD DAVID
Abstract: In this paper I take select concrete “instances” as opportunities for reflection, openings for imagining a broader practice of carnal hermeneutics. These instances include snatches of conversation, experiences, and works of art. The general assumption is that these cases exhibit many “thinks at a time,” that philosophical reflection can bring this out, and that such reflection feeds back into deepening the original experience. After years in the deconstructive trenches, I have been recently influenced by a certain strain of Wittgensteinian practice. I have come to think that the point of philosophy is to encourage and inculcate dispositions that take up
11 Umbilicus: from:
Carnal Hermeneutics
Author(s) O’BYRNE ANNE
Abstract: If we think of bodies, as Descartes did, as entities that cannot occupy the same place at the same time, we find ourselves thinking of solid forms—cones, cubes, spheres—that occupy space to the exclusion of others. Each geometrical shape is clear and distinct, so that when we imagine them as concrete forms their edges are sharp, their surfaces hard and their internal solidity unbroken by gaps or splits or emptinesses. We imagine solid bodies—steel balls, wooden cubes, glass prisms—that abut, touch one another, lie side by side, bump into each other, but cannot be in the
15 The Passion According to Teresa of Avila from:
Carnal Hermeneutics
Author(s) KRISTEVA JULIA
Abstract: Teresa of Avila (1515–1582) experienced and wrote about what we call mysticism at a time when Spain’s glory and power—that of the Conquistadors and the Golden Age—began its decline. Erasmus and Luther were shaking up traditional beliefs; new Catholics such as the Alumbrados attracted Jews and women; the Inquisition banned books in Castilian; and trials to determine the “
limieza de sangre” multiplied. The daughter of a “christiana vieja” and a “converso,” Teresa, in her childhood, witnessed the case brought against her father’s family in which they had to prove they were truly Christian and not Jewish. Teresa’s
18 Original Breath from:
Carnal Hermeneutics
Author(s) MACKENDRICK KARMEN
Abstract: It is not clear that this marks a very promising start for a carnal hermeneutics. If we could somehow take a text by itself, out of its context and history, it might. But, of course, this story of Genesis enters into the long history of the Abrahamic faiths. There it encounters in subsequent millennia an insistence on a God who is beyond and outside all time and place. That already makes speaking very strange, and it becomes stranger still with the insistence that creation must be
ex nihilo, that before this speaking creator there is
5 A Tragedy and a Dream: from:
Carnal Hermeneutics
Author(s) KRISTEVA JULIA
Abstract: The financial, economic, and political crisis that is spreading throughout Europe and the world today is showing itself to be an existential crisis in which we are lacking a new humanism. “New humanism” is humanism that is capable of recognizing its source in Christian humanism and its debt towards this tradition, notably Catholic, and at the same time taking account of new disciplines at the heart of new historic and social conditions.
10 Touched by Touching from:
Carnal Hermeneutics
Author(s) WOOD DAVID
Abstract: In this paper I take select concrete “instances” as opportunities for reflection, openings for imagining a broader practice of carnal hermeneutics. These instances include snatches of conversation, experiences, and works of art. The general assumption is that these cases exhibit many “thinks at a time,” that philosophical reflection can bring this out, and that such reflection feeds back into deepening the original experience. After years in the deconstructive trenches, I have been recently influenced by a certain strain of Wittgensteinian practice. I have come to think that the point of philosophy is to encourage and inculcate dispositions that take up
11 Umbilicus: from:
Carnal Hermeneutics
Author(s) O’BYRNE ANNE
Abstract: If we think of bodies, as Descartes did, as entities that cannot occupy the same place at the same time, we find ourselves thinking of solid forms—cones, cubes, spheres—that occupy space to the exclusion of others. Each geometrical shape is clear and distinct, so that when we imagine them as concrete forms their edges are sharp, their surfaces hard and their internal solidity unbroken by gaps or splits or emptinesses. We imagine solid bodies—steel balls, wooden cubes, glass prisms—that abut, touch one another, lie side by side, bump into each other, but cannot be in the
15 The Passion According to Teresa of Avila from:
Carnal Hermeneutics
Author(s) KRISTEVA JULIA
Abstract: Teresa of Avila (1515–1582) experienced and wrote about what we call mysticism at a time when Spain’s glory and power—that of the Conquistadors and the Golden Age—began its decline. Erasmus and Luther were shaking up traditional beliefs; new Catholics such as the Alumbrados attracted Jews and women; the Inquisition banned books in Castilian; and trials to determine the “
limieza de sangre” multiplied. The daughter of a “christiana vieja” and a “converso,” Teresa, in her childhood, witnessed the case brought against her father’s family in which they had to prove they were truly Christian and not Jewish. Teresa’s
18 Original Breath from:
Carnal Hermeneutics
Author(s) MACKENDRICK KARMEN
Abstract: It is not clear that this marks a very promising start for a carnal hermeneutics. If we could somehow take a text by itself, out of its context and history, it might. But, of course, this story of Genesis enters into the long history of the Abrahamic faiths. There it encounters in subsequent millennia an insistence on a God who is beyond and outside all time and place. That already makes speaking very strange, and it becomes stranger still with the insistence that creation must be
ex nihilo, that before this speaking creator there is
5 A Tragedy and a Dream: from:
Carnal Hermeneutics
Author(s) KRISTEVA JULIA
Abstract: The financial, economic, and political crisis that is spreading throughout Europe and the world today is showing itself to be an existential crisis in which we are lacking a new humanism. “New humanism” is humanism that is capable of recognizing its source in Christian humanism and its debt towards this tradition, notably Catholic, and at the same time taking account of new disciplines at the heart of new historic and social conditions.
10 Touched by Touching from:
Carnal Hermeneutics
Author(s) WOOD DAVID
Abstract: In this paper I take select concrete “instances” as opportunities for reflection, openings for imagining a broader practice of carnal hermeneutics. These instances include snatches of conversation, experiences, and works of art. The general assumption is that these cases exhibit many “thinks at a time,” that philosophical reflection can bring this out, and that such reflection feeds back into deepening the original experience. After years in the deconstructive trenches, I have been recently influenced by a certain strain of Wittgensteinian practice. I have come to think that the point of philosophy is to encourage and inculcate dispositions that take up
11 Umbilicus: from:
Carnal Hermeneutics
Author(s) O’BYRNE ANNE
Abstract: If we think of bodies, as Descartes did, as entities that cannot occupy the same place at the same time, we find ourselves thinking of solid forms—cones, cubes, spheres—that occupy space to the exclusion of others. Each geometrical shape is clear and distinct, so that when we imagine them as concrete forms their edges are sharp, their surfaces hard and their internal solidity unbroken by gaps or splits or emptinesses. We imagine solid bodies—steel balls, wooden cubes, glass prisms—that abut, touch one another, lie side by side, bump into each other, but cannot be in the
15 The Passion According to Teresa of Avila from:
Carnal Hermeneutics
Author(s) KRISTEVA JULIA
Abstract: Teresa of Avila (1515–1582) experienced and wrote about what we call mysticism at a time when Spain’s glory and power—that of the Conquistadors and the Golden Age—began its decline. Erasmus and Luther were shaking up traditional beliefs; new Catholics such as the Alumbrados attracted Jews and women; the Inquisition banned books in Castilian; and trials to determine the “
limieza de sangre” multiplied. The daughter of a “christiana vieja” and a “converso,” Teresa, in her childhood, witnessed the case brought against her father’s family in which they had to prove they were truly Christian and not Jewish. Teresa’s
18 Original Breath from:
Carnal Hermeneutics
Author(s) MACKENDRICK KARMEN
Abstract: It is not clear that this marks a very promising start for a carnal hermeneutics. If we could somehow take a text by itself, out of its context and history, it might. But, of course, this story of Genesis enters into the long history of the Abrahamic faiths. There it encounters in subsequent millennia an insistence on a God who is beyond and outside all time and place. That already makes speaking very strange, and it becomes stranger still with the insistence that creation must be
ex nihilo, that before this speaking creator there is
Book Title: Re-treating Religion: Deconstructing Christianity with Jean-Luc Nancy- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Nancy Jean-Luc
Abstract: One of the most complicated and ambiguous tendencies in contemporary western societies is the phenomenon referred to as the turn to religion.In philosophy, one of the most original thinkers critically questioning this turnis Jean-Luc Nancy. Re-treating Religion is the first volume to analyze his long-term project The Deconstruction of Christianity,especially his major statement of it in Dis-Enclosure.Nancy conceives monotheistic religion and secularization not as opposite worldviews that succeed each other in time but rather as springing from the same history. This history consists in a paradoxical tendency to contest one's own foundations-whether God, truth, origin, humanity, or rationality-as well as to found itself on the void of this contestation. Nancy calls this unique combination of self-contestation and self-foundation the self-deconstructionof the Western world.The book includes discussion with Nancy himself, who contributes a substantial Preambleand a concluding dialogue with the volume editors. The contributions follow Nancy in tracing the complexities of Western culture back to the persistent legacy of monotheism, in order to illuminate the tensions and uncertainties we face in the twenty-first century.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c5cjjf
Thinking Alterity—In One or Two? from:
Re-treating Religion: Deconstructing Christianity with Jean-Luc Nancy
Author(s) van PEPERSTRATEN FRANS
Abstract: Recent political problems in some European countries are once again strongly associated with religious differences within their populations. From within one religion, another religion or the absence of religion is experienced as alterity. At the same time, religion is in itself a way of experiencing alterity, namely, the alterity usually indicated with the word
God.
On Dis-enclosure and Its Gesture, Adoration: from:
Re-treating Religion: Deconstructing Christianity with Jean-Luc Nancy
Author(s) McKeane John
Abstract: After reading the manuscript of
Re-treating Religion, Jean-Luc Nancy proposed responding in the form of a dialogue about the central issues, problems, and perspectives of a deconstruction of Christianity and monotheism more generally. This conversation took place at his house in Strasbourg on June 27, 2009. At that time, Nancy was working onAdoration, the second volume of hisDeconstruction of Christianity, which appeared in spring 2010. As a result, this dialogue not only deals with the general topics of Nancy’s project but also creates a bridge fromDis-enclosureto the new book. On its back cover, Nancy expresses the
Book Title: Hidden Intercourse: Eros and Sexuality in the History of Western Esotericism- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Kripal Jeffrey J.
Abstract: From rumors about gnostic orgies in antiquity to the explicit erotic symbolism of alchemical texts, from the subtly coded eroticism of medieval kabbalah to the sexual magic practiced by contemporary occultists and countercultural translations of Asian Tantra, the history of Western esotericism is rich in references to the domains of eros and sexuality. This volume, which brings together an impressive array of top-level specialists, is the first to analyze the eroticism of the esoteric without sensationalism or cheap generalizations, but on the basis of expert scholarship and attention to textual and historical detail. While there are few domains where the imagination may so easily run wild, the various contributions seek to distinguish fact from fiction-only to find that historical realities are sometimes even stranger than the fantasies. In doing so, they reveal the outlines of a largely unknown history spanning more than twenty centuries.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c5cjzn
TA‘ANUG: from:
Hidden Intercourse: Eros and Sexuality in the History of Western Esotericism
Author(s) Idel Moshe
Abstract: Describing feelings is a notoriously difficult thing to do. The problem is enhanced when those who do so use a language that is not their vernacular, and even more so when that language is part of sacred scriptures, which are understood as paradigmatic and as informing or teaching some sublime forms of experience that took place in the glorious past. Caught between the artificiality of the language and the authority of the sacred texts, the dimension of personal experience is often attenuated and sometimes even obliterated. Clichés, models, paragons, rituals, and ideals canonized in the ancient past are powerful obstacles
Book Title: Hidden Intercourse: Eros and Sexuality in the History of Western Esotericism- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Kripal Jeffrey J.
Abstract: From rumors about gnostic orgies in antiquity to the explicit erotic symbolism of alchemical texts, from the subtly coded eroticism of medieval kabbalah to the sexual magic practiced by contemporary occultists and countercultural translations of Asian Tantra, the history of Western esotericism is rich in references to the domains of eros and sexuality. This volume, which brings together an impressive array of top-level specialists, is the first to analyze the eroticism of the esoteric without sensationalism or cheap generalizations, but on the basis of expert scholarship and attention to textual and historical detail. While there are few domains where the imagination may so easily run wild, the various contributions seek to distinguish fact from fiction-only to find that historical realities are sometimes even stranger than the fantasies. In doing so, they reveal the outlines of a largely unknown history spanning more than twenty centuries.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c5cjzn
TA‘ANUG: from:
Hidden Intercourse: Eros and Sexuality in the History of Western Esotericism
Author(s) Idel Moshe
Abstract: Describing feelings is a notoriously difficult thing to do. The problem is enhanced when those who do so use a language that is not their vernacular, and even more so when that language is part of sacred scriptures, which are understood as paradigmatic and as informing or teaching some sublime forms of experience that took place in the glorious past. Caught between the artificiality of the language and the authority of the sacred texts, the dimension of personal experience is often attenuated and sometimes even obliterated. Clichés, models, paragons, rituals, and ideals canonized in the ancient past are powerful obstacles
4 Performing Revelation from:
Insights from Performance Criticism
Abstract: The book of Revelation has long captivated the imagination with vivid images, colors, sounds, and drama.¹ It has moved artists to create paintings, music, and sculpture. People have used it to speculate on the timing of cosmic events and to identify enemies of God. For better and, sometimes, for worse, the book of Revelation has been performed for many audiences and has influenced
culture, power relationships, andidentitysince its first performances in first-century Asia Minor, what we now call western Turkey.
5 Ten Insights from Performance Criticism from:
Insights from Performance Criticism
Abstract: By preparing, internalizing, and performing texts, I have been given many insights into the texts themselves, the impact they have on audiences, and how biblical studies can change to better address how traditions were transmitted in ancient times and how they function in modern times. Of the many insights that could be chosen, here are my top ten.
9 Lukan Cosmology and the Ascension from:
Ascent into Heaven in Luke-Acts
Author(s) Anderson Charles
Abstract: On an episode of the television show
The West Wing, White House Press Secretary C. J. Cregg meets with the Organization of Cartographers for Social Equality.¹ They want President Bartlett to support legislation for schools to discard the Mercator Projection map in favor of the Peters Projection. Their reason? The traditional map distorts the relative size of countries and continents and thus fosters European imperialist attitudes. Cregg is skeptical, until the cartographers point out that despite their similar size on the Mercator map, Africa is 14 times larger than Greenland. The cartographers show the press secretary the Peters Projection map,
6 The Senses of Augustine: from:
On the Anarchy of Poetry and Philosophy
Abstract: The Pagan. At the time of his death in 1998 the French philosopher Jean-François Lyotard had begun writing what was to have been a substantial work on Augustine’sConfessions. In the event he has left us only fragments—notes, paragraphs,envois, sketches, and two lectures stitched together to form a kind of monograph called “La Confession d’Augustin”:theconfession, referring, as we shall see, to Augustine’s confession of his love for God. Like all of Lyotard’s productions, this posthumous assembly leaves us guessing as to what kind of writing it is supposed to be. In fact Lyotard was never much
Book Title: Writings on Medicine- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Meyers Todd
Abstract: At the time of his death in 1995, Georges Canguilhem was a highly respected historian of science and medicine, whose engagement with questions of normality, the ideologization of scientific thought, and the conceptual history of biology had marked the thought of philosophers such as Michel Foucault, Louis Althusser, Pierre Bourdieu, and Gilles Deleuze. This collection of short, incisive, and highly accessible essays on the major concepts of modern medicine shows Canguilhem at the peak of his use of historical practice for philosophical engagement. In order to elaborate a philosophy of medicine, Canguilhem examines paramount problems such as the definition and uses of health, the decline of the Hippocratic understanding of nature, the experience of disease, the limits of psychology in medicine, myths and realities of therapeutic practices, the difference between cure and healing, the organism's self-regulation, and medical metaphors linking the organism to society. Writings on Medicine is at once an excellent introduction to Canguilhem's work and a forceful, insightful, and accessible engagement with elemental concepts in medicine. The book is certain to leave its imprint on anthropology, history, philosophy, bioethics, and the social studies of medicine.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c84gs6
INTRODUCTION: from:
Writings on Medicine
Author(s) Meyers Todd
Abstract: At the time of his death in 1995, Georges Canguilhem was a highly respected epistemologist and historian of biology and medicine. He was known for having extended and transformed traditions set by Gaston Bachelard and Henri Bergson, and as an influential figure for generations of scholars, including Michel Foucault, François Dagognet, Louis Althusser, Pierre Bourdieu, Dominique Lecourt, Gilbert Simondon, and Gilles Deleuze. At different stages of his life, he was in conversation with important contemporaries, among them François Jacob, Jean Hyppolite, Maurice Merleau-Ponty, Jean Cavaillès, Kurt Goldstein, and René Leriche. He spearheaded both a radical undermining of scientific positivism and
TWO Diseases from:
Writings on Medicine
Abstract: At the beginning of his
Essays on Painting, Diderot writes: “Nature does nothing incorrectly. Every form, beautiful or ugly, has its reason; and of all the beings that exist, there is not one that is not as it must be.”¹ One can imagine anEssays on Medicinethat would begin with: “Nature does nothing arbitrarily. Disease, like health, has its reason, and among all the living beings, there is not one whose state is not as it must be.”² This kind of prologue could not concern all populations at all times. Over centuries and in many places, illness was either
FIVE The Problem of Regulation in the Organism and in Society from:
Writings on Medicine
Abstract: When my friend Pierre-Maxime Schuhl¹ asked me to lecture at a meeting of the Alliance Israé lite Universelle, I accepted gladly and with great pleasure; it is an honor for me, and I only regret having had to pose this one condition— for which I apologize—which resulted in us meeting at a time so out of the ordinary.
Book Title: Constellations of a Contemporary Romanticism- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): McGrath Brian
Abstract: Constellations of a Contemporary Romanticism takes its title and point of departure from Walter Benjamin's concept of the historical constellation, which puts both "contemporary" and "romanticism" in play as period designations and critical paradigms. Featuring fascinating and diverse contributions by an international roster of distinguished scholars working in and out of romanticism--from deconstruction to new historicism, from queer theory to postcolonial studies, from visual culture to biopolitics--this volume makes good on a central tenet of Benjamin's conception of history: These critics "grasp the constellation" into which our "own era has formed with a definite earlier one." Each of these essays approaches romanticism as a decisive and unexpired thought experiment that makes demands on and poses questions for our own time: What is the unlived of a contemporary romanticism? What has romanticism's singular untimeliness bequeathed to futurity? What is romanticism's contemporary "redemption value" for painting and politics, philosophy and film?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c99996
Here There Is No After (Richter’s History) from:
Constellations of a Contemporary Romanticism
Author(s) Guyer Sara
Abstract: What is contemporary romanticism? What is its time? Its date? These questions—of aesthetics, periodization, legacy, and continuity—are bound up with another question: what does it mean to come after? In some sense the question is one we understand: A comes after B, October follows September. But in some other sense, it is utterly enigmatic, especially when we are talking about something other than a clearly marked point—a place in the alphabet, a calendar—but rather an event whose effects and aftereffects are neither fully known nor fully understood even after we say that it has come to
Goya’s Scarcity from:
Constellations of a Contemporary Romanticism
Author(s) Clark David L.
Abstract: Recent discussions of the Francisco Jose de Goya y Lucientes’s series or, better,
assemblageof influential prints that came posthumously to be known asThe Disasters of War(c. 1810–1820; published 1863) locate the artist’s unsparing vision of wartime degradation in a necropolitical context in which proliferating sovereign power fuses indistinctly with the unrestrained destruction of others and otherness.² The genesis of the assemblage lies in the singular circumstances in which Spain found itself in 1808. As Gonzalo Anes describes it:
The Tone of Praise from:
Constellations of a Contemporary Romanticism
Author(s) de Bolla Peter
Abstract: This essay is prompted by a set of remarks the American philosopher Stanley Cavell makes in the introduction to his 2005 collection of essays titled
Philosophy the Day after Tomorrow. As my title indicates, I shall be mostly concerned to think with what is, at least to me, the extremely fecund and surprising notion that praise and its voiced or sounded manifestations might constitute an acknowledgment not only that the world is but also that its being is open. In the first section I take some time to explore the ways in which Cavell introduces—even stumbles across—and then
Dancing in the Dark with Shelley from:
Constellations of a Contemporary Romanticism
Author(s) Faflak Joel
Abstract: This chapter entertains film musicals as what Jacques Khalip calls “the romantic remains of a modernity that defines itself in the claims it cannot reflect, and which it cannot also bury.”² John Ridpath wonders, “If films were once likened to the theatre, perhaps the modern movie is closer to the musical.” Video and digital media have turned cinema’s “immobile, attentive, disciplined, receptive” public into a “distracted audience” engaged in “boundless activity.” This shift transforms cinema’s private catharsis into democratic exchange at the same time that it broadcasts desire as pleasure’s same dull round. For J. Hoberman, this “‘cyborg cinema’” turns
2. The Reformation of Memory in Early Modern Europe from:
Memory
Author(s) Sherlock Peter
Abstract: Europe witnessed a revolution in memory during the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries. By the eighteenth century, the ancient “arts of memory” were archaic. The explosive power of print had made it possible both to archive and to multiply knowledge cheaply and efficiently in books. Oral testimony was increasingly displaced by written records. New bureaucratic structures designed to record information on evergreater numbers of individuals abounded. Scientific discoveries forced a reappraisal of the very nature of the universe, including time as well as space. Most potently of all, social memory was hotly contested as polemicists sought to shape and legitimize the
8. Siegfried Kracauer and Walter Benjamin: from:
Memory
Author(s) Leslie Esther
Abstract: In mid-December 1932 Siegfried Kracauer wrote a short newspaper article entitled “Street without Memory.” Here he describes Berlin’s fashionable shopping street, the Kurfürstendamm, as a place voided of memory: “the embodiment of empty flowing time, where nothing persists.”¹ He relates how on visiting a café where he often ate, and where he was sure he had peeked in the night before, he found it closed, its interior emptied. A year later he found that the café’s replacement, a patisserie, had suffered the same fate. Having disappeared, these spaces do not become part of memory, for “constant change purges memory.”² Reflecting
11. Deleuze and the Overcoming of Memory from:
Memory
Author(s) Ansell-Pearson Keith
Abstract: Gilles Deleuze’s reading of Proust’s novel
In Search of Lost Time(À la recherche du temps perdu) inProust and Signscontains the striking claim that what constitutes its unity is not memory, not even involuntary memory. The “search” is not steered by the effort of recall or the exploration of memory, but by the desire for truth (which, following Nietzsche, we can say is always “hard”).¹ Memory intervenes in this search only as a means but not the most profound means, just as past time intervenes as a structure of time but not the most profound one. Moreover, according
13. Memories Are Made of This from:
Memory
Author(s) Rose Steven
Abstract: “If any one faculty of our nature may be called more wonderful than the rest, I do think it is memory. There seems something more speakingly incomprehensible in the powers, the failures, the inequalities of memory, than in any other of our intelligences. The memory is sometimes so retentive, so serviceable, so obedient—at others, so bewildered and so weak—and at others again, so tyrannical, so beyond controul!—We are to be sure a miracle in every way—but our powers of recollecting and forgetting, do seem peculiarly past finding out.”
22. Cinema and Memory from:
Memory
Author(s) Radstone Susannah
Abstract: The recent film
The Butterfly Effect(Eric Bress and J. Mackye Gruber, 2004) tells the story of a young man, Evan, whose capacity to recover lost memories goes further than most, for once his memories return, he learns how to “jump into” the scenes of his past, traveling back in time to divert fate and put right the wrongs of the past. But this “memory travel” turns out to be doomed from the start. Only by killing himself at birth, Evan discovers, can he change the past and save the girl he loves. In an early scene, Evan is undergoing
23. Machines of Memory from:
Memory
Author(s) Parisi Luciana
Abstract: In the age of sampling, chronology is twisted from a straight line into a loop. Cybernetic memories are plucked out of history, stored in machine banks, to be potentially mutated, then reassembled in any combination rhythmically. Digitally coded events leave sensory residue across distributed networks of body-machines. Memories are transgenetically transported across species and scales; biological programming becomes folded into unintended host bodies in a mnemonic symbiosis: layers of memory stratified into a machinery of achronological time.
27. The Long Afterlife of Loss from:
Memory
Author(s) Hoffman Eva
Abstract: Loss leaves a long trail in its wake. Sometimes, if the loss is large enough, the trail seeps and winds like invisible psychic ink through individual lives, decades, and generations. When the losses are as enormous as those that followed from the Holocaust—when what was lost was not only individuals but a world—the disappearances and the absences may haunt us unto the third generation; and they may inform our very vision of the world.
3 The Avatars of First Philosophy from:
Phenomenology Wide Open: After the French Debate
Abstract: That phenomenology is a fundamentally philosophical enterprise and that it is based on a decisive act of bracketing (
mise entre parenthèses) of the natural attitude—here are two essential elements of the Husserlian legacy that any phenomenology worthy of its name would seem obliged to accept, even today. However, Husserl was even more ambitious: thanks to phenomenology, he was able to champion both the re-foundationof philosophy as a rigorous science and as a first philosophy at the same time. Under what conditions can this ambition be reaffirmed or displaced? And to what extent? Within what limits?
4 Articulations/Disarticulations from:
Phenomenology Wide Open: After the French Debate
Abstract: Having noted and analyzed the main aporias and the non-negligible misunderstandings which flow from the will to institute (or to reinstate) phenomenology as first philosophy, it is now time to adopt a more positive point of view by addressing the inevitable question: “Is the phenomenological project amendable?”
3 The Avatars of First Philosophy from:
Phenomenology Wide Open: After the French Debate
Abstract: That phenomenology is a fundamentally philosophical enterprise and that it is based on a decisive act of bracketing (
mise entre parenthèses) of the natural attitude—here are two essential elements of the Husserlian legacy that any phenomenology worthy of its name would seem obliged to accept, even today. However, Husserl was even more ambitious: thanks to phenomenology, he was able to champion both the re-foundationof philosophy as a rigorous science and as a first philosophy at the same time. Under what conditions can this ambition be reaffirmed or displaced? And to what extent? Within what limits?
4 Articulations/Disarticulations from:
Phenomenology Wide Open: After the French Debate
Abstract: Having noted and analyzed the main aporias and the non-negligible misunderstandings which flow from the will to institute (or to reinstate) phenomenology as first philosophy, it is now time to adopt a more positive point of view by addressing the inevitable question: “Is the phenomenological project amendable?”
3 The Avatars of First Philosophy from:
Phenomenology Wide Open: After the French Debate
Abstract: That phenomenology is a fundamentally philosophical enterprise and that it is based on a decisive act of bracketing (
mise entre parenthèses) of the natural attitude—here are two essential elements of the Husserlian legacy that any phenomenology worthy of its name would seem obliged to accept, even today. However, Husserl was even more ambitious: thanks to phenomenology, he was able to champion both the re-foundationof philosophy as a rigorous science and as a first philosophy at the same time. Under what conditions can this ambition be reaffirmed or displaced? And to what extent? Within what limits?
4 Articulations/Disarticulations from:
Phenomenology Wide Open: After the French Debate
Abstract: Having noted and analyzed the main aporias and the non-negligible misunderstandings which flow from the will to institute (or to reinstate) phenomenology as first philosophy, it is now time to adopt a more positive point of view by addressing the inevitable question: “Is the phenomenological project amendable?”
CHAPTER 1 “J” Is for Jouissance from:
Provocations to Reading: J. Hillis Miller and the Democracy to Come
Author(s) MacCannell Juliet Flower
Abstract: For me, the most valuable aspect of J. Hillis Miller’s work is his persistent questioning of literary language in the context of a widely ranging philosophical inquiry into the human (and lately the inhuman) conditions in which literature emerges. From his first to his most recent books, we find Miller courageously confronting whatever the mind has thought unfathomable. Indeed, Hillis Miller is one of the few great critics of our time to underscore precisely the
provocativeelement in literature as he unfailingly highlights how literature stirs the mental labor necessary to face whatever threatens to flood the mind and ruin
[PART TWO: Introduction] from:
Machiavellian Rhetoric
Abstract: DECADES before the condemnation of Machiavellian reason of state in Counter-Reformation treatises of the 1590s and early 1600s, Cardinal Pole provided a quick sketch of the Machiavel in his
Apologia ad Carolum Quintum(1539). He tells us that Machiavelli’s works “stink of the malice of Satan” (malitiam Satanae redolent) and thatThe Princewas written “by Satan’s hand” (Satanae digito). He also offers a synopsis of Machiavelli’s rhetorical politics, noting that the prince must learn to simulate and dissimulate according to the age-old rhetorical criteria of time, place, and audience. And he condemns Machiavelli’s divorce of ethics from politics and
SIX A RHETORIC OF INDIFFERENCE from:
Machiavellian Rhetoric
Abstract: IN THIS chapter, I consider Milton’s intervention in the debate concerning things indifferent in his prose works. As we will see, in enlarging the sphere of things indifferent and giving the individual conscience discretion in such matters, Milton departs from the usual puritan position, according to which “nothing is indifferent.” At the same time, he develops the principle of indifference into a rhetoric, thereby dramatizing his awareness that the sphere of indifference is the sphere of rhetoric, in which persuasion and action may take place. Milton’s Machiavellism in his prose works is both general and specific. In reflecting on the
SEVEN VIRTUE AND VIRTÙ IN COMUS from:
Machiavellian Rhetoric
Abstract: BORROWING from J.G.A. Pocock’s description of Machiavelli’s
The Princeas “an analytic study of innovation and its consequences” (MM, 156), we can describeComusas an analytic study of virtue and its consequences or, to rephrase this in the humanist vocabulary of the time, of virtue and power (virtusandvis). InComusthe problems of agency we observed inAreopagiticaare signaled in two ways. On the one hand, the conflict between the Lady and Comus can be read as the allegorical opposition of Virtue to Force and Virtuosity, with the result that virtue comes to seem “unexercised and
6 The Poetics of War: from:
Empire of Chance
Abstract: Everything happens on a battlefield in a way that totally transcends our imagination and our powers of description.”¹ Articulated by Nikolay Rostov in Tolstoy’s
War and Peace,this claim presents one of the main challenges to the nineteenth-century novel, namely the representability of warfare. The Revolutionary and Napoleonic Wars, which had left such a profound imprint on Europe an history, seemed at the same time to evade description, to mark a hole in the textual fabric of history. In the attempt to conceptualize the wars, the literary imagination was faced not with a simple object but with an entire matrix
Introduction: from:
A Practice of Anthropology
Author(s) KELLY JOHN D.
Abstract: It is time to add Marshall Sahlins to the short list of great anthropologists, time to celebrate his contributions to the discipline, and time to discuss the far–reaching impact of his works. Sahlins has proved a more difficult (and diffdent) subject for celebratory synthesis than many of his peers. The works of Eric Wolf (Abbink and Vermeulen 1992), Louis Dumont (Heesterman 1985), and others have received the attention they deserve, and the paeans for Clifford Geertz began even before his unfortunate passing in 2006 (Ortner 1999, Shweder and Good 2005). The most important anthropologist of the period afted the
2 Monarchical Visions: from:
A Practice of Anthropology
Author(s) LINNEKIN JOCELYN
Abstract: On 18 August 1885 the Samoan high chief Malietoa Laupepa wrote a letter to Queen Victoria (Figure 2.1).¹ Addressing her as “Tupu Tamaitai,” the “Lady King” of Great Britain and Ireland, Laupepa endeavoured to clarify Samoan political custom for her. He would have her know that, according to the customary beliefs of Samoa from the earliest times,
he– Malietoa Laupepa – was the “real King” (Tupu) of Samoa. Laupepa’s letter to Victoria was but one of many appeals by would-be Samoan kings to foreign powers and powerful resident foreigners. During the protracted “kingship dispute” of the late nineteenth century, Samoan chiefly
3 Slow Time: from:
A Practice of Anthropology
Author(s) KEANE WEBB
Abstract: In its origins, anthropology was a response not only to the colonial encounter with difference, but also to the discovery of deep time (Shryock and Smail 2011, Trautmann 1992). One of the most dangerous consequences of the convergence of global reach and deep time, of course, was to conflate the two, equating others with ancients. Disciplinary self-critique eventually made it obvious that such an equation was hopelessly naive if not outright vicious, or worse. In response, many cultural anthropologists came to confine their claims to the particularity of local knowledge (Geertz 1983). Others moved toward an increasingly narrow focus on
4 From Jew to Roman: from:
A Practice of Anthropology
Author(s) KAPLAN MARTHA
Abstract: Most scholars of Fiji are familiar with Adolph Brewster Joske, British colonial official, amateur anthropologist, and memoirist, through his books
The Hill Tribes of FijiandThe King of the Cannibal Isles, books published in 1922 and 1937, respectively. By the time he published these works, he had retired to England (in 1910) and changed his name to A.B. Brewster. Some Fiji scholars have also read his copious administrative correspondence and reports, held at the Fiji National Archives and the Fiji Museum. For information on the cultural lives and political fortunes of the people of the highlands of Viti Levu,
9 Way–Finding: from:
A Practice of Anthropology
Author(s) DENING GREG
Abstract: “Way-finding” is the term that modern islanders use to describe their craft and the craft of their ancestors in piloting their voyaging canoes around the Great Ocean, the Pacific, and the Sea of Islands. They prefer to call themselves way-finders rather than navigators. Navigation is a more universal science of instruments and the application of systems of time and space as broad as the cosmos itself. Way-finding is a more interpretive craft closer to the signs the systems of the cosmos imprint on the environment. No navigators would distance themselves from the myriad of signs in sea and sky, wind
5 Monologue with Freud from:
Freud's Moses
Abstract: Four lectures on your Moses, but for what remains I feel an inner need to speak to you directly and to have the audience eavesdrop, as it were. Whence this compulsion (for it is not merely a caprice) I cannot fully articulate even to myself. I know only that this fiction which I somehow do not feel to be fictitious enables me a mode of speech which has hitherto not been possible, but which now becomes imperative because we have reached a time of reckoning. All this will probably strike you as impudence,
Book Title: The Idea of Wilderness-From Prehistory to the Age of Ecology
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): OELSCHLAEGER MAX
Abstract: How has the concept of wild nature changed over the millennia? And what have been the environmental consequences? In this broad-ranging book Max Oelschlaeger argues that the idea of wilderness has reflected the evolving character of human existence from Paleolithic times to the present day. An intellectual history, it draws together evidence from philosophy, anthropology, theology, literature, ecology, cultural geography, and archaeology to provide a new scientifically and philosophically informed understanding of humankind's relationship to nature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cc2krg
CHAPTER TWO Ancient Mediterranean Ideas of Humankind and Nature: from:
The Idea of Wilderness
Abstract: The prehistoric mediterranean world is sometimes characterized as “the first Eden” or “garden of God.”¹ The roots of the word
Edeninclude the Babylonianeinduand the HebrewÉdhen, translated variously as paradise, plain, and hunting ground. The transition from a hunting-foraging way of life toagri-culture has often been associated with or identified as the so-called Fall.² In leaving the Paleolithic world for the Neolithic, humankind likely encountered a host of woes and travails unknown in its collective experience, not the least of which was work itself. Paleolithic peoples, existing in traditional ways established over untold millennia, lived in
Book Title: The Idea of Wilderness-From Prehistory to the Age of Ecology
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): OELSCHLAEGER MAX
Abstract: How has the concept of wild nature changed over the millennia? And what have been the environmental consequences? In this broad-ranging book Max Oelschlaeger argues that the idea of wilderness has reflected the evolving character of human existence from Paleolithic times to the present day. An intellectual history, it draws together evidence from philosophy, anthropology, theology, literature, ecology, cultural geography, and archaeology to provide a new scientifically and philosophically informed understanding of humankind's relationship to nature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cc2krg
CHAPTER TWO Ancient Mediterranean Ideas of Humankind and Nature: from:
The Idea of Wilderness
Abstract: The prehistoric mediterranean world is sometimes characterized as “the first Eden” or “garden of God.”¹ The roots of the word
Edeninclude the Babylonianeinduand the HebrewÉdhen, translated variously as paradise, plain, and hunting ground. The transition from a hunting-foraging way of life toagri-culture has often been associated with or identified as the so-called Fall.² In leaving the Paleolithic world for the Neolithic, humankind likely encountered a host of woes and travails unknown in its collective experience, not the least of which was work itself. Paleolithic peoples, existing in traditional ways established over untold millennia, lived in
Book Title: The Idea of Wilderness-From Prehistory to the Age of Ecology
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): OELSCHLAEGER MAX
Abstract: How has the concept of wild nature changed over the millennia? And what have been the environmental consequences? In this broad-ranging book Max Oelschlaeger argues that the idea of wilderness has reflected the evolving character of human existence from Paleolithic times to the present day. An intellectual history, it draws together evidence from philosophy, anthropology, theology, literature, ecology, cultural geography, and archaeology to provide a new scientifically and philosophically informed understanding of humankind's relationship to nature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cc2krg
CHAPTER TWO Ancient Mediterranean Ideas of Humankind and Nature: from:
The Idea of Wilderness
Abstract: The prehistoric mediterranean world is sometimes characterized as “the first Eden” or “garden of God.”¹ The roots of the word
Edeninclude the Babylonianeinduand the HebrewÉdhen, translated variously as paradise, plain, and hunting ground. The transition from a hunting-foraging way of life toagri-culture has often been associated with or identified as the so-called Fall.² In leaving the Paleolithic world for the Neolithic, humankind likely encountered a host of woes and travails unknown in its collective experience, not the least of which was work itself. Paleolithic peoples, existing in traditional ways established over untold millennia, lived in
1 “The Theory of Life”: from:
Wallace Stevens among Others
Abstract: In the following collection of readings largely inspired by the work of Wallace Stevens, I endeavour to situate his poetry, sometimes directly and in other cases quite speculatively, among contexts not often associated with its extraordinary achievement in the annals of modern American culture: the gay alongside the straight fictional narrative (as in chapters 2 and 3), the classic American film (chapter 4), the postwar poetic “school” (chapter 5), and even contemporary architecture (chapter 6). Among these “other” contexts thanks to Stevens, I continue further to advance the claim elaborated previously (in
Going the Distance: Dissident Subjectivity and Modernist American
Introduction from:
Twentieth Century Theories of Art
Abstract: Although it is not always recognized, art is produced and enjoyed and even defined against a background of theories and ideas. Oversimplifying greatly, up to the 18th century theories of art were largely developments of and reactions to elements in Greek thought. The 18th and 19th centuries saw a tremendous development of new thinking about art. The 20th century has been even more prolific in production of new approaches. Some are developments of earlier themes but on the whole they can be studied independently. At the same time one can discern a good deal of interrelation between those 20th century
4. Forgetting and remembering the digital experience and digital data from:
Archaeology and Memory
Author(s) Tringham Ruth
Abstract: This paper grew out of a conversation about memories; about remembering my first Mac; what a sharp memory and a powerful event it was; and how all the memories of using computers and their peripherals in the field since then explode in its wake with ever increasing complexity and speed until the digital media engulf and revolutionise our field experience and we can hardly remember a time when experience in the field was entirely non-digital.
8. The depiction of time on the Arch of Constantine from:
Archaeology and Memory
Author(s) Gutteridge Adam
Abstract: The Arch of Constantine was dedicated by the Senate of Rome, in celebration of the tenth year of the Emperor Constantine’s rule. Constantine had been acclaimed Emperor on the occasion of the death of his father, Constantius I, in AD 306 at York. At that time the Roman Empire was ruled by a collegiate system of Imperial government, with four emperors holding power together. The system of succession in this tetrarchy was non-hereditary, and Constantine’s attempt to become a member of the ruling Imperial college following the sudden death of his father amounted to a usurpation of legitimate authority, and
9. Archaeology and memory on the Western Front from:
Archaeology and Memory
Author(s) Filippucci Paola
Abstract: The debris and devastation of the First World War in Belgium and France were quite rapidly removed and repaired during the early 1920s (see Clout 1996). Th e remains of trenches, shell-holes, dugouts and other installations were filled up with other debris and covered with a shallow layer of topsoil so that where possible cultivation and habitation could be restored. Only in the vicinity of memorials or monuments sometimes remains of the battlefield were preserved and conserved (see Gough 2004). Elsewhere, hasty burial and removal has helped to preserve wartime remains and war-shaped landscapes (see Saunders 2002). Excavations to retrieve
4. Forgetting and remembering the digital experience and digital data from:
Archaeology and Memory
Author(s) Tringham Ruth
Abstract: This paper grew out of a conversation about memories; about remembering my first Mac; what a sharp memory and a powerful event it was; and how all the memories of using computers and their peripherals in the field since then explode in its wake with ever increasing complexity and speed until the digital media engulf and revolutionise our field experience and we can hardly remember a time when experience in the field was entirely non-digital.
8. The depiction of time on the Arch of Constantine from:
Archaeology and Memory
Author(s) Gutteridge Adam
Abstract: The Arch of Constantine was dedicated by the Senate of Rome, in celebration of the tenth year of the Emperor Constantine’s rule. Constantine had been acclaimed Emperor on the occasion of the death of his father, Constantius I, in AD 306 at York. At that time the Roman Empire was ruled by a collegiate system of Imperial government, with four emperors holding power together. The system of succession in this tetrarchy was non-hereditary, and Constantine’s attempt to become a member of the ruling Imperial college following the sudden death of his father amounted to a usurpation of legitimate authority, and
9. Archaeology and memory on the Western Front from:
Archaeology and Memory
Author(s) Filippucci Paola
Abstract: The debris and devastation of the First World War in Belgium and France were quite rapidly removed and repaired during the early 1920s (see Clout 1996). Th e remains of trenches, shell-holes, dugouts and other installations were filled up with other debris and covered with a shallow layer of topsoil so that where possible cultivation and habitation could be restored. Only in the vicinity of memorials or monuments sometimes remains of the battlefield were preserved and conserved (see Gough 2004). Elsewhere, hasty burial and removal has helped to preserve wartime remains and war-shaped landscapes (see Saunders 2002). Excavations to retrieve
4 Experimental Archaeology: from:
Land and People
Author(s) Bell Martin
Abstract: Experimental archaeology may be defined as the creation of activities and contexts in which ideas about the past can be thought through in practical terms and tested. For instance: how were artefacts made and buildings constructed; what residues are left of particular activities; and what is the capability of a boat? Experiments often mean that some parameters are controlled in order to make precise observations about others, such as the effects of time. The main syntheses of the subject were written 30 years ago or more (Coles 1973; 1979), even then it was a diverse field encompassing many distinct specialisms.
6 Land Snails and Woodland Clearances: from:
Land and People
Author(s) Gardner Neville
Abstract: In
Land snails and Archaeology(Evans 1972), John considered that temporal blurring and spatial mixing of snail populations into recovered covered assemblages made the interpretation of assemblages of from buried soils beneath monuments applicable to the wider environ- ment. He argued that ‘… in a relatively homogeneous environment, such as a cultivated field or chalk downland, the distribution and abundance of a species in the area as a whole tends to be uniform’ (p. 111), and was confident, at the time, that when open-country assemblages were recovered from buried soil surfaces, reflecting either grassland or cultivation prior to monument construction,
[Part 3 Introduction] from:
Land and People
Abstract: The study of coasts and islands provides many opportunities. Many sites, now on our coast, may be presevered and protected by depositional processes enveloping them in sequences of blown sand, facilitating both exceptional preservation, and potentially great stratigraphic separation of sequences of activity such as at Gwithian, Brean Down, Nornour and Northton for instance. In many cases their costal position today may belie their location in prehistory. Conversely, others may be exposed by coastal erosion making them available for research for a short window of time before they are ultimately lost to us. Islands allow us to examine island communities
10 Living in the Sands – Bronze Age Gwithian, Cornwall, Revisited from:
Land and People
Author(s) Nowakowski Jacqueline A.
Abstract: I first met John in 1988. He was leading a student field trip in west Cornwall and because I had been involved in a major survey of prehistoric field patterns on the north Cornish coast, I was asked if I would lead John’s group around the sites in West Penwith. John was keen to see the results of this large-scale survey at first hand (at that time he was conducting his own field survey on the island of Skomer, Dyfed, Evans 1990, and he wanted to compare notes). All I knew about John was that he was a well-known environmental
14 Environmental Change in an Orkney Wetland: from:
Land and People
Author(s) Bunting M. Jane
Abstract: Freshwater Mollusca have perhaps not figured as large in the environmental archaeology literature as their terrestrial counterparts, despite their abundance and habitat specificity. In the case of small bivalves of the genus
Pisidium, the difficulties involved in their extraction and identification may be a contributory factor. Freshwater Mollusca are undoubtedly at their most valuable as part of a multi-proxy study, integrated as one of several sources of evidence. Recent work in the Orkney Islands has made good use of multi-proxy approaches to reconstruct landscape changes through the mid-Holocene (de la Vega Leinertet al.2000; 2007). Sometimes these studies can
3. The Design of the World from:
Atheism for Beginners
Abstract: In the summer of 1925, in Dayton, Tennessee, John Scopes, a high school biology teacher in Clark County, was brought to trial for violating the Butler Act, which prohibited the teaching of evolution. The statute made it unlawful ‘to teach any theory that denies the story of divine creation as taught by the Bible and to teach instead that man was descended from a lower order of animals.’ The trial was a national sensation, not least because the special prosecutor was William Jennings Bryan – the three-time Democratic presidential candidate and a former Secretary of State – and the defence
3. The Design of the World from:
Atheism for Beginners
Abstract: In the summer of 1925, in Dayton, Tennessee, John Scopes, a high school biology teacher in Clark County, was brought to trial for violating the Butler Act, which prohibited the teaching of evolution. The statute made it unlawful ‘to teach any theory that denies the story of divine creation as taught by the Bible and to teach instead that man was descended from a lower order of animals.’ The trial was a national sensation, not least because the special prosecutor was William Jennings Bryan – the three-time Democratic presidential candidate and a former Secretary of State – and the defence
Introduction from:
Principalities and Powers
Abstract: Glen Stassen tells a story about the time he approached John Howard Yoder after a session at the Society of Christian Ethics. Noting that many of the papers bore the mark of his friend’s thought, Stassen said, “Your influence is really spreading.” Yoder’s simple response: “Not mine. Jesus.’”¹
Introduction from:
In the Fellowship of His Suffering
Abstract: The ubiquity of mental illness and its exponential growth in the US has made it the primary “medical disability” of our time. This pervasiveness and the destructive force behind it to destroy human spirit demands an urgent attention not only from medical community and social policy makers, but also from the church. In the history of Christian communities, mental illness has tended to be viewed as some form of malignant manifestation that stands against the will and rule of God. It has thus tended to evoke a response from within the church. Today, for the most part, that response has
one Is Satan Evil? from:
Facing the Fiend
Abstract: Understanding Satan as a character requires the introduction of a
contextin which the character operates. Our search for Satan’s dwelling place takes us to different areas of definition and interpretation, but the most fundamental question at this point is the relationship between Satan and evil. The question of whether the character of Satan is evil or not cannot be answered readily, since the problem is twofold: like any character, Satan has many layers and describing him as evil is an over-simplification. At the same time, the abstract concept of evil depends on contextual circumstances. The best approach seems the
two Satan’s Biography: from:
Facing the Fiend
Abstract: There is no one “biography” of Satan. There is no authoritative body of text we can refer to when we speak of Satan, rather Satan appears like a shape-shifter, and every story gives him another face and body, deploying the old stereotypes, but adding new elements at the same time, creating a curious mixture of familiarity and strangeness. The story that is retold here is the story of the Satan who grew out of various Jewish and Christian traditions, a Satan whose origins were inspired by the ancient near Eastern combat myths.¹ The most recent biography of Satan was published
five The Restless Wanderer from:
Facing the Fiend
Abstract: According to his biography, Satan was cast out of heaven and fell into the abyss. At the same time, he has been described as roaming the earth. His state, however, is most certainly one of exile and homelessness, though freely chosen. The following takes a closer look at the notion of evil as alienation and elimination and explores the literary character of Satan as a wanderer between the worlds.
seven The Zeroing Zero from:
Facing the Fiend
Abstract: Carl Gustav Jung was witness to another shadow that came over Europe during his lifetime: Adolf Hitler. In his essay
Wotan(1936), Jung described Germany as “infected by one man who is obviously possessed” in addition to “rolling towards perdition.”² Jung’s analysis of Hitler, however, is just one of many attempts to understand the most notorious satanic figure of twentieth-century history. In hisAnatomy of Human Destructiveness, philosopher and psychoanalysist Erich Fromm diagnosed Adolf Hitler as a clinical case of necrophilia.³ Fromm analyzes Hitler’s childhood, his main source being the biography by B. F. Smith (1967), to which author Norman
Book Title: All Shall be Well-Explorations in Universal Salvation and Christian Theology, from Origen to Moltmann
Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Macdonald Gregory
Abstract: Universalism runs like a slender thread through the history of Christian theology. Over the centuries Christian universalism, in one form or another, has been reinvented time and time again. In this book an international team of scholars explore the diverse universalisms of Christian thinkers from the Origen to Moltmann. In the introduction Gregory MacDonald argues that theologies of universal salvation occupy a space between heresy and dogma. The studies in this collection aim, in the first instance, to hear, understand, and explain the eschatological claims of a range of Christians from the third to the twenty-first centuries. They also offer some constructive, critical engagement with those claims.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cg4m9c
11 The Final Sanity Is Complete Sanctity: from:
All Shall be Well
Author(s) Goroncy Jason A.
Abstract: Upon his return from Göttingen in September 1872, Peter Taylor Forsyth (1848–1921) enrolled himself as a theology undergraduate (on probation) at New College London. By the time the young Aberdonian had resigned in 1874, two meetings had occurred that were to have a lasting effect upon him. First, he met Maria Hester (Minna) Magness, whom he married in 1877. Second, he came under the influence of James Baldwin Brown (1820–1884), Congregationalism’s mediator of F. D. Maurice (1805–1872). In fact, it may have been Brown who first drew Forsyth to London, Forsyth traveling the six and a half
17 Hell and the God of Love: from:
All Shall be Well
Author(s) Hall Lindsey
Abstract: John Hick is probably best known for his work on the relationship between Christianity and the other world religions. He is a philosopher of religion who, over the course of a lifetime spent in academia, has constantly revised and developed his beliefs. Hick has ended up, theologically speaking, a very long way from where he started off. As a young man, he had a conversion experience which he described as an increasing awareness of the presence of God.¹ This was the beginning of a long spiritual journey which quickly moved from the “conservative evangelical” world to more liberal expressions of
2 Missions, Cultural Imperialism, and the Development of the Chinese Church from:
After Imperialism
Author(s) Leung Ka Lun
Abstract: Developments in the twenty-first century are altering perceptions of Christianity and the relationship of Christianity to culture around the world. Churches in Asia, Africa, and Latin America now have an opportunity to challenge the Western-American monopolization of Christianity. While local expressions of Christianity might in some ways hinder global fellowship, I believe now is an ideal time for churches around the world to share resources and experiences and to develop strong local cultural identities as well as strong global bonds. The churches in China have begun this process of local indigenization and have also initiated global networking. This chapter will
5 The Old Testament in Its Cultural Context: from:
After Imperialism
Author(s) Younger K. Lawson
Abstract: Christians all over the world struggle with issues of identity within the various different cultures in which they find themselves. Some Christians identify themselves through “Christian” tradition, which may or may not actually be Christian. No matter what culture Christians are in, they ultimately should derive their identity from the Bible. But this presents an ongoing problem. The Bible (whether Old or New Testament) was written in different cultural settings than the one Christians are in today. There are, of course, varying degrees of difference, but all cultures are different from those of biblical times. In the case of the
2 The Jewish World of the New Testament from:
An Introduction to the New Testament
Abstract: Heredity or environment? Which of these factors most determines the behavioral development of a child? This question has been debated vigorously among psychologists and behavioral scientists. No doubt most would conclude today that both hereditary and environmental factors are important and that both should be considered. This is also the case with the development of early Christianity, if we may employ an analogy between human growth and the historical development of a religious movement. What later became rabbinic Judaism and Christianity were both developments out of Judean state religion. Jesus and his disciples were Jews, and for some time Christianity
8 The Genres of the Apocalypse (Revelation) of John from:
An Introduction to the New Testament
Abstract: As we tried to imply in the last two chapters, the disclosure of literary genre is intended to be a momentous event in the introduction of a text, tantamount perhaps to the discovery of an edible species of plant by a starving explorer. Despite the promise of such an occasion, however, in actual practice it can sometimes be frustrating, offering less of a hermeneutical advantage than is sometimes anticipated. But take courage! It is a bit like the great dialogue of Plato,
Theaetetus, where knowledge and understanding are discussed and debated. One begins by thinking s/he knows what knowledge is,
10 The Historical Jesus from:
An Introduction to the New Testament
Abstract: We began in the previous chapter with the task of recovering a chronology of the life of Jesus with its challenges of minimal external points of reference, multiple calendrical systems within which to insert data, multicultural varieties of fixing days or holy days or years within an annual calendar, and the like. Knowing as much as possible about Jesus and his world certainly makes the venture worthwhile, but the writers of the early “biographies” of Jesus seemed little concerned about certain time issues and quite unsuspecting of the obsessions that we as their eighteenththrough twenty-first-century readers would entertain.
12 A Chronology of Paul’s Life from:
An Introduction to the New Testament
Abstract: The problems of Pauline chronology are similar to those in the study of Jesus. Evidence is sparse and scattered, and the sources are often dominated by literary and religious purposes. Factors that are distinctive for a chronology of Paul are that (a) we have the apostle’s own words about certain events in his life; (b) references to Paul’s life in Acts sometimes coincide with statements in Paul’s letters; and (c) an ancient inscription confirms the Lukan account of Paul’s appearance before Gallio (Acts 18:12–17).
14 Emerging Christian Orthodoxy: from:
An Introduction to the New Testament
Abstract: Historian Adolf von Harnack (1851–1930) described this period of early Christianity as a time when (a) the inner dynamics of the apostolic period were exchanged for laws and rules, (b) the original spontaneity gave
15 Emerging Christian Orthodoxy: from:
An Introduction to the New Testament
Abstract: In reaction to the internal threats of Gnosticism and in response to external pressures from both Judaism and the Roman government, early Christianity began to consolidate and define itself as a distinct institution. The passage of time, which brought further delay to the hope of Christ’s near return, also prompted some rethinking about the church’s identity and mission in the world. What resulted from these developments is typical of most religious groups of the third and fourth generations.
Introduction from:
Dealing with Dictators
Abstract: This is a book on the impact of one country on the other. At first sight the selection of this topic may seem a bit odd in light of the fact that it describes the relationship of two geographically distant countries: the United States, the most powerful state of the times, and Hungary, a weak client state in the middle of Europe. It is the history of how the framers of American policy sought to exploit this small but strategically well-located state to further America’s strategic interests and how Hungarians, caught in the net of aggressors, first Germany, then the
4 1956: from:
Dealing with Dictators
Abstract: On October 23, 1956, Hungary exploded. Although it is hard to pinpoint why one country remains docile under tyrannical rule while another revolts, historians have dedicated years of research to identifying the specific factors that led to the only armed uprising against Soviet rule. Because virtually all segments of Hungarian society had suffered various forms of repression, unrest was not confined to the capital city. Centrally engineered “circular social mobility” failed to satisfy even the social groups whose aspirations the regime had privileged.¹ Grievances included foreign military occupation, state terror that sometimes exceeded even the limits of Soviet tolerance, serious
Conclusion from:
Dealing with Dictators
Abstract: What is striking about U.S. policy toward Hungary – and more broadly speaking, toward East Central Europe – is that at certain junctures it exerted a profound influence on events and sometimes none at all. The ability of American foreign policy to leave its mark on the region depended to a large extent on the willingness of the countries there to engage themselves with the United States.
3 The Personal and Its Others in the Performance of Preaching from:
Preaching and the Personal
Author(s) HOOKE RUTHANNA B.
Abstract: A former student once told me a story about how she deals with her fears when she is about to preach. She said that when she was a child and was nervous about serving for the first time as an acolyte in a worship service, the priest with whom she was serving comforted her by saying, “Remember, they didn’t come here to see you.” She told me that she remembers these words and is still calmed by them when she is about to step into the pulpit.
8 Preaching John: from:
Preaching and the Personal
Author(s) LEWIS KAROLINE M.
Abstract: Preaching the Fourth Gospel has consistently been a challenge for preachers, especially within the parameters of the Revised common Lectionary in which the Gospel of John appears as supplemental and even subsidiary to the theological and structural concentration on the synoptic Gospels. Preachers do not know quite what to do with this gospel that is at the same time theologically rich and narratively complex. Perhaps one of the most misunderstood aspects of the Fourth Gospel that continues to have a profound effect on its preaching is the portrait of Jesus himself. There is a perceived distance about this Jesus, certainly
3 Justice with Repentance: from:
Restorative Christ
Abstract: It was Saint Augustine who first used the Latin phrase incurvatus in se which means to be turned (or, literally “curved”) inward on oneself. It is a theological phrase used by other Christian thinkers like Martin Luther and Karl Barth to describe a life lived
inwardfor self rather thanoutwardfor God and others. Wrongdoers, preoccupied with themselves, suffer fromincurvatus in se. Examples abound in the accusations made against wrongdoers. They are selfish, self-centered or perhaps just self-absorbed. Such accusations elicit responses varying from self-defense, self-justification or sometimes self-condemnation. Some strategies that encourage wrongdoers in the art of
4 Justice with Repair: from:
Restorative Christ
Abstract: To repair is to make amends. These simple words separate the justice that merely reconciles from the deeper justice of the restorative Christ. Repair describes the work of justice
afterreconciliation. The idea emerges from the restorative justice movement and the repair required in the aftermath of genocide in Rwanda, Sierra Leone, Bosnia, Cambodia, Liberia, and Uganda. Repair is partly symbolic because nothing—this side of heaven—can mend the atrocities witnessed in such countries during our own lifetime. Mass murder has become the weapon of choice for some regimes. Repair, however, must be pursued. It will be unusually costly.
3 Justice with Repentance: from:
Restorative Christ
Abstract: It was Saint Augustine who first used the Latin phrase incurvatus in se which means to be turned (or, literally “curved”) inward on oneself. It is a theological phrase used by other Christian thinkers like Martin Luther and Karl Barth to describe a life lived
inwardfor self rather thanoutwardfor God and others. Wrongdoers, preoccupied with themselves, suffer fromincurvatus in se. Examples abound in the accusations made against wrongdoers. They are selfish, self-centered or perhaps just self-absorbed. Such accusations elicit responses varying from self-defense, self-justification or sometimes self-condemnation. Some strategies that encourage wrongdoers in the art of
4 Justice with Repair: from:
Restorative Christ
Abstract: To repair is to make amends. These simple words separate the justice that merely reconciles from the deeper justice of the restorative Christ. Repair describes the work of justice
afterreconciliation. The idea emerges from the restorative justice movement and the repair required in the aftermath of genocide in Rwanda, Sierra Leone, Bosnia, Cambodia, Liberia, and Uganda. Repair is partly symbolic because nothing—this side of heaven—can mend the atrocities witnessed in such countries during our own lifetime. Mass murder has become the weapon of choice for some regimes. Repair, however, must be pursued. It will be unusually costly.
Introduction from:
Returning to Reality
Abstract: Everyone does metaphysics. Whenever we endeavor to understand the nature of reality we are doing metaphysics. Such an enterprise is not an abstract mind game—to the contrary, nothing could be more mundane, more practical than our operational understanding of reality. Even so, no operational understanding of reality is simply pragmatic; every time we plan or perform any activity in what we take to be a realistic manner, we do so by putting our confidence in a set of deeply held beliefs about the nature of reality itself.
2 The Christian Platonism of Lewis and Tolkien from:
Returning to Reality
Abstract: If you go to Oxford today you can pop into a little pub and sit down in the room where Lewis and Tolkien and a few other likeminded friends used to have a pint and chat late into the night about what they were most seriously concerned with: imaginative stories. In our very down-to-earth times it may seem strange, even eccentric, for this bunch of English academics to take imagination so seriously, but, as we shall later unpack, imagination is indeed a very serious matter. What they were doing was seeking to clothe the Christian vision of reality, which they
7 Second Interview with Heinz Kohut from:
Grace for the Injured Self
Author(s) Kohut Heinz
Abstract: Randall: Our last meeting focused on religion more as a cultural selfobject that supported and encouraged man’s sense of self. I’d like to focus today on religion as anexpressionof man’s creative self, how it arises from man’s own personality, from within his self. You alluded a couple of times in the Heller letters to religion as both an expression of man as well as a support to his sense of self. We focused very well, you did, on religion as a cultural selfobject. What about religion as an expression of the self?
Book Title: The Scarlet Woman and the Red Hand-Evangelical Apocalyptic Belief in the Northern Ireland Troubles
Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Searle Joshua T.
Abstract: This book provides a comprehensive description of how evangelicals in Northern Ireland interpreted the "Troubles" (1966-2007) in the light of how they read the Bible. The rich and diverse landscape of Northern Irish evangelicalism during the "Troubles" is ideally suited to this study of both the light and dark sides of apocalyptic eschatology. Searle demonstrates how the notion of apocalypse shaped evangelical and fundamentalist interpretations of the turbulent events that characterized this dark yet fascinating period in the history of Northern Ireland. The book uses this case study to offer a timely reflection on some of the most pressing issues in contemporary negotiations between culture and religion. Given the current resurgence of religious fundamentalism in the wake of 9/11, together with popular conceptions of a "clash of civilizations" and the so-called War on Terror, this book is not only an engaging academic study; it also resonates with some of the defining cultural issues of our time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgdx0n
Book Title: The Scarlet Woman and the Red Hand-Evangelical Apocalyptic Belief in the Northern Ireland Troubles
Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Searle Joshua T.
Abstract: This book provides a comprehensive description of how evangelicals in Northern Ireland interpreted the "Troubles" (1966-2007) in the light of how they read the Bible. The rich and diverse landscape of Northern Irish evangelicalism during the "Troubles" is ideally suited to this study of both the light and dark sides of apocalyptic eschatology. Searle demonstrates how the notion of apocalypse shaped evangelical and fundamentalist interpretations of the turbulent events that characterized this dark yet fascinating period in the history of Northern Ireland. The book uses this case study to offer a timely reflection on some of the most pressing issues in contemporary negotiations between culture and religion. Given the current resurgence of religious fundamentalism in the wake of 9/11, together with popular conceptions of a "clash of civilizations" and the so-called War on Terror, this book is not only an engaging academic study; it also resonates with some of the defining cultural issues of our time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgdx0n
Introduction from:
Why Resurrection?
Abstract: The belief in the afterlife in Judaism and Christianity emerges as a response to a real challenge: the problem of evil. As the Swedish theologian Krister Stendahl wrote, “in its original setting the resurrection is an answer to the question of Judaism in the time of Jesus: the question of theodicy. Will justice win and the promises of God to the faithful be fulfilled?”¹
3 Two Arguments for God’s Existence: from:
The Atheist's Primer
Abstract: For the positive atheist’s case to succeed, a range of classic arguments for God’s existence must be refuted.¹ Although sometimes called ‘proofs’, only one of them can lay legitimate claim to that name. This is the so-called ontological argument first presented by Anselm of Canterbury (c.1033-1109). Here Anselm argues that, from the definition of God – that ‘God is something than which nothing greater can be conceived’ – one may conclude, as a matter of logic, that God exists, his existence being a necessary requirement of his unsurpassable greatness. The
a prioricharacter of this argument – which involves no
3 Two Arguments for God’s Existence: from:
The Atheist's Primer
Abstract: For the positive atheist’s case to succeed, a range of classic arguments for God’s existence must be refuted.¹ Although sometimes called ‘proofs’, only one of them can lay legitimate claim to that name. This is the so-called ontological argument first presented by Anselm of Canterbury (c.1033-1109). Here Anselm argues that, from the definition of God – that ‘God is something than which nothing greater can be conceived’ – one may conclude, as a matter of logic, that God exists, his existence being a necessary requirement of his unsurpassable greatness. The
a prioricharacter of this argument – which involves no
4 Literary and Ecclesial Sources Used in Charles Wesley’s Poetry from:
Lyrical Theology of Charles Wesley - Expanded Edition
Abstract: One looks for a long time before finding any attempt to place Charles Wesley, or Isaac Watts either, in relation
5 The Wesleyan Poetical Sources Used in This Volume from:
Lyrical Theology of Charles Wesley - Expanded Edition
Abstract: Since the importance of reading Wesley’s poetry in the context of the time in which he lived has been emphasized, it is essential to set the Wesleyan poetical sources from which the poetical selections for this volume have been drawn in their own context. As one reads the poems, one should refer back to the contextual explanations for the sources listed below in order to grasp more fully how, when, and why the poems were published. In some instances this will be more obvious than others. It is hoped that these contextual elaborations will assist the reader in the understanding
Book Title: Storied Revelations-Parables, Imagination and George MacDonald’s Christian Fiction
Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Peterson Eugene H.
Abstract: George MacDonald, the Victorian poet and theologian, observed that his was a culture saturated with Christian jargon but often void of a profound understanding of the gospel for its own time and culture. The language of Scripture no longer penetrated people’s hearts, thoughts, and attitudes; it no longer transformed people’s lives. MacDonald, called to be a pastor, turned to story and more specifically the "parabolic" as a means of spiritual awakening. He created fictive worlds in which the language of Jesus would find a new home and regain its revelatory power for his particular Victorian audience. 'Storied Revelations' explores the interface between the Bible and George MacDonald’s fiction. The way Jesus uses language in the parables sheds light on our understanding of MacDonald’s careful use of language in his fiction. Further still, many of MacDonald’s stories are infused with the language of the Bible, often in rather surprising ways.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgdztj
Foreword from:
Storied Revelations
Author(s) Peterson Eugene H.
Abstract: This is a most timely book. Timely, because the lives of Americans are increasingly distracted, and diverted—hijacked by the computer into cyberspace where it is possible to live without relationships, without grounding, without connection, without commitments, without ritual, without worship. A great number of wise and insightful observers for several decades now have been calling our attention to the resulting cultural, political, and spiritual poverty.
4 George MacDonald’s Theological Rationale for Story and the “Parabolic” from:
Storied Revelations
Abstract: George MacDonald’s theological rationale for story and the “parabolic” is closely connected to his understanding of Scripture, language, creation, and how God reveals himself in and through it. In order to understand MacDonald’s view of Scripture, especially as related to the “parabolic” and the role Scripture plays in his understanding of revelation and spiritual transformation, it is important to locate him in his historical context. Only by outlining the general attitude towards Scripture and closely related questions such as the role of science in Victorian Britain can we properly understand MacDonald’s response to the challenges of his time and the
5 Patterns of Subversion and Promise: from:
Storied Revelations
Abstract: Lilith, first written in 1890, is MacDonald’s last fantastic novel. It is often considered to be his most difficult and disturbing piece of writing. He revised his first draft several times over a period of five years and completed the final version in 1895. The editing process for this novel was intense and long, and Richard Reis argues that of all the manuscripts we have of MacDonald’s works, none shows so much careful re-writing as theLilithmanuscripts.¹ This gives us some indication thatLilithis a well thought out piece of writing with its imagery carefully and purposefully chosen.
2 A Tale of a Duck-Billed Platypus Called Benedict and His Gold and Red Crayons from:
The Crisis of Global Capitalism
Author(s) Rowland Tracey
Abstract: Caritas in Veritateis the most recent in a long list of papal interventions in the territory of social justice, and for most commentators there was nothing surprising in the document apart from its extraordinary length and the way in which it sought to offer a comprehensive overview of the whole tradition rather than isolating a couple of issues and focusing upon them. It was as if Benedict XVI reviewed the tradition, made an executive summary of what he regards as its most significant elements, and gave his papal stamp of approval to them, at the same time as enriching
5 Fraternity, Gift, and Reciprocity in Caritas in Veritate from:
The Crisis of Global Capitalism
Author(s) Zamagni Stefano
Abstract: One of the marks of our time is a constant call for ethics, which has progressively replaced, over the past quarter of a century, the persistent call for politics typical of the 1960s, when it was imagined that “everything was politics.” But this agreement on the primacy of ethics ceases when it comes to tangible moral issues. As Alasdair McIntyre observed in
After Virtue, the apodictic use of moral principles serves only to put an end to the ethical dialogue itself. In other words, the broad convergence on ethics in public debate almost never translates into ethical consensus.
7 The Anthropological Unity of Caritas in Veritate from:
The Crisis of Global Capitalism
Author(s) Schindler David L.
Abstract: “The truth of development consists in its completeness: if it does not involve the whole man and every man, it is not true development.”¹ This, says Pope Benedict in his new encyclical, is “the central message of [Paul VI’s]
Populorum Progressio, valid for today and for all time” (Caritas,18). “Integral human development on the natural plane, as a response to a vocation from God the Creator, demands self-fulfillment in a ‘transcendent humanism which gives [to man] his greatest possible perfection: this is the highest goal of personal development’” (Caritas, 18 ).²
3 The Body in Tradition from:
Radical Embodiment
Abstract: Before directly expounding the substance of the body in tradition, I will begin with a more formal consideration of the “radicalness” of radical embodiment. Etymologically,
radicalliterally means getting to the roots of something. Our bodies as they orient us in an environment, a world, are the very roots which make possible all our living, knowing, and valuing. As such they limit and define us at the same time they grant us all our potentialities. Constructivist-essentialist debates are parasitic upon (and typically tacitly assume) the range of possibilities our bodies provide. We are normally aware of our ubiquitous rootage in
7 Radical Embodiment and Transcendence from:
Radical Embodiment
Abstract: A corollary of God’s radical embodiment is that the trope of “the absence of God” in radical postmodernism and in post-Holocaust theology (not to mention the Christian mystical tradition) can and must be taken seriously. No, God does not disappear into the universe a la 1960’ s “death of God” theology or some versions of radical postmodernism. I believe that the embodied panentheistic formulation I have advanced can account for a certain experiential sense of divine absence, while at the same time allowing for the reality and presence of the divine.
Foreword from:
An Unexpected Light
Author(s) Quash Ben
Abstract: One of the most valuable tasks that can be undertaken by Christian thinkers in our present time is the re-equipping of people’s imaginations—helping Christians and non-Christians alike to have imaginations that are capable of responding to the divine dynamics of their reality. Today’s Christianity may try to achieve this education of the imagination in various ways. It may find help by returning afresh to its sources in Scripture, liturgy and prayer. Or it may do so (and this is not incompatible with the first possibility) by renewing and deepening its relationship with other religious traditions and their practices. But
4 Geoffrey Hill’s “Pitch of Attention” and “Poetic Kenosis” in The Triumph of Love from:
An Unexpected Light
Abstract: Like Charles Williams’ Arthuriad and Micheal O’Siadhail’s
The Gossamer Wall, Geoffrey Hill’sThe Triumph of Loveis also a “landscape” poem, albeit in many respects different from our ordinary sense of the term. From its opening, one line section we are presented with an image that introduces a dramatic sense of place:“Sun-blazed, over Romsley, a livid rain-scarp”(I, 1).¹ Immediately following, the next section then imbues the lyric geography evoked in the first line with a sense of time and the landscape of personal history.“Guilts were incurred in that place, now I am convinced”(II), the poet announces,
Foreword from:
An Unexpected Light
Author(s) Quash Ben
Abstract: One of the most valuable tasks that can be undertaken by Christian thinkers in our present time is the re-equipping of people’s imaginations—helping Christians and non-Christians alike to have imaginations that are capable of responding to the divine dynamics of their reality. Today’s Christianity may try to achieve this education of the imagination in various ways. It may find help by returning afresh to its sources in Scripture, liturgy and prayer. Or it may do so (and this is not incompatible with the first possibility) by renewing and deepening its relationship with other religious traditions and their practices. But
4 Geoffrey Hill’s “Pitch of Attention” and “Poetic Kenosis” in The Triumph of Love from:
An Unexpected Light
Abstract: Like Charles Williams’ Arthuriad and Micheal O’Siadhail’s
The Gossamer Wall, Geoffrey Hill’sThe Triumph of Loveis also a “landscape” poem, albeit in many respects different from our ordinary sense of the term. From its opening, one line section we are presented with an image that introduces a dramatic sense of place:“Sun-blazed, over Romsley, a livid rain-scarp”(I, 1).¹ Immediately following, the next section then imbues the lyric geography evoked in the first line with a sense of time and the landscape of personal history.“Guilts were incurred in that place, now I am convinced”(II), the poet announces,
Foreword from:
An Unexpected Light
Author(s) Quash Ben
Abstract: One of the most valuable tasks that can be undertaken by Christian thinkers in our present time is the re-equipping of people’s imaginations—helping Christians and non-Christians alike to have imaginations that are capable of responding to the divine dynamics of their reality. Today’s Christianity may try to achieve this education of the imagination in various ways. It may find help by returning afresh to its sources in Scripture, liturgy and prayer. Or it may do so (and this is not incompatible with the first possibility) by renewing and deepening its relationship with other religious traditions and their practices. But
4 Geoffrey Hill’s “Pitch of Attention” and “Poetic Kenosis” in The Triumph of Love from:
An Unexpected Light
Abstract: Like Charles Williams’ Arthuriad and Micheal O’Siadhail’s
The Gossamer Wall, Geoffrey Hill’sThe Triumph of Loveis also a “landscape” poem, albeit in many respects different from our ordinary sense of the term. From its opening, one line section we are presented with an image that introduces a dramatic sense of place:“Sun-blazed, over Romsley, a livid rain-scarp”(I, 1).¹ Immediately following, the next section then imbues the lyric geography evoked in the first line with a sense of time and the landscape of personal history.“Guilts were incurred in that place, now I am convinced”(II), the poet announces,
Foreword from:
An Unexpected Light
Author(s) Quash Ben
Abstract: One of the most valuable tasks that can be undertaken by Christian thinkers in our present time is the re-equipping of people’s imaginations—helping Christians and non-Christians alike to have imaginations that are capable of responding to the divine dynamics of their reality. Today’s Christianity may try to achieve this education of the imagination in various ways. It may find help by returning afresh to its sources in Scripture, liturgy and prayer. Or it may do so (and this is not incompatible with the first possibility) by renewing and deepening its relationship with other religious traditions and their practices. But
4 Geoffrey Hill’s “Pitch of Attention” and “Poetic Kenosis” in The Triumph of Love from:
An Unexpected Light
Abstract: Like Charles Williams’ Arthuriad and Micheal O’Siadhail’s
The Gossamer Wall, Geoffrey Hill’sThe Triumph of Loveis also a “landscape” poem, albeit in many respects different from our ordinary sense of the term. From its opening, one line section we are presented with an image that introduces a dramatic sense of place:“Sun-blazed, over Romsley, a livid rain-scarp”(I, 1).¹ Immediately following, the next section then imbues the lyric geography evoked in the first line with a sense of time and the landscape of personal history.“Guilts were incurred in that place, now I am convinced”(II), the poet announces,
Foreword from:
The Joshua Delusion?
Author(s) Moberly Walter
Abstract: Unfortunately, there are many difficulties within the Bible. Sometimes it is a problem of understanding what the
Foreword from:
The Joshua Delusion?
Author(s) Moberly Walter
Abstract: Unfortunately, there are many difficulties within the Bible. Sometimes it is a problem of understanding what the
Foreword from:
The Joshua Delusion?
Author(s) Moberly Walter
Abstract: Unfortunately, there are many difficulties within the Bible. Sometimes it is a problem of understanding what the
9 Theology and Metaphysics: from:
Groundless Gods
Author(s) NEUGEBAUER MATTHIAS
Abstract: “Metaphysics begins with the ancient Greeks as a philosophical doctrine of the one God.”¹ This sentence—assigning metaphysics and theology—is far from self-evident. The sentence, on the one hand, states that metaphysics and theology are neighborly disciplines and that theology necessarily needs metaphysics; on the other hand, the existence of metaphysics implies theology has been a valid enterprise for as long a time.
Postmodern thinking, however, is handling this compilation with caution. Dealing with metaphysics after the Enlightenment and the linguistic turn is a difficult affair. In this regard, one perspective for understanding metaphysics is to consider metaphysical structures
9 Theology and Metaphysics: from:
Groundless Gods
Author(s) NEUGEBAUER MATTHIAS
Abstract: “Metaphysics begins with the ancient Greeks as a philosophical doctrine of the one God.”¹ This sentence—assigning metaphysics and theology—is far from self-evident. The sentence, on the one hand, states that metaphysics and theology are neighborly disciplines and that theology necessarily needs metaphysics; on the other hand, the existence of metaphysics implies theology has been a valid enterprise for as long a time.
Postmodern thinking, however, is handling this compilation with caution. Dealing with metaphysics after the Enlightenment and the linguistic turn is a difficult affair. In this regard, one perspective for understanding metaphysics is to consider metaphysical structures
9 Theology and Metaphysics: from:
Groundless Gods
Author(s) NEUGEBAUER MATTHIAS
Abstract: “Metaphysics begins with the ancient Greeks as a philosophical doctrine of the one God.”¹ This sentence—assigning metaphysics and theology—is far from self-evident. The sentence, on the one hand, states that metaphysics and theology are neighborly disciplines and that theology necessarily needs metaphysics; on the other hand, the existence of metaphysics implies theology has been a valid enterprise for as long a time.
Postmodern thinking, however, is handling this compilation with caution. Dealing with metaphysics after the Enlightenment and the linguistic turn is a difficult affair. In this regard, one perspective for understanding metaphysics is to consider metaphysical structures
9 Theology and Metaphysics: from:
Groundless Gods
Author(s) NEUGEBAUER MATTHIAS
Abstract: “Metaphysics begins with the ancient Greeks as a philosophical doctrine of the one God.”¹ This sentence—assigning metaphysics and theology—is far from self-evident. The sentence, on the one hand, states that metaphysics and theology are neighborly disciplines and that theology necessarily needs metaphysics; on the other hand, the existence of metaphysics implies theology has been a valid enterprise for as long a time.
Postmodern thinking, however, is handling this compilation with caution. Dealing with metaphysics after the Enlightenment and the linguistic turn is a difficult affair. In this regard, one perspective for understanding metaphysics is to consider metaphysical structures
Book Title: Contextual Theology for the Twenty-First Century- Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Tahaafe-Williams Katalina
Abstract: Scholars from the United States, Latin America, and Oceania reflect in this volume on the importance of contextual theology for the twenty-first century. Contextual theology offers fresh voices from every culture, and not just from the West. It calls for new ways of doing theology that embrace cultural values, but at the same time challenges them to the core. And it opens up new and fresh topics out of which and about which people can theologise. If the church is to be faithful to its mission, it needs to provide a feast at which all can be nourished.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf112
1 Religious Pluralism and John Hick from:
Christian Theology and Religious Pluralism
Abstract: More than any other time in the history of Western civilization, we are living today in a period of increasing religious plurality. it is becoming more common for persons living in many of the urban and suburban cities in the United States and around the world to have neighbors and acquaintances that are Jews, Muslims, Hindus, or Buddhists. In addition to familiar church buildings, it is now commonplace to find synagogues, mosques, and temples in many cities and even rural areas. The estimated Muslim population in the united States is now five million and growing.¹ Already by September of 2000,
3 Hick’s Theology of Religious Pluralism from:
Christian Theology and Religious Pluralism
Abstract: Having considered hick’s philosophy of pluralism in the last chapter, I am now ready to examine Hick’s theology of pluralism, concentrating especially on his Christology for a pluralistic age. as one of the leading philosophers of religion of our time, hick has not only been active in the contemporary theological scene, his contributions, particularly in the area of Christology, have been very significant. Specifically, hick has attempted to advance the limits of the traditional boundaries of Christology beyond the understanding of Christ and Christianity to the world of religions. Traditionally, Christianity has always confessed Jesus of Nazareth as god incarnate,
Introduction: from:
Sacramental Presence after Heidegger
Abstract: The Heideggerean cry to “overcome” metaphysics understood as “onto-theology” continues to reverberate throughout the continental world and beyond. Ever since Martin Heidegger’s resurrection of the
Seinsfrageand his subsequent turn to time and language as the horizon of Being, philosophers and theologians courageous—or perhaps naïve—enough to grapple with the Heideggerean corpus have been struggling to come to grips with the implications of Heidegger’s claims. According to many commentators, this is a task that in the Catholic world has only just begun.
5 Reimagining Metaphysics after Onto-Theology from:
Sacramental Presence after Heidegger
Abstract: Jean-Luc Marion has remarked that “one must ask forgiveness for every essay in theology.”¹ Just as St. Thomas purportedly reached the conclusion that, when compared to the living glory of God, “all that I have written seems like straw,” so Marion stresses the shortcomings of discourse on God insofar as it is tattooed by the abyss between objective glory and the unworthiness of its interpreter. As a general rule of thumb, these sentiments of Thomas and Marion simply remind us of the enduring and ineliminable
maior dissimilitudobetween God Himself and any attempt to stammer words in His honor. But
Introduction: from:
Sacramental Presence after Heidegger
Abstract: The Heideggerean cry to “overcome” metaphysics understood as “onto-theology” continues to reverberate throughout the continental world and beyond. Ever since Martin Heidegger’s resurrection of the
Seinsfrageand his subsequent turn to time and language as the horizon of Being, philosophers and theologians courageous—or perhaps naïve—enough to grapple with the Heideggerean corpus have been struggling to come to grips with the implications of Heidegger’s claims. According to many commentators, this is a task that in the Catholic world has only just begun.
5 Reimagining Metaphysics after Onto-Theology from:
Sacramental Presence after Heidegger
Abstract: Jean-Luc Marion has remarked that “one must ask forgiveness for every essay in theology.”¹ Just as St. Thomas purportedly reached the conclusion that, when compared to the living glory of God, “all that I have written seems like straw,” so Marion stresses the shortcomings of discourse on God insofar as it is tattooed by the abyss between objective glory and the unworthiness of its interpreter. As a general rule of thumb, these sentiments of Thomas and Marion simply remind us of the enduring and ineliminable
maior dissimilitudobetween God Himself and any attempt to stammer words in His honor. But
Foreword from:
Jesus and the Cross
Author(s) Ormerod Neil
Abstract: I can still remember as a young theology student coming across the book
The Aims of Jesusby biblical scholar, Ben Meyer. It was a heady time for theology students with the appearance of works by Hans Küng (On Being a Christian) and Edward Schillebeeckx (Jesus: An Experiment in Christology) both reflecting the impact of critical biblical scholarship on our understanding of Jesus. Within the excitement of these works, Meyer’s book stood out as something different, serious, scholarly, patient and measured in its conclusions. But one thing that really struck me was the implication of the title—Jesus had intentions,
Foreword from:
The Scandal of Sacramentality
Author(s) Jasper David
Abstract: The sacramental life of the Christian Church has, from the very earliest times, been acquainted with scandal. There is reason to think that the celebration of the Eucharist, in some form, predates even the canonical Gospels, and by the end of the second century of the Christian era, Tertullian was grimly satirizing those outside the Church who clearly thought that the sacrament was shocking in the extreme and beyond what was tolerable. “We are accused,” he wrote, “of observing a sacred ritual in which we kill a little child and eat it.” He goes on to describe this action in
Foreword from:
The Scandal of Sacramentality
Author(s) Jasper David
Abstract: The sacramental life of the Christian Church has, from the very earliest times, been acquainted with scandal. There is reason to think that the celebration of the Eucharist, in some form, predates even the canonical Gospels, and by the end of the second century of the Christian era, Tertullian was grimly satirizing those outside the Church who clearly thought that the sacrament was shocking in the extreme and beyond what was tolerable. “We are accused,” he wrote, “of observing a sacred ritual in which we kill a little child and eat it.” He goes on to describe this action in
Foreword from:
The Scandal of Sacramentality
Author(s) Jasper David
Abstract: The sacramental life of the Christian Church has, from the very earliest times, been acquainted with scandal. There is reason to think that the celebration of the Eucharist, in some form, predates even the canonical Gospels, and by the end of the second century of the Christian era, Tertullian was grimly satirizing those outside the Church who clearly thought that the sacrament was shocking in the extreme and beyond what was tolerable. “We are accused,” he wrote, “of observing a sacred ritual in which we kill a little child and eat it.” He goes on to describe this action in
Foreword from:
The Scandal of Sacramentality
Author(s) Jasper David
Abstract: The sacramental life of the Christian Church has, from the very earliest times, been acquainted with scandal. There is reason to think that the celebration of the Eucharist, in some form, predates even the canonical Gospels, and by the end of the second century of the Christian era, Tertullian was grimly satirizing those outside the Church who clearly thought that the sacrament was shocking in the extreme and beyond what was tolerable. “We are accused,” he wrote, “of observing a sacred ritual in which we kill a little child and eat it.” He goes on to describe this action in
Book Title: Justification in a Post-Christian Society- Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Gunner Göran
Abstract: Since the Reformation in the sixteenth century, Lutheran traditions have impacted culture and politics in many societies. At the same time, Lutheran belief has had an effect on personal faith, morality, and ethics. Modern society, however, is quite different from that at the time of the Reformation. How should we evaluate Lutheran tradition in today’s Western multicultural and post-Christian society? Is it possible to develop a Lutheran theological position that can be regarded as reasonable in a society that evidences a considerable weakening of the role of Christianity? What are the challenges raised by cultural diversity for a Lutheran theology and ethics? Is it possible to develop a Lutheran identity in a multicultural society, and is there any fruitful Lutheran contribution to the coexistence of diff erent religious and non-religious traditions in the future?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf32j
4 Atonement in Theology and a Post-Einsteinian Notion of Time from:
Justification in a Post-Christian Society
Author(s) JACKELÉN ANTJE
Abstract: There are a number of obstacles for a consistent presentation of the doctrine of atonement today. How can the suffering and self-sacrifice of the One be salvific in our global context? Does the atoning activity of God in Christ presuppose total passivity on the human side? Is not atonement terminology remote from the realities of human life in contemporary Western societies? In this chapter I argue that post-Einsteinian notions of time may contribute to theological attempts to cope with some of these obstacles. Albert Einstein’s theories of relativity mean that the previous Newtonian concept of time is inadequate. A reception
14 Luther’s Interpretation of the Magnificat and Latin American Liberation Theology from:
Justification in a Post-Christian Society
Author(s) VUOLA ELINA
Abstract: In most Lutheran churches today, the Mother of God is absent—in prayers, liturgy, theology, and spirituality. At the same time, there are ecumenical grass-roots movements such as the Taizé movement, in which the Virgin Mary is more present. There is a noteworthy theological silence about Mary in the Lutheran tradition, even though the first two Marian dogmas of the early church and Luther’s thought provide much more common ground for an ecumenical Mariology than we might think.
6 The Reader as Hermeneut from:
Reading Daniel as a Text in Theological Hermeneutics
Abstract: We have in this reading attempted to find the significance for the pistic, sophic, and interpretive community as it engages in the reading of Daniel
B. Therefore we have taken the time and effort to display how the contemporary ideal/competent reader might interact with DanielBas text along the way. We reach a point now when our reading of the text is completed and we must make some necessary comments regarding the general implications left for the reader. Rather than a reiteration of the reader’s interaction with smaller episodes, we need to make some broader and more sweeping generalizations about the
6 The Reader as Hermeneut from:
Reading Daniel as a Text in Theological Hermeneutics
Abstract: We have in this reading attempted to find the significance for the pistic, sophic, and interpretive community as it engages in the reading of Daniel
B. Therefore we have taken the time and effort to display how the contemporary ideal/competent reader might interact with DanielBas text along the way. We reach a point now when our reading of the text is completed and we must make some necessary comments regarding the general implications left for the reader. Rather than a reiteration of the reader’s interaction with smaller episodes, we need to make some broader and more sweeping generalizations about the
1 A Brief Sketch of Newbigin’s Life and Work from:
Grasping Truth and Reality
Abstract: Each generation since the modern missionary movement began in the eighteenth century has produced a few great missionary statesmen, persons whose thought and work were a major influence on the global missionary enterprise during their particular era and who have influenced subsequent missionary thinking as well. At the end of the twentieth century this honor, it would seem, fell upon Lesslie Newbigin, long time missionary to India and global ecumenical leader.
2 Missionary Theologian from:
Grasping Truth and Reality
Abstract: J. h. Oldham, one of early twentieth century’s greatest missionary statesmen, planted in Newbigin’s mind the idea that the Western world is a potential place for mission. Oldham was present at the ecumenical conference held in Jerusalem in 1928 and he began to raise questions about the gospel and secular culture, but they were not perceived as central to the missionary concerns of the time. They reappeared at The Edinburgh Quadrennial of 1933. Newbigin recalls:
3 A Thomistic Grammar of Hope from:
Our Only Hope
Abstract: Moltmann’s prioritization of colloquialized theology in a modern and secularized time reflects his conviction that Christian theology can suit contemporary concerns and terms, and
6 David and Mephibosheth from:
The Fate of Saul's Progeny in the Reign of David
Abstract: In our continuing study of David’s relationships with Saul’s descendants, we have examined his relationship with Michal in the last chapter. We saw that Michal loved David from the start and sacrificed to secure his safety when his life was threatened. David, however, never showed affection for her. During the long years of their separation, he made no effort to retrieve her from Saul’s sphere but found time to meet with Jonathan more than once. When it was convenient for David to reassert his status as son-in-law of the deceased monarch, in order to smoothen his path to israel’s throne,
Chapter Four The Psychological Dimension from:
Onslaught against Innocence
Abstract: For the first time in the Bible, blood is mentioned, as well as its virtue of epitomizing life that belongs to God (4:10; see 9:4–6). Let us start with a philological note: although the singular “blood” (
dam) may only at times refer to blood shed by violence (see Num 35:33), the pluraldamim, as we have it here in Gen 4: 10, is more specifically blood spilled or blood-guilt (see Num 35:27; Exod 22:1). The expression “man of blood” (‘iš damim) designates a murderer (see 2 Sam 16:7, 8; Ps 5:7) and “city of blood” (‘iš damim) designates a
Chapter Four The Psychological Dimension from:
Onslaught against Innocence
Abstract: For the first time in the Bible, blood is mentioned, as well as its virtue of epitomizing life that belongs to God (4:10; see 9:4–6). Let us start with a philological note: although the singular “blood” (
dam) may only at times refer to blood shed by violence (see Num 35:33), the pluraldamim, as we have it here in Gen 4: 10, is more specifically blood spilled or blood-guilt (see Num 35:27; Exod 22:1). The expression “man of blood” (‘iš damim) designates a murderer (see 2 Sam 16:7, 8; Ps 5:7) and “city of blood” (‘iš damim) designates a
Chapter Four The Psychological Dimension from:
Onslaught against Innocence
Abstract: For the first time in the Bible, blood is mentioned, as well as its virtue of epitomizing life that belongs to God (4:10; see 9:4–6). Let us start with a philological note: although the singular “blood” (
dam) may only at times refer to blood shed by violence (see Num 35:33), the pluraldamim, as we have it here in Gen 4: 10, is more specifically blood spilled or blood-guilt (see Num 35:27; Exod 22:1). The expression “man of blood” (‘iš damim) designates a murderer (see 2 Sam 16:7, 8; Ps 5:7) and “city of blood” (‘iš damim) designates a
Chapter Four The Psychological Dimension from:
Onslaught against Innocence
Abstract: For the first time in the Bible, blood is mentioned, as well as its virtue of epitomizing life that belongs to God (4:10; see 9:4–6). Let us start with a philological note: although the singular “blood” (
dam) may only at times refer to blood shed by violence (see Num 35:33), the pluraldamim, as we have it here in Gen 4: 10, is more specifically blood spilled or blood-guilt (see Num 35:27; Exod 22:1). The expression “man of blood” (‘iš damim) designates a murderer (see 2 Sam 16:7, 8; Ps 5:7) and “city of blood” (‘iš damim) designates a
13 Theology in Language, Rhetoric, and Beyond from:
Theology in Language, Rhetoric, and Beyond
Abstract: That Christian theology be assertive—strongly and aggressively assertive—should occasion no surprise, since Christian preaching from earliest times has 1) centered on gospel proclamation (
kerygmain acts 2: 14–
13 Theology in Language, Rhetoric, and Beyond from:
Theology in Language, Rhetoric, and Beyond
Abstract: That Christian theology be assertive—strongly and aggressively assertive—should occasion no surprise, since Christian preaching from earliest times has 1) centered on gospel proclamation (
kerygmain acts 2: 14–
Book Title: Hope and the Longing for Utopia-Futures and Illusions in Theology and Narrative
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Boscaljon Daniel
Abstract: At present the battle over who defines our future is being waged most publicly by secular and religious fundamentalists. 'Hope and the Longing for Utopia' offers an alternative position, disclosing a conceptual path toward potential worlds that resist a limited view of human potential and the gift of religion. In addition to outlining the value of embracing unknown potentialities, these twelve interdisciplinary essays explore why it has become crucial that we commit to hoping for values that resist traditional ideological commitments. Contextualized by contemporary writing on utopia, and drawing from a wealth of times and cultures ranging from Calvin’s Geneva to early twentieth-century Japanese children’s stories to Hollywood cinema, these essays cumulatively disclose the fundamental importance of resisting tantalizing certainties while considering the importance of the unknown and unknowable. Beginning with a set of four essays outlining the importance of hope and utopia as diagnostic concepts, and following with four concrete examples, the collection ends with a set of essays that provide theological speculations on the need to embrace finitude and limitations in a world increasingly enframed by secularizing impulses. Overall, this book discloses how hope and utopia illuminate ways to think past simplified wishes for the future.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf5h7
6 Fruit, Fossils, Footprints: from:
Hope and the Longing for Utopia
Author(s) Curley Melissa Anne-Marie
Abstract: Essays on the Japanese writer Miyazawa Kenji (1896–1933) often begin with an inventory of his interests and accomplishments. The list is irresistible: he was a poet and author, particularly remembered now for his children’s stories, but also a soil scientist, a high school teacher, and a sometime fertilizer salesman. He was the head of an agricultural cooperative founded on the basis of his own theory of peasant aesthetics. He was an amateur geologist, a student of esperanto, and a cellist. He was an avid hiker and cataloguer of things observed while hiking. He was a devout Buddhist and an
9 Who We Are Is God’s Dying: from:
Hope and the Longing for Utopia
Author(s) Schroeder Steven
Abstract: Many times the same dream visited me in my past life, appearing in different forms but saying the same thing. “Socrates,” it said, “get to work and make music. At the time, I took this to mean what I was doing already and assumed the dream was encouraging and urging me on—the way people cheer for members of their own team—to make music. And, philosophy being the greatest music, I was doing that already. But now after the trial, with the religious festival delaying my execution, it occurred to me that if the dream was urging me to
10 TechnoTopia: from:
Hope and the Longing for Utopia
Author(s) Elwell J. Sage
Abstract: In her book
The Concept of Utopia,Ruth Levitas writes that utopia is “the expression of desire for a better way of living and being.”¹ accepting her formulation as a starting point, the question i raise here is: what informs that “desire for a better way of living and being”? That is, what are the grounding principles that shape a desire for a better way of living and being? in this chapter, I address this question to three artists who self-consciously envisioned an aesthetic and cultural utopia in light of the defining technologies of the twentieth century. At a time
Book Title: Hope and the Longing for Utopia-Futures and Illusions in Theology and Narrative
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Boscaljon Daniel
Abstract: At present the battle over who defines our future is being waged most publicly by secular and religious fundamentalists. 'Hope and the Longing for Utopia' offers an alternative position, disclosing a conceptual path toward potential worlds that resist a limited view of human potential and the gift of religion. In addition to outlining the value of embracing unknown potentialities, these twelve interdisciplinary essays explore why it has become crucial that we commit to hoping for values that resist traditional ideological commitments. Contextualized by contemporary writing on utopia, and drawing from a wealth of times and cultures ranging from Calvin’s Geneva to early twentieth-century Japanese children’s stories to Hollywood cinema, these essays cumulatively disclose the fundamental importance of resisting tantalizing certainties while considering the importance of the unknown and unknowable. Beginning with a set of four essays outlining the importance of hope and utopia as diagnostic concepts, and following with four concrete examples, the collection ends with a set of essays that provide theological speculations on the need to embrace finitude and limitations in a world increasingly enframed by secularizing impulses. Overall, this book discloses how hope and utopia illuminate ways to think past simplified wishes for the future.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf5h7
6 Fruit, Fossils, Footprints: from:
Hope and the Longing for Utopia
Author(s) Curley Melissa Anne-Marie
Abstract: Essays on the Japanese writer Miyazawa Kenji (1896–1933) often begin with an inventory of his interests and accomplishments. The list is irresistible: he was a poet and author, particularly remembered now for his children’s stories, but also a soil scientist, a high school teacher, and a sometime fertilizer salesman. He was the head of an agricultural cooperative founded on the basis of his own theory of peasant aesthetics. He was an amateur geologist, a student of esperanto, and a cellist. He was an avid hiker and cataloguer of things observed while hiking. He was a devout Buddhist and an
9 Who We Are Is God’s Dying: from:
Hope and the Longing for Utopia
Author(s) Schroeder Steven
Abstract: Many times the same dream visited me in my past life, appearing in different forms but saying the same thing. “Socrates,” it said, “get to work and make music. At the time, I took this to mean what I was doing already and assumed the dream was encouraging and urging me on—the way people cheer for members of their own team—to make music. And, philosophy being the greatest music, I was doing that already. But now after the trial, with the religious festival delaying my execution, it occurred to me that if the dream was urging me to
10 TechnoTopia: from:
Hope and the Longing for Utopia
Author(s) Elwell J. Sage
Abstract: In her book
The Concept of Utopia,Ruth Levitas writes that utopia is “the expression of desire for a better way of living and being.”¹ accepting her formulation as a starting point, the question i raise here is: what informs that “desire for a better way of living and being”? That is, what are the grounding principles that shape a desire for a better way of living and being? in this chapter, I address this question to three artists who self-consciously envisioned an aesthetic and cultural utopia in light of the defining technologies of the twentieth century. At a time
6 Trinitarian Description between Metaphysics and Hermeneutics from:
Between Vision and Obedience - Rethinking Theological Epistemology
Abstract: Our time may not be propitious for reopening epistemological discussions,
6 Trinitarian Description between Metaphysics and Hermeneutics from:
Between Vision and Obedience - Rethinking Theological Epistemology
Abstract: Our time may not be propitious for reopening epistemological discussions,
6 Trinitarian Description between Metaphysics and Hermeneutics from:
Between Vision and Obedience - Rethinking Theological Epistemology
Abstract: Our time may not be propitious for reopening epistemological discussions,
6 Trinitarian Description between Metaphysics and Hermeneutics from:
Between Vision and Obedience - Rethinking Theological Epistemology
Abstract: Our time may not be propitious for reopening epistemological discussions,
6 Trinitarian Description between Metaphysics and Hermeneutics from:
Between Vision and Obedience - Rethinking Theological Epistemology
Abstract: Our time may not be propitious for reopening epistemological discussions,
6 Trinitarian Description between Metaphysics and Hermeneutics from:
Between Vision and Obedience - Rethinking Theological Epistemology
Abstract: Our time may not be propitious for reopening epistemological discussions,
6 Trinitarian Description between Metaphysics and Hermeneutics from:
Between Vision and Obedience - Rethinking Theological Epistemology
Abstract: Our time may not be propitious for reopening epistemological discussions,
6 Trinitarian Description between Metaphysics and Hermeneutics from:
Between Vision and Obedience - Rethinking Theological Epistemology
Abstract: Our time may not be propitious for reopening epistemological discussions,
2 Does Jeremiah Confess, Lament, or Complain? from:
Spiritual Complaint
Author(s) Bulkeley Tim
Abstract: The claim by Shakespeare's Juliette “What's in a name? That which we call a rose by any other name would smell as sweet” is often quoted to claim that naming is arbitrary. Yet what we call things matters. For our classifying, and hence our naming, in part defines what we can and will perceive. This chapter investigates three approaches to naming the genre present in the speeches commonly known as “the confessions of Jeremiah” in order to uncover three responses to the dark times. While these are different they also often coincide and collaborate as our spirits respond to disaster
8 The Doubtful Gain of Penitence: from:
Spiritual Complaint
Author(s) Tiemeyer Lena-Sofia
Abstract: When should we lament¹ and intercede and when should we turn to God in penitence or stand before God’s awesomeness in stunned silence? Is it possible to know which approach to take when we draw near to God in supplication? Does it depend on the quality of the sin, the size of the punishment, or on our own feelings of guilt or innocence? Moreover, are lament and intercession always open possibilities or are there times when these kinds of responses are inappropriate?
13 Public Lament from:
Spiritual Complaint
Author(s) Taylor Steve
Abstract: There has been a surge of scholarship around lament in recent times. Although the initial impetus for this resurgence can be found in the works of both Westermann and Brueggemann, the focus on lament has moved beyond the boundaries of biblical studies and has taken on a particular urgency in light of global events since the turn of the millennium.¹ The first decade of the twenty-first century has seen tragedies which have touched the consciousness of people worldwide. Headline examples include the attack on the world trade centre in 2001, the wars in Afghanistan and Iraq, terrorist bombings in Bali
Foreword from:
Beyond Old and New Perspectives on Paul
Author(s) Adams Edward
Abstract: In december 2011, at King’s College London, was convened a conference critically engaging with Douglas Campbell’s monumental
The Deliverance of God. a follow-up conference was held in November 2012 at duke divinity school. The present volume arises from papers presented at these gatherings. It is appropriate that the first conference took place at King’s, where Douglas’s work on the project that would lead to Deliverance began in earnest. I was a colleague of his during his time at King’s and witnessed first hand the early birth pangs of the project. It was a great delight to welcome my old friend
Introduction from:
The Dialogical Spirit
Abstract: Soon after completing my PhD thesis I wrote a book on theological method,
Spirit-Word-Community: Theological Hermeneutics in Trinitarian Perspective.¹ I was motivated in this direction in part because the theological academy was caught up, around the turn of the millennium, on questions related to method,² and in part because my own graduate training under a philosophical theologian alerted me to the importance of providing methodological argumentation in a time when theological claims were no longer being received merely because they were asserted. Both trends were reactions to the post-Enlightenment world that had been emerging with increasing clarity across the last
CHAPTER 3 In Search of Foundations: from:
The Dialogical Spirit
Abstract: Over the past three and a half decades, Donald L. Gelpi, S.J., was one of the few individuals working at the intersections of theology and philosophy, and who had been, at the same time, involved with the charismatic movement (the Catholic Charismatic Renewal, in his case). Among other results has been the emergence of a systematic philosophical theology and spirituality that is imbued with intuitions derived from the charismatic experience, which continue to be appreciated as such by charismatic scholars working in these areas. In the past few years, Gelpi’s overall project, begun in earnest with the trilogy of
Charism
CHAPTER 4 The “Baptist Vision” of James Wm. McClendon Jr.: from:
The Dialogical Spirit
Abstract: On 30 October 2000, shortly after completing the final pages of his
Systematic Theology, James William McClendon Jr., Distinguished Scholar in Residence at Fuller Theological Seminary, returned home to be with the Lord.¹ The following review, reflection, and response to McClendon’s “baptist vision” is written in recognition of its importance for contemporary Christian theology. At the same time, insofar as it seeks to participate in, complement, and extend the theological conversation to which McClendon had devoted his life’s work, it should also be considered as a tribute to his legacy. Part one of this chapter will summarize some of the
CHAPTER 5 Whither Evangelical Theology? from:
The Dialogical Spirit
Abstract: It was the appearance of Veli-Matti Kärkkäinen’s most recent book [as of the time of writing],
One with God: Salvation as Deification and Justification, that occasioned the invitation to review his larger corpus in the pages of this journal.¹ My long-standing appreciation for Kärkkäinen’s theological work had previously been registered in my collecting, editing, and publishing a set of his essays in book form a few years ago.² In the editor’s introduction to that book, I noted that Kärkkäinen was fast becoming one of the more important theologians to be reckoned with in our time. He had not only already
CONCLUSION from:
The Dialogical Spirit
Abstract: It is now time to quickly review where we have come from in order to situate where we have arrived and anticipate next steps. The preceding has attempted to do theology dialogically, with twelve conversation partners, in order to exemplify an effective model of Christian theological inquiry at the beginning of the third millennium. I have also shown that such a dialogical approach is theologically funded by a pneumatological imagination as manifest particularly in the Acts narrative. Further, such a pneumatologically inspired dialogical method may be uniquely suited to enable navigation of our postfoundationalist, post-Christendom, postsecular, postmodern, and pluralistic landscape.
Introduction from:
The Dialogical Spirit
Abstract: Soon after completing my PhD thesis I wrote a book on theological method,
Spirit-Word-Community: Theological Hermeneutics in Trinitarian Perspective.¹ I was motivated in this direction in part because the theological academy was caught up, around the turn of the millennium, on questions related to method,² and in part because my own graduate training under a philosophical theologian alerted me to the importance of providing methodological argumentation in a time when theological claims were no longer being received merely because they were asserted. Both trends were reactions to the post-Enlightenment world that had been emerging with increasing clarity across the last
CHAPTER 3 In Search of Foundations: from:
The Dialogical Spirit
Abstract: Over the past three and a half decades, Donald L. Gelpi, S.J., was one of the few individuals working at the intersections of theology and philosophy, and who had been, at the same time, involved with the charismatic movement (the Catholic Charismatic Renewal, in his case). Among other results has been the emergence of a systematic philosophical theology and spirituality that is imbued with intuitions derived from the charismatic experience, which continue to be appreciated as such by charismatic scholars working in these areas. In the past few years, Gelpi’s overall project, begun in earnest with the trilogy of
Charism
CHAPTER 4 The “Baptist Vision” of James Wm. McClendon Jr.: from:
The Dialogical Spirit
Abstract: On 30 October 2000, shortly after completing the final pages of his
Systematic Theology, James William McClendon Jr., Distinguished Scholar in Residence at Fuller Theological Seminary, returned home to be with the Lord.¹ The following review, reflection, and response to McClendon’s “baptist vision” is written in recognition of its importance for contemporary Christian theology. At the same time, insofar as it seeks to participate in, complement, and extend the theological conversation to which McClendon had devoted his life’s work, it should also be considered as a tribute to his legacy. Part one of this chapter will summarize some of the
CHAPTER 5 Whither Evangelical Theology? from:
The Dialogical Spirit
Abstract: It was the appearance of Veli-Matti Kärkkäinen’s most recent book [as of the time of writing],
One with God: Salvation as Deification and Justification, that occasioned the invitation to review his larger corpus in the pages of this journal.¹ My long-standing appreciation for Kärkkäinen’s theological work had previously been registered in my collecting, editing, and publishing a set of his essays in book form a few years ago.² In the editor’s introduction to that book, I noted that Kärkkäinen was fast becoming one of the more important theologians to be reckoned with in our time. He had not only already
CONCLUSION from:
The Dialogical Spirit
Abstract: It is now time to quickly review where we have come from in order to situate where we have arrived and anticipate next steps. The preceding has attempted to do theology dialogically, with twelve conversation partners, in order to exemplify an effective model of Christian theological inquiry at the beginning of the third millennium. I have also shown that such a dialogical approach is theologically funded by a pneumatological imagination as manifest particularly in the Acts narrative. Further, such a pneumatologically inspired dialogical method may be uniquely suited to enable navigation of our postfoundationalist, post-Christendom, postsecular, postmodern, and pluralistic landscape.
6 “She of Uriah” from:
Mothers on the Margin?
Abstract: The shock of the reference to the fact that Solomon’s mother did not “belong” to David but to Uriah is compounded by the knowledge that technically this is “incorrect” since Bathsheba was David’s wife by the time she conceived and bore Solomon. Clearly, Matthew
6 Divine Anguish: from:
God's Wounds
Abstract: The philial, agapic, and erotic dimensions of divine love, as expressed in this active stage of divine grief, constitute the
materialcharacteristics of divine anguish. Like my study of divine sorrow, in my previous analysis of theformalcharacteristics of divine anguish, various aspects of divinecaritashave appeared several times. In this chapter, then, I will draw together the major strands of those dimensions in divinecaritasas they display themselves in divine anguish.
6 Divine Anguish: from:
God's Wounds
Abstract: The philial, agapic, and erotic dimensions of divine love, as expressed in this active stage of divine grief, constitute the
materialcharacteristics of divine anguish. Like my study of divine sorrow, in my previous analysis of theformalcharacteristics of divine anguish, various aspects of divinecaritashave appeared several times. In this chapter, then, I will draw together the major strands of those dimensions in divinecaritasas they display themselves in divine anguish.
6 Divine Anguish: from:
God's Wounds
Abstract: The philial, agapic, and erotic dimensions of divine love, as expressed in this active stage of divine grief, constitute the
materialcharacteristics of divine anguish. Like my study of divine sorrow, in my previous analysis of theformalcharacteristics of divine anguish, various aspects of divinecaritashave appeared several times. In this chapter, then, I will draw together the major strands of those dimensions in divinecaritasas they display themselves in divine anguish.
6 Divine Anguish: from:
God's Wounds
Abstract: The philial, agapic, and erotic dimensions of divine love, as expressed in this active stage of divine grief, constitute the
materialcharacteristics of divine anguish. Like my study of divine sorrow, in my previous analysis of theformalcharacteristics of divine anguish, various aspects of divinecaritashave appeared several times. In this chapter, then, I will draw together the major strands of those dimensions in divinecaritasas they display themselves in divine anguish.
6 Luther and Asian Eucharistic Theology from:
Martin Luther and Buddhism
Abstract: What shapes and characterizes Luther’s ecclesiology is his theology of Word and Sacraments. In this chapter we meet Luther’s eucharistic theology in relation to Roman Catholic teaching. Luther’s theology of the Lord’s Supper, when seen in a time-related and eschatological dimension, will engage the spirituality of ancestral rites that has been controversial until the present in Asian churches and theologies. Would it be possible to deepen Luther’s theology of the Lord’s Supper in terms of his keen insight into Jesus’ descent into hell? If we perceive a real presence of Jesus Christ in the Eucharist in relation to Christ’s total
Introduction from:
Facing the Other
Abstract: This book adds to a litany of works in recent years that argue for a theological significance of the body. It shares the sentiment of Matthew’s gospel that the theological meaning of the body exceeds outer apparel, even the language used to describe it or the metaphors with which it is dressed. It is indeed “more than clothes.” However, this book resists the temptation to merely propose a carnivalesque or reductionist postmodern account of the human person in which goodness and truth are tied to the pleasures of the body. Rather, the approaches of two notable twentieth-century thinkers are teased
1 John Paul II and Emmanuel Levinas: from:
Facing the Other
Abstract: John Paul II has been declared a saint. With this declaration of extraordinary holiness, the Catholic Church calls for reflection upon the many contributions that John Paul II (Karol Wojtyla) made to various problems of the age in which he lived, which in the case of the twentieth century is a time of much war, blood, and conflict. Of the examples of friendship and dialogue in which Wojtyla engaged, an overlooked discourse is that which he held with Emmanuel Levinas, a Lithuanian-born French-Jewish intellectual. This particular dialogue cannot be understood without reference to religion, phenomenology, and postmodernity. Moreover, key publications
Introduction from:
Facing the Other
Abstract: This book adds to a litany of works in recent years that argue for a theological significance of the body. It shares the sentiment of Matthew’s gospel that the theological meaning of the body exceeds outer apparel, even the language used to describe it or the metaphors with which it is dressed. It is indeed “more than clothes.” However, this book resists the temptation to merely propose a carnivalesque or reductionist postmodern account of the human person in which goodness and truth are tied to the pleasures of the body. Rather, the approaches of two notable twentieth-century thinkers are teased
1 John Paul II and Emmanuel Levinas: from:
Facing the Other
Abstract: John Paul II has been declared a saint. With this declaration of extraordinary holiness, the Catholic Church calls for reflection upon the many contributions that John Paul II (Karol Wojtyla) made to various problems of the age in which he lived, which in the case of the twentieth century is a time of much war, blood, and conflict. Of the examples of friendship and dialogue in which Wojtyla engaged, an overlooked discourse is that which he held with Emmanuel Levinas, a Lithuanian-born French-Jewish intellectual. This particular dialogue cannot be understood without reference to religion, phenomenology, and postmodernity. Moreover, key publications
Introduction from:
Facing the Other
Abstract: This book adds to a litany of works in recent years that argue for a theological significance of the body. It shares the sentiment of Matthew’s gospel that the theological meaning of the body exceeds outer apparel, even the language used to describe it or the metaphors with which it is dressed. It is indeed “more than clothes.” However, this book resists the temptation to merely propose a carnivalesque or reductionist postmodern account of the human person in which goodness and truth are tied to the pleasures of the body. Rather, the approaches of two notable twentieth-century thinkers are teased
1 John Paul II and Emmanuel Levinas: from:
Facing the Other
Abstract: John Paul II has been declared a saint. With this declaration of extraordinary holiness, the Catholic Church calls for reflection upon the many contributions that John Paul II (Karol Wojtyla) made to various problems of the age in which he lived, which in the case of the twentieth century is a time of much war, blood, and conflict. Of the examples of friendship and dialogue in which Wojtyla engaged, an overlooked discourse is that which he held with Emmanuel Levinas, a Lithuanian-born French-Jewish intellectual. This particular dialogue cannot be understood without reference to religion, phenomenology, and postmodernity. Moreover, key publications
1 The Church Looks to the Future: from:
Contextual Theology
Abstract: The history of Christianity has exhibited surprising and dramatic turning points during the last century. A century ago, commentators declared that the twentieth century would be the most hopeful and promising of any period in history. William Temple, the Archbishop of Canterbury, declared early in the century at his installation as Archbishop of Canterbury that Christianity was a worldwide reality.¹ He and others speculated about this new turn of events and prophesied great and exciting changes. At the beginning of the century John Mott wrote a classic of the times. The title says it in a nutshell:
The Evangelization of
3 The Helpfulness of Theology in the Life of the Church from:
Contextual Theology
Abstract: The rise of the “new Christianity” has led Christian theologians to retrieve insights within Christian traditions that are helpful as the faith takes root and forms new and vital communities and practices. According to these traditions, good theology is not a search for universal truths that can be applied in all contexts and times, but rather an engagement with the lives of peoples and communities. The eschatological framework of Christian thinking and the centrality of theological theories of God’s grace ensure the openness of Christian thinking to new contexts. The creation of new Christian communities is a social and cultural
4 Contextual Theology Becomes an Issue from:
Contextual Theology
Abstract: As a “new Christianity” began to unhinge from dependency upon the Christian institutions of the Atlantic churches, the awareness that new ways of doing theology would emerge grew gradually and in some circles begrudgingly. In time the search for insights from Christian thinking led to engagement. Theologians such as Karl Barth, Paul Lehmann, and Visser ’T Hooft addressed the theoretical side of problems that had to be faced, such as the form an ecumenical theology can take and the relation between dogma and ethics. The key, it was believed, is found in the deceptively simple principle that faith informs theological
Book Title: Christian Ethics as Witness-Barth's Ethics for a World at Risk
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): HADDORFF DAVID
Abstract: Christian ethics is less a system of principles, rules, or even virtues, and more of a free and open-ended responsible witness to God's gracious action to be with and for others and the world. Postmodernity has left us with the risky uncertainty of knowing and doing the good. It also leaves us with the global risks of political violence and terrorism, economic globalization and financial crisis, and environmental destruction and global climate change. How should Christians respond to these problems? Haddorf creatively explores how Christian ethics is best understood as a witness to God's action, bringing together two of his interests, Christian social ethics and social theory, and the theology and ethics of Karl Barth. Although demanding and sometimes uncertain after postmodern changes, christian ethics enable humankind to remain God's witnesses of love and care for the future, even in a world at risk.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf9s9
CHAPTER THIRTEEN Environmental Witness: from:
Christian Ethics as Witness
Abstract: When Barth finally visited America, in 1962, he gave what would be his last set of public lectures, published together in the fine book,
Evangelical Theology. In the introduction, he makes the cryptic remark that what is needed at this time, on both sides of the Atlantic, is not a return to the traditional orthodoxy of Thomism, Lutheranism, or Calvinism or the liberal theology of Harnack and Troeltsch, and most of all not “Barthianism,” but what he calls a “theology of freedom.”¹ A theology of freedom, says Barth, is: “marked by freedom from fear of communism, Russia, inevitable nuclear warfare
Foreword from:
Gift and the Unity of Being
Author(s) Milbank John
Abstract: Today it would be difficult for any one theologian to write a complete, new
Summa. Yet in this wonderful book, Antonio López offers us no less than a short, indicativeSumma theologiaefor our times, which points the way to a new theological and philosophical synthesis.
VII. The Unexpected Gift from:
Gift and the Unity of Being
Abstract: We have approached the circularity of being and gift by saying that whereas gift indicates the unity of being, unity points to the permanence of the gift. The inseparability of the gifted unity of being from the question of time arose through the examination of the gratuity of the gift: the entryway to the meaning of being’s time and eternity.Pondering God’s own gratuity revealed that the tri-hypostatic being is one precisely because God is eternal, ever-fruitful beginning. Eternity is the tri-hypostatic gift that is simple, perfect, self-subsistent, and ever-fruitful beginning. We also arrived at the relation between being and time
3 Interpreting Genesis: from:
Allegorizing History
Abstract: The preceding chapter showed that Bede did not figurally exegete events in the English Church’s history, despite frequent opportunities to do so. I will argue in this chapter that Bede’s commentary on Genesis and how he reads the creation of time, history, and the world displays a theological and philosophical ambiguity that factors into how Bede conceives of God’s action or providential caring for history and humanity. Using
In genesimas my point of departure, I am following Charles Jones who describes Bede’s commentary as “God’s Word on Nature and Grace.”¹ In order to highlight what I think are Bede’s
Conclusion from:
Allegorizing History
Abstract: For the sake of clarification, and since my argument has ventured across disciplines and time periods, I want to reiterate and summarize my argument and what it has accomplished. Chapter 1 set the stage in two ways for my argument. First, by tracing the fault lines in contemporary Bedan scholarship regarding his
Ecclesiastical HistoryI put my own argument within a specific contemporary conversation. Second, I teased out implicit historiographical, philosophical, and theological issues within that scholarly conversation germane to my point regarding the ability to understand Bede’s sense of history in light of the differences between modern approaches (e.g.
8 Following-After and Becoming Human: from:
Being Human, Becoming Human
Author(s) Gregor Brian
Abstract: According Jürgen Moltmann, the notion of discipleship is “a Cinderella of Protestantism.” For a long time it was a lowly and despised stepsister. In the established churches it was considered an excess of the pietist fringe, that is, “the ‘voluntary’ groups on the left wing of the Reformation the people who were notoriously slandered as ‘enthusiasts’, ‘fanatics’, ‘do-gooders’ or ‘radicals.’”¹ At the same time, it also threatened to contaminate the gospel with the works-righteousness of the medieval
imitatio Christi. One of Dietrich Bonhoeffer’s many achievements, Moltmann proposes, was to make it possible to mention discipleship in polite society.² Bonhoeffer gave
Prelude from:
Making Memory
Abstract: This is a book about living with the past—not about memory itself
per se, but about the process of constructing cultural memory, about the negotiation, implicit or explicit, between what is remembered, transmuted into narrative, handed on from generation to generation, and what is forgotten, unspoken, overlooked. My underlying assumption is that the understanding of the past generated by such a process plays an essential role in shaping attitudes and actions of individuals and societies in the present. This understanding (“memory”) is at times difficult to distinguish from the process of its formation (“memorialization”); the former is often the
ONE Remembering Amalek from:
Making Memory
Abstract: At the end of every winter, in the month of Adar, the normal order of Torah readings is supplemented with four special readings which, taken together, lay the foundation for the observance of Pesach-Shavuot,² which begins in the following month of Nissan. The readings are, in order, Shekalim (Exod 30:11–16), Zakhor (cited above), Parah (Num 19:1), and HaChodesh (Exod 12:1–20).³ One may argue that these readings lay out four essential pillars of Judaism: charitable giving, remembrance, ritual purity, and observance of sanctified time.⁴ These four areas are firmly intertwined, and a discussion of any one will necessarily involve
FIVE Worship in the Ruins from:
Making Memory
Abstract: On a quiet street of what was formerly East Berlin, not terribly far from Checkpoint Charlie, a crowd shuffles through the door of an old courthouse.¹ A few at a time, they pass through a narrowly-guarded gate, down a steep and twisting flight of stairs, into a sloping corridor with tiled floors, dully reflecting the glare of the institutional fluorescent lights overhead. The angles at which this corridor is cut across by two other, nearly identical, passageways are more reminiscent of a funhouse than a hospital. These intersections seem to provide the visitors a multitude of potential destinations, though all
8 A Dialectical Engagement with Demonization from:
Religion and Violence
Abstract: The third symbol presented by Juergensmeyer and others for understanding the link between violence and religion is the phenomenon of demonization. In this chapter, I will argue that without a heuristic account of evil, people will be unable to discern why demonization continues the cycle of violence. We will see that social exclusion and humiliation provide for the emergence and survival of demonizing processes, while acts of dehumanization escalate those processes to the point where those demonized are robbed of their subjectivity. Emerging out of situations where there is an imbalance of power, I will demonstrate the role of
ressentiment
Foreword from:
Church and Ethical Responsibility in the Midst of World Economy
Author(s) Duchrow Ulrich
Abstract: Who can write a book like this one? I guess only someone who has worked for a long time in interdisciplinary, intercultural, and interreligious ways. Paul Chung has already brought into dialogue Martin Luther with Buddhism, Karl Barth with religious pluralism, as well as Asian
minjungtheology with Buddhism, Daoism, and Confucianism—in order to construct an “Irregular Theology.” Now he masters the social, economic, historical, and cultural complexities of capitalism in the context of today’s crises. What is his special contribution to the broad debate on this subject spurred by the nearly complete collapse of the financial system in
Introduction (English) from:
Vatican II
Author(s) Routhier Gilles
Abstract: The Second Vatican Council (1962–65) is recognized as the most significant religious event of the twentieth century, having a global influence. Its importance is no less significant when viewed from a Canadian perspective. In fact, this was the first time that a substantial number of Canadian bishops took part in an ecumenical council. Moreover, the Second Vatican Council was held at a moment when Canadian society was beginning to undergo a period of profound change, at a time when the Catholic Church in Canada was called to an unprecedented transformation due to its changing place within this evolving culture
The Lesser of Two Evils? from:
Vatican II
Author(s) Meehan Peter
Abstract: On the afternoon of Wednesday, October 21, 1964, during the third session of the Second Vatican Council, Philip Pocock, the coadjutor archbishop of Toronto, was enjoying a rare moment of personal time. He was getting a haircut. He later recalled that tumultuous afternoon, sitting in the barbershop of the Hotel de la Ville on the Via Sistina, ten minutes from the Vatican: “That barbershop had a telephone in every chair. The telephone rang and it was for me. I was talking to some reporter in Toronto while the barber was clipping my hair around the back.”¹ The call, from a
Introduction (English) from:
Vatican II
Author(s) Routhier Gilles
Abstract: The Second Vatican Council (1962–65) is recognized as the most significant religious event of the twentieth century, having a global influence. Its importance is no less significant when viewed from a Canadian perspective. In fact, this was the first time that a substantial number of Canadian bishops took part in an ecumenical council. Moreover, the Second Vatican Council was held at a moment when Canadian society was beginning to undergo a period of profound change, at a time when the Catholic Church in Canada was called to an unprecedented transformation due to its changing place within this evolving culture
The Lesser of Two Evils? from:
Vatican II
Author(s) Meehan Peter
Abstract: On the afternoon of Wednesday, October 21, 1964, during the third session of the Second Vatican Council, Philip Pocock, the coadjutor archbishop of Toronto, was enjoying a rare moment of personal time. He was getting a haircut. He later recalled that tumultuous afternoon, sitting in the barbershop of the Hotel de la Ville on the Via Sistina, ten minutes from the Vatican: “That barbershop had a telephone in every chair. The telephone rang and it was for me. I was talking to some reporter in Toronto while the barber was clipping my hair around the back.”¹ The call, from a
3 Model Behaviour: from:
Building New Bridges - Bâtir de nouveaux ponts
Author(s) Lamb Susan
Abstract: The anatomical model - a re-creation of normal or pathological anatomy created in various material - is usually regarded as simply a teaching aid for those studying to be physicians, and although the historical discourse surrounding anatomy often testifies to that purpose alone, a diversity in its function emerges if the researcher looks beyond the written text. The artistic choices made by creators of anatomical models reinforce messages about how a society views its own corporality, and by examining the way in which anatomy models are fabricated and decorated, cultural attitudes about the body in a given time period can
12 The Politics of Sources and Definitions from:
Building New Bridges - Bâtir de nouveaux ponts
Author(s) Bradatan Cristina
Abstract: Demographic transition is a well-known theory in demography, and it is still considered one that is “alive” (Hirschman, 1994). The ideas of a changing demographic pattern as societies modernize appeared sometime at the beginning of the nineteenth century. Among the first who gave a shape to this theory were Notenstein (1953) and Davis (1963). They observed that fertility and mortality decreased in most of the industrialized world and noted the relationships between these demographic phenomena and some other components of social life, such as modernization and economic development. The classical form of demographic transition states that industrialization and urbanization created
14 Documents in Bronze and Stone: from:
Building New Bridges - Bâtir de nouveaux ponts
Author(s) Vance Jonathan F.
Abstract: In 1925, in passing its verdict in the competition to design Winnipeg’s civic war memorial, the judging panel declared for the winner with the following words: “The sentiment is simply and directly expressed in a manner about which no doubt can be felt and no questions need to be asked.”¹ For these judges, the winning design was not open to interpretation; it had one meaning and one meaning only, and that meaning would endure for all time.
15 The Evidence of Omission in Art History’s Texts from:
Building New Bridges - Bâtir de nouveaux ponts
Author(s) Romba Katharine
Abstract: Katharine Romba Historians have long sought the assistance of written texts when examining the visual and material evidence of a culture, considering what is said in the writings of the time to be an important indicator of pertinent issues, themes, and perspectives regarding the object.
20 Evidence of What? from:
Building New Bridges - Bâtir de nouveaux ponts
Author(s) Gaffield Chad
Abstract: Surprisingly and in repeatedly unexpected ways, historians have continued to debate in recent decades the central question of their craft: how can the past be described and explained? At each stage of the debate, the answers to this question have reflected and contributed to larger epistemological discussions across the disciplines. The following discussion examines selected aspects of the twists and turns of recent historical debate by using the example of research on census enumerations. From the time of the “new social history” of the 1960s and 1970s to the cultural history of the 1980s and 1990s, scholars have focused on
3 Model Behaviour: from:
Building New Bridges - Bâtir de nouveaux ponts
Author(s) Lamb Susan
Abstract: The anatomical model - a re-creation of normal or pathological anatomy created in various material - is usually regarded as simply a teaching aid for those studying to be physicians, and although the historical discourse surrounding anatomy often testifies to that purpose alone, a diversity in its function emerges if the researcher looks beyond the written text. The artistic choices made by creators of anatomical models reinforce messages about how a society views its own corporality, and by examining the way in which anatomy models are fabricated and decorated, cultural attitudes about the body in a given time period can
12 The Politics of Sources and Definitions from:
Building New Bridges - Bâtir de nouveaux ponts
Author(s) Bradatan Cristina
Abstract: Demographic transition is a well-known theory in demography, and it is still considered one that is “alive” (Hirschman, 1994). The ideas of a changing demographic pattern as societies modernize appeared sometime at the beginning of the nineteenth century. Among the first who gave a shape to this theory were Notenstein (1953) and Davis (1963). They observed that fertility and mortality decreased in most of the industrialized world and noted the relationships between these demographic phenomena and some other components of social life, such as modernization and economic development. The classical form of demographic transition states that industrialization and urbanization created
14 Documents in Bronze and Stone: from:
Building New Bridges - Bâtir de nouveaux ponts
Author(s) Vance Jonathan F.
Abstract: In 1925, in passing its verdict in the competition to design Winnipeg’s civic war memorial, the judging panel declared for the winner with the following words: “The sentiment is simply and directly expressed in a manner about which no doubt can be felt and no questions need to be asked.”¹ For these judges, the winning design was not open to interpretation; it had one meaning and one meaning only, and that meaning would endure for all time.
15 The Evidence of Omission in Art History’s Texts from:
Building New Bridges - Bâtir de nouveaux ponts
Author(s) Romba Katharine
Abstract: Katharine Romba Historians have long sought the assistance of written texts when examining the visual and material evidence of a culture, considering what is said in the writings of the time to be an important indicator of pertinent issues, themes, and perspectives regarding the object.
20 Evidence of What? from:
Building New Bridges - Bâtir de nouveaux ponts
Author(s) Gaffield Chad
Abstract: Surprisingly and in repeatedly unexpected ways, historians have continued to debate in recent decades the central question of their craft: how can the past be described and explained? At each stage of the debate, the answers to this question have reflected and contributed to larger epistemological discussions across the disciplines. The following discussion examines selected aspects of the twists and turns of recent historical debate by using the example of research on census enumerations. From the time of the “new social history” of the 1960s and 1970s to the cultural history of the 1980s and 1990s, scholars have focused on
I The Therapeutic Relationship and Techniques: from:
The Helping Relationship
Author(s) Meier Augustine
Abstract: The twenty-first century is indeed an exciting time in which to live because of the many technological advances that pervade all segments of our society. Information technology allows us in seconds to connect to and communicate with people regardless of where they live. Technology has opened the door to outerspace exploration and has advanced medical diagnostic and surgical procedures. One stands in awe in the face of all these advances and humbly ponders whether the best is yet to come.
III Transference and Countertransference Revisited from:
The Helping Relationship
Author(s) Meier Augustine
Abstract: During the past decade, there has been increased interest in the theoretical construct of countertransference. Attempts have been made to broaden its meaning to include all of the therapist’s feelings toward the client, in therapy and beyond therapy, and not to limit its meaning to the expression of the therapist’s unconscious and conflicted feelings as a reaction to a client’s transference. To better appreciate this trend, it is essential to revisit the concept of countertransference and to ascertain its original meaning, see how it has evolved over time, and consider the factors that have contributed to its modification.
VI The Medical Model of Psychotherapy: from:
The Helping Relationship
Author(s) Dimock John
Abstract: One usually goes to a doctor when one is sick. Th at has been true for time immemorial. Hua T’o was, according to the annals of the later Han Dynasty, an excellent Chinese surgeon who practised around 220 AD. He possibly used opium dissolved in wine as his anaesthetic. Western medicine was introduced to China in the early 17
thcentury, while Emperors Fu Hsi, Shen Nung, and Huang Ti were said to have founded the art of healing long before. Tao—the method of maintaining harmony between this world and the beyond—was subdivided into heaven, earth, and man. The
IX The Helping Relationship in CPE Supervision from:
The Helping Relationship
Author(s) Cutting Marsha
Abstract: The word
ezer(“helper”) in its various forms is widely used in the Hebrew Bible—120 times, to be exact. If we examine the passages whereezeris used, we find that a helper keeps one from being alone and can be a partner (Genesis 2:18), the powerless have particular need of a helper (Job 29:12), God is appealed to as a helper (Psalm 30:10), and God delivers those who have no helper (Psalm 72:12). Also, if God opposes you, you won’t prevail, even with help (Jeremiah 47:1–7), people are foolish to put faith in helpers who oppose God
Chapter XI Writing “Irish” in Pre-Confederation Canada: from:
Multiculturalism and Integration
Author(s) PETERMAN MICHAEL
Abstract: If Canadians today think back to the decade before Confederation, they do so with precious little interest or curiosity. Yet, it was a complicated and fiery prelude to that period of developing Canadian nationhood, a vexed and contradictory era, marked by religious pressures, shifting political alliances, much tentativeness and a climate of financial uncertainty. Powerful national, religious and ethnic agendas were at work before the gaze of an anxious and sometimes violent public. If, for instance, one were Irish-born and living in Canada, one’s position on the possibility of “confederation” depended upon many factors—whether one was Catholic or Protestant,
La culture de masse : from:
Enjeux interculturels des médias
Author(s) Lits Marc
Abstract: Depuis quelque temps, en prenant appui sur une légitimation de la culture populaire, émerge un discours de dénonciation des logiques commerciales des médias de masse qui asphyxieraient ce qui était authentiquement populaire, à savoir ancré dans une tradition imprégnée de folklore, de culture orale, etc. Ces jugements de valeur sont bien sûr marqués idéologiquement, mais ils restent en toile de fond des critiques contre la culture de masse : il y a ceux qui estiment que les
mass mediaset leurs programmes marqués par la culture américaine détruiraient les valeurs ancestrales des classes populaires (conflit interculturel), ou, à l’opposé, ceux
Chapitre 16 L’ordre et le désordre humanitaire from:
Enjeux et défis du développement international
Author(s) AUDET François
Abstract: Pourquoi s’intéresser à l’humanitaire? Selon le Bureau de la coordination des affaires humanitaires des Nations unies (OCHA), le nombre de victimes de crises humanitaires a doublé entre 2003 et 2010 et le contexte planétaire fait en sorte que la situation continuera de se détériorer (OCHA, 2010). En fait, le nombre de crises humanitaires, toutes causes confondues, a été multiplié par douze depuis 1950. L’augmentation du nombre de crises humanitaires a fait en sorte que les investissements globaux, institutionnels et privés pour répondre à ces urgences sont passés, entre 2000 et 2012, de moins de 10 milliards de dollars américains à
Foreword to the Paperback Edition from:
Red, White, and Blue
Abstract: A classic, it is said, is a work, whether art, literature, or scholarship, that can profitably be re-encountered throughout one’s life, with added appreciation when one places even a presumptively well-known work in the context of a later time. By any of these measures, Mark Tushnet’s
Red, White, and Blue: A Critical Analysis of Constitutional Law,is a classic, and Jeff Tulis and I, as coeditors of the Constitutional Thinking series at the University Press of Kansas, are delighted to be the agents of its republication more than a quarter-century after its initial publication in 1988. It can be read
5 Intuitionism and Little Theory from:
Red, White, and Blue
Abstract: The preceding chapters have explained the important role that grand theory plays in the liberal tradition. They have also suggested that grand theory cannot be made coherent today because of the erosion of the republican tradition. So far, though, we have considered only one theory at a time. Perhaps the theories could be combined so that their strengths reinforce each other and the strengths of one cancel the weaknesses of another. Unfortunately that strategy will not work. In discussing each grand theory I made two general kinds of arguments. First I developed an internal critique of the theory. That critique
The Culture of Celebrity and National Pedagogy from:
Home-Work
Author(s) KAMBOURELI SMARO
Abstract: I’m on pat bay highway, Wednesday morning, the twentieth anniversary of the Charter of Rights and Freedoms, driving home after dropping a friend at the Swartz Bay ferry terminal. Naturally, I'm listening to CBC. Mary Walsh is hosting the most recent “do” about Canadian literature. “The Battle of the Books,” an ad in the
Globe and Mailcalls it, a literary competition imaged as warfare in keeping with the times. The panel, consisting of the novelists Leon Rooke and Nalo Hopkinson; lead singer of the Barenaked Ladies, Steven Page; actor Megan Follows; and the former prime minister Kim Campbell, is
Is There a Subaltern in This Class(room)? from:
Home-Work
Author(s) MEER ZUBIN
Abstract: For the last 20 years, Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak has been my guru. I could explain what I mean by that word, but I think I’ll just let it resonate. Take it as used by a White Canadian who does not specialize in South Asian studies, who came of age at a time when
guruwas a bit of wild exotica which meant—something or other that was very cool. Since then I have learned a bit more about whatgurumight mean, but still only a bit.
Thinking about Things in the Postcolonial Classroom from:
Home-Work
Author(s) DEAN MISAO
Abstract: My father died two years ago, after a year-long illness with colon cancer. The doctors performed some palliative surgery at the time of his diagnosis, but as the cancer grew he could digest less and less of what he ate. So the year was spent, essentially, waiting for him to starve to death. It was a long time to wait. He was a person of great gifts, creative, intellectual, and personal; he played jazz trumpet, and is lauded in histories of Canadian jazz as one of the pioneers of the genre in Canada; he was a corporate lawyer who was
The Teacher Reader: from:
Home-Work
Author(s) RADFORD LINDA
Abstract: Karleen bradford’s
There Will Be Wolves, written in 1992, won the Canadian Library Association Best Young Adult Book Award and was nominated for several others. As one of my students in the Bachelor of Education program at the University of Ottawa pointed out, “students will enjoy this historical novel because it is similar to the popular TV programSurvivor, except there is far more bloodshed and no bikinis.” Bradford’s book transports you back to medieval times and demythologizes our romantic notions of the period. This medieval board of chess is a time when streets stank, people did not bathe, and
Chapitre 8 REPRÉSENTATIONS DU FÉMININ from:
De l'écrit à l'écran
Abstract: Le statut de « la femme » africaine a toujours donné lieu à des interrogations brûlantes, et même à des passions. Le discours masculin qui, selon Carole Boy ce Davis et Anne A. Graves (1990), se réduit à l’exaltation d'une beauté exotique ou à la protection de l’image d’une femme féconde, comme celui élaboré « ailleurs » et qui considère la femme comme catégorie universelle de création, dégage en permanence un malaise. Et on se demande toujours si elle est une « femme », éventuellement noire, ou simplement une « femme africaine », dont il convient de légitimer la représentation.
CHAPTER 3 THE TIMING OF TIMELINESS from:
Rephrasing Heidegger
Abstract: After finishing the preparatory fundamental analysis of Dasein in Section One of Part One of
Being and Time(which consists of §§9-44), Heidegger turns to the question of Dasein and timeliness [Zeitlichkeit] in Section Two (which consists of the remaining part ofBeing and Time,namely §§ 45-83). In order to make the transition from the theme of Section One to the theme of Section Two, Heidegger introduces a new concern in the metaphilosophical reflections of §45: the problem of thecompletenessand theauthenticityof our analysis of Dasein.
Retracing the Labyrinth of Modernism: from:
At the Speed of Light There is Only Illumination
Author(s) MANGANIELLO DOMINIC
Abstract: Marshall mcluhan sounds a keynote of his literary criticism with a description of modern art as a process of recovery by retracing. Landmark works such as
UlyssesandThe Waste Landmove simultaneously forward and backward in a timeless present, he argues, providing the reader with a discontinuous or cubist perspective from which to view various stages of aesthetic apprehension. This modernist method of composition in reverse was made possible by the shift in focus from exterior to interior landscape, apaysage intérieur, that occurred after Edgar Allen Poe, Charles Baudelaire, Rimbaud, and Stephane Mallarme. The period spanning the early
Book Title: Is There a Canadian Philosophy?-Reflections on the Canadian Identity
Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): HARRIS INGRID
Abstract: Is There a Canadian Philosophy?addresses the themes of community, culture, national identity, and universal human rights, taking the Canadian example as its focus. The authors argue that nations compelled to cope with increasing demands for group recognition may do so in a broadly liberal spirit and without succumbing to the dangers associated with an illiberal, adversarial multiculturalism. They identify and describe a Canadian civic philosophy and attempt to show how thismodus operandiof Canadian public life is capable of reconciling questions of collective identity and recognition with a commitment to individual rights and related principles of liberal democracy. They further argue that this philosophy can serve as a model for nations around the world faced with internal complexities and growing demands for recognition from populations more diverse than at any previous time in their histories.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ckpd3s
INTRODUCTION from:
Is There a Canadian Philosophy?
Abstract: If there is one thing urgently required in nations around the world confronted with growing demands for recognition of various forms of particularity—ethnic, cultural, linguistic, gender, and so on—it is a conception of civil association that reconciles recognition of difference with respect for the rights of individuals. Many older liberal democracies are rapidly becoming multicultural societies preoccupied with collective identities while many emerging democracies face similar challenges, often while struggling simultaneously to overcome a legacy of authoritarian and/or colonial rule. The dark side of identity politics has been illustrated all too frequently in modern times, most recently by
CHAPTER 2 NATIONALISM AND THE POLITICS OF IDENTITY from:
Is There a Canadian Philosophy?
Author(s) Fairfield Paul
Abstract: While not an altogether new phenomenon, political argumentation in recent times has increasingly opted for a discourse of collective identity over traditional liberal discourses of utility, the common good, and individual rights. Considerations of collective identity—whether articulated along national, ethnic, linguistic, gender, or other lines—and demands for recognition are increasingly displacing vocabularies of universality, neutrality, and, perhaps most of all, individuality.¹ Political disputes between proponents of individual freedoms and collective interests, or between the requirements of universality and particularity, are in themselves nothing new. What is new is the manner and extent to which the vocabulary of identity,
CHAPTER 3 THE BEARERS OF RIGHTS: from:
Is There a Canadian Philosophy?
Author(s) Fairfield Paul
Abstract: It is an old Canadian political impulse to seek reconciliation between apparent opposites both at the levels of political philosophy and practice. Perhaps a legacy of the historic agreement that brought together in a single nation cultures as diverse as the English, the French, and an assortment of aboriginal peoples, the practice of seeking political consensus through compromise—sometimes at the expense of principle—has long been the norm in Canadian political culture. Conciliation, accommodation, and
rapprochementare commonly touted as characteristically Canadian virtues, at least in this nation, and not without some claim to truth. This pragmatic turn of
2 Modernity, Science and Democracy from:
Modernité en transit - Modernity in Transit
Author(s) Harding Sandra
Abstract: The “modern” in “modern science” is a relatively unexamined concept within the sciences and in the philosophy, sociology and history of science; it is a concept for which theories have yet to be developed, this at a time when other aspects of Western sciences have been fruitfully explored in critical and illuminating ways, and when the exceptionalism and triumphalism characteristic of Western attitudes toward our sciences have been explicitly criticized and purportedly abandoned by many of the scholars working in science studies fields. By exceptionalism is meant the belief that Western sciences alone, among all human knowledge systems, are capable
9 Goût, modernité et postmodernité. from:
Modernité en transit - Modernity in Transit
Author(s) Fridman Viviana
Abstract: En 1757, dans l’
Encyclopédie, Montesquieu définissait le goût comme « l’avantage de découvrir avec finesse et avec promptitude l amesure du plaisir que chaque chose doit donner aux hommes » (1993, p. 62). Selon Luc Ferry, l’émergence de la notion de goût comme faculté permettant d’apprécier la beauté à travers lesentimentest emblématique de l’émergence d’un nouvel humanisme propre à la modernité. Les débats esthétiques posaient ainsi avec la plus grande acuité « le problème central de lamodernité en général : comment fonder l’objectivité sur la subjectivité, la transcendance sur l’immanence? » (1990, p. 41). Comment, en effet, réconcilier
2 Modernity, Science and Democracy from:
Modernité en transit - Modernity in Transit
Author(s) Harding Sandra
Abstract: The “modern” in “modern science” is a relatively unexamined concept within the sciences and in the philosophy, sociology and history of science; it is a concept for which theories have yet to be developed, this at a time when other aspects of Western sciences have been fruitfully explored in critical and illuminating ways, and when the exceptionalism and triumphalism characteristic of Western attitudes toward our sciences have been explicitly criticized and purportedly abandoned by many of the scholars working in science studies fields. By exceptionalism is meant the belief that Western sciences alone, among all human knowledge systems, are capable
9 Goût, modernité et postmodernité. from:
Modernité en transit - Modernity in Transit
Author(s) Fridman Viviana
Abstract: En 1757, dans l’
Encyclopédie, Montesquieu définissait le goût comme « l’avantage de découvrir avec finesse et avec promptitude l amesure du plaisir que chaque chose doit donner aux hommes » (1993, p. 62). Selon Luc Ferry, l’émergence de la notion de goût comme faculté permettant d’apprécier la beauté à travers lesentimentest emblématique de l’émergence d’un nouvel humanisme propre à la modernité. Les débats esthétiques posaient ainsi avec la plus grande acuité « le problème central de lamodernité en général : comment fonder l’objectivité sur la subjectivité, la transcendance sur l’immanence? » (1990, p. 41). Comment, en effet, réconcilier
Introduction: from:
Robertson Davies
Author(s) LA BOSSIÈRE CAMILLE R.
Abstract: Once upon a time, in 1949, Robertson Davies revisited the time of his youth to recall of his first reading in Aldous Huxley that it lifted him into “the sunshine world of high comedy” and cast over his life “a summer glory... which no conceivable winter could dispel” (Enthusiasms 230). The book was Antic Hay (1923), taken up at the suggestion of a lad of his own age who aspired to priesthood in the Church of England. “Enthralled” by the “wonderfully amusing people,” “easy scholarship,” and “witty pedantry” he met with in that novel, the teenaged Davies immediately “knew that
L’altérité assumée dans La virevolte et Instruments des ténèbres de Nancy Huston from:
Vision-Division
Author(s) Gaboury-Diallo Lise
Abstract: Les liens complexes entre la notion d’identité et celle d’altérité ont toujours fasciné les artistes, et Nancy Huston ne fait pas exception. De l’expérience de la désubstantialisation de l’être à celle de l’autoengendrement par l’écriture, Huston décrit chez ses protagonistes les sentiments de clivage de soi, ou elle leur invente des identités plurielles, qui se côtoient et se complètent. Pourquoi ? Peut-être parce que, comme l’auteur l’affirme à la fin de
Nord perdu, « [i]l est tout simplement inadmissible que l’on ne dispose que d’une seule vie » (Huston, 1999:115).
INTRODUCTION from:
Husserl and the Sciences
Author(s) Feist Richard
Abstract: The founder of the phenomenological movement, Edmund Husserl (1859-1938), lived through a dynamic time for the sciences.¹ Not only were there major developments in mathematics and physics, but some of the greatest practitioners of these disciplines were pursuing foundational questions with an unprecedented depth and rigour. Although Husserl did not directly contribute to these developments, it is not correct to say that he simply sat on the sidelines. He personally knew and corresponded with several of the finest scientific and mathematical minds of the time. It is, therefore, not surprising that the relationship between Husserl’s philosophy and the sciences is
CHAPTER ONE EDMUND HUSSERL AND THE HISTORY OF CLASSICAL FOUNDATIONALISM from:
Husserl and the Sciences
Author(s) Philipse Herman
Abstract: According to many present-day epistemologists, the justification of scientific theories is relative in at least two respects. Whether a specific theory is justified at time
tdepends both upon the set E of empirical data available att, and upon the set R of rival theories which are considered by the relevant scientific community at that time. Indeed, a theory is justified at timetif and only if it performs better than its rivals in terms of the accepted criteria for theory choice, and one decisive criterion for theory choice is some version of the criterion of empirical superiority.
Book Title: Charting the Future of Translation History- Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): BANDIA PAUL F.
Abstract: Contributors to this volume go far beyond the text to uncover the role translation has played in many different times and settings such as Europe, Africa, Latin America, the Middle-east and Asia from the 6th century to the 20th. These contributions, which deal variously with the discourses on methodology and history, recast the discipline of translation history in a new light and pave the way to the future of research and teaching in the field.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ckpfkh
“Long Time No See, Coolie”: from:
Charting the Future of Translation History
Author(s) ST. ANDRÉ JAMES
Abstract: In 1900, Ernest Bramah Smith published
The Wallet of Kai Lung, purporting to be a collection of tales told by a Chinese storyteller, Kai Lung. Following its success, Smith published at least four additional anthologies sporadically over the next thirty years, and most of these works were reprinted one or more times up to the 1980s (see bibliography). Although it is nowhere explicitly stated, the stories purport to be “genuinely” Chinese. Such works form part of the intersection of two minor traditions in European literature, that of the Oriental tale and that of spurious translation (original works that are passed
The Imperial College of Santa Cruz de Tlatelolco: from:
Charting the Future of Translation History
Author(s) RODRIGUEZ LOURDES ARENCIBIA
Abstract: Santa Cruz de Tlatelolco, the first major school of interpreters and translators in the New World, was founded around 1573 and reformed about forty years later. Its role is in many ways reminiscent of the one played in Europe by the famous Toledo School founded by Bishop Ramon in Alfonso el Sabio’s time. Most
Book Title: Charting the Future of Translation History- Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): BANDIA PAUL F.
Abstract: Contributors to this volume go far beyond the text to uncover the role translation has played in many different times and settings such as Europe, Africa, Latin America, the Middle-east and Asia from the 6th century to the 20th. These contributions, which deal variously with the discourses on methodology and history, recast the discipline of translation history in a new light and pave the way to the future of research and teaching in the field.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ckpfkh
“Long Time No See, Coolie”: from:
Charting the Future of Translation History
Author(s) ST. ANDRÉ JAMES
Abstract: In 1900, Ernest Bramah Smith published
The Wallet of Kai Lung, purporting to be a collection of tales told by a Chinese storyteller, Kai Lung. Following its success, Smith published at least four additional anthologies sporadically over the next thirty years, and most of these works were reprinted one or more times up to the 1980s (see bibliography). Although it is nowhere explicitly stated, the stories purport to be “genuinely” Chinese. Such works form part of the intersection of two minor traditions in European literature, that of the Oriental tale and that of spurious translation (original works that are passed
The Imperial College of Santa Cruz de Tlatelolco: from:
Charting the Future of Translation History
Author(s) RODRIGUEZ LOURDES ARENCIBIA
Abstract: Santa Cruz de Tlatelolco, the first major school of interpreters and translators in the New World, was founded around 1573 and reformed about forty years later. Its role is in many ways reminiscent of the one played in Europe by the famous Toledo School founded by Bishop Ramon in Alfonso el Sabio’s time. Most
Book Title: Du corps des femmes-Contrôles, surveillances et résistances
Publisher: Les Presses de l'Université d'Ottawa
Author(s): KÉRISIT MICHÈLE
Abstract: Peint et chanté, voilé ou dévoilé, usé et abusé, le corps féminin est depuis toujours au centre de la création artistique occidentale. Qu'en est-il, cependant, de sa place dans les sciences sociales ? Comment le corps des femmes a-t-il été pensé et représenté en sociologie, en criminologie, en travail social ou en gérontologie, par exemple ? Cet ouvrage collectif a pour premier objectif d'amorcer ce travail critique en débusquant les logiques patriarcales qui dominent les discours savants développés dans les différentes disciplines des sciences sociales et mettant en scène le corps des femmes. Ce faisant, il montre également comment se sont historiquement construites, et se construisent encore, des représentations de corps de femmes illégitimes ou transgresseurs ou dangereux. Le second objectif de cet ouvrage est de repenser cette image en mettant en lumière les multiples façons que les femmes peuvent utiliser pour subvertir ces représentations dominantes et pour se poser comme sujets tant dans l'élaboration des savoirs que dans la sphère du politique.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ckpg06
Book Title: Philosophical Apprenticeships-Contemporary Continental Philosophy in Canada
Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): Robinson Jason
Abstract: Philosophical Apprenticeshipsgathers fresh and innovative essays written by the next generation of Canada's philosophers on the work of prominent Canadian philosophers currently researching topics in continental philosophy. The authors--doctoral students studying at Canadian universities--have studied with, worked with, or been deeply influenced by these philosophers. Their essays present, discuss, and develop the work of their mentors, addressing issues such as time, art, politics, hermeneutics, and phenomenology. The result is a volume that introduces the reader to the work of current Canadian philosophers and to that of their successors, who will soon be making their own contributions to Canadian continental philosophy.Includes articles by Gabriel Malenfant on Bettina Bergo, Saulius Geniusas on Gary Madison, John Marshall on Samuel Mallin, François Doyon on Claude Piché, Stephanie Zubcic on Jennifer Bates, Alexandra Morrison on Graeme Nicholson, Scott Marratto on John Russon, and Jill Gilbert on John Burbridge.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ckpgcw
Chapter 1 Simultaneity and Delay: from:
Philosophical Apprenticeships
Author(s) Robinson Jason
Abstract: The nature of time has been an irresistible mystery for philosophers for thousands of years. The same is no less true today, although questions of time have changed dramatically under the influence of physicists such as Newton and Einstein, and the hegemony of the natural sciences. For instance, most no longer think of time in terms of the Ancient Greeks’ cyclical time, modelled on the periodical rhythms of nature, or Christian eschatological time (rectilinear historical time), with its actual though postponed Kingdom in the present age (both fulfilled and fulfilling). While elements of both persist—such as the association of
Chapter 6 Mediating Play: from:
Philosophical Apprenticeships
Author(s) Zubcic Stephanie
Abstract: This paper concerns an important and prominent theme in Hegelian study: the power of mediation to unite diverse voices in dark times. I begin with my interpretation of Hegel’s phenomenological subjectivity of “self-consciousness.” According to my reading of his
Phenomenology of Spirit, his dialogical project gives significant emphasis to the idea that mediation acts as a dialogical process of representational “interplay.” I briefly discuss the historical and conceptual origin of this idea as it pertains to Hegelian thought. The central aim of this paper is to account for the role of imagination epistemologically as it relates to moral action. Exploring
Chapter 8 Russon’s Pharmacy: from:
Philosophical Apprenticeships
Author(s) Marratto Scott
Abstract: In his book
Human Experience: Philosophy, Neurosis, and the Elements of Everyday Life(2003), John Russon explores some of the major themes of contemporary European philosophy, such as time, embodiment, and language, and does so in the clear, engaging, and conceptually precise manner that I, as one of his grateful students, have come to recognize as the hallmark of his teaching style. In fact,Human Experienceis a book written in the “voice” of a teacher, and in a manner that exemplifies Russon’s philosophy of education. Its argument unfolds in such a way to lead the reader through what seems
The Reverend H. Northrop Frye from:
Northrop Frye
Author(s) Sloan Ian
Abstract: Northrop Frye’s original theological concept, the concept of the kerygmatic mode of language, emerged late in his thinking and writing. Before then, Frye is probably best seen as a profoundly able teacher of the liberal arts who, along with many others, transformed the liberal humanism arts curriculum of the late 19
thcentury into a curriculum for his time. His debts as a teacher of literature to a liberal Christian religious tradition were always there to be seen (perhaps nowhere more explicitly than inThe Critical Path[1972]). However, his exposition of the excluded initiative of the kerygmatic in his second
Reframing Frye: from:
Northrop Frye
Author(s) Sinding Michael
Abstract: Opinion is divided on Northrop Frye’s relation to ruling schools of thought in literary and cultural scholarship—that is, cultural studies and new historicism. Some in these schools have drawn deeply on Frye’s literary thought while condemning a perceived anti-historical, formalist, and religious bias (e.g., Jameson—see White, “Frye’s” and “Ideology” for other critics). Others (Hamilton, Salusinszky, Adamson, Wang) have strongly argued Frye’s importance as both contributor and challenger to these schools. Hayden White calls him the “greatest natural cultural historian of our time” (“Frye’s” 28). However, such contextualizations, even when favourable, risk leaving Frye obscured in the shadow of
The Reverend H. Northrop Frye from:
Northrop Frye
Author(s) Sloan Ian
Abstract: Northrop Frye’s original theological concept, the concept of the kerygmatic mode of language, emerged late in his thinking and writing. Before then, Frye is probably best seen as a profoundly able teacher of the liberal arts who, along with many others, transformed the liberal humanism arts curriculum of the late 19
thcentury into a curriculum for his time. His debts as a teacher of literature to a liberal Christian religious tradition were always there to be seen (perhaps nowhere more explicitly than inThe Critical Path[1972]). However, his exposition of the excluded initiative of the kerygmatic in his second
Reframing Frye: from:
Northrop Frye
Author(s) Sinding Michael
Abstract: Opinion is divided on Northrop Frye’s relation to ruling schools of thought in literary and cultural scholarship—that is, cultural studies and new historicism. Some in these schools have drawn deeply on Frye’s literary thought while condemning a perceived anti-historical, formalist, and religious bias (e.g., Jameson—see White, “Frye’s” and “Ideology” for other critics). Others (Hamilton, Salusinszky, Adamson, Wang) have strongly argued Frye’s importance as both contributor and challenger to these schools. Hayden White calls him the “greatest natural cultural historian of our time” (“Frye’s” 28). However, such contextualizations, even when favourable, risk leaving Frye obscured in the shadow of
ÉCRIVAINS ALGÉRIENS: from:
Problématiques identitaires et discours de l'exil dans les littératures francophones
Author(s) Virolle Marie
Abstract: Par une après-midi de février 2005 se trouvaient réunis à Vallauris, une petite ville des Alpes-Maritimes, quelques écrivains maghrébins ou d’origine maghrébine, tous francophones, venus participer à un modeste salon du livre consacré au Maghreb. Je menais des dialogues avec eux devant un auditoire, lui aussi modeste mais très attentif. Une question, inspirée par la préface qu’avait rédigée Fawzia Zouari à un ouvrage de photographies consacré à la Tunisie, me vint aux lèvres : « Quel est votre troisième pays ? » Cette « petite » question fit briller les yeux des auteurs et de l’auditoire, et elle suscita un
AU TEMPS DU FLEUVE AMOUR D’ANDREÏ MARINE OU LE DÉSIR D’AILLEURS from:
Problématiques identitaires et discours de l'exil dans les littératures francophones
Author(s) Gonfond Claude
Abstract: L’ici et l’ailleurs, avec leurs multiples interactions et les sentiments qui les expriment, sous-tendent l’œuvre romanesque d’Andreï Makine, et s’inscrivent aussi dans sa vie. Son enfance se déroule en Sibérie orientale où il est né, à Krasnoïarsk, au nord de la Mongolie. Il a fait des études classiques à Moscou, puis a enseigné la philosophie à Nougorod. Plus tard il enseignera à Paris, à l’École normale de la rue d’Ulm et à l’École de sciences politiques. Car en 1987, âgé de trente ans, il émigré en France, où il va connaître d’abord des moments de misère et de solitude. Pour
DEUILS ET MIGRATIONS IDENTITAIRES DANS LES ROMANS DE KIM LEFÈVRE ET DE LINDA LÊ from:
Problématiques identitaires et discours de l'exil dans les littératures francophones
Author(s) Selao Ching
Abstract: La thématique de l’exil et de ses effets sur l’identité a été explorée par plusieurs auteurs de la production romanesque vietnamienne francophone. S’il est vrai que, pour de nombreux Vietnamiens nés pendant la colonisation, l’impression d’être étranger dans leur propre pays se faisait déjà ressentir, un voyage ou un exil en France ne pouvait qu’exacerber ce sentiment désormais éprouvé sur une terre lointaine. Certes, la culture française ne leur était pas inconnue, loin de là, mais leurs connaissances de la « mère-patrie » , apprises à l’école, demeuraient somme toute théoriques et n’avaient parfois aucun lien avec la réalité du
Chapter 1 Historical Context: from:
Ethical Deliberation in Multiprofessional Health Care Teams
Author(s) Doucet Hubert
Abstract: The revival of interest in ethical issues concerning biomedicine and health care in the mid-sixties was undoubtedly a search for meaning. Not only was it a protest against certain types of experimentation on human subjects, it also represented a desire to make medicine a more humane enterprise. Whatever interpretation the ethical project of the time took—for example, Van Potter and André Hellegers developed different approaches to bioethics—the revival was oriented toward a promotion of the kind of medicine that is moral.
Chapter 1 Historical Context: from:
Ethical Deliberation in Multiprofessional Health Care Teams
Author(s) Doucet Hubert
Abstract: The revival of interest in ethical issues concerning biomedicine and health care in the mid-sixties was undoubtedly a search for meaning. Not only was it a protest against certain types of experimentation on human subjects, it also represented a desire to make medicine a more humane enterprise. Whatever interpretation the ethical project of the time took—for example, Van Potter and André Hellegers developed different approaches to bioethics—the revival was oriented toward a promotion of the kind of medicine that is moral.
Chapter 1 Historical Context: from:
Ethical Deliberation in Multiprofessional Health Care Teams
Author(s) Doucet Hubert
Abstract: The revival of interest in ethical issues concerning biomedicine and health care in the mid-sixties was undoubtedly a search for meaning. Not only was it a protest against certain types of experimentation on human subjects, it also represented a desire to make medicine a more humane enterprise. Whatever interpretation the ethical project of the time took—for example, Van Potter and André Hellegers developed different approaches to bioethics—the revival was oriented toward a promotion of the kind of medicine that is moral.
Book Title: Apperception, Knowledge, and Experience- Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): BOSSART W. H.
Abstract: Postmodernism is sometimes characterized as a loss of faith in reason, a loss of self, and an exaggerated relativism. W.H. Bossart discusses these alleged losses in the light of the "triumph" and subsequent decline of the transcendental turn in philosophy initiated by Kant.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cn6r4p
CHAPTER 2 The Closure of Kant’s Problematic: from:
Apperception, Knowledge, and Experience
Abstract: Kant’s central thesis is that the mind structures the sensible manifold, which is given to us under the a priori forms of space and time, into a public world of objects by synthesizing that manifold according to certain a priori rules. This thesis is supposed to defeat scepticism by providing a body of a priori laws that govern the structure of experience. These laws provide the conceptual framework within which all empirical cognition takes place. But they hold only of the phenomenal world and not of things as they may be in themselves and apart from the manner in which
The Unfinished Story: from:
Feminist Success Stories - Célébrons nos réussites féministes
Author(s) Stewart Mary Lynn
Abstract: Once upon a time — what seems like a long time ago but is really only yesterday — women were invisible — theoretically, academically, and politically.¹ From thé vantage point of thé early 1990s, it is hard to remember — and difficult to imagine — thé scholarly world without books, journals, newsletters, or courses that even mentioned women.² It is hard to recapture thé enthusiasm that greeted Maggie Benstons article on thé Political Economy of Women’s Liberation³ and Marylee Stephensons edited book, Women in Canada, in 1973.⁴ It is difficult to describe that taken-for-granted world without women⁵ and thé sudden “clicks” of récognition at first
Conclusion The Faces of Feminist Change—Les multiples visages du changement féministe from:
Feminist Success Stories - Célébrons nos réussites féministes
Author(s) Kirby Sandra
Abstract: In thé preceding chapter, we hâve analyzed what constitutes success in making feminist change. Our analysis has shown that, although some authors emphasize certain thèmes more than others, each authors work contributes in some way to our understanding of ail thé identified thèmes. In other words, there is a shared understanding of how feminism is defined across many Canadian constituencies. At thé same time, thé constituencies represented in this book vary by bodily condition/disability/ability, geographical location, class, race, âge, and ethnicity. Thus, while there is a shared sensé of what feminism is, it is not surprising to find that feminist
Book Title: Myth, Symbol, and Colonial Encounter-British and Mi'kmaq in Acadia, 1700-1867
Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): REID JENNIFER
Abstract: From the time of the Treaty of Utrecht in 1713, people of British origin have shared the area of New Brunswick, Nova Scotia, and Prince Edward Island, traditionally called Acadia, with Eastern Canada's Algonkian-speaking peoples, the Mi'kmaq. This historical analysis of colonial Acadia from the perspective of symbolic and mythic existence will be useful to those interested in Canadian history, native Canadian history, religion in Canada, and history of religion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cn6rz3
Book Title: A Theology for the Earth-The Contributions of Thomas Berry and Bernard Lonergan
Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): DALTON ANNE MARIE
Abstract: While many feel that something must be done, few perceive the state of the ecological crisis as a "profound religious problem." While Thomas Berry sought to fire the imagination and motivate his listener to action, Bernard Lonergan was absorbed by the growing gulf between traditional Christian theology and its relevance to modern problems. This book brings together the work of these dynamic thinkers and examines their mutual contribution to theology for our time and for our planet.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cn6smd
SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS from:
A Theology for the Earth
Abstract: This work originated in a desire to discover the relationship between two urgencies of our times. The first was the ecological crisis and the second, the reform of Christian theology. The preliminary, largely untested insights that moved the project into actuality were that (1) as Thomas Berry had loudly and clearly proclaimed, the ecological crisis was also religious; it had religious roots and it required a religious solution, and (2) a theology that did not serve to increase hope in the possibility of authentically negotiating the major crises of our time had already died. Bernard Lonergan seemed to corroborate this
AVANT-PROPOS from:
Pluralisme et délibération
Abstract: La philosophie politique bénéficie aujourd’hui d’un regain d’intérêt. Depuis la
Théorie de la justicede Rawls — qui a certainement joué un rôle de catalyseur au sein de cette discipline —, on a vu se multiplier les controverses et les débats politiques dans lesquels s’affrontaient des positions qui, tout en se situant par rapport à des traditions clairement établies dans l’histoire de la philosophie politique, les renouvellent en profondeur en leur assignant la tâche de penser les problèmes de notre temps. L’oeuvre de Rawls a ici, par rapport à ce renouveau de la philosophie politique, force de symbole. Cependant, sans mésestimer
CHAPITRE SEPTIÈME VERS UNE ÉTHIQUE DU DROIT: from:
Pluralisme et délibération
Author(s) Mellos Koula
Abstract: La philosophie éthique et la philosophie politique n’ont jamais été si intimement liées que dans certaines écoles de pensée contemporaines. L’humanisme civique de penseurs tels que Hannah Arendt¹, Quentin Skinner², William Sullivan³ et l’humanisme spirituel de Charles Taylor sont des tentatives néo-aristotéliciennes visant à replacer le bien au coeur du politique. Ils se proposent de rappeler le sens d’une communauté constituée historiquement et culturellement et de fonder la communauté politique sur une éthique du bien.
AVANT-PROPOS from:
Pluralisme et délibération
Abstract: La philosophie politique bénéficie aujourd’hui d’un regain d’intérêt. Depuis la
Théorie de la justicede Rawls — qui a certainement joué un rôle de catalyseur au sein de cette discipline —, on a vu se multiplier les controverses et les débats politiques dans lesquels s’affrontaient des positions qui, tout en se situant par rapport à des traditions clairement établies dans l’histoire de la philosophie politique, les renouvellent en profondeur en leur assignant la tâche de penser les problèmes de notre temps. L’oeuvre de Rawls a ici, par rapport à ce renouveau de la philosophie politique, force de symbole. Cependant, sans mésestimer
CHAPITRE SEPTIÈME VERS UNE ÉTHIQUE DU DROIT: from:
Pluralisme et délibération
Author(s) Mellos Koula
Abstract: La philosophie éthique et la philosophie politique n’ont jamais été si intimement liées que dans certaines écoles de pensée contemporaines. L’humanisme civique de penseurs tels que Hannah Arendt¹, Quentin Skinner², William Sullivan³ et l’humanisme spirituel de Charles Taylor sont des tentatives néo-aristotéliciennes visant à replacer le bien au coeur du politique. Ils se proposent de rappeler le sens d’une communauté constituée historiquement et culturellement et de fonder la communauté politique sur une éthique du bien.
CHAPTER 3 An Examination of the Thomistic Theory of Natural Moral Law from:
God and the Grounding of Morality
Abstract: Theories of natural moral law have deep roots in our culture. They have emerged again and again in our western tradition, not, however, without important variations. They are less appealing in times of social and political stability than in times of social crisis. In times when man turns against man, voices are always raised to remind us that man by virtue of his very humanity has certain inalienable rights and certain absolute correlative obligations to his fellow man. Like Antigone, we appeal to moral laws that transcend an ethnocentric “closed morality” of social pressure. In our recent history, liberalism, both
CHAPTER 7 On Human Rights from:
God and the Grounding of Morality
Abstract: I want to attempt in this chapter something that is no doubt over-ambitious. I want to ask, as bluntly as I can: are there human rights? That is, are there natural and inalienable rights which any human being anywhere, anytime, can appropriately lay claim to no matter what his situation in life and no matter in what society he finds himself? Bentham tells us that “Natural rights is simple nonsense: natural and imprescriptable rights rhetorical nonsense — nonsense upon stilts.” But in our time some able and analytically oriented moral philosophers have again defended, albeit not without modifications, this ancient notion.
Writer Writing, Ongoing Verb from:
Future Indicative
Author(s) SCHELLENBERG BETTY A.
Abstract: Things feel right tonight. We’re at the midway point between writing papers and polishing them into a book. This is the best part, gathering together, listening to each other, having a good time. I don’t think I need to introduce George Bowering and Robert Kroetsch. They will speak for themselves.
Signs of the Themes: from:
Future Indicative
Author(s) GOLDIE TERRY
Abstract: For a number of years I have been researching the images of native peoples in Canadian, Australian, and New Zealand literatures. I was surprised by the uniformity of these images, both across different cultures and across time. At first I thought this primarily a reflection of genre. But then I recognized that the image of the indigene represents a much larger issue.
Rewriting Roughing It from:
Future Indicative
Author(s) THURSTON JOHN
Abstract: Susanna Moodie did not write
Roughing It in the Bush.In fact,Roughing It in the Bushwas never written. Susanna Moodie andRoughing It in the Bushare interchangeable titles given to a collaborative act of textual production whose origin cannot be limited to one person or one point in time. This activity is ongoing. It is not merely a matter of the interpretation or reception ofRoughing It.The process for which this text is the focus involves its actual production. Susanna Moodie’s is only one hand among the many involved in this collaborative activity. In this paper,
Writer Writing, Ongoing Verb from:
Future Indicative
Author(s) SCHELLENBERG BETTY A.
Abstract: Things feel right tonight. We’re at the midway point between writing papers and polishing them into a book. This is the best part, gathering together, listening to each other, having a good time. I don’t think I need to introduce George Bowering and Robert Kroetsch. They will speak for themselves.
Signs of the Themes: from:
Future Indicative
Author(s) GOLDIE TERRY
Abstract: For a number of years I have been researching the images of native peoples in Canadian, Australian, and New Zealand literatures. I was surprised by the uniformity of these images, both across different cultures and across time. At first I thought this primarily a reflection of genre. But then I recognized that the image of the indigene represents a much larger issue.
Rewriting Roughing It from:
Future Indicative
Author(s) THURSTON JOHN
Abstract: Susanna Moodie did not write
Roughing It in the Bush.In fact,Roughing It in the Bushwas never written. Susanna Moodie andRoughing It in the Bushare interchangeable titles given to a collaborative act of textual production whose origin cannot be limited to one person or one point in time. This activity is ongoing. It is not merely a matter of the interpretation or reception ofRoughing It.The process for which this text is the focus involves its actual production. Susanna Moodie’s is only one hand among the many involved in this collaborative activity. In this paper,
LA TRADUCTION COMME CONSCIENCE LINGUISTIQUE ET CULTURELLE: from:
Europe et traduction
Author(s) Ballard Michel
Abstract: Il est significatif de la position centrale de la traduction dans un dispositif cohérent et réaliste d’enseignement moderne et humaniste qu’elle apparaisse aussi bien dans les études dites de langues que dans les études dites de français (ou de lettres modernes). La traduction n’y assume pas ce rôle utilitaire qu’on lui voit conférer dans d’autres disciplines où l’on estime qu’elle permettra d’accéder à de l’information. Elle est davantage au coeur d’un dispositif d’échange et de réflexion dont le potentiel n’est d’ailleurs pas toujours pleinement exploité faute de politique élaborée et concertée en matière de didactique.
RENAISSANCE TRANSLATION STRATEGIES AND THE MANIPULATION OF A CLASSICAL TEXT. from:
Europe et traduction
Author(s) Denton John
Abstract: It would be an exaggeration to say that personal value judgments and emphasis on primitive errors in thé scholarly study of translation in a diachronic perspective are now entirely a thing of thé past, even after thé determined assault by thé descriptively, (poly) systemically oriented adhérents of thé now well established independent discipline of Translation Studies, in thé évolution of which thé collective volume edited by Théo Hermans (1985) is a significant landmark. It will still take some time before older studies are dislodged from their now undeserved position as classics (Denton forthcoming).
“What is Truth?”: from:
John, Jesus, and History, Volume 3
Author(s) Keener Craig S.
Abstract: Does the scene in John 18:33–38 reflect historical information? John offers no eyewitnesses to substantiate the content of the interview in 18:33–38, and it rings with Johannine theology. At the same time, the use of private scenes would not move this Gospel outside the realm of biography, a genre that, unlike some other narrative genres, was interested in information where it was available. Sometimes biographers may have had sources unknown to us for information in these scenes; but as we shall observe further below, ancient historians and biographers also could construct scenes based on plausible inferences.
Traces of Jesus in a Pre-Johannine Passion Narrative from:
John, Jesus, and History, Volume 3
Author(s) Fortna Robert T.
Abstract: As to the possibility of discovering “what actually happened,” my doctorfather, J. Louis Martyn, has often said that every would-be historian should repeat, each day three times before breakfast, slowly and solemnly, the words: “We do not know.” History is, broadly speaking, a myth: neither some ultimate truth, nor necessarily something untrue, but perhaps something unattainable.
The Last Days of Jesus in John and the Synoptics: from:
John, Jesus, and History, Volume 3
Author(s) Humphreys Colin
Abstract: How certain can we be that an event described in John’s Gospel really happened? In science we can often have certainty (despite it frequently being said that this is not the case). For example, if astronomers calculate that a solar eclipse should occur at a particular time in the future, we would be astonished if this did not happen. Similarly, astronomers can run their calculations backwards in time and verify whether eclipses recorded in ancient texts really did occur at the time described. In this essay, I will include science in the armory of techniques available in order to help
The Johannine Son of Man and the Historical Jesus: from:
John, Jesus, and History, Volume 3
Author(s) Reynolds Benjamin E.
Abstract: What does the Johannine Son of Man have to do with the historical Jesus? In modern critical scholarship, the answer is: Absolutely nothing. The sentiment of the majority of scholars can still be summed up in the statement of Ernst Käsemann (1964, 32): “We must admit that nowhere in the New Testament is the life story of Jesus so emptied of all real content as it already is here [in the Gospel of John], where it seems to be almost a projection of the present back into the past.” Normally, when John’s Gospel is allowed at all as a source
3. El “trabajo” de la transculturación: from:
Políticas culturales:
Abstract: La innovación más importante del libro de Homi Bhabha
The location of culture(1994a) es el uso y generalización de la idea de “la enunciación disyuntiva”. Según hemos visto, con esa idea Bhabha elabora conceptos críticos claves como “el tercer espacio”, “la poscolonialidad” y “el desfase temporal” (timelag ), los cuales explican de qué forma los discursos de la modernidad son “fantasmagorizados” e interrumpidos por causa de la historia del colonialismo. Basados de forma psicoanalítica en la denegación (disavowal ) y, filosófico-lingüísticamente, en el diferimiento (deferral), la enunciación disyuntiva también sugiere una “fantasmalogía” (hauntology) más universal y constitutiva. No
CHAPTER TWELVE Christology of Disclosure in Robert Sokolowski from:
Theology Needs Philosophy
Author(s) MANSINI GUY
Abstract: This chapter seeks to honor the esteemed Ralph McInerny by exploring what Robert Sokolowski has to say about the role of philosophy in theology and theological education. He has addressed this issue many times, in many ways. I begin with some evidently sensible advice that he has given to seminary educators about philosophy. There follows a description of what he calls the “theology of disclosure.” Third, I gather up some of the “disclosures” he has made in Christology. Last, I try to press things just a little further in one or two matters Christological.
CHAPTER SEVENTEEN Reading Aquinas’s Commentary on Aristotle’s Nicomachean Ethics: from:
Theology Needs Philosophy
Author(s) KACZOR CHRISTOPHER
Abstract: Numerous questions arise in connection with St. Thomas Aquinas’s commentaries on Aristotle. Aquinas devoted a great deal of time to these commentaries through his professional responsibilities focused on commenting on Scripture. In terms of overall volume, they constitute about 13 percent of his entire corpus, roughly matching the 13.5 percent of the
opera omniadevoted to commenting on the Bible. Should these works be construed as theology or philosophy? What were Aquinas’s goals in writing them? Were they notes in preparation for writing the moral parts of theSumma theologiae?Were they expositions to provide his brother Dominicans a guide
AFTERWORD: from:
Theology Needs Philosophy
Author(s) NOVAK MICHAEL
Abstract: Did you hear about the female collie that gave birth to four pups along the roadside, and was arrested for littering? Ralph’s presence sharpens in me every time I hear a pun. A bad pun or a good one, Ralph loved them both. Ralph called one of
Book Title: Vampires and Zombies-Transcultural Migrations and Transnational Interpretations
Publisher: University Press of Mississippi
Author(s): Mueller Monika
Abstract: Although the portrayals of both vampires and zombies can be traced back to specific regions and predate mass media, the introduction of mass distribution through film and game technologies has significantly modified their depiction over time and in new environments. Among other topics, contributors discuss zombies in Thai films, vampire novels of Mexico, and undead avatars in horror videogames. This volume-with scholars from different national and cultural backgrounds-explores the transformations that the vampire and zombie figures undergo when they travel globally and through various media and cultures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1d2dq9t
2 Flower and Song: from:
Comparing Faithfully
Author(s) Padilla Elaine
Abstract: Each Sunday, many Christians find themselves faithfully reciting the above words of belief embedded in the Nicene Creed. As if what is being stated is a self-evident truth, this phrase is echoed almost unquestioningly all over the globe. Yet the expansiveness of the statement, which includes an ambiguous interplay between things visible and invisible, placed as a poetic chiasm paralleling that of heaven and earth, might haunt us. Whereas one might find comfort in things divinely made being heavenly, would not their tangible manifestation in time and space offer an occasion to wonder about such divine makings? If we take
3 Comparative Theology and the Postmodern God of “Perhaps”: from:
Comparing Faithfully
Author(s) Kiblinger Kristin Beise
Abstract: This essay responds to Elaine Padilla and Jon Paul Sydnor by considering their arguments in light of the view of God developed by John D. Caputo. Caputo’s view of God was chosen because it represents new, promising directions for conceiving God in our times and has important implications for comparative theology.
7 Longing and Letting Go: from:
Comparing Faithfully
Author(s) Hillgardner Holly
Abstract: “Longing is the heart’s bosom; we shall receive if we would stretch out our longing as far as we can,” wrote Augustine, recognizing longing and its cultivation as a worthy goal.³ At the same time, he viewed longing as having a direct purpose toward a clear end: “Our hearts are restless until they rest in thee, O God.”⁴ In other words, we desire fervently until we find ultimate repose in God. From this perspective, on the other side of longing the self rests—at peace, in wholeness, completed. What a consoling thought in a world where we often suffer and
8 Women’s Virtue, Church Leadership, and the Problem of Gender Complementarity from:
Comparing Faithfully
Author(s) Tiemeier Tracy Sayuki
Abstract: Recently, I was asked how a thinking woman could be Catholic. The question threw me—not because I had never been asked that before (indeed, I have been asked the question many times), but because it was a prominent Christian leader whose work focused on collaborating with Catholic communities who had asked the question. Although he knew many “thinking women” who were Catholic, he still did not understand how we could stay Catholic.
14 Sleeper, Awake: from:
Comparing Faithfully
Author(s) Betcher Sharon V.
Abstract: In her novel A
Tale for the Time Being, author and Zen Buddhist priest Ruth Ozeki sets before the reader—in the figure of a young Japanese girl, raised by her grand mother, a Buddhist nun—the question of how we live as “a time being,” as a floating speck of stardust in cosmic vastness: “Our human body appears and disappears moment by moment . . . , and this ceaseless arising and passing away is what we experience as time and being . . . In even a fraction of a second, we have the opportunity to . .
2 Flower and Song: from:
Comparing Faithfully
Author(s) Padilla Elaine
Abstract: Each Sunday, many Christians find themselves faithfully reciting the above words of belief embedded in the Nicene Creed. As if what is being stated is a self-evident truth, this phrase is echoed almost unquestioningly all over the globe. Yet the expansiveness of the statement, which includes an ambiguous interplay between things visible and invisible, placed as a poetic chiasm paralleling that of heaven and earth, might haunt us. Whereas one might find comfort in things divinely made being heavenly, would not their tangible manifestation in time and space offer an occasion to wonder about such divine makings? If we take
3 Comparative Theology and the Postmodern God of “Perhaps”: from:
Comparing Faithfully
Author(s) Kiblinger Kristin Beise
Abstract: This essay responds to Elaine Padilla and Jon Paul Sydnor by considering their arguments in light of the view of God developed by John D. Caputo. Caputo’s view of God was chosen because it represents new, promising directions for conceiving God in our times and has important implications for comparative theology.
7 Longing and Letting Go: from:
Comparing Faithfully
Author(s) Hillgardner Holly
Abstract: “Longing is the heart’s bosom; we shall receive if we would stretch out our longing as far as we can,” wrote Augustine, recognizing longing and its cultivation as a worthy goal.³ At the same time, he viewed longing as having a direct purpose toward a clear end: “Our hearts are restless until they rest in thee, O God.”⁴ In other words, we desire fervently until we find ultimate repose in God. From this perspective, on the other side of longing the self rests—at peace, in wholeness, completed. What a consoling thought in a world where we often suffer and
8 Women’s Virtue, Church Leadership, and the Problem of Gender Complementarity from:
Comparing Faithfully
Author(s) Tiemeier Tracy Sayuki
Abstract: Recently, I was asked how a thinking woman could be Catholic. The question threw me—not because I had never been asked that before (indeed, I have been asked the question many times), but because it was a prominent Christian leader whose work focused on collaborating with Catholic communities who had asked the question. Although he knew many “thinking women” who were Catholic, he still did not understand how we could stay Catholic.
14 Sleeper, Awake: from:
Comparing Faithfully
Author(s) Betcher Sharon V.
Abstract: In her novel A
Tale for the Time Being, author and Zen Buddhist priest Ruth Ozeki sets before the reader—in the figure of a young Japanese girl, raised by her grand mother, a Buddhist nun—the question of how we live as “a time being,” as a floating speck of stardust in cosmic vastness: “Our human body appears and disappears moment by moment . . . , and this ceaseless arising and passing away is what we experience as time and being . . . In even a fraction of a second, we have the opportunity to . .
Book Title: The Wedding Feast of the Lamb-Eros, the Body, and the Eucharist
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Hughes George
Abstract: Emmanuel Falque's The Wedding Feast of the Lamb represents a turning point in his thought. Here, Falque links philosophy and theology in an original fashion that allows us to see the full effect of theology's "backlash" against philosophy. By attending closely to the incarnation and the eucharist, Falque develops a new concept of the body and of love: By avoiding the common mistake of "angelism"--consciousness without body--Falque considers the depths to which our humanity reflects animality, or body without consciousness. He shows the continued relevance of the question "How can this man give us his flesh to eat?" (John 6:52), especially to philosophy. We need to question the meaning of "this is my body" in "a way that responds to the needs of our time" (Vatican II). Because of the ways that "Hoc est corpus meum" has shaped our culture and our modernity, this is a problem both for religious belief and for culture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1d391qf
5 Return to the Organic from:
The Wedding Feast of the Lamb
Abstract: From “The Animal That Thus I Am” (Chapter 4), or rather from the animality in myself that is called upon to be subsumed and converted in the act of the eucharist, we return to the organic, to this
bodying lifethat we have already seen in the Kantian “mass of sensations” and in organs of the body as the site of drives (§ 4).¹ The organic, however, this time does not point simply to themanner, but to thematter, the organicity (or ensemble of phenomena associated with the organ), as well as the materiality (organic matter). It is not
[PART III Introduction] from:
The Wedding Feast of the Lamb
Abstract: Like birth or resurrection, the eucharist denotes first of all a passage. It is a passage of body to body in a transubstantiation (of bread to body and of wine to blood), an assimilation (of God in man through manducation), and an incorporation (of man in God through the mystery of the Church, of spouses). It brings about a Passover (
pèsah) on the day of the Passover, or rather, it speaks the Passover. After that time when everything centred solely on the assumption of the body of Christ in the consecrated Host, we have now come to a time for
8 “This Is My Body” from:
The Wedding Feast of the Lamb
Abstract: I am not going to attempt here a history of the doctrine of transubstantiation. This is neither the place nor the time to attempt something that has been done perfectly well and fully discussed by others.¹ The thread of my argument here leads me instead to try to think through the transformation of our embodiedness in the act of the eucharist (eucharistic
content), having rooted it in an animality that is converted into humanity through recognition of its filiation (eucharisticheritage), and before performing the donation in an agape that loses nothing of its erotic genesis even in relinquishing its
Book Title: The Wedding Feast of the Lamb-Eros, the Body, and the Eucharist
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Hughes George
Abstract: Emmanuel Falque's The Wedding Feast of the Lamb represents a turning point in his thought. Here, Falque links philosophy and theology in an original fashion that allows us to see the full effect of theology's "backlash" against philosophy. By attending closely to the incarnation and the eucharist, Falque develops a new concept of the body and of love: By avoiding the common mistake of "angelism"--consciousness without body--Falque considers the depths to which our humanity reflects animality, or body without consciousness. He shows the continued relevance of the question "How can this man give us his flesh to eat?" (John 6:52), especially to philosophy. We need to question the meaning of "this is my body" in "a way that responds to the needs of our time" (Vatican II). Because of the ways that "Hoc est corpus meum" has shaped our culture and our modernity, this is a problem both for religious belief and for culture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1d391qf
5 Return to the Organic from:
The Wedding Feast of the Lamb
Abstract: From “The Animal That Thus I Am” (Chapter 4), or rather from the animality in myself that is called upon to be subsumed and converted in the act of the eucharist, we return to the organic, to this
bodying lifethat we have already seen in the Kantian “mass of sensations” and in organs of the body as the site of drives (§ 4).¹ The organic, however, this time does not point simply to themanner, but to thematter, the organicity (or ensemble of phenomena associated with the organ), as well as the materiality (organic matter). It is not
[PART III Introduction] from:
The Wedding Feast of the Lamb
Abstract: Like birth or resurrection, the eucharist denotes first of all a passage. It is a passage of body to body in a transubstantiation (of bread to body and of wine to blood), an assimilation (of God in man through manducation), and an incorporation (of man in God through the mystery of the Church, of spouses). It brings about a Passover (
pèsah) on the day of the Passover, or rather, it speaks the Passover. After that time when everything centred solely on the assumption of the body of Christ in the consecrated Host, we have now come to a time for
8 “This Is My Body” from:
The Wedding Feast of the Lamb
Abstract: I am not going to attempt here a history of the doctrine of transubstantiation. This is neither the place nor the time to attempt something that has been done perfectly well and fully discussed by others.¹ The thread of my argument here leads me instead to try to think through the transformation of our embodiedness in the act of the eucharist (eucharistic
content), having rooted it in an animality that is converted into humanity through recognition of its filiation (eucharisticheritage), and before performing the donation in an agape that loses nothing of its erotic genesis even in relinquishing its
1 Kebalian, Long-Distance Nationalism, and the Balinese Left in Exile from:
Beyond Bali
Abstract: Early Saturday morning on 24 January 2004, I took a tram to Slotermeer, a neighbourhood located in the western part of Amsterdam. For the first time in my fieldwork, I was on my way to attend the
Galungan-Kuningan, a pan-Balinese festival that takes place once every 210 days according to the Balineseukucalendar.¹ This festival celebrates the victory of virtue (dharma) over evil (adharma). In Bali, celebrations ofGalungan-Kuningantake place at all temples, accompanied with particularly rich offerings.Galunganis the first day of the ten-day festival during which it is believed that deities and ancestral spirits descend
4 A Balinese Colonial Drama without the Balinese? from:
Beyond Bali
Abstract: On 10 June 2009, I was invited by Ibu Setia, another one of my long-term interlocutors and one of the founding members of the dance group
Bali Ayu, to attend the group’s dance performance in Nijmegen, the largest city in the eastern part of the Netherlands. The performance was to take place at the Stadsschouwburg, Nijmegen’s main theatre, as a prelude toPuputan, Val van Bali(Puputan, The Fall of Bali), to be performed by the choir Colourful City Koor.¹ Established in 2003 at a time when public discourses on failed multiculturalism were just beginning to heat up, the Colourful
5 My Home is Your Home from:
Beyond Bali
Abstract: In early February 2004, at the invitation of some of my Balinese friends, I attended a
pasargathering in Utrecht where my friends were going to be performing a classical Balinese dance accompanied by I Komang Suaka, a multidisciplinary Balinese artist of whom I had heard before. Suaka is a painter, an installation artist, and the leader of pop band ‘Burning Seed’, which was also scheduled to perform that day. I arrived at the venue accompanied by my friends in the early afternoon to give the dancers enough time to have a quick rehearsal on the new stage as well
Book Title: Analogies of Transcendence- Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Author(s): FIELDS STEPHEN M.
Abstract: The problem of nature and grace lies at the heart of Christian theology. No dimension of divine revelation can be addressed without implicitly drawing reference to this issue.Analogies of Transcendence focuses on the central role that the analogies of being and faith play in developing a solution to the problem. These link God, as self-manifesting transcendence, to the human person as both fallen and justified, and to the material cosmos. Although the proposed solution draws on the work of Maréchal, de Lubac, Balthasar, and Rahner, it criticizes their approach for its underdeveloped analogies that diminish nature in grace's engagement with it. In redressing this weakness, Fr. Fields adapts its solution to the intellectual struggle of our time. This volume examines the origins and structure of modernity, which, it asserts, has not been superseded and is therefore critical of'‘postmodernism,' as well as of some ambiguous legacies of Thomism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1d8hbbv
Book Title: Analogies of Transcendence- Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Author(s): FIELDS STEPHEN M.
Abstract: The problem of nature and grace lies at the heart of Christian theology. No dimension of divine revelation can be addressed without implicitly drawing reference to this issue.Analogies of Transcendence focuses on the central role that the analogies of being and faith play in developing a solution to the problem. These link God, as self-manifesting transcendence, to the human person as both fallen and justified, and to the material cosmos. Although the proposed solution draws on the work of Maréchal, de Lubac, Balthasar, and Rahner, it criticizes their approach for its underdeveloped analogies that diminish nature in grace's engagement with it. In redressing this weakness, Fr. Fields adapts its solution to the intellectual struggle of our time. This volume examines the origins and structure of modernity, which, it asserts, has not been superseded and is therefore critical of'‘postmodernism,' as well as of some ambiguous legacies of Thomism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1d8hbbv
Book Title: The Event-Literature and Theory
Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): ROWNER ILAI
Abstract: Ilai Rowner's study not only revisits some of the most important thinkers of our time, including Maurice Blanchot, Gilles Deleuze, Jacques Derrida, and Martin Heidegger, it also develops a critical approach to literature that questions the meaning of the literary event through examinations of literary works by Marcel Proust, Louis-Ferdinand Céline, and T. S. Eliot.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1d9nk7w
1 Introduction: from:
The Event
Abstract: The central objective of this book is to reconsider the concept of the
eventfrom a philosophical vantage point, and with special reference to the literary text. Through the study of Heidegger, Blanchot, Derrida, and Deleuze, this book will suggest a method of thinking about the event of the literary work, both by examining the fundamental question of the literary creation and by providing the conditions for a different approach to literary criticism. The termeventwill be defined here as any irregular occurrence, real or fictional, that has effectively and obviously come about. At the same time, it is
3 Martin Heidegger: from:
The Event
Abstract: This theoretical inquiry into the concept of the
eventstarts with Heidegger’s thinking aboutdas Ereignis, usually translated as “event of appropriation,” by means of which he elaborates a philosophy of Being as event.¹ Indeed, Heidegger offers an important source in the study of the event insofar as it is considered not as a simple happening in the world but rather as that which makes any happening possible. The priority Heidegger assigns this term casts a new light on some acute traditional problems concerning the conception of time and presence, the identity of things, human being, and the essence of
7 Sincerity and Other Ironies from:
Ethos and Narrative Interpretation
Abstract: The epigraph sets the course for this chapter.¹ It features in a short essay on “Irony and Its Malcontents,” part of the appendix added by Eggers to the paperback edition of his first book and bestseller,
A Heartbreaking Work of Staggering Genius(2001; from now on I will adopt the author’s helpful acronymahwosgfor his title). In this book Eggers tells in some five hundred pages the story of an adolescent who loses in a short time both parents, takes upon himself the education of his younger brother, and explores adult life. The cover indicates that the book is
7 Sincerity and Other Ironies from:
Ethos and Narrative Interpretation
Abstract: The epigraph sets the course for this chapter.¹ It features in a short essay on “Irony and Its Malcontents,” part of the appendix added by Eggers to the paperback edition of his first book and bestseller,
A Heartbreaking Work of Staggering Genius(2001; from now on I will adopt the author’s helpful acronymahwosgfor his title). In this book Eggers tells in some five hundred pages the story of an adolescent who loses in a short time both parents, takes upon himself the education of his younger brother, and explores adult life. The cover indicates that the book is
10 Anthropologists as Perpetrators and Perpetuators of Oral Tradition: from:
Anthropologists and Their Traditions across National Borders
Author(s) FLYNN LINDY-LOU
Abstract: The discipline of anthropology is abundant with narratives by and about anthropologists, their unique research projects, their academic philosophies, and their theoretical approaches or contributions. I present here an unpublished 1988 student assignment as a conduit for my ideas on the value of oral tradition in the anthropology classroom, the construction of anthropological kinship networks, and the ways in which both anthropology professors and their students have persisted in telling and retelling the histories of anthropology over time. The 1988 paper incorporates some of my audio recorded lectures of Professors Kenelm O.L. Burridge and Robin Ridington at the University of
Book Title: Artifacts and Illuminations-Critical Essays on Loren Eiseley
Publisher: UNP - Nebraska Paperback
Author(s): MAHER SUSAN N.
Abstract: Loren Eiseley (1907-77) is one of the most important American nature writers of the twentieth century and an admired practitioner of creative nonfiction. A native of Lincoln, Nebraska, Eiseley was a professor of anthropology and a prolific writer and poet who worked to bring an understanding of science to the general public, incorporating religion, philosophy, and science into his explorations of the human mind and the passage of time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1d9nqjg
1 “The Bay of Broken Things”: from:
Artifacts and Illuminations
Author(s) HANSON SUSAN
Abstract: When he was a boy, Loren Eiseley recalls in
All the Strange Hours, he for a time had the habit of whittling small crosses out of wood, decorating them with liquid gilt, and then erecting them atop the graves of birds he’d buried in the lot behind his house. He even went so far as to inter the printed obituaries of people who had died in heroic or tragic circumstances. These graves, too, were marked with a golden cross. “One day,” he writes, “a mower in the empty lot beyond our backyard found the little cemetery and carried off all
3 “The Places Below”: from:
Artifacts and Illuminations
Author(s) MAHER SUSAN N.
Abstract: During the 1940s and 1950s, essayist Loren Eiseley was conscious that he was inventing a new form of nonfiction essay, one that could embrace the depths of time that geology, evolutionary biology, and astrophysics had revealed to the modern world. Trained in anthropology, with expertise in paleontology and archaeology, Eiseley often finds himself pondering the mysteries of time and space, the shifting landscapes of epic gestation, the “strange transmutation” of cartographic imagination, and “the inner forest” of the collective unconscious (
Night206, 207). Positioning himself within a literary line of descent that commences with Thoreau, Eiseley aligns himself to a
7 Lessons of an Interdisciplinary Life: from:
Artifacts and Illuminations
Author(s) GOSSIN PAMELA
Abstract: From an early age, Loren Eiseley lived his life betwixt and between various kinds of “two cultures” experiences: the two linguistic worlds of his parents’ disparate communication styles; the distinct realms of private thought and public expression; the separate but concentric spheres of personal and professional discourses; and the two intellectual and academic domains traditionally described as “
thetwo cultures” — the poetic, imaginative, and humanistic versus the technical, rational, and scientific.¹ Driven to explore both sides of such cultural differences, Eiseley observed, valued, and experimented with each approach separately. Over time, he developed vital skills of empathy and analysis
Introduction: from:
Writing at the Limit
Abstract: Novels written today spill over with references to other media—television, film, music, the Internet. The presence of such alternate media in the novel can be seen as simply a natural reflection of contemporary life. During an average day, most of us spend some time watching television, sending e-mail, reading the newspaper, and listening to the radio. Is it any wonder that these media make their way into the contemporary novel?
Book Title: Contemporary Comics Storytelling- Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): KUKKONEN KARIN
Abstract: Applying a cognitive approach to reading comics in all their narrative richness and intricacy,
Contemporary Comics Storytellingopens an intriguing perspective on how these works engage the legacy of postmodernism-its subversion, self-reflexivity, and moral contingency. Its three case studies trace how contemporary comics tie into deep traditions of visual and verbal storytelling, how they reevaluate their own status as fiction, and how the fictional minds of their characters generate complex ethical thought experiments. At a time when the medium is taken more and more seriously as intricate and compelling literary art, this book lays the groundwork for an analysis of the ways in which comics challenge and engage readers' minds. It brings together comics studies with narratology and literary criticism and, in so doing, provides a new set of tools for evaluating the graphic novel as an emergent literary form.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ddr8c6
Conclusion from:
Contemporary Comics Storytelling
Abstract: In
Contemporary Comics Storytelling, each of the constituents of the title is salient. In the introduction I focused more on the “contemporary” aspect of this book, mapping its place in a time of rising cultural prestige for comics and an era that begins to renegotiate postmodernism. Comics likeFables,Tom Strong, and100 Bulletsare literature, not so much because cultural gatekeepers are finally paying attention to them, but because their complex narrative strategies allow to them to participate in and reflect on the contemporary cultural debate. This book has endeavored to analyze the narrative strategies of the three series,
Book Title: Contemporary Comics Storytelling- Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): KUKKONEN KARIN
Abstract: Applying a cognitive approach to reading comics in all their narrative richness and intricacy,
Contemporary Comics Storytellingopens an intriguing perspective on how these works engage the legacy of postmodernism-its subversion, self-reflexivity, and moral contingency. Its three case studies trace how contemporary comics tie into deep traditions of visual and verbal storytelling, how they reevaluate their own status as fiction, and how the fictional minds of their characters generate complex ethical thought experiments. At a time when the medium is taken more and more seriously as intricate and compelling literary art, this book lays the groundwork for an analysis of the ways in which comics challenge and engage readers' minds. It brings together comics studies with narratology and literary criticism and, in so doing, provides a new set of tools for evaluating the graphic novel as an emergent literary form.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ddr8c6
Conclusion from:
Contemporary Comics Storytelling
Abstract: In
Contemporary Comics Storytelling, each of the constituents of the title is salient. In the introduction I focused more on the “contemporary” aspect of this book, mapping its place in a time of rising cultural prestige for comics and an era that begins to renegotiate postmodernism. Comics likeFables,Tom Strong, and100 Bulletsare literature, not so much because cultural gatekeepers are finally paying attention to them, but because their complex narrative strategies allow to them to participate in and reflect on the contemporary cultural debate. This book has endeavored to analyze the narrative strategies of the three series,
13 Accumulating Histories: from:
Herta Müller
Author(s) Nousek Katrina
Abstract: On May 11–13, 2000, eight authors came together at the University of Tübingen to speak on the topic “Zukunft! Zukunft?” [Future! Future?]. The lectures addressed the possibility of and limitations to thinking a notion of time that includes the idea of a future. Many sought to articulate a future-oriented indebtedness to past and present moments that could adequately represent subjective experience. Among these efforts was Herta Müller’s contribution, later published under the title “Einmal anfassen—zweimal loslassen” [Catch hold once—let go twice].¹ Though the essay underscores the inextricability of past and present, it also implies an important potential
3 Hauntings as Histories: from:
Phantom Past, Indigenous Presence
Author(s) THRUSH COLL
Abstract: Another way to frame this question is to ask whether places—physical locations and the multiple human histories embedded in them—have distinct identities and are capable of agency. Can a single place be home to a certain kind of history, persistent and cohesive, even across boundaries of time and cultural regime? Can the nonhuman, in the form of organisms, climate, or other entities, define the shape of a place and even its meaning? Can remnants of past societies—ruins, ecological footprints, artifacts—“speak” in active ways for the histories they represent? And can we include
5 The Baldoon Mysteries from:
Phantom Past, Indigenous Presence
Author(s) MCDOUGALL ALLAN K.
Abstract: Shortly after the British–U.S. border dividing the Great Lakes was established by the 1783 Treaty of Paris, the respective governments began treaty processes with the highly respected and powerful First Nations in the Old Northwest, in an attempt to accommodate the needs of the First Nations in anticipation of an influx of settlers to the regions. Prior to that time, contact with the First Nations in the Great Lakes region was extensive, largely through fur-trading operations and Catholic missions. Priests and traders from Lower Canada and Europe had built close relations with the First Nations. Indeed, many of the
9 Shape-shifters, Ghosts, and Residual Power: from:
Phantom Past, Indigenous Presence
Author(s) LANDRUM CYNTHIA
Abstract: In the summer of 1991, a Hunkpapa Lakota Sioux tribal member, Don Tenoso, was scheduled to provide a routine demonstration of traditional doll-making techniques in the Native American exhibition hall at the National Museum of Natural History of the Smithsonian Institution in Washington dc. At the time, I was a museum technician with the Department of Anthropology and was working in the Natural History building. Since we were about to begin the work of conserving and moving the Plains Indian collection that was in storage, I was curious to see what he had to say about the cultural significance of
19 Pacing the Cage: from:
Conception, Reception, and the Spirit
Author(s) WALSH BRIAN J.
Abstract: So begins one of Bruce Cockburn’s finest songs.¹ The artist finds himself struggling to read the signs of the time, squinting to interpret the apocalyptic portent that is before him. For Cockburn, that sunset is an angel weeping. it doesn’t
look likesuch an angel, nor does itremindthe artist of such a thing. no, “sunset is an angel weeping.” of that he is sure. And that this angel is holding a bloody sword is also not in doubt. But what does it mean? and where is that sword pointing? “No matter how I squint I cannot/make out what
19 Pacing the Cage: from:
Conception, Reception, and the Spirit
Author(s) WALSH BRIAN J.
Abstract: So begins one of Bruce Cockburn’s finest songs.¹ The artist finds himself struggling to read the signs of the time, squinting to interpret the apocalyptic portent that is before him. For Cockburn, that sunset is an angel weeping. it doesn’t
look likesuch an angel, nor does itremindthe artist of such a thing. no, “sunset is an angel weeping.” of that he is sure. And that this angel is holding a bloody sword is also not in doubt. But what does it mean? and where is that sword pointing? “No matter how I squint I cannot/make out what
Book Title: Slavery's Capitalism-A New History of American Economic Development
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): Rockman Seth
Abstract: During the nineteenth century, the United States entered the ranks of the world's most advanced and dynamic economies. At the same time, the nation sustained an expansive and brutal system of human bondage. This was no mere coincidence.
Slavery's Capitalismargues for slavery's centrality to the emergence of American capitalism in the decades between the Revolution and the Civil War. According to editors Sven Beckert and Seth Rockman, the issue is not whether slavery itself was or was not capitalist but, rather, the impossibility of understanding the nation's spectacular pattern of economic development without situating slavery front and center. American capitalism-renowned for its celebration of market competition, private property, and the self-made man-has its origins in an American slavery predicated on the abhorrent notion that human beings could be legally owned and compelled to work under force of violence.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dfnrs7
CHAPTER 5 The Contours of Cotton Capitalism: from:
Slavery's Capitalism
Author(s) ROTHMAN JOSHUA D.
Abstract: As a young man, Jesse Mabry showed an enterprising spirit but little tendency toward extravagance. Born in South Carolina in 1791 or 1792, by 1810 Mabry had married a woman named Nancy and the couple had established an independent household in Union County, situated in the northwestern Piedmont section of the state. They did not own much and likely brought in some income by selling cloth that Nancy wove herself, but they amassed wealth slowly and steadily over time. Sometime around 1820, they left South Carolina to pursue new economic opportunities in Mississippi, and by 1830 Jesse Mabry had become
Book Title: The Grecanici of Southern Italy-Governance, Violence, and Minority Politics
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): Pipyrou Stavroula
Abstract: The Grecanici of Southern Italyprovides a comprehensive ethnography that examines the ways the minority developed and sustain enduring cultural forms of solidarity and relatedness. Stavroula Pipyrou proposes the concept of "fearless governance" to describe overlapping and sometimes contradictory systems of power, authority, and relational networks that enable the Grecanici to achieve political representation at the intersection of local, national, and global encounters. Refuting easy assumptions of top-down governmental influence, Pipyrou shows how the Grecanici find political representation through the European Union and UNESCO, state policy, civic associations, family networks and illegal organizations; not being afraid to take risks, incur wrath, lose friends, or risk death in challenging the political status-quo.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dfnrzt
4 Information Anxiety from:
Useful Fictions
Abstract: The turning point of
Robinson Crusoeoccurs precisely halfway into the narrative when Crusoe, after fifteen years of presuming himself the only inhabitant of his island, discovers a single footprint on a sandy beach.¹ Before this incident,Robinson Crusoetells the story of a solitary individual and his relationship with nature, God, and himself. Afterward, it becomes a political novel full of battles, colonial aspirations, social contracts, and an expanding cast of characters—including cannibals, excannibals, mutineers, Spaniards, and English sailors. For the two years after Crusoe discovers the footprint—an interval of time that requires a mere ten pages
4 Information Anxiety from:
Useful Fictions
Abstract: The turning point of
Robinson Crusoeoccurs precisely halfway into the narrative when Crusoe, after fifteen years of presuming himself the only inhabitant of his island, discovers a single footprint on a sandy beach.¹ Before this incident,Robinson Crusoetells the story of a solitary individual and his relationship with nature, God, and himself. Afterward, it becomes a political novel full of battles, colonial aspirations, social contracts, and an expanding cast of characters—including cannibals, excannibals, mutineers, Spaniards, and English sailors. For the two years after Crusoe discovers the footprint—an interval of time that requires a mere ten pages
Book Title: Violence in Francophone African and Caribbean Women's Literature- Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): KALISA CHANTAL
Abstract: Chantal Kalisa examines the ways in which women writers lift taboos imposed on them by their society and culture and challenge readers with their unique perspectives on violence. Comparing women from different places and times, Kalisa treats types of violence such as colonial, familial, linguistic, and war-related, specifically linked to dictatorship and genocide. She examines Caribbean writers Michele Lacrosil, Simone Schwartz-Bart, Gisèle Pineau, and Edwidge Danticat, and Africans Ken Begul, Calixthe Beyala, Nadine Bar, and Monique Ilboudo. She also includes Sembène Ousmane and Frantz Fanon for their unique contributions to the questions of violence and gender. This study advances our understanding of the attempts of African and Caribbean women writers to resolve the tension between external forms of violence and internal forms resulting from skewed cultural, social, and political rules based on gender.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dfnvj2
9 Family Dramas: from:
Views from the Margins
Author(s) FUCHS RACHEL G.
Abstract: The private and most intimate lives of many Parisians involved communication and travel between the core capital city and regions on the periphery—the rural areas within France and the more distant colonies.¹ Since early modern times, men and women moved to and from Paris and the other departments within France in carrying out their social, marital, and sexual relationships. In the nineteenth and twentieth centuries people also went to the colonies, specifically to Algeria and Indochina (present-day Vietnam, Laos, and Cambodia). Communication between Paris and the periphery did not stop during the Occupation and Vichy governments of the wartime
Book Title: The Rhizomatic West-Representing the American West in a Transnational, Global, Media Age
Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): Tatum Stephen
Abstract: Using Gilles Deleuze and Félix Guattari's concept of the rhizome, Neil Campbell shows how the West (or west-ness) continually breaks away from a mainstream notion of American "rootedness" and renews and transforms itself in various cultural forms. A region long traversed by various transient peoples (from tribes and conquerors to immigrants, traders, and trappers), the West reflects a mythic quest for settlement, permanence, and synthesis-even notions of a national or global identity-at odds with its rootless history, culture, and nature. Crossing the concept of "roots" with "routes," this book shows how notions of the West-in representations ranging from literature and film to photography, music, and architectural theory-give expression to ideas about identity, nationhood, and belonging in a world increasingly defined by movement across time and borders.
The Rhizomatic Westoffers a new vision of the American West as a hybrid, performative space, a staging place for myriad intersecting and constantly changing identities.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dgn4wh
Book Title: Transatlantic Voices-Interpretations of Native North American Literatures
Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): PULITANO ELVIRA
Abstract: Blending western critical approaches-from cultural studies to postcolonialism and trauma theory-with indigenous epistemological perspectives, the contributors to
Transatlantic Voicesadvocate "the inescapable hybridity and intermixture of ideas" proposed by Paul Gilroy in his study of black diasporic identity. Native North American writers forcefully suggest that the study of American ethnicities in the twenty-first century can no longer be confined to the borders of the United States. Given the increasing transnational aspect of American studies, a collection such asTransatlantic Voices, presenting scholars from countries as diverse as Germany, France, Bulgaria, Switzerland, Italy, the United Kingdom, and Finland, offers a timely contribution to such border crossing in scholarship and writing.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1djmc5d
1 “They Have Stories, Don’t They?”: from:
Transatlantic Voices
Author(s) ISERNHAGEN HARTWIG
Abstract: The notion of
story, ornarrative(the two terms will be taken to be synonymous for purposes of this argument), is so central in the practice, criticism, and theory of Native American literature that around it gather — or it actively attracts to itself — many of the major issues in that literature. At the same time, the notion is necessarily modified by interaction with those issues, as they provide the larger contexts for its use. This essay will attempt to trace some such interactions and contexts as well as to place the entire complex within the wider context of
7 “Keep Wide Awake in the Eyes”: from:
Transatlantic Voices
Author(s) GRAY KATHRYN NAPIER
Abstract: In her most recent collection of poems,
Itch Like Crazy, Wendy Rose imagines a fleeting connection over space and time with her European great-great-grandfather: “Andrew MacInnes, You Look West Just at the Moment I Look East” (43–44). This title grasps the ambiguity and ambivalence of the line of vision between Rose and MacInnes, and we are left to consider the possibility that they are, at once, looking at and beyond each other. In the three MacInnes poems, and in the other ancestral portraits included in this collection, which take the form of photographs and poems, Rose uses ambiguous eye
13 Clowns, Indians, and Poodles: from:
Transatlantic Voices
Author(s) PELLERIN SIMONE
Abstract: When I met Louis Owens in his Parisian hotel lobby some seven or eight years ago, he was on a tour organized by his French publishers, Albin Michel, to promote the French translation of one of his novels. I had been a translator, off and on, for the same publishing house for some time, and, though the translation of
The Sharpest Sight, to my great disappointment, had not been “given” to me, the editor of the “Terre indienne” collection had informed me of the fact that Owens would be “free” on that afternoon and arranged a meeting for my benefit.
14 Oklahoma International: from:
Transatlantic Voices
Author(s) LEE A. ROBERT
Abstract: Issish ibakana, a Choctaw phrase Jim Barnes himself glosses as “mixedblood from Oklahoma” in his fine-grained prose and verse autobiographyOn Native Ground: Memoirs and Impressions(169), offers a point of departure. For if he has dwelt fondly upon his American family plait of Native, Welsh, and English origins, at the same time, and likely not a little in consequence, it has been accompanied by the insistence on not being bound to any single categorization. To his often self-acknowledged consternation this includes Native American writer. Rather, with Native America but one realm of lineage — however wholly and without doubt
29. LA IMAGEN DEL HOMBRE Y SU FELICIDAD from:
Filosofía: conceptos fundamentales
Abstract: En
Las instrucciones del microondas,216un pequeño divertimento literario, el capítulo central, por desgracia incomprendido, glosa las instrucciones de un microondas alemán. Son muy divertidas. Descienden a los detalles más increíbles, como, por ejemplo: “No meta su mascota en el microondas”. A nadie le llama la atención que estos aparatos vengan con un manual de uso, que explica hasta el último detalle sobre cómo es el artefacto, para que pueda cumplir su función y de verdad sirva a aquello a lo cual está destinado. En la misma línea hay todo tipo de libros sobre cómo cuidar a su mascota, cómo
Book Title: Writing and Materiality in China-Essays in Honor of Patrick Hanan
Publisher: Harvard University Asia Center
Author(s): Widmer Ellen
Abstract: Speaking about Chinese writing entails thinking about how writing speaks through various media. In the guises of the written character and its imprints, traces, or ruins, writing is more than textuality. The goal of this volume is to consider the relationship of writing to materiality in China’s literary history and to ponder the physical aspects of the production and circulation of writing. To speak of the thing-ness of writing is to understand it as a thing in constant motion, transported from one place or time to another, one genre or medium to another, one person or public to another. Thinking about writing as the material product of a culture shifts the emphasis from the author as the creator and ultimate arbiter of a text’s meaning to the editors, publishers, collectors, and readers through whose hands a text is reshaped, disseminated, and given new meanings. By yoking writing and materiality, the contributors to this volume aim to bypass the tendency to oppose form and content, words and things, documents and artifacts, to rethink key issues in the interpretation of Chinese literary and visual culture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dnn90j
Book Title: Writing and Materiality in China-Essays in Honor of Patrick Hanan
Publisher: Harvard University Asia Center
Author(s): Widmer Ellen
Abstract: Speaking about Chinese writing entails thinking about how writing speaks through various media. In the guises of the written character and its imprints, traces, or ruins, writing is more than textuality. The goal of this volume is to consider the relationship of writing to materiality in China’s literary history and to ponder the physical aspects of the production and circulation of writing. To speak of the thing-ness of writing is to understand it as a thing in constant motion, transported from one place or time to another, one genre or medium to another, one person or public to another. Thinking about writing as the material product of a culture shifts the emphasis from the author as the creator and ultimate arbiter of a text’s meaning to the editors, publishers, collectors, and readers through whose hands a text is reshaped, disseminated, and given new meanings. By yoking writing and materiality, the contributors to this volume aim to bypass the tendency to oppose form and content, words and things, documents and artifacts, to rethink key issues in the interpretation of Chinese literary and visual culture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dnn90j
Book Title: Public Memory in Early China- Publisher: Harvard University Asia Center
Author(s): Brashier K. E.
Abstract: In early imperial China, the dead were remembered by stereotyping them, by relating them to the existing public memory and not by vaunting what made each person individually distinct and extraordinary in his or her lifetime. Their posthumous names were chosen from a limited predetermined pool; their descriptors were derived from set phrases in the classical tradition; and their identities were explicitly categorized as being like this cultural hero or that sage official in antiquity. In other words, postmortem remembrance was a process of pouring new ancestors into prefabricated molds or stamping them with rigid cookie cutters. Public Memory in Early China is an examination of this pouring and stamping process. After surveying ways in which learning in the early imperial period relied upon memorization and recitation, K. E. Brashier treats three definitive parameters of identity—name, age, and kinship—as ways of negotiating a person’s relative position within the collective consciousness. He then examines both the tangible and intangible media responsible for keeping that defined identity welded into the infrastructure of Han public memory.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dnnb3k
PART III Kinship as positioning the self from:
Public Memory in Early China
Abstract: Jinhu was my firstborn daughter, and although she wasn’t able to talk yet, she could already let us know what was on her mind through her expressions.¹ She died an untimely death after living only one hundred and ninety days, and so I wrote these lyrics:
PART V The intangible tools of positioning the self from:
Public Memory in Early China
Abstract: The line between remembering one’s own ancestor and remembering a public hero is only lightly drawn and, over the course of the Han, was often entirely erased. As seen in Part II, early eulogists consciously rubbed out that line, explicitly contending that mourning was not the monopoly of the family but was also a public matter. The recently discovered Jing Yun stele offers one of the longest and most evocative images of public mourning for their local prefect, and it makes no apologies for borrowing the sentiments of ancestral remembrance:
Conclusion from:
Ancestral Memory in Early China
Abstract: Death naturally entails absence in terms of both space, because the dead are no longer within sight, and time, because the point of death ever recedes into the past. But what else can be said about how this absence is manifested? For the surviving lineage, the lacuna may require restructuring family authority; for the individual descendant, it leads to forgetfulness as details about the dead gradually fade and memories blur. Furthermore this absence brought about by death is of course an
undesiredoccurrence. The spatial and temporal absence, the disrupted lineage, the fading memory and our feelings of loss are
Conclusion from:
Ancestral Memory in Early China
Abstract: Death naturally entails absence in terms of both space, because the dead are no longer within sight, and time, because the point of death ever recedes into the past. But what else can be said about how this absence is manifested? For the surviving lineage, the lacuna may require restructuring family authority; for the individual descendant, it leads to forgetfulness as details about the dead gradually fade and memories blur. Furthermore this absence brought about by death is of course an
undesiredoccurrence. The spatial and temporal absence, the disrupted lineage, the fading memory and our feelings of loss are
Book Title: Lydia Ginzburg's Prose-Reality in Search of Literature
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Van Buskirk Emily
Abstract: Based on a decade's work in Ginzburg's archives, the book discusses previously unknown manuscripts and uncovers a wealth of new information about the author's life, focusing on Ginzburg's quest for a new kind of writing adequate to her times. She writes of universal experiences-frustrated love, professional failures, remorse, aging-and explores the modern fragmentation of identity in the context of war, terror, and an oppressive state. Searching for a new concept of the self, and deeming the psychological novel (a beloved academic specialty) inadequate to express this concept, Ginzburg turned to fragmentary narratives that blur the lines between history, autobiography, and fiction.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dr36q1
CHAPTER 2 The Poetics of Desk-Drawer Notebooks from:
Lydia Ginzburg's Prose
Abstract: At a private gathering sometime in the early 1930s, after Ginzburg had begun experimenting with longer narratives, she read a draft of “The Return Home” (“Vozvrashchenie domoi”)¹ to a group consisting of Anna Akhmatova, Nikolai Punin, Nikolai Oleinikov, Grigory Gukovsky, Boris Engelgardt, and at least six others.² After the reading, she recorded (in an unpublished note) her listeners’ opinions and characterizations of her narrative’s theme, style, and genre.³ Grigory Gukovsky chose to describe the genre of the innovative piece as a “novel” (
roman) whose material was “human thought” rather than experience. (It was Gukovsky who proceeded to spread the rumor
7 Eliot: from:
Forms of Life
Abstract: “The notion that peasants are joyous, that the typical moment to represent a man in a smock-frock is when he is cracking a joke and showing a row of sound teeth, that cottage matrons are usually buxom, and village children necessarily rosy and merry, are prejudices difficult to dislodge from the artistic mind, which looks for its subjects into literature instead of life.” George Eliot evokes, as one alternative, the “slow gaze, in which no sense of beauty beams, no humour twinkles—the slow utterance, and the heavy slouching walk.” She scorns sentimental idealization. “The selfish instincts are not subdued
12 Forster: from:
Forms of Life
Abstract: One may as well begin with Miss Bartlett’s words to Lucy Honeychurch. The scene is Florence, the Pension Bertolini. The ladies have been given rooms that overlook an interior court. Mr. Emerson and his son offer their own rooms in exchange: rooms with a view. Miss Bartlett is offended by the indelicacy of the proposal, but Lucy is less certain how to take it: “ ‘No, he is not tactful; yet have you noticed that there are people who do things which are most indelicate, and yet at the same time—beautiful?’ ”“ ‘Beautiful?’ said Miss Bartlett, puzzled at the
3 Poststructuralist Criticism from:
The Postmodern Bible
Abstract: At that time structuralism was dominant. “Deconstruction” seemed to be going in the same direction since the word signified a certain attention to structures .… To deconstruct was also a structuralist gesture .… But it was also an
5 Psychoanalytic Criticism from:
The Postmodern Bible
Abstract: By the time Sigmund Freud published
The Interpretation of Dreams(1900), the principles of psychoanalysis were in place. What were they? Laplanche and Pontalis’s scrupulous definition of psychoanalysis begins: “a method of investigation which consists essentially in bringing out the unconscious meanings of the words, the actions and the products of the imagination … of a particular subject” (367; cf. Freud, 1923b:235). This discovery or institution of the unconscious, that dark realm that governs us but which we cannot govern, whose contents express themselves obliquely—not transparently—in displacements, sublimations, condensations, and substitutions, was to be defining for psychoanalysis. It
3 Poststructuralist Criticism from:
The Postmodern Bible
Abstract: At that time structuralism was dominant. “Deconstruction” seemed to be going in the same direction since the word signified a certain attention to structures .… To deconstruct was also a structuralist gesture .… But it was also an
5 Psychoanalytic Criticism from:
The Postmodern Bible
Abstract: By the time Sigmund Freud published
The Interpretation of Dreams(1900), the principles of psychoanalysis were in place. What were they? Laplanche and Pontalis’s scrupulous definition of psychoanalysis begins: “a method of investigation which consists essentially in bringing out the unconscious meanings of the words, the actions and the products of the imagination … of a particular subject” (367; cf. Freud, 1923b:235). This discovery or institution of the unconscious, that dark realm that governs us but which we cannot govern, whose contents express themselves obliquely—not transparently—in displacements, sublimations, condensations, and substitutions, was to be defining for psychoanalysis. It
3 Poststructuralist Criticism from:
The Postmodern Bible
Abstract: At that time structuralism was dominant. “Deconstruction” seemed to be going in the same direction since the word signified a certain attention to structures .… To deconstruct was also a structuralist gesture .… But it was also an
5 Psychoanalytic Criticism from:
The Postmodern Bible
Abstract: By the time Sigmund Freud published
The Interpretation of Dreams(1900), the principles of psychoanalysis were in place. What were they? Laplanche and Pontalis’s scrupulous definition of psychoanalysis begins: “a method of investigation which consists essentially in bringing out the unconscious meanings of the words, the actions and the products of the imagination … of a particular subject” (367; cf. Freud, 1923b:235). This discovery or institution of the unconscious, that dark realm that governs us but which we cannot govern, whose contents express themselves obliquely—not transparently—in displacements, sublimations, condensations, and substitutions, was to be defining for psychoanalysis. It
4 Allegory as Radical Interpretation from:
Hermeneutics Ancient and Modern
Abstract: “Radical interpretation” means the redescription, in one’s own language, of sentences from an alien system of concepts and beliefs. My thought is that this idea describes, in a rough, preliminary sort of way, the logic of allegorical interpretation, at least in the case of someone like Philo Judaeus, who lived in Alexandria about the time of Christ and produced a number of commentaries on the Septuagint, the (almost legendary) Greek translation of the Hebrew Bible, in order to make sense of it in terms of the concepts and beliefs of Hellenistic culture. In this context making sense does not mean
4 Allegory as Radical Interpretation from:
Hermeneutics Ancient and Modern
Abstract: “Radical interpretation” means the redescription, in one’s own language, of sentences from an alien system of concepts and beliefs. My thought is that this idea describes, in a rough, preliminary sort of way, the logic of allegorical interpretation, at least in the case of someone like Philo Judaeus, who lived in Alexandria about the time of Christ and produced a number of commentaries on the Septuagint, the (almost legendary) Greek translation of the Hebrew Bible, in order to make sense of it in terms of the concepts and beliefs of Hellenistic culture. In this context making sense does not mean
9 The File Hills Farm Colony Legacy from:
Local Knowledge, Global Stage
Author(s) DESNOMIE CHEYANNE
Abstract: First Nations people in Canada have experienced and continue to experience a multitude of hardships at the hand of the government through various colonial and assimilation policies. The aim of this chapter is to provide a unique perspective about a little-known facet of Canadian history, the File Hills Farm Colony, and to engage in an accurate ethnographic representation of contemporary indigenous peoples that avoids the hazards of stereotyping, idealizing, and freezing in time and space.
CHAPTER NINE Of Nations and Foreigners, Miracles and Texts from:
In a Different Place
Abstract: In the early 1880s an Englishman named James Theodore Bent made a tour of the islands of the Cyclades. He visited Tinos twice on his travels, once to attend the festival of the Annunciation on March 25, and the second time, not quite a year later, to tour the island. Unlike many such travelers to Greece, Bent did not confine his attentions to antiquities but was also interested in contemporary customs and was willing to learn modern Greek. Nonetheless, he saw many continuities between the modern Greeks and the ancients, and drew upon both past and present in describing what
CHAPTER TWELVE Epilogue: from:
In a Different Place
Abstract: In june 1993, I returned to Tinos for a short visit. Although I was in Greece for research purposes, 1 my trip to the island was not connected to this research. I had simply come to visit friends and to enjoy the island for a few days. I had, however, timed this visit for a particular event: the arrival of an Elderhostel boat at Tinos. One of the lecturers on the boat was a historian, George Moutafis, the husband of Vasiliki Galani-Moutafi, a Greek anthropologist who teaches at the University of the Aegean on Mitilini. When I had visited the
I The Festival of Saints Constantine and Helen from:
Firewalking and Religious Healing
Abstract: Old Yorgakis Yavasis stood in front of the icons of Saints Constantine and Helen and crossed himself three times. He lit a small incense burner, made the sign of the cross with it in front of the icons, and placed it on a large trunk underneath the icon shelf. As the thick, sweet-smelling smoke clouded up around him, Yavasis placed a hand on each of the two icons and stood motionless. Suddenly all the gold coins and jewelry, all the silver votive offerings and little bells, that hung from the icons began to jingle and rattle quietly.
V History, Folklore, Politics, and Science from:
Firewalking and Religious Healing
Abstract: In the beginning he lived all alone with his family in a cave up in the mountains. As it turned out, his children were forced to marry each other; brothers married sisters. The church forbids this, but sometimes it happens by accident. Here it
VII A Full Moon Firedance in Maine from:
Firewalking and Religious Healing
Abstract: The third time the Anastenarides told him to remain on the coals with them longer, but he declined and left.
15 LE LABORATOIRE VIVANT (LIVING LAB) JEUNESSE: from:
La transformation sociale par l'innovation sociale
Author(s) Boire Martin
Abstract: D’abord, nous situerons l’émergence du LVJ dans le cadre d’une recherche participative initiée en 2010 par le CEFRIO².Intitulée
Des laboratoires vivants pour des territoires innovants, cette recherche visait à estimer la pertinence et l’applicabilité du laboratoire vivant pour soutenir un développement axé sur l’innovation et l’usage du numérique dans divers territoires du Québec. Prenant appui sur des principes et une méthodologie spécifiques que cette recherche a permis d’explorer, deux projets pilotes
CHAPITRE 10 CHANGER LES OPINIONS ET LES COMPORTEMENTS DANS UN MONDE QUI CHANGE: from:
Changement et grands projets
Author(s) MOTULSKY BERNARD
Abstract: Un projet, c’est d’abord une intention, une idée que l’on projette vers l’avenir. Et, pour le concevoir et le mettre en oeuvre, il faut la collaboration, l’accord ou au moins l’assentiment tacite de toutes les personnes qui, de près ou de loin, vont être affectées, concernées, touchées, intéressées par ce projet (les parties prenantes). La communication, telle qu’on l’entend ici, c’est l’art de connaître d’abord les perceptions, les attitudes et les comportements de toutes ces personnes pour ensuite les influencer, au moyen d’outils de diffusion de l’information. Il est donc uniquement question de transfert d’information entre tous ceux qui ont
Enfermement médiatique et sortie en coulisse dans La fabrique de cérémonies de Kossi Efoui from:
Écritures de la réclusion
Author(s) Giguère Caroline
Abstract: Les technologies de l’information sont aujourd’hui omniprésentes dans l’univers des discours sociaux, que l’on pense aux médias radiophoniques, télévisuels ou plus encore électroniques. S’ils agissent en tant que moyens de communication, force est de constater qu’ils sont aussi, et de plus en plus, organisateurs et producteurs de discours. De la téléréalité qui envahit nos écrans, et des rencontres virtuelles, émergent de nouvelles manières de concevoir les frontières entre les pays, mais aussi entre les gens, entre les sphères de l’intime et du public et, finalement, entre l’expérience et sa représentation.
Enfermement médiatique et sortie en coulisse dans La fabrique de cérémonies de Kossi Efoui from:
Écritures de la réclusion
Author(s) Giguère Caroline
Abstract: Les technologies de l’information sont aujourd’hui omniprésentes dans l’univers des discours sociaux, que l’on pense aux médias radiophoniques, télévisuels ou plus encore électroniques. S’ils agissent en tant que moyens de communication, force est de constater qu’ils sont aussi, et de plus en plus, organisateurs et producteurs de discours. De la téléréalité qui envahit nos écrans, et des rencontres virtuelles, émergent de nouvelles manières de concevoir les frontières entre les pays, mais aussi entre les gens, entre les sphères de l’intime et du public et, finalement, entre l’expérience et sa représentation.
CHAPITRE 5 LA RESPONSABILISATION DE LA COLLECTIVITÉ TERRITORIALE PARISIENNE COMME RÉPONSE AUX VIOLENCES FAITES AUX FEMMES from:
Responsabilités et violences envers les femmes
Author(s) Guillemaut Christine
Abstract: Violences faites aux femmes, violences sexistes, violences de genre : la terminologie évolue au fil de l’approfondissement des études féministes et des études de genre. Ces violences s’inscrivent dans un continuum, de l’espace public (violences sexistes, viols et agressions sexuelles) à la sphère intime du couple (violences conjugales y compris le viol conjugal), mais aussi sur les lieux de travail ou de socialisation, tels que l’école et l’université (harcèlement sexiste et sexuel), jusqu’à la famille qui est parfois l’endroit de formes spécifiques de violences à l’encontre des petites filles et des adolescentes (contrainte au mariage et mutilations sexuelles féminines).
CHAPITRE 7 INTERVENIR AUPRÈS DES HOMMES AYANT UN PROBLÈME DE VIOLENCE CONJUGALE ET FAMILIALE from:
Responsabilités et violences envers les femmes
Author(s) Meunier Valérie
Abstract: Les premières initiatives mises en place au Québec afin de contrer le problème social que constitue la violence conjugale se sont naturellement tournées vers l’aide aux victimes. Le mouvement des femmes a non seulement contribué à fournir protection et soutien aux victimes, mais a permis de sortir la problématique de la violence conjugale de la sphère privée et d’en promouvoir la dénonciation sociale. Quoiqu’essentielles, les seules interventions auprès des victimes ne sauraient permettre une lutte efficace contre ce problème social. L’intervention auprès des hommes ayant des comportements violents s’inscrit dans cette perspective. Ce chapitre présentera donc une réflexion sur les
CHAPITRE 13 VIOLENCES SEXUELLES EN RÉPUBLIQUE DÉMOCRATIQUE DU CONGO from:
Responsabilités et violences envers les femmes
Author(s) Goff Gaëlle Breton-Le
Abstract: Depuis 1993, date d’une série de conflits internes et régionaux qui se sont déroulés sur le territoire de la République démocratique du Congo (RDC), les femmes et les filles ont été massivement victimes de viols, d’enlèvements, d’esclavage et d’esclavage sexuel, de grossesses forcées, de prostitution forcée, de mutilations sexuelles et de tortures de nature sexuelle (Haut-Commissariat aux droits de l’homme des Nations Unies, 2010). Selon une extrapolation de données récoltées en matière de violence sexuelle par une équipe de chercheurs, 1 310 000 femmes congolaises auraient subi de la violence sexuelle au cours de leur vie¹. En dépit des accords
CHAPITRE 17 EDUCATING MEDICAL STUDENTS ON VIOLENCE AGAINST WOMEN from:
Responsabilités et violences envers les femmes
Author(s) Zweyer Marina
Abstract: Violence against women (VaW) and girls is widespread worldwide, has serious health consequences, and is considered a major public health problem (WHO 2010). Considering only intimate partner violence (IPV), globally, between 15% to 71% of women experience it during their lifetime (Garcia-Moreno
et al. 2006). Given that violence may have short-, medium- and long-term adverse health effects, women exposed to violence are frequent users of health services (Kruget al. 2002). For instance, among women attending accident and emergency departments in the UK, the prevalence of IPV was estimated between 22% and 35% (Federet al. 2009). Clearly, physicians and
Book Title: Vers une approche géopoétique-Lectures de Kenneth White, de Victor Segalen et de J.-M. G. Le Clézio
Publisher: Presses de l'Université du Québec
Author(s): BOUVET RACHEL
Abstract: Toute perspective de lecture est liée à un ancrage géographique. Chaque lecteur est habité par des paysages. Pour Rachel Bouvet, ce paysage est celui de l’océan tel qu’on peut l’observer le long des côtes bretonnes, cette force gigantesque, sublime, mais aussi porteuse d’une douceur infinie. Les auteurs Kenneth White, Victor Segalen et J.-M. G. Le Clézio partagent eux aussi cet ancrage breton : White vogue principalement entre les Côtes-d’Armor et l’Écosse, Segalen naviguait surtout entre le Finistère Nord et le Pacifique, Le Clézio voyage entre le Finistère Sud et le Nouveau-Mexique en passant par l’océan Indien et la Méditerranée. Consciente de son attachement breton, provoquant chez elle une sensibilité accrue aux paysages maritimes et désertiques, le désir de la géopoétique et un questionnement sur l’altérité, Rachel Bouvet réfléchit à la dimension géographique de l’acte de lecture. Par son analyse des œuvres de Kenneth White, de Victor Segalen et de J.-M. G. Le Clézio, elle montre que la géopoétique peut donner lieu à une approche singulière des textes littéraires. Faisant souvent appel à la géographie, aussi bien à la géographie physique qu’à la géographie humaine, avec les questions de paysage, de carte, de territoire, d’archipel, de frontière, elle illustre de quelle manière une interprétation basée sur les principes essentiels de la géopoétique peut se déployer.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1f1176j
3 Les valeurs du patrimoine culturel: from:
La trace et le rhizome - Les mises en scène du patrimoine culturel
Abstract: Région du Togo, le Koutammakou se caractérise par une maison familiale, la takienta, placée sur la liste du patrimoine mondial en 2004. La volonté de ses habitants Batammariba de conserver leur indépendance et leur liberté s’y manifeste en effet depuis des siècles à travers une architecture et une organisation spatiale tout à fait particulière. L’habitation et ses dépendances (greniers, etable, poulailler, ruche), concentrées en un seul corps de bâtiment, se présentent comme un ensemble de tourelles, carrées, circulaires ou ellipsoïdes, d’où l’appellation de maisons-châteaux. Elle n’a qu’une seule entrée, ce qui permet un contrôle et renforce son aspect défensif. Le
ENTREVUE AVEC AMIN MAALOUF from:
Amin Maalouf: une oeuvre à revisiter
Author(s) MAALOUF AMIN
Abstract: – J’ai le sentiment, peut-être illusoire, d’une grande continuité dans mon parcours. À certains moments, j’aurais pu m’écarter de l’écriture pour suivre une carrière politique ou diplomatique, ou pour choisir un autre mode d’expression artistique tel que le cinéma. Finalement, j’ai toujours choisi de me consacrer à mon activité d’écrivain, avec tout juste
Book Title: Des couvents en héritage / Religious Houses: A Legacy- Publisher: Presses de l'Université du Québec
Author(s): DROUIN MARTIN
Abstract: À l’heure de la désaffection des traditions religieuses historiques, les couvents, les monastères et les abbayes qui émaillent les paysages de nos villes et de nos campagnes sont menacés de déshérence : les communautés qui les ont bâtis, habités et qui en ont assuré la survie n’ont plus les moyens d’assumer leur charge patrimoniale. En même temps que s’impose l’affection citoyenne pour ces vastes ensembles et leurs jardins, ceux-ci sont de plus en plus convoités à des fins de développement. Que faire de cet héritage riche et lourd ? Cet ouvrage collectif regroupe des contributions qui apportent des pistes de réflexion sur les problèmes de la sécularisation, de la réaffectation ou de la gouvernance d’anciens ensembles conventuels. Il vise également à nourrir la discussion sur les implications financières, juridiques, urbanistiques et mémorielles du changement de vocation des couvents et de leur mise en valeur. In this time of abandonment of historical religious traditions, the convents, monasteries, and abbeys that punctuate our rural and urban landscapes are in danger of becoming escheated properties. The communities who built them, lived in them, and have thus far ensured their survival can no longer bear the burden of their heritage value. These magnificent properties and their gardens are increasingly the objects of society’s affection, and yet at the same time are more and more coveted by real estate developers. What is to be done with such a rich and weighty legacy? This collective publication brings together contributions that provide ways of thinking about the issues of secularization, adaptive reuse, or the governance of former religious buildings. It also intends to contribute to the debate on the financial, legal, urbanistic, and memorial implications of the new destinies of convents and their redevelopment.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1f117q9
4. The Mexican Experience in Adaptive Reuse of Religious Houses from:
Des couvents en héritage / Religious Houses: A Legacy
Author(s) Santín Ana Lozano
Abstract: Mexico has a long tradition of reusing religious buildings. Every colonial city is full of beautiful examples of Neo-Hispanic churches and convents, which stand as a result of the needs of a deeply religious society and a sign of the unlimited power and influence of the Church during that period. At the time of Independence, religious corporations owned most of the territorial wealth in the country and, years later, when progressive ideas arrived, this led to confrontations between political and religious forces. The endeavours of the Liberal Government to abolish the tutelage of the Church over the nation culminated in
5. La sauvegarde des édifices conventuels et le développement de la conscience patrimoniale au Québec dans les années 1970 from:
Des couvents en héritage / Religious Houses: A Legacy
Author(s) Drouin Martin
Abstract: Il suffit généralement que soit annoncée la fermeture d’un couvent, d’un monastère ou d’une abbaye pour que des citoyens inquiets ou des associations de sauvegarde du patrimoine se mobilisent et réclament un débat public sur l’avenir des bâtiments et des propriétés qui les entourent. Les exemples au Québec abondent. La destruction récente d’une partie de l’ensemble des Franciscaines de Marie à Québec a suscité, en ce sens, une incompréhension populaire devant le spectacle offert¹ (ill. 1). La disparition prochaine du monastère des Dominicains, à moins de un demi-kilomètre du site, pour faire place à un nouveau pavillon du Musée national
7. Mort et résurrection de l’ancienne abbaye royale de Royaumont from:
Des couvents en héritage / Religious Houses: A Legacy
Author(s) Leniaud Jean-Michel
Abstract: Les abbayes et les grands établissements ecclésiastiques de l’Ancien Régime ont subi des sorts divers après la Révolution. Certains ont été privatisés, d’autres non. Les premiers ont été totalement ou partiellement détruits ; les seconds, affectés à des services publics ; d’autres ont retrouvé à plus ou moins longue échéance leur vocation originelle. L’histoire monographique de ces bâtiments à partir du XIX
esiècle reste souvent à faire ou à moderniser : celle de Clairvaux, de Fontevraud, du Mont-Saint-Michel, de Jumièges, d’Ourscamps, des Vaux-de-Cernay, etc., mériterait d’être questionnée et mise en vue panoramique : qui ont été les acteurs des transformations,
8. Heritagization of an Abbey Ruin: from:
Des couvents en héritage / Religious Houses: A Legacy
Author(s) Coomans Thomas
Abstract: From the early 19th-century Romanticism, ruins of medieval abbeys and castles became part of the Western culture. This was a consequence of the massive destruction in the French Revolution. For the first time, ruins were no longer the exclusive domain of ancient and classical cultures, but people realized that the world had changed and parts of their own past were vanishing. It was no longer necessary to go to Italy or Greece to see ruins; they were everywhere in the nearby countryside. A complex blend of feelings attracted Romanticists to medieval abbey ruins, from the search for mystery and strong
16 Traditions spirituelles et esprit du lieu from:
Des couvents en héritage / Religious Houses: A Legacy
Author(s) Lucier Pierre
Abstract: Les traditions religieuses et spirituelles se sont inscrites dans des habitats et des lieux de culte et d’accueil souvent très différents, à l’image des insistances particulières de leur adhésion croyante et de leurs règles de vie. Entre les spiritualités des familles religieuses, l’aménagement architectural de leurs couvents et bâtiments et les modalités de leur présence et de leur action, il y a dès lors des correspondances qui comptent pour beaucoup dans l’
esprit du lieuqui habite ces ensembles. C’est cetesprit du lieuqui constitue l’assise de la signification culturelle des couvents et qui, dans les cas où une authentique
Projections sur le vide. from:
Le lieu du Nord
Author(s) Vallières Stéphanie
Abstract: Le 11 octobre 1984, le gouvernement du Québec a décrété la fermeture et la destruction complète de la ville mono-industrielle de Gagnon, sur la Côte-Nord, au Québec. Après vingt-cinq années à développer une communauté excentrée et à exploiter les mines de fer environnantes, les habitants de Gagnon sont alors forcés de quitter les lieux, et les bâtiments de leur ville sont enfouis sous terre. Même s’il s’agissait peut-être, à l’époque, de la solution la plus viable que l’on pouvait prendre – nous ne nous aventurerons pas dans ce débat –, l’enfouissement des vestiges de Gagnon a détruit presque toutes les
Projections sur le vide. from:
Le lieu du Nord
Author(s) Vallières Stéphanie
Abstract: Le 11 octobre 1984, le gouvernement du Québec a décrété la fermeture et la destruction complète de la ville mono-industrielle de Gagnon, sur la Côte-Nord, au Québec. Après vingt-cinq années à développer une communauté excentrée et à exploiter les mines de fer environnantes, les habitants de Gagnon sont alors forcés de quitter les lieux, et les bâtiments de leur ville sont enfouis sous terre. Même s’il s’agissait peut-être, à l’époque, de la solution la plus viable que l’on pouvait prendre – nous ne nous aventurerons pas dans ce débat –, l’enfouissement des vestiges de Gagnon a détruit presque toutes les
Foreword from:
New Approaches to Teaching Folk and Fairy Tales
Author(s) Haase Donald
Abstract: It’s about time. Time , that is, for a collection of essays like this. Time for scholars of folktales and fairy tales to acknowledge the role that teaching plays in their work. The study of folktales and fairy tales has a long history that took a radical turn in the 1970s and ’80s, a turn that reinvented, revitalized, and expanded the field across disciplines. That burgeoning interest generated new university courses on fairy tales that over the last thirty years have introduced countless students to a new, critical understanding of the fairy tale and to a host of new tales,
4 The Fairy-Tale Forest as Memory Site: from:
New Approaches to Teaching Folk and Fairy Tales
Author(s) McGonagill Doris
Abstract: TeachIng undergraduate courses In German StudIes I have had the opportunity to prepare several courses and smaller teaching units on the Grimms’ folk and fairy tales, but each time I find myself facing the same question: How should I structure my material? There are some obvious choices—chronological, regional, thematic—each with its own advantages and limitations. Structuring principles based on thematic similarities and related plot elements—the folklorists’ tale types—can provide a basic infrastructure, along with specific character constellations, motifs, and topoi. Thus your groups may include tales about family conflict and gender relationships (“child victims,” “bad dads,”
6 Teaching Charles Perrault’s Histoires ou contes du temps passé in the Literary and Historical Context of the Sun King’s Reign from:
New Approaches to Teaching Folk and Fairy Tales
Author(s) Jones Christa C.
Abstract: My undergraduate French literature and civilization class is a communication and writing-intensive class that discusses Charles Perrault’s (1697)
Histoires ou contes du temps passé, excerpts from other seventeenth-century literary and historical texts, and contemporary fairy-tale adaptations, both onscreen and literary. One of my main goals is to enable students to enjoy studying the original French text, which can be challenging for students who read a seventeenth-century text for the first time. To this end, I encourage an intertextual approach: my hope is to “hook” students on Perrault’s tales by anchoring his tales in the cultural background of his time and
10 Teaching Hans Christian Andersen’s Tales: from:
New Approaches to Teaching Folk and Fairy Tales
Author(s) François Cyrille
Abstract: As one of the most famous fairy-tale writers and one of the most translated authors in the world, Andersen should be given a prime place in a teaching unit on fairy tales. At the same time, as he was a Danish writer, both the language and the cultural context make it difficult for non-Danish -speaking instructors to grasp the many dimensions of his work. This chapter gives advice and suggests activities that can be used to work on Andersen’s tales in an academic setting, focusing on a comparative analysis of translations to approach the particular language in which they were
Theories of Space and Construction of the Ancient World from:
Foundations for Sociorhetorical Exploration
Author(s) Berquist Jon L.
Abstract: First,
spaceis an odd term about which to write a history. Throughout most of the history of Western thought, few persons have recognized that space is historical; that is, space has generally been understood as a given, not as a category about which there could be variation. History existed within space (and time); there was
Storied Space, or, Ben Sira “Tells” a Temple from:
Foundations for Sociorhetorical Exploration
Author(s) Camp Claudia V.
Abstract: One of many debts of gratitude that biblical scholars owe Jim Flanagan is for the time and energy he has spent organizing us to think seriously about space in the same critical way we have become accustomed to thinking about history and society. My own interests are less systematically theoretical than Flanagan’s. Not only do I like my theory heavily applied; I do not even mind if an application skews someone’s theoretical system a bit. In the end, for me, heuristic possibility counts for more than theoretical purity. I have no doubt that some impurity will taint my neophyte venture
A Cognitive Turn: from:
Foundations for Sociorhetorical Exploration
Author(s) von Thaden Robert H.
Abstract: This is an exciting time to be engaged in religious studies in general and biblical studies in particular. Developments in the cross-disciplinary endeavor known as cognitive science, a “blanket term for a set of disciplines … concerned with the empirical investigation of the human mind,” have opened up new avenues of inquiry in the study of religion.² The development of the cognitive science of religion promises to reorient the way some scholars of religion study and analyze this particular human phenomenon.³ Cognitive science brings to the table an interdisciplinary array of tools that can, in principle, allow us to rethink
Clothes Make the (Wo)Man from:
Foundations for Sociorhetorical Exploration
Author(s) Jeal Roy R.
Abstract: Thinking about perceptions of body as they are used in the Bible leads, inevitably, to reflecting on clothing and the idea of clothing. Clothing is a powerful image throughout biblical literature and in human society generally.¹ At the most obvious level, clothing covers and conceals the body, protecting it from exposure to the elements and the view of other persons. But the significance of clothing extends much further since garments not only cover and conceal, but also function to display the body in particular ways and with many meanings. The ways in which bodies are clothed have far-reaching and sometimes
Theories of Space and Construction of the Ancient World from:
Foundations for Sociorhetorical Exploration
Author(s) Berquist Jon L.
Abstract: First,
spaceis an odd term about which to write a history. Throughout most of the history of Western thought, few persons have recognized that space is historical; that is, space has generally been understood as a given, not as a category about which there could be variation. History existed within space (and time); there was
Storied Space, or, Ben Sira “Tells” a Temple from:
Foundations for Sociorhetorical Exploration
Author(s) Camp Claudia V.
Abstract: One of many debts of gratitude that biblical scholars owe Jim Flanagan is for the time and energy he has spent organizing us to think seriously about space in the same critical way we have become accustomed to thinking about history and society. My own interests are less systematically theoretical than Flanagan’s. Not only do I like my theory heavily applied; I do not even mind if an application skews someone’s theoretical system a bit. In the end, for me, heuristic possibility counts for more than theoretical purity. I have no doubt that some impurity will taint my neophyte venture
A Cognitive Turn: from:
Foundations for Sociorhetorical Exploration
Author(s) von Thaden Robert H.
Abstract: This is an exciting time to be engaged in religious studies in general and biblical studies in particular. Developments in the cross-disciplinary endeavor known as cognitive science, a “blanket term for a set of disciplines … concerned with the empirical investigation of the human mind,” have opened up new avenues of inquiry in the study of religion.² The development of the cognitive science of religion promises to reorient the way some scholars of religion study and analyze this particular human phenomenon.³ Cognitive science brings to the table an interdisciplinary array of tools that can, in principle, allow us to rethink
Clothes Make the (Wo)Man from:
Foundations for Sociorhetorical Exploration
Author(s) Jeal Roy R.
Abstract: Thinking about perceptions of body as they are used in the Bible leads, inevitably, to reflecting on clothing and the idea of clothing. Clothing is a powerful image throughout biblical literature and in human society generally.¹ At the most obvious level, clothing covers and conceals the body, protecting it from exposure to the elements and the view of other persons. But the significance of clothing extends much further since garments not only cover and conceal, but also function to display the body in particular ways and with many meanings. The ways in which bodies are clothed have far-reaching and sometimes
Book Title: Writing of the Formless-Jose Lezama Lima and the End of Time
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Matos Jaime Rodríguez
Abstract: In this book, Jaime Rodr+¡guez Matos proposes the GÇ£formlessGÇ¥ as a point of departure in thinking through the relationship between politics and time. Thinking through both literary and political writings around the Cuban Revolution, Rodr+¡guez Matos explores the link between abstract symbolic procedures and various political experiments that have sought to give form to a principle of sovereignty based on the category of representation. In doing so, he proposes the formless as the limit of modern and contemporary reflections on the meaning of politics while exploring the philosophical consequences of a formless concept of temporality for the critique of metaphysics._x000D_ Rodr+¡guez Matos takes the writing and thought of Jos+¬ Lezama Lima as the guiding thread in exploring the possibility of a politicity in which time is imagined beyond the disciplining functions it has had throughout the metaphysical traditionGÇöa time of the absence of time, in which the absence of time no longer means eternity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1f89tmf
Conclusion: from:
Writing of the Formless
Abstract: Jean-Luc Godard’s
Notre musique(2004) takes place among the ruins of Sarajevo, at the time, the most recent proof that the state of exception is the rule. In the film, the Spanish novelist Juan Goytisolo makes a cameo appearance that could be wrongly seen as disconnected from the rest of the movie as a whole. During his time on screen, Goytisolo makes the claim that in the contemporary world, among the ruins of the civilizing process, there is a need for contemplative poets like Juan José Valente and José Lezama Lima. It is the world that needs this, not the
FOREWORD from:
Citizen Subject
Author(s) Apter Emily
Abstract: What is a citizen subject? A hyphenated subject, equal parts political citizen and subjected individual conscience? A freestanding agent capable of being federated with others? The ratifier of moral law, the self-punisher who dies by a thousand cuts at the hands of his or her own superego? The lead in a play about the psychic life of power in the era of weak states? The plebian legislator posed against the citizen king? A figure of possessive individualism reversed (which is to say, a self-dispossessed collectivist)? Or the
Untertan, man of straw, anyone, “man without qualities,” figure ofressentiment, silently resisting
Overture: from:
Citizen Subject
Author(s) Swenson James
Abstract: Doubtless, from one text to another, and sometimes even within the same “text” (I am primarily referring here to the Nietz sche of 1939–46), Heidegger nuances his formulation. At one moment he positively affirms that, in Descartes’s
Meditations(which he cites in Latin), theegoas consciousness (which he explicates ascogito me cogitare) is
Book Title: Taking Hold of the Real-Dietrich Bonhoeffer and the Profound Worldliness of Christianity
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Harvey Barry
Abstract: Dietrich Bonhoeffer writes in one of his last prison letters that he had “come to know and understand more and more the profound this-worldliness of Christianity." In Taking Hold of the Real, Barry Harvey engages in constructive conversation with Bonhoeffer, contending that the “shallow and banal this-worldliness" of modern society is ordered to a significant degree around the social technologies of religion, culture, and race. These mechanisms displace human beings from their traditional connections with particular locales, and relocate them in their “proper places" as determined by the nation-state and capitalist markets. Christians are called to participate in the profound this-worldliness that breaks into the world in the apocalyptic action of Jesus Christ, a form of life that requires discipline and an understanding of death and resurrection. The church is a sacrament of this new humanity, performing for all to hear the polyphony of life that was prefigured in the Old Testament and now is realised in Christ. Unable to find a faithful form of this-worldliness in wartime Germany, Bonhoeffer joined the conspiracy against Hitler, a decision aptly contrasted with a small French church that, prepared by its life together over many generations, saved thousands of Jewish lives.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1f89trh
Introduction: from:
Taking Hold of the Real
Abstract: “We live”, writes Dietrich Bonhoeffer, “in the time before the last things and believe in the last things, is that not so?”¹ We live, in other words,
in medias res, in the middle of things. There is nothing novel in this observation, for this has been a perennial fact of human existence since our first parents were cast out of the garden. What is unprecedented, and what I attempt to account for in this book in constructive conversation with Bonhoeffer, is the distinctive character of the middle here and now. Prior to the sixteenth century there existed a recognizable consensus
3 The Future of a Technological Illusion from:
Taking Hold of the Real
Abstract: Dietrich Bonhoeffer’s critique of a world come of age, scattered across a handful of documents from prison, offers keen insight into the time in which we live and the place where we have been sent to testify to God’s work of judgment and reconciliation in Christ. He brings to light the irony in modernity’s claim to have reached a stage of intellectual and moral maturity, enabling us to see that for all of its knowledge, expertise, and technological success, the age is as godless and without resource as previous generations. But he also draws our attention to the distinctive and
Chapter One PRODUCING THE CITY from:
Alternative Modernities in French Travel Writing
Abstract: Recognizing the inexhaustible quality of the urban flow of goods, capital and people that inform metropolitan life and in order to approach a means of interpreting urban travel writing, it is helpful to engage with a number of influential theoretical approaches for understanding cities. This chapter explores theories of the city along two main axes: first, as a material condition of the planning perspective, which is to say an urban environment concerned with function and place-making; and, second, as a narrative space, a space of practice where meanings are performed by subjects in places across space and time. Both of
Chapter Four WANDERING GEOMETRY: from:
Alternative Modernities in French Travel Writing
Abstract: The imaginative geographies of twentieth-century New York, a time when the city was considered by many to be the capital of the world (perhaps the last), provide the impetus for discussion in this chapter. While imperialist Europe may have dominated the nineteenth-century’s imagination of civilization, in the wake of two world wars, the twentieth century witnessed the dislocation of a geopolitics dominated by European imperialist expansion, and the establishment of a new global political order increasingly dominated by the capitalist market economy and American foreign policy. This shift of power within the West was also fundamental for the establishment of
Chapter Five WRITING AROUND THE LINES: from:
Alternative Modernities in French Travel Writing
Abstract: So far we have argued that centric perspectives on urban space have their own
poetics, or formal means of operating, and their ownpolitics– a relation, therefore, with social space that invests these perspectives in networks of power. We now move to connect the ethics of this power – its relative exclusions and hierarchies that work at the cognitive, aesthetic and affective levels within social space – to the performance of legibility in literary form, a move that allows us to obtain a view of travel discourse as a means of producing social space. It is time now to
Chapter 7 WORLDS WITHIN AND BEYOND WORDS: from:
The Anthem Companion to Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Jain Sheena
Abstract: While verbal expressions, whether oral or written, sometimes fail to convey all that we wish to, and as precisely as we want to, this is seldom viewed as a limitation inherent in language itself. More often than not, it is attributed, with some justification, to a lack of adequate skills on the part of the speaker or author. Just as often, the fact that theoretical expressions in the social sciences are linguistically mediated is something that is taken for granted and regarded as unproblematic, while it is in the conceptual framework of the theory being considered that the source of
Chapter 7 WORLDS WITHIN AND BEYOND WORDS: from:
The Anthem Companion to Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Jain Sheena
Abstract: While verbal expressions, whether oral or written, sometimes fail to convey all that we wish to, and as precisely as we want to, this is seldom viewed as a limitation inherent in language itself. More often than not, it is attributed, with some justification, to a lack of adequate skills on the part of the speaker or author. Just as often, the fact that theoretical expressions in the social sciences are linguistically mediated is something that is taken for granted and regarded as unproblematic, while it is in the conceptual framework of the theory being considered that the source of
Chapter 7 WORLDS WITHIN AND BEYOND WORDS: from:
The Anthem Companion to Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Jain Sheena
Abstract: While verbal expressions, whether oral or written, sometimes fail to convey all that we wish to, and as precisely as we want to, this is seldom viewed as a limitation inherent in language itself. More often than not, it is attributed, with some justification, to a lack of adequate skills on the part of the speaker or author. Just as often, the fact that theoretical expressions in the social sciences are linguistically mediated is something that is taken for granted and regarded as unproblematic, while it is in the conceptual framework of the theory being considered that the source of
Book Title: The Southern Hospitality Myth-Ethics, Politics, Race, and American Memory
Publisher: University of Georgia Press
Author(s): Richardson Riché
Abstract: Historians have offered a variety of explanations of the origins and cultural practices of hospitality in the antebellum South. Economic historians have at times portrayed southern hospitality as evidence of conspicuous consumption and competition among wealthy planters, while cultural historians have treated it peripherally as a symptomatic expression of the southern code of honor. Although historians have offered different theories, they generally agree that the mythic dimensions of southern hospitality eventually outstripped its actual practices. Szczesiul examines why we have chosen to remember and valorize this particular aspect of the South, and he raises fundamental ethical questions that underlie both the concept of hospitality and the cultural work of American memory, particularly in light of the region's historical legacy of slavery and segregation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1g2km4s
Book Title: The Southern Hospitality Myth-Ethics, Politics, Race, and American Memory
Publisher: University of Georgia Press
Author(s): Richardson Riché
Abstract: Historians have offered a variety of explanations of the origins and cultural practices of hospitality in the antebellum South. Economic historians have at times portrayed southern hospitality as evidence of conspicuous consumption and competition among wealthy planters, while cultural historians have treated it peripherally as a symptomatic expression of the southern code of honor. Although historians have offered different theories, they generally agree that the mythic dimensions of southern hospitality eventually outstripped its actual practices. Szczesiul examines why we have chosen to remember and valorize this particular aspect of the South, and he raises fundamental ethical questions that underlie both the concept of hospitality and the cultural work of American memory, particularly in light of the region's historical legacy of slavery and segregation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1g2km4s
Blackness Written, Erased, Rewritten: from:
New Perspectives on James Weldon Johnson's "The Autobiography of an Ex-Colored Man"
Author(s) LAMOTHE DAPHNE
Abstract: One hundred years separate the publications of James Weldon Johnson’s
Autobiography of an Ex-Colored Man(1912) and Teju Cole’sOpen City(2012), compelling me to ask if these novels can speak to each other across the span of time and, if so, what meanings they reveal to readers about the similarities and diff erences between the modernist New Negro era and the postmodern era of post-blackness.¹ I and other critics have argued that African American modernism is characterized by the eff orts of progressive artists, activists, and intellectuals to construct a pluralist cultural nationalism.² This thesis necessarily assumes that early
The Composer versus the “Perfessor”: from:
New Perspectives on James Weldon Johnson's "The Autobiography of an Ex-Colored Man"
Author(s) BROOKS LORI
Abstract: In the sixth chapter of James Weldon Johnson’s
The Autobiography of an Ex-Colored Man, the protagonist arrives starry-eyed in New York City and offers an account of its black nightlife, including his first encounter with ragtime music: “the stout man at the piano began to run his fingers up and down the keyboard. This he did in a manner that indicated that he was a master of a good deal of technique. Then he began to play; and such playing! . . . It was music of a kind I had never heard before. It was music that demanded physical
Book Title: Inca Garcilaso and Contemporary World-Making- Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Author(s): Fernández Christian
Abstract: This edited volume offers new perspectives from leading scholars on the important work of Inca Garcilaso de la Vega (1539-1616), one of the first Latin American writers to present an intellectual analysis of pre-Columbian history and culture and the ensuing colonial period. To the contributors, Inca Garcilaso's
Royal Commentaries of the Incaspresented an early counter-hegemonic discourse and a reframing of the history of native non-alphabetic cultures that undermined the colonial rhetoric of his time and the geopolitical divisions it purported. Through his research in both Andean and Renaissance archives, Inca Garcilaso sought to connect these divergent cultures into one world.This collection offers five classical studies ofRoyal Commentariespreviously unavailable in English, along with seven new essays that cover topics including Andean memory, historiography, translation, philosophy, trauma, and ethnic identity. This cross-disciplinary volume will be of interest to students and scholars of Latin American history, culture, comparative literature, subaltern studies, and works in translation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1g2kmm1
2 A SYNCRETIC TROPOLOGY from:
Inca Garcilaso and Contemporary World-Making
Author(s) Mazzotti José Antonio
Abstract: This analysis of Garcilaso’s
Royal Commentariesoffers an alternative reading of the text, based on the confluence and superimposition of Andean and European discourses—at times coincident, at times counterpoised.¹ Such a reading advances the outlines of a colonial writing subject who manifests himself through a discourse that is in and of itself a palimpsest. Just like the worn parchment with its many layers of writing, this multilayered discourse implies a simultaneity of positions that are not necessarily harmonious. I am referring to a kind of syncretism that embodies multiple meanings and values; different readers will appreciate the meanings and
7 WRITING THE HISTORY OF AN ANDEAN GHOST from:
Inca Garcilaso and Contemporary World-Making
Author(s) Martínez Francisco A. Ortega
Abstract: Garcilaso de la Vega’s
The Royal Commentaries(1609) has enjoyed an everwider appeal since the early seventeenth century.¹ Such rising popularity has taken place despite fundamental changes in readers’ criteria of evaluation and appreciation of this work. Up to the late nineteenth century, Garcilaso’s account had been taken as the most accomplished historical depiction of the Inca, but the discovery of new written and archeological sources and the emergence of modern historiography source criticism led historians and anthropologists to challenge its truthfulness. As a result, Garcilaso’shistorylost credibility. At the same time, thenarrativewas hailed as possessing the
A MONETARY PRELUDE: from:
Indebted
Abstract: Money was the rising star at the turn of the nineteenth century in Europe. Heralded by many contemporary economists as the symbol of economic rationality and the facilitator of a stable social order, money was considered one of the greatest institutional advances of humankind.¹ Yet in spite of such warm praises, money also gained a rather dubious reputation. Rumor had it that money was indeed something unimportant, at times even suspicious, a neutral “veil” that only obscures the “real” economic basis of society, namely, the good old practice of barter, the direct exchange of good and services.²
INTRODUCTION from:
Indebted
Abstract: Reading the works of Shmuel Yosef Agnon in New York in 2008 against the backdrop of the economic crisis evolving in the United States at that time had an unintended effect: I started to think of Agnon as an economist. Encountering Agnon in high school (as every child who grows up in the Israeli education system does), and later in university, my perception of the canonical author was shaped through Gershon Shaked’s paradoxical definition of Agnon as a “revolutionary traditionalist.” Born in 1888 in Galicia, an erudite “pupil” of the Jewish sacred multi-textual tradition but also of the writings of
CHAPTER 2 TALKING THROUGH MONEY from:
Indebted
Abstract: The first-person narrator of Agnon’s short story “And We Shall Not Fail” (“ולא ניכשל”), published in 1937, begins his tale with a warning. A person should never change the customary liturgy (נוסח) of his or her ancestors. This warning is immediately followed by a religious explanation: ever since biblical times, the twelve ancient tribes produced twelve different sets of prayers, each delivered to twelve heavenly gates. As a result, a person who changes the prayers of his ancestors “confuses” the gates. The narrator explains that recent generations have already been punished for confusing the prayers, hence creating chaos and altercations
Book Title: Transcendence and the Concrete-Selected Writings
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Moore Ian Alexander
Abstract: Jean Wahl (1888GÇô1974), once considered by the likes of Georges Bataille, Gilles Deleuze, Emmanuel Levinas, and Gabriel Marcel to be among the greatest French philosophers, has today nearly been forgotten outside France. Yet his influence on French philosophical thought can hardly be overestimated. Levinas wrote that GÇ£during over a half century of teaching and research, [Wahl] was the life force of the academic, extra-academic, and even, to a degree anti-academic philosophy necessary to a great culture.GÇ¥ And Deleuze, for his part, commented that GÇ£Apart from Sartre, who remained caught none the less in the trap of the verb to be, the most important philosopher in France was Jean Wahl.GÇ¥_x000D_ Besides engaging with the likes of Bataille, Bergson, Deleuze, Derrida, Levinas, Maritain, and Sartre, Wahl also played a significant role, in some cases almost singlehandedly, in introducing French philosophy to movements like existentialism, and American pragmatism and literature, and thinkers like Hegel, Kierkegaard, Nietzsche, Jaspers, and Heidegger. Yet Wahl was also an original philosopher and poet in his own right. This volume of selections from WahlGÇÖs philosophical writings makes a selection of his most important work available to the English-speaking philosophical community for the first time._x000D_ Jean Wahl was Professor of Philosophy at the Sorbonne from 1936 to 1967, save during World War II, which he spent in the United States, having escaped from the Drancy internment camp. His books to appear in English include The Pluralist Philosophies of England and America (Open Court, 1925), The Philosopher's Way (Oxford UP, 1948), A Short History of Existentialism (Philosophical Library, 1949), and Philosophies of Existence (Schocken, 1969).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1g2kn1q
2 Preface to Toward the Concrete from:
Transcendence and the Concrete
Author(s) Lawlor Leonard
Abstract: At about that time, the writers whom we loved explained to us that existence is a
scandal. What interested us, however, was real men with their labors and their troubles. We cried out for a philosophy which would account for every thing, and we did not perceive that it existed already and that it was precisely this philosophy which provoked in us
5 Heidegger and Kierkegaard: from:
Transcendence and the Concrete
Author(s) Moore Ian Alexander
Abstract: It is only slightly hyperbolic to say that Jean Wahl’s “Heidegger and Kierkegaard: An Investigation into the Original Elements of Heidegger’s Philosophy” legitimized Søren Kierkegaard in French academia and inaugurated French existentialism as such.¹ First published in 1932/1933 in
Recherches Philosophiques, “perhaps the most significant [journal] of its time,”² it was republished in 1938 as an appendix toÉtudes kierkegaardiennes, which would go on to become the most important book on Kierkegaard in France. Wahl’s article laid the groundwork for the anthropological, humanist reading of Martin Heidegger by showing how Heidegger’s philosophy must be seen as an attempt to ontologize
6 The Problem of Choice: from:
Transcendence and the Concrete
Author(s) Davidson Scott
Abstract: One of the reasons Alexandre Koyré, Henri-Charles Puech, and Albert Spaier founded the journal
Recherches Philosophiquesin 1931 was because, at the time, more established journals like theRevue de Métaphysique et de Moralewere reluctant to publish articles characteristic of what Jean Wahl aptly named, in the lead article of the inaugural issue ofRecherches Philosophiques, the turn “toward the concrete.” It accordingly gave aspiring philosophers the opportunity to discuss and advance movements such as phenomenology and the philosophy of existence.¹ While Wahl did publish extensively inRecherches Philosophiques(see Chapters 2 and 5 in this volume), he was
13 Gilles Deleuze and the Sublime Fold of Religion from:
Rethinking Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Crockett Clayton
Abstract: In many ways, the possibilities for contemporary philosophical and theological thinking have been determined by Kant. Whether explicitly or implicitly, religion has been thought consistently either within, along, or beyond the limits legislated by classical modern reason. At the same time, its status has remained problematic, because it was left out of the fundamental sources of human knowledge according to Kant’s critique. Although he essentially appended religion onto morality, since that time, religion has flirted with and been skirted by scientific theoretical knowledge, ethics, and aesthetics. In his
Theology of Culture,Paul Tillich has eloquently described this dilemma, and his
13 Gilles Deleuze and the Sublime Fold of Religion from:
Rethinking Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Crockett Clayton
Abstract: In many ways, the possibilities for contemporary philosophical and theological thinking have been determined by Kant. Whether explicitly or implicitly, religion has been thought consistently either within, along, or beyond the limits legislated by classical modern reason. At the same time, its status has remained problematic, because it was left out of the fundamental sources of human knowledge according to Kant’s critique. Although he essentially appended religion onto morality, since that time, religion has flirted with and been skirted by scientific theoretical knowledge, ethics, and aesthetics. In his
Theology of Culture,Paul Tillich has eloquently described this dilemma, and his
13 Gilles Deleuze and the Sublime Fold of Religion from:
Rethinking Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Crockett Clayton
Abstract: In many ways, the possibilities for contemporary philosophical and theological thinking have been determined by Kant. Whether explicitly or implicitly, religion has been thought consistently either within, along, or beyond the limits legislated by classical modern reason. At the same time, its status has remained problematic, because it was left out of the fundamental sources of human knowledge according to Kant’s critique. Although he essentially appended religion onto morality, since that time, religion has flirted with and been skirted by scientific theoretical knowledge, ethics, and aesthetics. In his
Theology of Culture,Paul Tillich has eloquently described this dilemma, and his
Book Title: How John Works-Storytelling in the Fourth Gospel
Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Sheridan Ruth
Abstract: In this book, a group of international scholars go in detail to explain how the author of the Gospel of John uses a variety of narrative strategies to best tell his story. More than a commentary, this book offers a glimpse at the way an ancient author created and used narrative features such as genre, character, style, persuasion, and even time and space to shape a dramatic story of the life of Jesus.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1g69w8s
2 Style from:
How John Works
Author(s) Nässelqvist Dan
Abstract: Style has been a feature of the study of the Fourth Gospel for a long time. It has rarely been examined on its own terms, however; primarily, it has been used in a supporting function within source-critical research. This application of style focuses upon identifying and demarcating sources in and behind the text in its current form. The idea is that some parts of the Fourth Gospel exhibit a style that is inconsistent with the prevalent style of the Fourth Evangelist. In the history of source criticism, stylistic features have thus been used to prove (or, by critics, to disprove)
3 Time from:
How John Works
Author(s) Estes Douglas
Abstract: Narratives need time to tell their stories. In fact, without time, a narrative is not a narrative. This is because in order to tell a story, the storyteller must relay to the hearer or reader at least one process or event. For example, “Everett” is not a narrative. “Everett walks” is not much of a narrative, though the present tense “walks” in English implies a motion that occurs in time. A better narrative would be, “Everett drove the car to the store, picked up groceries, and came home.” This is the beginning of a “real” narrative because it entails multiple
15 Culture from:
How John Works
Author(s) Hill Charles E.
Abstract: As even the casual reader knows, there is something different about John’s Gospel. No, there are lots of things about it that are different. Many of the literary traits that help make John’s Gospel what it is and which serve to differentiate it from other books and even from other gospels have been identified and explored in the present volume. Genre, style, time and space, imagery, characterization, protagonist, plot, point of view, use of Scripture, rhetoric, persuasion, closure, audience: each plays a part in shaping the story of the gospel, helping to reveal “how John works.”
Book Title: How John Works-Storytelling in the Fourth Gospel
Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Sheridan Ruth
Abstract: In this book, a group of international scholars go in detail to explain how the author of the Gospel of John uses a variety of narrative strategies to best tell his story. More than a commentary, this book offers a glimpse at the way an ancient author created and used narrative features such as genre, character, style, persuasion, and even time and space to shape a dramatic story of the life of Jesus.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1g69w8s
2 Style from:
How John Works
Author(s) Nässelqvist Dan
Abstract: Style has been a feature of the study of the Fourth Gospel for a long time. It has rarely been examined on its own terms, however; primarily, it has been used in a supporting function within source-critical research. This application of style focuses upon identifying and demarcating sources in and behind the text in its current form. The idea is that some parts of the Fourth Gospel exhibit a style that is inconsistent with the prevalent style of the Fourth Evangelist. In the history of source criticism, stylistic features have thus been used to prove (or, by critics, to disprove)
3 Time from:
How John Works
Author(s) Estes Douglas
Abstract: Narratives need time to tell their stories. In fact, without time, a narrative is not a narrative. This is because in order to tell a story, the storyteller must relay to the hearer or reader at least one process or event. For example, “Everett” is not a narrative. “Everett walks” is not much of a narrative, though the present tense “walks” in English implies a motion that occurs in time. A better narrative would be, “Everett drove the car to the store, picked up groceries, and came home.” This is the beginning of a “real” narrative because it entails multiple
15 Culture from:
How John Works
Author(s) Hill Charles E.
Abstract: As even the casual reader knows, there is something different about John’s Gospel. No, there are lots of things about it that are different. Many of the literary traits that help make John’s Gospel what it is and which serve to differentiate it from other books and even from other gospels have been identified and explored in the present volume. Genre, style, time and space, imagery, characterization, protagonist, plot, point of view, use of Scripture, rhetoric, persuasion, closure, audience: each plays a part in shaping the story of the gospel, helping to reveal “how John works.”
10 A Beginning Given in Advance from:
The Gift of Love
Abstract: “It is a question of beginning where one is, as Derrida tells us,” John Caputo observes, “not where God is, we may add.”¹ To begin where we are—indeed little more can be asked of us. But to know where we are as readers of Augustine—to know where we stand when encountering a mind across the distances of time and culture, and across the personal (although for the author of
Confessions, not private) distance between ourselves and this particular man’s restless struggle to know and love the God whose call broke through his deafness and whose radiance dispelled his
10 A Beginning Given in Advance from:
The Gift of Love
Abstract: “It is a question of beginning where one is, as Derrida tells us,” John Caputo observes, “not where God is, we may add.”¹ To begin where we are—indeed little more can be asked of us. But to know where we are as readers of Augustine—to know where we stand when encountering a mind across the distances of time and culture, and across the personal (although for the author of
Confessions, not private) distance between ourselves and this particular man’s restless struggle to know and love the God whose call broke through his deafness and whose radiance dispelled his
Introduction from:
Acting for Others
Abstract: After the dissolution of Christendom in Europe, churches in the West lost their political power, authority, and sometimes, their voice. Bonhoeffer characterized this development as a part of a breakdown of the unity of the West, accompanied by the loss of structures, authority, and orientation in the world. He thought it was a time with no future and no past.³ In Arendt’s view, this situation places us
Introduction from:
Acting for Others
Abstract: After the dissolution of Christendom in Europe, churches in the West lost their political power, authority, and sometimes, their voice. Bonhoeffer characterized this development as a part of a breakdown of the unity of the West, accompanied by the loss of structures, authority, and orientation in the world. He thought it was a time with no future and no past.³ In Arendt’s view, this situation places us
10 Placed with Care: from:
An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Aulsebrook Stephanie
Abstract: Vessels manufactured from metal appear in a geographically-wide distribution of Late Bronze Age deposits across the southern Greek mainland,
c.1700–1200 BC, although they remain relatively rare in the archaeological record. Their decoration required additional crafting time, labour and skill, altering their appearance and changing the interactions between the individual user, the vessel, and other participants within their context of use. Much emphasis has been placed within the discipline of archaeology on the communicative aspects of material culture (cf. Shanks and Tilley 1987, 97, 117; Kenoyer 2000, 91; for a more nuanced approach Meskell 2005, 2), but less attention
15 Lithics and Identity at the Middle Palaeolithic site of Lakonis Cave I, Southern Peloponnese, Greece from:
An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Panagopoulou Eleni
Abstract: Recent developments in the study of Palaeolithic society have emphasised the need to adopt a more comprehensive approach to the interpretation of human behaviour by taking into consideration various scales of analysis, encompassing both time and space. These scales of analysis can include individuals interacting for only a few hours in the course of a brief encounter, to larger groups and for longer periods, in the context of complex social networks within extended spatial units (Gamble 1999, 67–8). The study of individuals in particular, has generally been regarded as beyond the resolution of the Palaeolithic record (Clark 1992, 107),
17 The Embodiment of Land Ownership in the Aegean Early Bronze Age from:
An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Kouka Ourania
Abstract: Following the aforementioned definition, which corresponds also to theoretical approaches of embodiment and its perception (Merleau-Ponty 1964, 159–90; Lesure 2005), it is argued that the built environment demonstrates from prehistoric times an anthropogenic system of closed and open spaces for hosting every-day life, economic, social and symbolic activities. It represents, therefore, an agent through which the needs, abilities and habits of humans are embodied, but also the field for economic and social interaction. Moreover, built environment — domestic, funeral, and sacred — displays the existential ground of culture that allows the identification of its cognitive creator and owner.
27 Burning People, Breaking Things: from:
An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Whitley James
Abstract: The context is the
Odyssey, where Odysseus is disguised as a beggar in his own palace in Ithaka, and recalls a worse time, when he was in Polyphemos’ cave. Johnson was indicating that he had indeed found the job of mayor trying — but that he had seen worse [κύντερον] — and he mustn’t
Book Title: Marxism and Form-20th-Century Dialectical Theories of Literature
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): SARTRE JEAN-PAUL
Abstract: For more than thirty years, Fredric Jameson has been one of the most productive, wide-ranging, and distinctive literary theorists in the United States and the Anglophone world. Marxism and Form provided a pioneering account of the work of the major European Marxist theorists--T. W. Adorno, Walter Benjamin, Herbert Marcuse, Ernst Bloch, Georg Lukács, and Jean-Paul Sartre--work that was, at the time, largely neglected in the English-speaking world. Through penetrating readings of each theorist, Jameson developed a critical mode of engagement that has had tremendous in.uence. He provided a framework for analyzing the connection between art and the historical circumstances of its making--in particular, how cultural artifacts distort, repress, or transform their circumstances through the abstractions of aesthetic form.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ggjkw6
5 Narrative Resemblance and the Modernist Photobook from:
The Chatter of the Visible
Abstract: It would be difficult to overstate the impact of technologies of mechanical reproduction on the visual culture of Weimar Germany, as a flood of images from photography and film upended conventional models of cultural literacy following the media boom of the early 1920s. Within this context film has attracted far greater attention than photography because of its explosive potential as a mimetic medium that can convey a sense of unfolding time and engender fresh modes of collective reception. Yet the photographic image was an even more ubiquitous and flexible instrument of visual dissemination because of the unprecedented proliferation of newspapers
CHAPTER 3 Over the Influence from:
The Muses on Their Lunch Hour
Abstract: Sometimes a term or phrase becomes so culturally powerful that it dislocates completely from its initial context. The various deformations of “deconstruction” are a case in point. Long after Jacques Derrida, headlines in the
New York Timesnow routinely use—or misuse—the term: Recent examples include “Deconstructing a Demagogue” (on Newt Gingrich), “‘Diva’? Deconstructing Pop Images of Black Women” (a panel discussion at the Brooklyn Museum), and “Deconstructing the Perfect Burger” (use a cast-iron pan and an 80–20 ratio of fat to lean).¹ Harold Bloom’s phrase “the anxiety of influence” has enjoyed—or suffered—a similar fate. “Beware
CHAPTER 4 Fig Leaves from:
The Muses on Their Lunch Hour
Abstract: Where do dead metaphors go when they die? And why should we care? Consider the case of the fig leaf, a term that once, and not all that long ago, had a fairly secure referent, both in the Bible and in the history of art. But somewhere along the way the image—and the reference—parted company with the figure of speech. “Fig leaf ” today means something, for sure. Journalists use it all the time, and it is often to be found in newspaper headlines. But
whatit means is oddly distinct fromhowit means. Today’s fig leaves
Introduction from:
Assia Djebar
Abstract: Assia Djebar: Out of Algeriais a book about expatriation, and the constant, necessary revisiting that follows. Algeria remains a focus, an object of desire throughout Djebar’s corpus, but it is also a point of departure, and excludes the writer more often than it grounds or defines her. Her only locus of identification or belonging, Algeria is at the same time figured as broken, war-torn, unfamiliar and irrevocably lost. A potential symbol of difference in contradistinction to colonial influence, Djebar’s Algeria is also diverse, divided and ultimately destroyed. Driven by the urge to recover her country’s history, Djebar repeatedly returns
CHAPTER ONE The Early Years from:
Assia Djebar
Abstract: Assia Djebar wrote four novels during the first phase of her career between 1957 and 1967. After leaving the Ecole normale supérieure at Sèvres during the war of independence, she worked for the national newspaper
El moudjahidconducting interviews with Algerian refugees in Tunis and Morocco, before going on to teach history in Rabat and later in Algiers. The novels consist at this stage in a form of experimentation, and the period can be seen as one of apprenticeship in the strategies and techniques of writing. At times highly naive and a little self-indulgent, Djebar’s early novels set out to
Conclusion from:
Assia Djebar
Abstract: Djebar’s trajectory and development as a writer can be conceived as a gradual movement away from any specific form of identification with Algeria towards a new configuration of her native land as severed, diverse and haunted by its past. The lingering traces of a search for the specific in the earlier works give way, by the time of
La Femme sans sépultureandLa Disparition, to a depiction of Algeria’s culture, language and history as intractable or spectral – present but impossible to grasp. It is in this sense that her writing constitutes a hesitant ‘expatriation’, a movement outside the
Introduction: from:
Science Fiction Double Feature
Author(s) Telotte J. P.
Abstract: The most well-known, and certainly the most frequently discussed cult film,
The Rocky Horror Picture Show(1975), opens with an arresting image, a close-up of bright red lips mouthing the film’s theme song, “Science Fiction Double Feature.” Both image and song have become practically iconic—emblems of the cult film, signs of its generally transgressive, sometimes campy nature, celebrations of the way such films, in contrast to most traditional Hollywood cinema, seem to directly address their audience, even, as Timothy Corrigan allusively puts it, placing them “oddly inscribed” within the film text (34). WhileRocky Horror—the film—no longer
4. Sean Connery Reconfigured: from:
Science Fiction Double Feature
Author(s) Duchovnay Gerald
Abstract: While histories of cinema, especially US cinema, typically discuss the development of the star system, only in recent decades has much attention been paid to actors as performers, and still less attention is given to actors as cult performers. As Wade Jennings observes, compared to regular stardom, “Cult stardom is a relatively recent phenomenon,” and one that, “over time … can emerge as a quite different phenomenon” (90). Exploring the discourses related to this “different phenomenon,” Matt Hills notes how, “across their lifetime, some cult stars become hemmed in by their most famous roles (where a specific character has taken
7. Iron Sky’s War Bonds: from:
Science Fiction Double Feature
Author(s) Tryon Chuck
Abstract: In February 2012, after six years of planning, fundraising, and production, the sf film
Iron Skypremiered at the Berlin Film Festival. AlthoughIron Skyfeatured a provocative plot—one in which Nazis who had been hiding on the dark side of the moon return to earth in the year 2018—along with a couple of familiar international stars, including German actor Udo Kier, and a soundtrack by the Slovenian avant-garde band Laibach, the film was discussed most frequently because of its unusual production history, which involved the contributions of thousands of fans and followers who donated time and money
10. Robot Monster and the “Watchable … Terrible” Cult/SF Film from:
Science Fiction Double Feature
Author(s) Telotte J. P.
Abstract: As Lincoln Geraghty reminds us, early 1950s sf cinema, typified by films like
The Day the Earth Stood Still(1951),The Thing(1951),Invaders from Mars(1953), andWar of the Worlds(1953), was often marked by a rather serious tone and effect, presenting “America and the world in the grip of emergencies … that jeopardized the future of the [human] race” (23). Despite their sometimes strange monsters and strained plots, the “emergency” visions in these films urged audiences to contemplate the trajectory of their newly atomic-driven world, to reconsider the tense and potentially destructive relations between nations, or, simply,
13. “Lack of Respect, Wrong Attitude, Failure to Obey Authority”: from:
Science Fiction Double Feature
Author(s) Latham Rob
Abstract: Stanley Kubrick’s 1968 film
2001: A Space Odysseywas acause célèbrewithin the sf genre, dividing Old Guard fans, who deplored the film-maker’s purported contempt for reason and scientific inquiry, from younger fans aligned with contemporary counterculture, who embraced its trippy imagery, its fusion of science and mysticism, and its tone of apocalyptic transcendence. At the time of its release,2001became a kind of litmus test of fan sentiment towards the New Wave movement, a rising sf avant-garde that sought to remake a genre traditionally inclined towards technocratic scientism and conservative narrative style into a more experimental, counterculturally
Book Title: Patrick Chamoiseau-Recovering Memory
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): FORSDICK CHARLES
Abstract: This timely new book skilfully examines the work of the award-winning writer Patrick Chamoiseau. Considered by many as one of the most innovative writers to hit the French literary scene in over 40 years, Chamoiseau made his name with his book Texaco (published in 1992 and winner of the highest literary prize in France, the Prix Goncourt). His books have gone on to sell millions and his work has been translated by a number of academic presses. McCusker sets the author in context, providing a valuable contribution to ‘memory studies’ by looking at literary representation of memory in Martinique, a society founded on slavery but now politically assimilated to the metropolitan centre, France.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1gn6cf5
CHAPTER 5 Flesh Made Word: from:
Patrick Chamoiseau
Abstract: This study began with a reading of Chamoiseau’s first novel,
Chronique des sept misères, and reaches its end with his most recent, and most ambitious, to date,Biblique des derniers gestes(2002).¹ The striking similarity in the very titles of the two texts gestures towards a continuity of thematic preoccupation, and indeed of structure, across theœuvreas a whole. This coherence can be seen for example in the fact thatBiblique, likeTexacoandSolibo, opens in the debased contemporary present, and then projects back in time, uncovering a more vital, if painful, Creole past. The novel’s hero, Balthazar
CHAPTER SEVEN Being a Woman: from:
Patrick Modiano
Abstract: In Modiano’s novels of the seventies, eighties and early nineties, the young female characters tended not to be very developed, broadly speaking: they were fairly generic ‘mystery women’ who attracted the young male narrator, often leading him to make undesirable acquaintances, and then disappearing without explanation, breaking his heart and giving him a reason to write about the experience. They were often a little, at times much, older than him, and their lives subordinate to that of the male narrator, both in narrative terms—that is to say, they were never narrators—and in terms of sheer content. But this
CHAPTER EIGHT Being Eternal: from:
Patrick Modiano
Abstract: As I discussed in Chapter 6 of this book, the ‘sameness’ of Modiano’s novels is a characteristic that seems to stem from a variety of reasons, with equally various effects. Sometimes seen as a result of certain autobiographical compulsions,¹ it is a quality of which the author himself cannot be unaware, and which indeed he has been seen to parody in an arguably postmodern acknowledgement of both the ‘Modiano novel’ and correspondingly typical ‘Modiano criticism’.² On the levels of structure, themes, tone and atmosphere, his most recent books have remained eminently recognisable as ‘Modiano novels’, so much so that a
CHAPTER SEVEN Being a Woman: from:
Patrick Modiano
Abstract: In Modiano’s novels of the seventies, eighties and early nineties, the young female characters tended not to be very developed, broadly speaking: they were fairly generic ‘mystery women’ who attracted the young male narrator, often leading him to make undesirable acquaintances, and then disappearing without explanation, breaking his heart and giving him a reason to write about the experience. They were often a little, at times much, older than him, and their lives subordinate to that of the male narrator, both in narrative terms—that is to say, they were never narrators—and in terms of sheer content. But this
CHAPTER EIGHT Being Eternal: from:
Patrick Modiano
Abstract: As I discussed in Chapter 6 of this book, the ‘sameness’ of Modiano’s novels is a characteristic that seems to stem from a variety of reasons, with equally various effects. Sometimes seen as a result of certain autobiographical compulsions,¹ it is a quality of which the author himself cannot be unaware, and which indeed he has been seen to parody in an arguably postmodern acknowledgement of both the ‘Modiano novel’ and correspondingly typical ‘Modiano criticism’.² On the levels of structure, themes, tone and atmosphere, his most recent books have remained eminently recognisable as ‘Modiano novels’, so much so that a
CHAPTER SEVEN Being a Woman: from:
Patrick Modiano
Abstract: In Modiano’s novels of the seventies, eighties and early nineties, the young female characters tended not to be very developed, broadly speaking: they were fairly generic ‘mystery women’ who attracted the young male narrator, often leading him to make undesirable acquaintances, and then disappearing without explanation, breaking his heart and giving him a reason to write about the experience. They were often a little, at times much, older than him, and their lives subordinate to that of the male narrator, both in narrative terms—that is to say, they were never narrators—and in terms of sheer content. But this
CHAPTER EIGHT Being Eternal: from:
Patrick Modiano
Abstract: As I discussed in Chapter 6 of this book, the ‘sameness’ of Modiano’s novels is a characteristic that seems to stem from a variety of reasons, with equally various effects. Sometimes seen as a result of certain autobiographical compulsions,¹ it is a quality of which the author himself cannot be unaware, and which indeed he has been seen to parody in an arguably postmodern acknowledgement of both the ‘Modiano novel’ and correspondingly typical ‘Modiano criticism’.² On the levels of structure, themes, tone and atmosphere, his most recent books have remained eminently recognisable as ‘Modiano novels’, so much so that a
Haiti and the Memorial Discourses of Slavery after 1804 from:
At the Limits of Memory
Author(s) Hodgson Kate
Abstract: Of all of the countries of the Americas, the people of Haiti have to go the furthest back in time to access collectively the ‘souvenirs amers’ [‘bitter memories’] of colonial slavery. The beginning of the end of plantation slavery in the Americas occurred there, in August 1791, when a mass revolt broke out across the northern plain of what was then the French colony of Saint Domingue. Hundreds of sugar and coffee plantations were razed to the ground, and the de facto end of slavery began, as the former slaves-turned-revolutionaries deserted the ruins, forming rebel camps in the hills. By
Haiti and the Memorial Discourses of Slavery after 1804 from:
At the Limits of Memory
Author(s) Hodgson Kate
Abstract: Of all of the countries of the Americas, the people of Haiti have to go the furthest back in time to access collectively the ‘souvenirs amers’ [‘bitter memories’] of colonial slavery. The beginning of the end of plantation slavery in the Americas occurred there, in August 1791, when a mass revolt broke out across the northern plain of what was then the French colony of Saint Domingue. Hundreds of sugar and coffee plantations were razed to the ground, and the de facto end of slavery began, as the former slaves-turned-revolutionaries deserted the ruins, forming rebel camps in the hills. By
Haiti and the Memorial Discourses of Slavery after 1804 from:
At the Limits of Memory
Author(s) Hodgson Kate
Abstract: Of all of the countries of the Americas, the people of Haiti have to go the furthest back in time to access collectively the ‘souvenirs amers’ [‘bitter memories’] of colonial slavery. The beginning of the end of plantation slavery in the Americas occurred there, in August 1791, when a mass revolt broke out across the northern plain of what was then the French colony of Saint Domingue. Hundreds of sugar and coffee plantations were razed to the ground, and the de facto end of slavery began, as the former slaves-turned-revolutionaries deserted the ruins, forming rebel camps in the hills. By
Haiti and the Memorial Discourses of Slavery after 1804 from:
At the Limits of Memory
Author(s) Hodgson Kate
Abstract: Of all of the countries of the Americas, the people of Haiti have to go the furthest back in time to access collectively the ‘souvenirs amers’ [‘bitter memories’] of colonial slavery. The beginning of the end of plantation slavery in the Americas occurred there, in August 1791, when a mass revolt broke out across the northern plain of what was then the French colony of Saint Domingue. Hundreds of sugar and coffee plantations were razed to the ground, and the de facto end of slavery began, as the former slaves-turned-revolutionaries deserted the ruins, forming rebel camps in the hills. By
Haiti and the Memorial Discourses of Slavery after 1804 from:
At the Limits of Memory
Author(s) Hodgson Kate
Abstract: Of all of the countries of the Americas, the people of Haiti have to go the furthest back in time to access collectively the ‘souvenirs amers’ [‘bitter memories’] of colonial slavery. The beginning of the end of plantation slavery in the Americas occurred there, in August 1791, when a mass revolt broke out across the northern plain of what was then the French colony of Saint Domingue. Hundreds of sugar and coffee plantations were razed to the ground, and the de facto end of slavery began, as the former slaves-turned-revolutionaries deserted the ruins, forming rebel camps in the hills. By
Tell Me Lies, and Show Me Invisible Images! Adorno’s Criticism on Film – Revisited from:
Theodor W. Adorno: Truth and Dialectical Experience / Verità ed esperienza dialettica
Author(s) Früchtl Josef
Abstract: “Enlightenment as Mass Deception”. This is the subtitle of the chapter “The Culture Industry” in Adorno and Horkheimer’s
Dialectic of Enlightenment. Their theory is as follows: while culture in bourgeois society cannot be free from the contradictions which characterise this society in accordance with Hegel and Marx, nevertheless at the same time, capturing the moment of the negative and critical in its “affirmative character”, as Hork-heimer and then Herbert Marcuse put it, industrially produced culture loses even this last element of the critical and becomes completely affirmative. Thus, culture industry loses its immanent dialectic. However, the culture industry still claims
Chapter 3 THE WAR AGAINST THE WAR: from:
Sixties Radicalism and Social Movement Activism
Author(s) Cardina Miguel
Abstract: If the slogan ‘make love, not war’ became a constantly evoked symbol of the kind of protest generated in the ‘long sixties’ (Jameson 1984; Marwick 1998, 16–20), the fact is that the attitudes and discourses that originated in this period have not always corresponded to this pacifist image, at times understood retrospectively as parodic, individualistic and carefree. In different times and places, at a gradually more intense pace, the new youth culture introduced profound changes in the fields of customs, taste and morality, and set in motion modes of daring and resistance which often evolved towards open confrontation with
Chapter 11 CARRYING THE FLAME FORWARD: from:
Sixties Radicalism and Social Movement Activism
Author(s) McKechnie Rosemary
Abstract: Where have the revolutions gone? What happens with the passion of the day once movements are no longer publicly visible – what does it transform into? And what are the lessons learned? Our concern in this chapter is to critically examine the idealism of political movements following the moment of 1968, by listening to the voices of adults who have been engaged in a range of activist projects over their lifetime. Our discussion is founded on in-depth life story interviews with adults in the UK, however to contextualize and analyse this material we draw on theories about new social movements
Book Title: Modern European Tragedy-Exploring Crucial Plays
Publisher: Anthem Press
Author(s): CASCETTA ANNAMARIA
Abstract: The idea of the tragic has permeated Western culture for millennia, and has been expressed theatrically since the time of the ancient Greeks. However, it was in the Europe of the twentieth century – one of the most violent periods of human history – that the tragic form significantly developed. ‘Modern European Tragedy’ examines the consciousness of this era, drawing a picture of the development of the tragic through an in-depth analysis of some of the twentieth century’s most outstanding texts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1gxp8qf
Chapter 5 THE TRAGIC AND THE ABSURD: from:
Modern European Tragedy
Author(s) CAMUS ALBERT
Abstract: A great writer and an outstanding moral figure of the twentieth century was responsible for the next text we are to analyse:
Caligulaby Albert Camus. Hannah Arendt, writing to her husband from Paris, described him as ‘the best man in France’. Yet in his lifetime the novelist, a nobel laureate, beloved of thousands of readers, remained, as is well known, at times isolated and unheeded in a period of ideological conflicts, of opposed blocs and themaîtres à penserof the century. Today, however, a revaluation is rightly under way. His moral authority, lucidity, courage and intellectual substance are
FOREWORD from:
Knowledge and Human Liberation
Author(s) Clammer John
Abstract: This valuable volume brings together in one place for the first time a number of essays by one of India’s (and indeed international sociology’s) most innovative thinkers, and one moreover who is committed to erasing the boundaries between social theory and practice. Essentially what is suggested in the following pages is an approach to social knowledge and to positive social transformation that transcends the normal boundaries that so commonly separate sociology from philosophy and both from religion and spirituality. To a great extent the social sciences have failed to deliver on their Enlightenment promises. Perhaps this was too much to
Chapter Fourteen CIVIL SOCIETY AND THE CALLING OF SELF-DEVELOPMENT from:
Knowledge and Human Liberation
Abstract: It is Jürgen Habermas (1981) himself who quite some time ago had challenged us that now we need a new philosophy of science which is not scientistic. It is worth asking Habermas, and all of us sociologists for whom sociological engagement is nothing more than an elaboration of the agenda of modernity, whether we need an understanding of and relationship with modernity which is not modernistic. This inquiry is at the core of understanding paths of civil society and experiments with modernities, not only in India but also in Europe, East Asia, Africa, Latin America and around the world. Both
Chapter 5 THE ENGAGEMENT OF PHILOSOPHY AND ANTHROPOLOGY IN THE INTERPRETIVE TURN AND BEYOND: from:
Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Kämpf Heike
Abstract: One of the most interesting and fruitful anthropological discussions of philosophy occurred within the so-called ‘interpretive turn’ in anthropology. This turn was inspired by philosophy and initiated a reconsideration of philosophical concepts. In particular, the reconsideration of the hermeneutic notion of ‘ understanding’ led to new anthropological readings of the works of Martin Heidegger, Hans-Georg Gadamer and Paul Ricoeur. At the same time this anthropological discussion had its impact on philosophy. On the one hand, hermeneutic and analytic philosophy came closer together while questioning the possibilities of understanding alien cultures: Peter Winch and Richard Rorty dealt with the problem of
Chapter 11 GROUND, SELF, SIGN: from:
Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Kjaerholm Lars
Abstract: Far more than a theory of signs, Peirce’s semiotics is also an attempt to summarize ontology as seen in his time and in the Kantian tradition in which he is situated. The concepts of
firstness, secondnessandthirdnesssum up the forms and conditions under which anything can exist, within the framework of the ontological tradition that Peirce belonged to. Peirce has various ways of defining Firstness. It is ‘what the world was to Adam on the day he opened his eyes, before he had even drawn distinctions, or had become conscious of his own existence’ (1.357). This makes Peirce’s
Chapter 20 NOTIONS OF FRIENDSHIP IN PHILOSOPHICAL AND ANTHROPOLOGICAL THOUGHT from:
Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Friese Heidrun
Abstract: Within the Western philosophical tradition, the notion of friendship indicates relations to the
self, anotherand the politicalcommunity. It is a practice constituting subjectivity, personal, partial and particularistic bonds, and at the same time it articulates specific moral/ethical expectations of behaviour and universalistic demands.¹ Friendship fosters goodness, reciprocity and generosity, entails mutual trust, solidarity and cooperation. Thus, it creates both social ties and is related to the political order of a community, its ethical prerequisites and the ways in which common matters are negotiated.
Afterword from:
Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Dallmayr Fred
Abstract: As is well known, and as the editors emphasize, the topic of philosophical anthropology has fallen on hard times in recent decades, to the point that it virtually ceased to occupy the attention of both philosophers and professional anthropologists. This neglect stands in stark contrast to the situation prevailing in Europe in the early and middle part of the last century, which can be described as the heyday of philosophical anthropology.¹ The basic aim of the present volume is to rescue the topic from oblivion, and more specifically to recover the older European legacy while transforming it in the light
Chapter 5 THE ENGAGEMENT OF PHILOSOPHY AND ANTHROPOLOGY IN THE INTERPRETIVE TURN AND BEYOND: from:
Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Kämpf Heike
Abstract: One of the most interesting and fruitful anthropological discussions of philosophy occurred within the so-called ‘interpretive turn’ in anthropology. This turn was inspired by philosophy and initiated a reconsideration of philosophical concepts. In particular, the reconsideration of the hermeneutic notion of ‘ understanding’ led to new anthropological readings of the works of Martin Heidegger, Hans-Georg Gadamer and Paul Ricoeur. At the same time this anthropological discussion had its impact on philosophy. On the one hand, hermeneutic and analytic philosophy came closer together while questioning the possibilities of understanding alien cultures: Peter Winch and Richard Rorty dealt with the problem of
Chapter 11 GROUND, SELF, SIGN: from:
Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Kjaerholm Lars
Abstract: Far more than a theory of signs, Peirce’s semiotics is also an attempt to summarize ontology as seen in his time and in the Kantian tradition in which he is situated. The concepts of
firstness, secondnessandthirdnesssum up the forms and conditions under which anything can exist, within the framework of the ontological tradition that Peirce belonged to. Peirce has various ways of defining Firstness. It is ‘what the world was to Adam on the day he opened his eyes, before he had even drawn distinctions, or had become conscious of his own existence’ (1.357). This makes Peirce’s
Chapter 20 NOTIONS OF FRIENDSHIP IN PHILOSOPHICAL AND ANTHROPOLOGICAL THOUGHT from:
Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Friese Heidrun
Abstract: Within the Western philosophical tradition, the notion of friendship indicates relations to the
self, anotherand the politicalcommunity. It is a practice constituting subjectivity, personal, partial and particularistic bonds, and at the same time it articulates specific moral/ethical expectations of behaviour and universalistic demands.¹ Friendship fosters goodness, reciprocity and generosity, entails mutual trust, solidarity and cooperation. Thus, it creates both social ties and is related to the political order of a community, its ethical prerequisites and the ways in which common matters are negotiated.
Afterword from:
Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Dallmayr Fred
Abstract: As is well known, and as the editors emphasize, the topic of philosophical anthropology has fallen on hard times in recent decades, to the point that it virtually ceased to occupy the attention of both philosophers and professional anthropologists. This neglect stands in stark contrast to the situation prevailing in Europe in the early and middle part of the last century, which can be described as the heyday of philosophical anthropology.¹ The basic aim of the present volume is to rescue the topic from oblivion, and more specifically to recover the older European legacy while transforming it in the light
Chapter 5 THE ENGAGEMENT OF PHILOSOPHY AND ANTHROPOLOGY IN THE INTERPRETIVE TURN AND BEYOND: from:
Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Kämpf Heike
Abstract: One of the most interesting and fruitful anthropological discussions of philosophy occurred within the so-called ‘interpretive turn’ in anthropology. This turn was inspired by philosophy and initiated a reconsideration of philosophical concepts. In particular, the reconsideration of the hermeneutic notion of ‘ understanding’ led to new anthropological readings of the works of Martin Heidegger, Hans-Georg Gadamer and Paul Ricoeur. At the same time this anthropological discussion had its impact on philosophy. On the one hand, hermeneutic and analytic philosophy came closer together while questioning the possibilities of understanding alien cultures: Peter Winch and Richard Rorty dealt with the problem of
Chapter 11 GROUND, SELF, SIGN: from:
Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Kjaerholm Lars
Abstract: Far more than a theory of signs, Peirce’s semiotics is also an attempt to summarize ontology as seen in his time and in the Kantian tradition in which he is situated. The concepts of
firstness, secondnessandthirdnesssum up the forms and conditions under which anything can exist, within the framework of the ontological tradition that Peirce belonged to. Peirce has various ways of defining Firstness. It is ‘what the world was to Adam on the day he opened his eyes, before he had even drawn distinctions, or had become conscious of his own existence’ (1.357). This makes Peirce’s
Chapter 20 NOTIONS OF FRIENDSHIP IN PHILOSOPHICAL AND ANTHROPOLOGICAL THOUGHT from:
Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Friese Heidrun
Abstract: Within the Western philosophical tradition, the notion of friendship indicates relations to the
self, anotherand the politicalcommunity. It is a practice constituting subjectivity, personal, partial and particularistic bonds, and at the same time it articulates specific moral/ethical expectations of behaviour and universalistic demands.¹ Friendship fosters goodness, reciprocity and generosity, entails mutual trust, solidarity and cooperation. Thus, it creates both social ties and is related to the political order of a community, its ethical prerequisites and the ways in which common matters are negotiated.
Afterword from:
Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Dallmayr Fred
Abstract: As is well known, and as the editors emphasize, the topic of philosophical anthropology has fallen on hard times in recent decades, to the point that it virtually ceased to occupy the attention of both philosophers and professional anthropologists. This neglect stands in stark contrast to the situation prevailing in Europe in the early and middle part of the last century, which can be described as the heyday of philosophical anthropology.¹ The basic aim of the present volume is to rescue the topic from oblivion, and more specifically to recover the older European legacy while transforming it in the light
Chapter 5 THE ENGAGEMENT OF PHILOSOPHY AND ANTHROPOLOGY IN THE INTERPRETIVE TURN AND BEYOND: from:
Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Kämpf Heike
Abstract: One of the most interesting and fruitful anthropological discussions of philosophy occurred within the so-called ‘interpretive turn’ in anthropology. This turn was inspired by philosophy and initiated a reconsideration of philosophical concepts. In particular, the reconsideration of the hermeneutic notion of ‘ understanding’ led to new anthropological readings of the works of Martin Heidegger, Hans-Georg Gadamer and Paul Ricoeur. At the same time this anthropological discussion had its impact on philosophy. On the one hand, hermeneutic and analytic philosophy came closer together while questioning the possibilities of understanding alien cultures: Peter Winch and Richard Rorty dealt with the problem of
Chapter 11 GROUND, SELF, SIGN: from:
Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Kjaerholm Lars
Abstract: Far more than a theory of signs, Peirce’s semiotics is also an attempt to summarize ontology as seen in his time and in the Kantian tradition in which he is situated. The concepts of
firstness, secondnessandthirdnesssum up the forms and conditions under which anything can exist, within the framework of the ontological tradition that Peirce belonged to. Peirce has various ways of defining Firstness. It is ‘what the world was to Adam on the day he opened his eyes, before he had even drawn distinctions, or had become conscious of his own existence’ (1.357). This makes Peirce’s
Chapter 20 NOTIONS OF FRIENDSHIP IN PHILOSOPHICAL AND ANTHROPOLOGICAL THOUGHT from:
Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Friese Heidrun
Abstract: Within the Western philosophical tradition, the notion of friendship indicates relations to the
self, anotherand the politicalcommunity. It is a practice constituting subjectivity, personal, partial and particularistic bonds, and at the same time it articulates specific moral/ethical expectations of behaviour and universalistic demands.¹ Friendship fosters goodness, reciprocity and generosity, entails mutual trust, solidarity and cooperation. Thus, it creates both social ties and is related to the political order of a community, its ethical prerequisites and the ways in which common matters are negotiated.
Afterword from:
Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Dallmayr Fred
Abstract: As is well known, and as the editors emphasize, the topic of philosophical anthropology has fallen on hard times in recent decades, to the point that it virtually ceased to occupy the attention of both philosophers and professional anthropologists. This neglect stands in stark contrast to the situation prevailing in Europe in the early and middle part of the last century, which can be described as the heyday of philosophical anthropology.¹ The basic aim of the present volume is to rescue the topic from oblivion, and more specifically to recover the older European legacy while transforming it in the light
Chapter 5 THE ENGAGEMENT OF PHILOSOPHY AND ANTHROPOLOGY IN THE INTERPRETIVE TURN AND BEYOND: from:
Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Kämpf Heike
Abstract: One of the most interesting and fruitful anthropological discussions of philosophy occurred within the so-called ‘interpretive turn’ in anthropology. This turn was inspired by philosophy and initiated a reconsideration of philosophical concepts. In particular, the reconsideration of the hermeneutic notion of ‘ understanding’ led to new anthropological readings of the works of Martin Heidegger, Hans-Georg Gadamer and Paul Ricoeur. At the same time this anthropological discussion had its impact on philosophy. On the one hand, hermeneutic and analytic philosophy came closer together while questioning the possibilities of understanding alien cultures: Peter Winch and Richard Rorty dealt with the problem of
Chapter 11 GROUND, SELF, SIGN: from:
Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Kjaerholm Lars
Abstract: Far more than a theory of signs, Peirce’s semiotics is also an attempt to summarize ontology as seen in his time and in the Kantian tradition in which he is situated. The concepts of
firstness, secondnessandthirdnesssum up the forms and conditions under which anything can exist, within the framework of the ontological tradition that Peirce belonged to. Peirce has various ways of defining Firstness. It is ‘what the world was to Adam on the day he opened his eyes, before he had even drawn distinctions, or had become conscious of his own existence’ (1.357). This makes Peirce’s
Chapter 20 NOTIONS OF FRIENDSHIP IN PHILOSOPHICAL AND ANTHROPOLOGICAL THOUGHT from:
Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Friese Heidrun
Abstract: Within the Western philosophical tradition, the notion of friendship indicates relations to the
self, anotherand the politicalcommunity. It is a practice constituting subjectivity, personal, partial and particularistic bonds, and at the same time it articulates specific moral/ethical expectations of behaviour and universalistic demands.¹ Friendship fosters goodness, reciprocity and generosity, entails mutual trust, solidarity and cooperation. Thus, it creates both social ties and is related to the political order of a community, its ethical prerequisites and the ways in which common matters are negotiated.
Afterword from:
Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Dallmayr Fred
Abstract: As is well known, and as the editors emphasize, the topic of philosophical anthropology has fallen on hard times in recent decades, to the point that it virtually ceased to occupy the attention of both philosophers and professional anthropologists. This neglect stands in stark contrast to the situation prevailing in Europe in the early and middle part of the last century, which can be described as the heyday of philosophical anthropology.¹ The basic aim of the present volume is to rescue the topic from oblivion, and more specifically to recover the older European legacy while transforming it in the light
CHAPTER 21 Luc Boltanski and the Problem of Time: from:
The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Adkins Lisa
Abstract: This chapter is concerned with issues of temporality and the programme of pragmatic sociology. It outlines a problem of time operating within this programme. This problem is identified as concerning the location of social change and the new as external to situations and events, a positioning which, I will argue, eschews the
indeterminacyandopennessof the contemporary world. I suggest further that such a positioning of the new also cannot come to grips with forms of critique that have no time, or, better said, forms of critique that have run out of time or are dispossessed of time and,
CHAPTER 21 Luc Boltanski and the Problem of Time: from:
The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Adkins Lisa
Abstract: This chapter is concerned with issues of temporality and the programme of pragmatic sociology. It outlines a problem of time operating within this programme. This problem is identified as concerning the location of social change and the new as external to situations and events, a positioning which, I will argue, eschews the
indeterminacyandopennessof the contemporary world. I suggest further that such a positioning of the new also cannot come to grips with forms of critique that have no time, or, better said, forms of critique that have run out of time or are dispossessed of time and,
CHAPTER 21 Luc Boltanski and the Problem of Time: from:
The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Adkins Lisa
Abstract: This chapter is concerned with issues of temporality and the programme of pragmatic sociology. It outlines a problem of time operating within this programme. This problem is identified as concerning the location of social change and the new as external to situations and events, a positioning which, I will argue, eschews the
indeterminacyandopennessof the contemporary world. I suggest further that such a positioning of the new also cannot come to grips with forms of critique that have no time, or, better said, forms of critique that have run out of time or are dispossessed of time and,
CHAPTER 21 Luc Boltanski and the Problem of Time: from:
The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Adkins Lisa
Abstract: This chapter is concerned with issues of temporality and the programme of pragmatic sociology. It outlines a problem of time operating within this programme. This problem is identified as concerning the location of social change and the new as external to situations and events, a positioning which, I will argue, eschews the
indeterminacyandopennessof the contemporary world. I suggest further that such a positioning of the new also cannot come to grips with forms of critique that have no time, or, better said, forms of critique that have run out of time or are dispossessed of time and,
CHAPTER 21 Luc Boltanski and the Problem of Time: from:
The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Adkins Lisa
Abstract: This chapter is concerned with issues of temporality and the programme of pragmatic sociology. It outlines a problem of time operating within this programme. This problem is identified as concerning the location of social change and the new as external to situations and events, a positioning which, I will argue, eschews the
indeterminacyandopennessof the contemporary world. I suggest further that such a positioning of the new also cannot come to grips with forms of critique that have no time, or, better said, forms of critique that have run out of time or are dispossessed of time and,
CHAPTER 21 Luc Boltanski and the Problem of Time: from:
The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Adkins Lisa
Abstract: This chapter is concerned with issues of temporality and the programme of pragmatic sociology. It outlines a problem of time operating within this programme. This problem is identified as concerning the location of social change and the new as external to situations and events, a positioning which, I will argue, eschews the
indeterminacyandopennessof the contemporary world. I suggest further that such a positioning of the new also cannot come to grips with forms of critique that have no time, or, better said, forms of critique that have run out of time or are dispossessed of time and,
CHAPTER 21 Luc Boltanski and the Problem of Time: from:
The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Adkins Lisa
Abstract: This chapter is concerned with issues of temporality and the programme of pragmatic sociology. It outlines a problem of time operating within this programme. This problem is identified as concerning the location of social change and the new as external to situations and events, a positioning which, I will argue, eschews the
indeterminacyandopennessof the contemporary world. I suggest further that such a positioning of the new also cannot come to grips with forms of critique that have no time, or, better said, forms of critique that have run out of time or are dispossessed of time and,
CHAPTER 21 Luc Boltanski and the Problem of Time: from:
The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Adkins Lisa
Abstract: This chapter is concerned with issues of temporality and the programme of pragmatic sociology. It outlines a problem of time operating within this programme. This problem is identified as concerning the location of social change and the new as external to situations and events, a positioning which, I will argue, eschews the
indeterminacyandopennessof the contemporary world. I suggest further that such a positioning of the new also cannot come to grips with forms of critique that have no time, or, better said, forms of critique that have run out of time or are dispossessed of time and,
CHAPTER FIVE With Weber Against Weber: from:
The Legacy of Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Susen Simon
Abstract: Pierre Bourdieu: I began with
Die protestantische Ethik. During that time, I was working on a book which was intended to summarise my research on Algeria. InDie protestantische Ethikthere was an abundance of things on the traditional, pre-capitalist ‘spirit’, and on economic behaviour – wonderful descriptions which were very useful and indeed quite impressive. I drew on Weber’s work in order to
CHAPTER SIX Bourdieu and Nietzsche: from:
The Legacy of Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Rahkonen Keijo
Abstract: This chapter makes a comparison, which from a sociological perspective might appear a little surprising: it is between Pierre Bourdieu’s and Friedrich Nietzsche’s respective conceptions of ‘power’ and ‘taste’. The aim is to show that there is an interesting resemblance between the two with regard to these conceptions in general, and to ‘struggle for power’, ‘ressentiment’ and ‘will to power’ in particular, and thus to shed light on some key aspects of Bourdieu’s thinking. The order of the
dramatis personaein this analysis is no accident: Bourdieu and Nietzsche. This alludes to the fact that the discussion that follows is
Chapter 1 PREFIGURATION: from:
Fabricating Authenticity in Soviet Hungary
Abstract: On 21 March 1949, the Hungarian Federation of Freedom Fighters – a Communist partisan organization which allegedly consisted of wartime anti-Nazi resistance fighters, but which was mostly a fiction to convince Hungarians of the existence of an indigenous Communist resistance movement – organized a bicycle and motorbike race around blocks of flats in Budapest. The competition was part of a set of ceremonies commemorating the proclamation of the First Hungarian Soviet Republic on 21 March 1919. The director of the Institute for Party History, László Réti, justified its appropriateness as follows: ‘We have to take care of, and improve the spirit of,
Chapter 2 RESURRECTION: from:
Fabricating Authenticity in Soviet Hungary
Abstract: Having succeeded the suppression of the revolution in October 1956, the first time that the new Communist regime evoked the events of 1919 was likely in the 21 November issue of the
Népszabadság(People’s freedom), the party’s official daily. That day the editors published a letter, which had allegedly been sent to the government by an old worker. The author of this letter first gives an account of his life spent within the labour movement since 1917. The worker writes about his sufferings and privation during the previous regime, then recalls the happy years following the end of the war.
Chapter 3 LIVES: from:
Fabricating Authenticity in Soviet Hungary
Abstract: The Hungarian ruling class developed the first European fascism by applying old and new means of oppression, thereby showing – for the first time – what fascism, which would wildly ravage Europe two decades later and drive millions of people to war, looked like. One can hardly find a characteristic feature of Hitler’s and Mussolini’s dictatorships which cannot immediately be found in the Hungarian fascism. The fear of Bolshevism, the ruthless oppression
Book Title: The Vision of the Priestly Narrative-Its Genre and Hermeneutics of Time
Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Boorer Suzanne
Abstract: Solid arguments based on genre and themes, with regard to a once separate Priestly narrative (Pg) that concludes in Numbers 27*Thorough discussion of the overall interpretation of the Priestly narrative (Pg), by bringing together consideration of its structure and genreClear illustration of how understanding the genre of the material and its hermeneutics of time is vital for interpreting Pg as a whole
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1gxxq00
4 The Paradigmatic Nature of the Scenarios within Pg’s Story of the Nation and Their Hermeneutics of Time from:
The Vision of the Priestly Narrative
Abstract: In analyzing the paradigmatic nature of Pg’s story of the nation in Exod 1–Num 27*, the core trait of this material that defines it as paradigmatic, as unfolded in chapter 3, is the way in which earlier traditions are reshaped and synthesized with unique and visionary elements into a picture, or pictures, that are in a sense timeless, or transcend time, or are relevant for all time. How this hermeneutics of time or sense of timelessness is nuanced over and above this varies between components: whether through repetition of details or stereotypical patterns that suspend or mark time; or
6 Conclusion: from:
The Vision of the Priestly Narrative
Abstract: The task of this chapter is primarily to explore what the impact of Pg as a whole might have been on its original audience of the exilic/early postexilic period. However, this chapter has a double function. It also presents an integrated summary of the conclusions reached throughout this monograph concerning the meaning of Pg as a whole, interpreted in light of its genre and hermeneutics of time, as this is an integral part of unfolding how Pg might have functioned for its original audience (and indeed perhaps its ongoing readership). Exploring the possible effect Pg might have had on its
Book Title: Bible through the Lens of Trauma- Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Frechette Christopher G.
Abstract: In recent years there has been a surge of interest in trauma, trauma theory, and its application to the biblical text. This collection of essays explores the usefulness of using trauma theory as a lens through which to read the biblical texts. Each of the essays explores the concept of how trauma might be defined and applied in biblical studies. Using a range of different but intersection theories of trauma, the essays reflect on the value of trauma studies for offering new insights into the biblical text. Including contributions from biblical scholars, as well as systematic and pastoral theologians, this book provides a timely critical reflection on this emerging discussion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1h1htfd
No Words: from:
Bible through the Lens of Trauma
Author(s) Poser Ruth
Abstract: Over the course of time, interpreters have repeatedly seen this as an indication that Ezekiel was mentally ill, but simultaneously many have regarded the
Reflections on the Prose Sermons in the Book of Jeremiah: from:
Bible through the Lens of Trauma
Author(s) Stulman Louis
Abstract: At the same time, biblical scholars have long studied literary artifacts riddled with intimate and collective
Toward a Pastoral Reading of 2 Corinthians as a Memoir of PTSD and Healing from:
Bible through the Lens of Trauma
Author(s) Clark Peter Yuichi
Abstract: When people endure times of crisis or trauma, they often search for meaning and hope by engaging in a bidirectional reading of texts. One direction involves hearing, reading, or witnessing the stories of others in analogous circumstances. Doing so can help people to know that they are not alone in their suffering, thus fulfilling Donne’s axiom that “no man is an island, entire of itself.”¹ The other direction points toward texts and rituals in one’s religious faith and spiritual practices, seeking a linkage between one’s own story and a larger, transcendent story: one that recounts what is sacred or ultimate.
Introduction: from:
Light and Death
Abstract: Introducing this book, the word
issue, derived from Latinexire, “to go out” or “go forth,” embraces a range of meanings, among them “outflows,” “questions,” or “problems,” which in turn suggest “results,” “departures,” “developments,” or even “extensions.”¹ Englishissuesis itself a historical extension ofexire, one issuing from this verb over time. For readers of early modern texts,issuesand its implied Latin root hold a haunting memory of Donne’s play on it inDeaths Duell, famously his own funeral sermon, which examines the issues from, in, and through death—Latinà(ab),in, andperdeath—and charges
Introduction: from:
Light and Death
Abstract: Introducing this book, the word
issue, derived from Latinexire, “to go out” or “go forth,” embraces a range of meanings, among them “outflows,” “questions,” or “problems,” which in turn suggest “results,” “departures,” “developments,” or even “extensions.”¹ Englishissuesis itself a historical extension ofexire, one issuing from this verb over time. For readers of early modern texts,issuesand its implied Latin root hold a haunting memory of Donne’s play on it inDeaths Duell, famously his own funeral sermon, which examines the issues from, in, and through death—Latinà(ab),in, andperdeath—and charges
Introduction: from:
Light and Death
Abstract: Introducing this book, the word
issue, derived from Latinexire, “to go out” or “go forth,” embraces a range of meanings, among them “outflows,” “questions,” or “problems,” which in turn suggest “results,” “departures,” “developments,” or even “extensions.”¹ Englishissuesis itself a historical extension ofexire, one issuing from this verb over time. For readers of early modern texts,issuesand its implied Latin root hold a haunting memory of Donne’s play on it inDeaths Duell, famously his own funeral sermon, which examines the issues from, in, and through death—Latinà(ab),in, andperdeath—and charges
Book Title: Metaphor, Morality, and the Spirit in Romans 8-1–17
Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Robinson William E. W.
Abstract: In this innovative book, William E. W. Robinson takes the reader on a journey through Romans 8:1-17 using Conceptual Metaphor Theory and Conceptual Integration Theory. Robinson delineates the underlying cognitive metaphors, their structure, their function, what they mean, and how Paul's audiences then and now are able to comprehend their meaning. He examines each metaphor in the light of relevant aspects of the Greco-Roman world and Paul's Jewish background. Robinson contends that Paul portrays the Spirit as the principal agent in the religious-ethical life of believers. At the same time, his analysis demonstrates that the conceptual metaphors in Romans 8:1-17 convey the integral role of believers in ethical conduct. In the process, he addresses thorny theological issues such as whether Spirit and flesh signal an internal battle within believers or two conflicting ways of life. Finally, Robinson shows how this study is relevant to related Pauline passages and challenges scholars to incorporate these methods into their own investigation of biblical texts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1h4mhzd
3 Eucharistic Anthropology: from:
The Resounding Soul
Author(s) Kaethler Andrew T. J.
Abstract: In a broadcast to the Soviet Union, Alexander Schmemann boldly announced, “Christianity began with a new experience of time, in which time ceases to be bound-up with death. ‘O death, where is thy sting? O hell, where is thy victory?’ (1 Cor 15:55). This new experience is the very heart of Christianity and its fire ….”¹ Yet, throughout Schmemann’s extensive writing on time and the kingdom of God and his heavy emphasis on these themes, he does not explicitly, nor systematically lay out how this new experience of time shapes his theological anthropology. That is not to say that it
6 Persons and Narratives: from:
The Resounding Soul
Author(s) Forti K. Nicholas
Abstract: In the end, it did not take the promise of gaining the whole world to convince us to forfeit our souls; it just took a transformation of our minds by a reorientation of our hearts to a new story. Of course, some of the defenders and tellers of the new tale at times bemoan the vestiges of the old that still possess our language and thoughts, trapping the unenlightened in a demon-haunted world of make-believe. Among the concepts, tropes, phrases, and words that many of the heralds of the new age wish to sweep away like late day cobwebs obstinately
I Am Because We Are—Twenty years on from:
I Am Because We Are
Abstract: In the twenty years since the first edition of
I Am Because We Are—Readings in Black Philosophywent to print many things have changed both within the academy and outside the walls of colleges and universities. many departments and programs of Black studies have rechristened themselves as programs in Africana studies, while other such entities have been folded into programs dedicated to race and ethnic studies. At the same time, there has been a remarkable proliferation of anthologies and texts dealing with African philosophy and with African American philosophy (for a guide to these resources, see our selected Bibliography
The Teachings of Ptahhotep (ca. 2400 B.C.E.) from:
I Am Because We Are
Abstract: God upon the two crocodiles (reference to Heru, who is sometimes shown standing on two crocodiles). My God, the process of aging brings senility. My mind decays and forgetfulness of the things of yesterday has already begun. Feebleness has come and weakness grows. Childlike, one sleeps all day. The eyes are dim and the ears are
An Interview with H. Odera Oruka (ca. late 1970s) from:
I Am Because We Are
Author(s) AKOKO PAUL MBUYA
Abstract: A. In
Dholuo,“Luo Language,” time is known askinde.The Luo have always had quite a lot to say about those things which happened long ago by using specific events to mark out or pinpoint the location of such events on the time-continuum. Ex hypothesi, a person may refer to a famine which had taken place as a result of drought. That would be quite a story. Another example which could be given is the case of a man who defended the tribe during wars,
Feminism and Revolution (1978) from:
I Am Because We Are
Author(s) THÍAM AWA
Abstract: While women from industrialized countries are focusing their attention on the problem of creating a typically female language, the daughters of black Africa are still at the stage of seeking their own dignity, for the recognition of their own specificity as human beings. This specificity has always been refused them by white colonialists or neocolonialists and by their own black males. One only needs to glance briefly at history to realize this. Africa in the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries was the source of human merchandise, the “black gold” of the time: slaves to be scattered all over America and the
The Future as I See It (1919) from:
I Am Because We Are
Author(s) GARVEY MARCUS
Abstract: It comes to the individual, the race, the nation once in a lifetime to decide upon the course to be pursued as a career. The hour has now struck for the individual Negro as well as the entire race to decide the course that will be pursued in the interest of our own liberty.
The West Indian Middle Classes (1961) from:
I Am Because We Are
Author(s) JAMES C. L. R.
Abstract: Let me get one thing out of the way. They are not a defective set of people. In intellectual capacity, i.e., ability to learn, to familiarize themselves with the general scholastic requirements of Western civilization, they are and for some time have been unequalled in the colonial world. If you take
The Relations and Duties of Free Colored Men in America to Africa from:
I Am Because We Are
Author(s) CRUMMELL ALEXANDER
Abstract: My dear sir,—It is now many months since I received a letter from you, just as you were about sailing from our shores for your home. In that note you requested me to address you a letter setting forth my views concerning liberia, suggesting at the same time that such a letter might prove interesting to many of our old friends and schoolmates in new york. I have not forgotten your request, although I have not heretofore complied with it. Though convinced of the need and possible usefulness of such a letter as you asked from me, I have
The Atlanta Exposition Address (1895) from:
I Am Because We Are
Author(s) WASHINGTON BOOKER T.
Abstract: One-third of the population of the south is of the negro race. no enterprise seeking the material, civil, or moral welfare of this section can disregard this element of our population and reach the highest success. I but convey to you, Mr. President and directors, the sentiment of the masses of my race when I say that in no way have the value and manhood of the American negro been more fittingly and generously recognized than by the managers of this magnificent Exposition at every stage of its progress. It is a recognition that will do more to cement the
Speech on “Black revolution” (New york, April 8, 1964) from:
I Am Because We Are
Author(s) X MALCOLM
Abstract: Friends and enemies, tonight I hope that we can have a little fireside chat with as few sparks as possible being tossed round, especially because of the very explosive condition that the world is in today. sometimes, when a person’s house is on fire and someone comes in yelling fire, instead of the person who is awakened by the yell being thankful, he makes the mistake of charging the one who awakened him with having set the fire. I hope that this little conversation tonight about the Black revolution won’t cause many of you to accuse us of igniting it
Rootedness: from:
I Am Because We Are
Author(s) MORRISON TONI
Abstract: There is a conflict between public and private life, and it’s a conflict that I think ought to remain a conflict. Not a problem, just a conflict. Because they are two modes of life that exist to exclude and annihilate each other. It’s a conflict that should be maintained now more than ever because the social machinery of this country at this time doesn’t permit harmony in a life that has both aspects. I am impressed with the story of—probably Jefferson, perhaps not, who walked home alone after the presidential inauguration. There must have been a time when an
Philosophy, Ethnicity, and Race (1988) from:
I Am Because We Are
Author(s) OUTLAW LUCIUS
Abstract: Millions of us throughout the world are living during very problematic and challenging times. The reasons are numerous and quite complex, made more so by much of what we might otherwise celebrate as milestones of human achievement in many areas: artistic creativity, material and agricultural productivity, science and technology, medicine, transportation and communication, the magnitude and velocity of knowledge and information accumulation and dispersal, and political transformations, to mention a few. A complete litany of the problems and challenges we face is unnecessary. (Nor am I capable of providing one, or would be disposed to do so if I could
Book Title: Fueling Culture-101 Words for Energy and Environment
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Yaeger Patricia
Abstract: How has our relation to energy changed over time? What differences do particular energy sources make to human values, politics, and imagination? How have transitions from one energy source to another—from wood to coal, or from oil to solar to whatever comes next—transformed culture and society? What are the implications of uneven access to energy in the past, present, and future? Which concepts and theories clarify our relation to energy, and which just get in the way? Fueling Culture offers a compendium of keywords written by scholars and practitioners from around the world and across the humanities and social sciences. These keywords offer new ways of thinking about energy as both the source and the limit of how we inhabit culture, with the aim of opening up new ways of understanding the seemingly irresolvable contradictions of dependence upon unsustainable energy forms. Fueling Culture brings together writing that is risk-taking and interdisciplinary, drawing on insights from literary and cultural studies, environmental history and ecocriticism, political economy and political ecology, postcolonial and globalization studies, and materialisms old and new. Keywords in this volume include: Aboriginal, Accumulation, Addiction, Affect, America, Animal, Anthropocene, Architecture, Arctic, Automobile, Boom, Canada, Catastrophe, Change, Charcoal, China, Coal, Community, Corporation, Crisis, Dams, Demand, Detritus, Disaster, Ecology, Electricity, Embodiment, Ethics, Evolution, Exhaust, Fallout, Fiction, Fracking, Future, Gender, Green, Grids, Guilt, Identity, Image, Infrastructure, Innervation, Kerosene, Lebenskraft, Limits, Media, Metabolism, Middle East, Nature, Necessity, Networks, Nigeria, Nuclear, Petroviolence, Photography, Pipelines, Plastics, Renewable, Resilience, Risk, Roads, Rubber, Rural, Russia, Servers, Shame, Solar, Spill, Spiritual, Statistics, Surveillance, Sustainability, Tallow, Texas, Textiles, Utopia, Venezuela, Whaling, Wood, Work For a full list of keywords in and contributors to this volume, please go to: http://ow.ly/4mZZxV
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1hfr0s3
Anthropocene 2 from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Nixon Rob
Abstract: For a growing chorus of scientists, the Holocene is history. Through our collective actions we have jolted the planet into a new, unprecedented epoch, the Anthropocene, which, according to one influential view, dates back to the late-eighteenth-century beginnings of the Industrial Revolution. The ecologist Eugene Stoermer coined the term
Anthropocene(age of humans) in 2000, and the Nobel Prize–winning atmospheric chemist Paul Crutzen quickly popularized its core assertion that for the first time in Earth’s history, a sentient species,Homo sapiens, has become not just a biomorphic but a geomorphic force. The grand species narrative that drives the Anthropocene
Arctic from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Ruiz Rafico
Abstract: “Arctic” is a cultural figuration that does a lot of work. It marks a nebulous geographic region, an atmospheric condition, and, increasingly, perhaps
thecommon place where environmental CHANGE is made manifest. With the proliferation of time-lapse satellite images showing the shrinking polar ice cap, documentary PHOTOGRAPHY and film following the pace of glacial melt, and the prominence of the Northwest Passage as a maritime transportation corridor, the Arctic has a recurring cultural visuality and instrumentality all its own and utterly of the present. Part of the Arctic’s figurative work depends on its being perceived as a mappable territory—a
Catastrophe from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Aradau Claudia
Abstract: Invocations of fear, attacks, and adversaries have long been characterized as security imaginaries. More recently, the prospect of catastrophic disruption has led security professionals across the Western world to draw up new scenarios of the worst still to come and to prepare exercises for inhabiting the catastrophic futures they have imagined. More established threats insidiously morph into unexpected, unknowable, and unpredictable catastrophic events that can erupt anytime, anywhere. Over the past few decades, security has come to be appended to almost everything: human security, food security, water security, energy security, climate security, GENDER security, cyber security, data security, and so
Change from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Buchanan Ian
Abstract: It is simple, really. Our dependency on carbon fuels is jeopardizing our only planet home. To avert DISASTER, we must either switch to a more sustainable fuel source or find technological solutions to the environmental problems we have created. But who is this “we” and how can “they” effect the necessary changes? It cannot be done alone; no individual can pull off this miracle herself. It cannot even be done one country at a time. It will require a coordinated global effort, one that changes our very conception of change. Political science has three main theories of how change of
Charcoal from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Irr Caren
Abstract: While grilling outdoors is a nostalgic leisure activity pursued by many Westerners, WOOD is the primary fuel of the poor throughout the developing world—especially in sub-Saharan Africa where it is mainly used for cooking. The World Future Council estimates that 80 percent of Africans rely on biomass (wood and charcoal) for their energy needs. The bulk of biomass energy involves combustion of unprocessed fuelwood, but a significant and growing percentage results from charcoal burning in urban settings. Producing charcoal requires burning several times as much per unit of energy as one uses when burning fuelwood directly; charcoal is inefficient
China 1 from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Dirlik Arif
Abstract: These headlines date from a short period of no particular eventfulness in late 2013. They are typical of reports that are increasingly streaming out of the People’s Republic of China (PRC). Attention to the social and environmental toll of development in China now claims nearly equal time to celebrations of development and its yet-to-be fulfilled promises. Such gloomy prospects are of deep concern among the leadership and the population at large, especially the latter, who have to live with the negative consequences of development even as they benefit from it.
Coal from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Dawson Ashley
Abstract: Coal is the big dirty secret of our time. Although coal-fired power plants generate more than 50 percent of ELECTRICITY in the United States, few Americans think about coal when they stop to reflect on where their power comes from (Bob Johnson 2010). The tense geopolitics of oil attracts many more headlines than coal, yet 35 percent of the world’s electricity is currently generated by coal power, and developing nations such as CHINA and India bring hundreds of pollution-belching, coal-fired power plants online each year. When we turn on our sleek iPads and MacBooks, we seldom consider that the ENERGY
Coal Ash from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Hatmaker Susie
Abstract: To live in a coal-fueled culture is to live in the time of ash: a time of irrationality, unpredictability, and unanticipated events that reveal not the work of an angry god, but the limits to human progress and scientific planning. Power generation and electrification emerged in the twentieth century as core elements of modernization and development on a global scale. The failure to account for the corresponding production of waste is neither mistake nor oversight, but inherent to this logic.
Community from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Dorow Sara
Abstract: Oil’s binding of production–social reproduction–consumption binds us, in turn, to it. One shape that such a collective truth takes is “community.” As it has underwritten new arrangements of global capitalist ACCUMULATION over the last century, oil has offered up community by reconstituting the possible forms and imaginaries of collective social life. Petroleum products have promised public and private spaces of leisure, freedom, and urbanized modernity; oil value chains have produced transnational and cosmopolitan NET WORKS of IDENTITY ; flows of oil have invited us into affective spectacles of consumption; and oil has extended and/or compressed the time-space experiences
Detritus from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Chari Sharad
Abstract: Oil is literally rot. As biomass decomposing over millions of years, oil is the rot of ages, and yet it has become the fuel we cannot yet do without. This dialectic of protracted ruination and fatal promise crystallizes the ethos of our time. If the late-nineteenth and early-twentieth-century moment that inaugurated the age of oil was also, at least in some places, a time of modernist hope for human liberation against the specter of annihilation, the present appears more obviously marked by proliferating decay, desperate walling-in from inequality, political discourse utterly disengaged from arts of survival, and painful archiving of
Energy from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Soni Vivasvan
Abstract: In Aristotle’s unusual and tragic sense of motion, as the “actuality of a potential, as such” (Kosman 1969, 57; see also Sachs n. d.), we are on the way to our own destruction, even if in slow motion beyond a human scale of time. The hope that animates Patricia Yaeger’s urgent injunction to examine our “energy unconscious” (2011, 306) is that, by bringing energy into cultural awareness, we might be able to fashion forms of collective life and patterns of energy consumption that avert this calamity.
Evolution from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Wald Priscilla
Abstract: Debates surrounding biological theories of evolution are evident in the multiple meanings of the word itself, with its etymology haunting its subsequent meanings.
The Oxford English Dictionaryoffers its etymology in the “action of unrolling a scroll,” a “lapse of time,” and a “tactical manoeuver to effect a change of formation.”¹ Revelation and deliberation survive in its earliest incarnations. Darwin did not useevolutionin the first edition ofOn the Origin of Species, yet as James T. Costa points out in his introduction, he gave it the last word—literally—when he concluded that edition with a poetic meditation
Fiction from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Macdonald Graeme
Abstract: Like the first law of thermodynamics, literary fiction requires momentum. Fiction relies on propulsive devices: basic units of charge that power action, event, and consciousness, calibrated by laws of narrative motion and physical, material impressions of kinetic and potential energy transference. (These need not involve tales of actual motion or much, if any, movement—consider Beckett’s minimalism or the generic predicates for entropy in naturalist writing.) Fiction requires and is measured through potential—what fuels its psychosocial dynamics, the impetus of plot and character development, and its chronotopic ability to traverse multiple times and spaces. Fiction absorbs, exudes, circulates, conserves,
Image from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Kashi Ed
Abstract: The Niger Delta is where Nigeria’s plagues of political gangsterism, corruption, and poverty converge. What is happening in the Niger Delta is nothing short of a militarized insurgent struggle against the violent machinery of state security forces with a terrible reputation. At the same time, there is something distinctive about this violence; the militants’ struggle is a backlash against a long history of exploitation, the presence of transnational oil corporations, a style of politics dependent upon violence, and myriad groups, gangs, and cults with no leadership as such.
Middle East from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Cole Juan
Abstract: Solar power could be a game changer in the Israel-Palestine conflict. Big Carbon is nowhere more problematic than in Israel and Palestine. These areas have little COAL or oil, and their richest natural gas reserves are offshore in the Mediterranean Sea. That location makes gas expensive to extract at a time when the American technique of hydraulic FRACKING is driving down global prices. Ownership of the fields is contested among Israelis, Palestinians, and the Lebanese, promising more conflict.
Risk from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Pinkus Karen
Abstract: Risk, as I have written elsewhere, is a risky term.¹ We do not know exactly where or when the term originated—in early maritime law, perhaps. More significantly, we do not know quite how to use it properly.Riskin its most general sense (Webster’s: “the chance of injury, damage or loss”) contrasts significantly with its meaning in the context of investment: price volatility. In common speech,riskhas a primarily negative connotation, as something to be avoided. But in the market,riskhas a positive, aspirational sense so long as prices move upward, even if in fits and starts
Utopia from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Lehmann Philipp
Abstract: Whether as optimally employed labor or an infinite supply of power, ENERGY is often central to utopian designs for FUTURE societies. Conversely, utopian impulses have been particularly strong during times of actual or predicted energy transitions, inspiring designs for reorganizing socioeconomic, political, and environmental conditions with the help of new sources and unprecedented quantities of energy.
Work 1 from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Turcot Susan
Abstract: Most of the twenty-four people I drew needed to talk, to articulate their pasts, presents, or futures, sometimes with great intensity. Observing is about recognizing subtlety,
Book Title: Supper at Emmaus- Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Author(s): OLSEN GLENN W.
Abstract: Supper at Emmaus traces various important intellectual topics from the ancient world to the modern period. Generally, as in its treatment of the question of whether the long-standing contrast between cyclical and linear views of history is helpful, it introduces important thinkers who have considered the question. A preoccupation of the book is the appearance and reappearance across the centuries of patterns used to organize temporal and cultural experience. After an opening essay on transcendental truth and cultural relativism, the second chapter traces a distinction, common in historical writings during the past two centuries, between an alleged ancient classical "cyclic" view of time and history, used to describe the claimed repetitiveness of and similarities between historical events ("nothing is new under the sun"), and a contrasting Jewish-Christian linear view, sometimes described as providential in that it moves through a series of unique events to some end intended by God. In the latter, history is "about something," the education of the human race or the redemption of humankind. As in each of the remaining essays, the book then attempts to draw out the limitations of what the current consensus on this topic has become. It does this for such things as our current understanding of religious toleration, humanism, natural law, and teleology. Some of the essays, such as those on debate about Augustine's understanding of marriage or the concluding illustrated essay on the baroque city of Lecce, are published for the first time. Others are based on previously published contributions to the scholarly literature, though generally each of these chapters concludes with a postscript that engages with current scholarly debate on the subject.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1hjb0d8
TWO Problems with the Contrast between Circular and Linear Views of Time in the Interpretation of Ancient and Early Medieval History from:
Supper at Emmaus
Abstract: More than a generation ago, Arnaldo Momigliano, in attacking many conventional contrasts between, for instance, a so-called Jewish and a so-called Greek view of time, argued that the contrast between a Greek or pagan circular time and a Jewish-Christian linear time could not be sustained.¹ Of Momigliano’s contemporaries, perhaps no one more persistently had made and was to continue to make this contrast than Mircea Eliade, who presented Judaism and Christianity as transcending the celestial cycles of ancient religion: “repetition was transcended, for the first time, by Judeo-Christianism, which introduced a new category into religious experience: the category of
faith.”²
SIX The Middle Ages in the History of Toleration: from:
Supper at Emmaus
Abstract: Though the Whig grand narrative of history on which most of us were brought up has been under attack for some time—witness the writings of Herbert Butterfield (1900–1979)—it continues to permeate our culture. Essentially at first a narrative to explain the gloriousness of the Glorious Revolution of 1688—that is, the triumph of Protestantism and parliamentarianism over Catholicism and monarchy—the narrative has been quite adaptive and has been a carrier of a tale of progress built around the desirability of commerce, money-making, science, technology, and democracy. The Middle Ages, because not exactly characterized by any of
SEVEN Reflections on a Giotto Exhibit: from:
Supper at Emmaus
Abstract: From March 6 through June 29, 2009, an exhibit on Giotto (c. 1267–1337), “Giotto and the Fourteenth Century: The Sovereign Master of Painting,” was held at the Vittoriano in Rome. The exhibit showed twenty works by Giotto himself and 130 illustrating his influence. I was able to visit it in early June, and the following records a reflection that came to me at that time on one aspect of Giotto’s achievement. I have nothing particularly novel to say about Giotto himself, but seeing some of his works up close did reinforce the common judgment on how alive they are.¹
Book Title: Children of God in the World- Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Author(s): O’Callaghan Paul
Abstract: Children of God in the World is a textbook of theological anthropology structured in four parts. The first attempts to clarify the relationship between theology, philosophy and science in their respective approaches to anthropology, and establishes the fundamental principle of the text, stated in Vatican II's Gaudium et spes, n. 22, "Christ manifests man to man." The second part provides a historical overview of the doctrine of grace: in Scripture (especially the teaching of the book of Genesis on humans 'made in the image of God', as well as Paul and John), among the Fathers (in particular the oriental doctrine of 'divinization' and Augustine), during the Middle Ages (especially Thomas Aquinas) and the Reformation period (centered particularly on Luther and the Council of Trent), right up to modern times. The third part of the text, the central one, provides a systematic understanding of Christian grace in terms of the God's life present in human believers by which they become children of God, disciples, friends and brothers of Christ, temples of the Holy Spirit. This section also provides a reflection on the theological virtues (faith, hope and charity), on the relationship between grace and human freedom, on the role of the Church and Christian apostolate in the communication of grace, and on the need humans have for divine grace. After considering the relationship between the natural and the supernatural order, the fourth and last part deals with different philosophical aspects of the human condition, in the light of Christian faith: the union between body and soul, humans as free, historical, social, sexual and working beings. The last chapter concludes with a consideration of the human person, Christianity's greatest and most enduring contribution to human thought.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1hrdn0m
Book Title: Children of God in the World- Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Author(s): O’Callaghan Paul
Abstract: Children of God in the World is a textbook of theological anthropology structured in four parts. The first attempts to clarify the relationship between theology, philosophy and science in their respective approaches to anthropology, and establishes the fundamental principle of the text, stated in Vatican II's Gaudium et spes, n. 22, "Christ manifests man to man." The second part provides a historical overview of the doctrine of grace: in Scripture (especially the teaching of the book of Genesis on humans 'made in the image of God', as well as Paul and John), among the Fathers (in particular the oriental doctrine of 'divinization' and Augustine), during the Middle Ages (especially Thomas Aquinas) and the Reformation period (centered particularly on Luther and the Council of Trent), right up to modern times. The third part of the text, the central one, provides a systematic understanding of Christian grace in terms of the God's life present in human believers by which they become children of God, disciples, friends and brothers of Christ, temples of the Holy Spirit. This section also provides a reflection on the theological virtues (faith, hope and charity), on the relationship between grace and human freedom, on the role of the Church and Christian apostolate in the communication of grace, and on the need humans have for divine grace. After considering the relationship between the natural and the supernatural order, the fourth and last part deals with different philosophical aspects of the human condition, in the light of Christian faith: the union between body and soul, humans as free, historical, social, sexual and working beings. The last chapter concludes with a consideration of the human person, Christianity's greatest and most enduring contribution to human thought.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1hrdn0m
Book Title: Children of God in the World- Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Author(s): O’Callaghan Paul
Abstract: Children of God in the World is a textbook of theological anthropology structured in four parts. The first attempts to clarify the relationship between theology, philosophy and science in their respective approaches to anthropology, and establishes the fundamental principle of the text, stated in Vatican II's Gaudium et spes, n. 22, "Christ manifests man to man." The second part provides a historical overview of the doctrine of grace: in Scripture (especially the teaching of the book of Genesis on humans 'made in the image of God', as well as Paul and John), among the Fathers (in particular the oriental doctrine of 'divinization' and Augustine), during the Middle Ages (especially Thomas Aquinas) and the Reformation period (centered particularly on Luther and the Council of Trent), right up to modern times. The third part of the text, the central one, provides a systematic understanding of Christian grace in terms of the God's life present in human believers by which they become children of God, disciples, friends and brothers of Christ, temples of the Holy Spirit. This section also provides a reflection on the theological virtues (faith, hope and charity), on the relationship between grace and human freedom, on the role of the Church and Christian apostolate in the communication of grace, and on the need humans have for divine grace. After considering the relationship between the natural and the supernatural order, the fourth and last part deals with different philosophical aspects of the human condition, in the light of Christian faith: the union between body and soul, humans as free, historical, social, sexual and working beings. The last chapter concludes with a consideration of the human person, Christianity's greatest and most enduring contribution to human thought.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1hrdn0m
SOLITUDE ET VIOLENCES DANS PLUS LOIN QUE LA NUIT DE CÉCILE OUMHANI from:
Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) Silvestre Yolanda Jover
Abstract: La vie vaut-elle la peine d’être vécue lorsque votre corps, ce corps qui est à la fois châtiment et récompense, se refuse à enfanter ? Ahlam, jeune tunisienne se trouve confrontée à cette trahison qui fait s’écrouler sa vie de femme mariée. Sans enfant, son couple se détruit irrémédiablement. Tous ses efforts pour se couler dans le moule sont anéantis par une phrase : « Des chances pratiquement nulles… », et le calvaire d’une jeune femme intelligente va commencer. Par-delà la douleur de se sentir coupable, car elle se sent coupable et l’est aux yeux de sa famille, c’est le
IRONIE, PRATIQUE RÉFLEXIVE ET JEU INTERTEXTUEL DANS LE PAUVRE CHEMISIER DE VALERY LARBAUD from:
Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) Saéz Maribel Corbí
Abstract: A l’heure actuelle Valery Larbaud commence déjà à être connu dans les cercles universitaires. Grâce aux efforts de la Société des Amis de Valery Larbaud et des chercheurs larbaldiens de plus en plus nombreux, notre auteur a repris un peu de ce « règne »¹ qu’il exerça aux côtés d’André Gide. Un règne qui pendant trop longtemps lui fut contesté puisque seul était salué son dévouement impénitent à la critique et à la traduction au détriment de sa création personnelle, à l’exception de quelques œuvres telles que
Le journal intime de Barnabooth(Larbaud, 1913), certaines de sesEnfantines(Larbaud, 1918)
SOLITUDE ET VIOLENCES DANS PLUS LOIN QUE LA NUIT DE CÉCILE OUMHANI from:
Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) Silvestre Yolanda Jover
Abstract: La vie vaut-elle la peine d’être vécue lorsque votre corps, ce corps qui est à la fois châtiment et récompense, se refuse à enfanter ? Ahlam, jeune tunisienne se trouve confrontée à cette trahison qui fait s’écrouler sa vie de femme mariée. Sans enfant, son couple se détruit irrémédiablement. Tous ses efforts pour se couler dans le moule sont anéantis par une phrase : « Des chances pratiquement nulles… », et le calvaire d’une jeune femme intelligente va commencer. Par-delà la douleur de se sentir coupable, car elle se sent coupable et l’est aux yeux de sa famille, c’est le
IRONIE, PRATIQUE RÉFLEXIVE ET JEU INTERTEXTUEL DANS LE PAUVRE CHEMISIER DE VALERY LARBAUD from:
Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) Saéz Maribel Corbí
Abstract: A l’heure actuelle Valery Larbaud commence déjà à être connu dans les cercles universitaires. Grâce aux efforts de la Société des Amis de Valery Larbaud et des chercheurs larbaldiens de plus en plus nombreux, notre auteur a repris un peu de ce « règne »¹ qu’il exerça aux côtés d’André Gide. Un règne qui pendant trop longtemps lui fut contesté puisque seul était salué son dévouement impénitent à la critique et à la traduction au détriment de sa création personnelle, à l’exception de quelques œuvres telles que
Le journal intime de Barnabooth(Larbaud, 1913), certaines de sesEnfantines(Larbaud, 1918)
SOLITUDE ET VIOLENCES DANS PLUS LOIN QUE LA NUIT DE CÉCILE OUMHANI from:
Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) Silvestre Yolanda Jover
Abstract: La vie vaut-elle la peine d’être vécue lorsque votre corps, ce corps qui est à la fois châtiment et récompense, se refuse à enfanter ? Ahlam, jeune tunisienne se trouve confrontée à cette trahison qui fait s’écrouler sa vie de femme mariée. Sans enfant, son couple se détruit irrémédiablement. Tous ses efforts pour se couler dans le moule sont anéantis par une phrase : « Des chances pratiquement nulles… », et le calvaire d’une jeune femme intelligente va commencer. Par-delà la douleur de se sentir coupable, car elle se sent coupable et l’est aux yeux de sa famille, c’est le
IRONIE, PRATIQUE RÉFLEXIVE ET JEU INTERTEXTUEL DANS LE PAUVRE CHEMISIER DE VALERY LARBAUD from:
Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) Saéz Maribel Corbí
Abstract: A l’heure actuelle Valery Larbaud commence déjà à être connu dans les cercles universitaires. Grâce aux efforts de la Société des Amis de Valery Larbaud et des chercheurs larbaldiens de plus en plus nombreux, notre auteur a repris un peu de ce « règne »¹ qu’il exerça aux côtés d’André Gide. Un règne qui pendant trop longtemps lui fut contesté puisque seul était salué son dévouement impénitent à la critique et à la traduction au détriment de sa création personnelle, à l’exception de quelques œuvres telles que
Le journal intime de Barnabooth(Larbaud, 1913), certaines de sesEnfantines(Larbaud, 1918)
Introduction: Cruxes in Irish Cultural Memory: from:
Memory Ireland
Author(s) FRAWLEY OONA
Abstract: This third volume of
Irish Cultural Memorysets out to focus on two periods that form what I call “memory cruxes” within the broader memory bank of Irish cultural experience. In an obvious way, just as there are particular moments that stand out in the individual memory over time, there are also moments that can be identified as particularly important in the cultural memory of a group. These might be historical events deemed to be retrospectively important for ushering in a new era, or a period of heightened change; particular individuals can become emblematic of a given time or connected
1 The Indigent Sublime: from:
Memory Ireland
Author(s) LLOYD DAVID
Abstract: The problem is, surely, how to address redress with adequate justice. Redress assumes, not a saving intervention that might prevent acts of violence and expropriation in the present, but an address to the past from which we are disjoined by the very history of which effective violence is a constitutive part. In relation to the violence of the past, we seem helpless, impotent to set right the injustice that has so forcefully shaped the very times that we inhabit. Suspended between the call to vengeance and the commitment to memory, redress is charged neither with the repetition of the cycles
5 Memory in Irish Culture: from:
Memory Ireland
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: One of Ireland’s earliest texts is the
Book of Invasions, which records a genealogy of incursion and settlement for early Ireland. Already present is a mixing of history—telling itas it happened—and fiction—telling itas if it happened: for in those ancient times the boundary between empirical fact and cultural imagination was often blurred. When a manuscript begins with the words “In Illo tempore,” “In the Old days,” “Fado Fado,” one is already encountering a particular narrative take on the legacy of the past. Historical remembrance in Irish national culture is, from the outset, a matter of
Introduction: Cruxes in Irish Cultural Memory: from:
Memory Ireland
Author(s) FRAWLEY OONA
Abstract: This third volume of
Irish Cultural Memorysets out to focus on two periods that form what I call “memory cruxes” within the broader memory bank of Irish cultural experience. In an obvious way, just as there are particular moments that stand out in the individual memory over time, there are also moments that can be identified as particularly important in the cultural memory of a group. These might be historical events deemed to be retrospectively important for ushering in a new era, or a period of heightened change; particular individuals can become emblematic of a given time or connected
1 The Indigent Sublime: from:
Memory Ireland
Author(s) LLOYD DAVID
Abstract: The problem is, surely, how to address redress with adequate justice. Redress assumes, not a saving intervention that might prevent acts of violence and expropriation in the present, but an address to the past from which we are disjoined by the very history of which effective violence is a constitutive part. In relation to the violence of the past, we seem helpless, impotent to set right the injustice that has so forcefully shaped the very times that we inhabit. Suspended between the call to vengeance and the commitment to memory, redress is charged neither with the repetition of the cycles
5 Memory in Irish Culture: from:
Memory Ireland
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: One of Ireland’s earliest texts is the
Book of Invasions, which records a genealogy of incursion and settlement for early Ireland. Already present is a mixing of history—telling itas it happened—and fiction—telling itas if it happened: for in those ancient times the boundary between empirical fact and cultural imagination was often blurred. When a manuscript begins with the words “In Illo tempore,” “In the Old days,” “Fado Fado,” one is already encountering a particular narrative take on the legacy of the past. Historical remembrance in Irish national culture is, from the outset, a matter of
Introduction: Cruxes in Irish Cultural Memory: from:
Memory Ireland
Author(s) FRAWLEY OONA
Abstract: This third volume of
Irish Cultural Memorysets out to focus on two periods that form what I call “memory cruxes” within the broader memory bank of Irish cultural experience. In an obvious way, just as there are particular moments that stand out in the individual memory over time, there are also moments that can be identified as particularly important in the cultural memory of a group. These might be historical events deemed to be retrospectively important for ushering in a new era, or a period of heightened change; particular individuals can become emblematic of a given time or connected
1 The Indigent Sublime: from:
Memory Ireland
Author(s) LLOYD DAVID
Abstract: The problem is, surely, how to address redress with adequate justice. Redress assumes, not a saving intervention that might prevent acts of violence and expropriation in the present, but an address to the past from which we are disjoined by the very history of which effective violence is a constitutive part. In relation to the violence of the past, we seem helpless, impotent to set right the injustice that has so forcefully shaped the very times that we inhabit. Suspended between the call to vengeance and the commitment to memory, redress is charged neither with the repetition of the cycles
5 Memory in Irish Culture: from:
Memory Ireland
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: One of Ireland’s earliest texts is the
Book of Invasions, which records a genealogy of incursion and settlement for early Ireland. Already present is a mixing of history—telling itas it happened—and fiction—telling itas if it happened: for in those ancient times the boundary between empirical fact and cultural imagination was often blurred. When a manuscript begins with the words “In Illo tempore,” “In the Old days,” “Fado Fado,” one is already encountering a particular narrative take on the legacy of the past. Historical remembrance in Irish national culture is, from the outset, a matter of
Book Title: Memory Ireland-Diaspora and Memory Practices, Volume 2
Publisher: Syracuse University Press
Author(s): Frawley Oona
Abstract: In the second volume of a series that will ultimately include four, the authors consider Irish diasporic memory and memory practices. While the Irish diaspora has become the subject of a wide range of scholarship, there has been little work focused on its relationship to memory. The first half of the volume asks how diasporic memory functions in different places and times, and what forms it takes on. As an island nation with a history of emigration, Ireland has developed a rich diasporic cultural memory, one that draws on multiple traditions and historiographies of both "home" and "away." Native traditions are not imported wholesale, but instead develop their own curious hybridity, reflecting the nature of emigrant memory that absorbs new ways of thinking about home. How do immigrants remember their homeland? How do descendants of immigrants "remember" a land they rarely visit? How does diasporic memory pass through families, and how is it represented in cultural forms such as literature, festivals, and souvenirs?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1j1nv2c
7 Private Memories, Public Display from:
Memory Ireland
Author(s) WILLIAMS MAGGIE
Abstract: In 1850, Waterhouse & Co., Jewelers of Dame Street, Dublin, acquired a fabulous golden brooch that had recently washed up on a Drogheda beach, like a message in a bottle from the ancient Irish past (Whitfield 1976, 106). Made of gilt silver, the brooch’s surfaces were decorated with gold granulation, filigree interlace designs, champlevé enamel bosses, and imported gemstones. Only 8.7 centimeters in diameter, its fine decoration was suited to the contemporary taste for elaborate pattern. The beautiful and mysterious object was dated to the early medieval period and nicknamed the “Tara Brooch” to evoke a connection with the Iron
Introduction from:
Memory Ireland
Author(s) FRAWLEY OONA
Abstract: Cultural memory, as the project
Memory Irelanddemonstrates, has an array of milieus. Irish cultural memory can be located at heritage sites, embodied by memorials and museums, found in landscapes inscribed with place names that have changed over time. Cultural memory is also located, though, in cultural forms that remain unattached to a geographical space. Instead, such cultural forms function as containers of specific indexes of memory and reflect a range of what I term “memory practices,” which are ways of cultural remembering that result from and are shaped by particular cultural forms. Many of these cultural forms embody memory
11 “The Tone of Defiance” from:
Memory Ireland
Author(s) BROWN KATIE
Abstract: Ireland, with its reputation as the “Land of Song,” is the only country in the world to have a musical instrument as its national symbol. It is thus not surprising that music is so intimately involved in the collective remembering of events in Irish history. When in the eighteenth century a decline in the numbers of Irish speakers occurred, the Irish language could no longer serve to transmit cultural memory as it once had; during this period, music became central to national expression. Charles Hamilton Teeling, a member of the United Irishmen, noted that throughout the time surrounding the 1798
12 “Nonsynchronism,” Traditional Music, and Memory in Ireland from:
Memory Ireland
Author(s) COLEMAN STEVE
Abstract: “Sound,” the American composer Morton Feldman wrote, “does not know its history” (2000, 22). Feldman’s statement captures a particularly modernist approach to the material aspect of art: in the case of music, sound is to be encountered as a thing in itself, without any immediate connection to exterior meaning or reality. The desire for the experience of pure artistic form implies its converse, also desired, in which art is experienced as an object in time, linked to tradition and occasion. To set these two aspects of artistic experience against one another is the hallmark of the modern sensibility. Modernity, as
8 Ghosts through Absence from:
Memory Ireland
Author(s) JONES ELLEN CAROL
Abstract: Borrowing and disjoining the language of the past, James Joyce’s work both parodies that past and bears witness to its truth.¹ To bear witness to the past is to comprehend its spectral repetition in the present. Indeed, even if acts of historical retrieval are intended to serve also as gestures of psychic restitution, the net effect of such reiterative reworkings of history is a repetition of the same in nightmarish, spectral,
unheimlich, returns (Leerssen 2001, 220): “history repeating itself with a difference” (U616). Homi Bhabha delineates how the “mimesis of memorialization—the restitution of record, date, time, name—anxiously
8 Ghosts through Absence from:
Memory Ireland
Author(s) JONES ELLEN CAROL
Abstract: Borrowing and disjoining the language of the past, James Joyce’s work both parodies that past and bears witness to its truth.¹ To bear witness to the past is to comprehend its spectral repetition in the present. Indeed, even if acts of historical retrieval are intended to serve also as gestures of psychic restitution, the net effect of such reiterative reworkings of history is a repetition of the same in nightmarish, spectral,
unheimlich, returns (Leerssen 2001, 220): “history repeating itself with a difference” (U616). Homi Bhabha delineates how the “mimesis of memorialization—the restitution of record, date, time, name—anxiously
Book Title: Seamus Heaney as Aesthetic Thinker-A Study of the Prose
Publisher: Syracuse University Press
Author(s): MacKillop James
Abstract: Seamus Heaney’s unexpected death in August 2013 brought to completion his body of work, and scholars are only now coming to understand the full scale and importance of this extraordinary career. The Nobel Prize–winning poet, translator, and playwright from the North of Ireland is considered the most important Irish poet after Yeats and, at the time of his death, arguably the most famous living poet. For this reason, much of the scholarship to date on Heaney has understandably focused on his poetry. O’Brien’s new work, however, focuses on Heaney’s essays, book chapters, and lectures as it seeks to understand how Heaney explored the poet’s role in the world. By examining Heaney’s prose, O’Brien teases out a clearer understanding of Heaney’s sense of the function of poetry as an act of public intellectual and ethical inquiry. In doing so, O’Brien reads Heaney as an aesthetic thinker in the European tradition, considering him alongside Heidegger, Derrida, Lacan, and Adorno. Studying Heaney within this theoretical and philosophical tradition sheds new and useful light on one of the greatest creative minds of the twentieth century.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1j1nw0t
Conclusion: from:
Seamus Heaney as Aesthetic Thinker
Abstract: Seamus Heaney’s fame derives primarily from his poetry, and this book does not attempt to gainsay that reputation. Heaney’s poetry is a resonant enunciation of the aesthetic in the late twentieth and early twenty-first centuries and will be a lasting legacy in times to come. What this book has attempted to do is to demonstrate that, as well as being a practitioner, Heaney is a philosophical thinker on the aesthetic and on its value in defining knowledge and influencing critique, both internally in terms of individual self-knowledge and also in terms of issues in the broader public sphere. I see
1 Remembering: from:
A Portrait of Pacifists
Abstract: It was a fine Saturday morning in June, a time of the year when Geneva is at its most pleasant—a walking city with eight o’clock sunsets, temperatures in the 70s, and on most days a decent breeze off the Lac Léman. By now one could see how the garden would look, enjoy the languorous evenings, and be grateful that Geneva wasn’t yet as noisy and humid as it would be when all the windows were open in search of fresh air.
4 Fathers and Sons from:
A Portrait of Pacifists
Abstract: André Trocmé had a father whose influence on him was great—sometimes for better, sometimes for worse, but always substantial and nearly always burdensome. The burden of being a Trocmé, however, was not Paul Trocmé’s invention, for he had a father (Eugène) who in turn had a father (Jean-Pierre Eugène), and each one laid that burden of family reputation on the next. It seemed to them all that being a Trocmé involved a responsibility to history as well as to family. For hundreds of years, Trocmé fathers had been laying down expectations for their sons, and it was no different
7 The Military Misadventure from:
A Portrait of Pacifists
Abstract: André knew he was a renegade, but it wasn’t a status he aspired to. He was at home as a member of the haute bourgeoisie Protestante. While the Protestant upper class was bourgeois and not noble, it was a sort of nonroyal aristocracy, exemplifying the meaning of the original Greek term: the morally and intellectually best who act in the interest of all. At the same time he was deeply conflicted about many things that came with upper class standing. His issue was straightforward: could he continue to enjoy his social status without running afoul of the religious and ethical
11 Understanding Catastrophe: from:
A Portrait of Pacifists
Abstract: The years from 1939 to 1944 are sometimes referred to as the heroic period in the story of Le Chambon-sur-Lignon and its surrounding towns. Yet the very word “heroic” is one that local people would never use to describe their own actions in creating a city of refuge. It goes against the grain of their Huguenot heritage.
17 Geneva and Beyond from:
A Portrait of Pacifists
Abstract: The Swiss Reformed church had no anti-pacifist policy concerning its clergy, nor did it forbid its ministers to speak of public and political issues when interpreting the Gospel for today’s world. Further, at the time André joined the other clergy at St.
1 Remembering: from:
A Portrait of Pacifists
Abstract: It was a fine Saturday morning in June, a time of the year when Geneva is at its most pleasant—a walking city with eight o’clock sunsets, temperatures in the 70s, and on most days a decent breeze off the Lac Léman. By now one could see how the garden would look, enjoy the languorous evenings, and be grateful that Geneva wasn’t yet as noisy and humid as it would be when all the windows were open in search of fresh air.
4 Fathers and Sons from:
A Portrait of Pacifists
Abstract: André Trocmé had a father whose influence on him was great—sometimes for better, sometimes for worse, but always substantial and nearly always burdensome. The burden of being a Trocmé, however, was not Paul Trocmé’s invention, for he had a father (Eugène) who in turn had a father (Jean-Pierre Eugène), and each one laid that burden of family reputation on the next. It seemed to them all that being a Trocmé involved a responsibility to history as well as to family. For hundreds of years, Trocmé fathers had been laying down expectations for their sons, and it was no different
7 The Military Misadventure from:
A Portrait of Pacifists
Abstract: André knew he was a renegade, but it wasn’t a status he aspired to. He was at home as a member of the haute bourgeoisie Protestante. While the Protestant upper class was bourgeois and not noble, it was a sort of nonroyal aristocracy, exemplifying the meaning of the original Greek term: the morally and intellectually best who act in the interest of all. At the same time he was deeply conflicted about many things that came with upper class standing. His issue was straightforward: could he continue to enjoy his social status without running afoul of the religious and ethical
11 Understanding Catastrophe: from:
A Portrait of Pacifists
Abstract: The years from 1939 to 1944 are sometimes referred to as the heroic period in the story of Le Chambon-sur-Lignon and its surrounding towns. Yet the very word “heroic” is one that local people would never use to describe their own actions in creating a city of refuge. It goes against the grain of their Huguenot heritage.
17 Geneva and Beyond from:
A Portrait of Pacifists
Abstract: The Swiss Reformed church had no anti-pacifist policy concerning its clergy, nor did it forbid its ministers to speak of public and political issues when interpreting the Gospel for today’s world. Further, at the time André joined the other clergy at St.
4 The Harp as a Palimpsest of Cultural Memory from:
Memory Ireland
Author(s) THUENTE MARY HELEN
Abstract: The harp image encompasses distinct and sometimes conflicting iconographical histories and cultural “memories” that influenced the complex formation of Irish identity. Long recognized as an iconic site of Irish identity, the harp is also a palimpsest of cultural memory. The origins of the harp icon’s meanings extend well beyond Ireland and can be traced to a variety of ancient and modern sources, in fact and in cultural memory. The broad range of historical periods and subjects outside of Irish tradition in Edward Bunting’s extensive commentary on the history of harp music and harp iconography in his three influential collections of
16 The Great Forgetting from:
Memory Ireland
Author(s) TITLEY ALAN
Abstract: Some time in the early 1930s, the great Irish folklorist Séamus Ó Duilearga, or James Delargy, was investigating the spoken Irish of northwest Clare. He was interested in old sayings, or prayers, or words, or whatever he could find. Although Irish was still the language of the older generation, it had not been passed on, and it was effectively dead as a community language. During the course of his enquiries, he was told that there was a man living on his own out the road, and that he was a good Irish speaker. He hoped to collect some items from
2 Rhetorical Histories of Disability from:
Disability Rhetoric
Abstract: To begin this chapter, I will offer a compressed overview of disability in antiquity. This overview is important historically and for the “narrative” of this book. But my hope is not just to start telling a story here, but instead to establish, through this quick scan of the role of the body in antiquity, a lexicon and a critical repertoire that is much more far-reaching. This compression is intended to simplify, to make a vast expanse of time accessible, but also to create density and force. My hope is to explain and illustrate the ubiquity and impact of normativity as
3 Imperfect Meaning from:
Disability Rhetoric
Abstract: Rhetoric can be seen as the function of power within language, and I connect it to the body because the body is what has been traditionally defined and (thus) disciplined by rhetorics of disability, while at the same time our bodies speak back, insisting (prosthetically) upon the impossibility of a normative essence. Saying this, however, introduces static. Who owns and what constructs—what owns and who constructs—the disabled body? In order to assert that
allbodily rhetoric ismētis, these questions of power and agency must first (and continuously) be addressed. In this chapter I will further examine ways
VII SCHOPENHAUER from:
Placing Aesthetics
Abstract: One way of looking at Arthur Schopenhauer’s thought is to view it as a synthesis between Kant and Plato (together with Plotinus) on the one hand and the Indian tradition on the other. Schopenhauer’s early work
On the Fourfold Root of the Principle of Sufficient Reasonwas straight Kantian analysis.¹ Recall in Kant the three levels of form, which function as filters or glasses through which the world of appearance is constituted. The first level is that of the forms of sensibility—space and time—which furnish the encompassing frame of all appearance; the second, the level of the categories
CHAPTER TWO Magical Capture in a Landscape of Terror: from:
Metaphor and the Slave Trade in West African Literature
Abstract: One afternoon while young Olaudah Equiano’s parents worked in the fields, he spied an intruder kidnap the “stout” children of his neighbors two yards over. He shouted out to his friends, who caught the assailants and bound them, and together they waited for their parents to return home and punish the crime. This was no uncommon occurrence: attackers from other regions frequently raided Equiano’s village to “carry off as many [children] as they could seize,”¹ a practice that was especially acute in times of famine. So common were these raids and other attacks on his village that Equiano’s family and
CHAPTER FOUR The Curse of Constant Remembrance: from:
Metaphor and the Slave Trade in West African Literature
Abstract: When European slave ships sailed into the port of Old Calabar in the late eighteenth century, Antera Duke, a wealthy local trader, welcomed them with a lengthy protocol that he and his merchant neighbors and family members had developed over generations of trading with Europeans. In a diary he kept of his daily life and labor, Duke depicts the elaborate ritual that took place as the ships pulled to shore and Duke and his people prepared a welcome. “I see Coffee Duke send his son to till mee news about new ship after Little time I hear 5 great guns
A from:
Encyclopedia of Missions and Missionaries
Abstract: Emphasis on the great missionary movement of the nineteenth century sometimes gives the impression that Africa was one of the last continents to be evangelized and that missionary work was largely undertaken by Europeans and North Americans. This seriously misrepresents the state of affairs. Orthodox Christianity flourished in northeast Africa for more than a millennium before the onset of the Western missionary endeavor. The Acts of the Apostles records a story of the conversion of an Ethiopian (or Nubian) official by the evangelist Philip. This comes in the chapter before Paul, the apostle to Europe, is introduced. A flourishing A
L from:
Encyclopedia of Missions and Missionaries
Abstract: From the late fifteenth century to the present, Latin America has been the recipient of continuous missionary activity. Sometimes myopic and sometimes farsighted, this activity has played a major role in shaping the culture of the southern half of the Western Hemisphere.
P from:
Encyclopedia of Missions and Missionaries
Abstract: Pacifism is a philosophy whose adherents reject violence, particularly war. The root meaning of the word comes from the Latin
pax(peace) andfacere(to make); i.e., to make peace. Pacifism is found from ancient times to the present, among both secular and religious persons, in simple societies as well as in advanced technological states. Pacifism is not to be confused with passivity. Making peace is active—adherents are committed to building a peaceful world.
R from:
Encyclopedia of Missions and Missionaries
Abstract: It is difficult to make blanket statements about missionaries and their ideas concerning race because such ideas have differed dramatically over time. Moreover, racial attitudes have differed according to denomination, among sponsoring groups, from mission field to mission field (e. g., the attitudes of missionaries to Africa differed from those of missionaries to Asia), from mission station to mission station, and even among individual missionaries working in the same area and for the same organization.
9 Forgiveness in the Service of Love from:
Love and Christian Ethics
Author(s) FARLEY MARGARET A.
Abstract: In a volume that aims to expand our understandings of Christian love by clarifying love’s meaning in theory and practice, a chapter devoted to “forgiveness” may appear marginal to the task. Yet the opposite is the case. There is no genuine Christian forgiveness without love, and love is sometimes tested in its ultimate possibility and imperative by the forgiveness it generates. Moreover, the construals of forgiveness that are central to much of Christian theology slip into caricature unless they include love in their foundation, framework, and movement. Christians believe that God’s love for humans is revealed—perhaps centrally—in God’s
18 Loving Nature: from:
Love and Christian Ethics
Author(s) ROLSTON HOLMES
Abstract: Love is so central to life that the single English word “love” opens up to become an umbrella. Love is not some distinct behavior with clearly recognized content and boundaries but a varied collection of many kinds of emotions that have in common only some relationship with a quite positive quality. Loves may be self-regarding, mate- and kin-regarding, other-regarding, genetically based, instinctive or acquired during a lifetime, conscious or subconscious, deliberated or spontaneous, proximate or ultimate, intrinsic or instrumental. They may be in-group or out-group, local or global, trans-generational, transformed by experience of the natural world or by cultural and
INTRODUCTION from:
The Intimate. Polity and the Catholic Church
Author(s) PÉREZ-AGOTE ALFONSO
Abstract: Most studies concerning the evolution of Catholicism in Western Europe underscore in general the clear decrease in church practices and, sometimes also, the decline or even the erosion of the orthodox beliefs. However, the loss of the impact of Catholicism on these societies manifests itself also in the changes in certain laws in the domain of ethics, which until very recently, were profoundly marked by the Christian vision. This indicates the diminishing ascendancy of Catholicism over our societies, an ‘exculturation’ that testifies to a further step in the secularization process.¹ Indeed, in the last quarter of the 20 th and
ETHICAL CHALLENGES OF THE CATHOLIC CHURCH IN PORTUGAL from:
The Intimate. Polity and the Catholic Church
Author(s) OLIVEIRA MARIA JOÃO
Abstract: There is no public debate on euthanasia and there is serious penalization for this practice. These changes were not exactly peaceful and originated more or less enlarged debates, sometimes in a moderate way and sometimes leading to the radicalization of
[Première partie Introduction] from:
Sémiotique et vécu musical
Abstract: Michel Imberty interroge le concept de narrativité qui fait fureur dans les sciences humaines, y compris en musicologie et en sémiotique musicale. Plutôt que de se mettre en ligne avec la tradition narratologique, il souligne le pouvoir heuristique des idées que ce concept subsume, en s’inspirant de l’analogie entre l’oeuvre musicale et le mythe. L’une comme l’autre développe chez l’auditeur ou le lecteur le même genre d’émotions et de sentiments, ce qui nous fait reconnaître que leur narrativité commune réside d’abord dans leur mode de progression dans le temps, relevant des mécanismes généraux de l’esprit et non de la syntaxe
[Première partie Introduction] from:
Sémiotique et vécu musical
Abstract: Michel Imberty interroge le concept de narrativité qui fait fureur dans les sciences humaines, y compris en musicologie et en sémiotique musicale. Plutôt que de se mettre en ligne avec la tradition narratologique, il souligne le pouvoir heuristique des idées que ce concept subsume, en s’inspirant de l’analogie entre l’oeuvre musicale et le mythe. L’une comme l’autre développe chez l’auditeur ou le lecteur le même genre d’émotions et de sentiments, ce qui nous fait reconnaître que leur narrativité commune réside d’abord dans leur mode de progression dans le temps, relevant des mécanismes généraux de l’esprit et non de la syntaxe
[Première partie Introduction] from:
Sémiotique et vécu musical
Abstract: Michel Imberty interroge le concept de narrativité qui fait fureur dans les sciences humaines, y compris en musicologie et en sémiotique musicale. Plutôt que de se mettre en ligne avec la tradition narratologique, il souligne le pouvoir heuristique des idées que ce concept subsume, en s’inspirant de l’analogie entre l’oeuvre musicale et le mythe. L’une comme l’autre développe chez l’auditeur ou le lecteur le même genre d’émotions et de sentiments, ce qui nous fait reconnaître que leur narrativité commune réside d’abord dans leur mode de progression dans le temps, relevant des mécanismes généraux de l’esprit et non de la syntaxe
[Première partie Introduction] from:
Sémiotique et vécu musical
Abstract: Michel Imberty interroge le concept de narrativité qui fait fureur dans les sciences humaines, y compris en musicologie et en sémiotique musicale. Plutôt que de se mettre en ligne avec la tradition narratologique, il souligne le pouvoir heuristique des idées que ce concept subsume, en s’inspirant de l’analogie entre l’oeuvre musicale et le mythe. L’une comme l’autre développe chez l’auditeur ou le lecteur le même genre d’émotions et de sentiments, ce qui nous fait reconnaître que leur narrativité commune réside d’abord dans leur mode de progression dans le temps, relevant des mécanismes généraux de l’esprit et non de la syntaxe
34. Annick Cataldi, Le consensus culturel et sa traduction. from:
Translatio y Cultura
Author(s) Cataldi Annick
Abstract: Il est difficile et fort complexe de définir la culture d’un pays. Elle est à la fois héritage du passé, apport artistique, sentiment national et système de références. Les nouvelles de Philippe Delerm nous plongent au coeur de la société française, avec
34. Annick Cataldi, Le consensus culturel et sa traduction. from:
Translatio y Cultura
Author(s) Cataldi Annick
Abstract: Il est difficile et fort complexe de définir la culture d’un pays. Elle est à la fois héritage du passé, apport artistique, sentiment national et système de références. Les nouvelles de Philippe Delerm nous plongent au coeur de la société française, avec
34. Annick Cataldi, Le consensus culturel et sa traduction. from:
Translatio y Cultura
Author(s) Cataldi Annick
Abstract: Il est difficile et fort complexe de définir la culture d’un pays. Elle est à la fois héritage du passé, apport artistique, sentiment national et système de références. Les nouvelles de Philippe Delerm nous plongent au coeur de la société française, avec
4 Slavery, Torture, Systemic Oppression, and Kingdom Rhetoric: from:
Insights from African American Interpretation
Abstract: Oppressive structures are often adjusted to accommodate the changing fears and desires of the (neo)colonizers and/or dominant oppressors. The public face of an oppressive system can change (or alternate, at times), between oppressor and oppressed subordinated other; aspects of the new facade may even appear representative of the oppressed. But the death-dealing policies continue to the detriment of the oppressed. Oppressive systems must be exposed and deconstructed or dismantled (even in sacred texts), not simply recycled or cosmetically adjusted to palliate and opiate the oppressed and their allies. Studies have proven that black women and men, the poor, and other
5 Dis-membering, Sexual Violence, and Confinement: from:
Insights from African American Interpretation
Abstract: The¹ story of the gang rape and mutilation of a Levite’s secondary wife in Judges 19 is indeed a “text of terror,” as Phyllis Trible has argued.² Texts of terror reflect, describe and critique the violence humans inflict upon one another, as well as our ignorance, complicity, and culpability in the brutality and victimization of women and others. Sometimes it is the Divine who is depicted as terrorizing women and their children or as sanctioning violence among humans. We often rationalize that the violence we commit is necessary and different from the violence committed by the internal and external other
8 Wrestling with Yahweh’s Violence, Part 1: from:
The Crucifixion of the Warrior God
Abstract: The problem of relating the Old and New Testaments is as old as the church itself, and the incongruity of the OT’s violent divine portraits with the nonviolent, self-sacrificial, enemy-embracing agape -love of God revealed in the crucified Christ represents the apex of this challenge. The various responses to this problem that theologians have proposed throughout history can be broadly grouped into three categories. The first proposal, to be addressed in this chapter, was put forth by a second-century preacher named Marcion. He was uniformly branded a heretic by the proto-orthodox theologians of the time because he solved the problem
14 The Heavenly Missionary: from:
The Crucifixion of the Warrior God
Abstract: I have been acquainted with several people who have worked as missionaries to tribes in Third World countries that had not yet heard the gospel. I am told that serving in these contexts often requires a great deal of patience and flexibility. One sometimes encounters centuriesold customs such as “female circumcision” that are, by western Christian standards, utterly inhumane.³ The missionary cannot simply point out the inhumanity of these ancient customs and expect the tribe to abandon them. If the missionary ever hopes to have the tribe eventually embrace the gospel and abandon their inhumane customs, they must rather initially
8 Wrestling with Yahweh’s Violence, Part 1: from:
The Crucifixion of the Warrior God
Abstract: The problem of relating the Old and New Testaments is as old as the church itself, and the incongruity of the OT’s violent divine portraits with the nonviolent, self-sacrificial, enemy-embracing agape -love of God revealed in the crucified Christ represents the apex of this challenge. The various responses to this problem that theologians have proposed throughout history can be broadly grouped into three categories. The first proposal, to be addressed in this chapter, was put forth by a second-century preacher named Marcion. He was uniformly branded a heretic by the proto-orthodox theologians of the time because he solved the problem
14 The Heavenly Missionary: from:
The Crucifixion of the Warrior God
Abstract: I have been acquainted with several people who have worked as missionaries to tribes in Third World countries that had not yet heard the gospel. I am told that serving in these contexts often requires a great deal of patience and flexibility. One sometimes encounters centuriesold customs such as “female circumcision” that are, by western Christian standards, utterly inhumane.³ The missionary cannot simply point out the inhumanity of these ancient customs and expect the tribe to abandon them. If the missionary ever hopes to have the tribe eventually embrace the gospel and abandon their inhumane customs, they must rather initially
Book Title: A Poetics of Unnatural Narrative- Publisher: Ohio State University Press
Author(s): RICHARDSON BRIAN
Abstract: A Poetics of Unnatural Narrativeoffers a collection of foundational essays introducing the reader to the full scope of unnatural narrative theory: its meaning, its goals, its extent, its paradoxes. This volume brings together a distinguished group of international critics, scholars, and historians that includes several of the world's leading narrative theorists. Together, they survey many basic areas of narrative studies from an unnatural perspective: story, time, space, voice, minds, narrative levels, "realism," nonfiction, hyperfiction, and narrative poetry. Rarely have these fundamental concepts been subjected to such an original and thoroughgoing reconceptualization. Much of the book is directed toward an investigation of experimental and antirealist work. Each essay focuses on texts and episodes that narrative theory has tended to neglect, and each provides theoretical formulations that are commensurate with such exceptional, albeit neglected, works.A Poetics of Unnatural Narrativearticulates and delineates the newest and most radical movement in narrative studies. This anthology will be of great interest to students and scholars of narrative studies and of the history and theory of modern fiction.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1kgqw52
2 The Whirligig of Time: from:
A Poetics of Unnatural Narrative
Author(s) HEINZE RÜDIGER
Abstract: TIME is a fundamental concept of human experience, and of narrative. Paul Ricoeur begins his monumental
Time and Narrativewith the argument that “time becomes human time to the extent that it is organized after the manner of a narrative; narrative, in turn, is meaningful to the extent that it portrays the features of temporal experience” (3). Most narratologists follow suit. For Shlomith Rimmon-Kenan, time is “one of the most basic categories of human experience” (43); Porter Abbott bases his introduction to narrative on the assumption that “narrative is the principal way in which our species organizes its understanding of
3 Unnatural Spaces and Narrative Worlds from:
A Poetics of Unnatural Narrative
Author(s) ALBER JAN
Abstract: Narrative space has traditionally been considered to be much less important than narrative time. For example, in the eighteenth century, Gotthold Ephraim Lessing defined narrative literature as an art
8 Implausibilities, Crossovers, and Impossibilities: from:
A Poetics of Unnatural Narrative
Author(s) PHELAN JAMES
Abstract: CHARACTER NARRATION is a fertile spawning ground for unnatural or antimimetic narration, especially for sporadic outbreaks of the antimimetic within narration whose dominant code is mimetic—that is, one that respects the normal human limitations of knowledge, temporal and spatial mobility, and so on.¹ Character narration generates these breaks from the mimetic code because, as an art of indirection, it places significant constraints on the (implied) author’s² freedom to communicate with her audience—and sometimes the author feels the need to operate outside those constraints. In employing either mimetic or antimimetic character narration, an author must use one text to
Book Title: A Poetics of Unnatural Narrative- Publisher: Ohio State University Press
Author(s): RICHARDSON BRIAN
Abstract: A Poetics of Unnatural Narrativeoffers a collection of foundational essays introducing the reader to the full scope of unnatural narrative theory: its meaning, its goals, its extent, its paradoxes. This volume brings together a distinguished group of international critics, scholars, and historians that includes several of the world's leading narrative theorists. Together, they survey many basic areas of narrative studies from an unnatural perspective: story, time, space, voice, minds, narrative levels, "realism," nonfiction, hyperfiction, and narrative poetry. Rarely have these fundamental concepts been subjected to such an original and thoroughgoing reconceptualization. Much of the book is directed toward an investigation of experimental and antirealist work. Each essay focuses on texts and episodes that narrative theory has tended to neglect, and each provides theoretical formulations that are commensurate with such exceptional, albeit neglected, works.A Poetics of Unnatural Narrativearticulates and delineates the newest and most radical movement in narrative studies. This anthology will be of great interest to students and scholars of narrative studies and of the history and theory of modern fiction.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1kgqw52
2 The Whirligig of Time: from:
A Poetics of Unnatural Narrative
Author(s) HEINZE RÜDIGER
Abstract: TIME is a fundamental concept of human experience, and of narrative. Paul Ricoeur begins his monumental
Time and Narrativewith the argument that “time becomes human time to the extent that it is organized after the manner of a narrative; narrative, in turn, is meaningful to the extent that it portrays the features of temporal experience” (3). Most narratologists follow suit. For Shlomith Rimmon-Kenan, time is “one of the most basic categories of human experience” (43); Porter Abbott bases his introduction to narrative on the assumption that “narrative is the principal way in which our species organizes its understanding of
3 Unnatural Spaces and Narrative Worlds from:
A Poetics of Unnatural Narrative
Author(s) ALBER JAN
Abstract: Narrative space has traditionally been considered to be much less important than narrative time. For example, in the eighteenth century, Gotthold Ephraim Lessing defined narrative literature as an art
8 Implausibilities, Crossovers, and Impossibilities: from:
A Poetics of Unnatural Narrative
Author(s) PHELAN JAMES
Abstract: CHARACTER NARRATION is a fertile spawning ground for unnatural or antimimetic narration, especially for sporadic outbreaks of the antimimetic within narration whose dominant code is mimetic—that is, one that respects the normal human limitations of knowledge, temporal and spatial mobility, and so on.¹ Character narration generates these breaks from the mimetic code because, as an art of indirection, it places significant constraints on the (implied) author’s² freedom to communicate with her audience—and sometimes the author feels the need to operate outside those constraints. In employing either mimetic or antimimetic character narration, an author must use one text to
8 Narrators, Narratees, and Mimetic Desire from:
Postclassical Narratology
Author(s) MARCUS AMIT
Abstract: Girard’s thesis of mimetic desire (also called “triangular” or “metaphysical” desire)¹ has aroused much theoretical interest among literary scholars, who have expanded and expounded his theory, while at the same time criticizing its universal pretensions and its blurring of differences between different types of desire (e.g., male vs. female, heterosexual vs. homosexual).² Literary interpretations that apply Girard’s ideas from his work
Deceit, Desire, and the Novel(1965) to fictional narratives focus on the dynamics of mimetic desire and rivalry between two (or more) characters on the story level: the desiring subject, the mediator (or rival), and the desired object.
8 Narrators, Narratees, and Mimetic Desire from:
Postclassical Narratology
Author(s) MARCUS AMIT
Abstract: Girard’s thesis of mimetic desire (also called “triangular” or “metaphysical” desire)¹ has aroused much theoretical interest among literary scholars, who have expanded and expounded his theory, while at the same time criticizing its universal pretensions and its blurring of differences between different types of desire (e.g., male vs. female, heterosexual vs. homosexual).² Literary interpretations that apply Girard’s ideas from his work
Deceit, Desire, and the Novel(1965) to fictional narratives focus on the dynamics of mimetic desire and rivalry between two (or more) characters on the story level: the desiring subject, the mediator (or rival), and the desired object.
FOREWORD from:
The IMAGINATION OF CLASS
Author(s) Brantlinger Patrick
Abstract: On the contributors’ page for the Spring 1992 issue of NOVEL, the editors list Roger Henkle, whose article on George Gissing, Arthur Morrison, and urban poverty in late-nineteenth-century British fiction it contains. Following Roger’s name, they indicate that he “was at work on a book-length study of the fiction of urban poverty in late-Victorian England before his untimely death on October 5, 1991.” Thanks to Professor Daniel Bivona of Arizona State University,
The Imagination of Classis at last the completed version of that book-length study. I am certain that Roger, our mutual friend and Dan’s former mentor and dissertation
CHAPTER 6 Q: WHAT DO SOCRATES AND THE SHORTER CATECHISM HAVE IN COMMON? from:
The REVEREND MARK TWAIN
Abstract: ON MAY 9, 1875, Olivia Clemens, wife of writer Mark Twain, sat writing a letter to her mother. “Mr. Clemens is reading aloud in ‘Plato’s Dialogues,’” she began, “so if I write incoherently you must excuse it” (Gribbon,
Mark Twain’s Library2: 549). This “polyphony in the parlor” is emblematic of the sometimes unexpected influences on Twain’s work; far from causing Twain to “write incoherently,” as it may have for Mrs. Clemens, the writer thrived on a plurality of voices and influences. In the last decade, scholars have increasingly examined minority and female voices in Twain’s writing, analyzing the extent
2 FRENCH INTELLECTUALS, VIOLENCE, AND THE ALGERIAN WAR from:
The Algerian New Novel
Abstract: From 1830 forward, French philosophers, intellectuals, and politicians debated, questioned, and condemned France’s colonial mission immediately following General Bugeaud’s conquest of Algeria.¹ As early as 1833, Xavier de Sade, the liberal deputy of l’Aine, warned against French expansion into Algeria on the grounds that economically and militarily it would weaken France. His outspoken views were echoed by others such as Hippolyte Passy and Théobald Piscatory, both parliamentarians who were adamantly against colonial expansion. Piscatory noted in 1841 that “Africa ruins us during peacetime and weakens us during war. Africa is a disaster, it is madness, and if no end is
8 YAMINA MECHAKRA’S LA GROTTE ÉCLATÉE: from:
The Algerian New Novel
Abstract: This study of the influence of the French New Novel on Algerian writers concludes with the 1979 publication of Yasmina Mechakra’s novel,
La Grotte éclatée(The shattered cave). Like Nabile Farès, Mechakra, writing in the postcolonial era, attempts to make sense of a country that, at the time of the publication of her novel, was not living up to the promises made to particularly women during the revolution. From the ruins of war and these failed promises, at the age of nineteen when she began writing the novel while attending high school in Algiers, Mechakra constructs a text that resurrects
1. LANGUAGE, POWER, AND ASCETICISM from:
Javanese Shadow Plays, Javanese Selves
Abstract: Formal Javanese encounter is remarkable. Among people who are not close kin or longtime associates, and to an extent even among them, face-to-face encounter requires that everyone take great care to behave in a manner appropriate to his or her relative social status, no matter what the business at hand. Vocabulary, sentiment, gesture, timing—all must be adjusted carefully in view of the responses they are liable to arouse among the people present, and in view of one’s own social status relative to theirs. Such issues matter in encounter everywhere, certainly, but in Java the degree to which they have
4. POTENCY, POSSESSION, AND SPEECH from:
Javanese Shadow Plays, Javanese Selves
Abstract: A powerful figure in Java suggests the possibility of protection, wellbeing, and prosperity. He thereby invites voluntary submission. In return for the style and, to some degree, the services indicative of deference, an individual wins some assurance of the powerful person’s material and/or mystical support. However, ideological precepts and practical patterns of avoidance show distrust of the impulse to compromise one’s own sovereignty m dependence upon or submission to a powerful figure. At the same time, such figures may resist people’s attempts to put claims upon them. I have discussed the nature and workings of such ambivalence in relations between
7. THE DHALANG, THE TROUPE, AND THE TRADITION from:
Javanese Shadow Plays, Javanese Selves
Abstract: The dhalang becomes the central figure at a ritual celebration from the time he starts performing until he stops eight or nine hours later. During this time, the sponsors recede discreetly into the background as an unseen though crucial force. Yet if the dhalang appears in some respects obvious, even flamboyant, in his performance, the active agent of an evasive authority, much about the dhalang himself repeats the play of power both constraining and restrained, pervasive yet dissembled. Actually, more diversely and dynamically than in relations between dhalang and sponsors, the links between the dhalang and his troupe, the dhalang
II THE VIRTUE IN AS IF from:
Flannery O'Connor and the Language of Apocalypse
Abstract: After Caroline Gordon read the manuscript of
The Violent Bear it Away, she suggested that O’Connor attend to certain verbal mannerisms, “technical imperfections” that had become habitual. O’Connor was eager to comply, but she wrote to a friend: ”I have just corrected the page proofs and I spent a lot of time gettingseemsandas ifconstructions out of it. It was like getting ticks off a dog. I was blissfully unaware of all this while I was writing it. ...” The stylistic tic remained, however, despite the writer’s conscious efforts, and even in the typescript of a very
AFTERWORD from:
Flannery O'Connor and the Language of Apocalypse
Abstract: In company with other Southern writers, notably the Agrarians, who aspire to embrace a lost tradition and look on history as a repository of value, Flannery O’Connor seems a curious anomaly. She wrote of herself: “I am a Catholic peculiarly possessed of the modern consciousness, that Jung describes as unhistorical, solitary, and guilty.” Likewise her characters comprise a gallery of misfits isolated in a present and sentenced to a lifetime of exile from the human community. In O’Connor’s fiction, the past neither justifies nor even explains what is happening. If she believed, for example, in the importance of the past
II THE VIRTUE IN AS IF from:
Flannery O'Connor and the Language of Apocalypse
Abstract: After Caroline Gordon read the manuscript of
The Violent Bear it Away, she suggested that O’Connor attend to certain verbal mannerisms, “technical imperfections” that had become habitual. O’Connor was eager to comply, but she wrote to a friend: ”I have just corrected the page proofs and I spent a lot of time gettingseemsandas ifconstructions out of it. It was like getting ticks off a dog. I was blissfully unaware of all this while I was writing it. ...” The stylistic tic remained, however, despite the writer’s conscious efforts, and even in the typescript of a very
AFTERWORD from:
Flannery O'Connor and the Language of Apocalypse
Abstract: In company with other Southern writers, notably the Agrarians, who aspire to embrace a lost tradition and look on history as a repository of value, Flannery O’Connor seems a curious anomaly. She wrote of herself: “I am a Catholic peculiarly possessed of the modern consciousness, that Jung describes as unhistorical, solitary, and guilty.” Likewise her characters comprise a gallery of misfits isolated in a present and sentenced to a lifetime of exile from the human community. In O’Connor’s fiction, the past neither justifies nor even explains what is happening. If she believed, for example, in the importance of the past
INTRODUCTION: from:
Language and Desire in Seneca's "Phaedra"
Abstract: From August Wilhelm von Schlegel down to comparatively recent times Senecan tragedy has suffered from comparison with its Greek models.¹ To view Seneca in the shadow of the Greeks, however inevitable, is also to miss the unique qualities of these plays. Instead of the theological concerns and intellectual questioning of Greek drama, Seneca develops the moral conflicts which he took over from the Greek dramatists in ways that owe at least as much to Virgil and Ovid as to Sophocles and Euripides. From his Roman predecessors he inherited a rich vocabulary for exploring morbid states of mind, the dark world
FOUR The Golden Age and Nature from:
Language and Desire in Seneca's "Phaedra"
Abstract: When confronted by Phaedra’s desire, Euripides’ Hippolytus retreats to a Utopian vision of sexless, or rather womanless, reproduction. As an alternative to procreation from women, he desiderates the acquisition of offspring by leaving gold, silver, or bronze in the temples of Zeus (
Hipp.616-24).¹ Seneca’s hero, confronted with Phaedra, takes refuge not in an imaginary social order outside of time or in a timeless present, but in a historical construction, an idealized image of the Golden Age (483-564).
3 Strangers in a strange land?: from:
Literary visions of multicultural Ireland
Author(s) Tucker Amanda
Abstract: In his seminal essay ‘Imaginary Homelands’, Salman Rushdie describes how, at a conference on modern writing, novelists struggled to articulate the purpose of their artform. After these (unnamed) fiction writers outlined the need for ‘new ways of describing the world’, another participant suggested that this objective might be limited. Rushdie argues that description is in fact political and, moreover, that ‘redescribing the world is the necessary first step in changing it’ (Rushdie, 1991: 13). He is particularly interested in how fictional representations might lead to systemic change and sets creative perspectives against official, government-sanctioned points of view: ‘at times when
5 Immigration in Celtic Tiger and post-Celtic Tiger novels from:
Literary visions of multicultural Ireland
Author(s) Estévez-Saá Margarita
Abstract: The history of Ireland and of the Irish is full of stories of deprival, to the extent that they were, for a long time, divested of houses, estates, land, country, and nation, and forced to emigrate. Irish literature, inevitably, has bore witness to this history of deprivation recreating it once and again in an attempt to overcome that trauma, by means of the transformation, reorientation, or re-evaluation of the experience of loss (Balaev, 2008: 164). Recent examples by representative writers of the Irish literary scene are, among others, Joseph O’Connor (
Redemption Falls, 2008), Colm Toíbín (Brooklyn, 2009), and Sebastian Barry
8 ‘Many and terrible are the roads to home’: from:
Literary visions of multicultural Ireland
Author(s) Fogarty Anne
Abstract: In
Fox, Swallow, Scarecrowby Éilís Ní Dhuibhne (2007), Leo Kavanagh, the idealistic but struggling director of a small Irish-language press, muses about his most recent literary discovery. He dreams of the plaudits that await a volume of poems by Kambele Ngole, who is to the best of his knowledge the first black woman poet writing in Irish. The ethnic Otherness of this first-time author along with her gender, he conjectures, will be enticing selling points. Ní Dhuibhne’s novel, which deftly skewers literary culture in Ireland during the Celtic Tiger period, exposes this dream of literary success to be an
14 Hospitality and hauteur: from:
Literary visions of multicultural Ireland
Author(s) Armstrong Charles I.
Abstract: Tourism tends to be observed as an indispensable but regrettable epiphenomenon. For many states it provides a major source of income, facilitating commerce and jobs that make up an important part of the national economy. At the same time, there is a tendency to see tourism as involving a pernicious commodification of space, culture, and people’s lives in general. Common conceptions of tourism tend to circle around cliché and stereotype. In an increasingly globalised economy, tourism is seen as bringing with it particularly reductive and restrictive forms of interaction across national and cultural borders. Relatedly, it is interpreted as being
16 Beginning history again: from:
Literary visions of multicultural Ireland
Author(s) Balzano Wanda
Abstract: In Ireland, especially in the post-Celtic Tiger era, we are witnessing a radical move toward a new historicity and a new feminism. It is almost as if we were given the chance to record time on a new scale and thereby, still resisting patriarchal and capitalistic systems, begin history again, starting from zero. As Alice A. Jardine had anticipated over two decades ago in her ground-breaking critical study
Gynesis: Configurations of Woman and Modernity, the master narratives of history, religion, and philosophy at the turn of the millennium have been placed under close scrutiny, while what was left out of
18 Mean streets, new lives: from:
Literary visions of multicultural Ireland
Author(s) Clark David
Abstract: One of the most interesting phenomena to appear in Irish literature since the late 1990s has been the rise of ‘homegrown’ crime fiction. Irish crime narrative has been strong, historically, as a sub-genre, but until the 1990s had largely been concerned with the representation of fictional crime in non-Irish settings, usually the US or the UK. Since the period immediately prior to the economic boom commonly known as the Celtic Tiger, however, a number of circumstances have given rise to a situation in which, for the first time, Irish readers are demanding novels and other narratives which portray Irish crime
4 The emergence of an Irish humanities ethos from:
The humanities and the Irish university
Abstract: Because the language question was such an important issue for education policy especially in the early years of the State, it is important to look at the work of some of the educationalists and university academics who worked extensively on Irish language literature. One of the first professors of English at University College Cork (UCC), Daniel Corkery, who later spent a great deal of time working on Irish literature, writes in
The Hidden Irelandthat the ‘soul of a people is most intimately revealed, perhaps, in their literature’ (1984: 7). The next sections will therefore examine perspectives on a humanities
Book Title: Sanctity as literature in late medieval Britain- Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): BERNAU ANKE
Abstract: Explores how sanctity and questions of literariness are intertwined across a range of medieval genres.This collection explores some of the many ways in which sanctity was closely intertwined with the development of literary strategies across a range of writings in late medieval Britain. Rather than looking for clues in religious practices in order to explain such changes, or reading literature for information about sanctity, these essays consider the ways in which sanctity - as concept and as theme - allowed writers to articulate and to develop further their 'craft' in specific ways. While scholars in recent years have turned once more to questions of literary form and technique, the kinds of writings considered in this collection - writings that were immensely popular in their own time - have not attracted the same amount of attention as more secular forms. The collection as a whole offers new insights for scholars interested in form, style, poetics, literary history and aesthetics, by considering sanctity first and foremost as literature
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1mf7103
2 Good knights and holy men: from:
Sanctity as literature in late medieval Britain
Author(s) Lynch Andrew
Abstract: Hagiography and romance have long been understood to have some important elements in common, such as narrative patterns of edification and exemplarity, an overlapping repertoire of incidents and motifs, and a penchant for valuing strenuous affectivity, especially bodily suffering. It is not surprising that these literary genres quite frequently occur in the same manuscript miscellanies, or that their heroes can sometimes switch genres.¹ Nor is it surprising that actual knights claimed for themselves a form of religious virtue on the grounds of their bodily trials.² Yet secular knighthood and Christian sanctity are by no means a perfect match. Although soldier
7 Reading classical authors in Capgrave’s Life of St Katherine from:
Sanctity as literature in late medieval Britain
Author(s) James Sarah
Abstract: To characterise John Capgrave as a writer of ‘literature’ has been, until recently, to court controversy, if not outright dissent. In his foreword to the Early English Text Society’s edition of Capgrave’s
Life of St Katherine, Frederick Furnivall spares no time to consider what, if any, literary merit might attach to the work, being instead concerned to provide a rather patronising author portrait before launching into an embittered attack upon Carl Horstmann’s editorial decision-making; the text, it seems, is of no more than antiquarian concern.¹ More recently M. C. Seymour dismisses Capgrave’s literary credentials; hisLife of St Norbertis
Introduction: from:
Sodomscapes
Abstract: The Cleveland Museum of Art houses one of the most challenging treatments of the Sodom story in twentieth-century visual culture, Anselm Kiefer’s multimedia work
Lots Frau(plate 1). It is easy to miss the pale script spelling out “Lots Frau” in the painting’s lower right-hand corner; yet, without it, the work hardly bears relation to either Sodom’s biblical account or the art-historical archive. The inscription supplies only minimal clues, just enough so that the railway tracks and the postapocalyptic landscape eventually prompt recognition of the Sodom story’s generic narrative elements—the drama of exile, the specter of annihilation. For viewers
Book Title: Sin and Evil-Moral Values in Literature
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): PAULSON RONALD
Abstract: The confusion of sin and evil, or religious and moral transgression, is the subject of Ronald Paulson's latest book. He calls attention to the important distinction between sin and Evil (with a capital E) that in our times is largely ignored, and to the further confusion caused by the term "moral values." Ranging widely through the history of Western literature, Paulson focuses particularly on American and English works of the eighteenth through twentieth centuries to discover how questions of evil and sin-and evil and sinful behavior-have been discussed and represented.The breadth of Paulson's discussion is enormous, taking the reader from Greek and Roman tragedy, to Christian satire in the work of Swift and Hogarth, to Hawthorne's and Melville's novels, and finally to twentieth-century studies of good and evil by such authors as James, Conrad, Faulkner, Greene, Heller, Vonnegut, and O'Brien. Where does evil come from? What are "moral values"? If evil is a cultural construct, what does that imply? Paulson's literary tour of sin and evil over the past two hundred years provides not only a historical perspective but also new ways of thinking about important issues that characterize our own era of violence, intolerance, and war.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1njjx9
CHAPTER EIGHT Modern Sin and Evil from:
Sin and Evil
Abstract: In the 1920s, in the aftermath of World War I, Ernest Hemingway described in
A Farewell to Arms(1929) how Frederic Henry leaves the deathbed of his beloved Catherine Barkley, goes for a walk, and remembers an earlier time:
Book Title: Sin and Evil-Moral Values in Literature
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): PAULSON RONALD
Abstract: The confusion of sin and evil, or religious and moral transgression, is the subject of Ronald Paulson's latest book. He calls attention to the important distinction between sin and Evil (with a capital E) that in our times is largely ignored, and to the further confusion caused by the term "moral values." Ranging widely through the history of Western literature, Paulson focuses particularly on American and English works of the eighteenth through twentieth centuries to discover how questions of evil and sin-and evil and sinful behavior-have been discussed and represented.The breadth of Paulson's discussion is enormous, taking the reader from Greek and Roman tragedy, to Christian satire in the work of Swift and Hogarth, to Hawthorne's and Melville's novels, and finally to twentieth-century studies of good and evil by such authors as James, Conrad, Faulkner, Greene, Heller, Vonnegut, and O'Brien. Where does evil come from? What are "moral values"? If evil is a cultural construct, what does that imply? Paulson's literary tour of sin and evil over the past two hundred years provides not only a historical perspective but also new ways of thinking about important issues that characterize our own era of violence, intolerance, and war.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1njjx9
CHAPTER EIGHT Modern Sin and Evil from:
Sin and Evil
Abstract: In the 1920s, in the aftermath of World War I, Ernest Hemingway described in
A Farewell to Arms(1929) how Frederic Henry leaves the deathbed of his beloved Catherine Barkley, goes for a walk, and remembers an earlier time:
Introduction from:
Henri Peyre
Author(s) Maurin Mario
Abstract: At Yale during the late 1940s, I didn’t think it behooved me, a French speaker, to take courses in French. But Henri Peyre’s reputation had spread through the college, and so I decided to take an undergraduate course with him on the modern French novel. At that time I already felt the stirrings of an urge to do some writing. Going on to graduate school and eventually to a teaching career would keep me involved with literary texts. Peyre encouraged me to follow that path, and so I enrolled in the French doctoral program. Like all his other students, I
Book Title: Time and the Shape of History- Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): CORFIELD PENELOPE J.
Abstract: This ambitious book explores the relationship between time and history and shows how an appreciation of long-term time helps to make sense of the past. The book is devoted to a wide-ranging analysis of the way different societies have conceived and interpreted time, and it develops a theory of the threefold roles of continuity, gradual change, and revolution which together form a "braided" history. Linking the interpretative chapters are intriguing brief expositions on time travel, time cycles, time lines, and time pieces, showing the different ways in which human history has been located in time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1np9c3
CHAPTER 1 History in Time from:
Time and the Shape of History
Abstract: To situate history in the long term entails having a view upon time. Its dynamic force provides the unfolding framework within which things both continue from the past and also change. Time’s three perspectival states of past, present, and potential future remain fixed in their successive sequencing. Yet the eras to which they apply are always being updated. As that happens, more history is generated daily for humans to consider.
CHAPTERLINK 1–2: from:
Time and the Shape of History
Abstract: Shaping and reshaping history is a retrospective art, performed after the event. Communal and individual interpretations of the vast and complex past are, however, perennially open to debate – which has spawned the intriguing thought of sending not merely the mind travelling to other epochs but living people to do likewise. If such voyages were to become feasible, then the shape of history could be viewed from both far away and close at hand. And epoch jumpers could not only witness past events to provide a trans-time commentary but they might even, so it is speculated, be able to change things
CHAPTERLINK 3 – 4: from:
Time and the Shape of History
Abstract: Thinking of history as travelling along a line, rather than round in a completed circle, is an alternative way of interpreting the experience of time. The seasons go round; but each spring is a new one, not an old spring revived. Life is viewed as a journey from youth to old age, which is halted only at the ‘journey’s end’ by death. ‘An individual is a four-dimensional object of greatly elongated form. In ordinary language, we say that he [or she] has considerable extension in time and insignificant extension in space,’ explained physicist Arthur Eddington kindly. Not all, of course,
CHAPTERLINK 4 – 5: from:
Time and the Shape of History
Abstract: Paramount among the cataclysmic surprises that history might spring is the possibility of the imminent end of the world. After all, stylistically, an abrupt, transformational finale to any story remains one of the leading alternatives to the slow, gradual fade-out.¹ So perhaps the world will conclude not with a whimper after all, but instead with a bang. Fears and hopes about cosmic endings lead some to intense experiences of ‘time anxiety’ – although for all who worry there are others who scoff at the prospect and others still who just decide to wait and see.
CHAPTER 5 Mutable Modernity from:
Time and the Shape of History
Abstract: As fast as time and history are rejected from the analysis, however, they immediately smuggle themselves back into the picture. Everything within the cosmos occurs within the temporal—spatial process that frames it. Thus, explicitly or implicitly, we seek ways of accommodating ourselves in time and of understanding the trajectory of history.
CHAPTERLINK 5 – 6: from:
Time and the Shape of History
Abstract: Particularly in times of transition, contemporary verdicts become more specific and discussions more intense.
CHAPTER 6 Variable Stages from:
Time and the Shape of History
Abstract: Distinctive epochs in history do not automatically follow in known sequences. So when the novelist F. Scott Fitzgerald, ever sensitive to the mood of his times, described the liberated postwar youth of 1920s America as living in a new ‘Jazz Age’,¹ he did not mean that it followed the ‘age of Classical Music’ and even less did he predict an ensuing ‘age of Rock ’n’ Roll’. It was enough for Fitzgerald to invoke a frenetic, jazzy alternative to what seemed to him, in retrospect, to be the staider, calmer world that existed before the First World War, even though those
CHAPTERLINK 6 – 7: from:
Time and the Shape of History
Abstract: All societies have ways of locating themselves in time and history. That is far from saying that the popular recall of the past is perfect. On the contrary, many are the complaints that people today – led especially, it seems, by the young – are constituting a heedless ‘Now Generation’ that knows nothing of olden times. ‘Speak so much of memory because there is so little of it left,’ the French historian Pierre Nora exclaimed dramatically in 1989. And he is not alone in expressing such anxieties.
CHAPTER 7 Multiple Dimensions from:
Time and the Shape of History
Abstract: It is often said, rather sweepingly, that people do not learn from the ‘dead’ past, which anyway never repeats itself. But all the components of that remark are misleading. The past is not simply ‘dead’. Significant elements survive into the present. The past may thus provide instructive parallels between one period of time and another, even if no events are literally rerun. And we learn too from happenings that are rare and strange as well as from those that are habitual and routine. All this renders knowledge of both past and present into an invaluable resource. After all, we cannot
CHAPTERLINK 7 – 8: from:
Time and the Shape of History
Abstract: Understanding the forces of temporality provides one of the great themes of human enquiry.¹ Much lore is enshrined, not only in learned study, but communally, in myths, literature and proverbs.² Clues are thus provided to the paradoxical properties of time as daily encountered. It not only ‘moves’ and takes specific forms – but it also, simply but inexorably, is . Human perceptions and responses are explored here, panoramically, to enjoy as well as to acknowledge time-power.
CHAPTER 8 History Past and Future from:
Time and the Shape of History
Abstract: With my skin I measured uncountable dimensions of time-space, with it I fathomed the flights of youth and the downfalls of the age of defeats. / To be in the
CODA: from:
Time and the Shape of History
Abstract: Evidence for history’s dynamic combination of persistence, adaptation and transformation can be seen everywhere. The mixture is apparent within ourselves: both physically, as living amalgams of carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, nitrogen and other trace elements, that precede and survive us in other forms; and psychologically, within our personalities and consciousness, which throughout a lifetime cope or strive to cope with existing in time and surviving/changing within it.
CHAPTER 3 Fascist Subjects: from:
Contesting Democracy
Abstract: Many decades after the fall of Hitler’s and Mussolini’s regimes a generally agreed theoretical account of fascism – or just a definition – has remained elusive. There is not even consensus about whether fascism is a strictly limited historical term, something that happened to Italians (or rather was perpetrated by Italians) between 1922 and 1945, or a universal phenomenon. The disputes surrounding fascism are not just a result of academic nitpicking; they point to what appear to be characteristics of the thing itself. At least rhetorically, fascism was opposed to ‘reason’; it glorified will, intuition and sentiment. One could feel
CHAPTER 5 The New Time of Contestation: from:
Contesting Democracy
Abstract: The twentieth century demonstrated that Europe was no longer central to world politics. It had done so brutally in the First and Second World Wars; in a less obvious – and, of course, less brutal – way the 1960s were also to drive home this point. The decade seemed to synchronize political and cultural dissatisfaction around the globe – what the CIA at the time referred to as a ‘world-wide phenomenon of restless youth’ (another American institution,
Timemagazine, would actually declare youth the ‘Man of the Year’ in 1967). Outside Western Europe, the political stakes were clearly very high:
CHAPTER 5 Strategies from:
The Event of Literature
Abstract: It is now time to shift the question of whether things share a common nature from literature itself to the theories which investigate it. What, if anything, do literary theories have in common? What links semiotics and feminism, Formalism and psychoanalysis, Marxism and hermeneutics or post-structuralism and reception aesthetics?
Introduction from:
Who Was Jacques Derrida?
Abstract: During his lifetime, Derrida elicited both intense celebration and intense scorn. Rather than judging him in the manner of his disapproving critics, or celebrating him like his followers, I aim to explain his career. Now that Derrida is gone, it is time for a more measured assessment of his worth. His thought was neither as world changing as his disciples claimed nor as dangerous (or absurd) as his critics suspected. It does, however, offer us a necessary lesson concerning the self-imposed limits of philosophy: the way that it tries to purify itself, and the hazards of such purity. Derrida’s work,
IV Gadamer, Celan, de Man, Heidegger from:
Who Was Jacques Derrida?
Abstract: “America is deconstruction.” Derrida’s pronouncement certainly seemed to be true in the 1980s, when he spent much of his time lecturing in the United States. He would land on a Saturday afternoon at JFK and be met by his Yale colleagues Paul de Man and J. Hillis Miller. An enthusiastic visitor to New York, he loved Brooklyn Heights and Poets’ Alley in Central Park. And there was the desolate, stirring landscape of Laguna Beach, where he lived while teaching at the University of California at Irvine. Invoking Central Park together with the southern California coast, Derrida wrote, “Almost out loud
Book Title: The Enlightenment and the Intellectual Foundations of Modern Culture- Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): DUPRÉ LOUIS
Abstract: The Enlightenment's critique of tradition was a necessary consequence of the fundamental modern principle that we humans are solely responsible for the course of history. Hence we can accept no belief, no authority, no institutions that are not in some way justified. This foundation, for better or for worse, determined the course of the following centuries. Despite contemporary reactions against it, the Enlightenment continues to shape our own time and still distinguishes Western culture from any other.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1npfbd
8 The Religious Crisis from:
The Enlightenment and the Intellectual Foundations of Modern Culture
Abstract: The impact of the Enlightenment was undoubtedly felt most deeply in the area of religion, either as loss or as liberation. It was particularly severe in France and in England, where for a long time skeptical philosophies had undermined the foundations of Christian beliefs. By the end of the eighteenth century, the French masses, pressed by economic hardship, felt abandoned by a Church closely linked to a political regime indifferent to their suffering. In England, after two centuries of religious turmoil, the willingness of the Church to adapt its doctrine to the will of the sovereign had drained common people
10 Spiritual Continuity and Renewal from:
The Enlightenment and the Intellectual Foundations of Modern Culture
Abstract: The ideas discussed in this chapter differ considerably from the ones we have come to consider characteristic of the Enlightenment. Not only do they fall outside the rationalist trends of the age, but they contrast just as much with those that opposed that rationalism. Some of the most prominent and influential thinkers of the time appear to have bypassed the dominant controversies altogether. Unlike the so-called anti-Enlightenment thinkers, the ones presented here do not seek, or do not seek in the first place, alternatives to the prevailing ideologies. They mostly ignore them. Their ideas remain largely continuous with those of
Book Title: The Enlightenment and the Intellectual Foundations of Modern Culture- Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): DUPRÉ LOUIS
Abstract: The Enlightenment's critique of tradition was a necessary consequence of the fundamental modern principle that we humans are solely responsible for the course of history. Hence we can accept no belief, no authority, no institutions that are not in some way justified. This foundation, for better or for worse, determined the course of the following centuries. Despite contemporary reactions against it, the Enlightenment continues to shape our own time and still distinguishes Western culture from any other.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1npfbd
8 The Religious Crisis from:
The Enlightenment and the Intellectual Foundations of Modern Culture
Abstract: The impact of the Enlightenment was undoubtedly felt most deeply in the area of religion, either as loss or as liberation. It was particularly severe in France and in England, where for a long time skeptical philosophies had undermined the foundations of Christian beliefs. By the end of the eighteenth century, the French masses, pressed by economic hardship, felt abandoned by a Church closely linked to a political regime indifferent to their suffering. In England, after two centuries of religious turmoil, the willingness of the Church to adapt its doctrine to the will of the sovereign had drained common people
10 Spiritual Continuity and Renewal from:
The Enlightenment and the Intellectual Foundations of Modern Culture
Abstract: The ideas discussed in this chapter differ considerably from the ones we have come to consider characteristic of the Enlightenment. Not only do they fall outside the rationalist trends of the age, but they contrast just as much with those that opposed that rationalism. Some of the most prominent and influential thinkers of the time appear to have bypassed the dominant controversies altogether. Unlike the so-called anti-Enlightenment thinkers, the ones presented here do not seek, or do not seek in the first place, alternatives to the prevailing ideologies. They mostly ignore them. Their ideas remain largely continuous with those of
Book Title: Simplexity-Simplifying Principles for a Complex World'
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Weiss Giselle
Abstract: In a sense, the history of living organisms may be summed up by their remarkable ability to find solutions that avoid the world's complexity by imposing on it their own rules and functions. Evolution has resolved the problem of complexity not by simplifying but by finding solutions whose processes-though they can sometimes be complex-allow us to act in the midst of complexity and of uncertainty. Nature can inspire us by making us realize that simplification is never simple and requires instead that we choose, refuse, connect, and imagine, in order to act in the best possible manner. Such solutions are already being applied in design and engineering and are significant in biology, medicine, economics, and the behavioral sciences.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1nph7v
7. The Laws of Natural Movement from:
Simplexity
Abstract: Have you ever seen an anatomical cutaway—one of those images that reveal the extraordinary complexity of the network of subcutaneous nerves that link the muscles to the spinal cord and ultimately to the brain? One of the problems posed by this complex network is that of transmission delays. In the human male, the distance from the foot to the cerebellum is around 1.80 meters, whereas a distance of barely 15 centimeters separates the neck from the cerebellum. As a result, if the speed of transmission along the nerves was the same for the feet and the neck, it would
10. Simplex Space from:
Simplexity
Abstract: Let us now quickly review the neural basis of spatial processing in the brain. The goal here is not to present a course on physiology but to show how the spatialization of perception, action, memory, and decision making reduces complexity, sometimes by way of detours that, in turn, engender simplexity This theory has been revisited several times since neuroscientist and, later, Nobel Laureate Santiago Ramón y Cajal revealed the remarkable diversity of neuronal morphology. It seems obvious when we recall that the body, or even the outside world, is represented in the brain by neural maps organized by “topies,” which
11. Perceiving, Experiencing,and Imagining Space from:
Simplexity
Abstract: The preceding chapter presented examples of the variety and the importance of brain mechanisms dealing with or using space. We also touched upon the problem of the relation between space and time and how it may contribute to simplexity. Now we will explore some of the more challenging questions relating to the role of space. Specifically, we will consider the foundations of geometry, first because, as we have seen, the brain is structured according to geometric kinematic laws, and second because mathematicians specializing in geometry use the word “simplex.”
Book Title: Simplexity-Simplifying Principles for a Complex World'
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Weiss Giselle
Abstract: In a sense, the history of living organisms may be summed up by their remarkable ability to find solutions that avoid the world's complexity by imposing on it their own rules and functions. Evolution has resolved the problem of complexity not by simplifying but by finding solutions whose processes-though they can sometimes be complex-allow us to act in the midst of complexity and of uncertainty. Nature can inspire us by making us realize that simplification is never simple and requires instead that we choose, refuse, connect, and imagine, in order to act in the best possible manner. Such solutions are already being applied in design and engineering and are significant in biology, medicine, economics, and the behavioral sciences.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1nph7v
7. The Laws of Natural Movement from:
Simplexity
Abstract: Have you ever seen an anatomical cutaway—one of those images that reveal the extraordinary complexity of the network of subcutaneous nerves that link the muscles to the spinal cord and ultimately to the brain? One of the problems posed by this complex network is that of transmission delays. In the human male, the distance from the foot to the cerebellum is around 1.80 meters, whereas a distance of barely 15 centimeters separates the neck from the cerebellum. As a result, if the speed of transmission along the nerves was the same for the feet and the neck, it would
10. Simplex Space from:
Simplexity
Abstract: Let us now quickly review the neural basis of spatial processing in the brain. The goal here is not to present a course on physiology but to show how the spatialization of perception, action, memory, and decision making reduces complexity, sometimes by way of detours that, in turn, engender simplexity This theory has been revisited several times since neuroscientist and, later, Nobel Laureate Santiago Ramón y Cajal revealed the remarkable diversity of neuronal morphology. It seems obvious when we recall that the body, or even the outside world, is represented in the brain by neural maps organized by “topies,” which
11. Perceiving, Experiencing,and Imagining Space from:
Simplexity
Abstract: The preceding chapter presented examples of the variety and the importance of brain mechanisms dealing with or using space. We also touched upon the problem of the relation between space and time and how it may contribute to simplexity. Now we will explore some of the more challenging questions relating to the role of space. Specifically, we will consider the foundations of geometry, first because, as we have seen, the brain is structured according to geometric kinematic laws, and second because mathematicians specializing in geometry use the word “simplex.”
Book Title: The American Classics-A Personal Essay
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Donoghue Denis
Abstract: How is a classic book to be defined? How much time must elapse before a work may be judged a "classic"? And among all the works of American literature, which deserve the designation? In this provocative new book Denis Donoghue essays to answer these questions. He presents his own short list of "relative" classics--works whose appeal may not be universal but which nonetheless have occupied an important place in our culture for more than a century. These books have survived the abuses of time-neglect, contempt, indifference, willful readings, excesses of praise, and hyperbole.Donoghue bestows the term classic on just five American works: Melville's
Moby-Dick, Hawthorne'sThe Scarlet Letter, Thoreau'sWalden, Whitman'sLeaves of Grass, and Twain'sAdventures of Huckleberry Finn.Examining each in a separate chapter, he discusses how the writings have been received and interpreted, and he offers his own contemporary readings, suggesting, for example, that in the post-9/11 era,Moby-Dickmay be rewardingly read as a revenge tragedy. Donoghue extends an irresistible invitation to open the pages of these American classics again, demonstrating with wit and acuity how very much they have to say to us now.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1nphkp
6 Adventures of Huckleberry Finn from:
The American Classics
Abstract: I’ve mentioned that with
American Renaissance (1941)Matthiessen established that America had a literature: specifically, that in the middle of the nineteenth century America for the first time produced a literature—and therefore a culture—to be acknowledged as such. Not that the country had lacked good writers till 1855; but they had not come together in their differences to make a declaration of literary and cultural independence. Emerson, Hawthorne, Melville, and Whitman made a literature, such that earlier and later American writers might be construed in relation to one or another of those four, as Henry James might be
1 The University Is Popular Culture, But It Doesn’t Know It Yet from:
Clueless in Academe
Abstract: AN OLD SAYING HAS IT that academic disputes are especially vicious because so little is at stake in them. Behind the sentiment lies the belief that the intellectual culture of academia is arid and self-absorbed, its head in the sand or the clouds, concerned with rarefied stuff that real people don’t give a damn about. And there was more than a grain of truth to this view before World War II, when higher education was the privilege of a tiny social elite and the disciplines were dominated by a narrowly antiquarian and positivistic view of inquiry, which was seen as
2 The Problem Problem and Other Oddities of Academic Discourse from:
Clueless in Academe
Abstract: AS TEACHERS WE OFTEN PROCEED as if the rationale of our most basic academic practices is understood and shared by our students, even though we get plenty of signs that it is not. We take for granted, for example, that reflecting in a self-conscious way about experience— “intellectualizing”—is something our students naturally see the point of and want to learn to do better. If they don’t, after all, why are they in school? At the same time, we cannot help noticing that many students are skeptical about the value of such intellectualizing. When students do poorly, the reasons often
CHAPTER 3 Ways In and Out of the Hermeneutic Circle from:
Theory of Literature
Abstract: Despite the intimidating sound of the word, “hermeneutics” is easily defined as the science of interpretation. You would think hermeneutics had always been a matter of interest, but in fact it’s of continuous interest only fairly recently. Aristotle did write a treatise called
De Interpretatione, and the Middle Ages were much concerned with interpretation, so I suppose what I’m saying in part is that the word “hermeneutics” wasn’t then available; but it’s also true that at many times the idea that there ought to be a systematic study of how we interpret things wasn’t a matter of pressing concern.
CHAPTER 7 Russian Formalism from:
Theory of Literature
Abstract: We now start a sequence that takes us through deconstruction, a sequence that has genuine continuity. I don’t have to stretch to point out similarities and divergences because the ensuing series of theorists are themselves retrospectively working with all the interconnections I could see fit to mention. Nevertheless, for later developments, the relationship between the foundational Russian formalists and the foundational work of the linguist Ferdinand de Saussure is a rather complex matter that I’m going to postpone summing up for some time. Much will become clearer when we actually get into what’s called “structuralism” and you read the essay
CHAPTER 8 Semiotics and Structuralism from:
Theory of Literature
Abstract: Let me begin by repeating my intention to postpone a comparison and contrast of the Russian formalists with Ferdinand de Saussure’s concept of semiotics until we discuss Roman Jakobson’s “Linguistics and Poetics,” at which time I think the relationship between the two movements in which he himself was involved will come into focus more naturally than if I tried now to outline what the connection between the two movements is.
CHAPTER 14 Influence from:
Theory of Literature
Abstract: Those of you who are chiefly familiar with
How to Read a Poem, the books on religion, andShakespeare and the Invention of the Humanmay be surprised to find Harold Bloom on a literary theory syllabus; but the great outpouring of work that began withThe Anxiety of Influence, A Map of Misreading, Poetry and Repression, and many other books in the 1970s put Bloom in the very midst of the theoretical controversies then swirling. He was associated with the so-called Yale school, and although even at the time he expressed disaffection with many aspects of his colleagues’ work,
CHAPTER 18 The Political Unconscious from:
Theory of Literature
Abstract: Last time I reviewed four possible options for an aesthetics of Marxist approaches to literature and art. I paused over realism, both objective realism as it accorded with the tastes and historical agendas of Engels and Lukács, and also tendentious realism as it pervaded the Soviet world, especially after 1934, with the participatory aesthetic of Walter Benjamin in 1936–1937 considered as a way of lending theoretical interest to tendentious realism. I then mentioned two ways of turning away from realism once it has become a cornerstone of bourgeois ideology. The first of these is the high modernist aesthetic of
CHAPTER 20 The Classical Feminist Tradition from:
Theory of Literature
Abstract: Quite a bit of this lecture consists in preliminaries, yet like the rhetorical device called “prolepsis” in literary texts, they are preliminaries that cover for the first time topics to be revisited later.
CHAPTER 24 The Institutional Construction of Literary Study from:
Theory of Literature
Abstract: We’ve now completed a sequence of theoretical approaches to identity, always with a view—though rather often lately a view from afar—to the way identity is constructed in literature. I’ll return to what may have seemed at times the missing link, literature, in a minute. In the meantime, I just wanted to point out something I’m sure you’ve noticed even when I haven’t mentioned it: namely, that each of these approaches to identity has a history in two chapters. Each history arrives at a second chapter that is something like a deconstructive moment, signifying on theory itself, on the
CHAPTER 26 Conclusion: from:
Theory of Literature
Abstract: In the last lecture, we offered theory a reprieve from its banishment by Knapp and Michaels, and we did so by saying that there really is a difference between language and speech. That’s a claim that I want to continue investigating in today’s concluding lecture. In the meantime, when I keep saying we saved theory, you may well be asking why anybody would bother saving it. We began to wonder last time, especially in view of the neo-pragmatists’ claims about the common agency of language and speech—understood on their view to be one and the same thing—whether we
Book Title: In Search of the Early Christians-Selected Essays
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): SNYDER H. GREGORY
Abstract: A central figure in the reconception of early Christian history over the last three decades, Wayne A. Meeks offers here a selection of his most influential writings on the New Testament and early Christianity. His essays illustrate recent changes in our thinking about the early Christian movement and pose provocative questions regarding the history of this period.Meeks explores a fascinating range of topics, from the figure of the androgyne in antiquity to the timeless matter of God's reliability, from Paul's ethical rhetoric to New Testament pictures of Christianity's separation from Jewish communities. Meeks' introduction offers a retrospective on New Testament studies of the past thirty years and explains the intersection of these studies with a variety of exploratory and revisionist movements in the humanities, embracing social theory, history, anthropology, and literature. In an epilogue the author reflects on future directions for New Testament scholarship.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1npn08
VISION OF GOD AND SCRIPTURE INTERPRETATION IN A FIFTH-CENTURY MOSAIC from:
In Search of the Early Christians
Abstract: Sometime in the reign of the iconoclastic emperor Leo V “the Armenian” (813–820), a monk named Senouphios “in the hills of Nitria in Egypt” heard a voice from heaven directing him to go “to the monastery in Thessaloniki called ‘of the stonecutters’ (Λατóμων).” Senouphios “had been begging God for a long time to be allowed to see him as he would come to judge the earth”; hearing this clear answer to his prayer, he set off at once with only his cloak and staff. After many adventures he arrived in the distant metropolis, only to be told by the
4 THE BOOK THAT CONTAINS AND MAINTAINS ALL from:
Absorbing Perfections
Abstract: Books are not simply literary objects to be arranged carefully on library shelves; neither are they simple mediators of ideas between minds or media for, to resort to Ricoeur’s felicitous term, “proposed worlds.”¹ They are also nebulas created by rumors, religious belief, wise advertisement, or, in more modern times, the consumption of a variety of critiques. They are units that constitute intellectual fashions, which in turn create predispositions toward the reception and digestion of their own and other books’ content. Books, especially famous books, possess auras that may enwrap them long before most of their readers open them. The social
13 TRADITION, TRANSMISSION, AND TECHNIQUES from:
Absorbing Perfections
Abstract: So far we have examined the different ways in which the worlds of the sacred texts were imagined by various Jewish mystical thinkers and how they interpreted those books. In the past few chapters the emphasis has been on explicating the exegetical techniques, which offered the strong exegetes the possibility of discovering, in fact rediscovering, religious worlds that had previously been adopted by the Kabbalists, or sometimes by their philosophical sources, from a variety of relatively late intellectual and literary corpora—mostly Greek thought as translated and adapted in Arabic and, less frequently, Latin. We should be aware, however, that
4 THE BOOK THAT CONTAINS AND MAINTAINS ALL from:
Absorbing Perfections
Abstract: Books are not simply literary objects to be arranged carefully on library shelves; neither are they simple mediators of ideas between minds or media for, to resort to Ricoeur’s felicitous term, “proposed worlds.”¹ They are also nebulas created by rumors, religious belief, wise advertisement, or, in more modern times, the consumption of a variety of critiques. They are units that constitute intellectual fashions, which in turn create predispositions toward the reception and digestion of their own and other books’ content. Books, especially famous books, possess auras that may enwrap them long before most of their readers open them. The social
13 TRADITION, TRANSMISSION, AND TECHNIQUES from:
Absorbing Perfections
Abstract: So far we have examined the different ways in which the worlds of the sacred texts were imagined by various Jewish mystical thinkers and how they interpreted those books. In the past few chapters the emphasis has been on explicating the exegetical techniques, which offered the strong exegetes the possibility of discovering, in fact rediscovering, religious worlds that had previously been adopted by the Kabbalists, or sometimes by their philosophical sources, from a variety of relatively late intellectual and literary corpora—mostly Greek thought as translated and adapted in Arabic and, less frequently, Latin. We should be aware, however, that
4 THE BOOK THAT CONTAINS AND MAINTAINS ALL from:
Absorbing Perfections
Abstract: Books are not simply literary objects to be arranged carefully on library shelves; neither are they simple mediators of ideas between minds or media for, to resort to Ricoeur’s felicitous term, “proposed worlds.”¹ They are also nebulas created by rumors, religious belief, wise advertisement, or, in more modern times, the consumption of a variety of critiques. They are units that constitute intellectual fashions, which in turn create predispositions toward the reception and digestion of their own and other books’ content. Books, especially famous books, possess auras that may enwrap them long before most of their readers open them. The social
13 TRADITION, TRANSMISSION, AND TECHNIQUES from:
Absorbing Perfections
Abstract: So far we have examined the different ways in which the worlds of the sacred texts were imagined by various Jewish mystical thinkers and how they interpreted those books. In the past few chapters the emphasis has been on explicating the exegetical techniques, which offered the strong exegetes the possibility of discovering, in fact rediscovering, religious worlds that had previously been adopted by the Kabbalists, or sometimes by their philosophical sources, from a variety of relatively late intellectual and literary corpora—mostly Greek thought as translated and adapted in Arabic and, less frequently, Latin. We should be aware, however, that
4 THE BOOK THAT CONTAINS AND MAINTAINS ALL from:
Absorbing Perfections
Abstract: Books are not simply literary objects to be arranged carefully on library shelves; neither are they simple mediators of ideas between minds or media for, to resort to Ricoeur’s felicitous term, “proposed worlds.”¹ They are also nebulas created by rumors, religious belief, wise advertisement, or, in more modern times, the consumption of a variety of critiques. They are units that constitute intellectual fashions, which in turn create predispositions toward the reception and digestion of their own and other books’ content. Books, especially famous books, possess auras that may enwrap them long before most of their readers open them. The social
13 TRADITION, TRANSMISSION, AND TECHNIQUES from:
Absorbing Perfections
Abstract: So far we have examined the different ways in which the worlds of the sacred texts were imagined by various Jewish mystical thinkers and how they interpreted those books. In the past few chapters the emphasis has been on explicating the exegetical techniques, which offered the strong exegetes the possibility of discovering, in fact rediscovering, religious worlds that had previously been adopted by the Kabbalists, or sometimes by their philosophical sources, from a variety of relatively late intellectual and literary corpora—mostly Greek thought as translated and adapted in Arabic and, less frequently, Latin. We should be aware, however, that
III Truth: from:
The Good, the True, and the Beautiful
Abstract: Western philosophy grew from that of the ancient Greeks at the end of the seventh century bce. Among the first were the Milesians: Thales (ca. 624–548 bce), Anaximander (ca. 611–547 bce), and Anaximenes (ca. 570–500 bce). As Geoffrey Lloyd recounted in 1970, this was a time of important technological progress, the end of the Bronze Age and the beginning of the Iron Age. Classification developed from observation and rationalization. These early philosophers discovered nature and distinguished between natural and supernatural, and they then avoided the supernatural. Thales declared that gods were everywhere, but he left them there.
V Molecules and the Mind from:
The Good, the True, and the Beautiful
Abstract: Since ancient times we have accepted the concept of active chemical substances in the human body. In 1877 Emil du Bois-Reymond suggested two possible mechanisms: “At the boundary of the contractile substance, either there exists a
Chapter 5 Not My Will But Thine from:
The Spirit of Early Christian Thought
Abstract: THE EARLY CHRISTIANS, it is sometimes alleged, were given to squabbling over picayune points of doctrine. In the great debate over the doctrine of the Trinity in the fourth century, the issue seemed to turn on a single letter, the Greek iota, what Edward Gibbon called a “furious contest” over a diphthong. Was the Son of “like substance” with the Father, using a Greek word with an iota (
omoiousion), or of the “same substance” with the Father, using a Greekn word without an iota (omoousion)? Yet the iota signified a genuine, not contrived, difference over a matter of great moment,
Chapter 7 The Reasonableness of Faith from:
The Spirit of Early Christian Thought
Abstract: THE CENSORIOUS CHARGE that Christian thinking relies on faith, not reason, is as old as the church itself. As early as the mid second century the physician and philosopher Galen complained that it was pointless to engage Christians in discussion because they never give arguments for what they believe. They only make appeals to “God commanded” or “God spoke.” In
True Doctrine,written about the same time, Celsus echoed Galen’s accusation: “Some Christians,” he wrote, “do not even want to give or to receive a reason for what they believe, and use expressions such as ‘Do not ask questions, just
Book Title: Edmund Husserl and Eugen Fink-Beginnings and Ends in Phenomenology, 1928–1938
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): BRUZINA RONALD
Abstract: Eugen Fink was Edmund Husserl's research assistant during the last decade of the renowned phenomenologist's life, a period in which Husserl's philosophical ideas were radically recast. In this landmark book, Ronald Bruzina shows that Fink was actually a collaborator with Husserl, contributing indispensable elements to their common enterprise.Drawing on hundreds of hitherto unknown notes and drafts by Fink, Bruzina highlights the scope and depth of his theories and critiques. He places these philosophical formulations in their historical setting, organizes them around such key themes as the world, time, life, and the concept and methodological place of the "meontic," and demonstrates that they were a pivotal impetus for the renewing of "regress to the origins" in transcendental-constitutive phenomenology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1nppmd
1 Contextual Narrative: from:
Edmund Husserl and Eugen Fink
Abstract: Philosophy is never done nowhere. If it is not the work of a particular someone at a particular time and in a particular place, then it
isnot at all. What we shall be looking into is the philosophy that was done in a special place at a very special time in the history of the twentieth century, but the question of the particular someone is precisely the matter that is at issue. For it was not just one particular person who was involved; there was a second particular someone engaged in this same philosophic endeavor. The two, of course,
5 Fundamental Thematics II: from:
Edmund Husserl and Eugen Fink
Abstract: If we would begin the treatment of time and temporality at the level of critical phenomenological consideration sketched out in the previous three chapters, we could simply start with material drawn from Fink’s notes and sketches for the study of time beyond the Bernau texts, that is, from 1933 and 1934 (and later), correlating them with Husserl’s newer work in the C-manuscripts on temporality of 1930 to 1934. For example, the critical insights we considered in chapter 4 are neatly continued in some of the points Fink makes in several outline variants for an “Introduction” to his then projected “time-book.”
Book Title: Edmund Husserl and Eugen Fink-Beginnings and Ends in Phenomenology, 1928–1938
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): BRUZINA RONALD
Abstract: Eugen Fink was Edmund Husserl's research assistant during the last decade of the renowned phenomenologist's life, a period in which Husserl's philosophical ideas were radically recast. In this landmark book, Ronald Bruzina shows that Fink was actually a collaborator with Husserl, contributing indispensable elements to their common enterprise.Drawing on hundreds of hitherto unknown notes and drafts by Fink, Bruzina highlights the scope and depth of his theories and critiques. He places these philosophical formulations in their historical setting, organizes them around such key themes as the world, time, life, and the concept and methodological place of the "meontic," and demonstrates that they were a pivotal impetus for the renewing of "regress to the origins" in transcendental-constitutive phenomenology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1nppmd
1 Contextual Narrative: from:
Edmund Husserl and Eugen Fink
Abstract: Philosophy is never done nowhere. If it is not the work of a particular someone at a particular time and in a particular place, then it
isnot at all. What we shall be looking into is the philosophy that was done in a special place at a very special time in the history of the twentieth century, but the question of the particular someone is precisely the matter that is at issue. For it was not just one particular person who was involved; there was a second particular someone engaged in this same philosophic endeavor. The two, of course,
5 Fundamental Thematics II: from:
Edmund Husserl and Eugen Fink
Abstract: If we would begin the treatment of time and temporality at the level of critical phenomenological consideration sketched out in the previous three chapters, we could simply start with material drawn from Fink’s notes and sketches for the study of time beyond the Bernau texts, that is, from 1933 and 1934 (and later), correlating them with Husserl’s newer work in the C-manuscripts on temporality of 1930 to 1934. For example, the critical insights we considered in chapter 4 are neatly continued in some of the points Fink makes in several outline variants for an “Introduction” to his then projected “time-book.”
Book Title: Freedom and Time-A Theory of Constitutional Self-Government
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): RUBENFELD JED
Abstract: Should we try to "live in the present"? Such is the imperative of modernity, Jed Rubenfeld writes in this important and original work of political theory. Since Jefferson proclaimed that "the earth belongs to the living"-since Freud announced that mental health requires people to "get free of their past"-since Nietzsche declared that the happy man is the man who "leaps" into "the moment-modernity has directed its inhabitants to live in the present, as if there alone could they find happiness, authenticity, and above all freedom.But this imperative, Rubenfeld argues, rests on a profoundly inadequate, deforming picture of the relationship between freedom and time. Instead, Rubenfeld suggests, human freedom-human being itself--necessarily extends into both past and future; self-government consists of giving our lives meaning and purpose over time. From this conception of self-government, Rubenfeld derives a new theory of constitutional law's place in democracy. Democracy, he writes, is not a matter of governance by the present "will of the people"; it is a matter of a nation's laying down and living up to enduring political and legal commitments. Constitutionalism is not counter to democracy, as many believe, or a pre-condition of democracy; it is or should be democracy itself--over time. On this basis, Rubenfeld offers a new understanding of constitutional interpretation and of the fundamental right of privacy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1npqs8
One THE MOMENT AND THE MILLENNIUM from:
Freedom and Time
Abstract: What could I say? Maybe this: the man hunched over his motorcycle can focus only on the present instant of his flight; he is caught in a fragment of time cut off from both the past and the future; he is wrenched from the continuity of time; he is outside time;
Five COMMITMENT from:
Freedom and Time
Abstract: If we think candidly about how we live, how we modern Western men and women exercise the tremendous degree of autonomy so many of us undeservedly possess, we will find that we do not “live in the present” at all. Much of our time we spend working out the possibilities and requirements of projects and attachments—to persons, places, purposes—to which we engaged ourselves some time in the past. We decide what to do
giventhese temporally extended projects and attachments. In other words, we constantly act now on the basis of decisions, relations, and intentions formed in the
Six REASON OVER TIME from:
Freedom and Time
Abstract: The first time Arrow’s name appeared in this book, the subject was the reappearance, within contemporary economic thought, of Jefferson’s proposition that the earth belongs to the living. (Rational economic policy, Arrow suggests, would take into account the interests of future citizens only to the extent that there is a present preference among living individuals to do so.)¹ A similar observation applies to Arrow’s famous Impossibility Theorem. It relies on an understanding of rationality that, while characteristic of modern economic thought and much analytic philosophy, is untenably compressed in its temporality—compressed into the present.
Seven BEING OVER TIME from:
Freedom and Time
Abstract: The ontological objection against popular commitments, it will be recalled, maintains that there is no such thing as a “People,” understood as a collective subject persisting across generations. This chapter, like the last one, will attempt to show: (1) that contrary to what is usually thought, the objection applies to persons as well as to peoples; and (2) that the way we answer the objection in the case of persons further explains the place of time and of commitments in an adequate account of human self-government. In addition, the answer to the ontological objection in the case of persons furnishes
Nine CONSTITUTIONALISM AS DEMOCRACY from:
Freedom and Time
Abstract: Democratic self-government cannot be achieved, even in principle, by way of a politics of popular voice. It requires an inscriptive politics, through which a people struggles to memorialize, interpret, and hold itself to its own foundational commitments over time. I will call this idea: constitutionalism as democracy. The purpose of this and the final three chapters is to lay out the basic terms of constitutionalism as democracy: its theory of judicial review, its interpretive method, its fundamental rights.
Book Title: Frontiers of History-Historical Inquiry in the Twentieth Century
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): KELLEY DONALD R.
Abstract: This book, the third volume of Donald Kelley's monumental survey of Western historiography, covers the twentieth century, especially Europe. As in the first two volumes, the author discusses historical methods and ideas of all sorts to provide a detailed map of historical learning. Here he carries the survey forward to our own times, confronting directly the challenges of postmodernism and historical narrative. Kelley offers highly original discussions of historians of the last half century (including friends and mentors), the "linguistic turn," the "end of history," the philosophy of history, and various new methods of histories.The book focuses first on the state of the art of history in France, Germany, Britain, and the United States on the eve of World War I. Kelley then traces every important historiographical issue and development historians have encountered in the twentieth century. With the completion of this trilogy, Kelley presents the only comprehensive modern survey of historical writing. He provides an unparalleled portrait of the rich variety of historical method along with an insider's view of the challenges of capturing history on the written page.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1nps1j
3 After the Great War from:
Frontiers of History
Abstract: The dream of Enlightenment was tempered by the “nightmare of history.” So Freud turned from the pleasure principle to the death instinct, with
erosbeing joined bythanatosin a fuller conception of culture in the continuum of time—and “in the shadow of tomorrow.”
4 Modern Times from:
Frontiers of History
Abstract: Like Kafka, Eliot exaggerated his own age and, despite his reliance on Western tradition, regarded the Europe of his day as a “decayed house”—“heartbreak house,” Bernard Shaw called it. “And what are poets for in a destitute time?” asked Heidegger, repeating the question posed by Hölderlin well
6 Circumspect and Prospect from:
Frontiers of History
Abstract: The story told eccentrically in these volumes has finally come down to “my times,” so that history becomes for me more overtly autobiographical, and like
Finnegans Wake,my ending connects with my starting point in that this volume covers the period of my own learning, teaching, and writing from the beginning. According to my juvenile records, my serious reading of history (after the Oz books, popular science, and many classic novels) started with Ferdinand Schevill’sHistory of Modern Europe,H. G. Wells’sOutline of History,R. H. Tawney’sReligion and the Rise of Capitalism,Toynbee’sStudy of History(abridged), and
Book Title: Frontiers of History-Historical Inquiry in the Twentieth Century
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): KELLEY DONALD R.
Abstract: This book, the third volume of Donald Kelley's monumental survey of Western historiography, covers the twentieth century, especially Europe. As in the first two volumes, the author discusses historical methods and ideas of all sorts to provide a detailed map of historical learning. Here he carries the survey forward to our own times, confronting directly the challenges of postmodernism and historical narrative. Kelley offers highly original discussions of historians of the last half century (including friends and mentors), the "linguistic turn," the "end of history," the philosophy of history, and various new methods of histories.The book focuses first on the state of the art of history in France, Germany, Britain, and the United States on the eve of World War I. Kelley then traces every important historiographical issue and development historians have encountered in the twentieth century. With the completion of this trilogy, Kelley presents the only comprehensive modern survey of historical writing. He provides an unparalleled portrait of the rich variety of historical method along with an insider's view of the challenges of capturing history on the written page.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1nps1j
3 After the Great War from:
Frontiers of History
Abstract: The dream of Enlightenment was tempered by the “nightmare of history.” So Freud turned from the pleasure principle to the death instinct, with
erosbeing joined bythanatosin a fuller conception of culture in the continuum of time—and “in the shadow of tomorrow.”
4 Modern Times from:
Frontiers of History
Abstract: Like Kafka, Eliot exaggerated his own age and, despite his reliance on Western tradition, regarded the Europe of his day as a “decayed house”—“heartbreak house,” Bernard Shaw called it. “And what are poets for in a destitute time?” asked Heidegger, repeating the question posed by Hölderlin well
6 Circumspect and Prospect from:
Frontiers of History
Abstract: The story told eccentrically in these volumes has finally come down to “my times,” so that history becomes for me more overtly autobiographical, and like
Finnegans Wake,my ending connects with my starting point in that this volume covers the period of my own learning, teaching, and writing from the beginning. According to my juvenile records, my serious reading of history (after the Oz books, popular science, and many classic novels) started with Ferdinand Schevill’sHistory of Modern Europe,H. G. Wells’sOutline of History,R. H. Tawney’sReligion and the Rise of Capitalism,Toynbee’sStudy of History(abridged), and
Introduction from:
Engaging the Moving Image
Abstract: This volume is a collection of my essays, written in the second half of the 1990s, on the topic of the
moving image—the label that I prefer to use for the category comprising film, video, broadcast television, moving computer-generated imagery, and, in short, any mass-produced moving image technologically within our reach now and in times to come.¹ My reasons for speaking of the moving image rather than of film, video, or computer-generated images (CGI) revolve around the fact that those ways of speaking are too wedded to reference to particular media, whereas the moving image, as it has come
Chapter 3 Film, Emotion, and Genre from:
Engaging the Moving Image
Abstract: A nasty, largish beast rushes at the camera, backed by a pounding score and crushing sound effects, and the audience flinches. The villain abuses the innocent heroine and our jaws clench in anger; our longing for revenge keeps us pinned to the screen, awaiting the moment when the loutish brute is dealt his due. The young lovers are separated by the callous vagaries of fate, or the child dies long before his time, and we weep. Or perhaps the camera pans over a vernal landscape of rolling gentle greenery and a feeling of serenity wells up in us. These are
Chapter 7 Introducing Film Evaluation from:
Engaging the Moving Image
Abstract: When we first think of evaluating films, we think initially of film critics. These are people who are in the business of pronouncing on the value of films. There are so many films to see and so little time. Thus, almost all of us have to fall back on the recommendations of film critics in order to inform our choice of viewing fare.
Chapter 8 Nonfiction Film and Postmodernist Skepticism from:
Engaging the Moving Image
Abstract: Among film theorists in times gone by, it was a popular sport to charge that insofar as nonfiction films unavoidably require selectivity—that is, cameras inevitably frame and focus; and editors must exclude and, just as importantly,
include
Chapter 10 Photographic Traces and Documentary Films: from:
Engaging the Moving Image
Abstract: In his characteristically stimulating and carefully crafted article “Visible Traces: Documentary Film and the Contents of Photographs,” Gregory Currie introduces a sophisticated theory of the documentary film.¹ For Currie, a documentary film is one comprised of a preponderance of photographic images that function in the context of the relevant film as traces of the objects and events that causally produced them. An image of Gregory Peck in a documentary film is a representation of Gregory Peck, a photographic trace of the actor at a certain time and place. And a documentary about Gregory Peck is constructed mostly of such images.
Chapter 17 Moving and Moving: from:
Engaging the Moving Image
Abstract: In retrospect,
Lives of Performersstrikes one as an allegory of its time—of Yvonne Rainer’s (and the avant-garde filmworld’s) movement from minimalism to something else. The film begins with rehearsal footage of the danceWalk, She Said,which gives every appearance of being a minimalist exercise devoted to the exploration of movement as such.¹ Though a rehearsal (and, therefore, by definition something that looks toward the future), this dance, oddly enough, points back to the past—to minimalism with its commitment to a modernist aesthetic of austerity. In a narrow sense, the dance rehearsal points backwards to Rainer’s own
Chapter 18 Prospects for Film Theory: from:
Engaging the Moving Image
Abstract: The rapid expansion of the film studies institution over the last two decades in the United States was undoubtedly abetted, in one way or another, by something called film theory, or, as its acolytes are apt to say, simply Theory—a classy continental number, centrally composed of elements of Louis Althusser, Jacques Lacan, and Roland Barthes, often with optional features derived, often incongruously, from Michel Foucault, Julia Kristeva, Pierre Bourdieu, Gilles Deleuze, and (
maybesometimes) Jacques Derrida, along with contributions from French cinéphiles like Christian Metz, Raymond Bellour, and Jean-Louis Baudry, although generally filtered, albeit with a difference, through exegetes
3 Constitution of Nature from:
Edmund Husserl's Freiburg Years
Abstract: A complete draft of the second book of the
Ideaswas prepared by Husserl in 1912, apparently soon after he wrote the first book. However, it appears that he was not quite satisfied with that draft; he worked on the manuscript from time to time, more so after moving to Freiburg. In 1916, he appointed Edith Stein as his assistant and entrusted her with the task of preparing the second and the third parts of theIdeasfor the publication. Stein prepared two versions of theIdeas II—one in 1916 and another in 1918—using many of Husserl’s lectures
7 The Bernau Manuscripts and the C-Manuscripts on Time from:
Edmund Husserl's Freiburg Years
Abstract: In the exposition of Husserl’s researches on time that are contained in the 1917–18 manuscripts written in Bernau, I follow Husserliana volume 33, edited by Dieter Lohmar, and refer to the texts by the numbers given to them by Lohmar (and also by the manuscript number when necessary). The central concern of the researches on time written in Bernau is to develop a phenomenology of individuation, which, Husserl hoped, would contribute to a renewal of “rational metaphysics” according to fundamental principles.¹
9 The Fifth Meditation and After from:
Edmund Husserl's Freiburg Years
Abstract: Now that we have followed the development of Husserl’s thought about intersubjectivity, we can turn to the Fifth Meditation, which contains the classic and famous statement of his view. Supporters and opponents alike have focused on this account, and those who read the Fifth Meditation alone for the first time find it difficult to grasp the sense of all that Husserl was doing. Now that we have met with each component of his account separately as it developed, we need to look at the Meditation to see how they are knit together.¹
10 Passive Synthesis and Genetic Phenomenology from:
Edmund Husserl's Freiburg Years
Abstract: In our expositions of Husserl’s researches into time-consciousness and intersubjectivity, we repeatedly encountered the idea of passive constitution. It is now time to take up this idea, which marks a major phase in the development of Husserl’s thinking. The idea of passive synthesis will lead us to his idea of genetic phenomenology. I begin with the former.
16 The Cartesian Meditations from:
Edmund Husserl's Freiburg Years
Abstract: I saw Husserl for the first time in Paris in the year 1929. As a stipend holder I attended at the time a lecture [series] by Professor Lalande on Logic at the Sorbonne, which met in the afternoon from 5–6 pm, if I remember correctly. The lecturer one day announced that we would have to stop the lecture earlier, for in the same hall there
2 The Peoples of the Earth and the Tents of Jacob: from:
Abraham's Children
Author(s) RAMON EINAT
Abstract: The Ramon (Weissberg)-Alpern family, from which I come and whose members live today in various locations in Israel, has always considered Zionism, Judaism, and human solidarity to be deeply intertwined. Zionism provided us with the framework for hope that we, as Jews, would live a life of dignity, together, in our own land after 2,000 years of exile, enduring contempt in various countries and under various regimes—Christian, Muslim, and secular (Communist). And though engraved in our minds were the memories of “righteous gentiles” (non-Jews who were our grandparents’ friends from the old countries and non-Jews who had sometimes helped
7 Religious Tolerance from:
Abraham's Children
Author(s) CARTER JIMMY
Abstract: During my time in the presidency, I prayed a lot—more than ever before in my life—asking God to give me a clear mind, sound judgment, and wisdom in dealing with affairs that could affect the lives of so many people in our own country and around the world. Although I cannot claim that my decisions were always the best ones, prayer was a great help to me.
10 A Minority with a Majority Opinion from:
Abraham's Children
Author(s) SINIORA HANNA
Abstract: In Palestine, I am a minority within a minority. I am a Christian Arab in a primarily Muslim land. I am Roman Catholic within a Christian community that is overwhelmingly Greek, Syrian, and Armenian Orthodox, and I am within a community that has shrunk more than 80 percent in my life-time. Yet my minority status has not given me, as some would surmise, the proverbial “chip” on the shoulder. Instead, I feel a greater sense of responsibility to serve justly the communities in which I have lived my life as well as the larger international communities with clear ties to
11 “Honor Everyone!” Christian Faith and the Culture of Universal Respect from:
Abraham's Children
Author(s) VOLF MIROSLAV
Abstract: I grew up under an antireligious regime of intolerance. Mild intolerance it was, compared with what many, especially religious groups, suffered in the twentieth century and continue to suffer in many places around the world today. But I know from firsthand experience what it means to live in bugged quarters, receive surreptitiously opened mail, and talk on tapped phone lines; “security agents” have threatened and interrogated me for months running.¹ I have also many times heard the story of my father’s horrendous trials. An innocent man, he was, literally, nearly starved to death during months of detainment in a concentration-camp
16 An Islamic Treatise on Tolerance from:
Abraham's Children
Author(s) Mobasser Nilou
Abstract: When my book Tolerance and Governance was being put forward for publication (1995), Iran was experiencing its most severe period of political asphyxiation since the revolution. I was forced to leave the country, having been subjected to savage physical assaults at universities and public venues, as well as fierce written attacks in newspapers. I lost my job and security and—far away from my family—spent my time fleeing from country to country (Germany to Britain to Canada). The Iranian Culture Ministry had fallen into the hands of a minister who came from the ranks of extremist conservatives—a minister
Book Title: Sin-A History
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): anderson gary a.
Abstract: What is sin? Is it simply wrongdoing? Why do its effects linger over time? In this sensitive, imaginative, and original work, Gary Anderson shows how changing conceptions of sin and forgiveness lay at the very heart of the biblical tradition. Spanning nearly two thousand years, the book brilliantly demonstrates how sin, once conceived of as a physical burden, becomes, over time, eclipsed by economic metaphors. Transformed from a weight that an individual carried, sin becomes a debt that must be repaid in order to be redeemed in God's eyes.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1nq1r7
3 a debt to be repaid from:
Sin
Abstract: Sin, I wish to argue, has a history. As we saw in the previous chapter, the Old Testament contains a number of metaphors for sin, the most pre - dominant being that of sin as a burden. This concept changed dramatically, however, during the Second Temple period, an era in which some of the youngest books of the Old Testament were written, as well as a number of nonbiblical books. During this time the metaphor of sin as a burden was replaced by that of sin as a debt.¹ Although there is little evidence in the Hebrew texts of the
4 redemption and the satisfaction of debts from:
Sin
Abstract: I resume the exploration of sin as a debt by returning to the Hebrew Bible. By the time we get to materials from the later Second Temple period, such as those at Qumran (second century BCE through the first century CE), the metaphor of sin as a debt has become well established. The dialect of Mishnaic Hebrew, which I assume is close to the Hebrew Jesus would have spoken, illustrates how complete the transformation had become. The usage of
nās’ā’‛ǎwōnas an idiom to describe culpability has by and large fallen out of use in these works.¹ One does not
8 early christian thinking on the atonement from:
Sin
Abstract: As New Testament scholars have long noted, reading about Jesus of Naza - reth in Greek is problematic. Although this text represents our most ancient witness to his life and teaching, it is one step removed from the historical person. There can be no question that Jesus addressed his disciples and the larger circle of his fellow Jews in their own tongue, either Hebrew or Aramaic (or most likely, some combination of the two). Evidence of the underlying Semitic flavor of Jesus’s teaching comes through from time to time in the form of the Greek we presently possess. As I
Book Title: Sin-A History
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): anderson gary a.
Abstract: What is sin? Is it simply wrongdoing? Why do its effects linger over time? In this sensitive, imaginative, and original work, Gary Anderson shows how changing conceptions of sin and forgiveness lay at the very heart of the biblical tradition. Spanning nearly two thousand years, the book brilliantly demonstrates how sin, once conceived of as a physical burden, becomes, over time, eclipsed by economic metaphors. Transformed from a weight that an individual carried, sin becomes a debt that must be repaid in order to be redeemed in God's eyes.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1nq1r7
3 a debt to be repaid from:
Sin
Abstract: Sin, I wish to argue, has a history. As we saw in the previous chapter, the Old Testament contains a number of metaphors for sin, the most pre - dominant being that of sin as a burden. This concept changed dramatically, however, during the Second Temple period, an era in which some of the youngest books of the Old Testament were written, as well as a number of nonbiblical books. During this time the metaphor of sin as a burden was replaced by that of sin as a debt.¹ Although there is little evidence in the Hebrew texts of the
4 redemption and the satisfaction of debts from:
Sin
Abstract: I resume the exploration of sin as a debt by returning to the Hebrew Bible. By the time we get to materials from the later Second Temple period, such as those at Qumran (second century BCE through the first century CE), the metaphor of sin as a debt has become well established. The dialect of Mishnaic Hebrew, which I assume is close to the Hebrew Jesus would have spoken, illustrates how complete the transformation had become. The usage of
nās’ā’‛ǎwōnas an idiom to describe culpability has by and large fallen out of use in these works.¹ One does not
8 early christian thinking on the atonement from:
Sin
Abstract: As New Testament scholars have long noted, reading about Jesus of Naza - reth in Greek is problematic. Although this text represents our most ancient witness to his life and teaching, it is one step removed from the historical person. There can be no question that Jesus addressed his disciples and the larger circle of his fellow Jews in their own tongue, either Hebrew or Aramaic (or most likely, some combination of the two). Evidence of the underlying Semitic flavor of Jesus’s teaching comes through from time to time in the form of the Greek we presently possess. As I
Book Title: Sin-A History
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): anderson gary a.
Abstract: What is sin? Is it simply wrongdoing? Why do its effects linger over time? In this sensitive, imaginative, and original work, Gary Anderson shows how changing conceptions of sin and forgiveness lay at the very heart of the biblical tradition. Spanning nearly two thousand years, the book brilliantly demonstrates how sin, once conceived of as a physical burden, becomes, over time, eclipsed by economic metaphors. Transformed from a weight that an individual carried, sin becomes a debt that must be repaid in order to be redeemed in God's eyes.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1nq1r7
3 a debt to be repaid from:
Sin
Abstract: Sin, I wish to argue, has a history. As we saw in the previous chapter, the Old Testament contains a number of metaphors for sin, the most pre - dominant being that of sin as a burden. This concept changed dramatically, however, during the Second Temple period, an era in which some of the youngest books of the Old Testament were written, as well as a number of nonbiblical books. During this time the metaphor of sin as a burden was replaced by that of sin as a debt.¹ Although there is little evidence in the Hebrew texts of the
4 redemption and the satisfaction of debts from:
Sin
Abstract: I resume the exploration of sin as a debt by returning to the Hebrew Bible. By the time we get to materials from the later Second Temple period, such as those at Qumran (second century BCE through the first century CE), the metaphor of sin as a debt has become well established. The dialect of Mishnaic Hebrew, which I assume is close to the Hebrew Jesus would have spoken, illustrates how complete the transformation had become. The usage of
nās’ā’‛ǎwōnas an idiom to describe culpability has by and large fallen out of use in these works.¹ One does not
8 early christian thinking on the atonement from:
Sin
Abstract: As New Testament scholars have long noted, reading about Jesus of Naza - reth in Greek is problematic. Although this text represents our most ancient witness to his life and teaching, it is one step removed from the historical person. There can be no question that Jesus addressed his disciples and the larger circle of his fellow Jews in their own tongue, either Hebrew or Aramaic (or most likely, some combination of the two). Evidence of the underlying Semitic flavor of Jesus’s teaching comes through from time to time in the form of the Greek we presently possess. As I
Book Title: Sin-A History
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): anderson gary a.
Abstract: What is sin? Is it simply wrongdoing? Why do its effects linger over time? In this sensitive, imaginative, and original work, Gary Anderson shows how changing conceptions of sin and forgiveness lay at the very heart of the biblical tradition. Spanning nearly two thousand years, the book brilliantly demonstrates how sin, once conceived of as a physical burden, becomes, over time, eclipsed by economic metaphors. Transformed from a weight that an individual carried, sin becomes a debt that must be repaid in order to be redeemed in God's eyes.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1nq1r7
3 a debt to be repaid from:
Sin
Abstract: Sin, I wish to argue, has a history. As we saw in the previous chapter, the Old Testament contains a number of metaphors for sin, the most pre - dominant being that of sin as a burden. This concept changed dramatically, however, during the Second Temple period, an era in which some of the youngest books of the Old Testament were written, as well as a number of nonbiblical books. During this time the metaphor of sin as a burden was replaced by that of sin as a debt.¹ Although there is little evidence in the Hebrew texts of the
4 redemption and the satisfaction of debts from:
Sin
Abstract: I resume the exploration of sin as a debt by returning to the Hebrew Bible. By the time we get to materials from the later Second Temple period, such as those at Qumran (second century BCE through the first century CE), the metaphor of sin as a debt has become well established. The dialect of Mishnaic Hebrew, which I assume is close to the Hebrew Jesus would have spoken, illustrates how complete the transformation had become. The usage of
nās’ā’‛ǎwōnas an idiom to describe culpability has by and large fallen out of use in these works.¹ One does not
8 early christian thinking on the atonement from:
Sin
Abstract: As New Testament scholars have long noted, reading about Jesus of Naza - reth in Greek is problematic. Although this text represents our most ancient witness to his life and teaching, it is one step removed from the historical person. There can be no question that Jesus addressed his disciples and the larger circle of his fellow Jews in their own tongue, either Hebrew or Aramaic (or most likely, some combination of the two). Evidence of the underlying Semitic flavor of Jesus’s teaching comes through from time to time in the form of the Greek we presently possess. As I
INTRODUCTION from:
On Evil
Abstract: Fifteen years ago, two ten-year-old boys tortured and killed a toddler in the north of England. There was an outcry of public horror, though why the public found this particular murder especially shocking is not entirely clear. Children, after all, are only semi-socialised creatures who can be expected to behave pretty savagely from time to time. If Freud is to be credited, they have a weaker superego or moral sense than their elders. In this sense, it is surprising that such grisly events do not occur more often. Perhaps children murder each other all the time and are simply keeping
Speaking Psychoanalysis from:
Whose Freud?
Author(s) Bersani Leo
Abstract: What exactly is psychoanalytic thought, and how might answering this question help us to define what might be called the psychoanalytically constituted subject? One of the most curious aspects of
Civilization and Its Discontentsis Freud’s reiterated self-reproach to the effect that he is not speaking psychoanalytically. The work was written in 1929, late in Freud’s career, so it’s not as if he hadn’t had time to develop a distinctively psychoanalytic language. You would think that by now Freud would be “speaking psychoanalysis” fluently. But the complaints start in Chapter 3, where he laments that “so far we have discovered
Introduction from:
Whose Freud?
Abstract: Near the beginning of his essay Robert Jay Lifton argues: “Without psychoanalysis, we don’t have a psychology worthy of address to history and society or culture. But at the same time, if we employ psychoanalysis in its most pristine state, its most traditional form, we run the risk of eliminating history in the name of studying it.” The eclectic essays in this part all point to both the “worth” and the “risk” of a psychoanalytically inflected historiography. Such an enterprise can move toward one of two extremes. On one hand, “psychohistory” has sometimes devolved into the simplified analysis of historically
Reflections on Trauma, Absence, and Loss from:
Whose Freud?
Author(s) LaCapra Dominick
Abstract: In this essay, I shall touch upon what I consider to be some of the most difficult and controversial problems at the intersection of history and theory. In the interest of opening up certain questions to further analysis and discussion, I shall at times make assertions that should be taken as contestable. My metahistorical and philosophical—at times even speculative—objective is to raise and explore certain crucial problems in tentative terms that may stimulate inquiry into insufficiently investigated relations.
Can Psychoanalysis and Cognitive-Emotional Neuroscience Collaborate in Remodeling Our Concept of Mind-Brain? from:
Whose Freud?
Author(s) Reiser Morton F.
Abstract: If, as many of us believe, mental life is dependent upon and most likely originates in the biological functions of brain-body, it should
in principlebe possible to reconcile psychologically derived information about mental function with biologically derived information about brain function. Freud understood and believed this. Yet he wisely abandoned his early attempts (1895) to relate his psychoanalytic psychologically based model of mental function to the limited understanding of brain function available in his time. Instead he constructed his hypothetical model of mindwithout taking into accountwhat was then known about the brain and its function. He based
Introduction from:
Whose Freud?
Abstract: Panel Six places philosophical models of truthfulness face to face with the psychoanalytic session. Whereas psychoanalytic theory relies on a horizon of truthfulness, psychoanalytic praxis revolves around an alert attention to the probable fictiveness of the analysand’s truth (intentional statements, recovered memories) and the probable truthfulness of his or her fictions (performative acting-out, symbolic transferences). As a comment in the discussion section puts it: “the manifest, apparent story or truth sometimes is only a communication about a hidden more interesting truth”; or as John Forrester more dramatically claims, in psychoanalysis “a ‘no’ may mean ‘yes’, and a ‘yes’ almost certainly
What Kind of Truth? from:
Whose Freud?
Author(s) Forrester John
Abstract: Mention the word
truth,and it looks as if one should call in the philosophers. And philosophers themselves do include truth among the standard topics their discipline addresses, along with time, the good, knowledge, and beauty. Yettruthis an ordinary word in ordinary use, so it will always be an open question who is in a position to adjudicate on its application and its accomplishment, just astableis a word that belongs to all as well as to carpenters, industrial designers, and actuaries. When philosophers are asked to address the question of the kind of truth we can
Discussion from:
Whose Freud?
Abstract: Donald Davidson: I thought I’d speak first because I have a similar question for all of the other panelists. It seemed to me that all of them were taking the notion of kinds of truth, at least some of the time, in a different way than I would or than I think it should be taken. Of course, when we observe anything at all—whether it’s a person or anything else—there are a great many things that are true. And many of these things we’re apt to be right about, and some of them wrong about. But those are
Speaking Psychoanalysis from:
Whose Freud?
Author(s) Bersani Leo
Abstract: What exactly is psychoanalytic thought, and how might answering this question help us to define what might be called the psychoanalytically constituted subject? One of the most curious aspects of
Civilization and Its Discontentsis Freud’s reiterated self-reproach to the effect that he is not speaking psychoanalytically. The work was written in 1929, late in Freud’s career, so it’s not as if he hadn’t had time to develop a distinctively psychoanalytic language. You would think that by now Freud would be “speaking psychoanalysis” fluently. But the complaints start in Chapter 3, where he laments that “so far we have discovered
Introduction from:
Whose Freud?
Abstract: Near the beginning of his essay Robert Jay Lifton argues: “Without psychoanalysis, we don’t have a psychology worthy of address to history and society or culture. But at the same time, if we employ psychoanalysis in its most pristine state, its most traditional form, we run the risk of eliminating history in the name of studying it.” The eclectic essays in this part all point to both the “worth” and the “risk” of a psychoanalytically inflected historiography. Such an enterprise can move toward one of two extremes. On one hand, “psychohistory” has sometimes devolved into the simplified analysis of historically
Reflections on Trauma, Absence, and Loss from:
Whose Freud?
Author(s) LaCapra Dominick
Abstract: In this essay, I shall touch upon what I consider to be some of the most difficult and controversial problems at the intersection of history and theory. In the interest of opening up certain questions to further analysis and discussion, I shall at times make assertions that should be taken as contestable. My metahistorical and philosophical—at times even speculative—objective is to raise and explore certain crucial problems in tentative terms that may stimulate inquiry into insufficiently investigated relations.
Can Psychoanalysis and Cognitive-Emotional Neuroscience Collaborate in Remodeling Our Concept of Mind-Brain? from:
Whose Freud?
Author(s) Reiser Morton F.
Abstract: If, as many of us believe, mental life is dependent upon and most likely originates in the biological functions of brain-body, it should
in principlebe possible to reconcile psychologically derived information about mental function with biologically derived information about brain function. Freud understood and believed this. Yet he wisely abandoned his early attempts (1895) to relate his psychoanalytic psychologically based model of mental function to the limited understanding of brain function available in his time. Instead he constructed his hypothetical model of mindwithout taking into accountwhat was then known about the brain and its function. He based
Introduction from:
Whose Freud?
Abstract: Panel Six places philosophical models of truthfulness face to face with the psychoanalytic session. Whereas psychoanalytic theory relies on a horizon of truthfulness, psychoanalytic praxis revolves around an alert attention to the probable fictiveness of the analysand’s truth (intentional statements, recovered memories) and the probable truthfulness of his or her fictions (performative acting-out, symbolic transferences). As a comment in the discussion section puts it: “the manifest, apparent story or truth sometimes is only a communication about a hidden more interesting truth”; or as John Forrester more dramatically claims, in psychoanalysis “a ‘no’ may mean ‘yes’, and a ‘yes’ almost certainly
What Kind of Truth? from:
Whose Freud?
Author(s) Forrester John
Abstract: Mention the word
truth,and it looks as if one should call in the philosophers. And philosophers themselves do include truth among the standard topics their discipline addresses, along with time, the good, knowledge, and beauty. Yettruthis an ordinary word in ordinary use, so it will always be an open question who is in a position to adjudicate on its application and its accomplishment, just astableis a word that belongs to all as well as to carpenters, industrial designers, and actuaries. When philosophers are asked to address the question of the kind of truth we can
Discussion from:
Whose Freud?
Abstract: Donald Davidson: I thought I’d speak first because I have a similar question for all of the other panelists. It seemed to me that all of them were taking the notion of kinds of truth, at least some of the time, in a different way than I would or than I think it should be taken. Of course, when we observe anything at all—whether it’s a person or anything else—there are a great many things that are true. And many of these things we’re apt to be right about, and some of them wrong about. But those are
Speaking Psychoanalysis from:
Whose Freud?
Author(s) Bersani Leo
Abstract: What exactly is psychoanalytic thought, and how might answering this question help us to define what might be called the psychoanalytically constituted subject? One of the most curious aspects of
Civilization and Its Discontentsis Freud’s reiterated self-reproach to the effect that he is not speaking psychoanalytically. The work was written in 1929, late in Freud’s career, so it’s not as if he hadn’t had time to develop a distinctively psychoanalytic language. You would think that by now Freud would be “speaking psychoanalysis” fluently. But the complaints start in Chapter 3, where he laments that “so far we have discovered
Introduction from:
Whose Freud?
Abstract: Near the beginning of his essay Robert Jay Lifton argues: “Without psychoanalysis, we don’t have a psychology worthy of address to history and society or culture. But at the same time, if we employ psychoanalysis in its most pristine state, its most traditional form, we run the risk of eliminating history in the name of studying it.” The eclectic essays in this part all point to both the “worth” and the “risk” of a psychoanalytically inflected historiography. Such an enterprise can move toward one of two extremes. On one hand, “psychohistory” has sometimes devolved into the simplified analysis of historically
Reflections on Trauma, Absence, and Loss from:
Whose Freud?
Author(s) LaCapra Dominick
Abstract: In this essay, I shall touch upon what I consider to be some of the most difficult and controversial problems at the intersection of history and theory. In the interest of opening up certain questions to further analysis and discussion, I shall at times make assertions that should be taken as contestable. My metahistorical and philosophical—at times even speculative—objective is to raise and explore certain crucial problems in tentative terms that may stimulate inquiry into insufficiently investigated relations.
Can Psychoanalysis and Cognitive-Emotional Neuroscience Collaborate in Remodeling Our Concept of Mind-Brain? from:
Whose Freud?
Author(s) Reiser Morton F.
Abstract: If, as many of us believe, mental life is dependent upon and most likely originates in the biological functions of brain-body, it should
in principlebe possible to reconcile psychologically derived information about mental function with biologically derived information about brain function. Freud understood and believed this. Yet he wisely abandoned his early attempts (1895) to relate his psychoanalytic psychologically based model of mental function to the limited understanding of brain function available in his time. Instead he constructed his hypothetical model of mindwithout taking into accountwhat was then known about the brain and its function. He based
Introduction from:
Whose Freud?
Abstract: Panel Six places philosophical models of truthfulness face to face with the psychoanalytic session. Whereas psychoanalytic theory relies on a horizon of truthfulness, psychoanalytic praxis revolves around an alert attention to the probable fictiveness of the analysand’s truth (intentional statements, recovered memories) and the probable truthfulness of his or her fictions (performative acting-out, symbolic transferences). As a comment in the discussion section puts it: “the manifest, apparent story or truth sometimes is only a communication about a hidden more interesting truth”; or as John Forrester more dramatically claims, in psychoanalysis “a ‘no’ may mean ‘yes’, and a ‘yes’ almost certainly
What Kind of Truth? from:
Whose Freud?
Author(s) Forrester John
Abstract: Mention the word
truth,and it looks as if one should call in the philosophers. And philosophers themselves do include truth among the standard topics their discipline addresses, along with time, the good, knowledge, and beauty. Yettruthis an ordinary word in ordinary use, so it will always be an open question who is in a position to adjudicate on its application and its accomplishment, just astableis a word that belongs to all as well as to carpenters, industrial designers, and actuaries. When philosophers are asked to address the question of the kind of truth we can
Discussion from:
Whose Freud?
Abstract: Donald Davidson: I thought I’d speak first because I have a similar question for all of the other panelists. It seemed to me that all of them were taking the notion of kinds of truth, at least some of the time, in a different way than I would or than I think it should be taken. Of course, when we observe anything at all—whether it’s a person or anything else—there are a great many things that are true. And many of these things we’re apt to be right about, and some of them wrong about. But those are
Book Title: Agitations-Essays on Life and Literature
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Krystal Arthur
Abstract: We disagree. From small questions of taste to large questions concerning the nature of existence, intellectual debate takes up much of our time. In this book the respected literary critic Arthur Krystal examines what most commentators ignore: the role of temperament and taste in the forming of aesthetic and ideological opinions. In provocative essays about reading and writing, about the relation between life and literature, about knowledge and certainty, about God and death, and about his own gradual disaffection with the literary scene, Krystal demonstrates that opposing points of view are based more on innate predilections than on disinterested thought or analysis.Not beholden to any fashionable theory or political agenda, Krystal interrogates the usual suspects in the cultural wars from an independent, though not impartial, vantage point. Clearly personal and unabashedly belletrist, his essays ask important questions. What makes culture one thing and not another? What inspires aesthetic values? What drives us to make comparisons? And how does a bias for one kind of evidence as opposed to another contribute to the form and content of intellectual argument?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1nq906
1 Closing the Books: from:
Agitations
Abstract: Several years ago, a man I knew, an assistant professor of English at an Ivy League university, decided to scrap his library—a gesture that at the time did not properly impress me. What interested me were the books themselves, as I was one of those invited to plunder the novels, biographies, anthologies of plays and poetry, works of criticism, short-story collections, a sampling of history and philosophy—exactly what you’d expect from a lifetime of liberal-arts collecting. The reason he gave them away, and the reason I didn’t catch on to what was really happening, is that he had
3 Stop the Presses: from:
Agitations
Abstract: A point of information for those with time on their hands: if you were to read 135 books a day, every day, for a year, you wouldn’t finish all the books published annually in the United States. Now add to this figure, which is upward of 50,000, the 100 or so literary magazines; the scholarly, political and scientific journals (there are 142 devoted to sociology alone), as well as the glossy magazines, of which bigger and shinier versions are now spawning, and you’ll appreciate the amount of lucubration that finds its way into print. But to really get an idea
4 What Do You Know? from:
Agitations
Abstract: Emerging from the lobby of the Metropolitan Opera House one evening, I overheard one middle-aged operagoer ask another, “Have you heard of a writer named Tolstoy, he was Russian?” I didn’t catch the reply because I had come to a full stop, and by the time my mouth closed, the men had disappeared. I related the incident to a few friends and then forgot about it. Some months later I heard myself saying that it was probably unnecessary to identify the author of
The Sorrows of Young Wertherin the pages of a national magazine. The magazine’s associate editor disagreed.
5 Death, It’s What Ails You from:
Agitations
Abstract: You who are about to read this, I salute you. Not because you’re going to die any time soon, but because you
aregoing to die. Maybe not today, maybe not tomorrow, but one day your day will come. Don’t think I enjoy pressing your nose against the grave; it’s just that I have a bone to pick with death—two hundred and six, to be precise, all of which will soon enough be picked clean by time and the elements. I’ll just come out and say it: I am appalled at the prospect of my own extinction, outraged at
9 Art and Craft from:
Agitations
Abstract: Mistah Conrad—he dead.Well, yes. Conrad died in 1924, but he also died a second death during the 1970s when the author, or rather the idea of the Author, suffered an untimely demise. Although not the first time that the work took precedence over the worker (at midcentury the New Criticism insisted on the separation of poem and poet), this latest incarnation of the text’s primacy was particularly despotic, in both a philosophical and political sense. Literary movements, however, come and go, and the doctrines that rudely deposited authors into their conceptual coffins—I mean, the semiotic/deconstructionist writings of
15 Going, Going, Gone: from:
Agitations
Abstract: There is these days, for those who care to notice, a sustained lull on the poetry front. For the first time in the stormy or ambivalent relations between poet and public, neither side cares enough to woo or rebuff the other. Reviewers may take the occasional swipe at poets who have garnered an undeserved reputation, but poetry itself, or rather the vocation of poetry, is no longer regarded with suspicion. Nor do poets themselves go around behaving like Byronic misfits, taking pride in their outcast state. And this, one might be surprised to learn, is of recent cultural vintage. Fifty
four ISRAEL’S SENSE OF PLACE IN JEREMIAH from:
The God of All Flesh
Abstract: Recent Old Testament study, in addressing the issue of Israel’s view of time and space, has tended to celebrate time and minimize space as an important faith motif.¹ This emphasis was shared not only by Bultmannian scholars² but also by some
eight THE “US” OF PSALM 67 from:
The God of All Flesh
Abstract: Old Testament traditions are, of course, dominated by the self-conscious, intentional self-presentation of Israel as a peculiar people in the midst of many other peoples, the existence of which is also acknowledged. That self-presentation as a peculiar people is said to have a theological grounding as the chosen people of Yahweh (as in Deut 7:6–7; 9:4–5; 14:2), an affirmation variously articulated but assumed and traded upon widely in the tradition. That theological claim, moreover, is at the same time to be understood as an instrument of social construction, no doubt fostered and enhanced through intentional social practice.¹
four ISRAEL’S SENSE OF PLACE IN JEREMIAH from:
The God of All Flesh
Abstract: Recent Old Testament study, in addressing the issue of Israel’s view of time and space, has tended to celebrate time and minimize space as an important faith motif.¹ This emphasis was shared not only by Bultmannian scholars² but also by some
eight THE “US” OF PSALM 67 from:
The God of All Flesh
Abstract: Old Testament traditions are, of course, dominated by the self-conscious, intentional self-presentation of Israel as a peculiar people in the midst of many other peoples, the existence of which is also acknowledged. That self-presentation as a peculiar people is said to have a theological grounding as the chosen people of Yahweh (as in Deut 7:6–7; 9:4–5; 14:2), an affirmation variously articulated but assumed and traded upon widely in the tradition. That theological claim, moreover, is at the same time to be understood as an instrument of social construction, no doubt fostered and enhanced through intentional social practice.¹
four ISRAEL’S SENSE OF PLACE IN JEREMIAH from:
The God of All Flesh
Abstract: Recent Old Testament study, in addressing the issue of Israel’s view of time and space, has tended to celebrate time and minimize space as an important faith motif.¹ This emphasis was shared not only by Bultmannian scholars² but also by some
eight THE “US” OF PSALM 67 from:
The God of All Flesh
Abstract: Old Testament traditions are, of course, dominated by the self-conscious, intentional self-presentation of Israel as a peculiar people in the midst of many other peoples, the existence of which is also acknowledged. That self-presentation as a peculiar people is said to have a theological grounding as the chosen people of Yahweh (as in Deut 7:6–7; 9:4–5; 14:2), an affirmation variously articulated but assumed and traded upon widely in the tradition. That theological claim, moreover, is at the same time to be understood as an instrument of social construction, no doubt fostered and enhanced through intentional social practice.¹
four ISRAEL’S SENSE OF PLACE IN JEREMIAH from:
The God of All Flesh
Abstract: Recent Old Testament study, in addressing the issue of Israel’s view of time and space, has tended to celebrate time and minimize space as an important faith motif.¹ This emphasis was shared not only by Bultmannian scholars² but also by some
eight THE “US” OF PSALM 67 from:
The God of All Flesh
Abstract: Old Testament traditions are, of course, dominated by the self-conscious, intentional self-presentation of Israel as a peculiar people in the midst of many other peoples, the existence of which is also acknowledged. That self-presentation as a peculiar people is said to have a theological grounding as the chosen people of Yahweh (as in Deut 7:6–7; 9:4–5; 14:2), an affirmation variously articulated but assumed and traded upon widely in the tradition. That theological claim, moreover, is at the same time to be understood as an instrument of social construction, no doubt fostered and enhanced through intentional social practice.¹
1 Entering Wingren’s Theological Life from:
Becoming Human Again
Abstract: This book deals with Gustaf Wingren (1910–2000), one of the most influential and creative Swedish theologians of the twentieth century. I became acquainted with him around 1980, after he had retired. I had known about Wingren before then, and attended several of his many public lectures during the latter half of the 1970s. At that time in Sweden, Wingren’s name was on the lips of many, and at several of the public events at which he lectured I was given the opportunity to speak to him briefly. It was, however, not until I had left Gothenburg, where I had
2 The First Confrontation from:
Becoming Human Again
Abstract: Where does the story of Gustaf Wingren begin? As with the telling of any history, there are many possible ways to begin, and almost as many ways to continue and conclude. The narrator’s first step has its own implications; the starting point determines very much how the story will proceed. I have chosen to begin my own story about Wingren in a way that focuses on his ideas, contextualized though they may be, and at the same time in a way that from the very beginning emphasizes Wingren’s obvious affinity with the academic context and public.
4 The Practical Turn from:
Becoming Human Again
Abstract: In his book
Cosmopolis: The Hidden Agenda of Modernity, Anglo-American philosopher of science Stephen Toulmin outlines a perspective on how the Western concept of knowledge has throughout the ages swung like a pendulum between theoretical-minded Platonists and practical-minded Aristotelians. This tension betweentheoryandpracticewas also evident when the new interest in practical wisdom (phronesis), which occurred in the carnival-like scientific atmosphere of the sixteenth century, with its focus on concrete, practical life and time-bound local practices, was supplanted around 1630 by an abstract and universalistic scientific paradigm, which instead took as its point of departure theoretical understanding (episteme).
5 Metamorphosis and Recontextualization from:
Becoming Human Again
Abstract: The 1960s appear as a remarkable period of transformation in modern history, when many things came to an end and so many new things began. The decade of the 1960s saw the convergence of a number of processes of change that would continue to alter the world toward the turn of the millennium. On a superficial level, the changes were evidenced by the emergence of an entirely new youth culture and new social movements on the world scene. One lasting image of the new expressions of popular culture and the new ways of life that were developing during this time
8 “This Plague of Egocentricity” from:
Becoming Human Again
Abstract: During the last century the importance, position, and conditions of the church in Swedish society have changed dramatically. At the time of Gustaf Wingren’s birth in November 1910, Sweden was still largely a homogeneous Lutheran society, almost without any kind of freedom of religion, as we know the term today. Although the growing free church movement that had begun in the mid-1800s had given rise to the beginnings of religious pluralism in Sweden, it had done so within the framework of Christianity in general and Protestantism in particular. Wingren himself would be forty years old by the time blasphemy ceased
1 Entering Wingren’s Theological Life from:
Becoming Human Again
Abstract: This book deals with Gustaf Wingren (1910–2000), one of the most influential and creative Swedish theologians of the twentieth century. I became acquainted with him around 1980, after he had retired. I had known about Wingren before then, and attended several of his many public lectures during the latter half of the 1970s. At that time in Sweden, Wingren’s name was on the lips of many, and at several of the public events at which he lectured I was given the opportunity to speak to him briefly. It was, however, not until I had left Gothenburg, where I had
2 The First Confrontation from:
Becoming Human Again
Abstract: Where does the story of Gustaf Wingren begin? As with the telling of any history, there are many possible ways to begin, and almost as many ways to continue and conclude. The narrator’s first step has its own implications; the starting point determines very much how the story will proceed. I have chosen to begin my own story about Wingren in a way that focuses on his ideas, contextualized though they may be, and at the same time in a way that from the very beginning emphasizes Wingren’s obvious affinity with the academic context and public.
4 The Practical Turn from:
Becoming Human Again
Abstract: In his book
Cosmopolis: The Hidden Agenda of Modernity, Anglo-American philosopher of science Stephen Toulmin outlines a perspective on how the Western concept of knowledge has throughout the ages swung like a pendulum between theoretical-minded Platonists and practical-minded Aristotelians. This tension betweentheoryandpracticewas also evident when the new interest in practical wisdom (phronesis), which occurred in the carnival-like scientific atmosphere of the sixteenth century, with its focus on concrete, practical life and time-bound local practices, was supplanted around 1630 by an abstract and universalistic scientific paradigm, which instead took as its point of departure theoretical understanding (episteme).
5 Metamorphosis and Recontextualization from:
Becoming Human Again
Abstract: The 1960s appear as a remarkable period of transformation in modern history, when many things came to an end and so many new things began. The decade of the 1960s saw the convergence of a number of processes of change that would continue to alter the world toward the turn of the millennium. On a superficial level, the changes were evidenced by the emergence of an entirely new youth culture and new social movements on the world scene. One lasting image of the new expressions of popular culture and the new ways of life that were developing during this time
8 “This Plague of Egocentricity” from:
Becoming Human Again
Abstract: During the last century the importance, position, and conditions of the church in Swedish society have changed dramatically. At the time of Gustaf Wingren’s birth in November 1910, Sweden was still largely a homogeneous Lutheran society, almost without any kind of freedom of religion, as we know the term today. Although the growing free church movement that had begun in the mid-1800s had given rise to the beginnings of religious pluralism in Sweden, it had done so within the framework of Christianity in general and Protestantism in particular. Wingren himself would be forty years old by the time blasphemy ceased
1 Entering Wingren’s Theological Life from:
Becoming Human Again
Abstract: This book deals with Gustaf Wingren (1910–2000), one of the most influential and creative Swedish theologians of the twentieth century. I became acquainted with him around 1980, after he had retired. I had known about Wingren before then, and attended several of his many public lectures during the latter half of the 1970s. At that time in Sweden, Wingren’s name was on the lips of many, and at several of the public events at which he lectured I was given the opportunity to speak to him briefly. It was, however, not until I had left Gothenburg, where I had
2 The First Confrontation from:
Becoming Human Again
Abstract: Where does the story of Gustaf Wingren begin? As with the telling of any history, there are many possible ways to begin, and almost as many ways to continue and conclude. The narrator’s first step has its own implications; the starting point determines very much how the story will proceed. I have chosen to begin my own story about Wingren in a way that focuses on his ideas, contextualized though they may be, and at the same time in a way that from the very beginning emphasizes Wingren’s obvious affinity with the academic context and public.
4 The Practical Turn from:
Becoming Human Again
Abstract: In his book
Cosmopolis: The Hidden Agenda of Modernity, Anglo-American philosopher of science Stephen Toulmin outlines a perspective on how the Western concept of knowledge has throughout the ages swung like a pendulum between theoretical-minded Platonists and practical-minded Aristotelians. This tension betweentheoryandpracticewas also evident when the new interest in practical wisdom (phronesis), which occurred in the carnival-like scientific atmosphere of the sixteenth century, with its focus on concrete, practical life and time-bound local practices, was supplanted around 1630 by an abstract and universalistic scientific paradigm, which instead took as its point of departure theoretical understanding (episteme).
5 Metamorphosis and Recontextualization from:
Becoming Human Again
Abstract: The 1960s appear as a remarkable period of transformation in modern history, when many things came to an end and so many new things began. The decade of the 1960s saw the convergence of a number of processes of change that would continue to alter the world toward the turn of the millennium. On a superficial level, the changes were evidenced by the emergence of an entirely new youth culture and new social movements on the world scene. One lasting image of the new expressions of popular culture and the new ways of life that were developing during this time
8 “This Plague of Egocentricity” from:
Becoming Human Again
Abstract: During the last century the importance, position, and conditions of the church in Swedish society have changed dramatically. At the time of Gustaf Wingren’s birth in November 1910, Sweden was still largely a homogeneous Lutheran society, almost without any kind of freedom of religion, as we know the term today. Although the growing free church movement that had begun in the mid-1800s had given rise to the beginnings of religious pluralism in Sweden, it had done so within the framework of Christianity in general and Protestantism in particular. Wingren himself would be forty years old by the time blasphemy ceased
The Wound of Beauty from:
The Operation of Grace
Abstract: Strange as it may seem, beauty still needs to be defended. In the history of the West, beauty has played the role of Cinderella to her sisters, goodness and truth. I don’t mean to say that beauty in art or nature hasn’t been appreciated throughout history—though there have been times when beauty has been the subject of frontal assaults—but simply that when we start getting official, when we get theological or philosophical, beauty becomes a hot potato.
Singularly Ambiguous from:
The Operation of Grace
Abstract: While I can’t match Johnson’s epigrammatic waggery, I often find myself with similar sentiments these days about those who seek to defend “the West” from its perceived enemies. Whether implicitly or explicitly, these champions of Western civilization believe that in a time of war, terrorism, and
Current Event from:
The Operation of Grace
Abstract: It may be a truism to say that every saint is a saint for his times, but in the case of Father Luigi Giussani, the match between charism—the particular form of faith he felt called to live—and the spirit of the age was nothing short of extraordinary. In the early
East and West in Miniature from:
The Operation of Grace
Abstract: The recent controversy over Pope Benedict XVI’s Regensburg lecture—which touched on the nature of human reason, but which also questioned, in passing, the relationship between faith and reason in Islam—may turn out to be more productive than was at first thought. Among other things, it generated a substantive open letter to the pope signed by thirty-eight respected Muslim clerics—a document that itself is carefully reasoned and gracious. At a time when the rising tide of Islamic fundamentalism and terrorism is being met by increasing fear and stereotyping in the West, any form of dialogue is cause for
The Culture Wars Revisited from:
The Operation of Grace
Abstract: Ten years ago in these pages I attempted to explain “ Why I Am a Conscientious Objector in the Culture Wars.” At that time, the dust had only recently settled on the public controversies over National Endowment for the Arts funding of works by Robert Mapplethorpe and Andres Serrano. In addition to the debate over public funding of the arts, the central culture war issues had emerged: abortion, euthanasia, welfare, homosexual rights, and church/state relations. James Davison Hunter had followed up his groundbreaking book
Culture Warswith the even more ominously titledBefore the Shooting Starts.
Always Now from:
The Operation of Grace
Abstract: I have been told that there were times when the doctrine of progress was in the ascendant, when millions of people believed that society was moving inexorably
Conservative Elegies from:
The Operation of Grace
Abstract: In the summer of 1980, I could be pardoned for feeling like William Wordsworth at the time of the French Revolution: a
Looking for a Renaissance from:
The Operation of Grace
Abstract: Most educated people, in addition to a set of favorite authors, artists, and composers, develop a fascination for one or more historic cultures: republican Rome, say, or colonial New England or the Ming dynasty. Sometimes these passions are matters of aesthetic or intellectual taste, but often they bear a relationship to the individual’s ideas about what constitutes the good life and how the ideals of a past culture might nurture and strengthen one’s own. Of course, the prevailing world view of a given time period may play a role in guiding what the majority find engaging. After several centuries of
Giotto’s Ratio from:
The Operation of Grace
Abstract: Imageis a journal devoted exclusively to contemporary literature and art—to the present moment—but here we are in the cradle of the Renaissance. We have not come out of mere antiquarian curiosity, but in search of parallels to our own time and the insights we can glean from them. As an organization interested in the cross-fertilization of art and faith, and the ways that these two fundamental human experiences can renew lives and communities, we believe that the Renaissance offers a model of cultural transformation that is highly relevant to the present.
Follies Worldly and Divine from:
The Operation of Grace
Abstract: A best seller in its own time,
The Praise of Follyis little read today. Written before the rise of the novel, it lacks the sort of picaresque narrative structure that makes a book likeCandideaccessible to contemporary readers. TheFollyis written in
The Poetry of Exile from:
The Operation of Grace
Abstract: There are posthumous demotions and rediscoveries, of course, which can bring about a measure of belated justice. But it’s hard not to think from time to
Book Title: The Only Mind Worth Having-Thomas Merton and the Child Mind
Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Williams Rowan
Abstract: In The Only Mind Worth Having, Fiona Gardner takes Thomas Merton’s belief that the child mind is “the only mind worth having" and explores it in the context of Jesus’ challenging, paradoxical, and enigmatic command to become like small children. She demonstrates how Merton’s belief and Jesus’ command can be understood as part of contemporary spirituality and spiritual practice. To follow Christ’s command requires a great leap of the imagination. Gardner examines what it might mean to make this leap when one is an adult without it becoming sentimental and mawkish, or regressive and pathological. Using both psychological and spiritual insights, and drawing on the experiences of Thomas Merton and others, Gardner suggests that in some mysterious and paradoxical way recovering a sense of childhood spirituality is the path towards spiritual maturity. The move from childhood spirituality to adulthood and on to a spiritual maturity through the child mind is a move from innocence to experience to organised innocence, or from dependence to independence to a state of being in-dependence with God.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1p5f2w5
Foreword from:
The Only Mind Worth Having
Author(s) Williams Rowan
Abstract: Becoming a child again: the first reaction may be a feeling that this would be wonderful—no responsibility, no battling with expectations, no long memories of failure and ambiguity. But when Jesus of Nazareth tells us to become like children, and when spiritual masters urge us to connect with the “child mind,” they are not being nostalgic or sentimental. They are drawing our attention to something we all instinctively recognise. There is something that our habitual adult consciousness has lost or buried, and it must be found, not as a comforting reinstatement of half-forgotten happiness but as a breakthrough to
5 Child’s Mind is Buddha’s Mind from:
The Only Mind Worth Having
Abstract: Eastern thought has long understood the value of the child mind in the adult seeker for spiritual maturity. The child mind is seen as a place of surrender, alertness, and nakedness. It is seen as a space where there is little if any self-consciousness; there is no judgment of others. It is a time of humility. It involves an awareness of the person’s nothingness—where the person is no -thing. The child mind recognizes the person’s smallness and yet connection in the scheme of things, and in Eastern practices it is seen as a state that can be developed through
7 The Enchanted World, the Tendency towards Dis-enchantment, and the Possibility of Re-enchantment from:
The Only Mind Worth Having
Abstract: For all small children life is mysterious and mostly incomprehensible until the adults caring for them begin to help them form a pattern, a routine, and then a sense of coherent order, and, so, purpose gradually emerges. The small baby is subject to strong and sometimes overwhelming feelings, both good and bad, and hopefully is helped to manage this by the containing presence of a caring and loving adult. In the next chapter we will discuss what happens when this is not the case. As small children begin to play and if their imaginations and creativity are allowed to flourish,
10 An Invitation to Look and Find Paradise from:
The Only Mind Worth Having
Abstract: Present-moment awareness is about creating a gap in the constant busyness of the mind. This also means a break in the continuum between what is past and what lies ahead. It is through such a clear space that new and creative possibilities are born. The closing down of present-moment awareness in the small child happens as the weight of the adult life of care and rational thought gradually but relentlessly obscures the enchanted world. The possibility of re-enchantment and sometimes the invitation to move from the grown-up life of care can come from a child: from being in the presence
14 The Internal Landscape of the Child Mind and Models of Spiritual Maturity from:
The Only Mind Worth Having
Abstract: Thomas Merton was constantly struggling with the question of identity, and in his search for spiritual integrity and thereby maturity he engaged in a continual struggle to be free from an imprisoning and distorting self-consciousness that plagued him and, he believed, all human beings to a greater or lesser extent. He included in this searching both grace and psychology and he saw that these could work together, sometimes being in conflict. Merton was searching for full identity in Christ and for what spiritual maturity might mean, and from glimpses of his work the suggestion in this book is that he
Naturalism as Weltanschauung from:
Karl Jaspers e la molteplicità delle visioni del mondo
Author(s) Staiti Andrea
Abstract: In this paper I discuss Jaspers’ theory of worldviews with regard to the contemporary problem of naturalism. In particular, I consider the frequent characterization of naturalism as a worldview. First, I situate Jaspers’ conception of worldviews in the context of the philosophical debate of his time. I then turn to Jaspers’ distinction between substantial worldviews and derivative shapes of worldviews and present his construal of naturalism as a derivative shape of what he calls the sensoryspatial
Weltbild. I then argue that contemporary naturalism still fits Jaspers’ description and can thus be considered a derivative shape, rather than a genuine worldview
Book Title: The Cruft of Fiction-Mega-Novels and the Science of Paying Attention
Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): LETZLER DAVID
Abstract: While mega-novel text is often intricately meaningful or experimental, sometimes it is just excessive and pointless. On the other hand, mega-novels also contain text that, though appearing to be cruft, turns out to be quite important. Letzler posits that this cruft requires readers to develop a sophisticated method of attentional modulation, allowing one to subtly distinguish between text requiring focused attention and text that must be skimmed or even skipped to avoid processing failures.
The Cruft of Fictionshows how the attentional maturation prompted by reading mega-novels can help manage the information overload that increasingly characterizes contemporary life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1pc5fzd
Book Title: The Sunni Tragedy in the Middle East-Northern Lebanon from al-Qaeda to ISIS
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Rougier Bernard
Abstract: This riveting book is based on more than a decade of research, more than one hundred in-depth interviews with players at all levels, and Rougier's extraordinary access to original source material. Written by one of the world's leading experts on jihadism,
The Sunni Tragedy in the Middle Eastprovides timely insight into the social, political, and religious life of this dangerous and strategically critical region of the Middle East.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1pk86v9
CHAPTER 2 Defending an Imagined Umma: from:
The Sunni Tragedy in the Middle East
Abstract: Throughout 2002 and 2003, Lebanon experienced a wave of terrorist attacks directed at American fast-food restaurants and a supermarket belonging to a British chain. Six successful bombings occurred in Tripoli and on the coastal road between Beirut and Tripoli. The last attack, carried out on April 5, 2003, was carefully crafted to maximize casualties. Its target was the McDonald’s restaurant at the entrance of the Dora neighborhood, in the eastern suburbs of Beirut, and it was timed for a Saturday afternoon, when the restaurant would be at its busiest. The first charge, planted in the bathroom, was calculated to provoke
CHAPTER 3 The Anti-Syrian Movement: from:
The Sunni Tragedy in the Middle East
Abstract: Former prime Minister Rafiq al-Hariri’s assassination on February 14, 2005, sparked both international pressure and local pro-sovereignty protests, forcing Syrian troops from Lebanon in April. This series of events profoundly transformed Sunni Islamism in North Lebanon.¹ For the first time, the Future Movement (Rafiq al-Hariri’s political party) could extend its political influence to the north of the country, a move that was not possible under the Syrian occupation. Salafi sheikhs with much to gain from the Syrian forces’ scheduled departure also threw their support behind the Future Movement. They hoped in particular to benefit electorally from public reaction to the
CHAPTER 6 The Failure to Create a Lasting Support Base for the Syrian Insurrection from:
The Sunni Tragedy in the Middle East
Abstract: To pro-independence Sunni elites in Lebanon, the Syrian uprising presented a unique chance to right the unfavorable domestic position in which they had found themselves ever since Hezbollah became the country’s main political and military force in the 1990s. Sa‘ad al-Hariri, whose father was assassinated by Hezbollah’s operational apparatus, would benefit greatly were the Syrian regime to fall. Potentially, it could be his path back into power and a way for Lebanon to ditch the Syrian-Iranian military agenda. In 2011, at the beginning of what was then called the “Syrian revolution,” many in Lebanon and abroad thought the time was
Introduction: from:
Faces of Displacement
Abstract: The principal point of this study is that all forms of displacement – exile, émigré, expatriate, travel, nomadism, emigration, and diaspora – are not isolated and may overlap. This pluralistic approach may reveal the dominance of one form of displacement over another or their collisions in shaping the identity of displaced writers, alongside other undercurrents of influence such as historical time, geographical place, and the writer’s own personal characteristics. Viewing different forms of displacement in the historical continuum, we can see how they change with the social progress of civilization. “A hundred years ago,” says Czeslaw Milosz, “average people not familiar with
1 Émigré from:
Faces of Displacement
Abstract: Vynnychenko was born to a poor peasant family on 28 July 1880 in the city of Yelysavethrad (Kirovohrad today) in the steppe region of south-central Ukraine (at that time part of the Russian Empire). After graduating from the gymnasium in 1899, he wandered through the country, a common practice of the revolutionary intelligentsia in the Russian Empire. The goal of “khodinnia v narod” [going to the people] was to observe the life of various strata of the population. Their efforts were also connected with the socialist ideals of the intelligentsia, which aimed to enlighten the illiterate peasantry and improve social
2 Expatriate/Traveler from:
Faces of Displacement
Abstract: Literary critics have tended to frame Vynnychenko’s stay abroad in terms of two concepts – émigré and exile, which indeed were dominant faces of his displacement. Such critics have also taken for granted Vynnychenko’s orientation towards Ukraine, focusing on hardships of his displacement. They have referred to his time abroad as “difficult” (Doroshkevych, 219), as a “miserable existence” (Richytsky, 11) and, in the Soviet time in a more ideological vein, as part of an “emigrant rubbish heap” (Shabliovsky, 48). Displacement, however, is a complex phenomenon, and I will challenge the established approach to reveal another face of Vynnychenko’s displacement – the face
5 Universalist, 1925–1941 from:
Faces of Displacement
Abstract: The reactions of displaced writers who remain outside their homelands for a considerable period of time generally range between two extreme groups – isolationism and universalism. According to Rubchak, for writers who belong to the first group, writing becomes either “a vehicle for memories and hopes or a totally self-enclosed shell” (101). Thomas Mann speaks about another extreme which he experienced personally: “Exile has become something quite different from what it once was; it is no longer a condition of waiting programmed for an ultimate return, but rather [it] hints of the dissolution of nations and the unification of the world”
1 Warplay: from:
Bearing Witness
Author(s) FILEWOD ALAN
Abstract: As I write these words, I hear the sounds of combat, of yelling men, explosions, and machine gun fire. My fifteen-year-old son is playing Call of Duty: Modern Warfare 2 on his Xbox. In this game he takes the part of an American soldier equipped with realistic weapons in an online multiplayer scenario of urban combat. He’s having the time of his life. It is, he tells me, the best game ever.
9 Emmy Andriesse, Dutch Wartime Photographer: from:
Bearing Witness
Author(s) MARCUSSE CONNY STEENMAN
Abstract: Dutch photographer Emmy Andriesse’s (1914–1953) wartime photograph,
Boy with a Pan (“Jongen met het pannetje” in Dutch, see fig. 9.1 on page 128), has become an iconic image of life under Nazi occupation during the “Hunger Winter” of 1944–45. A small, thin boy standing alone and forlorn in an Amsterdam street clasps an empty tin, in case food might be found at one of the soup kitchens. Boy with a Pan is one of hundreds of photographs Andriesse took as a member of the clandestine group that came to be known as “The Underground Photographers” (De Ondergedoken Camera).
12 Northern War Stories: from:
Bearing Witness
Author(s) VAN WYCK PETER C.
Abstract: Great Bear Lake in Canada’s Northwest Territories is a vast inland sea; nearly 31,000 square kilometers carved into barely fathomable depths sometime in the late Pleistocene. On the far eastern shore, where no one lives today, just below where the tree-line cuts across the immense glacial body of the lake, at the far end of what is now called McTavish Arm, buttressed in ancient granites by the very western edge of the Precambrian Shield, lies Port Radium. This land, home to the Sahtú Dene for millennia, is also a site of considerable significance to Canada’s atomic history. A point of
13 Perspectives on War from:
Bearing Witness
Author(s) WHEELER ANNE
Abstract: I grew up in a household where you did not talk of war. My father did not attend reunions or glory in the telling of stories about his time spent in her Majesty’s service. From the time I knew my alphabet I knew he had an OBE, which was a medal given to him by the King of England because he was a hero. What he had done to deserve this honor I didn’t know. Every Christmas, dozens of cards would arrive from the United Kingdom full of words of gratitude and deep affection – unlike any words uttered by
Introduction from:
Precarious Visualities
Abstract: In an essay (translated here for the first time in English) that has been pivotal to the understanding of the history of electronic arts, Raymond Bellour shows how video art’s specific contribution to the realm of moving images lies in its unique deployment of the self-portrait. With video, argues Bellour, the image becomes a site of representation and interpellation of the self – but a self whose identity is more a question or an open-ended project than a definition or a clear determination. The relevance of this text to precarious visuality is indisputable: it discloses a visual writing of the “I”
13 Real Time, Lived Time: from:
Precarious Visualities
Author(s) ROSS CHRISTINE
Abstract: Since the early 1990s, the progressive authentication of augmented reality (AR) over virtual reality (VR) in a variety of domains (medicine, military training, education, communication, transportation, tourism, art, to name the most obvious) has set about a significant reinforcement of real time as a key temporality of our epoch. Perception in real time is an indispensable prerogative of any ar design – and I adopt here Ronald Azuma et al.’s definition of AR as a system that “supplements the realworld with virtual (computer-generated) objects that appear to coexist in the same space as the realworld”¹ – if it is to adequately do
Introduction from:
Precarious Visualities
Abstract: In an essay (translated here for the first time in English) that has been pivotal to the understanding of the history of electronic arts, Raymond Bellour shows how video art’s specific contribution to the realm of moving images lies in its unique deployment of the self-portrait. With video, argues Bellour, the image becomes a site of representation and interpellation of the self – but a self whose identity is more a question or an open-ended project than a definition or a clear determination. The relevance of this text to precarious visuality is indisputable: it discloses a visual writing of the “I”
13 Real Time, Lived Time: from:
Precarious Visualities
Author(s) ROSS CHRISTINE
Abstract: Since the early 1990s, the progressive authentication of augmented reality (AR) over virtual reality (VR) in a variety of domains (medicine, military training, education, communication, transportation, tourism, art, to name the most obvious) has set about a significant reinforcement of real time as a key temporality of our epoch. Perception in real time is an indispensable prerogative of any ar design – and I adopt here Ronald Azuma et al.’s definition of AR as a system that “supplements the realworld with virtual (computer-generated) objects that appear to coexist in the same space as the realworld”¹ – if it is to adequately do
Introduction from:
Precarious Visualities
Abstract: In an essay (translated here for the first time in English) that has been pivotal to the understanding of the history of electronic arts, Raymond Bellour shows how video art’s specific contribution to the realm of moving images lies in its unique deployment of the self-portrait. With video, argues Bellour, the image becomes a site of representation and interpellation of the self – but a self whose identity is more a question or an open-ended project than a definition or a clear determination. The relevance of this text to precarious visuality is indisputable: it discloses a visual writing of the “I”
13 Real Time, Lived Time: from:
Precarious Visualities
Author(s) ROSS CHRISTINE
Abstract: Since the early 1990s, the progressive authentication of augmented reality (AR) over virtual reality (VR) in a variety of domains (medicine, military training, education, communication, transportation, tourism, art, to name the most obvious) has set about a significant reinforcement of real time as a key temporality of our epoch. Perception in real time is an indispensable prerogative of any ar design – and I adopt here Ronald Azuma et al.’s definition of AR as a system that “supplements the realworld with virtual (computer-generated) objects that appear to coexist in the same space as the realworld”¹ – if it is to adequately do
[PART II Introduction] from:
The Wind From the East
Abstract: The May events took France’s vaunted caste of intellectual mandarins entirely by surprise. As we have seen, the theoretical inspiration for the revolt did not come from the intellectual elite—France’s so-called Master Thinkers—but from the margins: left-wing groupuscules like the Arguments group, the Situationist International, and Socialism or Barbarism. For French intellectuals, the May revolt was a lesson in humility. To their surprise, and perhaps for the first time, they found themselves in the peculiar position of followers rather than leaders. As such, May sounded the death knell for the prophetic intellectual: the thinker who possesses privileged access
[PART II Introduction] from:
The Wind From the East
Abstract: The May events took France’s vaunted caste of intellectual mandarins entirely by surprise. As we have seen, the theoretical inspiration for the revolt did not come from the intellectual elite—France’s so-called Master Thinkers—but from the margins: left-wing groupuscules like the Arguments group, the Situationist International, and Socialism or Barbarism. For French intellectuals, the May revolt was a lesson in humility. To their surprise, and perhaps for the first time, they found themselves in the peculiar position of followers rather than leaders. As such, May sounded the death knell for the prophetic intellectual: the thinker who possesses privileged access
TWELVE Mnemosyne: from:
The Vision of the Soul
Abstract: So successful was the advent of modernist poetic, musical, and visual art in disrupting the critical vocabulary by which we describe them that we have all but lost the means to account for how art actually works. So blinding was its revolutionary blast that we have sometimes failed to distinguish the various courses these arts took during the modernist period; moreover, we have often assumed modern art effected more radical changes than it did, as if it put the aesthetic upon an entirely new basis. Abstraction in painting, dissonance and atonality in music, and free verse in poetry stand of
FOURTEEN Retelling the Story of Reason from:
The Vision of the Soul
Abstract: It is now time to weave together a number of threads we have followed in earlier parts of this book, and to define what they have to tell us on the role of narrative in human life—and particularly in the life of reason and its vocation to truth. As we have seen in discussing both Burke and Dante, venerable claims have been made in our tradition for the power of the poetic and literary imagination; but Burke’s counter-revolutionary importance should also remind us that many of those claims have been compensatory for losses experienced elsewhere. Consider, for instance, the
INTRODUCTION: from:
In/visible War
Author(s) SIMONS JON
Abstract: Those born in the United States in the twenty-first century—or at least subsequent to September 11, 2001—have never known a time at which the nation was not at war. This in itself is not so strange, as the United States has been at war for 93 percent of its history.¹ The conflicts in Afghanistan and Iraq stand out as what we might consider traditional, full-scale wars measured by the invasion and occupation of national territories by air and ground forces supported by nation-states. But these confrontations are the least of it, because the United States has also been
2 RETURNING SOLDIERS AND THE IN/VISIBILITY OF COMBAT TRAUMA from:
In/visible War
Author(s) LUCAITES JOHN LOUIS
Abstract: The signs and symptoms of combat trauma are all around us: in images of troops under attack on the battlefield; in photographs of resuscitative and surgical procedures performed in the line of duty; in pictures of soldiers in combat fatigues affecting the thousand-yard stare; in videos of families grieving over a loved one, now a military casualty; in snapshots of wounded warriors, their damaged bodies, their severed limbs, their prostheses; and in statistics that report our wartime death toll in terms of veteran suicides. We encounter these tragic effects of war on an almost daily basis if for no other
6 DIGITAL WAR AND THE PUBLIC MIND: from:
In/visible War
Author(s) STAHL ROGER
Abstract: In the dozen years since 9/11, the U.S. War on Terror has kept pace, complementing troop draw-downs in Afghanistan and Iraq with drone strikes that have expanded to at least six countries, sweeping surveillance of the global digital grid, and traditional air strikes in Libya and Syria. At the same time, however, the war has faded to invisibility as these conflicts precipitously dropped from the news screen. Beginning in 2005, the occupations of Iraq and Afghanistan migrated from lead story to background noise. By this time, reporters had disembedded en masse, handing over their significantly attenuated role as the “fourth
Book Title: Constructing Constructive Theology-An Introductory Sketch
Publisher: Fortress Press
Author(s): Wyman Jason A.
Abstract: To date, constructive theology hasn’t been viewed or conceptualized as a movement or trend in theology on its own as a whole. Questions arise as to what constructive theology is, where it came from, why it considers itself “constructive," and why constructive is something different from the ways in which theology has been done in the past. This book traces the overall historical arc of constructive theology, from proto-movement through the present. Inklings of constructive theology emerged well before it began to take any formalized shape. At the same time, an important shift occurred when a group of theologians decided to create the Workgroup on Constructive Theology. Further, even as the workgroup continues to work collectively, producing textbooks, statements, and methodologies concerning theology, many theologians who are not part of the workgroup or may not even know it exists have adopted the moniker of “constructive theologian." The book also considers the term “constructive" itself, offering possible reasons and historical contexts that led to this distinction being made in contrast to “systematic" theology and its subcategories. Constructive theology speaks to a very specific, historically situated emergence in the academy generally and in theology’s attempts to engage those shifts specifically.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1pwt3qp
Book Title: Constructing Constructive Theology-An Introductory Sketch
Publisher: Fortress Press
Author(s): Wyman Jason A.
Abstract: To date, constructive theology hasn’t been viewed or conceptualized as a movement or trend in theology on its own as a whole. Questions arise as to what constructive theology is, where it came from, why it considers itself “constructive," and why constructive is something different from the ways in which theology has been done in the past. This book traces the overall historical arc of constructive theology, from proto-movement through the present. Inklings of constructive theology emerged well before it began to take any formalized shape. At the same time, an important shift occurred when a group of theologians decided to create the Workgroup on Constructive Theology. Further, even as the workgroup continues to work collectively, producing textbooks, statements, and methodologies concerning theology, many theologians who are not part of the workgroup or may not even know it exists have adopted the moniker of “constructive theologian." The book also considers the term “constructive" itself, offering possible reasons and historical contexts that led to this distinction being made in contrast to “systematic" theology and its subcategories. Constructive theology speaks to a very specific, historically situated emergence in the academy generally and in theology’s attempts to engage those shifts specifically.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1pwt3qp
Book Title: The Priority of Injustice-Locating Democracy in Critical Theory
Publisher: University of Georgia Press
Author(s): Doshi Sapana
Abstract: Debates about radical democracy, Barnett argues, have become trapped around a set of oppositions between deliberative and agonistic theories-contrasting thinkers who promote the possibility of rational agreement and those who seek to unmask the role of power or violence or difference in shaping human affairs. While these debates are often framed in terms of consensus versus contestation, Barnett unpacks the assumptions about space and time that underlie different understandings of the sources of political conflict and shows how these differences reflect deeper philosophical commitments to theories of creative action or revived ontologies of "the political." Rather than developing ideal theories of democracy or models of proper politics, he argues that attention should turn toward the practices of claims-making through which political movements express experiences of injustice and make demands for recognition, redress, and re pair. By rethinking the spatial grammar of discussions of public space, democratic inclusion, and globalization, Barnett develops a conceptual framework for analyzing the crucial roles played by geographical processes in generating and processing contentious politics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1pwt43v
INTRODUCTION from:
The Priority of Injustice
Abstract: What is theory good for? Theories are things we argue with. They provide the resources for making validity claims, for drawing inferences, and for constructing generalizations. Arguing with the help of theory is a means of engaging in reasoned debate. And theories are things we use to score points in the midst of an argument. But theories are also things we argue with in another sense, insofar as argument entails passionate, sometimes unreasonable disagreement. Theories can make us angry and invite criticism, if not outright dismissal, because they unsettle our most cherished thoughts. In the social sciences and humanities, arguments
3 READING TO BELONG: from:
Textual Silence
Abstract: The presence and importance of unreadability in the sense of a direct relationship between the reader and the text becomes more intricate and convoluted in writings by second-generation Holocaust authors who often document their quest to discover or write a “readable” narrative of their parents’ wartime experiences.¹ In the absence of this text, second-generation writers bear a more complex relation to even the idea of text than do eyewitnesses or other first-generation writers. Whereas eyewitness authors record their memories or at least try to put fragmented memories together and then read them, authors who identify themselves as “second-generation” writers search
4 THE THIRD GENERATION’S HOLOCAUST: from:
Textual Silence
Abstract: Second-generation authors are also readers of inherited memory, recognizing the presence of the unreadable through aligning themselves with their audience.¹ Part of the drive behind second-generation authors wanting to document their relationship with their parents is to read and touch the material presence offered by a text that they have been largely deprived of through a range of destructive and traumatic means. By their own recounting, second-generation memoirists acknowledge the push and pull of two incongruous forces: a desire to read—to handle, to contain—the experience of their eyewitness parents and, at the same time, a desire to understand
5 AMERICAN FICTION AND THE ACT OF GENOCIDE from:
Textual Silence
Abstract: Paradoxically, the more time that separates the Holocaust from the present, and so the less available the Holocaust is in terms of eyewitness testimony, the more accessible it becomes to readers and writers of Holocaust fiction and the more it becomes historically normalized.¹ Whereas eyewitness authors overtly acknowledge the impossibility of reading their texts in the truest sense of the word—a consequence of reaching the limits of language and representation—contemporary authors, often in an effort to shorten the distance between themselves and the historical event at hand, create a version of the Holocaust that is increasingly available as
Book Title: Divination and Human Nature-A Cognitive History of Intuition in Classical Antiquity
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Struck Peter T.
Abstract: Divination and Human Naturecasts a new perspective on the rich tradition of ancient divination-the reading of divine signs in oracles, omens, and dreams. Popular attitudes during classical antiquity saw these readings as signs from the gods while modern scholars have treated such beliefs as primitive superstitions. In this book, Peter Struck reveals instead that such phenomena provoked an entirely different accounting from the ancient philosophers. These philosophers produced subtle studies into what was an odd but observable fact-that humans could sometimes have uncanny insights-and their work signifies an early chapter in the cognitive history of intuition.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1q1xs0v
CHAPTER 2 Aristotle on Foresight through Dreams from:
Divination and Human Nature
Abstract: In contrast to Plato, the surviving portion of Aristotle’s corpus is made up of his esoteric works—lectures, essays, and sometimes apparently just notes, meant for an audience already at the advanced stage. One salutary aspect is immediately apparent. Aristotle has little use for dramatic irony and deals with issues more directly and systematically than Plato does. On the other hand, the particular challenges for Aristotle’s readers are apparent as well. Whereas Plato could be said to present sometimes too many words, elaborating long and intricate lines of argument in which his investment remains indeterminate, Aristotle nearly always presents too
1 True Stories and the Oppressions of History from:
Stories of the Middle Space
Author(s) RUSHDIE SALMAN
Abstract: In “Sugar,” a short story first published in the
New Yorkerin 1987, the British novelist A.S. Byatt engages with questions of storytelling, memory, and truthfulness. Byatt’s narrator, faced with the terminal illness of her father, finds herself considering how family history is transmitted: the ways in which such transmission is affected by the time and place of narration, the state of mind of the narrator, and the purposes of the storytelling itself. Her father has always been a taciturn man, but in his final illness becomes a storyteller, seeming to want to fill in gaps and set records straight
4 Writing with Photographs: from:
Stories of the Middle Space
Author(s) SHIELDS CAROL
Abstract: Thus far in this exploration of the fictions of postmodern realism we have considered three oxymoronic categories of the “middle space”: historiographic metafiction, magic realism, and parodic myth. We have seen how each in its palimpsestic boundary-crossings offers specific culturally sensitive possibilities for narrative-as-ethics. Now, in this chapter, I want to look at a particular non-verbal form of storytelling, and that is photography. I am going to argue that, because photographs are both dependent on the givenness of the physical world and yet at the same time manifestly constructed, they can be read as paradigmatic of postmodern realism. In light
1 True Stories and the Oppressions of History from:
Stories of the Middle Space
Author(s) RUSHDIE SALMAN
Abstract: In “Sugar,” a short story first published in the
New Yorkerin 1987, the British novelist A.S. Byatt engages with questions of storytelling, memory, and truthfulness. Byatt’s narrator, faced with the terminal illness of her father, finds herself considering how family history is transmitted: the ways in which such transmission is affected by the time and place of narration, the state of mind of the narrator, and the purposes of the storytelling itself. Her father has always been a taciturn man, but in his final illness becomes a storyteller, seeming to want to fill in gaps and set records straight
4 Writing with Photographs: from:
Stories of the Middle Space
Author(s) SHIELDS CAROL
Abstract: Thus far in this exploration of the fictions of postmodern realism we have considered three oxymoronic categories of the “middle space”: historiographic metafiction, magic realism, and parodic myth. We have seen how each in its palimpsestic boundary-crossings offers specific culturally sensitive possibilities for narrative-as-ethics. Now, in this chapter, I want to look at a particular non-verbal form of storytelling, and that is photography. I am going to argue that, because photographs are both dependent on the givenness of the physical world and yet at the same time manifestly constructed, they can be read as paradigmatic of postmodern realism. In light
1 True Stories and the Oppressions of History from:
Stories of the Middle Space
Author(s) RUSHDIE SALMAN
Abstract: In “Sugar,” a short story first published in the
New Yorkerin 1987, the British novelist A.S. Byatt engages with questions of storytelling, memory, and truthfulness. Byatt’s narrator, faced with the terminal illness of her father, finds herself considering how family history is transmitted: the ways in which such transmission is affected by the time and place of narration, the state of mind of the narrator, and the purposes of the storytelling itself. Her father has always been a taciturn man, but in his final illness becomes a storyteller, seeming to want to fill in gaps and set records straight
4 Writing with Photographs: from:
Stories of the Middle Space
Author(s) SHIELDS CAROL
Abstract: Thus far in this exploration of the fictions of postmodern realism we have considered three oxymoronic categories of the “middle space”: historiographic metafiction, magic realism, and parodic myth. We have seen how each in its palimpsestic boundary-crossings offers specific culturally sensitive possibilities for narrative-as-ethics. Now, in this chapter, I want to look at a particular non-verbal form of storytelling, and that is photography. I am going to argue that, because photographs are both dependent on the givenness of the physical world and yet at the same time manifestly constructed, they can be read as paradigmatic of postmodern realism. In light
1 True Stories and the Oppressions of History from:
Stories of the Middle Space
Author(s) RUSHDIE SALMAN
Abstract: In “Sugar,” a short story first published in the
New Yorkerin 1987, the British novelist A.S. Byatt engages with questions of storytelling, memory, and truthfulness. Byatt’s narrator, faced with the terminal illness of her father, finds herself considering how family history is transmitted: the ways in which such transmission is affected by the time and place of narration, the state of mind of the narrator, and the purposes of the storytelling itself. Her father has always been a taciturn man, but in his final illness becomes a storyteller, seeming to want to fill in gaps and set records straight
4 Writing with Photographs: from:
Stories of the Middle Space
Author(s) SHIELDS CAROL
Abstract: Thus far in this exploration of the fictions of postmodern realism we have considered three oxymoronic categories of the “middle space”: historiographic metafiction, magic realism, and parodic myth. We have seen how each in its palimpsestic boundary-crossings offers specific culturally sensitive possibilities for narrative-as-ethics. Now, in this chapter, I want to look at a particular non-verbal form of storytelling, and that is photography. I am going to argue that, because photographs are both dependent on the givenness of the physical world and yet at the same time manifestly constructed, they can be read as paradigmatic of postmodern realism. In light
1 True Stories and the Oppressions of History from:
Stories of the Middle Space
Author(s) RUSHDIE SALMAN
Abstract: In “Sugar,” a short story first published in the
New Yorkerin 1987, the British novelist A.S. Byatt engages with questions of storytelling, memory, and truthfulness. Byatt’s narrator, faced with the terminal illness of her father, finds herself considering how family history is transmitted: the ways in which such transmission is affected by the time and place of narration, the state of mind of the narrator, and the purposes of the storytelling itself. Her father has always been a taciturn man, but in his final illness becomes a storyteller, seeming to want to fill in gaps and set records straight
4 Writing with Photographs: from:
Stories of the Middle Space
Author(s) SHIELDS CAROL
Abstract: Thus far in this exploration of the fictions of postmodern realism we have considered three oxymoronic categories of the “middle space”: historiographic metafiction, magic realism, and parodic myth. We have seen how each in its palimpsestic boundary-crossings offers specific culturally sensitive possibilities for narrative-as-ethics. Now, in this chapter, I want to look at a particular non-verbal form of storytelling, and that is photography. I am going to argue that, because photographs are both dependent on the givenness of the physical world and yet at the same time manifestly constructed, they can be read as paradigmatic of postmodern realism. In light
Introduction from:
The Goals of Medicine
Author(s) Callahan Daniel
Abstract: In 1993, the Hastings Center initiated a project on the Goals of Medicine. It was conceived out of a sense of frustration and perplexity. Throughout the world, but especially in the United States during that time, vast national debates had erupted over needed reforms in the health care system. The Clinton Administration was pushing for universal health care while other bills before Congress pursued a variety of proposals on that general theme.
What Kind of Values? from:
The Goals of Medicine
Author(s) Gracia Diego
Abstract: Medicine has not been a unique or homogeneous task throughout history. What we call medicine is a diverse set of ideas, methods, procedures, and practices that has been changing continuously from the beginning of human culture until now. The only point in common throughout history has been the goal of helping people overcome disease and promote health. But if we try to analyze the contents proper of those two terms, “health” and “disease,” we realize that over time their meaning has changed; a canonical or paradigmatic concept cannot be found for them. In other words, health and disease are not,
Old Age: from:
The Goals of Medicine
Author(s) Boyd Kenneth
Abstract: “Grandfather was not a problem but a solver of problems.”¹ That may be too optimistic a picture of old age in the past. In preliterate societies, the old were valued as “the libraries of the people.” But once societies became literate and devised more efficient means of information retrieval, the elderly no longer had a secure cultural niche. Individuals who retained control of significant resources—active politicians and intellectuals, for example—might be treated with respect. But the common lot of the elderly, in agricultural and industrial societies, was sometimes closer to the cruel marginalization depicted, for example, in Zola’s
Traditional Chinese Medicine and the Goals of Medicine from:
The Goals of Medicine
Author(s) Weibo Lu
Abstract: Traditional Chinese medicine (TCM) has much in common with other forms of so-called traditional medicine, but it is also unique. It has its own theoretical system and terminology. It can also guide clinical practice effectively. The development of modern science and technology is the primary cause for the evolution from ancient Greco-Roman forms of traditional medicine to modern medicine. Most traditional medicine could not accommodate science and technology, and were largely overcome by it. Only TCM met this challenge, arming itself to prove its efficacy and the validity of its philosophy.¹ Over time, hundreds of modern doctors and professors who
Conjectures on Conjunctures and Other Matters: from:
Redescribing the Gospel of Mark
Author(s) Smith Jonathan Z.
Abstract: Fieldwork, the distinctive procedural hallmark of the anthropological enterprise, became an unquestioned professional requirement during the decades of sociocultural anthropology’s “classical period,” roughly 1925 to 1960. for our purposes, the major consequence of this is a presentism characteristic of much ethnographic reporting: the society as observed at the time of the fieldworker’s interaction with it. While this presentism raises large conceptual questions,¹ its practical result with respect to theory was a strong bias against the historical in dominant approaches, whether the latter was functionalism or structuralism (to name but two, all but opposite options). in addition to reflecting contemporary practice,
Cartwheels: from:
Redescribing the Gospel of Mark
Author(s) Mack Burton L.
Abstract: While i know that there are no originary events, no replications, that all moments of construal are reinterpretation or redescription of reinter-pretations and redescriptions, there are times when knowing the pre-remoments help in explaining the re-re-moments. This seems to be one of those pre-pre-re-re cases. What the seminar does not know, but I know full well, is that, trading letters, papers, phone calls, and memos with Jonathan Z. Smith in the course of what he has called receiving his “assignment” from the executive committee, has had me doing cartwheels all summer long. Willi braun has written to say that receiving
Markan Grapplings from:
Redescribing the Gospel of Mark
Author(s) Matthews Christopher R.
Abstract: My agreement with the steering committee for this paper was to offer reflections on aspects of the other papers prepared for our sessions in Toronto. Both Burton L. Mack and William E. Arnal have responded in some detail to Jonathan Z. Smith’s extensive work that allows the seminar to conceptualize a theoretical grappling hook for the recovery of the “submerged” Markan situation. Mack’s and Arnal’s coverage of Smith’s contributions has allowed me the luxury of focusing on some of the issues that they have raised from my own perspective. I am in complete accord with Arnal’s sentiments, expressed at the
Mark, War, and Creative Imagination from:
Redescribing the Gospel of Mark
Author(s) Arnal William E.
Abstract: The Gospel according to Mark, arguably, laid the framework for most subsequent understandings of Jesus and of the “movement” he allegedly instigated.¹ The predominant “ancient myth” with which our “modern theories” are struggling is thus precisely the one laid down by Mark. It receives fuller elaboration and extension forward in time in Luke-Acts, which in its turn offers a basis for Eusebius’s even more ambitious conceptualization.² But the narrative
modeand the substantive implications of that mode—the view, in short, that Jesus is understood best in terms of his activity and particularly in terms of a series of sequential
Conjectures on Conjunctures and Other Matters: from:
Redescribing the Gospel of Mark
Author(s) Smith Jonathan Z.
Abstract: Fieldwork, the distinctive procedural hallmark of the anthropological enterprise, became an unquestioned professional requirement during the decades of sociocultural anthropology’s “classical period,” roughly 1925 to 1960. for our purposes, the major consequence of this is a presentism characteristic of much ethnographic reporting: the society as observed at the time of the fieldworker’s interaction with it. While this presentism raises large conceptual questions,¹ its practical result with respect to theory was a strong bias against the historical in dominant approaches, whether the latter was functionalism or structuralism (to name but two, all but opposite options). in addition to reflecting contemporary practice,
Cartwheels: from:
Redescribing the Gospel of Mark
Author(s) Mack Burton L.
Abstract: While i know that there are no originary events, no replications, that all moments of construal are reinterpretation or redescription of reinter-pretations and redescriptions, there are times when knowing the pre-remoments help in explaining the re-re-moments. This seems to be one of those pre-pre-re-re cases. What the seminar does not know, but I know full well, is that, trading letters, papers, phone calls, and memos with Jonathan Z. Smith in the course of what he has called receiving his “assignment” from the executive committee, has had me doing cartwheels all summer long. Willi braun has written to say that receiving
Markan Grapplings from:
Redescribing the Gospel of Mark
Author(s) Matthews Christopher R.
Abstract: My agreement with the steering committee for this paper was to offer reflections on aspects of the other papers prepared for our sessions in Toronto. Both Burton L. Mack and William E. Arnal have responded in some detail to Jonathan Z. Smith’s extensive work that allows the seminar to conceptualize a theoretical grappling hook for the recovery of the “submerged” Markan situation. Mack’s and Arnal’s coverage of Smith’s contributions has allowed me the luxury of focusing on some of the issues that they have raised from my own perspective. I am in complete accord with Arnal’s sentiments, expressed at the
Mark, War, and Creative Imagination from:
Redescribing the Gospel of Mark
Author(s) Arnal William E.
Abstract: The Gospel according to Mark, arguably, laid the framework for most subsequent understandings of Jesus and of the “movement” he allegedly instigated.¹ The predominant “ancient myth” with which our “modern theories” are struggling is thus precisely the one laid down by Mark. It receives fuller elaboration and extension forward in time in Luke-Acts, which in its turn offers a basis for Eusebius’s even more ambitious conceptualization.² But the narrative
modeand the substantive implications of that mode—the view, in short, that Jesus is understood best in terms of his activity and particularly in terms of a series of sequential
Learning through Experience and Expression: from:
The Health Care Professional as Friend and Healer
Author(s) Benner Patricia
Abstract: Nursing practice is a public extension of the ordinary care of family and self in everyday life.¹ When people are critically and gravely ill, family members can become overwhelmed by the emotional and physical labor of caregiving, and nurses can support and extend the caregiving resources of the family. During times of transition such as birth or the care of an elderly parent or ill partner, nurses can assist with the new adaptations to caregiving required.
Book Title: Cather Studies, Volume 11-Willa Cather at the Modernist Crux
Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): Thacker Robert
Abstract: Willa Cather at the Modernist Cruxexamines Willa Cather's position in time, in aesthetics, and in the world. Born a Victorian in 1873, Cather made herself a modernist through the poems, stories, and novels she wrote and published into the twentieth century. Beginning with a prologue locating Cather's position, this volume of Cather Studies offers three sets of related essays.The first section takes up Cather's beginnings with her late nineteenth-century cultural influences. The second section explores a range of discernible direct connections with contemporary artists (Howard Pyle, Frederic Remington, and Ernest Blumenschein) and others who figured in the making of her texts. The third section focuses onThe Song of the Lark, a novel that confirms Cather's shift westward and elaborates her emergent modernism. An epilogue by the editors ofThe Selected Letters of Willa Catheraddresses how the recent availability of these letters has transformed Cather studies. Altogether, these essays detail Cather's shaping of the world of the early twentieth century and later into a singular modernism born of both inherited and newer cultural traditions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1qv5psc
2 Thea in Wonderland: from:
Cather Studies, Volume 11
Author(s) MOORE MICHELLE E.
Abstract: William M. Curtin claims that Lewis Carroll “was one of Cather’s great enthusiasms” as indicated by her membership in the Lewis Carroll club at the University of Nebraska. In a letter to Mariel Gere dated 12 March 1896, Willa Cather explains how she relieved her boredom in Red Cloud by reading
Alice in Wonderlandto her ten-year-old brother, James. Curtin notes the letter inThe World and the Parish(1:357–58), and James Woodress has added about the visit that Cather “was sick ofAlice in Wonderlandafter reading it to Jim sixteen times” (Woodress 105; Letter 22). In the
8 The Trafficking of Mrs. Forrester: from:
Cather Studies, Volume 11
Author(s) GUSTKE CHARMION
Abstract: In a letter addressed to her mother, Mary Virginia Boak Cather, on 2 March 1925, Willa Cather, seeking her mother’s forgiveness after a quarrel, reminds her that the last time they had been “cross” at one another was “about poor Mrs. Garber”: “and you see now, don’t you, that I understood her better than you thought I did, and that though I admired certain things, I was never taken in by her” (
Letters367). Cather’s compassionate regard for Mrs. Garber, the inspiration behindA Lost Lady’s Mrs. Forrester, generated tension between Cather and her mother, who seemingly disapproved of Mrs.
14 Women and Vessels in The Song of the Lark and Shadows on the Rock from:
Cather Studies, Volume 11
Author(s) CONRAD ANGELA
Abstract: Many Cather scholars are drawn to the powerful figure of Thea in
The Song of the Larkas she comes to know herself and become an artist during her time spent in Panther Canyon. In the canyon she contemplates the vessels of pottery left by the ancient cliff dwellers, connecting them in her imagination with art in their ability to capture and contain life. As she examines the shards of broken pottery and recognizes herself as a vessel for art, she links the traditional women’s labor of carrying water to the creativity and confidence of creating art. In this setting
The Sins of the First Woman: from:
Early Jewish Writings
Author(s) Wacker Marie-Theres
Abstract: The figures of Adam and Eve both frequently appear in early Jewish writings from Hellenistic-Roman times but with different significance and characteristics. While Adam emerges in numerous passages (2 En. 30–32; 42; 58; 4 Ezra 3.4–27; 4.30–32; 7; 2 Bar. 4.17–19; 23; 48.42–50; 54; 56; 3 Bar. 9; sib. or. 3.24–28; apoc. sedr. 4–8), Eve appears mainly in association with her companion (Jub. 2–4; 1 En. 32; 2 En. 31; 2 Bar. 48.42–43; apoc. ab. 23–24; 3 Bar. 4; apoc. Sedr. 7.6–7), or she comes on the scene to
Real Women and Literary Airbrushing: from:
Early Jewish Writings
Author(s) Taylor Joan E.
Abstract: In
De vita contemplativaPhilo describes a group of contemplative Jewish ascetics who exemplify philosophical ideals. They live outside Alexandria, without possessions, and spend most of their time focusing on God, or rather “Being” (Contempl.2), studying scripture, and composing music in small huts, gathering together only on Sabbath days for communal teaching and a meal. Every seven weeks this extends to an all-night sacred event of dancing and singing, configured in strongly cultic terms.¹ Philo states women’s inclusion within his example at the start (Contempl. 2), and he then mentions them specifically when they appear with men on the
TWO NETWORKS AND STORIES from:
Identity and Control
Author(s) Wuerkner Sabine
Abstract: Social networks are traces from dynamics across netdom switchings. As two identities come over time to focus control attention
Una mirada desde la universidad from:
Documental (es)
Author(s) Correa Ernesto
Abstract: MANUEL SILVA: En vista de tu rol como profesor y actual director del Programa de Comunicación Audiovisual y Multimedial de la Universidad de Antioquia, de la que además eres egresado, comencemos por establecer una relación entre tu proceso de formación en la década de 1990 y la oferta formativa del presente.
Picturing My Mother: from:
Mothering Mennonite
Author(s) REDEKOP MAGDALENE
Abstract: Look! This is a picture of my parents that was taken at the time of their marriage on June 30, 1932. That is my sister Sarah in our mother’s arms. I begin with what is a constant in writing about photography, namely our assumption that a photograph is evidence, in the words of Susan Sontag, “that something exists, or did exist…” (
5). Unlike a painting, a photograph is proof “thatthey were there” and, as Roland Barthes notes, it cannot escape this “pure deictic language.” My opening gesture, then, is like that of “the child pointing his finger at something
The Elusive Dancing Mother: from:
Mothering Mennonite
Author(s) FROESE EDNA
Abstract: My first reading of Darcie Friesen Hossack’s superbly written
MennonitesDon’tDancedid not evoke any wish to dance. In fact, I needed long breaks between stories, sometimes within stories, just to ease the emotional upheaval of seeing and feeling again so much of what I have often willed into invisibility. While all fiction requires of us some emotional involvement in the characters’ lives, Hossack’s short stories “identify me to myself”¹ as if her fictional mothers are my mother and her fictional daughters are my sister and I. When identification is that strong, it seems foolish and cowardly to refuse
Eking Out a Discursive Space: from:
Mothering Mennonite
Author(s) LOEWEN MARY ANN
Abstract: In many ways, my mother was a non-conformist. In the late 1940s in Morden, Manitoba, when most Mennonite women her age were getting married, she was away from home teaching school in remote northern Manitoba communities. When these same women were having babies, she was pursuing a theological degree from Mennonite Brethren Bible College (mbbc) in Winnipeg, Manitoba. She did eventually get married at the ripe old age of twenty-five. And she did have children, a respectable half dozen to be exact. But she never really did follow the gendered conventions of her time. She died in August of 2010
“Single Sisters” and Occupations: from:
Mothering Mennonite
Author(s) NAKA TOMOMI
Abstract: “How old are you?” “Are you married?” “Do you have children?” These are the questions I was often asked when I first visited conservative Mennonite families in Lancaster County, Pennsylvania in July 1999. At the time, I was a graduate student at a Japanese university researching tourism in Lancaster. I was a little perplexed in hearing the same questions over and over again, but I explained that I was in my mid-twenties, single without children, and had no relatives in the United States. I answered their questions as accurately as I could, but in part because of my limited English,
“Tirelessly Working to Dispense Her Own Wisdom”: from:
Mothering Mennonite
Author(s) DOWDESWELL TRACEY LEIGH
Abstract: The ideology of scientific motherhood began to gain ground in Canada in the late nineteenth century, and came to rationalize mothering for Mennonite women along expert and scientific lines. Scientific motherhood was a widespread cultural movement that sought to reproduce the conditions of industrialization and regulate the modes of women’s labour inside the “factory” home. Scientific motherhood is closely associated with urbanization, industrialization, the medicalization of childbirth, and the increasing popularity of artificial formula that characterized its rise during the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries (see Apple), a time of significant Mennonite resettlement in Canada. For Canadian mothers, including
“I Always Played Restaurant”: from:
Mothering Mennonite
Author(s) KLASSEN DOREEN HELEN
Abstract: A common assumption concerning childhood play in societies with well-entrenched gender roles and conservative religious values is that imaginative play is discouraged and that play simply replicates anticipated “real-life roles” (Carlson, Taylor, and Levin 538; Taylor and Carlson 257). However, scholars of cross-cultural research on childhood, and particularly on childhood play, argue that children’s play is more independent of pragmatic expectations and adult supervision than often assumed (Aguilar 29-30, 37; Edwards 335-7; Rabain-Jamin, Maynard, and Greenfield 204-5; Watson-Gegeo 148; McMahon and Sutton-Smith 297-8), since children’s symbolic behaviour is not necessarily compliant, but at times even subversive, defying cultural expectations (Ackerley
Crone and Moon, Umbilical Cords/Blood Ties from:
Natal Signs
Author(s) REID BRESCIA NEMBER
Abstract: The subsequent illustration, cut-out in black paper, offers a depiction of the intergenerational continuum of birth. This work imagines a family line, with umbilical cords still attached, a snapshot of multiple generations seen at once, in non-linear time. Centering a representation of queer birthers, including trans folks and LGBT-TIQ2S people, is integral to this web of generations. Homage is paid to the curious reality of human reproductive physiology—a fetus with ovaries is born containing their entire life’s supply of “eggs” (Moore, Persaud, and Torchia 269). This means that the eggs that were fertilized to become each of us were
Flower of My Flesh from:
Natal Signs
Author(s) ROSENZWEIG ROSIE
Abstract: When I was pregnant for the first time in 1959, I was working as a librarian at the Indiana State Library, with all the most recently published books at my disposal. Hot off the press, Marjorie Karmel’s book
Thank You, Dr. Lamazewas read in one sitting. Ms. Karmel described a new method of giving birth without drugs, a method that her French doctor modelled after his experiences in Russia at the time. It became known eventually as the Lamaze method of childbirth. The Mayo Clinic describes that the goal of this method is to increase confidence in your ability
Go the Fuck to Sleep Prince George? from:
Natal Signs
Author(s) MARTIN BETTY ANN
Abstract: Noted anthropologist clifford geertz defines culture as “the ensemble of stories we tell ourselves about ourselves” (448). In keeping with this theory, Fred Inglis suggests that identity is formed through a process whereby we observe and “inhabit the narratives of how to live” available within a given culture (“Culture and Sentiment” 2). Such narratives generally reflect the dominant discourse and accepted range of meanings in relation to socially defined roles. In terms of the negotiated meaning of motherhood, however, there is a growing tension between competing narratives and representations that highlight the juxtaposition between culturally constructed fantasies of maternal perfection
18. The Aesthetics of (Dis)Empowered Motherhood in Iranian Cinema (1965–1978) from:
Screening Motherhood in Contemporary World Cinema
Author(s) SHEIBANI KHATEREH
Abstract: In the wake of tremendous changes on political, social, cultural and economic levels, the last thirteen years before the Iranian Revolution of 1979 were the most dynamic years for Iranian national cinema, in both commercial and intellectual areas. Iranian society was on the brink of a revolution that would change the future of a country and the region. At the same time, the Iranian film industry entered a new phase of commercialization that appealed to mass audiences more than ever. The films that were made in this period became a pedestal for the post-revolutionary cinema, which later prospered in the
1. Authors, Institutions, and Markets from:
Literature Against Criticism
Abstract: For those working in university English departments in the early twenty-first century, these words will probably sound all too familiar: “[t]his man possesses great eloquence. See that he is denied justice for some time and arrange for all his grandiose speeches to be recorded”. Yet, despite the plausibility of the scenario, this passage is not a sadistic
diktatissued from a university administrator to an unsuspecting humanities underling, perhaps enforcing lecture capture or a similar contemporary technology. It comes instead, in rough translation, from a Ninth- or Tenth- Dynasty Ancient Egyptian story called theTale of the Eloquent Peasant. Briefly
8. Discipline and Publish from:
Literature Against Criticism
Abstract: As mentioned in the opening to the final part of this book, succinct critiques of teleology find their apex in Theodor Adorno’s well-known opening to
Negative Dialecticswhere he writes that philosophy lives on because the moment of its realisation was missed.¹ This statement — a clear reference to Marx’s proclamation in theTheses on Feuerbach(1845/1888) that philosophers have so far only interpreted the world, but that the point is to change it — came at a time when it seemed that the potential for revolutionary action was past. In his perpetual pessimism, Adorno advocates for a return to
Book Title: Love and its Critics-From the Song of Songs to Shakespeare and Milton’s Eden
Publisher: Open Book Publishers
Author(s): Movsesian Arpi
Abstract: This book is a history of love and the challenge love offers to the laws and customs of its times and places, as told through poetry from the Song of Songs to John Milton’s Paradise Lost. It is also an account of the critical reception afforded to such literature, and the ways in which criticism has attempted to stifle this challenge. Bryson and Movsesian argue that the poetry they explore celebrates and reinvents the love the troubadour poets of the eleventh and twelfth centuries called fin’amor: love as an end in itself, mutual and freely chosen even in the face of social, religious, or political retribution. Neither eros nor agape, neither exclusively of the body, nor solely of the spirit, this love is a middle path. Alongside this tradition has grown a critical movement that employs a 'hermeneutics of suspicion', in Paul Ricoeur’s phrase, to claim that passionate love poetry is not what it seems, and should be properly understood as worship of God, subordination to Empire, or an entanglement with the structures of language itself – in short, the very things it resists. The book engages with some of the seminal literature of the Western canon, including the Bible, the poetry of Ovid, and works by English authors such as William Shakespeare and John Donne, and with criticism that stretches from the earliest readings of the Song of Songs to contemporary academic literature. Lively and enjoyable in its style, it attempts to restore a sense of pleasure to the reading of poetry, and to puncture critical insistence that literature must be outwitted. It will be of value to professional, graduate, and advanced undergraduate scholars of literature, and to the educated general reader interested in treatments of love in poetry throughout history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1sq5vd6
1. Love and Authority: from:
Love and its Critics
Abstract: Love has always had its critics. They range far and wide throughout history, from Plato and the Neoplatonists, to the Rabbinic and Christian interpreters of the Song of Songs, from the clerics behind the savage Albigensian Crusade, to the seventeenth-century English Puritan author William Prynne, who never met a joy he failed to condemn. Love has never lacked for those who try to tame it for “higher” purposes, or those who would argue that “the worst evils have been committed in the name of love”.¹ At the same time, love has always had its passionate defenders, though these have more
7. The Ladder of Love in Italian Poetry and Prose, and the Reactions of the Sixteenth-Century Sonneteers from:
Love and its Critics
Abstract: Despite the changes that are beginning to appear in fourteenth-century England, by the same time in Italy the sublimation and spiritualization of love has long established itself as the dominant theme of European poetry, a theme that is exported to England in the sixteenth century, briefly sweeping aside much of the spirit we have seen developing in Chaucer. To understand how and why this happened, we will have to circle back and spend a little time with Plato.
8. Shakespeare: from:
Love and its Critics
Abstract: The true recovery of the troubadour tradition comes with Shakespeare, the poet and playwright who “towers like a mountain peak above the surrounding foothills, but is one substance and structure with them”.¹ Most truly “of the English strain”, Shakespeare’s sonnets are a reversing, even a mocking of the Petrarchan mode and the Neoplatonic sublimation of passion into worship that sometimes marks the poetry of Sidney. Rather than treating the individual as a means to an end, the lowest rung on the ladder of love, Shakespeare’s sonnets reverse this emphasis, valuing the individual as an end in itself, not a means
Book Title: Love and its Critics-From the Song of Songs to Shakespeare and Milton’s Eden
Publisher: Open Book Publishers
Author(s): Movsesian Arpi
Abstract: This book is a history of love and the challenge love offers to the laws and customs of its times and places, as told through poetry from the Song of Songs to John Milton’s Paradise Lost. It is also an account of the critical reception afforded to such literature, and the ways in which criticism has attempted to stifle this challenge. Bryson and Movsesian argue that the poetry they explore celebrates and reinvents the love the troubadour poets of the eleventh and twelfth centuries called fin’amor: love as an end in itself, mutual and freely chosen even in the face of social, religious, or political retribution. Neither eros nor agape, neither exclusively of the body, nor solely of the spirit, this love is a middle path. Alongside this tradition has grown a critical movement that employs a 'hermeneutics of suspicion', in Paul Ricoeur’s phrase, to claim that passionate love poetry is not what it seems, and should be properly understood as worship of God, subordination to Empire, or an entanglement with the structures of language itself – in short, the very things it resists. The book engages with some of the seminal literature of the Western canon, including the Bible, the poetry of Ovid, and works by English authors such as William Shakespeare and John Donne, and with criticism that stretches from the earliest readings of the Song of Songs to contemporary academic literature. Lively and enjoyable in its style, it attempts to restore a sense of pleasure to the reading of poetry, and to puncture critical insistence that literature must be outwitted. It will be of value to professional, graduate, and advanced undergraduate scholars of literature, and to the educated general reader interested in treatments of love in poetry throughout history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1sq5vd6
1. Love and Authority: from:
Love and its Critics
Abstract: Love has always had its critics. They range far and wide throughout history, from Plato and the Neoplatonists, to the Rabbinic and Christian interpreters of the Song of Songs, from the clerics behind the savage Albigensian Crusade, to the seventeenth-century English Puritan author William Prynne, who never met a joy he failed to condemn. Love has never lacked for those who try to tame it for “higher” purposes, or those who would argue that “the worst evils have been committed in the name of love”.¹ At the same time, love has always had its passionate defenders, though these have more
7. The Ladder of Love in Italian Poetry and Prose, and the Reactions of the Sixteenth-Century Sonneteers from:
Love and its Critics
Abstract: Despite the changes that are beginning to appear in fourteenth-century England, by the same time in Italy the sublimation and spiritualization of love has long established itself as the dominant theme of European poetry, a theme that is exported to England in the sixteenth century, briefly sweeping aside much of the spirit we have seen developing in Chaucer. To understand how and why this happened, we will have to circle back and spend a little time with Plato.
8. Shakespeare: from:
Love and its Critics
Abstract: The true recovery of the troubadour tradition comes with Shakespeare, the poet and playwright who “towers like a mountain peak above the surrounding foothills, but is one substance and structure with them”.¹ Most truly “of the English strain”, Shakespeare’s sonnets are a reversing, even a mocking of the Petrarchan mode and the Neoplatonic sublimation of passion into worship that sometimes marks the poetry of Sidney. Rather than treating the individual as a means to an end, the lowest rung on the ladder of love, Shakespeare’s sonnets reverse this emphasis, valuing the individual as an end in itself, not a means
SEVEN Respect from:
Philosophical criminology
Abstract: So far this book has considered philosophical ideas of values, morality, aesthetics, order and rules and how they relate to criminological concern. This chapter explores a positive way forward centred on the concept of respect. The meaning of ‘respect’ has been a concern for moral philosophy for some time (for example Darwall, 1977; Dworkin, 1977; Hill, 2000; Bagnoli, 2007; Carter, 2011). Much of this work draws, at least in part, on the writings of Immanuel Kant centred on the categorical imperative (see Chapter Three) and the notion of human dignity, that ‘respect for the moral law entails treating persons (oneself
SEVEN Respect from:
Philosophical criminology
Abstract: So far this book has considered philosophical ideas of values, morality, aesthetics, order and rules and how they relate to criminological concern. This chapter explores a positive way forward centred on the concept of respect. The meaning of ‘respect’ has been a concern for moral philosophy for some time (for example Darwall, 1977; Dworkin, 1977; Hill, 2000; Bagnoli, 2007; Carter, 2011). Much of this work draws, at least in part, on the writings of Immanuel Kant centred on the categorical imperative (see Chapter Three) and the notion of human dignity, that ‘respect for the moral law entails treating persons (oneself
SEVEN Respect from:
Philosophical criminology
Abstract: So far this book has considered philosophical ideas of values, morality, aesthetics, order and rules and how they relate to criminological concern. This chapter explores a positive way forward centred on the concept of respect. The meaning of ‘respect’ has been a concern for moral philosophy for some time (for example Darwall, 1977; Dworkin, 1977; Hill, 2000; Bagnoli, 2007; Carter, 2011). Much of this work draws, at least in part, on the writings of Immanuel Kant centred on the categorical imperative (see Chapter Three) and the notion of human dignity, that ‘respect for the moral law entails treating persons (oneself
Book Title: Researching the lifecourse-Critical reflections from the social sciences
Publisher: Policy Press
Author(s): Hardill Irene
Abstract: Researching the Lifecourse features methods linking time, space and mobilities and provides practitioners with practical detail in each chapter. It covers the full lifecourse and includes innovative methods and case study examples from different European and North American contexts.The lifecourse perspective continues to be an important subject in the social sciences. Researching the Lifecourse offers a distinctive approach in that it truly covers the lifecourse (childhood, adulthood and older age), focusing on innovative methods and case study examples from a variety of European and North American contexts. This original approach connects theory and practice from across the social sciences by situating methodology and research design within relevant conceptual frameworks. This diverse collection features methods that are linked to questions of time, space and mobilities while providing practitioners with practical detail in each chapter.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1t89635
TWO Time and the lifecourse: from:
Researching the lifecourse
Author(s) Neale Bren
Abstract: This quotation from an early ‘armchair’ anthropologist reflects much of what is compelling about the study of the lifecourse – conceptualised here as the flow of lives through time. Writing in the first decade of the 20th
THREE Time in mixed methods longitudinal research: from:
Researching the lifecourse
Author(s) Edwards Rosalind
Abstract: The aim of this chapter is to explore the methodological and analytical challenges thrown up by an ongoing study that has been reusing and combining longitudinal qualitative narrative and quantitative survey data to research individual attitudes to voluntarism between 1981 and 2012.¹ This period represents a time of economic and social policy change encompassing recession and cuts to public services; followed by relative prosperity and increase in investment in public services; and then the most recent recession and accompanying austerity measures (Timmins, 2001; Glennerster, 2007; Alcock 2011; Defty, 2011; Driver, 2008).
FOUR A restudy of young workers from the 1960s: from:
Researching the lifecourse
Author(s) O’Connor Henrietta
Abstract: Since 2000 we have been undertaking a detailed restudy of Norbert Elias’s previously lost ‘Adjustment of Young Workers to Work Situations and Adult Roles’ (1962–4) project.¹ This project was not only important because of its links to Norbert Elias or because it was one of the largest studies of school to work transition at that time (see Goodwin and O’Connor, 2005a), but also because there are very few ‘classic’ studies from the post war period that focused on the English East Midlands and a key centre of engineering, textiles and clothing and footwear manufacture. As part of the restudy
EIGHT Keeping in touch: from:
Researching the lifecourse
Author(s) Bowlby Sophie
Abstract: This chapter is about a research project on the friendship afforded to women in their fifties by members of their ‘personal communities’ and their interactions with information and communication technologies (ICT). The research examined the informal social interactions of women in ‘midlife’ in the context of their lifecourse trajectory to date and their anticipations of the future. It focused, in particular, on the time–space context of these interactions, exploring the time–space scheduling of ‘keeping in touch’ and the real and virtual spaces within which these social interactions took place. The empirical research was carried out in the summer
Book Title: Researching the lifecourse-Critical reflections from the social sciences
Publisher: Policy Press
Author(s): Hardill Irene
Abstract: Researching the Lifecourse features methods linking time, space and mobilities and provides practitioners with practical detail in each chapter. It covers the full lifecourse and includes innovative methods and case study examples from different European and North American contexts.The lifecourse perspective continues to be an important subject in the social sciences. Researching the Lifecourse offers a distinctive approach in that it truly covers the lifecourse (childhood, adulthood and older age), focusing on innovative methods and case study examples from a variety of European and North American contexts. This original approach connects theory and practice from across the social sciences by situating methodology and research design within relevant conceptual frameworks. This diverse collection features methods that are linked to questions of time, space and mobilities while providing practitioners with practical detail in each chapter.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1t89635
TWO Time and the lifecourse: from:
Researching the lifecourse
Author(s) Neale Bren
Abstract: This quotation from an early ‘armchair’ anthropologist reflects much of what is compelling about the study of the lifecourse – conceptualised here as the flow of lives through time. Writing in the first decade of the 20th
THREE Time in mixed methods longitudinal research: from:
Researching the lifecourse
Author(s) Edwards Rosalind
Abstract: The aim of this chapter is to explore the methodological and analytical challenges thrown up by an ongoing study that has been reusing and combining longitudinal qualitative narrative and quantitative survey data to research individual attitudes to voluntarism between 1981 and 2012.¹ This period represents a time of economic and social policy change encompassing recession and cuts to public services; followed by relative prosperity and increase in investment in public services; and then the most recent recession and accompanying austerity measures (Timmins, 2001; Glennerster, 2007; Alcock 2011; Defty, 2011; Driver, 2008).
FOUR A restudy of young workers from the 1960s: from:
Researching the lifecourse
Author(s) O’Connor Henrietta
Abstract: Since 2000 we have been undertaking a detailed restudy of Norbert Elias’s previously lost ‘Adjustment of Young Workers to Work Situations and Adult Roles’ (1962–4) project.¹ This project was not only important because of its links to Norbert Elias or because it was one of the largest studies of school to work transition at that time (see Goodwin and O’Connor, 2005a), but also because there are very few ‘classic’ studies from the post war period that focused on the English East Midlands and a key centre of engineering, textiles and clothing and footwear manufacture. As part of the restudy
EIGHT Keeping in touch: from:
Researching the lifecourse
Author(s) Bowlby Sophie
Abstract: This chapter is about a research project on the friendship afforded to women in their fifties by members of their ‘personal communities’ and their interactions with information and communication technologies (ICT). The research examined the informal social interactions of women in ‘midlife’ in the context of their lifecourse trajectory to date and their anticipations of the future. It focused, in particular, on the time–space context of these interactions, exploring the time–space scheduling of ‘keeping in touch’ and the real and virtual spaces within which these social interactions took place. The empirical research was carried out in the summer
ONE Retiring to the Costas: from:
Retiring to Spain
Abstract: This book focuses on the lives of a group of women from the UK who moved to the Costa Blanca¹ in Spain in retirement. We follow their journeys as they seek ‘community’ and belonging in a world characterised by rapid social change. Imbued with nostalgic yearning, community is hailed as a panacea to the ills of modernity and as a representation of social continuity. Nostalgia denotes the mourning of a lost home or place and a lost time – and in this way – the search for community and belonging can also be understood as a quest for another epoch.
TWO Conceptualising, theorising and narrating retirement migration from:
Retiring to Spain
Abstract: The focus of this chapter is on how I gain knowledge of the processes involved in constructing shifting and overlapping forms of belonging to different kinds of community and how this illuminates experiences of retirement migration. I begin by presenting a discussion of my conceptualisation of retirement migration and then unravel my approach to theory, explaining how women’s experiences and agency are placed within wider structural contexts. I explore how understanding of retirement migration is gained through a thematic and structural narrative analytic approach centring on plot, time, identity or positionality and an analysis of linguistic devices employed. An important
FIVE Leaving the UK: from:
Retiring to Spain
Abstract: In the previous chapter I suggested that thinking with community and how – and to what – people construct belonging illuminates processes of social change and continuity from particular social locations or positions. Retirement migration was presented as a form and consequence of social change, involving both boundary spanning and reconstitution. The important role of nostalgia as a cultural resource in constructing belonging to different forms of community, evoking an imagined lost place or time, particularly for older people was also considered. In this chapter, I explore the reasons for women’s dislocation in and from the UK, and the decision-making
NINE Locating ‘home’ and community: from:
Retiring to Spain
Abstract: Throughout this book we have followed women’s migration journeys across space and time as they spanned and reconstituted boundaries. Beginning with their pre-migration lives – characterised for many by fractured belonging in the UK – upper and more proximate structures enabled and facilitated their agency in moving to Spain in retirement. We have also seen that women’s positionalities and unique biographies are also significant in shaping migration choices, decision-making processes and their post-migration lives. I framed divergent migration trajectories in relation to two plot typologies: the quest and voyage and return. Those women who ultimately chose to remain in Spain
Book Title: Personhood, identity and care in advanced old age- Publisher: Policy Press
Author(s): Gilleard Chris
Abstract: How do we sustain agency and identity amidst the frailty of advanced old age? What role does care play in this process? Pushing forward new sociological theory, this book explores the theoretical and practical issues raised by age and infirmity. It begins with a theoretical examination of the fourth age, interrogating notions of agency, identity and personhood, as well as the impact of frailty, abjection and ‘othering’. It then applies this analysis to issues of care. Exploring our collective hopes and fears concerning old age and the ends of people’s lives, this is essential reading on one of the biggest social issues of our time.Pushing forward new sociological theory, this book explores the theoretical and practical issues raised by ageing, and the associated problems of mental and physical frailty in later life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1t89766
Book Title: Personhood, identity and care in advanced old age- Publisher: Policy Press
Author(s): Gilleard Chris
Abstract: How do we sustain agency and identity amidst the frailty of advanced old age? What role does care play in this process? Pushing forward new sociological theory, this book explores the theoretical and practical issues raised by age and infirmity. It begins with a theoretical examination of the fourth age, interrogating notions of agency, identity and personhood, as well as the impact of frailty, abjection and ‘othering’. It then applies this analysis to issues of care. Exploring our collective hopes and fears concerning old age and the ends of people’s lives, this is essential reading on one of the biggest social issues of our time.Pushing forward new sociological theory, this book explores the theoretical and practical issues raised by ageing, and the associated problems of mental and physical frailty in later life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1t89766
THREE Guilty victims: from:
Biography and social exclusion in Europe
Author(s) Murard Numa
Abstract: ‘Exclusion’ is not a concept rooted in the social sciences, but an empty box given by the French state to the social sciences in the late 1980s as a subject to study. It was exported to Brussels at the same time, and acknowledged by the EU in 1994 (the poverty programme being renamed Programme Against Exclusion). It was then re-exported to all the European countries. The empty box has since been filled with a huge number of
TWO Biographical methods and social policy in European perspective from:
Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) Chamberlayne Prue
Abstract: The rapid expansion of biographical methods comes at a time of frustration with a number of aspects of social policy, such as positivistic, top–down approaches, the failure to solve issues of expense, efficiency and dependency, and the cultural lag between welfare systems and social change¹. European welfare systems, already under pressure from neoliberal forces, must reorient to new social realities in the labour market, in relations between public and private spheres, in gender relations, and in notions of citizenship and democratic agency. Biographical methods provide a tool for reconnecting welfare systems with lived experience and processes of social change,
TEN Biographical reflections on the problem of changing violent men from:
Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) Gadd David
Abstract: After a lengthy period of neglect within criminology, the study of men’s violence towards female partners gained a high profile during the 1980s as a consequence of feminist activism and feminist research with victims and survivors. Attention was drawn to the pervasive and extensive nature of violence against women, the greater danger posed by men that women know (as opposed to male strangers), the continuous relationship between physical and sexual assaults and emotional abuse, and the criminal, sometimes fatal, consequences of this abuse (Dobash and Dobash, 1980; Kelly, 1988; Hester et al, 1995). Yet, it was not until the mid-
TWELVE Ethical aspects of biographical interviewing and analysis from:
Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) Kaźmierska Kaja
Abstract: It may seem obvious to say that biographical research differs from all other sociological research. The differences apply to research techniques, procedures of analysing biographical material and something that can be called a ‘style of work’, which covers the very time-consuming research stages of material collection and analysis. These and many other specific features of biographical research are grounded in theoretical and methodological assumptions which vary for particular types of biographical work. However, the outstanding characteristic of this kind of work is that the research material is biography.
TWENTY Doctors on an edge: from:
Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) West Linden
Abstract: This chapter derives from in-depth, longitudinal, collaborative and what is termed auto/biographical research among 25 general practitioners (GPs), or family physicians, working in demanding inner-city contexts, including inner London (West, 2001). The research focuses on the learning, role and wellbeing of such GPs during a time of changing roles and expectations, including within the management of healthcare in Britain, and a period of growing criticism over performance and levels of accountability. The serial killer Dr Harold Shipman has replaced, at least in part, the heroic Dr Kildare in the popular mind, and stories of doctors’ mistakes far outweigh the triumphs
TWENTY ONE Intercultural perspectives and professional practice in the university: from:
Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) Herrschaft Felicia
Abstract: Attracting students from other countries and world regions has been an objective for German universities for some time, and more recent policies have facilitated the admission of foreign students. Their attendance is understood as contributing towards internationally recognised standards of education. It was always expected that graduates would act as multipliers upon their return to their countries of origin, although currently there is also a perceived need that for a competitive economy, highly qualified graduates should stay on in Germany to work. At the universities, new study courses and credit point systems have been established towards internationally comparable academic degrees.
[Part Three: Introduction] from:
Localism and neighbourhood planning
Abstract: Part three provides an international perspective on the English experience of neighbourhood planning to amplify its themes and to place it in the context of debates about global shifts in the spatial scale of governance and empowerment. It discusses the concept of locality, identifies the further potential of community planning beyond land use and explores the impact of different state and governance structures on ideas of localism and devolution. This section reminds us that planning at the neighbourhood level can be assembled differently in different places and at different times. The need to avoid easy readings of universalised shifts towards
FIFTEEN Reflections on neighbourhood planning: from:
Localism and neighbourhood planning
Author(s) Brownill Sue
Abstract: At the time of writing in the summer of 2016, 1,900 neighbourhood plans were under way across England, and more than 200 had passed referendum and were being used to help make development decisions (Planning Aid England, 2016). A movement of citizen-planners had responded with pragmatic enthusiasm to the conditional and much-circumscribed opportunity to influence the look and feel of their communities. In no other case study of devolution, across a broad international canvas, do we see so vividly the liberatory and regulatory conflicts that arise from the assemblages of localism, or the tangled relations of power and identity that
TWO Constructions of Culture from:
Zhou Zuoren and an Alternative Chinese Response to Modernity
Abstract: On a late autumn evening in 1906, when dusk had already fallen over the city, Zhou Zuoren arrived at a modest boarding house in the hilly Yushima ni-chome section of Hongo district in Tokyo. Lu Xun had moved to Tokyo six months earlier, after deciding to abandon his medical studies and pursue a career in literature. He was now returning, this time with his brother, from a two-month trip home to Shaoxing. Zhou Zuoren, for whom everything was new, felt a mounting sense of anticipation as they entered the building. Like others of his generation he was attracted by Japan’s
Book Title: The Qing Formation in World-Historical Time- Publisher: Harvard University Asia Center
Author(s): Struve Lynn A.
Abstract: For many years, the Ming and Qing dynasties have been grouped as “late imperial China," a temporal framework that allows scholars to identify and evaluate indigenous patterns of social, economic, and cultural change initiated in the last century of Ming rule that imparted a particular character to state and society throughout the Qing and into the twentieth century. This paradigm asserts the autonomous character of social change in China and has allowed historians to create a “China-centered history." Recently, however, many scholars have begun emphasizing the singular qualities of the Qing. Among the eight contributors to this volume on the formation of the Qing, those who emphasize the Manchu ethos of the Qing tend to see it as part of an early modernity and stress parallel and sometimes mutually reinforcing patterns of political consolidation and cultural integration across Eurasia. Other contributors who examine the Qing formation from the perspective of those who lived through the dynastic transition see the advent of Qing rule as prompting attempts by the Chinese subjects of the new empire to make sense of what they perceived as a historical disjuncture and to rework these understandings into an accommodation to foreign rule. In contrast to the late imperial paradigm, the new ways of configuring the Qing in historical time in both groups of essays assert the singular qualities of the Qing formation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1tfj908
CHAPTER I The Qing Empire in Eurasian Time and Space: from:
The Qing Formation in World-Historical Time
Author(s) Perdue Peter C.
Abstract: How can we place the first century of the Qing dynasty in worldhistorical time? Earlier generations of historians could not even conceive of this question. For Hegel and Marx, China until the nineteenth century was the land of eternal stagnation, embalmed in an airless coffin, never an active participant in the formation of the only progressive civilization, that of the West. Later historians, supporting nationalist and modernization movements, altered the vision slightly to include “change within tradition,” but they still cut off nearly all of imperial China’s history from the modern world. Today, no one can ignore the spectacular rise
CHAPTER 2 The Qing Formation, the Mongol Legacy, and the ‘End of History’ in Early Modern Central Eurasia from:
The Qing Formation in World-Historical Time
Author(s) Millward James A.
Abstract: This volume, and the conference that produced it, have come at an apt historiographical moment. New data and new interpretations have led in recent years to something of a paradigm shift in how the Qing is viewed by historians of China (Rawski 1996). At the same time, the developing field of world history has been seeking new approaches to the last few centuries of accelerated global communication and integration, approaches that avoid “the West and the rest” dichotomies. Working China into such approaches has not been simple: while comparativists labor to relate China to frameworks based on European historical experience,¹
CHAPTER 4 Contingent Connections: from:
The Qing Formation in World-Historical Time
Author(s) Wills John E.
Abstract: In the study of world and comparative history for early-modern times, we have come to a new appreciation of the importance of different shapes of state-building. The European pattern of territoriality, citizenship, and multiple centers of competitive, mobilizing state-building activity, sometimes called “mercantilist,” is seen as building on continuities in political culture reaching back to the ancient Mediterranean. In the “gunpowder empires” of the Islamic world, which figure along with the Ming and Qing as the great early-modern “agrarian empires,” growth of trade and population can be seen openir.. g the way to inchoate regional state-building efforts that challenged the
Book Title: The Qing Formation in World-Historical Time- Publisher: Harvard University Asia Center
Author(s): Struve Lynn A.
Abstract: For many years, the Ming and Qing dynasties have been grouped as “late imperial China," a temporal framework that allows scholars to identify and evaluate indigenous patterns of social, economic, and cultural change initiated in the last century of Ming rule that imparted a particular character to state and society throughout the Qing and into the twentieth century. This paradigm asserts the autonomous character of social change in China and has allowed historians to create a “China-centered history." Recently, however, many scholars have begun emphasizing the singular qualities of the Qing. Among the eight contributors to this volume on the formation of the Qing, those who emphasize the Manchu ethos of the Qing tend to see it as part of an early modernity and stress parallel and sometimes mutually reinforcing patterns of political consolidation and cultural integration across Eurasia. Other contributors who examine the Qing formation from the perspective of those who lived through the dynastic transition see the advent of Qing rule as prompting attempts by the Chinese subjects of the new empire to make sense of what they perceived as a historical disjuncture and to rework these understandings into an accommodation to foreign rule. In contrast to the late imperial paradigm, the new ways of configuring the Qing in historical time in both groups of essays assert the singular qualities of the Qing formation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1tfj908
CHAPTER I The Qing Empire in Eurasian Time and Space: from:
The Qing Formation in World-Historical Time
Author(s) Perdue Peter C.
Abstract: How can we place the first century of the Qing dynasty in worldhistorical time? Earlier generations of historians could not even conceive of this question. For Hegel and Marx, China until the nineteenth century was the land of eternal stagnation, embalmed in an airless coffin, never an active participant in the formation of the only progressive civilization, that of the West. Later historians, supporting nationalist and modernization movements, altered the vision slightly to include “change within tradition,” but they still cut off nearly all of imperial China’s history from the modern world. Today, no one can ignore the spectacular rise
CHAPTER 2 The Qing Formation, the Mongol Legacy, and the ‘End of History’ in Early Modern Central Eurasia from:
The Qing Formation in World-Historical Time
Author(s) Millward James A.
Abstract: This volume, and the conference that produced it, have come at an apt historiographical moment. New data and new interpretations have led in recent years to something of a paradigm shift in how the Qing is viewed by historians of China (Rawski 1996). At the same time, the developing field of world history has been seeking new approaches to the last few centuries of accelerated global communication and integration, approaches that avoid “the West and the rest” dichotomies. Working China into such approaches has not been simple: while comparativists labor to relate China to frameworks based on European historical experience,¹
CHAPTER 4 Contingent Connections: from:
The Qing Formation in World-Historical Time
Author(s) Wills John E.
Abstract: In the study of world and comparative history for early-modern times, we have come to a new appreciation of the importance of different shapes of state-building. The European pattern of territoriality, citizenship, and multiple centers of competitive, mobilizing state-building activity, sometimes called “mercantilist,” is seen as building on continuities in political culture reaching back to the ancient Mediterranean. In the “gunpowder empires” of the Islamic world, which figure along with the Ming and Qing as the great early-modern “agrarian empires,” growth of trade and population can be seen openir.. g the way to inchoate regional state-building efforts that challenged the
Book Title: Dynastic Crisis and Cultural Innovation-From the Late Ming to the Late Qing and Beyond
Publisher: Harvard University Asia Center
Author(s): Wei Shang
Abstract: This volume addresses cultural and literary transformation in the late Ming (1550–1644) and late Qing (1851–1911) eras. Although conventionally associated with a devastating sociopolitical crisis, each of these periods was also a time when Chinese culture was rejuvenated. Focusing on the twin themes of crisis and innovation, the seventeen chapters in this book aim to illuminate the late Ming and late Qing as eras of literary-cultural innovation during periods of imperial disintegration; to analyze linkages between the two periods and the radical heritage they bequeathed to the modern imagination; and to rethink the “premodernity" of the late Ming and late Qing in the context of the end of the age of modernism. The chapters touch on a remarkably wide spectrum of works, some never before discussed in English, such as poetry, drama, full-length novels, short stories, tanci narratives, newspaper articles, miscellanies, sketches, familiar essays, and public and private historical accounts. More important, they intersect on issues ranging from testimony about dynastic decline to the negotiation of authorial subjectivity, from the introduction of cultural technology to the renewal of literary convention.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1tg5hxm
The Return of the Palace Lady: from:
Dynastic Crisis and Cultural Innovation
Author(s) Zeitlin Judith T.
Abstract: This chapter deals with a specific type of ghost story, “the historical ghost tale.” By historical ghost tale, I mean a ghost story about a traumatic historical event rather than a problem of individual mortality. The event is usually of a political nature, especially dynastic fall and conquest. I am inspired here by Paul Ricoeur’s concept of “historical time,” which mediates between the lived time of the individual and the cosmic time of the universe.¹ Although the ghost story about history is most effective when it centers on one or more individualized ghost characters as “sufferers” or victims of history,²
The Fall of the God of Money: from:
Dynastic Crisis and Cultural Innovation
Author(s) McMahon Keith
Abstract: Around 1878 an otherwise obscure writer named Zhang Changjia 張昌甲 published “Opium Talk” (“ Yanhua” 煙話), a collection of comments and short narratives about his experience of opium addiction. Like many writers of his time, he firmly embedded the phenomenon of addiction in the cross-cultural aura of the nineteenth century. The intrusion of Westerners into China, he wrote, coincided with the arrival of opium, both Westerners and opium signaling irreversible transformation. “The rise of the opium demon has led to the fall of the god of money”
(yangui xing er qianshen jiuci wuquan yi煙鬼興而錢神就此無權矣; that is, no one can
A New Mode of Literary Production in the Late Qing: from:
Dynastic Crisis and Cultural Innovation
Author(s) Des Forges Alexander
Abstract: In the mid-1870s, the narrative
Xinxi xiantan昕夕閑談 (Idle chats morning and evening; translated from Edward Bulwer-Lytton’sNight and Morning) and other miscellaneous works appeared in installments in various literary periodicals published by the Shenbao Press 申報館 in Shanghai. In 1882, the lengthy novelYesou puyan(A humble rustic’s simple words) was published in installments in the Shanghai newspaperHubao滬報. Later in the 1880s, travel narratives and other accounts in literary Chinese were serialized in the illustrated magazineDianshizhai huabao點石齋畫報¹ These early serial presentations represent an important moment in late Qing publication history; at the time, however
The Narrator’s Voice Before the “Fiction Revolution” from:
Dynastic Crisis and Cultural Innovation
Author(s) Hanan Patrick
Abstract: The crises at the end of the Ming and Qing dynasties, crises caused by dynastic weakness and the threat of foreign domination, had obvious effects on the writing of vernacular fiction, drawing in new authors and giving rise to new themes and new techniques.¹ Of the two crises, the late Qing was the more complex, with economic and cultural challenges superimposed on the military and political threats. Moreover, two additional factors were at work in this period: the new media of newspapers and journals, and foreign fiction, available in translation for the first time.
Conclusions: from:
Dynastic Crisis and Cultural Innovation
Author(s) Hegel Robert E.
Abstract: Although the focus of this chapter is the literary representations of and reactions to the fall of the Ming in the seventeenth century, I will refer to two later ends of time(s) by way of contrast: when read against the fall of real dynasties, unconventional conclusions in Ming and Qing works of historical fiction reveal levels of political engagement and significance often overlooked by other readings. I begin by examining the beginnings of two novels.
FOUR Order in the Human World from:
A Patterned Past
Abstract: In the perspective of the
ZuozhuanandGuoyu, the known world is a space cleared in the wilderness by culture. Culture, which is both a system of prescriptions and the legitimizing account of their origins, establishes the distinctions that define the human world. This world is bounded on one frontier by the spirit world and on the other by the non-Chinese world. It is organized internally according to nested structures of kinship and obligation, which are made to account for geography and fealty. And it finds itself in the times recounted by historiography, in a consciously late Zhou moment. Although
FIVE The Anecdotal History from:
A Patterned Past
Abstract: Historical knowledge can take many forms, but historical understanding always requires narration.¹ A text such as the
Chunqiu, with its dates and facts, does not so much convey understanding as assume it. TheZuozhuanand theGuoyu, in contrast, explain known or alleged facts of the Spring and Autumn period by recording them in the context of narratives. Although premodern critics of theZuozhuanas a commentary on theChunqiusometimes ranked it behind theGongyangandGuliangcommentaries, with their more direct articulations of the sage’s judgments, there have always been readers who recognized that without the narratives of
SIX Narrative and Recompense from:
A Patterned Past
Abstract: The anecdote cannot easily accommodate multiple plot lines. It is well adapted for the narration of events involving a limited cast of characters and a single set of consequences, but when a narrative involves many characters or groups, with varying motivations, acting in different times and places, the anecdote falls short. For more complex chains of events, the historiographers of the
ZuozhuanandGuoyucombined anecdotes into series, building largescale narratives that are nonetheless fundamentally anecdotal in character. The anecdote series merits study for its role as a shaper of historical memory: it is the narrative genre in which the
4. Divine Simplicity from the Reformation to Karl Barth from:
Divine Simplicity
Abstract: Following the patristic and medieval conceptions of divine simplicity, the Reformation and post-Reformation mark a time of significant change. Yet does this mean that the doctrine of divine simplicity itself changed? Surely, it was not at the center of the Reformation debates, but that does not mean that it received little or no attention from the Reformation to the early modern periods. In this chapter, I will begin with a brief overview of the Reformation and early modern approaches to God and divine simplicity. Next, I will continue the approach of previous chapters—choosing representative theologians who espouse the doctrine
4. Kierkegaard’s Reading of Genesis 22: from:
Faith in a Hidden God
Abstract: This chapter examines
Fear and Tremblingas a work of exegesis in order to reveal consistencies, ambiguities, and tensions in the way Kierkegaard’s pseudonymous author exegetes Genesis 22 in relation to claims about Christian faith as it relates to ethics, reason, and speech. After an examination of the historical, social, and intellectual forces that influenced Kierkegaard during the time of the pseudonymous authorship, the chapter engages in a close reading ofFear and Trembling, examining the ways in which Johannes de Silentio uses variations, silences, and obscurities to enhance the difficulties and complexities inherent in the story. Insisting that it
5. The Great Tradition Ruptured? from:
"Without Ceasing to be a Christian"
Author(s) ROBINSON BOB
Abstract: Before further engagement with Panikkar’s thought, it is important to note one problem presented by the reality that Panikkar’s large body of writing spans a period in excess of fifty years: any attempted summary or survey is difficult, given the evolving nature of his thought. The difficulty is compounded by one of the logically prior challenges of making sense of Panikkar: the idiosyncratic relationship between the publishing dates of Panikkar’s books and other writings and the actual genesis of their content. At times, this makes it difficult to understand the development of Panikkar’s thought, even about a single issue. Nonetheless,
Book Title: Principalities in Particular-A Practical Theology of the Powers That Be
Publisher: Fortress Press
Author(s): Berger Rose Marie
Abstract: Activist pastor Bill Wylie-Kellermann gives an urgent specificity to the theology of the powers, relating biblical concepts to contemporary struggles for civil rights, clean air, fair housing, safe affordable water, public education, and more, highlighting throughout the vital importance of a community of struggle connected through time and across space. The book‘s uniqueness lies in its practicality, as biblical and theological analyses arise from, and are addressed to, particular historical moments and given ecclesial and movement struggles.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1tm7htm
12 The Powers in Healing and Hospital Ministry (1996) from:
Principalities in Particular
Abstract: How many times have pastors read this passage at a hospital bedside where the extremities of pain and fear and death hover? Here is compressed a seminal confession of faith that often serves in those moments as the preeminent word of pastoral care. Yet one may be struck how it actually names the principalities and powers (not to mention their main methods of operation) in a personal and presumably private word of comfort. What gives? Is this a mere quaint circumlocution or do the scriptures offer the serum of truth,
28 Trump Powers: from:
Principalities in Particular
Abstract: A prophet’s warning. To write about the principalities in this present moment, just weeks since the inauguration of the Trump regime in January 2017, is to risk speaking too soon. By the time these reflections see the light of print, impeachment proceedings may be launched, or a nonviolent groundswell of resistance may have brought the president to the brink of resignation, or yet perhaps an iron fist is holding collapse at bay with the “brink” and the “launch” being war, God forbid—even nuclear, or maybe Mother Earth has reached her limit and thrown the planet in deeper turmoil, nor
1. The Myth of the Domination System from:
Engaging the Powers
Abstract: Violence is the ethos of our times. It is the spirituality of the modern world. It has been accorded the status of a religion, demanding from its devotees an absolute obedience to death. Its followers are not aware, however, that the devotion they pay to violence is a form of religious piety. Violence is so successful as a myth precisely because it does not seem to be mythic in the least. Violence simply appears to be the nature of things. It is what works. It is inevitable, the last and, often, the first resort in conflicts. It is embraced with
[Part III. Introduction] from:
Engaging the Powers
Abstract: The Powers are not incorrigible. What fell in time can be redeemed in time. Even in their fallenness, institutions are able to some degree to preserve freedoms and secure justice. The flight of the communist bloc from totalitarianism shows how deep is the longing of the human spirit for the liberty to speak, travel, work, and pursue creative initiatives.
14. The Acid Test: from:
Engaging the Powers
Abstract: In the spiritual renaissance that I believe is coming to birth, it will not be the message of Paul that this time galvanizes hearts, as in the Reformation and the Wesleyan revival, but the human figure of Jesus. And in the teaching of Jesus, the sayings on nonviolence and love of enemies will hold a central place. Not because they are more true than any others, but because they are the only means known for overcoming domination without creating new dominations.
15. Monitoring Our Inner Violence from:
Engaging the Powers
Abstract: I am not a very nonviolent person. I have a sharp temper that I have learned to control fairly well, and find myself indulging at times in violent fantasies. I am trying to discover how a person as deeply schooled in violence as I was can begin to practice nonviolence. As I indicated earlier, one could characterize the approach I have been developing in this book as nonviolence for the violent.
Book Title: Civitas augescens. Includere e comparare nell'Europa di oggi- Publisher: Casa Editrice Leo S. Olschki s.r.l.
Author(s): Marramao Giacomo
Abstract: Il volume qui proposto al lettore è il frutto del confronto fra intellettuali europei attenti ai problemi più cogenti dell’attualità: globalizzazione, crisi economico-finanziaria, immigrazione, cittadinanza e accoglienza. Il dibattito prende così le mosse dai concetti di inclusione ed esclusione per individuare nell’ospite la condizione dell’uomo in quanto tale e non di un singolo gruppo, inoltrandosi dunque in una riflessione sul mercato, sulle sue degenerazioni finanziarie e sui suoi conflitti con la democrazia. This volume collects the results of the joined efforts of European intellectuals in front of the most urgent problems of our times: globalization, economic and financial crisis, immigration, citizenship. The debate moves from the concepts of inclusion and exclusion to assert that the condition of ‘guest’ is common to all human race, and not that of a single group. It then reflects on the financial degeneration of the market and on its conflicts with democracy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1tqx7xh
JUSTICE AS FRATERNITY from:
Civitas augescens. Includere e comparare nell'Europa di oggi
Author(s) Puyol Angel
Abstract: The French Revolution proclaimed an ethical and political ideal with its three principles that have not been improved on since: liberty, equality and fraternity. Since then, western political philosophy has put its greatest efforts into analysing the former two (liberty and equality), but has ignored, and even disdained, the third part of the revolutionary triad: fraternity. In my opinion, forgetting or underestimating fraternity as a political category is unjustifiable, given that so many injustices in our world are not only related to a lack of liberty and equality, but also to the scarcity, and sometimes inexistence, of fraternity.
2 “We Are Also One in Our Concept of Freedom” from:
Historicizing Theories, Identities, and Nations
Author(s) HARKIN MICHAEL E.
Abstract: Franz Boas is known for his political activism, which both shaped his anthropology and was informed by it. In “Anthropology as Kulturkampf,” George Stocking (1992: 92–113) argues for understanding Boasian anthropology within the framework of progressive and reformist politics, which shifted during various phases of Boas’s life. As I have argued elsewhere, I believe that this trajectory continued beyond Boas’s lifetime and that American anthropology of the late twentieth and twenty-first centuries has become identified with a particular political worldview: what Richard Rorty (1983) called “postmodernist bourgeois liberalism.” It is important to note that while Rorty claims Dewey as
3 What Would Franz Boas Have Thought about 9/11? from:
Historicizing Theories, Identities, and Nations
Author(s) HARKIN MICHAEL E.
Abstract: To ask what Franz Boas would have thought of 9/11 is obviously to engage in an act of historical and biographical imagination, but also one of self-examination. I would argue that we anthropologists, especially those of us trained in the great Americanist tradition of cultural anthropology and historical ethnography, feel that we know Boas. Indeed, we have internalized him in some way, like a beloved dead relative, and so, in some sense, his reaction is our reaction. As in any time of crisis, the crisis of the past decade that was ushered in on that bright September morning and that
5 Ruth Benedict: from:
Historicizing Theories, Identities, and Nations
Author(s) SALAMONE FRANK A.
Abstract: The onset of World War II left Boasians in a quandary. There was a belief that anthropology had significant lessons to teach about being human and the plasticity of so-called human nature. There was also a strong stricture against generalizations, or at least generalizations at that time. However, although opposed to overgeneralization, Boasians did feel that there was a need to go beyond mere statements of specifics that bordered on exoticism. Alfred Kroeber, for example, wrote a textbook,
Anthropology, outlining the general ideas of the field. In private, moreover, Kroeber poked fun at Boas’s opposition to general laws.
11 Life in Hanoi in the State Subsidy Period: from:
Historicizing Theories, Identities, and Nations
Author(s) VAN HUY NGUYEN
Abstract: The important exhibition
Life in Hanoi in the State Subsidy Period, 1975–1986closed at the Vietnam Museum of Ethnology (VME) in the middle of 2007. The exhibition had been extended six months past the original plan to stay open one year, from June 2006 to June 2007. The public regretted the closing of the exhibition. Their regret not only surfaced at that time but continues even now whenever that period of time or the Vietnam Museum of Ethnology is mentioned, as the exhibition had increased the reputation of the VME. As the former director of the Vietnam Museum of
CHAPTER 1 Private Collectors from:
The Film Museum Practice and Film Historiography
Abstract: The acquisition of silent films has been beset by a particular problem: by the time the first film archives were established in the 1930s, a large part of the entire corpus of silent films had already perished or been destroyed (Meyer and Read, 2000: 2). This was also the period when the ‘talkies’ replaced silent cinema, which meant it was no longer possible to acquire silent films from distributors after they were withdrawn from circulation. As a consequence, the NHFA – as EYE was called at the time – was dependent on the resources of private individuals who had built up collections
[Part II Introduction] from:
The Film Museum Practice and Film Historiography
Abstract: Museums and archives share an inherent objective: to keep memories alive for the future by preserving objects from the past (Pearce, 1995: 249). To realise this goal, they endeavour to prevent the decay – or further decay – of their artefacts by, first, treating these objects with extreme caution and trying, as much as possible, to limit the destructive impact of environmental factors (Pomian, 1988: 14); and, second, cleaning and restoring them, repairing the damage that inevitably accrues over time. Both of these activities can be categorised as part of the ‘preservation process’.
CHAPTER 5 Impressions: from:
The Film Museum Practice and Film Historiography
Abstract: In 1995, during the Filmmuseum workshop, ‘Disorderly Order’, mentioned above, Meyer (cited in Hertogs and Klerk de, 1996: 18) asked the participating film historians the following question: ‘[S]hould we preserve these films just as we find them, or should we try to get as close to the original as possible?’ Film museums and restorers are confronted with this choice with each restoration: either to restore the imaginary ‘original version’ of the film or to make the best possible duplicate based on what the starting material looks like at the time of restoration. What is fascinating is the way these two
CHAPTER 7 Film Museum Exhibition Spaces from:
The Film Museum Practice and Film Historiography
Abstract: As with film theatres and cinemas, film museums are ‘other spaces’, with very different rules, customs and time dimensions to those we are accustomed to in daily life (Foucault, 1984: 48). These other spaces, which Foucault also calls ‘heterotopias’, are separated from the world we normally live in and can only be entered after performing a number of rituals. To step over the threshold of one of these institutions is literally to make the transition from our everyday world into that other space (Poppe, 1989: 21). From the moment that the visitors enter a theatre, for example, their expectations are
CHAPTER 9 Performances from:
The Film Museum Practice and Film Historiography
Abstract: Each film museum is embedded in a history of performances. Sometimes they attempt to deny this history, showing their films in screening rooms stripped of any historical reference. In other cases, however, they choose to show films in a ‘historically accurate’ way, which often results in hybrid forms of display, a mixture of historical reconstruction and modern experimentation. What seems central to the choice of display at the Filmmuseum is the way it defined its films – as individual works of art, to be displayed and viewed in isolation, or as examples of the way films were presented in the past
Book Title: Genre Theory and Historical Change-Theoretical Essays of Ralph Cohen
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): Rowlett John L.
Abstract: Ralph Cohen was highly regarded as the visionary founding editor of
New Literary History, but his own theoretical essays appeared in such a scattering of publications that their conceptual originality, underlying coherence, and range of application have not been readily apparent. This new selection of twenty essays, many published here for the first time, offers a synthesis of Cohen's vital work.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1v2xtv6
Introduction from:
Genre Theory and Historical Change
Abstract: Providing contemporary literary studies with the most adequate and compelling theory of genre available, Ralph Cohen has made accessible to scholars everywhere a systematic historical procedure for generating reliable explanatory narratives of literary, artistic, and cultural change. Such an extraordinary claim may seem extravagant and he would never have made it himself. Yet he would urge readers to weigh its legitimacy, a challenge now made possible with the collection of these transformative essays, eight of which are published here for the first time.
Reviewing Criticism: from:
Genre Theory and Historical Change
Abstract: Literary theory has joined a host of other subjects that in our time have been pronounced dead: the author, the novel, God, concrete poetry, archetypal and genre criticism. As Terry Eagleton inters literary theory, he finds that from its grave arise the blossoms of a theory of culture. Literary theory, which once seemed the counterpart of scientific theory, has ceased to search for the “method” by which literature could be studied.¹
Some Thoughts on the Problems of Literary Change 1750–1800 from:
Genre Theory and Historical Change
Abstract: To confine one’s inquiry to a very limited segment of time and to confine it to a body of
Literary History and Literary Theory from:
Genre Theory and Historical Change
Abstract: Although I shall address myself to literary history and literary theory, because this relation is central to our time, this is not the traditional relation that, for centuries, interested scholars. The traditional contrast established by Aristotle was between
historyandpoetry.He distinguished between them by declaring that “poetry is something more philosophic and of graver import than history, since its statements are of the nature rather of universals, whereas those of history are singulars. By a universal statement I mean one as to what such or such a kind of man will probably or necessarily say or do—which
A Propaedeutic for Literary Change from:
Genre Theory and Historical Change
Abstract: I wish in this short paper to touch on three aspects of literary change: (1) the nature of change; (2) the kinds of change; (3) explanations of change. I do not wish to debate the meanings of the term “literary,” and I shall, therefore, assume that what is “literary” is what authors, critics, theorists have identified at the same time or at different times as “literary.” The fact that such authorities may disagree about the significance of “literary” will in no way affect the inquiry I propose. My aim is to offer a propaedeutic for a study of literary change.
Renewing the Eighteenth Century from:
Genre Theory and Historical Change
Abstract: The past decade has seen the publication of
The New Eighteenth Century(1987), “A New History of the Enlightenment?” (1992), and a considerable number of reinterpretations of the century. Writing the interpretation of an earlier historical time, contemporary critics and theorists correctly insist that they see the past through the eyes of the present. But what in our divided and fragmented world governs our visions or perceptions of the past? We insist on the need for self-reflection, on the analysis of our principles, but these are inevitably governed and constricted by the perceptions we have received and constructed.
1 Politics and pleasure: from:
Imagining the popular in contemporary French culture
Author(s) Looseley David
Abstract: This first chapter focuses on political conceptualisations of popular culture in France, by which I mean conceptualisations developed by governments, parties, national institutions and the kind of public intellectuals who, as Ahearne (2010: 2) puts it, ‘have moved in and out of positions within public policy processes’. Other chapters in this volume will be concerned with popular-cultural artefacts themselves. My focus here is on how such artefacts have been institutionally represented over time. For if, as Kuisel claims, France itself is an invention, a conceptualisation, this is in part due to the way its popular culture has represented it and
Erasurism from:
Undoing Art
Abstract: M.D.: Paul Ricoeur memorably identified Marx, Nietzsche and Freud as the father-founders of a «school of suspicion»
10which urges readers, critics and artists to unveil the strategies by which art conceals its own constructedness and disguises its ideological complicity with dominant structures of power. Should erasure art be considered as a casualty of the «terminal case of irony» in which the humanities find themselves at the present time, driven as they are by an «uncontrollable urge to put everything in scare quotes»11? Even though erasurism does not necessarily set out to destroy the artwork per se (and thus can be
Performative Undoings from:
Undoing Art
Abstract: M.A.C.: So when the undoing is built into the work of art, is it not still art? Think of the slashes of Fontana into his canvasses, think of Serrano’s «Piss Christ» with the scandal of the title and the figuration, even simply imagined, built right in. Yes, I would say, it is art. Some of the most spectacular spectacles of undoing in recent times are the work of Jay Critchley, both in his home performances, at 7 Carnes Lane, off Pleasant Street, in Provincetown, Massachusetts, and also all over the town. For example, the demolition of a bathhouse which caused
Erasurism from:
Undoing Art
Abstract: M.D.: Paul Ricoeur memorably identified Marx, Nietzsche and Freud as the father-founders of a «school of suspicion»
10which urges readers, critics and artists to unveil the strategies by which art conceals its own constructedness and disguises its ideological complicity with dominant structures of power. Should erasure art be considered as a casualty of the «terminal case of irony» in which the humanities find themselves at the present time, driven as they are by an «uncontrollable urge to put everything in scare quotes»11? Even though erasurism does not necessarily set out to destroy the artwork per se (and thus can be
Performative Undoings from:
Undoing Art
Abstract: M.A.C.: So when the undoing is built into the work of art, is it not still art? Think of the slashes of Fontana into his canvasses, think of Serrano’s «Piss Christ» with the scandal of the title and the figuration, even simply imagined, built right in. Yes, I would say, it is art. Some of the most spectacular spectacles of undoing in recent times are the work of Jay Critchley, both in his home performances, at 7 Carnes Lane, off Pleasant Street, in Provincetown, Massachusetts, and also all over the town. For example, the demolition of a bathhouse which caused
Book Title: Fiction, propagande, témoignage, réalité-Cinq microessais sur la représentation de la guerre civile espagnole en Italie
Publisher: Quodlibet
Author(s): Curreri Luciano
Abstract: Ces cinq micro-essais sont consacrés à l’un des épisodes historiques les plus denses et complexes du XXe siècle : la guerre civile espagnole (1936-39), dont on célèbre cette année le 80e anniversaire. En Italie peut-être plus qu’ailleurs, fiction et réalité s’entremêlent dans la représentation de la guerre d’Espagne. En effet, l’histoire du « Bel Paese » a très vite fait osciller entre Droite et Gauche toute une série d’éléments qu’on aurait pourtant cru n’appartenir qu’à une seule vision du monde : le thème de la croisade, par exemple, ou l’ordre ‘militaro-narratif’, figures idéologiquement affiliables à un credo conservateur, comme on le sait, mais qu’on retrouve, néanmoins, à gauche. En ce sens, et dès le premier de ces micro-essais, il faudra affronter de façon quelque peu malicieuse et provocatrice un obstacle épistémologique coriace, pour faire le point sur une certaine réalité et l’usage plus ou moins légitime qu’en fait la fiction, avançant ou reculant entre propagande et témoignages et circulant entre narration, reportage, études, pamphlets, théâtre, cinéma, bande dessinée : et ceci d’un côté à l’autre de la barricade. On s’apercevra alors de la nécessité de ne pas se concentrer seulement sur les chefs-d’oeuvre, ni de se référer à une inutile philologie des représentations de la guerre d’Espagne — même si l’on ne négligera pas certains instruments connus de tous les philologues.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1vxm86z
Series Foreword from:
A Political Companion to James Baldwin
Author(s) Deneen Patrick J.
Abstract: America’s literature is distinctive because it is, above all, intended for a democratic citizenry. In contrast to eras when an author would aim to inform or influence a select aristocratic audience, in democratic times, public influence and education must resonate with a more expansive, less leisured, and diverse audience to be effective. The great works of America’s literary tradition
12 James Baldwin on Violence and Disavowal from:
A Political Companion to James Baldwin
Author(s) Beard Lisa
Abstract: It is fitting that in national discourse surrounding police killings and related Black Lives Matter protests, so many reporters and activists have turned to James Baldwin to interpret contemporary racial politics and summon people toward political action. Baldwin, so relentless at confronting “white innocence” in his time, offers a vocabulary about violence and disavowal that aligns with and enunciates Black Lives Matter interventions in important ways.
13 James Baldwin and Black Lives Matter from:
A Political Companion to James Baldwin
Author(s) Glaude Eddie S.
Abstract: I found myself the other day—and upon reflection this was an astonishing thing to say, no less think—wishing my son were seven years old again. He was adorable at seven. The vexations of the teenage years were far off, and he still liked me. But I said this not because I find having an empty nest unbearable, although at times I do, or that I long to raise a teenager again—and eventually he would be a maddening teenager again. I just thought—felt, even—that he would be safer at home, with us.
14 “Tell Him I’m Gone”: from:
A Political Companion to James Baldwin
Author(s) Brahinsky Rachel
Abstract: Wandering through San Francisco with a public television crew in 1963, writer James Baldwin commented on the crumbling geographies of liberally inclined cities like this one. At the time, the politics of racism smoldered across the nation. Shuttled by the TV crew from one end of the city to the next, Baldwin listened as young Black teens expressed their frustrations and anger at a city that enjoyed a progressive reputation, even as these youth and their neighbors struggled to survive the premature deaths of unemployment and urban renewal, which were rippling through the city at the time.
Book Title: Negative Cosmopolitanism-Cultures and Politics of World Citizenship after Globalization
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): TOMSKY TERRI
Abstract: From climate change, debt, and refugee crises to energy security, environmental disasters, and terrorism, the events that lead nightly newscasts and drive public policy demand a global perspective. In the twentieth century the world sought solutions through formal institutions of international governance such as the United Nations, the International Criminal Court, and the World Bank, but present-day responses to global realities are often more provisional, improvisational, and contingent. Tracing this uneven history in order to identify principal actors, contesting ideologies, and competing rhetoric, Negative Cosmopolitanism challenges the Kantian ideal of cosmopolitanism as the precondition for a perpetual global peace. Uniting literary scholars with researchers working on contemporary problems and those studying related issues of the past – including slavery, industrial capitalism, and corporate imperialism – essays in this volume scrutinize the entanglement of cosmopolitanism within expanding networks of trade and global capital from the eighteenth century to the present. By doing so, the contributors pinpoint the ways in which whole populations have been unwillingly caught up in a capitalist reality that has little in common with the earlier ideals of cosmopolitanism. A model for provoking new and necessary questions about neoliberalism, biopolitics, colonialism, citizenship, and xenophobia, Negative Cosmopolitanism establishes a fresh take on the representation of globalization and modern life in history and literature. Contributors Include Timothy Brennan (University of Minnesota), Juliane Collard (University of British Columbia), Mike Dillon (California State University, Fullerton), Sneja Gunew (University of British Columbia), Dina Gusejnova (University of Sheffield), Heather Latimer (University of British Columbia), Pamela McCallum (University of Calgary), Geordie Miller (Dalhousie University), Dennis Mischke (Universität Stuttgart), Peter Nyers (McMaster University), Liam O’Loughlin (Pacific Lutheran University), Crystal Parikh (New York University), Mark Simpson (University of Alberta), Melissa Stephens (Vancouver Island University), and Paul Ugor (Illinois State University).From climate change, debt, and refugee crises to energy security, environmental disasters, and terrorism, the events that lead nightly newscasts and drive public policy demand a global perspective. In the twentieth century the world sought solutions through formal institutions of international governance such as the United Nations, the International Criminal Court, and the World Bank, but present-day responses to global realities are often more provisional, improvisational, and contingent. Tracing this uneven history in order to identify principal actors, contesting ideologies, and competing rhetoric, Negative Cosmopolitanism challenges the Kantian ideal of cosmopolitanism as the precondition for a perpetual global peace. Uniting literary scholars with researchers working on contemporary problems and those studying related issues of the past – including slavery, industrial capitalism, and corporate imperialism – essays in this volume scrutinize the entanglement of cosmopolitanism within expanding networks of trade and global capital from the eighteenth century to the present. By doing so, the contributors pinpoint the ways in which whole populations have been unwillingly caught up in a capitalist reality that has little in common with the earlier ideals of cosmopolitanism. A model for provoking new and necessary questions about neoliberalism, biopolitics, colonialism, citizenship, and xenophobia, Negative Cosmopolitanism establishes a fresh take on the representation of globalization and modern life in history and literature. Contributors Include Timothy Brennan (University of Minnesota), Juliane Collard (University of British Columbia), Mike Dillon (California State University, Fullerton), Sneja Gunew (University of British Columbia), Dina Gusejnova (University of Sheffield), Heather Latimer (University of British Columbia), Pamela McCallum (University of Calgary), Geordie Miller (Dalhousie University), Dennis Mischke (Universität Stuttgart), Peter Nyers (McMaster University), Liam O’Loughlin (Pacific Lutheran University), Crystal Parikh (New York University), Mark Simpson (University of Alberta), Melissa Stephens (Vancouver Island University), and Paul Ugor (Illinois State University).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1w0ddq5
Sereni lettore di romanzi from:
Il ritmo del pensiero
Abstract: La prima testimonianza del Sereni lettore di romanzi è nella lettera del 3 giugno 1938 a Attilio Bertolucci¹: dove Sereni è un lettore di romanzi che non ha ancora letto il romanzo di cui parla,
Adieux aux armes(vietato in Italia dalla censura fascista), e ne è tuttavia già sedotto in anticipo, grazie alle parole con cui ne ha parlato Bertolucci. Parole che hanno messo in moto la sua immaginazione nelpresentimentodi ritrovare nel libro una Milano finalmente intravista, anzi addirittura scoperta grazie alle parole dell’amico: e finalmente apprezzata per « quell’aria che le tue parole mi hanno suscitata
Does persuasion really come at “the end of reasons”? from:
Verità Immagine Normatività / Truth, Image, and Normativity
Author(s) Salis Pietro
Abstract: Persuasion is a special aspect of our social and linguistic practices – one where an interlocutor, or an audience, is induced, to perform a certain action or to endorse a certain belief, and these episodes are not due to the force of the better reason. When we come near persuasion, it seems that, in general, we are somehow giving up factual discourse (and perhaps the principles of logic), since persuading must be understood as almost different from convincing rationally¹. Sometimes, for example, we can find persuasion a political speech that relies on our feelings, emotions and values, but we can also
Anschaulichkeit and empirical verification in scientific theories from:
Verità Immagine Normatività / Truth, Image, and Normativity
Author(s) Pinna Simonluca
Abstract: The heart of the matter in this paper is what human knowledge owes to images. More precisely, what does knowledge – even scientific knowledge – obtain from the visual representation of its objects? It is undisputed that visual representations are spatial. But they are not necessarily static. Sometime they have duration. Then visual representations may be both spatial and temporal. However, it remains certainly true that they have a geometrical structure – in 3 or 4 dimensions. Thus, what does scientific knowledge obtain from the geometrical structure of its representations? According to the Latvian philosopher Nicolai Hartmann, sciences obtain the linkage between the
Norms, representationality, accessibility from:
Verità Immagine Normatività / Truth, Image, and Normativity
Author(s) Feis Guglielmo
Abstract: A possible and, we believe, fruitful way to answer the question on whether representationality is necessary for normativity is to consider it using formal methods. Discussing what representationality is exceeds the scope of this paper; we would like to stay non-committal about its metaphysical nature or precise philosophical definition¹. The only assumption we need is the following: that representationality can itself be represented as a modality, and it is thus amenable to the methods of modal logic. This is in line with the standard formal treatments of other concepts such as metaphysical necessity, time, knowledge etc. and the analysis of
Does persuasion really come at “the end of reasons”? from:
Verità Immagine Normatività / Truth, Image, and Normativity
Author(s) Salis Pietro
Abstract: Persuasion is a special aspect of our social and linguistic practices – one where an interlocutor, or an audience, is induced, to perform a certain action or to endorse a certain belief, and these episodes are not due to the force of the better reason. When we come near persuasion, it seems that, in general, we are somehow giving up factual discourse (and perhaps the principles of logic), since persuading must be understood as almost different from convincing rationally¹. Sometimes, for example, we can find persuasion a political speech that relies on our feelings, emotions and values, but we can also
Anschaulichkeit and empirical verification in scientific theories from:
Verità Immagine Normatività / Truth, Image, and Normativity
Author(s) Pinna Simonluca
Abstract: The heart of the matter in this paper is what human knowledge owes to images. More precisely, what does knowledge – even scientific knowledge – obtain from the visual representation of its objects? It is undisputed that visual representations are spatial. But they are not necessarily static. Sometime they have duration. Then visual representations may be both spatial and temporal. However, it remains certainly true that they have a geometrical structure – in 3 or 4 dimensions. Thus, what does scientific knowledge obtain from the geometrical structure of its representations? According to the Latvian philosopher Nicolai Hartmann, sciences obtain the linkage between the
Norms, representationality, accessibility from:
Verità Immagine Normatività / Truth, Image, and Normativity
Author(s) Feis Guglielmo
Abstract: A possible and, we believe, fruitful way to answer the question on whether representationality is necessary for normativity is to consider it using formal methods. Discussing what representationality is exceeds the scope of this paper; we would like to stay non-committal about its metaphysical nature or precise philosophical definition¹. The only assumption we need is the following: that representationality can itself be represented as a modality, and it is thus amenable to the methods of modal logic. This is in line with the standard formal treatments of other concepts such as metaphysical necessity, time, knowledge etc. and the analysis of
Does persuasion really come at “the end of reasons”? from:
Verità Immagine Normatività / Truth, Image, and Normativity
Author(s) Salis Pietro
Abstract: Persuasion is a special aspect of our social and linguistic practices – one where an interlocutor, or an audience, is induced, to perform a certain action or to endorse a certain belief, and these episodes are not due to the force of the better reason. When we come near persuasion, it seems that, in general, we are somehow giving up factual discourse (and perhaps the principles of logic), since persuading must be understood as almost different from convincing rationally¹. Sometimes, for example, we can find persuasion a political speech that relies on our feelings, emotions and values, but we can also
Anschaulichkeit and empirical verification in scientific theories from:
Verità Immagine Normatività / Truth, Image, and Normativity
Author(s) Pinna Simonluca
Abstract: The heart of the matter in this paper is what human knowledge owes to images. More precisely, what does knowledge – even scientific knowledge – obtain from the visual representation of its objects? It is undisputed that visual representations are spatial. But they are not necessarily static. Sometime they have duration. Then visual representations may be both spatial and temporal. However, it remains certainly true that they have a geometrical structure – in 3 or 4 dimensions. Thus, what does scientific knowledge obtain from the geometrical structure of its representations? According to the Latvian philosopher Nicolai Hartmann, sciences obtain the linkage between the
Norms, representationality, accessibility from:
Verità Immagine Normatività / Truth, Image, and Normativity
Author(s) Feis Guglielmo
Abstract: A possible and, we believe, fruitful way to answer the question on whether representationality is necessary for normativity is to consider it using formal methods. Discussing what representationality is exceeds the scope of this paper; we would like to stay non-committal about its metaphysical nature or precise philosophical definition¹. The only assumption we need is the following: that representationality can itself be represented as a modality, and it is thus amenable to the methods of modal logic. This is in line with the standard formal treatments of other concepts such as metaphysical necessity, time, knowledge etc. and the analysis of
Does persuasion really come at “the end of reasons”? from:
Verità Immagine Normatività / Truth, Image, and Normativity
Author(s) Salis Pietro
Abstract: Persuasion is a special aspect of our social and linguistic practices – one where an interlocutor, or an audience, is induced, to perform a certain action or to endorse a certain belief, and these episodes are not due to the force of the better reason. When we come near persuasion, it seems that, in general, we are somehow giving up factual discourse (and perhaps the principles of logic), since persuading must be understood as almost different from convincing rationally¹. Sometimes, for example, we can find persuasion a political speech that relies on our feelings, emotions and values, but we can also
Anschaulichkeit and empirical verification in scientific theories from:
Verità Immagine Normatività / Truth, Image, and Normativity
Author(s) Pinna Simonluca
Abstract: The heart of the matter in this paper is what human knowledge owes to images. More precisely, what does knowledge – even scientific knowledge – obtain from the visual representation of its objects? It is undisputed that visual representations are spatial. But they are not necessarily static. Sometime they have duration. Then visual representations may be both spatial and temporal. However, it remains certainly true that they have a geometrical structure – in 3 or 4 dimensions. Thus, what does scientific knowledge obtain from the geometrical structure of its representations? According to the Latvian philosopher Nicolai Hartmann, sciences obtain the linkage between the
Norms, representationality, accessibility from:
Verità Immagine Normatività / Truth, Image, and Normativity
Author(s) Feis Guglielmo
Abstract: A possible and, we believe, fruitful way to answer the question on whether representationality is necessary for normativity is to consider it using formal methods. Discussing what representationality is exceeds the scope of this paper; we would like to stay non-committal about its metaphysical nature or precise philosophical definition¹. The only assumption we need is the following: that representationality can itself be represented as a modality, and it is thus amenable to the methods of modal logic. This is in line with the standard formal treatments of other concepts such as metaphysical necessity, time, knowledge etc. and the analysis of
Does persuasion really come at “the end of reasons”? from:
Verità Immagine Normatività / Truth, Image, and Normativity
Author(s) Salis Pietro
Abstract: Persuasion is a special aspect of our social and linguistic practices – one where an interlocutor, or an audience, is induced, to perform a certain action or to endorse a certain belief, and these episodes are not due to the force of the better reason. When we come near persuasion, it seems that, in general, we are somehow giving up factual discourse (and perhaps the principles of logic), since persuading must be understood as almost different from convincing rationally¹. Sometimes, for example, we can find persuasion a political speech that relies on our feelings, emotions and values, but we can also
Anschaulichkeit and empirical verification in scientific theories from:
Verità Immagine Normatività / Truth, Image, and Normativity
Author(s) Pinna Simonluca
Abstract: The heart of the matter in this paper is what human knowledge owes to images. More precisely, what does knowledge – even scientific knowledge – obtain from the visual representation of its objects? It is undisputed that visual representations are spatial. But they are not necessarily static. Sometime they have duration. Then visual representations may be both spatial and temporal. However, it remains certainly true that they have a geometrical structure – in 3 or 4 dimensions. Thus, what does scientific knowledge obtain from the geometrical structure of its representations? According to the Latvian philosopher Nicolai Hartmann, sciences obtain the linkage between the
Norms, representationality, accessibility from:
Verità Immagine Normatività / Truth, Image, and Normativity
Author(s) Feis Guglielmo
Abstract: A possible and, we believe, fruitful way to answer the question on whether representationality is necessary for normativity is to consider it using formal methods. Discussing what representationality is exceeds the scope of this paper; we would like to stay non-committal about its metaphysical nature or precise philosophical definition¹. The only assumption we need is the following: that representationality can itself be represented as a modality, and it is thus amenable to the methods of modal logic. This is in line with the standard formal treatments of other concepts such as metaphysical necessity, time, knowledge etc. and the analysis of
Egoismo, responsabilità, dono. from:
Che cosa vale
Author(s) Semerari Furio
Abstract: Secondo modalità espressive differenti, Dostoevskij e Nietzsche hanno offerto, sul tema del valore (morale), una riflessione fondamentale e decisiva sviluppata non solo sul piano dell’analisi dei sentimenti morali e della coscienza morale, ma anche su quello della costruzione ed elaborazione di una prospettiva morale, diversa e lontana rispetto a quelle tradizionalmente prevalenti. Anche attraverso una reciproca integrazione delle loro rispettive posizioni – che, del resto, presentano aspetti comuni e convergenti –, la loro riflessione può contribuire a definire una proposta etica valida anche per il nostro tempo, per diversi tratti segnato o da un atteggiamento di indifferenza al problema del valore
Book Title: Mourning Nature-Hope at the Heart of Ecological Loss and Grief
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): LANDMAN KAREN
Abstract: We are facing unprecedented environmental challenges, including global climate change, large-scale industrial development, rapidly increasing species extinction, ocean acidification, and deforestation – challenges that require new vocabularies and new ways to express grief and sorrow over the disappearance, degradation, and loss of nature. Seeking to redress the silence around ecologically based anxiety in academic and public domains, and to extend the concepts of sadness, anger, and loss, Mourning Nature creates a lexicon for the recognition and expression of emotions related to environmental degradation. Exploring the ways in which grief is experienced in numerous contexts, this groundbreaking collection draws on classical, philosophical, artistic, and poetic elements to explain environmental melancholia. Understanding that it is not just how we mourn but what we mourn that defines us, the authors introduce new perspectives on conservation, sustainability, and our relationships with nature. An ecological elegy for a time of climatic and environmental upheaval, Mourning Nature challenges readers to turn devastating events into an opportunity for positive change. Contributors include Glenn Albrecht (Murdoch University, retired); Jessica Marion Barr (Trent University); Sebastian Braun (University of North Dakota); Ashlee Cunsolo (Labrador Institute of Memorial University); Amanda Di Battista (York University); Franklin Ginn (University of Edinburgh); Bernie Krause (soundscape ecologist, author, and independent scholar); Lisa Kretz (University of Evansville); Karen Landman (University of Guelph); Patrick Lane (Poet); Andrew Mark (independent scholar); Nancy Menning (Ithaca College); John Charles Ryan (University of New England); Catriona Sandilands (York University); and Helen Whale (independent scholar).We are facing unprecedented environmental challenges, including global climate change, large-scale industrial development, rapidly increasing species extinction, ocean acidification, and deforestation – challenges that require new vocabularies and new ways to express grief and sorrow over the disappearance, degradation, and loss of nature. Seeking to redress the silence around ecologically based anxiety in academic and public domains, and to extend the concepts of sadness, anger, and loss, Mourning Nature creates a lexicon for the recognition and expression of emotions related to environmental degradation. Exploring the ways in which grief is experienced in numerous contexts, this groundbreaking collection draws on classical, philosophical, artistic, and poetic elements to explain environmental melancholia. Understanding that it is not just how we mourn but what we mourn that defines us, the authors introduce new perspectives on conservation, sustainability, and our relationships with nature. An ecological elegy for a time of climatic and environmental upheaval, Mourning Nature challenges readers to turn devastating events into an opportunity for positive change. Contributors include Glenn Albrecht (Murdoch University, retired); Jessica Marion Barr (Trent University); Sebastian Braun (University of North Dakota); Ashlee Cunsolo (Labrador Institute of Memorial University); Amanda Di Battista (York University); Franklin Ginn (University of Edinburgh); Bernie Krause (soundscape ecologist, author, and independent scholar); Lisa Kretz (University of Evansville); Karen Landman (University of Guelph); Patrick Lane (Poet); Andrew Mark (independent scholar); Nancy Menning (Ithaca College); John Charles Ryan (University of New England); Catriona Sandilands (York University); and Helen Whale (independent scholar).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1w6t9hg
4 In the Absence of Sparrows from:
Mourning Nature
Author(s) GINN FRANKLIN
Abstract: Colourful flocks and feathered shapes make their way across a page. They are moving yet motionless, left to hang forever from a branch, their trajectory of flight suspended in time. The illustrations are from Hume and Walters’s 2012
Extinct Birds, said to be the first study to document every avian species’ demise to have occurred over the last thousand years. As this volume demonstrates, extinction haunts our time as never before. The extinction that pervades popular nature-writing and the environmental sections of our newspapers, and which confronts us through screens, is not about the past. The blurry shot of a
5 Where Have All the Boronia Gone? from:
Mourning Nature
Author(s) RYAN JOHN CHARLES
Abstract: Scented or brown boronia (
Boronia megastigma) is a slender shrub endemic to the South-West corner of Western Australia. Said to possess a “heady, sentimental perfume” (Parker 1962, 4), the fragrant blossom is found in the heath lands and eucalypt forests between Busselton and Albany, south of the capital city Perth. Bearing small brown and yellow flowers toward the end of winter (late July–September in Western Australia), boronia was collected in the wild, shipped by train, and sold as an ornamental by Perth streetsellers in the early to mid-1900s. In 1947, novelist and columnist James Pollard (1900–1971) wrote of
6 Losing My Place: from:
Mourning Nature
Author(s) SANDILANDS CATRIONA
Abstract: In June 2010 my marriage ended; in November my mother died (both my mother and my marriage had been suffering significant decline for some time). In February 2011 I sold my little house on the Niagara Escarpment; at the end of June, my daughter and I moved into a nice townhouse in the west end of Toronto. The first thing I did was plant a garden, only a fragment of what we had had in the country but a good gesture toward the possibility of taking root in this new place. I transplanted some of my favourite herbs and flowers
Book Title: Mourning Nature-Hope at the Heart of Ecological Loss and Grief
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): LANDMAN KAREN
Abstract: We are facing unprecedented environmental challenges, including global climate change, large-scale industrial development, rapidly increasing species extinction, ocean acidification, and deforestation – challenges that require new vocabularies and new ways to express grief and sorrow over the disappearance, degradation, and loss of nature. Seeking to redress the silence around ecologically based anxiety in academic and public domains, and to extend the concepts of sadness, anger, and loss, Mourning Nature creates a lexicon for the recognition and expression of emotions related to environmental degradation. Exploring the ways in which grief is experienced in numerous contexts, this groundbreaking collection draws on classical, philosophical, artistic, and poetic elements to explain environmental melancholia. Understanding that it is not just how we mourn but what we mourn that defines us, the authors introduce new perspectives on conservation, sustainability, and our relationships with nature. An ecological elegy for a time of climatic and environmental upheaval, Mourning Nature challenges readers to turn devastating events into an opportunity for positive change. Contributors include Glenn Albrecht (Murdoch University, retired); Jessica Marion Barr (Trent University); Sebastian Braun (University of North Dakota); Ashlee Cunsolo (Labrador Institute of Memorial University); Amanda Di Battista (York University); Franklin Ginn (University of Edinburgh); Bernie Krause (soundscape ecologist, author, and independent scholar); Lisa Kretz (University of Evansville); Karen Landman (University of Guelph); Patrick Lane (Poet); Andrew Mark (independent scholar); Nancy Menning (Ithaca College); John Charles Ryan (University of New England); Catriona Sandilands (York University); and Helen Whale (independent scholar).We are facing unprecedented environmental challenges, including global climate change, large-scale industrial development, rapidly increasing species extinction, ocean acidification, and deforestation – challenges that require new vocabularies and new ways to express grief and sorrow over the disappearance, degradation, and loss of nature. Seeking to redress the silence around ecologically based anxiety in academic and public domains, and to extend the concepts of sadness, anger, and loss, Mourning Nature creates a lexicon for the recognition and expression of emotions related to environmental degradation. Exploring the ways in which grief is experienced in numerous contexts, this groundbreaking collection draws on classical, philosophical, artistic, and poetic elements to explain environmental melancholia. Understanding that it is not just how we mourn but what we mourn that defines us, the authors introduce new perspectives on conservation, sustainability, and our relationships with nature. An ecological elegy for a time of climatic and environmental upheaval, Mourning Nature challenges readers to turn devastating events into an opportunity for positive change. Contributors include Glenn Albrecht (Murdoch University, retired); Jessica Marion Barr (Trent University); Sebastian Braun (University of North Dakota); Ashlee Cunsolo (Labrador Institute of Memorial University); Amanda Di Battista (York University); Franklin Ginn (University of Edinburgh); Bernie Krause (soundscape ecologist, author, and independent scholar); Lisa Kretz (University of Evansville); Karen Landman (University of Guelph); Patrick Lane (Poet); Andrew Mark (independent scholar); Nancy Menning (Ithaca College); John Charles Ryan (University of New England); Catriona Sandilands (York University); and Helen Whale (independent scholar).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1w6t9hg
4 In the Absence of Sparrows from:
Mourning Nature
Author(s) GINN FRANKLIN
Abstract: Colourful flocks and feathered shapes make their way across a page. They are moving yet motionless, left to hang forever from a branch, their trajectory of flight suspended in time. The illustrations are from Hume and Walters’s 2012
Extinct Birds, said to be the first study to document every avian species’ demise to have occurred over the last thousand years. As this volume demonstrates, extinction haunts our time as never before. The extinction that pervades popular nature-writing and the environmental sections of our newspapers, and which confronts us through screens, is not about the past. The blurry shot of a
5 Where Have All the Boronia Gone? from:
Mourning Nature
Author(s) RYAN JOHN CHARLES
Abstract: Scented or brown boronia (
Boronia megastigma) is a slender shrub endemic to the South-West corner of Western Australia. Said to possess a “heady, sentimental perfume” (Parker 1962, 4), the fragrant blossom is found in the heath lands and eucalypt forests between Busselton and Albany, south of the capital city Perth. Bearing small brown and yellow flowers toward the end of winter (late July–September in Western Australia), boronia was collected in the wild, shipped by train, and sold as an ornamental by Perth streetsellers in the early to mid-1900s. In 1947, novelist and columnist James Pollard (1900–1971) wrote of
6 Losing My Place: from:
Mourning Nature
Author(s) SANDILANDS CATRIONA
Abstract: In June 2010 my marriage ended; in November my mother died (both my mother and my marriage had been suffering significant decline for some time). In February 2011 I sold my little house on the Niagara Escarpment; at the end of June, my daughter and I moved into a nice townhouse in the west end of Toronto. The first thing I did was plant a garden, only a fragment of what we had had in the country but a good gesture toward the possibility of taking root in this new place. I transplanted some of my favourite herbs and flowers
Book Title: Nietzsche's Great Politics- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): DROCHON HUGO
Abstract: Nietzsche's Great Politicsshows how Nietzsche made Bismarck's notion his own, enabling him to offer a vision of a unified European political order that was to serve as a counterbalance to both Britain and Russia. This order was to be led by a "good European" cultural elite whose goal would be to encourage the rebirth of Greek high culture. In relocating Nietzsche's politics to their own time, the book offers not only a novel reading of the philosopher but also a more accurate picture of why his political thought remains so relevant today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1wf4chc
CHAPTER 1 THE GREEKS from:
Nietzsche's Great Politics
Abstract: Looking back over his life in 1888—“What I Owe to the Ancients” serves as the starting point for Nietzsche’s “autobiography”
Ecce Homo—Nietzsche declares thatThe Birth of Tragedy, first published in 1872, was his “first revaluation of all values’ (TI Ancients 5). It is from this “soil”—that is, his study of the Greeks—that his “will,” his “abilitiesgrow.” During this time Nietzsche had noted a series of reflections onThe Birthin preparation for his “Revaluation of All Values,” demonstrating that the book and its themes were on his mind, and a number of letters of
CHAPTER 3 DEMOCRACY from:
Nietzsche's Great Politics
Abstract: A common refrain in the contemporary scholarship is that during his so-called middle period, commonly understood as spanning both books of
Human, All Too Human(1878–80),Daybreak(1881), and the first four books ofThe Gay Science(1882), Nietzsche demonstrates a favorable disposition toward democracy.¹ Writers such as William Connolly, Owen, Paul Patton, and Schrift offer upThe Wanderer and His Shadow293 (1880), titled “Ends and Means of Democracy,” as typifying Nietzsche’s allegedly prodemocratic sentiment.² There, Nietzsche explains that “democracy wants to create and guarantee as muchindependenceas possible: independence of opinion, of mode of life, and
CHAPTER 5 REVALUATION from:
Nietzsche's Great Politics
Abstract: With
Thus Spoke Zarathustra, Nietzsche has in his grasp his three fundamental philosophical notions: the eternal return, will to power, and overman. The “thought of eternal return,” which Nietzsche considers to be the “basic idea of the work,” the “highest possible formula of affirmation,” came to him on a fateful day in August 1881. In Sils-Maria, “6,000 feet beyond people and time,” on his daily walk around Silvaplana Lake, Nietzsche “stopped near Surlei by a huge, pyramidal boulder”—the rock of the eternal return—where the thought came to him (EH Z 1). Projecting himself back a couple of months
7 TELLING OUR STORY: from:
Class in the Composition Classroom
Author(s) Fraser Rebecca
Abstract: A liberal arts college program solely devoted to tradespeople and their interests is a radical idea; after all, why spend money, time, and effort to educate people in the liberal arts who are going to be doing some form of construction for the rest of their lives? When I was nineteen, a professor challenged us with these questions: Should bus drivers go to college? Shouldn’t we leave them well enough alone to drive their buses? Why give them the tools that might make it possible for them to imagine another life when all they are going to do is drive
10 PEDAGOGIES OF INTERDEPENDENCE: from:
Class in the Composition Classroom
Author(s) Middleton Holly
Abstract: In 2007 I moved to northern New Mexico to teach at New Mexico Highlands University (NMHU), an open-admissions federally designated Hispanic-serving institution. At the time, an anti-DUI public service campaign (PSA) was underway appealing to the cultural values of young Hispanic men. In this series, the effects of DUI are dramatized as a threat to families—not to those of the victims of drunk driving but to the families of those who drink and drive. The one I want to single out is called “Mi Mijito.” It opens on a young Hispanic man leaving the house for a night out
17 AN AFTERWORD TO CLASS IN THE COMPOSITION CLASSROOM: from:
Class in the Composition Classroom
Author(s) Zebroski James T.
Abstract: You have in your hands or on your screens an extraordinary volume,
Class in the Composition Classroom. This is one of the most important books in the discipline that I have read in years. This book is extraordinary in several ways. At a time when some scholars in rhetoric and composition still argue we must cut our ties to teaching and particularly to the so-called universal requirement, freshman composition, this book focuses primarily on freshman composition.¹ At a time when people in rhetoric and composition still see an untenable dualism, a rigid binary between teaching and research, this book deconstructs
Temporality in Aphra Behn’s Oroonoko and Daniel Defoe’s Robinson Crusoe from:
Narrative Concepts in the Study of Eighteenth-Century Literature
Author(s) Mäkikalli Aino
Abstract: In the
Routledge Encyclopedia of Narrative Theory(2005) Monika Fludernik suggests that time in narrative can be viewed from three different perspectives: first, the general,philosophicalaspect of temporality and its significance for the levels of story and discourse; second, the relationship between thestoryanddiscourselevels; and third, thegrammaticalandmorphologicaldevices used (tense markers) and their significance for the levels of discourse and story. She stresses the study of two temporal levels, that of thestoryand that of thediscourse, leading to the analysis of chronological distortions of the surface level of the narrative text
Temporality, Subjectivity and the Representation of Characters in the Eighteenth-Century Novel from:
Narrative Concepts in the Study of Eighteenth-Century Literature
Author(s) Steinby Liisa
Abstract: In the course of the eighteenth century, the experience of time – and, connected to this, the experience of human existence – underwent profound changes. Here I trace these changes as expressed in the eighteenth-century novel mainly on the basis of two examples, representing two different phases of temporalization of experience: Defoe’s
Moll Flanders(1722) and Goethe’sWilhelm Meisters Lehrjahre(1795-1796).
Immediacy from:
Narrative Concepts in the Study of Eighteenth-Century Literature
Author(s) Nitschke Claudia
Abstract: Systematic narratological classification helps identify ‘trans-historical’ phenomena which share defining characteristics, but can still change over time in terms of form or function. In the eighteenth century, seminal, longterm social and political shifts (even before the French Revolution) became widely tangible. With society undergoing massive structural changes, literature formed no exception: writers began taking stock and started rigorously to probe and investigate the semantic potential of emergent genres such as the novel, but also the narrative medium itself.
Book Title: Encounter with the Plumed Serpent-Drama and Power in the Heart of Mesoamerica
Publisher: University Press of Colorado
Author(s): Jiménez Gabina Aurora Pérez
Abstract: The Mixtec, or the people of Savi ("Nation of the Rain God"), one of the major civilizations of ancient Mesoamerica, made their home in the highlands of Oaxaca, where they resisted both Aztec military expansion and the Spanish conquest. This book presents and interprets the sacred histories narrated in the Mixtec codices, the largest surviving collection of pre-Columbian manuscripts in existence. In these screenfold books, ancient painter-historians chronicled the politics of the Mixtec from approximately a.d. 900 to 1521, portraying the royal families, rituals, wars, alliances, and ideology of the times. By analyzing and cross-referencing the codices, which have been fragmented and dispersed in far-flung archives, the authors attempt to reconstruct Mixtec history. Adding useful interpretation and commentary, Jansen and Perez Jimenez synthesize the large body of surviving documents into the first unified narrative of Mixtec sacred history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1wn0rc9
Chapter Three DESCENT of the PLUMED SERPENT from:
Encounter with the Plumed Serpent
Abstract: Human history, according to the Mesoamerican worldview, started with the First Sunrise. Before, there was darkness, a mysterious time of origins. The most impressive and complete expression of this concept is found in the Popol Vuh, the sacred book of the Quiché in Guatemala. The story begins in darkness and night (
chi quecum chi acab). The divine plan of creation is to bring about germination and dawn (ta chauaxoc, ta zaquiroc), connecting and even identifying the natural cycle of fertility with the cycle of day and night. Humanity, which exists within these cycles, is referred to as “people of light”
Chapter Four FOUNDING MOTHERS from:
Encounter with the Plumed Serpent
Abstract: The Seven Caves of heaven are the point of departure for an intriguing story about the events of a remote past recorded in the Ñuu Dzaui manuscripts (Codex Tonindeye, 14–21). Heaven, we now understand, is both the general sacred living space of the Gods and an actual sanctuary on a mountaintop near Yuta Tnoho. The seven caves (Chicomoztoc) are a metaphor for earthly origin. At the same time, they may refer to actual caves in the area with ceremonial functions. In this case, a pair emerges: Lady 3 Flint ‘Shell Quechquemitl, Plumed Serpent’ (“Power and Strength of the Plumed
Chapter Five The RISE of ÑUU TNOO from:
Encounter with the Plumed Serpent
Abstract: The history of the lineages begins with the warmth and energy of the first rising of Lord Sun (Iya Ndicandii), who, with his rays of life-giving power and his call to work and glory, created a human world of knowledge and seeing while the past became a time of darkness and mystery, solid and cold as stone. The
IyaandIyadzehe,who had their origin in Yuta Tnoho, were children of light and heat; the earlier populations were reduced to immobile rock formations in their new landscape. As it was in the beginning, this process of awakening and coming to
13 ‘Sacred spaces’: from:
Irish Literature Since 1990
Author(s) Regan Stephen
Abstract: One of the familiar conventions of autobiography is its revelation of an individual life through a compelling first-person narrative voice. To work upon its readers most effectively, autobiography needs to present the life in question as both unique and typical; it must offer an appealing account of an existence that is special enough and significant enough to warrant attention, but it must also sustain that attention through an insistence on common human dilemmas and a shared sense of endeavour. At the same time as presenting a single life as unfolding and uncertain, shaped by that which can only be dimly
15 ‘What’s it like being Irish?’ from:
Irish Literature Since 1990
Author(s) Jeffers Jennifer M.
Abstract: In a recent, brief essay, ‘Green Yodel No. 1’, Roddy Doyle stresses that Irish identity is in an exciting period of transformation because of the influx of immigrants from such places as Nigeria, Latvia and China. Instead of a reactive response to preserve Irish homogeneity, Doyle welcomes the chance for the Irish ‘to invent new stories, new art, new voices, new music. . . . New love stories, family sagas, new jealousies, rivalries, new beginning and new endings. We live in exciting times, if we want them.’³ Doyle himself has begun to celebrate these new beginnings in what he calls
CHAPTER 4 John Henry Newman: from:
The Three Dynamisms of Faith
Abstract: Throughout his life, John Henry Newman (1801–90) was concerned with the challenge that the rationalism of his time, which he often called “liberalism,” addressed to Christianity. In this chapter, therefore, we shall concentrate on aspects of his thought that shed light on his account of the faith process—a process he viewed as much broader and deeper than any rationalist methodology. In this respect, most innovative and valuable are his notions of “real apprehension” and “inference.”
CHAPTER 4 John Henry Newman: from:
The Three Dynamisms of Faith
Abstract: Throughout his life, John Henry Newman (1801–90) was concerned with the challenge that the rationalism of his time, which he often called “liberalism,” addressed to Christianity. In this chapter, therefore, we shall concentrate on aspects of his thought that shed light on his account of the faith process—a process he viewed as much broader and deeper than any rationalist methodology. In this respect, most innovative and valuable are his notions of “real apprehension” and “inference.”
CHAPTER 4 John Henry Newman: from:
The Three Dynamisms of Faith
Abstract: Throughout his life, John Henry Newman (1801–90) was concerned with the challenge that the rationalism of his time, which he often called “liberalism,” addressed to Christianity. In this chapter, therefore, we shall concentrate on aspects of his thought that shed light on his account of the faith process—a process he viewed as much broader and deeper than any rationalist methodology. In this respect, most innovative and valuable are his notions of “real apprehension” and “inference.”
INTRODUCTION: from:
Rethinking Sincerity and Authenticity
Abstract: “All the world’s a stage, / And all the men and women merely players” is a sentiment that neither debuts nor disappears with Shakespeare.¹ Plato, Seneca, and Saint Paul, among others, adopt the
theatrum mundi(theater of the world) analogy to highlight resemblances between human existence and theatrical performance.² More recently, dramaturgical sociologists (Erving Goffman) have analyzed social roles and interactions using theatrical metaphors.³ Psychologists and advocates of drama therapy (Jean Piaget) have af-firmed imitation’s formative role in cognitive and moral development.⁴And philosophers (Judith Butler) have emphasized the performative aspects of identity.⁵Clearly, whatever their differences, these examples (modern, premodern, and postmodern) reveal
9. Révélation et communication peuvent-elles cohabiter ? from:
Témoigner de sa foi, dans les médias, aujourd'hui
Author(s) Pietri Gaston
Abstract: Pareille économie de la Révélation comprend des événements et des paroles intimement unis entre eux, de telle sorte que les oeuvres, réalisées par Dieu dans l’histoire du salut, attestent et corroborent la doctrine et le sens indiqués par les paroles, tandis que les paroles publient les oeuvres et éclairent le Mystère qu’elles contiennent¹.
19. Le témoignage et l’imaginaire from:
Témoigner de sa foi, dans les médias, aujourd'hui
Author(s) Bianchi Jean
Abstract: Je me propose à travers ces quelques réflexions d’envisager le témoin et le témoignage sous un angle particulier : celui de l’imaginaire. Pas seulement pour situer le témoin imaginaire (le personnage de fiction) par rapport au témoin réel (l’acteur historique). Pas uniquement pour détecter les mythes qui légitiment les discours, le halo imaginaire qui enveloppe tout témoignage (d’une croyance) exprimé dans l’espace médiatique. Mais aussi pour repérer les sources où s’alimentent et se rechargent les dynamiques du témoignage public, la force des témoins.
9. Révélation et communication peuvent-elles cohabiter ? from:
Témoigner de sa foi, dans les médias, aujourd'hui
Author(s) Pietri Gaston
Abstract: Pareille économie de la Révélation comprend des événements et des paroles intimement unis entre eux, de telle sorte que les oeuvres, réalisées par Dieu dans l’histoire du salut, attestent et corroborent la doctrine et le sens indiqués par les paroles, tandis que les paroles publient les oeuvres et éclairent le Mystère qu’elles contiennent¹.
19. Le témoignage et l’imaginaire from:
Témoigner de sa foi, dans les médias, aujourd'hui
Author(s) Bianchi Jean
Abstract: Je me propose à travers ces quelques réflexions d’envisager le témoin et le témoignage sous un angle particulier : celui de l’imaginaire. Pas seulement pour situer le témoin imaginaire (le personnage de fiction) par rapport au témoin réel (l’acteur historique). Pas uniquement pour détecter les mythes qui légitiment les discours, le halo imaginaire qui enveloppe tout témoignage (d’une croyance) exprimé dans l’espace médiatique. Mais aussi pour repérer les sources où s’alimentent et se rechargent les dynamiques du témoignage public, la force des témoins.
9. Révélation et communication peuvent-elles cohabiter ? from:
Témoigner de sa foi, dans les médias, aujourd'hui
Author(s) Pietri Gaston
Abstract: Pareille économie de la Révélation comprend des événements et des paroles intimement unis entre eux, de telle sorte que les oeuvres, réalisées par Dieu dans l’histoire du salut, attestent et corroborent la doctrine et le sens indiqués par les paroles, tandis que les paroles publient les oeuvres et éclairent le Mystère qu’elles contiennent¹.
19. Le témoignage et l’imaginaire from:
Témoigner de sa foi, dans les médias, aujourd'hui
Author(s) Bianchi Jean
Abstract: Je me propose à travers ces quelques réflexions d’envisager le témoin et le témoignage sous un angle particulier : celui de l’imaginaire. Pas seulement pour situer le témoin imaginaire (le personnage de fiction) par rapport au témoin réel (l’acteur historique). Pas uniquement pour détecter les mythes qui légitiment les discours, le halo imaginaire qui enveloppe tout témoignage (d’une croyance) exprimé dans l’espace médiatique. Mais aussi pour repérer les sources où s’alimentent et se rechargent les dynamiques du témoignage public, la force des témoins.
9. Révélation et communication peuvent-elles cohabiter ? from:
Témoigner de sa foi, dans les médias, aujourd'hui
Author(s) Pietri Gaston
Abstract: Pareille économie de la Révélation comprend des événements et des paroles intimement unis entre eux, de telle sorte que les oeuvres, réalisées par Dieu dans l’histoire du salut, attestent et corroborent la doctrine et le sens indiqués par les paroles, tandis que les paroles publient les oeuvres et éclairent le Mystère qu’elles contiennent¹.
19. Le témoignage et l’imaginaire from:
Témoigner de sa foi, dans les médias, aujourd'hui
Author(s) Bianchi Jean
Abstract: Je me propose à travers ces quelques réflexions d’envisager le témoin et le témoignage sous un angle particulier : celui de l’imaginaire. Pas seulement pour situer le témoin imaginaire (le personnage de fiction) par rapport au témoin réel (l’acteur historique). Pas uniquement pour détecter les mythes qui légitiment les discours, le halo imaginaire qui enveloppe tout témoignage (d’une croyance) exprimé dans l’espace médiatique. Mais aussi pour repérer les sources où s’alimentent et se rechargent les dynamiques du témoignage public, la force des témoins.
9. Révélation et communication peuvent-elles cohabiter ? from:
Témoigner de sa foi, dans les médias, aujourd'hui
Author(s) Pietri Gaston
Abstract: Pareille économie de la Révélation comprend des événements et des paroles intimement unis entre eux, de telle sorte que les oeuvres, réalisées par Dieu dans l’histoire du salut, attestent et corroborent la doctrine et le sens indiqués par les paroles, tandis que les paroles publient les oeuvres et éclairent le Mystère qu’elles contiennent¹.
19. Le témoignage et l’imaginaire from:
Témoigner de sa foi, dans les médias, aujourd'hui
Author(s) Bianchi Jean
Abstract: Je me propose à travers ces quelques réflexions d’envisager le témoin et le témoignage sous un angle particulier : celui de l’imaginaire. Pas seulement pour situer le témoin imaginaire (le personnage de fiction) par rapport au témoin réel (l’acteur historique). Pas uniquement pour détecter les mythes qui légitiment les discours, le halo imaginaire qui enveloppe tout témoignage (d’une croyance) exprimé dans l’espace médiatique. Mais aussi pour repérer les sources où s’alimentent et se rechargent les dynamiques du témoignage public, la force des témoins.
9. Révélation et communication peuvent-elles cohabiter ? from:
Témoigner de sa foi, dans les médias, aujourd'hui
Author(s) Pietri Gaston
Abstract: Pareille économie de la Révélation comprend des événements et des paroles intimement unis entre eux, de telle sorte que les oeuvres, réalisées par Dieu dans l’histoire du salut, attestent et corroborent la doctrine et le sens indiqués par les paroles, tandis que les paroles publient les oeuvres et éclairent le Mystère qu’elles contiennent¹.
19. Le témoignage et l’imaginaire from:
Témoigner de sa foi, dans les médias, aujourd'hui
Author(s) Bianchi Jean
Abstract: Je me propose à travers ces quelques réflexions d’envisager le témoin et le témoignage sous un angle particulier : celui de l’imaginaire. Pas seulement pour situer le témoin imaginaire (le personnage de fiction) par rapport au témoin réel (l’acteur historique). Pas uniquement pour détecter les mythes qui légitiment les discours, le halo imaginaire qui enveloppe tout témoignage (d’une croyance) exprimé dans l’espace médiatique. Mais aussi pour repérer les sources où s’alimentent et se rechargent les dynamiques du témoignage public, la force des témoins.
9. Révélation et communication peuvent-elles cohabiter ? from:
Témoigner de sa foi, dans les médias, aujourd'hui
Author(s) Pietri Gaston
Abstract: Pareille économie de la Révélation comprend des événements et des paroles intimement unis entre eux, de telle sorte que les oeuvres, réalisées par Dieu dans l’histoire du salut, attestent et corroborent la doctrine et le sens indiqués par les paroles, tandis que les paroles publient les oeuvres et éclairent le Mystère qu’elles contiennent¹.
19. Le témoignage et l’imaginaire from:
Témoigner de sa foi, dans les médias, aujourd'hui
Author(s) Bianchi Jean
Abstract: Je me propose à travers ces quelques réflexions d’envisager le témoin et le témoignage sous un angle particulier : celui de l’imaginaire. Pas seulement pour situer le témoin imaginaire (le personnage de fiction) par rapport au témoin réel (l’acteur historique). Pas uniquement pour détecter les mythes qui légitiment les discours, le halo imaginaire qui enveloppe tout témoignage (d’une croyance) exprimé dans l’espace médiatique. Mais aussi pour repérer les sources où s’alimentent et se rechargent les dynamiques du témoignage public, la force des témoins.
Book Title: The Illiberal Imagination-Class and the Rise of the U.S. Novel
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): Shapiro Joe
Abstract: The Illiberal Imaginationoffers a synthetic, historical formalist account of how-and to what end-U.S. novels from the late eighteenth century to the mid-1850s represented economic inequality and radical forms of economic egalitarianism in the new nation. In conversation with intellectual, social, and labor history, this study tracks the representation of class inequality and conflict across five subgenres of the early U.S. novel: the Bildungsroman, the episodic travel narrative, the sentimental novel, the frontier romance, and the anti-slavery novel.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1wx93xr
3 The Providence of Class: from:
The Illiberal Imagination
Abstract: In the last two chapters, I have tried to show that unwieldy U.S. novels published in the final decade of the eighteenth century and the first two decades of the nineteenth century work as rejoinders to Enlightenment-era and radical plebeian varieties of economic egalitarianism. This chapter moves to the 1830s, a decade in which socialism as a political perspective begins to edge onto the stage in the United States. More particularly, this chapter argues that two of Catharine Maria Sedgwick’s 1830s sentimental novels,
The Poor Rich Man, and the Rich Poor Man(1836) andLive and Let Live(1837), should
Chapitre 4 La mobilisation mémorielle de la communauté francophone d’Ottawa face à la densification urbaine from:
Ottawa, lieu de vie français
Author(s) Ramirez Caroline
Abstract: Dans le contexte urbanistique actuel, particulièrement favorable au développement urbain durable, la densification du tissu bâti existant s’est imposée comme une solution parmi les plus adéquates pour contrecarrer l’étalement urbain et ses effets néfastes¹. Ce mode de planification vise à freiner le gaspillage des terres, à diminuer la pollution par l’intensification de la forme bâtie, tout en augmentant la densité de la population au coeur des villes². Il se décline généralement sous trois formes : 1) la réutilisation de bâtiments manufacturiers ; 2) l’ajout de logements dans les secteurs existants ; et 3) la reconversion des friches industrielles, espaces vacants
2 History in Monuments from:
Holocaust Monuments and National Memory
Abstract: Amonument may never lay claim to artistic autonomy from its social and historical context. It is necessarily a product and reflection of its time, derived from the initiative of an individual, group or state. The production and reception of monuments are determined by three diachronic historical moments. First, the moment of the historical event or figure which it represents or denotes. Second, the moment at which the monument was conceived and constructed. Third, the moment(s) of its reception, when subjected to interpretation or debate due to its renewed political relevance, a decision to renovate or demolish the monument, or even
5 The Institutionalisation of Memory in Public Art and Rhetoric from:
Holocaust Monuments and National Memory
Abstract: This detailed examination of the evolution of the Vél d’Hiv’ and Holocaust Monument reveals discrepancies, but also analogies and overlaps between memory cultures in France and Germany. Memory cultures are not unique and confined in time and space, but are subject to what the sociologist Ulrich Beck calls ‘polycentric memory, in which non-state, transnational actors (such as social movements) also play a role’¹ – a model which he perceives to be a key to the constitution of a European memory culture. Beck dismisses Christianity, ethnicity or principles of the welfare state as foundations of either national or European heritages. A multinational
7 The Postnational Memorial Paradigm from:
Holocaust Monuments and National Memory
Abstract: The monumental historiographical projects on sites of memory in France and Germany,
Les Lieux de mémoireandDeutsche Erinnerungsorte, provide pedagogical models for understanding the historical foundations of contemporary memory cultures in these two countries. Both projects are highly informative, thorough in their treatment of historical facts, and theoretically innovative. The notions that collective symbols are today ‘patrimonial’ instead of partisan foci of collective memory, that we are subjects of ‘archival’ memory, that ‘present time’ is a historiographical category in which societies forge a cohesive self-understanding on the basis of shared symbols of the past, and that the mass media
Introduction: from:
History
Abstract: Human life has its very specific time order. Nietzsche has described it at the beginning of his “Second Untimely Meditation:”
Chapter 8 Loosening the Order of History: from:
History
Abstract: Historical studies as an academic discipline is under discussion, which treats its roots, functions and principles in a way that render them at the same time satisfactory and uncomfortable. The satisfaction may result from the new attention history has got in the realm of the humanities. One of the most dominating issues here is memory and its role in human culture. “Memory” covers the entire field of dealing with the past, thus including the realm of history as a subject matter and as a mode of recalling the past into life of its representation in the cultural framework of human
Chapter 11 Holocaust-Memory and German Identity from:
History
Abstract: It has often been characterized as a “black hole” of meaning, that dissolves every concept of historical interpretation. It occludes construction of a meaningful narrative connection between the time before and after it. It is a “borderline-experience” of history, which doesn’t allow its integration into a coherent narrative. It makes every attempt to apply comprehensive concepts
Introduction: from:
History
Abstract: Human life has its very specific time order. Nietzsche has described it at the beginning of his “Second Untimely Meditation:”
Chapter 8 Loosening the Order of History: from:
History
Abstract: Historical studies as an academic discipline is under discussion, which treats its roots, functions and principles in a way that render them at the same time satisfactory and uncomfortable. The satisfaction may result from the new attention history has got in the realm of the humanities. One of the most dominating issues here is memory and its role in human culture. “Memory” covers the entire field of dealing with the past, thus including the realm of history as a subject matter and as a mode of recalling the past into life of its representation in the cultural framework of human
Chapter 11 Holocaust-Memory and German Identity from:
History
Abstract: It has often been characterized as a “black hole” of meaning, that dissolves every concept of historical interpretation. It occludes construction of a meaningful narrative connection between the time before and after it. It is a “borderline-experience” of history, which doesn’t allow its integration into a coherent narrative. It makes every attempt to apply comprehensive concepts
Introduction: from:
History
Abstract: Human life has its very specific time order. Nietzsche has described it at the beginning of his “Second Untimely Meditation:”
Chapter 8 Loosening the Order of History: from:
History
Abstract: Historical studies as an academic discipline is under discussion, which treats its roots, functions and principles in a way that render them at the same time satisfactory and uncomfortable. The satisfaction may result from the new attention history has got in the realm of the humanities. One of the most dominating issues here is memory and its role in human culture. “Memory” covers the entire field of dealing with the past, thus including the realm of history as a subject matter and as a mode of recalling the past into life of its representation in the cultural framework of human
Chapter 11 Holocaust-Memory and German Identity from:
History
Abstract: It has often been characterized as a “black hole” of meaning, that dissolves every concept of historical interpretation. It occludes construction of a meaningful narrative connection between the time before and after it. It is a “borderline-experience” of history, which doesn’t allow its integration into a coherent narrative. It makes every attempt to apply comprehensive concepts
Introduction: from:
History
Abstract: Human life has its very specific time order. Nietzsche has described it at the beginning of his “Second Untimely Meditation:”
Chapter 8 Loosening the Order of History: from:
History
Abstract: Historical studies as an academic discipline is under discussion, which treats its roots, functions and principles in a way that render them at the same time satisfactory and uncomfortable. The satisfaction may result from the new attention history has got in the realm of the humanities. One of the most dominating issues here is memory and its role in human culture. “Memory” covers the entire field of dealing with the past, thus including the realm of history as a subject matter and as a mode of recalling the past into life of its representation in the cultural framework of human
Chapter 11 Holocaust-Memory and German Identity from:
History
Abstract: It has often been characterized as a “black hole” of meaning, that dissolves every concept of historical interpretation. It occludes construction of a meaningful narrative connection between the time before and after it. It is a “borderline-experience” of history, which doesn’t allow its integration into a coherent narrative. It makes every attempt to apply comprehensive concepts
10. From Socialism to Communitarianism from:
Toward a Global Civil Society
Author(s) Selznick Philip
Abstract: My own departure from socialism occurred almost fifty years ago. In 1940 I broke with a small Trotskyist, Marxist-Leninist group and for a while belonged to the Norman Thomas socialists. However, by the time I returned from service in the army in 1946, I was convinced that the idea of socialism, at least for the United States, was no longer something I could really support. I retained very warm feelings for Norman Thomas, and felt a strong moral continuity with his concept of democratic socialism.
19. Rooted Cosmopolitanism from:
Toward a Global Civil Society
Author(s) Cohen Mitchell
Abstract: The resurgence of nationalism after the collapse of communism startled many observers in the West. What could have been more stark than the contrast between Western and Eastern Europe? As the European Community pursued new modes of integration, nationalist virulence asserted itself in more than one of the previously communist lands. The bloody unravelling of Yugoslavia has been the most potent example, and the fear remains that the former Soviet Union could become Yugoslavia writ large. Evidently, Leninist and Stalinist dominion led neither to a withering away nor to the successful repression of national sentiments. At the same time, as
20. Ethnicity, Migration, and the Validity of the Nation-State from:
Toward a Global Civil Society
Author(s) Hobsbawm Eric
Abstract: Bush’s new world order is a new world disorder, and for the time being, no restoration of stability is visible or even conceivable. It is against this background that we see the present rise of ethnic or nationalist or separatist phenomena in various, but by no means in all parts of the world. But on the other side of the coin is supranationalism or transnationalism, that is, the development of an increasingly integrated world economy or, more generally, a world whose problems cannot effectively be tackled let alone solved within the borders of nation states.
22. The Left in the Process of Democratization in Central and Eastern European Countries from:
Toward a Global Civil Society
Author(s) Hajek Milos
Abstract: Other than the time between the two World Wars, democracy has been a remarkable success after World War II. From 1918 through 1939, after the progression of democratic tendencies in the beginning of the 1920s, most countries in Europe gradually returned to autocratic, even fascist regimes. Today it is a fact that democracy is deeply rooted in Western European countries and all communist regimes in the eastern half of Europe have failed. Some countries, in that region, though, are on their way to democracy, and in other countries democratic governments are trying their first steps, which turn out to be
26. Some Reflections on the New World Order and Disorder from:
Toward a Global Civil Society
Author(s) Ossorio Julian Santamaria
Abstract: The breakdown of the Berlin wall and more generally, the failure of communism in the (now former) Soviet Union and eastern Europe has suddenly put an end to half a century of cold war. The division of the world in two opposing blocs is over. The nuclear danger looks much less imposing and real. The existential enemy has vanished and the political, ideological, and military threats that the enemy was supposed to embody have faded within a short period of time. Democracy has become the only legitimate principle of political organization accepted almost worldwide, while the market economy and the
Introduction: from:
The Imaginary Revolution
Abstract: In 1968 worldwide revolutionary agitation was greater than at any time since the end of World War I. From Paris to Peking, governments were forced to deal with varieties of unrest. The global revolts of 1968 seemed to constitute an international revolutionary wave comparable to the Atlantic Revolutions at the end of the eighteenth century or to the continental European revolutions of 1848. As in 1789 and 1848, Paris was once again a center of revolt. Although this time Paris did not initiate the movement (German, Italian, and American upheavals preceded it), the French capital became the first major theater
Conclusion: from:
The Imaginary Revolution
Abstract: After the revolts of May and June, Marxists and anarchists of various stripes continued to believe that agitation would persist and that the working class was on the road to revolution.¹ Radicals, confident of their dynamism and bolstered by the youthful demographic bulge, were hopeful about the future. Like their counterparts throughout the world, they felt that morality and history were on their side. Revolutionary artists reflected this sentiment in posters, such as “May 68: The Beginning of a Long Struggle” (see figure 15). Several books published at the end of 1968 carried the title
It Is Only a Beginning.
Introduction: from:
The Imaginary Revolution
Abstract: In 1968 worldwide revolutionary agitation was greater than at any time since the end of World War I. From Paris to Peking, governments were forced to deal with varieties of unrest. The global revolts of 1968 seemed to constitute an international revolutionary wave comparable to the Atlantic Revolutions at the end of the eighteenth century or to the continental European revolutions of 1848. As in 1789 and 1848, Paris was once again a center of revolt. Although this time Paris did not initiate the movement (German, Italian, and American upheavals preceded it), the French capital became the first major theater
Conclusion: from:
The Imaginary Revolution
Abstract: After the revolts of May and June, Marxists and anarchists of various stripes continued to believe that agitation would persist and that the working class was on the road to revolution.¹ Radicals, confident of their dynamism and bolstered by the youthful demographic bulge, were hopeful about the future. Like their counterparts throughout the world, they felt that morality and history were on their side. Revolutionary artists reflected this sentiment in posters, such as “May 68: The Beginning of a Long Struggle” (see figure 15). Several books published at the end of 1968 carried the title
It Is Only a Beginning.
Book Title: Ethnographica Moralia-Experiments in Interpretive Anthropology
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Marcus George E.
Abstract: Panourgia and Marcus bring together anthropologists working in various parts of the world (Greece, Bali, Taiwan, the United States) with classicists, historians, and scholars in cultural studies. The volume takes into account global realities such as 9/11 and the opening of the Cypriot Green Line and explores the different ways in which Geertz’s anthropology has shaped the pedagogy of their disciplines and enabled discussions among them. Focusing on place and time, locations and temporalities, the essays in this volume interrogate the fixity of interpretation and open new spaces of inquiry. The volume addresses a wide audience from the humanities and the social sciences—anyone interested in the development of a new humanism that will relocate the human as a subject of social action.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1x76fs8
Canonical and Anticanonical Histories from:
Ethnographica Moralia
Author(s) Liakos Antonis
Abstract: The purpose of this paper is to propose an interpretation of national historiography(-ies) as a specific way of making sense of the past, within a framework of tensions in the making of a global sphere of production of history. The term
historyis a linguistic and cultural indicator of diverse ways of understanding social temporality. These ways of understanding are different in time and space. In some cultures, the concept of history and more generally the understanding of chronology were entirely different from the meaning of history in Western tradition. In Polynesia, for instance, historicity unfolds as an eternal return,
Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION: from:
Migrant Nation
Author(s) Arthur Paul Longley
Abstract: As a former colony of Great Britain, Australia has faced the dual challenge experienced by all settler colonies of forging an identity that allows it to distinguish itself from its ‘parent’ culture at the same time deal with its complicity in the colonization of the new land and the treatment of its original inhabitants. In the case of Australia, this situation has been further complicated by the fact that the land was simply taken – without a war, without a treaty and without negotiation. Throughout its European history, Australia has needed to perpetuate its founding myth of being a previously
6 Time and the Other (Husserl, Heidegger, Levinas) from:
Questions of Phenomenology
Abstract: Time and the Otheris the title of a short but famous work published in 1948, reproducing the stenographic record of four lectures given in 1946 and 1947 by Emmanuel Levinas at the Collège Philosophique founded by Jean Wahl in the Latin Quarter. In this text, for the first time, Levinas accomplished what we could call, borrowing from the title of an essay he had published in 1935, an “evasion”¹ of the thought of being by trying to understand the relation to the other, not in accordance with the Heideggerian horizon ofMitsein, being-with, but rather as time—that is,
7 Phenomenology and Therapy: from:
Questions of Phenomenology
Abstract: In a book published one year after Heidegger’s death, gathering the recollections of those who were close to and knew Heidegger,¹ Medard Boss spoke of the seminars that Heidegger gave several times each year over a ten-year period (1959–69) in Boss’s home at Zollikon in front of an audience of fifty to seventy medical students and young psychiatrists.² Perhaps because it is entirely dedicated to the memory of a friend who had just died, this text is more explicit than the preface to the
Zollikoner Seminareabout why Boss wrote to Heidegger in 1946,³ a few years after he
10 Phenomenology of the Event: from:
Questions of Phenomenology
Abstract: Is philosophy ready to take account of the sudden emergence and factuality of the event, which since Plato has been defined as a thought of the generality and invariance of essence? Such is the very general question with which I would like to begin. As Husserl recalls at the very beginning of his lectures on the phenomenology of internal time-consciousness, the question of time and its contingency has always constituted the most crucial challenge for philosophy, marking the limits of its enterprise to intellectually possess the world because, as the very stuff of things, time seems to escape radically from
1 The Body of Difference from:
The Face of the Other and the Trace of God
Author(s) Franck Didier
Abstract: Is there a path leading from originary time to the meaning of Being? Is time itself manifest as the horizon of Being?Heidegger poses these two questions at the end of the existential analytic, where they interruptSein und Zeit, announcing the section entitled “Time and Being,” at the threshold of which fundamental ontology breaks off provisionally but also, as it has happened, definitively. Can one, in spite of this solution of continuity and the unachieved status of a universal phenomenological ontology, still engage these questions, describing the movement of thought which bears them and to which they are opened
5 “An Interpreter and Not a Judge”: from:
How to Do Comparative Theology
Author(s) Takács Axel Marc Oaks
Abstract: The dialogue between Muslims and Christians has a long, rich, and complex history. Long, in that the first extant
theologicalencounter between a Christian and a Muslim occurred over 1,200 years ago between Mar Timothy I (728–823), the Catholicos of the Church of the East at the time, and the ruling caliph, al-Mahdi (who ruled from 775–785); this excludes any sort of early exchanges that may have occurred among Muhammad, his companions, and Christian tribes in the Arabian peninsula, possible interreligious engagement among Christian ascetics and proto-ṣūfī’s, and statements in the Qur’ān that explicitly address Christian theology, such
13 Incarnational Speech: from:
How to Do Comparative Theology
Author(s) Bannon Brad
Abstract: How—and why—does one do comparative theology? As the essays in this volume demonstrate, there are as many answers to these questions as there are comparative theologians. One’s method and purpose even tends to vary from one project to the next.¹ In part, this is because theology is often driven by questions. Differing questions require differing methods of inquiry. Because comparative theologians delve deeply into more than one religious tradition, we are often compelled by more than one question at a time. Because this anthology addresses
how to do comparative theology, I begin by reflecting on how I formulate
5 “An Interpreter and Not a Judge”: from:
How to Do Comparative Theology
Author(s) Takács Axel Marc Oaks
Abstract: The dialogue between Muslims and Christians has a long, rich, and complex history. Long, in that the first extant
theologicalencounter between a Christian and a Muslim occurred over 1,200 years ago between Mar Timothy I (728–823), the Catholicos of the Church of the East at the time, and the ruling caliph, al-Mahdi (who ruled from 775–785); this excludes any sort of early exchanges that may have occurred among Muhammad, his companions, and Christian tribes in the Arabian peninsula, possible interreligious engagement among Christian ascetics and proto-ṣūfī’s, and statements in the Qur’ān that explicitly address Christian theology, such
13 Incarnational Speech: from:
How to Do Comparative Theology
Author(s) Bannon Brad
Abstract: How—and why—does one do comparative theology? As the essays in this volume demonstrate, there are as many answers to these questions as there are comparative theologians. One’s method and purpose even tends to vary from one project to the next.¹ In part, this is because theology is often driven by questions. Differing questions require differing methods of inquiry. Because comparative theologians delve deeply into more than one religious tradition, we are often compelled by more than one question at a time. Because this anthology addresses
how to do comparative theology, I begin by reflecting on how I formulate
5 “An Interpreter and Not a Judge”: from:
How to Do Comparative Theology
Author(s) Takács Axel Marc Oaks
Abstract: The dialogue between Muslims and Christians has a long, rich, and complex history. Long, in that the first extant
theologicalencounter between a Christian and a Muslim occurred over 1,200 years ago between Mar Timothy I (728–823), the Catholicos of the Church of the East at the time, and the ruling caliph, al-Mahdi (who ruled from 775–785); this excludes any sort of early exchanges that may have occurred among Muhammad, his companions, and Christian tribes in the Arabian peninsula, possible interreligious engagement among Christian ascetics and proto-ṣūfī’s, and statements in the Qur’ān that explicitly address Christian theology, such
13 Incarnational Speech: from:
How to Do Comparative Theology
Author(s) Bannon Brad
Abstract: How—and why—does one do comparative theology? As the essays in this volume demonstrate, there are as many answers to these questions as there are comparative theologians. One’s method and purpose even tends to vary from one project to the next.¹ In part, this is because theology is often driven by questions. Differing questions require differing methods of inquiry. Because comparative theologians delve deeply into more than one religious tradition, we are often compelled by more than one question at a time. Because this anthology addresses
how to do comparative theology, I begin by reflecting on how I formulate
1 The Survival of the Question: from:
The Forgiveness to Come
Abstract: In 1969, Simon Wiesenthal, already internationally recognized for his work in the Documentation Center of the Association of Jewish Victims of the Nazi Regime in Vienna, published an autobiographical narrative based on an exceptional encounter between himself and a dying, repentant Nazi soldier. On his deathbed this soldier confessed to Wiesenthal that he had participated in the murder of hundreds of Jews (including children) and asked Wiesenthal—at the time himself a prisoner in a concentration camp in Poland—for his forgiveness. Responding at the time with silence, Wiesenthal confessed nonetheless to being haunted by the dying man’s request, unable
Conclusion: from:
The Forgiveness to Come
Abstract: Two Jews, long-time enemies, meet at the synagogue, on the Day of Atonement [
le jour du Grand Pardon]. One says to the other [as a gesture, therefore, of
Introduction: Genre Trouble: from:
Spiritual Grammar
Abstract: Grammar is
al-naḥw, “the way.” We journey along “the way” today as wayfarers before us have done. “The way” gives us direction, even if we sometimes stray from it with missteps and slipups of various magnitudes. The two texts that are the focus of the present study are works that school readers in “the way.” Their authors, both master wayfarers, hoped to make “the way” easier and clearer for those who followed. My study of their texts has led to the discovery of “spiritual grammar,” a genre of religious literature that until now has not been recognized as such.
4 From the Names of God to the Grammar of Hearts from:
Spiritual Grammar
Abstract: We now tack east and back in history, from Latin to Arabic, French to Persian, Christian to Islamic. While juxtaposing Gerson’s
Moralized Grammarand Qushayrī’sGrammar of Heartscreates a new context for the two texts, they are also linked to their respective times and places of origins. Attending to these original contexts grounds the fresh literary and theological understandings that the present study constructs. To prepare for understandingThe Grammar of Heartsin both its literary form and its religious content, we will examine in this chapter two of Qushayrī’s most famous works and two of his less well-known
Introduction: Genre Trouble: from:
Spiritual Grammar
Abstract: Grammar is
al-naḥw, “the way.” We journey along “the way” today as wayfarers before us have done. “The way” gives us direction, even if we sometimes stray from it with missteps and slipups of various magnitudes. The two texts that are the focus of the present study are works that school readers in “the way.” Their authors, both master wayfarers, hoped to make “the way” easier and clearer for those who followed. My study of their texts has led to the discovery of “spiritual grammar,” a genre of religious literature that until now has not been recognized as such.
4 From the Names of God to the Grammar of Hearts from:
Spiritual Grammar
Abstract: We now tack east and back in history, from Latin to Arabic, French to Persian, Christian to Islamic. While juxtaposing Gerson’s
Moralized Grammarand Qushayrī’sGrammar of Heartscreates a new context for the two texts, they are also linked to their respective times and places of origins. Attending to these original contexts grounds the fresh literary and theological understandings that the present study constructs. To prepare for understandingThe Grammar of Heartsin both its literary form and its religious content, we will examine in this chapter two of Qushayrī’s most famous works and two of his less well-known
Book Title: The Rigor of Things-Conversations with Dan Arbib
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Tracy David
Abstract: The conversation ranges from Marion's engagement with Descartes, to phenomenology and theology, to Marion's intellectual and biographical backgrounds, concluding with illuminating insights on the state of the Catholic Church today and on Judeo-Christian dialogue. Marion also reflects on the relationship of philosophy to history, theology, aesthetics, and literature. At the same time, the book provides an account of French intellectual life in the late twentieth century.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xhr68m
FOREWORD from:
The Rigor of Things
Author(s) Tracy David
Abstract: It is hardly necessary to introduce Professor Jean-Luc Marion to this audience, since he has become a very important interlocutor in North America for over twenty years. However, the occasion of the English translation of these fascinating interviews is a good time to remind ourselves of some of his accomplishments in philosophy, intellectual history, and, more recently, theology.
5. A Matter of Method from:
The Rigor of Things
Abstract: You have said that one can do history of philosophy without doing philosophy at the same time. In what sense can the history of philosophy itself be “philosophizing”?
Book Title: The Rigor of Things-Conversations with Dan Arbib
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Tracy David
Abstract: The conversation ranges from Marion's engagement with Descartes, to phenomenology and theology, to Marion's intellectual and biographical backgrounds, concluding with illuminating insights on the state of the Catholic Church today and on Judeo-Christian dialogue. Marion also reflects on the relationship of philosophy to history, theology, aesthetics, and literature. At the same time, the book provides an account of French intellectual life in the late twentieth century.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xhr68m
FOREWORD from:
The Rigor of Things
Author(s) Tracy David
Abstract: It is hardly necessary to introduce Professor Jean-Luc Marion to this audience, since he has become a very important interlocutor in North America for over twenty years. However, the occasion of the English translation of these fascinating interviews is a good time to remind ourselves of some of his accomplishments in philosophy, intellectual history, and, more recently, theology.
5. A Matter of Method from:
The Rigor of Things
Abstract: You have said that one can do history of philosophy without doing philosophy at the same time. In what sense can the history of philosophy itself be “philosophizing”?
Book Title: The Rigor of Things-Conversations with Dan Arbib
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Tracy David
Abstract: The conversation ranges from Marion's engagement with Descartes, to phenomenology and theology, to Marion's intellectual and biographical backgrounds, concluding with illuminating insights on the state of the Catholic Church today and on Judeo-Christian dialogue. Marion also reflects on the relationship of philosophy to history, theology, aesthetics, and literature. At the same time, the book provides an account of French intellectual life in the late twentieth century.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xhr68m
FOREWORD from:
The Rigor of Things
Author(s) Tracy David
Abstract: It is hardly necessary to introduce Professor Jean-Luc Marion to this audience, since he has become a very important interlocutor in North America for over twenty years. However, the occasion of the English translation of these fascinating interviews is a good time to remind ourselves of some of his accomplishments in philosophy, intellectual history, and, more recently, theology.
5. A Matter of Method from:
The Rigor of Things
Abstract: You have said that one can do history of philosophy without doing philosophy at the same time. In what sense can the history of philosophy itself be “philosophizing”?
Book Title: The Origin of the Political-Hannah Arendt or Simone Weil?
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Williams Gareth
Abstract: Drawing actively and extensively on Arendt's and Weil's voluminous writings, but also sparring with thinkers from Marx to Heidegger, The Origin of the Political traverses the relation between polemos and polis, between Greece, Rome, God, force, technicity, evil, and the extension of the Christian imperial tradition, while at the same time delineating the conceptual and hermeneutic ground for the development of Esposito's notion and practice of "the impolitical."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xhr6c5
Book Title: Sexual Disorientations-Queer Temporalities, Affects, Theologies
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): MOORE STEPHEN D.
Abstract: Sexual Disorientations brings some of the most recent and significant works of queer theory into conversation with the overlapping fields of biblical, theological and religious studies to explore the deep theological resonances of questions about the social and cultural construction of time, memory, and futurity. Apocalyptic, eschatological and apophatic languages, frameworks, and orientations pervade both queer theorizing and theologizing about time, affect, history and desire. The volume fosters a more explicit engagement between theories of queer temporality and affectivity and religious texts and discourses.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xhr6tw
Introduction. from:
Sexual Disorientations
Author(s) MARCHAL JOSEPH A.
Abstract: It’s about time. This book is principally about time—queer time, to be precise. But it’s also about time that a book on queer theologies tackled queer temporalities, together with queer affects.¹ Like the colloquium out of which it emerged, this volume seeks to engage with certain field-reorienting—and field-disorienting—inflections of queer theory whose origins lie in the midto late 1990s but which have been oddly underremarked even by those in the theological disciplines most invested in all matters queer. The literature by biblical scholars, theologians, and church historians that has been assembled incrementally under the patchwork queer banner
How Soon Is (This Apocalypse) Now? from:
Sexual Disorientations
Author(s) MARCHAL JOSEPH A.
Abstract: These times justify impatience. Is it the end? Or was
thatthe end? Well, when exactly do you mean?¹ Has it already taken too long? If so, in which ways and in what directions have these ends or these pauses turned us, even dragged us? Ultimately, why should those of us who want (at least some) things to change care? One way to address such questions, suchfeelings, about time is to attend to a range of strange temporalities bubbling up out of an ancient letter and more recent missives in queer studies. The downright eschatological mood of late in
Unbinding Imperial Time: from:
Sexual Disorientations
Author(s) HOKE JAMES N.
Abstract: The empire binds time. The idea of time being bound by institutions of power (ancient or modern) to have a normalizing effect, of course, comes from Elizabeth Freeman. She identifies such a binding as chrononormativity, “the use of time to organize individual human bodies toward maximum productivity.”¹ Under a modern capitalist system, for example, a normal “workday” is arranged (including “free” time) in such a way that workers produce more labor, and thus capital, for their employers. Chrononormativity, therefore, produces the most benefit for those at the top of the socioeconomic hierarchy.
Queer Persistence: from:
Sexual Disorientations
Author(s) KOTROSITS MAIA
Abstract: “The one thing we thought we knew for sure about infection with HIV—that it is invariably fatal—has become, in recent years, ever more uncertain,” writes Tim Dean in 2008, in an essay called “Bareback Time.”¹ Noting the changing timeline for HIV (at least for some populations) in the wake of new and very welcome medical treatments, Dean explores the anxiety experienced by some gay men as a result of the uncertainties around HIV positivity: “A sexual life story whose conclusion gay men dreaded but quickly came to know by heart has morphed, without sufficient warning, into a drama
The Madness of Holy Saturday: from:
Sexual Disorientations
Author(s) BRAY KAREN
Abstract: Is there an end to capitalism? As in, “Does capitalism have an end time, an apocalyptic thrust—the apex of which we might be nearing?”
Andas in, “Does capitalism have an end goal, a telos toward which it strives?” Further, what does it mean to live in thetimeof twenty-first-century neoliberalism? As in what are the “signs” (mores, theologies, affects) of our time?Andas in under what constructs of temporality do we labor? Questions of ends, times, and End Times have been at the forefront of contemporary political theologies. For instance, inThe Theology of Money, Philip
In Search of Queer Theology Lost from:
Sexual Disorientations
Author(s) JORDAN MARK D.
Abstract: Foucault declares an interest in how languages applied to sexed bodies mark time while pretending to be timeless.
History of Sexualityis not a history of sex, as you know, but a narrative of the invasive fictions that “explain” bodies in order to manage them from birth to
Afterword from:
Sexual Disorientations
Author(s) FREEMAN ELIZABETH
Abstract: “Time,” the teller asks in this story. “What is time? Some people say that time is in a line, but I wonder what that would look like?” (26). The storyteller pulls a length
Book Title: The Multiplicity of Dreams-Memory, Imagination, and Consciousness
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Hunt Harry T.
Abstract: This book is richly rewarding to both scientists and the general public, for it proposes a pluralistic interpretation of dreams that will be of great interest to experts and at the same time explains in language accessible to nonprofessional readers what we know about dreams-those absorbing creations of our own minds.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xp3sfz
Book Title: The Multiplicity of Dreams-Memory, Imagination, and Consciousness
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Hunt Harry T.
Abstract: This book is richly rewarding to both scientists and the general public, for it proposes a pluralistic interpretation of dreams that will be of great interest to experts and at the same time explains in language accessible to nonprofessional readers what we know about dreams-those absorbing creations of our own minds.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xp3sfz
Book Title: The Multiplicity of Dreams-Memory, Imagination, and Consciousness
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Hunt Harry T.
Abstract: This book is richly rewarding to both scientists and the general public, for it proposes a pluralistic interpretation of dreams that will be of great interest to experts and at the same time explains in language accessible to nonprofessional readers what we know about dreams-those absorbing creations of our own minds.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xp3sfz
Chapter Two The Step Back: from:
Heidegger's Estrangements
Abstract: In Plato’s
Euthyphro(11b-e) Socrates compares words to the statues of Daedalus, which were said to be so lifelike that they had to be restrained like slaves, because they kept trying to escape. Untethered words wander around aimlessly, whence we get our concept of ambiguity or the waywardness of discourse. However, the tying down of one’s words is not easy. In fact, sometimes Socrates makes it sound like the question is all that can be justifiably put into words. For the rest one should keep silent, or speak only in the most guarded fashion, darkly, and then perhaps only of
3 In the Horizon of Necessity: from:
Norms of Rhetorical Culture
Abstract: Most of the time we are unlikely to consider modern political life as supplying us with the materials for an
art. Caricature, perhaps, as in the political cartoon or the made-for-television cartoons we know as docudramas. But the high drama and oracular vision once associated with the grand art of statecraft seem today as far from our experience as hooped skirts and horse-drawn carriages. Perhaps this is as it should be in an age that is suspicious of grand designs. But not so terribly long ago it was otherwise. A patriarchal aesthetic of politics exuded grace, poise, and propriety; it
4 After Rhetorical Culture: from:
Norms of Rhetorical Culture
Abstract: It is a fact that not all stories are told. And if they could all be told, there is no imaginable forum that could encompass all the needs, themes, and moral concerns which deserve expression. Even if, as some of us once thought, the whole world is watching, its attention span seems limited to one thing at a time. This is, in less humble language, the modernist dilemma. It is all too easy to universalize wants, needs, interests, and norms. In a world of unequal chances, such categories exist only as a fragile language of development begging for yet another
5 Universal Pragmatics and Practical Reason: from:
Norms of Rhetorical Culture
Abstract: Proclamations of reason’s eclipse, like many a categorical dismissal, have shown themselves to be a bit hasty. Perhaps the life of practical reason, as a mode of reflection open to the collectivity, may be thought of as a generational phenomenon.¹ In any historical period, there are likely to be cultures in which reason and rhetoric have been poisoned. But it seems premature to pronounce any state of affairs, however extreme, as having eliminated forever the prospects for recovery. In the retrospection of dark times, utopian thought can appear foolish. But some such thought may be necessary if possibilities for reflection
3 In the Horizon of Necessity: from:
Norms of Rhetorical Culture
Abstract: Most of the time we are unlikely to consider modern political life as supplying us with the materials for an
art. Caricature, perhaps, as in the political cartoon or the made-for-television cartoons we know as docudramas. But the high drama and oracular vision once associated with the grand art of statecraft seem today as far from our experience as hooped skirts and horse-drawn carriages. Perhaps this is as it should be in an age that is suspicious of grand designs. But not so terribly long ago it was otherwise. A patriarchal aesthetic of politics exuded grace, poise, and propriety; it
4 After Rhetorical Culture: from:
Norms of Rhetorical Culture
Abstract: It is a fact that not all stories are told. And if they could all be told, there is no imaginable forum that could encompass all the needs, themes, and moral concerns which deserve expression. Even if, as some of us once thought, the whole world is watching, its attention span seems limited to one thing at a time. This is, in less humble language, the modernist dilemma. It is all too easy to universalize wants, needs, interests, and norms. In a world of unequal chances, such categories exist only as a fragile language of development begging for yet another
5 Universal Pragmatics and Practical Reason: from:
Norms of Rhetorical Culture
Abstract: Proclamations of reason’s eclipse, like many a categorical dismissal, have shown themselves to be a bit hasty. Perhaps the life of practical reason, as a mode of reflection open to the collectivity, may be thought of as a generational phenomenon.¹ In any historical period, there are likely to be cultures in which reason and rhetoric have been poisoned. But it seems premature to pronounce any state of affairs, however extreme, as having eliminated forever the prospects for recovery. In the retrospection of dark times, utopian thought can appear foolish. But some such thought may be necessary if possibilities for reflection
Henry Kreisel’s Vienna: from:
Return from Exile - Rückkehr aus dem Exil
Author(s) BESNER NEIL
Abstract: Born in Vienna in 1922, novelist, short-story writer, critic, and scholar Henry Kreisel was forced to flee Vienna with his family after the
Anschlussin 1938. The vital and many-layered significance of that forced departure from Vienna in Kreisel’s writing – as in his life – exerted, both autobiographically and imaginatively, a strong and enduring hold on him. It is a very old cliché, perhaps because over time it has proven truer than a cliché, that no city comes alive in the collective imagination unless and until it has been memorably invoked in narrative art: Defoe’s or Dickens’ London, Mordecai
[5. Introduction] from:
Return from Exile - Rückkehr aus dem Exil
Abstract: The ensuing section on philosophers and psychoanalysts who returned to Austria is opened by two related essays on a key figure among the remigrants, Kurt Rudolf Fischer, whose difficult career illustrates the enormous challenges encountered by refugees who were ready to return and demonstrates at the same time the important contribution they were willing and able to make.
1 Smaller Numbers, Stronger Voices: from:
Vatican II and Beyond
Author(s) MacDonald Heidi
Abstract: In Canada in the 1960s and 1970s, Roman Catholic congregations of women religious (commonly called nuns) suffered a perfect storm. External social forces such as secularism, feminism, consumerism, the sexual revolution, expanding state initiatives in social welfare, and the Cold War seemed to be attacking them from without by questioning their relevance. The Second Vatican Council (1962–65), called in part to address the Church’s response to these forces, initiated a period of profound self-questioning of women religious’ customs, ministries, governance, and even dress. The often divisive congregational debates associated with the Vatican II era were sometimes perceived by women
Conclusion from:
Vatican II and Beyond
Author(s) Smyth Elizabeth M.
Abstract: This book focuses on women congregations’ encounter with modernity during the 1960s, 1970s, and 1980s. These three decades represent an era when social contentions revealed that paradigms no longer held and that new responses to both historical and emerging problems were required. The Western world was entering postmodernity, characterized by its fractured and liquid quality,¹ aptly characterized as an age of fracture, with the construct of woman being profoundly affected. A notion of identity common to all women was quickly problematized to a conception of womanhood that disaggregated along lines of race, gender, and sexuality. At the same time, the
Book Title: The Ambiguous Allure of the West-Traces of the Colonial in Thailand
Publisher: Hong Kong University Press, HKU
Author(s): Chakrabarty Dipesh
Abstract: The book brings studies of modern Thai history and culture into dialogue with debates in comparative intellectual history, Asian cultural studies, and postcolonial studies. It takes Thai Studies in new directions through case studies of the cultural hybridity and ambivalences that have emerged from the manifold interactions between Siam/Thailand and the West from 1850 to the present day. Central aims of The Ambiguous Allure of the West are to critique notions of Thai "uniqueness" or "exceptionalism" and locate Thai Studies in a broader, comparative perspective by arguing that modern Siam/Thailand needs to be understood as a semicolonial society. In contrast to conservative nationalist and royalist accounts of Thai history and culture, which resist comparing the country to its once-colonized Asian neighbours, this book's contributors highlight the value of postcolonial analysis in understanding the complexly ambiguous, interstitial, liminal and hybrid character of Thai/Western cultural interrelationships. At the same time, by pointing to the distinctive position of semicolonial societies in the Western-dominated world order, the chapters in this book make significant contributions to developing the critical theoretical perspectives of international cultural studies. The contributors demonstrate how the disciplines of history, anthropology, political science, film and cultural studies all enhance these contestations in intersecting ways, and across different historical moments. Each of the chapters raises manifold themes and questions regarding the nature of intercultural exchange, interrogated through theoretically critical lenses. This book directs its discussions at those studying not only in the fields of Thai and Southeast Asian studies but also in colonial and postcolonial studies, Asian cultural studies, film studies and comparative critical theory.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xwbmf
Foreword: from:
The Ambiguous Allure of the West
Author(s) Chakrabarty Dipesh
Abstract: For quite some time now, the history of modern Thailand has remained a surprisingly closed book for most students of
modern South Asia. Surprising, because Thai history provides an obvious, and almost text-book, study in contrast to South Asian history of the modern period. Thailand is another and proximate Asian country that has experienced the gravitational pull of Europe over all its questions and agitations to do with becoming “modern”. Yet, unlike India, it was never formally colonized. Thai and Indian nationalisms, while showing some shared tensions over cultural domination by the West, have some significant differences that should engage
4 Mind the Gap: from:
The Ambiguous Allure of the West
Author(s) Harrison Rachel V.
Abstract: Fortuitously, perhaps, the injurious effects of “Paris Syndrome” have not been widely reported among the surge of Thai visitors that has graced the French capital in recent years. Nevertheless, the psychological intensity of “culture shock” to which “Paris Syndrome” speaks provides a timely lens through which to observe Siamese/Thai forays into the West, both past and present. This chapter opens with an examination of travellers’ tales through the ages, from the accounts of the first Siamese diplomatic missions to Europe in the seventeenth century, to the novels inspired by visits to the West by Thailand’s twentieth-century novelists. Drawing associations between
Afterword: from:
The Ambiguous Allure of the West
Author(s) Jackson Peter A.
Abstract: While Siamese/Thai culture, both historically and today, is widely recognized, at times even eulogized, for its pervasive syncretism, theories of cultural hybridity have rarely been used to analyse the patterns of cultural borrowing and fusion in the country. This is largely because accounts of cultural hybridity have emerged from and remain closely identified with postcolonial studies. As Marwan Kraidy notes, “Standing on the shoulders of the disciplines that debated syncretism,
mestizaje, and creolization, postcolonial theory repopularized the term ‘hybridity’ to explicate cultural fusion” (Kraidy 2005, 57). As I noted in my earlier chapter, Siam/Thailand’s lack of a colonial history means
Introduction from:
Liturgical Theology after Schmemann
Abstract: Several years ago, Pantelis Kalaitzidis issued a clarion call to fellow Orthodox theologians to renew their dialogue with con temporary philosophy, lamenting that such an enterprise has in recent times been commonly held in disfavor in the Christian East—a perhaps unintended result, he suggests, of the twentieth-century “neo-patristic synthesis” promoted by the renowned Georges Florovsky (1893–1979). In “From the ‘Return to the Fathers’ to the Need for a Modern Orthodox Theology” Kalaitzidis cites approvingly the following exhortation of Alexander Schmemann (1921–83):
Introduction from:
Liturgical Theology after Schmemann
Abstract: Several years ago, Pantelis Kalaitzidis issued a clarion call to fellow Orthodox theologians to renew their dialogue with con temporary philosophy, lamenting that such an enterprise has in recent times been commonly held in disfavor in the Christian East—a perhaps unintended result, he suggests, of the twentieth-century “neo-patristic synthesis” promoted by the renowned Georges Florovsky (1893–1979). In “From the ‘Return to the Fathers’ to the Need for a Modern Orthodox Theology” Kalaitzidis cites approvingly the following exhortation of Alexander Schmemann (1921–83):
Introduction from:
Liturgical Theology after Schmemann
Abstract: Several years ago, Pantelis Kalaitzidis issued a clarion call to fellow Orthodox theologians to renew their dialogue with con temporary philosophy, lamenting that such an enterprise has in recent times been commonly held in disfavor in the Christian East—a perhaps unintended result, he suggests, of the twentieth-century “neo-patristic synthesis” promoted by the renowned Georges Florovsky (1893–1979). In “From the ‘Return to the Fathers’ to the Need for a Modern Orthodox Theology” Kalaitzidis cites approvingly the following exhortation of Alexander Schmemann (1921–83):
Introduction from:
Liturgical Theology after Schmemann
Abstract: Several years ago, Pantelis Kalaitzidis issued a clarion call to fellow Orthodox theologians to renew their dialogue with con temporary philosophy, lamenting that such an enterprise has in recent times been commonly held in disfavor in the Christian East—a perhaps unintended result, he suggests, of the twentieth-century “neo-patristic synthesis” promoted by the renowned Georges Florovsky (1893–1979). In “From the ‘Return to the Fathers’ to the Need for a Modern Orthodox Theology” Kalaitzidis cites approvingly the following exhortation of Alexander Schmemann (1921–83):
Introduction from:
Liturgical Theology after Schmemann
Abstract: Several years ago, Pantelis Kalaitzidis issued a clarion call to fellow Orthodox theologians to renew their dialogue with con temporary philosophy, lamenting that such an enterprise has in recent times been commonly held in disfavor in the Christian East—a perhaps unintended result, he suggests, of the twentieth-century “neo-patristic synthesis” promoted by the renowned Georges Florovsky (1893–1979). In “From the ‘Return to the Fathers’ to the Need for a Modern Orthodox Theology” Kalaitzidis cites approvingly the following exhortation of Alexander Schmemann (1921–83):
Interchapter 1: from:
Points of Departure
Abstract: Many researchers in writing studies resist quantitative research because they feel unprepared in statistical methods or lack the time required to learn and then conduct such research. This worry is hardly new, though. It has been repeatedly articulated by those struggling to develop research methods since the earliest days of our national conferences and journals (see Serviss, introduction to this collection). Members of our discipline, particularly WPAs, often employ qualitative or quantitative research, or a combination of the two, in response to local institutional need, but when those local questions are answered, they move on to the next issue. Sometimes
5 L’INFORMATION ET LES OUTILS POUR LA RECHERCHE AUPRÈS DES FONDATIONS SUBVENTIONNAIRES CANADIENNES from:
Les fondations philanthropiques:de nouveaux acteurs politiques?
Author(s) Brouard François
Abstract: La culture philanthropique présente plusieurs visages qui, selon les expressions qu’ils arborent, influencent la société québécoise et canadienne (Institut Mallet, 2014). Cette culture est ainsi le véhicule de certaines façons de faire le bénévolat, de s’engager dans une cause sociale ou de consentir des dons financiers. Cette influence, et les pratiques qu’elles entraînent, soulève des enjeux. Celui des ressources consacrées par nos gouvernements par le système fiscal et par des partenariats privilégiant et orientant certaines actions gouvernementales est particulièrement préoccupant. On estime, par exemple, que les dépenses fiscales fédérales se situent pour 2013 à 2 530 millions de dollars pour
10 UNE MOBILISATION IMPROBABLE: from:
Les fondations philanthropiques:de nouveaux acteurs politiques?
Author(s) Lefèvre Sylvain
Abstract: Comme l’indiquent Peter Elson et Sara Hall dans le chapitre suivant, les fondations peuvent s’engager de différentes manières dans le débat public, c’estàdire à des stades différents de la genèse et de la mise en oeuvre d’une politique publique mais également selon des registres distincts : produire de la recherche, engager sa réputation, bâtir des coalitions, etc. Néanmoins, un certain nombre de contraintes, liées tant à des cadres légaux sur la distinction entre bienfaisance et politique qu’à l’institutionnalisation d’une vision particulière du rôle légitime des fondations, les tiennent le plus souvent loin de la scène politique. La position de surplomb
Introduction: from:
Whitman & Dickinson
Author(s) MILLER CRISTANNE
Abstract: In 2015 it had been 150 years since both walt whitman and Emily Dickinson had produced the better part of their poetic output. This collection of essays stems from a “colloquy” that brought scholars together to discuss these poets explicitly in relation to each other for the first time in all those 150 years. As any bibliographical search will confirm, Whitman and Dickinson have frequently inspired fruitful and exciting scholarship when analyzed comparatively—as they have been in several essays, especially from the 1960s on. Naturally, they also have figured alongside each other in nineteenth-century U.S. literature survey courses around
“Sickly Abstractions” and the Poetic Concrete: from:
Whitman & Dickinson
Author(s) ROUDEAU CÉCILE
Abstract: What good are poets in a time of crisis? more than 150 years after the conflict’s ending, Hölderlin’s query continues to haunt the battlefields of the U.S. Civil War.² While Walt Whitman visited the wounded in the hospitals of Washington and stained his notebooks with more than blood, Emily Dickinson saw her life unexpectedly enmeshed in the ongoing bloodshed, and “s[ang] off charnel steps” (
L298) as the death tolls of the battlegrounds repeatedly reached the gates of her Amherst family home. “War feels to me an oblique place,” she wrote in February 1863 to Thomas Wentworth Higginson (L280).
“No Man Saw Awe” / “In the Talk of … God … He Is Silent”: from:
Whitman & Dickinson
Author(s) LEADER JENNIFER
Abstract: One might imagine that for all her admiration of ralph Waldo Emerson, Emily Dickinson would secretly have agreed with Walt Whitman’s sideswipe at that oracle on the occasion of Emerson’s birthday; in an 1880 essay in the
Boston Literary World, Whitman wrote: “At times it has been doubtful to me if Emerson really knows or feels what Poetry is at its highest, as in the Bible, for instance, or Homer or Shakspere…. Ofpowerhe seems to have a gentleman’s admiration—but in his inmost heart the grandest attribute of God and Poets is always subordinate to the octaves, conceits,
Whitman, Dickinson, and Their Legacy of Lists and “It”s from:
Whitman & Dickinson
Author(s) DUSSOL VINCENT
Abstract: Indirection—Dickinson’s “Angled Road” (Fr 899)—sometimes works best: a fragment in French author Georges Perros’s
Papiers collés IIsuggests the special relationship that seems to link lists to indefinites in Walt Whitman’s and Emily Dickinson’s poetry:
Book Title: The Spirit of God-Short Writings on the Holy Spirit
Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Author(s): Clifford Catherine E.
Abstract: Yves Congar was the most significant voice in Catholic pneumatology in the twentieth century. This new collection of short pieces makes his thought accessible to a broad range of readers - scholars, teachers, ecumenists and laity - and thus helps to ensure that an important theological voice, one that influenced many of the documents of the Second Vatican Council, continues to be heard.
The Spirit of Godbrings together for the first time eight of Yves Congar's previously untranslated writings on the Holy Spirit composed after Vatican II (from 1969 to 1985). Two of these selections offer general overviews of Congar's pneumatology, a pneumatology based upon Scripture and the Tradition of the Church, but articulated in conversation with philosophers, ecumenical partners and non-believers. Other articles make clear the historical context of Vatican II's pneumatology and the Holy Spirit's crucial influence upon the unfolding of history and upon the moral life, the efficacy of the sacraments and, especially, upon ecclesial life.The writings inThe Spirit of Godhave been translated and edited by a team of scholars familiar with the work of the French Dominican theologian. An introduction situates each of the writings historically and highlights its theological significance. A bibliography lists Congar's publications on the Holy Spirit, the major articles and books written about his pneumatology, and the major scholarly resources to which Congar made reference in the notes that accompanied these writings. An index of biblical references and of personal names is also included.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1zqrmtj
1 Evidence of the “Holy Spirit” in the Past and Today from:
The Spirit of God
Abstract: In the Christian branch of religion, itself an off shoot of Judaism, a claim pervades all times and places. Its unanimity is impressive, considering the diversity of sources from which it comes. The claim is this: God is present and active in our lives by a non-coercive Power that we call the Holy Spirit. The following examples, chosen from among the hundreds available, attest to this.
3 The Spirit Is the Source of Life in Us Personally and in the Church from:
The Spirit of God
Abstract: Having recalled the fact of an uncritical but constant claim that the Spirit
of Godis at work in us and in the world, I have highlighted the main difficulties to which this claim gives rise. This sequence is well known to believers: after a time of peaceful possession of the faith, they become aware of challenges to it. If not doubt, at least an ongoing questioning—what St. Thomas called thecogitatio—is a part of the faith. It is the passport into what Paul Ricoeur calls the second naiveté,¹ which is more or less the state of a
4 A Theology of the Third Person from:
The Spirit of God
Abstract: A theology of the Holy Spirit and, in more general terms, a theology of Christ and of the tri-unity of God, took a long time to develop. There was no model to follow. The chapter was blank and yet, in a sense, its contents were already determined. Antiquity knew a broad diff usion of Stoicism, so widespread that it touched the class of ordinary people and even the world of slaves. And Stoicism envisaged a divine Breath animating the world but saw it as an element of this world itself. It tended to see the Word or Wisdom of God,
ARTICLE 2 The Holy Spirit in the Thomistic Theology of Moral Action from:
The Spirit of God
Abstract: I will first present the Holy Spirit’s role in moral action according to St. Thomas, relying primarily on the thorough treatment in the
Summa. I will then ask what these views can contribute to [the resolution of] certain problems of our own time in this field.
Moral-Philosophical Subtext in Pushkin’s The Stone Guest from:
Close Encounters
Abstract: “The beginning is always decisive,” German novelist Theodor Fontane observed well over a hundred years ago. “If one hits it off right, then what follows succeeds through a kind of inner necessity.”² One may add that that necessity sometimes carries with it a hint of the inner content of the work. That is eminently the case with the beginning of The Stone Guest (
Kamennyi gost’, 1830) where Pushkin projects a major concern of his play: the question of Don Juan’s identity.
Turgenev’s “Knock… Knock… Knock!..”: from:
Close Encounters
Abstract: As we know, even such an appreciative critic of Ivan Turgenev’s writings as Pavel V. Annenkov (1813–1887) placed the Russian writer’s “Knock… Knock… Knock!.. A Study” (
Stuk….. stuk…. Stuk...! Studiia,1871) among his “weak pieces.”² On the contrary, “Knock… Knock… Knock!..” belongs to the strongest works of Turgenev and of Russian literature. Complex in its design and brilliant in artistic execution, it is a work of psychological and philosophical depth.³ Turgenev several times stressed the importance of his story, though not without his usual admixture of apology and self-deprecation where his works were concerned. Although he found it “a
Chance and Design: from:
Close Encounters
Abstract: In chapter 18, part 1 of
Anna Karenina, some seventy pages from the beginning of the novel, Tolstoy introduces Anna to the reader for the first time in person. The scene is a Moscow railroad station. Stepan Oblonsky is there to meet his sister Anna who is arriving from St. Petersburg; Vronsky, to meet his mother who is arriving on the same train. All four meet, exchange amenities, and prepare to leave the station; momentarily, a disturbing incident draws their attention: a railroad guard has been crushed by one of the cars. After a brief delay (Vronsky leaves some money
“What Time Is It? Where Are We Going?” Chekhov’s The Cherry Orchard: from:
Close Encounters
Abstract: “The train has arrived,” “They’re coming!” “They’re coming!” “They’re coming!” “Let’s go and meet them,” “Come through here . . . the nursery!” “Time is marching on!” “Sleep well. There’s a way out. The railroad passed nearby.” “Go to sleep,” “I’m going, I’m going,” “Let’s go to bed . . . Let’s go.”(Act 1) “Our’s [our children] are coming,” “Epikhodov is coming,” “Somebody is coming,” “Can I go through here directly to the station?” “Let’s go, everybody, it’s time for supper,” “To avoid [literally, “go around,” or “bypass”] everything petty and illusory that interferes with being free and happy, that’s
Book Title: The Superstitious Muse-Thinking Russian Literature Mythopoetically
Publisher: Academic Studies Press
Author(s): Bethea David M.
Abstract: For several decades David Bethea has written authoritatively on the “mythopoetic thinking" that lies at the heart of classical Russian literature, especially Russian poetry. His theoretically informed essays and books have made a point of turning back to issues of intentionality and biography at a time when authorial agency seems under threat of “erasure" and the question of how writers, and poets in particular, live their lives through their art is increasingly moot. The lichnost’ (personhood, psychic totality) of the given writer is all-important, argues Bethea, as it is that which combines the specifically biographical and the capaciously mythical in verbal units that speak simultaneously to different planes of being. Pushkin’s Evgeny can be one incarnation of the poet himself and an Everyman rising up to challenge Peter’s new world order; Brodsky can be, all at once, Dante and Mandelstam and himself, the exile paying an Orphic visit to Florence (and, by ghostly association, Leningrad).This sort of metempsychosis, where the stories that constitute the Ur-texts of Russian literature are constantly reworked in the biographical myths shaping individual writers’ lives, is Bethea’s primary focus. This collection contains a liberal sampling of Bethea’s most memorable previously published essays along with new studies prepared for this occasion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1zxsj7q
Chapter 2 Mythopoesis Writ Large: from:
The Superstitious Muse
Abstract: Humankind has always lived in time, but it has not always lived in history. Archaeologists and anthropologists provide countless examples of societies, “ancient” in time or “primitive” in development, where time was experi enced mythically rather than historically, where only those details of life that fit into and recapitulated the master plot of a sacred tale were worthy of remembrance.² The British social anthropologist Bronislaw Malinowski defined myth as
Chapter 4 The Evolution of Evolution: from:
The Superstitious Muse
Abstract: Many of us know this famous passage from The Gift. Quite aside from its stylistic fireworks it has served as exhibit #1 in the ongoing debate about where Nabokov comes down on the issue of intelligent design (ID) and evolutionary theory. Depending on one’s epistemological point of departure, readers have tried now for some time to “get at” VN’s strategy for mixing and matching scientific and artistic observation. According to this strategy the artist must be able to observe and name the phenomenal world like the naturalist, the naturalist must be able to integrate different planes of reality like the
Chapter 13 Pushkin’s The History of Pugachev: from:
The Superstitious Muse
Abstract: The History of Pugachevis, conceptually speaking, one of the most fascinating works in Pushkin’s oeuvre. At the same time it is, belletristically if not historiographically, pretty much a flop, a point which has been made more than once over the past two centuries, most persuasively in recent decades by Marc Raeff.² Yet Pushkin was clearly up to something important here, in 1833–34, as he gained access to government archives and gathered materials, visited the sites of the 1773–74 rebellion in the Orenburgguberniya, took down eyewitness accounts, and drafted his history, a history which was intended to
Chapter 15 Nabokov’s Style from:
The Superstitious Muse
Abstract: For a prodigiously gifted
homo scribenssuch as Vladimir Nabokov, there is nothing more precious or distinctive about his constructed persona than his style. Indeed, the written trace is, to a degree potentially disturbing to some readers, that aspect of personhood Nabokov most valued. It was whatremained behind,always under his control, to be wielded with consummate elegance and grace even as the enemy, time itself, took from him his homeland, his loved ones, and eventually his own life. “Summersoomerki—the lovely Russian word for dusk. Time: a dim point in the first decade of this unpopular century.
Chapter 20 Brodsky, Frost, and the Pygmalion Myth from:
The Superstitious Muse
Abstract: Central to any understanding of Joseph Brodsky as poet and thinker is his myth of language, his belief in words, and not just any words but specifically poetic words, ability to restructure time and to outwit states, tyrants, history itself. “Prosody is simply a repository of time within language,”² writes Brodsky in a statement repeated many times over in different guises and contexts. Poetic words, by their very nature, got there, and are always still getting there, first. Indeed, what makes this idea a myth in the first place, that is, something larger than the life it explains, is these
Introduction from:
The Translator’s Doubts
Abstract: This book singles out translation as a way of talking about literary history and theory, philosophy, and interpretation. Vladimir Nabokov is its case study. The advantage of making Nabokov a case study for an investigation of questions of translation is obvious. It is hard to separate Vladimir Nabokov from the act of translation, in all senses of the word—ranging from “moving across” geographical borders and cultural and linguistic boundaries to the transposing of the split between “here” and “there” and “then” and “now” (the essential elements of exile, components of every émigré experience) onto a metaphysical plane sometimes suggested
Book Title: Reasoning from Faith-Fundamental Theology in Merold Westphal’s Philosophy of Religion
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): SANDS JUSTIN
Abstract: Merold Westphal is considered to be one of the preeminent Continental philosophers of religion. His articulation of faith as the task of a lifetime has become a touchstone in contemporary debates concerning faith's relationship to reason. As Justin Sands explores his philosophy, he illuminates how Westphal's concept of faith reveals the pastoral, theological intent behind his thinking. Sands sees Westphal's philosophy as a powerful articulation of Protestant theology, but one that is in ecumenical dialogue with questions concerning apologetics and faith's relationship to ethics and responsibility, a more Catholic point of view. By bringing out these features in Westphal's philosophy, Sands intends to find core philosophical methodologies as well as a passable bridge for philosophers to cross over into theological discourses.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1zxxz58
7. INTERMEDIARY CONCLUSIONS: from:
Reasoning from Faith
Abstract: My attempt thus far has been to craft Westphal’s intellectual narrative, and what I have found is that Westphal’s narrative is heavily theological. In fact, Westphal is so theological that I argue he is best read within this discourse, which is perhaps his proper home. The previous chapters have focused on how Westphal shapes his thinking and how it tacitly develops into a theology that appropriates philosophical reasoning to minister and guide the life of faith. Furthermore, his articulation of faith as a task of a lifetime, which compels the believing soul to continually enact the love commandment, has convinced
8. RADICAL ESCHATOLOGY from:
Reasoning from Faith
Abstract: It is impossible to speak of Merold Westphal’s academic contributions without including the lengthy (and lifelong) debates he has held with John Caputo. Truly, the debates between Westphal and Caputo (also frequently involving Richard Kearney) have dominated Continental philosophy of religion in North America for quite some time, and stories of their witty jousting at conferences and symposia are familiar to many. One such account has been transcribed in
Modernity and Its Discontents, where Westphal and Caputo, along with James Marsh, hold a roundtable discussion exploring topics ranging from the issue of transcendence in postmodern thought to what counts as
Book Title: Reasoning from Faith-Fundamental Theology in Merold Westphal’s Philosophy of Religion
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): SANDS JUSTIN
Abstract: Merold Westphal is considered to be one of the preeminent Continental philosophers of religion. His articulation of faith as the task of a lifetime has become a touchstone in contemporary debates concerning faith's relationship to reason. As Justin Sands explores his philosophy, he illuminates how Westphal's concept of faith reveals the pastoral, theological intent behind his thinking. Sands sees Westphal's philosophy as a powerful articulation of Protestant theology, but one that is in ecumenical dialogue with questions concerning apologetics and faith's relationship to ethics and responsibility, a more Catholic point of view. By bringing out these features in Westphal's philosophy, Sands intends to find core philosophical methodologies as well as a passable bridge for philosophers to cross over into theological discourses.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1zxxz58
7. INTERMEDIARY CONCLUSIONS: from:
Reasoning from Faith
Abstract: My attempt thus far has been to craft Westphal’s intellectual narrative, and what I have found is that Westphal’s narrative is heavily theological. In fact, Westphal is so theological that I argue he is best read within this discourse, which is perhaps his proper home. The previous chapters have focused on how Westphal shapes his thinking and how it tacitly develops into a theology that appropriates philosophical reasoning to minister and guide the life of faith. Furthermore, his articulation of faith as a task of a lifetime, which compels the believing soul to continually enact the love commandment, has convinced
8. RADICAL ESCHATOLOGY from:
Reasoning from Faith
Abstract: It is impossible to speak of Merold Westphal’s academic contributions without including the lengthy (and lifelong) debates he has held with John Caputo. Truly, the debates between Westphal and Caputo (also frequently involving Richard Kearney) have dominated Continental philosophy of religion in North America for quite some time, and stories of their witty jousting at conferences and symposia are familiar to many. One such account has been transcribed in
Modernity and Its Discontents, where Westphal and Caputo, along with James Marsh, hold a roundtable discussion exploring topics ranging from the issue of transcendence in postmodern thought to what counts as
Book Title: Reasoning from Faith-Fundamental Theology in Merold Westphal’s Philosophy of Religion
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): SANDS JUSTIN
Abstract: Merold Westphal is considered to be one of the preeminent Continental philosophers of religion. His articulation of faith as the task of a lifetime has become a touchstone in contemporary debates concerning faith's relationship to reason. As Justin Sands explores his philosophy, he illuminates how Westphal's concept of faith reveals the pastoral, theological intent behind his thinking. Sands sees Westphal's philosophy as a powerful articulation of Protestant theology, but one that is in ecumenical dialogue with questions concerning apologetics and faith's relationship to ethics and responsibility, a more Catholic point of view. By bringing out these features in Westphal's philosophy, Sands intends to find core philosophical methodologies as well as a passable bridge for philosophers to cross over into theological discourses.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1zxxz58
7. INTERMEDIARY CONCLUSIONS: from:
Reasoning from Faith
Abstract: My attempt thus far has been to craft Westphal’s intellectual narrative, and what I have found is that Westphal’s narrative is heavily theological. In fact, Westphal is so theological that I argue he is best read within this discourse, which is perhaps his proper home. The previous chapters have focused on how Westphal shapes his thinking and how it tacitly develops into a theology that appropriates philosophical reasoning to minister and guide the life of faith. Furthermore, his articulation of faith as a task of a lifetime, which compels the believing soul to continually enact the love commandment, has convinced
8. RADICAL ESCHATOLOGY from:
Reasoning from Faith
Abstract: It is impossible to speak of Merold Westphal’s academic contributions without including the lengthy (and lifelong) debates he has held with John Caputo. Truly, the debates between Westphal and Caputo (also frequently involving Richard Kearney) have dominated Continental philosophy of religion in North America for quite some time, and stories of their witty jousting at conferences and symposia are familiar to many. One such account has been transcribed in
Modernity and Its Discontents, where Westphal and Caputo, along with James Marsh, hold a roundtable discussion exploring topics ranging from the issue of transcendence in postmodern thought to what counts as
3 THE ARCHITECTURE OF MOVEMENT: from:
The Cinema of the Soviet Thaw
Abstract: There is a surprising correspondence in the opening seconds of two very different films: Georgii Danelia’s
I Walk the Streets of Moscow, a Soviet production from 1964 that is relatively unknown to international audiences, and Jacques Tati’sPlaytime, a widely discussed French masterpiece from 1967. The Soviet film begins at a Moscow airport, with a young woman dancing and humming as she moves along a glass-curtain exterior wall (figure 3.1). The French film, set in Paris, begins with two nuns walking first on the outside of and then on the interior side of a glass terminal façade, eventually disappearing around
5 THE OBDURATE MATTER OF SPACE: from:
The Cinema of the Soviet Thaw
Abstract: The interior environment that Kira Muratova creates in
Brief Encounters, her first independently made film, is strange, to say the least. Overflowing with objects and textures of all kinds—heavily ornamented furniture, kitchenware, bookshelves, wallpaper, curtains, sculptural reliefs, pictures, and much more—her environments monopolize our attention, drawing us away from the people who inhabit and have shaped them. Sometimes these objects appear next to a human figure, doubling the focal point of the image; at other times they alone are presented in prolonged, nearly immobile shots reminiscent of still-life compositions. We can observe this, for instance, in the opening
2 Atemporality in Narrative and Music from:
Sonata Fragments
Abstract: This chapter sets out to construct a theory of structure and expressive meaning in the nineteenth-century Romantic sonata, within the view of Romanticism articulated in chapter 1.¹ The theory will focus particularly on the problematized moments of formal and expressive ambiguity characteristic of that genre. I first consider what we might mean by
narrativeornarrative formsin music, continue by examining issues related to time and temporality within those narrative forms, and finish by proposing ways that some of these (mainly literary) concepts might map onto music.
1 Evil, Terrorism, and Gender from:
Feminist Philosophy and the Problem of Evil
Author(s) Schott Robin May
Abstract: If anyone should think that evil is a problem of the past and not of the present, a glance at the history of the twentieth century proves otherwise. In that century, the atrocities of war escalated dramatically; between 1900 and 1990, there were over four times as many war deaths as in the preceding four hundred years. In 1990 battlefields included Afghanistan, Angola, Colombia, El Salvador, Ethiopia, Guatemala, India, Kuwait, Lebanon, Liberia, Mozambique, Peru, Somalia, South Africa, Sri Lanka, Sudan, and Tibet (Vickers 1993, 2). To these one must add the battles of the Gulf War and the genocides in
7 February 22, 2001: from:
Feminist Philosophy and the Problem of Evil
Author(s) Bergoffen Debra
Abstract: On February 22, Marlise Simons of the
New York Timesreported that the United Nations International Criminal Tribunal for the former Yugoslavia (ICTY) found three Bosnian soldiers guilty of crimes against humanity. Their offense? Rape. The court’s ruling opens a new chapter in international law. In Simons’s words: “In its first trial dealing exclusively with sexual violence, the United Nations war crimes tribunal today found three former Bosnian Serb soldiers guilty of raping and torturing Muslim women and girls. It also convicted two of the three men of enslaving their captives, the first time that an international tribunal has prosecuted
15 Terrorism and Democracy: from:
Feminist Philosophy and the Problem of Evil
Author(s) Giles Jana María
Abstract: At the same time that this essay was beginning to take form, four bombs exploded in London, sowing seeds not only of terror and panic but also of mistrust and rancor. For Britain, it was a new attack, but the wounds and cries, the desperation and faces of horror, the anxiety of waiting in hospitals, as well as the official discourse of condemnation are all too familiar. Certainly, the British government appears to have been quite prudent in measuring out images and scenes of panic and pain. One has only to note the difference between two images publicizing the attack
17 The Evils of the September Attacks from:
Feminist Philosophy and the Problem of Evil
Author(s) Ruddick Sara
Abstract: The attacks of September 11, 2001, caused, and could be expected to cause, pain, injury, and death; terror and grief. The victims of the attack had no distinct relation to the attackers; no grounds for predicting attack; no means of protecting themselves or others; no time for leaving, mourning, or celebrating their lives and loves. These attacks were undeniably terrible. Were they also evil?
1 Evil, Terrorism, and Gender from:
Feminist Philosophy and the Problem of Evil
Author(s) Schott Robin May
Abstract: If anyone should think that evil is a problem of the past and not of the present, a glance at the history of the twentieth century proves otherwise. In that century, the atrocities of war escalated dramatically; between 1900 and 1990, there were over four times as many war deaths as in the preceding four hundred years. In 1990 battlefields included Afghanistan, Angola, Colombia, El Salvador, Ethiopia, Guatemala, India, Kuwait, Lebanon, Liberia, Mozambique, Peru, Somalia, South Africa, Sri Lanka, Sudan, and Tibet (Vickers 1993, 2). To these one must add the battles of the Gulf War and the genocides in
7 February 22, 2001: from:
Feminist Philosophy and the Problem of Evil
Author(s) Bergoffen Debra
Abstract: On February 22, Marlise Simons of the
New York Timesreported that the United Nations International Criminal Tribunal for the former Yugoslavia (ICTY) found three Bosnian soldiers guilty of crimes against humanity. Their offense? Rape. The court’s ruling opens a new chapter in international law. In Simons’s words: “In its first trial dealing exclusively with sexual violence, the United Nations war crimes tribunal today found three former Bosnian Serb soldiers guilty of raping and torturing Muslim women and girls. It also convicted two of the three men of enslaving their captives, the first time that an international tribunal has prosecuted
15 Terrorism and Democracy: from:
Feminist Philosophy and the Problem of Evil
Author(s) Giles Jana María
Abstract: At the same time that this essay was beginning to take form, four bombs exploded in London, sowing seeds not only of terror and panic but also of mistrust and rancor. For Britain, it was a new attack, but the wounds and cries, the desperation and faces of horror, the anxiety of waiting in hospitals, as well as the official discourse of condemnation are all too familiar. Certainly, the British government appears to have been quite prudent in measuring out images and scenes of panic and pain. One has only to note the difference between two images publicizing the attack
17 The Evils of the September Attacks from:
Feminist Philosophy and the Problem of Evil
Author(s) Ruddick Sara
Abstract: The attacks of September 11, 2001, caused, and could be expected to cause, pain, injury, and death; terror and grief. The victims of the attack had no distinct relation to the attackers; no grounds for predicting attack; no means of protecting themselves or others; no time for leaving, mourning, or celebrating their lives and loves. These attacks were undeniably terrible. Were they also evil?
Book Title: Reading Eco-An Anthology
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Capozzi Rocco
Abstract: [READING ECO is a timely indication] of the fruitfulness of perceiving Eco as the same in his metamorphoses. [It also testifies] to a certain price that Eco and his readers must/may pay for the enormous pleasure and intellectual stimulus of being Eco and being with Eco." -The Comparatist
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1zxz0xk
Foreword from:
Reading Eco
Author(s) Sebeok Thomas A.
Abstract: At the peak of Summer in 1981, I land in Rome from overseas. For the first time, I glimpse
Il nome della rosa, by my long-time friend and semiotic comrade-in-arms, Umberto Eco, published a few months earlier, displayed wherever books are sold. I buy a copy–“Naturalmente, un manoscritto”–prove the resonance of its Old Testament beginnings, then continue browsing at my hotel, wide-eyed from jet lag, late into the night. I finish reading the novel during sleepless times to follow in the course of a dozen train-rides up and down Italy and nights in hotels, until I reach “stat
2.6 Eco, Peirce, and the Necessity of Interpretation from:
Reading Eco
Author(s) Tejera Victorino
Abstract: At a time when the lines between literary theory, literary criticism, and literature have been deliberately blurred by so many critics and theorists–it is good to have a book on the problems of contemporary text theory from the learned littérateur and semeiotician Umberto Eco¹. The essays that make up his book, he tells us, “study … the dialectics between the rights of texts and the rights of their interpreters;” they also seek to “stress the limits of the act of interpretation.” He finds that, having “advocated an active role of the interpreter in the reading of texts … with
3.8 “Whose ‘Excess of Wonder’ Is It Anyway?: from:
Reading Eco
Author(s) Bouchard Norma
Abstract: To the reader unacquainted with Eco’s work,¹
The Island of the Day Beforeis likely to be read as an historical-cum romance novel relating the adventures of a seventeenth-century man–Roberto de La Griva–reconstructed by an anonymous narrator from his letters and unfinished novel. Following an arrest in Paris, Roberto is offered a chance for freedom by the Cardinal Mazarin if he agrees to go on a mission to uncover the British attempt to find the “punto fijo;” the fixed point to measure the longitudes which was sought by European navigators till Harrison’s invention of the maritime chronometer. Roberto
Book Title: Trauma in First Person-Diary Writing during the Holocaust
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): GREENBERG AVNER
Abstract: What are the effects of radical oppression on the human psyche? What happens to the inner self of the powerless and traumatized victim, especially during times of widespread horror? In this bold and deeply penetrating book, Amos Goldberg addresses diary writing by Jews under Nazi persecution. Throughout Europe, in towns, villages, ghettos, forests, hideouts, concentration and labor camps, and even in extermination camps, Jews of all ages and of all cultural backgrounds described in writing what befell them. Goldberg claims that diary and memoir writing was perhaps the most important literary genre for Jews during World War II. Goldberg considers the act of writing in radical situations as he looks at diaries from little-known victims as well as from brilliant diarists such as Chaim Kaplan and Victor Klemperer. Goldberg contends that only against the background of powerlessness and inner destruction can Jewish responses and resistance during the Holocaust gain their proper meaning.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1zxz15p
1 HOLOCAUST DIARIES: from:
Trauma in First Person
Abstract: Humans are storytelling creatures. We tell stories throughout our lives—about ourselves, our families, our communities, our past, and our future. Some stories we tell aloud to others and some we tell to ourselves, within the confines of our own consciousness. Through the stories we tell about ourselves, we constitute our identities because it is through our stories that we organize the events of our lives—disparate in time and place—into a coherent form. For example, stories allow us to create a causal relationship between different events, or to make certain events central and others secondary. The story is
4 THE LIFE STORY OF VICTOR KLEMPERER from:
Trauma in First Person
Abstract: Part II is dedicated to the reading of the diaries kept by Victor Klemperer in Dresden during the Nazi years focusing on the temporal experience, as reflected during the course of the protracted traumatic event. As we shall see, the autobiographical structure of time that underlies these diaries underwent a fundamental disruption but was reorganized in a very different way in the context of documentary writing. In order to understand the disruptions in Victor Klemperer’s life story during the Nazi period, and the way in which the story took shape in his diaries, we must first devote a few words
7 CHAIM KAPLAN AND HIS DIARY from:
Trauma in First Person
Abstract: Part III focuses on the war time diary of the Warsaw Jew Chaim Aron Kaplan. Kaplan’s diary, written in Hebrew, covers the period from the Nazi invasion of Poland on 1 September 1939, when Kaplan was age fifty-nine, until 4 August 1942, a few days before he was deported to Treblinka. The following chapters discuss the complex relations that the diary reveals between the writer, a Jewish victim; Nazism; and the Nazis, his persecutors (in other words, between the Jewish “I” and the Nazi “Other”).¹ Kaplan’s war diary was a continuation of the diary that he had begun keeping in
8 THE JEWS AND NAZI “LAW” from:
Trauma in First Person
Abstract: On 8 January 1940, Chaim Kaplan asserted in his diary: “Nazism cancelled all law and justice; in particular, with regard to the Jews who have been excluded from all legal jurisdiction. . . . When one born of a ‘low race’ is brought before Nazi justice, he is judged not on the basis of the law that applies to every one, but on the basis of ‘judicial sentiment.’”¹ This notion is anything but unusual in the diary. Unlike most other Warsaw Jewish diarists, Kaplan was obsessed with understanding the Nazis and Nazism. He was haunted and preoccupied by their evil
Book Title: Trauma in First Person-Diary Writing during the Holocaust
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): GREENBERG AVNER
Abstract: What are the effects of radical oppression on the human psyche? What happens to the inner self of the powerless and traumatized victim, especially during times of widespread horror? In this bold and deeply penetrating book, Amos Goldberg addresses diary writing by Jews under Nazi persecution. Throughout Europe, in towns, villages, ghettos, forests, hideouts, concentration and labor camps, and even in extermination camps, Jews of all ages and of all cultural backgrounds described in writing what befell them. Goldberg claims that diary and memoir writing was perhaps the most important literary genre for Jews during World War II. Goldberg considers the act of writing in radical situations as he looks at diaries from little-known victims as well as from brilliant diarists such as Chaim Kaplan and Victor Klemperer. Goldberg contends that only against the background of powerlessness and inner destruction can Jewish responses and resistance during the Holocaust gain their proper meaning.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1zxz15p
1 HOLOCAUST DIARIES: from:
Trauma in First Person
Abstract: Humans are storytelling creatures. We tell stories throughout our lives—about ourselves, our families, our communities, our past, and our future. Some stories we tell aloud to others and some we tell to ourselves, within the confines of our own consciousness. Through the stories we tell about ourselves, we constitute our identities because it is through our stories that we organize the events of our lives—disparate in time and place—into a coherent form. For example, stories allow us to create a causal relationship between different events, or to make certain events central and others secondary. The story is
4 THE LIFE STORY OF VICTOR KLEMPERER from:
Trauma in First Person
Abstract: Part II is dedicated to the reading of the diaries kept by Victor Klemperer in Dresden during the Nazi years focusing on the temporal experience, as reflected during the course of the protracted traumatic event. As we shall see, the autobiographical structure of time that underlies these diaries underwent a fundamental disruption but was reorganized in a very different way in the context of documentary writing. In order to understand the disruptions in Victor Klemperer’s life story during the Nazi period, and the way in which the story took shape in his diaries, we must first devote a few words
7 CHAIM KAPLAN AND HIS DIARY from:
Trauma in First Person
Abstract: Part III focuses on the war time diary of the Warsaw Jew Chaim Aron Kaplan. Kaplan’s diary, written in Hebrew, covers the period from the Nazi invasion of Poland on 1 September 1939, when Kaplan was age fifty-nine, until 4 August 1942, a few days before he was deported to Treblinka. The following chapters discuss the complex relations that the diary reveals between the writer, a Jewish victim; Nazism; and the Nazis, his persecutors (in other words, between the Jewish “I” and the Nazi “Other”).¹ Kaplan’s war diary was a continuation of the diary that he had begun keeping in
8 THE JEWS AND NAZI “LAW” from:
Trauma in First Person
Abstract: On 8 January 1940, Chaim Kaplan asserted in his diary: “Nazism cancelled all law and justice; in particular, with regard to the Jews who have been excluded from all legal jurisdiction. . . . When one born of a ‘low race’ is brought before Nazi justice, he is judged not on the basis of the law that applies to every one, but on the basis of ‘judicial sentiment.’”¹ This notion is anything but unusual in the diary. Unlike most other Warsaw Jewish diarists, Kaplan was obsessed with understanding the Nazis and Nazism. He was haunted and preoccupied by their evil
Book Title: Trauma in First Person-Diary Writing during the Holocaust
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): GREENBERG AVNER
Abstract: What are the effects of radical oppression on the human psyche? What happens to the inner self of the powerless and traumatized victim, especially during times of widespread horror? In this bold and deeply penetrating book, Amos Goldberg addresses diary writing by Jews under Nazi persecution. Throughout Europe, in towns, villages, ghettos, forests, hideouts, concentration and labor camps, and even in extermination camps, Jews of all ages and of all cultural backgrounds described in writing what befell them. Goldberg claims that diary and memoir writing was perhaps the most important literary genre for Jews during World War II. Goldberg considers the act of writing in radical situations as he looks at diaries from little-known victims as well as from brilliant diarists such as Chaim Kaplan and Victor Klemperer. Goldberg contends that only against the background of powerlessness and inner destruction can Jewish responses and resistance during the Holocaust gain their proper meaning.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1zxz15p
1 HOLOCAUST DIARIES: from:
Trauma in First Person
Abstract: Humans are storytelling creatures. We tell stories throughout our lives—about ourselves, our families, our communities, our past, and our future. Some stories we tell aloud to others and some we tell to ourselves, within the confines of our own consciousness. Through the stories we tell about ourselves, we constitute our identities because it is through our stories that we organize the events of our lives—disparate in time and place—into a coherent form. For example, stories allow us to create a causal relationship between different events, or to make certain events central and others secondary. The story is
4 THE LIFE STORY OF VICTOR KLEMPERER from:
Trauma in First Person
Abstract: Part II is dedicated to the reading of the diaries kept by Victor Klemperer in Dresden during the Nazi years focusing on the temporal experience, as reflected during the course of the protracted traumatic event. As we shall see, the autobiographical structure of time that underlies these diaries underwent a fundamental disruption but was reorganized in a very different way in the context of documentary writing. In order to understand the disruptions in Victor Klemperer’s life story during the Nazi period, and the way in which the story took shape in his diaries, we must first devote a few words
7 CHAIM KAPLAN AND HIS DIARY from:
Trauma in First Person
Abstract: Part III focuses on the war time diary of the Warsaw Jew Chaim Aron Kaplan. Kaplan’s diary, written in Hebrew, covers the period from the Nazi invasion of Poland on 1 September 1939, when Kaplan was age fifty-nine, until 4 August 1942, a few days before he was deported to Treblinka. The following chapters discuss the complex relations that the diary reveals between the writer, a Jewish victim; Nazism; and the Nazis, his persecutors (in other words, between the Jewish “I” and the Nazi “Other”).¹ Kaplan’s war diary was a continuation of the diary that he had begun keeping in
8 THE JEWS AND NAZI “LAW” from:
Trauma in First Person
Abstract: On 8 January 1940, Chaim Kaplan asserted in his diary: “Nazism cancelled all law and justice; in particular, with regard to the Jews who have been excluded from all legal jurisdiction. . . . When one born of a ‘low race’ is brought before Nazi justice, he is judged not on the basis of the law that applies to every one, but on the basis of ‘judicial sentiment.’”¹ This notion is anything but unusual in the diary. Unlike most other Warsaw Jewish diarists, Kaplan was obsessed with understanding the Nazis and Nazism. He was haunted and preoccupied by their evil
Introduction: from:
The Prayers and Tears of Jacques Derrida
Abstract: In his notebooks of 1976, Jacques Derrida proposes to hirnself the task of describing his broken covenant with Judaism in a work that would “leave nothing, if possible, in the dark of what related me to Judaism, alliance [
alliance, covenant; Hebrew:Berit] broken in every respect” (Circon., 145/Circum., 154). For Derrida is Jewish without being Jewish, JewishsansJudaism, married outside Judaism, his sons uncircumcised, he an atheist. Of this broken covenant, this breach of analliancethat stretches “throughout thousands of years of Judaism,” he says—now the time has changed to 1989 and this note has been stitched
10 It’s About Time: from:
Signs and Society
Abstract: The invitation to comment on this set of papers in linguistic anthropology dealing with temporalities and texts (first presented at the American Anthropological Association’s 2005 meetings in Washington, DC) has prompted a moment of personal reflection, since it was exactly twenty years ago, in 1985, that I published my first application of semiotic categories to the ethnographic analysis of time and history. My paper, “Times of the Signs: Modalities of History and Levels of Social Structure in Belau” (Parmentier 1985b), tried to synthesize Fernand Braudel, Meyer Fortes, and Marshall Sahlins by using Charles S. Peirce’s sign theory to argue that
8 The Palestinian Exile—Drama Shapes Memory from:
The War of 1948
Author(s) Kabha Mustafa
Abstract: The chapter attempts to link memory to history through the genre of “historical drama,” where the collective memory of a people is presented through the story of certain groups of this people at a defined point in time.
Epilogue: from:
The War of 1948
Author(s) Caplan Neil
Abstract: These in-depth studies underline the rigid nature of collective memory and identity, especially in intractable ethno-national conflicts such as the Israeli-Palestinian one. At the same time, however, they also demonstrate the dynamic
Introduction from:
Cosmopolitanism and Place
Author(s) Wahman Jessica
Abstract: The chapters in this first part confront key topics to be addressed by a contemporary cosmopolitanism. All suggest that cosmopolitanism is an orientation worth considering, and some argue explicitly in favor of the position. Many of the authors draw our attention to an increasingly globalized world and suggest this is a prominent reason for taking cosmopolitanism seriously. Our growing access to and consistent impact on one another, they argue, increase our awareness of human connectedness, rendering the possibility of entirely localized commitments both rationally untenable and ethically irresponsible. At the same time, each author claims that a feasible cosmopolitanism, despite
1 Déjà Vu All Over Again?: from:
Cosmopolitanism and Place
Author(s) Lysaker John
Abstract: At one time, let’s say 1990, it seemed as if relational ontologies marked a significant advance for those trying to think past the limits of liberal political theory and the more general posture of the modern subject. Appreciating the interconnectedness of all things, and thus the dependency of any given thing, was taken to have more or less clear ethical-political implications, the kind that should lead to a less violent, even a more cooperative, world. The thought was that reified ideologies lead liberal automata to operate in ahistorical silos, producing power and accumulating capital without a feel for the karmic
Introduction from:
Cosmopolitanism and Place
Author(s) Stuhr John J.
Abstract: To consider seriously cosmopolitan ideals (in Part I of this volume) is to engage universalism of one or more sorts—moral, political, economic, religious, and cultural. It is to take up notions of universal and equal intrinsic worth, the dignity of all persons, and border-blind, history-blind, color-blind, money-blind, gender-blind (and so on) rights and responsibilities. And it is to entertain worldviews in which tribal, local, regional, national, and other differences are mere artifacts of time, inessential contingencies, instances of good luck or bad fortune, and facts that cannot serve as bases for reason-based values and actions.
1 The Repetition of Sacred Anarchy: from:
The Essential Caputo
Author(s) PUTT B. KEITH
Abstract: In February 1990, a good friend and I decided to journey to Conception Seminary in northwest Missouri in order to attend a conference on Catholic philosophy and deconstruction. Little did I realize how consequential those three days at that Benedictine monastery would be for me, personally and professionally. It was there and then that I first met and began to read John D. (Jack) Caputo. Jack initiated the weekend conference by delivering the first keynote address, a lecture entitled “Sacred Anarchy: Fragments of a Postmodern Ethics.” Although I did not know it at the time, I later realized that the
8 Hermeneutics as the Recovery of Man from:
The Essential Caputo
Abstract: When Constantine Constantius—the Kierkegaardian pseudonym—undertook a return trip to Berlin, he made an experiment in “repetition” which was, I want to argue, of some consequence for hermeneutics. I believe that what we nowadays call “hermeneutics”—Heideggerian and post-Heideggerian hermeneutics—defends the view that repetition is possible and indeed that everything in hermeneutics turns on its possibility. On this account, hermeneutics is always a work of retrieval (
Wiederholung), a laying out (auslegen) which fetches back (wiederholen), an explicating which retrieves what is latent and puts it into words for the first time, as Heidegger says (SZ, § 63, 314
11 Beyond Aestheticism: from:
The Essential Caputo
Abstract: Deconstruction is sometimes accused of being a version of aestheticism. It appears to be frivolous and playful, to abdicate its duty to read literary and philosophical texts responsibly, and perversely to prefer arbitrary misreadings to serious interpretation. Viewed thus, Derrida sounds like the aesthete in Kierkegaard’s Either/Or who advises us to situate ourselves at a point prior to the principle of contradiction, anterior to its field of force, so that, exempted from the harshness of having to choose between its terms, we will be free to frolic in a world without consequences. On this rendering, deconstruction practices its own version
22 “Lazarus, Come Out”: from:
The Essential Caputo
Abstract: Once, during the time that Jesus was using Bethany as a base of operations, staying with his close friends Mary and Martha, he had left town for a short spell when Lazarus, the brother of Mary and Martha, became ill. The two sisters, whom Jesus loved, sent him a message to return at once. By the time Jesus got back, however, he found that Lazarus had been dead for four days. At his approach to Bethany, Martha had gone out to meet him on the road into town and as much as rebuked him for having been away at this
1 The Repetition of Sacred Anarchy: from:
The Essential Caputo
Author(s) PUTT B. KEITH
Abstract: In February 1990, a good friend and I decided to journey to Conception Seminary in northwest Missouri in order to attend a conference on Catholic philosophy and deconstruction. Little did I realize how consequential those three days at that Benedictine monastery would be for me, personally and professionally. It was there and then that I first met and began to read John D. (Jack) Caputo. Jack initiated the weekend conference by delivering the first keynote address, a lecture entitled “Sacred Anarchy: Fragments of a Postmodern Ethics.” Although I did not know it at the time, I later realized that the
8 Hermeneutics as the Recovery of Man from:
The Essential Caputo
Abstract: When Constantine Constantius—the Kierkegaardian pseudonym—undertook a return trip to Berlin, he made an experiment in “repetition” which was, I want to argue, of some consequence for hermeneutics. I believe that what we nowadays call “hermeneutics”—Heideggerian and post-Heideggerian hermeneutics—defends the view that repetition is possible and indeed that everything in hermeneutics turns on its possibility. On this account, hermeneutics is always a work of retrieval (
Wiederholung), a laying out (auslegen) which fetches back (wiederholen), an explicating which retrieves what is latent and puts it into words for the first time, as Heidegger says (SZ, § 63, 314
11 Beyond Aestheticism: from:
The Essential Caputo
Abstract: Deconstruction is sometimes accused of being a version of aestheticism. It appears to be frivolous and playful, to abdicate its duty to read literary and philosophical texts responsibly, and perversely to prefer arbitrary misreadings to serious interpretation. Viewed thus, Derrida sounds like the aesthete in Kierkegaard’s Either/Or who advises us to situate ourselves at a point prior to the principle of contradiction, anterior to its field of force, so that, exempted from the harshness of having to choose between its terms, we will be free to frolic in a world without consequences. On this rendering, deconstruction practices its own version
22 “Lazarus, Come Out”: from:
The Essential Caputo
Abstract: Once, during the time that Jesus was using Bethany as a base of operations, staying with his close friends Mary and Martha, he had left town for a short spell when Lazarus, the brother of Mary and Martha, became ill. The two sisters, whom Jesus loved, sent him a message to return at once. By the time Jesus got back, however, he found that Lazarus had been dead for four days. At his approach to Bethany, Martha had gone out to meet him on the road into town and as much as rebuked him for having been away at this
1 The Repetition of Sacred Anarchy: from:
The Essential Caputo
Author(s) PUTT B. KEITH
Abstract: In February 1990, a good friend and I decided to journey to Conception Seminary in northwest Missouri in order to attend a conference on Catholic philosophy and deconstruction. Little did I realize how consequential those three days at that Benedictine monastery would be for me, personally and professionally. It was there and then that I first met and began to read John D. (Jack) Caputo. Jack initiated the weekend conference by delivering the first keynote address, a lecture entitled “Sacred Anarchy: Fragments of a Postmodern Ethics.” Although I did not know it at the time, I later realized that the
8 Hermeneutics as the Recovery of Man from:
The Essential Caputo
Abstract: When Constantine Constantius—the Kierkegaardian pseudonym—undertook a return trip to Berlin, he made an experiment in “repetition” which was, I want to argue, of some consequence for hermeneutics. I believe that what we nowadays call “hermeneutics”—Heideggerian and post-Heideggerian hermeneutics—defends the view that repetition is possible and indeed that everything in hermeneutics turns on its possibility. On this account, hermeneutics is always a work of retrieval (
Wiederholung), a laying out (auslegen) which fetches back (wiederholen), an explicating which retrieves what is latent and puts it into words for the first time, as Heidegger says (SZ, § 63, 314
11 Beyond Aestheticism: from:
The Essential Caputo
Abstract: Deconstruction is sometimes accused of being a version of aestheticism. It appears to be frivolous and playful, to abdicate its duty to read literary and philosophical texts responsibly, and perversely to prefer arbitrary misreadings to serious interpretation. Viewed thus, Derrida sounds like the aesthete in Kierkegaard’s Either/Or who advises us to situate ourselves at a point prior to the principle of contradiction, anterior to its field of force, so that, exempted from the harshness of having to choose between its terms, we will be free to frolic in a world without consequences. On this rendering, deconstruction practices its own version
22 “Lazarus, Come Out”: from:
The Essential Caputo
Abstract: Once, during the time that Jesus was using Bethany as a base of operations, staying with his close friends Mary and Martha, he had left town for a short spell when Lazarus, the brother of Mary and Martha, became ill. The two sisters, whom Jesus loved, sent him a message to return at once. By the time Jesus got back, however, he found that Lazarus had been dead for four days. At his approach to Bethany, Martha had gone out to meet him on the road into town and as much as rebuked him for having been away at this
1 The Repetition of Sacred Anarchy: from:
The Essential Caputo
Author(s) PUTT B. KEITH
Abstract: In February 1990, a good friend and I decided to journey to Conception Seminary in northwest Missouri in order to attend a conference on Catholic philosophy and deconstruction. Little did I realize how consequential those three days at that Benedictine monastery would be for me, personally and professionally. It was there and then that I first met and began to read John D. (Jack) Caputo. Jack initiated the weekend conference by delivering the first keynote address, a lecture entitled “Sacred Anarchy: Fragments of a Postmodern Ethics.” Although I did not know it at the time, I later realized that the
8 Hermeneutics as the Recovery of Man from:
The Essential Caputo
Abstract: When Constantine Constantius—the Kierkegaardian pseudonym—undertook a return trip to Berlin, he made an experiment in “repetition” which was, I want to argue, of some consequence for hermeneutics. I believe that what we nowadays call “hermeneutics”—Heideggerian and post-Heideggerian hermeneutics—defends the view that repetition is possible and indeed that everything in hermeneutics turns on its possibility. On this account, hermeneutics is always a work of retrieval (
Wiederholung), a laying out (auslegen) which fetches back (wiederholen), an explicating which retrieves what is latent and puts it into words for the first time, as Heidegger says (SZ, § 63, 314
11 Beyond Aestheticism: from:
The Essential Caputo
Abstract: Deconstruction is sometimes accused of being a version of aestheticism. It appears to be frivolous and playful, to abdicate its duty to read literary and philosophical texts responsibly, and perversely to prefer arbitrary misreadings to serious interpretation. Viewed thus, Derrida sounds like the aesthete in Kierkegaard’s Either/Or who advises us to situate ourselves at a point prior to the principle of contradiction, anterior to its field of force, so that, exempted from the harshness of having to choose between its terms, we will be free to frolic in a world without consequences. On this rendering, deconstruction practices its own version
22 “Lazarus, Come Out”: from:
The Essential Caputo
Abstract: Once, during the time that Jesus was using Bethany as a base of operations, staying with his close friends Mary and Martha, he had left town for a short spell when Lazarus, the brother of Mary and Martha, became ill. The two sisters, whom Jesus loved, sent him a message to return at once. By the time Jesus got back, however, he found that Lazarus had been dead for four days. At his approach to Bethany, Martha had gone out to meet him on the road into town and as much as rebuked him for having been away at this
1 The Repetition of Sacred Anarchy: from:
The Essential Caputo
Author(s) PUTT B. KEITH
Abstract: In February 1990, a good friend and I decided to journey to Conception Seminary in northwest Missouri in order to attend a conference on Catholic philosophy and deconstruction. Little did I realize how consequential those three days at that Benedictine monastery would be for me, personally and professionally. It was there and then that I first met and began to read John D. (Jack) Caputo. Jack initiated the weekend conference by delivering the first keynote address, a lecture entitled “Sacred Anarchy: Fragments of a Postmodern Ethics.” Although I did not know it at the time, I later realized that the
8 Hermeneutics as the Recovery of Man from:
The Essential Caputo
Abstract: When Constantine Constantius—the Kierkegaardian pseudonym—undertook a return trip to Berlin, he made an experiment in “repetition” which was, I want to argue, of some consequence for hermeneutics. I believe that what we nowadays call “hermeneutics”—Heideggerian and post-Heideggerian hermeneutics—defends the view that repetition is possible and indeed that everything in hermeneutics turns on its possibility. On this account, hermeneutics is always a work of retrieval (
Wiederholung), a laying out (auslegen) which fetches back (wiederholen), an explicating which retrieves what is latent and puts it into words for the first time, as Heidegger says (SZ, § 63, 314
11 Beyond Aestheticism: from:
The Essential Caputo
Abstract: Deconstruction is sometimes accused of being a version of aestheticism. It appears to be frivolous and playful, to abdicate its duty to read literary and philosophical texts responsibly, and perversely to prefer arbitrary misreadings to serious interpretation. Viewed thus, Derrida sounds like the aesthete in Kierkegaard’s Either/Or who advises us to situate ourselves at a point prior to the principle of contradiction, anterior to its field of force, so that, exempted from the harshness of having to choose between its terms, we will be free to frolic in a world without consequences. On this rendering, deconstruction practices its own version
22 “Lazarus, Come Out”: from:
The Essential Caputo
Abstract: Once, during the time that Jesus was using Bethany as a base of operations, staying with his close friends Mary and Martha, he had left town for a short spell when Lazarus, the brother of Mary and Martha, became ill. The two sisters, whom Jesus loved, sent him a message to return at once. By the time Jesus got back, however, he found that Lazarus had been dead for four days. At his approach to Bethany, Martha had gone out to meet him on the road into town and as much as rebuked him for having been away at this
5 OPEN FUTURE, REGAINING POSSIBILITY from:
Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) FIELDING HELEN A.
Abstract: Openness to the world and to the future belongs to personal time intertwined with impersonal or natural time, which is at the heart of phenomenology. Humans, as phenomenal subjects, make sense of the world they encounter, and in so doing they have the potential to enact change. However, as embodied, they also have the ability to be shaped by it—and in this age the world that shapes humans is largely indifferent to this phenomenal potential. They gear into a world that too often does not connect personal and impersonal time with the processes or systems in which they are
7 UNHAPPY SPEECH AND HEARING WELL: from:
Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) STAWARSKA BEATA
Abstract: This essay is an attempt to grapple with an experience I had upon entering the academic profession about a decade ago and teaching a large undergraduate lecture class at a state university for the first time in my career. I often felt that my speech during my lectures sounded hollow, that it lacked resonance with my audience (composed in part of students with a strong sense of white male entitlement, compounded with commitment to stereotypical gender norms, ageism, and expectations of a familiar “native” accent), despite the fact that I enunciated well and occupied an official position of authority in
11 THE “NORMAL ABNORMALITIES” OF DISABILITY AND AGING: from:
Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) Weiss Gail
Abstract: Two of the most slippery yet well-established divisions that have traditionally distinguished human beings from one another are age and disability, respectively. With respect to the former, even a cursory examination of different cultures and different historical time periods reveals how widely societies vary in their identifications of youth, middle age, and old age, much less in the roles and responsibilities that are deemed appropriate for each period of life. This cultural and historical variability is clearly due to many complex factors, chief among them being the average life expectancy for a particular group of people and the specific habitus
17 IDENTITY-IN-DIFFERENCE TO AVOID INDIFFERENCE from:
Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) LEE EMILY S.
Abstract: Sexual and racial differences matter. Indeed, rejecting facile understandings of sameness at the heart of universalism, philosophers of race speculate that racial differences are ontologically relevant. At the same time, absolute difference can slip into indifference. For example, Glen Loury points to disparate statistics among racial groups that occasion no alarm from the majority populations.¹ As Maria Lugones describes such indifference, “The more independent I am, the more independent I am left to be. Their world and their integrity do not require me at all.”² My concern is that although we have yet to fully understand what difference means and
5 OPEN FUTURE, REGAINING POSSIBILITY from:
Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) FIELDING HELEN A.
Abstract: Openness to the world and to the future belongs to personal time intertwined with impersonal or natural time, which is at the heart of phenomenology. Humans, as phenomenal subjects, make sense of the world they encounter, and in so doing they have the potential to enact change. However, as embodied, they also have the ability to be shaped by it—and in this age the world that shapes humans is largely indifferent to this phenomenal potential. They gear into a world that too often does not connect personal and impersonal time with the processes or systems in which they are
7 UNHAPPY SPEECH AND HEARING WELL: from:
Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) STAWARSKA BEATA
Abstract: This essay is an attempt to grapple with an experience I had upon entering the academic profession about a decade ago and teaching a large undergraduate lecture class at a state university for the first time in my career. I often felt that my speech during my lectures sounded hollow, that it lacked resonance with my audience (composed in part of students with a strong sense of white male entitlement, compounded with commitment to stereotypical gender norms, ageism, and expectations of a familiar “native” accent), despite the fact that I enunciated well and occupied an official position of authority in
11 THE “NORMAL ABNORMALITIES” OF DISABILITY AND AGING: from:
Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) Weiss Gail
Abstract: Two of the most slippery yet well-established divisions that have traditionally distinguished human beings from one another are age and disability, respectively. With respect to the former, even a cursory examination of different cultures and different historical time periods reveals how widely societies vary in their identifications of youth, middle age, and old age, much less in the roles and responsibilities that are deemed appropriate for each period of life. This cultural and historical variability is clearly due to many complex factors, chief among them being the average life expectancy for a particular group of people and the specific habitus
17 IDENTITY-IN-DIFFERENCE TO AVOID INDIFFERENCE from:
Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) LEE EMILY S.
Abstract: Sexual and racial differences matter. Indeed, rejecting facile understandings of sameness at the heart of universalism, philosophers of race speculate that racial differences are ontologically relevant. At the same time, absolute difference can slip into indifference. For example, Glen Loury points to disparate statistics among racial groups that occasion no alarm from the majority populations.¹ As Maria Lugones describes such indifference, “The more independent I am, the more independent I am left to be. Their world and their integrity do not require me at all.”² My concern is that although we have yet to fully understand what difference means and
5 OPEN FUTURE, REGAINING POSSIBILITY from:
Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) FIELDING HELEN A.
Abstract: Openness to the world and to the future belongs to personal time intertwined with impersonal or natural time, which is at the heart of phenomenology. Humans, as phenomenal subjects, make sense of the world they encounter, and in so doing they have the potential to enact change. However, as embodied, they also have the ability to be shaped by it—and in this age the world that shapes humans is largely indifferent to this phenomenal potential. They gear into a world that too often does not connect personal and impersonal time with the processes or systems in which they are
7 UNHAPPY SPEECH AND HEARING WELL: from:
Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) STAWARSKA BEATA
Abstract: This essay is an attempt to grapple with an experience I had upon entering the academic profession about a decade ago and teaching a large undergraduate lecture class at a state university for the first time in my career. I often felt that my speech during my lectures sounded hollow, that it lacked resonance with my audience (composed in part of students with a strong sense of white male entitlement, compounded with commitment to stereotypical gender norms, ageism, and expectations of a familiar “native” accent), despite the fact that I enunciated well and occupied an official position of authority in
11 THE “NORMAL ABNORMALITIES” OF DISABILITY AND AGING: from:
Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) Weiss Gail
Abstract: Two of the most slippery yet well-established divisions that have traditionally distinguished human beings from one another are age and disability, respectively. With respect to the former, even a cursory examination of different cultures and different historical time periods reveals how widely societies vary in their identifications of youth, middle age, and old age, much less in the roles and responsibilities that are deemed appropriate for each period of life. This cultural and historical variability is clearly due to many complex factors, chief among them being the average life expectancy for a particular group of people and the specific habitus
17 IDENTITY-IN-DIFFERENCE TO AVOID INDIFFERENCE from:
Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) LEE EMILY S.
Abstract: Sexual and racial differences matter. Indeed, rejecting facile understandings of sameness at the heart of universalism, philosophers of race speculate that racial differences are ontologically relevant. At the same time, absolute difference can slip into indifference. For example, Glen Loury points to disparate statistics among racial groups that occasion no alarm from the majority populations.¹ As Maria Lugones describes such indifference, “The more independent I am, the more independent I am left to be. Their world and their integrity do not require me at all.”² My concern is that although we have yet to fully understand what difference means and
5 OPEN FUTURE, REGAINING POSSIBILITY from:
Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) FIELDING HELEN A.
Abstract: Openness to the world and to the future belongs to personal time intertwined with impersonal or natural time, which is at the heart of phenomenology. Humans, as phenomenal subjects, make sense of the world they encounter, and in so doing they have the potential to enact change. However, as embodied, they also have the ability to be shaped by it—and in this age the world that shapes humans is largely indifferent to this phenomenal potential. They gear into a world that too often does not connect personal and impersonal time with the processes or systems in which they are
7 UNHAPPY SPEECH AND HEARING WELL: from:
Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) STAWARSKA BEATA
Abstract: This essay is an attempt to grapple with an experience I had upon entering the academic profession about a decade ago and teaching a large undergraduate lecture class at a state university for the first time in my career. I often felt that my speech during my lectures sounded hollow, that it lacked resonance with my audience (composed in part of students with a strong sense of white male entitlement, compounded with commitment to stereotypical gender norms, ageism, and expectations of a familiar “native” accent), despite the fact that I enunciated well and occupied an official position of authority in
11 THE “NORMAL ABNORMALITIES” OF DISABILITY AND AGING: from:
Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) Weiss Gail
Abstract: Two of the most slippery yet well-established divisions that have traditionally distinguished human beings from one another are age and disability, respectively. With respect to the former, even a cursory examination of different cultures and different historical time periods reveals how widely societies vary in their identifications of youth, middle age, and old age, much less in the roles and responsibilities that are deemed appropriate for each period of life. This cultural and historical variability is clearly due to many complex factors, chief among them being the average life expectancy for a particular group of people and the specific habitus
17 IDENTITY-IN-DIFFERENCE TO AVOID INDIFFERENCE from:
Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) LEE EMILY S.
Abstract: Sexual and racial differences matter. Indeed, rejecting facile understandings of sameness at the heart of universalism, philosophers of race speculate that racial differences are ontologically relevant. At the same time, absolute difference can slip into indifference. For example, Glen Loury points to disparate statistics among racial groups that occasion no alarm from the majority populations.¹ As Maria Lugones describes such indifference, “The more independent I am, the more independent I am left to be. Their world and their integrity do not require me at all.”² My concern is that although we have yet to fully understand what difference means and
INTRODUCTION from:
Self-Understanding and Lifeworld
Abstract: “Actually abiding philosophy can only become the true philosophy of its time, i.e., is powerful [
mächtig] over its time.”¹ With this reflection, in which Martin Heidegger expresses a maxim of his thinking, he binds himself to a tradition within which Aristotle as much as Augustine, Kant, Hegel, Kierkegaard, or Nietzsche can be named. They all found themselves challenged in their thinking by the questions of their time to a type of critical contemporaneity, which sought to posit a diagnosis of their respective historical situations with the means of philosophy. Even if the boundaries are fluid and overstepping them appears unavoidable,
OPEN END from:
Self-Understanding and Lifeworld
Abstract: With the hermeneutical demonstration that our never other than life worldly situated self-understanding is always already historical at the origin of its self-worldly significance, the factual analysis of Heidegger’s early work comes to an end, in that for one thing, it makes explicit the point of departure of phenomenological hermeneutics of factical historical life in the wealth of its structures. For another, beyond the fact of placing the starting point in life, the central question of his early work illuminates at the same time how “factical life-experience belongs in a wholly originary sense to the problematic of philosophy,”¹ in that
INTRODUCTION from:
Self-Understanding and Lifeworld
Abstract: “Actually abiding philosophy can only become the true philosophy of its time, i.e., is powerful [
mächtig] over its time.”¹ With this reflection, in which Martin Heidegger expresses a maxim of his thinking, he binds himself to a tradition within which Aristotle as much as Augustine, Kant, Hegel, Kierkegaard, or Nietzsche can be named. They all found themselves challenged in their thinking by the questions of their time to a type of critical contemporaneity, which sought to posit a diagnosis of their respective historical situations with the means of philosophy. Even if the boundaries are fluid and overstepping them appears unavoidable,
OPEN END from:
Self-Understanding and Lifeworld
Abstract: With the hermeneutical demonstration that our never other than life worldly situated self-understanding is always already historical at the origin of its self-worldly significance, the factual analysis of Heidegger’s early work comes to an end, in that for one thing, it makes explicit the point of departure of phenomenological hermeneutics of factical historical life in the wealth of its structures. For another, beyond the fact of placing the starting point in life, the central question of his early work illuminates at the same time how “factical life-experience belongs in a wholly originary sense to the problematic of philosophy,”¹ in that
INTRODUCTION from:
Self-Understanding and Lifeworld
Abstract: “Actually abiding philosophy can only become the true philosophy of its time, i.e., is powerful [
mächtig] over its time.”¹ With this reflection, in which Martin Heidegger expresses a maxim of his thinking, he binds himself to a tradition within which Aristotle as much as Augustine, Kant, Hegel, Kierkegaard, or Nietzsche can be named. They all found themselves challenged in their thinking by the questions of their time to a type of critical contemporaneity, which sought to posit a diagnosis of their respective historical situations with the means of philosophy. Even if the boundaries are fluid and overstepping them appears unavoidable,
OPEN END from:
Self-Understanding and Lifeworld
Abstract: With the hermeneutical demonstration that our never other than life worldly situated self-understanding is always already historical at the origin of its self-worldly significance, the factual analysis of Heidegger’s early work comes to an end, in that for one thing, it makes explicit the point of departure of phenomenological hermeneutics of factical historical life in the wealth of its structures. For another, beyond the fact of placing the starting point in life, the central question of his early work illuminates at the same time how “factical life-experience belongs in a wholly originary sense to the problematic of philosophy,”¹ in that
INTRODUCTION from:
Self-Understanding and Lifeworld
Abstract: “Actually abiding philosophy can only become the true philosophy of its time, i.e., is powerful [
mächtig] over its time.”¹ With this reflection, in which Martin Heidegger expresses a maxim of his thinking, he binds himself to a tradition within which Aristotle as much as Augustine, Kant, Hegel, Kierkegaard, or Nietzsche can be named. They all found themselves challenged in their thinking by the questions of their time to a type of critical contemporaneity, which sought to posit a diagnosis of their respective historical situations with the means of philosophy. Even if the boundaries are fluid and overstepping them appears unavoidable,
OPEN END from:
Self-Understanding and Lifeworld
Abstract: With the hermeneutical demonstration that our never other than life worldly situated self-understanding is always already historical at the origin of its self-worldly significance, the factual analysis of Heidegger’s early work comes to an end, in that for one thing, it makes explicit the point of departure of phenomenological hermeneutics of factical historical life in the wealth of its structures. For another, beyond the fact of placing the starting point in life, the central question of his early work illuminates at the same time how “factical life-experience belongs in a wholly originary sense to the problematic of philosophy,”¹ in that
INTRODUCTION from:
Self-Understanding and Lifeworld
Abstract: “Actually abiding philosophy can only become the true philosophy of its time, i.e., is powerful [
mächtig] over its time.”¹ With this reflection, in which Martin Heidegger expresses a maxim of his thinking, he binds himself to a tradition within which Aristotle as much as Augustine, Kant, Hegel, Kierkegaard, or Nietzsche can be named. They all found themselves challenged in their thinking by the questions of their time to a type of critical contemporaneity, which sought to posit a diagnosis of their respective historical situations with the means of philosophy. Even if the boundaries are fluid and overstepping them appears unavoidable,
OPEN END from:
Self-Understanding and Lifeworld
Abstract: With the hermeneutical demonstration that our never other than life worldly situated self-understanding is always already historical at the origin of its self-worldly significance, the factual analysis of Heidegger’s early work comes to an end, in that for one thing, it makes explicit the point of departure of phenomenological hermeneutics of factical historical life in the wealth of its structures. For another, beyond the fact of placing the starting point in life, the central question of his early work illuminates at the same time how “factical life-experience belongs in a wholly originary sense to the problematic of philosophy,”¹ in that
Book Title: The Spirits of Crossbones Graveyard-Time, Ritual, and Sexual Commerce in London
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Hausner Sondra L.
Abstract: Every month, a ragtag group of Londoners gather in the site known as Crossbones Graveyard to commemorate the souls of medieval prostitutes believed to be buried there-the "Winchester Geese," women who were under the protection of the Church but denied Christian burial. In the Borough of Southwark, not far from Shakespeare's Globe, is a pilgrimage site for self-identified misfits, nonconformists, and contemporary sex workers who leave memorials to the outcast dead. Ceremonies combining raucous humor and eclectic spirituality are led by a local playwright, John Constable, also known as John Crow. His interpretation of the history of the site has struck a chord with many who feel alienated in present-day London. Sondra L. Hausner offers a nuanced ethnography of Crossbones that tacks between past and present to look at the historical practices of sex work, the relation of the Church to these professions, and their representation in the present. She draws on anthropological approaches to ritual and time to understand the forms of spiritual healing conveyed by the Crossbones rites. She shows that ritual is a way of creating the present by mobilizing the stories of the past for contemporary purposes.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2005wdm
1 The Myth of the Winchester Goose from:
The Spirits of Crossbones Graveyard
Abstract: Mythic reality is a strange and ethereal one, one of those few places in the human social universe unconstrained by the limits of time. Whether we embrace the functionalism of the Polish British fieldworker Bronislaw Malinowski or the structuralism of the great French theorist Claude Lévi-Strauss, myth is eternal, as it is designed to be. Its source and its power are both attributable to that particular, enduring capacity of myth to transcend time: mythic narrative creates, sustains, and maneuvers the very origin of our existence. We use the stories of our beginnings to recount—to ourselves and our kin—how
5 Southwark, Then and Now from:
The Spirits of Crossbones Graveyard
Abstract: All politics, it is said, are local: the manipulation of time, too, must be enacted somewhere. In the story at hand, our ritual takes place in Southwark, a borough that is 300,000 strong in a twenty-first-century London that is vibrantly expanding. Formally incorporated into the City of London in its present form as late as 1965 (Johnson 1969:385), Southwark is one of the densest boroughs in the contemporary capital: the 2011 census lists almost 10,000 residents per square kilometer, double the average for London (and twenty times the average for England, which has always had a large rural population).¹ Some
[PART III Introduction] from:
Persuasion, Reflection, Judgment
Abstract: IN A LETTER from 1955, Hannah Arendt confides to Karl Jaspers that she intends to call a planned “book on political theories, ‘Amor Mundi.’”¹ Several scholars, among them Elisabeth Young-Bruehl, have held that this book is none other than
The Human Condition.² Indeed, it was the first book to be published in the aftermath of the letter to Jaspers.³ As Ursula Ludz has convincingly pointed out, however, when Arendt spoke to Jaspers about the title in question, neitherThe Human Conditionnor herIntroduction into Politicswere in progress at the time. Ludz, therefore, writes: “With ‘the book on political
[PART III Introduction] from:
Persuasion, Reflection, Judgment
Abstract: IN A LETTER from 1955, Hannah Arendt confides to Karl Jaspers that she intends to call a planned “book on political theories, ‘Amor Mundi.’”¹ Several scholars, among them Elisabeth Young-Bruehl, have held that this book is none other than
The Human Condition.² Indeed, it was the first book to be published in the aftermath of the letter to Jaspers.³ As Ursula Ludz has convincingly pointed out, however, when Arendt spoke to Jaspers about the title in question, neitherThe Human Conditionnor herIntroduction into Politicswere in progress at the time. Ludz, therefore, writes: “With ‘the book on political
1 THE REPUBLICAN ORIGINS OF THE COLONIAL FRACTURE from:
The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Blanchard Pascal
Abstract: The links between colonization and the Republic remain of utmost importance and relevance to contemporary debates in French society. Might colonization, in fact, represent the inevitable reverse side of what stands as a universal utopia, one that invariably becomes less and less “pure” as one moves away from the center (the metropole), and as the color of the people who are theoretically placed under its “protection” becomes darker? Such complex questions are no doubt impossible to answer definitively. However, they do have the merit of clearly setting out an issue that has, until now, often been avoided or, at times,
3 A DIFFICULT HISTORY: from:
The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Bancel Nicolas
Abstract: Why is colonial, and postcolonial history in particular, so marginalized in French academic research? Is such a question even legitimate today? Certainly, if we consider colonization to be one of the major historic phenomena of the past two centuries, then there can be no doubt as to the pertinence of these questions. But then what accounts for such marginalization? Admittedly, I came to this question by way of two experiences. The first was noticing how little visibility French research had in the fields of colonial and postcolonial studies,¹ and even the sometimes condescending attitude of some of our foreign colleagues
15 “RACE,” ETHNICIZATION, AND DISCRIMINATION: from:
The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Simon Patrick
Abstract: In 1950, the United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization (UNESCO), based in Paris, convened an assembly of eminent scholars to discuss the issue of “race.” Following the Universal Declaration of Human Rights (1948), the time had come to develop a strategy aimed at ending racism. The options were
eitherto discredit the very concept of race and prohibit the use of the word or to preserve its scientific validity (specifically in classifications to describe human populations), but strip it of its hierarchizing value as a means of addressing, and quelling, potential uses for segregation and extermination. Scholars were divided
22 THE GREAT STRIP SHOW: from:
The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Dorlin Elsa
Abstract: In a speech delivered on June 22, 2009, at the Chateau de Versailles in a joint session of parliament, the first time a French president had addressed that body in over one hundred years, Nicolas Sarkozy made the following pronouncement: “The burqa is not welcome on French soil.” Seizing the opportunity to capitalize on yet another “head scarf affair,” this declaration was made in spite of the fact that a parliamentary factgathering mission initiated by André Gérin (Communist Party) was already underway in response to an obscure report released by the French internal security police (the sousdirection de l’information générale,
29 INFILTRATION OF LIQUID POPULISM from:
The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Liogier Raphaël
Abstract: The overused notion of “populism” should not be conflated with the term bandied about by politicians who say what they think voters want to hear. Nor is populism related to popular preoccupations, those of artisans, fishermen, workers, hunters, farmers, engineers, doctors, the rich, or the poor. In the enthusiasm surrounding populism, concrete categories within the population—professions, at times contradictory interests, class distinctions—tend to be elided over in favor of a fiction of an all encompassing, omnipresent, and omniscient people, who are believed to have a single soul and unified identity. Populists can be either Marxist, like Stalin, or
31 ANTIRACISM: from:
The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Debono Emmanuel
Abstract: As with all great causes, antiracism includes at least three aspects: individual, collective, and institutional. At a time when antiracism movements are under attack, often being reduced to their most militant forms, it seems important to
34 IS A COLONIAL HISTORY MUSEUM POLITICALLY IMPOSSIBLE? from:
The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Blanchard Pascal
Abstract: After three decades of silence (1960 1990) and amnesty/amnesia, we have now entered a time of confrontation—set off by debates surrounding the Algerian War in the 1990s—memory wars at the highest levels of politics—from the law on “positive colonization” in 2005 to the memorial laws of 2011—and from the “chaos of individual grief”¹ toward claims articulated by every
communityfor recognition. The colonial past has become political. On the one hand, there is the left, which has never been able to confront this history or even imagine a scholarly approach to it. On the other,
1 THE REPUBLICAN ORIGINS OF THE COLONIAL FRACTURE from:
The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Blanchard Pascal
Abstract: The links between colonization and the Republic remain of utmost importance and relevance to contemporary debates in French society. Might colonization, in fact, represent the inevitable reverse side of what stands as a universal utopia, one that invariably becomes less and less “pure” as one moves away from the center (the metropole), and as the color of the people who are theoretically placed under its “protection” becomes darker? Such complex questions are no doubt impossible to answer definitively. However, they do have the merit of clearly setting out an issue that has, until now, often been avoided or, at times,
3 A DIFFICULT HISTORY: from:
The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Bancel Nicolas
Abstract: Why is colonial, and postcolonial history in particular, so marginalized in French academic research? Is such a question even legitimate today? Certainly, if we consider colonization to be one of the major historic phenomena of the past two centuries, then there can be no doubt as to the pertinence of these questions. But then what accounts for such marginalization? Admittedly, I came to this question by way of two experiences. The first was noticing how little visibility French research had in the fields of colonial and postcolonial studies,¹ and even the sometimes condescending attitude of some of our foreign colleagues
15 “RACE,” ETHNICIZATION, AND DISCRIMINATION: from:
The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Simon Patrick
Abstract: In 1950, the United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization (UNESCO), based in Paris, convened an assembly of eminent scholars to discuss the issue of “race.” Following the Universal Declaration of Human Rights (1948), the time had come to develop a strategy aimed at ending racism. The options were
eitherto discredit the very concept of race and prohibit the use of the word or to preserve its scientific validity (specifically in classifications to describe human populations), but strip it of its hierarchizing value as a means of addressing, and quelling, potential uses for segregation and extermination. Scholars were divided
22 THE GREAT STRIP SHOW: from:
The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Dorlin Elsa
Abstract: In a speech delivered on June 22, 2009, at the Chateau de Versailles in a joint session of parliament, the first time a French president had addressed that body in over one hundred years, Nicolas Sarkozy made the following pronouncement: “The burqa is not welcome on French soil.” Seizing the opportunity to capitalize on yet another “head scarf affair,” this declaration was made in spite of the fact that a parliamentary factgathering mission initiated by André Gérin (Communist Party) was already underway in response to an obscure report released by the French internal security police (the sousdirection de l’information générale,
29 INFILTRATION OF LIQUID POPULISM from:
The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Liogier Raphaël
Abstract: The overused notion of “populism” should not be conflated with the term bandied about by politicians who say what they think voters want to hear. Nor is populism related to popular preoccupations, those of artisans, fishermen, workers, hunters, farmers, engineers, doctors, the rich, or the poor. In the enthusiasm surrounding populism, concrete categories within the population—professions, at times contradictory interests, class distinctions—tend to be elided over in favor of a fiction of an all encompassing, omnipresent, and omniscient people, who are believed to have a single soul and unified identity. Populists can be either Marxist, like Stalin, or
31 ANTIRACISM: from:
The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Debono Emmanuel
Abstract: As with all great causes, antiracism includes at least three aspects: individual, collective, and institutional. At a time when antiracism movements are under attack, often being reduced to their most militant forms, it seems important to
34 IS A COLONIAL HISTORY MUSEUM POLITICALLY IMPOSSIBLE? from:
The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Blanchard Pascal
Abstract: After three decades of silence (1960 1990) and amnesty/amnesia, we have now entered a time of confrontation—set off by debates surrounding the Algerian War in the 1990s—memory wars at the highest levels of politics—from the law on “positive colonization” in 2005 to the memorial laws of 2011—and from the “chaos of individual grief”¹ toward claims articulated by every
communityfor recognition. The colonial past has become political. On the one hand, there is the left, which has never been able to confront this history or even imagine a scholarly approach to it. On the other,
1 WONK MASCULINITY from:
The Year's Work in Nerds, Wonks, and Neocons
Author(s) ALLEN DENNIS
Abstract: Sometime during the summer of 2013, Rick Perry, then governor of Texas, began wearing glasses. Now, these were not just any glasses but a pair of very big, very obvious, black-framed spectacles reminiscent of Clark Kent, which the media, with some consistency, referred to as “nerd glasses.” Since Perry’s general self-presentation had up until then run toward an extremely traditional “man’s man” image, this change prompted considerable speculation in the press. Ultimately, the pundits’ consensus was that after a disastrous performance in the 2011 Republican primary campaign, including a debate in which he forgot one of his main talking points
5 THE NEOCONSERVATIVE IMAGINATION from:
The Year's Work in Nerds, Wonks, and Neocons
Author(s) GLASER JENNIFER
Abstract: As I struggled to finish a monograph on Jews, race, and writing, I couldn’t help but feel that I was futilely circling the point. Yes, Jewish writers were preoccupied with questions of race and racialization after the rise of civil rights in America. Yes, many of these same writers (and the intellectuals who influenced them) grappled with their anxiety by speaking in the cadences of more marginalized and racially marked others. But these arguments never felt like they fully encompassed the sometimes messy politics of race at the heart of postwar Jewish life. My project, like those of the Jewish
13 AUTISM, NERDS, AND INSECURITY from:
The Year's Work in Nerds, Wonks, and Neocons
Author(s) SILVERMAN CHLOE
Abstract: In December of 2012, the US government effectively lost what newspapers referred to as a “ten year battle” to extradite a Scottish systems analyst named Gary McKinnon so that he could face charges for committing, in the words of prosecution attorneys, “the biggest military computer hack of all time.”¹ McKinnon maintained that he hacked into NASA and US military computers in order to locate suppressed evidence of UFOs, a special interest of his. He claimed that government agencies were concealing evidence of UFO crashes, effectively hiding knowledge of abundant, clean, alien energy sources of potential benefit to humanity. McKinnon has
CHAPTER 2 “A Main Station at One’s Front Door”: from:
Migration and Mobility in the Modern Age
Author(s) Wood Nathaniel D.
Abstract: IN 1899, THE VARSOVIAN civil engineer Emil Sokal wrote, “In the West, they maintain that time is money; here it seems that time still has little value, yet there will come a time of change when rapid locomotion will prove extremely valuable, just as it allegedly already is abroad, except that the automobile will become an extraordinary advantage for us by replacing in many instances the railway with a main station at one’s front door.”¹ Sokal’s enthusiasm for the automobile was much like the famed writer Bolesiaw Prus’s fervor for the bicycle eight years earlier, when he gushed that the
CHAPTER 5 Dynamic Bohemians: from:
Migration and Mobility in the Modern Age
Author(s) Winestein Anna
Abstract: THE PERIOD FROM 1870 to 1930 was the heyday of visual artistic exchange between France and Russia, during which countless Russian and later Soviet artists traveled to Paris to visit, study, create, advance their careers, and simply live. They naturally gravitated toward creative compatriots—other artists, poets and writers, musicians, scholars and scientists—but sometimes also turned to political émigrés, revolutionaries, or alternatively diplomats and other representatives of Russian officialdom. The informal networks and structured organizations that emerged not only connected the artists with other Russians in Paris but helped them interact and even integrate into the broader French art
CHAPTER 6 Sex at the Border: from:
Migration and Mobility in the Modern Age
Author(s) Stauter-Halsted Keely
Abstract: THE TURN OF the twentieth century was a time of nearly constant human movement out of Eastern Europe. A huge portion of the population of the Polish lands left home during the decades leading up to World War I, with some 8 percent of ethnic Poles crossing international boundaries for seasonal or long-term work.¹ This heightened mobility brought with it chaos, corruption, and anxiety about the fate of loved ones across the sea.² Those left behind reserved special concern for the fortunes of single women traveling abroad on their own.³ Families worried about the vulnerabilities young women suffered during the
3 Metaphor and Related Means of Reasoning from:
Music and Embodied Cognition
Abstract: Throughout each day we implicitly and explicitly ask
What is that?and the most direct way in which we answer this question is via categorization, as in naming or recognizing things according animal species, kinds of vegetables, types of musical instruments, and so on. This basic question often takes the richer form ofHow shall we understand this?which we sometimes answer via metaphor—that is, by conceptualizing something from one category in terms of another category to which it normally does not belong. Literary examples, such as Shakespeare’s prating stones (Macbeth) and Maya Angelou’s “I’m a black ocean, leaping
Chapter Five THE DEMISE OF ‘SOCIALIST REALISM FOR EXPORT’ IN 1947: from:
Socialist Realism in Central and Eastern European Literatures under Stalin
Author(s) Zubok Vladislav M.
Abstract: For the cultural and intellectual elites of the Soviet Union, the Cold War with the West started a whole year after the domestic one, usually known as
zhdanovshchina: the xenophobic campaign that praised Russo-centric cultural isolationism and denounced Western ‘decadent’ influences. This sequence had fatal implications for the staff of the Soviet institutions of cultural propaganda and their ‘intelligentsia’ – established writers, experts on foreign literature, and others. They entered the Cold War with the recent wartime allies without any strategy or techniques, while already in the process of fighting for their lives against domestic crackdown and reaction. Another structural
Chapter Seventeen BIG BROTHER’S GRAVITY: from:
Socialist Realism in Central and Eastern European Literatures under Stalin
Author(s) Ponomarev Evgeny
Abstract: A literary magazine, or a ‘thick journal’, was a unique element of Soviet literary culture. Modelled on pre-revolutionary literary magazines that published the writings of authors belonging to a certain creative movement, or works of a certain genre, in the Soviet time thick journals turned into a voice of the authorities, promoting the ‘ideologically correct’ literature of the new age. After all the writers’ organizations in the USSR had been disbanded in 1932 and the Soviet Writers’ Congress called shortly thereafter to set the standards of socialist realism, the new function of thick journals became clear: they were to operate
Chapter Nineteen WILL FREEDOM SING AS BEAUTIFULLY AS CAPTIVES SANG ABOUT IT? from:
Socialist Realism in Central and Eastern European Literatures under Stalin
Author(s) Ivić Nenad
Abstract: Ljudevit Galic was an actor, with no formal education. Mobilized in 1941, he struggled through the war acting in provincial theatres. He joined the partisans in Bosnia. When the war was almost over, in 1945, he was 26. Freedom was near, and he was anxious: ‘My worries […] were great. What will become of us when this disaster is over? Everything is a menace and mostly the thought that “time will overtake us” unless we educate ourselves. Endless discussions in last few months discovered many gaps in our general and professional education. We have sunk very low,’ he wrote in
CONCLUSION from:
Socialist Realism in Central and Eastern European Literatures under Stalin
Author(s) Jonsson-Skradol Natalia
Abstract: Hannah Arendt remarked that one of the paradoxes inherent in totalitarian states is that, on the one hand, their professed veneration of transformations induces in them a deep-seated fear of stability and permanence, but on the other hand, for these regimes to function, their institutions require a certain degree of predictability and continuity.¹ The Soviet experience, reproduced in different versions multiple times beyond the borders of the country, is a testimony to the truth of this statement. At the same time, it also points to yet another aporia at the heart of the great political and cultural experiment. As the
Chapter Six MIRCEA VULCĂNESCU, A CONTROVERSIAL CASE: from:
Holocaust Public Memory in Postcommunist Romania
Author(s) Florian Alexandru
Abstract: In 1989, at the time of the December Revolution, Romania had only one highway, 120 kilometers long. In 2017, despite all the strategies to modernize the infrastructure, there are only two highways and parts of a third; there is no highway from north to south, or from east to west. When we think of places of memory,
lieux de mémoirein public spaces, the situation is no better—the postcommunist public space includes very diverse and very contradictory memorials to the recent past. For example, a bust of Adrian Păunescu, a poet and ideologue during the Ceaușescu regime, was erected
CHAPTER FIVE Medieval Readings: from:
Eve and Adam
Abstract: The medieval era¹ produced a variety of portrayals of Eve and Adam. While most accounts proposed hierarchical readings, a number of egalitarian readings emerged as well. This chapter continues our discussion of Jewish and Christian interpretations while adding a third significant partner: Islamic interpretations. In this time period, Islam enters the scene as a distinct religious tradition; thus we open this chapter with Muslim portrayals of Eve or—as she is known in Arabic—“Hawwa’.”
Book Title: Levinas and the Trauma of Responsibility-The Ethical Significance of Time
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Coe Cynthia D.
Abstract: Levinas's account of responsibility challenges dominant notions of time, autonomy, and subjectivity according to Cynthia D. Coe. Employing the concept of trauma in Levinas's late writings, Coe draws together his understanding of time and his claim that responsibility is an obligation to the other that cannot be anticipated or warded off. Tracing the broad significance of these ideas, Coe shows how Levinas revises our notions of moral agency, knowledge, and embodiment. Her focus on time brings a new interpretive lens to Levinas's work and reflects on a wider discussion of the fragmentation of human experience as an ethical subject. Coe's understanding of trauma and time offers a new appreciation of how Levinas can inform debates about gender, race, mortality, and animality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt20d87sf
1 Deformalizing Time from:
Levinas and the Trauma of Responsibility
Abstract: In a 1988 interview, Levinas claims that the “essential theme of my research is the deformalization of the notion of time” (OUJ 232). At first glance, this identification of time as his “essential theme” seems counterintuitive, given his steadfast focus on the nature of responsibility and the subject’s relation to alterity. However, how we understand time shapes how we understand the self, and Levinas argues that a formal conception of time supports the modern ideal of autonomous subjectivity. Time can be seen as either enabling or disrupting the position of the subject as a detached knower and willful agent in
2 The Traumatic Impact of Deformalized Time from:
Levinas and the Trauma of Responsibility
Abstract: On levinas’s reading, formal conceptions of time depict a neutral order within which we experience events and beings. These accounts correlatively naturalize a subject who comprehends and controls her surroundings. When Levinas identifies the deformalization of time as central to his philosophical work, he is thus engaged in the critique of the image of subjectivity presupposed by formal conceptions of time. Starting in the late 1960s, Levinas describes time’s “meaningful content somehow prior to form” as traumatic: a responsibility for the other imposed on the subject, which consciousness is always too late to assimilate as a phenomenon (OUJ 232).
3 The Method of An-Archeology from:
Levinas and the Trauma of Responsibility
Abstract: Levinas’s prominent use of the concept of trauma provokes the question of how responsibility can be thematized at all, given its status as a trace rather than a phenomenon—an experience that can be unproblematically represented by consciousness. Through its rhetorical peculiarities, his philosophical style reflects his claims about the subject’s encounter with what exceeds, frustrates, or otherwise interrupts conceptualization. This chapter will analyze Levinas’s method of “saying and unsaying,” with particular attention to his repudiation of narration in
Otherwise than Being. Given that narration is one way to reduce the lapse of time to a unified representation, this methodological
4 Between Theodicy and Despair from:
Levinas and the Trauma of Responsibility
Abstract: Levinas’s critique of narrative and the conception of the narrating subject that underlies it leads him to the issue of how time is synchronized in the philosophy of history, where the process of abstraction from the singular other is most prominent. By interpreting the significance of disparate events and integrating them into a coherent account, the disciplinary approaches of history typically assume a formal conception of time, in which a linear chronology can be represented by consciousness. In other words, past events are treated as intentional objects. This synchronization of time entails generalizing from people’s experiences, selectively emphasizing certain elements
8 Animals and Creatures from:
Levinas and the Trauma of Responsibility
Abstract: The previous two chapters have raised a cluster of issues about the implications of Levinas’s understanding of embodiment for the relationship between human and nonhuman animals, particularly given his emphasis on the subject’s status as a creature. Levinas defends a very traditional form of anthropocentrism, which leads him to the conclusion that animals fall outside of the ethical encounter between the self and the other. He thus has very little to say about animals. But in the wake of his radical reconception of subjectivity—as heteronomous, embodied, and ineradicably affected by time—the question of how human creatures relate to
Conclusion: from:
Levinas and the Trauma of Responsibility
Abstract: This book has focused on the array of issues around subjectivity and time that emerges out of Levinas’s thought and particularly how he challenges the mastery over time that helps to define the ideal of the sovereign subject—an ideal that has prevailed in various iterations in modern Western culture. That sense of mastery and its accompanying anxieties have shaped dominant conceptions of not only responsibility, justice, and freedom, but also of gender, race, embodiment, mortality, and animality. For Levinas, this understanding of subjectivity affirms and perpetuates the basic attitude of the
conatus essendi, the striving to persevere in one’s
3. Numinous Subjects from:
Numinous Subjects
Abstract: The sacred. ‘The
sacred is equivalent to a power, and, in the last analysis, to reality. The sacred is saturated with being.’¹ So we are dealing with ontology then. But ontology with a kick, it would seem. ‘The full range of the term sacred, or rather, of the Latin sacer, which is sometimes
Questions from:
Numinous Subjects
Abstract: I wonder why it is the case that at this time within the western cultural imaginary white working-class women are
expected to be strong and to speak their minds, to possess a wealth of common-sense wisdom. And I wonder why a white working-class woman who makes no secret of enjoying sex is so liable to be called a slut, a whore. Why are black women expected to be spectacularly powerful mothers, to find ways out of no way to provide for their children? Why are out-spoken black women so often assumed to be as well pillars of moral authority? And
7. Stories from Childhood: from:
Echoes of the Tambaran
Author(s) Leavitt Stephen C.
Abstract: Childhood stories in personal narratives of Western subjects often convey pivotal moments of experience aimed at communicating personal identity. Such strategies rely on cultural models that see identity as the product of past life events, with childhood experience especially important. But what do personal childhood stories reveal in societies with very different cultural models of early lifeʹs role in shaping identity? Among the Bumbita Arapesh of Papua New Guinea—a group bordering the Ilahita Arapesh—childhood is the time of life when a new growing being takes in essential life substance from parental nurturing, supplemented by ritual transformation in initiation
14. The Anthropologistʹs Voice: from:
Echoes of the Tambaran
Author(s) Losche Diane
Abstract: This chapter is dedicated, as is this book, to the memory of Don Tuzin, a great anthropologist who studied the Arapesh-speaking village of Ilahita in the Sepik region of Papua New Guinea. If I seem, at times, to be a wayward admirer, critiquing as well as giving homage, I hope that this will be taken in the spirit meant—as an essay presented in the absence of a great talk with Don, usually a brief time out from the chatter of professional meetings when, for a few moments, two voices might be heard speaking animatedly, sometimes hesitantly, grasping for the
INTRODUCTION from:
Architecture, Ethics, and Technology
Author(s) PÉREZ-GÓMEZ ALBERTO
Abstract: D’où vient qu’en cette dernière décennie de notre millénaire, les professions du design se préoccupent soudainement des questions d’éthique et y consacrent de nombreux colloques? Dans un contexte où la pratique contemporaine en architecture est dictée par des impératifs économiques ou politiques, dire que le bien commun doit être un souci fondamental paraîtra vide de sens ou tout simplement faux aux yeux de certains philosophes poststructuralistes, qui estiment qu’il faut « déconstruire » les vieilles valeurs humanistes – une position qui a eu sur l’architecture nord-américaine une influence considérable.
POUR QUE LA VIE AIT LIEU (FRAGMENTS) from:
Architecture, Ethics, and Technology
Author(s) MADEC PHILIPPE
Abstract: Nos pères, eux, étaient persuadés de trouver les fondements de l’architecture dans l’activité de l’architecte, dans le projet et ses effets: les textes, les dessins et les bâtiments.
THE ETHICS OF NARRATIVE AT TRENT UNIVERSITY from:
Architecture, Ethics, and Technology
Author(s) HENRIQUEZ GREGORY
Abstract: The incomprehensible rate of change of the modern world brings with it the more-than-uneasy feeling that the outcome is unknown, that doom is at hand. The threat once represented by the atomic bomb has been replaced by the ecological crisis and the population explosion. We need somehow to restore faith in the future of the human race, both physically and spiritually. Canada’s multicultural society could be called an excellent example of the homogenization of values and, at the same time, a mosaic of values. As we await the new unified “world order” of trade and tariffs, our country’s cultural values
CHAPTER FOUR An Extension of Some Theoretical Propositions from:
Comics and Narration
Abstract: In
System 1, I devoted myself at some length to the description and examination of the basic units of comics language: the balloon, the panel, the strip, and the page, analyzing how they are deployed and interact with each other; the actualization of these units in the spaces, frames and sites of the album makes up what I have proposed to call a spatio-topical system. When I drew out those observations, I claimed only that they applied to comics, more specifically to Western comics, and to comics appearing in the sole format that we were familiar with at that time,
CHAPTER SEVEN The Rhythms of Comics from:
Comics and Narration
Abstract: Consequently, so is “music.” And since comic art is distinguished by its capacity for converting time into space,¹ the rhythmic scansion of the narrative necessarily implies certain ways of occupying space.
Chapter Four A Future in Relation to the Other from:
Desi Divas
Abstract: As I write this, the tenth anniversary of 9/11 is upon us. In the decade following the terrorist attacks on the World Trade Center and the Pentagon, much has changed in the United States, particularly for South Asian Americans. As Divakaruni’s quote suggests, while South Asian American community members mourned the terrible events, for many their horror was mixed with fear. In this crisis, an unfortunate number of South Asian Americans became the target of verbal insults and physical threats from both strangers and neighbors, sometimes despite lifetimes spent participating in civic activities, building local relationships, or creating community connections.
II Does Postmodernism Have a Substance? from:
Postmodernism and Cultural Identities
Abstract: Let us step closer to the crucial questions of the present book. We just asked ourselves whether the decades that are now most often called “postmodernist” fit into any of the patterns of the philosophy of culture as understood until now or whether they signal a wide chasm between the “age of history” and the present or the future. We also asked ourselves whether an entirely new mode of understanding the philosophy of culture has to be forged, one that should be adapted to the new events of our contemporary time.
IV Conservatism as a Branch of Liberalism from:
Postmodernism and Cultural Identities
Abstract: It may be useful to introduce at this point in the flow of our general narrative the following question: Is the current situation (in the first decade of the twenty-first century) entirely unique? Does humanity encounter it for the first time without any prior analogy? Is the dialectic between convulsive and buzzing relativity and separate zones of serene isolation totally unexpected? I said in a previous chapter that history may well be understood as a succession of unpredictable episodes, so devised or prepared by divine providence (or not), and that such episodes are meant to function each time as fresh,
VI Christian Martyrdom and Christian Humanism from:
Postmodernism and Cultural Identities
Abstract: For various complicated motives (sometimes too unpleasant to discuss, even when they are suspected), Christianity has been often regarded (and sometimes still is) by many as a religion of victory, of triumph, of battles won, and of domination (early on Origen felt obliged to combat this erroneous understanding). Such an impression was encouraged among other things by the impressively swift spread of this faith on all continents of our planet: in its first few centuries around the Mediterranean basin; thereafter for another few centuries throughout Europe, among the immigrant tribes massively settling here; finally, during the latest half-millennium, on all
IX Globalism, Multiculturalism, and Comparative Literature from:
Postmodernism and Cultural Identities
Abstract: Multiculturalism emerged into full maturity as a political and a literary topic only ater the end of the cold war. Nowadays it seems to affect the innermost mechanisms of contemporary societies, and sometimes to cast doubt on our corporate, or even our very individual, identities. It is part of the great postmodernist whirlwind of anarchic relativization that has spread over our planet and over the human race. Throughout our narrative I have sought to define it, to explain its part in the current world, and to point to some possible stabilizing and tempering forces in the world. Among these, I
XVI The Argument from Defeat from:
Postmodernism and Cultural Identities
Abstract: I will now introduce another relevant fact, one that will sometimes overlap with, but, I am sure, also strengthen the points I have already made. To repeat, aesthetic imagination and literature especially have been regarded with doubt, in fact with hostility, by all kinds of regimes and systems over the centuries, from Mediterranean antiquity and the Middle Ages to “bourgeois” and democratic states, not excluding self-censorship and “political correctness,” and certainly the great totalitarian systems of the twentieth century. All were severe in their attempt to eradicate or at least to marginalize aesthetic imagination and to rein in literature. Why
XVIII Reinventing Romanticism or Nineteenth-Century Kitsch? from:
Postmodernism and Cultural Identities
Abstract: Not only is classicism (as just shown) an example of “stability in change,” so too is romanticism. The following chapter will select one group of authors, one moment in time, but will concentrate on just one author, and try to illustrate how things occur.
XIX Ernst Jünger, Distance, Proximity, and Transfer of Cultural Values from:
Postmodernism and Cultural Identities
Abstract: The case of Ernst Jünger, one of the greatest German writers of the twentieth century, is highly significant in connection with the studies undertaken in the present book. Above all, he is significant because his life and the period of his writing career cover an unusually long time, virtually the whole of the twentieth century, and his artistic sensibility responded faithfully to all the changes experienced during this time. The author’s responses were highly symptomatic not least because they focused on three points that are fully relevant to our stream of ideas. One of these is the dialectic between alienating
INTRODUCTION from:
Reading Patristic Texts on Social Ethics
Abstract: This volume investigates the potential for a dialogue between the social teachings of the Fathers and the living theology of Catholic social thought today. Although creating a dialogue between worlds of ideas separated by fifteen centuries would seem to pose some difficulties, the contributors to this volume express such wide-ranging concerns that one wonders if success is even likely. At the same time, this volume explores several important features of any attempt at a dialogue.
8. The Principle of Detachment from Private Property in Basil of Caesarea’s from:
Reading Patristic Texts on Social Ethics
Author(s) Matz Brian
Abstract: I have two sons. The older of my boys, now age four, enjoys building elaborate sets with his wooden train tracks. The younger of my boys, now age one, enjoys “playing” with his older brother by tearing apart the train set as it is being built. The four-year-old is understandably upset, and some sort of physical behavior is displayed to retrieve the tracks from his younger brother. What is a parent to do in this situation? I suggest the problem is not simple. The older boy has applied his time, energy, and talents into constructing something new from which he
INTRODUCTION from:
Reading Patristic Texts on Social Ethics
Abstract: This volume investigates the potential for a dialogue between the social teachings of the Fathers and the living theology of Catholic social thought today. Although creating a dialogue between worlds of ideas separated by fifteen centuries would seem to pose some difficulties, the contributors to this volume express such wide-ranging concerns that one wonders if success is even likely. At the same time, this volume explores several important features of any attempt at a dialogue.
8. The Principle of Detachment from Private Property in Basil of Caesarea’s from:
Reading Patristic Texts on Social Ethics
Author(s) Matz Brian
Abstract: I have two sons. The older of my boys, now age four, enjoys building elaborate sets with his wooden train tracks. The younger of my boys, now age one, enjoys “playing” with his older brother by tearing apart the train set as it is being built. The four-year-old is understandably upset, and some sort of physical behavior is displayed to retrieve the tracks from his younger brother. What is a parent to do in this situation? I suggest the problem is not simple. The older boy has applied his time, energy, and talents into constructing something new from which he
INTRODUCTION from:
Reading Patristic Texts on Social Ethics
Abstract: This volume investigates the potential for a dialogue between the social teachings of the Fathers and the living theology of Catholic social thought today. Although creating a dialogue between worlds of ideas separated by fifteen centuries would seem to pose some difficulties, the contributors to this volume express such wide-ranging concerns that one wonders if success is even likely. At the same time, this volume explores several important features of any attempt at a dialogue.
8. The Principle of Detachment from Private Property in Basil of Caesarea’s from:
Reading Patristic Texts on Social Ethics
Author(s) Matz Brian
Abstract: I have two sons. The older of my boys, now age four, enjoys building elaborate sets with his wooden train tracks. The younger of my boys, now age one, enjoys “playing” with his older brother by tearing apart the train set as it is being built. The four-year-old is understandably upset, and some sort of physical behavior is displayed to retrieve the tracks from his younger brother. What is a parent to do in this situation? I suggest the problem is not simple. The older boy has applied his time, energy, and talents into constructing something new from which he
Epilogue: from:
Love Song for the Life of the Mind
Abstract: If what I have been arguing for is true about comedy, then it might also have been a thought familiar to that one-time dramatist and lover of Aristophanes, Plato, and so, feeling merry and self-indulgent at the end of this project—it being a season of merriment—and entertaining the fleeting recollection of having been, in a previous life, a flute girl in the house of Agathon, I will make bold in closing to philosophize a little about the famous drinking party. Plato’s
Symposium concludes with the “outrageous paradox”² that the same man who can write tragedy can write comedy
Chapter One Rhetoric before “Rhetoric” from:
Rhetoric in Antiquity
Abstract: From the time of the Homeric poems, which are the first literary Greek texts, the spoken word and persuasion occupy an important place. I. J. F. de Jong has calculated that in the
Iliad, speeches in direct discourse, by number of verses, represent 45 percent of the entire length of the poem. The epic, therefore, joins narrative and speech in an almost equal partnership by having the characters whose adventures it relates speak in a direct manner. Even in the midst of battles and dangers, the “winged words,” as a formulaic expression calls them, constitute an essential dimension of Homeric
Chapter One Rhetoric before “Rhetoric” from:
Rhetoric in Antiquity
Abstract: From the time of the Homeric poems, which are the first literary Greek texts, the spoken word and persuasion occupy an important place. I. J. F. de Jong has calculated that in the
Iliad, speeches in direct discourse, by number of verses, represent 45 percent of the entire length of the poem. The epic, therefore, joins narrative and speech in an almost equal partnership by having the characters whose adventures it relates speak in a direct manner. Even in the midst of battles and dangers, the “winged words,” as a formulaic expression calls them, constitute an essential dimension of Homeric
2 Resilience Input for a Virtue-Based Philosophical Anthropology from:
Resilience and the virtue of fortitude
Abstract: In this chapter, I investigate further the research on protective and risk processes.¹ I interpret the insights within a classic anthropological schema (temperament and emotion, cognitional and volitional processes, and familial and social contexts).² At the same time, I employ an overlapping division that differentiates natural characteristics from religious and spiritual ones. This meta-analysis of the resilience findings inductively identifies resources that make some difference in resilience outcomes. It offers elements for a renewed philosophy of nature and philosophical anthropology.
SIX The Aftermath of from:
Humanae vitae, a generation later
Abstract: Pope paul vi’s reaffirmation of the constant Church teaching was a surprise and a disappointment to many, though, it might also be said that an abandonment of Church teaching would have been an even greater surprise, even to those who ardently desired a change. Many theologians and lay people registered their dissent from Humanae Vitae nearly before the ink was dry.¹ To this day, Humanae Vitae remains a source of bitter debate within the Church. It was widely observed even at the time that Humanae Vitae was issued that never before had a papal statement met with such a reception.
Chapter 2 Skeptical Self-Contradiction in from:
Idling the Engine
Abstract: Because Julio Cortázar’s novel of 1963, Rayuela, or Hopscotch, explores basic questions about knowing, and about reading and writing in particular, it can be considered a broad investigation of hermeneutics, the pervasive and perpetual work of understanding that constitutes human being. It should not surprise us, then, that we encounter at the heart of Hopscotch doubts very similar to those so important to Paradise Lost. Horacio Oliveira, Cortázar’s protagonist, is Satan’s true heir, an engine-idler of the first order. By the time we happen upon Oliveira, he has long thought himself impaired by the original sin of historicity. The doubt
1. THE PHILOSOPHY OF KENNETH L. SCHMITZ: from:
Person, Being, and History
Author(s) Kow James
Abstract: Why take up philosophy? Kenneth L. Schmitz recalls that, while returning from leave in wartime England and browsing in a bookstall, he was astonished to find a book entitled
Does the World Exist? In his words: “Recall the times. That world, too much with us.... What a fantastic mind that could raise such a question! I bought the book and philosophy had trapped a new victim.”¹ A gracious victim, entrapped maybe, but a unique person, who has liberated many of his students and colleagues with his breadth of spirit and mind since then.
4. Deciphering a Recipe for Biblical Preaching in from:
Re-Reading Gregory of Nazianzus
Author(s) Matz Brian J.
Abstract: Everyone who studies the works of Gregory Nazianzen in this day eventually passes with no little amount of pleasure through the scholarship of Fred Norris. I have worked my way more than once through his helpful commentary on Gregory’s
Theological Orations, through his insightful connection between Wittgenstein and Gregory’s own use of language, through his critique of Harnack in appreciating Gregory’s careful use of secular literature, and in many other fields of Gregorian studies that our editor has outlined in his introduction.¹ Meeting Professor Norris for the first time at a meeting of the North American Patristic Society some years
16. St. Gregory the Comic from:
Re-Reading Gregory of Nazianzus
Author(s) McGuckin John A.
Abstract: It was the experience of hearing Fred Norris preach, in church, a
verbatim exposition of one of St. Gregory’s homilies, that made me realize for the first time how funny he was—Gregory, that is. People laughed in all the right places, and accordingly were ready to be “touched to the heart” in all the right places, too, for laughter and weeping can indeed be gateways to the soul. Christian preachers know this, for joy is one of the unfakeable gifts of the Holy Spirit.
3 Augustine and Just War: from:
Ethics, Nationalism, and Just War
Author(s) SYSE HENRIK
Abstract: Augustine is often referred to as the founder of just war doctrine. While that is not quite accurate, since Cicero and several of the earlier Church Fathers had already formulated the basic elements of the just war idea,¹ it is certainly true that Augustine would become the most influential of the early Christian teachers writing on the morality of war. He formulated his ideas at a crucial time in Church history, just when the Western Roman Empire was crumbling and Christianity had to accommodate to life in the world—a world that was showing few signs of an imminent end,
9 Protecting the Natural Environment in Wartime: from:
Ethics, Nationalism, and Just War
Author(s) SYSE HENRIK
Abstract: What protection does the natural environment merit in wartime? It was in the aftermath of the Vietnam War of 1961–75 that this question came into focus. Wars have always brought destruction in their wake; and the twentieth century was by no means the first to show concern for the effects of armed conflict on our natural surroundings. However, the Vietnam War does “stand out in modern history as one in which intentional anti-environmental actions were a major component of the strategy and tactics of one of the adversaries, one in which such actions were systematically carried out for many
15 Genocide: from:
Ethics, Nationalism, and Just War
Author(s) VETLESEN ARNE JOHAN
Abstract: After affirming that genocide is a crime under international law whether committed in time of peace or war, the 1948 Convention on the Prevention and Punishment of the Crime of Genocide defines genocide as “any of the following acts committed with intent to destroy, in whole or in part, a national, ethnic, racial or religious group, as such: killing members of the group; causing serious bodily or mental harm to members of the group; deliberately inflicting on the group conditions of life calculated to bring about its physical destruction in whole or in part; imposing measures intended to prevent births
CHAPTER TWO Kant’s Conception of General Logic from:
Necessity and Possibility
Abstract: Given his preoccupation with logic in the
Critique of Pure Reason, it is an understandable hope that Kant might use the term “logic” in a clear-cut, univocal fashion throughout the text. Unfortunately, such a hope is mere fantasy; Kant uses the term in a bewildering variety of ways, at times making it close to impossible to determine whether he is referring to (among others) general logic, transcendental logic, transcendental analytic, a “special” logic relative to a specific science, a “natural” logic, a logic intended for the “learned” (Gelehrter), some hybrid of these logics, or even some still more abstract notion
7 HERESY AND CONSENSUS from:
A Sacred Kingdom
Abstract: The ensuing discussion is a reinterpretation of Carolingian royal ideology in the time of Charlemagne, during the establishment of an imperial church. One of the most widely held views of Carolingian politics is that this royal ideology should be thought of as a “political Augustinianism.” The subtle hesitant political views of Augustine were not suited to the life of an aggressively expanding kingdom.¹ To understand the political culture of the Carolingian world, it is more helpful to observe the continued relevance of episcopal law and social doctrine, with their roots in aristocratic traditions of the Mediterranean shore. The meaning of
8 The Twofold Discipleship of the Philosopher: from:
A cosmopolitan hermit
Author(s) Schumacher Michele M.
Abstract: At the time of his first
doctor honoris causa, conferred by the theology faculty of the University of Munich in 1964, Josef Pieper strongly objected to the “error invicibilis” of those who recognized him as a theologian under the pretext that he considered pre-philosophical data in his philosophical act. Declaring his intention to “attack a notion of philosophy which rejects the grandeur of its own origin,”¹ he proposed a rediscovery of the concept of philosophy as presented by the Western tradition. His reflection in the aftermath of the Second World War is radically opposed to Barthian thought, for which the
9 Josef Pieper on the Truth of All things and the World’s True Face from:
A cosmopolitan hermit
Author(s) Cuddeback Matthew
Abstract: The subject of the “truth of things” had continued to ferment within me all this time [during World War II]. Above all, it gradually became clear to me that the old saying
omne ens est verum is by no means a merely abstract doctrine of scholastic metaphysics but an utterly real and relevant statement about the nature of man.²
8 The Twofold Discipleship of the Philosopher: from:
A cosmopolitan hermit
Author(s) Schumacher Michele M.
Abstract: At the time of his first
doctor honoris causa, conferred by the theology faculty of the University of Munich in 1964, Josef Pieper strongly objected to the “error invicibilis” of those who recognized him as a theologian under the pretext that he considered pre-philosophical data in his philosophical act. Declaring his intention to “attack a notion of philosophy which rejects the grandeur of its own origin,”¹ he proposed a rediscovery of the concept of philosophy as presented by the Western tradition. His reflection in the aftermath of the Second World War is radically opposed to Barthian thought, for which the
9 Josef Pieper on the Truth of All things and the World’s True Face from:
A cosmopolitan hermit
Author(s) Cuddeback Matthew
Abstract: The subject of the “truth of things” had continued to ferment within me all this time [during World War II]. Above all, it gradually became clear to me that the old saying
omne ens est verum is by no means a merely abstract doctrine of scholastic metaphysics but an utterly real and relevant statement about the nature of man.²
CHAPTER 6 The Inspiration of Scripture from:
The Eyes of Faith
Abstract: In this chapter, I propose, as an explanatory model, that the continuous interpretative and evaluative activity of the
sensus fidei/fidelium throughout the production, canonical selection, and ongoing reception/traditioning of the set canonical text constitutes its inspiration by the Holy Spirit. We have already seen how “inspiration” was not necessarily an explicit reason/criterion for inclusion of works in the canon, and that, in patristic times, there was a presumption regarding the inspiration of many writings circulating in local communities. Once works achieve canonical status, it is then that the notion of inspiration emerges, later in church history, as one way of
CHAPTER 6 The Inspiration of Scripture from:
The Eyes of Faith
Abstract: In this chapter, I propose, as an explanatory model, that the continuous interpretative and evaluative activity of the
sensus fidei/fidelium throughout the production, canonical selection, and ongoing reception/traditioning of the set canonical text constitutes its inspiration by the Holy Spirit. We have already seen how “inspiration” was not necessarily an explicit reason/criterion for inclusion of works in the canon, and that, in patristic times, there was a presumption regarding the inspiration of many writings circulating in local communities. Once works achieve canonical status, it is then that the notion of inspiration emerges, later in church history, as one way of
CHAPTER 6 The Inspiration of Scripture from:
The Eyes of Faith
Abstract: In this chapter, I propose, as an explanatory model, that the continuous interpretative and evaluative activity of the
sensus fidei/fidelium throughout the production, canonical selection, and ongoing reception/traditioning of the set canonical text constitutes its inspiration by the Holy Spirit. We have already seen how “inspiration” was not necessarily an explicit reason/criterion for inclusion of works in the canon, and that, in patristic times, there was a presumption regarding the inspiration of many writings circulating in local communities. Once works achieve canonical status, it is then that the notion of inspiration emerges, later in church history, as one way of
CHAPTER 6 The Inspiration of Scripture from:
The Eyes of Faith
Abstract: In this chapter, I propose, as an explanatory model, that the continuous interpretative and evaluative activity of the
sensus fidei/fidelium throughout the production, canonical selection, and ongoing reception/traditioning of the set canonical text constitutes its inspiration by the Holy Spirit. We have already seen how “inspiration” was not necessarily an explicit reason/criterion for inclusion of works in the canon, and that, in patristic times, there was a presumption regarding the inspiration of many writings circulating in local communities. Once works achieve canonical status, it is then that the notion of inspiration emerges, later in church history, as one way of
CHAPTER 6 The Inspiration of Scripture from:
The Eyes of Faith
Abstract: In this chapter, I propose, as an explanatory model, that the continuous interpretative and evaluative activity of the
sensus fidei/fidelium throughout the production, canonical selection, and ongoing reception/traditioning of the set canonical text constitutes its inspiration by the Holy Spirit. We have already seen how “inspiration” was not necessarily an explicit reason/criterion for inclusion of works in the canon, and that, in patristic times, there was a presumption regarding the inspiration of many writings circulating in local communities. Once works achieve canonical status, it is then that the notion of inspiration emerges, later in church history, as one way of
4 The Theater of Justice from:
Papal Justice
Abstract: Inquisitorial procedure took firm hold, we know well, as the late Middle Ages shaded into early modern times.¹ It represented the triumph of an asymmetric model of procedure, hard on the defendant, where the judge himself, also an inquisitor, played an active role. He could start proceedings on mere shreds of evidence: a “notice of a crime” sufficed to launch a case
ex officio, that is, on the court’s initiative, in the absence of a public complaint. To start rolling, the machinery of justice relied on the reports of the police and the “reports of barber surgeons” (relationes barbitonsorum), and
Conclusion from:
Papal Justice
Abstract: Sweeping across a span of more than two centuries, this study has tried to capture the fundamental traits of justice in the Papal State. The phenomenon took many forms and was riddled with contradictions; justice cut a splendid figure but had feet that sometimes looked like clay. So, on the one hand, one reading of the rules, institutions, tribunals, and men of law might portray sovereign justice as sitting easy in the saddle. Justice served the papal resolve to build and bolster an ever more cohesive, coherent, and unitary territorial state, in the face of geographic particularism, local patriotism, and
3 Spelling Hopkins’s Leaves from:
Reading the Underthought
Abstract: There is nothing in what Hopkins has written to suggest that he ever knew a Jewish person intimately, or felt the need to engage in any sort of polemics with things Jewish. If the early poem “Soliloquy of One of the Spies” (c. 1864) is taken as an example, we may surmise that, like those medieval Christians described by Beryl Smalley,¹ Hopkins may have thought of the Jews of his time in terms of the figures he knew from the Bible. Therefore, based on the available evidence, we would not argue that Hopkins was consciously or even unconsciously influenced by
3 Spelling Hopkins’s Leaves from:
Reading the Underthought
Abstract: There is nothing in what Hopkins has written to suggest that he ever knew a Jewish person intimately, or felt the need to engage in any sort of polemics with things Jewish. If the early poem “Soliloquy of One of the Spies” (c. 1864) is taken as an example, we may surmise that, like those medieval Christians described by Beryl Smalley,¹ Hopkins may have thought of the Jews of his time in terms of the figures he knew from the Bible. Therefore, based on the available evidence, we would not argue that Hopkins was consciously or even unconsciously influenced by
Chapter One INTRODUCTION from:
The Turn to Transcendence
Abstract: In January 1944 the English Catholic historian Christopher Dawson posed what he called “the basic sociological problem of our time,” the relation of religion and mass culture.³ Writing in the midst of World War II, Dawson saw the choice facing the West as between spiritual renewal, on the one hand, and technocracy and totalitarianism, on the other: “Unless we find a way to restore the contact between the life of society and the life of the spirit our civilization will be destroyed by the forces which it has had the knowledge to create but not wisdom to control.”⁴ Dawson was
INTRODUCTION: from:
Destined for Liberty
Author(s) NOVAK MICHAEL
Abstract: Unless many recent conversations around the country mislead me, intelligent Catholics in significant numbers seem not to be on the same wavelength as Pope John Paul II. In some ways this is odd, because intelligent Catholics usually like an intelligent and articulate pope, and this one is perhaps the most intellectually original, articulate, and prolific pope of the past one hundred years. Some of this discordance results (those who don’t cotton to him sometimes suggest) from their very different reading of Vatican II. Some of it results, they say, from very strong feelings of disagreement about particular questions such as
CHAPTER 4 Consciousness and Efficacy from:
Destined for Liberty
Abstract: Before Wojtyła outlined for the first time his theory of
CHAPTER 6 Conclusions from:
Destined for Liberty
Abstract: The subject of this book, the human person as the efficient cause of his own action, locates the very center of Wojtyła’s philosophy. One reason for this is the intrinsic unity and constant interrelation of anthropology and ethics in the thought of Wojtyła. In his anthropological publications, he always analyzes the ethical implications of the anthropological theses. Correspondingly, when he writes about ethics, he is always interested in the question: “What concept of man underlies a particular ethical theory?” I have been able, therefore, to explore the fundamental themes of Wojtyła’s anthropology and ethics while at the same time safeguarding
INTRODUCTION: from:
Destined for Liberty
Author(s) NOVAK MICHAEL
Abstract: Unless many recent conversations around the country mislead me, intelligent Catholics in significant numbers seem not to be on the same wavelength as Pope John Paul II. In some ways this is odd, because intelligent Catholics usually like an intelligent and articulate pope, and this one is perhaps the most intellectually original, articulate, and prolific pope of the past one hundred years. Some of this discordance results (those who don’t cotton to him sometimes suggest) from their very different reading of Vatican II. Some of it results, they say, from very strong feelings of disagreement about particular questions such as
CHAPTER 4 Consciousness and Efficacy from:
Destined for Liberty
Abstract: Before Wojtyła outlined for the first time his theory of
CHAPTER 6 Conclusions from:
Destined for Liberty
Abstract: The subject of this book, the human person as the efficient cause of his own action, locates the very center of Wojtyła’s philosophy. One reason for this is the intrinsic unity and constant interrelation of anthropology and ethics in the thought of Wojtyła. In his anthropological publications, he always analyzes the ethical implications of the anthropological theses. Correspondingly, when he writes about ethics, he is always interested in the question: “What concept of man underlies a particular ethical theory?” I have been able, therefore, to explore the fundamental themes of Wojtyła’s anthropology and ethics while at the same time safeguarding
CHAPTER THREE THE PHENOMENOLOGY OF THE EARLY HEIDEGGER from:
The Early Heidegger and Medieval Philosophy
Abstract: The early Heidegger’s circuitous path, from the Habilitationsschrift to Sein und Zeit ultimately moves in a single direction. The question that drives the Daseinanalytic of Sein und Zeit—the question of the being of time—first surfaces in Heidegger’s 1995 Scotus research. It reappears in the 1917–19 mysticism research, the remarks on Luther, the 1920–21 religion lectures, and the 1921–26 Aristotle research. The early Freiburg lectures document the variety of approaches Heidegger took to this problem, tentative solutions, experiments with language, and forays into the tradition, some that became lifelong projects, like the retrieval of non-Platonic Greek
CHAPTER NINE BEING-BEFORE-GOD IN THE MIDDLE AGES from:
The Early Heidegger and Medieval Philosophy
Abstract: Scholasticism did not leave the Jewish-Christian sense of history as it found it nor did it annul it. It sublated the early Christian understanding of time, fusing it with Hellenistic theoretical structures into a distinctively new way of being Christian. Greco-Roman “circular thinking” (the emphasis on the eternity of form) and Jewish-Christian historical thinking (the emphasis on the singularity of event), which initially tended to conflict with one another, achieved a precarious balance in Scholasticism. The Jewish-Christian historical sense was initially antagonistic to cultural and scientific life. There was no sense in building up culture when the Last Day was
Book Title: The Texture of Being-essays in first philosophy
Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Author(s): O’Herron Paul
Abstract: Diverse in topics yet unified in purpose, this volume brings together Schmitz's penetrating and rich insight into being, produced over many years, to offer readers a magisterial study from one of the great Christian philosophers of our time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2853wm
Chapter 4 NEITHER WITH NOR WITHOUT FOUNDATIONS from:
The Texture of Being
Abstract: This essay was originally prepared for the 1988 Metaphysical Society meeting, where I had been asked to speak out of what has been called “the great tradition,” concerning the rumored “end of metaphysics.” It is important, however, to notice what followed the colon in the chosen theme: “the question of foundations.” For metaphysics has been pronounced dead several times already, according to different autopsies: by skepticism, nominalism, empiricism, and at least two versions of positivism, the one prescribed by Auguste Comte and the other more recently mandated by the Vienna Circle. Indeed, death notices of metaphysics have become traditional in
Chapter 9 THE GEOGRAPHY OF THE HUMAN PERSON from:
The Texture of Being
Abstract: If an inquisitive acquaintance gets uncomfortably close to what we don’t want broadcast to others, we are likely to demur with the excuse: “I really don’t want to talk about that, it’s very personal.” If the questioner has any sensitivity at all, that should warn him or her off any further inquisition, since to cry “Personal” is one of our acceptable informal social ways of preserving our privacy. In another sense of the term, however, we may credit a person (sometimes a figure in authority) with treating us “as a person.” By that, we mean that he or she respects
Chapter 11 THE FIRST PRINCIPLE OF PERSONAL BECOMING from:
The Texture of Being
Abstract: Personal development has two broad phases: the first is that of infancy, childhood, and adolescence; the second is that of our continuing development as adults. Without excluding the former, I wish to concentrate upon the latter in order to describe what I will argue is a spiritual form of life in the individual human being. Becoming in the order of human personhood arises out of a dynamic source that is not easy to name with accuracy. It has been called the “psyche,” or “subjectivity,” or “personality,” and sometimes “the human spirit,” though the latter term often remains rather too vague
Chapter 12 PURITY OF SOUL AND IMMORTALITY from:
The Texture of Being
Abstract: It is said of St. Thomas Aquinas’ teacher, St. Albert the Great, that he grew forgetful towards the end of his life and began to say mass for himself as though he were dead:
quasi defunctus est. The fact that he was one of the most learned persons of Western Europe during his lifetime did not save him from a pathetic loss of memory. The story illustrates a bitter knowledge known from time immemorial: that age may steal away one’s innermost possessions. Of course, it has always been known too that a blow upon the head in the prime of
Chapter 16 THE DEATH OF GOD AND THE REBIRTH OF MAN from:
The Texture of Being
Abstract: Metaphors of language sometimes express a reality that stricter and more modest conceptions do not express so well. Moreover, some striking metaphors, such as the “death of God,” can give expression to real conditions in our culture. The intention of this essay is to sketch a current problematic—the widespread acceptance of the absence of God in the cultures of technologically advanced societies of the so-called Western type¹—and to suggest a strategy for a metaphysical intervention in that problematic. The temporal field within which the paper moves is the
process of modernization over the past four hundred years, principally
Book Title: The Texture of Being-essays in first philosophy
Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Author(s): O’Herron Paul
Abstract: Diverse in topics yet unified in purpose, this volume brings together Schmitz's penetrating and rich insight into being, produced over many years, to offer readers a magisterial study from one of the great Christian philosophers of our time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2853wm
Chapter 4 NEITHER WITH NOR WITHOUT FOUNDATIONS from:
The Texture of Being
Abstract: This essay was originally prepared for the 1988 Metaphysical Society meeting, where I had been asked to speak out of what has been called “the great tradition,” concerning the rumored “end of metaphysics.” It is important, however, to notice what followed the colon in the chosen theme: “the question of foundations.” For metaphysics has been pronounced dead several times already, according to different autopsies: by skepticism, nominalism, empiricism, and at least two versions of positivism, the one prescribed by Auguste Comte and the other more recently mandated by the Vienna Circle. Indeed, death notices of metaphysics have become traditional in
Chapter 9 THE GEOGRAPHY OF THE HUMAN PERSON from:
The Texture of Being
Abstract: If an inquisitive acquaintance gets uncomfortably close to what we don’t want broadcast to others, we are likely to demur with the excuse: “I really don’t want to talk about that, it’s very personal.” If the questioner has any sensitivity at all, that should warn him or her off any further inquisition, since to cry “Personal” is one of our acceptable informal social ways of preserving our privacy. In another sense of the term, however, we may credit a person (sometimes a figure in authority) with treating us “as a person.” By that, we mean that he or she respects
Chapter 11 THE FIRST PRINCIPLE OF PERSONAL BECOMING from:
The Texture of Being
Abstract: Personal development has two broad phases: the first is that of infancy, childhood, and adolescence; the second is that of our continuing development as adults. Without excluding the former, I wish to concentrate upon the latter in order to describe what I will argue is a spiritual form of life in the individual human being. Becoming in the order of human personhood arises out of a dynamic source that is not easy to name with accuracy. It has been called the “psyche,” or “subjectivity,” or “personality,” and sometimes “the human spirit,” though the latter term often remains rather too vague
Chapter 12 PURITY OF SOUL AND IMMORTALITY from:
The Texture of Being
Abstract: It is said of St. Thomas Aquinas’ teacher, St. Albert the Great, that he grew forgetful towards the end of his life and began to say mass for himself as though he were dead:
quasi defunctus est. The fact that he was one of the most learned persons of Western Europe during his lifetime did not save him from a pathetic loss of memory. The story illustrates a bitter knowledge known from time immemorial: that age may steal away one’s innermost possessions. Of course, it has always been known too that a blow upon the head in the prime of
Chapter 16 THE DEATH OF GOD AND THE REBIRTH OF MAN from:
The Texture of Being
Abstract: Metaphors of language sometimes express a reality that stricter and more modest conceptions do not express so well. Moreover, some striking metaphors, such as the “death of God,” can give expression to real conditions in our culture. The intention of this essay is to sketch a current problematic—the widespread acceptance of the absence of God in the cultures of technologically advanced societies of the so-called Western type¹—and to suggest a strategy for a metaphysical intervention in that problematic. The temporal field within which the paper moves is the
process of modernization over the past four hundred years, principally
Book Title: Mirages and Mad Beliefs-Proust the Skeptic
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Prendergast Christopher
Abstract: Marcel Proust was long the object of a cult in which the main point of reading his great novel
In Search of Lost Timewas to find, with its narrator, a redemptive epiphany in a pastry and a cup of lime-blossom tea. We now live in less confident times, in ways that place great strain on the assumptions and beliefs that made those earlier readings possible. This has led to a new manner of reading Proust, against the grain. InMirages and Mad Beliefs, Christopher Prendergast argues the case differently, with the grain, on the basis that Proust himself was prey to self-doubt and found numerous, if indirect, ways of letting us know. Prendergast traces in detail the locations and forms of a quietly nondogmatic yet insistently skeptical voice that questions the redemptive aesthetic the novel is so often taken to celebrate, bringing the reader to wonder whether that aesthetic is but another instance of the mirage or the mad belief that, in other guises, figures prominently inIn Search of Lost Time. In tracing the modalities of this self-pressuring voice, Prendergast ranges far and wide, across a multiplicity of ideas, themes, sources, and stylistic registers in Proust's literary thought and writing practice, attentive at every point to inflections of detail, in a sustained account of Proust the skeptic for the contemporary reader.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2854m6
CHAPTER SEVEN Bodies and Ghosts from:
Mirages and Mad Beliefs
Abstract: When Proust outlined to Anna de Noailles an ideal of style that would approximate a uniform, malleable substance, a
fondu, such as the artist’s impasto or the baker’s dough, might he also have been imagining a relation of style to matter that was a relation of language to body or a version of the word made flesh? The latter notion Proust himself gestured at in the letter to Daudet in which he spoke of his literary ambitions on the “eucharistic” analogy of the “miracle of transubstantiation.” I have already referred several times to this remarkable aspiration, and the moment has
Book Title: Information Systems Foundations: Constructing and Criticising- Publisher: ANU E Press
Author(s): Gregor Shirley D.
Abstract: This volume contains the papers presented at the second biennial Information Systems Foundations ('Constructing and Criticising') Workshop, held at The Australian National University in Canberra from 16-17 July 2004. The focus of the workshop was, as for the first in the series, the foundations of Information Systems as an academic discipline. The particular emphasis was on the adequacy and completeness of theoretical underpinnings and the research methods employed. At the same time the practical nature of the applications and phenomena with which the discipline deals were kept firmly in view. The papers in this volume range from the unashamedly theoretical ('The Struggle Towards an Understanding of Theory in Information Systems') to the much more practically oriented ('A Procedural Model for Ontological Analyses'). The contents of this volume will be of interest and relevance to academics and advanced students as well as thoughtful and reflective practitioners in the Information Systems field.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2jbj4x
3. The reality of information systems research from:
Information Systems Foundations: Constructing and Criticising
Author(s) Milton Simon
Abstract: Since 1995, one of the authors (JL) has been maintaining a resource on the World Wide Web with the basic aim of providing a central point from which academic authors publishing in the information systems domain can obtain useful information on the publications serving that domain (Lamp, 1995). The database now contains information on 349 journals, and was accessed over 7500 times in February 2004. As the number of journals included in the database increases, so also does the difficulty of accurately identifying journals relevant to a particular query from within the database. There is a basic searching facility that
10. Strategic knowledge sharing: from:
Information Systems Foundations: Constructing and Criticising
Author(s) Metcalfe Mike
Abstract: Centralised governance of effective knowledge sharing is very difficult in times of rapid change, especially for purposeful, information rich, socio-technical wicked systems. The lines of communication quickly become clogged, leaders suffer information overload and are unable to fully appreciate problems at the local level. Decentralisation of knowledge sharing runs the risk of causing local overload, with key information not being prioritised or depending on actors who only have experience at processing local problems. Alternatives such as ʹmiddle-outʹ (Keen, 1999) have been suggested, where strategically informed middle level actors play a coordination role between the top and bottom level actors. This
12. Negotiating the sacred in law: from:
Negotiating the Sacred
Author(s) Ridge Pauline
Abstract: Many people would be surprised to learn that they do not have unlimited power to give away their property as they choose. In fact, legal restrictions on gift giving operate upon gifts that take effect during the donor′s lifetime (
inter vivos gifts) as well as upon gifts that operate only upon the donor′s death (testamentary gifts). Some of these constraints are readily comprehensible; for example, it makes sense that the law would seek to protect donors against improper exploitation by would-be donees. Other legal constraints upon gift giving, however, are more difficult to explain. Why is it, for example, the
Chapter 1. Land and Territory in the Austronesian World from:
Sharing the Earth, Dividing the Land
Author(s) Reuter Thomas
Abstract: Contemporary societies within the South-East Asia-Pacific Region still maintain a distinctively Austronesian cultural perspective on land and territory. The present volume contributes to the comparative study of Austronesian societies by exploring this important theme of land and territory within their traditional cultures. At the same time, the authors acknowledge that these are cultures in transition and traditional relationships to land are increasingly compromised by the legal and administrative systems of modern nationstates in the region. This volume also contributes to a current debate in anthropology on the conflicting human tendencies of mobility and emplacement. In the context of this debate,
Chapter 7. Traditional Territorial Categories and Constituent Institutions in West Seram: from:
Sharing the Earth, Dividing the Land
Author(s) Boulan-Smit Christine
Abstract: Seram, the largest island of the Moluccas, lies only a few hours by boat from the regional capital city of Ambon. According to tradition, Seram is referred to as Nusa Ina, the ′Mother Island′. An Alune narrative, collected by A.D.E. Jensen, recalls that at one time in the past Seram, Ambon and the Uliase Islands (Saparua, Haruku and Nusalaut) formed a single island where warfare was constant. So, the people of Ambon cut off a large parcel of land, tied it with human hair and dragged it to where it lies nowadays. Later, those of Saparua, Haruku and Nusalaut did
Chapter 1. Land and Territory in the Austronesian World from:
Sharing the Earth, Dividing the Land
Author(s) Reuter Thomas
Abstract: Contemporary societies within the South-East Asia-Pacific Region still maintain a distinctively Austronesian cultural perspective on land and territory. The present volume contributes to the comparative study of Austronesian societies by exploring this important theme of land and territory within their traditional cultures. At the same time, the authors acknowledge that these are cultures in transition and traditional relationships to land are increasingly compromised by the legal and administrative systems of modern nationstates in the region. This volume also contributes to a current debate in anthropology on the conflicting human tendencies of mobility and emplacement. In the context of this debate,
Chapter 7. Traditional Territorial Categories and Constituent Institutions in West Seram: from:
Sharing the Earth, Dividing the Land
Author(s) Boulan-Smit Christine
Abstract: Seram, the largest island of the Moluccas, lies only a few hours by boat from the regional capital city of Ambon. According to tradition, Seram is referred to as Nusa Ina, the ′Mother Island′. An Alune narrative, collected by A.D.E. Jensen, recalls that at one time in the past Seram, Ambon and the Uliase Islands (Saparua, Haruku and Nusalaut) formed a single island where warfare was constant. So, the people of Ambon cut off a large parcel of land, tied it with human hair and dragged it to where it lies nowadays. Later, those of Saparua, Haruku and Nusalaut did
Chapter 2. Hierarchy, Founder Ideology and Austronesian Expansion from:
Origins, Ancestry and Alliance
Author(s) Bellwood Peter
Abstract: Is it possible to correlate the earliest colonizing movements of Austronesian-speaking peoples into Taiwan, the Philippines, Vietnam, Malaysia, Indonesia and the myriad islands of Oceania² with the existence of a hereditary élite stratum of society? How far back in time can such élites be traced and can their genesis be related in any way to the colonization process itself? And how were the social systems of the earliest Austronesian groups, especially in Melanesia, affected by contact with pre-existing societies, perhaps similar in terms of economy and technology but fundamentally different in terms of social ideology?
Chapter 3. The Elder and the Younger — Foreign and Autochthonous Origin and Hierarchy in the Cook Islands from:
Origins, Ancestry and Alliance
Author(s) Siikala Jukka
Abstract: For quite some time the Polynesian hierarchical systems seemed to be so simple. They were formed through chiefly lineages, in which a system of primogeniture reigned. Those, who were genealogically closest to the gods were also socially superior, and this divinely derived superiority was inherited from first born to first born (Koskinen 1960; Sahlins 1958). This normative notion of early anthropological literature has found its way to the islands through the literary interpretations of western anthropologists to such a degree that it has been constantly recollected in the field. But the origin of this kind of account cannot be found
2 What Was the Axial Revolution? from:
The Axial Age and Its Consequences
Author(s) TAYLOR CHARLES
Abstract: Any view about the long-term history of religion turns on an interpretation of the Axial Age. What was the nature of the Axial revolution? This is sometimes spoken of the coming to be of a new tension “between the transcendental and mundane orders,” involving a new conception of the “transcendental.¹ But “transcendental” has more than one meaning. It can designate something like a “going beyond” the human world or the cosmos (1). But it also can mean the discovery or invention of a new standpoint from which the existing order in the cosmos or society can be criticized or denounced
5 The Axial Age in Global History: from:
The Axial Age and Its Consequences
Author(s) WITTROCK BJÖRN
Abstract: Jaspers, who at the time had played an important role, together with Alfred Weber and others, in trying to reconstitute the University of Heidelberg after the end of Nazi rule, erroneously believed he was using a term from
9 Where Do Axial Commitments Reside? from:
The Axial Age and Its Consequences
Author(s) SWIDLER ANN
Abstract: I am interested in a relatively simple question: Where are Axial commitments located socially, or to put it another way, what does it mean to say that something is an “Axial civilization,” especially for latecomers to global modernity in places like Africa, who sometimes receive pieces of the Axial in disconnected chunks? I have been fascinated by Shmuel Eisenstadt’s argument in
Japanese Civilization(1996) that Japan could embrace Axial elements while keeping an archaic core. Despite absorbing many aspects of two great Axial traditions—Buddhist philosophical sophistication and Confucian techniques of governance—Japan remained fundamentally pre-Axial. Japan retained central archaic
12 Axial Religions and the Problem of Violence from:
The Axial Age and Its Consequences
Author(s) MARTIN DAVID
Abstract: Axial religion has many different characteristics. Whereas pre-Axial religion is often bound in with the powers of Nature, its temporal rhythms and cycles, Axial religion either abandons such cycles for timelessness or creates
1 LOYALTY AND ANTI-COLONIAL NATIONALISM from:
Changing Homelands
Abstract: The turn of the twentieth century was a time of flux for the Hindus of the Punjab. The long shadow of the famines of the 1890s; the tension produced by rival Christian and Arya Samaji orphan relief movements; the assassination of an Arya Samaji preacher, Pt. Lekh Ram, by a Muslim followed by a momentary coming together of the otherwise divided Hindu community; the discovery of an imperial policy that aimed to redress the imbalance in government employment by favouring Muslims; and the passing of the Land Alienation Act of 1900 all seemed to suggest to Punjabi Hindus that this
4 TOWARDS AN ALL-INDIA SETTLEMENT from:
Changing Homelands
Abstract: Chapters 1–3 reveal how Punjabis forged a consensus on questions as critical as the rights of political prisoners, laws that would govern them at a time of peace, and the right to proselytise. On what questions, then, did they disagree? The later-day fact of Partition has made religious differences appear wholly intransigent. But was this how contemporaries understood politics? On the various safeguards for religiously defined minorities in formal political arenas—including joint/separate electorates; appropriate weightages in legislatures and other local bodies; reservation in the services; and reservation for Muslims in a federal, all-India center—Punjabis belonging to different
Story 4 The Prince of the Black Islands from:
Stranger Magic
Abstract: The fisherman reluctantly agrees to trust the jinni, Sakhr, releases him from the copper flask for a second time, and lets himself be led toward the promised fortune. After long days’ and nights’ walking beyond all known territory, they reach a lake; the jinni has explained nothing, but at his orders the fisherman casts his net and draws up a haul of fishes, marvellously coloured white, red, blue and yellow; he is to take them, the jinni goes on, to the nearby palace and offer them to the vizier for the king of that country, who will find them delicious
CHAPTER FIVE Egyptian Attitudes from:
Stranger Magic
Abstract: In a packed account of Egypt, a country which he admired and where he had travelled extensively, the Greek historian Herodotus declares: ‘the names of all the gods have been known in Egypt from the beginning of time …’ In a genial, idiosyncratic gossipy style, he inventories a
Wunderkammerof knowledge, reviewing the origin and habits of the phoenix, the edibility of crocodiles and the processes used in mummification. Through all the fabulous lore, Herodotus stresses the primacy and the originality of the country: ‘It was the Egyptians too,’ he writes,
Story 5 Hasan of Basra from:
Stranger Magic
Abstract: A successful merchant of Basra dies before his time, leaving his widow with two sons; one of them is calm and prudent and takes his half of the inheritance to follow in his father’s footsteps and open a shop in the market. But the other, called Hasan, a boy of radiant beauty and charm, is a lazy good-for-nothing. His mother is determined, however, and she’s made sure he knows the Koran and can write an elegant hand and express himself gracefully. Even with these gifts, he won’t apply himself to anything serious but runs around in a gang of feckless
Story 13 The Ebony Horse from:
Stranger Magic
Abstract: A king has three daughters who are as lovely as the moon at the full in the sky or as a spring garden in flower, and three learned men present themselves as suitors, bearing gifts: one has a brass trumpet which sounds whenever an enemy is approaching; the second offers a gold peacock which tells the time by beating its wings on the hour; the third presents a horse made of ivory and ebony which he promises will carry its rider wherever he wants.
Book Title: Dying for Time- Publisher: Harvard University Press
Author(s): Hägglund Martin
Abstract: Novels by Proust, Woolf, and Nabokov have been read as expressions of a desire to transcend time. Hägglund gives them another reading entirely: fear of time and death is generated by investment in temporal life. Engaging with Freud and Lacan, he opens a new way of reading the dramas of desire as they are staged in both philosophy and literature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2jbvn6
CHAPTER 1 Memory: from:
Dying for Time
Abstract: More than a year after her funeral, he understands that she is dead. During the past year, he has often spoken and thought of her; he has even supposedly mourned her. But he has not understood that she is dead. Then, one evening as he bends down to take off his boots, he is seized by the visceral memory of how she once assisted him in the same task. The repetition of the physical sensation not only recalls the past event but also resuscitates the self he was at the time—the one who sought refuge in her and who
CHAPTER 3 Writing: from:
Dying for Time
Abstract: When the phone rings, it will have been seventeen years since he heard her voice. It is July 14, 1922, and he has been driving all night to meet her at the hotel where they parted in 1905. He has aged, time has been lost, and faced with the prospect of seeing her again, he finds himself in a state of “exhilaration, exhaustion, expectancy, and panic.”¹ He does not know who they have become to one another and which possibilities remain. Yet her voice on the phone cuts through his anxiety and resuscitates the past in spite of all the
CHAPTER 4 Reading: from:
Dying for Time
Abstract: In his essay “On Transience,” Freud recounts a summer walk through the countryside with a famous poet. The scenery is resplendent, but the poet is haunted by the sense that all the beauty will be destroyed by the passage of time. Everything that may be desired as beautiful bears its own destruction within itself because it is temporal and begins to pass away as soon as it comes to be. The poet’s conclusion is that such temporal finitude deprives beauty of its value. As Freud explains: “All that he would otherwise have loved and admired seemed to him shorn of
Book Title: Dying for Time- Publisher: Harvard University Press
Author(s): Hägglund Martin
Abstract: Novels by Proust, Woolf, and Nabokov have been read as expressions of a desire to transcend time. Hägglund gives them another reading entirely: fear of time and death is generated by investment in temporal life. Engaging with Freud and Lacan, he opens a new way of reading the dramas of desire as they are staged in both philosophy and literature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2jbvn6
CHAPTER 1 Memory: from:
Dying for Time
Abstract: More than a year after her funeral, he understands that she is dead. During the past year, he has often spoken and thought of her; he has even supposedly mourned her. But he has not understood that she is dead. Then, one evening as he bends down to take off his boots, he is seized by the visceral memory of how she once assisted him in the same task. The repetition of the physical sensation not only recalls the past event but also resuscitates the self he was at the time—the one who sought refuge in her and who
CHAPTER 3 Writing: from:
Dying for Time
Abstract: When the phone rings, it will have been seventeen years since he heard her voice. It is July 14, 1922, and he has been driving all night to meet her at the hotel where they parted in 1905. He has aged, time has been lost, and faced with the prospect of seeing her again, he finds himself in a state of “exhilaration, exhaustion, expectancy, and panic.”¹ He does not know who they have become to one another and which possibilities remain. Yet her voice on the phone cuts through his anxiety and resuscitates the past in spite of all the
CHAPTER 4 Reading: from:
Dying for Time
Abstract: In his essay “On Transience,” Freud recounts a summer walk through the countryside with a famous poet. The scenery is resplendent, but the poet is haunted by the sense that all the beauty will be destroyed by the passage of time. Everything that may be desired as beautiful bears its own destruction within itself because it is temporal and begins to pass away as soon as it comes to be. The poet’s conclusion is that such temporal finitude deprives beauty of its value. As Freud explains: “All that he would otherwise have loved and admired seemed to him shorn of
Introduction from:
The World of Persian Literary Humanism
Abstract: Once upon a time, so says the sagacious and always jovial poet Sheykh Mosleh al-Din Sa’di (ca. 1209–1291) in his
Golestan(composed in 1258), there was a king who one day in a rage ordered the execution of a foreign slave in his custody. The condemned man began cursing the king in his native tongue, for he was now convinced he would be killed, and so he let go his fears and told the monarch what he thought of him. The king did not understand the language in which the condemned man spoke, so he turned to his courtiers
5 The Lure and Lyrics of a Literature from:
The World of Persian Literary Humanism
Abstract: Nizam al-Din Amir Alishir Nava’i (1441–1501) was a very learned man, a deeply cultivated man, a man of letters, and a man of unsurpassed caring intellect, a powerful patron for artists, the literati, and the scientists of his time. Amir Alishir Nava’i had a generous and gracious company. He was a humanist par excellence—poet, painter, prose stylist, vastly learned in his contemporary intellectual traditions, and a statesman of exceptional courage, tenacity, and imagination. Imagine his contemporary Lorenzo de’ Medici, Lorenzo the Magnificent (1449–1492), if you must, turning the Florentine republic into the epicenter of the Italian Renaissance,
7 The Dawn of New Empires from:
The World of Persian Literary Humanism
Abstract: In the eighteenth and the nineteenth centuries, Persian literary humanism perforce exited its habitual home at royal courts and found its bearing in the context of a new imperial setting—something that it had always done, from its very conception during the Saffarid and Samanid periods in the eighth and ninth centuries down to its spread over four adjacent empires in the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries. The only significant and traumatizing difference this time around, which turned out to be the liberating ordeal of Persian literary humanism, was the fact that Persian literati were now facing an
aterritorialempire that
Book Title: Time in the Philosophy of Gabriel Marcel- Publisher: Modern Humanities Research Association
Author(s): Tattam Helen
Abstract: Gabriel Marcel (1889–1973) stands outside the traditional canon of twentieth-century French philosophers. Where he is not simply forgotten or overlooked, he is dismissed as a ‘relentlessly unsystematic’ thinker, or, following Jean-Paul Sartre’s lead, labelled a ‘Christian existentialist’ — a label that avoids consideration of Marcel’s work on its own terms. How is one to appreciate Marcel’s contribution, especially when his oeuvre appears to be at odds with philosophical convention? Helen Tattam proposes a range of readings, as opposed to one single interpretation: a series of departures or explorations that bring Marcel’s work into contact with critical partners such as Henri Bergson, Paul Ricoeur and Emmanuel Lévinas and other insights into a host of twentieth-century philosophical shifts concerning time, the subject, the other, ethics, and religion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2jc857
CHAPTER 2 Phenomenological Time from:
Time in the Philosophy of Gabriel Marcel
Abstract: Chapter 1 introduced Marcel’s and Bergson’s shared desire to engage with the time of lived experience as opposed to thinking in abstraction. However, Marcel’s philosophy emerged as very different from that of Bergson and, as such, was suggested to be problematic: it appeared to subordinate time to an eternal present, and this seemed at odds with his assertions concerning (temporal) existence’s dynamic, dialectical nature. This potentially problematic relation between time and eternity was identified in the first part of Marcel’s
Journal(January–May 1914), before his thought evolved in reaction against his idealist leanings; but strangely, in spite of his
CHAPTER 3 Narrative Time from:
Time in the Philosophy of Gabriel Marcel
Abstract: Part I suggested the theory of time which underwrites Marcel’s philosophy to be problematic, for although he plainly declares his lack of interest in its ontology, he nevertheless is concerned with human Being. Owing to the temporal character of human existence, time is thus necessarily bound up with Marcel’s ontological investigations. The conclusions he draws from his phenomenological
approches concrètes, which make reference to both an experience of finitude and of eternity, therefore (indirectly) reify what Marcel only intended to be a phenomenological distinction between time and eternity. As such, Marcel’s philosophy of time emerges as paradoxically concerned, and unconcerned,
CHAPTER 4 Marcel’s Theatre: from:
Time in the Philosophy of Gabriel Marcel
Abstract: As with Marcel and Ricœur, in Lévinas’s philosophy the Self’s (
le Moi) relation to time equally serves as a model for its relation to the Other (l’Autre/Autrui);¹ subjectivity and intersubjectivity are inextricably linked. Unlike Marcel and Ricœur, however, (authentic) Lévinassian time is not conceived in terms of presence, but is absolutely Other. Rather than justifying a totalizing return to the Self, Lévinas believes that the paradoxes of (temporal) identity bear witness to a time that simply cannot — and therefore should not — be resolved. Only if suchrupturesare accepted for what they are, he contends, can any relation with the
CHAPTER 5 Time and God from:
Time in the Philosophy of Gabriel Marcel
Abstract: If Chapter 3 suggested that a Ricœurian reading of Marcel might be possible, this was also inspired by similarities identified between Marcel and Augustine, whose philosophy of time Ricœur drew upon to support his argument that phenomenological and cosmological time are incommensurable. If Augustine’s concern with time is philosophical,¹ however, it is also linked to his religious outlook — just as, this chapter will suggest, might be argued for Marcel. However, this theological aspect is rather neglected in Ricœur’s interpretation of Augustine. For Ricœur, God’s eternity in Book XI of the
Confessionsmerely functions as time’s Other, intensifying and deepening our
Book Title: Time in the Philosophy of Gabriel Marcel- Publisher: Modern Humanities Research Association
Author(s): Tattam Helen
Abstract: Gabriel Marcel (1889–1973) stands outside the traditional canon of twentieth-century French philosophers. Where he is not simply forgotten or overlooked, he is dismissed as a ‘relentlessly unsystematic’ thinker, or, following Jean-Paul Sartre’s lead, labelled a ‘Christian existentialist’ — a label that avoids consideration of Marcel’s work on its own terms. How is one to appreciate Marcel’s contribution, especially when his oeuvre appears to be at odds with philosophical convention? Helen Tattam proposes a range of readings, as opposed to one single interpretation: a series of departures or explorations that bring Marcel’s work into contact with critical partners such as Henri Bergson, Paul Ricoeur and Emmanuel Lévinas and other insights into a host of twentieth-century philosophical shifts concerning time, the subject, the other, ethics, and religion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2jc857
CHAPTER 2 Phenomenological Time from:
Time in the Philosophy of Gabriel Marcel
Abstract: Chapter 1 introduced Marcel’s and Bergson’s shared desire to engage with the time of lived experience as opposed to thinking in abstraction. However, Marcel’s philosophy emerged as very different from that of Bergson and, as such, was suggested to be problematic: it appeared to subordinate time to an eternal present, and this seemed at odds with his assertions concerning (temporal) existence’s dynamic, dialectical nature. This potentially problematic relation between time and eternity was identified in the first part of Marcel’s
Journal(January–May 1914), before his thought evolved in reaction against his idealist leanings; but strangely, in spite of his
CHAPTER 3 Narrative Time from:
Time in the Philosophy of Gabriel Marcel
Abstract: Part I suggested the theory of time which underwrites Marcel’s philosophy to be problematic, for although he plainly declares his lack of interest in its ontology, he nevertheless is concerned with human Being. Owing to the temporal character of human existence, time is thus necessarily bound up with Marcel’s ontological investigations. The conclusions he draws from his phenomenological
approches concrètes, which make reference to both an experience of finitude and of eternity, therefore (indirectly) reify what Marcel only intended to be a phenomenological distinction between time and eternity. As such, Marcel’s philosophy of time emerges as paradoxically concerned, and unconcerned,
CHAPTER 4 Marcel’s Theatre: from:
Time in the Philosophy of Gabriel Marcel
Abstract: As with Marcel and Ricœur, in Lévinas’s philosophy the Self’s (
le Moi) relation to time equally serves as a model for its relation to the Other (l’Autre/Autrui);¹ subjectivity and intersubjectivity are inextricably linked. Unlike Marcel and Ricœur, however, (authentic) Lévinassian time is not conceived in terms of presence, but is absolutely Other. Rather than justifying a totalizing return to the Self, Lévinas believes that the paradoxes of (temporal) identity bear witness to a time that simply cannot — and therefore should not — be resolved. Only if suchrupturesare accepted for what they are, he contends, can any relation with the
CHAPTER 5 Time and God from:
Time in the Philosophy of Gabriel Marcel
Abstract: If Chapter 3 suggested that a Ricœurian reading of Marcel might be possible, this was also inspired by similarities identified between Marcel and Augustine, whose philosophy of time Ricœur drew upon to support his argument that phenomenological and cosmological time are incommensurable. If Augustine’s concern with time is philosophical,¹ however, it is also linked to his religious outlook — just as, this chapter will suggest, might be argued for Marcel. However, this theological aspect is rather neglected in Ricœur’s interpretation of Augustine. For Ricœur, God’s eternity in Book XI of the
Confessionsmerely functions as time’s Other, intensifying and deepening our
INTRODUCTION from:
The Signifying Self
Abstract: Miguel de Cervantes (1547–1616) has long been considered a ‘literary giant’, an accolade attributed to him on account of his
magnus opus,Don Quijote de la Mancha.¹ First published in 1605 and followed by a second volume in 1615, Cervantes’s creation ofel ingenioso hidalgois credited with the birth of the modern novel and has achieved iconic status in Spanish cultural history.² In his lifetime, as today, the novel eclipsed the writer’s broad range of work in verse, prose and drama; to the extent that, in relative terms, critical appraisal of Cervantes’s other literary endeavours has been minimal.³
Miron, le « mal entendu » from:
Nouveaux territoires de la poésie francophone au Canada 1970-2000
Author(s) Filteau Claude
Abstract: On peut aimer la poésie de Gaston Miron (1928-1996) ou la détester pour des raisons esthétiques ou idéologiques. Cette poésie est le plus souvent victime de malentendus qui tiennent, en résumé, à son « oralité ». Celle-ci impose un type d’écoute qui peut convenir ou non aux conceptions de la poésie qui ont émergé au Québec tout au long de la seconde moitié du xx
e siècle, en passant de la modernité à la postmodernité. Nous en étudierons certaines pour voir comment Miron fut non pas « mal compris », mais « mal entendu ». Nous prendrons comme point de départ
Parcours intimes dans la poésie québécoise contemporaine from:
Nouveaux territoires de la poésie francophone au Canada 1970-2000
Author(s) Dolce Nicoletta
Abstract: Le retour de l’intime au Québec, au début des années 1980, correspond à un phénomène qui touche plusieurs pays occidentaux et dont le déploiement serait attribuable à la transformation de la vision du monde qui s’est produite chez l’individu contemporain. Les raisons de cette mutation dépassent les frontières géographiques en rendant souvent planétaires des préoccupations qui étaient jadis confinées dans des espaces plus circonscrits.
La poésie à coups de poing : from:
Nouveaux territoires de la poésie francophone au Canada 1970-2000
Author(s) Bonenfant Luc
Abstract: Alors qu’elle semble à première vue un genre confidentiel ou restreint, pour parler comme Pierre Bourdieu, la poésie n’a paradoxalement jamais été aussi présente dans nos vies. Quiconque, depuis une quinzaine d’années, a tenté d’appréhender l’entièreté de la poésie québécoise a tôt fait de ressentir un certain vertige devant le nombre important de recueils publiés et de numéros de revues qui lui sont consacrés¹. À cette production écrite s’ajoutent les manifestations publiques,
happenings plus intimes ou festivals plus larges, dont le Festival international de poésie de Trois-Rivières, le Festival Voix d’Amériques ou le Marché de la poésie de Montréal, pour
Visite des ateliers : from:
Nouveaux territoires de la poésie francophone au Canada 1970-2000
Author(s) Boisclair Antoine
Abstract: Si plusieurs écrivains de la Révolution tranquille ont voulu, à l’instar de Gaston Miron, investir « la place publique », situer l’intervention politique au cœur de leur démarche ou, plus généralement, élever le geste individuel de l’écriture à une dimension sociale, la plupart des poètes postérieurs aux années 1980, c’est un lieu commun de l’affirmer, ont privilégié des tonalités, des thèmes ou des lieux plus « intimes ». Associée à la retraite ou à la solitude que nécessite le processus de création artistique, l’image de l’atelier, particulièrement insistante chez les poètes des années 1990, s’inscrit à plusieurs égards dans cette
2. The Concept of the Political: from:
Integral Pluralism
Abstract: A distinguished American senator and onetime presidential candidate not long ago delivered an important opinion by stating that America will not achieve peace “by being inoffensive.” In the senator’s view, several recent American politicians had brushed aside or forgotten about a basic international reality, namely, “the difference between America’s friends and America’s enemies.”¹ In making this statement, the senator—knowingly or unknowingly—endorsed a crucial principle famously articulated by German legal theorist Carl Schmitt, to the effect that the core of politics—what he terms “the political”—resides in the “friend-enemy” distinction. The senator was by no means alone in
4. Postsecular Faith: from:
Integral Pluralism
Abstract: Somewhere in the middle of his life, John Dewey penned a short tract titled “A Common Faith” in which he distinguished between organized “religion” and religiosity or a “religious” disposition. Whereas the former denotes a formal institution wedded to official doctrines and rituals, the latter involves practical conduct, an ethically and perhaps spiritually informed manner of leading one’s life.¹ Dewey does not reject religion per se but rather its tendency to sideline lived experience or to privilege orthodoxy over “orthopraxis.” Despite changed circumstances, his tract on the whole has stood the test of time. Recent decades have seen the renewed
7. A Man for All Seasons: from:
Integral Pluralism
Abstract: As the saying goes: the center does not hold. If one were to highlight a central feature of the modern age, one could plausibly point to its centrifugal momentum, its tendency toward fragmentation. In the intellectual domain, the tendency is patently evident in the process of specialization, the relentless segregation of fields of knowledge. However, the trend exceeds the knowledge domain. Together with other thinkers of his time, the philosopher Hegel saw modernity marked by radical “diremptions” or divisions (
Entzweiungen)—divisions between knowledge and action, thinking and feeling, private self-interest and the common good—with the prospects of reconciliation growing
2. The Concept of the Political: from:
Integral Pluralism
Abstract: A distinguished American senator and onetime presidential candidate not long ago delivered an important opinion by stating that America will not achieve peace “by being inoffensive.” In the senator’s view, several recent American politicians had brushed aside or forgotten about a basic international reality, namely, “the difference between America’s friends and America’s enemies.”¹ In making this statement, the senator—knowingly or unknowingly—endorsed a crucial principle famously articulated by German legal theorist Carl Schmitt, to the effect that the core of politics—what he terms “the political”—resides in the “friend-enemy” distinction. The senator was by no means alone in
4. Postsecular Faith: from:
Integral Pluralism
Abstract: Somewhere in the middle of his life, John Dewey penned a short tract titled “A Common Faith” in which he distinguished between organized “religion” and religiosity or a “religious” disposition. Whereas the former denotes a formal institution wedded to official doctrines and rituals, the latter involves practical conduct, an ethically and perhaps spiritually informed manner of leading one’s life.¹ Dewey does not reject religion per se but rather its tendency to sideline lived experience or to privilege orthodoxy over “orthopraxis.” Despite changed circumstances, his tract on the whole has stood the test of time. Recent decades have seen the renewed
7. A Man for All Seasons: from:
Integral Pluralism
Abstract: As the saying goes: the center does not hold. If one were to highlight a central feature of the modern age, one could plausibly point to its centrifugal momentum, its tendency toward fragmentation. In the intellectual domain, the tendency is patently evident in the process of specialization, the relentless segregation of fields of knowledge. However, the trend exceeds the knowledge domain. Together with other thinkers of his time, the philosopher Hegel saw modernity marked by radical “diremptions” or divisions (
Entzweiungen)—divisions between knowledge and action, thinking and feeling, private self-interest and the common good—with the prospects of reconciliation growing
2. The Concept of the Political: from:
Integral Pluralism
Abstract: A distinguished American senator and onetime presidential candidate not long ago delivered an important opinion by stating that America will not achieve peace “by being inoffensive.” In the senator’s view, several recent American politicians had brushed aside or forgotten about a basic international reality, namely, “the difference between America’s friends and America’s enemies.”¹ In making this statement, the senator—knowingly or unknowingly—endorsed a crucial principle famously articulated by German legal theorist Carl Schmitt, to the effect that the core of politics—what he terms “the political”—resides in the “friend-enemy” distinction. The senator was by no means alone in
4. Postsecular Faith: from:
Integral Pluralism
Abstract: Somewhere in the middle of his life, John Dewey penned a short tract titled “A Common Faith” in which he distinguished between organized “religion” and religiosity or a “religious” disposition. Whereas the former denotes a formal institution wedded to official doctrines and rituals, the latter involves practical conduct, an ethically and perhaps spiritually informed manner of leading one’s life.¹ Dewey does not reject religion per se but rather its tendency to sideline lived experience or to privilege orthodoxy over “orthopraxis.” Despite changed circumstances, his tract on the whole has stood the test of time. Recent decades have seen the renewed
7. A Man for All Seasons: from:
Integral Pluralism
Abstract: As the saying goes: the center does not hold. If one were to highlight a central feature of the modern age, one could plausibly point to its centrifugal momentum, its tendency toward fragmentation. In the intellectual domain, the tendency is patently evident in the process of specialization, the relentless segregation of fields of knowledge. However, the trend exceeds the knowledge domain. Together with other thinkers of his time, the philosopher Hegel saw modernity marked by radical “diremptions” or divisions (
Entzweiungen)—divisions between knowledge and action, thinking and feeling, private self-interest and the common good—with the prospects of reconciliation growing
5 States of Despair: from:
Blood in the Sand
Abstract: Hope is said to have a bitter taste. Nowhere is that more true than in the Middle East, where the possibilities for peace have been squandered and the longings for justice have grown ever more burdensome over the last half century. Worry over the treatment of Arabs by Jews stretches back to the last century over a host of modern Jewish intellectuals, including Hannah Arendt, Martin Buber, Albert Einstein, and Gershom Scholem, among others. But their cautionary warnings were ignored, if not derided, by the Jewish mainstream. It is ironic, since these thinkers implicitly, and sometimes explicitly, anticipated that the
6 Anatomy of a Disaster: from:
Blood in the Sand
Abstract: There was a new game in town after President Bush declared: “Mission accomplished!” The political establishment decided it was time to forget the lies and blunders associated with the Iraqi war. Europe was ready to reaffirm its bonds with the United States, the United Nations was trying to placate the superpower, and smaller nations were desperately trying to make a deal. The angry demonstrations of the past, the loss of “the street,” no longer seemed relevant. It was time to “get on with the job” of securing the peace. June 30, 2005, has passed, however, and American troops are still
7 Dub’ya’s Fellow Travelers: from:
Blood in the Sand
Author(s) Jacobsen Kurt
Abstract: What are “fellow travelers”? Once upon a time, during the 1920s and 1930s, the epithet referred to left-wing intellectuals who, though not members of the Communist Party, were sympathetic to its political project. No preening right-winger or proud moderate will ever let anyone on the Left forget how writers such as Lion Feuchtwanger, Romain Rolland, Lincoln Steffens, and Beatrice and Sidney Webb traipsed off into darkest Russia, went on gracious NKVD-guided tours of the glorious Soviet future, and rhapsodized that, so far as they could see, it worked. Indeed, no one should forget this profoundly pathetic episode. True, many inquisitive
8 Constructing Neoconservatism from:
Blood in the Sand
Abstract: Neoconservatismhas become a code word for reactionary thinking in our time and a badge of unity for those in the Bush administration advocating a new imperialist foreign policy, an assault on the welfare state, and a return to “family values.” Its members are directly culpable for the disintegration of American prestige abroad, the erosion of a huge budget surplus, and the debasement of democracy at home. Iraq has turned into a disaster, and much of the American citizenry has been revolted by the arrogance, lies, and incompetence of leading neoconservatives within the administration. But their agenda remains fixed; the
Book Title: The Philosophy of the Western- Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): Csaki B. Steve
Abstract: The western is arguably the most iconic and influential genre in American cinema. The solitude of the lone rider, the loyalty of his horse, and the unspoken code of the West render the genre popular yet lead it to offer a view of America's history that is sometimes inaccurate. For many, the western embodies America and its values. In recent years, scholars had declared the western genre dead, but a steady resurgence of western themes in literature, film, and television has reestablished the genre as one of the most important.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2jcn17
Two Ways to Yuma: from:
The Philosophy of the Western
Author(s) Mexal Stephen J.
Abstract: At one of the climactic moments of the 1957 film
3:10 to Yuma, rancher Dan Evans (Van Heflin) realizes, in the timeless tradition of countless devil-may-care western heroes, that his task has become all but hopeless. Dan has agreed to bring outlaw Ben Wade (Glenn Ford) to justice for the price of $200, money he desperately needs to pay his land debts. His job is to put Wade on the 3:10 p.m. train to Yuma, Arizona, where Wade will be imprisoned.
The Duty of Reason: from:
The Philosophy of the Western
Author(s) Evans Daw-Nay
Abstract: I saw a lot of movies, and especially liked the westerns. My favorite was
High Noon—I probably saw it half a dozen times during its run in Hope, [Arkansas], and have seen it more than a dozen times since. It’s still my favorite movie, because it’s not your typical macho western. I loved the movie because from start
Book Title: In Search of the Good Life-A Pedogogy for Troubled Times
Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): DALLMAYR FRED
Abstract: The great German novelist Thomas Mann implored readers to resist the persistent and growing militarism of the mid-twentieth century. To whom should we turn for guidance during this current era of global violence, political corruption, economic inequality, and environmental degradation? For more than two millennia, the world's great thinkers have held that the ethically "good life" is the highest purpose of human existence. Renowned political philosopher Fred Dallmayr traces the development of this notion, finding surprising connections among Aristotelian ethics, Abrahamic and Eastern religious traditions, German idealism, and postindustrial social criticism. In Search of the Good Life does not offer a blueprint but rather invites readers on a cross-cultural quest. Along the way, the author discusses the teachings of Aristotle, Confucius, Nicolaus of Cusa, Leibniz, and Schiller, in addition invoking more recent writings of Gadamer and Ricoeur, as guideposts and sources of hope during our troubled times. Among contemporary themes Dallmayr discusses are the role of the classics in education, proper and improper ways of spreading democracy globally, the possibility of transnational citizenship, the problem of politicized evil, and the role of religion in our predominantly secular culture. Dallmayr restores the notion of the good life as a hallmark of personal conduct, civic virtue, and political engagement, and as the road map to enduring peace. In Search of the Good Life seeks to arouse complacent and dispirited citizens, guiding them out of the distractions of shallow amusements and perilous resentments in the direction of mutual learning and civic pedagogy -- a direction that will enable them to impose accountability on political leaders who stray from fundamental ethical standards.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2jcp7k
Introduction from:
In Search of the Good Life
Abstract: Some seventy years ago, in the midst of darkening global horizons, a prominent American intellectual formulated a stunning vision that combined good government or public ethics with a general “regime of peace.” The name of the intellectual was Walter Lippmann, and the book announcing his vision was titled
The Good Society.The book was first published in 1936, at a time when fascism was deeply entrenched in Germany and Italy, a totalitarian ideology was ruling Russia, and Japan was preparing for war—dark horizons indeed. But the situation was even more ominous and foreboding because nearly all the “advanced” countries
1. A Pedagogy of the Heart: from:
In Search of the Good Life
Abstract: Some eight hundred years ago, a young man in Italy received a summons to rejuvenate religious practices through a life of poverty and humble devotion. The young man’s name was Giovanni Francesco Bernardone, and he lived in the town of Assisi in Umbria. Following this summons, he divested himself of all worldly possessions and founded a religious order that spread rapidly throughout Europe.¹ Two years after his death (in 1226), he was canonized and became revered as Saint Francis. However, in his own lifetime, he was known simply as the
poverello,a poor, humble mendicant following in the footsteps of
6. Beautiful Freedom: from:
In Search of the Good Life
Abstract: During his dark period, the Spanish painter Goya depicted the horrors and monsters that are lying in wait behind the facade of reason. In doing so, he anticipated some of the most troubling questions of our time: How is it possible that one of the most developed and scientifically advanced civilizations on earth could spawn a string of atrocities ranging from Auschwitz to Hiroshima to Abu Ghraib? How is it that such a vast expansion of knowledge and information could be accompanied by such a derailment of conduct and such an atrophy of ethical sensibilities? These questions have occupied major
9. An End to Evil: from:
In Search of the Good Life
Abstract: Things long ignored or repressed often return with a vengeance. Evil, or the problem of evil, is a case in point. As heirs to the Enlightenment, Western societies in recent centuries have tended to sideline evil as a spook or as the relic of a distant past. In the poignant words of Lance Morrow: “The children of the Enlightenment sometimes have an inadequate understanding of the possibilities of Endarkenment.”¹ Two events in more recent times have disrupted this complacency and catapulted evil back into the limelight. The first was the experience of totalitarianism, and especially the atrocities of the Nazi
Book Title: In Search of the Good Life-A Pedogogy for Troubled Times
Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): DALLMAYR FRED
Abstract: The great German novelist Thomas Mann implored readers to resist the persistent and growing militarism of the mid-twentieth century. To whom should we turn for guidance during this current era of global violence, political corruption, economic inequality, and environmental degradation? For more than two millennia, the world's great thinkers have held that the ethically "good life" is the highest purpose of human existence. Renowned political philosopher Fred Dallmayr traces the development of this notion, finding surprising connections among Aristotelian ethics, Abrahamic and Eastern religious traditions, German idealism, and postindustrial social criticism. In Search of the Good Life does not offer a blueprint but rather invites readers on a cross-cultural quest. Along the way, the author discusses the teachings of Aristotle, Confucius, Nicolaus of Cusa, Leibniz, and Schiller, in addition invoking more recent writings of Gadamer and Ricoeur, as guideposts and sources of hope during our troubled times. Among contemporary themes Dallmayr discusses are the role of the classics in education, proper and improper ways of spreading democracy globally, the possibility of transnational citizenship, the problem of politicized evil, and the role of religion in our predominantly secular culture. Dallmayr restores the notion of the good life as a hallmark of personal conduct, civic virtue, and political engagement, and as the road map to enduring peace. In Search of the Good Life seeks to arouse complacent and dispirited citizens, guiding them out of the distractions of shallow amusements and perilous resentments in the direction of mutual learning and civic pedagogy -- a direction that will enable them to impose accountability on political leaders who stray from fundamental ethical standards.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2jcp7k
Introduction from:
In Search of the Good Life
Abstract: Some seventy years ago, in the midst of darkening global horizons, a prominent American intellectual formulated a stunning vision that combined good government or public ethics with a general “regime of peace.” The name of the intellectual was Walter Lippmann, and the book announcing his vision was titled
The Good Society.The book was first published in 1936, at a time when fascism was deeply entrenched in Germany and Italy, a totalitarian ideology was ruling Russia, and Japan was preparing for war—dark horizons indeed. But the situation was even more ominous and foreboding because nearly all the “advanced” countries
1. A Pedagogy of the Heart: from:
In Search of the Good Life
Abstract: Some eight hundred years ago, a young man in Italy received a summons to rejuvenate religious practices through a life of poverty and humble devotion. The young man’s name was Giovanni Francesco Bernardone, and he lived in the town of Assisi in Umbria. Following this summons, he divested himself of all worldly possessions and founded a religious order that spread rapidly throughout Europe.¹ Two years after his death (in 1226), he was canonized and became revered as Saint Francis. However, in his own lifetime, he was known simply as the
poverello,a poor, humble mendicant following in the footsteps of
6. Beautiful Freedom: from:
In Search of the Good Life
Abstract: During his dark period, the Spanish painter Goya depicted the horrors and monsters that are lying in wait behind the facade of reason. In doing so, he anticipated some of the most troubling questions of our time: How is it possible that one of the most developed and scientifically advanced civilizations on earth could spawn a string of atrocities ranging from Auschwitz to Hiroshima to Abu Ghraib? How is it that such a vast expansion of knowledge and information could be accompanied by such a derailment of conduct and such an atrophy of ethical sensibilities? These questions have occupied major
9. An End to Evil: from:
In Search of the Good Life
Abstract: Things long ignored or repressed often return with a vengeance. Evil, or the problem of evil, is a case in point. As heirs to the Enlightenment, Western societies in recent centuries have tended to sideline evil as a spook or as the relic of a distant past. In the poignant words of Lance Morrow: “The children of the Enlightenment sometimes have an inadequate understanding of the possibilities of Endarkenment.”¹ Two events in more recent times have disrupted this complacency and catapulted evil back into the limelight. The first was the experience of totalitarianism, and especially the atrocities of the Nazi
Book Title: In Search of the Good Life-A Pedogogy for Troubled Times
Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): DALLMAYR FRED
Abstract: The great German novelist Thomas Mann implored readers to resist the persistent and growing militarism of the mid-twentieth century. To whom should we turn for guidance during this current era of global violence, political corruption, economic inequality, and environmental degradation? For more than two millennia, the world's great thinkers have held that the ethically "good life" is the highest purpose of human existence. Renowned political philosopher Fred Dallmayr traces the development of this notion, finding surprising connections among Aristotelian ethics, Abrahamic and Eastern religious traditions, German idealism, and postindustrial social criticism. In Search of the Good Life does not offer a blueprint but rather invites readers on a cross-cultural quest. Along the way, the author discusses the teachings of Aristotle, Confucius, Nicolaus of Cusa, Leibniz, and Schiller, in addition invoking more recent writings of Gadamer and Ricoeur, as guideposts and sources of hope during our troubled times. Among contemporary themes Dallmayr discusses are the role of the classics in education, proper and improper ways of spreading democracy globally, the possibility of transnational citizenship, the problem of politicized evil, and the role of religion in our predominantly secular culture. Dallmayr restores the notion of the good life as a hallmark of personal conduct, civic virtue, and political engagement, and as the road map to enduring peace. In Search of the Good Life seeks to arouse complacent and dispirited citizens, guiding them out of the distractions of shallow amusements and perilous resentments in the direction of mutual learning and civic pedagogy -- a direction that will enable them to impose accountability on political leaders who stray from fundamental ethical standards.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2jcp7k
Introduction from:
In Search of the Good Life
Abstract: Some seventy years ago, in the midst of darkening global horizons, a prominent American intellectual formulated a stunning vision that combined good government or public ethics with a general “regime of peace.” The name of the intellectual was Walter Lippmann, and the book announcing his vision was titled
The Good Society.The book was first published in 1936, at a time when fascism was deeply entrenched in Germany and Italy, a totalitarian ideology was ruling Russia, and Japan was preparing for war—dark horizons indeed. But the situation was even more ominous and foreboding because nearly all the “advanced” countries
1. A Pedagogy of the Heart: from:
In Search of the Good Life
Abstract: Some eight hundred years ago, a young man in Italy received a summons to rejuvenate religious practices through a life of poverty and humble devotion. The young man’s name was Giovanni Francesco Bernardone, and he lived in the town of Assisi in Umbria. Following this summons, he divested himself of all worldly possessions and founded a religious order that spread rapidly throughout Europe.¹ Two years after his death (in 1226), he was canonized and became revered as Saint Francis. However, in his own lifetime, he was known simply as the
poverello,a poor, humble mendicant following in the footsteps of
6. Beautiful Freedom: from:
In Search of the Good Life
Abstract: During his dark period, the Spanish painter Goya depicted the horrors and monsters that are lying in wait behind the facade of reason. In doing so, he anticipated some of the most troubling questions of our time: How is it possible that one of the most developed and scientifically advanced civilizations on earth could spawn a string of atrocities ranging from Auschwitz to Hiroshima to Abu Ghraib? How is it that such a vast expansion of knowledge and information could be accompanied by such a derailment of conduct and such an atrophy of ethical sensibilities? These questions have occupied major
9. An End to Evil: from:
In Search of the Good Life
Abstract: Things long ignored or repressed often return with a vengeance. Evil, or the problem of evil, is a case in point. As heirs to the Enlightenment, Western societies in recent centuries have tended to sideline evil as a spook or as the relic of a distant past. In the poignant words of Lance Morrow: “The children of the Enlightenment sometimes have an inadequate understanding of the possibilities of Endarkenment.”¹ Two events in more recent times have disrupted this complacency and catapulted evil back into the limelight. The first was the experience of totalitarianism, and especially the atrocities of the Nazi
Book Title: The Philosophy of Science Fiction Film- Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): Sanders Steven M.
Abstract: The science fiction genre maintains a remarkable hold on the imagination and enthusiasm of the filmgoing public, captivating large audiences worldwide and garnering ever-larger profits. Science fiction films entertain the possibility of time travel and extraterrestrial visitation and imaginatively transport us to worlds transformed by modern science and technology. They also provide a medium through which questions about personal identity, moral agency, artificial consciousness, and other categories of experience can be addressed. In The Philosophy of Science Fiction Film, distinguished authors explore the storylines, conflicts, and themes of fifteen science fiction film classics, from Metropolis to The Matrix. Editor Steven M. Sanders and a group of outstanding scholars in philosophy, film studies, and other fields raise science fiction film criticism to a new level by penetrating the surface of the films to expose the underlying philosophical arguments, ethical perspectives, and metaphysical views. Sanders's introduction presents an overview and evaluation of each essay and poses questions for readers to consider as they think about the films under discussion.The first section, "Enigmas of Identity and Agency," deals with the nature of humanity as it is portrayed in Blade Runner, Dark City, Frankenstein, Invasion of the Body Snatchers, and Total Recall. In the second section, "Extraterrestrial Visitation, Time Travel, and Artificial Intelligence," contributors discuss 2001: A Space Odyssey, The Terminator, 12 Monkeys, and The Day the Earth Stood Still and analyze the challenges of artificial intelligence, the paradoxes of time travel, and the ethics of war. The final section, "Brave Newer World: Science Fiction Futurism," looks at visions of the future in Metropolis, The Matrix, Alphaville, and screen adaptations of George Orwell's 1984.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2jcrpr
Recalling the Self: from:
The Philosophy of Science Fiction Film
Author(s) Biderman Shai
Abstract: Let’s begin with what appears to be a very weird, yet simple, question: Have you ever been to Mars? I’m sorry to say that I haven’t been there. Is that a valid answer? Well, yes, if you think you understood the question. But did you? Let’s analyze each word to see.
Ever,in this context, means from the time of one’s birth until now.Marsis the known, yet hardly charted, planet at least 35 million miles from the earth.Been to,in this case, roughly means physically experienced, visited, or spent time at.You,of course, means . .
Some Paradoxes of Time Travel in The Terminator and 12 Monkeys from:
The Philosophy of Science Fiction Film
Author(s) Devlin William J.
Abstract: Suppose you had a time machine. Where exactly would you like to go throughout all the possibilities of temporal locations? Would you want to go back to the Jurassic period to learn more about the dinosaurs? Maybe you would like to go back to ancient Greece to finally know whether or not the Battle of Troy really took place. Perhaps the past bores you, and you’re really a future adventurer instead. If so, would you fast-forward to 3050 to see if human beings are riding in flying cars and living on the moon? Maybe you’d like to go even further,
Imagining the Future, Contemplating the Past: from:
The Philosophy of Science Fiction Film
Author(s) Palmer R. Barton
Abstract: A defining feature of science fiction is that such works of imaginative realism (a potent stylistic brew of perhaps irreconcilable elements) speculate about some future age or alternative, extraterrestrial world. That imagined place and time is characterized essentially by “advancements” in science that plausibly explore the consequences of what is now known and actively researched (in such areas as artificial intelligence, genetic manipulation, space travel, pharmacology, and so forth). The difference between the reader’s implied present and the postulated alternative results from the technological manipulation of the natural environment and human experience that such acquired knowledge makes possible.
Space, Time, and Subjectivity in Neo-Noir Cinema from:
The Philosophy of Neo-Noir
Author(s) Abrams Jerold J.
Abstract: Much of the time, classic film noir takes place in Los Angeles—but it’s always in the city, always a detective looking for clues to unravel the mystery of whodunit. One of the best is Bogart playing Philip Marlowe in
The Big Sleep(Howard Hawks, 1946), walking dark and lonely streets, interviewing suspects, never believing any of them. This was a grand time in American cinema—the early to late 1940s—but, of course, none of it would last, for classic noir peaked early and fast. And, by 1958, with Orson Welles’sTouch of Evilit was all too evident:
John Locke, Personal Identity, and Memento from:
The Philosophy of Neo-Noir
Author(s) Smith Basil
Abstract: In his
Essay concerning Human Understanding,John Locke famously offers an explanation of personal identity. In particular, he holds that our conscious memories constitute our identities.¹ Christopher Nolan’sMemento(2000) tests this theory of personal identity. In the film, Leonard Shelby (Guy Pearce), an insurance investigator from San Francisco, suffers shortterm memory loss as a result of an assault on his wife, Catherine (Jorja Fox), and himself. But now, without his memories, he can hardly function. He insists that his attackers have destroyed his ability to live. Leonard asks: “How can I heal if I cannot feel time?” The question
“Saint” Sydney: from:
The Philosophy of Neo-Noir
Author(s) Hirsch Foster
Abstract: In
Hard Eight(1996), the first-time writer-director Paul Thomas Anderson offers a distinctly modern interpretation of a character type familiar from the original era of noir. In his contemporary rendering, which is neither reverential homage nor postmodern deconstruction, Anderson offers an elegant, rigorous character study as well as a provocative reexamination of some of noir’s central philosophical, thematic, and visual motifs. Confronting universal moral issues—guilt and innocence, crime and punishment—raised by earlier crime dramas, the film investigates the possibilities of salvation within a traditionally treacherous cinematic realm.
The Human Comedy Perpetuates Itself: from:
The Philosophy of Neo-Noir
Author(s) Hibbs Thomas S.
Abstract: From their inaugural film, the 1984
Blood Simple,through the film blanc of the 1996Fargo,to the 2001The Man Who Wasn’t There,the Coen brothers have exhibited a preoccupation with the themes, characters, and stylistic techniques of film noir. By the time they madeBlood Simplein 1984, neo-noir was already established as a recognized category of film.¹ Prior to Quentin Tarantino’s darkly comedic unraveling of noir motifs inReservoir Dogs(1992) andPulp Fiction(1994), the Coens were already making consciously comic use of noir plots and stylistic techniques. Without Tarantino’s penchant for hyperactive and culturally claustrophobic
Book Title: The Philosophy of Spike Lee- Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): Conard Mark T.
Abstract: In
The Philosophy of Spike Lee, editor Mark T. Conard and an impressive list of contributors delve into the rich philosophy behind this filmmaker's extensive work. Not only do they analyze the major themes of race and discrimination that permeate Lee's productions, but also examine other philosophical ideas that are found in his films, ideas such as the nature of time, transcendence, moral motivation, self-constitution, and justice. The authors specialize in a variety of academic disciplines that range from African American Studies to literary and cultural criticism and Philosophy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2jcwgn
The Prostitution Trap of Elite Sport in He Got Game from:
The Philosophy of Spike Lee
Author(s) Pitter Robert
Abstract: Spike Lee is an accomplished filmmaker who drew much public attention following the release of his first feature films in the late 1980s.
School Daze(1988),Do the Right Thing(1989), andJungle Fever(1991), which he both wrote and directed, tell stories involving complex social, political, and philosophical issues. And they do this so effectively and provocatively that they generated significant controversy when they were first released, illustrating Lee’s skill at portraying the complexities of contemporary life on the big screen in a way that provokes serious and sometimes harmful misinterpretation. For example, several American media outlets opposed the
Aristotle and MacIntyre on Justice in 25th Hour from:
The Philosophy of Spike Lee
Author(s) Conard Mark T.
Abstract: Spike Lee’s
25th Hour(2002) is the story of a convicted drug dealer’s last free day before having to report to prison. The protagonist, Monty (Edward Norton), uses the day to say good-bye to friends and his widower father, and he wraps up some loose business ends. Further, he has a suspicion, encouraged by others, that his girlfriend might have turned him in to the police to save herself from prosecution, so he also uses the time to investigate. All seem to agree that Monty will be easy prey for the hardened cons in prison, such that the seven-year sentence
We Can’t Get Off the Bus: from:
The Philosophy of Spike Lee
Author(s) Beckles-Raymond Gabriella
Abstract: On October 16, 1995, a million black men marched on Washington, D.C.,¹ answering Louis Farrakhan’s call for reconciliation and atonement.² Not since the 1963 march for civil rights had so many Americans descended on Capitol Hill. Although the mainstream contemporary historical narrative suggests otherwise, Martin Luther King Jr., like Farrakhan, was a controversial figure in his time. Nevertheless, in spite of the varied perspectives within the African American community about Farrakhan’s beliefs and methods,³ his call to action was answered by thousands of African American men across the country.
Coworking in the Kingdom of Culture: from:
The Philosophy of Spike Lee
Author(s) Peterson Charles F.
Abstract: W. E. B. DuBois’s essay “Of Our Spiritual Strivings” provides one of the most revered articulations of Afri-US¹ psychoracial identity; even more, it stands, as I believe DuBois intended, as a statement on the very nature of U.S. citizenship. DuBois’s focus on the manner in which Afri-US (Negro) identity, citizenship, and social life were experienced as divided, antagonized, and marginal serves as a model for a new American urban sensibility. By the time “Of Our Spiritual Strivings” was published, the swelling ranks of the “tired . . . poor and huddled masses” that filled the cities of the United States
Transcendence and Sublimity in Spike Lee’s Signature Shot from:
The Philosophy of Spike Lee
Author(s) Abrams Jerold J.
Abstract: In most of his films, Spike Lee includes a shot of an individual silently floating forward toward the viewer. Lee calls this his “signature shot.”¹ Before the signature shot, the on-screen world appears interconnected and real. But then suddenly realism fades and the character enters a different mode of space-time as if temporarily removed from gravity and the present. The character appears to leave the film and traverse the boundary between screen and viewer like an object in a 3-D movie or like the viewer’s imagination itself, which also traverses this boundary to immerse itself in the film. In this
Introduction from:
The Governance of Common Property in the Pacific Region
Author(s) Larmour Peter
Abstract: Common property has often been regarded as an obstacle to development and best—or inevitably—replaced by private or state ownership. However, there are now many well-documented examples of successful management of open-access resources, and experiments in ‘co-management’ by users, owners, and government officials. The idea that the government should intervene to remedy the defects of common property, perhaps by registration, is now contested by a celebration of indigenous systems of self-management (Bromley 1989, Bromley and Cernea 1989). Government intervention may sometimes make things worse. Common property claims are also part of indigenous peoples’ defence and reaffirmation of political sovereignty.
5 Improving security of access to customary-owned land in Melanesia: from:
The Governance of Common Property in the Pacific Region
Author(s) Duncan Rod
Abstract: This chapter takes as its starting point that land ownership arrangements in the South Pacific will continue to change very slowly. Therefore, existing forms of customary or communal ownership will remain in place for a long time. This does not necessarily pose the problem for economic development that many perceive: that communal ownership means insecurity of access for potential users of the land, reducing the incentive to invest in the land with adverse consequences for productivity. As, for example, Crocombe (1995) says, the form of ownership of land is not as important for making the most productive use of the
6 Common property, Maori identity and the Treaty of Waitangi from:
The Governance of Common Property in the Pacific Region
Author(s) Kawharu Hugh
Abstract: In the terms of the Treaty of Waitangi, New Zealand became a British colony and the Maori people, together with their lands and estates, were given Crown protection as well as the rights and privileges of British subjects. In 1975, the New Zealand Parliament, for the first time since 1840, gave statutory recognition to the Treaty by setting up a tribunal to hear claims by Maori people that the Crown had failed to honour its guarantees under the Treaty. Claims lodged since then have been made mostly by kin-based tribal groups. They depend heavily on recitals of history, tradition and
8 Property, sovereignty and self-determination in Australia from:
The Governance of Common Property in the Pacific Region
Author(s) Reynolds Henry
Abstract: The concept of national sovereignty is under siege in many parts of the world as states lose power from above to global markets and global organisations and are challenged from below by regions, minorities and entrapped nations. Such developments are particularly apparent in Europe with the break-up of the Soviet Union, Yugoslavia and Czechoslovakia, and with the ceding of power within the European Union to the Commission, the Parliament and the Court. At the same time regions are asserting new or rediscovered identities.
Introduction from:
Aquinas, Feminism, and the Common Good
Abstract: It is widely recognized that postmodernism has shaped contemporary approaches to theology and ethics.¹ Given this fact, a writer must make clear at the outset the ways in which she responds to the postmodern challenge regarding the use of classic texts and universal claims. However, the issue is not as simple as responding to a
singular postmodern challenge.² Rather, the postmodern critique of modern, liberal, Enlightenment-based convictions holds within it a range of orientations toward purported universal truths. This book is a response to these postmodern positions. At the same time, it offers a constructive method for retrieving a classic
CHAPTER 12 Attaining Harmony with the Earth from:
In Search of the Whole
Author(s) Vanin Cristina
Abstract: I teach at St. Jerome’s University, a small Catholic liberal arts university in southwestern Ontario. When I returned to work after an eight-month parental leave following the adoption of our two daughters from Ecuador, I indicated to close friends that on the day that I first met Sofia and Daniela, I felt as if I had been dropped off a very, very high cliff—from the life of work and relationship that I had known and had been living for a long time, into the incredible life of parenting two little girls in another country and culture, in another language,
CHAPTER ONE Accepting Evolution from:
Christianity in Evolution
Abstract: The relationship between science and religion has long been a topic of debate and dispute, and nowhere more markedly in modern times than as it concerns the scientific account of evolution. Considerable attention is regularly given to the question of whether Darwinism and religion are in principle compatible, and in recent times distinguished contributions have been made by Peacocke, Ward, Polkinghorne, McGrath, Pope, Haught, and others that defend religion against polemical attacks in the claimed name of modern evolutionary theory.¹ In a comprehensive article on evolution in the encyclopedic
Christianity: The Complete Guide, Gerd Theissen explains and comments on the
CHAPTER ONE Accepting Evolution from:
Christianity in Evolution
Abstract: The relationship between science and religion has long been a topic of debate and dispute, and nowhere more markedly in modern times than as it concerns the scientific account of evolution. Considerable attention is regularly given to the question of whether Darwinism and religion are in principle compatible, and in recent times distinguished contributions have been made by Peacocke, Ward, Polkinghorne, McGrath, Pope, Haught, and others that defend religion against polemical attacks in the claimed name of modern evolutionary theory.¹ In a comprehensive article on evolution in the encyclopedic
Christianity: The Complete Guide, Gerd Theissen explains and comments on the
Book Title: Power and the Past-Collective Memory and International Relations
Publisher: Georgetown University Press
Author(s): Shain Yossi
Abstract: Only recently have international relations scholars started to seriously examine the influence of collective memory on foreign policy formation and relations between states and peoples. The ways in which the memories of past events are interpreted, misinterpreted, or even manipulated in public discourse create the context that shapes international relations.
Power and the Pastbrings together leading history and international relations scholars to provide a groundbreaking examination of the impact of collective memory. This timely study makes a contribution to developing a theory of memory and international relations and also examines specific cases of collective memory's influence resulting from the legacies of World War II, the Holocaust, and September 11. Addressing concerns shared by world leaders and international institutions as well as scholars of international studies, this volume illustrates clearly how the memory of past events alters the ways countries interact in the present, how memory shapes public debate and policymaking, and how memory may aid or more frequently impede conflict resolution.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt597
Chapter 1 Collective Memory as a Factor in Political Culture and International Relations from:
Power and the Past
Author(s) Langenbacher Eric
Abstract: For years, observers have identified a so-called memory boom among scholars and in many societies worldwide—a boom that the September 11, 2001, terrorist attacks have only intensified.¹ In some countries the memory of traumatic events is still raw, and processes of settling accounts linger in the current political agenda. Elsewhere, where the seminal events on which collective memories rest are further in the past, the issues involve debating and institutionalizing an appropriate culture of memory and collective identity for future generations. Sometimes the individual and collective wounds fester, waiting for necessary healing through political and judicial processes. Other times
Chapter 2 Germany’s National Identity, Collective Memory, and Role Abroad from:
Power and the Past
Author(s) Warburg Bettina
Abstract: During soccer’s 2008 European Cup, many German fans waved their flags jubilantly after the national team’s victories—continuing a new patriotic tradition that was especially pronounced during the 2006 World Cup of soccer hosted in Germany and in which the national team made it to the semifinals. Both times, it was difficult not to recall a much bleaker version of German nationalism that prevailed in the not-so-distant past. National pride and flag-waving have a dark connotation in German history, bringing to mind images of swastika-brazened banners from the 1936 Olympic Games, and recalling the fate of Europe’s Jews and all
Introduction from:
Theology and the Boundary Discourse of Human Rights
Abstract: The discourse of human rights has emerged as the dominant moral discourse of our time. Reflecting on this often contentious discourse, with both its enthusiasts and detractors, led me to consider the following questions: What constitutes an intelligible definition of human rights? What place should this discourse occupy within ethics? Can theology acknowledge human rights discourse? How is theological engagement with human rights justified? What are the implications of the convergence of what are two potentially universalizable discourses?
Chapter One A Dialectical Boundary Discourse: from:
Theology and the Boundary Discourse of Human Rights
Abstract: Has this child no share in human dignity? Has he or she no appeal to human rights, the dominant moral discourse of our time? Richard Rorty describes the contemporary moral landscape as one primarily inhabited by “Kantians” or “Hegelians.” Those who hold that there are such things as intrinsic human dignity and universal human rights are Kantians. They also uphold an ahistorical distinction between the demands of morality and those of prudence. Rorty identifies a particular type of contemporary Hegelian as one who seeks to uphold the institutions and practices of liberal democracies without an appeal to their foundations in
Chapter Three Human Rights in Time: from:
Theology and the Boundary Discourse of Human Rights
Abstract: This chapter situates human rights as a “realist” discourse in time, located between the memory of suffering and hope for the future. It begins with a brief exploration of the concept of memory, particularly the efforts to develop what Paul Ricoeur calls a culture of
just memory. The contribution of Recuperación de la Memoría Historica, produced by the Human Rights Office of the Catholic Archdiocese of Guatemala, to our understanding of the impact of human rights violations, not just on individuals—damaging thereby both victims and perpetrators—but also on the fabric of community, will be examined. The “interruption” of
Introduction from:
Theology and the Boundary Discourse of Human Rights
Abstract: The discourse of human rights has emerged as the dominant moral discourse of our time. Reflecting on this often contentious discourse, with both its enthusiasts and detractors, led me to consider the following questions: What constitutes an intelligible definition of human rights? What place should this discourse occupy within ethics? Can theology acknowledge human rights discourse? How is theological engagement with human rights justified? What are the implications of the convergence of what are two potentially universalizable discourses?
Chapter One A Dialectical Boundary Discourse: from:
Theology and the Boundary Discourse of Human Rights
Abstract: Has this child no share in human dignity? Has he or she no appeal to human rights, the dominant moral discourse of our time? Richard Rorty describes the contemporary moral landscape as one primarily inhabited by “Kantians” or “Hegelians.” Those who hold that there are such things as intrinsic human dignity and universal human rights are Kantians. They also uphold an ahistorical distinction between the demands of morality and those of prudence. Rorty identifies a particular type of contemporary Hegelian as one who seeks to uphold the institutions and practices of liberal democracies without an appeal to their foundations in
Chapter Three Human Rights in Time: from:
Theology and the Boundary Discourse of Human Rights
Abstract: This chapter situates human rights as a “realist” discourse in time, located between the memory of suffering and hope for the future. It begins with a brief exploration of the concept of memory, particularly the efforts to develop what Paul Ricoeur calls a culture of
just memory. The contribution of Recuperación de la Memoría Historica, produced by the Human Rights Office of the Catholic Archdiocese of Guatemala, to our understanding of the impact of human rights violations, not just on individuals—damaging thereby both victims and perpetrators—but also on the fabric of community, will be examined. The “interruption” of
8 Identity Building through Narratives on a Tulu Call-in TV Show from:
Telling Stories
Author(s) SHETTY MALAVIKA
Abstract: IN INDIA, the speakers of Tulu, a Dravidian language with 1.7 million speakers concentrated in the South Kannara region of the state of Karnataka, have largely been linguistically subsumed by the greater number of Kannada speakers (38 million nationwide) around them.¹ In February 2005, Namma TV (“Our TV”), a new television channel, started broadcasting local programs, largely in Tulu, for the first time in the region. Based on recorded episodes from a Tulu call-in TV show,
Pattanga, on the channel, this chapter looks at how the moderators of and callers to the show use narratives on the show to construct
13 Concurrent and Intervening Actions during Storytelling in Family “Ceremonial” Dinners from:
Telling Stories
Author(s) MANDELBAUM JENNY
Abstract: IN ORDINARY CONVERSATION, speakers take turns at talk that usually consist of one turn constructional unit, and then speaker exchange occurs (Sacks, Schegloff, and Jefferson 1974). In telling a story, a speaker produces more than one turn constructional unit. To do this, a prospective storyteller (sometimes in collaboration with prospective recipients), indicates that there is a story to tell, and may be granted the conversational floor for an extended turn (Jefferson 1978; Sacks 1978). As a storytelling proceeds, the ends of turn constructional units may provide opportunities for, or make relevant, turns by recipients. As I discuss below, these recipient
8 Identity Building through Narratives on a Tulu Call-in TV Show from:
Telling Stories
Author(s) SHETTY MALAVIKA
Abstract: IN INDIA, the speakers of Tulu, a Dravidian language with 1.7 million speakers concentrated in the South Kannara region of the state of Karnataka, have largely been linguistically subsumed by the greater number of Kannada speakers (38 million nationwide) around them.¹ In February 2005, Namma TV (“Our TV”), a new television channel, started broadcasting local programs, largely in Tulu, for the first time in the region. Based on recorded episodes from a Tulu call-in TV show,
Pattanga, on the channel, this chapter looks at how the moderators of and callers to the show use narratives on the show to construct
13 Concurrent and Intervening Actions during Storytelling in Family “Ceremonial” Dinners from:
Telling Stories
Author(s) MANDELBAUM JENNY
Abstract: IN ORDINARY CONVERSATION, speakers take turns at talk that usually consist of one turn constructional unit, and then speaker exchange occurs (Sacks, Schegloff, and Jefferson 1974). In telling a story, a speaker produces more than one turn constructional unit. To do this, a prospective storyteller (sometimes in collaboration with prospective recipients), indicates that there is a story to tell, and may be granted the conversational floor for an extended turn (Jefferson 1978; Sacks 1978). As a storytelling proceeds, the ends of turn constructional units may provide opportunities for, or make relevant, turns by recipients. As I discuss below, these recipient
Chapter One Sexual Morality in the Catholic Tradition: from:
The Sexual Person
Abstract: Human sexual activity and the sexual ethics that seeks to order it are both sociohistorical realities and are, therefore, subject to historicity, the quality of the human animal that follows inevitably from his and her situation in real time and space and “provides him with a [human] world that he must accept in freedom.”¹ Before we embark on a presentation of contemporary Catholic sexual anthropology and ethics, therefore, it behooves us to look at their past history. In this chapter we do that in two stages. First, and briefly because it is already well known and well documented, we consider
Chapter Six Cohabitation and the Process of Marrying from:
The Sexual Person
Abstract: Emmanuel ntakarutimana expresses the Central African experience of marrying in the following words. “Where Western tradition presents marriage as a point in time at which consent is exchanged between the couple in front of witnesses approved by law, followed by consummation, the tradition here recognizes the consummation of a marriage with the birth of the first child. To that point the marriage was only being
progressively realized.”¹ Four years of field experience in East Africa taught us the same thing. We offer three points of clarification. First, the Western tradition to which Ntakarutimana refers is the Western tradition of only
Chapter One Sexual Morality in the Catholic Tradition: from:
The Sexual Person
Abstract: Human sexual activity and the sexual ethics that seeks to order it are both sociohistorical realities and are, therefore, subject to historicity, the quality of the human animal that follows inevitably from his and her situation in real time and space and “provides him with a [human] world that he must accept in freedom.”¹ Before we embark on a presentation of contemporary Catholic sexual anthropology and ethics, therefore, it behooves us to look at their past history. In this chapter we do that in two stages. First, and briefly because it is already well known and well documented, we consider
Chapter Six Cohabitation and the Process of Marrying from:
The Sexual Person
Abstract: Emmanuel ntakarutimana expresses the Central African experience of marrying in the following words. “Where Western tradition presents marriage as a point in time at which consent is exchanged between the couple in front of witnesses approved by law, followed by consummation, the tradition here recognizes the consummation of a marriage with the birth of the first child. To that point the marriage was only being
progressively realized.”¹ Four years of field experience in East Africa taught us the same thing. We offer three points of clarification. First, the Western tradition to which Ntakarutimana refers is the Western tradition of only
Book Title: Ethics in Light of Childhood- Publisher: Georgetown University Press
Author(s): Wall John
Abstract: Childhood faces humanity with its own deepest and most perplexing questions. An ethics that truly includes the world's childhoods would transcend pre-modern traditional communities and modern rational autonomy with a postmodern aim of growing responsibility. It would understand human relations in a poetic rather than universalistic sense as openly and interdependently creative. As a consequence, it would produce new understandings of moral being, time, and otherness, as well as of religion, rights, narrative, families, obligation, and power.
Ethics in Light of Childhoodfundamentally reimagines ethical thought and practice in light of the experiences of the third of humanity who are children. Much like humanism, feminism, womanism, and environmentalism, Wall argues, a new childism is required that transforms moral thinking, relations, and societies in fundamental ways. Wall explores childhood's varied impacts on ethical thinking throughout history, advances the emerging interdisciplinary field of childhood studies, and reexamines basic assumptions in contemporary moral theory and practice. In the process, he does not just apply ethics to childhood but applies childhood to ethics-in order to imagine a more expansive humanity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt6ww
Chapter 1 Three Enduring Models from:
Ethics in Light of Childhood
Abstract: HUMAN BEINGS are historical creatures. We not only live within time, like all things, but we also construct the meaning
of time through stories, rituals, traditions, and cultures. Present experience aims toward anticipated futures and is interpreted through the lenses of understandings and beliefs from the past. Children demonstrate this historicity of human life acutely. No child chooses the inherited languages and mores that already shape the structures of their lives and thinking from birth. But every child interprets these conditions in new ways for themselves and in relation to their own open and unfolding futures. However diverse human histories
Book Title: Ethics in Light of Childhood- Publisher: Georgetown University Press
Author(s): Wall John
Abstract: Childhood faces humanity with its own deepest and most perplexing questions. An ethics that truly includes the world's childhoods would transcend pre-modern traditional communities and modern rational autonomy with a postmodern aim of growing responsibility. It would understand human relations in a poetic rather than universalistic sense as openly and interdependently creative. As a consequence, it would produce new understandings of moral being, time, and otherness, as well as of religion, rights, narrative, families, obligation, and power.
Ethics in Light of Childhoodfundamentally reimagines ethical thought and practice in light of the experiences of the third of humanity who are children. Much like humanism, feminism, womanism, and environmentalism, Wall argues, a new childism is required that transforms moral thinking, relations, and societies in fundamental ways. Wall explores childhood's varied impacts on ethical thinking throughout history, advances the emerging interdisciplinary field of childhood studies, and reexamines basic assumptions in contemporary moral theory and practice. In the process, he does not just apply ethics to childhood but applies childhood to ethics-in order to imagine a more expansive humanity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt6ww
Chapter 1 Three Enduring Models from:
Ethics in Light of Childhood
Abstract: HUMAN BEINGS are historical creatures. We not only live within time, like all things, but we also construct the meaning
of time through stories, rituals, traditions, and cultures. Present experience aims toward anticipated futures and is interpreted through the lenses of understandings and beliefs from the past. Children demonstrate this historicity of human life acutely. No child chooses the inherited languages and mores that already shape the structures of their lives and thinking from birth. But every child interprets these conditions in new ways for themselves and in relation to their own open and unfolding futures. However diverse human histories
Book Title: Overcoming Our Evil-Human Nature and Spiritual Exercises in Xunzi and Augustine
Publisher: Georgetown University Press
Author(s): Stalnaker Aaron
Abstract: Can people ever really change? Do they ever become more ethical, and if so, how?
Overcoming Our Evilfocuses on the way ethical and religious commitments are conceived and nurtured through the methodical practices that Pierre Hadot has called "spiritual exercises." These practices engage thought, imagination, and sensibility, and have a significant ethical component, yet aim for a broader transformation of the whole personality. Going beyond recent philosophical and historical work that has focused on ancient Greco-Roman philosophy, Stalnaker broadens ethical inquiry into spiritual exercises by examining East Asian as well as classical Christian sources, and taking religious and seemingly "aesthetic" practices such as prayer, ritual, and music more seriously as objects of study. More specifically,Overcoming Our Evilexamines and compares the thought and practice of the early Christian Augustine of Hippo, and the early Confucian Xunzi. Both have sophisticated and insightful accounts of spiritual exercises, and both make such ethical work central to their religious thought and practice. Yet to understand the two thinkers' recommendations for cultivating virtue we must first understand some important differences. Here Stalnaker disentangles the competing aspects of Augustine and Xunxi's ideas of "human nature." His groundbreaking comparison of their ethical vocabularies also drives a substantive analysis of fundamental issues in moral psychology, especially regarding emotion and the complex idea of "the will," to examine how our dispositions to feel, think, and act might be slowly transformed over time. The comparison meticulously constructs vivid portraits of both thinkers demonstrating where they connect and where they diverge, making the case that both have been misunderstood and misinterpreted. In throwing light on these seemingly disparate ancient figures in unexpected ways, Stalnaker redirects recent debate regarding practices of personal formation, and more clearly exposes the intellectual and political issues involved in the retrieval of "classic" ethical sources in diverse contemporary societies, illuminating a path toward a contemporary understanding of difference.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt78n
CHAPTER FOUR Broken Images of the Divine from:
Overcoming Our Evil
Abstract: Rather than providing a supposedly static summary, much of the best contemporary work on Augustine carefully traces the development of his thought, often correlating it to events in his life.¹ One great virtue of this approach is that it maps the changes in his views over time, illuminating every contour and ridge of his evolving conceptions, and thereby aids a more precise grappling with his ideas. Another virtue is suitability to Augustine’s thought itself, which “proceeds by way of ceaseless inquiry”² and is preserved in a vast collection of writings, almost all of which were provoked by particular circumstantial needs
Book Title: The Princeton Encyclopedia of Poetry and Poetics-Fourth Edition
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Slessarev Alexandra
Abstract: Thoroughly revised and updated by a new editorial team for twenty-first-century students, scholars, and poetsMore than 250 new entries cover recent terms, movements, and related topicsBroader international coverage includes articles on the poetries of more than 110 nations, regions, and languagesExpanded coverage of poetries of the non-Western and developing worldsUpdated bibliographies and cross-referencesNew, easier-to-use page designFully indexed for the first time
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt8jz
Book Title: The Princeton Encyclopedia of Poetry and Poetics-Fourth Edition
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Slessarev Alexandra
Abstract: Thoroughly revised and updated by a new editorial team for twenty-first-century students, scholars, and poetsMore than 250 new entries cover recent terms, movements, and related topicsBroader international coverage includes articles on the poetries of more than 110 nations, regions, and languagesExpanded coverage of poetries of the non-Western and developing worldsUpdated bibliographies and cross-referencesNew, easier-to-use page designFully indexed for the first time
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt8jz
Book Title: The Princeton Encyclopedia of Poetry and Poetics-Fourth Edition
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Slessarev Alexandra
Abstract: Thoroughly revised and updated by a new editorial team for twenty-first-century students, scholars, and poetsMore than 250 new entries cover recent terms, movements, and related topicsBroader international coverage includes articles on the poetries of more than 110 nations, regions, and languagesExpanded coverage of poetries of the non-Western and developing worldsUpdated bibliographies and cross-referencesNew, easier-to-use page designFully indexed for the first time
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt8jz
Book Title: The Princeton Encyclopedia of Poetry and Poetics-Fourth Edition
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Slessarev Alexandra
Abstract: Thoroughly revised and updated by a new editorial team for twenty-first-century students, scholars, and poetsMore than 250 new entries cover recent terms, movements, and related topicsBroader international coverage includes articles on the poetries of more than 110 nations, regions, and languagesExpanded coverage of poetries of the non-Western and developing worldsUpdated bibliographies and cross-referencesNew, easier-to-use page designFully indexed for the first time
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt8jz
Book Title: The Princeton Encyclopedia of Poetry and Poetics-Fourth Edition
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Slessarev Alexandra
Abstract: Thoroughly revised and updated by a new editorial team for twenty-first-century students, scholars, and poetsMore than 250 new entries cover recent terms, movements, and related topicsBroader international coverage includes articles on the poetries of more than 110 nations, regions, and languagesExpanded coverage of poetries of the non-Western and developing worldsUpdated bibliographies and cross-referencesNew, easier-to-use page designFully indexed for the first time
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt8jz
Book Title: The Princeton Encyclopedia of Poetry and Poetics-Fourth Edition
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Slessarev Alexandra
Abstract: Thoroughly revised and updated by a new editorial team for twenty-first-century students, scholars, and poetsMore than 250 new entries cover recent terms, movements, and related topicsBroader international coverage includes articles on the poetries of more than 110 nations, regions, and languagesExpanded coverage of poetries of the non-Western and developing worldsUpdated bibliographies and cross-referencesNew, easier-to-use page designFully indexed for the first time
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt8jz
Book Title: The Princeton Encyclopedia of Poetry and Poetics-Fourth Edition
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Slessarev Alexandra
Abstract: Thoroughly revised and updated by a new editorial team for twenty-first-century students, scholars, and poetsMore than 250 new entries cover recent terms, movements, and related topicsBroader international coverage includes articles on the poetries of more than 110 nations, regions, and languagesExpanded coverage of poetries of the non-Western and developing worldsUpdated bibliographies and cross-referencesNew, easier-to-use page designFully indexed for the first time
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt8jz
Book Title: The Princeton Encyclopedia of Poetry and Poetics-Fourth Edition
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Slessarev Alexandra
Abstract: Thoroughly revised and updated by a new editorial team for twenty-first-century students, scholars, and poetsMore than 250 new entries cover recent terms, movements, and related topicsBroader international coverage includes articles on the poetries of more than 110 nations, regions, and languagesExpanded coverage of poetries of the non-Western and developing worldsUpdated bibliographies and cross-referencesNew, easier-to-use page designFully indexed for the first time
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt8jz
Book Title: The Princeton Encyclopedia of Poetry and Poetics-Fourth Edition
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Slessarev Alexandra
Abstract: Thoroughly revised and updated by a new editorial team for twenty-first-century students, scholars, and poetsMore than 250 new entries cover recent terms, movements, and related topicsBroader international coverage includes articles on the poetries of more than 110 nations, regions, and languagesExpanded coverage of poetries of the non-Western and developing worldsUpdated bibliographies and cross-referencesNew, easier-to-use page designFully indexed for the first time
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt8jz
Book Title: The Princeton Encyclopedia of Poetry and Poetics-Fourth Edition
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Slessarev Alexandra
Abstract: Thoroughly revised and updated by a new editorial team for twenty-first-century students, scholars, and poetsMore than 250 new entries cover recent terms, movements, and related topicsBroader international coverage includes articles on the poetries of more than 110 nations, regions, and languagesExpanded coverage of poetries of the non-Western and developing worldsUpdated bibliographies and cross-referencesNew, easier-to-use page designFully indexed for the first time
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt8jz
Book Title: The Furies-Violence and Terror in the French and Russian Revolutions
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): MAYER ARNO J.
Abstract: The great romance and fear of bloody revolution--strange blend of idealism and terror--have been superseded by blind faith in the bloodless expansion of human rights and global capitalism. Flying in the face of history, violence is dismissed as rare, immoral, and counterproductive. Arguing against this pervasive wishful thinking, the distinguished historian Arno J. Mayer revisits the two most tumultuous and influential revolutions of modern times: the French Revolution of 1789 and the Russian Revolution of 1917.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt8x8
CHAPTER 8 In the Eye of a “Time of Troubles”: from:
The Furies
Abstract: In 1917 the overexertions of a protracted and failing war gravely unsettled Russia: the imperial army was on the verge of disintegration; famine stalked the major cities; the economy and exchequer were wasted; and industry was paralyzed. Twice before, in the time of the CrimeanWar and Russo-Japanese War, military defeat had shaken the tsarist regime and called forth prophylactic reforms. But in scale and intensity these earlier upheavals were nothing like the deep crisis brought on and fueled by the inordinate material and human sacrifices of the Very Great War. In February–March 1917, between the fall of the Peter-Paul
CHAPTER 12 Engaging the Russian Orthodox Church from:
The Furies
Abstract: In 1917 Russia was as much a country of peasants as France had been in 1789, or even more so. However, at the time of its revolution France had been in step with the other major European powers. By contrast, one hundred and thirty years later, Russia stood out for its relative economic and social retardation and torpor.¹ To be sure, Russia was not purely European: its human geography and geopolitics were Eurasian, and its “semi-colonial” level of development was combined with an extraordinary diversity of national, ethnic, and religious minorities. Russia’s elite culture could not pretend to a transnational
CHAPTER 13 Perils of Emancipation: from:
The Furies
Abstract: Although in the long run revolutionary situations benefit oppressed and persecuted religious minorities, in the short run they put them in peril. In 1789 the Protestants and in 1791 the Jews of France gained full emancipation; in 1917 the Jews of Russia. Each time, however, there was a price to be paid. In terms of lives, the cost of religious liberation was, of course, infinitely greater during the Russian than the French Revolution. But while adverse reactions against emancipation were very different in scale, their causes and dynamics were uncommonly alike. During both revolutions, antirevolutionaries and counterrevolutionaries were the chief
Book Title: The Furies-Violence and Terror in the French and Russian Revolutions
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): MAYER ARNO J.
Abstract: The great romance and fear of bloody revolution--strange blend of idealism and terror--have been superseded by blind faith in the bloodless expansion of human rights and global capitalism. Flying in the face of history, violence is dismissed as rare, immoral, and counterproductive. Arguing against this pervasive wishful thinking, the distinguished historian Arno J. Mayer revisits the two most tumultuous and influential revolutions of modern times: the French Revolution of 1789 and the Russian Revolution of 1917.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt8x8
CHAPTER 8 In the Eye of a “Time of Troubles”: from:
The Furies
Abstract: In 1917 the overexertions of a protracted and failing war gravely unsettled Russia: the imperial army was on the verge of disintegration; famine stalked the major cities; the economy and exchequer were wasted; and industry was paralyzed. Twice before, in the time of the CrimeanWar and Russo-Japanese War, military defeat had shaken the tsarist regime and called forth prophylactic reforms. But in scale and intensity these earlier upheavals were nothing like the deep crisis brought on and fueled by the inordinate material and human sacrifices of the Very Great War. In February–March 1917, between the fall of the Peter-Paul
CHAPTER 12 Engaging the Russian Orthodox Church from:
The Furies
Abstract: In 1917 Russia was as much a country of peasants as France had been in 1789, or even more so. However, at the time of its revolution France had been in step with the other major European powers. By contrast, one hundred and thirty years later, Russia stood out for its relative economic and social retardation and torpor.¹ To be sure, Russia was not purely European: its human geography and geopolitics were Eurasian, and its “semi-colonial” level of development was combined with an extraordinary diversity of national, ethnic, and religious minorities. Russia’s elite culture could not pretend to a transnational
CHAPTER 13 Perils of Emancipation: from:
The Furies
Abstract: Although in the long run revolutionary situations benefit oppressed and persecuted religious minorities, in the short run they put them in peril. In 1789 the Protestants and in 1791 the Jews of France gained full emancipation; in 1917 the Jews of Russia. Each time, however, there was a price to be paid. In terms of lives, the cost of religious liberation was, of course, infinitely greater during the Russian than the French Revolution. But while adverse reactions against emancipation were very different in scale, their causes and dynamics were uncommonly alike. During both revolutions, antirevolutionaries and counterrevolutionaries were the chief
Introduction from:
Being in the World
Abstract: By now it is a commonplace—a widely accepted commonplace—to say that we live in an age of globalization, that the world is steadily shrinking, and that people around the globe are increasingly pushed together. The saying has a ring of correctness or plausibility. What is correct is that financial markets are relentlessly expanding, that complex information networks are encircling the world, and that military weaponry is stretching around the globe (and capable of annihilating it many times over). What is not often noted is that the correctness of the saying conceals as much as it reveals. Underneath the
1. Being in the World: from:
Being in the World
Abstract: Our age of globalization conjures up a host of challenging problems, mostly of a cultural, economic, and political nature. A steadily expanding literature deals with these problems. What is not often noticed is that globalization also harbors terminological and semantic quandaries. We know at least since Copernicus and Galileo that our Earth is a “globe” and not a flattened landscape. Given this knowledge, what does it mean that our habitat is “globalized” in our time? Surely, its physical “global” shape is not modified. In aggravated form, similar semantic problems beset other terms often used as equivalents: like
worldorearth.
3. After Babel: from:
Being in the World
Abstract: In the earliest times, after the great flood, the Bible tells us (Genesis 11:1–9), “the whole earth had one language and few words.” The people took hold of a stretch of land in order to settle there and gain means of subsistence. They soon developed skills as artisans and craftsmen and even ventured into the fields of construction and engineering. After they had acquired sufficient competence and self-confidence, they said to each other: “Come, let us build ourselves a city and a tower with its top in the heavens, so that we make a name for ourselves and not
7. The Body Politic: from:
Being in the World
Abstract: Looking at contemporary humanity, one can hardly avoid the impression of a huge body or organism ravaged by multiple diseases and even catastrophes.¹ Even without detailed diagnosis, it is not hard to trace these ailments to a set of underlying factors or causes: political oppression or domination; radical inequality between rich and poor; xenophobia sometimes resulting in genocide; terrorist violence; and the abuse of religions and ideologies. If such ailments occurred on a small scale or in a limited group of people, efforts would quickly be made to find remedies to combat the existing ills. However, if they happen on
8. A Secular Age? from:
Being in the World
Abstract: At least in the Western context, our age is commonly referred to as that of “modernity”—a term sometimes qualified as “late modernity” or “post-modernity.” Taken by itself, the term is nondescript; in its literal sense, it simply means a time of novelty or innovation. Hence, something needs to be added to capture the kind of novelty involved. To pinpoint this innovation, modernity is also referred to as the “age of reason” or the age of enlightenment and science—in order to demarcate the period from a prior age presumably characterized by unreason, metaphysical speculation, and intellectual obscurantism or darkness.
10. Political Self-Rule: from:
Being in the World
Abstract: For students and friends of Gandhi, 2009 was an important year.¹ As we know, it was a hundred years ago, on a long sea voyage, that Mohandas Gandhi penned his book
Hind SwarajorIndian Home Rule—a text justly famous because it has stood the test of time. The book was Gandhi’s opening salvo in his attack on colonialism and imperialism and his first public plea for Indian independence, freedom or liberation from foreign domination. Surely, there is ample reason for commemorating and celebrating this anniversary. Yet celebration here cannot just mean a nostalgic retrieval of the past or
11. Radical Changes in the Muslim World: from:
Being in the World
Abstract: History defies linearity. In a time when, at least in the Western world, major issues appeared to be settled and some even predicted the “end of history,” drama has suddenly erupted elsewhere—and especially in the Muslim world. A political arena that in many respects seemed relatively stagnant has unexpectedly been gripped by radical turmoil and revolutionary fervor. This does not mean that such turmoil is ever completely unprepared or unmotivated. Contrary to their portrayal (by some academics) as near-apocalyptic interruptions beyond intelligibility, revolutions have precursors or conditioning factors; usually they are the product of a deep social malaise, of
12. Opening the Doors of Interpretation: from:
Being in the World
Abstract: Interpretation is sometimes greatly underrated or undervalued; frequently it is seen as a mere method or subordinate tool of research. This view is seriously mistaken—as I shall try to show here mainly with regard to religious faith. As we know, the so-called Abrahamic religions—Judaism, Christianity, and Islam—are based in large measure on divine revelation, that is, on a message reaching human beings from “another shore.” In the case of Islam, the Qur’an is even considered by most pious Muslims as the direct and unmediated “word” of God. Nor is this assumption restricted to the three cited world
FOREWORD from:
Covering for the Bosses
Author(s) Aronowitz Stanley
Abstract: John Sweeney, the leader of the Service Employees International Union (SEIU), led a revolt of a gaggle of large unions and was elected American Federation of Labor–Congress of Industrial Organizations (AFL-CIO) president in 1995, an unprecedented challenge in modern labor history to a sitting administration. Not since 1908 when an insurgency within the AFL opposed the reelection of its longtime leader, Samuel Gompers, and a group of industrial unions bolted from the AFL in 1935, had labor’s ranks been so divided.
Chapter 5 LABOR, RACE, AND THE MISSISSIPPI PRESS from:
Covering for the Bosses
Abstract: Claude Ramsay, the crusty, barrel-chested president of the Mississippi AFL-CIO from 1959 to 1986, delivered a stem-winder of a speech at the University of Mississippi in 1966—a time when the fires of the civil rights struggle were still burning—that included a snapshot history of the labor movement, a discussion of the twin legacies of Samuel Gompers and Eugene Debs, and a withering analysis of how the state’s political and business leaders had failed working Mississippians. His best shots, however, came in a blistering indictment of the Mississippi press.
SEVEN Faulkner and the Regionalist Context from:
Faulkner
Abstract: In the past, the term
regionalism, particularly in literary studies, has often been understood as denoting a short-lived, reactionary movement of the thirties. However, the study of a wider range of contemporary texts shows thatregionalis closely interrelated with the termnationaland occurs in a central debate (not just inThe Nationbut also inThe New Republicand in the African AmericanThe Messenger) on American identity and values at a time of fundamental crisis. The complexity of regionalism can be seen from the fact that it appears as often in the political and economic context of
Book Title: Faulkner and His Contemporaries- Publisher: University Press of Mississippi
Author(s): URGO JOSEPH R.
Abstract: What, then, did such contemporaries as Ernest Hemingway, Eudora Welty, and Walker Evans think of his work? How did his times affect and accept what he wrote?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tvgm1
Cather’s War and Faulkner’s Peace: from:
Faulkner and His Contemporaries
Author(s) Skaggs Merrill Maguire
Abstract: After Judith Wittenberg first published the facts about Faulkner’s several acknowledgments of Willa Cather,¹ I myself analyzed specific literary loans she made to him. For example, Faulkner’s second novel,
Mosquitoes, recycles numerous items from Cather’sThe Professor’s House,² while details fromMyÁntoniareappear many times in Faulkner’s major fiction,³ andDeath Comes for the Archbishopenjoys a resurrection almost immediately inThe Sound and the Fury.⁴ Cather, in turn, seemed to address Faulkner directly in her last published story.⁵ In this essay, however, I want to confront the much more challenging question of where it all started. Granted that
Surveying the Postage-Stamp Territory: from:
Faulkner and His Contemporaries
Author(s) Prenshaw Peggy Whitman
Abstract: In the spring of 1936, perhaps just at the time that William Faulkner was drawing a map to accompany the publication of his new novel,
Absalom, Absalom!, Eudora Welty was awaiting the publication of her short story “Death of a Traveling Salesman” in the little magazineManuscript. For Welty, it was the launching of what would be a long writing career. For Faulkner, it was a culminating moment of his vast ambition to gather the Southern story between the covers of one book. He identified his sketched map as “Jefferson, Yoknapatawpha Co., Mississippi, Area 2400 sq. mi., Population, Whites, 6298,
“Blacks and Other Very Dark Colors”: from:
Faulkner and His Contemporaries
Author(s) Pitavy-Souques Danièle
Abstract: The late 1940s and early 1950s were times of national hysteria and war on social and political heretics, times which deeply affected the South with the rise of the civil rights movement and serious commitment for or against a reconsideration of racial issues, and which affected the nation at large with the fear of communism inside the country. Such times could not leave American writers indifferent. Each, following his or her own aesthetic sensibilities, felt the urge to produce works that translated the social and political turmoil as well as reflected a deeper vision of literature and its role.
“IN-ITSELF-FOR-ME” from:
Charles Johnson
Author(s) CHANDLER GENA
Abstract: In October 1999, New York’s Brooklyn Museum became the staging ground for an important exhibition of Britain’s new and emerging young artists. The museum’s director, Arnold Lehman, marked the exhibition as “the most creative energy [in art] that’s come out of Great Britain in a very long time” (“The Art of Controversy”). That exhibition, “Sensation: Young British Artists from the Saatchi Collection,” represented an official American “coming-out” party for a collection of contemporary British artists who were challenging the boundaries of taste and aesthetics in the contemporary art world while simultaneously challenging the historical biases against the value of British
SEVEN Creation in St. Thomas Aquinas’s from:
Reading John with St. Thomas Aquinas
Author(s) Burrell David B.
Abstract: It will hardly seem strange to remind ourselves that appropriating Aquinas for our times may well require deconstructing appropriations effected in other intellectual climes, especially those of the last century. Indeed, an outstanding note of these earlier readings had been their unilateral focus on Aquinas the philosopher, generating a fast distinction between “philosophy” and “theology”—a distinction that hardened into an institutional separation between such faculties in Catholic colleges and universities. There emerged a bridging discipline, to be sure, called “natural theology,” which purported to treat theological issues from “reason alone.” Yet the issues so treated—typically the existence of
TWELVE “Come and See” from:
Reading John with St. Thomas Aquinas
Author(s) Smith Janet E.
Abstract: Why is it that some people accept Christ as the Son of God and their Savior and others do not? Why is it that some respond to evangelization and others do not? Certainly, sometimes inadequate knowledge or unpersuasive arguments make an evangelizer ineffective. Perhaps the evangelizer’s own life is not a model of what he is preaching and thus his teaching is unattractive. But when Christ is the evangelizer, none of these negatives could possibly apply. Is there any explanation why some recognize Christ for who he is when they are invited to “Come and see” and others do not?
9 Religious, Moral, and Intellectual Conversion from:
The Quest for God and the Good Life
Abstract: As mentioned in chapter 4 within the section, “The Human Good,” Lonergan defines conversion in terms of horizontal and vertical liberty. Horizontal liberty allows a person to make relatively minor choices from a range of options within a fixed boundary or “horizon.” Vertical liberty is the product of a much more radical choice, a leap of self-transcendence that expands or otherwise transforms one’s horizon itself. Sometimes the new horizon, “though notably deeper and broader and richer” than the previous horizon, may still be “consonant with the old and a development out of its potentialities.” However, sometimes a new horizon is
10 A Redemptive Community from:
The Quest for God and the Good Life
Abstract: Typically, in
Insight Lonergan credits progress to human intelligence as driven by the “detached and disinterested desire to know.” Surprisingly, however, he sometimes in this same work credits liberty. Rather than view this as an irreconcilable inconsistency, I would argue that liberty and intelligence are complementary. They work hand in hand. And both are necessary for progress.¹ Good ideas can improve the situation, but there must be liberty in the community if the ideas are to be reflected on, communicated, tested, implemented, allowed to change the social situation, and eventually to be reevaluated and corrected by new ideas.
John Henry Newman (1801–90) from:
Tradition and Modernity
Author(s) Newman John Henry
Abstract: The following essay is directed towards a solution of the difficulty which has been stated,—the difficulty, as far as it exists, which lies in the way of our using in controversy the testimony of our most natural informant concerning the doctrine and worship of Christianity, viz. the history of eighteen hundred years. The view on which it is written has at all times, perhaps, been implicitly adopted by theologians, and, I believe, has recently been illustrated by several distinguished writers of the continent, such as De Maistre and Möhler: viz. that the increase and expansion of the Christian Creed
Book Title: Troubling Natural Categories-Engaging the Medical Anthropology of Margaret Lock
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): KIELMANN KARINA
Abstract: Where do our conventional understandings of health, illness, and the body stem from? What makes them authoritative? How are the boundaries set around these areas of life unsettled in the changing historical and political contexts of science, technology, and health care delivery? These questions are at the heart of Troubling Natural Categories, a collection of essays honouring the tradition of Margaret Lock, one of the preeminent medical anthropologists of our time. Throughout her career, Lock has investigated how medicine sets boundaries around what is deemed "normal" and "natural," and how, in turn, these ideas shape our technical and moral understandings of life, sickness, and death. In this book, nine established medical anthropologists - all former students of Lock - critically engage with her work, offering ethnographic and historical analyses that problematize taken-for-granted constructs in health and medicine in a range of global settings. The essays elaborate cutting-edge themes within medical anthropology, including the often disturbing, inherently political nature of biomedicine and biotechnology, the medicalization of mental health processes, and the formation of uniquely "local biologies" through the convergence of bodily experience, scientific discourse, and new technologies of care. Troubling Natural Categories not only affirms Margaret Lock's place at the forefront of scholarship but, with these essays, carves out new intellectual directions in the medical social sciences. Contributors include Sean Brotherton, Vinh-Kim Nguyen, Junko Kitanaka, Stephanie Lloyd, Dominique Behague, and Annette Leibing.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32b73f
2 Therapeutic Modernism: from:
Troubling Natural Categories
Author(s) NGUYEN VINH-KIM
Abstract: I trained under Margaret Lock in the years after she published her seminal work
Encounters with Aging(1993). After three years of practising full-time as an emergency and HIV physician, the grind of medical practice had left me longing for an approach that went beyond the clinical or epidemiological sciences. Neither helped me make sense of what I saw in the clinic. As I began working in West Africa as a community organizer with HIV groups, most of the anthropological work I encountered viewed the epidemic through the lens of either culture or political economy. The realities I encountered were
4 The Gendering of Depression in Japan from:
Troubling Natural Categories
Author(s) Kitanaka Junko
Abstract: Depression has long been represented in the West as a quintessential female malady, where women are said to be twice as likely as men to become depressed. This gender ratio has been used by some feminists to argue that depression epitomizes women’s suffering (Jack 1991). Japan poses a challenge to this characterization, however, because, until recently, rates of male depression had been as high as – sometimes even higher than – those of women. Throughout the twentieth century, numerous Japanese psychiatrists have commented on this statistical anomaly (e.g., Hirasawa 1966; Naka 1932; Nakane et al. 2004). As Margaret Lock called to our
5 From Spasmophilia to Social Phobia: from:
Troubling Natural Categories
Author(s) LLOYD STEPHANIE
Abstract: In the 1940s, a disabling syndrome was identified in France. This disorder, spasmophilia, which literally means “to like spasms,” was characterized by a range of symptoms including muscular spasms and hyperventilation, as well as cramps, convulsions, loss of memory, insomnia, migraines, stress, anxiety, the “neurotic triad” of hypochondriasis, depression, and hysteria, and other personalized symptoms (Durlach and Bara 2000, 98–9 and 129). The condition was believed to be linked to a magnesium deficiency and sometimes to a calcium imbalance, depending on the specialist consulted.
9 Digital Landscapes of Health from:
Troubling Natural Categories
Author(s) ADELSON NAOMI
Abstract: In early August of 2009
The Globe & Mailnewspaper reported that Canadian Prime Minister Harper and then federal Industry Minister Tony Clement held a small, private dinner in Ottawa with the CEOs of two of Canada’s largest digital technology industries of the time, RIM and Nortel. As a result of that meeting, Mr Clement publicly promised a “competitive and thriving digital economy” followed very soon after by Prime Minister Harper’s announcement of his socalled major “rollout of a rural broadband strategy” (McCarthy 2009, B1). Despite the ensuing collapse of Nortel and the recent decline of RIM and their effects
Afterword: from:
Troubling Natural Categories
Author(s) LOCK MARGARET
Abstract: As a small child one of my prize possessions was a shrapnel collection composed of pieces of tangled metal that had been scattered about the town of Orpington where I grew up. This debris was left by bombs fallen short of their London targets after the nightly air raids that took place, starting with The Blitz in 1940, and culminating in rocket attacks in 1945. The second to last rocket of the war fell on my family’s house – we were eating breakfast at the time. Neighbours were killed, but my family survived albeit with major injuries. Like the majority of
4 Multiculturalism in the Americas from:
Genuine Multiculturalism
Abstract: Genuine multiculturalism, then, is more than mere formalism and its seeming common-sense opposites, conformity and coercion – both sides of which I am presenting as twins of the same dialectic, as faces of freedom and slavery. Both have the same beginning, and at times the same genealogy of historical experiences. Their early separation into one or the other occurs as acts of diremption, akin to a biblical fall or to a tumble like a Humpty Dumpty – an apparent degeneration from freedom to slavery.
6 When Tragedy Becomes Comedy from:
Genuine Multiculturalism
Abstract: In a common-sense way, the maxims at the start of the previous chapter capture a contradiction immanent to life. Their irony gives them a generalized truth that is not always the case, while they remind us that we always face the certainty of despair and hope – often from the same source. Despair and hope are dialectical, for they can be opposing, and at times even complementary, parts of the same whole. The sayings also speak to the possibility of change for the better or the worse and to how every thought and act appear pregnant with the possibility of producing
12 Tyranny v. Freedom: from:
Genuine Multiculturalism
Abstract: In a famous exchange about the time Canadians were examining the idea of official multiculturalism, two leading theorists – conservative US philosopher Leo Strauss and left-leaning French philosopher Alexandre Kojève – debated about what it took to produce wise and good government in a modern state. Strauss wrestled with the question of the sovereign individual and whether one can remain authentic while living in a society – can he or she live happily ever after? Strauss starts always with the desires of the individual in discussing freedom and tyranny. He sees a “crisis in modernity” because neither the individual nor the state knows
11 Theories of Concepts and Moral Truth from:
Truth Matters
Author(s) PARK JOHN J.
Abstract: Concepts are the building blocks of thought. They take part crucially in various aspects of cognition such as categorizing objects, induction, deduction, and analogy making. Non-cognitivism and subjectivism are two meta-ethical views that make claims about the nature or structure of our moral concepts in moral judgments, concepts that are in part the building blocks of such thoughts. By claiming that all moral judgments are the expression of our emotions, such theories conclude that the moral concepts in our judgments are primarily constituted by emotions or sentiments. However, recent findings in empirical moral psychology show that such moral concepts are
11 Theories of Concepts and Moral Truth from:
Truth Matters
Author(s) PARK JOHN J.
Abstract: Concepts are the building blocks of thought. They take part crucially in various aspects of cognition such as categorizing objects, induction, deduction, and analogy making. Non-cognitivism and subjectivism are two meta-ethical views that make claims about the nature or structure of our moral concepts in moral judgments, concepts that are in part the building blocks of such thoughts. By claiming that all moral judgments are the expression of our emotions, such theories conclude that the moral concepts in our judgments are primarily constituted by emotions or sentiments. However, recent findings in empirical moral psychology show that such moral concepts are
11 Theories of Concepts and Moral Truth from:
Truth Matters
Author(s) PARK JOHN J.
Abstract: Concepts are the building blocks of thought. They take part crucially in various aspects of cognition such as categorizing objects, induction, deduction, and analogy making. Non-cognitivism and subjectivism are two meta-ethical views that make claims about the nature or structure of our moral concepts in moral judgments, concepts that are in part the building blocks of such thoughts. By claiming that all moral judgments are the expression of our emotions, such theories conclude that the moral concepts in our judgments are primarily constituted by emotions or sentiments. However, recent findings in empirical moral psychology show that such moral concepts are
Book Title: Art and Its Uses in Thomas Mann's 'Felix Krull'- Publisher: Modern Humanities Research Association
Author(s): Schonfield Ernest
Abstract: The turn of the twentieth century was a time of identity crisis for the upper and middle classes, one in which increased social mobility caused the blurring of traditional boundaries and created a need for reference works such as the British Who's Who (1897). At the same time, the rise of a new leisure industry and an increase in international travel led to a boom period for confidence men, who frequently operated in hotels and holiday resorts. Thomas Mann's "Felix Krull", written between 1910-13 and continued (though never completed) in 1951-54, uses contemporary accounts of these figures as a starting-point from which to explore the aesthetics of society. The early Krull marks an important stage in Mann's development in a number of respects.In writing it, Mann acquired a more flexible conception of identity and a new understanding of the relation between artist and public. Krull also signals a deeper engagement with Goethe and a shift in Mann's work towards a more open treatment of sexuality. The novel presents art as being central to the development of the individual and to social interaction. While Krull is nominally a confidence man, he is more of a performance artist, a purveyor of beauty who relies upon the complicity of his audience. The later Krull takes up where Mann left off and continues the justification of art as an essential human activity. This study draws upon unpublished material in order to provide a comprehensive reading of "Felix Krull". It examines the novel within the context of Mann's work as a whole, and, in doing so, it seeks to demonstrate the remarkable continuity of Mann's creative achievement.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32b997
INTRODUCTION from:
Art and Its Uses in Thomas Mann's 'Felix Krull'
Abstract: In his study
The Age of Empire, Eric Hobsbawm describes the period between 1875 and 1914 as a time of profound identity crisis for the upper and middle classes, one in which social mobility reached unprecedented levels.¹ As a result, there arose a confusion about ‘who was who’, and it was in this period that reference volumes about persons of status in the nation, such as the British Who’s Who (1897), first appeared.² The growth of the modern city added to the confusion about identity. As Georg Simmel remarked in his essay ‘Die Großstädte und das Geistesleben’ (1903), the dominance
CHAPTER 2 Art and the Notation of Community from:
Art and Its Uses in Thomas Mann's 'Felix Krull'
Abstract: Much has been written about the structural dichotomy of
Bürger and Künstler in the early works of Thomas Mann. In this early phase, the Künstler, as the representative of Geist, finds himself isolated from, and opposed to, the coarse realities of bourgeois life (Leben); and the possibility of conciliation between these two spheres appears remote. By the time Mann came to write the autobiographical Tonio Kröger (1903), however, he was beginning to realize that this opposition was too simplistic, and that a person could contain both types within himself. Tonio Kröger is both artist and ‘verirrter Bürger’ (VIII, 305), torn
Book Title: Rhetoric and Hermeneutics in Our Time-A Reader
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Hyde Michael J.
Abstract: This thought-provoking book initiates a dialogue among scholars in rhetoric and hermeneutics in many areas of the humanities. Twenty leading thinkers explore the ways these two powerful disciplines inform each other and influence a wide variety of intellectual fields. Walter Jost and Michael J. Hyde organize pivotal topics in rhetoric and hermeneutics with originality and coherence, dividing their book into four sections: Locating the Disciplines; Inventions and Applications; Arguments and Narratives; and Civic Discourse and Critical Theory.Contributors to this volume include Hans-Georg Gadamer (one of whose pieces is here translated into English for the first time), Paul Ricoeur, Gerald L. Bruns, Charles Altieri, Richard E. Palmer, Calvin O. Schrag,.Victoria Kahn, Eugene Garver, Michael Leff, Nancy S. Streuver, Wendy Olmsted, David Tracy, Donald G. Marshall, Allen Scult, Rita Copeland, William Rehg, and Steven Mailloux.For readers across the humanities, the book demonstrates the usefulness of rhetorical and hermeneutic approaches in literary, philosophical, legal, religious, and political thinking. With its stimulating new perspectives on the revival and interrelation of both rhetoric and hermeneutics, this collection is sure to serve as a benchmark for years to come.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bdtt
Prologue from:
Rhetoric and Hermeneutics in Our Time
Abstract: At mid-century E. R. Curtius, adverting to the study of rhetoric in his magisterial
European Literature and the Latin Middle Ages, boldly pronounced not only that “as an independent subject, it has long since vanished from the curriculum” but that “in our culture, rhetoric has no place.”¹ Only a few years later, related sentiments were expressed by the Oxford scholar C. S. Lewis. Lewis was, among other things, a Renaissance specialist for whom the modern ignorance of rhetoric as a subject of study presented the single greatest obstacle to our properly approaching the literature of the distant past.² For Lewis,
5 What Hermeneutics Can Offer Rhetoric from:
Rhetoric and Hermeneutics in Our Time
Author(s) Palmer Richard E.
Abstract: Rhetoric and hermeneutics today have achieved, as our editors point out in the Prologue, an impressive prominence across disciplines; indeed, they parallel each other in more than influence and multidisciplinary significance. They are parallel generically, they are interwoven historically, and they have experienced a remarkable expansion in theory and self-understanding in the last half of the twentieth century.¹ In each case, however, that expansion has been achieved, for the most part, in isolation from the other. Now it is time to renew old ties and explore what each can offer the other. My aim here is to affirm the desirability
17 Reason and Rhetoric in Habermas’s Theory of Argumentation from:
Rhetoric and Hermeneutics in Our Time
Author(s) Rehg William
Abstract: The late twentieth century presents an especially hostile environment for comprehensive accounts of reason. Precisely at a time when the dangers of social fragmentation and cross-cultural misunderstanding are becoming increasingly evident, the common bases for social integration and rational conflict adjudication seem to be disappearing in a postmodern, multicultural melee. The pluralization of worldviews and disenchantment with grand narratives, the suspicion of hasty ethnocentric generalization, and even the disciplinary specialization of inquiry itself encourage a general retreat into forms of relativism or narrow empiricism. As a result, it has become increasingly difficult to maintain a link between critical social theory,
Book Title: Rhetoric and Hermeneutics in Our Time-A Reader
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Hyde Michael J.
Abstract: This thought-provoking book initiates a dialogue among scholars in rhetoric and hermeneutics in many areas of the humanities. Twenty leading thinkers explore the ways these two powerful disciplines inform each other and influence a wide variety of intellectual fields. Walter Jost and Michael J. Hyde organize pivotal topics in rhetoric and hermeneutics with originality and coherence, dividing their book into four sections: Locating the Disciplines; Inventions and Applications; Arguments and Narratives; and Civic Discourse and Critical Theory.Contributors to this volume include Hans-Georg Gadamer (one of whose pieces is here translated into English for the first time), Paul Ricoeur, Gerald L. Bruns, Charles Altieri, Richard E. Palmer, Calvin O. Schrag,.Victoria Kahn, Eugene Garver, Michael Leff, Nancy S. Streuver, Wendy Olmsted, David Tracy, Donald G. Marshall, Allen Scult, Rita Copeland, William Rehg, and Steven Mailloux.For readers across the humanities, the book demonstrates the usefulness of rhetorical and hermeneutic approaches in literary, philosophical, legal, religious, and political thinking. With its stimulating new perspectives on the revival and interrelation of both rhetoric and hermeneutics, this collection is sure to serve as a benchmark for years to come.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bdtt
Prologue from:
Rhetoric and Hermeneutics in Our Time
Abstract: At mid-century E. R. Curtius, adverting to the study of rhetoric in his magisterial
European Literature and the Latin Middle Ages, boldly pronounced not only that “as an independent subject, it has long since vanished from the curriculum” but that “in our culture, rhetoric has no place.”¹ Only a few years later, related sentiments were expressed by the Oxford scholar C. S. Lewis. Lewis was, among other things, a Renaissance specialist for whom the modern ignorance of rhetoric as a subject of study presented the single greatest obstacle to our properly approaching the literature of the distant past.² For Lewis,
5 What Hermeneutics Can Offer Rhetoric from:
Rhetoric and Hermeneutics in Our Time
Author(s) Palmer Richard E.
Abstract: Rhetoric and hermeneutics today have achieved, as our editors point out in the Prologue, an impressive prominence across disciplines; indeed, they parallel each other in more than influence and multidisciplinary significance. They are parallel generically, they are interwoven historically, and they have experienced a remarkable expansion in theory and self-understanding in the last half of the twentieth century.¹ In each case, however, that expansion has been achieved, for the most part, in isolation from the other. Now it is time to renew old ties and explore what each can offer the other. My aim here is to affirm the desirability
17 Reason and Rhetoric in Habermas’s Theory of Argumentation from:
Rhetoric and Hermeneutics in Our Time
Author(s) Rehg William
Abstract: The late twentieth century presents an especially hostile environment for comprehensive accounts of reason. Precisely at a time when the dangers of social fragmentation and cross-cultural misunderstanding are becoming increasingly evident, the common bases for social integration and rational conflict adjudication seem to be disappearing in a postmodern, multicultural melee. The pluralization of worldviews and disenchantment with grand narratives, the suspicion of hasty ethnocentric generalization, and even the disciplinary specialization of inquiry itself encourage a general retreat into forms of relativism or narrow empiricism. As a result, it has become increasingly difficult to maintain a link between critical social theory,
Book Title: Rhetoric and Hermeneutics in Our Time-A Reader
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Hyde Michael J.
Abstract: This thought-provoking book initiates a dialogue among scholars in rhetoric and hermeneutics in many areas of the humanities. Twenty leading thinkers explore the ways these two powerful disciplines inform each other and influence a wide variety of intellectual fields. Walter Jost and Michael J. Hyde organize pivotal topics in rhetoric and hermeneutics with originality and coherence, dividing their book into four sections: Locating the Disciplines; Inventions and Applications; Arguments and Narratives; and Civic Discourse and Critical Theory.Contributors to this volume include Hans-Georg Gadamer (one of whose pieces is here translated into English for the first time), Paul Ricoeur, Gerald L. Bruns, Charles Altieri, Richard E. Palmer, Calvin O. Schrag,.Victoria Kahn, Eugene Garver, Michael Leff, Nancy S. Streuver, Wendy Olmsted, David Tracy, Donald G. Marshall, Allen Scult, Rita Copeland, William Rehg, and Steven Mailloux.For readers across the humanities, the book demonstrates the usefulness of rhetorical and hermeneutic approaches in literary, philosophical, legal, religious, and political thinking. With its stimulating new perspectives on the revival and interrelation of both rhetoric and hermeneutics, this collection is sure to serve as a benchmark for years to come.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bdtt
Prologue from:
Rhetoric and Hermeneutics in Our Time
Abstract: At mid-century E. R. Curtius, adverting to the study of rhetoric in his magisterial
European Literature and the Latin Middle Ages, boldly pronounced not only that “as an independent subject, it has long since vanished from the curriculum” but that “in our culture, rhetoric has no place.”¹ Only a few years later, related sentiments were expressed by the Oxford scholar C. S. Lewis. Lewis was, among other things, a Renaissance specialist for whom the modern ignorance of rhetoric as a subject of study presented the single greatest obstacle to our properly approaching the literature of the distant past.² For Lewis,
5 What Hermeneutics Can Offer Rhetoric from:
Rhetoric and Hermeneutics in Our Time
Author(s) Palmer Richard E.
Abstract: Rhetoric and hermeneutics today have achieved, as our editors point out in the Prologue, an impressive prominence across disciplines; indeed, they parallel each other in more than influence and multidisciplinary significance. They are parallel generically, they are interwoven historically, and they have experienced a remarkable expansion in theory and self-understanding in the last half of the twentieth century.¹ In each case, however, that expansion has been achieved, for the most part, in isolation from the other. Now it is time to renew old ties and explore what each can offer the other. My aim here is to affirm the desirability
17 Reason and Rhetoric in Habermas’s Theory of Argumentation from:
Rhetoric and Hermeneutics in Our Time
Author(s) Rehg William
Abstract: The late twentieth century presents an especially hostile environment for comprehensive accounts of reason. Precisely at a time when the dangers of social fragmentation and cross-cultural misunderstanding are becoming increasingly evident, the common bases for social integration and rational conflict adjudication seem to be disappearing in a postmodern, multicultural melee. The pluralization of worldviews and disenchantment with grand narratives, the suspicion of hasty ethnocentric generalization, and even the disciplinary specialization of inquiry itself encourage a general retreat into forms of relativism or narrow empiricism. As a result, it has become increasingly difficult to maintain a link between critical social theory,
Book Title: Rhetoric and Hermeneutics in Our Time-A Reader
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Hyde Michael J.
Abstract: This thought-provoking book initiates a dialogue among scholars in rhetoric and hermeneutics in many areas of the humanities. Twenty leading thinkers explore the ways these two powerful disciplines inform each other and influence a wide variety of intellectual fields. Walter Jost and Michael J. Hyde organize pivotal topics in rhetoric and hermeneutics with originality and coherence, dividing their book into four sections: Locating the Disciplines; Inventions and Applications; Arguments and Narratives; and Civic Discourse and Critical Theory.Contributors to this volume include Hans-Georg Gadamer (one of whose pieces is here translated into English for the first time), Paul Ricoeur, Gerald L. Bruns, Charles Altieri, Richard E. Palmer, Calvin O. Schrag,.Victoria Kahn, Eugene Garver, Michael Leff, Nancy S. Streuver, Wendy Olmsted, David Tracy, Donald G. Marshall, Allen Scult, Rita Copeland, William Rehg, and Steven Mailloux.For readers across the humanities, the book demonstrates the usefulness of rhetorical and hermeneutic approaches in literary, philosophical, legal, religious, and political thinking. With its stimulating new perspectives on the revival and interrelation of both rhetoric and hermeneutics, this collection is sure to serve as a benchmark for years to come.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bdtt
Prologue from:
Rhetoric and Hermeneutics in Our Time
Abstract: At mid-century E. R. Curtius, adverting to the study of rhetoric in his magisterial
European Literature and the Latin Middle Ages, boldly pronounced not only that “as an independent subject, it has long since vanished from the curriculum” but that “in our culture, rhetoric has no place.”¹ Only a few years later, related sentiments were expressed by the Oxford scholar C. S. Lewis. Lewis was, among other things, a Renaissance specialist for whom the modern ignorance of rhetoric as a subject of study presented the single greatest obstacle to our properly approaching the literature of the distant past.² For Lewis,
5 What Hermeneutics Can Offer Rhetoric from:
Rhetoric and Hermeneutics in Our Time
Author(s) Palmer Richard E.
Abstract: Rhetoric and hermeneutics today have achieved, as our editors point out in the Prologue, an impressive prominence across disciplines; indeed, they parallel each other in more than influence and multidisciplinary significance. They are parallel generically, they are interwoven historically, and they have experienced a remarkable expansion in theory and self-understanding in the last half of the twentieth century.¹ In each case, however, that expansion has been achieved, for the most part, in isolation from the other. Now it is time to renew old ties and explore what each can offer the other. My aim here is to affirm the desirability
17 Reason and Rhetoric in Habermas’s Theory of Argumentation from:
Rhetoric and Hermeneutics in Our Time
Author(s) Rehg William
Abstract: The late twentieth century presents an especially hostile environment for comprehensive accounts of reason. Precisely at a time when the dangers of social fragmentation and cross-cultural misunderstanding are becoming increasingly evident, the common bases for social integration and rational conflict adjudication seem to be disappearing in a postmodern, multicultural melee. The pluralization of worldviews and disenchantment with grand narratives, the suspicion of hasty ethnocentric generalization, and even the disciplinary specialization of inquiry itself encourage a general retreat into forms of relativism or narrow empiricism. As a result, it has become increasingly difficult to maintain a link between critical social theory,
Book Title: Rhetoric and Hermeneutics in Our Time-A Reader
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Hyde Michael J.
Abstract: This thought-provoking book initiates a dialogue among scholars in rhetoric and hermeneutics in many areas of the humanities. Twenty leading thinkers explore the ways these two powerful disciplines inform each other and influence a wide variety of intellectual fields. Walter Jost and Michael J. Hyde organize pivotal topics in rhetoric and hermeneutics with originality and coherence, dividing their book into four sections: Locating the Disciplines; Inventions and Applications; Arguments and Narratives; and Civic Discourse and Critical Theory.Contributors to this volume include Hans-Georg Gadamer (one of whose pieces is here translated into English for the first time), Paul Ricoeur, Gerald L. Bruns, Charles Altieri, Richard E. Palmer, Calvin O. Schrag,.Victoria Kahn, Eugene Garver, Michael Leff, Nancy S. Streuver, Wendy Olmsted, David Tracy, Donald G. Marshall, Allen Scult, Rita Copeland, William Rehg, and Steven Mailloux.For readers across the humanities, the book demonstrates the usefulness of rhetorical and hermeneutic approaches in literary, philosophical, legal, religious, and political thinking. With its stimulating new perspectives on the revival and interrelation of both rhetoric and hermeneutics, this collection is sure to serve as a benchmark for years to come.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bdtt
Prologue from:
Rhetoric and Hermeneutics in Our Time
Abstract: At mid-century E. R. Curtius, adverting to the study of rhetoric in his magisterial
European Literature and the Latin Middle Ages, boldly pronounced not only that “as an independent subject, it has long since vanished from the curriculum” but that “in our culture, rhetoric has no place.”¹ Only a few years later, related sentiments were expressed by the Oxford scholar C. S. Lewis. Lewis was, among other things, a Renaissance specialist for whom the modern ignorance of rhetoric as a subject of study presented the single greatest obstacle to our properly approaching the literature of the distant past.² For Lewis,
5 What Hermeneutics Can Offer Rhetoric from:
Rhetoric and Hermeneutics in Our Time
Author(s) Palmer Richard E.
Abstract: Rhetoric and hermeneutics today have achieved, as our editors point out in the Prologue, an impressive prominence across disciplines; indeed, they parallel each other in more than influence and multidisciplinary significance. They are parallel generically, they are interwoven historically, and they have experienced a remarkable expansion in theory and self-understanding in the last half of the twentieth century.¹ In each case, however, that expansion has been achieved, for the most part, in isolation from the other. Now it is time to renew old ties and explore what each can offer the other. My aim here is to affirm the desirability
17 Reason and Rhetoric in Habermas’s Theory of Argumentation from:
Rhetoric and Hermeneutics in Our Time
Author(s) Rehg William
Abstract: The late twentieth century presents an especially hostile environment for comprehensive accounts of reason. Precisely at a time when the dangers of social fragmentation and cross-cultural misunderstanding are becoming increasingly evident, the common bases for social integration and rational conflict adjudication seem to be disappearing in a postmodern, multicultural melee. The pluralization of worldviews and disenchantment with grand narratives, the suspicion of hasty ethnocentric generalization, and even the disciplinary specialization of inquiry itself encourage a general retreat into forms of relativism or narrow empiricism. As a result, it has become increasingly difficult to maintain a link between critical social theory,
Book Title: Rhetoric and Hermeneutics in Our Time-A Reader
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Hyde Michael J.
Abstract: This thought-provoking book initiates a dialogue among scholars in rhetoric and hermeneutics in many areas of the humanities. Twenty leading thinkers explore the ways these two powerful disciplines inform each other and influence a wide variety of intellectual fields. Walter Jost and Michael J. Hyde organize pivotal topics in rhetoric and hermeneutics with originality and coherence, dividing their book into four sections: Locating the Disciplines; Inventions and Applications; Arguments and Narratives; and Civic Discourse and Critical Theory.Contributors to this volume include Hans-Georg Gadamer (one of whose pieces is here translated into English for the first time), Paul Ricoeur, Gerald L. Bruns, Charles Altieri, Richard E. Palmer, Calvin O. Schrag,.Victoria Kahn, Eugene Garver, Michael Leff, Nancy S. Streuver, Wendy Olmsted, David Tracy, Donald G. Marshall, Allen Scult, Rita Copeland, William Rehg, and Steven Mailloux.For readers across the humanities, the book demonstrates the usefulness of rhetorical and hermeneutic approaches in literary, philosophical, legal, religious, and political thinking. With its stimulating new perspectives on the revival and interrelation of both rhetoric and hermeneutics, this collection is sure to serve as a benchmark for years to come.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bdtt
Prologue from:
Rhetoric and Hermeneutics in Our Time
Abstract: At mid-century E. R. Curtius, adverting to the study of rhetoric in his magisterial
European Literature and the Latin Middle Ages, boldly pronounced not only that “as an independent subject, it has long since vanished from the curriculum” but that “in our culture, rhetoric has no place.”¹ Only a few years later, related sentiments were expressed by the Oxford scholar C. S. Lewis. Lewis was, among other things, a Renaissance specialist for whom the modern ignorance of rhetoric as a subject of study presented the single greatest obstacle to our properly approaching the literature of the distant past.² For Lewis,
5 What Hermeneutics Can Offer Rhetoric from:
Rhetoric and Hermeneutics in Our Time
Author(s) Palmer Richard E.
Abstract: Rhetoric and hermeneutics today have achieved, as our editors point out in the Prologue, an impressive prominence across disciplines; indeed, they parallel each other in more than influence and multidisciplinary significance. They are parallel generically, they are interwoven historically, and they have experienced a remarkable expansion in theory and self-understanding in the last half of the twentieth century.¹ In each case, however, that expansion has been achieved, for the most part, in isolation from the other. Now it is time to renew old ties and explore what each can offer the other. My aim here is to affirm the desirability
17 Reason and Rhetoric in Habermas’s Theory of Argumentation from:
Rhetoric and Hermeneutics in Our Time
Author(s) Rehg William
Abstract: The late twentieth century presents an especially hostile environment for comprehensive accounts of reason. Precisely at a time when the dangers of social fragmentation and cross-cultural misunderstanding are becoming increasingly evident, the common bases for social integration and rational conflict adjudication seem to be disappearing in a postmodern, multicultural melee. The pluralization of worldviews and disenchantment with grand narratives, the suspicion of hasty ethnocentric generalization, and even the disciplinary specialization of inquiry itself encourage a general retreat into forms of relativism or narrow empiricism. As a result, it has become increasingly difficult to maintain a link between critical social theory,
2 The Contingency of Language from:
Rhetoric in an Antifoundational World
Author(s) Rorty Richard
Abstract: At about the same time, the Romantic poets were showing what happens when
8 Foundational Thuggery and a Rhetoric of Subsumption from:
Rhetoric in an Antifoundational World
Author(s) Farmer Frank
Abstract: For some time now, Truth (with a capital
T) has acquired a reputation as a fugitive of sorts, a runaway loose on the epistemological mean streets of the old neighborhood. According to a few who claim to have befriended Truth, what makes its capture so difficult is that Truth can assume any number of aliases and disguises, all of which provide it with an uncanny ability to elude those seeking its whereabouts. Occasionally, authorities report that the secret hiding places of Truth have, once and for all, been found out. But such reports, as everybody knows, are forever premature: Truth,
9 Hymes, Rorty, and the Social-Rhetorical Construction of Meaning from:
Rhetoric in an Antifoundational World
Author(s) Smith Robert E.
Abstract: Today, yesterday, and tomorrow—it is 3:00 A.M. in the southern
montanaand lowlands of eastern Ecuador, in the tropical rain forests of the upper Amazon Basin. Inside a traditional Shuar house of palm and thatch, surrounded by the now-dark gardens of manioc and plantains and yams, set apart from any sort of village—living “concealed,” as the Indians sometimes call it—a Shuar father begins the day by instructing his children. This morning he is talking about “Takea and Hummingbird.”
11 History and the Real from:
Rhetoric in an Antifoundational World
Author(s) Shepherdson Charles
Abstract: In spite of the difference between English and continental philosophy, there is a link between Michel Foucault and writers like Jonathan Swift, as there was between Nietzsche and Paul Rée: “The first impulse to publish something of my hypotheses concerning the
originof morality,” Nietzsche says, “was given to me by a clear, tidy, and shrewd—also precocious—little book in which I encountered for the first time anupside-down and perversespecies of genealogical hypothesis, the genuinely English type …The Origin of the Moral Sensations; its author Dr. Paul Rée” (Nietzsche,Genealogy17–18, emphasis added). Taking this
Book Title: The Uncertain Sciences- Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Mazlish Bruce
Abstract: In this wide-ranging book one of the most esteemed cultural historians of our time turns his attention to major questions about human experience and the attempts to understand it "scientifically." Bruce Mazlish considers the achievements, failings, and possibilities of the human sciences-a domain that he broadly defines to include the social sciences, literature, psychology, and hermeneutic studies. In a rich and original synthesis built upon the work of earlier philosophers and historians, Mazlish constructs a new view of the nature and meaning of the human sciences.Starting with the remote human past and moving through the Age of Discovery to the present day, the author discusses what sort of knowledge the human sciences claim to offer. He looks closely at the positivistic aspirations of the human sciences, which are modeled after the natural sciences, and at their interpretive tendencies. In an analysis of scientific method and scientific community, he explores the roles they can or should assume in the human sciences. Mazlish's approach is genuinely interdisciplinary, and he draws on an array of topics, from civil society to globalization to the interactions of humans and machines, to inform his thought-provoking discussion of historical consciousness.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bf4m
1 The Problem of the Human Sciences from:
The Uncertain Sciences
Abstract: The natural sciences allow us to attain relatively certain understanding of, and predictive control and manipulative power over, natural processes — or so it is widely assumed. This view holds, assuredly among scientists, even in the face of postmodernism and the social constructionism of science. Many believe that the natural sciences may, and perhaps should, serve as a model for any attempt at comparable human sciences. Indeed, at the time of the Enlightenment it was widely held that nothing seriously stood in the way of the extension of scientific method to human matters, although there was disagreement over how to carry
4 Hermeneutics from:
The Uncertain Sciences
Abstract: Culture is the key concept in much (though not all) of human science. Yet it is more useful to think of humans first as symbolic animals, rather than cultural animals, for symbolic abilities underlie the existence of both cultures and societies. The species, at the same time that its brain physically evolved, adding a cerebral cortex to its limbic core, increasingly replaced immediate, instinctual responses with delayed, thoughtful actions, mediated through symbols. We need not examine in detail the familiar findings of recent research that tell us of the development of symbolic language, with denotative and connotative characteristics, especially as
5 Some Achievements to Date from:
The Uncertain Sciences
Abstract: The human sciences are uncertain, and, at the same time, the natural sciences no longer assume the certainty of past times.
7 “Da Capo," or Back to the Beginning from:
The Uncertain Sciences
Abstract: Our conclusion is necessarily inconclusive. This befits the uncertain I sciences. Humanity is still in the process of cultural evolution. Many emergent phenomena are still in the womb of time. In pursuing our inquiry into the nature and meaning of the human sciences, we have had to proceed as if in a fox hunt, not chasing our quarry in a straight line but over hedges and ditches and through the trees.
II Hermeneutics between Grammar and Critique from:
Introduction to Philosophical Hermeneutics
Abstract: In the introduction I noted that there is good reason not to chart hermeneutic history in a ideological manner. We might better maintain a healthy skepticism toward the widespread idea that hermeneutics came into its own by advancing from a loose collection of interpretive rules to the status of a universal problematic. In reviewing the course of its “prehistory”—called this only because the word
hermeneuticswas not yet in use—we have seen that such a teleological view is not borne out. At the same time, the various stages of what came to be called hermeneutics (that is, theory
Excerpt from ʺArt in New Yorkʺ from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) ROTHKO MARK
Abstract: Now, the questions that this correspondent asks are so typical and at the same time so crucial that we feel that in answering them we shall not only help a good many people who
Thesis, 1946 from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) LEWIS NORMAN
Abstract: During the past fourteen years, I have devoted the major part of my attention and as much time as finances made possible to becoming a painter. For about the last eight of these years, I have been concerned not only with my own creative and technical development but with the limitations which every American Negro who is desirous of a broad kind of development must face—namely, the limitations which come under the names “African Idiom,” “Negro Idiom” or “Social Painting.” I have been concerned therefore with greater freedom for the individual to be publicly first an artist (assuming merit)
Application for a Guggenheim Fellowship from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) POLLOCK JACKSON
Abstract: I believe the easel picture to be a dying form, and the tendency of modern feeling is towards the wall picture or mural. I believe the time is not yet ripe for a
full transition from easel to mural.
Excerpts from from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) GRAHAM JOHN
Abstract: In the history of humanity subjects and problems in numberless fields have been thoroughly investigated and solved. [Such are: geometry and Roman Law which have finally and exhaustively formulated certain phenomena once and for all. The subject of art, however, has never been exhaustively investigated, formulated and systematized, either by writers or artists.] There have been pages written on art—inspired, beautiful and otherwise but all have been either fragmentary, amateurish or sentimental.
Excerpt from ʺWhither Goes Abstract and Surrealist Art?ʺ from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) RILEY MAUDE
Abstract: Two exhibitions and a book on Abstract and Surrealist Art in America focus attention during December upon these long-surviving forms in 20th century art. The book is by Sidney Janis (Reynal & Hitchock, $6.50); the exhibitions are his, too, for they are composed of the paintings illustrated in the publication, which will be released December 4. The Nierendorf Galleries will show (starting Dec. 5)
American and European Pioneers of 20th Century Art. The Mortimer Brandt Galleries opened the “young” American section of the study on Nov. 28 with an exhibition of 50 paintings which bears the same title as the book,
Excerpts from Artistsʹ Sessions at Studio 35 from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) GOODNOUGH ROBERT
Abstract: Hofmann: Why should we? Everyone should be as different as possible. There is nothing that is common to all of us except our creative urge. It just means one thing to me: to discover myself as well as I can. But every one of us has the urge to be creative in relation to our time—the time to which we belong may
de Kooning Paints a Picture from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) HESS THOMAS B.
Abstract: The picture nearly complied to his requirements several times in the months that followed, but never wholly. Finally, after a year and a half of continuous struggle, it was almost completed; then followed a few hours of violent disaffection; the canvas was pulled
Artistʹs Statement from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) BOURGEOIS LOUISE
Abstract: An artist’s words are always to be taken cautiously. The finished work is often a stranger to, and sometimes very much at odds with what the artist felt, or wished to express when he began. At best the artist does what he can rather than what he wants to do. After the battle is over and the damage faced up to, the result may be surprisingly dull—but sometimes it is surprisingly interesting. The mountain brought forth a mouse, but the bee will create a miracle of beauty and order. Asked to enlighten us on their creative process, both would
The American Action Painters from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) ROSENBERG HAROLD
Abstract: What makes any definition of a movement in art dubious is that it never fits the deepest artists in the movement—certainly not as well as, if successful, it does the others. Yet without the definition something essential in those best is bound to be missed. The attempt to define is like a game in which you cannot possibly reach the goal from the starting point but can only close in on it by picking up each time from where the last play landed.
Excerpt from ʺThe Liberating Quality of Avant-Garde Artʺ from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) SCHAPIRO MEYER
Abstract: In discussing the place of painting and sculpture in the culture of our time, I shall refer only to those kinds which, whether abstract or not, have a fresh inventive character, that art which is called “modern” not simply because it is of our century, but because it is the work of artists who take seriously the challenge of new possibilities and wish to introduce into their work perceptions, ideas and experiences which have come about only within our time.
We Interview Lee Krasner from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) Krasner Lee
Abstract: Miss Krasner volunteered that this was the first time she had allowed anyone to interview her, and now was pleased
James Joyce and the First Generation New York School from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) FIRESTONE EVAN R.
Abstract: The artists of the first generation New York School, most of whom are known collectively as Abstract Expressionists, were as a group generally well-read or well-informed and in touch with the literary currents of their time. Non-fiction works by Nietzsche, Freud, Jung, and James Frazer combined on their reading lists with the writings of Baudelaire, the French Symbolist poets (especially Rimbaud), Herman Melville, André Breton and Garcia Lorca, among others. Although scholars have examined the connections between this group of artists and literature rather carefully, except in the case of David Smith there has been relatively little mention of James
ʺIntroduction,ʺ ʺAbstract Expressionism and Afro-American Marginalisation,ʺ and ʺDissent During the McCarthy Periodʺ from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) CRAVEN DAVID
Abstract: In many parts of the world, Abstract Expressionism signifies the ascendancy to cultural pre-eminence of United States art. Yet it is also viewed with disfavour or indifference by the majority of the people in the U.S. whose culture this art presumably represents.⁴ Equally paradoxical is the relation of Abstract Expressionism to contemporary Latin American art. At a time when U.S. intervention throughout the Americas has intensified, the receptivity of progressive Latin American artists to
certain aspects of post-war U.S. art (even as these same artists vigorously oppose U.S. hegemony) raises new questions about the nature of art produced in the
[PART 1: Introduction] from:
Hannah Arendt
Abstract: DURING THE YEARS SHE LIVED IN AMERICA, HANNAH Arendt seldom spoke about her childhood. Long before the last of her relatives had left the family’s home in Königsberg, East Prussia, and the city had been destroyed by bombs and rebuilt as Kaliningrad, USSR, she had divided her life into “Then” and “Now” several times. With each division, the first Then, childhood, became a more secret, private matter. When she was eighteen and a student of theology at Marburg University, she made her temporal divisions in the poetic language of her teacher Martin Heidegger: “No longer” and “Not yet.” As she
CHAPTER 1 Unser Kind from:
Hannah Arendt
Abstract: Both sets of Hannah Arendt’s grandparents, the Arendts and the Cohns, had raised their families in Königsberg, the capital of East Prussia, a city whose foundations dated from the thirteenth century. First built by the Teutonic Order, a military and religious organization dating from the time of the Crusades, Königsberg was for a time the residence of the Order’s Grand Master. In the sixteenth century, it became the residence of the dukes of Prussia, whose castle overlooking a lake dominated the center of the city. The lively but peaceful provincial capital was threatened with destruction during the First World War,
[PART 3: Introduction] from:
Hannah Arendt
Abstract: “THE WORLD AND THE PEOPLE WHO INHABIT IT ARE NOT the same. The world lies in between people,”¹ wrote Hannah Arendt, fully aware that a natural, untroubled “in-between” with one’s fellows had not been considered since Goethe’s time as the mark of great thinkers, or even as a condition greatly desired by them. To modern people, Lessing’s model man of genius—
Sein glücklicher Geschmack ist der Geschmack der Welt(“his felicitous taste is the world’s taste”)—is an unknown. Even Lessing himself could not find a serene relation with the world such as the one that Goethe had attained. “His
Book Title: Passage to Modernity-An Essay on the Hermeneutics of Nature and Culture
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Dupré Louis
Abstract: Did modernity begin with the Renaissance and end with post-modernity? In this book a distinguished scholar challenges both these assumptions. Louis Dupré discusses the roots, development, and impact of modern thought, tracing the fundamental principles of modernity to the late fourteenth century and affirming that modernity is still an influential force in contemporary culture.The combination of late medieval theology and early Italian humanism shattered the traditional synthesis that had united cosmic, human, and transcendent components in a comprehensive idea of nature. Early Italian humanism transformed the traditional worldview by its unprecedented emphasis on human creativity. The person emerged as the sole source of meaning while nature was reduced to an object and transcendence withdrew into a "supernatural" realm. Dupré analyzes this fragmentation as well as the writings of those who reacted against it-philosophers like Cusanus and Bruno, humanists like Ficino and Erasmus, theologians like Baius and Jansenius, mystics like Ignatius Loyola and Francis de Sales, and theosophists like Weigel and Boehme.Baroque culture briefly reunited the human, cosmic, and transcendent components, but since that time the disintegrating forces have increased in strength. Despite post-modern criticism, the principles of early modernity continue to dominate the climate of our time.
Passage to Modernityis not so much a critique as a search for the philosophical meaning of the epochal change achieved by those principles.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bm6t
Chapter 6 The Birth of the Past from:
Passage to Modernity
Abstract: The modern age was the first to distinguish itself from all others by a time indicator:
modo—“now.” Anxious to assert its superiority to past epochs, its culture exchanged the older claim of upholding a tradition for the one of surpassing it. A different sense of time directly followed the new sense of freedom. An unprecedented awareness grew that what humans accomplish in the transitoriness of time definitively changes the very nature of human life. History thereby suddenly acquired an existential significance that it had not possessed before. In a medieval cosmic play the human person clearly had the lead,
Book Title: Pushkin's Historical Imagination- Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Evdokimova Svetlana
Abstract: This book explores the historical insights of Alexander Pushkin (1799-1837), Russia's most celebrated poet and arguably its greatest thinker. Svetlana Evdokimova examines for the first time the full range of Pushkin's fictional and nonfictional writings on the subject of history-writings that have strongly influenced Russians' views of themselves and their past. Through new readings of his drama,
Boris Godunov; such narrative poems asPoltava, The Bronze Horseman,andCount Nulin; prose fiction, includingThe Captain's DaughterandBlackamoor of Peter the Great; lyrical poems; and a variety of nonfictional texts, the author presents Pushkin not only as a progenitor of Russian national mythology but also as an original historical and political thinker.Evdokimova considers Pushkin within the context of Romantic historiography and addresses the tension between Pushkin the historian and Pushkin the fiction writer . She also discusses Pushkin's ideas on the complex relations between chance and necessity in historical processes, on the particular significance of great individuals in Russian history, and on historical truth.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bn3t
introduction from:
Pushkin's Historical Imagination
Abstract: The analysis of the relationship between history and fiction—a problem that has stimulated European thought since the time of Aristotle, was developed by Vico, and then elaborated in structural and post-structural theory—has special relevance in the Russian context in general and for the study of Pushkin in particular. The beginning of the nineteenth century was a turning point in the development of both Russian literary and historical imagination. This was the time of artistic experimentation, when old genres were rethought and new ones proliferated. The Romanticist interest in history generated an intense growth in historical fiction and history
one The Impediments of Russian History from:
Pushkin's Historical Imagination
Abstract: Ivan Kireevskii, a contemporary of Alexander Pushkin and one of Russia’s most brilliant literary critics, wrote in 1830: “History in our time is at the center of all intellectual quests and is the most important of all sciences; it is the indispensable condition for all development; historicism embraces
everything” (44). Indeed, the whole pleiad of Russian intellectuals in the first half of the nineteenth century exhibited a near obsession with history. They delved not only into the history of Russia but also into the nature of historyper se.Yet they were not engaged in a purely scholarly endeavor; their
afterword from:
Pushkin's Historical Imagination
Abstract: In his eleventh essay on Pushkin, Vissarion Belinsky enthusiastically claimed that
The Bronze Horsemantogether withPoltavaand such poems as “Stanzas” (1826) and “The Feast of Peter the Great” form “the greatest Petriad” that a national genius could create (Belinsky VI, 464). Indeed, it is tempting to consider Pushkin’s Peter the Great narratives as a cycle. What prompted Pushkin to start with a historical novel, to abandon prose for poetry inPoltavaandThe Bronze Horseman,only to return to prose again, this time in the form of a purely historical project,History of Peter I?In short, how
2 The Hermeneutic Analytic Thinkers from:
Interpreting Interpretation
Abstract: I have selected eight representative thinkers who have written about hermeneutic psychoanalysis for consideration in this chapter. They are a disparate group in many ways: some are practicing psychoanalysts, some are not; some have written extensively about hermeneutic psychoanalysis, some have not; some have written at one time, some at another; some have one clinical view, some another. Indeed, several of these thinkers might reject the idea of being grouped with the others. But that is part of the point: these people sound quite a lot like each other but are actually very different. I select these eight thinkers, then,
Book Title: Care of the Psyche-A History of Psychological Healing
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): JACKSON STANLEY W.
Abstract: In this book, a distinguished historian of medicine surveys the basic elements that have constituted psychological healing over the centuries. Dr. Stanley W. Jackson shows that healing practices, whether they come from the worlds of medicine, religion, or philosophy, share certain elements that transcend space and time.Drawing on medical writings from classical Greece and Rome to the present, as well as on philosophical and religious writings, Dr. Jackson shows that the basic ingredients of psychological healing-which have survived changes of name, the fall of their theoretical contexts, and the waning of social support in different historical eras-are essential factors in our modern psychotherapies and in healing contexts in general.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bpqz
6 Catharsis and Abreaction from:
Care of the Psyche
Abstract: The term
catharsiswas derived from the Greekkatharsis,meaning purification, fromkathairein,meaning to cleanse or purify. In the original edition of theOxford English Dictionaryin 1893, it was defined as “purgation of the excrements of the body; esp. evacuation of the bowels.” In addition to this meaning, the adjectivecatharticwas given a second, more general, meaning of “cleansing, purifying, purging.”¹ By the time theOED Supplementwas published in 1933, the meanings ofcatharsishad been extended to include (1) “the purification of the emotions by vicarious experience, esp. through the drama (in reference to Aristotle’s
8 Consolation and Comfort from:
Care of the Psyche
Abstract: Consolation—“the act of consoling, cheering, or comforting... alleviation of sorrow or mental distress”¹—would seem to be one of the oldest among the modes of psychological healing. With its verb,to console,defined as “to comfort in mental distress or depression; to alleviate the sorrow of (any one); ‘to free from the sense of misery,’ ” we are discussing a rich tradition of ministering to troubled persons. Distress in response to misfortune has been part of the human story since time immemorial. And one’s fellows’ inclination to respond to that distress with some effort to comfort or console seems
16 Self-Understanding and Insight from:
Care of the Psyche
Abstract: 1. Internal sight, mental vision or perception, discernment; in early use sometimes, Understanding, intelligence, wisdom.
17 Self-Observation and Introspection from:
Care of the Psyche
Abstract: Like so many of the elements considered in this work, self-observation is no new thing. Variously referred to as inward perception, looking inward, self-scrutiny, self-examination, self-inspection, introspection, reflection, the activity of the inner sense, and so forth, it has been an activity of humankind for a very long time.
18 Overview and Afterthoughts from:
Care of the Psyche
Abstract: Much has been made of the culture-bound nature of certain psychological healing practices, on the grounds that they are not easily transferable to another cultural setting, not easily understood by healers in another culture, and not easily compared with its healing practices. The same problems have also been raised in the “cross-cultural” situation of various subcultures within the same larger society; each subculture’s healing practices may well differ in that they cohere around alternative ethnic customs, religious beliefs, or medical views. Similar difficulties can easily arise if one compares psychological healing practices over time. Cultural influences have admittedly shaped practices
Book Title: Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry-New Perspectives
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): OLMSTED WENDY
Abstract: This exceptional collection of writings offers for the first time a discussion among leading thinkers about the points at which rhetoric and religion illuminate and challenge each other. The contributors to the volume are eminent theorists and critics in rhetoric, theology, and religion, and they address a variety of problems and periods.Together these writings shed light on religion as a human quest and rhetoric as the origin and sustainer of that quest. They show that when pursued with intelligence and sensitivity, rhetorical approaches to religion are capable of revitalizing both language and experience. Rhetorical figures, for example, constitute forms of language that say what cannot be said in any other way, and that move individuals toward religious truths that cannot be known in any other way. When firmly placed within religious, social, and literary history, the convergence of rhetoric and religion brings into focus crucial issues in several fields-including philosophy, psychology, history, and art-and interprets relations among self, language, and world that are central to both past and present cultures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bqqd
1 The Word as History: from:
Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry
Author(s) ONG WALTER J .
Abstract: The history of what was originally the spoken word cannot be considered merely as a chain of events, a series of phenomena strung out in a neutral field of time, but rather must be taken as a succession of difficult, and often traumatic, reorientations of the human psyche. As the word moves from sound into space (without ever fully departing from sound) and then restructures itself electronically into sound in a new way, the sensorium is reorganized, and man’s relationship to the physical world around him, to his fellow men, to his own thought, and to himself radically changes.
17 Performing Faith: from:
Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry
Author(s) HAUERWAS STANLEY
Abstract: Christian faith evokes diverse and sometimes competing images and associations. For some, it conjures up a fairly coherent, albeit complexly interrelated array of experiences, dispositions, attitudes, and beliefs. For others, faith names not so much the defining subjective features of religious consciousness as the objective content of Christian religion. Faith is thus construed as a set of doctrines, a peculiar body of teaching and instruction. In short, faith is a divine “deposit” — with the church or the Bible acting as its repository.
Book Title: Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry-New Perspectives
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): OLMSTED WENDY
Abstract: This exceptional collection of writings offers for the first time a discussion among leading thinkers about the points at which rhetoric and religion illuminate and challenge each other. The contributors to the volume are eminent theorists and critics in rhetoric, theology, and religion, and they address a variety of problems and periods.Together these writings shed light on religion as a human quest and rhetoric as the origin and sustainer of that quest. They show that when pursued with intelligence and sensitivity, rhetorical approaches to religion are capable of revitalizing both language and experience. Rhetorical figures, for example, constitute forms of language that say what cannot be said in any other way, and that move individuals toward religious truths that cannot be known in any other way. When firmly placed within religious, social, and literary history, the convergence of rhetoric and religion brings into focus crucial issues in several fields-including philosophy, psychology, history, and art-and interprets relations among self, language, and world that are central to both past and present cultures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bqqd
1 The Word as History: from:
Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry
Author(s) ONG WALTER J .
Abstract: The history of what was originally the spoken word cannot be considered merely as a chain of events, a series of phenomena strung out in a neutral field of time, but rather must be taken as a succession of difficult, and often traumatic, reorientations of the human psyche. As the word moves from sound into space (without ever fully departing from sound) and then restructures itself electronically into sound in a new way, the sensorium is reorganized, and man’s relationship to the physical world around him, to his fellow men, to his own thought, and to himself radically changes.
17 Performing Faith: from:
Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry
Author(s) HAUERWAS STANLEY
Abstract: Christian faith evokes diverse and sometimes competing images and associations. For some, it conjures up a fairly coherent, albeit complexly interrelated array of experiences, dispositions, attitudes, and beliefs. For others, faith names not so much the defining subjective features of religious consciousness as the objective content of Christian religion. Faith is thus construed as a set of doctrines, a peculiar body of teaching and instruction. In short, faith is a divine “deposit” — with the church or the Bible acting as its repository.
Book Title: Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry-New Perspectives
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): OLMSTED WENDY
Abstract: This exceptional collection of writings offers for the first time a discussion among leading thinkers about the points at which rhetoric and religion illuminate and challenge each other. The contributors to the volume are eminent theorists and critics in rhetoric, theology, and religion, and they address a variety of problems and periods.Together these writings shed light on religion as a human quest and rhetoric as the origin and sustainer of that quest. They show that when pursued with intelligence and sensitivity, rhetorical approaches to religion are capable of revitalizing both language and experience. Rhetorical figures, for example, constitute forms of language that say what cannot be said in any other way, and that move individuals toward religious truths that cannot be known in any other way. When firmly placed within religious, social, and literary history, the convergence of rhetoric and religion brings into focus crucial issues in several fields-including philosophy, psychology, history, and art-and interprets relations among self, language, and world that are central to both past and present cultures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bqqd
1 The Word as History: from:
Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry
Author(s) ONG WALTER J .
Abstract: The history of what was originally the spoken word cannot be considered merely as a chain of events, a series of phenomena strung out in a neutral field of time, but rather must be taken as a succession of difficult, and often traumatic, reorientations of the human psyche. As the word moves from sound into space (without ever fully departing from sound) and then restructures itself electronically into sound in a new way, the sensorium is reorganized, and man’s relationship to the physical world around him, to his fellow men, to his own thought, and to himself radically changes.
17 Performing Faith: from:
Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry
Author(s) HAUERWAS STANLEY
Abstract: Christian faith evokes diverse and sometimes competing images and associations. For some, it conjures up a fairly coherent, albeit complexly interrelated array of experiences, dispositions, attitudes, and beliefs. For others, faith names not so much the defining subjective features of religious consciousness as the objective content of Christian religion. Faith is thus construed as a set of doctrines, a peculiar body of teaching and instruction. In short, faith is a divine “deposit” — with the church or the Bible acting as its repository.
Book Title: Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry-New Perspectives
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): OLMSTED WENDY
Abstract: This exceptional collection of writings offers for the first time a discussion among leading thinkers about the points at which rhetoric and religion illuminate and challenge each other. The contributors to the volume are eminent theorists and critics in rhetoric, theology, and religion, and they address a variety of problems and periods.Together these writings shed light on religion as a human quest and rhetoric as the origin and sustainer of that quest. They show that when pursued with intelligence and sensitivity, rhetorical approaches to religion are capable of revitalizing both language and experience. Rhetorical figures, for example, constitute forms of language that say what cannot be said in any other way, and that move individuals toward religious truths that cannot be known in any other way. When firmly placed within religious, social, and literary history, the convergence of rhetoric and religion brings into focus crucial issues in several fields-including philosophy, psychology, history, and art-and interprets relations among self, language, and world that are central to both past and present cultures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bqqd
1 The Word as History: from:
Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry
Author(s) ONG WALTER J .
Abstract: The history of what was originally the spoken word cannot be considered merely as a chain of events, a series of phenomena strung out in a neutral field of time, but rather must be taken as a succession of difficult, and often traumatic, reorientations of the human psyche. As the word moves from sound into space (without ever fully departing from sound) and then restructures itself electronically into sound in a new way, the sensorium is reorganized, and man’s relationship to the physical world around him, to his fellow men, to his own thought, and to himself radically changes.
17 Performing Faith: from:
Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry
Author(s) HAUERWAS STANLEY
Abstract: Christian faith evokes diverse and sometimes competing images and associations. For some, it conjures up a fairly coherent, albeit complexly interrelated array of experiences, dispositions, attitudes, and beliefs. For others, faith names not so much the defining subjective features of religious consciousness as the objective content of Christian religion. Faith is thus construed as a set of doctrines, a peculiar body of teaching and instruction. In short, faith is a divine “deposit” — with the church or the Bible acting as its repository.
Book Title: Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry-New Perspectives
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): OLMSTED WENDY
Abstract: This exceptional collection of writings offers for the first time a discussion among leading thinkers about the points at which rhetoric and religion illuminate and challenge each other. The contributors to the volume are eminent theorists and critics in rhetoric, theology, and religion, and they address a variety of problems and periods.Together these writings shed light on religion as a human quest and rhetoric as the origin and sustainer of that quest. They show that when pursued with intelligence and sensitivity, rhetorical approaches to religion are capable of revitalizing both language and experience. Rhetorical figures, for example, constitute forms of language that say what cannot be said in any other way, and that move individuals toward religious truths that cannot be known in any other way. When firmly placed within religious, social, and literary history, the convergence of rhetoric and religion brings into focus crucial issues in several fields-including philosophy, psychology, history, and art-and interprets relations among self, language, and world that are central to both past and present cultures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bqqd
1 The Word as History: from:
Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry
Author(s) ONG WALTER J .
Abstract: The history of what was originally the spoken word cannot be considered merely as a chain of events, a series of phenomena strung out in a neutral field of time, but rather must be taken as a succession of difficult, and often traumatic, reorientations of the human psyche. As the word moves from sound into space (without ever fully departing from sound) and then restructures itself electronically into sound in a new way, the sensorium is reorganized, and man’s relationship to the physical world around him, to his fellow men, to his own thought, and to himself radically changes.
17 Performing Faith: from:
Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry
Author(s) HAUERWAS STANLEY
Abstract: Christian faith evokes diverse and sometimes competing images and associations. For some, it conjures up a fairly coherent, albeit complexly interrelated array of experiences, dispositions, attitudes, and beliefs. For others, faith names not so much the defining subjective features of religious consciousness as the objective content of Christian religion. Faith is thus construed as a set of doctrines, a peculiar body of teaching and instruction. In short, faith is a divine “deposit” — with the church or the Bible acting as its repository.
Book Title: Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry-New Perspectives
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): OLMSTED WENDY
Abstract: This exceptional collection of writings offers for the first time a discussion among leading thinkers about the points at which rhetoric and religion illuminate and challenge each other. The contributors to the volume are eminent theorists and critics in rhetoric, theology, and religion, and they address a variety of problems and periods.Together these writings shed light on religion as a human quest and rhetoric as the origin and sustainer of that quest. They show that when pursued with intelligence and sensitivity, rhetorical approaches to religion are capable of revitalizing both language and experience. Rhetorical figures, for example, constitute forms of language that say what cannot be said in any other way, and that move individuals toward religious truths that cannot be known in any other way. When firmly placed within religious, social, and literary history, the convergence of rhetoric and religion brings into focus crucial issues in several fields-including philosophy, psychology, history, and art-and interprets relations among self, language, and world that are central to both past and present cultures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bqqd
1 The Word as History: from:
Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry
Author(s) ONG WALTER J .
Abstract: The history of what was originally the spoken word cannot be considered merely as a chain of events, a series of phenomena strung out in a neutral field of time, but rather must be taken as a succession of difficult, and often traumatic, reorientations of the human psyche. As the word moves from sound into space (without ever fully departing from sound) and then restructures itself electronically into sound in a new way, the sensorium is reorganized, and man’s relationship to the physical world around him, to his fellow men, to his own thought, and to himself radically changes.
17 Performing Faith: from:
Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry
Author(s) HAUERWAS STANLEY
Abstract: Christian faith evokes diverse and sometimes competing images and associations. For some, it conjures up a fairly coherent, albeit complexly interrelated array of experiences, dispositions, attitudes, and beliefs. For others, faith names not so much the defining subjective features of religious consciousness as the objective content of Christian religion. Faith is thus construed as a set of doctrines, a peculiar body of teaching and instruction. In short, faith is a divine “deposit” — with the church or the Bible acting as its repository.
Book Title: Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry-New Perspectives
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): OLMSTED WENDY
Abstract: This exceptional collection of writings offers for the first time a discussion among leading thinkers about the points at which rhetoric and religion illuminate and challenge each other. The contributors to the volume are eminent theorists and critics in rhetoric, theology, and religion, and they address a variety of problems and periods.Together these writings shed light on religion as a human quest and rhetoric as the origin and sustainer of that quest. They show that when pursued with intelligence and sensitivity, rhetorical approaches to religion are capable of revitalizing both language and experience. Rhetorical figures, for example, constitute forms of language that say what cannot be said in any other way, and that move individuals toward religious truths that cannot be known in any other way. When firmly placed within religious, social, and literary history, the convergence of rhetoric and religion brings into focus crucial issues in several fields-including philosophy, psychology, history, and art-and interprets relations among self, language, and world that are central to both past and present cultures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bqqd
1 The Word as History: from:
Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry
Author(s) ONG WALTER J .
Abstract: The history of what was originally the spoken word cannot be considered merely as a chain of events, a series of phenomena strung out in a neutral field of time, but rather must be taken as a succession of difficult, and often traumatic, reorientations of the human psyche. As the word moves from sound into space (without ever fully departing from sound) and then restructures itself electronically into sound in a new way, the sensorium is reorganized, and man’s relationship to the physical world around him, to his fellow men, to his own thought, and to himself radically changes.
17 Performing Faith: from:
Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry
Author(s) HAUERWAS STANLEY
Abstract: Christian faith evokes diverse and sometimes competing images and associations. For some, it conjures up a fairly coherent, albeit complexly interrelated array of experiences, dispositions, attitudes, and beliefs. For others, faith names not so much the defining subjective features of religious consciousness as the objective content of Christian religion. Faith is thus construed as a set of doctrines, a peculiar body of teaching and instruction. In short, faith is a divine “deposit” — with the church or the Bible acting as its repository.
Book Title: Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry-New Perspectives
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): OLMSTED WENDY
Abstract: This exceptional collection of writings offers for the first time a discussion among leading thinkers about the points at which rhetoric and religion illuminate and challenge each other. The contributors to the volume are eminent theorists and critics in rhetoric, theology, and religion, and they address a variety of problems and periods.Together these writings shed light on religion as a human quest and rhetoric as the origin and sustainer of that quest. They show that when pursued with intelligence and sensitivity, rhetorical approaches to religion are capable of revitalizing both language and experience. Rhetorical figures, for example, constitute forms of language that say what cannot be said in any other way, and that move individuals toward religious truths that cannot be known in any other way. When firmly placed within religious, social, and literary history, the convergence of rhetoric and religion brings into focus crucial issues in several fields-including philosophy, psychology, history, and art-and interprets relations among self, language, and world that are central to both past and present cultures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bqqd
1 The Word as History: from:
Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry
Author(s) ONG WALTER J .
Abstract: The history of what was originally the spoken word cannot be considered merely as a chain of events, a series of phenomena strung out in a neutral field of time, but rather must be taken as a succession of difficult, and often traumatic, reorientations of the human psyche. As the word moves from sound into space (without ever fully departing from sound) and then restructures itself electronically into sound in a new way, the sensorium is reorganized, and man’s relationship to the physical world around him, to his fellow men, to his own thought, and to himself radically changes.
17 Performing Faith: from:
Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry
Author(s) HAUERWAS STANLEY
Abstract: Christian faith evokes diverse and sometimes competing images and associations. For some, it conjures up a fairly coherent, albeit complexly interrelated array of experiences, dispositions, attitudes, and beliefs. For others, faith names not so much the defining subjective features of religious consciousness as the objective content of Christian religion. Faith is thus construed as a set of doctrines, a peculiar body of teaching and instruction. In short, faith is a divine “deposit” — with the church or the Bible acting as its repository.
3 Roman Foundations from:
Faces of History
Abstract: Roman historical writing developed out of a deep and to some extent parochial sense of tradition and location.¹ The Romans measured time “from the founding of the city” (
ab urbe condita,the title of Livy’s national history), and for them space was centered likewise on the city, with its sacred boundary, thepomaeriumestablished by Numa Pompilius, defining the city and marking a frontier defended by the god Terminus, which would be extended eventually to much of the known world.² In such terms Roman history was conceived and interpreted by historians and poets and by ordinary citizens, the “fathers” honoring
9 Philosophical History from:
Faces of History
Abstract: The Enlightenment conception of history, in its classic form, is based on one of the oldest historical conceits. Humanity is like individual members of the species, and the experience of the human race over time is much like the life of a person, from generation and growth to, presumably if not predictably, corruption and death, whence history, for Ferguson, Lessing, and Condorcet no less than for Florus and Augustine, can be understood as “the education of the human race.” Education, or the neologism “culture” (which referred to the same thing in the eighteenth century), was of course seen differently by
3 Roman Foundations from:
Faces of History
Abstract: Roman historical writing developed out of a deep and to some extent parochial sense of tradition and location.¹ The Romans measured time “from the founding of the city” (
ab urbe condita,the title of Livy’s national history), and for them space was centered likewise on the city, with its sacred boundary, thepomaeriumestablished by Numa Pompilius, defining the city and marking a frontier defended by the god Terminus, which would be extended eventually to much of the known world.² In such terms Roman history was conceived and interpreted by historians and poets and by ordinary citizens, the “fathers” honoring
9 Philosophical History from:
Faces of History
Abstract: The Enlightenment conception of history, in its classic form, is based on one of the oldest historical conceits. Humanity is like individual members of the species, and the experience of the human race over time is much like the life of a person, from generation and growth to, presumably if not predictably, corruption and death, whence history, for Ferguson, Lessing, and Condorcet no less than for Florus and Augustine, can be understood as “the education of the human race.” Education, or the neologism “culture” (which referred to the same thing in the eighteenth century), was of course seen differently by
Chapter 2 The Lived Present from:
Metaphysics in Ordinary Language
Abstract: In this essay, I shall be concerned with one aspect of the problem of human temporality. My question is this: How do we experience the present? Like the phenomenon of time, the question is itself at once familiar and obscure. We are all conversant with the experience of living in the present, as distinct from having existed in the past and being about to do so in the future, barring some unexpected accident. Let us say that the lived present has a certain thickness or what Bergson called
durée. But to speak of the present as marked by duration is
Chapter 8 Sad Reason from:
Metaphysics in Ordinary Language
Abstract: I trust that the title I have chosen is not too melancholy. The topic is a large one, but it is certainly familiar to all of us, and it is difficult to see how anything could be of greater concern to thoughtful human beings. The question before us is whether the life of reason is happy or sad. Those who dislike large topics might be inclined to reply, “Sometimes sad, sometimes happy,” and I suppose they would mean by this that happiness depends upon something other than our degree of rationality. In one sense, I agree with this sober reply.
Chapter 15 Kojèveʹs Paris: from:
Metaphysics in Ordinary Language
Abstract: In 1960–61 I was a Fulbright Research Professor at the Sorbonne. My sponsor was Jean Wahl, a kindly gentleman who was one of the first, and perhaps the first, to redirect French philosophical attention to Hegel in the late twenties with his lectures on the unhappy consciousness. Wahl was interesting because of a certain amorphousness in his nature. By education and age, he served as a symbol of the Paris of the previous generation. At the same time, he possessed a childlike openness and imaginative predisposition for novelty that hinted at things to come. One could not confuse him
5 A SEMIOTIC APPROACH TO IRONY IN DRAMA AND FICTION from:
Semiotics and Interpretation
Abstract: “My time will come,” he said.
Book Title: On the Nature of Consciousness-Cognitive, Phenomenological, and Transpersonal Perspectives
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): HUNT HARRY T.
Abstract: What is the relation between mystical experience and ordinary consciousness, between the principles of modern physics and the patterns of perception in all moving creatures, between our human self-consciousness and the more primary sentience of protozoa? This book pursues an inquiry into consciousness that ranges from ancient Greece to empirical neuro-psychology to the experiential traditions of introspection and meditation. Harry Hunt begins by reviewing the renewed interest in ordinary consciousness and in altered and transpersonal states of consciousness. He then presents competing views of consciousness in cognition, neurophysiology, and animal psychology, developing a view of perceptual awareness as the core of consciousness potentially shared across species. Hunt next brings together the separate strands of neo-realist approaches to perception and thought, the phenomenology of imagery and synesthesia, and cognitive theories of metaphor. He develops an original cognitive theory of mystical experience that combines Buddhist meditative descriptions of consciousness and Heidegger's sense of Being. In relating both of these to James J. Gibson's views on perception, he avoids the various "new age" supernaturalisms that so often blight the transpersonal literature. Other themes include the relation between consciousness and time; the common perceptual-metaphoric rooting of parallels between consciousness and modern physics; and the communal basis of transpersonal states as reflected in a sociology of mysticism and a reinterpretation of parapsychological research.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32btm9
1 The Most Fundamental of Empirical Questions or the Most Misguided—What Is Consciousness? from:
On the Nature of Consciousness
Abstract: Our immediate awareness is as clearly present as it is resistant to definite characterization. Consciousness — and not coincidentally, as we will see — is much as Augustine said of time in his
Confessions: we seem to understand it quite well until we are asked about it, and precisely then do we find ourselves confused. While our own consciousness has
3 Predicting the Course and Outcome of Analysis from:
Does Psychoanalysis Work?
Abstract: Every psychoanalyst of some clinical experience is aware of apparently unpromising analytic situations that turned out well and of analyses that began favorably but ended badly. Often, with benefit of hindsight, it is possible to identify sources of strength or weakness that were not recognized at the outset. Examples of such situations include barely mentioned but psychologically lifesaving relationships in the patient’s early childhood, or disturbances of thinking not manifest in the initial consultation. The analyst’s particular unresolved conflicts that lead to countertransference interferences may impede the ability to work with otherwise promising patients. Sometimes the reasons for unexpected outcomes
19 Studies of Populations of Patients from:
Does Psychoanalysis Work?
Abstract: Many of the questions we would like to have answered about psychoanalysis involve comparing groups of people. Do introspective people do better in analysis than action-oriented people? Do patients seen five times weekly develop more analyzable transferences than those seen less frequently? Are people who have been analyzed better off than unanalyzed people? Do analysts with character structures similar to the patient’s analyze those defenses that patient and analyst share less well than analysts whose defenses are dissimilar to the patient’s (Baudry, 1991)?
21 Summary and Overview from:
Does Psychoanalysis Work?
Abstract: In its first century, psychoanalysis has been widely recognized as providing the richest understanding of the most interesting aspects of human psychology. At the same time, its claims to validity as an empirical science have remained open to question. These questions have been particularly marked with regard to therapeutics.
The Use of Scripture in Philippians from:
Paul and Scripture
Author(s) Fowl Stephen
Abstract: At the same time, and perhaps because of Hays’s work, one is forced to ask questions
10 The Concept of Generic Godhood in the Hebrew Bible from:
The Hebrew Bible and Philosophy of Religion
Abstract: The question “What is God?”’ is sometimes also phrased as “What is
11 Yhwh—A Philosophical Perspective from:
The Hebrew Bible and Philosophy of Religion
Abstract: Commenting on previous related research, James Barr once stated, “Most biblical scholars have no time for the philosophical theologian’s, ‘It depends on what you mean by “God.” ’ ” ³As we saw in the previous chapter, one biblical theologian who apparently made time was Rolf P. Knierim, when he wrote that “one of the
10 The Concept of Generic Godhood in the Hebrew Bible from:
The Hebrew Bible and Philosophy of Religion
Abstract: The question “What is God?”’ is sometimes also phrased as “What is
11 Yhwh—A Philosophical Perspective from:
The Hebrew Bible and Philosophy of Religion
Abstract: Commenting on previous related research, James Barr once stated, “Most biblical scholars have no time for the philosophical theologian’s, ‘It depends on what you mean by “God.” ’ ” ³As we saw in the previous chapter, one biblical theologian who apparently made time was Rolf P. Knierim, when he wrote that “one of the
10 The Concept of Generic Godhood in the Hebrew Bible from:
The Hebrew Bible and Philosophy of Religion
Abstract: The question “What is God?”’ is sometimes also phrased as “What is
11 Yhwh—A Philosophical Perspective from:
The Hebrew Bible and Philosophy of Religion
Abstract: Commenting on previous related research, James Barr once stated, “Most biblical scholars have no time for the philosophical theologian’s, ‘It depends on what you mean by “God.” ’ ” ³As we saw in the previous chapter, one biblical theologian who apparently made time was Rolf P. Knierim, when he wrote that “one of the
10 The Concept of Generic Godhood in the Hebrew Bible from:
The Hebrew Bible and Philosophy of Religion
Abstract: The question “What is God?”’ is sometimes also phrased as “What is
11 Yhwh—A Philosophical Perspective from:
The Hebrew Bible and Philosophy of Religion
Abstract: Commenting on previous related research, James Barr once stated, “Most biblical scholars have no time for the philosophical theologian’s, ‘It depends on what you mean by “God.” ’ ” ³As we saw in the previous chapter, one biblical theologian who apparently made time was Rolf P. Knierim, when he wrote that “one of the
10 The Concept of Generic Godhood in the Hebrew Bible from:
The Hebrew Bible and Philosophy of Religion
Abstract: The question “What is God?”’ is sometimes also phrased as “What is
11 Yhwh—A Philosophical Perspective from:
The Hebrew Bible and Philosophy of Religion
Abstract: Commenting on previous related research, James Barr once stated, “Most biblical scholars have no time for the philosophical theologian’s, ‘It depends on what you mean by “God.” ’ ” ³As we saw in the previous chapter, one biblical theologian who apparently made time was Rolf P. Knierim, when he wrote that “one of the
10 The Concept of Generic Godhood in the Hebrew Bible from:
The Hebrew Bible and Philosophy of Religion
Abstract: The question “What is God?”’ is sometimes also phrased as “What is
11 Yhwh—A Philosophical Perspective from:
The Hebrew Bible and Philosophy of Religion
Abstract: Commenting on previous related research, James Barr once stated, “Most biblical scholars have no time for the philosophical theologian’s, ‘It depends on what you mean by “God.” ’ ” ³As we saw in the previous chapter, one biblical theologian who apparently made time was Rolf P. Knierim, when he wrote that “one of the
5 Synchronic (Literary) Analysis of the Book of Qohelet from:
The Politics of Pessimism in Ecclesiastes
Abstract: A proper literary reading of Qohelet must first deal with the problem of how to translate the word הֶבֶל (
hebel) in Qohelet and how this relates to the carpe diem ethic in the book. The frame narrator has supplied the reader with the leitmotif of the book: הֲבֵל הֲבָלִים הַבּׁל הָבֶל (“Vanity of vanities; everything is vanity”) (1:2; 12:8). In addition, הֶבֶל is used thirty-eight times in Qohelet, out of seventy-three in the entire Hebrew Bible, which reinforces this. אֶלׁהִים is used forty times in Qohelet, indicating that the relationship between the two is probably significant. Even a casual reading
Introduction: from:
The Future of the Biblical Past
Author(s) Segovia Fernando F.
Abstract: This volume has been so long in the making that between the time when the book was first conceived and its eventual completion the world began one of its accelerated periods of irruptive change. However, given the significance of the mandate we have undertaken here, this collection of essays has required more energy than most. We asked contributors to answer the following twofold question: what does global biblical studies look like in the early decades of the twenty-first century, and what new directions may be espied? The last time such a comprehensive task was undertaken was well over twenty years
1 Biblical Interpretation and Criticism in Neocolonial Africa: from:
The Future of the Biblical Past
Author(s) Kadmuzandu Israel
Abstract: Biblical criticism, unwittingly commemorating liberation in Africa, can become an alibi unless it is situated within the parameters of African culture—past, present, and future. It is no accident that, in spite of Western oppression and apartheid, Christianity has become one of the native religions of Africa to an extent that people in Africa have renamed it “African Christianity.” While the presence of Christianity has deep historical roots that go back to apostolic times, the interpretation of the Bible faces a complex and a daunting challenge. This challenge is motivated by the hunger for an appropriation of the gospel in
14 Braiding the Traditions in Aotearoa/New Zealand from:
The Future of the Biblical Past
Author(s) McKinlay Judith E.
Abstract: So writes the Anglican CMS missionary, Samuel Marsden, of Christmas Day 1814, the legendary day of the first Christian service in this land. His text was “Fear not for behold I bring you glad tidings of great joy” (Luke 2:10). Ironically, most of those listening could neither follow nor understand, but Marsden wrote in his journal, “we could not but feel the strongest persuasion that the time was at hand when the Glory of the Lord would be revealed to those poor benighted Heathens …” (quoted in Davidson 2004, 16).
15 Caught in Between: from:
The Future of the Biblical Past
Author(s) Boer Roland
Abstract: Biblical criticism in Australia has always suffered from an identity crisis: it has hung on to the idea that it is an outpost of Western scholarship at the same time that it exists at the intersection between the Pacific and Asia. For most of that time, it has valued the first while barely taking notice of the other two. So in this survey and proposal for the future of biblical studies in the in-between zone of Australia, I trace the legacy of Western biblical scholarship and ponder the possibilities of a greater meshing with Asia and the Pacific. I have
20 Cultural Criticism: from:
The Future of the Biblical Past
Author(s) Segovia Fernando F.
Abstract: In the mid 1990s, twenty years after the first rumblings of discursive unease and the initial calls for disciplinary redirection, I undertook the task of mapping the given results of such concerns and moves regarding the conceptualization and exercise of biblical criticism by way of paradigms or umbrella models of interpretation. This was an attempt to outline and explain the critical present, to survey the lay of the land, in terms of its past trajectory. Such mapping, in retrospect, followed a twofold impulse of the times. It was a response to a particular development regarding the scope of the field:
The Jews of Arabia at the Birth of Islam from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Newby Gordon D.
Abstract: Jews at the time of Muhammad and the rise of Islam had a long history in Arabia and were well integrated into both urban and rural environments as urban craftsmen, traders, farmers, and bedouin. Most Arab clans and tribes had Jewish members representing all facets of Arabian life.
Islamic Policy toward Jews from the Prophet Muhammad to the Pact of ‘Umar from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Cohen Mark R.
Abstract: The first encounter between Jews and Muslims dates back to the very beginnings of Islam. This essay discusses the foundations of the Muslim-Jewish relationship. The ambivalent attitude toward the Jews of Medina in the Qur’an, and the Prophet Muhammad’s aggressive assault on some of the Jewish tribes, reflect the gulf between his expectations for their acceptance of his message and their rejection. At the same time, Muhammad guaranteed nonviolence toward the “People of the Book” (Jews and Christians) in return for payment of tribute and humbleness. Muhammad’s so-called Constitution of Medina incorporated Jews either as part of the Islamic
umma
The Jews of al-Andalus from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) García-Arenal Mercedes
Abstract: The Jewish communities of al-Andalus—the part of the Iberian Peninsula under Muslim rule—were particularly illustrious between the reign of the Umayyad caliph of Cordova ‘Abd al- Rahman III (912–961) and the Almohad takeover after 1140. No other medieval Jewish community had so many high-ranking personalities in the political and economic spheres; no other produced a literary culture of such breadth, revealing an intellectual life shared with the Muslims. That blossoming was all the more unexpected in that the Jews of Hispania had lived in great social and legal insecurity during the time of the Visigoths, when they
The Legal Status of the Jews and Muslims in the Christian States from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Tolan John
Abstract: In the Muslim societies of the Middle Ages, Jews and Christians had the status of
dhimmīs, protected but at the same time inferior. In the Christian kingdoms of the Middle Ages, Jews and sometimes Muslims lived under similar conditions with respect to the Christians. But their status became increasingly precarious in many European countries. Minorities were subjected to violence and expulsions. For example, the Jews were expelled from France in 1182, again in 1306, and once more in 1394; from England in 1290; from Spain in 1492; and from Portugal in 1497. The Muslims were expelled from Sicily in the
Jews and Muslims in the Latin Kingdom of Jerusalem from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Frenkel Yehoshua
Abstract: Yet, with the passing of time, the Franks adopted a sociopolitical policy that did not differ
In Emergent Morocco from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Gottreich Emily Benichou
Abstract: Morocco as a protonational entity came into existence in the period stretching from the late fifteenth to the early nineteenth century. During this period its borders became fixed, its cities emerged as world capitals, and its defining political ideologies and institutions, including sharifism, maraboutism, the
abīd al-būkhāri, and themakhzen(to name just a few), grew firmly entrenched. Meanwhile, Moroccan Jewish identity, despite its purported timelessness, likewise cohered into its recognizable form as a result of the new geopolitical and spiritual realities. The protonational identities forged during this period would be increasingly challenged by European intervention in the coming centuries,
From the Judeo-Palestinian Conflict to the Arab-Israeli Wars from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Charbit Denis
Abstract: The Arab-Israeli conflict has lasted a long time: nearly seventy years, if one considers its beginning the outbreak of the war of independence in 1947, which the Palestinians call al-Nakba. And if one situates its origin just after World War I, when the political interests of the two communities found themselves facing off in a mimetic rivalry, whose object of dispute was the same land, it is, so to speak, a hundred-year war. Israeli collective psychology forged a representation of the enemy that was consistent with the collective mobilization of society the state required. Over the course of the conflict,
The Mobilization of Religion in the Israeli-Arab Conflict from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Dieckhoff Alain
Abstract: The conflict in the Middle East that, with varying intensity, has torn the region apart for a hundred years is not fundamentally religious but rather political. The Jews oppose not the Muslims but the Arabs (a minority of whom are Christian), and the two sides fight over a land on which they both aspire to realize their national projects. Nevertheless, religion plays a role in that struggle, shifting with the times but undeniable. How could it be otherwise? The dispute concerns the Holy Land, a place to which all three monotheisms are attached. The Jews are combating Muslims, and a
The Emigration of the Jews from the Arab World from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Laskier Michael M.
Abstract: While Jewish communities had lived for centuries within various Muslim societies, for the majority of them the second half of the twentieth century was the theater, sometimes brutal, of their departure. Of the 750,000 Jews in Muslim countries, 550,000 were Maghrebi. In these countries, the Jews did not always participate in the same way in the various strains of Zionism, nor did they adopt the same positions on the aliyah, immigration to Israel. Similarly, the locations of the Jews shifted in accordance with the reconfiguration of maps within the framework of Arab nationalisms—even if, at first, the Jews identified
The Case of Lebanon: from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Schulze Kirsten E.
Abstract: Jewish-Muslim relations in Lebanon before the twentieth century on the whole were characterized by amicability. Jews lived among Sunnis, Shi‘a, and Druze, and had well-functioning trade and communal relations with all of them. The nature of Jewish-Muslim relations, however, changed with the emergence of the Palestine conflict. The first strains in Sunni-Jewish relations appeared with the 1936–39 Arab Revolt. This set the pattern for sporadic violence against Lebanon’s Jews, which was motivated by solidarity with the Palestinians from the 1930s onward. The rise of pan-Arabism further underlined these sentiments, particularly among Sunni politicians. Shi‘a-Jewish relations did not become strained
Shari‘a Jurisdiction in Israel from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Karayanni Michael
Abstract: Shari‘a courts are an integral part of the Israeli judiciary.¹ Indeed, Islamic law as applied by the shari‘a courts—and that can be applied at times even by the regular civil courts—is taken to be within the judicial notice of each and every Israeli judge. The jurisdiction accorded to shari‘a courts and issues governed by Islamic law are mainly within the domain of family law pertaining to local Muslim subjects.² Israel’s Jewish state officially recognizes these Muslim institutions. The judicial jurisdiction of shari‘a courts has been brought under statutory regulation in some areas, but in others, Israeli law limits
Writing Difference in French-Language Maghrebi Literature from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Chikhi Beïda
Abstract: In French-language Maghrebi literature, the relationship between Jews and Muslims is a question of particular resonance, in that the colonial past weighs heavily on contemporary history. Both Jewish and Muslim writers have achieved fame in the field, weaving, in the same language, connections based on places that, despite antagonisms, have sometimes shaped shared spaces. Since the conflictual alterity of the 1950s, that literature has evolved toward new dialogical expressions imposed by the rise of the different fundamentalisms, by way of the trials of nationalism in the 1960s and the international issues associated with the Israeli-Palestinian conflict. These writers, whether stemming
Qurʾan and Torah: from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Gobillot Geneviève
Abstract: For a long time, the historical precedence of the Bible vis-à-vis the Qurʾan polarized the question of their interrelationship, reducing it solely to influence and borrowing, or even, in the case of extreme polemics, to plagiarism and parody. And yet, a simple shift in perspective allows us to view the question in a completely different light. In fact, the Qurʾanic text elaborates a discourse on its own status as scripture and on its relation to previous revelations. By starting with what the Qurʾan says about scriptural context, we find a whole universe of thought opening up to us, one that
Arabic Translations of the Hebrew Bible from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Metwali Hanan Kamel
Abstract: The Hebrew Bible has been translated many times since antiquity, by both Jews and Christians. In the third century BCE, the Torah was rendered into Greek for the Hellenophone community of Alexandria : this was the famous version known as the Septuagint. The tradition of the Targum developed concurrently in the Jewish communities of the Middle East , whose vernacular language had been Aramaic in its various dialects since the Babylonian exile in the sixth century. The biblical text was translated into Aramaic and was recited verse by verse at the synagogue, alongside the liturgical reading of the Torah. The
Comparison between the Halakha and Shariʿa from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Ackerman-Lieberman Phillip
Abstract: Despite many differences in detail, Judaism and Islam have much in common in their reliance on law as an organizing framework. Both legal systems turn to canonical textual sources (both scriptural and nonscriptural), as well as the interpretation of these texts, for the foundations of practice. Questions of legal method animated much early debate within each tradition; in Islamic law, distinctive legal schools persist to this day, which maintain such debate. Over time, narrative codes emerged in each tradition that established communal norms; these codes negotiated and at times vindicated local customary practice. As Judaism and Islam encountered modernity, both
Rituals: from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Firestone Reuven
Abstract: Judaism and Islam are mutually recognized as genuine monotheisms. Despite this general recognition, Muslim and Jewish religious scholars have critiqued each others’ religion over the centuries by calling into question both the authenticity of the other’s scripture and the efficacy of its religious practice. This basic critique is quite similar on both sides, yet despite significant and sometimes severe disapproval, each party recognizes the essential theological and moral- ethical soundness of the other. This basic respect, though sometimes reluctant, does not apply equally to other religions, certainly not to the Oriental traditions, and for the most part, not even Christianity.¹
Shabbat and Friday in Judaism and Islam from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Hawary Mohamed
Abstract: Both Islam and Judaism established a time of weekly rest for their faithful: for the Muslims, it is Friday; for the Jews, Shabbat, which also includes part of Friday, beginning after sunset and lasting until the next day when the stars come out. That proximity of the periods of rest is undoubtedly part of a more general kinship between the two religions and, to a lesser extent, between them and the other form of monotheism, Christianity, which chose Sunday as its day of rest. Beyond the similarities in their weekly calendars, however, these two religions of the Law have different
The Andalusian Philosophical Milieu from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Abbès Makram
Abstract: The Andalusian philosophical milieu of the Middle Ages holds the key to understanding the dual transmission of knowledge between East and West at that time. First, the centers of cultural life under the Abassids communicated their knowledge to Andalusia (tenth to twelfth centuries). Shortly thereafter, philosophical works from Andalusia were dispersed to the major intellectual centers of Christian Europe. Because of this dual movement of cultural transfer, Arabic Spain was the site of one of the most significant historical moments in terms of scientific exchanges and the development of ideas. Through a study of the relations between Jewish and Muslim
The Karaites and Muʾtazilism from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Erder Yoram
Abstract: In the time of the
geonim(directors of the Talmudic academies), Karaism was greatly influenced by the Muslim Muʾtazilite theological movement. The Karaites, though largely divided on many questions, adopted all the doctrinal fundaments of Muʾtazilism, both in the area of scriptural exegesis and in discussions of the essential theological themes for which the Muʾtazilites were the standard-bearers within Islam. Beginning in the eleventh century, the Karaites, who belonged to the group known as the Avelei Tsion (Mourners of Zion), having settled in Jerusalem, set out to compose theological texts constituting a genre in their own right. As a result,
Embodied Letter: from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Wolfson Elliot R.
Abstract: The complex and variegated, and at times conflictual and contentious, relationship of the three Abrahamic faiths, Judaism, Christianity, and Islam, can be profitably understood by the Heideggerian notion of
Zusammengehören, a term that denotes the belonging-together or the drawing-near of what persists in the difference of being the same.¹ To grasp the subtlety of this point, we must attend to Heidegger’s somewhat counterintuitive distinction between “the identical” (das Gleiche) and “the same” (das Selbe). In “Die Onto-Theo-Logische Verfassung der Metaphysik” (a lecture delivered on February 24, 1957, in Todtnauberg as part of a seminar on Hegel’sWissenschaft der Logik), he
James Sanua’s Ideological Contribution to Pan-Islamism from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Ettmueller Eliane Ursula
Abstract: Born in Cairo in 1839, James Sanua was a playwright, teacher, satirical journalist, and one of the most active Freemasons in his native city until 1878, the year he added yet another occupation, that of publishing caricatures in magazines. He lived at a time generally considered the golden age of the Jewish community in Egypt. The Muslim, Christian, and Jewish residents of that semiautonomous Ottoman province of the Nile Valley, not content to convey their ideas and promote their political convictions in secret societies such as the Masonic lodges, also published reviews that favored equality and mutual respect. Here I
Jewish Pilgrimages in Egypt from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Youssef Suzan
Abstract: Cults of saints are a fundamental phenomenon in Egyptian popular culture. They attest to the preservation of a large share of archaic beliefs associated with magical and totemic practices and with agrarian mythologies. The cult of “saints” (
awliyaʾfor Muslims,qaddissinfor Christians,siddiqinortsaddiqimfor Jews) manifests that continuity in everyday practices, most often orally but sometimes in written form. What is being played out is the relation between human beings and their environment but also the relation to their humanity itself, to the mental and symbolic universe reflected in language, religion, and art, all within an extreme
Aspects of Family Life among Jews in Muslim Societies from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Kailani Wasfi
Abstract: Family life, among Jews and Muslims, carried forward many cultural features that were widespread in the Middle East since antiquity. The specifics of each society also reflected the impact of the two religions as these evolved over time. The norms and practice of family life entailed ongoing adjustment among taken-for-granted lifestyles, explicit values, and canonized written sources. A systematic comparison between biblical and Qurʾanic prescriptions, or between
fiqhandhalakha, would far exceed the boundaries of this article. We will thus limit ourselves to an anthropological outlook on the shared cultural values between Jews and Muslims concerning family life, as
Introduction from:
Nation, Language, and the Ethics of Translation
Author(s) BERMANN SANDRA
Abstract: There has probably never been a time when issues of nation, language, and translation have been more important or more troubling than they are today. In a world where individual nation-states are increasingly enmeshed in financial and information networks, where multiple linguistic and national identities can inhabit a single state’s borders or exceed them in vast diasporas, where globalization has its serious—and often violent—discontents, and where terrorism and war transform distrust into destruction, language and translation play central, if often unacknowledged, roles. Though the reasons for this are undeniably complex, they are, at least in broad terms, understandable.
Simultaneous Interpretation: from:
Nation, Language, and the Ethics of Translation
Author(s) VISSON LYNN
Abstract: Though modern simultaneous interpretation with its microphones, earphones, and sound equipment is a relatively new phenomenon, it certainly has ancient analogues.¹ In the first Letter to the Corinthians St. Paul orders, “If any man speak in an unknown tongue let it be by two, or at most by three . . . and let one interpret” (14:27). At various times interpreters have served as missionaries, liaison officers, military envoys, court interpreters, business couriers, and trade negotiators. The French drogmans (dragomans), who were trained in Oriental languages, were required not only to translate what was said but also to advise French
“Synthetic Vision”: from:
Nation, Language, and the Ethics of Translation
Author(s) VISWANATHAN GAURI
Abstract: By the time of home rule agitation in both Ireland and India, anticolonial movements blended into a more internationalist vision then beginning to emerge in the years following World War I. To extreme nationalists, internationalism was a complete anathema, a more refined term to prolong the evils of colonialism indefinitely under the guise of a universal humanism. However, to those who still considered themselves nationalists, but believed they had a responsibility that extended far beyond the immediate goal of liberation from colonial rule, internationalism was the only solution to a world totally sundered by ethnic fratricide. The frightening reality of
Chapter Five Telling Stories in a Search for Justice: from:
Shattered Voices
Abstract: The rapid emergence of truth commissions and their collection and creation of narratives reflects, in part, the “return to narrative” that is prominent in diverse disciplines. Historians, philosophers, theologians, moralists, anthropologists, sociologists, psychologists, psychoanalysts, artists, and even legal scholars¹ have newly and increasingly embraced narrative as a valid and powerful mode of explanation and representation of reality.² This change is characterized as a “return to narrative” because narrative, once the primary mode of discourse, has been long devalued. From the time of the classical Greeks until recently, narrative was regarded as an inferior mode of discourse, frivolous and fanciful compared
2 Somatic Communication from:
Homo Narrans
Abstract: The alien quality of much archaic and oral literature should not be allowed to recede from sight. One classicist has spoken of the culture shock some people experience when approaching the
Iliad for the first time (Nagler 1987:425).¹ How easy it is for readers to feel disoriented when trying to grasp that poem’s stylized aesthetic system and alien world of feeling, so different from anything to be found in recent fiction. Two brutes arguing over rights to a slave girl . . . a corpse pulled through and through the dust. . . . Some readers must find the central
4 Oral Poetry Acts from:
Homo Narrans
Abstract: People have speculated a good deal about who Homer, the
Beowulf poet, the author of the Chanson de Roland or the Nibelungenlied, and similar shadowy persons from the past were and when and where they lived. Such questions have an obvious bearing on our understanding of texts that reveal key aspects of earlier modes of thought and cast light on many aspects of mythology, legendry, and popular belief, at the same time as they put the art of poetry on magnificent display. Although some curiously exact opinions about the authorship, audience, date, and provenance of such narratives have been expressed,¹
Book Title: Shelter Blues-Sanity and Selfhood Among the Homeless
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): Desjarlais Robert
Abstract: Desjarlais shows us not anonymous faces of the homeless but real people.While it is estimated that 25 percent or more of America's homeless are mentally ill, their lives are largely unknown to us. What must life be like for those who, in addition to living on the street, hear voices, suffer paranoid delusions, or have trouble thinking clearly or talking to others.
Shelter Bluesis an innovative portrait of people residing in Boston's Station Street Shelter. It examines the everyday lives of more than 40 homeless men and women, both white and African-American, ranging in age from early 20s to mid-60s. Based on a sixteen-month study, it draws readers into the personal worlds of these individuals and, by addressing the intimacies of homelessness, illness, and abjection, picks up where most scholarship and journalism stops.Robert Desjarlais works against the grain of media representations of homelessness by showing us not anonymous stereotypes but individuals. He draws on conversations as well as observations, talking with and listening to shelter residents to understand how they relate to their environment, to one another, and to those entrusted with their care. His book considers their lives in terms of a complex range of forces and helps us comprehend the linkages between culture, illness, personhood, and political agency on the margins of contemporary American society.Shelter Bluesis unlike anything else ever written about homelessness. It challenges social scientists and mental health professionals to rethink their approaches to human subjectivity and helps us all to better understand one of the most pressing problems of our time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt3fhjmz
Questions of Shelter from:
Shelter Blues
Abstract: Thinkers like Foucault, who emphasize the priority of cultural discourses in shaping our lives, tend to speak of incarnations of self or power as generic to an age. Yet while such approaches are useful in mapping forms of mind and personhood specific to historical periods and sometimes show how these forms take shape in everyday life, they seldom consider how the stuff of personhood is built out of the events and doings of everyday life. They also tend to neglect the plurality of forces that occasion diverse ways of being at any moment within a society. To rectify this tendency
Framing the Homeless from:
Shelter Blues
Abstract: Basic to the sublime disorders of the post-industrial age, then, is a common sentiment: whether it be the occasional thrill of semantic collapse or a yearning for structural decay, there is a delight in the fall. The architects of Boston’s homeless—politicians, journalists, consumers, psychiatrists, ethnographers, and the dislocated themselves—are tempted by a similar aesthetics of decay when invoking or depicting these people. As I understand it, confrontations with Boston’s itinerant often evoke sentiments similar to those conjured by Rudolph’s ruin. This is not to say that the cultural history of the homeless is identical to that of the
Sensory (Dis)Orientations from:
Shelter Blues
Abstract: Since people’s feelings could become part of the State Service Center when they touched, looked at, or breathed onto it, the building felt different and meant different things for different people, at different times, and from different vantage points. The building could not be read like a book, with a single meaning: its uses and meanings tied into one’s position in space and one’s place in society. While many of the residents of the building, more familiar with its nuances than most, found the unusual architecture to be dangerous and “distracting,” they also knew the structure as a place of
Roots to Earth from:
Shelter Blues
Abstract: Despite their dangers, the walls protected those within them. Many found refuge in the building from the streets, the police, and the potential violence of everyday life. It sometimes seemed as if each person heeded a distinct geography of fear and safety. Wendy Dyer, for instance, told me one day that she only felt comfortable “in this building and around it.” She was particularly frightened of East Boston, where her ex-boyfriend lived. When I asked Julie Mason what she took to be safe places to stay, she named the shelter, the building, and Virginia: “People don’t die in Virginia. Here
Smoking and Eating and Talking from:
Shelter Blues
Abstract: The nature of these routines suggested that the construction of time in the shelter was akin to the makings of space, such that a distinct “chronotope” or time-space configuration (to use Bakhtin’s word) governed life on the basketball court.¹ The chronotope, promoted by the staff in myriad ways, involved a span of finite, clearly defined, habitual, and reasonable activities.
Pacing My Mind from:
Shelter Blues
Abstract: Another way that people dealt with things was to pace. Some did not pace at all. I never saw Fred, Helen, or Peter pace, and Irving seemed somehow too regal to want to work his body so. Richard sometimes paced when others did; he shadowed Brian at times, as if the contagion of movement was another way for him to get in touch with people. Men paced more than women, although it was unclear why this was so. Perhaps the difference lay in the culture, in the medications that men took, or in how those medications affected them. More likely
Ragtime from:
Shelter Blues
Abstract: “One guy gets me coffee in the morning, and I give him a dollar,” Joey told me once. “So it’s worth it for me. But the guy is kinda hard to talk to sometimes.”
ʺWeʹre Losing Him, Samʺ from:
Shelter Blues
Abstract: As with my exchanges with Simone and Nancy, I found that I was often engaged in two or more conversations at once—for instance, talking to Richard, responding to Simone’s request for change to buy a cup of coffee, and watching Helen show me what she bought at a store. People would vie for my attention. One day I found myself in the lobby conversing with Larry about the rules of the shelter, and at the same time with Stuart about where the best free meals in Boston could be found. “Stop interrupting,” Larry said to Stuart. “
I’mtalking to
Reasonable Reasonableness from:
Shelter Blues
Abstract: The efforts of Lisa and other staff members to get their guests to talk and act in certain ways, as well as the staff’s approach to language, time, and action in general, reflected their professional responsibilities and approaches to care.
Bodies with Organs from:
Shelter Blues
Abstract: “A nervous breakdown,” Eva explained, “is like feeling your brain fall down to your knees, fall down on the ground, and get crushed.” She said that she had “psychosomatic pains” and sometimes got an upset
Introduction: from:
Beyond the Red Notebook
Author(s) Barone Dennis
Abstract: Before the publication of
The New York Trilogy, Paul Auster was known primarily for having edited the Random House anthology of twentieth-century French poetry and for having written several insightful literary essays. In the short time since the publication of the Trilogy (1985–1986) he has become one of America’s most praised contemporary novelists. He has frequently been compared to authors ranging from Nathaniel Hawthorne to Alain Robbe-Grillet. Yet, perhaps because of the speed at which his novels have appeared and his reputation has grown, there is little scholarship available on his work. One has the sense, however, that just
In the Realm of the Naked Eye: from:
Beyond the Red Notebook
Author(s) Finkelstein Norman
Abstract: Paul Auster the novelist came into print later than Paul Auster the poet, essayist, and translator, and presently eclipses all of his other personae, at least in the eyes of a general literary audience.
The New York Trilogy has tantalized readers for some time now; more recent novels have also been well received. But while Auster notes that the poet and the writer of prose grew up together (personal correspondence, 15 October 1988), perhaps like the protagonist and Fanshawe, his alter ego in The Locked Room, the last book of the Trilogy, we can say with equal confidence that Auster
“The Hunger Must Be Preserved at All Cost”: from:
Beyond the Red Notebook
Author(s) Rubin Derek
Abstract: The future of Jewish-American literature has been a controversial issue for some time. It goes back at least to the publication of Philip Roth’s
Goodbye, Columbus (1959), when Irving Howe argued in a review of the book that Roth “is one of the first American Jewish writers who finds ...almost no sustenance in the Jewish tradition” (“The Suburbs of Babylon,” 37). Howe suggested that, since for a younger writer like Roth memories of the Jewish-immigrant culture and way of life were fading, “[i] t is possible that [his book] signifies ... the closing of an arc of American Jewish experience”
3 Learning to Listen: from:
The Spoken Word and the Work of Interpretation
Abstract: Beyond the question of how to score oral performances lies the further question of how to talk
about such performances. Might it not be that such talk, when published, should itself escape the prose format, arguing its case not only in its words and sentences but also in its graphic design? David Antin and myself, at a time when he had begun publishing the talks that were later gathered in Talking at the Boundaries and I had begun publishing scripts of Zuni stories, made a pact that we would never again allow our own words—even our critical discourse—to
13 Ethnography as Interaction: from:
The Spoken Word and the Work of Interpretation
Abstract: One November evening at Zuni, New Mexico, for the first time in a year’s devotion to the ethnography of Zuni storytelling, I suddenly found myself in near-perfect conditions for the witnessing of Zuni storytelling as it really should be, rather than in near-perfect conditions for the making of a studio-like recording. I had gone with Andrew Peynetsa, an accomplished raconteur, to the house of his eldest son.¹ Andrew’s daughter-in-law, Jane, her twenty-year-old brother, and several grandchildren were there, but his son, with whom he desired a conversation, had not yet returned from his job at a gas station. A couple
Epilogue: from:
The Spoken Word and the Work of Interpretation
Abstract: On October 13, 1976, Barbara Tedlock and I were in Chuua 4,ak, a Quiché Maya town in Guatemala, talking with Andrés Xiloj. We were undergoing training in Quiché divination and dream interpretation during this period.¹ The day before, I had told don Andrés of dreaming that a shining white mountain had spoken to me with the voice of an old woman, saying, “Come with me.” He had commented that “worlds” do indeed shine, “worlds” (
mundos, from Spanish) being a favorite Quiché metaphor for mountains. In the singular, “World” refers to the earth deity at his/her full planetary scale, sometimes called
3 Learning to Listen: from:
The Spoken Word and the Work of Interpretation
Abstract: Beyond the question of how to score oral performances lies the further question of how to talk
about such performances. Might it not be that such talk, when published, should itself escape the prose format, arguing its case not only in its words and sentences but also in its graphic design? David Antin and myself, at a time when he had begun publishing the talks that were later gathered in Talking at the Boundaries and I had begun publishing scripts of Zuni stories, made a pact that we would never again allow our own words—even our critical discourse—to
13 Ethnography as Interaction: from:
The Spoken Word and the Work of Interpretation
Abstract: One November evening at Zuni, New Mexico, for the first time in a year’s devotion to the ethnography of Zuni storytelling, I suddenly found myself in near-perfect conditions for the witnessing of Zuni storytelling as it really should be, rather than in near-perfect conditions for the making of a studio-like recording. I had gone with Andrew Peynetsa, an accomplished raconteur, to the house of his eldest son.¹ Andrew’s daughter-in-law, Jane, her twenty-year-old brother, and several grandchildren were there, but his son, with whom he desired a conversation, had not yet returned from his job at a gas station. A couple
Epilogue: from:
The Spoken Word and the Work of Interpretation
Abstract: On October 13, 1976, Barbara Tedlock and I were in Chuua 4,ak, a Quiché Maya town in Guatemala, talking with Andrés Xiloj. We were undergoing training in Quiché divination and dream interpretation during this period.¹ The day before, I had told don Andrés of dreaming that a shining white mountain had spoken to me with the voice of an old woman, saying, “Come with me.” He had commented that “worlds” do indeed shine, “worlds” (
mundos, from Spanish) being a favorite Quiché metaphor for mountains. In the singular, “World” refers to the earth deity at his/her full planetary scale, sometimes called
3 Learning to Listen: from:
The Spoken Word and the Work of Interpretation
Abstract: Beyond the question of how to score oral performances lies the further question of how to talk
about such performances. Might it not be that such talk, when published, should itself escape the prose format, arguing its case not only in its words and sentences but also in its graphic design? David Antin and myself, at a time when he had begun publishing the talks that were later gathered in Talking at the Boundaries and I had begun publishing scripts of Zuni stories, made a pact that we would never again allow our own words—even our critical discourse—to
13 Ethnography as Interaction: from:
The Spoken Word and the Work of Interpretation
Abstract: One November evening at Zuni, New Mexico, for the first time in a year’s devotion to the ethnography of Zuni storytelling, I suddenly found myself in near-perfect conditions for the witnessing of Zuni storytelling as it really should be, rather than in near-perfect conditions for the making of a studio-like recording. I had gone with Andrew Peynetsa, an accomplished raconteur, to the house of his eldest son.¹ Andrew’s daughter-in-law, Jane, her twenty-year-old brother, and several grandchildren were there, but his son, with whom he desired a conversation, had not yet returned from his job at a gas station. A couple
Epilogue: from:
The Spoken Word and the Work of Interpretation
Abstract: On October 13, 1976, Barbara Tedlock and I were in Chuua 4,ak, a Quiché Maya town in Guatemala, talking with Andrés Xiloj. We were undergoing training in Quiché divination and dream interpretation during this period.¹ The day before, I had told don Andrés of dreaming that a shining white mountain had spoken to me with the voice of an old woman, saying, “Come with me.” He had commented that “worlds” do indeed shine, “worlds” (
mundos, from Spanish) being a favorite Quiché metaphor for mountains. In the singular, “World” refers to the earth deity at his/her full planetary scale, sometimes called
3 Learning to Listen: from:
The Spoken Word and the Work of Interpretation
Abstract: Beyond the question of how to score oral performances lies the further question of how to talk
about such performances. Might it not be that such talk, when published, should itself escape the prose format, arguing its case not only in its words and sentences but also in its graphic design? David Antin and myself, at a time when he had begun publishing the talks that were later gathered in Talking at the Boundaries and I had begun publishing scripts of Zuni stories, made a pact that we would never again allow our own words—even our critical discourse—to
13 Ethnography as Interaction: from:
The Spoken Word and the Work of Interpretation
Abstract: One November evening at Zuni, New Mexico, for the first time in a year’s devotion to the ethnography of Zuni storytelling, I suddenly found myself in near-perfect conditions for the witnessing of Zuni storytelling as it really should be, rather than in near-perfect conditions for the making of a studio-like recording. I had gone with Andrew Peynetsa, an accomplished raconteur, to the house of his eldest son.¹ Andrew’s daughter-in-law, Jane, her twenty-year-old brother, and several grandchildren were there, but his son, with whom he desired a conversation, had not yet returned from his job at a gas station. A couple
Epilogue: from:
The Spoken Word and the Work of Interpretation
Abstract: On October 13, 1976, Barbara Tedlock and I were in Chuua 4,ak, a Quiché Maya town in Guatemala, talking with Andrés Xiloj. We were undergoing training in Quiché divination and dream interpretation during this period.¹ The day before, I had told don Andrés of dreaming that a shining white mountain had spoken to me with the voice of an old woman, saying, “Come with me.” He had commented that “worlds” do indeed shine, “worlds” (
mundos, from Spanish) being a favorite Quiché metaphor for mountains. In the singular, “World” refers to the earth deity at his/her full planetary scale, sometimes called
3 Learning to Listen: from:
The Spoken Word and the Work of Interpretation
Abstract: Beyond the question of how to score oral performances lies the further question of how to talk
about such performances. Might it not be that such talk, when published, should itself escape the prose format, arguing its case not only in its words and sentences but also in its graphic design? David Antin and myself, at a time when he had begun publishing the talks that were later gathered in Talking at the Boundaries and I had begun publishing scripts of Zuni stories, made a pact that we would never again allow our own words—even our critical discourse—to
13 Ethnography as Interaction: from:
The Spoken Word and the Work of Interpretation
Abstract: One November evening at Zuni, New Mexico, for the first time in a year’s devotion to the ethnography of Zuni storytelling, I suddenly found myself in near-perfect conditions for the witnessing of Zuni storytelling as it really should be, rather than in near-perfect conditions for the making of a studio-like recording. I had gone with Andrew Peynetsa, an accomplished raconteur, to the house of his eldest son.¹ Andrew’s daughter-in-law, Jane, her twenty-year-old brother, and several grandchildren were there, but his son, with whom he desired a conversation, had not yet returned from his job at a gas station. A couple
Epilogue: from:
The Spoken Word and the Work of Interpretation
Abstract: On October 13, 1976, Barbara Tedlock and I were in Chuua 4,ak, a Quiché Maya town in Guatemala, talking with Andrés Xiloj. We were undergoing training in Quiché divination and dream interpretation during this period.¹ The day before, I had told don Andrés of dreaming that a shining white mountain had spoken to me with the voice of an old woman, saying, “Come with me.” He had commented that “worlds” do indeed shine, “worlds” (
mundos, from Spanish) being a favorite Quiché metaphor for mountains. In the singular, “World” refers to the earth deity at his/her full planetary scale, sometimes called
Book Title: Dreams of Fiery Stars-The Transformations of Native American Fiction
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): Rainwater Catherine
Abstract: Selected by
Choicemagazine as an Outstanding Academic Book for 1999 Since the 1968 publication of N. Scott Momaday'sHouse Made of Dawn, a new generation of Native American storytellers has chosen writing over oral traditions. While their works have found an audience by observing many of the conventions of the mainstream novel, Native American written narrative has emerged as something distinct from the postmodern novel with which it is often compared. InDreams of Fiery Stars, Catherine Rainwater examines the novels of writers such as Momaday, Linda Hogan, Leslie Marmon Silko, Gerald Vizenor, and Louise Erdrich and contends that the very act of writing narrative imposes constraints upon these authors that are foreign to Native American tradition. Their works amount to a break with-and a transformation of-American Indian storytelling. The book focuses on the agenda of social and cultural regeneration encoded in contemporary Native American narrative, and addresses key questions about how these works achieve their overtly stated political and revisionary aims. Rainwater explores the ways in which the writers "create" readers who understand the connection between storytelling and personal and social transformation; considers how contemporary Native American narrative rewrites Western notions of space and time; examines the existence of intertextual connections between Native American works; and looks at the vital role of Native American literature in mainstream society today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt3fhrv1
Chapter Three Re-Signing the Self: from:
Dreams of Fiery Stars
Abstract: Contemporary fiction by Native Americans frequently traces crises of self-transformation.² Unique complications in the transformational process arise for Indian characters, sometimes on account of their half-blood or mixed-blood status, sometimes owing to their efforts to sustain tribal values in a white world, and other times due to their attempts to live by the rules of the dominant society. In the end, such characters usually shape themselves less according to traditional models drawn exclusively from a particular culture than to models that they half-invent and half-discover through bicultural experience. Thus, in their patterns of character development, American Indian narratives emphasize flexibility
Chapter Four They All Sang as One: from:
Dreams of Fiery Stars
Abstract: As we have seen, western narrative frequently inhibits expression of American Indian realities, but contemporary Indian authors are adept in their strategies for expanding the semiotic range of western sign systems. Indeed, all semiotic forms are potentially subject to reimbrication of the sort we have considered in Chapters Two and Three. Spatial and temporal codes inscribed within narrative forms constitute particularly significant challenges to Native American and other ethnic writers in their endeavors to represent worlds not in conformity with western material and mechanical notions of space and time. “Numbers, time, inches, feet. All are just ploys for cutting nature
5. Reporting the New, Revoicing the Past: from:
Gender on the Market
Abstract: Marketplace oratory is only sometimes poetic. It
Book Title: Clan Cleansing in Somalia-The Ruinous Legacy of 1991
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): Kapteijns Lidwien
Abstract: In 1991, certain political and military leaders in Somalia, wishing to gain exclusive control over the state, mobilized their followers to use terror-wounding, raping, and killing-to expel a vast number of Somalis from the capital city of Mogadishu and south-central and southern Somalia. Manipulating clan sentiment, they succeeded in turning ordinary civilians against neighbors, friends, and coworkers. Although this episode of organized communal violence is common knowledge among Somalis, its real nature has not been publicly acknowledged and has been ignored, concealed, or misrepresented in scholarly works and political memoirs-until now. Marshaling a vast amount of source material, including Somali poetry and survivor accounts,
Clan Cleansing in Somaliaanalyzes this campaign of clan cleansing against the historical background of a violent and divisive military dictatorship, in the contemporary context of regime collapse, and in relationship to the rampant militia warfare that followed in its wake.Clan Cleansing in Somaliaalso reflects on the relationship between history, truth, and postconflict reconstruction in Somalia. Documenting the organization and intent behind the campaign of clan cleansing, Lidwien Kapteijns traces the emergence of the hate narratives and code words that came to serve as rationales and triggers for the violence. However, it was not clans that killed, she insists, but people who killed in the name of clan. Kapteijns argues that the mutual forgiveness for which politicians often so lightly call is not a feasible proposition as long as the violent acts for which Somalis should forgive each other remain suppressed and undiscussed.Clan Cleansing in Somaliaestablishes that public acknowledgment of the ruinous turn to communal violence is indispensable to social and moral repair, and can provide a gateway for the critical memory work required from Somalis on all sides of this multifaceted conflict.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt3fhzvq
4. Pain Clings to the Body from:
Body and Emotion
Abstract: Padma Lama, a prestigious, heavyset “priest” from the village of Dhupchughyang, helped to perform the anniversary funeral rites for a Todhang woman who died the previous May. He danced and drank a bit at the dose of the ceremonies, walked at night with his wife and neighbors up to their homes, slept in his wood-framed bed, and died, for unknown reasons, sometime during the night. Latu and other lamas cremated the body the next morning, then performed a series of funeral rites at Padma’s home, which culminated in the
sbyang par (“changpar”) rites conducted in the aging temple in Dhupchugang
2 THE GRIOT’S TONGUE from:
Sensuous Scholarship
Abstract: During my long apprenticeship to Adamu Jenitongo, almost all of our discussions took place under a lonely acacia in the center of his compound. One afternoon toward the end of his life, the old man asked me into his spirit hut. My heart leaped with expectation, for I knew that such an invitation—rarely if ever given—meant that the time had come for the master to impart important knowledge to me.
Chapter 7 The Politics of Memory from:
The Dynamics of Violence in Central Africa
Abstract: This was a time to remember the enormity of the crimes committed a decade ago while the international community looked the other way. This was a time for all Rwandans to commune
Chapter 8 Rwanda and the Holocaust Reconsidered from:
The Dynamics of Violence in Central Africa
Abstract: The Holocaust and the Rwanda genocide are two of the most terrifying and complex catastrophes of the twentieth century. Whether measured by the scale of the atrocities committed against Jews and Tutsi, the distinctiveness of their collective identities, or the deliberate, purposeful manner of their annihilation, there are compelling reasons for seeing in the Rwanda carnage a tropical version of the Shoah. Little wonder that time and again the better known of the two has been used as the paradigmatic frame for analyzing the other.
Chapter Two Going to Jesus “Outside the Camp”: from:
Aliens and Sojourners
Abstract: Early Christians talked about themselves as aliens and outsiders. Often it was with just a few words or phrases, as in 1 Peter or some of the other examples surveyed in the Introduction. But sometimes the trope was developed more extensively, becoming a major theme in exhortatory treatises and epistles. Among the books that were eventually included in the New Testament canon, the other text besides 1 Peter that makes significant use of the alien topos is the Epistle to the Hebrews. Where 1 Peter offers just a few brief allusions to the topos, Hebrews develops an extensive scriptural lineage
Chapter 10 Detecting Identity in Time and Space: from:
Detecting Texts
Author(s) Botta Anna
Abstract: Among contemporary novelists concerned with a problematics of time, the names of Patrick Modiano and Antonio Tabucchi figure prominently. They have made their reputation on the French and Italian literary scenes as authors of a distinctive and consistent body of work, characterized by unfathomable pasts and irretrievable identities. As a consequence, their protagonists are often detective-philosophers hot on the trail of existential and metaphysical conundrums, new Sherlock Holmeses who have turned the magnifying lens on themselves.
CHAPTER 3 Repetitive structures in language and history from:
Performing the Past
Author(s) KOSELLECK REINHART
Abstract: The beginning and end of all love stories – or the alpha and omega of every love – are as infinitely different as the number of times lovers find one another and part or are
CHAPTER 9 Music and memory in Mozart’s Zauberflöte from:
Performing the Past
Author(s) ASSMANN JAN
Abstract: As an art working with time and addressing the ear, music, like poetry, requires and challenges memory. As early as the fourth century, Augustine used the example of music to illustrate his meditations on time and memory, describing the process of understanding a melody that unfolds in time,¹ and Edmund Husserl, in his
Untersuchungen zur Phänomenologie des inneren Zeitbewußtseins, used music as the most obvious example of how memory and expectation or, in his terminology, retention and protention, cooperate in the perceptive construction of a melody.² Perceiving and understanding a melody requires memory, the same kind of short-term memory which
Book Title: Sound Souvenirs-Audio Technologies, Memory and Cultural Practices
Publisher: Amsterdam University Press
Author(s): van Dijck José
Abstract: In recent decades, the importance of sound for remembering the past and for creating a sense of belonging has been increasingly acknowledged. We keep "sound souvenirs" such as cassette tapes and long play albums in our attics because we want to be able to recreate the music and everyday sounds we once cherished. Artists and ordinary listeners deploy the newest digital audio technologies to recycle past sounds into present tunes. Sound and memory are inextricably intertwined, not just through the commercially exploited nostalgia on oldies radio stations, but through the exchange of valued songs by means of pristine recordings and cultural practices such as collecting, archiving and listing. This book explores several types of cultural practices involving the remembrance and restoration of past sounds. At the same time, it theorizes the cultural meaning of collecting, recycling, reciting, and remembering sound and music. This title is available in the OAPEN Library - http://www.oapen.org.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt45kf7f
Chapter One Storing Sound Souvenirs: from:
Sound Souvenirs
Author(s) Jacobs Annelies
Abstract: Loek van IJzendoorn, a Dutch Philips employee caught by the fever of recording, purchased his first reel-to-reel recorder in the mid-1960s. With all the wires attached to the recorder, the device “looked dreadful,” so he locked it behind the closed doors of a cupboard in his living room. He bought the reel-to-reel mainly to record radio music. Late each evening, Van IJzendoorn would sit down and wait for hours for the best German stereophonic radio programs to be broadcast. At that time, however, the electric energy radiated by cars, mopeds, and scooters still interfered with the reception of his radio,
Chapter Two Tape Cassettes and Former Selves: from:
Sound Souvenirs
Author(s) Jansen Bas
Abstract: Old cassette mix tapes tend to bring back memories. There is something accidental about this ability, because evoking memories was not their intended purpose. In the digital age, however, it is their evocative quality that they are mostly appreciated for. Besides conjuring up a wealth of autobiographical memories related to a specific tape, mix tapes naturally trigger memories of the outdated technology of the cassette recorder and of spending many an hour mixing tapes. Unlike making a playlist, mix taping involves a lot of work. As songs were generally rerecorded in real time, the process of making a mix tape
Chapter Four Taking Your Favorite Sound Along: from:
Sound Souvenirs
Author(s) Weber Heike
Abstract: In the second half of the twentieth century, portability became a significant design feature in consumer electronics.¹ Manufacturers promoted portable electronics for use anytime and anywhere in contrast to domestic appliances that still depended on a fixed power supply. The rise of portable electronics coincided with an increase in travel and transportation. Mobile technologies that addressed the aural rather than the visual sense came to be seen as the perfect companions for people on the move.
Chapter Five The Auditory Nostalgia of iPod Culture from:
Sound Souvenirs
Author(s) Bull Michael
Abstract: In this chapter I focus on one strategy of control: the transcendence of time and place through the evocation of various forms of auditory nostalgia. IPod users often report being in dream reveries while
Chapter Seven Remembering Songs through Telling Stories: from:
Sound Souvenirs
Author(s) van Dijck José
Abstract: “You can check out any time you like, but you can never leave…” The knife-sharp guitar solo following Don Henley’s last words rack up a series of emotions and memories in my brain. Ever since my definite return from California, where I lived from 1987 to 1991, the song is intensely colored by experiences: staying at a desolate hotel in the desert, driving a pick-up truck up north on Highway 101, playing a frisbee at Pacific Beach. The song is also inevitably associated with the old tape recorder in my apartment’s living room, a red ghetto blaster from which many
Book Title: Sound Souvenirs-Audio Technologies, Memory and Cultural Practices
Publisher: Amsterdam University Press
Author(s): van Dijck José
Abstract: In recent decades, the importance of sound for remembering the past and for creating a sense of belonging has been increasingly acknowledged. We keep "sound souvenirs" such as cassette tapes and long play albums in our attics because we want to be able to recreate the music and everyday sounds we once cherished. Artists and ordinary listeners deploy the newest digital audio technologies to recycle past sounds into present tunes. Sound and memory are inextricably intertwined, not just through the commercially exploited nostalgia on oldies radio stations, but through the exchange of valued songs by means of pristine recordings and cultural practices such as collecting, archiving and listing. This book explores several types of cultural practices involving the remembrance and restoration of past sounds. At the same time, it theorizes the cultural meaning of collecting, recycling, reciting, and remembering sound and music. This title is available in the OAPEN Library - http://www.oapen.org.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt45kf7f
Chapter One Storing Sound Souvenirs: from:
Sound Souvenirs
Author(s) Jacobs Annelies
Abstract: Loek van IJzendoorn, a Dutch Philips employee caught by the fever of recording, purchased his first reel-to-reel recorder in the mid-1960s. With all the wires attached to the recorder, the device “looked dreadful,” so he locked it behind the closed doors of a cupboard in his living room. He bought the reel-to-reel mainly to record radio music. Late each evening, Van IJzendoorn would sit down and wait for hours for the best German stereophonic radio programs to be broadcast. At that time, however, the electric energy radiated by cars, mopeds, and scooters still interfered with the reception of his radio,
Chapter Two Tape Cassettes and Former Selves: from:
Sound Souvenirs
Author(s) Jansen Bas
Abstract: Old cassette mix tapes tend to bring back memories. There is something accidental about this ability, because evoking memories was not their intended purpose. In the digital age, however, it is their evocative quality that they are mostly appreciated for. Besides conjuring up a wealth of autobiographical memories related to a specific tape, mix tapes naturally trigger memories of the outdated technology of the cassette recorder and of spending many an hour mixing tapes. Unlike making a playlist, mix taping involves a lot of work. As songs were generally rerecorded in real time, the process of making a mix tape
Chapter Four Taking Your Favorite Sound Along: from:
Sound Souvenirs
Author(s) Weber Heike
Abstract: In the second half of the twentieth century, portability became a significant design feature in consumer electronics.¹ Manufacturers promoted portable electronics for use anytime and anywhere in contrast to domestic appliances that still depended on a fixed power supply. The rise of portable electronics coincided with an increase in travel and transportation. Mobile technologies that addressed the aural rather than the visual sense came to be seen as the perfect companions for people on the move.
Chapter Five The Auditory Nostalgia of iPod Culture from:
Sound Souvenirs
Author(s) Bull Michael
Abstract: In this chapter I focus on one strategy of control: the transcendence of time and place through the evocation of various forms of auditory nostalgia. IPod users often report being in dream reveries while
Chapter Seven Remembering Songs through Telling Stories: from:
Sound Souvenirs
Author(s) van Dijck José
Abstract: “You can check out any time you like, but you can never leave…” The knife-sharp guitar solo following Don Henley’s last words rack up a series of emotions and memories in my brain. Ever since my definite return from California, where I lived from 1987 to 1991, the song is intensely colored by experiences: staying at a desolate hotel in the desert, driving a pick-up truck up north on Highway 101, playing a frisbee at Pacific Beach. The song is also inevitably associated with the old tape recorder in my apartment’s living room, a red ghetto blaster from which many
2 Jews in the Netherlands and their various ties with Judaism from:
Identity Processes and Dynamics in Multi-Ethnic Europe
Author(s) de Vries Marlene
Abstract: As a consequence of granting full civil rights to Jews in the European nation-states around the beginning of the nineteenth century, a difference between Jewish religion and Jewish culture could start to develop. In the Netherlands, or rather, the Batavian Republic as it was known at that time, civil emancipation became a fact in 1796. Once promoted to Dutch citizenship (or French or whatever), Jews no longer had to rely on the
kehillah, the Jewish denomination, that previously not only served as the religious, but also as the social and cultural home base for every Jew. Membership in a denomination
Book Title: The Cinema of Attractions Reloaded- Publisher: Amsterdam University Press
Author(s): Strauven Wanda
Abstract: What have Lumière in common with Wachowski? More than one hundred years separate these two pairs of brothers who astonished, quite similarly, the film spectator of their respective time with special effects of movement: a train rushing into the audience and a bullet flying in slow motion. Do they belong to the same family of "cinema of attractions"? Twenty years ago Tom Gunning introduced the phrase "cinema of attractions" to define the essence of the earliest films made between 1895 and 1906. His term scored an immediate success, even outside the field of early cinema. The present anthology questions the attractiveness and usefulness of the term for both pre-classical and post-classical cinema. With contributions by the most prominent scholars of this discipline (such as Tom Gunning, André Gaudreault, Thomas Elsaesser, Charles Musser, Scott Bukatman and Vivian Sobchack) this volume offers a kaleidoscopic overview of an important historiographical debate. This title is available in the OAPEN Library - http://www.oapen.org.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt46n09s
The Attraction of the Intelligent Eye: from:
The Cinema of Attractions Reloaded
Author(s) Paci Viva
Abstract: One of the key elements of the “new film history” which arose in the wake of the Brighton conference in 1978 was that it put forth a
model of attractions, one both heuristic and quite real at the same time; the tenets of this model and where it has led us today are the subjects of the present volume. This simultaneously theoretical and archaeological concept has produced another way of thinking about the relationship between viewer and film, taking as its starting point precisely the web of relationships found in early cinema and its connection to the era’s popular entertainments
A Cinema of Contemplation, A Cinema of Discernment: from:
The Cinema of Attractions Reloaded
Author(s) Musser Charles
Abstract: This present anthology confirms what has been obvious for some time: the turn of phrase “cinema of attractions” has captured the enthusiastic attention of the film studies community as well as a wide range of scholars working in visual culture. It has not only provided a powerful means of gaining insight into important aspects of early cinema but served as a gloss for those seeking a quick, up-to-date understanding of its cultural gestalt. In his many articles on the topic, Tom Gunning has counterposed the cinema of attractions to narrative, arguing that before 1903-04 or perhaps 1907-08, cinema has been
Programming Attractions: from:
The Cinema of Attractions Reloaded
Author(s) Hagener Malte
Abstract: The cinema program – the sequence of films and numbers within a circumscribed performance space and time – has recently become a focus of film historical research, mostly in relation to early cinema.¹ The program, at least until the 1960s, was an integral and vital part of film exhibition and therefore of the reality of cinema-going. Most often, the implicit (or explicit) imperative of cinema programs was to create a harmonious and well-rounded whole in which the constituent elements (entire films and live addresses, outtakes and excerpts, musical interludes and stage spectacles) would blend into one another in order to
Chez le Photographe c’est chez moi: from:
The Cinema of Attractions Reloaded
Author(s) McMahan Alison
Abstract: In the original formulation of the cinema of attractions theory, Tom Gunning and André Gaudreault conceived of the attractions phase as a mode of film practice discernible before the development of classical cinematic editing and narration. In
Alice Guy Blaché, Lost Visionary of the CinemaI argued, building on work by Charles Musser,¹ that attractions represent only one possible approach to filmmaking in the earliest phase of cinema. Another approach, characterized by a sophisticated use of on- and off-screen space, was in full use at the same time – most notably in some of the earliest one-shot films produced at
Book Title: Shooting the Family-Transnational Media and Intercultural Values
Publisher: Amsterdam University Press
Author(s): Staat Wim
Abstract: Do contemporary movements of migration and the ever-increasing abundance of audiovisual media correspond to - or even cause - shifts in the defenition of both the bourgeois nuclear family and the tribal extended family? In Shooting the Family, twelve authors investigate the transfigured role of the family in a transnational world in which intercultural values are negotiated through mass media like film and television, as well as through particularistic media like home movies and videos. "Shooting the Family" has a double meaning. On the one hand, this book claims that the family is under pressure from the forces of globalization and migration; it is the family that risks being shot to pieces. On the other hand, family matters of all kinds, including family values, are increasingly being constructed and refigured in a mediated form. The audiovisual family has become an important medium for intercultural affairs - this is a family that is being re-established as a place of security and comfort in times of upheaval; it is the family shot by cameras that register and simultaneously create new family values. This title is available in the OAPEN Library - http://www.oapen.org.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt46n0d7
Ficino, Diacceto and Michelangelo’s Presentation Drawings from:
The Making of the Humanities
Author(s) van den Doel Marieke
Abstract: The Florentine philosopher Marsilio Ficino (1433-1499) was one of the first scholars who suggested that painting, which was generally regarded as a craft, should be included among the Liberal Arts. His main work,
Platonic Theology(1482), compared his own time to a Golden Age that ‘has brought back to light the Liberal Arts which had almost been extinct: Grammar, Poetry, Rhetoric, Painting, Architecture, Music and the ancient art of singing to the Orphic Lyre’.² Ficino not only replaced logic with poetry in thetrivium, but formulated an almost completely newquadrivium, removing geometry, arithmetic and astronomy, in favor of painting
Giordano Bruno and Metaphor from:
The Making of the Humanities
Author(s) Gatti Hilary
Abstract: Giordano Bruno was born in Nola, near Naples, in 1548, and died in Rome in 1600, burnt at the stake as a heretic. That means he was born only five years after the first publication of Copernicus’s
De revolutionibusin 1543, and only thirty-odd years after Martin Luther’s excommunication from the Catholic church had divided Europe and its culture into two militantly hostile factions. During the second half of the sixteenth century, in a lifetime of wandering through the cultural capitals of an often blood-stained Europe, Bruno was able to witness first hand, as few of his contemporaries could do,
‘In Erudition There Is No Heresy’. from:
The Making of the Humanities
Author(s) Schmidt Bernward
Abstract: For a long time, historical research has stuck to these stereotyped paradigms,¹ and only a few scholars have paid attention to intellectual life in Rome,²
Origins and Principles. from:
The Making of the Humanities
Author(s) Esteve Cesc
Abstract: In his ‘Essay upon the Epic Poetry of the European Nations’, which first appeared in London in 1727, Voltaire reproaches ‘the greatest part of the critics [who] mistake commonly the beginning of an art, for the principles of the art itself’ and complains about their tendency to believe ‘that everything must be, by its own nature, what it was when contrived at first’.¹ Voltaire understands that, since all the inventions of art change because fancy and custom differ in time and from one nation to another, critics should find the nature and eternal rules of epic poetry in those features
Manuscript Hunting and the Challenge of Textual Variance in Late Seventeenth-Century Icelandic Studies from:
The Making of the Humanities
Author(s) Jónsson Már
Abstract: The fervent collecting of ancient and medieval manuscripts – in Italy and Greece from the late fourteenth century, in France, Germany and England from the early fifteenth century, and in Spain and Iceland from the late sixteenth century onwards – resulted not only in the accumulation of new texts and information. It was also a reason for perplexity as scholars struggled to design methods for sifting evidence, for defining options, and for making choices concerning the texts they wished to use or publish, their struggle at times ending in despair and exhaustion. As more and more manuscripts were brought to
The ‘Rules of Critique’. from:
The Making of the Humanities
Author(s) Pécharman Martine
Abstract: The decree concerning the edition and the use of sacred texts adopted by the Council of Trent in its fourth session on 8 April 1546 was sometimes understood as prohibiting any emendation of the Vulgate version of the Scripture. The Synod demanded that the Vulgate be considered
authenticin all liturgic matters, on account of its long-standing usage and approbation in the Catholic Church. By such an ordaining, did the Council only attempt to secure the authority of the Vulgate in the doctrinal controversies, or did it rather aim at condemning corrections of the standard Latin version introduced in conformity
INTRODUCTION. from:
The Children's Table
Abstract: As anyone who has attended a Thanksgiving dinner can attest, the children’s table is not usually an A-list destination. Denied the good china, seated at a wobbly folding table, placed out of earshot of the juicy adult gossip, the guests at the children’s table know that they occupy a marginal space. In many ways, the children’s table is an apt metaphor for the role childhood studies has played in the humanities and, more discomfortingly perhaps, for the role the humanities sometimes seem to play within the academy. Yet, as in many marginalized spaces, there can be an intense sense of
The Prepolitical Child of Child-Centered Jurisprudence from:
The Children's Table
Author(s) Appell Annette Ruth
Abstract: Childhood studies scholarship has revealed that childhood, the category that holds, defines, and governs children, is to be a social construct contingent on time and place.¹ While young children are, generally speaking, vulnerable and dependent, the length, contours, and extent of that dependency, as well as the assignment of children to dependency, vary greatly across time, nation, geography, and race.² This central insight, that childhood is not natural, has yet to gain currency in legal studies. Although legal scholars have developed critical jurisprudence regarding race and gender, illustrating how these seemingly natural categories are socio-legal constructions that create and maintain
Childhood of the Race: from:
The Children's Table
Author(s) Hodgson Lucia
Abstract: The popular defense of processing children under eighteen in the adult criminal justice system instead of the juvenile justice system turns on the nature of the offense: children who commit adult crimes should do adult time. This position highlights the ways in which American cultural constructions of the child are not exclusively child based. That is to say, adult constructions of the child often do not correspond to what children themselves say and do. Paradoxically, children can lose their child status when they do not act
like children. The definitions of the child that inform academic inquiry and social policy
“So Wicked”: from:
The Children's Table
Author(s) Bell Sophie
Abstract: After decades of critical skepticism, studies of both sentimentalism and childhood are becoming thriving areas of scholarly inquiry and analysis. In Hildegard Hoeller’s recent assessment, the study of sentiment is “cooking on all burners,” having overcome a century of marginality in the American literary canon to become a nimbly theorized, richly interdisciplinary body of work.¹ Her review of new scholarship finds sentimentality finally treated “as a central concept in American culture, the very vehicle through which Americans imagined themselves and defined their
identity as a family, class, race, gender, or nation.” Far from the masculine American literary canon’s shrinking girl
Trans(cending)gender through Childhood from:
The Children's Table
Author(s) Honeyman Susan
Abstract: If one is not born a woman, as Simone de Beauvoir and Monique Wittig so famously argue, then one is not really born a girl or boy either.¹ In fact, one is not necessarily born a child. Ever since Philippe Ariès posited childhood as an invention of modernity, childhood studies has argued for recognizing the state of prolonged protection (and sometimes fetishization) generally ascribed to Western youth as relatively constructed, class bound, and historically varied. Most of the world’s young can’t afford what many in affluent nations take for granted as universal: early years of total dependence, security, innocence, extended
In the Archives of Childhood from:
The Children's Table
Author(s) Sánchez-Eppler Karen
Abstract: In this chapter I argue that the ideas, practices, and institutions of historical preservation reverberate with conceptions of childhood. I find these connections to be mutually illuminating, productive not only for the comparatively new field of childhood studies but also for the many disciplinary and institutional structures through which we have tried to locate origins and to access, understand, preserve, and recall a time that is gone. For scholarship in the humanities the “archival turn” proves to have much in common with the study of childhood: both elaborate the repositories of our cultural and personal pasts. In many ways, for
CHAPTER ELEVEN Keats and the Ardor of the Pursuer from:
Poetry as Survival
Abstract: Born in 1795, Keats was among the younger generation of Romantic poets who grew up when Wordsworth’s influence was dominant. He came from a lower-middle-class family (his father ran a livery stable), and he had no prospects of higher education. At the age of sixteen, he was apprenticed to an apothecary-surgeon and later studied medicine at Guy’s and St. Thomas’s hospitals in London. Our contemporary notion of a surgeon as a highly trained specialist is not appropriate to Keats’s prospect. In his time, a surgeon was a medically trained person whose skills seldom went beyond setting broken bones and lancing
CHAPTER THIRTEEN Dickinson and the Brain’s Haunted Corridors from:
Poetry as Survival
Abstract: Emily Dickinson (1830–1886) could well be the ultimate poet of the personal lyric. No lyric poet has been her equal for the intensity and variety of subjective states dramatized. She has written great poems of grief, longing, wonder, loneliness, fear, love, madness, joy, anger, ecstasy, solitude, despair, desire. She has written wonderfully about the great mysteries of time and death, and those imaginings that seem to cancel time and death: eternity and immortality.
CHAPTER FOURTEEN Wilfred Owen and the Horrors of War from:
Poetry as Survival
Abstract: In Wilfred Owen’s time, during the First World War, they called it “shell shock.” In the Second World War, it would be called “battle fatigue.” It was only in the aftermath of the Vietnam War that the term “post-traumatic stress disorder” became established as a way to speak of the tens of thousands of Vietnam veterans whose minds and lives were permanently altered by their exposure to the violence of combat.
Book Title: Southern Masculinity-Perspectives on Manhood in the South since Reconstruction
Publisher: University of Georgia Press
Author(s): Friend Craig Thompson
Abstract: The follow-up to the critically acclaimed collection Southern Manhood: Perspectives on Masculinity in the Old South (Georgia, 2004), Southern Masculinity explores the contours of southern male identity from Reconstruction to the present. Twelve case studies document the changing definitions of southern masculine identity as understood in conjunction with identities based on race, gender, age, sexuality, and geography. After the Civil War, southern men crafted notions of manhood in opposition to northern ideals of masculinity and as counterpoint to southern womanhood. At the same time, manliness in the South--as understood by individuals and within communities--retained and transformed antebellum conceptions of honor and mastery. This collection examines masculinity with respect to Reconstruction, the New South, racism, southern womanhood, the Sunbelt, gay rights, and the rise of the Christian Right. Familiar figures such as Arthur Ashe are investigated from fresh angles, while other essays plumb new areas such as the womanless wedding and Cherokee masculinity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt46nj70
The Price of Eternal Honor: from:
Southern Masculinity
Author(s) Creech Joe
Abstract: It is easy to imagine American evangelical Christianity and the ideals of southern manhood in opposition. Nineteenth-century evangelicalism, in the North and the South, has typically been portrayed as women’s domain: women were more in attendance at congregational activities, and pastors bent over backward to accommodate theological ideals to feminine sentimentality even as the culture at large considered women more naturally inclined to spiritual and moral matters than men. Men, in contrast, and especially in the South, were beholden to a code of honor that, among other things, encouraged violence—martial, retributive, or vigilant—gambling, blood sports, sowing wild oats,
In Defense of “This Great Family Government and Estate”: from:
Southern Masculinity
Author(s) Stremlau Rose
Abstract: In 1896, Samuel H. Mayes wrote an impassioned letter in which he described his countrymen as the quintessence of virtuous, modern manhood. He used evocative words with strong connotations to convey his pride: these men were “sober,” “industrious,” and “independent.” He explained that although the common men he lived among humbly “earned [their] daily bread by honest labor upon the soil,” each was “an equal participant in God’s great gift of liberty.” Mayes went on to assure his readers that, in time, the men of their nation could become upright citizens in the model that he had just described. He
Mapping Placelore: from:
The Bioregional Imagination
Author(s) CUSICK CHRISTINE
Abstract: The stories of ireland’s Connemara bogland bear a formidable and sometimes inchoate legacy for how humans dwell in place. Tim Robinson’s ambition reveals an authentic desire to honor the complexities of these histories, finding their depth in both the human and nonhuman layers of a place that is too often held hostage to narratives of colonial conquest and rebellion. Born in Yorkshire, England, trained at Cambridge as a mathematician, experienced in the London art scene as a visual artist, Tim Robinson, along with his partner, moved to the Aran Islands in 1972 in an effort to find the sustenance that
The Nature of Region: from:
The Bioregional Imagination
Author(s) RYDEN KENT C.
Abstract: The line between the idea of cultural region, generally delineated according to human criteria, and ecological region and bioregion, defined by natural factors, would seem to be fairly sharp and clear. Sometimes, though, that line becomes blurred in ways that force closer examination of these spatial concepts and the ways that they relate to each other. For example, northern New England can be seen as a distinct literary subregion distinguished by the differences that writers more or less self-consciously draw between dominant tropes of New England regional identity as a whole and the ways of life that they feel characterize
Book Title: When Our Words Return-Writing, Hearing, and Remembering Oral Traditions from Alasak and the Yukon
Publisher: Utah State University Press
Author(s): Schneider William
Abstract: The title to this interdisciplinary collection draws on the Yupik Eskimo belief that seals, fish, and other game are precious gifts that, when treated with respect and care, will return to be hunted again. Just so, if oral traditions are told faithfully and respectfully, they will return to benefit future generations. The contributors to this volume are concerned with the interpretation and representation of oral narrative and how it is shaped by its audience and the time, place, and cultural context of the narration. Thus, oral traditions are understood as a series of dialogues between tradition bearers and their listeners, including those who record, write, and interpret.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt46nrcm
With a Vision beyond Our Immediate Needs: from:
When Our Words Return
Author(s) Mather Elsie
Abstract: In the early 1970s when bilingual schools started in the Bethel area, I was hired by what was then the Alaska State-Operated Schools to teach a bilingual kindergarten class. In the late 1970s, I worked at the Kuskokwim Community College as a language specialist and also did some part-time teaching in Yupʹik
On Shaky Ground: from:
When Our Words Return
Author(s) Morrow Phyllis
Abstract: Since the early 1980s, Elsie Mather and I have collaborated on the transcription, translation, and representation of Central Alaskan Yupʹik stories. She was born and raised in the Kuskokwim delta, where her education started—and continues—with Yupʹik oral tradition. She spends much of her time in subsistence pursuits; she has also been a nurse, a teacher, a lecturer, and an author of high-school and college textbooks. Her grounding in the oral tradition puts her book learning in a certain perspective. I, on the other hand, was born on the East Coast of the United States, and my education was
The Weight of Tradition and the Writerʹs Work from:
When Our Words Return
Author(s) Odden Mary
Abstract: Nearly the last thing my father said to me, certainly the last thing I remember, was ʺYou know what I mean, Mim.ʺ Mim was a nickname he had for me, a special name between the two of us, reserved for the times when we would sit in the back door of the family grocery store and watch the eastern Oregon thunderstorms roll across the sky, or when I had just won a ribbon on my horse—something extraordinary like that. My mom never called me Mim, and Dad wouldnʹt have used Mim in the third person, as in ʺMim did
1 Unearthing Class War from:
The Archaeology of Class War
Author(s) LARKIN KARIN
Abstract: At Ludlow, a granite coal miner gazes resolutely across the windswept plains of Colorado. Beside him, a woman in classical drapery clutches her baby with one hand and rests her head on her other hand in grief (Figure 1.1). Once they gazed up into mountain valleys teeming with activity. Great coal tipples loomed over miners’ homes shrouded in the acid smoke of coke ovens. In recent times they have stared up at crumbling foundations, sealed mine shafts, and red mounds of bricks that were once coke ovens. For eighty-five years the couple stood sentinel in their grief over the site
11 Teaching Class Conflict: from:
The Archaeology of Class War
Author(s) CASELLA ELEANOR CONLIN
Abstract: Like many good collaborations, this chapter began in a pub. When the 2005 Society for Historical Archaeology meetings were held in York, England, the two of us took the opportunity to get in a good visit. As newly minted faculty teaching historical archaeology, we spent much of our time talking about teaching, discussing students, and comparing notes about pedagogy as viewed from different sides of the Atlantic. During one of these meandering conversations, our discussion turned to the Colorado Coalfield War Archaeology Project. In the field, only one of us (Clark) had intersected with this research, once at the inception
Book Title: Hysteria Complicated by Ecstasy-The Case of Nanette Leroux
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): GOLDSTEIN JAN
Abstract: Filled with intimate details about Nanette's behavior and extensive quotations of her utterances, the case is noteworthy for the sexual references that contemporaries did not recognize as such; for its focus on the difference between biological and social time; and for Nanette's fascination with the commodities available in the region's nascent marketplace. Goldstein's introduction brilliantly situates the text in its multiple contexts, examines it from the standpoint of early nineteenth-century medicine, and uses the insights of Foucault and Freud to craft a twenty-first-century interpretation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt4cgcrt
Chapter 3 MAKING SENSE OF THE CASE from:
Hysteria Complicated by Ecstasy
Abstract: The striking fact is the agreement of all the participants about the cause of Nanette’s illness. The case study mentions the prurient actions of the garde champêtre at least five times. A fresh glimpse of the offender or an overheard account of the offense suffices to provoke a relapse in Nanette. Even after her recovery in
Observations of Nanette Leroux: from:
Hysteria Complicated by Ecstasy
Abstract: Nanette Leroux, eighteen years old, with red hair, freckled skin, bright eyes, and a sanguine, bilious temperament,¹ had menstruated for the first time at the age of fifteen and a half. Since then her periods had continued, though with occasional irregularities and even with interruptions lasting three or four months. She was a simple village girl. She had, however, received some education, having spent a year in Aix[-les-Bains] learning to read and write at the convent of the sisters of Saint-Joseph.
CHAPTER 3 Plymouth: from:
Seasons of Misery
Abstract: Although William Bradford’s
Of Plymouth Plantation covers almost fifty years of the Separatist group’s history, its most iconic passages refer to the hardships of the group’s first two years in the New World.¹ This is a time so deeply enshrined in the national mythos as to constitute the public meaning of the word “Pilgrim.” What did Pilgrims do? They suffered and persevered. They came to a howling wilderness in search of religious freedom and, once there, passed through trial and peril but never lost faith in each other or in their God. Pilgrims survived. The mythic aura around Pilgrim suffering
Book Title: Marrow of Human Experience, The-Essays on Folklore by William A. Wilson
Publisher: Utah State University Press
Author(s): Call Diane
Abstract: Composed over several decades, the essays here are remarkably fresh and relevant. They offer instruction for the student just beginning the study of folklore as well as repeated value for the many established scholars who continue to wrestle with issues that Wilson has addressed. As his work has long offered insight on critical matters-nationalism, genre, belief, the relationship of folklore to other disciplines in the humanities and arts, the currency of legend, the significance of humor as a cultural expression, and so forth-so his recent writing, in its reflexive approach to narrative and storytelling, illuminates today's paradigms. Its notable autobiographical dimension, long an element of Wilson's work, employs family and local lore to draw conclusions of more universal significance. Another way to think of it is that newer folklorists are catching up with Wilson and what he has been about for some time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt4cgkmk
“Something There Is That Doesn’t Love a Wall” from:
Marrow of Human Experience, The
Abstract: When Bert Wilson in 1991 delivered this talk, “‘Something There Is That Doesn’t Love a Wall,’” the Folklore Society of Utah was holding its annual meeting in conjunction with that of the Utah State Historical Society, an arrangement that had then continued for twenty years. Bert had been the driving force behind this supportive agreement. At that time, the Folklore Society had a tiny membership and few resources, but the quality and interest of the folklore session made it annually one of the most popular and best attended at the meeting. The hospitality of historical society director Charles Peterson and
The Folk Speak: from:
Marrow of Human Experience, The
Abstract: One of my first introductions to folklore studies was attending the Fife Folklore Conference at Utah State University (USU) as an impressionable undergraduate student. I had been told by one of my professors at Brigham Young University (BYU) that I needed to introduce myself to Bert Wilson, who at that time was director of the folklore program at USU. I made the introduction, and during lunch, Bert sat down with me and talked about folklore and the fact that he was going to move to Provo to become chair of the English department at BYU. I became excited to know
Documenting Folklore from:
Marrow of Human Experience, The
Abstract: A series of serendipitous events led me to Bert Wilson’s Introduction to Folklore class in fall semester 1977, and by the end of the semester I wanted to be a folklorist. I succeeded and became the first permanent archivist in the BYU Folklore Archives, since renamed the William A. Wilson Folklore Archives. Like so many others, I owe my profession to Bert’s influence. Bert once told me that he sometimes thought he should have been a full-time archivist rather than the myriad of roles he played throughout his career. I’m glad that wasn’t the path Bert chose. For despite his
The Study of Mormon Folklore: from:
Marrow of Human Experience, The
Abstract: Although my associations with Bert Wilson have a timeless quality, I know that our friendship was greatly deepened by the opportunity for long talks as we participated in the Fife Folklore Conference at Utah State University in 1979. Bert, his scholarly work, and our long conversations that summer are a part of who I am and how I try to think about folklore, especially the religious and spiritual dimensions of the topic that so interest both of us.
Personal Narratives: from:
Marrow of Human Experience, The
Abstract: The first time I ever heard Bert Wilson tell one of his mother’s stories about growing up in Riddyville, Idaho, was around a campfire up Logan Canyon at the beginning of an early Fife Folklore Conference. As the flames illuminated his face in the chill June twilight, Bert’s voice carried us back to another time and place where young girls rode horses to school every day and the sweet smell of baking bread frequently filled the log cabin she called home. What I remember most about that night was the way all of us were enraptured by the power of
1. The fundamental problem of regulating technology from:
Professionalism in the Information and Communication Technology Industry
Author(s) Kirby Michael
Abstract: The claim was faintly preposterous, given that the Second World War grew out of the first, and bore remarkable parallels to other conflicts dating back to the Peloponnesian Wars in ancient times. All history, and all technology, grow out of the giant strides that preceded their current manifestations. We
5. What is an ICT professional anyway? from:
Professionalism in the Information and Communication Technology Industry
Author(s) Boughton Clive
Abstract: I want to start off by describing some of the types of people that I have met/observed during my time in the systems/software industry and also within academia. The type classifications are mine, are not formal, and carry no essential meaning other than
CHAPTER TWO Evil as the Good in Disguise: from:
Moral Evil
Abstract: A victim of unspeakable torture and humiliation, having borne witness to a mass slaughter in which he took unwitting part, the once devout and still compassionate Emilo Sandoz is a broken man by the time Vincenzo Giuliani, the father general of the Society of Jesus, interviews him. Sent to the planet Rakhat along with seven others to investigate the possibility of intelligent life, Sandoz is the sole survivor in a hopeful mission that unravels into catastrophe for everyone involved. Mary Doria Russell’s novel about a believer forsaken by a God in whom his faith had never before wavered is tragic
CHAPTER TWO Evil as the Good in Disguise: from:
Moral Evil
Abstract: A victim of unspeakable torture and humiliation, having borne witness to a mass slaughter in which he took unwitting part, the once devout and still compassionate Emilo Sandoz is a broken man by the time Vincenzo Giuliani, the father general of the Society of Jesus, interviews him. Sent to the planet Rakhat along with seven others to investigate the possibility of intelligent life, Sandoz is the sole survivor in a hopeful mission that unravels into catastrophe for everyone involved. Mary Doria Russell’s novel about a believer forsaken by a God in whom his faith had never before wavered is tragic
Introduction from:
Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Butchart Garnet C.
Abstract: To philosophize is to communicate philosophically, and to communicate philosophically is to impart the wisdom of which philosophy speaks and which is spoken at the same time. Would philosophy—ever universalizing and universalized in its claims—be able to stand fast as what it claims to be if it did not impart anything, if it refused to communicate, if it simply remained silent? Even if philosophy managed somehow to keep silent, could this silence be anything other than philosophy’s choice of expression, an expression wisely chosen by philosophy to keep its silence? And could this silence be anything other than
6 The Conditions of the Question: from:
Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Deleuze Gilles
Abstract: Perhaps the question “What is philosophy?” can only be posed late in life, when old age has come, and with it the time to speak in concrete terms. It is a question one poses when one no longer has anything to ask for, but its consequences can be considerable. One was asking the question before, one never ceased asking it, but it was too artificial, too abstract; one expounded and dominated the question, more than being grabbed by it. There are cases in which old age bestows not an eternal youth, but on the contrary a sovereign freedom, a pure
13 The A Priori Foundation of Communication and the Foundation of the Humanities from:
Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Apel Karl-Otto
Abstract: I do not believe that the question concerning the relation between science and the humanities is any more settled, or more clearly established, today than when it was brought to the fore in the days of Dilthey and Neo-Kantianism. It is true that, from time to time, speakers at congresses affirm that the old controversy between understanding and explanation has been overcome and rendered obsolete. And their audience may applaud their appeal not to split the unity of science, not to re-establish
21 Subjectivity in Language from:
Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Benveniste Emile
Abstract: If language is, as they say, the instrument of communication, to what does it owe this property? The question may cause surprise, as does everything that seems to challenge an obvious fact, but it is sometimes useful to require proof of the obvious. Two answers come to mind. The one would be that language is
in factemployed as the instrument of communication, probably because men have not found a better or more effective way in which to communicate. This amounts to stating what one wishes to understand. One might also think of replying that language has such qualities as
24 Differance from:
Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Derrida Jacques
Abstract: The verb “to differ” [
différer] seems to differ from itself. On the one hand, it indicates difference as distinction, inequality, or discernibility; on the other, it expresses the interposition of delay, the interval of aspacingandtemporalizingthat puts off until “later” what is presently denied, the possible that is presently impossible. Sometimes thedifferentand sometimes thedeferredcorrespond [in French] to the verb “to differ.” This correlation, however, is not simply one between act and object, cause and effect, or primordial and derived.
26 The Reason of the Gift from:
Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Marion Jean-Luc
Abstract: We give without account. We give without accounting, in every sense of the word. First, because we give
without ceasing. We give in the same way we breathe, every moment, in every circumstance, from morning until evening. Not a single day passes without our having given, in one form or another, something to someone, even if we rarely, if ever, “give everything.”¹ Also, we give without keeping account,without measure, because giving implies that one gives at a loss, or at least without taking into account either one’s time or one’s efforts: one simply does not keep account of what
27 The Madness of Economic Reason: from:
Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Derrida Jacques
Abstract: What does “at the same time” mean to say? Where could one ever place oneself in order to say “at the same time”? And to say what is meant, for example in some language or another, by “at the same time”?
30 The Paradox of Sovereignty | Form of Law | The Ban and the Wolf from:
Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Agamben Giorgio
Abstract: 1.1. The paradox of sovereignty consists in the fact the sovereign is, at the same time, outside and inside the juridical order. If the sovereign is truly the one to whom the juridical order grants the power of proclaiming a state of exception and, therefore, of suspending the order’s own validity, then “the sovereign stands outside the juridical order and, nevertheless, belongs to it, since it is up to him to decide if the constitution is to be suspended
in toto” (Schmitt,Politische Theologie, p. 13). The specification that the sovereign is “at the same timeoutside and inside the
Book Title: Dictionary of Untranslatables-A Philosophical Lexicon
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Wood Michael
Abstract: Covers close to 400 important philosophical, literary, and political terms that defy easy translation between languages and culturesIncludes terms from more than a dozen languagesEntries written by more than 150 distinguished thinkersAvailable in English for the first time, with new contributions by Judith Butler, Daniel Heller-Roazen, Ben Kafka, Kevin McLaughlin, Kenneth Reinhard, Stella Sandford, Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak, Jane Tylus, Anthony Vidler, Susan Wolfson, Robert J. C. Young, and many moreContains extensive cross-references and bibliographiesAn invaluable resource for students and scholars across the humanities
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hhntn
Book Title: Dictionary of Untranslatables-A Philosophical Lexicon
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Wood Michael
Abstract: Covers close to 400 important philosophical, literary, and political terms that defy easy translation between languages and culturesIncludes terms from more than a dozen languagesEntries written by more than 150 distinguished thinkersAvailable in English for the first time, with new contributions by Judith Butler, Daniel Heller-Roazen, Ben Kafka, Kevin McLaughlin, Kenneth Reinhard, Stella Sandford, Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak, Jane Tylus, Anthony Vidler, Susan Wolfson, Robert J. C. Young, and many moreContains extensive cross-references and bibliographiesAn invaluable resource for students and scholars across the humanities
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hhntn
Book Title: Dictionary of Untranslatables-A Philosophical Lexicon
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Wood Michael
Abstract: Covers close to 400 important philosophical, literary, and political terms that defy easy translation between languages and culturesIncludes terms from more than a dozen languagesEntries written by more than 150 distinguished thinkersAvailable in English for the first time, with new contributions by Judith Butler, Daniel Heller-Roazen, Ben Kafka, Kevin McLaughlin, Kenneth Reinhard, Stella Sandford, Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak, Jane Tylus, Anthony Vidler, Susan Wolfson, Robert J. C. Young, and many moreContains extensive cross-references and bibliographiesAn invaluable resource for students and scholars across the humanities
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hhntn
Book Title: Dictionary of Untranslatables-A Philosophical Lexicon
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Wood Michael
Abstract: Covers close to 400 important philosophical, literary, and political terms that defy easy translation between languages and culturesIncludes terms from more than a dozen languagesEntries written by more than 150 distinguished thinkersAvailable in English for the first time, with new contributions by Judith Butler, Daniel Heller-Roazen, Ben Kafka, Kevin McLaughlin, Kenneth Reinhard, Stella Sandford, Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak, Jane Tylus, Anthony Vidler, Susan Wolfson, Robert J. C. Young, and many moreContains extensive cross-references and bibliographiesAn invaluable resource for students and scholars across the humanities
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hhntn
Book Title: Dictionary of Untranslatables-A Philosophical Lexicon
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Wood Michael
Abstract: Covers close to 400 important philosophical, literary, and political terms that defy easy translation between languages and culturesIncludes terms from more than a dozen languagesEntries written by more than 150 distinguished thinkersAvailable in English for the first time, with new contributions by Judith Butler, Daniel Heller-Roazen, Ben Kafka, Kevin McLaughlin, Kenneth Reinhard, Stella Sandford, Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak, Jane Tylus, Anthony Vidler, Susan Wolfson, Robert J. C. Young, and many moreContains extensive cross-references and bibliographiesAn invaluable resource for students and scholars across the humanities
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hhntn
Book Title: Dictionary of Untranslatables-A Philosophical Lexicon
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Wood Michael
Abstract: Covers close to 400 important philosophical, literary, and political terms that defy easy translation between languages and culturesIncludes terms from more than a dozen languagesEntries written by more than 150 distinguished thinkersAvailable in English for the first time, with new contributions by Judith Butler, Daniel Heller-Roazen, Ben Kafka, Kevin McLaughlin, Kenneth Reinhard, Stella Sandford, Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak, Jane Tylus, Anthony Vidler, Susan Wolfson, Robert J. C. Young, and many moreContains extensive cross-references and bibliographiesAn invaluable resource for students and scholars across the humanities
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hhntn
Book Title: Dictionary of Untranslatables-A Philosophical Lexicon
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Wood Michael
Abstract: Covers close to 400 important philosophical, literary, and political terms that defy easy translation between languages and culturesIncludes terms from more than a dozen languagesEntries written by more than 150 distinguished thinkersAvailable in English for the first time, with new contributions by Judith Butler, Daniel Heller-Roazen, Ben Kafka, Kevin McLaughlin, Kenneth Reinhard, Stella Sandford, Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak, Jane Tylus, Anthony Vidler, Susan Wolfson, Robert J. C. Young, and many moreContains extensive cross-references and bibliographiesAn invaluable resource for students and scholars across the humanities
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hhntn
Book Title: Dictionary of Untranslatables-A Philosophical Lexicon
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Wood Michael
Abstract: Covers close to 400 important philosophical, literary, and political terms that defy easy translation between languages and culturesIncludes terms from more than a dozen languagesEntries written by more than 150 distinguished thinkersAvailable in English for the first time, with new contributions by Judith Butler, Daniel Heller-Roazen, Ben Kafka, Kevin McLaughlin, Kenneth Reinhard, Stella Sandford, Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak, Jane Tylus, Anthony Vidler, Susan Wolfson, Robert J. C. Young, and many moreContains extensive cross-references and bibliographiesAn invaluable resource for students and scholars across the humanities
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hhntn
Book Title: Dictionary of Untranslatables-A Philosophical Lexicon
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Wood Michael
Abstract: Covers close to 400 important philosophical, literary, and political terms that defy easy translation between languages and culturesIncludes terms from more than a dozen languagesEntries written by more than 150 distinguished thinkersAvailable in English for the first time, with new contributions by Judith Butler, Daniel Heller-Roazen, Ben Kafka, Kevin McLaughlin, Kenneth Reinhard, Stella Sandford, Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak, Jane Tylus, Anthony Vidler, Susan Wolfson, Robert J. C. Young, and many moreContains extensive cross-references and bibliographiesAn invaluable resource for students and scholars across the humanities
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hhntn
Book Title: Dictionary of Untranslatables-A Philosophical Lexicon
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Wood Michael
Abstract: Covers close to 400 important philosophical, literary, and political terms that defy easy translation between languages and culturesIncludes terms from more than a dozen languagesEntries written by more than 150 distinguished thinkersAvailable in English for the first time, with new contributions by Judith Butler, Daniel Heller-Roazen, Ben Kafka, Kevin McLaughlin, Kenneth Reinhard, Stella Sandford, Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak, Jane Tylus, Anthony Vidler, Susan Wolfson, Robert J. C. Young, and many moreContains extensive cross-references and bibliographiesAn invaluable resource for students and scholars across the humanities
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hhntn
Book Title: Dictionary of Untranslatables-A Philosophical Lexicon
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Wood Michael
Abstract: Covers close to 400 important philosophical, literary, and political terms that defy easy translation between languages and culturesIncludes terms from more than a dozen languagesEntries written by more than 150 distinguished thinkersAvailable in English for the first time, with new contributions by Judith Butler, Daniel Heller-Roazen, Ben Kafka, Kevin McLaughlin, Kenneth Reinhard, Stella Sandford, Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak, Jane Tylus, Anthony Vidler, Susan Wolfson, Robert J. C. Young, and many moreContains extensive cross-references and bibliographiesAn invaluable resource for students and scholars across the humanities
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hhntn
Chapter 2 Landscapes of Childhood from:
Translating Childhoods
Abstract: Hot summer nights in New England, circa 1970. I was ten years old, and school was out, so I got to play outside after supper until dark. Most of my siblings and the rest of the neighborhood kids were there. We sorted ourselves at times in pairs matched by age and gender; across these Irish- and German-Catholic families of five, six, eight, and ten kids, we could always find some age-mates. Other times we collapsed into mixed groups with girls and boys of different ages to play games like Kickball, Spud, and Kick the Can.¹ Kick the Can was my
Chapter 7 Translating Childhoods from:
Translating Childhoods
Abstract: There are many ways to understand children’s work as translators and interpreters for their families. We can focus on the burdens it sometimes places on youth and on how stress affects children’s growth and development. Turning this perspective around, we can highlight the cognitive, social, emotional, and linguistic benefits these experiences may offer to youth. We can either reject children’s involvement as a form of youth exploitation or applaud youths’ contributions to homes, schools, communities and society. We can talk about character formation, skills acquisition, and the pathways that are opened or closed through engagement in these activities, or we
Talking Back from:
Theorizing Scriptures
Abstract: The baseline center-ing function and operations of “scriptures” notwithstanding, it is important to acknowledge, as have the essayists in this section, that “scriptures” are used for different purposes in different situations and settings in ongoing and in special terms. The different uses in the different settings and situations may sometimes represent resistance to and undermining of the center-ing force; they may also simply reflect in different ways the reality and power of the center. These differences are the stuff of ongoing social-cultural dynamics—differentiation, conflict, negotiation, formation, deformation, reformation.¹
11 Conjuring Scriptures and Engendering Healing Traditions from:
Theorizing Scriptures
Author(s) CHIREAU YVONNE P.
Abstract: There are numerous meanings that may be given to textuality using comparative approaches, and the religions of the Afro-Atlantic world provide an especially rich terrain for conceptualizing the phenomena of “scriptures” as it appears in the experiences of historically dominated peoples. So in the following discussion I want to put forward some examples from black American religions that demonstrate how practitioners make use of “scriptures,” sometimes in unique ways.
17 Differences at Play in the Fields of the Lord from:
Theorizing Scriptures
Author(s) HARDING SUSAN F.
Abstract: The Arminian pulse of reversible, repeatable salvation punctuated the testimonies and lives of Pentecostal preachers Jimmy Swaggart and Jim and Tammy Faye Bakker with episodes of moral backsliding, devil wrestling, and deep spiritual crisis. The content of Swaggart’s preaching was marbled with fundamentalism in regard to morality and the end times, but his histrionic preaching style was hard-core
Talking Back from:
Theorizing Scriptures
Abstract: Yes, yes, the social psychology, the power issues and dynamics—how could these matters not be considered as part of the probing of “scriptures”? These are matters having to do not with the one-time explosive moment in which the originary impulse behind the invention of scriptures is revealed. No, what has been addressed in the foregoing essays are some of the ongoing historical and new and widely varied social-psychological needs and power dynamics and issues that focus on peoples’ situations.
25 Powerful Words: from:
Theorizing Scriptures
Author(s) FIORENZA ELISABETH SCHÜSSLER
Abstract: The inauguration of the Institute for Signifying Scriptures (ISS), which has been initiated by Professor Wimbush, is a historic event that calls for celebration and critical reflection. This international institute is historic because it programmatically intends to study the signifying of scriptures by subaltern peoples rather than to focus on the biblical text and its ancient contexts. At the same time this event calls for critical reflection because the ISS intends to do so within the disciplinary parameters and interdisciplinary opportunities of the university. It will not come as a surprise that I engage in such a critical reflection on
26 Racial and Colonial Politics of the Modern Object of Knowledge: from:
Theorizing Scriptures
Author(s) PARKER JOSEPH
Abstract: How might we reconsider the topic of “scriptures” in the midst of what the African historian Steven Feierman has called the “general epistemological crisis affecting all the social sciences and humanities”?¹ We find ourselves at sea in this crisis every time we write, not just when explicitly describing the other, and can only navigate its politics successfully if we recognize the dangers of what Emmanuel Levinas termed an ontological imperialism where otherness vanishes as part of the same of modernity.²
Introduction: from:
After Representation?
Author(s) SPARGO R. CLIFTON
Abstract: A Holocaust literature that took its imperatives from the existential conditions of the camps would begin always as at the end of culture, in a world of dying, degradation, and atrocity wherein all books and learning exist but as a faint memory of what it meant to be human in some other time, some other place. For Elie Wiesel, there is in fact no other condition from which a literature about the Holocaust might begin, which is to say, there is no way of speaking about the Holocaust in books except from within a state of historically conditioned anxiety about
1 The Holocaust, History Writing, and the Role of Fiction from:
After Representation?
Author(s) HARTMAN GEOFFREY
Abstract: Once upon a time, history and legend formed a single, relatively consistent narrative. Consistent, at least, after a period of redaction and centuries of interpretation. Hebrew Scripture may have started as a diverse bundle of oral or written traditions, but these were unified—not without leaving traces of difference—by an editorial and canonical process.
10 Reading Heart of Darkness after the Holocaust from:
After Representation?
Author(s) EAGLESTONE ROBERT
Abstract: There is an unavoidable
Nachträglichkeit(indignity) in reading after the Holocaust. As Omer Bartov writes, the Holocaust has “projected its impact both forward and backward in time, an explosion of destructive energy at the heart of Western civilization that compels us to rethink our assumptions about the nature of humanity and culture, history and progress, politics and morality.”¹ Bartov’s insight about the temporality of our reflections on the Holocaust has been realized by a number of contemporary historians who have taken concepts from the well-developed historiography of the Holocaust and, with due caution, used them to illuminate genocides, atrocities, and
Introduction: from:
After Representation?
Author(s) SPARGO R. CLIFTON
Abstract: A Holocaust literature that took its imperatives from the existential conditions of the camps would begin always as at the end of culture, in a world of dying, degradation, and atrocity wherein all books and learning exist but as a faint memory of what it meant to be human in some other time, some other place. For Elie Wiesel, there is in fact no other condition from which a literature about the Holocaust might begin, which is to say, there is no way of speaking about the Holocaust in books except from within a state of historically conditioned anxiety about
1 The Holocaust, History Writing, and the Role of Fiction from:
After Representation?
Author(s) HARTMAN GEOFFREY
Abstract: Once upon a time, history and legend formed a single, relatively consistent narrative. Consistent, at least, after a period of redaction and centuries of interpretation. Hebrew Scripture may have started as a diverse bundle of oral or written traditions, but these were unified—not without leaving traces of difference—by an editorial and canonical process.
10 Reading Heart of Darkness after the Holocaust from:
After Representation?
Author(s) EAGLESTONE ROBERT
Abstract: There is an unavoidable
Nachträglichkeit(indignity) in reading after the Holocaust. As Omer Bartov writes, the Holocaust has “projected its impact both forward and backward in time, an explosion of destructive energy at the heart of Western civilization that compels us to rethink our assumptions about the nature of humanity and culture, history and progress, politics and morality.”¹ Bartov’s insight about the temporality of our reflections on the Holocaust has been realized by a number of contemporary historians who have taken concepts from the well-developed historiography of the Holocaust and, with due caution, used them to illuminate genocides, atrocities, and
Introduction: from:
After Representation?
Author(s) SPARGO R. CLIFTON
Abstract: A Holocaust literature that took its imperatives from the existential conditions of the camps would begin always as at the end of culture, in a world of dying, degradation, and atrocity wherein all books and learning exist but as a faint memory of what it meant to be human in some other time, some other place. For Elie Wiesel, there is in fact no other condition from which a literature about the Holocaust might begin, which is to say, there is no way of speaking about the Holocaust in books except from within a state of historically conditioned anxiety about
1 The Holocaust, History Writing, and the Role of Fiction from:
After Representation?
Author(s) HARTMAN GEOFFREY
Abstract: Once upon a time, history and legend formed a single, relatively consistent narrative. Consistent, at least, after a period of redaction and centuries of interpretation. Hebrew Scripture may have started as a diverse bundle of oral or written traditions, but these were unified—not without leaving traces of difference—by an editorial and canonical process.
10 Reading Heart of Darkness after the Holocaust from:
After Representation?
Author(s) EAGLESTONE ROBERT
Abstract: There is an unavoidable
Nachträglichkeit(indignity) in reading after the Holocaust. As Omer Bartov writes, the Holocaust has “projected its impact both forward and backward in time, an explosion of destructive energy at the heart of Western civilization that compels us to rethink our assumptions about the nature of humanity and culture, history and progress, politics and morality.”¹ Bartov’s insight about the temporality of our reflections on the Holocaust has been realized by a number of contemporary historians who have taken concepts from the well-developed historiography of the Holocaust and, with due caution, used them to illuminate genocides, atrocities, and
5 The Biomedical Deconstruction of Senility and the Persistent Stigmatization of Old Age in the United States from:
Thinking About Dementia
Author(s) BALLENGER JESSE F.
Abstract: This oft-quoted characterization of the seventh and final stage of a person’s life has usually been taken as a commonplace of old age: this period has always been stigmatized. In particular, the mental losses associated with age, “second childishness and mere oblivion,” have been among the most deeply stigmatized conditions. In its frightening totality—effacing the memories and abilities that are widely seen as the very essence of personhood—senile dementia seems to taint the entire experience of aging. In its relentless inevitability, deeply associated with aging and the mere passage of time, it makes a mockery of the achievement
12 Being a Good Rōjin: from:
Thinking About Dementia
Author(s) TRAPHAGAN JOHN W.
Abstract: During the summer of 2000, six women and three men gathered at about ten o’clock in the morning at the Furiai Puraza (Contact Plaza), a senior center located in the town of Yonegawa in northern Japan. The group assembled for the first day of a cooking class that would meet six times over the following three months. As the participants, all of whom were in their late sixties and early seventies, waited for the class to commence, the director of the center spoke briefly about his hopes that all the students would learn not only to cook, but also about
The King James Bible in Early Modern Political Context from:
The King James Version at 400
Author(s) Ferrell Lori Anne
Abstract: “The Bible only,” the English churchman William Chillingworth wrote in 1638, “is the religion of Protestants.” Whether it was also the religion of England’s Protestant church is the question that prompts this essay. It is a question rarely asked. A number of recent books, shrewdly timed to take advantage of the 400th anniversary of the so-called King James Bible, have focused our attention onto that enterprise of 1611 and the processes, political and scholarly, that allowed other early modern Bibles to be rendered into English. We are now well educated in the Bible’s literary influence, reception, and modes of translation.
The King James Bible and the Language of Liturgy from:
The King James Version at 400
Author(s) Griffith-Jones Robin
Abstract: The question was properly and widely asked, during the 2011 celebration of the KJV’s quatercentenary, whether the KJV still satisfies the translators’ own aspirations. Two reservations mounted a more radical challenge: perhaps the KJV had not risen to its own ideals, even at the time. There would then be good reason to qualify the enthusiasm expressed for the KJV by its devotees.
John Speed’s “Canaan” and British Travel to Palestine: from:
The King James Version at 400
Author(s) Taylor Joan
Abstract: The Bible can create a peculiar dissonance for Christians who read it as a sacred story illuminating the relationship between God and humanity. It is not of our age. It may be prefaced, at the very beginning, with something similar to the
Star Warsfilm series: “A long time ago in a galaxy far, far away.” Or slightly more poetically one thinks of Bob Dylan’s song “Long Ago, Far Away” (1962):
Empowering Those Who Suffer Domestic Violence: from:
Fragile Dignity
Author(s) van Huffel Mary-Anne Plaatjies
Abstract: “Hello pastor, I’m Lucia…. I saw your name on the church sign. You are a woman priest. Maybe because you are a woman you can understand my problem and help me…. I haven’t talked to anyone about this for a while … but I am worried for my kids now. The problem is my husband. He beats me sometimes. Mostly he is a good man. But sometimes he becomes very angry
Empowering Those Who Suffer Domestic Violence: from:
Fragile Dignity
Author(s) van Huffel Mary-Anne Plaatjies
Abstract: “Hello pastor, I’m Lucia…. I saw your name on the church sign. You are a woman priest. Maybe because you are a woman you can understand my problem and help me…. I haven’t talked to anyone about this for a while … but I am worried for my kids now. The problem is my husband. He beats me sometimes. Mostly he is a good man. But sometimes he becomes very angry
1 Apostolic Tradition and the Form of the Gospel (1985) from:
Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: For some time now, the theme of discipleship in Mark has attracted my attention, for nowhere in the canon does a text generate in readers as much alienation from the disciples as in this Gospel (Kelber 1972; 1974; 1979; 1983). I continue to view it as a puzzle that admits of no simple or general answer. The very oddness of the theme ought to have inspired creative explorations, whereas, in fact, it has often given rise to evasive maneuvers. The elaboration of admittedly positive features of the disciples is, of course, very much to the point. But it has not
2 Interpretation of Narrative and Narrative as Interpretation: from:
Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: The art of telling stories has faithfully accompanied the human race from preliterate to postmodern times. So “natural” appears to be the impulse to narrate that one is hard put to imagine a language or culture devoid of narrative elements. The need to make scraps of life cohere in the imagination and to plot events so as to give them a semblance of coherence and sequentiality may thus reasonably be counted among the human universals. Roland Barthes was of the opinion that narrative “is simply there like life itself … international, transhistorical, transcultural” (1977, 77). Hayden White, to whom we
6 Language, Memory, and Sense Perception in the Religious and Technological Culture of Antiquity and the Middle Ages (1995) from:
Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: The two persons in whose honor this lecture is named were North American classicists of eminence who had acquired additional training in the oral traditional epics of the former Yugoslavia, an achievement unequaled among scholars of their time. Long before interdisciplinary studies had come into scholarly and curricular vogue, Milman Parry and Albert Lord had attained a literacy in comparative studies that was both severely academic and daringly imaginative. Almost singlehandedly, they initiated the distinct academic field of oral traditional literature, which concerns itself with the study of compositional, performative, and aesthetic aspects of living oral traditions and of texts
12 Orality and Biblical Scholarship: from:
Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: In keeping with developments in the human and social sciences, we have for some time now experienced a recovery and reconsideration of the oral factor in biblical studies. Negatively speaking what is at stake is a challenge to what Foley has called “the textualist bias of our scholarship, with its easy assimilation of all forms of verbal art to the literary-textual model” (1995, 87). This text-centered perspective has involved a sense of textual autonomy, textualization as an end in itself, texts’ localization in intertextual networks, and a dominantly textual hermeneutics—all notions closely allied with the historical and literary paradigm.
16 The Work of Walter J. Ong and Biblical Scholarship (2011) from:
Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: Although a restlessly interdisciplinary mind, Ong was strictly speaking an expert in the literary and intellectual history of the Renaissance, and not a biblical scholar. To many he was known as one of the world’s experts on comparative media studies or media ecology, as it is called today, but to those who knew him closely he seemed to be in a category all by himself. As far as his intellectual persona is concerned, he managed to assimilate deep introspection with a sometimes astonishing pragmatism, and a limitless curiosity about virtually all aspects of human knowledge with an unfailing commitment to
1 Apostolic Tradition and the Form of the Gospel (1985) from:
Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: For some time now, the theme of discipleship in Mark has attracted my attention, for nowhere in the canon does a text generate in readers as much alienation from the disciples as in this Gospel (Kelber 1972; 1974; 1979; 1983). I continue to view it as a puzzle that admits of no simple or general answer. The very oddness of the theme ought to have inspired creative explorations, whereas, in fact, it has often given rise to evasive maneuvers. The elaboration of admittedly positive features of the disciples is, of course, very much to the point. But it has not
2 Interpretation of Narrative and Narrative as Interpretation: from:
Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: The art of telling stories has faithfully accompanied the human race from preliterate to postmodern times. So “natural” appears to be the impulse to narrate that one is hard put to imagine a language or culture devoid of narrative elements. The need to make scraps of life cohere in the imagination and to plot events so as to give them a semblance of coherence and sequentiality may thus reasonably be counted among the human universals. Roland Barthes was of the opinion that narrative “is simply there like life itself … international, transhistorical, transcultural” (1977, 77). Hayden White, to whom we
6 Language, Memory, and Sense Perception in the Religious and Technological Culture of Antiquity and the Middle Ages (1995) from:
Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: The two persons in whose honor this lecture is named were North American classicists of eminence who had acquired additional training in the oral traditional epics of the former Yugoslavia, an achievement unequaled among scholars of their time. Long before interdisciplinary studies had come into scholarly and curricular vogue, Milman Parry and Albert Lord had attained a literacy in comparative studies that was both severely academic and daringly imaginative. Almost singlehandedly, they initiated the distinct academic field of oral traditional literature, which concerns itself with the study of compositional, performative, and aesthetic aspects of living oral traditions and of texts
12 Orality and Biblical Scholarship: from:
Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: In keeping with developments in the human and social sciences, we have for some time now experienced a recovery and reconsideration of the oral factor in biblical studies. Negatively speaking what is at stake is a challenge to what Foley has called “the textualist bias of our scholarship, with its easy assimilation of all forms of verbal art to the literary-textual model” (1995, 87). This text-centered perspective has involved a sense of textual autonomy, textualization as an end in itself, texts’ localization in intertextual networks, and a dominantly textual hermeneutics—all notions closely allied with the historical and literary paradigm.
16 The Work of Walter J. Ong and Biblical Scholarship (2011) from:
Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: Although a restlessly interdisciplinary mind, Ong was strictly speaking an expert in the literary and intellectual history of the Renaissance, and not a biblical scholar. To many he was known as one of the world’s experts on comparative media studies or media ecology, as it is called today, but to those who knew him closely he seemed to be in a category all by himself. As far as his intellectual persona is concerned, he managed to assimilate deep introspection with a sometimes astonishing pragmatism, and a limitless curiosity about virtually all aspects of human knowledge with an unfailing commitment to
1 Apostolic Tradition and the Form of the Gospel (1985) from:
Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: For some time now, the theme of discipleship in Mark has attracted my attention, for nowhere in the canon does a text generate in readers as much alienation from the disciples as in this Gospel (Kelber 1972; 1974; 1979; 1983). I continue to view it as a puzzle that admits of no simple or general answer. The very oddness of the theme ought to have inspired creative explorations, whereas, in fact, it has often given rise to evasive maneuvers. The elaboration of admittedly positive features of the disciples is, of course, very much to the point. But it has not
2 Interpretation of Narrative and Narrative as Interpretation: from:
Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: The art of telling stories has faithfully accompanied the human race from preliterate to postmodern times. So “natural” appears to be the impulse to narrate that one is hard put to imagine a language or culture devoid of narrative elements. The need to make scraps of life cohere in the imagination and to plot events so as to give them a semblance of coherence and sequentiality may thus reasonably be counted among the human universals. Roland Barthes was of the opinion that narrative “is simply there like life itself … international, transhistorical, transcultural” (1977, 77). Hayden White, to whom we
6 Language, Memory, and Sense Perception in the Religious and Technological Culture of Antiquity and the Middle Ages (1995) from:
Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: The two persons in whose honor this lecture is named were North American classicists of eminence who had acquired additional training in the oral traditional epics of the former Yugoslavia, an achievement unequaled among scholars of their time. Long before interdisciplinary studies had come into scholarly and curricular vogue, Milman Parry and Albert Lord had attained a literacy in comparative studies that was both severely academic and daringly imaginative. Almost singlehandedly, they initiated the distinct academic field of oral traditional literature, which concerns itself with the study of compositional, performative, and aesthetic aspects of living oral traditions and of texts
12 Orality and Biblical Scholarship: from:
Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: In keeping with developments in the human and social sciences, we have for some time now experienced a recovery and reconsideration of the oral factor in biblical studies. Negatively speaking what is at stake is a challenge to what Foley has called “the textualist bias of our scholarship, with its easy assimilation of all forms of verbal art to the literary-textual model” (1995, 87). This text-centered perspective has involved a sense of textual autonomy, textualization as an end in itself, texts’ localization in intertextual networks, and a dominantly textual hermeneutics—all notions closely allied with the historical and literary paradigm.
16 The Work of Walter J. Ong and Biblical Scholarship (2011) from:
Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: Although a restlessly interdisciplinary mind, Ong was strictly speaking an expert in the literary and intellectual history of the Renaissance, and not a biblical scholar. To many he was known as one of the world’s experts on comparative media studies or media ecology, as it is called today, but to those who knew him closely he seemed to be in a category all by himself. As far as his intellectual persona is concerned, he managed to assimilate deep introspection with a sometimes astonishing pragmatism, and a limitless curiosity about virtually all aspects of human knowledge with an unfailing commitment to
1 Apostolic Tradition and the Form of the Gospel (1985) from:
Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: For some time now, the theme of discipleship in Mark has attracted my attention, for nowhere in the canon does a text generate in readers as much alienation from the disciples as in this Gospel (Kelber 1972; 1974; 1979; 1983). I continue to view it as a puzzle that admits of no simple or general answer. The very oddness of the theme ought to have inspired creative explorations, whereas, in fact, it has often given rise to evasive maneuvers. The elaboration of admittedly positive features of the disciples is, of course, very much to the point. But it has not
2 Interpretation of Narrative and Narrative as Interpretation: from:
Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: The art of telling stories has faithfully accompanied the human race from preliterate to postmodern times. So “natural” appears to be the impulse to narrate that one is hard put to imagine a language or culture devoid of narrative elements. The need to make scraps of life cohere in the imagination and to plot events so as to give them a semblance of coherence and sequentiality may thus reasonably be counted among the human universals. Roland Barthes was of the opinion that narrative “is simply there like life itself … international, transhistorical, transcultural” (1977, 77). Hayden White, to whom we
6 Language, Memory, and Sense Perception in the Religious and Technological Culture of Antiquity and the Middle Ages (1995) from:
Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: The two persons in whose honor this lecture is named were North American classicists of eminence who had acquired additional training in the oral traditional epics of the former Yugoslavia, an achievement unequaled among scholars of their time. Long before interdisciplinary studies had come into scholarly and curricular vogue, Milman Parry and Albert Lord had attained a literacy in comparative studies that was both severely academic and daringly imaginative. Almost singlehandedly, they initiated the distinct academic field of oral traditional literature, which concerns itself with the study of compositional, performative, and aesthetic aspects of living oral traditions and of texts
12 Orality and Biblical Scholarship: from:
Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: In keeping with developments in the human and social sciences, we have for some time now experienced a recovery and reconsideration of the oral factor in biblical studies. Negatively speaking what is at stake is a challenge to what Foley has called “the textualist bias of our scholarship, with its easy assimilation of all forms of verbal art to the literary-textual model” (1995, 87). This text-centered perspective has involved a sense of textual autonomy, textualization as an end in itself, texts’ localization in intertextual networks, and a dominantly textual hermeneutics—all notions closely allied with the historical and literary paradigm.
16 The Work of Walter J. Ong and Biblical Scholarship (2011) from:
Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: Although a restlessly interdisciplinary mind, Ong was strictly speaking an expert in the literary and intellectual history of the Renaissance, and not a biblical scholar. To many he was known as one of the world’s experts on comparative media studies or media ecology, as it is called today, but to those who knew him closely he seemed to be in a category all by himself. As far as his intellectual persona is concerned, he managed to assimilate deep introspection with a sometimes astonishing pragmatism, and a limitless curiosity about virtually all aspects of human knowledge with an unfailing commitment to
1 Apostolic Tradition and the Form of the Gospel (1985) from:
Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: For some time now, the theme of discipleship in Mark has attracted my attention, for nowhere in the canon does a text generate in readers as much alienation from the disciples as in this Gospel (Kelber 1972; 1974; 1979; 1983). I continue to view it as a puzzle that admits of no simple or general answer. The very oddness of the theme ought to have inspired creative explorations, whereas, in fact, it has often given rise to evasive maneuvers. The elaboration of admittedly positive features of the disciples is, of course, very much to the point. But it has not
2 Interpretation of Narrative and Narrative as Interpretation: from:
Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: The art of telling stories has faithfully accompanied the human race from preliterate to postmodern times. So “natural” appears to be the impulse to narrate that one is hard put to imagine a language or culture devoid of narrative elements. The need to make scraps of life cohere in the imagination and to plot events so as to give them a semblance of coherence and sequentiality may thus reasonably be counted among the human universals. Roland Barthes was of the opinion that narrative “is simply there like life itself … international, transhistorical, transcultural” (1977, 77). Hayden White, to whom we
6 Language, Memory, and Sense Perception in the Religious and Technological Culture of Antiquity and the Middle Ages (1995) from:
Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: The two persons in whose honor this lecture is named were North American classicists of eminence who had acquired additional training in the oral traditional epics of the former Yugoslavia, an achievement unequaled among scholars of their time. Long before interdisciplinary studies had come into scholarly and curricular vogue, Milman Parry and Albert Lord had attained a literacy in comparative studies that was both severely academic and daringly imaginative. Almost singlehandedly, they initiated the distinct academic field of oral traditional literature, which concerns itself with the study of compositional, performative, and aesthetic aspects of living oral traditions and of texts
12 Orality and Biblical Scholarship: from:
Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: In keeping with developments in the human and social sciences, we have for some time now experienced a recovery and reconsideration of the oral factor in biblical studies. Negatively speaking what is at stake is a challenge to what Foley has called “the textualist bias of our scholarship, with its easy assimilation of all forms of verbal art to the literary-textual model” (1995, 87). This text-centered perspective has involved a sense of textual autonomy, textualization as an end in itself, texts’ localization in intertextual networks, and a dominantly textual hermeneutics—all notions closely allied with the historical and literary paradigm.
16 The Work of Walter J. Ong and Biblical Scholarship (2011) from:
Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: Although a restlessly interdisciplinary mind, Ong was strictly speaking an expert in the literary and intellectual history of the Renaissance, and not a biblical scholar. To many he was known as one of the world’s experts on comparative media studies or media ecology, as it is called today, but to those who knew him closely he seemed to be in a category all by himself. As far as his intellectual persona is concerned, he managed to assimilate deep introspection with a sometimes astonishing pragmatism, and a limitless curiosity about virtually all aspects of human knowledge with an unfailing commitment to
Book Title: Political Creativity-Reconfiguring Institutional Order and Change
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): Hattam Victoria
Abstract: Drawing on the rich cache of antidualist theoretical traditions, from poststructuralism and ecological theory to constructivism and pragmatism, a diverse group of scholars probes acts of social innovation in many locations: land boards in Botswana, Russian labor relations, international statistics, global supply chains, Islamic economics in Algeria, Islamic sects and state authority in Senegal, and civil rights reform, colonization, industrial policy, and political consulting in the United States. These political scientists reconceptualize
agencyas a relational process that continually reorders the nature and meaning of people and things,orderas an assemblage that necessitates creative tinkering and interpretation, andchangeas the unruly politics of time that confounds the conventional ordering of past, present, and future.Political Creativityoffers analytical tools for reimagining order and change as entangled processes.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hjkqq
Chapter 10 The Trouble with Amnesia: from:
Political Creativity
Author(s) Bruyneel Kevin
Abstract: In politics, time is a structuring force that shapes collective and individual identities, subjectivities, and imaginaries. We can see the role of political temporality in sweeping historical narratives, such as those a nation tells itself about its founding moment and subsequent arc of development, an arc that almost always legitimizes the status of the contemporary social and political order. We can see it in more quotidian forms such as the calendars that organize people’s lives and in so doing habituate citizens into annual practices of remembrance, memorialization, and obligation. These examples point to the fact that political time is a
Conclusion: from:
Political Creativity
Abstract: We hope this book fosters work on political creativity, enlarging it from a residual explanation into a research program. In that spirit, we conclude with two ventures. First, we contrast notions of agency, order, and change with those of relationality, assemblage, and time to underscore what difference it makes to analyze political phenomena through the lens of political creativity rather than through a dualist framework in which structure and agency are kept apart. Although the pairing of two sets of concepts does not fully capture the rich and wide-ranging scholarship in this volume, we find it a useful heuristic to
Book Title: How Does Social Science Work?-Reflections on Practice
Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Author(s): DIESING PAUL
Abstract: This profound and sometimes witty book will appeal to students and practitioners in the social sciences who are ready to take a fresh look at their field. An extensive bibliography provides a wealth of references across an array of social science disciplines.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hjpmm
Introduction from:
Dancing Identity
Abstract: Traditionally, metaphysics searches for essences, but the post-metaphysical quest leans more toward potentials. Martin Heidegger puts it this way: “Higher than actuality lies
possibility.” Metaphysics as a branch of philosophy studies the nature of being and beings, existence, time, space, movement, and causality. It also involves underlying principles and theories that form the basis of a particular field of knowledge. Heidegger conceived the primary task of metaphysics as the clarification ofbeingin his book on phenomenological metaphysics,Being and Time. In the analysis of being, he holds that phenomenology and ontology characterize philosophy itself, and that we can best
8 Existential Haircut from:
Dancing Identity
Abstract: In the flowering and fading of our body consciousness,
tanlivens the soul of our dance, and the dance has a soul when we take time to notice. Through the bodily tension of tan, the
2 CARTOGRAPHY AND FORGETTING from:
A Counter-History of Composition
Abstract: Following Richard Young’s 1978 NEH seminar, James Berlin accepts Young’s articulation of current-traditional rhetoric and folds vitalism into this category while at the same time revaluing Coleridge. In three articles that appeared in 1980, Berlin establishes his debt to the seminar but also turns the discourse of the field away from the more social-scientific basis that Young uses to ground the discipline. Initially, Berlin reads the concept of vitalism as natural genius and moves it from romanticism to current-traditional rhetoric via the work of Hugh Blair and Richard Whately. Though he starts out using the term vitalism in conjunction with
3 REMAPPING METHOD from:
A Counter-History of Composition
Abstract: Because he was teaching at the University of Pittsburgh at the time, Paul Kameen was a part of the academic milieu surrounding Richard Young’s NEH seminar at Carnegie Mellon University in 1978. William Coles and Otis Walter, also from the University of Pittsburgh, were guests at the seminar, and Kameen was very much aware of their work regarding the composing process and rhetorical invention. Like James Berlin, Kameen was wary of the dubious connection between Coleridge and the characterization of vitalism that Young was putting forward in the seminar. Kameen also published a key article in 1980 that put forward
Three Responding to the Pain of Others from:
Illness as Narrative
Abstract: While the experience of being “at risk” is newly recognized as presenting a problem for language and literature, pain has long been understood to resist expression in words. At its worst, pain is unchosen, extreme, and without purpose; it obscures memory, thought, language, everything but itself. How can one communicate such an experience? Chronic pain does not present the same challenge to expression as acute pain and even agony can find its way into a story as time passes, but the problem posed by pain remains. How people express pain is highly varied, inherently subjective, and thus difficult—perhaps even
Five Theory’s Aging Body from:
Illness as Narrative
Abstract: To ask about the function of criticism at the present time is to invite nearly as many answers as there are critics. The profession has traveled a long way from Matthew Arnold’s confident declaration in 1865 that the only rule a critic must follow is “disinterestedness” in order “to know the best that is known and thought in the world, irrespectively of practice, politics, and everything of the kind” (“Function,” 17). While a good number of today’s critics might define their work as motivated by “interest,” rather than disinterest, there is no consensus on what the focus of that interest
Three Responding to the Pain of Others from:
Illness as Narrative
Abstract: While the experience of being “at risk” is newly recognized as presenting a problem for language and literature, pain has long been understood to resist expression in words. At its worst, pain is unchosen, extreme, and without purpose; it obscures memory, thought, language, everything but itself. How can one communicate such an experience? Chronic pain does not present the same challenge to expression as acute pain and even agony can find its way into a story as time passes, but the problem posed by pain remains. How people express pain is highly varied, inherently subjective, and thus difficult—perhaps even
Five Theory’s Aging Body from:
Illness as Narrative
Abstract: To ask about the function of criticism at the present time is to invite nearly as many answers as there are critics. The profession has traveled a long way from Matthew Arnold’s confident declaration in 1865 that the only rule a critic must follow is “disinterestedness” in order “to know the best that is known and thought in the world, irrespectively of practice, politics, and everything of the kind” (“Function,” 17). While a good number of today’s critics might define their work as motivated by “interest,” rather than disinterest, there is no consensus on what the focus of that interest
2 DANCE AND SELF from:
Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: All works of art bear the stamp of individual creation. Neither Martha Graham nor Yvonne Rainer escaped self in their dances. Yet they were both concerned, each in her own way, to transcend self-expression in dance. Rainerʹs efforts in this regard are well known, but it is too often forgotten that Graham openly rejected what she termed ʺself-expression dancing.ʺ Instead she sought a form of ʺcommunicationʺ adequate to her own time.¹ Dance is a form of expression – and communication – that necessarily involves the self. But how? Or under what conditions is self involved when dance is viewed as
6 POINT COUNTERPOINT from:
Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: Let us begin to consider that dance evolves by means of aesthetic-historic oppositions, and that it does so in relation to defining constants, which are points of departure and return. The purpose of this chapter is twofold, then, and concerned with tensional factors of definition. In view of this, let us first reject the notion that dance can be redefined, as it is often claimed. Rather, we might see that there are constant points of reference in our understanding of what dance is; sometimes these points are even stated, as we name the aesthetic essence of a particular dance and
10 MOVING TIME-SPACE from:
Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: Maurice Merleau-Ponty, Martin Heidegger, and Jean-Paul Sartre take a particular perspective on time, describing its lived character – its metaphoric and poetic dimension in experience, rather than its objective measure. Space, inseparable from time, is similarly conceived in its poetics by Gaston Bachelard.¹ Preceding their writings was Henri Bergsonʹs exposition of our intuitive grasp of time.² These philosophers are interested in explaining time and space as experienced or perceived in subjective life. As I continue to describe the lived essence of dance in these last chapters, this will also be my concern. Here, I deal with time and space as
11 MEASURE AND RELATIONSHIP from:
Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: In
Time and Narrative, Paul Ricoeur shows how time is experienced through the ʺpoetic sphereʺ of metaphor and narrative, how it becomes human time.¹ My thesis is that dance also reveals time as human time and space as human space in its aesthetic (poetic) constitution of them in movement images. But certainly all the arts reveal time-space as lived in human experience. Dance does this through movement imagery, through structured figures of movement, in time-space. When we describe a dance or its movement images, we find ourselves also describing time and space in human (lived) and metaphoric terms.
12 DANCE IMAGES from:
Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: Because it is embodied, dance always reflects life. Dance imagery, no matter how abstract, has a lived ground: our lived body, our mythopoetic body, and our experience of time, space, and freedom.
2 DANCE AND SELF from:
Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: All works of art bear the stamp of individual creation. Neither Martha Graham nor Yvonne Rainer escaped self in their dances. Yet they were both concerned, each in her own way, to transcend self-expression in dance. Rainerʹs efforts in this regard are well known, but it is too often forgotten that Graham openly rejected what she termed ʺself-expression dancing.ʺ Instead she sought a form of ʺcommunicationʺ adequate to her own time.¹ Dance is a form of expression – and communication – that necessarily involves the self. But how? Or under what conditions is self involved when dance is viewed as
6 POINT COUNTERPOINT from:
Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: Let us begin to consider that dance evolves by means of aesthetic-historic oppositions, and that it does so in relation to defining constants, which are points of departure and return. The purpose of this chapter is twofold, then, and concerned with tensional factors of definition. In view of this, let us first reject the notion that dance can be redefined, as it is often claimed. Rather, we might see that there are constant points of reference in our understanding of what dance is; sometimes these points are even stated, as we name the aesthetic essence of a particular dance and
10 MOVING TIME-SPACE from:
Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: Maurice Merleau-Ponty, Martin Heidegger, and Jean-Paul Sartre take a particular perspective on time, describing its lived character – its metaphoric and poetic dimension in experience, rather than its objective measure. Space, inseparable from time, is similarly conceived in its poetics by Gaston Bachelard.¹ Preceding their writings was Henri Bergsonʹs exposition of our intuitive grasp of time.² These philosophers are interested in explaining time and space as experienced or perceived in subjective life. As I continue to describe the lived essence of dance in these last chapters, this will also be my concern. Here, I deal with time and space as
11 MEASURE AND RELATIONSHIP from:
Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: In
Time and Narrative, Paul Ricoeur shows how time is experienced through the ʺpoetic sphereʺ of metaphor and narrative, how it becomes human time.¹ My thesis is that dance also reveals time as human time and space as human space in its aesthetic (poetic) constitution of them in movement images. But certainly all the arts reveal time-space as lived in human experience. Dance does this through movement imagery, through structured figures of movement, in time-space. When we describe a dance or its movement images, we find ourselves also describing time and space in human (lived) and metaphoric terms.
12 DANCE IMAGES from:
Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: Because it is embodied, dance always reflects life. Dance imagery, no matter how abstract, has a lived ground: our lived body, our mythopoetic body, and our experience of time, space, and freedom.
2 DANCE AND SELF from:
Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: All works of art bear the stamp of individual creation. Neither Martha Graham nor Yvonne Rainer escaped self in their dances. Yet they were both concerned, each in her own way, to transcend self-expression in dance. Rainerʹs efforts in this regard are well known, but it is too often forgotten that Graham openly rejected what she termed ʺself-expression dancing.ʺ Instead she sought a form of ʺcommunicationʺ adequate to her own time.¹ Dance is a form of expression – and communication – that necessarily involves the self. But how? Or under what conditions is self involved when dance is viewed as
6 POINT COUNTERPOINT from:
Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: Let us begin to consider that dance evolves by means of aesthetic-historic oppositions, and that it does so in relation to defining constants, which are points of departure and return. The purpose of this chapter is twofold, then, and concerned with tensional factors of definition. In view of this, let us first reject the notion that dance can be redefined, as it is often claimed. Rather, we might see that there are constant points of reference in our understanding of what dance is; sometimes these points are even stated, as we name the aesthetic essence of a particular dance and
10 MOVING TIME-SPACE from:
Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: Maurice Merleau-Ponty, Martin Heidegger, and Jean-Paul Sartre take a particular perspective on time, describing its lived character – its metaphoric and poetic dimension in experience, rather than its objective measure. Space, inseparable from time, is similarly conceived in its poetics by Gaston Bachelard.¹ Preceding their writings was Henri Bergsonʹs exposition of our intuitive grasp of time.² These philosophers are interested in explaining time and space as experienced or perceived in subjective life. As I continue to describe the lived essence of dance in these last chapters, this will also be my concern. Here, I deal with time and space as
11 MEASURE AND RELATIONSHIP from:
Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: In
Time and Narrative, Paul Ricoeur shows how time is experienced through the ʺpoetic sphereʺ of metaphor and narrative, how it becomes human time.¹ My thesis is that dance also reveals time as human time and space as human space in its aesthetic (poetic) constitution of them in movement images. But certainly all the arts reveal time-space as lived in human experience. Dance does this through movement imagery, through structured figures of movement, in time-space. When we describe a dance or its movement images, we find ourselves also describing time and space in human (lived) and metaphoric terms.
12 DANCE IMAGES from:
Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: Because it is embodied, dance always reflects life. Dance imagery, no matter how abstract, has a lived ground: our lived body, our mythopoetic body, and our experience of time, space, and freedom.
2 DANCE AND SELF from:
Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: All works of art bear the stamp of individual creation. Neither Martha Graham nor Yvonne Rainer escaped self in their dances. Yet they were both concerned, each in her own way, to transcend self-expression in dance. Rainerʹs efforts in this regard are well known, but it is too often forgotten that Graham openly rejected what she termed ʺself-expression dancing.ʺ Instead she sought a form of ʺcommunicationʺ adequate to her own time.¹ Dance is a form of expression – and communication – that necessarily involves the self. But how? Or under what conditions is self involved when dance is viewed as
6 POINT COUNTERPOINT from:
Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: Let us begin to consider that dance evolves by means of aesthetic-historic oppositions, and that it does so in relation to defining constants, which are points of departure and return. The purpose of this chapter is twofold, then, and concerned with tensional factors of definition. In view of this, let us first reject the notion that dance can be redefined, as it is often claimed. Rather, we might see that there are constant points of reference in our understanding of what dance is; sometimes these points are even stated, as we name the aesthetic essence of a particular dance and
10 MOVING TIME-SPACE from:
Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: Maurice Merleau-Ponty, Martin Heidegger, and Jean-Paul Sartre take a particular perspective on time, describing its lived character – its metaphoric and poetic dimension in experience, rather than its objective measure. Space, inseparable from time, is similarly conceived in its poetics by Gaston Bachelard.¹ Preceding their writings was Henri Bergsonʹs exposition of our intuitive grasp of time.² These philosophers are interested in explaining time and space as experienced or perceived in subjective life. As I continue to describe the lived essence of dance in these last chapters, this will also be my concern. Here, I deal with time and space as
11 MEASURE AND RELATIONSHIP from:
Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: In
Time and Narrative, Paul Ricoeur shows how time is experienced through the ʺpoetic sphereʺ of metaphor and narrative, how it becomes human time.¹ My thesis is that dance also reveals time as human time and space as human space in its aesthetic (poetic) constitution of them in movement images. But certainly all the arts reveal time-space as lived in human experience. Dance does this through movement imagery, through structured figures of movement, in time-space. When we describe a dance or its movement images, we find ourselves also describing time and space in human (lived) and metaphoric terms.
12 DANCE IMAGES from:
Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: Because it is embodied, dance always reflects life. Dance imagery, no matter how abstract, has a lived ground: our lived body, our mythopoetic body, and our experience of time, space, and freedom.
2 DANCE AND SELF from:
Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: All works of art bear the stamp of individual creation. Neither Martha Graham nor Yvonne Rainer escaped self in their dances. Yet they were both concerned, each in her own way, to transcend self-expression in dance. Rainerʹs efforts in this regard are well known, but it is too often forgotten that Graham openly rejected what she termed ʺself-expression dancing.ʺ Instead she sought a form of ʺcommunicationʺ adequate to her own time.¹ Dance is a form of expression – and communication – that necessarily involves the self. But how? Or under what conditions is self involved when dance is viewed as
6 POINT COUNTERPOINT from:
Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: Let us begin to consider that dance evolves by means of aesthetic-historic oppositions, and that it does so in relation to defining constants, which are points of departure and return. The purpose of this chapter is twofold, then, and concerned with tensional factors of definition. In view of this, let us first reject the notion that dance can be redefined, as it is often claimed. Rather, we might see that there are constant points of reference in our understanding of what dance is; sometimes these points are even stated, as we name the aesthetic essence of a particular dance and
10 MOVING TIME-SPACE from:
Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: Maurice Merleau-Ponty, Martin Heidegger, and Jean-Paul Sartre take a particular perspective on time, describing its lived character – its metaphoric and poetic dimension in experience, rather than its objective measure. Space, inseparable from time, is similarly conceived in its poetics by Gaston Bachelard.¹ Preceding their writings was Henri Bergsonʹs exposition of our intuitive grasp of time.² These philosophers are interested in explaining time and space as experienced or perceived in subjective life. As I continue to describe the lived essence of dance in these last chapters, this will also be my concern. Here, I deal with time and space as
11 MEASURE AND RELATIONSHIP from:
Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: In
Time and Narrative, Paul Ricoeur shows how time is experienced through the ʺpoetic sphereʺ of metaphor and narrative, how it becomes human time.¹ My thesis is that dance also reveals time as human time and space as human space in its aesthetic (poetic) constitution of them in movement images. But certainly all the arts reveal time-space as lived in human experience. Dance does this through movement imagery, through structured figures of movement, in time-space. When we describe a dance or its movement images, we find ourselves also describing time and space in human (lived) and metaphoric terms.
12 DANCE IMAGES from:
Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: Because it is embodied, dance always reflects life. Dance imagery, no matter how abstract, has a lived ground: our lived body, our mythopoetic body, and our experience of time, space, and freedom.
2 DANCE AND SELF from:
Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: All works of art bear the stamp of individual creation. Neither Martha Graham nor Yvonne Rainer escaped self in their dances. Yet they were both concerned, each in her own way, to transcend self-expression in dance. Rainerʹs efforts in this regard are well known, but it is too often forgotten that Graham openly rejected what she termed ʺself-expression dancing.ʺ Instead she sought a form of ʺcommunicationʺ adequate to her own time.¹ Dance is a form of expression – and communication – that necessarily involves the self. But how? Or under what conditions is self involved when dance is viewed as
6 POINT COUNTERPOINT from:
Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: Let us begin to consider that dance evolves by means of aesthetic-historic oppositions, and that it does so in relation to defining constants, which are points of departure and return. The purpose of this chapter is twofold, then, and concerned with tensional factors of definition. In view of this, let us first reject the notion that dance can be redefined, as it is often claimed. Rather, we might see that there are constant points of reference in our understanding of what dance is; sometimes these points are even stated, as we name the aesthetic essence of a particular dance and
10 MOVING TIME-SPACE from:
Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: Maurice Merleau-Ponty, Martin Heidegger, and Jean-Paul Sartre take a particular perspective on time, describing its lived character – its metaphoric and poetic dimension in experience, rather than its objective measure. Space, inseparable from time, is similarly conceived in its poetics by Gaston Bachelard.¹ Preceding their writings was Henri Bergsonʹs exposition of our intuitive grasp of time.² These philosophers are interested in explaining time and space as experienced or perceived in subjective life. As I continue to describe the lived essence of dance in these last chapters, this will also be my concern. Here, I deal with time and space as
11 MEASURE AND RELATIONSHIP from:
Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: In
Time and Narrative, Paul Ricoeur shows how time is experienced through the ʺpoetic sphereʺ of metaphor and narrative, how it becomes human time.¹ My thesis is that dance also reveals time as human time and space as human space in its aesthetic (poetic) constitution of them in movement images. But certainly all the arts reveal time-space as lived in human experience. Dance does this through movement imagery, through structured figures of movement, in time-space. When we describe a dance or its movement images, we find ourselves also describing time and space in human (lived) and metaphoric terms.
12 DANCE IMAGES from:
Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: Because it is embodied, dance always reflects life. Dance imagery, no matter how abstract, has a lived ground: our lived body, our mythopoetic body, and our experience of time, space, and freedom.
Book Title: The Reparative in Narratives-Works of Mourning in Progress
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): ROSELLO MIREILLE
Abstract: The authors studied in this book can be visualized as the islands that constitute an unknown, fragile and trembling literary and cultural Francophone archipelago. The archipelago does not appear on any map, in the middle of an ocean whose name we already know. No Francophone anthology would put these authors together as a matter of course because what connects them is a narrative grammar rather than a national origin or even a language. Yet, their writing techniques and their apprehension of the real (the ways in which they know and name the world) both reflect and actively participate in our evolving perception of what Gayatri Spivak calls the “planet”. The Reparative in Narratives argues that argue that they repair trauma through writing. One description of these awe-inspiring, tender and sometimes horrifying tales is that their narrators are survivors who have experienced and sometimes inflicted unspeakable acts of violence. And yet, ultimately, despair, nihilism, cynicism or silence are never the consequences of their encounter with what some quickly call evil. The traumatic event has not killed them and has not killed their desire to write or perform, although the decidedly altered life that they live in the aftermath of the disaster forces them to become different types of storytellers. They are the first-person narrators of their story, and their narration reinvents them as speaking subjects. In turn, this requires that we accept new reading pacts. That pact is a temporal and geographical signature: the reparative narrative needs readers prepared to accept that healing belongs to the realm of possibilities and that exposure and denunciation do not exhaust the victim’s range of possibilities. Rosello contends that this context-specific yet repeating pattern constitutes a response to the contemporary figuration of both globalized and extremely localized types of traumatic memories.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vj9bm
INTRODUCTION: from:
The Reparative in Narratives
Abstract: ‘Narratives’ and ‘reparative’: these two words will be used throughout this book, and the nature of their relationship will remain unstable. Originally, I was looking for a working definition of what a ‘reparative narrative’ would be, might be. And positing that reparative narratives could be found was of the order of a theoretical hypothesis. I was not sure that they existed but it was clear that if they did, I needed them, and needed them badly. I wanted to learn at the same time how to identify them and to understand how they worked in order to recognize them and
CHAPTER FOUR Gisèle Halimi’s Autobiographical and Legal Narratives: from:
The Reparative in Narratives
Abstract: Halimi grew up in the 1930s in Tunisia, in the midst of a Jewish community that she describes as poor, in a family whose members were not particularly receptive to her ambitions and feminist sense of justice. She spent her formative years in a country marked by colonialism, at a time when the party of future president Habib Bourguiba was beginning to organize against the French protectorate (Perkins, 2004, 95–105). The Second World War was about to engulf Europe and France’s North African colonial territories would be involved as a reservoir of military forces, as the theatre of operations
Book Title: A Self-Conscious Art-Patrick Modiano’s Postmodern Fictions
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): KAWAKAMI AKANE
Abstract: A Self-Conscious Art is the first full-length study in English to attempt to deal with the formal complexities of Modiano’s work, by reading ‘against the grain’ of his self-professed ingenuousness. A detailed examination of his narratives shows the deeply postmodern nature of his writing. Parodying precursors such as Proust or the nouveau romanciers, his narratives are built around a profound lack of faith in the ability of writing to retrieve the past through memory, and this failure is acknowledged in the discreet playfulness that characterises his novels. This book is a timely introduction to the work of one of the most successful modern French novelists.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vj9nz
Book Title: A Self-Conscious Art-Patrick Modiano’s Postmodern Fictions
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): KAWAKAMI AKANE
Abstract: A Self-Conscious Art is the first full-length study in English to attempt to deal with the formal complexities of Modiano’s work, by reading ‘against the grain’ of his self-professed ingenuousness. A detailed examination of his narratives shows the deeply postmodern nature of his writing. Parodying precursors such as Proust or the nouveau romanciers, his narratives are built around a profound lack of faith in the ability of writing to retrieve the past through memory, and this failure is acknowledged in the discreet playfulness that characterises his novels. This book is a timely introduction to the work of one of the most successful modern French novelists.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vj9nz
CHAPTER FIVE The Empire of the Child from:
Michel Tournier and the Metaphor of Fiction
Abstract: Few critics have addressed seriously the role of the child in Tournier’s fiction. However, in his recent monograph David Gascoigne devotes an entire chapter to this, the most contentious issue in Tournier criticism. Gascoigne alights on a personal anecdote recorded at the start of
Le Vent Paracletin which Tournier relates the story of his grandfather who, as a six-year-old child at the time of the Prussian invasion of 1871, was made to hold up a heavy volume of music for the conductor of the German military band. The story seems to justify the placement of a typical Tournier epigraph
CHAPTER FIVE The Empire of the Child from:
Michel Tournier and the Metaphor of Fiction
Abstract: Few critics have addressed seriously the role of the child in Tournier’s fiction. However, in his recent monograph David Gascoigne devotes an entire chapter to this, the most contentious issue in Tournier criticism. Gascoigne alights on a personal anecdote recorded at the start of
Le Vent Paracletin which Tournier relates the story of his grandfather who, as a six-year-old child at the time of the Prussian invasion of 1871, was made to hold up a heavy volume of music for the conductor of the German military band. The story seems to justify the placement of a typical Tournier epigraph
CHAPTER FIVE The Empire of the Child from:
Michel Tournier and the Metaphor of Fiction
Abstract: Few critics have addressed seriously the role of the child in Tournier’s fiction. However, in his recent monograph David Gascoigne devotes an entire chapter to this, the most contentious issue in Tournier criticism. Gascoigne alights on a personal anecdote recorded at the start of
Le Vent Paracletin which Tournier relates the story of his grandfather who, as a six-year-old child at the time of the Prussian invasion of 1871, was made to hold up a heavy volume of music for the conductor of the German military band. The story seems to justify the placement of a typical Tournier epigraph
CHAPTER FIVE The Empire of the Child from:
Michel Tournier and the Metaphor of Fiction
Abstract: Few critics have addressed seriously the role of the child in Tournier’s fiction. However, in his recent monograph David Gascoigne devotes an entire chapter to this, the most contentious issue in Tournier criticism. Gascoigne alights on a personal anecdote recorded at the start of
Le Vent Paracletin which Tournier relates the story of his grandfather who, as a six-year-old child at the time of the Prussian invasion of 1871, was made to hold up a heavy volume of music for the conductor of the German military band. The story seems to justify the placement of a typical Tournier epigraph
2 The Judeo-Christian Tradition from:
The Cultural Values of Europe
Author(s) Huber Wolfgang
Abstract: Europe is not a ‘Christian club’, countered Turkish Prime Minister Recep Tayyip Erdogan, when Angela Merkel, chair of the German CDU at the time, brought Europe’s Christian character into play as one of the objections to Turkish membership of the European Union. The Turkish politician’s disparaging reference to a ‘Christian club’ was certainly somewhat unfortunate; and the chair of the former Central Council of Muslims in Germany, Nadeem Elyas, was also rather careless when he adopted the same term. But it is true that it is impossible to account for the cultural character of Europe, during any era of its
6 The Value of Introspection from:
The Cultural Values of Europe
Author(s) Flasch Kurt
Abstract: With this striking exhortation, Augustine summed up introspection as a constitutive element of the old European system of merit. At the same time, in an anxious, nothing less than beseeching, peremptory tone, it reminds us that human beings have a tendency to throw themselves outwards, to live amid diversions, to fail to appreciate themselves. It is not only with the emergence of industrial-technological civilization that introspection comes under threat; it faces inherent threats. Before Augustine, Neoplatonic and Stoic philosophers reminded us of the same thing: it is we who forget our inner world, plunge into the external world, and lose
5 “I Hugged Myself”: from:
Black Intersectionalities
Author(s) Bast Florian
Abstract: This study gives an introduction to the complex interrelation of agency and first-person narration in the works of Octavia Butler by way of the short story “The Evening and the Morning and the Night” (1987).¹ Butler’s diverse oeuvre utilizes narrative perspective as it conspicuously employs complex constructions of homodiegetic narrations: in its discussion of notions of identity, power, control, and freedom, it gives voice to, among others, a runaway in a dystopian future in
Survivor(1978), a black woman repeatedly forced to travel back to the times of slavery inKindred(1979), a human–alien hybrid of a third gender
12 On the Monstrous Threat of Reasoned Black Desire from:
Black Intersectionalities
Author(s) Gordon Lewis R.
Abstract: There is a problem in the pursuit of knowledge that is peculiarly evident in the experience of many black graduate students. On the one hand, the student is often excited by the opportunity to pursue questions in a discipline whose resources for the advancement of knowledge have intoxicated him or her with a quest that may best be described as a
faithin possibility. On the other hand, such a student often encounters subtle and at times not-so-subtle snippets of challenges to his or her intelligence that, in a context in which reputation about one’s intelligence is paramount, is degrading.
Introduction from:
Ciaran Carson
Abstract: The publication in 2008 of Ciaran Carson’s
Collected Poems, timed to coincide with the poet’s sixtieth birthday, is an obvious milestone along the way of his development as a writer. Leafing through its nearly 600 pages, which include work from eight principal collections produced over a period of more than thirty years, the reader is likely to be struck by the extraordinary scope and resourcefulness of Carson’s writing. Experimental rather than self-consciously avant-garde, Carson’s poetry exhibits a remarkable linguistic inventiveness, formal complexity, and intellectual daring, always making a concerted effort to communicate with the reader yet also foregrounding the resistances
CHAPTER FOUR Revised Versions: from:
Ciaran Carson
Abstract: The importance and complexity of memory in Carson’s aesthetic is apparent when, as in ‘Ambition’, time is conceived as a road that rarely runs straight, its course marked by manifold obstructions and convolutions. After all, the action of taking one step forward, two steps back can be understood in temporal as well as spatial terms, and in Carson’s writing the past typically manifests itself as ‘a trail of moments/Dislocated, then located’ (
IFN, 58) that precludes a commanding overview. This much is clear in the opening lines of ‘Ambition’, where the narrator and his father have climbed Black Mountain in order
Richard Price or the Canadian from Petite-Anse: from:
American Creoles
Author(s) Kullberg Christina
Abstract: On the cover of the second edition of Richard Price’s
The Convict and the Colonel: A Story of Colonialism and Resistance in the Caribbean(1998), Maryse Condé comments that the author’s ‘research is more fascinating than a piece of fiction’. American anthropologist Richard Price’s study of the role of memory in modern Martinican society examines the strange fate of a social pariah, Médard Aribot, thief and artist, who, following his return from prison on Devil’s Island, divided his time during the final years of his life between Petite-Anse and the town of Le Diamant in the south west of Martinique.
Édouard Glissant and the Test of Faulkner’s Modernism from:
American Creoles
Author(s) Azéradt Hugues
Abstract: In
Faulkner, Mississippi, Glissant provides us with an innovative reading of an author whose work we thought we already knew almost inside out. Indeed, in 1996, compared with other great modernists such as Joyce, Woolf, Proust, Kafka and Musil, Faulkner was beginning to seem outdated, ‘unsaleable’ and even undesirable within the field of literary criticism. Faulkner’s heyday was under New Criticism and at the time of the White House’s anti-communist policies of the 1950s and 1960s (Schwartz, 1988), and only a small number of brilliant hardliners such as Philip Weinstein, Barbara Ladd, John Mathews, Richard Godden, André Bleikasten and Claude
Book Title: Postcolonial Thought in the French Speaking World- Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): Murphy David
Abstract: In the late 1990’s, Postcolonial Studies risked imploding as a credible area of academic enquiry. Repeated anthologization and an overemphasis on the English-language literatures led to sustained critiques of the field and to an active search for alternative approaches to the globalized and transnational formations of the post-colonial world. In the early twenty-first century, however, postcolonial began to reveal a new openness to its comparative dimensions. French-language contributors to postcolonial debate (such as Edouard Glissant and Abdelkebir Khatibi) have recently risen to greater prominence in the English-speaking world, and there have also appeared an increasing number of important critical and theoretical texts on postcolonial issues, written by scholars working principally on French-language material. It is to such a context that this book responds. Acknowledging these shifts, this volume provides an essential tool for students and scholars outside French departments seeking a way into the study of Francophone colonial postcolonial debates. At the same time, it supplies scholars in French with a comprehensive overview of essential ideas and key intellectuals in this area.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjgn6
CHAPTER 6 Édouard Glissant: from:
Postcolonial Thought in the French Speaking World
Author(s) Bongie Chris
Abstract: It is over half a century now since Martinique’s Édouard Glissant arrived on the literary scene in Paris, publishing his first volumes of poetry in the early 1950s, and his first novel,
La Lézarde, in 1958. Since that time he has produced eight stylistically demanding novels (the latest beingOrmerodin 2003), a good many collections of poetry, and one influential play about the Haitian Revolution.¹ Arguably, though, it is not as a novelist or poet that Glissant has proved most influential at the international level, but as a theorist. With his unflagging advocacy of a creolizing world of Diversity
CHAPTER 11 Roads to Freedom: from:
Postcolonial Thought in the French Speaking World
Author(s) Williams Patrick
Abstract: There is, perhaps, an excessive obviousness in the decision to focus on the concept of freedom in any discussion of Jean-Paul Sartre, since if there is one pre-eminently Sartrean theme, it is arguably that of freedom. However, precisely because of the dangers inherent in the ‘obviousness’, in regarding the chosen subject as already known and comprehended, but also because of the inevitably changing and evolving sense of the term in the context of a lifetime’s passionate engagement, we would be wrong to think that we fully understand Sartre’s repeated working through – ‘elaboration’ in the strongest Gramscian sense – of
CHAPTER 12 Léopold Sédar Senghor: from:
Postcolonial Thought in the French Speaking World
Author(s) Murphy David
Abstract: Since the beginning of the new millennium there has been a remarkable turnaround in the critical appraisal of the life and work of Senegalese poet-president, Léopold Sédar Senghor, the writer most closely associated with the Francophone literary movement of Negritude. In the course of the preceding decades, Senghor had come to be seen by numerous critics (if by no means all) as an anachronistic figure, whose ideas had served their time and were no longer useful in thinking about Africa. The high point of the more recent positive reappraisal came in 2006 (the centenary of his birth), which l’Organisation Internationale
CHAPTER 13 Postcolonial Anthropology in the French-speaking World from:
Postcolonial Thought in the French Speaking World
Author(s) Richards David
Abstract: It is a foolish commentator indeed who would attempt to claim a precise moment in history when anthropology in the French-speaking world
becamepostcolonial – that point in time when predominantly French anthropological thought turned on its own history of involvement in the imperial enterprise and began to challenge anthropological theories and practices grounded in the discourses and assumptions of colonialism. That anthropology was one of the handmaidens of colonialism, a science of empire, is indisputable and well documented. For many, the postcolonial turn has yet to occur and anthropology is still irredeemably and fatally tainted by its colonial origins.
CHAPTER 15 The End of the Ancien Régime French Empire from:
Postcolonial Thought in the French Speaking World
Author(s) Dubois Laurent
Abstract: During the last decades of the eighteenth century and the first decades of the nineteenth, the major Atlantic empires confronted, and in several cases succumbed to, movements for national independence in the Americas. The political defeats in the Americas overlapped with, and sometimes drove, the painfully slow elimination of the Atlantic slave trade, though slavery itself survived in one form or another in all the independent American republics except for one. They also overlapped with – and informed, both as sources of inspiration and as warnings – the beginnings of territorial expansion into Africa and Asia. Events in all the
CHAPTER 20 Locating Quebec on the Postcolonial Map from:
Postcolonial Thought in the French Speaking World
Author(s) Green Mary Jean
Abstract: In his introduction to a 2003 issue of
Québec Studies, Vincent Desroches poses the question, for the first time in the context of a serious theoretical discussion: ‘En quoi la littérature québécoise est-elle postcoloniale?’ [In what sense can Quebec literature be deemed postcolonial?] (2003b). It is not surprising that this question, framed in French by aQuébécoisscholar, is given serious consideration in a journal published in the United States: in US academic circles Quebec literature had, for at least a decade, been associated with the postcolonial, however loosely defined. Yet within Quebec itself the term ‘postcolonial’ is still largely
6 ‘Roaming root of multiple meanings’: from:
Sympathetic Ink
Abstract: When it comes to discussing ‘Irish identity’, critics are inclined to develop an acute sense of place, most notably an indeterminate space tentatively tucked in between inverted commas; indeed, the more seasoned hack will sigh in resignation at having to go and encounter for the millionth time the reality of ‘that will-o’-the-wisp which has caused the shedding of so much innocent ink’.¹ One influential writer, Peter McDonald, has recently objected to the intellectually stultifying manner in which identity politics is discussed within Irish studies. However, in his justifiable eagerness to expose the hidden agendas behind the systematic erection of constrictive
6 ‘Roaming root of multiple meanings’: from:
Sympathetic Ink
Abstract: When it comes to discussing ‘Irish identity’, critics are inclined to develop an acute sense of place, most notably an indeterminate space tentatively tucked in between inverted commas; indeed, the more seasoned hack will sigh in resignation at having to go and encounter for the millionth time the reality of ‘that will-o’-the-wisp which has caused the shedding of so much innocent ink’.¹ One influential writer, Peter McDonald, has recently objected to the intellectually stultifying manner in which identity politics is discussed within Irish studies. However, in his justifiable eagerness to expose the hidden agendas behind the systematic erection of constrictive
5 The Persistence of the Movement Orthodoxy in the 1980s and 1990s from:
The Poetry of Saying
Abstract: The anthology which claimed to succeed Alvarez’s
The New PoetrywasThe Penguin Book of Contemporary British Poetryof 1982, edited by the criticpoets Blake Morrison and Andrew Motion. Despite the bland inclusiveness of the title, it admits to being self-consciously ‘didactic’, and claims to exemplify the work and literary taste of a particular ‘poetic generation’.¹ Older writers, and those included in Alvarez’s collection, have been excluded. Its introduction several times draws comparisons withThe New Poetry, which is characterized as ‘the last serious anthology of British poetry’ (CBP, p. 11). Taking over Alvarez’s notion, but not his metaphor, of
9 The Ballet of the Speech Organs: from:
The Poetry of Saying
Abstract: Bob Cobbing, who died in 2002, was a senior and major exponent of the international concrete poetry movement, but he was a visual artist before he was a poet. His earliest duplicator print of 1942 presages his later work and his interest in the mechanics and accidents of office, rather than fine art, printing.¹ However it was not until 1964, after some years of involvement in the literary underground, as recorded in Chapter 2, that Cobbing came to maturity with the alliterative sequence
ABC in Sound.By this time the awareness he had gained of the international concrete poetry movement
5 The Persistence of the Movement Orthodoxy in the 1980s and 1990s from:
The Poetry of Saying
Abstract: The anthology which claimed to succeed Alvarez’s
The New PoetrywasThe Penguin Book of Contemporary British Poetryof 1982, edited by the criticpoets Blake Morrison and Andrew Motion. Despite the bland inclusiveness of the title, it admits to being self-consciously ‘didactic’, and claims to exemplify the work and literary taste of a particular ‘poetic generation’.¹ Older writers, and those included in Alvarez’s collection, have been excluded. Its introduction several times draws comparisons withThe New Poetry, which is characterized as ‘the last serious anthology of British poetry’ (CBP, p. 11). Taking over Alvarez’s notion, but not his metaphor, of
9 The Ballet of the Speech Organs: from:
The Poetry of Saying
Abstract: Bob Cobbing, who died in 2002, was a senior and major exponent of the international concrete poetry movement, but he was a visual artist before he was a poet. His earliest duplicator print of 1942 presages his later work and his interest in the mechanics and accidents of office, rather than fine art, printing.¹ However it was not until 1964, after some years of involvement in the literary underground, as recorded in Chapter 2, that Cobbing came to maturity with the alliterative sequence
ABC in Sound.By this time the awareness he had gained of the international concrete poetry movement
Sentimental Translation in Mackenzie and Sterne from:
Translating Life
Author(s) FAIRER DAVID
Abstract: The eighteenth-century sentimentalist was expected to be a skilled interpreter of nonverbal communication. Sensitive to the nuances of facial expression or physical gesture, the ‘man of feeling’ was an expert reader of physiognomy, a translator of signs who could turn a look into a sentence, the slightest movement into an assertion, a question, or an invitation:
Hazlitt’s Liber Amoris; or, the New Pygmalion (1823): from:
Translating Life
Author(s) BARNARD JOHN
Abstract: The subtitle of Hazlitt’s
Liber Amoris; or, the New Pygmalion, published anonymously in 1823, promises a retelling of Ovid’s Augustan myth of transformation set in Regency England, a translation from classical to modern times. Unlike Ovid’s poetic invention of a distant mythological past, Hazlitt’s prose version takes place in the quotidian world of London’s lodging houses. However, early nineteenth-century London has no pagan Venus who can effect the metamorphosis required by Hazlitt’s narrator. Obviously, like Mary Shelley’sFrankenstein; or, the Modern Prometheus(1818), the subtitle is ironic, and questions the pertinence of classical mythology to the modern world. There is
Browning’s Old Florentine Painters: from:
Translating Life
Author(s) EVEREST KELVIN
Abstract: Browning’s admirers have often, and rightly, celebrated the achievement of his dramatic monologues, ‘Fra Lippo Lippi’ and ‘Andrea del Sarto’, published in
Men and Womenin 1855. My interest in them here, however, is not primarily literary-critical, and I do not propose to offer sustained critical commentary on the poetry itself, although my discussion does move towards a closer attention to some detailed features of the poetry. I am mainly interested in some larger questions raised by Browning’s interest in those particular painters, at that particular time in the middle of the nineteenth century. The questions are, briefly, to do
Helena Faucit: from:
Translating Life
Author(s) MARSHALL GAIL
Abstract: Any artistic production inevitably involves an act of translation, a transference of a form, commodity, or idea across a boundary, be that boundary one of time, space, language, or cultural medium. Shakespeare and his works are among the most durable and flexible of translated media, and seem unlikely to be easily exhausted. Particularly interesting are the ways in which ‘Shakespeare’ operates both as an enabling medium and as an object who is himself translated. Within the economy of translation, the facilitating medium is a common point of reference, a shared experience which first makes conceivable the possibility and desirability of
CHAPTER 10 The Visibility of the Holocaust: from:
Social Theory after the Holocaust
Author(s) SALTER MICHAEL
Abstract: Although less well known to social theorists than that of other Frankfurt School members, the work of Franz Neumann has recently become the focus of renewed interest.¹ Within contemporary legal scholarship, that interest has centred largely upon how this ‘junior’ member of the Frankfurt School combined classic liberal constitutional values, particularly a belief in the rule of law, with a distinctive sociological analysis of law.² Several historians have studied the wartime record of Neumann, Kirchheimer and Marcuse,³ but Neumann’s wartime service with US military intelligence has received little attention from legal theorists, in spite of its clear relationship with his
CHAPTER 10 The Visibility of the Holocaust: from:
Social Theory after the Holocaust
Author(s) SALTER MICHAEL
Abstract: Although less well known to social theorists than that of other Frankfurt School members, the work of Franz Neumann has recently become the focus of renewed interest.¹ Within contemporary legal scholarship, that interest has centred largely upon how this ‘junior’ member of the Frankfurt School combined classic liberal constitutional values, particularly a belief in the rule of law, with a distinctive sociological analysis of law.² Several historians have studied the wartime record of Neumann, Kirchheimer and Marcuse,³ but Neumann’s wartime service with US military intelligence has received little attention from legal theorists, in spite of its clear relationship with his
Chapter Two Green mansions to green hell: from:
Colombia’s Forgotten Frontier
Abstract: Representations of the Amazon in travel writing, literature, journalism and, more recently, photography and film draw on narrowly circumscribed and often contradictory terms.² Pristine and pestilential, a place of escape and imprisonment, a tropical paradise and a green hell, the visual and written portrait of this vast and varied river and its environs is remarkably homogeneous – a semantic continuity which extends over place as well as time, effacing not only the changes which have been wrought in the Amazon during the last five hundred or so years, but also the differences between the particular regions and landscapes that constitute
Chapter Eight Oil and blood: from:
Colombia’s Forgotten Frontier
Abstract: ‘It is a horror to go to the Putumayo. I should prefer to go to hell.’ One hundred years after this sentiment was cited in Hardenburg’s book on the rubber boom, the Putumayo continues to generate horror.³ For the past twenty years or so left-wing guerrillas, right-wing paramilitaries, and the army have all played a part in consolidating the region’s reputation as one of the poorest and most dangerous places in Colombia. The Putumayo has been a stronghold of the FARC since the early 1980s and more recently has seen the influx of paramilitaries, leading to frequent armed clashes and
Book Title: Commemorating the Irish Famine-Memory and the Monument
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): MARK-FITZGERALD EMILY
Abstract: Commemorating the Irish Famine: Memory and the Monument presents for the first time a visual cultural history of the 1840s Irish Famine, tracing its representation and commemoration from the 19th century up to its 150th anniversary in the 1990s and beyond. As the watershed event of 19th century Ireland, the Famine’s political and social impacts profoundly shaped modern Ireland and the nations of its diaspora. Yet up until the 1990s, the memory of the Famine remained relatively muted and neglected, attracting little public attention. Thus the Famine commemorative boom of the mid-1990s was unprecedented in scale and output, with close to one hundred monuments newly constructed across Ireland, Britain, the United States, Canada and Australia. Drawing on an extensive global survey of recent community and national responses to the Famine’s anniversary, and by outlining why these memories matter and to whom, this book argues how the phenomenon of Famine commemoration may be understood in the context of a growing memorial culture worldwide. It offers an innovative look at a well-known migration history whilst exploring how a now-global ethnic community redefines itself through acts of public memory and representation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjkfn
2 Visualizing the Famine: from:
Commemorating the Irish Famine
Abstract: If twentieth-century attempts to give visual form to Famine memory are to be understood within a tradition of Famine image-making, the obvious antecedents lie in the visual representations of the Irish Famine from the nineteenth century. How was the Famine visually represented and interpreted in its own time, and what meanings do such images communicate? The evolution of the visual culture and representational history of ‘the Famine’ has yet to be satisfactorily mapped, and the relationship of its nineteenth-century iconography to latter-day visualizations both troubles and intrigues. This central question of how ‘famine’ (conceptually and historically) might be represented in
Foreword from:
French Studies in and for the 21st Century
Author(s) Coussins Baroness Jean
Abstract: At the time of writing, a review of the national curriculum in England and Wales is imminent. As far as languages are concerned, this will be a crucial opportunity to reverse some of the disastrous consequences of previous policies and to introduce new ones, which positively promote both the importance and the pleasure of learning modern foreign languages.
Foreword from:
French Studies in and for the 21st Century
Author(s) Emié Bernard
Abstract: The publication of this book comes at a time when humanities in general, and the teaching of modern foreign languages in particular, feel threatened because of uncertainty in relation to financial and economic circumstances. French Studies departments already faced difficulties when, in 2004, the education department for England decided that a foreign-language GCSE was no longer required to access higher education, a decision that resulted in the dropping of language teaching in many secondary schools. Learning a foreign language is perceived in the UK as being difficult and, the subject having in essence become optional, few pupils enrol in language
14 Teaching and Research in French Cinema from:
French Studies in and for the 21st Century
Author(s) Reader Keith
Abstract: Teaching and research in French cinema has developed rapidly in a relatively short time since the mid- to late 1970s. At that time, teaching was confined to the occasional course unit in a handful of universities, and research was only just starting to emerge from work aimed at cinephile rather than academic readerships. This chapter starts by considering the ways in which teaching has evolved over that time, and then gives an account of developments in research, with a strong focus on the UK, but also taking into account work done in France and the USA.
16 An Area Studies Approach in European and Global Contexts: from:
French Studies in and for the 21st Century
Author(s) Chafer Tony
Abstract: In the 1970s, staff in the School of Languages and Area Studies (SLAS) at Portsmouth Polytechnic (as it was then) decided to develop a new type of language degree. At that time, the traditional model was the ‘lang and lit’ degree programme. Students who wanted to study languages were more or less obliged to combine the study of their chosen language(s) with the study of (mostly) the literary classics of that country. There were a few exceptions: York University, for example, offered programmes in language and linguistics, Salford and Bath specialised in translation, while Aston offered students the opportunity to
19 French Studies at the Open University: from:
French Studies in and for the 21st Century
Author(s) Vialleton Elodie
Abstract: At the Open University, French is taught by the largest but least conventional department of languages in the UK. Numbers of language students are now approaching 10,000 a year, which translates into over 3,000 full-time equivalent student (FTEs) numbers. In terms of recruitment, whether actual students or FTEs, the Open University is also the largest French department in the UK. This chapter describes our distinctive and innovative approach to teaching French, and our related research activities. It opens by setting language learning in the context of supported distance education, and concludes by proposing wider inter-university collaboration in the context of
2 The Irish in London from:
London Irish Fictions
Abstract: Irish people have been deeply woven into the fabric of London life for centuries. The first records of Irish migrant workers originate from the twelfth century, when the majority were employed as labourers and street-vendors, although some had to resort to other means of survival, as evidenced by a statute in 1243 to expel Irish beggars.¹ By Tudor times, the Irish were no strangers to a city which had, in John Denvir’s lurid description, ‘seen many an Irish chief and noble brought in chains to perish miserably in the gloomy dungeons of the Tower’.² Lesser mortals were excluded from work
5 Ersatz Exiles from:
London Irish Fictions
Abstract: The prospects for pursuing a literary career in the censorious moral climate of mid-twentieth-century Ireland were seriously circumscribed. Literature was a key target of the draconian censorship laws passed by the government of the Irish Free State and there were few opportunities and outlets for young aspiring writers, many of whom were forced (in time-honoured fashion) to seek fulfilment of their ambitions abroad.¹ For centuries, London had provided Irish writers with a potentially international market for their work. As a global hub of theatre and publishing, and by 1945 more physically accessible than hitherto, it became the favoured choice of
6 Departures and Returns from:
London Irish Fictions
Abstract: Emigration has been at the heart of Irish life for centuries, not least in the post-war years. Even if many men and women chose not to leave Ireland, nobody was entirely immune to the effects of migration. Most people knew at least one person, whether it was a relative or an acquaintance, who had decided to ‘take the boat’. Conversation and, to some degree, preoccupations and way of life in Ireland during the post-war years were deeply underscored by emigration. Even if its economic and social ravages were sometimes consigned to the periphery of public debate by politicians and the
7 Gendered Entanglements from:
London Irish Fictions
Abstract: Margaret Mulvihill is one of the few Irish women writers to have written consistently about the experiences of the post-war Irish in Britain. Her three novels are all period pieces set in London in the 1980s and early 1990s and her characterizations of young Irish migrants from this time mirror some of the satirical observations in earlier work by Anthony Cronin and Donall Mac Amhlaigh. However, for Mulvihill, who was born in Dublin in 1954 and came to London in her twenties, her perspective on the subject of migration was also imbued with a pronounced feminist sensibility. Apart from being
8 Ex-Pat Pastiche from:
London Irish Fictions
Abstract: In the economic and political circumstances of 1980s’ Ireland, emigration presented an attractive option – and in some cases the only option – for young people north and south of the border. The two key protagonists of the works I examine in this chapter, the first from Dublin and the second from Belfast, are representative of these changes. Their authors, Joseph O’Connor and Robert McLiam Wilson respectively, were typical of a new generation of Irish authors at the time who brought a renewed youthful iconoclasm to the pages of Irish fiction. Here, familiar locations of Irish London (the building site;
Introduction from:
London Irish Fictions
Abstract: In the British census of 2001, which for the first time allowed respondents to indicate their ‘cultural background’, only seven to eight per cent of an estimated two to two and a half million second-generation Irish people in Britain ticked the box marked ‘Irish’. Researchers have offered a number of reasons why such a small percentage of second-generation migrants were disinclined to identify themselves in this way, among them being a tendency to read the concept of ‘cultural background’ (or ethnicity) as equivalent to formal nationality.² The outcome of the census illustrates just how difficult it is to quantify or
11 Elastic Paddies from:
London Irish Fictions
Abstract: Irish culture is nothing if not persistent. It can sometimes seem so elastic, so open to infinite variation and appropriation, as to be virtually
12 Conclusion from:
London Irish Fictions
Abstract: The novels, short stories and auto/biographical texts I have examined in this book are written and peopled by men and women who, as well as making journeys from one country to another, have embarked upon narrative journeys of the mind. Unlike the geographical journey of migration, however, narrative is not a linear process. Instead, it possesses an inherent temporal elasticity that often enables writers to deploy inventive methods and modes of storytelling and characterization. Rather than simply providing a series of period snapshots, these texts reveal how identities are configured over time as well as space. In other words, they
Introduction: from:
Back to Modern Reason
Abstract: In his youth, Johan Hjerpe served in the linen shop of the wholesaler Anders Kjellstedt in the Old Town. Like others he started at the bottom but did better than most, rising in time above his humble beginnings.² An industrious and decent man, in 1801 he eventually acquired a small workshop for the production of silk thread and camel hair, by which time he was already thirty-five
Chapter 1 Johan Hjerpe and the artisan uprising in support of the king’s war from:
Back to Modern Reason
Abstract: On Monday 27 April 1789, the artisan journeymen of Stockholm demonstrated through the Old Town. They had most likely spent the night, not with their masters as they should have, but in hostelries, drunk and up to no good. At about half past eleven in the morning, they occupied the Riddarhustorget outside the House of the Nobility, where they continued their uproar until four o’clock in the afternoon, ‘at which time a heavy downpour, combined with the flexed batons of the police officers, helped to disperse the drunken mob’.¹
Chapter 2 The coherence of the inconsistent self: from:
Back to Modern Reason
Abstract: Towards the end of the preceding chapter, I attempted to explain what led the artisan journeymen of Stockholm and Johan Hjerpe to take part in Gustavus III’s showdown with the nobility in the spring of 1789, an episode worthy of a war novel. Although this was not stated, my interpretation was based on a set of general hypotheses about the human mind. The hypotheses underlay the text as its analytical precondition, which perhaps made the interpretation difficult to follow, and possibly also more provocative than it would otherwise have been. At the same time, fuller explanations would have been even
Chapter 4 New cultural history and old history of mentalities from:
Back to Modern Reason
Abstract: In the preceding chapter, I tried to build up a picture of a certain change in mentality among merchants and artisans in eighteenth-century Stockholm. The picture that emerged demonstrated that a shift was taking place in the cultural frames of reference. But because the change was very slow, it must have been difficult for those involved to notice it, however much they themselves contributed to it. In time, however, its effects became evident to all, and it is conceivable that, in retrospect, the change can be registered with the help of statistics, for instance.
Obscene Libel and the Language of ‘The Imperfect Enjoyment’ from:
Reading Rochester
Author(s) McGHEE JIM
Abstract: In his bestselling sermon for Rochester’s funeral, Robert Parsons, chaplain to the Earl’s mother, claimed that Rochester had made a last request that ‘those persons, in whose custody his Papers were’, would ‘burn all his profane and lewd Writings, as being only fit to promote Vice and Immorality’.¹ Parsons’ image of Rochester’s shameful and blasphemous texts ablaze with the flames of Holy Religion is particularly apt in the light of their subsequent publication history. Part of the ritual of press control still current at this time was the public burning by the hangman of a symbolic copy of the banned
‘An Allusion to Horace’, Jonson’s Ghost, and the Second Poets’ War from:
Reading Rochester
Author(s) HAMMOND BREAN S.
Abstract: Post-Romantic conceptions of originality make it difficult for us to regard as other than paradoxical the claim that ‘An Allusion to Horace’, the poem in which Rochester is most indebted to a precursor, is also one of his most original contributions to English poetry. If Rochester was not quite the first English poet to press a Roman satire into the service of his own times, he was the first to appreciate that this could be done systematically over the length of an entire poem, to wit Horace’s
Satire1.10.¹ Doubtless, Rochester did not intuit the full potential of this new
‘The Present Moment’ and ‘Times Whiter Series’: from:
Reading Rochester
Author(s) BEATTY BERNARD
Abstract: Dryden and Rochester are the most considerable poets of their day and knowingly represent their times. Both poets are fascinated, too, by their occupancy of time but they understand and represent this in entirely different ways. This divergence is most easily marked in their reading of Charles II and his court but it controls, too, their attitude to sexuality and, finally, distinguishes the specific nature of their religious conversions.
CHAPTER 3 Multiple Modernities or Global Interconnections: from:
Varieties of World Making
Author(s) Bhambra Gurminder K.
Abstract: The colonial encounter has been a defining moment in the making of the contemporary world. It has
madea particular world and established cognitive patterns forknowingthe world, yet the colonial encounter is missing in most sociological accounts of modernity. In recent times, increasing significance has been given to global phenomena. Acknowledging the complexity brought by globalization and interdependence has led theorists to contend that a new approach to modernity is needed. A shift from the singular trajectory of modernity to multiple modernities has been recommended (Arnason 2000; Delanty 2004; Eisenstadt 2000, 2001, 2004; Eisenstadt and Schluchter 1998; Wittrock
CHAPTER 7 ‘Horizontal’ Connections and Interactions in Global Development from:
Varieties of World Making
Author(s) Halperin Sandra
Abstract: In order to consider fully the challenges and possibilities of world-making, it is necessary to understand the socioeconomic space that already exists across national boundaries and how it has been politically constituted and reconstituted over time. Nelson Goodman’s observation, already cited by the editors in the Introduction to this volume, makes the point precisely: ‘Worldmaking as we know it always starts from worlds already at hand; the making is a re-making’ (1978: 6).
CHAPTER 10 Democratic Justice in a Globalizing Age: from:
Varieties of World Making
Author(s) Fraser Nancy
Abstract: Globalization is changing the way we argue about justice. Not so long ago, in the heyday of social democracy, disputes about justice presumed what I shall call a ‘Keynesian–Westphalian frame’. Typically played out within modern territorial states, arguments about justice were assumed to concern relations among fellow citizens, to be subject to debate within national publics, and to contemplate redress by national states. This was true for each of two major families of justice claims: claims for socioeconomic redistribution and claims for legal or cultural recognition. At a time when the Bretton Woods system of international capital controls facilitated
CHAPTER 12 Worlds Emerging: from:
Varieties of World Making
Author(s) Mouzakitis Angelos
Abstract: Implicit in the idea of world-making are the assumptions that human beings are the makers of their own history and that in the incessant shaping of their socio-historical worlds they experience some sort of commonality. This dual presupposition entails the attribution of at least some sort of control to both individuals and emerging collectivities over the status and direction of socio-historical institutions and life-trajectories. The allegedly ‘common’ world, emerging and/or persisting in time, poses a number of theoretical problems, of which this chapter attempts to examine only those relating to its creation and constitution. However, a preliminary task that I
CHAPTER 13 Imperial Modernism and European World-Making from:
Varieties of World Making
Author(s) Wagner Peter
Abstract: At the time of writing, it seems that the sceptics have been right. After the referenda on the constitutional treaty of the European Union in France and the Netherlands, the European political project is in disarray. Some of those sceptics will even insist that there never was such a political project anyway. The European Union, in their view, is nothing but an association of states to further their own interests, and the apparent acceleration of political integration over the past fifteen years did not really change its nature. The EU Charter of Fundamental Rights, so they will underline, explicitly does
CHAPTER ONE Introduction from:
Spanish Spaces
Abstract: This book derives from my readings from the field of cultural geography in an attempt to reflect on the terrain of the entity known as Spain, through the prism of my scholarly interest in contemporary Spanish cinematic and literary texts. A further motivation is the difficulties I and others wrestle with in Hispanic Studies as we try to investigate questions bounded by an idea of nation, in an era when the whole notion of a nation is open to dispute and indeed discredit. Some scholars now talk of an era of ‘post-nationalism’ and sometimes by implication post-nation-ism, but the concept
CHAPTER FOUR Landscape and identities in the Basque Country from:
Spanish Spaces
Abstract: If landscape, space and place can be used as a way of seeing past traumas and the way in which they haunt the present, they can also be used to see present traumas, too. One of the most enduring legacies of Franco’s dictatorship is the sometimes violent struggle over the political position of the Basque Country, in the north of the Iberian peninsula: although the roots of the Basque nationalist movement promoting greater autonomy or outright independence from Spain go further back in time than the Franco period, the dictatorship added a new edge to calls for a recognition of
CHAPTER SEVEN Coasting: from:
Spanish Spaces
Abstract: Spain has functioned as a tourist location for outsiders for at least the past two centuries. In the nineteenth century Frenchmen found Spain convivial as the primitive other next door, conveniently just the other side of the Pyrenees but allowing an escape, for a time, from the constraints of polite French society. This included a form of sex tourism, or at the very least an appreciation of maidens duskier than those to be found in France. Joseba Gabilondo observes that in the nineteenth century ‘Southern Europe, in continuation with the lower classes of most Northern European countries and cities, becomes
CHAPTER EIGHT Immigration: from:
Spanish Spaces
Abstract: Spanish cinema has for many decades maintained a vein of film-making known as
cine social, films that attempt to deal with social problems in a realist style; and this vein persists today even in an era when scholars and critics of Spanish film acknowledge a move towards more commercially orientated film-making that emphasises narrative and spectacle. Indeed, some film-makers have combined the two, with Benito Zambrano’sSolas(Alone, 2000), for instance, blending a sentimental tale of family and quasi-family relationships with a study of alcoholism and domestic abuse; or Alejandro Amenábar’sMar adentro(The Sea Inside, 2004), a biopic cashing
5 ‘Independences?’ from:
V. Y. Mudimbe
Abstract: Tradition is a contentious notion. What does it really mean? Where is the much-vaunted tradition: in the past, in the present, in the future? Its corpses are silent and demand the intervention of patient pathologists who will retrospectively reveal the time and the etiology of their deaths. The morgue is a text but, ultimately, it defies strict generalisations as the singularity of each corpse cannot be subsumed by one unifying narrative. It could be said that V. Y. Mudimbe, Achille Mbembe, and Patrice Nganang are part of a Central African tradition of writing. Interestingly, each author has devoted a significant
5 ‘Independences?’ from:
V. Y. Mudimbe
Abstract: Tradition is a contentious notion. What does it really mean? Where is the much-vaunted tradition: in the past, in the present, in the future? Its corpses are silent and demand the intervention of patient pathologists who will retrospectively reveal the time and the etiology of their deaths. The morgue is a text but, ultimately, it defies strict generalisations as the singularity of each corpse cannot be subsumed by one unifying narrative. It could be said that V. Y. Mudimbe, Achille Mbembe, and Patrice Nganang are part of a Central African tradition of writing. Interestingly, each author has devoted a significant
Introduction from:
Thresholds of Meaning
Abstract: Over the last thirty years or so, critics and cultural commentators in France and elsewhere have regularly – often with irritation, sometimes with gloomy defeatism and occasionally with a touch of
Schadenfreude– drawn attention to what they believe to be the current ‘crisis’ or even decline of the French novel. These comments are, of course, part of a much more general context in which France has seen its cultural influence in the world undermined by among other factors: competition from the New York and London art markets, the impact of American cinema on French box-office receipts, the popularity of
CHAPTER THREE Commemoration, monument and identity in Bergounioux, Darrieussecq and Rouaud from:
Thresholds of Meaning
Abstract: Over the last thirty years, memory and commemoration studies have become one of the fastest developing interdisciplinary fields in the humanities, attracting the attention of, among others, historians, anthropologists, sociologists, literary critics and art-historians. This growth and the dizzying array of publications produced not only reflect what has been variously described as a memory boom, a memory industry, an addiction to memory and, perhaps most graphically, an ‘immersion in memory and its sites [that] may at times have the quality of junk-Proustian
Schwärmerei’ (LaCapra, 1998, 8).¹ They also attest to the dynamic, if at times confusing and confused, dialogues taking
Introduction: from:
Heidegger and the Thinking of Place
Abstract: The idea of place—of
topos—runs through the thinking of Martin Heidegger almost from the very start. Although not always directly thematized—sometimes apparently obscured, displaced even, by other concepts—and expressed through many different terms (Ort, Ortschaft, Stätte, Gegend, Dasein, Lichtung, Ereignis),¹ it is impossible to think with Heidegger unless one attunes oneself to Heidegger’s own attunement to place. This is something not only to be observed in Heidegger’s attachment to the famous hut at Todtnauberg;² it is also found, more significantly, in his constant deployment of topological terms and images, and in the situated, “placed,” character of
5 Nihilism, Place, and ʺPositionʺ from:
Heidegger and the Thinking of Place
Abstract: According to late Heidegger, the contemporary world is suffering from an “oblivion of being”—we live, he says, in a “desolate time,” a time of destitution, a time of the “world’s night.”¹ He sees this desolation and destitution as most accurately diagnosed by two key thinkers, one of whom is the poet Friedrich Hölderlin and the other the philosopher Friedrich Nietzsche. It is Nietzsche who provides Heidegger with much that is foundational to his analysis of the nihilism that he takes to be characteristic of modernity, yet it is Hölderlin who provides him with a way of thinking that is
6 Place, Space, and World from:
Heidegger and the Thinking of Place
Abstract: The way in which the question of world is implicated with the question of space is already indicated by Heidegger’s very characterization, in
Being and Time, of the essence of human being,Dasein, as being-in-the-world. Here the nature of “being in” is as much at issue as is the nature of “world,” and although Heidegger himself moves fairly quickly to assert, in §12 ofBeing and Time, that “being in” as it figures in relation to world is not a matter of spatialcontainment, but of activeinvolvement,¹ the analysis that follows constantly invokes the spatial at the same time
7 Geography, Biology, and Politics from:
Heidegger and the Thinking of Place
Abstract: To what extent are those forms of contemporary thinking that adopt a holistic or ecological conception of the relation between human being and the environing world associated, even if only implicitly, with a conservative and reactionary politics? That there is such an association is often claimed in relation to a number of thinkers, but most notably perhaps in relation to Heidegger.¹ Sometimes the claim is extended to encompass broader movements in contemporary thought, with environmental thinking being the most common, but by no means the only target here.² Seldom, however, is much consideration given to the way such a claim
The Invention of Language in the Poetry of Job from:
Interested Readers
Author(s) Greenstein Edward L.
Abstract: The book of Job, particularly its poetic core, appears to contain more unique words and linguistic usages than any comparable work from the ancient Near East. The distinctive language of Job has been attributed to a number of literary factors. For one thing, the characters and events are set in a much earlier, legendary period—the time of the patriarchs.¹ Not only does Job enjoy a lifestyle that is reminiscent of the rural, sheep-and-goat-herding Hebrew patriarchs, but the description of Job and his situation in the narrative framework of the book features language and allusions to the stories of Genesis.²
Judging Judges Scholarship from:
Interested Readers
Author(s) Hauser Alan J.
Abstract: How things have changed! The time from the middle of the twentieth century to the
Introduction: from:
Artists, Intellectuals, and World War II
Author(s) Benfey Christopher
Abstract: Pontigny began for me with a faded snapshot, a freeze frame in time. I stumbled across it among the swatch of photographs in the center of Peter Brazeau’s
Parts of a World, his fragmentary “oral history” of people who had known the poet Wallace Stevens. The black and white image, slightly blurred by bright sunlight, shows Stevens, in his habitual business suit—the uniform of an insurance executive from Hartford, Connecticut—seated on the lawn by a brick building beside a diminutive man with wavy hair and glasses. Brazeau’s caption reads: “Jean Wahl and Wallace Stevens at Mount Holyoke College
The Vision of Helen Patch from:
Artists, Intellectuals, and World War II
Author(s) Gelfand Elissa
Abstract: I cannot think of a more propitious moment than our own to reflect on the extraordinary event that was Pontigny-en-Amérique, a series of three summer retreats held during World War II in which some of Europe’s best minds gathered at Mount Holyoke College to talk and argue about nothing less than the future of Western civilization. In light of the frenzy of anti-French sentiment that has swelled in this country in the wake of the war in Iraq—an occurrence I fear I cannot take lightly, “freedom fries” notwithstanding—the words of one of Pontigny’s creators, the eminent medieval scholar
The Philosophical Model of a Counter-Institution from:
Artists, Intellectuals, and World War II
Author(s) Mehlman Jeffrey
Abstract: Although this session is devoted or restricted to philosophy, to the established and statutory discipline named “philosophy,” recognized and designated as such, I believe it legitimate to posit that all the
décadesin which I have participated—even when their title or name gestured in the direction of literature or poetry—were also fully and unreservedly philosophical moments, intensely philosophical adventures that were at times as worthy of “philosophy” as any one of a number of suchdécadesthat might more legitimately lay claim to the title.¹ This stipulation is important to me, to limit myself to the instances to
Reflections on Wallace Stevens at Mount Holyoke from:
Artists, Intellectuals, and World War II
Author(s) Cavell Stanley
Abstract: I counted on the fact that by the time it fell to me to present these remarks, we would have had sketched more of the texture and the details of the event sixty years ago that we are gathered to commemorate than I have learned in the course of my preparation, on and off these past months, for composing them. It went almost without saying in Christopher Benfey’s invitation to me, and in our exchanges about how I might think of my contribution, that I would include reflections on what might have been expected in 1943, from the still moving,
Henry Church and the Literary Magazine Mesures: from:
Artists, Intellectuals, and World War II
Author(s) Cullen John
Abstract: Henry Church was born January 3, 1880, in Brooklyn. He was a descendant of one of the
Mayflowerpilgrims and also of a pharmacist who owned a monopoly on the marketing of bicarbonate of soda in the United States (the source of Church’s immense fortune). At the age of twenty-one, Church went to Europe. He studied music in Munich and chemistry in Geneva before beginning a sojourn in Paris in 1905. After his return to the United States, he married for the first time and had a daughter. For Church, however, America was “neither the wind nor the sea gull’s
Robert Motherwell and the Modern Painter’s World from:
Artists, Intellectuals, and World War II
Author(s) Caws Mary Ann
Abstract: Robert Motherwell is my topic here: I knew him, loved him, and discussed at length with him his relation to the painting and poetry of France and of America, to other arts such as music, and, most particularly, his relation to literary Symbolism—especially to the ur-Symbolist Stéphane Mallarmé, whom I have spent so much time translating—and to Surrealism, a far more difficult issue. I had first been in contact with him through running the journal
Dada/Surrealism, for which he was the art adviser, and then, through his asking me to translate a book about him, and subsequent to
Medievalism and Pontigny from:
Artists, Intellectuals, and World War II
Author(s) Margolis Nadia
Abstract: “Nos yeux reçoivent la lumière des étoiles mortes [our eyes register the light of dead stars].” So began André Schwartz-Bart’s 1959 novel of the Holocaust,
Le dernier des justes (The Last of the Just), which came to mind as I first read through the Pontigny dossier in the Mount Holyoke College Archives in the summer of 1995.¹ The voices in the participants’Régistère, having lain silent within yellowing pages for decades, echoed their protestations from 1942 to 1944. My stumbling upon this archive attests to Mount Holyoke’s on-line catalogue back then—meticulous in ways ahead of its time—and to
Poetry and Reality: from:
Artists, Intellectuals, and World War II
Author(s) Lass Andrew
Abstract: This story has no beginning and may not be able to end. I would like to tell it, stuck as I am on one of its many tangents, if only it would sit still at least for a brief moment while it continues to expand. It is the story of chance meetings, some fortuitous, some foretold, and several others missed along the way. It was in 1941, in New York City, that the young French anthropologist Claude Lévi-Strauss first encountered the charismatic Russian linguist and onetime poet Roman Osipovich Jakobson. He attended his lectures on “Sound and Meaning” at the
A Tale of Two Iliads from:
Artists, Intellectuals, and World War II
Author(s) Benfey Christopher
Abstract: The critic Kenneth Burke once suggested that classic literary works could serve as “equipment for living” by revealing familiar narrative patterns in new and chaotic circumstances.¹ If so, it should not surprise us that European readers in times of war should look to their first poem for guidance. As early as the fall of 1935, Jean Giraudoux’s popular play
La guerre de Troie n’aura pas lieuencouraged his French audience to think of their country as vulnerable Troy while an armed and menacing Hitler was the “Tiger at the Gates” (as the play was titled in English). Truth was the
Hannah Arendt on Action and Violence with Reference to Simone Weil and Rachel Bespaloff on Homer’s Iliad: from:
Artists, Intellectuals, and World War II
Author(s) Young-Bruehl Elisabeth
Abstract: In 1968 Elisabeth and I met for the first time in Hannah Arendt’s seminar “Political Experiences in the Twentieth Century,” and we have been talking ever since. We have often wondered why, in 1968, just as her students were protesting America’s aggression in Vietnam, which she also opposed, Arendt chose to evoke the wars, revolutions, and unprecedented terror that had destroyed so many millions of lives in the first half of the twentieth century. Just five years earlier, in her book
On Revolution, she had affirmed the political and legal principles of the Constitution of the United States, which inspired
Concerning the Label Emigrant: from:
Artists, Intellectuals, and World War II
Author(s) Teschke Holger
Abstract: Pontigny-en-Amérique provided a space for French refugees to gather and continue their conversation about art, ideas, and politics in the dark time of World War II. Other refugees, particularly those lucky enough to escape from Nazi Germany, were equally eager to create spaces for exchanging ideas and forging resistance, even as they found themselves in constant flight. The dark times in Europe between 1933 and 1942 are the topic of Bertolt Brecht’s conversational play about the situation of two German refugees in Scandinavian exile.¹ Brecht’s play offers both a complementary account of similar “conversations in exile” as well as some
Rediscovering Rachel Bespaloff from:
Artists, Intellectuals, and World War II
Author(s) Jutrin Monique
Abstract: For many years I have been studying the work of Benjamin Fondane, a poet, philosopher, critic, and playwright, who was a contemporary of Rachel Bespaloff. In a diary of Fondane’s encounters and discussions with Shestov I came across the name of Rachel Bespaloff for the first time.¹ She appeared an irritating woman who never agreed with Shestov. Bespaloff’s father, Daniel Pasmanik, a friend of Shestov’s, introduced his daughter to him. At first, she was very impressed by Shestov. He awakened her to philosophical thought, and she is still considered a disciple of Shestov, though she later became opposed to certain
Memories of Rachel Bespaloff from:
Artists, Intellectuals, and World War II
Author(s) Amster Barbara Levin
Abstract: As a brand-new freshman in Pearsons Hall, I crossed College Street, walked through the gates, and fell in love with Mount Holyoke College. It is a love affair that has lasted more than fifty years. Little did I know in those early days that Mount Holyoke would change my life forever. Rachel Bespaloff was the architect of that change. Indeed, the most significant part of my college and lifetime experience was my relationship with her.
Book Title: Questions ultimes- Publisher: Les Presses de l'Université d'Ottawa
Author(s): De Koninck Thomas
Abstract: Le premier défi de la démocratie est de donner le «goût de l'avenir» (Alexis de Tocqueville), de générer l'enthousiasme qui poussera les jeunes d'esprit à progresser d'eux-mêmes vers de nouvelles quêtes de sens et de savoir, à renouveler peut-être surtout, dans le contexte des nouvelles connaissances et d'une prise de conscience accrue des richesses des différentes cultures, les questions que l'on appelle «ultimes et les plus hautes», pour citer Husserl, celles que la science exclut par principe et qui sont pourtant «les questions les plus brûlantes», portant «sur le sens ou sur l'absence de sens de toute cette existence humaine». Le simple mot
questionévoque d'emblée le vieux françaisqueste, c'est-à-dire laquête, du latinquaerere, «rechercher», «aimer»; il traduit le désir de voir et de savoir, impliquant du coup les deux dimensions à la fois les plus essentielles et les plus grandes de notre être proprement humain, la capacité d'aimer et celle de penser. Une éducation qui exclurait, comme tranchées d'avance, ces questions ultimes, ne serait nullement à la hauteur de l'humain. Les essais composant ce livre explorent six d'entre elles, à savoir la dignité humaine, l'intelligence, la liberté, le bonheur, la mort et la beauté.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vkc7g
Book Title: Questions ultimes- Publisher: Les Presses de l'Université d'Ottawa
Author(s): De Koninck Thomas
Abstract: Le premier défi de la démocratie est de donner le «goût de l'avenir» (Alexis de Tocqueville), de générer l'enthousiasme qui poussera les jeunes d'esprit à progresser d'eux-mêmes vers de nouvelles quêtes de sens et de savoir, à renouveler peut-être surtout, dans le contexte des nouvelles connaissances et d'une prise de conscience accrue des richesses des différentes cultures, les questions que l'on appelle «ultimes et les plus hautes», pour citer Husserl, celles que la science exclut par principe et qui sont pourtant «les questions les plus brûlantes», portant «sur le sens ou sur l'absence de sens de toute cette existence humaine». Le simple mot
questionévoque d'emblée le vieux françaisqueste, c'est-à-dire laquête, du latinquaerere, «rechercher», «aimer»; il traduit le désir de voir et de savoir, impliquant du coup les deux dimensions à la fois les plus essentielles et les plus grandes de notre être proprement humain, la capacité d'aimer et celle de penser. Une éducation qui exclurait, comme tranchées d'avance, ces questions ultimes, ne serait nullement à la hauteur de l'humain. Les essais composant ce livre explorent six d'entre elles, à savoir la dignité humaine, l'intelligence, la liberté, le bonheur, la mort et la beauté.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vkc7g
Book Title: Questions ultimes- Publisher: Les Presses de l'Université d'Ottawa
Author(s): De Koninck Thomas
Abstract: Le premier défi de la démocratie est de donner le «goût de l'avenir» (Alexis de Tocqueville), de générer l'enthousiasme qui poussera les jeunes d'esprit à progresser d'eux-mêmes vers de nouvelles quêtes de sens et de savoir, à renouveler peut-être surtout, dans le contexte des nouvelles connaissances et d'une prise de conscience accrue des richesses des différentes cultures, les questions que l'on appelle «ultimes et les plus hautes», pour citer Husserl, celles que la science exclut par principe et qui sont pourtant «les questions les plus brûlantes», portant «sur le sens ou sur l'absence de sens de toute cette existence humaine». Le simple mot
questionévoque d'emblée le vieux françaisqueste, c'est-à-dire laquête, du latinquaerere, «rechercher», «aimer»; il traduit le désir de voir et de savoir, impliquant du coup les deux dimensions à la fois les plus essentielles et les plus grandes de notre être proprement humain, la capacité d'aimer et celle de penser. Une éducation qui exclurait, comme tranchées d'avance, ces questions ultimes, ne serait nullement à la hauteur de l'humain. Les essais composant ce livre explorent six d'entre elles, à savoir la dignité humaine, l'intelligence, la liberté, le bonheur, la mort et la beauté.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vkc7g
Book Title: Questions ultimes- Publisher: Les Presses de l'Université d'Ottawa
Author(s): De Koninck Thomas
Abstract: Le premier défi de la démocratie est de donner le «goût de l'avenir» (Alexis de Tocqueville), de générer l'enthousiasme qui poussera les jeunes d'esprit à progresser d'eux-mêmes vers de nouvelles quêtes de sens et de savoir, à renouveler peut-être surtout, dans le contexte des nouvelles connaissances et d'une prise de conscience accrue des richesses des différentes cultures, les questions que l'on appelle «ultimes et les plus hautes», pour citer Husserl, celles que la science exclut par principe et qui sont pourtant «les questions les plus brûlantes», portant «sur le sens ou sur l'absence de sens de toute cette existence humaine». Le simple mot
questionévoque d'emblée le vieux françaisqueste, c'est-à-dire laquête, du latinquaerere, «rechercher», «aimer»; il traduit le désir de voir et de savoir, impliquant du coup les deux dimensions à la fois les plus essentielles et les plus grandes de notre être proprement humain, la capacité d'aimer et celle de penser. Une éducation qui exclurait, comme tranchées d'avance, ces questions ultimes, ne serait nullement à la hauteur de l'humain. Les essais composant ce livre explorent six d'entre elles, à savoir la dignité humaine, l'intelligence, la liberté, le bonheur, la mort et la beauté.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vkc7g
Book Title: Questions ultimes- Publisher: Les Presses de l'Université d'Ottawa
Author(s): De Koninck Thomas
Abstract: Le premier défi de la démocratie est de donner le «goût de l'avenir» (Alexis de Tocqueville), de générer l'enthousiasme qui poussera les jeunes d'esprit à progresser d'eux-mêmes vers de nouvelles quêtes de sens et de savoir, à renouveler peut-être surtout, dans le contexte des nouvelles connaissances et d'une prise de conscience accrue des richesses des différentes cultures, les questions que l'on appelle «ultimes et les plus hautes», pour citer Husserl, celles que la science exclut par principe et qui sont pourtant «les questions les plus brûlantes», portant «sur le sens ou sur l'absence de sens de toute cette existence humaine». Le simple mot
questionévoque d'emblée le vieux françaisqueste, c'est-à-dire laquête, du latinquaerere, «rechercher», «aimer»; il traduit le désir de voir et de savoir, impliquant du coup les deux dimensions à la fois les plus essentielles et les plus grandes de notre être proprement humain, la capacité d'aimer et celle de penser. Une éducation qui exclurait, comme tranchées d'avance, ces questions ultimes, ne serait nullement à la hauteur de l'humain. Les essais composant ce livre explorent six d'entre elles, à savoir la dignité humaine, l'intelligence, la liberté, le bonheur, la mort et la beauté.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vkc7g
Chapter 4 British Idealism as a Migrating Tradition from:
Migrating Texts and Traditions
Author(s) Sweet William
Abstract: It has long been recognized that the philosophy of late-19
th- and early-20th-century British Idealism had a significant influence in Britain, not only on the philosophical thought of the time, but also on religion, politics and social and public policy.¹ Its impact, however, was felt not only in Britain but throughout much of its empire and even beyond. Recent studies have noted the presence of the work of the British idealists in Canada, Australia and South Africa, and also in the United States, India, Japan and China.² Nevertheless, relatively little has been written concerning precisely how and how far the presence
Chapter 6 Heidegger, Japanese Aesthetics, and the Idea of a ‘Dialogue’ between East and West from:
Migrating Texts and Traditions
Author(s) Kobayashi Chinatsu
Abstract: The story of ‘modern Japanese philosophy’ offers an interesting case study of ‘migration’. The expression covers, roughly, the philosophical output in Japan during the first half of the 20
thcentury, including the writings of the Kyoto School, founded around Kitaro Nishida.¹ This modern Japanese philosophy originated in the discovery by the Japanese of the Western philosophical tradition during the closing decades of the 19thcentury. There had been until then no knowledge of the latter and no recognizably independent Japanese tradition of philosophy. However, from the time of Kukai, Shinran and Dogen, there had been no lack of religious discourse
Chapter 9 A Buddhist ‘good life’ Theory: from:
Migrating Texts and Traditions
Author(s) Patrik Linda E.
Abstract: Scholars in diaspora carry their texts with them—as many texts as possible—to preserve their cultural and intellectual tradition when they are threatened by political forces and military invasions. The Tibetan scholars who fled Tibet in 1959 managed to bring out a large number of classic texts central to the Mahayana Buddhist philosophy and religion of pre-invasion Tibet. Among these texts was an old Indian Buddhist work on ethics, Śāntideva’s
Bodhicaryāvatāra (Guide to the Bodhisattva Path), which had itself been carried out of India centuries earlier during the time when Buddhism disappeared from its Indian birthplace. For over a
Chapter 10 Sharing Insights: from:
Migrating Texts and Traditions
Author(s) Mason Sheila
Abstract: In the last few decades we have seen increasing turmoil in the world and an increasing concern about the weakening of moral bonds within the Western societies.¹ At the same time we have seen a great outpouring of writings on Buddhism in North America. Buddhist masters have founded centres for the study and practice of meditation, many North American men and women have become practitioners and teachers of Buddhism, some taking vows and becoming monks or nuns, while the Dalai Lama has become a public figure of great renown. Anyone with the inclination can easily find books, websites and courses
Chapter 15 Philosophy-in-Place and Texts Out of Place from:
Migrating Texts and Traditions
Author(s) Janz Bruce
Abstract: Can a text migrate? What would it mean to use such a metaphor (and it is, without doubt, a metaphor)? We think of animals and people as migrating, sometimes by choice, sometimes by instinct, sometimes by compulsion. Migration is movement, but not just any movement. It is movement across geographical, national and/or cultural boundaries or differences. So, migration requires difference of some sort. We rarely speak of someone or something as having migrated if no change or adaptation was required, although of course at some level every move is by definition a change. Migration, then, must refer to specific kinds
Chapter 4 British Idealism as a Migrating Tradition from:
Migrating Texts and Traditions
Author(s) Sweet William
Abstract: It has long been recognized that the philosophy of late-19
th- and early-20th-century British Idealism had a significant influence in Britain, not only on the philosophical thought of the time, but also on religion, politics and social and public policy.¹ Its impact, however, was felt not only in Britain but throughout much of its empire and even beyond. Recent studies have noted the presence of the work of the British idealists in Canada, Australia and South Africa, and also in the United States, India, Japan and China.² Nevertheless, relatively little has been written concerning precisely how and how far the presence
Chapter 6 Heidegger, Japanese Aesthetics, and the Idea of a ‘Dialogue’ between East and West from:
Migrating Texts and Traditions
Author(s) Kobayashi Chinatsu
Abstract: The story of ‘modern Japanese philosophy’ offers an interesting case study of ‘migration’. The expression covers, roughly, the philosophical output in Japan during the first half of the 20
thcentury, including the writings of the Kyoto School, founded around Kitaro Nishida.¹ This modern Japanese philosophy originated in the discovery by the Japanese of the Western philosophical tradition during the closing decades of the 19thcentury. There had been until then no knowledge of the latter and no recognizably independent Japanese tradition of philosophy. However, from the time of Kukai, Shinran and Dogen, there had been no lack of religious discourse
Chapter 9 A Buddhist ‘good life’ Theory: from:
Migrating Texts and Traditions
Author(s) Patrik Linda E.
Abstract: Scholars in diaspora carry their texts with them—as many texts as possible—to preserve their cultural and intellectual tradition when they are threatened by political forces and military invasions. The Tibetan scholars who fled Tibet in 1959 managed to bring out a large number of classic texts central to the Mahayana Buddhist philosophy and religion of pre-invasion Tibet. Among these texts was an old Indian Buddhist work on ethics, Śāntideva’s
Bodhicaryāvatāra (Guide to the Bodhisattva Path), which had itself been carried out of India centuries earlier during the time when Buddhism disappeared from its Indian birthplace. For over a
Chapter 10 Sharing Insights: from:
Migrating Texts and Traditions
Author(s) Mason Sheila
Abstract: In the last few decades we have seen increasing turmoil in the world and an increasing concern about the weakening of moral bonds within the Western societies.¹ At the same time we have seen a great outpouring of writings on Buddhism in North America. Buddhist masters have founded centres for the study and practice of meditation, many North American men and women have become practitioners and teachers of Buddhism, some taking vows and becoming monks or nuns, while the Dalai Lama has become a public figure of great renown. Anyone with the inclination can easily find books, websites and courses
Chapter 15 Philosophy-in-Place and Texts Out of Place from:
Migrating Texts and Traditions
Author(s) Janz Bruce
Abstract: Can a text migrate? What would it mean to use such a metaphor (and it is, without doubt, a metaphor)? We think of animals and people as migrating, sometimes by choice, sometimes by instinct, sometimes by compulsion. Migration is movement, but not just any movement. It is movement across geographical, national and/or cultural boundaries or differences. So, migration requires difference of some sort. We rarely speak of someone or something as having migrated if no change or adaptation was required, although of course at some level every move is by definition a change. Migration, then, must refer to specific kinds
Chapter 4 British Idealism as a Migrating Tradition from:
Migrating Texts and Traditions
Author(s) Sweet William
Abstract: It has long been recognized that the philosophy of late-19
th- and early-20th-century British Idealism had a significant influence in Britain, not only on the philosophical thought of the time, but also on religion, politics and social and public policy.¹ Its impact, however, was felt not only in Britain but throughout much of its empire and even beyond. Recent studies have noted the presence of the work of the British idealists in Canada, Australia and South Africa, and also in the United States, India, Japan and China.² Nevertheless, relatively little has been written concerning precisely how and how far the presence
Chapter 6 Heidegger, Japanese Aesthetics, and the Idea of a ‘Dialogue’ between East and West from:
Migrating Texts and Traditions
Author(s) Kobayashi Chinatsu
Abstract: The story of ‘modern Japanese philosophy’ offers an interesting case study of ‘migration’. The expression covers, roughly, the philosophical output in Japan during the first half of the 20
thcentury, including the writings of the Kyoto School, founded around Kitaro Nishida.¹ This modern Japanese philosophy originated in the discovery by the Japanese of the Western philosophical tradition during the closing decades of the 19thcentury. There had been until then no knowledge of the latter and no recognizably independent Japanese tradition of philosophy. However, from the time of Kukai, Shinran and Dogen, there had been no lack of religious discourse
Chapter 9 A Buddhist ‘good life’ Theory: from:
Migrating Texts and Traditions
Author(s) Patrik Linda E.
Abstract: Scholars in diaspora carry their texts with them—as many texts as possible—to preserve their cultural and intellectual tradition when they are threatened by political forces and military invasions. The Tibetan scholars who fled Tibet in 1959 managed to bring out a large number of classic texts central to the Mahayana Buddhist philosophy and religion of pre-invasion Tibet. Among these texts was an old Indian Buddhist work on ethics, Śāntideva’s
Bodhicaryāvatāra (Guide to the Bodhisattva Path), which had itself been carried out of India centuries earlier during the time when Buddhism disappeared from its Indian birthplace. For over a
Chapter 10 Sharing Insights: from:
Migrating Texts and Traditions
Author(s) Mason Sheila
Abstract: In the last few decades we have seen increasing turmoil in the world and an increasing concern about the weakening of moral bonds within the Western societies.¹ At the same time we have seen a great outpouring of writings on Buddhism in North America. Buddhist masters have founded centres for the study and practice of meditation, many North American men and women have become practitioners and teachers of Buddhism, some taking vows and becoming monks or nuns, while the Dalai Lama has become a public figure of great renown. Anyone with the inclination can easily find books, websites and courses
Chapter 15 Philosophy-in-Place and Texts Out of Place from:
Migrating Texts and Traditions
Author(s) Janz Bruce
Abstract: Can a text migrate? What would it mean to use such a metaphor (and it is, without doubt, a metaphor)? We think of animals and people as migrating, sometimes by choice, sometimes by instinct, sometimes by compulsion. Migration is movement, but not just any movement. It is movement across geographical, national and/or cultural boundaries or differences. So, migration requires difference of some sort. We rarely speak of someone or something as having migrated if no change or adaptation was required, although of course at some level every move is by definition a change. Migration, then, must refer to specific kinds
Chapter 4 British Idealism as a Migrating Tradition from:
Migrating Texts and Traditions
Author(s) Sweet William
Abstract: It has long been recognized that the philosophy of late-19
th- and early-20th-century British Idealism had a significant influence in Britain, not only on the philosophical thought of the time, but also on religion, politics and social and public policy.¹ Its impact, however, was felt not only in Britain but throughout much of its empire and even beyond. Recent studies have noted the presence of the work of the British idealists in Canada, Australia and South Africa, and also in the United States, India, Japan and China.² Nevertheless, relatively little has been written concerning precisely how and how far the presence
Chapter 6 Heidegger, Japanese Aesthetics, and the Idea of a ‘Dialogue’ between East and West from:
Migrating Texts and Traditions
Author(s) Kobayashi Chinatsu
Abstract: The story of ‘modern Japanese philosophy’ offers an interesting case study of ‘migration’. The expression covers, roughly, the philosophical output in Japan during the first half of the 20
thcentury, including the writings of the Kyoto School, founded around Kitaro Nishida.¹ This modern Japanese philosophy originated in the discovery by the Japanese of the Western philosophical tradition during the closing decades of the 19thcentury. There had been until then no knowledge of the latter and no recognizably independent Japanese tradition of philosophy. However, from the time of Kukai, Shinran and Dogen, there had been no lack of religious discourse
Chapter 9 A Buddhist ‘good life’ Theory: from:
Migrating Texts and Traditions
Author(s) Patrik Linda E.
Abstract: Scholars in diaspora carry their texts with them—as many texts as possible—to preserve their cultural and intellectual tradition when they are threatened by political forces and military invasions. The Tibetan scholars who fled Tibet in 1959 managed to bring out a large number of classic texts central to the Mahayana Buddhist philosophy and religion of pre-invasion Tibet. Among these texts was an old Indian Buddhist work on ethics, Śāntideva’s
Bodhicaryāvatāra (Guide to the Bodhisattva Path), which had itself been carried out of India centuries earlier during the time when Buddhism disappeared from its Indian birthplace. For over a
Chapter 10 Sharing Insights: from:
Migrating Texts and Traditions
Author(s) Mason Sheila
Abstract: In the last few decades we have seen increasing turmoil in the world and an increasing concern about the weakening of moral bonds within the Western societies.¹ At the same time we have seen a great outpouring of writings on Buddhism in North America. Buddhist masters have founded centres for the study and practice of meditation, many North American men and women have become practitioners and teachers of Buddhism, some taking vows and becoming monks or nuns, while the Dalai Lama has become a public figure of great renown. Anyone with the inclination can easily find books, websites and courses
Chapter 15 Philosophy-in-Place and Texts Out of Place from:
Migrating Texts and Traditions
Author(s) Janz Bruce
Abstract: Can a text migrate? What would it mean to use such a metaphor (and it is, without doubt, a metaphor)? We think of animals and people as migrating, sometimes by choice, sometimes by instinct, sometimes by compulsion. Migration is movement, but not just any movement. It is movement across geographical, national and/or cultural boundaries or differences. So, migration requires difference of some sort. We rarely speak of someone or something as having migrated if no change or adaptation was required, although of course at some level every move is by definition a change. Migration, then, must refer to specific kinds
6 DANCE IN THE HERMENEUTIC CIRCLE from:
Researching Dance
Author(s) McNamara Joann
Abstract: Discussing the Judson Church Dance Theatre in a dance history class, a student wonders: What was it like to dance in New York in the early 1960s, and to be part of the social milieu of that time?
6 DANCE IN THE HERMENEUTIC CIRCLE from:
Researching Dance
Author(s) McNamara Joann
Abstract: Discussing the Judson Church Dance Theatre in a dance history class, a student wonders: What was it like to dance in New York in the early 1960s, and to be part of the social milieu of that time?
2.1 Philosophy and Folk Psychology from:
Mindscapes
Author(s) Haugeland John
Abstract: People, as rational or intelligent animals, are distinctive not only in their understanding of the events and things around them, but also in their understanding of one another—specifically, their understanding of one another as rational or intelligent. This latter understanding, in its general character, is what Paul Churchland once called “folk psychology,” and the name has stuck. The principal aim of Von Eckardt’s paper is to argue that philosophical discussions of folk psychology—including, but certainly not limited to Churchland’s—suffer from being empirically underinformed. In particular, by neglecting a substantial research tradition within what is sometimes called “social
7.1 On the Difficulty of Keeping Consciousness Intact: from:
Mindscapes
Author(s) Carrier Martin
Abstract: The aim of Lahav’s paper is to secure a home for consciousness. This home should rest on scientific foundations and at the same time accommodate the philosophical intuitions traditionally associated with this notion. I am fully sympathetic to this project, and I believe that Lahav’s approach is interesting and viable. Lahav argues for an account of consciousness that identifies conscious mental events by the role they play in the cognitive architecture, that is, functionally. What he rejects is a qualitybased view of consciousness according to which conscious mental events are distinguished by some internal qualitative property.
Fishing for the [Mediating] Self: from:
The Philosophy of Tim Burton
Author(s) Hada Ken
Abstract: No son wants a delusional or dishonest father, but this seems to be the situation that Will Bloom (Billy Crudup) faces in Tim Burton’s film
Big Fish(2003). Will is convinced that his father, Ed Bloom (Albert Finney), is an irresponsible liar whose self-proclaimed fantastic identity is delusional. The film’s setting brings father and son together one last time as Ed is confined to his deathbed. Though Will has not spoken to his father in three years, he returns home to be with him during his last days. In addition to dealing with the emotional intensity of preparing to bury
Johnny Depp Is a Big Baby! from:
The Philosophy of Tim Burton
Author(s) Walling Mark
Abstract: Ed Wood (Johnny Depp) is directing a scene in Tim Burton’s biopic (
Ed Wood,1994) of the man voted the worst film director of all time. The film isBride of the Atom,which was released asBride of the Monster(1955), one of Wood’s more infamous works. As he enters a room, Tor Johnson (George “The Animal” Steele), a bald-headed, hairy-shouldered professional wrestler turned actor, receives instructions from Wood to act upset. Tor grasps his rock of a head with massive hands. Wood corrects, “No, no, you’re not that upset. You want to keep moving. You’ve got to get
A Symphony of Horror: from:
The Philosophy of Tim Burton
Author(s) Jenkins Jennifer L.
Abstract: Sweeney Todd(2007) marks a significant deviation for Tim Burton in terms of his prior work and practice.¹ While he had already worked on musicals (The Nightmare Before Christmas[1993],Corpse Bride[2005]) and literary adaptations (Sleepy Hollow[1999],Planet of the Apes[2001],Big Fish[2004],Charlie and the Chocolate Factory[2005]),Sweeneydiffers by being an adaptation of an existing stage musical with a long provenance. Nor is it scored by Burton’s longtime collaborator Danny Elfman. It shares with his other adapted works a firm grounding in the American literary canon, Stephen Sondheim being the touted scion of
Affect without Illusion: from:
The Philosophy of Tim Burton
Author(s) LaRocca David
Abstract: The director Edward D. Wood Jr. is derided for the films he made in the 1950s and otherwise notorious as the “worst director of all time”—a sort of patron saint of the B movie.¹ Part of the pleasure audiences derive from proclaiming Wood the worst practitioner of filmmaking seems linked with an expression of resentment: hidden in the criticism of his work lies a belief and expectation (perhaps unacknowledged or unarticulated) that filmmakers are supposed to show us our world by taking us out of it. To outer space if need be. Science fiction, for example, is a film
Fishing for the [Mediating] Self: from:
The Philosophy of Tim Burton
Author(s) Hada Ken
Abstract: No son wants a delusional or dishonest father, but this seems to be the situation that Will Bloom (Billy Crudup) faces in Tim Burton’s film
Big Fish(2003). Will is convinced that his father, Ed Bloom (Albert Finney), is an irresponsible liar whose self-proclaimed fantastic identity is delusional. The film’s setting brings father and son together one last time as Ed is confined to his deathbed. Though Will has not spoken to his father in three years, he returns home to be with him during his last days. In addition to dealing with the emotional intensity of preparing to bury
Johnny Depp Is a Big Baby! from:
The Philosophy of Tim Burton
Author(s) Walling Mark
Abstract: Ed Wood (Johnny Depp) is directing a scene in Tim Burton’s biopic (
Ed Wood,1994) of the man voted the worst film director of all time. The film isBride of the Atom,which was released asBride of the Monster(1955), one of Wood’s more infamous works. As he enters a room, Tor Johnson (George “The Animal” Steele), a bald-headed, hairy-shouldered professional wrestler turned actor, receives instructions from Wood to act upset. Tor grasps his rock of a head with massive hands. Wood corrects, “No, no, you’re not that upset. You want to keep moving. You’ve got to get
A Symphony of Horror: from:
The Philosophy of Tim Burton
Author(s) Jenkins Jennifer L.
Abstract: Sweeney Todd(2007) marks a significant deviation for Tim Burton in terms of his prior work and practice.¹ While he had already worked on musicals (The Nightmare Before Christmas[1993],Corpse Bride[2005]) and literary adaptations (Sleepy Hollow[1999],Planet of the Apes[2001],Big Fish[2004],Charlie and the Chocolate Factory[2005]),Sweeneydiffers by being an adaptation of an existing stage musical with a long provenance. Nor is it scored by Burton’s longtime collaborator Danny Elfman. It shares with his other adapted works a firm grounding in the American literary canon, Stephen Sondheim being the touted scion of
Affect without Illusion: from:
The Philosophy of Tim Burton
Author(s) LaRocca David
Abstract: The director Edward D. Wood Jr. is derided for the films he made in the 1950s and otherwise notorious as the “worst director of all time”—a sort of patron saint of the B movie.¹ Part of the pleasure audiences derive from proclaiming Wood the worst practitioner of filmmaking seems linked with an expression of resentment: hidden in the criticism of his work lies a belief and expectation (perhaps unacknowledged or unarticulated) that filmmakers are supposed to show us our world by taking us out of it. To outer space if need be. Science fiction, for example, is a film
Book Title: Joseph Brodsky-A Literary Life
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Miller Jane Ann
Abstract: In this penetrating biography, Brodsky's life and work are illuminated by his great friend, the late poet and literary scholar Lev Loseff. Drawing on a wide range of source materials, some previously unpublished, and extensive interviews with writers and critics, Loseff carefully reconstructs Brodsky's personal history while offering deft and sensitive commentary on the philosophical, religious, and mythological sources that influenced the poet's work. Published to great acclaim in Russia and now available in English for the first time, this is literary biography of the first order, and sets the groundwork for any books on Brodsky that might follow.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vkrv3
CHAPTER SIX from:
Joseph Brodsky
Abstract: IN THE SEVEN YEARS between Brodsky’s return from internal exile and his departure from the USSR, his position in Soviet society was a rather odd one. His predicament was much like Bulgakov’s or Pasternak’s in a more frightening time, the late 1930s; he was free to make a living by writing, but as a poet he did not officially exist.
CHAPTER NINE from:
Joseph Brodsky
Abstract: BRODSKY’S LIFE in Russia could hardly be called easy. At eighteen months of age he was evacuated from Leningrad under enemy fire. When he was fifteen, he left school. At eighteen he was already becoming notorious; at twenty-one he was arrested and indicted. By twenty-three he had spent time in jail and in a mental hospital and was soon to become both victim and hero of a show trial heard round the world. At thirty-two he was shipped into exile.
CHAPTER TEN from:
Joseph Brodsky
Abstract: WHEN BRODSKY LEFT RUSSIA in 1972, he had no idea whether he would ever see his homeland again. At that time, emigration from the USSR was a one-way street, and whatever the United Nations might proclaim about the right to freedom of movement, the Soviet Union was having none of it. On rare occasions emigrants who could not adjust to life in the West might be granted a permit to come back home, but only if they publicly repented of their decision to leave, humbly acknowledged their mistakes, and agreed to tell the press how awful life was in capitalist
Introduction from:
Leo Tolstoy and the Alibi of Narrative
Abstract: When Tolstoy states dramatically in his aesthetic treatise
What Is Art?that “the interpretation of works of art by words only indicates that the interpreter is himself incapable of feeling the infection of art,”¹ one forgets, for just a moment, that Tolstoy himself is using words to tell us how to understand art. For me, the exploration of this kind of mild contradiction is part of what makes reading Tolstoy enjoyable. Sometimes the contradiction is really nothing more than the thematic chiaroscuro of a story, as when Tolstoy celebrates fidelity in vivid stories of adultery, or cherishes the innocence of
4 Soldiers’ Stories from:
Leo Tolstoy and the Alibi of Narrative
Abstract: As one reads this famous passage about how Prince Andrei finally meets Napoleon, one may easily assume the narrator’s, and Andrei’s, point of view. But I do not think it would be difficult for me to ignore my hero if I were slowly bleeding to death on the battlefield. It is as though Tolstoy, whose thoughts of death were sometimes all-consuming, purposely imagined an event in fiction in which another would be struck by the enormity of death in a way he himself was. Napoleon fails to interest a man who is dying—to which one wants to say,
of
9 The Poetics of Romantic Betrayal from:
Leo Tolstoy and the Alibi of Narrative
Abstract: For Tolstoy, love provides one with special abilities to speak and be understood, and in descriptions of love we find his most startling examples of communication. Contrariwise, the loss of love, the emergence of suspicion, infidelity, and betrayal, all take a terrible toll on communication. A jealous husband in Tolstoy’s world has a difficult time communicating with his wife. Of course, that is nothing extraordinary to anyone who has ever been in love—groundless, or even well-grounded, suspicions somehow interfere with intimate conversations. Something more significant is at stake, however: the tenuous bond in Tolstoy’s fiction between thought and language,
10 After Love and Language from:
Leo Tolstoy and the Alibi of Narrative
Abstract: As I mentioned in Part I, after listening to a reading of Ivan Turgenev’s short story “First Love” in 1896, Tolstoy remarked that “the ending was a classic.”¹ That ending includes a deathbed letter to the narrator from his father about the “poison” of women’s love.² Tolstoy no doubt appreciated how subtly Turgenev described the devastation wrought by illicit romance in “First Love.” Yet Turgenev’s art advanced and retreated several times, in Tolstoy’s opinion. He later commented: “One page by Dostoevsky is worth a whole novella by Turgenev.”³ By the turn of the century, Tolstoy had taken full account of
11 The Role of Violence in Art from:
Leo Tolstoy and the Alibi of Narrative
Abstract: Although
Hadji Murad(1896–1904) is, as we have seen, a story in which violence seems indivisible from fiction, Tolstoy spent most of the years of its authorship developing, publicizing, and trying to live by the precepts of his religious philosophy. His most important work espousing nonviolence in these years wasThe Kingdom of God Is within You(1893). Nonviolence united Tolstoy’s dreams for a communal brotherhood of man with his increasingly strident opposition to the government and Russian Orthodox church. Was Tolstoy a hypocrite for preaching nonviolence while simultaneously writing sometimes lurid violent fiction? No, not in the ordinary
Traces by the Thousands from:
The Allure of the Archives
Abstract: Whether it’s summer or winter, you freeze. Your hands grow stiff as you try to decipher the document, and every touch of its parchment or rag paper stains your fingers with cold dust. The writing, no matter how meticulous, how regular, is barely legible to untrained eyes. It sits before you on the reading room table, most often a worn-out looking bundle tied together with a cloth ribbon, its corners eaten away by time and rodents. It is precious (infinitely so) and damaged; you handle it cautiously out of fear that a slight tear could become definitive. You can tell
She Has Just Arrived from:
The Allure of the Archives
Abstract: She has just arrived. She is asked for a card that she does not have. She is then told to retrace her steps to the other room, in order to obtain a day pass. In this next room, she is asked to present a different card, this time one she has. She takes the pass, returns to the first room, and presents it to the reading room supervisor, who takes it. She waits for him to give her a place number, but he does not look up again. So she whispers to him, asking where she should sit. The supervisor,
Traces by the Thousands from:
The Allure of the Archives
Abstract: Whether it’s summer or winter, you freeze. Your hands grow stiff as you try to decipher the document, and every touch of its parchment or rag paper stains your fingers with cold dust. The writing, no matter how meticulous, how regular, is barely legible to untrained eyes. It sits before you on the reading room table, most often a worn-out looking bundle tied together with a cloth ribbon, its corners eaten away by time and rodents. It is precious (infinitely so) and damaged; you handle it cautiously out of fear that a slight tear could become definitive. You can tell
She Has Just Arrived from:
The Allure of the Archives
Abstract: She has just arrived. She is asked for a card that she does not have. She is then told to retrace her steps to the other room, in order to obtain a day pass. In this next room, she is asked to present a different card, this time one she has. She takes the pass, returns to the first room, and presents it to the reading room supervisor, who takes it. She waits for him to give her a place number, but he does not look up again. So she whispers to him, asking where she should sit. The supervisor,
Aggressors, Victims, and Peacemakers: from:
The Religion and Science Debate
Author(s) NUMBERS RONALD L.
Abstract: Talk of the relations between “science” and “religion” first became audible in the early 1800s, about the time that students of nature began referring to their work as science rather than natural philosophy (or natural history). Because natural philosophy allowed its practitioners, in the words of Isaac Newton, to discourse about God “from the appearances of things,” one searches almost in vain for references to “natural philosophy and religion.” Some writers expressed concern about tension between faith and reason, but they never pitted religion against science.¹
Religion vs. Science? from:
The Religion and Science Debate
Author(s) KRAUSS LAWRENCE M.
Abstract: Religion and science are in collision today, as they have been many times throughout human history, or at least as long as science has been pursued separately from religion. Two recent
2 Cassirer’s Concept of a Philosophy of Human Culture from:
Symbolic Forms and Cultural Studies
Author(s) VERENE DONALD PHILLIP
Abstract: Cassirer’s philosophy, in the end, is a philosophy of culture. He makes this clear in the title of his book
An Essay on Man: An Introduction to a Philosophy of Culture, published a year before his death, which he intended to be a summary of his philosophy of symbolic forms. In a review of this work, Brand Blanshard, while expressing admiration for Cassirer’s great learning, regrets its lack of speculative depth. He says: “It is hard not to think, as one reads a book so wealthy as this in historic and scientific erudition, but at the same time so oddly
8 Bakhtin and Cassirer: from:
Symbolic Forms and Cultural Studies
Author(s) POOLE BRIAN
Abstract: Toward the end of the 1960s, as the Soviets tightened their grip upon Eastern Europe, a far more subtle invasion made its way toward the West. The translation of Mikhail Bakhtin’s
Rabelais and His Worldin 1968 unleashed a new subversive dynamic in literary studies, which with time would make the pungent winds of the body’s after and the raucous cries of the marketplace popular subjects in the seminars of our best universities. The unkind object of this essay is to demonstrate that Ernst Cassirer, genteel and urbane though he was, is nevertheless in some sense responsible for this wondrous
2 Cassirer’s Concept of a Philosophy of Human Culture from:
Symbolic Forms and Cultural Studies
Author(s) VERENE DONALD PHILLIP
Abstract: Cassirer’s philosophy, in the end, is a philosophy of culture. He makes this clear in the title of his book
An Essay on Man: An Introduction to a Philosophy of Culture, published a year before his death, which he intended to be a summary of his philosophy of symbolic forms. In a review of this work, Brand Blanshard, while expressing admiration for Cassirer’s great learning, regrets its lack of speculative depth. He says: “It is hard not to think, as one reads a book so wealthy as this in historic and scientific erudition, but at the same time so oddly
8 Bakhtin and Cassirer: from:
Symbolic Forms and Cultural Studies
Author(s) POOLE BRIAN
Abstract: Toward the end of the 1960s, as the Soviets tightened their grip upon Eastern Europe, a far more subtle invasion made its way toward the West. The translation of Mikhail Bakhtin’s
Rabelais and His Worldin 1968 unleashed a new subversive dynamic in literary studies, which with time would make the pungent winds of the body’s after and the raucous cries of the marketplace popular subjects in the seminars of our best universities. The unkind object of this essay is to demonstrate that Ernst Cassirer, genteel and urbane though he was, is nevertheless in some sense responsible for this wondrous
Introduction from:
Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art
Author(s) Noordegraaf Julia
Abstract: Since their emergence, time-based media such as film, video, and digital media have been used by artists who experimented with the potential of these media. In the 1920s, visual artists like Marcel Duchamp and Fernand Léger tested the aesthetic possibilities of film – a practice that continues into the 21st century in the oeuvre of artists such as Tacita Dean and Stan Douglas. The introduction of the first portable video recording system in the 1960s inspired artists like Nam June Paik and Andy Warhol to explore its application in sculptures, projection-based works, and multimedia events, initiating a wave in video
CHAPTER 2 Media Archaeology: from:
Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art
Author(s) Strauven Wanda
Abstract: For a long time, talking to oneself on the street or in any other public place was considered abnormal, deviant from the expected social norm. Singing on your own was okay, but talking on your own, without having any interlocutor, was simply weird. When taken unawares by a fellow citizen in such an odd situation, a possible and often-spontaneous reaction (which I have indeed caught myself in several times) was to quickly shift from talking to singing, as if to imply: don’t worry, I was not talking to myself, I was just singing. Today people talk, or even shout, to
CHAPTER 5 The Analysis of the Artwork from:
Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art
Author(s) Marchiori Dario
Abstract: While the Greek etymology of analysis means “dis-solution,” analysis as a thinking practice (which has been theorized since the ancient times, initially in the realm of geometry¹) involves the related idea of a “breaking up”²: the first experience of it may be considered that of a child breaking a toy to understand its internal structure, and the way it works. Modern thought has reinforced this “decompositional” conception of analysis, which “found its classic statement in the work of Kant at the end of the eighteenth century” and “set the methodological agenda for philosophical approaches and debates in the (late) modern
INTRODUCTION from:
Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art
Author(s) Le Maître Barbara
Abstract: This fourth part of this book, which focuses on what is generally referred to as “exhibition strategies,” is structured in two parts. First, the ten contributions that make up chapter 9 explore the diversity of setups or principles of exhibition relating to film images that left behind their original cinematographic context (and its regime of projection in a theater with the lights off) to move towards museum spaces; or to works which come from the large and difficult to define category that is sometimes called media art or even time-based art. Second, Sarah Cook asks and discusses a fundamental question
Chapter One Mediacity: from:
Contemporary Culture
Author(s) Boomkens René
Abstract: Generally, cities, urban culture and the urban public sphere have often been taken to represent the source or centre of modern social and cultural life, which then is said to differ radically from social and cultural life in pre-modern, feudal or medieval times and from life in the countryside. The sociological opposition between the face-to-face culture of pre-modern villages and the abstract, mediated and complex culture of modern cities as an opposition between
GemeinschaftandGesellschaft,introduced by Ferdinand Tönnies, has becomethecommonplace of more than hundred years of urban sociology and theory. His sociological contemporary, Georg Simmel, described
Chapter Fifteen Roots and the Production of Heritage from:
Contemporary Culture
Author(s) van Stipriaan Alex
Abstract: When in 1978 African American journalist Alex Haley published his historical quest
Roots, it was an almost instant success.¹ The book sold by the millions and its immensely popular adaption for television conquered the world. In the Netherlands, for instance, the series was broadcasted several times and is still available on DVD. Haley had done what so many in the African Diaspora wanted: find the route back to where their ancestors came from before their enslavement in West- and Central Africa. He used stories and archives and all kinds of other tangible and intangible cultural heritage to find his way
Book Title: Secularism, Assimilation and the Crisis of Multiculturalism-French Modernist Legacies
Publisher: Amsterdam University Press
Author(s): Jansen Yolande
Abstract: In this timely study, Yolande Jansen critiques efforts to assimilate religious minorities into a secular and supposedly neutral public sphere. Such efforts, she ably demonstrates, can create and perpetuate the very distinctions they aim to overcome.Her sophisticated analyses draw on literature that depicts the paradoxes of assimilation as experienced by French Jews in the late nineteenth century. Paying particular attention to Marcel Proust's
In Search of Lost Time, she ultimately argues for dynamic, critical multiculturalism as an alternative to secularism, assimilation, and integration.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wp7qd
CHAPTER 2 Assimilation in the French sociology of incorporation from a multicultural perspective from:
Secularism, Assimilation and the Crisis of Multiculturalism
Abstract: Assimilation is a rather unfriendly concept when used in a social context. In French, it generally means an act of the mind that considers (something) as similar (to something else). A relevant secondary meaning is the action of making (something) similar (to something else) by integration or absorption. This meaning has existed in physiology since 1495. Around 1840, the concept was related to social processes for the first time, as the act of assimilating persons and peoples; the process through which these persons, these peoples, assimilate (themselves). This connotation incorporates terms like ‘Americanisation’ and ‘Frenchisation’. The older physiological connotation shines
CHAPTER 5 Stuck in a revolving door from:
Secularism, Assimilation and the Crisis of Multiculturalism
Abstract: Let me now further explore the semi-public, semi-private cultural realm of unspeakable ‘otherness’ connected to expectations about assimilation introduced in the previous chapter. I will trace how this realm, in 19th-century France, was connected to the idea that assimilation implied secularisation in terms of the transformation of ethno-religious culture into privatised ‘religion’. By exploring this cultural realm through
In Search of Lost Timewe will be able to trace how it hosts a specific kind of ethno-religious difference in which othering and secrecy, shame and the cultural memory of religious and cultural difference, intermingle and sometimes clash.
CHAPTER 6 Elements of a critique of the laïcité-religion framework from:
Secularism, Assimilation and the Crisis of Multiculturalism
Abstract: This chapter traces the historical particularity of the
laïcité-religion framework to its intellectual, political and cultural backgrounds in the early French Third Republic (1870-1914). This is the same period of time that formed the background to the Dreyfus Affair. I concentrate on the occurrence of several neo-Kantian and modernist schemes in French political culture in the early Third Republic. I analyse four political cartoons from the time of the installation of the separation between Church and State in 1905 and further scrutinise the ways in which the relation between modernity, secularity and religion appears in the work of neo-Kantian scholars
Book Title: Crossing the Bay of Bengal- Publisher: Harvard University Press
Author(s): Amrith Sunil S.
Abstract: For centuries the Bay of Bengal served as a maritime highway between India and China, and as a battleground for European empires, while being shaped by monsoons and human migration. Integrating environmental history and mining a wealth of sources, Sunil S. Amrith offers insights to the many challenges facing Asia in the decades ahead.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wpmb1
6 Digital Tools and the Emergence of the Social Text from:
A New Republic of Letters
Abstract: Like another important edition of our time, Hans Gabler’s
Ulysses, J. C. C. Mays’s edition on Coleridge—three volumes, each in two parts—set an inspiring example of scholarly thoroughness and integrity.¹ But the real strength of the work rests ultimately in something else—something quite rare in the scholarly editions of English-speaking authors produced in the last fifty years. Mays is deeply sympathetic to Coleridge’s poetry—not unaware of or reticent to address its failings and limitations, but fronting all the work with what Desmond McCarthy, writing of Coleridge, called “the most delicate sympathy.” “When he writes of it
[I Introduction] from:
Seven Modes of Uncertainty
Abstract: Mutual exclusionis the narrative presentation of mutually exclusive sets of events or of mutually exclusive explanations for the same set of events. In logic, the termmutually exclusivedescribes when two events are equally possible but could not have both occurred, or when two propositions cannot logically be true at the same time. As with tossing a coin, only one outcome (heads) can be true; if it is, the other outcome (tails) cannot be true. In that example, the mutual exclusion is collectively exhaustive, meaning that either one or the other must happen. There are other forms—the rolling
[III Introduction] from:
Seven Modes of Uncertainty
Abstract: Repetitionis a necessary feature of narrative. A repeated name, for example, permits us to track a single character across a novel. Repetition’s operation ofsimilitudeurges consistency over time, emphasizing the reality of things and of persons, as when we speak of habits, customs, conventions. While some repetition is necessary for narrative stability, it can also afford uncertainty because every iteration can seem to bear more—or different—meaning in its new context. William Empson describes the effect of Sidney’sArcadia:“in tracing their lovelorn pastoral tedium through thirteen repetitions, with something of the aimless multitudinousness of the sea
7 CONCLUSION: FLIPPANCY from:
Seven Modes of Uncertainty
Abstract: The present moment is an ideal vantage point from which to examine the belatedness of literary uncertainty. As techniques for uncertainty have become widely available to writers and rapidly recognizable to readers, we have to wonder: has the pathos of literary uncertainty come to eclipse the ethos afforded by it? I pursue this question through Jonathan Safran Foer’s 2005
Extremely Loud & Incredibly Close,a novel that manipulates techniques for uncertainty with which readers are deeply familiar.¹ Rather than unsettling our values, this novel’s flashy moves conduce to a set of clichéd ideas about uncertainty while stirring a generic, sentimental
[I Introduction] from:
Seven Modes of Uncertainty
Abstract: Mutual exclusionis the narrative presentation of mutually exclusive sets of events or of mutually exclusive explanations for the same set of events. In logic, the termmutually exclusivedescribes when two events are equally possible but could not have both occurred, or when two propositions cannot logically be true at the same time. As with tossing a coin, only one outcome (heads) can be true; if it is, the other outcome (tails) cannot be true. In that example, the mutual exclusion is collectively exhaustive, meaning that either one or the other must happen. There are other forms—the rolling
[III Introduction] from:
Seven Modes of Uncertainty
Abstract: Repetitionis a necessary feature of narrative. A repeated name, for example, permits us to track a single character across a novel. Repetition’s operation ofsimilitudeurges consistency over time, emphasizing the reality of things and of persons, as when we speak of habits, customs, conventions. While some repetition is necessary for narrative stability, it can also afford uncertainty because every iteration can seem to bear more—or different—meaning in its new context. William Empson describes the effect of Sidney’sArcadia:“in tracing their lovelorn pastoral tedium through thirteen repetitions, with something of the aimless multitudinousness of the sea
7 CONCLUSION: FLIPPANCY from:
Seven Modes of Uncertainty
Abstract: The present moment is an ideal vantage point from which to examine the belatedness of literary uncertainty. As techniques for uncertainty have become widely available to writers and rapidly recognizable to readers, we have to wonder: has the pathos of literary uncertainty come to eclipse the ethos afforded by it? I pursue this question through Jonathan Safran Foer’s 2005
Extremely Loud & Incredibly Close,a novel that manipulates techniques for uncertainty with which readers are deeply familiar.¹ Rather than unsettling our values, this novel’s flashy moves conduce to a set of clichéd ideas about uncertainty while stirring a generic, sentimental
CHAPTER FIVE How Can Artistic Greatness Be Analyzed? from:
The Economics of Creativity
Abstract: Analyzing the career and the work of a great artist assumes that it is possible to describe a fragment of the history of the world subject to the laws of causality, and at the same time to endow the artist with the power to act: The artist’s greatness can then be characterized by his ability to change the predictable course of things (in the artistic world and beyond it, directly or indirectly, in the world in general)—an ability to which causes and reasons must be assigned. That is why works on artistic greatness or genius hesitate between several formulas.
CHAPTER FIVE How Can Artistic Greatness Be Analyzed? from:
The Economics of Creativity
Abstract: Analyzing the career and the work of a great artist assumes that it is possible to describe a fragment of the history of the world subject to the laws of causality, and at the same time to endow the artist with the power to act: The artist’s greatness can then be characterized by his ability to change the predictable course of things (in the artistic world and beyond it, directly or indirectly, in the world in general)—an ability to which causes and reasons must be assigned. That is why works on artistic greatness or genius hesitate between several formulas.
The Motive for Metaphor from:
Metaphor
Abstract: [Metaphor] is both a gift which Nature herself confers on us, and which is therefore used even by uneducated persons and unconsciously, and at the same time so attractive and elegant that it shines by its own light however splendid its context. So long as it is correctly employed, it cannot be vulgar or mean or unpleasing. It also adds to the resources of language by exchanges or borrowings to supply its deficiencies, and (hardest task of all) it ensures that nothing goes without
The Motive for Metaphor from:
Metaphor
Abstract: [Metaphor] is both a gift which Nature herself confers on us, and which is therefore used even by uneducated persons and unconsciously, and at the same time so attractive and elegant that it shines by its own light however splendid its context. So long as it is correctly employed, it cannot be vulgar or mean or unpleasing. It also adds to the resources of language by exchanges or borrowings to supply its deficiencies, and (hardest task of all) it ensures that nothing goes without
The Motive for Metaphor from:
Metaphor
Abstract: [Metaphor] is both a gift which Nature herself confers on us, and which is therefore used even by uneducated persons and unconsciously, and at the same time so attractive and elegant that it shines by its own light however splendid its context. So long as it is correctly employed, it cannot be vulgar or mean or unpleasing. It also adds to the resources of language by exchanges or borrowings to supply its deficiencies, and (hardest task of all) it ensures that nothing goes without
Introduction from:
Signs of Science
Abstract: On a recent trip to Madrid, the bus I took from the airport in Barajas to the Plaza de Colón was caught in the usual morning traffic jam. The irritated driver shouted “¡ Esto no pasa en Europa!” thereby expressing the commonplace that Spain has not been part of mainstream European culture since the heyday of Felipe II. Though the driver eventually navigated the congested streets successfully, his lament about Spain’s supposed backwardness echoes those of Spanish “europeizantes” writing from the 1700s until our time. Perhaps the most important issue in the debate over Spain’s membership in modem Europe, especially
Jeremiah, the Shoah, and the Restoration of Israel from:
Maven in Blue Jeans
Author(s) Sweeney Marvin
Abstract: The Book of Jeremiah is unique among the prophetic books insofar as it presents the oracles and activities of the only one of the prophets to live through the Babylonian siege and destruction of Jerusalem. Other prophets may have lived through such catastrophe, for example, Ezekiel received the news of Jerusalem’s fall while living in Babylonian exile, and Isaiah lived at the time of Samaria’s fall to the Assyrian empire, but Jeremiah is the only prophetic book to give its readers a glimpse of life in the doomed city and the struggles in which its inhabitants engaged as they faced
Who Owns the Truth? from:
Maven in Blue Jeans
Author(s) Jacobs Steven Leonard
Abstract: For almost three decades (1974–2000), I labored full-time “in the vineyards of the Lord,” serving primarily rabbinically in Jewish congregations in Birmingham, Mobile, and Huntsville, Alabama, and Dallas, Texas, including academic postings in those communities as well. Since 2001, I have been a full-time member of the University of Alabama faculty and part-time rabbi of a small congregation in Tuscaloosa. In all of these viable centers of modern American liberal Jewish life, I repeatedly reminded those whom I had been privileged to serve that, in my studies in those congregations, I kept not one but
threecrystal balls—to
Philo and the Dangers of Philosophizing from:
Maven in Blue Jeans
Author(s) Feldman Louis H.
Abstract: Sometimes there is insight to be found in a joke.
In ioco veritas. There is a story of a yeshivabochur, a student in a yeshiva, who has reached that age when he should be thinking of getting married. And so arrangements are made for him to go out with a young lady. Since he knows nothing about such matters, he inquires as to what he is to talk about with her. Well, he is told, there are three topics—family, food, and philosophy. He meets the young lady and he is tongue-tied. But then he remembers: family. “Do you
“But It Isn’t on the Test!”: from:
Maven in Blue Jeans
Author(s) Jacobs Louanne Clayton
Abstract: I currently teach in the School of Education at a state university that is considered one of the Historically Black Colleges and Universities (HBCU). By the time students have enrolled in one of the education courses I teach, they have typically completed most if not all of their required coursework in history, English, mathematics, and science. By the time students enter my classroom they have learned most of
whatthey will teach and have begun preprofessional courses designed to help them learnhowto teach it.
The Landscape of Memory from:
Maven in Blue Jeans
Author(s) Weiss Ann
Abstract: “We remember
in situ, when the setting of our memory and the setting of our remembering are one and the same.”¹ And in this remembering, aspects of ourselves return to a place where memory began, and to a time when we lived these
On Three Early Incidences of Hebrew Script in Western Art from:
Maven in Blue Jeans
Author(s) Lenowitz Harris
Abstract: Though some have theorized that the Hebrew script in the trilingual titulus of the fourteenth-century
Crucifixionby Giotto is the first appearance of Hebrew in Western art, the script in fact began to appear in that circumstance at least two centuries earlier, at the beginning of the twelfth century. Major changes in the Church’s relationship with the Jews occurred between these earliest appearances. For purposes of understanding the significance of the earlier date, the most important change was the renewal (following Jerome [347–420]) of Hebrew study among Christians. At about the same time, with Peter of Cluny (1092–1156)
Book Title: Postmodern Texts and Emotional Audiences- Publisher: Purdue University Press
Author(s): Davis Kimberly Chabot
Abstract: Chabot Davis analyzes contemporary texts that bond together two seemingly antithetical sensibilities: the sentimental and the postmodern. Ranging across multiple media and offering a methodological union of textual analysis and reception study, Chabot Davis presents case studies of audience responses.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wq429
Chapter Two Critical Hybridity and the Building of Methodological Bridges from:
Postmodern Texts and Emotional Audiences
Abstract: The theory and method informing this study can best be described as a dialectical mediation between dissimilar cultural genres and between antagonistic scholarly traditions. The critical dialectic of sentimental postmodernism allows me to illuminate theoretical biases and blind spots in scholarship concerning both postmodernism and popular affective genres. While many theorists of postmodern culture pay lip service to the idea that postmodernism breaks down the division between high and popular culture, most of their exemplary texts are nonetheless high art or avant-garde works. Focusing on irony, self-reflexivity, avant-garde aesthetics, and poststructuralist ideas about language, many of these critics draw a
Chapter Five Kiss of the Spider Woman and the Politics of Camp from:
Postmodern Texts and Emotional Audiences
Abstract: With its thematic focus on identification and leftist politics, Manuel Puig’s
Kiss of the Spider Womanis a paradigmatic text of sentimental postmodernism. Since the text is also centrally concerned with the politics of mass culture and of homosexuality, it bears some relationship to the critical practice called “camp.” Many critics have analyzedKiss of the Spider Womanas a work of “gay fiction,” but none has attempted to situate Puig’s text or its film and musical adaptations in relation to camp as a gay or queer critique of heterosexual mass culture and its value systems. Any academic discussion of
Conclusion from:
Postmodern Texts and Emotional Audiences
Abstract: Without these detailed case studies of the impact of sentimental postmodernism upon readers and viewers, an analysis of the politics of this hybrid style would be incomplete and highly speculative. My contextual and empirical work with audiences is crucial to the conclusion that much of the political power of sentimental postmodernism can be found in the intense identifications that it fosters both within and across sexual identities, genders, and ethnicities. Much of the current critical work about identification has been produced by textual scholars writing from psychoanalytic perspectives. While these textual theorists have given us valuable insights concerning the ambivalent
Introduction from:
The Jewish Jesus
Author(s) Garber Zev
Abstract: In the context of our time, Pope John Paul II challenged members of the Pontifical
6 Avon Gilyon (Document of Sin, b. Shabb. 116a) or Euvanggeleon (Good News) from:
The Jewish Jesus
Author(s) Basser Herbert W.
Abstract: The questions I want to explore are complex. 1) Was Jesus a good Jewish boy with some constructive critiques of the status quo—so that today he would be just another blogger in the ilk of
vosizneias.com?Was he executed by Rome for his anti-Rome sentiments? In short he was not anything like a “Christian”? Or, 2) was he a rebel trying to destroy the foundations of old Jewish life so he could begin a new sect of righteousness?
11 A Meditation on Possible Images of Jewish Jesus in the Pre-Modern Period from:
The Jewish Jesus
Author(s) Simms Norman
Abstract: Conceptions of Jesus exist in rabbinical legal discourses, polemics, and commentaries of the Middle Ages. They come in the course of discussion among rabbis who experienced or were speaking in the name of those who had experienced various persecutions in the times of the early church. They are imagined in times of stress and confusion when formal trials against the Talmud and other sacred writings necessitated the formalization of defensive arguments against the charges made that, on the one hand, the rabbinical texts slandered the person and family of Jesus and the primitive Christian community, and on the other, that
18 Can We Talk? from:
The Jewish Jesus
Author(s) Jacobs Steven Leonard
Abstract: In my previous career as a full-time congregational rabbi and part-time academic (what I now tell my students was my “second incarnation,” my first being that of a high school teacher of English literature), I used to have any number of church groups (men’s clubs, ladies guilds, youth groups, etc.) visit and sit in our sanctuary during an afternoon or early evening for an “Everything you always wanted to know about Judaism but never got around to asking” talk, with plenty of time left for questions and answers, and sometimes the Q & A lasting more than the original presentation.
19 The New Jewish Reclamation of Jesus in Late Twentieth-Century America: from:
The Jewish Jesus
Author(s) Magid Shaul
Abstract: Jewish writing about Jesus in America that began in the mid-nineteenth century, with a few exceptions, ended after the “Jesus Controversy” in 1925. This controversy erupted in light of a sermon delivered by Rabbi Stephen Wise at Carnegie Hall in Manhattan on the occasion of the 1925 English publication of Joseph Klausner’s Hebrew volume,
Jesus of Nazareth: His Life, Times, and Teaching(1922). Although the discovery of the Nag Hammadi texts and other Dead Sea scrolls in 1947-48 reinvigorated the historical Jesus among many Protestants, American Jews didn’t begin writing about Jesus again until the 1960s around the same time
INTRODUCTION from:
Edmund Husserl's Phenomenology
Abstract: Edmund Gustav Albrecht Husserl was born in Prossnitz (Prostejov) in Mähren (Moravia) on 8 April 1859 as the second of four children.¹ His father was Adolf Abraham Husserl, and his mother Julie Selinger, both of Jewish descent. Although Moravia later became part of Czechoslovakia, at the time of Husserl’s birth it was still part of the Austro-Hungarian Empire, so that Husserl was an Austrian by birth.
EPILOGUE from:
Edmund Husserl's Phenomenology
Abstract: During his lifetime and especially after his death, Husserl’s ideas have had an enormous influence on twentieth-century thought. Husserl may very well have been the most influential philosopher of the century. Toward the end of his life he was often discouraged. In addition to the almost unbearable political situation in which he had come to find himself, there was the full realization that there really was nobody willing and able to continue the work he had started. He had hoped that Heidegger would have been this person; yet Heidegger preferred to go his own way. In Husserl’s view, the task
CHAPTER FOUR “A Morality for Moralists” from:
Reinterpreting Modern Culture
Abstract: In the preface to
On the Genealogy of Morals, Nietzsche depicts the development of his thoughts on morality. He reveals that his reflections on the descent (“Herkunft”) of our moral prejudices were first expressed in his first aphoristic writingHuman, All Too Human, though the ideas occurred to him when he was much younger (GM, pref. 2), even from the time when he was only thirteen (GM, pref. 3). Nietzsche’s critical thoughts on morality form a central and continuous motive that permeates (and to that extent connects) all of his writings. In section 6 ofBeyond Good and EvilNietzsche
Chapter Two Time from:
On the Cultures of Exile,Translation and Writing
Abstract: Time slips away, time stops; it goes fast, proceeds erratically, it even stays still. Time keeps changing and yet never changes. We often speak of old time and new time, of present time, past time and future time. And yet, whenever we do this we do not talk about time: we talk about ourselves in time. What ages in time is not time itself but subjectivity. Calendars do not measure the passing of time, but the passing of lives in time. History is the site of this peculiar metonym through which what is measured and saved is, in reality, not
Chapter Two Time from:
On the Cultures of Exile,Translation and Writing
Abstract: Time slips away, time stops; it goes fast, proceeds erratically, it even stays still. Time keeps changing and yet never changes. We often speak of old time and new time, of present time, past time and future time. And yet, whenever we do this we do not talk about time: we talk about ourselves in time. What ages in time is not time itself but subjectivity. Calendars do not measure the passing of time, but the passing of lives in time. History is the site of this peculiar metonym through which what is measured and saved is, in reality, not
Gustav Shpet's Life and Works: from:
Gustav Shpet's Contribution to Philosophy and Cutlural Theory
Author(s) Tihanov Galin
Abstract: Gustav Gustavovich Shpet (1879-1937) has emerged as one of the most prominent Russian philosophers of the twentieth century. The principle promoter of Husserlian phenomenology, at the same time creatively modifying Husserl and at times departing from him, Shpet was also an early advocate of hermeneutics. He left behind seminal work spanning philosophy, aesthetics, psychology, literary and theater theory, and the history of Russian thought. Significantly, many of his concerns anticipate preoccupations that have dominated the discourses of cultural theory and the philosophy of language over the last few decades.
Tropos Logikos: from:
Gustav Shpet's Contribution to Philosophy and Cutlural Theory
Author(s) Steiner Peter
Abstract: Recollecting the heady atmosphere at the Moscow University before WWI when belonging to a particular camp of contemporary German philosophy was
de rigueur, Boris Pasternak wrote: "The devotees of the Göttingen Husserlites found support in Shpet" (35). This cryptic remark (Shpet's name is not mentioned again inSafe Conduct) caught my attention for several reasons. The first is quite trivial: when writing his autobiographical novel, Pasternak could not have known that his then-seven-year-old son Evgenii—whimsically compared in the book to the philosopher Hermann Cohen—would once upon a time marry Shpet's granddaughter Elena. Two other reasons deserve a more
Shpet's Aesthetic Fragments and Sartre's Theory of Literature from:
Gustav Shpet's Contribution to Philosophy and Cutlural Theory
Author(s) Bartram Graham
Abstract: At the very latest by the time of his 1927 Humboldt interpretation,
Vnutrenniaia, Shpet's phenomenological descriptions of eidetic structures take on a dialectical dimension derived from Hegel'sPhenomenology of Spirit. Every description that attempts to grasp the essence of the object lying before it proves to be one sided, and points to alternative descriptions that go beyond itself: "The contradiction, which arises between the posited [zadannoiu] fullness of a concrete object and its present [nalichnuiu] incompleteness at any given moment, dissolves in its own process of becoming" (Shpet,Vnutrenniaia39). In relation to "culture as the object of linguistic awareness
About the Narratives of a Blood Libel Case in Post-Shoah Hungary from:
Comparative Central European Holocaust Studies
Author(s) Pető Andrea
Abstract: After the liberation of Hungary from nazi occupation by the Soviet army, May 1945 was an exciting and agitated time in the capital, Budapest. People were discussing the ongoing peace negotiations in Paris and cases brought before the People's Tribunals that were being reviewed on the front pages of newspapers. During World War II some 500,000 Jews had been deported from Hungary within a period of few months and the People's Tribunals (
Népbíróság) were in charge of handling the war crimes and crimes against humanity that had occurred during that period (see Karsai). In the immediate postwar period, the new
Towards a New Reading of Ida Fink's The Journey from:
Comparative Central European Holocaust Studies
Author(s) Milner Iris
Abstract: Ida Fink, a Holocaust survivor (born 1921 in Zbaraż, Poland), stayed in Poland for twelve years after the end of World War II. Although she had already written some short stories at that time, it was only upon her arrival in Israel in 1957 that she became intensely involved in literary work—always in her mother tongue, Polish. Her first publication, a Hebrew translation of a collection of short stories that came out in Israel in 1974, did not gain her much acknowledgment. However, the original Polish version, published in London in 1976, and a subsequent collection of short stories
About the Narratives of a Blood Libel Case in Post-Shoah Hungary from:
Comparative Central European Holocaust Studies
Author(s) Pető Andrea
Abstract: After the liberation of Hungary from nazi occupation by the Soviet army, May 1945 was an exciting and agitated time in the capital, Budapest. People were discussing the ongoing peace negotiations in Paris and cases brought before the People's Tribunals that were being reviewed on the front pages of newspapers. During World War II some 500,000 Jews had been deported from Hungary within a period of few months and the People's Tribunals (
Népbíróság) were in charge of handling the war crimes and crimes against humanity that had occurred during that period (see Karsai). In the immediate postwar period, the new
Towards a New Reading of Ida Fink's The Journey from:
Comparative Central European Holocaust Studies
Author(s) Milner Iris
Abstract: Ida Fink, a Holocaust survivor (born 1921 in Zbaraż, Poland), stayed in Poland for twelve years after the end of World War II. Although she had already written some short stories at that time, it was only upon her arrival in Israel in 1957 that she became intensely involved in literary work—always in her mother tongue, Polish. Her first publication, a Hebrew translation of a collection of short stories that came out in Israel in 1974, did not gain her much acknowledgment. However, the original Polish version, published in London in 1976, and a subsequent collection of short stories
Chapter 8 Bougainville: from:
Mediating Across Difference
Author(s) Garasu Lorraine
Abstract: After almost a decade of war (1989–1998) and the bloodiest violent conflict in the South Pacific since the end of the Second World War, Bougainville has gone through a comprehensive peacebuilding process. This process is a rare success story in contemporary postconflict peacebuilding. Because the conflict occurred during a time of statelessness in Bougainville, space was opened for a renaissance of nonstate customary institutions and processes. In the absence of state institutions, local practices resumed their central role in the life of the communities. In many places elders and chiefs, assisted particularly by women and local church people, became
Chapter 9 Crossing Borders: from:
Mediating Across Difference
Author(s) Sugiono Muhadi
Abstract: Several centuries of interaction across ethnic and religious difference in the Indonesian archipelago have been accompanied by the evolution of local ways of resolving communal disputes and violence. We term the resulting norms and practices ‘local conflict resolution’. The development of these ways of mediating across difference has itself sometimes been violent, yet the accompanying local conflict resolution processes are dynamic and pluralist. They are open to revision and adaptation, including to the input of outside and new forces and actors. For this reason our use of the term ‘local’ does not connote a bounded space that excludes outsiders. Rather,
Book Title: Japanese Philosophy-A Sourcebook
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): Maraldo John C.
Abstract: With
Japanese Philosophy: A Sourcebook,readers of English can now access in a single volume the richness and diversity of Japanese philosophy as it has developed throughout history. Leading scholars in the field have translated selections from the writings of more than a hundred philosophical thinkers from all eras and schools of thought, many of them available in English for the first time.TheSourcebookeditors have set out to represent the entire Japanese philosophical tradition-not only the broad spectrum of academic philosophy dating from the introduction of Western philosophy in the latter part of the nineteenth century, but also the philosophical ideas of major Japanese traditions of Buddhism, Confucianism, and Shinto. The philosophical significance of each tradition is laid out in an extensive overview, and each selection is accompanied by a brief biographical sketch of its author and helpful information on placing the work in its proper context. The bulk of the supporting material, which comprises nearly a quarter of the volume, is given to original interpretive essays on topics not explicitly covered in other chapters: cultural identity, samurai thought, women philosophers, aesthetics, bioethics.An introductory chapter provides a historical overview of Japanese philosophy and a discussion of the Japanese debate over defining the idea of philosophy, both of which help explain the rationale behind the design of the Sourcebook. An exhaustive glossary of technical terminology, a chronology of authors, and a thematic index are appended. Specialists will find information related to original sources and sinographs for Japanese names and terms in a comprehensive bibliography and general index.Handsomely presented and clearly organized for ease of use,Japanese Philosophy: A Sourcebookwill be a cornerstone in Japanese studies for decades to come. It will be an essential reference for anyone interested in traditional or contemporary Japanese culture and the way it has shaped and been shaped by its great thinkers over the centuries.24 illus.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wqg76
Overview from:
Japanese Philosophy
Abstract: Of the three streams of ethico-religious culture shaping Japanese philosophy over the past fourteen centuries—Shinto, Confucianism, and Buddhism—Buddhism has been the most influential in shaping how the Japanese have thought about the most difficult and universal questions of human existence. This is partly because of the harmonious relationship among the three systems during the ancient and medieval periods. At that time, Japan’s Shinto-related
kamiworship addressed such practical issues as protection and fertility while Confucianism formed the basis of ethics, political theory, and education, with little debate aboutwhichform of Confucianism should be normative. By contrast, during
Myōe 明恵 (1173–1232) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Abstract: A Japanese monk ordained in both the ⌜Shingon⌝ and ⌜Kegon⌝ heritages, Myōe was an original and restive thinker who straddled the borders of traditional Buddhism and new directions of his age. His theory of universal salvation supported efforts to recognize the disinherited and marginalized members of society at the same time as he criticized the moral laxity of popular
⌜nenbutsu⌝practices and what he saw as the distortions of the “heretical” ⌜Pure Land⌝ thinker Hōnen.* In its place, he championed a restoration of monastic discipline and advocated a “mantra of light” that focused on rebirth in the ⌜Pure Land⌝ rather
Jiun Sonja 慈雲尊者 (1718–1804) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Sonja Jiun
Abstract: Jiun Sonja was a leading Buddhist reformer, scholar, and apologist during the Edo period (1600–1868). At a time when the Buddhist establishment was increasingly occupied with tasks imposed on it by the Tokugawa government, such as keeping registers of the local citizenry, and conducting funeral and memorial services, Jiun devoted himself to reviving traditional monastic life, based on the model of the historical Buddha and grounded in Buddhist philosophy. To study early Buddhism, he undertook the study of Sanskrit, using the limited resources available to him in Japan, and compiled the 1,000-chapter
Guide to Sanskrit Studies, a work unparalleled
Overview from:
Japanese Philosophy
Abstract: The Kamakura period (1185–1333) was a time of political upheaval, conflict, and an unusual series of natural disasters. The aristocracy had lost its political power to the newly risen samurai who aspired to capture the cultural authority of the court; the social and natural turbulence oppressed and demoralized the peasants and urban poor; the Mongols twice invaded southern Japan, threatening its sovereignty.
Ikkyū Sōjun 一休宗純 (1394–1481) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Sōjun Ikkyū
Abstract: Ikkyū lived at a time marked by social unrest, a struggle for power, and large-scale destruction of Kyoto’s treasured monuments. It was also a time of an overturning of traditional values and of great creativity in classical arts and literature. A Rinzai Zen master and poet, he threw himself into the maelstrom of this world of change, emerging as one of the most colorful and unconventional, if also controversial, figures in Japanese Buddhist history. Like his poetry, his life was a mixture of abstract philosophical ideas and earthy sensuality. His life is so covered in legend, due in no small
Karaki Junzō 唐木順三 (1904–1980) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Junzō Karaki
Abstract: Karaki Junzō was active throughout the Shōwa period more as a critic than a philosopher professionally trained in western sources. He studied under Nishida Kitarō* at Kyoto University and remained indebted to the thinking of Kyoto School philosophers throughout his life. At the same time, the religious ideas of Dōgen’s* Zen and Shinran’s* ⌜Pure Land⌝ teachings are also reflected in the development of his thought. Beginning with early works on modern and contemporary literary criticism, in later years he turned to medieval literature and to figures like the haiku poet, Bashō. Throughout his career, his abiding concern was with aesthetics
Kiyozawa Manshi 清沢満之 (1863–1903) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Manshi Kiyozawa
Abstract: Kiyozawa Manshi, who lived and wrote in the last decades of the nineteenth century, left an impression on generations of philosophers after him, including Nishida Kitarō*. As one of the first generation studying western philosophy at Tokyo University, he published on questions and thinkers at the core of philosophy, writing at a time when the Japanese philosophical vocabulary had not yet been settled. At the same time he was a devoted practitioner of ⌜Pure Land⌝ Buddhism, and cut short his graduate studies in philosophy to work for the Ōtani branch of the ⌜Shin⌝ sect, which entrusted him with setting up
Yamaga Sokō 山鹿素行 (1622–1685) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Sokō Yamaga
Abstract: Although born the son of a
rōninin Aizu-Wakamatsu, Yamaga Soko became the first major neo-Confucian scholar to mature from the new intellectual milieu crystallizing in Edo, the shogun’s capital. When Soko was five years old, his father, Yamaga Sadamochi, moved to the capital and established himself as a samurai-physician. After beginning his study of Chinese literature at age six, Sokō later received instruction in neo-Confucianism from Hayashi Razan*. He also studied martial arts, Japanese literature, and Shinto thought with some of the leading figures in Edo of the time. During his twenties, Sokō emerged as a samurai philosopher with
Satō Naokata 佐藤直方 (1650–1719) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Naokata Satō
Abstract: Sato Naokata was one of the most orthodox advocates of Zhu Xi’s neo-Confucian philosophy in the early eighteenth century. Born in southwestern Japan, he studied neo-Confucianism with Yamazaki Ansai* in Kyoto, at a time when the latter was still a fervent exponent of orthodox Zhu Xi learning. When Ansai later developed his synthesis of Shinto and neo-Confucianism, Naokata broke with him. Indeed, Naokata emerged thereafter as one of the harshest and most sarcastic critics of Shinto and its chauvinistic hyperbole about the superiority of Japan vis-à-vis all other countries. Instead of worshiping his native land, he emphasized his sense of
Miura Baien 三浦梅園 (1723–1789) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Baien Miura
Abstract: Miura Baien lived in the small village of Tominaga (present-day Oita prefecture) on the island of Kyushu, where he taught and developed his philosophical ideas. In the meantime, he maintained contacts with neo-Confucian scholars, one of whom was his good friend the astronomer Asada Gōryū (1734–1799), who independently discovered the relationship of the length of a planet’s orbit to its distance from the sun. Baien’s major writings comprise a work on ethics called
Daring Words, an exposition of his own metaphysics,Deep Words, and a companion volume,Additional Words.
Ōkuni Takamasa 大國隆正 (1792–1871) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Takamasa Ōkuni
Abstract: Ōkuni Takamasa was born into a samurai family in the Tsuwano domain compound of Edo. At age fourteen he joined the school of Hirata Atsutane* as one of the first disciples and at the same time he received a formal education in Confucian studies at the Shōheigaku shogunal academy. A visit to Nagasaki in 1818 piqued his interest in western studies. He went on to establish himself in Edo as a calligrapher and as a scholar of ”ancient matters,” focusing on the study of the age of the
⌜kami⌝in the spirit of Atsutane. Shortly after being appointed to an
Nakae Chōmin 中江兆民 (1847–1901) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Chōmin Nakae
Abstract: Nakae Chōmin (Nakae Tokusuke) was a journalist, an advocate of natural rights, free thinker, and politician. From 1862, he began to study “Western Learning” and the French language. As part of a government mission to Europe, he lived in France from 1871 to 1874, during which time he studied law, philosophy, history, and literature. After returning to Japan he opened his own school for French language studies, and undertook a translation of Rousseau’s
Social Contract. Through articles and editorials for a number of newspapers, Chōmin made an important intellectual contribution to the popular rights movement of the 1870s and early
Inoue Enryō 井上円了 (1858–1919) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Enryō Inoue
Abstract: Inoue Enryō was probably the most influential and prolific Buddhist theorist of the Meiji period. He was expected to become a priest in the True ⌜Pure Land⌝ sect of Buddhism, but after studying philosophy in Tokyo, decided to go his own way. He traveled widely throughout Japan and its colonies, delivering thousands of lectures in village and town halls, and journeyed around the world three times. Although a philosopher by profession, he is widely remembered for his multivolume work on supernatural phenomena,
A Study of Ghosts and Phantoms.
Mutai Risaku 務台理作 (1890–1974) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Risaku Mutai
Abstract: Mutai Risaku, a peripheral figure of the Kyoto School, was first attracted to psychology, but during his time under Nishida Kitarō* at Kyoto University he was persuaded to secure a solid basis in philosophy from Kant to the present day. In 1923 he took a post at Ōtani University, leaving three years later for studies in France and Germany, where he worked for a time directly under Husserl. He later taught at Taipei Imperial University before assuming a post at the Tokyo University of Education in 1932. During these years, under the direction of Tanabe Hajime*, he continued his studies
Nishitani Keiji 西谷啓治 (1900–1990) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Keiji Nishitani
Abstract: Nishitani Keiji was born 27 February 1900 in a small town on the Japan Sea. He was fourteen when his father died of tuberculosis, a disease from which Nishitani himself suffered as a young man. As a high-school student, Nishitani was attracted to Zen through the writings of D.T. Suzuki* and at the same time read widely in western sources out side the curriculum. Drawn to philosophy by a volume of Nishida Kitarō’s* essays, he enrolled in the department of philosophy at Kyoto University where he studied under Nishida and Tanabe Hajime*, graduating with a thesis on Schelling. In the
Shimomura Toratarō 下村寅太郎 (1902–1995) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Toratarō Shimomura
Abstract: After studying philosophy in Kyoto University under Nishida Kitarō* and Tanabe Hajime*, with a concentration on Leibniz and the philosophy of science and mathematics, Shimomura Toratarō began his teaching career in Tokyo. He went on to produce a number of weighty volumes on the interface of natural science, mathematics, and philosophy, as well as on symbolic thinking and the relation between the human spirit and the mechanization of society. In 1956 he traveled for the first time to Europe in what was to prove a turning point in his life and thought. From then on, his attention was focused on
Miyake Gōichi 三宅剛一 (1895–1982) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Gōichi Miyake
Abstract: It was reading Nishida Kitarō’s*
An Inquiry into the Goodas a middle-school student that first turned Miyake Gōichi’s attention to philosophy. Already from the time of his undergraduate studies at Kyoto University Miyake was recognized as one of the brightest students in Nishida’s circle. For ten years after graduation he submerged himself in neo-Kantianism and study of the phenomenological method, culminating in a year at Freiburg where he participated in seminars in Husserl’s home and attended Heidegger’s lectures on Hegel’sPhenomenology. While in Germany he collaborated with another Japanese student in Freiburg to prepare a German précis of Nishida’s
Ichikawa Hakugen 市川白弦 (1902–1986) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Hakugen Ichikawa
Abstract: In assessing the ethical issues surrounding wartime Zen and such Zen-influenced thinkers
Maruyama Masao 丸山真男 (1914–1996) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Masao Maruyama
Abstract: Few intellectuals in Japan have left such a conspicuous mark on postwar intellectual discourse as Maruyama Masao. He is known for his active political stance in the postwar period as well as for his academic accomplishments. During the first part of his academic career, he focused on an analysis of early-modern and modern Japanese thought, inspired by the methods of Marx, Mannheim, and Weber. Later on, he devoted more energy to an elucidation of the particularities of Japanese intellectual history as a whole. Throughout his lifetime, he remained an opinion-leader of the liberal left.
Minamoto Ryōen 源 了圓 (1920– ) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Ryōen Minamoto
Abstract: After graduating from Kyoto University’s department of philosophy in 1948, Minamoto Ryōen joined the editorial staff of the
Philosophical Quarterlyand collaborated with a team of Kyoto professors in editing theDictionary of Philosophy.In 1960 he prepared a transcription of the lectures that would become Nishitani Keiji’s*Religion and Nothingness.He then set out on a long teaching career that lasted thirty-seven years and included a time as visiting professor at Columbia University in New York. After retiring in 1991 he served as visiting professor at Oxford University and in 2001 he was named a member of the prestigious
Mori Arimasa 森有正 (1911–1976) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Arimasa Mori
Abstract: Mori Arimasa was baptized a Christian at the age of two and tutored in French from the age of six, and by his early teens had been exposed to English, Latin, and classical Greek as well. He graduated from the department of philosophy in Tokyo Imperial University in 1938 with a thesis on Pascal. In the following years, he published a number of translations and essays, mainly on Pascal and Descartes, and held teaching posts at Tokyo Women’s Christian University and later at Tokyo University. After the wartime ban on study abroad was lifted, he went to Paris where he
Overview from:
Japanese Philosophy
Abstract: The question of whether there is such a thing as samurai philosophy, and if so, what it might consist of, is one of the more complex issues in Japanese intellectual history. This is primarily due to developments that occurred during the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, and which are still inextricably linked to current discussions of the question. From the 1890s onward, a romanticized image of the samurai emerged, motivated by cultural and political currents at the time. The major lasting effect of this idealization was the idea that “warrior thought” represented an independent and relatively homogeneous intellectual tradition
Hiratsuka Raichō 平塚らいてう (1886–1971) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Raichō Hiratsuka
Abstract: Hiratsuka Raichō (née Hiratsuka Haru) is Japan’s most celebrated feminist activist of modern times. She began her public career in 1911 with the organization of Seitō (The Bluestocking Society), a literary movement that announced the birth of the women’s liberation movement in Japan. A fierce individualism coupled with the self-effacing practice of Zen meditation combined to sustain her engagement in women’s questions throughout her adult life. During the first decade of the twentieth century, she stood up for women’s right to genuine romantic love. She herself fell in love with Okumura Hiroshi, a painter five years her junior, and, in
Overview from:
Japanese Philosophy
Abstract: Comparing the things we saw with the pictures in the Dutch book, we were amazed at their perfect agreement.… The Shōgun’s official doctors… had beheld dissections seven or eight times before, but always what they
NEVER THE TWAIN: from:
Locating Life Stories
Author(s) PERKINS MAUREEN
Abstract: In today’s globalized, hyper-international, post-migration times, it may seem obvious that Kipling’s claim about East and West no longer holds true. Nevertheless, the East/West split is still widely held to have relevance, not only in popular stereotypes and vague generalizations, but even in academic scholarship across a range of fields, including psychology, literature, and some areas of politics. Witness Samuel Huntington’s Clash of Civilizations theory, which posits a West under increasing threat from the “civilization” of Islam. The field of life writing has also at times been prone to make generalizations about whole swathes of humanity, suggesting that “Western” life
Book Title: Great Fool-Zen Master Ryokan--Poems, Letters, and Other Writings
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): HASKEL PETER
Abstract: Taigu Ryokan (1759-1831) remains one of the most popular figures in Japanese Buddhist history. Despite his religious and artistic sophistication, Ryokan referred to himself as "Great Fool" and refused to place himself within the cultural elite of his age. In contrast to the typical Zen master of his time, who presided over a large monastery, trained students, and produced recondite religious treatises, Ryokan followed a life of mendicancy in the countryside. Instead of delivering sermons, he expressed himself through kanshi (poems composed in classical Chinese) and waka and could typically be found playing with the village children in the course of his daily rounds of begging. Great Fool is the first study in a Western language to offer a comprehensive picture of the legendary poet-monk and his oeuvre. It includes not only an extensive collection of the master's kanshi, topically arranged to facilitate an appreciation of Ryokan's colorful world, but selections of his waka, essays, and letters. The volume also presents for the first time in English the Ryokan zenji kiwa (Curious Accounts of the Zen Master Ryokan), a firsthand source composed by a former student less than sixteen years after Ryokan's death. Although it lacks chronological order, the Curious Account is invaluable for showing how Ryokan was understood and remembered by his contemporaries. It consists of colorful anecdotes and episodes, sketches from Ryokan's everyday life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wqmgc
Ryōkan of Mount Kugami from:
Great Fool
Author(s) Haskel Peter
Abstract: Spend time at one of Japan’s busy commuter train stations and you will probably notice a bookstore crowded with silent rows of well-dressed “salarymen” and “salarywomen” browsing through an array of paperbacks and magazines. There, among the ubiquitous tabloids, the sex-and-violence comics, and the very latest Japanese and American bestsellers, you are likely to find several books devoted to the Zen master Taigu Ryōkan (1758–1831), a penniless monk whose life was spent in obscurity in Japan’s snow country, meditating, playing with children, and writing poems that vividly describe his world. He lived by begging in the villages and towns
Commemorating Ryōkan: from:
Great Fool
Author(s) Abé Ryūichi
Abstract: Because of the vast amount of legendary literature, both oral and written, that has accumulated around Ryōkan since his death, it is often forgotten that the effort to document Ryōkan’s life and to preserve his writings had already begun during his lifetime (1758–1831). This brief survey identifies the key primary sources for Ryōkan’s biography, sketches the historical context in which the contemporaneous biographies of Ryōkan were composed, and illustrates the intertwining historical relationships that join these texts. Many of the sources exist only as unpublished manuscripts. In cases where there exist printed editions of these sources, whether partial or
Translators’ Note from:
Great Fool
Abstract: Ryōkan has frequently suffered from being presented in one-dimensional terms. Because of his fame as a poet and a calligrapher, for example, Ryōkan is sometimes treated primarily as a literary figure. But to many ordinary Japanese, Ryōkan is above all a cultural hero, a teacher in the broadest sense of the word, one who has something to say not simply about poetry, but about life itself. This is the “Ryōkan san” familiar to millions of Japanese who may never even have attempted Ryōkan’s poems. Indeed, Ryōkan lived his life as a Zen Buddhist beggar-monk, and his poetry and other writings
Chapter 6 The Asian American Family Portrait Documentary: from:
Relative Histories
Abstract: Current scholarship on film studies underscores the role of the photograph, the film image, and the documentary in the construction of historical chronicles and invites us to analyze films as forms of historical mediation. “Independent video constitutes a field of cultural memory, one that often contests and intervenes into official history,” Marita Sturken explains in “Politics of Video Memory” (2002), as “many independent videotapes are deliberate interventions in the making of history and conscious constructions of cultural memory” at a point in time where “the photograph, the documentary film image, and the docudrama are central elements in the construction of
SPIRITUAL JOURNALS IN FRANCE FROM THE SIXTEENTH TO THE EIGHTEENTH CENTURIES from:
On Diary
Abstract: 1) the “journal” or “diary” form, defined as a
series of dated traces; that is, a practice of making notations extended over time: a single notation, such as Blaise Pascal’sMémorialdated 23 November 1654 “from about ten o’clock until about midnight” is not, properly speaking, a journal;
ON TODAYʹS DATE from:
On Diary
Abstract: One should never start the New Year without plans, even modest ones. For some time now I have been thinking of doing a bit of research on the
datingof diaries. And, for that matter, on dating things in general. It has probably already been done. I imagine that studies already exist, for letters at least, since the date is a basic element, along with the signature and the address. Let’s get straight to the point: the modern diary does not really become what it is until the day it begins to resemble the letter in that respect, when the
MARC-ANTOINE JULLIEN: from:
On Diary
Abstract: What use have you made of the last twenty-four hours? Could you say how long you have spent on each of your activities? Try hard to remember and give a precise figure for each of them, with the help of an analytical classification of the various types of activities. Write down those figures today, tomorrow, and the next few days on the columns of a table that will enable you to record daily variations and calculate averages. Then examine the results and ask yourself whether you have put your time to good use, and whether you have got the balance
THE DIARY ON TRIAL from:
On Diary
Abstract: But by the time you get to the postscript, another disturbing idea has begun to dawn on you: there is no way that people can have said the diary had all
THE DIARY AS ʺANTIFICTIONʺ from:
On Diary
Abstract: I’ve just Googled the word “antifiction” and found that it’s free, at least for literary theory. A hip-hop group has staked a claim, but that’s it. No competition. These days, the minute you invent a word, you have to take out a patent. Serge Doubrovsky thought he had invented the word “autofiction” in 1977, but in 1998 his little cousin Marc Weitzmann claimed that Jerzy Kosinski had already invented the concept in 1965, something that Philippe Vilain has just taken the time to disprove in
Défense de Narcisse(2005). I tell this amusing story because I created “antifiction” out of
DIARIES ON THE INTERNET: from:
On Diary
Abstract: From October 1999 to October 2000 I did a study of a phenomenon that was just beginning to appear in the French-speaking world: online diaries. Today, in 2008, given the explosion of blogs, it is hard to believe that in November 1999, after a month of systematic searching on the Internet, I had found only sixty-nine diaries. Things are moving so fast that my study already has a sort of archeological value. At the time, I was dealing with a single shrub showing a few buds; today, it is a forest of trees in full bloom. I observed these diaries
SPIRITUAL JOURNALS IN FRANCE FROM THE SIXTEENTH TO THE EIGHTEENTH CENTURIES from:
On Diary
Abstract: 1) the “journal” or “diary” form, defined as a
series of dated traces; that is, a practice of making notations extended over time: a single notation, such as Blaise Pascal’sMémorialdated 23 November 1654 “from about ten o’clock until about midnight” is not, properly speaking, a journal;
ON TODAYʹS DATE from:
On Diary
Abstract: One should never start the New Year without plans, even modest ones. For some time now I have been thinking of doing a bit of research on the
datingof diaries. And, for that matter, on dating things in general. It has probably already been done. I imagine that studies already exist, for letters at least, since the date is a basic element, along with the signature and the address. Let’s get straight to the point: the modern diary does not really become what it is until the day it begins to resemble the letter in that respect, when the
MARC-ANTOINE JULLIEN: from:
On Diary
Abstract: What use have you made of the last twenty-four hours? Could you say how long you have spent on each of your activities? Try hard to remember and give a precise figure for each of them, with the help of an analytical classification of the various types of activities. Write down those figures today, tomorrow, and the next few days on the columns of a table that will enable you to record daily variations and calculate averages. Then examine the results and ask yourself whether you have put your time to good use, and whether you have got the balance
THE DIARY ON TRIAL from:
On Diary
Abstract: But by the time you get to the postscript, another disturbing idea has begun to dawn on you: there is no way that people can have said the diary had all
THE DIARY AS ʺANTIFICTIONʺ from:
On Diary
Abstract: I’ve just Googled the word “antifiction” and found that it’s free, at least for literary theory. A hip-hop group has staked a claim, but that’s it. No competition. These days, the minute you invent a word, you have to take out a patent. Serge Doubrovsky thought he had invented the word “autofiction” in 1977, but in 1998 his little cousin Marc Weitzmann claimed that Jerzy Kosinski had already invented the concept in 1965, something that Philippe Vilain has just taken the time to disprove in
Défense de Narcisse(2005). I tell this amusing story because I created “antifiction” out of
DIARIES ON THE INTERNET: from:
On Diary
Abstract: From October 1999 to October 2000 I did a study of a phenomenon that was just beginning to appear in the French-speaking world: online diaries. Today, in 2008, given the explosion of blogs, it is hard to believe that in November 1999, after a month of systematic searching on the Internet, I had found only sixty-nine diaries. Things are moving so fast that my study already has a sort of archeological value. At the time, I was dealing with a single shrub showing a few buds; today, it is a forest of trees in full bloom. I observed these diaries
SPIRITUAL JOURNALS IN FRANCE FROM THE SIXTEENTH TO THE EIGHTEENTH CENTURIES from:
On Diary
Abstract: 1) the “journal” or “diary” form, defined as a
series of dated traces; that is, a practice of making notations extended over time: a single notation, such as Blaise Pascal’sMémorialdated 23 November 1654 “from about ten o’clock until about midnight” is not, properly speaking, a journal;
ON TODAYʹS DATE from:
On Diary
Abstract: One should never start the New Year without plans, even modest ones. For some time now I have been thinking of doing a bit of research on the
datingof diaries. And, for that matter, on dating things in general. It has probably already been done. I imagine that studies already exist, for letters at least, since the date is a basic element, along with the signature and the address. Let’s get straight to the point: the modern diary does not really become what it is until the day it begins to resemble the letter in that respect, when the
MARC-ANTOINE JULLIEN: from:
On Diary
Abstract: What use have you made of the last twenty-four hours? Could you say how long you have spent on each of your activities? Try hard to remember and give a precise figure for each of them, with the help of an analytical classification of the various types of activities. Write down those figures today, tomorrow, and the next few days on the columns of a table that will enable you to record daily variations and calculate averages. Then examine the results and ask yourself whether you have put your time to good use, and whether you have got the balance
THE DIARY ON TRIAL from:
On Diary
Abstract: But by the time you get to the postscript, another disturbing idea has begun to dawn on you: there is no way that people can have said the diary had all
THE DIARY AS ʺANTIFICTIONʺ from:
On Diary
Abstract: I’ve just Googled the word “antifiction” and found that it’s free, at least for literary theory. A hip-hop group has staked a claim, but that’s it. No competition. These days, the minute you invent a word, you have to take out a patent. Serge Doubrovsky thought he had invented the word “autofiction” in 1977, but in 1998 his little cousin Marc Weitzmann claimed that Jerzy Kosinski had already invented the concept in 1965, something that Philippe Vilain has just taken the time to disprove in
Défense de Narcisse(2005). I tell this amusing story because I created “antifiction” out of
DIARIES ON THE INTERNET: from:
On Diary
Abstract: From October 1999 to October 2000 I did a study of a phenomenon that was just beginning to appear in the French-speaking world: online diaries. Today, in 2008, given the explosion of blogs, it is hard to believe that in November 1999, after a month of systematic searching on the Internet, I had found only sixty-nine diaries. Things are moving so fast that my study already has a sort of archeological value. At the time, I was dealing with a single shrub showing a few buds; today, it is a forest of trees in full bloom. I observed these diaries
SPIRITUAL JOURNALS IN FRANCE FROM THE SIXTEENTH TO THE EIGHTEENTH CENTURIES from:
On Diary
Abstract: 1) the “journal” or “diary” form, defined as a
series of dated traces; that is, a practice of making notations extended over time: a single notation, such as Blaise Pascal’sMémorialdated 23 November 1654 “from about ten o’clock until about midnight” is not, properly speaking, a journal;
ON TODAYʹS DATE from:
On Diary
Abstract: One should never start the New Year without plans, even modest ones. For some time now I have been thinking of doing a bit of research on the
datingof diaries. And, for that matter, on dating things in general. It has probably already been done. I imagine that studies already exist, for letters at least, since the date is a basic element, along with the signature and the address. Let’s get straight to the point: the modern diary does not really become what it is until the day it begins to resemble the letter in that respect, when the
MARC-ANTOINE JULLIEN: from:
On Diary
Abstract: What use have you made of the last twenty-four hours? Could you say how long you have spent on each of your activities? Try hard to remember and give a precise figure for each of them, with the help of an analytical classification of the various types of activities. Write down those figures today, tomorrow, and the next few days on the columns of a table that will enable you to record daily variations and calculate averages. Then examine the results and ask yourself whether you have put your time to good use, and whether you have got the balance
THE DIARY ON TRIAL from:
On Diary
Abstract: But by the time you get to the postscript, another disturbing idea has begun to dawn on you: there is no way that people can have said the diary had all
THE DIARY AS ʺANTIFICTIONʺ from:
On Diary
Abstract: I’ve just Googled the word “antifiction” and found that it’s free, at least for literary theory. A hip-hop group has staked a claim, but that’s it. No competition. These days, the minute you invent a word, you have to take out a patent. Serge Doubrovsky thought he had invented the word “autofiction” in 1977, but in 1998 his little cousin Marc Weitzmann claimed that Jerzy Kosinski had already invented the concept in 1965, something that Philippe Vilain has just taken the time to disprove in
Défense de Narcisse(2005). I tell this amusing story because I created “antifiction” out of
DIARIES ON THE INTERNET: from:
On Diary
Abstract: From October 1999 to October 2000 I did a study of a phenomenon that was just beginning to appear in the French-speaking world: online diaries. Today, in 2008, given the explosion of blogs, it is hard to believe that in November 1999, after a month of systematic searching on the Internet, I had found only sixty-nine diaries. Things are moving so fast that my study already has a sort of archeological value. At the time, I was dealing with a single shrub showing a few buds; today, it is a forest of trees in full bloom. I observed these diaries
SPIRITUAL JOURNALS IN FRANCE FROM THE SIXTEENTH TO THE EIGHTEENTH CENTURIES from:
On Diary
Abstract: 1) the “journal” or “diary” form, defined as a
series of dated traces; that is, a practice of making notations extended over time: a single notation, such as Blaise Pascal’sMémorialdated 23 November 1654 “from about ten o’clock until about midnight” is not, properly speaking, a journal;
ON TODAYʹS DATE from:
On Diary
Abstract: One should never start the New Year without plans, even modest ones. For some time now I have been thinking of doing a bit of research on the
datingof diaries. And, for that matter, on dating things in general. It has probably already been done. I imagine that studies already exist, for letters at least, since the date is a basic element, along with the signature and the address. Let’s get straight to the point: the modern diary does not really become what it is until the day it begins to resemble the letter in that respect, when the
MARC-ANTOINE JULLIEN: from:
On Diary
Abstract: What use have you made of the last twenty-four hours? Could you say how long you have spent on each of your activities? Try hard to remember and give a precise figure for each of them, with the help of an analytical classification of the various types of activities. Write down those figures today, tomorrow, and the next few days on the columns of a table that will enable you to record daily variations and calculate averages. Then examine the results and ask yourself whether you have put your time to good use, and whether you have got the balance
THE DIARY ON TRIAL from:
On Diary
Abstract: But by the time you get to the postscript, another disturbing idea has begun to dawn on you: there is no way that people can have said the diary had all
THE DIARY AS ʺANTIFICTIONʺ from:
On Diary
Abstract: I’ve just Googled the word “antifiction” and found that it’s free, at least for literary theory. A hip-hop group has staked a claim, but that’s it. No competition. These days, the minute you invent a word, you have to take out a patent. Serge Doubrovsky thought he had invented the word “autofiction” in 1977, but in 1998 his little cousin Marc Weitzmann claimed that Jerzy Kosinski had already invented the concept in 1965, something that Philippe Vilain has just taken the time to disprove in
Défense de Narcisse(2005). I tell this amusing story because I created “antifiction” out of
DIARIES ON THE INTERNET: from:
On Diary
Abstract: From October 1999 to October 2000 I did a study of a phenomenon that was just beginning to appear in the French-speaking world: online diaries. Today, in 2008, given the explosion of blogs, it is hard to believe that in November 1999, after a month of systematic searching on the Internet, I had found only sixty-nine diaries. Things are moving so fast that my study already has a sort of archeological value. At the time, I was dealing with a single shrub showing a few buds; today, it is a forest of trees in full bloom. I observed these diaries
SPIRITUAL JOURNALS IN FRANCE FROM THE SIXTEENTH TO THE EIGHTEENTH CENTURIES from:
On Diary
Abstract: 1) the “journal” or “diary” form, defined as a
series of dated traces; that is, a practice of making notations extended over time: a single notation, such as Blaise Pascal’sMémorialdated 23 November 1654 “from about ten o’clock until about midnight” is not, properly speaking, a journal;
ON TODAYʹS DATE from:
On Diary
Abstract: One should never start the New Year without plans, even modest ones. For some time now I have been thinking of doing a bit of research on the
datingof diaries. And, for that matter, on dating things in general. It has probably already been done. I imagine that studies already exist, for letters at least, since the date is a basic element, along with the signature and the address. Let’s get straight to the point: the modern diary does not really become what it is until the day it begins to resemble the letter in that respect, when the
MARC-ANTOINE JULLIEN: from:
On Diary
Abstract: What use have you made of the last twenty-four hours? Could you say how long you have spent on each of your activities? Try hard to remember and give a precise figure for each of them, with the help of an analytical classification of the various types of activities. Write down those figures today, tomorrow, and the next few days on the columns of a table that will enable you to record daily variations and calculate averages. Then examine the results and ask yourself whether you have put your time to good use, and whether you have got the balance
THE DIARY ON TRIAL from:
On Diary
Abstract: But by the time you get to the postscript, another disturbing idea has begun to dawn on you: there is no way that people can have said the diary had all
THE DIARY AS ʺANTIFICTIONʺ from:
On Diary
Abstract: I’ve just Googled the word “antifiction” and found that it’s free, at least for literary theory. A hip-hop group has staked a claim, but that’s it. No competition. These days, the minute you invent a word, you have to take out a patent. Serge Doubrovsky thought he had invented the word “autofiction” in 1977, but in 1998 his little cousin Marc Weitzmann claimed that Jerzy Kosinski had already invented the concept in 1965, something that Philippe Vilain has just taken the time to disprove in
Défense de Narcisse(2005). I tell this amusing story because I created “antifiction” out of
DIARIES ON THE INTERNET: from:
On Diary
Abstract: From October 1999 to October 2000 I did a study of a phenomenon that was just beginning to appear in the French-speaking world: online diaries. Today, in 2008, given the explosion of blogs, it is hard to believe that in November 1999, after a month of systematic searching on the Internet, I had found only sixty-nine diaries. Things are moving so fast that my study already has a sort of archeological value. At the time, I was dealing with a single shrub showing a few buds; today, it is a forest of trees in full bloom. I observed these diaries
Book Title: Making Transcendents-Ascetics and Social Memory in Early Medieval China
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): Campany Robert Ford
Abstract: By the middle of the third century B.C.E. in China there were individuals who sought to become transcendents (xian)—deathless, godlike beings endowed with supernormal powers. This quest for transcendence became a major form of religious expression and helped lay the foundation on which the first Daoist religion was built. Both xian and those who aspired to this exalted status in the centuries leading up to 350 C.E. have traditionally been portrayed as secretive and hermit-like figures. This groundbreaking study offers a very different view of xian-seekers in late classical and early medieval China. It suggests that transcendence did not involve a withdrawal from society but rather should be seen as a religious role situated among other social roles and conceived in contrast to them. Robert Campany argues that the much-discussed secrecy surrounding ascetic disciplines was actually one important way in which practitioners presented themselves to others. He contends, moreover, that many adepts were not socially isolated at all but were much sought after for their power to heal the sick, divine the future, and narrate their exotic experiences. By the middle of the third century B.C.E. in China there were individuals who sought to become transcendents (xian)—deathless, godlike beings endowed with supernormal powers. This quest for transcendence became a major form of religious expression and helped lay the foundation on which the first Daoist religion was built. Both xian and those who aspired to this exalted status in the centuries leading up to 350 C.E. have traditionally been portrayed as secretive and hermit-like figures. This groundbreaking study offers a very different view of xian-seekers in late classical and early medieval China. It suggests that transcendence did not involve a withdrawal from society but rather should be seen as a religious role situated among other social roles and conceived in contrast to them. Robert Campany argues that the much-discussed secrecy surrounding ascetic disciplines was actually one important way in which practitioners presented themselves to others. He contends, moreover, that many adepts were not socially isolated at all but were much sought after for their power to heal the sick, divine the future, and narrate their exotic experiences. The book moves from a description of the roles of xian and xian-seekers to an account of how individuals filled these roles, whether by their own agency or by others’—or, often, by both. Campany summarizes the repertoire of features that constituted xian roles and presents a detailed example of what analyses of those cultural repertoires look like. He charts the functions of a basic dialectic in the self-presentations of adepts and examines their narratives and relations with others, including family members and officials. Finally, he looks at hagiographies as attempts to persuade readers as to the identities and reputations of past individuals. His interpretation of these stories allows us to see how reputations were shaped and even co-opted—sometimes quite surprisingly—into the ranks of xian. Making Transcendents provides a nuanced discussion that draws on a sophisticated grasp of diverse theoretical sources while being thoroughly grounded in traditional Chinese hagiographical, historiographical, and scriptural texts. The picture it presents of the quest for transcendence as a social phenomenon in early medieval China is original and provocative, as is the paradigm it offers for understanding the roles of holy persons in other societies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wqqwh
CHAPTER 4 Secret Arts, Manifest Wonders from:
Making Transcendents
Abstract: In many ancient and medieval cultures of secrecy (along with their modern descendants), knowledge was deemed powerful because access to it was restricted and access to it was restricted because it was deemed powerful. A gulf separates these cultures from those Steven Shapin and Peter Burke have recently argued arose only in early modern times (in Europe at least), wherein truth-telling and the art of civil conversation among gentlemen formed the basis of a new epistemological decorum, and where lying and secrecy came to be seen as violations of a code of honor.¹ Over the past century scholars beginning with
Book Title: The Melodrama of Mobility-Women, Talk, and Class in Contemporary South Korea
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): ABELMANN NANCY
Abstract: How do people make sense of their world in the face of the breakneck speed of contemporary social change? Through the lives and narratives of eight women, The Melodrama of Mobility chronicles South Korea's experience of just such dizzyingly rapid development. Abelmann captures the mood, feeling, and language of a generation and an era while providing a rare window on the personal and social struggles of South Korean modernity. Drawing also from television soap operas and films, she argues that a melodramatic sensibility speaks to South Korea's transformation because it preserves the tension and ambivalence of daily life in unsettled times. The melodramatic mode helps people to wonder: Can individuals be blamed for their social fates? How should we live? Who can say who is good or bad? By combining the ethnographic tools of anthropology, an engagement with prevailing sociological questions, and a literary approach to personal narratives, The Melodrama of Mobility offers a rich portrait of the experience of compressed modernity in the non-West.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wqt7p
2 THE EIGHT WOMEN from:
The Melodrama of Mobility
Abstract: This chapter introduces the eight women who figure in this book, as well as the paths that led me to them. Reflection on these paths begins this book’s consideration of South Korean class maps. My stories toward these women are dispersed over space and time, critical coordinates for thinking about class. At the close of this chapter, I discuss these women in a shared social field in order to begin my foray into the complexity of class location and identities for women of this generation.
3 KEY WORDS from:
The Melodrama of Mobility
Abstract: During my conversations with the eight South Korean women I introduced in chapter 1, a particular world of words emerged, demanding that I take note of them. Over time I began to underline these words in my field notes, to anticipate them in my conversations, and to use them myself as prompts in conversations. In the earlier days of this project, I imagined that I would write a book with some sort of a glossary to serve as a guide to the women’s stories. Over the course of the research, however, it became clear to me that the hardest words
1 Introduction from:
The Subject in Crisis in Contemporary Chinese Literature
Abstract: The late 1970s and the 1980s in post-Mao China were an age of ideas and ideals. Thanks to Deng Xiaoping’s more liberal cultural policy, Western theories of various persuasions surged in with unprecedented speed and force. Despite their sometimes conflicting and mutually deconstructive theoretical premises, Western concepts of all sorts were eagerly swallowed up, hastily digested, and hurriedly circulated by the intellectually starved Chinese critics to both create and fill up a new discursive space where the critics’ position in the changing society was negotiated and their own notion of modernity articulated and disseminated. Among all the entrées on the
4 In the Madding Crowd from:
The Subject in Crisis in Contemporary Chinese Literature
Abstract: While Han Shaogong and his fellow
xungenwriters dug into the collective, cultural foundations of the subject from a historical perspective, others chose to face the present, lodging the subject in its daily, individual reality. When the Cultural Revolution and previous political movements were openly repudiated in the late 1970s, people had a chance to look honestly into the real conditions of their existence without the officially imposed, and sometimes self-exercised, ideological sanctions. As a result of the candid scrutiny, a new trend in the representation of the subject appeared: “absurdist fiction”(huangdan xiaoshuo),which presents life as irrational, illogical,
5 The Post-Mao Traveler on the New Long March from:
The Subject in Crisis in Contemporary Chinese Literature
Abstract: In the preceding two chapters, I concentrated on a number of works published by Han Shaogong and Can Xue in the heyday of the New Era, the mid-1980s. The two writers’ visions of the physically and symbolically deformed being are anything but congruent with the optimism of the age that had invested much of its energies and desires in the recovery of the
ren, the human being writ large. Despite differences in their subject matter and artistic sensibilities, Han Shaogong and Can Xue are products of the times. Embodying as well as contributing to the ethos of the 1980s, their
1 The Ghost’s Body from:
The Phantom Heroine
Abstract: Death is not personified in Chinese thought or rhetoric, and consequently death cannot be represented as a feminine figure as it is at many points in Indo-European traditions.¹ Yet the prominence of the female revenant and the frequent fantasy of her resurrection or rebirth is one of the most striking features of seventeenth-century Chinese literature. The taste for “phantom heroines” is part of the widespread fascination with the death of beautiful, talented women in the sentimental culture of this period, exemplified by the phenomenal success of Tang Xianzu’s southern drama of 1598,Peony Pavilion (Mudan ting), which was subtitledThe
JUSTICE AND GLOBAL DEMOCRACY from:
Justice and Democracy
Author(s) Dallmayr Fred
Abstract: Ours is a time of perplexing cross-currents. As we approach the end of the second millennium, we seem to enter the stage of a new
pax Romana—but now on an unprecedented scale: a world order or world civilization, basically of Western design, encircling the globe with a network of universal/ uniform ideas and practices. Among these ideas, easily the most prominent and influential is that of liberal democracy, a regime founded on popular self-determination and equal citizenship rights. Thus the near-providential advance of liberal democracy, apprehended dimly by Tocqueville over a century ago, seems to have reached in our
Book Title: Dark Writing-Geography, Performance, Design
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): Carter Paul
Abstract: We do not see empty figures and outlines; we do not move in straight lines. Everywhere we are surrounded by dapple; the geometry of our embodied lives is curviform, meandering, bi-pedal. Our personal worlds are timed, inter-positional, and contingent. But nowhere in the language of cartography and design do these ordinary experiences appear. This, Dark Writing argues, is a serious omission because they are designs on the world: architects and colonizers use their lines to construct the places where we will live. But the rectilinear streets, squares, and public spaces produced in this way leave out people and the entire environmental history of their coming together. How, this book asks, can we explain the omission of bodies from maps and plans? And how can we redraw the lines maps and plans use so that the qualitative world of shadows, footprints, comings and goings, and occasions—all essential qualities of places that incubate sociality—can be registered? In short, Dark Writing asks why we represent the world as static when our experience of it is mobile. It traces this bias in Enlightenment cartography, in inductive logic, and in contemporary place design. This is the negative critique. Its positive argument is that, when we look closely at these designs on the world, we find traces of a repressed movement form. Even the ideal lines of geometrical figures turn out to contain traces of earlier passages; and there are many forms of graphic design that do engage with the dark environment that surrounds the light of reason. How can this "dark writing"—so important to reconfiguring our world as a place of meeting, of co-existence and sustaining diversity—be represented? And how, therefore, can our representations of the world embody more sensuously the mobile histories that have produced it? Dark Writing answers these questions using case studies: the exemplary case of the beginnings of the now world-famous Papunya Tula Painting Movement (Central Australia) and three high-profile public place-making initiatives in which the author was involved as artist and thinker. These case studies are nested inside historical chapters and philosophical discussions of the line and linear thinking that make Dark Writing both a highly personal book and a narrative with wide general appeal.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wqzx4
5 The Engine of Narrative Making: from:
Out of the Margins
Abstract: In the foregoing chapter, the results of the philological analyses of the
fanbentext demonstrate a continuous deposition of stylistic and linguistic features from different periods. While we remain still ignorant of many things about the evolution of theShuihucomplex, we can now say one thing with a reasonable amount of certainty: Thefanbentext ofShuihu zhuan, which presents full-fledged vernacular prose, was “written” and repeatedly “rewritten” amid constant contacts with orality over a long time historically. Yet while the results of such analyses are obviously historicist in nature, the approach to the study of the stylistic and
Chapter 3 Kollumba Kang Wansuk, an Early Catholic Activist and Martyr from:
Christianity in Korea
Author(s) Ledyard Gari
Abstract: Kollumba (Columba) Kang Wansuk (1761–1801), who perished in the great anti-Catholic persecution of 1801, is well known among a small number of historians of Korean Catholicism, but not among more general scholars of Korean history or in the wider field of Korean Studies. She should be more broadly recognized, since aside from her importance as an early Catholic, she was also a remarkable woman who worked in a cause that unfolded outside the home in public space, something that was hardly imaginable for a woman in her time and probably without precedent in earlier Korean history. She had a
Chapter 13 Sibling Rivalry in Twentieth-Century Korea: from:
Christianity in Korea
Author(s) Baker Donald
Abstract: At the end of the twentieth century, according to figures supplied to South Korea’s Ministry of Culture and Tourism by seventeen of Korea’s nearly one hundred different Protestant denominations and subdenominations, there were an estimated 12,260,321 Protestant Christians in the Republic of Korea.¹ At that same time, Korea’s Catholic Church reported a membership of 4,071,560. Those are remarkable figures. One hundred years earlier, at the beginning of the twentieth century, there were fewer than 20,000 Protestants in all of Korea. There were also approximately 42,000 Korean Catholics at that time, for a total of little more than 60,000 Christians in
Book Title: Cult, Culture and Authority-Princess Lieu Hanh in Vietnamese History
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): DROR OLGA
Abstract: Princess Liễu Hạnh, often called the Mother of the Vietnamese people by her followers, is one of the most prominent goddesses in Vietnamese popular religion. First emerging some four centuries ago as a local sect appealing to women, the princess’ cult has since transcended its geographical and gender boundaries and remains vibrant today. Who was this revered deity? Was she a virtuous woman or a prostitute? Why did people begin worshiping her and why have they continued? Cult, Culture, and Authority traces Liễu Hạnh’s cult from its ostensible appearance in the sixteenth century to its present-day prominence in North Vietnam and considers it from a broad range of perspectives, as religion and literature and in the context of politics and society. Over time, Liễu Hạnh’s personality and cult became the subject of numerous literary accounts, and these historical texts are a major source for this book. Author Olga Dror explores the authorship and historical context of each text considered, treating her subject in an interdisciplinary way. Her interest lies in how these accounts reflect the various political agendas of successive generations of intellectuals and officials. The same cult was called into service for a variety of ideological ends: feminism, nationalism, Buddhism, or Daoism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wr2wd
Book Title: Heian Japan, Centers and Peripheries- Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): MATSUMOTO STACIE
Abstract: The first three centuries of the Heian period (794–1086) saw some of its most fertile innovations and epochal achievements in Japanese literature and the arts. It was also a time of important transitions in the spheres of religion and politics, as aristocratic authority was consolidated in Kyoto, powerful court factions and religious institutions emerged, and adjustments were made in the Chinese-style system of ruler-ship. At the same time, the era’s leaders faced serious challenges from the provinces that called into question the primacy and efficiency of the governmental system and tested the social/cultural status quo. Heian Japan, Centers and Peripheries, the first book of its kind to examine the early Heian from a wide variety of multidisciplinary perspectives, offers a fresh look at these seemingly contradictory trends. Essays by fourteen leading American, European, and Japanese scholars of art history, history, literature, and religions take up core texts and iconic images, cultural achievements and social crises, and the ever-fascinating patterns and puzzles of the time. The authors tackle some of Heian Japan’s most enduring paradigms as well as hitherto unexplored problems in search of new ways of understanding the currents of change as well as the processes of institutionalization that shaped the Heian scene, defined the contours of its legacies, and make it one of the most intensely studied periods of the Japanese past.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wr3b4
1 Between and Beyond Centers and Peripheries from:
Heian Japan, Centers and Peripheries
Author(s) KAMENS EDWARD
Abstract: This volume presents new approaches to and interpretations of the first three centuries of the Heian period (794–1086), several interrelated aspects of which are reexamined or are analyzed for the first time here, in a group of studies that reach across disciplinary boundaries while sharing a common theme or motif: the real or imagined configuration of “centers and peripheries” and their many manifestations. As we use the term here, “centers and peripheries” can refer to geographical or spatial relationships, but it may also suggest various dynamics in, among, and between institutions and collectives, clans and families, social classes and
6 Terrains of Text in Mid-Heian Court Culture from:
Heian Japan, Centers and Peripheries
Author(s) KAMENS EDWARD
Abstract: In Murasaki Shikibu’s semiprivate living quarters (ca. 1008 – 1010), there were two cupboards. One was “crammed to bursting point” with “old poems and tales”
(furu uta, monogatari);the other was full of miscellaneous Chinese books(fumi domo)left to her by her late husband. It was to the latter, she reports in her diary, that she was drawn in those times when idleness weighed upon her(tsurezure semete amarinuru toki):“Whenever my loneliness threatens to overwhelm me, I take out one or two of them to look at; but my women gather together behind by back. ‘It’s because you go
10 The Archeology of Anxiety: from:
Heian Japan, Centers and Peripheries
Author(s) MOERMAN D. MAX
Abstract: The Heian period has often been characterized as a golden age of Japanese religious culture, one in which the Buddhist literature, painting, sculpture, and architecture produced at court are considered to have reached unprecedented heights. It is thus all the more surprising that in this time of cultural florescence many Buddhists, monastics and aristocrats alike, understood themselves to be living in an age of decay. According to their interpretation of Buddhist chronologies, the eleventh century marked the beginning of the end: the onset of
mappō,the final degenerate age of the Dharma, or Buddhist Law, in which both the availability
INTRODUCTION from:
Custodians of the Sacred Mountains
Abstract: This book offers a journey into the world of the Bali Aga, or Mountain Balinese. It tells of a people whose culture for centuries has been shrouded in the shadow of the more celebrated lowland kingdoms of southern Bali. In this interlocal ethnographic account of the elaborate alliance systems of the Bali Aga, highland Balinese culture and society is explored for the first time in all its regional complexity. I hope in this book to convey a deeper appreciation of the Bali Aga people and their place in the fabric of Balinese identities and to contribute to a radical reassessment
Chapter 1 THE BANUA AS A CATEGORY AND A SOCIAL PROCESS from:
Custodians of the Sacred Mountains
Abstract: The social landscape of highland Bali is patterned by regional networks of ritual alliance among groups of villages. Such networks are locally referred to as
banua,or “ritual domains.” How these regional associations are conceptualized and maintained, and how they generate a sense of shared identity among the mountain people and set the stage for a regional status economy will be explored in the following chapters. The study of regional social interaction among the Bali Aga leads to a magical world where human beings, ancestors, spirits, and gods share a sacred landscape and timescape, brought to life in an intricate
Chapter 9 PEOPLE OF THE MOUNTAINS AND PEOPLE FROM THE SEA: from:
Custodians of the Sacred Mountains
Abstract: Moving beyond the ethnography of highland Bali, I now explore how Bali Aga people and their culture are situated in the representational landscape of Bali as a whole. Insofar as the Bali Aga have been portrayed with a negative bias by other, more powerful Balinese people, I assume that there is a moral responsibility to amplify their counterdiscourses. At the same time, Balinese identities are the product of a historical and intersubjective process in which the Bali Aga have participated with an ambivalent attitude of competition as well as cooperation. In adopting this perspective, I aim to prevent a fetishization
Chapter 10 THE ANTHROPOLOGICAL COPRODUCTION OF THE BALI AGA: from:
Custodians of the Sacred Mountains
Abstract: The situation of the Bali Aga within changing Balinese representations of their society is part of a contested and emergent knowledge system, drawing on a range of culturally specific metaphors of time and movement and, more recently, on a more “global” and Western-influenced vocabulary of modernity. But how do these local representational models compare and relate to Western portrayals of the Bali Aga, as reflected in an abundant and changing anthropological literature on Balinese society?
RED JACKETʹS RHETORIC from:
American Indian Rhetorics of Survivance
Author(s) Dennis Matthew
Abstract: RHETORIC proved critical in protecting Seneca homelands and buying time for Seneca communities to negotiate new ways to be Seneca within a postcolonial United States. At critical moments Seneca people affirmed and deployed the power of rhetoric; that is, in their postcolonial predicament, to paraphrase Aristotle, they discovered and utilized well the available means of persuasion. Seneca diplomat Red Jacket employed a hybrid discourse, in print as well as oratory, designed to engage and persuade white missionaries, government officials, and the public of the Seneca right to autonomy. While such speech was understood as ʺIndianʺ by whites, and as ʺwhiteʺ
(NATIVE) AMERICAN JEREMIAD from:
American Indian Rhetorics of Survivance
Author(s) Bizzell Patricia
Abstract: WILLIAM APESS identified himself in his writings as an Indian.¹ He was perhaps the most successful activist on behalf of Indian rights in the antebellum United States. At the same time, he adopted the European religion of Christianity, and used the European language of English for all of his published works and public addresses.² Thus he can be described as what literary historian Bernd Peyer calls a ʺtranscultural individualʺ (17), incorporating elements from different cultures into his identity. Peyer emphasizes that this internal integration process can be empowering: ʺRather than being incapacitated by a disturbed personality, the transcultural individual can,
AMERICAN INDIAN SOVEREIGNTY from:
American Indian Rhetorics of Survivance
Author(s) dʹErrico Peter
Abstract: Inter Caetera, May 3, 1493—Among other works well pleasing to the Divine Majesty and cherished of our heart, this assuredly ranks highest, that in our times especially the Catholic faith and the Christian religion be exalted and everywhere increased and spread, that the health of souls be cared for and that barbarous nations be overthrown and brought to the faith itself. …Our beloved son Christopher Columbus, …
Introduction: from:
Traces Of A Stream
Abstract: As the subtitle indicates,this book is about literacy, social change, and African American women. I chose the title because of reactions I have consistently received over the years when I have presented papers on early generations of African American women writers and their achievements. Without exception, after a presentation, at least one person—sometimes from surprise, or with an awareness of deprivation, or with indignation or embarrassment, or sometimes with a sense of what I have come to call deep disbelief¹—at least one person will say to me, “I’ve never heard of these women.” I have been compelled
Chapter 1 In Search of Rivers: from:
Traces Of A Stream
Abstract: In 1983, I discovered that African American women write essays, and it was then I began to notice features of this type of writing that served ultimately to shape and direct the writing of this book. What prompted these insights was my reading of Alice Walker’s collection of previously published and unpublished essays, entitled, after the best-known essay in the group,In Search of Our Mothers’ Gardens: Womanist Prose. First among the distinctions of this volume is that it was published during a time when works by African American women were being celebrated as a literary “renaissance.” By the 1980s
1 Marxism as Eschatology from:
From Darkness To Light
Abstract: IN THE FOLLOWING PAGES, I would like to outline the basic features of Marxist historical mythology, linking it with the Western religious and philosophical concern with human salvation. My core argument is that the attempt to provide scientific principles of historical analysis and to break away from the messianic interpretation of history sponsored by the Church was in fact in many ways unsuccessful: underneath the seemingly new Marxist methodology were concealed older concerns with historical time and redemption. Marxists would doubtless have renounced notions such as good, evil, messiah, and salvation as baseless religious superstitions that had nothing to do
5 Classes Made and Unmade from:
From Darkness To Light
Abstract: THE MECHANICS of the student purges suggest that classes were ultimately made up of individuals whose class labels changed over time for a variety of reasons. My emphasis in this section will be on the fate of those individuals who were caught in the system and obliged both to think of themselves and to present themselves to others in class terms. If the relegation of a student to a particular class category was not a function of his immutable social essence but the result of a struggle, a class trial, one may begin to speak of the elaboration of Bolshevik
1 Marxism as Eschatology from:
From Darkness To Light
Abstract: IN THE FOLLOWING PAGES, I would like to outline the basic features of Marxist historical mythology, linking it with the Western religious and philosophical concern with human salvation. My core argument is that the attempt to provide scientific principles of historical analysis and to break away from the messianic interpretation of history sponsored by the Church was in fact in many ways unsuccessful: underneath the seemingly new Marxist methodology were concealed older concerns with historical time and redemption. Marxists would doubtless have renounced notions such as good, evil, messiah, and salvation as baseless religious superstitions that had nothing to do
5 Classes Made and Unmade from:
From Darkness To Light
Abstract: THE MECHANICS of the student purges suggest that classes were ultimately made up of individuals whose class labels changed over time for a variety of reasons. My emphasis in this section will be on the fate of those individuals who were caught in the system and obliged both to think of themselves and to present themselves to others in class terms. If the relegation of a student to a particular class category was not a function of his immutable social essence but the result of a struggle, a class trial, one may begin to speak of the elaboration of Bolshevik
1 Some Cogitations on Interpretations from:
Interpretation
Author(s) Machamer Peter
Abstract: Interpreting “things” is an activity that people (and maybe some animals) engage in. Sometimes we call this activity of interpreting trying to understand or trying to make sense of something. In some sophisticated circles, interpretation is called the search for meaning. What results from interpreting is an interpretation or, perhaps, some degree of understanding. Some people might say the interpreter has found out what the meaning of something is or has constructed a meaning.
2 The Logic of Interpretation from:
Interpretation
Author(s) Lorand Ruth
Abstract: It is traditionally held that interpretation is the method of the humanities, while explanation is the method of the sciences. At the same time, it is widely accepted that interpretation is an all-embracing activity and thus all cognitions are modes of interpretation, and moreover, as Gadamer declared, “Alles Verstehen ist Auslegen” [All understanding is interpretation] (Gadamer 1965, 366). It is clear that both views cannot coexist. If explanation is distinct from interpretation, and thereby distinguishes the sciences from the humanities, interpretation cannot be the umbrella concept that covers all understanding.
3 Interpretation as Cultural Orientation: from:
Interpretation
Author(s) Gethmann-Siefert Annemarie
Abstract: If we treat the question of to what extent art can be an interpretation of our world, self-concept, and historical forms of life by referring to Hegel, it seems that we come to a dead end. The authoritative and original place for a connection between art and interpretation in the traditional philosophy of aesthetics is at best the aesthetics of reception. Its traditional version relies on the basic assumption that a piece of art is constituted each time in its reception, that is, in the multiple, historically varying interpretations of its meaning and sense.¹ Even a discussion of the impact
14 Classifying Dry German Riesling Wines: from:
Interpretation
Author(s) Sautter Ulrich
Abstract: Reflection on olfactory and gustatory perceptions and their epistemological status has not been playing a major role in the philosophical tradition. Most classical philosophers deal with the senses of smell and taste rather parenthetically and with a sense of flippancy—if at all.¹ Sometimes philosophical texts cite phenomena of smell and taste where exemplification in factually unrelated, particularly abstract contexts is needed²—as if the difficulties of abstraction might be evened out by choosing examples from an area of life that is surrounded by a sense of light-heartedness and concreteness. But almost no classical text of philosophy has dealt with
Sense of Place and Lieu de Mémoire: from:
Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) GOODBODY AXEL
Abstract: It is striking how often literary representations of nature appear within recollections of childhood, or more broadly in the context of acts of remembering. At the same time, memories of the past, in literature as in life, are commonly anchored in places, landscapes, or buildings. As approaches to the study of culture, ecocriticism and cultural memory studies differ in their principal concerns: while the former relates to nature and space, and examines cultural constructions of the natural environment, the latter is oriented toward history and time, and principally preoccupied with representations and understandings of the social, in formulations relating the
From the Modern to the Ecological: from:
Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) WALLS LAURA DASSOW
Abstract: So long as ecocritics are trapped in the “two cultures” ideology that polarizes literature from science and human society from nonhuman nature, we will find it difficult to define a middle ground from which literature and science can be seen as partners, and humans and nonhumans as agents, all cooperating to form the world we share. To locate this middle ground we need to think not of a monolithic “Science” but of the various practices and disciplines of the sciences, and in this quest our natural allies will be our colleagues in science studies. Bruno Latour has spent a lifetime
Martin Heidegger, D. H. Lawrence, and Poetic Attention to Being from:
Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) NORRIS TREVOR
Abstract: The thought of the German philosopher Martin Heidegger (1889–1976) is a challenge to thinking because it asks us to imagine being differently. His works are not straightforward and do not set out an explicit program for social change but rather invite a shift in attention and conception of self in relation to world, time, and the nature of knowledge. This shift involves refusing a major aspect of our late modernity, that is, the ubiquity and dominance of forms of abstract and theoretical knowledge. Heidegger wishes to return this knowledge to its proper place, grounded in pragmatic relationships that respond
Merleau-Ponty’s Ecophenomenology from:
Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) WESTLING LOUISE
Abstract: Maurice Merleau-Ponty is the only major European philosopher who embraces the consequences of evolution and sees humans as interdependent members of the ecosystem. His thinking manifests a lifelong engagement with modern science, which he saw in a necessary complementarity with philosophy. Although his untimely death prevented the completion of his ambitious philosophy of nature, enough of the work in progress exists in manuscript to indicate its shape and importance as a radically ecological philosophy.
Coexistence and Coexistents: from:
Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) MORTON TIMOTHY
Abstract: Environmental ethics sometimes depends upon ideas of life forms immersed in a surrounding “world.”¹ For Trevor Norris, “world” is the “dynamic relatedness that grounds our identity” (see his essay in this volume). The philosopher Martin Heidegger derives the notion of “world” from his study of Jakob von Uexküll’s biological research, which suggested that different sentient life forms have different experiences of their surroundings, and hence phenomenologically (that is, experientially) different worlds. A “world” in this sense is a zone of things that surround the sentient being, which have various kinds of significance for that being.
Cybernetics and Social Systems Theory from:
Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) BERGTHALLER HANNES
Abstract: Aldo Leopold’s
A Sand County Almanacopens with a walk in the hills of southwestern Wisconsin, in January, during a brief spell of thaw. The narrator follows the track of a skunk: “[It] leads straight across-country. . . . I follow, curious to deduce his state of mind and appetite. . . . In January one may follow a skunk track . . . with only an occasional and mild digression into other doings. . . . There is time not only to see who has done what, but to speculate why.”¹
The Biosemiotic Turn: from:
Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) WHEELER WENDY
Abstract: In this essay I explore an ecocritical theory of cultural, and thus also literary, creativity from a biosemiotic point of view. While what follows might be thought broadly to fall within what is sometimes called the “post” humanities, in fact biosemiotics is a thoroughly interdisciplinary proto-discipline; it seeks not only to change how humanists think about culture, the arts, and the biological sciences but also to change how scientists and social scientists think about biological science and the arts and humanities.
5 RELIGIOUS DWELLERS from:
Textual Intimacy
Abstract: Autobiographies by Religious Dwellers differ from those by Religious Debtors primarily by locating religion and its positive role in the present. While religion may also have been part of the past, the focus is on the way in which it helps to account for where the writer is at the time of writing. The emphasis is less on recovery than on discovery, on having found something or having reached a location, decision, or point of arrival that often is marked by a new or renewed affiliation.
Book Title: Freud and Augustine in Dialogue-Psychoanalysis, Mysticism, and the Culture of Modern Spirituality
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): PARSONS WILLIAM B.
Abstract: Adopting an interdisciplinary, dialogical, and transformational framework for interpreting Augustine's spiritual journey in his
Confessions,Parsons places a "mystical theology" at the heart of Augustine's narrative and argues that his mysticism has been misunderstood partly because of the limited nature of the psychological models applied to it. At the same time, he expands Freud's therapeutic legacy to incorporate the contemporary findings of physiology and neuroscience that have been influenced in part by modern spirituality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wrm01
Book Title: Freud and Augustine in Dialogue-Psychoanalysis, Mysticism, and the Culture of Modern Spirituality
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): PARSONS WILLIAM B.
Abstract: Adopting an interdisciplinary, dialogical, and transformational framework for interpreting Augustine's spiritual journey in his
Confessions,Parsons places a "mystical theology" at the heart of Augustine's narrative and argues that his mysticism has been misunderstood partly because of the limited nature of the psychological models applied to it. At the same time, he expands Freud's therapeutic legacy to incorporate the contemporary findings of physiology and neuroscience that have been influenced in part by modern spirituality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wrm01
Book Title: Doing Justice to Mercy-Religion, Law, and Criminal Justice
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): Jung Kevin
Abstract: Authored by legal practitioners, activists, and theorists in addition to theologians and ethicists, the essays collected here are informed by timeless principles, and yet they could not be timelier. The trend in sentencing moves toward an increased severity, and the number of incarcerated people in the United States is at an all-time high. In the half-decade since 9/11, moreover, homeland security has established itself as a permanent fixture in our lives. In this atmosphere, the current volume seeks initially to clarify how justice and mercy intertwine in relation to a number of issues, such as rehabilitation, the death penalty, domestic violence, and war crimes. Exploring the legal, philosophical, and theological grounds for mercy in our courts, the discussion then moves to the practical ways in which mercy may be implemented.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wrm3g
Race, Class, and the Development of Criminal Justice Policy from:
Doing Justice to Mercy
Author(s) MAUER MARC
Abstract: The profound racial disparities that permeate the criminal justice system are by now distressingly prevalent and well documented. The unprecedented rise in the prison population over the past three decades—a six-fold increase, leading to the incarceration of more than 2 million Americans—has been accompanied by widespread racial effects. The figures are well known, but shocking nonetheless: one of every eight black males in the 25–34 age group is locked up on any given day, and 32 percent of black males born today can expect to spend time in a state or federal prison if current trends continue.¹
Recapturing the Good, Not Merely Measuring Harms: from:
Doing Justice to Mercy
Author(s) ROTHCHILD JONATHAN
Abstract: As the essays in this book demonstrate, the current criminal justice system faces significant challenges: overcrowding, racial disparities, financial shortfalls, increases in juvenile inmates, and the collapse of families and communities of those incarcerated. These challenges impel critical reflections on the basic purposes of criminal punishment on both a theoretical and practical level. According to the
United States Commission Guidelines Manual(November 2000), the four basic purposes of criminal punishment are deterrence, incapacitation, just punishment, and rehabilitation.¹ Each of these purposes has garnered extensive support, and debates among the different proponents have been polemical at times. Within the last decade,
Why International Law Matters in God’s World from:
Doing Justice to Mercy
Author(s) SCHEFFER DAVID
Abstract: One of Isaiah’s prophecies against Judah intones, “Mankind will be brought low, everyone will be humbled” (Isa. 2:9). That prophecy bore truth in our lifetimes, on our watch. If you have difficulty imagining the reality of the Devil, or if you do not believe in the Devil, or of evil forces that undeniably exist, then take a walk with me.
The Way of the Cross as Theatric of Counterterror from:
Doing Justice to Mercy
Author(s) TAYLOR MARK LEWIS
Abstract: Since writing about systems of criminal justice and injustice in
The Executed God,one of that volume’s major notions, organized terror, has become more pertinent than I could have anticipated at that time. The book argued that U.S. practices of policing, imprisonment, and the death penalty form a system that disseminates terror among poor communities, and further, that this system often functions to reinforce exploitative patterns of political, economic, and social power. This terrorizing function, and its importance to U.S. public order, is hidden, for many people, behind the claims of moral legitimacy that police and other criminal justice officials
Book Title: Doing Justice to Mercy-Religion, Law, and Criminal Justice
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): Jung Kevin
Abstract: Authored by legal practitioners, activists, and theorists in addition to theologians and ethicists, the essays collected here are informed by timeless principles, and yet they could not be timelier. The trend in sentencing moves toward an increased severity, and the number of incarcerated people in the United States is at an all-time high. In the half-decade since 9/11, moreover, homeland security has established itself as a permanent fixture in our lives. In this atmosphere, the current volume seeks initially to clarify how justice and mercy intertwine in relation to a number of issues, such as rehabilitation, the death penalty, domestic violence, and war crimes. Exploring the legal, philosophical, and theological grounds for mercy in our courts, the discussion then moves to the practical ways in which mercy may be implemented.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wrm3g
Race, Class, and the Development of Criminal Justice Policy from:
Doing Justice to Mercy
Author(s) MAUER MARC
Abstract: The profound racial disparities that permeate the criminal justice system are by now distressingly prevalent and well documented. The unprecedented rise in the prison population over the past three decades—a six-fold increase, leading to the incarceration of more than 2 million Americans—has been accompanied by widespread racial effects. The figures are well known, but shocking nonetheless: one of every eight black males in the 25–34 age group is locked up on any given day, and 32 percent of black males born today can expect to spend time in a state or federal prison if current trends continue.¹
Recapturing the Good, Not Merely Measuring Harms: from:
Doing Justice to Mercy
Author(s) ROTHCHILD JONATHAN
Abstract: As the essays in this book demonstrate, the current criminal justice system faces significant challenges: overcrowding, racial disparities, financial shortfalls, increases in juvenile inmates, and the collapse of families and communities of those incarcerated. These challenges impel critical reflections on the basic purposes of criminal punishment on both a theoretical and practical level. According to the
United States Commission Guidelines Manual(November 2000), the four basic purposes of criminal punishment are deterrence, incapacitation, just punishment, and rehabilitation.¹ Each of these purposes has garnered extensive support, and debates among the different proponents have been polemical at times. Within the last decade,
Why International Law Matters in God’s World from:
Doing Justice to Mercy
Author(s) SCHEFFER DAVID
Abstract: One of Isaiah’s prophecies against Judah intones, “Mankind will be brought low, everyone will be humbled” (Isa. 2:9). That prophecy bore truth in our lifetimes, on our watch. If you have difficulty imagining the reality of the Devil, or if you do not believe in the Devil, or of evil forces that undeniably exist, then take a walk with me.
The Way of the Cross as Theatric of Counterterror from:
Doing Justice to Mercy
Author(s) TAYLOR MARK LEWIS
Abstract: Since writing about systems of criminal justice and injustice in
The Executed God,one of that volume’s major notions, organized terror, has become more pertinent than I could have anticipated at that time. The book argued that U.S. practices of policing, imprisonment, and the death penalty form a system that disseminates terror among poor communities, and further, that this system often functions to reinforce exploitative patterns of political, economic, and social power. This terrorizing function, and its importance to U.S. public order, is hidden, for many people, behind the claims of moral legitimacy that police and other criminal justice officials
2 A House of One’s Own: from:
Locating the Destitute
Abstract: Many accounts of spatiality seek to distinguish
spacefromplace. For instance, Edward Casey’s comprehensive study of the philosophical history of place,The Fate of Place, gives precedence to place over space, suggesting that “to be at all—to exist in any way—is to be somewhere, and to be somewhere is to be in some kind of place” (ix). Because it is so central to our existence, place is often taken for granted and subsumed by the more dominant categories of space and time. The notion of space, Casey argues, is traditionally described as universal, infinite, and ubiquitous. Place,
Introduction from:
Essays from the Edge
Abstract: In 1851, the German philosopher Arthur Schopenhauer gathered together two volumes of his scattered essays, aphorisms, dialogues, and random thoughts and published them under the recherché title
Parerga and Paralipomena.¹ Far more than his masterwork of 1819,The World as Will and Representation,it reached a surprisingly wide readership and made his reputation. The 1850s were, after all, a grim period of political reentrenchment following the failures of the revolutions of 1848, and the time was ripe for the sour pessimism and disillusionment with reason expressed in his philosophy of the irrational will. If any progress were to be made,
Taking on the Stigma of Inauthenticity from:
Essays from the Edge
Abstract: “The search for authenticity, nearly everywhere we find it in modern times,” writes Marshall Berman in his book on Rousseau,
The Politics of Authenticity,“is bound up with a radical rejection of things as they are . . . the desire for authenticity has emerged in modern society as one of the most politically explosive of human impulses.”¹ Even those with less radical agendas, like Sigmund Freud, have been seen as sharing the same desire. According to Lionel Trilling in his classic studySincerity and Authenticity,Freud’s insistence on the tragic dimension of the human condition “had the intention of
Mourning a Metaphor from:
Essays from the Edge
Abstract: ”Revolution,” it should be recalled, began its extraordinary career as a metaphor borrowed from astronomy, which had only recently revised its understanding of what in the heavens really revolved around what.¹ In medieval Latin,
revolutiomeant a return or rolling back, often implying a cyclical revolving in time. This was its meaning, for example, in Copernicus’s famous treatise of 1543De revolutionibus orbium coelestium.Although its earliest political uses have been detected in mid-fourteenth-century Italy, the term did not come into its own in the lexicon of politics until the upheavals of seventeenth-century England, when “reformation,” losing its power as
1990 from:
Essays from the Edge
Abstract: Of all the phenomena that register the distance between history as lived experience and history as written record, nothing is more emphatic than the concept of a historical period. When we live through the happenings that constitute our lives, we are never able to know for sure if we inhabit a meaningful epoch of historical time, for without terminal closure and the crossing of a threshold no epoch is yet defined. We cannot see beyond our current horizon to know what the future landscape will look like. Even the apparently mechanical and uniform temporality of centuries, which so often seems
Allons enfants de l’humanité from:
Essays from the Edge
Abstract: There can be fewer more appalling signs of our increasingly appalling times than the imprisonment without legal redress or terminal sentence of six hundred or so “enemy combatants” in the Guantánamo Bay prison run by the American government. Outside the legal jurisdiction of any country, not even that of the one doing the imprisoning, they are in what can rightfully be called a dystopian nonterritory, where there is no semblance of the human rights whose virtues America so often preaches to the world. National security, we are told, trumps any other considerations in the time of war, even when that
Book Title: Postcolonial Francophone Autobiographies-From Africa to the Antilles
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): Sankara Edgard
Abstract: Bringing a comparative perspective to the study of autobiography, Edgard Sankara considers a cross-section of postcolonial francophone writing from Africa and the Caribbean in order to examine and compare for the first time their transnational reception. Sankara not only compares the ways in which a wide selection of autobiographies were received locally (as well as in France) but also juxtaposes reception by the colonized and the colonizer to show how different meanings were assigned to the works after publication.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wrpth
CHAPTER 3 Tautegorical Sublime: from:
Religion after Religion
Abstract: Gershom scholem was almost certainly the leading Judaist of this century. Henry Corbin was one of the world’s most influential Islamicists during the same years.¹ Each was the leading authority on the esoteric traditions of their respective monotheistic tradition. They were also acquainted for fully fifty years, and friends for over thirty years.² After World War II, from 1949 to 1978, they met together almost every August at Eranos meetings. They cited each other in their scholarship and eventually contributed to each other’s
Festschriften.Both were subsidized by the Bollingen Foundation. They even, at times, shared the same translator.³
CHAPTER 8 Collective Renovatio from:
Religion after Religion
Abstract: In 1949, the first year of the Cold War and the year that Corbin and Scholem first spoke at Eranos, Eliade published
Cosmos and History, with its heartfelt chapter on “The Terror of History.”¹ It seems almost trite to observe, at century’s end, that the History of Religions was born in a time of crisis. Still, at the risk of this banality, it is perhaps worthwhile to recall that that birth didnottake place during the height of wartime crises, from 1914 to 1945. Rather, it occurred during its anxiously quiescent aftermath, at the beginning of the long stretch
CHAPTER 12 Psychoanalysis in Reverse from:
Religion after Religion
Abstract: Given the long-term participation by the Historians of Religion in the meetings inspired by Carl Jung, it seems virtually unavoidable that any study of their theories of religion must carefully assess their respective positions in relation to psychology. This, however, is a particularly vexatious area of research, inasmuch as each explicitly opposed the reduction of religious realities to psychological forces. On the other hand, each scholar, at the same time, was accustomed to employing psychological categories—of which archetypes are only the best known—to interpret religious materials.¹
CHAPTER ONE Twentieth-Century Liberal Thought: from:
Liberal Languages
Abstract: In this chapter I seek to investigate how liberalism was portrayed throughout the twentieth century in dedicated liberal literature, that is, works primarily devoted to an exposition of the basic tenets of liberalism. On the surface many, though not all, of these works present themselves as “second-order” overviews of liberal theory and ideology. Sometimes, as with the Rawlsian family of arguments, they intend both to offer a novel interpretation of liberal principles and, in parallel, reflect given cultural understandings unconsciously and unintentionally. On the whole, though, writers about liberalism have tended to elucidate a tradition rather than depart from it.
CHAPTER ELEVEN Political Theory and the Environment: from:
Liberal Languages
Abstract: Consider sitting on a tree. Every year in Oxford hundreds of human beings sit on trees. Most of them are children, often in their backgardens, scrambling over branches, hiding in their tree houses. Some are adults, out for a walk, looking for a view, or a place to rest for a while when the ground is wet. Sitting on trees is a recreational activity, and has been so since time immemorial. Not long ago, one group of adults chose to sit on trees on the site of the Oxford-Business-School-to-be. Was that a recreational activity? I doubt it. The act was
CHAPTER ONE Twentieth-Century Liberal Thought: from:
Liberal Languages
Abstract: In this chapter I seek to investigate how liberalism was portrayed throughout the twentieth century in dedicated liberal literature, that is, works primarily devoted to an exposition of the basic tenets of liberalism. On the surface many, though not all, of these works present themselves as “second-order” overviews of liberal theory and ideology. Sometimes, as with the Rawlsian family of arguments, they intend both to offer a novel interpretation of liberal principles and, in parallel, reflect given cultural understandings unconsciously and unintentionally. On the whole, though, writers about liberalism have tended to elucidate a tradition rather than depart from it.
CHAPTER ELEVEN Political Theory and the Environment: from:
Liberal Languages
Abstract: Consider sitting on a tree. Every year in Oxford hundreds of human beings sit on trees. Most of them are children, often in their backgardens, scrambling over branches, hiding in their tree houses. Some are adults, out for a walk, looking for a view, or a place to rest for a while when the ground is wet. Sitting on trees is a recreational activity, and has been so since time immemorial. Not long ago, one group of adults chose to sit on trees on the site of the Oxford-Business-School-to-be. Was that a recreational activity? I doubt it. The act was
Book Title: Birth of the Symbol-Ancient Readers at the Limits of Their Texts
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Struck Peter T.
Abstract: Birth of the Symboloffers a new understanding of the role of poetry in the life of ideas in ancient Greece. Moreover, it demonstrates a connection between the way we understand poetry and the way it was understood by important thinkers in ancient times.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7rk2m
5 300 B.C.E.–200 C.E.: from:
Birth of the Symbol
Abstract: As we saw earlier, beginning in the third century b.c.e., about the time of Philochorus’s
On Symbolsand sometime before Chrysippus forwards his reading of the swallowing of Metis, the term “symbol” takes on a new life. It expands from being a narrow term for a contract marker, with specialized senses in Pythagoreanism, the mysteries, and divination, to being an important category of literary commentary. As we have seen, the Stoics and their allegorical followers present the first definitive evidence of this shift, though it was likely in place before them. During the Hellenistic and Roman periods the “symbol” appears
EPILOGUE from:
Birth of the Symbol
Abstract: In recent times Proclus has not generated the interest that he once did. Though, perhaps even more than the other Neoplatonists, he has consistently received lavish attention from enthusiasts of the occult sciences, his fortunes in the classicists’ canon have waxed and waned. But his relative obscurity today should not lead us to gloss over the importance he has had for pivotal thinkers in a number of periods. Those who specialize in Proclus have long been familiar with the breadth of his influence on the cosmologies of premodern Europe, East and West, but his legacy can be tracked in literary
Book Title: Available Light-Anthropological Reflections on Philosophical Topics
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Geertz Clifford
Abstract: Geertz, who once considered a career in philosophy, begins by explaining how he got swept into the revolutionary movement of symbolic anthropology. At that point, his work began to encompass not only the ethnography of groups in Southeast Asia and North Africa, but also the study of how meaning is made in all cultures--or, to use his phrase, to explore the "frames of meaning" in which people everywhere live out their lives. His philosophical orientation helped him to establish the role of anthropology within broader intellectual circles and led him to address the work of such leading thinkers as Charles Taylor, Thomas Kuhn, William James, and Jerome Bruner. In this volume, Geertz comments on their work as he explores questions in political philosophy, psychology, and religion that have intrigued him throughout his career but that now hold particular relevance in light of postmodernist thinking and multiculturalism.
Available Lightoffers insightful discussions of concepts such as nation, identity, country, and self, with a reminder that like symbols in general, their meanings are not categorically fixed but grow and change through time and place.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7rkn7
I Passage and Accident: from:
Available Light
Abstract: It is a shaking business to stand up in public toward the end of an improvised life and call it learned. I didn’t realize, when I started out, after an isolate childhood, to see what might be going on elsewhere in the world, that there would be a final exam. I suppose that what I have been doing all these years is piling up learning. But, at the time, it seemed to me that I was trying to figure out what to do next, and hold off a reckoning: reviewing the situation, scouting out the possibilities, evading the consequences, thinking
VIII The Pinch of Destiny: from:
Available Light
Abstract: When, in the last chapter of
The Varieties of Religious Experience— the one he uneasily calls “Conclusions” and immediately affixes with a corrective postscript which he then promptly disavows— William James comes to look back at what he has been doing for nearly five hundred close-set pages, he confesses himself somewhat taken aback about how soulful it all has been. “In rereading my manuscript, I am almost appalled at the amount of emotionality which I find in it. . . . We have been literally bathed in sentiment.”¹ It has all been a matter, he says, of “secret selves” and
Book Title: Essays on Giordano Bruno- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): GATTI HILARY
Abstract: This book gathers wide-ranging essays on the Italian Renaissance philosopher and cosmologist Giordano Bruno by one of the world's leading authorities on his work and life. Many of these essays were originally written in Italian and appear here in English for the first time. Bruno (1548-1600) is principally famous as a proponent of heliocentrism, the infinity of the universe, and the plurality of worlds. But his work spanned the sciences and humanities, sometimes touching the borders of the occult, and Hilary Gatti's essays richly reflect this diversity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7rmc2
7 BRUNO AND SHAKESPEARE: from:
Essays on Giordano Bruno
Abstract: Hamlet’scentral position as a moment of transition between the early period of Shakespeare’s more brilliant and happy mood toward the years of his mature tragic art can be considered as an acquired fact in almost any modern reading of his best known and most celebrated play. Those who wish to underline Shakespeare’s position in the course of British history between the end of the sixteenth century and the beginning of the seventeenth, whenHamletwas written and acted for the first time (1600–1601), often explain this dramatic change of mood by pointing to the final years of the
10 ROMANTICISM: from:
Essays on Giordano Bruno
Abstract: On september 16, 1798, two young poets left England for Germany. Only a few days previously, they had published together a small volume of verses destined to change the course of English literature: the
Lyrical Ballads.However, the implications of these poems, which proposed a reevaluation of the life of the sentiments and the spirit of the individual in forceful and unadorned language, had not yet been fully appreciated. Both their departure from England and their arrival in Germany went almost unnoticed.
11 BRUNO AND THE VICTORIANS from:
Essays on Giordano Bruno
Abstract: When j. c. shairp published his
Studies in Poetry and Philosophyin 1868, he included a section on Coleridge emphasizing the break that, under his influence, separated the Romantic and idealistic period of the beginning of the century from the culture of the Enlightenment. From the point of view of Shairp, which is also that of Coleridge, the Enlightenment was based on a utilitarian attitude that denoted an active but restricted and unimaginative intelligence, notably deprived of fantasy, profound sentiment, a sense of reverence, or spiritual sensibility. Shairp added that, in the Victorian England in which he was writing, there
12 BRUNO’S NATURAL PHILOSOPHY from:
Essays on Giordano Bruno
Abstract: Ever since bruno started to be studied seriously as a key figure in the European philosophical tradition, there has been uncertainty as to what kind of philosopher he was. John Toland proposed him to the more radical components of the Enlightenment culture of his time as a fundamentally anti-hierarchical thinker, drawing out all the most subversive implications of his post-Copernican, infinite cosmology, with its relativization of values, not only spatial but also social, political, historical, and religious.¹ But when Friedrich Heinrich Jacobi included some pregnant passages from one of Bruno’s major philosophical dialogues in Italian,
De la causa, principio et
15 BRUNO AND METAPHOR from:
Essays on Giordano Bruno
Abstract: Giordano bruno was born only five years after the first publication of Copernicus’s
De revolutionibusin 1543, and only thirty-odd years after Martin Luther’s excommunication from the Catholic Church had divided Europe and its culture into two militantly hostile factions. Bruno’s lifetime in the second half of the sixteenth century thus covers a vital if often turbulent moment of cultural transition, which would radically affect the history of both science and the humanities. This chapter will primarily be concerned with his thinking about language, and especially with his thoughts about metaphor, thus aligning itself with an interpretative model of early
Chapter Five Inside and Outside the Work of Art: from:
The Aesthetics of Mimesis
Abstract: The understanding of Aristotelian mimesis has suffered almost as much at the hands of its ostensible friends as at those of its avowed opponents. While the philosopher’s concept of mimesis has played a vital role in the long story of Western attitudes to artistic representation, that role has often been mediated through the reworking and misinterpretation of his ideas, especially those found in the
Poetics. The critical balance of the treatise has been prejudicially weighted down, at different times, either on the side of a doctrinal didacticism or, equally distortingly, on that of a formalist creed of pure artistic autonomy.
CHAPTER ONE Introduction from:
Reading Renunciation
Abstract: R
eading Renunciationexplores the exegetical problem confronting early Christian ascetic writers who wished to ground their renunciatory program in the Bible. Their “problem” arose because the Bible only sporadically supported their agenda; many verses appeared rather to assume that marriage and reproduction were the norm for godly living. To read the Bible as wholeheartedly endorsing their ascetic program challenged the Fathers’ interpretive ingenuity as well as their comprehensive knowledge of Scripture. How, given the Bible’s sometime recalcitrance, could the lived experience of Christian renunciants find a Scriptural justification? How might they derive a consistently ascetic message from the Bible? What
CHAPTER THREE Reading in the Early Christian World from:
Reading Renunciation
Abstract: A recent spate of scholarly works on the history of reading and writing has focused on the distinction between oral and literate cultures, and on the prevalence (or absence) of literacy at various historical periods. To place early Christians in this discussion has proved a vexing question. An important contribution to this exchange is classicist William V. Harris’
Ancient Literacy, published in 1989. Arguing for a minimalist view of ancient literacy, Harris claims that not more than 10 percent of the adult population of the Roman Empire at the time of Christianity’s origin was literate and that literacy declined from
CHAPTER SEVEN From Reproduction to Defamilialization from:
Reading Renunciation
Abstract: This chapter explores how the church fathers might appropriate for their own purposes an apparently “underasceticized” Hebrew (and earlier Christian) past. How could “Israel of the flesh,” with its concern for abundant reproduction, inspire those who yearned for “Jerusalem above,” where marriage and family were counted as naught? If “sacred literature” could not be rejected, only interpreted, hermeneutical strategies had to be devised to accommodate Biblical texts to an ascetic agenda: through delicate mining, recalcitrant passages would yield up treasures for the ascetic program. Although words had changed their “social atmosphere”¹ from the time of the Hebrew patriarchs to that
Book Title: The Sense of Music-Semiotic Essays
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Hatten Robert
Abstract: This theoretical innovation allows Monelle to describe how the Classical style of the eighteenth century--which he reads as a balance of lyric and progressive time--gave way to the Romantic need for emotional realism. He argues that irony and ambiguity subsequently eroded the domination of personal emotion in Western music as well as literature, killing the composer's subjectivity with that of the author. This leaves Dr. Strabismus suffering from the postmodern condition, and Raymond Monelle with an exciting, controversial new approach to understanding music and its history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7rszr
FOREWORD FOREWORD from:
The Sense of Music
Author(s) Hatten Robert S.
Abstract: The author of these essays, Professor of Music at the University of Edinburgh, is well known to music semioticians internationally as a keynote speaker or invited lecturer throughout Europe and North America. He is also a recognized scholar of eighteenthcentury music. But those music theorists and musicologists who have not encountered his insightful survey,
Linguistics and Semiotics in Music(1992), may not appreciate his role as one of the leading music semiotic theorists of our time. If that volume signaled Raymond Monelle’s authorial presence with an absorbing exploratory essay on deconstruction in music, the present book of essays, devoted entirely
1 THE WORDLESS SONG from:
The Sense of Music
Abstract: It was to be the climax of his career. Dr. Strabismus of Utrecht (whom God preserve) had spent a lifetime writing about music theory—not only about musical syntax and analysis, but also about meaning, sense, interpretation, heuristics. Now, he intended to write a comprehensive theory of music, to replace those great enterprises of the past, the treatises of Zarlino, Rameau, Marx. But unlike his great predecessors, he would embrace semantics as well as syntactics. He would describe how music comes to signify things to its listeners; how it participates in the whole signifying life of a culture, echoing the
2 THE SEARCH FOR TOPICS from:
The Sense of Music
Abstract: The theory of the musical
topos,developed in Leonard Ratner’s masterpieceClassic Music(1980), is a refinement of previous semantic theories which have appeared from time to time. It is undoubtedly an important key to musical signification, and it has been taken up by a number of writers (for example, Kofi Agawu 1991, and Elaine Sisman 1993). Of course, the idea that music should be appropriate to its subject, either in the setting of words or in the instrumental portrayal of scenes, is universal. Ratner’s mission was to show that certain portrayals are conventional, and that musical figures can therefore
4 THE TEMPORAL IMAGE from:
The Sense of Music
Abstract: It is important to distinguish
timefromtemporality.These two aspects, the first natural and the second cultural, have quite different functions in music as well as in perception. Natural or “objective” time is a condition of life, a “transcendent form” in the expression of Kant. It is continuous and irreversible,
5 GENRE AND STRUCTURE from:
The Sense of Music
Abstract: A world in which the moments of present time are transposed into the past or the future; in which all love and romance seem beyond the subject’s grasp, lost in the personal or historical past, where passages of terrible sweetness are always touched with nostalgia and regret—this was the temporal dynamic of the nineteenth century, and it was reflected in music. A temporal dialectic now joins hands with a dialectic that is ontological and sentimental. Time-in-a-moment and progressive time respectively evoke lostness and struggle; the extended present of lyric time becomes a space where the remembered and imagined past
Book Title: The Sense of Music-Semiotic Essays
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Hatten Robert
Abstract: This theoretical innovation allows Monelle to describe how the Classical style of the eighteenth century--which he reads as a balance of lyric and progressive time--gave way to the Romantic need for emotional realism. He argues that irony and ambiguity subsequently eroded the domination of personal emotion in Western music as well as literature, killing the composer's subjectivity with that of the author. This leaves Dr. Strabismus suffering from the postmodern condition, and Raymond Monelle with an exciting, controversial new approach to understanding music and its history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7rszr
FOREWORD FOREWORD from:
The Sense of Music
Author(s) Hatten Robert S.
Abstract: The author of these essays, Professor of Music at the University of Edinburgh, is well known to music semioticians internationally as a keynote speaker or invited lecturer throughout Europe and North America. He is also a recognized scholar of eighteenthcentury music. But those music theorists and musicologists who have not encountered his insightful survey,
Linguistics and Semiotics in Music(1992), may not appreciate his role as one of the leading music semiotic theorists of our time. If that volume signaled Raymond Monelle’s authorial presence with an absorbing exploratory essay on deconstruction in music, the present book of essays, devoted entirely
1 THE WORDLESS SONG from:
The Sense of Music
Abstract: It was to be the climax of his career. Dr. Strabismus of Utrecht (whom God preserve) had spent a lifetime writing about music theory—not only about musical syntax and analysis, but also about meaning, sense, interpretation, heuristics. Now, he intended to write a comprehensive theory of music, to replace those great enterprises of the past, the treatises of Zarlino, Rameau, Marx. But unlike his great predecessors, he would embrace semantics as well as syntactics. He would describe how music comes to signify things to its listeners; how it participates in the whole signifying life of a culture, echoing the
2 THE SEARCH FOR TOPICS from:
The Sense of Music
Abstract: The theory of the musical
topos,developed in Leonard Ratner’s masterpieceClassic Music(1980), is a refinement of previous semantic theories which have appeared from time to time. It is undoubtedly an important key to musical signification, and it has been taken up by a number of writers (for example, Kofi Agawu 1991, and Elaine Sisman 1993). Of course, the idea that music should be appropriate to its subject, either in the setting of words or in the instrumental portrayal of scenes, is universal. Ratner’s mission was to show that certain portrayals are conventional, and that musical figures can therefore
4 THE TEMPORAL IMAGE from:
The Sense of Music
Abstract: It is important to distinguish
timefromtemporality.These two aspects, the first natural and the second cultural, have quite different functions in music as well as in perception. Natural or “objective” time is a condition of life, a “transcendent form” in the expression of Kant. It is continuous and irreversible,
5 GENRE AND STRUCTURE from:
The Sense of Music
Abstract: A world in which the moments of present time are transposed into the past or the future; in which all love and romance seem beyond the subject’s grasp, lost in the personal or historical past, where passages of terrible sweetness are always touched with nostalgia and regret—this was the temporal dynamic of the nineteenth century, and it was reflected in music. A temporal dialectic now joins hands with a dialectic that is ontological and sentimental. Time-in-a-moment and progressive time respectively evoke lostness and struggle; the extended present of lyric time becomes a space where the remembered and imagined past
Book Title: The Undivine Comedy-Detheologizing Dante
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): BAROLINI TEODOLINDA
Abstract: Accepting Dante's prophetic truth claims on their own terms, Teodolinda Barolini proposes a "detheologized" reading as a global new approach to the
Divine Comedy. Not aimed at excising theological concerns from Dante, this approach instead attempts to break out of the hermeneutic guidelines that Dante structured into his poem and that have resulted in theologized readings whose outcomes have been overdetermined by the poet. By detheologizing, the reader can emerge from this poet's hall of mirrors and discover the narrative techniques that enabled Dante to forge a true fiction. Foregrounding the formal exigencies that Dante masked as ideology, Barolini moves from the problems of beginning to those of closure, focusing always on the narrative journey. Her investigation--which treats such topics as the visionary and the poet, the One and the many, narrative and time--reveals some of the transgressive paths trodden by a master of mimesis, some of the ways in which Dante's poetic adventuring is indeed, according to his own lights, Ulyssean.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7rvnj
Chapter 2 INFERNAL INCIPITS: from:
The Undivine Comedy
Abstract: The
commedia, perhaps more than any other text ever written, consciously seeks to imitate life, the conditions of human existence. Not surprisingly, then, the narrative journey begins with the problem of beginnings.¹ Dante’s beginning, “Nel mezzo del cammin di nostra vita” (“In the middle of the path of our life”), evokes biblical and classical precedents for not beginning at the beginning. As Frank Kermode reminds us, “Men, like poets, rush ‘into the middest,’in medias res, when they are born; they also diein mediis rebus.”² This is to say that we exist in time, which, according to Aistotle, “is
Chapter 5 PURGATORY AS PARADIGM: from:
The Undivine Comedy
Abstract: The narrative of the
Commediais a line intersected by other lines; it is a “vedere interciso da novo obietto,” a seeing interrupted by new things, thenovi obietti or cose novethat do not trouble angels. It is a voyage intersected by other voyages; each time the pilgrim meets a soul, his lifeline intersects another lifeline. In hell he encounters failed voyages, journeys that have ended in failure. Ulysses’ special stature within the poem derives in no small measure from the fact that his lifeline concludes with a literal voyage that has literally failed, so that he, alone among
Chapter 7 NONFALSE ERRORS AND THE TRUE DREAMS OF THE EVANGELIST from:
The Undivine Comedy
Abstract: From the time of Drythelm to the time of Charles the Fat, living voyagers traveled to the hereafter, leaving their bodies behind on earth to be returned to at journey’s end. These journeys were considered to be ‘real’ by the men of the Middle Ages, even if they depicted them as ‘dreams’ (
somnia).” So writes the historian Jacques Le Goff, in words that provide a context for Dante’s experience.¹ Dante believed that his journey was, in some essential sense, real. But Dante differs from other medieval visionaries in at least one fundamental respect, namely, the immensity of his poetic gift:
SIX The Language of “Evil” from:
The Satanic Epic
Abstract: The ambivalence of Satan’s relation to evil is important for the meaning of the poem. As we have seen, he explicitly rejects Michael’s term “evil” for the War in Heaven, which “wee style / The strife of Glorie” (6.289–90). And when, for the only time, he is called “the Evil one,” it is at the very moment when he stands “Stupidly good” (9.465) abstracted “From his own evil.”¹ Nonetheless the poem is about the origin of evil, and in this chapter I shall investigate the scrupulous ways in which Milton deploys what he knew to be the various sources
SEVEN OF MANS FIRST DIS from:
The Satanic Epic
Abstract: In the last chapter, I analyzed some of the words for “evil” that Milton deploys in strategic ways throughout the poem. Now it is time to notice that, beyond the specific words that “mean” evil or Satan, there is a network of echoing sounds and words that extends and complicates the Satanic focus of the epic. And it begins at the beginning. That remarkable forward shift of stresses in the opening pentameter of
Paradise Lostplaces special emphasis on the first syllable of the long word “disobedience.”
NINE SATAN TEMPTER from:
The Satanic Epic
Abstract: The well-known anthropologist Ruth Finnegan, author of important books such as
Oral Literature in AfricaandOral Poetry, did her initial fieldwork among the Limba people of Sierra Leone. She spent a lot of time collecting their traditions, especially their tales, for her thesis. One day they told her, now its your turn. We’ve told you lots of our stories, now you tell us one of yours. She protested briefly, but then chose to tell them the story of Adam and Eve. They listened politely but made little comment at the time. Two years later she went back to Sierra
Book Title: Brahms and His World-(Revised Edition)
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): KARNES KEVIN C.
Abstract: Since its first publication in 1990,
Brahms and His Worldhas become a key text for listeners, performers, and scholars interested in the life, work, and times of one of the nineteenth century's most celebrated composers. In this substantially revised and enlarged edition, the editors remain close to the vision behind the original book while updating its contents to reflect new perspectives on Brahms that have developed over the past two decades. To this end, the original essays by leading experts are retained and revised, and supplemented by contributions from a new generation of Brahms scholars. Together, they consider such topics as Brahms's relationship with Clara and Robert Schumann, his musical interactions with the "New German School" of Wagner and Liszt, his influence upon Arnold Schoenberg and other young composers, his approach to performing his own music, and his productive interactions with visual artists.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7rxmx
Time and Memory: from:
Brahms and His World
Author(s) BOTSTEIN LEON
Abstract: How can one grasp the nature and impact of Brahms’s musical language and communication in his own time? In the first instance one has to guard against an uncritical sense of the stability of musical texts, their meaning, and how they can be read and heard. The acoustic, cultural, and temporal habits of life of the late nineteenth century in which Brahms’s music functioned demand reconsideration if the listener in the early twentyfirst century wishes to gain a historical perspective on Brahms’s music and its significance. A biographical strategy and the history of critical reception themselves are insufficient.
Johannes Brahms, Solitary Altruist from:
Brahms and His World
Author(s) OSTWALD PETER F.
Abstract: Brahms was a Janus-like figure who looked backward, seeking inspiration from the older Baroque and Classical traditions, while at the same time he looked forward and seemed the embodiment of modernism. A man of many contrasts, Brahms was devoted to his homeland in north Germany, but chose to live in southern Europe. He adored his parents and enjoyed family life, but never married. He was a kind and generous man, but often adopted an extremely rude manner toward others. He was fiercely independent, yet would mourn bitterly the loss of friends and relatives.He amassed a small fortune, but always lived
The Pianos of Johannes Brahms from:
Brahms and His World
Author(s) BRADY STEPHEN H.
Abstract: The pianos Johannes Brahms encountered in Hamburg during his youth would have been essentially the same as the early Romantic fortepianos of Beethoven and Schubert. By the time Brahms wrote his final compositions half a century later, the piano had evolved to a state of construction—if not hammer design and voicing—virtually identical with the modern instrument. The two grand pianos commonly associated with Brahms—the Conrad Graf piano (no. 2616) presented by its Viennese builder to Clara Schumann in 1839 as a “reverential souvenir” and passed on to Brahms in 1856,¹ and an 1868 instrument by Johann Baptist
Brahms, Max Klinger, and the Promise of the Gesamtkunstwerk: from:
Brahms and His World
Author(s) KARNES KEVIN C.
Abstract: On the first day of January 1894, the artist Max Klinger sent Brahms a remarkable gift in the form of his newest creation. That gift, a volume consisting of forty-one etchings and engravings interspersed with the complete scores of six of Brahms’s vocal works, Klinger called the
Brahms-Phantasie.¹ By the time Klinger unveiled his tribute to Brahms, he had achieved considerable renown as a visual artist. Indeed, as Hugo von Hofmannsthal declared, he was considered by some to be “the most original artist that Germany has the honor of calling her own.”² But theBrahms-Phantasiewas something more than just
Five Early Works by Brahms (1862) from:
Brahms and His World
Author(s) FRISCH WALTER
Abstract: there inevitably must appear a musician called to give expression to his times in ideal fashion; a musician who would reveal his mastery not in a gradual evolution, but like Athene would spring fully armed from Zeus’s head. And such a one
hasappeared; a young man over whose cradle Graces and Heroes have stood watch. His name isJohannes Brahms,and he comes from Hamburg, where he has been working in quiet obscurity,
Brahms’s Four Serious Songs, op. 121 (1914) from:
Brahms and His World
Author(s) KARNES KEVIN C.
Abstract: Brahms left us several written statements about his
Four Serious Songs, the maestro’s final work, designated opus 121. These statements—sometimes running parallel to, other times diverging from his verbal remarks—might seem to contradict each other. At first glance, the contradictions appear to be profound. However, a closer look does away with them completely. The first thing one notes is the jovial, almost frivolous tone with which Brahms speaks of the “godlessSchnadahüpferln,” the “Schnadahüpferlnof May 7,” or simply the “Schnadahüpferln,” as if it were obvious that he could only be referring, with this term, to the Four
“A Modern of the Moderns”: from:
Brahms and His World
Author(s) BOZARTH GEORGE S.
Abstract: The real interest of the evening centered upon the Brahms Symphony, which stood at the head of the programme. There is no living musician about whose compositions there is a greater variety of opinions, or these opinions more changeable, than the same Johannes Brahms. People whose patience is limited, and whose ears itch for taking melodies—well or ill elaborated—may find enchantment at a first hearing of such limpid works as Raff’s “Leonore” Symphony. But let a Brahms “Requiem,” or wonderfully complex and original variations, or symphony, for the first time sound forth, and they will compare the work to muddy
My Early Acquaintance with Brahms from:
Brahms and His World
Author(s) AVINS STYRA
Abstract: I saw Brahms for the first time in November 1867. He came to my home town of Graz, where on November 11 and 14 he gave concerts with Joachim (at the Saale der Ressource).² I remember precisely the deep impression that the performance of Beethoven’s Sonata for Piano and Violin in C Minor, op. 30, no. 2, made on me. The two Brahms compositions played by the Master—at that time a blond, lean, markedly professorial type—appeared to me as decidedly perplexing stuff . . . and yet, they were the E-flat-minor Scherzo (op. 4) and the Handel Variations
Brahms and the Newer Generation: from:
Brahms and His World
Author(s) FRISCH WALTER
Abstract: When I think of the time during which I had the fortune to know Brahms personally—it was during the last two years of his life—I can recall immediately how his music affected me and my colleagues in composition, including Schoenberg. It was fascinating, its influence inescapable, its effect intoxicating. I was still a pupil at the Vienna Conservatory and knew most of Brahms’s works thoroughly. I was obsessed by this music. My goal at the time was nothing less than the appropriation and mastery of this wonderful, singular compositional technique.
Book Title: Freud's Wishful Dream Book- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): WELSH ALEXANDER
Abstract: In Welsh's book, readers are invited on Freud's journey, to pause at each concealed pass in his seminal work and ask where the guide is taking them and why. Along the way, Welsh shows how Freud's arbitrary turnings are themselves wishful, intended to persuade by pleasing the reader and author alike; that his interest in secrets and his self-proclaimed modest ambition are products of their time; and that the book may best be read as a romance or serial comedy. "Some of the humor throughout," Welsh notes, "can only be understood as a particular kind of fine performance." Welsh offers the first critical overview of the argument in Freud's masterpiece and of the author who presents himself as guide.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7s0j7
CHAPTER SIX Travel Stories from:
Performing Africa
Abstract: In July of 1994, the thirty-year reign of Sir Dawada Jawara came to an end as a new political regime rose to power: the Armed Forces Provisional Ruling Council (AFPRC). During this transition, installed as president was Lieutenant Yahya Jammeh, elected through a peaceful, although not invited, shift in power. The former president, Jawara, had been elected head of state since the end of colonial rule, but the democratic elections that periodically marked the postcolonial political era did not create a shift in political leadership. Many felt it was time for a change.
1 Introduction from:
Writing Outside the Nation
Abstract: The words of the eighteenth-century German Romantic poet Novalis (Friedrich von Hardenberg) resonate beyond the boundaries of their history and geography and are poignantly rearticulated by a contemporary master of the arts of memory. Salman Rushdie’s critical sentiment stands as a testimony to the labor of remembrance that reclaims the lost experience of another time and place in language and imagination. The work of commemoration is often the only means of releasing our (hi)stories from subjugation to official or institutionalized regimes of forgetting. Remembering is an act of lending coherence and integrity to a history interrupted, divided, or compromised by
5 Writing Outside the Nation from:
Writing Outside the Nation
Abstract: Whether removed from the subject by one or more generations, several decades, or a few years, the memory and images of nation continue to inhabit the exilic imagination. The symbolic registers of the nation usually increase proportionately to the length of time spent outside the nation, and the loyalties that bind the “imagined community” (Anderson) diverge into smaller communities bound by gender, class, caste, religion, home region, profession, language, and dialect. The concept of a sacred mythical originary nation, Aztlán, developed at the height of the Chicano movement as a source of identification and identity formation in a diasporic community
Book Title: Plato's Fable-On the Mortal Condition in Shadowy Times
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Mitchell Joshua
Abstract: He draws us beyond the ancients/moderns debate, and beyond the notion that Plato's
Republicis best understood as shedding light on the promise of discursive democracy. Instead, Mitchell argues, the question that ought to preoccupy us today is neither "reason" nor "discourse," but rather "imitation." To what extent is man first and foremost an "imitative" being? This, Mitchell asserts, is the subtext of the great political and foreign policy debates of our times.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7s9fm
Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION from:
Plato's Fable
Abstract: Wishing to defer for a time even more vexing problems, and in order to begin
Book Title: William Faulkner-An Economy of Complex Words
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Godden Richard
Abstract: In
William Faulkner, Richard Godden traces how the novelist's late fiction echoes the economic and racial traumas of the South's delayed modernization in the mid-twentieth century. As the New Deal rapidly accelerated the long-term shift from tenant farming to modern agriculture, many African Americans were driven from the land and forced to migrate north. At the same time, white landowners exchanged dependency on black labor for dependency on northern capital. Combining powerful close readings ofThe Hamlet, Go Down, Moses, andA Fablewith an examination of southern economic history from the 1930s to the 1950s, Godden shows how the novels' literary complexities--from their narrative structures down to their smallest verbal emphases--reflect and refract the period's economic complexities. By demonstrating the interrelation of literary forms and economic systems, the book describes, in effect, the poetics of an economy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7sb40
Chapter Two FIGURING RELIGION, CONTESTING SPIRIT from:
Contesting Spirit
Abstract: With freud and marx, Nietzsche is widely regarded as one of the modern period’s original and most influential “masters of suspicion.” Like their Enlightenment predecessors, each of these thinkers held the critique of religion as an important key to overcoming the discontents of humankind and realizing human autonomy. At the same time, each went beyond Enlightenment conceptions of reason and superstition to develop deep critical readings of religion that sought to account for the hold it exerted on human beings. In the case of Nietzsche, the quintessential modern vision of the liberation from religion leading to human progress is especially
Conclusion from:
Contesting Spirit
Abstract: I began with the prefaces of 1886 and Nietzsche’s celebration of a life rejuvenated in the recovery of health and love. By the turn of the new year 1889, Nietzsche had fallen into madness, where he would remain for the final ten years of his life. In the months leading up to his collapse, Nietzsche had been working at a feverish pace, and at times had experienced intense feelings of euphoria. Some of his most “affirmative” statements come out of this period, particularly in
Ecce Homo. We do not know why Nietzsche went mad—whether he suffered from a congenital
Chapter Two FIGURING RELIGION, CONTESTING SPIRIT from:
Contesting Spirit
Abstract: With freud and marx, Nietzsche is widely regarded as one of the modern period’s original and most influential “masters of suspicion.” Like their Enlightenment predecessors, each of these thinkers held the critique of religion as an important key to overcoming the discontents of humankind and realizing human autonomy. At the same time, each went beyond Enlightenment conceptions of reason and superstition to develop deep critical readings of religion that sought to account for the hold it exerted on human beings. In the case of Nietzsche, the quintessential modern vision of the liberation from religion leading to human progress is especially
Conclusion from:
Contesting Spirit
Abstract: I began with the prefaces of 1886 and Nietzsche’s celebration of a life rejuvenated in the recovery of health and love. By the turn of the new year 1889, Nietzsche had fallen into madness, where he would remain for the final ten years of his life. In the months leading up to his collapse, Nietzsche had been working at a feverish pace, and at times had experienced intense feelings of euphoria. Some of his most “affirmative” statements come out of this period, particularly in
Ecce Homo. We do not know why Nietzsche went mad—whether he suffered from a congenital
Chapter Two FIGURING RELIGION, CONTESTING SPIRIT from:
Contesting Spirit
Abstract: With freud and marx, Nietzsche is widely regarded as one of the modern period’s original and most influential “masters of suspicion.” Like their Enlightenment predecessors, each of these thinkers held the critique of religion as an important key to overcoming the discontents of humankind and realizing human autonomy. At the same time, each went beyond Enlightenment conceptions of reason and superstition to develop deep critical readings of religion that sought to account for the hold it exerted on human beings. In the case of Nietzsche, the quintessential modern vision of the liberation from religion leading to human progress is especially
Conclusion from:
Contesting Spirit
Abstract: I began with the prefaces of 1886 and Nietzsche’s celebration of a life rejuvenated in the recovery of health and love. By the turn of the new year 1889, Nietzsche had fallen into madness, where he would remain for the final ten years of his life. In the months leading up to his collapse, Nietzsche had been working at a feverish pace, and at times had experienced intense feelings of euphoria. Some of his most “affirmative” statements come out of this period, particularly in
Ecce Homo. We do not know why Nietzsche went mad—whether he suffered from a congenital
Book Title: Through Other Continents-American Literature across Deep Time
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Dimock Wai Chee
Abstract: Inspired by an unorthodox archive--ranging from epic traditions in Akkadian and Sanskrit to folk art, paintings by Veronese and Tiepolo, and the music of the Grateful Dead--Dimock constructs a long history of the world, a history she calls "deep time." The civilizations of Mesopotamia, India, Egypt, China, and West Africa, as well as Europe, leave their mark on American literature, which looks dramatically different when it is removed from a strictly national or English-language context. Key authors such as Thoreau, Margaret Fuller, Ezra Pound, Robert Lowell, Gary Snyder, Leslie Silko, Gloria Naylor, and Gerald Vizenor are transformed in this light. Emerson emerges as a translator of Islamic culture; Henry James's novels become long-distance kin to
Gilgamesh; and Black English loses its ungrammaticalness when reclassified as a creole tongue, meshing the input from Africa, Europe, and the Americas.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7skgc
CHAPTER TWO World Religions: from:
Through Other Continents
Abstract: Deep time, understood as temporal length added to the spatial width of the planet, gives us a set of coordinates at once extended and embedded, as fine-grained as it is long-lasting, operating both above and below the plane of the nation. The subnational and the transnational come together here in a loop, intertwined in a way that speaks as much to local circumstances as it does to global circuits.
CHAPTER 6 Nonstandard Time: from:
Through Other Continents
Abstract: Deep time is “un-American” in conforming neither to a national chronology nor to a national map. It nourishes a politics as well as an aesthetics: a devotion to ancient beauty that can lend itself to the charge of treason. Ezra Pound is an extreme case. Robert Lowell, in his attachment to Latin and his opposition to the Vietnam War, would seem to be rehearsing much the same dynamics. Rather than pitting him against the
Saturday Review, I return now to a more theoretical argument of this book, having to do with the depth of literary culture and the sinuous threads
INTRODUCTION from:
Modernity's Wager
Abstract: From ancient Babylon to contemporary Indonesia, from China to Canada, and from the Inuit to the Parisian, all peoples and societies have experienced power and its differential distribution. Defined by Max Weber as “the probability that one actor within a social relationship will be in a position to carry out his own will despite resistance,” power has been a fact of social life from time out of mind.¹
INTRODUCTION from:
Charred Lullabies
Abstract: Many have died. To say more is to simplify, but to fathom the statement is also to make the fact bearable. Tellipalai, Nilaveli, Manippay, Boosa, Dollar Farm, Kokkadicholai—mere place-names of another time—have been transformed into names of places spattered with blood and mortal residue. Kelani Ganga and Kalu Ganga, Sri Lankan rivers of exquisite beauty, for a shudderingly brief period in 1989, were clogged with bodies and foamed with blood. Many have died. How to give an account of these shocking events without giving in to a desire to shock? And more important, what does it mean to
INTRODUCTION from:
Charred Lullabies
Abstract: Many have died. To say more is to simplify, but to fathom the statement is also to make the fact bearable. Tellipalai, Nilaveli, Manippay, Boosa, Dollar Farm, Kokkadicholai—mere place-names of another time—have been transformed into names of places spattered with blood and mortal residue. Kelani Ganga and Kalu Ganga, Sri Lankan rivers of exquisite beauty, for a shudderingly brief period in 1989, were clogged with bodies and foamed with blood. Many have died. How to give an account of these shocking events without giving in to a desire to shock? And more important, what does it mean to
2 WOMEN, MEN, AND THE LANGUAGES OF PEASANT RESISTANCE, 1870–1907 from:
Cultures in Flux
Author(s) Engel Barbara Alpern
Abstract: On september 16, 1872, the former state peasants of Zhilomostnoe and Pravorot’ villages in Kursk province confronted the official who had come to survey their land at the governor’s orders. The entire population of the villages stood facing the surveyor, the women with babies at their breast in the forefront. Shouting “We don’t agree, we’ll force you to stop; you won’t get away with this robbery!” the women placed their children on the ground in front of them and blocked the surveyor’s path. Each time he tried to proceed in a different direction, the women threw their infants under a
4 CONFRONTING THE DOMESTIC OTHER: from:
Cultures in Flux
Author(s) Frank Stephen P.
Abstract: In an 1889 report on his field studies of Sarapul’skii district, Viatka province, the Russian ethnographer P.M. Bogaevsky noted that peasants who spent time working in cities served as pioneers of urban culture upon returning to their villages. Unfortunately, he added, repeating with dismay an already widespread observation, the rural population had interpreted this culture in the most undesirable manner, thereby allowing it to destroy ancient precepts and customs. Young peasants in particular now regarded with disdain the centuries-old traditions of their grandparents—traditions that had given the Russian peasantry its special form of communal life and shaped its worldview.
5 DEATH OF THE FOLK SONG? from:
Cultures in Flux
Author(s) Rothstein Robert A.
Abstract: It is an unquestionable fact,” wrote an anonymous American observer in 1893, “that in Russia all the principal outward adjuncts of modern civilization—large towns, factories, railroads, hotels, etc.—exercise a blighting effect on the beautiful old folk-song. This disappears at the sound of the steam whistle, and is gradually superseded by commonplace melodies with stupid words, not seldom of doubtful propriety.”¹ Similar expressions of concern at the alleged demise of traditional folk music were being voiced at the same time in Russia itself in the course of an extended public discussion that lasted from the 1870s until the early
7 FOR TSAR AND FATHERLAND? from:
Cultures in Flux
Author(s) Jahn Hubertus F.
Abstract: World war I broke out in Europe at a time of major transformations in cultural life. As a result of industrialization and the ensuing social changes, an urban mass culture developed that centered on such new media as the cinema or the music hall but that also included older forms of entertainment, like the circus or the fairground. At the same time, the traditional high culture of opera, concert hall, and the fine arts continued to flourish. The war was reflected in the cultural life of Europe in many ways, and for some countries more or less detailed studies have
8 THE PENNY PRESS AND ITS READERS from:
Cultures in Flux
Author(s) Brower Daniel R.
Abstract: In the last decades of the nineteenth century, the Russian penny press became a cultural bridge between writers and the urban population. It was a far more visible presence than the chapbooks, which until then had been the sole print medium to reach large numbers of readers. The penny press was an innovation both because it threw out a daily barrage of images, stories, and news reports, and because it cast an inquisitive, at times accusatory light on public and private behavior in the capitals and in provincial cities. The message was often sensationalist, invariably personalized and localized, and usually
Book Title: Democratic Legitimacy-Impartiality, Reflexivity, Proximity
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): GOLDHAMMER ARTHUR
Abstract: Drawing on examples from France and the United States, Rosanvallon notes that there has been a major expansion of independent commissions, NGOs, regulatory authorities, and watchdogs in recent decades. At the same time, constitutional courts have become more willing and able to challenge legislatures. These institutional developments, which serve the democratic values of impartiality and reflexivity, have been accompanied by a new attentiveness to what Rosanvallon calls the value of proximity, as governing structures have sought to find new spaces for minorities, the particular, and the local. To improve our democracies, we need to use these new sources of legitimacy more effectively and we need to incorporate them into our accounts of democratic government.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7stdc
Book Title: Democratic Legitimacy-Impartiality, Reflexivity, Proximity
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): GOLDHAMMER ARTHUR
Abstract: Drawing on examples from France and the United States, Rosanvallon notes that there has been a major expansion of independent commissions, NGOs, regulatory authorities, and watchdogs in recent decades. At the same time, constitutional courts have become more willing and able to challenge legislatures. These institutional developments, which serve the democratic values of impartiality and reflexivity, have been accompanied by a new attentiveness to what Rosanvallon calls the value of proximity, as governing structures have sought to find new spaces for minorities, the particular, and the local. To improve our democracies, we need to use these new sources of legitimacy more effectively and we need to incorporate them into our accounts of democratic government.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7stdc
Book Title: Slavery and the Culture of Taste- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Gikandi Simon
Abstract: It would be easy to assume that, in the eighteenth century, slavery and the culture of taste--the world of politeness, manners, and aesthetics--existed as separate and unequal domains, unrelated in the spheres of social life. But to the contrary,
Slavery and the Culture of Tastedemonstrates that these two areas of modernity were surprisingly entwined. Ranging across Britain, the antebellum South, and the West Indies, and examining vast archives, including portraits, period paintings, personal narratives, and diaries, Simon Gikandi illustrates how the violence and ugliness of enslavement actually shaped theories of taste, notions of beauty, and practices of high culture, and how slavery's impurity informed and haunted the rarified customs of the time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7svr8
1 Overture: from:
Slavery and the Culture of Taste
Abstract: Sometime around 1659, the Dutch painter Harmenszoon van Rijn Rembrandt sat in his studio in Amsterdam and commenced work on
Two Negroes(fig. 1.1), considered one of the most compelling paintings of the last phase of his illustrious career. Working with African models and operating within a Dutch culture whose domestic economy was driven by the slave trade, Rembrandt sought to turn his black figures, people who most probably had arrived in the European Low Countries as slaves or servants, into elevated subjects through art. This gesture—the transformation of the most marginal figures in society into elevated works of
6 The Ontology of Play: from:
Slavery and the Culture of Taste
Abstract: Sometime between 1730 and 1745, an African drum was collected in Virginia by a certain Reverend Clarke on behalf of Sir Hans Sloane, distinguished English naturalist and founder of the British Museum (fig. 6.1). The drum, now at the British Museum, is a remarkable piece of work, one whose meaning is suspended somewhere between the aura of art and ritual. Constructed in the Akan style, and made of wood (Cordia and Baphia) native to Africa, deerskin, and vegetable fiber, it is considered to be one of the earliest known surviving examples of African objects in North America.¹ If the drum
Book Title: The Harmony of Illusions-Inventing Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Young Allan
Abstract: As far back as we know, there have been individuals incapacitated by memories that have filled them with sadness and remorse, fright and horror, or a sense of irreparable loss. Only recently, however, have people tormented with such recollections been diagnosed as suffering from "post-traumatic stress disorder." Here Allan Young traces this malady, particularly as it is suffered by Vietnam veterans, to its beginnings in the emergence of ideas about the unconscious mind and to earlier manifestations of traumatic memory like shell shock or traumatic hysteria. In Young's view, PTSD is not a timeless or universal phenomenon newly discovered. Rather, it is a "harmony of illusions," a cultural product gradually put together by the practices, technologies, and narratives with which it is diagnosed, studied, and treated and by the various interests, institutions, and moral arguments mobilizing these efforts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7swhj
Introduction from:
The Harmony of Illusions
Abstract: As far back as we know, people have been tormented by memories that filled them with feelings of sadness and remorse, the sense of irreparable loss, and sensations of fright and horror. During the nineteenth century, a new kind of painful memory emerged. It was unlike the memories of earlier times in that it originated in a previously unidentified psychological state, called “traumatic,” and was linked to previously unknown kinds of forgetting, called “repression” and “dissociation.”
Conclusion from:
Anthropos Today
Abstract: At the end of the last book he was to publish before his untimely death in January 2002,
Science de la science et réflexivité, Pierre Bourdieu invokes Leibniz’s concept of God as the space in which all the partial perspectives of finite beings come together, the “géométral de toutes les perspectives.”¹ Not only do these partial perspectives come together in a common space but they are reconciled with each other. From the absolute “point of view” of which only God is capable, the world appears as a unified and unitary spectacle. Leibniz’s God is this “view without a point of
CHAPTER FIVE Scholars and Causation 1 from:
Forbidden Fruit
Author(s) Tetlock Philip E.
Abstract: This chapter explores a recurring source of disagreement between generalizers and particularizers: the soundness of close-call counterfactual scenarios that imply that, with only minimal rewriting of antecedent conditions, history could have been rerouted down different, sometimes radically different, event paths. Close-call counterfactuals are often focal points of disagreement for two reasons.
5 The Value of Limited Loyalty: from:
Christian Political Ethics
Author(s) BIGGAR NIGEL
Abstract: Some of the more interesting things that Christianity has to say about territorial boundaries come by way of its views on the nation, national identity and loyalty, and nationalism. Historically, of course, Christianity—or, rather, Christians—have said different and sometimes quite contradictory things on these topics. Some have considered each nation to be specially ordained by the eternal God, while others have stressed the mutable historicality of national compositions and boundaries.¹ Some have virtually equated loyalty to the nation with loyalty to God, while others have regarded it as inimical to pacific, universalist Christian faith. As with any historically
CHAPTER ONE The Referential Aesthetic of Autobiography from:
Touching the World
Abstract: THIS INQUIRY into the referential aesthetic of autobiography attempts to answer a question that has haunted me for a long time: why should it make a difference to me that autobiographies are presumably based in biographical fact? This is really another way of asking why people read autobiographies, a question intimately linked to the question of why people write them. There seems to be no doubt that readers do read autobiographies differently from other kinds of texts, especially from works they take to be “fictions.” All who have studied the reading of autobiography agree that reference lies at the heart
CHAPTER FOUR Living in History from:
Touching the World
Abstract: WARS may not loom large in the diminishing perspective of
la longue duréeespoused by the French historians of theAnnalesschool, but they are routinely invoked to demarcate historical periods. For better or worse, they function as the most familiar symbols of our collective experience. Wartime propaganda promotes this identification between the individual and society: to enlist is to enlist in history, to participate in a global movement of some kind. The pressure to make such identifications often leads noncombatants to an even livelier grasp of the dynamic at work than that of the veterans themselves. As Henry James
CHAPTER FIVE Autobiography and the Structures of Experience from:
Touching the World
Abstract: IN THE PRECEDING chapters I have been investigating various dimensions of the world of fact to which autobiographies characteristically refer: biographical (chapter 2), social and cultural (chapter 3), and historical (chapter 4). At the same time, following the paradox intrinsic to the very nature of autobiographical discourse, I have had occasion to emphasize the fictive dimension of autobiography, especially in my analyses of William Maxwell in chapter 1 and Patricia Hampl in chapter 4. There I presented the making of metaphor as a response to the otherwise unacceptable testimony of the facts of experience: the death of the mother, the
CHAPTER ONE The Referential Aesthetic of Autobiography from:
Touching the World
Abstract: THIS INQUIRY into the referential aesthetic of autobiography attempts to answer a question that has haunted me for a long time: why should it make a difference to me that autobiographies are presumably based in biographical fact? This is really another way of asking why people read autobiographies, a question intimately linked to the question of why people write them. There seems to be no doubt that readers do read autobiographies differently from other kinds of texts, especially from works they take to be “fictions.” All who have studied the reading of autobiography agree that reference lies at the heart
CHAPTER FOUR Living in History from:
Touching the World
Abstract: WARS may not loom large in the diminishing perspective of
la longue duréeespoused by the French historians of theAnnalesschool, but they are routinely invoked to demarcate historical periods. For better or worse, they function as the most familiar symbols of our collective experience. Wartime propaganda promotes this identification between the individual and society: to enlist is to enlist in history, to participate in a global movement of some kind. The pressure to make such identifications often leads noncombatants to an even livelier grasp of the dynamic at work than that of the veterans themselves. As Henry James
CHAPTER FIVE Autobiography and the Structures of Experience from:
Touching the World
Abstract: IN THE PRECEDING chapters I have been investigating various dimensions of the world of fact to which autobiographies characteristically refer: biographical (chapter 2), social and cultural (chapter 3), and historical (chapter 4). At the same time, following the paradox intrinsic to the very nature of autobiographical discourse, I have had occasion to emphasize the fictive dimension of autobiography, especially in my analyses of William Maxwell in chapter 1 and Patricia Hampl in chapter 4. There I presented the making of metaphor as a response to the otherwise unacceptable testimony of the facts of experience: the death of the mother, the
Chapter 3 LIARS, TRAVELERS, THEORISTS: from:
Journeys to the Other Shore
Abstract: This is a chapter about liars. Or at least about two travelers, Herodotus and Ibn Battuta, consistently accused of lying. Cicero may have dubbed Herodotus the Father of History, but Thucydides repudiated entirely Herodotusʹs approach to the past, accusing him of fabrication and telling tall tales.² In the wake of Thucydidesʹ damning verdict, impugning Herodotusʹs reliability became, for a time, a veritable cottage industry. Some characterized him as ignorant or overly credulous; others would accuse him of malicious intent. Plutarch, for example, charged Herodotus with undue partiality to both the non-Greeks (
philobarbaros—lover/friend of barbarians) and Athens, along with an
Chapter 3 LIARS, TRAVELERS, THEORISTS: from:
Journeys to the Other Shore
Abstract: This is a chapter about liars. Or at least about two travelers, Herodotus and Ibn Battuta, consistently accused of lying. Cicero may have dubbed Herodotus the Father of History, but Thucydides repudiated entirely Herodotusʹs approach to the past, accusing him of fabrication and telling tall tales.² In the wake of Thucydidesʹ damning verdict, impugning Herodotusʹs reliability became, for a time, a veritable cottage industry. Some characterized him as ignorant or overly credulous; others would accuse him of malicious intent. Plutarch, for example, charged Herodotus with undue partiality to both the non-Greeks (
philobarbaros—lover/friend of barbarians) and Athens, along with an
Book Title: War at a Distance-Romanticism and the Making of Modern Wartime
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Favret Mary A.
Abstract: Favret examines wartime literature and art as varied as meditations on the
Iliad, the history of meteorology, landscape painting in India, and popular poetry in newspapers and periodicals; she locates the embedded sense of war and dislocation in works ranging from Austen, Coleridge, and Wordsworth to Woolf, Stevens, and Sebald; and she contemplates how literature provides the public with methods for responding to violent calamities happening elsewhere. Bringing to light Romanticism's legacy in reflections on modern warfare, this book shows that war's absent presence affects home in deep and irrevocable ways.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7t6rs
PRELUDE from:
War at a Distance
Abstract: It is February of 2003; the poet has just turned off the evening news. The buildup to the U.S.-led invasion of Iraq goes without saying. Sleet is “slashing” outside on this “bitter evening,” while C. K. Williams’s attention wanders to the hearth.¹ There he sees a plastic coffee cup teetering “on a log for a strangely long time, / as though uncertain what to do” (7–8). The hesitation and subsequent collapse of this strange “creaturely” thing calls forth a series of meditations on
CHAPTER TWO Telling Time in War from:
War at a Distance
Abstract: This chapter extends the thought that the experience of war at a distance, of a mediated war, is fundamentally dislocating, and that such dislocation expresses itself most frequently and forcefully through our sense of the movement (or stasis) of time, through temporalities. Thus the wartime poems set on a winter’s evening, considered in the prelude, elaborate the simplest markers of time (winter, evening) into channels of memory and prophecy, avenues of recursivity and nodes of stillness. Wartime in modernity refers not to a single temporal mode—
thetime of war. Rather it houses many temporalities, each one, as we will
INTERLUDE from:
War at a Distance
Abstract: Wartime summons winter. It would perhaps be best for this interlude to be read as it was written—at the darkest time of the year, in weather able to chill the blood, numb the body, and halt the movement of clocks. Were it presently December in London, or William Cowper’s Olney, the sun would not rise before 8:00 a.m.; it would illuminate the sky for fewer than eight hours. Imagine the length of the cold night before electricity. Imagine your dependence on the fire you built, before which you now sit, reading about a world at war. What makes you
CHAPTER THREE War in the Air from:
War at a Distance
Abstract: Poets of the late eighteenth century ask us to see in the snows of winter a history of warfare, with its anesthetizing threat to both history and writing. They conjure prospect poems where the view looks out upon total annihilation. Yet in their mining of the literary tradition and the resources of figuration, they disrupt that prospect, insisting that beneath and within the snow we recognize something still surviving. So much is written into the snow that these poems suggest the value of, indeed the need for a wartime rereading of that most romantic trope, the weather. To the precise
CHAPTER FOUR Everyday War from:
War at a Distance
Abstract: Perhaps, these lyric poems propose, the weather can serve as a forceful wartime medium, broadcasting the voices or at least the sounds of distant violence, carrying in its currents an audible, palpable sense of suffering elsewhere. This was one way war at a distance could invade—affectively and effectively—the home front. An air-borne sense of suffering, however, escaped like involuntary sighs or moans from a growing, more rationalized understanding of global weather and global war. The new meteorology aimed to regularize violent extremes into an intelligible system, less felt than observed, and predicated on a predictable and continuous nature.
CODA from:
War at a Distance
Abstract: This book began with the problem of modern wartime, that is, the problem of coordinating an awareness of violence elsewhere with everyday movements here, at a distance from the fighting. The book ends with the problem of cosmopolitanism. Another way of characterizing this trajectory would be to say it looks from the familiar scene at hearth and home to the more foreign scene of a suspension bridge set in a distant land—then looks back again. Holding together these two scenes is difficult: in one you might sit as a violent world comes to you; in the other you might
INTRODUCTION from:
Mappings
Abstract: Border talk is everywhere—literal and figural, material and symbolic. The “cartographies of silence” pioneered by feminists like Adrienne Rich in the 1970s have morphed into the spatial practices of third wave feminism as national boundaries and personal borders become ever more permeable in the face of rapidly changing cultural terrains and global landscapes. Borders have a way of insisting on separation at the same time as they acknowledge connection. Like bridges. Bridges signify the possibility of passing over. They also mark the fact of separation and the distance that has to be crossed. Borders between individuals, genders, groups, and
CHAPTER 5 Telling Contacts: from:
Mappings
Abstract: So begins Nisa’s “once upon a time,” her formulaic opening of a story-to-come, her signal as storyteller to her listener that what follows is marked off and shaped as a separate entity that the “wind will take away” once her words are finished. So begins as well her reflection on the performance and passing of one of the many stories she tells to the North American anthropologist Marjorie Shostak, stories that constitute her life in the one-time gathering and hunting society of the !Kung as they subsist and face substantial change and possible annihilation in the Kalahari Desert of southern
II The Politics of Managing Decline from:
Politics and the Imagination
Abstract: The last twenty years have seen very significant changes in the pattern of economic activity around the world, including major increases in the manufacturing capacity of various countries in Asia. In addition, the collapse of the Soviet Union initiated a process of political restructuring in Europe which has not perhaps yet reached its final stage. For citizens of the European Union it might seem timely to think again about what attitudes we wish to adopt toward some of the new political constellations that seem to be emerging in the world. For those of us who live in the UK, two
V The Actual and Another Modernity from:
Politics and the Imagination
Abstract: Two strange figures confront one another in one of those barren, timeless, imaginary landscapes in which gross anachronism is admissible. An elderly Spaniard, his hand resting on the hilt of his rusted sword, is undecided: who is the elegantly clad young man who bars his way? This unfamiliar young man is also armed with a sword. On his head he wears a plumed hat of black satin, with a white feather and gold embellishments. Nonetheless, there is a decidedly clerical look about him. Is he a nobleman? Or perhaps a cleric of some considerable standing? The Frenchman wipes his face,
VII On Museums from:
Politics and the Imagination
Abstract: The collecting and exhibiting of natural objects and of artifacts has a long history. There are different kinds of collections, and they have varying origins, and serve a wide variety of different human purposes. Thus, for instance, in the ancient world temples sometimes served as repositories of various offerings, some of which were durable objects, such as the bloody armor of successively defeated opponents. The reasons the victors had for depositing these trophies are probably very complicated; the desire to thank a divine patron and commemorate a signal success may have played an important role, but also perhaps the desire
VIII Celan’s Meridian from:
Politics and the Imagination
Abstract: In October 1960 the German Academy for Language and Literature in Darmstadt made what might seem to be a highly peculiar decision. It presented the prestigious Georg-Büchner-Preis¹ for literature to the forty-year old poet Paul Celan, a man who had never spent any appreciable amount of time living in an officially German-speaking country. Celan was born in 1920 over a thousand kilometers east of Darmstadt in the city of Czernowitz in the Bukovina. Bukovina had been the most easterly province of the Austro-Hungarian empire between the late eighteenth century and the end of World War I. In 1918 it was
XI Melody as Death from:
Politics and the Imagination
Abstract: Human memory is a tricky phenomenon. We remember so easily what we take pleasure in recalling, and also what we most definitely do
notwish to recall. Sometimes if one is quick and nimble enough, one can even catch the process of “reconstructing” one’s past in memory on the hop, that is, one can recall the original impression and also the gradual way in which it began to fade, shift, and be transformed. Very occasionally, the original experience is so vivid, one cannot help thinking it is preserved in the mind in a form that excludes serious error or uncertainty
CHAPTER SEVEN Bounded Love from:
Acts of Compassion
Abstract: “To save a woman from being sent to a nursing home, Carla had moved in with an Alzheimer’s victim. So at 12:30, Carla rushed home to make lunch for her roommate. At supper time, Carla rushed home again to make supper for her roommate.
INTRODUCTION from:
Circles Disturbed
Author(s) Mazur Barry
Abstract: The words “do not disturb my circles” are said to be Archimedes’ last before he was slain by a Roman soldier in the tumult of the pillaging of Syracuse. The timeless tranquil eternity of the not-to-be-disturbed circles in the midst of this account of hurly-burly and death is emblematic of the contrast between mathematics and stories: history, legends, anecdotes, and narratives of all sorts thrive on drama, on motion and confusion, while mathematics requires a clarity of thought that, in many instances, comes only after prolonged quiet reflection. At first glance, then, it might seem that mathematics and narrative have
CHAPTER 1 From Voyagers to Martyrs: from:
Circles Disturbed
Author(s) ALEXANDER AMIR
Abstract: Since that time, different versions of the story have come down to us. In some,
CHAPTER 2 Structure of Crystal, Bucket of Dust from:
Circles Disturbed
Author(s) GALISON PETER
Abstract: Every mathematical argument tells a story. But where is that story located? Do the chapters open in Plato’s heaven, outside time, outside the cave of mere human projection? Is the true story of mathematics something so far beyond spelunking materiality that intuitions and mere images must be left behind? Or are these stories precisely ones of things and forces, surfaces and movement?
CHAPTER 4 Hilbert on Theology and Its Discontents: from:
Circles Disturbed
Author(s) MCLARTY COLIN
Abstract: It is a fact and no myth at all that one small puzzling proof by David Hilbert in 1888 became the paradigm of modern axiomatic mathematics. Hilbert knew it was that important. He wrote a series of papers on applications and, as we now know, vastly underestimated them: a preliminary series of three went to the
Göttinger Nachrichtenand a longer, polished version went to the maximally prestigiousMathematische Annalen. He consciously made it his emblem as he became “the Director General” of twentieth-century mathematics, in the very practical image offered by his friend Hermann Minkowski (1973, 130). With time,
CHAPTER 8 Mathematics and Narrative: from:
Circles Disturbed
Author(s) TEISSIER BERNARD
Abstract: There are many types of narrations, from origin myths to the ship logs of maritime explorers, from children’s bedtime stories to works of literature—including poetry—and theater. We might also recall here Kipling’s joke in one of his letters from Japan about the person who, having borrowed a dictionary, gives it back with the comment that the stories are generally interesting, but too diverse.
CHAPTER 11 Mathematics and Narrative: from:
Circles Disturbed
Author(s) LLOYD G. E. R.
Abstract: The idea that mathematics deals with timeless truths is forcefully stated in a famous exchange between Socrates and Glaucon in Plato’s
Republic, which makes the further point that the language of geometry, with its talk of manipulating figures, is absurd, since it conflicts with the idea of the timelessness of its objects. Let me quote the passage in full:
CHAPTER 12 Adventures of the Diagonal: from:
Circles Disturbed
Author(s) PLOTNITSKY ARKADY
Abstract: Mathematics has been and still is commonly viewed as independent, at least essentially or constitutively independent, of narrative or other purportedly literary or rhetorical elements, such as metaphor.¹ Indeed, this independence has been deemed to be especially characteristic of mathematics as against other sciences or philosophy, which also aspire and claim to be able, sometimes on the model of mathematics, to dispense with the constitutive role of such elements. Their auxiliary, such as pedagogical, role has always been acknowledged and, more recently, investigated in historical and sociological studies of mathematics and science, for example, in considering how narrative is used
CHAPTER 15 Tales of Contingency, Contingencies of Telling: from:
Circles Disturbed
Author(s) MEISTER JAN CHRISTOPH
Abstract: It is hard to imagine a world without narrative: In our individual lives as well as in the history of humankind, narratives and storytelling are omnipresent. None of the other modes of symbolic communication “feels” as innately human as the synthetic sequencing of causally related events along a time line. In fact, as the French literary theorist and philosopher Paul Ricoeur argued in his seminal three-volume
Time and Narrative(1984), the human experience of time itself seems to be bound to our ability to narrate.
Maistre’s Theory of Sacrifice from:
Joseph de Maistre's Life, Thought, and Influence
Author(s) Bradley Owen
Abstract: Joseph de Maistre’s “Eclaircissement sur les Sacrifices” (1810)² is an unjustly neglected work of a most unjustly neglected author. Written concurrently with his masterwork
Les Soirées de Saint-Pétersbourg,“Enlightenment on Sacrifices” provides a theoretical underpinning to Maistre’s notorious, often mysterious, and sometimes repellent reflections on punishment, war, the French Revolution, and the ways of Providence. The present essay outlines Maistre’s theory of sacrifice, describes how he applied it to historical events, processes, and institutions, and begins to explore the significance of Maistre’s theory for modern European intellectual history.
Joseph de Maistre’s Theory of Language: from:
Joseph de Maistre's Life, Thought, and Influence
Author(s) Thurston Benjamin
Abstract: Ever since the appearance of Maupertuis’s
Réflexions sur I’origine des langues et la signification des motsin 1748, the Berlin Academy had been at the centre of a vigorous debate on the origin, formation, and function of language. Arguments of considerable ingenuity were put forward, including seminal works by Süssmilch, Michaelis, and Herder. Such studies were much more than finger exercises for philologists, however; a given account of the genesis and development of language would situate its author in a wider polemic of political and religious contention. At the same time, there was an abiding fascination for, and curiosity to
Joseph de Maistre, New Mentor of the Prince: from:
Joseph de Maistre's Life, Thought, and Influence
Author(s) Darcel Jean-Louis
Abstract: Joseph de Maistre, it has often been noticed, did not create an ideology Counter-Revolution; his works are fragmented essays, sometimes unfinished, often published after his death. In twenty years, from
Considerations sur la FrancetoLes Soirées de Saint-Pétersbourg,²they touched on topics from political history to philosophical and religious controversy without constructing a doctrine in the sense that we would understand it, which is surprising on the part of the most radical denigrator of modernity. Diverse reasons for this have been advanced: his rejection of a rational organization of society led him to condemn all intellectual constructions, which he
Joseph de Maistre’s Works in Russia: from:
Joseph de Maistre's Life, Thought, and Influence
Author(s) Miltchyna Vera
Abstract: The great subject of “Joseph de Maistre in Russia” can be treated in two different ways: on the one hand, one can concentrate on Joseph de Maistre’s relations with Russians during his stay in St. Petersburg as minister of the king of Sardinia, a stay that lasted fourteen years - from 1803 to 1817; on the other hand, one can speak of what one calls “the reception”-reactions (sometimes very unexpected) that Maistre’s works have provoked among Russian authors. The two subjects are equally interesting, however the first is - at least in broad terms - well enough known. Maistre’s biographers
The Persistence of Maistrian Thought from:
Joseph de Maistre's Life, Thought, and Influence
Author(s) Pranchère Jean-Yves
Abstract: For a long time it has been a commonplace of Maistrian studies - and a well-founded commonplace - to emphasize the paradoxical character of Maistre’s work. Almost all interpreters have recognized that this work is placed under the sign of paradox from a triple point of view: paradox surges especially in the contrast between a cruel and ferocious opus and an author whose correspondence shows him to be charitable and tolerant; it appears as well as the mark of the Maistrian style, which made great rhetorical use of the
oxymoron,of the association of contrary terms; and finally it characterizes
Maistre’s Theory of Sacrifice from:
Joseph de Maistre's Life, Thought, and Influence
Author(s) Bradley Owen
Abstract: Joseph de Maistre’s “Eclaircissement sur les Sacrifices” (1810)² is an unjustly neglected work of a most unjustly neglected author. Written concurrently with his masterwork
Les Soirées de Saint-Pétersbourg,“Enlightenment on Sacrifices” provides a theoretical underpinning to Maistre’s notorious, often mysterious, and sometimes repellent reflections on punishment, war, the French Revolution, and the ways of Providence. The present essay outlines Maistre’s theory of sacrifice, describes how he applied it to historical events, processes, and institutions, and begins to explore the significance of Maistre’s theory for modern European intellectual history.
Joseph de Maistre’s Theory of Language: from:
Joseph de Maistre's Life, Thought, and Influence
Author(s) Thurston Benjamin
Abstract: Ever since the appearance of Maupertuis’s
Réflexions sur I’origine des langues et la signification des motsin 1748, the Berlin Academy had been at the centre of a vigorous debate on the origin, formation, and function of language. Arguments of considerable ingenuity were put forward, including seminal works by Süssmilch, Michaelis, and Herder. Such studies were much more than finger exercises for philologists, however; a given account of the genesis and development of language would situate its author in a wider polemic of political and religious contention. At the same time, there was an abiding fascination for, and curiosity to
Joseph de Maistre, New Mentor of the Prince: from:
Joseph de Maistre's Life, Thought, and Influence
Author(s) Darcel Jean-Louis
Abstract: Joseph de Maistre, it has often been noticed, did not create an ideology Counter-Revolution; his works are fragmented essays, sometimes unfinished, often published after his death. In twenty years, from
Considerations sur la FrancetoLes Soirées de Saint-Pétersbourg,²they touched on topics from political history to philosophical and religious controversy without constructing a doctrine in the sense that we would understand it, which is surprising on the part of the most radical denigrator of modernity. Diverse reasons for this have been advanced: his rejection of a rational organization of society led him to condemn all intellectual constructions, which he
Joseph de Maistre’s Works in Russia: from:
Joseph de Maistre's Life, Thought, and Influence
Author(s) Miltchyna Vera
Abstract: The great subject of “Joseph de Maistre in Russia” can be treated in two different ways: on the one hand, one can concentrate on Joseph de Maistre’s relations with Russians during his stay in St. Petersburg as minister of the king of Sardinia, a stay that lasted fourteen years - from 1803 to 1817; on the other hand, one can speak of what one calls “the reception”-reactions (sometimes very unexpected) that Maistre’s works have provoked among Russian authors. The two subjects are equally interesting, however the first is - at least in broad terms - well enough known. Maistre’s biographers
The Persistence of Maistrian Thought from:
Joseph de Maistre's Life, Thought, and Influence
Author(s) Pranchère Jean-Yves
Abstract: For a long time it has been a commonplace of Maistrian studies - and a well-founded commonplace - to emphasize the paradoxical character of Maistre’s work. Almost all interpreters have recognized that this work is placed under the sign of paradox from a triple point of view: paradox surges especially in the contrast between a cruel and ferocious opus and an author whose correspondence shows him to be charitable and tolerant; it appears as well as the mark of the Maistrian style, which made great rhetorical use of the
oxymoron,of the association of contrary terms; and finally it characterizes
6 Judith Thampson: from:
Buried Astrolabe
Abstract: When, in 1990, Judith Thompson described herself as “a devoted Freudian in some ways” (
Fair,99) some of her admirers may have been disconcerted. By then the great man’s reputation was already manifestly in decline. A series of increasingly biting attacks were being made by writers such as Adolf Grünbaum, Jeffrey Masson, Frederick Crews, even Gloria Steinem, that represented the father of psychoanalysis patriarchal, sexist, unscientific, capricious, irrational, egotistical, deluded, paranoid, dishonest, sexually perverted, and just plain wrong. Many people apparently felt that the time had come simply to junk Freud and his ideas altogether.
2 Love and Other Unofficial Stories: from:
Writing Lovers
Abstract: The Prowlerbegins at the end of the Second World War on the remote northern island of Iceland. The narrator “prowls” amongst her memories of growing up in a disenfranchised, starving nation that has been successively colonized by a variety of countries: Denmark, the United States, and the Soviet Union. At the same time the reader learns that the murder of an unknown girl has taken place, a murder that is never resolved but that serves as a warning against all unknown “prowlers.” YetThe Prowleris also, indeed mostly, about love as what Gunnars’ narrator names that “vulnerable territory”
6 On the Line: from:
Writing Lovers
Abstract: The narrative of the love story is traditionally structured as an ordeal of abandonment prolonged by the promise of return and resolved through metaphors of seduction, the configurations of language that release the particular from its burden of meaning. Amorous discourse is characterized by the variety of narratives that follow in the wake of this abandonment. As devotees of the genre may observe, the “story” is already over by the time Heloise composes her first passionate epistle to Abelard, or, in a more contemporary example, when the narrator of “The Tennessee Waltz” begins his plaintive hurting song. The romance is
9 Postscript from:
Writing Lovers
Abstract: I began obliquely and can end no less so. Discourses of desire are always a
tissu de greffes,¹ a fabric of grafts in which, writes Kauffman, “something is always added on, borrowed from something else, embroidered” (304). Or alternately lost, left behind, eluded, eroded, avoided, evaded, substituted by metaphor, deferred through metonymy. What remains is the event of love, an impossible, inescapable, and absolutely ambiguous event exceeding all categories of expression and signification while, at the same time, attempting ceaselessly - recklessly, repeatedly - to articulate itself.
Foreword from:
Gift and Communion
Author(s) ANDERSON CARL A.
Abstract: Speaking in 1978 of the newly elected John Paul I, Cardinal Karol Wojtyła once described the pope’s role in post–Vatican II society as shouldering “the cross of contemporary man”—taking up and addressing the dangers, the wrongs that “can be righted only through justice and love.”¹ Unknown to him at the time, he was describing the very task that would be laid upon his own shoulders less than a month later when he would be elected to the papacy and would declare “Do not be afraid. Open wide the doors to Christ.”²
Foreword from:
Gift and Communion
Author(s) ANDERSON CARL A.
Abstract: Speaking in 1978 of the newly elected John Paul I, Cardinal Karol Wojtyła once described the pope’s role in post–Vatican II society as shouldering “the cross of contemporary man”—taking up and addressing the dangers, the wrongs that “can be righted only through justice and love.”¹ Unknown to him at the time, he was describing the very task that would be laid upon his own shoulders less than a month later when he would be elected to the papacy and would declare “Do not be afraid. Open wide the doors to Christ.”²
5 Political Emancipation and National Identity in Australia from:
The Making of the Nations and Cultures of the New World
Abstract: First a word to signpost our journey. The concept of oceanity refers at once to the direction and to the outcome of the symbolic appropriation of the Australian continent; in this sense, oceanity constitutes a reference point diametrically opposed to the European pole, since it is constructed at the latter’s expense. The concept ends up embracing all the attempts to create an authentic national identity, sometimes known as
Australianity. In discussing the European pole, I will frequently refer to the British mother country. Strictly speaking, one should distinguish between England and the other parts of the United Kingdom; however, since
7 Collective Paths, Discursive Strategies: from:
The Making of the Nations and Cultures of the New World
Abstract: The forays made throughout the preceding chapters, though very incomplete, have brought to light numerous particularities and convergences in the historical paths under discussion; they have allowed us to uncover surprising recurrences in the discursive strategies that new collectivities deployed to construct and order imaginaries at different times. I now proceed to make sense of each of these recurring tendencies and, in conclusion, ask what we have learned about these routes and representations.
6 Rhetoric: from:
Word of the Law
Abstract: In preceding chapters, I have considered some of the problems inherent in what has been called “the formalist and essentially patriarchal myth of a determinate and univocal language of legal authority.”² That “myth” is said to involve among other things, characterizing legal reasoning as a kind of “demonstration”—that is, deducing from certain premises conclusions dictated by logical necessity.³ Among the problems sometimes said to inhere in such a model are the following. First, the data or premises of the law are not facts, which are supposedly capable of empirical verification, but values, which ostensibly are not. Thus, the basic
9 Narrative from:
Word of the Law
Abstract: In recent years there has been a growth of interest, among those concerned with discourse analysis, in narrative. As Seymour Chatman some time ago observed, “[t]he study of narrative has become so popular that the French have honored it with a term —
la narratologie.”²But this interest is not limited to professional students of discourse: it seems to have become trendy for intellectuals of diverse types to interlard their discourse with the word “story” — as if to suggest that everything is narrative.³
6 Rhetoric: from:
Word of the Law
Abstract: In preceding chapters, I have considered some of the problems inherent in what has been called “the formalist and essentially patriarchal myth of a determinate and univocal language of legal authority.”² That “myth” is said to involve among other things, characterizing legal reasoning as a kind of “demonstration”—that is, deducing from certain premises conclusions dictated by logical necessity.³ Among the problems sometimes said to inhere in such a model are the following. First, the data or premises of the law are not facts, which are supposedly capable of empirical verification, but values, which ostensibly are not. Thus, the basic
9 Narrative from:
Word of the Law
Abstract: In recent years there has been a growth of interest, among those concerned with discourse analysis, in narrative. As Seymour Chatman some time ago observed, “[t]he study of narrative has become so popular that the French have honored it with a term —
la narratologie.”²But this interest is not limited to professional students of discourse: it seems to have become trendy for intellectuals of diverse types to interlard their discourse with the word “story” — as if to suggest that everything is narrative.³
6 Rhetoric: from:
Word of the Law
Abstract: In preceding chapters, I have considered some of the problems inherent in what has been called “the formalist and essentially patriarchal myth of a determinate and univocal language of legal authority.”² That “myth” is said to involve among other things, characterizing legal reasoning as a kind of “demonstration”—that is, deducing from certain premises conclusions dictated by logical necessity.³ Among the problems sometimes said to inhere in such a model are the following. First, the data or premises of the law are not facts, which are supposedly capable of empirical verification, but values, which ostensibly are not. Thus, the basic
9 Narrative from:
Word of the Law
Abstract: In recent years there has been a growth of interest, among those concerned with discourse analysis, in narrative. As Seymour Chatman some time ago observed, “[t]he study of narrative has become so popular that the French have honored it with a term —
la narratologie.”²But this interest is not limited to professional students of discourse: it seems to have become trendy for intellectuals of diverse types to interlard their discourse with the word “story” — as if to suggest that everything is narrative.³
CHAPTER THREE Charting Meta-utopia: from:
Russian Experimental Fiction
Abstract: Among the canonical markers of utopian writing is the ambiguous location of the ideal society in space and time. Thus, a good point of departure for a discussion of meta-utopian fiction will be a definition of it in terms of its treatment of spatial and temporal dimensions. Moreover, the positioning of plot events in a matrix of space and time, what Bakhtin calls “chronotope,” lays the coordinates for a sustained valuative framework.¹ Chronotopes can give a palpable sense of the ideological project central to meta-utopian fiction. This fiction is about liberation from spatial and temporal stasis. It is about the
CHAPTER THREE Charting Meta-utopia: from:
Russian Experimental Fiction
Abstract: Among the canonical markers of utopian writing is the ambiguous location of the ideal society in space and time. Thus, a good point of departure for a discussion of meta-utopian fiction will be a definition of it in terms of its treatment of spatial and temporal dimensions. Moreover, the positioning of plot events in a matrix of space and time, what Bakhtin calls “chronotope,” lays the coordinates for a sustained valuative framework.¹ Chronotopes can give a palpable sense of the ideological project central to meta-utopian fiction. This fiction is about liberation from spatial and temporal stasis. It is about the
INTRODUCTION. from:
Romanticism and the Forms of Ruin: Wordsworth, Coleridge, the Modalities of Fragmentation
Abstract: The phenomenology of the fragment is the phenomenology of human awareness. I look out my study window as I write this sentence and see a fragment made up of fragments: a mass of stone and concrete that is part of New York City: buildings in such a variety of size, shape, and architecture, mostly bad, juxtaposed in such randomness, and showing such heterogeneous effects of time, as to constitute a visual junk heap. I happen to take a book from my shelves, Lucien Goldmann’s
Le Dieu caché, and see the argument that Pascal’sPensées,a masterpiece even though fragmentary and
CHAPTER SIX The Psychic Economy and Cultural Meaning of Coleridge’s Magnum Opus from:
Romanticism and the Forms of Ruin: Wordsworth, Coleridge, the Modalities of Fragmentation
Abstract: In the E. J. Pratt Library of Victoria University in Toronto there are three clasped vellum manuscript volumes. They, along with a manuscript chapter in a commonplace book in the Huntington Library, and some data in the Berg Collection of the New York Public Library, are what remains of one of the most legendary works ever conceived: the
magnum opusof Samuel Taylor Coleridge—or as he sometimes called it, “my Great Work.” I say “legendary” advisedly, for by that adjective I mean to focus three aspects of the enterprise: first of all, its fame; secondly, its basis in fact;
Book Title: Milton's Epics and the Book of Psalms- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): RADZINOWICZ MARY ANN
Abstract: This book traces the density of poetic voices in the epicsvoices arising from the echoing of psalm kindsand the ironic paralleling of important episodes in them. At the same time, Radzinowicz's book relates to each other Milton's two remarkable poetic oeuvres derived from the Old and New Testaments: one an anonymous, powerful, ancient, worship-centered, lyric work, the other an individually determined, revolutionary, heroic work.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7ztqxb
30 Images of Darwin: from:
The Darwinian Heritage
Author(s) La Vergata Antonello
Abstract: What, it is now time to ask, have been the issues most commonly dealt with in Darwin historiography? What have been the dominant interpretative approaches to Darwin problems? Which ones have proved most fruitful? Which deserve greater attention in the future? These
CHAPTER IV Gestures Toward a Literary History of Lyric from:
The Three Genres and the Interpretation of Lyric
Abstract: It is time to ask how our model can help to articulate interpretations. Our discussion of genre suggested that to read a poem as lyric is to read it as creating a reciprocal relation between mind and world. Such reflections do not by themselves suffice to ground a hermeneutic theory or a program of interpretation. In one sense, the model is hostile to anything that resembles a program, for we have insisted that interpretation is the making-explicit of what is already understood. Insofar as any program of interpretation promises to
produceunderstanding, as opposed to making our understanding more explicit,
CHAPTER IV Gestures Toward a Literary History of Lyric from:
The Three Genres and the Interpretation of Lyric
Abstract: It is time to ask how our model can help to articulate interpretations. Our discussion of genre suggested that to read a poem as lyric is to read it as creating a reciprocal relation between mind and world. Such reflections do not by themselves suffice to ground a hermeneutic theory or a program of interpretation. In one sense, the model is hostile to anything that resembles a program, for we have insisted that interpretation is the making-explicit of what is already understood. Insofar as any program of interpretation promises to
produceunderstanding, as opposed to making our understanding more explicit,
CHAPTER I SAMSON AGONISTES AND THE STATE OF MILTON CRITICISM from:
Interpreting SAMSON AGONISTES
Abstract: No sooner had Raymond Waddington told us what we could all agree upon—that
Samson Agonistesis a drama of regeneration—than Irene Samuel declared she could not agree, and in such a way as to remind us of the Johnsonian proposition: “this is the tragedy which ignorance has admired, and bigotry applauded.”¹ It has been suggested that we will never know exactly what Johnson meant inasmuch as published commentary on Milton’s tragedy hardly existed at the time. Some commentary did exist, however, both visual and verbal, with illustrative criticism (a good index to any text’s status in the culture)
CHAPTER III THE JUDGES NARRATIVE AND THE ART OF SAMSON AGONISTES from:
Interpreting SAMSON AGONISTES
Abstract: The Samson story, it has been said, “demonstrates Israelite narrative art at its zenith.”¹ This claim should be made for the Book of Judges as a whole, for its meaning is located not in individual tales alone but spreads out through the entire structure. The salient features of this narrative are comprehended within the body of Renaissance exegesis but were not then the preoccupation they would become for later commentators. A prospect on history, a series of inset histories, another prospect on history that, this time, juxtaposes current actualities with earlier idealisms, the Book of Judges is also remarkable for
CHAPTER VI MILTON’S SAMSONS AND SAMSON AGONISTES from:
Interpreting SAMSON AGONISTES
Abstract: It is within the context of shifting attitudes toward Samson that Milton writes
Samson Agonistesand that it should be interpreted—or reinterpreted. Or, better, contextualization should nudge us into adjusting our interpretations ofSamsonin a way that shows it to accommodate more than one perspective on its protagonist; that reveals its tragic power emanating from the ambiguities in which the Samson story came to be lodged and which obfuscate the moral clarity (i.e., platitudinous Christianity) Milton is sometimes thought to have imposed upon that story. Not just in later centuries, but in Milton’s own time, decidedly different views
CHAPTER VII SAMSON AGONISTES IN CONTEXT from:
Interpreting SAMSON AGONISTES
Abstract: The wisdom of putting
Paradise RegainedandSamson Agonistestogether in the same volume, writes John Shawcross, “is the commerce which is thus established between them”: “Perhaps we have misreadSamson Agonistesso ineptly because we have not fully acknowledged the interrelationships of the two works.”¹ And Balachandra Rajan comments similarly: “How little in the impressive outpouring of Milton scholarship bears explicitly on this problem” of intertextual connection.² The poems in Milton’s 1671 volume, for a long time, seemed resistant to the sort of criticism that both Shawcross and Rajan would sponsor; for on the one hand they clearly embody
CHAPTER I SAMSON AGONISTES AND THE STATE OF MILTON CRITICISM from:
Interpreting SAMSON AGONISTES
Abstract: No sooner had Raymond Waddington told us what we could all agree upon—that
Samson Agonistesis a drama of regeneration—than Irene Samuel declared she could not agree, and in such a way as to remind us of the Johnsonian proposition: “this is the tragedy which ignorance has admired, and bigotry applauded.”¹ It has been suggested that we will never know exactly what Johnson meant inasmuch as published commentary on Milton’s tragedy hardly existed at the time. Some commentary did exist, however, both visual and verbal, with illustrative criticism (a good index to any text’s status in the culture)
CHAPTER III THE JUDGES NARRATIVE AND THE ART OF SAMSON AGONISTES from:
Interpreting SAMSON AGONISTES
Abstract: The Samson story, it has been said, “demonstrates Israelite narrative art at its zenith.”¹ This claim should be made for the Book of Judges as a whole, for its meaning is located not in individual tales alone but spreads out through the entire structure. The salient features of this narrative are comprehended within the body of Renaissance exegesis but were not then the preoccupation they would become for later commentators. A prospect on history, a series of inset histories, another prospect on history that, this time, juxtaposes current actualities with earlier idealisms, the Book of Judges is also remarkable for
CHAPTER VI MILTON’S SAMSONS AND SAMSON AGONISTES from:
Interpreting SAMSON AGONISTES
Abstract: It is within the context of shifting attitudes toward Samson that Milton writes
Samson Agonistesand that it should be interpreted—or reinterpreted. Or, better, contextualization should nudge us into adjusting our interpretations ofSamsonin a way that shows it to accommodate more than one perspective on its protagonist; that reveals its tragic power emanating from the ambiguities in which the Samson story came to be lodged and which obfuscate the moral clarity (i.e., platitudinous Christianity) Milton is sometimes thought to have imposed upon that story. Not just in later centuries, but in Milton’s own time, decidedly different views
CHAPTER VII SAMSON AGONISTES IN CONTEXT from:
Interpreting SAMSON AGONISTES
Abstract: The wisdom of putting
Paradise RegainedandSamson Agonistestogether in the same volume, writes John Shawcross, “is the commerce which is thus established between them”: “Perhaps we have misreadSamson Agonistesso ineptly because we have not fully acknowledged the interrelationships of the two works.”¹ And Balachandra Rajan comments similarly: “How little in the impressive outpouring of Milton scholarship bears explicitly on this problem” of intertextual connection.² The poems in Milton’s 1671 volume, for a long time, seemed resistant to the sort of criticism that both Shawcross and Rajan would sponsor; for on the one hand they clearly embody
Book Title: Poetry, Word-Play, and Word-War in Wallace Stevens- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): COOK ELEANOR
Abstract: In the first full-length study of Wallace Stevens's word-play, Eleanor Cook focuses on Stevens's skillful play with grammar, etymology, allusion, and other elements of poetry, and suggests ways in which this play offers a method of approaching his work. At the same time, this book is a general study of Stevens's poetry, moving from his earliest to his latest work, and includes close readings of three of his remarkable long poems--Esthetique du Mal, Notes toward a Supreme Fiction, and An Ordinary Evening in New Haven. The chronological arrangement enables readers to follow Stevens's increasing skill and changing thought in three areas of his "poetry of the earth": the poetry of place, the poetry of eros, and the poetry of belief.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7ztwr5
Introduction from:
Poetry, Word-Play, and Word-War in Wallace Stevens
Abstract: I need to say a number of things all at once, because readers come to word-play with such different assumptions. So I shall say them briefly, then speak in a general way about word-play, before proceeding to an outline of this book, and then to some specialized matters. First, the simple and important point that Stevens liked word-play because it is often wonderfully funny. We sometimes read him a shade solemnly. Second, Stevens ʺwords are almost always deflected from their common denotation,ʺ to quote Helen Vendler.¹ (ʺPersonally I like words to sound wrong,ʺ he once wrote apropos of a translation
CHAPTER FOUR The Ludus of Allusion: from:
Poetry, Word-Play, and Word-War in Wallace Stevens
Abstract: Allusion is always a kind of play, if we go by the built-in
ludusof its etymology, and one early meaning (OED2). Paul de Man calls it an ʺintertextual trope . . in which a complex play of substitutions and repetitions takes place between texts,ʺ¹ and Stevens becomes a master of such allusive play—ʺhe that of repetition is most master,ʺ to borrow a phrase fromNotes toward a Supreme Fictionand use ʺrepetitionʺ in de Manʹs sense.² Only rarely does he use quotation and only sometimes allusion proper, that is, ʺpart of the portable library shared by the author
CHAPTER SEVEN Concerning the Nature of Things: from:
Poetry, Word-Play, and Word-War in Wallace Stevens
Abstract: The Man with the Blue Guitaris pivotal in Stevensʹ work, at once a review and a new direction, a refinding of vocation and a preliminary to the major long poems of the forties. The series has a certain austerity, and Stevens himself conceded some boring patches, but rightly judged the poemʹs overall strength: ʺthe man with the blue guitar … while it bores me in spots, is a very much better book than ideas of orderʺ (L338, April 27, 1939). Stevensʹ effects are sometimes abrupt or compacted; there is occasional bitterness and disgust, and the poem approaches desperation
CHAPTER EIGHT Against Synecdoche: from:
Poetry, Word-Play, and Word-War in Wallace Stevens
Abstract: Stevens enjoyed himself more in this volume than in
Ideas of OrderorThe Man with the Blue Guitar, and he was disappointed when readers showed no corresponding enjoyment (L429–30, 433, 501) We can hear him indulging his old sense of fun from time to time, for example, in the casual, nudging asides on his own processes (ʺShucks,ʺ ʺPfttʺ) Or in a courtly bow to the reader after an unforgettable line and point ʺThe squirming facts exceed the squamous mind, / If one may say soʺ Or in the play with things that fall stones fall, night falls,
CHAPTER THIRTEEN Late Poems: from:
Poetry, Word-Play, and Word-War in Wallace Stevens
Abstract: I have moved from the end of
Transport to SummertoAn Ordinary Evening in New Haven, the major long poem of Stevensʹ next volume. That poem, and the volumeʹs title poem,Auroras of Autumnexplore ways of saying farewell. At the same time, Stevens increasingly writes short poems of peculiar force and intensity that do not give the effect of meditating on farewells, except by indirection. Randall Jarrell describes them as the work of a man ʺat once very old and beyond the dominion of age; such men seem to have entered into (or are able to create for
Book Title: Poetry, Word-Play, and Word-War in Wallace Stevens- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): COOK ELEANOR
Abstract: In the first full-length study of Wallace Stevens's word-play, Eleanor Cook focuses on Stevens's skillful play with grammar, etymology, allusion, and other elements of poetry, and suggests ways in which this play offers a method of approaching his work. At the same time, this book is a general study of Stevens's poetry, moving from his earliest to his latest work, and includes close readings of three of his remarkable long poems--Esthetique du Mal, Notes toward a Supreme Fiction, and An Ordinary Evening in New Haven. The chronological arrangement enables readers to follow Stevens's increasing skill and changing thought in three areas of his "poetry of the earth": the poetry of place, the poetry of eros, and the poetry of belief.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7ztwr5
Introduction from:
Poetry, Word-Play, and Word-War in Wallace Stevens
Abstract: I need to say a number of things all at once, because readers come to word-play with such different assumptions. So I shall say them briefly, then speak in a general way about word-play, before proceeding to an outline of this book, and then to some specialized matters. First, the simple and important point that Stevens liked word-play because it is often wonderfully funny. We sometimes read him a shade solemnly. Second, Stevens ʺwords are almost always deflected from their common denotation,ʺ to quote Helen Vendler.¹ (ʺPersonally I like words to sound wrong,ʺ he once wrote apropos of a translation
CHAPTER FOUR The Ludus of Allusion: from:
Poetry, Word-Play, and Word-War in Wallace Stevens
Abstract: Allusion is always a kind of play, if we go by the built-in
ludusof its etymology, and one early meaning (OED2). Paul de Man calls it an ʺintertextual trope . . in which a complex play of substitutions and repetitions takes place between texts,ʺ¹ and Stevens becomes a master of such allusive play—ʺhe that of repetition is most master,ʺ to borrow a phrase fromNotes toward a Supreme Fictionand use ʺrepetitionʺ in de Manʹs sense.² Only rarely does he use quotation and only sometimes allusion proper, that is, ʺpart of the portable library shared by the author
CHAPTER SEVEN Concerning the Nature of Things: from:
Poetry, Word-Play, and Word-War in Wallace Stevens
Abstract: The Man with the Blue Guitaris pivotal in Stevensʹ work, at once a review and a new direction, a refinding of vocation and a preliminary to the major long poems of the forties. The series has a certain austerity, and Stevens himself conceded some boring patches, but rightly judged the poemʹs overall strength: ʺthe man with the blue guitar … while it bores me in spots, is a very much better book than ideas of orderʺ (L338, April 27, 1939). Stevensʹ effects are sometimes abrupt or compacted; there is occasional bitterness and disgust, and the poem approaches desperation
CHAPTER EIGHT Against Synecdoche: from:
Poetry, Word-Play, and Word-War in Wallace Stevens
Abstract: Stevens enjoyed himself more in this volume than in
Ideas of OrderorThe Man with the Blue Guitar, and he was disappointed when readers showed no corresponding enjoyment (L429–30, 433, 501) We can hear him indulging his old sense of fun from time to time, for example, in the casual, nudging asides on his own processes (ʺShucks,ʺ ʺPfttʺ) Or in a courtly bow to the reader after an unforgettable line and point ʺThe squirming facts exceed the squamous mind, / If one may say soʺ Or in the play with things that fall stones fall, night falls,
CHAPTER THIRTEEN Late Poems: from:
Poetry, Word-Play, and Word-War in Wallace Stevens
Abstract: I have moved from the end of
Transport to SummertoAn Ordinary Evening in New Haven, the major long poem of Stevensʹ next volume. That poem, and the volumeʹs title poem,Auroras of Autumnexplore ways of saying farewell. At the same time, Stevens increasingly writes short poems of peculiar force and intensity that do not give the effect of meditating on farewells, except by indirection. Randall Jarrell describes them as the work of a man ʺat once very old and beyond the dominion of age; such men seem to have entered into (or are able to create for
Book Title: Beauty and Holiness-The Dialogue Between Aesthetics and Religion
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Martin James Alfred
Abstract: In this broad historical and critical overview based on a lifetime of scholarship, James Alfred Martin, Jr., examines the development of the concepts of beauty and holiness as employed in theories of aesthetics and of religion. The injunction in the Book of Psalms to "worship the Lord in the beauty of holiness" addressed a tradition that has comprehended holiness primarily in terms of ethical righteousness--a conception that has strongly influenced Western understandings of religion. As the author points out, however, the Greek forbears of Western thought, as well as many Eastern traditions, were and are more broadly concerned with the pursuit of beauty, truth, and goodness as ideals of human excellence, that is, with the "holiness of beauty." In this work Martin describes a philosophical stance that should prove to be most productive for the dialogue between aesthetics and religion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7ztx00
CHAPTER FOUR Aesthetics and Religion in Twentieth-Century Philosophy from:
Beauty and Holiness
Abstract: It issometimes said that modern philosophy began with Descartes’ turn to subjectivity and to mathematical clarity as the model of truth. It is also said that modern philosophy began with Kant’s critique of traditional metaphysics and his critical amalgam of empirical and rationalistic factors in his epistemology as a “prolegomenon to any future metaphysics.” We have seen that, in any event, it was in the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries that conceptual specification of aesthetics and of religion emerged, as an aspect of the new critical philosophy and the enlarged senses of history and culture engendered by the Enlightenment
Book Title: The Social Vision of William Blake- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): FERBER MICHAEL
Abstract: This fresh look at the social and political themes of Blake's poetry shows that he was a phenomenologist of liberation," who contested the dominant ideology of his time and who still speaks passionately to our fears and hopes.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7ztzd7
4 Nature and the Female from:
The Social Vision of William Blake
Abstract: It is sometimes argued that Blake was a “revolutionary naturalist” for a few years following the French Revolution in 1789,¹ the chief exhibit in this case being “The voice of the Devil” in
The Marriage of Heaven and Hell(4). It is not nature that the Blakean devil endorses, however, but “Energy” and “the Body.” The Body, furthermore, is “a portion of Soul” as perceived by our five senses. These five senses being “in this age” only the remnant of the “enlarged & numerous senses” of a former age (11), the Body is presumably a temporary but necessary illusion. When we
7 Time, Eternity, and History from:
The Social Vision of William Blake
Abstract: For the realm we enter when our imagination is fully awake, Blake at first preferred the term “infinite.” “He who sees the Infinite in all things sees God.” Ezekiel wanted to raise men “into a perception of the infinite.” The Atlantic Ocean has already barred out the “infinite mountains of light” (of Atlantis) and now threatens to overwhelm America, “another portion of the infinite.” Oothoon tells how her “infinite brain” was inclosed in a circle by those who instructed her in Lockean philosophy (E 3, 39, 56, 47). By the time of the Lambeth prophecies, however, “infinite” is giving way
Finding the Edge from:
Eros the Bittersweet
Abstract: Eros is an issue of boundaries. He exists because certain boundaries do. In the interval between reach and grasp, between glance and counterglance, between ‘I love you’ and ‘I love you too,’ the absent presence of desire comes alive. But the boundaries of time and glance and I love you are only aftershocks of the main, inevitable boundary that creates Eros: the boundary of flesh and self between you and me. And it is only, suddenly, at the moment when I would dissolve that boundary, I realize I never can.
Alphabetic Edge from:
Eros the Bittersweet
Abstract: The Greeks created their alphabet by taking over the syllabic sign-system of the Phoenicians and modifying it in certain decisive ways sometime in the early eighth century b.c. It is standard to say that their chief modification amounted to “introducing the vowels.” Vowels were not expressed in
Folded Meanings from:
Eros the Bittersweet
Abstract: From the time of its earliest use the technique of writing and reading was appreciated by the ancients as an apparatus of privacy or secrecy. All communication is to some extent public in a society without writing. Certainly a message sent by herald and declaimed in the open air is a less private communiqué than a letter written for your eyes alone to read. Early readers and writers seem to have been intensely aware of this difference. There is an ancient riddle, attributed to Sappho, that expresses their attitude:
Bellerophon Is Quite Wrong After All from:
Eros the Bittersweet
Abstract: Although embedded in an epic genealogy, Bellerophon’s is a story of erotic triangles, ideal matter for a novel. We do not know where Homer got the story; presumably it reflects an extremely ancient Lydian layer in the epic tradition from which he drew, dating from a time long before his own (supposing we place Homer in the eighth century b.c.). It was a time when some form of reading and writing was known to the Aegean world, or at least to the people of Lykia where the story is set. No one knows what system of writing this was. Homer
Ice-pleasure from:
Eros the Bittersweet
Abstract: The blind point of Eros is a paradox in time as well as in space. A desire to bring the absent into presence, or to collapse far and near, is also a desire to foreclose then upon now. As lover you reach forward to a point in time called ‘then’ when you will bite into the long-desired apple. Meanwhile you are aware that as soon as ‘then’ supervenes upon ‘now,’ the bittersweet moment, which is your desire, will be gone. You cannot want that, and yet you do. Let us see what this feels like.
Now Then from:
Eros the Bittersweet
Abstract: Desire seems to the lover to demolish time in the instant when it happens, and to gather all other moments into itself in unimportance. Yet, simultaneously, the lover perceives more sharply than anyone else the difference between the ‘now’ of his desire and all the other moments called ‘then’ that line up
The Sidestep from:
Eros the Bittersweet
Abstract: Lysias’ speech is designed to alarm standard sentiment and displace preconceptions about love. It aims to be powerfully, seductively subversive. Yet the speech is simple, for it owes all its insights and shock value to one mechanism: Lysias takes up a particular vantage point on time. It is this temporal point of view which differentiates all that a nonlover feels and thinks and does from what a lover feels, thinks or does. It is a point of view that no one who is in love could tolerate. Lysias looks at a love affair from the point of view of the
Gardening for Fun and Profit from:
Eros the Bittersweet
Abstract: It is an image of gardens (276b-77a). Lovers and writers and cicadas are not the only ones who find themselves at odds with time. Gardeners also have occasion to wish to evade, manipulate, and defy temporal conditions. The occasions are festive ones and, according to Sokrates, on such occasions gardeners become playful and gardening does not follow serious rules. Plato introduces the subject of gardens in order to make a point about the art of writing, whose seriousness he wishes to put into question. Let us consider first the play of gardening and then the play of writing. Plato brings
Something Serious Is Missing from:
Eros the Bittersweet
Abstract: The static blooms of Adonis provide us with an answer to our question ‘What would the lover ask of time?’ As Plato formulates it, the answer brings us once again to the perception that lovers and readers have very similar desires. And the desire of each is something paradoxical. As lover you want ice to
beice and yet not melt in your hands. As reader you want knowledge tobeknowledge and yet lie fixed on a written page. Such wants cannot help but pain you, at least in part, because they place you at a blind point from
Read Me the Bit Again from:
Eros the Bittersweet
Abstract: Please, will you reread his beginning one more time? (263e)
What Is This Dialogue About? from:
Eros the Bittersweet
Abstract: The
Phaedrusis an exploration of the dynamics and dangers of controlled time that make themselves accessible to readers, writers, and lovers. In Sokrates’ view, a truelogoshas this in common with a real love affair, that it must be lived out in time. It is not the same backwards as forwards, it cannot be entered at any point, or frozen at its acme, or dismissed when fascination falters. A reader, like a bad lover, may feel he can zoom into his text at any point and pluck the fruit of its wisdom. A writer, like Lysias, may feel
CHAPTER ONE Benjamin Franklin and the Authority of Imitation from:
Authority, Autonomy, and Representation in American Literature, 1776-1865
Abstract: When Benjamin Franklin began Part Three of his
Autobiographyin August of 1788, he was, for the first time, writing from his own home. Whereas the earlier sections had been composed in England (in 1771) and France (in 1784), he now wrote in his own library on Market Street. But home meant not only the city of Philadelphia or America, which, after all, has always been more a conceptual space than an actual geographical location; home in late summer of 1788 also included the recently constituted and ratified United States of America. In fact, as Franklin looked back over his
CHAPTER THREE Charles Brockden Brown, Authority, and Intentionality from:
Authority, Autonomy, and Representation in American Literature, 1776-1865
Abstract: The late eighteenth century in America was a frightened age. The social aftershocks of the Revolution continued to shake the United States’ political structure as the country neared what appeared to be the apocalyptic end of the eighteenth century. In the 1780s and 1790s, America found itself tested by the internal conflicts as the two parties, the weakening Federalist party and the ever-more-powerful Republicans (the opposition party arising from Antifederalist sentiment), fought for control. Aggravating these internecine battles were fears of an international conspiracy stemming from the French Revolution.¹ The projected fears eventually gave rise to the Alien and Sedition
CHAPTER ONE Benjamin Franklin and the Authority of Imitation from:
Authority, Autonomy, and Representation in American Literature, 1776-1865
Abstract: When Benjamin Franklin began Part Three of his
Autobiographyin August of 1788, he was, for the first time, writing from his own home. Whereas the earlier sections had been composed in England (in 1771) and France (in 1784), he now wrote in his own library on Market Street. But home meant not only the city of Philadelphia or America, which, after all, has always been more a conceptual space than an actual geographical location; home in late summer of 1788 also included the recently constituted and ratified United States of America. In fact, as Franklin looked back over his
CHAPTER THREE Charles Brockden Brown, Authority, and Intentionality from:
Authority, Autonomy, and Representation in American Literature, 1776-1865
Abstract: The late eighteenth century in America was a frightened age. The social aftershocks of the Revolution continued to shake the United States’ political structure as the country neared what appeared to be the apocalyptic end of the eighteenth century. In the 1780s and 1790s, America found itself tested by the internal conflicts as the two parties, the weakening Federalist party and the ever-more-powerful Republicans (the opposition party arising from Antifederalist sentiment), fought for control. Aggravating these internecine battles were fears of an international conspiracy stemming from the French Revolution.¹ The projected fears eventually gave rise to the Alien and Sedition
ONE The Literariness of Shakespeare from:
Shakespeare
Abstract: No one in 1623 would have said that Shakespeare’s work marked and embodied some general change in European self-understanding. We often say so now. Portentous and wistful by turns, our talk about Shakespeare habitually sets him between times, last witness for the old, first prophet of the new, a genius of the divided vision and a symbol of our own life on the margins of tradition. Commonplaces can be false, of course, but the proof of this one is repetition, not only iteration of such judgments about Shakespeare’s place in history, but our constant recurrence to his texts, which have
TWO Rewriting vraisemblance in La Princesse de Clèves from:
Poetics of Reading
Abstract: When
La Princesse de Clèveswas first published in March 1678, it gave rise to lively discussions. Of major interest in these first responses to the book was the behavior of its central character, the princess. A telling example is the poll organized byLe Mercure Galantthat asked its readers whether Mme. de Clèves was right to tell her husband about her love for the due de Nemours. The majority thought not. Her conduct seemed implausible, since according to social custom (the well-established code ofbienséance), such behavior was not sanctioned.¹ Readers of the time did not ask themselves
TWO Rewriting vraisemblance in La Princesse de Clèves from:
Poetics of Reading
Abstract: When
La Princesse de Clèveswas first published in March 1678, it gave rise to lively discussions. Of major interest in these first responses to the book was the behavior of its central character, the princess. A telling example is the poll organized byLe Mercure Galantthat asked its readers whether Mme. de Clèves was right to tell her husband about her love for the due de Nemours. The majority thought not. Her conduct seemed implausible, since according to social custom (the well-established code ofbienséance), such behavior was not sanctioned.¹ Readers of the time did not ask themselves
TWO Rewriting vraisemblance in La Princesse de Clèves from:
Poetics of Reading
Abstract: When
La Princesse de Clèveswas first published in March 1678, it gave rise to lively discussions. Of major interest in these first responses to the book was the behavior of its central character, the princess. A telling example is the poll organized byLe Mercure Galantthat asked its readers whether Mme. de Clèves was right to tell her husband about her love for the due de Nemours. The majority thought not. Her conduct seemed implausible, since according to social custom (the well-established code ofbienséance), such behavior was not sanctioned.¹ Readers of the time did not ask themselves
The Readerhood of Man from:
The Reader in the Text
Author(s) Brooke-Rose Christine
Abstract: After a long period when the Real (I prefer Actual) Author had been enthroned by criticism, his every “laundry-list” (as Pound called biography) scrutinized, he was, in true carnivalesque fashion, unthroned, the wild and happy crowd of Actual Readers taking over—but, as is the way with carnival, only for a time. Extremes bring natural reactions, and the two polarities, called at the time the Intentional and the Affective Fallacies, seem to have compromised on a safe buffer state called The Text as Object, an apparently autonomous unit that encodes both its author (implied), or addresser, and its reader (implied),
The Readerhood of Man from:
The Reader in the Text
Author(s) Brooke-Rose Christine
Abstract: After a long period when the Real (I prefer Actual) Author had been enthroned by criticism, his every “laundry-list” (as Pound called biography) scrutinized, he was, in true carnivalesque fashion, unthroned, the wild and happy crowd of Actual Readers taking over—but, as is the way with carnival, only for a time. Extremes bring natural reactions, and the two polarities, called at the time the Intentional and the Affective Fallacies, seem to have compromised on a safe buffer state called The Text as Object, an apparently autonomous unit that encodes both its author (implied), or addresser, and its reader (implied),
9 Autonomy and Multinationality in Spain: from:
Contemporary Majority Nationalism
Author(s) FOSSAS ENRIC
Abstract: It is not easy to summarize the twenty-five years of Spanish decentralization, because it was an exercise of great political and legal complexity that included several factors and many nuances. It is therefore a very difficult subject to deal with in a satisfying manner within the framework of a conference, where this chapter originated. Moreover, every assessment is always tainted by some subjectivity that is inevitably dependent on preconceived political ideas, as well as inescapable cultural sensibilities. Finally, the time when a study is conducted can influence the evaluation of a historical period, which is the case today, since Spain
4 READING WITH/OUT A TEXT from:
The Skeptic Disposition
Abstract: For Roland Barthes, the pleasure of the text is in the making of one’s own text at the expense of the text of another. “Thus begins at the heart of the critical work, the dialogue of two histories and two subjectivities, the author’s and the critic’s. But this dialogue is egoistically shifted toward the present: criticism is not an homage to the truth of the past or to the truth of ‘others’—it is a construction of the intelligibility of our own time.”¹ In shamelessly confessing the egoism of the critical act, Barthes casts doubt upon the objective existence of
CHAPTER 4 DECONSTRUCTIVE COMEDY from:
Shakespeare and the Dramaturgy of Power
Abstract: Shakespeare’s response to the Tudor separation of styles is deeply ambivalent. On one hand, as his career ripened, he perfected what Marlowe had begun, producing a supple and evocative blank verse after a remarkably short time and creating a decorous stratification of style that mirrors the social standing of its speakers, with particularly brilliant effect in
Midsummer Night’s Dream. The only play Shakespeare wrote that contains no audibly distinguishable low-life characters at all isTroilus and Cressida, which is his purest expression of satire in the innovative humanist manner. Thersites rails in prose in that play, but for all his
Book Title: Scripture, Canon and Commentary-A Comparison of Confucian and Western Exegesis
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): HENDERSON JOHN B.
Abstract: In this major contribution to the study of the Chinese classics and comparative religion, John Henderson uses the history of exegesis to illuminate mental patterns that have universal and perennial significance for intellectual history. Henderson relates the Confucian commentarial tradition to other primary exegetical traditions, particularly the Homeric tradition, Vedanta, rabbinic Judaism, ancient and medieval Christian biblical exegesis, and Qur'anic exegesis. In making such comparisons, he discusses some basic assumptions common to all these traditions--such as that the classics or scriptures are comprehensive or that they contain all significant knowledge or truth and analyzes the strategies deployed to support these presuppositions. As shown here, primary differences among commentarial or exegetical traditions arose from variations in their emphasis on one or another of these assumptions and strategies. Henderson demonstrates that exegetical modes of thought were far from arcane: they dominated the post-classical/premodern intellectual world. Some have persisted or re-emerged in modern times, particularly in ideologies such as Marxism. Written in an engaging and accessible style, Scripture, Canon, and Commentary is not only a challenging interpretation of comparative scriptural traditions but also an excellent introduction to the study of the Confucian classics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvb8n
Book Title: Scripture, Canon and Commentary-A Comparison of Confucian and Western Exegesis
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): HENDERSON JOHN B.
Abstract: In this major contribution to the study of the Chinese classics and comparative religion, John Henderson uses the history of exegesis to illuminate mental patterns that have universal and perennial significance for intellectual history. Henderson relates the Confucian commentarial tradition to other primary exegetical traditions, particularly the Homeric tradition, Vedanta, rabbinic Judaism, ancient and medieval Christian biblical exegesis, and Qur'anic exegesis. In making such comparisons, he discusses some basic assumptions common to all these traditions--such as that the classics or scriptures are comprehensive or that they contain all significant knowledge or truth and analyzes the strategies deployed to support these presuppositions. As shown here, primary differences among commentarial or exegetical traditions arose from variations in their emphasis on one or another of these assumptions and strategies. Henderson demonstrates that exegetical modes of thought were far from arcane: they dominated the post-classical/premodern intellectual world. Some have persisted or re-emerged in modern times, particularly in ideologies such as Marxism. Written in an engaging and accessible style, Scripture, Canon, and Commentary is not only a challenging interpretation of comparative scriptural traditions but also an excellent introduction to the study of the Confucian classics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvb8n
Sp(l)acing out of the (Sub)Text: from:
Isak Dinesen and Narrativity
Author(s) Scott H. Jill
Abstract: Sp(l)acing: For Derrida “spacing” is the becoming-absent, or the becoming-unconscious of the subject; it is the shifting of the metaphysical opposition of space/time off-centre, re-spacing, re-placing it. Writing is spacing, writing is woman, the inauthentic, the mime, at once present and absent, same and different (Jardine 184).
4 READING WITH/OUT A TEXT from:
The Skeptic Disposition In Contemporary Criticism
Abstract: For Roland Barthes, the pleasure of the text is in the making of one’s own text at the expense of the text of another. “Thus begins at the heart of the critical work, the dialogue of two histories and two subjectivities, the author’s and the critic’s. But this dialogue is egoistically shifted toward the present: criticism is not an homage to the truth of the past or to the truth of ‘others’—it is a construction of the intelligibility of our own time.”¹ In shamelessly confessing the egoism of the critical act, Barthes casts doubt upon the objective existence of
Book Title: History as a Visual Art in the Twelfth-Century Renaissance- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Morrison Karl F.
Abstract: Twelfth-century writers assimilated and transformed a tradition of the conceptual unity of all the arts and attributed that unity to the fact that art both conceals and discloses. Recovering that tradition, especially the methods and motives of concealment, provides extraordinary insights into twelfth-century ideas about the kingdom of God, the status of women, and the nature of time itself. It also identifies a strain in European thought that had striking affinities to methods of perception familiar in Oriental religions and that proved to be antithetic to later humanist traditions in the West.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvdgf
Chapter 1 INTERPRETERS AT THE FEAST, OR A DIALOGUE BETWEEN ANCIENTS AND MODERNS from:
History as a Visual Art in the Twelfth-Century Renaissance
Abstract: Some friends have suggested that I begin these inquiries with a word about method. By what method can we apprehend a way of understanding that is not linguistic, and that is not equivalent with interpretation? The idea of an introduction on this subject is appealing. However, in some important ways, every text discussed or referred to in the following pages requires the development of a special method. When I work with texts, I read them to grasp the message of the letter and also to explore what is unsaid between the lines of written words. Sometimes this work requires attention
Chapter 5 THE KINGDOM OF GOD: from:
History as a Visual Art in the Twelfth-Century Renaissance
Abstract: Thus far, we have identified a few guidelines that governed historical writing as an art of the imagination. Like any compositions, the works with which we are concerned depended on exclusion as well as inclusion, but even what was included has appeared shapeless to modern scholars. There is little regard for narrative unity, no organic wholeness. At some times, one encounters gaps in a narrative; at others, a concatenation of narratives. To lay hands on the thinking behind the montage effect of these texts, we must turn from the words to the silences between the words, understanding, to be sure,
Chapter 7 TEXT AND TIME AT THE COURT OF EUGENIUS III: from:
History as a Visual Art in the Twelfth-Century Renaissance
Abstract: Not all silences in the text were due to the author’s intent. Some were imposed by the deficiencies of the medium of language. The Kingdom of God and women were subjects to be included or excluded by choice. Time represents quite another category of omissions that existed by necessity. Yet, that necessity did not exist because, by thinking of events under the aspect of turning wheels—the Wheel of Fortune or Ezekiel’s concentric wheels of prophecy and fulfillment, advancing as they spun—authors negated time. Instead, the necessity existed because those metaphors, and similar ones, expressed assumptions about time and
5 IMAGINATION, FINITUDE, RESPONSIBILITY, IRONY: from:
The Life of Roman Republicanism
Abstract: Are the resources of premodern thought adequate to modernity? George Kateb argues that to understand the scale of modern horrors we must come to grips with the human imagination—specifically, the tremendous new capacity of the imagination of one or a few people to unleash itself on the world. Leaders construct society or law afresh in their minds with an energy that Kateb calls “hyperactive”; they go on to sway their followers to make the stuff of their imaginations real. In cases when change leads to atrocity, imagination is once again responsible—this time, the stunted imaginations of the followers,
5 IMAGINATION, FINITUDE, RESPONSIBILITY, IRONY: from:
The Life of Roman Republicanism
Abstract: Are the resources of premodern thought adequate to modernity? George Kateb argues that to understand the scale of modern horrors we must come to grips with the human imagination—specifically, the tremendous new capacity of the imagination of one or a few people to unleash itself on the world. Leaders construct society or law afresh in their minds with an energy that Kateb calls “hyperactive”; they go on to sway their followers to make the stuff of their imaginations real. In cases when change leads to atrocity, imagination is once again responsible—this time, the stunted imaginations of the followers,
Introduction: from:
What's Happened to the Humanities?
Author(s) KERNAN ALVIN
Abstract: Institutionally, in the standard academic table of organization, the university catalogue—the knowledge tree of contemporary western culture—the humanities are the subjects regularly listed under that heading: literature, philosophy, art history, music, religion, languages, and sometimes history. This branch of knowledge is separated from the branch of the social sciences and from the branch of the biological and physical sciences. These three branches together form the arts and sciences, or the liberal arts, as they are sometimes known, which are as a group separated in turn from the professional disciplines—such as medicine, education, business, and law—which, at
Two Funding Trends in the Academic Humanities, 1970–1995: from:
What's Happened to the Humanities?
Author(s) D’ARMS JOHN H.
Abstract: Who have been the patrons—the Maecenates and the Medici, the Pierpont Morgans and the Paul Mellons—of the humanities in this country’s leading universities and colleges during the past twenty-five years? What trends in patterns of financial support can be detected over time, and what vectors and forces can be identified as the principal drivers of change? A list of patrons with any pretension to completeness would include at least two agencies of the federal government; private philanthropic foundations large and small; a wide range of independent fellowship providers, including both residential centers and national research libraries; corporate sponsors;
Five Humanities and the Library in the Digital Age from:
What's Happened to the Humanities?
Author(s) HESSE CARLA
Abstract: The earliest evidence of library formation is a collection of Babylonian clay tablets from the twenty-first century B.C. But libraries have probably existed from the very moment humans began to make marks durable enough to be conserved. The fixing of significations in some durable material form made it possible for them to transcend the immediacy of experience, for them to be suspended above the flow of time in order to be revisited later, grouped and compared, reflected upon at greater length, or shared with people not immediately present. Inscription itself, of course, is not a mode of signification, but a
CHAPTER ELEVEN THE NEW LOCALISM from:
The Tale of the Tribe
Abstract: Olson so often attacked conventional notions of history as an impediment to man’s self-knowledge that critics like Donald Davie have been tempted to regard him as essentially antihistorical, as wanting to
substitutea geographical notion of “space” for any sense of temporal sequence and causality.² Yet Olson’s principal mentor in the “doctrine of the earth,”³ Carl Sauer, himself warned that “We cannot form an idea of landscape except in terms of its time relations as well as of its space relations,”⁴ and the entire thrust of Olson’s polemic is towards an integration ofchronosandgea, a perception, in Charles
THREE Symbol, Myth, and Interpretation from:
Symbol and Truth in Blake's Myth
Abstract: Thus far we have concentrated on the epistemological and psychological basis of Blake’s symbols. We shall now move toward an examination of the myth in which he organized them, and raise more directly the problem of interpretation in its dual form: Blake’s understanding of his symbols’ meaning, and the various kinds of understanding that modern readers bring to them. I propose to begin by considering some representative modern theories of symbolism, taking care at each point to note essential differences from Blake’s theory, but at the same time establishing perspectives that will help to illuminate the peculiar difficulties of his
THREE Symbol, Myth, and Interpretation from:
Symbol and Truth in Blake's Myth
Abstract: Thus far we have concentrated on the epistemological and psychological basis of Blake’s symbols. We shall now move toward an examination of the myth in which he organized them, and raise more directly the problem of interpretation in its dual form: Blake’s understanding of his symbols’ meaning, and the various kinds of understanding that modern readers bring to them. I propose to begin by considering some representative modern theories of symbolism, taking care at each point to note essential differences from Blake’s theory, but at the same time establishing perspectives that will help to illuminate the peculiar difficulties of his
THREE Symbol, Myth, and Interpretation from:
Symbol and Truth in Blake's Myth
Abstract: Thus far we have concentrated on the epistemological and psychological basis of Blake’s symbols. We shall now move toward an examination of the myth in which he organized them, and raise more directly the problem of interpretation in its dual form: Blake’s understanding of his symbols’ meaning, and the various kinds of understanding that modern readers bring to them. I propose to begin by considering some representative modern theories of symbolism, taking care at each point to note essential differences from Blake’s theory, but at the same time establishing perspectives that will help to illuminate the peculiar difficulties of his
THREE Symbol, Myth, and Interpretation from:
Symbol and Truth in Blake's Myth
Abstract: Thus far we have concentrated on the epistemological and psychological basis of Blake’s symbols. We shall now move toward an examination of the myth in which he organized them, and raise more directly the problem of interpretation in its dual form: Blake’s understanding of his symbols’ meaning, and the various kinds of understanding that modern readers bring to them. I propose to begin by considering some representative modern theories of symbolism, taking care at each point to note essential differences from Blake’s theory, but at the same time establishing perspectives that will help to illuminate the peculiar difficulties of his
Book Title: I Am You-The Hermeneutics of Empathy in Western Literature, Theology and Art
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Morrison Karl F.
Abstract: Important trends in contemporary intellectual life celebrate difference, divisiveness, and distinction. Speculative writing increasingly highlights "hermeneutic gaps" between human beings, their histories, and their hopes. In this book Karl Morrison identifies an alternative to this disruption. He explores for the first time the entire legacy of thought revolving around the challenging claim "I am you"--perhaps the most concise possible statement of bonding through empathy. Professor Morrison shows that the hope for thoroughgoing understanding and inclusion in another's world view is central to the West's moral/intellectual tradition. He maintains that the West may yet escape the fatal flaw of casting that hope in paradigms of sexual and aesthetic dominance--examples of empathetic participation inspired by hunger for power, as well as by love.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvm0c
THREE Amorous Sympathy: from:
I Am You
Abstract: Thus far, I have indicated some features of the strategy of proof that interpreters use to make the sense of the sentence “I am you.” I have used
Donne’s Meditation 17as the point of departure, and indicated that principles of human solidarity expressed there derived from a tradition that began in classical antiquity and that extended, with many changes, into modern times.
INTRODUCTION from:
I Am You
Abstract: A small clue can sometimes unfold into a great mystery. We began with a short declarative sentence, a concrete, but microscopic, artifact of Western culture. After unpacking the rather dense contents of its three monosyllables, we considered the patterns of understanding that made the sentence possible. Now, we have seen that those patterns are not the end of the trail. We have been dealing with a nest of puzzles, and only now are we able to approach its center. The patterns of understanding, including strategies of proof, are mediators of the sentence, not its source. We must go further to
SIX Rhetoric Swallowed up in Hermeneutic: from:
I Am You
Abstract: Anyone who reflects on the assimilation of alien symbols into early Christian thought can see that what the Fathers read in the pagan texts before them was quite different from the meanings that they read into those texts. Their approach to scriptural exegesis was often similar. The Fathers’ primary concern was not what Scripture said but what they thought it meant, and sometimes, more precisely, not what Scripture meant but what understanding Scripture meant. The subject of the present chapter is what understanding Scripture means; my title is taken from Todorov’s observation that Augustine changed the Western tradition of symbols
EPILOGUE ON DISCARDED ALTARPIECES from:
I Am You
Abstract: Almost at the very beginning of this book, we considered John Donne’s verses on the delight that painters take “not in made work, but whiles they make” (Chapter 3, n. 79). All that we have said locates the bonding of the “I” and the “you” in art in the creative act, but we have also seen that the creative act may occur, not once only, but many times. It may occur, as Donne wrote, when a painting is first made. Or it may occur repeatedly, as often as viewers imaginatively reexperience the creative instant when artist and painting both were
Book Title: I Am You-The Hermeneutics of Empathy in Western Literature, Theology and Art
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Morrison Karl F.
Abstract: Important trends in contemporary intellectual life celebrate difference, divisiveness, and distinction. Speculative writing increasingly highlights "hermeneutic gaps" between human beings, their histories, and their hopes. In this book Karl Morrison identifies an alternative to this disruption. He explores for the first time the entire legacy of thought revolving around the challenging claim "I am you"--perhaps the most concise possible statement of bonding through empathy. Professor Morrison shows that the hope for thoroughgoing understanding and inclusion in another's world view is central to the West's moral/intellectual tradition. He maintains that the West may yet escape the fatal flaw of casting that hope in paradigms of sexual and aesthetic dominance--examples of empathetic participation inspired by hunger for power, as well as by love.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvm0c
THREE Amorous Sympathy: from:
I Am You
Abstract: Thus far, I have indicated some features of the strategy of proof that interpreters use to make the sense of the sentence “I am you.” I have used
Donne’s Meditation 17as the point of departure, and indicated that principles of human solidarity expressed there derived from a tradition that began in classical antiquity and that extended, with many changes, into modern times.
INTRODUCTION from:
I Am You
Abstract: A small clue can sometimes unfold into a great mystery. We began with a short declarative sentence, a concrete, but microscopic, artifact of Western culture. After unpacking the rather dense contents of its three monosyllables, we considered the patterns of understanding that made the sentence possible. Now, we have seen that those patterns are not the end of the trail. We have been dealing with a nest of puzzles, and only now are we able to approach its center. The patterns of understanding, including strategies of proof, are mediators of the sentence, not its source. We must go further to
SIX Rhetoric Swallowed up in Hermeneutic: from:
I Am You
Abstract: Anyone who reflects on the assimilation of alien symbols into early Christian thought can see that what the Fathers read in the pagan texts before them was quite different from the meanings that they read into those texts. Their approach to scriptural exegesis was often similar. The Fathers’ primary concern was not what Scripture said but what they thought it meant, and sometimes, more precisely, not what Scripture meant but what understanding Scripture meant. The subject of the present chapter is what understanding Scripture means; my title is taken from Todorov’s observation that Augustine changed the Western tradition of symbols
EPILOGUE ON DISCARDED ALTARPIECES from:
I Am You
Abstract: Almost at the very beginning of this book, we considered John Donne’s verses on the delight that painters take “not in made work, but whiles they make” (Chapter 3, n. 79). All that we have said locates the bonding of the “I” and the “you” in art in the creative act, but we have also seen that the creative act may occur, not once only, but many times. It may occur, as Donne wrote, when a painting is first made. Or it may occur repeatedly, as often as viewers imaginatively reexperience the creative instant when artist and painting both were
INTRODUCTION from:
Neverending Stories
Author(s) Hoesterey Ingeborg
Abstract: The analysis of narrative technique in fiction has generally been considered something of a craft, practiced at times with painstaking descriptive precision and analytic power, and predominandy used in the service of interpretation. Narratology has often been mentioned in the same breath with structuralism, for both aspire to systematic comprehensiveness and attempt to identify and classify mechanisms and structures that generate, respectively, cultural and textual meaning. To be sure, “low structuralism” (as Robert Scholes was to call Genettean narratology) could not have matured in the sixties and seventies without the tradition of close textual analysis inaugurated by New Criticism.¹ Structuralist
ONE BETWEEN HISTORY AND FICTION: from:
Neverending Stories
Author(s) Pavel Thomas
Abstract: The distinction between history and fiction is once again stirring the interest of critics.¹ The question seemed settled in premodern times, when history was assumed to narrate the particular and poetry the general. True, until the nineteenth century, history was counted among the belles lettres, but that was a matter of stylistic kinship rather than of epistemological classification. Later, the practitioners of modern historiography became confident that their trade was more scientific than literary; therefore, the attempts to find new criteria for distinguishing history from poetry were welcomed. By then, fiction, or at least some of it, had ceased to
NINE IDENTITY BY METAPHORS: from:
Neverending Stories
Author(s) Neubauer John
Abstract: Once upon a time, fictional narrators freely dispensed moral, aesthetic, and philosophical insights for readers who readily attributed these to the authors. But Henry James, Virginia Woolf, James Joyce, and other modernist followers of Flaubert muzzled their narrators and dissociated themselves from the narrative voice.
THIRTEEN TELLING DIFFERENCES: from:
Neverending Stories
Author(s) Tatar Maria
Abstract: The juniper tree” has long been recognized as one of the most powerful of all fairy tales. Its widespread dissemination across the map of European folklore—one monograph identifies several hundred versions of the tale—suggests that there must be something especially attractive or at least compelling about the tale. That it remains popular today, though not necessarily as a bedtime story told by adults to children, means that it must speak to more than one age and generation. Even the brutal and bloody events enacted in the tale did not keep an expert like P. L. Travers from referring
4 SPEAKING THE PLAY: from:
The Language of Balinese Shadow Theater
Abstract: The purpose of the present chapter is to analyze the way a wayang play is spoken, examining the linguistic forms employed by the dalang.
Wayang parwais without doubt one of the most remarkable of Bali’s many modes of discourse, and each performance constitutes a unique text that cannot be adequately captured by any one medium of reproduction. Thus, at the same time that we concentrate on the purely verbal material of the shadow play in this discussion, we must keep in mind the continuous interweaving of musical accompaniment, the movement and visually oriented staging techniques, and the social and
Book Title: Fabricating History-English Writers on the French Revolution
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Friedman Barton R.
Abstract: At the same time, this work explores questions about narrative strategies, as they are shaped by, or shape, events. Narratives incorporate the ideological and metaphysical preconceptions that the authors bring with them to their writing. "This is not to argue," Professor Friedman says, "that historical narratives are only about the mind manufacturing them or, more narrowly yet, about themselves as mere linguistic constructs. They illumine both the time and place they seek to re-create and, if by indirection, the time and place of the mind thinking them into being."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvq6m
THREE Lives of Napoleon: from:
Fabricating History
Abstract: In the weakness of one kind of authority, and in the fluctuation of all, the officers of an army will remain for some time mutinous and full of faction, until some popular general, who understands the art of conciliating the soldiery, and who possesses the true spirit of command, shall draw the eyes of all men upon himself Armies will obey him on his personal account There is no other way of securing military obedience in this state of things But the moment in which that event
FOUR At the Conflux of Two Eternities: from:
Fabricating History
Abstract: Surveying the political and social condition of England in 1829, Carlyle finds it an alarming sign of the times that his countrymen are busy reading the signs of the times “They deal much in vaticination,” he claims in the essay he entitles “Signs of the Times”
(CME 2 56)Whatever he knew of Bicheno’s pamphlet,The Signs of the Times,or of the myriad other oracles, especially on the Revolution in France, it is no coincidence that Carlyle too lifted the title of his essay from Christ’s indictment (Matthew 16 2-4) of the Pharisees and Sadducees asking for a sign
5 Michael Dummett: from:
Central Works of Philosophy, Volume 5
Author(s) Weiss Bernhard
Abstract: Truth Other Enigmasis a collection of some of Michael Dummett's writings on truth and other enigmas. The other enigmas include: meaning and understanding, time and causation, the past, realism, logic, proof, vagueness and philosophy itself. The writings span a considerable portion of Dummett's career - the years 1953 to 1975 - and reflect his diverse concerns in that period. So it would be a to look for and wrong to impose a single theme that unifies the essays.However, two issues stand out as central, recurring as they do in many of the essays. One issue is the set of
6 Richard Rorty: from:
Central Works of Philosophy, Volume 5
Author(s) Malachowski Alan
Abstract: Richard Rorty's
Philosophy and the Mirror of Naturemay be viewed as a sustained meditation on the philosophical significance and consequences of these by Nietzsche. It is an iconoclastic book. But it is one that any person seriosuly interested in what philosophy is, how it came to be what it is and what it might eventually become should want to read, and re-read, whether or not disposed to agree with its controversial conclusions. In many ways, it is unique text. Certainly, no other book in recent times has launched such a detailed and extensive attack on the presuppositions and preoccupations
13 Charles Taylor: from:
Central Works of Philosophy, Volume 5
Author(s) Abbey Ruth
Abstract: Since its publication in 1989, Charles Taylor's
Sources of the Selfhas commanded much attention and generated considerable controversy. It has attracted lavish praise and fierce criticism - sometimes from the same commentator!¹ Yet when one considers its scope and ambition, it is not surprising thatSources of the Selfshould have elicited, and should continue to elicit, such a range of reactions. This chapter provides an overview of the book by outlining what Taylor was attempting to do inSources of the Self;what conception of the self it adduces; what the sources of the modern self are and
INTRODUCTION from:
Between Muslim and Jew
Abstract: The late Shlomo Dov (Fritz) Goitcin (1900–1985) characterized the central relationship of Jews with Muslims in the first centuries of Islam as one of “creative symbiosis.” This usage has been institutionalized in the study of Judeo-Arabica, and shows no immediate signs of being dislodged from its preeminence.¹ The concept
symbiosiswas first transposed from biology to the study of Jewish history by German Jewish intellectuals. Its most salient usage was in reference to their own cultural situation.² Alex Bein’s influential study, “Discourse on the Term ‘German-Jewish Symbiosis,’” appeared at that time, as an appendix to his essay (revealingly enough)
CHAPTER FIVE Origins and Angels: from:
Between Muslim and Jew
Abstract: A prophet, as a young child, attends school for the first time. The teacher prompts him, “Say
A!” to which the child-prophet responds “A.” The teacher then proceeds, “SayB!” to which the wise child answers, “Tell me the meaning ofAand I will tell youB!” The dumbfounded teacher faints. The child then recitcs the meaning of the entire alphabet, with a mystical meaning attached to each letter. The prophet-child’s knowledge is a priori to education.
Out of Context: from:
Modernist Anthropology
Author(s) STRATHERN MARILYN
Abstract: To talk about a scholar is also to talk about his or her ideas. But there is a puzzle in the history of ideas. Ideas seem to have the capacity to appear at all sorts of times and places, to such a degree that we can consider them as being before their time or out of date. One of the things I learned
Anthropology and Modernism in France: from:
Modernist Anthropology
Author(s) RICHMAN MICHÈLE
Abstract: In 1937, a group of writers, intellectuals, and university professors met as a “Collège de sociologie” to discuss a common interest in what their conveners, Georges Bataille, Roger Caillois, and Michel Leiris termed a “sacred sociology.” According to the Declaration issued at the time of their initial reunions, the goals of this essentially intellectual activity were the following: (1) to investigate the nature of social structures in such a way as to complete the overly cautious conclusions of scientific investigations. Usually restricted to the so-called primitive societies, social anthropology tends to be reticent when it comes to transferring its findings
Book Title: The Writer Writing-Philosophic Acts in Literature
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Thomas Francis-Noël
Abstract: In an age of authorless, contextless, deconstructed texts, Francis-Noël Thomas argues that it is time to re-examine a fundamental but neglected concept of literature: writing is an action whose agent is an individual. Addressing both general readers and scholars, Thomas offers two cases, Bernard Shaw's
Saint Joanand Marcel Proust'sA la recherche du temps perdu, read against the background of the authors' large, eccentric, and surprisingly similar claims about their texts as acts. He examines what happens when we take these claims seriously enough to find out why the authors made them in the first place and what bearing they have on the texts themselves.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvvd9
Four Conrad: from:
The Semantics of Desire
Abstract: The collapse of human structures, when subjected to unremitting natural forces, troubles Conrad’s imagination more than it does Hardy’s. Despite the bleakness of Hardy’s outlook—his view of life as an inherently unsanctioned process, an empty sequence of happenstances—he retained an enabling attachment (however complicated) to his native Dorset countryside. He absorbed its legends, its history, its customs, its landscape; and these absorptions may account for the modulated tone of even his darkest utterances. He is not surprised, his tone keeps repeating, because what is human history if not the immemorial story of expectation drained dry by time’s passage?
Five “Become Who You Are”: from:
The Semantics of Desire
Abstract: “God is the flame-life in all the universe; multifarious, multifarious flames. . . . Whichever flame flames in your manhood, that is you, for the time being” (“The Novel,” 426). Lawrence seeks to center identity on flame-life (he even sees the surrounding world of matter, the sun and the moon, as derived from flame-life),¹ and the goal of the Lawrentian protagonist is as simple as it is elusive: to achieve the mobile flame-life of pure being. In each of his novels, in the course of his life, the struggle to center takes different forms, but it remains recognizably the same:
Chapter Seven Eeldrop and Appleplex: from:
Modernist Poetics of History
Abstract: Eliot first came to visit Pound in the triangular study of his Kensington apartment in the Autumn of 1914, and Pound immediately sent “The Love Song of J. Alfred Prufrock” to Harriet Monroe, calling it “the best poem I have yet had or seen from an American” (L, 40). At the same time, Eliot wrote to Conrad Aiken that he found Pound’s verse “touchingly incompetent.”¹ This opinion would change. Eliot went up to Oxford, completed his dissertation on the philosophy of F. H. Bradley, married Vivienne Haigh-Wood, suffered, moved back to London, and began working at Lloyds Bank in 1917.
6 An Ethics of Measure: from:
Existentialist Thinkers and Ethics
Author(s) KNEE PHILIP
Abstract: Despite Camus’ refusal to be labelled an existentialist, his early thought in
The OutsiderandThe Myth of Sisyphusis sometimes seen as an example of existentialism’s incapacity to avoid ethical nihilism. Rather than discussing (once again) the accuracy of such judgments, I want to offer some reflections on the positive ethics Camus provided a few years later inThe Rebel. To do this, I will compare it with certain aspects of Rousseau’s thought, however paradoxical this comparison may at first appear.
7 Exploring Transdisciplinarity from:
Transdisciplinarity
Author(s) Macdonald Roderick
Abstract: One of the crucial activities in any transdisciplinary endeavor is the process of clarifying assumptions, recognizing commonalities and differences, and formulating a working agreement in order to achieve a particular goal. Our assigned goal was to generate a definition of transdisciplinarity. The working group divided its time into three phases: initial exploratory discussion, a more focused effort to create a single definition, and preparation of an oral report to the colloquium.
Afterword from:
Transdisciplinarity
Author(s) Rapport David J
Abstract: We leave this text, in a metaphysical sense, in mid-sentence. But this is appropriate. It will be for many others to write the next paragraphs, chapters, and books in the evolution of transdisciplinarity. Transdisciplinarity is a dynamic process, not a static event, and it is one which will continue to need increasingly deep, broad, and diverse contributions. Transdisciplinarity is an idea whose time has come and one whose time will remain.
2 Critical Interventions from:
Barbarous Dissonance and Images of Voice in Milton's Epics
Abstract: Religious crises, political upheaval and decentralization, economic changes, social and scientific discoveries, and print-capitalism contributed to the development of a national consciousness and the formation of a social dynamic based on boundary-oriented and horizontal communities in Western Europe during the Renaissance.¹ The restructuring of the centripetally and hierarchically organized state accompanying the development of the new imagined community challenged the reign of the dominant language that provided “privileged access to onto logical truth” (Anderson 40). Bakhtin claims that the changes in European civilization at this time resulted in Europe’s emergence from a “socially and culturally deaf semi-patriarchal society” into one
3 “I now must change Those notes to Tragic”: from:
Barbarous Dissonance and Images of Voice in Milton's Epics
Abstract: The act of narrating the Genesis story is constantly frustrated; even the angelic historian finds the task daunting:“Immediate are the Acts of God, more swift / Than time or motion, but to human ears / Cannot without process of speech be told” (7.176—8). As the subject of a critical and self-conscious text, the original account of earth’s creation is fragmented;¹ and because the account competes with creation stories presented by the different characters in the poem, it is also decentred. The official historical and epic narratives are constantly intercepted by the multiple narrators in
Paradise Lost, who all create
10 CONCLUSION: from:
In Search of Elegance
Abstract: Harnessing the phenomenological method of inquiry, the theory undertakes to answer the first question by defining the architectural artefact: it is a physical object, time and
4 Literary Studies, Cultural Studies: from:
Living Prism
Abstract: Admittedly, my title dramatizes the tension that has been observed for some time between “literary” and “cultural” studies. A state of tension is not necessarily negative, but it does signal a need for attention. In this case it requires that special thought be given to the present and future orientation of comparative literature studies since the outcome may have profound repercussions upon this field of endeavour, from both an intellectual and a professional viewpoint.
8 From “Time Lost” to “Time Regained” in Literary History from:
Living Prism
Abstract: The Proustian origin of this title requires no explanation. It expresses a set of creative tensions: the time that is lost is that of life lived and spent in the instant – raw, yet infinitely rich and complex material for retrieval in memory. To live is forever to transform experience into memory; and even this statement oversimplifies, inasmuch as memory re-enters experience and adds to the given that is to be transformed. Proust’s characters reawaken, through reminiscence nourished by insistent sensorial signals, time, or life, that is past:
15 History and the Absent Self from:
Living Prism
Abstract: Despite the fact that collective identities (whether in terms of gender or culture or ethnicity) claim to exist, and to have the right to exist for the sake of the development of the individual self, that claim is often little more than window-dressing. Yet what can one hope to accomplish by showing that the subject of the subject has received insufficient attention or the wrong kind of attention? Even if it were only clarification, it would be time well spent. But humanists have more at stake in this questioning than just clear categories because it matters supremely – without any play
17 The Renewed Meaning of the Renaissance Dialogue from:
Living Prism
Abstract: To work in the humanities, particularly in early modern studies, forces upon us a double sense of time: on the one hand, all documents and monuments from even the most distant past, at least those that have been stored, preserved, printed, discovered, reclaimed, are at our disposal in a kind of eternal present, and we feel a kinship with all these creations of human imagination; on the other, when we attempt to make them our own, we very quickly discover the immensity of distance to be bridged and that, in order to exist in history, the phenomena of the past
18 Erasmus and the Paradox of Subjectivity from:
Living Prism
Abstract: What is paradoxical about subjectivity, and how does this question relate to the thought of Erasmus? As a philosophical issue the problematic of subjectivity is very present in our time: undeniably the struggles of the postmodern self help to ignite inquiries into the early modern past of this rich and elusive concept, paradoxical or so regarded inasmuch as (according to philosophies, and often within the same philosophy) the self both is and is not its own origin. While Renaissance humanism promoted and privileged the perfecting of the human person as a cherished ideal, it did not often envisage that self
19 In Search of the Obverse Side of Petrarchism from:
Living Prism
Abstract: The search I wish to describe is not directed, as the title might suggest, towards the anti-Petrarchan tradition, which has been a rich source of obverse images of the idealized Other – usually woman – so characteristic of Petrarchism itself. Where Petrarch and his followers idealize and even worship, anti-Petrarchism levels, satirizes, and ridicules. Where Petrarch and his followers create a myth, anti-Petrarchism demythologizes and demystifies. It is a trend that its idealistic counterpart almost seems to demand, and their duality seems omnipresent in European literature as part of the even more basic duality between idealistic and realistic traditions from classical times
4 Literary Studies, Cultural Studies: from:
Living Prism
Abstract: Admittedly, my title dramatizes the tension that has been observed for some time between “literary” and “cultural” studies. A state of tension is not necessarily negative, but it does signal a need for attention. In this case it requires that special thought be given to the present and future orientation of comparative literature studies since the outcome may have profound repercussions upon this field of endeavour, from both an intellectual and a professional viewpoint.
8 From “Time Lost” to “Time Regained” in Literary History from:
Living Prism
Abstract: The Proustian origin of this title requires no explanation. It expresses a set of creative tensions: the time that is lost is that of life lived and spent in the instant – raw, yet infinitely rich and complex material for retrieval in memory. To live is forever to transform experience into memory; and even this statement oversimplifies, inasmuch as memory re-enters experience and adds to the given that is to be transformed. Proust’s characters reawaken, through reminiscence nourished by insistent sensorial signals, time, or life, that is past:
15 History and the Absent Self from:
Living Prism
Abstract: Despite the fact that collective identities (whether in terms of gender or culture or ethnicity) claim to exist, and to have the right to exist for the sake of the development of the individual self, that claim is often little more than window-dressing. Yet what can one hope to accomplish by showing that the subject of the subject has received insufficient attention or the wrong kind of attention? Even if it were only clarification, it would be time well spent. But humanists have more at stake in this questioning than just clear categories because it matters supremely – without any play
17 The Renewed Meaning of the Renaissance Dialogue from:
Living Prism
Abstract: To work in the humanities, particularly in early modern studies, forces upon us a double sense of time: on the one hand, all documents and monuments from even the most distant past, at least those that have been stored, preserved, printed, discovered, reclaimed, are at our disposal in a kind of eternal present, and we feel a kinship with all these creations of human imagination; on the other, when we attempt to make them our own, we very quickly discover the immensity of distance to be bridged and that, in order to exist in history, the phenomena of the past
18 Erasmus and the Paradox of Subjectivity from:
Living Prism
Abstract: What is paradoxical about subjectivity, and how does this question relate to the thought of Erasmus? As a philosophical issue the problematic of subjectivity is very present in our time: undeniably the struggles of the postmodern self help to ignite inquiries into the early modern past of this rich and elusive concept, paradoxical or so regarded inasmuch as (according to philosophies, and often within the same philosophy) the self both is and is not its own origin. While Renaissance humanism promoted and privileged the perfecting of the human person as a cherished ideal, it did not often envisage that self
19 In Search of the Obverse Side of Petrarchism from:
Living Prism
Abstract: The search I wish to describe is not directed, as the title might suggest, towards the anti-Petrarchan tradition, which has been a rich source of obverse images of the idealized Other – usually woman – so characteristic of Petrarchism itself. Where Petrarch and his followers idealize and even worship, anti-Petrarchism levels, satirizes, and ridicules. Where Petrarch and his followers create a myth, anti-Petrarchism demythologizes and demystifies. It is a trend that its idealistic counterpart almost seems to demand, and their duality seems omnipresent in European literature as part of the even more basic duality between idealistic and realistic traditions from classical times
4 Literary Studies, Cultural Studies: from:
Living Prism
Abstract: Admittedly, my title dramatizes the tension that has been observed for some time between “literary” and “cultural” studies. A state of tension is not necessarily negative, but it does signal a need for attention. In this case it requires that special thought be given to the present and future orientation of comparative literature studies since the outcome may have profound repercussions upon this field of endeavour, from both an intellectual and a professional viewpoint.
8 From “Time Lost” to “Time Regained” in Literary History from:
Living Prism
Abstract: The Proustian origin of this title requires no explanation. It expresses a set of creative tensions: the time that is lost is that of life lived and spent in the instant – raw, yet infinitely rich and complex material for retrieval in memory. To live is forever to transform experience into memory; and even this statement oversimplifies, inasmuch as memory re-enters experience and adds to the given that is to be transformed. Proust’s characters reawaken, through reminiscence nourished by insistent sensorial signals, time, or life, that is past:
15 History and the Absent Self from:
Living Prism
Abstract: Despite the fact that collective identities (whether in terms of gender or culture or ethnicity) claim to exist, and to have the right to exist for the sake of the development of the individual self, that claim is often little more than window-dressing. Yet what can one hope to accomplish by showing that the subject of the subject has received insufficient attention or the wrong kind of attention? Even if it were only clarification, it would be time well spent. But humanists have more at stake in this questioning than just clear categories because it matters supremely – without any play
17 The Renewed Meaning of the Renaissance Dialogue from:
Living Prism
Abstract: To work in the humanities, particularly in early modern studies, forces upon us a double sense of time: on the one hand, all documents and monuments from even the most distant past, at least those that have been stored, preserved, printed, discovered, reclaimed, are at our disposal in a kind of eternal present, and we feel a kinship with all these creations of human imagination; on the other, when we attempt to make them our own, we very quickly discover the immensity of distance to be bridged and that, in order to exist in history, the phenomena of the past
18 Erasmus and the Paradox of Subjectivity from:
Living Prism
Abstract: What is paradoxical about subjectivity, and how does this question relate to the thought of Erasmus? As a philosophical issue the problematic of subjectivity is very present in our time: undeniably the struggles of the postmodern self help to ignite inquiries into the early modern past of this rich and elusive concept, paradoxical or so regarded inasmuch as (according to philosophies, and often within the same philosophy) the self both is and is not its own origin. While Renaissance humanism promoted and privileged the perfecting of the human person as a cherished ideal, it did not often envisage that self
19 In Search of the Obverse Side of Petrarchism from:
Living Prism
Abstract: The search I wish to describe is not directed, as the title might suggest, towards the anti-Petrarchan tradition, which has been a rich source of obverse images of the idealized Other – usually woman – so characteristic of Petrarchism itself. Where Petrarch and his followers idealize and even worship, anti-Petrarchism levels, satirizes, and ridicules. Where Petrarch and his followers create a myth, anti-Petrarchism demythologizes and demystifies. It is a trend that its idealistic counterpart almost seems to demand, and their duality seems omnipresent in European literature as part of the even more basic duality between idealistic and realistic traditions from classical times
2 Leonard Cohen: from:
From Cohen to Carson
Abstract: Before Leonard Cohen achieved international acclaim with “Suzanne” on
The Songs of Leonard Cohen(1967 ), before he shocked the Canadian literary establishment with the pornographic novelBeautiful Losers(1966 ), even before he seduced poetry fans with his popular collection of lyrics,The Spice-Box of Earth(1961), he was interested in the visual arts.² His most meticulous biographer, Ira Nadel, observes that in “the 1951 Westmount High School Yearbook, Cohen lists photography as his hobby,” and for a short period of time Cohen operated The Four Penny Art Gallery in Montreal in cooperation with the painter Mort Rosengarten (the
2 Leonard Cohen: from:
From Cohen to Carson
Abstract: Before Leonard Cohen achieved international acclaim with “Suzanne” on
The Songs of Leonard Cohen(1967 ), before he shocked the Canadian literary establishment with the pornographic novelBeautiful Losers(1966 ), even before he seduced poetry fans with his popular collection of lyrics,The Spice-Box of Earth(1961), he was interested in the visual arts.² His most meticulous biographer, Ira Nadel, observes that in “the 1951 Westmount High School Yearbook, Cohen lists photography as his hobby,” and for a short period of time Cohen operated The Four Penny Art Gallery in Montreal in cooperation with the painter Mort Rosengarten (the
Section 4 The Time of the Between from:
Distant Relation
Abstract: Perhaps the time will never arrive when our common manner of speaking reflects a disavowal of the voice as the repository of being. And perhaps this refusal signifies, above all else, the unyielding reign of ontology. However, there are reasons to believe this regime is being challenged by discourses that desimplify traditional exigencies and propel thought in the direction of the unthinkable - that disturbing situation in which, or because of which, identity can no longer approach within the confines of a beyond accessible through language. While I cannot cling to any hard and fast conclusions here, it is nonetheless
1 Political Philosophies and Political Ideologies from:
Patriotic Elaborations
Abstract: I want to proffer a schema. I’m going to present, one at a time, four contemporary political philosophies – I call them neutralism, postmodernism, pluralism, and patriotism¹ – and then show how they relate to political ideologies, such as liberalism, conservatism, socialism, feminism, green ideology, nationalism, fascism, and so on. This will involve more than just advancing a particular typology, however, for in so doing I shall also be putting forth an argument: namely that, given a proper understanding of the relation between philosophy and ideology, postmodernism is superior to neutralism, pluralism to postmodernism, and patriotism to pluralism, making the patriot’s approach
4 Secular Nationhood? from:
Patriotic Elaborations
Abstract: Scholars of nationhood have neglected the artists. It is not that they have failed to recognize the sometimes essential role of national artists; rather, it is that they have not given them their due
quaartists, by which I mean as individuals who engage in a specifically creative process. I want to claim that among the prime sources of both the origins and persistence of nations and nationalism has been an aesthetically contingent one: if not for artists having been inspired to create nations, there would be none, and if not for nations’ continual receptivity to their artists’ creations, an
1 Political Philosophies and Political Ideologies from:
Patriotic Elaborations
Abstract: I want to proffer a schema. I’m going to present, one at a time, four contemporary political philosophies – I call them neutralism, postmodernism, pluralism, and patriotism¹ – and then show how they relate to political ideologies, such as liberalism, conservatism, socialism, feminism, green ideology, nationalism, fascism, and so on. This will involve more than just advancing a particular typology, however, for in so doing I shall also be putting forth an argument: namely that, given a proper understanding of the relation between philosophy and ideology, postmodernism is superior to neutralism, pluralism to postmodernism, and patriotism to pluralism, making the patriot’s approach
4 Secular Nationhood? from:
Patriotic Elaborations
Abstract: Scholars of nationhood have neglected the artists. It is not that they have failed to recognize the sometimes essential role of national artists; rather, it is that they have not given them their due
quaartists, by which I mean as individuals who engage in a specifically creative process. I want to claim that among the prime sources of both the origins and persistence of nations and nationalism has been an aesthetically contingent one: if not for artists having been inspired to create nations, there would be none, and if not for nations’ continual receptivity to their artists’ creations, an
1 Political Philosophies and Political Ideologies from:
Patriotic Elaborations
Abstract: I want to proffer a schema. I’m going to present, one at a time, four contemporary political philosophies – I call them neutralism, postmodernism, pluralism, and patriotism¹ – and then show how they relate to political ideologies, such as liberalism, conservatism, socialism, feminism, green ideology, nationalism, fascism, and so on. This will involve more than just advancing a particular typology, however, for in so doing I shall also be putting forth an argument: namely that, given a proper understanding of the relation between philosophy and ideology, postmodernism is superior to neutralism, pluralism to postmodernism, and patriotism to pluralism, making the patriot’s approach
4 Secular Nationhood? from:
Patriotic Elaborations
Abstract: Scholars of nationhood have neglected the artists. It is not that they have failed to recognize the sometimes essential role of national artists; rather, it is that they have not given them their due
quaartists, by which I mean as individuals who engage in a specifically creative process. I want to claim that among the prime sources of both the origins and persistence of nations and nationalism has been an aesthetically contingent one: if not for artists having been inspired to create nations, there would be none, and if not for nations’ continual receptivity to their artists’ creations, an
3 The Kingston Years (1971–present) from:
Istvan Anhalt
Author(s) SMITH GORDON E.
Abstract: The pathway that led Istvan Anhalt from McGill to Queen’s appeared only after much reflection. As seen in chapter 2, Anhalt’s decision to leave his full-time professorship at McGill University for Queen’s in 1971 did not come easily. He had worked at McGill since his arrival in Canada in 1949 with good results, building up the theory and composition department, establishing the Electronic Music Studio, and forming his reputation as a teacher and a composer. Over the twenty-two year period in Montreal, Anhalt had also found a stimulating circle of colleagues and friends, both English and French speaking. As an
14 From “Mirage” to Simulacrum and “Afterthought” from:
Istvan Anhalt
Abstract: But first, the question of where to start. Where should the story begin? Where does
anythingbegin? Now, the answer that comes to mind to the last question is that it depends, of course, on the perspective. It hinges on how far one is prepared to go back in time, which in turn
15 Three Songs of Love from:
Istvan Anhalt
Abstract: There are two versions of this piece for women’s choir: the first was written as an a cappella work, in 1951 in Montreal; the other, with two added wind instruments (flute, clarinet), in 1997 in Kingston. The sentiment and thought behind it, however, go back to the year 1941. Its contents were also influenced by events and conditions that occurred in my life in 1951–52, and after a long hiatus, in the mid-1990s.
17 Millennial Mall (Lady Diotima’s Walk): from:
Istvan Anhalt
Abstract: Finally here … I’m late … came from a distance … My name … Lady Diotima – Diotima for short … At one time I was called “Diotima the sorceress,” but I never cared for that tag. Others remembered me as the noted courtesan, a friend of the wise … Oh love! They treated me with respect when it came to this theme … They also listened raptly when I discoursed about ambivalence … about feeling to be
ina thing andoutof itat one and the same time. Take, for example, this mall, which we are about
With the “Nightwatchman of Greek Philosophy”: from:
Nietzsche and the Rhetoric of Nihilism
Author(s) Hutter Horst
Abstract: In the immense secondary literature on Nietzsche relatively little attention seems to have been paid to the influence of kynic motives and ideas on both the form and substance of his philosophy. This is the case despite the fact that Nietzsche explicitly associated himself with Kynism¹ in a number of aphorisms,² while at the same time adopting the literary style,³ the manner of philosophizing, as well as important concepts and figures⁴ of this school of antiquity. A close examination of the main philosophical project of Nietzsche, the transvaluation of values, moreover, reveals his kinship with the intention of Kynism to
Democracy with Justice: from:
Democracy with Justice/La juste democratie
Author(s) Tanguay A. Brian
Abstract: Members of the political science community in Canada were saddened to hear of the sudden death of one of their most respected colleagues, Khayyam Zev Paltiel, on April 17, 1988. For those of us who had spent some time at Carleton University, either as students or as teachers, and who came to know Khayyam, the loss was particularly painful. Many of us in the Political Science department at Carleton had unthinkingly assumed that there would always be a Khayyam Paltiel wandering the corridors of the sixth floor in the Loeb Building, a copy of the
Globe and Mailor the
The Life and Times of K.Z. Paltiel from:
Democracy with Justice/La juste democratie
Author(s) Paltiel Jeremy
Abstract: My father, K.Z. Paltiel, was born into a well-to-do family in the Jewish neighbourhood of Montreal on March 16, 1922. This was the same neighbourhood evoked by the poet A.M. Klein and later satirized by Richler. His father, Aaron David, who immigrated from Romania just before the turn of the century, had started off as a dry-goods merchant in Northern Ontario in Porcupine and North Bay, but settled down in Montreal around the time of the First World War and built up a successful business as a real estate developer and property manager. His mother, Bella Ruth, was a much
Khayyam Paltiel: from:
Democracy with Justice/La juste democratie
Author(s) McFarlane Bruce
Abstract: I first met Khayyam Paltiel 50 years ago. We had both recently graduated from high school in Montreal, and in the unsettled period of 1939 and early 1940, we were both uncertain about what to do or where to go. This was a period when our fellow high school graduates were joining the RCAF as air-crew trainees, or the army and the RCN as officers, but at that time, as my Member of Parliament informed me in a letter after a discussion with the Minister, these paths were closed to all of those with non-Caucasian background, including Jews. Hence, it
Sustainable Development and the Challenges Facing Canadian Environmental Groups in the 1990s from:
Democracy with Justice/La juste democratie
Author(s) Conway Thomas
Abstract: The existence of an increased level of environmental consciousness, of the kind experienced in the 1980s, will create new opportunities for change. However, this situation in itself does not prefigure what the outcomes of that change will look like. Relations with our environment will not be set once and for all or encapsulated in one big “action plan,” but will arise out of much trial and error, changed individual behaviour, political dispute and compromise, and diverse policy initiatives developed over time and unique to specific circumstances.
Khayyam Zev Paltiel and Theories of Public Financing from:
Democracy with Justice/La juste democratie
Author(s) Alexander Herbert E.
Abstract: Khayyam Zev Paltiel was a Renaissance man. The breadth of his knowledge, the depth of his understanding, the height of his wisdom, the frequency of his insights, all attest to a unique human being with great talent and vision. Colleagues, students, friends, family, all learned from him on innumerable subjects. His range of concerns is manifest from the panel discussions listed for this conference. The overarching theme of “Democracy with Justice” is most appropriate because it informed all of Khayyam’s thinking processes and his concerns. One remembers fondly his originality, his wit, his deep laughter, at times his outrage at
The Dysfunctions of Canadian Parties: from:
Democracy with Justice/La juste democratie
Author(s) Meisel John
Abstract: The study of political parties, like that of other subjects, is from time to time jolted by the appearance of seminal works so enriching and transforming the art that they elevate it to a new plateau. The books by Ostrogorski (1902), Michels (1915), Key (1942), Schattschneider (1942), Duverger (1954), McKenzie (1955), Eldersveld (1964), and Sartori (1976), among others, comprise such milestones on our road to the mastery of the party phenomenon. A potentially similar formative flashpoint burst on the scene in 1949, when R.K. Merton’s “Manifest and Latent Functions” (a revision of an earlier paper) appeared in the first edition
Selective Annotated Bibliography: from:
Democracy with Justice/La juste democratie
Author(s) Haire Jeff Allan
Abstract: From a very early time in his academic career Paltiel was concerned with the inequalities that party and campaign financing introduced into the Canadian political system. Paltiel was critical of the ever-growing distance between the supposed democratic principles of the system and the vast differences in group power and influence that characterized the environment in which party and campaign financing operated. This article is typical not
AFTERWORD from:
Mind in Creation
Author(s) WOODMAN ROSS G.
Abstract: When, in the early 1950s, I began working on Shelley, among the models I used was Dante’s notion of four levels in his
Convivioby which, in Shelley’s words, he “feigns himself to have ascended to the throne of the Supreme Cause.”¹ To feign oneself meant to me at the time in some sense to fool oneself. Shelley, I knew, did not believe in a Supreme Cause. He was, as C.E. Pulos has demonstrated, sufficiently a Humean sceptic to question the very idea of causality, finding the only empirical evidence for it in the associational workings of the human mind.²
6 The Function of Poetry: from:
The Modern Dilemma
Abstract: A middle position between orthodox religious belief and the secular Humanism that Russell preached can be found in the now largely forgotten “pure poetry” movement, which had its brief
floruitat about the same time that Marianne Moore’sSelected Poemsand Stevens’Ideas of Orderwere published. Because it has had little influence on the practice or the reception of poetry in English, it has not attracted much attention in English and American literary studies. Nonetheless, Stevens scholars have taken due notice of Stevens’ declaration on the dust jacket for the second edition ofIdeas of Order(Knopf 1936) that it
Alberti at Sea from:
Chora 4
Author(s) Emerson Michael
Abstract: The sea is traditionally the site for a wide range of practical, theoretical, and ethical investigations concerning motion and constructive spatial practices. The manner of their collation, like the sea itself, is not fixed and responds to time and place. Three nautical terms – water, navigation, ship – are the shifting objects of this essay’s investigation of spatial practice and fluidity in the early Renaissance works of Leon Battista Alberti (1404–72). This investigation poses the following questions: what sort of place was Alberti’s sea? what traditions informed his aquatic investigations? and what were the difficulties of constructive, spatial engagement
Alberti at Sea from:
Chora 4
Author(s) Emerson Michael
Abstract: The sea is traditionally the site for a wide range of practical, theoretical, and ethical investigations concerning motion and constructive spatial practices. The manner of their collation, like the sea itself, is not fixed and responds to time and place. Three nautical terms – water, navigation, ship – are the shifting objects of this essay’s investigation of spatial practice and fluidity in the early Renaissance works of Leon Battista Alberti (1404–72). This investigation poses the following questions: what sort of place was Alberti’s sea? what traditions informed his aquatic investigations? and what were the difficulties of constructive, spatial engagement
Of Cows and Configurations in Emily Carr’s The Book of Small from:
Tropes and Territories
Author(s) DVOŘÁK MARTA
Abstract: A cow yard with a cud-chewing red-and-white song-loving cow. Clothes that live in a camphor-wood chest which has sailed from England round the Horn. Horse-drawn carriages, chamber pots, flour barrels in the pantry and wooden tubs in the kitchen. Bear coats and brick houses. Oil lamps, ox teams, pie socials, and sleighs. Stiff Sunday clothes, fox farms, screened porches, and gramophones. Hot chocolate poured out of pink-and-white china pots in velvet-draped hotel tearooms. Chronotopic spaces in which time thickens (Bakhtin, 84) and takes on texture, made tangible by homely, quotidian objects drenched in history. Time spaces refigured by modernist and
Reading Linnet Muir, Netta Asher, and Carol Frazier: from:
Tropes and Territories
Author(s) BESNER NEIL
Abstract: Of what possible significance can it be to remember, in the first person, and then record, with the kind of assured and confident certainty that characters in Gallant’s stories most often misuse or misapprehend, that the first time I read a Mavis Gallant story was at the beginning of the summer of 1980, sitting on a short bench under a small window? It was a bright and sunny day, in the early afternoon, on the fourth floor of Buchanan Tower on the UBC campus in Vancouver, just outside of Bill New’s office. While I was waiting to talk to him,
Of Cows and Configurations in Emily Carr’s The Book of Small from:
Tropes and Territories
Author(s) DVOŘÁK MARTA
Abstract: A cow yard with a cud-chewing red-and-white song-loving cow. Clothes that live in a camphor-wood chest which has sailed from England round the Horn. Horse-drawn carriages, chamber pots, flour barrels in the pantry and wooden tubs in the kitchen. Bear coats and brick houses. Oil lamps, ox teams, pie socials, and sleighs. Stiff Sunday clothes, fox farms, screened porches, and gramophones. Hot chocolate poured out of pink-and-white china pots in velvet-draped hotel tearooms. Chronotopic spaces in which time thickens (Bakhtin, 84) and takes on texture, made tangible by homely, quotidian objects drenched in history. Time spaces refigured by modernist and
Reading Linnet Muir, Netta Asher, and Carol Frazier: from:
Tropes and Territories
Author(s) BESNER NEIL
Abstract: Of what possible significance can it be to remember, in the first person, and then record, with the kind of assured and confident certainty that characters in Gallant’s stories most often misuse or misapprehend, that the first time I read a Mavis Gallant story was at the beginning of the summer of 1980, sitting on a short bench under a small window? It was a bright and sunny day, in the early afternoon, on the fourth floor of Buchanan Tower on the UBC campus in Vancouver, just outside of Bill New’s office. While I was waiting to talk to him,
Of Cows and Configurations in Emily Carr’s The Book of Small from:
Tropes and Territories
Author(s) DVOŘÁK MARTA
Abstract: A cow yard with a cud-chewing red-and-white song-loving cow. Clothes that live in a camphor-wood chest which has sailed from England round the Horn. Horse-drawn carriages, chamber pots, flour barrels in the pantry and wooden tubs in the kitchen. Bear coats and brick houses. Oil lamps, ox teams, pie socials, and sleighs. Stiff Sunday clothes, fox farms, screened porches, and gramophones. Hot chocolate poured out of pink-and-white china pots in velvet-draped hotel tearooms. Chronotopic spaces in which time thickens (Bakhtin, 84) and takes on texture, made tangible by homely, quotidian objects drenched in history. Time spaces refigured by modernist and
Reading Linnet Muir, Netta Asher, and Carol Frazier: from:
Tropes and Territories
Author(s) BESNER NEIL
Abstract: Of what possible significance can it be to remember, in the first person, and then record, with the kind of assured and confident certainty that characters in Gallant’s stories most often misuse or misapprehend, that the first time I read a Mavis Gallant story was at the beginning of the summer of 1980, sitting on a short bench under a small window? It was a bright and sunny day, in the early afternoon, on the fourth floor of Buchanan Tower on the UBC campus in Vancouver, just outside of Bill New’s office. While I was waiting to talk to him,
Demas: from:
Chora 3
Author(s) Karvouni Maria
Abstract: NAMES, ACCORDING TO PLATO, ARE INSTRUMENTS that help us distinguish and teach the essence of things.¹ With a similar notion in mind, many of us architects wonder from time to time about the meaning and origins of our architectural expressions. Tracing back terms to their origins offers a way to reach an initial, and perhaps authentic, state of things, to rediscover threads of continuity and to reaffirm their importance. Words such as “architect,” “architecture,” “tectonics,” “technology,” “technic,” “dome,” and “domicile” are among many architectural terms of Greek origin. Among all these technical terms one can also find the oldest (known)
Juan Bautista Villalpando’s Divine Model in Architectural Theory from:
Chora 3
Author(s) Pérez-Gómez Alberto
Abstract: THE BIBLICAL DESCRIPTION of the Temple of Solomon in Jerusalem has generated many diverse architectural speculations throughout our history. According to tradition, the Temple followed the designs of God and therefore could be interpreted as the archetypal work of architecture - a work that revealed a true order beyond the whimsical tastes of man and any temporal expressions of political power. In diverse times and cultures, mythical accounts of technological making and building demonstrated mankind’s keen awareness of the problems involved in transforming a given “sacred” world for the sake of survival. In the Christian tradition the Temple of Solomon
Origins and Ornaments: from:
Chora 3
Author(s) Trubiano Franca
Abstract: JEAN-JACQUES LEQUEU was a most meticulous and gifted architectural draughtsman. The briefest glance at any one of the hundreds of plates given in bequest to the Bibliothèque Royale will bear witness to his great skill. During a lifetime dedicated to the representation of architecture and its historical allegories, ornamental drawings were Lequeu’s principal means of expression. Many scholars have come to see, in the eyes and hands of this late-eighteenth/early-nineteenth-century
dessinateur,the profile of the modern architectural technician. His adoption of descriptive geometry for drawing the human head and his overly exacting and analytical precision undoubtedly have contributed to this
3 Humphries as Poet, Poet Taster, Lyricist, and Comic Singer from:
A Portrait of the Artist as Australian
Abstract: Barry Humphries is an occasional poet. He deserves the designation “occasional” not because he writes poetry infrequently (which he does not), or even because he writes exceptional verse (which he does), but because he has the expertise to write poems for just about every occasion and because he has the facility to do it well and make it look easy. In his acknowledgments he refers to
Neglected Poems and Other Creatures(1991) as “these occasional verses,” as if his poetry were merely a hit and miss amateur pastime. But it seems it has always been a hit with his audience, both
CONCLUSION: from:
Violence and the Female Imagination
Abstract: In
Sexing the Self,Elsbeth Probyn tells us that “in the name of … connecting (or at least acknowledging) the crevices within and between the previous chapters,” she would try to proceed “‘en guise d’une conclusion’ (which roughly translates as ‘in the manner of a conclusion,’ although [she likes] the idea of being ‘disguised as a conclusion’ better)” (165). Given the complexity, breadth, and timeliness of my topic, such a stance seems most appropriate: to present here “in the manner of a conclusion,” some disguised concluding remarks. Let me state at the outset that I see the questions that I
“Writing against the Ruins”: from:
Postmodernism and the Ethical Subject
Author(s) GABRIEL BARBARA
Abstract: The scene I am describing is Canadian multi-media artist Vera Frenkel’s installation …
from the Transit Bar, a reconstruction at the National Gallery of Canada, from 9 May to 27 October 1996, of the work first shown four years earlier at documenta 1X in Kassel, Germany. In its blurring of the boundaries of the artwork and the “real,” Frenkel’s installation inhabits a postmodern space that extends many of the conceptual problems posed earlier in the century by the Duchamps ready-made. This time round, however, they are folded into a scenic framework intensely saturated with social concerns. “Whosestory?” the viewer
From Modernity to Postmodernity from:
Postmodernism and the Ethical Subject
Author(s) ILCAN SUZAN
Abstract: It is not a coincidence that postmodernism and postcolonialism have materialized at the same time as objects of study in the human sciences: the one is a function of the other. The collapse of the
grands récitsof the Enlightenment that Jean-François Lyotard (1986) identifies as the signifying mark of postmodernity is contingent upon the end of the great European nation-state empires and of capitalism grounded in nation-states. Trans-or multinational capitalism is a system that has outgrown the institutions that created a space for its expansion, as it previously outgrew and disregarded the centralized monarchies that fostered its development over
“Covering Their Familiar Ways with Another Culture”: from:
Postmodernism and the Ethical Subject
Author(s) FREIWALD BINA TOLEDO
Abstract: Freeman’s (1978) and Suleiman’s (1991) reflections on identity and difference – on the perils that attend seeing “there” as (always already) an encroachment on “here,” and “them” as alien and a threat to the charmed circle of “us” – were written in the shadow of the Gulf War and the war in Bosnia, respectively. I read their apt metaphors as timely reminders: affirming (through the organic tropes) the human longing to belong, contesting any view of identity as homogeneous or bounded, and recognizing the shifting and variable nature of identifications. They offer a simple moral: that those who recognize the complex and
Memory, Identity, and Redemption: from:
Postmodernism and the Ethical Subject
Author(s) LORIGGIO FRANCESCO
Abstract: Towards the end of the 1970s Christopher Lasch described American social behaviour of the time as a kind of grass-roots disenchantment with progress. “Having no hope of improving their lives,” he contended, “people … convinced themselves that what matters is psychic self-improvement: getting in touch with their feelings, eating health food, taking lessons in ballet or belly-dancing, immersing themselves in the wisdom of the East, jogging, learning how to ‘relate,’ overcoming the ‘fear of pleasure’” (Lasch 1979, 29). Together with other things, at the heart of this retreat from “the political turmoil of the sixties” into “privatism” and “personal preoccupations”
Book Title: Elizabeth Bishop's Poetics of Description- Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): PICKARD ZACHARIAH
Abstract: Elizabeth Bishop's Poetics of Description argues that attention to the material realm informs everything Bishop does. Seen through this lens, many familiar topics look remarkably different. Bishop's relationship to travel, epiphany, surrealism, and imagery are all transformed, and a timely new Bishop emerges - one quite different from the postmodern poet that has dominated recent scholarship.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt80krk
7 Travel from:
Elizabeth Bishop's Poetics of Description
Abstract: Located somewhere between the youthful ambition of “Time’s Andromedas” and the mature relaxation of “Santarém,” the three poems that begin
Questions of Travelpresent a turning point and a resolution of sorts. Explicitly, these poems are about travel, not time or narrative, but, as my choice of poems in the previous chapter suggests, travel, time, and narrative are not entirely unrelated: “Over 2,000 Illustrations” and “Santarém” are openly about travel, and “Paris, 7 A.M.,” is set – and was written – in a foreign city. Granted, Bishop wrote many poems that engage either directly or indirectly with travel, and any random sample
8 Description from:
Elizabeth Bishop's Poetics of Description
Abstract: Poetry, like fiction, has a time-sense, and it is worth extending the ideas laid out in “Time’s Andromedas” to the formal – rather than thematic – elements of Bishop’s poetics. Generally, critics writing about Bishop have used the question of time to buttress arguments about the “mind thinking”: the notion that Bishop’s goal is to capture the feeling of a mind in the process of working out a thought rather than a mind relating a fully formed idea. The distinction is one Bishop found in an essay on Baroque prose by Morris Croll and used in both a paper of her own
Book Title: Elizabeth Bishop's Poetics of Description- Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): PICKARD ZACHARIAH
Abstract: Elizabeth Bishop's Poetics of Description argues that attention to the material realm informs everything Bishop does. Seen through this lens, many familiar topics look remarkably different. Bishop's relationship to travel, epiphany, surrealism, and imagery are all transformed, and a timely new Bishop emerges - one quite different from the postmodern poet that has dominated recent scholarship.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt80krk
7 Travel from:
Elizabeth Bishop's Poetics of Description
Abstract: Located somewhere between the youthful ambition of “Time’s Andromedas” and the mature relaxation of “Santarém,” the three poems that begin
Questions of Travelpresent a turning point and a resolution of sorts. Explicitly, these poems are about travel, not time or narrative, but, as my choice of poems in the previous chapter suggests, travel, time, and narrative are not entirely unrelated: “Over 2,000 Illustrations” and “Santarém” are openly about travel, and “Paris, 7 A.M.,” is set – and was written – in a foreign city. Granted, Bishop wrote many poems that engage either directly or indirectly with travel, and any random sample
8 Description from:
Elizabeth Bishop's Poetics of Description
Abstract: Poetry, like fiction, has a time-sense, and it is worth extending the ideas laid out in “Time’s Andromedas” to the formal – rather than thematic – elements of Bishop’s poetics. Generally, critics writing about Bishop have used the question of time to buttress arguments about the “mind thinking”: the notion that Bishop’s goal is to capture the feeling of a mind in the process of working out a thought rather than a mind relating a fully formed idea. The distinction is one Bishop found in an essay on Baroque prose by Morris Croll and used in both a paper of her own
8 The Revolutionary Reading of Justice from:
Ethics of Catholicism and the Consecration of the Intellectual
Abstract: The different opinions expressed during the French Revolution crystallize conceptions of the individual and society that the
philosopheshad entertained but never completely developed. On the whole, the revolutionary ideologies expressed values that were far from liberal; thus they provided fertile ground for the emergence of the intellectuals. TheDéclaration des droits de I’homme et du citoyen(1789) together with the writings of Sieyès, who is quite representative of his time, and the discourse of the Jacobins, show a convergence of ideas that share a perception of reason and its function in the workings of society.
11 The Emergence of the Intellectual from:
Ethics of Catholicism and the Consecration of the Intellectual
Abstract: The last three decades of the nineteenth century in France witnessed a significant interest in ethics.¹ This trend coincided with the onset of the Third Republic. The Third Republic was proclaimed in 1870 but was more officially established through a series of laws which culminated in 1875. Thinkers of the time envisioned the republican era as providing a solid ground on which to build a secularized state. The debate over secularization, which progressively materialized from the early 1880s to the famous Combes legislation of 1904 testifies to the importance of the issue on the political agenda of the time.
CHAPTER FOUR Uriage Influence: from:
Knight-Monks of Vichy France
Abstract: As the École Nationale des Cadres d’Uriage prospered, some of the more senior military officers involved with Vichy’s youth training began to bristle at young Captain Pierre Dunoyer de Segonzac’s pretentions, his independence, and the centrality of his personality in the school. The Study Bureau had attracted other high-profile personalities to Uriage — lively, sometimes controversial, young Catholic intellectuals such as Mounier, Lacroix, Beuve-Méry, de Lubac, and Maydieu. It was becoming clearer that Uriage was the focal point of a collective effort to orient the National Revolution in a certain direction as the school tried to reach the country with publications
CHAPTER SEVEN Uriage under Attack (March 1942—January 1943) from:
Knight-Monks of Vichy France
Abstract: The grandiose triumphalism of the Grande Fête at Uriage in the summer of 1942 masked the fact that the school, by that time, had serious difficulties with the government, fuelled by powerful rivals and critics. One sign of trouble had been the successful pressure exerted on the school the previous summer, apparently by Henri Massis, to do without the Abbé de Naurois and Emmanuel Mounier; another was the fact that Mounier was abruptly incarcerated in early 1942 on suspicion of Resistance activities. The government’s concern over the youth movements led to a summons to Vichy of their leaders, including Segonzac,
1 A View from the Edge of the Edge from:
Carol Shields and the Extra-Ordinary
Author(s) SHIELDS CAROL
Abstract: When I was in London on a book promotion trip a couple of years ago I was asked one question repeatedly and by every British journalist I talked to: why is so much writing, suddenly, coming out of Canada? And, a secondary question, almost apologetically offered, why so much writing by women? I was not, I’m afraid, very well prepared for these questions, and though I love to invent theories, I was wary of concocting one on the spot. It seems every time I do deliver a fast-food hypothesis I’m confronted the very next day by an example that explodes
2 Voice and Re-vision: from:
Carol Shields and the Extra-Ordinary
Author(s) HOBBS CATHERINE
Abstract: Archives are a flow of documents created in time that have been removed from the locale of creation. Looking in the archival files, we see notebooks, manuscripts, letters, and photographs that we can choose to narrate in various ways. Yet this is not a composed narrative: one can start at any point to see a series of dialogues between correspondents or the jottings and notes that are fragments of the author’s dialogue and directives to herself, this is because the onlooker chooses to focus on a certain aspect around which details swirl. Underlying the physicality of archives is the physical
5 Carol Shields’s The Republic of Love, or How to Ravish a Genre from:
Carol Shields and the Extra-Ordinary
Author(s) TUHKUNEN TAÏNA
Abstract: Among the attempts to give shape to a republic, a state in which supreme power is held by the people and not by a pre-eminent ruler, Carol Shields’s novel
The Republic of Loveis undoubtedly one of the most extraordinary essays at voicing one’s wish to live in peaceful, yet not necessarily placid, coexistence with one’s fellow creatures, even in our bleak and boastful modern times. Both a serious meditation on love and a playful, novelistic exposé of one of the least beloved subjects of artistic expression – that of an ordinary happy life – Shields’s novel leaves the reader
7 A Knowable Country: from:
Carol Shields and the Extra-Ordinary
Author(s) IRVINE LORNA
Abstract: In
The Republic of Love, Tom Avery, one of two central characters in a novel narrated in the third person, briefly addresses his body, observed, as always, by a narrator who mingles voice and perspective with those of Tom: “‘You wimp,’ he said to his dusky penis, but in a friendly tone. He dried carefully between his toes. It had been some time since he had regarded his toes closely. Years.”¹Larry’s Partyis also narrated in the third person. In it, we are presented with a series of questions by a narrator who likewise mingles voice and perspective with
1 A View from the Edge of the Edge from:
Carol Shields and the Extra-Ordinary
Author(s) SHIELDS CAROL
Abstract: When I was in London on a book promotion trip a couple of years ago I was asked one question repeatedly and by every British journalist I talked to: why is so much writing, suddenly, coming out of Canada? And, a secondary question, almost apologetically offered, why so much writing by women? I was not, I’m afraid, very well prepared for these questions, and though I love to invent theories, I was wary of concocting one on the spot. It seems every time I do deliver a fast-food hypothesis I’m confronted the very next day by an example that explodes
2 Voice and Re-vision: from:
Carol Shields and the Extra-Ordinary
Author(s) HOBBS CATHERINE
Abstract: Archives are a flow of documents created in time that have been removed from the locale of creation. Looking in the archival files, we see notebooks, manuscripts, letters, and photographs that we can choose to narrate in various ways. Yet this is not a composed narrative: one can start at any point to see a series of dialogues between correspondents or the jottings and notes that are fragments of the author’s dialogue and directives to herself, this is because the onlooker chooses to focus on a certain aspect around which details swirl. Underlying the physicality of archives is the physical
5 Carol Shields’s The Republic of Love, or How to Ravish a Genre from:
Carol Shields and the Extra-Ordinary
Author(s) TUHKUNEN TAÏNA
Abstract: Among the attempts to give shape to a republic, a state in which supreme power is held by the people and not by a pre-eminent ruler, Carol Shields’s novel
The Republic of Loveis undoubtedly one of the most extraordinary essays at voicing one’s wish to live in peaceful, yet not necessarily placid, coexistence with one’s fellow creatures, even in our bleak and boastful modern times. Both a serious meditation on love and a playful, novelistic exposé of one of the least beloved subjects of artistic expression – that of an ordinary happy life – Shields’s novel leaves the reader
7 A Knowable Country: from:
Carol Shields and the Extra-Ordinary
Author(s) IRVINE LORNA
Abstract: In
The Republic of Love, Tom Avery, one of two central characters in a novel narrated in the third person, briefly addresses his body, observed, as always, by a narrator who mingles voice and perspective with those of Tom: “‘You wimp,’ he said to his dusky penis, but in a friendly tone. He dried carefully between his toes. It had been some time since he had regarded his toes closely. Years.”¹Larry’s Partyis also narrated in the third person. In it, we are presented with a series of questions by a narrator who likewise mingles voice and perspective with
CHAPTER SEVEN Jacques Soustelle: from:
Political Ecumenism
Abstract: Born in Montpellier on 3 February 1912 to a working-class Catholic father and a Protestant mother, Jacques Soustelle was baptized in the Reformed communion. Although as an adult he drifted away from his childhood faith, Soustelle always saw himself as shaped by the Huguenot tradition. He never forgot early memories of itinerant lay preachers who travelled door-to-door throughout the Protestant heartland in the Cévennes distributing tracts with their message of eternal salvation. In writing about his wartime commitment to Free France, Soustelle recalls taking heart from these sometimes solitary pilgrims:
CHAPTER NINE Pierre Mendès France: from:
Political Ecumenism
Abstract: The strong Jewish presence in the ranks of the Free French was hardly surprising. Jews had been consistent defenders of the republican ideal since 1848. They had participated in the ephemeral government of the Second Republic in 1848, and the quintessentially assimilated Léon Blum had become the first Jewish premier of France in 1936 (albeit, not without infuriating disciples of Maurras). Pierre Mendès France, who played a secondary role in Blum’s Popular Front government, would join La France libre following his escape from Vichy. His presence in General de Gaulle’s wartime organization would be the prelude to a long, mutually
CHAPTER TWELVE André Philip and the Christian Left Commit to Free France from:
Political Ecumenism
Abstract: Given the longstanding devotion of the vast majority of French Protestants to the Republic and to democratic principles, it is not surprising that a substantial proportion of those who showed up to enrol in La France libre were linked to the Reformed communion.¹ None of these Protestants had a more significant role in shaping wartime Gaullist policy than André Philip, the only practicing Christian among the pre-war leaders of the SFIO.² Before arriving in London, Philip had been active in the internal Resistance. Through his initiative, two more Protestant
résistantsfamiliar with the French trade-union movement – Albert Guigui and Louis
CHAPTER FIFTEEN From Mystique to Politique: from:
Political Ecumenism
Abstract: In London, where he was kept long after the success of Operation “Torch,”
Le Connétabledeclared on 2 January 1943 that the interests of France required the creation of “an enlarged provisional central authority based on the principle of national unity, inspired by a fighting spirit and a desire for liberation and guided by the laws of the Republic until the nation is able to make known its will.”¹ This bold demand was seriously challenged at a conference two weeks later at Anfa, an elegant residential suburb of Casablanca, where Churchill and Roosevelt met to discuss wartime strategy. The role
CHAPTER SEVENTEEN Liberation: from:
Political Ecumenism
Abstract: Having established the CFLN and the Provisional Consultative Assembly to help him debate both wartime strategy and post-war planning, Charles de Gaulle waited through the winter of 1943–44 in Algiers to be invited to London to join in devising Allied strategy for the liberation of France. Much time was spent during these months in vain efforts to secure formal recognition of the CFLN by the Allies. Thanks to the unbudging antipathy of Roosevelt to de Gaulle and to the growing bitterness of Churchill toward what he saw to be the general’s increasingly perfidious behaviour, this diplomatic acceptance would not
1 Contemplation and the Dominican Vocation from:
Contemplation and Incarnation
Abstract: A THEOLOGY IS BORN NOT in a vacuum but as a result of an encounter. This encounter then reveals a vocation. In looking for the traces of such an encounter‚ in looking for the origin of vocation‚ and hence for the roots of a theology‚ there are always the dangers of psychologism‚ of reducing the objective quality of a body of work to a subjective and perhaps even sentimental experience. Yet it is the very objectivity of a work that points to its living source. These roots would remain secret and hidden were it not for these pointers.
6 Incarnation and Christology from:
Contemplation and Incarnation
Abstract: After sketching the historical context of St. Jacques at the time of St. Albert, Chenu pointed out the two areas that had attracted the saint’s attention: nature, in
Conclusion from:
Contemplation and Incarnation
Abstract: THE CONTRIBUTION OF MARIE-DOMINIQUE CHENU to theological renewal came at a crucial time when the Church was in the midst of a painful struggle with the advent of modernity. The issue was to find a theological language that could speak to the concerns and aspirations of the modern world, yet could also overcome the shortcomings of the modernist proposals and be acceptable to the Church.
4 The Future of Racial Memory: from:
Imagining Justice
Abstract: These statements by Paul Ricoeur, a French philosopher, and Joy Kogawa, a Canadian writer of fiction, might profoundly discomfit a postmodern academic audience familiar with the problems of humanism. Both thinkers express faith in the possibility of forgiveness at a time in history when such faith might seem naïvely optimistic and at worst dangerously self-deceptive. After all, the conceptual apparatus of forgiveness, to the extent that it involves recollection of and reflection on the past, is patently imbricated with notions of truth and memory; yet a virtual axiom of contemporary thought is that the latter are partial, fragmentary, and intensely
5 The Agonistics of Absolution in a Post-Apartheid Era: from:
Imagining Justice
Abstract: On the surface the first novel written by J.M. Coetzee in the aftermath of apartheid is remote from and possibly even irrelevant to the enterprise of national reconciliation that South Africa has undertaken as part of its negotiated transition to democratic governance. But although
Disgracerefuses to foreground its complex and at times bafflingly oblique relation to its own historicity, leaving readers with the task of reading the text into its context, its contemplation of the possibility of forgiveness constitutes a complex engagement with the political realities of the post-apartheid era. Indeed,Disgraceis haunted, and perhaps motivated, by the
Conclusion from:
Imagining Justice
Abstract: A few years after I completed an earlier version of this book in the form of a doctoral dissertation, I began to collect some of my thoughts about the relationship between truth and justice. This complex relationship is germane to my project – and has in fact formed its central ideas – but not in ways that I was able to fully articulate or acknowledge at the time of its beginning. A substantial amount of scholarship on the politics of reconciliation deals explicitly and quite polemically with the interplay between truth and transitive justice, and yet somehow I did not anticipate the
4 The Future of Racial Memory: from:
Imagining Justice
Abstract: These statements by Paul Ricoeur, a French philosopher, and Joy Kogawa, a Canadian writer of fiction, might profoundly discomfit a postmodern academic audience familiar with the problems of humanism. Both thinkers express faith in the possibility of forgiveness at a time in history when such faith might seem naïvely optimistic and at worst dangerously self-deceptive. After all, the conceptual apparatus of forgiveness, to the extent that it involves recollection of and reflection on the past, is patently imbricated with notions of truth and memory; yet a virtual axiom of contemporary thought is that the latter are partial, fragmentary, and intensely
5 The Agonistics of Absolution in a Post-Apartheid Era: from:
Imagining Justice
Abstract: On the surface the first novel written by J.M. Coetzee in the aftermath of apartheid is remote from and possibly even irrelevant to the enterprise of national reconciliation that South Africa has undertaken as part of its negotiated transition to democratic governance. But although
Disgracerefuses to foreground its complex and at times bafflingly oblique relation to its own historicity, leaving readers with the task of reading the text into its context, its contemplation of the possibility of forgiveness constitutes a complex engagement with the political realities of the post-apartheid era. Indeed,Disgraceis haunted, and perhaps motivated, by the
Conclusion from:
Imagining Justice
Abstract: A few years after I completed an earlier version of this book in the form of a doctoral dissertation, I began to collect some of my thoughts about the relationship between truth and justice. This complex relationship is germane to my project – and has in fact formed its central ideas – but not in ways that I was able to fully articulate or acknowledge at the time of its beginning. A substantial amount of scholarship on the politics of reconciliation deals explicitly and quite polemically with the interplay between truth and transitive justice, and yet somehow I did not anticipate the
4 The Future of Racial Memory: from:
Imagining Justice
Abstract: These statements by Paul Ricoeur, a French philosopher, and Joy Kogawa, a Canadian writer of fiction, might profoundly discomfit a postmodern academic audience familiar with the problems of humanism. Both thinkers express faith in the possibility of forgiveness at a time in history when such faith might seem naïvely optimistic and at worst dangerously self-deceptive. After all, the conceptual apparatus of forgiveness, to the extent that it involves recollection of and reflection on the past, is patently imbricated with notions of truth and memory; yet a virtual axiom of contemporary thought is that the latter are partial, fragmentary, and intensely
5 The Agonistics of Absolution in a Post-Apartheid Era: from:
Imagining Justice
Abstract: On the surface the first novel written by J.M. Coetzee in the aftermath of apartheid is remote from and possibly even irrelevant to the enterprise of national reconciliation that South Africa has undertaken as part of its negotiated transition to democratic governance. But although
Disgracerefuses to foreground its complex and at times bafflingly oblique relation to its own historicity, leaving readers with the task of reading the text into its context, its contemplation of the possibility of forgiveness constitutes a complex engagement with the political realities of the post-apartheid era. Indeed,Disgraceis haunted, and perhaps motivated, by the
Conclusion from:
Imagining Justice
Abstract: A few years after I completed an earlier version of this book in the form of a doctoral dissertation, I began to collect some of my thoughts about the relationship between truth and justice. This complex relationship is germane to my project – and has in fact formed its central ideas – but not in ways that I was able to fully articulate or acknowledge at the time of its beginning. A substantial amount of scholarship on the politics of reconciliation deals explicitly and quite polemically with the interplay between truth and transitive justice, and yet somehow I did not anticipate the
2 On the Use of Architecture: from:
Chora 2
Author(s) Chi Lily H.
Abstract: THE DEMISE OF FUNCTIONALISM as a normative doctrine in architecture has long been a matter of common opinion, and yet is still difficult to speak of the “use” of architecture without being seized by one or the other side of an old polemic: the argument between utility and poetry, necessity and art. It would seem timely, in our exciting/bewildering context of endless possibilities and positions, to give some thought to this area of the mundane.
12 When the Old Mirror is not yet Polished, What Would You Say of it? from:
Chora 2
Author(s) Winton Tracey Eve
Abstract: 1789: 2 July The Bastille logbook notes that “the Count de Sade shouted several times from the window of the Bastille that the prisoners were being renumbered and that the people should come to liberate them.”¹
CHAPTER ONE Intertwined Twintalk from:
Ghost Brothers
Abstract: Symbolic brotherhood and sisterhood was instituted through commercial, military, social, and familial Native alliances and was cemented by intercommunal bonding rituals. Fraternal twinships provided the basis for these alliances in both French and Native communities. "Twinning" in this context refers to a profoundly intertwined dialogue between two allies whose functions corresponded to each other yet whose comraderie or enmity goes beyond the purely utilitarian "I-it" exchanges into the
Zwischenmenschliche(interhuman) dialogue defined by Martin Buber, which Emmanuel Levinas has sometimes adjusted in his own "face a face," to place the Other before himself. The "I-Thou" relationship, as Buber sees it,
CHAPTER TWO Smoke Signals from:
Ghost Brothers
Abstract: Infinitely layered echoes of past, present, and future phantoms, which reflect the interaction and transformations of internalized life and communal events within the self and society, take place within the crux of a multilevel framework that extends through time and space. Twins held the keys to one another’s lives, but their relationship also symbolically represents the communal reality. I look at communal twinship on a macro level, examining it via time and space. First, I look at political and socio-economic twinships and their demographic character. Then I map out the geographical context and spatial negotiations within which the interethnic dialogue
CHAPTER SEVEN Hunting Otherworlds from:
Ghost Brothers
Abstract: Belief and rituals stress an aspect of a communal shared past (Urzeit), which embodies its view of the end of time (Endzeit), in order to orient the community in the present and to enable it to make sense of how to face the future. The relinking of common meanings reinforces the boundaries of communal trust. In a multiethnic "frontierless" Fourth World society, who is inside and who is outside the community? Where does communal begin trust and end? And what does this all mean after life ends? Christian belief emphasized inherent good and evil, while most Aboriginal beliefs demonstrated the
CHAPTER ONE Intertwined Twintalk from:
Ghost Brothers
Abstract: Symbolic brotherhood and sisterhood was instituted through commercial, military, social, and familial Native alliances and was cemented by intercommunal bonding rituals. Fraternal twinships provided the basis for these alliances in both French and Native communities. "Twinning" in this context refers to a profoundly intertwined dialogue between two allies whose functions corresponded to each other yet whose comraderie or enmity goes beyond the purely utilitarian "I-it" exchanges into the
Zwischenmenschliche(interhuman) dialogue defined by Martin Buber, which Emmanuel Levinas has sometimes adjusted in his own "face a face," to place the Other before himself. The "I-Thou" relationship, as Buber sees it,
CHAPTER TWO Smoke Signals from:
Ghost Brothers
Abstract: Infinitely layered echoes of past, present, and future phantoms, which reflect the interaction and transformations of internalized life and communal events within the self and society, take place within the crux of a multilevel framework that extends through time and space. Twins held the keys to one another’s lives, but their relationship also symbolically represents the communal reality. I look at communal twinship on a macro level, examining it via time and space. First, I look at political and socio-economic twinships and their demographic character. Then I map out the geographical context and spatial negotiations within which the interethnic dialogue
CHAPTER SEVEN Hunting Otherworlds from:
Ghost Brothers
Abstract: Belief and rituals stress an aspect of a communal shared past (Urzeit), which embodies its view of the end of time (Endzeit), in order to orient the community in the present and to enable it to make sense of how to face the future. The relinking of common meanings reinforces the boundaries of communal trust. In a multiethnic "frontierless" Fourth World society, who is inside and who is outside the community? Where does communal begin trust and end? And what does this all mean after life ends? Christian belief emphasized inherent good and evil, while most Aboriginal beliefs demonstrated the
CHAPTER ONE Intertwined Twintalk from:
Ghost Brothers
Abstract: Symbolic brotherhood and sisterhood was instituted through commercial, military, social, and familial Native alliances and was cemented by intercommunal bonding rituals. Fraternal twinships provided the basis for these alliances in both French and Native communities. "Twinning" in this context refers to a profoundly intertwined dialogue between two allies whose functions corresponded to each other yet whose comraderie or enmity goes beyond the purely utilitarian "I-it" exchanges into the
Zwischenmenschliche(interhuman) dialogue defined by Martin Buber, which Emmanuel Levinas has sometimes adjusted in his own "face a face," to place the Other before himself. The "I-Thou" relationship, as Buber sees it,
CHAPTER TWO Smoke Signals from:
Ghost Brothers
Abstract: Infinitely layered echoes of past, present, and future phantoms, which reflect the interaction and transformations of internalized life and communal events within the self and society, take place within the crux of a multilevel framework that extends through time and space. Twins held the keys to one another’s lives, but their relationship also symbolically represents the communal reality. I look at communal twinship on a macro level, examining it via time and space. First, I look at political and socio-economic twinships and their demographic character. Then I map out the geographical context and spatial negotiations within which the interethnic dialogue
CHAPTER SEVEN Hunting Otherworlds from:
Ghost Brothers
Abstract: Belief and rituals stress an aspect of a communal shared past (Urzeit), which embodies its view of the end of time (Endzeit), in order to orient the community in the present and to enable it to make sense of how to face the future. The relinking of common meanings reinforces the boundaries of communal trust. In a multiethnic "frontierless" Fourth World society, who is inside and who is outside the community? Where does communal begin trust and end? And what does this all mean after life ends? Christian belief emphasized inherent good and evil, while most Aboriginal beliefs demonstrated the
7 Deconstruction Is Not Enough: from:
Weakening Philosophy
Author(s) SCHÜRMANN REINER
Abstract: Vattimo’s paper on weak thinking is strongly argued, at least in its general strategy.¹ He first describes the dialectical mode of philosophizing, then opposes it to the differential mode that “combats” dialectics while remaining “deeply complicitous” with it, and finally sublates both: weak ontology is “constructed not only by developing the discourse of difference, but also by recalling dialectics.” This is strong thinking indeed, perhaps unintendedly so. The Hegelian as well as the Heideggerian positions are to be
aufgehoben,since ours is the time in which both modes of reappropriating the past have proved asthenic. They are elevated and at
8 Weak Thought 2004: from:
Weakening Philosophy
Author(s) Valgenti Robert T.
Abstract: I think that the most sincere tribute to a friend and thinker – one to whom I feel profoundly tied and with whom I have publicly shared a philosophical adventure in which I continue to believe – should return to the very grounds of our encounter, beginning with the so-called differences between us. Gianni Vattimo is one of the most original and significant Italian philosophers of our time (I write “one of” out of modesty and
bon ton; in reality, I consider him the most important). This is already a great difference between us, one that I will assume is taken for
15 Gianni Vattimo; or rather, Hermeneutics as the Primacy of Politics from:
Weakening Philosophy
Author(s) T.Valgenti Robert
Abstract: But it is hardly ever pointed out how this way of thematizing Being makes the philosophy of Vattimo an
essentiallymoral philosophy, or more precisely, an ethico-politicalphilosophy. In fact, it is an antimetaphysical, antidogmatic and antiauthoritarian philosophy, where
16 Weakening Religious Belief: from:
Weakening Philosophy
Author(s) FRANKENBERRY NANCY K .
Abstract: Notwithstanding Lyotard’s characterization of postmodernity’s incredulity toward grand metanarratives, the most interesting and provocative philosophy in our time is that being painted with meta broad brushes. When distinguished philosophers fashion overarching narratives, they help us hold things together in a synoptic vision; by painting forests for us, they make those of us who read too many books able at least to see more than just the trees. Gianni Vattimo and Richard Rorty, metanarrators both, and two of the most original philosophers writing today, invite comparison of their overlapping but distinct narratives on religion and secularization, which I will undertake in
7 Deconstruction Is Not Enough: from:
Weakening Philosophy
Author(s) SCHÜRMANN REINER
Abstract: Vattimo’s paper on weak thinking is strongly argued, at least in its general strategy.¹ He first describes the dialectical mode of philosophizing, then opposes it to the differential mode that “combats” dialectics while remaining “deeply complicitous” with it, and finally sublates both: weak ontology is “constructed not only by developing the discourse of difference, but also by recalling dialectics.” This is strong thinking indeed, perhaps unintendedly so. The Hegelian as well as the Heideggerian positions are to be
aufgehoben,since ours is the time in which both modes of reappropriating the past have proved asthenic. They are elevated and at
8 Weak Thought 2004: from:
Weakening Philosophy
Author(s) Valgenti Robert T.
Abstract: I think that the most sincere tribute to a friend and thinker – one to whom I feel profoundly tied and with whom I have publicly shared a philosophical adventure in which I continue to believe – should return to the very grounds of our encounter, beginning with the so-called differences between us. Gianni Vattimo is one of the most original and significant Italian philosophers of our time (I write “one of” out of modesty and
bon ton; in reality, I consider him the most important). This is already a great difference between us, one that I will assume is taken for
15 Gianni Vattimo; or rather, Hermeneutics as the Primacy of Politics from:
Weakening Philosophy
Author(s) T.Valgenti Robert
Abstract: But it is hardly ever pointed out how this way of thematizing Being makes the philosophy of Vattimo an
essentiallymoral philosophy, or more precisely, an ethico-politicalphilosophy. In fact, it is an antimetaphysical, antidogmatic and antiauthoritarian philosophy, where
16 Weakening Religious Belief: from:
Weakening Philosophy
Author(s) FRANKENBERRY NANCY K .
Abstract: Notwithstanding Lyotard’s characterization of postmodernity’s incredulity toward grand metanarratives, the most interesting and provocative philosophy in our time is that being painted with meta broad brushes. When distinguished philosophers fashion overarching narratives, they help us hold things together in a synoptic vision; by painting forests for us, they make those of us who read too many books able at least to see more than just the trees. Gianni Vattimo and Richard Rorty, metanarrators both, and two of the most original philosophers writing today, invite comparison of their overlapping but distinct narratives on religion and secularization, which I will undertake in
7 Deconstruction Is Not Enough: from:
Weakening Philosophy
Author(s) SCHÜRMANN REINER
Abstract: Vattimo’s paper on weak thinking is strongly argued, at least in its general strategy.¹ He first describes the dialectical mode of philosophizing, then opposes it to the differential mode that “combats” dialectics while remaining “deeply complicitous” with it, and finally sublates both: weak ontology is “constructed not only by developing the discourse of difference, but also by recalling dialectics.” This is strong thinking indeed, perhaps unintendedly so. The Hegelian as well as the Heideggerian positions are to be
aufgehoben,since ours is the time in which both modes of reappropriating the past have proved asthenic. They are elevated and at
8 Weak Thought 2004: from:
Weakening Philosophy
Author(s) Valgenti Robert T.
Abstract: I think that the most sincere tribute to a friend and thinker – one to whom I feel profoundly tied and with whom I have publicly shared a philosophical adventure in which I continue to believe – should return to the very grounds of our encounter, beginning with the so-called differences between us. Gianni Vattimo is one of the most original and significant Italian philosophers of our time (I write “one of” out of modesty and
bon ton; in reality, I consider him the most important). This is already a great difference between us, one that I will assume is taken for
15 Gianni Vattimo; or rather, Hermeneutics as the Primacy of Politics from:
Weakening Philosophy
Author(s) T.Valgenti Robert
Abstract: But it is hardly ever pointed out how this way of thematizing Being makes the philosophy of Vattimo an
essentiallymoral philosophy, or more precisely, an ethico-politicalphilosophy. In fact, it is an antimetaphysical, antidogmatic and antiauthoritarian philosophy, where
16 Weakening Religious Belief: from:
Weakening Philosophy
Author(s) FRANKENBERRY NANCY K .
Abstract: Notwithstanding Lyotard’s characterization of postmodernity’s incredulity toward grand metanarratives, the most interesting and provocative philosophy in our time is that being painted with meta broad brushes. When distinguished philosophers fashion overarching narratives, they help us hold things together in a synoptic vision; by painting forests for us, they make those of us who read too many books able at least to see more than just the trees. Gianni Vattimo and Richard Rorty, metanarrators both, and two of the most original philosophers writing today, invite comparison of their overlapping but distinct narratives on religion and secularization, which I will undertake in
CHAPTER ONE Merleau-Ponty in Context from:
Philosophy of Merleau-Ponty
Abstract: Why should we still read Merleau-Ponty? He died, after all, in 1961, at a time when the social and cultural situation and the preoccupations of philosophers were very different from those of the end of the twentieth century and the beginning of a new millennium. Is he not simply a representative of a now outmoded “humanism”, a philosophy of the “subject” and of the phenomenology of consciousness? That he was a humanist in some sense of that rather vague word is undeniable; he was certainly concerned to affirm human values and believed that there are such values to affirm. But
CHAPTER FOUR Embodiment and Human Action from:
Philosophy of Merleau-Ponty
Abstract: For the Cartesian dualist, our being is not strictly
inthe world at all; the subject of experience, “the mind by which I am what I am”, as Descartes puts it, is a conscious mind, which is independent of the world of matter, even of the body to which it is for the time being attached. The subject, being unextended, is not even in space; the world is a spatial system of objects that the subject contemplates from a “position” that is not part of that system. The main traditional alternative to Cartesianism has been a materialistic monism, which rejects
CHAPTER SEVEN The Arts from:
Philosophy of Merleau-Ponty
Abstract: Phenomenological philosophy, in Merleau-Ponty's conception, consists as we have seen in “re-learning to look at the world”, attempting to get behind the theoretical constructions that we erect on the basis of our immediate experience of the world in order to describe that experience itself. In so doing, he says, we do not simply reflect a pre-existing truth: philosophy is, “like art, the act of bringing truth into being”.¹ The analogy between phenomenology and art, especially the visual arts, runs through Merleau-Ponty's writings, sometimes as asides to a general philosophical discussion, and sometimes in the form of extended essays on particular
4 Radical Border–Traversing from:
Diasporic Feminist Theology
Abstract: Postcolonialism has emerged as one of the major critical discourses in academia since its development in the 1980s. Defining postcolonialism is, however, not easy due to its complexity and the variety of its implications. Postcolonial scholars tend to split over the question as to whether postcolonialism implies certain
historicality, pertaining to a specific time and space, or if it entailstranshistoricality.⁴ That scholars write the term in two ways,post-colonialismandpostcolonialism, further reveals the multiple understandings and perceptions of postcolonialism itself.⁵ Some scholars use the two terms interchangeably without making a distinction between them. Scholars who emphasize the historical,
5 From Epistemology to Hermeneutics from:
Diasporic Feminist Theology
Abstract: It has almost become a commonplace to call our world “postmodern.” In discussions about the contemporary world, the term
postmodernismis one of those words that people use frequently and often abuse.⁴ The range of interpretations, presentations, meanings, definitions, and descriptions of the termpostmodernismis unbelievably broad, diverse, and complex, and often contradictory. It would be, therefore, appropriate for those who take one’sDasein(“being-in-the-world”) seriously to engage this postmodernZeitgeist, the ethos/spirit of our time. Federico De Onis (1882–1932) first conceived the term in hisAntologia de la poesia espanola e hispanoamericana, published in 1934, and Arnold
2 Cosmology and Existential Phenomenology from:
The Sense of the Universe
Abstract: If cosmology, as a product of human activity, pretends to deal with the universe in its totality, assuming this totality in the natural attitude of mind as omni-spatiality and omni-temporality, it must exercise bravery in combination with a healthy skepticism in making pronouncements about the whole, by being only a tiny part of this whole. In spite of the fact that the philosophical mind, that is, a critical mind, accounts for its own incomprehensibility of this totality on the grounds of the finitude of humanity, this finitude is at the same time counterweighted by its alleged infinitude. For example, Kant,
Introduction: from:
Hope in Action
Abstract: “Always be ready to make your defense to anyone who demands from you an accounting for the hope that is in you” (1 Pet. 3:15). Within this biblical charge, addressed to early Christian communities suffering religious persecution at the turn of the second century, we find a concentrated expression of a task that has persistently pressed itself upon Christian theology. What is that hope which would sustain Christian communities down through the centuries? How might theologians offer an account of that hope responsive to the distinct demands of their time? Although the history of Christian theology might be read profitably
Conclusion: from:
Hope in Action
Abstract: “Always be ready to make your defense to anyone who demands from you an accounting for the hope that is in you” (1 Pet. 3:15). Both Metz and Schillebeeckx regularly cited this biblical charge as they struggled, over the course of four decades, to express an eschatological hope responsive to the demands of their time. What challenges and endangers Christian hope today? What is the hope that is in you? Over the course of this study, we have seen that Metz’s and Schillebeeckx’s responses to these questions were frequently in flux. Their understandings of the precise pressures confronting the modern
Introduction: from:
By Bread Alone
Author(s) McGinn Sheila E.
Abstract: This pious sentiment, when combined with a phrase from Jesus’ defense of the woman who anointed him (“the poor you will always have with you”; Mark 14:7 and parallels), has led to disastrous consequences
3 From Drought to Starvation (Jeremiah 14:1-9): from:
By Bread Alone
Author(s) Dempsey Carol J.
Abstract: Repeatedly, the prophets proclaim the foreboding message that people, animals, and the land will be made to suffer by God because of the iniquities committed by some members within the human community. One of the divine chastisements to be suffered is drought, which will inevitably lead to hunger and starvation for all communities of life, most of whom will suffer the direct consequences of a few who have misused and abused their power and have violated right relationship. This essay explores Jeremiah 14:1-9, “The Great Drought,” in its own context and then in the context of contemporary times, where the
Introduction from:
Liturgy as Revelation
Abstract: Sometimes where one “is at” can reveal an interesting and fruitful point of departure for reflection, and such proved true for this study. The thesis that eventually gave rise to the present book was finalized at Ushaw College,¹ the then-senior seminary for the Catholic dioceses of the north of England, founded in 1808. It was St. Cuthbert’s College, Ushaw, that, if in nothing other than its annals, was responsible for the meeting of two men of very different sensibilities and perspectives: Rafael Merry Del Val, Cardinal Secretary of State to Pius X, and the poet Francis Thompson. Being at Ushaw,
2 Reading Meaningfully from:
Reading Theologically
Author(s) Perkins Miriam Y.
Abstract: Meaningful understanding, often called “interpretation” in academic contexts, is vital throughout seminary education. Interpretation is deliberative exploration and creative expression of fruitful encounter. It is essential to understanding scripture texts, historical sources and artifacts, theological writers across time, and real-time conversations about ethical, spiritual, and pastoral matters. The finding and sharing of insight involved in interpretation is always shaped by encounters between ourselves and what we read, ourselves and other people, and our own life experiences and the presence of God.
3 Reading Biblically from:
Reading Theologically
Author(s) Peeler Amy L. B.
Abstract: As a champion of the Epistle to the Hebrews, I often find myself citing Hebrews 4:12, “Indeed, the Word of God is living and active,”¹ to affirm that God speaks
todaythrough the Scriptures. My colleagues who study other “texts”—Shakespeare, poetry, the events of history, or the movements of nature—would testify that they hear God speaking to them in their disciplines, a claim I readily affirm as a proponent of the liberal arts who believes that all truth—wherever it is discovered—is God’s truth. At the same time, they would also acknowledge that the Bible holds a
4 Reading Generously from:
Reading Theologically
Author(s) Liu Gerald C.
Abstract: Reading generously is a practice of love. In Matthew 22:34-40, when Jesus is asked what the greatest commandment is, he adapts a quotation attributed to Moses in Deuteronomy 6:5. Jesus responds: “You shall love the Lord your God with all your heart, and with all your soul, and with all your mind.” The adaptation of this quotation appears as Jesus ends his response with the word “mind.” In the source text of Deuteronomy, Moses uses the word “might.” A couple of verses later in Matthew, Jesus quotes the Hebrew scriptures again. This time Jesus points to Leviticus 19:18, where God
7 Reading Digitally from:
Reading Theologically
Author(s) Brubaker Sarah Morice
Abstract: The first time I explored Second Life, I got stuck in the rafters of an unfamiliar building, wearing nothing but a helmet and a bustle.
2 The Reach of Radical Orthodoxy’s Influence from:
Postmodernity and Univocity
Abstract: One of the more interesting aspects of Radical Orthodoxy’s interpretation of John Duns Scotus has been the unexpected and at times unattributed influence that it has had on so many other thinkers and their projects, particularly in the English-speaking world. Whereas one might naturally anticipate that some academic theologians would appropriate the thought of their Radical Orthodoxy colleagues, what is surprising is the way in which the Scotus Story has made its way into the work of historians, philosophers, and popular religious writers beyond the confines of the academic theological guild. As early as ten years after the launch of
Book Title: Parables Unplugged-Reading the Lukan Parables in Their Rhetorical Context
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Thurén Lauri
Abstract: For far too long, Lauri Thurén argues, the parables of Jesus have been read either as allegories encoding Christian theology—including the theological message of one or another Gospel writer—or as tantalizing clues to the authentic voice of Jesus. Thurén proposes instead to read the parables “unplugged” from any assumptions beyond those given in the narrative situation in the text, on the common-sense premise that the very form of the parable works to propose a (sometimes startling) resolution to a particular problem. Thurén applies his method to the parables in Luke with some surprising results involving the Evangelist’s overall narrative purposes and the discrete purposes of individual parables in supporting the authority of Jesus, proclaiming God’s love, exhorting steadfastness, and so on. Eschatological and allegorical readings are equally unlikely, according to Thurén’s results. This study is sure to spark learned discussion among scholars, preachers, and students for years to come.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9m0vdv
4 Reflections on Godʹs Fierce Whimsy in the Words of Members of the Mud Flower Collective from:
Walking with the Mud Flower Collective
Abstract: In autumn of 2011 I interviewed six of the seven members of the Mud Flower Collective.¹ These women welcomed me into their homes and offices and spent significant time with me recalling and reflecting on the experiences of being a member of the collective. These interviews fundamentally changed my interaction with the text
God’s Fierce Whimsy. I anticipated that conducting these interviews would be important when I began this project, but by the time I was addressing the complexity of relationships and experiences depicted in the text, I realized this research was essential to my project. So too, I expected
3 Panentheism from:
The World in the Trinity
Abstract: Readers of the
Summa Theologiaeby the celebrated medieval theologian Thomas Aquinas are sometimes startled to read in one of the opening chapters, titled “Does God Exist?” the initial answer: “it would seem not to be so.”¹ Reassurance comes shortly with the recognition that Aquinas is employing the style of argument in the public academic disputations of his day: namely, first with various arguments to deny the truth of the proposition at issue, then to offer counterarguments for its truth, and afterwards to state one’s own position along with an answer to each of the initial objections. As I shall
Epilogue from:
Consider Leviathan
Abstract: Through its multiple and sometimes shocking nature images Job provides an ecological transition for Israel that facilitates survival at the juncture between the older ideals of nature covenant and the new era of diaspora and the “little community” at home in Judah. The explosion of nature images in the Dialogues not only reflects the intense focus on the status of the land but also comes to function as a creative, metaphorical guide for several avenues of ecological thinking, none of which is ultimately regnant, and the intensity and indeterminacy of that debate demonstrates just how difficult it is to make
Epilogue from:
Consider Leviathan
Abstract: Through its multiple and sometimes shocking nature images Job provides an ecological transition for Israel that facilitates survival at the juncture between the older ideals of nature covenant and the new era of diaspora and the “little community” at home in Judah. The explosion of nature images in the Dialogues not only reflects the intense focus on the status of the land but also comes to function as a creative, metaphorical guide for several avenues of ecological thinking, none of which is ultimately regnant, and the intensity and indeterminacy of that debate demonstrates just how difficult it is to make
Epilogue from:
Consider Leviathan
Abstract: Through its multiple and sometimes shocking nature images Job provides an ecological transition for Israel that facilitates survival at the juncture between the older ideals of nature covenant and the new era of diaspora and the “little community” at home in Judah. The explosion of nature images in the Dialogues not only reflects the intense focus on the status of the land but also comes to function as a creative, metaphorical guide for several avenues of ecological thinking, none of which is ultimately regnant, and the intensity and indeterminacy of that debate demonstrates just how difficult it is to make
Epilogue from:
Consider Leviathan
Abstract: Through its multiple and sometimes shocking nature images Job provides an ecological transition for Israel that facilitates survival at the juncture between the older ideals of nature covenant and the new era of diaspora and the “little community” at home in Judah. The explosion of nature images in the Dialogues not only reflects the intense focus on the status of the land but also comes to function as a creative, metaphorical guide for several avenues of ecological thinking, none of which is ultimately regnant, and the intensity and indeterminacy of that debate demonstrates just how difficult it is to make
Epilogue from:
Consider Leviathan
Abstract: Through its multiple and sometimes shocking nature images Job provides an ecological transition for Israel that facilitates survival at the juncture between the older ideals of nature covenant and the new era of diaspora and the “little community” at home in Judah. The explosion of nature images in the Dialogues not only reflects the intense focus on the status of the land but also comes to function as a creative, metaphorical guide for several avenues of ecological thinking, none of which is ultimately regnant, and the intensity and indeterminacy of that debate demonstrates just how difficult it is to make
1 The Future of the Word from:
The Future of the Word
Abstract: The writer of Matthew understands Jesus’ life in terms of texts.¹ In his gospel, the writer links all of the major events, many of the major speeches, and several of the parable sequences to Old Testament scripture passages. Apparently, Jesus’ life is all about fulfilling scripture. Sometimes the writer explicitly uses the term “fulfill”—as in the fulfillment citations—and sometimes other formulae, such as the “you have heard that it was said … but I say to you” passages. In both, Jesus embodies the word, reinterprets the word, and sets forth the future of the word. Matthew pictures a
Literary Scrivenings 1: from:
The Future of the Word
Abstract: The three sections of this book headed
Scriveningsbring out literary texts to play with the theology. Engaging questions of how reading might participate in the becoming, meaning-making, and community-building futures of texts, these interpretations try out the activities of the scribe for the kingdom—in a gloriously messy way. They map the myriad and manifold paths that reading takes outside of philosophical or theological argument, sometimes kicking against the pricks and sometimes seeming to take a turn themselves in the dance of the healing of time.
Conclusion from:
The Future of the Word
Abstract: This book has argued that texts’ meanings are founded on the future of the word of God, on the future of Christ, the word who became flesh. That eschatological future—the glorious plenitude of the community of the new creation—is texts’ expansion of meaning within the expanding love of the Trinity for the glory of God. God grants us participation in the future of the word through our participation in Christ, in whom we live and move and have our being. In reading, we cultivate and keep texts for their futures in the kingdom of God. In the time
1 The Future of the Word from:
The Future of the Word
Abstract: The writer of Matthew understands Jesus’ life in terms of texts.¹ In his gospel, the writer links all of the major events, many of the major speeches, and several of the parable sequences to Old Testament scripture passages. Apparently, Jesus’ life is all about fulfilling scripture. Sometimes the writer explicitly uses the term “fulfill”—as in the fulfillment citations—and sometimes other formulae, such as the “you have heard that it was said … but I say to you” passages. In both, Jesus embodies the word, reinterprets the word, and sets forth the future of the word. Matthew pictures a
Literary Scrivenings 1: from:
The Future of the Word
Abstract: The three sections of this book headed
Scriveningsbring out literary texts to play with the theology. Engaging questions of how reading might participate in the becoming, meaning-making, and community-building futures of texts, these interpretations try out the activities of the scribe for the kingdom—in a gloriously messy way. They map the myriad and manifold paths that reading takes outside of philosophical or theological argument, sometimes kicking against the pricks and sometimes seeming to take a turn themselves in the dance of the healing of time.
Conclusion from:
The Future of the Word
Abstract: This book has argued that texts’ meanings are founded on the future of the word of God, on the future of Christ, the word who became flesh. That eschatological future—the glorious plenitude of the community of the new creation—is texts’ expansion of meaning within the expanding love of the Trinity for the glory of God. God grants us participation in the future of the word through our participation in Christ, in whom we live and move and have our being. In reading, we cultivate and keep texts for their futures in the kingdom of God. In the time
1 The Future of the Word from:
The Future of the Word
Abstract: The writer of Matthew understands Jesus’ life in terms of texts.¹ In his gospel, the writer links all of the major events, many of the major speeches, and several of the parable sequences to Old Testament scripture passages. Apparently, Jesus’ life is all about fulfilling scripture. Sometimes the writer explicitly uses the term “fulfill”—as in the fulfillment citations—and sometimes other formulae, such as the “you have heard that it was said … but I say to you” passages. In both, Jesus embodies the word, reinterprets the word, and sets forth the future of the word. Matthew pictures a
Literary Scrivenings 1: from:
The Future of the Word
Abstract: The three sections of this book headed
Scriveningsbring out literary texts to play with the theology. Engaging questions of how reading might participate in the becoming, meaning-making, and community-building futures of texts, these interpretations try out the activities of the scribe for the kingdom—in a gloriously messy way. They map the myriad and manifold paths that reading takes outside of philosophical or theological argument, sometimes kicking against the pricks and sometimes seeming to take a turn themselves in the dance of the healing of time.
Conclusion from:
The Future of the Word
Abstract: This book has argued that texts’ meanings are founded on the future of the word of God, on the future of Christ, the word who became flesh. That eschatological future—the glorious plenitude of the community of the new creation—is texts’ expansion of meaning within the expanding love of the Trinity for the glory of God. God grants us participation in the future of the word through our participation in Christ, in whom we live and move and have our being. In reading, we cultivate and keep texts for their futures in the kingdom of God. In the time
1 The Future of the Word from:
The Future of the Word
Abstract: The writer of Matthew understands Jesus’ life in terms of texts.¹ In his gospel, the writer links all of the major events, many of the major speeches, and several of the parable sequences to Old Testament scripture passages. Apparently, Jesus’ life is all about fulfilling scripture. Sometimes the writer explicitly uses the term “fulfill”—as in the fulfillment citations—and sometimes other formulae, such as the “you have heard that it was said … but I say to you” passages. In both, Jesus embodies the word, reinterprets the word, and sets forth the future of the word. Matthew pictures a
Literary Scrivenings 1: from:
The Future of the Word
Abstract: The three sections of this book headed
Scriveningsbring out literary texts to play with the theology. Engaging questions of how reading might participate in the becoming, meaning-making, and community-building futures of texts, these interpretations try out the activities of the scribe for the kingdom—in a gloriously messy way. They map the myriad and manifold paths that reading takes outside of philosophical or theological argument, sometimes kicking against the pricks and sometimes seeming to take a turn themselves in the dance of the healing of time.
Conclusion from:
The Future of the Word
Abstract: This book has argued that texts’ meanings are founded on the future of the word of God, on the future of Christ, the word who became flesh. That eschatological future—the glorious plenitude of the community of the new creation—is texts’ expansion of meaning within the expanding love of the Trinity for the glory of God. God grants us participation in the future of the word through our participation in Christ, in whom we live and move and have our being. In reading, we cultivate and keep texts for their futures in the kingdom of God. In the time
1 The Future of the Word from:
The Future of the Word
Abstract: The writer of Matthew understands Jesus’ life in terms of texts.¹ In his gospel, the writer links all of the major events, many of the major speeches, and several of the parable sequences to Old Testament scripture passages. Apparently, Jesus’ life is all about fulfilling scripture. Sometimes the writer explicitly uses the term “fulfill”—as in the fulfillment citations—and sometimes other formulae, such as the “you have heard that it was said … but I say to you” passages. In both, Jesus embodies the word, reinterprets the word, and sets forth the future of the word. Matthew pictures a
Literary Scrivenings 1: from:
The Future of the Word
Abstract: The three sections of this book headed
Scriveningsbring out literary texts to play with the theology. Engaging questions of how reading might participate in the becoming, meaning-making, and community-building futures of texts, these interpretations try out the activities of the scribe for the kingdom—in a gloriously messy way. They map the myriad and manifold paths that reading takes outside of philosophical or theological argument, sometimes kicking against the pricks and sometimes seeming to take a turn themselves in the dance of the healing of time.
Conclusion from:
The Future of the Word
Abstract: This book has argued that texts’ meanings are founded on the future of the word of God, on the future of Christ, the word who became flesh. That eschatological future—the glorious plenitude of the community of the new creation—is texts’ expansion of meaning within the expanding love of the Trinity for the glory of God. God grants us participation in the future of the word through our participation in Christ, in whom we live and move and have our being. In reading, we cultivate and keep texts for their futures in the kingdom of God. In the time
5 Theōria and Theological Interpretation of Scripture from:
Antiochene Theoria in the Writings of Theodore of Mopsuestia and Theodoret of Cyrus
Abstract: Sentiment is growing even among evangelicals to make definitive statements about TIS like this:
Chapter 13 Between Reproductive Citizenship and Consumerism: from:
Kin, Gene, Community
Author(s) Remennick Larissa
Abstract: Some recent sociological analyses of reproduction approached the relations between women as mothers and various social institutions (legal and medical systems, labor market, social welfare, mass media, etc.) within the continuum between reproductive citizenship, on one hand, and individualism/consumerism, on the other. Thus, Bryan Turner (2001) has defined the concept of reproductive citizenship as a route to active social participation through reproduction, all the more important in the times of general erosion of other traditional forms of citizenship (such as worker-citizen and warrior-citizen). Reproductive citizenship is a reflection of nationalism and demographic interests of the state, which has a stake
Book Title: Time and History-The Variety of Cultures
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Rüsen Jörn
Abstract: This series aims at bridging the gap between historical theory and the study of historical memory as well as western and non-western concepts, for which this volume offers a particularly good example. It explores cultural differences in conceptualizing time and history in countries such as China, Japan, and India as well as pre-modern societies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qchrw
CHAPTER 2 Concepts of Time in Traditional Cultures from:
Time and History
Author(s) O’Donnell Joseph
Abstract: This is what determines the dimensions of measurement—for units for which constant conditions obtain. Among the Yakuts in Siberia, for example, a “clay pot” indicated the time needed to cook a meal (in, of course, a clay pot). This took a good two hours and at the same time corresponded to the distance of seven to twelve kilometers that a
CHAPTER 4 Time Concepts in China from:
Time and History
Author(s) Mittag Achim
Abstract: Whether amused or irritated, nineteenth-century travelers to China and China experts frequently remarked upon the indifference of the Chinese toward time: they often turned up for appointments half an hour, three or four hours, sometimes even days late without the slightest trace of embarrassment; the majority of the population set their time according to the position of the sun, some even according to the pupils in cats’ eyes that change according to the time of the day; in some cities time was kept by means of very unreliable water clocks or by burning joss sticks. Mechanical clocks were only to
CHAPTER 6 Interpretations of Time in Islam from:
Time and History
Author(s) Weintritt Otfried
Abstract: An analysis of the concept of time in Islam must be based on the foundations of its transcendent monotheism, out of which have emerged specific concepts of
CHAPTER 7 Constructions of Time in the Literature of Modernity from:
Time and History
Author(s) Compton J. W.
Abstract: In the extensive literature on the problems with time, Aurelius Augustinus is often named as the founder of the discourse for introducing the distinction between internal and external time.² His whole concept of time, which offers, among other things,
CHAPTER 8 History, Culture and the Quest for Organism from:
Time and History
Author(s) Al-Azmeh Aziz
Abstract: Since the spread of modernity as a consequence of the French Revolution and the political forms and concepts, the ideologies, and the legal norms it exported, a succession of seekers have set out on a quest for organism, for notions of umbilical immediacy, that is thought to go beyond the arid snares and illusions of Reason, of Jacobinism, of Bonapartism. At the time of the French Revolution and in reaction to it, and after the revolutionary waves of the 1830s and of 1918–1920, no less than after the demise of Communism, voices have multiplied and achieved demotic hegemony, seeking
CHAPTER 10 Cultural Plurality Contending Memories and Concerns of Comparative History: from:
Time and History
Author(s) Chattopadhyaya B. D.
Abstract: Historical thinking has always been at the crossroads; it is never homogenous or unilineal. Thus, the dynamics and the heterogeneity inherent in the writing of history merit emphasis at the outset of this chapter, if only because it is sometimes assumed that history-writing has taken a common approach so far. The initial points I make are, first, that the domain of history has not really ever been rigidly defined. It is not only since Marc Bloch and Lucien Febvre effectively broke down some of its time-honored but artificial barriers that history has become open-ended; the two patriarchs of what is
CHAPTER 6 The Palaestral Aspect of Rhetoric from:
Culture, Rhetoric and the Vicissitudes of Life
Author(s) Bailey F.G.
Abstract: In the late 1960s in Losa, a community of about 800 inhabitants in the Maritime Alps of northern Italy, I heard a tale – an anecdote – about a lintel. I will tell it and then ask a catch-all question: ‘What does one need to know in order to understand what
Conclusion from:
Hannah Arendt and the Uses of History
Author(s) King Richard H.
Abstract: Ironically for a thinker who has been accused—with some justification—of Eurocentrism, the issues Hannah Arendt addressed in
The Origins of Totalitarianism(1951) and her work up to the early 1960s are as relevant to the “globalized” world of today as they were to the events of her own time. Already during World War II, Arendt had realized that the West was entering an era that demanded a fundamental rethinking of its basic concepts and traditions. In particular, she contended that “the idea of humanity” entailed the moral necessity of assuming “the obligation of global responsibility . . .
1 Introduction: from:
Popular Historiographies in the 19th and 20th Centuries
Author(s) Paletschek Sylvia
Abstract: At this point in time, popular presentations of history are booming – not only in the Western world, but worldwide. Recent allusions to history as the ‘new gardening’ by a BBC representative¹ or its characterization as the ‘new cooking’ by historian Justin Champion (2008a) suggest that in Britain history-related television programmes are on their way to outdoing the highly successful gardening or cooking formats in terms of popularity. While this may be a slight exaggeration, the fact is that there has been a rising interest in history since the 1980s. From the second half of the 1990s this interest has
2 Questioning the Canon: from:
Popular Historiographies in the 19th and 20th Centuries
Author(s) Epple Angelika
Abstract: Edward Gibbon, David Hume, Jules Michelet and Leopold von Ranke are all well-known and important historians from the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries who earned fame for their role in the making of modern historiography. They were all men, however. Did women of that period write history? Of course they did, but they solely wrote popular historiography. Women across Europe lacked access to scholarly training until the beginning of the twentieth century. Consequently one cannot find any academic history written by a woman that would belong to the traditional canon of European historiography of that time. This picture alters, however, if
4 Understanding the World around 1900: from:
Popular Historiographies in the 19th and 20th Centuries
Author(s) Bergenthum Hartmut
Abstract: Why were so many people at that time interested in the history of the world? What factors caused this boom and what did this particular upsurge signify? What kind of stories do these universal histories tell and what do these reveal about Wilhelmine society? What are the functions of these popular historiographies? Why is it worthwhile analysing popular world history compendia in general? And what can be said about the relation between these popular historiographies and the academic mainstream?
8 Memory History and the Standardization of History from:
Popular Historiographies in the 19th and 20th Centuries
Author(s) Langewiesche Dieter
Abstract: ‘Memory history’ (
Erinnerungsgeschichte) is found at the start of every process of historical transmission.¹ As a theoretically grounded approach in the methodological arsenal of historical studies, however, it is a relatively new branch of historical inquiry, albeit one that is rapidly growing. The catastrophic experiences of the first half of the twentieth century contributed considerably to this. They created, according to Dan Diner in his European-oriented, universalhistorical attempt to understand this period, a separate ‘time of remembrance’, whose ‘negative telos’ overlaid other experiences and taught us to view history differently (Diner 2000: 17). The remembrance of this period, together with
CHAPTER 3 The Workings of Royal Celebrity: from:
Constructing Charisma
Author(s) KOHLRAUSCH MARTIN
Abstract: At the time Weber pondered his ideas on charismatic rule, a dramatic transformation of the monarchy was underway, owing to the emergence of mass media in Germany. In what Walther Rathenau aptly branded
CHAPTER 8 Enhoused Speech: from:
The Rhetorical Emergence of Culture
Author(s) Weiner James F.
Abstract: A recent fruitful direction in anthropological linguistics has been the resurrection of interest in language’s deictic features, its constant function of anchoring itself in time and space by way of grammatical markers that “gesture” toward reference points in the world (see, for example, Hanks 1990; Senft 1997). We have ample evidence, especially from Papuan and Austronesian languages, of the high proportion of spatial indices in speech. In this chapter, however, I would like to argue from the opposite direction: that it is also spatial and architectural practices that themselves contour and elicit certain forms of speech; that, rather than language
CHAPTER 9 Transcultural Rhetoric and Cyberspace from:
The Rhetorical Emergence of Culture
Author(s) Sapienza Filipp
Abstract: In 1908, the most popular play on Broadway was Israel Zangwill’s “The Melting Pot.” This play portrayed America as a place where different ethnicities are mixed into one kind of “American person,” and when one considers the time period, one understands the source of the play’s popularity. Between the late 1800s and early 1900s, America welcomed more immigrants to its shores than at any other period in its history. As the nation incorporated the new groups, artists and writers responded in ways to help the nation address the changing character and identity of the country. To the present day, the
CHAPTER 13 Rhetoric, Anti-Structure, and the Social Formation of Authorship from:
The Rhetorical Emergence of Culture
Author(s) Zebroski James Thomas
Abstract: We live in an age of ambiguity. At one and the same time, the cultures that we inherit at the start of the twenty-first century in Western Europe and North America are committed to
andskeptical of Enlightenment discourses. The Enlightenment values of neutrality and objectivity in scholarship, of methodological rigor and purity, of scientific method, of disciplinarity, of professionalism, of progress narratives, of grand narrative and grand theory, but also of a static, clearly demarcated, and bounded subject, who acts as a kind of atom of a similarly static, clearly demarcated, and bounded nation-state—all are in question. But
CHAPTER 14 Attention and Rhetoric: from:
The Rhetorical Emergence of Culture
Author(s) Oakley Todd
Abstract: This was the first of many times I saw or heard this exhortation during the last few months of 1999 and the first six months of the year 2000. The
Chapter 2 1950s Popular Culture: from:
Stardom in Postwar France
Author(s) Weiner Susan
Abstract: ‘Barthes is back’, announced the 4 December 2002 cover story of Les
Inrockuptibles,a weekly dedicated to international high and popular culture trends for the would-be plugged-in reader. The occasion was multiple: an exhibition dedicated to this major intellectual at Beaubourg, the revised edition of the complete works, as well as the first-time publication of his Collège de France seminars, also available on CD-ROM (fourteen and twenty-one hours of listening time).¹ Barthes may have been back in France, but for Anglo-Americans, he had never gone away. In academe, Barthes was among the first emissaries of ‘Theory,’ via the English translations
Chapter 5 Stardom on Wheels: from:
Stardom in Postwar France
Author(s) Dine Philip
Abstract: The cycle road-racer Raymond Poulidor was France’s preeminent sports star of the 1960s and early 1970s. Not widely known outside his homeland, either at the height of his career or subsequently, Poulidor was, on the face of it, an unlikely figure for elevation to sporting stardom. At a time when France was beginning to make a significant impact in international sport, many other champions were perceived as distinctly more glamorous than him: from Olympic athletes like Guy Drut and Colette Besson, to dashing skiers and sailors such as Jean-Claude Killy and Eric Tabarly, and even a swimmer turned cover-girl, in
Book Title: Dark Traces of the Past-Psychoanalysis and Historical Thinking
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Rüsen Jörn
Abstract: The relationship between historical studies and psychoanalysis remains an open debate that is full of tension, in both a positive and a negative sense. In particular, the following question has not been answered satisfactorily: what distinguishes a psychoanalytically oriented study of historical realities from a historical psychoanalysis? Skepticism and fear of collaboration dominate on both sides. Initiating a productive dialogue between historical studies and psychoanalysis seems to be plagued by ignorance and, at times, a sense of helplessness. Interdisciplinary collaborations are rare. Empirical research, formulation of theory, and the development of methods are essentially carried out within the conventional disciplinary boundaries. This volume undertakes to overcome these limitations by combining psychoanalytical and historical perspectives and thus exploring the underlying "unconscious" dimensions and by informing academic and nonacademic forms of historical memory. Moreover, it puts special emphasis on transgenerational forms of remembrance, on the notion of trauma as a key concept in this field, and on case studies that point the way to further research.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qcpp5
I Psychoanalysis, History, and Historical Studies: from:
Dark Traces of the Past
Author(s) Straub Jürgen
Abstract: The relationship between historical studies and psychoanalysis remains a concern that is open and full of tensions, in both a positive and negative sense. Particularly the question, what would distinguish a psychoanalytically oriented study of historical realities and the consciousness involved with these realities—that is a historical psychoanalysis—upon which this present volume focuses, has not been satisfactorily answered. Scepticism and fear of contact dominate on both sides. Here and there ignorance prevails, and at times there is a definite sense of helplessness concerning how a productive dialogue could even be initiated between historical studies and psychoanalysis, given the
CHAPTER 1 Three Memory Anchors: from:
Dark Traces of the Past
Author(s) Assmann Aleida
Abstract: In his novel
Das Geisterfest, the Hungarian author György Konrad writes: “I animate the stories that have survived in the amber of time.”¹ To this description I would like to add the question, is there such a thing as an “amber of time”? Or to put it in less poetic words: are there such retentive milieus for our memories? If so, one can surmise only in very exceptional cases; for our memories, as neurologists continually remind us, are generally transient, plastic, and unreliable. In response to such fleetingness, various cultures throughout time have invented stabilizing devices, from physical or pictorial
CHAPTER 4 Transgenerational Trauma, Identification, and Historical Consciousness from:
Dark Traces of the Past
Author(s) Bohleber Werner
Abstract: The Holocaust, as well as the fate of its survivors and their children, has made us realize that political and social catastrophes, the so-called man-made disasters, unsettle a society in such a persistent and lasting way that we are forced to concern ourselves over several generations with their traumatic effects, and with identifying those effects still detectable beneath the surface of our own time. Generally speaking, the generations cling together, and in so doing the heritage of the earlier one is taken up and reworked by the next. The concrete experiences of that first generation are what the next will
CHAPTER 6 Understanding Transgenerational Transmission: from:
Dark Traces of the Past
Author(s) Straub Jürgen
Abstract: It seems certain today that the term “present” encompasses far more than a merely present identity of the self. Assuming that present time equals pure presence, and stating thereby that it be nothing more than itself, means to underestimate—or neglect—Edmund Husserl’s² differentiation of
present (time)andnow.³ Psychological presence is more than some point in time (“now”), and it proves more than William James’⁴ present time of consciousness, which he analyzed inPrinciples of Psychology.
Book Title: Dark Traces of the Past-Psychoanalysis and Historical Thinking
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Rüsen Jörn
Abstract: The relationship between historical studies and psychoanalysis remains an open debate that is full of tension, in both a positive and a negative sense. In particular, the following question has not been answered satisfactorily: what distinguishes a psychoanalytically oriented study of historical realities from a historical psychoanalysis? Skepticism and fear of collaboration dominate on both sides. Initiating a productive dialogue between historical studies and psychoanalysis seems to be plagued by ignorance and, at times, a sense of helplessness. Interdisciplinary collaborations are rare. Empirical research, formulation of theory, and the development of methods are essentially carried out within the conventional disciplinary boundaries. This volume undertakes to overcome these limitations by combining psychoanalytical and historical perspectives and thus exploring the underlying "unconscious" dimensions and by informing academic and nonacademic forms of historical memory. Moreover, it puts special emphasis on transgenerational forms of remembrance, on the notion of trauma as a key concept in this field, and on case studies that point the way to further research.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qcpp5
I Psychoanalysis, History, and Historical Studies: from:
Dark Traces of the Past
Author(s) Straub Jürgen
Abstract: The relationship between historical studies and psychoanalysis remains a concern that is open and full of tensions, in both a positive and negative sense. Particularly the question, what would distinguish a psychoanalytically oriented study of historical realities and the consciousness involved with these realities—that is a historical psychoanalysis—upon which this present volume focuses, has not been satisfactorily answered. Scepticism and fear of contact dominate on both sides. Here and there ignorance prevails, and at times there is a definite sense of helplessness concerning how a productive dialogue could even be initiated between historical studies and psychoanalysis, given the
CHAPTER 1 Three Memory Anchors: from:
Dark Traces of the Past
Author(s) Assmann Aleida
Abstract: In his novel
Das Geisterfest, the Hungarian author György Konrad writes: “I animate the stories that have survived in the amber of time.”¹ To this description I would like to add the question, is there such a thing as an “amber of time”? Or to put it in less poetic words: are there such retentive milieus for our memories? If so, one can surmise only in very exceptional cases; for our memories, as neurologists continually remind us, are generally transient, plastic, and unreliable. In response to such fleetingness, various cultures throughout time have invented stabilizing devices, from physical or pictorial
CHAPTER 4 Transgenerational Trauma, Identification, and Historical Consciousness from:
Dark Traces of the Past
Author(s) Bohleber Werner
Abstract: The Holocaust, as well as the fate of its survivors and their children, has made us realize that political and social catastrophes, the so-called man-made disasters, unsettle a society in such a persistent and lasting way that we are forced to concern ourselves over several generations with their traumatic effects, and with identifying those effects still detectable beneath the surface of our own time. Generally speaking, the generations cling together, and in so doing the heritage of the earlier one is taken up and reworked by the next. The concrete experiences of that first generation are what the next will
CHAPTER 6 Understanding Transgenerational Transmission: from:
Dark Traces of the Past
Author(s) Straub Jürgen
Abstract: It seems certain today that the term “present” encompasses far more than a merely present identity of the self. Assuming that present time equals pure presence, and stating thereby that it be nothing more than itself, means to underestimate—or neglect—Edmund Husserl’s² differentiation of
present (time)andnow.³ Psychological presence is more than some point in time (“now”), and it proves more than William James’⁴ present time of consciousness, which he analyzed inPrinciples of Psychology.
Introduction: from:
Human Nature as Capacity
Author(s) Rapport Nigel
Abstract: The issue of human nature, what it is to be human, has been the central enterprise of an ‘anthropological’ science – nominally, at least – since Immanuel Kant’s (1996) first, modern formulation of the disciplinary endeavour in the late 1700s. At the same time it has been argued that in ‘human nature’ anthropology conjures with a concept compromised beyond redemption by its essentialistic, hierarchical and exclusionary history: its role in an imperialism of male over female, adult over child, advanced over primitive, Occidental over Oriental, rational over emotional, and conscientious over brutish, as representative of the essentially human. Others again
Chapter 3 ‘CRISIS’: from:
Human Nature as Capacity
Author(s) Wilson Thomas M.
Abstract: Romano Prodi, the then President of the European Commission, made the above statement at the Sixth ECSA-World Conference, Jean Monnet Project, Brussels, 5–6 December 2002. At the time it was clear that the European Union (EU) was expanding, and eastward, to first become a union of twenty-five member states in 2004 and then twenty-seven states in 2007, but the dilemma he posed concerned how to set the limits of the EU, metaphorically and geopolitically. Prodi queried the nature of public participation in the projects of expansion and consolidation – what in other circles has been called ‘widening and deepening’
13 Godless Intellectuals, Then? from:
Godless Intellectuals?
Abstract: At the conclusion of
Formes élémentaires, Durkheim posed a question: What shape will religion take in the future, as secularization, already well underway in his time, continues its expansion? I have argued that he was posing this question for the intellectuals as much as for everyone else, and that the echoes of that fact resounded in some ways that have not been fully understood. Mystic Durkheimianism, in its incarnations among the youngAnnéemembers, in the Collège de Sociologie, or in some varieties of the poststructuralism that emerged in France in the 1960s, constitutes a fascinatingly nuanced intellectual response to
10 Imperfect Vessels: from:
Practicing the Faith
Author(s) Pfeil Gretchen
Abstract: Attempts to discuss the central ritual forms of American Pentecostal and charismatic Christianity, among them conversion narrative and sermon, are troubled by a seeming conflict. They seem to be ritual forms, and at the same time, to be something more, even opposed to ritual action. The urgency and personal quality of these forms of devotional practice lead, sometimes, to readings of them as transparent statements of fact. Conversion narrative, for example, is both clearly a form of devotional practice and also “real,” compelling as autobiography and a source of information about practitioners’ lives. This chapter unpacks this paradoxical quality to
Introduction. from:
Ethno-Baroque
Abstract: Around the end of the 1970s a private furniture manufacturer from Struga (a town in southwest Macedonia) began producing wood-carved furniture.A decade later, during the period of the postsocialist transition, the proprietor named his company
Barok.This name was launched to signify opulence, wealth, and style. At the outset, the main line of production consisted of custom, handmade, luxurious (luksuzni) pieces of carved wood that required lengthy manufacturing time and cost a significant amount of money. These were purchased mainly by the members of the newly rich who had become wealthy due to their dealings in the new market economy
CHAPTER 1 From past necessity to contemporary friction: from:
Ethno-Baroque
Abstract: This chapter provides background for the circumstances under which large numbers of Albanians were “encouraged” or forced to emigrate during the Yugoslav years. It further establishes this process as the basis that later made available the resources for this underprivileged minority to become socially mobile once Yugoslavia collapsed, and the postsocialist period was introduced. Outlining the necessary historical context of the migration policies during the Socialist Federal Republic of Yugoslavia (1943–91) and the “place” of Albanian minority during socialist times, I explore the effect of diasporic connections on consumption practices, the visibility and materiality of objects brought in by
Introduction from:
The French Road Movie
Abstract: A man at the wheel of his car loses himself to the sounds of his radio and the sights of the landscape, trying to leave behind him the troubles of his work and family; while another, fuelled by whisky, drives down a midnight highway in a delirium of speed and fluorescent lights. A girl, meanwhile, her boots torn apart at the seams, hitches along dusty roads; while elsewhere, two delinquents steal a car, then blaze a trail through the country’s roads. At the same time and in another place, a desperate young man hijacks a bus, leading it at gunpoint
Chapter 5 Narrating the Self III: from:
Melanesian Odysseys
Abstract: The narratives in chapters 4 and 5 draw their vitality and very life from the landscape painted in the chapter preceding each of them. Then, sometimes tentatively but always inevitably, they proceed to paint over it, creating a palimpsest of culture, traditions, practices, ethics, persons. By now the landscape painted by the earliest narratives is completely written over, and the experiences of the narrators are based on a transformed reality. The younger adults in this chapter are all involved in the new spheres of life; instead of wars, spirit houses, courting and magic, they talk of roadbuilding work, plantation labour,
Chapter 5 Narrating the Self III: from:
Melanesian Odysseys
Abstract: The narratives in chapters 4 and 5 draw their vitality and very life from the landscape painted in the chapter preceding each of them. Then, sometimes tentatively but always inevitably, they proceed to paint over it, creating a palimpsest of culture, traditions, practices, ethics, persons. By now the landscape painted by the earliest narratives is completely written over, and the experiences of the narrators are based on a transformed reality. The younger adults in this chapter are all involved in the new spheres of life; instead of wars, spirit houses, courting and magic, they talk of roadbuilding work, plantation labour,
Book Title: Grassroots Memorials-The Politics of Memorializing Traumatic Death
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Sánchez-Carretero Cristina
Abstract: Grassroots memorials have become major areas of focus during times of trauma, danger, and social unrest. These improvised memorial assemblages continue to display new and more dynamic ways of representing collective and individual identities and in doing so reveal the steps that shape the national memories of those who struggle to come to terms with traumatic loss. This volume focuses on the hybrid quality of these temporary memorials as both monuments of mourning and as focal points for protest and expression of discontent. The broad range of case studies in this volume include anti-mafia shrines, Theo van Gogh's memorial, September 11th memorials, March 11th shrines in Madrid, and Carlo Giuliani memorials in Genoa.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qd4xs
Chapter 10 The Madrid Train Bombings: from:
Grassroots Memorials
Author(s) Sánchez-Carretero Cristina
Abstract: For more than a hundred years, anthropologists and psychologists have dealt with the role of collective mourning and the analysis of the roots of emotions. Although emotions are central for the understanding of grassroots memorials, emotions themselves are rarely the focus of research on the topic. At the same time, there is a clear social demand for the interpretation of emotions in order to, for example, understand the instrumentalizations that emotions can be the subject of in times of conflict and social unrest. In the acts of mourning performed at grassroots memorials, the emotions at play cover a wide range,
Book Title: Grassroots Memorials-The Politics of Memorializing Traumatic Death
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Sánchez-Carretero Cristina
Abstract: Grassroots memorials have become major areas of focus during times of trauma, danger, and social unrest. These improvised memorial assemblages continue to display new and more dynamic ways of representing collective and individual identities and in doing so reveal the steps that shape the national memories of those who struggle to come to terms with traumatic loss. This volume focuses on the hybrid quality of these temporary memorials as both monuments of mourning and as focal points for protest and expression of discontent. The broad range of case studies in this volume include anti-mafia shrines, Theo van Gogh's memorial, September 11th memorials, March 11th shrines in Madrid, and Carlo Giuliani memorials in Genoa.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qd4xs
Chapter 10 The Madrid Train Bombings: from:
Grassroots Memorials
Author(s) Sánchez-Carretero Cristina
Abstract: For more than a hundred years, anthropologists and psychologists have dealt with the role of collective mourning and the analysis of the roots of emotions. Although emotions are central for the understanding of grassroots memorials, emotions themselves are rarely the focus of research on the topic. At the same time, there is a clear social demand for the interpretation of emotions in order to, for example, understand the instrumentalizations that emotions can be the subject of in times of conflict and social unrest. In the acts of mourning performed at grassroots memorials, the emotions at play cover a wide range,
Book Title: The Train Journey-Transit, Captivity, and Witnessing in the Holocaust
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Gigliotti Simone
Abstract: Deportations by train were critical in the Nazis' genocidal vision of the "Final Solution of the Jewish Question." Historians have estimated that between 1941 and 1944 up to three million Jews were transported to their deaths in concentration and extermination camps. In his writings on the "Final Solution," Raul Hilberg pondered the role of trains: "How can railways be regarded as anything more than physical equipment that was used, when the time came, to transport the Jews from various cities to shooting grounds and gas chambers in Eastern Europe?" This book explores the question by analyzing the victims' experiences at each stage of forced relocation: the round-ups and departures from the ghettos, the captivity in trains, and finally, the arrival at the camps. Utilizing a variety of published memoirs and unpublished testimonies, the book argues that victims experienced the train journeys as mobile chambers, comparable in importance to the more studied, fixed locations of persecution, such as ghettos and camps.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qd53n
Chapter 2 Resettlement: from:
The Train Journey
Abstract: In his article, “German Railroads/Jewish Souls,” Raul Hilberg asked: “How can railways be regarded as anything more than physical equipment that was used, when the time came, to transport the Jews from various cities to shooting grounds and gas chambers in Eastern Europe?”¹ The railroads were a formative scholarly preoccupation for Hilberg, who trawled the archives, “pondering the special trains, the assembly of their rolling stock, their special schedules, and their financing.”² He concluded that in the hands of bureaucrats and technocrats, the railroads metamorphosed, becoming a “live organism” that “acted in concert with Germany’s military, industry, or SS to
Chapter 3 Ghetto Departures: from:
The Train Journey
Abstract: The unmaking of the modern railway experience began before victims were forced to board the trains. Roundups, unannounced inspections, ruthless extractions from apartments, and beatings were all features of the forced relocation from ghettos, towns, and villages. Observing the deportation of Jews from Salonica, Greece, Rosa Miller wrote: “And the Jews emerge, weighed down by their rucksacks, their bundles, their bags, loaded with baskets containing food for the journey ahead. Children press close to their parents, uncomprehending, fearfully following their every move. Older people have difficulty in walking, they stumble and fall sometimes, but everybody must carry their burden. Young
Chapter 4 Immobilization in “Cattle Cars” from:
The Train Journey
Abstract: With this letter, Zalmen Gradowski, a worker in a Sonderkommando unit at Auschwitz, issued an invitation. Enter the “eternally traveling Jewish train,” he asked, a plea that is not limited to wartime trains if one looks at the image of the freight car housed in the permanent exhibition at the United States Holocaust Memorial Museum (USHMM) in Washington, DC (see Figure 4.1). The image of the freight car fuses historical space and contemporary memory practices. By looking at the platform of Auschwitz from the departure side of the rail car, the photo promises an Auschwitz arrival to the museum visitor.
CHAPTER 3 Homo Rhetoricus from:
Culture and Rhetoric
Author(s) Oesterreich Peter L.
Abstract: The last decades of the twentieth century witnessed a “renaissance of rhetoric” (cf. Plett 1994), or “rhetorical turn” (Simons, ed. 1990), that has affected not only literary studies but also law, theology, aesthetics, philosophy, economics, politics, and even the natural sciences. The idea that cultures are rhetorically constituted is, of course, not new, and there have been various earlier attempts to address the subject—for example, Plato, Nietzsche, Burke, Heidegger, Gadamer, and others. But I think that there still is much to gain by rethinking this time-honored topic, and in this paper I will explore the possibility of a more
CHAPTER 11 Convictions: from:
Culture and Rhetoric
Author(s) Herzfeld Michael
Abstract: I begin this essay with two polemical propositions. First, I oppose the strong separation of material and symbolic that appears to be the parochial inheritance of Cartesianism in social anthropology, and regard it as an intellectual proxy for relegating certain groups of people into past time or primitive status—Fabian’s (1983) “allochronism.” However much some of our colleagues seek to avoid the problem by waggling apostrophe-like fingers every time they use the taboo word “primitive,” they do not avoid the problem by ironizing it or by seeming to bury it in a self-deprecating gesture: it is apparently as hard to
CHAPTER 3 Homo Rhetoricus from:
Culture and Rhetoric
Author(s) Oesterreich Peter L.
Abstract: The last decades of the twentieth century witnessed a “renaissance of rhetoric” (cf. Plett 1994), or “rhetorical turn” (Simons, ed. 1990), that has affected not only literary studies but also law, theology, aesthetics, philosophy, economics, politics, and even the natural sciences. The idea that cultures are rhetorically constituted is, of course, not new, and there have been various earlier attempts to address the subject—for example, Plato, Nietzsche, Burke, Heidegger, Gadamer, and others. But I think that there still is much to gain by rethinking this time-honored topic, and in this paper I will explore the possibility of a more
CHAPTER 11 Convictions: from:
Culture and Rhetoric
Author(s) Herzfeld Michael
Abstract: I begin this essay with two polemical propositions. First, I oppose the strong separation of material and symbolic that appears to be the parochial inheritance of Cartesianism in social anthropology, and regard it as an intellectual proxy for relegating certain groups of people into past time or primitive status—Fabian’s (1983) “allochronism.” However much some of our colleagues seek to avoid the problem by waggling apostrophe-like fingers every time they use the taboo word “primitive,” they do not avoid the problem by ironizing it or by seeming to bury it in a self-deprecating gesture: it is apparently as hard to
Transnational Approaches to Contentious Politics: from:
Protest Beyond Borders
Author(s) Romanos Eduardo
Abstract: Emerging from an international workshop, this volume examines a variety of different aspects of social mobilization since 1945, while the contributors constitute an equally heterogeneous group of young political scientists and historians, anthropologists, as well as researchers on social movement and the media. Their research poses numerous questions covering a broad range of issues across time and space, looking retrospectively at global interactions during the Cold War, as well as looking forward at reconfigurations of protest politics in the twenty-first century, both in Western and Eastern Europe. Blurring chronological and geographical boundaries of study and merging strictly defined methods and
Chapter 1 Extraparliamentary Entanglements: from:
Protest Beyond Borders
Author(s) Oppenheimer Andrew
Abstract: This chapter explores the role played by expressions of solidarity in the ethical and political economies of West German social movements.¹ Despite their prominence in postwar vocabularies of protest, expressions of solidarity have received little scholarly attention. What analysis there has been treats solidarity as a self-evident, stable term of analysis reflecting the common cause of activists internationally in supposedly related campaigns for liberation from structural forms of neocapitalist and neocolonial oppression.² Absent from this is any concern for the internal dynamics of these expressions—the claims they signify at given moments in time; the motivations that underlie them; and
Chapter 4 Stairway to Heaven or Highway to Hell? from:
Protest Beyond Borders
Author(s) Buzogány Aron
Abstract: The coming together of Europe has multiplied both opportunities and constraints for societal actors from the new member states to pursue their interests within the multi-level settings of the European Union (EU). On the one hand, European integration has been seen as an essential factor affecting the structures, strategies, and visibility of these actors by opening new opportunity structures and providing supplementary access points that can be used in complementary ways to the pre-existing national ones. At the same time, however, this process is also creating new constraints for participation and collective mobilization and is seen to favor some societal
Chapter 5 Communicating Dissent: from:
Protest Beyond Borders
Author(s) Teune Simon
Abstract: Just as its forerunners were, the Group of Eight (G8) summit in Heiligendamm, Germany, was challenged by protests emerging from the global justice movements (GJMs). The images of protest were complementing and at times eclipsing the images of the official summit.¹ When we recall the events in June 2007, we think of colorful marches with thousands and tens of thousands of participants, clowns poking fun at the security forces, protesters in black disguises throwing stones, discussions at the alternative summit, or activists roaming the fields near Heiligendamm to blockade the access to the venue.
Chapter 6 Digitalized Anti-Corporate Campaigns: from:
Protest Beyond Borders
Author(s) Niesyto Johanna
Abstract: As mass media-communicated corporate public relations and product advertising form conditions for the distribution of product and corporate images, the transformation into a multimedia society and, in particular, the introduction and widespread appropriation of the Internet, enable the sociotechnical possibility of converting political protest in favor of anti-corporate campaigns using a consumerist repertoire. Appealing to citizens as “netizen consumers” creates new options for a politicization of market sphere-related activities.¹ Protest actors promoting consumer resistance use the Internet as a site of contestation: they use digital communication tools to deconstruct brand images and re-contextualize them against the backdrop of global justice.
Chapter 9 Organizational Communication of Intermediaries in Flux: from:
Protest Beyond Borders
Author(s) Lachenmeier Dominik
Abstract: Until recently, social scientists who studied formal organizations and social scientists who studied social movements had little to do with each other. But as Gerald F. Davis and his co-authors observe “developments in the wider society and in scholarship have made it clear that the time is ripe to break down the barriers between these two fields.”¹ Following this ambition, this chapter focuses on so-called “intermediary organizations,” such as political parties, associations or nongovernmental organizations (NGOs), which often have their historical roots in social movements.
Afterword. from:
Protest Beyond Borders
Author(s) Porta Donatella della
Abstract: First, most scholarship has, time and again, confirmed the relevant role that national political opportunities play in influencing social movement mobilization, its dimension, duration, and forms. The modern repertoire of protest has emerged with the creation of the nation-state¹ and social movements have played an important role in the development of (national) citizenship rights.² So, it is at the national level that
Introduction: from:
Narrating the Nation
Author(s) Berger Stefan
Abstract: Nation is narration.¹ The stories we tell each other about our national belonging and being constitute the nation. These stories change over time and place and are always contested, often violently so. Few paradigms in the realm of cultural sense-production have been as powerful as the national one, and the prominence of nationalism as an ideology and social movement in the world of today testifies to its continued and global appeal. The need for a better understanding of national narratives and how they have functioned from the early nineteenth century to the present day led the European Science Foundation to
Chapter 2 Drawing the Line: from:
Narrating the Nation
Author(s) Lorenz Chris
Abstract: In December 1985 William McNeill presented a paper to the American Historical Association’s annual meeting. At the time McNeill, who had earned his fame with widely acknowledged books such as
The Rise of the WestandPlagues and People,was president of the AHA and one of the pioneers of a kind of history which has since become known as ‘global history’ or ‘world history’. The title of his paper was as original as it was enigmatic: ‘Mythistory, or Truth, Myth, History, and Historians’. Published in the same year as a chapter in a volume entitledMythistory and Other Essays,
Chapter 7 Families, Phantoms and the Discourse of ‘Generations’ as a Politics of the Past: from:
Narrating the Nation
Author(s) Weigel Sigrid
Abstract: The discourse of ‘generations’ has for some time dominated the German
Zeitgeist.Recently, however, the inception of a new era within this discourse has entered the culture pages of the newspapers, this most sensitive of seismographic instruments when it comes to registering even the tiniest shifts in collective states of mind. In the political sphere, the contract between the generations is becoming the object of negotiations that could possibly end up blowing apart the structures of the social welfare state altogether. At the same time, however, a whole series of films and literary publications are revealing the awakening amongst the
Chapter 11 Personifying the Past: from:
Narrating the Nation
Author(s) Wintle Michael
Abstract: National narratives have been expressed in a variety of different ways, most commonly and perhaps most importantly in print. However, identities and narratives can also be expressed visually, with an often immediate effect that rivals other media in the representation of complex human messages and emotions. This chapter will pay particular attention to ‘the visual’ in the process of narrating the nation. Chronologically the highpoint of national self-assertion among European nations was reached around the time of New Imperialism in the decades before the First World War, a period of intense nationalism. This was also a peak period in the
Chapter 2 “There Will Be a Lot of Old Young Men Going Home”: from:
Young Men in Uncertain Times
Author(s) Irwin Anne
Abstract: The title of this chapter was inspired by a comment made to me by a key informant during the course of field research with a Canadian infantry rifle company engaged in combat operations in Southern Afghanistan during the summer months of 2006.¹ He was an experienced soldier, a sergeant whom I had known since 1996 when I had studied the same unit during peacetime training in Canada. The company had been “outside the wire,” that is, outside the protective confines of the coalition base at Kandahar Air Field, for several weeks, but had returned to the base for two days
Chapter 11 Big Man System, Short Life Culture: from:
Young Men in Uncertain Times
Author(s) Evans Gillian
Abstract: Towards the end of the summer holiday in southeast London in 2009, in the week when young people are awaiting their GCSE results, a sixteen-year-old black boy is stabbed five times in broad daylight. An A* student without any reputation for making trouble, the young man was said to be simply on his way home, traveling through his own neighborhood. The incident sent a ripple of terror—another ripple of terror—through the network of concerned parents of teenage boys in Southeast London. The stabbing symbolized fears of a horrifying escalation in violent knife crime on the streets. This was
Book Title: Conflicted Memories-Europeanizing Contemporary Histories
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Ramsbrock Annelie
Abstract: Despite the growing interest in general European history, the European dimension is surprisingly absent from the writing of contemporary history. In most countries, the historiography on the 20th century continues to be dominated by national perspectives. Although there is cross-national work on specific topics such as occupation or resistance, transnational conceptions and narratives of contemporary European history have yet to be worked out. This volume focuses on the development of a shared conception of recent European history that will be required as an underpinning for further economic and political integration so as to make lasting cooperation on the old continent possible. It tries to overcome the traditional national framing that ironically persists just at a time when organized efforts to transform Europe from an object of debate to an actual subject have some chance of succeeding in making it into a polity in its own right.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qdff2
Chapter 3 Writing National Histories in Europe: from:
Conflicted Memories
Author(s) Berger Stefan
Abstract: The rise of national identity discourses in Europe accompanied the growing professionalization and institutionalization of history writing in the nineteenth century. Consequently national history writing became, for about one century between 1850 and 1950, the dominant form of history writing across Europe. Of course, national history had been written long before the nineteenth century. Thus we can trace histories of England, for example, to medieval times.¹ And of course, national history continued to be a popular genre after the 1950s, in big nation-states as much as in smaller and reemerging or nascent nation states. National histories thus possess a long
Chapter 4 Between Europe and the Nation: from:
Conflicted Memories
Author(s) Lagrou Pieter
Abstract: As we all know, French contemporary history followed a very peculiar path. From 1789 until at least 1945, the French nation was deeply divided over the implications of the founding event of French contemporary history, the Revolution.¹ From Robespierre to Napoleon III, Captain Dreyfus, Charles Maurras, Léon Blum, and Philippe Pétain, the cleavage over the legacy of the revolution—
les guerres franco-françaises—provides again and again the interpretational framework needed to understand French history. Not that 1945 was the end of it: the momentous changes of 1958, 1968, and 1981 served each time to underscore how, in some inscrutably French
Chapter 11 Economics of Western European Integration? from:
Conflicted Memories
Author(s) Steiner André
Abstract: The Europeanization of economic life is not a new phenomenon in recent history. Traders have consistently been connected throughout the various parts of Europe, and the emergence of the modern nation-state did not bring transnational economic activities to an end. The first multinationals emerged in Europe in the second half of the nineteenth century, and their economic importance further increased in the twentieth century. But the attempt to create a transnational economic area with supranational institutions was successful for the first time only after the Second World War. Western European integration began as an economic process with the Marshall Plan,
Chapter 13 International Socialist Attempts at Bridge-Building in the Early Postwar Period from:
Conflicted Memories
Author(s) Appelqvist Örjan
Abstract: It is all too easy for historians to allow the Cold War division process of 1947–1948 to retroactively overshadow the tentative character of the apprehensions, projects, and choices guiding different political actors during the postwar planning period that spanned from the final phase of the Second World War and the immediate transition to conditions of peace. It is all too easy to forget the weight of history felt by European postwar planners at that time, realized primarily as fear: of a repetition of the economic chaos after the First World War, and of renewed German aspirations to avenge and
Postscript from:
Conflicted Memories
Author(s) Geyer Michael
Abstract: Lewis Carroll’s Cheshire cat had a way of disappearing ‘quite slowly, beginning with the end of the tail, and ending with the grin, which remained some time after the rest of it had gone.’ This uncanny ability left behind a flummoxed Alice (‘I have often seen a cat without a grin . . . ; but a grin without a cat?’) and generated a major conundrum when the cat’s grinning head appeared on, of all places, the Queen’s Croquet Ground. In view of the intrusion, the king wanted the cat beheaded, because anything that had a head could be beheaded,
Chapter 9 Pulling the Pants off History: from:
The Great Tradition and Its Legacy
Author(s) Malkin Jeanette R.
Abstract: One of Thomas Bernhard’s most historically specific plays,
Vor dem Ruhestand(Eve of Retirement, 1979) is also one of his most ritualistic. A play of “doubleness” and unsynthesizable tensions, it is both realistic and metaphoric, structured both causally and cyclically. Steeped in public history, it simultaneously ritualizes history through private memory. This doubleness—the coexistence of historical and ahistorical consciousness, of development and stasis, time and timelessness—is, no doubt, central to Bernhard’s work as a whole; and it is knowingly, indeed pointedly used by Bernhard in this play to both reflect and implicate the history and memory of his
Chapter 12 Displaying (Out)Rage: from:
The Great Tradition and Its Legacy
Author(s) Wheelock Gretchen A.
Abstract: All men accuse women, but I excuse them even if they do change their affections a thousand times a day. Some call it a vice, others a habit, but to me it seems to be a necessity of the heart.… Repeat with me: Così fan tutte!”¹ Don Alfonso’s summary, “Così fan tutte,” (all women are like that) has been read by some as simply misogynist and by others as a universalizing statement about the changeable affections of youthful lovers.² Even so, it is the young women in this opera who are shown to be unfaithful when put to the test.
Chapter 15 Schoenberg’s Music for the Theater from:
The Great Tradition and Its Legacy
Author(s) Cherlin Michael
Abstract: In several respects, Schoenberg was born in one world and died in another. The time and city of his birth, Vienna 1874, places Schoenberg in the capital of the Austro-Hungarian Empire toward the end of a century celebrated for its achievements in the arts and architecture, science, and commerce. Musically speaking, Vienna in the 1870s, 1880s, and 1890s was the city of the waltz, and of course, it was also a city whose high musical art was dominated by Johannes Brahms. Brahms, more than any other composer, forged the musical values of Schoenberg’s youth. The time and place of Schoenberg’s
2 The photological apparatus and the desiring machine. Unexpected congruences between the Koninklijk Museum, Tervuren and the U’mistà Centre, Alert Bay from:
Academic Anthropology and the Museum
Author(s) Saunders Barbara
Abstract: One feature¹ of a museum is the performative naturalisation of ‘objective’ relations between a state² and ‘its’ culture or master narrative of descent, through changing, and sometimes deceptively diffuse and decentralised means (Duncan and Wallach 1980, Hooper Greenhill 1992).³ A museum’s task is to construct a shifting multiplicity of tableaux vivants as facets or dimensions of the state.⁴ The Israel Museum in Jerusalem is exemplary:⁵ science and evolution validate the narrative of descent and warrant the cultural-historical blue-print. The cradle of civilisation is presented through archaeology, sacred texts⁶, history, contemporary art, and prestigious travelling exhibitions.⁷ Exhibits convey a sense of
3 Picturing the museum: from:
Academic Anthropology and the Museum
Author(s) Porto Nuno
Abstract: Photography and museum studies have recently entered into dialogue, as historians and anthropologists begin to deal with that peculiar class of museum artefacts: the photographic archives. Roughly three types of approach can be distinguished. First there is the approach that sees photographic collections as the basis for historical discourse on a specific social group at a specific point in time, such as Geary’s (1988) work on Bamum. Then there is the line that sets out from the transformation of views about a specific group, constructed through time by several different authors, who may or may not have known about each
7 Towards an ethnography of museums: from:
Academic Anthropology and the Museum
Author(s) Ou C. Jay
Abstract: Recent controversies at the Smithsonian Institution in Washington, D.C. provoked our thinking about the involvement of anthropology in museums over time and about a revitalised, ethnographically-informed interest in museums and museum exhibits by anthropologists that has been increasingly evident since the 1980s. One of the Smithsonian controversies dealt with the
Enola Gayexhibit, which commemorated the fiftieth anniversary of the dropping of atomic bombs on the Japanese cities of Nagasaki and Hiroshima. The second controversy centred aroundScience in American life, an exhibit located at the National Museum of American History, and will be described in more detail below. Both
3 The Feminization of the Teaching Profession in Belgium in the Nineteenth and Twentieth Centuries from:
Between Educationalization and Appropriation
Author(s) Simon F.
Abstract: More or less at the same time, in our book about the social position of
5 Educationalisation: from:
Between Educationalization and Appropriation
Author(s) Depaepe M.
Abstract: Long before there was talk of any ‘postmodernism’ in philosophy or in historiography, the German philosopher Friedrich Nietzsche (1844-1900), with this citation from his
Genealogy of Morality,¹ pointed out that our perception of things – and thus also of the past – has always been colored by our perspective. Because we are biologically situated in a specific spatial (social and cultural) and temporal (historical) context, we can do nothing other than look from a specific standpoint (casu quo perspective) at what lies behind us. And since time always further blurs (and ultimately even erases or wipes out) the past, this
7 Educationalization as an Ongoing Modernization Process from:
Between Educationalization and Appropriation
Author(s) Smeyers P.
Abstract: In several Western societies we witness today an increasing tendency to “educationalize” social problems. As an institution, the school is, among other things, held accountable for solving social inequalities (related to class, race, and gender); for reducing traffic deaths, obesity, teenage sex, and environmental destruction; and for enhancing public health, economic productivity, citizenship, and even performances in sport contests such as the Olympic Games. Pushing these kind of “social” responsibilities on schools is a process that has been under way for a long time and coincides with the role of education in the formation of the modern nation-state. This phenomenon
8 About Pedagogization: from:
Between Educationalization and Appropriation
Author(s) Simon F.
Abstract: For history researchers, it is not a needless luxury to consider from time to time the content and the significance of the basic concepts they use, certainly if they have the ambition to interpret and/or explain history in addition to purely describing it. This self-reflection, compelled by the annually recurring dialogue with educational philosophers (cf. Smeyers & Depaepe, 2006),² need not necessarily place an emphasis on philosophical abstraction but can just as well start from an examination of the history of one’s own research. Such an approach need not succumb to navel-gazing. Instead, such historical self-reflection possibly points to the creeping
15 Modern Architecture Meets New Education: from:
Between Educationalization and Appropriation
Author(s) Depaepe M.
Abstract: A number of ambitious and innovational plans were sketched in the course of the twentieth century for L’École Decroly l’Ermitage, a progressive school for “normal” children founded in 1907 by Ovide Decroly (1871-1932).¹ Among them were the 1946 plans of architects Renaat Braem (1910-2001) and Jack Sokol (1911-1977) and the 1972 design of the
Groupe Brederode(cf. Figure 1).² The latter design dates back to the period in which the school, located on the edge of Terkamerenbos in Ukkel (south of Brussels), was threatened with expropriation because of the plans to expand the Brussels Ring.³ At this time, architects Emmanuel
Science and Religion, an Uneasy Relationship in the History of Judeo-Christian-Muslim Heritage from:
Islam & Europe
Author(s) al-Azm Sadik J.
Abstract: Behind the
Satanic Verseslurks not just the novelist Salman Rushdie, but indeed, as the phrase literally indicates, the devil himself. That his verses had disappeared (or –horribile dictu– been cancelled) from Sura 53 ‘The Star’ of theQur’ândoes not take away from the fact that they had been ‘there’. Muhammad was their mental receiver and scribe, unaware of their being inspired by the devil and not, as usual, by Gibreel. Their actual absence only bears witness to their one-time presence. In this way, Iblis has had his negative share in the editing of theQur’ân.
Why we are so obsessed by Islam? from:
Islam & Europe
Author(s) Ali Tariq
Abstract: In his book
Islam: Past, Present and Future(2004), which is the final volume of a trilogy on the religions of the book – Judaism, Christianity and Islam – the German Catholic theologian and philosopher Hans Küng quotes Tariq Ali as an alternative voice on Islamic history and culture, as well as on the difficult interactions between today’s leading civilizations. Küng raises the question: “Why didn’t Islam, contrary to other world religions, such as Christianity and Judaism, witness a reformation? Why didn’t we have renewal at that time? This reformation would have taken place if Islamic culture in al-Andalus had
FROM ARS TO AMOR: from:
Medieval Manuscripts in Transition
Author(s) CLAASSENS Geert H.M.
Abstract: Books make great gifts. In fact, a book is always a double gift: an object, and a text. These days such a gift is a relatively straightforward affair, in the sense that there are plenty of books on offer, which is evidently not to say that giving a book is always a cheap option. Beautifully bound volumes printed on high-quality paper can cost an arm and a leg, not to mention the time and brainspace that has to be invested in selecting a book whose worth the recipient will be able to properly appreciate.
THE RECYCLING OF LITURGY UNDER PIPPIN III AND CHARLEMAGNE from:
Medieval Manuscripts in Transition
Author(s) HEN Yitzhak
Abstract: The age of Pippin III (d. 768) and Charlemagne (d. 814) was a significant period of liturgical formation in the early medieval West. For the first time in the history of western Christendom a concerted interest in liturgy was demonstrated by rulers who obviously recognised the political and social advantages that lay within the patronage of liturgy.¹ Several unrelated sources clearly associate Pippin III with the introduction of the
cantus Romanusinto Francia, and consequently credit him with replacing thecantus Gallicanuswith what were understood to be Roman musical traditions.² Walahfrid Strabo (d. 849) even recounts that it was
THE MANUSCRIPT OF THE ENSEIGNEMENT DE VRAIE NOBLESSE MADE FOR RICHARD NEVILLE, EARL OF WARWICK, IN 1464 from:
Medieval Manuscripts in Transition
Author(s) VISSER-FUCHS Livia
Abstract: In 1461 both France and England had a new king. Louis XI of France succeeded his father in July; Edward IV, of the house of York, had defeated his predecessor, of the house of Lancaster, in March and was crowned in June. The change of dynasty in England owed much to the greatest magnate in the country, Richard Neville, Earl of Warwick, who because of this and his later political activities is known today as ‘the Kingmaker’. During his lifetime the rest of Western Europe was well aware of Warwick’s position; indeed, continental princes may have had an almost exaggerated
Quasi-beliefs and Crazy Beliefs: from:
Origins and Ends of the Mind
Author(s) Garvey Brian
Abstract: This paper concerns what Freud called the ‘special characteristics’ of the unconscious. According to his metapsychological writings, unconscious mental states differ from conscious ones not just in not being conscious, but in having what he calls ‘systematic’ features, such as exemption from mutual contradiction, imperviousness to the influence of external reality, and so forth. Yet he still wants to characterise them as mental states. He is often explicit in his use of psychological language to describe them. Even when he is not, he makes it clear that the mechanistic-sounding language he sometimes uses is to be understood metaphorically. The movements
Lacan and Ethics: from:
Origins and Ends of the Mind
Author(s) Derbyshire Philip
Abstract: Towards the end of ‘The Function and Field of Speech and Language in Psychoanalysis’, the so-called ‘Rome Discourse’ published in
Écrits, Lacan gives an encomium to the practice of psychoanalysis: ‘Of all the undertakings that have been proposed in this century’, he says, ‘that of the psychoanalyst is the loftiest, because [his] undertaking acts in our time as the mediator between the man of care and the subject of absolute knowledge’ (Lacan 1953a: 106). I take this to mean that for the early Lacan, the psychoanalyst has a privileged position in mediating an emergent knowledge of the subject and a
Book Title: Beyond Federal Dogmatics (pdf)-The Influence of EU Law on Belgian Constitutional Case Law Regarding Federalism
Publisher: Leuven University Press
Author(s): Feyen Stef
Abstract: The relationship between EU law and national constitutional law, including constitutional law in federalism matters, has been subject to an ongoing scholarly debate. This monograph contributes to this debate in two ways. The author argues for an approach to constitutional law that goes beyond the classic - coined dogmatic - understanding of constitutional case law regarding federalism as expounded in Belgian academia. Building on that basis, he sets out to rethink the framework within which the connection between EU law and national constitutional law can be understood. The analysis delves into the relationship (and sometimes tension) between ‘rule-of-law' values (which may serve as checks upon instrumental forms of reasoning) and the toolbox deployed in constitutional court case law to accommodate several rather pragmatic needs.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qf0vf
Foreword from:
Beyond Federal Dogmatics (pdf)
Author(s) Alen André
Abstract: In some respects, this book has characteristics which one could expect from a junior researcher: it tries to be innovative, explores issues from a (whole array of) different angle(s), and could be read as provocative. At the same time, the work radiates academic maturity in some other respects: the depth and width of the considerations taken into account are impressive, and even if some points might come across as provocative
Introduction from:
Beyond Federal Dogmatics (pdf)
Abstract: In our “enlightened” times, the concept of dogma has acquired a rather negative connotation. Most people seem to believe that we should not accept dogma(ta) without constant, or at least potential critical reflection¹. Even so, dogma continues to be relied upon in certain areas of life where we strive for a form of authoritative certitude, such as religion, or law. It seems as if our quest for stability here warrants the use of a modus of a thought that builds upon a set of premises that are accepted without constant critical re-examination, as authoritative. Dogma, in that very broad sense,
Conclusion from:
Beyond Federal Dogmatics (pdf)
Abstract: At the same time, the Constitutional Court has had to fulfill the difficult task of finding an adequate balance between
Book Title: Islam & Europe-Crises are Challenges
Publisher: Leuven University Press
Author(s): SHAH Prakash
Abstract: Within the framework of the Forum A. & A Leysen, several experts from in and outside the Muslim world contributed to this book. In Islam and Europe: Crises Are Challenges they discuss how dialogues between Islam and the West, with a focus on Europe, can be achieved. The various authors (legal scholars, political theorists, social scientists, and psychologists) explore in these collected essays such interrelated questions as: How much diversity is permissible within a liberal pluralistic democratic society? How strong are the implications of citizenship? What are equitable accommodations of contested practices? They argue for an adequate understanding of how Western Muslim communities in Europe experience their minority position and what needs to be done to improve their participation in European society. The second part of this volume is a collection of papers written around the work of Abdullahi Ahmed An-Na'im, who also makes his own contribution to the book. The Catholic University of Leuven awarded An-Na'im an honorary doctorate in 2009 on the theme of multiculturalism, intercultural relations and diversity. An-Na'im is recognized the world over as a leading expert in the area of religion and law, and as a human rights activist. Islam and Europe: Crises Are Challenges reinforces our sense that a better knowledge and awareness of the growing diversity of our society, and striving for harmonious relations between Islam and the West, are among the most important challenges of our time. With contributions by: Ahmed Aboutaleb, Durre S. Ahmed, Abdullahi Ahmed An-Na'im, Shaheen Sardar Ali, Mohamed Benzakour, Jean-Yves Carlier, Marie-Claire Foblets, Ziba Mir-Hosseini, Fouad Laroui, Bettina Leysen, Rashida Manjoo, Bhikhu Parekh, Mathias Rohe, Cedric Ryngaert, Prakash Shah. Other publication: Islam and Europe, Challenges and Opportunities
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qf1dm
‘European Islam or Islamic Europe’: from:
Islam & Europe
Author(s) `im Abdullahi Ahmed An-Na
Abstract: The first part of my title is a play of words on the title of John Bowen’s book,
Can Islam be French? Pluralism and Pragmatism in a Secularist State¹. Since the book is not available at the time of this writing, I am not presuming in the least to pre-empt or evaluate Professor Bowen’s argument and analysis. Rather, I wish to offer my own personal reflections on the underlying issues and questions, without attempting to respond to Bowen’s analysis or to any of the chapters of the present volume, edited by Marie-Claire Foblets and Jean-Yves Carlier. In particular, I propose
The Indian Dimension of An-Na ‘Im’s Islam and the Secular State from:
Islam & Europe
Author(s) Shah Prakash
Abstract: As a London LLM student in the early 1990s I recall An-Na ‘im’s writing (An-Na ‘im 1990a) as one of the few then available discussions of human rights not only within the Islamic world, but also more widely in non-Western contexts. At the time, the voice of non-Western jurisprudence, particularly in light of the universal claims of essentially Western concepts of human rights, was hardly heard and, even in the post-cold war period, this field is still not exactly replete with deeper reflections about the significance and relevance of human rights concepts and ideas for non-Western peoples. An-Na ‘im’s contributions
Islam and the Democratic State under the Rule of Law – And Never the Twain Shall Meet? from:
Islam & Europe
Author(s) Rohe Mathias
Abstract: It goes without saying that neither secular democratic states nor Islam as a religion could be perceived to be homogeneous and immutable in time and space. this paper will firstly focus on misunderstandings relating to secularity and democracy: Contrary to the widespread understanding of secularity among Muslims, secular states open broad space not only for the private exercise of religion, but also for its public practice and appearance. As to democracy, Muslim traditionalists use to juxtapose its mechanisms to the ‘eternal provisions of God-given Sharia’. It will be briefly demonstrated that every norm, being derived from God or a human
2 Liminal Futures: from:
Subversion, Conversion, Development
Author(s) Watts Laura
Abstract: The following prose poem was a response to my first month of ethnography in Orkney, an archipelago off the northeast coast of Scotland. I wanted to gather my experiences and evoke them in a way that academic prose could not do. At the time, I was living and working with people who imagine and design future technologies in the islands. My interest was, and is, in how location and landscape affect the way the future is imagined and made. How are futures made differently in different places? Why are certain landscapes and places regarded as centers of innovation, and others
5 Sacred Books in a Digital Age: from:
Subversion, Conversion, Development
Author(s) Hugh-Jones Stephen
Abstract: The use of digital technologies in the reproduction of texts has profoundly transformed attitudes toward books and also the production and format of books themselves. Remarkably, at a time when it is often suggested that digital books may soon supersede conventional books, there has been a lot of rethinking about what a book is, as both object and artifact (Boutcher 2012, 59). In addition it is often assumed that digital technologies will lead inexorably to a universalization and standardization that will override cultural differences and local identities. The way in which digital technologies are used in relation to books appears,
7 Making the Invisible Visible: from:
Subversion, Conversion, Development
Author(s) Lewis Jerome
Abstract: Pygmy hunter-gatherers in the Congo Basin are reputed simply to vanish when danger is imminent. They are famous for supposedly using such skills when accomplishing seemingly impossible tasks such as single-handedly spearing a fierce forest elephant or vanishing suddenly into the forest and then reappearing just as suddenly when it suits them. Their fearfulness of incoming agriculturalists and fisher groups led them to avoid such newcomers, sometimes for many years, before tentatively making contact through practices such as silent trade.¹ One consequence of this is that non-Pygmy groups in the Congo Basin frequently call Pygmy hunter-gatherers “Twa,” “Tua,” or “Cwa”
9 Structuring the Social: from:
Subversion, Conversion, Development
Author(s) Blackwell Alan F.
Abstract: The goal of this chapter is to present a view from the inside, as it were. I am concerned with the inside of ICT—because where there is a technology, there must also be technologists. How, then, are the themes of this book perceived by information and communications technologists? It is important to note that the phrase “information and communications technologist” is not one that I would choose myself. Indeed, from within our profession, the phrase “ICT” is often considered pejorative and even hostile, a construction of commentators and policy makers who wish to caricature our work. At the time
2 Creating Life: from:
Synthetic Biology and Morality
Author(s) Boldt Joachim
Abstract: The invention and development of recombinant DNA techniques in the 1970s led to what is nowadays known as “genetic engineering” and to “genetically modified organisms” such as transgenic maize, insulin-producing bacteria, and the oncomouse. Synthetic biology is usually thought of as a more recent development. It may come as a surprise, then, that the term “synthetic biology” entered the scientific scene around the same time as “genetic engineering.”
3 Engineered Microbes in Industry and Science: from:
Synthetic Biology and Morality
Author(s) Kaebnick Gregory E.
Abstract: With some scientific and technological developments, the public gets excited when the technology hits the streets and generates new products and services. Radio caught the public’s attention when radios became available. The Internet had been in the works for some years before most people even knew about it. But with developments in biology, the excitement tends to precede the application. In the 1990s, genetic engineering was going to cure the incurable; fifteen years on, there are only a few scattered reports of success, and then only on a few individuals at a time and not completely smoothly (the treatment has
6 Synthetic Bacteria, Natural Processes, and Intrinsic Value from:
Synthetic Biology and Morality
Author(s) Preston Christopher J.
Abstract: Today’s synthetic biology, just like traditional biotechnology, raises important questions about the moral significance of its products; and questions about the “use” values and disvalues of synthetic organisms are especially prominent among these. It is, after all, the uses—and, by extension, the markets—for these new bacterial organisms that typically drive research into their production. Also significant, however, are questions about the intrinsic (or inherent) value of bacteria produced through synthetic means.¹ If the public’s reaction to older forms of biotechnology is any indication, sentiments about these intrinsic values and disvalues are widespread, wielding a greatly underestimated, popular power.
CAPÍTULO 4 Poeta profeta: from:
Mitos cristianos en la poesía del 27
Abstract: Mirando con algo de perspectiva este trabajo veremos que desde el primer capítulo hasta este que nos ocupa, han pasado unos diez años de la vida de nuestros poetas.¹ En estos diez años, de 1918 a 1928 aproximadamente, los poetas del veintisiete han desarrollado su poesía más intelectualizada, aquella que responde a la ‘deshumanización del arte’ descrita por Ortega y Gasset. Y sin embargo, y aun suponiéndose que dicha deshumanización del arte surgió como reacción contra los excesos retóricos y sentimentales del Romanticismo (Geist 1980: 152–55), en realidad no se han apartado del paradigma románticomoderno tal y como se
CAPÍTULO 4 Poeta profeta: from:
Mitos cristianos en la poesía del 27
Abstract: Mirando con algo de perspectiva este trabajo veremos que desde el primer capítulo hasta este que nos ocupa, han pasado unos diez años de la vida de nuestros poetas.¹ En estos diez años, de 1918 a 1928 aproximadamente, los poetas del veintisiete han desarrollado su poesía más intelectualizada, aquella que responde a la ‘deshumanización del arte’ descrita por Ortega y Gasset. Y sin embargo, y aun suponiéndose que dicha deshumanización del arte surgió como reacción contra los excesos retóricos y sentimentales del Romanticismo (Geist 1980: 152–55), en realidad no se han apartado del paradigma románticomoderno tal y como se
CAPÍTULO 4 Poeta profeta: from:
Mitos cristianos en la poesía del 27
Abstract: Mirando con algo de perspectiva este trabajo veremos que desde el primer capítulo hasta este que nos ocupa, han pasado unos diez años de la vida de nuestros poetas.¹ En estos diez años, de 1918 a 1928 aproximadamente, los poetas del veintisiete han desarrollado su poesía más intelectualizada, aquella que responde a la ‘deshumanización del arte’ descrita por Ortega y Gasset. Y sin embargo, y aun suponiéndose que dicha deshumanización del arte surgió como reacción contra los excesos retóricos y sentimentales del Romanticismo (Geist 1980: 152–55), en realidad no se han apartado del paradigma románticomoderno tal y como se
Book Title: Soul-Black Power, Politics, and Pleasure
Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Green Richard C.
Abstract: No other word in the English language is more endemic to contemporary Black American culture and identity than "Soul". Since the 1960s Soul has been frequently used to market and sell music, food, and fashion. However, Soul also refers to a pervasive belief in the capacity of the Black body/spirit to endure the most trying of times in an ongoing struggle for freedom and equality. While some attention has been given to various genre manifestations of Soul-as in Soul music and food-no book has yet fully explored the discursive terrain signified by the term. In this broad-ranging, free-spirited book, a diverse group of writers, artists, and scholars reflect on the ubiquitous but elusive concept of Soul. Topics include: politics and fashion, Blaxploitation films, language, literature, dance, James Brown, and Schoolhouse Rock. Among the contributors are Angela Davis, Manning Marable, Paul Gilroy, Lyle Ashton Harris, Michelle Wallace, Ishmael Reed, Greg Tate, Manthia Diawara, and dream hampton.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qfg2m
BY WAY OF AN INTRODUCTION from:
Soul
Author(s) Green Richard C.
Abstract: And she should know. As the reigning Queen of soul, Aretha Franklin’s life attests to that sweet sensuality that lends power to the voice, spirit to the body and depth to understanding. Soul is the stuff of our dreams and marks that magical domain of powerful nothingness where fantasies and ancestors live. Aimé Cesaire recognized the revolutionary potential of such surrealist manifestations; but at the same time, everybody’s favorite soul-brother-number-one, James Brown, embodies a gritty, gut-wrenching reality which has transcended national boundaries and crossed
10 Soul, Transnationalism, and Imaginings of Revolution: from:
Soul
Author(s) Joseph May
Abstract: Revisiting seventies socialism and soul culture from the vantage point of the United States in the nineties raises important questions about the structures of enjoyment embedded in the anticapitalist stance of many emergent socialist states, such as Tanzania during that turbulent time. Most critiques of seventies socialist cultures readily dismiss socialism as having no soul. The inherent assumption of such critiques is that capitalism is the sole arbiter of enjoyment through free and ideologically uncontaminated flow of consumption. Such binary critiques oversimplify the relationship between state formations and citizens as consumers. These critiques further elide the intricate and nuanced strategies
16 The Legend of Soul: from:
Soul
Author(s) Gonzales Michael A.
Abstract: Sometimes, when I’m sitting in my boy’s ride listening to the radio or flipping stations in my own book-cluttered office, I remind myself of one of those cranky old bastards lounging in some ghetto barbershop, inhaling on filterless Camels and screaming their aged opinions as though they were carved in Moses’s tablets.¹ “They don’t make soul music like they used to,” I’m tempted to yell, over the latest sample-heavy Puffy/Bad Boy remix blaring from the bleak landscape known as urban radio. Yet, unlike Nelson George suggested in his groundbreaking text
The Death of Rhythm and Blues,I do not feel
19 “Ain’t We Still Got Soul?” from:
Soul
Abstract: Greg tate: Supposedly, it’s not an easy thing to meet your maker—not unless you’re a writer, that is. Our profession provides the once-in-a-lifetime opportunity of inventing your parents, of creating a lineage and ancestry out of words others have set down on a page. The Soul Conference wasn’t the first time I found myself in the company of Amiri Baraka and Thulani Davis, but it was an occasion to pay homage to three writers I’d claim for birth canals any day. If not Baraka’s tales
System of Dante’s HellandBlack Music,I’d have never run up on prose
2 Resignation from:
A Politics of the Ordinary
Abstract: When we are bored, we allow ourselves a certain liberty that can take the form of a kind of self-conscious pause. This is a moment of loneliness that sometimes leads us to deep reflections concerning the human condition. Such an experience is democratically available to anyone who is willing and able to move past the distractions offered up as the fruits of the social contract, to resist the way our commodities come to establish themselves as the conditional terms through which we live together. The most democratic claim we may make in this regard is that we might all be
Introduction: from:
America's Education Deficit and the War on Youth
Abstract: There is by now an overwhelming catalogue of evidence revealing the depth and breadth of the corporate- and state-sponsored assaults being waged against democracy in the United States. Indeed, it appears that the nation has entered a new and more ruthless historical era, marked by a growing disinvestment in the social state, public institutions, and civic morality. The attack on the social state is of particular importance because it represents an attempt to shift social protections to the responsibility of individuals while at the same time privatizing investments in the public good and undermining the bonds of communal solidarity. The
9. Neoliberalism’s War against Teachers in Dark Times: from:
America's Education Deficit and the War on Youth
Abstract: The tragic deaths of twenty-six people shot and killed on December 14, 2012, at Sandy Hook Elementary School in Newtown, Connecticut, included twenty young children and six educators. All of the children were shot multiple times. Many more children might have been killed or injured had it not been for the brave and decisive actions of the teachers in the school. The mainstream media was quick to call them heroes, and there is little doubt that what they did under horrific circumstances reveals not only how important educators are in shielding children from imminent threat, but also how demanding their
10. Dangerous Pedagogy in the Age of Casino Capitalism: from:
America's Education Deficit and the War on Youth
Abstract: All over the world, the forces of neoliberalism are on the march, dismantling the historically guaranteed social provisions provided by the welfare state, defining profit-making and market freedoms as the essence of democracy, and diminishing state regulation of the economy. At the same time that the forces of privatization, deregulation, and financial marketization tighten their grip on all aspects of society, the social state is transformed into the punishing state and increasingly violates civil liberties as part of an alleged war against terrorism. Echoing the ideology of Margaret Thatcher, advocates of neoliberalism appear secure in their dystopian vision that there
1 Global Immigrants: from:
The Lebanese Diaspora
Abstract: In December 2008 I set out to obtain an entry visa from the German Consulate in Cairo, preparing to attend an academic workshop there. I was in Cairo visiting my family and thought that spending a day of my vacation at the consulate would be better than taking the time from my busy teaching schedule in the US. After a long wait, I handed the receptionist the stack of required papers for my visa. She took one quick look at my papers and exclaimed that my application could not be processed at the consulate in Cairo, since the supporting documents
5 Conclusion: from:
The Lebanese Diaspora
Abstract: I was introduced to Michel through other Lebanese friends. He is the first respondent I interviewed, and luckily he quickly became interested in my research project and offered much appreciated help. He lived in New York but knew others in Montreal and Paris and promised to introduce me to them. In the fall of 2001 I joined him on my first trip to Montreal as a researcher. I had visited the city before but had not established any contacts with possible informants. We arrived in the city after dinner time, on a Friday night, without any plan to meet specific
INTRODUCTION from:
Legal Intellectuals in Conversation
Abstract: A bit of personal background is necessary to fully understand the motivation behind this project. I attended Yale Law School between 1986 and 1989. It was truly an exciting time to be at Yale, which had more of the feel of a think tank than a law school. There were ideas flying around from every direction, but the big idea that captivated my imagination was law and economics. This was a predictable outcome given my undergraduate training in economics. But law and economics was only one of an array of theoretical positions being bandied about, which included law and literature,
7 Postmodern Legal Theory from:
Legal Intellectuals in Conversation
Author(s) CORNELL DRUCILLA
Abstract: CORNELL: I went to undergraduate school starting in 1968. By that time I’d already been a political radical, and had been involved in the civil rights movement from the time I was in high school. In fact, I volunteered to go to a black high school when I was fifteen. My first college was Scripps College and there was a struggle at that time to have a black studies program, so I quickly became involved in that. I became
9 DIVINE SANCTION AND LEGAL AUTHORITY: from:
Religion Morality & the Law
Author(s) NEWTON LISA
Abstract: Affirmative answers to these questions must be less than welcome to liberals in the time of an administration that seems to be trying to take us back to a Puritan theocracy as part of its evangelical conservative mission. And part, at least, of the philosophical
2. Modern Conceptual Jurisprudence from:
Postmodern Legal Movements
Abstract: During the first part of this century, the study of jurisprudence was like an inductive science: principles of law were pragmatically derived from the raw data of appellate opinions much in the same way that the laws of nature were derived from scientific experiments. Law students were instructed on how to dissect appellate court cases like medical students were instructed to dissect cadavers—both dissected for purposes of discovering the universal truth of their objects. The conceptualism of this era was also associated with the substantive due process tradition of constitutional law—a time when the Supreme Court incorporated common
9. Critical Race Theory from:
Postmodern Legal Movements
Abstract: As the 1980s came to a close, a new movement in legal thought emerged offering a new epistemological source for law derived from the “actual experience, history, culture, and intellectual tradition of people of color.”¹ This movement developed as racial-minority scholars within critical legal studies and other progressive networks established “an African American movement”² in legal studies to approach problems of race from the unique perspective of African Americans. Critical race theorists asserted that it was time for “different and blacker voices [to] speak new words and remake old legal doctrines.”³ The critical race theory movement emerged as minority scholars
7 Character from:
Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Mechling Jay
Abstract: The concept of character has two uses in children’s literature discourse. One use belongs to literary criticism, as the critic and reader observe the people in a story or novel as “characters,” that is, as agents or actors (Burke 1973 ) whose actions move a story through time. The other use refers to the moral qualities of a person. These uses of “character” are related, as the root of the English word lies in a Greek word for a tool used to mark or engrave a material (
Oxford English Dictionary[OED]).
10 Class from:
Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Bullen Elizabeth
Abstract: The word “class” comes to English from the Latin
classisvia the Frenchclasse. It first appears in Thomas Blount’sGlossographia(1656), where he defined it in the language of the times as “an order or distribution of people according to their several Degrees.” Citing Blount, theOxford English Dictionary(OED) traces the term’s origins to its use by Servius Tullius who, seeking to raise funds for the Roman military, conducted a census for the purpose of taxing citizens according to their means. He created six categories or classes, based on property or net wealth (Kostick 2005). In spite of
14 Domestic from:
Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Nelson Claudia
Abstract: The term “domestic” derives from the Latin
domus(house), through the Middle Frenchdomestique. TheOxford English Dictionary’s (OED) earliest usages are early sixteenth century, by which time the word already had multiple meanings: the achievement of quasi-familial intimacy, as in the 1521 supplication “make hym domestique /Within the heuyns,” but also homegrown rather than foreign. While “domestic” always implied closeness, the extent of the sphere of proximity varied. That sphere might be the individual (John Norris’s 1707Treatise on Humilitydefines “domestic ignorance” as “the ignorance of . . . what passes within our own breast,” notes theOED);
19 Girlhood from:
Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Reid-Walsh Jacqueline
Abstract: According to the
Oxford English Dictionary(OED), “girlhood” has been in use from the mid-eighteenth century until the present day as both a singular and a plural noun. From the first cited use—notably, in Samuel Richardson’sClarissa(1747–48), a novel concerning the paragon of virtuous adolescent girlhood—the term “girlhood” has had a history as an ideologically loaded term in Western culture. As the following brief definitions indicate, several meanings overlap: “The state of being a girl; the time of life during which one is a girl. Also: girls collectively.” Its different denotations and connotations make for a
23 Identity from:
Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Coats Karen
Abstract: In the various branches of the natural, mathematical, and human sciences, “identity” has a range of uses related to the property of sameness or consistency of an element regardless of the influence of other variables. “Personal identity,” the subset most relevant to studies children’s literature, is defined in the
Oxford English Dictionary(OED) as “the sameness of a person or thing all times and in all circumstances; the condition or fact that a person or thing is itself and not something else.” This definition has a rigidity that most contemporary scholars of children’s literature will find objectionable. Rather than being
30 Literacy from:
Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Paul Lissa
Abstract: In
Keywords, the term “literacy” does not have an entry of its own. Instead, Raymond Williams (1976) traces its evolution from its fourteenth-century root, “literature.” For the first three hundred years of its life, “literature” was an all-purpose word referring sometimes to “being well-read,” and at other times to “the books in which a man is well-read” (Williams 1976). Gradually, this common-ancestor word divided into several distinct species: the root-word, “literature,” strengthened its links to nationhood (as in English literature or French literature); “literate” came to describe being well-read; “literary” became associated with the “profession of authorship”; and “literacy” arose
32 Modernism from:
Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Reynolds Kimberley
Abstract: Arguably no word maps the kind of cultural shifts in language that Raymond Williams (1976) was documenting better than “modernism.” At its simplest this is because of its roots in the word “modern.” Inevitably, what is modern at one time eventually becomes dated and of its time, and so from the first recorded use of that root word in 1500, through the appearance of the word “modernism” itself in 1737, to the fin de siècle, it was a shifting signifier, referring to the present of any given period, rather than a specific historical moment or movement (
Shorter Oxford English Dictionary),
34 Nature from:
Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Hollindale Peter
Abstract: For the environmentalist and literary critic alike, “nature” has multiple meanings. The zoologist Colin Tudge (2005) observes that “
alldefinitions of nature are simply for convenience, helping us to focus on the particular aspect that we happen to be thinking about at the time.” Of the General Prologue to Chaucer’sCanterbury Tales(1387), the literary critic John F. Danby (1961) notes that for Chaucer, the word has three dimensions: Nature is a kind of goddess, the collective force of animate life; it is the material world of organic growth and change; and it is the responsive disposition in the hearts
1 What Are Hindu-Inspired Meditation Movements? from:
Transcendent in America
Abstract: On a jumbo jet filled with meditators headed for Switzerland, I awakened to the sound of a stewardess’s voice. “I have been instructed to wake you twenty minutes before breakfast so you have time to concentrate,” she softly intoned over the PA system. Some of us chuckled quietly at her choice of words. Our guru, Maharishi, told us never to use the word “concentrate” for “meditate.” But this was 1973, before the word “meditation” had seeped into the international vocabulary. It was a foreign concept to our Swiss stewardess who was only following instructions. Around me I heard people shifting
2 Laying the Foundation for American-Style Hinduism from:
Transcendent in America
Abstract: We live in succession, in division, in parts, in particles. Meantime within man is the soul of the whole; the wise silence; the universal beauty, to which every part and particle
4 Dys-/Disarticulation and Disability from:
The Disarticulate
Abstract: There would seem to be a gap in my thinking that now it is time to try to discuss. My notion of the dys-/disarticulate appears to fall under the broad category of “disability” as it has been delineated over the past twenty years in the field of disability studies. I have referred to some of this work in preceding chapters, but have not yet addressed directly the question of this project’s relation to the field. The study of dys-/disarticulation is in part a study of the uses and changes in terminologies for people with varieties of cognitive impairment—idiot, feebleminded,
Epilogue: from:
The Disarticulate
Abstract: Two very different texts occur to me as forming the end to this book. One, Roman Jakobson’s 1956 essay “Two Aspects of Language and Two Types of Aphasic Disturbances,” I return to, having read it many times over the past decade. The other, David Goode’s 1994
A World without Words: The Social Construction of Children Born Deaf and Blind, I’ve been reading for the first time. Jakobson’s essay is a classic of rhetoric, linguistics, poetics, and literary theory that is remarkable also for its attempt to serve as an intervention into clinical practice. Goode’s book consists of case studies of
4 Dys-/Disarticulation and Disability from:
The Disarticulate
Abstract: There would seem to be a gap in my thinking that now it is time to try to discuss. My notion of the dys-/disarticulate appears to fall under the broad category of “disability” as it has been delineated over the past twenty years in the field of disability studies. I have referred to some of this work in preceding chapters, but have not yet addressed directly the question of this project’s relation to the field. The study of dys-/disarticulation is in part a study of the uses and changes in terminologies for people with varieties of cognitive impairment—idiot, feebleminded,
Epilogue: from:
The Disarticulate
Abstract: Two very different texts occur to me as forming the end to this book. One, Roman Jakobson’s 1956 essay “Two Aspects of Language and Two Types of Aphasic Disturbances,” I return to, having read it many times over the past decade. The other, David Goode’s 1994
A World without Words: The Social Construction of Children Born Deaf and Blind, I’ve been reading for the first time. Jakobson’s essay is a classic of rhetoric, linguistics, poetics, and literary theory that is remarkable also for its attempt to serve as an intervention into clinical practice. Goode’s book consists of case studies of
Book Title: 22 Ideas to Fix the World-Conversations with the World's Foremost Thinkers
Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Sakwa Richard
Abstract: The aftershocks of the 2008 financial crisis still reverberate throughout the globe. Markets are down, unemployment is up, and nations from Greece to Ireland find their very infrastructure on the brink of collapse. There is also a crisis in the management of global affairs, with the institutions of global governance challenged as never before, accompanied by conflicts ranging from Syria, to Iran, to Mali. Domestically, the bases for democratic legitimacy, social sustainability, and environmental adaptability are also changing. In this unique volume from the World Public Forum Dialogue of Civilizations and the Social Science Research Council, some of the world's greatest minds - from Nobel Prize winners to long-time activists - explore what the prolonged instability of the so-called Great Recession means for our traditional understanding of how governments can and should function. Through interviews that are sure to spark lively debate,22 Ideas to Fix the Worldpresents both analysis of past geopolitical events and possible solutions and predictions for the future.The book surveys issues relevant to the U.S., Europe, Asia, Africa, and the Middle East. Speaking from a variety of perspectives, including economic, social, developmental, and political, the discussions here increase our understanding of what's wrong with the world and how to get it right. Interviewees explore topics like the Arab Spring, the influence of international financial organizations, the possibilities for the growth of democracy, the acceleration of global warming, and how to develop enforceable standards for market and social regulation. These inspiring exchanges from some of our most sophisticated thinkers on world policy are honest, brief, and easily understood, presenting thought-provoking ideas in a clear and accessible manner that cuts through the academic jargon that too often obscures more than it reveals.22 Ideas to Fix the Worldis living history in the finest sense - a lasting chronicle of the state of the global community today.Interviews with: Zygmunt Bauman, Shimshon Bichler and Jonathan Nitzan, Craig Calhoun, Ha-Joon Chang, Fred Dallmayr, Mike Davis, Bob Deacon, Kemal Dervis, Jiemian Yang, Peter J. Katzenstein, Ivan Krastev, Will Kymlicka, Manuel F. Montes, Jose Antonio Ocampo, Vladimir Popov, Jospeh Stiglitz, Olzhas Suleimenov, Jomo Kwame Sundaram, Immanuel Wallerstein, Paul Watson, Vladimir Yakunin, Muhammad Yunus
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qg8m2
Introduction from:
22 Ideas to Fix the World
Author(s) Dutkiewicz Piotr
Abstract: It is trivial at this point to state that the world is in crisis. The aftereffects of the most recent global financial crisis continue to have major implications for the lives of tens of millions of people around the world, just as they continue to influence the fate of policymakers, political systems, and corporate behavior. Myriad other global crises—of democracy, governance, ecology, and inequality, among others—all contribute to a precarious present. Quite simply, we live in uncertain times—in a sort of ‘inter-regnum’ between old and new ruling paradigms.
Conclusion from:
22 Ideas to Fix the World
Author(s) Sakwa Richard
Abstract: The first is a crisis of the reproduction of the future. As Ivan Krastev notes, time horizons
Introduction from:
Elizabeth Cady Stanton, Feminist as Thinker
Author(s) Smith Richard Cándida
Abstract: Although Elizabeth Cady Stanton (1815–1902) was a prolific writer who produced far-ranging explorations of the political, social, historical, and religious dimensions of women’s subordinate status, little of her writing has been easily available. She is an important figure in the development of intellectual life in the United States but known today for only a handful of pieces, most prominently “The Declaration of Sentiments” drafted for the 1848 Seneca Falls women’s rights convention and her 1892 address, “Solitude of Self.”¹ Historians of women’s rights have concentrated on Stanton’s role as activist and agitator in the earliest woman’s suffrage organizations,² but
Chapter 1 Elizabeth Cady Stanton, the Long View from:
Elizabeth Cady Stanton, Feminist as Thinker
Author(s) Gornick Vivian
Abstract: Elizabeth Stanton once wrote of Susan Anthony: “In ancient Greece she would have been a Stoic; in the era of the Reformation, a Calvinist; in King Charles’ time, a Puritan; but in this nineteenth century, by the very laws of her being, she is a Reformer.”
Chapter 6 “Free Woman Is a Divine Being, the Savior of Mankind”: from:
Elizabeth Cady Stanton, Feminist as Thinker
Author(s) Kern Kathi
Abstract: In 1896 the National American Woman Suffrage Association repudiated Elizabeth Cady Stanton’s recently published book,
The Woman’s Bible. In a debate that was widely publicized in the national press, suffragists weighed and measured the extent to which Stanton’s controversial work had damaged their movement. Stanton was devastated. But she was also convinced that her critique of religion was more timely than ever.¹ The very integrity of the republic was at stake. “Much as I desire the suffrage,” she wrote, I would rather never vote than to see the policies of our government at the mercy of the religious bigotry of
Chapter 3 “Address to the Tenth National Women’s Rights Convention on Marriage and Divorce, New York City, May 11, 1860” from:
Elizabeth Cady Stanton, Feminist as Thinker
Abstract: Editors’ Note: Two months after the 1860 passage of a broad Married Women’s Property Act for New York State, Stanton called for radical liberalization in state laws governing divorce. At the time, state laws varied greatly, and only Indiana and Connecticut provided relatively liberal terms for securing divorces. Not only did all of the newspaper coverage and most of Stanton’s male friends criticize her call that her home state of New York follow in this direction, but many in the women’s rights audience disagreed, believing that making marriages easier to dissolve was no way, to use Stanton’s phrase, to “protect
Chapter 4 “Address to Anniversary of American Equal Rights Association, May 12, 1869, New York City” from:
Elizabeth Cady Stanton, Feminist as Thinker
Abstract: Editors’ Note: With the insult of the Fourteenth and Fifteenth Amendments fresh in her mind, Stanton demanded an additional amendment—had it passed it would have been the Sixteenth—to add woman suffrage to the Constitution. This speech, delivered at the meeting in which the Reconstruction-era coalition on behalf of universal (black and woman both) suffrage gave way to a focused woman suffrage movement, is a remarkable mix of Stanton’s natural rights convictions with a new set of influences and arguments justifying suffrage for woman as a distinct, even salvational social force. Stanton gave this address at a time of
Chapter 11 “Worship of God in Man” (1893) from:
Elizabeth Cady Stanton, Feminist as Thinker
Abstract: Editors’ Note: The same year that Stanton resigned her position as president of the National American Woman Suffrage Association (NAWSA) and delivered “Solitude of Self” to a variety of audiences, she submitted several speeches to be read for her at the Columbian Exposition in Chicago. Stanton prepared addresses to the Women’s Congress and to the World’s Parliament of Religions. By this time she had begun her work onThe Woman’s Bible,in which she dissected the most sexist portions of the Jewish and Christian scriptures. In the following selection, she highlighted selections from the Bible that promoted respect for human
CHAPTER ONE TRUTH AND LOVE ANCHORED IN THE WORD from:
Religious Imaginaries
Abstract: Because Barrett Browning’s connection to Congregationalism in her adult life has been under-recognized to date, this chapter necessarily begins with remapping the poet’s postmarriage religious commitments. Though somewhat preliminary to the main argument of the chapter, the opening pages resituate Barrett Browning within—or at least close to—a church group that has mistakenly been judged in its midcentury character by the theology and practice of an earlier time. The mistake matters for literary studies because it has marred our perception of the importance of religion to arguably the most important woman poet of the period. Certain of Barrett Browning’s
CHAPTER FOUR MANIFESTATION, AESTHETICS, AND COMMUNITY IN CHRISTINA ROSSETTI’S VERSES from:
Religious Imaginaries
Abstract: In moving from a consideration of Christina Rossetti’s religious imaginary as shaped within Anglican and Anglo-Catholic worship to a close reading of the religious poetry itself, this chapter focuses primarily on Rossetti’s last publication.
Verses,published in 1893, one year before Rossetti’s death, is the poet’s only collection of solely religious poetry. I focus on it for two reasons. First, becauseVersesconcentrates on religious poetry, its liturgical associations emerge more clearly than in the shorter devotional sections or isolated religious poems scattered across other volumes; at the same time, sinceVersesis not a collection of newly written poems
CHAPTER SIX RELIGIOUS-POETIC STRATEGIES IN ADELAIDE PROCTER’S LYRICS, LEGENDS, AND CHAPLETS from:
Religious Imaginaries
Abstract: In contrast to the long publishing careers of Barrett Browning and Rossetti, Adelaide Procter’s public poetic career spanned only nine years: it began in 1853 with a poem printed in Dickens’s
Household Wordsand concluded in 1862 withA Chaplet of Verses,which Procter prepared as a fund-raiser for the Providence Row Night Refuge, a shelter for homeless women and children managed by the Sisters of Mercy.¹ The poetry published over this decade voices Procter’s Roman Catholic imaginary in different ways: sometimes subtly, sometimes overtly. Procter’s poetry of the earliest years after her conversion from Anglicanism does not yet manifest
INTRODUCTION: from:
Biography and turning points in Europe and America
Author(s) Hackstaff Karla B.
Abstract: As long as we have a notion of a self-identity, most people have a moment in their life when they have been forced to recognise, as a result of events, that ‘I am not the same as I was, as I used to be’ (Strauss, 1959, p 95). This is the basic definition of the sociological concept of ‘turning points’ provided by Anselm Strauss in his 1959 book,
Mirrors and masks: The search for identity. Since then it has been an important sociological concept for investigating identities over a lifetime in the context of an ever-changing structural, cultural and interpersonal
FOUR Migration biography and ethnic identity: from:
Biography and turning points in Europe and America
Author(s) Boldt Thea D.
Abstract: There is no single way of understanding migration, but the one I know of is to think of it as a journey with a certain goal. In times of global migration, there are countless people on the move every day. They intentionally set forth to make new achievements and take new chances in life. Thus, it often surprises me that there is hardly any empirical research that emphasises the empowering aspects of migration experience, and only a few researchers who conceptualise migration as an exciting, hopeful, future-oriented biographical project (see Morokvasic, 1991, 1993; Apitzsch, 2000, 2003; Lutz, 2000). Instead, migration
SIX Problem-structuring dynamics and meta-governance from:
The governance of problems
Abstract: This chapter explores a theory of problem-structuring dynamics. It follows the structuration logic proposed by Giddens (1979), showing how policy actors can influence the nature of institutionalised systems of interaction while at the same time being constrained by them. On the one hand, problem-frame shifts and the possibilities for policy change depend on the structure of policy networks. A closed, institutionalised policy network differs from an open, emergent or decaying network. Part of the difference is in shaping different types of policy-making processes, with different capacities for problem processing, and, therefore, speed, scope and direction of policy change and innovation.
Book Title: Re-imagining child protection-Towards humane social work with families
Publisher: Policy Press
Author(s): Morris Kate
Abstract: Why has the language of the child and of child protection become so hegemonic? What is lost and gained by such language? Who is being protected, and from what, in a risk society? Given that the focus is overwhelmingly on those families who are multiply deprived, do services reinforce or ameliorate such deprivations? And is it ethical to remove children from their parents in a society riven by inequalities? This timely book challenges a child protection culture that has become mired in muscular authoritarianism towards multiply deprived families. It calls for family-minded humane practice where children are understood as relational beings, parents are recognized as people with needs and hopes and families as carrying extraordinary capacities for care and protection. The authors, who have over three decades of experience as social workers, managers, educators and researchers in England, also identify the key ingredients of just organizational cultures where learning is celebrated. This important book will be required reading for students on qualifying and post-qualifying courses in child protection, social workers, managers, academics and policy makers.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qgzfm
SEVEN Thinking afresh about relationships: from:
Re-imagining child protection
Abstract: It is our contention in this chapter that the vocabularies with which social workers in children’s services describe relationships have become impoverished. This is a point we have alluded to elsewhere in this book, but here we develop it further. Their motivations for ‘choices’ made are described as both clear and also suspicious and deliberately hidden. They are failing to put their children’s needs before their own. They are choosing to stay with a violent partner. If they are men they are useless or dangerous, or both. We argue here that it is time to resurrect the intensity and the
[Part 1: Introduction] from:
Communities in Dispute
Abstract: The relation between the Gospel and Epistles of John is fraught with perplexities. On one hand, much of the vocabulary and sentence construction between these two sets of writings are similar, while differences also abound. They certainly represent the same sector of the early Christian movement, but were they written around the same time, by the same person, to the same audience, or might there be a multiplicity of answers to each of these questions? Therefore, any attempt to ascertain the character of the Johannine situation, as well as the meaning of its writings’ content, must first begin with seeking
[Part 3: Introduction] from:
Communities in Dispute
Abstract: Having addressed the literary composition and historical-situation features of the Johannine Epistles, their theological and ethical content becomes more readily accessible and understandable. In addition to an adequate understanding of their composition and context helping the reader get the content right, however, misconstruing such features may impede one’s adequate understanding of their message, so a good deal of modesty is required in any approach to the Johannine Epistles, as one must remind oneself that evidence can sometimes be seen as pointing in more than one direction.
Reading from No Place: from:
Latino/a Biblical Hermeneutics
Author(s) Hidalgo Jacqueline M.
Abstract: One mild December evening, while I was still pursuing a Master of Arts degree, I sat with my elder brother Jorge and my father (also Jorge) around my father’s kitchen table. His kitchen table sits in the same home my parents owned when I was born, a home located in a suburb of San José, Costa Rica. On this particular evening, I was recovering from surgery, sipping water weakly through a straw, when my brother decided it was time to confront my father about a pressing family matter. My brother pointed out that he was now a father who had
Advancing Latino/a Biblical Criticism: from:
Latino/a Biblical Hermeneutics
Author(s) Segovia Fernando F.
Abstract: Latino/a biblical criticism has from the beginning raised the question of critical task: the identity and role of the critic. This problematic it has pursued in recurrent fashion through the years, with greater intensity in recent times. Such focalization may be viewed as the result of various intersecting factors, social as well as cultural: the striking rise in population numbers within the country; the widening presence of points of origin from Latin America and the Caribbean; and the growing sophistication in matters of method and theory within the field of studies. With exploding demographics, multiplying backgrounds, and expanding discourses, the
16 Understanding in Historical Science: from:
Scientific Understanding
Author(s) KOSTER EDWIN
Abstract: The sense of understanding would be epistemically idle phenomenology were it not so poisonous a combination of seduction and unreliability. It actually does harm, sometimes making us squeamish about accepting true claims that we don’t personally understand, and more often operating in the opposite direction, causing us to overconfidently accept false claims because they have a
Book Title: France’s Colonial Legacies-Memory, Identity and Narrative
Publisher: University of Wales Press
Author(s): BARCLAY FIONA
Abstract: France’s Colonial Legacies offers a timely intervention in the debates around the French empire and its place in the life of the contemporary nation, drawing on the expertise of researchers working in the fields of politics, media, cultural studies, literature and film, to offer a wide-ranging picture of remembrance in contemporary France.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qhc42
Chapter Two From ‘Écrivains coloniaux’ to Écrivains de ‘langue française’: from:
France’s Colonial Legacies
Author(s) PARKER GABRIELLE
Abstract: The legacy of empire lies quietly under the surface, ready to manifest itself in contemporary French culture, including its literary institution. The history and evolution of one of its minor components, the Société des romanciers et auteurs coloniaux français, reflect the spirit of the times that witnessed its successive incarnations: the rash certainties of conquest, their inglorious loss, the uneasy mix of nostalgia and amnesia, the enduring determination to maintain central influence over an ill-defined periphery.¹
Chapter Four Derrida’s Virtual Space of Spectrality: from:
France’s Colonial Legacies
Author(s) BARCLAY FIONA
Abstract: The inevitable media attention surrounding the fiftieth anniversary of Algerian independence resurrected the ghosts of a conflict that many would have preferred to lay to rest. For a time the carefully managed official commemorations replaced the silence which habitually covers one of the most painful episodes in France’s recent history, highlighting the contradictions which characterise the nation’s attitude towards this period. This chapter seeks to tease out some of these conflicts, arguing that the events of 1962 continue to resonate within France because they function as a nexus of continuity and rupture, one which marked a moment of watershed for
Chapter Six (Un)packing the Suitcases: from:
France’s Colonial Legacies
Author(s) KIDD WILLIAM
Abstract: Given fateful salience in the ultimatum of the Front de libération nationale (FLN), ‘the suitcase or the coffin’ (‘la valise ou le cercueil’) and omnipresent in photographs of the
pieds-noirs(French settlers in Algeria) disembarking in France in the summer of 1962 ‘with their two statutory suitcases’ (‘avec leurs deux valises réglementaires’), the humble suitcase has acquired enduring resonance in the folk memory, narrative structures and iconography of the European exodus from Algeria whose predominantly maritime dimensions were the subject of a major conference in Marseilles in September 2008.¹ A conference-based volume was published under the titleLes valises sur
Chapter Nine Anti-racism, Republicanism and the Sarkozy Years: from:
France’s Colonial Legacies
Author(s) MARTIN THOMAS
Abstract: As has been well documented in academic and media circles, Nicolas Sarkozy’s discourse on race, immigration and national identity is one of the defining themes of recent French politics.¹ Less attention, however, has been afforded to groups that may consider it their role to present an alternative view of society. In this chapter, I propose to examine the ideology and strategy of two contrasting anti-racist groups – SOS Racisme (SOS) and the Mouvement des Indigènes de la République (MIR) – in relation to the political climate of 2005–9, a timeframe which encompasses several key events that brought to the surface issues
Book Title: Emyr Humphreys-A Postcolonial Novelist?
Publisher: University of Wales Press
Author(s): GREEN DIANE
Abstract: This book explores in detail the novels written by Emyr Humphreys during a timespan of over fifty years, from his first, A Little Kingdom, published in 1946, to The Gift of a Daughter, published in 1998.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qhf1h
Chapter Three Marie Darrieussecq and the Voice of the Mind from:
French Fiction into the Twenty-First Century
Abstract: Marie Darrieussecq (b.1969) is the youngest of the five writers, and has at the time of writing barely a decade to her career as a published author. In this short time, however, she has established herself as a significant voice in European literature. Following the
succès de scandaleof her first novel,Truismes(1996), which divided critics yet went on to become the kind of publishing sensation not seen in France since Françoise Sagan’sBonjour Tristesse(1954), Darrieussecq has produced six further novels, along with several shorter pieces and non-fiction works.¹ The later novels, which will be our main concern
Chapter Three Marie Darrieussecq and the Voice of the Mind from:
French Fiction into the Twenty-First Century
Abstract: Marie Darrieussecq (b.1969) is the youngest of the five writers, and has at the time of writing barely a decade to her career as a published author. In this short time, however, she has established herself as a significant voice in European literature. Following the
succès de scandaleof her first novel,Truismes(1996), which divided critics yet went on to become the kind of publishing sensation not seen in France since Françoise Sagan’sBonjour Tristesse(1954), Darrieussecq has produced six further novels, along with several shorter pieces and non-fiction works.¹ The later novels, which will be our main concern
Introduction from:
The Brazilian Road Movie
Author(s) BRANDELLERO SARA
Abstract: Journeys and life on the road have fired the human imagination since time immemorial and inspired some of literature’s most enduringly popular narratives. Film did not escape this attraction, and the birth of cinema itself is tantalizingly associated with recording the experience of being on the move. Early cinema, as Giuliana Bruno has pointed out, ‘envisioned “panoramic views” that incorporated site-seeing journeys and the spatio-visual desire for circulation that had become fully embedded with modernity.’¹ Such connection between mobility and film is encoded in the very titles of some of the new medium’s earliest outputs, from the Lumière brothers’ landmark
Chapter Three Bye bye Brasil and the Quest for the Nation from:
The Brazilian Road Movie
Author(s) BRANDELLERO SARA
Abstract: Carlos Diegues’s 1979 road movie
Bye bye Brasil, nominated for the Palme d’Or at Cannes in 1980, ranks among Brazil’s most enduringly popular productions, having enjoyed national and international favour among public and critics alike. The film follows the adventures and misadventures of a group of travelling artists who go under the name of Caravana Rolidei, as they move around Brazil’s vast territory, struggling to make ends meet, in search of ever-dwindling audiences for their small-time circus act. They first step onto the scene in a modest town in the interior of the impoverished north-east of Brazil, moving on to
Chapter Eight Back to the Margins in Search of the Core: from:
The Brazilian Road Movie
Author(s) NAGIB LÚCIA
Abstract: The crisis of the national project in the early 1990s, caused by a short-lived but disastrous government, led Brazilian art cinema, for the first time, to look at itself as periphery and reapproach the old colonial centre, Portugal.
Terra estrangeira(Foreign Land, Walter Salles and Daniela Thomas, Brazil/Portugal, 1995), a film about Brazilian exiles in Portugal, is the best illustration of this perspective shift aimed at providing a new sense of Brazil’s scale and position within a global context. Shot mainly on location in São Paulo, Lisbon and Cape Verde, it promotes the encounter of Lusophone peoples who find a
Chapter Nine Sertão as Post-National Landscape: from:
The Brazilian Road Movie
Author(s) DENNISON STEPHANIE
Abstract: When
Cinema aspirinas e urubus(Cinema, Aspirins and Vultures) was released in 2005 it garnered almost immediate critical support and approval, and prompted one reviewer, perhaps rather dramatically, to declare it to be ‘a watershed’² and ‘a paradigmatic film within recent Brazilian cinema’.³ First-time feature-film maker Marcelo Gomes who, along with co-scriptwriters Karim Ainouz and Paulo Caldas, make up a new(ish) generation of talented cineastes who hail from the Brazilian north-east⁴ and who are recognized for their technical confidence and storytelling ability, was praised for producing the kind of small film with big implications so dear to aficionados of world
Introduction: from:
Saul Bass
Abstract: The Forty-First Academy Awards ceremony took place on 14 April 1969 at the Dorothy Chandler Pavilion, on what used to be Bunker Hill in downtown Los Angeles. It was the first Oscar ceremony to be broadcast worldwide and the first held at that location. As usual, it was a star-studded affair. Katharine Hepburn was nominated as best actress for the second year in a row, this time for
The Lion in Winter, an award she would have to share with Barbra Streisand forFunny Girl—the only time there has been a tie in this category. Saul and Elaine Bass,
1 Designer and Filmmaker from:
Saul Bass
Abstract: One of the most striking aspects of Saul Bass’s epically successful career as a designer was that he was essentially an autodidact without formal academic training. While his official biographies note that he studied with Howard Trafton and Gyorgy Kepes (the latter a superstar designer in his own right), the fact was that Bass’s “studies” were limited to a handful of night-school courses. Bass was always very modest on this point, reminding interviewers that there were few opportunities to study graphic design in America at that time because “commercial art” was considered a lowly profession.¹ Though it is true that
5 The Urban Landscape from:
Saul Bass
Abstract: Saul Bass lived in New York City until 1946, when he was twenty-six years old. At the time, it was still the most modern urban environment in the world. Indeed, going back to the turn of the twentieth century, European and American modernists considered New York the modern city par excellence. Walt Whitman sang its praises in his poem “Mannahatta,” first published in the 1860 edition of
The Leaves of Grass: “High growths of iron, slender, strong, splendidly uprising toward clear skies.” Paul Strand, Alfred Stieglitz, and Alvin Langdon Coburn captured not only the explosion of skyscrapers before World War
CHAPTER 3 Idealism from:
Externalism
Abstract: Suppose we separate mind and world in the manner prescribed by Cartesian internalism. A mind is an interiority: mental phenomena are located exclusively inside the skin of any organism that possesses them, and possession of such phenomena by a creature is logically independent of whatever exists or occurs in the world outside that skin. Then we are immediately presented with a problem, one that has been and continues to be enormously influential. It is sometimes called the
matching problem.The matching problem, then, is a direct result of the sort of separation of mind and world essential to Cartesian internalism.
The Momentary Modern Magic of the Panorama from:
Chora 1
Author(s) Parcell Stephen
Abstract: Representation presumes an analogy between two things - between
thisandthat. Sometimes,this is nearandthat isfar. Sometimes,thisis drawn andthatis built. InNotre Dame de Paris,Victor Hugo warned, retrospectively,thiswill killthat.
The Momentary Modern Magic of the Panorama from:
Chora 1
Author(s) Parcell Stephen
Abstract: Representation presumes an analogy between two things - between
thisandthat. Sometimes,this is nearandthat isfar. Sometimes,thisis drawn andthatis built. InNotre Dame de Paris,Victor Hugo warned, retrospectively,thiswill killthat.
11 GREELEY: from:
Common Ground
Abstract: I find myself speculating that maybe sometime, long, long
19 GREELEY: from:
Common Ground
Abstract: The process can, perhaps, be compared to the phenomenon that we Americans tend to view George Washington, the founder of our country, through the lens of our view of the American history two centuries later. We know roughly the character and times of the man (less roughly than the Israelites who formulated the final redaction of the Torah knew Moses), but we are
24 GREELEY: from:
Common Ground
Abstract: I have this wonderful idea for a science fiction story. A group of young people invent a time machine. They plan to return to the Rome of Julius Caesar so that they can write the best term paper ever on the Rome of Julius Caesar. But they make a mistake in setting the controls and end up in Jerusalem on the fourteenth day of the month of Nisan in the year 30 C.E. (though of course that’s not how it was being counted then).
26 GREELEY: from:
Common Ground
Abstract: It is a question that has lurked off the record for many years. For a long time, under the influence of the pessimism of Saint Augustine and the body-rejecting spirituality of Plato, Christians were afraid to ask it, even afraid to think it. In the era after Sigmund Freud, men and women were willing to
32 NEUSNER: from:
Common Ground
Abstract: Jews have trouble enough dealing with Jesus, not in the Christian reading life and teachings, with which we can identify, but in the claim that, in a unique way, he is God’s only begotten son. What, then, are we to make of Mary? Mary, after all, is called Mother of God and revered and loved by Roman Catholics; she is bearer of profound religious sentiments indeed. But if we cannot grasp how any one man is more God’s son than any other, then how can we make sense of how any one woman is more God’s mother than any other?
34 GREELEY: from:
Common Ground
Abstract: “Make him stop saying that!” Bryant Gumbel, my one-time altar boy, commanded the rabbi.
37 NEUSNER: from:
Common Ground
Abstract: So Greeley was right and I was wrong—nothing new about that. We argue all the time, as good friends should, and on this issue as on others, he scored. Anyhow, that does not surprise me; I’ve always considered Greeley, if not a terribly productive scholar, a luminary, always with something important and compelling to say. And here, I’ve always been right.
LATIN AMERICAN WRITERS IN CANADA: from:
Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Nomez Naïn
Abstract: THE PHENOMENON of the massive transplantation of Latin American intellectuals to other areas of the world, particularly to more economically developed countries, that began in the 1970s has generated a varied literature dealing with the problems of transculturation, exile, and the symbolic relationships of the individual with these diverse societies. Due to its specific original matrix of an English domaine belatedly converted into an independent nation state, Canada has a porous way of absorbing ethnic groups of diverse genesis without completely destroying them. At the beginning, some of the typical cultural traits of these groups were retained, but with time,
MESSAGE FROM THE CROSSROADS from:
Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Urías Alfonso Quijada
Abstract: THE NOTION OF “CROSSROADS,” which in Spanish also has the figurative meaning of “dilemma” is associated with another closely related word, “labyrinth,” which in present times implies a pathway through a literary universe where Kafka, Borges, Hawthorne and Octavio Paz, author of
The Labyrinth of Solitude,all serve as guides. I believe that as writers and poets become aware of their vocation, they discover a different world—of words, of the imagination—and that this discovery makes them appear strange to other people. They are perceived as having failed to adjust to a reality that is too harsh or alien
AQUÍ ESTAMOS: from:
Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Hazelton Hugh
Abstract: Much time has gone by since the first Latin American authors began to arrive in Canada among the refugees and immigrants who left their native
REDEFINING THE CENTRE: from:
Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Algoo-Baksh Stella
Abstract: This paper argues that West Indian Canadian Writers have contributed significantly to a redefinition of the
centre.Such writers have moved black characters from the periphery to centre stage, exploring the black experience from the inside rather than from a Eurocentric vantage point. Questioning the “hegemony of the centre,” they often examine the problems of their societies from a fresh perspective. In the process, they expose the insidious effects of colonialism on the colonized, who ultimately lose sight of their own history, heritage and at times even their identity. The author emphasizes the work of Austin Clarke, the pioneer among
BANISHED BETWEEN TWO WORLDS: from:
Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Perron Sylvie
Abstract: THE STUDY OF LATIN AMERICAN literature written outside the country of origin leads inevitably to the theme of exile. First treated during the Middle Ages, the problem of exile lends itself in various ways to literary study. One such way is provided by the exiled character him or herself, a source of insight into a wide sphere of social issues. Appearing periodically in Latin American literature to illustrate the various sociopolitical upheavals history, the exile in our own time figures prominently in Chilean writing in Canada, where writers are currently reworking this theme, each in their own style. Of particular
WOMEN’S WORD: from:
Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Rojas-Trempe Lady
Abstract: CONTEMPORARY LATIN AMERICAN literature in the past two decades—the 1970s and 1980’s—reliably proves that the written word of women has contributed to the outlining and definition of a culture which challenges male hegemony as well as androcentric power relations and knowledge.² The breach that certain feminist and nonfeminist writers opened in the patriarchal culture allowed them, as a point of departure, to underline the fact that they were different from men. At the same time, they emphasized the historical cost of marginalization and took up the struggle for fair treatment.³ Soon after, they established certain epistemological bases for
BEYOND DEVELOPMENT AND MODERNITY: from:
Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Esteva Gustavo
Abstract: IF THE HOUR HAS COME for rethinking modernity, it is time to make very explicit the irrenconcilable opposition between culture and development. An analogous opposition would seem to be a good starting point for my argument. “Genetic endowment and cultural heritage evolve according to opposite laws.... Biological evolution sprouts new branches that do not cross-fertilize, branches that never again unite once they have become solid. Culture evolves along another route: its forms are anastomosis; like a river, its waters divide, meander and reunite. Biological evolution remains ungraved while culture implies the memory of things past, which survive only in myth
HAITIAN MUSIC IN THE GLOBAL SYSTEM from:
Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Averill Gage
Abstract: FEW ISSUES HAVE GENERATED as much academic interest across disciplines in recent years as the process of globalization. The world’s economic, political, demographic, and socio-cultural geography has radically metamorphosed under the impact of technologies and media that shrink time and space in the quest for rapid turnover of capital (Giddens, 1990). Although the long-term effects of globalization on nation states, futures markets, and the drug trade, etc. are unclear at best, none of these approaches the complexities and the problematic status of cultural identity in the globalizing environment.
BEAUTIFUL LIES: from:
Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Vallejo Catharina
Abstract: THE APPEARANCE OF FOUR MAJOR literary works in the space of five years in Santo Domingo between 1877 and 1882 marks the first flourishing of Dominican literature.¹ Until that time, except for short stories and some legends in verse, only one book-length literary work had been published in the city, an anthology of Dominican poetry in 1874.² The
Fantasías indíjenasby José Joaquin Pérez, of 1877, is the first volume of poetry published in Santo Domingo by a Dominican author; in 1879 Manuel de Jesús Galván published Part I of the first novel with a Dominican theme,Enriquillo(completed in
INTRODUCTION: from:
Everyone Says No
Abstract: The institution of public service broadcasting is at a crossroads. Or, perhaps more accurately, institutions of public service broadcasting are at a crossroads. The audiences they serve are increasingly heterogeneous: in multicultural countries like Canada, the viewers that public broadcasters seek speak more languages and identify with a wider range of ethnic, cultural, and even national identities than they have at any time in the past. Public broadcasters face a considerable challenge in addressing this diversity. How do they reconcile their historical nation-building mandates with the new ways
2 The Rise and Fall of Translated News on Newsworld and the Réseau de l’information from:
Everyone Says No
Abstract: In the spring of 1990, Canada was at the beginning of what would prove to be a tumultuous decade during which the question of national unity would be constantly at the forefront of political debate. At the time, the concern was with the quickly unravelling Meech Lake Accord. Negotiated in 1987 in the hope of creating the political conditions necessary for Quebec to join the constitution, the agreement faced opposition in the legislatures of Manitoba and Newfoundland. Without ratification by all ten provincial legislatures, the accord would fail, and its failure would lead – or so feared many among the country’s
4 Quebec and the Historical Meaning of “Distinct Society” from:
Everyone Says No
Abstract: The late 1980s was a heady time for Canadian constitutionalists. On 30 April 1987, five years after Quebec’s refusal to accept the patriation of the constitution from London,¹ Prime Minister Brian Mulroney and the premiers of all the provinces, Quebec included, met at Meech Lake outside of Ottawa. There they reached an accord in principle that would allow Quebec to rejoin the “Canadian constitutional fold,” as the
Toronto Starput it, leading a proud Mulroney to declare, “what you have now is a whole country as opposed to part of a country” (Ruimy 1987, A1). TheConstitution Amendment,1987, or
CONCLUSION: from:
Everyone Says No
Abstract: Nearly two decades after the defeat of the Charlottetown Accord, Canada’s public broadcaster faces a familiar set of challenges. The fragmentation characterizing the CBC/Radio-Canada’s audience has increased since 1992, and with it, so has a demand for the representation of different cultural groups. The desire for representation expressed by the country’s principal linguistic groups, by members of its different geographic regions, and by its Native peoples has been supplemented by a desire for representation expressed by members of Canada’s multicultural communities. At the same time, the Canadian Broadcasting Corporation has had to make do with progressively less funding – the cuts
3 “¡Silencio, he dicho!” Space, Language, and Characterization as Agents of Social Protest in Lorca’s Rural Tragedies from:
Reading Modern Drama
Author(s) BLUM BILHA
Abstract: “The art of our time,” said Susan Sontag, “is noisy with appeals for silence” (12). Although originally meant as an assessment of the cultural function of modern art, Sontag’s juxtaposition of such antithetical terms as “noise” and “silence” places the work of art at a stylistic and thematic crossroads where the explicit and the implicit, the visible and the invisible, text and subtext or, indeed, what is said, shown, or done (and therefore “noisy”) and what is not, can meet and interact. Each one of these levels constitutes an integral part of the work of art and, as such, it
4 The Money Shot: from:
Reading Modern Drama
Author(s) TUCKER-ABRAMSON MYKA
Abstract: In “An Equation for Black People Onstage,” playwright Suzan-Lori Parks lays out the difficulty of writing plays about black people without falling into an essentializing “Black Aesthetic.” Theatre, she argues, is useful for black people because it “can ‘tell it like it is’; ‘tell it as it was’; ‘tell it as it could be’” (21); and, indeed, Parks’s plays are continually exploring the limits and intersections of all three. “[T]he writing is rich,” she continues, “because we are not an impoverished people, but a wealthy people fallen on hard times” (21). When we consider this metaphor in light of Parks’s
3 Governing Affluence: from:
Endless Propaganda
Abstract: Searching(1975) was an instance of shock advertising, sponsored by the British government, probably appearing courtesy of its Central Office of Information (COI). What the Americans had started spread to other parts of the advanced world (and sometime s beyond) in the course of the 1970s. There were differences. Corporate advocacy never reached the same proportions outside of the United States, though by the early 1980s it was sufficiently prominent in Canada to justify a special public affairs conference of luminaries from business, government, and academe.² Britain prohibited the brand of broadcast political advertising that the United States had come to
5 Charitable Souls: from:
Endless Propaganda
Abstract: These are no ordinary children. You can find them looking out from posters and billboards, in the pages of newspapers and magazines, sometimes on movie screens and on television. They may be infants or teens, a boy or a girl, with different skin colours, and of any age up to about twenty. They can be forlorn, injured, starving, abused, neglected, frightened, disturbed, expectant, hopeful, happy, or sometimes thankful. They do share one characteristic: they are disadvantaged – by race, class, gender, health, situation, or other circumstances. They are meant as objects of pity. They plead with us – as caring
8 Technopia and Other Corporate Dreams from:
Endless Propaganda
Abstract: ‘Let’s Make Things Better.’ So announced Philips, the transnational electronics giant, in a new global ad campaign launched in September 1995. The company explained how the theme and slogan were a far better representation of its purposes than the more obvious brag, ‘We make better things.’¹ In fact, the statement was pathetic: bland, vague, and hackneyed. No wonder it fostered an initial flurry of boring ads which featured a smiling employee saying trite things to magazine readers. More interesting than Philips’s lack of inspiration was its commitment of time and funds to this kind of image campaign. Here it followed
3 Governing Affluence: from:
Endless Propaganda
Abstract: Searching(1975) was an instance of shock advertising, sponsored by the British government, probably appearing courtesy of its Central Office of Information (COI). What the Americans had started spread to other parts of the advanced world (and sometime s beyond) in the course of the 1970s. There were differences. Corporate advocacy never reached the same proportions outside of the United States, though by the early 1980s it was sufficiently prominent in Canada to justify a special public affairs conference of luminaries from business, government, and academe.² Britain prohibited the brand of broadcast political advertising that the United States had come to
5 Charitable Souls: from:
Endless Propaganda
Abstract: These are no ordinary children. You can find them looking out from posters and billboards, in the pages of newspapers and magazines, sometimes on movie screens and on television. They may be infants or teens, a boy or a girl, with different skin colours, and of any age up to about twenty. They can be forlorn, injured, starving, abused, neglected, frightened, disturbed, expectant, hopeful, happy, or sometimes thankful. They do share one characteristic: they are disadvantaged – by race, class, gender, health, situation, or other circumstances. They are meant as objects of pity. They plead with us – as caring
8 Technopia and Other Corporate Dreams from:
Endless Propaganda
Abstract: ‘Let’s Make Things Better.’ So announced Philips, the transnational electronics giant, in a new global ad campaign launched in September 1995. The company explained how the theme and slogan were a far better representation of its purposes than the more obvious brag, ‘We make better things.’¹ In fact, the statement was pathetic: bland, vague, and hackneyed. No wonder it fostered an initial flurry of boring ads which featured a smiling employee saying trite things to magazine readers. More interesting than Philips’s lack of inspiration was its commitment of time and funds to this kind of image campaign. Here it followed
3 Governing Affluence: from:
Endless Propaganda
Abstract: Searching(1975) was an instance of shock advertising, sponsored by the British government, probably appearing courtesy of its Central Office of Information (COI). What the Americans had started spread to other parts of the advanced world (and sometime s beyond) in the course of the 1970s. There were differences. Corporate advocacy never reached the same proportions outside of the United States, though by the early 1980s it was sufficiently prominent in Canada to justify a special public affairs conference of luminaries from business, government, and academe.² Britain prohibited the brand of broadcast political advertising that the United States had come to
5 Charitable Souls: from:
Endless Propaganda
Abstract: These are no ordinary children. You can find them looking out from posters and billboards, in the pages of newspapers and magazines, sometimes on movie screens and on television. They may be infants or teens, a boy or a girl, with different skin colours, and of any age up to about twenty. They can be forlorn, injured, starving, abused, neglected, frightened, disturbed, expectant, hopeful, happy, or sometimes thankful. They do share one characteristic: they are disadvantaged – by race, class, gender, health, situation, or other circumstances. They are meant as objects of pity. They plead with us – as caring
8 Technopia and Other Corporate Dreams from:
Endless Propaganda
Abstract: ‘Let’s Make Things Better.’ So announced Philips, the transnational electronics giant, in a new global ad campaign launched in September 1995. The company explained how the theme and slogan were a far better representation of its purposes than the more obvious brag, ‘We make better things.’¹ In fact, the statement was pathetic: bland, vague, and hackneyed. No wonder it fostered an initial flurry of boring ads which featured a smiling employee saying trite things to magazine readers. More interesting than Philips’s lack of inspiration was its commitment of time and funds to this kind of image campaign. Here it followed
3 Governing Affluence: from:
Endless Propaganda
Abstract: Searching(1975) was an instance of shock advertising, sponsored by the British government, probably appearing courtesy of its Central Office of Information (COI). What the Americans had started spread to other parts of the advanced world (and sometime s beyond) in the course of the 1970s. There were differences. Corporate advocacy never reached the same proportions outside of the United States, though by the early 1980s it was sufficiently prominent in Canada to justify a special public affairs conference of luminaries from business, government, and academe.² Britain prohibited the brand of broadcast political advertising that the United States had come to
5 Charitable Souls: from:
Endless Propaganda
Abstract: These are no ordinary children. You can find them looking out from posters and billboards, in the pages of newspapers and magazines, sometimes on movie screens and on television. They may be infants or teens, a boy or a girl, with different skin colours, and of any age up to about twenty. They can be forlorn, injured, starving, abused, neglected, frightened, disturbed, expectant, hopeful, happy, or sometimes thankful. They do share one characteristic: they are disadvantaged – by race, class, gender, health, situation, or other circumstances. They are meant as objects of pity. They plead with us – as caring
8 Technopia and Other Corporate Dreams from:
Endless Propaganda
Abstract: ‘Let’s Make Things Better.’ So announced Philips, the transnational electronics giant, in a new global ad campaign launched in September 1995. The company explained how the theme and slogan were a far better representation of its purposes than the more obvious brag, ‘We make better things.’¹ In fact, the statement was pathetic: bland, vague, and hackneyed. No wonder it fostered an initial flurry of boring ads which featured a smiling employee saying trite things to magazine readers. More interesting than Philips’s lack of inspiration was its commitment of time and funds to this kind of image campaign. Here it followed
6 Extending the Web of Significance from:
Mal'uocchiu
Abstract: Sicilian Canadians can make use of
mal’uocchiuto explain a variety of experiences, and to communicate a number of messages. The vague, ambiguous, and variable nature of the concept provides the type of flexibility that enables people to usemal’uocchiuas a component in an intricate web of significance that sometimes links together thelanguage of distress, moral commentary,and thelanguage of argument. This would make a good ending for my story. Unfortunately, it would also misrepresent the phenomenon. Not everyone within the community makes use ofmal’uocchiuin these ways. For some, the concept has little or no
1962-10 from:
Early Works on Theological Method 1
Abstract: A fundamental distinction is between the history that is written about and the history that is written. The Germans have a distinction or sometimes make a distinction – it isn’t anything rigid – between
Geschichte, which means the history that is written about, the total course of human events, and, on the other hand,
1968-3 from:
Early Works on Theological Method 1
Abstract: We continue with ‘Horizons and Categories.’ Last time I spoke of the meaning of horizon, comparison of horizons, distinguishing them as complementary, genetic, and dialectical, and the differences of structure in horizons. I went on to method as horizon, and in particular to the difference between the traditional Aristotelian approach, however qualified, and the implications of horizon. Particularly the notion of necessity was fundamental in Aristotelian science, and it is marginal in modern science. We dealt with the many implications of that, especially with regard to the way the context of the statement of a truth is conceived, whether it
[SECTION TWO: Introduction] from:
Fighting Words and Images
Abstract: Though relevant to any representation, perspective is a particularly important theoretical issue in war representations. At first glance this is readily apparent, since every struggle, military or otherwise, involves at least two antagonists, and representations of conflict usually emphasize the concerns of only one of them. At the same time, there are numerous journalistic and academic accounts of war that aim for a birdʹs-eye view. For example, a historian sifting through historical sources must deal with many different perspectives, all in some way unreliable since they are written from limited – and often during times of war strategically manipulated –
5 The Aestheticization of Suffering on Television from:
Fighting Words and Images
Author(s) CHOULIARAKI LILIE
Abstract: The broadcast of Iraq War footage on Western televisions from March to April 2003 was a paradoxical event. It was the most transparent war footage ever but at the same time it was also condemned as the most manipulative. It was transparent in its first-time use of embedded journalists and in the concentration of an international pool of reporting journalists in Baghdad itself. It was manipulative in that this unprecedented proliferation of information and imagery intensified the processes of news regulation and censorship, opening the footage to criticism of a heavy bias in favour of the coalition troops. But, one
7 Blessed Are the Warmakers: from:
Fighting Words and Images
Author(s) JAMES JENNIFER C.
Abstract: On 4 April 1967, at Riverside Church in New York City, Martin Luther King delivered his first public indictment of the Vietnam War. Standing before the Clergy and Laity Concerned about the Vietnam War, he praised fellow religious leaders for having the courage to ʹmove beyond the prophesying of smooth patriotismʹ to speak from the transcendent ʹmandates of conscience.ʹ¹ At the same time, he rebuked those in the civil rights movement who characterized his anti-war activism as a distraction from his primary mission: ʹ[T]hough I often understand the source of their concern, I am nevertheless greatly saddened, for such questions
8 Exchange of Sacrifices: from:
Fighting Words and Images
Author(s) OUSHAKINE SERGUEI ALEX.
Abstract: The Chechen war became one of the most vivid representations of the political and social chaos that followed the collapse of the Soviet Union. To a large degree, the war was an unexpected outcome of the fight for independence that had started in Chechnya in the early 1990s. At the time, Boris Yeltsinʹs government was capable of neither negotiating with the pro-independence forces in Chechnya nor suppressing them. Apparently misinformed by his advisors about the possibility of defeating heavily armed Chechen rebels, in December 1994 Yeltsin began a military campaign aimed at ʹrestoring the constitutional orderʹ in Chechnya (see figure
2 From Barbarism to Courtly Manners from:
Civility
Abstract: Our contemporary Western understanding of
courtesyandcivilityis founded on our experience of a democratic society in which all citizens are supposed to enjoy fair treatment before the law. The massive amount of literature that has recently appeared on the supposed waning of courtesy shows how much we have come to value democratic civility as a sign of civilized pro-social behaviour. Yet nostalgia for a supposedly more civil era distracts us from realizing that in a different time and place the outright disrespect, hatred, and exclusion of the ‘other’ was considered normal and vital for survival. Ironically, when Western
Introduction from:
Petrarch's 'Fragmenta'
Abstract: In Petrarch’s composition of
Rerum vulgarium fragmenta (Fragments of Vernacular Matters) over more than four decades, the conscious manipulation of narrative time is critical.¹ The story that is told and the account of the telling are constantly interwoven and complicated by their relationship to the author’s life. In recognition of the intrinsic complexity of the work’s narrative and compositional scheme, recent commentators have voiced scepticism about long-accepted interpretations of the work.² As Marco Santagata writes, “Delle strutture simboliche, dei sovrasensi, della complessa trama di richiami di cui il libro è gravato, né i contemporanei, né i posteri si sono accorti.
Chapter Six Songs of Grief and Lamentation (Rvf 264–318) from:
Petrarch's 'Fragmenta'
Abstract: With the advent of a unitary subject in Part 2, we see the intervention of a contemplative time frame that vitiates the dichotomy between the
Chapter Seven Songs of Consecration (Rvf 319–366) from:
Petrarch's 'Fragmenta'
Abstract: In the final forty-eight poems, many of which are rearranged during the late 1360s, one is abreast of the ultimate dilemma, that of time.¹ The emotional oscillations of the earlier poems of Part 2 recede as the narrative incorporates the events of the personal story into the metaphysical prospects of eternity and timelessness. We saw in chapter 6 the confrontation between the progressive time of history and the circular, repetitive time of nature. Now the neutral (kairotic, rhythmic) time of contemplation has assumed prominence. The appropriate narrative form for this “in-between” time is the parable, a mode that is accompanied
Introduction from:
Petrarch's 'Fragmenta'
Abstract: In Petrarch’s composition of
Rerum vulgarium fragmenta (Fragments of Vernacular Matters) over more than four decades, the conscious manipulation of narrative time is critical.¹ The story that is told and the account of the telling are constantly interwoven and complicated by their relationship to the author’s life. In recognition of the intrinsic complexity of the work’s narrative and compositional scheme, recent commentators have voiced scepticism about long-accepted interpretations of the work.² As Marco Santagata writes, “Delle strutture simboliche, dei sovrasensi, della complessa trama di richiami di cui il libro è gravato, né i contemporanei, né i posteri si sono accorti.
Chapter Six Songs of Grief and Lamentation (Rvf 264–318) from:
Petrarch's 'Fragmenta'
Abstract: With the advent of a unitary subject in Part 2, we see the intervention of a contemplative time frame that vitiates the dichotomy between the
Chapter Seven Songs of Consecration (Rvf 319–366) from:
Petrarch's 'Fragmenta'
Abstract: In the final forty-eight poems, many of which are rearranged during the late 1360s, one is abreast of the ultimate dilemma, that of time.¹ The emotional oscillations of the earlier poems of Part 2 recede as the narrative incorporates the events of the personal story into the metaphysical prospects of eternity and timelessness. We saw in chapter 6 the confrontation between the progressive time of history and the circular, repetitive time of nature. Now the neutral (kairotic, rhythmic) time of contemplation has assumed prominence. The appropriate narrative form for this “in-between” time is the parable, a mode that is accompanied
Introduction from:
The Vigil of Quebec
Abstract: We are in the midst of a crisis whose outlines cannot yet be isolated, whose dénouement cannot be glimpsed. This will be news to no one: Quebec has been shaken up over the past ten years, far more so than most other societies. We have experienced rapid change, from at least seeming religious solidarity to rapid dechristianization, from ignorance to mass education, from Duplessis to independentism, from the challenges of
Cité libreto the tutelage of Trudeau, and all this was enough to make any one feel that he had got lost in a time of general confusion. However, the
The time of the elders from:
The Vigil of Quebec
Abstract: In the 1930s, at the time when Saint-Denys Garneau, Jean-Louis Gagnon, André Laurendeau, and others were beginning to do their writing, I was just a little boy, carefully protected from books by my working-class milieu. I was more concerned about stealing apples from the neighbouring farmers than participating in the intellectual or political confrontations of the period. As I develop, however, I feel myself increasingly involved in those past events. They have changed, but only in appearance. Today, like yesterday, we are circling the same difficulty or
empêchement(the term is that of Jean Le Moyne): we are always prowling
After the war: from:
The Vigil of Quebec
Abstract: When the war broke out in 1939 powerful forces of change were at work in our midst, but for a long time their activity was subterranean. We did not become really aware of them until the period from 1940 to 1960, and men in our society are still busy looking for the consequences of these changes.
Canada and the United States: from:
The Vigil of Quebec
Abstract: Three-fifths of Canada’s production is at present under foreign control. This is unique among all the industrialized nations. The United States plays an enormous role in this economic dependence. In 1964 Canada’s total debt to other nations was $32.8 billion, if we include short-term foreign investments and certain other liabilities. By 1967 this debt had reached $36 billion, of which $30 billion was in the form of long-term investments. American investment in Canada is not, of course, a new phenomenon. It was already considerable at the beginning of the century, but so were British interests at that time. During the
Tasks before the nationalist from:
The Vigil of Quebec
Abstract: Let us stop to consider some current criticism. At first sight, our nationalist associations have no future, and this is a statement one often hears made. Until fairly recently, so the claim goes, they did excellent work, but now they are out of date. For a long time they were active in the general area of social problems; however, in the past few years a number of new organizations with specific objectives have appeared. What purpose can a national association serve in a minor supporting role? Again, like many Québécois, these associations have come to the independentist choice. There is
What is a political program? from:
The Vigil of Quebec
Abstract: Our society may be working out a serious kind of political thinking, but we are still groping, as it is particularly difficult to relate together such disparate requirements as our economic weakness and our desire for independence, our democratic aspirations and our socialist inclinations. These difficulties are reflected in the program of the Parti québécois. Not surprisingly, it gives rise to a type of thinking that, though committed, is still critical. Combining political conviction and free inquiry, unconnected with election-time manoeuvring, is no doubt one indication among others that things can change in Quebec’s political life.
Democracy and speech from:
The Vigil of Quebec
Abstract: Among the many often obscure pretexts furnished us by governments to sanction the imposition of the War Measures Act, one deserves our attention. At the beginning the federal Minister of Justice spoke of ‘a kind of disintegration of the will of the people.’ He returned to this later, insinuating that the hypothesis antedates the arrival on the scene of the few individuals who proposed to save Mr Laporte’s life, that it had been accepted for a fairly long time, and remained the most plausible hypothesis once the ‘parallel governments’ and pseudo-data on the ‘insurrection’ had gone up in smoke.
What is politics? from:
The Vigil of Quebec
Abstract: The collective planning of a future can never be identified primarily with a political party program. Not that political parties are to be scorned: they represent collections of opinions, interests, and ideas that have surfaced in a combination of historical circumstances and, at the risk of hardening, have sometimes gone under later on. But political parties have their own logic, originating in the needs of their struggle to reach power. They skim the projects emerging in their vicinity, even though they make more discreet accommodations with those more subtle forces at work in the collectivities.
5 Hymn, or Flying Back to Heaven Apace: from:
Spenser's Famous Flight
Abstract: After publishing a pastoral in 1579, three books of an epic in 1590, a volume of love lyrics in 1595, and three more books of an epic in 1596, the New Poet reinvents the Virgilian Wheel a last time by inserting the hymn as the final spoke.
Chapter Two TIME, SUICIDE AND DEATH from:
French Existentialism
Abstract: All the existentialists are united in their opposition to idealist philosophies which ignore space and time as necessary conditions of the human existence. In no way is the finiteness of the human creature more evident than in the fact that he must live an earthly existence, and, since things in time have a beginning and an end, that he must be subject to the mysteries of birth and death. Ignoring these fundamental facts, the idealists sought to transcend the time process by rational system and they imposed a rational pattern upon the course of historical events. In other words, they
Introduction from:
Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Dupuy Pierre
Abstract: I MET M. PAUL-HENRI SPAAK a few days after he had accepted, for the first time, the office of Foreign Minister of Belgium. It was at the time of the Manchukuo crisis, when the Japanese invaded the northern part of West China. This invasion then appeared to most as a distant struggle, with practically little consequence for the rest of the world. But men like M. Spaak already appreciated the full meaning of events. He knew this was the gong starting a storm that was bound to reach the West sooner or later.
Introduction from:
Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Robbins John
Abstract: In the 1920s, Dr. Myrdal was a student at the University of Stockholm, where he received a Doctorate of Jurisprudence in economics. It was a time
Introduction from:
Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Solandt O. M.
Abstract: ONE OF THE MOST DISTINCTIVE features of our times has been the rise of the scientistengineer to positions of importance, both in the management of industry and, more importantly, in the shaping of political events throughout the world. Dr. Augustus Braun Kinzel is the epitome of this dynamic and effective group of engineer-scientists who are supplying the technological leadership that has put the United States ahead of the world. He has also helped to supply the sane and friendly outlook that has made the United States such a good neighbour to Canada and to the world.
Industrial research: from:
Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Kinzel Augustus B.
Abstract: Organized research is truly a twentieth-century phenomenon. Before then the individual could cope with an individual project. Today, a whole team effort is required to come up with the answer to problems, many times larger in
Introduction from:
Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Gauvin William
Abstract: LINUS PAULING was born in Oregon and was educated at Oregon State College where he obtained a Bachelor’s degree in Chemical Engineering in 1922. The following year he married Ava Helen Miller. In addition to being a constant source of inspiration during the next forty-five years, Mrs. Pauling has, in recent times, become a collaborator in her husband’s work for world peace.
Introduction from:
Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Penfield Wilder
Abstract: FRANK MACFARLANE BURNET Was born in 1899 at Traralgon, Victoria, Australia, the son of the manager of the Colonial Bank there. He entered Geelong College and in 1922 graduated in medicine from the University of Melbourne. He secured his doctorate in medicine in 1923 and became resident pathologist at the Melbourne Hospital. At that time Charles Kellaway, the director of the Walter and Eliza Hall Institute, recognized the remarkable ability of the young pathologist.
Creative thinking in science from:
Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Yukawa Hideki
Abstract: MAN AND HIS WORLD is a theme which has many and immensely diverse aspects. Nobody can take up this theme in all its aspects. In this lecture I will confine myself to Man and His Science. Even this is too broad to be dealt with in a limited time. I shall further narrow the subject later on, but for awhile let us dwell on the role played by science in shaping the world as the environment of man.
Introduction from:
Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Herzberg G.
Abstract: PROFESSOR H. B. G. CASIMIR is known throughout the world for his fundamental contributions to theoretical physics. He was a student of the late Professor Ehrenfest at Leyden University in Holland. Ehrenfest was an extraordinary teacher who saw to it that his outstanding students had an opportunity to visit other centres of physics and meet the foremost workers in the field. I happened to be at Gottingen University thirty-eight years ago, at the time when Ehrenfest had come there for several weeks bringing along two young students, Casimir and Uhlenbeck. It was here that I had the first opportunity to
4 Biennial Culture’s Reluctant Nomads from:
The Unmaking of Home in Contemporary Art
Abstract: In October 2007, Doris Salcedo performed another sort of archaeological dig when she occupied the massive space of the Tate Modern’s Turbine Hall with
Shibboleth, a 548-foot fissure that snakes its way along the length of the floor, beginning as a hairline crack and at times gaping to expose what appears to be a bottomless crevasse, lined with concrete and chain-link fencing. A complex meditation on the experience of immigration that simultaneously evokes the often treacherous experience of crossing borders and the “negative space” occupied by migrants within the increasingly policed borders of the European Union, the work seems determined
8. ‘The Tilt from One Parish to Another’: from:
Kathleen Jamie
Author(s) Mackay Peter
Abstract: Sometimes we have to hush the frantic inner voice that says ‘Don’t be stupid,’ and learn again to look, to listen. You can do the organising and redrafting, the diagnosing and identifying later, but right now, just be open to
11. Nature and Embodiment in This Weird Estate from:
Kathleen Jamie
Author(s) Collins Lucy
Abstract: In an essay entitled ‘Pathologies’, first published in Granta’s 2008 volume
The New Nature Writing, Kathleen Jamie reflects on the role of the microscopic other in endangering human well-being and continuing life. Reconsidering her understanding of the term ‘nature’ in light of these thoughts, Jamie acknowledges the need to conceive of the body itself as a form of ecosystem: ‘It’s not all primroses and dolphins . . . [t]here’s our own intimate, inner natural world, the body’s weird shapes and forms, and sometimes they go awry.’¹ This ‘inner natural world’ is both complex and contingent, and developments at the interface
8. ‘The Tilt from One Parish to Another’: from:
Kathleen Jamie
Author(s) Mackay Peter
Abstract: Sometimes we have to hush the frantic inner voice that says ‘Don’t be stupid,’ and learn again to look, to listen. You can do the organising and redrafting, the diagnosing and identifying later, but right now, just be open to
11. Nature and Embodiment in This Weird Estate from:
Kathleen Jamie
Author(s) Collins Lucy
Abstract: In an essay entitled ‘Pathologies’, first published in Granta’s 2008 volume
The New Nature Writing, Kathleen Jamie reflects on the role of the microscopic other in endangering human well-being and continuing life. Reconsidering her understanding of the term ‘nature’ in light of these thoughts, Jamie acknowledges the need to conceive of the body itself as a form of ecosystem: ‘It’s not all primroses and dolphins . . . [t]here’s our own intimate, inner natural world, the body’s weird shapes and forms, and sometimes they go awry.’¹ This ‘inner natural world’ is both complex and contingent, and developments at the interface
Book Title: Narrative, Identity and the Kierkegaardian Self- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Stokes Patrick
Abstract: Is each of us the main character in a story we tell about ourselves, or is this narrative understanding of selfhood misguided and possibly harmful? Are selves and persons the same thing? And what does the possibility of sudden death mean for our ability to understand the narrative of ourselves?For the first time, this collection brings together figures in contemporary philosophy and Kierkegaard studies to explore pressing questions like these in the philosophy of personal identity and moral psychology. These essays will both advance important ongoing discussions of selfhood and expand the light that, 200 years after his birth, Kierkegaard is still able to shed on contemporary problems.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt16r0hb2
Book Title: Narrative, Identity and the Kierkegaardian Self- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Stokes Patrick
Abstract: Is each of us the main character in a story we tell about ourselves, or is this narrative understanding of selfhood misguided and possibly harmful? Are selves and persons the same thing? And what does the possibility of sudden death mean for our ability to understand the narrative of ourselves?For the first time, this collection brings together figures in contemporary philosophy and Kierkegaard studies to explore pressing questions like these in the philosophy of personal identity and moral psychology. These essays will both advance important ongoing discussions of selfhood and expand the light that, 200 years after his birth, Kierkegaard is still able to shed on contemporary problems.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt16r0hb2
CHAPTER 3 A Space in Between: from:
Post-1990 Documentary: Reconfiguring Independence
Author(s) Deprez Camille
Abstract: The first international wave of activist documentary cinema began around the late 1960s and the early 1970s, including in India. This was a time when filmmakers leaned towards more personal arguments about political and social issues, when documentaries moved away from observation and favoured intervention in society and when a new documentary practice and style developed, determined by low budgets and striking content. Later, in the 1990s to 2000s, the digital revolution brought further developments to this mode of filmmaking worldwide. In India, along with the market-driven satellite TV boom and privatisation of the sector of the early 1990s, it
CHAPTER 6 The Survivor–Perpetrator Encounter and the Truth Archive in Rithy Panh’s Documentaries from:
Post-1990 Documentary: Reconfiguring Independence
Author(s) Morag Raya
Abstract: In this chapter, I propose an analysis of Rithy Panh’s documentaries,
S21: The Khmer Rouge Death Machine(2003),Duch, Master of the Forges of Hell(2012) and, to a lesser degree,The Missing Picture(2013), as what I term ‘perpetrator documentaries’ – that is, documentaries that focus on the figure of the perpetrator, while unravelling the long-time enigma of the ‘ordinary man turned perpetrator’ (Browning [1992] 1998: 159–89). I suggest that the survivor– perpetrator encounter staged at the heart ofS21andDuchis a major characteristic of Panh’s perpetrator documentary cinema, aiming at undermining the perpetrator’s ideology of extermination
Conclusion from:
Post-1990 Documentary: Reconfiguring Independence
Author(s) Pernin Judith
Abstract: The variety of case studies included here should not give the impression that this volume was conceived as a comprehensive overview of the issue of independent documentary in contemporary times. Rather, it aimed at prompting new interest for, and innovative academic perspectives on, the manifold significations of independent documentary production today.¹ Besides demonstrating the complexity, variability, pragmatism and paradoxes that this notion of ‘independent’ documentary entails, this collection of case studies also endeavoured to reveal important similarities among different practitioners in the field. In fact, the book chapters may be reshuffled to highlight other significant connections between them.
Chapter 2 Clemency, Pardon, and Oubliance from:
Forgetting Differences
Abstract: In his exhaustive study of an “event without a history,” as he calls it, Denis Crouzet sets the St. Bartholomew’s Day massacre in the context of French Renaissance dreams of community.¹ According to Crouzet, at the time of the massacre, the French king, Charles IX, was at the center of several competing visions of French concord. The most dramatic of these visions imagined the king as the agent of divine justice in its Old Testament form: a series of writers advocated the use of violence to rid France of heresy and thus reunite the French. Others, most notably the chancelier
Chapter 5 From Emotion to Affect from:
Forgetting Differences
Abstract: In light of works like the
Guisiadeor theMort de Coligny, as well as Robert Garnier’s relentlessly grim depictions of tragic distress, we might be moved to ask Pierre Bayle’s question, this time of tragedy: how could tragic theater, with its moving representations of explosive political intrigues and interfamilial violence, possibly have functioned as an instrument of reconciliation in the wake of the Wars of Religion?
Unshed Tears: from:
Katherine Mansfield and Translation
Author(s) Manenti Davide
Abstract: In the early nineteenth century, Schleiermacher noted that ‘understanding is an unending task’ and ‘the talent for misunderstanding is infinite’.² In more recent times, meaning has been understood as an endless deferral; the more one tries to grasp it, the more it appears ungraspable. This rings especially true if we consider the particular form of understanding that is translation. Since the meaning of a text is closely attached to its ‘letter’ – its sound or signifier – translation can never be a simple transfer of meaning. Indeed, no matter how accurately one brings meaning ‘home’,³ the result is inevitably approximate,
‘Making a Stay in X’: from:
Katherine Mansfield and Translation
Author(s) Stanley Rachael
Abstract: On 19 February 1915, Katherine Mansfield made her way by train from Paris to Gray to meet the French author, Francis Carco. He had been stationed there during World War One, and after making his acquaintance via John Middleton Murry, Mansfield believed herself to be in love with him. According to Antony Alpers, it was the discovery in Murry’s notebook of the ‘confess[ion] to Gordon Campbell that he didn’t know whether she was “more to him than a gratification”’, which finally led Mansfield to make her daring trip to France.¹ By the time she had taken him as her lover,
INTRODUCTION from:
The Cinema of Theo Angelopoulos
Author(s) Steven Mark
Abstract: The twenty-eighth Cannes Film Festival in 1975 was marked by the enthusiastic reception of a film that did not officially represent Greece, the country of its production. The right-wing government of the time refused to nominate it because it considered the leftist portrayal of modern national history offensive. Yet a Greek filmmaker and his crew managed to smuggle a copy of this film and show it as part of Pierre-Henri Deleau’s renowned programme, the Directors’ Fortnight. The filmmaker was Theo Angelopoulos and the film O Θίασος ( (
The Travelling Players, 1975). While the organisers of the festival were trying to
CHAPTER 3 Generative Apogee and Elegiac Expansion: from:
The Cinema of Theo Angelopoulos
Author(s) Ford Hamish
Abstract: Michelangelo Antonioni’s early 1960s cinema has long been recognised as one of the key influences on Theo Angelopoulos’ filmmaking. The director himself has often been quoted as describing Antonioni’s epochal
L’avventura(1960) as a seminal moment in his development, reportedly watching it thirteen times while a student in Paris during the early 1960s (cited in Archimandritis 2013: 26). What exactly is it about Antonioni’s work that was so formative for Angelopoulos, and how can we see its effects play out in his own subsequent films? More than simply illustrating authorial influence, by examining the connections between these two filmmakers as
CHAPTER 10 Cinematography of the Group: from:
The Cinema of Theo Angelopoulos
Author(s) Murphet Julian
Abstract: It would be arguable that the gold standard of commercial narrative film, the ‘affection image’ or facial close-up, is a fatal error for any cinema of the Left; that Griffith’s pioneering innovations in the conventions of close-up cinematography were nothing less than a capture of the fledgling discourse of narrative cinema for the forces of sentimental reaction, leaving a legacy of bourgeois individualism lodged within the very grammar of the form. The conventions of eye-line matching and shot-reverse-shot montage, and the anchoring of emotional catharsis in the fetishised face as such, have tended to predispose commercial film narrative towards an
CHAPTER 14 An ‘Untimely’ History from:
The Cinema of Theo Angelopoulos
Author(s) Brown Precious
Abstract: An essential (albeit controversial) point should immediately be made clear: the work of Angelopoulos is not ‘modernist’ in the sense that Anglo-Saxon critics have given to this term to qualify, in art history, a time past, but still belonging to modernity.¹ From end to end, Angelopoulos’ work is, in fact, traversed by history. Yet modernity is defined precisely by our awareness of unsurpassable historicity. In the words of Jacques Rancière, we have entered into the ‘ age of history’. He adds that it is also the ‘age of cinema’, as this late art possesses a singular power of ‘historicity and
CHAPTER 16 Memory Under Siege: from:
The Cinema of Theo Angelopoulos
Author(s) Kamboureli Smaro
Abstract: [I]t is impossible to have peace and normality not because the Balkan peoples could not in principle have much better relations with one another, but because the interests at stake in the Balkans are too great to permit such a development. The way I see it, the roots of the problem go way back in time and all the various conflicts were encouraged, at one time or another. There is a joke I often tell which I heard on my first trip. Before the war a foreign journalist went to Bosnia and was walking about in a town which had
2 MODELLING SYSTEMS BIOMEDICINE: from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Carusi Annamaria
Abstract: At a conference on developing the capacity of systems biology to transform itself in systems biomedicine, several of the scientists’ presentations showcase the computational modelling methods they are developing. Drawing towards the end of his presentation, an experienced pharmacologist admonishes the audience to bear in mind that, despite the progress in modelling techniques that he has been discussing, a model is always just a representation and never reality. At this point, there is a PowerPoint slide showing Magritte’s painting,
This is not a Pipe, and chuckling from the audience. It will not have been the first time that they have
3 HOLISM, CHINESE MEDICINE AND SYSTEMS IDEOLOGIES: from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Scheid Volker
Abstract: This chapter explores the articulations that have emerged over the last half-century between various types of holism, Chinese medicine and systems biology. Given the discipline’s historical attachments to a definition of ‘medicine’ that rather narrowly refers to biomedicine as developed in Europe and the US from the eighteenth century onwards, the medical humanities are not the most obvious starting point for such an inquiry. At the same time, they do offer one advantage over neighbouring disciplines like a medical history, anthropology or science and technology studies for someone like myself, a clinician as well as a historian and anthropologist: their
7 HOW ARE/OUR WORK: from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Kelly Timothy
Abstract: it is high time and past time to stop retreading old tracks not the case that the work has all been
12 REFRAMING FATNESS: from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Cooper Charlotte
Abstract: Over the last twenty years or so, fatness,¹ pathologised as overweight and obesity, has been a core public health concern around which has grown a lucrative international weight loss industry. Referred to as a ‘time bomb’ and ‘the terror within’, analogies of ‘war’ circulate around obesity, framing fatness as enemy.² Religious imagery and cultural and moral ideologies inform medical, popular and policy language with the ‘sins’ of ‘gluttony’ and ‘sloth’, evoked to frame fat people as immoral at worst and unknowledgeable victims at best,³ and understandings of fatness intersect with gender, class, age, sexuality, disability and race to make some
16 BREATHING AND BREATHLESSNESS IN CLINIC AND CULTURE: from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Carel Havi
Abstract: A central tenet of critical medical humanities is the claim that biomedicine does not hold all the keys to understanding the experience of illness, how responses to treatment are mediated, or how it outcomes and prognosis are revealed over time. We further suggest that biomedicine cannot wholly explain how illness may be expressed physiologically. So much that influences that expression derives from cultural context, emotional response, and how illness is interpreted and understood that this knowledge cannot be exhausted with the tools of biomedicine.
2 MODELLING SYSTEMS BIOMEDICINE: from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Carusi Annamaria
Abstract: At a conference on developing the capacity of systems biology to transform itself in systems biomedicine, several of the scientists’ presentations showcase the computational modelling methods they are developing. Drawing towards the end of his presentation, an experienced pharmacologist admonishes the audience to bear in mind that, despite the progress in modelling techniques that he has been discussing, a model is always just a representation and never reality. At this point, there is a PowerPoint slide showing Magritte’s painting,
This is not a Pipe, and chuckling from the audience. It will not have been the first time that they have
3 HOLISM, CHINESE MEDICINE AND SYSTEMS IDEOLOGIES: from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Scheid Volker
Abstract: This chapter explores the articulations that have emerged over the last half-century between various types of holism, Chinese medicine and systems biology. Given the discipline’s historical attachments to a definition of ‘medicine’ that rather narrowly refers to biomedicine as developed in Europe and the US from the eighteenth century onwards, the medical humanities are not the most obvious starting point for such an inquiry. At the same time, they do offer one advantage over neighbouring disciplines like a medical history, anthropology or science and technology studies for someone like myself, a clinician as well as a historian and anthropologist: their
7 HOW ARE/OUR WORK: from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Kelly Timothy
Abstract: it is high time and past time to stop retreading old tracks not the case that the work has all been
12 REFRAMING FATNESS: from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Cooper Charlotte
Abstract: Over the last twenty years or so, fatness,¹ pathologised as overweight and obesity, has been a core public health concern around which has grown a lucrative international weight loss industry. Referred to as a ‘time bomb’ and ‘the terror within’, analogies of ‘war’ circulate around obesity, framing fatness as enemy.² Religious imagery and cultural and moral ideologies inform medical, popular and policy language with the ‘sins’ of ‘gluttony’ and ‘sloth’, evoked to frame fat people as immoral at worst and unknowledgeable victims at best,³ and understandings of fatness intersect with gender, class, age, sexuality, disability and race to make some
16 BREATHING AND BREATHLESSNESS IN CLINIC AND CULTURE: from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Carel Havi
Abstract: A central tenet of critical medical humanities is the claim that biomedicine does not hold all the keys to understanding the experience of illness, how responses to treatment are mediated, or how it outcomes and prognosis are revealed over time. We further suggest that biomedicine cannot wholly explain how illness may be expressed physiologically. So much that influences that expression derives from cultural context, emotional response, and how illness is interpreted and understood that this knowledge cannot be exhausted with the tools of biomedicine.
Chapter 4 Catherine Malabou: from:
French Philosophy Today
Abstract: This second of two chapters on neurological transformations of the human will focus on epigenesis, a particularly fruitful notion for the elaboration of a non-reductive materialist account of the self. At the end of the previous chapter I drew a distinction between the mind–brain problem and the self–brain problem; in the present chapter I will take up that distinction in order to pursue the question of the identity of self (rather than the mind or brain) over time. In the previous chapter I considered how Malabou can overcome the tethering of the question of humanity as such to
Chapter 4 Catherine Malabou: from:
French Philosophy Today
Abstract: This second of two chapters on neurological transformations of the human will focus on epigenesis, a particularly fruitful notion for the elaboration of a non-reductive materialist account of the self. At the end of the previous chapter I drew a distinction between the mind–brain problem and the self–brain problem; in the present chapter I will take up that distinction in order to pursue the question of the identity of self (rather than the mind or brain) over time. In the previous chapter I considered how Malabou can overcome the tethering of the question of humanity as such to
Book Title: Imagining the Arabs-Arab Identity and the Rise of Islam
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Webb Peter
Abstract: Investigating the core questions about Arab identity and history, this book tackles the time-honoured stereotypes that depict Arabs as ancient Arabian Bedouin, and reveals the stories to be a myth: tales told by Muslims to recreate the past to explain the meaning of Islam and its origins.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1bh2j7h
2 Pre-Islamic ‘Arabless-ness’: from:
Imagining the Arabs
Abstract: The analysis thus far presents the spectre of an ‘Arabless’ pre-Islamic Arabia which may appear an extreme reaction to the familiar notion of Arabs in Antiquity, but we pose these radical challenges as there is a need to provoke critical questioning of the idea of Arabness and the timeworn practice of labelling peoples ‘Arab’ without considering how they related to senses of Arab community. An array of groups inhabited pre-Islamic Arabia and some of their descendants would come to identify themselves as Arabs, but outsiders’ evidence and anachronistic paradigms about ‘original Arab characteristics’ have not been able to give a
5 The Law of the Same: from:
Levinas, Ethics and Law
Abstract: Having provided an overview of the various ways we might read Levinas in relation to law, and the issues they raise, it is time to put forward the substantive argument of the book. This is the first of two concluding chapters making the argument that Levinas is best read as someone who offers us the possibility of thinking about ethics as perpetual critique of the law, rather than as a legal theorist. In other words, instead of using his work to think about how we inject ethics into law or unveil law’s ethical foundation, his philosophy provides resources to understand
1 Capitalism as Religion from:
Agamben and Radical Politics
Author(s) Heron Nicholas
Abstract: There are signs of the times (Mt. 16: 2–4), which, despite their obviousness, those who examine the signs in the heavens do not succeed in perceiving. They are crystallised in events that herald and define the coming epoch, events that can pass unobserved and almost in no way alter the reality to which they are added; yet which, precisely because of this, count as signs, as historical indices,
sēmeia ton kairōn. One of these events took place on 15 August 1971, when the American government, under the presidency of Richard Nixon, declared that the convertibility of the dollar into
5 Liturgical Labour: from:
Agamben and Radical Politics
Author(s) McLoughlin Daniel
Abstract: Agamben has described contemporariness as ‘a singular relationship with one’s own time, which adheres to it and, at the same time, keeps a distance from it’.¹ He suggests that the way that one maintains such a disjunction to the present is by ‘perceiving the indices and signatures of the most archaic in the most modern’.² The archaic does not, however, simply mean that which is chronologically distant: it is what is ‘close to the origin’, an
archethat remains an operative force within historical becoming.
8 Agamben, Badiou and Affirmative Biopolitics from:
Agamben and Radical Politics
Author(s) Prozorov Sergei
Abstract: Agamben and Badiou are rarely discussed together, especially in the context of politics. Even though both authors reached the height of their international fame at the same time and represented the next wave in continental philosophy after the predominance of ‘post-structuralism’, the difference of their interests, influences and, not the least, styles often makes it difficult to see what common tendency these authors exhibit. While a number of studies have addressed affinities between Agamben and Badiou in terms of their interest in formalism and the problems of reference,¹ the discussions of the two authors have generally tended to accentuate the
CHAPTER 2 Dostoevskii’s “White Nights”: from:
Border Crossing
Author(s) Meyer Ronald
Abstract: Fedor Dostoevskii’s short story “White Nights” (1848), subtitled a “sentimental love story (from the notes of a dreamer),” has been adapted for the screen more than any other of his short works. A staggering twelve feature films have been mounted on the basis of this early short story, though only two Russian entries and Luchino Visconti’s
Le notti bianche(1957) carry Dostoevskii’s title.² Perhaps even more surprising than the sheer number of adaptations, half of which were released in the twenty-first century, is the language distribution: Russian and Hindi tie for the most with three each, followed by two in
Chapter 6 Aura, Dread and the Amateur from:
In the Archive of Longing
Abstract: Sontag had earned her place as a literary critic by emancipating herself from firmly held beliefs in the critical establishment. This, however, took some time. Despite her youthful rebellion, in her first book of essays she was still working with a rather traditional notion of interpretation. She thought that ‘great art induces contemplation’ and that ‘the reader or listener or
Chapter 2 Burrowing and Bogs: from:
Seamus Heaney
Abstract: This chapter and the fifth one pay great attention to the volumes that bookend Heaney’s career—
Death of a NaturalistandHuman Chain—to show the arc of his poetic development, the way themes first adumbrated in the 1966 volume are carried through, re-explored, transformed, and sometimes dropped by the time of the 2010 volume. All the poetry chapters also spend more time on his best volumes—my top five, in chronological order, areNorth, Field Work, Station Island, Seeing Things,andHuman Chain—than it does on the slighter ones, many of which nonetheless have poems I analyze that
Chapter 3 Reading the Ground and the Sky: from:
Seamus Heaney
Abstract: Those four years were an important growth time when I was asking myself questions about the proper function of poets and poetry and learning a new commitment to the art.
Chapter 6 Prose, Drama, and Translations from:
Seamus Heaney
Abstract: First-time readers of Heaney may not be aware of his major achievement in other genres, which are so rich and deep that treating them in their entirety lies beyond the scope of this introductory study, focused as it is on his poetry. But those who teach Heaney’s work or who have followed his career know that he has become one of the foremost critics and translators of our time, as well as having written some fine “versions” of Greek drama, including
The Cure at Troy, after Sophocles’Philoctetes, andThe Burial at Thebes, after the same playwright’sAntigone. In what
Chapter 1 About Time from:
Lyric Cousins
Abstract: The region it’s passing through seems equally unchanged by the passage of time; though in fact
3 Is it Happening? from:
From Violence to Speaking Out
Abstract: Let us begin with the following proposition from
The Critique of Pure Reason: “We assert,” Kant says, “that the conditions of thepossibility of experiencein general are at the same time [sind zugleich] conditions of thepossibility of the objects of experience” (Kant 1998: 283, B197/A158, Kant’s italics [Heidegger 1997: 84, §24]).¹ We know that this proposition opened the way for the circular path of the Hegelian dialectic.² But, closer to our time, and cited so often across the twentieth century, Heidegger’s Kant book taught us how to deconstruct the Kantian correlation between the possibility of experience and the
8 “The Dream of an Unusable Friendship”: from:
From Violence to Speaking Out
Abstract: It is perhaps impossible to overestimate the importance of Heidegger’s 1929
Kant and the Problem of Metaphysics(Heidegger 1997). Through his interpretation of Kant’s First Critique, Heidegger led us to the “hidden art” of the schematism. The core of Heidegger’s interpretation consists in showing that the schematism, lying in the middle between the faculties of the sensibility and the understanding, must be understood as a pure form of auto-affection, and that auto-affection must be understood through the flow of time. Heidegger shows us that the temporal movement of auto-affection contains a difference that cannot be closed off from becoming other.
Chapter 4 When and How I Read Foucault from:
Between Deleuze and Foucault
Author(s) Klotz Kristopher
Abstract: The journal
Aut Aut² – the first journal in Italy that took an interest in Michel Foucault – published an article in its final 1978 issue that I had written one year earlier, called “On the Method of the Critique of Politics.”³ In this text, I discussed the influence that Foucault’s work had had up to this point on the thought of the Italian revolutionary left, for which I had been a militant in the 1970s. Foucault’s latest work had beenDiscipline and Punish, translated into Italian in 1976. At that time, I had begun to work again on Marx,
Chapter 7 Deleuze’s Foucault: from:
Between Deleuze and Foucault
Author(s) Bankston Samantha
Abstract: Before all else, we need to acknowledge a previously held, reprehensible position: for a long time Deleuze’s book on Foucault² seemed to consist of a dogmatic rigidity that did not manage to break into the enthusiasm of what Foucault said. From cover to cover the book seemed
ridiculousto us. It seemed far, so far from Foucault’s actual work, and with a menacing sort of passion we thought aboutdemonstratingthat in his book Deleuze had committed nothing more than a work of fiction. The reception of Deleuze’s presentation at the conference, “Michel Foucault, Philosopher,”³ only reinforced these poorly conceived
Chapter 14 Against the Incompatibility Thesis: from:
Between Deleuze and Foucault
Author(s) Gracieuse Marjorie
Abstract: In the introductory chapter of
Dits et Ecrits(Chronology), Daniel Defert reminds us of a joke between Foucault and Deleuze. In March 1972, soon after the publication ofAnti-Oedipus, Foucault tells to his friend: “We have to get rid of Freudo-Marxism.”¹ To which Deleuze replies, “I’m taking care of Freud, will you deal with Marx?”² The revival of the concept of desire in the first volume ofCapitalism and Schizophreniarepresents to a certain extent not simply a radical critique of psychoanalysis and of the ‘Oedipus complex’, but maybe also Deleuze’s part of the bargain with his long-time friend.
Chapter 14 Photography and Poststructuralism: from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Edge Sarah
Abstract: In his final text
Camera Lucida, first published in 1970, Roland Barthes gave his closing views on how photographs should be approached as a signifying system. ‘The important thing’, he proposes, ‘is that the photograph possesses an evidential force, and that its testimony bears not on the object but on the time. From a phenomenological viewpoint, in the photograph, the power of authentication exceeds the power of representation’ (Barthes 1984: 88–9). This final reflection by Barthes signposts the peculiarity of the photographic system which is made up of two signs, the indexical and the iconic; one belonging to the
Chapter 15 Deleuze and the Image of Film Theory from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Holohan Conn
Abstract: In the two books he wrote on the cinematic image, Gilles Deleuze proposes a fundamental break in the history of film form. This break occurred, he declares, sometime around the end of the Second World War and finds its first expression in the work of Italian neorealist film-makers such as Roberto Rossellini. In Rossellini’s images of aimless characters wandering through the ruins of a bombed-out Europe, Deleuze uncovers a decisive rupture with the logic of classical cinema, a rejection of the possibility for action upon which classical narrative depends.
Cinema 1: The Movement-ImageandCinema 2: The Time-Imagewere published
Chapter 14 Photography and Poststructuralism: from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Edge Sarah
Abstract: In his final text
Camera Lucida, first published in 1970, Roland Barthes gave his closing views on how photographs should be approached as a signifying system. ‘The important thing’, he proposes, ‘is that the photograph possesses an evidential force, and that its testimony bears not on the object but on the time. From a phenomenological viewpoint, in the photograph, the power of authentication exceeds the power of representation’ (Barthes 1984: 88–9). This final reflection by Barthes signposts the peculiarity of the photographic system which is made up of two signs, the indexical and the iconic; one belonging to the
Chapter 15 Deleuze and the Image of Film Theory from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Holohan Conn
Abstract: In the two books he wrote on the cinematic image, Gilles Deleuze proposes a fundamental break in the history of film form. This break occurred, he declares, sometime around the end of the Second World War and finds its first expression in the work of Italian neorealist film-makers such as Roberto Rossellini. In Rossellini’s images of aimless characters wandering through the ruins of a bombed-out Europe, Deleuze uncovers a decisive rupture with the logic of classical cinema, a rejection of the possibility for action upon which classical narrative depends.
Cinema 1: The Movement-ImageandCinema 2: The Time-Imagewere published
Book Title: The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Boundas Constantin V.
Abstract: The Companion is organized into two sections, each one of which reflects the developments of the Anglo-American Analytic and the Continental European philosophical traditions respectively. An appendix presents the main accomplishments of non-Western philosophies in the same time frame.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1g09xfc
The Promise of Process Philosophy from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Rescher Nicholas
Abstract: Whitehead himself fixed on ‘process’ as a central category of his philosophy because he viewed time and change as definitively central and
Philosophy of Mathematics from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Avigad Jeremy
Abstract: The philosophy of mathematics plays an important role in analytic philosophy, both as a subject of inquiry in its own right, and as an important landmark in the broader philosophical landscape. Mathematical knowledge has long been regarded as a paradigm of human knowledge with truths that are both necessary and certain, so giving an account of mathematical knowledge is an important part of
epistemology. Mathematical objects like numbers and sets are archetypical examples of abstracta, since we treat such objects in our discourse as though they are independent of time and space; finding a place for such objects in a
Philosophy of Logic from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Marion Mathieu
Abstract: Although it has sometimes been described since Frege as the pursuit of truth (Quine 1982: 1), logic is in fact the study
Feminism from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Donovan Josephine
Abstract: The feminist engagement with the analytic tradition in the twentieth century was for the most part a contentious one. Beginning in the early 1970s – when feminist academics began applying propositions formulated in the women’s liberation political movement of the late 1960s and early 1970s to their respective intellectual fields, feminist philosophers at first used analytic methodologies and assumptions to examine feminist questions. This was not surprising, given that the dominant philosophical tradition in academic departments at the time was the analytic and that these (mostly women) philosophers had been trained in the analytic tradition. Soon, however – by the
Continental Themes in Analytic Philosophy from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Carman Taylor
Abstract: For many decades academic philosophy – not only in Europe and English-speaking countries, but throughout much of the world – has regarded itself as divided between two distinct, at times competing, traditions: ‘Continental’ and ‘analytic.’ That distinction, however, is problematic in many ways.
How to recognize Continental European Philosophy from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Boundas Constantin V.
Abstract: In my introduction to the analytic philosophical tendencies in twentieth-century philosophy, I argued that the distinction between analytic and Continental philosophy is unhelpful and that it reflects only a pre-philosophical
doxawhose origins are found in the national, social, economic, political, and institutional differences of the countries and the type of ‘public intellectuals’ identified with the one or the other ‘school.’ Also, in the same introduction, I introduced my view that the obstinacy with which the division has been maintained is due (to agree with Foucault) to the contingent knowledge/power nexus prevalent in different times and spaces (which also includes
Phenomenology from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Lawlor Leonard
Abstract: The term ‘phenomenology’ enters philosophical discourse for the first time in 1764, when J. H. Lambert uses it in his
Neues Organon. In a 1770 letter to Lambert, Kant defines the term as a ‘negative science,’ presupposed by metaphysics, in which the principles of sensibility would be determined. The term remains obscure until Hegel’s 1807Phenomenology of Spirit. As in Kant, in Hegel too, phenomenology is presupposed by metaphysics but also subordinated to metaphysics; phenomenology is a part of the philosophy of spirit, which itself is a part (along with the philosophy of nature and the logic) of the encyclopedia
Discourse about Difference from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Schrag Calvin O.
Abstract: Discourse about difference, as it plays itself out in the philosophical arena, has been on the table for some time. It is not a philosophical topic of recent date. Questions about the role of discourse about difference extend all the way back to the beginnings of Western philosophy, and there is a substantial literature that testifies of difference as a topic that elicited attention in the Eastern philosophy and religion of more distant times. It would appear to be an issue that resides at the very core of philosophical reflection both past and present.
African Philosophy from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Janz Bruce B.
Abstract: African philosophy’s development in the twentieth century is both relatively recent, traceable to some seminal texts, and ancient, drawing on cultural forms that stretch back in time and space. This seeming contradiction can be understood if we realize that philosophy itself is ambiguous. It designates on one hand a set of reflective practices rooted in culture and reason, which rigorously and critically explicate a life-world, and on the other a discipline in the university, with a set of codes, standards, recognized practitioners, and customs. More than almost any other site of philosophy, African philosophy has struggled with the similarities and
Book Title: The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Boundas Constantin V.
Abstract: The Companion is organized into two sections, each one of which reflects the developments of the Anglo-American Analytic and the Continental European philosophical traditions respectively. An appendix presents the main accomplishments of non-Western philosophies in the same time frame.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1g09xfc
The Promise of Process Philosophy from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Rescher Nicholas
Abstract: Whitehead himself fixed on ‘process’ as a central category of his philosophy because he viewed time and change as definitively central and
Philosophy of Mathematics from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Avigad Jeremy
Abstract: The philosophy of mathematics plays an important role in analytic philosophy, both as a subject of inquiry in its own right, and as an important landmark in the broader philosophical landscape. Mathematical knowledge has long been regarded as a paradigm of human knowledge with truths that are both necessary and certain, so giving an account of mathematical knowledge is an important part of
epistemology. Mathematical objects like numbers and sets are archetypical examples of abstracta, since we treat such objects in our discourse as though they are independent of time and space; finding a place for such objects in a
Philosophy of Logic from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Marion Mathieu
Abstract: Although it has sometimes been described since Frege as the pursuit of truth (Quine 1982: 1), logic is in fact the study
Feminism from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Donovan Josephine
Abstract: The feminist engagement with the analytic tradition in the twentieth century was for the most part a contentious one. Beginning in the early 1970s – when feminist academics began applying propositions formulated in the women’s liberation political movement of the late 1960s and early 1970s to their respective intellectual fields, feminist philosophers at first used analytic methodologies and assumptions to examine feminist questions. This was not surprising, given that the dominant philosophical tradition in academic departments at the time was the analytic and that these (mostly women) philosophers had been trained in the analytic tradition. Soon, however – by the
Continental Themes in Analytic Philosophy from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Carman Taylor
Abstract: For many decades academic philosophy – not only in Europe and English-speaking countries, but throughout much of the world – has regarded itself as divided between two distinct, at times competing, traditions: ‘Continental’ and ‘analytic.’ That distinction, however, is problematic in many ways.
How to recognize Continental European Philosophy from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Boundas Constantin V.
Abstract: In my introduction to the analytic philosophical tendencies in twentieth-century philosophy, I argued that the distinction between analytic and Continental philosophy is unhelpful and that it reflects only a pre-philosophical
doxawhose origins are found in the national, social, economic, political, and institutional differences of the countries and the type of ‘public intellectuals’ identified with the one or the other ‘school.’ Also, in the same introduction, I introduced my view that the obstinacy with which the division has been maintained is due (to agree with Foucault) to the contingent knowledge/power nexus prevalent in different times and spaces (which also includes
Phenomenology from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Lawlor Leonard
Abstract: The term ‘phenomenology’ enters philosophical discourse for the first time in 1764, when J. H. Lambert uses it in his
Neues Organon. In a 1770 letter to Lambert, Kant defines the term as a ‘negative science,’ presupposed by metaphysics, in which the principles of sensibility would be determined. The term remains obscure until Hegel’s 1807Phenomenology of Spirit. As in Kant, in Hegel too, phenomenology is presupposed by metaphysics but also subordinated to metaphysics; phenomenology is a part of the philosophy of spirit, which itself is a part (along with the philosophy of nature and the logic) of the encyclopedia
Discourse about Difference from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Schrag Calvin O.
Abstract: Discourse about difference, as it plays itself out in the philosophical arena, has been on the table for some time. It is not a philosophical topic of recent date. Questions about the role of discourse about difference extend all the way back to the beginnings of Western philosophy, and there is a substantial literature that testifies of difference as a topic that elicited attention in the Eastern philosophy and religion of more distant times. It would appear to be an issue that resides at the very core of philosophical reflection both past and present.
African Philosophy from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Janz Bruce B.
Abstract: African philosophy’s development in the twentieth century is both relatively recent, traceable to some seminal texts, and ancient, drawing on cultural forms that stretch back in time and space. This seeming contradiction can be understood if we realize that philosophy itself is ambiguous. It designates on one hand a set of reflective practices rooted in culture and reason, which rigorously and critically explicate a life-world, and on the other a discipline in the university, with a set of codes, standards, recognized practitioners, and customs. More than almost any other site of philosophy, African philosophy has struggled with the similarities and
Book Title: The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Boundas Constantin V.
Abstract: The Companion is organized into two sections, each one of which reflects the developments of the Anglo-American Analytic and the Continental European philosophical traditions respectively. An appendix presents the main accomplishments of non-Western philosophies in the same time frame.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1g09xfc
The Promise of Process Philosophy from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Rescher Nicholas
Abstract: Whitehead himself fixed on ‘process’ as a central category of his philosophy because he viewed time and change as definitively central and
Philosophy of Mathematics from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Avigad Jeremy
Abstract: The philosophy of mathematics plays an important role in analytic philosophy, both as a subject of inquiry in its own right, and as an important landmark in the broader philosophical landscape. Mathematical knowledge has long been regarded as a paradigm of human knowledge with truths that are both necessary and certain, so giving an account of mathematical knowledge is an important part of
epistemology. Mathematical objects like numbers and sets are archetypical examples of abstracta, since we treat such objects in our discourse as though they are independent of time and space; finding a place for such objects in a
Philosophy of Logic from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Marion Mathieu
Abstract: Although it has sometimes been described since Frege as the pursuit of truth (Quine 1982: 1), logic is in fact the study
Feminism from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Donovan Josephine
Abstract: The feminist engagement with the analytic tradition in the twentieth century was for the most part a contentious one. Beginning in the early 1970s – when feminist academics began applying propositions formulated in the women’s liberation political movement of the late 1960s and early 1970s to their respective intellectual fields, feminist philosophers at first used analytic methodologies and assumptions to examine feminist questions. This was not surprising, given that the dominant philosophical tradition in academic departments at the time was the analytic and that these (mostly women) philosophers had been trained in the analytic tradition. Soon, however – by the
Continental Themes in Analytic Philosophy from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Carman Taylor
Abstract: For many decades academic philosophy – not only in Europe and English-speaking countries, but throughout much of the world – has regarded itself as divided between two distinct, at times competing, traditions: ‘Continental’ and ‘analytic.’ That distinction, however, is problematic in many ways.
How to recognize Continental European Philosophy from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Boundas Constantin V.
Abstract: In my introduction to the analytic philosophical tendencies in twentieth-century philosophy, I argued that the distinction between analytic and Continental philosophy is unhelpful and that it reflects only a pre-philosophical
doxawhose origins are found in the national, social, economic, political, and institutional differences of the countries and the type of ‘public intellectuals’ identified with the one or the other ‘school.’ Also, in the same introduction, I introduced my view that the obstinacy with which the division has been maintained is due (to agree with Foucault) to the contingent knowledge/power nexus prevalent in different times and spaces (which also includes
Phenomenology from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Lawlor Leonard
Abstract: The term ‘phenomenology’ enters philosophical discourse for the first time in 1764, when J. H. Lambert uses it in his
Neues Organon. In a 1770 letter to Lambert, Kant defines the term as a ‘negative science,’ presupposed by metaphysics, in which the principles of sensibility would be determined. The term remains obscure until Hegel’s 1807Phenomenology of Spirit. As in Kant, in Hegel too, phenomenology is presupposed by metaphysics but also subordinated to metaphysics; phenomenology is a part of the philosophy of spirit, which itself is a part (along with the philosophy of nature and the logic) of the encyclopedia
Discourse about Difference from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Schrag Calvin O.
Abstract: Discourse about difference, as it plays itself out in the philosophical arena, has been on the table for some time. It is not a philosophical topic of recent date. Questions about the role of discourse about difference extend all the way back to the beginnings of Western philosophy, and there is a substantial literature that testifies of difference as a topic that elicited attention in the Eastern philosophy and religion of more distant times. It would appear to be an issue that resides at the very core of philosophical reflection both past and present.
African Philosophy from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Janz Bruce B.
Abstract: African philosophy’s development in the twentieth century is both relatively recent, traceable to some seminal texts, and ancient, drawing on cultural forms that stretch back in time and space. This seeming contradiction can be understood if we realize that philosophy itself is ambiguous. It designates on one hand a set of reflective practices rooted in culture and reason, which rigorously and critically explicate a life-world, and on the other a discipline in the university, with a set of codes, standards, recognized practitioners, and customs. More than almost any other site of philosophy, African philosophy has struggled with the similarities and
Book Title: The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Boundas Constantin V.
Abstract: The Companion is organized into two sections, each one of which reflects the developments of the Anglo-American Analytic and the Continental European philosophical traditions respectively. An appendix presents the main accomplishments of non-Western philosophies in the same time frame.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1g09xfc
The Promise of Process Philosophy from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Rescher Nicholas
Abstract: Whitehead himself fixed on ‘process’ as a central category of his philosophy because he viewed time and change as definitively central and
Philosophy of Mathematics from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Avigad Jeremy
Abstract: The philosophy of mathematics plays an important role in analytic philosophy, both as a subject of inquiry in its own right, and as an important landmark in the broader philosophical landscape. Mathematical knowledge has long been regarded as a paradigm of human knowledge with truths that are both necessary and certain, so giving an account of mathematical knowledge is an important part of
epistemology. Mathematical objects like numbers and sets are archetypical examples of abstracta, since we treat such objects in our discourse as though they are independent of time and space; finding a place for such objects in a
Philosophy of Logic from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Marion Mathieu
Abstract: Although it has sometimes been described since Frege as the pursuit of truth (Quine 1982: 1), logic is in fact the study
Feminism from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Donovan Josephine
Abstract: The feminist engagement with the analytic tradition in the twentieth century was for the most part a contentious one. Beginning in the early 1970s – when feminist academics began applying propositions formulated in the women’s liberation political movement of the late 1960s and early 1970s to their respective intellectual fields, feminist philosophers at first used analytic methodologies and assumptions to examine feminist questions. This was not surprising, given that the dominant philosophical tradition in academic departments at the time was the analytic and that these (mostly women) philosophers had been trained in the analytic tradition. Soon, however – by the
Continental Themes in Analytic Philosophy from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Carman Taylor
Abstract: For many decades academic philosophy – not only in Europe and English-speaking countries, but throughout much of the world – has regarded itself as divided between two distinct, at times competing, traditions: ‘Continental’ and ‘analytic.’ That distinction, however, is problematic in many ways.
How to recognize Continental European Philosophy from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Boundas Constantin V.
Abstract: In my introduction to the analytic philosophical tendencies in twentieth-century philosophy, I argued that the distinction between analytic and Continental philosophy is unhelpful and that it reflects only a pre-philosophical
doxawhose origins are found in the national, social, economic, political, and institutional differences of the countries and the type of ‘public intellectuals’ identified with the one or the other ‘school.’ Also, in the same introduction, I introduced my view that the obstinacy with which the division has been maintained is due (to agree with Foucault) to the contingent knowledge/power nexus prevalent in different times and spaces (which also includes
Phenomenology from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Lawlor Leonard
Abstract: The term ‘phenomenology’ enters philosophical discourse for the first time in 1764, when J. H. Lambert uses it in his
Neues Organon. In a 1770 letter to Lambert, Kant defines the term as a ‘negative science,’ presupposed by metaphysics, in which the principles of sensibility would be determined. The term remains obscure until Hegel’s 1807Phenomenology of Spirit. As in Kant, in Hegel too, phenomenology is presupposed by metaphysics but also subordinated to metaphysics; phenomenology is a part of the philosophy of spirit, which itself is a part (along with the philosophy of nature and the logic) of the encyclopedia
Discourse about Difference from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Schrag Calvin O.
Abstract: Discourse about difference, as it plays itself out in the philosophical arena, has been on the table for some time. It is not a philosophical topic of recent date. Questions about the role of discourse about difference extend all the way back to the beginnings of Western philosophy, and there is a substantial literature that testifies of difference as a topic that elicited attention in the Eastern philosophy and religion of more distant times. It would appear to be an issue that resides at the very core of philosophical reflection both past and present.
African Philosophy from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Janz Bruce B.
Abstract: African philosophy’s development in the twentieth century is both relatively recent, traceable to some seminal texts, and ancient, drawing on cultural forms that stretch back in time and space. This seeming contradiction can be understood if we realize that philosophy itself is ambiguous. It designates on one hand a set of reflective practices rooted in culture and reason, which rigorously and critically explicate a life-world, and on the other a discipline in the university, with a set of codes, standards, recognized practitioners, and customs. More than almost any other site of philosophy, African philosophy has struggled with the similarities and
Book Title: The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Boundas Constantin V.
Abstract: The Companion is organized into two sections, each one of which reflects the developments of the Anglo-American Analytic and the Continental European philosophical traditions respectively. An appendix presents the main accomplishments of non-Western philosophies in the same time frame.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1g09xfc
The Promise of Process Philosophy from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Rescher Nicholas
Abstract: Whitehead himself fixed on ‘process’ as a central category of his philosophy because he viewed time and change as definitively central and
Philosophy of Mathematics from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Avigad Jeremy
Abstract: The philosophy of mathematics plays an important role in analytic philosophy, both as a subject of inquiry in its own right, and as an important landmark in the broader philosophical landscape. Mathematical knowledge has long been regarded as a paradigm of human knowledge with truths that are both necessary and certain, so giving an account of mathematical knowledge is an important part of
epistemology. Mathematical objects like numbers and sets are archetypical examples of abstracta, since we treat such objects in our discourse as though they are independent of time and space; finding a place for such objects in a
Philosophy of Logic from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Marion Mathieu
Abstract: Although it has sometimes been described since Frege as the pursuit of truth (Quine 1982: 1), logic is in fact the study
Feminism from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Donovan Josephine
Abstract: The feminist engagement with the analytic tradition in the twentieth century was for the most part a contentious one. Beginning in the early 1970s – when feminist academics began applying propositions formulated in the women’s liberation political movement of the late 1960s and early 1970s to their respective intellectual fields, feminist philosophers at first used analytic methodologies and assumptions to examine feminist questions. This was not surprising, given that the dominant philosophical tradition in academic departments at the time was the analytic and that these (mostly women) philosophers had been trained in the analytic tradition. Soon, however – by the
Continental Themes in Analytic Philosophy from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Carman Taylor
Abstract: For many decades academic philosophy – not only in Europe and English-speaking countries, but throughout much of the world – has regarded itself as divided between two distinct, at times competing, traditions: ‘Continental’ and ‘analytic.’ That distinction, however, is problematic in many ways.
How to recognize Continental European Philosophy from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Boundas Constantin V.
Abstract: In my introduction to the analytic philosophical tendencies in twentieth-century philosophy, I argued that the distinction between analytic and Continental philosophy is unhelpful and that it reflects only a pre-philosophical
doxawhose origins are found in the national, social, economic, political, and institutional differences of the countries and the type of ‘public intellectuals’ identified with the one or the other ‘school.’ Also, in the same introduction, I introduced my view that the obstinacy with which the division has been maintained is due (to agree with Foucault) to the contingent knowledge/power nexus prevalent in different times and spaces (which also includes
Phenomenology from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Lawlor Leonard
Abstract: The term ‘phenomenology’ enters philosophical discourse for the first time in 1764, when J. H. Lambert uses it in his
Neues Organon. In a 1770 letter to Lambert, Kant defines the term as a ‘negative science,’ presupposed by metaphysics, in which the principles of sensibility would be determined. The term remains obscure until Hegel’s 1807Phenomenology of Spirit. As in Kant, in Hegel too, phenomenology is presupposed by metaphysics but also subordinated to metaphysics; phenomenology is a part of the philosophy of spirit, which itself is a part (along with the philosophy of nature and the logic) of the encyclopedia
Discourse about Difference from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Schrag Calvin O.
Abstract: Discourse about difference, as it plays itself out in the philosophical arena, has been on the table for some time. It is not a philosophical topic of recent date. Questions about the role of discourse about difference extend all the way back to the beginnings of Western philosophy, and there is a substantial literature that testifies of difference as a topic that elicited attention in the Eastern philosophy and religion of more distant times. It would appear to be an issue that resides at the very core of philosophical reflection both past and present.
African Philosophy from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Janz Bruce B.
Abstract: African philosophy’s development in the twentieth century is both relatively recent, traceable to some seminal texts, and ancient, drawing on cultural forms that stretch back in time and space. This seeming contradiction can be understood if we realize that philosophy itself is ambiguous. It designates on one hand a set of reflective practices rooted in culture and reason, which rigorously and critically explicate a life-world, and on the other a discipline in the university, with a set of codes, standards, recognized practitioners, and customs. More than almost any other site of philosophy, African philosophy has struggled with the similarities and
4 The Spectator without Qualities from:
Rancière and Film
Author(s) Geil Abraham
Abstract: Jacques Rancière’s book
The Emancipated Spectatormarks his first sustained discussion of spectatorship (Rancière 2008b; 2009a).¹ This might seem a surprisingly late addition to Rancière’s project of rethinking the conjunction of art and politics. From the disciplinary perspective of Anglo-American film studies, it is a belated intervention indeed. For the question of the spectator is the terrain upon which many of the most significant disciplinary battles over the politics of film theory have been waged over the past three decades. In that time, critical approaches to spectators have proliferated: feminist revisions of psychoanalysis; cultural studies models of differentially ‘decoding’ viewers;
8 Cinemarxis: from:
Rancière and Film
Author(s) Robson Mark
Abstract: A grey corrugated iron fence on the corner of a street, probably London, shot from across the junction as cars pass in front of the camera. People stroll by. A young man walks up to the fence and begins to spray in large letters, one letter at a time:
CHAPTER 2 Stories and the Social World from:
Research Methods for Cultural Studies
Author(s) Lawler Steph
Abstract: As Barbara Hardy, among others, has noted, narratives are integral to social life (1975). People continually tell stories to themselves and to others, gathering up fragments of the day to make a coherent whole, or fragments of occurrences in a life to make a coherent life story. Even though most people will not write autobiographies, all of us are engaged in the projects of our own autobiography, which we manifest every time we tell others about our lives, attend an interview, or simply engage in processes of thinking about and understanding the world and our place within it. In all
CHAPTER 3 Investigating Cultural Producers from:
Research Methods for Cultural Studies
Author(s) Davis Aeron
Abstract: This chapter is in four parts. Each of the first three parts offers a brief overview of the more common research approaches used to investigate cultural production. These are broadly categorised here as political economy, textual analysis and sociological/ethnographic work. The fourth part then concentrates on the third of these and the practical considerations involved. In both parts the discussion and examples draw on my own experiences of researching cultural production in the news industry and within the subcultures of financial and political elite networks. At the time of writing I have interviewed over 250 professionals employed in journalism, public
CHAPTER 2 Stories and the Social World from:
Research Methods for Cultural Studies
Author(s) Lawler Steph
Abstract: As Barbara Hardy, among others, has noted, narratives are integral to social life (1975). People continually tell stories to themselves and to others, gathering up fragments of the day to make a coherent whole, or fragments of occurrences in a life to make a coherent life story. Even though most people will not write autobiographies, all of us are engaged in the projects of our own autobiography, which we manifest every time we tell others about our lives, attend an interview, or simply engage in processes of thinking about and understanding the world and our place within it. In all
CHAPTER 3 Investigating Cultural Producers from:
Research Methods for Cultural Studies
Author(s) Davis Aeron
Abstract: This chapter is in four parts. Each of the first three parts offers a brief overview of the more common research approaches used to investigate cultural production. These are broadly categorised here as political economy, textual analysis and sociological/ethnographic work. The fourth part then concentrates on the third of these and the practical considerations involved. In both parts the discussion and examples draw on my own experiences of researching cultural production in the news industry and within the subcultures of financial and political elite networks. At the time of writing I have interviewed over 250 professionals employed in journalism, public
5 The Derridean model of Difference: from:
François Laruelle’s Philosophies of Difference
Abstract: Derrida is the thinker who carries philosophical decision to the limit of aporetic dislocation pure and simple and who yet, through
the virtuosity of the endangered tightrope-walker, undertakes to seize decision again one last time and to maintain its possibility and truth, refusing to take the final step.¹
CHAPTER ONE Introduction from:
Poetic Language
Abstract: The argument of this book is that poems encourage their readers to experience language as a dual-aspect phenomenon, as something known and understood in two different ways simultaneously. Poems make the language in which they are made appear contingent, and necessary, at once: they make their writers and readers feel a justness or truth in the poem’s language, at the same time as making those writers and readers question just how that part of the poem’s language (a rhyme, an image, the weight on a syllable, and so on) could produce the reactions it produces. The language in poems seems
CHAPTER THREE Selection: from:
Poetic Language
Abstract: The previous chapter suggested that some poetic choices of figure can question the boundary between figurative and literal meaning. This chapter will explore a comparable phenomenon within the vocabulary of poetry more broadly considered. Even when poets are not being metaphorical, they still make choices of vocabulary, they still engage in acts of selection. One of the great pleasures poetry sometimes offers is exhilarating correctness, the use of exactly the right form of words. There are also pleasures, or interesting effects, at least, associated with incorrect or peculiar or unsettling choices of words. This chapter will ask what such effects
CHAPTER SEVEN Spirit: from:
Poetic Language
Abstract: The tradition I sketched in the run-up to my discussion of ‘The Idea of Order at Key West’, that of identifying a spark or charge in poetic language, is sometimes manifested in psychologistic forms in the twentieth century: the energy expressing itself in poetic language is not that of a divine ordering spirit, nor the character of a people, nor a latent ‘chemical’ power in the language itself, but in the psyche of the poet concerned. The surrealist and poet André Breton thought this way. Adopting the language of the poet-critic Pierre Reverdy, who said that one ‘creates … a
CHAPTER 2 Archival Methods from:
Research Methods for English Studies
Author(s) Steedman Carolyn
Abstract: Archives and ‘the archive’ now have a wider range of meanings and potential meanings attached to them than at any point since the inauguration of European and North American state archives in the early nineteenth century.¹ There is, for a start, Jacques Derrida’s compelling philosophy of the archive in
Mal d’archive(Archive Fever, 1995) in which thearkeof the Greek city state is named as the place where things begin, where power originates, with power’s workings inextricably and for all time bound up with the authority of beginnings, origins, starting points.² Those who make their way throughArchive Fever
Book Title: The Lyotard Dictionary- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Sim Stuart
Abstract: 118 entries cover all of Lyotard's concepts and concerns, from 'Addressee' and 'Aesthetics', through 'I don't know what' and 'Is it happening?' to 'Unpresentable' and 'Writing'A further 50 'linking' entries contextualise Lyotard within the wider intellectual currents of his time, from concepts such as Nazism and Memory to thinkers from Aristotle to Jean Baudrillard
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1g0b5xf
Book Title: The Lyotard Dictionary- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Sim Stuart
Abstract: 118 entries cover all of Lyotard's concepts and concerns, from 'Addressee' and 'Aesthetics', through 'I don't know what' and 'Is it happening?' to 'Unpresentable' and 'Writing'A further 50 'linking' entries contextualise Lyotard within the wider intellectual currents of his time, from concepts such as Nazism and Memory to thinkers from Aristotle to Jean Baudrillard
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1g0b5xf
Book Title: The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy-From Pre-history to Future Possibilities
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Stockwell Stephen
Abstract: This substantial reference work critically re-examines the history of democracy, from ancient history to possible directions it may take in the future. 44 chapters explore the origins of democracy and explore new - and sometimes surprising - examples from around the world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1g0b6rb
Chapter 7 Athens from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy
Author(s) Phillips David J.
Abstract: The term
dēmokratiamost probably dates back to 508/7¹ (Ehrenberg 1950; Hansen 1986, 1991: 69–71; Sealey 1973). At that time in the Athenianpolis(city-state), the aristocratic Kleisthenes ‘took the people (demos) into his faction’ (Aristotle [332 BCE] 1984: 20.1; Herodotus [430 bce ] 1972: 5.66.2). He did so in order to gain the upper hand in his struggle for political power with the aristocratic and Spartan-backed Isagoras who had been elected as the eponymousarchonfor 508/7. These two men contested power in the aftermath of the tyranny of the Peisistratids (545– 511/10), which had curbed the opportunities
Chapter 25 1945: from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy
Author(s) Inoguchi Takashi
Abstract: This chapter examines the undertaking of the United States to bring democracy to Japan between 1941 and 1952 during both the Pacific War and the American occupation of Japan. It explores the extent to which the United States was successful in its effort to democratise Japan. The United States was determined that the wartime government of Japan must be destroyed by repeated military campaigns. Step by step, the United States helped to craft a small, conservative, pro-American force in Japan into a majority political party, and, in doing so, successfully brought democracy to the island nation. Before discussing US democracy
Chapter 26 1989: from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy
Author(s) Volten Peter M. E.
Abstract: The transitions to democracy in Eastern and Central Europe from 1989 onwards not only came as a big surprise both inside and outside the region, they were also characterised by incredible speed and by a radical challenge to the prevailing political cultures during the pressing phase of consolidation. The two companion concepts and processes – transition and consolidation of democratic transformation – are clearly culture-bound and dependent on the historical and present context of the country or region involved. This was particularly the case in Central Europe, where cultural and contextual confusion sometimes led to misunderstanding and friction. Westerners who showed their
Chapter 37 Islam since 9/11 from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy
Author(s) Hashemi Nader
Abstract: In international affairs, 11 September 2001 was a watershed day. This day will forever be associated with the terrorist attacks in New York and Washington, DC that resulted in the deaths of 3,000 people. Over the course of the next decade more than 7,500 American, British and other allied troops would lose their lives in the wars and occupations of Afghanistan and Iraq. Civilians, too, have been killed and, while exact figures are unknown and often ignored, the widely accepted conservative estimate is that more than 130,000 Iraqi and Afghan citizens have lost their lives during this same time period
Chapter 39 Transnational Democracy from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy
Author(s) Anderson James
Abstract: Transnational democracy is an idea whose time has come, but it does not, as yet, have much substance. It is a thing of the future more than the present, but its future is far from assured. Such democracy as we presently enjoy it is mostly national, rather than transnational, and representative, rather than participatory. It is largely monopolised by elected ‘representatives’, rather than politically active citizens and almost entirely circumscribed by the territoriality of national state borders. The social communities, relations and processes beyond and across state borders that would constitute transnational democracy largely elude democracy’s remit. ‘Globalisation’ and
Chapter 43 New Thinking from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy
Author(s) Keane John
Abstract: In 1945, following several decades that saw most experiments in democratisation fail, there were only a dozen democracies left on the face of the earth. Since then, despite many ups and downs, democracy has bounced back from near oblivion to become a planetary phenomenon for the first time in its history (Diamond 2008; Dunn 2005; Keane 2009b). Fresh research perspectives are required because democracy has taken root in so many different geographic contexts that several fundamental presuppositions of democratic theory have been invalidated. This metamorphosis remains largely unregistered in the literature on democracy, which still has a distinctively Eurocentric bent,
Introduction from:
Form and Object
Abstract: Our time is perhaps the time of an epidemic of things.
Chapter III Time from:
Form and Object
Abstract: Since at least Saint Augustine,¹ understanding time from the present only leads to confusion. The past is not, since it is no longer present; the future is not, since it is not yet present; and the present is only insofar as it slips by and is already no more, since its being is to become. Augustinian confusion essentially comes from the desire to define the present as presence (to the mind), and presence as being or as existence. The present is what is present, and what is present
Chapter X History from:
Form and Object
Abstract: The problem of universal history does not result from the possibility of organising the universe in time, but rather from considering time as a universe. How is it possible to grasp time – structured by the present (maximal presence), the past (weakening of presence), and the future (maximal absence) – as a cumulative order of all past instants, from the most remote to the most present? We raised this question in Chapter III of this book. Universal history inscribes objects and events in an order of comprehension, which leads to the present and points towards the future. The cultural structuring of time
Chapter XV Ages of Life from:
Form and Object
Abstract: We are far from the time when humans
Book Title: Virginia Woolf and Being-in-the-world-A Heideggerian Study
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Simone Emma
Abstract: Breaking fresh ground in Woolfian scholarship, this study presents a timely and compelling interpretation of Virginia Woolf's textual treatment of the relationship between self and world from the perspective of the philosophy of Martin Heidegger. Drawing on Woolf's novels, essays, reviews, letters, diary entries, short stories, and memoirs, the book explores the political and the ontological, as the individual's connection to the world comes to be defined by an involvement and engagement that is always already situated within a particular physical, societal, and historical context.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1n7qhrd
Chapter 2 A Sense of Place from:
Virginia Woolf and Being-in-the-world
Abstract: As emphasised in the previous chapter, it is the average everyday lived experience of Being-in-the-world that is a central concern and preoccupation throughout Woolf’s writings. Despite the incalculable variety of everyday experiences that any individual may encounter during his or her lifetime, each is always and inevitably located in a particular place, whether it be the home, the street, a city, the countryside, the workplace or an armchair. Place provides the setting and context for all experience.¹ The inherent connection between the individual, experience and place, and how each depends upon the other for definition and actuality, is a view
Introduction from:
Immanence and Micropolitics
Abstract: It is often supposed that politics operates by way of conscious deliberation and the rational pursuit of an interest of some kind. There are innumerable instances, historical and contemporary, that immediately put this view into doubt. Instances that warrant a closer examination of the nature of the human subject at the centre of such deliberation. It is apparent that in the Westernised world, the working class seldom vote for political parties or pursue political matters representative of their real interests. Indeed, this touches on one of the most pertinent questions of our time: how has capitalism managed to live on
Chapter 9 THE GLAMOUR OF EVIL: from:
Evil in Contemporary Political Theory
Author(s) Horton John
Abstract: Probably the most famous contribution to the discussion of the nature of evil in the modern world over the last half-century, at least in the field of political theory, is that of Hannah Arendt. Her thesis regarding ‘the banality of evil’ set out in the course of her reflections on the Eichmann trial in
Eichmann in Jerusalem, first published in 1963,¹ is widely celebrated and much invoked, if not always unambiguously favourably. Exactly what she meant by this captivating but misleadingly simple phrase is less easily understood than is sometimes thought and has been the cause of heated debate.² One
INTRODUCTION from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts
Author(s) Wray Ramona
Abstract: In the courtyard of the “Casa di Giulietta” – and on the cover of this book – stands a striking embodiment of Shakespeare’s Juliet.¹ In the same way that Montague, in
Romeo and Juliet, memorializes Capulet’s daughter – “For I will raise her statue in pure gold” (5.3.298) – so has the city of Verona elected to honour and localize a character from the early modern English stage. The work of local artist, Nereo Costantini, the sculpture of Juliet was financed by the Lions’ Club of Verona, completed in 1968 and displayed, for the first time, in 1972. Dates are suggestive, and it was
5 SHAKESPEARE ANTHOLOGIZED from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts
Author(s) Rumbold Kate
Abstract: In the twenty-first century, “Shakespeare” is not only an English cultural icon but shares some of the characteristics of a powerful global brand. This chapter shows the surprising but important role that the many books of quotations and extracts from Shakespeare’s works, published from within his own lifetime to the present day, have played in establishing that status. It argues that these anthologies have not simply reflected Shakespeare’s growing status, but actively helped to construct it. The seemingly inherent qualities for which Shakespeare is now admired – the beauty of his language, his wise understanding of human nature, his Englishness – are
10 SHAKESPEARE AND MUSICAL THEATRE from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts
Author(s) Teague Fran
Abstract: Musical theatre is found world-wide, often with national inflections. Whether one considers a satyr play, opera, zarzuela, or Broadway show, that work is clearly an instance of musical theatre. Given the frequency with which songs occur, Shakespeare’s plays are themselves instances of musical theatre, but in this chapter I shall be focusing on one narrow branch of musical theatre, the sort of show that is sometimes called the Broadway musical (no Verdi or Elvis Costello here). A few such musicals have grown from Shakespeare’s plays, with the best-known instances being
The Boys from Syracuse, West Side Story and Kiss Me,
21 SHAKESPEARE AND THE COMIC BOOK from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts
Author(s) Jensen Michael P.
Abstract: The Oregon Shakespeare Festival occupies parts of two blocks in downtown Ashland, Oregon.¹ Directly across the street from one of their buildings is
More Fun, a comic book store selling new and old comics, graphic novels and books reprinting comic books and strips. The store reverses the usual trend in which retail shops make enough money in November and December to turn a profit for the year. At More Fun, it is some of the 125,000 tourists visiting the Shakespeare Festival that keep the lights on as many kill time between breakfast and the matinée. Shakespeare is independent from both
26 SHAKESPEARE ON FILM, 1930–90 from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts
Author(s) Costantini-Cornède Anne-Marie
Abstract: From 1930 to 1990, the phenomenon of Shakespeare on film was characterized by a great variety of activity, from landmark “mainstream” films, deferential to textual authority, to a full range of innovative cinematic essays of all kinds, including modernizations, derivatives or non-English cinematic Shakespeares, and transcultural appropriations trading on radical time and space transpositions, such as Akira Kurosawa’s
Throne of Blood (1957) and Ran (1985), which shift Macbeth and Lear to Sengoku-Jidai (“wartroubled”) medieval Japan. Five main tendencies may be distinguished from the early days of sound movies to the beginning of the Shakespeare on screen revival marked by Kenneth
29 SHAKESPEARE AND RADIO from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts
Author(s) Greenhalgh Susanne
Abstract: The all-star Renaissance Theatre Company production of
Hamlet (BBC Radio 3, 26 April 1992), featuring Kenneth Branagh as the Prince and John Gielgud as the Ghost, is a bold and richly textured achievement, one which points to many of the issues that this chapter on Shakespeare and radio will seek to address.¹ Just under four hours long, with an “entirety” script conflated from the First Folio and Second Quarto, the production presents a version “probably never heard in the author’s lifetime (and perhaps never envisaged by him)” (Jackson, 1994, 202). Effectively this is a new work, one that raises fascinating
INTRODUCTION: from:
Texts
Abstract: Unlike many books in the field, this is not a study of literary texts in cultural contexts but a book about cultural texts of the kind increasingly studied through literary approaches. The chapters analyse a wide range of different texts that are neither poems nor ‘literary’ novels and offer readings of them in the light of issues that arise in literary studies and elsewhere, from considerations of trauma to questions of time, from ethics to spatial dynamics. A number of pre-selected critical and theoretical perspectives are brought to bear, from ecocriticism to performativity theory to postcolonial studies, but these are
CHAPTER 3 MOVIE POSTER: ALIEN NATURE from:
Texts
Abstract: John Fiske explains that texts are sometimes considered to be used differently in studies of literature and popular culture:
CHAPTER 16 WORLD MEDIA EVENT: IT’S ABOUT TIME: CULTURAL HISTORY AT THE MILLENNIUM from:
Texts
Abstract: According to Iain Sinclair, writing in 1999, the millennium had no future because it had already happened. The millennial moment in Britain and beyond, was not the dawn of the year 2000 but the death of the Princess of Wales – discussed in Chapter 5. Sinclair is here working with the idea of affect and with an emotional moment; one that expresses the finality, transition and mourning that might be associated with an endpoint, even though the media mood for the millennial shift itself was unremittingly celebratory. Yet Sinclair’s view that ‘the millennium’ happened somewhere or sometime else points up many
INTRODUCTION: from:
Texts
Abstract: Unlike many books in the field, this is not a study of literary texts in cultural contexts but a book about cultural texts of the kind increasingly studied through literary approaches. The chapters analyse a wide range of different texts that are neither poems nor ‘literary’ novels and offer readings of them in the light of issues that arise in literary studies and elsewhere, from considerations of trauma to questions of time, from ethics to spatial dynamics. A number of pre-selected critical and theoretical perspectives are brought to bear, from ecocriticism to performativity theory to postcolonial studies, but these are
CHAPTER 3 MOVIE POSTER: ALIEN NATURE from:
Texts
Abstract: John Fiske explains that texts are sometimes considered to be used differently in studies of literature and popular culture:
CHAPTER 16 WORLD MEDIA EVENT: IT’S ABOUT TIME: CULTURAL HISTORY AT THE MILLENNIUM from:
Texts
Abstract: According to Iain Sinclair, writing in 1999, the millennium had no future because it had already happened. The millennial moment in Britain and beyond, was not the dawn of the year 2000 but the death of the Princess of Wales – discussed in Chapter 5. Sinclair is here working with the idea of affect and with an emotional moment; one that expresses the finality, transition and mourning that might be associated with an endpoint, even though the media mood for the millennial shift itself was unremittingly celebratory. Yet Sinclair’s view that ‘the millennium’ happened somewhere or sometime else points up many
INTRODUCTION: from:
Texts
Abstract: Unlike many books in the field, this is not a study of literary texts in cultural contexts but a book about cultural texts of the kind increasingly studied through literary approaches. The chapters analyse a wide range of different texts that are neither poems nor ‘literary’ novels and offer readings of them in the light of issues that arise in literary studies and elsewhere, from considerations of trauma to questions of time, from ethics to spatial dynamics. A number of pre-selected critical and theoretical perspectives are brought to bear, from ecocriticism to performativity theory to postcolonial studies, but these are
CHAPTER 3 MOVIE POSTER: ALIEN NATURE from:
Texts
Abstract: John Fiske explains that texts are sometimes considered to be used differently in studies of literature and popular culture:
CHAPTER 16 WORLD MEDIA EVENT: IT’S ABOUT TIME: CULTURAL HISTORY AT THE MILLENNIUM from:
Texts
Abstract: According to Iain Sinclair, writing in 1999, the millennium had no future because it had already happened. The millennial moment in Britain and beyond, was not the dawn of the year 2000 but the death of the Princess of Wales – discussed in Chapter 5. Sinclair is here working with the idea of affect and with an emotional moment; one that expresses the finality, transition and mourning that might be associated with an endpoint, even though the media mood for the millennial shift itself was unremittingly celebratory. Yet Sinclair’s view that ‘the millennium’ happened somewhere or sometime else points up many
Book Title: About Time-Narrative, Fiction and the Philosophy of Time
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Currie Mark
Abstract: About Timebrings together ideas about time from narrative theory and philosophy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1r1zgb
Chapter 1 Introduction: from:
About Time
Abstract: My title both chastises me for the tardiness and congratulates me for the timeliness of my book. In 1989, David Wood predicted that ‘our century-long “linguistic turn” will be followed by a spiralling return to time as the focus and horizon of all our thought and experience’ (David Wood 2001: xxxv), and it is about time that this prediction about time came true. The need as I see it is partly as Wood described it: the need for a ‘programme for the analysis of temporal structures and representations of time’ (xxxvi). Alongside such a programme, there is also a need
Chapter 4 Temporality and Self-Distance from:
About Time
Abstract: One of the things that narrative theory can learn from philosophy is a proper sense of the importance of the future. I have suggested several times already that narrative theory shows a preoccupation with memory, retrospect and the archiving of past events, and has an undeveloped potential to address questions about the present and future. The significance of the notions of ‘anticipation’ and ‘prolepsis’ is that, in different ways, they refer to this relation between the present and actual or possible futures. With philosophy as its teacher, narrative theory can turn its attention to narrative not only in its function
Chapter 5 Inner and Outer Time from:
About Time
Abstract: The previous chapters open a set of questions about the relationship between time and self-consciousness, an axis which has received too little attention within literary studies.¹ This neglect is all the more surprising since the idea of self-consciousness itself has played such a central role in the characterisation not only of contemporary fiction but of the more general social and discursive condition of the contemporary world. In prolepsis, we find on one hand a kind of temporal self-distance – a form of reflection which involves looking back on the present, from one’s own point of view or that of another – and
Chapter 6 Backwards Time from:
About Time
Abstract: In ‘The Typology of Detective Fiction’, Todorov distinguishes between the whodunit and the thriller on the grounds that the former is a double story and the latter a single one (2000: 139). The whodunit is double in the sense that it is the story of ‘the days of the investigation which begin with the crime, and the days of the drama which lead up to it’.¹ The simplicity of this observation is matched only by its importance, because it means that the whodunit goes backwards as it goes forwards, or more precisely that it reconstructs the time line of the
Chapter 7 Fictional Knowledge from:
About Time
Abstract: When it comes to the internal consciousness of time, the novel picks up where philosophy leaves off. But does the novel therefore
know something about time which is beyond the reach of philosophy? Perhaps knowledge of time is in some way the domain of philosophy, so that wherever it is that the novel goes with time, by being beyond the limits of philosophy, it cannot be an adventure in knowledge as such. There are two intimately related questions about knowledge involved in this. The first is the oldest question of all, the question of the relationship between philosophy and literature,
Chapter 8 Tense Times from:
About Time
Abstract: The argument about the relationship between time and narrative is now coming into focus. It begins in the Kantian notion that we have no access to things in themselves, but only, as phenomenology holds, to things as they are experienced, apprehended in consciousness, thought about, or understood. But the concept of consciousness cannot be taken for granted. Philosophy in general, both in the phenomenological and in the Anglo-American analytical traditions, has turned to language in order to investigate the realms of experience, perception, thought and understanding. If consciousness is fundamentally linguistic, it follows that we ought to be able to
Book Title: About Time-Narrative, Fiction and the Philosophy of Time
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Currie Mark
Abstract: About Timebrings together ideas about time from narrative theory and philosophy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1r1zgb
Chapter 1 Introduction: from:
About Time
Abstract: My title both chastises me for the tardiness and congratulates me for the timeliness of my book. In 1989, David Wood predicted that ‘our century-long “linguistic turn” will be followed by a spiralling return to time as the focus and horizon of all our thought and experience’ (David Wood 2001: xxxv), and it is about time that this prediction about time came true. The need as I see it is partly as Wood described it: the need for a ‘programme for the analysis of temporal structures and representations of time’ (xxxvi). Alongside such a programme, there is also a need
Chapter 4 Temporality and Self-Distance from:
About Time
Abstract: One of the things that narrative theory can learn from philosophy is a proper sense of the importance of the future. I have suggested several times already that narrative theory shows a preoccupation with memory, retrospect and the archiving of past events, and has an undeveloped potential to address questions about the present and future. The significance of the notions of ‘anticipation’ and ‘prolepsis’ is that, in different ways, they refer to this relation between the present and actual or possible futures. With philosophy as its teacher, narrative theory can turn its attention to narrative not only in its function
Chapter 5 Inner and Outer Time from:
About Time
Abstract: The previous chapters open a set of questions about the relationship between time and self-consciousness, an axis which has received too little attention within literary studies.¹ This neglect is all the more surprising since the idea of self-consciousness itself has played such a central role in the characterisation not only of contemporary fiction but of the more general social and discursive condition of the contemporary world. In prolepsis, we find on one hand a kind of temporal self-distance – a form of reflection which involves looking back on the present, from one’s own point of view or that of another – and
Chapter 6 Backwards Time from:
About Time
Abstract: In ‘The Typology of Detective Fiction’, Todorov distinguishes between the whodunit and the thriller on the grounds that the former is a double story and the latter a single one (2000: 139). The whodunit is double in the sense that it is the story of ‘the days of the investigation which begin with the crime, and the days of the drama which lead up to it’.¹ The simplicity of this observation is matched only by its importance, because it means that the whodunit goes backwards as it goes forwards, or more precisely that it reconstructs the time line of the
Chapter 7 Fictional Knowledge from:
About Time
Abstract: When it comes to the internal consciousness of time, the novel picks up where philosophy leaves off. But does the novel therefore
know something about time which is beyond the reach of philosophy? Perhaps knowledge of time is in some way the domain of philosophy, so that wherever it is that the novel goes with time, by being beyond the limits of philosophy, it cannot be an adventure in knowledge as such. There are two intimately related questions about knowledge involved in this. The first is the oldest question of all, the question of the relationship between philosophy and literature,
Chapter 8 Tense Times from:
About Time
Abstract: The argument about the relationship between time and narrative is now coming into focus. It begins in the Kantian notion that we have no access to things in themselves, but only, as phenomenology holds, to things as they are experienced, apprehended in consciousness, thought about, or understood. But the concept of consciousness cannot be taken for granted. Philosophy in general, both in the phenomenological and in the Anglo-American analytical traditions, has turned to language in order to investigate the realms of experience, perception, thought and understanding. If consciousness is fundamentally linguistic, it follows that we ought to be able to
Book Title: About Time-Narrative, Fiction and the Philosophy of Time
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Currie Mark
Abstract: About Timebrings together ideas about time from narrative theory and philosophy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1r1zgb
Chapter 1 Introduction: from:
About Time
Abstract: My title both chastises me for the tardiness and congratulates me for the timeliness of my book. In 1989, David Wood predicted that ‘our century-long “linguistic turn” will be followed by a spiralling return to time as the focus and horizon of all our thought and experience’ (David Wood 2001: xxxv), and it is about time that this prediction about time came true. The need as I see it is partly as Wood described it: the need for a ‘programme for the analysis of temporal structures and representations of time’ (xxxvi). Alongside such a programme, there is also a need
Chapter 4 Temporality and Self-Distance from:
About Time
Abstract: One of the things that narrative theory can learn from philosophy is a proper sense of the importance of the future. I have suggested several times already that narrative theory shows a preoccupation with memory, retrospect and the archiving of past events, and has an undeveloped potential to address questions about the present and future. The significance of the notions of ‘anticipation’ and ‘prolepsis’ is that, in different ways, they refer to this relation between the present and actual or possible futures. With philosophy as its teacher, narrative theory can turn its attention to narrative not only in its function
Chapter 5 Inner and Outer Time from:
About Time
Abstract: The previous chapters open a set of questions about the relationship between time and self-consciousness, an axis which has received too little attention within literary studies.¹ This neglect is all the more surprising since the idea of self-consciousness itself has played such a central role in the characterisation not only of contemporary fiction but of the more general social and discursive condition of the contemporary world. In prolepsis, we find on one hand a kind of temporal self-distance – a form of reflection which involves looking back on the present, from one’s own point of view or that of another – and
Chapter 6 Backwards Time from:
About Time
Abstract: In ‘The Typology of Detective Fiction’, Todorov distinguishes between the whodunit and the thriller on the grounds that the former is a double story and the latter a single one (2000: 139). The whodunit is double in the sense that it is the story of ‘the days of the investigation which begin with the crime, and the days of the drama which lead up to it’.¹ The simplicity of this observation is matched only by its importance, because it means that the whodunit goes backwards as it goes forwards, or more precisely that it reconstructs the time line of the
Chapter 7 Fictional Knowledge from:
About Time
Abstract: When it comes to the internal consciousness of time, the novel picks up where philosophy leaves off. But does the novel therefore
know something about time which is beyond the reach of philosophy? Perhaps knowledge of time is in some way the domain of philosophy, so that wherever it is that the novel goes with time, by being beyond the limits of philosophy, it cannot be an adventure in knowledge as such. There are two intimately related questions about knowledge involved in this. The first is the oldest question of all, the question of the relationship between philosophy and literature,
Chapter 8 Tense Times from:
About Time
Abstract: The argument about the relationship between time and narrative is now coming into focus. It begins in the Kantian notion that we have no access to things in themselves, but only, as phenomenology holds, to things as they are experienced, apprehended in consciousness, thought about, or understood. But the concept of consciousness cannot be taken for granted. Philosophy in general, both in the phenomenological and in the Anglo-American analytical traditions, has turned to language in order to investigate the realms of experience, perception, thought and understanding. If consciousness is fundamentally linguistic, it follows that we ought to be able to
CHAPTER 4
from:
Death, 'Deathlessness' and Existenz in Karl Jaspers' Philosophy
Abstract: I approach Jaspers’ concept of eternity as non-temporality/timelessness by
2 The Politics of Neuroscience from:
The Political Mind
Abstract: The neurological material in the foregoing chapter operates within an ontology and epistemology that many in the social sciences have long fought against. At its hard scientific edge, this belief holds that human behaviour is fully explicable through close study of the operations of the brain. All social science and theory would therefore, in time, be superseded by an all-embracing explanatory vocabulary of neurophysiological brainstates. Before we can proceed to unpack such material for use in a political context, this fundamental concern must first be addressed.
4 Endlessly Repeating Ourselves: from:
The Political Mind
Abstract: With our satanic question ever in sight, one of our main concerns must be the possibility of change. To think differently, for creative thought to occur, there must be change: at the psychological level and then projected out into the world. The question of breaking out of the confines of the influence of genetic mental structure and socialisation is also a question of how patterns of thought may change. This then is the relation that the present chapter bears to the rest of the book; our experience of time is the experience of change, primarily in terms of linearity, through
5 Emotions from:
The World, the Flesh and the Subject
Abstract: By the time you have reached this point in the book you may be exasperated, excited, intrigued or merely bored. Whatever your reaction, if you have any reaction at all you will most likely be experiencing some emotion. But what are emotions, and why do we experience them? Could we be much the sort of creatures that we are, with all our other experiences, thoughts and desires, and yet be devoid of emotional feelings? And if we could not, is that because our emotions somehow derive from these other psychological states, or do they add some indispensable element to them?
Chapter 5 Literature – Repeat Nothing from:
Death-Drive
Abstract: The title of Ian McEwan’s 1998 novel,
Enduring Love, invites images of a romantic relationship surviving adversity with the rich resources of sentimental intensity. But those images are qualified severely when the story gets under way. First, the love portrayed is unrequited; second, it is pathological; third, it is homosexual (in a markedly heterosexual world); fourth, it is a manifestation of Christian fanaticism. The word ‘enduring’ in the title becomes menacing, suggesting obsession. It also reflects back on the object of the love who must ‘endure’ the menace such ‘love’ presents.
Chapter 7 The Rest of Radioactive Light from:
Death-Drive
Abstract: The persistence of an old thing, even a dead one, the continuance of light over time, the concept of the photograph, the ‘radioactivity’ of artworks,
Hamlet, Samuel Beckett and, again, Freud – these are the themes I want
CHAPTER 9 Language in Metaphors from:
Creating Worldviews
Abstract: In his sardonic book-length account of the various representations attributed to the French language throughout history,
De la langue française (1997), Henri Meschonnic quoted Rivarol, one of the ‘great priests’ who knelt down before the majesty of the French language, celebrating its purity, its clarity, its logic, its perfection and its universality. French at the time of Rivarol (the end of the eighteenth century) was the preferred language of European elites from Madrid to Moscow and was widely used as the language of diplomacy; and this was enough to convince Rivarol that the French language was ‘universal’. It was, he
CHAPTER 9 Language in Metaphors from:
Creating Worldviews
Abstract: In his sardonic book-length account of the various representations attributed to the French language throughout history,
De la langue française (1997), Henri Meschonnic quoted Rivarol, one of the ‘great priests’ who knelt down before the majesty of the French language, celebrating its purity, its clarity, its logic, its perfection and its universality. French at the time of Rivarol (the end of the eighteenth century) was the preferred language of European elites from Madrid to Moscow and was widely used as the language of diplomacy; and this was enough to convince Rivarol that the French language was ‘universal’. It was, he
2 Protestant Liberty: from:
Dissenting Histories
Abstract: Calamy’s historical writing was a sometimes awkward
4 Enlightenment, Republicanism and Dissent: from:
Dissenting Histories
Abstract: At the same time as Hume, another historian was producing a history of seventeenth-century England – William Harris, a Dissenting minister in the west of England. Born in Salisbury in 1720, the son of a Dissenting woolcomber, he was educated for the ministry at Taunton Academy. He served brief spells as a minister to Dissenting congregations first at St Looe in Cornwall and then at Wells in Somerset, where he was ordained in April 1741.¹ He married Miss Elizabeth Bovit of Honiton in Devon and lived the rest of his life there, ministering to a small Dissenting congregation of around a
5 MULTILINGUALISM, ETHNICITY AND IDENTITY from:
Language and Power in the Modern World
Abstract: The world is frequently portrayed as an increasingly uniform place from the point of view of the number of languages used on our planet, not least by some of the media in Western countries where English is the dominant language. Despite this portrayal, however, its population continues to use a huge, if diminishing, variety of languages – most estimates are of around 6,000 living languages (a figure inevitably highly dependent on the definition of ‘a language’ used – see, for example, Crystal 1997: Chapter 47, for a discussion). Nevertheless, whatever the real figure, languages are certainly disappearing all the time
Chapter 2 Sainthood-towards-Death: from:
George Mackay Brown and the Philosophy of Community
Abstract: The story of Magnus Erlendson,¹ twelfth-century Earl of Orkney and martyred saint, is perhaps the best known to emerge from the islands, the ‘most famous episode in Orkney’s history’.² In John Mooney’s modern hagiography, a major source for twentieth-century writing on Magnus, the earl is held to be ‘the outstanding personality of the Orkneys in olden days as well as in our own times’.³ This claim still stands seventy years after Mooney’s biography, thanks not only to the continued popularity of the
Orkneyinga Saga and related Icelandic tellings, but also to George Mackay Brown’s repeated reworking of the story, especially
4 The Analytic Perspective on the Idea from:
The Idea of Continental Philosophy
Abstract: The trajectory of this book is entering its most crucial phase. I have promised to look at the major reasons and arguments (perhaps I should say more neutrally that I will look at ‘major texts’) presented by analytic philosophers who have affirmed or embraced the idea of what Gilbert Ryle called the ‘wide gulf’ between Anglo-Saxon ‘philosophical analysis’ and philosophy on ‘the Continent’.¹ It is now time to do so. The texts I will look at are all from the same period: the late 1950s.² As we shall see, the idea of the gulf was already well established by then,
CHAPTER 2 ORTHODOXY AND HETERODOXY: from:
Islam, Christianity and Tradition
Abstract: By this time the pressure of Muslim doctrine and practice had mastered most of the resistances that had, at an earlier time, sought an outlet in
heterodox and subversive movements. But this did not lead to stagnation. On the contrary, the devotional feeling of the townsmen, grinding a channel of its own, burst the bonds of the orthodox
8 Towards a Concept of Connected Memory: from:
Media and Memory
Abstract: My Facebook page is awash with unremarkable images of conventionality: new babies, weddings, beloved pets, children on the beach, families skiing, gatherings, nights out, concerts, gardens, home improvements and hobbies. The vast majority of these I am not in. Some of these I have felt compelled to add to but most are produced by an online collection of individuals who may or may not be networked to each other and most likely have not been connected to me in the real world for quite some time. They are ‘dormant memories’ as Hoskins describes them (2010). Ceaselessly streaming this data of
6 MARXISM AND INTERNATIONAL LAW from:
Philosophy of International Law
Abstract: Rumors of the death of socialism have been, oddly enough, accompanied by rumors of the disappearance of the United States. Poststructuralists tell us that we are all victims now but that, somehow, the multitude will arise against ‘the Powers.’ Power enslaves us all in its impersonality, but resistance is everywhere. A primary focus of this study is Michael Hardt and Antonio Negri’s
Empire, a poststructuralist and, at the same time, postmarxist critique of globalization.¹ This chapter will argue against those authors that an updated theory of capitalist imperialism convincingly captures the contemporary international scene. The brutal power of the United
6 MARXISM AND INTERNATIONAL LAW from:
Philosophy of International Law
Abstract: Rumors of the death of socialism have been, oddly enough, accompanied by rumors of the disappearance of the United States. Poststructuralists tell us that we are all victims now but that, somehow, the multitude will arise against ‘the Powers.’ Power enslaves us all in its impersonality, but resistance is everywhere. A primary focus of this study is Michael Hardt and Antonio Negri’s
Empire, a poststructuralist and, at the same time, postmarxist critique of globalization.¹ This chapter will argue against those authors that an updated theory of capitalist imperialism convincingly captures the contemporary international scene. The brutal power of the United
2 Laclau with Lacan on from:
The Lacanian Left
Abstract: If Castoriadis constitutes the (extimate) frontier of the emerging Lacanian Left, two of its pivotal figures are certainly Ernesto Laclau and Chantal Mouffe. For a start, they have both exhibited, again and again, their increasing readiness to take on board many crucial Lacanian insights in their innovative analysis of political discourse and in reorienting the political theory of the Left in the direction of a ‘radical and plural democracy’. In their joint work, theoretical affinities with Lacanian thought are evident from at least the time of
Hegemony and Socialist Strategy (Laclau and Mouffe 1985), if not earlier. This is not
Excursus on Badiou from:
The Lacanian Left
Abstract: As seen in the preceding chapter, Žiž¡ek’s act is conceptualised in a close dialogue with Alain Badiou’s theorisation of the event. Before bringing the first part of
The Lacanian Left to a close, it is thus important to deal more thoroughly with the relation between Žiž¡ek and Badiou, more precisely between Žiž¡ek’s act and Badiou’s event, and with the place Badiou’s ethics occupy within the Lacanian Left.¹ The exact parameters of this relation are greatly obscured not only by the complexity of the two theoretico-political projects and their various reorientations over time, but also by the often contradictory comments of
15 MEDIA PARENTING AND THE CONSTRUCTION OF MEDIA IDENTITIES IN NORTHERN NIGERIAN MUSLIM HAUSA VIDEO FILMS from:
Media and Identity in Africa
Author(s) Adamu Abdalla Uba
Abstract: In analyzing Muslim Hausa film viewing habits and the apparent preference for Hindi cinema, Brian Larkin (1997a) has coined the term ‘parallel modernities’ to refer to the coexistence in space and time of multiple economic, religious and cultural flows that are often subsumed within the term ‘modernity’. He builds upon the concept of ‘alternative modernities’, introduced by Arjun Appadurai (1991). As he further argues:
19 NAMES, CLOTH AND IDENTITY: from:
Media and Identity in Africa
Author(s) Gilbert Michelle
Abstract: In the Akwapim kingdom of southeastern Ghana,¹ clothing is used as a form of communication to make statements about personhood and status; to conceal or reveal identity; to express desires and impulses. It may do so directly or indirectly, conventionally or rebelliously. Clothing is owned, bestowed and gives identity. The clothed body expresses the person of the wearer and society’s image of that person. As a result, clothing absorbs the particular times in which it has been worn² and becomes like a relic of these past events.
Chapter 2 Real Essences without Essentialism from:
Deleuze and Philosophy
Author(s) Baugh Bruce
Abstract: ‘Essences’ have had a hard time of it in philosophy over the last forty years; on both sides of the analytic–continental divide, ‘essentialism’ is a dirty word. Yet what if we have no adequate idea of what an essence is? It is one of Deleuze’s great virtues that he forces us to think about these questions in new ways, particularly with the theory put forward in his Spinoza books of ‘particular essences’.¹ Since essences are traditionally construed in a more or less Platonic way, as universals or classes which group together individuals in virtue of a set of common
Chapter 11 The Problem of the Birth of Philosophy in Greece in the Thought of Gilles Deleuze from:
Deleuze and Philosophy
Author(s) Lamble Sarah
Abstract: What does it mean today to speak of intensities in the domain of political philosophy? The intensive, says Deleuze, is the untimely¹. To be untimely, for Deleuze, is the essential task of philosophy, its paradoxical intensity – and on this point, I am in total agreement with him. But still the question must be raised – what is it to be untimely today, in our postmodern situation? That is the point.
Chapter 2 Real Essences without Essentialism from:
Deleuze and Philosophy
Author(s) Baugh Bruce
Abstract: ‘Essences’ have had a hard time of it in philosophy over the last forty years; on both sides of the analytic–continental divide, ‘essentialism’ is a dirty word. Yet what if we have no adequate idea of what an essence is? It is one of Deleuze’s great virtues that he forces us to think about these questions in new ways, particularly with the theory put forward in his Spinoza books of ‘particular essences’.¹ Since essences are traditionally construed in a more or less Platonic way, as universals or classes which group together individuals in virtue of a set of common
Chapter 11 The Problem of the Birth of Philosophy in Greece in the Thought of Gilles Deleuze from:
Deleuze and Philosophy
Author(s) Lamble Sarah
Abstract: What does it mean today to speak of intensities in the domain of political philosophy? The intensive, says Deleuze, is the untimely¹. To be untimely, for Deleuze, is the essential task of philosophy, its paradoxical intensity – and on this point, I am in total agreement with him. But still the question must be raised – what is it to be untimely today, in our postmodern situation? That is the point.
Chapter 2 Pre-Post-Modern Relativism from:
Scandalous Knowledge
Abstract: If ‘relativism’ means anything at all, it means a great many things. It is certainly not, though often regarded that way, a one-line ‘claim’ or ‘thesis’: for example, ‘man is the measure of all things’, ‘nothing is absolutely right or wrong’, ‘all opinions are equally valid’, and so forth.¹ Nor is it, I think, a permanent feature of a fixed logical landscape, a single perilous chasm into which incautious thinkers from Protagoras’ time to our own have ‘slid’ unawares or ‘fallen’ catastrophically. Indeed, it may be that relativism, at least in our own era, is nothing at all – a phantom
Chapter 3 Netting Truth: from:
Scandalous Knowledge
Abstract: Truth, or the diverse types of situation to which we give that name, is, for the most part, a good thing to have. It is good, certainly, when friends are loyal, lovers faithful, their tears authentic, vows earnest, stories trustworthy. It is generally in our interest to know what’s up and what really happened. Not always, of course, or only: fiction and flattery, artifice and illusion, duplicity and pipe-dreams are also important, sometimes necessary, perhaps even, in their various ways, truthful, indeed sometimes supremely so – or so the poets have told us, though it’s not clear they’re to be trusted
Chapter 4 Cutting-Edge Equivocation: from:
Scandalous Knowledge
Abstract: We can derive some sense of the way intellectual life is experienced in some era from the recurrence of certain metaphors used to describe its conduct – for example, the frequency with which, in our own time, intellectual projects and achievements are described in terms of navigational finesse: the charting of passages between extremes, the steering of middle courses, the avoidance of the twin perils of Scylla and Charybdis. Thus an advertisement for philosopher Susan Haack’s book,
Evidence and Inquiry, features a statement by Hilary Putnam praising the author for ‘elaborating and persuasively defending a position . . . which adroitly
Book Title: Post-Foundational Political Thought-Political Difference in Nancy, Lefort, Badiou and Laclau
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Marchart Oliver
Abstract: A wide-ranging overview of the emergence of post-foundationalism and a survey of the work of its key contemporary exponents.This book presents the first systematic coverage of the conceptual difference between ‘politics’ (the practice of conventional politics: the political system or political forms of action) and ‘the political’ (a much more radical aspect which cannot be restricted to the realms of institutional politics). It is also the first introductory overview of post-foundationalism and the tradition of ‘left Heideggerianism’: the political thought of contemporary theorists who make frequent use of the idea of political difference: Jean-Luc Nancy, Claude Lefort, Alain Badiou and Ernesto Laclau.After an overview of current trends in social post-foundationalism and a genealogical chapter on the historical emergence of the difference between the concepts of ‘politics’ and ‘the political’, the work of individual theorists is presented and discussed at length. Individual chapters are presented on the political thought of Jean-Luc Nancy (including Philippe Lacoue-Labarthe), Claude Lefort, Alain Badiou, and Ernesto Laclau (including Chantal Mouffe).Overall the book offers an elaboration of the idea of a post-foundational conception of politics.Other titles in the Taking on the Political series: Valentine and Arditi/ Polemicisation 0 7486 1064 2Shapiro/ Cinematic Political Thought 0 7486 1289 0Chambers/ Language and the Politics of Untimeliness 0 7486 1766 3Bowman/ Post-Marxism Versus Cultural Studies 978 0 7486 1762 3Simons/ Critical Political Theory in the Media Age 0 7486 1583 0
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1r2bs1
Chapter 3 Retracing the Political Difference: from:
Post-Foundational Political Thought
Abstract: Every inquiry into social post-foundationalism and the conceptual difference between politics and the political will have to take into account the work presented and elaborated at the Centre for Philosophical Research on the Political between 1980 and 1984. The Centre, founded by Philippe Lacoue-Labarthe and Jean-Luc Nancy, turned out to be the location for the most intense and influential re-elaboration so far of the notion of the political, or of the difference between politics and the political. The way Claude Lefort and Alain Badiou, for instance, frame their own versions of the political difference (oftentimes in contradistinction to Nancy and
Chapter 7 Remembering ‘The Forgotten Gorbals’ from:
The Scots Imagination and Modern Memory
Abstract: Bert Hardy’s ‘Gorbals Boys’ is an iconic image.¹ It depicts two lads aged about ten, strolling arm-in-arm and glancing pertly at the camera. From their clothing and hairstyles, the rain-washed pavement and tall buildings framing them, the casual spectator would conclude that they are working-class, the period is sometime between 1930 and 1950 and the setting is an industrial city with a cool climate. Rendered ‘sepia’, the picture adorns the cover of the first volume of an autobiography by Ralph Glasser, as it does the front of a monograph about Hardy, and it is also available from numerous outlets as
Book Title: The Unexpected-Narrative Temporality and the Philosophy of Surprise
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Currie Mark
Abstract: This new study asks how stories affect the way we think about time and, in particular, how they condition thinking about the future. Focusing on surprise and the unforeseeable, the book argues that stories are mechanisms that reconcile what is taking place with what will have been. This relation between the present and the future perfect offers a grammatical formula quite different from our default notions of narrative as recollection or recapitulation. It promises new understandings of the reading process within the strange logic of a future that is already complete. It also points beyond that to some of the key temporal concepts of our epoch: prediction and unpredictability, uncertainty, the event, the untimely and the messianic. The argument is worked out in new readings of Sarah Waters’ Fingersmith, Kazuo Ishiguro’s Never Let Me Go and Julian Barnes’ The Sense of an Ending.Key Features: An original discussion of the relation of time and narrativeAn important intervention in narratologyA striking general argument about the workings of the mindProvides an overview of the question of surprise in philosophy and literature
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt3fgrm7
Chapter 1 A Flow of Unforeseeable Novelty from:
The Unexpected
Abstract: Special problems attach to thinking about what has not yet taken place, and it is far from obvious that the theory of narrative should have anything to say about those problems. But that is what this book aims to do: to consider the role of narrative in our conceptualisation and our cognitive control of the future, and to explore the experience of reading fiction in relation to the idea of time flow.
Chapter 5 The Untimely and the Messianic from:
The Unexpected
Abstract: Unexpected events, by standing out against the backdrop of routine and predictable moments, can make us see the originality of every moment, the novelty and unexpectedness of the present in general. Time, says Elizabeth Grosz, is ‘a kind of evanescence that appears only at those moments when our expectations are (positively or negatively) surprised’ (Grosz 2004, 5). This is not, for Grosz, the usual cliché, where a sensation to which we are normally dead comes into being as the defamiliarising effect of the unexpected, or the power of now elevates special people above the mundane. The unexpected, or the ‘untimely’,
Chapter 7 Temporal Perspective: from:
The Unexpected
Abstract: The idea that the perspectival structure of fictional discourse is crucial for its representation of temporality finds an extended exploration if we change tradition from semantics, and the way that semantics has informed contemporary narratology, to the phenomenology of internal time-consciousness, and by extension, to phenomenological approaches to the temporality of literature. A foundational argument here is Roman Ingarden’s discussion of temporal perspective in
The Cognition of the Literary Work of Art, which explores the idea of temporal perspective in fiction as a special case of the more general phenomena of temporal perspective in the human experience of time. As
Book Title: The Unexpected-Narrative Temporality and the Philosophy of Surprise
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Currie Mark
Abstract: This new study asks how stories affect the way we think about time and, in particular, how they condition thinking about the future. Focusing on surprise and the unforeseeable, the book argues that stories are mechanisms that reconcile what is taking place with what will have been. This relation between the present and the future perfect offers a grammatical formula quite different from our default notions of narrative as recollection or recapitulation. It promises new understandings of the reading process within the strange logic of a future that is already complete. It also points beyond that to some of the key temporal concepts of our epoch: prediction and unpredictability, uncertainty, the event, the untimely and the messianic. The argument is worked out in new readings of Sarah Waters’ Fingersmith, Kazuo Ishiguro’s Never Let Me Go and Julian Barnes’ The Sense of an Ending.Key Features: An original discussion of the relation of time and narrativeAn important intervention in narratologyA striking general argument about the workings of the mindProvides an overview of the question of surprise in philosophy and literature
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt3fgrm7
Chapter 1 A Flow of Unforeseeable Novelty from:
The Unexpected
Abstract: Special problems attach to thinking about what has not yet taken place, and it is far from obvious that the theory of narrative should have anything to say about those problems. But that is what this book aims to do: to consider the role of narrative in our conceptualisation and our cognitive control of the future, and to explore the experience of reading fiction in relation to the idea of time flow.
Chapter 5 The Untimely and the Messianic from:
The Unexpected
Abstract: Unexpected events, by standing out against the backdrop of routine and predictable moments, can make us see the originality of every moment, the novelty and unexpectedness of the present in general. Time, says Elizabeth Grosz, is ‘a kind of evanescence that appears only at those moments when our expectations are (positively or negatively) surprised’ (Grosz 2004, 5). This is not, for Grosz, the usual cliché, where a sensation to which we are normally dead comes into being as the defamiliarising effect of the unexpected, or the power of now elevates special people above the mundane. The unexpected, or the ‘untimely’,
Chapter 7 Temporal Perspective: from:
The Unexpected
Abstract: The idea that the perspectival structure of fictional discourse is crucial for its representation of temporality finds an extended exploration if we change tradition from semantics, and the way that semantics has informed contemporary narratology, to the phenomenology of internal time-consciousness, and by extension, to phenomenological approaches to the temporality of literature. A foundational argument here is Roman Ingarden’s discussion of temporal perspective in
The Cognition of the Literary Work of Art, which explores the idea of temporal perspective in fiction as a special case of the more general phenomena of temporal perspective in the human experience of time. As
Book Title: The Unexpected-Narrative Temporality and the Philosophy of Surprise
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Currie Mark
Abstract: This new study asks how stories affect the way we think about time and, in particular, how they condition thinking about the future. Focusing on surprise and the unforeseeable, the book argues that stories are mechanisms that reconcile what is taking place with what will have been. This relation between the present and the future perfect offers a grammatical formula quite different from our default notions of narrative as recollection or recapitulation. It promises new understandings of the reading process within the strange logic of a future that is already complete. It also points beyond that to some of the key temporal concepts of our epoch: prediction and unpredictability, uncertainty, the event, the untimely and the messianic. The argument is worked out in new readings of Sarah Waters’ Fingersmith, Kazuo Ishiguro’s Never Let Me Go and Julian Barnes’ The Sense of an Ending.Key Features: An original discussion of the relation of time and narrativeAn important intervention in narratologyA striking general argument about the workings of the mindProvides an overview of the question of surprise in philosophy and literature
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt3fgrm7
Chapter 1 A Flow of Unforeseeable Novelty from:
The Unexpected
Abstract: Special problems attach to thinking about what has not yet taken place, and it is far from obvious that the theory of narrative should have anything to say about those problems. But that is what this book aims to do: to consider the role of narrative in our conceptualisation and our cognitive control of the future, and to explore the experience of reading fiction in relation to the idea of time flow.
Chapter 5 The Untimely and the Messianic from:
The Unexpected
Abstract: Unexpected events, by standing out against the backdrop of routine and predictable moments, can make us see the originality of every moment, the novelty and unexpectedness of the present in general. Time, says Elizabeth Grosz, is ‘a kind of evanescence that appears only at those moments when our expectations are (positively or negatively) surprised’ (Grosz 2004, 5). This is not, for Grosz, the usual cliché, where a sensation to which we are normally dead comes into being as the defamiliarising effect of the unexpected, or the power of now elevates special people above the mundane. The unexpected, or the ‘untimely’,
Chapter 7 Temporal Perspective: from:
The Unexpected
Abstract: The idea that the perspectival structure of fictional discourse is crucial for its representation of temporality finds an extended exploration if we change tradition from semantics, and the way that semantics has informed contemporary narratology, to the phenomenology of internal time-consciousness, and by extension, to phenomenological approaches to the temporality of literature. A foundational argument here is Roman Ingarden’s discussion of temporal perspective in
The Cognition of the Literary Work of Art, which explores the idea of temporal perspective in fiction as a special case of the more general phenomena of temporal perspective in the human experience of time. As
Book Title: The Unexpected-Narrative Temporality and the Philosophy of Surprise
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Currie Mark
Abstract: This new study asks how stories affect the way we think about time and, in particular, how they condition thinking about the future. Focusing on surprise and the unforeseeable, the book argues that stories are mechanisms that reconcile what is taking place with what will have been. This relation between the present and the future perfect offers a grammatical formula quite different from our default notions of narrative as recollection or recapitulation. It promises new understandings of the reading process within the strange logic of a future that is already complete. It also points beyond that to some of the key temporal concepts of our epoch: prediction and unpredictability, uncertainty, the event, the untimely and the messianic. The argument is worked out in new readings of Sarah Waters’ Fingersmith, Kazuo Ishiguro’s Never Let Me Go and Julian Barnes’ The Sense of an Ending.Key Features: An original discussion of the relation of time and narrativeAn important intervention in narratologyA striking general argument about the workings of the mindProvides an overview of the question of surprise in philosophy and literature
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt3fgrm7
Chapter 1 A Flow of Unforeseeable Novelty from:
The Unexpected
Abstract: Special problems attach to thinking about what has not yet taken place, and it is far from obvious that the theory of narrative should have anything to say about those problems. But that is what this book aims to do: to consider the role of narrative in our conceptualisation and our cognitive control of the future, and to explore the experience of reading fiction in relation to the idea of time flow.
Chapter 5 The Untimely and the Messianic from:
The Unexpected
Abstract: Unexpected events, by standing out against the backdrop of routine and predictable moments, can make us see the originality of every moment, the novelty and unexpectedness of the present in general. Time, says Elizabeth Grosz, is ‘a kind of evanescence that appears only at those moments when our expectations are (positively or negatively) surprised’ (Grosz 2004, 5). This is not, for Grosz, the usual cliché, where a sensation to which we are normally dead comes into being as the defamiliarising effect of the unexpected, or the power of now elevates special people above the mundane. The unexpected, or the ‘untimely’,
Chapter 7 Temporal Perspective: from:
The Unexpected
Abstract: The idea that the perspectival structure of fictional discourse is crucial for its representation of temporality finds an extended exploration if we change tradition from semantics, and the way that semantics has informed contemporary narratology, to the phenomenology of internal time-consciousness, and by extension, to phenomenological approaches to the temporality of literature. A foundational argument here is Roman Ingarden’s discussion of temporal perspective in
The Cognition of the Literary Work of Art, which explores the idea of temporal perspective in fiction as a special case of the more general phenomena of temporal perspective in the human experience of time. As
Book Title: The Unexpected-Narrative Temporality and the Philosophy of Surprise
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Currie Mark
Abstract: This new study asks how stories affect the way we think about time and, in particular, how they condition thinking about the future. Focusing on surprise and the unforeseeable, the book argues that stories are mechanisms that reconcile what is taking place with what will have been. This relation between the present and the future perfect offers a grammatical formula quite different from our default notions of narrative as recollection or recapitulation. It promises new understandings of the reading process within the strange logic of a future that is already complete. It also points beyond that to some of the key temporal concepts of our epoch: prediction and unpredictability, uncertainty, the event, the untimely and the messianic. The argument is worked out in new readings of Sarah Waters’ Fingersmith, Kazuo Ishiguro’s Never Let Me Go and Julian Barnes’ The Sense of an Ending.Key Features: An original discussion of the relation of time and narrativeAn important intervention in narratologyA striking general argument about the workings of the mindProvides an overview of the question of surprise in philosophy and literature
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt3fgrm7
Chapter 1 A Flow of Unforeseeable Novelty from:
The Unexpected
Abstract: Special problems attach to thinking about what has not yet taken place, and it is far from obvious that the theory of narrative should have anything to say about those problems. But that is what this book aims to do: to consider the role of narrative in our conceptualisation and our cognitive control of the future, and to explore the experience of reading fiction in relation to the idea of time flow.
Chapter 5 The Untimely and the Messianic from:
The Unexpected
Abstract: Unexpected events, by standing out against the backdrop of routine and predictable moments, can make us see the originality of every moment, the novelty and unexpectedness of the present in general. Time, says Elizabeth Grosz, is ‘a kind of evanescence that appears only at those moments when our expectations are (positively or negatively) surprised’ (Grosz 2004, 5). This is not, for Grosz, the usual cliché, where a sensation to which we are normally dead comes into being as the defamiliarising effect of the unexpected, or the power of now elevates special people above the mundane. The unexpected, or the ‘untimely’,
Chapter 7 Temporal Perspective: from:
The Unexpected
Abstract: The idea that the perspectival structure of fictional discourse is crucial for its representation of temporality finds an extended exploration if we change tradition from semantics, and the way that semantics has informed contemporary narratology, to the phenomenology of internal time-consciousness, and by extension, to phenomenological approaches to the temporality of literature. A foundational argument here is Roman Ingarden’s discussion of temporal perspective in
The Cognition of the Literary Work of Art, which explores the idea of temporal perspective in fiction as a special case of the more general phenomena of temporal perspective in the human experience of time. As
INTRODUCTION from:
Modernism and Magic
Abstract: This book argues that the aesthetic experiments of the first half of the twentieth century that we call modernism drew on the discourses of the occult dominant during the period – in particular on spiritualism and theosophy – because in them it saw the possibilities for a reconceptualisation of the mimetic. While these discourses have been much investigated in critical works of the last few decades, what neither recent scholars nor many practitioners, or indeed critics, at the time have admitted is the extent to which they have magic at their heart. Yet these occult discourses provided possibilities for experiment for writers,
Chapter 1 CIA HISTORY AS A COLD WAR BATTLEGROUND: from:
Intelligence Studies in Britain and the US
Author(s) Aldrich Richard J.
Abstract: Where does the history of the history of intelligence begin? As a self-conscious academic subject, intelligence history is widely understood to have started in the 1980s. In Britain, Christopher Andrew and David Dilks proclaimed a deliberate manifesto for intelligence historians in 1984, urging scholars to explore the ‘missing dimension’. Broadly contemporaneous with this, the American historian Richard Immerman asserted that it was important to incorporate covert action into any sophisticated understanding of foreign policy. The mid-1980s also saw the creation of the journal
Intelligence and National Security, edited by Christopher Andrew and Michael Handel.¹ Since that time, we have enjoyed
Chapter 10 NO CLOAKS, NO DAGGERS: from:
Intelligence Studies in Britain and the US
Author(s) Beach Jim
Abstract: The history of military intelligence has now become almost inextricably bound up with that of intelligence generally. This is perhaps inevitable. As Sir Kenneth Strong, Eisenhower’s wartime intelligence chief, put it:
Chapter 12 WHITEHALL, INTELLIGENCE AND OFFICIAL HISTORY: from:
Intelligence Studies in Britain and the US
Author(s) Murphy Christopher J.
Abstract: In the historiography of British intelligence, the publication of
SOE in France– an officially sponsored account of the activities of the Special Operations Executive (SOE) during the Second World War – stands out as a significant moment. While the existence of the organisation and its activities already constituted something of an open secret – a consequence of numerous memoirs and investigative works published since its dissolution in 1946 –SOE in Francewas an account of part of the wartime secret world, which was published by Her Majesty’s Stationery Office: an official history, based on access to SOE’s own
Chapter 13 A TALE OF TORTURE? ALEXANDER SCOTLAND, THE LONDON CAGE AND POST-WAR BRITISH SECRECY from:
Intelligence Studies in Britain and the US
Author(s) Lomas Daniel W. B.
Abstract: The immediate post-war period saw the publication of a number of secret service accounts recounting wartime exploits, giving the impression that, with the end of hostilities, these could now be revealed.¹ In fact, as has been clearly demonstrated by Richard J. Aldrich, officials in Whitehall attempted to manage the release of intelligence-related subject matter into the public domain, largely to protect the secrets of code-breaking and strategic deception.² While receiving the most attention, these were not the only wartime activities which were strictly off-limits to publishers, as far as the authorities were concerned. Efforts to publish details of prisoner interrogation
Conclusion from:
Deleuze's Literary Clinic
Abstract: This book has presented a reconstruction of Deleuze’s critical and clinical project, arguing that this must be grasped as incomplete in terms of Deleuze’s own writings on the subject, but that it appears as a coherent set of concepts when read alongside the rest of his work. As a result, it has been necessary for me to present Deleuze’s literary clinic in terms of the developments informing the early and middle sections of his career, while at the same time insisting that the methodological principles of immanent critique have remained consistent throughout. If literary criticism and questions of health and
Chapter 6 Conclusion from:
Muriel Rukeyser and Documentary
Abstract: Rukeyser begins
The Life of Poetrywith a call to arms and an affirmation: ‘In time of crisis, we summon up our strength.’¹ This ‘strength’, she asserts, may be derived from ‘every forgotten image … every memory that can make us know our power’.² For Rukeyser, in a manner similar to that discovered by Francis Galton when conducting his experiments into language and mental imagery, the singular image of a boat generates and communicates a vast network of imaginative associations.³ Summoning the memory of her evacuation from Spain, Rukeyser writes simply, ‘I think now of a boat on which I
Chapter 10 The Party In Extremis in D. H. Lawrence’s Women in Love from:
The Modernist Party
Author(s) Norris Margot
Abstract: In
Women in Love,¹ D. H. Lawrence created some of the most intense representations of early twentieth-century English parties to be found. Published in 1920, the novel had been completed in 1917, and it was difficult for contemporaries not to read the party sequences as recreations of the author’s interactions with Lady Ottoline Morrell and her circle at her Oxfordshire country home, Garsington Manor.² Lawrence and his wife Frieda were among the very first guests invited to Garsington – to attend a small birthday-party for Morrell on 16 June 1915 – and they were frequent and sometimes contentious guests there in the
Chapter 11 Bohemian Retrospects: from:
The Modernist Party
Author(s) Waddell Nathan
Abstract: The English dramatist Ashley Dukes wrote in
The Scene Is Changed(1942) that immediately before the First World War he frequented the Café Royal on Regent Street in London, where, with such artists as Jacob Epstein, Henri Gaudier-Brzeska, Christopher Nevinson and Robert Bevan, among others, he would talk ‘about the world, the inevitability of war, Marinetti’s futurism or Ezra Pound’s verse, or the paper that Wyndham Lewis was bringing out calledBlast’.² This ‘lucky’ time, as Dukes put it, of intermingling artists and impresarios sharply contrasted with the world to come after 1918, a world ambivalently characterised by ‘deliverance and
Chapter 5 Towards a Fabulous Reading: from:
Material Inscriptions
Abstract: For all the attention it has received and all the times its most famous (or infamous) lines have been quoted, Nietzsche’s brief “On Truth and Lie in the Extramoral Sense” remains something of an enigma – a “riddling X,” as the text itself refers to the inaccessible and undefinable thing-in-itself (
das rätselhafte X des Dings an sich). In large measure, the enigmatic status of the text is due to the uncanny way it manages to predict and inscribe within its own borders, in its own terms, any attempt that would gain access to it by solving its riddle and identifying
Chapter 8 The Future Past of Literary Theory from:
Material Inscriptions
Abstract: In order to fulfill the didactic assignment and talk about the future of literary theory,¹ one might as well begin with the question of the
presentof literary theory: what is, what would or could be, “literary theory” today? If one can judge by the signs of the times, then the most direct answer to the question would be: “Not much.” Not much these days could qualify as “literary theory,” not much todayisliterary theory – at least in comparison to the fabled heyday of literary theory during the (late) 1960s and 1970s. In comparison to the various projects
Introduction. from:
The Paul de Man Notebooks
Author(s) McQuillan Martin
Abstract: The Paul de Man papers are held in the Critical Theory Archive, on the fifth floor of the Langdon Library, in the Department of Special Collections and Archives at the University of California Irvine (UCI). The papers cover a wide range of material, including texts from de Man’s time as a graduate student at Harvard in the late 1950s, manuscripts of his published writing, manuscripts of essays that have since his death formed the content for published books edited by others, correspondence, and files related to his many years as a professor and teacher of comparative literature. Included in these
Introduction from:
The Paul de Man Notebooks
Author(s) McQuillan Martin
Abstract: These texts are a sample of previously uncollected writings by de Man. Some were published during his lifetime in prominent journals; others are little more than drafts or fragments towards future work and should be considered as such. These later texts are presented as indicative of the material contained within the UCI archive and do not stand for de Man’s public output. However, in each case the texts add something new to our understanding of the de Man corpus. The two essays on art, The Drawings of Paul Valéry from 1948 (the archive translation by Richard Howard of de Man’s
5 Introduction to Madame Bovary (1965) from:
The Paul de Man Notebooks
Abstract: Ever since its publication in 1857,
Madame Bovaryhas been one of the most discussed books in the history of world literature. Despite the distinction and importance of his other novels, Flaubert had to reconcile himself to the fact that he became known, once and forever, as the author ofMadame Bovary. The popularity of the novel has increased rather than diminished with time. Numberless translations exist in various languages; the word “bovarysme” has become part of the French language; the myth surrounding the figure of Emma Bovary is so powerful that, as in the case of Don Quixote, or
9 Rousseau and English Romanticism (1978) from:
The Paul de Man Notebooks
Author(s) Moll Patience
Abstract: The problem of Rousseau’s presence within English Romanticism, especially among the major poets, which is to say Coleridge, Wordsworth, Blake, Keats, and Shelley, has been treated by traditional comparative literature as a simply historical question. It has been treated, that is to say, at the level of so-called general ideas,
idées reçues, and commonplaces to which the history of ideas sometimes risks sacrificing the complexity of readings.¹ The works that treat the question are few, especially in the English and German realms, where the reading of Rousseau continues to come up against some very deeply entrenched prejudices. The already mentioned
Introduction from:
The Paul de Man Notebooks
Author(s) McQuillan Martin
Abstract: An entire volume could be devoted to de Man as a translator. It might include his wartime translation into Flemish of Melville’s
Moby Dick,or the texts produced while working as a hired hand for Henry Kissinger’s journalConfluence,when he was making ends meet prior to becoming a Junior Fellow at Harvard and translating across a range of European languages. It would include his edition ofMadame Bovaryand the French edition of Rilke. It would certainly include de Man’s translation into English of Martin Heidegger’s Hölderlin and the Essence of Poetry, published in 1959 in theQuarterly Review
Introduction from:
The Paul de Man Notebooks
Author(s) McQuillan Martin
Abstract: If the term ‘the Yale School’ continues to have currency it is less the result of a programme of published research by its members and more to do with the pedagogical programme established at Yale during de Man’s time there. In this sense de Man operated on the sound academic principle of attempting to transform an institution by running that institution: he served as Chair of the French Department at Yale from 1974 to 1977 and as Chair of the Comparative Literature Department from 1978 to his death in 1983. The legacy of Paul de Man is closely tied to
Introduction from:
The Paul de Man Notebooks
Author(s) McQuillan Martin
Abstract: The shape of the de Manian oeuvre has for the most part been determined by post hoc rationalisations. During his lifetime he published two editions of
Blindness and Insight(1971, revised edition 1983) andAllegories of Readingin 1979. These monographs, if that is what they are, bring cohesion to collections of essays by de Man in more or less satisfactory ways.The Rhetoric of Romanticism(1984) was planned for a similar purpose during de Man’s final years and he also agreed a structure with Lindsay Waters for the book that becameCritical Writings1953 to 1978 (published posthumously in
32 Outline for a Monograph on Nietzsche from:
The Paul de Man Notebooks
Abstract: The juxtaposition of Rousseau and Nietzsche has not been studied, partly because Nietzsche has nothing good so say about Rousseau, partly because their main common interest has for a long time been neglected in works dealing with these two authors. Of late however the theory of language and of rhetoric that both develop in their early writings has received more and more attention (on Rousseau in the work of J. Derrida, R. Althusser, implicitly in Judith Shklar, etc.; on Nietzsche in recent books and articles by Ph. Lacoue Labarthe, Gilles Deleuze, B. Pautrat, etc.). The combined presence, in both authors,
33 From Nietzsche to Rousseau from:
The Paul de Man Notebooks
Abstract: The project is the outcome of a fifteen-year-long concern with the history and the poetics of romantic and post-romantic literature in France, Germany and England. It began as a study of the poetry of Mallarmé, Yeats, and George written as a doctoral dissertation at Harvard under the title “The Post-Romantic Predicament.” In the course of rewriting this thesis for publication, I increasingly felt the need for a wider historical framework reaching back to the later part of the eighteenth century. At the same time, the experience of teaching alternatively in the US and in Europe has led me to reflect
CHAPTER 5 The Visible and the Invisible in a Middle Sepik Society from:
Sensual Relations
Abstract: The Washkuk Hills are situated in the Ambunti District of East Sepik Province. They are inhabited by the Kwoma. John Whiting’s
Becoming a Kwomais probably the best known source on this Middle Sepik society. The Kwoma have also been studied by Christian Kaufmann, Margaret Holmes Williamson, and Ross Bowden, whose excellent bookYena: Art and Ceremony in a Sepik Societyand recentDictionary of Kwomacontain much information of relevance to the present inquiry into the Kwoma sensory order. The following brief ethnographic description is based partly on Bowden’s books and partly on notes I took during the time
3. Story Worlds, Narratives, and Research from:
Cops, Teachers, Counselors
Abstract: The purpose of our research is simple, even elemental: to collect and examine street-level workers’ everyday work stories to uncover their judgments as they see them. This simple goal belies the challenge of the interpretive task because these stories are often ambiguous and multilayered: they reference both rules and morality to defend decisions, reveal internalized as well as interactive conflicts, and document shifting positions over time. These stories are not philosophical discourses on law or fairness. They are pragmatic expressions about acts and identities and assertions of dominant yet jumbled societal views of good and bad behavior and worthy and
4. Physical and Emotional Spaces from:
Cops, Teachers, Counselors
Abstract: For Joe, fairness and justice didn’t really apply. By the time he reached eighth grade, he had already been manipulating the school system
5. Workers Unite: from:
Cops, Teachers, Counselors
Abstract: Back when I was an income-maintenance worker, we went through computer conversion when we converted all of our files and put them on the computer. We had all gone through training—and for some a couple of weeks training—and we came back and all had like over two hundred on our caseload. So we had all these cases to put on our computers, and of course we were still having to do our regular work. To try to do all that we were having to work a lot of hours overtime, for which we really weren’t getting paid.
6. Organizational and Social Divisions among Street-Level Workers from:
Cops, Teachers, Counselors
Abstract: There is a young woman that I have been working with for about a year now. She is really severely physically disabled—average cognitive ability, but has minimal use of her body. The family have very little money, and her parents have been unemployed off and on all the time.
7. Putting a Fix on People: from:
Cops, Teachers, Counselors
Abstract: I ran into a prostitute named [Angela], and she’s thirty-nine years old, she’s a white female, and she has no teeth. According to her, a black guy beat her up one time and knocked her teeth out. And she’s a chronic alcoholic, and not only that, she’s pregnant. I had contact with her once and I made the effort to calling a pilot program that we have here called Care Seven. It is part of a master’s program for psychologists and counselors. They came out and talked to her for a little bit and did no good. The very next
10. Street-Level Worker Knows Best from:
Cops, Teachers, Counselors
Abstract: This story is kind of an example of—it reminded me of this yesterday because [the vocational rehabilitation counselors] were talking about how in some organizations some people are angry at us because they feel that we decide for the client what they are going to do and we don’t let them do what they want to, and our answer to that is, “Well, sometimes we don’t let them do what they want to because it would not be practical or it would not be feasible.”¹
Book Title: Utopia in Performance-Finding Hope at the Theater
Publisher: University of Michigan Press
Author(s): Dolan Jill
Abstract: "Jill Dolan is the theatre's most astute critic, and this new book is perhaps her most important. Utopia in Performance argues with eloquence and insight how theatre makes a difference, and in the process demonstrates that scholarship matters, too. It is a book that readers will cherish and hold close as a personal favorite, and that scholars will cite for years to come."---David Román, University of Southern CaliforniaWhat is it about performance that draws people to sit and listen attentively in a theater, hoping to be moved and provoked, challenged and comforted? In
Utopia in Performance, Jill Dolan traces the sense of visceral, emotional, and social connection that we experience at such times, connections that allow us to feel for a moment not what a better world might look like, but what it might feel like, and how that hopeful utopic sentiment might become motivation for social change.She traces these "utopian performatives" in a range of performances, including the solo performances of feminist artists Holly Hughes, Deb Margolin, and Peggy Shaw; multicharacter solo performances by Lily Tomlin, Danny Hoch, and Anna Deavere Smith; the slam poetry event Def Poetry Jam; The Laramie Project; Blanket, a performance by postmodern choreographer Ann Carlson; Metamorphoses by Mary Zimmerman; and Deborah Warner's production of Medea starring Fiona Shaw. While the book richly captures moments of "feeling utopia" found within specific performances, it also celebrates the broad potential that performance has to provide a forum for being human together; for feeling love, hope, and commonality in particular and historical (rather than universal and transcendent) ways.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3998/mpub.119520
chapter four Def Poetry Jam: from:
Utopia in Performance
Abstract: Performance, as I argued by discussing monopolylogue performers in the last chapter, offers a way to practice imagining new forms of social relationships. I believe in theater’s use value as a place to fantasize how peace and justice, equality and truly participatory democracy might take hold sometime in a near or distant future, as well as in theater’s value as a place in which to connect emotionally and spiritually with other people. Seeing performance requires that we listen attentively to the speech of others, that we hear people speak and feel their humanity and its connections with our own. Performance
The Postmodern Transition: from:
The Fate of Law
Author(s) de Sousa Santos Boaventura
Abstract: Historians will probably describe the twentieth century as an unhappy century. Reared by its androgynous parent, the nineteenth century, to become a wonder child, it soon revealed itself as a fragile and sickly child. When it was fourteen years old, it fell seriously ill with a disease that, like the tuberculosis or the syphilis of the period, took a long time to be treated and, indeed, was never completely cured. So much so that when it was thirty-nine years of age, it relapsed into an even more serious illness that was to prevent it from enjoying life with the full
TWO Kenneth Burke: from:
Staging Philosophy
Author(s) Puchner Martin
Abstract: Philosophy, a discipline concerned with truth, being, and the foundations of knowledge, was predestined to abhor the theater, which is premised on lying, appearance, and the construction of false worlds. Philosophical attacks on the theater, as they accompany the history of philosophy from Plato onward, are thus not only frequent but also unsurprising. At the same time, self-declared defenders of the theater, including many playwrights, have fought back by creating mock philosophers who are exposed as fools and charlatans on the stage, a tradition that begins with Aristophanes’ unflattering portrayal of Socrates in
The Clouds.Indeed, Plato and Aristophanes can
ELEVEN Understanding Plays from:
Staging Philosophy
Author(s) Hamilton James R.
Abstract: Theatrical performances require time for their presentation.¹ Theatrical performances require time for their reception. The time in which theatrical performance is received by an audience is the same time as that of its presentation.
TWELVE Perception, Action, and Identification in the Theater from:
Staging Philosophy
Author(s) Nanay Bence
Abstract: My endeavor in this chapter is to examine the ways in which the general structure of perception is modified in the case of the reception of theater performances. First, perception in general is examined. I will then argue that a basic characteristic of perception is that it is sometimes interdependent with action. Next I turn to the special case of the perception of a theatrical performance—what I call
theater perception—examining the role of perception for the possibility of action in the case of watching a performance. I contend that theater perception cannot be sufficiently analyzed without taking into
TWO Kenneth Burke: from:
Staging Philosophy
Author(s) Puchner Martin
Abstract: Philosophy, a discipline concerned with truth, being, and the foundations of knowledge, was predestined to abhor the theater, which is premised on lying, appearance, and the construction of false worlds. Philosophical attacks on the theater, as they accompany the history of philosophy from Plato onward, are thus not only frequent but also unsurprising. At the same time, self-declared defenders of the theater, including many playwrights, have fought back by creating mock philosophers who are exposed as fools and charlatans on the stage, a tradition that begins with Aristophanes’ unflattering portrayal of Socrates in
The Clouds.Indeed, Plato and Aristophanes can
ELEVEN Understanding Plays from:
Staging Philosophy
Author(s) Hamilton James R.
Abstract: Theatrical performances require time for their presentation.¹ Theatrical performances require time for their reception. The time in which theatrical performance is received by an audience is the same time as that of its presentation.
TWELVE Perception, Action, and Identification in the Theater from:
Staging Philosophy
Author(s) Nanay Bence
Abstract: My endeavor in this chapter is to examine the ways in which the general structure of perception is modified in the case of the reception of theater performances. First, perception in general is examined. I will then argue that a basic characteristic of perception is that it is sometimes interdependent with action. Next I turn to the special case of the perception of a theatrical performance—what I call
theater perception—examining the role of perception for the possibility of action in the case of watching a performance. I contend that theater perception cannot be sufficiently analyzed without taking into
The Essence of Millennial Reflections on International Studies from:
Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Harvey Frank P.
Abstract: By the time the other editor of this collection, Frank Harvey, was initiated into international relations at McGill in the late 1980s, the preeminent paradigm was neorealism,² but there were several
Realism and the Study of Peace and War from:
Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Vasquez John
Abstract: Appraising realist theories or evaluating the realist paradigm from which they are derived is a very important topic; indeed it is one that has given rise to intense debate within the field from time to time. It is, however, too broad and complicated a topic for a short essay like this one. Therefore, I shall focus on realist explanations of two specific topics—peace and war—with an emphasis on the classical realism of Morgenthau, the neorealist work of Waltz and Gilpin, and the “offensive realism” of Mearsheimer.¹
The Fish and the Turtle: from:
Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Ling L. H. M.
Abstract: The fish greeted the turtle. “Hello, Sister Turtle, how are you? I have not seen you in a long time. Where have you been?”
Reflections on Millennia, Old and New: from:
Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Ray James Lee
Abstract: As we enter the new millennium, the time seems right for a broad retrospective, introspective, and prospective analytical review of all categories of human endeavor, even including the academic study of international politics. This paper focuses on the evolution of the subfield of international politics over the last forty years, with a particular emphasis on the development of quantitative approaches. It focuses on its shortcomings but also points out what to this author at least seem worthy of being considered some accomplishments. It concludes with a few brief prescriptions for the future. It is presumptuous of me (and, to be
Accounting for Interstate War: from:
Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Singer J. David
Abstract: This turn of the millennium certainly offers us another opportunity—and incentive—to get more serious about trying to explain, and perhaps reduce the incidence of, that brutal, stupid, and destructive form of collective behavior known as war. In almost every epoch and almost every corner of human civilization, we find the politicians and the priests calling for an end to such barbarous behavior. But time after time, their prescription is to demand that the other party give up its aggressive behavior and meet the demands of our reasonable and accommodating brethren.
Notes from the Underground: from:
Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Miller Linda B.
Abstract: The invitation to participate in a millennial reflections panel on international security and peace studies and to publish these remarks arrived at a propitious moment. The public opportunity to reappraise my own academic career as I was already doing privately meant a chance to ruminate in a way that might have value for younger scholars at earlier stages of their careers. And since my own trajectory closely parallels that of the International Studies Association (ISA) in terms of time, such an overview should be of general interest to the membership.
7 DOCTORS LISTENING AND ATTENDING TO PATIENTS: from:
The Chief Concern of Medicine
Abstract: Listening to patients and the illness story is one of the most important skills (
technē) a physician uses during a lifetime of practice. Because the patient history is the most important diagnostic information, listening carefully is of enormous importance. Patients commonly complain that their doctor does not listen. But when patients are heard, they report that their doctor was empathetic. Listening carefully helps build rapport, increases diagnostic accuracy, and improves patient satisfaction. If a doctor has a broad and deep enough knowledge base, has the skills to listen carefully to what the patient has to say, and gets the information
10 READING THE DEATH OF IVAN ILYCH from:
The Chief Concern of Medicine
Abstract: Leo Tolstoy’s novella
The Death of Ivan Ilychis a significant literary text that brings together many of the themes ofThe Chief Concern of Medicine.it is a story that resonates with the experience of health care workers—with the experience of physicians, nurses, and others confronted with suffering and dying—and at the same time provokes powerful feelings about our shared knowledge and, indeed, our shared lives as human beings. in significant ways, Tolstoy’sThe Death of Ivan Ilychis a modern version, in novelistic prose narrative, of the ancient themes of the pity and terror of suffering
AFTERWORD: from:
The Chief Concern of Medicine
Abstract: We began this book’s discussion with a philosophical argument that the objects of humanistic understanding obtained through narrative knowledge are real and that this reality is a result of narrative understanding and reflection. This reality is demonstrated in a pragmatic way by attending to the actions that spring from the apprehension of dramatic stories and by the outcomes or consequences resulting from exposure to their literary structure and content. We have demonstrated that the consequences of having studied and reflected on the features of narrative structure, character development and motives, time lines in narrative—in a word, the details and
7 DOCTORS LISTENING AND ATTENDING TO PATIENTS: from:
The Chief Concern of Medicine
Abstract: Listening to patients and the illness story is one of the most important skills (
technē) a physician uses during a lifetime of practice. Because the patient history is the most important diagnostic information, listening carefully is of enormous importance. Patients commonly complain that their doctor does not listen. But when patients are heard, they report that their doctor was empathetic. Listening carefully helps build rapport, increases diagnostic accuracy, and improves patient satisfaction. If a doctor has a broad and deep enough knowledge base, has the skills to listen carefully to what the patient has to say, and gets the information
10 READING THE DEATH OF IVAN ILYCH from:
The Chief Concern of Medicine
Abstract: Leo Tolstoy’s novella
The Death of Ivan Ilychis a significant literary text that brings together many of the themes ofThe Chief Concern of Medicine.it is a story that resonates with the experience of health care workers—with the experience of physicians, nurses, and others confronted with suffering and dying—and at the same time provokes powerful feelings about our shared knowledge and, indeed, our shared lives as human beings. in significant ways, Tolstoy’sThe Death of Ivan Ilychis a modern version, in novelistic prose narrative, of the ancient themes of the pity and terror of suffering
AFTERWORD: from:
The Chief Concern of Medicine
Abstract: We began this book’s discussion with a philosophical argument that the objects of humanistic understanding obtained through narrative knowledge are real and that this reality is a result of narrative understanding and reflection. This reality is demonstrated in a pragmatic way by attending to the actions that spring from the apprehension of dramatic stories and by the outcomes or consequences resulting from exposure to their literary structure and content. We have demonstrated that the consequences of having studied and reflected on the features of narrative structure, character development and motives, time lines in narrative—in a word, the details and
7 DOCTORS LISTENING AND ATTENDING TO PATIENTS: from:
The Chief Concern of Medicine
Abstract: Listening to patients and the illness story is one of the most important skills (
technē) a physician uses during a lifetime of practice. Because the patient history is the most important diagnostic information, listening carefully is of enormous importance. Patients commonly complain that their doctor does not listen. But when patients are heard, they report that their doctor was empathetic. Listening carefully helps build rapport, increases diagnostic accuracy, and improves patient satisfaction. If a doctor has a broad and deep enough knowledge base, has the skills to listen carefully to what the patient has to say, and gets the information
10 READING THE DEATH OF IVAN ILYCH from:
The Chief Concern of Medicine
Abstract: Leo Tolstoy’s novella
The Death of Ivan Ilychis a significant literary text that brings together many of the themes ofThe Chief Concern of Medicine.it is a story that resonates with the experience of health care workers—with the experience of physicians, nurses, and others confronted with suffering and dying—and at the same time provokes powerful feelings about our shared knowledge and, indeed, our shared lives as human beings. in significant ways, Tolstoy’sThe Death of Ivan Ilychis a modern version, in novelistic prose narrative, of the ancient themes of the pity and terror of suffering
AFTERWORD: from:
The Chief Concern of Medicine
Abstract: We began this book’s discussion with a philosophical argument that the objects of humanistic understanding obtained through narrative knowledge are real and that this reality is a result of narrative understanding and reflection. This reality is demonstrated in a pragmatic way by attending to the actions that spring from the apprehension of dramatic stories and by the outcomes or consequences resulting from exposure to their literary structure and content. We have demonstrated that the consequences of having studied and reflected on the features of narrative structure, character development and motives, time lines in narrative—in a word, the details and
CHAPTER 4 “A Booke Layd By, New Lookt On”: from:
The Immaterial Book
Abstract: Early modern romance is a Janus-faced genre. It looks nostalgically backward, to the medieval past and the tales that accrete around English and Continental chivalric heroes: Arthur, Amadis, Guy, Bevis, Roland. At the same time, it pushes the leading edge in generic experimentation, engendering radically new forms, hybrid species such as tragicomic drama, and developing the mode that would ultimately dominate fiction making, the long prose narrative, which became the novel. Evidence that early seventeenth-century English readers themselves regarded romance as participating in such a duality of past and present, traditionalism and modernity, is present in the language of early
CHAPTER 2 A Return to the Eleventh Dimension from:
Strung Together
Abstract: [Scott] Mehring, of Mechanicsburg, Pennsylvania, is forty-eight years old, the onetime owner of a business that had something to do with performance cars. He wore a tight leather motorcycle jacket with no visible shirt underneath and had a Rod Stewart haircut. He liked to party, he told me, and was ready to go out and party hard, but because he’d lost his license for various reasons he had no car and his cab had not yet arrived. So, sure, he’d be happy to share his views with me. I took out my recorder.
CHAPTER 6 Strung Together from:
Strung Together
Abstract: As with many, I first encountered string theory when I picked up a copy of Brian Greene’s popularization,
The Elegant Universe,in 1999. Having at the time a passing familiarity with the counterintuitive idiosyncrasies of quantum theory, I was drawn to it by the prospect of discovering further strangeness lurking in the remotest recesses of the subatomic universe. Thus captivated by what I took to be the astonishing ideas of string theory itself, I paid little attention to the manner in which those ideas were expressed. In effect, I was not entirely cognizant of the book’s patently romantic undertone. It
Book Title: The Real and the Sacred-Picturing Jesus in Nineteenth-Century Fiction
Publisher: University of Michigan Press
Author(s): GATRALL JEFFERSON J. A.
Abstract: The international "quest of the historical Jesus" has been amply documented within the context of nineteenth-century biblical scholarship. Yet there has been no broad-based comparative study devoted to the depiction of Jesus in prose fiction over the same time period.
The Real and the Sacredoffers a comprehensive survey of this body of fiction, examining both the range of its Christ types and the varying formal means through which these types were represented. The nineteenth century-despite forecasts of God's death at the time-not only revived older Christ types but also witnessed the rise of new ones, includingle Christ proletaire, the Mormon Christ, the Buddhist Christ, and the Tolstoyan Christ. Novelists played a crucial role in the invention and popularization of the historical Jesus in particular, one of modernity's major figures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3998/mpub.5339783
CHAPTER 3 The Sublime Portrait from:
The Real and the Sacred
Abstract: Mid-nineteenth-century portraits of Jesus were not as controversial in fiction as they were in realist painting. Whereas John Everett Millais, Nikolai Ge, and Édouard Manet broke with long-standing iconographic traditions, portraits of Jesus in fiction from the same time period were innovative, in large part, by the fact of their existence. Extended literary portraits are not a common feature of premodern imaginative retellings of gospel narrative. The life of Jesus, as the canonical gospels suggest, need not accommodate descriptions of the Christ image. In the 1830s and 1840s, authors of fiction began hesitantly to describe the body of Jesus thanks
CHAPTER 5 Metapoetics of the Christ Image from:
The Real and the Sacred
Abstract: The genres of fiction and painting devoted to the realist Christ can be visualized as an intermedial grid. Along the vertical axis runs a time line connecting the figure of the historical Jesus, at the top, with that of the fully modernized Christ, below. The horizontal axis is divided between fiction, on the left, and painting, on the right. Into each of the four corners are grouped the dozens of works of fiction and scores of paintings throughout the nineteenth century that depict the figure of Jesus in realist style: Jesus novels and historical paintings occupy the top corners; Jesus
4 WORD-LORDS: from:
Democratic Peace
Abstract: On June 24, 2002, President Bush brought out a new plan for peace between Israel and the Palestinians. That plan, which became known as the “Roadmap,” was based on a two-state solution and presented two novelties: (1) for the first time, the United States committed itself publicly and officially to an independent Palestinian sovereignty, and (2) for the first time, the United States also conditioned Israeli concessions on Palestinian democratization. This chapter explores the role of the democratic peace thesis in bringing about these novelties: it examines how the thesis was mobilized politically by Israeli politicians to advance their ideological
CONCLUSIONS: from:
Democratic Peace
Abstract: Though faltering at times, the democratic peace theories have thriving lives. The aim of this book has been to trace those lives, understand them theoretically, and assess them in normative terms. Theoretically, the migration of theory to the nonacademic world was conceptualized through the hermeneutical mechanism model. By focusing on a theory’s internal structure as an assemblage of political concepts, this book conceptualizes theories as theoretical constructions, a form of idea entity, and moreover, a form of political thought: a configuration of decontested political concepts arranged together, each conferring meaning on the others and receiving meaning from them. Thus, theories
Book Title: Traces of the Past-Classics between History and Archaeology
Publisher: University of Michigan Press
Author(s): Bassi Karen
Abstract: What are we doing when we walk into an archaeological museum or onto an archaeological site? What do the objects and features we encounter in these unique places mean and, more specifically, how do they convey to us something about the beliefs and activities of formerly living humans? In short, how do visible remains and ruins in the present give meaning to the human past? Karen Bassi addresses these questions through detailed close readings of canonical works spanning the archaic to the classical periods of ancient Greek culture, showing how the past is constituted in descriptions of what narrators and characters see in their present context. She introduces the term protoarchaeological to refer to narratives that navigate the gap between linguistic representation and empirical observation-between words and things-in accessing and giving meaning to the past. Such narratives invite readers to view the past as a receding visual field and, in the process, to cross the disciplinary boundaries that divide literature, history, and archaeology.Aimed at classicists, literary scholars, ancient historians, cultural historians, and archaeological theorists, the book combines three areas of research: time as a feature of narrative structure in literary theory; the concept of "the past itself" in the philosophy of history; and the ontological status of material objects in archaeological theory. Each of five central chapters explores how specific protoarchaeological narratives-from the fate of Zeus' stone in Hesiod's Theogony to the contest between words and objects in Aristophanes' Frogs-both expose and attempt to bridge this gap. Throughout, the book serves as a response to Herodotus' task in writing the Histories, namely, to ensure that "the past deeds of men do not fade with time."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3998/mpub.8785930
CHAPTER 1 The Landscape of the Past in Hesiod’s Theogony from:
Traces of the Past
Abstract: As succinctly expressed in its opening line, “Let us begin to sing” ἀρχώμεθ᾿ ἀείδειν, 1)), Hesiod’s
Theogonyis about the beginning of time as the motivation for the beginning of poetic production.² The question before us is how the visible or material world is part of the poem’s temporal environment. In general, scholarly attention paid to material or visible objects in archaic poetry has taken two routes. On the one hand, they are the source of aesthetic effects in ecphrastic passages, with the Shield of Achilles in the Iliad taking pride of place.³ On the other hand, they are marshaled
CHAPTER 2 The Hypothetical Past and the Achaean Wall in the Iliad from:
Traces of the Past
Abstract: According to John Camp, walls are the “most enduring evidence of antiquity surviving in the landscape today.”² As features in the built environment, the remains of walls delimit the lives of ancient humans in both time and space; they give substance to the past. Perhaps it is not surprising that the prominence of walls as archaeological features is shared by their prominence as narrative plot devices. They stand out (as it were) in both contexts. It might even be said that walls occupy a unique position as both signifiers of cultural production and structures within narrative. Between their existence as
CHAPTER 4 “Up to My Time”: from:
Traces of the Past
Abstract: This chapter explores the role of visible evidence for the past in Herodotus’
Histories, exemplified in the fate of the offerings of the Lydian kings in the Lydian logos. The argument is focused on the temporal, ontological, and epistemological variables at work in the relationship between the oracles given to the Lydian kings and the offerings they inspire. Expressed in terms of a specific temporo-linguistic feature in theHistories—namely, Herodotus’ descriptions of objects that exist up to his own time (ἐπ᾿ ἐμεῦ, μέχρις ἐμέο
Epilogue: from:
Traces of the Past
Abstract: In the previous chapters, I have defined protoarchaeological narratives as those in which the past is conceptualized in a negotiation between empirical observation and linguistic representation in a variety of ancient Greek genres. I have also suggested that reading—both as a conceptual category and as a practice—functions within these narratives as an acknowledgment that the past is constituted in what can no longer be seen. To return again to Herodotus’ metaphor, reading refers to the past as a congeries of narrativized objects and events that fades with time. In this epilogue, I explore the ontological and epistemological implications
Medieval Archivists as Authors: from:
Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Geary Patrick
Abstract: Back in the early 1970s, David Hammack, a historian of New York City, told me that the most important person in the New York City Archives was an individual whose only qualification was his membership in the Teamsters Union. The reason that this was such an important qualification, Professor Hammack explained, was that the archive was seriously underfunded and underhoused. The most daunting task the staff faced each year was to get all of the materials that they had accumulated the previous year but could not possibly preserve to the city dump in time to make room for the next
Past Imperfect (l’imparfait): from:
Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Bartlett Nancy Ruth
Abstract: An examination of mediation in archives of art is an acknowledgment of the issue of language—its definitions, its cultural and academic parameters, its multiplicities, its unexpected relationships. The French
imparfait, while understood conventionally as a particular verb tense of the past, is an appealing example and point of departure. It is a wonderful suggestion of language “in motion,” without end, of the past but moving forward in time, subject to barriers in understanding, and open to new directions and revelations. By borrowing from the French, by adding multiple meanings, we render l’imparfait no more “perfect,” or “complete,” but instead
How Privatization Turned Britain’s Red Telephone Kiosk into an Archive of the Welfare State from:
Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Wright Patrick
Abstract: One day in July 1988, I stood on the concourse at London’s Waterloo Station thinking of the hopes once entertained by late politician Anthony Crosland. As a leading Labour Party intellectual in the mid-1950s, Crosland had dreamed of a less austere socialism where the uniformity of the reforming state would weigh less heavily on the life of the nation. As he wrote in
The Future of Socialism, it was a time for a “reaction against the Fabian tradition” with its reliance on state-led initiative. The mixed economy could be expected to deliver higher exports and old-age pensions, but only a
Colonial Archives and the Arts of Governance: from:
Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Stoler Ann Laura
Abstract: This essay is about the colonial order of things as seen through its archival productions. It asks what insights about the colonial might be gained from attending not only to colonialism’s archival content but to its particular and sometimes peculiar form. Its focus is on archiving as a process rather than archives as things. It looks to archives as epistemological experiments rather than as sources—to colonial archives as cross-sections of contested knowledge. Most important, I want to suggest that colonial archives were both transparencies on which power relations were inscribed and intricate technologies of rule in themselves. The essay’s
The Influence of Politics on the Shaping of the Memory of States in Western Europe (France) from:
Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) René-Bazin Paule
Abstract: Let me begin this essay by noting the contradictory attitudes of two French politicians with regard to the presidents of the republic whom they had served closely. I quote from two highly successful books that they have published in recent years. The arst quote is from Alain Peyrefitte, a future minister but at the time a young aide to General de Gaulle. The story takes place at the Elysee in April 1965.
Television Archives and the Making of Collective Memory: from:
Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Kansteiner Wulf
Abstract: Television archives play a vital role in the day-to-day business of the television industry. They help television makers identify footage and ideas for the programs of tomorrow. Consequently, the archives are organized to support the production process, and any other function is secondary to that objective. At the same time, by default not design, television archives contain the cultural legacy of the twentieth century and play a key role in the infrastructure of modern memory. On the one hand, they house the blockbuster television events and hit series that are recycled so frequently that they seem to be permanently established
Qing Statesmen, Archivists, and Historians and the Question of Memory from:
Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Bartlett Beatrice S.
Abstract: The great government book-collecting project of eighteenth-century China, the “Complete Library in Four Branches of Literature,”¹ offered the Qing government (1644–1912) an opportunity to proscribe and even destroy works it found offensive, particularly those that expressed antigovernment or anti-Qing sentiments. An imperial edict deputed high officials to supervise the burning of the works on the government’s Index Expurgatorius at a site outside the capital city, Peking. After that, except for a remnant surviving in Japan or Europe, the presumption was that all copies of these works were permanently lost, just as the court had intended.
Russian History: from:
Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Smith Abby
Abstract: Those who got their academic training in Russian and Soviet history before the collapse of the Soviet Union worked under a considerable handicap: lack of access to the bulk of primary source materials in the libraries and archives in the Soviet Union. Even medievalists such as myself were routinely denied access to archives, even to those that had already appeared in print. We all dreamed of the day when we would have access—even access to inventories and finding aids seemed some sort of holy grail back then. For a brief period of time in 1991–92, all that promised
The Historian and the Source: from:
Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Ananich Boris V.
Abstract: The analysis of historical sources is perhaps the most important aspect of a historian’s work. The professional competence of the historian can be measured by his or her ability to make the right choices when choosing from many sources, as well as by his or her ability to ascertain the authenticity of a source, verify the information it contains, and compel it to “speak.” Even if the validity of the information contained within the source is doubtful, it still retains value as a rebection of its epoch—a source of information about the time and the individuals responsible for its
Book Title: Microdramas-Crucibles for Theater and Time
Publisher: University of Michigan Press
Author(s): Muse John H.
Abstract: In
Microdramas, John H. Muse argues that plays shorter than twenty minutes deserve sustained attention, and that brevity should be considered a distinct mode of theatrical practice. Focusing on artists for whom brevity became both a structural principle and a tool to investigate theater itself (August Strindberg, Maurice Maeterlinck, F. T. Marinetti, Samuel Beckett, Suzan-Lori Parks, and Caryl Churchill), the book explores four episodes in the history of very short theater, all characterized by the self-conscious embrace of brevity. The story moves from the birth of the modernist microdrama in French little theaters in the 1880s, to the explicit worship of speed in Italian Futurist synthetic theater, to Samuel Beckett's often-misunderstood short plays, and finally to a range of contemporary playwrights whose long compilations of shorts offer a new take on momentary theater.Subjecting short plays to extended scrutiny upends assumptions about brief or minimal art, and about theatrical experience. The book shows that short performances often demand greater attention from audiences than plays that unfold more predictably. Microdramas put pressure on preconceptions about which aspects of theater might be fundamental and about what might qualify as an event. In the process, they suggest answers to crucial questions about time, spectatorship, and significance.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3998/mpub.9380984
ONE Introduction: from:
Microdramas
Abstract: This is, in its entirety, Francesco Cangiullo’s 1915 Futurist play,
Detonation: Synthesis of All Modern Theater. Detonation looks like a joke, and many have mistaken it for little more than one. This book attempts to take Cangiullo’s subtitle seriously by exploring the potential of theatrical brevity to distill lessons about modern theater and, more widely, to teach us about the ex perience of time in theater and in general. a sort of opening salvo for the theatrical avant-garde,Detonationexplodes previous conventions while distilling several hallmarks of modern theater: atmosphere trumps charac ter, expectations are under attack, and an empty
Introduction: from:
Sufi Narratives of Intimacy
Abstract: Once upon a time, a wise and generous story unfolded. This is how it might be imagined.¹ It is Cairo on a sweltering afternoon, and the faithful are streaming into a beautiful, simple mosque. The Friday (
jumuʿa) prayers are about to begin. In the courtyard, people take their ablutions in the cool fountain water that provides welcome relief from the heat of the Cairene afternoon. A group of women sitting close together is silently reciting the Qurɔān. An old man, his face kissed gently by time, is sitting easily upright with eyes closed, meditating on the beautiful names of God.
Chapter Three Mysticism and Gender from:
Sufi Narratives of Intimacy
Abstract: Ibn ʿArabī’s sophisticated cosmology, his profound understandings of human nature and the processes of spiritual transformation for men and women alike, and his sometimes radical gendered legal positions were birthed from within the complexities of his experience, both mystical and mundane. Using the insightful feminist adage that “the personal is political,” this chapter explores aspects of Ibn ʿArabī’s life and relationships as he presents them, imagining how these experiences created the background against which he received mystical insights and shaped his mystical understandings. For an epistemology of spiritual experience, mystical “openings” occur within a flesh-and-blood person whose personal disposition and
1 Health Difference, Disparity, Inequality, or Inequity—What Difference Does It Make What We Call It? from:
Understanding Health Inequalities and Justice
Author(s) Braveman Paula
Abstract: Over the past two and a half decades, distinct approaches have been taken to defining and measuring health inequalities or disparities and health equity. Some efforts have focused on technical issues in measurement, at times without addressing the implications for the concepts themselves and how that might influence action. Others have focused on the concepts, sometimes without adequately addressing the implications for measurement. This chapter contrasts a few different approaches, examining their conceptual bases and the implications for measurement and policy. It argues for an approach to defining health inequalities and health equity that centers explicitly on notions of justice
2 Global Health Inequalities and Justice from:
Understanding Health Inequalities and Justice
Author(s) Ruger Jennifer Prah
Abstract: Moral philosophers have for some time been arguing that global poverty and associated human suffering are universal concerns, and that there is a moral obligation, not just a matter of charity, for wealthier countries to do more to alleviate global poverty. The scope of this moral concern is the topic of considerable debate, and it is unclear to many that this obligation is grounded in justice, rather than in humanitarian duties to foreigners. In this chapter I suggest that if we are serious about addressing the problem of global health inequalities, we need to develop a better conception of global
11 Health-Care Justice, Health Inequalities, and U.S. Health System Reform from:
Understanding Health Inequalities and Justice
Author(s) Keirns Carla C.
Abstract: The U.S. health-care system is undergoing a major transition in financing, intended to both improve health-care access for millions of Americans and create structural changes to reduce cost and improve quality. We have been here before. The last time the United States saw major new programs that offered health-care coverage to large groups who lacked it was 1965, when Medicare and Medicaid were passed (Marmor 1970; Oberlander 2003; R. B. Stevens and Stevens 1974). These programs offered broad new entitlements to care for the elderly who qualified for Social Security based on their work history, and to certain classes of
Book Title: The Poetics of Inconstancy-Etienne Durand and the End of Renaissance Verse
Publisher: University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill Department of Romance Studies
Author(s): ROGERS HOYT
Abstract: The transformation of Late Petrarchism from earlier stages reflects a profound shift in cultural values--a 'crisis of the Renaissance' that generated new perspectives in poetic theory and practice. Broadly, this book identifies a distinctive 'poetics of inconstancy' that came to the fore at the end of the sixteenth century and pervaded the love verse of the age. At the same time, as a study based on the inductive method, the book takes as its point of departure a single poet: Etienne Durand. Because of his frequently anthologized 'Stances a l'Inconstance,' Durand is often singled out as 'the poet of inconstancy.' This study, however, identifies the theme of universal change as a hallmark of Durand's contemporaries as well--a signal of a stylistic revolution that heralded the end of Renaissance verse.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5149/9781469641676_rogers
Introduction: from:
The Poetics of Inconstancy
Abstract: Late Petrarchism differs notably from its earlier stages. Its transformation reflects a profound shift in cultural values – a “crisis of the Renaissance”¹ which opens new perspectives in poetic theory and practice. On a broad level, this book will identify a distinctive “poetics of inconstancy” which comes to the fore at the end of the sixteenth century, and which pervades the love verse of the age. At the same time, as a study based on the inductive method, it will take a single poet as its point of departure: Etienne Durand, whose
Poésies complètesare now widely available for the
Chapter IV THE POETICS OF INCONSTANCY from:
The Poetics of Inconstancy
Abstract: The inconstancy praised by Durand and his contemporaries transcends the bounds of simple infidelity: it represents a universal principle of instability and change. The rising popularity of this
topostoward the end of the sixteenth century reflects a shift, not only in literary poses, but also in literary practice. If the original tenets of Petrarchism are undermined by a new stance toward the beloved, the poetic technique of Durand and other Petrarchists of his time undergoes a parallel evolution. It is revealed, for example, in the treatment of religious motifs within an amorous context, where they function in an appreciably
Book Title: “The Useless Mouths” and Other Literary Writings- Publisher: University of Illinois Press
Author(s): Le Bon de Beauvoir Sylvie
Abstract: "The Useless Mouths" and Other Literary Writings brings to English-language readers literary writings--several previously unknown--by Simone de Beauvoir. Culled from sources including various American university collections, the works span decades of Beauvoir's career. Ranging from dramatic works and literary theory to radio broadcasts, they collectively reveal fresh insights into Beauvoir's writing process, personal life, and the honing of her philosophy. The volume begins with a new translation of the 1945 play The Useless Mouths, written in Paris during the Nazi occupation. Other pieces were discovered after Beauvoir's death in 1986, such as the 1965 short novel "Misunderstanding in Moscow," involving an elderly French couple who confront their fears of aging. Two additional previously unknown texts include the fragmentary "Notes for a Novel," which contains the seed of what she later would call "the problem of the Other," and a lecture on postwar French theater titled Existentialist Theater. The collection notably includes the eagerly awaited translation of Beauvoir's contribution to a 1965 debate among Jean-Paul Sartre and other French writers and intellectuals, "What Can Literature Do?" Prefaces to well-known works such as Bluebeard and Other Fairy Tales, La Bâtarde, and James Joyce in Paris: His Final Years are also available in English for the first time, alongside essays and other short articles. A landmark contribution to Beauvoir studies and French literary studies, the volume includes informative and engaging introductory essays by prominent and rising scholars. Contributors are Meryl Altman, Elizabeth Fallaize, Alison S. Fell, Sarah Gendron, Dennis A. Gilbert, Laura Hengehold, Eleanore Holveck, Terry Keefe, J. Debbie Mann, Frederick M. Morrison, Catherine Naji, Justine Sarrot, Liz Stanley, Ursula Tidd, and Veronique Zaytzeff
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5406/j.ctt13x1m7b
Foreword to the Beauvoir Series from:
“The Useless Mouths” and Other Literary Writings
Author(s) TIMMERMANN MARYBETH
Abstract: It is my pleasure to take this opportunity to honor the monumental work of research and publication that the Beauvoir Series represents, which was undertaken and brought to fruition by Margaret A. Simons and the ensemble of her team. These volumes of Simone de Beauvoir’s writings, concerning literature as well as philosophy and feminism, stretch from 1926 to 1979, that is to say throughout almost her entire life. Some of them have been published before, and are known, but remain dispersed throughout time and space, in diverse editions, diverse newspapers or reviews. Others were read during conferences or radio programs
THE USELESS MOUTHS from:
“The Useless Mouths” and Other Literary Writings
Author(s) ENAJI CATHERIN
Abstract: The play was performed for the first time in November 1945 under the directorship of MICHEL VITOLD, in the Théâtre des Carrefours.
IT’S SHAKESPEARE THEY DON’T LIKE from:
“The Useless Mouths” and Other Literary Writings
Author(s) TIMMERMANN MARYBETH
Abstract: For the first time in years, one of Shakespeare’s most remarkable masterpieces
PREFACE TO LA BÂTARDE BY VIOLETTE LEDUC from:
“The Useless Mouths” and Other Literary Writings
Author(s) MOY JANELLA D.
Abstract: When, early in 1945, I began to read Violette Leduc’s manuscript—“My mother never gave me her hand”— I was immediately taken by her temperament and her style.¹ Camus welcomed
L ’asphyxie[In the Prison of Her Skin] right away into hisEspoir[Hope] series.² Genet, Jouhandeau, and Sartre hailed the arrival of a writer.³ In the books that followed, her talent was confirmed. Exacting critics openly praised it. But the public did not respond. Despite a considerablesuccès d’estime, Violette Leduc has remained obscure.
Book Title: Moving Consciously-Somatic Transformations through Dance, Yoga, and Touch
Publisher: University of Illinois Press
Author(s): Fraleigh Sondra
Abstract: The popularity of yoga and Zen meditation has heightened awareness of somatic practices. Individuals develop the conscious embodiment central to somatics work via movement and dance, or through touch from a skilled teacher or therapist often called a somatic bodyworker. Methods of touch and movement foster generative processes of consciousness in order to create a fluid interconnection between sensation, thought, movement, and expression. In Moving Consciously , Sondra Fraleigh gathers essays that probe ideas surrounding embodied knowledge and the conscious embodiment of movement and dance. Using a variety of perspectives on movement and dance somatics, Fraleigh and other contributors draw on scholarship and personal practice to participate in a multifaceted investigation of a thriving worldwide phenomenon. Their goal: to present the mental and physical health benefits of experiencing one's inner world through sensory awareness and movement integration. A stimulating addition to a burgeoning field, Moving Consciously incorporates concepts from East and West into a timely look at life-changing, intertwined practices that involve dance, movement, performance studies, and education. Contributors: Richard Biehl, Robert Bingham, Hillel Braude, Alison East, Sondra Fraleigh, Kelly Ferris Lester, Karin Rugman, Catherine Schaeffer, Jeanne Schul, and Ruth Way.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5406/j.ctt1647csj
CHAPTER 9 Like Drifting Snow My Head Falls from:
Moving Consciously
Author(s) Bingham Robert
Abstract: In 2009 I performed a forty- five- minute solo, “Feeding the Ghosts,” in a large theater lobby in Alfred, New York.¹ In the piece, I appeared on a 4’ × 6’ platform, shirtless and blindfolded, and entered into an improvisation whose sole structure was to remain openly receptive to, and inviting of, my personal demons and ghosts. I responded in movement to whatever feeling, thought, and/or image emerged within this structure. While I had rehearsed the dance a few times without an audience or witness, what happened in performance surprised me. Behind my blindfold, an ongoing stream of images unfolded
CHAPTER 11 Embodied Dreams from:
Moving Consciously
Author(s) Schul Jeanne
Abstract: Whether or not we remember our dreams upon waking, it is part of the human condition to dream when we sleep. For some of us, this natural brain function brings powerful somatic experiences that demand our immediate attention. Those images that haunt us long after the visual stimulus has disappeared are often very vivid somatic sensations that rush through our bodies and shock us into an awareness of a highly significant psychic process at work within us. In dreamtime, an embodied image can be experienced on a somatic level with a wide variety of possible manifestations. These physical responses of
CHAPTER 3 Esteem for a Masterpiece: from:
Storytelling in Siberia
Abstract: When the Soviet Union dissolved, the political climate for supporting olonkho revitalization saw a season of thriving and growth. At the same time, Yakutia’s demographics began to change. As Russians fled the North for warmer climes in western Russia, the overall number of people in the republic declined, but the percentage of Sakha people in Yakutia increased. Census results show that the Russian population in Yakutia dropped from 50 percent in 1989 to less than 38 percent in 2010.¹ During the same period, the Sakha population rose from 33 percent to almost 50 percent. These statistics clearly show that the
5 REFORM NARRATIVES: from:
Been a Heavy Life
Abstract: Change or consistency in one’s moral self over time was a major theme of the men’s stories. This theme is not surprising given the use of narrative in explaining oneself (Ricoeur 1984) and thus establishing a cohesive self over time (Linde 1993; McAdams 1999), and cues to crime or sanctions that I gave the men (e.g., “How did you get here?”), however neutral and universal I believed them to be at the time. At two archetypical extremes, I heard
reform narrativesandstability narratives.¹ These are broad ways of discussing the trajectory or journey one’s moral self has traveled over
7. Back Again? from:
New German Dance Studies
Author(s) ELSWIT KATE
Abstract: Valeska Gert (1892–1978) claimed she once asked Bertolt Brecht to define epic theater, to which he replied: “What you do.”¹ While this apocryphal anecdote is often taken as shorthand for Gert’s artistic oeuvre, it risks flattening the multiple kinds of otherness that delineated her career. As Svetlana Boym points out, the actual experience of exile may sometimes function not as an extension, but rather as the ultimate test, of artistic metaphors and theories of estrangement.² Through Gert’s exile and her return to a homeland that had changed in the intervening years, her performance practices, which were based in a
one HILDEGARD OF BINGEN from:
Eight Women Philosophers
Abstract: In approaching Hildegard of Bingen (1098–1179) philosophically, one immediately runs into the oldest and most cherished conundrum with respect to female philosophers. It appears to be the case that many female thinkers whose work might be deemed to be philosophical wrote in styles that were somewhat nonstandard, even for their respective times. Thus, arguments have frequently been made that such women are absent from the canon because of the fact that their work was demonstrably nonphilosophical, rather than due to their sex. Counterarguments to the effect that at least some minor male thinkers normally found in any group of
two ANNE CONWAY from:
Eight Women Philosophers
Abstract: The world of Anne Conway (1631–79), although it may be easier for us to enter than was Hildegard’s, is still remote in time and space. Seventeenthcentury England was a cauldron of conflicting beliefs, many of which owed their origins to religious concerns that today’s readers will find difficult to assimilate. In addition, although at least a few women—such as Mary Astell—seemed to be able to rise from comparatively impoverished backgrounds to a life of gentility, the class distinctions in English life are so marked during this time period that we may experience a failure of imagination in
four MARY WOLLSTONECRAFT from:
Eight Women Philosophers
Abstract: Mary Wollstonecraft (1759–97), unlike Mary Astell or Anne Conway, is indisputably recognized as an important thinker of her time, and such recognition has in general not flagged since the early part of the nineteenth century. Unlike Hildegard, but perhaps like Anne Conway, Wollstonecraft is certainly recognized as a philosopher, for her works are lengthy enough and conceptually oriented enough that she is often included in anthologies of philosophical thought.¹ Thus, unlike Mary Astell—although both women are paradigmatically political thinkers—Wollstonecraft is not often labeled a “pamphleteer.”
five HARRIET TAYLOR MILL from:
Eight Women Philosophers
Abstract: In the process of beginning to work on Harriet Taylor Mill (1807–58) as a thinker, we need to remember not only the details of her personal life, but the time in which she lived and wrote. Insofar as political and social philosophy were concerned, this was a period dominated by Bentham’s utilitarianism and the economics of Ricardo (the latter, work that John Stuart Mill [JSM] did a great deal to both promulgate and criticize).
six EDITH STEIN from:
Eight Women Philosophers
Abstract: When we think of Edith Stein (1891–1942) today, more than one image comes to mind, but although she is by no means unknown, many of the images have little to do with philosophy. We may be tempted to think, for example, of the controversy surrounding her beatification and later canonization, or we may think of her as one of “three women in dark times,” as the title of one book exhorts us to.
seven SIMONE WEIL from:
Eight Women Philosophers
Abstract: Simone Weil (1909–43) is widely regarded as one of the outstanding thinkers of twentieth-century France, and over a period of time her work has gained in importance. It is cited in a number of areas of endeavor and disciplines. Far from being regarded merely as a philosopher, Weil is frequently thought of in other terms, as a religious thinker or, as some would have it, a mystic. Her work has in common with the thought of Edith Stein a devotion to belief and an attempt to get to the core of things, while with that other Simone, Simone de
Conclusion from:
Eight Women Philosophers
Abstract: An historical endeavor across a long span of time, by its very nature, is fraught with difficulties. I have assumed that it is possible to make a comparative analysis of the work of eight women thinkers whose lives range from the eleventh to the twentieth centuries and who, although they are all European in the broad sense, encompass cultures ranging from the Teutonic to the Anglo-Saxon to the French. If it is difficult to compare the lives of women crossculturally, it is also difficult to compare the lives of women across time—we know so little about the eleventh century,
Book Title: Key Concepts in Critical Cultural Studies- Publisher: University of Illinois Press
Author(s): CHRISTIANS CLIFFORD
Abstract: Each essay considers what is known and understood about these concepts. The essays give particular attention to how relevant ideas, themes, and terms were developed, elaborated, and deployed in the work of James W. Carey, the "founding father" of cultural studies in the United States. The contributors map how these important concepts, including Carey's own work with them, have evolved over time and how these concepts intersect. The result is a coherent volume that redefines the still-emerging field of critical cultural studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5406/j.ctt2ttbx5
Epilogue from:
Key Concepts in Critical Cultural Studies
Author(s) ZELIZER BARBIE
Abstract: Most scholars would say that they engage in intellectual work for the sheer joy of it, yet underlying a fierce curiosity about the efforts of the mind rests a humble hope that our scholarship will not perish when we are no longer around to remind others of its relevance. This volume asks us to consider concepts in cultural studies. In particular, it assesses the basic impulses of the work of James Carey in the context of those who claim its influence on their own scholarship. It is a smart, timely, and useful effort to delineate the setting in which Carey’s
8 Identity from:
Eight Words for the Study of Expressive Culture
Author(s) ABRAHAMS ROGER D.
Abstract: Identity has become the encompassing term for cultural, social, and spiritual wholeness. It also emerges in discussions of territorial integrity, often as a rhetorical ploy in struggles for establishing and maintaining domain. As such, it references many of the most central fictions of our time. Such fictions invite questions, not of their truth value but of their usefulness. Identity invokes a conception of individual and social life that has become ubiquitous but that causes more confusion and confrontation than it designates meaningful social states of being.
8 Identity from:
Eight Words for the Study of Expressive Culture
Author(s) ABRAHAMS ROGER D.
Abstract: Identity has become the encompassing term for cultural, social, and spiritual wholeness. It also emerges in discussions of territorial integrity, often as a rhetorical ploy in struggles for establishing and maintaining domain. As such, it references many of the most central fictions of our time. Such fictions invite questions, not of their truth value but of their usefulness. Identity invokes a conception of individual and social life that has become ubiquitous but that causes more confusion and confrontation than it designates meaningful social states of being.
Book Title: Doing Emotions History- Publisher: University of Illinois Press
Author(s): STEARNS PETER N.
Abstract: How do emotions change over time? When is hate honorable? What happens when love is translated into different languages? Such questions are now being addressed by historians who trace how emotions have been expressed and understood in different cultures throughout history. Doing Emotions History explores the history of feelings such as love, joy, grief, nostalgia as well as a wide range of others, bringing together the latest and most innovative scholarship on the history of the emotions. Spanning the globe from Asia and Europe to North America, the book provides a crucial overview of this emerging discipline. An international group of scholars reviews the field's current status and variations, addresses many of its central debates, provides models and methods, and proposes an array of possibilities for future research. Emphasizing the field's intersections with anthropology, psychology, sociology, neuroscience, data-mining, and popular culture, this groundbreaking volume demonstrates the affecting potential of doing emotions history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5406/j.ctt3fh5m1
CHAPTER 1 MODERN PATTERNS IN EMOTIONS HISTORY from:
Doing Emotions History
Author(s) STEARNS PETER N.
Abstract: After thirty to forty years of serious, informative work on emotions history, scholars have not clearly answered what would seem a vital and timely question: do emotions and emotional standards change when a society moves toward modernity? This essay seeks to explore the current status of the issue, to indicate promising lines for renewed attention, and to urge greater priority for analysis and discussion.
CHAPTER 2 RECOVERING THE INVISIBLE: from:
Doing Emotions History
Author(s) MATT SUSAN J.
Abstract: From the very beginning, those who have studied the history of the emotions have realized the difficulties they faced. In 1941, Lucien Febvre, the first scholar to call for such investigations, wrote that the undertaking would be fraught with challenges. He observed, “Any attempt to reconstitute the emotional life of a given period is a task that is at one and the same time extremely attractive and frightfully difficult.”¹ Febvre suggested that emotions of other eras and societies were so very different from those of the present day that their recovery required the scholar to abandon preconceived ideas about the
CHAPTER 9 MEDIA, MESSAGES, AND EMOTIONS from:
Doing Emotions History
Author(s) MALIN BRENTON J.
Abstract: Communication media inevitably raise questions about emotion. In Plato’s
Phaedrus, Socrates worries about the emotional effects of writing—the new medium of his time. Talking with Phaedrus, a young man who brings a written speech to him, Socrates expresses concern for the “frenzied enthusiasm” he believes it is likely to produce in those who read it. Among the faults that Socrates finds with writing is that it “doesn’t know how to address the right people, and not to address the wrong.”¹ Because a written script, unlike a live speech, does not require a person to deliver it, it cannot make
1 Bin Laden’s Ghost and the Epistemological Crises of Counterterrorism from:
Covering Bin Laden
Author(s) JACKSON RICHARD
Abstract: Osama bin Laden remains one of the most recognized figures of this century. At the height of the war on terror, he received more media coverage than his opponent, President George W. Bush, and likely more than any other single newsmaker over the past ten years.¹ At the same time, the United States government invested billions of dollars and vast human and material resources in the attempt to bring him to justice, arguing that as the mastermind, symbolic leader, and financier of the global jihadist movement and the individual most directly responsible for the 9/11 attacks, his death or capture
5 Metaphorizing Terrorism: from:
Covering Bin Laden
Author(s) SPENCER ALEXANDER
Abstract: The media are considered vital for a terrorist group because they provide the means of attracting attention and spreading the group’s message.¹ Considering the strategic communication aspect of terrorism, the media have often been considered the terrorist’s “accomplices” or even their “best friend” for providing the “oxygen of publicity.”² At the same time, it has been noted that terrorists provide media with emotional, exciting, and bloody news that helps them sell their product.³ Therefore there are mutual benefits for both, and the relationship could be described as “symbiotic.”⁴ To date, terrorism research has predominantly focused on this relationship and its
7 Images of Our Dead Enemies: from:
Covering Bin Laden
Author(s) BARFOROUSH SARANAZ
Abstract: In a nine-minute speech at 11:35 p.m. Eastern time on the evening of Sunday, May 1, 2011, President Barack Obama announced that U.S. Navy SEALs had killed Al Qaeda leader Osama bin Laden in Abbottabad, Pakistan.¹
EPILOGUE. from:
Covering Bin Laden
Author(s) AL-SUMAIT FAHED
Abstract: Media around the world shared the news of Osama bin Laden’s death on May 2, 2011.¹ His death was largely celebrated as a milestone in the Global War on Terrorism. Former president George W. Bush called bin Laden’s killing a “victory for America”²; former secretary of state Condoleezza Rice echoed these sentiments in calling the death a “tremendous victory.”³ Across the United States, groups broke into celebratory cheers upon hearing the announcement of bin Laden’s death.⁴ At the site of the most devastating attack on 9/11—the World Trade Center—crowds waved American flags and burst into choruses of Lee
CHAPTER ONE PARANOID PROJECTION AND THE PHANTOM SUBJECT OF REASON from:
Scenes of Projection
Abstract: “Was the magic lantern ever magical?”¹ This is and is not a trick question. As a barbed trick, the question, whether answered in the negative or the affirmative, catches us in the tense terms of its mobilization of the “ever.” “Ever,” that is, “at any (other) time,” presupposes a present in which the “magic” of the philosophical instrument for the demonstration of and training in how vision is supposed to function has been dispelled along with the specter of the spectator’s troubling incarnation. As a “was it ever or was it at any time?” question, the magic of the magic
Chapter Eleven The System’s Intensive Conditions from:
Cannibal Metaphysics
Abstract: We will return once more to the passage from Lévi-Strauss already cited several times in these pages, the one where the dean of the Americanists connects “critical analyses” of the notion of affinity (which Brazilian ethnologists led the way in
113) to the uncovering of an indigenous philosophical problematic. All of this derives, at the end of the day, from Lévi-Strauss himself, and I think that he knew it perfectly well. That South American affinity is indeed not a sociological category but a philosophical idea was something Lévi-Strauss had observed in a premonitory way in one of his very first works,
Introduction from:
Becoming Past
Abstract: To be a historian of contemporary art is to work in a rather challenging and uncomfortable profession. First, no one can really agree on what we’re talking about when we use the term
contemporary, a word that develops etymologically fromtempusand yet yields little understanding of time.Current, recent, new, up-to-date, modern, now, present, on the horizon—contemporary’s synonyms are as numerous as they are vague. Second, whatever the contemporary is, it’s clear there’s way too much of it. Terry Smith nicely explains the unique obstacles set in the way of the contemporary art historian when he writes: “Look
Four THE EMPTY STAGE: from:
Becoming Past
Abstract: I begin at the end. I begin in the melancholy and portentous mise-en-scène of the graveyard, the place where the dead lie among the living, where, as Joe Roach provocatively suggests, the tomb functions as a stage on which history is enacted. Roach, who argues that history is a theater of surrogates who stand in place of the dead, makes an intriguing comparison between the grave and performance. “A theatrical role,” he writes, “like a stone effigy on a tomb, has a certain longevity in time, but its special durability stems from the fact that it must be re-fleshed at
Five STUPID BIRDS: from:
Becoming Past
Abstract: Where you see an epigraph or a quotation, I am standing in the place of another, speaking in the voice of another, repeating the words of another. I am compressing and distorting time.
Book Title: Exchanging Clothes-Habits of Being II
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): RABINOWITZ PAULA
Abstract: The second in a four-part series charting the social, cultural, and political expression of clothing, dress, and accessories,
Exchanging Clothesfocuses on the concept of transnational "circulation and exchange"-not only the global exchange of material commodities across time and space but also of the ideas, images, colors, and textures related to fashion. Essays examine the parade of heroes past, from Homer and Virgil to Dante and Ariosto, wearing armor or nothing; the social power of a tie or of a safety pin sprung from punk fashion to the red carpet; a Midwestern thrift store, from cheap labor to cheap purchase, as a microcosm of global circulation; and lesbian pulp fiction as how-to-dress manuals.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctt1b7x5h7
2 KRIZIA AND ACCESSORIES from:
Exchanging Clothes
Author(s) Mandelli (Krizia) Mariuccia
Abstract: In my opinion, accessories are small, portable talismans of our well-being. They make up that framework of meaning that we construct about ourselves; they are invaluable indicators of taste, character, style, and behavior. I can understand a lot more about people by looking at their shoes or their watch than the clothes they wear or the things they say. Walter Albini, one of my first assistants who went on to become an almost legendary name in fashion, used to say that accessories are ten times more important than clothes. I agreed then—and I agree now.
3 THE DRESS OF THOUGHT from:
Exchanging Clothes
Author(s) Hollander Anne
Abstract: I want to look at clothes in the works of Homer, Virgil, Dante, and Ariosto, four great poets who represent a cumulative literary tradition, with a huge influence on centuries of later writing. Each of these writers was essential to the next, and a great deal of later Western literature shows constant evidence of having internalized them all. I’ll be dealing with a few of these poets’ common themes that treat of dress, undress, and armor, with their differences in attitude about clothes, and with real clothes in their time. I will also note how one powerful literary treatment of
6 TRAVELING LIGHT from:
Exchanging Clothes
Author(s) Scatamacchia Cristina
Abstract: The American journalist Nellie Bly, whose real name was Elizabeth Cochrane, was fully aware of the importance of clothes. As a reporter, she was the first woman to do undercover investigations, creating a new kind of female sensational journalism. In the course of her reporting for Joseph Pulitzer’s
New York World, she realized that clothes played a crucial role: they became masks allowing her to hide her true identity and assume a new one that would enable her to expose social abuses and political corruption. Bly was an exception among women journalists of that time, and her work marked a
9 SLIPS OF THE TONGUE from:
Exchanging Clothes
Author(s) Rabinowitz Paula
Abstract: The department store, site of middle-class female consumer culture since the nineteenth century, demarks a zone in which women not only shop but, in the process of trying on apparel, communally disrobe, sometimes literally together within a huge open space, occasionally under the supervising eye of the saleswoman who monitors the cut and fit of the garments, more often alone before a full-length three-way mirror, producing a solitary portrait. In another part of the modern cityscape, bohemia, female models shed their clothes and pose nude or draped in fabric for life drawing and painting classes in artists’ studios. Each scene
12 ORNAMENTS AND FEMININE CLOTHING TRADITION IN ALGERIA; OR, THE IDENTITY QUEST from:
Exchanging Clothes
Author(s) Dib-Marouf Chafika
Abstract: Within Algerian culture, the semiology of clothing and, more generally, the code of jewelry as it encompasses all aspects of ornamentation constitute a privileged mode of expression. In the feminine universe of Tlemcen,¹ this code marks the events of festivals and ceremonies, and at the same time, delimits moments of daily life, more permissive because more anonymous.² However, even important occasions of ceremony are not rigidly prescriptive because the ritual space permits a wide range of possible choices, whose thresholds are nevertheless defined by rules of avoidance (at the lower limit) and rules of designation or exemplarity (at the upper
3 Wounding Attachment: from:
Life, Emergent
Abstract: On the morning of October 31, 1984, the prime minister of India, Indira Gandhi, was walking toward her morning appointments in her official residence when her accompanying bodyguards turned their guns on her and shot her down. Her bodyguards belonged to the Sikh community, and this assassination of the country’s reigning political leader was connected to the prevailing Sikh militancy of the time. The north Indian state of Punjab, the territorial home of the Sikh community, had been in violent political turmoil for several years leading up to this event. Led by a charismatic religious leader, Jarnail Singh Bhindranwale, the
2 Hugo Münsterberg, Film, and Philosophy from:
Film as Philosophy
Author(s) Sinnerbrink Robert
Abstract: It is ironic that Hugo Münsterberg, one of the pioneering intellectual figures in the history of film theory and the philosophy of film, was ignored for the best part of a century, a period during which cinema developed into the defining art form of modern times. Even more striking is that his approach to film theory, already a century ago, was thoroughly steeped in philosophical reflection on the psychological, aesthetic, and cultural significance of the new medium. As a Harvard professor of psychology and philosophy, Münsterberg published
The Photoplay: A Psychological Study(1916), a book widely regarded as the first
4 This Is Your Brain on Cinema: from:
Film as Philosophy
Author(s) Flaxman Gregory
Abstract: Poet and critic, sometimes surrealist and sublime schizophrenic, Antonin Artaud has been the subject of vastly greater posthumous interest than he ever enjoyed during his relatively short life. His fame derives primarily from his poetry, plays, letters, and essays—above all, from the revolutionary Theater of Cruelty he developed “to restore a passionate and convulsive conception of life” to the stage.³ Still, his writings acquired a significant readership only after he died, alone in a psychiatric clinic, in 1948.⁴ Thus, Artaud was as much discovered as rediscovered in the subsequent decades, when the initial publication of the
Oeuvres complètesintroduced
8 Strange Topologics: from:
Film as Philosophy
Author(s) Herzogenrath Bernd
Abstract: Cinema thinks. Film is a medium of philosophical investigation and exploration. Propositions such as these distinguish Gilles Deleuze from most other film philosophers, granting film an
immanentpower of thinking much at odds with the idea that film and philosophy are totally different (and sometimes opposed) disciplines, with one (film) at best able to illustrate the ideas and doctrines of the other (philosophy). Although this essay is not the place to fully zoom in on Deleuze’s two cinema books (Cinema 1: The Movement-ImageandCinema 2: The Time-Image),¹ I would like to refer first to some basic ideas of these
11 Thinking as Feast: from:
Film as Philosophy
Author(s) Brenez Nicole
Abstract: The literary and cinematic work of the French philosopher and filmmaker Raymonde Carasco-Hébraud (1939–2009) comprises a thorough analysis of the theoretical and practical circulations, intersections, and interrelations between verbal and audiovisual thinking. Author of sixty articles and three books, two published during her lifetime and one posthumously; editor of two collected volumes; and codirector, with her husband, Régis Hébraud, of sixteen films in both 16 mm and 35 mm, Carasco is perhaps the only professional philosopher to have created such an extensive literary and cinematic body of work. Some overlap between filmmakers and philosophers does exist. Jean-François Lyotard made
13 Movie-Made Philosophy from:
Film as Philosophy
Author(s) Carroll Noël
Abstract: Currently, the philosophy of the moving image is flourishing. It has already spawned a number of subfields. First, there is what might be thought of as “the philosophy
ofthe moving image proper”—the domain of inquiry where the classic questions of philosophy, including those of ontology, epistemology, and ethics, are applied to the case of the moving image. Philosophersofthe moving image proper, for example, ask, What is the moving image? Can documentary motion pictures be objective? and Can evil films, likeThe Triumph of the Will, nevertheless, at the same time, be aesthetically excellent?
2 Hugo Münsterberg, Film, and Philosophy from:
Film as Philosophy
Author(s) Sinnerbrink Robert
Abstract: It is ironic that Hugo Münsterberg, one of the pioneering intellectual figures in the history of film theory and the philosophy of film, was ignored for the best part of a century, a period during which cinema developed into the defining art form of modern times. Even more striking is that his approach to film theory, already a century ago, was thoroughly steeped in philosophical reflection on the psychological, aesthetic, and cultural significance of the new medium. As a Harvard professor of psychology and philosophy, Münsterberg published
The Photoplay: A Psychological Study(1916), a book widely regarded as the first
4 This Is Your Brain on Cinema: from:
Film as Philosophy
Author(s) Flaxman Gregory
Abstract: Poet and critic, sometimes surrealist and sublime schizophrenic, Antonin Artaud has been the subject of vastly greater posthumous interest than he ever enjoyed during his relatively short life. His fame derives primarily from his poetry, plays, letters, and essays—above all, from the revolutionary Theater of Cruelty he developed “to restore a passionate and convulsive conception of life” to the stage.³ Still, his writings acquired a significant readership only after he died, alone in a psychiatric clinic, in 1948.⁴ Thus, Artaud was as much discovered as rediscovered in the subsequent decades, when the initial publication of the
Oeuvres complètesintroduced
8 Strange Topologics: from:
Film as Philosophy
Author(s) Herzogenrath Bernd
Abstract: Cinema thinks. Film is a medium of philosophical investigation and exploration. Propositions such as these distinguish Gilles Deleuze from most other film philosophers, granting film an
immanentpower of thinking much at odds with the idea that film and philosophy are totally different (and sometimes opposed) disciplines, with one (film) at best able to illustrate the ideas and doctrines of the other (philosophy). Although this essay is not the place to fully zoom in on Deleuze’s two cinema books (Cinema 1: The Movement-ImageandCinema 2: The Time-Image),¹ I would like to refer first to some basic ideas of these
11 Thinking as Feast: from:
Film as Philosophy
Author(s) Brenez Nicole
Abstract: The literary and cinematic work of the French philosopher and filmmaker Raymonde Carasco-Hébraud (1939–2009) comprises a thorough analysis of the theoretical and practical circulations, intersections, and interrelations between verbal and audiovisual thinking. Author of sixty articles and three books, two published during her lifetime and one posthumously; editor of two collected volumes; and codirector, with her husband, Régis Hébraud, of sixteen films in both 16 mm and 35 mm, Carasco is perhaps the only professional philosopher to have created such an extensive literary and cinematic body of work. Some overlap between filmmakers and philosophers does exist. Jean-François Lyotard made
13 Movie-Made Philosophy from:
Film as Philosophy
Author(s) Carroll Noël
Abstract: Currently, the philosophy of the moving image is flourishing. It has already spawned a number of subfields. First, there is what might be thought of as “the philosophy
ofthe moving image proper”—the domain of inquiry where the classic questions of philosophy, including those of ontology, epistemology, and ethics, are applied to the case of the moving image. Philosophersofthe moving image proper, for example, ask, What is the moving image? Can documentary motion pictures be objective? and Can evil films, likeThe Triumph of the Will, nevertheless, at the same time, be aesthetically excellent?
Chapter 22 Reading Series Matter: from:
Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) FLAMENCO ALEXANDER
Abstract: When poets participate in the formal mechanism known as the poetry reading, sometimes embedded within the larger context of a reading series, they also participate in and sometimes break social and literary conventions. A similar break occurs when digital tools are used to record what was intended to be ephemeral. Consider a poetry reading series that took place at Sir George Williams University (now Concordia University) in Montreal between 1966 and 1974. This series, simply referred to as “the Poetry Series,” was recorded on 65 reel-to-reel tapes, containing over one hundred hours of audio and featuring some of North America’s
Chapter 32 Project Snapshot: from:
Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) WINET JON
Abstract: The AIDS Quilt Touch (AQT) Virtual Quilt Browser is one of several interactive experiences based on the AIDS Memorial Quilt. In free-browse mode, viewers can explore the Quilt by zooming and panning across the 25-gigapixel image. In Narrative Threads mode, they can follow pathways that present stories about individual panels and the cultural significance of the Quilt. Other AQT applications include a story-making platform, a digital guest book, and interactive timelines.
Book Title: Veer Ecology-A Companion for Environmental Thinking
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Royle Nicholas
Abstract: The words most commonly associated with the environmental movement-save, recycle, reuse, protect, regulate, restore-describe what we can do to help the environment, but few suggest how we might transform ourselves to better navigate the sudden turns of the late Anthropocene. Which words can help us to veer conceptually along with drastic environmental flux? Jeffrey Jerome Cohen and Lowell Duckert asked thirty brilliant thinkers to each propose one verb that stresses the forceful potential of inquiry, weather, biomes, apprehensions, and desires to swerve and sheer. Each term is accompanied by a concise essay contextualizing its meaning in times of resource depletion, environmental degradation, and global climate change.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctt1pwt70r
Foreword from:
Veer Ecology
Author(s) GLOTFELTY CHERYLL
Abstract: If I ask you to brainstorm verbs that we commonly associate with the environmental movement, you might come up with
reduce, recycle, reuse, conserve, preserve, protect, save, clean up, bike, garden, regulate, legislate, andrestore. I would argue that these actions are still necessary but no longer sufficient. Most of these words describe work we can do to help the environment, but few of them tell us how to work on ourselves in a time of environmental upheaval. Taking a cue from Nicholas Royle’s recent bookVeering: A Theory of Literature(2011), let us unpack the nounenvironmentto discover
Introduction: from:
Veer Ecology
Author(s) DUCKERT LOWELL
Abstract: We call this book a
companionin the hope of offering to its readers a ready partner and congenial fellow traveler, a vade mecum for fostering ecological attentiveness and encouraging further wandering. Through the transports of environmentally inclined verbs familiar and unexpected, this collaborative project aims not to provide encyclopedic overviews or definitive accounts of critical concepts (allconcepts are critical) but to forge a welcoming and heterogeneous fellowship, a colloquy for pondering possibilities for environmental thinking, ecological theory, and engaged humanities practice during a time of widespread crisis. Imagining futures by rethinking possibilities present and past,Veer Ecologyextends
Compost from:
Veer Ecology
Author(s) OPPERMANN SERPIL
Abstract: An essential process of biodegradation, composting occurs through the decomposition of nutrient-rich organic materials to enhance the soil properties. Since time immemorial nature’s invisible organic engineers have been composting to keep the soil alive, making it porous and aerated. If we zoom into this
living canvas(to use Dorian Sagan’s definition of soil),¹ we encounter a throng of organisms composting in an eccentric landscape of diffractive relations.² An epic of life is being played out in this extraordinary terrain of microentities internalizing one another from their own residues without completely eliminating the traces of their origins. Fraught with its own
Try from:
Veer Ecology
Author(s) DUCKERT LOWELL
Abstract: I start with a twisting trial of strength. Off I go; with turns of the wrist, this essay attempts to encapsulate two years’ worth of teaching, tries to condense time’s course into instructive droplets. Distilled, one lesson is that something lingering always escapes a teacher’s endeavor, gets set free by the jugfuls across multiple-month journeys. A pedagogical paradox in Jordanian blue: rescuing is an effort to uncap, never to contain. To en-flash, to dream.
Try it with me.
Drown from:
Veer Ecology
Author(s) COHEN JEFFREY JEROME
Abstract: After four millennia of practice, narratives of worldly obliteration come easily. The
Epic of Gilgameshis “a text haunted by rising waters and disaster.”² The Book of Revelation promises sudden global warming, floods of flame. Millenarianism springs eternal, from the medieval “Fifteen Signs before Doomsday” tradition to the endless Left Behind novels, internet sites, and films.³ Never out of print since its publication in 1960, Walter M. Miller Jr.’sA Canticle for Leibowitzimagines the long aftermath of nuclear winter by arcing time round into a radioactive Middle Ages. A genre dubbed “cli-fi”
Haunt from:
Veer Ecology
Author(s) THRUSH COLL
Abstract: About an hour south-southeast of Seattle, thirty miles as the heron flies. One of the outermost suburbs of the city, and one of its poorest, Auburn was founded in the mid-nineteenth century and was an important farming and railroad center by the turn of the twentieth century. Thirty years ago, when I was growing up there, it was a small town surrounded by dwindling farmland; now it is firmly held within the concreted fabric of suburbia, the nighttime darkness between towns that could once be seen from the hill where I lived now transformed into a seamless constellation of lights.¹
Seep from:
Veer Ecology
Author(s) MENTZ STEVE
Abstract: It seeps out from the edges of something, and when it’s done there are no clear edges. All the lines between the things have blurred. Liquid exchange replaces definition. The result is fuzzy, but not so indistinct that you can’t still make out separate shapes. When things seep together, they infiltrate each other but don’t merge. The process is a slow, inexorable, grinding-into. It’s hard to see it happening. By the time you notice any movement, it has seeped its way all through one thing to another, inch by inch, slowly. What was once a stain or the slightest tangent
Behold from:
Veer Ecology
Author(s) IOVINO SERENELLA
Abstract: B
eholdmoves us out from where we stand. Closed in the solitude of self-contemplation, the I is thumped by a call—behold—that smashes its self-sufficient silence, a silence that concentrates all presence in the close proximity of the present or in the apparent distance of things.Beholdforces us to look elsewhere—or just to swerve our mind beyond what seemed familiar, and conceals instead landscapes unseen. Becausebeholdis a call that draws the eye/I to something that has always already been there—unheeded, undetected, or unrecognized—or to something that there will be, in a time that
Wait from:
Veer Ecology
Author(s) SCHABERG CHRISTOPHER
Abstract: 10. When asked to choose a title verb for my chapter of this volume, I immediately thought of
wait. Which is odd, in a way—I didn’t have to wait for it, at least not for long. This choice was partly due to my penchant for thinking about airports as environmentally rich sites. Places where, inevitably, one mustwait. The surroundings press in on one, or float nebulously around, detached. Either way, the simple space of the airport is always also a tacky time, ready to latch on to the traveler at any moment. I like to contemplate airport temporalities: killing
Tend from:
Veer Ecology
Author(s) HARRIS ANNE F.
Abstract: T
endhas a veering volatility. It bends around will and instinct, shaped by both, settling into neither:tendcreates an oscillating ontological middle ground. That’s where I seek to be with you for this essay. Three animal tales and their images will keep us there; stories from medieval, early modern, and contemporary worlds that have been captured in miracle story, woodcut print, and documentary film because the animals involved behaved beyond instinct, which made the humans question their own wills. We will be in complex company across time and scale: the Cistercian recorder of miracles, Caesarius of Heisterbach, and the
Afterword: from:
Veer Ecology
Author(s) ROYLE NICHOLAS
Abstract: An afterword, as Jacques Derrida once remarked, “ought never to be a last word. It comes
afterthe discourse, that’s true, but detached enough from it or wandering away from it enough not to accomplish, finish off, close or conclude.”¹ An afterword should, in a word, veer. Heterogeneous to the text or texts that precede it, the afterword entails “an interruption,” Derrida suggests, something that “cannot be scarred over”: “There’s no suture once there’s the after-the-event, theNachträglichkeitof anafterword.”² All of this may seem incontestable: the time of an afterword is different, out of joint with what it
Book Title: Bioaesthetics-Making Sense of Life in Science and the Arts
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): WOLFE CARY
Abstract: Written with a sensitive understanding of science's strengths, and willing to refute its best arguments,
Bioaestheticshelps readers separate the sensible from the specious. At a time when humanities departments are shrinking-and when STEM education is on the rise-Bioaestheticsmakes vital points about the limitations of science, while lodging a robust defense of the importance of the humanities.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctt1pwt828
INTRODUCTION from:
Bioaesthetics
Abstract: In 2000, Ian Hacking, the renowned philosopher and historian of science, published a book titled
The Social Construction of What?Written during the science wars of the 1990s and published a few years after the infamous Sokal hoax in 1996, Hacking’s study provided a trenchant critique of the various constructivist theories that influenced academic discourse at a time when scholars in all fields sought to expose the constructed nature of ever more phenomena. Although polemical at times, the main goal of the book was less to expose the fashion-driven nature of academic discourse than to clarify the distinct—and at
1 HUMAN NATURE AFTER KANT from:
Bioaesthetics
Abstract: There are good reasons to begin our discussion of bioaesthetics with Kant, who published at a time when academic disciplines were still being established and the “two cultures” did not yet exist.¹ Aesthetics, indeed, was a new academic discipline defined by the German philosopher Gottlieb Alexander Baumgarten in 1750 as the “science of sensory knowledge.” Aesthetics, according to Baumgarten, was meant to clarify the relation between the sensory data based on human experience, on the one hand, and the scientific knowledge that could be derived from that data via the use of reason, on the other. In his
First Critique
4 EVOLUTIONARY AESTHETICS from:
Bioaesthetics
Abstract: Adorno’s opening statement in
Aesthetic Theorystill rings true today, almost a half century after its posthumous publication in 1970. It remains a commonplace not only within art history, but across the humanities in general, that traditional efforts to answer the age-old question “What is art?” are a waste of time at best and an ideological power play at worst. The problem is that a definitive theory of art amounts to a contradiction in terms. Art, the philosopher Morris Weitz said, is “an open concept,” and there will always be cases “that would call for some sort ofdecisionon
1 The Power of Collective Memory from:
Commemorating and Forgetting
Abstract: Collective memory is not at all like a living organism that develops and matures on its own accord in linear time, as present disappears into past. Instead, it is something that is socially constructed and socially situated—not only incubated in the shared desire to preserve that which is worth remembering but also fashioned in such a way as to connect it to an “eternal present.” Collective remembrance is absolutely essential for connecting the past with the future. Without memory, there is no grounding in the present or ability to imagine the future. It endows past events and persons with
3 Facing Backward, Looking Forward: from:
Commemorating and Forgetting
Abstract: The end of apartheid and the transition to parliamentary democracy produced a paradoxical situation. With the collapse of white minority rule and the dismantling of apartheid, citizens of the “new South Africa” have been called upon to look two ways in time: back to the racially divided past to confront painful memories born of discrimination and oppression, and forward to the future—with its attendant risks, uncertainties, and contingent possibilities. Looking backward, they hold onto the past by remembering and commemorating. Looking forward, they envision a radiant future unencumbered and unburdened by the sordid apartheid past. The central conundrum that
4 Collective Memory in Place: from:
Commemorating and Forgetting
Abstract: The erection of monuments and memorials—along with the choreographed ceremonies of commemoration centered on them and the orchestration of public participation around them—transforms particular places into ideologically charged sites of collective memory. Monuments and memorials are powerful mnemonic devices through which the custodians of collective memory seek to encode particular histories and geographies into landscapes of power and resistance. They provide rallying points for shared memories and common identities. They are material signifiers of ideas, transmitters of sentiments, and repositories of ideologies that their permanent affixture to public space intends to immortalize. The elaborate language of symbolism and
7 Textual Memories: from:
Commemorating and Forgetting
Abstract: The birth of the “new South Africa” brought with it a proliferation of commentaries and essays, autobiographies, memoirs, personal reminiscences, and realist documentaries that explore the quandaries of social institutions and individuals as they attempt to deal honestly and forthrightly with the multiple legacies of tyranny, repression, and rebellion. As Athol Fugard argued, “[After 1994] I felt free to tell personal stories that I would have thought of as an indulgence during those years of apartheid.¹ As a kind of first-person narrative convention, these ”mementos” have entered the public discourse as fact-based stories that reflect their particular time and place
1 Being-toward-Death and from:
The Thought of Death and the Memory of War
Author(s) Heidegger Martin
Abstract: With these two phrases, as is often the case in his writings on Heidegger, Derrida opens up a perspective that is at the same time a breach. It has been said over and over again that the existential analytic recoils from thinking about the political, that it treats the political as an ancillary and derivative question. But Derrida’s two remarks suggest something else. They invite us to ask more specifically if this wavering before the political might not be what is playing itself out in the sections
Being and Time (46–53) devoted to the existential analytic of Being-toward-death. That
1 Being-toward-Death and from:
The Thought of Death and the Memory of War
Author(s) Heidegger Martin
Abstract: With these two phrases, as is often the case in his writings on Heidegger, Derrida opens up a perspective that is at the same time a breach. It has been said over and over again that the existential analytic recoils from thinking about the political, that it treats the political as an ancillary and derivative question. But Derrida’s two remarks suggest something else. They invite us to ask more specifically if this wavering before the political might not be what is playing itself out in the sections
Being and Time (46–53) devoted to the existential analytic of Being-toward-death. That
Borderline from:
Meeting Place
Abstract: To stage a dialogue between northern and southern experiences of meeting is to assume a productively dialectical relationship. It is already to move beyond the nostalgia inherent in most anthropological descriptions and the urgent functionalism of sociological ideas of the crowd. It relocates both in a time and space that is not reducible to the idealized level playing field of contemporary, scientific modernity (where place-based, situational knowledge is always at a loss). It retains instead a topography of hills and vales, of crisscrossing tracks, and within the network of traces of passage lozenges of ground as yet unvisited. It is
Hollowed Out from:
Meeting Place
Abstract: “Half past twelve: how the time has gone by.”¹ You are obviously not coming; or you are here cocooned from sight in another dimension, where time and space retain their qualitative aspects of east and west, before and after. Either way, as with the recently departed, the time is approaching when it is ceasing to make sense to speak in the second person, as if you are in earshot. After writing about love in the third person, Jean-Luc Nancy added a postlude, wondering whether love could only ever be talked about between two people, in a letter. Shouldn’t a discourse
Echolocation from:
Meeting Place
Abstract: Another way to think about the meeting place is acoustically. In the classical model of the meeting place, the agora, forum, or square is a place for public talking. They are designed so that some members of the community at least can make themselves heard. To win the attention of neighbors, speeches were rhetorically amplified and distinctive kinds of storytelling developed. Something corresponding to Habermas’s communicative reason was being cultivated, and the conventions of public debate established in these classical settings continue in the structuration of modern parliamentary democracy. At the same time, the harmonization of voices, opinion, and architectural
Scales from:
Meeting Place
Abstract: Killing time after you did not arrive, I found myself in the art gallery. Looking at a work called
City Square, where a group of figures are arranged as if about to meet, I could not help but notice their inclination. They seemed to be attentively listening, as if they located themselves in a sea of echoes. For all their collective loneliness, they were immersed in a tumultuous medium whose message they strained to make out. The music of the tumult would not possess a clear key structure or its elements be reducible to tone and scales. It would be
Pigeonholes from:
Meeting Place
Abstract: Here I want to stage a meeting between two terms. One of them,
hedra, is a Greek word that survives in our word polyhedron. The other is an Arrernte word,utyerre, whose connotations are explained in a recent book by Margaret Kemarre Turner. These are words about pigeonholes, the natural locations for things, but they are also terms that are pigeonholed, like their cultures, thought to be of merely local or anthropological interest. A discussion of them illuminates what might be meant by characterizing the meeting place as “a more convenient place.” At the same time, it also illuminates another
Middle Ground from:
Meeting Place
Abstract: Perhaps the question of the meeting place has been wrongly framed. Instead of bringing things together, perhaps it is an art of arrangement or redistribution. Take Leibniz’s thought experiment, according to which the order of events is as follows: a random distribution of points exists, and an equation is found, an algorithm, that joins them into a single line. This two-step process implies a third: the elimination of the need for points. In the future, the instantaneously produced, self-consistent line neutralizes time and space. Leibniz’s calculus seems to make it possible to draw together the most unlike positions: it resolves
All Ears from:
Meeting Place
Abstract: In this scenario the wall intercedes on behalf of the experience of encounter. Materializing the place of meeting/not-meeting, it capitalizes on an originary sociality and gives it the face of sociability. The face is not a fascinating, phallocentric positivity. It is an imaginary one, in the sense that Arjun Appadurai lends that term when he writes, “The image, the imagined, the imaginary—these are all terms which direct us to something critical and new in global cultural processes: the imagination as social work. Imagination is no longer fantasy, pastime or contemplation (with their implication of withdrawal from social and political
Accompaniment from:
Meeting Place
Abstract: Despite the stress on the strangeness at the heart of encounter, there is an expectation that it will lead to familiarity. If strangers meet in Jean Genet’s sense of recognizing each other’s “solitude of being,” they form a bond of sorts. Even if a face-to-face meeting—with its rhetoric of negotiation and its expectation of breakthrough—is not the goal, a sense of accompaniment is enjoyed. Such an accompaniment is not necessarily musical. “Music,” the distinguished English poet Jeremy Prynne remarks, “is truly the / sound of our time, since it is how we most / deeply recognise the home
Book Title: Prismatic Ecology-Ecotheory beyond Green
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Buell Lawrence
Abstract: In a series of linked essays that span place, time, and discipline, Jeffrey Jerome Cohen brings together writers who illustrate the vibrant worlds formed by colors. Organized by the structure of a prism, each chapter explores the coming into existence of nonanthropocentric ecologies. "Red" engages sites of animal violence, apocalyptic emergence, and activism; "Maroon" follows the aurora borealis to the far North and beholds in its shimmering alternative modes of world composition; "Chartreuse" is a meditation on postsustainability and possibility within sublime excess; "Grey" is the color of the undead; "Ultraviolet" is a potentially lethal force that opens vistas beyond humanly known nature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctt5hjk31
Gold from:
Prismatic Ecology
Author(s) HARMAN GRAHAM
Abstract: In the late 1990s I coined the phrase “object-oriented philosophy.”¹ By the time of this writing (May 2012), the term had gained widespread international usage.² The two basic principles of my object-oriented approach are as follows: (1) objects have genuine reality at many different scales, not just the smallest, and (2) objects withdraw from all types of relation, whether those of human knowledge or of inanimate causal impact. In short, objects exist at many different levels of complexity, and they are always a hidden surplus deeper than any of the relations into which they might enter. The rest of object-oriented
Chartreuse from:
Prismatic Ecology
Author(s) STOEKL ALLAN
Abstract: The Carthusian monks are an ancient and venerable order, founded by St. Bruno in 1084, at what is still today their main abbey, the Grande Chartreuse in the Chartreuse Mountains, Jura, France—just to the north of Voiron. The site was chosen for its (at the time) profound isolation: it was known as the “desert of the mountains” because of its utter remoteness.¹ Indeed the order, as conceived by St. Bruno, was meant to accomplish what might seem impossible: to fuse hermetic life with the communal life of an established and official monastic discipline. The sanctity and rigor of the
4 Triangles of Life from:
The Road to Botany Bay
Abstract: Sturt and Leichhardt may have been good biographers of the journey, but when it came to
surveyingthe country they passed through, their journals were less satisfactory. Equipment failures aside, comparison with journals kept by other expedition members suggests that their estimates of latitude and longitude (where they are given) sometimes seem based on quite inadequate observations. There are discrepancies between the published and unpublished data. Sometimes curious lacunae appear in the journals - days go missing. Another explorer, Giles, candidly admits to losing track of time. Estimates of distance are impressionistic and, in many instances, insufficient angles seem to
8 A More Pleasing Prospect from:
The Road to Botany Bay
Abstract: About the time Cook returned from his
Endeavourvoyage, a poet or poetaster from my home town wrote a poem called ‘Faringdon Hill’. From its modest heights, Henry James Pye, local squire and, later, Poet Laureate, surveyed the ‘various objects scatter’d round’ which ‘charm on every side the curious eye’:
4 Triangles of Life from:
The Road to Botany Bay
Abstract: Sturt and Leichhardt may have been good biographers of the journey, but when it came to
surveyingthe country they passed through, their journals were less satisfactory. Equipment failures aside, comparison with journals kept by other expedition members suggests that their estimates of latitude and longitude (where they are given) sometimes seem based on quite inadequate observations. There are discrepancies between the published and unpublished data. Sometimes curious lacunae appear in the journals - days go missing. Another explorer, Giles, candidly admits to losing track of time. Estimates of distance are impressionistic and, in many instances, insufficient angles seem to
8 A More Pleasing Prospect from:
The Road to Botany Bay
Abstract: About the time Cook returned from his
Endeavourvoyage, a poet or poetaster from my home town wrote a poem called ‘Faringdon Hill’. From its modest heights, Henry James Pye, local squire and, later, Poet Laureate, surveyed the ‘various objects scatter’d round’ which ‘charm on every side the curious eye’:
Variations on Authority: from:
The Yale Critics
Author(s) Bové Paul A.
Abstract: There have been recently many attempts to describe, rebut, “go beyond,” and account for deconstructive criticism. They have come from Marxist, phenomenological, humanistic, and political quarters. Occasionally, there have been sympathetic accounts, sometimes bordering on the apologetic, from a younger generation of scholars nurtured in the excitement of the Derridean era.¹
SIX Democracy and Time from:
Neuropolitics
Abstract: Starkly put, political time is out of synch with the temporalities, rhythms, and pace governing economy and culture. Political time, especially in societies with pretensions to democracy, requires an element of leisure, not in the sense
SEVEN Eccentric Flows and Cosmopolitan Culture from:
Neuropolitics
Abstract: Sheldon wolin seeks to save local democracy by slowing down time. Paul Virilio lifts the issue of speed into the ether of global politics itself. It would be difficult to overstate the importance of Virilio to exploration of the effects of speed upon the late-modern condition. Everybody who engages the issue is indebted to him, even when they disagree with him profoundly. When speed accelerates, Virilio says, space is compressed. And everything else changes too: the ability to deliberate before going to war; the priority of civilian control over the military; the integrity of the territorial politics of place; the
SIX Democracy and Time from:
Neuropolitics
Abstract: Starkly put, political time is out of synch with the temporalities, rhythms, and pace governing economy and culture. Political time, especially in societies with pretensions to democracy, requires an element of leisure, not in the sense
SEVEN Eccentric Flows and Cosmopolitan Culture from:
Neuropolitics
Abstract: Sheldon wolin seeks to save local democracy by slowing down time. Paul Virilio lifts the issue of speed into the ether of global politics itself. It would be difficult to overstate the importance of Virilio to exploration of the effects of speed upon the late-modern condition. Everybody who engages the issue is indebted to him, even when they disagree with him profoundly. When speed accelerates, Virilio says, space is compressed. And everything else changes too: the ability to deliberate before going to war; the priority of civilian control over the military; the integrity of the territorial politics of place; the
Book Title: Documentary Time-Film and Phenomenology
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Wahlberg Malin
Abstract: Finding the theoretical space where cinema and philosophy meet, Malin Wahlberg’s sophisticated approach to the experience of documentary film aligns with attempts to reconsider the premises of existential phenomenology. Wahlberg discusses a corpus of classical and recent experiments in film and video in which creative approaches to the time of the image and the potential archive memory of filmic representation illuminates meanings of temporality and time experience.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctttsjb1
Introduction from:
Documentary Time
Abstract: Jacques Aumont once suggested that any approach to cinema and temporality should involve an initial choice between two possible perspectives: (a) the created space-time of the image or (b) the time of film viewing. The latter corresponds to the fact that images are viewed during a certain period of time and that, to be appreciated, they require the spectator’s gaze. The temporal status of an image depends on a viewer’s attention and, therefore, on the duration of contemplation. Aumont argues that we have to distinguish between these two axes of image-time and experienced time.¹ The
ocular timespent watching a
1 The Phenomenology of Image and Time from:
Documentary Time
Abstract: In documentary theory the phenomenology of the image as imprint and record fuses with the classical index argument, which has commonly been associated with the ascribed veracity of documentary representation. Hence, the trace status of photography and film represents a crucial problem in the ongoing discussion on film and historical representation. More recently, various approaches to the aesthetics and experience of documentary film have dealt with classical issues of image and time, including an important recognition of the affective and psychological impact of documentary representation in film and media. In this context the phenomenology of image and time corresponds with
2 The Time-Image and the Trace from:
Documentary Time
Abstract: To grasp the paradox of instant and flux in moving images could be compared to the vain attempt in philosophy to locate the instant within the flow of consciousness. Identifying the paradoxical instant is therefore a problem where the phenomenology of time meets with classical attempts to specify the ontology of cinema. Attempts at identifying this paradoxical instant have resulted in describing both film in analogy with human perception and film in analogy with machine perception beyond and independent of the subject. In this chapter I will depart from the point of intersection between phenomenology and cinema, which illuminates the
3 Frame-Breaking Events and Motifs beyond Representation from:
Documentary Time
Abstract: The following sections will focus on the time-image and the trace as events of defamiliarization or visceral chock, consequently upsetting both film viewing and any presumed analogy between the phenomenology of cinema and the phenomenology of time experience. Maurice Merleau-Ponty implicitly confronted the issue as he stressed the sociocultural dimension of spectator expectation. He argued that a stylistic anomaly of film form is not something immanent to experience.¹ One may add that, however exceptional a stylistic anomaly, the film should not be isolated from the cultural and social context and standards in reference to which the film was made. Time
4 The Interval and Pulse Beat of Rhythm from:
Documentary Time
Abstract: In
IntroductionI suggested that rhythm represents a problem of special importance for the conception of the moving image as screen event. Rhythm stands out as a classical problem in aesthetic theory and most notably in relation to the temporal arts of music, dance, and theater, where it represents an element of importance for the overall expressive structure. Also, rhythm plays a decisive role in the audience’s affective response to the performance. In moving images and film narration a literal aspect oftime measurementis added by the immanent relation between photogram and cinegram and by the metric composition of
5 Screen Events of Velocity and Duration from:
Documentary Time
Abstract: From the perspective of existential phenomenology it is interesting to note how the reflection on film and temporality has been biased toward duration and continuity, at the expense of rhythm, change, and repetition. For example, André Bazin was primarily interested in cinematic duration and the quality of lived time that may result from the tension between change and stasis within a single take. The inheritance of existential phenomenology in the work of Bazin and others includes a romantic recognition of the human gesture—a confidence in cinema to transmit directly the experience traced in faces and gestures. For example, Maurice
7 The Trace in Contemporary Media from:
Documentary Time
Abstract: This chapter considers some examples that radically question the phenomenology of the trace. I will acknowledge representations and media contexts beyond photography and film or narratives that involve a critical reflection on the production and reproduction of public memory in moving images. I stress the thematic persistence of the trace in documentary, while at the same time reflecting on the limitations of the phenomenological discourse in relation to contemporary media. At this point it is also relevant to acknowledge an important theme in Ricœur’s reassessment of the philosophy of memory: the possibility of the erroneous memory and the fact that
Documentary Time: from:
Documentary Time
Abstract: Image and time represent a pristine problem of classical film theory and film aesthetics, which has primarily been associated with assertions regarding the physical medium of cinema and qualities of film as a visual art. The purpose of this book was to reconsider these issues from the perspective of documentary cinema and account for the inheritance of existential phenomenology in classical film theory. Consequently, a reassessment of cinematic temporality in early film criticism and in experimental filmmaking brought attention to the historical persistence of phenomenological themes in film theory and visual culture. Moreover, the aim of this metatheoretical outline was
Book Title: Documentary Time-Film and Phenomenology
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Wahlberg Malin
Abstract: Finding the theoretical space where cinema and philosophy meet, Malin Wahlberg’s sophisticated approach to the experience of documentary film aligns with attempts to reconsider the premises of existential phenomenology. Wahlberg discusses a corpus of classical and recent experiments in film and video in which creative approaches to the time of the image and the potential archive memory of filmic representation illuminates meanings of temporality and time experience.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctttsjb1
Introduction from:
Documentary Time
Abstract: Jacques Aumont once suggested that any approach to cinema and temporality should involve an initial choice between two possible perspectives: (a) the created space-time of the image or (b) the time of film viewing. The latter corresponds to the fact that images are viewed during a certain period of time and that, to be appreciated, they require the spectator’s gaze. The temporal status of an image depends on a viewer’s attention and, therefore, on the duration of contemplation. Aumont argues that we have to distinguish between these two axes of image-time and experienced time.¹ The
ocular timespent watching a
1 The Phenomenology of Image and Time from:
Documentary Time
Abstract: In documentary theory the phenomenology of the image as imprint and record fuses with the classical index argument, which has commonly been associated with the ascribed veracity of documentary representation. Hence, the trace status of photography and film represents a crucial problem in the ongoing discussion on film and historical representation. More recently, various approaches to the aesthetics and experience of documentary film have dealt with classical issues of image and time, including an important recognition of the affective and psychological impact of documentary representation in film and media. In this context the phenomenology of image and time corresponds with
2 The Time-Image and the Trace from:
Documentary Time
Abstract: To grasp the paradox of instant and flux in moving images could be compared to the vain attempt in philosophy to locate the instant within the flow of consciousness. Identifying the paradoxical instant is therefore a problem where the phenomenology of time meets with classical attempts to specify the ontology of cinema. Attempts at identifying this paradoxical instant have resulted in describing both film in analogy with human perception and film in analogy with machine perception beyond and independent of the subject. In this chapter I will depart from the point of intersection between phenomenology and cinema, which illuminates the
3 Frame-Breaking Events and Motifs beyond Representation from:
Documentary Time
Abstract: The following sections will focus on the time-image and the trace as events of defamiliarization or visceral chock, consequently upsetting both film viewing and any presumed analogy between the phenomenology of cinema and the phenomenology of time experience. Maurice Merleau-Ponty implicitly confronted the issue as he stressed the sociocultural dimension of spectator expectation. He argued that a stylistic anomaly of film form is not something immanent to experience.¹ One may add that, however exceptional a stylistic anomaly, the film should not be isolated from the cultural and social context and standards in reference to which the film was made. Time
4 The Interval and Pulse Beat of Rhythm from:
Documentary Time
Abstract: In
IntroductionI suggested that rhythm represents a problem of special importance for the conception of the moving image as screen event. Rhythm stands out as a classical problem in aesthetic theory and most notably in relation to the temporal arts of music, dance, and theater, where it represents an element of importance for the overall expressive structure. Also, rhythm plays a decisive role in the audience’s affective response to the performance. In moving images and film narration a literal aspect oftime measurementis added by the immanent relation between photogram and cinegram and by the metric composition of
5 Screen Events of Velocity and Duration from:
Documentary Time
Abstract: From the perspective of existential phenomenology it is interesting to note how the reflection on film and temporality has been biased toward duration and continuity, at the expense of rhythm, change, and repetition. For example, André Bazin was primarily interested in cinematic duration and the quality of lived time that may result from the tension between change and stasis within a single take. The inheritance of existential phenomenology in the work of Bazin and others includes a romantic recognition of the human gesture—a confidence in cinema to transmit directly the experience traced in faces and gestures. For example, Maurice
7 The Trace in Contemporary Media from:
Documentary Time
Abstract: This chapter considers some examples that radically question the phenomenology of the trace. I will acknowledge representations and media contexts beyond photography and film or narratives that involve a critical reflection on the production and reproduction of public memory in moving images. I stress the thematic persistence of the trace in documentary, while at the same time reflecting on the limitations of the phenomenological discourse in relation to contemporary media. At this point it is also relevant to acknowledge an important theme in Ricœur’s reassessment of the philosophy of memory: the possibility of the erroneous memory and the fact that
Documentary Time: from:
Documentary Time
Abstract: Image and time represent a pristine problem of classical film theory and film aesthetics, which has primarily been associated with assertions regarding the physical medium of cinema and qualities of film as a visual art. The purpose of this book was to reconsider these issues from the perspective of documentary cinema and account for the inheritance of existential phenomenology in classical film theory. Consequently, a reassessment of cinematic temporality in early film criticism and in experimental filmmaking brought attention to the historical persistence of phenomenological themes in film theory and visual culture. Moreover, the aim of this metatheoretical outline was
Book Title: Documentary Time-Film and Phenomenology
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Wahlberg Malin
Abstract: Finding the theoretical space where cinema and philosophy meet, Malin Wahlberg’s sophisticated approach to the experience of documentary film aligns with attempts to reconsider the premises of existential phenomenology. Wahlberg discusses a corpus of classical and recent experiments in film and video in which creative approaches to the time of the image and the potential archive memory of filmic representation illuminates meanings of temporality and time experience.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctttsjb1
Introduction from:
Documentary Time
Abstract: Jacques Aumont once suggested that any approach to cinema and temporality should involve an initial choice between two possible perspectives: (a) the created space-time of the image or (b) the time of film viewing. The latter corresponds to the fact that images are viewed during a certain period of time and that, to be appreciated, they require the spectator’s gaze. The temporal status of an image depends on a viewer’s attention and, therefore, on the duration of contemplation. Aumont argues that we have to distinguish between these two axes of image-time and experienced time.¹ The
ocular timespent watching a
1 The Phenomenology of Image and Time from:
Documentary Time
Abstract: In documentary theory the phenomenology of the image as imprint and record fuses with the classical index argument, which has commonly been associated with the ascribed veracity of documentary representation. Hence, the trace status of photography and film represents a crucial problem in the ongoing discussion on film and historical representation. More recently, various approaches to the aesthetics and experience of documentary film have dealt with classical issues of image and time, including an important recognition of the affective and psychological impact of documentary representation in film and media. In this context the phenomenology of image and time corresponds with
2 The Time-Image and the Trace from:
Documentary Time
Abstract: To grasp the paradox of instant and flux in moving images could be compared to the vain attempt in philosophy to locate the instant within the flow of consciousness. Identifying the paradoxical instant is therefore a problem where the phenomenology of time meets with classical attempts to specify the ontology of cinema. Attempts at identifying this paradoxical instant have resulted in describing both film in analogy with human perception and film in analogy with machine perception beyond and independent of the subject. In this chapter I will depart from the point of intersection between phenomenology and cinema, which illuminates the
3 Frame-Breaking Events and Motifs beyond Representation from:
Documentary Time
Abstract: The following sections will focus on the time-image and the trace as events of defamiliarization or visceral chock, consequently upsetting both film viewing and any presumed analogy between the phenomenology of cinema and the phenomenology of time experience. Maurice Merleau-Ponty implicitly confronted the issue as he stressed the sociocultural dimension of spectator expectation. He argued that a stylistic anomaly of film form is not something immanent to experience.¹ One may add that, however exceptional a stylistic anomaly, the film should not be isolated from the cultural and social context and standards in reference to which the film was made. Time
4 The Interval and Pulse Beat of Rhythm from:
Documentary Time
Abstract: In
IntroductionI suggested that rhythm represents a problem of special importance for the conception of the moving image as screen event. Rhythm stands out as a classical problem in aesthetic theory and most notably in relation to the temporal arts of music, dance, and theater, where it represents an element of importance for the overall expressive structure. Also, rhythm plays a decisive role in the audience’s affective response to the performance. In moving images and film narration a literal aspect oftime measurementis added by the immanent relation between photogram and cinegram and by the metric composition of
5 Screen Events of Velocity and Duration from:
Documentary Time
Abstract: From the perspective of existential phenomenology it is interesting to note how the reflection on film and temporality has been biased toward duration and continuity, at the expense of rhythm, change, and repetition. For example, André Bazin was primarily interested in cinematic duration and the quality of lived time that may result from the tension between change and stasis within a single take. The inheritance of existential phenomenology in the work of Bazin and others includes a romantic recognition of the human gesture—a confidence in cinema to transmit directly the experience traced in faces and gestures. For example, Maurice
7 The Trace in Contemporary Media from:
Documentary Time
Abstract: This chapter considers some examples that radically question the phenomenology of the trace. I will acknowledge representations and media contexts beyond photography and film or narratives that involve a critical reflection on the production and reproduction of public memory in moving images. I stress the thematic persistence of the trace in documentary, while at the same time reflecting on the limitations of the phenomenological discourse in relation to contemporary media. At this point it is also relevant to acknowledge an important theme in Ricœur’s reassessment of the philosophy of memory: the possibility of the erroneous memory and the fact that
Documentary Time: from:
Documentary Time
Abstract: Image and time represent a pristine problem of classical film theory and film aesthetics, which has primarily been associated with assertions regarding the physical medium of cinema and qualities of film as a visual art. The purpose of this book was to reconsider these issues from the perspective of documentary cinema and account for the inheritance of existential phenomenology in classical film theory. Consequently, a reassessment of cinematic temporality in early film criticism and in experimental filmmaking brought attention to the historical persistence of phenomenological themes in film theory and visual culture. Moreover, the aim of this metatheoretical outline was
Book Title: Documentary Time-Film and Phenomenology
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Wahlberg Malin
Abstract: Finding the theoretical space where cinema and philosophy meet, Malin Wahlberg’s sophisticated approach to the experience of documentary film aligns with attempts to reconsider the premises of existential phenomenology. Wahlberg discusses a corpus of classical and recent experiments in film and video in which creative approaches to the time of the image and the potential archive memory of filmic representation illuminates meanings of temporality and time experience.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctttsjb1
Introduction from:
Documentary Time
Abstract: Jacques Aumont once suggested that any approach to cinema and temporality should involve an initial choice between two possible perspectives: (a) the created space-time of the image or (b) the time of film viewing. The latter corresponds to the fact that images are viewed during a certain period of time and that, to be appreciated, they require the spectator’s gaze. The temporal status of an image depends on a viewer’s attention and, therefore, on the duration of contemplation. Aumont argues that we have to distinguish between these two axes of image-time and experienced time.¹ The
ocular timespent watching a
1 The Phenomenology of Image and Time from:
Documentary Time
Abstract: In documentary theory the phenomenology of the image as imprint and record fuses with the classical index argument, which has commonly been associated with the ascribed veracity of documentary representation. Hence, the trace status of photography and film represents a crucial problem in the ongoing discussion on film and historical representation. More recently, various approaches to the aesthetics and experience of documentary film have dealt with classical issues of image and time, including an important recognition of the affective and psychological impact of documentary representation in film and media. In this context the phenomenology of image and time corresponds with
2 The Time-Image and the Trace from:
Documentary Time
Abstract: To grasp the paradox of instant and flux in moving images could be compared to the vain attempt in philosophy to locate the instant within the flow of consciousness. Identifying the paradoxical instant is therefore a problem where the phenomenology of time meets with classical attempts to specify the ontology of cinema. Attempts at identifying this paradoxical instant have resulted in describing both film in analogy with human perception and film in analogy with machine perception beyond and independent of the subject. In this chapter I will depart from the point of intersection between phenomenology and cinema, which illuminates the
3 Frame-Breaking Events and Motifs beyond Representation from:
Documentary Time
Abstract: The following sections will focus on the time-image and the trace as events of defamiliarization or visceral chock, consequently upsetting both film viewing and any presumed analogy between the phenomenology of cinema and the phenomenology of time experience. Maurice Merleau-Ponty implicitly confronted the issue as he stressed the sociocultural dimension of spectator expectation. He argued that a stylistic anomaly of film form is not something immanent to experience.¹ One may add that, however exceptional a stylistic anomaly, the film should not be isolated from the cultural and social context and standards in reference to which the film was made. Time
4 The Interval and Pulse Beat of Rhythm from:
Documentary Time
Abstract: In
IntroductionI suggested that rhythm represents a problem of special importance for the conception of the moving image as screen event. Rhythm stands out as a classical problem in aesthetic theory and most notably in relation to the temporal arts of music, dance, and theater, where it represents an element of importance for the overall expressive structure. Also, rhythm plays a decisive role in the audience’s affective response to the performance. In moving images and film narration a literal aspect oftime measurementis added by the immanent relation between photogram and cinegram and by the metric composition of
5 Screen Events of Velocity and Duration from:
Documentary Time
Abstract: From the perspective of existential phenomenology it is interesting to note how the reflection on film and temporality has been biased toward duration and continuity, at the expense of rhythm, change, and repetition. For example, André Bazin was primarily interested in cinematic duration and the quality of lived time that may result from the tension between change and stasis within a single take. The inheritance of existential phenomenology in the work of Bazin and others includes a romantic recognition of the human gesture—a confidence in cinema to transmit directly the experience traced in faces and gestures. For example, Maurice
7 The Trace in Contemporary Media from:
Documentary Time
Abstract: This chapter considers some examples that radically question the phenomenology of the trace. I will acknowledge representations and media contexts beyond photography and film or narratives that involve a critical reflection on the production and reproduction of public memory in moving images. I stress the thematic persistence of the trace in documentary, while at the same time reflecting on the limitations of the phenomenological discourse in relation to contemporary media. At this point it is also relevant to acknowledge an important theme in Ricœur’s reassessment of the philosophy of memory: the possibility of the erroneous memory and the fact that
Documentary Time: from:
Documentary Time
Abstract: Image and time represent a pristine problem of classical film theory and film aesthetics, which has primarily been associated with assertions regarding the physical medium of cinema and qualities of film as a visual art. The purpose of this book was to reconsider these issues from the perspective of documentary cinema and account for the inheritance of existential phenomenology in classical film theory. Consequently, a reassessment of cinematic temporality in early film criticism and in experimental filmmaking brought attention to the historical persistence of phenomenological themes in film theory and visual culture. Moreover, the aim of this metatheoretical outline was
Introduction: from:
Atavistic Tendencies
Abstract: Modernity is an atavism. Its advent in Western culture led to and was given shape by political, social, and aesthetic developments that can be characterized by a recursive temporal subjectivity. This book provides a historical and theoretical account of that subjectivity by looking at late nineteenth- and early twentieth-century science, fition, and photography. Theories and expressions of atavism in these representational spheres reveal the way modern thought oriented itself around a paradigm of obsolescence and return that structured the experience of modern time. If “modernity” designates itself in terms of its eternal up-to-date-ness, atavism—a theory of biological reversion emerging
3. “Wolf—wolf!”: from:
Atavistic Tendencies
Abstract: Atavism demonstrates, sometimes quite poignantly, that the body does not coincide with its present. It dramatizes the past as in communication with the present; it insists that the past and the present are temporal spheres fused in continuity. By making manifest a disordered temporality, the atavistic body demonstrates something of the nature of cultural preoccupations in late modernity. At the same time, the epistemological projects orbiting around this body demonstrate something of the nature of the formal procedures exercised in the scientific pursuit of corporeal mastery. If those procedures may be seen in psychoanalysis and medical photography, they also emerge
4. Atavistic Time: from:
Atavistic Tendencies
Abstract: Our experience of everyday life is always an experience of time: hours, days, months, dates, schedules, but also habits, rituals, memories. What Kath Weston has called the “time claims” of our world-historical moment dictate, in part, our sense of self, and our own sense of time shapes those claims in turn.¹We act on time, and time acts on us. In Freud’s case studies, discussed in chapter 1, this temporal function takes the form of a psychic recurrence whereby childhood trauma expresses itself as delayed consciousness, requiring a period of latency before its eventual return. For Freud, the return of the
1 The Nostalgic Theater of the West from:
On the Rim
Abstract: Every morning, a historic steam train leaves Williams, Arizona, at 9:30 and carries passengers to the rim of Grand Canyon. The Grand Canyon Railway brochure promises a “Wild West journey to the edge of time”; it is a trip that “Departs: 1901 A.D., Arrives 2 Billion years B.C.” Traveling aboard a restored 1910 locomotive, passengers can “relive the romance … and ride the rails in the tradition of kings, presidents, cowboys and movie stars,” says another brochure. “Come back to the Old West Territory and experience a nostalgic ride across northern Arizona’s plains and forest lands, … Arrive at the
4 Managing a View from:
On the Rim
Abstract: “Sure it is,” Kaye tries again, this time a bit louder. “Look at those flat
7 Making and Breaking the Scene from:
On the Rim
Abstract: On a cold and damp November afternoon, I can see clouds hovering in the canyon below the rim. The thunderstorm has passed and the sun is breaking through, illuminating distant buttes and plateaus, and leaving shadows on inner canyons. The clouds below the rim rise like smoke drifting up from hell. “That
isstunning. It’s so huge, much bigger than I imagined it. This is the first time I’ve seen this,” I tell my friend Nancy, who stands next to me. “It’s beautiful,” she says. “Look at the colors … the light.” We speak quietly, not so much in reverence
Introduction from:
State Repression and the Labors of Memory
Abstract: Reading the newspapers in Argentina, Uruguay, Chile, Brazil, Paraguay, and Peru at the turn of the millennium may sometimes resemble traveling through a time tunnel. In addition to the obvious economic, political, and police problems of the moment, the news headlines include a number of stories that reflect the persistence of a past that is everlasting and does not wish to pass: the comings and goings of Pinochet’s detention in London and Santiago, and his subsequent indictment (and acquittal on the basis of senility and mental health deficiencies) for crimes committed in Chile in 1973; the “truth trials” to clarify
Five Trauma, Testimony, and “Truth” from:
State Repression and the Labors of Memory
Abstract: Reflection and debate about the possibility and impossibility of bearing testimony, about the “truth,” the silences and lapses, and about the possibility of listening owe their origin and force in contemporary times to the Nazi experience and the debates that it has engendered. The abundant literature about
Introduction: from:
Recording Reality, Desiring the Real
Abstract: Documentary, in presenting the sights and sounds of reality, enables reality to “speak” at the same time as it “speaks about” reality. It thus realizes the desire that cinematography inaugurated: of knowing reality through its images and sounds, that is—figuratively—of allowing reality to “speak for itself.” This book examines the documentary film as a cinematic project that seeks to enable the citizen-spectator to know and experience reality through recorded images and sounds of reality. Closely linked to the development of both modernity and modernism, documentary arises as a film genre characterized by a dual assertion of the objective
6 Specters of the Real: from:
Recording Reality, Desiring the Real
Abstract: What is central to the aesthetics of documentary is the temporal disjuncture introduced between the real time of the event and its presence again in the filmed record that can be understood as spectral in the sense proposed by both Žižek and Derrida.¹ If to Walter Benjamin’s question (albeit rhetorical) whether “the very invention of photography had not transformed the entire nature of art”² we answer yes, it is not only because of its mechanical reproduction of the world—which is the focus of his concerns—but also, and as significantly, because of the specific figuring of time that the
Chapter 3 Architectures of the Gaze from:
Critical Practices in Post-Franco Spain
Author(s) López Silvia L.
Abstract: I shall begin with something evident. Museums—in particular, fine arts museums—have become in modern societies, at least in those that became what they are under the revolutionary impulse of Enlightenment philosophy, an exemplary space in which unanimous commemoration can take place. They are a space where the secular ritual occurs, through which a community sanctions a number of cultural achievements. Although these achievements bring an individual character to the community, at the same time they are supposed to link it to the whole of humanity in the realm of the spirit. These spaces have been designed for the
Chapter 7 Reading in Process, the Antitext, and the Definition of Literature from:
Critical Practices in Post-Franco Spain
Author(s) Giefer Laura
Abstract: In a previous work, dedicated to a
theoría¹ of reading, I investigated the paradoxical movement that characterizes the relationship between the language of literary theory and that of literature. One of the core chapters of that work noted the characteristics of identity and difference that mediate between text and metatext. In dealing specifically with the question of difference, the problem of defining language or the literary text was brought to the foreground, a classical problem that was not addressed at the time because the investigation wandered along other paths. Nevertheless, the way was prepared for understanding that the question about
Chapter 8 Subjectivity and Temporality in Narrative from:
Critical Practices in Post-Franco Spain
Author(s) Meuser-Blincow Frances
Abstract: Recent studies of temporality in narrative texts resort, almost inevitably, to the distinction between time of the narration and time narrated. However, we must bear in mind that these temporalities do not usually exist as independent and separable entities. Such a dichotomy is intended to account for the
Chapter 3 Architectures of the Gaze from:
Critical Practices in Post-Franco Spain
Author(s) López Silvia L.
Abstract: I shall begin with something evident. Museums—in particular, fine arts museums—have become in modern societies, at least in those that became what they are under the revolutionary impulse of Enlightenment philosophy, an exemplary space in which unanimous commemoration can take place. They are a space where the secular ritual occurs, through which a community sanctions a number of cultural achievements. Although these achievements bring an individual character to the community, at the same time they are supposed to link it to the whole of humanity in the realm of the spirit. These spaces have been designed for the
Chapter 7 Reading in Process, the Antitext, and the Definition of Literature from:
Critical Practices in Post-Franco Spain
Author(s) Giefer Laura
Abstract: In a previous work, dedicated to a
theoría¹ of reading, I investigated the paradoxical movement that characterizes the relationship between the language of literary theory and that of literature. One of the core chapters of that work noted the characteristics of identity and difference that mediate between text and metatext. In dealing specifically with the question of difference, the problem of defining language or the literary text was brought to the foreground, a classical problem that was not addressed at the time because the investigation wandered along other paths. Nevertheless, the way was prepared for understanding that the question about
Chapter 8 Subjectivity and Temporality in Narrative from:
Critical Practices in Post-Franco Spain
Author(s) Meuser-Blincow Frances
Abstract: Recent studies of temporality in narrative texts resort, almost inevitably, to the distinction between time of the narration and time narrated. However, we must bear in mind that these temporalities do not usually exist as independent and separable entities. Such a dichotomy is intended to account for the
Chapter 3 Architectures of the Gaze from:
Critical Practices in Post-Franco Spain
Author(s) López Silvia L.
Abstract: I shall begin with something evident. Museums—in particular, fine arts museums—have become in modern societies, at least in those that became what they are under the revolutionary impulse of Enlightenment philosophy, an exemplary space in which unanimous commemoration can take place. They are a space where the secular ritual occurs, through which a community sanctions a number of cultural achievements. Although these achievements bring an individual character to the community, at the same time they are supposed to link it to the whole of humanity in the realm of the spirit. These spaces have been designed for the
Chapter 7 Reading in Process, the Antitext, and the Definition of Literature from:
Critical Practices in Post-Franco Spain
Author(s) Giefer Laura
Abstract: In a previous work, dedicated to a
theoría¹ of reading, I investigated the paradoxical movement that characterizes the relationship between the language of literary theory and that of literature. One of the core chapters of that work noted the characteristics of identity and difference that mediate between text and metatext. In dealing specifically with the question of difference, the problem of defining language or the literary text was brought to the foreground, a classical problem that was not addressed at the time because the investigation wandered along other paths. Nevertheless, the way was prepared for understanding that the question about
Chapter 8 Subjectivity and Temporality in Narrative from:
Critical Practices in Post-Franco Spain
Author(s) Meuser-Blincow Frances
Abstract: Recent studies of temporality in narrative texts resort, almost inevitably, to the distinction between time of the narration and time narrated. However, we must bear in mind that these temporalities do not usually exist as independent and separable entities. Such a dichotomy is intended to account for the
CHAPTER FOUR Women’s Difference in Contemporary Portuguese Fiction: from:
Utopias of Otherness
Abstract: The late twentieth century was a period of major historical transformations for Portugal. The single most important event was the April Revolution of 1974, which toppled the forty-year-old authoritarian Salazar/Caetano regime at the same time as it brought about the end of approximately five hundred years of Portuguese colonialism in Africa and Asia. Certainly, the end of Portuguese colonialism was the result of a historical dialectic between events in Portugal and the successful campaign of national liberation movements throughout Portuguese-speaking Africa and East Timor. Nonetheless, after a brief period of political turmoil, the April Revolution opened the path for the
2. “In dreams begin responsibilities”: from:
The Dreams of Interpretation
Author(s) Rabaté Jean-Michel
Abstract: In a dense passage of
Nadja, André Breton puzzles out a complex sequence of factors that account for his inexplicable fascination with a terrible play. Admitting that a bad melodrama entitled LesDétraquéeshad made a powerful impression on him, he narrates a disturbing dream he had at the time. The dream’s climax came when a moss-colored insect about twenty inches long slipped down into his throat until it was pulled out of his mouth by its huge hairy legs. Meditating on the nausea this still triggers in him, Breton tries to generalize, reflecting on the links between dreams and
17. The Marnie Color from:
The Dreams of Interpretation
Author(s) Bellour Raymond
Abstract: When I received a letter from the University of Minnesota inviting me to celebrate, with the end of the century, the publication of
The Interpretation of Dreams,I felt honored but mainly thrilled. I couldn’t help thinking back at that moment to when, very young and in a tiny hotel room in Munich, I read the book, at that time out of print, in the old translation of Ignace Meyerson,La Science des rêves,as it was called in French—a copy of which had been lent to me by my friend, the future French philosopher André Glucksmann. This turned
19. Wondrous Objectivity: from:
The Dreams of Interpretation
Author(s) McNamara Andrew
Abstract: While outlining a philosophy of “fine art,” Hegel offered some advice to the nascent discipline of art history. It could be summed up, more or less, as “stick to the facts.” Of course philosophy would forge the aesthetic-theoretical hardwiring of the field. If there had been a sufficient number of art historians at that time to constitute a discipline, this intellectual division of labor might have been understood as a grievous insult. The subsequent formation of the discipline shows that many art historians have indeed treated this as exemplary advice, and thus an extensive arm of art history has concerned
21. The Substance of Psychic Life from:
The Dreams of Interpretation
Author(s) Ball Karyn
Abstract: Over the years, the perceived impropriety of Freud’s emphasis on the sexual dimension of the unconscious has, in the United States at least, sometimes led to a complete negation of the value of his thought. The controversy in 1995–96 over plans for a national exhibit devoted to Freud’s work and influence is a telling instance of this suppression in the public sphere both within and beyond academia. To be sure, Freud himself sometimes felt compelled to qualify a few of the more scandalous aspects of his own thinking on sexuality, such as his initial belief in his patients’ statements
2. “In dreams begin responsibilities”: from:
The Dreams of Interpretation
Author(s) Rabaté Jean-Michel
Abstract: In a dense passage of
Nadja, André Breton puzzles out a complex sequence of factors that account for his inexplicable fascination with a terrible play. Admitting that a bad melodrama entitled LesDétraquéeshad made a powerful impression on him, he narrates a disturbing dream he had at the time. The dream’s climax came when a moss-colored insect about twenty inches long slipped down into his throat until it was pulled out of his mouth by its huge hairy legs. Meditating on the nausea this still triggers in him, Breton tries to generalize, reflecting on the links between dreams and
17. The Marnie Color from:
The Dreams of Interpretation
Author(s) Bellour Raymond
Abstract: When I received a letter from the University of Minnesota inviting me to celebrate, with the end of the century, the publication of
The Interpretation of Dreams,I felt honored but mainly thrilled. I couldn’t help thinking back at that moment to when, very young and in a tiny hotel room in Munich, I read the book, at that time out of print, in the old translation of Ignace Meyerson,La Science des rêves,as it was called in French—a copy of which had been lent to me by my friend, the future French philosopher André Glucksmann. This turned
19. Wondrous Objectivity: from:
The Dreams of Interpretation
Author(s) McNamara Andrew
Abstract: While outlining a philosophy of “fine art,” Hegel offered some advice to the nascent discipline of art history. It could be summed up, more or less, as “stick to the facts.” Of course philosophy would forge the aesthetic-theoretical hardwiring of the field. If there had been a sufficient number of art historians at that time to constitute a discipline, this intellectual division of labor might have been understood as a grievous insult. The subsequent formation of the discipline shows that many art historians have indeed treated this as exemplary advice, and thus an extensive arm of art history has concerned
21. The Substance of Psychic Life from:
The Dreams of Interpretation
Author(s) Ball Karyn
Abstract: Over the years, the perceived impropriety of Freud’s emphasis on the sexual dimension of the unconscious has, in the United States at least, sometimes led to a complete negation of the value of his thought. The controversy in 1995–96 over plans for a national exhibit devoted to Freud’s work and influence is a telling instance of this suppression in the public sphere both within and beyond academia. To be sure, Freud himself sometimes felt compelled to qualify a few of the more scandalous aspects of his own thinking on sexuality, such as his initial belief in his patients’ statements
Book Title: Philosophy Beside Itself-On Deconstruction and Modernism
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Marshall Donald
Abstract: The writings of French philosopher Jacques Derrida have been the single most powerful influence on critical theory and practice in the United States over the past decade. But with few exceptions American philosophers have taken little or no interest in Derrida’s work, and the task of reception, translation, and commentary has been left to literary critics. As a result, Derrida has appeared as a figure already defined by essentially literary critical activities and interests. Stephen Melville’s aim in Philosophy Beside Itself is to insist upon and clarify the distinctions between philosophy and criticism. He argues that until we grasp Derrida’s philosophical project as such, we remain fundamentally unable to see his significance for criticism. In terms derived from Stanley Cavell’s writings on modernism, Melville develops a case for Derrida as a modernist philosopher, working at once within and against that tradition and discipline. Melville first places Derrida in a Hegelian context, the structure of which he explores by examining the work of Heidegger, Lacan, and Bataille. With this foundation, he is able to reappraise the project of deconstructive criticism as developed in Paul de Man’s Blindness and Insight and further articulated by other Yale critics. Central to this critique is the ambivalent relationship between deconstructive criticism and Lacanian psychoanalysis. Criticism—radical self-criticism—is a central means through which the difficult facts of human community come to recognition, and Melville argues for criticism as an activity intimately bound to the ways in which we do and do not belong in time and in community. Derrida’s achievement has been to find a new and necessary way to assert that the task of philosophy is criticism; the task of literary criticism is to assume the burden of that achievement. Stephen Melville is an assistant professor of English at Syracuse University, and Donald Marshall is a professor of English at the University of Iowa.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctttt44r
Book Title: Philosophy Beside Itself-On Deconstruction and Modernism
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Marshall Donald
Abstract: The writings of French philosopher Jacques Derrida have been the single most powerful influence on critical theory and practice in the United States over the past decade. But with few exceptions American philosophers have taken little or no interest in Derrida’s work, and the task of reception, translation, and commentary has been left to literary critics. As a result, Derrida has appeared as a figure already defined by essentially literary critical activities and interests. Stephen Melville’s aim in Philosophy Beside Itself is to insist upon and clarify the distinctions between philosophy and criticism. He argues that until we grasp Derrida’s philosophical project as such, we remain fundamentally unable to see his significance for criticism. In terms derived from Stanley Cavell’s writings on modernism, Melville develops a case for Derrida as a modernist philosopher, working at once within and against that tradition and discipline. Melville first places Derrida in a Hegelian context, the structure of which he explores by examining the work of Heidegger, Lacan, and Bataille. With this foundation, he is able to reappraise the project of deconstructive criticism as developed in Paul de Man’s Blindness and Insight and further articulated by other Yale critics. Central to this critique is the ambivalent relationship between deconstructive criticism and Lacanian psychoanalysis. Criticism—radical self-criticism—is a central means through which the difficult facts of human community come to recognition, and Melville argues for criticism as an activity intimately bound to the ways in which we do and do not belong in time and in community. Derrida’s achievement has been to find a new and necessary way to assert that the task of philosophy is criticism; the task of literary criticism is to assume the burden of that achievement. Stephen Melville is an assistant professor of English at Syracuse University, and Donald Marshall is a professor of English at the University of Iowa.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctttt44r
Chapter 2 The Sinful Scene: from:
Bodies and Biases
Author(s) Lockhart Melissa A.
Abstract: This essay will be limited to the period of time between the years 1625 and 1685. During this time, moralists frequently attest to the presence of constant erotic transgressions on the baroque stage. In the distorted mirror of the merchants of morality of the seventeenth century, it seemed not only that Spanish theater of that period did not comply with the orthodoxy of decorum, but that it took pleasure in deviating from it.
Chapter 3 Desire and Decorum in the Twentieth-Century Colombian Novel from:
Bodies and Biases
Author(s) Vogt Eric W.
Abstract: There is one incessant history: the history of the body, the history of its adventures and misadventures. Throughout the life of their country, Colombian writers have narrated the history of the body, invoking different words and thus weaving this history in quite diverse ways. We propose here to narrate the history of these words, a more modest history, as are all those written in modern times.¹ This would have been impossible were it not for the extraordinary and sad atmosphere that has enveloped Colombia for many years. In fact, to attribute the debut of the body as an erotic object
Chapter 6 Popular Culture and Gender/Genre Construction in Mexican Bolero by Angeles Mastretta from:
Bodies and Biases
Author(s) Oropesa Salvador A.
Abstract: My hypothesis (Monsiváis 1992, Rebeil), in order to define the meaning of the term
Mexicanin the 1980s and 1990s (during the administrations of Miguel de la Madrid, 1982-88, and Carlos Salinas de Gortari, 1988-94), is that television² has to be considered as the chronotope where the termMexicanis being redefined. Television in Mexico is synonymous with Televisa³ (Provenemex is its editorial house). Televisa (“Televisión”) is a private company, almost a monopoly, that makes money through publicity by appealing to the demands of the Mexican population. At the same time, it has to comply with the duties imposed by
Chapter 9 Camilo’s Closet: from:
Bodies and Biases
Author(s) Brant Herbert J.
Abstract: Marco Denevi is one of Argentina’s most influential and important prose writers. One of the most distinctive features of his writing is the creation of a situation in which a presumed truth has been concealed with a mask. Consequently, in Denevi’s work there always seems to be an uneasy tension, a nagging suspicion that something is definitely not what it appears to be. As the reader proceeds through the narration, the numerous false facades that hide the unexpected and sometimes shocking truth lying underneath are slowly chipped away. Denevi’s numerous
informes(reports),vindicaciones(vindications), andversiones(versions) of people, historical
Chapter 13 The Pornographic Subject of Los borbones en pelota from:
Bodies and Biases
Author(s) Charnon-Deutsch Lou
Abstract: In 1991, Ediciones El Museo Universal published an album of 89 watercolors, originally titled
Los borbones en pelota,under the titleSem.The watercolors, signed “Sem” or “Semen” are thought to have been painted by Valeriano and Gustavo Bécquer, sometime during the period of 1868-69. The two dimensions of the Bécquer watercolors, the sexual and the political, intersect in important ways that have been touched on only briefly by commentators Lee Fontanella, Robert Pageard, and María Dolores Cabra Loredo, whose studies are included in theSemvolume. In the introduction to theSemcollection, an unnamed editor speculates that with
Chapter 15 Eroticism and Homoeroticism in Martín Fierro from:
Bodies and Biases
Author(s) Lockhart Melissa A.
Abstract: José Hernández (1824-86), with his
Martín Fierro(1872 and 1879), is undoubtedly the emblematic author of Argentine identity. Critics and cultural essayists have been unable to resist constructing around him a series of supposedly national and spiritual values concerning what it means to be Argentine. At the same time, they have established the canonical character of a genre known as the gauchesque.² The theme of the gaucho has passed through various stages of transformation, even though not all works of the era are considered to be part of the gauchesque genre: from Hilario Ascasubi (1807-75) to Bartolomé Hidalgo (1788-1822) and
Chapter 17 The Ecstasy of Disease: from:
Bodies and Biases
Author(s) Epps Brad
Abstract: What is at stake when the ravages of the flesh nourish the ecstasy of the letter? What happens when the metaphorical condensation of love and death, so essential to the mystico-poetic tradition, is realized, actualized, literalized? How do readers and writers situate themselves with respect to texts that communicate sickness, especially when the texts engage the discourse of divinity? Despite their seemingly timeless appeal, these and other questions acquire immediacy and urgency in the crisis of representation (Simon Watney) and the brutality of idealization (Leo Bersani) that mark the age of AIDS. Brutally critical indeed: for even as AIDS has
4 What, to the Leftist, Is a Good Story? from:
Abiding by Sri Lanka
Abstract: First, some brutal summaries of the French critique of history that perhaps belong in a previous chapter but could also serve as an introduction to this one. To Foucault (1973), history is not the working out of an objective process that the discipline merely reflects but the ground of, that which enables, the modern episteme. Take for instance, biology, a historical discipline if there ever was one: since its object is understood to change through time, it would be impossible without this ground (arche). To Althusser (1997), radically rereading Marx, the historicist notion of time as single/homogenous and continuous is
6 Literature and the Parables of Time from:
Calibrations
Abstract: Saint Augustine′s oft-quoted conundrum about time is recognizable in the quotidian round of everyday life. The clock is not always the best way to tell time′s passage, even though the most universal and convenient.¹ The passage of time is measured not just by the hands of the clock or annually in birthdays, but by registering impressions of seemingly mundane events such as the subtle furrows on one′s brow or on that of another, the unexpected loss of breath on climbing an accustomed stair, and the sudden encounter with long-lost acquaintances who suddenly bring back a flood of memory of our
INTRODUCTION: from:
Abolition’s Public Sphere
Abstract: William Lloyd Garrison operated literally in the forefront of the American abolition movement, soliciting subscribers and readers for his newspaper before there were organized, nonsectarian abolition societies. Inspired by the mass pamphleteering campaign of the English emancipation movement, he published the first issue of
The Liberatorin 1831 and thereafter linked the progress of the cause to the circulation of the newspaper and other printed articles. When the first national gathering of abolitionists did occur in 1833, he wrote aDeclaration of Sentimentsfor the American Anti-Slavery Society that committed the abolitionist agenda to the publicity campaign he was already
CONCLUSION: from:
Abolition’s Public Sphere
Abstract: In his most forceful abolitionist speeches, Douglass foresaw little future for the antislavery struggle other than a face-to-face encounter with racism. He meant the rhetorical enactment of still more “agitation” within the abolitionists’ public sphere to signal the incompatibility of the present with a narrative construction of progress and of unseen continuity with the past. Garrison, on the other hand, was so determined to put time on the abolitionists’ side that he actually looked forward to this state of antagonism. In his first public appearance on behalf of the cause, he presented the inevitable outcome of antislavery agitation—the virulent
[3] Toward a New Historiography: from:
Cinema’s Alchemist
Author(s) VAN ALPHEN ERNST
Abstract: Since the 1990s, the spread of memory practices in art and literature has been enormous. These memory practices manifest themselves not only around issues such as trauma, the Holocaust and other genocides, and migration but also in the increasing use of media and genres like photography, documentary film and video, the archive, and the family album. These memory practices form a specific aesthetics. The major question raised by this flourishing of memory practices is, should we see this as a celebration of memory, as a fin de siècle, and in the meantime a debut de siècle, as an expression of
[5] Historical Discourses of the Unimaginable: from:
Cinema’s Alchemist
Author(s) RENOV MICHAEL
Abstract: In 2000, the Foundation for Jewish Culture sponsored a “First Conference of American Jewish Film Festivals” in conjunction with the twentieth anniversary of the San Francisco Jewish Film Festival, the first of the American Jewish film festivals. One conference session devoted to “The Holocaust Film as Genre” was meant to grapple with the sometimes-uncomfortable fact that the Holocaust continues to be the source and subject of countless documentary films by Jewish makers. This obsessive return to the Shoah, generations after the event, is figured by some as an overinvestment in Jewish victimhood or an unwillingness to move on to other
[12] Taking the Part for the Whole: from:
Cinema’s Alchemist
Author(s) Evans David Robert
Abstract: Péter Forgács and Tibor Szemzö first became acquainted through stage and concert productions in the 1980s, the time of
Snapshot from the Island (Pillanatfelvétel a szigetröl).This 1987 record also includes another of Szemzö’s compositions,Water-Wonder N2 (Vizicsoda),which Forgács had previously used in a 1984 video work,The Golden Age (Aranykor).This was, in fact, the first occasion on which he employed Szemzö’s music. They later met as part of the Group 180(180-as Csoport),of which Szemzö was a founding member. It was here that Forgács participated (as narrator) in the performance of Frederic Rzewski’s compositionComing Together
[13] Analytical Spaces: from:
Cinema’s Alchemist
Author(s) Evans David Robert
Abstract: The installations of Péter Forgács are life spaces. In them, things evolve into space and inhabit it. Objects are brought to life that at first sight are completely inert. These installations are spaces of the soul. They make the invisible visible. Yet in the meantime, life falls into pieces, and its elements, far from being put together, are carefully spread out. These spaces are alive, yet whichever of them I step into, I am filled with a deadly sort of numbness. They hit me right in the face. Péter Forgács’s installations are disquieting; some are outright moving. Even in those
[3] Toward a New Historiography: from:
Cinema’s Alchemist
Author(s) VAN ALPHEN ERNST
Abstract: Since the 1990s, the spread of memory practices in art and literature has been enormous. These memory practices manifest themselves not only around issues such as trauma, the Holocaust and other genocides, and migration but also in the increasing use of media and genres like photography, documentary film and video, the archive, and the family album. These memory practices form a specific aesthetics. The major question raised by this flourishing of memory practices is, should we see this as a celebration of memory, as a fin de siècle, and in the meantime a debut de siècle, as an expression of
[5] Historical Discourses of the Unimaginable: from:
Cinema’s Alchemist
Author(s) RENOV MICHAEL
Abstract: In 2000, the Foundation for Jewish Culture sponsored a “First Conference of American Jewish Film Festivals” in conjunction with the twentieth anniversary of the San Francisco Jewish Film Festival, the first of the American Jewish film festivals. One conference session devoted to “The Holocaust Film as Genre” was meant to grapple with the sometimes-uncomfortable fact that the Holocaust continues to be the source and subject of countless documentary films by Jewish makers. This obsessive return to the Shoah, generations after the event, is figured by some as an overinvestment in Jewish victimhood or an unwillingness to move on to other
[12] Taking the Part for the Whole: from:
Cinema’s Alchemist
Author(s) Evans David Robert
Abstract: Péter Forgács and Tibor Szemzö first became acquainted through stage and concert productions in the 1980s, the time of
Snapshot from the Island (Pillanatfelvétel a szigetröl).This 1987 record also includes another of Szemzö’s compositions,Water-Wonder N2 (Vizicsoda),which Forgács had previously used in a 1984 video work,The Golden Age (Aranykor).This was, in fact, the first occasion on which he employed Szemzö’s music. They later met as part of the Group 180(180-as Csoport),of which Szemzö was a founding member. It was here that Forgács participated (as narrator) in the performance of Frederic Rzewski’s compositionComing Together
[13] Analytical Spaces: from:
Cinema’s Alchemist
Author(s) Evans David Robert
Abstract: The installations of Péter Forgács are life spaces. In them, things evolve into space and inhabit it. Objects are brought to life that at first sight are completely inert. These installations are spaces of the soul. They make the invisible visible. Yet in the meantime, life falls into pieces, and its elements, far from being put together, are carefully spread out. These spaces are alive, yet whichever of them I step into, I am filled with a deadly sort of numbness. They hit me right in the face. Péter Forgács’s installations are disquieting; some are outright moving. Even in those
Book Title: Compelling Visuality-The Work of Art in and out of History
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Zwijnenberg Robert
Abstract: Takes up the commonly unexplored question of what is actually present in art—what aspects have survived the vicissitudes of time. International and interdisciplinary, this volume conducts readers into a discussion of the significance of personal response to works of art. Contributors: F. R. Ankersmit, Mieke Bal, Oskar Bätschmann, Georges Didi-Huberman, Michael Ann Holly, Donald Preziosi, Renée van de Vall.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.cttttc70
CHAPTER TWO Before the Image, Before Time: from:
Compelling Visuality
Author(s) Mason Peter
Abstract: Whenever we are before the image, we are before time. Like the poor illiterate in Kafka’s story, we are before the image as
before the law: as before an open doorway. It hides nothing from us, all we need to do is enter, its light almost blinds us, holds us in submission. Its very opening—and I am not talking about the doorkeeper—holds us back: to look at it is to desire, to wait, to be before time. But what kind of time? What plasticities and fractures, what rhythms and jolts of time, can be at stake in this
CHAPTER THREE Aesthetics before Art: from:
Compelling Visuality
Author(s) Farago Claire
Abstract: As anyone who has ever attempted to act on a mirror image’s spatial cues knows, the logic of the looking glass is counterintuitive. Walking through time’s looking glass, as it were, in the opposite direction from contemporary understandings of science, religion, and art as three distinct domains, toward their fluid intersection in the early modern period, the following essay attempts to recapture a decidedly unmodern aspect of our artistic heritage. The aspects of Leonardo’s paintings that will be of concern here pertain to that elusive and troubling designation known as “style.” Meyer Schapiro associated “style,” in an article published in
CHAPTER FIVE Presence and Absence: from:
Compelling Visuality
Author(s) Zwijnenberg Robert
Abstract: There are paintings that fascinate anew every time you look at them, while it is not possible to describe clearly why these paintings are so fascinating or what they mean or signify. To me
Saint John the Baptist, painted by Leonardo da Vinci (1452–1519) after 1510, is such a painting. is such a painting.
Book Title: Covert Gestures-Crypto-Islamic Literature as Cultural Practice in Early Modern Spain
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Barletta Vincent
Abstract: Covert Gestures reveals how the traditional Islamic narratives of the moriscos both shaped and encoded a wide range of covert social activity characterized by a profound and persistent concern with time and temporality. Using a unique blend of literary analysis, linguistic anthropology, and phenomenological philosophy, Vincent Barletta explores the narratives as testimonials of past human experiences and discovers in them evidence of community resistance.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.cttttgdg
1 Toward an Activity-Centered Approach to Aljamiado-Morisco Narrative from:
Covert Gestures
Abstract: Literary critic Frank Kermode has argued, in an essay dealing with the relation between time and narrative, that “it is not expected of critics as it is of poets that they should help us to make sense of our lives; they are bound only to attempt the lesser feat of making sense of the ways we try to make sense of our lives” (2000, 3). The present book, a work of literary criticism, investigates the ways in which members of Morisco communities in sixteenth- and early seventeenth-century Castile and Aragon made use of handwritten traditional narratives to make sense of
4 The Prophet Is Born, Muslims Are Made from:
Covert Gestures
Abstract: In the previous chapters, I have mapped out a basic theoretical framework for an activity-centered approach to
aljamiado-moriscoliterature. Beginning with a discussion of the inherent interdisciplinarity of this mode of literary analysis, I concluded by defining what it means to place Morisco scribes and readers, as human agents, at the center of textual study. Rooted in what Gary Saul Morson has termed the “human dimension of time” (1994, 10), the activity-centered approach I am suggesting focuses on the uses to which Morisco readers and scribes putaljamiadotexts within their social world and the ways in which culturally embedded
Conclusions from:
Covert Gestures
Abstract: Turning briefly to more general questions involving textuality and time, we may present some of the specific questions
Book Title: Covert Gestures-Crypto-Islamic Literature as Cultural Practice in Early Modern Spain
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Barletta Vincent
Abstract: Covert Gestures reveals how the traditional Islamic narratives of the moriscos both shaped and encoded a wide range of covert social activity characterized by a profound and persistent concern with time and temporality. Using a unique blend of literary analysis, linguistic anthropology, and phenomenological philosophy, Vincent Barletta explores the narratives as testimonials of past human experiences and discovers in them evidence of community resistance.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.cttttgdg
1 Toward an Activity-Centered Approach to Aljamiado-Morisco Narrative from:
Covert Gestures
Abstract: Literary critic Frank Kermode has argued, in an essay dealing with the relation between time and narrative, that “it is not expected of critics as it is of poets that they should help us to make sense of our lives; they are bound only to attempt the lesser feat of making sense of the ways we try to make sense of our lives” (2000, 3). The present book, a work of literary criticism, investigates the ways in which members of Morisco communities in sixteenth- and early seventeenth-century Castile and Aragon made use of handwritten traditional narratives to make sense of
4 The Prophet Is Born, Muslims Are Made from:
Covert Gestures
Abstract: In the previous chapters, I have mapped out a basic theoretical framework for an activity-centered approach to
aljamiado-moriscoliterature. Beginning with a discussion of the inherent interdisciplinarity of this mode of literary analysis, I concluded by defining what it means to place Morisco scribes and readers, as human agents, at the center of textual study. Rooted in what Gary Saul Morson has termed the “human dimension of time” (1994, 10), the activity-centered approach I am suggesting focuses on the uses to which Morisco readers and scribes putaljamiadotexts within their social world and the ways in which culturally embedded
Conclusions from:
Covert Gestures
Abstract: Turning briefly to more general questions involving textuality and time, we may present some of the specific questions
9 The Nail That Came Out All the Way: from:
Narratives of Agency
Author(s) Morimoto Marie Thorsten
Abstract: At that time, another student, Hayashi Takeshi, was beginning his third year of high school in Chiba prefecture. Impressed by the incident at Tsukuba as an
9 The Nail That Came Out All the Way: from:
Narratives of Agency
Author(s) Morimoto Marie Thorsten
Abstract: At that time, another student, Hayashi Takeshi, was beginning his third year of high school in Chiba prefecture. Impressed by the incident at Tsukuba as an
Book Title: Out of Time-Desire in Atemporal Cinema
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): McGowan Todd
Abstract: In Out of Time, Todd McGowan takes as his starting point the emergence of a temporal aesthetic in cinema that arose in response to the digital era. Linking developments in cinema to current debates within philosophy, McGowan claims that films that change the viewer’s relation to time constitute a new cinematic mode: atemporal cinema.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.cttttprf
INTRODUCTION: from:
Out of Time
Abstract: The fundamental theoretical effort of the twentieth century was the attempt to integrate time into thought. Though there were anticipations of this effort in early centuries, the twentieth century is the époque when concern for time comes to the foreground across disparate intellectual and cultural arenas. This effort did not simply take time as an object of thought but instead worked to reveal the intrinsic temporality of both thought and being. Time had to become a matter of form and not just content. This theoretical endeavor manifested itself from the novels of Virginia Woolf and Marcel Proust to Albert Einstein’s
CHAPTER 1 Temporality after the End of Time in Pulp Fiction from:
Out of Time
Abstract: With
Reservoir Dogs(1992) andPulp Fiction(1994), Quentin Tarantino began the contemporary wave of atemporal cinema. This position at the front of the trend might seem to suggest Tarantino’s radicality: as the first, he offers the most decisive step that later filmmakers modify and thereby dilute. But Tarantino’s innovation, though it opens up widespread acceptance of the atemporal mode, actually remains focused on temporality rather than the break from it. In this sense, Tarantino does not belong to the atemporal mode proper but instead remains within traditional cinema’s privileging of the forward movement of time. He is the bridge
CHAPTER 4 The Path to Politics in The Constant Gardener from:
Out of Time
Abstract: The reconception of cinematic romance in
Eternal Sunshine of the Spotless Mind(Michel Gondry, 2004) undermines the typical fantasy that allows romance to serve an ideological function. But Gondry’s film leaves romance as the concern of two individuals. The love between Joel (Jim Carrey) and Clementine (Kate Winslet) undoubtedly has political implications, but the film doesn’t explore them. Instead, it focuses solely on configuring romance through antagonism rather than by attempting to surmount antagonism. This focus lies at the heart of the film’s effectiveness, and at the same time creates an opening for another film to lay out the political
CHAPTER 6 Timeless in Space: from:
Out of Time
Abstract: In the
Timaeus, Plato insists on an absolute distinction between time and eternity. The two are distinct to such an extent that they demand different forms of description: one should never employ the term “is” when talking about the temporal world in which everything becomes, just as one should never use “was” or “will be” when speaking of eternity in which nothing changes. Careless deployment of verb tense, according to Plato, leads to blurring the absolute nature of the distinction. Yet Plato nonetheless envisions a relationship between eternity and time in which time is “a moving image of eternity.”¹ Eternity
CHAPTER 8 The Temporal Flight from Trauma: from:
Out of Time
Abstract: Gaspar Noé’s
Irréversible(2002) bombards spectators with the immediacy of traumatic experience. At the time of its opening, it occasioned critical derision and prompted audience members to walk out at Cannes because of its unrelenting assault on the senses. J. Hoberman’s famously negative review in theVillage Voicecontends that the film indulges in “intentionally and successfully repellent nastiness” for no other point than nastiness itself.¹ In a review tellingly subtitled “Gaspar Noé’s Cinematic Rape,” David Edelstein claims thatIrréversible“wants to violate you in the most lasting ways imaginable.”² Even to this day, screenings of the film give rise
CONCLUSION: from:
Out of Time
Abstract: Grasping the foundational status of time requires acceding to finitude as our ultimate horizon. Just as artists, scientists, and philosophers of the twentieth century tried to integrate time into thought, they also attempted to affirm the inescapability of finitude. We reject temporality because we cannot accept finitude, and we construct the idea of eternity in order to avoid it.¹ Major philosophers and physicists of the twentieth century explain the denial of temporality in this manner. In
The Direction of Time, for instance, physicist Hans Reichenbach contends that our failure to properly understand time stems from our flight from death. He
Chapter 6 Into the Breach: from:
The Brain Is the Screen
Author(s) Restivo Angelo
Abstract: Gilles Deleuze′s work on the cinema is marked by a grand caesura, not only conceptually (movement-image giving way to time-image) and ″historiographically″ (World War II as the name for the historical moment of this giving way), but also, even,
materially. Because this division materializes—one might even go so far as to say ″dramatizes,″ or ″flaunts″—what some consider to be the work′s major flaw, an insufficient grounding in history, one could argue that perhaps this is a deliberate strategy. Perhaps, that is, the ″space″ between the classical cinema and the modern cinema occurs because what happened between the two
Chapter 9 Cinema and the Outside from:
The Brain Is the Screen
Author(s) Lambert Gregg
Abstract: One of the most important consequences of the direction taken by Gilles Deleuze in his two cinema books is not only to have raised the often neglected status of the cinematographic image as fundamental to any modern philosophy of time, but also to have situated the study of the image as crucial for discerning the link between the subject and thought that has evolved in the modern period around the problem of ideology. As a result of Deleuze′s inquiry into the cinematographic ″movement-image″ as basis for understanding the nature of this link, we are again compelled to consider the relationship
Chapter 6 Into the Breach: from:
The Brain Is the Screen
Author(s) Restivo Angelo
Abstract: Gilles Deleuze′s work on the cinema is marked by a grand caesura, not only conceptually (movement-image giving way to time-image) and ″historiographically″ (World War II as the name for the historical moment of this giving way), but also, even,
materially. Because this division materializes—one might even go so far as to say ″dramatizes,″ or ″flaunts″—what some consider to be the work′s major flaw, an insufficient grounding in history, one could argue that perhaps this is a deliberate strategy. Perhaps, that is, the ″space″ between the classical cinema and the modern cinema occurs because what happened between the two
Chapter 9 Cinema and the Outside from:
The Brain Is the Screen
Author(s) Lambert Gregg
Abstract: One of the most important consequences of the direction taken by Gilles Deleuze in his two cinema books is not only to have raised the often neglected status of the cinematographic image as fundamental to any modern philosophy of time, but also to have situated the study of the image as crucial for discerning the link between the subject and thought that has evolved in the modern period around the problem of ideology. As a result of Deleuze′s inquiry into the cinematographic ″movement-image″ as basis for understanding the nature of this link, we are again compelled to consider the relationship
5 Architecture Is Its Own Discipline from:
Discipline of Architecture
Author(s) Leatherbarrow David
Abstract: For architecture to remain significant in our time, it must redefine its basic subjects. That it is a discipline with its own subject matter can neither be assumed nor taken for granted because nowadays architecture is often seen as a practice that borrows methods and concepts from other fields, whether the natural or the social sciences, engineering, or the fine arts. This appropriation is neither by accident nor by fraudulent intent; for some time now, other professionals, engineers, landscape architects, and planners, have performed some of the skills that had traditionally defined the architect’s role, and have done so reliably.
5 Architecture Is Its Own Discipline from:
Discipline of Architecture
Author(s) Leatherbarrow David
Abstract: For architecture to remain significant in our time, it must redefine its basic subjects. That it is a discipline with its own subject matter can neither be assumed nor taken for granted because nowadays architecture is often seen as a practice that borrows methods and concepts from other fields, whether the natural or the social sciences, engineering, or the fine arts. This appropriation is neither by accident nor by fraudulent intent; for some time now, other professionals, engineers, landscape architects, and planners, have performed some of the skills that had traditionally defined the architect’s role, and have done so reliably.
Book Title: Labor of Dionysus-A Critique of the State-Form
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Negri Antonio
Abstract: “Labor is the living, form-giving fire,” Marx wrote. “It is the transitoriness of things, their temporality, as their transformation by living time.” How is it, then, that labor, with all its life-affirming potential, has become the means of capitalist discipline, exploitation, and domination in modern society? The authors expose and pursue this paradox through a systematic analysis of the role of labor in the processes of capitalist production and in the establishment of capitalist legal and social institutions. Critiquing liberal and socialist notions of labor and institutional reform from a radical democratic perspective, Hardt and Negri challenge the state-form itself.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.cttttrt5
1 Their Secret Elect from:
Without Offending Humans
Abstract: “The philosopher, the one the animal does not look at” . . . When, for the first time, I heard Jacques Derrida speak at the Collège de philosophie, directed at the time by Jean Wahl, I reacted, all things being relative, as Malebranche did upon reading Descartes’s
Treatise on Man:“His beating heart sometimes forced him to stop his reading,” writes Fontenelle. From that moment on, I did not take leave of this work nor of this man, even if it would often cause me distress to place myself in certain of his footsteps.
5 They Are Sleeping and We Are Watching over Them from:
Without Offending Humans
Abstract: For far too long, the animal question has been monopolized by the sole question of knowing whether or not animals benefit from those competencies related to the rational and reasonable norms men recognize as being within their capacity. At philosophical dramaturgy’s half-time, Descartes was the decisive agent for the excommunication of nonhuman living beings. In fact, for the majority of Greek and Latin authors, and then for Christians, the problematic of the
logoswas intimately tied to the problematic of justice. Animals,aloga,those who were not attributed withlogos,incapable of entering into a contract since they were lacking
Chapter 5 Evocation as a Literary Procedure in Don Quijote from:
Discourse Analysis as Sociocriticism
Abstract: Under the pretext, by no means original at that time, of parodying books of chivalry,
Don Quijoteemerges as a trueLiteraturroman.¹This dimension of Cervantes’s novel surfaces not only at the level of the story, as it relates the antics of a fool whose pathological distortions of his readings lead him to confuse fiction with reality, but also at the level of narration, which strictly speaking consists of a discursive and fictitious historical interplay between author, reader, and text.² In this manner, it can account both for its own production in the novel itself as well as for its
Chapter 5 Evocation as a Literary Procedure in Don Quijote from:
Discourse Analysis as Sociocriticism
Abstract: Under the pretext, by no means original at that time, of parodying books of chivalry,
Don Quijoteemerges as a trueLiteraturroman.¹This dimension of Cervantes’s novel surfaces not only at the level of the story, as it relates the antics of a fool whose pathological distortions of his readings lead him to confuse fiction with reality, but also at the level of narration, which strictly speaking consists of a discursive and fictitious historical interplay between author, reader, and text.² In this manner, it can account both for its own production in the novel itself as well as for its
1 Locational Hazards: from:
Notes on Nowhere
Abstract: In
Critique, Norm, and Utopia,Seyla Benhabib identifies the anticipatory/utopian pole within theories of social transformation as that which gives us our normative grounding and sense of a moral imperative, that which allows us to make qualitative judgments and to construct an orientation toward the good. In this way, Benhabib associates the Utopian impulse with what Ernst Bloch calls our “principle of hope”—our ability and desire to imagine something other and better than our existing conditions. At the same time, however, the Utopian impulse is characterized by a set of conservative logics and gestures that are increasingly seen as
Chapter 3 Narrative and Verbal Art: from:
Narrative as Communication
Abstract: So-called literary narrative is, at least in modern times and in urban, industrial societies, one of the grand categories of narrative communication, so central indeed, as we have already noted, that it has come to obfuscate the study and relevance of narrativeness in other semiotic systems, for example, film, television, advertising, photography, and drama, and appears as a model or a key antagonist for historiography, philosophy, and scientific Discourses. We must therefore try to determine the specific weight and implication of the concept “literary” in phrases like “literary narrative” and “literary work of art”; in other words, we have to
Chapter 5 Who’s Who and Who Does What in the Tale Told from:
Narrative as Communication
Abstract: Narrative meaning is concretized through the production and comprehension of narrative units of discourse (transactive and/or nontransactive narratemes) which involve noun phrases (NPs) as well as verb phrases (VPs). Moreover, the text of a linguistic narrative is also made of all sorts of discursemes that have subjects. It is now time to raise some of the many questions involved and propose some methodological directions in a field that has so often been obscured by ideological interests alien or opposed to a science of discourse.
Chapter 9 Narrative within Genres and Media from:
Narrative as Communication
Abstract: Between the formation/cognition of narrative discourse and the construction of narrative significance, there is still one important mediation to consider: that of genre as technê and sociohistorical constraint. In fact, if we had not taken genre into account, implicitly at least, every time we studied individual examples of acts of narrative communication and their texts, we would have made an intolerable qualitative leap from the level of generality at which our method of analysis was situated to particular concrete situations. The purpose of this chapter is to put genre to work as efficiently as possible within the process of theorization
A Primer of Restrictions on Picture– Taking in Traditional Areas of Aboriginal Australia [1986] from:
Bad Aboriginal Art
Abstract: TRADITIONAL PEOPLES’ first encounters with photography sometimes lead them to conclude that the camera is a dangerous, magical instrument capable of stealing some essential part of their being, causing illness or death. Generally such anecdotes are not explained but get filed away with other exotic superstitions held by curious primitives, leaving these people to sort out their own relationship to cameras, photographs, film, and now video. Traditional people sometimes follow through by taming the magical properties of recording media. For example, when missionaries and health workers banned the preservation and display of the bones of dead ancestors in Melanesian houses,
Bad Aboriginal Art [1988] from:
Bad Aboriginal Art
Abstract: DURING 1987 the Australian press reported frequently that Aboriginal art, especially Western Desert¹ acrylic “dot paintings,” had become flavor of the month in New York, Paris, and Munich. “Flavor of the month” is an odd descriptor Australians overuse to resolve the incompatibility of such reports of Australian success overseas with a cherished and characteristic myth of the second-rate, sometimes labeled “cultural cringe.” Indeed, Australia now has a suspiciously elaborate terminology for identifying the contradictions of colonialism and creativity. The notion of radical unoriginality is claimed to privilege this discourse, so that Sydney, for example, now asserts itself as the most
Postscript: from:
Bad Aboriginal Art
Abstract: IN MADONNA’S recent videoclip “Open Your Heart,” she performs as a stripper inside a room surrounded by spectator booths. The spectators presumably pay to view for a certain period of time; the blind on each window raises in turn; when the pay period is over, the blind descends. I hear there really are such facilities somewhere, one of the more bizarre variants of the commodification of desire predicted by Lenin as symptomatic of late capitalism. That citation may or may not interest Madonna. She probably would be more interested in what the set offers graphically to the audience for the
CHAPTER TWO Eucharistic Architecture from:
Architecture's Historical Turn
Abstract: In 1973, the University of Virginia awarded the prestigious Thomas Jefferson Memorial Foundation Medal to Jean Labatut for his lifetime contribution to the advancement of architecture.¹ Previous recipients included Ludwig Mies van der Rohe (1966), Alvar Aalto (1967), Marcel Breuer (1968), John Ely Burchard (1969), Kenzo Tange (1970), Jose Luis Sert (1971), and Lewis Mumford (1972). Labatut’s name has fallen into obscurity. But to his contemporaries, he was known as one of the most influential teachers of the mid-twentieth century in America. The Jefferson Medal recognized Labatut as a “teacher of teachers.” Indeed, his old Princeton student, J. Norwood Bosserman
CHAPTER TWO Eucharistic Architecture from:
Architecture's Historical Turn
Abstract: In 1973, the University of Virginia awarded the prestigious Thomas Jefferson Memorial Foundation Medal to Jean Labatut for his lifetime contribution to the advancement of architecture.¹ Previous recipients included Ludwig Mies van der Rohe (1966), Alvar Aalto (1967), Marcel Breuer (1968), John Ely Burchard (1969), Kenzo Tange (1970), Jose Luis Sert (1971), and Lewis Mumford (1972). Labatut’s name has fallen into obscurity. But to his contemporaries, he was known as one of the most influential teachers of the mid-twentieth century in America. The Jefferson Medal recognized Labatut as a “teacher of teachers.” Indeed, his old Princeton student, J. Norwood Bosserman
CHAPTER 1 Assembling the Book and Its Author from:
Assembling the Lyric Self
Abstract: In the thirteenth century, western Europe witnessed a sharp increase in vernacular literacy and the widespread appearance, for the first time since classical antiquity, of a large body of secular literature for popular consumption.¹ Some of the earliest surviving manuscripts of vernacular poetry are multiauthored, scribally compiled anthologies of troubadour lyric, composed in Old Occitan (also known as Old Provençal) and assembled around the middle of the century. Although the period of troubadour lyric production spans both the twelfth and thirteenth centuries, transmission had been predominantly oral—the texts were sung—and only the poets from the end of the
CHAPTER 5 Guiraut Riquier from:
Assembling the Lyric Self
Abstract: Let us temporarily abandon the thriving literary culture of Florence and neighboring cities and make a geographic leap back northward and westward to examine the work of a troubadour who frequently took as his subject matter the decline of Occitan culture in his time. Guiraut Riquier flourished from 1254 to 1290, roughly contemporary with Guittone d’Arezzo, and also appears to have compiled his work into an independent book.¹ At the bottom right-hand corner of folio 288r of troubadour ms. C (Bibliothèque Nationale Française 856), a neatly copied anthology of more than 1,200 troubadour poems compiled in the south of France
Latin England from:
Imagining a Medieval English Nation
Author(s) Galloway Andrew
Abstract: Thorlac Turville-Petre’s
England the Nation, linking English literary communities and anthologies with the emerging national status of the English language, calls out for a succession of appendices—or rather, in the spirit of his nondogmatic and open-ended work, with its provocatively pre-Ricardian stopping point, many further chapters, in what deserves to be a vast, collaborative project assessing the ideologies and contexts of national community in late medieval English-speaking areas.¹ A simple encompassing claim about nationalism in the period will not be satisfactory, but the time is long past when we can make a flat declaration that a pan-European Christian ideology
7 Making Nations: from:
Uses of the Other
Abstract: In Chapter 3, I showed how Peter the Great launched a successful campaign to re-present the eastern geographical border of Europe from the Don River to the Ural Mountains. Two nations whose lands thus became part of Europe are the Bashkirs and the Tatars. Bashkortostan is one of six republics of the Russian federation. It occupies an area of 3,214,000 square kilometers in the middle Volga and South Ural, usually labeled the Volga-Ural region.¹ Tatarstan, which neighbors Bashkortostan to the west, is another. Of the 4 million people living in Bashkortostan at the time of the last census in 1989,
5. Democracy and Territoriality from:
The Ethos of Pluralization
Abstract: In late modernity, the nostalgic idealism of territorial democracy fosters the nostalgic realism of international relations. And vice versa. The nostalgia is for a time in the past when the politics of place could be imagined as a coherent possibility for the future.
6. Tocqueville, Religiosity, and Pluralization from:
The Ethos of Pluralization
Abstract: Boundaries abound. Between humanity and the gods. Between human and animal. Between culture and nature. Between life and death. Between genders, nations, peoples, times, races, classes, and territories. But boundaries have also become problematic today, perhaps more so than before. In a world experienced by many to be without a natural design to which they might conform, the function of boundaries becomes highly ambiguous. Boundaries form indispensable protections against violation and violence; but the divisions they sustain also carry cruelty and violence. Boundaries provide preconditions of identity, individual agency, and collective action; but they also close off possibilities of being
2 THE DEFENSE OF NECESSITY from:
From Utopia to Apocalypse
Abstract: Toward the end of his response to Alexandre Kojève’s essay “Tyranny and Wisdom,” Leo Strauss gives a somewhat jocular twist to Marx and Engels’s famous call for the proletariat to unite and seize for themselves the reins of power. “Warriors and workers of all countries, unite, while there is time, to prevent the coming of the ‘realm of freedom.’ Defend, with might and main, if it needs to be defended, ‘the realm of necessity.’”¹ To a reader unfamiliar with the grounds of the debate between Strauss and Kojève over the meaning of Xenophon’s dialogue, “Hiero, or Tyrannicus,” the injunction to
Book Title: Avatars of Story- Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Ryan Marie-Laure
Abstract: Marie-Laure Ryan moves beyond literary works to examine other media, especially electronic narrative forms, revealing how story, a form of meaning that transcends cultures and media, achieves diversity by presenting itself under multiple avatars. Ryan considers texts such as the reality television show Survivor, the film The Truman Show, and software-driven hypertext fiction, and anticipates the time when media will provide new ways to experience stories.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctttv622
Book Title: Avatars of Story- Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Ryan Marie-Laure
Abstract: Marie-Laure Ryan moves beyond literary works to examine other media, especially electronic narrative forms, revealing how story, a form of meaning that transcends cultures and media, achieves diversity by presenting itself under multiple avatars. Ryan considers texts such as the reality television show Survivor, the film The Truman Show, and software-driven hypertext fiction, and anticipates the time when media will provide new ways to experience stories.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctttv622
1. AUTHENTIC TRAPPERS IN METAPHYSICAL PLAYROOMS from:
The Quay Brothers
Abstract: To watch any film from the Quay Brothers is to enter a complicity of furtive glances, choreographed shadows, and a mélange of motifs and tropes. Their opus exhibits an instantly recognizable and often emulated style, a shifting composite of chiaroscuro and an assemblage of obscure objects and fragmented, skeletal narrative structures. Their works are closer to music than to dialogue, closer to poetry than to literature, closer to experimental interior monologue than to conventional fictional narrative. The first-time viewer of any of the Quay Brothers’ films is often baffled by what seems to be the filmmakers’ apparent unconcern for coherence
Introduction: from:
Gameplay Mode
Abstract: Maxis’s 2008 computer game
Spore(Electronic Arts) offers a world of interactive play that tells us much about the world in which it jostles for position among competing digital entertainments. Designed by Will Wright, legendary designer of video game classicsSim City(Maxis, 1989) andThe Sims(Maxis, 2000), it is a game of many modes. Single-player play (including first-person, tactical, realtime, and turn-based strategy), asynchronous interactivity, user-generated content creation, and publishing are all built into the downloadable or packaged commodity. The player controls the development of a species from its beginnings as a single cell organism through stages of
Introduction: from:
Gameplay Mode
Abstract: Maxis’s 2008 computer game
Spore(Electronic Arts) offers a world of interactive play that tells us much about the world in which it jostles for position among competing digital entertainments. Designed by Will Wright, legendary designer of video game classicsSim City(Maxis, 1989) andThe Sims(Maxis, 2000), it is a game of many modes. Single-player play (including first-person, tactical, realtime, and turn-based strategy), asynchronous interactivity, user-generated content creation, and publishing are all built into the downloadable or packaged commodity. The player controls the development of a species from its beginnings as a single cell organism through stages of
EPILOGUE from:
Striking Beauty
Abstract: An aesthetic paradox of Asian martial arts is that something so warlike in conception should be beautiful to watch and joyful to perform. While designed for violence and visibly expressing that functionality, the martial arts are not practiced with a violent purpose and do no harm (although they certainly could). By suspending the dread of violence, the practice creates a theater in which to contemplate movements combining artful design with eloquent efficacy. But if you remove the training conventions and introduce unfeigned violence (as in boxing), the aesthetic serenity will vanish into the sometimes irrepressibly fascinating chaos of violence.
Book Title: Counter-Archive-Film, the Everyday, and Albert Kahn's Archives de la Planète
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): AMAD PAULA
Abstract: Tucked away in a garden on the edge of Paris is a multimedia archive like no other: Albert Kahn's
Archives de la Planète(1908-1931). Kahn's vast photo-cinematographic experiment preserved world memory through the privileged lens of everyday life, andCounter-Archivesituates this project in its biographic, intellectual, and cinematic contexts. Tracing the archive's key influences, such as the philosopher Henri Bergson, the geographer Jean Brunhes, and the biologist Jean Comandon, Paula Amad maps an alternative landscape of French cultural modernity in which vitalist philosophy cross-pollinated with early film theory, documentary film with the avant-garde, cinematic models of temporality with the early Annales school of history, and film's appropriation of the planet with human geography and colonial ideology. At the heart of the book is an insightful meditation upon the transformed concept of the archive in the age of cinema and an innovative argument about film's counter-archival challenge to history. The first comprehensive study of Kahn's films,Counter-Archivealso offers a vital historical perspective on debates involving archives, media, and memory.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/amad13500
INTRODUCTION from:
Counter-Archive
Abstract: Most archives incite a fascination with a return to origins, beginnings, and sources. Yet they may also direct our attention in the opposite direction, toward an uncertain future. At the conception of every archive—traditionally understood as a repository for state, unpublished records no longer in use—there resides a gamble with time in general. The archive bets on its indispensability not only to the present (soon-to-be-past), but, more importantly, to the future, in the hope that its salvaged documents will be remembered, consulted, and studied. The researcher in the present, who is always removed from the archive’s own original
2 “KEEP YOUR EYES OPEN” from:
Counter-Archive
Abstract: In the opening pages of
Tristes Tropiques, Claude Lévi-Strauss recalls with a mixture of embarrassment and nostalgia the poorly attended anthropological lectures held weekly at Paris’s zoological museum in the 1920s. He drags out this half-forgotten scene of amateurishly illustrated lectures in the “dilapidated amphitheatre” of Paris’s Jardin des Plantes with a view to criticizing the more professionalized and mediated travel lectures that filled the Salle Pleyel in the 1950s. Lévi-Strauss’s distaste for the latter venue—whose commercial travel lectures were similarly targeted for criticism around the same time by André Bazin in an essay (“Cinema and Exploration”) that praised
5 THE “ANECDOTAL SIDE OF HISTORY” from:
Counter-Archive
Abstract: Beyond its photographic capacities, film’s arrival on the cusp of the twentieth century introduced for the first time the means for recording, storing, and reproducing motion—in other words, events as they unfolded in the fullness of time. Seizing upon the archival possibilities of this revolution in the recording of kinetic phenomena, Kahn and his collaborators adapted the positivist model of the nineteenth-century archive by incorporating into it the media of the twentieth century. As a result, they ended up mounting a threat to that model by virtue of the manifest counter-archival tendencies in film and the latent instability within
8 THE AERIAL VIEW from:
Counter-Archive
Abstract: If the microscopic view provided a privileged vantage point for rediscovering the everyday in early French film theory, then its opposite, the aerial view, held a similarly privileged role in the rediscovery of the earth for human geography. In the above passage from Jean Brunhes’ major work,
Géographie humaine (1910), he summons his readers like a latter-day Jules Verne to accompany him on an “imaginary” ride above the earth, where the “facts” of human geography will for the first time appear fully to the human eye, or “better still,” to the “photographic plate.” Much like the visual revolution announced by
CONCLUSION TOUTE LA MÉMOIRE DU MONDE: from:
Counter-Archive
Abstract: Siegfried kracauer’s recollection of Fernand Léger’s 1931 dream of a “monster film” in which every single moment of a day in the life of a couple would be recorded without their knowledge presents a dystopian version of the quest to archive everyday life that motivated Albert Kahn’s Archives de la Planète.³ This book has explored the two extremes of film’s archival longing for the everyday as figured literally in the Archives de la Planète and conceptually in the discursive context engendering Léger’s “monster film.” At one extreme this desire expected to unite humanity through a multimedia visual inventory of daily
Book Title: Roberto Bolaño's Fiction-An Expanding Universe
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): ANDREWS CHRIS
Abstract: Andrews provides new readings and interpretations of Bolaño's novels, including
2666,The Savage Detectives, andBy Night in Chilewhile at the same time examining the ideas and narrative strategies that unify his work. He begins with a consideration of the reception of Bolaño's fiction in English translation, examining the reasons behind its popularity. Subsequent chapters explore aspects of Bolaño's fictional universe and the political, ethical, and aesthetic values that shape it. Bolaño emerges as the inventor of a prodigiously effective "fiction-making system," a subtle handler of suspense, a chronicler of aimlessness, a celebrator of courage, an anatomist of evil, and a proponent of youthful openness. Written in a clear and engaging style,Roberto's Bolano's Fictionoffers an invaluable understanding of one of the most important authors of the last thirty years.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/andr16806
3 SOMETHING IS GOING TO HAPPEN: from:
Roberto Bolaño's Fiction
Abstract: Many modern novelists, at one time or another, have felt that storytelling is a tedious obligation, a regrettable concession to popular taste. Writing to Louise Colet in 1852, Flaubert reflected wistfully, “What seems beautiful to me, what I should like to write, is a book about nothing, a book dependent on nothing external, which would be held together by the internal strength of its style.”¹ In the first of his Clark lectures, given in 1927, E. M. Forster imagined three voices answering the question, “What does a novel do?” The third voice, his own, says regretfully, “Yes, oh dear yes,
FOUR Commitment and the Scene of War: from:
Modernist Commitments
Abstract: “It is not easy to convey the nightmare atmosphere of that time,”¹ George Orwell wrote of the period in 1937 when the course of the Spanish Civil War became more grim and political repression from the left in Barcelona complicated the differentiation of right and wrong for both sides. But despite the nightmarish conditions and the difficulty in getting the story correct, writers were drawn to the Spanish Civil War in great numbers, churning out narratives, poems, and newspaper dispatches with astonishing regularity from the outbreak of war in 1936 until well into the postwar period.² For Englishlanguage readers, the
FOUR Commitment and the Scene of War: from:
Modernist Commitments
Abstract: “It is not easy to convey the nightmare atmosphere of that time,”¹ George Orwell wrote of the period in 1937 when the course of the Spanish Civil War became more grim and political repression from the left in Barcelona complicated the differentiation of right and wrong for both sides. But despite the nightmarish conditions and the difficulty in getting the story correct, writers were drawn to the Spanish Civil War in great numbers, churning out narratives, poems, and newspaper dispatches with astonishing regularity from the outbreak of war in 1936 until well into the postwar period.² For Englishlanguage readers, the
3 INSURRECTIONIST RISK (PAUL AMONG THE PARRHESIASTS) from:
A Materialism for the Masses
Abstract: PHILOSOPHY HAS ALWAYS BEEN EXEMPLARY IN ITS CAPACITIES TO conjure a feeling of being stuck between a necessity and an impossibility of articulating responsibility for the common, for a communal life this collective would itself call good. In recent years the very delicate—and sometimes hesitating or ironic—resurgence of communism as a topic for political theory remains within the orbit of this aspect of the genius, that juicy little
daimōn, constituting the ongoing vibrancy of philosophy. As is made clear by the awkward efforts to say the name of the common without repeating inherited and readily recognizable philosophico-political disasters,
5 SEIZURES OF CHANCE: from:
A Materialism for the Masses
Abstract: IN MANY WAYS AND NECESSARILY TO MULTIPLE ENDS, IT IS THE moment to seize upon an opportunity to (re)stage a work that the great Pasolini, by chance, could not himself fund. If so, our own putting into place of imaginary mises-en-scènes for a screenplay Pasolini left behind would immediately set in motion a complex comparative machinery, whirring away to effect an operational wonder about the now-time within which chance occasions and imaginary props afford a chance to bring a screenplay, not to mention an apostle, to life again. In fact, Pasolini wrote in his notes for a screenplay (written in
Book Title: Reclaiming the Enlightenment-Toward a Politics of Radical Engagement
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): BRONNER STEPHEN ERIC
Abstract: With its championing of democracy, equality, cosmopolitanism, and reason -- and its vociferous attacks on popular prejudice, religious superstition, and arbitrary abuses of power -- the Enlightenment was once hailed as the foundation of all modern, progressive politics. But in 1947, this perspective was dramatically undermined when Max Horkheimer and Theodor Adorno published their classic work,
Dialectic of Enlightenment, which claims that the Enlightenment was the source of totalitarianism and the worst excesses of modernity. Reclaiming the Enlightenment from purely philosophical and cultural interpretations, Bronner shows that its notion of political engagement keeps democracy fresh and alive by providing a practical foundation for fostering institutional accountability, opposing infringements on individual rights, instilling an enduring commitment to social reform, and building a cosmopolitan sensibility. This forceful and timely reinterpretation of the Enlightenment and its powerful influence on contemporary political life is a resounding wake-up call to critics on both the left and the right.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/bron12608
4 THE GREAT DIVIDE: from:
Reclaiming the Enlightenment
Abstract: The Enlightenment celebrated the intellect and its representatives provided a new understanding of the intellectual. In earlier times, of course, intellectuals questioned the strictures of religious and political tradition. Some of them even served as the conscience of their epochs. But the self-perception of the intellectual as both the critic and the reformer of society, as committed to a communal project of social change, is the legacy of what the philosophe Pierre Bayle first called the “republic of letters.” Its citizens would endeavor to address popular audiences in addition to academic ones. They fervently believed that “the most fundamental ideas
9 RENEWING THE LEGACY: from:
Reclaiming the Enlightenment
Abstract: A new world presents itself with the new millennium: time is obliterating the limitations of space and the boundaries of community. Globalization is spreading the commodity form to the most remote regions of the world; transnational organizations are dwarfing the nationstate; travel is becoming easier; religions are multiplying; intermarriage is on the rise; new communications and information technologies are rendering the world more transparent. But there is no need to be overly optimistic. Numerous parochial religious, ethnic, and nationalist organizations are arrayed—as they always have been—against the assault on traditionalism. Understandable is their fear of the economic inequality
Book Title: The Habermas Handbook- Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): LAFONT CRISTINA
Abstract: Jürgen Habermas is one of the most influential philosophers of our time. His diagnoses of contemporary society and concepts such as the public sphere, communicative rationality, and cosmopolitanism have influenced virtually all academic disciplines, spurred political debates, and shaped intellectual life in Germany and beyond for more than fifty years. In
The
Habermas Handbook, leading Habermas scholars elucidate his thought, providing essential insight into his key concepts, the breadth of his work, and his influence across politics, law, the social sciences, and public life.This volume offers a comprehensive overview and an in-depth analysis of Habermas's work in its entirety. After examining his intellectual biography, it goes on to illuminate the social and intellectual context of Habermasian thought, such as the Frankfurt School, speech-act theory, and contending theories of democracy. TheHandbookprovides an extensive account of Habermas's texts, ranging from his dissertation on Schelling to his most recent writing about Europe. It illustrates the development of his thought and its frequently controversial reception while elaborating the central ideas of his work. The book also provides a glossary of key terms and concepts, making the complexity of Habermas's thought accessible to a broad readership.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/brun16642
11 THE EPITOME OF TECHNOCRATIC CONSCIOUSNESS from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) NEVES MARCELO
Abstract: The debate between Habermas and Luhmann goes back to the end of the 1960s—a time of extreme “ideological” confrontation in the fields of social science and philosophy. Matters became especially intense upon the publication of
Theorie der Gesellschaft oder Sozialtechnologie—Was leistet die Systemforschung?(Social theory or social technology—what does systems research accomplish?; Habermas and Luhmann 1971). This book occasioned heated discussion and, in almost no time at all, two supplementary volumes. Over the years, the matter has grown more complex inasmuch as Habermas has tempered his earlier criticism on a few points—or, at the very least,
12 EVOLUTIONARY THEORIES from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) EDER KLAUS
Abstract: The theory of social evolution plays a key role in the foundation of Habermas’s theory of communicative action. Since Marx, the evolutionary perspective has struggled with the fact that the position the observer occupies must necessarily be, at the same time, the endpoint of the process in question—and therefore a point of teleological narrowness restricting the scope of social theory. Over time, this problem has lost none of its actuality for projects that seek to address processes of societal development. Durkheim, for example, was wedded to the model of phase-specific progression as much as, more recently, Parsons, Luhmann, and
21 POSTSTRUCTURALISM from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) ALLEN AMY
Abstract: Habermas’s critical engagement with postmodernism not only generated a great deal of attention in the 1980s and 1990s, but it has also laid down the gauntlet for a new generation of critical theorists who may now take on the task of rethinking Habermas’s stark opposition between pro-Enlightenment modernity and counter-Enlightenment postmodernity. Habermas’s critique of postmodernism goes hand in hand with his staunch defense of the normative content of modernity. Both are most forcefully articulated in his 1985 book
The Philosophical Discourse of Modernity. Although Habermas’s interpretations of particular thinkers in this book are at times questionable, the book’s overall thesis
26 SCHELLING, MARX, AND THE PHILOSOPHY OF HISTORY: from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) FRANK MANFRED
Abstract: When, in the mid-1950s, new interest for Schelling’s philosophy arose—especially its middle and late phases—Jürgen Habermas stood at the forefront; he was the youngest (and the first) scholar to base his interpretation on “contradictoriness” (
Zwiespältigkeit). A year later, Karl Jaspers followed his lead and publishedGrösse und Verhängnis(Greatness and disaster); this book held that Schelling had anticipated the central ambivalence of Heideggerian philosophy—more specifically, “the transition from greatness to [empty] gesture, from truth to absurdity, from clear communication to magic” (Jaspers 1955, 7; cf.Profiles, 45–52). Around the same time, Georg Lukács declared that the
35 THE THEORY OF SOCIETY: from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) STRECKER DAVID
Abstract: Key to the social philosophy of Jürgen Habermas is his deeply held conviction that social evolution represents a history of progress in principle while at the same time—and as a matter of actual fact—being the cause of grave social ills. His project is shaped, then, by an awareness of suffering and crisis—matters that do not even occur to neoconservative and neoliberal modernizers, entranced as they are by technical and economic development. Simultaneously, he maintains critical distance from parties who, when faced with the catastrophes that modernity has produced, take flight for archaic utopias. In fleshing out this
38 DEMOCRACY, LAW, AND SOCIETY: from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) MÖLLERS CHRISTOPH
Abstract: Habermas’s legal theory must be understood as part of a much larger project that combines theoretical and practical philosophy in an uncommonly thorough way for the twentieth and twenty-first centuries. Habermas (in
Truth) has lamented the fact that, in a landscape increasingly distinguished by the division of academic labor, the two perspectives have grown more and more separate (for an expressly different view, see Rawls 2005, 372ff.). At the same time, his writings have proved that this need not be the case. Habermas was interested in matters of political theory from the first, even if he came to address them
46 COMMUNICATIVE ANTHROPOLOGY from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) JÖRKE DIRK
Abstract: Habermas’s engagement with the questions posed by anthropology began during his university studies—when he evinced skepticism about efforts to determine the unchanging qualities of human nature. He presented his reflections in an encyclopedia article (1958) that received broad attention at the time. According to Otfried Höffe (1992), this piece is responsible for the hegemony of “postanthropological thinking” that prevailed in the “human sciences” until the 1990s (7). In keeping with the conventions of the genre, the first part of Habermas’s encyclopedia entry provides an introductory overview of the history and essential concepts of anthropological thought; the second part, however,
59 IDEOLOGY from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) SAAR MARTIN
Abstract: In Habermas’s works, the concept of ideology displays multiple—and polyvalent—aspects. It features prominently as one of the central categories in his account of Marxism—above all, in his early discussions of the project of critical theory as it was first conceived. The matter continues to be of central importance in Habermas’s discussions of “late capitalism,” where he seeks to offer a political-sociological diagnosis of the times. However, in the course of the author’s turn to the theory of communication, which crucially revises his approach to critical social analysis, ideology offers a point of reference less and less; in
62 LEARNING PROCESSES from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) NUNNER-WINKLER GERTRUD
Abstract: Unlike genetically determined changes that occur in the process of maturation, changes through learning result from experience. By definition, learning processes—because they occur over a longer period of time—are distinct from punctual instances of learning (“imprinting”). As Habermas defines them, they do not refer to the acquisition of motor skills (for example, swimming), simple cultural aptitudes (
Kulturtechniken), or narrowly delimited systems of knowledge (for example, reading and writing or mathematical abilities). Instead, learning processes concern the formation of the (cognitive or moral) capacity of judgment.
Book Title: The Habermas Handbook- Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): LAFONT CRISTINA
Abstract: Jürgen Habermas is one of the most influential philosophers of our time. His diagnoses of contemporary society and concepts such as the public sphere, communicative rationality, and cosmopolitanism have influenced virtually all academic disciplines, spurred political debates, and shaped intellectual life in Germany and beyond for more than fifty years. In
The
Habermas Handbook, leading Habermas scholars elucidate his thought, providing essential insight into his key concepts, the breadth of his work, and his influence across politics, law, the social sciences, and public life.This volume offers a comprehensive overview and an in-depth analysis of Habermas's work in its entirety. After examining his intellectual biography, it goes on to illuminate the social and intellectual context of Habermasian thought, such as the Frankfurt School, speech-act theory, and contending theories of democracy. TheHandbookprovides an extensive account of Habermas's texts, ranging from his dissertation on Schelling to his most recent writing about Europe. It illustrates the development of his thought and its frequently controversial reception while elaborating the central ideas of his work. The book also provides a glossary of key terms and concepts, making the complexity of Habermas's thought accessible to a broad readership.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/brun16642
11 THE EPITOME OF TECHNOCRATIC CONSCIOUSNESS from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) NEVES MARCELO
Abstract: The debate between Habermas and Luhmann goes back to the end of the 1960s—a time of extreme “ideological” confrontation in the fields of social science and philosophy. Matters became especially intense upon the publication of
Theorie der Gesellschaft oder Sozialtechnologie—Was leistet die Systemforschung?(Social theory or social technology—what does systems research accomplish?; Habermas and Luhmann 1971). This book occasioned heated discussion and, in almost no time at all, two supplementary volumes. Over the years, the matter has grown more complex inasmuch as Habermas has tempered his earlier criticism on a few points—or, at the very least,
12 EVOLUTIONARY THEORIES from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) EDER KLAUS
Abstract: The theory of social evolution plays a key role in the foundation of Habermas’s theory of communicative action. Since Marx, the evolutionary perspective has struggled with the fact that the position the observer occupies must necessarily be, at the same time, the endpoint of the process in question—and therefore a point of teleological narrowness restricting the scope of social theory. Over time, this problem has lost none of its actuality for projects that seek to address processes of societal development. Durkheim, for example, was wedded to the model of phase-specific progression as much as, more recently, Parsons, Luhmann, and
21 POSTSTRUCTURALISM from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) ALLEN AMY
Abstract: Habermas’s critical engagement with postmodernism not only generated a great deal of attention in the 1980s and 1990s, but it has also laid down the gauntlet for a new generation of critical theorists who may now take on the task of rethinking Habermas’s stark opposition between pro-Enlightenment modernity and counter-Enlightenment postmodernity. Habermas’s critique of postmodernism goes hand in hand with his staunch defense of the normative content of modernity. Both are most forcefully articulated in his 1985 book
The Philosophical Discourse of Modernity. Although Habermas’s interpretations of particular thinkers in this book are at times questionable, the book’s overall thesis
26 SCHELLING, MARX, AND THE PHILOSOPHY OF HISTORY: from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) FRANK MANFRED
Abstract: When, in the mid-1950s, new interest for Schelling’s philosophy arose—especially its middle and late phases—Jürgen Habermas stood at the forefront; he was the youngest (and the first) scholar to base his interpretation on “contradictoriness” (
Zwiespältigkeit). A year later, Karl Jaspers followed his lead and publishedGrösse und Verhängnis(Greatness and disaster); this book held that Schelling had anticipated the central ambivalence of Heideggerian philosophy—more specifically, “the transition from greatness to [empty] gesture, from truth to absurdity, from clear communication to magic” (Jaspers 1955, 7; cf.Profiles, 45–52). Around the same time, Georg Lukács declared that the
35 THE THEORY OF SOCIETY: from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) STRECKER DAVID
Abstract: Key to the social philosophy of Jürgen Habermas is his deeply held conviction that social evolution represents a history of progress in principle while at the same time—and as a matter of actual fact—being the cause of grave social ills. His project is shaped, then, by an awareness of suffering and crisis—matters that do not even occur to neoconservative and neoliberal modernizers, entranced as they are by technical and economic development. Simultaneously, he maintains critical distance from parties who, when faced with the catastrophes that modernity has produced, take flight for archaic utopias. In fleshing out this
38 DEMOCRACY, LAW, AND SOCIETY: from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) MÖLLERS CHRISTOPH
Abstract: Habermas’s legal theory must be understood as part of a much larger project that combines theoretical and practical philosophy in an uncommonly thorough way for the twentieth and twenty-first centuries. Habermas (in
Truth) has lamented the fact that, in a landscape increasingly distinguished by the division of academic labor, the two perspectives have grown more and more separate (for an expressly different view, see Rawls 2005, 372ff.). At the same time, his writings have proved that this need not be the case. Habermas was interested in matters of political theory from the first, even if he came to address them
46 COMMUNICATIVE ANTHROPOLOGY from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) JÖRKE DIRK
Abstract: Habermas’s engagement with the questions posed by anthropology began during his university studies—when he evinced skepticism about efforts to determine the unchanging qualities of human nature. He presented his reflections in an encyclopedia article (1958) that received broad attention at the time. According to Otfried Höffe (1992), this piece is responsible for the hegemony of “postanthropological thinking” that prevailed in the “human sciences” until the 1990s (7). In keeping with the conventions of the genre, the first part of Habermas’s encyclopedia entry provides an introductory overview of the history and essential concepts of anthropological thought; the second part, however,
59 IDEOLOGY from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) SAAR MARTIN
Abstract: In Habermas’s works, the concept of ideology displays multiple—and polyvalent—aspects. It features prominently as one of the central categories in his account of Marxism—above all, in his early discussions of the project of critical theory as it was first conceived. The matter continues to be of central importance in Habermas’s discussions of “late capitalism,” where he seeks to offer a political-sociological diagnosis of the times. However, in the course of the author’s turn to the theory of communication, which crucially revises his approach to critical social analysis, ideology offers a point of reference less and less; in
62 LEARNING PROCESSES from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) NUNNER-WINKLER GERTRUD
Abstract: Unlike genetically determined changes that occur in the process of maturation, changes through learning result from experience. By definition, learning processes—because they occur over a longer period of time—are distinct from punctual instances of learning (“imprinting”). As Habermas defines them, they do not refer to the acquisition of motor skills (for example, swimming), simple cultural aptitudes (
Kulturtechniken), or narrowly delimited systems of knowledge (for example, reading and writing or mathematical abilities). Instead, learning processes concern the formation of the (cognitive or moral) capacity of judgment.
Book Title: Randall Jarrell and His Age- Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Burt Stephen
Abstract: Burt's book examines all of Jarrell's work, incorporating new research based on previously undiscovered essays and poems. Other books have examined Jarrell's poetry in biographical or formal terms, but none have considered both his aesthetic choices and their social contexts. Beginning with an overview of Jarrell's life and loves, Burt argues that Jarrell's poetry responded to the political questions of the 1930s, the anxieties and social constraints of wartime America, and the apparent prosperity, domestic ideals, and professional ideology that characterized the 1950s. Jarrell's work is peopled by helpless soldiers, anxious suburban children, trapped housewives, and lonely consumers.
Randall Jarrell and His Agesituates the poet-critic among his peers -- including Bishop, Lowell, and Arendt -- in literature and cultural criticism. Burt considers the ways in which Jarrell's efforts and achievements encompassed the concerns of his time, from teen culture to World War II to the Cuban Missile Crisis; the book asks, too, how those efforts might speak to us now.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/burt12594
Book Title: Randall Jarrell and His Age- Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Burt Stephen
Abstract: Burt's book examines all of Jarrell's work, incorporating new research based on previously undiscovered essays and poems. Other books have examined Jarrell's poetry in biographical or formal terms, but none have considered both his aesthetic choices and their social contexts. Beginning with an overview of Jarrell's life and loves, Burt argues that Jarrell's poetry responded to the political questions of the 1930s, the anxieties and social constraints of wartime America, and the apparent prosperity, domestic ideals, and professional ideology that characterized the 1950s. Jarrell's work is peopled by helpless soldiers, anxious suburban children, trapped housewives, and lonely consumers.
Randall Jarrell and His Agesituates the poet-critic among his peers -- including Bishop, Lowell, and Arendt -- in literature and cultural criticism. Burt considers the ways in which Jarrell's efforts and achievements encompassed the concerns of his time, from teen culture to World War II to the Cuban Missile Crisis; the book asks, too, how those efforts might speak to us now.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/burt12594
INTRODUCTION: from:
Political Uses of Utopia
Author(s) INGRAM JAMES D.
Abstract: Utopia, we might think, is nothing if not political. Its best-known examples, from Plato via More, Campanella, and Bacon to Owen, Morris, and Bellamy, present cities, the political form of life par excellence, organized to remedy the defects their authors perceived in their own. To this extent they offer up political solutions to political problems. At the same time, however, utopias are forever being criticized for seeking to escape or eliminate politics, and not without reason. For if utopias present solutions to political problems, by building the common good into the design of the worlds they depict, they do away
5 GENERAL WISH OR GENERAL WILL? from:
Political Uses of Utopia
Author(s) HALLWARD PETER
Abstract: In well-run oligarchic societies, the best and simplest way to dismiss egalitarian challenges has long been to deride them as impracticable or “utopian”—and I use the word “utopian” here in the most banal sense, to mean an abstract notion or project that might be viable only in another place or time, or if undertaken by actors unlike ourselves.¹ A society without exploitation, hierarchy, or discrimination might be all very well in theory, but appropriately maintained ideological reflexes ensure that everyone knows that such fancies are not feasible in practice, here and now. Egalitarian ideals seem too demanding for selfish
7 A STRANGE FATE FOR POLITICS: from:
Political Uses of Utopia
Author(s) GRANT JOHN
Abstract: Must utopia remain utopian, or can it be achieved without at the same time announcing its own end? This question helps to orient an examination of Fredric Jameson’s engagement with utopia and the critical insights about society that come with it. In early work such as “Reification and Utopia in Mass Culture” (1979), Jameson articulates how cultural artifacts contain twin utopian and ideological components, with the latter never managing to preclude the former. In more recent work such as “The Politics of Utopia” (2004), Jameson claims that utopian thinking flourishes when we find politics has been suspended. This raises a
One Innovating Ourselves from:
Neopoetics
Abstract: Since the evolution of speech, writing has arguably been our species’ most consequential innovation. By “innovation” I mean any successful, alternative way of doing something. Some of these changes were the result of gene mutation, the prime factor in natural selection, as over time alternative procedures aided their users to survive and reproduce and were thereby passed along to their descendants. Other innovations, learned by imitation, were transmitted through cultural evolution. Nonhuman animals show little or no capacity for innovation. Our nearest evolutionary cousins, the chimpanzees, for example, have the innate ability to hurl things, yet they cannot learn how
Three The Dancing, Singing Daughters of Memory from:
Neopoetics
Abstract: Storytelling also circles—it comes back and starts over. This is as true in literate cultures that cherish traditional religious or secular narratives as it is in preliterate cultures. Stories, unless they are wholly improvised, are not merely performed: they are
reperformed and for that reason must berecollected. In an oral culture, storytelling may not require verbatim recall, but the skillful reperformance of a well-known narrative does require a very good memory for times, places, and persons. This is especially the case when that performance includes rhythm, melody, and movement. One can appreciate why, in some cultures, performers, before
Four Visual Instruments of Memory from:
Neopoetics
Abstract: In the previous two chapters, I have explored four mnemonic methods:
time, place, person, andperformance, each as a means by which oral cultures preserve narrative information. Time, place, and person are the named elements that anchor the action of the narrative; performance is the narration itself. As proposed in the last chapter, skillfully performed narration, enhanced by musical elements, induces pleasurable emotions, which in turn increase the likelihood that the piece will be reperformed and its narrative content preserved.
Five Poets’ Play and Plato’s Poetics from:
Neopoetics
Abstract: Singing is a universal human behavior combining words that awaken the memory, melodies that arouse the emotions, and rhythms that move the body. The singer, who might also play a drum or stringed instrument, therefore always occupied a prominent place in social and religious gatherings, which often would be held during times of leisure and feasting after other group activities, such as hunting, planting, harvesting, and herding.
Epilogue from:
Neopoetics
Abstract: It is more than mere passage of time that separates the poets of Rome’s Golden Age from those that John Stuart Mill had in mind when, in 1833, he contrasted poetry with eloquence. Both these discourses, he said, are “alike the expression or uttering forth of feeling. But … eloquence is
heard; poetry isoverheard. Eloquence supposes an audience; the peculiarity of poetry appears to us to lie in the poet’s utter unconsciousness of a listener. Poetry is feeling confessing itself to itself, in moments of solitude.… All poetry is of the nature of soliloquy” (Mill 1965, 109–110). Classical
CHAPTER ONE Of Memory and Time from:
On the Difficulty of Living Together
Abstract: In the beginning was the body. At one end of the arc we find man as a species, at the other the
self, the person, the socialrole, society now definitively stratified: the history of humanity is the history of that journey. In animal species the self only exists, at most, as sexual preening. What they have is a primitive sympathetic reaction, which sometimes occurs in man too, but only episodically. In animals, however, it is a way of being, a deep empathy through which an individual communicates with another member of his species, and maybe even with members of
CHAPTER TWO The Present Breathes Through History from:
On the Difficulty of Living Together
Abstract: The twentieth century tried to live bereft of the ideas that had accompanied humanity for a long time. God is dead, man is dead, matter has disappeared. It still seemed possible to continue to think. That roll call of absences was joined in the last years of the century by another, long known but silenced: history has ended. Perhaps now the question Ernest Renan posed in his
Philosophical Dialogues and Fragmentsover a century ago has reached full meaning: “What will those who come after us live on?”
CHAPTER FOUR We Need to Start Defending Ourselves from the Past from:
On the Difficulty of Living Together
Abstract: More years ago than I care to think (time is always excessive for oneself), I ended a text with the kind of flat statement I was very attached to then: “To understand the present is to measure oneself against the past and to brave the future.”¹ Now I tend to think that they may have been fine words, but rather out of place. They may not have been a suitable way of concluding; they should rather have been a way of beginning to talk, of announcing a project, of starting to sketch out a task. Later, when I persevered with
7 Foucault, Derida: from:
Foucault/Derrida Fifty Years Later
Author(s) CUSTER OLIVIA
Abstract: A body of thought is too often reduced to a “silhouette” that one thinks is a summary. In thus personifying the work of philosophy, we take away its thickness. But this complexity does not exist in isolation, any more than it can be frozen in time in the form of an unchanging position. Bodies of thought enrich and transform each other through the play of interactions and reactions, strategies and exchanges, and conflicts and ruptures. One body of thought thus implicates others. This relation is not constructed simply by borrowing from, or subscribing to, other thoughts, any more than the
Introduction from:
The Force of the Example
Abstract: Diverse and far apart though our cultures might be, the world that you and I inhabit is shaped by three great forces. The first and most powerful of them is the force of
what exists, of what is already there, in place—the force of things. We experience this force in two fundamental ways. Sometimes we encounter it as the force of habit and routine, of tradition, of mores and custom, of culture, of convention, of usage, of established practice and received wisdom. Society as we know it would simply be impossible if we were to reinvent the terms of
6 Exemplarity and Human Rights from:
The Force of the Example
Abstract: Here again a word on our present predicament may be in order. Never in history has the need for a global rule of law based on a universalist understanding of justice been more acutely felt and yet at the same time perceived as an elusive chimera. On the one hand,
1 FORGETTING HATHUMODA: from:
History in the Comic Mode
Author(s) Paxton Frederick S.
Abstract: Hathumoda, first abbess of Gandersheim, could have had a glorious afterlife. Agius, a monk-priest of the nearby abbey of Corvey—her confidant and perhaps a blood relative—was with her when she died.¹ Afterward, so he tells us, Agius consoled her bereaved sisters at Gandersheim, speaking movingly of Hathumoda’s long and painful passing and the significance of her life and death. Over the next two years he transformed those conversations into a consolatory dialogue in verse. At the same time, so that they, who could “no longer hold her or gaze at her in the flesh,” might at least “possess
4 THOMAS OF CANTIMPRÉ AND FEMALE SANCTITY from:
History in the Comic Mode
Author(s) Coakley John
Abstract: The new religious currents of the thirteenth century produced a remarkable literature of female sanctity. Hagiographers, especially in the Low Countries and Italy, wrote vivid accounts of the new female saints, not only of their asceticism and devotion but also of their powers. Those powers typically took the form of intercessions and revelations for the spiritual benefit of persons living and dead, consistently with what was supposed at the time to be a female predisposition toward visions and contact with the other world.¹ Among the most prolific of the hagiographers of such women was Thomas of Cantimpré (1200/01–ca. 1270),
8 NAMING NAMES: from:
History in the Comic Mode
Author(s) Head Thomas
Abstract: William v of Aquitaine, in charters issued on August 3, 1015, declared, “I, William, duke of Aquitaine and one mortal among others, have seen the power of many evil deeds not only among the people but also in the holy church, deeds which sprout from the root of the Arian heresy and of which we have never heard before my time.”¹ Writing about the trial of heretics at Orléans in 1022, Ademar of Chabbanes stated in his
Chronicle, “At that time, ten of the canons of Sainte-Croix, who had seemed to be more religious than the others, were proven to
15 ASPECTS OF BLOOD PIETY IN A LATE-MEDIEVAL ENGLISH MANUSCRIPT: from:
History in the Comic Mode
Author(s) Hennessy Marlene Villalobos
Abstract: One of the most intense imaginings of the blood of Christ appears in an English Carthusian manuscript of ca. 1460–1470, London, British Library, MS Additional 37049, on fol. 36v (fig. 15.1).¹ In a time when Passion imagery was virtually everywhere in England and on the continent,² this manuscript illustration stands apart for its unusual and perhaps unprecedented iconography, which accompanies a text by the mystic Richard Rolle (d. 1349).³ Not only does this picture highlight a whole range of beliefs and behaviors connected to the heart, wounds, blood,⁴ and Holy Name of Christ,⁵ providing particularly lucid evidence of what
Afterword: from:
History in the Comic Mode
Author(s) Holsinger Bruce
Abstract: When peter the Venerable’s mother died in 1135, her son consoled himself with metaphor: the body of his mother was not, in truth, dead matter or flesh, but rather a living seed. As Peter explained in a letter to his grieving brothers, the body can revivify at the end of time only if it has already putrefied in death; like those of their mother’s, he assured them, “the seeds of [our] bodies” (cf. 1 Cor 15:37) would sprout and grow anew at the resurrection, their burials, like hers, having accomplished a veritable sowing of immortality.¹ Peter had turned to the
Chapter Two Digitalizing Cinema from Top to Bottom from:
The End of Cinema?
Abstract: The passage to digital media at the turn of the century brought a profound upheaval to media “ecology.” Insofar as digital technology is not exclusive (it affects every medium—and much more than media alone), every time the “Digital Fairy” bats her wings she unleashes a hurricane or, at the very least, severe disturbances, from one end of the media chain to the other.¹ The media of any given society and culture at any given time respond to one another, enter into dialogue or exchange, or crash into one another in spectacular fashion. In short, they constitute a system, even
Chapter Three A Brief Phenomenology of “Digitalized” Cinema from:
The End of Cinema?
Abstract: Images today are not merely
digitalimages; they are alsomultipleandmigrating. The authors of this volume call this the “DiMuMi syndrome” (fordigital,multiple, andmigrating), behind which we find, on the reception level, one of the most explicitly “revolutionary” dimensions of the digital mutation we are a part of and a witness to. What our “media modernity” offers us are numerous “on ramps”—most often by way of a touch of our finger—to a phenomenal quantity of images, both moving and not. At the same time, the number of screens in our lives is increasing at
Chapter Four From Shooting to Filming: from:
The End of Cinema?
Abstract: We know that for Roland Barthes, as the first epigraph to this chapter demonstrates, the movie theater was a special, unchanging place. Today, however, the movie theater, the jewel case of filmic attractions, appears threatened by the
digital revolutionthat is turning our traditions upside down and putting our habits topsy-turvy and that just a short time ago precipitated a crisis. Yet the movie theater and celluloid, let us repeat, are the two major principles on which most definitions of cinema bequeathed to us by the twentieth century are based. For the champions of the cinephile tradition, it is hard
Chapter Seven “Animage” and the New Visual Culture from:
The End of Cinema?
Abstract: Among the many binary oppositions dividing planet cinema today, one as we have seen concerns the life or death of the medium. Some commentators, whom we might describe as pessimists, believe that cinema, or at least the cinema we knew in the twentieth century, has no future. They think its time has passed or at the very least that the changes to its identity that have taken place are so intense that it must be redefined. Some even believe that it is urgent that we give it a new name. This is not the first time the question what to
Chapter Two Digitalizing Cinema from Top to Bottom from:
The End of Cinema?
Abstract: The passage to digital media at the turn of the century brought a profound upheaval to media “ecology.” Insofar as digital technology is not exclusive (it affects every medium—and much more than media alone), every time the “Digital Fairy” bats her wings she unleashes a hurricane or, at the very least, severe disturbances, from one end of the media chain to the other.¹ The media of any given society and culture at any given time respond to one another, enter into dialogue or exchange, or crash into one another in spectacular fashion. In short, they constitute a system, even
Chapter Three A Brief Phenomenology of “Digitalized” Cinema from:
The End of Cinema?
Abstract: Images today are not merely
digitalimages; they are alsomultipleandmigrating. The authors of this volume call this the “DiMuMi syndrome” (fordigital,multiple, andmigrating), behind which we find, on the reception level, one of the most explicitly “revolutionary” dimensions of the digital mutation we are a part of and a witness to. What our “media modernity” offers us are numerous “on ramps”—most often by way of a touch of our finger—to a phenomenal quantity of images, both moving and not. At the same time, the number of screens in our lives is increasing at
Chapter Four From Shooting to Filming: from:
The End of Cinema?
Abstract: We know that for Roland Barthes, as the first epigraph to this chapter demonstrates, the movie theater was a special, unchanging place. Today, however, the movie theater, the jewel case of filmic attractions, appears threatened by the
digital revolutionthat is turning our traditions upside down and putting our habits topsy-turvy and that just a short time ago precipitated a crisis. Yet the movie theater and celluloid, let us repeat, are the two major principles on which most definitions of cinema bequeathed to us by the twentieth century are based. For the champions of the cinephile tradition, it is hard
Chapter Seven “Animage” and the New Visual Culture from:
The End of Cinema?
Abstract: Among the many binary oppositions dividing planet cinema today, one as we have seen concerns the life or death of the medium. Some commentators, whom we might describe as pessimists, believe that cinema, or at least the cinema we knew in the twentieth century, has no future. They think its time has passed or at the very least that the changes to its identity that have taken place are so intense that it must be redefined. Some even believe that it is urgent that we give it a new name. This is not the first time the question what to
7. HIGH ART AND THE POWER TO GUESS THE UNSEEN FROM THE SEEN from:
Progress and Values in the Humanities
Abstract: “There’s my hometown!” I shout. I catch a murder mystery set in Portland, Oregon. It’s about a pretty woman, a handsome man, and a villain hell-bent on harming her. Also, her outdoor furniture, it happens, is the kind I’d bought a month before. “Look!” I announce to the room, “There’s Sellwood Bridge! I rode across it every day going to college.” These insights are pleasurable to me alone. Others, no matter how kindly disposed, do not find scenes of a bridge and rainy streets interesting. My fascination with Portland defines sentimentality. Like other people’s photos of their grandkids, my recollections
INTRODUCTION: from:
Eastwood's Iwo Jima
Author(s) GJELSVIK ANNE
Abstract: Taken together, Eastwood’s diptych
Flags of Our Fathers (2006) and Letters from Iwo Jima (2006) form a unique contribution to film history. It was the first time a director made two films at the same time about the same event, which here is the battle over Iwo Jima in 1945 during World War II. And it was also the first time an American director made an American film in Japanese, since Letters from Iwo Jima (despite its English title) is entirely in Japanese. Finally, and what motivated us to produce this anthology, it was the first time a director touched
CARE OR GLORY? from:
Eastwood's Iwo Jima
Author(s) GJELSVIK ANNE
Abstract: The beginning of Clint Eastwood’s World War II movie
Flags of Our Fathers (2006) puts the viewer directly into something that looks like a war zone. Only this time the soldier, John ‘Doc’ Bradley (played by Ryan Phillippe), seems to be all alone as
Book Title: Regimes of Historicity-Presentism and Experiences of Time
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): BROWN SASKIA
Abstract: Our presentist present is by no means uniform or clear-cut, and it is experienced very differently depending on the position we occupy in society. We are caught up in global movement and accelerated flows, or else condemned to the life of casual workers, living from hand to mouth in a stagnant present, with no recognized past, and no real future either (since the temporality of plans and projects is inaccessible). The present is therefore experienced as emancipation or enclosure, and the perspective of the future is no longer reassuring, since it is perceived not as a promise, but as a threat. Hartog's resonant readings show us how the motor of history(-writing) has stalled and help us understand the contradictory qualities of our contemporary presentist relation to time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/hart16376
PRESENTISM: from:
Regimes of Historicity
Abstract: At the time this book was first published, in 2003, it already talked of a crisis of time, but obviously not of the crisis that has engulfed us since 2008—and I would not go so far as to claim for myself the gift of prophecy (not even with hindsight). However, it is not hard to see that links exist between the crisis, initially financial, which radiated out from the United States, and a world so enslaved to the present that no other viewpoint is considered admissible. What words have we been hearing since 2008? Essentially “crisis,” “recession,” “depression,” but
INTRODUCTION: from:
Regimes of Historicity
Abstract: No one doubts that an order of time exists—or rather, that orders of time exist which vary with time and place. These orders are, in any event, so imperious and apparently so self-evident that we bow to them without even realizing it, without meaning to or wanting to, and whether we are aware of it or not. All resistance is in vain. For a society’s relations to time hardly seem open to discussion or negotiation. The term “order” implies at once succession and command: the times (in the plural)
dictateordefy, timeavengeswrongs, itrestoresorder following
2 FROM ODYSSEUS’S TEARS TO AUGUSTINE’S MEDITATIONS from:
Regimes of Historicity
Abstract: Anyone transported directly from the Pacific to the Aegean, from the world of royal kingship to the “world of Odysseus,” moving simultaneously through space and back in time, would have no difficulty recognizing in the Homeric hero certain characteristics of the heroic regime of history. But it would be a different type of heroic regime, one incarnated by Achilles and Odysseus, as Vico describes them. Anyway, I do not intend to compare Thakombau or Hone Heke with Agamemnon or Nestor, and list similarities and differences, but rather focus on one figure in particular, Odysseus. He who, to quote the Russian
3 CHATEAUBRIAND, BETWEEN OLD AND NEW REGIMES OF HISTORICITY from:
Regimes of Historicity
Abstract: Unlike Odysseus, Chateaubriand
hadread Augustine. Immersed as he was in a Christian experience of time, his one and only temporal reference was that of the Catholic monarchy. However, since he was born in 1768, he grew up in a period of profound crisis and conflictual relations to time. That is why he will be our guide here, he whose world was utterly shattered by the French Revolution. Yet many other names could rightfully figure between Augustine and Chateaubriand, between Alaric’s sack of Rome and the storming of the Bastille, not least Petrarch, Bacon, Montaigne, Perrault, and Rousseau; and several
[Introduction] from:
Regimes of Historicity
Abstract: The three meditations on ruins and the three journeys to America, described in the previous chapters, and which spanned more than half a century, gave form to three experiences of time. All three reflected a radical reappraisal of the order of time. Volney, Chateaubriand, and Tocqueville, each in his own way, expressed the realization that the old regime of historicity, which had so long been sustained by the model of
historia magistra, could no longer work. In order for contemporary events to be intelligible, the categories of the past and the future had to be articulated differently, failing which “the
5 HERITAGE AND THE PRESENT from:
Regimes of Historicity
Abstract: Let us now turn from memory to its alter ego, heritage, while asking the same question as before: how are we to understand, in terms of time and the order of time, the proliferation and universalization of heritage that we have witnessed over the last quarter of a century? More precisely, what regime of historicity is implied by the phenomenon that some have described as the “meteoric rise of the heritage industry” in the 1990s? Did this taste for the past, for everything old, emerge suddenly as a kind of nostalgia for an older regime of historicity that had in
OUR DOUBLY INDEBTED PRESENT: from:
Regimes of Historicity
Abstract: If there was a time when Chateaubriand’s stance could be ours, it is certainly long gone. I shall mention it one last time, as a way of bidding farewell to the self-styled swimmer
Book Title: Regimes of Historicity-Presentism and Experiences of Time
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): BROWN SASKIA
Abstract: Our presentist present is by no means uniform or clear-cut, and it is experienced very differently depending on the position we occupy in society. We are caught up in global movement and accelerated flows, or else condemned to the life of casual workers, living from hand to mouth in a stagnant present, with no recognized past, and no real future either (since the temporality of plans and projects is inaccessible). The present is therefore experienced as emancipation or enclosure, and the perspective of the future is no longer reassuring, since it is perceived not as a promise, but as a threat. Hartog's resonant readings show us how the motor of history(-writing) has stalled and help us understand the contradictory qualities of our contemporary presentist relation to time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/hart16376
PRESENTISM: from:
Regimes of Historicity
Abstract: At the time this book was first published, in 2003, it already talked of a crisis of time, but obviously not of the crisis that has engulfed us since 2008—and I would not go so far as to claim for myself the gift of prophecy (not even with hindsight). However, it is not hard to see that links exist between the crisis, initially financial, which radiated out from the United States, and a world so enslaved to the present that no other viewpoint is considered admissible. What words have we been hearing since 2008? Essentially “crisis,” “recession,” “depression,” but
INTRODUCTION: from:
Regimes of Historicity
Abstract: No one doubts that an order of time exists—or rather, that orders of time exist which vary with time and place. These orders are, in any event, so imperious and apparently so self-evident that we bow to them without even realizing it, without meaning to or wanting to, and whether we are aware of it or not. All resistance is in vain. For a society’s relations to time hardly seem open to discussion or negotiation. The term “order” implies at once succession and command: the times (in the plural)
dictateordefy, timeavengeswrongs, itrestoresorder following
2 FROM ODYSSEUS’S TEARS TO AUGUSTINE’S MEDITATIONS from:
Regimes of Historicity
Abstract: Anyone transported directly from the Pacific to the Aegean, from the world of royal kingship to the “world of Odysseus,” moving simultaneously through space and back in time, would have no difficulty recognizing in the Homeric hero certain characteristics of the heroic regime of history. But it would be a different type of heroic regime, one incarnated by Achilles and Odysseus, as Vico describes them. Anyway, I do not intend to compare Thakombau or Hone Heke with Agamemnon or Nestor, and list similarities and differences, but rather focus on one figure in particular, Odysseus. He who, to quote the Russian
3 CHATEAUBRIAND, BETWEEN OLD AND NEW REGIMES OF HISTORICITY from:
Regimes of Historicity
Abstract: Unlike Odysseus, Chateaubriand
hadread Augustine. Immersed as he was in a Christian experience of time, his one and only temporal reference was that of the Catholic monarchy. However, since he was born in 1768, he grew up in a period of profound crisis and conflictual relations to time. That is why he will be our guide here, he whose world was utterly shattered by the French Revolution. Yet many other names could rightfully figure between Augustine and Chateaubriand, between Alaric’s sack of Rome and the storming of the Bastille, not least Petrarch, Bacon, Montaigne, Perrault, and Rousseau; and several
[Introduction] from:
Regimes of Historicity
Abstract: The three meditations on ruins and the three journeys to America, described in the previous chapters, and which spanned more than half a century, gave form to three experiences of time. All three reflected a radical reappraisal of the order of time. Volney, Chateaubriand, and Tocqueville, each in his own way, expressed the realization that the old regime of historicity, which had so long been sustained by the model of
historia magistra, could no longer work. In order for contemporary events to be intelligible, the categories of the past and the future had to be articulated differently, failing which “the
5 HERITAGE AND THE PRESENT from:
Regimes of Historicity
Abstract: Let us now turn from memory to its alter ego, heritage, while asking the same question as before: how are we to understand, in terms of time and the order of time, the proliferation and universalization of heritage that we have witnessed over the last quarter of a century? More precisely, what regime of historicity is implied by the phenomenon that some have described as the “meteoric rise of the heritage industry” in the 1990s? Did this taste for the past, for everything old, emerge suddenly as a kind of nostalgia for an older regime of historicity that had in
OUR DOUBLY INDEBTED PRESENT: from:
Regimes of Historicity
Abstract: If there was a time when Chateaubriand’s stance could be ours, it is certainly long gone. I shall mention it one last time, as a way of bidding farewell to the self-styled swimmer
2 AIDS Memoirs Out of the City: from:
Ecosickness in Contemporary U.S. Fiction
Abstract: If the 1970s seemed to confirm a narrative of biomedical progress due to an explosion of vaccines and novel procedures like in vitro fertilization, the next decade brought one of biomedicine’s most formidable obstacles. The first cases of HIV/AIDS were diagnosed in 1981, and their intractability shook the confidence of epidemiologists and pharmaceutical researchers. Technoscience could not invent the tools to curb, much less eradicate, this emerging infectious disease in time to prevent massive loss of life. Undaunted, countless scientists attempted to tackle all dimensions of HIV/AIDS, from its pathology and epidemiology to treatment and public health policy. One of
3 Richard Powers’s Strange Wonder from:
Ecosickness in Contemporary U.S. Fiction
Abstract: It was at first a pleasing divertissement to view the vivid and intense colours produced thereby; but after a while applying myself to consider them more circumspectly, I became surprised to see them in an oblong form; which … I expected should have been circular…. Comparing the length of this colored spectrum with its breadth, I found it about five times greater, a disproportion so extravagant that it excited me to a more than ordinary curiosity
CHAPTER 8 From the Critique of Totalitarianism to the Politics of Democracy from:
The Specter of Democracy
Abstract: Should a critique disappear when its object is no longer present? Although politicians and journalists still use the concepts of fascism and communism rhetorically, perhaps taking the precaution of adding a “neo-” to cover their embarrassment, nearly no one any longer admits adhering to either, and neither does anyone seriously think that they will return any time soon. But of course no one thinks that the Roman Empire—or the Roman republic—will return soon, which doesn’t prevent learning from those experiences. And there are those, still a minority, who believe that the only way to interpret the U.S. Constitution
CHAPTER 10 Intersecting Trajectories of Republicanism in France and the United States from:
The Specter of Democracy
Abstract: Like many inherited historical concepts, republicanism has been understood differently in different contexts and at different times. This has resulted in confusion, polemic, and, most often, paradoxes that also have the benefit of adding depth and richness to the concept itself. So it is today. As used in France, republicanism refers to the political project that found its idealized representation in a vision of universal citizenship that is identified with the achievements of the Third Republic. In the United States, the concept designates the social community needed to provide a meaningful identity to the participants in a liberal polity organized
CHAPTER 13 Philosophy by Other Means? from:
The Specter of Democracy
Abstract: Paradoxically, after 1989 Marx’s political philosophy can be read not only as philosophical but also as political. If Marxism is not (in Sartre’s famous phrase) the “unsurpassable horizon of our times,” it remains a rigorous confrontation with modernity and a challenging attempt to understand its novelty.¹ This is because, despite Marx’s intention to provide a theory
of the revolutionary proletariat that would serve for the praxis of that world historical agent, he was and continued to be a philosopher; despite his critique(s) of idealism, Marx remained under its spell. Indeed, this philosophical intention ultimately vitiates his attempt to surpass philosophy
INTRODUCTION: from:
Governance in the New Global Disorder
Abstract: Today’s world is full of paradoxes, many of which could be summarized by the idea that it is a world belonging to everyone and to no one. There are many issues that are everyone’s (they affect all of us and demand coordinated actions), but at the same time, no one can or wants to be in charge of them (either there is no competent authority or no one shoulders the responsibility). What is the difference between something held in common and something that is ungovernable, between shared responsibility and generalized irresponsibility? How do we distinguish that which belongs to everyone
3 GLOBAL FEAR from:
Governance in the New Global Disorder
Abstract: When you want to understand a society, it is more useful to examine its fears than its desires. We could say: Tell me whom you are afraid of and I will tell you who you are. We can now register a fear with new characteristics in the fear taxonomy, and we could call it global fear, in other words, fear of the consequences of the process of globalization. It is a question of risks that have to be governed and from which we have the right to be protected. At the same time, unreasonable reactions to some of the concerns
4 A WALLED WORLD from:
Governance in the New Global Disorder
Abstract: The current transformation of many of our borders into walls is a clear indicator of the ambiguity of the process of globalization, which combines opening and fragmentation, delimitation and closure. This issue places crucial aspects of our humanity at stake since borders and boundaries are linked to the realities of inside and outside, inclusion and exclusion, questions of identity and difference. The current tendency of multiplying strategies for closure reveals that we have significant difficulties when it comes to different ways of configuring everything that has to do with the legal-political realm, citizenship, identity, or security. Perhaps it is time
EPILOGUE: from:
Governance in the New Global Disorder
Abstract: In a world like ours that belongs to everyone and to no one, a world of shared threats and common goods, where ownership should be reexamined, and demands for cooperation are stronger and stronger, a world that opens and protects itself, in which we are all equally exposed and which lacks outskirts, wrapped in interdependence and contagions, the most difficult and at the same time most demanding questions are: Who are we? How should we who live in this common world conceive of ourselves and how should we act? Making the distinction between us and them is crucial to determining
10 Anxiety and Secularization: from:
Situating Existentialism
Author(s) Moyn Samuel
Abstract: The renown of Danish existentialist Søren Kierkegaard is one of the most compelling proofs there is of how the canon of philosophy is constantly reinvented as time passes—a process that collective forces and historical contingencies rule and that personal brilliance and textual power can do startlingly little to affect by themselves. At the dawn of the twentieth century, none of the standard histories of philosophy—except one by Harald Høffding, who was (predictably enough) then the main Danish thinker of European note—stopped at Kierkegaard’s tomb in their tours of the graveyard of thought, and then only briefly.¹ At
12 Situating Frantz Fanon’s Account of Black Experience from:
Situating Existentialism
Author(s) Bernasconi Robert
Abstract: In 1952, when Frantz Fanon’s
Black Skin, White Masks was published, a new era was already beginning in the discussion of race.¹ For the first time in more than 150 years, the dominant discourse about race was no longer under the dark shadow of racial science. It was now governed by a growing recognition of the evils of racism. One sees this most notably in the UNESCO declaration on race, which was authored primarily by Ashley Montagu yet with the signatures of other anthropologists (most notably Claude Lévi-Strauss and E. Franklin Frazier) attached. Together they called for “an ethic of
13 Simone de Beauvoir in Her Times and Ours: from:
Situating Existentialism
Author(s) Bergoffen Debra
Abstract: It is impossible to know where Simone de Beauvoir’s thinking would have gone had she been spared the depravation and fright of living in Nazi-occupied Paris. What we do know is that coming face-to-face with forces of injustice beyond her control gave a new urgency to the questions of evil and the other. Beauvoir spoke of the war as creating an existential rupture in time and spoke of herself as having undergone a conversion.¹ She could no longer afford the luxury of focusing on her own happiness and pleasure. The question of oppression became a pressing concern. One cannot refuse
10 Anxiety and Secularization: from:
Situating Existentialism
Author(s) Moyn Samuel
Abstract: The renown of Danish existentialist Søren Kierkegaard is one of the most compelling proofs there is of how the canon of philosophy is constantly reinvented as time passes—a process that collective forces and historical contingencies rule and that personal brilliance and textual power can do startlingly little to affect by themselves. At the dawn of the twentieth century, none of the standard histories of philosophy—except one by Harald Høffding, who was (predictably enough) then the main Danish thinker of European note—stopped at Kierkegaard’s tomb in their tours of the graveyard of thought, and then only briefly.¹ At
12 Situating Frantz Fanon’s Account of Black Experience from:
Situating Existentialism
Author(s) Bernasconi Robert
Abstract: In 1952, when Frantz Fanon’s
Black Skin, White Masks was published, a new era was already beginning in the discussion of race.¹ For the first time in more than 150 years, the dominant discourse about race was no longer under the dark shadow of racial science. It was now governed by a growing recognition of the evils of racism. One sees this most notably in the UNESCO declaration on race, which was authored primarily by Ashley Montagu yet with the signatures of other anthropologists (most notably Claude Lévi-Strauss and E. Franklin Frazier) attached. Together they called for “an ethic of
13 Simone de Beauvoir in Her Times and Ours: from:
Situating Existentialism
Author(s) Bergoffen Debra
Abstract: It is impossible to know where Simone de Beauvoir’s thinking would have gone had she been spared the depravation and fright of living in Nazi-occupied Paris. What we do know is that coming face-to-face with forces of injustice beyond her control gave a new urgency to the questions of evil and the other. Beauvoir spoke of the war as creating an existential rupture in time and spoke of herself as having undergone a conversion.¹ She could no longer afford the luxury of focusing on her own happiness and pleasure. The question of oppression became a pressing concern. One cannot refuse
1 God After God: from:
Reimagining the Sacred
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: Ana-is a prefix defined in theShorter Oxford English Dictionaryas, “Up in space or time; back again, anew.” So understood, the term supports the deeper and broader sense of “after” contained in the expression “God after God.” The poet Gerard Manley Hopkins describes the moment of imaginative creation as “aftering, seconding, over and overing.”¹ He speaks of poetic epiphany, accordingly, as a retrieval of past experience
1 God After God: from:
Reimagining the Sacred
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: Ana-is a prefix defined in theShorter Oxford English Dictionaryas, “Up in space or time; back again, anew.” So understood, the term supports the deeper and broader sense of “after” contained in the expression “God after God.” The poet Gerard Manley Hopkins describes the moment of imaginative creation as “aftering, seconding, over and overing.”¹ He speaks of poetic epiphany, accordingly, as a retrieval of past experience
1 God After God: from:
Reimagining the Sacred
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: Ana-is a prefix defined in theShorter Oxford English Dictionaryas, “Up in space or time; back again, anew.” So understood, the term supports the deeper and broader sense of “after” contained in the expression “God after God.” The poet Gerard Manley Hopkins describes the moment of imaginative creation as “aftering, seconding, over and overing.”¹ He speaks of poetic epiphany, accordingly, as a retrieval of past experience
1 God After God: from:
Reimagining the Sacred
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: Ana-is a prefix defined in theShorter Oxford English Dictionaryas, “Up in space or time; back again, anew.” So understood, the term supports the deeper and broader sense of “after” contained in the expression “God after God.” The poet Gerard Manley Hopkins describes the moment of imaginative creation as “aftering, seconding, over and overing.”¹ He speaks of poetic epiphany, accordingly, as a retrieval of past experience
1 God After God: from:
Reimagining the Sacred
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: Ana-is a prefix defined in theShorter Oxford English Dictionaryas, “Up in space or time; back again, anew.” So understood, the term supports the deeper and broader sense of “after” contained in the expression “God after God.” The poet Gerard Manley Hopkins describes the moment of imaginative creation as “aftering, seconding, over and overing.”¹ He speaks of poetic epiphany, accordingly, as a retrieval of past experience
1 God After God: from:
Reimagining the Sacred
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: Ana-is a prefix defined in theShorter Oxford English Dictionaryas, “Up in space or time; back again, anew.” So understood, the term supports the deeper and broader sense of “after” contained in the expression “God after God.” The poet Gerard Manley Hopkins describes the moment of imaginative creation as “aftering, seconding, over and overing.”¹ He speaks of poetic epiphany, accordingly, as a retrieval of past experience
6 Lebanon’s Golden/Gilded Age: from:
Civil and Uncivil Violence in Lebanon
Abstract: The brief interlude between the relatively benign civil war of 1958 and the protracted cruelties of 1975 stands out as a perplexing often anomalous epoch in Lebanon’s eventful political history. It is a period marked by sustained political stability, economic prosperity, and swift societal transformations, the closest the country ever got to a “golden age” with all the outward manifestations of stupendous vitality, exuberance, and rising expectations. But these were also times of growing disparities, cleavages, neglect, portends perhaps of a more “gilded age” of misdirected and uneven growth, boisterous political culture, conspicuous consumption, and the trappings of frivolous life-style
Book Title: Narrating Evil-A Postmetaphysical Theory of Reflective Judgment
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Allen Amy
Abstract: Conceptions of evil have changed dramatically over time, and though humans continue to commit acts of cruelty against one another, today we possess a clearer, more moral way of analyzing them. In
Narrating Evil, María Pía Lara explores what has changed in our understanding of evil, why the transformation matters, and how we can learn from this specific historical development.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/lara14030
Book Title: Taiwan Under Japanese Colonial Rule, 1895-1945-History, Culture, Memory
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): WANG DAVID DER-WEI
Abstract: The first study of colonial Taiwan in English, this volume brings together seventeen essays by leading scholars to construct a comprehensive cultural history of Taiwan under Japanese rule. Contributors from the United States, Japan, and Taiwan explore a number of topics through a variety of theoretical, comparative, and postcolonial perspectives, painting a complex and nuanced portrait of a pivotal time in the formation of Taiwanese national identity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/liao13798
1 A PERSPECTIVE ON STUDIES OF TAIWANESE POLITICAL HISTORY: from:
Taiwan Under Japanese Colonial Rule, 1895-1945
Author(s) MASAHIRO WAKABAYASHI
Abstract: It is well known that in the 1980s, when Taiwan underwent significant political changes, Taiwanese history suddenly began to generate a great deal of domestic and international academic interest. Particularly in Taiwan considerable time and material resources have been invested in this field of study.
5 SHAPING ADMINISTRATION IN COLONIAL TAIWAN, 1895–1945 from:
Taiwan Under Japanese Colonial Rule, 1895-1945
Author(s) CAROLINE TS’AI HUI-YU
Abstract: This paper examines how the colonial administration was shaped in the specific context of Taiwan under Japanese rule. From the beginning of Japanese rule in Taiwan, the colonial government mapped, reworked, and created a series of organizations based on natural villages, and actively sought to integrate these colonial spaces, themselves structured and overlapping, into the hierarchy of the colonial administrative mechanism. The Japanese colonial bureaucracy imposed a discipline of order on Taiwan, and by the 1930s wartime concerns reshaped this order, thus turning Taiwan into not only a disciplined but also a disciplinary society.
8 HEGEMONY AND IDENTITY IN THE COLONIAL EXPERIENCE OF TAIWAN, 1895–1945 from:
Taiwan Under Japanese Colonial Rule, 1895-1945
Author(s) SHIAW-CHIAN FONG
Abstract: Prior to the 1990s, the story of colonial Taiwan under Japanese rule was rarely heard in the English-speaking world; it also lacked an audience in Taiwan itself. With its democratization, which also removed pan-Chinese ideology, people on the island began to show interest in their own history. A space was thus created in which colonial experience could be researched and its stories told. However, since the time for intensive research has been relatively short thus far, the stories of both the colonizer and the colonized, particularly in regard to cultural domains, remain rudimentary, and not entirely precise in many details.
9 CONFRONTATION AND COLLABORATION: from:
Taiwan Under Japanese Colonial Rule, 1895-1945
Author(s) MEI-ER HUANG
Abstract: In the history of cultural development, massive changes in language have often occurred, especially in times of ideological transition and cultural upheaval. These changes can for instance be seen in the Renaissance and the Japanese Meiji period. Similar occurrences have also been noted in China. The vernacular (
baihua白話) movement initiated by Hu Shih 胡適(1891–1962)¹ in 1917 proposed the adoption of spoken Chinese in formal writing, in place of the traditional, archaic form (wenyan文言). This later triggered confrontation and debate among proponents of the new and old literary schools. Due to then-prevailing educational policies adopted by the Chinese
11 COLONIAL TAIWAN AND THE CONSTRUCTION OF LANDSCAPE PAINTING from:
Taiwan Under Japanese Colonial Rule, 1895-1945
Author(s) CHUAN-YING YEN
Abstract: In modern times appreciation of the Taiwanese landscape, or the “construction” of landscape painting, gradually began taking shape after Japan established the colonial government, which then provided subjective and institutional guidance. The leading figure in the early phase of this process, and the person whose perceptions were most important, was Ishikawa Kinichirō 石川欽一郎 (1871–1945), who continuously used his watercolors and essays to report on what he observed in Taiwan, starting from the time of his first arrival in 1907.
14 GENDER, ETHNOGRAPHY, AND COLONIAL CULTURAL PRODUCTION: from:
Taiwan Under Japanese Colonial Rule, 1895-1945
Author(s) KLEEMAN FAYE YUAN
Abstract: Colonial enterprises and colonial encounters generate the need to produce and possess the knowledge of other(s). There is an urgent need for the colonizing subject to acquire information on the colonized people, in order to aid in the management of its newly acquired territory, and it is equally pressing for the colonized to gain knowledge of their overlord. This transculturation, or the exchange of colonial knowledge, is nevertheless a reluctant liaison fraught with asymmetrical, nonreciprocal, and at times dangerous misreadings. As Said so clearly demonstrated in his
Orientalism, the production of the Orient created a writing subject and a narrated
INTRODUCTION: from:
Prose of the World
Abstract: Just about two years before the December made famous by Virginia Woolf as the time of momentous change for “human character,”¹ her fellow Bloomsbury writer, Katherine Mansfield, wrote the following in her diary on December 21, 1908:
EPILOGUE: from:
Prose of the World
Abstract: At the heart of the genre of prose fiction exists a set of fundamental questions about time and narrative. If narrative is inextricably bound up with the category of time, what is—and what should be—the relative importance of the ordinary everyday and that of the major event? Is narrative essentially event bound? Is it embedded in what Franco Moretti calls a Hegelian “teleological rhetoric,” wherein “the meaning of events lies in their finality” and where “events acquire meaning when they lead to
one ending, and one only”?¹ Does the crux of narratives, as Moretti puts the question, rest
Book Title: Religion and the Specter of the West-Sikhism, India, Postcoloniality, and the Politics of Translation
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Mandair Arvind-Pal S.
Abstract: Arguing that intellectual movements, such as deconstruction, postsecular theory, and political theology, have different implications for cultures and societies that live with the debilitating effects of past imperialisms, Arvind Mandair unsettles the politics of knowledge construction in which the category of "religion" continues to be central. Through a case study of Sikhism, he launches an extended critique of religion as a cultural universal. At the same time, he presents a portrait of how certain aspects of Sikh tradition were reinvented as "religion" during the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/mand14724
Epilogue from:
Religion and the Specter of the West
Abstract: Each chapter in this book has, in different ways, engaged with and provided an extended critique of the concept of religion as a cultural universal. Through a case study of Sikhism, I have tried to demonstrate how certain aspects of Sikh and Hindu traditions were reinvented in terms of the category of “religion” during the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries. As scholars working in different disciplines have increasingly recognized, the context of India’s colonial encounter with the West provides fertile ground for the emergence and crystallization of concepts and categories that inform—but at the same time test the
CHAPTER 6 The 1989 Moment: from:
Contemporary Romanian Cinema
Abstract: Romaniaʹs break from Communist dictatorship engendered by the 1989 revolutionary moment was obviously different from similar phenomena going on in most East European countries. Most importantly, it was almost entirely and sometimes excessively filmed by professional film and television crews and by numerous amateur cameras. In Ricoeurʹs terms,
time of fictionandhistorical timefor once coincided (Ricoeur 1990, III: 129). Such a situation had very long-term effects on the future history of Romanian cinema. These effects were felt in the early documentaries, domestic and foreign docu-fictions, shorts and feature-length films of the early 1990s and followed their trajectory through
CHAPTER 13 Romanian Exilic and Diasporic Cinema: from:
Contemporary Romanian Cinema
Abstract: Quite a few Romanian
émigréactors, directors, cinematographers and producers from the first decades of the twentieth century have left a national imprint on their subsequent careers abroad or decided to return home from their exile for a short or extended period of time. Renowned early cinema performers such as Elvira Popescu (a.k.a. Popesco) and Alexandru Mihalescu (a.k.a. Mihalesco) had some domestic film and theatre experiences before embarking on successful French careers. Other contemporaries born in Romania and having chosen France or Germany as their second homeland, such as innovativeKammerspielactor and director active in the early 1920s Lupu
CHAPTER 6 The 1989 Moment: from:
Contemporary Romanian Cinema
Abstract: Romaniaʹs break from Communist dictatorship engendered by the 1989 revolutionary moment was obviously different from similar phenomena going on in most East European countries. Most importantly, it was almost entirely and sometimes excessively filmed by professional film and television crews and by numerous amateur cameras. In Ricoeurʹs terms,
time of fictionandhistorical timefor once coincided (Ricoeur 1990, III: 129). Such a situation had very long-term effects on the future history of Romanian cinema. These effects were felt in the early documentaries, domestic and foreign docu-fictions, shorts and feature-length films of the early 1990s and followed their trajectory through
CHAPTER 13 Romanian Exilic and Diasporic Cinema: from:
Contemporary Romanian Cinema
Abstract: Quite a few Romanian
émigréactors, directors, cinematographers and producers from the first decades of the twentieth century have left a national imprint on their subsequent careers abroad or decided to return home from their exile for a short or extended period of time. Renowned early cinema performers such as Elvira Popescu (a.k.a. Popesco) and Alexandru Mihalescu (a.k.a. Mihalesco) had some domestic film and theatre experiences before embarking on successful French careers. Other contemporaries born in Romania and having chosen France or Germany as their second homeland, such as innovativeKammerspielactor and director active in the early 1920s Lupu
CHAPTER 6 The 1989 Moment: from:
Contemporary Romanian Cinema
Abstract: Romaniaʹs break from Communist dictatorship engendered by the 1989 revolutionary moment was obviously different from similar phenomena going on in most East European countries. Most importantly, it was almost entirely and sometimes excessively filmed by professional film and television crews and by numerous amateur cameras. In Ricoeurʹs terms,
time of fictionandhistorical timefor once coincided (Ricoeur 1990, III: 129). Such a situation had very long-term effects on the future history of Romanian cinema. These effects were felt in the early documentaries, domestic and foreign docu-fictions, shorts and feature-length films of the early 1990s and followed their trajectory through
CHAPTER 13 Romanian Exilic and Diasporic Cinema: from:
Contemporary Romanian Cinema
Abstract: Quite a few Romanian
émigréactors, directors, cinematographers and producers from the first decades of the twentieth century have left a national imprint on their subsequent careers abroad or decided to return home from their exile for a short or extended period of time. Renowned early cinema performers such as Elvira Popescu (a.k.a. Popesco) and Alexandru Mihalescu (a.k.a. Mihalesco) had some domestic film and theatre experiences before embarking on successful French careers. Other contemporaries born in Romania and having chosen France or Germany as their second homeland, such as innovativeKammerspielactor and director active in the early 1920s Lupu
CHAPTER 6 The 1989 Moment: from:
Contemporary Romanian Cinema
Abstract: Romaniaʹs break from Communist dictatorship engendered by the 1989 revolutionary moment was obviously different from similar phenomena going on in most East European countries. Most importantly, it was almost entirely and sometimes excessively filmed by professional film and television crews and by numerous amateur cameras. In Ricoeurʹs terms,
time of fictionandhistorical timefor once coincided (Ricoeur 1990, III: 129). Such a situation had very long-term effects on the future history of Romanian cinema. These effects were felt in the early documentaries, domestic and foreign docu-fictions, shorts and feature-length films of the early 1990s and followed their trajectory through
CHAPTER 13 Romanian Exilic and Diasporic Cinema: from:
Contemporary Romanian Cinema
Abstract: Quite a few Romanian
émigréactors, directors, cinematographers and producers from the first decades of the twentieth century have left a national imprint on their subsequent careers abroad or decided to return home from their exile for a short or extended period of time. Renowned early cinema performers such as Elvira Popescu (a.k.a. Popesco) and Alexandru Mihalescu (a.k.a. Mihalesco) had some domestic film and theatre experiences before embarking on successful French careers. Other contemporaries born in Romania and having chosen France or Germany as their second homeland, such as innovativeKammerspielactor and director active in the early 1920s Lupu
Book Title: The Awakened Ones-Phenomenology of Visionary Experience
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Obeyesekere Gananath
Abstract: Throughout his career, Obeyesekere has combined psychoanalysis and anthropology to illuminate the relationship between personal symbolism and religious experience. In this book, he begins with Buddha's visionary trances wherein, over the course of four hours, he witnesses hundreds of thousands of his past births and eons of world evolution, renewal, and disappearance. He then connects this fracturing of empirical and visionary time to the realm of space, considering the experience of a female Christian penitent, who stares devotedly at a tiny crucifix only to see the space around it expand to mirror Christ's suffering. Obeyesekere follows the unconscious motivations underlying rapture, the fantastical consumption of Christ's body and blood, and body mutilation and levitation, bridging medieval Catholicism and the movements of early modern thought as reflected in William Blake's artistic visions and poetic dreams. He develops the term "dream-ego" through a discussion of visionary journeys, Carl Jung's and Sigmund Freud's scientific dreaming, and the cosmic and erotic dream-visions of New Age virtuosos, and he defines the parameters of a visionary mode of knowledge that provides a more elastic understanding of truth. A career-culminating work, this volume translates the epistemology of Hindu and Buddhist thinkers for western audiences while revitalizing western philosophical and scientific inquiry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/obey15362
Book 3 THE COSMIC “IT”: from:
The Awakened Ones
Abstract: In my discussion of Mahāyāna Buddhism, I pointed out that the Buddhist doctrine of emptiness, in its very abstractness, shares that feature with many of the world’s great religions and with forms of the Absolute participating in a form of “secular spirituality.” That God exists “only philosophically,” attributed to Spinoza, expresses a larger truth of the world in the religious and secular traditions, wherein philosophers posit an abstract entity or Absolute or Being that exist outside the phenomenal world of becoming. However, while the God of Spinoza’s skeptical philosophy is based on the science and mathematics of his time, such
ENVOI—INTIMATIONS OF MORTALITY: from:
The Awakened Ones
Abstract: I wrote this envoi with the hope that it would ease the burden of having written a long work. But, as with joys that happen to us, burdens never cease until the clock that keeps ticking away the passage of time within our frail bodies comes to a stop. Yet had I been living in another world or another time and place I might have used another epigraph for this ending. Or, for that matter, if I believed that nothingness can mean something else, as our negative theologians and Buddhist thinkers have formulated, giving that nothingness a transcendent reality. For
Book Title: The Awakened Ones-Phenomenology of Visionary Experience
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Obeyesekere Gananath
Abstract: Throughout his career, Obeyesekere has combined psychoanalysis and anthropology to illuminate the relationship between personal symbolism and religious experience. In this book, he begins with Buddha's visionary trances wherein, over the course of four hours, he witnesses hundreds of thousands of his past births and eons of world evolution, renewal, and disappearance. He then connects this fracturing of empirical and visionary time to the realm of space, considering the experience of a female Christian penitent, who stares devotedly at a tiny crucifix only to see the space around it expand to mirror Christ's suffering. Obeyesekere follows the unconscious motivations underlying rapture, the fantastical consumption of Christ's body and blood, and body mutilation and levitation, bridging medieval Catholicism and the movements of early modern thought as reflected in William Blake's artistic visions and poetic dreams. He develops the term "dream-ego" through a discussion of visionary journeys, Carl Jung's and Sigmund Freud's scientific dreaming, and the cosmic and erotic dream-visions of New Age virtuosos, and he defines the parameters of a visionary mode of knowledge that provides a more elastic understanding of truth. A career-culminating work, this volume translates the epistemology of Hindu and Buddhist thinkers for western audiences while revitalizing western philosophical and scientific inquiry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/obey15362
Book 3 THE COSMIC “IT”: from:
The Awakened Ones
Abstract: In my discussion of Mahāyāna Buddhism, I pointed out that the Buddhist doctrine of emptiness, in its very abstractness, shares that feature with many of the world’s great religions and with forms of the Absolute participating in a form of “secular spirituality.” That God exists “only philosophically,” attributed to Spinoza, expresses a larger truth of the world in the religious and secular traditions, wherein philosophers posit an abstract entity or Absolute or Being that exist outside the phenomenal world of becoming. However, while the God of Spinoza’s skeptical philosophy is based on the science and mathematics of his time, such
ENVOI—INTIMATIONS OF MORTALITY: from:
The Awakened Ones
Abstract: I wrote this envoi with the hope that it would ease the burden of having written a long work. But, as with joys that happen to us, burdens never cease until the clock that keeps ticking away the passage of time within our frail bodies comes to a stop. Yet had I been living in another world or another time and place I might have used another epigraph for this ending. Or, for that matter, if I believed that nothingness can mean something else, as our negative theologians and Buddhist thinkers have formulated, giving that nothingness a transcendent reality. For
FOUR An Atheological Morality from:
A Hedonist Manifesto
Abstract: Most people say they are atheist these days, but they are fooling themselves. Most atheisms are overtly nihilistic. What makes them so? European nihilism—so well described by Nietzsche—presupposes the end of the universe and the difficulty of finding another one. In the meantime, atheistic nihilism struggles between two visions of the world: the Judeo-Christian and something not yet defined, which we’ll call post-Christian, for lack of a better term—we do not fool ourselves with that, it is for lack of a better term. Only time and progress through the century will permit us to discover it. For
FIVE A Rule of Immanent Play from:
A Hedonist Manifesto
Abstract: As long as God is in charge, morality is a subsection of theology. Ever since Sinai, the True, the Good, the Positive, and the Just all come from the Decalogue. No need to philosophize, to look for foundations, a genealogy, or origins. God serves as an explanation for all of them. The tablets of the Law, Torah, Gospels, and Pauline Epistles have had their time. When God bothers to show himself, or when he delegates this mission to his most dedicated envoys (who dictate all behavior between the self and itself, the self and others, and the self and the
ELEVEN A Psychopathology of Art from:
A Hedonist Manifesto
Abstract: Contemporary art galleries often complacently exhibit nothing but the defects of our time. Why are we obligated to admire something on a pedestal that we would despise outside of the limited context of the artistic world (confines considered sacred these days, just as religious spaces were for so long)? How can we explain this kind of schizophrenia? We condemn liberal capitalism, criticize the domination of the market, and fight against American imperialism, while simultaneously adoring symbols, icons, and emblems produced by that very world we supposedly execrate. Following the old Aristotelian principle of catharsis, we try to distance ourselves from
4 Circulating Representations: from:
The Triangle of Representation
Abstract: New Historicism, like all the other isms of our time, has rapidly become a catchword, a label, under which the heterogeneous is repackaged and marketed as the more or less homogeneous. The intellectual reality of New Historicisms in fact discloses a variety of sins or virtues or a mix of both depending on one’s point of view (the points of view themselves of course vary in that from its inception to the present New Historicism has been an object of fierce and continuing controversy). For example, in the very fine book by Graham Bradshaw on Shakespeare,¹ we find, convincingly demonstrated,
11 English Proust from:
The Triangle of Representation
Abstract: Much of the last volume of Proust’s
A la recherche du temps perdu is devoted to life in Paris during the First World War. Proust, the least chauvinistic of writers imaginable, is nevertheless so moved by patriotic sentiment as to transgress the convention that keeps a fictional world separate from its author:
4 Circulating Representations: from:
The Triangle of Representation
Abstract: New Historicism, like all the other isms of our time, has rapidly become a catchword, a label, under which the heterogeneous is repackaged and marketed as the more or less homogeneous. The intellectual reality of New Historicisms in fact discloses a variety of sins or virtues or a mix of both depending on one’s point of view (the points of view themselves of course vary in that from its inception to the present New Historicism has been an object of fierce and continuing controversy). For example, in the very fine book by Graham Bradshaw on Shakespeare,¹ we find, convincingly demonstrated,
11 English Proust from:
The Triangle of Representation
Abstract: Much of the last volume of Proust’s
A la recherche du temps perdu is devoted to life in Paris during the First World War. Proust, the least chauvinistic of writers imaginable, is nevertheless so moved by patriotic sentiment as to transgress the convention that keeps a fictional world separate from its author:
INTRODUCTION from:
Reading the
Abstract: In the study of religions, we find that certain key texts come to define their interpretive communities, for both the communities themselves and the scholars who study them.¹ Texts are an appealing source for the cultivation of understanding; they seem stable and fixed in a way that a religious community, comprising people who change through time and contexts, simply is not. But a text is not a source unless it is brought to life through reading and interpretation, irrespective of the vicissitudes of time and context. Reading and interpretation necessarily negate, to some extent, the stability or fixedness of a
Book Title: Milton and the Rabbis-Hebraism, Hellenism, and Christianity
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Shoulson Jeffrey S.
Abstract: Shoulson is unconvinced of a direct link between a specific collection of rabbinic writings and Milton's works. He argues that many of Milton's poetic ideas that parallel midrash are likely to have entered Christian discourse not only through early modern Christian Hebraicists but also through Protestant writers and preachers without special knowledge of Hebrew. At the heart of Shoulson's inquiry lies a fundamental question: When is an idea, a theme, or an emphasis distinctively Judaic or Hebraic and when is it Christian? The difficulty in answering such questions reveals and highlights the fluid interaction between ostensibly Jewish, Hellenistic, and Christian modes of thought not only during the early modern period but also early in time when rabbinic Judaism and Christianity began.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/shou12328
2 “Taking Sanctuary Among the Jews”: from:
Milton and the Rabbis
Abstract: Of Reformation in England and the Cawses that Hitherto have Hindered it (May 1641), the first of Milton’s five pamphlets written against the prelacy, the hierarchical clergy of the Church of England, begins with a protracted lament over the decline of the Church since the time of the apostles. Charged with key terms from the debates over religious doctrine, not only between the Roman church and Protestants, or among diverse Protestant groupings, but also from the age-old debates between Judaism and Christianity, Milton’s account of this decline describes
Epilogue: from:
Milton and the Rabbis
Abstract: In chapter 5 I suggested a parallel between Milton’s imagined forecast of future times in the final books of
Paradise Lost and the rabbinic fantasy of Moses’s visit to the bet midrash of R. Akiba. Both mountaintop scenes render complex perspectives on history, politics, belief, and human agency. These two scenes of instruction offer useful insights into one another, but Milton’s portrayal of Michael’s postlapsarian instructions to Adam has for its precursor a more explicit biblical account of divinely granted vistas, Moses’s Pisgah sight, just before his death, in Deuteronomy 34.¹ Anticipating Milton’s own reworking of this culminating biblical episode,
Introduction: from:
Winged Faith
Abstract: When I arrived in my hometown of Bangalore, on a warm February night in 1998, my intention was to study the economic forces of globalization and their impact on Indian religion, particularly temple Hinduism. Globalization was at that time seen by theorists as the dominance of the culture of the West (Euro-America) upon the rest of the world (Appadurai 1996; Berger 1997), the “center upon the periphery” (Hannerz 1990:i–x) as cultural flows were thought to move from the hegemonic West to the peripheral rest of the world. India had tentatively opened its economy to global market forces in 1989,
3 Illusion, Play, and Work in a Moral Community: from:
Winged Faith
Abstract: Whitefield, Bangalore. February 20, 1998. Harini (forty-two) told me that she had heard (through the devotee’s grapevine) that Sathya Sai Baba had moved to Brindavan, his summer ashram some twelve miles outside Bangalore. She said she would accompany me for early-morning darshan. I was excited. This was the first time I would actually get to see Sathya Sai Baba in person. Darshan was between 6 a.m. and 7 a.m., and she said there would be huge crowds (which I did not believe). We left Bangalore at 3 a.m. and we arrived at 3:30 a.m. In spite of the total darkness
4 Renegotiating the Body: from:
Winged Faith
Abstract: November 18, 2001. I visited the Sai ashram in Puttaparthi for the first time. I wore loose
salwar trousers and a long kurtalike shirt, similar in style to the salwar suits that north Indian women wore. No sooner had I entered the ashram then I was met with annoyed looks from all sides. Undeterred but discomfited, I joined the long queue for darshan with other women devotees. All around me the women devotees were completely covered, either in saris of white or long kaftans and robes with white duppatas (scarves). Soon after I sat down in the darshan queue, one
2 MARXISM AND MEMORY from:
Left-Wing Melancholia
Abstract: At first sight, Marxism and memory appear as two foreign continents. Since Marx, many scholars belonging to his intellectual tradition have elaborated philosophies of history or investigated historical temporalities—E. P. Thompson’s studies on time and work discipline in early industrial capitalism are the most known—but have never conceptualized collective remembrance. Opened one century ago by Henri Bergson and Maurice Halbwachs, the scholarly debate on memory deeply shaped sociology, historiography, and philosophy without receiving any significant Marxist contribution. The rare assessments made by Marxist scholars on this topic simply reproduce a classical, positivistic dichotomy between history and memory: memory
4 BOHEMIA: from:
Left-Wing Melancholia
Abstract: Popularized by a novel by Henri Murger in 1846,¹ then consecrated by Puccini in his famous opera, the idea of Bohemia, in its current use, implies a lifestyle and a particular attitude toward aesthetics. Rejection of bourgeois conventions, lack (or voluntary renunciation) of a fixed abode and regular work, frequent visits to cafés, cabarets, and popular taverns, a taste for nocturnal life, ostentatious sexual freedom, a keen penchant for alcohol and drugs, the fair communal share of meager available resources, and even, at times, a certain “sectarianism” colored by the use of secret codes shared only by a select brotherhood
5 MARXISM AND THE WEST from:
Left-Wing Melancholia
Abstract: Like all classics, Marx both “transcends” his own time and remains a thinker of the nineteenth century. With an incredibly imaginative strength, he was able to grasp tendencies that, still embryonic in his epoch, developed spectacularly during the following century. This astonishing modernity has led many scholars to interpret his works in naïvely anachronistic terms, as if they had been written in our age. Marx contributed to the forging of our lexicon, but many concepts through which we today apprehend the nineteenth century—for instance, imperialism—simply did not exist during his lifetime, or did not have the same meaning
6 ADORNO AND BENJAMIN: from:
Left-Wing Melancholia
Abstract: Deeply shaped by the presentiment of an impending catastrophe, the dialogue between Adorno and Benjamin depicts a melancholy constellation. In a previous chapter, we have already observed the ambivalent assessments of Benjamin on melancholy, as they appear in both his book on the German tragic drama and his strongly critical review of Erich Kästner’s novels. Now, it is important to emphasize the melancholic character of Benjamin himself. According to many witnesses, melancholy was his deepest disposition; it also explains his fascination with
Angelus Novus, the Paul Klee painting that he acquired in Munich at the beginning of the 1920s, which
Two CIRCLING VULTURES: from:
Flight Ways
Abstract: In conversations about vultures in India, people have often recounted to mehaving seen large numbers of these birds gathered along the banks of rivers, consuming the dead bodies of cattle and other animals, including sometimes people, as they float by or wash up on the water’s edge. When it meets a vulture’s beak, it matters very little if this flesh, this meat, was once a human or some other kind of animal. In fact, numerous human societies throughout history—including current-day Parsee communities in India and Buddhists in Tibet and elsewhere—utilize exposure to vultures as the most appropriate
Three URBAN PENGUINS: from:
Flight Ways
Abstract: There is something remarkable about a shoreline, a place where water meetsland and gives rise to a sense of productive confusion between two worlds. For most humans, one of these worlds—the place of earth, of firm land beneath our feet—is home. The other is a place for occasional visits, where we cannot really expect to live our lives, to survive for long periods of time. For penguins, this littoral zone must surely also mark a transition between two worlds, each with its own threats and possibilities. But while penguins are undoubtedly more comfortable, more agile, less vulnerable
Five MOURNING CROWS: from:
Flight Ways
Abstract: Death, mourning, and that collective mode of dying called “extinction” arepainfully drawn together in this short quote. The bird in question, now long dead itself, was a member of that rarest of corvid species, the Hawaiian Crow (Corvus hawaiiensis). At the time that biologist Glenn Klinger spoke these words, only three of these birds were left in the wild. A couple of years later, in 2002, the last sighting of a free-living Hawaiian Crow was made. Since then, the only surviving crows have lived in captivity, subjects of a long-running breeding and conservation program (USFWS 2009).
Book Title: Not Being God-A Collaborative Autobiography
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): MCCUAIG WILLIAM
Abstract: Gianni Vattimo, a leading philosopher of the continental school, has always resisted autobiography. But in this intimate memoir, the voice of Vattimo as thinker, political activist, and human being finds its expression on the page. With Piergiorgio Paterlini, a noted Italian writer and journalist, Vattimo reflects on a lifetime of politics, sexual radicalism, and philosophical exuberance in postwar Italy. Turin, the city where he was born and one of the intellectual capitals of Europe (also the city in which Nietzsche went mad), forms the core of his reminiscences, enhanced by fascinating vignettes of studying under Hans Georg Gadamer, teaching in the United States, serving as a public intellectual and interlocutor of Habermas and Derrida, and working within the European Parliament to unite Europe.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/vatt14720
3 CLOSENESS from:
Not Being God
Abstract: When I saw my sister dead, in that absurd bed at the Maria Vittoria Hospital, I really thought: look, she’s in another world now, in another time; she’s closer to Julius Caesar than to me.
4 THE UNTIED SHOELACE from:
Not Being God
Abstract: I’ve lived through some tough times. I’ve heard bombs falling overhead. Air-raid sirens. When I was five I was already going to school, and I recall one day when we had to race for the bomb shelter. I had one shoelace undone, and I was in real trouble because we had to run and I couldn’t tie my shoes by myself. A little girl helped me.
6 PLATEAU ROSA from:
Not Being God
Abstract: In my university years, I didn’t yet know what to think. I dallied with the Thomism of Caramello and with Pareyson’s philosophy, and like many left-wing Catholics at that time I read Emmanuel Mounier and Jacques Maritain, looking for a way out of the jaws of the trap formed by liberal capitalism and the bureaucratized communism of the Soviet Union. In short, I didn’t want to be identified either as a liberal or a Marxist. And—like Maritain—I was especially interested in criticizing the dogmas of modernity.
17 CATHOLIC ACTION from:
Not Being God
Abstract: It was summertime, and I had finished high school with excellent results. I set out for the Falzarego Pass with a group of Catholic students, of whom I was the leader, for ten days of school camp at one of the numerous former fascist youth organization colonies, some of which had been handed over to the Communists and others to the Catholics. A fine band of individuals, some smarter than me. Like Michele Straniero, for example.
21 ULCER AND MAO from:
Not Being God
Abstract: I read continually, stuff I hadn’t had time or
22 THE DREAM OF A THING from:
Not Being God
Abstract: Who can ever recount summer afternoons, the lassitude and the languor of certain summer Sundays? Nothing else is so close to the surface of the skin, alive and desperate at the same time.
30 FORCED OUT from:
Not Being God
Abstract: Not just any elections. The eighteen-year-olds were voting for the first time, and after the clamorous defeat of the moderates in the divorce
32 THE TWO BOYS from:
Not Being God
Abstract: Sergio Mamino came from Mondovì. He was passionate about art, and to study art at that time you had to enroll in the faculty of letters and philosophy. He had discovered that his president was openly gay, and he wanted to meet me. He had also discovered that I lived up on the hill and had sent me a postcard at Valsalice from a vacation spot. I couldn’t figure out who this Sergio was who was writing me.
35 WEAK THOUGHT from:
Not Being God
Abstract: In autumn 1979, more than fifteen years after my first “debilist” reading of Heidegger, the idea of the history of Being as that of its growing lighter and more distant assumed a firm contour in my mind. And as time went on, so did all that it entailed, and was still to yield in the years ahead.
36 ROOTS from:
Not Being God
Abstract: He was a policeman. One lasting memory I have—I don’t know how, it must have been a phrase I heard in the house later—is that some evenings Papa “
era di cinta” (“had perimeter duty”). I heard it as “incinta” (pregnant) and didn’t understand it at all. It meant he was on duty outside the jail. I practically never knew him. I didn’t have time; he died of pulmonitis (like my sister later) when I
41 IN HISTORY from:
Not Being God
Abstract: Heidegger thinks that Being is not structure but occurrence, that which eventuates in history in different cultures, in different epochs. He puts a lot of emphasis on the notion of epoch. Epoch is historical epoch, but also—from the Greek—suspension. A historical epoch is a freezing of the constellations, an interval in the movement of the heavens. In the epochs, different horizons open up, with different truth criteria. Sometimes it’s believed that there are vampires, other times that there are atoms.
49 WITH THE YOUNGER SON from:
Not Being God
Abstract: If I hadn’t cultivated my dream of a multiple family. If I had behaved worse, been more jealous, more adamant . . . maybe Gianpiero wouldn’t have gone to that sauna in Nice, maybe he wouldn’t have caught AIDS. Sometimes I tell myself that. That is the regret I have concerning Gianpiero, my remorse. But I know that’s not really how things are. He and I were both going to saunas already before that.
50 THE FRANKFURT SCHOOL from:
Not Being God
Abstract: When Sergio found out he had a tumor six centimeters in diameter on his left lung, I was leaving to give yet another lecture in Spain. It was February 2003.
51 THE RICH FIANCÉE from:
Not Being God
Abstract: Right after the Heidelberg years I courted, and spent a lot of time with, a girl, a student of mine, whom I still see and who never married. She’s a psychoanalyst.
52 THE LITTLE OLD LADY IN NEW YORK from:
Not Being God
Abstract: At a certain point, the industrialist Cesare Romiti was apparently looking for an “intellectual ally.” And he thought I was it. It was the time of the Alliance for Turin.
59 IF STALIN HAD BEEN A NIHILIST from:
Not Being God
Abstract: At the same time technology—and about this Adorno, the philosopher I was thinking of working on after I graduated, and whom Pareyson, God bless him, steered me away from, might be right—is headed toward such possibilities of control that it is unlikely that
60 EVIL, WHAT A PITY from:
Not Being God
Abstract: One of these days I will give a course in the university on the meaning of evil. I’ve been pondering it for a long time.
63 THE TREASURE CHEST OF BEING from:
Not Being God
Abstract: Heidegger goes so far as to write that death is the treasure chest of Being. Death as the treasure chest of Being? Is that possible? Yes. Look, how many times can I alter my thinking over the course of a lifetime? Four, five, that’s about all. If I didn’t die, I’d always be clinging to the last
Book Title: Not Being God-A Collaborative Autobiography
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): MCCUAIG WILLIAM
Abstract: Gianni Vattimo, a leading philosopher of the continental school, has always resisted autobiography. But in this intimate memoir, the voice of Vattimo as thinker, political activist, and human being finds its expression on the page. With Piergiorgio Paterlini, a noted Italian writer and journalist, Vattimo reflects on a lifetime of politics, sexual radicalism, and philosophical exuberance in postwar Italy. Turin, the city where he was born and one of the intellectual capitals of Europe (also the city in which Nietzsche went mad), forms the core of his reminiscences, enhanced by fascinating vignettes of studying under Hans Georg Gadamer, teaching in the United States, serving as a public intellectual and interlocutor of Habermas and Derrida, and working within the European Parliament to unite Europe.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/vatt14720
3 CLOSENESS from:
Not Being God
Abstract: When I saw my sister dead, in that absurd bed at the Maria Vittoria Hospital, I really thought: look, she’s in another world now, in another time; she’s closer to Julius Caesar than to me.
4 THE UNTIED SHOELACE from:
Not Being God
Abstract: I’ve lived through some tough times. I’ve heard bombs falling overhead. Air-raid sirens. When I was five I was already going to school, and I recall one day when we had to race for the bomb shelter. I had one shoelace undone, and I was in real trouble because we had to run and I couldn’t tie my shoes by myself. A little girl helped me.
6 PLATEAU ROSA from:
Not Being God
Abstract: In my university years, I didn’t yet know what to think. I dallied with the Thomism of Caramello and with Pareyson’s philosophy, and like many left-wing Catholics at that time I read Emmanuel Mounier and Jacques Maritain, looking for a way out of the jaws of the trap formed by liberal capitalism and the bureaucratized communism of the Soviet Union. In short, I didn’t want to be identified either as a liberal or a Marxist. And—like Maritain—I was especially interested in criticizing the dogmas of modernity.
17 CATHOLIC ACTION from:
Not Being God
Abstract: It was summertime, and I had finished high school with excellent results. I set out for the Falzarego Pass with a group of Catholic students, of whom I was the leader, for ten days of school camp at one of the numerous former fascist youth organization colonies, some of which had been handed over to the Communists and others to the Catholics. A fine band of individuals, some smarter than me. Like Michele Straniero, for example.
21 ULCER AND MAO from:
Not Being God
Abstract: I read continually, stuff I hadn’t had time or
22 THE DREAM OF A THING from:
Not Being God
Abstract: Who can ever recount summer afternoons, the lassitude and the languor of certain summer Sundays? Nothing else is so close to the surface of the skin, alive and desperate at the same time.
30 FORCED OUT from:
Not Being God
Abstract: Not just any elections. The eighteen-year-olds were voting for the first time, and after the clamorous defeat of the moderates in the divorce
32 THE TWO BOYS from:
Not Being God
Abstract: Sergio Mamino came from Mondovì. He was passionate about art, and to study art at that time you had to enroll in the faculty of letters and philosophy. He had discovered that his president was openly gay, and he wanted to meet me. He had also discovered that I lived up on the hill and had sent me a postcard at Valsalice from a vacation spot. I couldn’t figure out who this Sergio was who was writing me.
35 WEAK THOUGHT from:
Not Being God
Abstract: In autumn 1979, more than fifteen years after my first “debilist” reading of Heidegger, the idea of the history of Being as that of its growing lighter and more distant assumed a firm contour in my mind. And as time went on, so did all that it entailed, and was still to yield in the years ahead.
36 ROOTS from:
Not Being God
Abstract: He was a policeman. One lasting memory I have—I don’t know how, it must have been a phrase I heard in the house later—is that some evenings Papa “
era di cinta” (“had perimeter duty”). I heard it as “incinta” (pregnant) and didn’t understand it at all. It meant he was on duty outside the jail. I practically never knew him. I didn’t have time; he died of pulmonitis (like my sister later) when I
41 IN HISTORY from:
Not Being God
Abstract: Heidegger thinks that Being is not structure but occurrence, that which eventuates in history in different cultures, in different epochs. He puts a lot of emphasis on the notion of epoch. Epoch is historical epoch, but also—from the Greek—suspension. A historical epoch is a freezing of the constellations, an interval in the movement of the heavens. In the epochs, different horizons open up, with different truth criteria. Sometimes it’s believed that there are vampires, other times that there are atoms.
49 WITH THE YOUNGER SON from:
Not Being God
Abstract: If I hadn’t cultivated my dream of a multiple family. If I had behaved worse, been more jealous, more adamant . . . maybe Gianpiero wouldn’t have gone to that sauna in Nice, maybe he wouldn’t have caught AIDS. Sometimes I tell myself that. That is the regret I have concerning Gianpiero, my remorse. But I know that’s not really how things are. He and I were both going to saunas already before that.
50 THE FRANKFURT SCHOOL from:
Not Being God
Abstract: When Sergio found out he had a tumor six centimeters in diameter on his left lung, I was leaving to give yet another lecture in Spain. It was February 2003.
51 THE RICH FIANCÉE from:
Not Being God
Abstract: Right after the Heidelberg years I courted, and spent a lot of time with, a girl, a student of mine, whom I still see and who never married. She’s a psychoanalyst.
52 THE LITTLE OLD LADY IN NEW YORK from:
Not Being God
Abstract: At a certain point, the industrialist Cesare Romiti was apparently looking for an “intellectual ally.” And he thought I was it. It was the time of the Alliance for Turin.
59 IF STALIN HAD BEEN A NIHILIST from:
Not Being God
Abstract: At the same time technology—and about this Adorno, the philosopher I was thinking of working on after I graduated, and whom Pareyson, God bless him, steered me away from, might be right—is headed toward such possibilities of control that it is unlikely that
60 EVIL, WHAT A PITY from:
Not Being God
Abstract: One of these days I will give a course in the university on the meaning of evil. I’ve been pondering it for a long time.
63 THE TREASURE CHEST OF BEING from:
Not Being God
Abstract: Heidegger goes so far as to write that death is the treasure chest of Being. Death as the treasure chest of Being? Is that possible? Yes. Look, how many times can I alter my thinking over the course of a lifetime? Four, five, that’s about all. If I didn’t die, I’d always be clinging to the last
Introduction from:
Spreading Buddha's Word in East Asia
Author(s) Chia Lucille
Abstract: The importance of studying the historical development of a religious canon seems obvious. Equally obvious is the daunting challenge of trying to study the many aspects of an immense canon incorporating thousands of works. In the case of the Buddhist canon in Chinese, compiled and recompiled many times and transmitted throughout East Asia,¹ much research remains to be done, especially as the canon continues to evolve in the modern digital age of information. In this volume, we present nine articles of original research on the tradition of the Chinese Buddhist canon that exemplify new directions in studying and understanding the
15 ENDURING CHANGE: from:
Comparative Journeys
Abstract: Whether there is such a thing as the “essence” or “soul” of China and whether it can change over time are hardly idle questions, questions that I’d like to examine on this occasion. Even for a single individual, the questions of the subject and personal identity-who am I and in what sense the I of today is the same as the I of yesterday-are questions of great complexity and much discussion.¹ To note the difficulty inherent in my project does not mean that students of China have been reluctant to debate the peculiar or distinctive characteristics of that civilization. Indeed,
15 ENDURING CHANGE: from:
Comparative Journeys
Abstract: Whether there is such a thing as the “essence” or “soul” of China and whether it can change over time are hardly idle questions, questions that I’d like to examine on this occasion. Even for a single individual, the questions of the subject and personal identity-who am I and in what sense the I of today is the same as the I of yesterday-are questions of great complexity and much discussion.¹ To note the difficulty inherent in my project does not mean that students of China have been reluctant to debate the peculiar or distinctive characteristics of that civilization. Indeed,
15 ENDURING CHANGE: from:
Comparative Journeys
Abstract: Whether there is such a thing as the “essence” or “soul” of China and whether it can change over time are hardly idle questions, questions that I’d like to examine on this occasion. Even for a single individual, the questions of the subject and personal identity-who am I and in what sense the I of today is the same as the I of yesterday-are questions of great complexity and much discussion.¹ To note the difficulty inherent in my project does not mean that students of China have been reluctant to debate the peculiar or distinctive characteristics of that civilization. Indeed,
Book Title: Chinese History and Culture-Sixth Century B.C.E. to Seventeenth Century
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Duke Michael S.
Abstract: The recipient of the Kluge Prize for lifetime achievement in the humanities and the Tang Prize for "revolutionary research" in Sinology, Ying-shih Yü is a premier scholar of Chinese studies.
Chinese History and Culturevolumes 1 and 2 bring his extraordinary oeuvre to English-speaking readers. Spanning two thousand years of social, intellectual, and political change, the essays in these volumes investigate two central questions through all aspects of Chinese life: what core values sustained this ancient civilization through centuries of upheaval, and in what ways did these values survive in modern times?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/yu--17858
2. Life and Immortality in the Mind of Han China from:
Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: Confucius once said, “While you do not know life, how can you know about death?”¹ Life and death are among the basic problems with which the traditional Chinese mind has been grappling unceasingly ever since the time of Confucius, and to which various kinds of answers have been given. Especially during the Han Period, these two problems were discussed with even greater enthusiasm, not only because of scholars’ intellectual interest but also because of the existential necessity of the common people.
4. New Evidence on the Early Chinese Conception of Afterlife from:
Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: The spectacular discovery of the three Han tombs at Mawangdui in Changsha, Hunan, in 1972–1974 was indeed an event of singular importance in the history of Han studies. Of the three tombs, 1 and 3 in particular aroused worldwide attention. Tomb 3 is known for its preservation of a large quantity of silk manuscripts, some of which were long assumed lost. Tomb 1 made headline news at the time of its excavation, primarily for the well-preserved body of its occupant, the wife of the Marquis of Dai 噡, who prob ably died around the 168 B.C.E. When the full report
5. Food in Chinese Culture: from:
Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: In 558 B.C.E., a nobleman of the Rong people told a Chinese statesman, “Our drink, our food, and our clothes are all different from those of the Chinese states” (
Zuozhuan[Zuo Commentary to the Spring and Autumn Annals], fourteenth year of Duke Xiang). Thus, in one simple sentence, this Rong nobleman of the Spring and Autumn Period (771–481 B.C.E.) aptly distinguished the Chinese from the non-Chinese. Culture may sometimes be defined as a way of life. If so, can we think of anything more fundamental to a culture than eating and drinking? It is on this assumption that I
6. The Seating Order at the Hong Men Banquet from:
Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: Xiang Yu on the same day asked the Lord of Pei [Liu Bang] to stay and join in feasting. Xiang Yu and Xiang Bo sat facing east. Uncle sat facing south. Uncle was Fan Zeng, whom Xiang Yu treated as if he were a younger brother of his father. The Lord of Pei sat facing north, with Zhang Liang in attendance facing west. Fan Zeng several times eyed Xiang Yu, and thrice lifted the jade girdle that he
8. Intellectual Breakthroughs in the Tang-Song Transition from:
Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: Viewed from inside and understood in its own terms, the long intellectual tradition of China can be discerned to have three major breakthroughs. The earliest breakthrough took place in classical antiquity around the time of Confucius (551–479 B.C.E.), when vari ous philosophical visions such as the Confucian, the Mohist, and the Daoist began to emerge out of the primeval cultural tradition that the author of the last chapter of the
Zhuangziidentifies as “the original unity of Heaven and Earth” or, simply, the originalDao道. The same author is also the first historian of Chinese thought to introduce the
9. Morality and Knowledge in Zhu Xi’s Philosophical System from:
Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: Generally speaking, since the time of Zisi 子思“honoring the moral nature” (
zun dexing尊德性) and “following the path of inquiry and study” (dao wenxue道問學) have been the two basic methods of instruction according to which people are taught to exert themselves.¹ Now, what Zijing 子靜 [Lu Xiangshan 陸象山, 1139–1193] talks about are matters pertaining exclusively to “honoring the moral nature,” whereas in my daily discussions I have placed a greater emphasis on “inquiry and study.” . . . From now on, I ought to
Book Title: Chinese History and Culture-Sixth Century B.C.E. to Seventeenth Century
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Duke Michael S.
Abstract: The recipient of the Kluge Prize for lifetime achievement in the humanities and the Tang Prize for "revolutionary research" in Sinology, Ying-shih Yü is a premier scholar of Chinese studies.
Chinese History and Culturevolumes 1 and 2 bring his extraordinary oeuvre to English-speaking readers. Spanning two thousand years of social, intellectual, and political change, the essays in these volumes investigate two central questions through all aspects of Chinese life: what core values sustained this ancient civilization through centuries of upheaval, and in what ways did these values survive in modern times?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/yu--17858
2. Life and Immortality in the Mind of Han China from:
Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: Confucius once said, “While you do not know life, how can you know about death?”¹ Life and death are among the basic problems with which the traditional Chinese mind has been grappling unceasingly ever since the time of Confucius, and to which various kinds of answers have been given. Especially during the Han Period, these two problems were discussed with even greater enthusiasm, not only because of scholars’ intellectual interest but also because of the existential necessity of the common people.
4. New Evidence on the Early Chinese Conception of Afterlife from:
Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: The spectacular discovery of the three Han tombs at Mawangdui in Changsha, Hunan, in 1972–1974 was indeed an event of singular importance in the history of Han studies. Of the three tombs, 1 and 3 in particular aroused worldwide attention. Tomb 3 is known for its preservation of a large quantity of silk manuscripts, some of which were long assumed lost. Tomb 1 made headline news at the time of its excavation, primarily for the well-preserved body of its occupant, the wife of the Marquis of Dai 噡, who prob ably died around the 168 B.C.E. When the full report
5. Food in Chinese Culture: from:
Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: In 558 B.C.E., a nobleman of the Rong people told a Chinese statesman, “Our drink, our food, and our clothes are all different from those of the Chinese states” (
Zuozhuan[Zuo Commentary to the Spring and Autumn Annals], fourteenth year of Duke Xiang). Thus, in one simple sentence, this Rong nobleman of the Spring and Autumn Period (771–481 B.C.E.) aptly distinguished the Chinese from the non-Chinese. Culture may sometimes be defined as a way of life. If so, can we think of anything more fundamental to a culture than eating and drinking? It is on this assumption that I
6. The Seating Order at the Hong Men Banquet from:
Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: Xiang Yu on the same day asked the Lord of Pei [Liu Bang] to stay and join in feasting. Xiang Yu and Xiang Bo sat facing east. Uncle sat facing south. Uncle was Fan Zeng, whom Xiang Yu treated as if he were a younger brother of his father. The Lord of Pei sat facing north, with Zhang Liang in attendance facing west. Fan Zeng several times eyed Xiang Yu, and thrice lifted the jade girdle that he
8. Intellectual Breakthroughs in the Tang-Song Transition from:
Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: Viewed from inside and understood in its own terms, the long intellectual tradition of China can be discerned to have three major breakthroughs. The earliest breakthrough took place in classical antiquity around the time of Confucius (551–479 B.C.E.), when vari ous philosophical visions such as the Confucian, the Mohist, and the Daoist began to emerge out of the primeval cultural tradition that the author of the last chapter of the
Zhuangziidentifies as “the original unity of Heaven and Earth” or, simply, the originalDao道. The same author is also the first historian of Chinese thought to introduce the
9. Morality and Knowledge in Zhu Xi’s Philosophical System from:
Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: Generally speaking, since the time of Zisi 子思“honoring the moral nature” (
zun dexing尊德性) and “following the path of inquiry and study” (dao wenxue道問學) have been the two basic methods of instruction according to which people are taught to exert themselves.¹ Now, what Zijing 子靜 [Lu Xiangshan 陸象山, 1139–1193] talks about are matters pertaining exclusively to “honoring the moral nature,” whereas in my daily discussions I have placed a greater emphasis on “inquiry and study.” . . . From now on, I ought to
Book Title: Chinese History and Culture-Seventeenth Century Through Twentieth Century
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Duke Michael S.
Abstract: The recipient of the Kluge Prize for lifetime achievement in the humanities and the Tang Prize for "revolutionary research" in Sinology, Ying-shih Yü is a premier scholar of Chinese studies.
Chinese History and Culturevolumes 1 and 2 bring his extraordinary oeuvre to English-speaking readers. Spanning two thousand years of social, intellectual, and political change, the essays in these volumes investigate two central questions through all aspects of Chinese life: what core values sustained this ancient civilization through centuries of upheaval, and in what ways did these values survive in modern times?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/yu--17860
3. Dai Zhen’s Choice Between Philosophy and Philology from:
Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: Dai Zhen 戴震 (1724–1777) presents two entirely different images in the intellectual history of the mid-Qing Period: that of a classical philologist and that of a Confucian philosopher. During his own time, it was Dai the philologist who received universal recognition in the scholarly world. On the other hand, Dai the philosopher was largely ignored or even denounced by his contemporaries. Zhang Xuecheng’s 章學誠 (1738–1801) great appreciation of Dai’s philosophical writings was not shared at all by such common friends as Zhu Yun 朱筠 (1729–1781) and Shao Jinhan 邵晉涵 (1743–1796). In modern times, it is largely
4. Zhang Xuecheng Versus Dai Zhen: from:
Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: In the learned judgment of modern intellectual historians, Dai Zhen 戴震 (1724–1777) and Zhang Xuecheng 學誠 (1738–1801) are the two towering scholars in eighteenth-century China.¹ Perhaps nothing would strike the contemporaries of Dai and Zhang, including their common friends, such as Zhu Yun 朱筠 (1729–1781) and Shao Jinhan 邵晉涵 (1743–1796), as more absurd than this modern judgment. In their own times, Dai was widely acknowledged as the foremost leader of the new philological movement in Confucian classical studies, whereas Zhang, though well respected as a serious theorist of history and literature in a small coterie of
8. The Radicalization of China in the Twentieth Century from:
Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: Since the turn of the century, a radical mode of thinking has dominated the Chinese mind. The history of Chinese thought in the twentieth century may be interpreted as a process of rapid radicalization. As a matter of fact, never in its long intellectual tradition of over 2.5 millennia had China been as thoroughly radicalized as in modern times.
17. The Study of Chinese History: from:
Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: History has always been the most glorious of all branches of knowledge in the scholarly tradition of China. It has declined markedly nowadays, however. This decline is not an isolated or unusual phenomenon; it is merely a part of the poverty of the Chinese scholarly world in modern times. Not only natural sciences, but social sciences and the humanities have not had adequate opportunities for development during the last fifty or sixty years. Even in philosophy, a subject that has the most to do with raising the intellectual level of the average educated person, research and instruction have not gone
18. Confucianism and China’s Encounter with the West in Historical Perspective from:
Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: The thesis of a “clash of civilizations” has been much debated since Samuel P. Huntington published his famous article in
Foreign Affairsin 1993.¹ InThe Clash of Civilizations and the Remaking of World Order(New York: Simon & Schuster, 1996; page numbers in parentheses for this title only), Huntington gives his original thesis a more detailed documentation and, at the same time, also somewhat modifies some of the sharp formulations in the earlier article. However, the book is essentially an elaboration, not a revision, of the original argument. To avoid distorting Huntington, I would like to present the core
4 O ser alienado: from:
A persistência dos deuses: religião, cultura e natureza
Abstract: O mesmo movimento que deu impulso ao conceito de evolução, associado também à expansão do cristianismo, ironicamente suscitou, nos círculos ilustrados europeus, a possibilidade da irreligiosidade (ausência de religião e de sentimento religioso) em larga escala, e, como vimos no capítulo anterior, uma justificativa teórica e empiricamente plausível para tal. Dentre os que deram tais justificativas, em termos originais e duradouros, estavam os “mestres da suspeita” do fim do século XIX e início do século XX : Marx, Nietzsche (1844-1900) e Freud.
PERGUNTE NOVAMENTE AOS CAVALOS: from:
Epistemologias da história
Author(s) de Paula Gonçalves Max Alexandre
Abstract: Nascido no final do século XIX, em Berlim, numa família judia assimilada, Walter Benjamin foi filho de um bem-sucedido leiloeiro de arte que expandiu seus negócios para o ramo de investimentos em propriedades. Na juventude, Benjamin participou do movimento juvenil antiautoritário de retorno à natureza e só o deixou quando o líder, Wyneken, declarou apoio a I Guerra Mundial. Cursou filologia na Universidade de Freiburg, em 1912, e fugiu do serviço militar alegando um problema de saúde. Logo depois da sua dispensa, Benjamin mudou-se para a Suíça, país neutro durante a Primeira Guerra Mundial, lugar em que ficou trabalhando em
PERGUNTE NOVAMENTE AOS CAVALOS: from:
Epistemologias da história
Author(s) de Paula Gonçalves Max Alexandre
Abstract: Nascido no final do século XIX, em Berlim, numa família judia assimilada, Walter Benjamin foi filho de um bem-sucedido leiloeiro de arte que expandiu seus negócios para o ramo de investimentos em propriedades. Na juventude, Benjamin participou do movimento juvenil antiautoritário de retorno à natureza e só o deixou quando o líder, Wyneken, declarou apoio a I Guerra Mundial. Cursou filologia na Universidade de Freiburg, em 1912, e fugiu do serviço militar alegando um problema de saúde. Logo depois da sua dispensa, Benjamin mudou-se para a Suíça, país neutro durante a Primeira Guerra Mundial, lugar em que ficou trabalhando em
PERGUNTE NOVAMENTE AOS CAVALOS: from:
Epistemologias da história
Author(s) de Paula Gonçalves Max Alexandre
Abstract: Nascido no final do século XIX, em Berlim, numa família judia assimilada, Walter Benjamin foi filho de um bem-sucedido leiloeiro de arte que expandiu seus negócios para o ramo de investimentos em propriedades. Na juventude, Benjamin participou do movimento juvenil antiautoritário de retorno à natureza e só o deixou quando o líder, Wyneken, declarou apoio a I Guerra Mundial. Cursou filologia na Universidade de Freiburg, em 1912, e fugiu do serviço militar alegando um problema de saúde. Logo depois da sua dispensa, Benjamin mudou-se para a Suíça, país neutro durante a Primeira Guerra Mundial, lugar em que ficou trabalhando em
PERGUNTE NOVAMENTE AOS CAVALOS: from:
Epistemologias da história
Author(s) de Paula Gonçalves Max Alexandre
Abstract: Nascido no final do século XIX, em Berlim, numa família judia assimilada, Walter Benjamin foi filho de um bem-sucedido leiloeiro de arte que expandiu seus negócios para o ramo de investimentos em propriedades. Na juventude, Benjamin participou do movimento juvenil antiautoritário de retorno à natureza e só o deixou quando o líder, Wyneken, declarou apoio a I Guerra Mundial. Cursou filologia na Universidade de Freiburg, em 1912, e fugiu do serviço militar alegando um problema de saúde. Logo depois da sua dispensa, Benjamin mudou-se para a Suíça, país neutro durante a Primeira Guerra Mundial, lugar em que ficou trabalhando em
Relação entre violência urbana e práticas sociais em espaços públicos a partir da análise do discurso: from:
Pesquisa qualitativa em geografia: reflexões teórico-conceituais e aplicadas
Author(s) de Santana de Souza Júnior Xisto Serafim
Abstract: A difusão das práticas de violência nos espaços urbanos tem produzido interferências significativas no processo de estruturação destes. Caracterizado como um problema coletivo, o aumento dos casos de violência interfere diretamente nas práticas cotidianas dos indivíduos, ao despertar neles sentimentos como medo e apreensão, e nas próprias relações de produção, uma vez que condiciona, no tempo e no espaço, as ações de estruturação da cidade.
INTRODUÇÃO from:
José de Alencar: sou americano para o que der e vier
Abstract: José de Alencar, fundador do romance americano no Brasil . José de Alencar: americano de raiz e de fé.José de Alencar: sou americano para o que der e vier. Esses três possíveis títulos mostram um pouco do que foram as primeiras inquirições sobre um sentimento de americanidade nos romances desse escritor. O primeiro parecia mais interessante, talvez pomposo, substituía-se o título de patriarca do romance brasileiro pelo de pai do romance americano no país, o que já propunha, indiretamente, uma visão do escritor em contraponto com outros romancistas da América, que haviam se dedicado a discutir as identidades nacionais
CAPÍTULO III ALENCAR E OS PAMPAS, UMA POSSIBILIDADE DE OLHARES CRUZADOS ENTRE BRASIL E ARGENTINA NO SÉCULO XIX from:
José de Alencar: sou americano para o que der e vier
Abstract: O sentimento de americanidade traz consigo um esforço de identificação continental, que não se prende às fronteiras nacionais, criando um diálogo transnacional, interamericano, permitindo estabelecer relações entre as literaturas dos povos da América.
CONSIDERAÇÕES FINAIS from:
José de Alencar: sou americano para o que der e vier
Abstract: O esforço empreendido durante o livro foi de provar a existência de um sentimento de americanidade em alguns romances de José de Alencar, principalmente em
O Gaúcho(1978),O Guarani(2008),Iracema(1865) eUbirajara(1999), fazendo um contraponto com outros autores hispânicos como Domingo Faustino Sarmiento, José Hernández, Juan Léon Mera, Clorinda Matto de Turner, Jorge Icaza e Ciro Alegría, estes dois últimos para ilustrar a continuidade de um indigenismo americano após o século XIX. Essa preocupação esteve pautada em praticar um comparatismo interamericano, tomando como base a produção literária das Américas, para fugir ao caminho tradicional da literatura
(Um estudo provisório) sobre a natureza do estado de emergência from:
Ficção brasileira no século XXI: terceiras leituras
Author(s) LIMA ROGÉRIO
Abstract: Tomando como ponto de partida a análise da produção recente de ficcionistas latino-americanos, é possível refletir sobre as formas e estruturas de construção da memorialística ficcional da América Latina pós-ditadura e sobre os temas abordados por ela: a memória dos estados de exceção; o exílio sul-americano e transatlântico, o sentimento de pertencimento patriótico; o afastamento de forma hostil da nação, a fragmentação da identidade; a dificuldade de inserção numa nova cultura e a convivência com a melancolia e recordações dolorosas, que surgem sob a forma de fragmentos narrativos irreconciliáveis.
Chapter One A FLIGHT PERFECTED AT DEATH: from:
Healing Dramas
Abstract: The first time I saw Tonio, in July 1995 , he was sitting in his wheelchair watching television, dressed in a worn-out robe, his short-cut hair in a net fashioned from a piece of what looked like a woman’s dark-skin colored panty hose. He was about ninety years old at the time. Someone at the library of Loíza had told me that he was one of the most renowned brujos of Puerto Rico.
Book Title: The Last Cannibals-A South American Oral History
Publisher: University of Texas Press
Author(s): BASSO ELLEN B.
Abstract: An especially comprehensive study of Brazilian Amazonian Indian history, The Last Cannibals is the first attempt to understand, through indigenous discourse, the emergence of Upper Xingú society. Drawing on oral documents recorded directly from the native language, Ellen Basso transcribes and analyzes nine traditional Kalapalo stories to offer important insights into Kalapalo historical knowledge and the performance of historical narratives within their nonliterate society. This engaging book challenges the familiar view of biography as a strictly Western literary form. Of special interest are biographies of powerful warriors whose actions led to the emergence of a more recent social order based on restrained behaviors from an earlier time when people were said to be fierce and violent. From these stories, Basso explores how the Kalapalo remember and understand their past and what specific linguistic, psychological, and ideological materials they employ to construct their historical consciousness. Her book will be important reading in anthropology, folklore, linguistics, and South American studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7560/708181
CHAPTER 2 The Language in Storytelling from:
The Last Cannibals
Abstract: Kalapalo told me stories from the very first week in Aifa, their settlement. As a novice, my first research goal was to try to learn how to speak to the residents in their own language, and for this purpose I began my work by asking for lists of words for things, using as a translator the single Portuguese-speaking man present in the settlement at that time and the only person who used a Portuguese name. In 1952, Antonio had been taken as a teenager to live in Rio de Janeiro along with his sister Dyaqui, who was being married to
CHAPTER 5 Warriors from:
The Last Cannibals
Abstract: At the center of certain Kalapalo stories about the past is the remarkable figure of the warrior. The
tafaku oto, or “bow master,” was a man who had undergone special training from an early age to become a perfectly skilled and deadly marksman. According to Kalapalo, before firearms became prevalent, many boys were trained to betafaku oto. If a parent had dreamed about the sparrow hawk it was felt that the next male child would, if properly prepared, become atafaku oto. Sometimes young boys were selected for patient and dedicated training in order to fight long-standing enemies. In
CHAPTER 6 Ahpĩũ’s Story about Wapagepundaka from:
The Last Cannibals
Abstract: The first warrior story I ever heard was told during my visit to the Kalapalo in 1967. I was staying in a big house belonging to one of the largest households in Aifa, led by Ugaki, her husband, Maidyuta, and her brother Agakuni and his wife, Kafundzu. Ugaki and Agakuni were the sister and brother of Ahpĩũ, one of two important leaders of Aifa community at the time. He lived in a house directly across the central plaza from theirs. Nearly every day in the dry season, the old leader would visit his relatives in the late afternoon to drink
CHAPTER 11 Ugaki Tells of Afuseti, a Woman Stolen by Angikogo from:
The Last Cannibals
Abstract: Once the Alto Xingu communities recognized that they had come to share common values, they began to develop ways of dealing with outsiders that were peaceful rather than aggressive. This was sometimes even the case in situations where outsiders posed threats to them. In certain stories about events that took place long after the end of cannibalistic blood feuding, the warrior remains an important though more peaceful figure. But a more ominous practice is developing: the killing of known people, usually people living within a community, because of witchcraft accusations. The fear and anger directed formerly against enemies living elsewhere
THIRTEEN WHY LITERATURE MATTERS from:
Why the Humanities Matter
Abstract: This chapter is inspired by that moment (usually midway through a semester of teaching an upper-division literature course filled with mostly smart and curious English majors) when brows furrow quizzically and that mental ticker-tape starts clicking: Why are we reading and analyzing books when no one I know even reads? Why not get up to speed with the times and analyze something more relevant, like film? What value does this all have in the bigger scheme of things anyway? I usually take pause from the work at hand and throw the question back out to the students. They come up
FOURTEEN INTERPRETATION, INTERDISCIPLINARITY, AND THE PEOPLE from:
Why the Humanities Matter
Abstract: In response to a conference on the role of theory in society held at the University of Chicago on April 11, 2003, the
New York Timesreporter Emily Eakin concluded, “These are uncertain times for literary scholars. The era of big theory is over. The grand paradigms that swept through humanities departments in the 20th century—psychoanalysis, structuralism, Marxism, deconstruction, post-colonialism—have lost favor or been abandoned. Money is tight. And the left ist politics with which literary theorists have traditionally been associated have taken a beating” (9).¹ In this chapter I look at how several scholars have responded to
FOUR DEATH AND LANDSCAPE from:
Death and the Classic Maya Kings
Abstract: Patricia McAnany has observed that creating a “genealogy of place” has been of historic concern to Maya communities. The establishment and recognition of land rights, in both colonial- and modern-era Yucatán, seems to have involved questions of inheritance, habitual encroachment, or primary occupancy. McAnany has suggested that similar ideas existed in pre-Hispanic times, with the “principle of first occupancy” defining lineage customs and conflicts in the Classic Maya lowlands. In essence, the first individuals to colonize a given area gain permanent ownership of the best agricultural lands; families who arrive later are forced to either fight for decent arable land
5 Traces of the Past from:
Cosmopolitanism in Mexican Visual Culture
Abstract: Nineteenth-century Mexican architecture is widely recognized as eclectic. Especially from about 1880 to the first decade of the twentieth century, Mexican cities exhibited buildings of multiple stylistic tendencies, including neoclassical, Baroque, neo-Gothic, and art nouveau, indicative of a cosmopolitan consciousness. Sometimes an architect would employ various styles in a single edifice. As in the study of colonial Mexican architecture, scholars have attempted to classify the architecture of the period with little success: the buildings consistently elude traditional stylistic classifications.¹
7 MODERNISM AND THE CONCEPT OF REFORM: from:
Sanctioning Modernism
Author(s) KIECKHEFER RICHARD
Abstract: On the face of it, the rise of modern church architecture appears closely linked to the development of liturgical reform. Both were anticipated in Western Europe shortly before World War I, became discernible movements after that war, gained mainstream adherence after World War II, and became canonical if not virtually universal after the Second Vatican Council, not only in Roman Catholicism but in mainline Protestant denominations as well. At every stage there were proponents of modern church design who took inspiration and authorization from the work of liturgical reformers. Writers on church architecture of the mid-twentieth century sometimes report with
FIVE Inka Writing from:
Narrative Threads
Author(s) Ascher Robert
Abstract: If one had to choose a place and a time to mark the start of the downfall of the Inka state, it would surely be the plaza in the town of Cajamarca on November 16, 1532. Let us follow Prescott’s (1900: 378
SIX String Registries: from:
Narrative Threads
Author(s) Assadourian Carlos Sempat
Abstract: The present chapter,¹ based on the Spanish chronicles and other colonial documents, represents an introduction to the types of accounting registers devised by Andean societies, as well as to the new uses to which they were put at the time of the European conquest of the New World. The analysis is very straightforward in the case of the khipu used for accounting purposes, but it is more complex and daring in relation to those khipu that served to register historical and literary narratives.
ELEVEN Pérez Bocanegra’s Ritual formulario: from:
Narrative Threads
Author(s) Harrison Regina
Abstract: In this age of electronic memory devices—telephone message machines with personal “reminders” built in, caller ID gadgets that remember who just called (even though we didn’t pick up the phone and even though they didn’t say a word), e-mail that’s stored forever in bottomless computer pits (retrieved in cases of harassment or to increase severance pay in layoffs), digital radio settings remembering the spot where we tune in during our commute, computers that remember how many “hits” a Web site receives—it is difficult to imagine a time when discussion of memory was theological, resulting in threats of hellfire
TWELVE Patrimonial Khipu in a Modern Peruvian Village: from:
Narrative Threads
Author(s) Salomon Frank
Abstract: This chapter concerns a central Peruvian community that owns and ceremonially uses inherited cord records in perpetuating kinship corporations directly continuous with those of Inka and perhaps pre-Inka times. We know of these corporations because the village in question, San Andrés de Tupicocha in Huarochirí Province, Peru, is self-described in the only known early-colonial source that explains an Andean religious system in an Andean language, namely, the Quechua Huarochirí Manuscript (ca. 1608; translations include Salomon and Urioste 1991 and Taylor 1987). The cord records, though not themselves of pre-Hispanic antiquity, form a material link in a chain of institutional continuity
1 ON INTERPRETATION: from:
The Political Unconscious
Abstract: This is evidently a much more extreme position than the modest claim, surely acceptable to everyone, that certain texts have social and historical—sometimes even political—resonance. Traditional literary history has, of course, never prohibited the investigation of such topics as the
2 MAGICAL NARRATIVES: from:
The Political Unconscious
Abstract: The Marxian vision of history outlined in the previous chapter has sometimes, as we have observed, been described as a “comic” archetype or a “romance” paradigm.¹ What is meant thereby is the salvational or redemptive perspective of some secure future, from which, with William Morris’ Time Traveller, we can have our “fill of the pleasure of the eyes without any of that sense of incongruity, that dread of approaching ruin, which had always beset me hitherto when I had been among the beautiful works of art of the past.”² In such a future, indeed, or from its perspective, our own
6 CONCLUSION: from:
The Political Unconscious
Abstract: The conception of the political unconscious developed in the preceding pages has tended to distance itself, at certain strategic moments, from those implacably polemic and demystifying procedures traditionally associated with the Marxist practice of ideological analysis. It is now time to confront the latter directly and to spell out such modifications in more detail. The most influential lesson of Marx—the one which ranges him alongside Freud and Nietzsche as one of the great negative diagnosticians of contemporary culture and social life—has, of course, rightly been taken to be the lesson of false consciousness, of class bias and ideological
Afterword: from:
Mourning in America
Abstract: If Freddie Gray spent any time during his twenty-five years imagining his own funeral, it seems unlikely that he could have predicted the hours-long event that took place on April 27, 2015, at the New Shiloh Baptist Church in West Baltimore. Thousands of mourners were in attendance, including a U.S. cabinet secretary, a member of the U.S. House of Representatives, and multiple civil rights movement icons—not to mention a dozen or so television crews and even more newspaper and magazine journalists. The funeral took place just over a week after Gray’s death as a result of injuries sustained while
Afterword: from:
Mourning in America
Abstract: If Freddie Gray spent any time during his twenty-five years imagining his own funeral, it seems unlikely that he could have predicted the hours-long event that took place on April 27, 2015, at the New Shiloh Baptist Church in West Baltimore. Thousands of mourners were in attendance, including a U.S. cabinet secretary, a member of the U.S. House of Representatives, and multiple civil rights movement icons—not to mention a dozen or so television crews and even more newspaper and magazine journalists. The funeral took place just over a week after Gray’s death as a result of injuries sustained while
Book Title: Making All the Difference-Inclusion, Exclusion, and American Law
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): MINOW MARTHA
Abstract: Martha Minow takes a hard look at the way our legal system functions in dealing with people on the basis of race, gender, age, ethnicity, religion, and disability. Minow confronts a variety of dilemmas of difference resulting from contradictory legal strategies-strategies that attempt to correct inequalities by sometimes recognizing and sometimes ignoring differences. Exploring the historical sources of ideas about difference, she offers challenging alternative ways of conceiving of traits that legal and social institutions have come to regard as "different." She argues, in effect, for a constructed jurisprudence based on the ability to recognize and work with perceptible forms of difference.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt1tm7j8t
CHAPTER 4 When Difference Has Its Home from:
Making All the Difference
Abstract: Art restorers use the word
pentimentoto refer to what happens when one painting has been painted over another: the earlier painting, over time, may begin to show through.¹ Perhaps it is not surprising that similar reminders of the past appear in legal arguments: lawyers and judges routinely reuse materials from the past in constructing the new. Yet the reappearance of earlier patterns of thought in legal arguments does not always reflect deliberate design.
CHAPTER 10 Dying and Living from:
Making All the Difference
Abstract: Because of changes in medical technology, the birth of a baby born with severe defects now signals a moment of decision.¹ It is a decision about medical treatment; it is also a decision about what meanings the family and society want to give to the life of the infant. It is a decision that cannot be answered by reference to rights—or without them. finally, it is a decision about patterns and qualities of relationships beyond that one family.² Babies who in earlier times would have died may now be rescued through surgery and other medical intervention, but the intervention
5 Hermeneutics, Print, and “Facts” from:
Language as Hermeneutic
Abstract: Our text-centered mentality, and especially our print-centered mentality, can and does create special illusions about the nature of “facts” which affects concepts of interpretation or hermeneutics. By habituating us to visually fixed representations of spoken words texts can lead us to overvalue fixity itself. We tend to think of a “fact” as in some sense something fixed. Yet its fixity is paradoxical, for a fact can only be identified by the use of words. And words are not fixed, for they are events in time. Moreover, there is no one thing to say about anything—a fact which seems to
7 Meaning, Hermeneutic, and Interpersonal Trust from:
Language as Hermeneutic
Abstract: Ultimately, meaning and hermeneutic are based on personal intersubjective trust. A few years ago, as I know directly from a participant, a national task force was set up to devise a sign or symbol to serve as a warning notice to mark a projected underground storage dump in the United States for dangerous nuclear waste. The sign or symbol was to be one that would render its warning of serious danger to all ages forever, independently of any languages that might be spoken from now until the end of time and independently of any divergencies in cultures. Of course—although
8 Hermeneutic and Communication in Oral Cultures from:
Language as Hermeneutic
Abstract: The high esteem of oral peoples for the “man of words” or “woman of words,” the one who can verbalize to the maximum, is well known, and sometimes is so
Language as Hermeneutic: from:
Language as Hermeneutic
Author(s) Zlatic Thomas D.
Abstract: Walter J. Ong envisioned
Language as Hermeneuticas a distillation of his life work. In 1990 he explained to a potential publisher, “Like this book of Havelock’s [The Muse Learns to Write], mine is a synthesis which I hope will prove useful at multiple scholarly levels, although its tone is at times also somewhat personal” (“Letter to Maud Wilcox”).
Time, Digitization, and Dalí’s Memory from:
Language as Hermeneutic
Author(s) Ong Walter J.
Abstract: In this post-Einsteinian age, we are aware, as Plato and his heirs for over two millennia had not been, that time is a constituent and not merely an adjunct of material being. Over succeeding periods of time, matter enters into different and apparently irreversible states. When we think of the universe today, time has always to be figured in, as peremptorily as the dimensions of length, breadth, and thickness. This attention to time appears imperative today for any serious cosmology.
Picturing Ong’s Oral Hermeneutic from:
Language as Hermeneutic
Author(s) Zlatic Thomas D.
Abstract: Walter Ong was drawn toward Salvador Dalí’s masterpiece,
The Persistence of Memory, which eerily depicts limpid, melting timepieces over a surreal barren landscape.¹ In chapter 10 of the 1990 version ofLanguage as Hermeneutic, “Logos and Digitization,” Ong differentiated human memory from computer recall by referencing Dalí’s painting. And, after abandoning his plans to publishLanguage as Hermeneutic, Ong in 1994 offered to the journalConnotationshis essay “Time, Digitization, and Dalí’s Memory,” an expanded reflection onThe Persistence of Memory. The editors rejected it, judging it to be more philosophical than philological: an “essay on human time”² (Leimberg). They
5 Hermeneutics, Print, and “Facts” from:
Language as Hermeneutic
Abstract: Our text-centered mentality, and especially our print-centered mentality, can and does create special illusions about the nature of “facts” which affects concepts of interpretation or hermeneutics. By habituating us to visually fixed representations of spoken words texts can lead us to overvalue fixity itself. We tend to think of a “fact” as in some sense something fixed. Yet its fixity is paradoxical, for a fact can only be identified by the use of words. And words are not fixed, for they are events in time. Moreover, there is no one thing to say about anything—a fact which seems to
7 Meaning, Hermeneutic, and Interpersonal Trust from:
Language as Hermeneutic
Abstract: Ultimately, meaning and hermeneutic are based on personal intersubjective trust. A few years ago, as I know directly from a participant, a national task force was set up to devise a sign or symbol to serve as a warning notice to mark a projected underground storage dump in the United States for dangerous nuclear waste. The sign or symbol was to be one that would render its warning of serious danger to all ages forever, independently of any languages that might be spoken from now until the end of time and independently of any divergencies in cultures. Of course—although
8 Hermeneutic and Communication in Oral Cultures from:
Language as Hermeneutic
Abstract: The high esteem of oral peoples for the “man of words” or “woman of words,” the one who can verbalize to the maximum, is well known, and sometimes is so
Language as Hermeneutic: from:
Language as Hermeneutic
Author(s) Zlatic Thomas D.
Abstract: Walter J. Ong envisioned
Language as Hermeneuticas a distillation of his life work. In 1990 he explained to a potential publisher, “Like this book of Havelock’s [The Muse Learns to Write], mine is a synthesis which I hope will prove useful at multiple scholarly levels, although its tone is at times also somewhat personal” (“Letter to Maud Wilcox”).
Time, Digitization, and Dalí’s Memory from:
Language as Hermeneutic
Author(s) Ong Walter J.
Abstract: In this post-Einsteinian age, we are aware, as Plato and his heirs for over two millennia had not been, that time is a constituent and not merely an adjunct of material being. Over succeeding periods of time, matter enters into different and apparently irreversible states. When we think of the universe today, time has always to be figured in, as peremptorily as the dimensions of length, breadth, and thickness. This attention to time appears imperative today for any serious cosmology.
Picturing Ong’s Oral Hermeneutic from:
Language as Hermeneutic
Author(s) Zlatic Thomas D.
Abstract: Walter Ong was drawn toward Salvador Dalí’s masterpiece,
The Persistence of Memory, which eerily depicts limpid, melting timepieces over a surreal barren landscape.¹ In chapter 10 of the 1990 version ofLanguage as Hermeneutic, “Logos and Digitization,” Ong differentiated human memory from computer recall by referencing Dalí’s painting. And, after abandoning his plans to publishLanguage as Hermeneutic, Ong in 1994 offered to the journalConnotationshis essay “Time, Digitization, and Dalí’s Memory,” an expanded reflection onThe Persistence of Memory. The editors rejected it, judging it to be more philosophical than philological: an “essay on human time”² (Leimberg). They
5 Hermeneutics, Print, and “Facts” from:
Language as Hermeneutic
Abstract: Our text-centered mentality, and especially our print-centered mentality, can and does create special illusions about the nature of “facts” which affects concepts of interpretation or hermeneutics. By habituating us to visually fixed representations of spoken words texts can lead us to overvalue fixity itself. We tend to think of a “fact” as in some sense something fixed. Yet its fixity is paradoxical, for a fact can only be identified by the use of words. And words are not fixed, for they are events in time. Moreover, there is no one thing to say about anything—a fact which seems to
7 Meaning, Hermeneutic, and Interpersonal Trust from:
Language as Hermeneutic
Abstract: Ultimately, meaning and hermeneutic are based on personal intersubjective trust. A few years ago, as I know directly from a participant, a national task force was set up to devise a sign or symbol to serve as a warning notice to mark a projected underground storage dump in the United States for dangerous nuclear waste. The sign or symbol was to be one that would render its warning of serious danger to all ages forever, independently of any languages that might be spoken from now until the end of time and independently of any divergencies in cultures. Of course—although
8 Hermeneutic and Communication in Oral Cultures from:
Language as Hermeneutic
Abstract: The high esteem of oral peoples for the “man of words” or “woman of words,” the one who can verbalize to the maximum, is well known, and sometimes is so
Language as Hermeneutic: from:
Language as Hermeneutic
Author(s) Zlatic Thomas D.
Abstract: Walter J. Ong envisioned
Language as Hermeneuticas a distillation of his life work. In 1990 he explained to a potential publisher, “Like this book of Havelock’s [The Muse Learns to Write], mine is a synthesis which I hope will prove useful at multiple scholarly levels, although its tone is at times also somewhat personal” (“Letter to Maud Wilcox”).
Time, Digitization, and Dalí’s Memory from:
Language as Hermeneutic
Author(s) Ong Walter J.
Abstract: In this post-Einsteinian age, we are aware, as Plato and his heirs for over two millennia had not been, that time is a constituent and not merely an adjunct of material being. Over succeeding periods of time, matter enters into different and apparently irreversible states. When we think of the universe today, time has always to be figured in, as peremptorily as the dimensions of length, breadth, and thickness. This attention to time appears imperative today for any serious cosmology.
Picturing Ong’s Oral Hermeneutic from:
Language as Hermeneutic
Author(s) Zlatic Thomas D.
Abstract: Walter Ong was drawn toward Salvador Dalí’s masterpiece,
The Persistence of Memory, which eerily depicts limpid, melting timepieces over a surreal barren landscape.¹ In chapter 10 of the 1990 version ofLanguage as Hermeneutic, “Logos and Digitization,” Ong differentiated human memory from computer recall by referencing Dalí’s painting. And, after abandoning his plans to publishLanguage as Hermeneutic, Ong in 1994 offered to the journalConnotationshis essay “Time, Digitization, and Dalí’s Memory,” an expanded reflection onThe Persistence of Memory. The editors rejected it, judging it to be more philosophical than philological: an “essay on human time”² (Leimberg). They
5 Hermeneutics, Print, and “Facts” from:
Language as Hermeneutic
Abstract: Our text-centered mentality, and especially our print-centered mentality, can and does create special illusions about the nature of “facts” which affects concepts of interpretation or hermeneutics. By habituating us to visually fixed representations of spoken words texts can lead us to overvalue fixity itself. We tend to think of a “fact” as in some sense something fixed. Yet its fixity is paradoxical, for a fact can only be identified by the use of words. And words are not fixed, for they are events in time. Moreover, there is no one thing to say about anything—a fact which seems to
7 Meaning, Hermeneutic, and Interpersonal Trust from:
Language as Hermeneutic
Abstract: Ultimately, meaning and hermeneutic are based on personal intersubjective trust. A few years ago, as I know directly from a participant, a national task force was set up to devise a sign or symbol to serve as a warning notice to mark a projected underground storage dump in the United States for dangerous nuclear waste. The sign or symbol was to be one that would render its warning of serious danger to all ages forever, independently of any languages that might be spoken from now until the end of time and independently of any divergencies in cultures. Of course—although
8 Hermeneutic and Communication in Oral Cultures from:
Language as Hermeneutic
Abstract: The high esteem of oral peoples for the “man of words” or “woman of words,” the one who can verbalize to the maximum, is well known, and sometimes is so
Language as Hermeneutic: from:
Language as Hermeneutic
Author(s) Zlatic Thomas D.
Abstract: Walter J. Ong envisioned
Language as Hermeneuticas a distillation of his life work. In 1990 he explained to a potential publisher, “Like this book of Havelock’s [The Muse Learns to Write], mine is a synthesis which I hope will prove useful at multiple scholarly levels, although its tone is at times also somewhat personal” (“Letter to Maud Wilcox”).
Time, Digitization, and Dalí’s Memory from:
Language as Hermeneutic
Author(s) Ong Walter J.
Abstract: In this post-Einsteinian age, we are aware, as Plato and his heirs for over two millennia had not been, that time is a constituent and not merely an adjunct of material being. Over succeeding periods of time, matter enters into different and apparently irreversible states. When we think of the universe today, time has always to be figured in, as peremptorily as the dimensions of length, breadth, and thickness. This attention to time appears imperative today for any serious cosmology.
Picturing Ong’s Oral Hermeneutic from:
Language as Hermeneutic
Author(s) Zlatic Thomas D.
Abstract: Walter Ong was drawn toward Salvador Dalí’s masterpiece,
The Persistence of Memory, which eerily depicts limpid, melting timepieces over a surreal barren landscape.¹ In chapter 10 of the 1990 version ofLanguage as Hermeneutic, “Logos and Digitization,” Ong differentiated human memory from computer recall by referencing Dalí’s painting. And, after abandoning his plans to publishLanguage as Hermeneutic, Ong in 1994 offered to the journalConnotationshis essay “Time, Digitization, and Dalí’s Memory,” an expanded reflection onThe Persistence of Memory. The editors rejected it, judging it to be more philosophical than philological: an “essay on human time”² (Leimberg). They
7 A Politics of Enmity: from:
Inconceivable Effects
Abstract: Germania Death in Berlin (1956/1971), together with The Battle (1951/1974), Life of Gundling Lessing’s Sleep Dream Cry (1977), and Germania 3 Ghosts at the Dead Man (1995), testifies to Heiner Müller’s intense occupation with German history, particularly the history of violence. The play, which consists of thirteen miscellaneously interrelated scenes, generates a certain politics of enmity—a politics whose poetic itinerary has neither an evident beginning nor an end. We thus may well begin in the middle of the play, in a scene titled “Hommage à Stalin 1,” and we shall, for the time being, “imagine” (vorstellen) “Snow. Battle noise.
Book Title: Memory, Metaphor, and Aby Warburg's Atlas of Images- Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): Johnson Christopher D.
Abstract: The work of German cultural theorist and art historian Aby Warburg (1866-1929) has had a lasting effect on how we think about images. This book is the first in English to focus on his last project, the encyclopedic
Atlas of Images: Mnemosyne. Begun in earnest in 1927, and left unfinished at the time of Warburg's death in 1929, theMnemosyne-Atlasconsisted of sixty-three large wooden panels covered with black cloth. On these panels Warburg carefully, intuitively arranged some thousand black-and-white photographs of classical and Renaissance art objects, as well as of astrological and astronomical images ranging from ancient Babylon to Weimar Germany. Here and there, he also included maps, manuscript pages, and contemporary images taken from newspapers. Trying through these constellations of images to make visible the many polarities that fueled antiquity's afterlife, Warburg envisioned theMnemosyne-Atlasas a vital form of metaphoric thought.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt2jbph1
1 Atlas Gazed: from:
Memory, Metaphor, and Aby Warburg's Atlas of Images
Abstract: Memory Mnemosyne mater musarum. Mnemosyne, mother of the Muses. Mnemosyne, who personifies memory, whose pool in Hades complements Lethe, the river of forgetfulness. Mnemosyne, who, as Friedrich Hölderlin writes in the first strophe of his gnomic hymn “Mnemosyne” (ca. 1803), allows “the true” to occur despite, or perhaps because of, “time”:
Book Title: Memory, Metaphor, and Aby Warburg's Atlas of Images- Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): Johnson Christopher D.
Abstract: The work of German cultural theorist and art historian Aby Warburg (1866-1929) has had a lasting effect on how we think about images. This book is the first in English to focus on his last project, the encyclopedic
Atlas of Images: Mnemosyne. Begun in earnest in 1927, and left unfinished at the time of Warburg's death in 1929, theMnemosyne-Atlasconsisted of sixty-three large wooden panels covered with black cloth. On these panels Warburg carefully, intuitively arranged some thousand black-and-white photographs of classical and Renaissance art objects, as well as of astrological and astronomical images ranging from ancient Babylon to Weimar Germany. Here and there, he also included maps, manuscript pages, and contemporary images taken from newspapers. Trying through these constellations of images to make visible the many polarities that fueled antiquity's afterlife, Warburg envisioned theMnemosyne-Atlasas a vital form of metaphoric thought.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt2jbph1
1 Atlas Gazed: from:
Memory, Metaphor, and Aby Warburg's Atlas of Images
Abstract: Memory Mnemosyne mater musarum. Mnemosyne, mother of the Muses. Mnemosyne, who personifies memory, whose pool in Hades complements Lethe, the river of forgetfulness. Mnemosyne, who, as Friedrich Hölderlin writes in the first strophe of his gnomic hymn “Mnemosyne” (ca. 1803), allows “the true” to occur despite, or perhaps because of, “time”:
Book Title: Memory, Metaphor, and Aby Warburg's Atlas of Images- Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): Johnson Christopher D.
Abstract: The work of German cultural theorist and art historian Aby Warburg (1866-1929) has had a lasting effect on how we think about images. This book is the first in English to focus on his last project, the encyclopedic
Atlas of Images: Mnemosyne. Begun in earnest in 1927, and left unfinished at the time of Warburg's death in 1929, theMnemosyne-Atlasconsisted of sixty-three large wooden panels covered with black cloth. On these panels Warburg carefully, intuitively arranged some thousand black-and-white photographs of classical and Renaissance art objects, as well as of astrological and astronomical images ranging from ancient Babylon to Weimar Germany. Here and there, he also included maps, manuscript pages, and contemporary images taken from newspapers. Trying through these constellations of images to make visible the many polarities that fueled antiquity's afterlife, Warburg envisioned theMnemosyne-Atlasas a vital form of metaphoric thought.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt2jbph1
1 Atlas Gazed: from:
Memory, Metaphor, and Aby Warburg's Atlas of Images
Abstract: Memory Mnemosyne mater musarum. Mnemosyne, mother of the Muses. Mnemosyne, who personifies memory, whose pool in Hades complements Lethe, the river of forgetfulness. Mnemosyne, who, as Friedrich Hölderlin writes in the first strophe of his gnomic hymn “Mnemosyne” (ca. 1803), allows “the true” to occur despite, or perhaps because of, “time”:
Introduction from:
Condemned to Repeat?
Abstract: It was during the day, around 3 P.M. We heard gunfire, two shots far from us, and we were afraid it was the start of an operation. We took the possessions we could carry and fled. . . . in the meantime, the soldiers encircled the group left in the forest with the children and took them away to massacre them, even the babies. . . . Every time
4 Search for a Method: from:
The Light of Knowledge
Abstract: By the time we arrived in the village of Mayakkurichi a large group of people had already gathered in the main square around two young Arivoli Iyakkam volunteers who were standing under the diffuse light of a streetlamp. The women and children of the village were sitting on the ground in a circle. The teenage boys and men were all standing a few meters behind them in the darkness, or sitting on the verandas extending from nearby houses, forming an outer ring. No one noticed as Karuppiah and I walked up after leaving our motorbike under a banyan tree off
Book Title: The Emergency of Being-On Heidegger’s “Contributions to Philosophy”
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): POLT RICHARD
Abstract: The esoteric
Contributions to Philosophy, often considered Martin Heidegger's second main work afterBeing and Time, is crucial to any interpretation of his thought. Here Heidegger proposes that being takes place as "appropriation." Richard Polt's independent-minded account of theContributionsinterprets appropriation as an event of emergency that demands to be thought in a "future-subjunctive" mode. Polt explores the roots of appropriation in Heidegger's earlier philosophy; Heidegger's search for a way of thinking suited to appropriation; and the implications of appropriation for time, space, human existence, and beings as a whole. In his concluding chapter, Polt reflects critically on the difficulties of the radically antirationalist and antimodern thought of theContributions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt32b5pr
2 The Event of Thinking the Event from:
The Emergency of Being
Abstract: We have come far enough to see that appropriation demands a unique way of thinking and writing. Ordinarily, to think is to represent entities; but Heidegger wants to think of a coming-to-ownness that could take place between being-there and be-ing. Our task in this chapter is a
Wegbesinnung, a meditation on the way (77). This cannot simply be a meditation about the way, a discourse on method, as if we could determine the proper path before setting foot on it. To think about the thinking of appropriation is, at the same time, to think of appropriation itself—and even to
Book Title: Overkill-Sex and Violence in Contemporary Russian Popular Culture
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): BORENSTEIN ELIOT
Abstract: In
Overkill, Eliot Borenstein explores this lurid and often-disturbing cultural landscape in close, imaginative readings of such works asYou're Just a Slut, My Dear!(Ty prosto shliukha, dorogaia!), a novel about sexual slavery and illegal organ harvesting; theNymphotrilogy of books featuring a Chechen-fighting sex addict; and theMad DogandAntikillerseries of books and films recounting, respectively, the exploits of the Russian Rambo and an assassin killing in the cause of justice. Borenstein argues that the popular cultural products consumed in the post-perestroika era were more than just diversions; they allowed Russians to indulge their despair over economic woes and everyday threats. At the same time, they built a notion of nationalism or heroism that could be maintained even under the most miserable of social conditions, when consumers felt most powerless.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt7v77v
Chapter Two STRIPPING THE NATION BARE: from:
Overkill
Abstract: A Soviet primal scene for post-Soviet times:
Chapter Three PIMPING THE MOTHERLAND: from:
Overkill
Abstract: As Western ships approached a port in Sevastopol, Ukraine, in late April of 1997, a group of prostitutes lined up to greet them. Given the long-standing connection between shore leave and sex for hire, this was hardly unusual in and of itself, but these women planned a welcome with pickets rather than open arms. The sailors were part of the North Atlantic Treaty Organization’s Operation Sea Breeze, a set of practice maneuvers in the Black Sea. NATO could not have picked a worse time or a more troubled spot: the Russian government was outraged over plans for the organization’s imminent
Book Title: Paradigms for a Metaphorology- Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): Savage Robert
Abstract: An afterword by the translator, Robert Savage, positions the book in the intellectual context of its time and explains its continuing importance for work in the history of ideas.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt7v7cn
Translator’s Afterword. from:
Paradigms for a Metaphorology
Abstract: Paradigms for a Metaphorology was first published in 1960 in the Archive for the History of Concepts (Archiv für Begriffsgeschichte), simultaneously appearing in book form with the Bouvier Verlag in Bonn.¹ At the time, Hans Blumenberg (1920– 1996) was known to the philosophically interested public only as the author of a half dozen or so articles scattered in various journals and reference works, one of which—“Light as a Metaphor of Truth” (1957)²—deserves to be mentioned as a preliminary study, or “proto-paradigm,”³ for Paradigms. His biography to that point may be sketched in a few strokes. Persecuted by the
1. THE HUMAN from:
Artifice and Design
Abstract: Part of what it is to be “philosophical” about a subject is to take a long view of it. The view from eternity, seeing the world as a fixed and changeless whole, is a traditional ideal of Western theory. I prefer a timescale more down-to-earth, one that is secular, evolutionary, and unrepentantly anthropocentric: the time since the appearance of bipedal hominids, about 4.5 million years ago; since the first species of the
Homo genus, about 2.5 million years ago; and since the consolidation of the modern sapiens mutation, about 160,000 years ago. My scientific perspective is that of Darwinian evolution,
3. THE AESTHETIC from:
Artifice and Design
Abstract: Tools are not as simple as philosophers and behavioral scientists have supposed. Neither is aesthetic preference as subjective and undiscussable as its detractors assume. There is more to aesthetics than the private sentiments of people’s emotional side, and there’s little that is truly arbitrary in what people prefer or respond to. Differences are only to be expected, though they are ultimately constrained by our unshakable common evolution.
5. ART from:
Artifice and Design
Abstract: Billy Klüver was an electronics engineer and early laser researcher at Bell Labs. He was also the friend, assistant, and sometime collaborator of such artists as Robert Rauschenberg, Andy Warhol, and Jasper Johns. He advised Jean Tanquely on his
Homage to New York (1960), a self-destroying kinetic sculpture installed (for the duration) in the garden of New York’s Museum of Modern Art. In the late 1960s, Klüver was a leading figure in an Art and Technology Movement in the United States, having founded (with Rauschenberg) the organization Experiments in Art and Technology (1967). The idea was to cultivate the relationship
10 Art and Revolution: from:
The Total Work of Art in European Modernism
Abstract: Alexander Blok responded to the Bolshevik Revolution by delivering his own version of Nietzsche’s
Birth of Tragedyin a lecture in Petrograd in April 1919, entitled “The Decline of Humanism.” His musical theory of history recalls Saint-Simon’s alternation of organic and critical epochs but is much closer in mood to the basic topos of cultural pessimism, the decline of culture into civilization, elaborated in Oswald Spengler’sDecline of the West(1919): “Every movement has its birth in the spirit of music, through which it acts, but after a lapse of time it degenerates and begins to lose the musical, the
Book Title: Habits of the Heartland-Small-Town Life in Modern America
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): Macgregor Lyn C.
Abstract: Although most Americans no longer live in small towns, images of small-town life, and particularly of the mutual support and neighborliness to be found in such places, remain powerful in our culture. In
Habits of the Heartland, Lyn C. Macgregor investigates how the residents of Viroqua, Wisconsin, population 4,355, create a small-town community together. Macgregor lived in Viroqua for nearly two years. During that time she gathered data in public places, attended meetings, volunteered for civic organizations, talked to residents in their workplaces and homes, and worked as a bartender at the local American Legion post.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt7z6pd
[Part I Introduction] from:
Habits of the Heartland
Abstract: The first feature of Viroqua to make a deep impression on me was the larger-than-life fiberglass bull that stared sternly out over drivers on Highway 14 as they entered the town from the south. The bull advertised what was, at the time of my first visit in December 2000, a restaurant called Ricky’s. Passing the bull and heading into the downtown proper, I passed the VFW hall on the right, the Century 21 real estate office on the left and, shortly after that, the Latter-day Saints church, the optometry office, the Vernon County Historical Society Museum, and Vernon Memorial Hospital,
4 The Regulars: from:
Habits of the Heartland
Abstract: The faces at the bar during happy hour were almost always the same—the only difference from day to day was who took a day off from visiting the Legion. Standing behind the bar, I could usually predict who would sit in which seats: starting on the side of the bar to my right, it was usually Steve and Sandy, Fred and Sheryl, Darlene, Lucy, Vicki, sometimes Diane, “Squeaks” (Jerry), and occasionally Eric, and in the center, any combination of Terry, Tony, the other Tony, Brad and the other Lucy, Brad’s sister and mother, Jerry and his wife Vicky, Kim
5 Playing in the Same Sandbox? from:
Habits of the Heartland
Abstract: What did the existence of these three groups of people and their distinctive styles of community making mean for life in Viroqua? How permeable were these group boundaries? Could members of these groups get along well enough to get things done together if they needed to? In this chapter I examine how Viroquans’ tastes for different cultures of community played out in their interactions with one another. In general, these cultures of community did not hamper forming cross-group ties as individuals, but it sometimes made it hard for Viroquans to get things done together as groups.
Chapter 2 Time from:
Meaning, Truth, and Reference in Historical Representation
Abstract: We saw in the previous chapter that according to historicism, the nature, essence, or identity of a thing lies in its history. The unprecedented intellectual revolution effected by historicism in the early decades of the nineteenth century endowed all of human existence with a temporal dimension, with irreversible ramifications for how we conceive of ourselves and of our world even today. Historicism rolled out all things in time, as one might roll out in space with a rolling pin a crust for the bottom of a pie. All things human were now perceived to be subject to a development in
Book Title: Mourning Happiness-Narrative and the Politics of Modernity
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): Soni Vivasvan
Abstract: Soni explains that this puzzling phenomenon can only be comprehended by studying a structural transformation of the idea of happiness at the level of narrative form. Happiness is stripped of its ethical and political content, Soni demonstrates, when its intimate relation to narrative is destroyed. This occurs, paradoxically, in some of the most characteristic narratives of the period: eighteenth-century novels including
Pamela, The Vicar of Wakefield, andJulie; the pervasive sentimentalism of the time; Kant's ethics; and the political thought of Rousseau and Jefferson.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt7z7tm
Chapter 8 The Tragedies of Sentimentalism from:
Mourning Happiness
Abstract: The transformation from a narrative-based to an affective conception of happiness does not occur instantaneously; it unfolds over time, roughly between Richardson’s
Pamela and Kant’s second critique, under pressure from the trial narrative form. It is not individual narratives or theories that effect the transformation, though the importance of individual texts should not be underestimated as a measure of the evolving logic of trial. Rather, an entire cultural phenomenon is required to mediate the transition from a hermeneutic of happiness to a hermeneutic of trial: sentimentalism. Only through the discourse of sentimentalism does the logic of the trial narrative become
Chapter 9 Kantian Ethics and the Discourses of Modernity from:
Mourning Happiness
Abstract: The trial narrative paradigm achieves its most radical development and rigorous theorization in Kant’s writings on ethics, politics, history, and religion.¹ When Kant’s thought is interrogated from the perspective of the trial narrative, not only do we gain unconventional insight into the underlying narrative structure of his theories, but we also discover surprising continuities between the eighteenth-century novel, sentimentalism, and Kantian ethics.² Indeed, I would argue that novels such as
Pamela and Julie are the imaginative precondition for the emergence of Kantian ethics, just as Kant theorizes one of the most important narrative developments in the eighteenth century.³ Among his
Book Title: Mourning Happiness-Narrative and the Politics of Modernity
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): Soni Vivasvan
Abstract: Soni explains that this puzzling phenomenon can only be comprehended by studying a structural transformation of the idea of happiness at the level of narrative form. Happiness is stripped of its ethical and political content, Soni demonstrates, when its intimate relation to narrative is destroyed. This occurs, paradoxically, in some of the most characteristic narratives of the period: eighteenth-century novels including
Pamela, The Vicar of Wakefield, andJulie; the pervasive sentimentalism of the time; Kant's ethics; and the political thought of Rousseau and Jefferson.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt7z7tm
Chapter 8 The Tragedies of Sentimentalism from:
Mourning Happiness
Abstract: The transformation from a narrative-based to an affective conception of happiness does not occur instantaneously; it unfolds over time, roughly between Richardson’s
Pamela and Kant’s second critique, under pressure from the trial narrative form. It is not individual narratives or theories that effect the transformation, though the importance of individual texts should not be underestimated as a measure of the evolving logic of trial. Rather, an entire cultural phenomenon is required to mediate the transition from a hermeneutic of happiness to a hermeneutic of trial: sentimentalism. Only through the discourse of sentimentalism does the logic of the trial narrative become
Chapter 9 Kantian Ethics and the Discourses of Modernity from:
Mourning Happiness
Abstract: The trial narrative paradigm achieves its most radical development and rigorous theorization in Kant’s writings on ethics, politics, history, and religion.¹ When Kant’s thought is interrogated from the perspective of the trial narrative, not only do we gain unconventional insight into the underlying narrative structure of his theories, but we also discover surprising continuities between the eighteenth-century novel, sentimentalism, and Kantian ethics.² Indeed, I would argue that novels such as
Pamela and Julie are the imaginative precondition for the emergence of Kantian ethics, just as Kant theorizes one of the most important narrative developments in the eighteenth century.³ Among his
2 The Writer’s Audience Is Always a Fiction from:
Interfaces of the Word
Abstract: Although there is a large and growing literature on the differences between oral and written verbalization, many aspects of the differences have not been looked into at all, and many others, although well known, have not been examined in their full implications. Among these latter is the relationship of the socalled “audience” to writing as such, to the situation that inscribed communication establishes and to the roles that readers as readers are consequently called on to play. Some studies in literary history and criticism at times touch near this subject, but none, it appears, take it up in any historical
7 From Epithet to Logic: from:
Interfaces of the Word
Abstract: In 1672, two years before his death, John Milton published a logic textbook which he had written, it is quite certain, sometime in the years 1641–1647, and most probably sometime during the years 1645-1647, when he was teaching his two nephews and some other boys. The work is in Latin, as textbooks in all subjects normally had always been in Western Europe from classical times. Milton’s concern with logic, evinced by this book, shows itself throughout the corpus of his writings, as many modern studies have made clear.¹ Nowhere perhaps does this concern show itself more than in
Paradise
9 Maranatha: from:
Interfaces of the Word
Abstract: It is commonplace that the Hebrew and Christian scriptures, as compared to other sacred writings, have a special relationship to time. This relationship has commonly been thought of in terms of the attitudes toward time expressed or implied in
2 The Writer’s Audience Is Always a Fiction from:
Interfaces of the Word
Abstract: Although there is a large and growing literature on the differences between oral and written verbalization, many aspects of the differences have not been looked into at all, and many others, although well known, have not been examined in their full implications. Among these latter is the relationship of the socalled “audience” to writing as such, to the situation that inscribed communication establishes and to the roles that readers as readers are consequently called on to play. Some studies in literary history and criticism at times touch near this subject, but none, it appears, take it up in any historical
7 From Epithet to Logic: from:
Interfaces of the Word
Abstract: In 1672, two years before his death, John Milton published a logic textbook which he had written, it is quite certain, sometime in the years 1641–1647, and most probably sometime during the years 1645-1647, when he was teaching his two nephews and some other boys. The work is in Latin, as textbooks in all subjects normally had always been in Western Europe from classical times. Milton’s concern with logic, evinced by this book, shows itself throughout the corpus of his writings, as many modern studies have made clear.¹ Nowhere perhaps does this concern show itself more than in
Paradise
9 Maranatha: from:
Interfaces of the Word
Abstract: It is commonplace that the Hebrew and Christian scriptures, as compared to other sacred writings, have a special relationship to time. This relationship has commonly been thought of in terms of the attitudes toward time expressed or implied in
2 The Writer’s Audience Is Always a Fiction from:
Interfaces of the Word
Abstract: Although there is a large and growing literature on the differences between oral and written verbalization, many aspects of the differences have not been looked into at all, and many others, although well known, have not been examined in their full implications. Among these latter is the relationship of the socalled “audience” to writing as such, to the situation that inscribed communication establishes and to the roles that readers as readers are consequently called on to play. Some studies in literary history and criticism at times touch near this subject, but none, it appears, take it up in any historical
7 From Epithet to Logic: from:
Interfaces of the Word
Abstract: In 1672, two years before his death, John Milton published a logic textbook which he had written, it is quite certain, sometime in the years 1641–1647, and most probably sometime during the years 1645-1647, when he was teaching his two nephews and some other boys. The work is in Latin, as textbooks in all subjects normally had always been in Western Europe from classical times. Milton’s concern with logic, evinced by this book, shows itself throughout the corpus of his writings, as many modern studies have made clear.¹ Nowhere perhaps does this concern show itself more than in
Paradise
9 Maranatha: from:
Interfaces of the Word
Abstract: It is commonplace that the Hebrew and Christian scriptures, as compared to other sacred writings, have a special relationship to time. This relationship has commonly been thought of in terms of the attitudes toward time expressed or implied in
Whiteness and Time: from:
Studies in Medievalism XXIV
Author(s) Young Helen
Abstract: Nestled among the concrete, glass, and steel skyscrapers in the central business district of Perth, Western Australia, the mock Tudor frontage of “Ye London Court” is, at first sight, a curious landmark. Completed in 1937, the cobbled pedestrian mall compresses history, time, and place. A plaque at the entrance commemorates 1997 as both the 60th anniversary of the space and the 600th anniversary of the election of Dick Whittington as Lord Mayor of London. “Ye London Court” is just one of the many examples littered throughout the Australian landscape of medievalism being employed to foster connections between the antipodes and
Introduction from:
A Companion to the Works of Johann Gottfried Herder
Author(s) Koepke Wulf
Abstract: The present volume tries to convey a comprehensive picture of the life and works of Johann Gottfried Herder. The nineteen authors of the following seventeen articles provide an overview of the diverse aspects of Herder’s contributions to eighteenth-century culture and beyond. It is no coincidence that this volume is the first collaborative attempt ever to compile a
Companionto Herder’s works. Today it is possible and timely to do justice to Herder’s work and ideas as an achievement in their own right, to view his work as an independent historical-philosophical approach to almost all important problems of the Enlightenment and
6: Herder’s Aesthetics and Poetics from:
A Companion to the Works of Johann Gottfried Herder
Author(s) Swisher Michael
Abstract: Herder’s importance for the development of thinking in the field of aesthetics and poetics has always been recognized, but it has been difficult to define the nature and extent of his contributions. They came during a crucial time of evolution leading into what is generally termed as European Romanticism. It seems to be necessary to define more precisely where exactly to locate Herder in this momentous shift of worldviews. In the second half of the eighteenth century, aesthetics established itself as a discipline of philosophy. In contrast to earlier rule-based poetics, the question of the nature of art now came
9: Herder’s Views on the Germans and Their Future Literature from:
A Companion to the Works of Johann Gottfried Herder
Author(s) Koepke Wulf
Abstract: The condition of German literature and its place and function in society was one of Herder’s major concerns. He thought of “literature” in an older, more comprehensive sense: It included, in addition to poetry, all types of prose writing, not only drama and fiction, but also biographies and memoirs, historiography, essays on all topics of general interest including science, and last but not least writings in the area of theology and religion, from church hymns and sermons to edifying and scholarly treatises. Herder opposed the ongoing process of specialization and professionalization that made itself felt during his lifetime and that
Introduction: from:
A Companion to Julian of Norwich
Author(s) McAVOY LIZ HERBERT
Abstract: The above quotation, taken from a 1934 novel by Enid Dinnis, the main character of which is based loosely on the figure of Julian of Norwich, speaks volumes for the ‘industry’ of imaginative projection which Julian has become during the course of the last century or so. The very fact that this now obscure novel reached its sixth imprint in 1934 attests to its contemporary popularity and to a burgeoning fascination with Julian and the anchoritic life which she embraced. Since that time, Julian has become an increasingly familiar figure within both literary and non-literary circles, and both religious and
5 Saint Julian of the Apocalypse from:
A Companion to Julian of Norwich
Author(s) WATT DIANE
Abstract: And when God allemightye hadde shewed me plentyouslye and fully of his goodnesse, I desired of a certaine person that I loved howe it shulde be with hire. And in this desire I letted myselfe, for I was noght taught in this time. And than was I answerde in my reson, als it ware be a frendfulle meen: ‘Take it generally,
8 Julian’s Second Thoughts: from:
A Companion to Julian of Norwich
Author(s) WINDEATT BARRY
Abstract: The survival of two versions of the text of Julian of Norwich – both judged authentic by modern scholarship – provides an opportunity to chart the development of a mystic mind and a contemplative writer in their recording of how Julian responds to the challenge of interpreting her original revelatory experience.¹ Only one mid fifteenth-century manuscript – London, British Library MS Additional 37790 – preserves the shorter form, in a compendium of contemplative reading (outlined by Marleen Cré at the start of her essay), while the fuller version, some six times longer, survives complete in three post-Reformation manuscripts.³ Development in form and content between
12 Space and Enclosure in Julian of Norwich’s A Revelation Of Love from:
A Companion to Julian of Norwich
Author(s) MILES LAURA SAETVEIT
Abstract: As much as a person is the product of her surroundings, her interiors and her movements, so a text is shaped by the space in which it was composed. We know, because she tells us, that Julian experienced her visions in May 1373 while resting in a sickbed. We do not know where she wrote her first account of those visions, the Short Text of
A Vision Showed to a Devout Woman, finished in the 1380s, perhaps later. By the time she was fifty she was enclosed in an anchor-hold, and this is where we know she composed the Long
Book Title: Textual Cultures: Cultural Texts- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Treharne Elaine
Abstract: The dynamic fields of the history of the book and the sociology of the text are the areas this volume investigates, bringing together ten specially commissioned essays that between them demonstrate a range of critical and material approaches to medieval, early modern, and digital books and texts. They scrutinize individual medieval manuscripts to illustrate how careful re-reading of evidence permits a more nuanced apprehension of production, and reception across time; analyse metaphor for our understanding of the Byzantine book; examine the materiality of textuality from Beowulf to Pepys and the digital work in the twenty-first century; place manuscripts back into specific historical context; and re-appraise scholarly interpretation of significant periods of manuscript and print production in the later medieval and early modern periods. All of these essays call for a new assessment of the ways in which we read books and texts, making a major contribution to book history, and illustrating how detailed focus on individual cases can yield important new findings. Contributors: Elaine Treharne, Erika Corradini, Julia Crick, Orietta Da Rold, A.S.G. Edwards, Martin K. Foys, Whitney Anne Trettien, David L. Gants, Ralph Hanna, Robert Romanchuk, Margaret M. Smith, Liberty Stanavage.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt14brtk5
7: Self and Other: from:
Aesthetic Vision and German Romanticism
Abstract: Joseph von Eichendorff was born into a Catholic family in Upper Silesia in 1788. The Eichendorffs were landed gentry who had recently taken residence in a castle (Lubowitz). As Eichendorff grew older, however, it became clear that it would not be financially viable for him or his brother, Wilhelm, to continue as “gentleman farmers.” He studied in Halle and Heidelberg at the height of Romanticism, ending up in Vienna when he was twenty-one, where he spent time with the Schlegels and with Adam Müller, among others. Although he passed the civil service exam and served in the military, he was
Intimate Performance: from:
Cultural Performances in Medieval France
Author(s) Cruse Mark
Abstract: Nancy Regalado has devoted her career to one of the most important chapters in the history of writing in the West, the centuries between 1100 and 1500, which witnessed the rise of vernacular culture. As the use of writing expanded from ecclesiastical precincts ruled by Latin into courts and towns, with their common tongues, the very conception of writing – who could write, what could be written, how texts should look, how they should be transmitted, who could have access to them – underwent radical transformations. Nancy’s work has reminded us time and again that while texts are crucial when we study
2 Medieval Memories: from:
Middle English Romance and the Craft of Memory
Abstract: We all use our memories everyday and although recent research in neuroscience and its related fields can be highly complex and technical, the subject of these investigations – memory itself – is essential to all human behaviour or existence and the way we interact with other people and the world. We use, and are exposed to, memory all the time and so, in fact, are already well versed in its abilities and limitations whether we recognise our inherent human understanding of the faculty or not. The human awareness of and aptitude for memory forms the basis for influential studies in
2 Medieval Memories: from:
Middle English Romance and the Craft of Memory
Abstract: We all use our memories everyday and although recent research in neuroscience and its related fields can be highly complex and technical, the subject of these investigations – memory itself – is essential to all human behaviour or existence and the way we interact with other people and the world. We use, and are exposed to, memory all the time and so, in fact, are already well versed in its abilities and limitations whether we recognise our inherent human understanding of the faculty or not. The human awareness of and aptitude for memory forms the basis for influential studies in
Echoes from the Archive: from:
Edinburgh German Yearbook 9
Author(s) Ebbrecht-Hartmann Tobias
Abstract: Film footage made in the Third Reich and since found in the archive has recently provoked new forms of cinematic engagement with the incriminating images that often emphasize the perpetrator’s perspective on historic events. Georges Didi-Huberman calls these visual remnants of the Nazi past “ill seen images”; “ill seen” because they have been “poorly described, poorly captioned, poorly classed, poorly reproduced, poorly used” by historians as well as filmmakers.¹ In the case of archive films that remain from the Nazi period we are left with footage that is, for the most part, fragmentary and that has sometimes been edited in
Verbalizing Silence and Sorting Garbage: from:
Edinburgh German Yearbook 9
Author(s) Payne Charlton
Abstract: In the
Archeology of Knowledge, Michel Foucault identifies in the archive a “particular level” that “between tradition and oblivion, […] reveals the rules of a practice that enables statements both to survive and to undergo regular modification. It isthe general system of the formation and transformation of statements.”¹ Because statements emerge as meaningful discourse at a given time, their appearance is accompanied by the possibility that they might not appear. They thereby point to the ways in which language is an event, the possibility of something being said or not said, a matter of whether enunciations even take place
1: Image and Knowledge from:
Forgotten Dreams
Abstract: In the essay “Ruysdael als Dichter” (1816; Ruisdael as Poet), Johann Wolfgang Goethe argues that Jacob van Ruisdael’s images seem to move, and in fact to enact a narrative. Goethe notes that the seventeenth-century painter’s technique is impeccable, but the essay focuses on Ruisdael “as a thinking artist, even as a poet” (als denkenden Künstler, ja als Dichter).¹ “Ruysdael als Dichter” implicitly disputes the conclusions of Gotthold Ephraim Lessing’s
Laokoon(1766; Laocoon), which states that painting and sculpture can only imitate plots or narratives, not convey them.² Ruisdael, counters Goethe, indeed can portray movement through time in his painting: his
Book Title: Verse and Voice in Byrd's Song Collections of 1588 and 1589- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Smith Jeremy L.
Abstract: As he grappled with the challenges of composing for various instrumental and vocal ensembles, William Byrd (c. 1540-1623), England's premier Renaissance composer, devoted considerable attention to the poetry and prose of his native language, producing such treasured masterpieces as the hauntingly beautiful "Lulla lullaby"; the infectiously comedic "Though Amarillis dance in green"; and two extraordinarily dramatic Easter anthems. This book, the first full-length study specifically devoted to Byrd's English-texted music, provides a close reading of all of the works he published in the late 1580s, constituting nearly half of his total song output. It delves into the musical, political, literary, and, specifically, the sequential qualities of Byrd's 1588 and 1589 published collections as a whole, revealing, explaining, and interpreting an overall grand narrative, while remaining fully attentive to the particularities of each individual piece. Often deemed "unliterary" and generally considered political only in his approach to Latin texts, which were often of special interest to his fellow Catholics, Byrd was not only an inspired composer who had mastered the challenges of his nation's burgeoning verse, but also one who used his voice in song to foster a more inclusive polity in a time of religious strife. Jeremy L. Smith is Associate Professor of Musicology at the University of Colorado Boulder.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt1bh49c3
CHAPTER 2 Sonets & Pastoralls, I from:
Verse and Voice in Byrd's Song Collections of 1588 and 1589
Abstract: The middle section of Byrd’s
Psalmes, Sonets, &songs of sadnes and pietie, with sixteen songs (BE 12: 11–26), is the longest of the set. On the title page Byrd labeled the works “sonets” (BE 12, p. xli) but at the opening and ending of the section he added the word “pastoralls” (BE 12: 11) in describing them again. Neither term was used very precisely at the time, but the latter proves to be slightly more helpful, as only two songs in the section are sonnets (BE 12: 18 and BE 12: 20) whereas more, although by no means all,
12 Embattled Legacies: from:
Engaging Heritage, Engaging Communities
Author(s) Sikora Justin
Abstract: When considering community engagement at historic battlefields, there are no clear-cut, easily definable parameters as to who or which entities could be considered the sole ‘community’ at this kind of heritage site. One of the key reasons for this is that many battlefields do not have easily defined boundaries, resulting in confusion not only over who is responsible for their care and management but also over who values unidentified, and sometimes misidentified, spaces. Compounded by the fact that these are often empty fields devoid of even cursory manifestations of memorialisation, one could conclude that these are forgotten sites buried under
Book Title: Secret Police Files from the Eastern Bloc-Between Surveillance and Life Writing
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Petrescu Corina L.
Abstract: The communist secret police services of Central and Eastern Europe kept detailed records not only of their victims but also of the vast networks of informants and collaborators upon whom their totalitarian systems depended. These records, now open to the public in many former Eastern Bloc countries, reflect a textually mediated reality that has defined and shaped the lives of former victims and informers, creating a tension between official records and personal memories. Exploring this tension between a textually and technically mediated past and the subject/victim's reclaiming and retrospective interpretation of that past in biography is the goal of this volume. While victims' secret police files have often been examined as a type of unauthorized archival life writing, the contributors to this volume are among the first to analyze the fragmentary and sometimes remedial nature of these biographies and to examine the subject/victims' rewriting and remediation of them in various creative forms. Essays focus, variously, on the files of the East German Stasi, the Romanian Securitate (in relation to Transylvanian Germans in Romania), and the Hungarian State Security Agency. Contributors: Carol Anne Costabile-Heming, Ulrike Garde, Valentina Glajar, Yuliya Komska, Alison Lewis, Corina L. Petrescu, Annie Ring, Aniko Szucs. Valentina Glajar is Professor of German at Texas State University, San Marcos. Alison Lewis is Professor of German in the School of Languages and Linguistics, The University of Melbourne, Australia. Corina L. Petrescu is Associate Professor of German at the University of Mississippi.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt1kzccdr
3: Witness for the Prosecution: from:
Secret Police Files from the Eastern Bloc
Author(s) Petrescu Corina L.
Abstract: In his introduction to Dorin Tudoran’s published Securitate file, historian Radu Ioanid pertinently observes that “the Securitate file is not a postcommunist title of nobility, but the deformed mirror of the persecution set up by a communist regime through its political police,” and that thus “it reflects first and foremost suffering and tragedies lived by the victims during the time of their persecution.”¹ As such, as Mãdãlin Hodor shows, “the documentary value of [a Securitate] file must be constantly seen in relation to [the file’s] origin. One must not forget that it is the creation of a political police and
6: Before “It Gets All Wiped Out”: from:
Secret Police Files from the Eastern Bloc
Author(s) Szucs Aniko
Abstract: Agrandmother is projecting a filmstrip for her grandchild on the small stage of a studio theater in Budapest. She is telling a tale of an Indian tribe, seemingly of distant America, from the world of Karl May’s
Winnetou, about the friendship of the tribe’s Chief Gray Eagle and its medicine man, Black Moon, who together led the Apaches. The audience soon learns, however, that this tale is not about some imaginary tribe in May’s books but about a real group of “Hungarian Indians,” young men and women who spent their free time “playing Indians” in the late 1950s and early
4 Hegemony and Ethno-Spatial Politics: from:
Nation as Grand Narrative
Abstract: This chapter examines the narratives surrounding the structure, nature, and dynamics of the spatial struggle for hegemony over a city that was seen by some “gladiators” as the social and political—perhaps also economic—equivalent of the whole of Nigeria. One of the leading nationalists of that era, H. O. Davies, captured this sentiment when he said that Lagos contained “the genius of the country.”¹ Obafemi Awolowo, also a leading activists of that era, but an Ibadan resident in the same Western region, accused the nationalists in Lagos of seeing the city as “the alpha and omega of political sagacity
8 Narratives, Territoriality, and Majority-Minority Ethnic Violence from:
Nation as Grand Narrative
Abstract: In this chapter, I concentrate on how the symbolic manifestation of territoriality is used to structure other manifestations. I describe this symbolic manifestation as
discursive territoriality, one in which the media become resources “through which power is exercised to produce—or disrupt—systemic regularity.”¹ Discursive territoriality is a dimension of spatial politics, one in which the material and emotional dimensions of space are harnessed in the narratives and discourses of power, which then align particular people firmly, and sometimes also exclusively, to particular territories and privilege their claims to the material benefits of—and emotional attachment to—such spaces.
4 Hegemony and Ethno-Spatial Politics: from:
Nation as Grand Narrative
Abstract: This chapter examines the narratives surrounding the structure, nature, and dynamics of the spatial struggle for hegemony over a city that was seen by some “gladiators” as the social and political—perhaps also economic—equivalent of the whole of Nigeria. One of the leading nationalists of that era, H. O. Davies, captured this sentiment when he said that Lagos contained “the genius of the country.”¹ Obafemi Awolowo, also a leading activists of that era, but an Ibadan resident in the same Western region, accused the nationalists in Lagos of seeing the city as “the alpha and omega of political sagacity
8 Narratives, Territoriality, and Majority-Minority Ethnic Violence from:
Nation as Grand Narrative
Abstract: In this chapter, I concentrate on how the symbolic manifestation of territoriality is used to structure other manifestations. I describe this symbolic manifestation as
discursive territoriality, one in which the media become resources “through which power is exercised to produce—or disrupt—systemic regularity.”¹ Discursive territoriality is a dimension of spatial politics, one in which the material and emotional dimensions of space are harnessed in the narratives and discourses of power, which then align particular people firmly, and sometimes also exclusively, to particular territories and privilege their claims to the material benefits of—and emotional attachment to—such spaces.
Conclusion: from:
Writing and Heritage in Contemporary Spain
Abstract: My first ever visit to Spain occurred at the age of eighteen, on a school exchange from my sixth form college with a school near Valencia. I remember little of the trip, except that my small amount of Spanish was laughably inadequate for most situations and that, as a vegetarian at the time, eating was usually no pleasure – while my host family enjoyed eating octopus, much to my horror, I was provided with a bowl of boiled cauliflower. My second visit, a year later as an undergraduate languages student, was more successful. I flew out to stay with a
4: “Der Schrei des Marsyas”: from:
Twenty Years On
Author(s) Van Dam Frederik
Abstract: “Um ein Publikum am Lesen von Büchern, die des Lesens wert sind, festzuhalten, dazu bedarf es wahrlich eines Stein-Kopfes!”¹ This assessment of the reading public may well be considered a defining characteristic of Reinhard Jirgl’s writing. Not only does the expression “Stein-Kopf” refer to the eponymous peak in the Taunus mountain range, which Jirgl became acquainted with during his time as writer-in-residence in Bergen-Enkheim, it also captures the ethos of obstinacy that characterizes his poetics. It can of course be argued — as the satirist Gerhard Henschel has — that such self-positioning is pompous or elitist.² Those familiar with Jirgl’s
5: An Early Challenge to the Construction of Cross-Border Romance in Post-1989 Film: from:
Twenty Years On
Author(s) Stott Rosemary
Abstract: Depictions of relationships between partners who lived on opposite sides of the German-German border before the events of 1989 have maintained an enduring appeal for producers of film and television feature films commemorating the
Wende and German unification. This is not surprising given that narratives involving cross-border romance have the potential to engage wide audiences from both the former East and West Germany. They therefore provide the scope to explore barriers to unification such as distinctive identities, values, and attitudes. At the same time they can act as metaphors for the dominant popular perception that unification was somehow natural and
4: “Der Schrei des Marsyas”: from:
Twenty Years On
Author(s) Van Dam Frederik
Abstract: “Um ein Publikum am Lesen von Büchern, die des Lesens wert sind, festzuhalten, dazu bedarf es wahrlich eines Stein-Kopfes!”¹ This assessment of the reading public may well be considered a defining characteristic of Reinhard Jirgl’s writing. Not only does the expression “Stein-Kopf” refer to the eponymous peak in the Taunus mountain range, which Jirgl became acquainted with during his time as writer-in-residence in Bergen-Enkheim, it also captures the ethos of obstinacy that characterizes his poetics. It can of course be argued — as the satirist Gerhard Henschel has — that such self-positioning is pompous or elitist.² Those familiar with Jirgl’s
5: An Early Challenge to the Construction of Cross-Border Romance in Post-1989 Film: from:
Twenty Years On
Author(s) Stott Rosemary
Abstract: Depictions of relationships between partners who lived on opposite sides of the German-German border before the events of 1989 have maintained an enduring appeal for producers of film and television feature films commemorating the
Wende and German unification. This is not surprising given that narratives involving cross-border romance have the potential to engage wide audiences from both the former East and West Germany. They therefore provide the scope to explore barriers to unification such as distinctive identities, values, and attitudes. At the same time they can act as metaphors for the dominant popular perception that unification was somehow natural and
Introduction from:
Kafka for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Gross Ruth V.
Abstract: Franz Kafka was born on July 3, 1883, into a German-speaking Jewish family in Prague, the capital of the Czech Lands of the Austro-Hungarian Empire. He died at the age of forty-one with the dubious luck of one who died too soon to experience the Nazi terror. His favorite sister, Ottla; his second fiancée, Julie Wohryzek; and his lover, Milena Jesenská, a brilliant Czech writer, were all murdered in concentration camps. Kafka never married — though he fell in love easily, and was easily loved — despite having been engaged three times, twice to the same woman, Felice Bauer. Felice
Chapter 3 Love and Relationships: from:
The Novels of Josefina Aldecoa
Abstract: This chapter will explore the complex issue of love and relationships in contemporary Spain. In recent times, attitudes towards marriage and the rituals and customs governing relationships have profoundly altered. In the novels
Porque éramos jóvenes(1986),El vergel(1988), andEl enigma(2002), Aldecoa charts the evolution of love and relationships in mid- to late twentieth-century Spain. Each of the protagonists in the novels is engaged in an on-going quest for love and self-fulfilment. They experience at first hand the euphoric highs and soul-destroying lows of forbidden romance, unrequited love, and marriages of convenience. Moreover, these middle-aged characters are
Chapter 2 “Laissez les bons temps rouler!” and Other Concealments: from:
Interconnections
Author(s) Johnson Rashauna
Abstract: This essay uses a deceptively discrete category—“women of African descent in antebellum New Orleans”—to highlight the instabilities within all social categories, even those premised on unities of time and space, gender and race. Unfortunately, sociocultural histories of the antebellum South devote precious little attention to women of African descent, let alone to the diverse, multidimensional modes of hierarchy that subdivided them. This essay writes into that silence by using one free woman of color’s household and neighborhood as a microcosm in which frontier Louisiana’s hierarchies of race and gender conspired with cleavages of class and status to produce
Chapter 4 “Grandpa Brown Didn’t Have No Land”: from:
Interconnections
Author(s) Field Kendra Taira
Abstract: When Thomas Jefferson Brown finally decided to make his home in Indian Territory in 1870, he had been there many times before. For months he had been going in on day trips from Arkansas, his grandson mused more than a century later, learning the Indian languages and becoming familiar with the land, people, and opportunities for economic gain. In spite of national boundaries, promises of federal “protection,” and claims to Indian sovereignty, the borders between the nineteenth-century United States and Indian Territory grew increasingly porous, especially following the Civil War. American settlers in and around the territory were scrambling for
Chapter 7 A “Corrupting Influence”: from:
Interconnections
Author(s) Mitchell Michele
Abstract: Anna Pauline Murray found herself fighting to remain in college, pay for a room at the Harlem YWCA, and eat on a regular basis during a time when the economy of the United States was itself under considerable strain. A young woman of African descent, Murray had moved to New York City from Durham, North Carolina, in the fall of 1926 due to her determination not to attend a segregated institution in the South. Murray lived with a cousin in Brooklyn during the 1926–27 academic year, mainly so that she could supplement her education to meet Hunter College’s entrance
Book Title: Cultural Capital, Language and National Identity in Imperial Spain- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): BINOTTI LUCIA
Abstract: This innovative study examines the cultural mechanisms in early modern Spain that led to the translation, imitation and selective adoption of the values embodied by the Italian Renaissance. These mechanisms served to delineate a national tradition that addressed the needs of a changing society and gave a "Spanish" physiognomy to the Italian experience, which ultimately led to the Golden Age. By examining such important texts as the sentimental fictions of Diego de San Pedro and Juan de Flores, the Spanish translation of Orlando Furioso, Don Quixote, and the Polifemo, Binotti first describes the conditions imposed on book production by both the expectations of an elite audience and the limitations of the printing market while outlining the process of the creation of an expressive poetic language and the quest for literary models. She then looks at Ambrosio de Morales' chronicles and Bernardo de Aldrete's Del Origen, showing how a cultural discourse founded on foreign scholarship paved the way for the establishment of innovative-and autochtonous-methods of historical and scientific analysis in the early seventeenth-century. LUCIA BINOTTI is an associate professor in the Department of Romance Languages and Literatures at the University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt1x73vt
1 The Italian Appropriation of Sentimental Fiction from:
Cultural Capital, Language and National Identity in Imperial Spain
Abstract: The great success of sentimental fiction during the first half of the sixteenth century indicates that, although these kinds of works may have originally been addressed to an exclusive readership pre-eminently preoccupied with the cultivation of courtly ideals and behaviors, they quickly attracted a much more heterogeneous public. This community was composed not only of noblemen intent on discovering the emblems of a longed-for world which was swiftly waning, but also of a bourgeois audience that found in these texts the elements of a behavioral code that could improve their status. From this perspective, the editorial fortune of the translations
2 Shaping Cultural Capital Away From Home: from:
Cultural Capital, Language and National Identity in Imperial Spain
Abstract: The early sixteenth-century Italian appropriation of Spanish sentimental fiction developed through channels that followed the limited horizons of a new enterprise, the printing press. Though still in its infancy, at that moment its apparatus was extending its reach in symbiosis with the changing tastes and leisure patterns of an expanding social class. But by mid century, the printing press had blossomed into much more than a full-fledged industry, and that partnership with the expanding reading public had morphed into the immense power to influence and define the ideology of an entire era. The political and cultural programs that the incipient
3 Visual Eroticism, Poetic Voyeurism: from:
Cultural Capital, Language and National Identity in Imperial Spain
Abstract: Luis de Góngora y Argote’s mythological poem
Fábula de Polifemo y Galateahas received uninterrupted attention since it first circulated in manuscript at the court of Madrid in 1613. At the time, the object – along with Góngora’s other long poem,Soledades– of fiery and scandalized repulsion as much as of exultant praise,Polifemotoday is considered a masterwork of Spanish Baroque poetry.
Conclusion from:
Cultural Capital, Language and National Identity in Imperial Spain
Abstract: Throughout the sixteenth century, the majority of the Christian territories of Europe went through a political evolution towards authoritarian monarchies. At this time, the Iberian Peninsula became the nucleus of a political entity
sui generis, characterized by the consolidation of numerous kingdoms and territories under the power of one prince. This, along with the development of strong royal power, transformed it into one of the pre-eminent models of authoritarian monarchy, or the “Modern State.”
Book Title: Medieval Hispanic Studies in Memory of Alan Deyermond- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Weiss Julian
Abstract: Professor Alan Deyermond was one of the leading British Hispanists of the last fifty years, whose work had a formative influence on medieval Hispanic studies around the world. There were several tributes to his work published during his lifetime, and it is fitting that this one, in his memory, should be produced by Tamesis, the publishing house that he helped establish and to which he contributed so much as author and editor right up to his death. The contributors to this volume are some of Professor Deyermond's former colleagues, doctoral students, and members of the Medieval Hispanic Research Seminar. Given Professor Deyermond's breadth of expertise, the span of the essays is appropriately wide, ranging chronologically from the thirteenth to the sixteenth century, and covering lyric, hagiography, clerical verse narrative, frontier balladry, historical and codicological studies. The volume opens with a personal memoir of her father by Ruth Deyermond, and closes with the draft of an unpublished essay found amongst Professor Deyermond's papers, and edited by his literary executor, Professor David Hook. Andrew M. Beresford is Reader and Head of Hispanic Studies at the University of Durham. Louise M. Haywood is Reader in Medieval Iberian Literary and Cultural Studies, and Head of the Department of Spanish and Portuguese at the University of Cambridge. Julian Weiss is Professor of Medieval & Early Modern Hispanic Studies at King's College London.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt284t3h
3 On the Frontiers of Juan Rodríguez del Padrón’s Siervo libre de amor from:
Medieval Hispanic Studies in Memory of Alan Deyermond
Author(s) HAYWOOD LOUISE M.
Abstract: Much of Alan Deyermond’s work on sentimental romance concerned the various frontiers of the genre, be they generic or linguistic.¹ In this article, I wish to foreground the material frontiers of Juan Rodríguez del Padrón’s
Siervo libre de amor(c. 1440) within its manuscript context as a participant text in a particularscriptum, ‘the unique presence that is the individual, concrete manuscript’ (Dagenais 1994: 129). The focus on the physical context ofSiervowill permit me some reflections on generic relations and linguistic analogues. My approach is particularly informed by the lines pursued by Pedro M. Cátedra (1995), Emily Francomano
7 Gómez Manrique’s Exclamación e querella de la governación: from:
Medieval Hispanic Studies in Memory of Alan Deyermond
Author(s) ROUND NICHOLAS G.
Abstract: The collapse of Castilian royal authority in the 1460s challenged the wielders of power there to redefine in practice where, in relation to Enrique iv’s much-weakened monarchy, their interests and allegiances now lay. It also called in question the ethically and juridically grounded models of royal rule as sanctioned by providence, promoted among them by the secular court culture of Enrique’s father Juan ii. For most individuals, no doubt, this meant adjusting the theory to validate their newly identified interests – which was what happened collectively in the settlement eventually established by the Reyes Católicos. At the time, even so,
8 The Misa de amor in the Spanish Cancioneros and the Sentimental Romance from:
Medieval Hispanic Studies in Memory of Alan Deyermond
Author(s) SEVERIN DOROTHY SHERMAN
Abstract: Alan Deyermond’s contribution to the study of the sentimental romance is so essential that, before he wrote his seminal essay on the genre in the medieval volume of his
Literary History of Spain(1971), we used to call it the sentimental novel. To him I owe the inspiration for my book on the genre (2005), and this additional footnote to that book. When I categorized religious parody in the sentimental romance in that book, I did not include the category of theMisa de amor, although I made a passing reference to it. A rereading of the key texts of
12 Games of Love and War in the Castilian Frontier Ballads: from:
Medieval Hispanic Studies in Memory of Alan Deyermond
Author(s) YIACOUP ŞIZEN
Abstract: In her overview of the symbolism of games in the
romancero, Edith Rogers observes that the use of the game as a central motif ‘creates an atmosphere of tension and imminence of change’ relating to a shift of fortune or a reversal of the relative position of two adversaries, while at the same time serving as ‘a visible, condensed, localized expression of the emotional conquest’ involved in courtship (1972: 424). The following analysis seeks to develop Rogers’ theory by focusing on two frontier ballads,El romance del juego de ajedrezandEl romance de la conquista de Antequera, and the
2 The Medievalist Rhetorics of Enlightenment from:
Medievalist Enlightenment
Abstract: If the medieval did not function in the early eighteenth century, as it does in our own time, as a historical or chronological category, then how exactly did it work? I argued in the previous chapter that in actual linguistic usage, the term
moyen âge often served as a literary or linguistic term, as reflected also in the common use of the accompanying adjective barbare to describe the period. In this chapter, elaborating on this notion of the medieval as a non-historical concept, I argue that during the early eighteenth century, the medieval came to embody essentially a moral category
Conclusion: from:
Medievalist Enlightenment
Abstract: In a provocative book about “the hidden agenda of modernity”, Stephen Toulmin has argued that modernity entailed a major philosophical shift. This was a shift from the oral to the written, from the particular to the universal, from the local to the general, from the timely to the timeless, and from humanism to rationalism.¹ The new modernity, whose rise Toulmin dates back to the major works of Descartes in the 1630s and 1640s, was marked by the “pursuit of mathematical exactitude and logical rigor, intellectual certainty and moral purity”.² While earlier thinkers had questioned the value of abstract theory for
Book Title: The Faustian Century-German Literature and Culture in the Age of Luther and Faustus
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Weeks Andrew
Abstract: The Reformation and Renaissance, though segregated into distinct disciplines today, interacted and clashed intimately in Faust, the great figure that attained European prominence in the anonymous 1587 'Historia von D. Johann Fausten'. The original Faust behind Goethe's great drama embodies a remote culture. In his century, Faust evolved from an obscure cipher to a universal symbol. The age explored here as "the Faustian century" invested the 'Faustbuch' and its theme with a symbolic significance still of exceptional relevance today. The new essays in this volume complement one another, providing insights into the tensions and forces that gave the century its distinct character. Several essays seek Faust's prototypes. Others elaborate the symbolic function of his figure and discern the resonance of his tale in conflicting allegiances. This volume focuses on the intersection of historical accounts and literary imaginings, on shared aspects of the work and its times, on concerns with obedience and transgression, obsessions with the devil and curiosity about magic, and quandaries created by shifting religious and worldly authorities. Contributors: Marguerite de Huszar Allen, Kresten Thue Andersen, Frank Baron, Günther Bonheim, Albrecht Classen, Urs Leo Gantenbein, Karl S. Guthke, Michael Keefer, Paul Ernst Meyer, J. M. van der Laan, Helen Watanabe-O'Kelly, Andrew Weeks. J. M. van der Laan is Professor of German and Andrew Weeks is Professor of German and Comparative Literature, both at Illinois State University.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt284t7f
1: The German Faustian Century from:
The Faustian Century
Author(s) Weeks Andrew
Abstract: The sixteenth-century Faust phenomenon is a monument without an inscription. Few doubt the historical importance of the anonymous 1587
Historia von D. Johann Fausten, but how the story relates to the time of its origins is not self-evident. Does Faustus signify the rebellion of the new sciences against religious authority or the rejection of Renaissance humanism, the obscurantism of the Reformation or the latent nihilism of the dawning modern age?
2: Faustus of the Sixteenth Century: from:
The Faustian Century
Author(s) Baron Frank
Abstract: Only a few reliable sources corroborate the identity of the historical Faustus, the person behind the legend. Faustus was an astrologer, but he also gained a reputation for dabbling in magic. Renaissance magic seemed to be a magnet, which possessed an extraordinary power to draw into its orbit a whole range of associations. Many feared magic as a dangerous adventure of curiosity into the realm of the devil. Faustus’s bold claims in these areas made him sensational, provocative, and, in his lifetime, admired at certain times, condemned at others. The condemnation of Faustian curiosity in combination with the devil pact,
7: The Lutheran Faust: from:
The Faustian Century
Author(s) Andersen Kresten Thue
Abstract: Near the beginning of the sixteenth century, Martin Luther found new meaning in the Pauline expression
justification by faith through the hermeneutic concept sola scriptura. Luther’s theological discovery inspired others to articulate and invoke fundamental religious, political, and cultural changes within the European societies. At the same time, the Protestant Reformation gave rise to a tension between a religious and a humanistic outlook. Many solutions put forward to overcome this tension were informed by fear or fascination and appear to us as reactionary or progressive. Such figures as Paracelsus, Erasmus, Trithemius occupied a place between the strict confines of religion
9: Antiauthoritarianism and the Problem of Knowledge in the from:
The Faustian Century
Author(s) Weeks Andrew
Abstract: When we look back in history, our perception of differences is foreshortened in time the way our perception of the horizon reduces distinctions in space. A millennium of the ancient world boils down to antiquity. The centuries from 800 to 1500 can be amalgamated into medievalism. Early modern periods are spoken of as homogeneous ages. Not only are ages and centuries homogenized, movements such as the Reformation or the Renaissance acquire a monolithic aspect. The equalizing resolution of phenomena distances them from one another by eliminating nuances and ambiguities. An example of such leveling is our perception of the 1587
7: America and Updike, Growing Old Together (1996–1999) from:
Becoming John Updike
Abstract: Any thought that Updike, approaching sixty-five, might slow down as the century moved toward its close was quickly dispelled by the publication in 1996 of what some have come to regard as his finest single novel,
In the Beauty of the Lilies. That work was followed in succeeding years by another novel, a new collection about Henry Bech, and a fourth compendium of nonfiction. At the same time, however, a new generation of reviewers, raised after the post-war years of American prosperity and the angst-ridden years of the Cold War, was beginning to describe Updike as a literary dinosaur. Throughout
Book Title: Christians and Jews in Angevin England-The York Massacre of 1190, Narratives and Contexts
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Watson Sethina
Abstract: The mass suicide and murder of the men, women and children of the Jewish community in York on 16 March 1190 is one of the most scarring events in the history of Anglo-Judaism, and an aspect of England's medieval past which is widely remembered around the world. However, the York massacre was in fact only one of a series of attacks on communities of Jews across England in 1189-90; they were violent expressions of wider new constructs of the nature of Christian and Jewish communities, and the targeted outcries of local townspeople, whose emerging urban politics were enmeshed within the swiftly developing structures of royal government. This new collection considers the massacre as central to the narrative of English and Jewish history around 1200. Its chapters broaden the contexts within which the narrative is usually considered and explore how a narrative of events in 1190 was built up, both at the time and in following years. They also focus on two main strands: the role of narrative in shaping events and their subsequent perception; and the degree of 'convivencia' between Jews and Christians and consideration of the circumstances and processes through which neighbours became enemies and victims. Sarah Rees Jones is Senior Lecturer in History, Sethina Watson Lecturer, at the University of York. Contributors: Sethina Watson, Sarah Rees Jones, Joe Hillaby, Nicholas Vincent, Alan Cooper, Robert C. Stacey, Paul Hyams, Robin R. Mundill, Thomas Roche, Eva de Visscher, Pinchas Roth, Ethan Zadoff, Anna Sapir Abulafia, Heather Blurton, Matthew Mesley, Carlee A. Bradbury, Hannah Johnson, Jeffrey J. Cohen, Anthony Bale
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt2jbm1c
10 The Talmudic Community of Thirteenth-Century England from:
Christians and Jews in Angevin England
Author(s) Zadoff Ethan
Abstract: The study of medieval law occupies a unique niche within traditional academic discourse. A concentration on philological precision, challenges pertaining to manuscript study, and the ʹinternal languageʹ of jurisprudence have at times over-shadowed the consideration of the wider societal implications of medieval law and curtailed its use in the investigation of broad themes of social and cultural history. This is particularly true of the thirteenth-century Anglo-Jewish legal corpus, the study of which has been relegated to a select few articles and studies.¹
Introduction from:
Rethinking Hanslick
Author(s) Grimes Nicole
Abstract: Eduard Hanslick is celebrated today primarily for his seminal publication in the field of music aesthetics—
Vom Musikalisch-Schönen: Ein Beitrag zur Revision der Ästhetik der Tonkunst. Upon its initial publication in Leipzig in 1854, this small book elicited controversy and heated debate. The nine subsequent editions published throughout Hanslick’s lifetime—between 1858 and 1902¹—ensured that the text remained the focus of debate on musical aesthetics well into the twentieth century.
Chapter Four Otakar Hostinský, the Musically Beautiful, and the from:
Rethinking Hanslick
Author(s) Grimes Nicole
Abstract: Most of the reactions to Eduard Hanslick’s monograph
Vom Musikalisch-Schönen during the author’s lifetime have either a decidedly polemical or a flattering ring to them. The result is that Hanslick’s theories on musical aesthetics are often abbreviated to handy catch-phrases, a practice that attests to the ideological prejudice of many of his contemporaries, and that has subsequently prevented an objective and substantive dialogue with his aesthetic theory. Despite avoiding such a polemical tone, Das Musikalisch-Schöne und das Gesammtkunstwerk vom Standpunkte der formalen Ästhetik,¹ published by Otakar Hostinský (1847–1910) in 1877, was poorly received and is largely forgotten today. The
1 The Restoration Regime and Historical Reconstructions of the Civil War and Interregnum from:
The Civil Wars after 1660
Abstract: In the years immediately following the restoration of the monarchy, the English had a paradoxical relationship to their nation’s recent history. On the one hand, they were supposed to forget about it. The Convention Parliament had passed an Act of Oblivion within a few months of the king’s return. This legislation commanded people not to remember publicly the civil wars. On the other hand, personal memories of what were referred to as the ‘late broken times’ were lodged firmly within most people’s minds. This was recognised openly, as in the preface to a short book called
History of the Commons
4 Struggling over Settlements in Civil-War Historical Writing, 1696–1714 from:
The Civil Wars after 1660
Abstract: The Parliament that assembled to construct a settlement around the revolution of 1688 took a new approach to the question of remembering and forgetting the conflicted past. Several laws enacted by the Convention Parliament had profound implications for the cultural memory of the civil wars and Interregnum. Most significantly, under the Toleration Act of 1689, Trinitarian Protestant Dissenters could worship freely, subject to the granting of licences by local magistrates.¹ This meant that for the first time since the Reformation, the crown legally relinquished its role as promoter and enforcer of religious conformity. Moreover, religious toleration implied that the spiritual
6: Saints and Sinners: from:
Representing the "Good German" in Literature and Culture after 1945
Author(s) Uecker Matthias
Abstract: The inclusion of a novel by Heinrich Böll in a volume on the topic of the “good German” should come as no surprise — indeed, the author himself could have been proposed as a worthy topic for this volume, as he acquired during his lifetime a reputation as the “conscience of the nation” and representative of an alternative, better Germany. Böll’s friend, the critic Heinrich Vormweg, chose the label “der andere Deutsche” (the other German) as the title of his biography of Böll — sidestepping the notion of the “good German,” but still suggesting a particular moral quality that distinguished the author
12: A Good Irish German: from:
Representing the "Good German" in Literature and Culture after 1945
Author(s) Fischer Joachim
Abstract: Over the last ten years Hugo Hamilton (born 1953) has emerged as one of the major contemporary Irish novelists; for Bernard O’Donoghue in a review of his recent novel
Disguise he is even “one of the most important writers of our time.”¹ Hamilton’s success is, at least in part, due to the new and unique perspective he has added to Irish writing in English: born into an Irish-German family and an enforced German-and Irish-speaking home environment he has made this rather unusual upbringing the starting point for his extensive creative reflections about issues of identity and belonging. His work also
Open-Air Museums, Authenticity and the Shaping of Cultural Identity: from:
Archaeology, the Public and the Recent Past
Author(s) Mackie Catriona
Abstract: What is widely believed to be the world’s first open-air folk museum was opened at Skansen in Sweden in 1891. It was the brainchild of Artur Hazelius who, in 1873, had founded the Nordiska Museet in Stockholm, which exhibited examples of folklife from around the country. It was Hazelius’s desire that the Nordiska Museet be ‘of benefit to science and at the same time arouse and fuel feelings of patriotism’, as well as ‘contribute to the strengthening of national feeling generation after generation, infusing love of one’s country … among young and old’.¹ This was a nationalism not of politics,
Loyal yet Independent: from:
Archaeology, the Public and the Recent Past
Author(s) Mytum Harold
Abstract: The Isle of Man is an independent Crown Dependency, with the Queen as head of state and an ambivalent and at times uncomfortable relationship with the British government. In the early 20th century the Lieutenant Governor was a powerful and significant figure on the island, balancing and indeed controlling the powers of the Tynwald parliament. From 1902 the Lieutenant Governor was Lord Raglan, who had come from the post of Under Secretary for War and been a major organiser of the Boer War campaigns. He was an intensely conservative figure, charming to those in his circle but with firm views
Archaeology, Politics and Politicians, or: from:
Archaeology, the Public and the Recent Past
Author(s) Dixon James
Abstract: The phrase ‘archaeology is a political act’¹ is oft repeated, but as with any such definitive phrase when used in academia each word of it has multiple meanings. For instance ‘is’. Well, it is not always. Archaeology
can be a political act and archaeology sometimes is a political act, but this is not a universal truth. Likewise, the word archaeology can be taken different ways itself. There is academic archaeology, private sector archaeology, public archaeology, uses of archaeology in the heritage industry and so on, all intrinsically connected, but each with nuances different enough to render universality meaningless.
2 Garcilaso de la Vega: from:
Love Poetry in the Spanish Golden Age
Abstract: [In the midst of bloody battle, where scarcely anyone can withstand the fury of Mars, I stole this brief measure of time, now taking up the sword, now the pen].
6 Francisco de Quevedo Villegas (1580–1645): from:
Love Poetry in the Spanish Golden Age
Abstract: Francisco de Quevedo’s remarkable love poetry has finally begun to speak to us on its own terms: as poetry. For too long its voice struggled to be heard under the considerable weight of alternative critical displacement activity; that is, engagement with the still unresolved issues of chronology, dating, and corpus definition that are inevitably dominant when a poet does not publish his work in his own lifetime. However, there are some things that we do know for certain: the first posthumous edition of Quevedo’s poetry was compiled and edited by his friend, José Antonio González de Salas, in 1648, under
1 Of Important General Matters from:
Expressing Identities in the Basque Arena
Abstract: Over the decades my father told me this anecdote several times. It amused him so much because, I think, it demonstrated in a familial, deeply unpretentious way the nature of national difference. In postwar Britain, my uncle had learnt, even something as everyday as urinals were made by different
2 At Play with Identity from:
Expressing Identities in the Basque Arena
Abstract: Identity is a catch-all term of our times. It is an empty vessel which can be filled with almost any content. As a quick perusal of recent volumes on European communities shows, astute anthropologists can use identity as a general framing device for a surprising variety of ethnographic data. In these books discussion can span from the individual to the regional to the supranational, from styles of dress or dance to religious faith. The range of possible topics seems to be limited only by the imaginative power of the compiler. The worry, of course, is that we anthropologists may well
4 Feeding Nationalism from:
Expressing Identities in the Basque Arena
Abstract: Difficult to think of something more central to our lives than food. For we digest symbols and myths as much as fats, proteins and carbohydrates. At one and the same time food is both nutrition and a mode of thought. It enables us biologically, and structures our life socially. As both fuel for our bodies and ideas for our minds, food is common to every single one of us.
Introduction from:
Narratives of Identity in Alban Berg's "Lulu"
Abstract: In 1955, around the twentieth anniversary of Berg’s death, Theodor Adorno felt compelled to restore what he regarded as Berg’s rightful place in the history of musical aesthetics, as well as his legacy as a composer.¹ One of Adorno’s chief complaints was related to the changing perception of Berg’s music: “During his lifetime he was a leading member of the avant-garde and would have never felt himself to be anything else. He now finds himself lumped together with others under the label of ‘modern classics,’ a label from which he would have recoiled.”²
Introduction from:
Narratives of Identity in Alban Berg's "Lulu"
Abstract: In 1955, around the twentieth anniversary of Berg’s death, Theodor Adorno felt compelled to restore what he regarded as Berg’s rightful place in the history of musical aesthetics, as well as his legacy as a composer.¹ One of Adorno’s chief complaints was related to the changing perception of Berg’s music: “During his lifetime he was a leading member of the avant-garde and would have never felt himself to be anything else. He now finds himself lumped together with others under the label of ‘modern classics,’ a label from which he would have recoiled.”²
Book Title: War and Literature- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Patterson Ian
Abstract: War was the first subject of literature; at times, war has been its only subject. In this volume, the contributors reflect on the uneasy yet symbiotic relations of war and writing, from medieval to modern literature. War writing emerges in multiple forms, celebratory and critical, awed and disgusted; the rhetoric of inexpressibility fights its own battle with the urgent necessity of representation, record and recognition. This is shown to be true even to the present day: whether mimetic or metaphorical, literature that concerns itself overtly or covertly with the real pressures of war continues to speak to issues of pressing significance. Particular topics addressed include writings of and about the Crusades and battles during the Hundred Years War; Shakespeare's "Casus Belly"; Auden's "Journal of an Airman"; and War and Peace. Contributors: Joanna Bellis, Catherine A.M. Clarke, Mary A. Favret, Rachel Galvin, James Purdon, Mark Rawlinson, Susanna A. Throop, Katie J. Walter, Carol Watts, Tom F. Wright, Andrew Zurcher,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt5vj7vz
Proclaiming the War News: from:
War and Literature
Author(s) WRIGHT TOM F.
Abstract: How does the role of public speech evolve in an age of technological transformation? Two literary and visual artefacts from the wars of nineteenth-century America pose this question, and offer insights into a chapter of media history that is still poorly understood. In the first, Richard Caton Woodville’s
War News From Mexico(1848), the ambivalent place of wartime voice takes centre stage. This most iconic of genre paintings records a foundational scene of US imperialism, and captures the public drama of national expansion. Its broader subject, however, is the social life of information. Woodville’s image depicts news of Mexican surrender
7: Sigmund Freud (1856–1939) from:
Modern German Thought from Kant to Habermas
Abstract: Sigismund Schlomo Freud was born in 1856, in the small town of Freiberg, which at the time belonged to the Austro-Hungarian Empire (renamed Příbor, it is now part of the Czech Republic). Both his parents were Jewish. Their domestic situation was unusual: Freud’s mother, Amalia, was not only twenty years younger than her husband, Jacob, but also younger than Freud’s oldest half-brother. In 1859, Jacob’s wool business was facing financial ruin and he moved the family to Leipzig. They settled in Vienna the following year (by which time Freud’s two half-brothers had emigrated to England). Jacob’s commercial position remained precarious,
Introduction from:
Spanish Golden Age Poetry in Motion
Author(s) Andrews Jean
Abstract: Homer knew that poetry is a matter of motion. Once upon a pre-‘theoretical’ time, criticism of poetry inhabited poetry itself. It was inscribed in the self conscious reflections of the early poets on the nature of their art, and in the narratological and metaphorical manoeuvres of their writing. The opening line of the
Iliadcompresses into a brief invocation to the Muse the essence of poetry as a specialised form of discourse that travels over time and space, while it also points to the authority and accountability that is enshrined in poetic utterance. The narrator invokes the Muse: ‘Sing, goddess,
6 Upwards to Helicon: from:
Spanish Golden Age Poetry in Motion
Author(s) Mascia Mark J.
Abstract: One of Lope de Vega’s (1562–1635) longest poetic works, the
Laurel de Apolo(1630), has received less critical attention than much of his other poetry due to its sheer length. This massive poem, composed of tensilvasand totalling nearly seven thousand lines, is sometimes viewed as a simple litany of praise for several hundred contemporary poets. However, one often overlooked element is the way in which Lope uses this text to engage in acts of judgement and even personal vendettas against his rivals. The purpose of this study is to examine how Lope moves his locus of enunciation
14 Traveling in Place: from:
Spanish Golden Age Poetry in Motion
Author(s) Powell Amanda
Abstract: The title ‘Poetry in Motion’ suits the travel across language, culture, and time that constitutes literary translation. Across what bridge, by what mode, can a text arrive at the further shore – ‘[a] esotra parte, en la ribera’ – transformed to a new language and occupying a foreign literary context, yet with intangible spirit intact?¹ Does it best travel naked or robed, empty-handed or with baggage? In particular, how do we bring across Baroque lyric: rhymed, metered, allusive, with incisively doubled meaning or gorgeously encrusted figuration. Should highly ornate originals be simplified in translation, in order to make them understand able? The
Introduction: from:
Tragedy and the Tragic in German Literature, Art, and Thought
Author(s) Dowden Stephen D.
Abstract: Suffering and death are universal. They are the basal experience that tragic art addresses. But is tragic art in one form or another also universal? Are there times and places on which tragic thinking can have no purchase? If so, is our anti-mythic age of science and reason, of democracy and rapid technological progress an era unsuited to tragic art? The modern world is largely optimistic despite the massively destructive violence of the last century. Terrible things still happen to individuals, to families, to whole peoples. Yet when no wrong seems fully beyond prevention—an unforeseen possibility that with due
3: Before or Beyond the Pleasure Principle: from:
Tragedy and the Tragic in German Literature, Art, and Thought
Author(s) Quinn Thomas P.
Abstract: Goethe was a flirt. He flirted continually, not just with people, mostly younger women, but also with ideas, some very old—like tragedy. He used the younger women sometimes to create tragedy—and sometimes to overcome it.
Faust, Goethe’s “sehr ernster Scherz,”¹ the non-tragedy tragedy, becomes in the end a divine comedy, not just because there is a god who saves Faust, but also because Faust’s former flirt, Gretchen, appears at the end, or after the end, and continues to exercise that force that kept Faust striving and Goethe writing. It may or may not be becoming for a god
7: The Death of Tragedy: from:
Tragedy and the Tragic in German Literature, Art, and Thought
Author(s) McFarland James
Abstract: In 1915 young Walter Benjamin, at the time a prominent student activist with the German Youth Movement, broke publicly with his mentor and leader Gustav Wyneken over the latter’s support of the First World War. “Dear Herr Doctor Wyneken,” Benjamin’s open letter begins, “I ask you to accept the following lines with which I entirely and without reserve disassociate myself from you as a final demonstration of loyalty, and only as that.” The paradox is almost too cute, were its indignation not so passionately felt. “Loyalty,” Benjamin continues, “because I could not utter a word to the man who wrote
1: The Art of Writing in Columns from:
Arno Schmidt's 'Zettel's Traum'
Abstract: According to Schmidt,
Zettel’s Traum borrows its “SpaltenTechnick” from Finnegans Wake. By structuring Zettel’s Traum into three columns or “TextSträhnen,” Schmidt expects that the reader will be able to follow the information provided in the columns.¹ To ease the reading process, Schmidt divides the three columns according to theme. The center column reflects the events of the years between 1965 and 1969, the time frame in which Zettel’s Traum was actually written. Daniel Pagenstecher, as the central narrator of the events, assists Paul and Wilma Jacobi, likewise writers and old school friends, in the translation of Poe’s works into German.
1: The Art of Writing in Columns from:
Arno Schmidt's 'Zettel's Traum'
Abstract: According to Schmidt,
Zettel’s Traum borrows its “SpaltenTechnick” from Finnegans Wake. By structuring Zettel’s Traum into three columns or “TextSträhnen,” Schmidt expects that the reader will be able to follow the information provided in the columns.¹ To ease the reading process, Schmidt divides the three columns according to theme. The center column reflects the events of the years between 1965 and 1969, the time frame in which Zettel’s Traum was actually written. Daniel Pagenstecher, as the central narrator of the events, assists Paul and Wilma Jacobi, likewise writers and old school friends, in the translation of Poe’s works into German.
Book Title: Afro-Cuban Diasporas in the Atlantic World- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Otero Solimar
Abstract: ‘Afro-Cuban Diasporas in the Atlantic World’ explores how Yoruba and Afro-Cuban communities moved across the Atlantic between the Americas and Africa in successive waves in the nineteenth century. In Havana, Yoruba slaves from Lagos banded together to buy their freedom and sail home to Nigeria. Once in Lagos, this Cuban repatriate community became known as the Aguda. This community built their own neighborhood that celebrated their Afrolatino heritage. For these Yoruba and Afro-Cuban diasporic populations, nostalgic constructions of family and community play the role of narrating and locating a longed-for home. By providing a link between the workings of nostalgia and the construction of home, this volume re-theorizes cultural imaginaries as a source for diasporic community reinvention. Through ethnographic fieldwork and research in folkloristics, Otero reveals that the Aguda identify strongly with their Afro-Cuban roots in contemporary times. Their fluid identity moves from Yoruba to Cuban, and back again, in a manner that illustrates the truly cyclical nature of transnational Atlantic community affiliation. Solimar Otero is assistant professor of English and folklore at Louisiana State University and is research associate and visiting professor at the Women's Studies in Religion Program at the Harvard Divinity School from 2009 - 2010.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt81ff8
10: Love and Death in from:
Love and Death in Goethe
Abstract: Goethe’s
Faust expresses Romanticism’s agony over the fact of individuation and the individual’s distance from its origin and destiny. Its action is propelled by a man’s desire to escape from selfhood into love. Faust does not end in a Liebestod, like Romeo and Juliet or Aida. Yet what is at stake is the continuation of Faust’s self-identity in time versus his dissolution, his Entgrenzung, in a timeless moment of bliss. The escape from selfhood into union with another, whether a lover, the world, or God, would be a Liebestod, and there are many echoes of the love-death theme in Faust,
4: Literature on New France from:
History of Literature in Canada
Author(s) Laflèche Guy
Abstract: The writings on New France constitute a great marginal literature spanning three centuries. The term “literature” has to be understood in a broader sense here, since literary texts, or works possessing an aesthetic value, were rare exceptions in this period. Such texts as did exist seldom concerned themselves with the French colony. Their subject was rather North America and the Native Americans — in other words, the anthropology, human geography, or, as it was called at the time, the natural history of the New World. After the discoveries, explorations, and voyages came the long and difficult missionary endeavors, conducted mostly by
17: French-Canadian Poetry up to the 1960s from:
History of Literature in Canada
Author(s) Mathis-Moser Ursula
Abstract: In the dogged struggle between progressive and conservative forces that, in varying intensity, took place in every genre in French-Canadian literature during the time between the end of the First World War and the 1960s, poetry proved to be the driving force of innovation. It managed to overcome the ideology and aesthetic perceptions of the past and, until the beginning of the 1960s, became French Canada’s dominant genre. In the interplay of regionalism and exoticism, of nationalistic “homeland” discourse and an emerging national consciousness, of classical mimetic and surrealistically inspired poetry, of verse, vers libre, and the complete liberation from
20: French-Canadian Drama from the 1930s to the Révolution tranquille from:
History of Literature in Canada
Author(s) Scholl Dorothee
Abstract: The late development of French-Canadian theater is above all a result of its institutional framework: For a long time, secular drama was decried as amoral and was therefore prohibited. The clergy, in particular, who made a decisive contribution to the history of drama by encouraging the performance of plays in the collèges for the purpose of classical education, rhetorical training, and the moral edification of pupils, rejected the performance of “profane” texts. Beginning with the 1930s, however, the influence of European theater led to a modernization in the repertoire and the performance practice of clerical theater. Many clergymen also composed
24: The English-Canadian Short Story since 1967: from:
History of Literature in Canada
Author(s) Nischik Reingard M.
Abstract: The English-Canadian short story got off to a hesitant start in the twentieth century. To a considerable extent this was due to the lack of appreciation that Canadian literature had to face in its own country at the time and the limited publication facilities in Canada that resulted. Early short-story writers such as Knister, Grove, and Callaghan were thus forced to find their way into print mainly outside the country. The collected stories of all the major modernist writers, except for Callaghan and Garner, appeared decades after their conception, that is, in the 1960s, the period known as the Elizabethan
30: The French-Canadian Short Prose Narrative from:
History of Literature in Canada
Author(s) Eibl Doris G.
Abstract: For a long time Quebec short fiction did not rank highly in the hierarchy of genres. In the 1980s and 1990s, however, it experienced a boom in popularity, with the number of publications steadily rising: In the early 1970s only about ten short-story volumes had been published per annum, whereas the 1990s saw an average of thirty to thirty-five volumes published per year, not to mention publications in numerous journals and weekly as well as daily newspapers. From the mid-1970s onwards a great thematic and formal diversity could be found in French-Canadian short stories. This diversity, characterized by a seemingly
33: Drama and Theater from the Révolution tranquille to the Present from:
History of Literature in Canada
Author(s) Scholl Dorothee
Abstract: The 1960s and 1970s were a time of radical cultural, ideological, and political change for French Canada. In 1960 the liberal politician Jean Lesage became prime minister of Quebec. With the slogan “Maîtres chez nous” French Canadians claimed their cultural and economic independence from English-Canadian and American dominance. Authorities that had gone unchallenged for centuries were now questioned: Women began to emancipate themselves from patriarchal power structures, and society freed itself from the clerical system of education. The year 1968 saw the founding of the Parti Québécois, which stood for a policy of sovereignty or rather separatism of Quebec from
Book Title: Spanish American Poetry after 1950-Beyond the Vanguard
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): SHAW DONALD L.
Abstract: Providing a basis for understanding the main lines of development of poetry in Spanish America after Vanguardism, this volume begins with an overview of the situation at the mid-century: the later work of Neruda and Borges, the emergence of Paz. Consideration is then given to the decisive impact of Parra and the rise of colloquial poetry, politico-social poetry (Dalton, Cardenal) and representative figures such as Orozco, Pacheco and Cisneros. The aim is to establish a few paths through the largely unmapped jungle of Spanish American poetry in the time period. The author emphasises the persistence of a generally negative view of the human condition and the poets' exploration of different ways of responding to it. These vary from outright scepticism to the ideological, the religious or those derived from some degree of confidence in the creative imagination as cognitive. At the same time there is analysis of the evolving outlook on poetry of the writers in question, both in regard to its possible social role and in regard to diction. DONALD SHAW holds the Brown Forman Chair of Spanish American literature in the University of Virginia.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt81hxc
3 Borges and Cardenal from:
Spanish American Poetry after 1950
Abstract: By the time Borges published
El
1: Framing Theories from:
Narrative Deconstructions of Gender in Works by Audrey Thomas, Daphne Marlatt, and Louise Erdrich
Abstract: Identity is an all-pervasive and fundamental aspect of human life, and yet identity as a concept is one of the most hotly debated — contested and defended — concepts of our time. The term identity has its roots in developmental psychology and has only been the subject of critical debates since modernism. The notion of identity as a psycho-social entity only dates back about 100 years to the psychology of William James who differentiated an outer perspective, the “social self” (me) as the self recognized by others, from an inner perspective, the “continuous, inner self” (I) that denoted the self as experienced
1: Framing Theories from:
Narrative Deconstructions of Gender in Works by Audrey Thomas, Daphne Marlatt, and Louise Erdrich
Abstract: Identity is an all-pervasive and fundamental aspect of human life, and yet identity as a concept is one of the most hotly debated — contested and defended — concepts of our time. The term identity has its roots in developmental psychology and has only been the subject of critical debates since modernism. The notion of identity as a psycho-social entity only dates back about 100 years to the psychology of William James who differentiated an outer perspective, the “social self” (me) as the self recognized by others, from an inner perspective, the “continuous, inner self” (I) that denoted the self as experienced
2 Rhetorical Reason: from:
Ethics and Exemplary Narrative in Chaucer and Gower
Abstract: In its ethical capacity exemplary rhetoric has been maligned at least since the time of Kant’s fatal pronouncement, “worse service cannot be rendered morality than that an attempt be made to derive it from examples.”¹ The eighteenth-century rationalist could not accept that moral philosophy might legitimately be based upon the rhetoric of example, or rather, as it was known, reasoning from cases
a posteriori.² When it came to the metaphysical grounding of morals Kant famously rejected cases and everything circumstantial for that matter, preferring “categorical imperatives” over all things “hypothetical.” Such a tectonic shift away from rhetoric towards pure a
5 Moral Chaucer: from:
Ethics and Exemplary Narrative in Chaucer and Gower
Abstract: Some may still find it customary or convenient to distinguish Chaucer on the basis of his good humor from the sententiousness of Gower, but the distinction overestimates the difference between their respective accomplishments. As Derek Brewer reminds us, Chaucer’s early reception was as a poet who wrote “serious and nourishing subject-matter.”¹ During Chaucer’s own lifetime Eustache Deschamps eulogized him as
Seneque en meurs, and observed that drinking from Chaucer’s font had quenched ma soif ethique.² Thomas Usk extolled Chaucer as “the noble philosophical poete / in Englissh,”³ and Henry Scogan took Chaucer to be a moral philosopher of “vertuous noblesse.”⁴
Conclusion from:
Ethics and Exemplary Narrative in Chaucer and Gower
Abstract: If evil is a failure of the imagination, then from a practical point of view it becomes all-important that sufficient conditions for creative expression and reflection be established in and by culture. Imaginative literature in particular becomes indispensable for testing and expanding our moral intuitions; for showing what is entailed by living with timeless values in the contingencies of time and space; and for inspiring individuals to celebrate and seek after the right and the good. Ethical criticism and theory has in the last two decades been preoccupied with the nuances of literary expression in just this regard, urging that
2 Rhetorical Reason: from:
Ethics and Exemplary Narrative in Chaucer and Gower
Abstract: In its ethical capacity exemplary rhetoric has been maligned at least since the time of Kant’s fatal pronouncement, “worse service cannot be rendered morality than that an attempt be made to derive it from examples.”¹ The eighteenth-century rationalist could not accept that moral philosophy might legitimately be based upon the rhetoric of example, or rather, as it was known, reasoning from cases
a posteriori.² When it came to the metaphysical grounding of morals Kant famously rejected cases and everything circumstantial for that matter, preferring “categorical imperatives” over all things “hypothetical.” Such a tectonic shift away from rhetoric towards pure a
5 Moral Chaucer: from:
Ethics and Exemplary Narrative in Chaucer and Gower
Abstract: Some may still find it customary or convenient to distinguish Chaucer on the basis of his good humor from the sententiousness of Gower, but the distinction overestimates the difference between their respective accomplishments. As Derek Brewer reminds us, Chaucer’s early reception was as a poet who wrote “serious and nourishing subject-matter.”¹ During Chaucer’s own lifetime Eustache Deschamps eulogized him as
Seneque en meurs, and observed that drinking from Chaucer’s font had quenched ma soif ethique.² Thomas Usk extolled Chaucer as “the noble philosophical poete / in Englissh,”³ and Henry Scogan took Chaucer to be a moral philosopher of “vertuous noblesse.”⁴
Conclusion from:
Ethics and Exemplary Narrative in Chaucer and Gower
Abstract: If evil is a failure of the imagination, then from a practical point of view it becomes all-important that sufficient conditions for creative expression and reflection be established in and by culture. Imaginative literature in particular becomes indispensable for testing and expanding our moral intuitions; for showing what is entailed by living with timeless values in the contingencies of time and space; and for inspiring individuals to celebrate and seek after the right and the good. Ethical criticism and theory has in the last two decades been preoccupied with the nuances of literary expression in just this regard, urging that
Book Title: Charles d'Orléans in England, 1415-1440- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Arn Mary-Jo
Abstract: Charles, duc d'Orléans, prince and poet, was a captive in England for twenty-five years following the battle of Agincourt. The studies in this volume, by European and American scholars, focus on his life and actions during that time, and show him as a serious and learned reader, a cunning political figure (accomplished in the skills that would impress the English nobility around him), and a masterful poet, innovative, witty, and intensely self-aware. Discussion of his manuscripts, his social and political relationships, his extensive library, and his poetry in two languages reveal him as a shrewd observer of life, which in his poetry he describes in ways not seen again until the Renaissance. Contributors: MICHAEL K. JONES, WILLIAM ASKINS, GILBERT OUY, M. ARN, CLAUDIO GALDERISI, JOHN FOX, R.C. CHOLAKIAN, A.C. SPEARING, DEREK PEARSALL, JANET BACKHOUSE, JEAN-CLAUDE MUHLETHALER, A.E.B. COLDIRON.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt81xww
Glanures from:
Charles d'Orléans in England, 1415-1440
Author(s) FOX JOHN
Abstract: Whilst the evolution of Charles d’Orléans’s themes and moods, during the five decades of his writing career (1410s to 1450s), has received a good deal of comment,¹ less attention has been paid to the duke’s changing attitude towards his linguistic material, becoming much bolder with the passage of time. Words became objects of fascination for the ageing duke, even to the extent of inventing some, occasionally for rhyming purposes, or introducing others from non-literary sources, numbers appearing in the written language for the first time. Nowhere is his imaginative treatment of words more evident than in his macaronic verse. There
Book Title: Charles d'Orléans in England, 1415-1440- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Arn Mary-Jo
Abstract: Charles, duc d'Orléans, prince and poet, was a captive in England for twenty-five years following the battle of Agincourt. The studies in this volume, by European and American scholars, focus on his life and actions during that time, and show him as a serious and learned reader, a cunning political figure (accomplished in the skills that would impress the English nobility around him), and a masterful poet, innovative, witty, and intensely self-aware. Discussion of his manuscripts, his social and political relationships, his extensive library, and his poetry in two languages reveal him as a shrewd observer of life, which in his poetry he describes in ways not seen again until the Renaissance. Contributors: MICHAEL K. JONES, WILLIAM ASKINS, GILBERT OUY, M. ARN, CLAUDIO GALDERISI, JOHN FOX, R.C. CHOLAKIAN, A.C. SPEARING, DEREK PEARSALL, JANET BACKHOUSE, JEAN-CLAUDE MUHLETHALER, A.E.B. COLDIRON.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt81xww
Glanures from:
Charles d'Orléans in England, 1415-1440
Author(s) FOX JOHN
Abstract: Whilst the evolution of Charles d’Orléans’s themes and moods, during the five decades of his writing career (1410s to 1450s), has received a good deal of comment,¹ less attention has been paid to the duke’s changing attitude towards his linguistic material, becoming much bolder with the passage of time. Words became objects of fascination for the ageing duke, even to the extent of inventing some, occasionally for rhyming purposes, or introducing others from non-literary sources, numbers appearing in the written language for the first time. Nowhere is his imaginative treatment of words more evident than in his macaronic verse. There
8: The Indictment of Neoliberalism and Communism in the Novels of Katharina Hacker, Nikola Richter, Judith Schalansky, and Julia Schoch from:
German Women's Writing in the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Druxes Helga
Abstract: Leftist cultural critic Jeffrey Nealon argues that “we’ve experienced an intensification of postmodern capitalism over the past decades, an increasing saturation of the economic sphere into formerly independent segments of everyday cultural life.”¹ The new global economy elevates competitiveness to its guiding principle, mandating a national quest to maintain “Konkurrenzfähigkeit des Standorts Deutschland” (competitiveness of Germany as a business hub).² At the same time, since the rise of neoliberalism in the 1990s, intensified technologies of the self, widely promoted by popular culture and the advertising industry, insinuate that individuals should take a functionalist approach toward themselves as sites of experience,
6 Order out of Chaos: from:
Arturo Pérez-Reverte: Narrative Tricks and Narrative Strategies
Abstract: The time has come to attempt to draw together the various strands of this analysis of the work of Arturo Pérez-Reverte. Following certain conventions, the expected result would be to state that there has been a development in his work. Certainly such is the conclusion reached by Rocío Ocón-Garrido when she states that Pérez-Reverte leans ‘at first more towards modernity and later, more towards postmodernity’.¹ However, this present analysis has indicated that there has been a consistency of vision throughout Revertian writing that is concerned with communicating the necessity of remembering the past because it is still relevant to the
6 Order out of Chaos: from:
Arturo Pérez-Reverte: Narrative Tricks and Narrative Strategies
Abstract: The time has come to attempt to draw together the various strands of this analysis of the work of Arturo Pérez-Reverte. Following certain conventions, the expected result would be to state that there has been a development in his work. Certainly such is the conclusion reached by Rocío Ocón-Garrido when she states that Pérez-Reverte leans ‘at first more towards modernity and later, more towards postmodernity’.¹ However, this present analysis has indicated that there has been a consistency of vision throughout Revertian writing that is concerned with communicating the necessity of remembering the past because it is still relevant to the
6 Order out of Chaos: from:
Arturo Pérez-Reverte: Narrative Tricks and Narrative Strategies
Abstract: The time has come to attempt to draw together the various strands of this analysis of the work of Arturo Pérez-Reverte. Following certain conventions, the expected result would be to state that there has been a development in his work. Certainly such is the conclusion reached by Rocío Ocón-Garrido when she states that Pérez-Reverte leans ‘at first more towards modernity and later, more towards postmodernity’.¹ However, this present analysis has indicated that there has been a consistency of vision throughout Revertian writing that is concerned with communicating the necessity of remembering the past because it is still relevant to the
INTRODUCTION from:
Christine de Pizan
Abstract: Martin Le Franc’s confident prediction in
Le Champion des dames(Deschaux in 1361, V, p. 178) that Christine de Pizan’s name would endure for ever (‘dame Cristine / De laquelle a trompe et a cor / Le nom par tout va et ne fine’) has been borne out in the current extraordinary vogue of interest in her life and works. A few statistics will make this clear. TheBibliographical Guidepublished in 1984 (Kennedy, 505) contained 502 items and covered the period from Christine’s lifetime till approximately 1981; theFirst Supplement(Kennedy, 899), covering one decade (1981–1991), contained 391
6 THE AUTHOR AS MYSTIC: from:
Juan Goytisolo: The Author as Dissident
Abstract: When
Las virtudes del pájaro solitariofirst appeared in 1988 the novel caused a certain sensation, its mystical theme taking readers by surprise. Research by Javier Escudero Rodríguez has since shown that this reaction was somewhat misplaced, given that an obsession with death and an emergent interest in mysticism can be traced in Goytisolo’s fiction to at least the time ofMakbara.² Indeed, looking back even further, we might recall from the discussion above (pp. 94–5) thatJuan sin Tierraopens with an allusion to Eastern mysticism, though, admittedly, a pejorative one. The appearance of a religious theme is
6 THE AUTHOR AS MYSTIC: from:
Juan Goytisolo: The Author as Dissident
Abstract: When
Las virtudes del pájaro solitariofirst appeared in 1988 the novel caused a certain sensation, its mystical theme taking readers by surprise. Research by Javier Escudero Rodríguez has since shown that this reaction was somewhat misplaced, given that an obsession with death and an emergent interest in mysticism can be traced in Goytisolo’s fiction to at least the time ofMakbara.² Indeed, looking back even further, we might recall from the discussion above (pp. 94–5) thatJuan sin Tierraopens with an allusion to Eastern mysticism, though, admittedly, a pejorative one. The appearance of a religious theme is
6 THE AUTHOR AS MYSTIC: from:
Juan Goytisolo: The Author as Dissident
Abstract: When
Las virtudes del pájaro solitariofirst appeared in 1988 the novel caused a certain sensation, its mystical theme taking readers by surprise. Research by Javier Escudero Rodríguez has since shown that this reaction was somewhat misplaced, given that an obsession with death and an emergent interest in mysticism can be traced in Goytisolo’s fiction to at least the time ofMakbara.² Indeed, looking back even further, we might recall from the discussion above (pp. 94–5) thatJuan sin Tierraopens with an allusion to Eastern mysticism, though, admittedly, a pejorative one. The appearance of a religious theme is
Introduction from:
A Companion to Friedrich Nietzsche
Author(s) Bishop Paul
Abstract: Fridrich nietzsche (1844–1900) is a figure from the mid-nine- teenth century whose influence reached well into the twentieth century and extends beyond, into our own time. Both his professional (and professorial) beginnings and his tragic personal end condition our perception of his philosophical achievement: his appointment, at the extremely young age of twenty-four, to a chair of classical philology, and his final decade of insanity, following his mental collapse in 1889. From a body of writings that went virtually unnoticed when they were first published has arisen a tradition of commentary and analysis that sometimes threatens almost to obscure
3: Untimely Meditations from:
A Companion to Friedrich Nietzsche
Author(s) Large Duncan
Abstract: The untimely meditations (
Unzeitgemässe Betrachtungen, 1873–76) are some of Nietzsche’s most neglected works. They have attracted the attentions of translators less often than most of his other, more celebrated books — Walter Kaufmann, the doyen of postwar American Nietzsche translators, never got round to translating them, and he goes so far as to suggest that they merit translating last of all.¹ They have attracted relatively little scholarly interest, too, and are omitted from the canon established by Robert C. Solomon and Kathleen Higgins in their Reading Nietzsche,² while the term “untimeliness” has routinely been passed over in Nietzsche dictionaries.³
Link to from:
A Companion to Friedrich Nietzsche
Abstract: In June 1881, Nietzsche traveled on from Recoaro into the Engadin, staying first in St. Moritz and the moving on, in July 1881, to a small town in the mountains, where he was to stay for three months, and return time and again: Sils Maria. Here Nietzsche read Spinoza,¹ went for walks by the lake—noting, in particular, the existence of a large, pyramid-shaped rock by the water, close to Surlei—and wondered about whether to buy a typewriter. Externally, Nietzsche’s life looked dull, even boring: he stayed in a small house near the woods, ate a cheap lunch from
11: Twilight of the Idols from:
A Companion to Friedrich Nietzsche
Author(s) Diethe Carol
Abstract: The great tragedy of Nietzsche’s mental breakdown is compounded by the fact that, by the time of his last year of sanity, he had severed his connections with those formerly nearest to him (Wagner, his mother Franziska, and his sister Elisabeth): he was free at last to concentrate on what he intended to publish as his
magnum opus , The Will to Power (Der Wille zur Macht). His sister, with whom he had had a fraught relationship ever since her involvement in his attempt at a rapprochement with Lou Salomé in 1882, had married the anti-Semitic agitator and Wagnerian acolyte
14: Dithyrambs of Dionysos from:
A Companion to Friedrich Nietzsche
Author(s) Bishop Paul
Abstract: Around the same, time, he wrote “without a
Book Title: Museums and Biographies-Stories, Objects, Identities
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Hill Kate
Abstract: Museums and biographies both tell the stories of lives. This innovative collection examines for the first time biography - of individuals, objects and institutions - in relationship to the museum, casting new light on the many facets of museum history and theory, from the lives of prominent curators, to the context of museums of biography and autobiography. Separate sections cover individual biography and museum history, problematising individual biographies, institutional biographies, object biographies, and museums as biographies/autobiographies. These articles offer new ways of thinking about museums and museum history, exploring how biography in and of the museum enriches museum stories by stressing the inter-related nature of lives of people, objects and institutions as part of a dense web of relationships. Through their widely ranging research, the contributors demonstrate the value of thinking about the stories told in and by museums, and the relationships which make up museums; and suggest new ways of undertaking and understanding museum biographies. Dr Kate Hill is Senior Lecturer in History at the University of Lincoln. Contributors: Jeffrey Abt, Felicity Bodenstein, Alison Booth, Stuart Burch, Lucie Carreau, Elizabeth Crooke, Steffi de Jong, Mark Elliott, Sophie Forgan, Mariana Françozo, Laura Gray, Kate Hill, Suzanne MacLeod, Wallis Miller, Belinda Nemec, Donald Preziosi, Helen Rees Leahy, Linda Sandino, Julie Sheldon, Alexandra Stara, Louise Tythacott, Chris Whitehead, Anne Whitelaw.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.cttn3370
Introduction: from:
Museums and Biographies
Author(s) Hill Kate
Abstract: Biographies and museums both lie in a grey area of knowledge and affect; they tell us about what happened, but also form emotionally compelling and satisfying narratives. They mediate the academic and the popular, spanning the physical and imaginary worlds. They are linked by an ability to tell us about ourselves and our world as moving through time, but also serve to immortalise, to freeze in time. Above all, when museums and biographies come together or overlap, what we get is relationships: between people, between people and things, and between people and buildings. Moreover, museums and biographies together highlight questions
2 Introducing Mr Moderna Museet: from:
Museums and Biographies
Author(s) Burch Stuart
Abstract: Jean Tinguely’s
Fiesta Bar is lined with liquor bottles. Tasty-looking snacks by Claes Oldenburg are available for visual consumption. People hungry for knowledge can read from an extensive library. The even more inquisitive are able to salve their curiosity by nosing through some postcards sent by On Kawara. Those wishing to exercise their bodies rather than their minds can follow Andy Warhol’s handy Dance Diagram and foxtrot around the gallery. There is, alas, no musical accompaniment. Indeed, time seems to stand still, like the motionless hands of Ed Kienholz’s clock. Suddenly the silence is broken when someone presses an inviting
3 Sydney Pavière and the Harris Museum and Art Gallery, Preston from:
Museums and Biographies
Author(s) Gray Laura
Abstract: It sometimes happens that the character, as well as the actions, of a particular curator casts a long shadow within a museum or gallery. In
8 Schinkel’s Museums: from:
Museums and Biographies
Author(s) Miller Wallis
Abstract: The story of architecture museums in Berlin is, in one sense, a short one.¹ Although Berlin’s collection of archives dedicated to architecture is quite deep, it was only in 2007, when the Technical University renamed its archive and exhibition space after its historic Architekturmuseum, that the architecture museum as a type of institution re-established itself in the city’s cultural landscape.² Before this, the last time there was an architecture museum in Berlin was from 1931 to 1933. It was called the Schinkel Museum, and its short lifespan is surprising, given that Karl Friedrich Schinkel (1781–1841) was – and still
Endpiece: from:
Museums and Biographies
Author(s) Preziosi Donald
Abstract: A clear awareness of the reality of our own finitude being a possibly unbearable source of anxiety, we may at times be tempted to actually believe in our own immortality. Autobiographic, biographic and museographic possibilities for after-lives seduce us into imagining the constraints of the real being eliminated if we keep a tense yet measured distance – a coy similitude or a pantographic relationship – toward our (self) image. As epistemological technologies of virtual space, museums and collections keep the real at a manageable distance in the face of anxieties. The ego’s habitation in museological space opened up by its
Introduction from:
A Companion to Javier Marías
Abstract: For readers with more than a passing familiarity with his writing and, in particular, with his novels, Marías’s observation that he takes his time will come as no surprise. Indeed, for the narrators who tell his stories, and for the readers who navigate the complicated path
II Two Early Novels: from:
A Companion to Javier Marías
Abstract: When asked in 2006 about the relationship between his second novel,
Travesía del horizonte(1972) (Voyage Along the Horizon, 2006), and the general tendencies in Spanish fiction at the time of its publication, Marías promptly linked it to his first novel,Los dominios del lobo(1971) (The Dominions of the Wolf), and then located both outside the narrative mainstream in Spain. Indeed, he placed his first two works in a context of difference from important works of Spanish fiction of the 1960s and early 1970s that were lauded for their combination of stylistic experimentation and political antagonism toward Francoism. As
III Two Transitional Novels: from:
A Companion to Javier Marías
Abstract: El siglo(1983) is an unabashedly stylized novel. Its narrative technique (alternating chapters told in the first and third persons), its complicated sentence structure (largely baroque-like), and the slow pacing of its plot stand in marked contrast to Marías’s earlier novels,Los dominios del loboandTravesía del horizonte.¹ In the latter two works, as we have seen, Marías moves deftly but swiftly through multiple stories with sometimes tenuous connections. He rarely slows to allow for the development of complex characters, and he shapes the perspective of each novel largely through thirdperson narrators who may not possess sufficient information to
Introduction from:
A Companion to Javier Marías
Abstract: For readers with more than a passing familiarity with his writing and, in particular, with his novels, Marías’s observation that he takes his time will come as no surprise. Indeed, for the narrators who tell his stories, and for the readers who navigate the complicated path
II Two Early Novels: from:
A Companion to Javier Marías
Abstract: When asked in 2006 about the relationship between his second novel,
Travesía del horizonte(1972) (Voyage Along the Horizon, 2006), and the general tendencies in Spanish fiction at the time of its publication, Marías promptly linked it to his first novel,Los dominios del lobo(1971) (The Dominions of the Wolf), and then located both outside the narrative mainstream in Spain. Indeed, he placed his first two works in a context of difference from important works of Spanish fiction of the 1960s and early 1970s that were lauded for their combination of stylistic experimentation and political antagonism toward Francoism. As
III Two Transitional Novels: from:
A Companion to Javier Marías
Abstract: El siglo(1983) is an unabashedly stylized novel. Its narrative technique (alternating chapters told in the first and third persons), its complicated sentence structure (largely baroque-like), and the slow pacing of its plot stand in marked contrast to Marías’s earlier novels,Los dominios del loboandTravesía del horizonte.¹ In the latter two works, as we have seen, Marías moves deftly but swiftly through multiple stories with sometimes tenuous connections. He rarely slows to allow for the development of complex characters, and he shapes the perspective of each novel largely through thirdperson narrators who may not possess sufficient information to
6: “All My Relations”: from:
Thomas King
Author(s) Wolf Doris
Abstract: In her introduction to
Troubling Tricksters: Revisioning Critical Conversations, Kristina Fagan sums up trends in trickster studies, beginning in the late 1990s, when the trickster was a particularly fashionable topic in literary criticism on Aboriginal writing. In this early phase, Fagan emphasizes, most critics understood the figure as a timeless manifestation of “Indigenous tradition”: “From this perspective, we can see the pan-tribal trickster archetype offered a way of managing the issue of Indigenous ‘difference’ without requiring extensive research into the complexity of particular Indigenous peoples” (Fagan 2010, 5). Thus, in this incarnation, the trickster became whatever the critic wanted. Seeming
12: “One Good Story”: from:
Thomas King
Author(s) Schorcht Blanca
Abstract: There is a story I know. It’s about the earth and how it floats in space on the back of a turtle. I’ve heard this story many times, and each time someone tells the story it changes. . . . One time, it was in Prince Rupert, I think, a young girl in the audience asked about the turtle and the earth. If the earth was on the back of a turtle, what was below the turtle? Another turtle, the storyteller told her. And below that turtle? Another turtle. And below
20: Tom King and the from:
Thomas King
Author(s) Flaherty Kathleen
Abstract: Once upon a time I got a call from Thomas King saying he wanted to do an old-fashioned radio show. Since we had worked together before, on radio dramas he had adapted from his own stories, I knew he had a keen sense of radio. So we talked about what he meant by old-fashioned radio. He meant short plays with people talking directly to the audience from a single location. He meant cheesy sound effects created live in the studio. The show was going to be about contemporary life from a Native perspective. And from the perspective of someone who
Book Title: Fighting For Time-Shifting Boundaries of Work and Social Life
Publisher: Russell Sage Foundation
Author(s): Kalleberg Arne L.
Abstract: Though there are still just twenty-four hours in a day, society’s idea of who should be doing what and when has shifted. Time, the ultimate scarce resource, has become an increasingly contested battle zone in American life, with work, family, and personal obligations pulling individuals in conflicting directions. In Fighting for Time, editors Cynthia Fuchs Epstein and Arne Kalleberg bring together a team of distinguished sociologists and management analysts to examine the social construction of time and its importance in American culture. Fighting for Time opens with an exploration of changes in time spent at work—both when people are on the job and the number of hours they spend there—and the consequences of those changes for individuals and families. Contributors Jerry Jacobs and Kathleen Gerson find that the relative constancy of the average workweek in America over the last thirty years hides the fact that blue-collar workers are putting in fewer hours while more educated white-collar workers are putting in more. Rudy Fenwick and Mark Tausig look at the effect of nonstandard schedules on workers’ health and family life. They find that working unconventional hours can increase family stress, but that control over one’s work schedule improves family, social, and health outcomes for workers. The book then turns to an examination of how time influences the organization and control of work. The British insurance company studied by David Collinson and Margaret Collinson is an example of a culture where employees are judged on the number of hours they work rather than on their productivity. There, managers are under intense pressure not to take legally guaranteed parental leave, and clocks are banned from the office walls so that employees will work without regard to the time. In the book’s final section, the contributors examine how time can have different meanings for men and women. Cynthia Fuchs Epstein points out that professional women and stay-at-home fathers face social disapproval for spending too much time on activities that do not conform to socially prescribed gender roles—men are mocked by coworkers for taking paternity leave, while working mothers are chastised for leaving their children to the care of others. Fighting for Time challenges assumptions about the relationship between time and work, revealing that time is a fluid concept that derives its importance from cultural attitudes, social psychological processes, and the exercise of power. Its insight will be of interest to sociologists, economists, social psychologists, business leaders, and anyone interested in the work-life balance.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7758/9781610441872
Chapter 1 Time and Work: from:
Fighting For Time
Author(s) Kalleberg Arne L.
Abstract: Throughout history claims on people’s time have come from formal and informal authorities—from the state, from the church, from the firm and corporation, and from the family. The “natural” pace of life, in earlier times determined by the rising and setting of the sun, has given
Chapter 2 Understanding Changes in American Working Time: from:
Fighting For Time
Author(s) Gerson Kathleen
Abstract: Time on the job is a central and increasingly contested terrain in the lives of Americans. Working time sets the framework for both work and family life, and since time is not an expandable resource, long hours at the workplace must inevitably take time away from the rest of life. Long schedules of sixty hours a week or more mean that a worker is forced to scramble for time at home, inevitably missing even simple daily rituals such as breakfast or dinner with family and friends. Yet short workweeks of thirty hours or less, which offer more time for private
Chapter 3 Employment in a 24/7 Economy: from:
Fighting For Time
Author(s) Presser Harriet B.
Abstract: Over recent decades, the U.S. labor force has been experiencing greater temporal diversity in the nature of employment. The total number of weekly hours people are employed has been spreading to both ends of the continuum, so that more people are working very few as well as very many hours (Smith 1986; U.S. Department of Labor 2002). Which hours people are working has also been changing with flextime on the rise (Golden 2001; U.S. Department of Labor 1998) and more people working the “fringe times”—several hours before or after the traditional nine-to-five workday (Hamermesh 1999). It is interesting that
Chapter 4 The Health and Family-Social Consequences of Shift Work and Schedule Control: from:
Fighting For Time
Author(s) Tausig Mark
Abstract: Recent changes in the U.S. economy and labor force have led to great diversity in the time workers spend on the job. The increased diversity refers not only to changes in the absolute number of working hours, as many workers work more hours per week and many others work fewer hours, but also to which hours and days they are working and how much flexibility they have in determining which hours they work. The so-called “standard shift”—thirty-five to forty hours per week, nine to five, Monday through Friday—has increasingly become the exception rather than the standard, since fewer
Chapter 6 Bicycle Messengers and the Dialectics of Speed from:
Fighting For Time
Author(s) Stewart Benjamin
Abstract: Bicycle messengers provide a valuable on-demand service to urban businesses that require same-day delivery of time-sensitive material. This chapter analyzes the spatial and organizational contradictions that enable and disrupt the urban bicycle messenger industry’s production of speed. It begins with the industry’s general context, describing the congestion that makes the “low-tech” bicycle the city’s fastest mode of delivery. It then moves to explore two sides of the messenger’s labor situation, the stress that arises conjointly out of that enabling congestion and the industry’s demands for speed, and the stress-mitigating enjoyment that arises out of those aspects of the labor similar
Chapter 8 The Power of Time: from:
Fighting For Time
Author(s) Collinson Margaret
Abstract: The analytical significance of time has long been recognized in the natural science writings of Galileo, Newton, and Einstein and in the philosophical tracts of Heidegger, Kierkegaard, and Nietzsche, among others. Indeed an awareness of a past, a present, and a future, and of the finiteness of life are central features of human existence (Berger and Luckmann 1967). Human beings find meaning and identity in the temporal character of existence (Urry 1991, Collinson 2003). Yet it is only relatively recently that the importance of time has been acknowledged in theories of society (Giddens 1979, 1984, 1987; Adam 1990; Harvey 1990;
Chapter 10 Work Devotion and Work Time from:
Fighting For Time
Author(s) Blair-Loy Mary
Abstract: Scholars maintain that a major source of work-family conflict is the lack of sufficient time in the day to meet work and family obligations (see, for example, Hochschild 1997; Parcel 1999). This time crunch is exacerbated by the increase in work hours over the past thirty years, especially for professional and managerial workers and for women (Jacobs and Gerson 2004). Work-family researchers generally see long work hours as negative consequences of employer demands or increased competition wrought by globalization and industry consolidation (Schor 1992; Hochschild 1997; Jacobs and Gerson 2004; Blair-Loy and Jacobs 2003; Fraser 2001). But to fully comprehend
Chapter 11 Border Crossings: from:
Fighting For Time
Author(s) Epstein Cynthia Fuchs
Abstract: How do we account for the constraints faced by women and men who wish to move beyond the boundaries of their traditional sex and gender roles in contemporary society? Despite the opportunities for change made possible by advocates for equality, liberating technological advances, and changes in the law, women find it difficult to move upward through glass ceilings and men find it difficult to moderate time commitments at work to take on childcare responsibilities in the home. Ideologies and institutionalized practices in the workplace and the community form obstacles to breaking down boundaries. Among them are time ideologies and the
Chapter 7 God, Nation, and Self in America: from:
After Parsons
Author(s) Bellah Robert N.
Abstract: Talcott Parsons had a lifelong interest in American society, an interest that was both professional and personal. I, too, have spent much of my life studying American society, though I did not originally intend to do so, and my motivation was as much that of a citizen as a sociologist. In this chapter I can give adequate treatment neither to Parsons’s view of American society nor to my own. Rather, I will discuss some key points of intersection and some divergences in our views that developed over time. Under the influence of my undergraduate Marxism, I had a quite critical
Chapter 13 Parsons and the Human Condition from:
After Parsons
Author(s) Tiryakian Edward A.
Abstract: “A Paradigm of the Human Condition” is an eighty-one-page essay that concludes the last volume of essays published by Talcott Parsons in his lifetime,
Action Theory and the Human Condition(1978b).¹ One of the longest of the essays he published and the capstone of his theorizing ventures in the course of seven decades, it is also one of the least recognized and cited. This may stem from its complexity and the heterogeneity of its ingredients, or perhaps because the central theme smacks too much of “philosophy,” which most sociological training leaves us unprepared to tackle. In any case, “A Paradigm
How Sociological Theory Lost Its Central Issue and What Can Be Done About It from:
Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) LINDENBERG SIEGWART
Abstract: Given the short time allotted to this panel, I will start with three concise theses and I will exaggerate to make my point quickly [cf. Lindenberg 1983a for a more detailed discussion].
The Analysis of Diversity and the Diversity of Analysis from:
Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) JANOWITZ MORRIS
Abstract: For me, the house of sociology has many rooms. An interest in social institutions guides my work. I believe that the “institutional approach” to political sociology is close to the real world and at the same time supplies a basis for theoretical analysis of institution building in politics. Institutional analysis is especially useful in probing nation-states with democratic political institutions which are now experiencing great internal strain.
Comment from:
Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) COLLINS RANDALL
Abstract: If we go back to the 1920s, we find philosophies of knowledge which for the most part exempted science from the realm of explanation. The first people who pushed into a sociology of science were Marxists in the 1930s: J. D. Bernal in England, Bernard Stern on this side of the Atlantic, and others who had rather strong ideological concerns about why science should not be exempt from being seen as part of a social system and hence molded to social purposes. This line of analysis largely disappeared for some time, but not without leaving a residue, and not without
The California Gold Rush: from:
Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) OBERSCHALL ANTHONY
Abstract: This paper will provide an example of how to account for social structure by means of transaction costs. Transaction costs refer to the costs of interaction and of exchange itself, such as the costs of collecting information on interaction partners and on the commodity or action that is exchanged, the costs of negotiating an agreement or contract and of monitoring its implementation, and the actual enforcement costs of the agreement. Transaction costs exist because human beings’ rationality is bounded, not least by the time and effort of collecting and processing information; because some people are opportunists who violate trust and
Human Capital and the Rise and Fall of Families from:
Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) TOMES NIGEL
Abstract: Although discussions of inequality among families and discussions of inequality between generations of the same family have been almost entirely separated, they are analytically closely related. In particular, regression away from the mean in the relation between the incomes of parents and children would be associated with large and growing inequality of income over time, while regression toward the mean would be associated with a smaller and more stable degree of inequality. These statements are obvious in a simple stochastic model of the relation between parents and children:
Comment from:
Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) ALDRICH HOWARD
Abstract: I want to emphasize a point that Hannan and Freeman have made about the paradigm shift their work represents. In 1974, at the International Sociological Association meetings in Toronto, Hannan and Freeman presented a paper called “The Population Ecology of Organizations.” Things haven’t been the same since that time! They pointed out the very high death rate of organizations compared with what the literature in the 1960s would have led us to expect. For a representative cross section of organizations, the death rate is about one in ten per year, and for new organizations it is over one in two
General Discussion from:
Approaches to Social Theory
Abstract: Joseph Ben-David:I would like to follow up Arthur Mann’s suggestions. When I listened to this paper one thing which came into my mind was that Bloomsbury was within walking distance of Whitehall. But Washington—at that time—was in the boondocks and there was no Bloomsbury in the United States. I think this was a basic difference in the social structure of the two societies.
General Discussion from:
Approaches to Social Theory
Abstract: William Labov:I am equally discouraged. All previous discussions of this issue have been in terms of the opposite tendency, “decreolization”—that at one time Black English was a Creole similar
A Theory of Social Movements, Social Classes, and Castes from:
Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) OLSON MANCUR
Abstract: The behavior of most individuals is, of course, influenced to some degree by the social groups to which they belong. The information and beliefs to which children are exposed obviously vary from one social group to another. Since it usually costs something to acquire new information, the theory of my discipline of economics leads one to predict that the behavior of individuals will sometimes be influenced by the beliefs and perceptions they inevitably absorb in the social groups in which they happen to have been raised. For the sociologist such a prediction must be utterly banal, for the influence of
General Discussion from:
Approaches to Social Theory
Abstract: Siegwart Lindenberg:Sometimes it helps to know that something that is described and deemed important already has a
Introduction from:
Promises of 1968
Author(s) Tismaneanu Vladimir
Abstract: The events of 1968 radically influenced the social, political, and cultural landscape of the post-1945 world. In the context of the Cold War, 1968 was a transnational moment of revolt against the status quo beyond the east-West divide.¹ it represented a turning point in world history that brought about a sweeping axiological reassessment of politics.² More than ten years ago, the editors of a collective volume about 1968 stated that “the memories of witnesses to the events of this
annus mirabilis are still fragmentary and colored by partisanship, personal injury and defeat, or nostalgia for a heroic time, whereas historians
“Don’t Push Us, Comrade!”—De Gaulle in Bucharest from:
Promises of 1968
Author(s) Avramescu Cătălin
Abstract: Originally scheduled to take place in June 1967 but postponed because of the six-day War, the French president’s visit to Romania finally took place the following year, when, from May 14 to 18, de Gaulle was the guest of Nicolae Ceauşescu. It was a momentous time for France. During the visit, strikes and street violence escalated in Paris. News about developments on the home front reached the French delegation without interruption. For instance, in Craiova, a small provincial town in Romania, the French installed two special telephones and three fax machines. The worries of the French party would prove well-founded.
[Part I Introduction] from:
Bones of Contention
Abstract: It was in late December 1985 when my old friend Diana Gergova called me over the phone, and asked to meet her urgently. We had been inseparable since the 1960s in high school, and later as history students at the University of Sofia. At the time of the call, I was associate professor of Balkan history at the University of Sofia, and Diana was a research fellow at the Archeological Institute at the Bulgarian Academy of Sciences. She acted also as party secretary of the institute.¹ She immediately came to the point: my father, at that moment acting as vice
3. No Redress, or Where Are Levski’s Bones? from:
Bones of Contention
Abstract: When all was said and done, there were two lingering problems that at times were posed directly, at other times were present only obliquely. One was the archeologists’ question why all the noise when nothing could be proven categorically. For them, once it was clear that a definitive conclusion could not be accepted or imposed about the remains of Skeleton No. 95, this made the whole discussion immaterial and a waste of time. After all, science deals only with proven theses. In a charitable version, this question can explain part of the implicit passivity of some among the archeologists. In
[Part II Introduction] from:
Bones of Contention
Abstract: In the summer of 1998, I visited the artist Todor Tsonev, who had become famous after 1989 with his exhibition of cartoons of Todor Zhivkov that he had painted during communism, one of the very few cases where the expectation of a “closet full of masterpieces” that were cached away from the forbidding eyes of censorship actually was vindicated. Maria Ovcharova, his close friend and collaborator and a scholar in her own right, had organized this exhibit after 1989, and it triggered enormous interest. For a brief period of time Tsonev became the hero of democracy, the notion which in
5. The Literary and Visual Hypostases of the Hero from:
Bones of Contention
Abstract: For a long time the “novelization” of Levski was resisted. Vazov’s
oeuvreintroduced the fictional genre in the treatment of Levski (both in his poetic ode as well as the short stories), but the latter somehow acquired the status of documentary evidence in public perception, although Vazov had never (and did not pretend) to have met and known Levski. Levski’s biographer Stoianov also had never met Levski and suffered profoundly from this “deficiency.” His first attempt at biography (moving away from the memoirist genre) was Levski, and he was adamant that it was true to facticity and resisted the temptations
2. The Canonization and Its Implications from:
Bones of Contention
Abstract: This, then, is the background against which the elevation of Levski to a sanctified status has to be understood. To reverse the popular definition of historical background as the limbo inhabited by people who do not really interest us, it is precisely the inhabitants of this limbo who capture the attention in this story. For the clergy of the alternative Synod, the canonization was a move that, for the first time, propelled their activities out of the heretofore exclusively political field, and into the cultural field. Was this a deliberately calculated and carefully staged act intended to exploit a powerful
CHAPTER I. THE TRANSFORMATION OF SYMBOLIC GEOGRAPHY from:
Late Enlightenment
Abstract: In the 1760s the Republic of Venice, to which Dalmatia belonged as a province, recognized the shortcomings of its economic status and introduced an agricultural policy based on physiocratic ideas.¹ The situation in Dalmatia had been particularly bad and the rural population in the Dalmatian hinterlands, known as Morlacchia, was suffering from famine caused by crop failure. Yet, despite these calamities, it proved difficult to interest the Slavic-speaking Morlachs (
Gr. Mavrovlachs = ‘Black Wallachians’) in any sort of bettering of their condition, since their martial culture was incompatible with ideas of agricultural reform. Around the same time the Serenissima, anxious
Book Title: Measuring Time, Making History- Publisher: Central European University Press
Author(s): Hunt Lynn
Abstract: Time is the crucial ingredient in history, and yet historians rarely talk about time as such. These essays offer new insight into the development of modern conceptions of time, from the Christian dating system (BC/AD or BCE/CE) to the idea of “modernity” as a new epoch in human history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7829/j.ctt1282fh
Chapter 1 Is Time Historical? from:
Measuring Time, Making History
Abstract: Time, as Sexton’s lines so forcibly remind us, requires metaphor. It flows like a river, accelerates like an engine, flies like a winged chariot, freezes like instant ice, stands still like a heart between beats, or, in Sexton’s words, grows short, and then dims out as death opens his door. Without the metaphors, whether “that Nazi Mama” wiggling her skirts, or the more venerable arrow of time, the fourth dimension would be exceedingly difficult to grasp. Linguists have noted that it is virtually impossible to talk about time without invoking motion (wiggling skirts, engines, chariots, arrows) and spatial content (short,
Chapter 3 Post Times or the Future of the Past from:
Measuring Time, Making History
Abstract: Western notions of time have shaped temporal understandings around the world and to a considerable extent have been imposed on the rest of the world. Twenty-five nations sent delegates to the International Meridian Conference that met in Washington D.C. in October 1884 and adopted the observatory at Greenwich, England as the location for the prime meridian (0 longitude). Among them were all the major countries of Europe, many South American countries, the United States, of course, and Turkey and Japan, the sole representatives of their regions. The Europeans presumably stood in for their African colonies. Although all the nations represented
Book Title: Friendship and Love, Ethics and Politics-Studies in Mediaeval and Early Modern History
Publisher: Central European University Press
Author(s): Österberg Eva
Abstract: Today, friendship, love and sexuality are mostly viewed as private, personal and informal relations. In the mediaeval and early modern period, just like in ancient times, this was different. The classical philosophy of friendship (Aristotle) included both friendship and love in the concept of philia. It was also linked to an argument about the virtues needed to become an excellent member of the city state. Thus, close relations were not only thought to be a matter of pleasant gatherings in privacy, but just as much a matter of ethics and politics. What, then, happened to the classical ideas of close relations when they were transmitted to philosophers, clerical and monastic thinkers, state officials or other people in the medieval and early modern period? To what extent did friendship transcend the distinctions between private and public that then existed? How were close relations shaped in practice? Did dialogues with close friends help to contribute to the process of subject-formation in the Renaissance and Enlightenment? To what degree did institutions of power or individual thinkers find it necessary to caution against friendship or love and sexuality?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7829/j.ctt1282g0
Chapter 3 Me and My Friends from:
Friendship and Love, Ethics and Politics
Abstract: My themes in this chapter are individuality, autobiography, and friendship. The combination of individuality and autobiography is hardly surprising. Autobiographies are usually regarded as the best place for authors to reflect upon themselves as unique persons and lay bare their individuality. Critical voices are heard accusing autobiographers of being egocentric, if not narcissistic and pompous, and dwelling far too long on their subject; less jaundiced observers note the naked self-criticism and humble attitude that some writers reveal in their autobiographies. In any case, with the recently renewed interest in subjectformation—the development of the individual over time—autobiographies have become
Chapter 5 Close Relationships—Then and Now from:
Friendship and Love, Ethics and Politics
Abstract: In the previous chapters I set out to show how premodern love and friendship, both as ideals and in the full diversity of reality, were not only important in private life, but also in public life. The focus of my analysis has been the ways that philosophers, writers, and State and Church thought and spoke about close relationships, and the great changes in these discourses over time. But I have also been able to shed light on specific variations in actual relationships by using diaries, correspondence, and autobiographical material. It goes without saying that I have only been able to
Book Title: Friendship and Love, Ethics and Politics-Studies in Mediaeval and Early Modern History
Publisher: Central European University Press
Author(s): Österberg Eva
Abstract: Today, friendship, love and sexuality are mostly viewed as private, personal and informal relations. In the mediaeval and early modern period, just like in ancient times, this was different. The classical philosophy of friendship (Aristotle) included both friendship and love in the concept of philia. It was also linked to an argument about the virtues needed to become an excellent member of the city state. Thus, close relations were not only thought to be a matter of pleasant gatherings in privacy, but just as much a matter of ethics and politics. What, then, happened to the classical ideas of close relations when they were transmitted to philosophers, clerical and monastic thinkers, state officials or other people in the medieval and early modern period? To what extent did friendship transcend the distinctions between private and public that then existed? How were close relations shaped in practice? Did dialogues with close friends help to contribute to the process of subject-formation in the Renaissance and Enlightenment? To what degree did institutions of power or individual thinkers find it necessary to caution against friendship or love and sexuality?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7829/j.ctt1282g0
Chapter 3 Me and My Friends from:
Friendship and Love, Ethics and Politics
Abstract: My themes in this chapter are individuality, autobiography, and friendship. The combination of individuality and autobiography is hardly surprising. Autobiographies are usually regarded as the best place for authors to reflect upon themselves as unique persons and lay bare their individuality. Critical voices are heard accusing autobiographers of being egocentric, if not narcissistic and pompous, and dwelling far too long on their subject; less jaundiced observers note the naked self-criticism and humble attitude that some writers reveal in their autobiographies. In any case, with the recently renewed interest in subjectformation—the development of the individual over time—autobiographies have become
Chapter 5 Close Relationships—Then and Now from:
Friendship and Love, Ethics and Politics
Abstract: In the previous chapters I set out to show how premodern love and friendship, both as ideals and in the full diversity of reality, were not only important in private life, but also in public life. The focus of my analysis has been the ways that philosophers, writers, and State and Church thought and spoke about close relationships, and the great changes in these discourses over time. But I have also been able to shed light on specific variations in actual relationships by using diaries, correspondence, and autobiographical material. It goes without saying that I have only been able to
3. The Canon of Remembering Romanian Communism: from:
Remembering Communism
Author(s) Petrescu Dragoş
Abstract: According to the conventional knowledge developed in the West during the Cold War, Romania was more often than not an exception, at odds not only with the Soviet Union, but also with the other satellites. From a country envied by the “fraternal” states and applauded by the opposite camp because of its reorientation toward the West in the 1960s, Romania turned by the end of the 1980s into a discredited dictatorship with a rotten economy and the lowest living standards in Europe, with the possible exception of Albania. At the time when perestroika and glasnost stirred the winds of change
6. Remembering Dictatorship: from:
Remembering Communism
Author(s) Schmidt Bradley
Abstract: Dictatorship constantly threatens our generation: we are already used to it stalking us like a wild animal whose roars make us wake up at night, and sometimes comes so close that we feel
14. Remembering Communism: from:
Remembering Communism
Author(s) Boneva Tania
Abstract: In my study, I have tried to overcome the one-sided image of communism/socialism in Bulgaria. I hope that it answers some of the critical questions about the development of Bulgarian society in the twentieth century, and that it presents a complex picture of both peasants and workers in the region of Pernik at that time, in particular with regard to the problems of economic and social modernization of Bulgarian society in the period of communism/socialism. The social inequalities between peasants and workers, the focus on industrialization and massive migration to the town—a process typical for the whole communist period
18. How Post-1989 Bulgarian Society Perceives the Role of the State Security Service from:
Remembering Communism
Author(s) Baeva Iskra
Abstract: For good or bad, in the course of the last more than two decades Bulgarian society has been undergoing deep social and political transformations. These have not been the first transformations of this kind during the twentieth century but for the first time the historians of my generation could observe and analyze them by themselves. From the very beginning of the changes in Bulgaria—10 November 1989—it became quite clear to me that, apart from participating in political life (which I did throughout the first decade of the transition), I should view what was happening through the prism of
20. Daily Life and Surveillance in the 1970s and 1980s from:
Remembering Communism
Author(s) Percec Dana Chetrinescu
Abstract: I took an interest in the theme of Securitate surveillance of our lives a short while after this institution’s archives were opened to the public, in 2001, I believe. I saw my own file, which was started in January 1989, and I realized that the frequent out-of-order telephone lines at the time made sense now, and that the technician who would come to repair the device most likely replaced one microphone with another. Although it was not very bulky—it had only thirty-nine pages—the file told me something about the practices of surveillance and about the omissions and limitations
21. From Memory to Canon: from:
Remembering Communism
Author(s) Popova Katerina
Abstract: Immediately after 1989, our past became more and more unpredictable. At the time, I did not realize how accurate this famous phrase would continue to be two decades later. Although I had been working on the problematic of collective memory for some time, I could not have imagined that the efforts of a group of politicians and historians (the European People’s Party, Stéphane Courtois, and others), who strove to legalize the formula “communism is a regime more perverse than Nazism” in the process of lobbying for Resolution 1481 of the PACE (January 2006), would not be discussed by Bulgarian historians,
28. Remembering the “Revival Process” in Post-1989 Bulgaria from:
Remembering Communism
Author(s) Kalinova Evgenia
Abstract: The euphemistically called “revival process,” that is, the policy of the Bulgarian Communist Party aiming at ethnic assimilation of the Turkish minority in Bulgaria in the second half of the 1980s, has been in the scope of my research interests as an important part of contemporary Bulgarian history which I teach at the University of Sofia. At the same time, I have always been aware that the “revival process,” even though it ended in December 1989, is still present as a painful memory. When discussing the problem with my students, I observed that their reactions most often were purely emotional
3. The Canon of Remembering Romanian Communism: from:
Remembering Communism
Author(s) Petrescu Dragoş
Abstract: According to the conventional knowledge developed in the West during the Cold War, Romania was more often than not an exception, at odds not only with the Soviet Union, but also with the other satellites. From a country envied by the “fraternal” states and applauded by the opposite camp because of its reorientation toward the West in the 1960s, Romania turned by the end of the 1980s into a discredited dictatorship with a rotten economy and the lowest living standards in Europe, with the possible exception of Albania. At the time when perestroika and glasnost stirred the winds of change
6. Remembering Dictatorship: from:
Remembering Communism
Author(s) Schmidt Bradley
Abstract: Dictatorship constantly threatens our generation: we are already used to it stalking us like a wild animal whose roars make us wake up at night, and sometimes comes so close that we feel
14. Remembering Communism: from:
Remembering Communism
Author(s) Boneva Tania
Abstract: In my study, I have tried to overcome the one-sided image of communism/socialism in Bulgaria. I hope that it answers some of the critical questions about the development of Bulgarian society in the twentieth century, and that it presents a complex picture of both peasants and workers in the region of Pernik at that time, in particular with regard to the problems of economic and social modernization of Bulgarian society in the period of communism/socialism. The social inequalities between peasants and workers, the focus on industrialization and massive migration to the town—a process typical for the whole communist period
18. How Post-1989 Bulgarian Society Perceives the Role of the State Security Service from:
Remembering Communism
Author(s) Baeva Iskra
Abstract: For good or bad, in the course of the last more than two decades Bulgarian society has been undergoing deep social and political transformations. These have not been the first transformations of this kind during the twentieth century but for the first time the historians of my generation could observe and analyze them by themselves. From the very beginning of the changes in Bulgaria—10 November 1989—it became quite clear to me that, apart from participating in political life (which I did throughout the first decade of the transition), I should view what was happening through the prism of
20. Daily Life and Surveillance in the 1970s and 1980s from:
Remembering Communism
Author(s) Percec Dana Chetrinescu
Abstract: I took an interest in the theme of Securitate surveillance of our lives a short while after this institution’s archives were opened to the public, in 2001, I believe. I saw my own file, which was started in January 1989, and I realized that the frequent out-of-order telephone lines at the time made sense now, and that the technician who would come to repair the device most likely replaced one microphone with another. Although it was not very bulky—it had only thirty-nine pages—the file told me something about the practices of surveillance and about the omissions and limitations
21. From Memory to Canon: from:
Remembering Communism
Author(s) Popova Katerina
Abstract: Immediately after 1989, our past became more and more unpredictable. At the time, I did not realize how accurate this famous phrase would continue to be two decades later. Although I had been working on the problematic of collective memory for some time, I could not have imagined that the efforts of a group of politicians and historians (the European People’s Party, Stéphane Courtois, and others), who strove to legalize the formula “communism is a regime more perverse than Nazism” in the process of lobbying for Resolution 1481 of the PACE (January 2006), would not be discussed by Bulgarian historians,
28. Remembering the “Revival Process” in Post-1989 Bulgaria from:
Remembering Communism
Author(s) Kalinova Evgenia
Abstract: The euphemistically called “revival process,” that is, the policy of the Bulgarian Communist Party aiming at ethnic assimilation of the Turkish minority in Bulgaria in the second half of the 1980s, has been in the scope of my research interests as an important part of contemporary Bulgarian history which I teach at the University of Sofia. At the same time, I have always been aware that the “revival process,” even though it ended in December 1989, is still present as a painful memory. When discussing the problem with my students, I observed that their reactions most often were purely emotional
European Mass Killing and European Commemoration from:
Remembrance, History, and Justice
Author(s) Snyder Timothy
Abstract: The history of mass killing and the commemoration of that history are two separate subjects.¹ I would like to divide this chapter between these two topics, emphasizing that they are different, and, at the very end, I will make some modest suggestions about how they ought to be brought together. So, this is an essay about the last twenty years of my own work, which involved an attempt to bring together German and Soviet policies of mass killing in Eastern Europe in the volume
Bloodlands. At the same time, the past two decades was a rich period of commemoration of
Democracy, Memory, and Moral Justice from:
Remembrance, History, and Justice
Author(s) Tismaneanu Vladimir
Abstract: In January 2007, Romania acceded to the European Union (EU), a few years after having entered the North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO). This was a watershed in Romania’s history, a significant moment in the history of Eastern Europe, and a test for the EU’s commitment to accepting problematic candidates as long as they have complied with the major accession requirements. Sometime ago, in a controversial article published in the
New York Review of Books, the late Tony Judt argued that the real test for the EU was Romania’s accession, considering its pending structural problems. The piece generated anger among Romanian
The Romanian Communist Past and the Entrapment of Polemics from:
Remembrance, History, and Justice
Author(s) Iacob Bogdan C.
Abstract: In September 2010, the Institute for the Investigation of Communist Crimes and the Memory of the Romanian Exile¹ published a survey on the opinions and attitudes of the Romanian population about the communist past. Among many of the rather contradictory results, the poll showed how 78 percent of the respondents answered “No” to the question “Did you personally or has a member of your family suffered because of the communist regime?” At the same time, 37 percent considered that the regime was criminal, 42 percent that it was illegitimate, and 50 percent admitted that there was repression under communist rule².
Chapter Five THE PURSUIT OF “SACRIFICIAL” SALVATION from:
Serbian Orthodox Fundamentals
Abstract: When applied to explicit or implicit (cognitive) statements about the “placement” of man in his environment, human rational faculties are often inadequate in the decipherment and revelation of an esoteric content. Humanity’s integrative roots with the universe and the creation of a graspable consciousness, as a means of orientation in time and/or space (in the concrete, but also in the dimension of ontological reality) embrace the totality of the past with the help of symbols, rituals, ceremonies and myths. A community could not regard itself as truly constituted until a sacred beginning is ascribed to it and an inseparable, “invisible
Conditions for European Solidarity from:
What Holds Europe Together?
Author(s) BÖCKENFÖRDE ERNST-WOLFGANG
Abstract: Related to this, solidarity signifies at the same time a form of assuming responsibility for one another, associated with positive action or services on behalf of others, whether individuals or a particular community or society as a whole. This is
Europe’s Solidarity Deficit from:
What Holds Europe Together?
Author(s) KRASTEV IVAN
Abstract: What once upon a time was the “unification of Europe” has turned into the enlargement of the EU. But it is precisely because the enlargement of the European Union is no longer the unification of Europe that Brussels faces a major problem—a problem that is more profound than the democracy deficit: the solidarity deficit.
Solidarity under Threat from:
What Holds Europe Together?
Author(s) ROKITA JAN
Abstract: Whenever I’m invited to say something about the state of European solidarity, I feel the embarrassment of a well-behaved boy forced to do something completely inappropriate in good company: to swear aloud or to unmask the lies of a good and respected uncle. Correspondingly, for some time I have had the strong impression that the idea of solidarity on our continent of Europe serves the same function as the idea of peace did shortly before World War II. The more often politicians call upon it, and the more international conferences and seminars are devoted to it, the less solidarity there
Book Title: Times of History-Universal Topics in Islamic Historiography
Publisher: Central European University Press
Author(s): Al-Azmeh Aziz
Abstract: This is a collection of essays on current questions of historiography, illustrated with reference to Islamic historiography. The main concerns are conceptions of time and temporality, the uses of the past, historical periodisation, historical categorisation, and the constitution of historical objects, not least those called "civilisation" and "Islam". One of the aims of the book is to apply to Islamic materials the standard conceptual equipment used in historical study, and to exercise a large-scale comparativist outlook.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7829/j.ctt1cgf93z
CHAPTER 1 Tropes and Temporalities of Historiographic Romanticism, Modern and Islamic from:
Times of History
Abstract: It is not that there is any difference in God’s knowledge according as it is produced by things not yet in existence, by things now or by things that are no more. Unlike us, He does not look ahead to the future, see the present before him, and look back to the past … Hence all events in time, events that will be and are not yet and those that are now, being
CHAPTER 2 Islam and the History of Civilizations from:
Times of History
Abstract: It is appropriate to start by warning against the fascination of Islam in historical studies, and to suggest that interpretations of classical and contemporary Muslim political phenomena be undertaken in terms of their times and places rather than in terms of abiding cultural patterns.
CHAPTER 3 Chronophagous Discourse: from:
Times of History
Abstract: Amongst all religious traditions, Islamic civilization has produced what is perhaps the most deliberately sustained concern with, and profuse body of writing on, history. The concern with the past is manifest in all genres of Arabic
Schrifttum: poetry was classicized with the establishment of anterior texts and modes; pietistic and legal works established a knowledge of early Muslim practice asFürstenspiegeland valorized salutary and deleterious acts of kings and sages from many histories; Koranic exegesis required monumental knowledge of Muslim precedents and linguistic usages of yore; dynasties, times, and biographies were meticulously chronicled and recorded; universal histories were composed
CHAPTER 4 The Muslim Canon from Late Antiquity to the Era of Modernism from:
Times of History
Abstract: By referring to the Muslim Canon in Late Antiquity and the Middle Ages, it is my intention to underline the specific character of the perspective I wish to cast in this essay upon the Koran and the canonical texts that complement it. It is primarily an historical perspective, insensitive to the mythological accounts one normally encounters with respect to the histories of significant events and times—historical events, often construed as born virtually complete and pristine.
5. God’s Chronography and Dissipative Time from:
Times of History
Abstract: Apocalypses are of interest not only to antiquarians or religious ideologues. They subtend and rest upon a rich and ubiquitous conception of time which is, as we shall see, of salience to fields far broader than eschatology or of salvation history, and this judgement I believe applies to all apocalypses including those of Islam, all of which treat temporality in a manner that is conceptually isomorphous. This is a conception of time that brings out with particular sharpness of relief and of definition, almost as an ideal-type, notions of history that are of an ubiquity far greater than is generally
CHAPTER 7 Islamic Political Thought: from:
Times of History
Abstract: It is thus perhaps little surprising that conceptions of power and political thought elaborated in the course of Muslim histories, in modern times no less than in the
Book Title: Times of History-Universal Topics in Islamic Historiography
Publisher: Central European University Press
Author(s): Al-Azmeh Aziz
Abstract: This is a collection of essays on current questions of historiography, illustrated with reference to Islamic historiography. The main concerns are conceptions of time and temporality, the uses of the past, historical periodisation, historical categorisation, and the constitution of historical objects, not least those called "civilisation" and "Islam". One of the aims of the book is to apply to Islamic materials the standard conceptual equipment used in historical study, and to exercise a large-scale comparativist outlook.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7829/j.ctt1cgf93z
CHAPTER 1 Tropes and Temporalities of Historiographic Romanticism, Modern and Islamic from:
Times of History
Abstract: It is not that there is any difference in God’s knowledge according as it is produced by things not yet in existence, by things now or by things that are no more. Unlike us, He does not look ahead to the future, see the present before him, and look back to the past … Hence all events in time, events that will be and are not yet and those that are now, being
CHAPTER 2 Islam and the History of Civilizations from:
Times of History
Abstract: It is appropriate to start by warning against the fascination of Islam in historical studies, and to suggest that interpretations of classical and contemporary Muslim political phenomena be undertaken in terms of their times and places rather than in terms of abiding cultural patterns.
CHAPTER 3 Chronophagous Discourse: from:
Times of History
Abstract: Amongst all religious traditions, Islamic civilization has produced what is perhaps the most deliberately sustained concern with, and profuse body of writing on, history. The concern with the past is manifest in all genres of Arabic
Schrifttum: poetry was classicized with the establishment of anterior texts and modes; pietistic and legal works established a knowledge of early Muslim practice asFürstenspiegeland valorized salutary and deleterious acts of kings and sages from many histories; Koranic exegesis required monumental knowledge of Muslim precedents and linguistic usages of yore; dynasties, times, and biographies were meticulously chronicled and recorded; universal histories were composed
CHAPTER 4 The Muslim Canon from Late Antiquity to the Era of Modernism from:
Times of History
Abstract: By referring to the Muslim Canon in Late Antiquity and the Middle Ages, it is my intention to underline the specific character of the perspective I wish to cast in this essay upon the Koran and the canonical texts that complement it. It is primarily an historical perspective, insensitive to the mythological accounts one normally encounters with respect to the histories of significant events and times—historical events, often construed as born virtually complete and pristine.
5. God’s Chronography and Dissipative Time from:
Times of History
Abstract: Apocalypses are of interest not only to antiquarians or religious ideologues. They subtend and rest upon a rich and ubiquitous conception of time which is, as we shall see, of salience to fields far broader than eschatology or of salvation history, and this judgement I believe applies to all apocalypses including those of Islam, all of which treat temporality in a manner that is conceptually isomorphous. This is a conception of time that brings out with particular sharpness of relief and of definition, almost as an ideal-type, notions of history that are of an ubiquity far greater than is generally
CHAPTER 7 Islamic Political Thought: from:
Times of History
Abstract: It is thus perhaps little surprising that conceptions of power and political thought elaborated in the course of Muslim histories, in modern times no less than in the
The Redistribution of the Memory of Socialism. from:
Past for the Eyes
Author(s) Horváth Zsolt K.
Abstract: “Budapest is a city without time. If you visit here, you will not feel that you are in the nineties. (…) Here the politicians want to win World War I in Parliament.”¹ This remark by Jenõ Menyhárt, underground musician and emblematic figure of the 1980s in Hungary, uttered in his subjective, sarcastic style, explicates the symbolic battle for possession of the past in post-socialist Hungary. Labeling the historical consciousness and political uses of the recent past of Hungary, he talks about a country which defines itself through its earlier historical conflicts, and not through current political, economic and cultural problems.
Chapter 5 Hybrid Languages from:
Hybrid Renaissance
Abstract: An alternative title for this chapter might be “polyglossia”, a term that the Russian literary theorist Mikhail Bakhtin employed to describe the coexistence and consequent “dialogue” between different languages (his more famous term “heteroglossia” described the interaction of varieties of the same language).² The languages of Europe in the Renaissance were enriched by borrowing or appropriation on a massive scale. For example, the period 1530-1660 “presents the fastest word growth in the history of English in proportion to the vocabulary size of the time”.³ In the history of language, as in the history of visual culture, the movement we call
Chapter 6 Hybrid Literatures from:
Hybrid Renaissance
Abstract: Different forms of script coexisted at this time. The movement to revive classical
Chapter 8 Hybrid Philosophies from:
Hybrid Renaissance
Abstract: The problem of the compatibility or incompatibility of ancient Greek philosophy with Christianity, acute in the fourth century, resurfaced in the thirteenth, the time of the rediscovery of Aristotle in Western Europe. Thomas Aquinas might be said to have translated Christianity into the language of Aristotle in his famous
Summaeof philosophy and theology. Other medieval philosophers went even further than Aquinas in appropriating the ideas of Aristotle. They were described as “Averroists” (Averroistae) in other words followers of the twelfth-century Muslim polymath and commentator on Aristotle Ibn Rushd, known in the medieval West as Averroes. Aquinas criticized the Averroists
Coda. from:
Hybrid Renaissance
Abstract: The processes which have been discussed in this book under the umbrella of the general term “hybridization” did not meet with everyone’s approval at the time, as the use of pejorative terms such as “mish-mash”, “hotchpotch” or “bastard” vividly suggest. In this brief coda, the attempt will be made to view them from a different perspective, not as solutions but as problems. The process of hybridization, it was suggested earlier, may be conscious or unconscious. On the other hand, opposition to the process is necessarily conscious, whether it takes the weaker form of resistance or the stronger form of a
Chapter 5 Hybrid Languages from:
Hybrid Renaissance
Abstract: An alternative title for this chapter might be “polyglossia”, a term that the Russian literary theorist Mikhail Bakhtin employed to describe the coexistence and consequent “dialogue” between different languages (his more famous term “heteroglossia” described the interaction of varieties of the same language).² The languages of Europe in the Renaissance were enriched by borrowing or appropriation on a massive scale. For example, the period 1530-1660 “presents the fastest word growth in the history of English in proportion to the vocabulary size of the time”.³ In the history of language, as in the history of visual culture, the movement we call
Chapter 6 Hybrid Literatures from:
Hybrid Renaissance
Abstract: Different forms of script coexisted at this time. The movement to revive classical
Chapter 8 Hybrid Philosophies from:
Hybrid Renaissance
Abstract: The problem of the compatibility or incompatibility of ancient Greek philosophy with Christianity, acute in the fourth century, resurfaced in the thirteenth, the time of the rediscovery of Aristotle in Western Europe. Thomas Aquinas might be said to have translated Christianity into the language of Aristotle in his famous
Summaeof philosophy and theology. Other medieval philosophers went even further than Aquinas in appropriating the ideas of Aristotle. They were described as “Averroists” (Averroistae) in other words followers of the twelfth-century Muslim polymath and commentator on Aristotle Ibn Rushd, known in the medieval West as Averroes. Aquinas criticized the Averroists
Coda. from:
Hybrid Renaissance
Abstract: The processes which have been discussed in this book under the umbrella of the general term “hybridization” did not meet with everyone’s approval at the time, as the use of pejorative terms such as “mish-mash”, “hotchpotch” or “bastard” vividly suggest. In this brief coda, the attempt will be made to view them from a different perspective, not as solutions but as problems. The process of hybridization, it was suggested earlier, may be conscious or unconscious. On the other hand, opposition to the process is necessarily conscious, whether it takes the weaker form of resistance or the stronger form of a
FOREWORD from:
Where Currents Meet
Abstract: As happens at times, this book grew out of my PhD dissertation, “Where the Currents Meet: Frontiers of Memory in the Post-Soviet Fiction of East Ukraine,” which was completed at the University of Cambridge in 2014. The last day of February was my chosen deadline for unloading its softbound copies at the Board of Graduate Studies in a partly triumphant and partly anticlimactic local ritual known as submission. The week before, Ukraine’s Maidan uprising claimed its largest number of victims yet. The bloodshed continued for several days. February 2014 saw the Maidan movement’s most fatal time.
Introduction from:
Where Currents Meet
Abstract: Lot’s wife may have faced a different fate today: these are exciting times for backward glances. As cultural, political, and social changes swept across the postsocialist regions of the world in recent decades, the study of how the past is remembered and forgotten acquired a particular relevance for those nations undergoing rapid transformation. In Ukraine, a new virtuoso generation of writers has been picking up the theme of their country’s complex twentieth-century legacy and transforming it into captivating—and often surreal—narratives. The city of Kharkiv,¹ Ukraine’s second-largest, is a major hub of this creative activity.
CONCLUSION from:
Where Currents Meet
Abstract: This study has examined how, in “a culture increasingly dominated by space and spatial logic,”¹ contemporary Ukrainian writers of the younger generation—doubletake writers—work their characters into a traumatized cultural landscape. In such a landscape, the language of categories and coordinates is subverted in favor of blurriness, uncertainty, and the supernatural. I call this cohort the doubletake generation, in reference to their coming of age at the time of the Soviet Union’s collapse. Upon reaching adulthood, they revisit the intense historical experience that coincided with their childhood or adolescence—a time when external changes fuse with internal ones, and
INTRODUCTION from:
Utopian Horizons
Author(s) Czigányik Zsolt
Abstract: In 2016 we celebrated the five-hundredth anniversary of Thomas More’s
Utopia. The year 1516 is significant, even though it marks only the birth of a neologism and a literary genre that evolved into a very rich tradition, while utopian thought, the ability to think in alternatives about human life, is probably as old as human thinking itself. Utopia has always been in the no man’s land between literature and the social sciences: literary works, including utopias, are often ignored by the social sciences, while works of imaginary literature are sometimes used as illustrations. This volume tries to look at utopian
INTRODUCTION from:
Utopian Horizons
Author(s) Czigányik Zsolt
Abstract: In 2016 we celebrated the five-hundredth anniversary of Thomas More’s
Utopia. The year 1516 is significant, even though it marks only the birth of a neologism and a literary genre that evolved into a very rich tradition, while utopian thought, the ability to think in alternatives about human life, is probably as old as human thinking itself. Utopia has always been in the no man’s land between literature and the social sciences: literary works, including utopias, are often ignored by the social sciences, while works of imaginary literature are sometimes used as illustrations. This volume tries to look at utopian
“A WALL OF BRONZE” OR DEMONS VERSUS SAINTS: from:
Christian Demonology and Popular
Author(s) KUZNETSOVA ANNA
Abstract: Barbara Newman, in her study of devout women, demoniacs, and the apostolic life in thirteenth-century Europe proposed that in her material (thirteenth-century
exempla) the demoniacs “played a necessary part on the stage of the evangelical drama—so necessary, indeed, that if they had not existed, clerics would have had to invent them” (Newman 1998). I believe this is also true of the importance of demonic presence in Christian literature in times earlier and later than the thirteenth century and in places other than Western Europe.
TALKING WITH DEMONS. EARLY MODERN THEORIES AND PRACTICE from:
Christian Demonology and Popular
Author(s) SZŐNYI GYÖRGY E.
Abstract: Although half a century ago it may have seemed surprising, by today we are quite used to the idea that early modern Humanism was by no means the enlightened and rational period as some interpreters of the Renaissance wanted to see and to have it seen. Decades of research in science-and cultural history as well as in historical anthropology has made it manifest that many brilliant minds of the great generation of fifteenth and sixteenth-century humanists not only believed in astrology, alchemy, and in a host of demons and spirits surrounding them, but quite often they even engaged in sometimes
SEXUAL ENCOUNTERS WITH SPIRITS AND DEMONS IN EARLY MODERN SWEDEN: from:
Christian Demonology and Popular
Author(s) LILIEQUIST JONAS
Abstract: The subject of this essay is the confrontation and interaction between popular traditions and learned doctrines in early modern sweden regarding the sexual activities of spirits and demons and how it evolved over time. Traditional notions were appropriated and redefined by representatives of elite culture, while learned doctrines were appropriated and used in various ways by members of the population at large. Differences in cultural uses and strategies are in focus here rather than different sets of beliefs (Chartier 1984).
CHURCH DEMONOLOGY AND POPULAR BELIEFS IN EARLY MODERN SWEDEN from:
Christian Demonology and Popular
Author(s) OLLI SOILI-MARIA
Abstract: The witch-trials in Sweden reached their climax around the years 1660–1670. At this time the Devil was considered to be very active, which is reflected in legal sources and in measurements taken by the authorities. The aim of this paper is to discuss in what way different groups of society—the authorities, the elite and the popular classes in early modern Sweden—could have both similar and different images of the Devil and how the idea of the Devil could be used in different ways for different purposes. The intention is also to point out in what way the
CATEGORIES OF THE “EVIL DEAD” IN MACEDONIAN FOLK RELIGION from:
Christian Demonology and Popular
Author(s) RISTESKI L’UPCHO S.
Abstract: In the traditional attitude of the community towards its deceased members of great importance, we can find the notion that they are divided depending on their personal characteristics into categories of
pure, suspicious and impure (Vaseva 1994, 3. pp. 154–55). The whole ritual and magic behavior of the community is structured and subordinated on the basis of this concept. The folk terminology distinguishes a fourth category for the period right after the death of members of the community, who are called “fresh” dead. This category of fresh deceased usually lasts one year, which is the necessary time period for
DEMONS OF FATE IN MACEDONIAN FOLK BELIEFS from:
Christian Demonology and Popular
Author(s) PETRESKA VESNA
Abstract: The belief in fate is widely present in Macedonian folk beliefs and folk narrative. It is believed that people’s fate is determined on the third night after their birth. Existence in this world begins with birth, while the period until birth is a time of non-existence or an existence of some other kind, which is the opposite of
this world and is expressed in the model of opposition this world–that world. The presence of the chthonic, the connections with the previous world and his still non-confirmed status in this world all condition the place of the newborn between two
GOG AND MAGOG IN THE SLOVENIAN FOLK TRADITION from:
Christian Demonology and Popular
Author(s) ŠMITEK ZMAGO
Abstract: The Chinese were at war with the neighboring king. At that time, the Son of God was travelling around the world, and when they heard that he could perform miracles, they asked him to make peace between them and their neighbors. God ordered the apostles and disciples to scatter sand around the country and behold, as soon as the sand was
Book Title: Given World and Time-Temporalities in Context
Publisher: Central European University Press
Author(s): Miller Tyrus
Abstract: The interconnections of time with historical thought and knowledge have come powerfully to the fore since the 1970s. An international group of scholars, from a range of fields including literary theory, history of ideas, cultural anthropology, philosophy, intellectual history and theology, philology, and musicology, address the matter of time and temporalities. The volume’s essays, divided into four main topical groups question critically the key problem of context, connecting it to the problem of time. Contexts, the essays suggest, are not timeless. Time and its contexts are only partly “given” to us: to the primordial donations of time and world correspond our epistemic, moral, and practical modes of receiving what has been granted. The notion of context may have radically different parameters in different historical, cultural, and disciplinary situations. Topics include the deep antiquity, and the timeless time of eternity, as well as formal philosophies of history and the forms of histories implicit in individual and community experience. The medium specific use of time and history are examined with regard to song, image, film, oral narration, and legal discourse.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7829/j.ctt2jbmxx
Introduction from:
Given World and Time
Author(s) Miller Tyrus
Abstract: In his 1991 novel
Time’s Arrow, the British writer Martin Amis, playing a postmodern “narrative game with time” (as Paul Ricoeur would say) explored the implications of a very simple narrative twist for our historical and moral perception. How would some key twentieth-century historical event, an event as ineluctable as the Nazi seizure of power and the unfolding of Nazi genocide, appear from a radically different temporal perspective? And what might this perspective shift tell us about the way our historical and moral judgments carry along with them, enfolded into their conclusions, assumptions about the relation of time and its
1. Walking Backwards into the Future: from:
Given World and Time
Author(s) Maul Stefan M.
Abstract: If we regard the Akkadian (i.e., Assyrian–Babylonian)¹ terms that designate “past” and “future” as more than simple equivalents to the corresponding English terms, we make an astounding discovery. An examination of temporal terms such as “earlier” (Akkadian:
pāna, pān; pānānu(m); pāni; pānû(m)) or “former times, past” (Akkadian: pānātu; pānītu(m), pānū) shows that these are all related to the Akkadian pānum, or “front,” plural pānū, or “face.” The Sumerian² equivalents to the Akkadian terms for the past are formed with the word igi, which means “eye,” “face” and also “front.” In the Akkadian and Sumerian terms for the past, the
7. Taking Time: from:
Given World and Time
Author(s) Terdiman Richard
Abstract: On the one hand, the exhilarating temporality of revolution. On the other, the baleful “burden of the past.” These images identify—at their polar limits—two contrasting projections of time. Of course they are very different. But both are grounded in the materiality of social life. Here I contrast them with a conflicting conception of time that emerges in the projection of Postmodernism. My objective is to suggest what is at stake, theoretically and politically, in contemporary representations of time.
10. Time and Progress—Time as Progress: from:
Given World and Time
Author(s) Kontler László
Abstract: In the introductory studies of his seminal
Futures Past, Reinhart Koselleck offers an engaging and succinct illustration of the course of what he calls the “temporalization of history” in European thought during the early-modern period. Koselleck conceives the process as a whole in terms of the changes in the perception of the “compression” (or “acceleration”) of time that, supposedly, precedes the onset of the future in the thought of these past generations: “For Luther, the compression of time is a visible sign that, according to God’s will, the Final Judgment is imminent, that the world is about to end. For
12. Hetero-Temporalities of Post-Socialism from:
Given World and Time
Author(s) Rofel Lisa
Abstract: Time has, if you will forgive the paradoxical phrasing, long been a terrain for projects of social justice and utopian dreams. As Susan Buck-Morss has recently pointed out, this function of time is self-consciously true in historically sedimented ways for the praxis of formerly socialist nation-states.¹ What has become of time in the aftermath of socialism? My answer to this question will focus on China, a country whose continuously radical transformations have coursed through the twentieth century and now into the twenty-first. Unlike in the countries of eastern Europe, China’s Communist Party still holds the reins of state power. Yet
13. The Politics of Temporality: from:
Given World and Time
Author(s) Hoy David Couzens
Abstract: “The time of our lives”—this expression condenses into one phrase a series of questions that could require much more than one lifetime to answer. Is the time of our lives a function of a life as a whole, a life-time, or can it be condensed into a single moment of vision? Does a life have a unity that runs through it, or is the unity of time, and of a life, a narrative, a story, a fiction, or even an illusion? In this essay the question that particularly interests me is, what notion of time is the time that
Book Title: Given World and Time-Temporalities in Context
Publisher: Central European University Press
Author(s): Miller Tyrus
Abstract: The interconnections of time with historical thought and knowledge have come powerfully to the fore since the 1970s. An international group of scholars, from a range of fields including literary theory, history of ideas, cultural anthropology, philosophy, intellectual history and theology, philology, and musicology, address the matter of time and temporalities. The volume’s essays, divided into four main topical groups question critically the key problem of context, connecting it to the problem of time. Contexts, the essays suggest, are not timeless. Time and its contexts are only partly “given” to us: to the primordial donations of time and world correspond our epistemic, moral, and practical modes of receiving what has been granted. The notion of context may have radically different parameters in different historical, cultural, and disciplinary situations. Topics include the deep antiquity, and the timeless time of eternity, as well as formal philosophies of history and the forms of histories implicit in individual and community experience. The medium specific use of time and history are examined with regard to song, image, film, oral narration, and legal discourse.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7829/j.ctt2jbmxx
Introduction from:
Given World and Time
Author(s) Miller Tyrus
Abstract: In his 1991 novel
Time’s Arrow, the British writer Martin Amis, playing a postmodern “narrative game with time” (as Paul Ricoeur would say) explored the implications of a very simple narrative twist for our historical and moral perception. How would some key twentieth-century historical event, an event as ineluctable as the Nazi seizure of power and the unfolding of Nazi genocide, appear from a radically different temporal perspective? And what might this perspective shift tell us about the way our historical and moral judgments carry along with them, enfolded into their conclusions, assumptions about the relation of time and its
1. Walking Backwards into the Future: from:
Given World and Time
Author(s) Maul Stefan M.
Abstract: If we regard the Akkadian (i.e., Assyrian–Babylonian)¹ terms that designate “past” and “future” as more than simple equivalents to the corresponding English terms, we make an astounding discovery. An examination of temporal terms such as “earlier” (Akkadian:
pāna, pān; pānānu(m); pāni; pānû(m)) or “former times, past” (Akkadian: pānātu; pānītu(m), pānū) shows that these are all related to the Akkadian pānum, or “front,” plural pānū, or “face.” The Sumerian² equivalents to the Akkadian terms for the past are formed with the word igi, which means “eye,” “face” and also “front.” In the Akkadian and Sumerian terms for the past, the
7. Taking Time: from:
Given World and Time
Author(s) Terdiman Richard
Abstract: On the one hand, the exhilarating temporality of revolution. On the other, the baleful “burden of the past.” These images identify—at their polar limits—two contrasting projections of time. Of course they are very different. But both are grounded in the materiality of social life. Here I contrast them with a conflicting conception of time that emerges in the projection of Postmodernism. My objective is to suggest what is at stake, theoretically and politically, in contemporary representations of time.
10. Time and Progress—Time as Progress: from:
Given World and Time
Author(s) Kontler László
Abstract: In the introductory studies of his seminal
Futures Past, Reinhart Koselleck offers an engaging and succinct illustration of the course of what he calls the “temporalization of history” in European thought during the early-modern period. Koselleck conceives the process as a whole in terms of the changes in the perception of the “compression” (or “acceleration”) of time that, supposedly, precedes the onset of the future in the thought of these past generations: “For Luther, the compression of time is a visible sign that, according to God’s will, the Final Judgment is imminent, that the world is about to end. For
12. Hetero-Temporalities of Post-Socialism from:
Given World and Time
Author(s) Rofel Lisa
Abstract: Time has, if you will forgive the paradoxical phrasing, long been a terrain for projects of social justice and utopian dreams. As Susan Buck-Morss has recently pointed out, this function of time is self-consciously true in historically sedimented ways for the praxis of formerly socialist nation-states.¹ What has become of time in the aftermath of socialism? My answer to this question will focus on China, a country whose continuously radical transformations have coursed through the twentieth century and now into the twenty-first. Unlike in the countries of eastern Europe, China’s Communist Party still holds the reins of state power. Yet
13. The Politics of Temporality: from:
Given World and Time
Author(s) Hoy David Couzens
Abstract: “The time of our lives”—this expression condenses into one phrase a series of questions that could require much more than one lifetime to answer. Is the time of our lives a function of a life as a whole, a life-time, or can it be condensed into a single moment of vision? Does a life have a unity that runs through it, or is the unity of time, and of a life, a narrative, a story, a fiction, or even an illusion? In this essay the question that particularly interests me is, what notion of time is the time that
Book Title: Given World and Time-Temporalities in Context
Publisher: Central European University Press
Author(s): Miller Tyrus
Abstract: The interconnections of time with historical thought and knowledge have come powerfully to the fore since the 1970s. An international group of scholars, from a range of fields including literary theory, history of ideas, cultural anthropology, philosophy, intellectual history and theology, philology, and musicology, address the matter of time and temporalities. The volume’s essays, divided into four main topical groups question critically the key problem of context, connecting it to the problem of time. Contexts, the essays suggest, are not timeless. Time and its contexts are only partly “given” to us: to the primordial donations of time and world correspond our epistemic, moral, and practical modes of receiving what has been granted. The notion of context may have radically different parameters in different historical, cultural, and disciplinary situations. Topics include the deep antiquity, and the timeless time of eternity, as well as formal philosophies of history and the forms of histories implicit in individual and community experience. The medium specific use of time and history are examined with regard to song, image, film, oral narration, and legal discourse.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7829/j.ctt2jbmxx
Introduction from:
Given World and Time
Author(s) Miller Tyrus
Abstract: In his 1991 novel
Time’s Arrow, the British writer Martin Amis, playing a postmodern “narrative game with time” (as Paul Ricoeur would say) explored the implications of a very simple narrative twist for our historical and moral perception. How would some key twentieth-century historical event, an event as ineluctable as the Nazi seizure of power and the unfolding of Nazi genocide, appear from a radically different temporal perspective? And what might this perspective shift tell us about the way our historical and moral judgments carry along with them, enfolded into their conclusions, assumptions about the relation of time and its
1. Walking Backwards into the Future: from:
Given World and Time
Author(s) Maul Stefan M.
Abstract: If we regard the Akkadian (i.e., Assyrian–Babylonian)¹ terms that designate “past” and “future” as more than simple equivalents to the corresponding English terms, we make an astounding discovery. An examination of temporal terms such as “earlier” (Akkadian:
pāna, pān; pānānu(m); pāni; pānû(m)) or “former times, past” (Akkadian: pānātu; pānītu(m), pānū) shows that these are all related to the Akkadian pānum, or “front,” plural pānū, or “face.” The Sumerian² equivalents to the Akkadian terms for the past are formed with the word igi, which means “eye,” “face” and also “front.” In the Akkadian and Sumerian terms for the past, the
7. Taking Time: from:
Given World and Time
Author(s) Terdiman Richard
Abstract: On the one hand, the exhilarating temporality of revolution. On the other, the baleful “burden of the past.” These images identify—at their polar limits—two contrasting projections of time. Of course they are very different. But both are grounded in the materiality of social life. Here I contrast them with a conflicting conception of time that emerges in the projection of Postmodernism. My objective is to suggest what is at stake, theoretically and politically, in contemporary representations of time.
10. Time and Progress—Time as Progress: from:
Given World and Time
Author(s) Kontler László
Abstract: In the introductory studies of his seminal
Futures Past, Reinhart Koselleck offers an engaging and succinct illustration of the course of what he calls the “temporalization of history” in European thought during the early-modern period. Koselleck conceives the process as a whole in terms of the changes in the perception of the “compression” (or “acceleration”) of time that, supposedly, precedes the onset of the future in the thought of these past generations: “For Luther, the compression of time is a visible sign that, according to God’s will, the Final Judgment is imminent, that the world is about to end. For
12. Hetero-Temporalities of Post-Socialism from:
Given World and Time
Author(s) Rofel Lisa
Abstract: Time has, if you will forgive the paradoxical phrasing, long been a terrain for projects of social justice and utopian dreams. As Susan Buck-Morss has recently pointed out, this function of time is self-consciously true in historically sedimented ways for the praxis of formerly socialist nation-states.¹ What has become of time in the aftermath of socialism? My answer to this question will focus on China, a country whose continuously radical transformations have coursed through the twentieth century and now into the twenty-first. Unlike in the countries of eastern Europe, China’s Communist Party still holds the reins of state power. Yet
13. The Politics of Temporality: from:
Given World and Time
Author(s) Hoy David Couzens
Abstract: “The time of our lives”—this expression condenses into one phrase a series of questions that could require much more than one lifetime to answer. Is the time of our lives a function of a life as a whole, a life-time, or can it be condensed into a single moment of vision? Does a life have a unity that runs through it, or is the unity of time, and of a life, a narrative, a story, a fiction, or even an illusion? In this essay the question that particularly interests me is, what notion of time is the time that
Book Title: Given World and Time-Temporalities in Context
Publisher: Central European University Press
Author(s): Miller Tyrus
Abstract: The interconnections of time with historical thought and knowledge have come powerfully to the fore since the 1970s. An international group of scholars, from a range of fields including literary theory, history of ideas, cultural anthropology, philosophy, intellectual history and theology, philology, and musicology, address the matter of time and temporalities. The volume’s essays, divided into four main topical groups question critically the key problem of context, connecting it to the problem of time. Contexts, the essays suggest, are not timeless. Time and its contexts are only partly “given” to us: to the primordial donations of time and world correspond our epistemic, moral, and practical modes of receiving what has been granted. The notion of context may have radically different parameters in different historical, cultural, and disciplinary situations. Topics include the deep antiquity, and the timeless time of eternity, as well as formal philosophies of history and the forms of histories implicit in individual and community experience. The medium specific use of time and history are examined with regard to song, image, film, oral narration, and legal discourse.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7829/j.ctt2jbmxx
Introduction from:
Given World and Time
Author(s) Miller Tyrus
Abstract: In his 1991 novel
Time’s Arrow, the British writer Martin Amis, playing a postmodern “narrative game with time” (as Paul Ricoeur would say) explored the implications of a very simple narrative twist for our historical and moral perception. How would some key twentieth-century historical event, an event as ineluctable as the Nazi seizure of power and the unfolding of Nazi genocide, appear from a radically different temporal perspective? And what might this perspective shift tell us about the way our historical and moral judgments carry along with them, enfolded into their conclusions, assumptions about the relation of time and its
1. Walking Backwards into the Future: from:
Given World and Time
Author(s) Maul Stefan M.
Abstract: If we regard the Akkadian (i.e., Assyrian–Babylonian)¹ terms that designate “past” and “future” as more than simple equivalents to the corresponding English terms, we make an astounding discovery. An examination of temporal terms such as “earlier” (Akkadian:
pāna, pān; pānānu(m); pāni; pānû(m)) or “former times, past” (Akkadian: pānātu; pānītu(m), pānū) shows that these are all related to the Akkadian pānum, or “front,” plural pānū, or “face.” The Sumerian² equivalents to the Akkadian terms for the past are formed with the word igi, which means “eye,” “face” and also “front.” In the Akkadian and Sumerian terms for the past, the
7. Taking Time: from:
Given World and Time
Author(s) Terdiman Richard
Abstract: On the one hand, the exhilarating temporality of revolution. On the other, the baleful “burden of the past.” These images identify—at their polar limits—two contrasting projections of time. Of course they are very different. But both are grounded in the materiality of social life. Here I contrast them with a conflicting conception of time that emerges in the projection of Postmodernism. My objective is to suggest what is at stake, theoretically and politically, in contemporary representations of time.
10. Time and Progress—Time as Progress: from:
Given World and Time
Author(s) Kontler László
Abstract: In the introductory studies of his seminal
Futures Past, Reinhart Koselleck offers an engaging and succinct illustration of the course of what he calls the “temporalization of history” in European thought during the early-modern period. Koselleck conceives the process as a whole in terms of the changes in the perception of the “compression” (or “acceleration”) of time that, supposedly, precedes the onset of the future in the thought of these past generations: “For Luther, the compression of time is a visible sign that, according to God’s will, the Final Judgment is imminent, that the world is about to end. For
12. Hetero-Temporalities of Post-Socialism from:
Given World and Time
Author(s) Rofel Lisa
Abstract: Time has, if you will forgive the paradoxical phrasing, long been a terrain for projects of social justice and utopian dreams. As Susan Buck-Morss has recently pointed out, this function of time is self-consciously true in historically sedimented ways for the praxis of formerly socialist nation-states.¹ What has become of time in the aftermath of socialism? My answer to this question will focus on China, a country whose continuously radical transformations have coursed through the twentieth century and now into the twenty-first. Unlike in the countries of eastern Europe, China’s Communist Party still holds the reins of state power. Yet
13. The Politics of Temporality: from:
Given World and Time
Author(s) Hoy David Couzens
Abstract: “The time of our lives”—this expression condenses into one phrase a series of questions that could require much more than one lifetime to answer. Is the time of our lives a function of a life as a whole, a life-time, or can it be condensed into a single moment of vision? Does a life have a unity that runs through it, or is the unity of time, and of a life, a narrative, a story, a fiction, or even an illusion? In this essay the question that particularly interests me is, what notion of time is the time that
INTRODUCTION from:
Imperfection and Defeat
Abstract: For some time now I have wanted to try to group and formulate in a brief and coherent way my views about literature and its role in human societies and history, which I have rather consistently expressed in diverse writings. This fortunate opportunity was provided by the Central European University and, more specifically by “Pasts Inc.” and its leader and animator, Professor Sorin Antohi, as a cycle of lectures in Budapest in February/March 2004. The current book is a version of these lectures; it draws from a number of previous writings, but it also rearranges the material and provides additional
INTRODUCTION from:
Imperfection and Defeat
Abstract: For some time now I have wanted to try to group and formulate in a brief and coherent way my views about literature and its role in human societies and history, which I have rather consistently expressed in diverse writings. This fortunate opportunity was provided by the Central European University and, more specifically by “Pasts Inc.” and its leader and animator, Professor Sorin Antohi, as a cycle of lectures in Budapest in February/March 2004. The current book is a version of these lectures; it draws from a number of previous writings, but it also rearranges the material and provides additional
Conclusion from:
Constitutions, Courts, and History
Abstract: The U.S. Constitution was drafted as a basic charter for a slaveholders’ polity. Slavery as the status quo of the day does indeed figure in the U.S. Constitution’s original language, such as in the Apportionment Clause calculating the basis of representation and taxation upon every free persons and three-fifths of all other persons.¹ The only framer who did not own slaves at all, and even refused to hire slaves, was future president John Adams. There were framers who disapproved of slavery while at the same time owning slaves (take Thomas Jefferson as a prominent example), and others (like Benjamin Franklin)
Conclusion from:
Constitutions, Courts, and History
Abstract: The U.S. Constitution was drafted as a basic charter for a slaveholders’ polity. Slavery as the status quo of the day does indeed figure in the U.S. Constitution’s original language, such as in the Apportionment Clause calculating the basis of representation and taxation upon every free persons and three-fifths of all other persons.¹ The only framer who did not own slaves at all, and even refused to hire slaves, was future president John Adams. There were framers who disapproved of slavery while at the same time owning slaves (take Thomas Jefferson as a prominent example), and others (like Benjamin Franklin)
Chapter 5 INTELLECTUALS IN POLAND: from:
Dilemmas of Dissidence in East-Central Europe
Abstract: Polish philosopher Leszek Kołakowski left Poland in 1968 after his expulsion from Warsaw University, and therefore hardly warrants being categorized as a “dissident” in terms of the time frame of this study. However, as a revisionist Marxist who goes beyond revisionism, as a mentor to the generation of Michnik, and as the author of arguably the most important theoretical text of the Polish opposition of the 1970s, he must be included.¹ The influence of his life, his work, and the changing nature of his own philosophical positions was enormous. From outside Poland’s borders, as an emigré writing for
Kultura, as
FOREWORD from:
Transition in Post-Soviet Art
Author(s) GROYS BORIS
Abstract: Few are the reliable and well-written books that seek to tell the history of recent art in Eastern Europe—that is, the history of work by the artists who crossed the line in time that divided the old, communist era from the new postcommunist one. The communist past as experienced by those who lived it is largely a foreign concept to the majority of art historians in the West, who thus tread hesitantly over its uncanny terrain. As for the new generations of Eastern European art historians, they have already partially forgotten this past or even actively suppressed the memory
Chapter 3 KD'S JOURNEYS BEFORE 1989 from:
Transition in Post-Soviet Art
Abstract: It was during the Soviet period that the KD group gradually emerged with its own mythology, methodology, and terminology. From 1976 to 1989 its members sought unique ways to investigate the nature of art—this search for method comprising the group's main self-professed artistic program and affecting all aspects of its artistic and aesthetic practice. This Soviet or "before" period is the time in which the group created the model called "KD"—a model that, in spite of all changes since, has guided its aesthetic principles for almost three decades.
Chapter 4 "DURING": from:
Transition in Post-Soviet Art
Abstract: In 1989 KD dissolved, reuniting again only in 1995 as [KD]. During this six-year transitional period, its members dispersed, acting and exhibiting individually at home and abroad. There is less information about this time, and even if Monastyrsky occasionally mentions events or texts that took place during these six years, most of them have been assembled within the post-1989
Journeyspost factum. In this respect the post-Soviet volumes ofJourneysbegan as in the Soviet period: most of the material has been ordered, and sometimes even produced, retrospectively and retroactively. As in their first phase (1976–1980) the group's members
Journal Title: American Journal of Sociology
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ajs.2000.106.issue-2
Date: 09 2000
Author(s): Lara Maria Pia
Abstract: Lara’s book is thick with references and interwoven arguments and is sometimes hard to follow for this reason. She is concerned with showing the possibilities for a recognition of the importance of self‐fashioning narrative in Habermas’s own work, especially in his early analysis in
The Structural Transformation of the Public. She takes up discussions of deliberative democracy to show how they are enriched by a recognition of the place of narrative; she takes up postmodern accounts of identity; and she pursues her argument through the work of Paul Ricoeur, Albrecht Wellmer, and Wayne Booth, as well as a host of others. Despite the density of the work, Lara succeeds in illuminating the relation between narrative, identity, and morality. If the question of how we should live is bound up with ideas of who we are, and if we shape who we are with the help of narratives of other lives, these ideas would seem to be an integral part of the normative question that Habermas asks as to how we should live with others. Lara’s book is not only a welcome addition to recent work on Habermas, but also an important participant in current discussions of the relationship between literature and morality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/316983
Journal Title: Ethics
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: et.2001.112.issue-1
Date: 10 2001
Author(s): Young, Jeffrey T.
Abstract: Young’s new book on Adam Smith provides a careful textual analysis of Smith’s two major works:
The Theory of Moral SentimentsandThe Wealth of Nations. Young argues, with good textual evidence, that Smith did not divide economics from moral theory and that, indeed, Smith thought of economics as a moral science. Young traces Smith’s economic and moral philosophy to Aristotle and Hume, and he points out, correctly, that “self‐interest itself had a significant moral dimension in Smith” (p. 173). Thus Smith’s alleged focus on self‐interest inThe Wealth of Nationshas normative dimensions not always recognized by all Smith scholars. Young uses Smith’s notions of the impartial spectator and benevolence as well as his theory of justice to link the two texts. This is a controversial conclusion since neither the impartial spectator nor benevolence is evident as an important concept inThe Wealth of Nations. Young also argues that Smith divides the economic sphere from the political sphere (see his matrix on p. 158), a questionable conclusion in light of Smith’s focus on political economy inThe Wealth of Nations. Young’s book also suffers from his apparently not having read Amartya Sen’s or my works on Smith, both of which make many of the same arguments Young develops. Still, Young has added further to the growing literature that reads Smith as a serious moral philosopher whose theory of self‐interest is far from libertarian and who neither divided economics from ethics nor politics from either.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/322762
Journal Title: Ethics
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: et.2002.112.issue-2
Date: 01 2002
Author(s): Ricoeur, Paul
Abstract: The necessity of both solidarity and proceduralism thus holds for both distributive and criminal justice. In the end, Ricoeur remains committed to notions that ground the just polity in community and mutual sharing without thinking that these notions require us to dispense with the formalism of procedures of justice. While the latter are not sufficient on their own to create or sustain a just society, while, indeed, formal procedures always presuppose some conception of the good, procedural conceptions allow us to recognize each other as subjects of rights. Although it is not always clear that Ricoeur succeeds in reconciling Rawls and Walzer or Habermas and Gadamer, he does provide a fresh perspective on current debates within his own interesting account of the structure of moral action.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/324242
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ci.2002.28.issue-4
Date: 06 2002
Author(s): Vidal Fernando
Abstract: For an illuminating discussion and critique, see Kathleen V. Wilkes,
Real People: Personal Identity without Thought Experiments(Oxford, 1988), esp. chap. 1.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/341240
Journal Title: American Journal of Sociology
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ajs.2003.108.issue-4
Date: 01 2003
Author(s): Lichterman Paul
Abstract: Of course, researchers routinely pursue some of these questions, through different methods of research. Part of our methodological contribution is to bring them together in the concept of
group style.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/367920
Journal Title: Current Anthropology
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ca.2003.44.issue-3
Date: 06 2003
Author(s): Duranti Alessandro
Abstract: Ahearn, always a perceptive writer, brings out a fear that many linguistic anthropologists have but rarely expressthe fear of being assimilated to sociocultural anthropology and thus losing their identity through the forfeiting of their specificity. This is the flip side of William Labovs original wish that sociolinguistics might disappear once linguistics agreed to see language as a social phenomenon (that this has not happened is both an indictment of linguistics narrowmindedness and a validation of Labovs and other sociolinguists efforts to develop sociolinguistics into a vibrant independent field). The question then arises why we should worry about being assimilated. Shouldnt we, on the contrary, welcome such a possibility, to be seen as a validation of our work or as the mainstreaming of our concerns? The problem is not in the future, which cannot be predicted, but in the past. Everything we know from our earlier experiences warns us that an anthropology without a distinct group of language specialists is likely to be an anthropology with a nave understanding of communication. We have seen it happen already. When anthropology departments decide not to have a linguistic subfield, thinking that they dont need one, their students tend to take language for granted, identifying it with a vague notion of discourse. It is for this reason that we need to sharpen our historical, theoretical, and methodological understanding of what it means to study language as culture. We owe it first to our students.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/368118
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ci.2003.29.issue-4
Date: 06 2003
Author(s): Mialet Hélène
Abstract: I would like to thank the participants of seminars and colloquia at the Max Planck Institute for the History of Science (Berlin), at the Department of Science and Technology Studies at Cornell, and at the ST&S and History of Medicine Colloquia at the University of Michigan for their helpful comments on earlier versions of this paper. I would also like to thank Robin Boast, Stephen Hirschauer, Michael Lynch, Michael Wintroub, and Skuli Sigurdsson for their suggestions, comments, and criticism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/377721
Journal Title: Current Anthropology
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ca.2004.45.issue-1
Date: 02 2004
Author(s): Juillerat Bernard
Abstract: Doctrine and method, theory and interpretation are not necessarily coordinate. Were such coordination possible, a metacritical stance would be required. By accepting uncritically the presuppositions that lie behind psychoanalytic metapsychology, Juillerat abrogates, in my view, ethnological responsibility, that is, the responsibility to measure in a receptive manner the presuppositions of ones hermeneutic against those of the culture one is studying. Though his attention to ethnographic detail leads Juillerat to refine psychoanalytic doctrine, it confirms the epistemological and hermeneutic assumptions of that doctrine (e.g., notions of the unconscious, id, ego, and superego, drives, repression, and, indeed, psychic space). Yafar myth and ritual as he presents them become allegories of that doctrineallegories, I would argue, of allegories. There would appear to be no escape, were it not for the Yafar voices that sound through Juillerats psychoanalytically predetermined presentations. (He offers us almost no contextualized verbatim texts in these essays, though he does in his monographs.) They remind us that, as LviStrauss demonstrated, myths are readily translated one into another, particularly when they are decontextualized. What is of ethnographic, indeed, psychoanalytic import is howand perhaps whytranslation is arrested and a particular myth (e.g., the Oedipal tale) becomes so authoritative that it has the power of promiscuous reduction. Though fascinated by the range of Yafar cultural expression, Juillerat fails to consider the implications of Yafars refusal to reduce their corpus of mythology and ritual to a single mytha singular ritual.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/381011
Journal Title: Journal of British Studies
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jbs.2005.44.issue-1
Date: 01 2005
Author(s): Seed John
Abstract: See Timothy Larsen, “Victorian Nonconformity and the Memory of the Ejected Ministers: The Impact of the Bicentennial Commemorations of 1862,” in
The Church Retrospective: Papers Read at the 1995 Summer Meeting and 1996 Winter Meeting of the Ecclesiastical Society, ed. R. N. Swanson (Woodbridge, 1997), pp. 459–73. The centenary in 1762 was not apparently commemorated in any public way, though a few years later, 1688 was celebrated by Dissenters on a considerable scale.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/424945
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-1
Date: 01 2005
Author(s): Marion Jean‐Luc
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, “Herméneutique de l’idée de Révélation,” in
La Révélation, ed. Daniel Coppieters de Gibson (Bruxelles: Facultés universitaires Saint‐Louis, 1977), p. 46.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/424974
Journal Title: The Journal of Modern History
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jmh.2004.76.issue-3
Date: 09 2004
Author(s): Marino John A.
Abstract: Braudel,
The Mediterranean,2d ed. (1972), 2:1243–44. Among many references to Machiavelli, see, e.g., Machiavelli,The Prince,chap. xxv, beginning of last paragraph: “I conclude, then, that so long as Fortune varies and men stand still, they will prosper while they suit the times, and fail when they do not.”
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/425442
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ci.2004.31.issue-1
Date: 09 2004
Author(s): Guillory John
Abstract: On the question of the relation between writing and media, which is perhaps
thequestion of a larger inquiry beyond my own, I have benefited from exchanges with Alan Liu. See his “The Future Literary: Literature and the Culture of Information,” inTime and the Literary,ed. Karen Newman et al. (New York, 2002), pp. 61–100.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/427304
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-2
Date: 04 2005
Author(s): Nicholson Hugh
Abstract: This idea of the deliberate recovery of theological tensions by crossing religious boundaries can be understood in terms of the ecumenical concept of the complementarity of conflicting doctrinal formulations. Opposing doctrinal formulations are regarded as complementary expressions of a theological truth so profound as to be irreducible to any single formulation. For the ecumenical use of the complementarity concept, see, e.g., Avery Dulles, “Paths to Doctrinal Agreement: Ten Theses,”
Theological Studies47 (1986): 44–45.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/427313
Journal Title: The Journal of Modern History
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jmh.2004.76.issue-4
Date: 12 1997
Author(s): Woodall Christopher
Abstract: Scholars and their students interested in the field would do well to begin with these studies, despite some unevenness in period, place, and theme. Developments in the twentieth century, for example, are not well served, especially as their globalization bursts all traditional boundaries in the discipline, making a historical perspective essential to an understanding of ongoing transformations in literate life everywhere, not just in the West. Similarly, the absence of illustrations undermines the potential value of these books as introductions to the history of reading. Much of the work here depends on the material objects that readers actually had; without images of them, the reader develops less of a sense of the field. Finally, the exclusion of the essays on correspondence from the original collection is deeply regrettable; Chartier’s summary of their implications in the introduction hardly does justice to them, especially to the important study of the 1847 postal survey by Dauphin and two other colleagues. The translations are generally accurate, but the indexes are barely adequate.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/427573
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-1
Date: 01 2005
Author(s): Bourgeois, Patrick L.
Abstract: Ricoeur gets the relation of critique and reason right, in Bourgeois’s eyes, as a philosopher who sees imagination tied to thinking at the boundary (not limit) of reason. In a chapter examining Derrida’s views on “sign, time, and trace” (chap. 7), Bourgeois elaborates Derrida’s view that Edmund Husserl’s distinction between meaningful expression and sign depends on a stable borderline between primary and secondary memory (or retention and recollection) in his theory of “the living present” (or duration), which, Derrida asserts, is phenomenologically unavailable. In light of this analysis, Bourgeois draws an interesting contrast between Derrida’s insistence on a discrete closure of meaning and Ricoeur’s theory of language and imagination based in a view of the living present of meaning and experience that refuses such discrete closure. Once more, however, Bourgeois overreaches when he attempts to identify these accurately drawn contrasts with the limit/boundary distinction. In Bourgeois’s reading of Ricoeur, imagination does not produce reason from below (as in Heidegger); rather, “reason itself limits knowledge to experience from above, putting the imagination in a central position both in knowledge and thinking” (p. 131). A productive imagination of living metaphor takes place at the boundary of reason, allowing the living present in meaning and action to escape deconstruction’s critique while still incorporating a positive relation to alterity. Nevertheless, Bourgeois may be drawing the wrong conclusion about these contrasts, for it seems possible to read both Ricoeur and Derrida as seeking to work at the boundary (not limit) of reason and to think somehow the presentation of the Idea in the Kantian sense. Whereas Ricoeur’s theory of metaphor and narrative allows him to present the semantic content of the Ideas of Reason positively, these remain for Derrida (as for Kant) unrepresentable, or “the impossible.” This problem has been Derrida’s enduring concern since his 1962
Introduction to Husserl’s “The Origin of Geometry.”The real difference between the thought of Ricoeur and Derrida is the distinctive way each thinker supplements phenomenology to take into account the creativity of meaning at the boundary of reason. For Derrida, it is thedifféranceof deconstruction; for Ricoeur, the graft of hermeneutics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/428538
Journal Title: Signs
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: signs.2005.30.issue-4
Date: 06 2005
Author(s): McNay Lois
Abstract: See especially Diana Tietjens Meyers,
Self, Society, and Personal Choice(New York: Columbia University Press, 1989), and Diana Tietjens Meyers, ed.,Feminists Rethink the Self(Boulder, CO: Westview, 1997).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/429806
Journal Title: The Library Quarterly: Information, Community, Policy
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: lq.2005.75.issue-2
Date: 04 2005
Author(s): Jones Bonna
Abstract: Hence, our choice of philosophies should not be limited to the two main philosophies identified by Budd but rather could take up ideas from process thinking, which is a quieter but nevertheless relevant philosophy to which LIS should attend. By valuing the processes and articulating this with better abstractions more congruent with our action, we not only further our own project; we also sustain a vital engagement with the projects of individuals. We more clearly articulate the library in the life of the user, to use the words of Wiegand [
2].
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/431329
Journal Title: Signs
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: signs.2005.31.issue-1
Date: 09 2005
Author(s): Johar Schueller Malini
Abstract: However, Somerville often uses strategies very similar to Butler's in seeing the primacy of the sexual. See, e.g., the analysis of Jean Toomer based on the term
queer(Somerville2000, 136) and the insistence that compulsory heterosexuality is “integral” to the logic of racial segregation (137).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/431372
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-4
Date: 10 2005
Author(s): Lee Hyo‐Dong
Abstract: For the notion of strategic essentialism, see Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak, “Subaltern Studies: Deconstructing Historiography,” in her
The Spivak Reader, 214–21. Serene Jones has drawn attention to the fact that the poststructuralist theoretical assumptions about the always oppressive nature of binarisms do not necessarily hold up under the pressures of concrete political struggles and that, in order to strengthen the bond of solidarity for a coalition of diverse social and cultural identities, what is called for is some kind of grand narrative that clearly defines the powers to be resisted and dismantled. I think this applies to a coalition of different religious identities as well. Serene Jones, “Cultural Labor and Theological Critique,” in Brown, Davaney, and Tanner, eds.,Converging on Culture, 166–68.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/431810
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-4
Date: 10 2005
Author(s): Maggi Armando
Abstract: 1 Cor. 13:12.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/431811
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-4
Date: 10 2005
Author(s): Young III William W.
Abstract: Frei recognized the need for greater plurality within his own reading as well, particularly with regard to the “Gospel narrative” set forth in
The Identity of Jesus Christ. See Higton,Christ, Providence, and History, 200–201.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/431812
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ci.2006.32.issue-2
Date: 01 2006
Author(s): Williams Jay
Abstract: Mitchell, “
Critical Inquiryand the Ideology of Pluralism,”Critical Inquiry8 (Summer 1982): 613.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/500701
Journal Title: American Journal of Education
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: aje.2006.112.issue-3
Date: 05 2006
Author(s): Schweber Simone
Abstract: Brooks (
2001) reported, for example, that a Pentecostal minister in Franklin County, the location symbolizing Red America in his article, “regards such culture warriors as Jerry Falwell and Pat Robertson as loose cannons.”
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/500714
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2006.86.issue-3
Date: 07 2006
Author(s): van der Ven Johannes A.
Abstract: Nevertheless, empiricism does not have the last word—it perhaps never has the last word, not even in what might be called “positivist empiricism,” and certainly not in practical theology, as this discipline is characterized by the interaction between empiricism and normativeness. We both share this conviction—the fifth characteristic. Therefore human rights—no matter how contested they are, which is neither surprising nor extraordinary—offer an important perspective, as the normative criteria they embody always require critical and constructive reflection. In the last part of the article I have even presented them as regulative principles of truth and justice, as a result of which they offer a kind of worldview‐related and morality‐related infrastructure for the social institutions that determine human actions in societal and personal life—the sixth characteristic. After all, for both Browning and me the ultimate issue is—the seventh characteristic—the vitality of the Christian tradition in terms of relevance and identity in the context of a multicivilization society.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/503696
Journal Title: The Journal of Modern History
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jmh.2006.78.issue-2
Date: 06 2006
Author(s): Todorova Maria
Abstract: Ibid., 260. It was only at the last stages of correction of this manuscript that I learned about the work of Nikolai Voukov on the destruction of Dimitrov's mausoleum. While I find it an excellent contribution, Voukov's take on the event and its meaning is somewhat different than my own. I would like to express my gratitude to the author for sending me his manuscript, whose shorter version was published as “The Destruction of Georgi Dimitrov's Mausoleum in Sofia: The ‘Incoincidence' between Memory and Its Referents,” in
Places of Memory,ed. Augustin Ioan, special issue ofOctogon(Bucharest, 2003).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/505801
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2006.86.issue-4
Date: 10 2006
Author(s): Wall John
Abstract: Whatever normative conclusions may be drawn in the end, theological ethicists ignore the unique situation of children and childhood at their own peril. Neglecting such marginalized groups as women and minorities weakened the voice of theological ethics in the past, both by silently playing into larger social wrongs and by failing to learn and grow from those silenced. Childhood in the United States and the world presents theological ethics today with a new and different but just as acute social challenge. Methodologically, since children cannot speak up as fully as can adults for themselves, theological ethicists should engage as deeply as possible with children’s actual social experiences, including through the sophisticated observational work of the human sciences, in order more creatively to understand and respond. Substantively, childhood demands at the very least renewed attention to the asymmetrical tensions of human moral responsibility, the senses in which others demand of those around them creative self‐transformation. This childist gesture of responsiveness and self‐critique has already begun to animate the human sciences. How much more, then, should it be welcomed and deepened further by Christian ethicists, who in one way or another trace a transformed world to the possibilities incarnated in an infant’s birth.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/505893
Journal Title: Isis
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: isis.2006.97.issue-2
Date: 06 2004.
Author(s): Kern Stephen
Abstract: Kern’s analysis is lucid and his thesis is ultimately persuasive. He argues that “the novel is emphatically historical in capturing a new sense of the complexity and uncertainty of causal understanding” as he traces the “sensitivity” of contemporary authors like Don DeLillo to “the significance of the new technologies of transportation, communication and investigation that transformed causal understanding in modern society” (p. 369). This is an observation with which many literary critics would agree. There are resemblances here to the methodology deployed by Ronald Thomas in his seminal and startlingly successful work
Detective Fiction and the Rise of Forensic Science(Cambridge, 1999): narrative registers in its very construction the pressures of scientific and epistemological change. Yet a comparison with Thomas’s work reveals perhaps one of the few flaws of Kern’s study. IfA Cultural History of Causalityis directed toward the historian of science, one must question whether novels are ever really adequate source material for the construction of a hypothesis regarding nonfictional understandings of causality and probability. Paul Ricoeur reminds us inTime and Narrative(Chicago, 1984–1988) that literature has been seen since ancient times as “an ethical laboratory where the artist pursues through the mode of fiction experimentation with values” (Vol. 1, p. 59): fiction is thus both tethered to, yet at the same time distinct from, the world of the actual and the real. Kern acknowledges this to be so, yet his theory of mimesis, of realistic representation, seems to exclude any genuine engagement with tropes of playfulness, indeterminacy, symbolism, and ambiguity that mark literature just as deeply as any desire to replicate the real. Kern notes that he relies “primarily on novels by male authors about male murderers, because [his] method is comparative and requires controlling variables to focus on historical change” (p. 21). This seems to evade a broader question about the extent to which novels can be understood as “evidence” in any sense at all, or whether Kern should be focusing on trial reports rather than their fictionalized representations. This difficulty would be obviated if the focus of the work were an understanding of the impact of developments in scientific theory on narrative form, yet Kern seems reluctant to move fully in this direction. And indeed, if the ideal reader ofA Cultural History of Causalityis in fact a literary critic, he or she may be inclined to probe a number of Kern’s other assumptions as well—he is perhaps a little too inclined to assert that the Victorian novel is artistically “tidy,” that its patterns of closure are always neat and carefully wrought, as an expression of what Thomas Vargish has called “the providential aesthetic” in his study of the same name (Virginia, 1985). Scholars of nineteenth‐century fiction may perhaps feel that Kern’s descriptions of such neat closures sit uncomfortably with their readings ofBleak House(which is as much about the loss and destruction of evidence as it is about its recovery and careful explication) orOur Mutual FriendorDaniel DerondaorThe Brothers Karamazov(each of which problematizes our sense of a character’s relentless movement toward transgression, judgment, and punishment or acquittal). One is left with a sense that Kern occasionally deploys the term “Victorian” in a rather unsophisticated fashion: as Thomas has shown inDetective Fiction and the Rise of Forensic Science,even the most carefully crafted detective story of the nineteenth century can raise for readers and critics crucial questions about individual and national identity and the power of public surveillance. Yet these criticisms should not undermine a reader’s sense of Kern’s achievement in this book: it is a vast, ambitious attempt to effect a synthesis of scientific thought and literary experimentation, and on the whole it succeeds well.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/507355
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 508383
Date: 01 2007
Author(s): Wall John
Abstract: In this respect, my project has similarities with the “multidimensional hermeneutic” approach to religious ethical inquiry proposed by William Schweiker in “On the Future of Religious Ethics: Keeping Religious Ethics, Religious and Ethics,”
Journal of the American Academy of Religion74, no. 1 (March 2006): 135–51.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/508386
Journal Title: Ethics
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 522257
Date: 01 2007
Author(s): Ricoeur, Paul
Abstract: In a first reading of the book, I was critical of this emphasis on moral motivations, since it seemed to be overburdened by a psychological approach. But, on a second reading, I had to refrain from my critique. Ricoeur makes the point that he has no intention to “take the place of a resolution for the perplexities raised by the very concept of a struggle, still less of a resolution of the conflicts” (218). In other words, Ricoeur is proposing a well‐needed complement to the institutional design trend that has invaded contemporary political philosophy. Contrary to many, he stands before the most perplexing issue of recognition with eyes wide open: indeed, demands of recognition may never end and take the form of an “unhappy consciousness” (218). One can try to resolve this potential inflation of claims by sorting out political and substantive issues. But a solution that takes only this path could create vast areas of frustration that canny elites have learned to fuel, or come to neglect recognition claims on the grounds that they hide a Pandora's box waiting to be opened. I suspect that this neglect mechanism is one of the reasons why so many legitimate recognition claims still languish in limbo as we speak. The course taken by Ricoeur may be difficult to square with the mainstream approach in contemporary political philosophy—political liberalism, to name it—but it nonetheless deserves careful attention.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/510704
Journal Title: The Library Quarterly: Information, Community, Policy
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: lq.2006.76.issue-3
Date: 07 2006
Author(s): Budd John M.
Abstract: Three general features of this method can be noted in advance. First, this method must be immanent or internal to its subject matter. Dialectical theorists reject outright the idea that the thinker can occupy some privileged Archimedean point outside the subject of investigation. … A second feature of dialectical method is its dialogical character. Theorizing is an activity taking place not simply within the mind but between minds. Thinking is dialogical because it always takes the form of an exchange or a conversation between ourselves, our contemporaries, and our predecessors. … Third, the dialogical element is related to the historical dimension of theory. [
40, pp. 167–68]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/511140
Journal Title: The Journal of Modern History
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jmh.2006.78.issue-4
Date: 12 2005
Author(s): Popkin Jeremy D.
Abstract: Instructive as his book is, Popkin could also have explored in greater depth yet the relationship between historical scholarship and expressions of the self. By focusing on autobiographies alone, he misses an opportunity to examine how such texts and scholarly publications related to (and possibly affected) one another, most notably in their divergent or convergent patterns of self‐representation. The boundary between autobiographical and scholarly writings may be more porous than Popkin intimates. Paul Hollander’s recent study of academic acknowledgments arrives, for instance, at conclusions that mirror Popkin’s regarding self‐representation and professional norms (“Acknowledgments: An Academic Ritual,”
Academic Questions15, no. 1 [2001–2]: 63–76). Likewise, one could question why Popkin limited himself to the discursive analysis of published sources and “the motives that historian‐autobiographers acknowledge in their texts” (78). Autobiographies are also social practices that call for systematic research outside the text, in archival and published sources (and, perhaps, interviews as well). But Popkin is too good a historian not to know this. His book is by and about historians; it is dedicated to historians, but it is not only for historians. Its chief objective may well be to show how much the historian’s autobiography has contributed “to the literature of personal life writing” (8). In this respect as in many others,History, Historians, and Autobiographyis a success.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/511206
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ci.2007.33.issue-2
Date: 01 2007
Author(s): Gasché Rodolphe
Abstract: See Derrida,
Passions(Paris, 1993).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/511505
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 522064
Date: 03 2007
Author(s): Harootunian Harry
Abstract: I had the benefit of reading versions of this paper at a number of institutions, and I wish to record the help I received at the University of Chicago, the University of Michigan, the New School for Social Research, Waseda University (Tokyo), and the University of Washington. I also want to thank Kristin Ross, Carol Gluck, and Hyun Ok Park for commenting on earlier revisions of the manuscript.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/513523
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 509555
Date: 10 2007
Author(s): Flake Kathleen
Abstract: Bloom,
American Religion, 97.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/519770
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 509555
Date: 10 2007
Author(s): Nicholson Hugh
Abstract: Hacker, “Distinctive Features,” 95 and passim; Michael A. Sells,
Mystical Languages of Unsaying(Chicago, 1994), 1–13, esp. 12. Note that Hacker acknowledges that Śaṅkara’s discourse on brahman is all the more alive (lebendiger) for its terminological imprecision (“Distinctive Features,” 95).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/519771
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 509554
Date: 07 2007
Author(s): Browning, Don S.
Abstract: While this book will be of great interest to Christian ethicists as well as to religious and moral educators, it should also be read by social scientists, philosophers, and evolutionary psychologists. Browning’s view that nontheological disciplines depend on images of the human that play a guiding role for their research, as well as for the interpretation of their results, points to the continued need for more interdisciplinary work. According to this point of view, theology should play a public role in identifying such prescientific or preempirical images as well as in describing and advancing refined and responsible images based on the Christian tradition. The present volume goes a long way in either direction.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/519893
Journal Title: Signs
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 518276
Date: 01 2008
Author(s): Plate Liedeke
Abstract: My encounter with this student suggests another way of thinking about the political value of rewriting. Countering all the more blasé signals my students were giving me that it was most naive to think the retelling of stories from another point of view could have any political impact, it is evidence that women’s rewritings of classic texts can still affect young women, still make them think and make them want to contribute to the discussions, the debates that shape the public sphere. Although we need, of course, to factor in serendipity—the student was on holiday and thought she had discovered a little‐known book when in fact it was a
New York Timesbest seller—there is definitely a sense in which her discovery marked a moment in her life and signals the development of a feminist consciousness (broadly defined as a certain awareness of gender identity combined with a critical position in respect to misogyny and patriarchy and a conviction that things can be changed). There is no denying that increasing individualization at all levels of society has caused the loss of a sense of collective action and political projects. This is equally true for ideas of improvement, emancipation, and modernization, the responsibility of which has largely been shifted to the individual, whose “human rights,” as Bauman argues, are redefined as “the right of individuals to stay different and to pick and choose at will their own models of happiness and fitting life‐style” (2000;2005, 29). In this deregulated and privatized sociopolitical context that knows no common cause, re‐vision can only fail to formulate enabling fictions for a better future for all. Yet in its capacity to speak to individuals, it can still draw them into visions of community and collectivity. Re‐vision may thus not be the lifeline that is to haul us out of patriarchy any more, but as a structure of address that engages readers into contemplating differences, it remains one of the ways in which we keep sane and critical and thinking, moved by the stories of long‐forgotten lives into participating in an open public sphere.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/521054
Journal Title: The Library Quarterly: Information, Community, Policy
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 527832
Date: 01 2008
Author(s): Scimeca Ross
Abstract: In this article, we have argued that the application of library practice requires a suspension of truth. We support this by introducing a new theory of truth that is rooted in historicism. One of the overarching missions of library practice is to acquire, manage, preserve, and make accessible human knowledge. While there are pragmatic and sociopolitical considerations that often constrict fulfillment of this mission, the public purpose of librarianship in a free and open society nonetheless dictates that materials be made accessible regardless of what the society at the current time or the majority of people within a culturally defined place consider as true.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/523909
Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: American Historical Association
Issue: 587019
Date: April 2004
Author(s): Woolf Daniel
Abstract: [[START 06A00070]] Reviews of Books and Films neered research in this latter area in "A Feminine Past? Gender, Genre and Historical Knowledge in England, 1500-1800," American Historical Review 102:3 [June 1997]: 645-79). But these are ungenerous caveats: this is a meticulously researched study in which analysis is ably supported by a range of impres- sive statistical data and well-chosen (and sometimes entertaining) case studies of individual readers, pub- lishers, and publications. ROSEMARY MITCHELL University of Leeds J. G. A. POCocK. [[END 06A00070]] [[START 06A00080]] Barbarism and Religion: Volume Three, The First Decline and Fall. New York: Cam- bridge University Press. 2003. Pp. xiii, 527. $60.00. In reviewing for this journal the first two volumes of J. G. A. Pocock's Barbarism and Religion, the present reviewer observed that there is a symphonic quality to Pocock's writing, as polyphonic lines in the form of concepts are spun out, developed, inverted, and brought into counterpoint with others. This third movement offers a scherzo reminiscent of the author's 1975 book, The Machiavellian Moment, and it sounds some of the same chords (republicanism, political cycles, civic virtue, arms vs. commerce). The subtitle of volume three is deceptively simple: it refers to the first (and best-known) volume of Edward Gibbon's masterpiece, which he published in 1776. That book commenced (after a very brief account of the structure of the Augustan principate) with the "Five Good" Antonine emperors from Nerva to Mar- cus Aurelius, and concluded (narratively) with Con- stantine's defeat of Licinius and restoration of a unified rule-a temporary resolution immediately fol- lowed by two chapters on Christianity that seem jarringly out of place, given the fact that Christians are scarcely mentioned through the previous fourteen chapters. Gibbon's readers had to wait until 1781 for the story to pick up again. Exposition of this "first decline and fall" in fact occupies only the last hundred pages of Pocock's volume and therefore serves as both a climax to the Pocockian story so far, and a bridge to the next volume. Volume one of Barbarism and Religion situated Gibbon intellectually within a number of different European "Enlightenments"; volume two located him on a different axis, among the various writers of "narratives of civil government" in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries. (We are still missing the parallel vector running through ecclesiastical histori- ography, although Eusebius, Augustine, Orosius, and Otto of Freising figure prominently here. Christianity only begins to signal its importance with chapter fifteen of Gibbon; where he used ecclesiastical author- ities, up to that point, it was to document civil rather than sacred history.) Volume three moves in a third, diachronic dimension, tracing the transformations of key themes, in particular the idea of "decline and fall" itself, from very ancient origins up to the Scot Adam Ferguson's Progress and Termination of the Roman Republic (which appeared seven years after Gibbon's first volume and is thus offered for comparison rather than direct influence). The flight of concepts and motifs is dizzying, the lengthy quotations apposite, and as with the previous volumes, one can scarcely miss a sentence without losing a nuance or a parenthetical qualification. The theme of decline and fall, which informs the conception and beginning of Gibbon's book, would eventually yield to "barbarism and reli- gion" as its principal causes in later volumes (along with over-taxation, which Gibbon mentions at the close of chapter fourteen). But behind that idea, which only gradually emerged from Polybian political cycles via medieval notions of the translatio imperii, lay much else, including sequential recognitions of crucial turn- ing points in Roman history going back to Gracchan land reforms in the late second century B.C.E. The core problem, historiographically, remains how to explain why Gibbon, committed from an early stage to a Tacitean narrative, chose to begin his account not with the Julio-Claudians but instead at the "Antonine moment" of imperial zenith achieved by Trajan. (As he once did with cinquecento Florence, Pocock inclines to define major turning points or episodes, both historical and intellectual, in terms of "moments"-a historical Constantinean and historiographical Zosiman moment lie ahead, and the Machiavellian version even puts in a cameo appearance when this volume reaches the early eighteenth century.) Gibbon knew intimately the char- acter of Augustan rule and the flaws of the late republic; he had read his Sallust as well as Tacitus. The later imperial historians, especially Appian of Alexan- dria and Ammianus Marcellinus, also figure in this account as historians of decline, but of a decline that takes a great deal of time-all the way to the "Illyrian" recovery of the late third century-really to become unmistakeable. The subjects confronted by Gibbon's nearly two millennia of predecessors include the military problem of restless troops settling in an empire that has con- quered all its rivals and closed itself off from further expansion; the civic conflict between virtue and cor- ruption (or rather, the way in which virtue leads to military conquest and empire, which in turn produce an oriental softness); the role of the soldiers in making emperors and especially the legions' realization, in the Year of Four Emperors (68/69 C.E.), that emperors could be made "elsewhere than Rome"; the place of the Augustinian-Orosian "two cities" view of history; the vicissitudes in republicanism (an issue revived in the fifteenth century by Leonardi Bruni, who as a non-Roman concerned mainly with Florence was able to see the empire's longue duree for the first time as declinatio rather than translatio and to initiate, though not complete, a gradual transition in historiography from the latter to the former); and the extension of citizenship to the provinces, along, soon, with the capacity of provincials to be proclaimed emperor. All of these streams converge, not entirely satisfactorily AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 470 APRIL 2004 [[END 06A00080]] [[START 06A00080]] Methods/Theory from either Gibbon's or Pocock's point of view, in the making of the first volume of the Decline and Fall. In Pocock's summary of Gibbon, the Augustan principate was a system that bumped along for a quarter millennium until, following fifty years of mili- tary anarchy, the Illyrian Diocletian divided the empire into two halves ruled by two senior and two junior emperors. Diocletian himself abandoned any remain- ing pretence that the emperor was merely princeps and imperator, openly assuming virtually an Asiatic despo- tism, styled dominus and secluded from public access. This set the stage for the establishment of an entirely new kind of regime under Constantine in the next generation. The very resilience of the Augustan-Anto- nine system up to that point posed narrative and explanatory challenges for Gibbon in itself, since it occurred despite runs of weak emperors, intermittent monsters (Caligula, Nero, Domitian, Commodus, Ca- racalla), the progressive emasculation of the senate (effectively completed by Septimius Severus early in the third century), and the growing independence of the military. Gibbon's flowing recit is bracketed by peintures (the gallicisms are Pocock's) of Antonine civilization at the start and of Christianity in chapter fifteen. In between the beginning and end of his volume, Gibbon appears to have realized that he had, in a way, painted himself into a corner, given that he had over a thousand years still to narrate, and a radical shift in priorities and design proved necessary. Future volumes of the Decline and Fall would give both the foreign tribes and the Christians much greater prom- inence, and before the last volume's conclusion, a Tacitean account of the decline and fall of western antiquity would evolve into an "enlightened narrative" of the triumph of barbarism and religion, recovery from which had only really begun in Gibbon's own age of civility. This volume is every bit as persuasive as its prede- cessors and, perhaps because it is as much recit as the others were peintures, it is also rather more compelling a read. More than the first two volumes of his work, volume three of Barbarism and Religion leaves one hanging; like Gibbon and his first readers, we are only at the Milvian Bridge, pondering what will follow with Constantine. One hopes that, unlike those readers, we will not have to wait five years for the next episode. DANIEL WOOLF University of Alberta [[END 06A00080]] [[START 06A00090]] LAWRENCE W. MCBRIDE, editor. Reading Irish Histories: Texts, Contexts, and Memory in Modem Ireland. Port- land, Oreg.: Four Courts Press. 2003. Pp. 233. $55.00. The final essay of this collection closes with the following sentiment from Sean Farrell Moran: "Like Socrates and Plato who stood firmly against the influ- ence of myth in Athenian democracy, academic histo- rians will step in to attempt to correct the misconcep- tions of Irish citizens" (p. 218). In the previous essay, one such "academic historian," Ben Novick, stepped into the breach in the following fashion: "Writing, as discussed throughout this book, is a primary means of disseminating information" (p. 211). Socrates and Plato have indeed met their match. It is perhaps unfortunate that this collection, edited by Lawrence W. McBride, closes with one of the most arrogant pieces of scholarship that I have ever had the displeasure of reading. The conceit of the comparison quoted above, and the condescension of statements such as "Perhaps we should pity the peasants. They made the mistake of remembering their past incor- rectly" and "The common Irish man and woman must then be re-educated about Ireland's past and abandon their memories" (p. 218), make it difficult to commend the essay as a fine conclusion to an exceptional book. One can only hope that Moran is trying to be ironic. But it would be unfair to condemn this book on the basis of one author's misguided faith in the powers of the "academic historian." Indeed, the book, although most worthy at times, has enough problems without that. The intention of the collection is clearly estab- lished in the editor's preface: to "examine how a variety of historical narratives were delivered through the written word, but with special attention paid to how readers might have reacted to these texts" (p. 13). The difficulty is that the reader is the one consistent absentee from the essays that follow. From Paul Townend's chapter on the reading rooms of the na- tional movements of the late nineteenth century to Novick's chapter on the newspaper of the Irish Volun- teers, the reader is little more than a shadowy figure. Even the most basic details are ignored; there is no attempt to estimate circulation figures for books or newspapers. Anne Kane's attempts at "reconstructing" (p. 46) what a newspaper reader during the land war might have felt amounts to little more than an essay in speculative sociology. Paul Ricoeur and Clifford Geertz seem to get more attention than the actual people who "may have" (p. 46) and "could well have" (p. 56) responded to the newspapers examined. It also seems unlikely that any farmer facing eviction could have conceived of the land war as a "ritual process" (p. 45). But Kane's essay is not the only one at fault in this fashion. The extent of the readers' absence almost begs one to question why the editor made such a particular point of drawing "special attention" to the reader at all. This is not a fault particular to this book or to these essays. Beyond specific accounts by a reader reacting to a text, which in turn have all the inherent linguistic and interpretative pitfalls of any other text, there are very few ways to interpret the readers' response to any type of narrative. Timothy McMahon is one of the few authors in this collection who actually quotes from the men and women who attended the Gaelic Summer Colleges that he examines. His essay is one of the collection's most valuable as a result. Colin Barr's piece on university education, again valuable in its factual content, has nothing to say about the students or how the changes in the universities effected them AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 471 APRIL 2004 [[END 06A00090]]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/530341
Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: American Historical Association
Issue: 587019
Date: April 2004
Author(s): Dolan Anne
Abstract: [[START 06A00080]] Methods/Theory from either Gibbon's or Pocock's point of view, in the making of the first volume of the Decline and Fall. In Pocock's summary of Gibbon, the Augustan principate was a system that bumped along for a quarter millennium until, following fifty years of mili- tary anarchy, the Illyrian Diocletian divided the empire into two halves ruled by two senior and two junior emperors. Diocletian himself abandoned any remain- ing pretence that the emperor was merely princeps and imperator, openly assuming virtually an Asiatic despo- tism, styled dominus and secluded from public access. This set the stage for the establishment of an entirely new kind of regime under Constantine in the next generation. The very resilience of the Augustan-Anto- nine system up to that point posed narrative and explanatory challenges for Gibbon in itself, since it occurred despite runs of weak emperors, intermittent monsters (Caligula, Nero, Domitian, Commodus, Ca- racalla), the progressive emasculation of the senate (effectively completed by Septimius Severus early in the third century), and the growing independence of the military. Gibbon's flowing recit is bracketed by peintures (the gallicisms are Pocock's) of Antonine civilization at the start and of Christianity in chapter fifteen. In between the beginning and end of his volume, Gibbon appears to have realized that he had, in a way, painted himself into a corner, given that he had over a thousand years still to narrate, and a radical shift in priorities and design proved necessary. Future volumes of the Decline and Fall would give both the foreign tribes and the Christians much greater prom- inence, and before the last volume's conclusion, a Tacitean account of the decline and fall of western antiquity would evolve into an "enlightened narrative" of the triumph of barbarism and religion, recovery from which had only really begun in Gibbon's own age of civility. This volume is every bit as persuasive as its prede- cessors and, perhaps because it is as much recit as the others were peintures, it is also rather more compelling a read. More than the first two volumes of his work, volume three of Barbarism and Religion leaves one hanging; like Gibbon and his first readers, we are only at the Milvian Bridge, pondering what will follow with Constantine. One hopes that, unlike those readers, we will not have to wait five years for the next episode. DANIEL WOOLF University of Alberta [[END 06A00080]] [[START 06A00090]] LAWRENCE W. MCBRIDE, editor. Reading Irish Histories: Texts, Contexts, and Memory in Modem Ireland. Port- land, Oreg.: Four Courts Press. 2003. Pp. 233. $55.00. The final essay of this collection closes with the following sentiment from Sean Farrell Moran: "Like Socrates and Plato who stood firmly against the influ- ence of myth in Athenian democracy, academic histo- rians will step in to attempt to correct the misconcep- tions of Irish citizens" (p. 218). In the previous essay, one such "academic historian," Ben Novick, stepped into the breach in the following fashion: "Writing, as discussed throughout this book, is a primary means of disseminating information" (p. 211). Socrates and Plato have indeed met their match. It is perhaps unfortunate that this collection, edited by Lawrence W. McBride, closes with one of the most arrogant pieces of scholarship that I have ever had the displeasure of reading. The conceit of the comparison quoted above, and the condescension of statements such as "Perhaps we should pity the peasants. They made the mistake of remembering their past incor- rectly" and "The common Irish man and woman must then be re-educated about Ireland's past and abandon their memories" (p. 218), make it difficult to commend the essay as a fine conclusion to an exceptional book. One can only hope that Moran is trying to be ironic. But it would be unfair to condemn this book on the basis of one author's misguided faith in the powers of the "academic historian." Indeed, the book, although most worthy at times, has enough problems without that. The intention of the collection is clearly estab- lished in the editor's preface: to "examine how a variety of historical narratives were delivered through the written word, but with special attention paid to how readers might have reacted to these texts" (p. 13). The difficulty is that the reader is the one consistent absentee from the essays that follow. From Paul Townend's chapter on the reading rooms of the na- tional movements of the late nineteenth century to Novick's chapter on the newspaper of the Irish Volun- teers, the reader is little more than a shadowy figure. Even the most basic details are ignored; there is no attempt to estimate circulation figures for books or newspapers. Anne Kane's attempts at "reconstructing" (p. 46) what a newspaper reader during the land war might have felt amounts to little more than an essay in speculative sociology. Paul Ricoeur and Clifford Geertz seem to get more attention than the actual people who "may have" (p. 46) and "could well have" (p. 56) responded to the newspapers examined. It also seems unlikely that any farmer facing eviction could have conceived of the land war as a "ritual process" (p. 45). But Kane's essay is not the only one at fault in this fashion. The extent of the readers' absence almost begs one to question why the editor made such a particular point of drawing "special attention" to the reader at all. This is not a fault particular to this book or to these essays. Beyond specific accounts by a reader reacting to a text, which in turn have all the inherent linguistic and interpretative pitfalls of any other text, there are very few ways to interpret the readers' response to any type of narrative. Timothy McMahon is one of the few authors in this collection who actually quotes from the men and women who attended the Gaelic Summer Colleges that he examines. His essay is one of the collection's most valuable as a result. Colin Barr's piece on university education, again valuable in its factual content, has nothing to say about the students or how the changes in the universities effected them AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 471 APRIL 2004 [[END 06A00090]] [[START 06A00090]] Reviews of Books and Films and their learning. The academic career of one Galway student, H. Fitzwalter Kirker, is traced in its entirety, but only in a footnote. The reader gets at least something approximating a lifeline in the piece by McBride on the young reader and the teaching and learning of Irish history. That "young people are by nature curious" (p. 114), however, seems an inade- quate point on which to hang a conclusion. The book is at its strongest in the essays by Jose Lanters and Gregory Castle, which focus on the work of T. W. Rolleston and Standish O'Grady, respectively. Both historians are examined in the context of their contemporaries; both essays actually attempt to fulfill the claims they make for themselves in their opening pages. The same cannot be said, however, for Eileen Reilly's piece on J. A. Froude. Its bland rehearsal of his life is punctuated with references to his visits to Ireland and quotations from some of his more offen- sive diatribes on the Irish people. She offers little or no comment on the bigotry that billowed forth from his pen. For example, one is told of Froude's dislike for Daniel O'Connell but not the reason why. Novick's piece on the military education of the Irish Volunteers begins with an interesting description, but it is rather disappointing thereafter. Although the material is fascinating, the author's conclusions are not. At one point, he deduces that "The pattern of military education seen in the Irish Volunteer and the Workers' Republic lends weight to the idea of the Rising as blood sacrifice, since the key strategist, Joseph Plunkett, never wrote military columns for the Irish Volunteer" (p. 198). At no point does it occur to Novick that the rebels might not have printed their plans in the paper because letting the authorities in Dublin Castle know in advance was not really part of the plan. How useful, indeed, is an examination of the Irish Volunteer's role in the training of the rebels when even the author concedes that details of training on urban insurrection were "left to the writers of the Workers' Republic" (p. 210); when the author gives approximately nine lines of consideration to what he adjudges to be the more important source? Through- out there is little sense of the eye of Dublin Castle watching over what was published and curtailing what could be written. This is a worthy but a frustrating book. There is a lot of value in each essay in terms of the material that is brought to light, but there is also the crushing weight of the artificial framework under which the essays are forced to labor. Like Froude, it is perhaps this book's "portion in life to please no one faction" (p. 140). ANNE DOLAN Trinity College Dublin [[END 06A00090]] [[START 06A00100]] COLIN NEWBURY. Patrons, Clients, and Empire: Chief- taincy and Over-Rule in Asia, Africa, and the Pacific. New York: Oxford University Press. 2003. Pp. xii, 328. $72.00. It is a brave historian nowadays who admits that his or her current academic preoccupations began in the 1950s, but an unrepentant Colin Newbury tells us that imperial history at Oxford University is peculiarly marked by continuity. He says that literary theory has dominated the study of discourse for too long (al- though presumably not at Oxford), and it is time to get back to the study of political discourse using the time-honored model of patron-client relations. Drawing on his extensive knowledge of African and Pacific imperial history, with the addition of material on South and Southeast Asia, Newbury presents a well researched and cogently argued case for the persis- tence of precolonial clientage networks in certain British and French colonies. Patron-client modeling was refined by social scientists in the 1960s and 1970s, when it became a useful way of explaining why inde- pendence had brought relatively little change to the administrative systems of former colonies. That polit- ical and economic relations in some colonies can be analyzed effectively using this theory is clear; whether the exercise speaks to wider debates about empire is another question. The omission of colonies of settle- ment, along with almost all of the Portuguese, Dutch, and German empires, weakens the case considerably. Newbury draws on a wide, although extremely selec- tive, range of secondary literature to supplement his own research, wisely conceding that authors may not like the use he makes of their material. He feels no need to address the epistemological and methodolog- ical concerns raised by authors whose work he mines for empirical detail. He excludes pioneering cross- disciplinary studies, such as Jean and John Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution (1991) and Nicholas Thomas, Colonialism's Culture: Anthropology, Travel and Government (1994), which have done so much to shape current debates in postcolonial anthropology. Newbury calls for more interaction between social scientists and historians, but he does surprisingly little to encourage it. If patron-client brokerage really is the best model, Newbury should be able to tackle other theories with confidence, demonstrating their inade- quacies through constructive engagement. Instead he revives battles won long ago, such as the critique of "collaboration" and "indirect rule" analysis. There are still some historians who work with these terms, but far more interesting is the much larger number of scholars tackling more recent debates. This book's contribution to imperial historiography is therefore difficult to assess. Newbury hopes that it will help to determine whether imperial rule suc- ceeded or failed "in 'preparing' [its colonies] for the exigencies and responsibilities of devolved govern- ment" (p. viii). One wonders whether this is still a pressing question, however. It has been a long time since independence for many of the countries Newbury discusses. Scholars posing broader questions about colonialism's legacy will wonder about the cost of Newbury's ruthlessly exclusive approach. While dis- cussing the influence of indigenous networks, Newbury AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 472 APRIL 2004 [[END 06A00100]]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/530342
Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: American Historical Association
Issue: 587009
Date: February 2002
Author(s): Bender Thomas
Abstract: [[START 02P0009T]] Review Essay Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History THOMAS BENDER [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] OVER THE PAST QUARTER CENTURY, a new American history has been written.1 This rewriting of American history has often been associated with the "triumph" of social history within the discipline, but in fact the transformation is much broader than that: the domain of the historical has been vastly extended, inherited narratives displaced, new subjects and narratives introduced. While at the monographic level, one sees similar developments in various national historiographies, national synthesis-and the idea of a national synthesis- seems to have been less troubled elsewhere than in the field of U.S. history. Admittedly, generalization is risky, especially if one reaches into historiographies with which one is barely familiar. Still, I think that a variety of outstanding national histories (or histories of a people sometimes treated as nations) have been more confident of established narrative strategies. With the exception of the historians of France that I will note, historians of other modern nations seem to have had fewer doubts about the basic framing of a narrative synthesis, and they have not felt compelled to develop new approaches, even though in many cases the other work of the authors involved has been strikingly innovative.2 Yet the social, intellectual, and political developments that have complicated American historiography are likely, I suspect, to make themselves felt in other national historiographies fairly soon, a point recently made by Jacques Revel, a leading French historian.3 And that circumstance may spawn a generation of controversy about the politics and strategies of synthesis. If so, the American case may be of more general import and interest. Beginning in the 1940s, intellectual history became the synthesizing subfield in U.S. history. reDlacing the political-economic narratives of Frederick Jackson [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] I wish to thank the editors of the AHR, first, for inviting me to consider the issues in this essay, second, for the helpful comments of Acting Editor Jeffrey Wasserstrom, and, third, for the quite stimulating commentary of several anonymous reviewers. 1 See Eric Foner, ed., The New American History (Philadelphia, 1990); Foner, ed., The New American History, rev. and expanded edn. (Philadelphia, 1997). 2 I have in mind Linda Colley, Britons: Forging the Nation, 1707-1837 (New Haven, Conn., 1992); Jonathan D. Spence, The Search for Modem China (New York, 1990); Albert Hourani, A History of the Arab Peoples (Cambridge, Mass., 1991); Paul Ginsborg, A History of Contemporary Italy (Harmond- sworth, Eng., 1990); Theodore Zeldin, France, 1848-1945, 2 vols. (Oxford, 1979); Fernand Braudel, The Identity of France, Sian Reynolds, trans., 2 vols. (New York, 1988-90); Andre Burguiere and Jacques Revel, eds., Histoire de la France, 5 vols. (Paris, 1989-2000). 3 Jacques Revel, "Le fandeau de la memoire," paper presented at the conference "International- izing the Study of American History," Florence, Italy, July 5, 1999. Paper in possession of author. 129 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 130 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Turner and Charles A. Beard.4 But during the 1970s, the claims being made for a national mind or culture were challenged by social historians. Intellectual history was chastened and transformed by the confrontation with social history. Eschewing their former embrace of synthesis, intellectual historians pulled back to study more precisely defined themes and thinkers.5 Not only intellectual history but other subfields accommodated social history's provocation to rethink conventional gen- eralizations. In addition, a professional, even "social-scientific," concern for precision and specificity of reference collaborated-sometimes with forethought, often not-with a sharpened awareness of difference and conflict that came from social movements outside the academy to undermine older composite narratives. Neither the frame supplied by Charles and Mary Beard in The Rise of American Civilization (1927), with its dramatic narrative of conflict between the "people" and the "interests," nor the consensual pluralism that succeeded that interpretation in the 1950s survived.6 If the consensus historians underplayed conflict, the Beards' approach, for all of its sympathy for the dispossessed, was found to be inadequate as well. Their narrative revealed little feel for the diversity of Americans, and it paid scant attention to non-whites. Most important of all, while their narrative voice was sympathetic, one did not discover the quotidian life or hear the voices of those groups that have found voice in more recent historiography. Judged by newer historiographical expectations, The Rise of American Civilization seemed "thin," compared with the increasingly popular "thick" description that was built, in part, on the enormously influential anthropological work of Clifford Geertz.7 In the past quarter century, there has been a proliferation of exciting new research, much of it bringing previously overlooked or explicitly excluded groups and events into the light of history. The number and variety of American stories multiplied. Suddenly, there were histories where there had been none or where the available histories had not been attended to by professional historians: histories of African Americans in the era of slavery and beyond; of Native Americans; of workers at home in their communities, at work, and at play; of women at home and outside of the home and of gender relations more generally; of consumption as well as production; of ethnic minorities and "borderlands"; of popular culture and other "marginal" forms of cultural production; of objects and material culture; of whites and whiteness as historical subjects; of non-state international and intercultural relations; and much more. [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 4Frederick Jackson Turner never completed a major synthesis, but one can see how he might have done that work in his posthumously published The United States, 1830-1850 (New York, 1935); Charles A. Beard and Mary R. Beard, The Rise of American Civilization (1927; 2 volumes in 1, New York, 1930).. In fact, the Beards participated in this shift with the publication of The American Spirit: A Study of the Idea of Civilization in the United States (New York, 1942). 5 For an early anticipation of this development-from the point of view of intellectual history-see Lawrence Veysey, "Intellectual History and the New Social History," in Paul K. Conkin and John Higham, eds., New Directions in American Intellectual History (Baltimore, Md., 1979), 3-26. See also, in the same volume, David A. Hollinger, "Historians and the Discourse of Intellectuals," 42-63; and Thomas Bender, "The Cultures of Intellectual Life: The City and the Professions," 181-95. 6 For consensus history as synthesis, see especially Daniel J. Boorstin, The Americans, 3 vols. (New York, 1958-73); Louis Hartz, The Liberal Tradition in America: An Interpretation of American Political Thought since the Revolution (New York, 1955). 7 On the Beards and newer social histories, see Thomas Bender, "The New History-Then and Now," Reviews in American History 12 (1984): 612-22. For Clifford Geertz, see The Interpretation of Cultures: Selected Essays (New York, 1973). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 131 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] By the early 1980s, some commentators inside and outside the profession were wondering whether an American history had disappeared in the onslaught of highly particular studies, often about subgroups in the larger society of the United States. These developments were occurring at a moment when the number of American historians was expanding to an unprecedented degree. Disciplinary expansion both allowed and prompted increased specialization. And that worried some, who began to speak of hyperspecialization and fragmentation. The structure of specialization derived in large part from the impact of a social history that often fused the group-based particularity of focus with ideological commitments to class and identity-based social movements. This pattern of work discouraged the integration of particular histories into some kind of synthesis.8 Traditionalists, perhaps not surprisingly, were unnerved by these develop- ments.9 But even some proponents of the newer history worried. Early on, Herbert G. Gutman, one of the leading figures in the movement to write a history that included all Americans and that recognized differences-class, ethnic, racial, gender-was concerned that instead of enriching and enlarging the usable history of the United States, the new scholarship was failing to do that, perhaps making it in fact less usable. The "new social history," he wrote in the introduction to his collection of pioneering essays in the field, "suffers from a very limiting overspe- cialization." Take an Irish-born Catholic female textile worker and union organizer in Fall River involved in a disorderly strike in 1875. She might be the subject of nearly a dozen sub-specializations, which would, he feared, "wash out the wholeness that is essential to understanding human behavior."10 Later, in the wake of a national meeting of writers at which historians and history seemed to be largely ignored in discussions of the political and cultural situation in the aftermath of Richard Nixon, Gutman mused aloud in the pages of The Nation over whether the failure of historians to incorporate social history's findings into a new synthesis had seriously diminished, even evacuated, history's possible contribution to public debate."1 In the mid-1980s, in what turned out to be a controversial pair of articles, I raised a related question: how might one construct the (to my mind) needed synthesis of recent historiography on the United States.12 There was considerable negative reaction to those articles, coming from two different positions. One [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 8 For an insightful and quite worrisome examination of recent scholarly practice and its trajectory, see Winfried Fluck, "The Modernity of America and the Practice of Scholarship," in Thomas Bender, ed., Rethinking American History in a Global Age (Berkeley, Calif., 2002). 9 See, for example, Gertrude Himmelfarb, The New History and the Old (Cambridge, Mass., 1987). This volume includes essays published by Himmelfarb between 1975 and 1984. 10 Herbert G. Gutman, Work, Culture and Society in Industrializing America: Essays in American Working-Class and Social History (New York, 1976), xii-xiii. Bernard Bailyn, who did not share Gutman's political or historiographical agenda, raised similar issues a few years later in his presidential address to the American Historical Association. Bailyn, "The Challenge of Modern Historiography," AHR 87 (February 1982): 1-24. 11 Herbert G. Gutman, "The Missing Synthesis: Whatever Happened to History," The Nation, November 21, 1981. See also, in a similar spirit, Eric Foner, "History in Crisis," Commonweal (December 18, 1981): 723-26. 12 Thomas Bender, "Making History Whole Again," New York Times Book Review (October 6, 1985): 1, 42-43; Bender, "Wholes and Parts: The Need for Synthesis in American History," Journal of American History 73 (1986): 120-36. See also the earlier and less commented on essay, Bender, "New History." AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 132 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] position worried about its critique of specialization and its call for addressing a larger public. These arguments were equated with a carelessness about scholarly rigor.13 The other, and more widespread position, focused on the risks of a national narrative itself. It was evidently feared that such a narrative would, by definition, re-exclude those groups and themes that had so recently been brought under the umbrella of history and would re-inscribe a "master narrative" dominated by white, elite males.14 By the end of the 1980s, however, the question of synthesis had become less controversial. The issue became more practical, more professional in some sense: how to do it and how to do it within the parameters of inclusion that had been central to the discussion from the beginning. It was on this note that Alice Kessler-Harris, the author of the chapter on social history in The New American History (1990 edition), addressed the question. In the last section of her essay, with the section title of "The Problem of Synthesis," she acknowledged the problem and explored various possible ways to overcome "fragmentation" and move toward synthesis.15 A different issue emerged in the 1990s. Poststructuralist literary and cultural theory, sometimes broadly and even more vaguely characterized as postmodernism, was and is suspicious of any aspiration toward a comprehensive narrative. It is to this body of theory that we owe the commonplace use and misuse of the epithet "master narrative."16 These theories have been rather slow to penetrate workaday historical practice among American historians. Levels and types of awareness of them vary: from shocked indignation at the whole idea, to vague awareness and thoughtless dismissal, to intellectual fascination largely in isolation from the making of one's own histories. In his recent book, Beyond the Great Story: History as Text and Discourse (1995), Robert Berkhofer seeks to force more attention to these issues. Insistently, but not always consistently, he urges historians to recognize the dimensions of the postmodern crisis that surrounds them. He seems more interested in sounding the alarm about the quicksand before us than in guiding us [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 13 Eric H. Monkkonen, "The Dangers of Synthesis," AHR 91 (December 1986): 1146-57. 14 See the Round Table articles, Nell Irvin Painter, "Bias and Synthesis in History," Journal of American History 74 (June 1987): 109-12; Richard Wightman Fox, "Public Culture and the Problem of Synthesis," 113-16; Roy Rosenzweig, "What Is the Matter with History?" 117-22; and for my response, Thomas Bender, "Wholes and Parts: Continuing the Conversation," 123-30. For a more recent and more broadly argued critique, see Randolph Roth, "Is There a Democratic Alternative to Republi- canism? The Rhetoric and Politics of Recent Pleas for Synthesis," in Jeffrey Cox and Shelton Stromquist, eds., Contesting the Master Narrative: Essays in Social History (Iowa City, Iowa, 1998), 210-56. 15 Alice Kessler-Harris, "Social History," in Foner, New American History, 177-80. The closing chapters of Peter Novick's very influential social history of the profession worries this issue as well. Peter Novick, That Noble Dream: The "Objectivity Question" and the American Historical Profession (Cambridge, 1988), chaps. 14-16. The most recent public discussion is David Oshinsky, "The Humpty Dumpty of Scholarship: American History Has Broken in Pieces, Can It Be Put Together Again?" New York Times, August 26, 2000. 16 See Allen Megill, "Fragmentation and the Future of Historiography," AHR 96 (June 1991): 693-98. For a more general but very rich survey, see Dorothy Ross, "Grand Narrative in American Historical Writing: From Romance to Uncertainty," AHR 100 (June 1995): 651-77. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 133 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] around it or safely through. But either way, he intends to challenge the very possibility of narrative synthesis.17 While these worries, proposals, and polemics were being fashioned, the daily work of historians proceeded. Among the products of that work have been a good number of explicitly synthetic volumes. There is, of course, no clear or settled notion of what defines a work of synthesis. I have used a rather generous definition. Some of the books I am calling synthetic might alternatively be designated as monographs-archivally based but exceptionally ambitious books that tackle big questions and seek to frame a large field or to provide an interpretation for an audience well beyond specialists. Others are more obviously synthetic, relying heavily on secondary literature to establish the state of the art in a broad field for a wide audience, including, often, students and the general public. With this diversity of form, purpose, and audience in mind-as well as a concern for a reasonable distribution of fields and periods-I have, with the help of the editors of the American Historical Review, selected a few recent synthetic works for examina- tion.18 The very existence of these books mutes the question of whether we need synthetic works or whether, under the constraints of present historiographical practice, synthesis is possible. In fact, the seeming proliferation of syntheses at present-and their variousness-suggests that the field of American history is at a formative (or reformative) moment that invites synthesis: the quest for new understandings that has undermined established narratives has now, perhaps, prompted new efforts at crystallizing a very unstable body of historical writing into new syntheses. A different question, however, provides the focus of this essay. What strategies for narrative synthesis are available to historians today? How might we think about the relation between a particular structure of narrative synthesis and the author's purpose or interpretation? How do these different strategies relate to current historiography? What particular work do they do, within the profession and beyond it? And finally I want to ask some questions about the firmness of the boundaries (mostly geographical) that define what is and is not captured in synthetic narratives of U.S. history. These works do not, of course, cover the whole field of synthetic works. More and other books could have been chosen, but these eleven books (and several others mentioned along the way) at least represent different kinds of history, different [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 17 Robert F. Berkhofer, Jr., Beyond the Great Story: History as Text and Discourse (Cambridge, Mass., 1995). See the "Forum" on the book in the American Quarterly: Michael C. Coleman, "Gut Reactions of a Historian to a Missionary Tract," American Quarterly 50 (June 1998): 340-48; Saul Cornell, "Moving Beyond the Great Story: Post Modern Possibilities, Postmodern Problems," 349-57; Betsy Erkkila, "Critical History," 358-64; and Robert F. Berkhofer, Jr., "Self-Reflections on Beyond the Great Story: The Ambivalent Author as Ironic Interlocutor," 365-75. See especially the exceptionally insightful and critical review essay by Thomas L. Haskell, "Farewell to Fallibilism: Robert Berkhofer's Beyond the Great Story and the Allure of the Postmodern," History and Theory 37 (October 1998): 347-69. 18 None, incidentally though importantly, present themselves as synthetic narratives of the nation, although some to be discussed below certainly reach toward that in practical effect, particularly those authored by Eric Foner (The Story of American Freedom) and by Robert V. Hine and John Mack Faragher (TheAmerican West). In fact, I have recommended each to non-historians asking for a literate one-volume history of the United States. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 134 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] periods, and different themes. Together, the eleven total nearly 6,000 pages of outstanding historical writing. If nothing else, I can conclude that synthetic narrative invites long books. Because I cannot claim special knowledge in any of the fields being synthesized in these books, I do not propose to do the kind of analysis one would find in specialized reviews. Such criticisms that I have will be framed from the position of my interest in synthetic narrative. I say that in part to be honest about my own limitations in appraising these books but also for another, more positive reason. I want to insist that narrative synthesis is a form of knowledge, indeed, a particularly powerful form of creating, not simply summarizing, knowledge. I hope to get past or under the story enough to probe the implications of different modes of structuring a narrative synthesis. The way different narrative strategies construct that knowledge is important. While inclusion is one of the tests our generation will rightly ask of synthesis, there are other important historiographical issues that are embedded in the question of narrative synthesis.19 The more seriously we consider possible narratives of American history, the more we may be prepared to ask questions that press beyond inclusion. We may even be both bold enough and hopeful enough to worry a little about the language of inclusion, if not the principle. Is there perhaps more than a hint of dominant culture noblesse oblige in the language of inclusion? Might not a more sophisticated notion of the temporal and geographical boundaries of American history, including an awareness of the diasporic stories within American history, complicate and enrich the notion of inclusion?20 Can the historical and historiographical terrain be opened a bit more in a way that enables a deeper, denser, and more complex historiographical exploration of justice and difference at the center of American history? Might democracy be the word, the concept, the commitment that will move us in that direction? As I examine the stack of books before me, I propose to keep these issues in mind and to return to them at the end of this essay. JON BUTLER'S Becoming America: The Revolution before 1776 (2000) covers the whole mainland British colonial space and history, and it addresses a wide range of themes. In fact, themes, not time or chronology, organize his story. His brief, often one-word, chapter titles reveal a very distinctive type of synthesis, one immediately accessible to the reader, whether professional or lay: Peoples, Economy, Politics, Things Material, Things Spiritual. It is a reasonable progression, and in each case he brings together a good deal of material. Although his theme is transformation, Butler also claims (following recent historiography) a more inclusive geography, making more of the middle colonies than would have been the case a generation ago. In some ways, his manner of organizing the material topically bears a relation to [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 19 I do not propose to go into theories of narrative or even my own notions, but I will here indicate that my understanding has been greatly influenced by the work of Paul Ricoeur, Time and Narrative, Kathleen McLaughlin and David Pellauer, trans., 3 vols. (Chicago, 1984-88). 20 Such thinking is not restricted to specialists in the profession exploring the theme of diaspora. The novelist Russell Banks has recently argued that the focus for a synthesis of American history ought to be the African diaspora. See "The Star-Spangled Novel," Los Angeles Times, July 2, 2000. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 135 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Richard Hofstadter's posthumously published America at 1750: A Social Portrait (1971).21 But what might have worked for Hofstadter, who was setting the scene for a three-volume narrative history of the United States, works less well for the purposes Butler has in his book. If Hofstadter's book was intended to provide a snapshot that would serve as a starting point, Butler's title ("Becoming America") and his stated intentions announce change as his theme. He means to persuade the reader of a broad pattern of transformation that produced a distinctive and modern society in advance of 1776 and that in turn spawned the first modern revolution. Such an argument demands more complex and careful attention to process and cause than his framing of the book seems to allow. While he has surely gathered together a considerable body of material (his notes run to fifty pages), he has not produced a synthetic narrative of change over time, one that sketches a develop- mental sequence that integrates disparate elements in the interest of a causal interpretation. By bounding each unit of synthesis, Butler is stuck with a structural isolation of topics that undercuts narrative explanation. Given that Butler's theme is transformation, this narrative structure is crippling. For reasons related to structure and style of argument, Butler's claims for American modernity are quite vulnerable. While there are doubtless some specific ways in which the British North American colonies became "modern" before independence, they were not uniformly modern-over space or in all aspects of life. Many historians would readily grant numerous anticipations of modernity by the middle of the eighteenth century, but few would insist, with Butler, that so much modernity had been achieved so soon, implying that only a few pre-modern anomalies remained on the eve of revolution.22 Most give a significant role to the revolution.23 But the most serious problem is not with the phenomena he notices or does not notice, even if there is some real unevenness on this point. Rather, it is Butler's teleology of the modern, combined with his exceedingly loose, elusive, and, as is so often said today, undertheorized definition of modernity. Add to this an unneces- sary but apparently irresistible tendency to claim American uniqueness and "firsts" for nearly everything he identifies as modern in America. He names a number of phenomena that he considers evidences of the modern-polyglot, slaves, cities, market economy, refined crafts and trades, religious pluralism, and "sophisticated politics." Without further historical specification and theoretical precision, one can indulge in reductio ad absurdum. With the exception of religious pluralism, all of these qualities probably described Athens in the age of Aristotle at least as well as the British colonies. In fact, I suspect that Peter Linebaugh and Marcus Rediker, relying on their recent book The Many-Headed Hydra: Sailors, Slaves, Commoners, and the Hidden History of the Revolutionary Atlantic (2000), would argue that the [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 21 Richard Hofstadter, America at 1750: A Social Portrait (New York, 1971). 22 Jon Butler, Becoming America: The Revolution before 1776 (Cambridge, Mass., 2000), 1. 23 See, for example, Gordon S. Wood, The Radicalism of the American Revolution (New York, 1992). Long before, Bernard Bailyn suggested certain developments that Butler would consider modern had developed in the eighteenth century, but he emphasized the unevenness and even paradoxical character of this proto-modernity. See "Political Experience and Enlightenment Ideas in Eighteenth-Century America," AHR 67 (January 1962): 339-51; and Bailyn, The Origins of American Politics (New York, 1968). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 136 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Atlantic world provides a better example of modernity on those terms than does the colonial mainland.24 He makes many claims for American distinctiveness. In the end, however, it is diversity, which he tends to equate with multiculturalism, that for Butler makes Americans modern. But if we look around, we cannot but wonder about his claims for a uniquely polyglot society. This assertion may be quite vulnerable from any sight line approaching a global perspective. Can he fairly claim that New York City harbored a level of diversity "never before gathered together"?25 Might not this be as plausibly said of Constantinople during the period covered by Butler's book? And did not the Ottoman Empire-of which Constantinople was the capital-far exceed the religious and ethnic diversity of the British colonies? My point here is partly one of fact, of care in making comparative statements without comparison. More important, however, are the criteria of the modern. Few, if any, major political bodies in the past half millennium more successfully accommodated diversity than the Ottomans, yet that achievement has never brought them recognition for a precocious modernity. One needs greater defini- tional and descriptive specificity to make the argument he claims. Because of the breadth and generality of synthetic narratives, it is especially important to be clear about key concepts. Similarly, he tends to claim the realization of "Americanness"-here equated with some vague notion of modernity-for events that, however interesting in themselves, hardly sustain his assertion that they designated "the American future."26 For example, writing of the French Huguenots, a group he knows well, he notes their assimilation, and he calls this "American."27 Well, of course it is, but so are the endogenous marriages that continue for various groups well into the twentieth century-sometimes because of racial difference and even legislation (as in the case of African Americans) or out of choice, as in the case of Scandinavians in the upper Midwest. Or to take a more ominous subject, it seems a bit fatalistic to say that colonial encroachment on Indian land "predicted" nineteenth-century relations with the Indians.28 Oddly, such a claim, while taking the moral high ground, nonetheless erases the postcolonial history of the United States by denying contingency and thus diminishing both the capacity and moral responsibility of all later actors or potential actors. The twin and linked teleologies of "modern" and "American" produce a distorting and de-historicizing synthesis. If there is a problem with the sort of synthesis Butler has written, what precisely is it? He makes historical claims about patterns and meanings of development on the basis of a narrative structure that effectively isolates and de-historicizes his themes. By not constructing a developmental narrative that integrates the various themes now separated in distinct chapters, the process and complexity of develop- ment is obscured. While his chapters are full of relevant and interesting details of [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 24 Peter Linebaugh and Marcus Rediker, The Many-Headed Hydra: Sailors, Slaves, Commoners, and the Hidden History of the Revolutionary Atlantic (Boston, 2000). 25 Butler, Becoming America, 9. 26 Butler, Becoming America, 36. 27 Butler, Becoming America, 22. One of Butler's previous books is The Huguenots in America: A Refugee People in a New World Society (Cambridge, Mass., 1983). 28 Butler, Becoming America, 68. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 137 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] everyday life, they never get integrated in any individual, institution, or place. In the absence of a narrative of change to explain and interpret, he resorts for a theme to repeated assertions of "modernity." The issue is not so much the claim for an eighteenth-century American modernity-although I am myself drawn to much more complex, nuanced, and contradictory discussions of that theme-as it is the incapacity of the particular model of synthesis he deploys to advance that theme or argument. Philip D. Morgan's Slave Counterpoint: Black Culture in the Eighteenth-Century Chesapeake and Lowcountry (1998) is at once similar to Butler's and quite different. Both focus tightly in each chapter on a particular topic or theme; there is little play among the different themes in both cases. While Butler's themes propose a reorganization of material, thus giving an impression of freshness, Morgan's quite important questions are phrased in well-established ways. While Butler's structure works against his theme of transformation, Morgan's similar structure better fits his goals for the book, partly because transformation plays a smaller role in his analysis than one might expect. Slave Counterpoint addresses nearly all the issues raised by a half century of vigorous scholarship on the beginnings of slavery, the practices of racial slavery as a labor and social system, and the nature of African-American culture in early America. It is a book of enviable learning: with a seeming total command of the historiography and an impressive knowledge of a substantial archival base, Morgan proceeds to pose (or re-pose) difficult historiographical issues. Again and again, he offers compelling answers. Want to know what scholarship has disclosed about slavery and African-American culture in the eighteenth-century Chesapeake and Lowcountry? Look to Morgan's synthesis of a generation of scholarship. To have done that is to have done a great deal, and he has done it magnificently. Yet one gets the sense of a summary volume, a volume driven by the past, by past questions. Synthesis can either cap a phase of scholarship or initiate another. I think Morgan's book falls into the former category, while Ira Berlin's new book, Many Thousands Gone: The First Two Centuries of Slavery in North America (1998), which also relies on a generation of scholarship and addresses many of the same issues, has the potential to become a new starting point. Berlin has captured the shift to an Atlantic perspective that has increasingly characterized scholarship by early modern Europeanists, Africanists, Latin Americanists, and historians of British North America. In this sense, his work, at least the early parts that sketch out and populate the Atlantic littoral, points forward.29 In a dramatic opening section, Berlin, relying more on secondary literatures than does Morgan, locates his story in very broad understandings of time (periodization) and space (the Atlantic world), the dimensions of which are shadowy, almost invisible, in Morgan's account. He locates Africans in an Atlantic history connecting four continents and in a rich and growing historiography reaching out from Europe, Africa, Latin America, and North America.30 One [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 29 Ira Berlin, Many Thousands Gone: The First Two Centuries of Slavery in North America (Cambridge, Mass., 1998). 30 Berlin's powerful evocation of the Atlantic builds on many predecessors. At minimum, mention should be made of Philip D. Curtin's The Atlantic Slave Trade: A Census (Madison, Wis., 1969); and The AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 138 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] wishes Berlin had sustained this perspective in the later sections. But even if he narrows the story to the territory that later became the United States and loses the multiple histories implied by his portrait of the Atlantic world, the beginnings of stories, whether novels or histories, are heavy with intention and implication that can, I hope, be built upon.31 In fact, the four Atlantic continents remain an always changing aspect of American and African histories. Attending to, or at least recognizing, that larger and continuing extended terrain of American history would enrich the story of the making of African Americans and America, a historiography that is at present too much captured by an implicit and too simple assimilation or "Americanization" model. Nonetheless, Berlin has provided a powerful image of the creation of the Atlantic world and of the origin of modern slavery within it. Morgan has a quite different strategy. His domain is not the Atlantic but the South, or two regions of the South, which he is anxious to reveal as differentiated. Thus his is a comparative history, comparing two regions within the South. Suggesting a certain scientific aspiration, he refers to his delimited space as a kind of laboratory, a site for an "indirect experiment."32 This approach offers him much. He is able to focus tightly on his questions and generally achieves sharply phrased answers. Yet, like any good scientific laboratory, his field of inquiry is almost hermetically sealed. A two-hundred-page part of the book titled "The Black World" begins with a fifteen-page section on "Africans." Yet it is in only one paragraph at the beginning and a few other scattered references that one reads anything about Africa. His story rarely strays east (or south or north or west) of the Maryland/ Virginia and South Carolina boundaries. His comparative method has impressive rigor. Yet one senses that not only does his approach trap him within a particular place, he is also caught within a very confining net woven from the existing historiography. As Walter Johnson pointed out in a review of the book in this journal, his questions are smaller than the stories he has unearthed.33 Much like another important book on African-American history, Herbert G. Gutman's The Black Family in Slavery and Freedom (1976), this book, for all its synthetic aspirations, cannot capture some of its best material within the tightly bounded historiographical questions and issues that frame it.34 As in the case of Berlin's book, Morgan's is quite explicit about time and space. There is a well-thought-out chronology of change, and one of his major arguments is that the South, and thus the black as well as white experience, was not uniform over space. He shows real and important distinctions between the experience of [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Rise and Fall of the Plantation Complex (New York, 1990; 2d edn., 1998); and John K. Thornton's Africa and Africans in the Making of the Atlantic World, 1400-1680 (New York, 1992; 2d edn., 1400-1800, 1998). 31 On the importance of beginnings, see Edward W. Said, Beginnings: Intention and Method (Baltimore, Md., 1975). 32 Philip D. Morgan, Slave Counterpoint: Black Culture in the Eighteenth-Century Chesapeake and Lowcountry (Chapel Hill, N.C., 1998), xvii. 33 Walter Johnson, review of Morgan, Slave Counterpoint, AHR 105 (October 2000): 1295-97, esp. 1297. 34 See Herbert G. Gutman, The Black Family in Slavery and Freedom, 1750-1925 (New York, 1976), which loses more than it gains by focusing so tightly on refuting the assumptions of the Moynihan Report. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 139 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] slavery in the Chesapeake and in the Lowcountry. Yet by treating both the temporal and spatial aspects of the story as sites (and very limited ones) rather than as processes of historical making, he weakens the capacity of his local analyses to explain change over time and, to a lesser extent, space. His major explanatory claims appear in the introduction. They are not only brief but also separate from the rich stories he tells and the analyses he makes of historiographical questions.35 The expansiveness of Many Thousands Gone, by contrast, evokes a strong sense of change, of process. It achieves a narrative synthesis of the movement of Africans onto the Atlantic and into the Western hemisphere. The difference between this approach and the tightly controlled analysis crafted by Morgan is striking. Like Morgan's, Michael Schudson's book, The Good Citizen: A History of American Civic Life (1998), is organized around fairly established questions- especially one big question. Has American civic life deteriorated over the course of the past three centuries? Naturally, the question is of a different order than those driving Morgan's analysis. It has not been generated by disciplinary scholarship. It arose out of American public life. Schudson thus draws on history and other disciplines to address directly a public question, one endlessly repeated today and, as he shows, in the past. Schudson himself, we should note, is not a historian. He was trained as a sociologist, and he teaches in a Department of Communication. While he reveals an impressive command of the relevant historiography, historians are not his primary reference group or audience.36 Although I am sure specialists will find some of his formulations to be of considerable historiographical significance and likely to encourage new lines of research, his intention, again, is different: his audience is a general one, and he seeks to bring historical knowledge to bear on a civic issue. What he is doing points toward the most important work that one kind of successful narrative synthesis can do, for the profession and for the public. By openly declaring his address to a public issue and for a public audience, Schudson participates in a very important tradition of historical writing. Some of the very best professional historians of the United States in this century have done precisely that: Frederick Jackson Turner, W. E. B. Du Bois, Charles Beard, and Richard Hofstadter all focused on issues, worries, or preoccupations of fairly general interest to write synthetic works that importantly rephrased fundamental themes in American history. This mutual enrichment of public and professional discourse is perhaps the ideal cultural work of narrative synthesis. Let us hope that historians can do this more often and more effectively. Yet as I make this point, I realize that all of the historians just named, including Schudson himself, were either trained as social scientists or did not recognize a significant boundary between history and the [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 35Morgan, Slave Counterpoint, xv-xxiv. I should note that my concerns about boundary setting in Morgan's book do not apply nearly so much to Philip D. Morgan, "The Black Experience in the British Empire, 1680-1810," in The Oxford History of the British Empire, Vol. 2: The Eighteenth Century, P. J. Marshall, ed. (Oxford, 1998), 465-86. 36 This command is at once impressive and sometimes puzzling. In discussing the Founding and the Constitution, he does not mention Gordon Wood's The Creation of the American Republic, 1776-1787 (Chapel Hill, N.C., 1969). Nor, in writing about the first decades of the nineteenth century, does he mention either of two key books by Robert H. Wiebe, The Opening of American Society: From the Adoption of the Constitution to the Eve of Disunion (New York, 1984); and Self-Rule: A Cultural History of American Democracy (Chicago, 1995). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 140 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] (other?) once more expansive social sciences. Is this a mere coincidence, or is it an issue to be addressed by the profession? While I would not place Schudson's book in the same class as the scholarship produced by the short list of great historians, he has written a fine book. It is a book about change over time, and he establishes three eras of citizenship and participa- tion, each clearly defined. He does not devote much attention to how each configuration changes into the next, but he effectively characterizes their differ- ences, even in some very brief summaries, as in the following paragraph from early in the book: Another way to characterize the past three hundred years of political change is to say that the type of authority by which society is governed shifted from personal authority (gentlemen) to interpersonal authority (parties, coalitions, and majorities), to impersonal authority (science, expertise, legal rights, and information) ... The geographical center of politics has shifted from the countryside to the cities to the suburbs and perhaps, today, to "technoburbs," "postsuburbs," or "edge cities," or whatever we name our newer habitations. Correspondingly, the kind of knowledge a good citizen requires has changed: in an age of gentlemen, the citizen's relatively rare entrances into public discussion or controversy could be guided by his knowledge of social position; in the era of rule by majorities, the citizen's voting could be led by the enthusiasm and rhetoric of parties and their most active partisans; in the era of expertise and bureaucracies, the citizens had increasingly to learn to trust their own canvass of newspapers, interest groups, parties, and other sources of knowledge, only occasionally supported by the immediacy of human contact; and in the emerging age of rights, citizens learn to catalog what entitlements they may have and what forms of victimization they may knowingly or unknowingly have experienced.37 This paragraph reveals the argument and the narrative strategy that Schudson uses to undercut the widespread notion of civic decline: rather than a story of decline, it is one of restructuring, one that recalibrates citizenship and civic practice in relation to changing values and social experiences. What some, including me, see as the erosion of our public life and the thinning of American political culture, he presents as a complex rearticulation of expectations and institutions. Whether one fully agrees with Schudson or not, the book and the point of view it ingeniously argues constitutes an important contribution of contemporary civic life. And a narrative strategy of restructuring (as opposed to the usual rise or fall scenarios) deserves a place in the historian's menu of narrative types. "Presentist" purposes may, however, carry the danger of anachronistic readings. Schudson is vulnerable on this score, especially in his consideration of the colonial period. He too easily asks how democratic any phase of political life was. A commitment to explore the fate of democracy in our past-something I endorse- surely includes recognizing when democracy is not an available concept. He might better have asked how the legitimation and exercise of power worked. Indeed, such a deeper historicism would complement his anti-anti-Whig approach. Similarly, while a then-and-now binary invites sometimes interesting questions and offers some illumination of past and present, it also invites problems. Again, one sees this risk in Schudson's work. False categories of judgment are explicitly or implicitly brought to bear. Speaking of the first generation to live under the [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 37Michael Schudson, The Good Citizen: A History of American Civic Life (New York, 1998), 8. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 141 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Constitution, he observes that little political knowledge was expected of voters, "at least little of the sort of knowledge that today's civic moralists urge upon people." Voters then were expected to have "local knowledge-not of laws or principles, but of men."38 The binary obscures the role of principles in the past and knowledge of men in the present. Most important of all, it diverts our attention from the principles that it was thought would aid voters in judging character.39 Sometimes, by focusing so much on the party system that we worry about today, he overlooks those important issues that eluded the parties or that parties avoided. Substantive issues-the reason citizenship and civic life are important-are marginalized in his account of the different concepts and patterns of public life. The result, whether intended or not, is a form of consensus history.40 "Progress or decline is not the real question," Schudson concludes.41 He converts that question into one of restructuring that points to his core argument: there must be a fit between forms of citizenship and forms of everyday life, between values and institutions, between aspirations and commitments. It is that historically informed understanding that allows him in his conclusion to speculate in quite promising ways about an evolving pattern of citizenship that may yet serve our collective hopes and needs. Still, his conclusion leaves me uneasy. Like the journalistic coverage of politics today, the substance of political conflict is subordinated to discussion of the "health" of the system, of the institutions and practices. By contrast, the tensions, conflicts, and substantive issues that made politics so important in the development of the United States and in the lives of individuals are at the center of Eric Foner's The Story of American Freedom (1998). Foner's book has an uncanny resemblance to one that at first glance might seem utterly unrelated: Richard Hofstadter's The American Political Tradition and the Men Who Made It.42 Of course, Foner inverts the point Hofstadter sought to make. If Hofstadter famously played down conflict and (less remarked upon) paid little attention to the social making of political ideologies, Foner emphasizes conflict and the changing historical construction and reconstruction of the idea and ideology of freedom. Foner's work is much more explicitly sensitive to social history, even if it parallels Hofstadter's in its interest in ideology and the limits and possibilities of American political culture. While Hofstadter was alternately comic and ironic, bitterly so at times, in The American Political Tradition, Foner's Story of American Freedom is strikingly fair and straightforward. Yet the underlying hope is similar. As James Oakes has perceptively noted, Foner's narrative is undergirded by an unstated but firm liberal ideal of freedom- one that at once shares in an Enlightenment universalism and [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 38 Schudson, Good Citizen, 81. 39 See Joyce Appleby, Inheriting the Revolution: The First Generation of Americans (Cambridge, Mass., 2000). 40 See, for example, his summary judgment of the party system at Schudson, Good Citizen, 132. Put differently, it bears at least a formal relationship to the theories of pluralism popular in political science during the 1950s. 41 Schudson, Good Citizen, 313. 42 Richard Hofstadter, TheAmerican Political Tradition and the Men Who Made It (New York, 1948). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 142 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] accommodates current concerns for inclusion and regard for difference.43 I would even argue that Hofstadter's own liberal position was closer to Foner's than one might at first suspect. Both appraised American political culture and its prospects from the position of a richer, more textured liberalism than we usually recognize in current debates.44 In thinking about the core issue in Foner's narrative, therefore, it seems fair to consider it to be the quest for a democratic liberalism, insisting on the relevance and indispensability of the modifier inserted before liberalism. One might thus characterize Foner's as a democratic synthesis, which, as I suggested above, offers a stronger and more egalitarian standard of judgment than commonplace invoca- tions of inclusion. It offers as well the implication of voice and empowerment. To Foner, as he indicates in his introduction, "abstract definitions" of freedom are not the focus. His concern is "with the debates and struggles through which freedom acquires concrete meanings, and how understandings of freedom are shaped by, and in turn help to shape, social movements and political and economic events."45 The result is a narrative that is at once focused yet always open to an examination of larger issues, structures, and events that intersect with and often drive his story. It is a dynamic story, filled with actors, with agents making freedom and using freedom. He selects key events or controversies of different eras, events that are widely contested (slavery, labor and property, the role of the state, social movements). Of course, coverage is selective; the gain is the richness deriving from a series of concentrated focal points. In each case, he examines the conflict, the parties contending, and the stakes. He does not hesitate to declare justices and injustices, to name winners and losers, and he does so from a consistently democratic perspective. Foner thus achieves inclusion without the dilution conse- quent with the faux openness characteristic of talk radio and without the postmod- ern hesitations that undermine moral judgment.46 The American West: A New Interpretive History (2000) by Robert V. Hine and John Mack Faragher spans the whole of American history, from "the European invasion" until the present.47 The book is written in the spirit of Frederick Jackson Turner. Instead of lamenting the ambiguity of Turner's conception of the frontier, which after Turner got reduced by rigorous historians to a place, the West, Hine and Faragher embrace its fullness. For them, the frontier is both a place and a nrocess. and thev recognize that it is not onlv imnossible but limiting to senarate [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 43 James Oakes, "Radical Liberals, Liberal Radicals: The Dissenting Tradition in American Political Culture," Reviews in American History 27 (1999): 503-11. 44 For just such a contemporary theorization of liberalism, see Ira Katznelson, Liberalism's Crooked Circle: Letters to Adam Michnik (Princeton, N.J., 1996). Interestingly, this work also comes from a Columbia scholar, however much it is openly acknowledged to have derived largely from his experience at the New School for Social Research. Perhaps the relevant context for this liberalism is the city of New York, with its cosmopolitan character and free-for-all quality of political contestation. For a brief statement of Hofstadter's relation to liberalism, see Thomas Bender, "Richard Hofstadter," in American National Biography, John A. Garraty and Mark C. Carnes, gen. eds. (New York, 1999), 11: 1-4. 45 Eric Foner, The Story of American Freedom (New York, 1998), xvii. 46 In Eric Foner, Reconstruction: America's Unfinished Revolution, 1863-1877 (New York, 1988), where chronological compression allows for a richer analysis, one can see more fully the method and its achievements. 47 Robert V. Hine and John Mack Faragher, The American West: A New Interpretive History (New Haven, Conn., 2000), 9. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 143 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] and sharply distinguish between the two aspects of the concept. That openness allows them to tell the history of the United States as a story of successive frontiers, including a fascinating rethinking of American regionalism as urban-centered at the end of the twentieth century.48 In fact, the chapter on the postwar era is a tour de force-imaginative, original, and quite compelling. In Turnerian fashion, they argue that "westering defined America's unique heritage."49 To a very impressive degree, they give substance to this claim, but recent historiography makes that claim, even for western history, problematic. As Hine and Faragher show, in the nineteenth century as well as today, the West (and the United States) was formed by migrations from west to east and south to north, and even in a limited way north to south, as well as east to west. The notion of westering is so strong in American and European history and culture, it is difficult to construct an alternative narrative structure, though no less important for the difficulty.50 This worry does not, however, undercut another summary point they make: the "frontier is our common past."51 The book is grounded in social history. Of all the books under consideration here, The American West is probably the most sensitive to the categories of experience and groups previously excluded from mainstream narratives of Ameri- can history. Their work goes well beyond mere representation of such groups and categories; previously invisible groups, whether Native Americans, migrating women, African-American settlers, working people, or the people of the border- lands, are actors who contributed to the shaping of history. But there are limits to this achievement. While there are multiple positions and voices represented in their narrative, only rarely does their narrative bring the reader inside group life. There is not much inquiry into the interior experience and subjective meanings shared by the various groups identified and recognized.52 While the story could have been situated in a wider context, one that revealed the global reach of the empires or, later, the importance of global markets, in its particular geographical focus the book consistently avoids privileging the English line of settlement. Other settler efforts are considered and sometimes compared. As is often the case with synthetic histories, however, there is a tendency to do the work of inclusion at a particular moment, and then lose the group at issue. For example, there is a good discussion of the origins of racial slavery, but the later [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 48 On the potential of the urban region model for historical analysis, see Jane Jacobs, Cities and the Wealth of Nations: Principles of Economic Life (New York, 1984). For an extremely stimulating extension of Turner's frontier to transnational dimensions, see Paul Sabin, "Home and Abroad: The Two 'Wests' of Twentieth-Century United States History," Pacific Historical Review 66, no. 3 (1997): 305-36. 49 Hine and Faragher, Amertican West, 531. 50 Loren Baritz, "The Idea of the West," AHR 66 (April 1961): 618-40. For three forays into alternative narrative strategies on this point, see Thomas Bender, "The Geography of Historical Memory and the Making of Public Culture," in Anna Maria Martellone, ed., Towards a New American Nation? Redefinitions and Reconstruction (Staffordshire, 1995), 174-87; Ian Tyrrell, "Beyond the View from Euro-America: Environment, Settler Societies, and Internationalization of American History," in Bender, Rethinking American History in a Global Age; Dirk Hoerder, "From the Euro- and Afro- Atlantic to the Pacific Migration System in North American History," in Bender. 51 Hine and Faragher, American West, 560. 52 In fact, they concentrate this kind of analysis in one chapter, a fascinating one in "A Search for Community," but it is limited in its cases, and it segregates such analysis from the greater part of the narrative. Hine and Faragher, American West, chap. 12. AMERICAN HISTORIcAL REvIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 144 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] extension of the plantation system and internal slave market that was a part of the frontier movement is not adequately recognized. At times, the transnational themes they develop are extremely illuminating. They refer to what would later be characterized by theorists of the global cities as a "dual economy" in describing the role of foreign migrants, especially Chinese, in the nineteenth-century California agricultural economy.53 Likewise the interplay of national and international in their discussion of the Zimmerman telegram inviting Mexico to ally with Germany in World War I and in their discussion of San Francisco's "commercial hinterland."54 But, as in the case of Butler's book, there is a bit of parochialism in making claims of distinction. Perhaps such assertions can be demonstrated, but more rigorous definitions and empirical research than we have here are required to establish, for example, that the United States is today the world's most multicultural society.55 How would it compare with Indonesia, the world's fourth most populous nation, whose citizens speak more than 100 languages and live on almost numberless islands? The social-history approach, whatever its success in representing difference, has in this instance under-represented national political institutions and policies. The development of the West, as Richard White and other historians of the West have pointed out, was profoundly indebted to what western Republicans now call "big government," for water, transportation, Indian removal, and, more recently, direct investment, as in defense contracts and installations and aerospace industries.56 The political economy and the role of markets, as has already been suggested, do not get the attention they deserve. We often overlook how much industry was in the West, and how much western industries-from milling and meatpacking to mining-were integral to the industrial system of the United States. And we forget how much the astonishing productivity of western agriculture enabled the formation of a large urban industrial labor supply. More of these dimensions of western history might have been included if only in the interest in enabling the story better to tell the national experience. If Hine and Faragher encompass both the full geographical and temporal dimensions of western history, Linda Gordon's microhistory builds out from a very delimited western space, the Sonoran highlands of Arizona, to develop a highly innovative narrative synthesis that locates itself at the various and causally interrelated scales of town, region, nation, and the transnational. Her work reminds us that there is a difference between a mere local study and a microhistory. The local histories of villages, towns, and cities, so common in the 1970s, tended to use global concepts but within artificially bounded fields of inquiry. One of the most famous of them all, Kenneth Lockridge's study of Dedham, Massachusetts, offered an isolated inwardness as a principal finding, although it was a finding that derived [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 53Hine and Faragher, American West, 358-60. 54 Hine and Faragher, American West, 395-97, 414. This story could be greatly expanded. San Francisco was closer to Asia than to Europe, a simple geographical point that usually eludes us. For an outstanding study of this relationship, see Ian Tyrrell, True Gardens of the Gods: Californian-Australian Environmental Reform, 1860-1930 (Berkeley, Calif., 1999). 55 Hine and Faragher, American West, 514. 56 Richard White, "It's Your Misfortune and None of My Own": A History of the American West (Norman, Okla., 1991). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 145 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] mainly from a methodology not only local but firmly bounded.57 By contrast, Gordon's The Great Arizona Orphan Abduction exemplifies a microhistory that enables the historian to synthesize the threads of local life, many of which are translocal in origin and implication.58 Unlike Hine and Faragher, she gets inside the subjective experience of local life, even the experience of very ordinary people, without getting trapped inside that world and without implying that the larger world of the region, the nation, and even transnational economic and religious institutions were beyond the ken of her study of a seemingly local conflict. Mostly, her account is the story of the arrival and fate of Catholic orphans from New York who were to be placed in Catholic homes. The homes were Mexican as well as Catholic, and that was the problem and the focus of conflict. The conflict played out along class, ethnic, religious, and gender lines, and it eventually reached the Supreme Court. It is a compelling and very human narrative, but one that also addresses a whole range of analytical and interpretive issues of broader interest to historians. Bringing the issues of gender, class, and race into relation with each other allows for an appraisal of their relative importance in this particular historical explanation. I think that her story reveals class to be more important than her conclusion argues, but the real point to be made is that only a narrative synthesis that brings diverse threads together will enable the historian and the reader to make this kind of judgment. These complex ends are achieved in part by her adoption of an imaginative literary strategy. Gordon's book is constructed of two types of chapters. One is quite often a broad frame for local events. In these chapters, her perspective as narrator is exterior to the action. The issues addressed are frequently structural and, as often as not, extend beyond the community. Here, one gets an analytical explanation of the relation of local experience to larger national and international cultural, political, and economic developments. Between these chapters, she has crafted others that get inside the culture of the community, providing wonderfully rich, thick descriptions of daily life and the development of the conflict. With oral histories as well as fragmentary documentary evidence, she brings the reader very close to the experience and voices of the community. The play between these accounts and the more conventional chapters produces an unusual but powerful synthesis. Whether a microhistory qualifies as a synthesis, even by my generous definition, may be debated. But the singular relevance of this book for the discussion of synthesis concerns not scale but its literary ambition, the literary experiment that gives structure to the book. Those who would write other syntheses-at various scales-will, I hope, be encouraged, even inspired, to experiment with novel narrative strategies in the interest of more powerful representations of the past. Quintard Taylor presents a third version of western history, In Search of the Racial Frontier: African Americans in the American West, 1528-1990 (1998). He offers a broad synthetic account that characterizes the experiences of African Americans over a very long period of time. While the book does not ignore the [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 57Kenneth A. Lockridge, A New England Town: The First Hundred Years; Dedham, Massachusetts, 1636-1736 (New York, 1970). 58 Linda Gordon, The Great Arizona Orphan Abduction (Cambridge, Mass., 1999). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRuARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 146 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] relations among different groups in the West, particularly and inevitably between blacks and whites, but also between blacks and Native American, the contribution of the book is otherwise.59 He is mapping and making visible as a whole a history that has been largely unknown or studied in very specific instances and places. Drawing on a substantial body of scholarship, most of it published in the past quarter century, he aims to "reconstruct the history of African American women and men" in the West over five centuries, although mostly his focus is the nineteenth and twentieth centuries. Taylor's central themes are the quest for community by blacks and the relative degrees of freedom and opportunity they find in different times and places. The conjuncture of the map of African-American presence and the conventional history of the West that his story brings out compels rethinking of both African-American and western history. He makes the point, for example, that the issue of Texas independence in 1836 was not simply, as myth, even the more recent multicultural version, would have it: Anglos and Tejanos in Texas confronting a despotic government in Mexico. It was also an Anglo effort to preserve slavery.60 More broadly, the map literally reveals that African Americans in the West were overwhelmingly city and town dwellers, and it is that fact that unifies their experience. The kind of synthetic narrative that he has constructed provides an invaluable service at a particular moment, crystallizing a generation of scholarship, making generalization possible. His work not only informs the public of the dimensions of previously unrecognized histories, it also provides a base for the next generation of scholarship. In a similar way, another recent synthesis, one that focuses on a more narrowly defined but also more developed area of scholarship, reveals the harvest of recent scholarship on work and workers. American Work: Four Centuries of Black and Vhite Labor (1998) by Jacqueline Jones at once brings this rich scholarship to a wider audience and proffers a fresh way of framing the field.61 If The American West, In Search of the Racial Frontier, and American Work cover very long chronological spans, books by David M. Kennedy and Fred Anderson address short periods. Their focus is also quite different, since both concentrate on political and military history. Kennedy's Freedom from Fear: The American People in Depression and War, 1929-1945 (1999) addresses what might well be called "high politics," while Anderson's The Crucible of War: The Seven Years' War and the Fate of Empire in British North America, 1754-1766 (2000) brings social history and high politics into fruitful play, finding in that interaction the terms of his central argument about the nature of power in the British Empire. At the outset, both books locate their stories in a broad international context. Kennedy's book begins at the close of World War I, and the first character introduced is Lance Corporal Adolf Hitler, who was in a military hospital recovering from a poison gas attack when he heard the news of Germany's surrender. The international context thus suggested is obviously central to the half [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 59He explicitly recognizes the issue of intergroup relations, but he equally explicitly indicates that such is not his aim here. See Quintard Taylor, In Search of the Racial Frontier: African Americans in the American West, 1528-1990 (New York, 1998), 18-19. 60 Taylor, In Search of the Racial Frontier, 39. 61 Jacqueline Jones, American Work: Four Centuries of Black and White Labor (New York, 1998). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 147 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] of the book devoted to World War II, but it is not nearly so much developed as it might be. The geography of Washington, D.C., even that of the White House, and the biographies of three men-Franklin D. Roosevelt, Winston Churchill, and Hitler-are more important to Kennedy's story than the world beyond the borders of the United States or, for that matter, than the American people of his subtitle. One of Kennedy's aims is evidently to urge upon Americans a greater attention to and sense of responsibility in the larger world, yet with the exception of the excellent discussion of the differing explanations of the economic crisis offered by Herbert Hoover and Roosevelt, there is surprisingly little incorporation of inter- national elements into the dynamic of the story. For all the importance of the larger world, for Kennedy, as for many Americans, whether professional historians or not, the international is a sort of "other," something "over there," if I may reverse the title of one of Kennedy's earlier books.62 Kennedy- also pays little attention to social history, not even to social histories that have sought to better explain the politics of the interwar years.63 Nor does the book address intellectual history, the history of science and technology (except briefly in connection with war production), the states, education, urban history, and much more. In fact, the book would have been more accurately described by the title of William E. Leuchtenburg's classic, F.D.R. and the New Deal, 1932-1940, which is here superseded and extended into the war years.64 So titled, adding the war to the New Deal, one could have no objection to this extraordinarily well-written, deeply researched, and compellingly argued book. But is it a history of "the American people"? Freedom from Fear is a masterful narrative on the terms it has assumed for itself. Yet having said that, historiographical questions remain. Kennedy apparently assumes that three voices are the important ones; not many other voices are heard, even though each of a small clutch of additional figures is presented very effectively as a full human being: Lorena Hickok, Eleanor Roosevelt, Harry Hopkins, Raymond Moley, Herbert Hoover, John L. Lewis, and A. Philip Randolph, among a few others. History for Kennedy, unlike for the other authors of these syntheses, is made by select leaders, not by ordinary people. What is remarkable, therefore, is the illusion of synthesis that is achieved. The book was published in a series that promises narrative syntheses of the defining periods of American national history. Most so far published accept traditional definitions of periods, and they are framed as political history, but none is so severely restricted as this one, which won the Pulitzer Prize in part because it was recognized as a work of grand synthesis. Dramatic changes in the historiography of the American field make it seem anachronistic. Yet its success makes the point that political history in the grand [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 62 David M. Kennedy, Over Here: The First World War and American Society (New York, 1980). The point Kennedy makes about Americans could be turned against his own book, which assumes the same divide he finds among Americans generally. He complains in the text that Americans held tight to "the dangerous illusion that they could choose whether and when [I would add how] to participate in the world." David M. Kennedy, Freedom from Fear: The American People in Depression and War, 1929-1945 (New York, 1999), 386. 63 The only exception I spotted in the footnotes is Lizabeth Cohen, Making a New Deal: Industrial Workers in Chicago, 1919-1939 (New York, 1990). 64 William E. Leuchtenburg, F.D.R. and the New Deal: 1932-1940 (New York, 1963). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 148 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] style, focusing on a few elite figures, can still claim, at least for the general public, to be a narrative history of a people. Fred Anderson's Crucible of War again engages us with the question of elites and ordinary people, and it provides -a promising approach. While Kennedy seems quite confident of the importance of a few leaders, Anderson seems to be ambivalent, and that ambivalence enriches his history. Although I think the principal contribution of Crucible of War to our understanding of the British Empire is grounded in the social history of the political and military experience of ordinary Americans, the dramatic focus, as with Francis Parkman's great nineteenth-century narrative, is on two great leaders of the French and Indian War, the marquis de Montcalm and James Wolfe.65 Yet, as Alan Taylor has insightfully insisted, Anderson has rewritten the story of their confrontation in a way that diminishes these actors, especially Wolfe.66 To be sure, Anderson's book goes beyond Parkman in its respect for Native Americans, their agency, and their role in the empire (and the role of the empire and war for them). He also modifies Parkman on a point that is central to the book's contribution to imperial history: unlike Parkman, Anderson not only notices but makes much of the division between English colonials and English metropolitans. These differences in expectation and experience make the war in his view a "theatre of intercultural interaction."67 Like Butler, Anderson seeks to diminish the role of 1776 in understanding the development of what became the United States. Historians, he argues, will better understand the creation of the United States by closely examining the Seven Years' War and, more generally, by challenging the usual tendency to "take as our point of reference the thirteen rebelling colonies, not the empire as a whole."68 Yet, even as he argues the importance of getting behind the Revolution of 1776 so that one can discover the eighteenth century as it was experienced, the revolution remains a touchstone for him. More than anything else, he wants the reader to recognize that the shots fired in the Seven Years' War were the ones with implications around the world. But he keeps de-historicizing his story to use it to diminish the shot of lesser implication (in his view) heard 'round the world in 1775. When one begins the book, there is a sense of excitement. Here is a history of the United States ready to take the globe as its context. Before the narrative even begins, the reader is presented with a portfolio of maps. Only two of eight describe the British colonies; no more than four of them consider North America at all. The portfolio begins with a world map, revealing the global distribution of the battles that marked the Seven Years' War. There are also maps of the Indian subcontinent, Central Europe, and the Caribbean. The introduction promises a book that will make the world, or at least the full extent of the British Empire, its context and subject. We are told that "if viewed from Montreal or Vincennes, St. Augustine, Havana, Paris or Madrid-or, for that matter Calcutta or Berlin-the Seven Years' War was far more significant than the War of American Independence."69 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 65 Francis Parkman, Montcalm and Wolfe, 6th edn., 2 vols. (Boston, 1885). 66 See Alan Taylor, "The Forgotten War," New Republic (August 14, 2000): 40-45. 67 Fred Anderson, The Crucible of War: The Seven Years' War and the Fate of Empire in British North America, 1754-1766 (New York, 2000), xvi. 68 Anderson, Crucible of War, xv. 69 Anderson, Crucible of War, xvi. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 149 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Yet once the narrative is begun, it immediately narrows. We get very little of Asia (although Manila makes a brief but important comparative appearance), the Caribbean, Africa, and continental Europe. Of course, other European powers are part of the narrative, but they only have walk-on roles. We learn little of them at home or about the ways leaders or ordinary citizens interpret events, while we are, by contrast, led through elaborate accounts of high British politics. The preface, presumably written last, sketches an extraordinary agenda for what would be a stunning book. Unfortunately, Anderson did not write the book he there described. Still, judged in terms of what it did rather than what it proposed to do, it is an outstanding work of craft. It will no doubt be our generation's account of the Seven Years' War. As military history, it is superb, and it contributes importantly-but not so grandly as some of the opening rhetoric promises-to the non-controversial but still unclear issue of the causal relations that connect the Seven Years' War to the coming of the revolution. Anderson in fact offers a rich Anglo-centric narrative that explores and explains the different meaning of the war both as strategic event and as experience for the British of the metropole and in the colonies. It is written with verve and confidence-and a seemingly complete command of the materials, primary and secondary. One of its themes is the misperception of events by political elites; with the exception of William Pitt, surely Anderson's hero in this story, they fail to understand the different meaning of the war and empire for ordinary soldiers and colonial subjects. He thus makes cultural issues the heart of the book. Military and political elites play a dramatic role in the narrative, but causation for Anderson- and here he points to important newer developments in military and diplomatic history-is to be found in the culture of everyday life.70 In making this point, he not only offers an important interpretation of the war (building in part on his previous book on Massachusetts soldiers), he also reveals the empire to be less solid, more a matter of continuous negotiation, than historians often consider such entities, whether empires or nations or states.71 MORE EFFECTIVELY THAN ANDERSON, Ira Berlin, referring to the earliest history of Afro-European North America, and Daniel T. Rodgers, addressing the early twentieth century, incorporate the Atlantic, or at least the North Atlantic, into their narratives of American history. Berlin and Rodgers write very different kinds of history and focus on different periods. Berlin's is a social history, while Rodgers has written an intellectual history, or, perhaps, a history of political culture. Yet both Berlin and Rodgers recognize the complex webs that route movements-of people, of ideas, of money, of things-in the Atlantic world. The transnational terrains that Berlin and Rodgers evoke establish larger and truer frames for national histories than do notions of bounded and self-contained regions or nations. The first section of Berlin's Many Thousands Gone, a portrait of the Atlantic littoral, describes a world framed by cities and the sea, little divided by national [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 70 Anderson, Crucible of War, 453-54. 71 See Fred Anderson, A Peoples' Army: Massachusetts Soldiers and Society in the Seven Years' War (Chapel Hill, N.C., 1984). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 150 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] boundaries, which did not yet organize any of the four Atlantic continents. Berlin's opening tableau describes the emergence of the Atlantic world as an ever- expanding historical terrain, where the African presence is pervasive on the sea and in the cities, including Lisbon, where they made up 10 percent of the population in the sixteenth century. He evokes a world defined by a network of cosmopolitan cities populated by creolized peoples. African people were not only omnipresent, they were often crucial cultural and economic brokers, helping to knit this new world together. Berlin lets go of this powerful frame and image in his later chapters, where he narrows the focus to regional difference within the bounds of British North America. Still, the book's protean beginning remains in the reader's mind, inviting others to realize its narrative logic and moral meaning.72 In Atlantic Crossings: Social Politics in a Progressive Age (1998), Daniel T. Rodgers also achieves a richer historicism by expanding the space of analysis. One small indication is in the subtitle. He refers to "social politics," not the more usual "welfare state." His approach, examining relations in space as well as over time as fields of contingency, makes the welfare state a problematic common term. When he uses the more general and more mobile term "social politics," he effectively historicizes the concept, lineage, and practice of the welfare state. The development of a social politics has other possible paths and outcomes besides evolution into the national welfare state.73 The national welfare state thus becomes a historically and place-specific invention rather than a universal or, worse, the teleological endpoint of American liberal narratives-an endpoint surely upended by the politics of the last quarter of the twentieth century. Following the pioneering work of James T. Kloppenberg, who also assumed a Euro-American context for progressivism and social democracy, Rodgers ap- proaches this age of reform as at once a transnational and national issue.74 A variety of reforms-from urban planning to social insurance to regulation of capitalism- are examined as products both of general, transnational ideas and of particular, national political cultures. The complex narratives thus developed by Rodgers and Kloppenberg-ones that recognize, especially in the case of Rodgers, the historicity of the balance between national and transnational-are a major advance in the narrative synthesis of a national history. Both Rodgers and Kloppenberg impress on the reader that ideas could cross the Atlantic in either direction. This is salutary; American intellectual history is too often thought by Europeans and Americans as well to be either insignificant or derivative, not quite up to equal participation in an international world of ideas. This common point is handled differently in each book. While Kloppenberg notes [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 72 One hopes this extension of the historiographical terrain will continue and that connections as well as comparisons will be made between the North Atlantic and the South Atlantic and between the Atlantic slave trade and the slave trade that turned to the east, to the Muslim empires of the Mediterranean and today's Middle East. Big as it is, the Atlantic does not capture the logic and dimensions of slavery in this era. 73 See, for example, the argument (somewhat dependent on Rodgers's work) in Thomas Bender, "Cities, Intellectuals, and Citizenship in the United States: The 1890s and 1990s," Citizenship Studies 3 (1999): 203-20. 74 Daniel T. Rodgers, Atlantic Crossings: Social Politics in a Progressive Age (Cambridge, Mass., 1998); James T. Kloppenberg, Uncertain Victory: Social Democracy and Progressivism in European and American Thought, 1870-1920 (New York, 1986). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 151 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] direct interaction, he seems more interested in demonstrating a homological relation or a kind of convergence. Rodgers, by contrast, focuses on the specific transit of ideas and emphasizes the way intellectuals and reformers on either side of the Atlantic drew selectively on these ideas, depending on personal taste and local circumstance. The result is a fundamental and valuable reorientation of the way we might understand intellectual history. The conceptual opening they have created invites a yet more radical under- standing of the territory and movement of ideas. Let me go back to the title of Rodgers's book. I think that "Atlantic Crossings" projects too narrow an under- standing of the implications of the book. It emphasizes the movement of people and ideas back and forth across the Atlantic. To that extent, it recalls a much older Anglo-American historiography of "trans-Atlantic influences."75 Rodgers goes well beyond this historiography in showing that, in important respects, Europe was partly Americanized and the United States was partly Europeanized by the phenomena he describes. But his really important accomplishment is to get away from the "influence" model, to displace the linear A to B notion of intellectual history. But he could have gone farther yet. There is more to the circulation of ideas than this framing recognizes. It is more than an Atlantic crossing, more than a link between Western Europe and the United States. The whole Atlantic, South Atlantic as well as North Atlantic, and, indeed, increasingly, parts of the Pacific world better describe the extent of the intellectual network his book evokes. In regard to urban development and reform, an important theme in Rodgers's book, it is clear that there is a global conversation at work. Rather than the linearity of steamship crossings (the dustjacket illustration) between the port cities of Western Europe and New York, I imagine a Great Bazaar of urban ideas, technology, and aesthetics hovering over the Atlantic, with many traders and buyers. This exchange is not, of course, symmetrical, and that itself is an issue, but participation was nearly global in 1900. Progressive ideas, especially those dealing with urban reform and technologies, traveled through many circuits and with different voltage, but nearly the whole world was connected, not only Western Europe and the United States. Simply look at the cities of Eastern Europe, Latin America, parts of Africa, Central and East Asia. Surely, they were part of an international conception of urbanism-and of urban commercial culture. The remnants of the era make it clear that New York and Chicago, no less than Lyons, Cairo, Buenos Aires, or Shanghai, were local instances of a global process of city-making. THESE LAST COMMENTS SUGGEST what I take to be the next challenge of narrative synthesis. But before I conclude, let me briefly review what has been accomplished by the cohort of synthetic histories considered here. These books reveal, even verify, the capacity of narrative synthesis to achieve inclusion and to respect issues of identity. Moreover, it seems possible in synthetic narratives to combine structure [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 75 See Frank Thistlethwaite, The Anglo-American Connection in the Early Nineteenth Century (Philadelphia, 1959). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 152 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] and agency and to consider causal explanation without sacrificing the explication of subjective meaning-and vice versa. The volumes here examined reveal many narrative strategies and quite different relations to a wider reading public. There is no single model, and no one volume (yet) does all the things we might fairly expect in a realized synthesis. In addition, these books, both in what they do and do not do, suggest to me the value of embracing a narrative core that is a more explicit and deeper exploration of democracy and difference, freedom and empowerment, contest and justice. Such a focus promises a sharper analytical history, one more historical and less susceptible to teleology, whether of modernity or anything else. It seems plausible to propose that a wider canvas, a supranational context, may in fact enhance the examination of these issues. The work of Hine and Faragher, Berlin, Gordon, and Rodgers in particular enables one to imagine an even more radical synthesis of national history, one that operates on multiple geographical scales, from narratives smaller than the nation to supra-national ones-thus identifying the nation as a product of history as well as an object of historical inquiry. Such a framing of national history will increase awareness of the complexity of the multiple axes of historical interaction, causation, and identity formation. While I mean these concluding comments to suggest an ambitious new agenda for the discipline, we must not overlook an already existing and compelling example. Decades ago, David Brion Davis embarked on a multivolume history that considered all these issues. He brought them together in his majestic synthesis that explores slavery and freedom in the Atlantic world, a history of nearly global reach that is also-and I emphasize this fact-a history of the United States.76 My point, then, is that such histories can be written, have been written, and I trust that more will yet be written. The present moment seems especially propitious for such histories. The relation of the nation to both subnational and transnational solidarities is very much in question. It is a public concern as well as an object of interdisciplinary scholarly inquiry. Historians surely have an open invitation to rethink the boundaries of national histories.77 Colonial historians have been moving in this direction for some time, redefining their field as the Atlantic world long before the globalization talk. Likewise, Rodgers and Ian Tyrrell, both of whom work on the modern period, moved in this direction fairly early and for a different reason: their concern about the claims of American exceptionalism.78 With these various concerns at work, we may fairly expect a movement of American historians and other historians as well toward a wider sense of their fields. National histories will not be so firmly bounded, and the assumption of their national autarky will be softened by the recognition that national histories are [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 76 David Brion Davis, The Problem of Slavery in Western Culture (Ithaca, N.Y., 1966); The Problem of Slavery in the Age of Revolution, 1770-1823 (Ithaca, 1975), with the final installment yet to come. 77 See Bender, Rethinking American History in a Global Age; and Thomas Bender, The La Pietra Report (Bloomington, Ind., 2000), also available on the World Wide Web at www.oah.org/activities/ lapietra/index.html. 78 Ian Tyrrell, "American Exceptionalism in an Age of International History," AHR 96 (October 1991): 1031-55; Daniel T. Rodgers, "Exceptionalism," in Anthony Molho and Gordon S. Wood, eds., Imagined Histories: American Historians Interpret the Past (Princeton, N.J., 1998), 21-40. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 153 embedded in yet larger histories. And all of this will demand yet more ambitious strategies of narrative synthesis. Thomas Bender is University Professor of the Humanities and Professor of History at New York University. His scholarship has been in the broad domain of cultural history, particularly studies of cities, intellectuals, and, most recently, the history of scholarly disciplines. His books on these themes include Toward an Urban Vision (1975), New York Intellect (1987), and Intellect and Public Life (1993), as well as The Unfinished City: New York and the Metropol- itan Idea (forthcoming). He has a longstanding interest in the larger framings of American history that dates from his Community and Social Change in America (1978) and continued in his article "Wholes and Parts: The Need for Synthesis in American History," Journal of American History (1986), which provides the starting point for this essay. His thinking on this topic also derives in part from his work on the OAH-NYU project that resulted in the La Pietra Report (2000), which he authored, and Rethinking American History in a Global Age (2002), which he edited. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/532101
Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: American Historical Association
Issue: 587015
Date: April 2003
Author(s): Elbourne Elizabeth
Abstract: [[START 03X0760F]] Review Essays Word Made Flesh: Christianity, Modernity, and Cultural Colonialism in the Work of Jean and John Comaroff ELIZABETH ELBOURNE "IN THE BEGINNING WAS THE WORD, and the word was made flesh and dwelt among us," as the first chapter of the Book of John proclaims in a text often read at Christian Easter celebrations. The text might be taken as a something of a leitmotif of the first two volumes (of a projected three) of Jean and John Comaroff's brilliant and rightly influential series, Of Revelation and Revolution.1 The first two volumes, Christianity, Colonialism, and Consciousness in South Africa and The Dialectics of Modernity on a South African Frontier, explore the nineteenth-century encounter between British Protestant Nonconformist missionaries and the southern Tswana in a region that is now in the northern part of the Republic of South Africa. The Comaroffs attempt, however, to do far more than merely describe a series of relatively small-scale historical events. They are interested in missionaries above all because of their complex relationship to "modernity," which the Comaroffs see in turn as tightly linked to a particular phase of European colonialism. The title of the second volume, "The Dialectics of Modernity," suggests as much. Most European missionaries tried hard to function as agents of cultural change-of "civilization" in early nineteenth-century missionaries' own terms, implicitly casting the Tswana as "savage" and thereby laying out one of the key dialectical oppositions of colonial- ism, which would function as a justification for dispossession. Some Tswana interlocutors adapted some elements of "Christian behavior," the Comaroffs argue, but many others demonstrated resistance to the hegemony of British colonialism in part by resisting the colonization of their everyday lives. The nineteenth-century Protestant project to remake the world, of which the Nonconformist missionaries of southern Africa were important proponents, is thus linked by the Comaroffs forward to colonialism and to contemporary globalization, and backward in time to Part of this article was presented in a much earlier version at the Twentieth Anniversary Conference of the Journal of Southern African Studies, York, 1994; I would like to thank the participants as well as those who subsequently commented helpfully, including David Maxwell, Norman Etherington, Ed Wilmsen, and Paul Landau. For reading the current essay, my particular thanks to Catherine Desbarats, Eric Jabbari, James Ron, and Michael Wasser, as well as to Tim Rowse, Desley Deacon, Ann Curthoys, and John Docker for helpful suggestions. I am of course solely responsible for the content. The research for this essay was supported by the Social Sciences and Humanities Research Council of Canada. 1 Jean Comaroff and John L. Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, Vol. 1: Christianity, Colonialism, and Consciousness in South Africa (Chicago, 1991), and Vol. 2: The Dialectics of Modernity on a South African Frontier (Chicago, 1997). 435 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne the emergence of capitalism. Missionaries were, in effect, agents of a first wave of globalization. The missionary movement was an early exemplar of a transnational global movement, while the intellectual claims of missionaries to universality paralleled the modernist claims of a globalizing colonialism. The struggles over the texture and composition of everyday life that took place on the frontiers of colonial society in nineteenth-century southern Africa therefore tell us something not only about the nature of colonialism but also about modernity and its considerable discontents, as well as about the resistance of the colonized to the European colonial project. In this sense, a quest for origins informs the narrative structure of both books.2 Indeed, one of the reasons that this seminal text engages us so closely is its concern with the narrative of dispossession and resistance, with a beginning and therefore, implicitly, some hope for an end-an only ambivalently postmodern narrative, in fact, despite some alarm in southern Africanist circles over Of Revelation and Revolution as a postmodern nail in the coffin of materialist history.3 This focus lends moral urgency to the Comaroffs' consideration of the distant initial encounters between white missionaries and the southern Tswana in the early nineteenth century. Volume 2, for example, opens with a striking vignette: Tswana soldiers refuse to defend the white regime in 1994, as Afrikaner patriots launch a last-ditch raid on Bophuthatswana. As homeland structures crumble around them as they write, the Comaroffs acknowledge that endings and beginnings are never entirely neat. "And yet in many respects, the narrative of Tswana colonization had completed itself, finally running its course from Revelation to Revolution."4 Doubtless the authors would now adopt a less utopian position, but their enthusiasm for revolution and for endings is important, and typical of South African historical writing from the decades before the end of apartheid.5 2 Catherine Desbarats, "Essais sur quelques elements de l'6criture de l'histoire am6rindienne," Revue d'histoire de l'Ameriquefranqaise 53, no. 4 (Spring 2000): 491-520, provides an interesting model, inspired among others by Paul Ricoeur, Hayden White, and Kerwin Lee Klein, for the reading of various historical approaches to the colonial encounter as forms of narrative romance, given the inescapable narrativity of the historical text. Susan Newton-King, also drawing on Ricoeur, similarly reflects on the inescapable imposition of an artificial order on colonial encounters by the historian of colonialism. Newton-King, "Introduction," Masters and Servants on the Cape Eastern Frontier, 1760- 1803 (Cambridge, 1999). See also Kerwin Lee Klein, Frontiers of Historical Imagination: Narrating the European Conquest of Native America, 1890-1990 (Berkeley, Calif., 1997); Hayden White, The Content of the Form: Narrative Discourse and Historical Representation (Baltimore, 1987); Paul Ricoeur, Temps et recit, 3 vols. (Paris, 1985-87). 3 Meghan Vaughan, "Colonial Discourse Theory and African History, or Has Postmodernism Passed Us By?" Social Dynamics 20, no. 2 (Summer 1994): 1-23; David Bunn, "The Insistence of Theory: Three Questions for Meghan Vaughan," Social Dynamics 20, no. 2: 24-34; Clifton Crais, "South Africa and the Pitfalls of Postmodern," South African Historical Journal, no. 31 (1994): 274-79; Leon de Kock, "For and Against the Comaroffs: Postmodernist Puffery and Competing Conceptions of the 'Archive,'" South African Historical Journal, no. 31: 280-89. These authors take a variety of positions on the issues of whether or not the Comaroffs are postmodern and whether or not the rise of postmodernism in post-apartheid South African academic historical scholarship has been a positive development in a field that was previously (and in many ways still is) passionately materialist in approach. 4 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: xiii. 5 The original title of the series was reportedly From Revelation to Revolution, planned at a time before the release of Nelson Mandela. In a recent conversation with Homi Bhabha, however, John Comaroff is considerably less sanguine about the end of apartheid in South Africa and popular enthusiasm for Mandela outside South Africa, which he sees as a last gasp of modernist optimism in AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 436 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh In a similar vein, at the heart of Volume 1 is a crucial chapter, "Through the Looking Glass: Heroic Journeys, First Encounters." This chapter sets out to explore "the initial meeting of two worlds, one imperial and expansive, the other local and defensive."6 In marvelously evocative detail, the authors describe the initial entry of envoys of the London Missionary Society (LMS) in 1816 into the Tswana capital, Dithakong (seen by the missionaries themselves as a sacred journey into the land of Satan), a subsequent meeting, and the complex negotiations that took place throughout over the terms of the mission. A key metaphor is furnished by the mirror that the LMS envoy John Campbell presented as a gift to the Tswana chief, Mothibi, symbolizing the Western effort to reconfigure Tswana consciousness and the Tswana notion of the self. These initial encounters prefigured the colonial encounter to come: "the square enclosure and all that 'took place' at the center of the most public of Tswana spaces was ominous, foreshadowing a methodical reconstruction of their symbolic map."7 The Christian missionary project, this chapter further suggests, was from the start central to the creation of the dialectical oppositions of colonialism, ironic in view of its claim to erase difference. For the Comaroffs, the colonization of the Tswana thus began (although it certainly did not end) with the word, in the sense both of Bible and of cultural text, with the advent of white Protestant missionaries and their claims to possess the revealed divine word-albeit a word made flesh, clothed in material power. The roots of colonization were in a series of knowledge claims and a set of hegemonic cultural discourses, which would bolster the later seizure of land and of labor. Many scholars have explored the linkage between knowledge claims and colonial power, an issue that has long lain at the heart of postcolonial scholarship and that occupies an increasingly central place in the study of imperialism from a diversity of perspectives.8 Nonetheless, Of Revelation and Revolution furnishes a particularly influential and important statement of the position, in part because it provides a great deal of flesh on the bones of a theoretical model of cultural colonialism. The work moves from the field of discourse alone to examine in great detail concrete material struggles over the remaking of everyday life, including Tswana efforts to resist cultural colonialism. More controversially, perhaps, Of Revelation and Revolution also attempts to make explicit the links in southern Africa between a postcolonial setting. Homi Bhabha and John Comaroff, "Speaking of Postcoloniality, in the Continuous Present: A Conversation," in David Theo Goldberg and Ato Quayson, eds., Relocating Postcolonialism (Oxford, 2002). 6 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 171. 7 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 182. 8 Among many recent discussions of colonialism and European knowledge claims, see Ato Quayson and David Theo Goldberg, "Introduction: Scale and Sensibility," and Benita Parry, "Directions and Dead Ends in Postcolonial Studies," in Goldberg and Quayson, Relocating Postcolo- nialism, xi-xxii and 66-81; Michael Adas, "From Settler Colony to Global Hegemon: Integrating the Exceptionalist Narrative of the American Experience into World History," AHR 106 (December 2001): 1692-1720; various essays in Catherine Hall, ed., Cultures of Empire: Colonizers in Britain and the Empire in the Nineteenth and Twentieth Centuries (Manchester, 2000); Gyan Prakash, "Who's Afraid of Postcoloniality?" Social Text 49 (Winter 1996): 187-203; Prakash, "Subaltern Studies as Postcolonial Criticism," AHR 99 (December 1994): 1475-90. On the reconfiguration of African history, see Frederick Cooper, "Conflict and Connection: Rethinking Colonial African History," AHR 99: 1516-45. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 437 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne political, economic, and cultural colonialism-fields the authors argue are in any case impossible to disaggregate.9 The programmatic claims that lend Of Revelation and Revolution its force also, however, cause some interesting tensions in the book. The need to make linkages and the Comaroffs' explicit commitment to the exploration of large-scale processes lead the authors to oversimplify in places. Not only that, but the imperatives of a dialectical method push the Comaroffs at times (despite their parallel stress on indeterminacy and their very explicit engagement with the costs and benefits of a dialectical analysis, especially in Volume 2) into tighter methodological corners than they might themselves like. The links between early nineteenth-century cultural colonialism and late nineteenth-century political colonialism are not as direct or as ontologically indissoluble as the Comaroffs assume they are, while the relationship of "modernity" to colonialism furnishes matter for debate, with considerable contemporary implications. The very boldness of the Comaroffs' arguments has indeed contributed to a mixed reception among scholars of southern African history and of religion in Africa, with some enthusiastically welcoming the methodological innovation of the Comaroffs and others casting doubt in a number of ways. In the second volume of the series, the Comaroffs seem to me to have backed down somewhat from some of their bolder claims, despite their spirited engagement with the critics. This in itself provides an interesting case study of the evolution of ideas during a turbulent decade in South African history. In what follows, I would like to engage with this important work in several ways. First, I want to lay out my understanding of the theoretical guidelines in the opening volume, with particular attention to the issue of hegemony and power. Second, I want to provide an alternate reading of the opening encounters between Tswana and missionary, focusing on other intermediaries and on the fact that, even before the advent of European missionaries, the region was already affected by colonialism. I shall use this example to ask whether a dialectic model does not in some ways oversimplify complicated situations and make it hard to account for fudging across the fault lines. I shall further ask whether the result is not a rather muted account of individual agency and an attenuated depiction of the multiple uses of mission Christianity, both as language and as practice. This is not, however, to deny the latent authoritarian potential of much missionary activity, particularly in a colonial context. Third, I also want to gesture, albeit sketchily, toward some issues associated with narrative and chronology, suggesting that the schematic narrative about "modernity," industrialization, and globalization that undergirds both volumes, though provocative and important, also offers a number of hostages to fortune. These include an undue stress on the capacity of missionaries to induct converts into the global economy by changing their consciousness; rather, I see converts struggling to adapt to an overpowering global economy, among other things by trying to use Christianity in a variety of ways, with greater or lesser degrees of success. Having said all that, does this fact-mongering matter?-What are the Comaroffs doing that might go beyond reading the content of particular 9 Colonialism was simultaneously a "process in political economy and culture," and these dimensions were "indissoluble aspects of the same reality, whose fragmentation into discrete spheres hides their ontological unity." Comarofff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 19. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 438 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh archives? Throughout, I want to take up some concerns of African historians and anthropologists with questions of narrative, voice, and agency in Of Revelation and Revolution. THE INITIAL CHAPTER OF THE FIRST VOLUME is a careful theoretical exposition. Although the authors rather cheerfully direct those with little stomach for theoretical discussions to skip theirs and, en bon bricoleur, to pick up the narrative at a later point, the opening discussion of anthropological concepts is in fact crucial for an understanding of what both this book and its later companion seek to accomplish. I would accordingly like to pause upon it. The stated goal of the work is to present an anthropology of the "colonial encounter," in this case between British Nonconformist missionaries and the southern Tswana, with the larger implication that the missionaries acted as the cultural arm of colonialism, while the dilemmas of the Tswana in their confrontations with colonialism mirrored, if they obviously did not precisely reproduce, the experience of other colonized African groups in South Africa. The Comaroffs state that they hope that their discussion of this particular mission will accomplish three other things: to anticipate later modes of consciousness and struggle in South Africa; to look at an example of historical processes that were happening across Africa and indeed much of the non-Western world; and to examine analytic issues to do with the "nature of power and resistance." With reference to this latter objective: How, precisely, were structures of inequality fashioned during the colonial encounter, often in the absence of more conventional, more coercive tools of domination? How was consciousness made and remade in this process? ... How were new hegemonies established and the "ground prepared," in [Antonio] Gramsci's phrase, for formal European political control? ... Even more fundamentally, how are we to understand the dialectics of culture and power, ideology and consciousness that shape such historical processes?'1 From the vantage point of 1991, the Comaroffs placed their project into a historiographical framework that has since changed considerably, in no small part due to their own work."1 At the time, the Comaroffs castigated anthropologists for 10 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 6. 11 Among many possibilities, some works of particular importance to southern Africa include Paul Stuart Landau, The Realm of the Word: Language, Gender and Christianity in a Southern African Kingdom (London, 1995); Henry Bredekamp and Robert Ross, eds., Missions and Christianity in South African History (Johannesburg, 1995); Pier M. Larson, "'Capacities and Modes of Thinking': Intellectual Engagements and Subaltern Hegemony in the Early History of Malagasy Christianity," AHR 102 (October 1997): 969-1002; Richard Elphick and Rodney Davenport, eds., Christianity in South Africa: A Political, Social, and Cultural History (Berkeley, Calif., 1997); and many other works discussed in David Chidester, Judy Tobler, and Darrel Wratten, Christianity in South Africa: An Annotated Bibliography (Westport, Conn., 1997). The sheer diversity of recent approaches to the history of mission Christianity, a growth field, is impossible to capture in a footnote but is suggested by works such as David Maxwell and Ingrid Lawrie, eds., Christianity and the African Imagination: Essays in Honour of Adrian Hastings (Leiden, 2001); Nicholas Thomas, "Colonial Conversions: Difference, Hierarchy and History in Early Twentieth-Century Evangelical Propaganda," in Hall, Cultures of Empire; Susan Thorne, Congregational Missions and the Making of an Imperial Culture in Nineteenth- Century England (Stanford, Calif., 1999); Peter van der Veer, ed., Conversion to Moderities: The Globalization of Christianity (London, 1996); Robert W. Hefner, ed., Conversion to Christianity: Historical and Anthropological Perspectives on a Great Transformation (Berkeley, 1993); Lamin Sanneh, AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 439 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne neglecting both the study of colonialism and, more broadly, history itself. Historians paid more attention to missions but in the 1960s and 1970s often focused on the theoretically crude question of "whose side were the missionaries really on?" By the 1980s, mission history had been more fruitfully incorporated into work on such long-term processes as colonial conquest, capitalist expansion, state formation, and proletarianization. The methodological innovation of the Comaroffs in the early 1990s was, however, to underscore how much this new approach was itself limited by its "preoccupation with political economy at the expense of culture, symbolism, and ideology."12 They echoed the 1986 claim of Terence Ranger that most of the historiography of early missions to that point had overestimated the political and economic factors in its expansion-in a manner, according to the Comaroffs, stemming ultimately from oppositions between mind and matter at the ontological roots of our social thought.13 In rejecting a narrowly political-economic approach, the authors believed they could better answer the questions of why it was that missionaries succeeded in effecting broad social, political, and economic changes without substantial material resources (a question that, of course, assumes that this was accomplished by missionaries). What was needed, the Comaroffs claimed, was a study of consciousness: of why people articulated belief in certain things, why they took others for granted, how colonialism and consciousness were inextricably intertwined. It is in this sense that missionaries were most clearly colonial agents: they sought to remake the lifeworld of the Tswana, indeed, to colonize their consciousness. They did not necessarily seek directly and simplistically to incorpo- rate the Tswana into an unequal colonial world: they had dreamed instead of a "global democracy of material well-being and moral merit," in the Comaroffs' phrase.14 Nonetheless, their actions contributed to building an empire of inequality. This claim rests on the additional argument that the missionaries were the products of post-Enlightenment modernity, creations and agents of rationalization in the Weberian sense. Similarly, Tswana interlocutors made a variety of unexpected uses of the evangelical message, and of evangelical attempts to remake their world, again with unpredictable results. In sum, the encounter between colonial evangelism and the southern Tswana can best be described as a "long conversation," a continuing process in the course of which "signifiers were set afloat, fought over, and recaptured on both sides of the colonial encounter."15 Over the course of this conversation, the Tswana came to conceive of themselves as constituting a separate, Translating the Message: The Missionary Impact on Culture (Maryknoll, N.Y., 1989); and V. Y. Mudimbe, The Invention of Africa: Gnosis, Philosophy, and the Order of Knowledge (Bloomington, Ind., 1988). The Currents in World Christianity Project, at the University of Cambridge, has also since 1996 lent considerable impetus to the scholarly study of missions. A longstanding African literature reconsiders missions and the truth claims of missionaries, often from a theological perspective: for example, J. N. K. Mugambi, From Liberation to Reconstruction: African Christian Theology after the Cold War (Nairobi, 1996). Many works by African scholars are less well distributed in the West than they might be, given material constraints. From a wide variety of directions, missionary activity has become a newly invigorated area of research since the 1990s, although some of the more difficult underlying issues are perhaps not adequately discussed in all the literature. 12 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 8. 13 Terence Ranger, "Religious Movements and Politics in Sub-Saharan Africa," African Studies Review 29 (1986): 1-69. 14 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 12. 15 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 17-18. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 440 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh reified entity, with a set of "Tswana" customs, or setswana. At the same time, the "forms" of the "European worldview" became inscribed on the "African land- scape": "not only did colonialism produce reified cultural orders, it gave rise to a new hegemony amidst-and despite-cultural contestation."16 Throughout this discussion, the Comaroffs reject the poststructuralist claim that all meanings are equally tenuous and open to contestation, regretting the episte- mological hypochondria and consequent intellectual immobility to which postmod- ern critiques have given rise in academia-even as the authors uphold some of the central insights of such critiques, notably their insistence that the indeterminacies of meaning and action be addressed by scholars.17 What poststructuralists cannot address is the basic question of how some meanings get widely accepted over significant periods of time by those against whose interest it is to believe them. This is the problem of hegemony, raised by Gramsci (however sketchy his discussion in the Prison Notebooks) and developed by many social theorists.18 The Comaroffs offer a solution, though over-schematic in the literal sense of the word. They see human consciousness as existing on a spectrum from "hegemony" to "ideology." At the hegemony end of the spectrum, one finds the taken-for-granted inscribed in everyday life-those beliefs that are not questioned because they are not even noticed as beliefs. At the other end, one finds articulated ideology, which is available for debate and which often tries to bring into consciousness the hegemonic beliefs of earlier stages. Culture in general is the "space of signifying practice, the semantic ground on which human beings seek to construct and represent themselves and others-and hence, society and history."l9 Somewhat oddly, hegemonic concepts are described as "constructs and conventions that have come to be shared and naturalized through a political community," while ideology is "the expression and ultimately the possession of a particular social group, although it may be widely peddled beyond."20 This psychological structure seems artificial and unwieldy; it is unclear why the province of the hegemonic idea should be the political community (a tricky concept to define in any case), while ideology is described not only as the product of communities (rather than at least sometimes of individuals) but as the province of the social rather than, say, political or even self-consciously intellectual groupings. The definition of the political is murky here, as it is throughout the book, despite (even sometimes because of) the painstaking effort of the authors to demonstrate the deeply political nature of the everyday stuff of life; what is lacking here and elsewhere is a willingness to limit and define the nature of the political in such a manner as to make it meaningful to call something political in the first place. Be that as it may, this construction of group political psychology permits the Comaroffs to draw conclusions that are critically important for their overall project. Indeed, the reconstruction of struggles over the stuff of everyday life that takes pride of place in the second volume depends ultimately on this theoretical 16 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 18. 17 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 17. 18 Antonio Gramsci, Selections from the Prison Notebooks of Antonio Gramsci, Quentin Hoare and Geoffrey Nowell-Smith, trans. (New York, 1991). 19 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 21. 20 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 24, my emphases. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 441 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elboume structure. Given the place of hegemony and ideology on an ever-changing spectrum, the two are constantly fluid; meanings are always being made and remade, as ideology challenges hegemony to reveal itself, and it is in the inchoate, fluid space between hegemony and ideology that human consciousness is at its most creative. Given that hegemony is constructed largely through the "assertion of control over various modes of symbolic production: over such things as educational and ritual processes, patterns of socialization, political and legal procedures, canons of style and self-representation, public communication, health and bodily discipline and so on," the realm of "symbolic production" is (presumably) political because it is a site for power struggles. This means both that the "symbolic production" is political and that resistance to modes of symbolic production that generate hegemony is political. Modes of resistance run across as wide a spectrum as modes of control, with at one end organized protest and other movements readily recognized as political by the West; at the other end are "gestures of tacit refusal and iconoclasms, gestures that sullenly and silently contest the forms of an existing hegemony."21 It is thus in this light that missions must be seen. They sought to extend hegemonic control over indigenous peoples by changing their worldviews to a point that new ways of behaving and seeing the world were completely internalized. Resistance to the specific forms of Christianity was also resistance to the message behind the signs. In the purest sense, resistance to Christian forms was resistance to the content of capitalism and to the global capitalist system; this is indeed a critical plank of Jean Comaroff's fascinating (if not uncontroversial) reading of African independent churches as quintessentially subversive because they appropriated and yet subverted Christian forms, in her important 1985 study Body of Power, Spirit of Resistance.22 Christian missions must also be re-read. Their gestures and ritual must be analyzed in order to see how missionaries were attempting to change far more than religious allegiance, acting as emissaries of modernity and economic transfor- mation. Finally, conversion was inextricably political, and as such a suitable site for political competition between colonizers and the colonized. The extremely rich remainder of this book and its successor volume work out the implications of these theoretical positions through a quite brilliant analysis of the nineteenth-century "colonial exchange" between the southern Tswana and the Nonconformist missions to them run first by the London Missionary Society (pioneers in the field) and then by their later-arriving brethren, the Wesleyan Methodist Missionary Society. An additional important project of the authors throughout this study is to demonstrate the importance of an imagined Africa to the British sense of themselves and more broadly to the construction of modernity. As the Comaroffs argue in Volume 2, as part of a series of seven propositions about colonialism, "colonialism was as much involved in making the metropole, and the identities and ideologies of colonizers, as it was in (re)making peripheries and colonial sub- 21 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 31. 22 Jean Comaroff, Body of Power, Spirit of Resistance: The Culture and History of a South African People (Chicago, 1985). Contrast J. M. Schoffeleers, "Ritual Healing and Political Acquiescence: The Case of the Zionist Churches in Southern Africa," Africa 61, no. 1 (1991): 1-25. Schoffeleers sees Zionist healing churches as not necessarily subversive of the established order and sometimes supportive of it. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 442 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh jects."23 In particular, in developing the theme of Africa as a "negative trope in the language of modernity" in Volume 1, the Comaroffs were among the most influential of scholars to introduce into the history of missionary activity in South Africa the postcolonialist concern with the construction of the colonial or minority "other" as a means for self-construction on the part of the person doing the defining.24 Despite their influence on many literary scholars, in Volume 2 the Comaroffs ironically confess themselves "uneasy with most literary critical ap- proaches to colonialism," eschew a vulgar Hegelian approach, and stress that they prefer to focus on "selves" and "others" in the plural; we shall return to this issue. A final critical point is that the authors see the interaction between missionary and Tswana as a form of dialectic between two key groups of interlocutors, dependent on the notion of difference. In the second volume, the Comaroffs acknowledge with more force than in Volume 1 the existence of overlap on the ground, and they reemphasize that the idea of difference was created by the dialectical process, despite some merging of lifeways on the ground and the mutual influence of Tswana and British. Note their comment that "neither 'the colonizer' nor 'the colonized' represented an undifferentiated sociological or political reality, save in exceptional circumstances."25 Since the end product of the colonial encounter was so clearly the production of difference and a series of deeply embedded dialectical oppositions, the Comaroffs nonetheless argue that this is the most productive optic through which to view the early nineteenth-century encounter between European mission- aries and Africans. This model is furthermore essential to their theoretical account of the formation of hegemony. ONE OF THE THINGS I HAVE FOUND MOST PERPLEXING about the work of the Comaroffs is, nevertheless, the question of the extent to which it is appropriate to describe the Tswana encounter with Christianity as a form of dialectic. This question implies the ancillary question of who the agents of the dialectic were at given moments. On the face of it, these are tendentious concerns, since colonialism was so clearly in many ways a dialectic between colonized and colonizer, just as colonialism clearly generated reified views of colonizer and colonized alike. Missionaries themselves usually understood their activities in dialectical terms. Yet I think one can ask whether a dialectical approach to the history of Christianity in colonial contexts 23 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 22. 24 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 86. Those influenced by the Comaroffs in this respect include David Chidester, Savage Systems: Colonialism and Comparative Religion in Southern Africa (Charlottesville, Va., 1996); Leon de Kock, Civilising Barbarians: Missionary Narrative and African Textual Response in Nineteenth-Century South Africa (Johannesburg, 1996); Doug Stuart, "'Of Savages and Heroes': Discourses of Race, Nation and Gender in the Evangelical Missions to Southern Africa in the Early Nineteenth Century" (PhD dissertation, Institute of Commonwealth Studies, University of London, 1994). This approach of course represents the concerns of many scholars of the British Empire and the related construction of British identity. Edward W. Said, Orientalism (New York, 1978; 2d edn., 1996); Henry L. Gates, ed., Race, Writing and Difference (Chicago, 1986); Mary Louise Pratt, Imperial Eyes: Travel Writing and Transculturation (London, 1992); Linda Colley, Britons: Forging the Nation (New Haven, Conn., 1992); Ann Stoler and Frederick Cooper, eds., Tensions of Empire: Colonial Cultures in a Bourgeois World (Berkeley, Calif., 1997), including Stoler and Cooper, "Rethinking a Research Agenda." 25 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 24. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 443 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne does not fail to capture some aspects of social and political reality. This is above all because of the rapidity with which Christianity was out of the hands of the missionaries and settlers who brought it, the corresponding importance of non- Europeans in the spread of Christianity, the multiplicity of uses to which diverse interest groups of all ethnicities put Christianity as both a language and a practice, and the political and cultural complications of regions with multiple power players. These issues are brought out by a re-reading of the opening encounters between missionaries and Tswana that occupy so key a role in the first volume of Of Revelation and Revolution. I should add that I made similar comments about the opening phases of the mission in an unpublished conference paper after the publication of Volume 1. The Comaroffs respond generously to this paper in Volume 2, as they do to a number of other critics, using the occasion to clarify and amplify their understanding of a dialectical approach. I do not want to beat a dead horse. Nonetheless, I think there are some useful differences of interpretation at stake, and so will abuse the Comaroffs' patience by briefly recapitulating a potential alternate reading of these opening gambits, before returning to the wider issue of different approaches to mission history.26 Let me first make a comment about regional issues. The lands of the southern Tswana were disrupted by colonialism, drought, hunger, and regional conflict well before the formal advent of missions. Furthermore, as Johannes du Bruyn has underscored, the lands inhabited by the southern Tswana were so profoundly affected by the Cape Colony to the south that it is problematic to frame a discussion of cultural colonialism primarily in terms of Europe and the Transvaal. In particular, the colonial firearms frontier moved with great speed, was highly destructive, and was arguably more important earlier than the Comaroffs suggest. Many different armed bands, some of them ethnically mixed, decimated peaceful groups in conflict situations exacerbated by hunger.27 Arguments about the regional context for evangelical missions to the Tswana are also implicit in a much wider body of literature about the so-called mfecane (or difaqane)-terms that have been much disputed by historians. Traditionally, the mfecane was a term given to the widespread wars, famines, and refugee movements that shook (and temporarily depopulated) much of the interior of southern Africa in the early nineteenth century, the impact of which on the Tswana the Comaroffs date from 1822. There is no space here to explore that debate, although it will be helpful to know that a 26 My re-reading of the opening encounter is based on my own work on LMS archives, which I consulted primarily with the aim of writing about contestation over the uses of Christianity within the Cape Colony and with a focus on Khoesan not Tswana uses of Christianity. It seems to me fruitful, however, to unite diverse perspectives on a very complex subject. Elizabeth Elbourne, Blood Ground: Colonialism, Missions and the Contest for Christianity in the Cape Colony and Britain, 1799-1853 (Montreal, 2002). There were four LMS delegations to the Tswana to establish a mission, not two as the Comaroffs have it. 27 Johannes du Bruyn, "Of Muffled Tswana and Overwhelming Missionaries: The Comaroffs and the Colonial Encounter," South African Historical Journal, no. 31 (1994): 294-309; Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 275-76. On Tswana views of the firearms frontier, see Robert Moffat to Richard Miles, Lattakoo [Kuruman], December 5, 1827, in Isaac Schapera, ed., Apprenticeship at Kuruman: Being the Journals and Letters of Robert and Mary Moffat, 1820-1828 (London, 1951), 274. Other letters in this collection describe frequent deadly raids throughout the 1820s, in which a wide variety of often ethnically mixed groups preyed on one another. On Cape influence, see also Johannes du Bruyn, "James Read en die Thlaping, 1816-1820," Historia 35 (1990). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 444 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh critical issue is whether or not covert slave trading from the Cape Colony and Portuguese territories was at the root of disruptions that have more traditionally been ascribed to the many conquests of the Zulu kingdom in the region of what is now Natal. The point I want to emphasize here is not only the great disruption in the region but also the plausibility of historian Neil Parsons's argument that Tswana territory had already been subject since the seventeenth century to political unrest and the large-scale movement of populations. Parsons in fact suggests that the roots of disruption and state formation in the area may well lie in destabilization that considerably antedated the 1820s and may in turn be linked in at least some way to eighteenth-century slave trading to the north and the rise of the predatory Cape Colony to the south.28 Scholars also tend to see later Afrikaner settler colonialism in the region as part of the same broad processes. All this calls into question the determinative impact of mission Christianity in an already destabilized region. Maybe political colonialism did precede cultural colonialism after all? How might we need to reconceptualize the Christian/Tswana encounter if we think of it as taking place in some sense in a frontier zone, or even a borderland, with multiple players, already characterized by cultural admixture, politically influenced uses of Christianity, and political turbulence? The Comaroffs are of course sensitive to these hugely important issues. I think nonetheless that they could emphasize regional complexity more and the power of missionary Christianity somewhat less in their discussion of the roots of material change (at both ends of the nineteenth century), as well as pay more attention to the implications for their overall theoretical argument of the fact that Africans tried to experiment in response to very difficult local conditions. It is also important that the missionaries entered as potential power brokers in a turbulent environment but were initially weak, able to manipulate power if and only if they could make the right alliances. With these types of broad issues in mind, the opening encounters between missionaries and Tswana, so well described by the Comaroffs, might be re-read as conversations between a number of actors. Four LMS delegations traveled between 1813 and 1817 to the southern Tswana settlement known to the missionaries as Lattakoo (later Dithakong) to try to persuade the Tswana to accept missionaries. It is perhaps symbolically appropriate that none of these delegations was exclusively white. In addition to the delegations' African members, even the missionaries themselves included a black West Indian man and a Welsh speaker. Neither, come to that, was the Tswana polity entirely "Tswana." The Thlaping polity was relatively multi-ethnic; the chief Mothibi, for example, was half !Kora (a Khoekhoe-speaking group) and (like others of the chiefly lineage) married a !Kora woman. More significantly, the Europeans were not the only, or even the most important, players promoting an evangelical mission. Key from a Tswana perspective were regional actors, the Griqua (as they 28 Julian Cobbing, "The Mfecane as Alibi: Thoughts on Dithakong and Mbolompo," Journal of African History 29, no. 3 (1988): 487-519; Caroline Hamilton, ed., Mfecane Aftermath (Johannesburg, 1996), including Neil Parsons, "Prelude to Difaqane in the Interior of Southern Africa c. 1600-1822," 323-49; Neil Parsons, "Kicking the Hornets' Nest: A Third View of the Cobbing Controversy on the Mfecane/Difaqane," address to the University of Botswana History Society, Gabarone, Botswana, March 16, 1999 (available online through the University of Botswana History Department web page, at http://ubh.tripod.com/ub/np.htm). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 445 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elboume eventually came to be known), some of whom acted as patrons of the early LMS mission to the Tswana. The Griqua were clusters of settlers in the region of Khoekhoe descent, some of whom had white fathers and Khoesan mothers, and many of whom had migrated from the Cape Colony, epitomizing the remaking of identity in the wake of colonialism. Groups spearheaded by Griqua had established regional hegemony through their access to arms and horses. They provided important trade links with the Cape Colony and were sources of trade goods for the Tswana. The Griqua were already using Christianity in a variety of complicated ways, as a token of equality with white settlers, as justification for what Robert Ross has termed "sub-imperialism" with regard to the unconverted Tswana, and indeed as a basis for their reconstituted polities. Alliances with missionaries gave these emergent polities potential access to diplomacy and markets, including the arms trade, in addition to spiritual concerns. Indeed, on the way to Mothibi's settlement, British LMS inspector Campbell had helped compose a formal written constitution for a Griqua group, reflecting the symbolic uses of the language of law. The language of Christianity was already on the loose in the interior, in other words, and subject to interpretation in Griqualand as much as in the seminaries of Europe.29 The (Khoekhoe) !Kora had also been exposed to Christianity and were also competing by the 1820s to obtain guns and horses from the Cape Colony. The decision of Mothibi and his counselors about whether to accept an LMS mission was thus complicated by the fact that the LMS came under the protection of the powerful Griqua Kok clan. During a second LMS delegation to the Tswana (overlooked by the Comaroffs), for example, Adam Kok presented newly arrived missionaries to Mothibi and acted as their translator. Mothibi was anxious not to offend the powerful Kok family, but worried because his own people had since turned against the mission. In fact, he eventually sent these missionaries away altogether. When two missionaries told Mothibi that one of them "wrought in wood, and one that was to come wrought in Iron, that we would do all the work for him in that way that he wanted," Mothibi was pleased and told Kok "he could not think of rejecting those that came with or through the medium of him." When the missionaries pursued the issue of teaching, however, Mothibi worriedly told Kok that "he would not be instructed, and if A. Kok should endeavour to press it sharply upon him, and his refusal cause a variance between them, he said that he would rather take the flight from Lattakoo, with people." Kok had to reassure Mothibi that the Griqua leader would not force the Tswana chief to relocate if the Thlaping 29 This discussion both here and below draws on Robert Ross, Adam Kok's Griquas: A Study in the Development of Stratification in South Africa (Cambridge, 1976); Elizabeth Elbourne and Robert Ross, "Combating Spiritual and Social Bondage: Early Missions in the Cape Colony," in Elphick and Davenport, Christianity in South Africa; Alan Barnard, Hunters and Herders of Southern Africa: A Comparative Ethnography of the Khoisan Peoples (Cambridge, 1992), 156-75, 193-94; Martin Legassick, "The Northern Frontier to c. 1840: The Rise and Decline of the Griqua People," in Richard Elphick and Hermann Giliomee, eds., The Shaping of South African Society, 1652-1840 (Middletown, Conn., 1988), 358-420; Nigel Penn, "The Orange River Frontier Zone, c. 1700-1805," in Andrew B. Smith, ed., Einiqualand: Studies of the Orange River Frontier (Cape Town, 1995); Karel Schoeman, ed., Griqua Records: The Philippolis Captaincy, 1825-1861 (Cape Town, 1996). Mary and Robert Moffat's letters and journals make the station's vulnerability and its reliance on Griqua protection abundantly clear. See Schapera, ed., Apprenticeship at Kuruman. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 446 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh refused missionaries.30 Once the Kuruman mission had been established, it depended for its survival on Griqua military protection for many years. If missionaries were initially dependent on Griqua intermediaries, they were also materially dependent for travel and translation on Khoesan hired in the colony. The Khoekhoe and San had long borne the brunt of brutal colonial subjugation and were in many cases more receptive to conversion than groups beyond the Cape Colony. The Comaroffs indeed have a wonderful discussion of the occlusion of such intermediary figures from missionary accounts of putatively solitary heroic jour- neys.31 I would go further than the Comaroffs, however, and suggest that at least some of these companions saw themselves as fellow missionaries. On the first delegation, Campbell was accompanied by a number of Khoesan Christians from the Cape. Their prayers and preaching had made a pilgrimage route of their journey through a country of which they saw themselves as taking spiritual possession. They were active in trying to persuade Tswana individuals to accept missionaries.32 In 1814, a synod of the southern African LMS missionaries had "set aside" in a religious ceremony several men of Khoesan descent to act as LMS agents in the interior, several of whom, including Griqua leader Andries Waterboer, subse- quently played important roles in the politics of Transorangia. Cupido Kakkerlak, a product of Eastern Cape mission schools whose letters reveal a passionate spirituality, also itinerated in the region, attempting, albeit with little success, to evangelize among the !Kora. These men were employed by the LMS. As the Comaroffs point out, the society would devote much energy to reining in and controlling "native agents" after the earliest years of the mission. Nonetheless, evidence from the Cape suggests that there was also considerable evangelical activity by converts who were not formally paid by missionary societies, including elephant hunters such as Hendrik Boesak or long-range wagon drivers. In addition, as mission stations became more like churches and congregations fought for independence from missionary control around the mid-century mark, congregations had more authority, not less. My point is that evidence from elsewhere in southern Africa suggests that Christianity was spread by people with long-range contacts other than missionaries, presumably not necessarily in orthodox form. The central- ity of Khoesan people (and later other Africans) to European-led missions to the Tswana suggests a wider oral evangelical culture that the written records would not completely reflect.33 Be that as it may, the importance of Khoesan agents to the Tswana mission is most clearly exemplified by the fourth delegation to Lattakoo, led by a former 30 Robert Hamilton to LMS Directors, Griquatown, April 28, 1816, London Missionary Society Papers, South Africa Correspondence-Incoming, 6/3/C, Council for World Mission Archives, School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London (hereafter, LMS-SA). See also LMS-SA, 6/3/C: J. Evans, R. Hamilton, and W. Corner to LMS Directors, Griquatown, May 27, 1816; LMS-SA, 6/3/C: R. Hamilton to LMS Directors, Griquatown, November 13, 1816. 31 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 78. 32 John Campbell, Travels in South Africa (London, 1815). The full extent of Khoesan missionary activity emerges most clearly from Campbell's unpublished journals, held at the National Library of South Africa, Cape Town. 33 LMS-SA, 5/2/F: "Minutes of the First Conference held by the African Missionaries at Graaff Reinet in August 1814"; V. C. Malherbe, "The Life and Times of Cupido Kakkerlak," Journal ofAfrican History 20 (1979): 365-79; Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 81, on Robert Moffat's campaign against Kakkerlak. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 447 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne carpenter from Essex, James Read, after Mothibi had finally capitulated. Read brought with him an unusually large group of people of varied ethnic origins, mostly Khoesan, including, more problematically, his own Khoekhoe wife, Elizabeth Valentyn, and his pregnant former mistress, a San woman, Sabina Pretorius, whom he claimed to have met by accident on the road. At least ten Khoesan men and six Khoesan women accompanied Read, all of whom were church members and some of whom were "zealous persons."34 It is indeed possible that the Khoesan of the Cape Colony saw this as a Khoesan mission to the Tswana, brokered by their kin among the Griqua. In any case, once Robert Moffat took over the Lattakoo station in 1821 from Read (disgraced for his adultery), he would fight successfully to diminish the influence of the Khoesan group from the Cape Colony, whom he then firmly wrote out of the history of the station. He dismissed several for immorality, despite the resistance, in which women played prominent roles, of members of the group. Moffat also found himself opposed by Griqua factions, many of whom resented his power-mongering presence.35 Before the late 1810s, the earliest LMS agents in southern Africa were not particularly good or even very enthusiastic apostles of capitalist cultural practices, mostly because they were so poor themselves and so looked-down-upon by many respectable members of colonial society. More than a few also tended to believe in dreams, to hear the personal voice of God, or to look for the imminent end of the world. Those missionaries who were closest in time to the Enlightenment, in sum, acted least like the bourgeois agents of respectability described by the Comaroffs as quintessential exemplars of the rationalizing project of modernity. The colonial unrespectability of early missionaries was compounded by the fact that perhaps a third of them married African women before 1817, while several were involved in sexual scandals. Others took high-profile political positions that were unpopular among settlers. The Comaroffs pick up the story as Moffat, in common with many of his fellows, was urgently trying to reclaim the moral high ground and to reinvent the mission as visibly respectable and as focused on "civilization." A lot of this is more about the internal history of the LMS than about African Christianity; we certainly in general need more of the latter and perhaps less of the former. Nonetheless, it argues for the importance of local detail, and for the centrality of fractures within as well as between groups. It also points forward to ways in which converts would later need to perform "civilization" and "respectability" in order to maneuver on the colonial stage, not solely because their consciousnesses had been colonized. From the start, tensions among evangelicals themselves were fueled by anxiety over the rapid removal of Christianity from the control of white missionaries. This tension was arguably innate to a type of evangelical Christianity based on textual interpretation and the notion of divine inspiration, as well as being the product of Tswana reconstruction of Christian forms. Certainly, missionaries soon lost control even of "orthodox" Christianity. Among the northern Tswana, Paul Landau has brilliantly documented the use of Christianity by junior royals to challenge existing authority in the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, in ways that escaped 34 LMS-SA, 6/4/A: James Read to Joseph Hardcastle, Bethelsdorp, August 7, 1816. 35 See Schapera, ed., Apprenticeship at Kuruman. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 448 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh a series of rather peripheral white missionaries. Among the southern Tswana, Thlaping elites also exploited divisions among missionaries to their own political ends. In 1842, for example, Tswana elite men successfully appealed to LMS superintendent John Philip to fire missionary Holloway Helmore for excessive interference in congregational affairs, including deposing Mothibi's son as a deacon.36 Missionaries to the Tswana experienced other humiliations. The coherent Tswana group targeted by the mission decamped, to be replaced by a more motley group of refugees. The mission was battered by raids from various groups, could not protect its members, and was not successful at all until it started picking up displaced persons in the 1830s. A NUMBER OF QUESTIONS arise from this type of re-reading. At a macro level, the region was already turbulent and populations were mobile, so Christianity scarcely arrived as the harbinger of globalization in anything other than an ideological sense. This raises in turn the thorny and ultimately unanswerable question of whether Christianity would have had the capacity to colonize minds without the prior disruption of material conditions. We are back at the difficult issue of how determinative "culture" is by itself. Perhaps in the end, this rejigging of chronology strengthens the Comaroffs' fundamental argument about the inextricability of "culture" and material struggle. It does nonetheless pose all the more sharply the question of how Christianity-and religious innovation, more broadly defined- functioned in a frontier zone in a manner that was independent of the machinations of white missionaries.37 Also at the "macro" level, the Tswana were not entirely "local," nor were they unused to cultural difference. In a multi-lingual, multi-religious environment, were missionaries really needed to contextualize "Tswana custom"? Missionary papers record Mothibi making distinctions between !Kora, Tswana, and colonial Khoekhoe customs, for example. I would not want to deny the importance of local identity, or to exaggerate the degree of long-range contacts of the southern Tswana, in contrast to the remarkable global reach and global identity claims of the early missionary movement. There are issues of tremendous importance raised by that contrast. But it also seems important that there were other regional interlocutors who were of greater material importance initially to the Tswana than the Europeans, and with whom they already had the kind of cultural interchanges that might have permitted the type of self-consciousness about "Tswana" identity that the Comaroffs see as the fruit of the "long conversation." This is also a way of asking about what the southern African interior looked like before formal European colonialism and whether the communities of the region were really as settled as they appeared. There are echoes here of an older debate about whether the encounter with the "macrocosmic" claims of the "world religions" Christianity and Islam shattered the 36 Landau, Realm of the Word; Elbourne, Blood Ground. On Helmore's dismissal, see LMS-SA, 19/2/A: James Read to LMS Directors, Philipton, June 3, 1843. The LMS Directors overturned the dismissal and censured Philip. 37 An interesting point of contrast is provided by Janet Hodgson, "A Battle for Sacred Power: Christian Beginnings among the Xhosa," in Elphick and Davenport, Christianity in South Africa. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 449 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne "microcosm" of African localist religions, at a time when colonialism was shattering the microcosm of daily life. As Terence Ranger has argued, whatever the intellectual issues at stake, African societies, at least in the southern African interior, have to be recognized as also "macrocosmic" in the sense that they had long-range contacts, exchanged ideas over large swathes of territory (as the rapid spread of prophetic movements suggests), and rubbed up against a wide variety of different groups.38 The relative mobility of different communities was also a factor in breaking down localism. This type of approach, to my mind, decenters the European missionary-at least until the missionary came backed up by a colonial economy and a colonial army. The power exerted by the conditions of the "frontier zone" of the region is represented by the fact that even missionaries were compelled by material circumstances to take on features of African polities. The Comaroffs highlight the vision of Kuruman mission head and former gardener Robert Moffat, and his wife Mary, like that of many early nineteenth-century Nonconformist missionaries, as one of an unrealistic rural idyll, in which they sought to remake Africa in the image of a vanishing and imagined rural utopian Britain. One could, however, go further in considering the contradictions of Kuruman. Robert Moffat acted in many ways like an African leader as well as like a nostalgic Scot, and he needed to do so because of the material conditions of the frontier. In the 1820s, he proved unable to retain the allegiance of existing chiefs, for whom he was too clearly a competitor. As the refugee crisis accelerated, however, Moffat was able to gather together dispossessed people. The price of their admission was allegiance to the religion of the leader, since religion was used to rebuild communities. The currency of power was people. In similar ways, the control of women and their reproduction was important to the maintenance of the power of the patriarch, whether African chief or mission station head-Moffat even went so far, for example, as to attempt to discipline publicly Ann Hamilton, the wife of his colleague Robert Hamilton, for refusing to sleep with her husband.39 Moffat was more a part of the African frontier world than he might have liked to admit. A further critical point raised by this case study is that Africans transmitted Christianity more effectively than missionaries did. The centrality of Africans to the spread of Christianity means that much of the early history of the mission is unrecoverable. It is often unclear what kinds of Christianity were spread orally, for example. In other parts of southern Africa, prophetic figures emerged from time to time to use aspects of the Christian message in a context that suggests how quickly its language became unhinged from missionary guardianship. For example, Xhosa prophet and war hero Makanda Nxele (Makana), who led a Xhosa attack on the colony in 1819, had an earlier flirtation with the LMS; he was refused the right to work as a native agent when he insisted that there was a god for the white man and a god for the black man, and that he himself was related to Jesus Christ. The examples could be multiplied, as the Comaroffs would certainly agree. The lines 38 Terence Ranger, "The Local and the Global in Southern African Religious History," in Hefner, Conversion to Christianity, 65-98. 39 Karel Schoeman, A Thorn Bush That Grows in the Path: The Missionary Career of Ann Hamilton, 1815-1823 (Cape Town, 1995); LMS-SA, 8/3/B: Robert Moffat to LMS, Lattakoo, July 12, 1821. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 450 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh between orthodoxy as the missionaries perceived it and African prophetic innova- tion were fluid and could be crossed in both directions, explaining the anxiety of white missionaries to bring Christianity back under control. In contrast to the Comaroffs, who emphasize the orthodoxy of the Nonconformists (whom they see in rather stereotypical, indeed Victorianist, terms), I would contend that this anxiety was familiar from debates within the European churches as well; after all, Methodism had once been perceived from within the citadels of Anglican orthodoxy in ways similar to Nonconformist views of African ecstatic innovation.40 If in the early days of missionary activity, Christianity was never fully in the control of the white missionaries who had brought it and only became popular once it was spread mostly by Africans and then transformed in the process, what does this imply about how we might conceptualize the study of colonial missions? I have suggested in the past that the messy scenario I outline above, with its complications and its fudging across the fault lines, calls into question the utility at the micro level of a strict dialectical approach to the history of colonial Christianity. The ghost of French structuralist understandings of G. W. Hegel's master-slave dialectic seems to me to hover over and to constrain the first volume. In response, however, the Comaroffs argue in Volume 2 that I have too conventional an understanding of their view of dialectical processes. A dialectic is not a "formal, abstract, or strictly teleological movement through time and space," in a Hegelian sense. Rather, it is a "process of reciprocal determination; a process of material, social and cultural articulation-involving sentient human beings rather than abstract forces or structures."41 Colonialism is dialectical because it creates binary understandings of difference and depends on the idea of opposites; it is also presumably dialectical because colonial interaction shapes both the colonized and the colonizer in new ways. Returning to the issue at the end of Volume 2, the Comaroffs reiterate (although this seems to me a somewhat different take) that by "dialectics" they mean "the mutually transforming play of social forces whose outcome is neither linear nor simply overdetermined." Defined thus, they add, "it is hard to imagine how colonial history could be regarded as anything else."42 In a weak sense, this is undeniable. Furthermore, on this model, it may not matter that the early encounter between missionaries and Tswana was so much messier than a "dialectical" account would suggest. The Comaroffs' point is precisely that out of difference and mess colonialism created binary opposites. At the same time, the exact nature of this process is often hard to capture. It is interesting to hear John Comaroff raise, in a recently published transcribed conversation with Homi Bhabha, what he terms the question of theory related to "the old Manichean opposition between colonizer and colonized, those 'iteratively marked,' positionally conflated points of reference around which the human geography of empire is so widely imagined. How, other than purely by descriptive insistence, does one displace the crushing logic of binarism in terms of which 40 Among many possibilities, see Deborah Valenze, Prophetic Sons and Daughters: Female Preaching and Popular Religion in Industrial England (Princeton, N.J., 1985). 41 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 29. 42 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 410. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 451 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne colonial worlds are apprehended and narrated?"43 I think this is a genuine point of tension for the Comaroffs, and quite rightly for many others. Perhaps my own discomfort arises from the difficulty of defining who the agents of dialectic are. In the end, the Comaroffs are interested in doing a historical anthropology of colonialism, more than of religion in colonial contexts. In this optic, the fault line of interest is that between colonized and colonizer. Religious belief did not, however, adhere to that fault line, even though both colonized and colonizers mobilized religion to the ends of power struggle. Nor of course was Christianity itself static. At the same time, the very notion of ethnic difference was still in the process of being worked out more broadly well past the early era of industrialization; therefore it was incorporated differently into the views of colonial evangelists at different times. From the point of view of the Comaroffs' overall narrative structure, this leads us away from the Enlightenment and onto the terrain of more immediately nineteenth-century colonial concerns. On this model, colonial conquest and the need to maintain and justify white rule shaped the mid- nineteenth-century culture of white Christianity. The end was not contained in the beginning but formed by colonial processes. Be that as it may, it is instructive that the Khoesan themselves were not able indefinitely to maintain the interstitial status to which Christianity gave them some access. By the early 1850s, many living in the Cape Colony were forced to choose between the colonial binaries of "black" and "white," in the 1850-1853 frontier war in which many people of Khoesan descent rebelled to fight against the "white" colony, as "race" became the determinant of colonial identity.44 The example also underscores the importance of "black" and "white" as colonial binaries arguably of more importance than "English" and "Tswana." All this should not, however, lead us to read the late eighteenth and early nineteenth centuries in terms of the mid-nineteenth. There is a basic problem here that dogs the Comaroffs throughout the books. Christianity is both text and practice, and therefore difficult to pin down. Not only that, it also permits and contains a wide variety both of practices and of different interpretations of its central themes. As text, Christianity became a free-floating signifier. As a practice, it was fought over bitterly by those who wanted to benefit from it. It is therefore difficult to identify Christianity clearly with one side of a dialectical or even dialogic model. This is all the more problematic because it is hard to define Christianity clearly, other than by appeals to authority. There was considerable scope for Africans to reinvent Christianity even from the beginning of the mission described by the Comaroffs. In some ways, this is precisely the Comaroffs' point: the signs of Christianity were fought over by competing ethnic groups. The Comaroffs nonetheless cannot bring themselves to see acceptance of Christianity in its unadulterated mission form as anything other than a defeat for 43 Bhabha and Comaroff, "Speaking of Postcoloniality," 22. 44 Elbourne, Blood Ground, 345-76; Robert Ross, "The Kat River Rebellion and Khoikhoi Nationalism: The Fate of an Ethnic Identification," Kronos: Journal of Cape History/Tydskrif vir Kaaplandse Geskiedenis 24 (November 1997): 91-105. On the emergence of racial stratification more generally, see Clifton C. Crais, White Supremacy and Black Resistance in Pre-industrial South Africa: The Making of the Colonial Order in the Eastern Cape, 1770-1865 (Cambridge, 1992); Timothy Keegan, Colonial South Africa and the Origins of the Racial Order (Charlottesville, Va., 1996). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 452 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh African converts, who were thereby surrendering positions in the struggles over the colonization of consciousness. This position ultimately obscures complexity. EVENTUALLY, ONE MUST CONFRONT the type of question raised by Leon de Kock, about disciplinary conventions and the fetishization of the archive.45 De Kock argues that historians have spent too much time in their reaction to this wonderful book looking for factual flaws. To put the question in its boldest form, are the details really that essential to the overall project? Perhaps less tendentiously, what are the Comaroffs doing that goes beyond the reading of the words of colonists? The Comaroffs are important precisely because they move beyond words to decipher the gestures of people in the past. They put an anthropologist's emphasis on ritual and performance. They add thereby a crucial dimension to our reading of culture-bound historical archives. The Comaroffs' understanding of performance goes well beyond the staged performances of religious rites (although they acknowledge at the same time that people used the framework of religious ritual as a springboard for their own acting out of emotions and ideas). The missionaries are described as performing civilization, in the hope of educating the Tswana to adopt Western cultural practices through the power of display. In response, the Tswana performed noncompliance or acted out cultural bricolage. The tangible display of the body interests the Comaroffs, just as the material suffering of the colonized body that we readers know is to come provides a moral template for our reading of the early nineteenth century. The authors are particularly interested in space and the disposition of the body in space: their analyses frequently return, like the apartheid state itself, to issues of the control of the movement of African bodies.46 The Comaroffs are in some ways mistrustful of the self-interested and one-sided colonial text and find more solidity in the unspoken exchanges of bodily perfor- mance. It is this approach that both furnishes the greatest richness of the books and yet at the same time has excited unease in some interlocutors. If the evidence that remains of Tswana actions is mostly accounts of their physical activity, does that not place the reporter (the anthropologist, the historian, or even the reader) in the privileged position of interpreting Tswana actions, leaving the Tswana themselves rarely free to speak directly in their own voice? Is this even an accurate assessment of the nature of the historical record, or are there more extensive Tswana records? J. D. Y. Peel and Terence Ranger have both queried the absence of Tswana 45 De Kock, "For and Against the Comaroffs." 46 For example, Volume 2 tellingly argues that integral to the late nineteenth-century struggle over African labor was a further struggle over the "distribution of people in space and, concomitantly, their passage across the social landscape." This is a typical discussion of space that appropriately reflects the struggle of the apartheid state to control the physical body, just as slavery had earlier lent mastery of the body to the slaveowner. Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 203. Rikk van Dijk and Peter Pels, "Contested Authorities and the Politics of Perception: Deconstructing the Study of Religion in Africa," in Richard Werbner and Terence Ranger, eds., Postcolonial Identities in Africa (London, 1996), 245-70; Celestin Monga, The Anthropology of Anger: Civil Society and Democracy in Africa, Linda Fleck and Celestin Monga, trans. (Boulder, Colo., 1996), 112-15, on the "subversive and silent" nature of many African forms of dissent. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 453 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne narrative in Of Revelation and Revolution's first volume, for example.47 It seems unlikely that Christian converts did not leave a more extensive written record even in the early years of the mission or that community historical memory was not richer. The Comaroffs have responded that community historical narrative was not a genre espoused by the Tswana. They argue, furthermore, that the quest for "narrative" is elitist: it is "a short step from the stress on narrative to the history of elites, thence to elitist history."48 The issue remains uneasily unresolved. For Paul Landau, the Comaroffs themselves have a culturally constrained view of what constitutes "genuine narrative." They pay "little attention to genealogy, song, Tswana conversation, letters, political speech, tales, myth or church charters- because they are not 'genuine' narratives. Consequently Tswana people's ideas of fulfillment and transcendence do not show themselves in either volume."49 Even the Tswana intellectual and politician Sol Plaatje's great novel Mhudi, which draws on Tswana traditions about the difaqane, has been brought into the fray: for the Comaroffs, the fact that Plaatje himself claims that he could only gather material in fragments suggests that the southern Tswana indeed did not have a tradition of sustained historical narrative as late as the early twentieth century, even though Mhudi is more conventionally seen as a reflection at least to some extent of more sustained Tswana oral tradition.50 There is another critical debate at work in these discussions of agency and voice. The Comaroffs are very clear that missionary activity was part of the victimization of Africans. Much recent scholarship on southern African Christianity emphasizes instead the agency of Africans in using and reshaping Christianity to their own ends, as the focus has shifted away from missionaries and onto African Christians. In some ways, the Comaroffs want to restore a sense of moral indignation at the ways in which colonial missions did change the consciousness of Africans in a damaging fashion. Ironically, this may involve seeing people as victims who did not necessarily see themselves that way at the time-another issue of authorial voice. The Comaroffs' anger represents nonetheless an important strand of longstanding protest across the colonized world at the "colonization of the mind."51 It is impossible to deny that many Christian missionaries had a profoundly negative 47 J. D. Y. Peel, "For Who Hath Despised the Day of Small Things? Missionary Narratives and Historical Anthropology," Comparative Studies in Society and History 37, no. 3 (1995): 581-607; Terence Ranger, "No Missionary: No Exchange: No Story? Narrative in Southern Africa," unpublished paper read at All Souls College, Oxford, June 1992. 48 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 51. 49 Paul Landau, "Hegemony and History in Jean and John L. Comaroff's Of Revelation and Revolution," Africa 70, no. 3 (2000): 516. 50 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 46-47. 51 Steve Biko, I Write What I Like (1978), provides an eloquent locus classicus, as does Ezekiel Mphahlele, The African Image (London, 1962). Dickson A. Mungazi, The Mind of Black Africa (Westport, Conn., 1996), expresses typical anger, pp. 1-32. Greg Cuthbertson discusses Christian missions as a form of cultural violence in Charles Villa-Vicencio, ed., Theology and Violence: The South African Debate (Johannesburg, 1987). Sanneh, Translating the Message, emphasizes in contrast indigenous agency in the "translation" of Christianity from one culture to another. At a different end of the spectrum of debate might be those who see efforts to change the religious systems of indigenous peoples as a form (or as an element) of cultural genocide. A. Dirk Moses gives an eloquent overview of debates about genocide and cultural genocide: "Conceptual Blockages and Definitional Dilemmas in the 'Racial Century': Genocides of Indigenous Peoples and the Holocaust," Patterns of Prejudice 36, no. 4 (2002). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 454 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh impact in many areas of the world, not least when they gained (or were given) control of educational systems and thus had control over the formation of children.52 The fact that missionaries in various ways had such power was, however, almost invariably related to the expansion of the colonial state, not to the corrosive power of the message alone. Furthermore, as Peggy Brock has persuasively argued, missionary institutional structures affected the degree of control missionaries could exert over congregations, and these structures were affected by indigenous social arrangements as well as by state power.53 I would further contend, in ways there is not space to elaborate on fully here, that shame was a key element of colonial control. Mission education could and did reinforce this. At the same time, Christianity could also provide a language through which to reclaim dignity and deny the shaming process. I think it is important in sum to see Christianity as a language with many possible uses. Conversion, for example, fulfilled a wider and more flexible range of functions than is suggested by the Comaroffs' reduction of it to a symbolic field of struggle over capitalism. A reading that focuses too exclusively on Christianity as a language of cultural domination rather than a language with a multiplicity of possible meanings pays too much attention to the Western roots of Christianity and not enough to the multiple uses to which Africans very quickly put it. I make this comment in awareness of the extent to which the Comaroffs emphasize the need to explore African perspectives through every possible means, and the extent to which they clearly do this. However, conversion was even more of an empty signifier than the Comaroffs suggest, and some of these significations did not have a lot to do with rational capitalism. On the other hand, conversion was also an act, with attached rituals and beliefs, and this is important for understanding what the act meant in the immediate rather than long-term sense. Even if I am not completely at ease with a victimization model, I would want to add that these were and are enormously complicated processes. They had deep and often painful implications for many. This demands humility from any historian. Undergirding much of the above has been a historian's concern with chronology, which, while justified, cannot do full justice to the rich ferment of ideas in these remarkable books. The Comaroffs in fact comment on what they see as different disciplinary conventions and their inherent costs and benefits. They see real and longstanding differences, as they remark at the end of Volume 2, between the ideal type of a more conventional historian and the archetypal historical anthropologist: "differences between the ideographic and the nomothetic, between the effort to arrive at the fullest possible description of events in their infinite particularity and the desire to pick out general principles across time and space." The latter approach, they underscore, "demands a certain boldness of abstraction" and is "inherently risky."54 Although one would hope that historians are not as painstak- ingly antiquarian and abstraction-averse as this implies, there is some justice to the 52 A wonderfully instructive example of the ambiguities of Christian liberal control of the education system in South Africa, just before apartheid, is furnished by Shula Marks, ed., Not Either an Experimental Doll: The Separate Worlds of Three South African Women (London, 1985). 53 Peggy Brock, "Mission Encounters in the Colonial World: British Columbia and South-West Australia," Journal of Religious History 24, no. 2 (June 2000): 159-79. 54 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 411. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 455 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elboume comment, at least as it pertains to the Comaroffs' own work. The very manner in which they offer up a multitude of bold ideas, fizzing with possibility, also ensures that they offer a number of hostages to fortune. The Comaroffs are, for example, probably the most influential of recent scholars to argue for tight linkage between missionary activity, "modernity," "Enlighten- ment," and globalization. As Brian Stanley points out, this is also a question that has been much debated in the past few years by Christian theologians and mission theorists, with theologians paying particular attention to the damage done by the universalist truth claims of mission Christianity.55 More broadly, the Comaroffs are participating in a vast debate about modernity and postmodernity among social, political, and cultural theorists that it would be foolhardy to venture upon here. Their contribution is both important and vexed: important because they show the culturally constrained nature of claims to "modernity," vexed because despite everything they reify the truth claims of modernity and have too neat a view of the "Enlightenment," despite substantial historical debate on the utility of the concept. In so doing, they exaggerate the long-term influence of mission Christianity on the material subjugation of the Tswana, particularly by minimizing the impact of illiberal forces and overemphasizing cultural change. This could be true, however, and the significance of the Comaroffs' analysis of practice still be undimmed. The Comaroffs see "modernity" as "always historically constructed." It is in their view "an ideological formation in terms of which societies valorize their own practices by contrast to the specter of barbarism and other marks of negation."56 The Comaroffs link modernity to a view of the self as a rights-bearing atomistic individual, ultimately the "fully fledged bourgeois subject." They further associate modernity with a wide-ranging series of cultural and economic practices, including but not limited to dependence on a worldwide market, industrialization, the use of money, the use of "advanced" agricultural practices, the promotion of individuated space, and a sense of the body as private.57 It is part of the great richness of the Comaroffs' approach that they so fruitfully link cultural and economic practices, refusing to prioritize one over the other. At the same time, this view of modernity is slippery-and this is both its richness and an occasional source of frustration. The Comaroffs move between presenting the truth claims of modernity-its "text," if one likes-and the concrete material practices that advocates saw as characterizing the modern. The authors' desire not to take the truth claims of missionaries at face value make it difficult for them to spell out what, if any, were the irreducible material practices that defined modernity. If there weren't any, however, what was the material force behind the cultural claims and practices of missionaries? Yet it is arguable that at least some of what the Comaroffs identify as the 55 Brian Stanley, "Christian Missions and the Enlightenment: A Reevaluation," in Stanley, ed., Christian Missions and the Enlightenment (Grand Rapids, Mich., 2001), 1-2. Stanley points to David Bosch's Transforming Mission: Paradigm Shifts in Theology of Mission (Maryknoll, N.Y., 1991) as a seminal text for Christian theologians of mission in a postmodern context. 56 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 32. 57 A particularly influential figure for the Comaroffs' reading of the creation of the modern self in Volume 2 is Charles Taylor, whose Sources of the Self is a seminal text for their work. Taylor is of course a Christian Hegelian, whose view of the emergence of the modern self is certainly influenced by Hegelian dialectics, in however inexplicit a fashion. Sources of the Self: The Making of the Modem Identity (Cambridge, 1989). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 456 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh intellectual aspects of modernity are primarily identifiable with the truth claims of liberalism, and that the Comaroffs link these in turn to neoliberalism. There are echoes here of the great debates between radical and liberal historians in 1970s and 1980s South Africa, split over the origins of apartheid.58 For the "radical" school, liberalism, in both its ideological and economic sense, contributed to the economic domination that was at the root of apartheid. Radical historians argued that late nineteenth-century British capitalism precipitated and anticipated many features of South African society under apartheid, just as the Comaroffs here blame nine- teenth-century British liberal ideas about such things as money, markets, the individuated self, and the primacy of certain gender roles for the mental prepara- tion of the Tswana for labor oppression. Indeed, in their 2000 article "Millennial Capitalism: First Thoughts on a Second Coming," the Comaroffs explicitly link what they term the "Age of Revolution" (1789-1848) to the current "Age of Millennial Capitalism" with their similar anxieties and ontological challenges.59 This article makes explicit the magical, mystical elements of neoliberalism, and its culturally constrained forms, in contrast to neoliberals' claims to rationality and access to universal truth, just as Of Revelation and Revolution describes culturally constructed views of "modernity" and a "modern" economy. This is very helpful. Nonetheless, I think it would also be useful in Of Revelation and Revolution to be more explicit about actual intellectual debates among and between people: to have more ideology in places and less hegemony. The argument made by many, that early twentieth-century white liberals in practice came to support racist segregationist policies, while in ideological terms liberalism's support of the free market economy and nonviolent political action left it with little space to mobilize opposition to apartheid, all adds up to a trenchant and at least partially justified critique. By leaving out of the picture the intellectual shifts in liberalism (and among the opponents of liberalism) on the ground in the nineteenth century (and implicitly in the twentieth), however, the Comaroffs, like other authors, conflate several ills into one. Disciplinary specialists might want to throw further darts at the Comaroffs' narrative superstructure. Must industrialization and by implication modernity really begin in 1789? This is very French. What might be the impact of the questioning by economists of the linearity and suddenness of industrialization in Britain, which now looks more like an extended messy process than a "revolution" within neat chronological parameters? What difference does it make that the evangelical movement had many roots in seventeenth and eighteenth-century continental pietism? If Protestantism is the necessary condition of capitalism, where does this leave Catholic countries (not least France)? The point I want to close on is, however, that of tragedy. If there is, as I have suggested, an implicit narrative of origins that runs throughout Of Revelation and Revolution and lends the work its moral passion, this is not, for all that, a straightforward linear narrative of beginnings and ends. Rather, it is marked by 58 Christopher Saunders, The Making of the South African Past: Major Historians on Race and Class (Cape Town, 1988), describes the liberal/radical split. 59 Jean Comaroff and John L. Comaroff, "Millennial Capitalism: First Thoughts on a Second Coming," Public Culture 12, no. 2 (2000): 334. This issue has been reprinted as Comaroff and Comaroff, eds., Millennial Capitalism and the Culture of Neoliberalism (Durham, N.C., 2001). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 457 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] 458 Elizabeth Elbourne tragic irony and unexpected plot twists. The Nonconformist missionaries who labored so intensely to change the daily lives of Africans in order to induct them into the "modern" economy did not foresee the devastating consequences of that economy for the Tswana peasantry (as might be said of some of the missionaries' modern counterparts, development workers). At the same time, the Comaroffs write as though missionaries inducted the Tswana into the global market and colonized their consciousness in a way that made their engagement more likely. It seems to me just as possible that the global market and related economic coercion came crashing into the lives and consciousness of the Tswana in a way about which they could do little, particularly as their contact was frequently mediated by coercive legislation on the part of the colonial state.60 Missionaries reflected the efforts of other Westerners to moralize the market: to see it as a force for moral good. In this, they shared the ambiguities (and guilty conscience?) of nineteenth-century liberalism. It does not take a great leap of the imagination to find contemporary parallels in the neoliberal discourse, and of course the Comaroffs are right that this putatively universalist creed contains deeply embedded culturally specific assumptions, as did nineteenth-century Anglo- American liberalism itself.61 If nonetheless market expansion is relatively inevita- ble, then is it not appropriate to ask on what terms this expansion might be the most moral? Or is the most appropriate response full-fledged resistance? Must the global marketplace necessarily be bad, on average, for Africa? From a somewhat different point on the ideological spectrum, one might also ask whether in fact Africa is incorporated into the global market on the equal terms supposedly demanded by neoliberal economics. These are clearly issues beyond the scope of this article, but not without historical parallels. In late nineteenth and early twentieth-century terms, the Tswana, it could be argued, were crowded out of an agricultural market in which many were making profits and farming more effectively than whites, in fact, in order to favor white farmers artificially and in order to bolster labor for the mines, again through "artificial" restraints on movement, through the theft of land, through racially targeted taxation, and through coercive legislation. This antici- pated many of the later strategies of apartheid.62 It is not as clear to me as it is to the Comaroffs that the questions some missionaries and Africans were asking about the possibility of a just economy were not the right ones, even if the culturally constrained answers they gave were so obviously, hopelessly wrong. I do not have answers to these questions either-merely some sympathy with the misguided quest for certainty in a rapidly changing, brutal, and deeply uncertain economic universe. 60 This is a point also made by Landau, "Hegemony and History." 61 Uday Mehta, Liberalism and Empire: A Study in Nineteenth-Century British Liberal Thought (Chicago, 1999); Mehta, "Liberal Strategies of Exclusion," in Stoler and Cooper, Tensions of Empire, 59-86. 62 Ted Matsetela, "The Life Story of Mma-Pooe: Aspects of Sharecropping and Proletarianization in the Northern Orange Free State 1890-1930," in Shula Marks and Richard Rathbone, eds., Industrialization and Social Change in South Africa (New York, 1982), 212-37; Charles Van Onselen, The Seed Is Mine: The Life of Kas Maine, a South African Sharecropper, 1894-1985 (Cape Town, 1996). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh I HAVE SUGGESTED THROUGHOUT THIS ESSAY that the Comaroffs present nineteenth- century missionaries as fairly powerful figures, able to effect changes in the consciousness of Tswana interlocutors, despite the resistance of many. In contrast, I see Christianity as important but, with some important exceptions, not necessarily white missionaries themselves. I also suggest that the linkages between political and cultural colonialism are often unclear in Of Revelation and Revolution, and that the role of "cultural colonialism" is overdetermined. If it is possible to guess about such counterfactuals, I suspect that at least some of the missionaries whose work has been scrutinized by the Comaroffs would ironically have preferred the Comaroffs' account of their activities to mine, however doubtless upset they would have been at the implication that their preaching laid the groundwork for the Tswana's entrapment within enslaving capitalist systems. But the Comaroffs do give the missionaries credit for a coherent, rationalizing, globalizing system that taught one universal truth. They also recognize the missionaries' own belief that they might instill into their converts the necessary principles of "civilization" to transform totally their supposedly primitive economies and to move them rapidly up the scale of human development toward settled commercial societies. My own interpretation, while recognizing the tremendous importance of the universalizing project as a mode of domination, calls into question the capacity of Christianity to convey as effectively as it would have liked a message of unifying orthodoxy, or indeed the overall ability of missionaries to accomplish their objectives. From the very beginning of the activity of Christians in Africa, as elsewhere in the world, Christianity was out of control, unorthodox, and an available subject for reinter- pretation in light of the needs of its interlocutors. Ironically, in sum, it is not always wise to take missionaries at their word. Elizabeth Elbourne is an associate professor in the Department of History at McGill University, where she teaches British and South African history. She is also currently a visiting fellow in the History Program of the Research School of Social Sciences, Australian National University. Her publications include Blood Ground: Colonialism, Missions and the Contest for Christianity in the Cape Colony and Britain, 1799-1853 (2002), as well as various articles, most recently "Domesticity and Disposession: British Ideologies of 'Home' and the Primitive at Work in the Early Nineteenth-Century Cape," in Wendy Woodward, Patricia Hayes, and Gary Minkley, eds., Deep Histories: Gender and Colonialism in Southern Africa (2002). She earned her D.Phil. in 1992 from the University of Oxford, under the supervision of Terence Ranger. Her major fields of interest include colonialism, gender, and religion, especially the early nineteenth- century British white settler empire and southern Africa. Her current work in progress explores the creation of networks around the idea of being "aborig- inal" in the early nineteenth-century British empire, and is focusing on links between New South Wales, the Cape Colony, New Zealand, and Canadian colonies as well as on activists in Great Britain. She is also writing on liberalism and Khoekhoe citizenship at the Cape. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 459 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/533242
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 522214
Date: 04 2008
Author(s): Reynolds, Thomas E.
Abstract: Theorizing for theory’s sake certainly has its place, and not every book needs to be focused on practical issues. Nonetheless, even the most gymnastic theoretician needs some grounding connection to relevant cases. Reynolds is profoundly uninterested in this level of analysis. While he flies through the theoretical air with great speed in
The Broken Whole, it is unclear whether the book can make any sort of stable or decisive landing.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/587599
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 589491
2008
Author(s): Stewart Garrett
Abstract: Ibid., p. 111. Even Riffaterre's approach to the structuring unsaid of textual writing can be seen to represent on its own terms a shift from the ontology of narrative toward its epistemology at the level of form rather than content. By the deliberate provocation of his title, his semiotic narratology is interested not just in the structural essence of fiction as art but in its specific
truth:a story's immanent signifying patterns in their subtextual disclosure.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/589488
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 522216
Date: 10 2008
Author(s): Balsamo Gian
Abstract: Nussbaum,
Upheavals of Thought, 590.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/589948
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 592372
Date: 01 2009
Author(s): Miller Richard B.
Abstract: Anscombe, “The Justice of the Present War Examined,” 81.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/592359
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 522216
Date: 10 2008
Author(s): Hall, W. David
Abstract: Hall sees that this argument as it develops across Ricoeur’s writings raises questions about the role of reciprocity in the Ricoeur texts he considers. He acknowledges that Ricoeur’s recognition that not all human relations are face‐to‐face leads him beyond a narrow call for solicitude and friendship at this level to a concern for the level of institutions as well. It is at this level of institutions that the question of justice really arises, and with it new questions regarding responsibility and possible reciprocity, particularly regarding our ability to respond to others who we may never meet face‐to‐face. As Hall says, “love often demands a dimension of self‐sacrifice, most notably in the form of renouncing a strict reciprocity” (150). His case could have been stronger here if he had incorporated Ricoeur’s discussions of the work of John Rawls and the antisacrificial notion of justice he saw there. Beyond this, Hall’s focal idea of a relation between love and justice marked by what he calls a poetic tension should also have included some discussion of what Ricoeur says in
The Course of Recognition(Institute for Human Sciences Vienna Lecture Series, trans. David Pellauer [Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2005]; originally published asParcours de la reconnaissance[Paris: Éditions Stock, 2004]) about the limits of existing philosophies of recognition, which he saw as not getting any further than a notion of reciprocal recognition in just the sense Hall criticizes. Ricoeur’s own answer was to begin there to lay out the idea of mutual recognition beyond mere reciprocity, a higher form of recognition that stands closer, as Hall anticipates, to something like the reception of a gift that expects nothing in return but which may lead to a second gift given to others. Readers who wish to build on Hall’s argument will want also to look at this last major book from Ricoeur.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/592470
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 596101
Date: 04 2009
Author(s): Schweiker William
Abstract: I conclude, then, that the task of theological ethics and, more broadly, the humanities and, if I can be bold, more broadly still the university itself is to examine carefully and critically and from multiple perspectives—including the religions—what it means to be and to live as responsible human beings within the vulnerabilities and complexities of forms of life. When we within our several disciplines respond to this task with all the vitality and resources at our disposal, then, I believe, knowledge will indeed grow from more to more, and life will be increased without the illusions of power or servitude to the tyranny of idols.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/596069
Journal Title: Isis
Publisher: State University of New York Press
Issue: 597753
Date: 12 2007
Author(s): Zimmerman Virginia
Abstract: Excavating Victoriansbrings out very clearly the discomfort the newly discovered vast expanse of geological time gave the Victorians and examines some of the writings that helped shape responses to it. Though the book may not be of particular relevance to the historian focusing closely on Victorian geology or archaeology, for the historian of science who examines wider cultural or literary phenomena it is an important guide to the stimulus that the writings of geologists and archaeologists gave other mid-Victorian writers. Nevertheless, the specialist or narrowly focused historian of science will probably find it frustrating rather than helpful, since the overviews of Victorian geology and archaeology are brief and there are distracting errors, such as the attribution of theNinth Bridgewater Treatiseto William Buckland rather than to Charles Babbage (p. 18). The chapters on Tennyson and Dickens are both interesting and illuminating, although a reader accustomed to historical argument and with limited knowledge of the techniques of literary criticism may find them faintly bewildering in places. Nonetheless, it is in this part of the analysis that the work provides valuable guidance to the historian of science.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/597725
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 598771
Date: 8 2009
Author(s): Andrew Dudley
Abstract: See Andrew, “Time Zones and Jetlag: The Flows and Phases of World Cinema,” in
World Cinemas,Transnational Perspectives, ed. Natasa Durovicová and Kathleen Newman (forthcoming).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/599587
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 603531
Date: 10 2009
Author(s): Stokes Christopher
Abstract: Coleridge,
Shorter Works, 2:1118–19.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/600876
Journal Title: The Journal of Modern History
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 605587
Date: 6 2010
Author(s): Coleman Charly
Abstract: Ibid., 1:11–12, 2:443–49, quote on 1:12.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/651614
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 651998
Date: 07 2010
Author(s): Kitts Margo
Abstract: Johann Huizinga,
Homo Ludens: A Study of the Play‐Element in Culture(Boston: Beacon, 1950); Adolf E. Jensen,Myth and Cult among Primitive Peoples, trans. Marianna Tax Choldin and Wolfgang Weissleder (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1963); Pierre Smith, “Aspects of the Organization of Rites,” inBetween Belief and Transgression: Structuralist Essays in Religion, History and Myth, ed. Michael Izard and Pierre Smith and trans. John Leavitt (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1979), 103–28.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/651708
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 651999
Date: 10 2010
Author(s): Walter Gregory
Abstract: For instance, Hans Urs von Balthasar’s provocative account of the Eucharist: Hans Urs von Balthasar,
Theodramatik(Einselden: Johannes, 1980), 3:363–78. Von Balthasar’s use of dramatic conceptuality seems to satisfy these demands by offering the Eucharist as a phenomenon that is surprising and free yet deeply imbedded within the economy of creation as a drama. Also of significance would be Bernd Wannenwetsch,Political Worship: Ethics for Christian Citizens, trans. Margaret Kohl (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2004).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/654823
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 655202
Date: 8 2010
Author(s): Hammerschlag Sarah
Abstract: Michaël Lévinas refers here to Blanchot's political activities relating to the Algerian war. Unlike Lévinas who always considered De Gaulle a war hero, Blanchot saw in him the reappearance of fascist leadership. In September 1960 Blanchot was one of the initial drafters and signers of the “Manifeste de 121,” a document articulating its support of those who were being prosecuted for aiding and abbetting the FLN (Le Front de Libération Nationale).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/655206
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 655202
Date: 8 2010
Author(s): Hammerschlag Sarah
Abstract: Thanks to Clark Gilpin for helping me to see this double displacement.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/655207
Journal Title: Isis
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 652685
Date: 9 2010
Author(s): Bono James J.
Abstract: For an approach to the issues raised by this Focus section see James J. Bono, “Perception, Living Matter, Cognitive Systems, Immune Networks: A Whiteheadian Future for Science Studies,”
Configurations, 2005,13:135–181.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/655792
Journal Title: Modern Philology
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 653501
Date: 08 2010
Author(s): Schildgen Brenda Deen
Abstract: Guy Guldentops, “The Sagacity of Bees: An Aristotelian Topos in Thirteenth-Century Philosophy,” in Steel, Guldentops, and Beullens,
Aristotle's Animals, 296.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/656448
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 656725
Date: 01 01, 2011
Author(s): Pranger Burcht
Abstract: Augustine,
Confessiones13.38.53; Chadwick, 305.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/656607
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 656725
Date: 01 01, 2011
Author(s): Thistleton Anthony C.
Abstract: These criticisms and oversights notwithstanding, there are many redeeming aspects to the book. Insofar as hermeneutics and exegesis are essential for any understanding of religious texts and traditions, Thistleton's work is a good way to be introduced to a complex history, the thorny debates, and the diverse approaches that have come to constitute its history and development. And the copious references that are made throughout and at the end of each chapter will enable readers to probe more deeply into a thinker, subject, or historical period of interest to them.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/659287
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 659348
Date: 4 2011
Author(s): Landy Joshua
Abstract: It is true, of course, that we have a much harder time postulating an author for
Adaptation—that is, working out what an “ideal” Kaufman would have wanted the overall effect of his film to be—than postulating an author for the average Hollywood movie. Still, it is surely not the case thatAdaptation“undermines the concept of the author as a unifying origin and legitimation,” as Karen Diehl claims (Karen Diehl, “Once upon an Adaptation: Traces of the Authorial on Film,” inBooks in Motion: Adaptation, Intertextuality, Authorship, ed. Mireia Aragay [Amsterdam, 2005], p. 100). It may be harder to know what Kaufman is up to than what James Cameron (say) is up to, but Kaufman is clearly up tosomething, and the film bears if anything a more powerful stamp of an original vision than that average movie we find easier to read. In fact,Adaptationhas only solidified Kaufman's reputation as a filmmaker with an idiosyncratic and internally consistent way of seeing the world. (Although cinema is a collaborative enterprise, it is reasonable to imagine Spike Jonze and company collectively seeking to realize Kaufman's design.) Far from putting inherited notions of authorship into question, then, it has comfortably positioned Kaufman as the “unifying origin” of his various works.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/659355
Journal Title: Modern Philology
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 660269
Date: 08 2011
Author(s): Guenther Genevieve
Abstract: For the original argument that early modern drama evacuated spiritual forms of their content, see Stephen Greenblatt, “Shakespeare and the Exorcists,” in
Shakespearean Negotiations: The Circulation of Social Energy in Renaissance England(Berkeley: University of California Press, 1988), 94–128.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/662147
Journal Title: Ethics
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 662056
Date: 01 01, 2012
Author(s): Bowman Sharon
Abstract: In sum, this is one of the most important books on selves or the practical side of personhood in the last decade. It is also well written; the particular arguments are virtually always clear, and it is not too hard to keep track of their role within in the larger argument of the book. Some portions rise to an almost literary style and provide a rich survey of key ideas in twentieth-century French philosophy, while others engage quite originally with scholarship in moral psychology and theories of self-knowledge that will be more familiar to analytic readers. This work also complements the more detailed ethical theory on Larmore’s other books. Despite its relative inattention to volitional aspects of practical identity, and some questionable moves in the critique of authenticity, then, this work is still highly recommended.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/663580
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 662286
Date: 01 01, 2012
Author(s): LaCocque André
Abstract: The Captivity of Innocencesuccessfully concludes an innovative study of primeval myth in J’s Genesis. Its argument about exilic authorship serves as a springboard for a free and erudite exploration of biblical concerns with name, exile, and the paradoxes of divine-human relations. Very few biblical scholars today can compass this range of biblical, literary, and philosophical literature with such finesse. At a time when biblical studies incorporate a wider range of methods than ever, LaCocque, like Roland Barthes (whom he cites), powerfully combines traditional and more contemporary intellectual paradigms. Advanced students and scholars will find inThe Captivity of Innocencea far-reaching and engaging reading of Genesis 11 by a virtuoso of biblical studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/663737
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 662286
Date: 01 01, 2012
Author(s): Regan Ethna
Abstract: The text covers a lot of ground, delving into many of the touch points between theology and human rights and endeavoring to demonstrate how those points can be sources of mutual enrichment rather than conflict. At times the comprehensive scope of the text, which draws on the insights of so many, makes it a challenging read and leaves the reader wanting more development and illustration of the fruits of the author’s argument. Overall, the text is an important contribution to the constructive engagement between theology and human rights discourse and is a serious challenge to those in either camp who would peremptorily reject the insights of the other.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/663745
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 665386
Date: 10 01, 2012
Author(s): Walton Heather,
Abstract: The cultural and social sciences are welcome to examine and critique theology and Christian practice, and theology can profitably learn from these studies, but the studies themselves are not theology. To be theology, even in an interdisciplinary sense, the work must become constructive and speak to the
religiousthought and practice of specific communities or faith traditions. In any given community, theology can become a displaced language in need of renewal, but theology can also uncover the displaced or implicit religion within the seemingly secular. To do this well, theology must remain in critical tension with the cultural sciences, including literature. The result may well be deconstructive, but such radical critique is necessary for any living tradition.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/668266
Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 669643
Date: 05 01, 2013
Author(s): Vásquez Manuel A.
Abstract: In sum: while it has it flaws, this book is one of the most comprehensive and up-to-date surveys of the field of theories of religion around. It is worth the cover price for that alone, which makes it definitely recommendable. Those who want to learn about the current state of theory, especially if they tend in the realist direction, will find this book very useful. Constructivists acquainted with theory will likely find it less so.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/669654
Journal Title: Journal of Near Eastern Studies
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 671448
Date: 10 01, 2013
Author(s): Feder Yitzhaq
Abstract: For a different view on the function of conceptual blending, cf. E. G. Slingerland, “Conceptual Blending, Somatic Marking and Normativity: A Case Example from Ancient Chinese,”
Cognitive Linguistics16 (2005): 557–84.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/671434
Journal Title: Current Anthropology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 668652
Date: 10 01, 2013
Author(s): Csordas Thomas
Abstract: Pablo Wright observes that while I leave behind Geertz’s concept of a cultural system with respect to morality, I retain the Geertzian concern with symbols and meaning. I would not dispute Wright’s statement that meaning is the master concept on a methodological level prior to the substantive issue of evil but would stress that in addition to idiom, code, practice, and symbol, experience must figure into a comprehensive account. Wright’s evocative references to “moral installation in the world” (one might consider terms like investment, suffusion, and tonality, as well as installation) and morality as a “practiced ontology in the micropolitics of social life” deserve further elaboration. Wright endorses a pluralized notion of moralities, but I reiterate that even more important is an adjectival sense of moral rather than the nominal morality. Like Parkin, Wright poses the question of how to reintroduce the ethnographically salient notions of cosmological and radical evil once evil is first construed as a human and intersubjective phenomenon. The answer is to ask how these dimensions come into play in the experiential immediacy of social life, for example, how a cosmological battle between angels and devils is experienced concretely on the human scale. Finally, he suggests that concepts of power from Otto and the shadow from Jung may be alternatives to the notion of evil, though I rejoin that they are just as much in need of critique with respect to Christian overtones. They may be valuable for the study of morality but are not suitable replacements for evil in the sense for which I have argued.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/672210
Journal Title: Modern Philology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 673367
Date: 02 01, 2014
Author(s): Lehnhof Kent R.
Abstract: Critchley uses the term in a discussion of Levinas and politics. Noting that government tends to become tyrannical when left to itself, Critchley commends the way Levinas’s ethical ideas can cultivate forms of “dissensual emancipatory praxis” that “work against the consensual idyll of the state, not in order to do away with the state or consensus, but to bring about its endless betterment” (“Five Problems in Levinas’s View of Politics,” 183).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/673478
Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 674410
Date: 02 01, 2014
Author(s): Rüpke Jörg
Abstract: See the analysis of Metzger (
Religion, Geschichte, Nation). For the modern spread of the paradigm, see Leigh E. Schmidt, “A History of All Religions,”Journal of the Early Republic24 (2004): 327–34.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/674241
Journal Title: Modern Philology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 673750
Date: 08 01, 2014
Author(s): Hequembourg Stephen
Abstract: See George Herbert, “The Forerunners” and “Jordan (I),” in
George Herbert: The Complete English Poems, ed. John Tobin (New York: Penguin, 2005).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/676498
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 677726
Date: 10 01, 2014
Author(s): Urbaniak Jakub
Abstract: Depoortere,
Badiou and Theology, 123–24.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/677288
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 673747
Date: 03 01, 2014
Abstract: Žižek, Slavoj.
Demanding the Impossible. Cambridge: Polity Press, 2013. $14.95 (paper). 160 pp.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/677379
Journal Title: Renaissance Drama
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 673118
Date: 09 01, 2014
Author(s): Huth Kimberly
Abstract: Wayne C. Booth, “Metaphor as Rhetoric: The Problem of Evaluation,” in Sacks,
On Metaphor, 61.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/678121
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 677726
Date: 10 01, 2014
Author(s): Peperzak Adriaan T.
Abstract: Peperzak in this book also offers continental thinkers an appealing alternative to the theological turn of phenomenology as practiced by Jean-Luc Marion and others. While Peperzak takes seriously the idea that “God cannot be investigated or explained … because God is not given as a describable phenomenon,” this realization does not turn his phenomenology away from the investigation of rational thinking because for Peperzak reason itself has to be rethought in terms of the intersubjective encounters between nonthematizable—human and divine—sayers (121). Consequently, much more than some of the thinkers of the theological turn, Peperzak’s work maintains a broadly humanist sensibility and a conviction that theological thinking and philosophy can be integrated quite well, provided the latter does not close itself off in autarky. In his humanism, Peperzak echoes the best elements in the philosophical style both of his teacher Paul Ricoeur and the philosophical tradition of his own Catholic faith, although he implicitly critiques the former for insisting too vehemently on the autonomy of philosophy (128) and calls out the latter for separating “natural reason” from faith (182–86). For his own part, Peperzak hopes to maintain an open space between faith and reason: “I do not see any valid argument against the integration of philosophical insights into a faith-inspired theology … neither would I protest if an integrated reflection of the Christian community about its faith would call itself
philosophia” (160). For the many who share similar sentiments today,Thinking about Thinkingwill make a valuable guide to the conversation of philosophy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/679208
Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 527516
Date: 4 2005
Author(s): Popkin Jeremy D.
Abstract: This book is a very original and important contribution to both the study of autobiography and that of historiography. In addition to his analysis of autobiographies of historians, Popkin gives new insights about the relationship between narrative and history. Maybe every historian should write an autobiography at some stage as an essential step in his or her professional development.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/ahr.111.2.429
Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: Brill
Issue: 526084
Date: 10 2005
Author(s): Mooij J. J. A.
Abstract: Closely related to the philosophical problem of consciousness of time was the question of the meaning of time and duration in psychology and in literature. Although Mooij mentions William James's notion of “specious present” in passing, he fails to explicate James's perception of time, which attempted to provide an empiricist account of our temporal concepts through the influence of John Locke (p. 197). Apart from this caveat, the book's strength lies in its perceptiveness and breadth of interpretation of the history of the concept of time. Mooij's accuracy in comprehending and in transmitting the essence of such difficult and complicated philosophies is remarkable.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/ahr.111.4.1130
Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Issue: 526084
Date: 10 2005
Author(s): Gutterman David S.
Abstract: Ultimately it is at times unclear what is gained in making these comparisons or if such analysis “enhances our understanding of the relationship between religious narratives and politics” (p. 92). What precisely is revealed in grouping these movements together, other than that political crisis invites prophetic criticism? Gutterman carefully unpacks the readings of shared Biblical texts, and he skillfully details contextual and interpretative differences. But one wishes he had gone beyond these descriptive endeavors to construct a more nuanced account of the relationship between religion and politics and, more importantly, of the specifically religious grounds of the activism he examines. While Gutterman can be theoretically deft—in exploring the relation between narrative and politics (p. 21) or garden/wilderness metaphors (p. 47)—he is not fully engaged with the literature on political religion, often citing unrepresentative figures like William Connolly or Stephen Carter. He is a sharp writer with an eye for interesting problems and material. I applaud his engagement with important issues and also the ambition of his thinking. But his central categories require further explication, and this book speaks to the need for more conversations across disciplines.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/ahr.111.4.1221
Journal Title: The Journal of Politics
Publisher: University of Missouri Press
Issue: jpolitics.68.issue-2
Date: 05 2004
Author(s): Eubanks Cecil
Abstract: Both
Faith and PhilosophyandEric Voegelin's Dialogues with the Postmodernsilluminate and challenge the assumptions in Voegelin's philosophy and lead readers in new directions for Voegelinian scholarship. They are indispensable readings for students of political philosophy in their examination of transcendence, philosophy, and politics. By seeing Voegelin as a postmodern thinker and by showing his exchange with Strauss, both of these books provide us with a broader context to understand Voegelin's political philosophy. As part of the University of Missouri Press' new series, bothFaith and PhilosophyandEric Voegelin's Dialogues with the Postmodernsprovide intellectually provocative and serious-minded secondary works on Eric Voegelin and his ultimate place in political philosophy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1111/j.1468-2508.2006.00420_20.x
Journal Title: Renaissance Quarterly
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Issue: 594996
Date: 6 2, 2005
Author(s): Anderson Judith H
Abstract: The very centrality of its questions to literary studies may be the greatest handicap for
Translating Investments.Words That Matter, especially in its recovery of grammatical theory, had more surprises page-for-page. Here the big ideas are perforce more familiar, the innovations more incremental. The reward, however, is a fine sense of metaphor as a cultural project across an especially broad range of terrain in early modern England. Anderson insists, and teaches us to insist, on the local, historical conditions of metaphor’s torpor and vitality, how writers thought about and went about killing and quickening the trope she calls “the scaffolding of human culture” (216).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1353/ren.2008.0264
Journal Title: Contagion: Journal of Violence, Mimesis, and Culture
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Issue: contagion.21.issue-2014
2014
Author(s): Schwager‡ Raymund
Abstract: Schwager's own (?) translation from: Horstmann,
Das Untier, 100.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/contagion.21.2014.0029
Journal Title: CR: The New Centennial Review
Publisher: Galaxia-Gutemberg
Issue: crnewcentrevi.14.issue-3
Date: 12 2007
Author(s): Valéry Paul
Abstract: Benjamin also notes: “Every present day is determined by the images that are synchronic with it: each ‘now’ is the now of a particular recognizability. In it, truth is charged to the bursting point with time. (This point of explosion, and nothing else, is the death of the
intentio, which thus coincides with the birth of authentic historical time, the time of truth.) It is not that what is past casts its light on what is present, or what is present its light on what is past; rather, image is that wherein what has been comes together in a flash with the now to form a constellation” (2002, N3,1). The two great related demands made by T. S. Eliot in “Tradition and the Individual Talent” will also be recalled here: his call for the exercise of the “historical sense” as a juxtaposition of significant events from discontinuous times, which in turn produces an “impersonal” (nonintentional) effect. These demands define the representation of history in works such asThe Waste Landand Pound’s early cantos.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/crnewcentrevi.14.3.0001
Journal Title: QED: A Journal in GLBTQ Worldmaking
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Issue: qed.1.issue-1
Date: 4 2014
Author(s): Wight Jules
Abstract: James Poniewozik, “When Did Chelsea Manning Become Chelsea Manning?”
Time, August 28, 2013,http://entertainment.time.com/2013/08/28/when-did-chelsea-manning-become-chelsea-manning/.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/qed.1.1.0118
Journal Title: Classical Antiquity
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: ca.2006.25.issue-1
Date: 4 2006
Author(s): Moatti Claudia
Abstract: AbstractThis paper isolates movement as a topic for analysis in Roman imperial history. Movement is regarded under three aspects: translation (of texts, practices, ideas), migration (of officials, merchants, students, etc.), and communication (i.e. the movement of written documents). Interrelationships among the three aspects of movement are identified and discussed, as are the shared impact of translation, migration, and communication on issues of cultural and social identity and political negotiation and control. The article argues that movement changes the role of the state as well as relations between individual and states, augments the use of writing in society, transforms identities, and gives impulse to internal and external regulations. The implications of movement are understood as both pragmatic and formal, altering relations to space and time and influencing ways of organizing and thinking. The author surveys current work in the field and identifies potential areas for future research. The paper draws heavily on both literary and documentary sources and discusses material from the late republic through late antiquity, paying particular attention to continuities and discontinuities between early and later periods of the Roman empire.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/ca.2006.25.1.109
Journal Title: Classical Antiquity
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: ca.2013.32.issue-1
Date: 04 2013
Abstract: This article argues that the end of Tacitus's
Dialogus de Oratoribusis inconclusive in ways that draw attention to the difficulty of interpretation not onlyofthe dialogue, as by modern scholars, but alsointhe dialogue, as by its leading characters. The inconclusiveness is especially marked by a commonly noted, but little discussed, feature of the end: when the rest of the characters laugh at the point of departure, Tacitus himself does not. Arguing that this difference of affective response on the part of the characters prefigures differences in interpretive response on the part of readers, the article identifies different strains in recent scholarship: pessimistic and optimistic. Both forms of response entail an attribution of a “poetics of conspiracy” (Hinds) to the ultimate speaker of the dialogue, the author Tacitus, and a “hermeneutics of suspicion” (Ricoeur) to its reader. At the same time, the author's double-position, as character and author, between narrated event and narration of the event to the reader, suggests that the other characters in the dialogue may, like the author and reader, also exercise such poetics and hermeneutics on one another and themselves. The article ends with thecomparandumof the first satire of Tacitus's near contemporary, Juvenal, suggesting that, in the case of these works that can look with hindsight on the social and political past of the Early Empire, their modes of transmission and reception may be politically determined (e.g., as conspiratorial, suspicious) but may also demonstrate, within the restrictions of social and political determinations, a high degree of contingency, reflexivity, and autonomy. Such possibilities suggest that the text itself is part of a pragmatic and performative tradition of the kind enacted by its characters, in addition to a tradition of the production of (comparatively static and unfree) “literary” works.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/ca.2013.32.1.1
Journal Title: Journal of the American Musicological Society
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: jams.2002.55.issue-3
Date: 12 2002
Author(s): Calcagno Mauro
Abstract: Conventional views of text/music relationships in early Italian opera focus on the imitation of affections. But by dealing exclusively with the referential meanings of texts (e.g., emotions, images, and concepts) these views overlook an important aspect of music's interaction with language. In opera, music also imitates language's contextual and communicative functions—i.e., discourse, as studied today by the subfield of linguistics called pragmatics. In his operas Monteverdi fully realized Peri's ideal of “imitating in song a person speaking” (“imitar col canto chi parla”) by musically emphasizing those context-dependent meanings that emerge especially in ordinary language and that are prominent in dramatic texts, as opposed to poetry and prose. Such meanings are manifest whenever words such as “I,” “here,” and “now” appear— words called “deictics”—with the function of situating the speaker/singer's utterances in a specific time and place. Monteverdi highlights deictics through melodic and rhythmic emphases, repetition, shifts of meter, style, and harmony, as part of a strategy to create a musical language suited to opera as a genre and to singers as actors. In
Il ritorno d'Ulisse in patriaandL'incoronazione di Poppea, this strategy serves large-scale dramaturgical aims with respect to the relationships among space, time, and character identity, highlighting issues also discussed within the contemporary intellectual context.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/jams.2002.55.3.383
Journal Title: Journal of the American Musicological Society
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: jams.2012.65.issue-1
Date: April 2012
Abstract: In his 1986 essay on the intersections between music theory, phenomenology, and perception, David Lewin develops a heuristic model through which to come to terms with the constitution of multiple and heterogeneous perceptions of musical events. One of his principal vehicles for demonstrating this phenomenological turn is the well-known analysis of Schubert's “Morgengruß.” The present article considers the ramifications of Lewin's methodology, particularly with respect to the experience of time that emerges from Lewin's mobilization of the heuristic perception model, by approaching it from the perspective of Husserl's
Phenomenology of Internal Time Consciousness. This perspective reveals a superposition of temporalities as well as a superposition of languages as the underlying factors through which Lewin's analysis is produced.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/jams.2012.65.1.179
Journal Title: Journal of Palestine Studies
Publisher: The University of California Press
Issue: jps.2014.43.issue-3
Date: 5 1, 2014
Author(s): Mardam-Bey Farouk
Abstract: For a good description of this general atmosphere, see Denis Sieffert, “La ‘Sarkozye’ médiatique et intellectuelle,” in
Sarkozy au Proche-Orient, ed. Farouk Mardam-Bey (Paris: Sindbad/Actes Sud, 2010).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/jps.2014.43.3.26
Journal Title: Journal of the Society of Architectural Historians
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: jsah.2011.70.issue-1
Date: 03 2011
Author(s): Ortenberg Alexander
Abstract: Chapman, "Unrealized Designs," 5.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/jsah.2011.70.1.38
Journal Title: Journal of the Society of Architectural Historians
Publisher: University of Hawai’i Press
Issue: jsah.2012.71.issue-4
Date: 12 2010
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur,
Time and Narrative, trans. Kathleen Blamey and David Pellauer (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1985).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/jsah.2012.71.4.564
Journal Title: Law and Literature
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: lal.2005.17.issue-1
Date: 03 2005
Author(s): Hiddleston Jane
Abstract: This article examines the conflicts of 1990s Algeria and Assia Djebar's critique of these events using the flexibility and experimentation of the novel form. The entrenched government of the Front de Libération Nationale has been engaged in an ongoing conflict with a group of radical, underground Islamist terrorists, and the result has been that both parties attempt to quash any political or cultural dissent. The government clings to its policy of strict Arabization, while the Islamists fight for the invention of a thoroughly new spiritual, Islamic community, necessarily in harmony with itself. Djebar's
Le Blanc de l'Algérie (Algerian White)challenges both the Islamists and the government by exposing the limits of their stultifying rhetoric, and by describing the author's own experiences of bereavement using an alternative language resistant to generic norms. Djebar upholds unique, creative forms of commemoration that refuse to conform to the demands of Islamist ideology or sanctioned political rhetoric, and that can mimic her deceased friends' own singular art forms. At the same time, Djebar's commemorative text seeks a language free from convention-bound formulae and able to transcend the linear progress of a narrative necessarily evolving through time. In this sense,Le Blanc de l'Algérieuses both content and form to deconstruct the layers and masks of commemorative discourse, and the political misuse of those masks. The novel engages with the difficulties of creating an appropriate discourse of mourning while stretching and opening out existing rhetorical forms.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/lal.2005.17.1.1
Journal Title: 19th-Century Music
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: ncm.2001.25.issue-2-3
Date: 11 01, 2001
Author(s): Webster James
Abstract: 3. A brief account of the crucial role of the 1790s in these developments, focusing on the complementary achievements of Haydn and Beethoven. For Beethoven, Haydn's and Mozart's music was, precisely, modern. Together, he and Haydn dominated the Viennese scene, producing ever-more-imposing masterworks in every genre except opera. This explicitly modernist orientation was fostered, if not indeed in part created, by their patrons. After 1800 Beethoven maintained and further developed this same tradition. These years "between" Enlightenment and Romanticism were no mere transition; they constituted an equally weighty phase, on the same historical-structural "level," as those that preceded and followed it. Concomitantly, Romanticism as such did not become predominant in music until 1815, in Viennese music (except for the Lied) perhaps not even until 1828/30. For both reasons, it makes sense to regard the beginning of the music-historical nineteenth century as having been "delayed," until around 1815 or 1830.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/ncm.2001.25.2-3.108
Journal Title: Religion and American Culture: A Journal of Interpretation
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: rac.2003.13.issue-1
Date: 01 01, 2003
Author(s): Flake Kathleen
Abstract: The L.D.S Church's use of commemorative rituals and narrative history to simultaneously adapt and maintain identity is not unique, but it is uniquely available to analysis because of the immediacy of the change and the Saints' devotion to record-keeping. Thus, the drama of LDS survival during the Progressive Era illuminates age-old religious strategies for adaptation to social norms, which strategies preserve the faithful's confidence in the timelessness of their god's moral and ecclesiastical order. More narrowly, these events in American church history are critical for understanding how the civilly disobedient Saints finally accepted the rule of federal law without losing their religion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/rac.2003.13.1.69
Journal Title: Rhetorica: A Journal of the History of Rhetoric
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: rh.1993.11.issue-3
Date: 08 01, 1993
Author(s): Sharon-Zisser Shirley
Abstract: Abstract:The concem with progress and utility is shared by nineteenth-century scientists, philosophers, and rhetoricians, leading to significant correspondences among their discourses. This concern is manifest, for example, in the way in which several rhetorical treatises of the nineteenth century regard the distinction between a figure and a trope, which had been a common part of rhetorical theory since the time of Quintilian, as useless and anachronistic. By examining three nineteenth-century articulations of the justifications for erasing the trope/figure distinction from the cultural repertoire, this essay reveals structural and semantic parallels between these rhetorical treatises and the discourses of evolution and utilitarianism. Thus, the essay locates the source of the synonymity which the terms "trope" and "figure" have acquired in contemporary critical metalanguage in Victorian ideologies of progress and of the unprofitability and consequent discardability of the ancient.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/rh.1993.11.3.321
Journal Title: Rhetorica: A Journal of the History of Rhetoric
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: rh.1999.17.issue-4
Date: 11 01, 1999
Author(s): Selby Gary S.
Abstract: Abstract:This essay argues that in 1 Thessalonians, Paul uses eschatological discourse—language about the end of hme—in order to evoke a symbolic world-view in which his readers become God's elect, living at the end of time and awaiting the sudden, imminent retum of Christ from heaven. This self-identification explains their present misfortunes, while at the sam.e time demanding that they fulfill the ethical and moral demands of the Christian faith. More broadly, this essay points to the role that eschatological discourse played within early Christianity in general, suggesting that it formed a central, paradigmatic drama which helped to define ontological and teleological reality for the movement's adherents.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/rh.1999.17.4.385
Journal Title: Rhetorica: A Journal of the History of Rhetoric
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: rh.2001.19.issue-4
Date: 11 01, 2001
Author(s): Cook Eleanor
Abstract: On enigma as a rhetorical figure: a brief history in the rhetoricians, encyclopedists, and patristic commentators from Aristotle to Dante's time, with a rhetorical analysis of the figure. Special attention is given to Augustine in the
De trinitateXV on St. Paul's well-known "in aenigmate" (I Cor.13:12). Some implications of Augustine's linking of the figurative and the figural (typological, historical) are considered, with a re-examination of Auerbach's "Figura" on this question. The importance for our own reading of rhetoric in relation to history and poetry is stressed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/rh.2001.19.4.349
Journal Title: Symbolic Interaction
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: si.1999.22.issue-2
Date: August 1999
Author(s): TenHouten Warren D.
Abstract: It is argued that autobiographical texts, such as life-historical interviews, provide the richest possible source of information about a person's temporality and a culture's historical past. It is proposed that time-consciousness can be inferred from such texts. To this end, ethnographic and other studies of Australian Aboriginal time-consciousness were used to construct a seven-part model of patterned-cyclical time-consciousness. Turning these seven attributes of patterned-cyclical time-consciousness into their opposites yields seven features of one-dimensional, ordinary-linear time-consciousness, thereby establishing a structured temporal polarity. A lexical-level, content-analytic methodology, Neurocognitive Hierarchical Categorization Analysis (NHCA), is introduced, in which folk-concepts of time from
Roget's International Thesauruswere used to construct wordlist indicators for 9 of the 14 definitional components. Then, using NHCA for a comparative analysis of texts consisting of life-historical interviews, earlier results of an empirical study were brieflv re-presented. Australian Aborigines, compared to Euro-Australian controls, used a significantly smaller proportion of words for an index of ordinary-linear time but a higher proportion of words for an index of patterned-cyclical time, indicating a time-consciousness that is primarily patterned-cyclical rather than linear. Females were less linear and more patterned-cyclical than males in both cultures. These cross-cultural results contribute predictive validity to the proposed polarity of time-consciousness. Implications for the culture-and-cognition paradox and its resolution in dual-brain theory are addressed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/si.1999.22.2.121
Journal Title: Symbolic Interaction
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: si.2011.34.issue-1
Date: 02 2011
Author(s): Bernasconi Oriana
Abstract: Sociology and neighboring disciplines have produced different analytic tools to examine the dialogical relationship between individuals and society ("narrative work," "identity work," "moral career," "moral breakdown"). However, the question of how individuals negotiate the interpretation of personal experience over their lifetimes in a changing cultural context remains unexplored. This article introduces narrative elasticity as a feature of narrative work and as a time-sensitive analytic tool for conducting inquiries into processes of temporal retraction and expansion of what storytellers conceive as the normal order of significance. The application of this tool to the analysis of mature and elderly Chileans' life stories shows how cultural change occurs at the individual level, considers factors that motivate and inhibit processes of reinterpretation of personal experience, and identifies different levels at which it operates.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/si.2011.34.1.20
Journal Title: Journal of Law and Religion
Publisher: Hamline University School of Law
Issue: i243306
Date: 1 1, 1984
Author(s): Burt Emily Fowler
Abstract: Cover, Obligation, supra note 200, at 74.
74
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1051152
Journal Title: Journal of Law and Religion
Publisher: Hamline University School of Law
Issue: i243325
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Lonergan Patrick McKinley
Abstract: Bernard Lonergan, Method: Trend and Variations, in A Third
Collection 13, 21 (F. Crowe ed., Paulist Press 1985)
Lonergan
21
13
Method: Trend and Variations, in A Third Collection
1985
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1051496
Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i243719
Date: 8 1, 1982
Author(s): Fenn Lawrence E.
Abstract: Richard Fenn, Liturgies and Trials (New York,
1982)
Fenn
Liturgies and Trials
1982
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1062385
Journal Title: Monographs of the Society for Research in Child Development
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i249351
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Strayer James E.
Abstract: The cross-cultural program of research presented here is about matters of temporal persistence-personal persistence and cultural persistence-and about solution strategies for solving the paradox of "sameness-in-change." The crux of this paradox resides in the fact that, on threat of otherwise ceasing to be recognizable as a self, all of us must satisfy at least two constitutive conditions. The first of these is that selves are obliged to keep moving or die, and, so, must continually change. The second is that selves must also somehow remain the same, lest all notions of moral responsibility and any commitment to an as yet unrealized future become nonsensical. Although long understood as a problem demanding the attention of philosophers, we argue that this same paradox arises in the ordinary course of identity development and dictates the different developmental routes taken by culturally mainstream and Aboriginal youth in coming to the identity-preserving conclusion that they and others are somehow continuous through time. Findings from a set of five studies are presented. The first and second studies document the development and refinement of a method for parsing and coding what young people say on the topic of personal persistence or self-continuity. Both studies demonstrate that it is not only possible to seriously engage children as young as age 9 or 10 years in detailed and codable discussions about personal persistence, but that their reasoning concerning such matters typically proceeds in an orderly and increasingly sophisticated manner over the course of their early identity development. Our third study underscores the high personal costs of failing to sustain a workable sense of personal persistence by showing that failures to warrant self-continuity are strongly associated with increased suicide risk in adolescence. Study four documents this same relation between continuity and suicide, this time at the macrolevel of whole cultures, and shows that efforts by Aboriginal groups to preserve and promote their culture are associated with dramatic reductions in rates of youth suicide. In the final study we show that different default strategies for resolving the paradox of personal persistence and change-Narrative and Essentialist strategies-distinctly characterize Aboriginal and non-Aboriginal youth.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1166217
Journal Title: Review of Educational Research
Publisher: American Educational Research Association
Issue: i249721
Date: 10 1, 1989
Author(s): Zumwalt Dona M.
Abstract: Although research on teacher cognition is no longer in its infancy, it has largely failed to affect the ways in which programs and teachers are evaluated. In accordance with what Raths and Katz (1985) call the Goldilocks Principle, the notion of teacher cognition may simply be "too big" (too general and vague) for mundane application. This review was designed to compare alternative approaches to the evaluation of teacher cognition and to consider ways in which the literature of this subfield may be discouraging its application. Teacher cognition is defined as pre- or inservice teachers' self-reflections; beliefs and knowledge about teaching, students, and content; and awareness of problem-solving strategies endemic to classroom teaching. This paper describes and critiques five different approaches to the evaluation of teacher cognition: (a) direct and noninferential ways of assessing teacher belief, (b) methods that rely on contextual analyses of teachers' descriptive language, (c) taxonomies for assessing self-reflection and metacognition, (d) multimethod evaluations of pedagogical content knowledge and beliefs, and (e) concept mapping. In the final section, ambiguities and paradoxes inherent in this literature are discussed, particularly the continued use of rhetoric associated with process--product research. Questions regarding the ecological validity of measurement tools and tasks are raised. A suggestion is made that it may be politically exigent to begin relating measures of teacher cognition to valued student outcomes.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1170760
Journal Title: Educational Researcher
Publisher: American Educational Research Association
Issue: i250221
Date: 2 1, 1991
Author(s): Valdes Harriet Bjerrum
Abstract: Every text aims to seduce its reader. If the text at the same time lays claim to having scientific value, we readers must ask whether seduction stands in the way of truth. As a concept, seduction lies halfway between an assault and conversation. As opposed to assault, seduction conveys a dimension of voluntarily being swept off one's feet. As opposed to conversation, seduction implies that one loses one's senses for a moment. Who, then, is really subject and who is object in seduction? The thesis I will argue here is that the readership's or audience's only chance of taking on the role of subjects, in a textual seduction, is to lose their senses first. Rather than being an assault against scientific ethics, seduction is a necessary premise for a sensible conversation to take place.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1176114
Journal Title: Curriculum Inquiry
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers, Inc.
Issue: i250466
Date: 4 1, 1987
Author(s): White Marcy Singer
Abstract: This article examines challenges to discourses of curriculum research and practice by the growing fascination with alternative forms of representation. The author takes as a starting point a cluster of exchanges with students that were situated in a study of a classroom in which music and image joined word and number as essential sources for learning about a context irreducibly distant from students' own: the past. In the study, what seemed to make painting, photography, film, and poetry potent sources of understanding was their capacity to bridge the gap between a remote, textbook past, and the sensory world of the students' present; these forms expressed to students not only the outline of events, but also what the events signified and felt like. Yet, in juxtaposing students' comments against discourses of historiography, philosophical aesthetics, and history teaching and learning, one soon recognizes that the very ability of the arts to communicate a sense of immediacy and human intention is what makes them problematic as sources of historical insight: in pushing out the boundaries of "acceptable" forms beyond discursive text, one also pushes up against assumptions about the nature and purposes of knowledge and inquiry. While the starting point of this article is historical inquiry, the author argues that the difficulties of representing experiences of persons in contexts removed in time or space, and of making sense of others' representations, are relevant to other forms of inquiry; the challenge of the arts to historical inquiry is paralleled in other fields, and no less in educational research.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1180164
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251513
Date: 7 1, 1964
Author(s): Fuchs Norman
Abstract: "it is something which cannot be exhausted in any one event
but which every man experiences in his own time" (pp. 3-14, esp. 13)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1201465
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251515
Date: 1 1, 1938
Author(s): Hopper Ted L.
Abstract: "Denis Devlin," Transition 27 (April-May 1938): 289.
April-May
289
27
Transition
1938
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1201506
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251499
Date: 1 1, 1969
Author(s): Ricoeur David
Abstract: "State and Violence," p. 246.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1201954
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251527
Date: 1 1, 1954
Author(s): Proust Matei
Abstract: Ibid., p. 911.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1202111
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251505
Date: 7 1, 1971
Author(s): Crossan John Dominic
Abstract: Luke 15
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1202136
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251561
Date: 10 1, 1981
Author(s): PutnamAbstract: Hilary Putnam so interprets an argument of Wittgenstein's in Reason, Truth and History (New
York: Cambridge University Press, 1981), pp. 123-24.
Putnam
123
Hilary Putnam so interprets an argument of Wittgenstein's in Reason, Truth and History
1981
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1203420
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251577
Date: 10 1, 1975
Author(s): creativity Eric J.
Abstract: creativity, Eliade attributes a "religious" importance to books (Labyrinth [n. 14 above], pp.
62-63)
creativity
religious
62
Labyrinth
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1203955
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251578
Date: 1 1, 1965
Author(s): de Chardin C. Allen
Abstract: Pierre Teil-
hard de Chardin's The Phenomenon of Man (New York: Harper & Row, 1965).
de Chardin
The Phenomenon of Man
1965
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1204099
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251616
Date: 7 1, 1989
Author(s): Iser M. B.
Abstract: Wolfgang Iser, "The Pattern of Negativity in Beckett's Prose," in Prospecting: From Reader
Response to Literary Anthropology (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1989), pp. 140-
52
Iser
The Pattern of Negativity in Beckett's Prose
140
Prospecting: From Reader Response to Literary Anthropology
1989
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1206401
Journal Title: Stanford Law Review
Publisher: Stanford University School of Law
Issue: i252719
Date: 7 1, 1987
Author(s): Pitkin Frank
Abstract: Law-
rence, supra note 101, at 942-43
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1229014
Journal Title: World Archaeology
Publisher: Routledge
Issue: i207277
Date: 10 1, 1993
Author(s): Hodder Ian
Abstract: Archaeological periodization constructs narratives with beginnings, middles and ends. But the material culture on which such narratives are built is also involved in narratives according to which past agents lived their lives. According to Ricoeur, such lived narratives are also related to agents' practical experience of time. As archaeologists we have to 'read' past narratives through the rhetoric by which they were expressed. While Hayden White's scheme for temporal cycles of rhetoric is rejected, the sequence of material culture at Sitagroi is examined in order to explore the relationships between the plots written by archacologists and those lived by past agents at the site. Past and present concepts of time are embedded in different narratives and expressed through different rhetorics, but some interaction between the two is possible.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/124819
Journal Title: Dance Research: The Journal of the Society for Dance Research
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Issue: i255222
Date: 7 1, 1999
Author(s): Tomko Lynn Matluck
Abstract: History, like a vast river, propels logs, vegetation, rafts, and debris; it is full of live and dead things, some destined for resurrection; it mingles many waters and holds in solution invisible substances stolen from distant soils. Anything may become part of it; that is why it can be an image of the continuity of mankind. And it is also why some of its freight turns up again in the social sciences: they were constructed out of the contents of history in the same way as houses in medieval Rome were made out of stones taken from the Coliseum. But the special sciences based on sorted facts cannot be mistaken for rivers flowing in time and full of persons and events. They are systems fashioned with concepts, numbers, and abstract relations. For history, the reward of eluding method is to escape abstraction. (Barzun 1974, 95)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1290868
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257732
Date: 9 1, 1980
Author(s): Kristeva Hayden
Abstract: Julia Kristeva, "The Novel of Polylogue," Desire in Language: A Semiotic Ap-
proach to Literature and Art, ed. Leon S. Roudiez, trans. Roudiez, Thomas Gora, and Alice
Jardine (New York, 1980), esp. pp. 201-8
Kristeva
The Novel of Polylogue
201
Desire in Language: A Semiotic Approach to Literature and Art
1980
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1343276
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257769
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): Buck-Morss Naomi
Abstract: p. 341
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1343782
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257799
Date: 7 1, 1989
Author(s): Zivek Dominick
Abstract: Slavoj Zivek, The Sublime Object of Ideology (London, 1989), p. 50.
Zivek
50
The Sublime Object of Ideology
1989
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1344100
Journal Title: Alif: Journal of Comparative Poetics
Publisher: American University in Cairo. Department of English and Comparative Literature
Issue: i258247
Date: 1 1, 1986
Author(s): York ﻭﻟﻴﻢ
Abstract: This article discusses how T. S. Eliot's long poem, Four Quartets, employs the thematics of time, self, and history in an autobiographical work of literature. The article approaches autobiography primarily as an intellectual concern, rather than as a factual account of the author's life, in examining a work that is difficult to subsume under available interpretive paradigms. The first part of the article emphasizes how Augustine's Confessions, when considered as a meditation on time and religious experience, illuminates the hermeneutics of Four Quartets. The second and central part of the article provides close readings of key passages in this poem, which inscribes Greek cosmology and medieval epic in a narrative of literary development and spiritual change. The third and concluding part of the article explores how the author's later poetry and criticism highlight major tendencies in twentieth-century literature and anticipate the postmodern interpretation of history. / تعالج هذه المقالة قصيدة ﺇﻟﻴﻮﺕ الطويلة أربع رباعيات من منطلق جديد وبالرجوع إلى تيمات الزمن والذات والتاريخ في السيرة الذاتية الأدبية٠ وتتعامل المقالة مع السيرة الذاتية لا باعتبارها سجلاﹰ لما جرى في حياة صاحبها من أحداث، بل ابعتبارها سجلاﹰ مضمراﹰ للتطور الذهني لكاتبها٠ يقوم الجزء الأول من المقالة بتوظيف البعد ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﻠﻲ في الزمن وفي التجربة الدينية كما ورد عند القديس أوغسطين في سيرته الذاتية الاعترافات، لإضاءة المدار التأويلي لقصيدة أربع رباعيات٠ ويقوم الجزء الثاني بتحليل مقاطع رئيسية في القصيدة، مبرزاﹰ ما تتضمنه وما تلوّح به من معتقدات كونية إغريقية وملاحم وسيطية٠ أما الجزء الثالث والأخير فيتوصل إلى أن ذهنية إليوت، بالإضافة إلى كونها تعكس التوجه العام للأدب في القرن العشرين، تمهد للتفسير ما بعد الحداثي للتاريخ٠
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1350054
Journal Title: Cultural Critique
Publisher: Society for Cultural Critique
Issue: i258508
Date: 1 1, 1984
Author(s): Rose Vincent P.
Abstract: Gillian Rose, Dialectic of Nihilism (Oxford: Basil Blackwell, 1984), 207
Rose
207
Dialectic of Nihilism
1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1354216
Journal Title: Cultural Critique
Publisher: Society for Cultural Critique
Issue: i258501
Date: 10 1, 1982
Author(s): Johnson William V.
Abstract: "The End of Education:'The Harvard Core Curriculum Report'
and the Pedagogy of Reformation," boundary 2, Vol. X, 2 (Winter 1982), 1-33
2
1
X
boundary 2
1982
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1354280
Journal Title: British Journal of Sociology of Education
Publisher: Carfax Publishing Co.
Issue: i260459
Date: 3 1, 1990
Author(s): Willis Kevin J.
Abstract: This article draws upon theories from a wide range of disciplines, including cultural studies and literary theory, to analyse representations of schooling in rock and pop songs. The songs selected cover a period from the beginning of rock 'n' roll in the 1950s, to Britpop and the present. It is argued that schooling is overwhelmingly represented as the antithesis of leisure and that in the 1960s conjuncture the representations of schooling became more and more critical. Even so, the resolution to the perceived oppression of schooling takes place at an imaginary level of fantasy. Other features of these representations are discussed, including the challenge provided in pop and rock songs to the notion of schools as spaces where relationships, romantic and/ or sexual, do not take place. The way in which temporal aspects of schooling are represented and the division between clock time and time as experienced is discussed. The formal analysis is located within a larger project of ideology critique and its strengths and weaknesses are signalled.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1393182
Journal Title: Philosophy East and West
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Issue: i260941
Date: 4 1, 1958
Author(s): Shinzinger Gereon
Abstract: The Euro-American philosophical traditions offer two extreme positions to the problem of identity over time: G. W. Leibniz' essentialism and Derek Parfit's reductionism. A third alternative conception of personal identity is presented here, more appropriately named personal nonduality, which is based on Nishida Kitarō's conception of personal unity as nonrelative contradictory self-identity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1399967
Journal Title: The Review of Politics
Publisher: University of Notre Dame
Issue: i261241
Date: 7 1, 1953
Author(s): Bourdet John T.
Abstract: Claude Bourdet, "Dulles contre la paix. Et Bidault?," L'Observateur,
April 30, 1953.
Bourdet
April 30
L'Observateur
1953
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1404795
Journal Title: The Review of Politics
Publisher: University of Notre Dame
Issue: i261426
Date: 10 1, 1997
Author(s): Walzer William A.
Abstract: Karl-Otto Apel, "Discourse Ethics as a Response to
the Novel Challenges of Today's Reality to Coresponsibility," Journal of Religion 74
(1993): 496-513
10.2307/1204180
496
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1408857
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263718
Date: 12 1, 1961
Author(s): Zaehner Donald A.
Abstract: The question raised in the title has been much debated by past and present interpreters of Zoroastrianism. In the first two parts of this paper we present some dualistic and monotheistic interpretations of the religion. The interpretations can be labeled as follows: 1. DUALISTIC INTERPRETATIONS 1. The View That Angra Mainyu Is Primordial But Lacks Omnipotence And Omniscience (Dhalla, Henning) 2. The View That Angra Mainyu Is Primordial But Lacks A Physical Nature (Shaked, Boyce) II. MONOTHEISTIC INTERPRETATIONS 1. The Created Spirits View (Zaehner, Fox, Gershevitch) 2. The Transformationist (Maskhiyya) View 3. The Zurvānite View 4. The View That Good And Evil Are Coeternal Only In A Logical Sense (Moulton, Bode and Nanavutty, Duchesne-Guillemin) We present each of these views and discuss it critically in light of the following criteria: (1) textual evidence; (2) the continuity of the religion throughout its history, including the present time; (3) philosophical cogency; and (4) religious satisfaction. Our conclusion is that each of the above positions, despite its elements of strength, falls seriously short of one or more of these criteria, and hence that there is need for a more adequate interpretation of Zoroastrianism than any of them can offer. Accordingly, we present another interpretation in order to provoke further discussion and, hopefully, to advance the cause of trying to gain a more precise grasp of the teachings of this remarkable religion. In brief, the interpretation we favor is that Zoroastrianism combines cosmogonic dualism and eschatological monotheism in a manner unique to itself among the major religions of the world. This combination results in a religious outlook which cannot be categorized as either straightforward dualism or straightforward monotheism, meaning that the question in the title of this paper poses a false dichotomy. The dichotomy arises, we contend, from a failure to take seriously enough the central role played by time in Zoroastrian theology. Zoroastrianism proclaims a movement through time from dualism toward monotheism, i.e., a dualism which is being made false by the dynamics of time, and a monotheism which is being made true by those same dynamics of time. The meaning of the eschaton in Zoroastrianism is thus the triumph of monotheism, the good God Ahura Mazdā having at last won his way through to complete and final ascendancy. But in the meantime there is vital truth to dualism, the neglect of which can only lead to a distortion of the religion's essential teachings. We develop this interpretation in the last part of our paper and argue for its satisfaction of the four criteria.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1462275
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263704
Date: 6 1, 1974
Author(s): Ricoeur Robert
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, "Metaphor and the Main Problem of Hermeneutics," New Literary Histori,
6, 1 (Autumn, 1974), pp. 95-110.
Ricoeur
Autumn
95
6
New Literary Histori
1974
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1462336
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263709
Date: 9 1, 1975
Author(s): Wiggins Mary
Abstract: In recent years, the need for a critique of "reader" as rigorous as that which has been developed for "text" and for "author" has become increasingly acute. Whether in the study of religion as story and biography or in interpretative reading in general, a critical notion of reader is essential if the act of reading is to be anything other than mere consumption of texts. Some new way of understanding the hermeneutical circle is required to avert the narcissism latent in the Anselmian model. The notion of "genre" as developed by four recent theorists is helpful in the task of constructing a critique of "reader." E. D. Hirsch, Hans-Georg Gadamer, Tzvetán Todorov, and Paul Ricoeur have each surpassed the idealist notion of genre as a classificatory device and developed in its place the notion of genre as a generative pinciple. Todorov, for example, illustrates how "form" is a theoretical, as distinct from a descriptive or explanatory, issue. According to both Hirsch and Todorov, somewhere between empirical details and metaphysical thematizations lie generic formulations which can assist the reader to organize his/her response to the text and to recognize the probable understanding toward which the conventions of the text are directed. In Gadamer's theory of interpretation, the notion of genre acquires historicity. After Gadamer, genres can no longer be regarded as timeless a priori categories. Rather, because they are constituted by historical reflections, their rise and decline are intrinsic to text-interpretation. Finally, in Ricoeur's theory that generic considerations are correlative principles of production and interpretation, we find a basis for understanding genre as praxis. If we understand reading to be isomorphic to authoring, it becomes clear that the reader can no longer be regarded as the self-evident recipient of text-signification. Genre, in Ricoeur's theory, transforms "speech" into a "work" and points toward a new notion of "reader" as one whose reconstruction of the text is the condition for the possibility of its being a story that "gives life." This notion of "reader" makes possible a new model of the hermeneutical circle-one which signifies the essential roles of critical thought which follows naive reading and of informed understanding which follows after thought.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1463143
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263710
Date: 12 1, 1944
Author(s): Stevenson Walter J.
Abstract: Recent study of the nature of textuality as such opens new insights for the study of the Bible. Although individual parts of the Bible have oral antecedents, the Bible as a whole has existed only as a text, and a unique kind of text, folded back on itself out of communal memory as no other book has been. A text is a monument. Textuality establishes a special relationship between discourse and death. Spoken words are exchanges between living persons. The text presents its message as well if its author is dead as it does if he or she is alive. Print is even more bound to death than writing is. In comparison with oral performance-delivery of an oration, song-a text physically has certain special alliances with past time. All texts come out of the past. Literature as text is psychologically retrospective: its effects typically include an element of nostalgia. Because of its future orientation, culminating in the closing words of Revelation, "Come, Lord Jesus" (as against typical narrative closes such as "They lived happily ever after"), the Bible has an unusual relationship to textuality: it is not literature in the way other texts are. Typical narrative plot structures existence retrospectively: the story is organized back from the conclusion. This retrospective organization is maximized by writing, which tightens plot and makes more of re-cognition, a kind of return to the beginning (the past) and hence a cyclic pattern. In addition to being related intimately to death, writing and print are also limitlessly fecund, the central forces in the evolution of consciousness, once they appear. The fecundity of writing and print, like other fecundity in human existence, is achieved by passage through death. "Unless the grain of wheat dies." The Word of God in the Person of Jesus Christ is conceived of by analogy with the spoken word. The Father speaks the Word, the Son (eo verbum quo filius); he does not write the Word, who would then by biblical attestation be not life but death: "The letter kills, but the spirit [pneuma, breath, producer of speech] gives life." The Son passes through death to resurrected life. The written text, also God's word, must also be resurrected-by interpretation, by being inserted into the lifeworld of living persons. Hermeneutics is resurrection and in common Christian teaching demands faith. Study of the textuality of the Bible-which presumes but is not the same as study of the text of the Bible-opens many new theological questions and / or gives new contours to old questions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1463750
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263756
Date: 7 1, 1987
Author(s): Whitehead Lorne
Abstract: Freud, 1917:416
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1464384
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263751
Date: 4 1, 1968
Author(s): Wheelwright Douglas
Abstract: 185-6;201;222;233-4;247-251
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1464831
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i263803
Date: 3 1, 1958
Author(s): Wittgenstein Matthew G.
Abstract: Pelagian writings, "it is signifi-
cant that Augustine now quotes Ambrose with increasing frequency and devotion" (1999b: 140)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1466069
Journal Title: La Ricerca Folklorica
Publisher: Grafo Edizioni
Issue: i264927
Date: 10 1, 1987
Author(s): Roberto Jorge José
Abstract: The endless suburbs of the Brazilian metropolis are the seat of the most aggressive and pervading attitude of the mass culture and, at the same time, of the persistence, re-semantisation and re-functionalisation of popular and folkloric traditions. Neither the tradition disappears, nor a new syncretic culture arises. Instead, some differentiated and mutually excluding levels reproduce in a modified form urban circles.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1480128
Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Scholars Press
Issue: i267105
Date: 4 1, 1968
Author(s): Balthasar Kenneth
Abstract: "D" Society Of Cambrige University
sity
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1509502
Journal Title: Design Issues
Publisher: MIT Press
Issue: i267303
Date: 7 1, 1974
Author(s): Ricoeur Alberto
Abstract: The Conflict
of Interpretation (Evanston, IL:
Northwestern University Press, 1974)
The Conflict of Interpretation
1974
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1511843
Journal Title: Novum Testamentum
Publisher: E. J. Brill
Issue: i270171
Date: 7 1, 1935
Author(s): Cordier H.
Abstract: supra, p. 166; p. 178, n. I, 2
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1560228
Journal Title: Diacritics
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i270554
Date: 7 1, 2000
Author(s): Zupančič Tim
Abstract: Zupančič
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1566285
Journal Title: Journal of Latin American Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i208500
Date: 2 1, 1996
Abstract: This commentary article focuses on a crucial moment in the formation of Peruvian Creole nationalism: the 1836-9 Peruvian-Bolivian Confederation. Nationalist sentiments expressed through the anti-confederationist press, satiric poetry and pamphlets, glorified the Inca past while spurning the Indian present. During this period, a nationalist, essentially racist, rhetoric whose roots can be traced to the late eighteenth century, took shape. This rhetoric would provide the foundations of an ideology which has prevailed in Peruvian history. This rhetoric reached its peak in the twentieth century, while evolving into a historiographical discourse instrumental to the exercise of power and which is now in crisis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/157992
Journal Title: Studia Islamica
Publisher: G.-P. Maisonneuve-Larose
Issue: i271962
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Schlegell Jawid A.
Abstract: B.R. Von Schlegell, Principles of Sufism (Berkeley 1990) pp. xiii-xv
Schlegell
xiii
Principles of Sufism
1990
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1596163
Journal Title: Comparative Literature
Publisher: University of Oregon
Issue: i301593
Date: 4 1, 1989
Author(s): Wolk Julie A.
Abstract: A.A. Verbitskaya, Pokinutyi (Riga, 1925/6)
Verbitskaya
Pokinutyi
1925
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1771253
Journal Title: Comparative Literature
Publisher: University of Oregon
Issue: i301599
Date: 10 1, 1973
Author(s): Zygelbojm D.G.
Abstract: Levinas himself nods when he introduces these terms into a discussion of S.Y Agnon in
"Poetry and Revelation."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1771263
Journal Title: Comparative Literature
Publisher: University of Oregon
Issue: i301584
Date: 1 1, 1928
Author(s): Woolf Stacy
Abstract: Myself with Others 27
27
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1771629
Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303078
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Schwarzchild Susan
Abstract: Rotenstreich 1968: 3-4
3
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1772696
Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303088
Date: 12 1, 1988
Author(s): Wimmers Dorrit
Abstract: Martinez-Bonati's own
illustration (1981: 112)
112
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1773077
Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303114
Date: 10 1, 1973
Author(s): White C. Allen
Abstract: White 1973: 22-29
22
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1773130
Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303096
Date: 12 1, 1982
Author(s): Tourangeau Raymond W.
Abstract: ibid.: 149
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1773290
Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303121
Date: 7 1, 1984
Author(s): Wellbery Adam
Abstract: Wellbery 1984: 141-42
141
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1773381
Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303117
Date: 7 1, 1992
Author(s): Wyschogrod Shira
Abstract: Wolosky 1993
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1773442
Journal Title: The Journal of African History
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i209472
Date: 1 1, 1981
Author(s): Portelli Elizabeth
Abstract: H. U. E. Thoden Van Velzen, 'Robinson Crusoe and Friday: strength and
weakness of the big man paradigm', Man (n.s.), VIII, iv (1973), 592-612
10.2307/2800743
592
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/181133
Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: The American Historical Association
Issue: i332152
Date: 6 1, 1983
Author(s): Higham David
Abstract: john Higham, History: Professional Scholarship in
America [Baltimore, Md., 1983], 241
Higham
241
History: Professional Scholarship in America
1983
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1873746
Journal Title: The American Political Science Review
Publisher: The American Political Science Association
Issue: i333668
Date: 12 1, 1976
Author(s): Tinder Deborah
Abstract: Taylor, it has to be noted, would presumably quarrel
with this "either/or" formulation, either interpret the
classics or interpret the world. His Hegel book obvi-
ously falls within the genre of commentary on the tradi-
tion. Furthermore, in the preface to its condensation as
Hegel and Modern Society, he emphasizes the relevance
of Hegel's political philosophy to our time (1979, pp. xi-
xii)
xi
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1962293
Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishing
Issue: i20011143
Date: 4 1, 1997
Author(s): Wait Eldon C.
Abstract: Perhaps the greatest challenge to an existential phenomenological account of perception is that posed by the argument from illusions. Recent developments in research on the behaviour of subjects suffering from illusions together with some seminal ideas found in Merleau-Ponty's writings enable us to develop and corroborate an account of the phenomenon of illusions, one, which unlike the empiricist account, does not undermine our conviction that in perception we "reach the things themselves". The traditional argument from illusions derives its force from an uncritical assumption that the process of experience takes place in time conceived as an infinite series of distinct moments. Once this assumption has been bracketed we are able to recognise the paradoxical truth that in the disillusion something can become that which it has always been and can cease to be that which it has never been. Furthermore, through a reflection on our experience of others overcoming their illusions, and on psychological evidence, we are able to show that there is nothing to suggest that this description of the disillusion is a description of a private or subjective event.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20011151
Journal Title: Law and Contemporary Problems
Publisher: Duke University School of Law
Issue: i20059184
Date: 7 1, 2003
Author(s): Luna Erik
Abstract: Daniel W. Skubik, Book Review, 44 Fed. Law. 59,59-61 (Feb. 1997)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20059192
Journal Title: Contemporary European History
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20081335
Date: 2 1, 2007
Author(s): Freeman Kirrily
Abstract: Jean-Marie Guillon, 'Sociabilité et Rumeurs en Temps de Guerre: Bruits et
Contestations en Provence dans les Années Quarante', Provence Historique 47 (187) (1997), 245-58.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20081339
Journal Title: Contemporary European History
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20081727
Date: 3 1, 2000
Author(s): Deli Peter
Abstract: Face au Scepticisme [1976-1993]: les mutations du paysage intellectuel ou l'invention de l'intellectuel démocratique
(Paris:Editions la Découverte, 1994).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20081731
Journal Title: Review of International Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20097248
Date: 4 1, 1991
Author(s): Boucher David
Abstract: Burke, Speeches on Hastings, I, pp. 103 and 118.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20097251
Journal Title: Studies in East European Thought
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i20099867
Date: 6 1, 2004
Author(s): Bird Robert
Abstract: Aleksej Losev's definition of myth centres on the concept of detachment. In modern times detachment has most often figured in the context of philosophical aesthetics, where it is a cognitive category akin to Kant's "disinterestedness" or the Russian formalists' "estrangement." However Losev's usage also makes reference to the ontological sense of detachment as contemplative ascent (cf. Meister Eckhardt's "Abgeschiedenheit"). Thus, Losev's concept of myth combines both senses of detachment, binding perceptual attitude and being together in a double movement of resignation from the world and union with meaning; this movement literally makes sense out of reality. It therefore bears comparison to the treatment of distanciation in contemporary hermeneutics, where detachment is a key condition of understanding. By investigating Losev's connections to other Russian thinkers, the author makes a case for a distinct Russian tradition of hermeneutic philosophy (V. Ivanov, G. Shpet, A. Bakshy, A. Losev).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20099872
Journal Title: Synthese
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i20117470
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): Ricoeur Paul
Abstract: If Descartes's "Cogito" can be held as the opening of the era of modern subjectivity, it is to the extent that the "I" is taken for the first time in the position of foundation, i.e., as the ultimate condition for the possibility of all philosophical discourse. The question raised in this paper is whether the crisis of the "Cogito", opened later by Hume, Nietzsche and Heidegger on different philosophical grounds, is not already contemporaneous to the very positing of the "Cogito".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20117477
Journal Title: The Review of Metaphysics
Publisher: Philosophy Education Society, Inc. The Catholic University of America
Issue: i20127789
Date: 9 1, 1982
Author(s): Dauenhauer Bernard P.
Abstract: my
"Politics and Coercion," Philosophy Today, 21, 2 (Summer 1977): 103-114.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20127794
Journal Title: The Review of Metaphysics
Publisher: Philosophy Education Society, Inc. The Catholic University of America
Issue: i20130854
Date: 6 1, 2007
Author(s): Avramenko Richard
Abstract: von
Heyking, Augustine and Politics as Longing in the World, 51-76.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20130859
Journal Title: RES: Anthropology and Aesthetics
Publisher: Peabody Museum of Archaeology and Ethnology, Harvard University
Issue: i20167710
Date: 4 1, 2007
Author(s): Finkelstein Haim
Abstract: RS 1 [December
1924]:19
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20167724
Journal Title: The Historical Journal
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20175108
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Isaac Joel
Abstract: Jamie Cohen-Cole, 'The reflexivity of cognitive science: the scientist as model of human nature',
History of the Human Sciences, 18 (2005), pp. 107-39.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20175119
Journal Title: The Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i20203578
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): Birth Kevin
Abstract: Johannes Fabian's "Time and the Other" criticized anthropology for creating representations that placed the Other outside the flow of time. Fabian offered the ethnographic portrayal of coevalness as a solution to this problem. This article explores four challenges to the representation of coevalness: the split temporalities of the ethnographer; the multiple temporalities of different histories; the culturally influenced phenomenological present; and the complicated relationship between culturally variable concepts of being and becoming and cultural concepts of time. Based on these challenges, this article argues that some attempts at ethnographic coevalness have fostered a temporal framework of homochronism which subsumes the Other into academic discourses of history. To achieve coevalness and to avoid homochronism and allochronism, it is necessary to represent the temporal frameworks that research subjects use to forge coevalness with ethnographers, and to place these frameworks in relationship to commonly used academic representations of time and history. /// Dans son livre "Le Temps et les Autres," Johannes Fabian critiquait la création par l'anthropologie de représentations plaçant l'Autre en dehors du flux du temps. Selon lui, la description ethnographique de la contemporanéité pourrait être la solution à ce problème. Le présent article explore les quatre difficultés que pose la représentation de la contemporanéité: temporalités dissociées de l'ethnographe, temporalités multiples des différentes histoires, présent phénoménologique culturellement informé, relation complexe entre les concepts culturellement variables de l'être et du devenir et les concepts culturel du temps. Sur la base de ces difficultés, l'auteur avance que certaines tentatives de contemporanéité ethnographique ont suscité un cadre temporel d'homochronie qui subsume l'Autre dans les discours académiques sur l'histoire. Pour parvenir à la contemporanéité et éviter homochronie et allochronie, il est nécessaire de représenter les cadres temporels utilisés par les enquêtés pour forger la contemporanéité avec les ethnographes et de resituer ces cadres en relation avec les représentations académiques du temps et de l'histoire qui prévalent habituellement.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20203581
Journal Title: Revista Mexicana de Sociología
Publisher: Instituto de Investigaciones Sociales de la Universidad Nacional Autonoma de Mexico
Issue: i20454218
Date: 3 1, 2006
Author(s): Suárez Hugo José
Abstract: Suárez, 2003a
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20454221
Journal Title: Oxford Review of Education
Publisher: Routledge Journals, Taylor & Francis
Issue: i20462366
Date: 2 1, 2008
Author(s): Crossouard Barbara
Abstract: Formative assessment has attracted increasing attention from both practitioners and scholars over the last decade. This paper draws on the authors' empirical research conducted over eleven years in educational situations ranging from infant schools to postgraduate education to propose a theorisation of formative assessment. Formative assessment is seen as taking place when teachers and learners seek to respond to student work, making judgements about what is good learning with a view to improving that learning. However, the theorisation emphasises formative assessment as being a discursive social practice, involving dialectical, sometimes conflictual, processes. These bring into play issues of power in which learners' and teachers' identities are implicated and what counts as legitimate knowledge is framed by institutional discourses and summative assessment demands. The paper argues that, rather than only paying attention to the content of learning, an ambition for formative assessment might be to deconstruct these contextual issues, allowing a critical consideration of learning as a wider process of becoming. The article suggests a model that might be useful to teachers and learners in achieving this.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20462368
Journal Title: Human Rights Quarterly
Publisher: The Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i20486733
Date: 2 1, 2009
Author(s): Addis Adeno
Abstract: John Rawls, A Theory of Justice 455 (1971).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20486739
Journal Title: Revue d'histoire moderne et contemporaine (1954-)
Publisher: Société d'histoire moderne et contemporaine
Issue: i20530135
Date: 6 1, 1996
Author(s): Mollier Jean-Yves
Abstract: C. Ginzburg, Le Fromage et les vers, traduction française, Flammarion, Paris, 1980.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20530143
Journal Title: Philosophy
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20533165
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): van Woudenberg René
Abstract: Fred Dretske, "Epistemic Operators", Journal of Philosophy 67
(1970): 1003-1013.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20533170
Journal Title: Review of International Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20542799
Date: 7 1, 2009
Author(s): Brincat Shannon
Abstract: Hegel quoted in Mieczyslaw Maneli, 'Three Concepts of Freedom: Kant - Hegel - Marx',
Interpretation, 7:1 (January, 1978), p. 28
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20542805
Journal Title: The Journal of Asian Studies
Publisher: The Association for Asian Studies, Inc.
Issue: i309685
Date: 8 1, 1978
Author(s): Wurm Richard
Abstract: The logic of Indonesian subjectless and tenseless expressions appears to have cultural implications, just as the use of tenses in English scientific writing entails much more than grammatical minutiae. A. L. Becker has pointed out that tense in English functions in a "coherence system" that pervades and transcends grammar. A parallel coherence system is suggested for Indonesian, based not on tense but on topic. Paul Ricoeur's distinction between LANGUAGE and DISCOURSE is the basis of the claim that Indonesian sentences cohere on the bond between grammatical subject and discourse topic. Examples are drawn from a number of contexts that call forth passive sentences in Indonesian. The article concludes on another suggestion by Becker. The Indonesian topic may be part of a larger deictic category of person, which may be related in discourse to orientation in space--both physical and social--of participants in the speech event. If this suggestion is correct, then the contrast between English and Indonesian coherence systems may be found in the opposition tense/time vs. person/space.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2056445
Journal Title: The Journal of Asian Studies
Publisher: The Association for Asian Studies, Inc.
Issue: i309685
Date: 8 1, 1976
Author(s): Ricoeur Jeff
Abstract: This article suggests that two distinct modes of text-building constraints coincide in the Indonesian novel "Surabaya." The first set of constraints consists of narrative functions that shape sentence-level grammar within the story; the second level of text-building constraints shapes the thematic structure of the story. The author argues that, unlike its narrative structure, which is bound by the linearity of time, the thematic structure, of "Surabaya" is defined by a hierarchy of "heavier" and "lighter" themes, the "heavier" themes being evoked more often than are the "lighter" themes. He suggests that heaviness of theme is a strategy of text building found in classical Malaysian (Hikayat) texts, gamelan orchestra musical organization, and in calendric reckoning in much of Indonesia. He argues, in sum, for a method of writing that encourages grammatical description from two or more perspectives. "Binocular vision," to use Gregory Bateson's words, is necessary in writing to provide a more honest, richer description of a text than a single mode of grammatical description can provide; it makes available to readers more than one means of access to the text.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2056446
Journal Title: Studi Storici
Publisher: Istituto Gramsci Editore
Issue: i20565388
Date: 6 1, 1990
Author(s): Maiello Francesco H.
Abstract: La prima edizione del calendario composto esclusivamente di immagini e simboli Almanack des
bergers, Liège, V.ve Barnabé, 1758. I calendari per simboli sono: Dieu soit béni e Almanack du
bon laboureur: «Il arriva plus que centenaire jusqu'en 1850»: Socard, Mémoires de la Société
académique d'agriculture des sciences, arts et belles lettres du département de l'Aube, 1881,
p. 336. In questa nuova prospettiva andrebbe studiato il Messager Boiteux, il calendario di
Basilea, poi stampato a Vevey dall'inizio del XVIII secolo e ampiamente diffiiso in Francia,
soprattutto a partire dalla meta del Settecento.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20565393
Journal Title: Studi Storici
Publisher: Edizioni Dedalo
Issue: i20566703
Date: 6 1, 1995
Author(s): Sgambati Valeria
Abstract: Cfr. C. Ef Reagan and D, Stewart, eds., The Philosophy of Paul Ricoeur, Boston, 1978,
pp. 77-79, citato in H. White, La questione della narrazione nella teoria contemporanea
della storiografia, cit., pp. 69-70.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20566708
Journal Title: Studi Storici
Publisher: Carocci Editore
Issue: i20567073
Date: 6 1, 2001
Author(s): Ricuperati Giuseppe
Abstract: M. Cedronio, Giochi d'ombra, Napoli, Liguori, 2000 (Università degli studi di Napoli
«Federico II», Pubblicazioni del Dipartimento di discipline storiche), p. 70.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20567078
Journal Title: Studi Storici
Publisher: Carocci Editore
Issue: i20567347
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Brazzoduro Andrea
Abstract: M. Rebérioux, Le Génocide, le juge et l'historien, in «L'Histoire», novembre 1990, 138,
pp. 92-94.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20567355
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion, Oxford University Press
Issue: i20630137
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Nicholson Hugh
Abstract: Paul Roscoe (2006: 43)
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/jaarel/lfp036', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any
Journal Title: Bibliothèque d'Humanisme et Renaissance
Publisher: Librairie Droz S. A.
Issue: i20680879
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Stawarz-Luginbühl Ruth
Abstract: Exemplaires consultés: BNF (Gallica); Bibliothèque publique et universitaire de Neu-
châtel (cote ZQ 300) ; Stadt- und Universitätsbibliothek Bern (cote k. 14).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20680883
Journal Title: Utopian Studies
Publisher: Society for Utopian Studies
Issue: i20719896
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Boer Roland
Abstract: Focusing on the interplay of religion and Utopia in Fredric Jameson's recent Archaeologies of the Future, I identify a tension: on the one hand, the content of religion has been superseded (although not its forms), yet, on the other, Jameson still wishes to make use of a hermeneutics of suspicion and recovery in which even the most retrograde material may be recuperated—religion included. So we find a clash underway in this work. Sometimes Jameson sidelines religion, as one would expect if religion was no longer relevant. At other times, he exercises his dialectical hermeneutics, particularly at two moments: first, a recovery, via Feuerbach, of the role of magic within fantasy literature; second, the partial treatment of apocalyptic, which comes very close to his own argument for Utopia as rupture. From here, I develop the dialectic of ideology and Utopia further by expanding Jameson's comments on the possibilities of medieval theology and the utopian role of religion (both Catholic and Protestant) in More's Utopia.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20719903
Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung
Publisher: Center for Historical Social Research / Zentrum für Historische Sozialforschung
Issue: i20757792
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Funk Julika
Abstract: Bachmann-Medick, s. Anm. 84, 23.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20757796
Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung
Publisher: Center for Historical Social Research / Zentrum für Historische Sozialforschung
Issue: i20762096
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Silvennoinen Martti
Abstract: SILVENNOINEN 2003, p.167
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20762110
Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung
Publisher: Center for Historical Social Research / Zentrum für Historische Sozialforschung
Issue: i20762349
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Schmid Georg
Abstract: Unquestionable as history may seem, there are all the same quite different readings and disparate inferences despite the same series of facts. This goes to show that even professional historians can sometimes be overcome by meditations on past possibilities of bifurcations. As to "alternatives to actual history," is serves well to bear in mind that few are plausible, but that belief in a predeterminative universe of necessities would certainly be misplaced. Whereas some occurrences are clear-cut enough to make us understand which components would have had to be changed in order to get a different outcome, others are of such a high degree of complexity that attempts to imagine an alternative course and divergent results remain rather illusory: the examples of Midway (the former type) and the defeat of France in 1940 (intricately overdetermined) clearly show that it pays in any case, in defiance to all complexities, to consider past potential. It is prerequisite for choosing between future options in more reasonable and efficient ways than hitherto.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20762355
Journal Title: German Studies Review
Publisher: German Studies Association
Issue: i20787905
Date: 5 1, 2010
Author(s): Gelzer Florian
Abstract: Marieluise Fleißer's Mehlreisende Frieda Geier is regarded by now as one of the most remarkable novels written during the period of the Weimar Republic. However, both at the time of its publication and in subsequent scholarship, the structure of the work was criticized for being haphazard and ineffective. Responding to this criticism, this study reveals that Fleißer simply employed a set of specifically modern narrative strategies to organize her novel, such as seasonal changes, light-dark contrasts or repetitive patterns. This unusual technique lends the text a paradoxical "dissonant unity" and secures its place among the avant-garde of late 1920s literature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20787909
Journal Title: Journal for Early Modern Cultural Studies
Publisher: Group for Early Modern Cultural Studies
Issue: i20798265
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Domingo Darryl P.
Abstract: Drawing attention to the complex reciprocal relationship between commercialized leisure and commercial literature in the so-called "Age of Wit," this essay reconceives of the witty and witless in two important ways. Taking for granted, first of all, that wit is usually analyzed in terms of the efficacy of verbal language, the essay examines how and why debates concerning true and false wit were played out in physical terms—in this case, through the motions, gestures, and attitudes of the dancing body. Second of all, the essay attempts to account for the enduring, if unwitting, attractions of "false wit" by likening it to the tricks and transformations of contemporary English pantomime. Satirists of the 1720s, 1730s, and 1740s frequently invoke the unmeaning motion of Harlequin as a visual way of proscribing the verbal excesses of extravagant language. At the same time, apologists for pantomime associate Harlequin's "dumb Wit" with truth, reason, and the pattern of nature, claiming that the genre's corporeality allowed it to transcend the limitations and equivocations of words. The essay concludes that the popularity of pantomime contextualizes the Augustan reaction against false wit, in that it identifies a source of aesthetic pleasure in the public's eagerness to be duped by apparent sameness in difference. Early eighteenth-century readers enjoy luxuriant, illogical, and mixed metaphors, forced similes, and trifling jibes and quibbles for the same reason that early eighteenth-century spectators delight in the unexpected turns of pantomimic entertainment: in a world under the sway of Harlequin's magical slapstick, audiences derive satisfaction from being deceived.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20798269
Journal Title: Les Études philosophiques
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i20841693
Date: 9 1, 1954
Author(s): DEVAUX André-A.
Abstract: Méditations Cartésiennes, p. 3-4. Cf. aussi l'article sur la
Crise des Sciences Européennes où Husserl s'adresse à « chaquc homme
qui veut sérieusement devenir philosophe » (Et. Phil., 1949, 3-4,
p. 274-275).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20841696
Journal Title: Les Études philosophiques
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i20849393
Date: 6 1, 2001
Author(s): Monod Jean-Claude
Abstract: « Foucault repond a
Sartre », repris dans Dits etéecrits, Paris, Gallimard, 1994, t. 1,
55, p. 662-668
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20849398
Journal Title: Les Études philosophiques
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i20849693
Date: 5 1, 2005
Author(s): Goetschei Jacques
Abstract: Le dieu-masque: une figure du Dionysos d'Athènes, Paris, La Découverte, 1991.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20849695
Journal Title: Les Études philosophiques
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i20849779
Date: 7 1, 2006
Author(s): Campa Olivier
Abstract: Ibid., p. 183-184.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20849782
Journal Title: Les Études philosophiques
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i20849843
Date: 7 1, 2007
Author(s): Chenavier Robert
Abstract: Husserl, Krisis, p. All All.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20849849
Journal Title: Les Études philosophiques
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i20849955
Date: 4 1, 2009
Author(s): Bienenstock Myriam
Abstract: Olivier Tinland (éd.), Lectures de Hegel, Paris,
Le Livre de poche, 2005, p. 223-267.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/leph.092.0207', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any
Journal Title: Revue française d'études américaines
Publisher: Presses universitaires de Nancy
Issue: i20872444
Date: 11 1, 1994
Author(s): COUTURIER Maurice
Abstract: White Noise can be considered, in Leclair's terms, as « a systems novel », like Gravity's Rainbow or The Public Burning; yet, it is also acutely concerned with history in the making and with the fictionalization of the present through its instant recycling by the media. The narrator and protagonist shifts from a total involvement in the present moment to a tragic preoccupation with his individual future after the pollution alert, but he is never able to achieve that « refiguration » which, for Ricœur, constitutes the main strategy to try and beat the aporia of time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20872452
Journal Title: Philosophy and Phenomenological Research
Publisher: State University of New York at Buffalo
Issue: i310303
Date: 3 1, 1966
Author(s): Gurwitsch James C.
Abstract: Krisis, p. 17
17
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2106659
Journal Title: The Journal of Modern History
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: i337200
Date: 12 1, 1965
Author(s): Ricoeur Michael
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur distills this point well: "When we discover that there are
several cultures instead of just one and consequently at the time when we acknowledge
the end of a sort of cultural monopoly, be it illusory or real, we are threatened with the
destruction of our own discovery. Suddenly it becomes possible that there are just
others, that we ourselves are an 'other' among others" (History and Truth [Evanston,
Ill., 1965], p. 278).
Ricoeur
278
History and Truth
1965
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2124538
Journal Title: Political Science Quarterly
Publisher: Academy of Political Science
Issue: i337539
Date: 6 1, 1969
Author(s): Beaujeu François
Abstract: Jean Beaujeu, "Terrorisme et legitime defence," Le Monde, Feb. 5,
1969
Beaujeu
Feb. 5
Le Monde
1969
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2147263
Journal Title: Studi di Sociologia
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i23005130
Date: 6 1, 2009
Author(s): PAVESI NICOLETTA
Abstract: ibid.: 46
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23005136
Journal Title: Studi di Sociologia
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i23005055
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): DE SIMONE ANTONIO
Abstract: 2007
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23005214
Journal Title: Music & Letters
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23013006
Date: 5 1, 2011
Author(s): Gelbart Matthew
Abstract: Rodel, 'Extreme Noise
Terror'.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/ml/gcr037', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any
Journal Title: Information Systems Research
Publisher: The Institute for Operations Research and the Management Sciences (INFORMS)
Issue: i23011115
Date: 3 1, 2003
Author(s): Saunders Carol S.
Abstract: Hollingshead and
McGrath's (1995)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23015731
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion, Oxford University Press
Issue: i23020380
Date: 9 1, 2011
Author(s): Marks Susan
Abstract: Schwartz argues for the later rabbinic development of practices related to death: "Indeed, if it
is the case that even strongly 'Jewish' Jews were often buried without the accompaniment of Jewish
iconography—that despite what we are accustomed to think about such liminal moments as birth,
death, marriage and so on, death was not yet generally an occasion among Palestinian Jews for
strong public affirmation of group identity—then Beth Shearim shows that the judaization of
Jewish burial practice was now (third-fourth century) underway in some circles" (2001: 154).
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/jaarel/lfr001', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any
Journal Title: Shakespeare Quarterly
Publisher: The Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i23025612
Date: 4 1, 2011
Author(s): Sherman Anita Gilman
Abstract: Wulf Kansteiner, "Memory, Media, and Menschen: Where Is the Individual in Collective
Memory Studies?" Memory Studies 3 (2010): 3-4.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1353/shq.2011.0003', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any
Journal Title: Journal of Arabic Literature
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i23071583
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Hayek Ghenwa
Abstract: Introduction; Jens Hanssen's Fiti-de-Siecle Beirut.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1163/157006411X596140', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any
Journal Title: Studi Storici
Publisher: Carocci editore
Issue: i23078532
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): Zapponi Elena
Abstract: A. Wieviorka, L'era del testimone, Milano, Cortina, 1999, p. 14.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23078539
Journal Title: Annales. Histoire, Sciences Sociales
Publisher: Éditions de l'École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i23211194
Date: 3 1, 2012
Author(s): Calame Claude
Abstract: J'ai développé ce concept à propos de la pragmatique des récits héroïques que nous
appréhendons comme des « mythes » et des fictions narratives dans Claude Calame,
« La pragmatique poétique des mythes grecs: fiction référentielle et performance
rituelle », in F. Lavocat et A. Duprat (dir.), Fiction et cultures, Paris, sflgc, 2010, p. 33-
56; voir aussi Id., « Fiction référentielle et poétique rituelle: pour une pragmatique du
mythe (Sappho 17 et Bacchylide 13)», in D.AUGER et C. Delattre (dir.), Mythe et
fiction, Paris, Presses universitaires de Paris Ouest, 2010, p. 117-135.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23211237
Journal Title: Numen
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i23244925
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Schofer Jonathan
Abstract: Stout 1997:23-25
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1163/156852712X610574', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any
Journal Title: Humboldt Journal of Social Relations
Publisher: Humboldt State University
Issue: i23261550
Date: 1 1, 1982
Author(s): Jacobs Anton K.
Abstract: This essay suggests Friedrich Nietzsche has a contribution to make to the theoretical enterprise of social science. Contemporary theorizing, reflecting an increased attention to language, has been focusing on the dialogical mode of production and, of course, on hermeneutics. This has led to a renewal of interest in Friedrich Nietzsche. In this essay, two alternative models of the hermeneutic circle are examined: one arising out of the work of the school of Konstanz; the other associated primarily with the work of Juergen Habermas. The former presents a circular image of the "conversational" situation; the latter portrays a time schedule of the process based on the psychoanalytic process of therapy. Nietzsche's contributions are suggested to be significant, in the first model, in regard to the mode of production and, in the second, the stage of the quasi-naturalistic turn. Nietzsche's way to truth is through constant and relentless criticizing. In contrast to the rationalistic practices of Western philosophy, Nietzsche exercised an art of interpreting based on the use of metaphor and aphorism. This practice seems to reflect Nietzsche's concern to communicate truth in a world he saw as inherently ambiguous and dynamic, thus, rendering propositional truth impossible. Nietzsche radically challenges the rational foundations on which we stand. Thus he presents us with a mode of knowledge production that reclaims traditions lost to science. In addition, Nietzsche shows, by word and example, that his existential approach offers a way to see life as a text and source for quasi-naturalistic forays toward understanding. In this way Nietzsche shows that the traditional concept of knowledge is a pseudo-concept by revealing the intimate and inseparable connection between life and knowledge. Knowledge is rooted in life; it is a manifestation of concrete psychological and political realities. Consequently, it makes sense not to ignore life as a source for explanation when examining resources for re-establishing communication when the hermeneutic circle breaks down in a moment of misunderstanding.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23261695
Journal Title: Cahiers d'ethnomusicologie
Publisher: ateliers d'ethnomusicologie
Issue: i23267018
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Cler Jérôme
Abstract: Jean During (1994: 407 sq.).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23267125
Journal Title: Annual Review of Anthropology
Publisher: Annual Reviews
Issue: i23270692
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Zeitlyn David
Abstract: http://www.rrnpilot.
org/.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1146/annurev-anthro-092611-145721', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any
Journal Title: The American Political Science Review
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i23275342
Date: 11 1, 2011
Author(s): BOOTH W. JAMES
Abstract: Booth (2006,134-35)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23275351
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i23277635
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): KUUKKANEN JOUNI-MATTI
Abstract: Rescher, Objectivity; Max Weber, "Objectivity in Social Sciences and
Social Policy," in Weber, The Methodology of the Social Sciences (New York: The Free Press, 1949).
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1468-2303.2012.00632.x', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any
Journal Title: International Organization
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i23279968
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): de Mello e Souza André
Abstract: Grant and Keohane 2005, especially 36, 38.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23279972
Journal Title: Journal of Mormon History
Publisher: Mormon History Association
Issue: i23289637
Date: 4 1, 2007
Author(s): Barlow Philip L.
Abstract: "Baptism for the Dead,"
Times and Seasons 3:760.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23289683
Journal Title: Journal of Mormon History
Publisher: Mormon History Association
Issue: i23289708
Date: 10 1, 2006
Author(s): Turley Kylie Nielson
Abstract: Hannah T[apfield], King, "Sympathy," Woman's Exponent 3 (April
1, 1875): 166
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23289868
Journal Title: Iyyun: The Jerusalem Philosophical Quarterly / עיון: רבעון פילוסופי
Publisher: החברה הפילוסופית בירושלים
Issue: i23303150
Date: 4 1, 1960
Author(s): LICHTIGFELD A.
Abstract: Jaspers' thesis (while rejecting the claim of philosophers of the Western tradition to universal validity and Truth, yet conceding that their metaphysical systems express an awareness of Being) is as follows: "Reality is neither the object nor the subject, but that which encompasses both, the Encompassing which is illuminated in the division between subject and object"; He — the One God — is Encompassing and the greatest closeness which has its place within the inwardness of man". The whole inquiry leads Jaspers to claim that the existential self is rooted in Transcendence and the ground of all things lies in the real ization of the existential self in freedom in which eternity and time coalesce. In this freedom time — far from being the "moving image of eternity" — becomes the actual scene of the existential self's moral striving with the forces of this world, and by seizing the cipher (= the language of Transcendence) as the symbol of Transcendence, the existential self achieves authentic existence, thus endowing the historical process of time with unique and ultimate meaning. 1) Reason: It is because of reason with which God has endowed man that any content of a pretended revelation possesses any self-evidencing power: "In diesem Menschwerden durch Vernunft wird das Eine der Transzendenz fühlbar dem Einen der jeweils geschichtlichen Existenz". Yet by abandoning belief in universal Truth we become open for Truth, realised and determined in its concrete historic form for each individual by means of communication. Communication therefore becomes "the universal condition of man's being". It follows that Truth cannot be separated from communicability. It only appears in time as a realitythrough-communication so much so "that I can not even become myself alone without emerging out of my being with others". Now the element in which existential communication lives and moves and has its spiritual being is — reason ("reason is what penetrates everything"). 2) Unity of Mankind: The discovery of the unreality of man's existence apart from God, is the discovery at the same time of the fact that God is the ultimate ground of the unity of mankind. According to Jaspers the fact of life are to conform to the principle of that wider order of reality disclosed to us in the experience of communication in which the reality of each person's likeness to the image of God finds its practical application. The development of communication depends on the principle of correlation of Existenz and Transcendenz which is the property of no finite existential self, but manifests itself alike in all. Though we may be confronted with the question "Is it God or the devil who governs the world?", it remains equally true that even "failure is no argument against the truth that is rooted in transcendence". 3) Ultimate Dignity of Man: Jaspers' unequivocal emphasis on freedom, stating that "Freedom and God are inseparable" serves to assure this ideal its place in human society. Thus man's exercise of freedom knits him up into the transcendental design. The claim that certain facts and experiences yield a basis for the recognition of the ultimate dignity of man is justified precisely by this evidence that through God, as inseparable from freedom, we discern the ultimate significance of both man and humanity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23303155
Journal Title: Revue Philosophique de la France et de l'Étranger
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i23327447
Date: 12 1, 2012
Author(s): Serban Claudia
Abstract: Nous formulons cette question sans ignorer que la Befindlichkeit heideg-
gérienne n'est pas YEmpfindung que Michel Henry mettra à l'honneur. Mais bien
qu'il s'agisse de deux conceptions de l'affectivité fort différentes, l'intérêt commun
pour l'affect comme mode de révélation à soi antérieur à la réflexion demeure
remarquable.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/rphi.124.0473', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any
Journal Title: Iyyun: The Jerusalem Philosophical Quarterly / עיון: רבעון פילוסופי
Publisher: החברה הפילוסופית בירושלים
Issue: i23340007
Date: 10 1, 1965
Author(s): EPSTEIN F.
Abstract: The significance of the conception of the "I" as an "integral ego", which is fundamental to Ricoeur's thought, is brought out. The "integral ego" forms the basis of an analysis of the relations between the voluntary and involuntary in human action and enables these relations to be seen and comperehended from a fresh perspective. The "integral ego" is conceived as an organic unity of the "Cartesian cogito" and the existent body. This necessitates a view of the body as a Corps propre in Merleau-Ponty's sense; "a-body-moved-by-the-will", a conscious body, imbued with meaning. The body is on no account to be regarded as a mere physical object related to other physical objects in a mechanical causal chain. There is no place in man for the Cartesian dualism between thinking substance and extended substance. Although Ricoeur's method in analysing these relations is one of pure or "eidetic" description, he, in contradistinction to Husserl, attempts to integrate the body, as a Corps propre, with the cogito. He repeatedly stresses the danger of naturalizing the cogito; of viewing psychic processes as natural facts and the body as an empirical object. The rigorous phenomenological description clarifies the inter-relation and reciprocity between the voluntary and involuntary—whether in human decision, physical action or consent. The voluntary (the project, the moving of the body and consent) is based on and nourished by the involuntary (motives and given values; body, emotions and habits; character, sub-conscious and life). On the other hand, the involuntary has meaning only within the harmonious synthesis of human action. This analysis enables Ricoeur to refute various traditional explanations of human action. Both deterministic and irrationalistic interpretations distort and misinterpret the place and meaning of the components of human action because of an inadequate representation of man's nature. Determinism is wrong in regarding consciousness as a fact of nature and in confusing motives with causes; irrationalism, which advocates a "liberté d'indifférence", basing itself on the same premise as rationalism, and confusing motives with causes, is wrong in seeing the negation of the very existence of motives as the one way of saving human freedom. Both views disregard the fact that human action is impossible and cannot be understood without motives and that this, in turn, does not mean a determination of man in a mechanical way, for motives are not a part of nature but rather an organic element in a specific human situation—voluntary action. Human freedom is the freedom peculiar to a finite being immersed in time. Both those who stress passivity and receptivity and those who stress the dynamic creating ability of the self are wrong; both those who thought that freedom is possible only on the basis of clear and distinct motives and that action is nothing but the end of deliberation (St. Thomas) and those who thought that freedom is possible only by an irrational emergence of the vital ego (Bergson) or by negating the existence of any previous determination of the self (Sartre) are mistaken. A true human decision is composed of two elements; given motives and values on the one hand, and non-intellectualist spontaneous choice on the other. Duality is peculiar to human action. This is made more explicit in dealing with the more fundamental involuntary elements; character, sub-consciousness and life. Man acts freely from a finite and determined point of view; he acts in a clear and transparent way on the basis of confused and amorphous data; he lives his freedom when thrown into life. Necessity is inherent in man; it is one of his modes of being. There is no "inner freedom" on the one hand and "objective" causal necessity on the other. This conception of human action as both activity and passivity is reminiscent of Merleau-Ponty's statement in his "Philosophie du perception": "Le monde est déjá constitué, mais aussi jamais complètement constitué.... Il n'y a donc jamais déterminisme et jamais choix absolu, jamais je ne suis chose et jamais conscience nue". There is no dilemna between determinism and irrationalism, just as there is none between extended substance and thinking substance; there is dialogue.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23340010
Journal Title: Civilisations
Publisher: Institute de Sociologie
Issue: i23346050
Date: 8 1, 2012
Author(s): STEFANOVSKA Malina
Abstract: Voir son récit autobiographique, Origines (2004).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23346060
Journal Title: Revue Historique
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i23352863
Date: 7 1, 2012
Author(s): Cabantous Alain
Abstract: Jeffrey Bolster, Blackjacks. African Ameñcan Seamen in the Age of Sail, Cambridge (Mass.),
Harvard, UP, 1997.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/rhis.123.0705', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any
Journal Title: Revue Historique
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i23352864
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): Dosse François
Abstract: Quarto, 1997, vol. 1, p. 239-275.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/rhis.124.0921', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any
Journal Title: October
Publisher: MIT Press
Issue: i23361522
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): APTER EMILY
Abstract: Roberto Esposito, Immunitas: The Protection and Negation of Life, trans. Zakiya Hanafi
(London: Polity Press, 2011), pp. 145-77.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1162/OCTO_a_00107', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any
Journal Title: Dappim: Research in Literature / דפים למחקר בספרות
Publisher: החוג לספרות עברית והשוואתית, אוניברסיטת חיפה
Issue: i23416296
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): Levy Ze'ev
Abstract: Jacques Derrida's deconstructionism has influenced some American shools of literary criticism which aim at abolishing the distinction between literary and philosophical texts and, at the same time, deconstructing the text from its inherent meaning. If no text has any determined meaning, every interpretation is as correct as any other. This article examines some tenets of Derrida and his followers, especially their definitions of the words understanding, interpretation, and difference. It finds some surprizing affinities between Kant's formalistic esthetics and certain formalistic trends in modern criticism, in particular the concept of autonomy, which implies, in deconstructionism, the uniqueness of every text. However, if so, every reading is inevitably a 'misreading' or 'misinterpretation' thereof. This has led to the paradoxical and unwarranted conclusion that reading is impossible... The article questions some eccentric implications of this paralogism, for example, if no text is readable, does this apply to Derrida's writings as well? The article also calls attention to some interesting concepts of Jewish Kabala and of 'negative theology', which bear a striking resemblance to certain of Derrida's and other deconstructionists' ideas. Without diminishing the importance of Derrida's philosohpical work or the contribution of deconstructionism to modern hermeneutics, this article refutes certain nihilistic claims of the 'deconstructors' regarding philosophical hermeneutics and literary criticism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23417047
Journal Title: European Journal of Psychology of Education
Publisher: I.S.P.A. / Instituto Superior de Psicologia Aplicada
Issue: i23419999
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): Hasse Cathrine
Abstract: It has been argued that in higher education academic disciplines can be seen as communities of practices. This implies a focus on what constitutes identities in academic culture. In this article I argue that the transition from newcomer to a full participant in a community of practice of physicists entails a focus on how identities emerge in learning how to highlight certain aspects of personal life histories. The analysis of interviews with 55 physicists shows that physicists often perceive experiences in their childhood as the first step into their professional identities as physicists. These experiences involve recollections of the ability to think scientifically (e.g., 'go beyond the surface'), and the ability to play with toys which can be connected to the practical life of physics. The process of identity formation can be described as developing in a relational zone of proximal development, where old-timers recognize particular playful qualities in newcomers as a legitimate access to a physicist identity. The article discusses how play which physicists connects with a scientific mind can constitute a relational zone of proximal developments in a community of practice as a particular "space of authoring" in a physicist culture, which cut across other cultural differences. Il a été admis que les disciplines de l'éducation supérieure peuvent être considérées comme des communautés de pratique. Cela pose la question de savoir comment se constituent les identités dans la culture académique. Dans cet article, pour mettre en évidence la transition de nouveau venu à participant à part entière dans une communauté de pratique de physiciens, j'examine non seulement la manière dont des identités émergent au travers des pratiques, mais aussi les aspects biographiques que les participants identifient comme ayant facilité leur transition. Une cohorte de 55 physiciens a été interviewée et leurs analyses ont été comparées à des données supplémentaires, notamment tirées d'une observation participante d'étudiants en physique. Les physiciens identifient souvent des expériences de leur enfance comme premiers pas vers leur identité professionnelle de physiciens. Ces expériences requièrent une pensée de type scientifique et une capacité à jouer liée avec les pratiques de la physique. Le processus de formation identitaire peut être décrit comme se développant dans une zone relationnelle de développement proximal, dans laquelle les aînés reconnaissent les qualités ludiques des nouveaux venus comme légitimant leur accès à l'identité de physicien. L'article discute la manière dont le jeu, que les physiciens associent à l'esprit scientifique, constitue une zone de développement proximal dans une communauté de pratique, comme «espace d'auteur» dans la culture des physiciens — laquelle peut par ailleurs dépasser d'autres différences culturelles.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23421595
Journal Title: European Journal of Psychology of Education
Publisher: I.S.P.A. / Instituto Superior de Psicologia Aplicada
Issue: i23419999
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): Hviid Pernille
Abstract: How do children conceptualise their own development? From their point of view, what serve as constraints for their movements in time and space? The theoretical framework of the experiment described here was a cultural historical first person developmental perspective. The concept of transition is here put in use to capture the children's experience of their movements with or against a dynamic, inviting and demanding socio-cultural landscape over time. An interpretation of children's experience of their developmental timing with temporalities of the childhood landscape is presented. Comment les enfants conceptualisent-ils leur propre développement? De leur point de vue, qu'est-ce qui contraint leurs mouvements dans l'espace et dans le temps? Le cadre théorique de la recherche décrite ici est une perspective historico-culturelle, développementale et à la première personne. Le concept de transition est utilisé pour mettre en évidence l'expérience que les enfants ont de leurs mouvements, allant avec, ou à l'encontre de leur environnement socioculturel et temporel, lequel est à la fois dynamique, invitant et exigeant. Une interprétation de l'expérience que les enfants ont de la temporalité de leur propre développement est présentée en rapport avec les temporalités caractérisant l'environnement de l'enfance.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23421597
Journal Title: Israeli Sociology / סוציולוגיה ישראלית
Publisher: החוג לסוציולוגיה ולאנתרופולוגיה, הפקולטה למדעי החברה ע"ש גרשון גורדון אוניברסיטת תל-אביב
Issue: i23442333
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Shenhav Yehouda
Abstract: מסה זו עוסקת בסוציולוגיה של התרגום בתנאים של יחסי כוח תיאולוגיים וקולוניאליים בין שפות. בעקבות ולטר בנימין, פול ריקר, ז'אק דרידה והספרות הפוסט-קולוניאלית, אדגים כיצד תחומים בלתי ניתנים לתרגום הופכים את התרגום לאשליה משיחית. דרך דוגמאות מתוך ספרות הנכבה שנכתבה בערבית אני מבקש להראות כיצד התחומים הבלתי ניתנים לתרגום מוצפים במסמנים לא יציבים ובמצבים אפורתיים של מבוי סתום. למשל, השימוש במילה נכבה אינו עקבי אלא תלוי בהקשר של זמן הכתיבה וזמן התרגום. בערבית אפשר למצוא לבד מנכבה גם את המושגים כארת'ה, הזימה, נכסה ומאסאה. בעברית אפשר למצוא שימוש באסון, בתבוסה, בטרגדיה או בנכבה. גם המסמנים ההיסטוריוגרפיים ומסמני הזמן והמרחב בספרות הנכבה אינם יציבים אלא משתנים תמידית. תובנות אלה מציעות אסטרטגיות תרגום שמתבססות על הטיות זמן מתאימות (למשל זמן הווה מתמשך במקום זמן עבר), על היעזרות בהערות חיצוניות לטקסט ועל שערוב מסוים של העברית. What is translation under asymmetrical conditions of power? How do colonial and theological practices shape the relationships between languages? Drawing on Walter Benjamin, Paul Ricoeur, Jacque Derrida, and postcolonial literature in general, I show how untranslatable texts stemming from such asymmetry result in insurmountable gaps which render the messianic "perfect translation" impossible. Using examples from literature on the Palestinian Naqba, I examine how untranslatable texts (from Arabic to Hebrew) are inflated with unstable signifiers, which themselves are contingent on the time/space aspect of the translation. Using these examples, I demonstrate the extent to which translation from Arabic to Hebrew necessitates peculiar political and aesthetic strategies which are sensitive to colonial and theological conditions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23443031
Journal Title: Annales de Géographie
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i23457093
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): Lévy Jacques
Abstract: Margaret Thatcher Foundation : http://www.margaret-
thatcher.org/speeches/displaydocument.asp?docid=106689.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23457595
Journal Title: Annales de Géographie
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i23458030
Date: 2 1, 2013
Author(s): Héritier Stéphane
Abstract: Gauchon et al., 2006
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23458032
Journal Title: Historia Social
Publisher: Fundación Instituto de Historia Social
Issue: i23496240
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): de la Pascua Sánchez María José
Abstract: Ibidem, pp. 126-127.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23496317
Journal Title: Hebrew Union College Annual
Publisher: Hebrew Union College
Issue: i23503346
Date: 1 1, 1982
Author(s): TOWNER W. SIBLEY
Abstract: supra, pp. 107-109.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23507627
Journal Title: Nineteenth-Century French Studies
Publisher: The University of Nebraska Press
Issue: i23535701
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Best Janice
Abstract: By incorporating the battle of Waterloo into the events of their novels, Hugo and Stendhal create a portrait of its principal protagonist, Napoléon ler. Associated in one case with a spatial prison out of time and in the other case with a temporal exile out of space, the image of the emperor is that of a figure of power deprived of time and, consequently, of its legitimacy. Stendhal imprisons his character in the present to deny the reality of Napoleon's defeat. Hugo, on the other hand, exiles his character from the present to link the past to the future and propose a new model of heroism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23537321
Journal Title: Nineteenth-Century French Studies
Publisher: The University of Nebraska Press
Issue: i23535944
Date: 7 1, 2005
Author(s): GROSSMAN KATHRYN M.
Abstract: Victor Hugo's L'Homme qui rit (1869) presents a powerful, nightmarish vision of human longing and corruption. Recurrent imagery of aspiration and asphyxiation ties the romantic subplot, which focuses on the protagonist's divided affections, to a much wider vortex of desires. At the same time, the use of similar topoi to figure polar opposites calls into question the antithetical relationships themselves. This essay looks at the ways in which desire operates in Hugo's text, inscribing the struggle between good and evil within more global social issues. Whereas the representation of women might appear to adhere to the virgin-whore dichotomy, and so to reflect an anti-feminist stance, this dichotomy is deconstructed by Hugo's use of metaphorical lattices and multilevel symmetries to figure his own unspeakable (republican) yearning.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23537991
Journal Title: Nineteenth-Century French Studies
Publisher: The University of Nebraska Press
Issue: i23535931
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): WRIGHT BETH S.
Abstract: After 1814, the French looked to parallels in the past to explain the causes of contemporary events. For them historical time was doubled, understood through analogies. Signaling multiple times, easily accomplished in historiographic narratives, posed a challenge to historical painters. Delaroche utilized innovative approaches to representing time in his works, which were praised by contemporary historians and art critics as visual parallels to modern historical literature. In this essay I argue that Delaroche's repeated visual quotation of works from the Bowyer Historic Gallery enabled him to represent a doubled moment in his historical paintings. I examine his approach to temporality in Jane Grey (1834), Assassination of the duc de Guise (1834), a suite of watercolors (c.1825) on an episode in Rousseau's Confessions (1782), and Cromwell (1831). The latter was one of several works by Delaroche inspired by Chateaubriand's Les Quatre Stuarts (1828), an insistently multi-temporal text which compared Stuarts and Bourbons, written to ensure the stability of the newly restored Bourbon dynasty.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23538480
Journal Title: Biography
Publisher: University of Hawai'i Press for the Biographical Research Center
Issue: i23538717
Date: 10 1, 2004
Author(s): REGARD FRÉDÉRIC
Abstract: This essay analyzes how Newman's Apologia seeks to articulate nineteenth-century conceptions of time through a canonical conception of prophetism, and how the question of private space is made into a national issue through Newman's narrative. The paper finally argues that Newman's technique of "replacement" deconstructs itself as a metaphorical process, which makes for the unique literariness of the Apologia.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23540687
Journal Title: Early American Studies
Publisher: THE McNEIL CENTER FOR EARLY AMERICAN STUDIES
Issue: i23545403
Date: 10 1, 2009
Author(s): SCRABA JEFFREY
Abstract: Ibid., 10
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23546624
Journal Title: The Annual of the Society of Christian Ethics
Publisher: The Society of Christian Ethics
Issue: i23556517
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Birkenfeld Darryl L.
Abstract: Winter, Liberating Creation, 72.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23560010
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23568927
Date: 1 1, 1981
Author(s): Schmidinger Heinrich M.
Abstract: siehe oben Anm. 12.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23576208
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570146
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Dumont Camille
Abstract: Dieu, Tome premier, p. 21.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23577992
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23569616
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): Kobler John F.
Abstract: John F. Kobler, op. cit. (n. 12 supra), pp. 119-122, 194.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23578486
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23569623
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): de Berranger Olivier
Abstract: E. Stein, L'Etre fini et l'Etre éternel, traduit par G. Casella et F.A. Viallet,
Louvain-Paris, Nauwelaerts, 1972, p. 150, note 60.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23579292
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570132
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Anatolios Khaled
Abstract: Heine, 142.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23579577
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITAS GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570322
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Gilbert Paul
Abstract: M. Heidegger, De l'essence de la vérité, 78
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23581548
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITAS GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570197
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Finamore Rosanna
Abstract: H.G. Gadamer, Verità e metodo, 442.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23581824
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITÀ GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570983
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Carlotti Paolo
Abstract: Concilio Ecumenico Vaticano II, Gaudium et spes, 46.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23581907
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITÀ GREGORIANA
Issue: i23573307
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Mateo Rogelio García
Abstract: R. Garcìa Mateo, Ignacio de Loyola. Su espiritualidad y su mundo cultural, Bilbao, 2000,
161-206.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23582170
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITÀ GREGORIANA
Issue: i23571645
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Nebel Mathias
Abstract: P. Ricoeur, Histoire et vérité, 106-109.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23582361
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITÀ GREGORIANA
Issue: i23575105
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Margaria Luca
Abstract: E. Lévinas, L'au-delà du verset, 175.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23582521
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Theologie und Kirche
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i23585752
Date: 9 1, 2000
Author(s): Schneider-Flume Gunda
Abstract: Ricceur [s. Anm. 6], Bd. 3,335-
349
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23585759
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Theologie und Kirche
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i23585557
Date: 3 1, 2006
Author(s): Morgenstern Matthias
Abstract: G. Aicher, Das Alte
Testament in der Mischna, Freiburg i.Br. 1906, 67f.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23585919
Journal Title: Revue Tiers Monde
Publisher: l'Institut d'Étude du Développement économique et social
Issue: i23592762
Date: 6 1, 2003
Author(s): Pouligny Béatrice
Abstract: F. G. Bailey, Les règles du jeu politique. Paris, PUF, 1971, p. 186.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23594213
Journal Title: Histoire, Économie et Société
Publisher: ARMAND COLIN
Issue: i23612254
Date: 6 1, 2012
Author(s): Anceau Éric
Abstract: Douze leçons sur l'histoire, op. cit., p. 206.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23614476
Journal Title: European Journal of East Asian Studies
Publisher: BRILL
Issue: i23615377
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): YANG CHUNG FANG
Abstract: Cheung, Rujia Lunli Tu gjhixu Qingjie', Liu, Chui Rong, 'gjiongguoren De Caifu
Guarnían' (The Chinese conception of wealth), in K.S. Yang (ed.), jjiongguoren Dejiazhi
Guan (Value Orientations of the Chinese People) (Taipei: Guiguan Books, 1993).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23615674
Journal Title: Perspectives
Publisher: INSTITUTE OF INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS
Issue: i23616196
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): HAYS GEORGE
Abstract: This article examines Campbell's concept of 'foreign policy' and its application to identifiers 'below' those utilized by Campbell. Campbell's discussion of 'foreign policy' at the level of the ruling elite, though perhaps necessary for the historical breadth of his analysis, provides a skewed and privileged understanding of both national identity and its creation. Through an analysis of 'foreign policy' at the sub-elite level, using the three versions of The Quiet American as illustrative examples, this article demonstrates that a separation of 'foreign policy' from Foreign Policy can yield multiple potentially conflicting national identities. While at times taking on the form of an argument ad absurdum, it is not the intent of this article to disprove Campbell's work. Rather, its intent is to use the concept of 'foreign policy' with a different level of identifier to demonstrate that the tenuousness and indefiniteness of national identity are actually greater than those proposed by Campbell.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23616255
Journal Title: Revue de l'histoire des religions
Publisher: ARMAND COLIN
Issue: i23617005
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): GRABAR OLEG
Abstract: Barry Flood, comme The Great
MosqueMosque of Damascus: studies on the makines of an Umayyad visual culture
(Leiden, 2001).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23617810
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: REVISTA PORTUGUESA de Filosofia
Issue: i23630184
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): CATALÃO HELENA B.
Abstract: "C'était bien la même Amérique que j'avais laissée, les mêmes questions, les mêmes
Blancs qui cherchaient un bouc émissaire!" Haley, Alex & Malcolm X - op. cit., p. 288.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23631110
Journal Title: Revue d'histoire des sciences
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i23632705
Date: 6 1, 1999
Author(s): Cassou-Noguès Pierre
Abstract: Husserl, 1975, 378.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23633974
Journal Title: Revue d'histoire des sciences
Publisher: ARMAND COLIN
Issue: i23634241
Date: 6 1, 2007
Author(s): SIMON Anne
Abstract: RTP, IV, 504.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23634244
Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung
Publisher: GESIS – Leibniz Institute for the Social Sciences
Issue: i23644129
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Schulz-Forberg Hagen
Abstract: »Die räumlichen und zeitlichen Schichten der Globalgeschichte: Überlegungen zu einer globalen Begriffsgeschichte anhand der Ausweitung von Reinhart Kosellecks Zeitschichten in globale Räume«. Recent debates on global history have challenged the understanding of history beyond the nation-state. Simultaneously, they search for non-Eurocentric approaches. This has repercussions on the relation between historical space and time in both historical interpretation and in research design. This article reflects on the possibilities of a global conceptual history by expanding Reinhart Koselleck's theory of temporal layers (Zeitschichten) into global spaces. To this end, it introduces the notion of spatial layers (Raumschichten). First, historicisation and its relation to and interaction with spatialisation and temporalisation is pondered; then, the impact of global spatial and temporal complexities on comparative and conceptual history is considered, before, thirdly, a framework of three tensions of global history - normative, temporal and spatial - is introduced as a way to concretely unfold historical research questions through global conceptual history. Regarding time and space, the main lines of argument in global history have focused either on the question of whether or not European powers were ahead of non-European ones or on the supposedly Western linearity of time as opposed to a non-Western cosmology or circularity of time. Taking its point of departure in Zeitschichten, which break from the linear-vs.-circular logic, this article instead proposes to foreground an actor-based, multi-lingual, global conceptual history to better understand spatio-temporal practices.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23644524
Journal Title: Acta Orientalia Academiae Scientiarum Hungaricae
Publisher: AKADÉMIAI KIADÓ
Issue: i23656603
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Simon Róbert
Abstract: Goldziher (1912, pp. 92 sq)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23658556
Journal Title: Revue de l'histoire des religions
Publisher: PRESSES UNIVERSITAIRES DE FRANCE
Issue: i23662048
Date: 9 1, 1995
Author(s): SAUZEAU ANDRÉ
Abstract: J. S. Cooper, Sumerian and Aryan : Racial theory, Académie Politics and Parisian
Assiriology, RHR, 210, 1993, p. 169-205.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23671687
Journal Title: ARSP: Archiv für Rechts- und Sozialphilosophie / Archives for Philosophy of Law and Social Philosophy
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag
Issue: i23676381
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Morikawa Takemitsu
Abstract: Kodalle [Fn. 21], 22
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23680910
Journal Title: Cultures et Conflits
Publisher: L'Harmattan
Issue: i23696193
Date: 7 1, 1994
Author(s): APTER DAVID E.
Abstract: David E. Apter et Tony Saich, Revolutionary Discourse in "Mao's Republic",
Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1994.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23698813
Journal Title: Cultures et Conflits
Publisher: L'Harmattan
Issue: i23697554
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): WASINSKI Christophe
Abstract: Doubler M., Closing with Enemy - How Gis Fought the War in Europe,
1944-1945, Lawrence, University Press of Kansas, 1994.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23703529
Journal Title: Social Work
Publisher: National Association of Social Workers
Issue: i23715106
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Norton Dolores G.
Abstract: Although the dual perspective should be used to focus on diversity, it should be applied within the context of an anthropological—ecological framework to prevent stereotyping, to illuminate the universal goals of societal organization underlying human behavior, and to explore the early socialization of children. This view is illustrated with preliminary findings from an ongoing longitudinal study of lower socioeconomic inner-city African American children that examines the importance of a sense of time, its evolution in early socialization, and the relationship of parent-child interactions to the development of a sense of time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23716885
Journal Title: Ventunesimo Secolo
Publisher: Rubbettino
Issue: i23718374
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): Lazar Marc
Abstract: What does it means to legacy in politics? That's the main question of this contribution. The author, in a first part, proposes a definition of the concept of legacy in political parties in general. In a second time, he analyzes the policies of legacy in the Italian and French Communist parties. These CP have a different relation with their past because they choose different strategies: strategy of breakdown with Communist experience in Italy and, on the opposite, strategy of continuity for the French Communist party.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23719649
Journal Title: History of Economic Ideas
Publisher: Gruppo Editoriale Internazionale
Issue: i23718600
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Coats A. W. "Bob"
Abstract: Terence W. Hutchison (1988), p. 527.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23722264
Journal Title: Contributions to the History of Concepts
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i23730861
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Kontler László
Abstract: Lorraine Daston, "Afterword: The Ethos of Enlightenment" in
William Clark, Jan Golinski, and Simon Schaffer (1999), 495-504.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23730867
Journal Title: The Centennial Review
Publisher: College of Arts and Letters, Michigan State University
Issue: i23736652
Date: 7 1, 1985
Author(s): Carlisle E. Fred
Abstract: Mary Hesse's analysis in Models and
Analogies in Science
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23738430
Journal Title: Innovar: Revista de ciencias administrativas y sociales
Publisher: UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE COLOMBIA
Issue: i23741451
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Tognato Carlo
Abstract: Stevens y Toneguzzo (2004).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23745584
Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i23783400
Date: 3 1, 2013
Author(s): Aubin-Boltanski Emma
Abstract: N. Olesen, 1991 : 68
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23785646
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: REVISTA PORTUGUESA de Filosofia
Issue: i23783024
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): AGIS DOMINGO FERNÁNDEZ
Abstract: Cioran, Emile - Ese maldito yo, ed. cit., p. 130.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23785814
Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i23782111
Date: 6 1, 2013
Author(s): Gauthier Claudine
Abstract: Id., 1960 : XI, 13 d
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23785829
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: REVISTA PORTUGUESA de Filosofia
Issue: i23783067
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): CATALÃO HELENA B.
Abstract: Marión, Jean-Luc-Étant donné, ed. cit., p. 334.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23785889
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i23799482
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): ALEXANDRE DIDIER
Abstract: Michel Foucault, L'Ordre du discours, Paris, Gallimard, 1971, p. 17.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23799786
Journal Title: Durkheimian Studies / Études Durkheimiennes
Publisher: Berghahn Books and The Durkheim Press
Issue: i23861492
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Béra Matthieu Dimitri
Abstract: This is based on research that has discovered crucial, hitherto unknown biographical information. First, I review the theories of authors who helped to generate the whole 'affair' of Durkheim's two pre-names, most often in seeing it as a way to interrogate his relation with Judaism. Next, I discuss how the issue comes with elements that are incomplete or inexact. It is then to present new evidence of Durkheim's ambivalence and changing attitude towards his first, identifiably Jewish pre-name. The census records during his time at Bordeaux show that he registered himself as 'David' in 1891 and 1896, but abandoned this and switched to 'Émile' in 1901. Accordingly, I examine possible interpretations of the change, in terms of the political context of the Dreyfus Affair, events in his family life, his institutional position, his growing reputation, and a programme of research in which he resolved on a scientific treatment of religion.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.3167/ds.2011.170106', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any
Journal Title: BMS: Bulletin of Sociological Methodology / Bulletin de Méthodologie Sociologique
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i23884858
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Naudet Jules
Abstract: This article discusses the theoretical and methodological debates concerning the experience and consequences of upward social mobility between generations. The methods employed by researchers working on this subject are diverse, and the results they arrive at are sometimes contradictory. This article proposes, firstly, to give an overview of the different traditions of studying the experience of social mobility in order to identify the conditions for potential "cumulative" knowledge. In a second step, we argue that it is mainly through a study of the narratives of mobility that one can, simultaneously and comprehensively, grasp the ambivalence and multiplicity of effects that produce upward social mobility. Cet article revient sur les débats théoriques et méthodologiques sur l'expérience et les conséquences de la mobilité sociale ascendante intergénérationnelle. Les méthodes mobilisées par les chercheurs travaillant sur ce sujet sont multiples, et les résultats auxquels ils parviennent parfois contradictoires. Cet article se propose donc, dans un premier temps, de donner une vue d'ensemble des différentes traditions d'étude de l'expérience de la mobilité sociale afin de cerner les conditions d'une potentielle «cumulativité» des savoirs qu'elles produisent. Dans un second temps, nous défendons l'idée que c'est principalement à travers une étude du discours des personnes en mobilité que l'on peut, dans un même temps et dans un même élan, saisir l'ambivalence et la multiplicité des effets que produit la mobilité sociale ascendante.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23891865
Journal Title: Italianistica: Rivista di letteratura italiana
Publisher: GIARDINI EDITORI E STAMPATORI IN PISA
Issue: i23919326
Date: 12 1, 1991
Author(s): Fenzi Enrico
Abstract: «Nota bene»: vd. Rico, Petrarca y el «De vera religione», cit., p. 326.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23933953
Journal Title: Revue Internationale de Philosophie
Publisher: Librairie Philosophique VRIN
Issue: i23961076
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Fusillo Massimo
Abstract: C. Montaleone, Don Chisciotte o la logica della follia. Bollati Boringhieri, Torino 2005.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23961098
Journal Title: Leviathan
Publisher: VS Verlag für Sozialwissenschaften
Issue: i23983251
Date: 3 1, 2006
Author(s): Paul Axel T.
Abstract: Danielle de Lame: Une Colline entre mille ou le calme avant le tempête. Transforma-
tions et blocages du Rwanda rurale, Tervuren 1996, S. 73.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23987369
Journal Title: European Journal of Sociology / Archives Européennes de Sociologie / Europäisches Archiv für Soziologie
Publisher: CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS
Issue: i23998986
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Frère Bruno
Abstract: Castoriadis (1997a).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23998993
Journal Title: Annali d'Italianistica
Publisher: Annali d'Italianistica, Inc.
Issue: i24006560
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Pelosi Olimpia
Abstract: Pozzi, Scrittrici mistiche italiane, p. 462: "Nel 1629 cessarono le visioni e le estasi. La fama di
quelle meraviglie, uscita dalla clausura, aveva perô provocato il fenomeno, comune a molte altre
estatiche, di un grande traffico spirituale intomo alla suora: le scrissero senza tregua religiosi e
prelati,... ma le scrissero soprattutto dame dell'alta aristocrazia, dai vicini ducati di Mantova e
. Savoia alle lontane plaghe di Spagna, Boemia, Baviera. Roma intervenne allora col solito rigore;
senza emettere condanne, le proibl ogni corrispondenza con Testerno. Cos! calô su di lei un
silenzio non piu rotto da fatti straordinari né da rumori del secolo, fino alla morte, avvenuta il 12
febbraio 1671".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24006576
Journal Title: Annali d'Italianistica
Publisher: Annali d'Italianistica, Inc.
Issue: i24008692
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Smith Jonathan
Abstract: note 14
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24009862
Journal Title: Annali d'Italianistica
Publisher: Annali d'Italianistica, Inc.
Issue: i24009986
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Picone Michelangelo
Abstract: Cherchi, "Opra d'aragna (RVF, clxxii)."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24009993
Journal Title: Annali d'Italianistica
Publisher: Annali d'Italianistica, Inc.
Issue: i24016133
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Tota Anna Lisa
Abstract: Si pensi alle scuse ufficiali rivolte da Reagan alle famiglie dei cittadini americani di
origine giapponese internati nei campi di concentramento americani durante la seconda
guerra mondiale e commemorati attualmente a Ellis Island.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24016311
Journal Title: China Perspectives
Publisher: cefc French Centre for Research on Contemporary China
Issue: i24053272
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): GARAPON ANTOINE
Abstract: Chen Yan, L'eveil de la Chine [The awakening of China], Editions de I'Aube, 2002.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24053278
Journal Title: China Perspectives
Publisher: cefc French Centre for Research on Contemporary China
Issue: i24054563
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): MORIER-GENOUD DAMIEN
Abstract: Robert Eskildsen, "Of Civilization and Savages: The Mimetic Imperialism of Japan's
1874 Expedition to Taiwan," American Historical Review, 107.2, April 2002, pp. 388-
418.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24054621
Journal Title: Perspectives Chinoises
Publisher: Centre d'Etudes Francais sur la Chine contemporaine
Issue: i24071587
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): GARAPON ANTOINE
Abstract: Chen Yan, L'Éveil de la Chine, La Tour d'Aiguës, Éditions de l'Aube, 2002.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24071720
Journal Title: Democratic Culture / תרבות דמוקרטית
Publisher: אוניברסיטת בר-אילן; המכון הישראלי לדמוקרטיה; צביון, מרכז ג'ולסון לישראליות, יהדות ודמוקרטיה
Issue: i24141591
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Meir Ephraim
Abstract: In this article, Levinas' ethical metaphysics is analyzed and his contribution to present-day philosophy is described. In his philosophy, ethics is not something that originates in the autonomous will, as Kant would have premised. It is, rather, the result of the traumatic rupturing of the I by the Other, a heteronomous event. The I's passivity in being opened by the Other is highlighted by Levinas in the words "substitution," "obsession," and "being elected." The I, in the critical Others' eyes, is guilty. The infinity in the Other's demand, regarding the I, is divine. It would be a fatal misunderstanding of Levinas to think that, with the insertion of the word "God," he becomes a theologian. In this article the relation between ethics and politics is discussed and their relation to God is pointed to. In this way, Levinas' discourse on God is demonstrated as being fitting for our time, after the crisis of humanism during the Holocaust. In the course of the article, the question of whether there "is" a God in the eyes of Levinas, and if man "needs" Him is answered. In other words, the logical status of the word "God" in Levinas' philosophy is defined.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24142190
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für katholische Theologie
Publisher: herder
Issue: i24160375
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Eckholt Margit
Abstract: /. Duque, Narrati-
ve Theologie. Chancen und Grenzen - Im Anschluß an E. Jüngel, P. Ricœur und G. La-
font, in: ThPh 72 (1997) 31-52.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24169692
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für katholische Theologie
Publisher: Echter Verlag GmbH
Issue: i24160523
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Hoffmann Veronika
Abstract: Gabel,
Inspiration und Wahrheit, 131.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24170846
Journal Title: Daat: A Journal of Jewish Philosophy & Kabbalah / דעת: כתב-עת לפילוסופיה יהודית וקבלה
Publisher: אוניברסיטת בר-אילן
Issue: i24183660
Date: 7 1, 1984
Author(s): Avi Sagie (Shweitzer)
Abstract: The purpose of this article is to examine the development of the notion of "The Other" and to trace the implications of its effect on the dialoguic Philosophy. In "I and Thou" this category was not developed, at best it was suggested only vaguely, for in this text Buber does not carry out any ontological explication of this category. But such an explication was necessary and was later formulated gradualy by Buber. The clearer the ontological explication, the sharper the category of "the Other" is delineated. It is this category which establishes the I-Thou relationship. This development is expressed in Buber's writings with great tension, and we analyze it in detail, for the category of "the Other" and the central position which it occupies undermine the significance of the I-Thou relationship as it is presented in the book "I and Thou". Together with an acceptance of the primacy of "the Other" in this relationship, we must also assert the primacy of the "I" as the subject of reflective action, of the recognition of the other in his otherness. In this situation it is not the relationship which comes first but the detachment and the aloneness which exist between the I and Thou. We now have to rewise the notion of the dialogue from that purety of an event without content to that of an action of mutual assertion between I and the Other, where each one asserts the other in his otherness, where at the same time each is conscious of being asserted by the Other.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24184936
Journal Title: Nouvelles Études Francophones
Publisher: University of Nebraska Press
Issue: i24243336
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): Tchumkam Hervé
Abstract: Sprouse 80
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24245221
Journal Title: Revista de Musicología
Publisher: SOCIEDAD ESPAÑOLA DE MUSICOLOGÍA
Issue: i24243488
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): CALVO-SOTELO Javier CAMPOS
Abstract: TITON, Jeff Todd. «Music and Sustainability:
An Ecological Viewpoint». The World of Music, 51, 1 (2009), pp. 119-137
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24246266
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24249044
Date: 11 1, 2003
Author(s): Zékian Stéphane
Abstract: Sur ce point précis, l'enjeu de cet ouvrage
croise celui que soulève Krzysztof Pomian dans
Des saintes reliques à Vart moderne, Paris, Gal-
limard, 2003.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24249069
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24249817
Date: 9 1, 2004
Author(s): d'Allonnes Myriam Revault
Abstract: Voir notamment l'ouvrage de Bernard Perret, De la société comme monde commun, Paris,
Desclée de Brouwer, 2003, pour qui le souci de l'institution d'un monde commun est lié à la
créativité humaine plus qu'à un processus d'objectivation. Il s'appuie explicitement (bien que
Merleau-Ponty ne soit pas directement évoqué) sur le point de vue de la phénoménologie et sur
les outils qu'elle nous fournit pour penser la perpétuation du monde commun comme culture
vivante, ensemble de valeurs partagées dans la durée autant que dans l'espace.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24249825
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24255017
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): de Rochegonde Thierry
Abstract: Voir T. de Rochegonde, « Les yeux grands ouverts. Plaidoyer pour que les psychana-
lystes s'intéressent aux questions nées de la crise de l'éthique médicale », revue de psychana-
lyse Che Vuoi?, n° 17, juin 2002, Paris, L'Harmattan, p. 89-104.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24255449
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24256635
Date: 5 1, 2005
Author(s): Court Raymond
Abstract: Kant, Projet de paix perpétuelle. Œuvres complètes, III, op. cit., p. 376.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24256765
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24256635
Date: 5 1, 2005
Author(s): Helcinel Gaston
Abstract: La Bruyère, les Caractères, chap. 2 : « Du mérite personnel », pensée 44.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24256769
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24257107
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): Schlegel Jean-Louis
Abstract: Un autre exemple de trivialité : au début de son texte, Badiou évoque un conflit, une
« guerre abstraite » actuellement en cours entre vision juive et vision chrétienne de l'histoire;
et donc, selon lui, la Mémoire... s'inscrit dans cette rivalité pour conquérir la « direction spiri-
tuelle du camp "démocratique" ». Et attention, Ricœur vise à « rien moins qu'une victoire »!
Le déclin de l'influence chrétienne et le brio de la pensée juive au sens large (sans garantie de
durée!) dans la culture française et européenne sont patents, mais ce constat accrédite-t-il une
vision paranoïaque de la vie intellectuelle? D'autres exemples dans le Siècle, op. cit., par
exemple une parole d'un poème de Celan inspiré de la mémoire d'Auschwitz, rapportée par
Badiou aux slogans des manifestants de décembre 1995 pour leur retraite, à Roanne-Trifouillis-
les-Oies : « Tous ensemble, tous ensemble, ouais! » (p. 139).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24257158
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24257107
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): Garapon Antoine
Abstract: Dans les sociétés politiques, affirme Marcel Hénaff, « la reconnaissance publique de cha-
cun est assurée par la loi; devant elle, tous les membres de la communauté citoyenne sont
égaux. [...] Pourtant, il est quelque chose que ce dispositif ne produit ni n'assure ou protège,
c'est le lien d'attachement de chacun à chacun ou même de chacun à tous. Ni l'appartenance
civique, ni l'interdépendance économique ne me sollicitent à reconnaître autrui personnelle-
ment. Cette limite est constitutive des sociétés politiques et du système du marché; c'est à ce
manque que peut répondre une offre d'amour collective d'un dieu qui enveloppe un peuple ou
une communauté dans sa faveur exclusive; ou d'un chef charismatique qui suscite l'oblation de
soi dans le rapport fusionnel aux autres fervents de sa cause », dans M. Hénaff, le Prix de la
vérité..., op. cit., p. 514.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24257164
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24257176
Date: 2 1, 2006
Author(s): Mongin Olivier
Abstract: P. Nora, Lieux de mémoire, op. cit., Ill, p. 1009.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24257240
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24259161
Date: 10 1, 2006
Author(s): Youf Dominique
Abstract: Les établissements pénitentiaires pour mineurs (Epm) sont prévus par la loi du 9 sep-
tembre 2002. Le premier établissement doit accueillir ses premiers condamnés à Quivrechain
(Nord) au printemps 2007. Il n'y aura pas de mirador, pas de chemin de ronde, mais un mur
d'enceinte de 6 mètres de haut. Le temps d'encellulement ne pourra excéder 10 heures par jour,
le reste du temps étant constitué d'activités scolaires, sportives, de formation technique et de
loisirs. L'encadrement sera mixte : surveillants de l'Administration pénitentiaire et éducateurs
de la Protection judiciaire de la jeunesse.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24259208
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24259930
Date: 2 1, 2007
Author(s): Weil Patrick
Abstract: Tzvetan Todorov, les Abus de la mémoire, Paris, Arléa, 1995, cité par Paul Ricœur, la
Mémoire, l'Histoire, l'Oubli, Paris, Le Seuil, 2000, p. 105.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24259968
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24262705
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Ost François
Abstract: Le théâtre d'Eschyle est contemporain à Athènes d'une rénovation juridique : fin de la vengeance, reconnaissance de la délibération, institution du juge impartial. En retraçant la naissance de cette figure du « tiers », on comprend pourquoi l'impossibilité de son maintien apparaît significative dans le sentiment de tragique moderne chez Kafka.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24262800
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24262705
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Garapon Antoine
Abstract: Hervé Asencio, « La notion de juridiction internationale en question », la Juridictionna-
lisation du droit international, Paris, Pedone, 2003, p. 193.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24262805
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24265362
Date: 5 1, 2008
Author(s): Cadolle Sylvie
Abstract: Cette réflexion sur l'homoparentalité comme révélateur des changements de la parenté en
général, et ouvrant vers la question de la pluriparentalité dans le droit contemporain de la
famille, est entamée depuis de longues années. On peut se reporter en particulier à la conclu-
sion de mon article « Pacs, sexualité et différence des sexes », Esprit, octobre 1999, qui mettait
en cause la logique « identitariste » (opposant deux grandes classes substantielles d'individus,
les homosexuels versus les hétérosexuels) au profit d'une approche « relationnelle » de l'égalité
(impliquant de transformer le droit commun de la famille dans un sens pluraliste en instituant
le couple de même sexe et non pas seulement le couple de sexe opposé).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24265393
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24266858
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): Zawadzki Paul
Abstract: P. Zawadzki, « Scientisme et dévoiements de la pensée critique », dans Eugène Enriquez,
Claudine Haroche, Jan Spurk (sous la dir. de), Désir de penser; peur de penser, Lyon, Parangon,
2006, p. 84-198.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24266868
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24266899
Date: 7 1, 2008
Author(s): Fœssel Michaël
Abstract: Id., «Justice sociale, redistribution, reconnaissance», art. cité, p. 157.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24266909
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24267380
Date: 11 1, 2008
Author(s): Garapon Antoine
Abstract: On peut notamment s'interroger sur la réalité du contrôle que procurent les indicateurs;
voir à ce sujet: «Des indicateurs pour les ministres au risque de l'illusion du contrôle», par
Anne Pezet et Samuel Sponem recensé par Maya Beauvallet (www.laviedesidees.fr).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24267392
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24267532
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Boblet Marie-Hélène
Abstract: P. Ricœur, Temps et récit, III, Paris, Le Seuil, p. 235.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24267612
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24269179
Date: 7 1, 2009
Author(s): Abel Olivier
Abstract: On pourrait dire que la logique de Vagapè a plus à voir avec cela qu'avec la logique du
don, et qu'elle résiste au don quand celui-ci, comme dans les réseaux mafieux, oblige au contre-
don.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24269191
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24269178
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Masson Nicolas
Abstract: Taswir musalsal abû tabar ba'd ramdân (« Tournage de la série Abou Tabar après Rama-
dan »), Al-ma'had al-arabî, 20 septembre 2008, disponible en arabe à l'adresse http://www.ma3
hd.net/vb/ma3hd3/arab37494/ consultée pour la dernière fois en octobre 2009.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24269229
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24269178
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Guibal Francis
Abstract: Id., le Récit, la lettre et le corps, op. cit., p. 254.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24269231
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24269493
Date: 2 1, 2010
Author(s): Rajotte Pierre
Abstract: J.-M. Labrèche, les Pas... sages d'un pèlerin..., op. cit., p. 83.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24269507
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24269705
Date: 5 1, 2010
Author(s): Chrétien Jean-Pierre
Abstract: G. Duby, les Trois ordres ou l'imaginaire du féodalisme, Paris, Gallimard, 1978; C. Casto-
riadis, l'Institution imaginaire de la société, Paris, Le Seuil, 1975.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24269716
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24269757
Date: 6 1, 2010
Author(s): Fœssel Michaël
Abstract: Curieusement, H. Rosa ne dit rien des diverses formes d'effervescences religieuses qui
manifestent un désir de re-ritualisation temporelle des existences. Il est vrai que toutes ne sont
pas compatibles avec le projet de la modernité.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24269762
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24269800
Date: 7 1, 2010
Author(s): Padis Marc-Olivier
Abstract: Je reprends cette expression de Jean Gadrey, « Portées et limites du care », sur son blog
d'Alternatives économiques (18 mai 2010).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24269814
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24271669
Date: 7 1, 2011
Author(s): Bessone Magali
Abstract: Voir, pour une présentation de la démocratie délibérative, Charles Girard et Alice Le Goff,
la Démocratie délibérative, une anthologie, Paris, Hermann, 2010 : la délibération repose sur une
éthique normative particulièrement exigeante et les critères d'une parole juste, impartiale, libre,
égale, rationnelle, argumentée, sont rarement rencontrés sur les forums de discussion, même en
l'absence de tout troll.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24271686
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24270967
Date: 11 1, 1988
Author(s): Habib Claude
Abstract: Confessions, livre VIII. 5.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24271718
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24270824
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Antelme Robert
Abstract: Art Press, n° 117, septembre 1987
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24271954
Journal Title: Esprit
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24272759
Date: 4 1, 2012
Author(s): Guenancia Pierre
Abstract: C'est Descartes lui-même qui recommande ce procédé : « Mais, puisque Votre Altesse
remarque qu'il est plus facile d'attribuer de la matière et de l'extension à l'âme, que de lui attri-
buer la capacité de mouvoir un corps et d'en être mue, sans avoir de matière, je la supplie de
vouloir librement attribuer cette matière et cette extension à l'âme; car cela n'est autre chose
que la concevoir unie au corps » (Lettre à Elisabeth du 28 juin 1643, dans Œuvres philoso-
phiques, op. cit., t. Ill, p. 47).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24272777
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24273239
Date: 9 1, 1993
Author(s): Lauret Bernard
Abstract: Paula Fredriksen, De Jésus aux Christs, Paris, Cerf, 1992.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24275201
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24272713
Date: 7 1, 1993
Author(s): Bouretz Pierre
Abstract: Minima Moralia. Réflexions sur la vie mutilée, trad. E. Kaufholz et J.-R. Ladmiral, Paris,
Payot, 1980, p. 207.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24275702
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24273554
Date: 10 1, 1995
Author(s): Salas Denis
Abstract: Isabelle Passet, « L'alternative à l'incarcération du toxicomane », Rev. sc. crim. octobre-
décembre 1992, Dalloz, p. 790.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24275929
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24272890
Date: 9 1, 1994
Author(s): Bruckner Pascal
Abstract: L'opposant serbe Vuk Draskovic a très bien rendu compte de cette perte morale de son
peuple : « C'est ainsi que dans cette guerre atroce - qui dure encore et dont la fin est difficile
à entrevoir - la grande, la divine frontière qui nous séparait de nos bourreaux, qui faisait la
différence entre le livre de la honte et le livre de l'agneau a été à tous points de vue effacée.
Il s'agit là de la plus grande défaite serbe, la seule véritable chute de notre peuple depuis qu'il
existe », discours préparé pour le deuxième congrès des intellectuels serbes, 23-24 avril 1994,
reproduit par Libération, 25 mai 1994.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24276452
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24275616
Date: 2 1, 1998
Author(s): Laïdi Zaki
Abstract: J'emprunte cette idée d'irrépressibilité du futur à Emst Cassirer, Essai sur l'Homme,
Paris, Minuit, 1975, p. 81.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24276581
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24275609
Date: 9 1, 1996
Author(s): Abel Olivier
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, Histoire et vérité, Paris, Seuil, 1964, p. 299.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24276632
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24275641
Date: 4 1, 1997
Author(s): de Lara Philippe
Abstract: Soi-même comme un autre, Le Seuil, 1990, chap. 7 et 9.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24276816
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24274280
Date: 12 1, 1996
Author(s): Salas Denis
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, « Le pardon, peut-il guérir? », in Esprit, mars 1995.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24277270
Journal Title: Esprit
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24277618
Date: 2 1, 2014
Author(s): Fischer Francisco Díez
Abstract: Voir P. Ricœur, « Étranger soi-même », Les Réseaux des parvis, 1999, n° 46, point 3.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24277631
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24275643
Date: 7 1, 1997
Author(s): Toscano Roberto
Abstract: Pierre Hassner également (op. cit., p. 362)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24277764
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24275619
Date: 12 1, 1998
Author(s): Lagrange Hugues
Abstract: D. Monjardet, Sociologie de la force publique, La Découverte, 1996.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24278565
Journal Title: Esprit
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24278642
Date: 6 1, 2014
Author(s): Fœssel Michaël
Abstract: Je reprends ici de manière un peu différente une analyse de cette scène présentée dans
M. Fœssel, Après la fin du monde, op. cit., p. 195-198.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24278654
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24271971
Date: 8 1, 1988
Author(s): Dewitte Jacques
Abstract: Le langage parle du monde, même lorsqu'il semble ne jouer que dans l'autoréférence. Faut-il pour autant sous-estimer les capacités propres de la métaphore de déplacer le jeu de la référence contextuelle?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24278848
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24278302
Date: 11 1, 2002
Author(s): Ricœur Paul
Abstract: Raymond Verdier, la Vengeance, 4 vol., Paris, Éd. Cujas, en particulier tome IV, « La ven-
geance de la pensée occidentale. Introduction Gérard Courtois ».
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24278909
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24279281
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Abel Olivier
Abstract: l'Éthique interrogative, Paris, PUF, 2000.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24279725
Journal Title: Bulletin de la Société de l'Histoire du Protestantisme Français (1903-)
Publisher: Au siège de la Société
Issue: i24292824
Date: 9 1, 1982
Author(s): Vatinel Denis
Abstract: Robert Greif en 1622 (supra, η. 439).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24295584
Journal Title: Bulletin de la Société de l'Histoire du Protestantisme Français (1903-)
Publisher: Au siège de la Société
Issue: i24308965
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Mellet Paul-Alexis
Abstract: J.G.A. POCOCK, L'Ancienne constitution et le droit féodal. Etude sur la pensée historique
dans l'Angleterre du XVLT siècle (1957), Paris: P.U.F., 2000, p. 34.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24309044
Journal Title: Bulletin de la Société de l'Histoire du Protestantisme Français (1903-)
Publisher: Au siège de la Société
Issue: i24308969
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Dosse François
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, Soi-même comme un autre, op. cit., p. 351.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24309093
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i24311064
Date: 3 1, 2007
Author(s): Escoubas Éliane
Abstract: Heidegger dans La Vérité en peinture
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24311714
Journal Title: Rivista Italiana di Musicologia
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki Editore
Issue: i24324678
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Piras Marcello
Abstract: Per ragioni da ricercare nella stessa società accademica, e non nelle società africane.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24324688
Journal Title: McGill International Journal of Sustainable Development Law and Policy / Revue internationale de droit et politique du développement durable de McGill
Publisher: McGill
Issue: i24352116
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Gaillard Emilie
Abstract: Brown-Weiss, Justice, supra note 21
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24352650
Journal Title: Archiv für Begriffsgeschichte
Publisher: H. BOUVIER u. CO. VERLAG
Issue: i24354771
Date: 1 1, 1961
Author(s): Schmandt Jürgen
Abstract: Ebenda S. 58 f.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24354774
Journal Title: Revue de Philosophie Ancienne
Publisher: Éditions OUSIA
Issue: i24353823
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Guéguen Haud
Abstract: Soi-même comme un autre, op. cit., p. 169.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24358725
Journal Title: Archiv für Begriffsgeschichte
Publisher: BOUVIER VERLAG HERBERT GRUNDMANN
Issue: i24358961
Date: 1 1, 1974
Author(s): Jaeger Henry-Evrard Hasso
Abstract: Daß die Verstiegenheiten und Mißbräuche, welche die Scholiasten der Spätantike seit
der Kaiserzeit mit der Etymologie getrieben haben, aller ernsten Grundlagen entbehrten
und reine Fabrikation ebenso mittelmäßiger wie phantasievoller Wichtigtuer darstellten,
die sich „Philologen" und „Grammatiker" nannten und noch bis in die byzantinische Epoche
hinein fortwirkten, ist allgemein bekannt (s. zum Beispiel die vielfachen Entlarvungen dieses
durch die Jahrhunderte mitgeschleppten Ballastes von Pseudogelehrsamkeit bei W. G. Ruther-
ford, A Chapter in the History of Annotation, Being Scholia Aristophanica, Bd. III, London
1905, S. 392 etc). Daß die ebenso irrationalen und vielleicht noch geschmackloseren ety-
mologischen Spekulationen, die man im 20. Jahrhundert auf die Wortgruppe έρμηνεία, έρμη-
νεύειν, ερμηνευτικός anwendete und immer noch anwendet, im gängigen akademischen Lehr-
betrieb heute ernst genommen werden und sich professoraler Autorität erfreuen, ist nicht
nur ein bildungsgeschichtliches curiosum, sondern ein Zeugnis irrationaler Aushöhlung der
„geisteswissenschaftlichen" Fakultäten. Als Beispiel seien nur erwähnt Karl Kerényi, Her-
meneia und Hermeneutike, Ursprung und Sinn der Hermeneutik in ders., Griechische Grundbegriffe,
Fragen und Antworten aus der heutigen Situation, Zürich 1964, 42-52, und F. K. Mayr, Der
Gott Hermes und die Hermeneutik in Tijdschrift voor Filosofie, 30, 1968, 525-635. Wie der Autor
des zuletzt genannten Artikels selbst, auf Heideggers Formulierung zurückgreifend, sagt,
ist das „Spiel des Denkens verbindlicher als die Strenge der Wissenschaft"... Wohin eine
im Banne Heideggers stehende „Begriffsgeschichte" führt, kann man bei der Lektüre dieses
Schwalls besser „verstehen"... Wie wenig Tragweite die immer wieder angeführte (Techné)
hermeneutike in der Epinomis 975 c hat, sagt der Text selbst: bei der Kunst Orakel zu inter-
pretieren, die weder Seelengröße noch Weisheit hervorbringt, weiß der „Interpret" nur,
was er sagt, ob es jedoch wahr ist, hat er nicht gelernt (τό λεγόμενον γάρ οίδεν μόνον, εΐ
δ' αληθές, ούχ έμαθεν). Übrigens kommt das Wort έρμηνευτική in den pseudo-platonischen
Definitiones in seiner sonst gebräuchlichen Bedeutung vor, 414 d 4: "Ονομα διάλεκτος άσιλιθετος
έρμηνεντική τοϋ τε κατά τής ουσίας κατηγορουμένου και παντός του μή καθ' έαντοϋ λεγομένου.
(Nomen, zuzusammengesetzte Ausdrucksweise für etwas seinem Wesen entsprechend
Bezeichnetes, sowie auch für alles von diesem Ausgesagtes). — Pierre Chantraine, Dictionnaire
Etymologique de la Langue Grecque, Histoire des Mots, Paris, 1970, S. 373, sagt ausdrücklich,
„Terme technique sans étymologid'. Vgl. auch F. Solmsen, Ein dorisches Komödienstück in Rheinisches
Museum für Philologie NF 63, 1908, 329-340. (dort s. 336 f über den ionischen Ursprung
der Worte έρμηνεΰσα, έρμηνεύς).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24358965
Journal Title: Cahiers du Centre Gustave Glotz
Publisher: DE BOCCARD
Issue: i24358314
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Benoist Stéphane
Abstract: T. Benton, « Epigraphy and Fascism », dans
The Afterlife of Inscriptions, cit. supra, p. 183-186
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24359120
Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24358609
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Günzel Stephan
Abstract: Stephan Günzel: Hermeneutik im Widerstreit. Habermas zwi-
schen den Traditionen. In: Ders.: Anteile. Analytik, Hermeneutik, Politik. Weimar 2002. 95-
98. 93-97.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360647
Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24358794
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Welsen Peter
Abstract: Paul Ricceur: Le cercle de la démonstration. In: Ders.: Lectures I. Autour du politique.
Paris 1991.217.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360727
Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24360301
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Odenstedt Anders
Abstract: Gadamer: Relevance of the Beautiful. 100.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360766
Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24358654
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Amthor David
Abstract: Dodd: „The dignity of the mind". 40 f.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360913
Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24358589
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Bonnemann Jens
Abstract: Buber: Urdistanz und Beziehung. 36 f.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360948
Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24358589
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Summa Michela
Abstract: Husserl: Zur Phänomenologie des inneren Zeitbewusstseins. 380.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360954
Journal Title: Aufklärung
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24361794
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Hien Markus
Abstract: Buttlar, Das.Nationale' als Thema der Gartenkunst (wie Anm. 122), 196-198.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24361825
Journal Title: Archiv für Begriffsgeschichte
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24361677
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Kowalewicz Michel Henri
Abstract: Vgl. R. Ingarden: Ο tlumaczeniach, a.a.O. [Anm. 58] 186: » Pozwolç sobie to rozwinqc na
przykladzie Krytyki czystego rozumu Kanta, dokonanego przez P. Chmielowskiego. Wiadomo,
ze terminologia przez Chmielowskiego przyjçta rozpowszechnila siç dose znacznie w publika-
cjach polskich na temat Kanta, a nawet bywa przez niektorych filozofôw polskich stosowana w
pracach specjalnie ζ filozolia Kanta nie zwi^zanych. Przyzwyczajono siç Erscheinung nazywac
>zjawiskiem< (i nawet w szerokich kolach naukowych polskich, np. wsrôd fizykow), Anschau-
ung - >ogli}dem<, Vernunft - >rozumem<, Verstand - >rozs^dkiem< itd. Czy mamy siç liczyc ζ tym
faktem i w dalszym ci;(gu stosowac te terminy w tlumaczeniu i w pracach naszych filozoficznych?
Nie da siç zaprzeczyc, ze przynajmniej niektôre ζ tych terminow nie oddajg tresci faktycznych
pojçc Kantowskich. Mimo catego przyzwyczajenia do nich przy glçbszym wnikniçciu w wywody
Kanta trudno nam siç zgodzic, jakoby Verstand Kantowski byt »rozsqdkiem«. Stowo to oznacza
pewng wlasciwosc umyslu ludzkiego w praktycznym zachowaniu siç cztowieka, tymczasem u
Kanta Verstand jest gtôwn^ poznawcz^ wtadzq (czy zdolnosciç), gdzie sprawy zycia praktyczne-
go nie odgrywajg zadnej roli. Wiadomo tez, ze Kant tç stronç zycia umysiowego, czy zdolnosci
umyslu, ktöra wigze siç ζ zagadnieniami praktyki (w szczegolnosci etycznej), nazwal wlasnie nie
Verstand, lecz praktische Vernunft
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24361939
Journal Title: Archiv für Begriffsgeschichte
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24361677
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Römer Inga
Abstract: Paul Ricœur: Existence et herméneutique. In: ders.: Le conflit des interprétations. Essais
d'herméneutique (Paris 1969) 7-28, hier 14.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24361940
Journal Title: Archiv für Begriffsgeschichte
Publisher: BOUVIER VERLAG
Issue: i24360276
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Leiteritz Christiane
Abstract: Viktor Jerofejew: Jenseits des Humanismus. Oder: Das Ende der Menschenfreundlich-
keit. In: Die Zeit. Nr. 15, 3. 4. 1992.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24362961
Journal Title: Iberoamericana (2001-)
Publisher: Iberoamericana Editorial Vervuert
Issue: i24368678
Date: 9 1, 2014
Author(s): Behnke Marisol Palma
Abstract: Cita extractada de la exposición Fotos del terremoto y maremoto del 60, Museo Azul, Ancud Chiloé,
diciembre de 2008.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24369235
Journal Title: Iberoamericana (2001-)
Publisher: Iberoamericana Editorial Vervuert
Issue: i24368990
Date: 9 1, 2013
Author(s): Ruderer Stephan
Abstract: Silvia Muñoz en Bustamante/Ruderer (2009: 141).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24369384
Journal Title: KulturPoetik
Publisher: Verlag Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i24368988
Date: 1 1, 2015
Author(s): Weiland Marc
Abstract: Schapp (Anm. 34), S. 127.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24369776
Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: THE POLISH SOCIOLOGICAL ASSOCIATION
Issue: i24371582
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): BŁESZNOWSKI BARTŁOMIEJ
Abstract: The Care of the Self (1984)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24371587
Journal Title: Revue des études slaves
Publisher: l'Institut d'études slaves
Issue: i24372731
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Bocianowska Cécile
Abstract: I. Stokfiszewski, Zwrotpolityczny, Warszawa, Wyd. Krytyki Politycznej, 2009. Sur le virage politique
et ses influences sur la critique, voir aussi : D. Kozicka, Krytyczne (nie)porzqdki..., op. cit. Note du rédacteur :
cette activité fait partie du groupe de jeunes intellectuels « Krytyka polityczna ». Cf. introduction dans ce
volume.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24372736
Journal Title: Sociologisk Forskning
Publisher: Sveriges Sociologförbund
Issue: i24393153
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Basic Goran
Abstract: Greve & Bergsmo 1994
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24393158
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Armand Colin et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i24395823
Date: 12 1, 2014
Author(s): JAMES ALISON
Abstract: Georges Perec, Tentative d'épuisement d'un lieu parisien, Paris, Christian Bourgois,
1982.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24396931
Journal Title: Religion & Literature
Publisher: University of Notre Dame English Department
Issue: i24395981
Date: 10 1, 2013
Author(s): Knight Christopher J.
Abstract: In this essay, I argue that Penelope Fitzgerald's The Gate of Angels attempts to work out the difficulties that any intelligent, religiously inclined person must come to terms with in the twentieth, now twentieth-first, century. Fitzgerald sought not to shelter her religious belief behind a cloister wall, thinking like her uncle the Reverend Wilfred Knox, "that no cloister walls can be high enough to exclude the cares of the world." Among these cares is the desire to give a faithful report of the world to each other, to know this world as it exists in truth, and not to misrepresent it. Early twentieth-century investigations into the makeup of the physical world as well as the theoretical and intellectual advances possible with quantum physics were very much part of this desire; and in The Gate of Angels, set in and around Cambridge University's pre-war physics laboratories, Fitzgerald offers a beautiful rendering of the excitement engendered by these investigations. At the same time, Fitzgerald offers a picture, true to her own experience, wherein things that in the popular mind are often conceived of as opposite and irreconcilable—for instance, chance and necessity—are found to stand in a relation of sympathy, casting over The Gate of Angels "that sympathetic glow which," Henry James wrote, "forms half the substance of our genial impressions."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24397714
Journal Title: Revue Canadienne d'Études cinématographiques / Canadian Journal of Film Studies
Publisher: Film Studies Association of Canada / Association canadienne d'études cinématographiques
Issue: i24402488
Date: 10 1, 2000
Author(s): ROY LUCIE
Abstract: By establishing a parallel between the cycle of Lumière films and the Age of the Enlightenment ("siècle des lumières"), the author identifies the pensive character of the films' images as well as the aesthetic of the visible world they display. She then examines the transformation of a time-image into a memory-image in the Lumière films, arguing that the films are not only offer time-images, that is, residual images of the past, but have become images-as-memory in the contemporary spectator's mind.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24402662
Journal Title: Renaissance Studies
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i24411931
Date: 12 1, 1994
Author(s): Chojnacki Stanley
Abstract: Cf. Scott, "'Experience'", 34: '[Subjects] are not unified, autonomous individuals exercising
free will, but rather subjects whose agency is created through situations and statuses conferred on
them.'
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24411934
Journal Title: Metaphilosophy
Publisher: BASIL BLACKWELL
Issue: i24437069
Date: 10 1, 1989
Author(s): BERTHOLD-BOND DANIEL
Abstract: Hegel, Phenomenology of Spirit, tr. A. V. Miller (Oxford: Oxford University Press,
1977) p. 146.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24437077
Journal Title: Metaphilosophy
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i24438983
Date: 10 1, 1997
Author(s): DELACAMPAGNE CHRISTIAN
Abstract: Attached for a long time to the illusion of its national "singularity", French philosophy has remained, for a good part of this century, closed to any foreign influence (with the exception of German phenomenology and existentialism). This situation started to change, however, in the early 1980's. From that moment on, the tendency to translate foreign philosophy has strongly increased among French publishers, allowing France to take a more active part in the international philosophical conversation. The French-American dialogue, in particular, is currently experiencing an expanding phase – but this recent trend must continue to be encouraged from both sides of the Atlantic.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24438994
Journal Title: CrossCurrents
Publisher: Convergence, Inc.
Issue: i24456710
Date: 10 1, 1986
Author(s): PLÉ ALBERT
Abstract: Karl Marx, The Holy Family, cited in Michel Verret, Les Marxistes et la Religion. Essai sur
l'Athéisme Moderne (Paris: Editions sociales, 1965), p. 142.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24458785
Journal Title: Ethnography
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i24465904
Date: 6 1, 2014
Author(s): Kilroy-Marac Katie
Abstract: This article considers two revenants – a man and a ghost – who haunt the Fann Psychiatric Clinic in Dakar, Senegal. Following Derrida's assertion that haunting is historical, I take seriously the concept of haunting and insist upon its relevance to anthropological inquiry. As a mode of storytelling that comes from a particular way of apprehending the world, I argue that anthropology might give credence to specters as social figures and assign ethnography the task of chasing after ghosts, not simply for the poetic spaces they may open up but out of a concern for justice and responsibility in the past, present, and future. My own ethnographic encounter with the two revenants described here has generated questions about the often taken-for-granted equivalence of the real and the true. Likewise, it has encouraged me to interrogate the unpredictable (and oftentimes uneasy) cohabitation of memory and history, both within the Fann Clinic and beyond.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24467147
Journal Title: Anthropologica
Publisher: Wilfrid Laurier University Press
Issue: i24465850
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Bouchard Michel
Abstract: Les monuments voués à la guerre abondent en Russie, comme dans de nombreux autres pays. Ils font partie du paysage, tout en le caractérisant. Ces monuments font appel au passé et aux souvenirs. Ce faisant, ils définissent l'appartenance. Et tout en remémorant le passé, ils cherchent également à déterminer l'avenir. Le fait de se souvenir d'une guerre est un acte politique en soi. On se souvient, et en se souvenant on se définit au sein de sa communauté, de son pays et du monde. À tout le moins, c'est le cas dans l'Europe de l'Est et la Russie. Le territoire a été envahi maintes fois au cours des derniers siècles et cela a entrainé le développement d'une mémoire sélective, une « curation » de la nation. Nous étudions ici les souvenirs de la Russie afin de démontrer comment les monuments et les musées de guerre définissent non seulement le passé, mais également le présent et les rêves que l'on forge pour l'avenir. War monuments are abundant in Russia; they are part of the landscape, while defining the terrain. Calling to the past and bringing forth memories, they define belonging, commemorating the past while shaping the future. Remembering a war is a political act and, in remembering, we define our place in our community, country and the world. Such is the case in Eastern Europe and Russia whose territories have been invaded many times over the centuries, which has led to development of a selective memory, the "curation" of the nation. This article explores memories of Russia to demonstrate how monuments and museums of war define the past, present and dreams for the future.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24467379
Journal Title: Esprit
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24469715
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Zaccaï-Reyners Nathalie
Abstract: Theodore Zeldin, « Hospitalité et politesse », dans M. Canto-Sperber (sous la dir. de),
Dictionnaire d'éthique et de philosophie morale, Paris, PUF, 1997 (2e éd.), p. 671-673.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24470156
Journal Title: Cahiers d'Études Africaines
Publisher: École des hautes études en sciences sociales
Issue: i24476009
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): De Rosis Carolina
Abstract: Si comme Foucault lui-même le souligne, la question de la vérité occupe dans
toute sa recherche une place à différents égards cruciale (Foucault 1994 III : 30-
31, IV : 693), ce n'est qu'à partir des années 1980 qu'elle devient ensemble à
la problématique du sujet la préoccupation principale du philosophe. En effet,
déjà dans ses recherches sur la sexualité, Foucault s'est intéressé à une forme
particulière d'assujettissement à l'œuvre dans la pastorale chrétienne et qui sera
par la suite un modèle exemplaire pour les actions disciplinaires (Foucault 1994
III: 256-257, IV: 125-129, 148, 383-385, 783-788). Le sujet est contraint
d'avouer la vérité sur sa vie la plus intime, et notamment celle sexuelle, « pour
mieux renoncer à lui-même et se soumettre à son directeur de conscience » (Granjon
2005 : 42). Il s'agit d'un processus de formation du sujet dans un rapport à soi
aliéné. Selon FOUCAULT (1994 III : 551), ce modèle de formation du sujet est à
l'œuvre également dans « toutes les grandes machines disciplinaires : casernes,
écoles, ateliers et prisons [...] qui permettent de cerner l'individu, de savoir ce
qu'il est, ce qu'il fait, ce qu'on peut en faire, où il faut le placer, comment le
placer parmi les autres ». En 1980 lors d'une leçon au Collège de France pour
le cours intitulé « Du gouvernement des vivants », Foucault (2012 : 80-81) refor-
mule la question de la formation du sujet dans les termes de « régimes de vérité ».
Les années 1980 représentent un tournant dans les orientations analytiques du
philosophe. Dans un article paru en 1981, FOUCAULT (1994 IV : 693) annonce son
projet de recherche à venir, toutefois interrompu par sa mort prématurée. Il
reviendra à plusieurs reprises sur ce changement de thème directeur en essayant
aussi de montrer qu'il était sous-jacent dans ses recherches antérieures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24476017
Journal Title: Archivio di Filosofia
Publisher: FABRIZIO SERRA EDITORE
Issue: i24485959
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Kemp Peter
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, La mémoire, l'histoire, l'oubli, Paris, Seuil, 2000, p. 642.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24488367
Journal Title: Archivio di Filosofia
Publisher: FABRIZIO SERRA EDITORE
Issue: i24485962
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Hart Kevin
Abstract: J.-L. Marion, Being Given, op. cit., p. 215.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24488407
Journal Title: Archivio di Filosofia
Publisher: FABRIZIO SERRA EDITORE
Issue: i24485962
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Maesschalck Marc
Abstract: M. Sanchez-Mazas et R. Gely, Des appartenances
aux identités, Vers une citoyenneté politique européenne, « Connexions », 84, 2006, pp. 73-86.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24488416
Journal Title: Archivio di Filosofia
Publisher: FABRIZIO SERRA EDITORE
Issue: i24485961
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Maesschalck Marc
Abstract: P. Sheehy, The Reality
of Social Groups, Ashgate, Aldershot, 2006, p. 194.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24488473
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Periodicals, Inc.
Issue: i24542986
Date: 10 1, 2013
Author(s): Grethlein Jonas
Abstract: This book examines Greek engagements with the past as articulations of memory formulated against the contingency of chance associated with temporality. Based on a phenomenological understanding of temporality, it identifies four memorializing strategies: continuity (tradition), regularity (exemplarity), development, and acceptance of chance. This framework serves in pursuing a twofold aim: to reconstruct the literary field of memory in fifth-century BCE Greece; and to interpret Greek historiography as a memorializing mode. The key contention advanced by this approach is that acts of memory entailed an "idea of history" that was articulated not only in historiography, but also in epinician poetry, elegy, tragedy, and oratory. The book offers a rich account of poetic conventions and contexts through which each of these genres counterbalanced contingency through the use of exemplary and traditional modes of memory. This fine analysis highlights the grip of the present on the past as a significant feature of both historiographical and nonhistoriographical genres. The essay argues that this work fills a disciplinary gap by extending the reflection on memory to a new period, Greek antiquity. The retrospective positioning of this period at the outset of Western historical thought brings Grethlein's investigation to the center of debates about memory, temporality, and the meaning history. In engaging with the book's argument, the essay suggests that historiographical memory emerged in Greece not as a first-order encounter with time, but as a second-order encounter with forgetting. This confrontation marked a certain separation of historiography from other memorializing genres. Whereas poetic and rhetorical memories were posited against contingency, historiography sought to retrieve those aspects of the past that may otherwise have been irretrievably lost and forgotten. In doing so, it formulated the historiographical imperative as a negation of forgetting that problematized the truth-value of memory and the very act of remembering the past.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24542996
Journal Title: Critique internationale
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24563540
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Capelle-Pogácean Antonela
Abstract: Un récent sondage réalisé par l'Organisation internationale pour les migrations révélait que 40 % des Roumains avaient
des projets d'émigration, plus de 20 % d'entre eux ayant déjà effectué des démarches concrètes en ce sens. Cité par Mircea
Boari, « Un loc din care vrei sa fugi » [Un lieu d'où l'on veut s'enfuir], Curentul, 18 mai 1999, http://curentul.logicnet.ro.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24563556
Journal Title: Critique internationale
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24564534
Date: 3 1, 2007
Author(s): Niewiedzial Agnieszka
Abstract: Une bibliographie est disponible sur le site du CERI (http://www.ceri-sciences-po.org/cerifr/publica/cri-
tique/criti.htm).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24564545
Journal Title: Critique internationale
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24565178
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Israël Liora
Abstract: Avant le procès David Rousset et celui dit de 1'« Internationale des traîtres », qui, dans les années suivantes, ont
opposé à nouveau des journalistes communistes (défendus notamment par Joë Nordmann) et des dénonciateurs de
la répression soviétique. Sur le procès Rousset, voir T. Wieder, « La commission internationale contre le régime
concentrationnaire, 1949-1959 : des rescapés des camps nazis combattent les camps de concentration », cité.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24565186
Journal Title: Critique internationale
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24565951
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): Gelézeau Valérie
Abstract: Philippe Pons, « La "mue" de la Corée du Nord », Le débat, 153, 2009, p. 100-114.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24565954
Journal Title: Critique internationale
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24567235
Date: 9 1, 2014
Author(s): Naudet Jules
Abstract: Pour les longues discussions que nous avons eues sur le thème de cette étude, je remercie Nicolas Patin, qui
a beaucoup travaillé sur la mise en valeur de l'expérience de guerre des députés du Reichstag (Nicolas Patin,
La catastrophe allemande (1914-1945), Paris, Fayard, 2014).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24567243
Journal Title: Cahiers du Monde russe
Publisher: École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i24567600
Date: 12 1, 2012
Author(s): CZERNY BORIS
Abstract: http://www.holocaust.kiev.ua/news/viplO_l.htm
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24567621
Journal Title: Historia Mexicana
Publisher: EL COLEGIO DE MÉXICO
Issue: i24573231
Date: 12 1, 2015
Author(s): Ayala Elisa Cárdenas
Abstract: Rivera, Entretenimientos, p. 18.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24575179
Journal Title: Histoire de l'éducation
Publisher: ÉCOLE NORMALE SUPÉRIEURE DE LYON: Institut français de l'Éducation
Issue: i24573366
Date: 12 1, 2013
Author(s): Forestier Yann
Abstract: Jean Le Veugle, «Une révolution culturelle, oui. mais laquelle?», Le Monde, 23 mal 1968.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24577182
Journal Title: Max Weber Studies
Publisher: Max Weber Studies
Issue: i24577610
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Djedi Youcef
Abstract: P. Haenni, L'islam de marché, pp. 10-12, 21 sq., 30, 35 sq., 41-44,49, 50, 57, 59
sq., 70-83, 86, 91-93, 95,97-99,102,103-108.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24579976
Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung
Publisher: GESIS – Leibniz Institute for the Social Sciences
Issue: i24582422
Date: 1 1, 2015
Author(s): Bessy Christian
Abstract: Descombes (2004)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24583127
Journal Title: Tumultes
Publisher: ÉDITIONS KIMÉ
Issue: i24598544
Date: 11 1, 2006
Author(s): Puig Nicolas
Abstract: Evoquant l'habitude, Ricœur constate qu'elle donne une histoire au
caractère : « une histoire dans laquelle la sédimentation tend à recouvrir et, à la
limite, à abolir l'innovation qui l'a précédée [...]. C'est cette sédimentation qui
confère au caractère la sorte de permanence dans le temps que j'interprète ici
comme recouvrement de Y ipse par l'idem ». In Soi-même comme un autre,
Paris, Seuil, 1990, p. 146.
L'ipseque Philippe Corcuff synthétise comme « la part subjective de l'identité
personnelle » (« Figures de l'individualité, de Marx aux sociologies
contemporaines », Espacestemps.net, web : http://www.espacestemps.net/
documentl390.html, 2005, non paginé) renvoie à la possibilité de n'être que
partiellement investi dans un rôle. On glisse ici du caractère à l'appartenance
pour amener cette idée d'un retrait ou d'une déprise de l'identité stabilisée
autour de symboles rigides en faveur de moments de mise en avant d'une
identité personnelle répondant à un besoin d'individualisation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24598552
Journal Title: Tumultes
Publisher: ÉDITIONS KIMÉ
Issue: i24599376
Date: 11 1, 2009
Author(s): Čapek Jakub
Abstract: Cette manière de voir les choses, qui renoue avec la notion du politique de
Hannah Arendt, est chère à certains signataires de la Charte 77. Voir par
exemple les réflexions de Martin Palous ici même, et surtout les textes de
Vâclav Benda sur une « polis parallèle ».
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24599441
Journal Title: Tumultes
Publisher: ÉDITIONS KIMÉ
Issue: i24599447
Date: 5 1, 2011
Author(s): Leibovici Martine
Abstract: A. Djebar, Nulle part dans la maison de mon père, op. cit., p. 268.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24599454
Journal Title: Tumultes
Publisher: ÉDITIONS KIMÉ
Issue: i24599447
Date: 5 1, 2011
Author(s): Smola Julia
Abstract: Cf. Herbert Paul Grice, « Logic and Conversation », in P. Cole and
J.L.Morgan (dir.), Syntax and Semantics, Academic Press, Inc., vol. Ill,
Speech Acts, 1975.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24599458
Journal Title: Journal of the History of Medicine and Allied Sciences
Publisher: Journal of the History of Medicine and Allied Sciences, Inc.
Issue: i24619291
Date: 10 1, 1993
Author(s): HARLEY DAVID N.
Abstract: W. Stukeley, The Healing of Diseases, a Character of the Messiah (London, 1750).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24623265
Journal Title: The Journal of Theological Studies
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i24623237
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Collicutt Joanna
Abstract: W. Brueggemann, The Book that Breathes New Life (Minneapolis: Fortress
Press, 2005), p. 5.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24637949
Journal Title: Il Saggiatore musicale
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: i24640649
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Carrozzo Mario
Abstract: http://www.gherush92.com/newsJt.asp?tipo=A.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24642255
Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill Academic Publishers, Inc.
Issue: i24657854
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): WOOD DAVID
Abstract: What is eco-phenomenology? This paper argues that eco-phenomenology, in which are folded both an ecological phenomenology and a phenomenological ecology, offers us a way of developing a middle ground between phenomenology and naturalism, between intentionality and causality. Our grasp of Nature is significantly altered by thinking through four strands of time's plexity — the invisibility of time, the celebration of finitude, the coordination of rhythms, and the interruption and breakdown of temporal horizons. It is also transformed by a meditation on the role of boundaries in constituting the varieties of thinghood. Eco-phenomenology takes up in a tentative and exploratory way the traditional phenomenological claim to be able to legislate for the sciences, or at least to think across the boundaries that seem to divide them. In this way, it opens up and develops an access to Nature and the natural, one which is independent both of the conceptuality of the natural sciences and of traditional metaphysics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24659209
Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24659485
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Mei Todd S.
Abstract: Ricoeur, "Work and the Word," in History and Truth, trans. C. A. Kelbley (Evanston: North-
western University Press, 1965), 218.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24659841
Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24659511
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Bourgeois Patrick L.
Abstract: SP, 67.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24660189
Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24659567
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): WARE OWEN
Abstract: One of the central questions of Jacques Derrida's later writings concerns the sources of religion. At times he gives explicit priority to the universal dimension of religion. In other places, however, he considers the primacy of faith in its concrete, historical context. This paper will clarify Derrida's relationship to universality and historicity by first comparing his notion of "messianicity without messianism" to that of Walter Benjamin's "weak Messianism." After drawing out these differences, I will focus on Derrida's later writings. I will show that much of the ambiguity of Derrida's thinking on religion can be resolved by turning to his work on khōra, the Greek word for "space" or "matter." The rhetoric of khōra can allow us to think through a twofold logic, one that includes the universal/historical distinction and exceeds its alternatives.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24660640
Journal Title: Indo-Iranian Journal
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i24663608
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): HILTEBEITEL ALF
Abstract: The superfluity arises from the fact that this "double of Krsna" never has to
take the reins, since Nala is driving; see Hiltebeitel, Rethinking, 232-33. As men-
tioned in n. 7 above, J. Brockington finds this "implausible." For valuable discus-
sion of the "avatära" theme in both epics, and especially in the Rämäyam, see
also Robert P. Goldman and Sally J. Sutherland, trans. The Rämäyam of Välmlki,
Vol. 5: Sundarakäyanda (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1996), 29-33, 69,
73.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24663613
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24671554
Date: 9 1, 2013
Author(s): Chaubet François
Abstract: Diana Pinto, « La conversion de l'intellectuel », in Denis
Lacorne, Jacques Rupnik et Marie-France Toinet, Un siècle de
fascinations et d'aversions, Paris, Hachette, 1986, p. 124-136.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24673715
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24672910
Date: 9 1, 2014
Author(s): Mazurel Hervé
Abstract: Ibid., p. 152.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24673881
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24672910
Date: 9 1, 2014
Author(s): Rebreyend Anne-Claire
Abstract: Lettre de Cécile à Etienne, été 1965.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24673888
Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i24699234
Date: 12 1, 2012
Author(s): Anheim Étienne
Abstract: Même si ce n'était pas l'objet de ce travail, et outre les féconds prolongements de l'anthro-
pologie historique déjà évoqués au début de cet article, il faut rappeler les fructueux échanges
empiriques que les historiens, en particulier pour le Moyen Âge, ont pu avoir depuis vingt ans avec
différents courants de l'anthropologie, qu'il s'agisse par exemple de l'anthropologie juridique dans
le cadre des débats sur la mutation de l'an mil (cf. les travaux de Dominique Barthélémy [1997,
1999]), de l'anthropologie visuelle de chercheurs comme Hans Belting (cf. Schmitt [2002];
ou Baschet [2008]), de l'anthropologie des pratiques d'écriture dans la lignée de Jack Goody
(pour une présentation synthétique de l'historiographie médiévale dans ce domaine, cf. Chastang
[2008]), de l'anthropologie économique (avec Feller, Gramain & Weber [2005]), ou encore des
réflexions de Maurice Godelier ou de Louis Dumont (mobilisés par Iogna-Prat [1998, 2006]).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24699250
Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i24699828
Date: 3 1, 2015
Author(s): Jewsiewicki Bogumil
Abstract: Ces réserves sont ponctuelles, en voici quelques exemples. Comme tout binôme, et il n'est pas
le seul dans le livre, le terme de contre-mémoire risque de produire l'impression d'opposition
mécanique ce qui n'est sûrement pas l'intention de l'auteure. Sur un autre registre, malgré tout
mon respect pour l'héritage intellectuel de Pierre Bourdieu, je ne suis pas convaincu par les efforts
de Christine Chivallon d'appliquer son appareil conceptuel à l'analyse du travail de la mémoire.
Puisque son érudition est très impressionnante, l'absence des travaux de Nathan Wachtel surprend
d'autant plus. L'Invention du quotidien de Michel de Certeau est citée, mais je n'ai trouvé aucune
mention de son concept opératoire de « propre », à mon avis très pertinent pour la démarche de
l'auteure. J'estime également que le concept de « lieu de mémoire » de Pierre Nora est trop rapidement
jugé inopérant pour sa recherche.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24699837
Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i24700246
Date: 12 1, 2015
Author(s): Martin Denis-Constant
Abstract: Le Voortrekker Monument a été érigé en souvenir des Boers qui entamèrent le grand trek
(« migration ») en 1835, quittant la colonie du Cap, après l'abolition de l'esclavage, pour se diriger
vers le Nord, où certains fonderont les républiques boers du Transvaal et de l'Etat libre d'Orange.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24700256
Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24707302
Date: 1 1, 1981
Author(s): Griffioen Sander
Abstract: J. P. van Praag, 'Levensovertuiging, filosofie en wetenschap' ('World-view,
philosophy and science'), valedictory address given on retirement from the Univer-
sity of Leiden, 13th November 1979, Utrecht, Humanistisch Verbond, pp. 9, 7, 10.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24707304
Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24707951
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Botha M. Elaine
Abstract: It would be more accurate to refer to 'ontic' or 'ontical' in this respect.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24707953
Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24707971
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Morton Herbert Donald
Abstract: Thus J. van der Hoeven in an article with the telling title, Ontwikkeling in het Iicht van
ontmoeting' [Development in the light of encounter], p. 159.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24707974
Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24708868
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Klapwijk Jacob
Abstract: Ernst Troeltsch distinguished between naive, apologetic and evolutionistic absoluteness.
From the original spontaneity of 'naive absoluteness' and its artificial (partly super-
naturalistic, partly rationalistic) defence as 'apologetic absoluteness' (in the Middle Ages and
in the Enlightenment, respectively) there came forth in Hegel the idea of 'evolutionistic
absoluteness' — an ingenious but untenable attempt to reconcile the solid apologetic
conception of absoluteness of that day with the dynamics of history by presenting it as the
outcome and terminus of historical progression. See Troeltsch, Die Absolutheit des Christen-
tums, 87ff. Cf. J. Klapwijk, Tussen historisme en relativisme, 222-29. At present the belief in
progress and thus also the mix of it with the idea of absoluteness is no longer a subject of
discussion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24708873
Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24708906
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Geertsema Hendrik
Abstract: Hendrik G. Geertsema, Van boven naar voren (Kampen: J.H. Kok, 1980), pp. 95-201
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24708911
Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24708906
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Olthuis James H.
Abstract: Martin Heidegger, Being and time, trans. John Macquarrie and Edward Robinson (New
York: Harper & Row, 1962), p. 174.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24708912
Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24708906
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Blosser Philip
Abstract: Steen, Structure, p. 272; cf. above, n. 30.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24708915
Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24709638
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Glas Gerrit
Abstract: Interestingly enough it appears that the structural features of reconciliation show a re-
versed version of the structural features of evil. Resolving the evil I do toward the other re-
quires that I am able to say what I have done wrong (the reverse of silence and the
tinspeakable), that I recognize my guilt (which is incompatible with splitting) and that I ask for
forgiveness (which is very shameful, but may résolve shame when penitence is accepted and
forgiveness is given); see Glas (in press); Muφhyand Hampton (1988); Volf (1996).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24709643
Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24709683
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Griffioen Sander
Abstract: Desmond is certainly not blind to the risks of such an endeavor: God and the Betioeen
mentions on the one hand a loss of faith in case of the forlorn mystic who in his 'ardor for the
divine other' is confronted with his own 'lack and nothing' (GB 266), and on the other a
possible usurpation of divine sovereignty (GB 268).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24709686
Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24709683
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Glas Gerrit
Abstract: Because they escape precise modal qualification, Troost suggests that insight into disposi-
tions can only be gained in an idea-ruled (idee-matig) understanding, in an idea-regulated 'on
the way' in the transcendental direction of time. For reformational philosophy this raises an
old and prima facie purely theoretical problem: Do the modalities 'continue' right into the
heart? One could paraphrase Troost's view for example such that for him the heart should
primarily be sought 'below' or 'behind' the act structure, and that the dispositions — relative
to this vertical axis — constitute a horizontal layer in which the lower substructures are
interwoven with the act structure. In that case the integration of the lower structures in the act
structure would take place via the dispositions rather than through a direct relationship with
the heart. This notion — for which hints can be found in Dooyeweerd — would in any case
lead to an appreciably more nuanced picture of the 'binding' and 'releasing' of substructures.
If I understand Troost correctly, he would allow this interpretation for the substructures,
though not for the modalities. His caution concerning the 'continuing' of the modalities 'into
the' heart is epistemological: the cosmological concentration of the modal functions in the
heart is a transcendental idea; at best we see dots (the idea-regulated 'on the way' in the
transcendental direction of time), but we should not turn them into lines.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24709687
Journal Title: Jewish History
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i24708650
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): GOLDBERG SYLVIE ANNE
Abstract: Goldberg, L'histoire et la mémoire de l'histoire.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24709812
Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Association for Reformational Philosophy
Issue: i24710027
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Griffioen Sander
Abstract: Broad definitions are often used in Christian apologetics. One example: 'Everyone has a
worldview. Whether or not we realize it, we all have certain presuppositions and biases that
affect the way we view all of life and reality. A worldview is like a set of lenses which taint our
vision or alter the way we perceive the world around us.' (http://christianworldview.net/,
consulted Jan. 23, 2012)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24710030
Journal Title: Extrême-Orient Extrême-Occident
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de Vincennes
Issue: i24715389
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Morier-Genoud Damien
Abstract: Benjamin (2000): 431.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24716509
Journal Title: Extrême-Orient Extrême-Occident
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de Vincennes
Issue: i24715391
Date: 1 1, 2015
Author(s): Vuilleumier Victor
Abstract: La destruction symbolique du corps (similaire à la promotion de la latinisation,
latinx.ua 拉丁イヒ）chez Lu Xun est différente des représentations dualisantes de la
Nouvelle littérature des années 1920, opposant à l'âme souffrante le corps déprécié,
qui expriment ainsi directement leurs frustrations. Pourtant, Lu Xun n'est pas un
« contempteur du corps », même si ceiui-ci tend à servir surtout « l'esprit » (voir Gao
2007 :181). Il vise le Kôrper, non le Leib, insistant avec Nietzsche sur le processus
de vie (leben) et le rejet du désir de mort, mais rejetant l'esthétique du corps et du
surhomme. Lu Xun combat le corps comme expression figée et obstacle à la vie, pour
contrer la souffrance de cette impossibilité à régénérer la voix. Cependant, le corps
littéraire, par sa destruction symbolique et sa mise à distance comme signe, laisse
soupçonner une ultime aliénation du corps. Car, si le corps individuel comme « lieu
ou scène de la manifestation [d'un] trouble » est « premier signifiant mis en œuvre par
le langage » (StarobinsKi 1981:273), comment comprendre qu il soit tu ？ C'est peut-
être la dernière souffrance, celle du corps muet, obligé de demeurer un signe statique
interdit de parole individuelle, au nom de la dénonciation du silence collectif et du
refus de l'épanchement.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24716534
Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i24739848
Date: 9 1, 2014
Author(s): Julia Dominique
Abstract: F. L., 2001 : 14.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24739861
Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i24739848
Date: 9 1, 2014
Author(s): Langlois Claude
Abstract: Revue : La science catholique, revue des questions religieuses [puis] des sciences sacrées
et profanes, Lyon, Paris, Delhomme et Briguet [puis] Arras, Paris, Sueur-Charruey, 1886-1906.
Fusion ultérieure : La Revue des sciences ecclésiastiques et La Science catholique (1906-1910).
Ouvrages : John Augustine Zahm, chanoine régulier de la Sainte-Croix, pseud. Le Père H. J.
Mozans, Science catholique et savants catholiques [Catholic science and catholic scientists,
1893], traduit de l'anglais par M. l'abbé J. Flageolet, Paris, P. Lethielleux, 1895. A. Jeanniard
du Dot, L'hypnotisme et la science catholique, Paris, Librairie Bloud et Barrai, 1898, 1900.
Théophile Ortolan, Rivalités scientifiques : ou la science catholique et la prétendue impartialité
des historiens, I- La manie du dénigrement, II- Fausses réputations, Paris, Bloud et Barrai,
Collection : Science et religion : Études pour le temps présent, 1900.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24739862
Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i24739982
Date: 6 1, 2015
Author(s): Ramírez Camilo
Abstract: La Comisión Valech fue creada el 26 de septiembre del 2003 por el Presidente Lagos
para elaborar otro informe oficial que esta vez reconociera a las víctimas de la dictadura que
habían sufrido la privación de su libertad y la tortura, y permitiera gestionar algunas medidas
de reparación.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24740002
Journal Title: Atlantis
Publisher: The Spanish Association of Anglo-American Studies (AEDEAN)
Issue: i24757752
Date: 12 1, 2015
Author(s): Villegas-López Sonia
Abstract: In From Beast to the Blonde, Marina Warner studies the status of fairy tales as historical documents which
give an account of women's daily experiences, as they illustrate their particular rites of passage and the relevance
of maternal figures in their lives. The resonance of Mother Goose is taken by Warner "either as a historical source,
or a fantasy of origin" which she can trace into ancient traditions, like the Islamic or the Christian, and which
adds credibility to the stories (1994, xxiii).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24757782
Journal Title: Journal for the Study of Religion
Publisher: Association for the Study of Religion in Southern Africa
Issue: i24764056
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): van der Merwe Chris N.
Abstract: Afrikaans writers have often found themselves in a marginal position. During the time of apartheid, they vehemently criticised racial discrimination, thus dissociating themselves from the centre of power. After the demise of apartheid, Afrikaans writers were marginalised in a different way, when the Afrikaans language lost its previous dominant position and truly became a minority language. They were then forced to reexamine their past and reinterpret their present. In this article, recent Afrikaans writers' radical reinvention of the ideological significance of the Anglo-Boer War (1899-1902) is discussed. One novel about the War, Ingrid Winterbach's Niggie ("Cousin") is analysed in detail as an example of the search for meaning from a marginal position. The novel has a special relevance for Afrikaners in their painful adaptation to a new South Africa, but it is also linked to general themes like trauma, despair and hope.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24764084
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Ethnologie
Publisher: REIMER
Issue: i24888256
Date: 1 1, 2015
Author(s): Malefakis Alexis
Abstract: Fieldwork is sometimes marked by experiences of frictions and frustration. Fieldwork with mobile street vendors in an African city may confront the fieldworker with the problem of locating the 'field' and attaining access to it, both spatially and temporally. As I will show by reference to my fieldwork with a group of shoe vendors on the streets of Dar es Salaam, Tanzania, the frictions that occurred at the beginning of my fieldwork nevertheless ignited a process of ethnographic knowledge-gaining that led me to understand the importance of temporality and rhythmicity for the shoe vendors' practices. In their active engagement with the spatio-temporal landscape of the city, the street vendors organised their practices as an experiential rhythm that unfolded as sequences of rising and subsequently declining cognitive and corporeal tensions. These rhythms did not flow smoothly, but were necessarily interspersed with disturbances and frictions by the rhythms of other pedestrians in the streets, whose attention the street vendors tried to attain.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24888264
Journal Title: Diplomatic History
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i24912290
Date: 4 1, 1995
Author(s): LEFFLER MELVYN P.
Abstract: I am referring to the influential essay by Charles S. Maier, "Marking Time: The
Historiography of International Relations," in The Past Before Us: Contemporary Historical Writ-
ing in the United States, ed. Michael Kämmen (Ithaca, 1980), 355-87; and to the prize-winning
book by Richard E. Neustadt and Ernest R. May, Thinking in Time: The Uses of History for
Decision-Makers (New York, 1986).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24912293
Journal Title: Classical Antiquity
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: i25010989
Date: 10 1, 1993
Author(s): Louden Bruce
Abstract: "Homer as Oral Poet," HSCP 72 [1968] 1-46
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25010993
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342983
Date: 12 1, 1993
Author(s): Harjo Kerwin Lee
Abstract: Joy Harjo, "Grace," in In Mad Love and War (Middletown, Conn., 1993), 1.
Harjo
Grace
1
In Mad Love and War
1993
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505403
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342983
Date: 12 1, 1992
Author(s): Platt Fred
Abstract: Gerald M. Platt, "Sociology: Origins, Orientations, Crises,"Annals of Scholarship9(1992),
427-436.
Platt
427
9
Annals of Scholarship
1992
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505404
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i342994
Date: 10 1, 1990
Author(s): Meiyi Prasenjit
Abstract: Yang, "From Gender Erasure to Gender Difference," for the PRC's "state feminism."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505487
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342984
Date: 2 1, 1957
Author(s): Jaspers David
Abstract: Collingwood, "The Philosophy of the Christian
Religion," Sept. 29, 1920, Dep 1, 11.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505516
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342974
Date: 10 1, 1957
Author(s): Nietzsche Wulf
Abstract: Friedrich Nietzsche, The Use and Abuse of History, transl. Adrian Collins
(Indianapolis, 1957).
Nietzsche
The Use and Abuse of History
1957
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505526
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i342990
Date: 10 1, 1976
Author(s): Nipperdey Lucian
Abstract: Thomas Nipperdey, "Historismus und Historismuskritik heute," in Nipperdey, Gesell-
schaft, Theorie, Kultur (Gottingen, 1976), 59-73.
Nipperdey
Historismus und Historismuskritik heute
59
Gesellschaft, Theorie, Kultur
1976
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505548
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342969
Date: 5 1, 1991
Author(s): Bernstein Cushing
Abstract: Richard Bernstein, "A Historian Enters Fiction's Shadowy Domain," New York Times (May
15, 1991), C18.
Bernstein
May 15
C18
New York Times
1991
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505594
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342968
Date: 2 1, 1983
Author(s): LaCapra Dale S.
Abstract: Dominick LaCapra, Rethinking
Intellectual History: Texts, Contexts, Language (Ithaca, N. Y., 1983).
LaCapra
Rethinking Intellectual History: Texts, Contexts, Language
1983
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505607
Journal Title: Annual Review of Anthropology
Publisher: Annual Reviews
Issue: i25064938
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Morris Rosalind C.
Abstract: This article considers the legacies of Jacques Derrida in and for Anglo-American sociocultural anthropology. It begins with a survey of Derrida's own engagement with themes that have historically been foundational to the field: (a) the critique of sign theory and, with it, the questions of language and law in Lévi-Straussian structuralism; (b) the question of the unconscious; (c) the critique of the performative and its consequences for the idea of ritual; (d) the rereading of Marcel Mauss's concept of the gift, and of economy more generally; and (e) the analysis of the metaphysical basis of law, in both religious and ostensibly secular formations. It then considers the state of the field at the time when it was being infused with different forms of poststructuralism and explores the competing claims made by these discourses in relation to deconstruction. Finally, after tracing the convergences and divergences between Derridean deconstruction and theory in sociocultural anthropology, it treats two main examples of works produced against and under the influence of Derrida's thought, respectively.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25064960
Journal Title: Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies
Publisher: Harvard-Yenching Institute
Issue: i25066852
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Kurita Kyoko
Abstract: The Content of the Form, p. 184.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25066858
Journal Title: Journal of Business Ethics
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i25075125
Date: 10 1, 2003
Author(s): Mellema Gregory
Abstract: Much light can be shed on events which characterize or underlie scandals at firms such as Enron, Arthur Andersen, Worldcom, ImClone, and Tyco by appealing to the notion of ethical distance. Various inquiries have highlighted the difficulties in finding or identifying particular individuals to blame for particular events, and in the context of situations as complex as these it can sometimes be helpful to investigate the comparative ethical distance of various participants in these events. In this essay I offer a characterization of ethical distance in terms of moral responsibility, and in doing so I describe and illustrate the rough inverse correlation between moral distance and degrees of moral responsibility. I urge that the concept of ethical distance is capable of shedding light upon situations in which several people are involved in bringing about a state of affairs. I then argue that moral responsibility cannot do justice to all situations involving ethical distance. When the distance between a person and a state of affairs grows sufficiently large, a different type of treatment is called for, and I introduce the notion of moral taint to describe the moral status of agents in these situations.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25075132
Journal Title: The Annals of the American Academy of Political and Social Science
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i25098007
Date: 5 1, 2008
Author(s): Heisler Martin O.
Abstract: Societies, like individuals, strive to have positive self-concepts. They endow stories of their origin and associate their course through history with ethical principles that attest to who they are and how they want to be seen. Such principles define the society for its members and for the world at large. But all societies must at some time confront evidence of actions undertaken in their name that violate their fundamental principles and conflict with their desired self-image. Following a glance at the basic elements of the politics of history and identity, the author suggests two sources of the tensions between "bad acts" and positive self-concepts. Both relate to shifts in developmental time. First, actions not considered wrong when they were undertaken in the past are inconsistent with current expectation. Second, transsocietal differences in normative frameworks lead to cross-boundary criticisms of behavior in which the critics' societies likely engaged at an earlier time. Accusations or criticisms generally meet with defensive, often hostile responses. Hypocrisy tends to rule in most cases, with little or no normative learning.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25098022
Journal Title: College Literature
Publisher: West Chester University
Issue: i25115452
Date: 10 1, 2007
Author(s): Templeton Alice
Abstract: What is the use of writing poems against war if they reenact rather than alter the binaries and brutalities of the war imagination they claim to protest? Why does so much contemporary war poetry only compound war's depleting effect instead of offering us energy for resistance? In The Life of Poetry (1949), Muriel Rukeyser defines poetry as a vital but underused national resource for a culture dominated by war. As a creative transfer of energy, poetry complicates and resists habits of imagination that sustain war. Using Rukeyser's analysis to contrast a representative poem from the volume Poets Against the War (2003) to several poems by Forche, Celan, James Wright, Blake, Yeats, Oppen, and Levertov, this paper discusses ways in which poetry about war and wartime can provide useful, life-giving energy without replicating the very violences it claims to oppose.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25115458
Journal Title: Journal of Business Ethics
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i25123273
Date: 8 1, 2004
Author(s): Galavielle Jean-Pierre
Abstract: The myth of an economy where nobody could have a predominant position, has lost its credibility. The presentiment of a high risk of social explosion makes companies undertake tentative moral legitimation. Thus, a new paradigm develops according to which the firm has to care for the satisfaction of public interest if "it wants to try to win forgiveness" for misbehavior towards the decorum rules of the atomicity of competition. Thus, there is a wave of "business ethics industry" building up. However, the stock exchange performances considered as ethical, are not different from others! The market does not seem to be able to say why it might be interesting to invest in stock considered as ethical. Moreover, opinion polls reveal a very significant discrepancy between the characterization of "the responsible company" as defined by itself or by notation agencies and, on the other hand, the hierarchy of criteria according to the answers of polled people. When companies and agencies favor sustainable development and good governance, rejecting child labor and so on, polled people consider that the paramount criterion of ethical conduct is personnel management. The problem is right here. Such is the view of a positively critical economist, situated at the point where macroeconomics meets corporate management.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25123278
Journal Title: Historia Mexicana
Publisher: El Centro de Estudios Históricos de El Colegio de México
Issue: i25139862
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): López Antonio Irigoyen
Abstract: AGNEM, Prot. del notario Juan Bautista Espinosa, ff. 139v.-140v., 19-
11-1674.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25139864
Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: Ecole des hautes etudes en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i25157040
Date: 3 1, 2003
Author(s): Severi Carlo
Abstract: Douglas Newton (1971 : 23, 31)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25157045
Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: Ecole des hautes etudes en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i25157076
Date: 3 1, 2005
Author(s): Calame Claude
Abstract: 1990, 11-35 et 60-72
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25157079
Journal Title: Arabica
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i25162277
Date: 4 1, 2008
Author(s): Natij Salah
Abstract: Goethe, cité par Pierre Bertaux, « Goethe », Encyclopédia Universalis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25162281
Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Political Science / Revue canadienne de science politique
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i25166287
Date: 9 1, 2008
Author(s): Giroux Dalie
Abstract: La réflexion offerte dans cet essai s'inscrit dans une entreprise d'approfondissement de la compréhension générale que nous avons de l'activité politique (parler, écrire, revendiquer, mettre en scène), et particulièrement de la relation que cette activité entretient avec l'idée de l'émancipation. Plus précisément, il s'agit de prendre pour objet d'exploration théorique le fait de parole, défini en termes d'articulation performative des espaces-temps humains, et d'en faire le paradigme de toute action politique. L'analyse de ce paradigme, au terme, permettra de pointer vers une matière utopique qui se qualifie à la fois comme événement et comme permanence du commun. /// In this article, the author seeks a better understanding of the modalities of political action (speaking, writing, claming, staging), and more specifically of the relation between political action and the idea of emancipation. To do so, the author proposes that the speech act, comprehended as the performed articulation of lived space/time, is to be taken as the paradigm of political action. Further analysis of this paradigm, as developed in the article, compels the manifestation of a philosophical object which qualifies both as event and as the manifestation of the perennially of the common.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25166290
Journal Title: The Sixteenth Century Journal
Publisher: Sixteenth Century Journal
Issue: i323394
Date: 7 1, 1991
Author(s): Flynn Maureen
Abstract: In this semiotic analysis of the Spanish auto defe, we begin to understand for the first time the meaning of religious rituals that have appeared completely incomprehensible in traditional accounts. The morning processions of penitents through city streets, the formal denunciations of heretics on public scaffolds, and the final burning at the stake of unrepentant sinners are placed within the context of medieval penitential practices and eschatological beliefs. The ceremony of the auto defe unveiled in time the Judgment Day awaiting all humankind at the end of time. For this reason, the spectacle aroused the interest of spectators all over Christendom, filling them with apprehension of their own final judgment.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2542736
Journal Title: The Jewish Quarterly Review
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press
Issue: i25470124
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Diamond James A.
Abstract: GP 3.47, p. 597.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25470134
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i25478832
Date: 5 1, 2009
Author(s): Kansteiner Wulf
Abstract: Martin Broszat's "Plea for the
Historicization of National Socialism," in Reworking the Past: Hitler, the Holocaust, and the
Historians' Debate, ed. Peter Baldwin (Boston: Beacon Press, 1990), 77-87.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25478836
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i25478832
Date: 5 1, 2009
Author(s): Wächter Kirsten
Abstract: History and Memory 9, no. 1 & 2
(1997), 113-144.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25478838
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i25478832
Date: 5 1, 2009
Author(s): Carbonell Bettina M.
Abstract: Susan Crane's "Memory, Distortion, and History in the Museum," History and Theory, Theme Issue
36 (1997), 44-63.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25478840
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion, Oxford University Press
Issue: i25484065
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Springs Jason A.
Abstract: Crossley 2004: 31-51
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/jaarel/lfn087', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any
Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i25486114
Date: 10 1, 2004
Author(s): Rothberg Michael
Abstract: The trial of Adolf Eichmann, in 1961, is generally considered a turning point in the history of Holocaust memory because it brought the Holocaust into the public sphere for the first time as a discrete event on an international scale. In the same year, Jean Rouch and Edgar Morin's film Chronicle of a Summer appeared in France. While absent from scholarship on memory of the Nazi genocide for over forty years, Chronicle of a Summer contains a scene of Holocaust testimony that suggests the need to look beyond the Eichmann trial for alternative articulations of public Holocaust remembrance. This essay considers the juxtaposition in Chronicle of a Summer of Holocaust memory and the history of decolonization in order to rethink the "unique" place that the Holocaust has come to hold in discourses on extreme violence. The essay argues that a discourse of truth and testimony arose in French resistance to the Algerian war that shaped and was shaped by memory of the Nazi genocide.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25486119
Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i25501821
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Emery Jacob
Abstract: Andrey Bely's novel "Petersburg" (one of the high points of Russian literary modernism and a rough analogue to James Joyce's Ulysses) repeatedly claims that parent and child, being of the same flesh and blood, share an ambivalent identity. At the same time, because the novel opens by invoking a major character's genealogical relation to Adam, the book implies that this kin identity is universal and can be applied to the entire human race. This essay analyzes the role of kinship metaphor in "Petersburg", demonstrating that tropes of parent-child identity facilitate the novel's dizzying metaphoric conflation, that they form a kind of metafictional mirror in which the novel probes its own nature as a work of the imagination, and that Bely's theory and practice of metaphor touch on broader philosophical issues of figure and fictionality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25501828
Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i25501873
Date: 5 1, 2008
Author(s): Phillips Siobhan
Abstract: While Robert Frost's emphasis on ordinary themes has often been noted, his use of ordinary time bears further attention: his poems show how the repetitive pattern of daily living can be a creative possibility rather than an enervating necessity. His everyday verse suggests revised definitions of lyric temporality as well as new reconciliations of the dualistic oppositions structuring accounts of modernist and Americanist literature. In Frost, human repetition allows a willful independence endorsed by the natural world. The generally neglected poem "In the Home Stretch" demonstrates his most beneficent version of ordinary living, showing how retrospection and conversation are crucial elements of its practice and how marriage can promote these habits. Frost provides a contrasting, failed version of everyday practice in "Home Burial" and a comparable sense of repetitive possibility in "Never Again Would Birds' Song Be the Same."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25501879
Journal Title: International Review of the Aesthetics and Sociology of Music
Publisher: Department for Music and Musicology of the Croatian Academy of Sciences and Arts, Croatian Musicological Society, Music Academy of the University of Zagreb
Issue: i25594483
Date: 6 1, 2009
Author(s): Pauset Eve Norah
Abstract: Id., p. 20.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25594487
Journal Title: Dance Chronicle
Publisher: Taylor & Francis Group
Issue: i25598220
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Burt Ramsay
Abstract: Mårten Spångberg also used Verdin's video to create his own reinterpretation of
Steve Paxton's Goldberg Variations called Powered by Emotion / After Sade (2003).
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1080/01472520903276800', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any
Journal Title: Studies in Romanticism
Publisher: The Graduate School, Boston University
Issue: i25600558
Date: 12 1, 1985
Author(s): Rajan Tilottama
Abstract: Coleridge, The Complete Poetical Works of Samuel Taylor Coleridge, ed. E. H. Cole-
ridge, 2 vols. (Oxford: Clarendon, 1912/1966).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25600561
Journal Title: Studies in Romanticism
Publisher: The Graduate School, Boston University
Issue: i25601150
Date: 4 1, 1996
Author(s): Harding Anthony John
Abstract: Heidegger's Estrangements: Language, Truth, and Poetry (New Haven: Yale UP, 1989)
XXV.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25601152
Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i25610177
Date: 7 1, 2009
Author(s): Udoh Fabian E.
Abstract: Luke 12:42-44
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25610185
Journal Title: Historical Archaeology
Publisher: Society for Historical Archaeology
Issue: i25616488
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): McCarthy John P.
Abstract: Much archaeological scholarship on consumption has approached its subject matter as the means to an end—e.g., as a way of studying socioeconomic status—rather than as a proper object of study in its own right. The "consumer choice" school, and, more recently, advocates of consumer behavior studies, have supported approaches that emphasize quantitative methods, at the same time downplaying the "qualitative" or symbolic aspects of consumption. A considerable body of literature on the symbolic aspects of consumption exists both in historical archaeology and other fields. The intention of this essay is to draw together this recent literature on consumption and combine it into a single approach that emphasizes shopping as the meaningful action at the very heart of consumption. With the emphasis on agency, this approach presents shopping as that crucial moment of transformation where identity, intention, and symbol combine in the decision to purchase, to own, an object.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25616493
Journal Title: Cinema Journal
Publisher: University of Texas Press
Issue: i25619740
Date: 10 1, 2009
Author(s): Pierson Michele
Abstract: Branden W. Joseph's analysis of Smith's baroque aesthetic
in "Primitives and Flaming Creatures," in Beyond the Dream Syndicate.- Tony Conrad and the Arts After Cage (New
York: Zone Books, 2008), 213-278.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25619742
Journal Title: Annals of the Association of American Geographers
Publisher: Association of American Geographers
Issue: i323894
Date: 6 1, 1976
Author(s): Buttimer Anne
Abstract: Recent attempts by geographers to explore the human experience of space have focused on overt behavior and its cognitive foundations. The language and style of our descriptions, however, often fail to speak in categories appropriate for the elucidation of lived experience, and we need to evaluate our modes of knowing in the light of modes of being in the everyday world. Phenomenologists provide some guidelines for this task. They point to the preconsciously given aspects of behavior and perception residing in the "lifeworld"-the culturally defined spatiotemporal setting or horizon of everyday life. Scientific procedures which separate "subjects" and "objects," thought and action, people and environments are inadequate to investigate this lifeworld. The phenomenological approach ideally should allow lifeworld to reveal itself in its own terms. In practice, however, phenomenological descriptions remain opaque to the functional dynamism of spatial systems, just as geographical descriptions of space have neglected many facets of human experience. There are certain avenues for dialogue between these two disciplines in three major research areas: the sense of place, social space, and time-space rhythms. Such a dialogue could contribute to a more humanistic foundation for human geography.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2562470
Journal Title: Annals of the Association of American Geographers
Publisher: Association of American Geographers
Issue: i323911
Date: 6 1, 1981
Author(s): Gould Peter
Abstract: In Science, great difficulty is sometimes experienced in giving up hypothesized structures. The inadequacies of Freudian hypotheses are highlighted, and attention is directed to Dasein-analysis, which stays close to the data. This perspective focuses attention upon the phenomenological tradition, and suggests that certain mathematical frameworks in human geography are inappropriate. The adequacy of a priori models is also questioned from a Heideggerian perspective, and more general qualitative algebras are suggested to replace the distorted functional thinking inherited from the physical sciences.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2562790
Journal Title: Oxford Art Journal
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i25650854
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Roberts John
Abstract: Janet A. Kaplan,
'Flirtations with Evidence', Art in America,
October 2004, pp. 134-8, 169-70.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25650861
Journal Title: Arabica
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i25651682
Date: 10 1, 2009
Author(s): Zine Mohammed Chaouki
Abstract: Shokoufeh Taghi, The Two Wings of Wisdom. Mysticism and Philosophy in the Risalat ut-
tair of Ibn Sind, Uppsala, Uppsala University Library («Studia Iranica Upsaliensia», 4), 2000.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25651686
Journal Title: European Review of Latin American and Caribbean Studies / Revista Europea de Estudios Latinoamericanos y del Caribe
Publisher: Centro de Estudios y Documentación Latinoamericanos (CEDLA)
Issue: i25675510
Date: 12 1, 1991
Author(s): Velho Otávio
Abstract: Eric Lethbridge. An earlier version of this article was pub-
lished in Religiao e Sociedade, Vol. 14, no. 1, 1987.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25675513
Journal Title: Nouvelles Études Francophones
Publisher: Conseil International d'Études Francophones
Issue: i25701911
Date: 10 1, 2005
Author(s): Tritsmans Bruno
Abstract: Michel de Certeau a attribué les traits de la métis au récit dans L'Inven-
tion du quotidien.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25701917
Journal Title: Nouvelles Études Francophones
Publisher: Conseil International d'Études Francophones
Issue: i25702097
Date: 4 1, 2008
Author(s): Beniamino Michel
Abstract: Anderson 147
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25702110
Journal Title: Nouvelles Études Francophones
Publisher: Conseil International d'Études Francophones
Issue: i25702217
Date: 10 1, 2009
Author(s): Touré Paul N.
Abstract: Faustin releve dans cette reflexion: "Nous sommes au seuil
dune nouvelle vie, il faudrait tout recommencer: l'histoire, la geographie, l'fitat, les
moeurs, pourquoi pas la maniere de concevoir nos enfants?" (134).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25702235
Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Asociación Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Issue: i25703106
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Iranzo Teresa
Abstract: Julien Benda, The Betrayal of the Intellectuals (Boston: Beacon, 1958).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25703113
Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Asociación Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Issue: i25703106
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Bofill Mireia
Abstract: Bajo la direccion de Jacques Semelin, Claire Andrieu y Sarah Gensburger, en el marco del Centre d'-
histoire des Sciences Po, Paris, en diciembre de 2006.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25703115
Journal Title: Hispanic Review
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press
Issue: i25703529
Date: 7 1, 2010
Author(s): de Looze Laurence
Abstract: Vinsauf's Poetria Nova.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25703531
Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i25759142
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Grossetti Michel
Abstract: Gleick, 1989
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25759144
Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i25759142
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Lassave Pierre
Abstract: F. La Cecla, Le malentendu (II malentenso, 1997), trad.
A. Sauzeau, preface de M. Auge, Paris, Balland, « Voix et Regards », 2002.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25759149
Journal Title: Law and Contemporary Problems
Publisher: Duke University School of Law
Issue: i25800662
Date: 10 1, 2010
Author(s): Deeb Hadi Nicholas
Abstract: Paul V. Kroskrity, Arizona Tewa Kiva Speech
as a Manifestation of a Dominant Language Ideology, in LANGUAGE IDEOLOGIES, supra note 16, at
117.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25800672
Journal Title: Journal of World Prehistory
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i25801252
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): Watkins Trevor
Abstract: Asouti 2006
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25801256
Journal Title: Oriente Moderno
Publisher: Istituto per l'Oriente C. A. Nallino
Issue: i25817824
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): VAN DEN BOS MATTHIJS
Abstract: Hokumat-e vel yi, Kadivar represents a Sufi and Gnostic ideal type: "When politics
would be in the hands of the Friends of God, the Gnostics and the Sufis, this would be an era
of Light, and that time which would lack the divine rulings of the Friends and Wayfarers
would be dominated by oppression" (p. 30).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25817830
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Ethnologie
Publisher: Dietrich Reimer Verlag
Issue: i25842884
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Scheuch Erwin K.
Abstract: Leggewie
1994.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25842888
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Ethnologie
Publisher: Dietrich Reimer Verlag
Issue: i25842972
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Duelke Britta
Abstract: Fuftnote 18
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25842978
Journal Title: The American Political Science Review
Publisher: American Political Science Association
Issue: i344578
Date: 6 1, 1980
Author(s): Zonabend W. James
Abstract: Nora
1984, xxix
xxix
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2585394
Journal Title: International Studies Quarterly
Publisher: Butterworth Publishers
Issue: i324417
Date: 12 1, 1988
Author(s): Kiser Edgar
Abstract: This paper examines the linkages among the ideological, political, and economic dimensions of the world-system by looking at changes in the publication of two types of utopian novels in the United States. We argue that positive and negative visions of the future (eutopian and dystopian literature, respectively) can be treated as aspects of the ideological dimension of the world-system. As part of such an interrelated system, the volume of utopias should change in response to periods of crisis and stability in the political, economic, and cultural dimensions of the system. A time-series analysis indicates that both types of utopian literature are affected by changing conditions of the world-system. On the basis of these findings, we conclude that the world-system perspective represents a promising approach for the study of ideological change.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2600591
Journal Title: Recherches de théologie et philosophie médiévales
Publisher: PEETERS
Issue: i26172285
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Sère Bénédicte
Abstract: P. RlCŒUR, Soi-même comme un autre, Paris 1990, p. 43: «Le concept de personne
serait un concept primitif, dans la mesure où on ne saurait remonter au-delà de lui».
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26172290
Journal Title: Revista Española de Derecho Internacional
Publisher: ASOCIACIÓN ESPAÑOLA DE PROFESORES DE DERECHO INTERNACIONAL Y RELACIONES INTERNACIONALES
Issue: e26177211
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): García Picazo Paloma
Abstract: Este trabajo está dedicado a todos los que, como Maximilian M. Kolbe (1894-1941), son capaces e dar su vida por otros, sin pedir nada a cambio, sin furia y sin rencor, tan sólo porque su idea de Dios omprende a la humanidad. Kolbe murió en un «búnker de inanición» del campo de exterminio de uschwitz. Entregó voluntariamente su vida a cambio de la de otro prisionero que era padre de familia. l suplicio del hambre (inanición absoluta) duró catorce días, en los que fallecieron seis condenados; uego, una inyección letal liquidó a los tres moribundos restantes, que «tardaban» demasiado. Así acabó olbe. La pena se dictó como castigo colectivo por la fuga de otro preso del bloque
14. Fischer, U., Maximilian Kolbe, Viena, Sal Terrae-Maria Roggendorf, 1975.En Auschwitz se inyectaba gasolina directamente n el corazón.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26177217
Journal Title: Recherches de théologie ancienne et médiévale
Publisher: ABBAYE DU MONT CÉSAR
Issue: i26188535
Date: 12 1, 1979
Author(s): Smalley B.
Abstract: G. Olsen, The Idea of the «Ecclesia Primitiva» in the Writings of the
Twelflh-Cenlury Canonists, in Traditio 25 (1969) 61-86; B. Smalley, Ecclesiastical
Attitudes to Novelty c. 1100-c. 1250, in Studies in Church History, op. cit., η. 32,
113-133.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26188539
Journal Title: Recherches de théologie ancienne et médiévale
Publisher: ABBAYE DU MONT CÉSAR
Issue: i26189080
Date: 12 1, 1995
Author(s): Laird Martin S.
Abstract: Conf. 10,11 (p. 138).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26189087
Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: e26193081
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Rosoux Valérie
Abstract: Twelve years after the genocide, nothing has been forgotten in Rwanda. The country resembles a multiplicity of experiences, words and silences. The aim of the article is to reflect on the representations – or absence of representations – of the past. The approach is based on the ambivalence of any reference to the past. It is not a question of making a judgement in the abstract about the more or less legitimate character of the attitudes observed, but to understand the dynamics at work. The analysis is divided into three parts. The first part recalls the specific aspects of the case under study. The second examines the silences that weigh upon Rwandan society. The third notes the main accounts of the past.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26193085
Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: e26193081
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Gensburger Sarah
Abstract: This article returns to research material initially gathered and used for an oral history project. Adopting a sociology of memory perspective, it analyses why and how the former internees at the annex camps of Drancy in Paris only rarely gave accounts of their internment to their families or in public. Following upon the work of Maurice Halbwachs, it studies the role of ties to groups and how they evolve over time in the expression of memories by the individuals concerned.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26193086
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: e26196983
Date: 1 1, 2017
Author(s): DE FREITAS DA SILVA CLAUDINEI APARECIDO
Abstract: From the perspective of Gabriel Marcel’s juvenile writings, most notably
Fragments Philosophiques(1909-1914) andJournal Métaphysique(1914-1923), this study discuss the first theoretical statute of the experience of God. This reflexive movement, strictly speaking, phenomenological-existential is based (as background) on the critique of absolute knowledge (modern idealism and scientism) which, according to Marcel, is an unavoidable contradiction: at the same time, it affirms the being, it denies the being. What draws attention is the fact that such explanatory model is transposed and, therefore, applied using the classical formulation of the so-called problem of the existence of God, of which theodicy has one of the most eloquent and emblematic metaphysical discourses. For the young French thinker, God cannot be verified or justified as an ontological proof: God is the Inverifiable Absolute, since it has to be experienced in the act of faith, in the expression of love and grace.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26197005
Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26199257
Date: 3 1, 1993
Author(s): Poulot Dominique
Abstract: J.-M. Chaumont, op. cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26199275
Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26199296
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Depraz Nathalie
Abstract: J. Derrida, o.e.., 1962.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26199304
Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26200188
Date: 9 1, 1994
Author(s): Thévenot Laurent
Abstract: M. Heidegger, Approche de
Hölderlin, Paris, Gallimard, 1973.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26200194
Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26201540
Date: 12 1, 1996
Author(s): Wessel Marleen
Abstract: Lettre du 10 août 1907; Fonds Lucien Febvre.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26201549
Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26201705
Date: 12 1, 1997
Author(s): Desrosières Alain
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, Temps et Récit, Paris, Éd. du Seuil, 1993.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26201769
Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26201705
Date: 12 1, 1997
Author(s): Noiriel Gérard
Abstract: Alban Bensa, Chroniques Kanak. L'ethnologie
en marche, Paris, Ethnie-Documents, n° 18-19,1995.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26201774
Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26202740
Date: 9 1, 2002
Author(s): Ponsard Nathalie
Abstract: Dans mon travail, j'ai distingué les fonctions utilitaires
(ordinaires et extraordinaires) et les fonctions
de divertissement.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26202747
Journal Title: PAJ: A Journal of Performance and Art
Publisher: MIT Press
Issue: e26206385
Date: 5 1, 2012
Author(s): Rodney Lee
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, Time and Narrative, Vol. 1, trans. Kathleen McLaughlin and David Pellauer (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1984), 52.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26206389
Journal Title: History of Political Thought
Publisher: Imprint Academic
Issue: i26215872
Date: 10 1, 1995
Author(s): Rengger N.J.
Abstract: Cited in Maurice Cranston, John Locke: A Biography (Oxford, 1985), p. 244.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26215878
Journal Title: History of Political Thought
Publisher: Imprint Academic
Issue: i26219815
Date: 4 1, 2001
Author(s): Swaine Lucas A.
Abstract: Sorel, Montesquieu, p. 46.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26219821
Journal Title: Lettere Italiane
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: e26240557
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Ossola Carlo
Abstract: Agostino, Confessioni, libro XI, xxiii, 29 [Edizioni Città Nuova, NBA on-line].
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26240560
Journal Title: Lettere Italiane
Publisher: LEO S. OLSCHKI
Issue: i26263326
Date: 12 1, 1984
Author(s): Ossola Carlo
Abstract: J. L. Borges, The unending Rose, poesia eponima della raccolta: La Rosa pro-
funda, Buenos Aires, Emecé Editores 1975; poi in Obra poètica, 1923-1977, Buenos
Aires-Madrid, Alianza Très / Emecé 1983 (da cui citiamo). La citazione alla p. 465.
La « rosa profonda » è veramente « fior silenciosa », traccia d'inesprimibile che
attraversa e sigilla tutta la poesia di Borges, dalla « inattingibile rosa » che apre la
prima raccolta Fervor de Buenos Aires, del 1923 all'« insensata rosa », negli anni
ultimi, di Efialtes. Ma come non riportare qui - almeno - quella prima « rosa de
la rosas »?: « La rosa, / la inmarcesible rosa que no canto, / la que es peso y fragancia, /
la del negro jardin en la alta noche, / la de cualquier jardin y cualquier tarde, / la
rosa que resurge de la tenue / ceniza por el arte de la alquimia, / la rosa de los persas
y de Ariosto, / la que siempre està sola, / la que siempre es la rosa de las rosas, /
la joven fior platonica, / la ardiente y ciega rosa que no canto, / la rosa inalcanzable »
(J. L. Borges, La rosa, da Fervor de Buenos Aires; ora in Obra poètica cit., p. 38).
Come non ricordare la - così prossima a la « memoria... / de un distico de Angelus
Silesius » - «invisibile rosa» di Una rosa y Milton: «De las generaciones de las
rosas / Que en el fondo del riempo se han perdido / Quiero que una se salve del
olvido, / Una sin marca ο signo entre las cosas / Que fueron. El destino me depara /
Este don de nombrar por vez primera / Esa fior silenciosa, la postrera / Rosa que
Milton acercó a su cara, / Sin verla. Oh tu bermeja ο amarilla / Ο bianca rosa de
un jardin borrado, / Deja màgicamente tu pasado / Inmemorial y en este verso brilla, /
Oro, sangre ο marfil ο tenebrosa / Como en sus manos, invisible rosa » (J. Borges,
Una rosa y Milton, da El otro, el mismo; ora in Obra poètica cit., p. 213).
E se è vero che nella quartina iniziale del Golem, Borges sembra avvicinarsi ai
« nomina nuda » ricordati da Eco: « Si (corno el griego afirma en el Cratilo) / El
nombre es arquetipo de la cosa, / En las letras de rosa esta la rosa / Y todo el Nilo
en la palabra Nilo»); è ugualmente vero che si tratta di «un terrible Nombre»,
« articulación del Sacro Nombre », nome rivelato ma non articolabile, come mirabil-
mente sigilla, nell'estrema visione concessa al Marino, Una rosa gialla: « Allora accadde
la rivelazione. Marino vide la rosa, come potè vederla Adamo nel Paradiso, e senti
che essa stava nella sua eternità e non nelle sue parole e che noi possiamo menzionare
ο alludere ma non esprimere » (J. L. Borges, Una rosa gialla, da El hacedor; trad. it.:
in Antologia personale, Milano, Silva 1965, p. 123).
Così anche questo percorso è stato vano tender a « la rosa inalcanzable », essa
« fior silenciosa ».
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26263328
Journal Title: Lettere Italiane
Publisher: LEO S. OLSCHKI
Issue: i26263869
Date: 9 1, 1986
Author(s): Bottoni Luciano
Abstract: Cfr. La Rivoluzione francese del 1789 e la rivoluzione italiana del 1859. Osserva-
zioni comparative, in Tutte le Opere cit., II, p. 2112 sgg.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26263873
Journal Title: Lettere Italiane
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: i26266382
Date: 6 1, 1997
Author(s): Leri Clara
Abstract: Ricordo, a titolo di esempio, solo alcuni degli scrittori e degli studiosi che non
hanno avuto, per così dire, accesso alla rassegna (pur se implicitamente e continuamente
vivissimi all'attenzione di chi scrive) per l'impossibilità oggettiva di esibire lo sconfinato
universo delle presenze bibliche nella letteratura compresa tra il Duecento e il primo Ot-
tocento: il Dante delle opere 'minori', soprattutto della Vita Nuova (V. Branca, G. Gor-
ni), la predicazione medievale e moderna (C. Delcorno, R. Rusconi, L. Bolzoni, J. Berlioz,
etc.), le laude (G. Varanini, R. Bettarini, F. Mancini etc.), la sacra rappresentazione (M.
Martelli, N. Newbigin, F. Doglio, G. Ponte, F. Pezzarossa), il Boccaccio delle Rime e
delle Epistole (V. Branca, G. Auzzas) e di alcune parti del Decameron (P. Cherchi), la
produzione 'sacra' tassiana (Rime Sacre, Mondo Creato), l'Aretino (Larivaille) e il Folengo
(M. Chiesa, S. Gatti) nei panni di scrittori cristiani, l'Arcadia edificante, per riprendere
un titolo preciso del Di Biase, certa tragedia sacra settecentesca come quella di Martello
(I. Magnani, P. Trivero) e, soprattutto, l'Alfieri biblico del Saul e dell'Abele (A. Di Bene-
detto, E. Raimondi), lo Jacopo Ortis (M. A. Terzoli) e l'Ipercalisse del Foscolo (B. Rosada,
A. Forlini), il linguaggio poetico religioso del Porta (G. Pozzi) e del Belli, il Tommaseo
(M. Guglielminetti), il Pascoli (A. Traina, G. Goffis), D'Annunzio e molti altri ancora:
spesso, tra l'altro, privi di una vera e propria bibliografia «scritturale» a largo spettro,
se non di studi singoli, difficilmente annoverabili nell'ambito ristretto di una precisazione
doverosa, ma non esaustiva. Va detto anche che, sebbene la rassegna si chiuda con il
1995, qua e là è stato segnalato qualche libro del 1996, a cui si vuole ora aggiungere,
senza l'ambizione di averne citato tutti i volumi relativi all'oggetto delle precedenti pagi-
ne, A. Stauble, Le sirene eterne. Studi sull'eredità classica e biblica nella letteratura italia-
na, Ravenna, Longo, 1996; e E. Esposito, R. Manica, N. Longo, R. Scrivano, Memo-
ria biblica nell'opera di Dante, Roma, Bulzoni, 1996.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26266388
Journal Title: L'Esprit Créateur
Publisher: L'ESPRIT CREATEUR, Inc.
Issue: i26280815
Date: 12 1, 1977
Author(s): Rosbottom Ronald C.
Abstract: Novel, 2 (1968), 5-14.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26280818
Journal Title: L'Esprit Créateur
Publisher: L'ESPRIT CREATEUR, Inc.
Issue: i26283874
Date: 10 1, 1979
Author(s): Bauschatz Cathleen M.
Abstract: Montaigne, Œuvres Complètes, ed. Thibaudet & Rat (Paris: Gallimard, 1962), 1,
xxvi. 150-51. a.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26283878
Journal Title: The Eastern Buddhist
Publisher: The Eastern Buddhist Society
Issue: i26289332
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Mohr Michel
Abstract: Aramaki 2003.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26289495
Journal Title: Journal of Southern African Studies
Publisher: Carfax Publishing, Taylor and Francis Ltd.
Issue: i324979
Date: 6 1, 1991
Author(s): Dube David
Abstract: Osborne, Modernity, p. 37.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2637603
Journal Title: The Historical Journal
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i325015
Date: 3 1, 1989
Author(s): Collinson Tom
Abstract: Thomas Brooks, 'Epistle to the saints', Heaven on earth, n.p
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2639939
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i345910
Date: 12 1, 1989
Author(s): Rosen William H.
Abstract: Stanley Rosen, The Ancients and the Moderns: Rethinking Modernity (New Haven: Yale
University Press, 1989).
Rosen
The Ancients and the Moderns: Rethinking Modernity
1989
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2677987
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i345907
Date: 2 1, 1986
Author(s): Jameson Julia Adeney
Abstract: Fredric Jameson, "Reflections in Conclusion," in Ernst Bloch et al., Aesthetics and Politics
(London: Verso, 1986), 207.
Jameson
Reflections in Conclusion
207
Aesthetics and Politics
1986
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2678066
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i345907
Date: 2 1, 1969
Author(s): Althusser Nicole
Abstract: Althusser's formula: "Human societies secrete ideology as an element or atmosphere nec-
essary for breathing and existence" (L. Althusser, For Marx [London: Verso, 1969], 232).
Althusser
Human societies secrete ideology as an element or atmosphere necessary for breathing and existence
232
For Marx
1969
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2678068
Journal Title: Ethical Theory and Moral Practice
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i27504265
Date: 9 1, 2003
Author(s): Wall John
Abstract: Nussbaum, 2002, p. 272
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27504272
Journal Title: Labour History
Publisher: Australian Society for the Study of Labour History
Issue: i27516030
Date: 5 1, 2005
Author(s): Murphy John
Abstract: The recollections of elderly men of work in a time of full employment are the focus of this paper. It is based on in-depth qualitative interviews with men who were young parents in the mid-1950s. Drawing on literature about masculinity, post-war Fordism and the constitution of self-identity through narrative, it explores their themes of how central security was to their identity as providers, and examines what satisfactions they got from working. The narrative bookends of their experience are strong memories of their parents in the Depression, and acute awareness of the contemporary insecurity of their children and grandchildren.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27516045
Journal Title: Journal of American Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i27557684
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Coates Peter
Abstract: Robyn Dixon, "Silent Warning? Sparrows are Vanishing
Throughout Great Britain," Eos Angeles Times, 12 July 2002, at: http://www.ecology.com/
eco...o2/articles.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27557692
Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i27642764
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Casey Edward
Abstract: Ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27642768
Journal Title: Numen
Publisher: Brill Academic Publishers
Issue: i27643230
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Doja Albert
Abstract: Douglas-Klotz 2005.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27643234
Journal Title: International Journal for Philosophy of Religion
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i27646209
Date: 6 1, 2007
Author(s): DiCenso James
Abstract: Freud (1955a, p. 98).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27646213
Journal Title: Revista de Letras
Publisher: Universidade Estadual Paulista
Issue: i27666303
Date: 1 1, 1982
Author(s): Lucas Fábio
Abstract: Cf. Arnold Rothe (ROTHE 12, p. 11)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27666314
Journal Title: Revista de Letras
Publisher: Universidade Estadual Paulista
Issue: i27666769
Date: 12 1, 2003
Author(s): de Rezende Neide Luzia
Abstract: Antonio Candido, "Digressão sentimental sobre Oswald de Andrade" (1977, p. 71-2). Também nesse
artigo, o crítico conta que, em 1945, Oswald prestara, na Faculdade de Filosofia da mesma universidade,
concurso de livre-docência para a cadeira de Literatura Brasileira.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27666778
Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i27667495
Date: 8 1, 2008
Author(s): Miklavcic Alessandra
Abstract: In this article, I look at the ways in which contested memories, imagined communities, and social ressentiment are embraced and filtered by Slovenian and Italian youth as postmemory and transformed into symbolic weapons that exclude, make demands, or simply provoke. Drawing on fieldwork conducted in the Italo—Slovenian border area of Trieste, I analyze two settings in which these symbols are used: a soccer match between Slovenia and Italy played in the summer of 2002 at which a mysterious banner provoked diplomatic tensions and the everyday graffiti war waged on the walls of the city of Trieste.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27667502
Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i27669149
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Gandesha Samir
Abstract: Theodor W. Adorno, Hegel: Three Studies, trans. Shierry Weber Nicholsen (Cambridge, MA:
MIT Press, 1993), 41.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27669158
Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i27669194
Date: 7 1, 2007
Author(s): Moses A. Dirk
Abstract: German
Intellectuals and the Nazi Past (New York: Cambridge University Press, 2007).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27669198
Journal Title: The German Quarterly
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services, Inc.
Issue: i27701109
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): McKnight Phil
Abstract: With the portrayal of local resentment towards the massive influx of Silesian refugees after WWII in the GDR in his novel Landnahme, Christoph Hein expands the literary representation of history he began earlier in Horns Ende, again using the fictional small town of Guldenberg as paradigmatic for the GDR, extended here over time to include unified Germany. Bernhard Haber's epic, but unscrupulous struggle to overcome the will of his neighbors for him to fail provides the backdrop for Hein's depiction of how the past unavoidably writes the future and how the collective process of socialization shapes meanings and values. Using five narrators, Hein applies his earlier concept of social autobiography to trace historical developments in the acquired collective attitudes of Germans towards Gypsies, Poles, the handicapped, and African and Vietnamese workers left behind after unification, all of whom were subjected to the same abusive language and discrimination directed at the refugees.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27701116
Journal Title: The Journal of English and Germanic Philology
Publisher: University of Illinois Press
Issue: i27708325
Date: 4 1, 1978
Author(s): Bruns Gerald L.
Abstract: Merleau-Ponty, Adventures of the Dialectic, trans. Joseph Bien (Evanston:
Northwestern Univ. Press, 1973), pp. 203–204.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27708332
Journal Title: Journal of Medical Ethics
Publisher: BMJ Publishing Group
Issue: i27718647
Date: 4 1, 2001
Author(s): Berghmans Ron
Abstract: Advance directives for psychiatric care are the subject of debate in a number of Western societies. By using psychiatric advance directives (or so-called "Ulysses contracts"), it would be possible for mentally ill persons who are competent and with their disease in remission, and who want timely intervention in case of future mental crisis, to give prior authorisation to treatment at a later time when they are incompetent, have become non-compliant, and are refusing care. Thus the devastating consequences of recurrent psychosis could be minimised. Ulysses contracts raise a number of ethical questions. In this article the central issues of concern and debate are discussed from a narrative perspective. Ulysses contracts are viewed as elements of an ongoing narrative in which patient and doctor try to make sense of and get a hold on the recurrent crisis inherent in the patient's psychiatric condition.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27718653
Journal Title: Foro Internacional
Publisher: El Colegio de México
Issue: i27738594
Date: 9 1, 1997
Author(s): Santiso Javier
Abstract: Véase J. Santiso, "Les horloges et les nuages: Temps et contretemps des démo-
cratisations", Hermès, núm. 19, 1996, pp. 165-182; J. Santiso, "Time, Démocratisation
and Rational Choice", trabajo presentado durante el Nuffield Sodology Seminar, organiza-
do por John Goldthorpe, el 29 de noviembre de 1997, Oxford University; P. Schmitter,
"Rhytm, Timing and Sequence in the Constitution of Democracy", op. cit., pp. 3 y ss. La
mayor parte de la obra de Linz, empezando por sus trabajos más recientes, aborda esta
dimensión temporal de las democratizaciones. Cabe mencionar, por ejemplo, J. Linz y
Y. Shain, "The Timing and the Nature of First Democratic Elections", en Linz y Shain
(comps.), Between States. Interim Governments and Democratic Transitions, Cambridge y
Nueva York, 1995, pp. 76-91.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27738597
Journal Title: Foro Internacional
Publisher: El Colegio de México
Issue: i27738655
Date: 9 1, 2004
Author(s): Duque Sonia
Abstract: Según la definición de EG. Bailey en Les règles du jeu politique, París, PUF, 1971, p. 186.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27738660
Journal Title: Foro Internacional
Publisher: El Colegio de México
Issue: i27739107
Date: 3 1, 2002
Author(s): Santiso Javier
Abstract: Véase Paul Ricoeur, " Sanction, réhabilitation, pardon ", en Ricoeur, Le juste, Paris,
Esprit Editions, 1995, pp. 193-208.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27739114
Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Universitat de Barcelona, Publicacions; Diputación Provincial de Granada, Centro de Investigaciones Etnológicas Ángel Ganivet; Ajuntament de Barcelona, Arxiu Històric de la Ciutat
Issue: i27753054
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Vilanova Mercedes
Abstract: Yara Dulce Bandeira Ataide, Decifra-me ou devoro-te, Edicoes Loyola, 1993.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27753057
Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Universitat de Barcelona, Publicacions; Diputación Provincial de Granada, Centro de Investigaciones Etnológicas Ángel Ganivet; Ajuntament de Barcelona, Arxiu Històric de la Ciutat
Issue: i27753135
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Cuesta Josefina
Abstract: P. Ricœur, La mémoire, op. cit, p. 207.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27753139
Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Universitat de Barcelona, Publicacions; Diputación Provincial de Granada, Centro de Investigaciones Etnológicas Ángel Ganivet; Ajuntament de Barcelona, Arxiu Històric de la Ciutat
Issue: i27753167
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Conill Montserrat
Abstract: En las referencias que aparecen a continuación, cuando no figura el lugar de la edieión signifiea que se
trata de Paris.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27753177
Journal Title: Chungara: Revista de Antropología Chilena
Publisher: Universidad de Tarapacá
Issue: i27802479
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Silva Claudia Zapata
Abstract: El surgimiento de una identidad aymara entre la población indígena del norte grande de Chile es un fenómeno reciente, como lo han demostrado algunos investigadores en los últimos años. En este artículo se aborda el vínculo problemático que se establece entre indentidad y memoria como parte de este fenómeno nuevo en el que los sujetos involucrados, principalmente aymaras urbanos, sienten la necesidad de articular una memoria representativa de ese colectivo amplio que es el pueblo aymara, planteándose, al mismo tiempo, el desafío de construirla, o como sus promotores sostienen, de "conocerla" y "descubrirla". El análisis tiene como punto de partida las tensiones que cruzan este proyecto y cómo éstas se reflejan en los documentos producidos por distintas organizaciones aymaras a partir de los años noventa. Nuestro interés se concentra en aquello que los sujetos dicen acerca de la memoria aymara (nivel de metamemoria), los esfuerzos desplegados en su construcción y los recursos utilizados en este intento. The emergence of an Aymara identity among the indigenous population in the northern part of Chile is a recent phenomenon, as some researchers have shown in the last few years. This paper discusses the difficult link between identity and memory as a part of a new phenomenon, where the concerned individuals, mainly urban Aymara, feel the necessity of articulating a memory that would represent this broad collective group, the Aymara people. At the same time, they assume the challenge to build this memory, or, in their own words, to "know" and "discover" it. The analysis focuses on the tensions that exist in this effort and on the way in which these tensions appear in the writings of different ethnic organizations since the nineties. Our interest centers on what the subjects say about Aymara memory (the level of metamemory), as well as on the efforts they put on its construction, and the resources they use.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27802482
Journal Title: The American Archivist
Publisher: Society of American Archivists
Issue: i27802687
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Mifflin Jeffrey
Abstract: Williams, A Key into the Language of America, [i–ii].
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27802693
Journal Title: Dead Sea Discoveries
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i27806733
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Jokiranta Jutta
Abstract: Cecilia Wassen and Jutta Jokiranta,
"Groups in Tension: Sectarianism in the Damascus Document and the Commu-
nity Rule," in Sectarianism in Early Judaism: Sociological Advances (ed. David J.
Chalcraft; London: Equinox, 2007), 205–45.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27806736
Journal Title: L'Année sociologique (1940/1948-)
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i27888766
Date: 1 1, 1975
Author(s): GROSSIN William
Abstract: « Le temps présent est devenu éphémère, irréversible et insaisissable »,
dit A. Y. Gourevitch. Il est aussi homogène et orienté. L'historien sovié-
tique ajoute : « Pour la première fois, l'homme a constaté que le temps dont
il ne décelait le cours qu'à travers les événements, ne s'arrête pas, même en
l'absence d'événement. » A. Y. Gourevitch réintroduit ici une acception
métaphysique du temps, s'il entend bien par événements des phénomènes,
alors que dans le reste de sa contribution, il paraît convaincu de la maté-
rialité du temps. La preuve expérimentale de l'existence du temps hors des
phénomènes n'a pas été fournie et ne peut l'être. Les temps dans lesquels
nous vivons, sont celui de notre existence même, celui de notre société, celui
des mouvements des astres, etc. L'homme ne « constate » donc pas que le
temps ne s'arrête pas même en l'absence d'événement, ces événements lui
sont cachés par l'usage d'un temps quantitatif qui se réfère à l'un d'entre
eux exprimé par les horloges, devenu la référence unique, apparemment
« dématérialisé » par son omnipotence et occultant l'existence des autres
temps.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27888811
Journal Title: L'Année sociologique (1940/1948-)
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i27889645
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): SPITÉRI Gérard
Abstract: Par exemple, Claude Allègre était bien considéré par la presse de droite, tandis
que celle de gauche s'est montrée plus critique à son égard. La raison en est que le
ministre de l'Education nationale s'était mis à dos le personnel enseignant, considéré
comme majoritairement à gauche. /-
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27889647
Journal Title: L'Année sociologique (1940/1948-)
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i27889984
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): GROSSIN William
Abstract: Edouard T. Hall. La danse de la vie. Temps culturel et temps vécu,
Parla, Seuil, 1984, p. 233.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27889995
Journal Title: Hebrew Studies
Publisher: National Association of Professors of Hebrew in Institutions of Higher Learning
Issue: i27913784
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Nevo Gideon
Abstract: S. Yizhar, Days ofZiklag, p. 1143.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27913803
Journal Title: Bulletin de la Société préhistorique française
Publisher: Société Préhistorique Française
Issue: i27923888
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): CASSEN Serge
Abstract: La stèle du Bronzo est gravée d'un oiseau "levé", en plein vol, la tête tournée vers l'extérieurs, superposé à un filon de quartz blanc; une crosse, également traitée en champlevé, lui barre le passage. En première lecture, une identification plausible du genre volatile semblait prévaloir et le colombidé emportait notre adhésion. Mais une analyse plus posée et un effort de déconstruction graphique du motif permettront cette fois de reprendre et d'affiner la reconnaissance, en décrivant les différents filtres autorisant tel ou tel rejet de catégorie ou d'espèce, pour ne conserver en dernier ressort que les meilleurs prétendants à la seule confrontation possible, celle qui oppose les corvidés aux colombidés. La représentation du Bronzo est en définitive équivalente en substance et en structure aux scènes figurées sur les stèles voisines dans lesquelles un phallus s'oppose qu tranchant d'une lame de hache (Mané Rutual), tandis qu'un cachalot affronte la coalition des animaux et des outils de l'homme (Table des Marchand). A "flushed" bird is engraved on the Bronzo stela, in full flight, its head turned to the exterior, superposed over a white quartz vein; a crook, equally treated in cut-away engraving, bars its passage. At a first reading, a plausible identification of the bird seemed to prevail and the Columbidae met with our approval. However, more deliberate analysis and an effort at the graphic deconstruction of the motif allows the identification to be reconsidered and improved, by describing the various filters authorising the rejection of such or such a category, finally preserving the best claimants to the only possible confrontation, opposing Corvidae to Columbidae. The Bronzo representation is equivalent in substance and in structure to the scenes on the neighbouring stelae where a phallus is opposed to the sharp edge of an axe blade (Mané Rutual), while a sperm-whale confronts the coalition of animals and human tools (Table des Marchand). However Bronzo is a deformed toponym, untranslatable as such; why not search in a more or less recent past, through some unavoidable semantic or linguistic evolution, for traces of a probable or possible mutation of the word? At the end of a brief investigation, we suggest that the expression Men Bran Sao, "The Stone of the Standing Raven", known from the early 19th century, is the name of this monolith. Nevertheless, the last time that a bird was directly observed on this stela was during the 5th millennium; the two closely conected fragments, on the model of the neighbouring Grand Menhir, prove that the stone has not been displaced since that distant period. We consequently propose this explanatory hypothesis to explain in Bronzo such a radical change of name: a zoomorphic mythical entity that we recognize as a pigeon, attached since time immemorial to the stela in question, passed under the influence of the Brittonic language and the new culture to the designation of another ornithological entity, the raven. If a bird as clearly identified as the Bronzo has played a determining role in the mythical Neolithic Armorican bestiary, like the sperm-whale, a scientific step is now necessary to find some hidden occurrences in other poorly understood signs, since such an important representation in our interpretive schema, unique in Brittany, cannot remain isolated. We correspondingly claim, in this coherent and logical research prolonging the Bronzo discovery, that the only possible appropriate solution for the famous "horn" signs is a bird shown full on, in flight, with spread wings.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27923892
Journal Title: Alif: Journal of Comparative Poetics
Publisher: American University in Cairo. Department of English and Comparative Literature
Issue: i27929815
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): بول كارين
Abstract: In "The University in Ruins", Bill Readings traces shifting ideas about the university from the writings of Kant and von Humboldt to their "ruins" in a managerial newspeak that prioritizes profitable programs over humanities scholarship and teaching. The author contends that Readings narrates the dehiscence of these ideas in the form of a lament, even as he urges humanities faculty to abandon melancholic fixations on our deteriorating prestige and besieged values. This article recasts Readings's account in light of Paul Ricoeur's explication of the Augustinian lament to speculate about the ontological lineaments of a sense of lost time among human scientists. يتتبع بيل ريدنجز في عمله أطلال الجامعة المفاهيم المتغيرة عن الجامعة ﺑﺎﺩﺋﺎً بكتابات كانط وڨون هومبولت ومنتهياً بظلال تلك المفاهيم في اللغة الٳدارية الدعاﺋﻴﺔ الحالية التي تتخذ من البرامج الأكاديمية المربحة أولوية لها، على حساب البحث العلمي والتدريس في مجال الٳنسانيات. وترى الكاتبة أن ريدنجز يسرد هذه التحولات في صيغة رثاء ﻳﺆﻛﺪ تراجعها، في الوقت الذي يحث فيه أساتذة الٳنسانيات على التخلي عن هوسهم السوداوي بمثاليات عفى عليها الزمن. وتعيد هذه المقالة تقديم عمل ريدنجز في ضوء شرح پول ريكور للرثاء الأوجسطيني، متأملة السمات الأنطولوجية التي تميز شعور علماء الٳنسانيات بالزمن المفقود .
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27929821
Journal Title: Revue économique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i27975857
Date: 3 1, 2011
Author(s): Sobel Richard
Abstract: Dans Les Chemins du paradis, Gorz est plus précis. En fait, il n'y a pas deux niveaux (macro-
social hétéronome et individuel autonome), mais trois (les deux précédents plus un niveau micro-
social autonome). Résumons ces trois niveaux: « 1) le travail macrosocial hétéronome, organisé
à l'échelle de la société tout entière et qui assure le fonctionnement ainsi que la couverture des
besoins de base [de l'ensemble des membres de la société] ; 2) les activités microsociales, coopéra-
tives, communautaires ou associatives, auto-organisées à l'échelle locale et qui auront un caractère
facultatif et volontaire, sauf dans les cas où elles se substituent au travail macrosocial pour couvrir
des besoins de base ; 3) les activités autonomes correspondant aux projets et désir personnels des
individus, familles ou petits groupes. » (Gorz [1988], p. 125-126.)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27975861
Journal Title: Man
Publisher: Royal Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland
Issue: i330201
Date: 9 1, 1994
Author(s): Kuper Adam
Abstract: There is a curious tendency, particularly marked in American cultural anthropology, to combine elements of the post-modernist programme with a radical political engagement. Though insisting that nothing can be known for certain, and certainly that ethnographers have no independent authority, some argue that nevertheless authentic - and preferredm - native voices may be identified, articulating the genuine sentiments and aspirations of a people. This premiss opens the way for an obvious challenge: if it is true, then only the native can speak for the native. The foreign ethnographer would then be merely an interpreter, a medium. As the study of ethnicity moves to the centre of the anthropological agenda, these assumptions must be urgently questioned. That requires a reassessment of the nature and purpose of ethnography.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2804342
Journal Title: Man
Publisher: Royal Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland
Issue: i330184
Date: 6 1, 1990
Author(s): Carrithers Michael
Abstract: Sociocultural anthropology and evolutionary biology have reached the point at which it is possible to give a coherent and synthetic account of the origins of human cultural variability. From a sociocultural perspective what must be explained is not just the fact of varying cultures and societies, but also the human capacity to create, maintain and alter social forms over time. From a biological perspective we have to ask, what is the selective advantage of such variability? The answer lies in human sociality. Sociality consists in a package of social intellectual capacities-higher order intentionality, pedagogy, narrativity, crativity, speech-which made possible an increasing division of labour. But as these capacities grew, they gave rise to distinctively human (rather than Darwinian) history, that is to the forms of social, political, economic and cultural causation which create ever new variations on the theme of social existence.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2804560
Journal Title: Speculum
Publisher: The Mediaeval Academy of America
Issue: i333021
Date: 4 1, 1946
Author(s): Gilson Gerhart B.
Abstract: Letter to André Fontainas of March, 1899, Lettres de Gauguin à sa femme et à ses amis (Paris,
1946), p. 288
Letter to André Fontainas of March, 1899
288
Lettres de Gauguin à sa femme et à ses amis
1946
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2854972
Journal Title: Speculum
Publisher: Medieval Academy of America
Issue: i337890
Date: 10 1, 1980
Author(s): Wimsatt Linda
Abstract: Middleton, 127-36
127
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2865344
Journal Title: Nineteenth-Century Literature
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: i345794
Date: 12 1, 1909
Author(s): James Kevin
Abstract: Henry
James, The Wings of the Dove, 2 vols., vols. 19-20 of the New York Edition [New York:
Charles Scribner's Sons, 1909], II, 226).
James
226
II
The Wings of the Dove
1909
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2903145
Journal Title: Speculum
Publisher: Medieval Academy of America
Issue: i346021
Date: 7 1, 1956
Author(s): HaackAbstract: Newsweek, January 30, 1956, p. 56.
January 30
56
Newsweek
1956
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2903882
Journal Title: Nineteenth-Century Literature
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: i348147
Date: 12 1, 1997
Author(s): Weltman Sharon Aronofsky
Abstract: Ruskin's complex attitude toward women has long been important to feminist and Victorian studies; over a quarter-century ago Kate Millett published Sexual Politics and its famous attack on Ruskin's essay "Of Queens' Gardens." She charged Ruskin with promoting a sugar-coated but perfidious system of separate spheres for men and women. Yet shortly after Ruskin produced that idealized vision of housewife-queens in 1865, he created a new ideal queen in his mythological study The Queen of the Air (1869), this time elaborated from Athena. Through his mythopoesis, Ruskin disrupts both conventional gender categories and his own implication in them. Ruskin presents a series of binary oppositions that he immediately conflates: Athena and Medusa, air and earth, bird and snake, formation and destruction, science and myth, male and female. Ruskin documents the instability of his oppositions through a bizarre "natural language" where real-life creatures such as birds and snakes serve as eternal hieroglyphs, signifying universally recognizable abstractions. That seemingly fixed signs in Athena's hieroglyphic code inevitably change is clear from Ruskin's acknowledgment of Darwin's evolutionary theory. But evolution slips into a wild image of degenerative metamorphosis, where all the divisions that Ruskin has so laboriously noted dissolve. Since Ruskin identifies Athena with each seemingly opposed animal signifier in his language of living hieroglyphs, he subverts all linguistic difference and ultimately feminizes signification itself. Through myth Ruskin creates a mutable language, one where genders as well as signs become mobile rather than fixed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2933999
Journal Title: Irish University Review
Publisher: Irish University Review
Issue: i29777260
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): Lin Yu-chen
Abstract: This essay explores the drama of selfhood and the attendant problem of ethics in Brian Friel's Faith Healer. Drawing from the tenets of Freudian psychoanalysis, I scrutinize the protagonist's narrative identity through fissures created by the discrepancy between his story and the other two characters' versions. These crevices register the protagonist's post-traumatic affects for an uncanny home, which, intertwined with his equally uncanny talent to become the place of trauma, compels him to return time and again instead of acknowledging its loss. Symptomatically, in his fixation on an uncanny home in order to disavow its loss, the protagonist sutures his privation, to such an extent that he not only bars memory exchange with other characters, but appropriates them into a master narrative. Given the fact that the three characters' stories are addressed to invisible auditors who converge with the play's actual audience, the healer's final act of authority is limited as long as it is subject to the audience's interpretation of his memory narrative. In its appeal to the audience's decision on ethical justice for the healer's narrative imagination among multiple proposals, this play is an exercise of poetical ethics of memory.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/29777267
Journal Title: Cahiers d'Études Africaines
Publisher: École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i29782767
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Giraud Michel
Abstract: Dubois 1998 : 8-9
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/29782785
Journal Title: Social Service Review
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i30011441
Date: 3 1, 1981
Author(s): White Sheldon H.
Abstract: The rhetoric of social work often seeks its legitimacy and authority on the idea that knowledge can be translated into skills. Knowledge is made in universities in the form of timeless, objective, context-free truths about people and social institutions. Such knowledge rationalizes and justifies the professional practices of social work. It is not clear, however, that the knowledge-into-skills story fully explains social work practices. Practice is often ineffective and tends to throw social workers into moral quandaries, leaving them to practice in a context of faith and doubt. In addition to skills, social workers share values, purposes, the wielding of and submission to power, and mythic stories. Timely, value-expressive, contextual knowledge helps social work to create and maintain social solidarity and to shift its dispositions of skills, purposes, power, and myth to keep up with the pace of social change.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30011443
Journal Title: Social Service Review
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i30012379
Date: 12 1, 1988
Author(s): Cohler Bertram J.
Abstract: Particular problems are posed in the study of lives since the course of life may be less continuous and predictable than sometimes assumed. Further, the most important aspect of developmental study may be the subjectively constructed narrative of development, or life history, which itself changes over personal and historical time. Following the interpretive approach pioneered by Dilthey, Weber, Freud, and, more recently, Ricoeur, Taylor, and others, lives may be considered as texts to be studied in a systematic manner. The concept of empathy as formulated within the clinical situation, and applied most recently to study of biography, may also foster understanding of changes over time in the life history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30012382
Journal Title: International Review of the Aesthetics and Sociology of Music
Publisher: Department for Music and Musicology of the Croatian Academy of Sciences and Arts, Croatian Musicological Society, Music Academy of the University of Zagreb
Issue: i30032155
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): Human Suzanne de Villiers
Abstract: Sollers's L'Écriture
et l'expérience des limites (Paris: Editions du Seuil, 1968: 122)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30032165
Journal Title: British Journal of Sociology of Education
Publisher: Routledge, Taylor & Francis Group
Issue: i30036245
Date: 11 1, 2007
Author(s): Westlund Ingrid
Abstract: Recently, a five-year trial period without a set timetable for compulsory school education in 79 municipalities was concluded in Sweden. The overall idea of the trial was to facilitate local participation, local time governance and flexible learning. Within the pilot trial, each individual pupil's school activities were supposed to be designed to suit his/her needs, interests and prerequisites. This article examines how teachers, principals and students describe students' schoolwork as being located in the intersection between school/home, work/leisure, time/task and individual/collective spheres. Three empirical studies indicate that the essential part of new temporal habits of school concerns a reconstructed task orientation. Time has been taken into the service of tasks and clocktime is not always a taken for granted regulator in educational settings. Potential disadvantages with a more task-oriented education are also discussed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30036255
Journal Title: The Crane Bag
Publisher: The Crane Bag
Issue: i30059451
Date: 1 1, 1978
Author(s): Kearney Richard
Abstract: Mircea Eliade, Myths, Dreams, Mysteries,
p. 27
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30059472
Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: Editions de l'Ecole des hautes etudes en sciences sociales
Issue: i30128872
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Lassave Pierre
Abstract: Nouveau Testament à l'Université de Heidelberg, Gerd Theissen, né en
1943
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30128876
Journal Title: Monatshefte
Publisher: University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i30153101
Date: 12 1, 1988
Author(s): McDonald William C.
Abstract: Wendy A. Bie, "Dramatic Chronology in 'Troilus and Criseyde'," English Language
Notes 14 (1976): 13.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30153106
Journal Title: Osiris
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i213340
Date: 1 1, 1983
Author(s): Ricoeur Dominique
Abstract: Rancière, Les noms de l'histoire (cit.
n. 23).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/301969
Journal Title: Revista Hispánica Moderna
Publisher: Hispanic Institute, Columbia University
Issue: i30203516
Date: 12 1, 1998
Author(s): Aggor F. Komla
Abstract: Artaud opts for lunacy,
Nieva always emerges with "la risa" in the midst of tragedy (Barrajón 16)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30203531
Journal Title: Revista Hispánica Moderna
Publisher: Hispanic Institute, Columbia University
Issue: i30207958
Date: 12 1, 2001
Author(s): Garlinger Patrick Paul
Abstract: Derrida's well-known analysis of the link
between "genre" and "gender" in "The Law of Genre."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30207972
Journal Title: Keats-Shelley Journal
Publisher: Keats-Shelley Association of America
Issue: i30210332
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): Murphy John F.
Abstract: Reading Paul de Man Reading, ed., Lindsay Walters and Wlad
Godzich (Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1989), 155-70
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30210343
Journal Title: International Journal of the Classical Tradition
Publisher: Transaction Periodicals Consortium
Issue: i30222610
Date: 4 1, 2000
Author(s): Forsyth Neil
Abstract: God who can both love and hate (1.5 - 8.32)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30222613
Journal Title: Japanese Journal of Religious Studies
Publisher: Nanzan Institute of Religion and Culture
Issue: i30233773
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Leighton Taigen Dan
Abstract: MORRELL 1987, pp. 47-48, 103-22
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30233778
Journal Title: Japanese Journal of Religious Studies
Publisher: Nanzan Institute of Religion and Culture
Issue: i30233809
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Bathgate Michael
Abstract: BAKHTIN 1981, 252
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30233813
Journal Title: The Art Bulletin
Publisher: College Art Association of America
Issue: i354091
Date: 3 1, 1995
Author(s): Hung Robert S.
Abstract: idem, Monumentalzty in Early Chinese Art and
Architecture, Stanford, Calif., 1995, 18-24
Hung
18
Monumentalzty in Early Chinese Art and Architecture
1995
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3046228
Journal Title: The Art Bulletin
Publisher: College Art Association of America
Issue: i354352
Date: 12 1, 1984
Author(s): Geertz Larry
Abstract: Time and Narrative, i, Chicago, 1984
i
Time and Narrative
1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3051038
Journal Title: The Art Bulletin
Publisher: College Art Association of America
Issue: i354368
Date: 9 1, 1953
Author(s): Auerbach Alfred
Abstract: Manipulations of time, ranging between moments and centuries, pervade Rogier van der Weyden's Columba Altarpiece. They occur mainly among elements that have been considered forthright iconographic details or unremarkable scenery, including a cityscape, the star of the Magi, a figure among the Magi's followers, and a beggar. While several such temporal expressions find interpretive resonance in Scripture, patristic commentary, and sermons, their collaborative density in the altarpiece contrives a uniquely animated structure of meaning. Among unusual visual alignments that solicit exegetical attention from an observer, precisely charged relationships project backward and forward through history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3051299
Journal Title: Yale French Studies
Publisher: Yale University Press
Issue: i355552
Date: 1 1, 1971
Author(s): Proust Christie
Abstract: Marcel Proust, Jean Santeuil (Paris: Gallimard, 1971), 659.
Proust
659
Jean Santeuil
1971
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3090583
Journal Title: Sociological Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i356211
Date: 11 1, 2001
Author(s): Zelizer Roger
Abstract: Derrida (1998)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3108617
Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: Telos Press
Issue: i356660
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Adorno Michael
Abstract: Theodor W. Adorno, Problems of Moral Philosophy, ed. Thomas SchriSder,
trans. Rodney Livingstone (Stanford: Stanford UP, 2000) 70.
Adorno
70
Problems of Moral Philosophy
2000
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3115175
Journal Title: The American Political Science Review
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i356737
Date: 9 1, 1999
Author(s): Wendt Tim
Abstract: Huntington 1991, esp. 85ff
85
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3117924
Journal Title: The Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i357335
Date: 9 1, 1981
Author(s): Wolff Robert
Abstract: In his book, Art and agency, Alfred Gell presents a theory of art based neither on aesthetics nor on visual communication. Art is defined by the distinctive function it performs in advancing social relationships through 'the abduction of agency'. Art objects are indexes of the artist's or model's agency. This article examines Gell's use of agency, particularly in relation to the ritual art that is central to his argument. Focusing on Gell's employment of Peirce's term 'index' (out of his triad of index, icon, and symbol), I note that Peirce's approach deflects attention from signification towards the link between art works and the things to which they refer. I consider what Peirce meant by abduction, and conclude that while Gell makes a good case for the agency of art objects he does not explain the distinctive ways in which art objects extend their maker's or user's agency. Gell lacked the time to make detailed revisions before publication and I acknowledge that, given more time, he might have revised some parts of the book. / Dans son livre Art and Agency, Alfred Gell présente une théorie de l'art qui ne se base ni sur l'esthétique, ni sur la communication visuelle. Il définit l'art par sa fonction distinctive dans l'établissement de relations sociales, par «l'abduction de l'intentionnalité (agency)». Les objets d'art sont des index de l'intentionnalité de l'artiste ou du modèle. Le présent article analyse l'utilisation par Gell de l'intentionnalité, notamment dans le cadre de l'art rituel qui constitue un axe central de son raisonnement. En se concentrant sur l'usage par Gell du terme «index» de Peirce (dans la trichotomie index, icône, symbole), l'auteur note que l'approche de Peirce prête moins d'attention à la signification qu'au lien entre les œuvres d'art et les objets auxquels elles font référence. Il examine ce que Peirce entendait par «abduction» et en conclut que si Gell s'en tire bien sur l'intentionnalité des objets d'art, il n'explique pas de quelle manière distinctive ceux-ci prolongent l'intentionnalité de leur créateur ou de leur utilisateur. Gell n'a pas eu le temps d'apporter des révisions détaillées à son ouvrage avant publication, et l'auteur estime que s'il avait eu davantage de temps, il en aurait peut-être remanié certaines parties.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3134597
Journal Title: Curriculum Inquiry
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers, Inc.
Issue: i359619
Date: 4 1, 1996
Author(s): Trapedo-Dworsky Carola
Abstract: Describing how my way of being in the world hindered or advanced my research, I suggest that a researcher's quality of life and mode of narrative inquiry may be closely related. The outcome seems to hinge on the inquirer's relationship to time and place in life and research. As all human beings, researchers use narrative to structure temporal complexity, only to find that this use contributes a complexity of its own. Efforts to overcome either pervade our lives as well as our forms of inquiry. I specify how such efforts endanger narrative inquiry, both in research and teacher education, and I struggle to find a language that accommodates a contextualized, narrative self as it reaches out to culturally shared conditions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3185899
Journal Title: Curriculum Inquiry
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers, Inc.
Issue: i360632
Date: 4 1, 1995
Author(s): Tobias Arati
Abstract: The combined works of John Dewey and Jerome Bruner provide a framework spanning a century of educational thought which can inform curriculum decisions concerning students' educational development, especially for middle school students whose waning of motivation toward school has been well documented by researchers and has long concerned parents and teachers. This framework, combined with recent contributions of motivation and interest researchers, can create broad understandings of how to collaboratively construct effective educational contexts. As early as 1913, Dewey specifically looked at the pivotal role of students' genuine interests in Interest and Effort in Education. Our current research focus on how students' interest can inform curricular contexts marks the recent shift showing an increased use of interest in education research since 1990. In this article, we discuss our study of a team-taught double classroom of sixth grade students whose interests were determined through a series of brainstorming sessions, and individual and focus group interviews. Students' interests fell into six categories centering around subject areas such as Drama, Science, and Animal Studies. Learning contexts were constructed around four of these subject areas. Students participated in their first or second choice of subject area group. We found significantly higher scores on measures of Affect and Activation if students participated in their first choice group. We found intra-group unities of preferred and dispreferred ways of learning which distinguished each group from the class as a whole. Finally, our findings indicated that students reliably described their genuine interests over time. Students' interests were found to be effective tools for informing curriculum decisions in the creation of sixth grade learning contexts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3202129
Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Political Science / Revue canadienne de science politique
Publisher: Wilfrid Laurier University Press
Issue: i362030
Date: 12 1, 1976
Author(s): Lane Richard
Abstract: David Lane, The Socialist
Industrial State: Towards a Political Sociology of State Socialism (London: Allen and
Unwin, 1976), 143-74.
Lane
143
The Socialist Industrial State: Towards a Political Sociology of State Socialism
1976
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3227447
Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Political Science / Revue canadienne de science politique
Publisher: Wilfrid Laurier University Press
Issue: i362155
Date: 3 1, 1962
Author(s): Opitz Ellis
Abstract: Opitz and Sebba, eds., Philosophy of Order.
Opitz
Philosophy of Order
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3232806
Journal Title: Polity
Publisher: Northeastern Political Science Association
Issue: i362333
Date: 7 1, 1977
Author(s): Hegel Michael T.
Abstract: Hampshire, p. 271.
271
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3234574
Journal Title: Polity
Publisher: Northeastern Political Science Association
Issue: i362399
Date: 12 1, 1994
Author(s): Levinas Robb A.
Abstract: Levinas,
Beyond the Verse, xvii
xvii
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3235430
Journal Title: Numen
Publisher: Brill Academic Publishers
Issue: i364859
Date: 1 1, 1970
Author(s): Shepherd Hugh B.
Abstract: Shepherd, Introduction to The Diary of a Drug Fiend, Hyde Park: University
Books 1970, vii-viii.
Shepherd
vii
Introduction to The Diary of a Drug Fiend
1970
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3270489
Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i371935
Date: 12 1, 1899
Author(s): Zeilinski R. Drew
Abstract: Maehler (1989)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3301097
Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i371935
Date: 12 1, 1958
Author(s): Wittgenstein Yael
Abstract: Becker (1982: 135-36)
135
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3301099
Journal Title: University of Pennsylvania Law Review
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Law School
Issue: i273470
Date: 4 1, 1987
Author(s): Minow Steven L.
Abstract: Minow, The Supreme Court 1986 Term - Foreword: Justice Engendered, 101
HARV. L. REV.10 (1987)
Minow
10
101
HARV. L. REV.
1987
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3312131
Journal Title: Anthropological Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Issue: i274795
Date: 7 1, 1960
Author(s): Villalta James M.
Abstract: The recent turbulent events in the Middle East indicate the importance and the challenges of uniting citizens in each of these countries in some commonly known story of who they are and from whence they have come. A consciously constructed sense of collective history is one especially fertile ground from which stories of national identity can be drawn. This article interprets a set of symbols displayed in a political drama in one particular Turkish small town. Following Ricoeur's analyses of ideology, it shows how sentiments of national identity are created and maintained in seemingly small ways. The symbols and processes which affirm identity, however, concomitantly disguise and distort other expressions of the historic situation. Although distortions may be the result of benign processes of signification, they may also be manipulated to favor the needs and desires of persons and groups which seek to maintain power and influence.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3317560
Journal Title: Revue française de sociologie
Publisher: Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique
Issue: i274979
Date: 12 1, 1966
Author(s): Vergote François-André
Abstract: C. DuQuoc: op. cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3321166
Journal Title: Revue française de sociologie
Publisher: Editions Ophrys
Issue: i275054
Date: 9 1, 1971
Author(s): Veyne Nathalie
Abstract: E. Goffman, 1974
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3322166
Journal Title: Revue française de sociologie
Publisher: Editions Ophrys
Issue: i275093
Date: 6 1, 1963
Author(s): Wright Dominique
Abstract: Conan (1995)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3323160
Journal Title: Indonesia
Publisher: Cornell University
Issue: i367402
Date: 4 1, 1979
Author(s): Gadamer Razif
Abstract: Hans-Georg Gadamer, "The Problem of Historical Consciousness," in Interpretive Social Science, ed. Paul
Rabinow and William Sullivan (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1979), p. 152.
Gadamer
The Problem of Historical Consciousness
152
Interpretive Social Science
1979
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3351308
Journal Title: Educational Studies in Mathematics
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i277383
Date: 10 1, 1980
Author(s): Wilden Dave
Abstract: This paper examines a theoretical perspective on the ways in which children progress in learning mathematics. It suggests that there is a difficulty in associating teaching discourses with the mathematics they locate. This can result in an incommensurability between alternative perspectives being offered. The paper resists attempts to privilege any particular account but rather demands an analysis of these discourses and their presuppositions. In developing these themes the paper invokes Ricoeur's analysis of time and narrative as an analytical approach to treating notions such as transition, development and progression in mathematical learning. His notion of semantic innovation is introduced. This embraces both the introduction of a new metaphor into a sentence or the creation of a new narrative which reorganises events into a new 'plot'. The notion is utilised in arguing that the shift in the student's mathematical development from arithmetic to first order linear equations with unknowns reconfigures the contextual parameters governing the understanding of these mathematical forms. It is also utilised in showing how alternative approaches to accounting for such transitions suit different and perhaps conflicting outcomes. For example, demonstrating awareness of generality or performing well in a diagnostic test featuring the solution of linear equations.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3483305
Journal Title: The Yearbook of English Studies
Publisher: Modern Humanities Research Association
Issue: i284492
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Martin Steven
Abstract: 'Online' section, p. 3
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3508661
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i369550
Date: 12 1, 2002
Author(s): Rüsen Jörn
Abstract: Jirn Rüsen, Introduction: "Historical Thinking as Intercultural Discourse," in Western
Historical Thinking: An Intercultural Debate, ed. Jörn Rüsen (New York: Berghahn Books, 2002), 1-
14
Rüsen
Historical Thinking as Intercultural Discourse
1
Western Historical Thinking: An Intercultural Debate
2002
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3590639
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i369553
Date: 10 1, 1958
Author(s): Benda A. Dirk
Abstract: Julien Benda, The Betrayal of the Intellectuals (Boston: Beacon, 1958).
Benda
The Betrayal of the Intellectuals
1958
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3590818
Journal Title: Comparative Literature
Publisher: University of Oregon
Issue: i369787
Date: 7 1, 1919
Author(s): Wolf Nathaniel
Abstract: Coren's Sleep Thieves
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3593497
Journal Title: Oxford Art Journal
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i282749
Date: 1 1, 1947
Author(s): Sund Brendan
Abstract: Sund, True to Temperament, p. 146
Sund
146
True to Temperament
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3600432
Journal Title: Oxford Art Journal
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i282749
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Marcus Fred
Abstract: Ben Marcus, The Age of Wire and String
(Alfred A. Knopf: New York, 1995), p. 94.
Marcus
94
The Age of Wire and String
1995
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3600435
Journal Title: Slavic Review
Publisher: American Association for the Advancement of Slavic Studies
Issue: i370063
Date: 4 1, 2002
Author(s): Fabian Maria
Abstract: Ibid., 165.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3650070
Journal Title: Cultural Anthropology
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i370147
Date: 11 1, 1993
Author(s): Young Carole
Abstract: Narratives of the Tibetan resistance army are not a part of national history in the Tibetan exile community. Drawing on stories by veterans of the resistance to the Chinese invasion and the explanations they give of its absence in Tibetan national history, I argue that this history has been "arrested" because of the challenges it poses to normative versions of history and community and, in turn, to internal and external representations of Tibet. This practice signifies the postponing of narrating certain histories until a time in the future when the dangers they pose to sustaining a unified Tibetan community in exile has receded. This practice of historical (un)production offers insight into temporality and subjectivity, plural identities in the face of national hegemony, and why history might be considered a combination of truth, fear, and lies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3651543
Journal Title: Journal of the History of Ideas
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i370271
Date: 4 1, 1963
Author(s): Durkheim Richard
Abstract: "Author's Preface to Pragmatism," Pragmatism and Other
Essays [New York, 1963], 3
Author's Preface to Pragmatism
3
Pragmatism and Other Essays
1963
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3653870
Journal Title: Journal of the History of Ideas
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i370292
Date: 4 1, 1997
Author(s): Phillips Neil
Abstract: Mark Phillips, " 'If Mrs Mure Be Not Sorry for Poor King Charles': History, the Novel
and the Sentimental Reader," History Workshop Journal, 43 (1997), 111-31.
Phillips
111
43
History Workshop Journal
1997
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3654197
Journal Title: Journal of the History of Ideas
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i370306
Date: 10 1, 1970
Author(s): Geertz Albert
Abstract: Diamond, "The Inauthenticity of Anthropology."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3654351
Journal Title: Desarrollo Económico
Publisher: Instituto de Desarrollo Economico y Social
Issue: i370465
Date: 9 1, 1989
Author(s): Martin Mariana
Abstract: N. Loraux, Les mores en deuil, op. cit., p. 69 y p. 21.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3655856
Journal Title: SubStance
Publisher: University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i287917
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Perec H. Porter
Abstract: Assessing the limits of evolutionary and cognitive approaches to the study of culture goes to the heart of an issue that tends to divide humanists and scientists. The issue is how far, in dealing with complex cultural texts and the complex transactions we perform as readers, can we advance by scientific reduction? The issue is vexed by the fact that at times the complexity and novelty of humanistic discourse is little more than obfuscation and strained ingenuity. But such failings discredit neither the search for novelty, nor the earned perception of irreducible complexity, nor the immense importance of work that is necessarily, and terminally, speculative.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3685513
Journal Title: Sociological Analysis
Publisher: Association for the Sociology of Religion
Issue: i288280
Date: 12 1, 1960
Author(s): van Gennep Paul M.
Abstract: A distinction is drawn between theatricality and dramaturgy as modes for interpreting social and religious life. By means of theatricality scholars tend to analyze life as "theater," as "playacting" or "role-playing." Theater is viewed as a metaphor for what "actually" occurs in life. By contrast, dramaturgists interpret life as essentially dramatic in its interpersonal and collective aspects, whether the drama is significant or trivial, good or poor, "genuine" or "theatrical." But there are certain elements and conditions which must be present in order to increase the possibility of the deeper levels of drama. Religious, social and moral life do not routinely achieve these levels, but when it happens the participants and persons in the active audience can recognize the moment as extraordinary, perhaps as an event of awesome significance. It is within these moments that new religious and moral paradigms may arise. At such time role-playing and theatricality are eclipsed but do not totally disappear.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3710121
Journal Title: Sociology of Religion
Publisher: Association for the Sociology of Religion
Issue: i288371
Date: 7 1, 1966
Author(s): WolfAbstract: For the past twenty-five years, a sub-branch of biblical studies has engaged, sometimes rather vigorously, in the pursuit of using sociological methods to understand the Bible. These, often autodidact biblical scholars, have taken over a branch of sociology of religion. The methods they follow in their pursuit of the strange world of the Bible can teach sociology how to retrieve a more critical sociology. The questions they ask would be helpful more generally to sociology of religion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3711745
Journal Title: Sociology of Religion
Publisher: Association for the Sociology of Religion
Issue: i288375
Date: 7 1, 1998
Author(s): Yamane David
Abstract: Josselson and Lieblich 1995
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3712284
Journal Title: The Modern Language Review
Publisher: W. S. Maney & Son Ltd
Issue: i288890
Date: 7 1, 1975
Author(s): FranchAbstract: Juan Alcina Franch and Jose Manuel Blecua, Gramática española (Barcelona: Ariel, 1975)
Franch
Gramática española
1975
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3736997
Journal Title: The Modern Language Review
Publisher: Maney Publishing
Issue: i288905
Date: 4 1, 1998
Author(s): McLaughlin Heidi
Abstract: Martin McLaughlin, Italo Calvino (Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press, 1998), p. 117.
McLaughlin
117
Italo Calvino
1998
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3737815
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290761
Date: 6 1, 1851
Author(s): Carbonnier Jean
Abstract: Nouvelles études évangéliques, Paris,
Marc D)UClOux et Cie, 1851, p. 383 et suiv
383
Nouvelles études évangéliques
1851
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3768838
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290761
Date: 6 1, 1984
Author(s): Gauchet Eric
Abstract: Marcel Gauchet, - Fin de
la religion ? >, Le Débat, janvier1984, p. 154-175
Gauchet
janvier
154
Le Débat
1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3768844
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290799
Date: 9 1, 1966
Author(s): Schreiner Sabine
Abstract: TC fait état de 40 000 signatures à la fin 1966
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3770910
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290812
Date: 12 1, 1997
Author(s): Winock Michelle
Abstract: Serge Moscovici, ≪ Passion révolutionnaire et passion éthi-
que ≫, dans M. Wieviorka (dir.), op. cit., p. 89-109
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3770930
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290798
Date: 6 1, 1993
Author(s): Delage Christian
Abstract: Christian Delage, - Cinema, history, memory., Persistence
of vision (New York), a paraitre
Delage
Cinema, history, memory
Persistence of vision
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3771543
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290798
Date: 6 1, 1983
Author(s): Ricœur Emmanuel
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, Temps et récit, tome 1, L'intrigue et le récit
historique, Paris, Le Seuil, 1983 (Points Essais)
Ricœur
L'intrigue et le récit historique
1
Temps et récit
1983
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3771547
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290836
Date: 12 1, 2000
Author(s): Colas Patrick
Abstract: Documents parlementaires Sénat,
7 décembre 1922, n° 734
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3772064
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290825
Date: 3 1, 1994
Author(s): Conan Jean-Jacques
Abstract: éclaire le décret
du 3 février 1993
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3772126
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290821
Date: 3 1, 1986
Author(s): Ricœur François
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, Du texte à l'action, Paris, Le Seuil, 1986,
p. 391
Ricœur
391
Du texte à l'action
1986
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3772370
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290824
Date: 12 1, 1989
Author(s): Malraux Vincent
Abstract: Andre Malraux, Hommage à Jean Moulin et autres
grands discours, Bry-sur-Marne, Institut national de laudio-
visuel, 1989
Malraux
Hommage à Jean Moulin et autres grands discours
1989
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3772428
Journal Title: The Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i370994
Date: 6 1, 1970
Author(s): Winch David P.
Abstract: The question addressed in this article is how people come to know the foundational axioms of their moral systems as true and correct. Drawing on my fieldwork among the Himba of northwestern Namibia, I argue that the most potent form of intellectual conviction is not generated through the external manipulations of ritual, but through a deeply internal experience in which moral knowledge coalesces with a subjectively perceived experience of timeless universality. / Dans cet article, l'auteur cherche à savoir comment les individus en viennent à savoir que les axiomes fondateurs de leur système moral sont véridiques et corrects. À partir de son travail de terrain chez les Himba du nord-ouest de la Namibie, il affirme que la forme la plus puissante de conviction intellectuelle ne naît pas de manipulations externes dans le cadre de rituels, mais d'une expérience profondément intériorisée au cours de laquelle le savoir moral fusionne avec l'expérience subjective d'une universalité intemporelle.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3804153
Journal Title: Hypatia
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Issue: i290902
Date: 1 1, 1968
Author(s): Wittgenstein Bat-Ami Bar
Abstract: This essay expresses ambivalence about the use of the term "evil" in analyses of terrorism in light of the association of the two in speeches intended to justify the United States' "war on terrorism." At the same time, the essay suggests that terrorism can be regarded as "evil" but only when considered among a multiplicity of "evils" comparable to it, for example: rape, war crimes, and repression.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3811042
Journal Title: Journal of Folklore Research
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Issue: i291342
Date: 4 1, 1992
Author(s): Žižek Sergei
Abstract: The literary epic Lāčplēsis, written in the nineteenth century, was a conscious attempt to create a cultural frame of reference for the emerging Latvian nation. In this article, which examines how poet Andrejs Pumpurs imagined his community, Kruks compares the Latvian epic hero with his Estonian counterpart, Kalevipoeg, who was invented at the same time under similar conditions of domination by Russians and Baltic Germans. Kruks's narrative analysis demonstrates the different frameworks through which social bonds are constructed for the heroes. Kalevipoeg is a pragmatic actor with an explicitly formulated duty; he errs, but he recognizes his personal responsibility. The Latvian hero Lāčplēsis, on the other hand, is not given a clearly formulated duty; he is simply a hero by destiny and definition. As a resource of symbols that feed contemporary discourses, the epic impedes the construction of a modern national identity capable of engendering a civic society through active pragmatic participation. For past generations, Lāčplēsis explained unjust foreign domination. Kruks argues that contemporary Latvian society now seeks a new frame of cultural reference that will permit the construction of a future-oriented national identity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3814743
Journal Title: Huntington Library Quarterly
Publisher: Henry E. Huntington Library and Art Gallery
Issue: i292120
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Jacques A. J.
Abstract: Francis Jacques, Difference
and Subjectivity (New Haven, Conn., 1991)
Jacques
Difference and Subjectivity
1991
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3817676
Journal Title: Victorian Studies
Publisher: Indiana University
Issue: i293966
Date: 7 1, 1983
Author(s): Coward John
Abstract: Rosalind Coward, Patriarchal Precedents: Sexuality
and Social Relations (London: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1983)
Coward
Patriarchal Precedents: Sexuality and Social Relations
1983
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3827465
Journal Title: Journal of Modern Literature
Publisher: Temple University
Issue: i294250
Date: 7 1, 1915
Author(s): Cummings William
Abstract: Affirmations—Vorticism" (14 January1915), Visual Arts, pp. 7-8.
14 January
7
Visual Arts
1915
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3831319
Journal Title: Journal of Modern Literature
Publisher: Temple University
Issue: i294267
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Thomas Richard K.
Abstract: Pictures, pp. 238, 264
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3831545
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i371617
Date: 10 1, 2004
Author(s): Ricoeur Michael
Abstract: Being and Time
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3874129
Journal Title: Feminist Review
Publisher: Palgrave Macmillan
Issue: i371629
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Vindhya Srila
Abstract: Satarupa Sanyal,
Anu (1998)
Sanyal
Anu
1998
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3874385
Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i40000455
Date: 10 1, 2007
Author(s): Sizgorich Thomas
Abstract: Bourdieu, Outline of a Theory of Practice, 192-193.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40008441
Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Scholars Press
Issue: i40000774
Date: 10 1, 1988
Author(s): Jung Patricia Beattie
Abstract: In this essay I argue that childbearing and various kinds of organ donation are morally analogous activities. I argue, further, that the ethos of giftgiving ought to inform our analyses of both of these forms of bodily life support. This reframing of the abortion and organ donation debates yields new insights into two relatively neglected subtopics. First, though frequently asserted, few have demonstrated why bodily life support--especially in the form of childbearing--cannot be morally required. This comparison yields insights into the reasons for such an axiom. Second, while the giving of bodily life support is sometimes exhorted and almost always respected and admired, its intelligibility and political meaningfulness as a moral choice is rarely explored. This analogical wager reveals why one ought to give another bodily life support. In summary, the analogy yields insights crucial to the development of cogent arguments regarding both the grounds for and limits of the responsibility to give bodily life support. Further, the analogy displays the disparity between what has been demanded traditionally of those who are pregnant and of those men (and women) who by virtue of tissue or blood type can offer other forms of bodily life support. The analogy enables reflection on abortion (and organ donation) to develop in a context free of sexist biases. Finally, efforts are made to assess this giftgiving ethos in light of the feminist "hermeneutics of suspicion" regarding arguments which have and can sacralize victimization.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40015096
Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Scholars Press
Issue: i40000783
Date: 10 1, 1996
Author(s): Schweiker William
Abstract: Smith 1983.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40015210
Journal Title: Stanford Law Review
Publisher: Stanford University School of Law
Issue: i40002095
Date: 4 1, 2004
Author(s): Hussain Nasser
Abstract: Clinton L. Rossiter,
Constitutional Dictatorship: Crisis Government in Modern Democracies (1948).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40040179
Journal Title: Review of International Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40003066
Date: 10 1, 2006
Author(s): Roberts Geoffrey
Abstract: E. H. Carr, What is History? (London: Pelican Books, 1964), ch. 5.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40072179
Journal Title: Geschichte und Gesellschaft
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i40005676
Date: 3 1, 1996
Author(s): Raphael Lutz
Abstract: Frankfurt 1976. (franz.: L'ontologie politique de Martin Heidegger, in: Actes de la recherche
en sciences sociales 5-6. 1975, S. 109-56).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40185766
Journal Title: Geschichte und Gesellschaft
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i40005703
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Epple Angelika
Abstract: Koselleck, Darstellung, Ereignis und Struktur, S. 149.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40186008
Journal Title: Geografiska Annaler. Series B, Human Geography
Publisher: Swedish Society for Anthropology and Geography
Issue: i40006783
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Dodgshon Robert A.
Abstract: From the moment it began to engage with time in a considered way, human geography has employed a variety of analytical and conceptual approaches to it. Recent work especially has greatly extended the range of these different approaches by stressing the innate variability of time, leading some to talk of 'multiple temporalities' and to pronounce time as 'uneven' even within the same society. Fractured by such differences over how time may be used and interpreted, the possibility of an overarching concept of time in human geography has long gone. However, this does not prevent us from asking whether it is still possible to produce a coherent review of the differences involved. This paper offers such a review, arguing that setting these differences down within a structured framework can provide a clearer sense of how diverse the debate among human geographers has become and the trends of thought that have underpinned this growing diversity. Among the trends identified, it places particular stress on the shift from objectified interpretations to those dealing with relational forms of lived and experiential time and on how the separation of early discussions of space from those on time, their dimensional stand-off from each other, has slowly given way to a view in which space and time are treated as sticky concepts that are difficult to separate from each other.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40205021
Journal Title: Imago Mundi
Publisher: Taylor & Francis
Issue: i40008710
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Schauerte Paul
Abstract: A comparison of Giuseppe Bagetti's landscape sketches, watercolours, oil paintings and engravings with contemporary maps and the existing landscape reveals that in the creation of Bagetti's landscapes, narrative played a role that differed in cartographic and artistic representations. The comparison also demonstrates that his images were powerful constructions that were more successful in reflecting a narrative of glorious conquest than was possible through cartography. This paper offers a critical examination of Bagetti's representations of Napoleon's northern Italian campaign, which he sketched and painted between 1802 and 1809. Bagetti's paintings were neither pacifist nor an expression of Piedmontese patriotism but instead were inspired by, and constructed according to, a narrative about the conquest that reflected the views of the French authorities. The narrative found expression in formal written instructions from the central cartographical office in the Dépôt de la guerre, Paris, in verbal and written instructions from Bagetti's immediate superior, Jean François Martinel, and in letters personally addressed to Bagetti from the officer commanding the Dépôt. It is clear from a careful reading of the correspondence and from a comparison of Bagetti's paintings with both the present landscape and maps made at the time that Bagetti's disputes with his supervisors revolved around protecting his artistic integrity and reputation rather than resisting the authority of a foreign regime. /// Une comparaison entre les dessins, aquarelles, peintures et gravures de paysages de Giuseppe Bagetti avec des cartes de son temps et les paysages actuels révèle que dans la création des paysages de Bagetti le récit ne joue pas le même rôle que dans les représentations cartographiques et artistiques. La comparaison démontre également que ses images étaient des constructions puissantes qui reflétaient l'histoire d'une conquête victorieuse plus efficacement que la cartographie ne le permettait. Cet article propose un examen critique des représentations des campagnes napoléoniennes en Italie du Nord, dessinées ou peintes par Bagetti entre 1802 et 1809. Les peintures de Bagetti n'étaient ni pacifistes, ni représentatives d'un patriotisme piémontais, mais au contraire inspirées par un récit de la conquête qui reflétait les vues des autorités françaises et construites selon celui-ci. Ce récit se trouvait exprimé dans les instructions écrites de l'office central de cartographie du Dépôt de la Guerre à Paris, dans les instructions verbales et écrites du supérieur direct de Bagetti, Jean-François Martinel, et dans les lettres adressées à Bagetti en personne par l'officier qui dirigeait le Dépôt. Il est clair, si on lit attentivement la correspondance et si l'on compare les peintures de Bagetti avec le paysage actuel et les cartes faites à l'époque, que les discussions entre Bagetti et ses chefs tournaient autour de la préservation de son intégrité et de sa réputation artistique plutôt que de sa résistance à l'autorité d'un régime étranger. /// Ein Vergleich von Giuseppe Bagettis Landschaftsskizzen, Aquarellen, Ölbildern und Druckgraphiken mit zeitgenössischen Karten und der erhaltenen realen Landschaft zeigt, dass bei der Entstehung von Bagettis Landschaftsdarstellungen eine Variante der Ereignisgeschichte eine Rolle spielte, die in seinem Werk zu anderen Ergebnissen führte als bei kartographischen und anderen künstlerischen Darstellungen. Die Vergleiche zeigen auch, dass dabei aussagestarke Bilder entstanden, die die Geschichte der erfolgreichen Eroberungen besser transportierten als es mit den Mitteln der Kartographie möglich war. In diesem Beitrag werden Bagettis Darstellungen der Oberitalienischen Feldzüge Napoleons, die er zwischen 1802 und 1809 anfertigte, kritisch gewürdigt. Seine Darstellungen waren weder pazifistisch noch Ausdruck eines Piemontesischen Patriotismus, sondern Bagetti folgte bei der Konzeption seiner Landschaftsdarstellungen der von offizieller französischer Seite bevorzugten Sichtweise der Geschichte der Eroberungen. Seine Grundlagen bildeten formelle schriftliche Instruktionen der zentralen kartographischen Einrichtung, des Dépôt de la guerre in Paris, sowie mündliche und schriftliche Anweisungen durch Bagettis unmittelbaren Vorgesetzten, Jean François Martinel. Darüber hinaus erhielt er Briefe, die vom Kommandanten des Dépôt de la guerre an ihn persönlich gerichtet waren. Bei sorgfältiger Auswertung dieser Korrespondenz und dem Vergleich seiner Gemälde mit der erhaltenen realen Landschaft und den zeitgenössischen Karten wird deutlich, dass es bei Bagettis Auseinandersetzungen mit seinen Vorgesetzten mehr um Fragen seiner künstlerischen Integrität und Reputation ging als um den Widerstand gegen die Autorität eines fremden Regimes. /// Una comparación de los bocetos de paisajes, aguadas, óleos y grabados de Giuseppe Bagetti con mapas contemporáneos y con el paisaje existente, revela que en la creación paisajística de Bagetti la narrativa jugó un papel diferente de las representaciones cartográficas y artísticas. La comparación también demuestra que sus imágenes eran poderosas construcciones que reflejaban una narrativa de famosas conquistas de manera más acertada de lo que era posible a través de la cartografía. Este artículo ofrece un examen crítico de las representaciones de las campañas napoleónicas en el norte de Italia, que Bagetti dibujó y pintó entre 1802 y 1809. Las pinturas de Bagetti no fueron ni pacifistas ni una expresión del patriotismo piamontés, sino que fueron inspiradas y construidas de acuerdo a una narrativa sobre la conquista que reflejaba el punto de vista de las autoridades francesas. La narrativa encontró su expresión en instrucciones formales escritas desde el centro cartográfico del Dépôt de la Guerre en Paris, en instrucciones verbales y escritas del inmediato superior de Bagetti, Jean François Martinel y en cartas personales dirigidas a Bagetti por el oficial que mandaba el Dépôt. Queda claro, a través de una cuidadosa lectura de la correspondencia y de la comparación de las pinturas de Bagetti con el paisaje actual y con los mapas de su tiempo, que las disputas de Bagetti con su supervisor se centraban en proteger su integridad artística y su reputación más que en resistirse a la autoridad de un régimen extranjero.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40233993
Journal Title: Journal of Southern African Studies
Publisher: Routledge, Taylor & Francis Group
Issue: i40011236
Date: 9 1, 2008
Author(s): Igreja Victor
Abstract: A. Guebuza, at the time Frelimo candidate for the national presidential elections. Domingo, 15 August 2004.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40283167
Journal Title: Annales. Histoire, Sciences Sociales
Publisher: Éditions de l'École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i40011359
Date: 6 1, 2007
Author(s): Dawdy Shannon Lee
Abstract: -Ibid., t. 1, p. 112.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40284757
Journal Title: Annales. Histoire, Sciences Sociales
Publisher: Éditions de l'École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i40011366
Date: 10 1, 2006
Author(s): Lenclud Gérard
Abstract: Gil Delannoi, « Éloge de l'essai », Esprit, 117-118, 1986, pp. 183-187.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40284969
Journal Title: The American Archivist
Publisher: Society of American Archivists
Issue: i40011862
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Tussing Nicholas J.
Abstract: Pietro Balan, Gli archivi della S. Sede in relazione alla storia d'Italia. Discorso recitato nella Pontificia accade-
mia di religione cattolica di Roma nel giorno 5 maggio 1881 (Rome: Fratelli Monaldi, 1881).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40294575
Journal Title: Nueva Revista de Filología Hispánica
Publisher: El Colegio de Mexico
Issue: i40012105
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): Valdés Mario J.
Abstract: Alfred Schutz, The phenomenology of the social world,
Northwestern University Press, Evanston, 1967.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40298965
Journal Title: Nueva Revista de Filología Hispánica
Publisher: El Colegio de Mexico
Issue: i40012112
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Resina Joan Ramón
Abstract: Clarín en su obra ejem-
plar, Castalia, Madrid, 1985, p. 154.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40299118
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014422
Date: 3 1, 1989
Author(s): Borges Paulo Alexandre Esteves
Abstract: para tudo quanto aqui expressamos, St.° Agostinho, De Trinitate. XIII, 13-14, 17-18,
e XIII, 17-18 e 22-23.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40336062
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014423
Date: 3 1, 1990
Author(s): Costa Miguel Dias
Abstract: KRISHNAMURTI, La révolution du silence, Ed. Stock, Paris, 1977.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40336081
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014423
Date: 3 1, 1990
Author(s): de Lourdes Sirgado Ganho Maria
Abstract: E.R.M., p. 127.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40336082
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014462
Date: 9 1, 1993
Author(s): Virgoulay René
Abstract: A. CAMUS, Essais, Paris Gallimard 1965, p. 708.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337044
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014477
Date: 6 1, 1999
Author(s): da Veiga Manuel Alte
Abstract: Na la meditação «em que se pretende não falar de valor», o autor esforça-se por manter um discurso linear sobre o interesse humano de pensar e agir relativamente a um tema tão fundamental, que parece quase impossivel evitar a «petitio principii». Pode-se sintetizar a primeira meditação nestas duas alíneas: (a) O desejo de felicidade é o grande motor da busca de meios para uma vida sempre melhor; (b) O ser humano estrutura a sua ideia de felicidade, vida, meios adequados, objectivos de graus diversos, em função dos conhecimentos de que disōpe. A 2 a meditação reconhece que a neutralidade de discurso da 1a meditação não teve éxito. As palavras são extremamente analógicas e pressupōem um «pensamento e discurso ocultos» , coniventes com o conceito de valor, que se pretendia evitar. O desejo de plenitude da qualidade de vida implica o acto, por vezes inconsciente, de valorização. /// The 1.st meditation aims to maintain a discourse independent of the concept of value. Like in an « Impossible mission», we face a project that easily forces the adventurer to return over his lost pathways in a desert. I. e., falling in a «petitio principii». The result of that l. st meditation could be synthesized as it follows: (a) The desire of hapiness is what forces us to search a better and better quality of life; (b) Human beings structure their idea of hapiness. life, adequate means to various kinds of objectives, according to their available knowledge. The 2. nd meditation recognizes the failure of the searched neutral discourse in the l. st meditation: its words and concepts exemplify a very deep analogy and reveal an occult system of thought and discourse, where the notion of value is unmistakably implicated. The desire of a quality of life in all its richness implies, although some times unconsciously, the act of evaluation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337312
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014479
Date: 12 1, 1999
Author(s): Sacadura Carlos Alexandre Bellino A.
Abstract: H. I. MARROU op. cit, p. 234
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337344
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014488
Date: 12 1, 2000
Author(s): Renaud François
Abstract: Bolgar (1954, 389),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337582
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014488
Date: 12 1, 2000
Author(s): Duque João
Abstract: J. Duque, "Apocalíptica e teologia na pós-modernidade" in: Cendculo 150
(1999)404-425.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337585
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014488
Date: 12 1, 2000
Author(s): Oraa José María Aguirre
Abstract: (Traducción castellana de Manuel Jiménez, José F. Ivars y Luis Martín
Santos, revisada por José Vidal Beneyto Conocimiento e interés, Madrid, Taurus, 1982,
pp. 314-315).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337587
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014491
Date: 9 1, 2001
Author(s): Caffarena José Gómez
Abstract: (o .c. nota 51),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337637
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014491
Date: 9 1, 2001
Author(s): Queiruga Andrés Torres
Abstract: De hecho, en una ocasión he hablado ya de "finitud histórica" (El Dios de Jesús. Aproxi-
mación en cuatro metáforas, ed. Sal Terrae, Santander 1991, 25).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337641
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014492
Date: 12 1, 2001
Author(s): Tilliette Xavier
Abstract: Is.53.7
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337652
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014492
Date: 12 1, 2001
Author(s): Splett Jörg
Abstract: Joh 16, 23],
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337654
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014496
Date: 12 1, 2002
Author(s): Pellegrini Angelo
Abstract: HD 71-72, nn. 57-58.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337721
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014497
Date: 6 1, 2003
Author(s): Borges-Duarte Irene
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, "La Psychanalyse et le mouvement de la culture contemporaine", Le
Conflit des Interprétations, Paris, Seuil, 1969.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337738
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014497
Date: 6 1, 2003
Author(s): Drawin Carlos Roberto
Abstract: Heidegger, Martin. Unterwegs zur Sprache. Pfullingen, Güther Neske, 1971, p. 159.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337739
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014497
Date: 6 1, 2003
Author(s): Casalla Mario
Abstract: G.I. Roth, FCE,
México, 1954,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337740
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014497
Date: 6 1, 2003
Author(s): Frick Eckhard
Abstract: Arguing that the times of scientistic criticism of psychoanalysis are past and that psychoanalysis is now open to new intellectual and scientific horizons, the article aims at showing how the recent developments of neurobiology, cognitive psychology, as well as new theories of therapeutic change in psychoanalysis support a reformulation of the psychoanalytic unconscious. The author defends that the obvious terminological confusion between the neurobiological and cognitive non-conscious on the one hand and the dynamic unconscious, on the other, require clear definitions of differences and of commonalities. Furthermore, the author also develops the idea that the dimensions of awareness and of selfascription (avowal/disavowal) help to determine what is the core of the dynamic unconscious, even though the cognitive non-conscious and the psychoanalytic unconscious overlap to a great extent. The article shows, finally, how a new interdisciplinary consensus offers now a chance for us to recognize the shortcomings of a rationalistic philosophy of mind. /// Argumentando que os tempos de uma crítica da psicanálise a partir do cientismo já passaram e que a psicanálise está agora aberta a novos horizontes intelectuais e científicos, o artigo pretende mostrar até que ponto os desenvolvimentos mais recentes da neurobiologia, da psicologia cognitiva bem como das novas teorias da mudança terapêutica em psicanálise suportam uma reformulação do inconsciente psicanalítico. O autor defende que a óbvia confusão terminológica entre o não-consciente neurobiológico e cognitivo por um lado e o inconsciente dinâmico por outro requerem definições claras das diferenças e dos aspectos comuns. Além disso, o autor desenvolve também a ideia de que as dimensões de conhecimento e de auto-atribuição (reconhecimento/nãoreconhecimento) ajudam a determinar aquilo que constitui o cerne do inconsciente dinâmico, mesmo que o não-consciente cognitivo e o inconsciente psicanalítico se sobreponham em grande medida. O artigo mostra ainda, finalmente, até que ponto um novo consenso interdisciplinar nos oferece agora uma oportunidade para reconhecer as limitações do racionalismo emfilosofia da mente.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337741
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014504
Date: 3 1, 2003
Author(s): Fraga Fernando Aranda
Abstract: Revista de Filosofía de la Universidad de Costa Rica, Volumen XXXVII, N°
91 (Enero-Junio 1999), 41-51.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337881
Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Literatura
Publisher: Departamento de Literatura, Universidad de Chile
Issue: i40015308
Date: 11 1, 1998
Author(s): Dublé Eduardo Thomas
Abstract: Wolfgang Janke: Mito y poesia en la crisis Modernidad/Posmodernidad. Poston-
tologia. La Marca, biblioteca de los confines, Buenos Aires, 1995.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40356921
Journal Title: The High School Journal
Publisher: The University of North Carolina Press
Issue: i40015763
Date: 5 1, 1992
Author(s): Stones Christopher R.
Abstract: Zucker, R. Aronoff, J., & Rabin, A. (1984). Metatheoretical
issues in personology. In R. Zucker, J. Aronoff & A.
Rabin (Eds.), Personality and the prediction of behav-
ior. Orlando: Academic Press, (pp. 1-5).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40364532
Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016225
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Busino Giovanni
Abstract: La démarche scientifique de Vilfredo Pareto. Pour une reiecture du « Traité de sociolo-
gie générale», Louvain-La-Neuve, Cabay, 1981.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40370054
Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016257
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Moor Pierre
Abstract: Moor, p. 217 ss.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40370579
Journal Title: Diderot Studies
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016375
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Mall Laurence
Abstract: « Diderot
apologiste de Sénèque », p. 247-48.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40372830
Journal Title: Annales. Histoire, Sciences Sociales
Publisher: Éditions de l'École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i40016558
Date: 2 1, 2005
Author(s): Sfeir-Khayat Jihane
Abstract: Saum Tamari et Elia Zureik (éd.), Reinterpreting the historical records: the uses of
Palestinian Refugee archives for social science research and policy analysis, Jerusalem, Institute
for Jerusalem Studies/Institute for Palestine Studies, 2001.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40376499
Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: École des hautes études en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i40016681
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Abélès Marc
Abstract: Ils furent édités en langue française par Jean Copans (1975).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40379508
Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: École des hautes études en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i40016681
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Neveu Erik
Abstract: Marie-
Hélène Bourcier (2004),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40379517
Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40017405
Date: 10 1, 2009
Author(s): Simon Bennett
Abstract: Zimmerli, Ezekiel, 2:420-21 : "But the priestly/prophetic witness of Ezekiel 43 still knows
nothing of that terrifying act of God in which he gives himself in his servant, in order to crown his
love, to the unclean world as a pure sin offering (Is 53:10)."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40390027
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40019046
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Vila-Chã João J.
Abstract: Salmann, Elmar; Mounaro, Aniceto (ed.) – Filosofia e mistica: Itinerari di un progetto di
ricerca. Roma: Pontificio Ateneo S. Anselmo, 1997.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419467
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40019046
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Rizvi Sajjad H.
Abstract: Qumml, Mirqat al-asrar in al-Arba'lniyyat, 1 54.2-1 4.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419487
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40019049
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Mooney Edward F.
Abstract: Furtak, Rick -Wisdom in Love, cit., p. 197.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419591
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40019049
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Vidal Dolors Perarnau
Abstract: sks 22 nb12: 134.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419598
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40019049
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Westphal Merold
Abstract: (gwcm 89-90).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419606
Journal Title: Estudios Sociológicos
Publisher: El Colegio de México
Issue: i40019121
Date: 4 1, 1996
Author(s): Tarrés María Luisa
Abstract: Gloria
Carmona de Alva y Pilar Alberti, De la práctica a la teoría del feminismo rural, Red
Nacional de Promotoras y Asesoras Rurales, Documento Mujer Rural número 3, México,
1993.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40420924
Journal Title: Alif: Journal of Comparative Poetics
Publisher: American University in Cairo. Department of English and Comparative Literature
Issue: i376713
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Agina Mohammaed
Abstract: This article constitutes an exploration of Mahmud Darwish's poem, "The Hoopoe," as part of a study on the relationship of myths to culture, in general, and to literature and poetry, in particular. It starts from the hoopoe as a mythical symbol pulling the text in two directions. First, a direction that relates the poem, through time, to the realms of the universe, dream, and poetry, using the language of insinuations and allusions; second, a fictional direction that makes of the the poem-through evocation of previous quest journeys, including texts by Al-Jahiz, Avicenna, Al-Suhrawardi, Al-Hallaj, Aristophanes, and Farid Al-Din Attar-a quest into the depths of the individual and the collective self. Memory, history, and language, culminate in the discovery of the mother-land. Thus, Darwish's poem may be classified as poetry, prose, drama, and epic. It is, in fact, a mixture of all these genres, as well as a literary myth narrating the story of the search for a sacred time-the time of beginnings, and of childhood. /تمثل المقالة حفراﹰ استبطانياﹰ في قصيدة "الهدهد" لمحمود درويش - ضمن بحث في علاقة الأساطير بالثقافة عامة وبالأدب والشعر خاصة - انطلاقاﹰ من الهدهد كرمز أسطوري يتجاذب النص في اتجاهين اثنين: أ- اتجاه جدولي، يصل القصيدة - عبر الزمن - بعالم الكون وعالم المنام وعالم الشعر في لغة اللمح والإشارة٠ ب- اتجاه أفقي قصصي، يجعل من القصيدة - عبر رحلات نموذجية سابقة ومن خلال نصوص حاضرة غائبة للجاحظ، وابن سينا، والسهروردي، والحلاج، وأرسطوفان، وفريد الدين العطار، وغيرهم - رحلة في أعماق الذات الفردية، وفي أعماق الذات الجماعية ذاكرة وتاريخاﹰ٠ تجمع قصيدة درويش بين "الشعر" و"النثر" والمسرحية والملحمة، كما أنها أسطورة أدبية تقص علينا قصة بحث عن زمن مقدس هو زمن البدايات والطفولة٠
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4047433
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40021726
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Mercier Charles
Abstract: René Rémond, La Règle et le consentement, op. cit., p. 106.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40495932
Journal Title: Albion: A Quarterly Journal Concerned with British Studies
Publisher: Appalachian State University
Issue: i386779
Date: 12 1, 1975
Author(s): Kureishi Stephen
Abstract: As You Like It (London, 1975), II.iv, 15.
15
As You Like It
1975
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4052032
Journal Title: Revue d'Histoire littéraire de la France
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40023051
Date: 2 1, 1990
Author(s): Ravis-Françon Suzanne
Abstract: Chroniques du Bel Canto, le chant de
Fougère dans La Mise à mort, et ce passage du Cahier noir, op. cit., p. 36 : "Qu'on rie si l'on
veut de l'imagination de l'amour qui se rencontre au théâtre.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40529967
Journal Title: Revue d'Histoire littéraire de la France
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40023147
Date: 9 1, 2004
Author(s): Méra Brigitte
Abstract: Corn Ajouts, Lettres intimes, L'Imaginaire, Préface et notes d'A. Dupont, 1963, p. 85.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40535191
Journal Title: Revista CIDOB d'Afers Internacionals
Publisher: Centre d'Informació Documentació Internacionals a Barcelona
Issue: i40023956
Date: 5 1, 1997
Author(s): Pinxten Rik
Abstract: We presented a model which describes the field of questions on identity as a field of dynamics. It is structured by means of particular, temporal configurations of identity through time and space. The theory of dynamic systems provides us with precise models for the representation of forms of identity, or of their evolution towards types of so-called chaos, given certain conditions. The model allows us to work in a comparative perspective, which is a sure advantage in conflict analysis. The complexity of identity phenomena is captured covering individual, group and community dynamics of identity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40550305
Journal Title: Revista CIDOB d'Afers Internacionals
Publisher: Centre d'Informació Documentació Internacionals a Barcelona
Issue: i40023956
Date: 5 1, 1997
Author(s): Pinxten Rik
Abstract: We presented a model which describes the field of questions on identity as a field of dynamics. It is structured by means of particular, temporal configurations of identity through time and space. The theory of dynamic systems provides us with precise models for the representation of forms of identity, or of their evolution towards types of so-called chaos, given certain conditions. The model allows us to work in a comparative perspective, which is a sure advantage in conflict analysis. The complexity of identity phenomena is captured covering individual, group and community dynamics of identity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40550313
Journal Title: Musurgia
Publisher: ESKA Editions
Issue: i40024525
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Kosmicki Guillaume
Abstract: P. Tagg, « From refrain to rave : the decline of figure and the rise of ground », Popular Music 13/2,
Cambridge, Cambridge University Press, 1994, p. 209-222.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40567119
Journal Title: Revista CIDOB d'Afers Internacionals
Publisher: Centre d'Informació Documentació Internacionals a Barcelona
Issue: i40025242
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): de Barros Laan Mendes
Abstract: Vivimos en un contexto de disolución de fronteras en múltiples aspectos, de convergencia e hibridación de tecnologías, de medios de comunicación y de culturas. El contexto es de redimensionamiento del tiempo práctico, de los desplazamientos y de las relaciones entre lo local y lo global. En estos tiempos de interculturalidad, la comunicación juega un rol muy importante; no tanto en su dimensión mediática tecnológica, sino en especial en las dinámicas de mediaciones culturales que se desdoblan de las relaciones mediatizadas. Este trabajo pretende reflexionar sobre las transformaciones de los procesos comunicacionales en la contemporaneidad, marcados por fuertes movimientos de hibridación, así como pensar la interculturalidad en el contexto de las mediaciones culturales, a partir de autores latinoamericanos en diálogo con autores franceses. También, a partir de material de los medios, se presentarán ilustraciones del escenario cultural brasileño, que está marcado por una larga historia de hibridación, llena de dinámicas interculturales. We live in a context of borders that are dissolving in many senses, of the convergence and hybridisation of technologies, mass media and cultures. The context is the resizing of practical time, of movements and links between the local and the global. In these times of interculturality, communication plays a very important role; not so much in its technological media dimension, but particularly in the dynamics of cultural mediations that are dividing off from mediatised relations. This article aims to reflect on the transformations in present-day communication processes, marked by strong movements of hybridisation, as well as examining how to consider interculturality in the context of cultural mediations, based on dialogue between Latin American and French authors. Also, using media material, the article presents illustrations of the Brazilian cultural scene, which is marked by a long history of hybridisation that is filled with intercultural dynamics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40586507
Journal Title: Recherche et Applications en Marketing
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de Grenoble
Issue: i40025452
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Marion Gilles
Abstract: Floch (1995, pp. 38-41) et
Corcuff (2001, pp. 98-100)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40589364
Journal Title: Musurgia
Publisher: ESKA Editions
Issue: i40025520
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): GRABÓCZ Márta
Abstract: J. Ujfalussy cité en note 5.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40591026
Journal Title: Curriculum Inquiry
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40026362
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): SCHUBERT WILLIAM H.
Abstract: Schultz (2008)
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1467-873X.2009.00468.x', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any
Journal Title: Cités
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40027207
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Larcher Silyane
Abstract: Christine Chivallon, « La naissance d une
paysannerie », France-Antilles, hors-série, Cent
cinquantenaire de l'abolition de l'esclavage.
1848-1998, Fort-de-France, mai 1998, p. 48-
49. C'est nous qui soulignons.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40621278
Journal Title: Studies in East European Thought
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40027959
Date: 3 1, 2010
Author(s): Augustyn Leszek
Abstract: Cioran (1995), p. 1047.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40646263
Journal Title: Historia Social
Publisher: Centro de la UNED Alzira-Valencia, Instituto de Historia Social
Issue: i40028534
Date: 1 1, 1992
Author(s): Paniagua Javier
Abstract: J. García Oliver, El eco de
los pasos..., pág. 190.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40657946
Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030250
Date: 12 1, 1975
Author(s): Albou Paul
Abstract: Chandessais, La stratégie des besoins,
Journées de Vaucresson, op. cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40689735
Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030262
Date: 12 1, 1981
Author(s): Durand Gilbert
Abstract: « Structure et fonction récurrentes de la ligure de
Dieu », in Éranos Jahrbuch, n° 37, Zurich, Rhein Verlag, 1970.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40689960
Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030268
Date: 6 1, 1985
Author(s): Gras Alain
Abstract: Gore Vidal, Création,
Grasset, 1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40690123
Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030285
Date: 12 1, 1992
Author(s): Lazar Judith
Abstract: F. Chazel in Revue française de Sociologie.
1983, XXIV, p. 369-393.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40690513
Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030297
Date: 6 1, 1998
Author(s): Leclerc-Olive Michèle
Abstract: L'entretien biographique de Khaled Kelkal publié dans Le Monde
(5 octobre 1995)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40690769
Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030301
Date: 6 1, 2000
Author(s): Moulin Pierre
Abstract: (Mallet, 1998).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40690843
Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030303
Date: 6 1, 2001
Author(s): Guienne Véronique
Abstract: Juaitn Schklar, The faces of injustice, Yale University Press, 1988.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40690880
Journal Title: Monumenta Serica
Publisher: Monumenta Serica Institute
Issue: i40032845
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Kohn Livia
Abstract: Daode jing 50 (Chan 1964, 163):
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40727016
Journal Title: Jewish Studies Quarterly
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i40034232
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Subtelny Maria E.
Abstract: Tishby, Wisdom of the Zohar,
3: 1090-91.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40753349
Journal Title: Caravelle (1988-)
Publisher: Presses Universitaires du Mirail
Issue: i40038176
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): GALLAND Nathalie
Abstract: Ea
Barbarie, Paris, PUF, 1987, p. 24.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40854405
Journal Title: Caravelle (1988-)
Publisher: Presses Universitaires du Mirail
Issue: i40038188
Date: 6 1, 2010
Author(s): LANGUE Frédérique
Abstract: Maité Rico, «La reinvención de la agonía y muerte de Bolívar. El empeño de Chávez
de investigar el 'asesinato' del Libertador desata la polémica entre los historiadores», El
País, 21 de diciembre de 2008.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40855059
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40038933
Date: 5 1, 2010
Author(s): Lampert Tom
Abstract: Ibid., 139-140.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40864442
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40038933
Date: 5 1, 2010
Author(s): Miller Tyrus
Abstract: Given World and Time is a collection of essays that summarizes much of the recent work on the theory of time, including cultural, political, and social conceptualizations of temporality. The grounding narrative of this collection, roughly stated, leads from the German and German-Jewish ideas of a temporality of crisis developed in the 1920s, to the French poststructuralism of the 1960s and 1970s, and concludes with the American syntheses of the 1980s and 1990s. Methodologically, the book weaves together different historical narratives with a new emphasis on their temporal dimension, all seen from the perspective of critical theory and recent cultural critique. However, it is interesting to point out that the majority of the articles do not challenge the classic critical tools of modernism, in spite of the frequent reference to poststructuralist critique. The volume editor has also not acknowledged more recent work that treats similar topics and themes through the application of a radical political critique, most significantly the work associated with biopolitics and the so-called theological turn.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40864445
Journal Title: Canadian Slavonic Papers / Revue Canadienne des Slavistes
Publisher: Canadian Association of Slavists
Issue: i40039131
Date: 6 1, 1998
Author(s): Briker Boris
Abstract: Richards maintains that in Bunin's work
memory of the past has the power to overcome death and preserve love and thus the
boundaries of the personal time (Richards 167).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40869967
Journal Title: Soziale Welt
Publisher: Nomos Verlagsgesellschaft
Issue: i40039483
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Lentz Carola
Abstract: Programms (2005)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40878654
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Philosophie
Publisher: Vereeniging voor Wijsgeerige Uitgaven
Issue: i40039556
Date: 12 1, 1957
Author(s): VERBEKE G.
Abstract: Chesterton, Heretics (aangehaald door W. James, Pragmatism, a new name for
some old ways of thinking. New York, London, Toronto, 1946, p. 3).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40880337
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Philosophie
Publisher: Vereeniging voor Wijsgeerige Uitgaven
Issue: i40039569
Date: 3 1, 1961
Author(s): DE BRIE G. A.
Abstract: Zie
Ueber die Frage einer formalen Existentialethik, in Schriften zur Theologie, II, p. 239.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40880649
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Vereeniging voor Wijsgeerige Uitgaven
Issue: i40039577
Date: 3 1, 1962
Author(s): VERMEULEN E. E. G.
Abstract: Jan Romein, Carillon der tijden, Amsterdam, 1953, 12 v.v.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40880785
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Philosophie
Publisher: Vereeniging voor Wijsgeerige Uitgaven
Issue: i40039581
Date: 12 1, 1954
Author(s): DE VOGELAERE A. V.
Abstract: F. Heiler (Das Gebet, p. 491)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40880906
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Vereeniging voor Wijsgeerige Uitgaven
Issue: i40039582
Date: 3 1, 1963
Author(s): VANSINA Dirk F.
Abstract: HV, 10.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40880933
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Filosoficum der Vlaamse Dominikanen en door het Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte te Leuven
Issue: i40039625
Date: 6 1, 1971
Author(s): ROBERT J. D.
Abstract: H. Lefèbvre, in L'homme et la société, 1967,
3-22, pp. 16-17.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40881917
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Filosoficum der Vlaamse Dominikanen en door het Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte te Leuven
Issue: i40039657
Date: 3 1, 1978
Author(s): VAN DER VEKEN J.
Abstract: RC 155 : „c'est L'Être qui parle en nous plutôt que nous ne parlons
de l'Être".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40883139
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte (K.U. Leuven)
Issue: i40039724
Date: 12 1, 1992
Author(s): Kuiper Mark
Abstract: Léon HANSSEN. W.E.
Krul en Anton VAN DER Lem (red.) (Utrecht, 1991), nr. 1378.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40886742
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte (K.U. Leuven)
Issue: i40039758
Date: 3 1, 1999
Author(s): van Tongeren P.
Abstract: Bijvoorbeeld: H. STIERLIN, Nietzsche, Hölderlin und das Verrückte. Systemische Exkurse. Heidelberg,
Carl-Auer-Systeme Verlag, 1992, 21 χ 13,5, 182 p., DM 36,-.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40888657
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte (K.U. Leuven)
Issue: i40039769
Date: 3 1, 2002
Author(s): De Visscher Jacques
Abstract: Paul Rlcoeur, Le conflit des interprétations. Essais d'herméneutique,
Paris, Seuil, 1969, p. 283-329
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40889206
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte (K.U. Leuven)
Issue: i40039789
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Figal Günter
Abstract: Edmund HUSSERL, Ideen I, Husserliana III. 1, S. 62.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40890094
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte (K.U. Leuven)
Issue: i40039795
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): de Boer Theo
Abstract: Seamus Heaney, De genoegdoening van poëzie, vertaald door Jan EIjKELBOOM, Amsterdam, 1996.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40890370
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40040203
Date: 9 1, 1964
Author(s): Vansina Dirk F.
Abstract: HV, 10.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40900826
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40040261
Date: 3 1, 1979
Author(s): Martineau Emmanuel
Abstract: G. Böhme, Zeit und Zahl (Francfort, Klostermann, 1974),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40901915
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40040318
Date: 6 1, 1992
Author(s): Debru Claude
Abstract: Henri Bergson, Matière et Mémoire, Œuvres, édition du Centenaire, Paris, P.U.F.,
1959, p. 183.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40903219
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40040338
Date: 3 1, 1998
Author(s): Ricœur Paul
Abstract: (ibid.).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40903576
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40040354
Date: 12 1, 2001
Author(s): Villani A.
Abstract: On essaie dans ces pages d'appliquer à la philosophie de Kant et de Dilthey certains concepts en vue d'une perspective critique de l'histoire. La distinction diltheyenne entre explication et compréhension est mise en rapport avec celle qu'opère Kant entre jugement déterminant et jugement réfléchissant. Puisque la majeure partie de la complexité historique ne peut trouver son explication dans des lois générales, on propose une compréhension réfléchissante du récit historique. Mettre en relation le jugement réfléchissant et la compréhension revient à souligner la dimension normative de l'interprétation historique. La perspective anthropologique de Kant fait également place aux jugements préréflexifs, préliminaires sur l'histoire, tandis que l'approche diltheyenne par les Geisteswissenschaften ramène à une conscience reflexive ou autoréférée qui replace l'individu en son temps et en son lieu. D'autres aspects peuvent encore conduire à notre rapport critique à l'histoire : le modèle kantien d'une orientation réfléchissante de la communauté humaine, les limites qu'ilpose à l'interprétation authentique, la conception heideggerienne de l'authenticité historique, l'analyse diltheyenne des systèmes d'influence réciproque comme cadre de l'idée d'une imputation causale singulière chez Paul Ricœur. This essay is an attempt at applying certain concepts to the philosophy of Kant and Dilthey, so as to develop a critical perspective on history. Dilthey's explanation-understanding distinction is related to Kant's distinction between determinant and reflective judgment. Since much of the complexity of history cannot be determinantly explained by general laws, a reflective understanding of the meaning of historical narrative is suggested. To relate judgment and understanding is to highlight the evaluative dimension of historical interpretation. Kant's anthropological perpective also makes room for pre-reflective, preliminary judgments about history, whereas Dilthey's human science approach points back to a reflexive or self-referring awareness that locates the individual in his time and place. Some other aspects may also lead us to a critical approach to history : Kant's reflective orientational model of the human community, the limits he places on authentic interpretation, Heidegger's views on authentic historicity, and Dilthey's analysis of systems of reciprocal influence seen as a framework for Ricœur's conception of singular causal imputation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40903833
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40040355
Date: 3 1, 2002
Author(s): Hunyadi Mark
Abstract: Sylvie Mesure et Alain Renaut, Alter Ego, les paradoxes de l'identité démocratique, Paris,
Aubier, 1999.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40903850
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40040366
Date: 6 1, 2004
Author(s): Abel Olivier
Abstract: R. W. Emerson, La Confiance en soi, Paris, Rivages Poche, 2000, p. 109.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40903987
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40040375
Date: 6 1, 2010
Author(s): Melcer Alain
Abstract: Le Champ de
l'argumentation, op. cit., p. 312.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40904121
Journal Title: Law & Social Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i378430
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): White Stephen M.
Abstract: Devin 2003, 350-62
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4092669
Journal Title: Theory and Society
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40041727
Date: 11 1, 2010
Author(s): Franzosi Roberto P.
Abstract: Franzosi 2004a, pp. 266-269).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40928085
Journal Title: Annales. Histoire, Sciences Sociales
Publisher: Éditions de l'École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i40041831
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Escudier Alexandre
Abstract: R. Koselleck, «Historische Kriterien...», art. cit., p. 67-86, ici p. 86, repris in Le
futur passé..., op. cit., p. 77.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40929925
Journal Title: Annales. Histoire, Sciences Sociales
Publisher: Éditions de l'École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i40041832
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): Anheim Étienne
Abstract: J. Gracq, Au Château d'Argol, ibid., t. 1, p. 5.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40929990
Journal Title: Annales. Histoire, Sciences Sociales
Publisher: Éditions de l'École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i40041832
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): Bouju Emmanuel
Abstract: D. Albahari, Globe-Trotter, op. cit., p. 97
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40929991
Journal Title: Contemporary European History
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40041857
Date: 11 1, 2010
Author(s): GORDON DANIEL A.
Abstract: 50 ans plus tard. . . le réalisme c'est toujours l'utopie, 10 April 2010.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40930576
Journal Title: Cahiers du Monde russe
Publisher: École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i40041890
Date: 3 1, 2009
Author(s): GRIESSE MALTE
Abstract: GARF,f. R-9665,op. 1,d. 205,1. 52-55.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40931325
Journal Title: Cahiers du Monde russe
Publisher: École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i40041890
Date: 3 1, 2009
Author(s): GARROS-CASTAING VÉRONIQUE
Abstract: Forest, La beauté du contresens, p. 310.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40931326
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i378715
Date: 9 1, 2004
Author(s): Zizek Tyler
Abstract: Orsi stresses the "tragic" nature of religious agency and meaning making
(2005: 144, 170).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4094005
Journal Title: Revue Historique
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40042682
Date: 1 1, 1957
Author(s): Léonard Émile G.
Abstract: K. C. Steek, Der evangelische Christ und die römische
Kirche (Munich, Kaiser, 1952, 48 p.).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40948827
Journal Title: Revue Historique
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40042887
Date: 3 1, 1998
Author(s): Bédarida François
Abstract: livre, Objectivity is not Neutrality : explanatory schemes in history, Baltimore, Johns
Hopkins University Press, 1998.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40956185
Journal Title: Revue Historique
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40042931
Date: 10 1, 2007
Author(s): Colantonio Laurent
Abstract: Mary Daly, Revisionism and Irish history. The Great
Famine, dans The Making of Modern Irish History, D. George Boyce et Alan O'Day (eds), op. cit.
(n. 44), p. 86.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40958053
Journal Title: Le Mouvement social
Publisher: Association Le Mouvement Social
Issue: i40042984
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): Mérindol Jean-Yves
Abstract: L. Viry, Le monde vécu des
universitaires ou la République des Egos, Rennes, Presses Universitaires de Rennes, 2006.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40959665
Journal Title: Review of International Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40043093
Date: 10 1, 2010
Author(s): WEBER CYNTHIA
Abstract: Ashley, 'Living on Border Lines', p. 313.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40961963
Journal Title: Rue Descartes
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40043903
Date: 9 1, 1998
Author(s): Bouretz Pierre
Abstract: Emmanuel Levinas, Totalité et Infini, La Haye, Martinus Nijhoff, 1971, p. 232-233.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40978518
Journal Title: Journal of Music Theory
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i40044259
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): Cox Franklin
Abstract: Adorno 1963, 365-437.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40984940
Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40044534
Date: 3 1, 1998
Author(s): Fellous Michèle
Abstract: Le Quilt possède une double dimension, singulière et militante : chaque panneau, chaque nom énoncé lors du déploiement signifie l'unicité de chaque disparu ; mais l'assemblage des patchworks, leur abandon à l'association qui va les recueillir, les assembler et les utiliser pour porter à l'attention du monde entier l'énormité de la catastrophe renvoie à la dimension sociale inhérente au décès de chaque individu mort du sida. Le développement fulgurant du rite du patchwork aux États-Unis s'explique par ce double enjeu et par la réappropriation de symboles fondateurs de l'imaginaire américain. En se réappropriant un symbole commun, le Quilt légitime et réintègre la communauté gay porteuse du projet dans cette société qui l'a niée. The Quilt has from the outset both a singular and militant dimension : each panel, each name mentioned during the unfolding means the uniqueness of each dead ; but the assembled patchworks, their donation to the association which will conserve, assemble and use them to draw worldwide attention to this dreadful disaster refer to the social dimension inherent to each individual having died of AIDS. The extremely rapid development of the patchwork rite in the United States can be explained by these two functions and within the reappropriation of founding symbols of the Americans'world of imagination. By reappropriating a common symbol the Quilt legitimates and reintegrates the gay community, bearer of the project, into a society from which it was rejected. Von Anfang an hat der Quilt eine eigenartige und zugleich militante Dimension. Jeder Teil des Patchworks, jeder Name, der während der Entfaltung ausgesprochen wird, besagt die Eigenartigkeit jedes Gestorbenen. Doch verweisen das Zusammenfügen der Patchworkwerke und ihre Überlassung dem Verein, der sie bewahren, zusammenfügen und verwenden wird, um die Aufmerksamkeit der ganzen Welt auf diese schreckliche Katastrophe zu lenken, auf die dem Tode jedes AIDSkranken inhärente soziale Dimension. Das äusserst schnelle Fortschreiten des Patchworksritus in den Vereinigten Staaten lässt sich durch diese zwei Aufgaben and durch die Wiederaneignung von Grundsymbolen der amerikanischen Einbildungswelt erklären. Durch die Wiederaneignung eines gemeinen Symbols legitimiert und reintegriert der Quilt die homosexuelle Gemeinschaft, die das Projekt trägt, in eine Gesellschaft, die sie zurückgeworfen hat.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40989961
Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40044569
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Raveneau Gilles
Abstract: La plongée sous-marine en milieu naturel est une activité qui modifie l'équilibre et la perception du corps. Les plongeurs – souvent convaincus de pratiquer une activité sans danger – s'exposent pourtant à des risques potentiellement mortels. À partir d'une enquête ethnographique, l'auteur montre qu'en définitive ce sport laisse une place aux transgressions des normes où le risque est progressivement converti en sécurité. Cet arrangement implique d'acquérir la maîtrise des « techniques de neutralisation » du risque, permettant aux plongeurs d'entretenir paradoxalement un système normatif, tout en le « violant ». Il apparaît ainsi que la transgression des normes de sécurité est moins un acte individuel qu'une conduite déterminée par l'organisation sociale de la plongée. Diving in a natural medium modifies the equilibrium and perception of the body. Divers — often convinced to practice a safe activity — expose themselves to potentially mortal risks. On the basis of an ethnographic survey the author shows that this sport leaves room for an infringement of norms where risk is progressively neutralized. This implies that divers master the neutralization techniques that enable them paradoxically to maintain a normative system and to violate it at the same time. Infringement of safety norms thus appears to be an individual act rather than a behaviour determined by the divers' social organization. Der Tauchsport in einem natürlichen Medium verändert das Equilibrium und die Wahrnehmung des Körpers. Die Taucher — die oft davon überzeugt sind, dass sie einen risikolosen Sport treiben — setzen sich potentiell tödlichen Risiken aus. Auf der Basis eiener ethnographischen Studie zeigt der Autor, dass dieser Sport Platz für eine Übertretung der Normen lässt, wo das Risiko allmählich neutralisiert wird. Dies setzt voraus, dass die Taucher die Neutralisationstechniken beherrschen, die sie paradoxerweise ermöglichen, ein normatives System zu erhalten und zur gleicher Zeit zu verletzen. Es zeigt sich, dass die Übertretung der Sicherheitsnormen eher eine individuelle Handlung als ein von der sozialen Organisation der Taucher bedingtes Verhalten ist.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40990897
Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40044579
Date: 6 1, 2009
Author(s): Troller Fenn
Abstract: Cet article examine le concept de la performativité du don dans une communauté côtière ethniquement diversifiée, composée majoritairement d'autochtones sames et de Norvégiens. Inspirée par Mauss puis par Ricœur, l'auteure avance l'idée que la pratique du don revêt une importance capitale dans ces territoires isolés et peut être vue comme facteur d'émergence d'un sentiment de communauté et d'identité. Le don devient un acte performatif de relations et d'ethnicité, et une manière d'aborder la situation postcoloniale dans la région. This article addresses the performativity of the gift in an ethnically mixed coastal community, the population being predominantly indigenous Saami and Norwegian. Taking inspiration from Mauss and later Ricœur, my argument is that giving is highly important in these remote areas and can be seen as a way of creating community as well as identity. The gift becomes an act of performing relations as well as ethnicity and a way of approaching the postcolonial situation in the region. Das Konzept der Performativität des Gebens innerhalb einer ethnisch gemischten Gemeinschaft (Norweger und Samen) an der Küste Norwegens steht im Mittelpunkt dieses Artikels. Inspiriert durch die Theorien von Mauss und Ricœur verfolgt der Autor die Idee, dass das Geben eine wichtige Funktion in isolierten Gemeinschaften übernimmt und zum Aufkommen eines Gefühls von Gemeinschaft und Identität beiträgt. Das Geben wird zu einem performativen Akt unter den Ethnien und zu einer Mittel mit der postkolonialen Situation der Region umzugehen. Artikkelen adresserer gavens performativitet i etniske sammensatte kystsamfunn bestående av samisk og norsk befolkning. Inspirert av Mauss og Ricœur blir det argumentert for at å gi gaver ; er viktig i disse samfunnene og kan ses som konstituerende i forhold til både fellesskap og identitet. Gavebytte er handlinger som relasjoner gjøres gjennom og adresserer etnisk ambivalens, i tillegg til à være tilnærmingsmåter til den postkoloniale situasjon i region.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/ethn.092.0275', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any
Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40044587
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Gensburger Sarah
Abstract: Le titre de « Juste parmi les Nations » est décerné depuis 1963 par l'État d'Israël afin d'honorer la mémoire des non-Juifs « qui ont risqué leur vie pour venir en aide à des Juifs » . Le « Juste » reçoit un diplôme et une médaille par un représentant de l'Etat hébreu lors d'une cérémonie publique où les individus « sauvés » et leurs « sauveteurs » , ou leurs descendants, sont réunis. Cet article étudie comment, à travers cette cérémonie, s'effectue un bricolage entre des « mémoires » véhiculées par des institutions et des individus, Juifs et non-Juifs, résidant en France et en Israël. Comment s'explique le recours à une seule et même pratique de rappel public du passé par des individus dont les récits des souvenirs peuvent diverger ? The title of « Righteous among the Nations » has been attributed since 1963 by the State of Israel to honor « the high-minded gentiles who risked their lives to save Jews » . Each nomination goes with the gift of a medal and a diploma to the nominee during an official ceremony. This public event gathers « rescued people » and « rescuers » and members of each family. In this article, the author studies how, through this ceremony, a « patchwork » between different and plural memories can take place. In a common place and time, the different actors crosses institutions, individuals, Jews and non-Jews, living in France or in Israël. How can we explain the use of a single common practice of remembrance by individuals whose social characteristics are different and whose narrations of the past diverge from each other ? Der Titel « Gerechte(r) unter den Nationen » wird seit 1963 vom Staat Israel verliehen, um an Nicht-Juden zu erinnern, « die ihr Leben riskiert haben um Juden zu helfen » . Der/die Gerecht(e) erhält von einem Vertreter des Staates Israel im Rahmen einer Zeremonie und im Beisein der « Geretteten » ein Diplom und eine Medaille verliehen. Dieser Artikel geht an Hand einer Analyse dieser Zeremonie der Frage nach, inwiefern durch die Übertragung von Erinnerungen der Individuen und Institutionen — jüdische und nicht-jüdische, französische und israelische - ein Patchwork von Erinnerungen entsteht. Im Vordergrund steht dabei die Frage, wie der offizielle Rückgriff auf lediglich eine Vergangenheit zu erklären ist, wo doch von einer Verschiedenheit der Erinnerungen auszugehen ist ?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40991427
Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40044591
Date: 3 1, 2000
Author(s): Mancuso Alessandro
Abstract: Rappelant la spécificité occidentale des valeurs historiques et commémoratives liées au temps « décimal » tel l'an 2000, l'article s'interroge sur des échéances temporelles dont la portée se trouve massivement amplifiée par le tourisme, les médias, les sites Internet, et une attente millénariste qui les transforme en reflet des fautes de l'Occident et des technologies. Des auteurs tels que Ricœur, De Martino, Marramao mettent en avant le temps vécu et reconnaissent que les cultures interagissent avec le temps pour produire des valeurs symboliques qui reflètent leurs propres choix. Aujourd'hui cependant il semble nécessaire de reconnaître la fracture du temps de l'historicisme et de l'humanisme de De Martino, et d'accepter des modalités plurielles et hétérogènes de la pensée, de l'expérience temporelle. The article recalls the Western specificity of historical and commemorative values related to « decimal » time, such as the year 2000. It questions about deadlines the consequences of which are massively amplified by tourism, medias, Internet sites and millenarist waiting and turned into a reflection of Western faults and technologies. Authors such as Ricœur, De Martino, Marramao are interested in the time lived and admit that cultures use time to produce symbolic values reflecting their own choices. But today it seems necessary to acknowledge time fracture in De Martino's historicism and humanism and to accept plural and heterogenous modalities of thought and temporal experience. Der Artikel erinnert an die mit der Dezimalzeit, wie dem Jahr 2000, verbundene westliche Spezifizität der geschichtlichen und Gedenkwerte, und fragt sich über Terminen deren Tragweite massenweise durch den Tourismus, die Medien, das Internet und das Warten auf das Millenium verstärkt wird, die sie in die Spiegelung der westlichen Fehler und Technologien verwandeln. Autore wie Ricœur, De Martino, Marramao interessieren sich fur die gelebte Zeit und erkennen an, dass die Kulturen die Zeit gebrauchen, um symbolische Werte zu produzieren, die ihre eigene Wahlen widerspiegeln. Doch scheint es heute notwendig, den sozialen Zeitbruch von De Martino's Historizismus und Humanismus anzuerkennen und die pluralen und heterogenen Modalitäten des Denkens und der zeitlichen Erfahrung anzunehmen.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40991534
Journal Title: Revista Geográfica
Publisher: Instituto Panamericano de Geografía e Historia
Issue: i40045037
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): Sánchez Darío César
Abstract: Benítez, M. 2003, "La investigación-acción y el rol del investigador en las ciencias sociales", Geo-
demos, 6:147-168, Buenos Aires, CONICET-IMHICIHU.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40996763
Journal Title: Social Studies of Science
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i40045097
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): Schnell Izhak
Abstract: Within the last 2000 years the land demarcated by the Mediterranean Sea to the west and the Jordan Valley to the east has been one of the most disputed territories in history. World powers have redrawn its boundaries numerous times. Since the establishment of the state of Israel in 1948 within British Mandate Palestine, Palestinians and Israelis have disagreed over the national identity of the land that they both inhabit.The struggles have extended from the battlefields to the classrooms. In the process, different national and ethnic groups have used various sciences, ranging from archeology to history and geography, to prove territorial claims based on their historical presence in the region. But how have various Israeli social and political groups used maps to solidify claims over the territory? In this paper we bring together science studies and critical cartography in order to investigate cartographic representations as socially embedded practices and address how visual rhetoric intersects with knowledge claims in cartography. Before the 1967 war between Israel and its Arab neighbors, the Israeli government and the Jewish National Fund produced maps of Israel that established a Hebrew topography of the land. After 1967, Israel's expanded territorial control made the demarcation of its borders ever more controversial. Consequently, various Israeli interest groups and political parties increasingly used various cartographic techniques to forge territorial spaces, demarcate disputed boundaries, and inscribe particular national, political, and ethnic identities onto the land.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40997773
Journal Title: International Journal of Arts Management
Publisher: École des Hautes Études Commerciales
Issue: i40047561
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Cova Bernard
Abstract: The proposition is that arts marketing should be conceived of as a dedicated field of endeavour so that consumers' immersion in the artistic experience occurs even in the case of a "difficult" art work. The focus is artistic experience-related phenomena. The authors introduce the concept of appropriation and then develop an appropriation cycle construct. Empirical research comprises introspective reports on consumer attendance at classical music concerts. The results show that the artistic experience is predicated on multiple rather than one-time immersion, and that full immersion may never occur. The authors conclude that those service elements that affect the way in which consumers experience an arts event should be managed throughout the appropriation process. Les auteurs proposent de concevoir le marketing des arts comme un domaine d'activité spécifique, afin que l'immersion des consommateurs dans l'expérience artistique soit possible même dans le cas d'une œuvre « difficile » . L'accent est mis sur les phénomènes liés à l'expérience artistique. Ils présentent le concept d'appropriation, puis développent un construit du cycle d'appropriation. Ils ont recours à la recherche empirique, soit les rapports d'analyse introspective des consommateurs ayant assisté à des concerts de musique classique. Les résultats indiquent que l'expérience artistique suppose de multiples immersions, non pas une seule, et que l'immersion totale risque de ne jamais se produire. Les auteurs concluent que les éléments du service qui influent sur l'expérience individuelle d'un événement artistique devraient être gérés tout au long du processus d'appropriation. Los autores proponen la idea de que el márketing de las artes debe concebirse como un emprendimiento en sí mismo, a fin de lograr la inmersión del consumidor en experiencia artística incluso en el caso de obras de arte "difíciles". El acento, entonces, está puesto en los fenómenos que se vinculan con la experiencia artística. Los autores presentan el concepto de apropiación y elaboran luego un modelo teórico de ciclo de apropiación. Por otra parte, analuzan los resultados de uno investigación empírica basada sobre los relatos introspectivos realizados por consumidores luego de asistir a conciertos de música clásica. Dichos resultados indican que la experienca artística toma forma con múltiples inmersiones y no sólo con una, y que la inmersión total puede no darse jamás. Los autores llegan a la conclusión de que el proceso de apropiación es el abordaje más idóneo para manejar aquellos elemontos del servicio que afectan la forma en que el consumidor experimenta un evento artístico.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41064841
Journal Title: Revue Philosophique de la France et de l'Étranger
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40048262
Date: 3 1, 2002
Author(s): Brès Yvon
Abstract: Revue philosophique, 2001-4, p. 469.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41098930
Journal Title: Revue Philosophique de la France et de l'Étranger
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40048280
Date: 3 1, 1987
Author(s): Virgoulay René
Abstract: Dialogues avec les philosophes, p. 271-280 ;
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41099898
Journal Title: Revue Philosophique de la France et de l'Étranger
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40048293
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Vieillard-Baron Jean-Louis
Abstract: Marc Fumaroli, Paris-New York et retour. Voyage dans les
arts et les images, Paris, Fayard, 2009.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/rphi.093.0355', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any
Journal Title: Revue Philosophique de la France et de l'Étranger
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40048297
Date: 9 1, 2001
Author(s): David Alain
Abstract: Si la personnalité philosophique de Michel Henry est saluée, son œuvre continue, quarante ans apres L'essence de la manifestation, à ne pas être reçue, ou à ne l'être que sur la base de malentendus. Pourquoi ? Les raisons alléguées peuvent sembler faibles (le ton absolu de Michel Henry, l'indifférence politique ou la sensibilité de droite qu'on lui prête, etc.), elles renvoient (la reconnaissance généralement faite de la « puissance » de sa pensée, ce qui est pressenti avec ce terme, plaident en ce sens) à une autre, plus décisive : la réception n'est pas la réception dans le monde mais la reception dans la vie, de la vie par elle-même – ce qui néanmoins serait la condition d'une politique pour notre temps. If Michel Henry's philosophical personality is indeed hailed, his work goes on, forty years after The Essence of Manifestation, not being received but on the basis of misunderstandings. Why ? The alleged reasons may seem rather weak (e.g. Michel Henry's absolute tone, his so-called political indifference, or his right-winged sensitiveness) ; they refer to another, more decisive, one (what is usually acknowledged as a potency of thought) : reception does not mean reception in this very world, but in life, which nonetheless would be the condition of a new politics of our time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41100650
Journal Title: Revue Philosophique de la France et de l'Étranger
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40048317
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): Vieillard-Baron Jean-Louis
Abstract: « L'avenir, c'est l'autre », p. 64.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41101450
Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40050938
Date: 3 1, 1994
Author(s): Lautier Nicole
Abstract: À partir d'une enquête effectuée auprès d'élèves de Quatrième, Troisième, Seconde et Première, on propose un modèle intermédiaire d'appropriation de l'histoire. En utilisant les classificateurs expérimentés en sémantique cognitive, on peut ramener à deux grandes catégories cognitives, l'identification du texte de l'histoire : l'une de type événement-changement s'inscrit dans un schéma narratif, l'autre de type entité stable dans un intervalle temporel met en œuvre des processus de catégorisation. Les événements, concepts et entités de l'historien ne correspondent pas toujours aux modes de perception des élèves. Ces derniers procèdent par catégorisation naturelle en multipliant les analogies entre des périodes historiques différentes, en ancrant les informations nouvelles dans une pensée sociale. How do secondary school students get in contact with historical texts ? Examples drawn from an investigation are used to present identification processes as a change-event or as lasting entities in a time interval, analogical categorization processes and social thinking rooting.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41148526
Journal Title: Economic and Political Weekly
Publisher: Sameeksha Trust
Issue: i40051074
Date: 2 25, 2011
Author(s): GUITE JANGKHOMANG
Abstract: This paper looks at how "official" memories are produced in state-sponsored public spaces and how a multi-ethnic, multicultural north-east India responded to it. Official memory sites like museums, monuments and memorials not only reflected but also shaped ethnic relations to a great extent. The emerging states in the region have assiduously favoured the historical imagination of a politically dominant community, which is masculine, and remains persistently insensitive to the marginal "others" in the state. This, on the one hand, encouraged the dominant community to assimilate and thereby produced ethnonationalism around that notion of shared pasts. On the other, it generated a sense of neglect in the minorities who responded with vernacular memorials to embody their historical imagination and likewise developed their own ethnic nationalism around it. This parallel rise to prominence of often competing ethnonationalisms within the region, or sometime within the state, has thereby produced violent forms of contestation often dangerously imbued with fissiparous tendencies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41151794
Journal Title: Amerikastudien / American Studies
Publisher: Universitätsverlag C. Winter
Issue: i40051411
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Reichardt Ulfried
Abstract: Hoffmann 280.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41157336
Journal Title: Amerikastudien / American Studies
Publisher: Universitätsverlag C. Winter
Issue: i40051449
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Sielke Sabine
Abstract: Sabine Sielke and Anne
Hofmann, "Serienmörder und andere Killer: Die Endzeitfiktionen von Bret Easton Ellis und Mi-
chel Houellebecq," Anglo-Romanische Kulturkontakte: von Humanismus bis Postkolonialismus,
ed. Andrew Johnston and Ulrike Schneider (Berlin: Dahlem UP, 2002) 283-318.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41158073
Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40051689
Date: 12 1, 1991
Author(s): Legrond Louis
Abstract: Enseigner la
morale aujourd'hui? PUF. L'éducateur. 1991.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41163138
Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053825
Date: 12 1, 1996
Author(s): Lorcerie Françoise
Abstract: L'idée de laïcité n'est pas soustraite à l'histoire. C'est pourquoi il est illusoire de postuler son sens dans l'absolu. Aujourd'hui, comme en d'autres époques, sa valeur politique tend à se polariser sur une opposition binaire entre une acception libérale et une acception anti-libérale dite républicaine. Toutefois, trois traits semblent particuliers aux années 1990 : — une disjonction entre l'acception politique dominante de la laïcité et sa force juridique, gagée par la Constitution et cadrée par des instruments juridiques internationaux ; — l'orientation nationalitaire du débat, pointant vers les populations issues de l'immigration musulmane, et questionnant leur appartenance à la nation ; — enfin, l'inscription du débat dans la problématique globale de la modernisation des formes scolaires, laquelle véhicule à la fois une epistemologie constructiviste et interactionniste, et une éthique laïque ef libérale. Les « affaires de foulards » sont un analyseur de cette complexité. Secularity concept must not be taken away from history. So it would be illusory to think about it as an abstract notion. Presently, as in older times, its political value tends to be focusing on a binary opposition between a liberal notion and an anti-liberal, so-called republican one. However three characteristics are specific of the nineties : — the split between main political meaning of secularity and its strength in legal terms, provided by the Constitution and by international legal tools ; — a debate focusing on nationality issues, with questions related to national belonging or muslim immigrants ; — last, the integration of this debate into the global issue of school modernization, which is concerned with a constructivist and interactionist epistemology and a liberal, secular ethic, as well. « Headscarves cases » are an indicator of this complexity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41200674
Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053874
Date: 9 1, 1999
Author(s): Violet Dominique
Abstract: Les processus complexes et souvent paradoxaux que l'alternance met en jeu chez l'apprenant se révèlent de possibles points d'appui des apprentissages signifiants. Une pédagogie qui ne tente pas de les éliminer amène alors à concevoir le travail de l'enseignant comme un travail de médiation elle aussi paradoxale. Une telle conception de l'alternance, loin d'enfermer celle-ci dans un rapport sclérosant à la tradition et sans pour autant l'en couper, montre en quoi l'articulation d'espaces et de temps contradictoires peut être pédagogiquement dynamique. Ce qui, en retour, ne manque pas d'interroger l'enseignement/apprentissage dans l'école dite traditionnelle. Complex and often paradoxical processes elaborated by the learner in an alternation situation may help realizing relevant learning. When pedagogy doesn't try to eliminate them, teacners'work can be conceived of as a mediation activity equally paradoxical. In such a conception, alternation is not separated from tradition but not blocked by it either. It shows to what extend links between contradictory spaces and periods of time may be educationally dynamic. Which, in return, asks questions concerning teaching/learning in a traditional school.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41201487
Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053884
Date: 3 1, 2002
Author(s): Olry Paul
Abstract: Se former dans le travail apparaît maintenant comme une part naturelle, évidente de l'activité. Les personnes semblent pouvoir spontanément passer d'une posture de production à une position d'apprenant. Étudier les conditions pour se former dans des univers contraints révèle la nécessité de s'ajuster aux délais de la production et au rythme de la formation. Nous désignons par tempo cet ajustement de l'individu aux contraintes temporelles de la production, lui permettant de saisir dans les situations des occasions d'apprentissage. Les exemples fournis, issus de formations qualifiantes dans l'industrie, en proposent une interprétation croisant les dimensions d'engagement personnel et de transformation de l'activité. The "on the job training" seems for everyone, a natural part of the working activity. People would be able to change their point of view to perform the product target and in the same time the goals of training. This article shows that workers have to play with the time constraints to create by themselves a learning situation. We call "tempo" this capacity to catch in the course of the job, an opportunity to learn. From examples taken in the field of the training within industry, we suggest that this tempo depends on personal involvement in the changing or the activity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41201764
Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053911
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Tutiaux-Guillon Nicole
Abstract: Le rapport qu'entretiennent histoire et mémoire à l'école est complexe et ambigu. Jusqu'aux années quatrevingt-dix, il a surtout été posé comme la relation, légitimée ou dénoncée, entre savoirs historiques, histoire scolaire et mémoire nationale. Dès les années soixante, le débat prend en compte le rapport entre le récit national et des histoires régionalistes qui revendiquent une place dans la culture scolaire, au nom des identités et du droit au passé. Cette dernière acception prévaut largement à l'heure actuelle mais cette fois au nom des minorités dépossédées de leur histoire, dès lors qu'elle n'a pas d'expression publique. Dans ces débats, la mémoire serait la forme d'une histoire parallèle, occultée et clandestine ; de leur côté les historiens tendent à distinguer histoire et mémoire. L'histoire scolaire, elle, admet l'histoire mais non les mémoires comme savoir de référence légitime ; pourtant les commémorations et le « devoir de mémoire » s'y invitent de plus en plus fréquemment. De telles évolutions interrogent les composantes de la discipline scolaire : au premier chef les finalités et les contenus mais aussi les pratiques, inégalement connues dans ce domaine et, finalement, les apprentissages souvent plus espérés qu'avérés. The connection that exists at school between history and memory is complicated and ambiguous; it is source of debate and demands which recently intensified with public and political uses. School history accepts history but not memories as good legitimate reference. And yet commemoration ceremonies and the "duty to remember" are more and more in the schools. Such changes question the elements of that school subject: its purpose of building identity and citizenship, its contents and their changes, its teaching practices, not really evenly known in this field, and finally the learning that is more often wished for than actually delivered. La relación que mantienen historia y memoria en la Escuela es compleja y ambigua; alimenta debates y reivindicaciones que recientemente han sido avivados por los usos públicos y políticos de la historia y de la memoria. La historia escolar admite la historia pero no las memorias como saber de referencia legítimo; sin embargo las conmemoraciones y el "deber de memoria" se invitan cada vez más frecuentemente. Tales evoluciones interrogan los componentes de la asignatura escolar: las finalidades identitarias y cívicas, los contenidos y sus renovaciones, las prácticas, desigualmente conocidas en este campo, y finalmente los aprendizajes a menudo más esperados que comprobados. Das Verhältnis zwischen Geschichte und Gedächtnis in der Schule ist komplex und mehrdeutig. Es gibt den Anlass zu Debatten und Forderungen, die die öffentlichen und politischen Anwendungen des Gedächtnisses und der Geschichte neulich haben aufleben Tassen. Die Schulgeschichte duldet die Geschichte aber nicht die Erinnerungen als Maßstab gebendes Wissen, während Gedenkfeier und "Erinnerungsgebot'' (Aufarbeitung der Vergangenheit) immer öfter daran teilhaben. Eine solche Entwicklung stellt die Komponenten des Schulfachs Geschichte in Frage: über seine Zwecke, was die Identitätsfrage und den Bürgersinn betrifft, über den Inhalt und seine Veränderungen, über Praktiken, die in diesem Gebiet oft ungenügend bekannt sind, und schließlich über das tatsächliche Erlernen, das oft eher erhofft als erwiesen ist.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41202424
Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053918
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): Allieu-Mary Nicole
Abstract: Cette note de synthèse souligne la spécificité de la discipline enseignée. L'histoire scolaire occupe une position originale dans le champ des didactiques par la complexité de ses références (production savante, auto-référence scolaire et usages publics de l'histoire). Tendus entre une transmission de connaissances consensuelles et la recherche d'une posture critique, les objets d'histoire enseignés demeurent soumis à des questionnements renouvelés au gré de la demande sociale comme le montrent les récents débats autour des questions mémorielles vives et concurrentes. L'histoire enseignée apparaît ainsi comme un mixte articulant représentations sociales, savoirs privés et connaissances validées. Depuis une quinzaine d'années, des travaux ont permis de mieux cerner le « penser en histoire » et les processus cognitifs spécifiques en jeu dans la classe (temps historique, conceptualisation, problématisation, construction de schemes explicatifs). Des recherches contextualisées ont permis d'explorer les pratiques professionnelles effectives et d'en modéliser le fonctionnement « normal » : une discipline qui privilégie la transmission de savoirs disant la réalité du passé et attachée à la neutralité du texte enseigné ; une discipline qui peine à mettre en cohérence des finalités intellectuelles ambitieuses (outiller le citoyen actif dans la cité de demain) et des activités dans la classe souvent cantonnées à la mémorisation, au repérage et à la catégorisation. Aussi voit-on se dessiner dans les travaux actuels, une problématique centrée sur les écarts entre les intentions et les pratiques. En articulant la notion de soumission aux règles du « contrat didactique » avec les autres modèles théoriques des sciences humaines et sociales mobilisés au sein des équipes de recherche, les travaux menés de manière encore trop dispersée, laissent apparaître des acquis importants qui pourraient être pris en compte dans la formation des enseignants This paper underlines the specificity of the subject taught. School history holds a special position in didactics due to the complexity of its references (scholarly production, self referencing and public use of history). Set in between passing consensual knowledge on and seeking a critical position, school history objects are still under new questioning that changes with social demands as recent debates on actual competing questions related to memory show it. Therefore school history seems to be a blend of social representations, private knowledge and proven knowledge. For fifteen years, works have enabled us to better define "historical thinking" and the specific cognitive processes that are involved in class (historical time, conceptualization, problematization, construction of explanatory schemes). Conceptualized research have allowed to explore real professional practices and model their "normal" functioning: a subject that favours passing on knowledge telling the truth about the past and being attached to using neutral documents; a subject that has difficulty to coherently link ambitious intellectual purposes (preparing active citizens for tomorrow's world) to class activities often limited to memorizing, recognizing and sorting. That is why we can see a problematic develop which is centered on the difference between intentions and practices. Connecting the notion of adherence to the rules of the "didactical contract" to the other theoretical models of human sciences developed within the research team., the work -done in a still too unfocused way -reveals some important acquired knowledge which could be taken into account in teacher training programmes. Esta nota subraya la especificidad de la disciplina enseñada. La historia escolar ocupa una posición original en el campo de las didácticas por la complejidad de sus referencias (producción sabia, autorreferencia escolar y usos públicos de la historia). Divididos entre una transmisión de conocimientos consensúales y la búsqueda de una postura crítica, los objetos de historia enseñados permanecen sometidos a interrogaciones repetidas a merced de la petición social como lo muestran los debates recientes en torno a las cuestiones relativas a las memorias vivas y competidoras. La historia enseñada aparece así como una mezcla que articula representaciones sociales, saberes privados y conocimientos validados. Desde hace unos quince años, ciertos trabajos permitieron delimitar mejor el "pensar en historia" y los procesos cognoscitivos específicos en juego en la clase (tiempo histórico, conceptualización, problematización, construcción de esquemas explicativos). Investigaciones contextualizadas han permitido explorar las prácticas profesionales efectivas y modelizar su funcionamiento "normal": una disciplina que privilegia la transmisión de saberes que dicen la realidad del pasado y apegada a la neutralidad del texto enseñado; una disciplina a la que le cuesta poner en coherencia finalidades intelectuales ambiciosas (preparar al ciudadano activo en la ciudad de mañana) y actividades en la clase a menudo limitadas a la memorización, la localización y la categorización. Por eso se ve dibujarse en los trabajos actuales, una problemática centrada en las diferencias entre las intenciones y las prácticas. Articulando la noción de sumisión a las reglas del "contrato didáctico" con los otros modelos teóricos de las SHS movilizadas en el seno de los equipos de investigación, los trabajos llevados de manera todavía demasiado dispersada dejan aparecer experiencias ¡mportantes que podrían tomarse en consideración en la formación de los docentes. Dieser Bericht unterstreicht die Besonderheit des Schulfachs Geschichte. Geschichte in der Schule hat eine originale Stellung im Feld der Didaktik wegen der Komplexität ihrer Referenzen (wissenschaftliche Schriften, Referenz für sich selbst in der Schule und öffentliche Benutzung der Geschichte). Zwischen der Verbreitung konsesueller Kenntnisse und der Suche nach einer kritischen Haltung hin-und hergerissen, sind die Lehrinhalte in Geschichte nach wie vor je nach sozialer Anfrage einer ständigen Fragestellung ausgesetzt, wie neulich die Debatten um lebhafte und entgegengesetzte Gedächtnisfragen. Die Geschichte als Schulfach erscheint also als eine Mischung zwischen sozialen Vorstellungen, privatem Wissen und bewährten Kenntnissen. Seit etwa 15 Jahren haben einige Arbeiten es ermöglicht, das „Denken in Geschichte” und die kognitiven Prozesse besser einzuschätzen, die in der Schule auf dem Spiel stehen (historische Zeit, Konzeptualisierung, Problematisierung, Bildung erklärender Schemata). Kontextualisierte Forschungsarbeiten haben es erlaubt, die tatsächlichen Berufspraktiken zu erforschen und „normalen” Betrieb zu modellieren: ein Schulfach, das die Übertragung von Kenntnissen, die die Realität der Vergangenheit beschreibt und großen Wert auf die Neutralität des unterrichteten Textes legt; ein Fach, das sich Mühe gibt, ehrgeizige intellektuelle Zwecke (den aktiven Bürger in der Stadt von morgen mit Werkzeugen bewaffnen) mit Aktivitäten in der Klasse in Kohärenz zu bringen, die sich oft auf Memorisierung, Markierung und Kategorisierung begrenzen. Auf diese Weise kann man in den heutigen Arbeiten beobachten, wie eine Problematik auftaucht, im Mittelpunkt derer die Diskrepanz zwischen Absichten und Praktiken steht. In dem man den Begriff der Unterwerfung zu den Regeln des „didaktischen Vertrags” mit den anderen theoretischen Modellen (in den Sozial-und Geschichtswissenschaften) kombiniert, die in den Forschungsteams benutzt werden, lassen die bisher auf noch zu verstreute Weise geführten Arbeiten wichtige Erwerbungen erkennen, die in der Lehrerausbildung berücksichtigt werden könnten.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41202586
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40054974
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Vila-Chã João J.
Abstract: Carìtas in Ventate, nr. 45; cit., p. 78
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41220788
Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Education / Revue canadienne de l'éducation
Publisher: Canadian Society for the Study of Education
Issue: i384150
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Tillema Anne M.
Abstract: Inquiry-based teacher education promotes an exploration of concrete particulars as the route to wise practice. The case study presented illustrates one teacher candidate's struggle to let go of a conception of knowledge as generalizable formulae that can be readily applied in practice and to become more open to practice itself as a site of learning. Teacher educators can nurture such openness by helping aspiring teachers to appreciate the fragility of knowledge, the epistemological value of feeling, and the priority of the particular, in teaching. In so doing, educators recover practical wisdom as the beginning and end-in-view of teacher education. /// La formation à l'enseignement axée sur la recherche favorise la prise en compte des conditions particulières et, de ce fait, une pratique éclairée. L'étude de cas présentée dans cet article illustre les efforts d'une candidate à l'enseignement en vue de se départir d'une conception de la connaissance définie comme une formule généralisable, facilement applicable dans la pratique, et de mieux accueillir la pratique elle-même comme un lieu d'apprentissage. Les responsables de la formation à l'enseignement peuvent contribuer à cette ouverture en aidant les futurs enseignants à saisir la fragilité de la connaissance, la valeur épistémologique des sentiments et l'importance des conditions particulières dans l'enseignement. Ce faisant, les éducateurs redécouvrent la sagesse comme le début et l'objectif à atteindre dans la formation à l'enseignement.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4126474
Journal Title: Hungarian Journal of English and American Studies (HJEAS)
Publisher: Institute of English and American Studies, University of Debrecen
Issue: i40057450
Date: 10 1, 2009
Author(s): Wake Paul
Abstract: This review essay attempts to provide a broad sampling of Conrad studies that is representative of major currents in the field. The essay is structured around three basic areas of Conrad studies—biography, textual scholarship, and criticism. The first of these is given the greatest prominence because of the recent publication of two major biographies with sharply contrasting approaches to Conrad's Polish background and its importance in the appreciation of his works. The section devoted to textual scholarship comments on the ambitious project launched by Cambridge University Press to make available Conrad's works and letters in an authoritative form for the first time. The essay concludes with a brief overview of recent critical currents in Conrad scholarship, in the light of the ongoing debate over the usefulness of "extrinsic" as opposed to "intrinsic" approaches.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41274480
Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057454
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): JEDLICKI JERZY
Abstract: Adam Michnik'
['A Touch of Brotherhood': an interview by Adam Michnik with Professor Bronislaw
Geremek], Gazeta Wyborcza 16 Sept. 1993.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41274532
Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057457
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): HAŁAS ELŻBIETA
Abstract: (Strauss 1991 p. 19)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41274562
Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057469
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): KŁOSKOWSKA ANTONINA
Abstract: As the twentieth century comes to an end, and with it a millennium, there has been much heated reflection on the passing age and the period of transition. Among the many characteristic phenomena of modern times, globalization has attracted particularly much attention. The process of European integration may be traced back to ancient times (vide Roman imperialism or Carolingian universalism). Recently, however, globalization has expanded and it has accelerated considerably. The author of this paper focuses on the current, paradoxical coexistence of global tendencies toward integration on the one hand and very clearly manifested, diversifying (or even separatists) national and nationalist tendencies on the other hand. The author analyzes these homogenizing tendencies at the level of media pop culture on the one hand and the increasing, even acute, awareness of diversity, including the diversity of national cultures, on the other hand. She does so within the framework of the symbolic culture concept. Contemporarily, tendencies toward globalization are suspended between the Scylla of uniformizatdon and the Charybdis of diversity. Sociology is particularly qualified to study these phenomena, at both local and universal levels.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41274671
Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057469
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): MORAWSKI WITOLD
Abstract: (Karski 1997:3).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41274674
Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057483
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): HAŁAS ELŻBIETA
Abstract: T. Abel, Systematic Sociology in Germany: A Critical Analysis of Some Attempts to Establish Sociology
as an Independent Science. New York: Columbia University Press, 1929, p. 113.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41274815
Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057486
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): HOROLETS ANNA
Abstract: Even though the European Union has become an "ever closer union" in economic and political terms, the problem of the emotional deficit of the EU identity calls for solutions. Metaphor offers an untypical yet interesting mechanism of overcoming the alien aura of the EU. Taking into consideration the cognitive value of metaphors, Antony Judge, the EU expert, designed the dynamic system of metaphors to articulate the new European identity. At the same time, in the candidate countries the alternative discourses of European identity emerge. Polish press makes use of the emotional potential of metaphors. With the help of metaphors Polish pubic discourse grounds the claim of the rightful and necessary belonging of Poland to the European Union thus engaging in symbolic politics. Moreover, through metaphoric images the relations between Europe and the "Self" are critically or ironically assessed. In an ambiguous period of accession negotiations these metaphors empowered Polish public to create their own conceptions of what the European identity is.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41274850
Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057514
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): WRÓBEL SZYMON
Abstract: Patrick H. Hutton, Foucault, Freud, and The Technologies of the Self , in: Technologies of the Self , Ed.
Luther Martin, Huck Gutman, Patrick H. Hutton, Massachusetts 1988, p. 121.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41275157
Journal Title: Annual Review of Anthropology
Publisher: Annual Reviews
Issue: i40058128
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Throop C. Jason
Abstract: This review explores the most significant dimensions and findings of phenomenological approaches in anthropology. We spell out the motives and implications inherent in such approaches, chronicle their historical dimensions and precursors, and address the ways in which they have contributed to analytic perspectives employed in anthropology. This article canvasses phenomenologically oriented research in anthropology on a number of topics, including political relations and violence; language and discourse; neurophenomenology; emotion; embodiment and bodiliness; illness and healing; pain and suffering; aging, dying, and death; sensory perception and experience; subjectivity; intersubjectivity and sociality; empathy; morality; religious experience; art, aesthetics, and creativity; narrative and storytelling; time and temporality; and senses of place. We examine, and propose salient responses to, the main critiques of phenomenological approaches in anthropology, and we also take note of some of the most pressing and generative avenues of research and thought in phenomenologically oriented anthropology.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1146/annurev-anthro-092010-153345', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any
Journal Title: Guerres mondiales et conflits contemporains
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40058714
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): Fageol Pierre-Éric
Abstract: T. Todorov, Nous et les autres, Paris, Le Seuil, 1989.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41300029
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40058715
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): BONNEUIL NOËL
Abstract: Noel Bonneuil, "Morphological Transition of Schooling in Nineteenth Century France,"
(submitted).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41300048
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40058716
Date: 2 1, 2011
Author(s): FORCE PIERRE
Abstract: Ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41300058
Journal Title: Les Études philosophiques
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40058771
Date: 7 1, 2011
Author(s): Bernard Marion
Abstract: J. Patočka, Le Monde naturel comme problème philosophique , La Haye, Nijhoff, 1976,
p. 83.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/leph.113.0375', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any
Journal Title: Japan Review
Publisher: International Research Center for Japanese Studies
Issue: i40058970
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Shields James Mark
Abstract: Sakaguchi 1991d, pp. 4, 14.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41304930
Journal Title: Oxford Art Journal
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i40059451
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Baumgartner Frédérique
Abstract: Pane, Lettre, p. 152.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/oxartj/kcr020', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any
Journal Title: Ayer
Publisher: Asociación de Historia Contemporánea
Issue: i40060550
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Martín Ignacio Peiró
Abstract: Moses, S.: op. cit., p. 147.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41325257
Journal Title: Ayer
Publisher: Asociación de Historia Contemporánea
Issue: i40060601
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Juste Antonio Moreno
Abstract: Casanova, J.: «Una historia común», El País, 5 de marzo de
2007.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41326053
Journal Title: Annual Review of Anthropology
Publisher: Annual Reviews
Issue: i388662
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Wright Clifford
Abstract: I give an overall view of anthropology and of my career within it over the past fifty years, relating them to changes in the world in general during that time. All lessons are implicit, all morals unstated, all conclusions undrawn.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4132869
Journal Title: Hypatia
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40061362
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): TARVER ERIN C.
Abstract: Stolberg 2009.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1527-2001.2011.01235.x', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40063719
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): PHILLIPS MARK SALBER
Abstract: Hume, Treatise , 385.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41342618
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40063719
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): MARION MATHIEU
Abstract: Collingwood et la philosophie
du vingtième siècle! Collingwood and Twentieth-Century Philosophy, at the Université du Québec à
Montréal in October 2007 .
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41342623
Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: École des hautes études en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i40063738
Date: 9 1, 2011
Author(s): Jewsiewicki Bogumil
Abstract: (Dibwe dia Mwembu & Jewsiewicki 2003).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41342880
Journal Title: The French Review
Publisher: American Association of Teachers of French
Issue: i40063959
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): Roe Glenn H.
Abstract: A fierce opponent of the historicist approach to literature that dominated French academe during his lifetime, the essayist and poet Charles Péguy (1873–1914) would theorize an alternative literary method that through the act of faithful and participatory reading could transcend the limitations of historicism. Outlined in his dialogue with History, Clio, Péguy's vision of the literary act is that of an intersubjective operation of mutual understanding between reader and author, in which the living relevance of literary works extends beyond their narrow historical origins; a conception that prefigures the formalist and hermeneutic literary approaches that will arise decades later.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41346152
Journal Title: Journal of Qur'anic Studies
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press / ﻣﻄﺒﻌﺔ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺇﺩﻧﺒﺮﺓ
Issue: i40064400
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): غروبر كريستين
Abstract: This study argues that the exponential growth of divinatory texts variously attributed to ᶜAlī and Jaᶜfar al-Ṣādiq included at the end of Qur'ans produced during the Ṣafavid period provides further evidence for the widespread interest in divination during the tenth/sixteenth and eleventh/seventeenth centuries in Iran. Treatises on 'divination by the Qur'an' (fāl-i Qur'ān) indicate that it was considered permissible to seek guidance by means of holy scripture at this time. On a more symbolic level, fāl-i Qur'āns can be understood as a kind of restoration of the 'defective' ᶜUthmānic codex by re-Shïᶜifying it-if not by reinserting supposedly dropped verses on the ahi al-bayt, then at the very least by adding terminal divinations attributed to the figureheads of Shīᶜī Islam. This particular practice therefore follows general 'Shīᶜification' trends found in a number of cultural and artistic practices of the Ṣafavid period, which also are potentially discernible within the domain of Qur'an production. هذه الدراسة تذهب إلى أن النمو الهائل من النصوص التي تتنبأ بالمستقبل والمنسوبة بأشكال مختلفة لعلي وجعفر الصادق والملحقة بنهاية المصاحف التي أنتجت ﺧﻼﻝ الفترة الصفوية تقدم مزيداﹰ من اﻷدلة على اﻻهتمام واسع النطاق بالعراﻓﺔ في ايران ﺧﻼﻝ القرون / العاشر والحادي عشر السادس عشر / السابع عشر . وتشير المصنفات في الفأل بالقرآن إلى أنه ﺧﻼﻝ تلك الحقبة كان التماس التوجيه من الكتاب المقدس يعتبر أمرا جائزاﹰ. على مستوى أكثر رمزية، فإن فأل القرآن يمكن أن يفهم على أنه معالجة للمصحف العثماني بإعادة " تشييعه " وهذا وإن لم يكن من ﺧﻼﻝ إعادة آيات تتعلق بآل البيت يدعى أنها مسقطة من اﻷصل، فعلى اﻷقل من ﺧﻼﻝ زيادة تنبؤات في آخر المصحف بعد النص القرآني منسوبة لرموز الشيعة. لهذا فإن هذا العمل يتبع توجهات " تشييع " وجدت في عدد من الممارسات الثقافية والفنية في العصر الصفوي يمكن أيضاﹰ ﻣﻼحظتها في إطار إنتاج المصاحف .
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.3366/jqs.2011.0019', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any
Journal Title: Estudios Internacionales
Publisher: Instituto de Estudios Internacionales de la Universidad de Chile
Issue: i40067662
Date: 9 1, 1990
Author(s): Tomassini Luciano
Abstract: Berroeta, "Los Felices Tiempos Mediocres", en El Nacional. Caracas,
6 de mayo de 1990.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41391337
Journal Title: Annales. Histoire, Sciences Sociales
Publisher: Éditions de l'École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i40068374
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): Muchnik Natalia
Abstract: Eckart Blrnstlel, Estelle
Aebersold et Patrick G ab anel dans Diasporas. Histoire et sociétés, 8, 2006, p. 22-77.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41405858
Journal Title: Comparative Studies in Society and History
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40069741
Date: 4 1, 2012
Author(s): BRYANT REBECCA
Abstract: "Tales from the Coffeeshop,'" Cyprus Mail , 6 Aug. 2006.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1017/S0010417512000060', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any
Journal Title: Renaissance Quarterly
Publisher: Renaissance Society of America
Issue: i388096
Date: 12 1, 1987
Author(s): Van der Poel Reinier
Abstract: Kushner, 1996
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4143696
Journal Title: The Oral History Review
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i40070293
Date: 10 1, 2010
Author(s): Zembrzycki Stacey
Abstract: As oral historians, we devote a great deal of time to painstakingly designing our projects, cognizant of the fact that our research requires us to interact with human beings in often intimate ways. For this same reason, though, our careful methodology and meticulously designed projects are constantly being tested. This article is a reflection on some of the ethical and methodological challenges that the authors faced during their life story interviews with Holocaust survivors in Montreal, Canada. In particular, it explores three major themes: the elaborate process of learning to "share authority" and build trust with interviewees; the limitations of "deep listening" and their implications; and the struggle to deal with contentious politics, such as perceived racism, that emerged out of some interviews. Reflection on these methodological and ethical challenges not only opens up a wider and important discussion among researchers about how practice relates to theory but also teaches us about our interviewees. For example, what does an interviewee's refusal to engage deeply about his or her past tell us about how they formed their identity in the aftermath of mass violence? Challenges, such as this one, are part of the story. They shed light on questions of narrative formation, the identity politics that result from survival, and how individual memory interacts with dominant narratives about atrocity. They force us to recognize that both our interviewees—and ourselves—are human beings, and not just collections of stories.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41440802
Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40070482
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): BOSA BASTIEN
Abstract: I. Hacking (2001).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41445036
Journal Title: The American Political Science Review
Publisher: American Political Science Association
Issue: i387744
Date: 2 1, 1983
Author(s): Wyschogrod Thomas
Abstract: Wallach (2001, 189-90, 230, 298-99)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4145301
Journal Title: American Sociological Review
Publisher: American Sociological Association
Issue: i387752
Date: 4 1, 1990
Author(s): Zukin Fred
Abstract: O'Connor (2001)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4145370
Journal Title: Church History
Publisher: American Society of Church History
Issue: i387805
Date: 9 1, 1980
Author(s): Ricoeur John D.
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, Essays on Biblical Interpretation, ed. Lewis S. Mudge (Philadelphia:
Fortress, 1980)
Ricoeur
Essays on Biblical Interpretation
1980
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4146418
Journal Title: Hispanic Review
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press
Issue: i40071687
Date: 4 1, 2012
Author(s): Venegas José Luis
Abstract: David Decker
(110-11).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41472664
Journal Title: Journal of Business Ethics
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40071895
Date: 4 1, 2012
Author(s): Waistell Jeff
Abstract: This study investigates how business leaders dynamically narrate their aspirational ethical leadership identities. In doing so, it furthers understanding of ethical leadership as a process situated in time and place. The analysis focuses on the discursive strategies used to narrate identity and ethics by ethnic Chinese business leaders in Indonesia after their conversion to Pentecostal-charismatic Christianity. By exploring the use of metaphor, our study shows how these business leaders discursively deconstruct their 'old' identities and construct their 'new' aspirational identities as ethical leaders. This leads to the following contributions. First, we show that ethical leadership is constructed in identity talk as the business leaders actively narrate aspirational identities. Second, the identity narratives of the business leaders suggest that ethical leadership is a context-bound and situated claim vis-à-vis unethical practice. Third, we propose a conceptual template, identifying processes of realisation and inspiration followed by significant shifts in understanding, for the study of aspirational ethical leadership.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41476230
Journal Title: The American Political Science Review
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40073035
Date: 5 1, 2012
Author(s): DIETZ MARY G.
Abstract: Thucydides' (I.76.2)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41495079
Journal Title: Music Analysis
Publisher: Wiley-Blackwell
Issue: i40073078
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): PURI MICHAEL J.
Abstract: When conceived as the presence of the past, memory can be said to pervade the music of Maurice Ravel. The number and range of these acts of musical memory -including illeces modelled on the medieval ballade, the Renaissance chanson, the Baroque tombeau, the Classical sonatine and the Romantic poème, among others -seem at first glance to testify to a uncomplicated relation between past and present which, upon closer review, is revealed to be problematic. One of the most complex and captivating artistic testaments to what Andreas Huyssen has called 'twilight memory' -not only in Ravel's music, but in Western modernism as a whole - is the eighth and final waltz of his illano suite Valses nobles et sentimentales (1911). In this waltz, which Ravel entitled 'Éilllogue', the hope of making the past present is reborn with each of its numerous thematic recollections, only to be dashed repeatedly by the melancholy knowledge of its impossibility. In the present study, affinities between the Éilllogue's musical behaviours and philosophical accounts of memory by Bergson, Jankélévitch and Nora are explored, along with the compositional precedents established by Beethoven, Schumann, Debussy and others.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1468-2249.2011.00306.x', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any
Journal Title: Revue Philosophique de la France et de l'Étranger
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40073611
Date: 3 1, 2012
Author(s): Vieillard-Baron Jean-Louis
Abstract: Jean-Louis Chrétien montre
comment le roman viole le secret de l'intériorité et le révèle, dans son bel ouvrage
Conscience et roman, I. La Conscience au grand jour, Paris, Minuit, 2009.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/rphi.121.0003', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any
Journal Title: Anthropological Quarterly
Publisher: George Washington University Institute for Ethnographic Research
Issue: i387764
Date: 4 1, 2002
Author(s): Žižek Danny
Abstract: The 2001 disarmament of kamajor combatants in Bo, Sierra Leone was an event marked by violence. This paper considers that violence, and by extension other violent events in Sierra Leone's recent war, as narrative blocs: configurations of agency, time, imagery and articulation. This formulation stands in contrast to the way vionent events are often treated, as exceptional moments of outburst or eruption resulting from abnormal circumstances but meaningless in themselves. The paper draws on ethnographic fieldwork with the kamajor militia movement in Sierra Leone to trace some of these blocs both within the disarmament center and through other locations in the "war-scape" of Sierra Leone.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4150837
Journal Title: Langue Française
Publisher: Larousse
Issue: i40075250
Date: 2 1, 1994
Author(s): Rastier François
Abstract: l'auteur, 1991, ch. VIII.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41559273
Journal Title: Studi di Sociologia
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40075933
Date: 9 1, 2011
Author(s): GASPARINI GIOVANNI
Abstract: Tempi e ritmi nella società del Duemila (Gasparini 2009),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41582781
Journal Title: Revista de Antropologia
Publisher: Departamento de Antropologia da Faculdade de Filosofia, Letras e Ciências Humanas da Universidade de São Paulo
Issue: i40076402
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Eckert Cornelia
Abstract: Este artigo traz uma reflexão sobre o método etnográfico enquanto encapsulando o tema da identidade narrativa do antropólogo, em especial, enfocando o problema ético-moral da busca da coerência interna de sua produção etnográfica através da análise do processo de construção do conhecimento antropológico. Trata-se de pontuar, neste processo, o que está verdadeiramente em jogo, ou seja, o ato de configuração e reconfiguração do tempo que encerra a ação interpretativa em Antropologia. This article brings a reflections about the ethnographic method while encapsulating the identity theme describes by the anthropologist, in special, focusing the moral-ethic problem of the searching of the internal coherence of its ethnographic production through the study of the process of the anthropologic knowledge construction. It is to point, in this process, that is really in the play, or, the act of configuration and reconfiguration of time that stops the interpretative action in anthropology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41601948
Journal Title: Rivista Internazionale di Scienze Sociali
Publisher: Societa Cattolica Italiana per gli Studi Scientifici
Issue: i40077267
Date: 9 1, 1994
Author(s): VILLANI ANDREA
Abstract: A community, in the same way as an individual, can follow as a normal way of behaviour — or as a wanted criteria for behaviour — for all future circumstances to decide discretionally, «case by case», or to define in a moment in time the rule (or a set of rules) that must be valid for the future. To define rules in a community has been indicated by some authors (Geoffrey Brennan and James M. Buchanan particularly) as a way to exit from a situation of a war of every man against every other man, as in the Hobbesian jungle, on one side, and from a situation dominated by a Leviathan on the other. This in a perspective where rules of a common living have been set through a social contract. The rules established through this contract would also form the criteria for a just conduct, in the end therefore for criteria of justice. The essay analyzes the situations and the conditions in which constraining oneself can be rational, even as it is not definible that in all circumstances constraining is more rational than not constraining oneself, that it is more desirable to have rules rather than discretionary decisions, the definition of ways of behaviour rather than the pre-definition of outcomes. As for what concerns the problem of justice, it is indicated how through a contractarian and constitutional procedure rules can be put by unanimous consent, but the problem of the foundation of the same rules remains unresolved. Rules do not seek truth, but only express values accepted by the counterparts in a certain moment in time, and have individuals as sources of these values.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41623852
Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung. Supplement
Publisher: GESIS - Leibniz Institute for the Social Sciences
Issue: i40077837
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Jarausch Konrad H.
Abstract: Konrad H. Jarausch, "German Civility? Retying Social Bonds after Barbarism," European
Review of History 18 (2011), 373-86.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41637867
Journal Title: Revue d'Histoire littéraire de la France
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40078818
Date: 9 1, 2012
Author(s): Moureau François
Abstract: TC, t. II, p. 990.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41678510
Journal Title: Langages
Publisher: Didier / Larousse
Issue: i40079106
Date: 6 1, 1995
Author(s): Meschonnic Henri
Abstract: Roland Barthes, « Pourquoi j' aime Benveniste », pour la parution du tome premier des Problèmes
de linguistique générale, baptisés Essais par une erreur redoublée pour le deuxième, en 1974. Dans Le
bruissement de la langue, déjà cité, p. 193.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41683199
Journal Title: Langages
Publisher: Didier / Larousse
Issue: i40079106
Date: 6 1, 1995
Author(s): Noël Mireille
Abstract: FNRS suisse (requête n° 1214-031059-91).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41683201
Journal Title: Langages
Publisher: Didier / Larousse
Issue: i40079109
Date: 9 1, 1997
Author(s): Bres Jacques
Abstract: A. Joly (1996, « Les variations d'un
invariant : approche morphogénétique de l'imparfait français », Modèles linguistiques XVII, 1, 187-202)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41683229
Journal Title: Language in Society
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i393727
Date: 12 1, 1981
Author(s): Zerubavel Elinor
Abstract: This study examines how deadlines and time limits for conference talks organize the discourse of consensus among collaborating experimental and theoretical physicists in a university laboratory. Six months of videotaped observations, including two cycles of conference talk preparation, indicate that, as the date of an upcoming conference nears, several things happen. (a) Co-authoring physicists usually have not achieved agreement on all aspects of the findings. (b) They nevertheless direct their energies to constructing a hybrid presentation rhetoric that satisfies the co-authors and fits the talk to the official conference talk time limit. (c) In the process of working through matters of rhetoric -- what to say, what to display visually, what to leave out, and in what order the information should be presented -- the physicists construct a working consensus on matters of physics: theory and experimental data explaining the properties and dynamics of the physical universe.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4168800
Journal Title: The World of Music
Publisher: Verlag für Wissenschaft und Bildung
Issue: i40079787
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Harnish David
Abstract: This study employs hermeneutics to illuminate a musical life history. I Made Lebah was a unique individual who lived during a violent and creative time of Bali's history. This paper explores his life through the lens of hermeneutics and identifies music stages through segmented, progressive hermeneutical arcs within his lifelong arc of experience. A consciousness of historical situatedness and an enabling appropriation allowed him to master a number of Balinese music styles and assume the title, "great teacher." The people he worked with, including composers Lotring and Colin McPhee and his lifelong friend, Agung Mandra, all affected him and helped him to acquire a self-awareness, a rapid learning and internalization process, and a sensitivity to reflective hermeneutics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41699351
Journal Title: The World of Music
Publisher: Verlag für Wissenschaft und Bildung
Issue: i40079811
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Savage Roger W. H.
Abstract: John Blacking's suggestion that some music transcends its social function by creating worlds of virtual time opens the way to a deeper understanding of the ontology of music. For Blacking, "music that is for being" enhances human consciousness by heightening temporal experiences. Music's power to affect our consciousness of time stands at the heart of an ontology of music. By examining music s relation to limit experiences such as trance and ecstasy, in which time itself appears to be transcended, I intend to argue that music's mode of being is the ground of its social, cultural, and even spiritual efficacy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41699880
Journal Title: The World of Music
Publisher: Verlag für Wissenschaft und Bildung
Issue: i40079811
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Ho Meilu
Abstract: Singing songs in service (kirtan seva) constitutes the primary expression of devotion in the Pushti Marg (Path of Grace) tradition of India. This liturgical practice is singular amongst South Asian, Hindu traditions in its extensive use of rag set to classical poetry. I consider the meaning of this sung liturgy using the ideas of hermeneutic philosophy that concern understanding. I suggest that performing song in service is similar to the act of understanding a work, one in which a self is disclosed in the mode of play. Critically, such continual self-unveilings over a lifetime of service to Krishna afford the practitioner the possibility of the lived liberation promised by founder, Vallabhacharya.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41699881
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40079867
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): SALAZAR PHILIPPE-JOSEPH
Abstract: Rapport, I, 4, paragr. 4.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41700854
Journal Title: Modern China
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i40079950
Date: 9 1, 2012
Author(s): Murthy Viren
Abstract: Although ZhangTaiyan is famous for being a late Qing nationalist and revolutionary, scholars have yet to explore fully the significance of his Buddhist writings, especially as they relate to time and history. This article closely examines Zhang's writings about time and history and points out that Zhang made two interrelated but potentially conflicting arguments. On the one hand, he invoked Yogācāra Buddhism and Zhuang Zi to expound a relativistic vision of time and history. From this perspective, each nation has its historical particularity and cannot be judged from an external standard. However, on the other hand, in a context where intellectuals were uncritically adopting a framework of history as progress, Zhang grounded the theory of evolution in a theory of karmic seeds to develop an interpretation of history as a double movement in which the good gets better and the bad gets worse. The article delves into the significance of Zhang's arguments by highlighting the symmetries between Zhang's exposition of history and the logic of capitalism. Such structural similarities suggest that Zhang could think about time and history in this way precisely because he inhabited a world mediated by the dynamic of capitalism. His writings on Zhuang Zi and Buddhism should be seen as an example of a resistance to capitalism that is not based on a narrative of progress. In the context of twentieth-century Chinese intellectual history, where narratives of progress and evolution are a dominant chord, Zhang's counterpunctual critique of evolution is especially inspiring.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41702468
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080074
Date: 9 1, 1999
Author(s): ROPARS-WUILLEUMIER MARIE-CLAIRE
Abstract: Maurice Blanchot, L'Entretien infini, Gallimard, 1969, p. 617.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41704736
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080082
Date: 12 1, 2001
Author(s): Pradeau Christophe
Abstract: «Judith Schlanger:
Explorer of Lettered Space», SubStance, Univ. of Madison Press, n° 97, vol. 31, n° 1, avril 2002 et «L'effet
de "déjà-lu" dans l'œuvre de Jacques Roubaud», in D. Guillaume (dir.), Poésies et poétiques contemporai-
nes, Le Temps qu'il fait, à paraître en 2002.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41704839
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080090
Date: 12 1, 2003
Author(s): SIMON ANNE
Abstract: RTP, I, p. 156.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41704938
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080097
Date: 9 1, 2004
Author(s): MONTIER JEAN-PIERRE
Abstract: Guy Larroux, «La solidarité du dénouement avec un épisode initial se
trouve illustrée par maints récits», op. cit., p. 60.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41705031
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080097
Date: 9 1, 2004
Author(s): TRITSMANS BRUNO
Abstract: Sol absolu et autres textes, Paris, Gallimard, coll. Poésie, 1982, p. 7-21
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41705034
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080110
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): CROIZY-NAQUET CATHERINE
Abstract: Michel Jarrety, art. cité, p. 82.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41705188
Journal Title: Histoire de l'éducation
Publisher: Ècole normale supérieure de Lyon, Institut francais de l'Education
Issue: i40080147
Date: 3 1, 2012
Author(s): FAGEOL Pierre-Éric
Abstract: Jean-François Chanet, L'école républicaine..., op. cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41705781
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080460
Date: 2 1, 1990
Author(s): Varga A. Kibédi
Abstract: Nabokov, Feu pâle, Gallimard 1981.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41713145
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080464
Date: 12 1, 1992
Author(s): Méchoulan Éric
Abstract: Giorgio Agamben, Le langage et la mort : un séminaire sur le lieu de la négativité, trad. M.
Raiola, Paris, C. Bourgois, 1991, p. 57.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41713201
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080464
Date: 12 1, 1992
Author(s): Wimmers Inge
Abstract: Volker Roloff, Werk und Lektüre : Zur L,iterarästhetik von Marcel Proust (Insel Verlag :
1984), p. 168.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41713209
Journal Title: Group
Publisher: Mental Health Resources
Issue: i40080844
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Schermer Victor L.
Abstract: A broad conceptual framework is presented for utilizing spirituality in group psychotherapy. The author considers (a) selected concepts and theory relevant to the spiritual aspect of psychotherapy practice; (b) the change in assumptions about the person and the group they imply; (c) the mystical aspects of the listening/observing process; and (d) aspects of the new sciences compatible with spiritual principles. Using a psychospiritual paradigm, the author offers a view of group therapy that emphasizes the therapist as a contemporary mystic, the group as a sacred space, and a return to profound, timeless, nonrelativist spiritual values and goals, nonsensory infinite dimensional experience leading to deep transformation of the self, and the compatibility of contemporary scientific frameworks with spiritual principles that can form the basis of new theorizing and group interpretations.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41719065
Journal Title: Studies in Philology
Publisher: University of North Carolina Press
Issue: i392491
Date: 7 1, 1936
Author(s): Lewis John C.
Abstract: C. S.
Lewis's conception of Courtesy, in The Allegory of Love: A Study in Medieval Tradition
(London: Oxford University Press, 1936), 36
Lewis
36
The Allegory of Love: A Study in Medieval Tradition
1936
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4174369
Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Literatura
Publisher: Departamento de Literatura, Universidad de Chile
Issue: i40081899
Date: 11 1, 2012
Author(s): Herceg José Santos
Abstract: Foucault, Orden 38-39
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41756623
Journal Title: International Journal of Ethiopian Studies
Publisher: Tsehai Publishers
Issue: i40081926
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Mennasemay Maimire
Abstract: The paper proposes a critical reappraisal of Abba Bahrey's Zenahu leGalla, the controversial 16th century text. Some scholars criticize it as harbouring anti-Oromo sentiments while others praise it as an important source on the organization of Oromo society The paper argues that, while Zenahu leGalla does provide useful historical information on the Oromo, its lasting value lies elsewhere: in the critical reflection it initiates on the issues of power, freedom, social change, violence, and the public use of reason. To unpack these issues, occluded by current interpretations of Zenahu leGalla, the paper undertakes a critical hermeneutical reading of the text. The reading shows that Bahrey's text incubates emancipatory surplus meanings that transcend his epoch and speak to the concerns of contemporary Ethiopia. In the concluding sections, the paper discusses the issues of democracy and development in light of these surplus meanings.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41756933
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40084987
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): CATALÃO HELENA B.
Abstract: Epstein, Helen - Écrire la vie. Trad. C. Nelson. Paris: La
Cause des Livres, 2009, p. 101.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41803883
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40086215
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Greisch Jean
Abstract: « Tolérance, intolérance, intolérable »,
in Lectures 1, Paris, Éd. du Seuil, 1991, p. 294-311.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/rmm.062.0149', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40086215
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Welsen Peter
Abstract: Michael Walzer, Spheres of Justice, New York, 1983.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/rmm.062.0217', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any
Journal Title: Annales historiques de la Révolution française
Publisher: Société des Etudes Robespierristes
Issue: i40088663
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): MAZAURIC CLAUDE
Abstract: Michel Vovelle, « L'histoire et la longue durée » dans La nouvelle histoire
(pp. 316-343), Paris, 1979.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41889126
Journal Title: Annales historiques de la Révolution française
Publisher: Société des Etudes Robespierristes
Issue: i40088669
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): NADEAU Martin
Abstract: Ibid., volume 3, rapport du bureau central du 20 mars 1797, Spectacles, p. 30.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41889310
Journal Title: Annales historiques de la Révolution française
Publisher: Société des Etudes Robespierristes
Issue: i40088814
Date: 12 1, 1994
Author(s): Guilhaumou Jacques
Abstract: Principes régénérateurs du système social de Billaud-Varenne, op. cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41914495
Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Literatura
Publisher: Departamento de Literatura, Universidad de Chile
Issue: i40091447
Date: 4 1, 2013
Author(s): García Pilar
Abstract: Bajtin 1986
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41955560
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40091456
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): BARROSO PAULO
Abstract: Goethe, Johann Wolfgang — Máximas e Reflexões. Lisboa: Guimarães Editores, 2001,
p. 119.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41955712
Journal Title: Revista de Musicología
Publisher: Sociedad Española de Musicología
Issue: i40091550
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): García Montalbán Antonio
Abstract: Lo Maravilloso en el Siglo de las Luces: La
Encyclopédie y Esteban de Arteaga (1747-1799). Valencia, Mu VIM, 2009.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41959346
Journal Title: Franciscan Studies
Publisher: Franciscan Institute
Issue: i40092521
Date: 9 1, 1949
Author(s): DE SAINT MAURICE BERAUD
Abstract: Trois Fontaines, "Existentialisme Chrétien: Gabriel Marcel." La Notion
de Prisence chez Gabriel Marcel, (Paris, 1947), p. 254.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41974378
Journal Title: Journal of Peace Research
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i217647
Date: 8 1, 1972
Author(s): Wagar Helena
Abstract: Heidegger (1982, 1983)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/423471
Journal Title: Česká literatura
Publisher: Ústav pro ceskou literaturu AV CR
Issue: i40100622
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Jankovič Milan
Abstract: Patočka summarized his conception of style in the essay „Umění a čas" [Art and Time] (1966), in which he observes style over historie periods and its increasing departure from a priori, metaphysically ascertained and universally valid meaning. In modern art, style is established by the freedom of the Creative act; its centre of gravity shifts to the level of „signifier". Patočka's essay „O minulém rázu umìění" [Concerning the Former Nature of Art] (written 1965) helped to clarify „aesthetic attitude". In this essay, he develops an interpretational duet: a critique of Hegel's metaphysical starting point, which distances itself from the experience of modern art, and an appraisal of Hegel's interpretation of time, which remains inspirational. In accordance with it, Patočka the phenomenologist considers art the place of „destructive creation", of vivifying revelation, whose source is in man. The next part of the article calls attention to a lecture by Paul Ricoeur „Vyprávění, metafora a teorie interpretace" [Narrative, Metaphor and the Theory of Interpretation] (1987), in which Ricoeur introduced a modern hermeneutic approach to literary studies. What is most relevant here is the concept of the „double reference". The first aspect of reference relates to empirical reality; the second to the „productive reference", which designs a world created by the literary work. Semantic innovation in the narration of a story has a parallel in the semantic innovation of the metaphor. In both cases there emerges „the new, the as yet unsaid, the inexpressible - in language".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42686758
Journal Title: Česká literatura
Publisher: Ústav pro ceskou literaturu AV CR
Issue: i40100624
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Bílek Petr A.
Abstract: Eco
1997: 326
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42686783
Journal Title: Česká literatura
Publisher: Ústav pro ceskou literaturu AV CR
Issue: i40100636
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Jílek Rudolf
Abstract: HESTER: 170
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42686999
Journal Title: Asian Perspective
Publisher: The Institue for Far Eastern Studies
Issue: i40101443
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Bleiker Roland
Abstract: Dipesh Chakrabarty, Provincializing Europe: Postcolonial Thought and His-
torical Difference (Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 2000), p. 98.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42704577
Journal Title: Asian Perspective
Publisher: The Institue for Far Eastern Studies
Issue: i40101449
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Yang Kiwoong
Abstract: Jo,
Yang-Hyeon, "Controversy over East Asian History and U.S. House
Discussion Regarding the 'Comfort Women' Resolution: Recent Changes
and Implications for U.S.-Japan Relations," East Asian Review (Seoul),
vol. 19, No. 3 (Fall, 2007) pp. 3-31.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42704641
Journal Title: Česká literatura
Publisher: Ceskoslovenská Akademie Ved
Issue: i40101655
Date: 1 1, 1968
Author(s): Štěpánková Julie
Abstract: J. P. Richard, Fadeur de Verlaine. (Poésie et profondeur, Seuil, 1955.)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42708218
Journal Title: Criminologie
Publisher: Les Presses de l'Université de Montréal
Issue: i40103504
Date: 4 1, 2011
Author(s): Casoni Dianne
Abstract: Nadeau C, & Vacherei, M. (2005) (Eds.), Le châtiment, histoire, philosophie et pratiques
de la justice pénale. Montréal : Liber.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42745712
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40104981
Date: 3 1, 2013
Author(s): Bantigny Ludivine
Abstract: Vincent Duclert, L'Avenir de l'histoire, Paris, Armand
Colin, 2010, p. 4-6 et 29.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/vin.117.0013', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40104981
Date: 3 1, 2013
Author(s): Bantigny Ludivine
Abstract: Haipeng Zhang, « Bingdian Fukan kanwen
pipan Yuan Weishi : Zhang Haipeng, Fan di fan fengjian
shi jindai Zhongguo lishi de zhuti » (Premier numéro après
la reparution de Bingdian à la suite de l'article de Weishi
Yuan : l'anti-impérialisme et l'anti-féodalisme sont les sujets
de la Chine moderne) 2006, http://blog.chinesenewsnet.
com/?p=8072&cp=1 (28 février 2006).
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/vin.117.0026', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40104981
Date: 3 1, 2013
Author(s): Dosse François
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, « Propos d'un philosophe », dans Ecrire
l'histoire du temps présent : études en hommage à François Bédarida,
Paris, CNRS éditions, 1993, p. 35-41, p. 39 (actes de la jour-
née d'étude de l'Institut d'histoire du temps présent, 14 mai
1992).
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/vin.117.0133', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40104981
Date: 3 1, 2013
Author(s): Bantigny Ludivine
Abstract: Daniel et Gabriel Cohn-Bendit, Le Gauchisme : remède à la
maladie sénile du communisme, Paris, Éd. du Seuil, 1968, p. 128.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/vin.117.0215', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40105000
Date: 6 1, 2013
Author(s): Fouéré Marie-Aude
Abstract: Richard Banégas et Jean-Pierre Warnier, « Figures de la réussite
et imaginaires politiques », Politique africaine, 82, 2001, p. 142-160.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/ving.118.0003', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any
Journal Title: Revue d'Histoire littéraire de la France
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40106353
Date: 6 1, 2013
Author(s): Chung Jy-Yong
Abstract: À Louise Colet, 31 janvier 1852, ibidem, t. II, p. 41.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/rhlf.132.0311', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any
Journal Title: Sociology
Publisher: British Sociological Association Publications Limited
Issue: i40108642
Date: 2 1, 1993
Author(s): Erben Michael
Abstract: The study of biography as an exercise in sociology has been under-used. The early proponents of a sociology of biography -most notably Wilhelm Dilthey -have not had their work greatly developed. However, with the emergence of Paul Ricoeur's work on the nature of narrativity, time and interpretation, plus the developing influence of the work of others, a hermeneutics of biography has now begun. This paper explores this development, and, further, briefly examines two highly important biographies to explore how theoretical injunction is matched by empirical practice.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42855037
Journal Title: Sociology
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40108676
Date: 2 1, 2001
Author(s): How Alan R.
Abstract: In recent times, under the influence of postmodernist thought sociology has largely rejected the idea of social evolution. An exception to this trend is to be found in the work of Jürgen Habermas. Habermas's account of social evolution has received some critical attention, but in sociology wider detail of the picture is not well known. Habermas wishes to hold to the possibility that evolutionary progress can be discerned not only in the sphere of technical control, but also in the sphere of social and moral development. The paper presents Habermas's views on social evoluton within the wider context of his development of critical theory as a 'reconstructive science'. It suggests that his account has been able to resist many of the standard criticisms of evolutionary theory and that a renewal of interest in this area could provide a rich vein of new sociological knowledge.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42856255
Journal Title: Discourse & Society
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i40110313
Date: 1 1, 1992
Author(s): Taylor Carolyn
Abstract: This study suggests that political order within families is manifested in and constructed through family narrative activity. The study is based on a corpus of 100 family dinner narratives of two-parent American families. Our findings show that narrative roles (introducer, protagonist, primary recipient, problematizer of protagonists or other co-narrators, problematizee) differ in the control they exert and in their distribution across family members. Parents, especially mothers, tended to introduce narratives, thereby controlling narrative topic and timing. Children were the most frequent protagonists yet they rarely introduced narratives about themselves and were rarely ratified as preferred recipients of others' narratives. Fathers tended to be primary recipients, often orchestrated through mothers' introductions. Not coincidentally, fathers were also the dominant problematizers of family-member protagonists/co-narrators, assuming a panopticon-like role. Children sometimes resisted family narrative activity, suggesting a certain awareness of the politics of narrative and its potential to expose them as objects of scrutiny.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42887801
Journal Title: Shofar
Publisher: Purdue University Press
Issue: i40113344
Date: 7 1, 2008
Author(s): Katz Claire
Abstract: S. Heschel, ed., Moral Grandeur, p. viii.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42944908
Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Northern Illinois University
Issue: i40113389
Date: 7 1, 1986
Author(s): Maddox Donald
Abstract: The entire medieval period is dominated by an eschatological textuality which posits for the history of salvation a singulative movement through time, from creation to eschaton. In book 12 of De civitate Dei, Augustine provides theoretical background for this epochal model; the most cogent statement of its content is found in book 6 of Hugh of Saint Victor's Didascalicon. This type of textuality, whose formal properties are identified, is already marked in Augustine by its exclusion of the purely iterative view of time held by pagan philosophers. From the twelfth century, however, singulative eschatological textuality assimilates an iterative model of the progression of time as it finds expression in metaphorically informed statements concerning the liturgical year. From Jean Beleth to Jacobus de Voragine, the figure of assimilatio facilitates the conflation of a discretelinear and an iterative model of temporality in such representations, the logical relations within which are analyzed here.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42945603
Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Northern Illinois University
Issue: i40113403
Date: 4 1, 1990
Author(s): Ronen Ruth
Abstract: Temporal concepts such as "order," "chronology," "narrative present," and "exposition" are extensively used in narrative theory. Accepted notions of time can contribute to our understanding of these concepts and can allow us to question their "temporal" meaning in the context of fictional narrative. Fictional time may be thought of as a system of relations unique to the fictional world after real time. Theories of narrative tend to adopt an essentialist interpretation of temporal concepts and to ignore the ontological divergence between time in fiction and time in reality. As a result, concepts such as "exposition" or "present" appear which appear to carry a direct "temporal" meaning, actually function in a way that indicates the nature of time in fiction. In fiction, temporal divisions and time segmentations do not just construct a temporal structure; they also mark degrees of factuality in the fictional world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42945827
Journal Title: Bibliothèque de l’École des chartes
Publisher: Société de l'École des Chartes
Issue: i40114324
Date: 6 1, 2000
Author(s): SARMANT Thierry
Abstract: Ibid., p. 131, 138-139.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42957733
Journal Title: Dialectica
Publisher: Blackwell-Wiley Publishing
Issue: i40115221
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Tonoiu Vasile
Abstract: La personnalité, l'activité et l'œuvre de Gonseth peuvent être interprétés organiquement dans une instructive pédagogie de dialogue. L'auteur évoque a) la structure dialogale intime de Gonseth, b) les dialogues peu fructueux qu'il a entretenus avec le Cercle de Vienne, puis lors des Entretiens de Zurich, c) les dialogues qu'il a imaginés dans Les mathématiques et la réalité entre trois personnages: Parfait, Sceptique et Idoine, auxquels vient s'ajouter à la fin le Nouvel Idoine, d) les rencontres avec les néo-scolastiques à Rome, e) la «doctrine» explicite du dialogue exposée dans La loi du dialogue. L'auteur s'interroge aussi sur les conditions d'un dialogue fécond et sur les obstacles qui peuvent s'y opposer, (en particulier: l'incompatibilité des référentiels). Gonseth the man, his life and his work can be interpreted organically in an instructive account of dialogue. The author treats the following topics: a) Gonseth's intimate dialogical structure, b) the fruitless dialogues he had with the Vienna Circle and then at the Entretiens de Zurich, c) his imaginary dialogues in Les mathématiques et la réalité between the characters Perfect, Sceptic and Appropriate, and finally New Appropriate, d) his contacts with neo-scholastics at Rome, e) the explicit 'doctrine' of dialogue presented in La loi du dialogue. The article is also concerned with conditions for a fruitful dialogue and with obstacles that can stand in the way (in particular, the incompatibility of reference systems). Die Persönlichkeit, die Aktivitäten und das Werk Gonseths können im Rahmen einer lehrreichen Pädagogik des Dialogs einheitlich interpretiert werden. Der Autor erörtert a) die intime Dialogstruktur Gonseths; b) die wenig fruchtbaren Dialoge, die er mit dem Wiener Kreis und während der Zürcher Gespräche führte; c) die Dialoge dreier Figuren, die er in Les mathématiques et la réalité in Szene gesetzt hat: Perfekt, Skeptiker und Geeignet, zu denen sich am Schluss der Neue Geeignete hinzugesellt; d) die Begegnungen mit den Neo-Scholastikern in Rom; e) die explizite «Doktrin» des Dialogs, die in La loi du dialogue dargelegt ist. Der Aufsatz stellt auch die Frage nach den Bedingungen eines befruchtenden Dialogs und nach den Hindernissen, die sich ihm entgegenstellen können (im besonderen: die Inkompatibilität der Bezugsrahmen).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42969165
Journal Title: Francofonia
Publisher: Università di Bologna
Issue: i40116705
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): Lalagianni Vasiliki
Abstract: E. Awumey, Le Périple du moi: mouvements et situations d'exil , «Palabres»,
dossier «L'immigration et ses avatars», vol. VII, n. 1-2, 2007, pp. 223-242.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43016532
Journal Title: Francofonia
Publisher: Università di Bologna
Issue: i40116711
Date: 4 1, 2013
Author(s): Squarzina Anna Isabella
Abstract: J. Bres, Habiter le temps : le couple imparfait/passé simple en français, «Lan-
gages», n. 127, 1997, p. 91.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43016648
Journal Title: Francofonia
Publisher: Università di Bologna
Issue: i40116725
Date: 4 1, 2007
Author(s): Plamondon Jean-François
Abstract: J.-M. Schaeffer, Le Récit fictif, in J. Bessière, Études romanesques 2, Paris,
Lettres modernes, 1994, p. 51.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43016937
Journal Title: Médiévales
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de Vincennes-Paris VIII avec le concours du Centre National du Livre et du Centre de la Recherche Scientifique
Issue: i40117109
Date: 4 1, 1998
Author(s): BOUCHERON Patrick
Abstract: Ibid., p. 645.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43027001
Journal Title: Médiévales
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de Vincennes (Paris 8, Saint-Denis) soutenue par l'Institut des Sciences Humaines et Sociales du CNRS
Issue: i40117138
Date: 4 1, 2013
Author(s): COURROUX Pierre
Abstract: G. Kurth, La Cité de Liège au Moyen Âge, Bruxelles, 1910, t. I, p. XXVII-XXVIII.
Link: http://dx.doi.org/10.4000/medievales.7004', 'an external site', 'external-fulltext-any
Journal Title: Poetica
Publisher: Wilhelm Fink GmbH & Co. KG
Issue: i40117170
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Fulda Daniel
Abstract: Zitate ebd.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43028187
Journal Title: Poetica
Publisher: Wilhelm Fink GmbH & Co. Verlags-KG
Issue: i40117194
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Bleumer Hartmut
Abstract: Joseph Bernhart. Mit einem Vorwort von Ernst Ludwig Grasmück, Frankfurt
a. M.: Insel-Verlag, 1998, XI, 25, 32-30, 39, S. 653-667.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43028513
Journal Title: Il Saggiatore musicale
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: i40117266
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Capogreco Nadia
Abstract: R. Char, Partage formel, in Fureur et mystère, Paris, Gallimard, 1962.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43029449
Journal Title: Il Saggiatore musicale
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: i40117272
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Senici Emanuele
Abstract: http://www. parterre.
com.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43029593
Journal Title: Il Saggiatore musicale
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: i40117308
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Della Seta Fabrizio
Abstract: Aristotele, Poetica, 1450 a.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43030385
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117518
Date: 12 1, 1977
Author(s): BOUILLARD Henri
Abstract: l'Autre, pp. 289-291
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43034031
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117526
Date: 3 1, 1980
Author(s): MARTINEAU Emmanuel
Abstract: P. Conen, o.e., p. 110 sq.,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43034286
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117536
Date: 9 1, 1982
Author(s): VUILLEMIN Jules
Abstract: Stoicorum
veterum fragmenta, I, n°497, p. 111.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43034567
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne et Ses Fils
Issue: i40117591
Date: 12 1, 1969
Author(s): Sales Michel
Abstract: De l'Actualité historique, t. I, notamment pp. 113-119.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43036087
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117594
Date: 3 1, 1974
Author(s): RADNITZKY Gérard
Abstract: (Lübbe, 1972).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43036188
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117612
Date: 3 1, 1991
Author(s): BERNIER Rejane
Abstract: Pirlot, 1989: 269-273.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43036798
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117674
Date: 7 1, 2004
Author(s): GREISCH JEAN
Abstract: Jean-Claude Monod, La querelle de la sécularisation de Hegel à Blumenberg, op. cit.,
p. 290.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038102
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117697
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): DALISSIER MICHEL
Abstract: Motoori Norinaga (本居宣長 1730-
1801) dans s「主体の鏡と物神としてのことば」 shutai no kagami to busshin toshite no
kotoba, Les mots comme miroirs du sujet et idoles,『坂部恵集』 Oeuvres choisies de Sakabe
Megumi, Iwanami, Tokyo, 2007, t. V., p. 23-47.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038554
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117699
Date: 6 1, 2009
Author(s): PORÉE JÉRÔME
Abstract: La critique et la conviction, op. cit., p. 235.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038586
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117701
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): GABELLIERI EMMANUEL
Abstract: « Incommensurabilité et médiation: la
triple puissance de la métaphysique » in Penser l'être de l'action. La métaphysique du dernier
Blondel (E. Tourpe dir.), Peeters, Louvain, 2000, p. 101-118.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038615
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117718
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): DASTUR FRANÇOISE
Abstract: Ibid., p. 138.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038896
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117721
Date: 12 1, 2013
Author(s): HOUSSET EMMANUEL
Abstract: L'intelligence de la pitié, Paris, Cerf (La nuit
surveillée), 2003.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038955
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117738
Date: 6 1, 1990
Author(s): GRONDIN Jean
Abstract: Wahrheit und Methode, p. 323 (Ges. Werke, II, p. 346) ; tr. fr. p. 184.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43039435
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117743
Date: 6 1, 2014
Author(s): THOUARD DENIS
Abstract: Das individuelle Allgemeine, Francfort, Suhrkamp, 1977,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43039534
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117744
Date: 9 1, 2014
Author(s): BENSUSSAN GÉRARD
Abstract: Entre nous, éd. cit., p. 29.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43039550
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117744
Date: 9 1, 2014
Author(s): FAGNIEZ GUILLAUME
Abstract: R. Aron, La philosophie critique de l'histoire, op. cit., p. 30.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43039553
Journal Title: Brigham Young University Studies
Publisher: Brigham Young University
Issue: i40118023
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Richardson Joseph E.
Abstract: Thomas S. Monson, "True to the Faith," Ensign 36 (May 2006): 18-21.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43044890
Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40118202
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Joubert S J
Abstract: The linguistic structures of the letter of Jude encode and articulate important religious and social meanings, such as the author and his readers' (and their adversaries') position within their social universe, as well as their beliefs, practices, norms and values. At the same time the letter also affects the circumstances which occasioned its writing, whether to expose and label Jude's opponents as evil intruders who must be exposed of, or to actively maintain the religious purity of the community to which it is addressed. Jude's language is a language of social and religious control.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43047968
Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40118210
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): van Aarde Andries G
Abstract: Smit 1987:6-9
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43048164
Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40118216
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Kourie Celia
Abstract: 2 Peter
1:4,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43048293
Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118945
Date: 9 1, 2008
Author(s): Bosco Domenico
Abstract: M. de Certeau, L'énonciation mystique, «Recherches de science religieuse»,
(1976), pp. 183-215.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43063842
Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118948
Date: 3 1, 2010
Author(s): Azzariti-Fumaroli Luigi
Abstract: L. Tolstoj, Detstvo (1852), in Id., Sobranie socinenij, Hudozestvennaja literatura,
I, Moskva 1960; trad. it. di R. Olkienizkaia-Naldi, Infanzia, Passigli, Firenze 1998, p. 39.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43063903
Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118949
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Marassi Massimo
Abstract: Mangiagalli, Teoria del fondamento, p. 615.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43063924
Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118949
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Raynaud Savina
Abstract: G. Spinosa, Il metodo
storiografico di M.-D. Chenu medievista e lessicografo, RFNS, 94 (2002), pp. 347-354.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43063927
Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40119281
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Schnell C W
Abstract: The tradition-historical method emerged at the turn of the century. It is used to understand biblical texts not only as products of the final author or redactor, but as documents which evolved over a period of time within a particular society. Consequently it grapples with the problems of how such texts refers to historical events, how one relates individual and collective religious experience and what authority these texts have in the lives of Christians today. Luke 12:35-48 is used to investigate the application of these ideas to practical exegesis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43070302
Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40119281
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Smit D J
Abstract: The different "readings and readers" are evaluated, with a view to responsible hermeneutics, on three levels. First, the question is asked as to whether the different readings took place in a responsible way in terms of their own presuppositions and goals. Some general remarks are made on the possible comparison and integration of these readings are made. Second, the question is asked whether some of these readings are more appropriate, responsible or legitimate readings of literature than others. The point is argued that such an evaluation cannot be timeless and abstract, but will depend on the purpose of the reader. Third, the question is asked how the specific pencope, namely a text from the Christian New Testament, can be responsibly read by New Testament scholars.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43070311
Journal Title: Transformation
Publisher: Paternoster Press
Issue: i40119293
Date: 12 1, 1997
Author(s): Pluss Jean Daniel
Abstract: The communication of the gospel is sometimes in an 'insider language' of transcendant realities with which the secular world is unfamiliar. How significant an impediment is this? Consider fairy tales are universally understood. They share many of the same elements and functions as testimonies which are at the heart of pentecostalism. We can use stories and testimonies in our ministries? Thus to communicate with secular people we must be willing to put the stories of our lives on trial. The trans-personal dimension must be communicated, for religious experiences can be powerful. The challenge is to find ways to use stories and metaphors to speak to a secularised world of the major doctrines as expressed in The Foursquare Gospel' without losing any of its power.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43070457
Journal Title: The Library Quarterly: Information, Community, Policy
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i404682
Date: 7 1, 1994
Author(s): Molyneux John M.
Abstract: Wallace [47]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4309044
Journal Title: The Library Quarterly: Information, Community, Policy
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i397373
Date: 10 1, 1984
Author(s): Jonas John M.
Abstract: The growth of knowledge in any discipline depends on discursive practice for the assertion of claims and the assessment of claims. At times, however, that discursive practice may be ideological in nature. Ideology is here defined as being grounded in efforts at domination--the ascendance of some ideas over others. Examination of the incidence of ideology in discourse is necessarily interpretive; part of this article explores the application of hermeneutics to the analysis of discourse. A set of examples of discursive practice in library and information science (LIS), purposely selected, is examined for ideological intent. Ultimately, the aim is to demonstrate that some discourse is ideological in nature and purpose, and to point out the implications of such discursive practice for knowledge growth in LIS.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4309562
Journal Title: Kirchliche Zeitgeschichte
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht GmbH & Co. KG
Issue: i40120566
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Hartweg Frédéric
Abstract: Etymologisches Wörterbuch des Deutschen, Berlin 1989, 1409.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43100057
Journal Title: Cahiers d'économie politique / Papers in Political Economy
Publisher: L'Harmattan
Issue: i40121039
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Ferey Samuel
Abstract: Dworkin 1988, pp. 48-51.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43107704
Journal Title: Cahiers d'économie politique / Papers in Political Economy
Publisher: L'Harmattan
Issue: i40121042
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Rieucau Nicolas
Abstract: G. T. Tanselle (2006, p. 5).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43107739
Journal Title: Cahiers d'économie politique / Papers in Political Economy
Publisher: L'Harmattan
Issue: i40121221
Date: 4 1, 2003
Author(s): Favereau Olivier
Abstract: Favereau, Biencourt et Eymard-Duvemay [2002]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43111556
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121551
Date: 6 1, 2002
Author(s): GENSBURGER SARAH
Abstract: Maurice Halbwachs, op. cit., p. 113.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43119888
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121555
Date: 6 1, 2003
Author(s): JOBARD FABIEN
Abstract: Michel Dobry (Sociologie des crises politiques,
op. cit.) et de Michel Crozier (Le phénomène bureaucratique, op. cit.).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43119939
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121586
Date: 6 1, 2009
Author(s): RIBERT ÉVELYNE
Abstract: A. Sayad, ibid., p. 17.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43120512
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121596
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): Traini Christophe
Abstract: Olivier Fillieule (dir), Le désengagement militant, Paris,
Belin, 2005.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43120715
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation Nationale des Sciences Politiques
Issue: i40121636
Date: 12 1, 1994
Author(s): SANTISO Javier
Abstract: Max Weber, Le savant et le politique, Paris, Plön, 1959, p. 168.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43121717
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121655
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): DÉLOYE YVES
Abstract: d'Alfredo Joignant, « Pour une sociologie
cognitive... », art. cité, p. 150.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43121988
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40123136
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): DE SOUZA SALLES SERGIO
Abstract: Ricœur, Paul—"Paul Ricoeur: a Declaração Universal dos Direitos Humanos—um
novo sopro", art. cit., p. 212.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43151548
Journal Title: Philosophical Topics
Publisher: The University of Arkansas Press
Issue: i40123370
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Keedus Liisi
Abstract: In Arendt's interrogations of political modernity, the concepts of history and politics have an ambiguous relation. On the one hand, she insisted that the performative character of politics as action was bound to its narrative aspect as remembrance. She was also a fervent proponent of integrating the historical sense into political understanding. On the other hand, Arendt characterized the modern historical sensibility from the point of view of politics as a "ghastly absurdity," and asserted that the political thought of our times needed to free itself both "from history" and "from thinking in historical terms." This paper explores the different meanings that Arendt granted to "history" as a (anti) political force and to historical sensibility as the basis for political understanding. It argues that not only were Arendt's rejection of the modern concept of history and its politics of history central for her critique, but that it was one of the key concerns that shaped the articulation of her own theory of action. The paper also examines the problem against the background of the intellectual tradition of Arendt's youth and in particular its uncompromising antihistoricism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43154604
Journal Title: American Sociological Review
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i40124720
Date: 10 1, 2013
Author(s): Steidl Christina R.
Abstract: Recent research on collective memory suggests that commemorations of difficult pasts take either a multivocal or a fragmented form. I suggest these forms exist as ideal types for the initial commemoration, but the commemorative field, as a whole, remains dynamic over time, effectively shifting between forms. This study traces the creation, maintenance, and transformation of collective memory of the May 4, 1970 shootings at Kent State from 1970 to 2013 using archival sources, media accounts, and participant observation. In examining the commemorative field at Kent, I theorize the existence of a third commemorative form—the integrated commemorative field, which allows for the expression of divergent narratives and the maintenance of separate commemorative spaces while simultaneously enhancing social solidarity through shared meta-narratives that stress overarching values, like human rights or scientific inquiry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43187504
Journal Title: Anthropological Journal of European Cultures
Publisher: Berghahn Journals
Issue: i40127031
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): GIORDANO CHRISTIAN
Abstract: This article analyses the difficult relation between anthropology and history. The point, therefore, is to show how anthropology conceptualises the past differently from history as a discipline. Beginning with the differences between anthropology and history in terms of the concept of time, the article highlights that while for history time is concrete, objective and exogenous to human beings, for anthropology it is characterised by its being condensed, collectively subjective and endogenous. By analyzing actual examples, the article shows that the anthropologist is not interested in the past per se, but rather in the past as a dimension of the present. Accordingly, actualised, revised and manipulated history as well as the role of the past in the present need to be taken into account. Consequently, history and the past have their own specific efficiency because they are also a form of knowledge and social resource mobilised by single individuals or groups to find their bearings and act accordingly in the present and likewise to plan the future.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43234561
Journal Title: Anthropological Yearbook of European Cultures
Publisher: Lit Verlag
Issue: i40127062
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Bellagamba Alice
Abstract: Hamilton (2002).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43234947
Journal Title: Verfassung und Recht in Übersee / Law and Politics in Africa, Asia and Latin America
Publisher: Institut für Internationale Angelegenheiten der Universität Hamburg
Issue: i40127374
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Njoya Jean
Abstract: Sèye, note 106, p. 3.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43239583
Journal Title: The Hungarian Historical Review
Publisher: Institute of History, Research Centre for the Humanities, Hungarian Academy of Sciences
Issue: i40128809
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Apor Péter
Abstract: Carlo Ginzburg, History, Rhetoric and Proof (Hanover, NH-London: University Press of New England,
1999), 5.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43265207
Journal Title: Revue des études slaves
Publisher: Institut d'études Slaves
Issue: i40129183
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Vrinat-Nikolov Marie
Abstract: Until about 2005, it was hard to find any publication about literature during the communist era or any important work concerning this period. Since then, this astonishing silence has given way to the publication in Bulgaria of several novels and hybrid writings. In the meantime occured not only literary, but also political and social events which changed the issue: isn't the real problem in Bulgaria today no longer the institutional, generational, historiographical or literary silence, but the dilemna between the collective or individual responsability? To cope with these problems, the author takes into account both the works of Paul Ricoeur concerning the excess of memory and the excess of oblivion, the blocked memory, manipulated memory, abusively controlled or obligated memory, and two emblematic books concerning the communist past as seen in the State Security files: The Watched Man by Vesko Branev, and Surveillance and Conditioning: the literary prose of the State security by Žerminal Čivikov. Ako flo 2005 r. JiHTepaTypHmrr kphthk MOHceme m ce nyzjH 3anjo 6i>jirapcKaTa jihtcparypa Bee ome npeMtJinaBa KOMyHHCTHneckoto MHHajio, 3 a m o see ome jinncBa 3HanHMa TBOp6a 3a TOBa MHHajio, to orroraBa H3JM3 0Xa peflHIja pOMaHH H TBOp6 H C XH6pHaeh )KaHp. Me^cAyBpeMeHHO ce cjiynnxa jiHTepaTypHH, HO H nO JIHTHH eCKH H COUHaJIHH ct»6hth«, kohto npeHacoHHxa KaTO ne jih npo6jieMaTHKaTa. H 3 rjie ^ a , cera npoGjieMa-THHHO e He TOJIKOBa MT»JIHaHHeTO - HHCTHTy- UHOHaJIHO, CeMeHHO-nOKOJieHHeCKO, HCTOpHOrpa(J)CKO, jiHTepaTypHO h t. h. - kojikoto AHJieMaTa Me>K,zjy KOJieKTHBHa h h h /jh b h - ayajiHa 0Tr0B0pH0CT. ToBa mchho me 6i>fle aHajiH3HpaHO b HacToamara cranM, kohto ce n030BaBa, o t e^Ha CTpaHa, Ha pa3BHBaHHTe o t IToji PHKbop noHOTHH 3a n p eK O M e p n a n aM em h n p e K O M e p m m o j i k o n aM em , 3a m o p M 0 3 e u a naMeT, M a n u n y n u p a n a naMeT h 3a d b JU fc eH a naMeT; o t apyra CTpaHa, Ha ^Be KHHrn, eM- 6jieMaTHHHH 3a OTHOUieHHeTO KT»M MHH3JIOTO, OTpa3eHO b ^ocneTaTa Ha flipHcaBHa cnryph o c t - Cjiedenmm noeex oт ecejiHH BpaHeB h Ha6juodeHue u pa3pa6omm: Xydootcecmeenama npo3a na JJ-bpotcaena cmypnocm ot ҖepMHHaji чиbиkob.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43272117
Journal Title: Revue des études slaves
Publisher: Institut d'études Slaves
Issue: i40129184
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): PLAGNE NICOLAS
Abstract: A. Lyzlov, Скифская история, 1116.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43272143
Journal Title: European Journal of Sociology / Archives Européennes de Sociologie / Europäisches Archiv für Soziologie
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40129912
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): SHOHAM HIZKY
Abstract: (Hann 2007).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43282182
Journal Title: Landscape Journal
Publisher: The University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i40132217
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Conan Michel
Abstract: The renewal of a dialog between landscape design and garden history demands a renewal of the questions and methods of garden history. This essay studies how garden reception and garden creation interact. It considers three main issues: first, it explores the domain of cultural expectations framing the engagement with a garden shared by users and creators at a given time—the poetical texture of gardens; second, the role of garden creation in exploiting, expanding or subverting this shared frame of expectations; and third, it proposes an approach—garden pragmatic—to study the broader interactions between garden creation and reception on the one hand, and social and cultural change on the other. The question of intersubjectivity—how do we share our sense and experiences of the world with others, and how do we transform them—is at the root of all the little stories—the fragments of a poetic of gardens—that propose new directions for garden history. Many of these stories have been presented during the last 15 years at symposia at Dumbarton Oaks where the author is presently the director of Garden and Landscape Studies. The general philosophy however had never been presented until the Fall 2004 when he published his "Essais de Poétique des Jardins." They were never made explicit at Dumbarton Oaks where each story only played its part in the theme of the symposium. Yet the whole course of ideas presented here results from these many exchanges with other scholars. This is why many footnotes make explicit references to their works. So, following the lead offered by this text or choosing a personal route, each reader may access many different voices that make garden history at present into a lively resource for pondering about the role of landscape creation in a multicultural world. These fragments of history are written to stimulate the designer's imagination, not to outline the course landscape design should follow.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43323728
Journal Title: Roczniki Filozoficzne / Annales de Philosophie / Annals of Philosophy
Publisher: Towarzystwa Naukowego, Katolickiego Uniwersytetu Lubelskiego
Issue: i40135031
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): WOLICKA ELŻBIETA
Abstract: The article of Elzbieta Wolicka is consecrated to the consideration of the phenomenon of time taken in the contexts of individual human experience, contemporary cultural situation and Christian faith. The starting point of the 1st part of the article is the fragment of Confessiones (ch. XI) of St. Augustine and the short parable of Franz Kafka entitled HE. The author of the article brings to the light the dialogical basis of the human perception of time and raises up the quaestion of "a hidden sabotage of trust" which is characteristic to the social relations of our times. This is also the one among many other factors of the so called "crisis of culture" (mal du siècle). The crisis consists of a feeling of a threat, a burden of the past and a fear of the future. The 2nd part of the article is concerned with the analysis of the eschatological meaning of some words of Christ in the Gospel of St. John (4, 23; 5, 25-29; 12, 13; 12, 27, 31). They reveal the Christian sense of the human temporal condition in the light of "the economy of salvation" and the dialogue between a believer and God. A catastrophic thrill, a feeling of existential paradox, a blockage of communication - the symptoms of the crisis of cultural conscience - could be described as "the edipse of God" (M. Buber) or "the abandonment of God" (J. Ellul) in the contemporary world. The Gospel points out that in the heart of human temporal experience there is still existing conversatio sacra and the presence of God in our history is actual.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43407775
Journal Title: Renaissance and Reformation / Renaissance et Réforme
Publisher: Canadian Society for Renaissance Studies / Société canadienne d'études de la Renaissance (CSRS / SCER), Pacific Northwest Renaissance Society (PNWRC), Toronto Renaissance and Reformation Colloquium (TRRC) and Victoria University Centre for Reformation and Renaissance Studies (CRRS)
Issue: i40136128
Date: 10 1, 2000
Author(s): LETOCHA DANIÈLE
Abstract: The term intellectuals(s) has been in use for scarcely more than one century. What is its definition? What conditions of possibility govern the emergence of the Modern intellectual? How many of these conditions can be traced to the past? The typological approach used here sets the origin of the intellectual's role and status in the new paradigm of power established in Carolingian times (781-804), which displayed a peculiar axiom: the idea that all Power is intrinsically divisible. This view was already five centuriesold when Petrarch claimed the autonomous position of cultural critic—not the Modern intellectual's status, but some of his authority, though on different grounds.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43445245
Journal Title: Studi Novecenteschi
Publisher: Istituti Editoriali e Poligrafici Internazionali
Issue: i40136381
Date: 6 1, 1997
Author(s): CORTELLESSA ANDREA
Abstract: W. Pedullà, C'è un eretico tra i classici, cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43449890
Journal Title: The American Archivist
Publisher: The Society of American Archivists
Issue: i40138415
Date: 7 1, 2013
Author(s): Brown Richard
Abstract: This essay explores a phenomenon familiar to archivists: the seamless moment of time and space within the remembering process when communities become aware of and must confront the fragility of public memory and make decisions about the management and preservation of their information resources. This decision point has recently been called the documentary moment. The authors' exploration of this concept focuses on the theories, strategies, methodologies, and processes formerly employed and now emerging at Library and Archives Canada (LAC) to facilitate the disposition of government's information resources. They also examine the challenges presented by the digital age on the documentary moment and whether corresponding philosophical or methodological changes to current institutional strategies, including macro-appraisal, are required.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43489653
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40141126
Date: 6 1, 2014
Author(s): Dodier Nicolas
Abstract: B. Glaser, A. Strauss, ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43550677
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40141126
Date: 6 1, 2014
Author(s): Smaoui Sélim
Abstract: Christophe Traini (dir.), Émotions... Mobilisations J, Paris, Presses de Sciences Po, 2009.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43550678
Journal Title: Urban History Review / Revue d'histoire urbaine
Publisher: Becker Associates
Issue: i40141579
Date: 10 1, 2010
Author(s): Zembrzycki Stacey
Abstract: Thousands of child Holocaust survivors arrived in Montreal, Quebec, between 1947 and 1952, looking to remake their lives, rebuild their families, and recreate their communities. Integration was not seamless. As survivors struggled to carve spaces for themselves within the established Canadian Jewish community, their difficult wartime stories were neither easily received nor understood. When remembering this period, survivors tend to speak about employment, education, dating, integration into both the pre-war Jewish community and the larger society, and, perhaps most importantly, the creation of their own social worlds within existing and new frameworks. Forged in a transitional and tumultuous period in Quebec's history, these social worlds, as this article demonstrates, are an important example of survivor agency. Although survivors recall the ways in which Canadian Jews helped them adjust to their new setting, by organizing a number of programs and clubs within various spaces—Jeanne Mance House, the Young Men's and Young Women's Hebrew Association, and the Jewish Public Library—they also speak about how they forged their own paths upon arriving in this postwar city. For instance, survivors created the New World Club, an informal and grassroots social organization where they could prioritize their own needs and begin to be understood as people, and not just survivors. Establishing the interconnections between these formal and informal social worlds, and specifically, how survivors navigated them, is central to understanding the process through which they were able to move beyond their traumatic pasts and start over. Nightmares and parties are parts of the same story, and here the focus is on the memories of young survivors who prioritized their social worlds. Des milliers d'enfants survivants de l'Holocauste sont arrivés à Montréal, au Québec, entre 1947 et 1952, cherchant à refaire leurs vies, reconstruire leurs familles et recréer leurs communautés. L'intégration n'était pas sans faille. Non seulement les survivants ont-ils du mal à se tailler une place au sein de la communauté juive canadienne existante, leurs pénibles récits de la guerre ne sont ni facilement reçus, ni facilement compris. Se rappelant cette période, les survivants ont tendance à parler de l'emploi, de l'éducation, de rencontres et d'intégration à la fois dans la communauté juive et la société d'avant-guerre et, plus encore, de la création de leurs propres univers sociaux dans de cadres établis ou récents. Créés dans une période transitoire et tumultueuse de l'histoire du Québec, ces mondes sociaux, comme le montre cet article, sont un exemple important de la volonté d'agir des survivants. Bien que les survivants rappellent comment les Juifs du Canada les ont aidés à s'adapter à leur nouveau contexte, en organisant un certain nombre déprogrammes et de clubs au sein de différents espaces - Jeanne Mance House, la Young Men's and Young Women's Hebrew Association et la Jewish Public Library - ils racontent aussi comment ils ont forgé leur propre voies en arrivant dans cette ville d'aprèsguerre. Par exemple, les survivants ont créés le New World Club, un organisme social informel et populaire où ils pouvaient donner priorité à leurs propres besoins et commencer à être compris comme êtres humains et non seulement comme survivants. Démontrer les interconnexions entre ces mondes sociaux formels et informels et, plus particulièrement, comment les survivants y ont navigué, est essentiel à la compréhension du processus par lequel ils ont pu dépasser leurs expériences traumatiques et repartir à zéro. Cauchemars et fêtes sont deux versants d'une même histoire; l'accent ici est mis sur les souvenirs des jeunes survivants qui ont accordé la priorité à leurs mondes sociaux.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43560282
Journal Title: Urban History Review / Revue d'histoire urbaine
Publisher: Becker Associates
Issue: i40141678
Date: 10 1, 2003
Author(s): Backouche Isabelle
Abstract: L'article analyse les difficultés de constitution d'un champ de recherches autonome autour de la ville en France tout en repérant les fructueuses pistes ouvertes par les recherches récentes pour cerner la spécificité de l'urbain. Trois d'entre elles sont approfondies: l'entrée par l'espace, l'attention à la diversité des acteurs, la valorisation du changement urbain. Ces trois interrogations sont déclinées sur des terrains urbains variés et des époques différentes, montrant que les convergences de la recherche en histoire urbaine passent par un intérêt primordial pour l'expérimentation et le dialogue avec d'autres disciplines. This paper analyzes the difficulties of conducting independent research on the subject of the city in France, while exploring fruitful areas of study opened by recent scholarship that defines the urban specificity. Three of these areas are dealt with in depth: the introduction of space as an analytical tool, attention to diverse forces, and the development of urban changes. These three areas draw upon varied urban fields of study at different times, thus showing how urban history research converges on key subjects for experimentation and dialogue with other disciplines.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43562312
Journal Title: Pacific Affairs
Publisher: University of British Columbia
Issue: i40143057
Date: 12 1, 2012
Author(s): Sejrup Jens
Abstract: China Times, "Jile Taiwan' xing fengbao, chuban 'Jile Dongjing' fan zhi?" ['Paradise
Taiwan' Sex Outrage -Should a 'Paradise Tokyo' Be Published in Response?] 16January 2002,
morning ed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43590473
Journal Title: Anabases
Publisher: Université de Toulouse-Le Mirail
Issue: i40143302
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Payen Pascal
Abstract: Thucydide I, 22, 4.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43596460
Journal Title: Pallas
Publisher: Presses Universitaires du Mirail
Issue: i40143853
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): PAYEN Pascal
Abstract: Ibid., XXIV, 2.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43605436
Journal Title: Pallas
Publisher: Presses Universitaires du Mirail
Issue: i40143884
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): PAILLER Jean-Marie
Abstract: Schmidt 1979.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43605945
Journal Title: Pallas
Publisher: Presses Universitaires du Mirail
Issue: i40143908
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): PAYEN Pascal
Abstract: Ibid., I, 1, 1.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43606498
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia / Aletheia - Associção Científica e Cultural
Issue: i40145210
Date: 1 1, 2015
Author(s): GILBERT PAUL
Abstract: Brague, Rémi — Am moyen du Moyen-Âge: philosophies médiévales en chrétienté,
en judaïsme et Islam. Chatou : Éditions de la transparence, 2006.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43630978
Journal Title: Der Staat
Publisher: Duncker & Humblot
Issue: i40145734
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Maschke Günter
Abstract: Zur Kritik an den dortigen Thesen: G.
Maschke, Die Carl Schmitt-Diskussion in Spanien: Criticón 87 (1985), S. 41.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43642597
Journal Title: Latin American Research Review
Publisher: Latin American Studies Association
Issue: i40147413
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Rotondo Santiago Alfaro
Abstract: Entrevista a Richard Enriquez y Raúl Cconcha, 8 de julio del 2009, Lima.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43670143
Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40148884
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): THIREAU ISABELLE
Abstract: Perry and Seiden (2000).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43694303
Journal Title: Journal of the Royal Musical Association
Publisher: Taylor & Francis
Issue: i40150967
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): MOORE ALLAN F.
Abstract: Sentimental Journey (Carlton, 1996).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43741609
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40153127
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Carlson Thomas A.
Abstract: Ignace d'Antioche, in Die Apostolichen Väter. éd. J.A. Fischer, Darmstadt, 1956, p. 158-161.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43775658
Journal Title: Dialectical Anthropology
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40160154
Date: 12 1, 2014
Author(s): Medina Rafael Alarcón
Abstract: https://www.youtube.com/watch7vs-CGYPCvnlZg.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43895120
Journal Title: Estudos Feministas
Publisher: Centro de Comunicação e Expressão - CCE Centro de Filosofia e Clências Humanas - CFH Universidade Federal de Santa Catarina - UFSC
Issue: i40160634
Date: 8 1, 2014
Author(s): Freire Ida Mara
Abstract: ARENDT, 1996, p. 51
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43904231
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITÀ GREGORIANA
Issue: i40161509
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): D'Agostino Simone
Abstract: E. Berti, Sumphilosophein. La vita nel-
l'accademia di Platone, Roma - Bari, 2010.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43922418
Journal Title: Études rurales
Publisher: Editions de l'Ecole des Hautes Etudes en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i40163031
Date: 6 1, 2014
Author(s): Deffontaines Nicolas
Abstract: Pour expliquer le suicide des agriculteurs, les médias se limitent généralement au seul facteur économique. Une approche comprehensive de cette question révèle d'autres conditions objectives de production de ce qu'on peut appeler la « souffrance sociale ». Le déséquilibre structurel entre l'organisation prescrite et l'organisation réelle du travail génère chez les agriculteurs un sentiment de pénibilité mentale. Tenus de répondre à des impératifs d'autonomie et de réalisation de soi, ces derniers ne disposent pas tous des mêmes ressources sociales pour parvenir à une image positive d'eux-mêmes. Pour se développer, la souffrance suicidaire s'appuie en effet sur la distribution inégale du capital économique, culturel et d'autochtonie. When explaining suicide among farmers, the media tend to focus exclusively on economic factors. This paper argues that adopting a more comprehensive approach to the issue highlights other conditions of production of what might be termed "social suffering". It is suggested that the structural imbalance between the prescribed and actual organization of work causes mental pain among farmers. The paper argues that amid increasing pressure to demonstrate greater autonomy and self-realization, farmers may not have the same social resources for developing a positive self-image. Research shows that an unequal distribution of economic and cultural capital and capital of autochtony leads to increased suicidal thoughts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43948334
Journal Title: Rivista di Storia della Filosofia (1984-)
Publisher: Franco Angeli
Issue: i40167014
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Piazza Marco
Abstract: M. Piazza, Introduzione , in Maine de Biran, Osservazioni sulle divisioni orga-
niche del cervello , cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44023819
Journal Title: Mosaic: An Interdisciplinary Critical Journal
Publisher: University of Manitoba
Issue: i40167316
Date: 6 1, 2003
Author(s): WOOD ANDELYS
Abstract: In Mrs. Dalloway, landmarks of 1920s London offer readers a web of spatial and temporal relationships: the novel's walks are located specifically but also problematically. Attention to Woolf's careful interweaving of time and place leads to fuller understanding of Mrs. Dalloway and of the London in its pages.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44029458
Journal Title: Mosaic: An Interdisciplinary Critical Journal
Publisher: University of Manitoba
Issue: i40167319
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): TIERNEY-TELLO MARY BETH
Abstract: This essay analyzes the relationship between text and image in La destructión delreino by Miguel Gutiérrez, with photographs by Julio Olavarria. The essay argues that the authors perform a critical type of memory work that allows their art, here photography and narration, to become a method for mourning and moving beyond the impasse produced by the guilt and the sense of loss experienced by the social subject in times of trauma.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44029493
Journal Title: Economic and Political Weekly
Publisher: Sameeksha Trust
Issue: i397821
Date: 8 29, 1994
Author(s): Sollosy Margit
Abstract: This article looks at the short stories of Saadat Hasan Manto in Urdu about the Partition and of Orkeny, a Hungarian Jewish writer about the Holocaust and finds that by adopting a critical distance both Manto and Orkeny were able to evolve narrative strategies which invited the readers' response and stimulated agency. By countering moralising and sentimentality in their narrative strategies they enabled the reader to deal with and go beyond the paralysing effects of such traumatic experiences.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4405763
Journal Title: Logique et Analyse
Publisher: Centre National Belge de Recherches de Logique
Issue: i40170534
Date: 12 1, 1993
Author(s): DE PRAETERE Thomas
Abstract: Wittgenstein L., On Certainty, § 142, transi, by D. Paul & G.E.M. Anscombe, Oxford,
1979.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44084387
Journal Title: Economic and Political Weekly
Publisher: Sameeksha Trust
Issue: i398800
Date: 11 05, 1993
Author(s): Devanagari Alok
Abstract: The violence that accompanied India's partition in 1947 was of such fiendishness that it has defied understanding. Fictional writings about this period express this bewilderment. They also portray pre-partition times of tolerance. The writers deal with the violence itself in different ways - redemptively, pessimistically or cynically. A survey.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4408572
Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'Ecole Biblique et Archéologique Française
Issue: i40170759
Date: 10 1, 1987
Author(s): Grelot Pierre
Abstract: The Priority ..., pp. 60-62
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44088880
Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'Ecole Biblique et Archéologique Française
Issue: i40170946
Date: 7 1, 2009
Author(s): Mies Françoise
Abstract: J. Heinemann, Prayer in the Talmud, p. 99.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44091301
Journal Title: The Canadian Journal of Irish Studies
Publisher: Canadian Association for Irish Studies
Issue: i40173851
Date: 1 1, 2016
Author(s): Alcobia-Murphy Shane
Abstract: While the Good Friday Agreement heralded a new beginning in Northern Ireland, its promotion of amnesty and amnesia, and its "rhetorical dismemberment of the past," effectively occluded the experiences of victims. Rather than engage in the seductive embrace of cultural amnesia, much Northern Irish art focuses upon the dangers of forgetting the past. For visual artists and writers alike, a wilful neglect of history may result in the return of the repressed and in psychic breakdown on both the communal and individual levels. Works by Jack Pakenham, Ciaran Carson, Colin Davidson, Frank McGuinness, and Willie Doherty use the trope of "haunting" to allow readers/viewers to bear witness to the plight of those left behind by the Agreement's rhetoric and to understand their post-conflict trauma. Bien que l'Accord du Vendredi saint annonçât un nouveau début pour l'Irlande du Nord, il eut comme résultat, de par sa promotion d'une amnistie combinée à une amnésie forcée, ainsi que son démembrement rhétorique du passé, de nier le vécu des victimes. Plutôt que de se laisser subjuguer par la séduction de l'amnésie culturelle, une grande partie de l'expression artistique de l'Irlande du Nord se concentre sur le danger d'oublier le passé. Pour les plasticiens aussi bien que les écrivains, une négligence délibérée de l'histoire pourrait ramener la répression et occasionner des blessures psychiques aussi bien au niveau communautaire que de l'individu. Les œuvres de Jack Pakenham, Ciaran Carson, Colin Davidson, Frank McGuinness, et Willie Doherty déploient le trope de la « hantise » pour permettre aux lecteurs et au public de témoigner de la souffrance de ceux qui ont été laissés pour compte par la rhétorique de l'Accord, et de mieux comprendre leur traumatisme post-conflit
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44160361
Journal Title: Cahiers d'Extrême-Asie
Publisher: Ecole Française d'Extrême-Orient
Issue: i40174176
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Faure Bernard
Abstract: Dominick LaCapra,
Rethinking Intellectual History: Texts, Contexts, Language (Ithaca, New York, 1983).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44169122
Journal Title: Economic and Political Weekly
Publisher: Sameeksha Trust
Issue: i401725
Date: 6 09, 2004
Author(s): Foucault Ranabir
Abstract: Can a historical event, such as Partition, be understood as an action that "resulted" from complex, wide forces of history or also as an event continually brought into being by the play of subject memories? A relationship of complementarity exists between the problems internal to history and the demands and desires of memory, so much so that together they form integral parts of a single operation, the historiographical operation. Yet memory sometimes appears the obverse of history making. Human action, as this article remonstrates, sometimes overcomes the bounds of passivity imposed by memory and this is also what determines history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4418297
Journal Title: International Review of the Aesthetics and Sociology of Music
Publisher: Department for Music and Musicology of the Croatian Academy of Sciences and Arts, Croatian Musicological Society, Music Academy of the University of Zagreb
Issue: i40177262
Date: 12 1, 2016
Author(s): Yoon Sunny
Abstract: Sacred music has always been a source of controversy throughout history since it is an integral part of the liturgy. Contemporary Christian music (CCM) has reached a pinnacle of controversy as its realm of consumption expands globally and inter-denominationally. This study was inspired by the idea of Ricoeur's phenomenology of religion to examine the contemporary practice of liturgy and sacred music. This brings into discussion the historical controversy and cultural milieu of adopting popular culture into youth ministry. Korean case is important because Korea represents one of the strongest Christian populations in the world and at the same time challenges - a drop in the number of young members and a huge generational gap in its church congregations. In order to scrutinize the concrete process of youth culture in the Christian community, an empirical study of youth ministry in seven mega churches in Seoul in South Korean was conducted as a case study. Sakralna glazba oduvijek je tijekom povijesti bila izvor kontroverzi jer predstavlja integrálni dio liturgije, a povijest glazbe je iz nje izrasla. Suvremena kršèanska glazba dostigla je vrhunac kontroverzije kad se njezino potrošaèko podruèje proširilo globalno i medukonfesionalno. Ovaj je članak nastao na temelju Ricoeurove fenomenologije religije i nastoji ispitati suvremenu praksu u liturgiji i sakralnoj glazbi u svjetlu nasljeda povijesne kontroverze i kultúrne sredine u prihvaćanju populárne kultúre u mladenačkoj službi božjoj. Teologija glazbe, o kojoj su raspravljali u 16. stoljeèu Luther, Zwingli i Calvin, osobito je korisna za konzultiranje pri suvremenom prilagodavanju na populárnu kulturu u crkvi. Štoviše, humanizam usaden u liturgijsku reformaciju u razdoblju renesanse otvára filozofijsko pitanje čovjekova identiteta pred licem božanskoga, o èemu se raspravljalo tijekom moderne i postmoderne povijesti sve do danas. Kako bi se pažljivo ispitao konkrétni proces mladenačke kulture u kršćanskoj zajednici, provedeno je kao studija slučaja empirijsko istraživanje mladenačke službe božje u mega crkvama Južne Koreje. Korejsko je sluèaj važan jer Koreja predstavlja jednu od najjaèih kršèanskih populacija u svijetu, dok je s druge strane izložena izazovima kao što je primjerice pad broja mladih vjernika i ogromni generacijski jaz u njezinim crkvenim kongregacijama. Razmatranje mladenačkih kongregacija u sedam mega crkava u Seulu i tekstuaina analiza mladenačke službe božje s težištem na glazbu pruža informacije kóje povezuju filozofske rasprave o teologiji glazbe s pitanjem identiteta uključenog u hermeneutiku glazbene prakse u crkvama. Semiotièki prístup glazbenoj analizi prihvaèen je kao korisno sredstvo za povezivanje ovih empirijskih podataka s njihovim filozofijskim interpretacijama i za ispitivanje glazbene štruktúre i narativne štruktúre tekstova.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44234974
Journal Title: Cultural Geographies
Publisher: SAGE
Issue: i40178171
Date: 4 1, 2012
Author(s): Johnson Nuala C
Abstract: Drawing on the theoretical insights of Paul Ricoeur this paper investigates the geographies of public remembrance in a post-conflict society. In Northern Ireland, where political divisions have found expression through acts of extreme violence over the past 30 years, questions of memory and an amnesty for forgetting have particular resonance both at the individual and societal level, and render Ricoeur's framework particularly prescient. Since the signing of the Belfast Agreement in 1998, initiating the Peace Process through consociational structures, discovering a nomenclature and set of practices which would aid in the rapprochement of a deeply divided society has presented a complex array of issues. In this paper I examine the various practices of public remembrance of the 1998 bombing of Omagh as a means of understanding how memory-spaces evolve in a post-conflict context. In Omagh there were a variety of commemorative practices instituted and each, in turn, adopted a different contour towards achieving reconciliation with the violence and grief of the bombing. In particular the Garden of Light project is analysed as a collective monument which, with light as its metaphysical centre, invited the populace to reflect backward on the pain of the bombing while at the same time enabling the society to look forward toward a peaceful future where a politics of hope might eclipse a politics of despair.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44251471
Journal Title: Esprit
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i40179614
Date: 7 1, 2001
Author(s): Maréchal Jean-Paul
Abstract: R. Reich, l'Économie mondialisée, Paris, Dunod, 1993, p. 231.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44290354
Journal Title: Journal of Educational Media, Memory & Society
Publisher: Berghahn Journals
Issue: i40180805
Date: 10 1, 2014
Author(s): Ghosh Shreya
Abstract: If nations are "imagined communities" as many theorists like to define them, then they need an ideology to create a cohesive imagination. In modern times, the project of writing "history" has been an important instrument in the service of this ideological purpose of justifying and reproducing the modern nation-state as the predestined and legitimate container of collective consciousness. School textbooks, at least in South Asia, have long been among the most exploited media for the presentation of the history of the national collective. This essay is a study of school textbooks in Bangladesh. It looks at narrative representations of selected episodes from the past, both pre- and postindependence, in order to reflect on how they construct "history". Through this work I endeavor to relate textual images to issues of community relations and identity by identifying and sharing the ways in which the audience for nationalist discourse is created, nurtured, and secured through symbolic means.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44320033
Journal Title: Estudios Sociológicos
Publisher: El Colegio de México
Issue: i40180880
Date: 8 1, 2017
Author(s): Madariaga Laura Ortiz
Abstract: Gaceta Oficial del Distrito Federal, Programa Parcial de Desarrollo Urbano de la Zona
de Santa Fe, 4 de mayo de 2010.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44321363
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE LA CONCORDE
Issue: i40181981
Date: 1 1, 1971
Author(s): Gouhier Henri
Abstract: Raymond Lebè-
gue : Tragique et dénouement heureux dans V ancien théâtre français, dans Le
Théâtre tragique..., ouvr. cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44354216
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE LA CONCORDE
Issue: i40182011
Date: 1 1, 1968
Author(s): Christoff Daniel
Abstract: Correspondance... ; texte cité par P. Thévenaz, «Métaphysique et desti-
née » in L'Homme , « Etre et Penser », cahier 1, 1943, p. 47.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44355283
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182079
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): Basset Lytta
Abstract: A. Gouhier, Pour une métaphysique du pardon, Paris 1969, p. 584. On trouve une
analyse philosophique du pardon chez V. Jankelevitch, Le pardon, Paris 1967.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44356901
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182092
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Gisel Pierre
Abstract: Gadamer, dans le
collectif Hermeneutik und Ideologiekritik, Francfort, Suhrkamp, 1971
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44357331
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182105
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Römer Thomas
Abstract: J. Moltmann, Der gekreuzigte Gott, München, C. Kaiser, 1972; traduction
française: Le Dieu crucifié : la croix du Christ, fondement et critique de la théologie
chrétienne, Paris, Cerf, 1978 (2
éd.), p. 13-14.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44357942
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182109
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Ferry Jean-Marc
Abstract: P. Ricœur, «Sanction, réhabilitation, pardon», in Le Juste, op. cit., p. 199.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44358147
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182117
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Vanni Michel
Abstract: S. Mosès, L'ange de
l'histoire. Rosenzweig, Benjamin, Scholem, Paris, Seuil, 1992.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44358471
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182118
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Tétaz Jean-Marc
Abstract: Friedrich
Wilhelm Kantzenbach, Evangelium und Dogma. Die Bewältigung des theologischen
Problems der Dogmengeschichte im Protestantismus, Stuttgart, Evangelisches
Verlagswerk, 1959.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44358509
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: ATAR ROTO PRESSE S.A.
Issue: i40182140
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Romagnoli Simone
Abstract: Maine de Biran, De l'aperception immédiate, Paris, Vrin, t. IV, p. 86.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44359384
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: ATAR ROTO PRESSE S.A.
Issue: i40182140
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Campagna Norbert
Abstract: P. Ricœur, La mémoire, l'histoire, l'oubli, Paris, Seuil, 2000, p. 589.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44359385
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: ATAR ROTO PRESSE S.A.
Issue: i40182141
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Célis Raphaël
Abstract: F. Nietzsche, Poésies complètes, Seuil, Paris, 1951, p. 47.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44359420
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR ROTO PRESSE S.A.
Issue: i40182150
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Ullern-Weite Isabelle
Abstract: C. Indermuhle
et T. Laus, cf. le psaume qumrânien qui aurait formé une conclusion au livre biblique du
Siracide, IIQPs XXI, in A. Dupont-Sommer et M. Philonenko (éds), Écrits intertesta-
mentaires, Paris, Gallimard, 1987, p. 318-322.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44359666
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR ROTO PRESSE S.A.
Issue: i40182161
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Clavien Christine
Abstract: H. Spencer, The Data of Ethics, London,
Williams and Norgate, 1879, Chap. II, § 7; Accessible en ligne : http://fair-use.org/
herbert-spencer/the-data-of-ethics
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44359998
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR ROTO PRESSE S.A.
Issue: i40182162
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Bühler Pierre
Abstract: Op. cit., p. 340.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360042
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182184
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Indermuhle Christian
Abstract: F. Jameson, Valences of the Dialectic, op. cit., p. 483, note 9.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360691
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182196
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Dermange François
Abstract: S. Freud, «Abrégé de psychanalyse» (1938 et publié en 1940), in: Œuvres
complètes, ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360942
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182196
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Dumont Aurore
Abstract: R. Ogien, La panique morale, op. cit., p. 31 sq.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360943
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182196
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Cimasoni Sabine
Abstract: P. Ricœur, Soi-même comme un autre, Paris, Seuil, 1990, p. 202.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360948
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182200
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Burri Yannick
Abstract: EC, p. 13.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44361055
Journal Title: Journal of Ritual Studies
Publisher: Department of Religious Studies, University of Pittsburgh
Issue: i40182539
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Jennings Theodore W.
Abstract: Ritual studies is a new discipline within the field of the study of religion. Liturgical theology is, in the West, a recent development within the Held of systematic theology. The article describes each and indicates ways in which they may contribute to the work of the other while retaining their separate identities. The development of methods for describing and analyzing ritual action may enable liturgical theology to construct its own analyses upon a more broadly phenomenological base. At the same time theology's insight into the history of liturgical action may enable ritual studies to overcome an excessively synchronie perspective and to attend to the normative character of ritual gesture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44368318
Journal Title: L'Espace géographique
Publisher: BELIN-RECLUS
Issue: i40183399
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Elissalde Bernard
Abstract: En opposition avec la conception linéaire et cumulative du temps dans la géographie classique, l'approche par l'analyse spatiale et les systèmes spatiaux propose de prendre en compte les temporalités multiples et discontinues qui animent l'espace géographique. Ce sont les durées variables des structures spatiales, les événements spatiaux, les phases de transition territoriale et les phénomènes de résilience qui contribuent au changement spatial. In contrast to the linear, cumulative concept of time in conventional geography, spatial analysis and a spatial systems approach offer a way of taking into account the multiple and discontinuous temporalities that punctuate geographical space. These are the variable durations of spatial structures, spatial events and phases of territorial transition, and phenomena of resilience that contribute to spatial change.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44381865
Journal Title: Clio
Publisher: Presses Universitaires du Mirail
Issue: i40183934
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): ALBORNOZ VASQUEZ María Eugenia
Abstract: Albornoz 2007.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44390692
Journal Title: Journal of Ritual Studies
Publisher: Department of Religious Studies, University of Pittsburgh
Issue: i40184404
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Migliore Sam
Abstract: Professional wrestling has taken North America by storm. It is recognized as a popular form of entertainment by people of various ages and backgrounds. In this paper I examine some of the metaphorical images and messages that combatants present to audiences through a series of ritual performances. I argue that professional wrestling is more than entertainment; it reflects, and sometimes helps create, a particular vision of North American values. It serves as moral commentary constructed, deconstructed, and reconstructed by a segment of the entertainment industry. I also argue that this commentary, at least in some cases, presents a strong political message. My aim is to unravel some of the ritual metaphors presented to the wrestling audience during the Persian Gulf Crisis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44398889
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184898
Date: 4 1, 1968
Author(s): Salman D. H.
Abstract: W. J. Devlin, Psychodynamics of Personality Development. Staten Island
(N.Y.), Alba House, 1965 ; 15×21,5, 324 pp., $ 4.95.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44406521
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184911
Date: 1 1, 1973
Author(s): Coutagne P.
Abstract: Rev. Sc. ph. th. 54 (1970) 701-703.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44406891
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184920
Date: 10 1, 1976
Author(s): Colette Jacques
Abstract: Emmanuel Lévinas, « Humanisme et An-archie », dans Rev. intern.
Phil., n
85-86 (1968) 323-337.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44407032
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184969
Date: 4 1, 1989
Author(s): de Courcelles Dominique
Abstract: La sagesse de l'amour, op. cit., p. 198.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44407933
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184972
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Varet Gilbert
Abstract: Karl-Otto Apel, Sur le problème d'une fondation rationnelle de
l'éthique à l'âge de la science, Presses Universitaires de Lille, 1987, 198 p., «Opuscule».
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44407987
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184981
Date: 4 1, 1992
Author(s): Jossua Jean-Pierre
Abstract: Jean Grosjean, La lueur des jours. Paris, Gallimard, 1991 ; 14 x 20, 132 p.,
68 F.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408133
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184986
Date: 7 1, 1993
Author(s): Jacques Francis
Abstract: P. Ricœur, Lectures 2, Paris, Seuil, 1992.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408223
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184996
Date: 4 1, 1996
Author(s): Arnould Jacques
Abstract: Psaume 8, 6.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408381
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184997
Date: 7 1, 1996
Author(s): Gy Pierre-Marie
Abstract: Sœur Paula Picard o.s.b., Dictionnaire des symboles liturgiques. Le
Léopard d'Or, 1995; 14 × 22, 288 p.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408394
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185012
Date: 7 1, 2000
Author(s): Greisch Jean
Abstract: Ibid. p. 53.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408635
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185016
Date: 7 1, 2001
Author(s): Quelquejeu Bernard
Abstract: P. Ricœur, art. cit. p. 158.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408690
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185019
Date: 6 1, 2002
Author(s): Colette Jacques
Abstract: O.C., XV, p. 275, citation de Genèse 32, 31-32.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408722
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185029
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): Guibal Francis
Abstract: E. Jüngel, Dieu, mys-
tère du monde, Cerf, p. 284
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408862
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185038
Date: 10 1, 1971
Author(s): Tardieu Michel
Abstract: Alger en 1968 (2 vol., 516 p.), la thèse de F. Décret a été
publiée par les Études august, en 1970 sous le titre: Aspects du manichéisme dans
l'Afrique romaine: les controverses de Fortunatus, Faustus et Felix avec saint Augustin
(16×25, 367 p.).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44409104
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185043
Date: 1 1, 1975
Author(s): Coutagne Paul
Abstract: Rev. Sc. ph. th. 54, 1970, p. 707
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44409216
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185058
Date: 1 1, 1970
Author(s): Jossua Jean-Pierre
Abstract: Foi Vivante n° 30 (1967) « Bonheur ou salut ».
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44409590
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185081
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): de Berranger Olivier
Abstract: H. de Lubac, «Mystique et Mystère», TO , p. 59.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44410029
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185087
Date: 4 1, 2001
Author(s): Rousse-Lacordaire Jérôme
Abstract: Théophile Bra, L'Évangile rouge. Texte établi, annoté et présenté par Jacques
de Caso. Avec la collab. de André Bigotte. Postface de Frank Paul Bowman. Paris,
Gallimard (coll. «Art et artistes»), 2000; 16 x 22 cm., 319 p., 155 F., ISBN 2-07-
075908-3.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44410154
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185091
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Falque Emmanuel
Abstract: SC n° 431, p. 301.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44410219
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185100
Date: 3 1, 2006
Author(s): Ganoczy Alexandre
Abstract: Le sentiment même de soi, Paris 2002, 259s.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44410400
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185102
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Quelquejeu Bernard
Abstract: Montaigne, Les Essais, Livre I, chap. 28. Paris, PUF (coll. « Quadrige »), 1965,
p. 188.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44410443
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185263
Date: 4 1, 1954
Author(s): Geiger L.-B.
Abstract: G. Siegmund, Der kranke Mensch. Medizinische Anthropologie. Fulda, Fuldaer
Verlagsanstalt, 1951 ; 19 × 12, 303 pp. DM 8.80.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44412886
Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung
Publisher: GESIS - Leibniz Institute for the Social Sciences
Issue: i40185962
Date: 1 1, 2017
Author(s): Centemeri Laura
Abstract: Jaspers 2011, 289
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44425364
Journal Title: Comparative Studies in Society and History
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i405056
Date: 10 1, 2004
Author(s): Woolard Patrick
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur (1988)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4497713
Journal Title: Medical Anthropology Quarterly
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i405180
Date: 9 1, 1998
Author(s): van DongenAbstract: In this article, I consider narratives told within a clinical setting. I argue that personnel in a day center for people with acquired brain damage are constantly involved in narrating about the disabled participants. The negotiation of who the participant is, and foremost will be, is in constant negotiation in regard to issues of hope. I further argue that hope is a meaning-making process and, as such, it has been defined as crucially connected to time. Hope has been said to enable a connection between the present and the future, because action taken in the present could bring about (positive) change in the future. However, I show that hope, in relation to narratives told about people with severe disabilities that are considered "incurable," must be understood within a realm of narrative foreclosure. Time seems to have lost the openness of its horizon for these people, and a narrative that tells of immediacy rather than chronology is created, resulting in hope being established within the present.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4499735
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i405284
Date: 10 1, 2003
Author(s): On-Cho Ng Sheldon
Abstract: On-Cho Ng, "The Epochal Concept of 'Early Modernity' and the Intellectual History of Late
Imperial China," Journal of World History 14:1 (2003), 37-61.
On-Cho Ng
1
37
14
Journal of World History
2003
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4502264
Journal Title: Proceedings of the Aristotelian Society
Publisher: Aristotelian Society
Issue: i408519
Date: 1 1, 1984
Author(s): Janaway Sebastian
Abstract: Op. cit., pp. 270 and 273.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4545186
Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i219659
Date: 9 1, 1961
Author(s): Turnell Henri
Abstract: Martin Turnell,
Modern Literature and Christian Faith, London, Darton,
Longman and Todd, 1961.
Turnell
Modern Literature and Christian Faith
1961
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/460559
Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i219705
Date: 1 1, 1972
Author(s): Sittler Roy
Abstract: Starting with Raglan's suggestion that Falstaff may be a "holy fool" and with Auden's belief that he is a comic symbol of charity, this essay explores the medieval tradition of wise fool, and especially Falstaff's always canny use of biblical allusion. His various jests, if read in relation to the political action of the main plot, reveal him as characterizing England's time of day and parodying the unchristian behavior of Hotspur, Henry, and Hal. By the time he dies mumbling Psalm xxiii to an uncomprehending Nell Quickly, there have accumulated many hints that he is, in fact, a candle to his age, a professional Fool with the heart of a faithful Lazarus, and destined to join Mowbray in Abraham's bosom. The merriment for which readers have found him lovable amid his masquerades of vice has its mysterious basis in his covertly Christian understanding of England's neo-Roman Caesars.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/461346
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i413107
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): NeutresAbstract: Julien Neutres, «Le cinéma fait-il l'histoire? Le cas de
La Dolce Vita», Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire, 83, juillet-
septembre 2004, p. 53-63.
Neutres
juillet
53
83
Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
2004
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4619191
Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i219804
Date: 10 1, 1962
Author(s): Williams Donald L.
Abstract: Reason as the medium of truth and freedom-though suppressed, the idea returns; it is presumed by our very participation in discourse. Its opponents say that only practices are real. But, as Milton and Habermas know, reason is itself a practice. Milton's "free and lawful debate at all times... of what opinion soever" recognizes interestedness, perspectivity, and struggle; Habermas's unconstrained communication is a neverachieved goal (an "ideal") regulating discursive practices here and now. Both writers recognize that meanings are cultural, social, and existential, that knowledge cannot be separated from interests; but they do not therefore stand outside praxis rhapsodizing about struggle and contingency. Instead, they seek to move toward social freedom and individual autonomy through reason-able communication-that ongoing search for unforced agreement which is our usual and best alternative to violence, our usual and best way to find meaning in the world, in our selves, and in one another.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/462687
Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i219840
Date: 10 1, 1976
Author(s): Williams Wai Chee
Abstract: Does a literary text remain the same object across time? This essay answers no and bases a defense of literature on that answer. Temporal extension, a phenomenon neglected in contemporary literary studies, makes some meanings unrecoverable and others newly possible. A text endures as a nonintegral survivor, an echo of what it was and of what it might become, its resonance changing with shifts in interpretive contexts. Since this resonance cannot be addressed by synchronic historicism, I propose an alternative, diachronic historicism, inspired especially by scientific theories on background noise, by Einstein's account of the relativity of simultaneity, and by critiques of the visual bias in Western epistemology. I try to theorize the text as a temporal continuum, thick with receding and incipient nuances, exercising the ears of readers in divergent ways and yielding its words to contrary claims. Literature thus encourages a semantic democracy that honors disagreement as a crucial fact of civil society.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/463483
Journal Title: New Literary History
Publisher: University of Virginia
Issue: i220193
Date: 10 1, 1969
Author(s): Janson F. E.
Abstract: Reproduced as Fig. 680 in H. W. Janson's History of Art (New York, 1969),
p. 452.
Janson
452
History of Art
1969
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/468342
Journal Title: Ethnohistory
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i220980
Date: 7 1, 1968
Author(s): Womack JoAnn
Abstract: The Mexican state's use of revolutionary history to invoke nationalistic sentiments nurtures a lively tradition of storytelling. Ironically, Buena Vista's storytellers criticize the inauthenticity of official representations of the past even as they draw on the images and ideals of "official" history to weave their own tales. This article argues that discourses of authenticity reinscribe historic distinctions between the community and the state in a language which evokes modern notions of purity and truth. The article highlights the political role of discourses of authenticity within the hegemonic structures of modern state power in Mexico.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/481863
Journal Title: The History Teacher
Publisher: Society for History Education
Issue: i221566
Date: 11 1, 1991
Author(s): Egan John E.
Abstract: Los Angeles Times, Feb. 20, 1991, p. E6
Feb. 20
6
Los Angeles Times
1991
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/494084
Journal Title: Journal of Near Eastern Studies
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i224007
Date: 4 1, 1976
Author(s): Lamberg-Karlovsky A. J.
Abstract: Hallo, "Royal Hymns and Mesopotamian
Unity," Journal of Cuneiform Studies 17 (1963): 112-
18.
10.2307/1359179
112
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/545469
Journal Title: Journal of the American Oriental Society
Publisher: American Oriental Society
Issue: i225333
Date: 12 1, 1986
Author(s): Feenberg Sheldon
Abstract: "Outline of the Genesis of Ideology in Modern Societies," in
The Political Forms of Modern Society, ed. John Thompson
[Cambridge: Polity Press, 1986], 181-236
Outline of the Genesis of Ideology in Modern Societies
181
The Political Forms of Modern Society
1986
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/604085
Journal Title: Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London
Publisher: The School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London
Issue: i225485
Date: 1 1, 1963
Author(s): von Rad John
Abstract: L'esprit humain selon C. Levi-Strauss', 30.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/614518
Journal Title: Ethos
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i201462
Date: 3 1, 1983
Author(s): Wilson Justus M.
Abstract: In 1992-94 during a period of communal hysteria about witches in Gusii, southwestern Kenya, three men involved themselves in the burning of their mothers, whom they accused of witchcraft. None of them was ever punished by the government or ostracized by his community in accordance with traditional custom. The community's response to such horrifying homicides is unusual, but it can be understood in terms of the dominant ideology of the patrilineage that gained great directive force (on the members) from the economic and political stress the country was going through at the time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/640584
Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i226403
Date: 2 1, 1990
Author(s): Wikan James M.
Abstract: This study among the Maneo (Seram, Indonesia) focuses on the pragmatics of kinship knowledge. Through an extended investigation of a stranger's arrival, I untangle processes of recognition from those guiding the determination of relatedness. Recognition establishes the continuity of experience; as such, verity is a measure of the adequacy as opposed to accuracy of observation: a fact that contributes to the possibility of misrecognition. By contrast, relatedness is contingent upon the expression and suppression of different, sometimes contradictory historical ties. [kinship, knowledge, pragmatism, Maneo, Indonesia]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/647504
Journal Title: American Anthropologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i227521
Date: 9 1, 1959
Author(s): Wright Marshall
Abstract: Schwimmer 1966:107
107
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/678658
Journal Title: American Anthropologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i227580
Date: 6 1, 1991
Author(s): Žižek Georgina
Abstract: This essay uses the work of psychoanalyst Melanie Klein to reopen the dialogue between anthropology and psychoanalysis. It argues that Kleinian concepts enhance an anthropology that seeks out both intersubjective and intrasubjective difference and disjuncture, and it demonstrates the uses of major Kleinian concepts for addressing classic anthropological problems, including gender classification and the analysis of persecution in witchcraft and sorcery systems. Applying Kleinian concepts to the analysis of cultural-historical process, it shows how splitting and denial may be central to the reproduction and hegemony of dominant cultural systems through time and addresses the question of how to theorize the relationship among dominant cultural systems, social differentiation, and individual subjectivities.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/683117
Journal Title: Law and History Review
Publisher: University of Illinois Press
Issue: i229855
Date: 7 1, 1846
Author(s): Brooks Santo L.
Abstract: Bibliothdque
Historique de la Ville de Paris
Bibliothdque Historique de la Ville de Paris
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/744017
Journal Title: Journal of the Royal Musical Association
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i231248
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Wardhaugh Michael
Abstract: Ronald Wardhaugh, An Introduction to Sociolinguistics (Oxford, 1994), 258-81 (p. 260).
Wardhaugh
258
An Introduction to Sociolinguistics
1994
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/766394
Journal Title: The Yale Law Journal
Publisher: The Yale Law Journal Company
Issue: i232679
Date: 7 1, 1953
Author(s): Aeschylus Martha
Abstract: Violence and the Word, supra note 7, at 1629
1629
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/796400
Journal Title: The Yale Law Journal
Publisher: The Yale Law Journal Company
Issue: i232710
Date: 5 1, 1989
Author(s): Milner Anthony V.
Abstract: Id. at 81.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/796817
Journal Title: The Yale Law Journal
Publisher: The Yale Law Journal Company
Issue: i232744
Date: 10 1, 1958
Author(s): Schleiermacher Rob
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, Religion, Atheism, and Faith, in ALASDAIR MACINTYRE & PAUL RICOEUR,
THE RELIGIOUS SIGNIFICANCE OF ATHEIsM 57 (1969).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/797142
Journal Title: The Yale Law Journal
Publisher: The Yale Law Journal Company
Issue: i232798
Date: 5 1, 1994
Author(s): Pinker George P.
Abstract: Steven Pinker, Editorial, The Game
of the Name, N.Y. TIMES, Apr. 5, 1994, at A21.
Pinker
Apr. 5
A21
N.Y. TIMES
1994
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/797532
Journal Title: Cambridge Opera Journal
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i233914
Date: 3 1, 1921
Author(s): Thovez Roger
Abstract: here 117-18
117
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/823749
Journal Title: Law & Social Inquiry
Publisher: American Bar Foundation
Issue: i234271
Date: 1 1, 1948
Author(s): Corner Stephen A.
Abstract: George W. Corner, ed., The Autobiography of Benjamin Rush: His "Travels Through
Life" together with his Commonplace Book for 1789-1813, at 236-37 (Princeton, N.J.: Princeton
University Press, 1948).
Corner
236
1948
The Autobiography of Benjamin Rush: His "Travels Through Life" together with his Commonplace Book for 1789-1813
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/828706
Journal Title: Journal of the American Musicological Society
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i234478
Date: 4 1, 1989
Author(s): Charlton Berthold
Abstract: E. T. A.
Hofmnann's Musical Writings: "Kreisleriana," "The Poet and the Composer,"Music Criticism, ed.
David Charlton, trans. Martyn Clarke (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1989),
160-61
Charlton
160
E. T. A. Hoffmann's Musical Writings: "Kreisleriana," "The Poet and the Composer,"Music Criticism
1989
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/832063
Journal Title: Francofonia
Publisher: Casa Editrice Leo S. Olschki
Issue: e90000928
Date: 4 1, 2014
Author(s): Plamondon Jean-François
Abstract: Les chercheurs ont d’ailleurs pointé ce malaise à plusieurs reprises en jouant avec les titres de leurs essais: Je est un autre (1980), P. Lejeune; Moi aussi (1986), P. Lejeune; Est-il Je? (2004), P. Gasparini; Je réel/Je fictif (2010), A. Schmitt; Je et moi (2011), P. Forest…
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/90000930
Journal Title: Transformation
Publisher: Sage Publications, Ltd.
Issue: e90008098
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): Farr Bernard C.
Abstract: Baker GP & Hacker PMS (2005) Wittgenstein: Understanding and Meaning (2nd ed.). Oxford, UK: Blackwell Publishing.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/90008100
Journal Title: Africa Development / Afrique et Développement
Publisher: CODESRIA
Issue: e90013865
Date: 1 1, 2016
Author(s): Aliana Serge Bernard Emmanuel
Abstract: This article focuses on the concepts of deliberative democracy and African palaver to conceptually (re) formulate and make intelligible the practices and performance of governance in Africa, with the aim of achieving a genuine normalization of societal behavior. Based on an analysis of the texts and a synthesis of texts analyzed, and drawing on the evidence at the present time, this is about establishing that the African palaver, often excluded from the cartography of official epistemology and relegated to the level of indigenous knowledge and practice, can define the conditions of possibility and feasibility for deliberative democracy, a political paradigm deemed dominant universal. However, the issue is that of cognitive decentering. How can one imagine that African conceptual categories, labeled as cheesy and reduced to the mere field of ethnological studies, can interact and correlate with modern recipes, with the idea of starting a process of governability, the realization of which is resilient democracy?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/90013868
Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Literatura
Publisher: Universidad de Chile
Issue: e90016177
Date: 11 1, 2017
Author(s): T. Leonidas Morales
Abstract: This article focuses on the last two novels by Adolfo Couve, La comedia del arte (1996) and Cuando pienso en mi falta de cabeza (La segunda comedia), posthumously published in 2000. The article proposes an allegorical reading of the transformation of the painter Camondo into a wax statue, the protagonist of both novels who later loses his mind. The article argues that the loss of the mind allegorizes a quotidian time, in tune with Couve's world, which spins and repeats itself, closed, without a horizon, a “beheaded” time (lacking future). This allows the possibility to build a coherent sense of a series of narrative forms (which include language, space, time, characters) and that, taken as a whole, show the particular way in which Couve's narrative is built and developed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/90016191
Journal Title: Revue de Musicologie
Publisher: Societe Francaise de Musicologie
Issue: i239150
Date: 1 1, 1965
Author(s): Aristote Jacques
Abstract: La Raison dans l'Histoire (Paris, 1965), p. 54.
54
La Raison dans l'Histoire
1965
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/947263
Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Education / Revue canadienne de l'éducation
Publisher: Routledge Falmer
Issue: canajeducrevucan.38.issue-2
Date: February 22, 2010
Author(s): Drazenovich George
Abstract: Si la visibilité des personnes LGBTQ dans la sphère publique, notamment dans les établissements d'enseignement, est certainement libératrice pour bien des élèves, il n'en demeure pas moins qu'on se demande si la représentation des identités LGBTQ dans les médias populaires sert à libérer les élèves ou si elles ne favorisent pas plutôt des stratégies subtiles de contrôle et de ghettoïsation. Le présent article soutient qu'en tant que stratégie d'éducation sexuelle, l'essentialisation de l'identité sexuelle dans le cadre de l'éducation sexuelle devrait être supplantée par des approches plus constructivistes laissant place à un maximum d'individualisation et d'expression de soi. Plutôt d'adopter certaines étiquettes et la marchandisation qui parfois en dérive dans les médias populaires, les éducateurs sensibles à l'allosexualité pourraient penser à certaines méthodes associées à la pédagogie spirituelle afin d'aider leurs élèves à repenser les questions relatives à la sexualité et à créer de nouvelles possibilités en matière d'identité et d'expression de soi.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/canajeducrevucan.38.2.07
Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Sociology / Cahiers canadiens de sociologie
Publisher: State University of New York Press
Issue: canajsocicahican.33.issue-1
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Titchkosky Tanya
Abstract: Résumé. Ce texte démontre le genre de questions qui se présentent aux études sur la condition des personnes handicapées informées par la sociologieen interrogent les interactions qui émergent autour des luttes pour «l'accès» dans un milieu de travail scolaire/ académique. Au cours de mes expériences dans un des plus grands édifices dans une des plus grandes universités au Canada, j'ai amassé des paroles quotidiennes qui justifient l'exclusion des personnes handicapées. J'ai rassemblé des narratifs représentants ce-qui-est possible-de-dire aujourd'hui sur la lutte pour l'accessibilité. En utilisant une approche sociologique interprétativiste, ce texte illustre la façon dont les significations de l'incapacité sont générés par un discours qui rends légitime la construction exclusive ainsi que les structures inaccessible de la vie universitaire. Dans ce texte, je démontre que l'accès n'est pas synonyme de justice mais, par contre, est un point de départ pour la réflexion critique où les relations sociaux entre corps et espace peut être considéré à nouveau. Ce texte contribue aux études sur la condition des personnes handicapées informées par la sociologie en analysant la façon dont la narration ordinaire et quotidienne de l'incapacité peut continuer à, en même temps que l'environnement physique change, agir comme pouvoir social qui reproduit le statuquo.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/canajsocicahican.33.1.37
Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Sociology / Cahiers canadiens de sociologie
Publisher: Springer Verlag
Issue: canajsocicahican.37.issue-3
Date: August 30, 2010
Author(s): Yeo Michael
Abstract: Résumé. L'un des principaux problèmes dans la controverse entourant le recensement détaillé concernait la relation entre la science et la politique. En analysant les arguments et les hypothèses sous-jacentes de quatre interventions influentes et exemplaires faites au nom de la science, cet article rend un constat normatif de cette relation. Il nuance les idéaux protecteurs de la science que les critiques ont invoqués et avance que de telles ressources conceptuelles sont nécessaires pour protéger la science d'un empiètement politique indu. Cependant, dans leur zèle à défendre les droits de la science, les critiques en ont réclamé plus que nécessaire, ce qui a occulté la dimension de la valeur des décisions politiques et n'a pas respecté le rôle de la politique en tant que point légitime de prise de décision sur les questions de valeur. Un constat normatif adéquat de la relation entre la science et la politique dans la politique gouvernementale doit non seulement protéger la science contre la politique, mais aussi la politique contre la science.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/canajsocicahican.37.3.295
Journal Title: Japanese Journal of Religious Studies
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Issue: japajrelistud.43.issue-2
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Ama Michihiro
Abstract: Kurata Hyakuzō’s
The Priest and His Disciples(Shukke to sono deshi, 1916) contributed to the unprecedented rise of religious literature during the Taishō period. The development of the Japanese religious world and the growing interests in religion by Japanese intellectuals during this period encouraged Kurata to humanize Shinran and paved the way forThe Priest and His Disciplesto become a bestseller. AlthoughThe Priest and His Disciplesis much studied, the role of fiction played in the work based on the life of a medieval Buddhist priest remains unexplored. This study first provides a background toThe Priest and His Disciplesand explains why it aroused such interest at the time. It then treats the image of Shinran at the intersection of history and fiction by referring to the study of Michel de Certeau and investigates how Kurata constructed an image of Shinran as the “other” inThe Priest and His Disciplesand placed it in history and in legends about Shinran.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/japajrelistud.43.2.253
Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Literatura
Publisher: Editorial Universitaria
Issue: revchilenalit.issue-90
Date: 9 1, 2011
Author(s): Cruz María José Barros
Abstract: This article analyzes “Rotología del poroto” by Pablo de Rokha. Our contention states that the bean works as a multiple and complex metaphor, allowing the poetic voice to refer to the nation, the working-class subjects and the political project of the revolution. Each of these categories takes place in a production context marked by the presence of the hacienda and the Cold War scenario. Additionally, the article analyzes how the poem, at the time of enunciation by the speaker, builds a counterpoint between the Chile of yesterday and today to articulate a social protest speech in favor of the working-class subjects of the national community.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/revchilenalit.90.55
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique (English Edition)
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: revfranscipoleng.64.issue-3
Date: February 18, 2010
Author(s): Raillard Sarah-Louise
Abstract: Nicolas Dodieris a sociologist at Inserm and the EHESS. He also works at the Institut Marcel-Mauss, within the Laboratoire interdisciplinaire d'études sur les réflexivités (LIER – The Interdisciplinary Laboratory for the Study of Reflexivities). He is currently interested in the issue of reparations in situations of suffering or injustice, as well as in the trial process. His publications include: (with Janine Barbot) “De la douleur au droit”, in Daniel Cefaï, Mathieu Berger, Carole Gayet-Viaud (eds),Du civil au politique(Brussels: Peter Lang, 2011), 289-322; “Penser (par) les catastrophes”, in Sandrine Revet, Julien Langumier (eds),Le gouvernement des catastrophes(Paris: Karthala, 2013), 251-76 (LIER, 10 rue Monsieur le Prince, 75006 Paris, ).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/revfranscipoleng.64.3.23
Journal Title: Ulbandus Review
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: ulbarevi.17
Date: August 31, 1997
Author(s): Mankovskaya Elizaveta
Abstract: ,Liisa H. Malkki
“News and culture: Transitory phenomena and the fieldwork tradition,”inAnthropological locations: Boundaries and grounds of a field science, ed.
andAkhil Gupta
(:James Ferguson
University of California Press,1997),91.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/ulbarevi.17.86
Journal Title: Ethics & the Environment
Publisher: The Guilford Press
Issue: ete.2010.15.issue-1
Date: January 25, 2003
Author(s): Crowley Thomas
Abstract: Evaluative terms are a crucial part of the environmental discourse. These terms, and the evaluative frameworks in which they are imbedded, serve as important guides to action. “Natural,” a term commonly used as a positive evaluation, is problematic because it can both justify unfair social relations and obscure the connections between humans and the rest of nature. “Sustainable,” another popular term, is extremely malleable, and is too often elaborated in frameworks that are neither socially nor ecologically responsible. The term “sustainable” is sometimes used in the framework of ecosystem health, but even this approach can fail to highlight the interconnectedness of social and ecological systems. The framework of ecosocial flourishing, introduced in this article, is better suited for highlighting the interconnected nature of the world and for drawing attention to questions of environmental justice. Evaluative terms (like “natural”) and frameworks (like “ecosocial flourishing”) are part of larger narratives that help people make sense of their interactions with, and emotional responses to, the non-human world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/ete.2010.15.1.69
Journal Title: Indiana Journal of Global Legal Studies
Publisher: U. Cal. Press
Issue: indjglolegstu.20.issue-2
Date: June 14, 1896
Author(s): Lindahl Hans
Abstract: This paper scrutinizes the fundamental assumption governing Gunther Teubner's theory of societal constitutionalism, namely that societal constitutions are ultimately about the regulation of inclusion and exclusion in global function systems. While endorsing the central role of inclusion/exclusion in constitutions, societal or otherwise, I argue that inclusion and exclusion are primordial categories of collective action, rather than functional categories. As a result, the self-closure which gives rise to a legal collective is spatial as much as it is temporal, and subjective no less than material. Inasmuch as legal orders must establish who ought to do what, where, and when, this entails, or so I argue, that any legal order we could imagine—including a global legal order such as cyberlaw—is necessarily bounded in space, time, content, and membership. This impinges directly on the inclusion/exclusion difference: that there can be no inclusion without exclusion entails, most fundamentally, that there can be no (il)legality without alegality, i.e. comportment that contests, sometimes radically, how a legal order draws the distinction between legality and illegality. In this fundamental sense, all legal orders have an outside—literally. Building on this insight, I suggest that the functional cosmopolitanism advocated by a theory of societal constitutionalism retains a residue of the logic of totalization it seeks to overcome. I conclude by exploring how a first-person plural theory of law both supports and transforms the insight that constitutions regulate the inclusion/exclusion difference by putting into place constitutive and limitative rules.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/indjglolegstu.20.2.697
Journal Title: jml: Journal of Modern Literature
Publisher: U of Chicago P
Issue: jmodelite.34.2.issue-2
Date: 01 1984
Author(s): Gaedtke Andrew
Abstract: Ruben Borg's
The Measureless Time of Joyce, Deleuze and Derridaargues that James Joyce'sFinnegans Wakemust be read as a singular attempt to represent the eccentric structure of post-human temporality. The book relocates theWakewithin a long history of philosophies of time as well as recent post-structuralist and information theory. Drawing upon the work of Gilles Deleuze and Jacques Derrida, Borg shows how Joyce's formal and narratological innovations enabled him to present a structure of time that does not obey the linear, humanistic progression of thebildungsromanbut instead manifests mechanical temporal economies of production and waste.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/jmodelite.34.2.192
Journal Title: Victorian Studies
Publisher: Harcourt
Issue: victorianstudies.55.issue-1
Date: April-June 13, 1920
Author(s): Schmitt Cannon
Abstract: Surface reading and similar developments in literary study advocate a turn away from symptomatic reading toward the superficial and self-evident. Arguing for the productivity of these approaches despite the contradictory language in which they have sometimes been formulated, this essay develops a related form of analysis: literal or denotative reading. Denotative reading does not reject deep or figurative interpretive possibilities. Rather, it insists they must be pursued in close connection with the facticity of fictional worlds, particularly in the case of maritime and other fiction deploying a specialized, technical lexicon. The essay treats Joseph Conrad's
Heart of Darkness(1899) as an exemplary instance of such fiction, contending that its precise articulation of tidal currents, nautical maneuvers, and ship design signals the key role of “restraint” not only in this novella but throughout Conrad's corpus.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/victorianstudies.55.1.7
Journal Title: Comparative Literature Studies
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: complitstudies.51.1.issue-1
Date: 4 1, 2014
Abstract: The combinatory and ludic polyculturalism, the parodic transmutation of meanings and values, the open, multilingual hybridization [which] are the devices responsible for the constant feeding and refeeding of this “baroquizing” almagest: the carnivalized transencyclopedia of the new barbarians, where everything can coexist with everything. They are the machinery that crushes the material of tradition, like the teeth of a tropical sugarmill, transforming stalks and husks into bagasse and juicy syrup.
145
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/complitstudies.51.1.0018
Journal Title: Comparative Literature Studies
Publisher: Verso
Issue: complitstudies.51.3.issue-3
Date: 9 1, 2013
Author(s): Damrosch David
Abstract: The world is a large and various place. Those wishing to chart new planetary cartographies are finding many languages to study beyond the French–German–English triad that long dominated Western comparative studies, and they are developing new methods appropriate to the expanded scope of our field. The tough linguistic and political analyses that Emily Apter rightly wishes comparatists to pursue will best be carried forward by widening our cultural and linguistic horizons, and by employing the full variety of critical and theoretical approaches that can be included in our cartographic toolboxes today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/complitstudies.51.3.0504
Journal Title: The F. Scott Fitzgerald Review
Publisher: Penguin
Issue: fscotfitzrevi.12.1.issue-1
Date: 10 1, 1989
Author(s): Salmose Niklas
Abstract: Fitzgerald's nostalgic style, though, set an example of how a nostalgic narrative could be structured, and in its aftermath it was used by such different authors as Evelyn Waugh in
Brideshead Revisited(1945), Anthony Burgess inA Clockwork Orange(1962) and the works of Kazuo Ishiguro. The author's own later work employs it as well. The technique of using the reader's textual memory in order to evoke a phenomenological nostalgic experience is very evident in both versions ofTender Is the Night(the 1934 original, and Malcolm Cowley's 1951 restructuring). In the 1951 version, the structure of the narrative closely follows the pattern of happiness and reflection. An early description of a Swiss valley communicates an awe of life and nature: “The sun swam out into a blue sea of sky and suddenly it was a Swiss valley at its best—pleasant sounds and murmurs and a good fresh smell of health and cheer” (9). In the transitory third book, “Casualties: 1925,” the tone has changed from appreciative to melancholic, as in this description of the small town of Amiens: “In the day-time one is deflated by such towns, with their little trolley cars of twenty years ago crossing the great grey cobble-stoned squares in front of the cathedral, and the very weather seems to have a quality of the past, faded weather like that of old photographs” (138). At the end of the novel both Dick and Nicole Diver become obsessed with youth and the past as well as with time: “for Nicole the years slipped away by clock and calendar and birthday, with the added poignance of her perishable beauty” (228). Toward the end of the novel, Nicole's last sight of Dick—“her eyes followed his figure until it became a dot and mingled with the other dots in the summer crowd” (386)—forces the reader to reflect in a reversed movement. Instead of vanishing like Dick, this image suggests a backward recollection of what was a Swiss valley “at its best.”
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/fscotfitzrevi.12.1.0067
Journal Title: Interdisciplinary Literary Studies
Publisher: Harper and Row
Issue: intelitestud.16.2.issue-2
Date: 9 1, 1971
Author(s): Eze Chielozona
Abstract: Even in her familial tone, and perhaps because of it, Jabbeh Wesley never forgets that the healing and meaning-making function of grief and mourning, as painful as grief and mourning are, is not to be avoided. Rather, as DuBose argues, based on the painful experience of his wife's miscarriage, as “‘child’ and ‘parent’ disappeared, our bodies and our society
dys-appeared, and our connections and hopes re-appeared” (374). Jabbeh Wesley attaches the reappearance of the hopes for the healing and reconstruction of her Liberian world to people's ability and willingness to truly experience the painful process of grief and, perhaps informed by that cathartic experience, allow compassion and empathy to guide their relationship to others.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/intelitestud.16.2.0282
Journal Title: Journal of Africana Religions
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jafrireli.1.1.issue-1
Date: 1 1, 2013
Abstract: Some time ago, Paul Ricoeur pointed out that “the symbol gives rise to thought.”
These diasporic religious communities enable us to find a new beginning for thought that has the possibility of avoiding the exclusivity and elitism that has too often accompanied the objective meaning of thought as a science of the rational. Not only these diasporic religions, but also the very conundrum of the continent of Africa as a whole, to echo Skinner at the beginning of our paper, may serve in the same manner as one of the most important ways that thought might be renewed—and the relationship of thought to action and performance.38
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jafrireli.1.1.0091
Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: Is SPEP the city of God? This would be going too far. Not even the theological turn in French Phenomenology would make this claim. Dick Howard already threw in a troubling question: “diversification that perhaps gives more breadth than depth?” he asked. And there are plenty more troubling questions. SPEP is now a big operation. It has committees and subcommittees, multiple simultaneous sessions, blind review. All these developments are signs, perhaps inevitable ones, of its success, but all have familiar downsides: bureaucratization, diversification for its own sake, what Habermas would call
Unübersichtlichkeit. This is what happens when outsiders become insiders, the antis become their own sort of establishment. You can't blame some of us for feeling nostalgic for our long-lost innocence, even though we all know—you don't have to be a philosopher of history to know this—that we can't go there. History has rendered a judgment, but Dick Howard said, “Historywilljudge.” That's one problem with history: It's always rendering judgments, but they are never final. You'd have to be at the end of history for that, and despite the claim of some philosophers, we aren't there yet. The slaughter bench of history looks very different today from the early 1960s, but it's still in some ways a slaughter bench. So how will the SPEP of the early twenty-first century look to the philosopher-historians of 2061—or is it 2062?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0102
Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: In short, it is exposure to the experientially inspired and theoretically casual atmosphere of those early SPEP meetings—where neglected topics and unorthodox modes of thinking and speaking were encouraged in an undisciplined way—to which I owe the most. Of course, SPEP grew up. It has experienced its share of embarrassing upheavals, as the heavy presence of its own versions of the social and political prejudices in the larger culture became too obvious to ignore. But it is now a major event—the four-day anchor for a week-long convention that takes over hotels, runs multiple concurrent sessions, fosters satellite groups, and often follows established lines of discussion. Some even call it the alternative APA. Yet I am sure that as long as lifeworld experience continues to trump whatever it is currently fashionable to say about it, grown-up SPEP will retain enough of its original vitality and intellectual generosity so that another generation of aging academics will have cause to repeat our present thank-yous in another fifty years.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0108
Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: Our plight, then, is not simply that we are all in the same boat, let alone on the same ocean. Yet we are still bound by the responsbility of inhabiting the same planet. What would it mean, then, to share the earth with all its inhabitants, not just in terms of occupying the same planet but also in terms of caring and looking after each other in the anachronistic sense of the word
dutyas plight? Can we risk pledging to solemnly avow our own investments in the very things we so self-rightousely protest against, not in order to stop protesting in the name of justice but, rather, in the hopes of turning the killing machine back against itself and taking another step toward “hunting down” and abolishing death penalities wherever they may be hiding, even in our own disowned fears and desires?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0118
Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: The point here is that whoever I am in terms of my personal identity and my capacity or incapacity to identify myself through sortal terms as a being in the world with others, I will have no doubt who is in pain or who will have the pain. Here, again, is a sense of “I” in which I can be aware of myself and refer to myself without it being necessary to employ any nonindexical or third-personal referents.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0222
Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: No doubt the rise of religion has not only posed a particular dilemma for critical theory but also provided a curious place to end this reflection. Having started my career doing philosophy of religion it is somewhat surprising to meet religion again as I turn to what surely must be at least a later phase of my career. I am reminded of Antonio's line from the Italian film
C'eravamo Tanto Amati, translated asWe All Loved Each Other So Much: “We thought we could change the world, but the world changed us.” “Philosophers only interpret the world, the point is to change it,” so said Marx. But in a curious way those who would change the world are changed by it.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0291
Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: In 1986, however, SPEP's present mission statement could not have been conceived. Many important issues and questions remained unrecognized or simply ignored. But the opening before the organization was now a “postmodern” one, and a hallmark of what is called postmodern thought is its requirement that it transform in the force of its own lack of founded stability. I believe that 1986 began a series of developments that is turning SPEP toward ways of thought and life that cannot be labeled postmodern. I doubt that this turning constitutes a midlife crisis for SPEP in its fiftieth year. But it does highlight for me the fact that I have been giving a historical narrative that has to do with continuities in the dissolution of continuities, that I have not been—if I may put it this way—postmodern in an orthodox manner, although I have refused to give an unambiguous meaning to the term that has played a major role in organizing this essay. I do not know whether this discussion is postmodern, post-postmodern, or modern, and I do not care. I do care, however, about the openings that SPEP has provided for collegiality, conflict, unresolved differences, transformations, and sites for presentations, discussion, and critique. In my experience, in its own organizational development and travail, it has occasioned changes in the lives of many philosophers (mine among them). I expect that its indeterminate opening now—its continuing transformations in the interaction of many differences—will continue to surprise, irritate, and change those of us who participate in its opportunities. I close with a sense of beginning and an acknowledgment of the strangeness of the continuity that a series of beginnings provides: continuity without substance, continuity coming to pass.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0299
Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: I want to conclude with one more argument from my own work. I have very often argued that philosophers of technology, regarding the expectations of society and their own traditions and habits, may come “too late” to technologies. They too often undertake their reflections
afterthe technologies are in place. Rather, I argue, they should reposition themselves at what I call the “R&D” position where technologies are taking developmental shape, in think tanks, in incubator facilities, in research centers. Only then can truly “new” and emerging technologies be fully philosophically engaged.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0321
Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: We at SPEP have never been modern and have made a good living off the critique of modernism and of its binary oppositions. But I think that the business as usual of Continental philosophy will have to be expanded to include a critique of the opposition of the human and the nonhuman, of
physisandtechne, and of “Continental philosophy” and “science.” For the truth is that we have been a party to the science wars. That is why I think that the work of Catherine Malabou is exactly the sort of work that SPEP and Continental philosophy generally will have to do in the future.
We have yet to admit how deeply inscribed the human is in the nonhuman and the technical. We have yet to appreciate that being-in-the-world is not only historicized, gendered, and incarnate but also both a neural and a galactic event, of both microscopic and macroscopic proportions. Can it be of no interest to “philosophy,” can there be nothing to “wonder” about, that our bodies are literally made of stardust? We have yet to realize how deeply interwoven is the imagination of speculative physics with the wonder of the philosophers. If the best we can do is to protect our turf by saying that science does not think, the sciences will steal our thunder, that is, our wonder, right out from under us. Science does think, and science wonders, because wonder is the piety of thought. That is a matter to which SPEP, and Continental philosophers generally, whether they have taken a theological turn or are running in the opposite direction, should give more thought.36
37
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0333
Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.28.3.issue-3
Date: 7 1, 2014
Author(s): Steinbock Anthony
Abstract: The articles collected here represent the richness and diversity of philosophical work presented at SPEP and thus serve to vindicate Steinbock's vision, expressed in his Co-director's Address, of SPEP as an organization that is grounded in a fundamental openness to experience that leads it to continually push against its own limits and thus to reimagine itself.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.28.3.0213
Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.28.3.issue-3
Date: 7 1, 2014
Author(s): Davidson Scott
Abstract: For, if phenomenology renounces its search for the absolute and for foundations, then it must give up seeing itself as a single and self-contained discourse. The minimal phenomenologist renounces monolinguism and is no longer the master of only one discourse. Instead, he or she must practice a mixed discourse. To do this is to practice diglossia, to become a code-switcher. In its ordinary sense, the practice of code-switching refers to the passage from one language or dialect to another one in the course of a single conversation, for instance, when the conversation moves from an informal to a formal setting or when it moves from one topic to another. But in the phenomenological context, this would involve the ability to shift from a phenomenological discourse to its “others,” whether they might be Freudian energetics, Deleuzian aspects, Badiouan events, and so on. This practice of translation or code-switching has perhaps always been the role of the phenomenologist, if it is accepted that phenomenological reflection does not begin from itself but is nourished by a life that precedes it and gives rise to it.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.28.3.0315
Journal Title: Philosophy & Rhetoric
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: philrhet.45.4.issue-4
Date: 12 1, 2012
Abstract: Adopting a hyperbolic perspective is also certainly a way to argue as well as a way to examine other “texts” because it is a trope and figure of thought that reveals those moments within discourse when one is attempting to transcend the bounds of reality because the extraordinary nature of a given situation or subject matter requires the use of an excessive prophetic voice or an ardent polemical exaggeration. As Mileur posits, “The work is a hyperbole, the intersection of other hyperboles, and the subject is, insofar as he can be written about at all, another hyperbole” (1990, 86). Rather than circumventing it, understanding hyperbole as the focus of thought and action can create significant moments of
inventioas well aselocutiofor the hyperbolist and critic alike. By approaching a particular text, a critical term, and even a piece of criticism itself from a hyperbolic perspective, one might (re)consider and (re)interpret these “texts” as a stretching of discursive limits that leads one toward a re-presentation of the extraordinary—an attempt to communicate the ineffable or transgress the expressible.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/philrhet.45.4.0406
Journal Title: Philosophy & Rhetoric
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: philrhet.46.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 1998
Abstract: Second, how do we account for the fact that the processes of public memory are both created by individual choices and nurtured in collective contexts? Many scholars have productively addressed this question by unpacking specific examples in which individuals or groups vie to control public memories. The critical framework I recommend offers a more systematic approach to this issue. To view representations of the past through the nested lenses of rhetoric, public memory, and the agential spiral is to focus on how human beings—individually and in groups—forge connections with people of other times through the medium of public agency. The agential spiral, derived from my reading of Ricoeur's “threefold mimesis,” aims to pinpoint three moments in the construction of narratives in which human action is represented and reinterpreted within a temporal structure. As a critical framework, the agential spiral helps us to view the creation of public memories at three key moments and to see the process as a coiling whole. Using this tool, we can better understand why certain memories persist in certain societies and how those memories powerfully connect people across time as well as space.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/philrhet.46.2.0182
Journal Title: Shaw
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: shaw.34.1.issue-1
Date: 10 1, 2014
Author(s): Wixson Christopher
Abstract: Chicagoan, 1 June 1934, 28. Courtesy of Quigley Publishing Company, a division of QP Media, Inc.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/shaw.34.1.0001
Journal Title: Shaw
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: shaw.34.1.issue-1
Date: 10 1, 2014
Author(s): Einsohn Howard Ira
Abstract: Moreover, for Shaw and Ricoeur, imaginative works of art have the power to project alternative and potentially redemptive ways of living together harmoniously, which in turn can substantially change hearts, alter beliefs, and reorient behavior in an empathetic direction that promotes vigilant concern for the other. Be they biblical narratives, plays for the stage, fictions for the page, or other forms of literary texts broadly construed, stories can portray freedom and fault reconciled in compassionate beings committed to advancing the common good. In this way, poetic making can and has instilled in us not only faith and hope but magnanimity as well. Thus, the answer to the provocative question Shaw poses at the beginning of his last major treatise,
Everybody's Political What's What?—“Is Human Nature Incurably Depraved?”
—is a resounding no: not just for him but for Ricoeur, too. Where there is faith, there is hope; and where there is hope, there is life. Life expectant.55
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/shaw.34.1.0133
Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Norton
Issue: style.34.issue-2
Date: January 16, 1972
Author(s): Matz Jesse
Abstract: Mauriceis a novel that waits for the future (for completion, publication, and audience) but also looks nostagically to the past. This strange temporal location reflects a temporality basic to Forster's narrative structures and sexual identity: like philosophers who presently ascribe to the “tenseless theory of time,” Forster dispels identity among a tenseless order of moments, in a narrative structure that seeks likewise to trade “becoming” for a better order. InMaurice, such tactics as iterative seriality, overdetermined prolepsis, nonephiphany, and other modes of “detensing” give form to a version of homosexuality that would escape “identity,” with unusual implications for moderist temporality and narratological criticism. Forster's modernist time is eccentric for its interest in logical order; and the narratological criticism which would attend to his “tenseless” homosexual form must remember that it is often the combination of subversion and order that encourages the best narratological advances.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.34.2.188
Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Johns Hopkins UP
Issue: style.34.issue-2
Date: 6 1, 1987
Author(s): Carrard Philippe
Abstract: In the current rhetoric and epistemology of historiography, the issue is no longer to know whether narrative provides a legitimate mode of knowledge. It is to determine whether historians use narrative, and—if they do not—what alternative modes of discourse they may be employing. The examination of a specific corpus: studies published about the period of the German occupation in France, shows that historians now rely on different types of textual organization. While they still use at times a straight, linear type of narrative, they increasingly turn to genres that are low in narrativity or even devoid of it. Eschewing narrative, however, seems reserved for academic historians; story-telling still prevails in “popular” history. Furthermore, the classification offered here depends on a narrow definition of “narrative”; a more inclusive definition would admit more texts under the category “narrative,” thus producing a different taxonomy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.34.2.243
Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: style.34.issue-2
Date: 6 1, 2000
Author(s): Richardson Brian
Abstract: Recent work in narrative theory comes from a variety of perspectives: traditional approaches, postmodern narratology, ideologically-oriented positions, and new interdisciplinary studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.34.2.319
Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Shocken
Issue: style.40.issue-4
Date: October 1, 1998
Author(s): Mikkonen Kai
Abstract: The recent pragmatic-contextual theory of fiction entails the possibility of changes between fact and fiction over the course of time. It is also perhaps commonplace to state that this process can be reversed—that fictional texts may cease to be fictional. The question of generic fiction-to-fact transition, however, is rarely confronted in the theory of fiction. This essay investigates the generic expectations attached to texts that make a full-scale transition from fiction to nonfiction difficult, both culturally and psychologically. “Fiction” is understood here in a limited, pragmatic sense of a work of fiction, a text known and categorized as fiction. The discussion is structured around five interrelated reasons that contribute to the difficulty: (1) the commonness of as-if structures in everyday life; (2) the generic combinations among literature, fiction, factual representation, and narrative; (3) the relative stability of the communal values and ways of checking facts that determine the categories of fiction and fact (the fact convention); (4) the popularity, in fiction, of metalepsis and the theme of transworld travel between different ontological spheres; (5) and the fictionalization of literature in the historical perspective.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.40.4.291
Journal Title: Utopian Studies
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: utopianstudies.23.1.issue-1
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: What is left unsaid in this article about the relationship between utopia and rhetoric could certainly fill the pages of many books. The range is especially rich when we turn to contemporary rhetorical theorists who specifically address society as a value to be combined with a remembered or imagined better place, as in Nedra Reynolds's
Geographies of Writingor bell hooks'sBelonging: A Culture of Place.
Just as constitutive rhetoric (that is, cumulative discourse that contributes to building the structure of human society) has been important in the works of theorists often cited by utopists as crucial to their work, so the utopian impulse continues to be inherent in the way rhetoricians see their subject. To persuade verbally or visually, we must have our own idea of what is socially better, and we must also be able to imagine what our audience believes to be better. The function of utopia, then, may be less philosophical and ideological at its root than it is linguistic in a pragmatic sense. As Kenneth Burke has written of human beings, we are “the symbol-making, symbol-using, symbol-misusing animal … rotten with perfection.”38
39
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/utopianstudies.23.1.0113
Journal Title: Utopian Studies
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: utopianstudies.23.2.issue-2
Date: 10 1, 2012
Abstract: Milan Kundera has described this kind of comedy as echoing a joyous, life-affirming laughter—“the serious laughter of angels expressing their joy of being.”
But that is not to suggest that there is anything divinely pious in this position: if Joyce is an angel, then he is one, like Stephen Dedalus, who will not blindly or uncritically serve.168
In commenting upon an earlier version of this article, Patrick Parrinder spoke of “the difficult relationship between Utopia and comedy.” This relationship is problematized by the fact that Utopia rarely seems able to laugh at itself or therefore to offer the liberating possibilities of comedy. Joyce's later writing, however, appears to advance the rare chance of a pluralist, ambiguous, and dynamic vision of Utopia: a Utopia that might be sustained into futurity—a Utopia that still has room for dreamers and for democrats. But is it still possible that we can call this realm of radical openness, this flux of possibilities, this resolutely material site, Utopian? And do we really need to? This kind of Utopia is not a category or a frame but a direction, a progress, a confluence of streams of consciousness and of unconsciousness, flowing into the river of life: not just a symbolic river but a real one too, the Liffey, the great Anna Livia Plurabelle herself. Or as Joyce put it, more succinctly (and more joyously), it is simply “Lff!”169
170
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/utopianstudies.23.2.0472
Journal Title: Utopian Studies
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: utopianstudies.25.1.issue-1
Date: 4 1, 2014
Abstract: It is in this sense that Utopia can be understood as
lying before us—in both senses of this confounding double phrase. Utopia resides in the past (beforein this instance means “behind us”) inasmuch as any reconsideration of Utopia in the present must inevitably begin with the past. But if the sources of Utopia in the present reside in the past, realization is in the future (beforein this instance means “ahead of us”). It is this double valence that links the articles that make up this special issue. Some deal with historical figures, literature, or places, while others take up analogous considerations that are closer to us now. However, in each case, the future is what is at issue: What shape will it take? How might the circumstances of its emergence be as propitious as possible? These key questions suffuse all of the articles that follow and are of the greatest urgency to all disciplines but in particular for architecture and urbanism, which are burdened with providing the stage upon which we play out the drama of our lives, individually and collectively.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/utopianstudies.25.1.0001
Journal Title: American Journal of Theology and Philosophy
Publisher: University of Illinois Press
Issue: amerjtheophil.35.2.issue-2
Date: 06 14, 2014
Author(s): Neville Robert Cummings
Abstract: Flush with the juices of adolescence, American philosophy declared independence from its European parentage in the work of Ralph Waldo Emerson and his generation. In 1837, Emerson addressed the Harvard Phi Beta Kappa Society on the occasion of its inaugural meeting for the year, which he called a "holiday." Emerson began: I greet you on the recommencement of our literary year. Our anniversary is one of hope, and, perhaps, not enough of labor. We do not meet for games of strength or skill, for the recitation of histories, tragedies, and odes, like the ancient Greeks; for parliaments of love and poesy, like the Troubadours; nor for the advancement of science, like our contemporaries in the British and European capitals. Thus far, our holiday has been simply a friendly sign of the survival of the love of letters amongst a people too busy to give letters any more. Perhaps the time is already come when it ought to be, and will be something else; when the sluggard intellect of this continent will look from under its iron lids and fill the postponed expectations of the world with something better than the expectations of mechanical skill. Our day of dependence, our long apprenticeship to the learning of other lands, draws to a close. The millions that around us are rushing into life, cannot always be fed on the sere remains of foreign harvests. Events, actions arise, that must be sung, that will sing themselves.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5406/amerjtheophil.35.2.0093
Journal Title: The Journal of American Folklore
Publisher: Harvard University Press
Issue: jamerfolk.124.492.issue-492
Date: 4 15, 2002
Author(s): Young Katharine
Abstract: Culture apprentices the body to its style. Gestures are the visible and kinaesthetic trace of that apprenticeship. They are specific to bodies, families, age grades, ethnic groups, social orders, and historical moments. They are folklore. The gestures I consider here are affiliated with talk. They conjure up in the gesture space in front of the body the iconic and metaphoric objects that talk mentions. In a gesture, Maurice Merleau-Ponty writes, "the intentional object is offered to the spectator at the same time as the gesture itself” ([1962] 1995:186). The gesturer's intentionality colonizes the spectator's, making it intersubjective: phenomenology's foundational perspective.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5406/jamerfolk.124.492.0055
Journal Title: The Polish Review
Publisher: University of Illinois Press
Issue: polishreview.58.1.issue-1
Date: 06 15, 2013
Author(s): Kosmala Kinga
Abstract: Olga Stanisławska's reportage book
Rondo de Gaulle'a[Charles de Gaulle Roundabout] was published in 2001 by Wydawnictwo Twój Styl in Warsaw. The book describes one woman's yearlong journey across Africa, from Casablanca, to Morocco, through Mauritania, Mali, Niger, Nigeria, Chad, Cameroon, Guinea, Congo, Zaire, and Uganda to Nairobi, Kenya. Stanisławska writes about the political, economic, and social issues of numerous African countries. She describes the painful issue of modern-day slavery in Mauritania, the dramatic fate of the Tuareg nation, and recent conflicts in Chad. The book's narrative sometimes merges with objectified, newspaper-style news, but more often ventures into a solipsistic memoir and a warm and sensual portrayal of the various communities the author visits. Stanisławska's actual journey across Africa is complemented by her emotional and literary voyage from the paradise-like plains of the Saharan desert countries to the hellish depths of the jungle in the Congo. She frames her journey, or rather "travels," from Karen Blixen'sOut of Africa(a self-created paradise) to Joseph Conrad'sHeart of Darkness(a self-imposed hell). Both of Stanisławska's journeys–physical and literary–provide a captivating platform for studying her narrative as an unending and deeply empathic encounter with another human being. InCharles de Gaulle Roundaboutthere is a visible tension between the author's need to tell a story and her anxiety that in doing so she may (mis)treat people and turn them into fictional characters, that is, make their stories finite.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5406/polishreview.58.1.0015
Journal Title: Science Fiction Studies
Publisher: Johns Hopkins UP
Issue: sciefictstud.41.issue-1
Date: 3 1, 1973
Abstract: This essay examines the role of agency and metatextuality in Élisabeth Vonarburg's B
ridgeCycle, comprised mainly of a group of short stories originally published between 1977 and 2002 and then revised in their definitive French versions for the collectionLe Jeu des coquilles de nautilus(2003). The cycle's main storyline involves the uncertain journey between parallel worlds by a series of recurring characters. Three intimately linked narrative components—each closely related to certain protocols of reading fiction and of particular interest to science fiction—form the theoretical and analytical bases of this study: the three recurring topoï of the protagonist-Voyager's travels; character agency that in part drives the sense of these realms and their occupation; and the dénouement which gives a certain meaning and closure to the spaces in their diverse manifestations and to the characters who pursue their quests in these spaces. Vonarburg's narratives place their protagonists in a situation precisely similar to that of the reader as she must negotiate the trans-world context, come to grips with her own relative lack of agency, and at the same time seek some level of control through knowledge. Suchmise en abymeallows the author, through the choice of dénouement, to comment on the manner in which this universe and the real one are imagined, represented, and decoded, and on how meaning is conveyed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5621/sciefictstud.41.1.0093
Journal Title: Portuguese Studies
Publisher: Harvard University Press
Issue: portstudies.27.1.issue-1
Date: January 27, 1960
Abstract: Este artigo se inicia refletindo sobre as várias maneiras que Gilberto Freyre usou o conceito-chave de mestiçagem e os campos culturais diferentes aos quais ele estendeu o seu uso — arquitetura, culinária, esporte, literatura, urbanismo, sociologia e até mesmo sexo. Chamando a atenção para os conceitos ou metáforas alternativas que se encontram na obra de Freyre — interpenetração, mistura, hibridismo, etc. — o artigo se volta para a discussão de uma metáfora que Freyre não usou, apesar de ter se tornado usual desde sua época: tradução cultural. Após uma breve história da idéia de tradução cultural, que inclui uma discussão de suas vantagens e desvantagens, o artigo termina com um estudo de caso de tradução tanto metafórica como cultural do conceito ocidental de liberdade para o Japão após a restauração imperial de 1868.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5699/portstudies.27.1.0070
Journal Title: Philip Roth Studies
Publisher: Vintage Books
Issue: philrothstud.7.issue-2
Date: Oct. 10, 2007
Author(s): Geraci Ginevra
Abstract: In a period of immanent crisis when comprehensive historical narratives are no longer possible—nor is utopia—dystopia, or rather uchronia tinged with dystopia, seems to be a rather effective means to construct a sweeping historical narration. Through the “timeless time” of uchronia in which—as Ricoeur explains in
Time and Narrative(vol. III)—“we are torn between two fleeing horizons” so that “our present sees itself in crisis,” Roth looks back at a counterfactual past in order to better investigate historical causality and to embrace past and present into a postmodern problematic perspective on the temporal dimension.http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5703/philrothstud.7.2.187
Journal Title: Future Anterior: Journal of Historic Preservation, History, Theory, and Criticism
Publisher: Relógio d'Água
Issue: futuante.10.issue-2
Date: 1 1, 1992
Abstract: The article focuses on the role of the “Survey on Regional Architecture in Portugal” in 1955 and its effects on contemporary Portuguese architecture. A photographic survey organizes and indexes a group of buildings with precise criteria, allowing a general panorama. In fact these built-environment, large-scale archives play an important role in heritage preservation. In the 1930s, an interesting phenomenon gathered architects who, although committed to the modern movement and enthusiasts of industrial progress, showed a growing interest in vernacular buildings and settlements. Some of these architects became photographers, attentive to a pre-industrial world that was endangered, to record timeless architecture and expose new aesthetic values. This interest generated several movements centered on an appreciation of regional architecture. Along with nostalgia, there stood out the feeling that there were still many lessons to be drawn from these threatened vernacular structures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/futuante.10.2.0083